{
    "2002": {
        "0625_w02_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "time 45 minutes instructions to candidates do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless this has already been done for you. there are for ty questions in this paper. answer all questions. for each question, there are four possible answers, a, b,c and d. choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet. information for candidates each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.international general certificate of secondary educationcambridge international examinations physics 0625/1 paper 1  multiple choice october/november session 2002 45 minutes additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet soft clean erasersoft pencil (type b or hb is recommended) this question paper consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  sp (at/kn) s24280/2 \u00a9cie 2002 [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/1/o/n/021the diagram shows a stopwatch, originally set at 00:00. when a car was first seen, the stop-start button was pressed. when the car passed the observer, the stopwatch showed 01:06. how long did the car take to reach the observer? a1.06 seconds b6 seconds c66 seconds d106 seconds 2a girl uses a rule to measure the length of a metal rod. because the end of the rule is damaged, she places one end of the rod at the 1 cm mark as shown. how long is the metal rod? a43 mm b46 mm c53 mm d56 mm1234567 cmmetal rod damaged end01 : 06stop-start button min s",
            "3": "3 0625/1/o/n/02 [turn over3a stone falls freely from the top of a cliff into the sea. air resistance may be ignored. which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls? 4a child is standing on the platform of a station, watching the trains. a train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3 s to pass the child. what is the length of the train?a10 m b30 m c90 m d270 m 5which of the following statements is correct?amass and weight are different names for the same thing. bthe mass of an object is different if the object is taken to the moon. cthe weight of a car is one of the forces acting on the car. dthe weight of a chocolate bar is measured in kilograms.acceleration time 00a acceleration time 00b acceleration time 00c acceleration time 00d",
            "4": "4 0625/1/o/n/026in an experiment, six identical bags of flour are balanced by a 9 kg mass. two bags of flour are removed. what mass will balance the remaining bags? a3 kg b6 kg c7 kg d9 kg 7the masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid are shown in the diagram. what is the density of the liquid? a g/c m3b g/c m3c g/c m3d g/c m3 8in which of these situations is no resultant force needed?aa car changing direction ba car moving in a straight line at a steady speed ca car slowing down da car speeding upcm3 50100 mass = 140  gcm3 50100 mass = 217  gliquidsix bags of flour9 kg mass pivot 217 52217 7077 527770",
            "5": "5 0625/1/o/n/02 [turn over9the diagram shows sections of four objects, all of equal mass. the position of the centre of mass of each object has been marked with a cross. which object is the most stable? 10a car accelerates along a road as it rises uphill. which energy changes are taking place? 11in a car engine, energy stored in the fuel is converted into thermal energy (heat energy) and energy of motion (kinetic energy). in which form is the energy stored in the fuel? achemical bgeothermal chydroelectric dnuclearabcd energy of motion energy of position (kinetic energy) (gravitational potential energy) a decreasing decreasing b decreasing increasing c increasing decreasing d increasing increasing",
            "6": "6 0625/1/o/n/0212the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer. if atmospheric pressure increases, what happens to level x and to level y? 13four flower vases have circular bases. they are filled with water so that they all have the same weight. which vase exerts the greatest pressure on its base? 14some gas in a sealed plastic bag is placed in a refrigerator to cool down. how do the gas molecules behave when this happens?athey move more quickly and are closer together. bthey move more quickly and are further apart. cthey move more slowly and are closer together. dthey move more slowly and are further apart.ab c dvacuum level x level y mercury level x level y a goes down goes down b goes down goes up c goes up goes down d goes up goes up",
            "7": "7 0625/1/o/n/02 [turn over15a measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly compressed. if the temperature of the gas does not change, what happens to the pressure of the gas? ait drops to zero. bit decreases, but not to zero. cit stays the same. dit increases. 16a mercury-in-glass thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures from 0 \u00b0c to 100 \u00b0c. why is mercury suitable?amercury expands when heated. bmercury has a boiling point below 100 \u00b0c.  cmercury has a melting point above 0 \u00b0c. dmercury is a poor conductor. 17a block of ice is heated at a constant rate. eventually the melted ice boils.the graph shows how the temperature changes with time. how many minutes did it take to melt all the ice? a4 b7 c11 d13 05 1 0 time  / minutes0100 temperature  / \u00b0cpiston gas piston pushed in",
            "8": "8 0625/1/o/n/0218how does thermal energy (heat energy) travel through the vacuum between the earth and the sun? aby conduction bby convection cby radiation dby radioactive decay 19two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid is put on top as shown. which statement is correct? aheat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap. bno heat passes through the sides of either cup. cthe bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup. dthe lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.benchhot watersmall air gapsmall spacerlid",
            "9": "9 0625/1/o/n/02 [turn over20waves are sent along two long springs x and y as shown. how should the wave motions in x and y be described? 21radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill. the waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be adiffracted. bradiated. creflected. drefracted.hillside to side  movement backward and forward movementdirection of wave travel direction ofwave travelspring x spring y spring x spring y a longitudinal longitudinal b longitudinal transverse c transverse longitudinal d transverse transverse",
            "10": "10 0625/1/o/n/0222one of the effects of passing a ray of white light through a prism is to split the light into colours. what is the name given to this effect? adeviation bdispersion creflection drefraction  23a student looks at the letter p on a piece of paper, and at its reflection in a mirror.what does he see? 24which of the following can be heard by the human ear?aa whistle emitting a wave of frequency 50 khz. ba bat emitting a wave of frequency of 30 khz. can insect emitting a wave of 300 hz. da vibrating spring emitting a wave of frequency of 5 hz.abcd mirror mirror paper paperprism coloured lightwhite light",
            "11": "11 0625/1/o/n/02 [turn over25two sound waves p and q are displayed on an oscilloscope with the same time-base and y-plate settings for each. which statement correctly describes the pitch and the loudness of the two sounds? ap has a higher pitch and is louder than q. bp has a higher pitch and is quieter than q. cp has a lower pitch and is louder than q. dp has a lower pitch and is quieter than q. 26a piece of magnetised steel is placed inside a coil of wire that has a large alternating current passing through it. the magnet is slowly moved out of the coil to position p . how has the steel changed when it reaches p? ait has become demagnetised. bthere has been no change. cit has become a stronger magnet. dthe poles have changed ends.12 v a.c.steel magnet moved out of coil ppq",
            "12": "12 0625/1/o/n/0227a permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron pq.  what happens? ap becomes a north pole. bp becomes a south pole. cpq does not become magnetised. dthe poles of the magnet are reversed. 28in which circuit does the ammeter read the total current through both resistors? aa acab d as np qpermanent magnetsoft-iron bar",
            "13": "13 0625/1/o/n/02 [turn over29the table shows the voltage and current ratings for four light bulbs. which bulb has the greatest resistance when used normally? 30in the following circuits, the resistors have the same value and the cells are identical.which circuit has the smallest resistance? 31the diagram shows a circuit, with four possible positions to place a switch. at which labelled point should a switch be placed so that lamp 1 remains on all the time and lamp 2 can be switched on and off?a dcblamp 1 lamp 2a b c dvoltage / v current / a a 2 0.5 b 3 0.2 c 61 2 d 12 1.0",
            "14": "14 0625/1/o/n/0232the device x in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much current flows. what is device x? aa fuse ba relay  ca resistor dan ammeter 33a classroom has four lights, each fitted with a lamp marked 240 v, 100 w.which circuit is most suitable for the classroom? 240  v240  v 240  v240  vab c dx",
            "15": "15 0625/1/o/n/02 [turn over34which graph shows the output of a simple a.c. generator? e.m.f. 0 timea e.m.f. 0 timeb e.m.f. 0 timec e.m.f. 0 timed",
            "16": "16 0625/1/o/n/0235when the electric current in wire xy is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the wire. if the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on the wire act? adownwards bupwards cto the left dto the right 36charged particles are emitted from the cathode of an oscilloscope. what is the name and charge of these particles?x ycurrent force magnet magnet n s name of particles charge of particles a electrons negative b electrons positive c protons negative d protons positive",
            "17": "17 0625/1/o/n/02 [turn over37diagram 1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two 100 \u03c9 resistors. diagram 1 one of the resistors is changed to 90 \u03c9, as shown in diagram 2. diagram 2 how does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done? ait becomes zero. bit decreases a little. cit increases a little. dit stays the same. 38a radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick aluminium. what does this show about the radiation? ait is alpha-particles. bit is beta-particles. cit is gamma-rays. dit is a mixture of alpha-particles and gamma-rays.radiationpaper thick aluminium all radiation passes throughno radiation passes through90 \u03c9 100  \u03c9v100  \u03c9 100  \u03c9v",
            "18": "18 0625/1/o/n/0239a sample of a radioactive isotope is decaying. which atoms will decay first?aimpossible to know, because radioactive decay is random bimpossible to know, unless the age of the material is known catoms near the centre, because they are surrounded by more atoms datoms near the surface, because the radiation can escape more easily 40which line in the table gives the numbers of protons and neutrons in the nuclide  7 3li? protons neutrons a 34 b 37 c 43 d 73",
            "19": "19 0625/1/o/n/02blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/1/o/n/02blank page"
        },
        "0625_w02_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "time 1 hour instructions to candidates write your name, centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. answer allquestions. write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. information for candidates the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).international general certificate of secondary education cambridge international examinations physics 0625/2 paper 2 october/november session 2002 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. this question paper consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. sp (cw/slc) s23398/3 \u00a9 cie 2002 [turn overcandidate centre number number candidate name  for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "2 0625/2/o/n/021a baggage handler at an airport lifts a suitcase from the ground and places it on a moving belt. the moving belt then transfers the suitcase to the owner. fig. 1.1 (a) (i) how does the total energy of the suitcase in b compare with its energy in a? tick one box. the total energy is greater in b than in a. the total energy is the same in b and in a.  the total energy is less in b than in a.  (ii) explain your answer. ... ... [2]moving belt a suitcase on ground b suitcase held   level with belt c suitcase moving  on beltfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "3": "3 0625/2/o/n/02(b) (i) how does the total energy of the suitcase in c compare with its energy in b? tick one box. the total energy is greater in c than in b. the total energy is the same in c and b. the total energy is less in c than in b. (ii) explain your answer. ... ... [2] 2here are five words relating to the transfer of thermal energy. conductor ,convection ,evaporation ,insulator ,radiation complete each of the following sentences by writing in the appropriate word from the list. (a)cooking pots often have a wooden handle, because wood is a good thermal .. . [1] (b)thermal energy reaches earth from the sun by means of ... [1] (c)copper is a good .. of thermal energy. [1] (d)the heating element is put at the bottom of an electric kettle, so that .. can rapidly transfer thermal energy throughout the water. [1]for examiner\u2019s use [turn over",
            "4": "4 0625/2/o/n/023fig. 3.1 shows a vertical wire through a horizontal piece of card. there is a current down the wire. fig. 3.1 fig. 3.2 shows the wire and card, viewed from above. fig. 3.2 the large circle is one of the magnetic field lines caused by the current. on fig. 3.2, (a)show the direction of the magnetic field, [1] (b)carefully draw three more magnetic field lines. [2]cardlarge current cardfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "5": "5 0625/2/o/n/024in an experiment to find the density of some oil, a student takes the following readings. fig. 4.1 fig. 4.2 (a) (i) calculate the mass of oil in the jug. mass of oil = g (ii) calculate the density of the oil. density of oil =.. (iii) how could the volume of the oil be more accurately measured than with the measuring jug? ... [7] (b)water is more dense than oil. on fig. 4.3, mark approximately where the surface of the same mass of water would be if it replaced the oil. [1] fig. 4.3100200300400500cm3level of oil100200300400500cm3 mass of jug containing 500 cm3 of oil = 1020 goil100200300400500cm3 mass of empty measuring jug = 610 gfor examiner\u2019s use [turn over",
            "6": "6 0625/2/o/n/025(a)what happens to the nucleus of an atom that undergoes radioactive decay? .. ..[1] (b)strontium-90 has a half-life of 28 years. how much time must pass before its activity falls to /onenumeratorcentered/fourdenominatorcenteredof its original value? time =  years   [2] 6(a)state what is meant by the melting point of a solid. the melting point is .. ..[2] (b)which two of the following quantities are the same? tick twoboxes. boiling point of iron freezing (solidifying) point of iron melting point of iron [1]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "7": "7 0625/2/o/n/02(c)some liquid in a beaker is kept boiling by heating the beaker, as shown in fig. 6.1. fig. 6.1 (i)on the axes of fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show what happens to the temperature of the liquid whilst it is boiling. fig. 6.2 (ii) on your graph, mark the boiling point of the liquid. [2]0timetemperature time at which  liquid starts  to boilboiling liquid heatfor examiner\u2019s use [turn over",
            "8": "8 0625/2/o/n/027a student holds a polythene rod in one hand and a dry cotton cloth in the other. fig. 7.1 (a)how can the student cause the rod to become charged with static electricity? ..[1] (b)how can the student detect that the rod has become charged? ..[1] (c)around the charged rod will be an electric field. what is meant by an electric field ? .. ..[2]polythene roddry cotton clothfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "9": "9 0625/2/o/n/02(d)the charged polythene rod is brought close to another charged polythene rod that has been suspended from a nylon thread, as shown in fig. 7.2. fig. 7.2 (i)what is seen to happen to the suspended rod? ... (ii) explain why this happens. ... [2] (e)if the student used a copper rod in (a), instead of the polythene rod, why would he not be able to charge the rod? .. ..[1]charged polythene rod (\u2013)charged polythene rod (\u2013)nylon threadfor examiner\u2019s use [turn over",
            "10": "10 0625/2/o/n/028fig. 8.1 shows an electric circuit containing a battery, a 4.7 \u03c9resistor, an ammeter and a variable resistor with a sliding contact. the variable resistor is set at zero. the ammeter and battery have such a small resistance that it can be ignored. fig. 8.1 (a)in what unit do we measure the e.m.f. of the battery? .[1] (b)write down the equation that links resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current. [2] (c)the ammeter shows that the current through the 4.7 \u03c9resistor is 0.5 a. calculate the p.d. across the resistor. p.d. across resistor =    [2] (d)the sliding contact of the variable resistor is moved from x to y . (i)what happens to the resistance of the variable resistor? ... (ii) what happens to the reading on the ammeter? ... [2] (e)the variable resistor is now adjusted to make the total resistance of the circuit 10.0 \u03c9. what is the resistance of the variable resistor now? resistance of variable resistor =  \u03c9[2]ax y 4.7\u03c9sliding contact variable resistorfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "11 0625/2/o/n/029a student wrote the following report about an experiment to measure the speed of sound in air. my friend and i went into a field a long way from any buildings and measured the distance across the field. my friend stood at one side of the field and i stood at the other. my friend banged two pieces of wood together, and as i saw him do this, i started a stopwatch. i stopped the stopwatch when i heard the sound. we obtained the following readings. distance across field  =  238 m time for sound to cross field  =  0.7 s (a)why was it necessary to be a long way from any buildings? ..[1] (b)why was it necessary to use such a large distance? ..[1] (c)suggest what the students could have used to measure the distance across the field. ..[1] (d)why was there a delay between the student seeing the pieces of wood come together and hearing the bang? .. ..[2] (e)use the readings to calculate the speed of sound. speed of sound = ..   [4] (f)suggest why it might have been a good idea for the students to repeat the experiment after they had exchanged positions. .. ..[1]for examiner\u2019s use [turn over",
            "12": "12 0625/2/o/n/0210 (a) the apparatus shown in fig. 10.1 can be used to indicate when there is a force on the copper rod. fig. 10.1 (i)suggest what is seen to happen to the hanging copper rod when the switch is closed. ... ... (ii) explain your answer. ... ... (iii) the cell is reversed and the switch closed. how does what is seen now differ from what you described in (a)(i) ? ... [4]snhanging copper rod mercuryfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "13": "13 0625/2/o/n/02(b)fig. 10.2 represents a d.c. motor. fig. 10.2 (i)in the boxes, label the various parts of the motor. one part has been labelled as an example. (ii) which part of the motor ensures that the coil keeps rotating when the battery is connected? ... (iii) the battery is reversed. what difference does this make to the motor? ... [5]nscoilfor examiner\u2019s use [turn over",
            "14": "14 0625/2/o/n/0211 (a) fig. 11.1 shows a reed relay in a simple circuit. fig. 11.1 explain why the iron reeds touch each other when switch s is closed. .. .. ..[4]slampflexible iron reedsfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "15": "15 0625/2/o/n/02(b)fig. 11.2 shows a simple temperature-operated alarm. fig. 11.2 when the thermistor is cold, its resistance is too high to allow sufficient current to operate the reed relay. the resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases. describe what happens to make the warning lamp light as the air temperature changes. .. .. .. .. ..[4]warning lamp thermistorfor examiner\u2019s use [turn over",
            "16": "16 0625/2/o/n/0212 (a) a narrow beam of red light strikes one face of a triangular prism at a, as shown in fig. 12.1. fig. 12.1 (i)on fig. 12.1, show the path of the beam until it reaches the screen. (ii) what name do we use to describe what happens to the beam at a? ... [4]a red lightscreenfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "17": "17 0625/2/o/n/02(b)the red light is replaced by a narrow beam of mixed red and violet light, as shown in fig. 12.2. fig. 12.2 complete fig. 12.2 to show what happens to the red and the violet light. [2] (c)the beam of red and violet light is replaced by a narrow beam of white light from the sun. state what is now seen on the screen. ..[1] (d)the rays from the sun also include infra-red rays. infra-red radiation can pass through glass. (i)on fig. 12.2, mark with the letter x the place where infra-red radiation from the sun might strike the screen after passing through the prism. (ii) why can infra-red not be seen on the screen? ... (iii) what could be used to detect the infra-red radiation? ... [3]red + violet lightscreenfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "18": "18 0625/2/o/n/02blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/2/o/n/02blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/2/o/n/02blank page"
        },
        "0625_w02_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "time 1 hour 15 minutes instructions to candidates write your name, centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. answer allquestions. write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. information for candidates the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.international general certificate of secondary education cambridge international examinations physics 0625/3 paper 3 october/november session 2002 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. this question paper consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. sp (nf/ks) s23400/3 \u00a9 cie 2002 [turn overcandidate centre number number candidate name  for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 5 1076 98 total",
            "2": "2 0625/3/o/n/021fig. 1.1 shows a smooth metal block about to slide down bd, along de and up ef . bd and de are friction-free surfaces, but ef is rough. the block stops at f . fig. 1.1 (a)on fig. 1.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the journey from b to f . label d, e and f on your graph. [3] fig. 1.2 (b)the mass of the block is 0.2 kg. the vertical height of b above a is 0.6 m. the acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2. (i)calculate the work done in lifting the block from a to b. work done =  (ii) at c, the block is moving at a speed of 2.5 m/s. calculate its kinetic energy at c. kinetic energy = ... [5]timespeed bab c d efmetal blockfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "3": "3 0625/3/o/n/02 [turn over(c)as it passes d, the speed of the block remains almost constant but the velocity changes. using the terms vector andscalar , explain this statement. .. .. ..[2] (d)f is the point where the kinetic energy of the block is zero. in terms of energy changes, explain why f is lower than b. .. .. .. ..[3]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "4": "4 0625/3/o/n/022a student is given the following apparatus in order to find the density of a piece of rock. 100 g mass metre rule suitable pivot on which the rule will balance measuring cylinder that is big enough for the piece of rock to fit inside cotton water the rock has a mass of approximately 90 g. (a) (i) in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of apparatus from this list set up so that the student is able to find the mass of the piece of rock. (ii) state the readings the student should take and how these would be used to find the mass of the rock. ... ... ... [5] (b)describe how the volume of the rock could be found. .. .. ..[2] (c)the mass of the rock is 88 g and its volume is 24 cm3. calculate the density of the rock. density of rock = .. [2]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "5": "5 0625/3/o/n/02 [turn over3a thermocouple is used to measure the temperature of the inner wall of a pottery kiln. (a)in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple that could be used for this purpose. [2] (b)describe (i)how you would read the temperature of the wall from the thermocouple, ... ... (ii) how the thermocouple works. ... ... ... [2] (c)state two conditions in which a thermocouple is very suitable for temperature measurement. .. ..[2]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "6": "6 0625/3/o/n/024(a)in an experiment to find the specific latent heat of water, the following readings were taken. m1mass of water at 100 \u00b0c, before boiling starts 120 g m2mass of water at 100 \u00b0c, after boiling finishes 80 g vvoltage across the heater 12 v icurrent through the heater 2.0 a ttime that the heater was supplying energy 3750 s (i)using the symbols above, write down the equation that must be used to find the value of the specific latent heat lof water. (ii) use the equation to calculate the specific latent heat of water from the readings above. specific latent heat = .. [4] (b)explain, in terms of the energy of molecules, why the specific latent heat of water has a high value. .. .. ..[2]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "7": "7 0625/3/o/n/02 [turn over5(a)fig. 5.1 shows the air pressure variation along a sound wave. fig. 5.1 (i)on ab in fig. 5.1, mark one point of compression with a dot and the letter c and the next point of rarefaction with a dot and the letter r. (ii) in terms of the wavelength, what is the distance along the wave between a compression and the next rarefaction? ... [3] (b)a sound wave travels through air at a speed of 340 m/s. calculate the frequency of a sound wave of wavelength 1.3 m. frequency = . [2]air pressure below normalnormal distance along waveababove normalfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "8": "8 0625/3/o/n/026(a)fig. 6.1 shows the results of an experiment to find the critical angle for light in a semi- circular glass block. fig. 6.1 the ray of light po hits the glass at o at an angle of incidence of  0\u00b0. q is the centre of the straight side of the block. (i)measure the critical angle of the glass from fig. 6.1. critical angle = . (ii) explain what is meant by the critical angle of the light in the glass. ... ... ... [3]air glassq o pfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "9": "9 0625/3/o/n/02 [turn over(b)fig. 6.2 shows another ray passing through the same block. fig. 6.2 the speed of the light between w and q is 3.0 \u00d7108m/s. the speed of the light between q and y is 2.0 \u00d7108m/s. (i)state the speed of the light between y and z. speed = .. (ii) write down an expression, in terms of the speeds of the light, that may be used to find the refractive index of the glass. determine the value of the refractive index. refractive index =  (iii) explain why there is no change of direction of ray qy as it passes out of the glass. ... (iv) what happens to the wavelength of the light as it passes out of the glass? ... [5]qw y zfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "10": "10 0625/3/o/n/027fig. 7.1 shows an arrangement that could be used for making an electromagnet or a permanent magnet. fig. 7.1 two bars of the same size are also available, one made of iron and the other of steel. (a) (i) state which bar should be used to make a permanent magnet. ... (ii) describe how the apparatus would be used to make a permanent magnet. ... ... ... (iii) suggest one reason why the circuit contains an ammeter and a variable resistor. ... ... [3]a12v d.c. supply turns of thick copper wire cardboard tubefor examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "11 0625/3/o/n/02 [turn over(b)during the making of a permanent magnet, the ammeter reads a steady current of 4.0 a throughout the 5.0 s that the current is switched on. the voltage of the supply is 12 v. calculate (i)the total circuit resistance, resistance =  (ii) the power of the supply, power = . (iii) the energy supplied during the 5.0 s. energy = . [6] (c)the potential difference across the variable resistor is 7.0 v and that across the ammeter is zero. (i)calculate the potential difference across the magnetising coil. potential difference = . (ii) state the general principle used in making this calculation. ... ... [3]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "12": "12 0625/3/o/n/028fig. 8.1 shows a long straight wire between the poles of a permanent magnet. it is connected through a switch to a battery so that, when the switch is closed, there is a steady current in the wire. fig. 8.1 (a)state the direction of the magnetic field between the poles of the magnet. ..[1] (b)the wire is free to move. the current is switched on so that its direction is into the page. (i)state the direction of movement of the wire. ... ... (ii) explain how you reached your answer to (b)(i) . ... ... ... [4] (c)this experiment is the basis of an electric motor. describe two changes to the arrangement shown in fig. 8.1 that would enable continuous rotation to take place. change 1 .. .. change 2 .. ..[2]n s wire in a direction at right angles to the pagefor examiner\u2019s use",
            "13": "13 0625/3/o/n/02 [turn over9fig. 9.1 shows a beam of electrons, two charged plates and a screen. these components are inside an electron tube, the outline of which is not shown. fig. 9.1 the beam of electrons hits the screen at the point p . (a)on fig. 9.1, (i)complete the path of the electron beam, (ii) mark the charges on both plates, (iii) mark with an arrow and the letter c the direction of the conventional current in the electron beam. [4] (b)in this electron tube, the electrons are produced at x and are accelerated towards y . in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the components needed to produce and accelerate the electrons. [4]xyp screencharged plate charged platebeam of electronsfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "14": "14 0625/3/o/n/0210fig. 10.1 is part of the decay curve for a sample of a \u03b2-emitting isotope. fig. 10.1 (a)use fig. 10.1 to find the half-life of the isotope. half-life = .. [1] (b)complete fig. 10.1 as far as time = 20 days, by working out the values of a number of points and plotting them. show your working. [2] (c)the decay product of the \u03b2-emitting isotope is not radioactive. explain why the sample of the radioactive isotope will be safer after 20 days than after 1day. support your answer by reference to the graph. .. ..[1] (d)the isotope used for this decay curve may be represented by the symbol a zx. write down an equation, by filling in the gaps below, to show the \u03b2-decay of this isotope to a decay product that has the symbol y . a zx\u2192 +y [2]100 75 50 25 0 05 1 0 15 20% activity time/ daysfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "15": "15 0625/3/o/n/02blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/3/o/n/02blank page"
        },
        "0625_w02_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this question paper consists of 7 printed pages, 1 blank page and an inserted answer booklet.sp (at/slc) s32042/2 \u00a9 cie 2002 [turn overinternational general certificate of secondary education cambridge international examinations physics 0625/5 paper 5  practical test october/november session 2002 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the enclosed answer booklet. additional materials: as listed in instructions to supervisors time 1 hour 15 minutes instructions to candidates write your name, centre number and candidate number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet. answer allquestions. write your answers in the spaces provided in the answer booklet. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made. these observations and any arithmetical working of the answers from them should be written in the answer booklet; scrap paper should notbe used. an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is notrequired but you should record any precautions you take, and it must be clear (by diagrams or otherwise) how the readings were obtained. the theory of the experiments is notrequired. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet. information for candidates graph paper is provided in the enclosed answer booklet. additional sheets of graph paper should be used only if it is necessary to do so.",
            "2": "2 0625/5/o/n/02question 1 in this experiment, you are to determine the mass of a metre rule. record all of your observations and answers on page 3 of the answer booklet. carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a)place the 50 g mass on the metre rule so that its centre is directly above the 10.0 cm mark. (b)place the rule on the pivot so that the rule is a near as possible to being balanced horizontally.  (c)measure and record the distance xfrom the centre of the 50 g mass to the pivot and the distance yfrom the centre of the rule to the pivot. (d)calculate the mass mof the metre rule, using the equation ,where k= 50 g. (e)describe, with the aid of a diagram, how you judged that the centre of the 50 g mass was directly above the 10.0 cm mark. (f)repeat the steps (a)to(c), using the 200 g mass. (g)calculate and record the new value for m, using the equation ,where q= 200 g. (h)calculate and record the average of the two values for m. show your working.mqx y=mkx y=10.0 cm markmetre rule50g mass pivotx y",
            "3": "3 0625/5/o/n/02 [turn overquestion 2 in this experiment, you are to investigate the rate of cooling of a thermometer bulb. record all of your observations and readings on pages 4 and 5 of the answer booklet. a thermometer is in a beaker of hot water. carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1 and fig. 2.2. fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2 (a)when the reading on the thermometer is steady, record the temperature reading. this will be the temperature \u03b8at time t= 0. record this value in the table. (b)as soon as possible after taking this reading, remove the thermometer from the water and start the stopclock at the same time. (c)as the thermometer cools, record the thermometer reading every 30 s for 300 s.  at time t= 300 s, do not stop the stopclock. (d)at time t= 330 s, record the thermometer reading and immediately put the thermometer back in the hot water.  (e)as the thermometer heats up, record the time and thermometer reading every 30 s for 120 s. (f)on the graph grid, plot temperature \u03b8/\u00b0c (y-axis) against time t/s (x-axis) for times up to 300 s. draw the best fit curve. (g)suggest a conclusion about the rate of cooling of the thermometer bulb compared with the rate of heating. justify your conclusion by reference to your table of readings.hot waterthermometer thermometer",
            "4": "4 0625/5/o/n/02question 3 in this experiment, you are to measure the currents through lamps in a circuit. record all of your observations and answers on pages 6 and 7 of the answer booklet. carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1 (a)the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 is set up for you. switch on.  record v, the potential difference across the lamps. record i1, the current through lamp 1. switch off. (b)rearrange the circuit so that the ammeter is connected in series with lamp 2. switch on. record i2, the current through lamp 2.  switch off. (c)calculate i1/i2. (d)the resistance of each lamp can be calculated using the equation r = v/ i. calculate r1, the resistance of lamp 1, and r2, the resistance of lamp 2. (e)calculate r2/r1. (f)within the limits of experimental error, compare the values of i1/i2andr2/r1.alamp 1 lamp 2power sourcev",
            "5": "5 0625/5/o/n/02 [turn over(g)fig. 3.2 shows an electrical circuit. redraw the circuit as a circuit diagram, using standard symbols. fig. 3.2vcell fixed resistor voltmetervariable resistor",
            "6": "6 0625/5/o/n/02question 4 in this experiment, you are to determine two values of magnification produced by a converging lens. record all of your observations and readings on page 8 of the answer booklet. you have been given an illuminated object, a converging lens mounted in a holder, a screen, and a metre rule. the illuminated object and the screen have been fixed to the bench; do not try to change their positions at any time . carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 (a)place the lens between the illuminated object and the screen and about 5 cm away from the illuminated object. (b)move the lens slowly towards the screen, making sure that the lens is always in line with the illuminated object and the screen. (c)when you see a magnified image of the illuminated object on the screen, move the lens very slowly backwards and forwards until the image is sharply focused. (d)using the metre rule, measure and record u, the distance from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens. (e)measure and record v, the distance from the centre of the lens to the screen. (f) without disturbing the apparatus , measure and record h, the height of the image as shown on fig. 4.2. fig. 4.2hscreen imageilluminated objectlens screenuv",
            "7": "7 0625/5/o/n/02(g)once again, slowly move the lens towards the screen until you see a smaller image of the illuminated object on the screen. adjust the position of the lens until the image is sharply focused. (h)using the metre rule, measure and record x, the distance from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens as shown on fig. 4.3. fig. 4.3 fig. 4.4 (i)measure and record y, the distance from the centre of the lens to the screen. (j) without disturbing the apparatus , measure and record h, the height of the image as shown on fig. 4.4. (k)calculate the ratios u/v, y/x, h/h. (l)state and briefly explain one precaution you took in order to obtain reliable measurements.hscreen imageilluminated objectlens screenxy",
            "8": "8 0625/5/o/n/02blank page",
            "9": "this answer booklet consists of 7 printed pages and 1 blank page. sp (at/slc) s32042/2 \u00a9 cie 2002 [turn overinternational general certificate of secondary education cambridge international examinations physics 0625/5 paper 5  practical test answer booklet october/november session 2002 1 hour 15 minutes time 1 hour 15 minutes instructions to candidates write your name, centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. answer allquestions. write your answers in the spaces provided in this answer booklet.candidate centre number number candidate name  for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "10": "2 0625/5/ans bk/o/n/02blank page",
            "11": "3 0625/5/ans bk/o/n/02 [turn over1 (c)x= . y= . [4] (d)calculation of m m=  [2] (e)how you judged that the centre of the 50 g mass was directly above the 10.0 cm mark. .. .. ..[2] (f)x= . y= . (g)calculation of m m=  [3] (h)calculation of the average of the two values of m averagemvalue =. [4]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "12": "4 0625/5/ans bk/o/n/022 (a)\u2013(e) [4] (g)conclusion .. ..[1] justification .. .. .. ..[2]for examiner\u2019s use time t/s temperature \u03b8/\u00b0c 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 360 390 420 450",
            "13": "5 0625/5/ans bk/o/n/02 [turn over(f) [8]02 0 4 0 6 08 0 1 0 0 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 time /sfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "14": "6 0625/5/ans bk/o/n/023(a)v=  i1=  (b) i2= . [3] (c)calculation of i1/i2 i1/i2= . [3] (d)calculation of r1 r1= ... calculation of r2 r2= ... [2] (e)calculation of r2/r1 r2/r1= .. [2] (f)within the limits of experimental error, the values of i1/i2andr2/r1are ..[2]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "15": "7 0625/5/ans bk/o/n/02 [turn over(g)circuit diagram [3]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "16": "8 0625/5/ans bk/o/n/02for examiner\u2019s use4 (d)record of u... (e)record of v... (f)record of h... [5] (h)record of x... (i)record of y... (j)record of h... [3] (k)calculation of u/v u/v= .. calculation of y/x y/x= .. calculation of h/h h/h= . [5] (l)precaution .. .. ..[2]"
        },
        "0625_w02_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this question paper consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. sp (nf/slc) s37969/1 \u00a9 cie 2002 [turn overinternational general certificate of secondary education cambridge international examinations physics 0625/6 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november session 2002 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials required. time 1 hour instructions to candidates write your name, centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. answer all questions. write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. information for candidates the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.candidate centre number number candidate name  for examiner\u2019s use 321 4 total5",
            "2": "2 0625/6/o/n/021in an experiment to determine the volume of glass beads, a student used two different methods. method 1 the student measured the combined diameters of some beads and then calculated thevolume of one bead. the end view of the apparatus used is shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2 shows the side view of the same apparatus, drawn actual size. fig. 1.2 (a) (i) on fig. 1.2, use your rule to measure the distance x, in cm. ... (ii) calculate d, the average diameter in cm of one glass bead. show your working. d= ... cm (iii) calculate v, the volume of one glass bead using the equation v=\u03c0d 3___.6 v= .[6]xbead wooden blockfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "3": "3 0625/6/o/n/02 [turn overmethod 2 the student used a displacement method to determine the volume of a glass bead. fig. 1.3 and fig. 1.4 show how this was done. fig. 1.3 fig. 1.4 (b) (i) write down the values of the readings taken. ... ... (ii) calculate the volume of 225 glass beads. volume = . (iii) calculate v, the average volume of one glass bead. v= . [3] (c)suggest which of the two methods will give the more accurate result for the volume of a glass bead. give a reason for your answer. .. [1]cm3100 80 6040 20measuring cylinder watercm3100 806040 20measuring cylinder water 225 glass beadsfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "4": "4 0625/6/o/n/022the igcse class is investigating electromagnets. the electromagnets are made by wrapping insulated wire around a soft-iron core. the wire is connected to a power pack. fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement. fig. 2.1 two students studied how the number of paper clips that an electromagnet can hold up depends on the potential difference across the coil. (a)complete fig. 2.1 by adding a voltmeter, connected to measure the p.d. across the coil. [2] (b)student a used the control on the power pack to obtain set values of p.d. and recordedthemaximum number of paper clips that the electromagnet could hold at each p.d. the results are shown below. student apower pack soft-iron core paper clipfor examiner\u2019s use p.d./v number of paper clips 00 20416283 10 412 5",
            "5": "5 0625/6/o/n/02 [turn overstudent b connected a variable resistor into the circuit and used it to change the p.d. across the coil. she recorded the minimum p.d. required to hold 1 paper clip, then 2 paper clips, etc. the results are shown below. student b  (i)which set of results gives the more accurate indication of the strength of theelectromagnet at different potential differences? tick the correct box. student a student b (ii) justify your answer to part (b)(i) . ... ..[2] (c)draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor. [1] (d)on the diagram below, show the position of the pointer on the voltmeter when the voltmeter reading is 8.7 v. [1]v 012345678 9 10for examiner\u2019s use p.d./v number of paper clips 00 2.2 1 4.5 26.6 38.7 4 11.0 5",
            "6": "6 0625/6/o/n/023a student carried out a \u2018principle of moments\u2019 experiment using a metre rule placed on a pivot at the 50.0 cm mark. the aim was to determine an unknown weight. the arrangementof the apparatus is shown in fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1 the student placed the unknown weight wat a convenient distance afrom the pivot. he found b, the distance from the pivot that the 5.0 n weight must be placed so that the rule balanced horizontally. he then repeated the experiment using different values of a. the readings are shown in the table below.50 cm mark5.0 n weight metre ruleunknownweight w pivotabfor examiner\u2019s use a/m b/m 0.100 0.122 0.200 0.2380.250 0.3020.300 0.3600.350 0.4350.400 0.470",
            "7": "7 0625/6/o/n/02 [turn over(a) (i) plot the graph of b/m ( y-axis) against a/m ( x-axis). (ii) draw the best-fit straight line. [6] (iii) determine g, the gradient of the line. g=  (iv) determine w, the unknown weight, using the equation w=xg where x= 5.0 n. w= for examiner\u2019s use",
            "8": "8 0625/6/o/n/02(v) explain why the student could not choose distance ato have a value of 0.450 m. ... ...[5] (b)another student, who was performing this experiment, found that the unloaded metre rule balanced on the pivot at the 50.3 cm mark, instead of the 50.0 cm mark.suggest what the student should do to obtain the correct value for wfrom the experiment. .. ..[1] 4the igcse class was performing a heating experiment. the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. the aim was to determine the rate at which the  temperature of 200 cm 3of water increased when heated with an electric immersion heater. fig. 4.1cable to power supply electricimmersionheaterthermometer beaker waterfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "9": "9 0625/6/o/n/02 [turn overthe water was heated from room temperature up to 60 \u00b0c. the teacher measured the power of the immersion heater and calculated (correctly) the time required to raise the  temperatureof 200 cm 3of water from 21 \u00b0c to 60 \u00b0c. the students found that the water must be heated for longer than the calculated time. (a) (i) what is the most likely cause of the longer time recorded? tick the appropriate box. an inaccurate thermometererrors in reading the stopwatchheat loss during the experiment (ii) suggest twoprecautions that could be taken to obtain more accurate results. [3] (b)what is the reading on the thermometer shown in fig. 4.2? reading =  [1] fig. 4.2 (c)the power pof the immersion heater is calculated using the equation p=v i calculate the power of an immersion heater in which the current is 5.5 a when the p.d. across it is 12.0 v. .. ..[2]for examiner\u2019s use \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c",
            "10": "10 0625/6/o/n/025a student carried out a lens experiment to investigate the magnification of an image. the apparatus is shown in fig. 5.1. fig. 5.1 the object is a triangular hole in a screen. fig. 5.2 shows this, actual size. fig. 5.2 the student set the distance uat 35.0 cm and moved the screen to obtain a sharply focused image. the image distance vwas 72.3 cm. (a) (i) calculate m, the magnification, using the equation m=v/u. m= .2.0 cm1.5 cmilluminated objectlens screenuvfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "11 0625/6/o/n/02(ii) draw a diagram of the image, actual size, for a magnification m= 2.0. [5] (b)the image distance vis the distance from the screen to the centre of the lens. explain briefly how you would position a metre rule to obtain an accurate value for v. y ou may draw a diagram. .. [1]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "12": "12 0625/6/o/n/02blank page"
        }
    },
    "2003": {
        "0625_s03_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. sp (slc/kn) s45991/2 \u00a9 cie 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/01 paper 1  multiple choice may/june 2003 45 minutes additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet soft clean eraser soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended) read these instructions first write in soft pencil. do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces providedunless this has been done for you. there are forty questions on this paper. answer allquestions. for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c, and d. choose the oneyou consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully. each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.",
            "2": "2 0625/01/m/j/031a glass tank contains some water. the length qr and the width rs of the tank are known. what other distance needs to be measured in order to be able to calculate the volume of the water? ast bsv ctu dtv 2a stopwatch is used to time a race. the diagrams show the watch at the start and at the end of therace. how long did the race take? a45.7 s b46.0 s c46.5 s d47.0 s45 3015 secondsstart 5055605 10 20 25 354045 3015 secondsend 5055605 10 20 25 3540water q rstv u",
            "3": "3 0625/01/m/j/03 [turn over3the diagram shows a speed-time graph for a body moving with constant acceleration. what is represented by the shaded area under the graph? aacceleration bdistance cspeed dtime 4a tunnel has a length of 50 km. a car takes 20 min to travel between the two ends of the tunnel.what is the average speed of the car?a2.5 km / h b16.6 km / h c150 km / h d1000 km / h 5which statement is correct?amass is a force, measured in kilograms. bmass is a force, measured in newtons. cweight is a force, measured in kilograms. dweight is a force, measured in newtons.speed time0 0",
            "4": "4 0625/01/m/j/036three children, x, y and z, are using a see-saw to compare their weights. which line in the table shows the correct order of the children\u2019s weights? 7what apparatus is needed to determine the density of a regularly-shaped block? aa balance and a ruler ba balance and a forcemeter (spring balance) ca measuring cylinder and a ruler da measuring cylinder and a beaker 8a spring is suspended from a stand. loads are added and the extensions are measured. which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load? 0 0extension loada 0 0extension loadb 0 0extension loadc 0 0extension loaddspring stand loadsrulexy yz xz heaviest \u2190\uf8e7\u2192 lightest a xy z b xz y c yx z d yz x",
            "5": "5 0625/01/m/j/03 [turn over9a student uses a stand and clamp to hold a flask of liquid. which diagram shows the most stable arrangement? 10what is the source of the energy converted by a hydro-electric power station?ahot rocks bfalling water coil dwaves 11a labourer on a building site lifts heavy concrete blocks onto a lorry. lighter blocks are now lifted the same distance in the same time. what happens to the work done in lifting each block and the power exerted by the labourer?a bc d work done in power exerted by lifting each block labourer a decreases decreases b decreases remains the same c increases increases dremains the same increases",
            "6": "6 0625/01/m/j/0312the diagram shows an instrument used to measure gas pressure. what is the instrument called? aammeter bbarometer cmanometer dthermometer 13the diagrams show two divers swimming in the sea and two divers swimming in fresh water. sea water is more dense than fresh water. on which diver is there the greatest pressure? 14when water evaporates, some molecules escape. which molecules escape?athe molecules at the bottom of the liquid with less energy than others bthe molecules at the bottom of the liquid with more energy than others cthe molecules at the surface with less energy than others dthe molecules at the surface with more energy than othersfresh water c d2 m0 m 4 m 6 msea water a b2 m0 m 4 m 6 mliquid",
            "7": "7 0625/01/m/j/03 [turn over15two metal boxes containing air are standing in a room. box x is on top of a heater. box y is on a bench. the boxes are left for a long time. which line in the table best describes the average speed of the molecules in the containers? 16the top of the mercury thread in a mercury-in-glass thermometer reaches point x at 0 \u00b0c andpoint z at 100 \u00b0c. where might it be at a temperature below the ice-point? apoint w bpoint x cpoint y dpoint zx wz yxy heater bench box x box y a fast zero b fast slow c slow fast d zero fast",
            "8": "8 0625/01/m/j/0317the same quantity of heat energy is applied to four different blocks. the temperature rise produced is shown on each block. which block has the highest thermal capacity? 18a person holds a glass beaker in one hand and fills it quickly with hot water. it takes severalseconds before his hand starts to feel the heat. why is there this delay? aglass is a poor conductor of heat. bglass is a good conductor of heat. cwater is a poor conductor of heat. dwater is a good conductor of heat.ab cdtemperature rise is 3 \u00b0c temperature rise is 9 \u00b0ctemperature rise is 18 \u00b0ctemperature rise is 6 \u00b0c",
            "9": "9 0625/01/m/j/03 [turn over19the diagram shows a heater used to heat a tank of cold water. what is the main process by which heat moves through the water? aconduction bconvection cevaporation dradiation 20what causes refraction when light travels from air into glass?athe amplitude of the light waves changes. bthe colour of the light changes. cthe frequency of the light waves changes. dthe speed of the light changes. 21a woman tunes her radio to a station broadcasting on 200 m.what does the 200 m tell her about the radio wave?aits amplitude bits frequency cits speed dits wavelengthwater lagging tank heater",
            "10": "10 0625/01/m/j/0322which statement is correct about the speed of electromagnetic waves in a vacuum? aultra-violet waves have the greatest speed. bvisible light waves have the greatest speed. cinfra-red waves have the greatest speed. dall electromagnetic waves have the same speed. 23which diagram correctly shows rays passing through a camera lens? camera film imagelensobjecta camera filmimage lensobject ccamera filmimagelensobject b camera filmimage lensobject d",
            "11": "11 0625/01/m/j/03 [turn over24a sound wave passes through the air, in the direction shown. \uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\uf8e7\u2192 direction of travel of sound wave how does a particle of air move as the sound wave passes? amoves to the right and stays there \u2022\u2192 bmoves left and right \u2190 \u2022\u2192 cmoves up and stays there dmoves up and down 25a boy is stranded on an island 500 m from the shore. he shouts for help, but all he can hear in reply is the echo of his shout from some cliffs. sound travels at 340 m / s through the air.what is the time interval between the boy shouting and hearing the echo?a s           b s           c s d s 2 \u00d7340 500340 5002 \u00d7500 340500340islandcliffs500 m\u2191\u2022 \u2193\u2191 \u2022",
            "12": "12 0625/01/m/j/0326a student wishes to use a magnetising coil to make a permanent magnet from a piece of metal. which metal should she use? aaluminium bcopper ciron dsteel 27a metal rod xy is placed near a magnet. end x is attracted when it is placed near to the north pole of the magnet, and also when it is placed near to the south pole. how does end y behave when it is placed, in turn, near to the two poles of the magnet?x y n sattraction x yns attractionmetal y near north pole y near south pole a attraction attraction b attraction repulsion c repulsion attraction d repulsion repulsion",
            "13": "13 0625/01/m/j/03 [turn over28when the potential difference (p.d.) across a piece of resistance wire is changed, the current through the wire also changes. the temperature of the wire is kept the same. which graph shows how the p.d. and current are related? 29two faulty ammeters and two perfect ammeters are connected in series in the circuit shown. the readings on the ammeters are a12.9 a a23.1 a a33.1 a a43.3 a which two ammeters are faulty? aa1and a2b a1and a4c a2and a3d a3and a4 30which electrical component would not normally be found in a battery-operated torch (flashlight)? ab c da1 a2 a3 a40 0p.d.a 0 0p.d.b 0 0p.d.c 0 0p.d.d current current current current",
            "14": "14 0625/01/m/j/0331a student connects two lamps in the circuit shown.  which switches must he close to light both lamps? a1 and 2 b1, 2 and 3 c1 and 3 d2 and 3 32a student makes four circuits.in which circuit are both lamps protected by the fuse? a b c d21 3",
            "15": "15 0625/01/m/j/03 [turn over33four lamps are labelled \u201860 w 240 v\u2019. in which circuit are the lamps connected so that they all work at normal brightness? 34the diagram shows a solenoid connected to a sensitive voltmeter. which of the following would give a zero reading on the voltmeter? aholding the magnet stationary inside the solenoid bmoving the magnet away from the solenoid cmoving the magnet towards the solenoid dmoving the solenoid towards the magnetvsolenoidmagnets na 240  vb 240  vc 240  vd 240  v",
            "16": "16 0625/01/m/j/0335the diagram shows a transformer with an alternating voltage of 100 v applied to the primary coil. what is the voltage produced across the secondary coil? a50 v           b 100 v           c 200 v           d 8000 v 36the diagram below shows the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope tube. the tube is placed between a pair of charged plates. which diagram shows the new position of the spot? + ++++\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 a +++++\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 b +++++\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 c +++++\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013dspot of lightprimary coilsecondary coil 100  v (40 turns) (80 turns)",
            "17": "17 0625/01/m/j/03 [turn over37an electrical component x is placed in water, as shown. when the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases. what is component x?aa capacitor ba light-dependent resistor ca reed relay da thermistor 38which type of radiation can be stopped by a sheet of paper?a \u03b1-particles b \u03b2-particles c \u03b3-rays dx-rays 39the half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. a sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g of the substance. how much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested? a0.03 g b0.12 g c1.92 g d7.68 gxa thermometer water",
            "18": "18 0625/01/m/j/0340an atom of lithium contains three protons and three electrons. the nucleon number (mass number) of the atom is 7.how many neutrons are there in the atom? a 3           b 4           c 7           d 10",
            "19": "19 0625/01/m/j/03blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/01/m/j/03blank page"
        },
        "0625_s03_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16printed pages. sp (at/kn) s46409/2 \u00a9 cie 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2 may/june 2003 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer allquestions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2).centre number candidate number name if you have been given a label, look at the details. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "2 0625/2/m/j/031a person winds some thread tightly 4 times round the length of a metre rule and cuts the ends off level with the left-hand end of the rule, as shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a)to the nearest metre, what is the length of the thread? .. m [1] (b)is the actual length of thread slightly greater or slightly less than your answer to (a)? tick one box and give your reason. slightly greater  slightly less   reason ... ...[1]ends cut off here thread 1  m rulefor examiner\u2019s use",
            "3": "0625/2/m/j/03 [turn over2 (a) two horizontal strings are attached to a soft rubber ball, as shown in fig. 2.1. fig. 2.1 a force of 10 n pulls on one string. (i)the ball does not move. what is the value of the force f on the other string? f = .. n (ii) what change to the rubber ball do the two forces cause? ... [2] (b)a garden pot containing soil weighs a total of 360 n. the pot rests on three equally- spaced blocks, so that surplus water can drain out of the holes in the base of the pot.the soil is uniformly distributed in the pot. the pot is shown in fig. 2.2. fig. 2.2 (i)what is the force exerted by each block on the pot? ...n (ii) state the direction of these forces. ... (iii) the gardener finds that the blocks sink into the ground, but he must have the potup on blocks to allow the drainage. what can he do to reduce the sinking of thepot? ... [3]10 nf3for examiner\u2019s use",
            "4": "4 0625/2/m/j/033 (a) an unopened bottle of olive oil has  a mass of 0.97 kg. the empty bottle has a mass of 0.51 kg.calculate the mass of the olive oil. fig. 3.1 mass of olive oil = .. kg [2] (b)the olive oil is poured into three 250 cm 3measuring cylinders. the first two cylinders are filled to the 250 cm3mark. the third is shown in fig. 3.2. fig. 3.2 (i)what is the volume of the olive oil in the third measuring cylinder? volume = .. cm3 (ii) calculate the volume of the olive oil in the unopened bottle. volume = .. cm3 (iii) calculate the density of the olive oil. express your answer to 2 significant figures. density = .. [7]250 200150100 5050cm3for examiner\u2019s use oliv oil 0.97  kgoliv oil 0.51  kg",
            "5": "5 0625/2/m/j/03 [turn over4the air trapped in a cylinder by a piston is kept under pressure by a load, as shown in fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 (a)describe how the pressure in the cylinder is caused by the air molecules. .. [3] (b)the load is increased. (i)state what happens to the piston. ... (ii) state what happens to the pressure in the cylinder, and give a reason.what happens ... ... reason ... ... [3]load piston cylinderfixed pivot airfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "6": "6 0625/2/m/j/035an immersion heater is put into some crushed ice at 0 \u00b0c. the immersion heater is switched on. fig. 5.1 (a)on fig. 5.2, sketch the graph of temperature against time, up to the time when all theice has melted. [3] fig. 5.2 (b)the heater is left switched on after all the ice has melted, and the temperature rises.after some time, the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on. (i)suggest why the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on. ... ... (ii) state what happens to the energy received by the water whilst this is happening. .. [2]00100 temperature  / \u00b0c time time when all ice has meltedimmersion heater crushed iceinsulating beakerfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "7": "7 0625/2/m/j/03 [turn over6in this question, drawing should be done carefully. fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light striking mirror 1 at point x. fig. 6.1 (a)on fig. 6.1, (i)draw the normal at x, (ii) draw the ray reflected from mirror 1, (iii) mark the angle of incidence using the letter iand the angle of reflection using the letter r. [3] (b)mirror 2 is parallel to mirror 1. the reflected ray from mirror 1 strikes mirror 2. compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 with the incident ray at x. y ou may do a further construction if you wish. complete the sentence below. the reflected ray from mirror 2 is . ..[1]mirror 1mirror 2 xray of lightfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "8": "8 0625/2/m/j/037the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. (a)complete fig. 7.1 to show how far a sound wave has travelled 2, 3, 4 and 5 seconds after the sound was made. [1] fig. 7.1 (b)on fig. 7.2, draw the graph of distance travelled against time for the sound wave. [3] fig. 7.200500100015002000 12345 time/sdistance travelled / mfor examiner\u2019s use time elapsed/s 01234  5 distance travelled/m 0 340",
            "9": "9 0625/2/m/j/03 [turn over(c)a ship is sinking in the dark as shown in fig. 7.3.  fig. 7.3 the sailors on the ship fire a distress flare into the air. it explodes with a bang and a bright flash of light. (i)a lifeboat crew hear the bang and see the flash, but not at the same time. state which reaches the lifeboat first, the bang or the flash, and give a reason. ... .. (ii) the time interval in (c)(i) is 4.2 s. use your graph in (b)to find how far away the lifeboat is from the flare. show clearly on your graph how you got your answer. distance of lifeboat = .. m [6] distress flare lifeboat sinking shipfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "10": "10 0625/2/m/j/038 (a) in an electronic circuit, what is a capacitor designed to store?  [1] (b)the circuit in fig. 8.1 contains a large-value resistor and a capacitor. fig. 8.1 (i)switch s1is open. switch s2is closed and then opened again. what reading now shows on the voltmeter?  v (ii) s2is left open and s1is closed and left closed.  describe what happens to the reading on the voltmeter. ... ... (iii) the circuit in fig. 8.1 is an example of a simple time-delay circuit. state one use of a time-delay circuit. .. [4]6 v d.c.+ \u2013large-value resistor v capacitor s2s1for examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "11 0625/2/m/j/03 [turn over9a length of flexible, slack wire is fixed at a and b so that part of it is held vertically  in the field of a horseshoe magnet, as shown in fig. 9.1. fig. 9.1 figs. 9.2 and 9.3 each show the same section through the apparatus. the wire between aand b is not shown. fig. 9.2 fig. 9.3 (a) (i) on fig. 9.2, draw what the wire might look like when a large current passesthrough it. [2] (ii) explain why the wire looks like this. ... ...[3] (b)on fig. 9.3, draw what the wire might look like if the current in (a)is reversed. [1]a ba bmagnet polemagnetpolensa bfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "12": "12 0625/2/m/j/0310fig. 10.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.). fig. 10.1 (a)when the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the screen. (i)describe what causes this bright spot. ... .[3] (ii) the spot is rather blurred. which control should be adjusted to make it sharper? ...[1] (iii) which control would be switched on to turn the spot into a horizontal line? ...[1] (iv) describe what happens inside the oscilloscope to turn the spot into a horizontal line. ... .[3]brightness time-base y-gain volts/cm ms/cm x-shift y inputon offy-shiftfocusigcse oscilloscope co.for examiner\u2019s use",
            "13": "13 0625/2/m/j/03 [turn over(b)y ou have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen. (i)where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope? ... (ii) fig. 10.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like. fig. 10.2 1.what change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the x-shift control? ... 2.what change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the y-shift control? ... [3]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "14": "14 0625/2/m/j/0311 (a) fig. 11.1 shows a circuit containing a lamp and a variable resistor. fig. 11.1 the circuit does not work. the lamp does not light and altering the setting on the variable resistor makes no difference. in the space below, re-draw the diagram, showing a circuit in which the variable resistor may be used to change the brightness of the lamp. [2]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "15": "15 0625/2/m/j/03 [turn over(b)fig. 11.2 shows two resistors and an ammeter connected in series to a 6 v d.c. supply. the resistance of the ammeter is so small that it can be ignored. fig. 11.2 (i)calculate the combined resistance of the 8 \u03c9and 4\u03c9resistors in series. combined resistance = .. \u03c9[2] (ii) 1. calculate the current supplied by the 6 v d.c. supply. current = .. 2.state the value of the current in section pq of the circuit .. recorded by the ammeter ..in section sr of the circuit .. [5] (iii) on fig. 11.2, show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the 4 \u03c9resistor. [1]+ \u2013p r6 v8 \u03c9 4 \u03c9q safor examiner\u2019s use",
            "16": "16 0625/2/m/j/0312a rock climber climbs up a rock face, as shown in fig. 12.1. fig. 12.1 (a)to climb the rock face, the climber must do work. which force must the climber work against as he climbs? tick one box. air resistance friction on the rockhis weighttension in the safety rope [1] (b)what other quantity, as well as the force ticked in (a), must be known in order to find the work done by the climber? ..[1] (c)one climber weighs 1000 n and another weighs 800 n. they both take the same time to climb the cliff. (i)which one has done the most work?  (ii) which one has the greater power rating? . [2] (d)when the first climber reaches the top, he has more gravitational potential energy than he had at the bottom. (i)what form of energy, stored in his body, was used to give him this extra gravitational potential energy? .. (ii) where did he get this energy from? .. (iii) other than increasing gravitational potential energy on the way up, how else was energy in his body used? state one way. ... ... [3]safety rope climberfor examiner\u2019s use"
        },
        "0625_s03_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12printed pages. sp (at/kn) s46413/2 \u00a9 cie 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/03 paper 3 may/june 2003 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer allquestions. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.centre number candidate number name if you have been given a label, look at the details. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 total",
            "2": "2 0625/3/m/j/031fig. 1.1 shows apparatus that may be used to compare the strengths of two springs of the same size, but made from different materials. fig. 1.1 (a) (i) explain how the masses produce a force to stretch the spring. ... (ii)explain why this force, like all forces, is a vector quantity. ... ... [2] (b)fig. 1.2 shows the graphs obtained when the two springs are stretched. fig. 1.2005101520 force/n 10 20 30 40 extension/mmspring 1spring 1 spring 2spring 2spring 1 spring 2spring massesscalefor examiner\u2019s use",
            "3": "3 0625/3/m/j/03 [turn over(i)state which spring is more difficult to extend. quote values from the graphs to support your answer. ... . (ii) on the graph of spring 2, mark a point p at the limit of proportionality. explain your choice of point p . ... .. (iii) use the graphs to find the difference in the extensions of the two springs when a force of 15 n is applied to each one. difference in extensions = .. [6] 2the speed of a cyclist reduces uniformly from 2.5 m/s to 1.0 m/s in 12 s. (a)calculate the deceleration of the cyclist.  deceleration = ..[3] (b)calculate the distance travelled by the cyclist in this time. distance = ..[2]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "4": "4 0625/3/m/j/033fig. 3.1 shows the arm of a crane when it is lifting a heavy box. fig. 3.1 (a)by the use of a scale diagram ( notcalculation) of the forces acting at p , find the weight of the box. [5]40\u00b030\u00b0950 n1220 n p boxfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "5": "5 0625/3/m/j/03 [turn over(b)another box of weight 1500 n is raised vertically by 3.0 m.  (i)calculate the work done on the box. work done = .. (ii) the crane takes 2.5 s to raise this box 3.0 m. calculate the power output of the crane. power = .. [4] 4fig. 4.1 shows a sealed glass syringe that contains air and many very tiny suspended dustparticles. fig. 4.1 (a)explain why the dust particles are suspended in the air and do not settle to the bottom. .. ..[3] (b)the air in the syringe is at a pressure of 2.0 \u00d710 5pa. the piston is slowly moved into the syringe, keeping the temperature constant, until the volume of the air is reduced from 80 cm3to 25 cm3. calculate the final pressure of the air. pressure = ..[3]syringe seal dust particlespistonfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "6": "6 0625/3/m/j/035fig. 5.1 shows a thermocouple set up to measure the temperature at a point on a solar panel. fig. 5.1 (a)x is a copper wire. (i)suggest a material for y . ... (ii) name the component z. ... [2] (b)explain how a thermocouple is used to measure temperature. .. [3] (c)experiment shows that the temperature of the surface depends upon the type of surface used. describe the nature of the surface that will cause the temperature to rise most. .. ..[1]cold junction yz x hot junctionsun's rays surface of solarpanelfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "7": "7 0625/3/m/j/03 [turn over6fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts of light crossing the edge of a glass block from air into glass. fig. 6.1 (a)on fig. 6.1 (i)draw in an incident ray, a normal and a refracted ray that meet at the same point on the edge of the glass block, (ii) label the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction, (iii) measure the two angles and record their values. angle of incidence = ..angle of refraction = .. [4] (b)calculate the refractive index of the glass. refractive index = ..[3]edge of glassglassair direction in which wavefrontsare movingfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "8": "8 0625/3/m/j/037in a thunderstorm, both light and sound waves are generated at the same time. (a)how fast does the light travel towards an observer?speed = .. [1] (b)explain why the sound waves always reach the observer after the light waves. ..[1] (c)the speed of sound waves in air may be determined by experiment using a source that generates light waves and sound waves at the same time. (i)draw a labelled diagram of the arrangement of suitable apparatus for theexperiment. (ii) state the readings you would take. ... .. (iii) explain how you would calculate the speed of sound in air from your readings. .. [4]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "9": "9 0625/3/m/j/03 [turn over8fig. 8.1 shows a battery with a resistor connected across its terminals. the e.m.f. of the battery is 6.0 v. fig. 8.1 the battery causes 90 c of charge to flow through the circuit in 45 s. (a)calculate (i)the current in the circuit, current = .. (ii) the resistance of the circuit, resistance = .. (iii) the electrical energy transformed in the circuit in 45 s. energy = .. [6] (b)explain what is meant by the term e.m.f. of the battery . ..[2]6.0 vfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "10": "10 0625/3/m/j/039a transformer has an output of 24 v when supplying a current of 2.0 a. the current in the primary coil is 0.40 a and the transformer is 100% efficient. (a)calculate (i)the power output of the transformer, power = .. (ii)the voltage applied across the primary coil. voltage = .. [4] (b)explain (i)what is meant by the statement that the transformer is 100% efficient, . (ii) how the transformer changes an input voltage into a different output voltage.  [4]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "11 0625/3/m/j/03 [turn over10fig. 10.1 and fig. 10.2 show two views of a vertical wire carrying a current up through a horizontal card. points p and q are marked on the card.  fig. 10.1 fig. 10.2 (a)on fig. 10.2, (i)draw a complete magnetic field line (line of force) through p and indicate itsdirection with an arrow, (ii) draw an arrow through q to indicate the direction in which a compass placed at qwould point. [3] (b)state the effect on the direction in which compass q points of (i)increasing the current in the wire, ... (ii) reversing the direction of the current in the wire. ... [2] (c)fig. 10.3 shows the view from above of another vertical wire carrying a current upthrough a horizontal card. a cm grid is marked on the card. point w is 1 cm verticallyabove the top surface of the card. fig. 10.3 state the magnetic field strength at s, t and w in terms of the magnetic field strength at r. use one of the alternatives, weaker ,same strength orstronger for each answer. at s  at t at w [3]rst wvertical wire carryingcurrentpqverticalwire view from above the cardfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "12": "12 0625/3/m/j/0311 (a) a radioactive isotope emits only \u03b1-particles. (i)in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus you would use to prove that no \u03b2-particles or \u03b3-radiation are emitted from the isotope. (ii) describe the test you would carry out. ... . (iii) explain how your results would show that only \u03b1-particles are emitted. . [6] (b)fig. 11.1 shows a stream of \u03b1-particles about to enter the space between the poles of a very strong magnet. fig. 11.1 describe the path of the \u03b1-particles in the space between the magnetic poles. ..[3]n s\u03b1-particlesfor examiner\u2019s use"
        },
        "0625_s03_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 7 printed pages, 1 blank page and an inserted answer booklet. sp (at/kn) s47468/2 \u00a9cie 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test may/june 2003 1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as specified in the confidential instructions read these instructions first follow the instructions on the front cover of the answer booklet. write your answers in the spaces provided in the answer booklet. answer all questions. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made. an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.",
            "2": "2 0625/05/m/j/031in this experiment, you are to investigate the heating of thermometer bulbs under different conditions. record all of your observations on pages 2 and 3 of your answer booklet. you are provided with two thermometers labelled a and b. thermometer b has a thin layer of cotton wool around the bulb. do not remove this cotton wool. the thermometers are arranged withtheir bulbs at equal distances from a lamp. do not move the lamp or the thermometers.   carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 during the experiment, you will read temperature values from thermometers. y ou may find it morecomfortable to use the card provided to shield your eyes from the direct light from the lamp. do notplace the card between the lamp and a thermometer. (a)take the room temperature readings on both thermometers and record them at time 0 s in the table. (b)switch on the lamp and start the stopwatch. (i)record in the table t a, the temperature reading on thermometer a after 30 s.  (ii) after a further 30 s (i.e. at time t=6 0 s) record tb, the temperature reading on thermometer b. (iii) continue taking temperature readings from the thermometers in turn at 30 s intervals, asindicated in the table, up to 300 s. (iv) switch off the lamp. (c)complete the column headings in the table. (d) (i) using the readings obtained for thermometer a, plot a graph of temperature / \u00b0c ( y-axis) against time / s (x-axis). label the line \u2018a\u2019. (ii) using the same axes, plot a graph using the readings obtained for thermometer b. labelthe line \u2018b\u2019. (e)state which thermometer bulb heated up more quickly. justify your answer by reference toyour graph.thermometer a thermometer b card in front of lamp cotton wool lamp",
            "3": "3 0625/05/m/j/03 [turn over2in this experiment, you are to make two sets of measurements as accurately as you can in order to determine the volume of a beaker. record all of your observations and answers on pages 4 and 5 of the answer booklet. you are provided with a beaker, a rule, a length of string and two blocks of wood.  carry out the following instructions. method 1 (a)use the two blocks of wood and the rule to measure the external diameter d of the middle part of the beaker. (b)draw a labelled diagram to show how you used the blocks of wood and the rule to find, as accurately as possible, a value for the diameter. (c)calculate the external radius r of the beaker. (d)measure the height h of the beaker. (e)calculate the external volume v of the beaker using the equation v= \u03c0r2h. method 2 (f)use the string and the rule to measure, as accurately as possible, the circumference c of the middle part of the beaker.  (g)calculate a second value of the external volume v of the beaker using the equation v= . (h)calculate a, the average of your two values for v. (i)estimate the maximum volume of water v that the beaker could hold. (j)calculate the approximate volume g of the glass used to make the beaker, using the equation g= a \u2013 v.c2h 4\u03c0",
            "4": "4 0625/05/m/j/033in this experiment, you are to compare the combined resistance of lamps arranged in series or in parallel. record all of your observations and readings on page 6 of your answer booklet. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1 and fig. 3.2.the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you. fig. 3.1 fig. 3.2 (a)switch on. measure and record in the table the current  iin the circuit and the p.d. v across the two lamps. switch off. (b)calculate the combined resistance r of the two lamps using the equation r= . record this value of r in the table. (c)complete the column headings in the table. (d)disconnect the lamps and the voltmeter. set up the circuit shown in fig. 3.2. (e)switch on. measure and record in the table the current iin the circuit and the p.d. v across the two lamps. switch off. (f)calculate the combined resistance r of the two lamps using the equation r= . record this value of r in the table. (g)using the values of resistance obtained in parts (b) and (f), calculate the ratio .resistance of lamps in series resistance of lamps in parallelv iv ia vpower source a vpower source",
            "5": "5 0625/05/m/j/03 [turn over(h)fig. 3.3 shows a cell connected to two motors. copy and complete the circuit diagram to show \u2022a voltmeter connected to measure the p.d. across the motors, \u2022an ammeter connected to measure the total current in the circuit, \u2022a variable resistor connected to vary the current in one of the motors. you are not asked to set up this circuit. fig. 3.3mm",
            "6": "6 0625/05/m/j/034in this experiment, you are to investigate the reflection of light by a plane mirror. record all of your observations and answers on page 7 of the answer booklet. carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. use the diagram printed on page 7 of your answer booklet as a ray trace sheet. fig. 4.1 (a)on the ray trace sheet, draw a line from point a to the line mm\u2032. the line is to be at an angle of 30\u00b0 from the line nn\u2032. label with the letter d the point at which the line you have drawn meets line mm\u2032. (b)draw another line from point a to the line mm\u2032. this line is to be at an angle of 40\u00b0 from the line nn\u2032. label with the letter e the point at which the line you have drawn meets line mm\u2032. (c)place the mirror so that its reflecting surface lies along the line mm\u2032. place a pin at point a.place another pin b close to the mirror and along the line ad. (d)view the images of pins a and b in the mirror. place two pins f and g between your eye and the mirror so that f, g and the images of a and b appear exactly one behind the other. (e)mark the positions of pins b, f and gon the ray trace sheet. remove the pins and the mirror. using a rule draw a line joining g and f, and continue the line to meet the line mm\u2032. (f)repeat the steps (c) to (e) using the same position of pin a but placing pin b on line ae.30\u00b040\u00b0 amdem\u2032 n\u2032n",
            "7": "7 0625/05/m/j/03(g)draw a line from line ad to line ae that is parallel to and 2.0 cm from mm\u2032. record the length xof the line. (h)draw a line between the two reflected ray lines that is parallel to and 4.0 cm from mm\u2032. record the length y of the line. (i)calculate the ratio .x y",
            "8": "8 0625/05/m/j/03blank page"
        },
        "0625_s03_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9printed pages and 3blank pages. sp (at/ks) s47471/3 \u00a9 ucles 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2003 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer allquestions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.centre number candidate number name for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 5 totalif you have been given a label, look at the details. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.",
            "2": "2 0625/06/m/j/031a student carried out an experiment to find the spring constant of a steel spring. the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 the student recorded the unstretched length l0of the spring. then she added loads wto the spring, recording the new length leach time. the readings are shown in the table below. (a)calculate the extension eof the spring produced by each load, using the equation e= ( l\u2013l0). record the values of ein the table. [2]load w half-metre rulehalf-metrerulell0for examiner\u2019s use w/n l/m m e/m m 03 0 13 2 23 3 33 6 43 9 54 0 64 2l0= 30 mm",
            "3": "3 0625/06/m/j/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use(b)plot the graph of e/ mm (y-axis) against w/n  ( x-axis). [4] (c)draw the best-fit straight line for the points you have plotted. calculate the gradient of the line. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information. gradient = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..[4]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "4": "4 0625/06/m/j/032an igcse student was investigating the passage of red light through a prism. fig. 2.1 shows the outline of the prism and an incident ray. fig. 2.1 (a)measure the angle of incidence ishown in fig. 2.1. i= \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.[1] (b)the angle of refraction as the ray entered side abof the prism was 22\u00b0. (i)on fig. 2.1, draw in the refracted ray from point das accurately as possible. (ii) mark the point e, where the ray meets side ac. draw the normal at point e. [4] (c)at point ethe ray came out of the prism with an angle of refraction of 75\u00b0. on fig. 2.1, draw as accurately as possible the ray coming out of the prism. [1] (d)another student used four optics pins to trace the passage of a ray through a prism.fig. 2.2 shows the prism, the position of the student\u2019s eye and the directions of the ray.  fig. 2.2 on fig. 2.2, show positions of the four optics pins, placed to obtain as accurate a resultas possible. mark each position clearly with a cross (x). [2]normal ray boxa bcdifor examiner\u2019s use incident ray eye",
            "5": "5 0625/06/m/j/03 [turn over3in an electrical experiment, a student set up a circuit to measure current and potential difference. part of the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1 (a) (i) complete the circuit diagram by drawing in a voltmeter connected across the lamp. (ii) name the component labelled y. \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2] (b)the first reading on the voltmeter was 2.2 v. on the voltmeter face shown in fig. 3.2,show the position of the pointer giving the reading 2.2 v. [1] fig. 3.2 (c)the readings of vandiobtained by the student are given in the table below.  (i)calculate the resistance rof the lamp filament for each set of vandireadings and write the values in the table. use the equation r= . (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [6]v i01234 5 67 8 9 10 vapower source yfor examiner\u2019s use v/ i/ r/ 2.2 0.36 4.1 0.62 6.0 0.86 7.9 0.98 9.8 1.20",
            "6": "6 0625/06/m/j/034an igcse class watched a demonstration experiment to show that a metal rod expands when heated. the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 when the rod expands, it rolls the pin which moves the pointer. so a very small expansionmoves the pointer far enough to be seen clearly.  (a)one student wanted to find out how much longer the rod became when heated aboveroom temperature with a bunsen burner. the rod was 0.750 m long at roomtemperature. to find the circumference of the pin, the student wrapped a piece of string 10 timesround the pin, marked the string at the beginning and end of the 10 turns, and thenmeasured the length of the string between the marks. fig. 4.2 shows the string actualsize. fig. 4.2 (i)use your rule to measure the distance xbetween the marks on the string on fig. 4.2. x= \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. (ii) calculate the circumference cof the pin. c= \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. [3]xheatmetal rodpointer pin wooden block benchfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "7": "7 0625/06/m/j/03 [turn over(b)a second student measured the diameter dof the pin using a micrometer screw gauge. the diameter was 1.20 mm. when the rod was heated, the pointer moved through 90\u00b0. (i)calculate the circumference cusing the equation c=\u03c0d. c= \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..[2] (ii) use this value of the circumference to calculate the increase ein the length of the rod when heated. e= \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..[1] (iii) calculate the length lof the heated rod. l= \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..[1] (c)the micrometer screw gauge is a very accurate instrument. suggest why the string and rule method of finding the circumference, used by the first student, was inaccurate. . .[1]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "8": "8 0625/06/m/j/035a student was asked to carry out an experiment to compare the insulating properties of cotton wool, cardboard and polystyrene. the apparatus provided was hot water, athermometer, a stopclock and a copper can with a lid, as shown in fig. 5.1. fig. 5.1 the student wrapped one of the insulators around the can, poured hot water into the can,and then took temperature and time readings as the water cooled. this was then repeatedfor each insulator. the graph in fig. 5.2 shows how the student displayed his readings. fig. 5.2 (a) (i) using the information on the graph, which material appears to be the bestinsulator? .. (ii)justify your answer by referring to the information on the graph. .. .. [2]0 05 1 0 1 520406080 time / mintemperature / \u00b0cpolystyrene cotton wool cardboardcopper can water insulationthermometer lidfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "9": "9 0625/06/m/j/03(b)in this experiment, it is important to control the variables. suggest three variables that the student should keep constant for this experiment. 1.  . 2.  . 3.  . [3]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "10": "10 0625/06/m/j/03blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/06/m/j/03blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/06/m/j/03blank page"
        },
        "0625_w03_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18printed pages and 2blank pages. mml 4504 11/02 s53619/2 \u00a9 ucles 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/01 paper 1  multiple choice october/november 2003 45 minutes additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet soft clean eraser soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended) read these instructions first write in soft pencil. do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces providedunless this has been done for you. there are forty questions on this paper. answer allquestions. for each question there are four possible answers a,b,c, and d. choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. university ofcambridge local examinations syndicate ",
            "2": "1which of the following is notnecessary when using a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of a quantity of water? amaking sure that the measuring cylinder is vertical bmaking sure that your eye is level with the liquid surface creading the bottom of the meniscus dusing the largest measuring cylinder possible 2a pendulum is set in motion and 20 complete swings are timed. the time measured is 30 s.what is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?a0.67 s b0.75 s c1.5 s d3.0 s 3five telegraph poles are positioned at equal distances along the side of a road. a car accelerates until it is level with pole 4. the car then continues along the road at a steady speed. the times taken to travel between one pole and the next are measured. which time is the greatest?the time betweenapole 1 and pole 2. bpole 2 and pole 3. cpole 3 and pole 4. dpole 4 and pole 5.pole 1 pole 2 pole 3 pole 4 pole 52 0625/01/o/n/03",
            "3": "4a train travels along a track from aytown to beetown. the map shows the route. the distance travelled by the train between the towns is 210 km. it moves at an average speed of 70 km / h. how long does the journey take?aless than hours, because the journey is not in a straight line bexactly hours cexactly hours dmore than hours, because the journey is not in a straight line 5a beam is pivoted at its centre. two masses are suspended at equal distances from the pivot as shown in the diagram. which statement is correct? aif x has a mass of exactly 2 kg, it will rise. bif x has a mass of less than 2 kg, it will fall. cif x has a mass of more than 2 kg, it will fall. dif x has a mass of more than 2 kg, it will rise.pivot block x 2 kg mass210\u2013\u2013\u201370210\u2013\u2013\u20137070\u2013\u2013\u201321070\u2013\u2013\u2013210aytown beetown3 0625/01/o/n/03 [turn over",
            "4": "6the mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30 kg. when exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is 0.90 kg. what is the mass of the bottle?a0.40 kg b0.50 kg c0.65 kg d0.80 kg 7a student tries to find the density of a metal block. first he measures the weight with a forcemeter (spring balance). next he measures the sides of the block using a rule, in order tocalculate the volume of the block. finally he divides the weight by the volume to find the density. the student has made a mistake.why does his method notgive the density? adensity is volume divided by weight. bhe should have measured the surface area, not the volume. che should have used the mass in his calculation, not the weight. dweight is not measured with a forcemeter (spring balance). 8two forces act on an object.in which situation is it impossible for the object to be in equilibrium? athe two forces act in the same direction. bthe two forces act through the same point. cthe two forces are of the same type. dthe two forces are the same size.4 0625/01/o/n/03",
            "5": "9the table below shows the length of a wire as the load on it is increased. which graph correctly shows the extension of the wire plotted against load? 10a large electric motor is used to lift a container off a ship. which of the following values are enough to allow the power of the motor to be calculated?athe mass of the container and the distance moved bthe force used and the distance moved cthe current used and the work done dthe work done and the time taken20 10 30 004060 20 load / na extension / cm 20 10 30 0023 1 load / nb extension / cm 20 10 30 0046 2 load / nc extension / cm 20 10 30 050.054.156.3 52.1 load / nd extension / cm5 0625/01/o/n/03 [turn overload / n 0 10 20 30 50.0 52.1 54.1 56.3 length / cm",
            "6": "11a tidal power station is made by building a barrage across the mouth of a river. at high tide the sea water is trapped behind the barrage. at low tide the water is allowed to flow back into the sea through a turbine. what is the useful energy change in a tidal power station?aelectrical energy \u2192 energy of position (potential) belectrical energy \u2192 energy of motion (kinetic) cenergy of motion (kinetic) \u2192 energy of position (potential) denergy of position (potential) \u2192 electrical energy 12which diagram shows the child exerting least pressure on the ground? ab c dturbinebarrage trapped sea water sea at low tide6 0625/01/o/n/03",
            "7": "13a manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. a,b,candd show the manometer at different times. at which time is the gas pressure inside the tank greatest? 14which line in the table correctly describes whether the molecules of a solid, liquid and gas are moving or stationary? 15driving a car raises the temperature of the tyres. this causes the pressure of the air in the tyres to increase.why is this?aair molecules break up to form separate atoms. bair molecules expand with the rise in temperature. cthe force between the air molecules increases. dthe speed of the air molecules increases.gasabcd7 0625/01/o/n/03 [turn overa bcdsolid stationarystationarystationary movingliquid stationarystationary movingmovinggas stationary movingmovingmoving",
            "8": "16the diagram shows how the atoms in a substance rearrange themselves during a change of state. which change of state is shown? agas to liquid bliquid to gas cliquid to solid dsolid to liquid 17equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers. they are heated from 20 \u00b0c to 30 \u00b0c by heaters of the same power. liquid 2 takes twice as long to heat as liquid 1. which statement is correct? aboth liquids receive the same amount of energy. bliquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2. cthe thermal capacity of liquid 1 is equal to the thermal capacity of liquid 2. dthe thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.same mass of different liquids heaters of same powerliquid 2 liquid 1 heating time = t heating time = 2 t8 0625/01/o/n/03",
            "9": "18there is a vacuum between the double walls of a vacuum flask. which types of heat transfer are reduced by the vacuum?aconduction and convection bconduction and radiation cconvection and radiation dconduction, convection and radiation 19the diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water.in which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt? ice watera ice wrapped in lead wirewaterb ice waterc ice wrapped in lead wirewaterd9 0625/01/o/n/03 [turn over",
            "10": "20the diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright. transverse waves travel across the water from x to y. which way do the waves make the cork move?a\u2192\u2190 right and left b\u2191\u2193up and down c\u2192only to the right d\u2190only to the left 21waves travel more slowly on the surface of water when the water is shallow.a person drops a stone into a pool at x. the diagram shows the first wavefront on the surface of the pool.which region of the pool is likely to be most shallow? ab x dc wavefrontcork water surface xy weight10 0625/01/o/n/03",
            "11": "22which diagram correctly shows the paths taken by red and blue light when a beam of white light enters a glass prism? 23which diagram shows the correct order of the waves in the electromagnetic spectrum? radioinfra redvisible ultraviolet x-ray increasing wavelengtha radioinfraredvisible ultraviolet x-ray increasing wavelengthb radioinfraredvisible ultraviolet x-ray increasing wavelengthc radioinfraredvisible ultraviolet x-ray increasing wavelengthdwhite lightred bluea white lightblue redc white lightred bluedwhite lightblue redb11 0625/01/o/n/03 [turn over",
            "12": "24which change will lower the pitch of a sound? adecreasing its amplitude bdecreasing its frequency cincreasing its amplitude dincreasing its frequency 25astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. astronaut 2 is nearby. there is no atmosphere in space. compared with the sound heard if they were working on earth, what does astronaut 2 hear? ano sound at all ba quieter sound ca sound of the same loudness da louder soundhammer astronaut 1astronaut 212 0625/01/o/n/03",
            "13": "26a steel bar is magnetised by stroking it several times with the south pole of a magnet, as shown. which poles are formed at x and y? 27a steel ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet that is lying on the table. which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table? s n s nmagnet magnetball balls nmagnet ball s nmagnet ballstops hereab cdxyn s steel bar13 0625/01/o/n/03 [turn overa bcdx northnorth southsouthy north south north south",
            "14": "28a student wants to find the resistance of resistor r using a voltmeter and an ammeter. which circuit should the student use? 29two very light, charged balls p and q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. when a negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, p is repelled and q is attracted. what are the original charges on p and on q?negatively chargedplastic sheetp qv ara vrv r rvab c d aa14 0625/01/o/n/03a bcdcharge on p negativenegative positivepositivecharge on q negative positive negative positive",
            "15": "30four students are asked to draw a circuit showing three lamps working in parallel, a cell, and a switch that controls all three lamps. which student is correct? 31a 3.0 /afii9821lamp and a 6.0 /afii9821lamp are connected in series. what is the total resistance of the combination?a0.5 /afii9821 b2.0/afii9821 c9.0/afii9821 d18.0/afii9821 32why is a circuit breaker or a fuse used in a mains electric circuit?ait allows spare current to be returned to the mains. bit improves the insulation of the wiring. cit protects the mains wiring from current overload. dit saves energy by reducing the current.ab cd15 0625/01/o/n/03 [turn over",
            "16": "33the diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected. which statement is correct? aif lamp y breaks in circuit 1, both the other lamps will go out. bif lamp y breaks in circuit 2, both the other lamps will go out. cif lamp y breaks in circuit 1, lamp z will go out, but lamp x will remain on. dif lamp y breaks in circuit 2, lamp z will go out, but lamp x will remain on. 34how is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way? 35in a cathode-ray tube, particles are given off from a hot cathode by thermionic emission.which particles are given off?aatoms belectrons cions dprotonsx yy zz x circuit 1 circuit 216 0625/01/o/n/03a bcdhow at high voltageat high voltageat low voltageat low voltagewhy for safetyto reduce energy lossfor safetyto reduce energy loss",
            "17": "36when the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter. why does this happen? athe resistance of the lamp decreases. bthe resistance of the lamp increases. cthe resistance of the thermistor decreases. dthe resistance of the thermistor increases. 37which line in the table describes the nature of an /afii9825-particle and a /afii9828-ray? 38a radioactive nucleus r decays with the emission of a /afii9826-particle as shown. x yr\u2192p qs+/afii9826 which equation is correct? ax = p by = q cp = x \u2013 1 dq = y \u2013 117 0625/01/o/n/03 [turn overa bcd/afii9825-particle helium nucleushelium nucleusprotonproton/afii9828-ray electromagnetic radiationelectronelectromagnetic radiationelectron",
            "18": "39which line in the table shows the structure of the nucleus of a helium atom 4 2he? 40a nucleus of substance x has the symbol 26 12x. how many electrons orbit around the nucleus of a neutral atom of substance x? a12 b14 c26 d3818 0625/01/o/n/03a bcdelectrons 2202neutrons 2022protons 0222",
            "19": "blank page19 0625/01/o/n/03",
            "20": "blank page20 0625/01/o/n/03"
        },
        "0625_w03_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14printed pages and 2blank pages. mml 4505 11/02 s53489/2 \u00a9 ucles 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2  theory october/november 2003 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. university ofcambridge local examinations syndicate centre number candidate number name read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer allquestions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "1(a)the block of wood in fig. 1.1 will balance on a horizontal table. fig. 1.1 if the block is tilted slightly clockwise about ab, it returns to its original position when released. (i)on fig. 1.1, mark with the letter g where the centre of mass of the block might be. (ii)small masses are added to the top pqrs of the block until it is just about totopple (fall over). fig. 1.2 shows a side view of the block. fig. 1.2 on fig. 1.2, draw a line along which the centre of mass of the arrangement mustnow lie. [2]apsabpqr s2 0625/02/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "3": "(b)fig. 1.3 shows two ways of using a laboratory retort stand. fig. 1.3 which diagram shows the safer arrangement? . give a reason for your choice. ..  [2] (c)some office filing cabinets have a mechanism that allows only one drawer to be opened at a time, as shown in fig. 1.4. fig. 1.4 suggest why they have this mechanism. ..  [1]ab3 0625/02/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "4": "2a wheel is rotating at approximately 2 revolutions per second. describe how you would use a stopwatch to measure as accurately as possible the time for one revolution of the wheel. make sure you include all the relevant information. . ... ... [5] 3fig. 3.1 shows a rock-fall down a mountain-side. fig. 3.1 the rocks higher up the mountain were disturbed by something and they roll down the mountain until they stop at the bottom. in the boxes below, write the name of the type ofenergy being described. before they fall, the rocks have this energy because of their position. as the rocks are falling,  their energy is changing to these other types of energy. at the bottom, the only energy  retained by the rocks is this typeof energy. [5]loose rocks mountain4 0625/02/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "5": "4(a)a farmer has two vehicles with the same weight and the same number of wheels. fig. 4.1 shows what the wheels on these two vehicles look like. vehicle 1 vehicle 2 fig. 4.1 which vehicle should the farmer use when driving across his fields when the ground isvery soft? give your reasons. vehicle reasons ... . ..  [4] (b) (i) if you stepped on the point of a sharp nail with your bare foot, it would be extremely painful. explain, in terms of pressure, why this is so. .. .. (ii)a person can lie on a bed of nail-points if there is a large number of nails. explain why this is notextremely painful. .. .. [5]5 0625/02/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "6": "5fig. 5.1 shows two parallel rays of light, ab and cd, in a symmetrical glass block. fig. 5.1 (a)on fig. 5.1, (i)draw the ray ab before it entered the block at a, (ii)draw the normal at b, (iii)draw a ray which could emerge into the air at b, (iv)draw the normal at d, (v)draw a ray which could emerge into the air at d. [5] (b)state two things about the directions of the two rays emerging from the block. 1.  .. 2.   [2] (c)what might happen to a third ray in the block, parallel to the others, which reached the point p?  [1]glass block ab cdp     6 0625/02/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "7": "6(a)here are three quantities that are associated with waves in the electromagnetic spectrum. speed, wavelength, frequency (i)which of these is the same in a vacuum for both x-rays and radio waves? .. (ii)which of these determines the colour of a ray of light? .. (iii)which of these is the distance between two successive wavecrests? .. [3] (b)which region of the electromagnetic spectrum has the shortest wavelength?  [1]7 0625/02/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "8": "7(a)the resistance of a piece of wire of constant diameter depends on its length. on the axes of fig. 7.1, sketch a graph to show how the resistance of the wire varies with length. [2] fig. 7.1 (b)a reel contains 50 m of insulated wire. the ends of the wire are connected to thecircuit shown in fig. 7.2, so that the resistance of the wire can be found. fig. 7.2 (i)what sort of meter is meter 1? ... [1] (ii)complete the sentence: \u201cmeter 1 is measuring the .across the coil of wire.\u201d [1] (iii)what sort of meter is meter 2? ... [1] (iv)complete the sentence: \u201cmeter 2 is measuring the .in the coil of wire.\u201d [1]50 m meter 1 meter 2+ \u20130resistance length 08 0625/02/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "9": "(v)the dials of the meters are shown in figs. 7.3(a) and 7.3(b). fig. 7.3(a) fig. 7.3(b) from the readings, calculate the resistance of the coil of wire. resistance of coil =  [5] (vi)what is the resistance per metre of the wire? resistance per metre = .. [2]0.3 0.4 0.50.2 0.1 0 a5678 9 10432 1 0 v9 0625/02/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "10": "8fig. 8.1 shows the view, from above, of a sheet of cardboard on top of a bar magnet. the dotted line is the outline of the bar magnet. fig. 8.1 (a)describe how the pattern of the magnetic field round the bar magnet can be shownexperimentally. if you wish, you may draw on fig. 8.1 as well as write on the linesbelow. ..   [4] (b)state how you would identify the north pole of the magnet. ..  [1]10 0625/02/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "9(a)when a nucleus decays by emitting an /afii9825-particle, what happens to (i)the number of neutrons in the nucleus, .. (ii)the number of protons in the nucleus, .. (iii)the charge on the nucleus? .. [5] (b)on 1st january 1900, a sample of a particular radioactive nuclide had an activity of 3200 count / min. the nuclide has a half-life of 22 years. calculate the activity of thenuclide remaining in the sample on 1st january 1966. activity = . count / min [4]11 0625/02/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "12": "10in a spring-stretching experiment, the following values were found for the extension of the spring. (a)plot these values on the axes of fig. 10.1. [3] fig. 10.1 (b)a mistake was made with measuring one of the extensions. on the table above, put a circle around the incorrect extension. [1] (c)after a load of about 5 n, the graph begins to curve upwards. suggest what is happening to the spring when the load is greater than 5 n. ..  [1] (d)describe how you would measure the extensions if you were doing this experiment. ..  [3]050100150200 02468 1 0 load / nextension / mm12 0625/02/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use load / n 01234567 01 6 4 54 86 48 0 1 0 4 1 5 0 extension / mm",
            "13": "11fig. 11.1 shows a mercury-in-glass thermometer, calibrated in \u00b0c. fig. 11.1 (a) (i) what temperature would the thermometer read if put in steam, just above boiling water at standard pressure? ... \u00b0c (ii)what temperature would the thermometer read if put in pure melting ice? ... \u00b0c (iii)on fig. 11.1, mark where the end of the mercury thread might be when thethermometer is in a freezer, where the temperature is well below the freezingpoint of water. [3] (b)the mercury-in-glass thermometer uses the expansion of a liquid to measuretemperature. state another physical property that can be used to measure temperature.  [1]\u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00bac13 0625/02/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "14": "12in a country where the mains electricity supply is 240 v, the transformer in fig. 12.1 is used to enable a 6 v lamp to be lit. fig. 12.1 (a)calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil if the lamp is to be lit atnormal brightness. number of turns =  [3] (b)without further calculation, state the number of secondary turns needed to light, atnormal brightness, (i)two identical 6 v lamps in parallel i.e. number of turns =  (ii)two identical 6 v lamps in series i.e.number of turns =  [2]a bab240 v mains8000turns6vlampa b14 0625/02/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "15": "blank page15 0625/02/o/n/03",
            "16": "blank page16 0625/02/o/n/03"
        },
        "0625_w03_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. mml 4504 11/02 s53411/2 \u00a9ucles 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/03 paper 3 october/november 2003 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.centre number candidate number name university ofcambridge local examinations syndicate for examiner\u2019s use 87654321 9 10 11 totalread these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.",
            "2": "1fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a bus during tests. at time t = 0, the driver starts to brake. fig. 1.1 (a)for test 1, (i)determine how long the bus takes to stop, .. (ii)state which part of the graph shows the greatest deceleration, .. (iii)use the graph to determine how far the bus travels in the first 2 seconds. distance = .. [4] (b)for test 2, a device was fitted to the bus. the device changed the deceleration. (i)state two ways in which the deceleration during test 2 is different from that during test 1. 1 . .. 2 . .. (ii)calculate the value of the deceleration in test 2. deceleration =  [4]10 8 6 4 2 0 9 7 5p q r 3 101020speed time t / sm / s 515 test 2 graph test 1 graph2 0625/03/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s  use",
            "3": "(c)fig. 1.2 shows a sketch graph of the magnitude of the acceleration for the bus when it is travelling around a circular track at constant speed. fig. 1.2 (i)use the graph to show that there is a force of constant magnitude acting on thebus. .. .. (ii)state the direction of this force. .. [3]00magnitude of acceleration time3 0625/03/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use",
            "4": "2fig. 2.1 shows a diver 50 m below the surface of the water. fig. 2.1 (a)the density of water is 1000 kg/m3and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. calculate the pressure that the water exerts on the diver. pressure =  [3] (b)the window in the diver\u2019s helmet is 150 mm wide and 70 mm from top to bottom. calculate the force that the water exerts on this window. force = .. [3]50 mwater surface4 0625/03/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s  use",
            "5": "3fig. 3.1 shows a simple see-saw. one child a sits near to end x and another child b sits near to end y . the feet of the children do not touch the ground when the see-saw isbalanced. fig. 3.1 (a)child a has a mass of 18.0 kg and child b has a mass of 20.0 kg. without calculation, indicate where the children could sit so that the see-saw balances horizontally. y ou may draw on fig. 3.1 if you wish. .. ..  [2] (b)state the relationship between the moment caused by child a and that caused by  child b. ..  [1] (c)child a is 2.50 m from the pivot. calculate the distance of child b from the pivot. distance =  [2]xy pivot5 0625/03/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use",
            "6": "4fig. 4.1 shows water being heated by an electrical heater. the water in the can is not boiling, but some is evaporating. fig. 4.1 (a)describe, in terms of the movement and energies of the water molecules, howevaporation takes place. ..   [2] (b)state two differences between evaporation and boiling.1 . .. .. 2 . ..  [2] (c)after the water has reached its boiling point, the mass of water in the can is reduced by 3.2 g in 120 s. the heater supplies energy to the water at a rate of 60 w. use this information to calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water. specific latent heat = . [3]heatercan water6 0625/03/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s  use",
            "7": "5(a)equal volumes of nitrogen, water and copper at 20 \u00b0c are heated to 50 \u00b0c. (i)which one of the three will have a much greater expansion than the other two? .. (ii)explain your answer in terms of the way the molecules are arranged in the three substances. ..  [3] (b)fig. 5.1 shows a thermometer with a range of \u201310 \u00b0c to 50 \u00b0c. fig. 5.1 explain what is meant by (i)the sensitivity of a thermometer,  (ii)the linearity of a thermometer.  [2]\u201310  \u00b0c5 0 \u00b0c7 0625/03/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use",
            "8": "6fig. 6.1 shows the diffraction of waves by a narrow gap. p is a wavefront that has passed through the gap. fig. 6.1 (a)on fig. 6.1, draw three more wavefronts to the right of the gap. [3] (b)the waves travel towards the gap at a speed of 3 x 108m/s and have a frequency of  5 x 1014hz. calculate the wavelength of these waves. wavelength =  [3]p8 0625/03/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s  use",
            "9": "7fig. 7.1 is drawn to full scale. the focal length of the lens is 5.0 cm. fig. 7.1 (a)on fig. 7.1, mark each principal focus of the lens with a dot and the letter f . [2] (b)on fig. 7.1, draw tworays from the tip of the object o that appear to pass through the tip of the image. [2] (c)on fig. 7.1, draw the image and label it with the letter i. [1] (d)explain why the base of the image lies on the axis. ..  [1] (e)state a practical use of a convex lens when used as shown in fig. 7.1.  [1]axisoo9 0625/03/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use",
            "10": "8fig. 8.1 shows the outline of an a.c. generator. the peak output voltage of the generator is 6.0 v and the output has a frequency of 10 hz. fig. 8.1 (a)fig. 8.2 shows the axes of a voltage-time graph for the generator output. fig. 8.2 on fig. 8.2, (i)mark suitable voltage values on the voltage axis, (ii)draw a graph of the generator output. [3]voltage  / v time  / s0.3 0.2 0.100output rings connected one to each end of coilcoil iron core bearing handle to turn coiln s10 0625/03/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s  use",
            "11": "(b)the generator shown in fig. 8.1 works by electromagnetic induction. explain how this effect produces the output voltage. ..  [3] (c)state the energy changes that occur in the generator when it is producing output.  [2]11 0625/03/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use",
            "12": "9(a)fig. 9.1 shows the screen of a c.r.o. (cathode-ray oscilloscope). the c.r.o. is being used to display the output from a microphone.the vertical scale on the screen is in volts. fig. 9.1 (i)describe the output from the microphone.  (ii)use the graph to determine the peak voltage of the output. .. (iii)describe how you could check that the voltage calibration on the screen is correct. .. .. [4]2 1 \u20141 \u201420voltage  / v12 0625/03/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s  use",
            "13": "(b)fig. 9.2 shows the screen of the c.r.o. when it is being used to measure a small time interval between two voltage pulses. fig. 9.2 (i)what is the distance on the screen between the two voltage pulses? .. (ii)the time-base control of the c.r.o. is set at 5.0 ms / cm. calculate the time interval between the voltage pulses. time =  (iii)suggest one example where a c.r.o. can be used to measure a small time interval. .. [4]cm scale05 6 7 9 1 0 4 3 2 1813 0625/03/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use",
            "14": "10fig. 10.1 shows a battery with an e.m.f of 12 v supplying power to two lamps. the total power supplied is 150 w when both lamps are on. fig. 10.1 (a)calculate the current supplied by the battery when both lamps are on. current = .. [2] (b)the current in lamp l2is 5.0 a. calculate (i)the current in lamp l1, current =  (ii)the power of lamp l1, power = .. (iii)the resistance of lamp l1. resistance = ... [6]l1 l214 0625/03/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s  use",
            "15": "11 (a) a sodium nucleus decays by the emission of a /afii9826-particle to form magnesium. (i)complete the decay equation below. 24 11na\u2192 mg + (ii)fig. 11.1 shows /afii9826-particles from sodium nuclei moving into the space between the poles of a magnet. fig. 11.1 describe the path of the /afii9826-particles between the magnetic poles. ..  [5] (b)very small quantities of a radioactive isotope are used to check the circulation of blood by injecting the isotope into the bloodstream. (i)describe how the results are obtained.  (ii)explain why a  /afii9828-emitting isotope is used for this purpose rather than one that emits either /afii9825-particles or /afii9826-particles. .. [4]n s/afii9826-particles15 0625/03/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s  use",
            "16": "blank page16 0625/03/o/n/03"
        },
        "0625_w03_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 5printed pages, 3blank pages and an inserted answer booklet. sp (at/ks) s52607/3 \u00a9 ucles 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test october/november 2003 1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as specified in the confidential instructions read these instructions first follow the instructions on the front cover of the answer booklet. write your answers in the spaces provided in the answer booklet. answer allquestions. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made. an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is notrequired. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.",
            "2": "2 0625/05/o/n/031in this experiment, you are to investigate the rate of cooling of water in two different containers. record all of your observations and readings on pages 2 and 3 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. fig. 1.1 fig 1.2 (a)place a thermometer in the test-tube of water. place the second thermometer in the beaker of water. (b) (i) measure the temperature  \u03b8 of the water in the test-tube. record \u03b8in table aat time t= 0 s. start the stopclock. (ii) when the stopclock reads 30 s, record in table bthe temperature \u03b8 of the water in the beaker.  (iii) when the stopclock reads 60 s, record in table athe temperature of the water in the test-tube. (iv) when the stopclock reads 90 s, record in table bthe temperature of the water in the beaker. (v) when the stopclock reads 120 s, record in table athe temperature of the water in the test-tube. (vi) continue taking alternate readings from the two thermometers so that you havetemperature readings in table aat 180 s, 240 s and 300 s and temperature readings in table bat 150 s, 210 s and 270 s. (c)complete the temperature and time column headings in the tables. (d) (i) using the readings in table a, plot a graph of  \u03b8/\u00b0c (y-axis) against t/s (x-axis). draw the best-fit line for the plotted points. label the line \u2018test-tube\u2019. (ii) using the same axes, plot the readings in table b. draw the best-fit line for the plotted points. label the line \u2018beaker\u2019. (e)state whether the water in the beaker or the water in the test-tube cooled more quickly. justifyyour answer by reference to your graph.water beakerthermometer water test-tubethermometer",
            "3": "3 0625/05/o/n/03 [turn over2in this experiment, you are to find the position of the centre of mass of an object. record all of your observations and answers on page 4 of the answer booklet.carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.y ou are provided with a shaped sample of plasticine. do not change its shape . fig. 2.1 (a)place the metre rule on the pivot so that the 50.0 cm mark is directly over the pivot. (b)place the 50 g mass on the metre rule so that its centre is at the 30.0 cm mark. record the distance xfrom the 30 cm mark to the pivot. (c)place the plasticine on the metre rule with the thickest end nearer the pivot (see fig. 2.1).move the plasticine until the rule balances (do not change the position of the 50 g mass or thepivot). measure and record the distance ybetween the pivot and the end of the plasticine nearer the pivot (see fig. 2.1). (d)calculate the distance dbetween the centre of mass of the plasticine and the pivot using the equation d=kx, where k= 1.25. (e)calculate the distance tbetween the thicker end of the plasticine and its centre of mass using the equation t= (d\u2013y). (f)move the 50 g mass so that x= 30.0 cm. the pivot must still be at the 50.0 cm mark. repeat steps (c)\u2013(e). (g)calculate the average value for t.metre ruleplasticine 50 g mass pivotx y",
            "4": "4 0625/05/o/n/033in this experiment, you are to investigate reflection in a plane mirror. record all of your observations and answers on page 7 of the answer booklet. the ray trace sheet must be tied into the answer booklet in front of page 6 after you have completed the experiment. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1.  fig. 3.1 (a)draw a straight line efacross the middle of the ray trace sheet and another line ghdown the middle of the sheet, as shown in fig. 3.1. the hole must be at the top right-hand corner. (b)place the ray trace sheet on the pin board. place the mirror so that its front surface standsalong the line ef. (c)push a pin ainto the surface at a point near the bottom left-hand corner of the sheet about 3 cm from each edge. (d)push another pin binto the surface at a point near the mirror and to the left of the line gh. (e)view the images of the pins aandbfrom the direction indicated in fig. 3.1. push in two pins canddbetween your eye and the mirror so that c,dand the images of aandbappear exactly one behind the other.  (f)mark the positions of pins a,b,canddon the ray trace sheet. remove the pins and the mirror. using a rule, draw a line joining aandband continue the line to meet the line ef. (g)repeat the steps (b)to(f)using the same position of pin abut a position of pin bthat is about 1 cm to the left of the original position. (h)extend both cdlines to the point behind the mirror where they meet. mark this position x. (i)draw the line xa. mark the position where the line xacuts ef. label this point y. (j)measure and record the distances ayandyx. (k)theory predicts that ay=yx. suggest a reason why, in spite of carrying out the experiment with care, your values of ayandyxmay be slightly different. (l)state and explain the reason for oneprecaution that you took to gain an accurate result. tie your ray trace sheet in front of page 6 of the answer booklet.g hef ab eyehole mirror",
            "5": "5 0625/05/o/n/034in this experiment, you will investigate the voltage across a wire. record all of your observations and answers on page 8 of your answer booklet.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig 4.1, which shows the circuit that has been set up for you. fig. 4.1 (a)place the sliding contact con the resistance wire abat a distance xfrom awhere x= 0.200 m.  (b)record the value of x. (c)switch on and, using the voltmeter, record the voltage vacross ac. (d)take the sliding contact away from the wire aband switch off. (e)calculate the voltage kper unit length of the wire using the equation k= . (f)repeat steps (b)\u2013(e)with the sliding contact at distances of x= 0.400 m and x= 0.800 m from a. (g)complete the column headings in the table. (h)within the limits of experimental error, what do you conclude about the variation of voltagewith distance along the wire? justify your conclusion by reference to your table of results.v xvxpower source a bc",
            "6": "6 0625/05/o/n/03blank page",
            "7": "7 0625/05/o/n/03blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/05/o/n/03blank page"
        },
        "0625_w03_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11printed pages and 1blank page. mml 4504 11/02 s53410/3 \u00a9 ucles 2003 [turn overcambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2003 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.centre number candidate number name university ofcambridge local examinations syndicate for examiner\u2019s use 21 3 45 totalread these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer allquestions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.",
            "2": "1(a)a student was asked to make some measurements of the test-tube shown in fig. 1.1. he was given a 1 m length of thin string and a metre rule and instructed to determineas accurately as possible the circumference of the tube. the student used the rule to measure the diameter dof the tube and then calculated the circumference cusing the equation c= /afii9843d. describe how the student could have obtained a more accurate result with theapparatus given. you may draw on fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 .. ..  [2] (b) (i) on fig. 1.2, show where you would place two small rectangular blocks of wood to help you make an accurate measurement of the overall length of the test-tube. fig. 1.2 (ii)the test-tube is shown actual size in fig. 1.2. use your rule to measure the length l of the test-tube. l= .. [2]2 0625/06/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "3": "(c)using another test-tube, the student obtained these readings. l= 14.5 cm c= 5.3 cm calculate the approximate external volume vof the test-tube using the student\u2019s readings and the equation c2l v=\u2013\u2013 . 4/afii9843 v=  [2] (d)the equation used in (c)assumes the test-tube to be a cylinder with flat ends. it does not allow for the rounded end of the test-tube. (i)estimate the volume vmof the \u2018missing\u2019 part of the cylinder shown shaded in fig. 1.3. fig. 1.3 vm= ... (ii)using your values for vand vm, calculate the actual external volume vaof the test-tube. va= ... [2]3 0625/06/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "4": "2fig. 2.1 shows a ray tracing sheet obtained by a student carrying out a reflection of light experiment using pins and a plane mirror. fig. 2.1 the student looks into the mirror mm' and views the images of pins aandb. he then places pinscanddso that pins c anddand the images of pins aandbappear to be in line. (a)on fig. 2.1, (i)draw the incident ray in this experiment, (ii)draw the reflected ray, (iii)draw a normal at the point where the incident ray meets the mirror, (iv)measure the angle of incidence i. i= ... [3]bc e adfmmirror m'4 0625/06/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "5": "(b)the student moves pin band then repeats the experiment, obtaining the reflected ray ef. (i)on fig. 2.1, continue the lines cd and efbehind the mirror to find the point where they meet. label this point x. (ii)draw the line ax. label with the letter ythe point where line ax crosses the mirror mm'. (iii)use your rule to measure the distances ayandyx. ay= ... yx= ... [2] (c)according to theory, ay=yx. suggest why, in spite of very careful work, the student\u2019s values may have been slightly different. ..  [1]5 0625/06/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "6": "3(a)fig. 3.1 shows the scale of an ammeter. draw the position of the pointer when the ammeter reading is 0.35 a. [1] fig. 3.1 (b)the ammeter was used in the circuit shown in fig. 3.2 to investigate the current in alamp. fig. 3.2 (i)name the component labelled y. ...vaya1.00.80.6 0.4 0.2 06 0625/06/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "7": "(ii)the table shows the current iin the lamp for different values of the p.d. vacross the lamp. 1.calculate the values for the resistance rof the lamp, using the equation r= . write your answers in the table. 2.complete the column headings in the table. (iii)suggest how the value of vcould be varied. .. .. [8] (c)fig. 3.3 shows a power source connected to three resistors labelled x,yandz. fig. 3.3 complete the diagram to show (i)a voltmeter connected to measure the voltage across the resistors, (ii)an ammeter connected to measure the current in resistor xonly, (iii)connecting wires to complete the circuit. [3]x y zpower sourcev \u2013i7 0625/06/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use v/ i/ r/ 1.9 0.31 1.5 0.260.8 0.20",
            "8": "4the igcse class was studying the acceleration aof a toy truck that was pulled along a track by a force f. the arrangement is shown in fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 the results obtained are shown in the table. (a)plot a graph of f/n  ( y-axis) against a/( m/s2) (x-axis). draw the line of best fit through your points. [6]ftruck8 for examiner\u2019s use f/n a/( m/s2) 0.5 0.35 1.0 0.721.5 1.022.0 1.442.5 1.74 0625/06/o/n/03",
            "9": "(b)theory suggests that the relationship between force and acceleration is given by the equation f=ma, where mis the mass of the truck. the gradient of the graph is equal to the mass of the truck. from the graph, determine the mass mof the truck. show clearly how you obtained the necessary information. m=  [4]9 0625/06/o/n/03 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "10": "5a student wants to find out which of the three materials is the best thermal insulator. the student\u2019s apparatus at the beginning of each test is as shown in fig. 5.1. fig. 5.1 each beaker is surrounded by a different insulating material. the water is allowed to cool and the temperatures are recorded at different times. the student is unable to write acorrect conclusion because the variables have not been controlled. (a)study fig. 5.1 and then state two ways in which you would improve the control of variables.1.  .. .. 2.  ..  [2] (b)state the reading shown on the thermometer shown in fig. 5.2. fig. 5.2 temperature reading .. [1]110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0\u00b0c200 cm3 of water at 80\u00b0c100 cm3 of water at 80\u00b0c100 cm3 of water at 70\u00b0c material 1 material 2material 3 beaker a beaker b beaker c10 0625/06/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "(c)the graph of fig. 5.3 shows the results obtained by the student. the graph lines a,bandccorrespond to the beakers a,bandc. fig. 5.3 which beaker cools the most quickly in the first 60 s? ... [1]8090 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 00 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200a b ctemperature / \u00b0c time / s11 0625/06/o/n/03for examiner\u2019s use",
            "12": "blank page12 0625/06/o/n/03"
        }
    },
    "2004": {
        "0625_s04_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education  physics0625/01 paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2004  45 minutes additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)                    read these instructions first   write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.   write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided   unless this has been done for you.  there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers  a,b,c, and d.  choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.  read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.   any rough working should be done in this booklet.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib04 06_0625_01/3rp   \uf6d9 ucles 2004 [turn over",
            "2": "2 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/041the diagram shows a measuring cylinder.  102030405060708090100 which unit would be most suitable for its scale?  amm2bmm3ccm2dcm3 2 a piece of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.  1 c m 23456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6cotton when the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.  pensix turns of cotton what is the distance once round the pen? a 2.2 cm b 2.6 cm c 13.2 cm d 15.6 cm",
            "3": "3 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/04  [turn over3the diagram shows the speed-time graph for an object moving at constant speed.  2 0 0 3 4 time / sspeed m/s 1 12 what is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3s? a1.5 m b2.0 m c3.0 m d6.0 m 4 a small steel ball is dropped from a low balcony.  ignoring air resistance, which statement describes its motion?  a it falls with constant acceleration.  b it falls with constant speed.  c it falls with decreasing acceleration. d it falls with decreasing speed.  5which statement about the mass of a falling object is correct?  ait decreases as the object falls.  bit is equal to the weight of the object.  cit is measured in newtons.  dit stays the same as the object falls. ",
            "4": "4 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/046 the weights of four objects, 1 to 4, are compared using a balance.  12 32 4 2 which object is the lightest?  a object 1 b object 2 c object 3 d object 4  7 which of the following is a unit of density?  acm3/g bg/c m2 cg/c m3 dkg / m2 8a piece of card has its centre of mass at m.   which diagram shows how it hangs when suspended by a thread?  ab c d m mmm 9 an experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.  the results are shown below.  load/n 0 1 2  3   length/ cm 15.2 16.2  18.6   extension/cm 0 1.0 2.1  3.4   which figure is missing from the table?  a 16.5  b  17.3  c  17.4  d  18.3 ",
            "5": "5 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/04  [turn over10 the diagram shows a man diving into water.  which form of energy is increasing as he falls?  a chemical  b gravitational  c kinetic d strain  11 a boy and a girl run up a hill in the same time.  boy weighs 600 n girl weighs 500 n the boy weighs more than the girl.  which statement is true about the power produced?  a the boy produces more power.  b the girl produces more power.  c they both produce the same power. d it is impossible to tell who produces more power. ",
            "6": "6 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/0412 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer. the barometer reading is hcm of mercury.  mercur ys h what is the pressure at s?  a approximately zero  b atmospheric pressure  c atmospheric pressure + hcm of mercury  dhcm of mercury  13two boys x and y each have the same total weight and are standing on soft ground.  xy which boy is more likely to sink into the soft ground and why?  boy more likely to sink pressure on soft  ground a x larger than y  b x smaller than y  c y larger than x  d y smaller than x ",
            "7": "7 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/04  [turn over14a student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.  handletrapped air direction of motion what happens to the pressure and to the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed  in? pressure volume  a decreases decreases  b decreases remains the same  c increases decreases  d increases remains the same  15 a balloon is inflated in a cold room. when the room becomes much warmer, the balloon becomes  larger. how does the behaviour of the air molecules in the balloon explain this?  athe molecules become larger.  bthe molecules evaporate.  cthe molecules move more quickly.  dthe molecules repel each other. ",
            "8": "8 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/0416 a substance is heated at a steady rate. it changes from a solid to a liquid, and then to a gas.  the graph shows how its temperature changes with time.  temperature timepqrs which parts of the graph show a change of state taking place?  a p and r  b p and s  c q and r  d q and s  17 an engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. the rod is just too big to fit into the hole  of the washer.  steel rodsteel washer how can the engineer fit the washer onto the rod?  a cool the washer and put it over the rod  b cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together  c heat the rod and then place it in the hole d heat the washer and place it over the rod ",
            "9": "9 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/04  [turn over18an experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. balls are stuck with  wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram x.  the rods are heated at one end. some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram y.  which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat?  before heating after heatingh      e      a      t h      e      a      tdiagram x diagram y abcd 19 thermometer x is held above an ice cube and thermometer y is held the same distance below  the ice cube. after several minutes, the reading on one thermometer changes. the ice cube does  not melt.  ice cubethermometer x thermometer y which thermometer reading changes and why?  thermometer reason  a x cool air rises from the ice cube  b x warm air rises from the ice cube  c y cool air falls from the ice cube  d y warm air falls from the ice cube ",
            "10": "10 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/0420 water waves change direction when they move from shallow water to deep water.  shallow waterdeep wateroriginal wave directionnew wav e direction what is the name of this effect?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection d refraction  21 a vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at p. in two seconds, three wave crests are  produced on the surface of the water.  p xy wave crests which statement is true?  a distance x is the amplitude of the waves.  b distance y is the wavelength of the waves.  c each circle represents a wavefront.  d the frequency of the waves is 3hz.",
            "11": "11 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/04  [turn over22 a plane mirror is on a wall.  which is a correct description of the image formed by the mirror?  a the right way up and smaller than the object  b the right way up and the same size as the object  c upside down and smaller than the object d upside down and the same size as the object  23the diagram shows a ray of light entering a block of glass.  12 3 4normal air glassray of light which numbered angles are the angles of incidence and of refraction?  angle of incidence angle of refraction  a 1 3  b 1 4  c 2 3  d 2 4 ",
            "12": "12 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/0424 three rays of light fall on a converging lens as shown.  lens which diagram shows the path of the rays after passing through the lens?  ab cd 25 which type of wave cannot  travel through a vacuum?  a infra-red radiation  b microwaves  c sound waves  d x-rays ",
            "13": "13 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/04  [turn over26 an engineer standing at p hears the sound of an explosion at x.  z y x w vp danger -  blasting after the explosion, she hears two bangs. one bang is heard a fraction of a second after the  other. the second bang is an echo from  a xy.  b pv.  c zy. d wx.  27 how can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?  a cool the magnet for a long time  b hit the magnet repeatedly with a hammer  c leave the magnet in a coil which carries direct current d pass a small current through the magnet  28 an electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals.  why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet?  ait is a good conductor of electricity.  bit forms a permanent magnet.  cit has a high density.  dit has a high thermal capacity. ",
            "14": "14 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/0429which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the  cell? a b c d v vv v 30a polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.  what charges must the rod and the balloon carry?  athe rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.  bthe rod and the balloon carry like charges.  cthe rod is charged but the balloon is not.  dthe balloon is charged but the rod is not.  31an electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to  be varied from bright to dim.  z what should be connected at z?  ab c d v",
            "15": "15 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/04  [turn over32 the circuit shown contains four lamps and three switches.  lamp 1 lamp 2lamp 3lamp 4switch 1 switch 3switch 2  which switches must be closed to light only lamps 1 and 3?  a switch 1 only  b switch 1 and switch 2 only  c switch 1 and switch 3 only  d switch 2 and switch 3 only  33 the diagram shows a torch containing two 2 v cells, a switch and a lamp.  plastic case brass connecting stripswitch lamp what is the circuit diagram for the torch?  c b a d",
            "16": "16 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/0434 which statement is correct?  a a fuse is included in a circuit to prevent the current becoming too high.  b a fuse should be connected to the neutral wire in a plug.  c an electric circuit will only work if it includes a fuse. d an earth wire is needed to prevent the fuse blowing.  35 a straight wire carrying a current produces a magnetic field.  which diagram shows the correct shape of the field?  current current current currentab cd",
            "17": "17 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/04  [turn over36 a student carries out an experiment to see the effect of a magnetic field on a wire carrying a  current. the wire moves upwards as shown.  direction of currentnswire moves upwards what should the student do to make the wire move downwards?  achange the direction of the current  bmove the poles of the magnet closer together  csend a smaller current through the wire  duse a stronger magnet  37 a beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.  ++++++ ______cathode rays in which direction is the beam deflected? a into the page  b out of the page  c towards the bottom of the page d towards the top of the page ",
            "18": "18 \uf6d9 ucles 2004 0625/01/m/j/0438 which line correctly describes \u03b1-particles? electric charge penetrates 1cm of aluminium?  a negative yes  b negative no  c positive yes  d positive no  39 a small amount of a radioactive isotope contains 72 billion unstable nuclei. the half-life of the  isotope is 4 hours.  how many unstable nuclei would remain after 12 hours?  a 6 billion  b 9 billion  c 18 billion d 24 billion  40 how many nucleons are in a nucleus of  k39 19? a 19 b 20 c 39 d 58 ",
            "19": "19 0625/01/m/j/04  blank page ",
            "20": "20 university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles) , which is itself a department  of the university of cambridge.  0625/01/m/j/04blank page "
        },
        "0625_s04_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 17printed pages and 3blank pages. spa (nh/bi) s61205/2 \u00a9ucles 2004 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2 may/june 2004 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer  all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2).centre number candidate number name if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "2 0625/02 m/j/041the clock on a public building has a bell that strikes each hour so that people who cannot see the clock can know what hour of the day it is. at precisely 6 o\u2019clock, the clock starts to strike. it strikes 6 times.at the first strike of the bell, a man\u2019s wrist-watch is as shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 when the bell strikes for the sixth time, the wrist-watch is as shown in fig. 1.2. fig. 1.2 (a)calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 6th strike. time interval = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 s [1] (b)calculate the time interval between one strike and the next. time interval = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026s [2] (c)at precisely 11 o\u2019clock, the clock starts to strike. calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 11th strike. time interval = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026s [2]121 11 2 10 3 9 4 8 5 76121 11 2 10 3 9 4 8 5 76for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "3": "3 0625/02 m/j/04 [turn over2fig. 2.1 shows a hinged rail in a fence. the rail has to be lifted vertically in order to let people through. fig. 2.1 (a)on fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of the smallest force that would be needed to begin to raise the rail. [3] (b)what is the correct physics term for the turning effect of a force? tick one box. force work momentmovement [1] (c)suggest one way the designer of the fence could have reduced the force needed to lift the rail. .. ..[1]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004hinge rail",
            "4": "4 0625/02 m/j/043fig. 3.1 shows the speed-time graph of part of a short journey made by a cyclist. fig. 3.1 (a)which part of fig. 3.1 shows when the cyclist is travelling at constant speed? ..[1] (b)state what is happening during the rest of the journey shown in fig. 3.1. ..[1] (c) (i) calculate the distance travelled during the first 50 s. distance travelled = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026... m (ii) calculate the distance travelled between 50 s and 100 s. distance travelled = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026... mtime/sspeed m/s 005101520pq r25 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "5": "5 0625/02 m/j/04 [turn over(iii) calculate the total distance travelled. total distance travelled = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026... m (iv) calculate the average speed during the 100 s. average speed = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026... m/s [8]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "6": "6 0625/02 m/j/044(a)fig. 4.1 shows a person pulling a loaded barrow along a path from a to b at a steady speed. fig. 4.1 state the two quantities you need to know in order to be able to calculate the work done by the person. 1.  .. 2.  ..[2] (b)another person pulls an identical barrow and load from a to b, but this person pulls much harder than the person in (a). describe what happens to the second person\u2019s barrow. .. ..[2] (c) (i) state which person has the greater power between a and b. ... (ii) give two reasons for your answer to (c)(i) . reason 1  reason 2 ... [3]abfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "7": "7 0625/02 m/j/04 [turn over5fig. 5.1 shows a shallow dish containing a liquid that evaporates easily. the bulb of a thermometer is held in the liquid. a jet of air is blown over the surface of the liquid, so that theliquid evaporates rapidly. fig. 5.1 (a)state what happens to the reading shown on the thermometer. ..[1] (b)explain your answer to (a)in terms of the behaviour of the molecules of the liquid. .. [2] (c)state one example in everyday life where the effect demonstrated by this experiment occurs. ..[1]jet of air liquid shallow dishthermometerfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "8": "8 0625/02 m/j/046(a)when a certain amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated aluminium, the temperature of the aluminium rises by 1 \u00b0c. fig. 6.1 in what form does the aluminium store the energy that has been supplied? ..[1] (b)the same amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated copper, as shown in fig. 6.2. fig. 6.2 the temperature rise of the 1 kg copper block is greater than the temperature rise of the 1kg aluminium block in (a). explain, in terms of thermal capacity, why this is so. .. ..[2]1 kg copper inside a layer of insulation heat supplied to copper1 kg aluminium inside a layer of insulation heat supplied to aluminiumfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "9": "9 0625/02 m/j/04 [turn over7boy a throws a large stone into a large still pond, as illustrated in fig. 7.1. fig. 7.1 (a)girl b hears the \u2018plop\u2019 sound of the stone entering the water a very short time after she sees the splash, but it is many seconds before the water wave reaches the edge of thepond where she is sitting. use this information to decide which wave travels fastest and which travels slowest. write \u2018fastest\u2019 in one box and \u2018slowest\u2019 in another box. leave one box empty. sound wavelight wavewater wave [2] (b)in the boxes below, state whether each type of wave is a transverse or a longitudinal wave. sound wave light wavewater wave [3] (c)in the boxes below, put a tick alongside any of the types of wave that do notneed a substance in which to travel. sound wave light wavewater wave [1]fig. 7.1abfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "10": "10 0625/02 m/j/048a, b, c and d are an aluminium bar, an unmagnetised iron bar and two bar magnets. tests are performed to find out which bar is which. each row of fig. 8.1 shows what happens when two of the bars are placed end to end. fig. 8.1 which bar is which? complete the lines below. bar a is bar b is bar c is bar d is  [4]repel attract no effecta b a c b dfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "11": "\u00a9ucles 200411 0625/02 m/j/04 [turn over9some pond water becomes contaminated by the release of radioactive waste. the radioactivity of a sample of the contaminated water is tested every week for 5 weeks.the results are shown in the table below. (a)plot these values on fig. 9.1. [3] fig. 9.1 (b)draw the best curve through your points. [1] (c)use your graph to find the half-life of the radioactive material in the sample. show clearly on the graph how you obtained your answer. half-life of radioactive material = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 weeks [2] (d)if the sample of contaminated water used in the test had been smaller, state how this would have affected, if at all, (i)the activity readings, . (ii) the value of the half-life.  [2]00100200300400500600700800 123 5 46 time/weeksactivity  count/sfor examiner\u2019s use time/weeks 0 800 440 240 130 70 4012345 activity count/s",
            "12": "12 0625/02 m/j/0410 (a) one coil of a transformer is connected to a toy train set. the other coil is connected to a 240 v a.c. mains supply, as shown in fig. 10.1. fig. 10.1 (i)how can you tell from fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer? ... ...[1] (ii) calculate the voltage at which the toy train operates. toy train operates at \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 v [3] (iii) 1. the voltage of the mains supply is reduced. what happens to the voltage supplied to the train set? tick one box. increases decreasesstays the same 2.an attempt is made to use the train set in a country where the mains supply is 110 v. suggest one difference that might be noticed in the way the toy train operates. ... ... [2]secondary coil 200 turnsprimary coil 4800 turns240  v to train setfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "13": "13 0625/02 m/j/04 [turn over(b)fig. 10.2 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to operate an electric motor. fig. 10.2 below are sentences that describe stages of the process by which the circuit works. athe armature pivots and the contacts close. bthe core of the relay is magnetised. cthe switch is closed and the current flows through the coil. da  current flows through the motor, making it work. ethe core attracts the top part of the armature. put the sentences so that the stages are in the correct order. put the appropriate letters in the boxes below. one box has been filled in as an example. stage 1 is sentence stage 2 is sentencestage 3 is sentencestage 4 is sentencestage 5 is sentence [3]cpower supply for motorpivoted iron armature motor contacts relay coreswitchmfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "14": "\u00a9ucles 200414 0625/02 m/j/0411 (a) the list below contains the names of five different components that might be found in an electric circuit. capacitor light-dependent resistor resistor thermistor variable resistor which of these has (i)a resistance that falls rapidly when the temperature rises, ... (ii) a resistance that changes when a sliding contact is moved, ... (iii) a high resistance in the dark but a low resistance in daylight? ... [3] (b)a lamp shines with full brightness when connected to a 12 v battery, as shown in fig. 11.1. fig. 11.1 (i) 1. write down the equation that links resistance with p.d. and current. 2.the current in the lamp is 0.50 a. calculate the resistance of the lamp. resistance of lamp = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [4]lamp0.50  a12 vfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "15": "\u00a9ucles 200415 0625/02 m/j/04 [turn over(ii) a resistor is now connected in series with the lamp, as shown in fig. 11.2. fig. 11.2 1.state what happens to the current in the lamp when the resistor is added. ... 2.explain your answer. ... ... 3.suggest what change might be seen in the lamp. ... [3]lamp12 vfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "16": "\u00a9ucles 2004for examiner\u2019s use16 0625/02 m/j/0412 (a) a man looks at his reflection in a vertical mirror. this is shown from the side in fig. 12.1. fig. 12.1 (i)on fig. 12.1, accurately mark with a clear dot labelled bwhere the image of the tip aof the man\u2019s beard will be. (ii) on fig. 12.1, accurately draw a ray from the tip of the man\u2019s beard that reflects from the mirror and goes into his eye. y ou may use faint construction lines if you wish.use arrows to show the direction of the ray. (iii) the man can see the image, but it cannot be formed on a screen. what name is given to this type of image? ... (iv) write down the equation that links the angles of incidence and reflection that the ray makes with the mirror. [7]mirror a",
            "17": "17 0625/02 m/j/04(b)a girl looks into a bathroom mirror to brush her hair. fig. 12.2 shows what she sees in the mirror. fig. 12.2 (i)in which hand is she holding the brush? tick one box. left hand right hand (ii) she has a spot on her skin just below her left eye. mark clearly on fig. 12.2 where this will appear on the reflection. [2]reflection seen in mirrorfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "18": "18 0625/02 m/j/04blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/02 m/j/04blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/02 m/j/04blank page copyright acknowledgements: every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders. the publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose  rights we have unwittingly infringed. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s04_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 13printed pages and 3blank pages. spa (nh/bi) s61207/2 \u00a9ucles 2004 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/03 paper 3 may/june 2004 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer  all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.centre number candidate number name if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/03 m/j/041fig. 1.1 shows a cycle track. fig. 1.1 a cyclist starts at a and follows the path abcdeb. the speed-time graph is shown in fig. 1.2. fig. 1.2 (a)use information from fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2 to describe the motion of the cyclist (i)along ab, ... (ii) along bcdeb. ... ... [4]01 023456 30 40 50 10 20 60 70 80 90 100 time  / sspeed  m / s abc d ebab ec dv = 6 m/sfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "3": "3 0625/03 m/j/04 [turn over(b)the velocity vof the cyclist at c is shown in fig. 1.1. state one similarity and one difference between the velocity at c and the velocity at e. similarity  ... difference ..[2] (c)calculate (i)the distance along the cycle track from a to b, distance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 (ii) the circumference of the circular part of the track. circumference = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [4]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "4": "4 0625/03 m/j/042fig. 2.1 shows a rock that is falling from the top of a cliff into the river below. fig. 2.1 (a)the mass of the rock is 75 kg. the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. calculate the weight of the rock. weight = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026[1] (b)the rock falls from rest through a distance of 15 m before it hits the water. calculate its kinetic energy just before hitting the water. show your working. kinetic energy = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026[3] (c)the rock hits the water. suggest what happens to the kinetic energy of the rock during the impact. .. [3]cliff falling  rock riverfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "5": "5 0625/03 m/j/04 [turn over3a large spring is repeatedly stretched by an athlete to increase the strength of his arms. fig. 3.1 is a table showing the force required to stretch the spring. fig. 3.1 (a) (i) state hooke\u2019s law. ... ...[1] (ii) use the results in fig. 3.1 to show that the spring obeys hooke\u2019s law. [1] (b)another athlete using a different spring exerts an average force of 400 n to enable her to extend the spring by 0.210 m. (i)calculate the work done by this athlete in extending the spring once. work done = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 (ii) she is able to extend the spring by this amount and to release it 24 times in 60 s. calculate the power used by this athlete while doing this exercise. power = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [4]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004extension of spring/m 0.096 0.192 0.288 0.384 force exerted to produce extension/n 250 500 750 1000",
            "6": "6 0625/03 m/j/044(a)two identical open boxes originally contain the same volume of water. one is kept at 15 \u00b0c and the other at 85 \u00b0c for the same length of time. fig. 4.1 shows the final water levels. fig. 4.1 with reference to the energies of the water molecules, explain why the levels are different. .. ..[3] (b)in an experiment to find the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water, it took 34 500 j of energy to evaporate 15 g of water that was originally at 100 \u00b0c. a second experiment showed that 600 j of energy was lost to the atmosphere from the apparatus during the time it took to evaporate 15 g of water. calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water that would be obtained from this experiment. specific latent heat = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026[3]  85 \u00b0c15 \u00b0cfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "7": "7 0625/03 m/j/04 [turn over5(a)fig. 5.1 shows two identical metal plates. the front surface of one is dull black and the front surface of the other is shiny silver.the plates are fitted with heaters that keep the surfaces of the plates at the sametemperature. fig. 5.1 (i)state the additional apparatus needed to test which surface is the best emitter of heat radiation. ... (ii) state one precaution that is needed to ensure a fair comparison. ... ... (iii) state the result that you expect. ... (iv) write down another name for heat radiation. ... [4] (b)in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of an everyday situation in which a convection current occurs. mark the path of the current with a line and show its direction with arrows. [3]dull black shiny silverfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "8": "8 0625/03 m/j/046fig. 6.1 shows a ray pq of blue light incident on the side of a rectangular glass block. fig. 6.1 (a) (i) by drawing on fig. 6.1, continue the ray pq through and beyond the block. (ii) mark the angle of incidence at cd with the letter iand the angle of refraction at cd with the letter r. [3] (b)the speed of light in air is 3.0 x 108m/s and the speed of light in glass is 2.0 x 108m/s. (i)write down a formula that gives the refractive index of glass in terms of the speeds of light in air and glass. refractive index = (ii) use this formula to calculate the refractive index of glass. refractive index = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [2] (c)the frequency of the blue light in ray pq is 6.0 x 1014hz. calculate the wavelength of this light in air. wavelength = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..\u2026\u2026[2]ab d c q pglass air fig. 6.1for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "9": "9 0625/03 m/j/04 [turn over7fig. 7.1 shows the cone of a loudspeaker that is producing sound waves in air. at any given moment, a series of compressions and rarefactions exist along the line xy . fig. 7.1 (a)on fig. 7.1, use the letter c to mark three compressions and the letter r to mark three rarefactions along xy . [1] (b)explain what is meant by (i)a compression , ... ... (ii) a rarefaction . ... ... [2] (c)a sound wave is a longitudinal wave. with reference to the sound wave travelling along xy in fig. 7.1, explain what is meant by a longitudinal wave. .. ..[2] (d)there is a large vertical wall 50 m in front of the loudspeaker. the wall reflects the sound waves. the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. calculate the time taken for the sound waves to travel from x to the wall and to return to x. time = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026[2]aircone wiresxyfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "10": "10 0625/03 m/j/048fig. 8.1 shows a 240 v a.c. mains circuit to which a number of appliances are connected and switched on. fig. 8.1 (a)calculate the power supplied to the circuit. power = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..[1] (b)the appliances are connected in parallel.  (i)explain what connected in parallel means. ... ... (ii)state two advantages of connecting the appliances in parallel rather than in series. advantage 1 ...advantage 2 ... [3] (c)calculate (i)the current in the refrigerator, current = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. (ii)the energy used by the fan in 3 hours, energy = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. (iii)the resistance of the filament of one lamp. resistance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. [7]1.2 kw 200 w60 w 60 wrefrigeratorfan 240  v a.c.for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "11": "11 0625/03 m/j/04 [turn over9electromagnetic induction can be demonstrated using a solenoid, a magnet, a sensitive ammeter and connecting wire. (a)in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up to demonstrate electromagnetic induction. [2] (b)state one way of using the apparatus to produce an induced current. .. ..[1] (c)explain why your method produces an induced current. .. [2] (d)without changing the apparatus, state what must be done to produce (i)an induced current in the opposite direction to the original current, ... ... (ii) a larger induced current. ... ... [2]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "12": "12 0625/03 m/j/0410 (a) fig. 10.1 shows the faces of two ammeters. one has an analogue display and the other a digital display. fig. 10.1 state what is meant by the terms analogue and digital . .. [2] (b) (i) name the components from which logic gates are made. ...[1] (ii) in the space below, draw the symbol for an and gate. label the inputs and the output. [1] (iii) describe the action of an and gate with two inputs. [2]2 3 4 51 0a afor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "13": "13 0625/03 m/j/0411 (a) \u03b1-particles can be scattered by thin gold foils. fig. 11.1 shows part of the paths of three \u03b1-particles. complete the paths of the three \u03b1-particles. [3] fig. 11.1 (b)what does the scattering of \u03b1-particles show about atomic structure? .. [2] (c)state the nucleon number (mass number) of an \u03b1-particle. nucleon number = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026[1]\u03b1-particle 1 \u03b1-particle 2 \u03b1-particle 3 gold nucleifor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "14": "14 0625/03 m/j/04blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/03 m/j/04blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/03 m/j/04blank page university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s04_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 6 printed pages, 2 blank pages and an inserted answer booklet. mml 5676 5/03 s63104/2 \u00a9 ucles 2004 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test may/june 2004 1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as specified in the confidential instructions read these instructions first follow the instructions on the front cover of the answer booklet. write your answers in the spaces provided in the answer booklet. answer all questions. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made.an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.",
            "2": "blank page2 0625/05/m/j/04",
            "3": "1in this experiment, you are to investigate the heating of a thermometer bulb. record all of your observations on page 2 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 during the experiment, you will read temperature values from the thermometer. you may find it more comfortable to use the card provided to shield your eyes from the direct rays of the lamp.do not place the card between the lamp and the thermometer. you are provided with a lamp and a scale marked in 1 mm divisions. do notmove the lamp or the scale. (a)switch on the lamp. leave the lamp switched on until you have completed all the readings. (b)place the thermometer so that its bulb is a distance d =100 mm from the surface of the lamp, as shown by the scale provided. wait for about 30 s. in the table, record the distance d between the thermometer bulb and the surface of the lamp and the temperature  /afii9835shown on the thermometer. (c)move the thermometer so that its bulb is a distance d = 80 mm from the surface of the lamp. wait for about 30 s. in the table, record the distance dand the temperature /afii9835. (d)repeat the steps described in (c), but using values of dof 60 mm, 40 mm, 20 mm and 10 mm. (e)complete the column headings in the table. (f)use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature ( y-axis) against distance (x-axis). (g)use your graph to estimate room temperature. explain briefly how you obtained your estimate.lampcard metre rule dthermometer3 0625/05/m/j/04 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "4": "2in this experiment, you are to compare the combined resistance of lamps in different circuit arrangements. record all of your observations and readings on page 4 of your answer booklet.the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you. fig. 2.1 (a)switch on. measure and record in the table the current  iin the circuit and the p.d. v across the three lamps. switch off. (b)calculate the combined resistance r of the three lamps using the equation r= . record this value of r in the table. (c)complete the column headings for each of the i, vand r columns of the table. (d)disconnect the lamps and the voltmeter and set up the circuit shown in fig. 2.2. fig. 2.2power source a vv\u2013\u2013 ipower source va4 0625/05/m/j/04 \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "5": "(e)switch on. measure and record in the table the current iin the circuit and the p.d. v across the three lamps. switch off. (f)calculate the combined resistance r of the three lamps using the equation r= . record this value of r in the table. (g)disconnect the lamps and the voltmeter and set up the circuit shown in fig. 2.3. fig. 2.3 (h)switch on. measure and record in the table the current iin the circuit and the p.d. v across the three lamps. switch off. (i)calculate the combined resistance r of the three lamps using the equation r= . record this value of r in the table. (j)draw a circuit showing the same components as in fig. 2.3 but with two lamps in parallel with each other and another lamp in series with the first two. also include the ammeter tomeasure the total current in the circuit and the voltmeter to measure the p.d. across thecomplete combination of lamps. you are not asked to set up this circuit.v\u2013\u2013 ipower source a vv\u2013\u2013 i5 0625/05/m/j/04 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "6": "3in this experiment, you are to investigate the period of oscillation of a rule attached to a spring. record all of your observations on page 5 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1 the rule has one end lightly taped to the bench so that it does not slip. the other end is attached to a spring. do not change the position of the spring. (a)place the load l on the rule so that its centre is over the 80.0 cm mark. record the distancedfrom the centre of the load to the end a of the rule. (b)displace the end b of the rule a small distance downwards and release it so that it oscillates.record the time t taken for 10 complete oscillations of the rule. (c)calculate the period t of the oscillations. t is the time for one complete oscillation. (d)calculate the value of t\u2014d. (e)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (d)using values for d of 70.0 cm, 60.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 40.0 cm and 30.0 cm. (f)complete the column headings in the table. (g)draw a labelled diagram to show how you judged the centre of the load to be exactly overthe 80.0 cm mark on the rule. (h)a student suggests that t should be directly proportional to d. state with a reason whether your results support this suggestion.clamp spring string metre rule benchal b d 80.0  cm mark6 0625/05/m/j/04 \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "7": "\u00a9 ucles 20044in this experiment, you are to investigate the magnification of an image produced by a converging lens. record all of your observations on page 6 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 (a)place the lens at a distance x = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. place the screen close to the lens, then move it away from the lens until a sharply-focused image is formed on the screen. measure and record the distance y between the lens and the screen. (b)calculate the value of the ratio y /x. (c)measure the height h of the focused image. (d)calculate the magnification m using the equation m = h/kwhere k = 1.5 cm. (e)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (d) using values of x of 30.0 cm and 35.0 cm. (f)look at the values of y /xand mthat you have obtained. within the limits of experimental error, what do you conclude about the relationship between y /xand m?lensilluminated object screenxy7 0625/05/m/j/04",
            "8": "blank page copyright acknowledgements every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders. the publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly infringed. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.8 0625/05/m/j/04"
        },
        "0625_s04_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. mml 5677 5/03 s61130/2 \u00a9 ucles 2004 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2004 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use 4321 5 totalcentre number candidate number name",
            "2": "1the igcse class is investigating the conduction of electric current through copper sulphate solution. the circuit used is shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 during the experimental work, the students measure the volume of water, the mass ofcopper sulphate that is dissolved in the water, the current in the solution, the potentialdifference across the electrodes and the gap between the electrodes. one set of readings is shown in figs. 1.2 \u2013 1.6.(a)write down the readings shown. include appropriate units. fig. 1.4 mass of copper sulphate = .6.58  g 3.26  gplastic dishcopper  sulphate empty plastic dishpotential difference = . current = fig. 1.3 fig. 1.200.51 1.5 2v 00.5 1.0 1.5apower source electrode copper sulphate solutionav2 0625/06/m/j/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "3": "fig. 1.5 volume of water = .. fig. 1.6 gap between electrodes = .. [6] (b)it is not possible to put the rule inside the beaker to measure the gap between the electrodes. explain how you would overcome this problem. ..   [2] (c)suggest a variable, which is not measured in figs. 1.2 \u2013 1.6, that might affect the value of the current.  [1]0  c m 123456789 1 0electrodewatercm3 160180200 204060801001201403 0625/06/m/j/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "4": "2a student is investigating the oscillation of a metre rule that has one end resting on the laboratory bench. the other end is held above the level of the bench by a spring attachedat the 90.0 cm mark. the arrangement is shown in fig. 2.1. fig. 2.1 the period of oscillation is changed by moving a 200 g mass to different positions along therule. the student records the time ttaken for 10 oscillations of the end of the rule for each position of the mass. he measures the distance dfrom the end of the rule to the mark under the centre of the mass. the readings are shown in the table. (a)calculate the period t for each set of readings and enter the values in the table. [2]dclamp spring metre rule bench4 0625/06/m/j/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004d/c m t/s t/s 20.0 3.4 40.0 4.4 50.0 4.9 60.0 5.3 70.0 6.0 80.0 6.3",
            "5": "(b)plot a graph of d / cm (x -axis) against t /s  (y-axis). the scale on the x -axis has been started for you. [5] (c)using the graph, determine the period twhen the distance d is 55.0 cm. t=  [2] (d)the student suggests that t should be proportional to d. state with a reason whether your results support this suggestion. statement .  reason  ..  [2]0 2 04 06 08 05 0625/06/m/j/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "6": "3fig. 3.1 shows the circuit that a student uses to find the resistance of a combination of three lamps. fig. 3.1 the voltmeter and the ammeter have not been drawn in. (a)complete fig. 3.1 by drawing in the voltmeter and the ammeter, using conventional symbols. [2] (b)the student obtains these readings. current i= 0.54 a potential difference v = 1.8 v calculate the resistance r using the equation r = . r= ... [2]v \u2013 ipower source6 0625/06/m/j/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "7": "(c)the three lamps are now connected in parallel with one another. draw a circuit diagram of the three lamps connected to the power supply. include in your circuitdiagram (i)an ammeter to record the total current through the lamps, (ii)a variable resistor to vary the brightness of all three lamps, (iii)a voltmeter to record the potential difference across the lamps. [3]7 0625/06/m/j/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "8": "4the igcse class carries out an experiment using a convex lens, an illuminated object and a screen. fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus. a sharp image is obtained on the screen. fig. 4.1 (a) (i) use your rule to measure, on fig. 4.1, the distance xfrom the illuminated object to the centre of the lens. x= .. (ii)use your rule to measure, on fig. 4.1, the distance y from the centre of the lens to the screen. y= .. (iii)fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus drawn to 1/5th of actual size. calculate the actualdistance ubetween the object and the lens, and the actual distance v between the lens and the screen. u= .. v= .. (iv)calculate the magnification m using the equation m = . m= . [5]v \u2013 ulensilluminated object screen cardlamp8 0625/06/m/j/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "9": "(b)the illuminated object is triangular in shape, as shown in fig. 4.2. fig. 4.2 draw a diagram of the image as it would appear on the screen. [1] (c)state two precautions that the igcse class should take to obtain experimental readings that are as accurate as possible. 1.  .. .. 2.  ..  [2]9 0625/06/m/j/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "10": "5in a heating experiment, a student takes the temperature of a beaker b containing water at room temperature. fig. 5.1 shows the thermometer used. fig. 5.1 (a)state the temperature reading shown on the thermometer. temperature reading = . [1] (b)the student then transfers a small metal cylinder from beaker a of boiling water to thebeaker b of water at room temperature, as shown in fig. 5.2. fig. 5.2 the student assumes that the metal is at a temperature of 100 \u00b0c when it enters the water in beaker b. the temperature of the water in beaker b rises to 36 \u00b0c. (i)calculate the temperature rise of the water in beaker b. temperature rise = .. (ii)calculate the temperature fall of the metal cylinder. temperature fall = ... [3]string boiling  watermetal cylinderwater atroomtemperature beaker a beaker b01 0 \u201310 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110  \u00b0c10 0625/06/m/j/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "11": "(c)the student uses these readings and some other information to calculate the specific heat capacity of the metal. why is it important to transfer the metal between the beakers as quickly as possible? ..  [1]11 0625/06/m/j/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "12": "blank page copyright acknowledgements every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders. the publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly infringed. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 0625/06/m/j/04"
        },
        "0625_w04_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "     university of cambridge international examinations    international general certificate of secondary education        physics 0625/01        paper 1  multiple choice    october/november 2004        45 minutes     additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet      soft clean eraser      soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)                          read these instructions first     write in soft pencil.    do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.   write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided   unless this has been done for you.      there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible    answers  a, b, c, and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.     read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.     each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.   any rough working should be done in this booklet.                                                  this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib04 11_0625_01/2rp   \uf6d9 ucles 2004  [turn over    ",
            "2": "2    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  1 a floor is covered with square tiles. the diagram shows a ruler on the tiles.    0 cm2 4 6 8 10 12 1413579 1 1 1 3 1 5     how long is one tile?  a 3 cm b 6 cm c 9 cm d 12  cm     2 the diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the beginning and at the end of an experiment.    stopclock at beginningstopclock at end 0 s 3045 150 s 3045 15     how long did the experiment take?  a 10  s b 25  s c 35  s d 45  s     3 which speed  / time graph applies to an object at rest?    speed timea speed timeb speed timec speed timed 0 00 00 00 0    ",
            "3": "3    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  [turn over  4 a racing car is fitted with an on-board computer. every time the car passes the starting line, the  computer records the distance travelled in the next 2 seconds.    which set of data shows that the car is increasing in speed during the 2 seconds?    a  b  time  / s distance  travelled  / m  time  / s distance  travelled  / m  0  0   0  0   1  100   1  90   2  200   2  180     c  d  time  / s distance  travelled  / m  time  / s distance  travelled  / m  0  0   0  0   1  80   1  100   2  190   2  180       5 a spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.    spring metal    what is the name given to the force that stretches the spring?  a friction  b mass  c pressure  d weight     ",
            "4": "4    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  6 the diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. the mass of the liquid is 16  g.    25 201510 5cm 3     what is the density of the liquid?  a 320  g / cm 3 b 36  g / cm 3 c 1.25  g / cm 3 d 0.8  g / cm 3      7 a student carries out an experiment to plot an extension  / load graph for a spring. the diagrams  show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added.    start x ywith load added     what is the extension caused by the load?  a x b y c y + x d y \u2013 x      8 three horizontal forces act on a car that is moving along a straight, level road.    air resistance friction driving force    which combination of forces would result in the car moving at constant speed?     air resistance friction driving force  a 200  n  1000  n  800  n   b 800  n  1000  n  200  n   c 800  n  200  n  1000  n   d 1000  n  200  n  800  n     ",
            "5": "5    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  [turn over  9 a child pushes a toy car along a level floor and then lets it go.    as the car slows down, what is the main energy change?  a from chemical to heat  b from chemical to kinetic  c from kinetic to gravitational (potential) d from kinetic to heat     10 the diagram shows a cyclist riding along a hilly road.    at which position does the cyclist have the least gravitational (potential) energy?    ab c d     11 a pin is squeezed between finger and thumb.    finger pinhead pin thumb     which statement is correct?  a the force of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.  b the force of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.  c the pressure of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.  d the pressure of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.     ",
            "6": "6    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  12 liquid x has a density of 1010  kg  / m3. liquid y has a density of 950  kg  / m3.    the liquids are poured into tubes as shown.    which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?    a liquid xb liquid yc liquid xd liquid y       13 some water molecules escape from the surface of a lake.    which name is given to this process?  a boiling  b convection  c evaporation  d radiation     14 the diagram represents gas molecules contained in a cylinder. the piston is moved slowly  downwards and the temperature of the gas stays the same.    piston cylinder gas molecule     why does the pressure of the gas increase?  a the molecules collide harder with the walls.  b the molecules collide more often with the walls.  c the molecules move more quickly.  d the number of molecules increases.   ",
            "7": "7    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  [turn over  15 to mark the lower fixed point of a celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be  placed in  a pure alcohol.  b pure distilled water.  c pure melting ice.  d pure mercury.    16 a glass flask full of cool water is placed in a container of hot water.    container of hot waterglass flask fullof cool waterx     what will happen to the level of water at x as the cool water becomes warmer?  a it will fall.  b it will rise.  c it will rise then fall.  d it will stay the same.     17 a beaker of water is heated at its base.    why does the water at the base rise?  a it contracts and becomes less dense.  b it contracts and becomes more dense.  c it expands and becomes less dense. d it expands and becomes more dense.     ",
            "8": "8    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  18 which of these waves is longitudinal?  a light waves  b sound waves  c water waves d x-ray waves     19 waves move from deep water to shallow water where they are slower.    which diagram shows what happens to the waves?    d deep water shallo w waterc deep water shallow waterb deep water shallow waterdeep watera shallow water     20 which type of radiation lies between visible light and microwaves in the electromagnetic  spectrum?  a infra-red  b radio waves  c ultra-violet d x-rays     21 the critical angle for a glass  / air boundary is c.    which diagram shows the correct path of the light ray?    air glass ca airglass cb airglass cc airglass cd      ",
            "9": "9    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  [turn over  22 the diagram shows the image of a clockface in a plane mirror.        which of these times is shown?  a 02.25 b 02.35 c 09.25 d 09.35      23 what is the approximate range of audible frequencies for most humans?  a 10  hz to 10 000  hz  b 20  hz to 20 000  hz  c 10  khz to 10 000  khz  d 20  khz to 20 000  khz    24 a 100 metre race is started by firing a gun. the gun makes a bang and a puff of smoke comes  out of the gun as shown.    starter finishing judge 100  m    when does the finishing judge see the smoke and hear the bang?     sees the smoke hears the bang  a immediately immediately  b immediately after about 0.3  s  c after about 0.3  s immediately  d after about 0.3  s after about 0.3  s   ",
            "10": "10    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  25 six small compasses are placed around a bar magnet.    which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point?    n s n s n s n sa cb d      26 a student carries out four tests with a magnet.    which result shown is not correct?     magnet iron bar attracts n s a magnet magnet attracts nn ss b magnet copper bar no effect ns c magnet magnet repels s ns n darrangement result      27 a circuit is set up with a gap between two terminals x and y. the four strips of material shown in the diagram are connected in turn across the gap.    which strip completes the circuit so that the lamp lights?    wooda steelc rubbe rd x yglassb  ",
            "11": "11    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  [turn over  28 a pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current + potential difference  b current \u00f7 potential difference  c potential difference \u00f7 current d potential difference x current     29 which circuit could be used to find the resistance of resistor r?    b v vra a ar c avrd a r v    30 in the circuit shown, the reading on ammeter 1 is 2  a.    2 \u03c9 2 \u03c9 ammeter 1 reading = 2 aammeter 2reading = ?a a     what is the reading on ammeter 2?  a 0  a b 1  a c 2  a d 4  a     ",
            "12": "12    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  31 in which position in the circuit shown should a switch be placed so that both lamps can be  switched on or off at the same time?    a c db       32 in the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical.    which circuit has the least  resistance?    a b c d     33 why are electric circuits often fitted with fuses?  a fuses break the circuit if the current is too high.  b fuses only allow the current through in the correct direction.  c fuses return any excess current to earth.  d fuses use up any spare current.      34 a mains circuit can safely supply a current of 40  a.    a hair-drier takes 2  a. it is connected to the circuit by a lead which can carry up to 5  a.    which of these fuses would be best to use in the plug fitted to the hair-drier lead?  a 1 a fuse b 3 a fuse c 10  a fuse d 50  a fuse     ",
            "13": "13    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  [turn over  35 the diagram represents a transformer.    input voltagepsoutputvoltage     which arrangement could be used to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage?     number of turns on  primary coil p number of turns on  secondary coil s type of input  a 100  50  a.c.  b 100  50  d.c.  c 50  100  a.c.  d 50  100  d.c.     36 a student sets up the apparatus shown in order to make a relay.    core springcontact     which metal should be used to make the core?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d steel     ",
            "14": "14    \u00a9 ucles 2004  0625/01/o/n/04  37 which particles are emitted during thermionic emission?  a electrons  b ions  c neutrons d protons     38 the equation shows the decay of the nuclide x.    x226 88 \u2192 yp q+ 4 2\u03b1    what are the values of p and q?     p q  a 230 90  b 230 86  c 222 90  d 222 86      39 during a fire in a laboratory storeroom, some radioactive material was spilled. a firefighter  detected radiation through the lead-lined walls of the storeroom. the radiation was emitted by the radioactive material.    lead-lined storeroom radioactivematerialdetectorfirefighter     which type of radiation was being detected?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d x-rays      40 how many neutrons are in a nucleus of c14 6?  a 0 b 6 c 8 d 14 ",
            "15": "15     0625/01/o/n/04  blank page  ",
            "16": "16      every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. ucles) are aware that third-par ty material has been  reproduced. the publishers would be pleased to hear from any one whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles),  which is itself a department  of the university of cambridge.   0625/01/o/n/04  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w04_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15printed pages and 1blank page. spa (nh/bi) s66584/2 \u00a9ucles 2004 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2 theory october/november 2004 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer  all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2).centre number candidate number name if you have been given a label, look at the details. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "2 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/041fig. 1.1 shows the top part of a measuring cylinder containing some liquid. fig. 1.1 (a)what is the volume of liquid in the measuring cylinder? volume = .cm3[1] (b)fig. 1.1 indicates four ways the observer\u2019s eye could look when taking the reading from the measuring cylinder. put a circle around the eye position that gives the correctreading. [1] (c)in order to fill the measuring cylinder up to the 100 cm3mark, 80 drops of the liquid are added to the liquid already in the measuring cylinder. calculate the average volume of one drop. average volume of a drop = cm3[4]cm3 liquid100 8090for examiner\u2019s use",
            "3": "3 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/04 [turn over2(a)in fig. 2.1, the sealed drum containing gas has a mercury manometer connected to it in order to indicate the gas pressure. fig. 2.1 for convenience, gas pressure is often expressed in mm of mercury. the gas pressure is 781 mm of mercury and air pressure is 760 mm of mercury. (i)state the difference in height between levels aand bon the manometer. difference in height = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.\u2026\u2026\u2026..mm (ii) the temperature of the gas rises. state what happens to 1.the gas pressure,.. 2.the level a, 3.the level b. ... [3] (b)the air in part (a)is also pressing on a large window pane in the wall of the room where the drum is situated. (i)state how the air pressure on the window pane compares with the air pressure on the mercury surface at bin fig. 2.1. ... (ii) state how the force exerted by the air on the window pane compares with the force exerted by the air on the mercury surface at b. ... [2]air pressure 760  mm of mercury gas pressure 781  mm of mercuryab mercuryfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "4": "4 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/043a packaging company purchases corrugated cardboard boxes in which to pack its goods. the boxes are not made up when they are delivered, but are flat, as shown in fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1 (a)a bundle of these boxes measures 0.60 m x 0.50 m x 0.20 m and has a mass of 7.2 kg. (i)calculate the volume of the bundle of boxes. volume = .[3] (ii) calculate the density of the corrugated cardboard. density = .[4] (b)corrugated cardboard is made up of 3 sheets of thick paper stuck together. fig. 3.2 shows an enlarged view of the edge of a sheet of corrugated cardboard. fig. 3.2 (i)here is an incomplete sentence about the paper. the density of the paper is... that of the corrugated cardboard.which of the words below correctly complete the sentence? tick one box. greater than the same as less than (ii) explain your answer to (b) (i) . ... ... [2]thick paper air0.20  m 0.60  m 0.50  mfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "5": "5 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/04 [turn over4logs of wood are burning in a camp-fire on the ground. a person is sitting nearby. fig. 4.1 (a) (i) state two types of energy that the burning logs possess. 1.  ... 2.  ... (ii) state the main method of heat transfer by which energy from the fire reaches the person sitting nearby. ... [3] (b)a spark jumps out of the fire. (i)state the name of the type of energy that the spark possesses due to its movement. ... (ii) the spark lands on the person\u2019s hand. state which method of heat transfer causes the person to feel the spark. ... (iii) the pain caused by the spark makes the person stand up. 1.state the type of energy that has increased, now that he is standing. ... 2.state the type of energy stored in his body that enabled him to stand. ... [4]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "6": "6 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/045in order to observe brownian motion, some smoke is mixed with air trapped in a small glass box. the box is strongly illuminated from the side, and the smoke is viewed from abovethrough a microscope. this is illustrated in fig. 5.1. fig. 5.1 (a)describe what is seen when the microscope is focussed on the smoke particles. .. [3] (b)state what causes the effect described in (a). .. ..[4] (c)the temperature of the glass box and its contents is increased. suggest what change is seen through the microscope. .. ..[1]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "7": "7 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/04 [turn over6(a)here is a list of solid materials. put a tick in the box alongside those materials which are good conductors of heat. aluminium coppercorkgoldpolystyrenewood [3] (b)state the word we use to describe materials that are poor conductors of heat. ..[1] (c)from the list of materials given in (a), state which would be suitable to use for (i)the base of a cooking pot,.. (ii) the covering on the handle of a kettle [2] (d)water is a poor conductor of heat. a beaker of water is heated as shown in fig. 6.1. fig. 6.1 all the water heats up quite quickly. state the process by which heat spreads most rapidly through the water. ..[1] (e)state why the heating element is always placed near the bottom of an electric kettle. .. ..[1]water heatfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "8": "8 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/047a girl is walking along a path 1600 m from the rock-face of a quarry (a place where stone is obtained). fig. 7.1 (a)the quarry workers set off an explosion at xto break up some rock. the girl measures the time interval between seeing the flash and hearing the bang. the time is 5.0 s. (i)calculate the speed of the sound. speed of sound = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.\u2026\u2026\u2026..m/s [3] (ii) state what assumption you have made in your working in (i). ...[1] (b)suppose the explosion had taken place at yinstead of x. state two ways in which the girl\u2019s observations would have been different. 1.  .. 2.  ..[2]explosion quarryrock facegirl 1600  mfor examiner\u2019s use",
            "9": "9 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/04 [turn over8two light conducting balls aand bare hanging side by side, as shown in fig. 8.1. fig. 8.1 aand bare given a series of different charges, as indicated in the table below. in the third column of the table, write what is seen to happen in each case. use the words repulsion or attraction or nothing , as appropriate. [5]for examiner\u2019s use charge on a charge on b what is seen to happen positive positive  negative negative  positive negative  zero positive  negative zero",
            "10": "10 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/049(a)two 10\u03c9resistors are connected in series in a circuit, as shown in fig. 9.1. fig. 9.1 the current at point xis 3.0 a. (i)state the current at 1.point y, a 2.point z. a (ii) calculate the combined resistance of the two 10 \u03c9resistors. combined resistance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.\u2026\u2026\u2026..\u03c9 [3]10 \u03c9 10 \u03c9 3.0 afor examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "11 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/04 [turn over(b)the 10\u03c9resistors are now arranged in parallel, as shown in fig. 9.2. fig. 9.2 (i)the current at xis adjusted to 3.0 a. the current through one resistor is 1.5 a. 1.what is the current at y? tick one box. 0a 1.5 a3.0 a4.5 a 2.state the value of the current at z. a (ii) what is the combined resistance of the two 10 \u03c9resistors? tick one box. 0\u03c9 5\u03c9 10\u03c9 20\u03c9 [3]10 \u03c9 10 \u03c91.5 a 3.0 afor examiner\u2019s use",
            "12": "12 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/0410atoms contain protons, neutrons and electrons. state which of these three (a)has a negative charge,..[1] (b)is uncharged,.[ 1] (c)has a much smaller mass than the others, ...[1] (d)is outside the nucleus,...[1] (e)are nucleons,.[ 2] (f)are lost from the nucleus during \u03b1-particle emission[2]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "13": "13 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/04 [turn over11the ray diagram in fig. 11.1 shows a lens forming an image ii\u2032of an object oo \u2032. fig. 11.1 (a)state (i)which of the marked points is a principal focus of the lens,... (ii) which distance is the focal length of the lens. [2] (b)which of the following words describe the image? tick all that are correct. real virtualinverteduprightenlargeddiminished [3] (c)on fig. 11.1, draw one other ray that goes from o \u2032, the top of the object, to the image. [1]a bcd e i i\u2032oo\u2032for examiner\u2019s use",
            "14": "14 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/0412 (a) a small pin is fixed to the edge of a bench. a triangular piece of card with a small hole in each corner is hung on the pin from corner a and allowed to settle, as shown infig. 12.1. a plumb-line is then hung from the pin and the vertical line ap is marked onthe card. fig. 12.1 this procedure is then repeated with the card hanging from c and the vertical line cq is marked. after this, the card is as shown in fig. 12.2. fig. 12.2 on fig. 12.2, (i)draw the vertical line that would be obtained if the card were hung from b, (ii) clearly mark the centre of mass of the card using a dot labelled g. [2]fig. 12 bc pa qfig. bca p plumb-linefor examiner\u2019s use",
            "15": "15 \u00a9ucles 2004 0625/02 o/n/04for examiner\u2019s use(b)fig. 12.3a shows a glass ornament standing on a shelf. fig. 12.3b shows an identical ornament filled with coloured glass beads. state which ornament is more stable, and why. .. ..[2] (c)fig. 12.4 shows two wooden blocks standing on a hinged board with a rough surface. fig. 12.4 the board is slowly tilted. the blocks do not slip. state which block falls over first, and explain why. .. ..[2]ab rough surface",
            "16": "16 0625/02 o/n/04blank page every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. ucles) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced. the publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w04_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15printed pages and 1blank page. spa (nh/bi) s80765/4 \u00a9ucles 2004 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics paper 3 0625/03 october/november 2004 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer  all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. do not write in the barcode. do not write in the grey areas between the pages. if you have been given a label, look at the details. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given on this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total candidate name centrenumber candidatenumber",
            "2": "2 0625/03 o/n/041fig. 1.1 shows the path of one drop of water in the jet from a powerful hose. fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2 is a graph of speed against time for the water drop shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.2 (a)describe the movement of the water drop in the first 4 s after leaving the hose. .. [2]0010203040speed m / s 2468 time after leaving the hose  / svertical path  of a single water drop hose set in groundfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "3": "3 0625/03 o/n/04 [turn over(b)use fig. 1.2 to find (i)the speed of the water leaving the hose, speed = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026... (ii) the time when the speed of the water is least. time = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.\u2026\u2026\u2026.. [2] (c)use values from fig. 1.2 to calculate the acceleration of the drop as it falls back towards the ground. show your working. acceleration = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026...[3] (d)calculate the greatest distance above the ground reached by the drop. distance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026...[3]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "4": "4 0625/03 o/n/042fig. 2.1 shows a reservoir that stores water. fig. 2.1 (a)the valve in the exit pipe is closed. the density of water is 1000 kg/m3and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. calculate the pressure of the water acting on the closed valve in the exit pipe. pressure = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026...[2] (b)the cross-sectional area of the pipe is 0.5 m2. calculate the force exerted by the water on the closed valve. force = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026...[2] (c)the valve is then opened and water, originally at the surface of the reservoir, finally flows out of the exit pipe. state the energy transformation of this water between thesurface of the reservoir and the open end of the pipe. .. ..[2]valve exit pipe20 m water damfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "5": "5 0625/03 o/n/04 [turn over3a scientist needs to find the density of a sample of rock whilst down a mine. he has only a spring balance, a measuring cylinder, some water and some thread. (a)in the space below, draw two labelled diagrams, one to show the spring balance being used and the other to show the measuring cylinder being used with a suitable rocksample. [2] (b)the spring balance is calibrated in newtons. state how the mass of the rock sample may be found from the reading of the spring balance. ..[1] (c)state the readings that would be taken from the measuring cylinder. .. ..[1] (d)state how the volume of the rock would be found from the readings. ..[1] (e)state in words the formula that would be used to find the density of the sample. density = [1]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "6": "6 0625/03 o/n/044(a)fig. 4.1 shows a simple type of thermocouple that has been calibrated to measure temperature. fig. 4.1 (i)describe how the thermocouple could be used to measure the temperature of a beaker of hot water. ... .. (ii) state two situations where a thermocouple would be a good choice of thermometer to measure temperature. 1.  .. ... 2.  .. ... [4]sensitive voltmeter cold junctioncopper wire iron wirehot junctionvfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "7": "7 0625/03 o/n/04 [turn over(b)a mercury-in-glass thermometer is placed in an insulated beaker of water at 60 \u00b0c. the water is heated at a constant rate. the temperature of the water is measured and recorded on the graph shown in fig. 4.2. fig. 4.2 state the effect of the heat supplied (i)during the period 0 to 5 minutes, ... .. (ii) during the period 10 to 15 minutes. ... ... [2]time/mintemperature/\u00b0c 00 520406080100 10 15 20for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "8": "8 0625/03 o/n/045(a)fig. 5.1 shows a sealed box. fig. 5.1 (i)the box contains a large number of air molecules. on fig. 5.1, draw a possible path of oneof the air molecules, as it moves inside the box.       (ii) explain 1how air molecules in the box create a pressure on the inside walls, ... .. 2why this pressure rises as the temperature of the air in the box increases. ... .. [5] (b)air in a cylinder is compressed slowly, so that the temperature does not rise. the pressure changes from 2.0 x 105pa to 5.0 x 105pa. the original volume was 0.35 m3. calculate the new volume. volume = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026...[3]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "9": "9 0625/03 o/n/04 [turn over6fig. 6.1 shows an optical fibre. xy is a ray of light passing along the fibre. fig. 6.1 (a)on fig. 6.1, continue the ray xy until it passes z. [1] (b)explain why the ray does notleave the fibre at y . .. [2] (c)the light in the optical fibre has a wavelength of 3.2 x 10\u20137m and is travelling at a speed of 1.9 x 108m/s. (i)calculate the frequency of the light. frequency = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026... (ii) the speed of light in air is 3.0 x 108m/s.  calculate the refractive index of the material from which the fibre is made. refractive index = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026... [4]xy zfibrefor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "10": "10 0625/03 o/n/047fig. 7.1 shows a 12 v battery connected to a number of resistors. fig. 7.1 (a)calculate the current in the 8 \u03c9resistor. current = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..[2] (b)calculate, for the resistors connected in the circuit, the combined resistance of (i)the two 5 \u03c9resistors, resistance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. (ii) the two 4 \u03c9resistors. resistance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. [2] (c)the total current in the two 4 \u03c9resistors is 6 a. calculate the total power dissipated in the two resistors. power = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..[2]a12 v 8 \u03c9 5 \u03c9 5 \u03c94 \u03c9 4 \u03c9for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "11": "11 0625/03 o/n/04 [turn over(d)what will be the reading on a voltmeter connected across (i)the two 4 \u03c9resistors, reading = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. (ii) one 5 \u03c9resistor? reading = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. [2] (e)the 8 \u03c9resistor is made from a length of resistance wire of uniform cross-sectional area. state the effect on the resistance of the wire of using (i)the same length of the same material with a greater cross-sectional area, ... (ii) a smaller length of the same material with the same cross-sectional area. ... [2]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "12": "12 0625/03 o/n/048fig. 8.1 shows plane waves passing through a gap in a barrier that is approximately equal to the wavelength of the waves. fig. 8.1 (a)what is the name given to the wave property shown in fig. 8.1? ..[1] (b)in the space below, carefully draw the pattern that would be obtained if the gap were increased to six times the wavelength of the waves. [4]   (c)the effect in fig. 8.1 is often shown using water waves on the surface of a tank of water.  these are transverse waves. explain what is meant by a transverse wave. .. [2]barrierfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "13": "13 0625/03 o/n/04 [turn over9(a)an engine on a model railway needs a 6 v a.c. supply. a mains supply of 240 v a.c. is available.  (i)in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a transformer suitable for producing the required supply voltage. (ii) suggest suitable numbers of turns for the coils. ... ... [4] (b)the power needed for this model engine is 12 w. calculate the current taken from the mains when just this engine is in use, assuming that the transformer is 100% efficient. current = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..[2] (c)explain why transformers will only work when connected to an a.c. supply. .. [2]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "14": "14 0625/03 o/n/0410 (a) (i) what is the function of a transistor when placed in an electrical circuit? ... (ii) describe the action of a transistor. ... .. .. [3] (b) (i) in the space below, draw the symbol for an or gate. label the inputs and the output. [1] (ii) describe the action of an or gate that has two inputs. ... ..[2]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004",
            "15": "15 0625/03 o/n/0411 (a) the decay of a nucleus of radium226 88ra leads to the emission of an \u03b1-particle and leaves behind a nucleus of radon (rn). in the space below, write an equation to show this decay. [2] (b)in an experiment to find the range of \u03b1-particles in air, the apparatus in fig. 11.1 was used. fig. 11.1 the results of this experiment are shown below. (i)state what causes the count rate 9 cm from the source. ... (ii) estimate the count rate that is due to the source at a distance of 2 cm. ... (iii) suggest a value for the maximum distance that \u03b1-particles can travel from the source. ... (iv) justify your answer to (iii). ... ... [4]\u03b1\u2212particle sourcedetector rulerfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2004count rate / (counts/minute) 681 562 441 382 317 20 19 21 19 distance from source to detector/cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9",
            "16": "16 0625/03 o/n/04blank page every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e ucles) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced. the publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly infringed. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w04_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 6 printed pages, 2 blank pages and an inserted answer booklet. mml 5676 5/03 s63107/2 \u00a9 ucles 2004 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test october/november 2004 1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as specified in the confidential instructions read these instructions first follow the instructions on the front cover of the answer booklet. write your answers in the spaces provided in the answer booklet. answer all questions. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as they are made.an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.",
            "2": "blank page2 0625/05/o/n/04",
            "3": "1in this experiment, you are to investigate the air temperature above a beaker of hot water. record all of your observations on page 2 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a)place the thermometer so that its bulb is directly above the centre of the beaker and a distance x= 100 mm from the water surface. wait for about 30 s. in the table, record the distance xbetween the thermometer bulb and the water surface, and the temperature  /afii9835 shown on the thermometer. (b)move the thermometer so that its bulb is a distance x= 80 mm from the surface of the water. the thermometer bulb should remain directly above the centre of the beaker. wait for about30 s. in the table, record the distance x and the temperature  /afii9835shown on the thermometer. (c)repeat the steps described in (b) using values of x of 60 mm, 50 mm, 40 mm, 30 mm and 20 mm. (d)complete the column headings in the table. (e)plot a graph of temperature ( y-axis) against distance (x-axis). (f)use your graph to estimate room temperature. explain briefly how you obtained yourestimate.hot waterxthermometer3 0625/05/o/n/04 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "4": "2in this experiment, you are to investigate the period of oscillation of a simple pendulum. record all of your observations on page 4 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. and fig. 2.2. fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2 (a)using the two pieces of wood provided and a rule, measure as accurately as you can the diameter d of the pendulum bob. (b)draw a labelled diagram to show how you used the two pieces of wood and the rule toobtain an accurate measurement of the diameter d. (c)adjust the clamp so that the pendulum string has a length x = 60.0 cm (from the support to the bob, as shown in fig. 2.1). (d)calculate the length l of the pendulum, using the equation l = (x+ d/ 2). (e)displace the pendulum bob by a small amount and release it so that it swings. measure thetime t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see fig. 2.2). (f)calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete oscillation. (g)calculate the value of t 2/l. (h)repeat steps (c) to (g) using values of x = 40.0 cm and x = 20.0 cm. (i)a student suggests that t2/lshould be a constant. state with a reason whether your results support this suggestion.one complete oscillationbobx4 0625/05/o/n/04 \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "5": "3in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a wire. record all of your observations and answers on page 5 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1, which shows the circuit that has been set up for you. fig. 3.1 you are provided with a resistance wire ab. part of the wire has been covered with insulatingtape. do not remove this insulating tape. (a)place the sliding contact c on the resistance wire ab at a distance xfrom a, where  x= 0.500 m. (b)record the value of x. (c)switch on and, using the voltmeter, measure the p.d. v across the wire between a and c. record the value of v. (d)using the ammeter, measure the current  iin the wire. record the value of i. (e)take the sliding contact away from the wire ab and switch off. (f)calculate the resistance r of the section ac of the wire using the equation r = . (g)repeat steps (a)to (f)with the sliding contact at distances of x= 0.750 m and x = 0.900 m from a. (h)complete the column headings in the table. (i)within the limits of experimental error, what do you conclude about the variation ofresistance with distance along the wire? justify your conclusion by reference to your table ofresults. (j)suggest with a reason a value for r when x = 0.200 m.v\u2013\u2013 iva abxpower source c tape5 0625/05/o/n/04 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "6": "4in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light through a transparent block. record all of your observations and answers on page 7 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 (a)position the sheet of paper so that the hole is at the top right-hand corner. place the transparent block on the paper with its largest face down and approximately in the centre ofthe paper. draw round the block and label the corners a, b, c and d (see fig. 4.1). removethe block. (b)draw a normal to line ab, approximately at the centre, and label the normal nn \u2032. (c)draw a line ef above the line ab and at 30\u00b0 from the normal. (d)place the paper on the cork mat and push a pin x into the paper on line ef close to line ab.push another pin w into line ef some distance away from line ab. (e)replace the block on the paper.ae 30\u00b0w xn b dcf n\u2032 eyehole6 0625/05/o/n/04 \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "7": "(f)view the images of pins w and x through the block. place two pins y and z between your eye and the block so that y, z and the images of w and x appear exactly one behind theother. (g)mark the positions of pins w, x, y and z on the paper. remove the pins and the block.using a rule, draw a line joining y and z and continue the line to meet the line cd at a point,which you should label g. (h)draw a line to join the points f and g. (i)measure the angle r between line fg and the normal. (j)extend the line ef through line cd and to almost the edge of the paper. label the point atwhich the line cuts cd with the letter h. (k)measure the distance x between points g and h. (l)draw a line parallel to and 5.0 cm below line cd. this line cuts lines yz and fh. label thepoints at which it cuts these lines with the letters j and k. measure the distance y between j and k. tie your sheet of paper into the answer booklet.7 0625/05/o/n/04 \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "8": "blank page every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders. the publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly infringed. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.8 0625/05/o/n/04"
        },
        "0625_w04_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. mml 5677 5/03 s67109/2 \u00a9 ucles 2004 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2004 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use 4321 5 totalcentre number candidate number name",
            "2": "1the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water in a beaker. some of the apparatus used is shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 during the experiment, a student measures the temperature of the water, its volume, thelength of string wrapped round a beaker and the depth of water in the beaker. (a)write down the readings shown in figs. 1.2 and 1.3. include appropriate units. fig. 1.2 temperature =  fig. 1.3 volume of water in the measuring cylinder = . [3]80100cm3 2040600 \u201310 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0cbeaker hot waterstringthermometer2 0625/06/o/n/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "3": "(b)the string is wrapped 5 times round the beaker and marked as shown in fig. 1.4. fig. 1.4 the string is held against a metre rule as shown in fig. 1.5. fig. 1.5 (i)write down the length of the string between the marks. length =  cm (ii)calculate the circumference c of the beaker. c=  cm (iii)suggest one source of error in this method of determining the circumference.  (iv)suggest one improvement to this method.  [4]cm 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90string metre rulemarkmark beakerstring3 0625/06/o/n/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "4": "(c)a rule is placed beside the beaker, as shown in fig. 1.6. fig. 1.6 (i)write down the depth d of the water in the beaker. d=  cm (ii)calculate the surface area a of the curved surface of the beaker up to the water level using the equation a = dc. a= .. [2] (d)state the other measurements that need to be taken to determine the rate of cooling of the water. ..  [2]cm12345 waterbeaker4 0625/06/o/n/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "5": "2a student carries out an experiment to determine the density of plasticine. she records the mass mand the volume v of a range of differently-sized samples. these readings are plotted on a graph as shown in fig. 2.1. fig. 2.1 (a) (i) determine the gradient g of the line. show clearly how you obtain the necessary information. g= ... (ii)determine the density /afii9845of the plasticine using the equation /afii9845=1\u2014g. /afii9845=  [5] (b)the student could calculate the density from one set of readings. suggest why she takes more than one set of readings and plots a graph. ..  [1]40 30 20 10 0 02 04 0 6 08 0 1 0 0v / cm3 m / g5 0625/06/o/n/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "6": "3a student carries out an experiment using a simple pendulum. fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus. fig. 3.1 the student records the time t taken for 20 complete oscillations for a range of different lengths x of the string. the readings are shown in the table. the length l of the pendulum is given by the equation l = x+ r, where r is the radius of the pendulum bob. fig. 3.2 shows the pendulum bob drawn actual size. fig. 3.2stringpendulum bob benchxstringclamp pendulum bob6 0625/06/o/n/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004x/c m l/c m t/s t/s 90.0 38.5 80.0 36.0 70.0 33.4 60.0 31.4 50.0 28.2 40.0 25.5",
            "7": "(a) (i) use your rule to measure the diameter dof the pendulum bob. d=  (ii)calculate the radius r of the pendulum bob. r= . [2] (b) (i) complete the column for the length l / cm in the table using the equation l = x+ r. (ii)the period t is the time taken for one complete oscillation. complete the column for the period t/ s in the table. [3] (c)plot the graph of t /s  (y-axis) against l / cm (x -axis). start the t / s axis at t = 1.0 s. [5] (d)using the graph, find the length laof the pendulum that would have a period of 1.50 s. la=  cm [1]7 0625/06/o/n/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "8": "4a student is investigating the passage of light through a transparent block, as shown in fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1a bincident  ray emergent  raytransparent block eye8 0625/06/o/n/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "9": "the student looks through the block. he places pins so that two pins marking the incident ray and two pins marking the emergent ray all appear to be exactly one behind the other. (a)on fig. 4.1, mark suitable positions for the four pins, two on the incident ray and two on the emergent ray. [1] (b) (i) on fig. 4.1, draw the normal at point a. (ii)on fig. 4.1, draw in the line ab. measure and record the angle of refraction r between the line ab and the normal. r= . (iii)measure and record the angle of incidence ibetween the incident ray and the normal. i= . [4]9 0625/06/o/n/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "10": "5the igcse class is carrying out investigations of the resistance of bare resistance wires. fig. 5.1 shows the circuit used. fig. 5.1 the students record the current iin the circuit and then record the p.d. v across different lengths lof the bare resistance wire. the length of wire from ato bis 100.0 cm. the readings obtained by one student are shown in the table. i= 0.84 a (a) (i) calculate the resistance of each length l of wire using the equation r = v\u2014i. write the resistance values in the table. (ii)complete the column headings in the table. [3]va ablpower source bare resistance wire10 0625/06/o/n/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004v/ l/ r/ 0.39 20.0 0.82 40.0 1.22 60.0 1.58 80.0 1.89 100.0",
            "11": "(b)in a second experiment, the students use wires of the same material but with different diameters d. the p.d. is measured across the same length of wire each time. fig. 5.2 shows the circuit used. fig. 5.2 these are the readings correctly obtained by one student. wire 1 i= 0.1 a wire 2 i= 0.4 a v= 1.8 v v= 1.8 v d= 0.24 mm d= 0.48 mm (i)calculate the resistance r of each wire, using the equation r = v\u2014i. wire 1, r = .. wire 2, r = .. [1] (ii)based on the results for the two wires, which of the following statements is a correct conclusion? tick one box. a wire with half the diameter has half the resistance. a wire with half the diameter has twice the resistance.a wire with half the diameter has one quarter the resistance.a wire with half the diameter has four times the resistance. [1]a vabpower source bare resistance wire11 0625/06/o/n/04 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004",
            "12": "(iii)using your answers to (i) and (ii), calculate the expected resistance of a wire ab of the same material if it has a diameter of 0.12 mm. expected resistance = .. [1] (c)what instrument would you use to measure the diameter of the wires as accurately as possible?  [1] copyright acknowledgements every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. ucles) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced. the publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly infringed. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 0625/06/o/n/04for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2004"
        }
    },
    "2005": {
        "0625_s05_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "     university of cambridge international examinations    international general certificate of secondary education        physics 0625/01       paper 1  multiple choice    may/june 2005        45 minutes     additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet      soft clean eraser      soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)                          read these instructions first     write in soft pencil.    do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.   write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless   this has been done for you.      there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   for each question there are four possible answers  a, b , c and d. choose the one you consider correct and   record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.     read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.     each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.   any rough working should be done in this booklet.                                                  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib05 06_0625_01/rp   \uf6d9 ucles 2005  [turn over  ",
            "2": "2    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05 1 a decorator wishes to calculate the area of a bat hroom tile so that he can estimate the amount of  adhesive that he needs to buy.    what must he use?  a a measuring cylinder only  b a ruler only  c a measuring cylinder and a clock only  d a measuring cylinder and a ruler only     2 the three balls shown are dropped from a bench.    aluminium lead wood     which balls have the same acceleration?  a aluminium and lead only  b aluminium and wood only  c lead and wood only  d aluminium, lead and wood     3 a car accelerates from traffic lights. the graph shows how the car\u2019s speed changes with time.   time  / s20 100 0speed   m / s     how far does the car travel before it reaches a steady speed?  a 10  m b 20  m c 100  m d 200  m     ",
            "3": "3    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05  [turn over  4 which statement is correct?  a the mass of a bottle of water at the north pole is different from its mass at the equator.  b the mass of a bottle of water is measured in newtons.  c the weight of a bottle of water and its mass are the same thing.  d the weight of a bottle of water is one of the forces acting on it.      5 two blocks x and y are placed on a beam as shown. the beam balances on a pivot at its centre.    xy pivot    what does this show about x and y?  a they have the same mass and the same density.  b they have the same mass and the same weight. c they have the same volume and the same density.  d they have the same volume and the same weight.     6 the masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the  diagram.    200 100cm3 mass = 80 g200100cm 3 mass = 180 gliquid     what is the density of the liquid?  a 120100g / cm3 b 140100g / cm3 c 120180g / cm3 d 140180g / cm3     ",
            "4": "4    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05 7 a girl and a boy are pulling in opposite directions on a rope. the forces acting on the rope are  shown in the diagram.    200  n rope150  ngirl boy     which single force has the same effect as the two forces shown?  a 50  n acting towards the girl  b 350  n acting towards the girl  c 50  n acting towards the boy  d 350  n acting towards the boy      8 objects with different masses are hung on a 10  cm spring. the diagram shows how much the  spring stretches.    100  g m10  cm 20  cm 30  cm     the extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.    what is the mass of object m?  a 110  g b 150  g c 200  g d 300  g    ",
            "5": "5    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05  [turn over  9 what is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy?  a capacitor  b generator  c motor  d transformer      10 a power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.    in this process, nuclear energy is first changed into  a chemical energy.  b electrical energy.  c gravitational energy.  d internal energy.     11 a ball is released from rest and rolls down a track from the position shown.    what is the furthest position the ball could reach?    abc dball startshere      ",
            "6": "6    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05 12 a water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. it gives a  reading of h cm of water.    gas supply h cm     why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer?  a h would be too large if mercury were used.  b h would be too small if mercury were used.  c the tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.  d the tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.      13 a farmer has two carts. the carts have the same  weight, but one has four narrow wheels and the  other has four wide wheels.    narrow wheel wide wheel    in rainy weather, which cart sinks less into soft ground, and why?     cart wheels why  a narrow greater pressure on the ground  b narrow less pressure on the ground  c wide greater pressure on the ground  d wide less pressure on the ground     ",
            "7": "7    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05  [turn over  14 viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with brownian motion.    which line in the table is correct?     type of motion  of particles particles are  suspended in  a vibration a liquid or a gas  b vibration a solid, a liquid or a gas  c random a liquid or a gas  d random a solid, a liquid or a gas      15 a measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly  compressed.    piston pushed inpiston gas     the temperature of the gas does not change.    what happens to the pressure of the gas?  a it drops to zero.  b it decreases, but not to zero. c it stays the same.  d it increases.     16 the graph shows the change in temperature of a material as it is heated.    which part on the graph shows when the material is boiling?    temperature timeabcd     ",
            "8": "8    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05 17 an experiment is set up as shown.    pressure gauge flask waterair heat    what does the pressure gauge show as the air in the flask becomes hotter?  a a steady pressure  b a decrease in pressure  c an increase in pressure  d an increase and then a decrease in pressure     18 an iron bar is held with one end in a fire. the other end soon becomes too hot to hold.    firehand iron bar     how has the heat travelled along the iron bar?  a by conduction  b by convection  c by expansion  d by radiation     ",
            "9": "9    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05  [turn over  19 the diagram shows a block of ice placed in a warm room.    at which point is the temperature the lowest ?    tableclamp iceb c da      20 the drawing shows a wave.    which labelled distance is the wavelength?    a b cd     21 radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.    hill     the waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be  a diffracted.  b radiated.  c reflected.  d refracted.     ",
            "10": "10    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05 22 which diagram correctly shows a ray of light passing through a rectangular glass block?    ab c d      23 the ray diagram shows how an image is formed by a converging lens.    24  cm 10  cm 8 cm     what is the focal length of this lens?  a 8  cm b 10  cm c 18  cm d 24  cm    ",
            "11": "11    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05  [turn over  24 a fire alarm is not loud enough. an engineer adjusts it so that it produces a note of the same pitch  which is louder.    what effect does this have on the amp litude and on the frequency of the sound?     amplitude frequency  a larger larger  b larger same  c same larger  d same same      25 to estimate the width of a valley, a climber starts a stopwatch as he shouts. he hears an echo  from the opposite side of the valley after 1.0  s.    valleysound climber     the sound travels at 340  m / s.    what is the width of the valley?  a 85  m b 170  m c 340  m d 680  m      26 which material is used for the core of an electromagnet?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d steel     ",
            "12": "12    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05 27 a brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction and a plotting compass is placed at each end.    nplotting compassbrass rod     which diagram shows the positions of the needles of the plotting compasses?    a b c d      28 how many of the following materials conduct electricity?    aluminium  silver  iron plastic  a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4     ",
            "13": "13    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05  [turn over  29 in which circuit does the voltmeter read the potential difference across the lamp?    c vdva b v v     30 in the circuit below, x and y are identical 6  v lamps.    switchx y6 v     what happens when the switch is closed?  a x lights more brightly than y.  b y lights more brightly than x.  c x and y light with equal brightness.  d neither x nor y light.     ",
            "14": "14    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05 31 the diagram shows a circuit with three ammeters, x, y and z.    a a ax y z     which set of readings is possible?     x y z  a 2 a 3  a 5  a  b 3 a 2  a 5  a  c 3 a 3  a 3  a  d 5 a 2  a 3  a      32 a lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the p.d. across it can be varied from 0 to 6  v.    which circuit would be most suitable?    6 va 6 vb 6 vc 6 vd      ",
            "15": "15    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05  [turn over  33 a student makes the circuit shown.    5 a fuse     the fuse has blown and stopped the current.    what could have caused this?  a the current rating of the fuse was too high.  b the current was too large.  c the lamp was loose.  d the voltage was too small.     34 which graph shows the output voltage from a simple a.c. generator?    0 atimevoltage 0 btimevoltage 0 ctimevoltage 0 dtimevoltage     ",
            "16": "16    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05 35 a transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. an a.c. voltage  of 25.0  v is connected across the primary coil.    25.0  v primary coil 50 turnssecondary coil100 turns     what is the voltage across the secondary coil?  a 12.5  v b 50.0  v c 175  v d 200  v     36 two circuits are set up as shown. the iron rods are placed close together, and are free to move.    xs iron rod iron rod     what happens to the size of the gap at x when switch s is closed?  a it decreases.  b it decreases then increases. c it increases. d it does not change.      37 the diagram shows a simple cathode-ray tube.    which part emits the electrons?    + \u2013 ab cd     ",
            "17": "17    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/m/j/05   38 which type of radiation has the greatest ionising effect?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d all have the same ionising effect      39 a powder contains 400  mg of a radioactive material that emits \u03b1-particles.    the half-life of the material is 5 days.    what mass of that material remains after 10 days?  a 0  mg b 40  mg c 100  mg d 200  mg     40 in the symbol below, a is the nucleon number and z is the proton number.    xa z    what is represented by the symbol?  a an electron  b a neutron c a nuclide  d an x-ray     ",
            "18": "18     0625/01/m/j/05 blank page  ",
            "19": "19     0625/01/m/j/05   blank page  ",
            "20": "20      every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders  where the publishers (i.e. ucles) are aware that third-par ty material has been  reproduced. the publishers would be pleased to hear from any one whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles),  which is itself a department  of the university of cambridge.   0625/01/m/j/05 blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s05_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. spa (mml 8112 3/04) s80361/3 \u00a9ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2 may/june 2005 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2).centre number candidate number name if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "1(a)a measuring cylinder contains 100 cm3of water. 20 cm3of the water is poured into a beaker. on fig. 1.1, mark the level of the water left in the cylinder. [2] fig. 1.1 (b)a rule, calibrated in cm, is placed alongside the measuring cylinder, as shown in fig. 1.2. fig. 1.2 (i)what is the length of the measuring cylinder, from zero up to the 100 cm3mark? .. (ii)the volume of a cylinder is found using the equation volume = cross-sectional area \u00d7 length. calculate the cross-sectional area of the measuring cylinder. cross-sectional area = . [5]51015cm3 100 50cm3 100502 for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "3": "2a boat sails along a river, stopping at various places along the way. fig. 2.1 shows how the speed of the boat changes during the day, starting at 0900 hrs and reaching its finaldestination at 2100 hrs. fig. 2.1 (a)calculate how long the whole journey takes. time taken = ... hours [2] (b)state the time of day at which the boat reaches its greatest speed. time of day = . [1] (c)state the longest time for which the boat was stationary at one place. longest time = ... hours [1] (d)if the speed axis had values marked on it, state (i)how the graph could be used to find the distance travelled between 0900 hrs and1130 hrs, .. .. (ii)how the average speed for the whole journey could be found.  [3]0 0900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 time of day (24  -hour clock)speed3 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "4": "3(a)a light vertical triangular piece of rigid plastic pqr is pivoted at corner p . a horizontal 5 n force acts at q, as shown in fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1 describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic. ..  [2] (b)on another occasion, two horizontal 5 n forces act on the piece of plastic, as shown in fig. 3.2. fig. 3.2 (i)describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic. .. (ii) on fig. 3.2, mark the force that the pivot exerts on the piece of plastic. show thedirection of the force by means of an arrow and write the magnitude of the forcenext to the arrow. [4]pivotpq 5 n r5 npivotpq 5 n r4 for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "5": "4fig. 4.1 represents a hydroelectric system for generating electricity. fig. 4.1 answer the following questions, using words from this list. chemical electrical gravitational internal (heat) kinetic light nuclear sound strain (a)what sort of energy, possessed by the water in the reservoir, is the main source of energy for this system?  [1] (b)when the water flows down the pipe, it is moving. what sort of energy does it possessbecause of this movement?  [1] (c)the water makes the turbines in the power station rotate. what sort of energy do theturbines possess because of their rotation?  [1] (d)what sort of energy does the power station generate?  [1] (e)none of the energy transfer processes is perfect. in what form is most of the wastedenergy released?  [1]water flows outwater flows downpower stationreservoir5 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "6": "5(a)on a hot day, a child drinks all the water in a plastic bottle. she then screws the cap back tightly on the bottle, so that the bottle contains only air. fig. 5.1 she throws the bottle into a waste basket, where the sun shines on it. after a while in the sun\u2019s rays, the air in the bottle is much hotter than before. (i)state what has happened to the pressure of the air in the bottle. .. (ii)in terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (a)(i).  [5]cap screwed on tightly air6 for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "7": "(b)also in the waste basket is a broken glass bottle containing a small quantity of water, as shown in fig. 5.2. fig. 5.2 as the sun shines on it, the volume of water slowly decreases. (i)state the name of the process causing this decrease. .. (ii)in terms of the effect of the sun\u2019s rays on the water molecules, explain your answerto (b)(i). .. .. [4]water7 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "8": "6the table below shows the potential difference (p.d.) needed at different times during a day to cause a current of 0.03 a in a particular thermistor. (a)calculate the two values missing from the table. y ou may use the space below for your working. write your answers in the table. [3] (b)on fig. 6.1, plot the four resistance values. fig. 6.1[2] (c) (i) draw a smooth curve through your points. (ii)why do we draw a smooth curve rather than a series of straight lines joining thepoints? .. [2]0200400600 0900 0600 1200 1500 1800 2100 time of dayresistance  / /afii98218 for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005time of day (24-hour clock) p.d./v resistance / /afii98210900 1200 1500 1800 15.0 9.9 7.5 500 210 250",
            "9": "(d)the thermistor is a circuit component with a resistance that decreases as the temperature increases. (i)from your graph, estimate the time of day when the temperature was greatest. time of day = . (ii)state the reason for your answer to (d)(i). .. .. [2]9 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "10": "7fig. 7.1 shows the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. fig. 7.1 two of the regions have been labelled. (a)in the boxes provided, write the names of the other regions. [4] (b)only one of the following types of wave is not an electromagnetic wave. tick one box to show which type of wave is not electromagnetic. microwave radar sound [1]radio visible10 for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "11": "8an inventor is trying to make a device to enable him to see objects behind him. he cuts a square box in half diagonally and sticks two plane mirrors on the inside of the box. a side view of the arrangement is shown in fig. 8.1. fig. 8.1 fig. 8.2 shows the arrangement, drawn larger. fig. 8.2 fig. 8.2 shows parallel rays from two different points on a distant object behind the man.(a)carefully continue the two rays until they reach the place where the inventor\u2019s head will be. [3] (b)look at what has happened to the two rays. what can be said about the image the inventor sees?  [1]90\u00b045\u00b0ray 1 from object ray 2 from objectmirror box cut in half mirror11 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "12": "9the speed of sound in air is 332 m/s. a man stands 249 m from a large flat wall, as shown in fig. 9.1, and claps his hands once. fig. 9.1 (a)calculate the interval between the time when the man claps his hands and the timewhen he hears the echo from the wall. time interval = ... s [3] (b)a woman is standing 249 m further away from the wall than the man. she hears theclap twice, once directly and once after reflection from the wall. how long after the man claps does she hear these two sounds? tick two boxes. 0.75 s 1.50 s2.25 s3.00 s [2]249  m 249  mwoman man12 for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "13": "10 (a) (i) what name do we give to the type of material that allows electrical charges to pass through it? .. (ii)give an example of such a material. .. (iii)what must be done to this type of material in order to make electrical charges passthrough it? .. .. [3] (b) (i) what name do we give to the type of material that does notallow electrical charges to pass through it? .. (ii)give an example of such a material. .. [2] (c)which of the two types of material in (a)(i) and (b)(i) may be held in the hand and charged by friction (e.g. by rubbing with a soft cloth)?  [1]13 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "14": "11the circuit in fig. 11.1 is connected up. fig. 11.1 (a)how does the current in the resistance wire compare with the current in the 2 /afii9821 resistor? tick one box. smaller  same  greater  [1] (b)a voltmeter connected across the resistance wire shows the same reading as a voltmeter connected across the 2 /afii9821resistor. state the value of the resistance of the resistance wire.  /afii9821[1] (c)calculate the combined resistance of the wire and the resistor. combined resistance =  /afii9821[2] (d)the wire and resistor are disconnected and then reconnected in parallel, as shown infig. 11.2. fig. 11.22 \u03c9aresistance wire2 \u03c9a resistance wire14 for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "15": "(i)what is the combined resistance of the wire and resistor in fig.11.2? tick one box. zero 1/afii9821 2/afii9821 3/afii9821 (ii)the ammeter in fig. 11.1 reads 0.3 a. what is the reading on the ammeter in fig. 11.2? tick one box. zero less than 0.3 a 0.3 amore than 0.3 a [2] (e)walls in buildings sometimes develop cracks. the width of a crack can be monitored by measuring the resistance of a thin wire stretched across the crack and firmly fixed on either side of the crack, as illustrated in fig. 11.3. fig. 11.3 the wall moves and the crack widens slightly. state what happens to (i)the length of the wire, ... (ii)the resistance of the wire.  [2]fixing pinfixing pin crackthin wire15 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "16": "12 (a) complete the following table about the particles in an atom. the first row has been filled in as an example. [6] (b) (i) which of the particles in the table make up an /afii9825-particle? .. (ii)on the same scale as indicated by the table, state 1.the mass of an /afii9825-particle, . 2.the charge of an /afii9825-particle. ... [3]16 for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005particle mass charge location proton 1 unit +1 unit in the nucleus neutron electron permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s05_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. spa (sjf3442/cg)  s92054/2.1 \u00a9ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics paper 3 0625/03 may/june 2005 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question orpart question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). do not write in the barcode. do not write in the grey areas between the pages.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 totalcandidate name centrenumber candidatenumber ",
            "2": "2 0625/03/m/j/051a solid plastic sphere falls towards the earth.  fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph of the fall up to the point where the sphere hits the earth\u2019s surface. fig. 1.1 (a)describe in detail the motion of the sphere shown by the graph.   .. ... [3]020 pqr s t 406080100120140 speed m / s 10 02 0 3 0 4 0 5 06 07 08 09 0 100 110 time  / sfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "3": "3 0625/03/m/j/05 [turn over(b)on fig. 1.2, draw arrows to show the directions of the forces acting on the sphere when it is at the position shown by point s on the graph. label your arrows with the names ofthe forces. [2] fig. 1.2 (c)explain why the sphere is moving with constant speed at s. .. ... [2] (d)use the graph to calculate the approximate distance that the sphere falls (i)between r and t, distance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2] (ii) between p and q. distance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "4": "4 0625/03/m/j/052fig. 2.1 shows a simple pendulum that swings backwards and forwards between p and q. fig. 2.1 (a)the time taken for the pendulum to swing from p to q is approximately 0.5 s. describe how you would determine this time as accurately as possible. . [2]  (b) (i) state the two vertical forces acting on the pendulum bob when it is at position r.1.  ... 2. .. [1 ] (ii) the pendulum bob moves along the arc of a circle. state the direction of the resultant of the two forces in (i). .. [1] (c)the mass of the bob is 0.2 kg. during the swing it moves so that p is 0.05 m higher than r. calculate the increase in potential energy of the pendulum bob between r and p . potential energy = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2]support string pendulum bobprqfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "5": "5 0625/03/m/j/05 [turn over3a mass of 3.0 kg accelerates at 2.0 m/s2in a straight line. (a)state why the velocity and the acceleration are both described as vector quantities.  .. . [1]   (b)calculate the force required to accelerate the mass. force = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2] (c)the mass hits a wall. the average force exerted on the wall during the impact is 120 n.the area of the mass in contact with the wall at impact is 0.050 m 2. calculate the average pressure that the mass exerts on the wall during the impact. pressure = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "6": "6 0625/03/m/j/054fig. 4.1 shows apparatus that a student uses to make an estimate of the specific heat capacity of iron. fig. 4.1 (a)the power of the heater is known. state the four readings the student must take to findthe specific heat capacity of iron.   1.  .. 2.  .. 3.  .. 4.  . [3]   (b)write down an equation, in words or in symbols, that could be used to work out the specific heat capacity of iron from the readings in (a). [2]iron blockelectrical heater thermometerfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "7": "7 0625/03/m/j/05 [turn over(c) (i) explain why the value obtained with this apparatus is higher than the actual value. ... .. [1] (ii) state one addition to the apparatus that would help to improve the accuracy of the value obtained. ... .. [1]for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "8": "8 0625/03/m/j/055(a)fig. 5.1 shows the paths of a few air molecules and a single dust particle. the actual air molecules are too small to show on the diagram. fig. 5.1 explain why the dust particle undergoes small random movements.  .. . [4] (b)fig. 5.2 shows the paths of a few molecules leaving the surface of a liquid. the liquid is below its boiling point. fig. 5.2 (i)state which liquid molecules are most likely to leave the surface. ... .. [1] (ii)explain your answer to (i).  [2]air and vapour liquiddust particlepaths of air moleculesfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "9": "9 0625/03/m/j/05 [turn over6fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light opq passing through a semi-circular glass block. fig. 6.1 (a)explain why there is no change in the direction of the ray at p . .. . [1] (b)state the changes, if any, that occur to the speed, wavelength and frequency of the light as it enters the glass block. .. ... [2]   (c)at q some of the light in ray opq is reflected and some is refracted. on fig. 6.1, draw in the approximate positions of the reflected ray and the refracted ray. label these rays. [2] (d)the refractive index for light passing from glass to air is 0.67.  calculate the angle of refraction of the ray that is refracted at q into air. angle = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [3]30\u00b0 qpofor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "10": "10 0625/03/m/j/057fig. 7.1 shows the parts of the electromagnetic spectrum. fig. 7.1 (a)name one type of radiation that has (i)a higher frequency than ultra-violet, .. [1] (ii) a longer wavelength than visible light. .. [1] (b)some \u03b3-rays emitted from a radioactive source have a speed in air of 3.0 x 108m/s and a wavelength of 1.0 x 10\u201312m. calculate the frequency of the \u03b3-rays. frequency = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2] (c)state the approximate speed of infra-red waves in air.  . [1]\u03b3 - rays and x  - raysultra- violetinfra- redradio wavesv i s i b l efor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "11": "11 0625/03/m/j/05 [turn over8a student has a power supply, a resistor, a voltmeter, an ammeter and a variable resistor.  (a)the student obtains five sets of readings from which he determines an average value for the resistance of the resistor. in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a circuit that he could use. [3] (b)describe how the circuit should be used to obtain the five sets of readings. .. ... [2] (c)fig. 8.1 shows another circuit. fig. 8.1 when the circuit is switched on, the ammeter reads 0.50 a. (i)calculate the value of the unknown resistor. resistance = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2] (ii) calculate the charge passing through the 3.0 \u03c9resistor in 120 s. charge = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [1] (iii) calculate the power dissipated in the 3.0 \u03c9resistor. power = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2]6.0 v resistor 3.0 \u03c9resistor of unknown valueafor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "12": "12 0625/03/m/j/059(a)fig. 9.1 shows an a.c. supply connected to a resistor and a diode. fig. 9.1 (i)state the effect of fitting the diode in the circuit. ... .. [1] (ii)on fig. 9.2, sketch graphs to show the variation of the a.c. supply voltage and the output voltage with time. fig. 9.2 [2] (b) (i) in the space below, draw the symbol for a not gate. [1] (ii) state the action of a not gate. ... . [2]a.c. supply voltage time time0 0output voltagea.c. supply outputresistorfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "13": "13 0625/03/m/j/05 [turn over10 (a) fig. 10.1 is the decay curve for a radioactive isotope that emits only \u03b2-particles. fig. 10.1 use the graph to find the value of the half-life of the isotope. indicate, on the graph, how you arrived at your value. half-life \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [2] (b)a student determines the percentage of \u03b2-particles absorbed by a thick aluminium sheet. he uses a source that is emitting only \u03b2-particles and that has a long half-life. (i)in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus required, set up tomake the determination. [2] (ii) list the readings that the student needs to take. ...  [3]01 0100 0200300400 20 time / mincount rate counts  / min 30 40for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "14": "14 0625/03/m/j/0511fig. 11.1 shows a flexible wire hanging between two magnetic poles. the flexible wire is connected to a 12 v d.c. supply that is switched off.  fig. 11.1 (a)explain why the wire moves when the supply is switched on. .. ... [2] (b)state the direction of the deflection of the wire. ... [2] (c)when the wire first moves, energy is changed from one form to another. state these two forms of energy. from ... to  [1]  wire fixed here wire fixed here12 v d.c.+ ns \u2013 flexible wire hanging between magnetic polesfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "15": "15 0625/03/m/j/05(d)fig. 11.2 shows the flexible wire made into a rigid rectangular coil and mounted on an axle. fig. 11.2 (i)add to the diagram an arrangement that will allow current to be fed into the coilwhilst allowing the coil to turn continuously. label the parts you have added. [1] (ii) briefly explain how your arrangement works. ... .. [2]axle magnetic polemagnetic pole axlen n sscoilfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "16": "16 0625/03/m/j/05blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s05_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 7 printed pages, 1 blank page and an inserted answer booklet. spa mml 8430 4/04 s81480/4 \u00a9ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test may/june 2005 1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as specified in the confidential instructions read these instructions first follow the instructions on the front cover of the answer booklet. write your answers in the spaces provided in the answer booklet. answer all questions. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made.an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.",
            "2": "1in this experiment you are to investigate the change in temperature of hot water as cold water is added. record all your observations on pages 2 and 3 of your answer booklet. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a)you are provided with 100 cm 3of hot water (labelled a) and a supply of cold water. the cold water is approximately at room temperature.  (i)measure and record the temperature of the cold water. (ii)measure and record in the first row of the table the temperature /afii9835of the hot water. (iii)pour 20 cm3of the cold water into the measuring cylinder. transfer this water to the beaker containing the hot water. measure and record the temperature /afii9835of the mixture of hot and cold water. record the total volume v of cold water that you have added. (iv)repeat step (iii) four times until you have added a total of 100 cm3of cold water. (v)complete the column headings in the table. (vi)use the data in the table to plot a graph of /afii9835(y-axis) against v (x-axis). draw the best-fit curve.thermometer water2 0625/05/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005",
            "3": "(b)a student carrying out this experiment obtained the graph shown in fig. 1.2. fig. 1.2 the theoretical line shows the results expected by the student after calculating the values of /afii9835. the student assumed that all the heat lost by the hot water was gained by the cold water when the cold water was poured into the beaker. the other line shows the student\u2019s experimental results. the student had carried out the experiment with care. suggest a practical reason why theexperimental graph line differs from the theoretical line.100 80 60 40 20 0304050607080 v / cm3/afii9835 / \u00b0c theoretical line experimental line3 0625/05/m/j/05 [turn over \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005",
            "4": "2in this experiment you are to investigate the resistance of resistance wire in different circuit arrangements. record all your observations and readings on page 4 of your answer booklet.the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you. fig. 2.1 (a)switch on. measure and record in the table the current  iin the circuit and the p.d. v across the section of resistance wire ab. switch off. (b)record the length l of the resistance wire ab. (c)calculate the resistance r of the section of wire ab using the equation r= . record this value of r in the table. (d)complete the column headings for each of the l, i, vand r columns of the table. (e)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (c)with the voltmeter connected across section acof the resistance wire. (f)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (c)with the voltmeter connected across section adof the resistance wire.  (g)use your results to predict the resistance of a 1.50 m length of the same wire. show your working.v\u2013\u2013iabcdpower  source metre rulea v4 0625/05/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005",
            "5": "3in this experiment you are to investigate the period of oscillation of a mass attached between two springs. record all your observations on page 5 of your answer booklet. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. the apparatus has been set up for you. fig. 3.1 you are provided with a mass m of 400 g attached between two springs.  (a)displace the mass a small distance downwards and release it so that it oscillates. record the time t 1taken for 10 complete oscillations of the mass. also record the time t2taken for another 10 complete oscillations of the mass. (b)calculate t, the average value of t1and t2. (c)calculate the period t of the oscillations. t is the time for one complete oscillation. (d)calculate the value oft\u2014m (e)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (d) using values for m of 300 g and 200 g. (f)complete the final column heading in the table. (g)a student suggests that t should be directly proportional to m. state with a reason whether or not your results support this suggestion. (h)in the experiment you have just done, the mass oscillates rapidly so that it is difficult to take the times accurately. the instructions in the question included methods of improving theaccuracy of the value obtained for the period t. describe briefly one of these methods andany calculation involved to obtain the t value.stand clamp spring mass mass spring clampone complete oscillation5 0625/05/m/j/05 [turn over \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005.",
            "6": "4in this experiment you will investigate the refraction of light through a transparent block. record all your observations and answers on page 7 of your answer booklet. y ou are supplied with three ray trace sheets. carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3. fig. 4.1 (a)place the transparent block with its largest face down on one of the ray trace sheets as shown in fig. 4.1. one of the longest sides is to be along line pq.  (b)draw round the block and label the corners a, b, c and d. remove the block. (c)place the ray trace sheet on the pin board and push a pin x into the paper on line ef close to line ab. push another pin w into line ef some distance away from line ab. (d)replace the block on the ray trace sheet. (e)view the images of pins w and xthrough the block. place two pins y and zbetween your eye and the block so that y, zand the images of w and xappear exactly one behind the other. (f)label the positions of pins w, x, yand zon the ray trace sheet. remove the pins and the block. using a rule, draw a line joining z and yand continue the line to meet the line cd at a point, which you should label g. (g)draw a line to join the points f and g. (h)measure and record the angle of refraction r between line fg and the normal nn'.n'n e fp qe p dcxwn b n'aq f zg y eye6 0625/05/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005",
            "7": "(i)place the block on the second ray trace sheet so that one of its longest sides is along line pqbut with the largest face vertical (as shown in fig. 4.2). label the corners a, b, c and d. fig. 4.2 (j)repeat steps (b) \u2013 (h). (k)place the block on the third ray trace sheet with the largest face down so that one of itsshorter sides is along the line pq. one corner should be about 1 cm to the left of point f, as shown in fig. 4.3. label the corners a, b, c and d. fig. 4.3 (l)repeat steps (b) \u2013 (h). (m)within the limits of experimental error, what do you conclude about the effect on the angle ofrefraction r of increasing the length of the ray within the block? tie your ray trace sheets into your answer booklet.n'n e fp qn'n e fp q7 0625/05/m/j/05 \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "8": "8 0625/05/m/j/05blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.",
            "9": "this document consists of 7 printed pages and 1 blank page. spa mml 8430 4/04 s81480/4 \u00a9ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test may/june 2005 1 hour 15 minutes answer booklet read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on this answer booklet.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.all of your answers should be written in this answer booklet: scrap paper must not be used. answer all questions. graph paper is provided in this answer booklet. additional sheets of graph paper should be used only if itis necessary to do so.at the end of the examination, fasten any additional answer paper used securely to this answer booklet.centre number candidate number name if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use 321 4 total",
            "10": "1(a) (i) record of temperature of the cold water  [1] (ii) \u2013 (v) [3] (vi) [5]100 120 80 60 40 20 0 v / cm32 0625/05/ab/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005/afii9835/ v/ 0",
            "11": "(b)a practical reason why the student\u2019s experimental line differed from the theoretical line  .. ..  [1]3 0625/05/ab/m/j/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "12": "2(a)\u2013 (f) [8] (g)working predicted resistance . [2]4 0625/05/ab/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005voltmeter connected acrossl/ i/ v/ r/ ab acad",
            "13": "3(a)\u2013 (f) [6] (g)statement . ... reason   ..  [2] (h)description  ..  ..  [2]5 0625/05/ab/m/j/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005m/g t1/s t2/s t/s t/s t\u2013\u2013/m 400 300200",
            "14": "tie your ray trace sheets in here. [5]6 0625/05/ab/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "15": "4(h)value of r . (j)value of r . (l)value of r . [4] (m)within the limits of experimental error, . ..  [1]7 0625/05/ab/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "16": "blank page8 0625/05/ab/m/j/05permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s05_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. spa (mml 8431 5/04) s81555/2 \u00a9ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2005 1hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.centre number candidate number name read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "1the igcse class is investigating the change in temperature of hot water as cold water is added to it. the students are provided with 100 cm3of hot water and a supply of cold water at room temperature.(a)the thermometer in fig. 1.1 shows the temperature of the cold water. fig. 1.1 record the temperature of the cold water, as shown in fig. 1.1.  [1] (b)a student records the temperature of the hot water. he then pours 20 cm 3of the cold water into the beaker containing the hot water. he records the temperature /afii9835of the mixture of hot and cold water and the volume v of cold water added. he then repeats the process four times until he has added a total of 100 cm3of cold water. the table shows the readings. (i)complete the column headings in the table. [1]01 0 \u201310 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 c2 0625/06/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005v/ 0 20 406080 100/afii9835/ 80.058.048.040.534.029.0",
            "3": "(ii)use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature /afii9835(y-axis) against volume v(x-axis). [5] question 1 continues on page 4100 80 60 40 20 0 v / cm33 0625/06/m/j/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "4": "(c)a sketch graph of the readings taken by another student carrying out a similar experiment is shown in fig. 1.2. the theoretical line shows the results expected by the student after calculating thevalues of  /afii9835. the student assumed that all the heat lost by the hot water was gained by the cold water when the cold water was poured into the beaker. the other line shows the experimental results. fig. 1.2 the student carried out the experiment with care. suggest a practical reason why the experimental line differs from the theoretical line. ..  [1]100 80 60 40 20 0304050607080 v / cm3/afii9835 / c theoretical line experimental line4 0625/06/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005",
            "5": "5 0625/06/m/j/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 20052(a)the table below shows some measurements taken by three igcse students. the second column shows the values recorded by the three students. for each quantity,underline the value most likely to be correct. the first one is done for you. [5] (b)a student is to find a value of the resistance of a wire by experiment. potentialdifference vand current  ican be recorded. the resistance is then calculated using the equation r= . state, with a reason, one example of good experimental practice that the student coulduse to obtain a reliable result. statement .  reason  [2]v\u2013\u2013iquantity measured thickness of a metre rule volume of a test-tube current in a 12 v ray box lamp at less than normalbrightness the surface area of the base of a 250 cm 3beaker the mass of a woodenmetre rule the weight of an igcse student0.25 mm 2.5 mm 25 mm 12 mm3 12 cm3 12 m3 0.5 a 5.0 a50 a 0.3 cm 2 3 cm2 30 cm2 0.112 kg 1.12 kg11.2 kg 6n 60 n600 nrecorded values",
            "6": "3a student investigates the resistance of wire in different circuit arrangements. the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 is used. fig. 3.1 the student measures the current iin the wire. she then measures the p.d. vacross ab, acand ad. the student\u2019s readings are shown in the table below. (a)using fig. 3.1, record in the table the length l of each section of wire. [1]ab c dpower  source metre rulecrocodile  clipa v10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 906 0625/06/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005section of wire ab ac adl/c m i/a 0.375 0.3750.375v/v 0.951.501.95r/",
            "7": "(b)on fig. 3.2, show the positions of the pointers of the ammeter reading 0.375 a, and the voltmeter reading 1.50 v. fig. 3.2 [2] (c)calculate the resistance r of the sections of wire ab, ac and ad using the equation r= . record these values of r, to a suitable number of significant figures, in the table. [2] (d)complete the column heading for the r column of the table. [1] (e)use your results to predict the resistance of a 1.50 m length of the same wire. showyour working. resistance = .. [2]v\u2013\u2013i051423 v0 0.50.1 0.40.2 0.3 a7 0625/06/m/j/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005",
            "8": "4a student investigates the period of oscillation of a mass attached between two springs. the apparatus used is shown in fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 a 400 g mass m is attached between two springs, displaced a small distance downwards, and then released so that it oscillates. the time t taken for 10 complete oscillations of the mass is recorded. the experiment is repeated using values for m of 300 g and 200 g. the readings are shown in the table below. (a)calculate the period t of the oscillations. t is the time for one complete oscillation. enter the values in the table. [2] (b)calculate and enter in the table the values oft. [2] \u2014mclamp spring mass spring clamp8 0625/06/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005m/g 400 300200t/s t/s s\u2013\u2013 g/t\u2013\u2013 m 9.07.86.3",
            "9": "(c)the student suggests that t should be directly proportional to m. state with a reason whether the results in the table support this suggestion. statement .  reason  ..  [2] (d)in this experiment, the mass oscillates rapidly so that it is difficult to take the times accurately. a technique has been included in this experiment to obtain an accuratevalue for the period t. state, briefly, what this technique is and any calculation involved to obtain the t v alue. .. ..  [2] (e)another student carried out the same experiment using a wider range of masses. suggest why, when the mass was 900 g, it could not oscillate freely.  [1]9 0625/06/m/j/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005",
            "10": "5a student investigates the refraction of light through a transparent block. he places the transparent block on a sheet of plain paper, largest face down, and draws a line round the block. he draws a line to represent an incident ray and places two pins w and x in the line. fig. 5.1 shows the outline of the block and the incident ray. fig. 5.1 (a)on fig. 5.1, draw a normal to line abat the point where the incident ray meets the block. the incident ray is drawn on the diagram. the positions of the two pins w and x that mark the incident ray are shown. [1] (b)measure the angle of incidence i. i=  [1] (c)draw in the refracted ray with an angle of refraction of 20\u00b0. continue this line until it meets the line cd. [2] (d)the ray emerges from the block in a direction that is parallel to the incident ray. draw inthis emergent ray. [2] (e)two pins y and zare placed so that the pins w and x, viewed through the block, and the pins y and zall appear exactly in line with each other. mark on the diagram, with the letters y and z, where you would place these two pins. [2]xw a dcb10 0625/06/m/j/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9ucles 2005\u00a9ucles 2005",
            "11": "11 0625/06/m/j/05blank page",
            "12": "blank page12 0625/06/m/j/05permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w05_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "     university of cambridge international examinations    international general certificate of secondary education        physics 0625/01       paper 1  multiple choice (core)    october/november 2005        45 minutes     additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet      soft clean eraser      soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)                          read these instructions first     write in soft pencil.    do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.   write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless   this has been done for you.      there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   for each question there are four possible answers  a, b , c and d. choose the one you consider correct and   record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.     read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.     each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.   any rough working should be done in this booklet.                                                  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib05 11_0625_01/rp   \uf6d9 ucles 2005  [turn over  ",
            "2": "2    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05 1 a measuring cylinder is used to measure the volume of a liquid.    1020304050cm3 4050     what is the volume of the liquid?  a 43  cm3 b 46  cm3 c 48  cm3 d 54  cm3     2 the graph represents part of the journey of a car.   30 2010 0 time  / sspeed m / s 0 1 02 03 04 0     what distance does the car travel during this part of the journey?  a 150  m b 300  m c 600  m d 1200  m      3 a man crosses a road 8.0  m wide at a speed of 2.0  m / s.    man 8.0  mmovement of man     how long does the man take to cross the road?  a 4.0  s b 6.0  s c 10  s d 16  s     ",
            "3": "3    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05  [turn over  4 what is the gravitational force that the earth exerts on an object?  a the density of the object  b the mass of the object  c the volume of the object  d the weight of the object      5 in an experiment, five identical bags of rice are balanced by a 10  kg mass.    10  kg mass pivotfive bags of rice     two bags of rice are added to the other five.    what mass will now balance the bags?  a 3.5  kg b 7.0  kg c 10  kg d 14  kg     6 the same mass of four different liquids is placed in some measuring cylinders.    which measuring cylinder contains the liquid with the greatest density?    cm3 24610 10 8cm3 2468cm3 510152025cm3 510152025ab c d      ",
            "4": "4    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05 7 the diagram shows a flat metal plate that may be hung from a nail so that it can rotate about any  of four holes.    flat metal plateholes holes     what is the smallest number of holes from which the flat metal plate should be hung in order to  find its centre of gravity?  a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4     8 two equal forces f act on each of four planks.    which plank turns?    pivot pivot pivot pivotf f f f ff f fabcd     9 which type of power station does not use steam from boiling water to generate electricity?  a geothermal  b hydroelectric  c nuclear  d oil-fired    ",
            "5": "5    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05  [turn over  10 a man standing at the top of a cliff throws a stone.    yx     which forms of energy does the stone have at x and at y?     energy at x energy at y  a gravitational only kinetic only  b kinetic only gravitational only  c gravitational only gravitational and kinetic  d gravitational and kinetic gravitational and kinetic      11 four blocks, each weighing 10  n, rest on a horizontal table.    which block applies the greatest pressure on the table?    ab c d 10  n1 0 n1 0 n1 0 ntable     ",
            "6": "6    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05 12 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    25  cm 5 cm75  cmmercury     which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?  a 25  cm b 75  cm c 80  cm d 100  cm     13 a drop of liquid falls on a student\u2019s skin and quickly evaporates.    what is the effect on the skin and the reason?  a the skin cools because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.  b the skin cools because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.  c the skin warms because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.  d the skin warms because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.      14 a suspension of pollen grains in water is observed under a microscope. the pollen grains are  seen to be moving all the time.    which diagram illustrates this motion?    abcd     ",
            "7": "7    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05  [turn over  15 a knife is being sharpened on a rotating sharpening-stone. a spark flies off and lands on the  operator\u2019s hand. the spark is a very hot, very small piece of metal. the operator feels nothing.    what does this show about the piece of metal?  a it has a high thermal capacity.  b it has a low thermal capacity.  c it is a good conductor of heat.  d it is a poor conductor of heat.     16 which substance is a liquid at a room temperature of 25  oc?    substance melting point  / oc boiling point  / oc  a \u2013218  \u2013183   b \u201339  357   c 44  280   d 119  444       17 the diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.    cooling unit     why is the cooling unit placed at the top?  a cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.  b cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.  c cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.  d cold air stops at the top and so prevents convection.     ",
            "8": "8    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05 18 how does heat from the sun reach the earth?  a conduction only  b convection only  c radiation only  d conduction, convection and radiation      19 the diagrams show four sources of waves.    which source generates longitudinal waves?    ab radio transmitterloudspeaker lamp stick pushed upand down in watercd      ",
            "9": "9    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05  [turn over  20 in a ripple tank, water waves move towards a barrier with a narrow gap.    barrie r water waves     which diagram best shows the waves beyond the barrier?    ab cd      ",
            "10": "10    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05 21 a ray of light passes from glass into air at an angle of incidence of 40o. the glass has a critical  angle of 42  o.    which diagram shows what happens to the ray?    40oglassair glassair glassair glassaira b c d 40o 40o40o      22 rays of light enter and leave a box.    ray 1 ray 2ray 1 ray 2     what could be inside the box to make the rays behave as shown?  a a converging lens  b a parallel-sided glass block  c a plane mirror  d a triangular prism     ",
            "11": "11    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05  [turn over  23 a thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.    candlelensscreen image     the screen and the lens are moved back and forth and various focused images are produced on  the screen.    which statement is always  true?  a the image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.  b the image is bigger than the object.  c the image is closer to the lens than the object is.  d the image is inverted.      24 two astronauts without radios can only communicate in space if their helmets are touching.  there is no air in space.        what does this show about sound?     through a solid through a vacuum  a can travel can travel  b can travel cannot travel  c cannot travel can travel  d cannot travel cannot travel    ",
            "12": "12    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05 25 when the horn on a ship is sounded, the passengers hear an echo from a cliff after 4.0  s.    if the speed of sound is 340  m / s, how far away is the cliff?  a 170  m b 340  m c 680  m d 1360  m     26 how many of the following methods could be used to demagnetise a piece of steel?    heating it until it is red hot  pulling it from a coil that is carrying an alternating current  placing it in an east-west direction and hammering it  putting it in a coil which is carrying a direct current    a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4     27 two rods x  and y look the same.    rod yrod xmagnet np q r ss     the n pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. the results of these  four actions are shown in the table.    end tested result  p attraction  q attraction  r attraction  s repulsion    which of the rods is a permanent magnet?  a neither of the rods  b both of the rods  c rod x only  d rod y only     ",
            "13": "13    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05  [turn over  28 which circuit should be used to find the resistance of a lamp?    a va a vb avc avd      29 the table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters.    which heater has the least resistance?     voltage  / v current  / a  a 110 5.0  b 110 10  c 230 5.0  d 230 10    30 which component can store energy for use in time delay circuits?  a capacitor  b potentiometer  c resistor  d thermistor    ",
            "14": "14    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05 31 when the circuit shown is connected with switch s open, the 6  v lamp glows.    6 v 6 v lamp sr     what happens to the brightness of the lamp when switch s is closed?  a it becomes brighter.  b it remains the same. c it becomes dimmer.  d it goes off.     32 why are the electric lamps in a house lighting circuit normally connected in parallel?  a the current in every circuit must be the same.  b the lamps are always switched on and off at the same time.  c the voltage across each lamp must be the mains voltage.  d when one of the lamps blows, all the others go out.     33 in the circuit shown, one of the fuses blows and all the lamps go out.    which fuse blows?    a bc d      ",
            "15": "15    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05  [turn over  34 which arrangement may be used to step up a voltage?    a.c. inputoutputa iron core d.c. inputoutpu tb iron core a.c. inputoutputc iron core d.c. inputoutpu td iron core      35 the diagrams show a straight wire carrying a current into the paper.    which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern due to this current?    a wirebc wire wired wire    ",
            "16": "16    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05 36 a magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil which is connected  to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.    n sspring centre-zero ammeter     what does the ammeter show when the magnet vibrates slowly up and down?  a a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left  b a steady reading to the left c a steady reading to the right  d a steady zero reading     37 charged particles are emitted from the cathode of an oscilloscope.    what is the name and the charge of these particles?     name of particles charge of particles  a electrons negative  b electrons positive  c protons negative  d protons positive    ",
            "17": "17    \u00a9 ucles 2005 0625/01/o/n/05  38 a radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick  aluminium.    radiationthick aluminium (none of the radiation passes through)paper (all the radiation passes through)     what does this show about the radiation?  a it is \u03b1-particles.  b it is \u03b2-particles.  c it is \u03b3-rays.  d it is a mixture of \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays.      39 an unstable nucleus has 145 neutrons and 92 protons. it emits a \u03b2-particle.    how many neutrons and protons does the nucleus have after emitting the \u03b2-particle?     neutrons protons  a 144 92  b 144 93  c 145 91  d 145 93     40 which particles are found in the nucleus of an atom?  a neutrons and protons only  b neutrons only c protons and electrons only d protons, electrons and neutrons      ",
            "18": "18     0625/01/o/n/05 blank page  ",
            "19": "19     0625/01/o/n/05  blank page  ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles),  which is itself a department  of the university of cambridge.     0625/01/o/n/05 blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w05_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. mml 8113 3/04 s80925/2 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2  core october/november 2005 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2).centre number candidate number name if you have been given a label, look at the details. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "1the length of a spring is measured when various loads from 1.0 n to 6.0 n are hanging from it. fig. 1.1 gives a graph of the results. fig. 1.1 use the graph to find (a)the length of the spring with no load attached, length = . cm [1] (b)the length of the spring with 4.5 n attached, length = . cm [1] (c)the extension caused by a 4.5 n load. extension = ... cm [2]0 0123456510152025 load  / nlength  / cm2 for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "3": "2palm trees are growing every 25 m alongside the highway in a holiday resort. fig. 2.1 the igcse school bus drives along the highway. (a)it takes 2 s for the bus to travel between palm tree 1 and palm tree 2.calculate the average speed of the bus between tree 1 and tree 2. average speed = .. [4] (b)it takes more than 2 s for the bus to travel from tree 2 to tree 3.state what this information indicates about the speed of the bus.  [1] (c)the speed of the bus continues to do what you have said in (b). state how the time taken to go from tree 3 to tree 4 compares with the time in (b). the time taken to travel from tree 3 to tree 4 is . the time to travel from tree 2 to tree 3. [1]igcse12343 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "4": "3 (a) fig. 3.1 shows two examples of footwear being worn by people of equal weight at a winter olympics competition. fig. 3.1 which footwear creates the greatest pressure below it, and why? which?  . why? .. [2] (b)drivers of high-sided vehicles, like the one in fig. 3.2, are sometimes warned not to drive when it is very windy. fig. 3.2 suggest why they receive this warning. .. ..  [2]skate ski4 for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "5": "4a man is delivering a cupboard to a house. fig. 4.1 (a)the man rolls the cupboard at a steady speed from the lorry to the house. the friction force in the wheels is 40 n. state the force with which the man has to push. force =  n [1] (b)the cupboard weighs 720 n. state the smallest force needed to lift the cupboard. force =  n [1] (c)the step is 0.20 m high. calculate the work required to lift the cupboard onto the step. work required = . [4] (d)the man has to ask his assistant to help him lift the cupboard onto the step. together,they lift it onto the step in 1.2 s. the men work equally hard. calculate the power developed by each man. power developed =  [4]step wheelshouse5 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "6": "5the apparatus shown in fig. 5.1 is set up in a laboratory during a morning science lesson. fig. 5.1 later in the day, the room temperature is higher than in the morning. (a)what change is observed in the apparatus?  [1] (b)explain why this change happens.  [1] (c)suggest one disadvantage of using this apparatus to measure temperature.  [1]flask air tubeclamp water6 for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "7": "6fig. 6.1 shows a reed relay being used to switch on an electric motor when a variable resistor is adjusted. fig. 6.1 (a)the variable resistor is set at its greatest resistance and then switch s is closed. thereeds in the reed relay do not close when this is done. (i)state two things that happen in the coil of the reed relay. 1.  .. 2.  [2] (ii)state what happens to the two reeds in the reed relay.  [1] (b)the resistance of the variable resistor is slowly decreased. the reeds in the reed relay close. fig. 6.2(a) shows how the current in the coil changes with time. on fig. 6.2(b), draw a line that might show how the current in the motor changes with time as the variable resistor is adjusted. [4]fig. 6.2(b) 0current inmotor time 0fig. 6.2(a)currentincoil time0 0m+ sreedrelaypowersupply variable resistor\u20137 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "8": "7 (a) the filament of a lamp is placed at the principal focus of a lens, as shown in fig. 7.1. fig. 7.1 on fig. 7.1, continue the three rays through the lens and out into the air on the right of the lens. [1] (b)the lens in fig. 7.2 has a focal length of 2.0 cm. fig. 7.2 on fig. 7.2, (i)mark and label the positions of the principal focus on the left of the lens and theprincipal focus on the right of the lens, [1] (ii)carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the axis, through the lensand continue it until it reaches the edge of the squared area, [1] (iii)carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, which travels parallel to the axisafter it has passed through the lens, [1] (iv)draw and label the image. [2]1 cm1 cmobject8 for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "9": "8 (a) two magnets are laid on a bench. end a of an unidentified rod is held in turn above one end of each magnet, with the results shown in fig. 8.1. fig. 8.1 (i)suggest what the unidentified rod is made from.  [1] (ii)state what, if anything, happens when the end a is held over one end of 1.an unmagnetised iron bar,  2.an uncharged plastic rod. ... [2] (b)fig. 8.2 shows four identical plotting compasses placed around a bar magnet where the magnetic field of the surroundings can be ignored. the pointer has only beendrawn on one plotting compass. fig. 8.2 on fig. 8.2, draw the pointers on the other three plotting compasses to indicate thedirections of the magnetic field of the bar magnet in those three places. [3]sna nsa sn south pole lifted offbenchbench north pole lifted offbench9 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "10": "9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows five circuit symbols and their names. the names are in the wrong order. draw a straight line from each symbol to its name. one line has been drawn as an example. fig. 9.1 [3] (b)fig. 9.2 shows a circuit. fig. 9.2ammeter 1switch lamp 2 ammeter 2celllamp 1 1.5 vv acell lamp ammeter voltmeter switch10 for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "11": "(i)in the space below, draw the circuit using circuit symbols. [1] (ii)on your diagram in (b)(i), add a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the cell. [1] (iii)when the switch is pressed so that the contacts join, which of the lamps light up?  [1] (iv)when there is a current in the circuit, ammeter 1 reads 0.5 a. what current does ammeter 2 read? current =  a [1] (v)one lamp \u201cblows \u201d, so that its filament breaks. what happens in the circuit? ..  [1]11 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "12": "10some fat purchased from a shop is supplied as the block shown in fig. 10.1. fig. 10.1 use the information in fig. 10.1 to calculate (a)the volume of the block, volume = .. cm3[2] (b)the density of the fat. give your answer to 2 significant figures. density = . [5]10 cm 6.5 cm4 cm12 for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "13": "11fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays. the tube contains various parts. fig. 11.1 a spot is formed on the screen by the cathode rays. (a)what do cathode rays consist of? .. [1] (b)which part, a, b, c or d, must be heated to create the cathode rays? . [1] (c) (i) which part, a, b, c or d, is coated with fluorescent material? ... [1] (ii)what is the purpose of the fluorescent material?  [1] (d)a potential difference is applied between the two halves of part c.what effect does this have on the cathode rays?  [1] (e)explain why there needs to be a vacuum inside the tube.   [2]abc d13 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "14": "12 (a) state what is meant by (i)the half-life of a radioactive substance, ..  [3] (ii)background radiation. ..  [1] (b)in a certain laboratory, the background radiation level is 25 counts/minute. fig. 12.1 is a graph of the count-rate measured by a detector placed a short distance from a radioactive source in the laboratory. fig. 12.120 40 60 80 100 120 140 time  / min001020304050607080 count-rate counts  / min14 for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "15": "(i)at zero time, the measured count-rate of the source and background together is 80 counts/minute. calculate the count-rate due to the source alone. count-rate due to source = .. counts/min [2] (ii)after one half-life has elapsed, what is the count-rate1.due to the source alone, count-rate due to source = . counts/min 2.measured by the detector? count-rate measured by detector =  counts/min [2] (iii)use the graph to find the half-life of the source. half-life of source = . min [1] (iv)why does the graph not drop below the 25 counts/minute line? ..  [1] (v)on fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might be obtained for a source with a shorter half-life. [2]15 for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "16": "blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.16 0625/02/o/n/05"
        },
        "0625_w05_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. sp (sjf3441/cg)  t03202/4 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics paper 3  extended 0625/03 october/november 2005 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs, music or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question orpart question.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units. do not write in the barcode.do not write in the grey areas between the pages. for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 20051 (a) state what is meant by the terms (i)weight, .. .. [1] (ii) density. .. .. [1] (b)a student is given a spring balance that has a scale in newtons. the student is told that the acceleration of free-fall is 10 m/s2. (i)describe how the student could find the mass of an irregular solid object. ... . [2] (ii) describe how the student could go on to find the density of the object. ... [2] (c)fig. 1.1 shows three forces acting on an object of mass 0.5 kg. all three forces act through the centre of mass of the object. fig. 1.1 calculate (i)the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the object, magnitude =   \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026     direction .. [2] (ii) the magnitude of the acceleration of the object.  acceleration =\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026  [2]for examiner\u2019s use 4.0 n9.0 n 3.0 ncentre of mass",
            "3": "3 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn over2fig. 2.1 shows apparatus for investigating moments of forces. fig. 2.1 the uniform metre rule shown in fig. 2.1 is in equilibrium. (a)write down two conditions for the metre rule to be in equilibrium.condition 1 ... .  condition 2 ... . ... [2] (b)show that the value of the reading on the spring balance is 8.0 n. [2]   (c)the weight of the uniform metre rule is 1.5 n.calculate the force exerted by the pivot on the metre rule.      magnitude of force = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026  direction of force  \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [2]for examiner\u2019s use 01 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 horizontal pivot6.0 n weighthorizontally balanced metre rulespringbalance 60 70 80 90 100",
            "4": "4 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005for examiner\u2019s use3fig. 3.1 shows a pond that is kept at a constant depth by a pressure-operated valve in the base. fig. 3.1 (a)the pond is kept at a depth of 2.0 m. the density of water is 1000 kg/m3. calculate the water pressure on the valve. pressure =\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. [2] (b)the force required to open the valve is 50 n. the valve will open when the water depthreaches 2.0 m. calculate the area of the valve. area = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. [2] (c)the water supply is turned off and the valve is held open so that water drains out through the valve. state the energy changes of the water that occur as the depth of the water drops from 2.0 m to zero. .. . [2]springoutletpressure-operated valvewater",
            "5": "5 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4fig. 4.1 shows apparatus that could be used to measure the specific latent heat of ice.  fig. 4.1 (a)describe how you would use the apparatus. y ou may assume that ice at 0 \u00b0c and a stopwatch are available. state all the readings that would be needed at each stage.   .. ... [4]   (b)in an experiment, 120 g of ice at 0 \u00b0c is to be melted. the specific latent heat of ice is 340 j/g. assume that all the energy from the heater will be used to melt the ice. calculate the expected time for which the 60 w heater is switched on.  expected time = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [2] (c)when the experiment is carried out, the ice melts in slightly less time than the expected time. (i)state one reason why this happens. ... .. [1] (ii) suggest one modification to the experiment that would reduce the difference between the experimental time and the expected time. ... .. [1]power supply melting ice at 0  \u00b0c beaker60 w heater",
            "6": "6 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 20055fig. 5.1 shows a way of indicating the positions and direction of movement of some molecules in a gas at one instant. fig. 5.1 (a) (i) describe the movement of the molecules. .. [1] (ii) explain how the molecules exert a pressure on the container walls. ... .. [1] (b)when the gas in the cylinder is heated, it pushes the piston further out of the cylinder.state what happens to (i)the average spacing of the molecules, .. [1] (ii) the average speed of the molecules. .. [1] (c)the gas shown in fig. 5.1 is changed into a liquid and then into a solid by cooling.compare the gaseous and solid states in terms of  (i)the movement of the molecules, . [1] (ii) the average separation of the molecules. . [1]for examiner\u2019s use cylinderpiston",
            "7": "7 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn over6fig. 6.1 shows the path of a sound wave from a source x. fig. 6.1 (a)state why a person standing at point y hears an echo.  . [1]   (b)the frequency of the sound wave leaving x is 400 hz. state the frequency of the sound wave reaching y .  frequency = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.. [1] (c)the speed of the sound wave leaving x is 330 m/s. calculate the wavelength of thesesound waves. wavelength = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.  [2] (d)sound waves are longitudinal waves. state what is meant by the term longitudinal.  ... [1]for examiner\u2019s use yx path of sound wave wall",
            "8": "8 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 20057 (a) fig. 7.1 shows two rays of light from a point o on an object. these rays are incident on a plane mirror. fig. 7.1 (i)on fig. 7.1, continue the paths of the two rays after they reach the mirror. hencelocate the image of the object o. label the image i. [2] (ii) describe the nature of the image i. ... .. [2] (b)fig. 7.2 is drawn to scale. it shows an object pq and a convex lens. fig. 7.2for examiner\u2019s use o f f principal focus principal focusprincipalposition of convex lens axis qp",
            "9": "9 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn over(i)on fig. 7.2, draw two rays from the top of the object p that pass through the lens. use these rays to locate the top of the image. label this point t. [3] (ii) on fig. 7.2, draw an eye symbol to show the position from which the image tshould be viewed. [1]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "10": "10 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 20058fig. 8.1 shows a high-voltage supply connected across two metal plates. fig. 8.1 when the supply is switched on, an electric field is present between the plates. (a)explain what is meant by an electric field . . [2] (b)on fig. 8.1, draw the electric field lines between the plates and indicate their direction by arrows. [2] (c)the metal plates are now joined by a high-resistance wire. a charge of 0.060 c passesalong the wire in 30 s. calculate the reading on the ammeter. ammeter reading = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [2]  (d)the potential difference of the supply is re-set to 1500 v and the ammeter readingchanges to 0.0080 a. calculate the energy supplied in 10 s.  show your working. energy = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. [3]ahigh-voltage supply metal plates+\u2013for examiner\u2019s use",
            "11": "11 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn over9 (a) in the space provided, draw the symbol for a nor gate. label the inputs and the output.   [2] (b)state whether the output of a nor gate will be high (on) or low (off) when (i)one input is high and one input is low, ... (ii) both inputs are high. ... [1] (c)fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit made from three not gates and one nand gate. fig. 9.1 (i)write high or low in each of the boxes on fig. 9.1. [2] (ii) state the effect on the output of changing both of the inputs. ... .. [1]for examiner\u2019s use high low",
            "12": "12 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 200510fig. 10.1 shows the basic parts of a transformer. fig. 10.1 (a)use ideas of electromagnetic induction to explain how the input voltage is transformed into an output voltage. use the three questions below to help you with your answer.          what happens in the primary coil?  what happens in the core?  what happens in the secondary coil? . [5] (b)state what is needed to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage. . [1]for examiner\u2019s use primary coil inputsecondary coilx x y youtput",
            "13": "13 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn over(c)the core of this transformer splits along xx and yy . explain why the transformer would not work if the two halves of the core were separated by about 30 cm. .. . [1] (d)a 100% efficient transformer is used to step up the voltage of a supply from 100 v to 200 v. a resistor is connected to the output. the current in the primary coil is 0.4 a. calculate the current in the secondary coil. current = \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [2]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "14": "14 0625/03/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 200511a radioactive source emits only \u03b2-particles. (a)a scientist wishes to investigate the deflection of \u03b2-particles by an electric field. draw a labelled diagram to suggest a suitable experimental arrangement. [3] (b)state how the apparatus would be used to show the deflection of the \u03b2-particles by theelectric field.  .. ... [2] (c)state how the results would show the deflection of the \u03b2-particles. ... [1]   (d)explain the direction of the deflection obtained. ... [1]for examiner\u2019s use",
            "15": "15 0625/03/o/n/05blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/03/o/n/05blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w05_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 7 printed pages, 1 blank page and an inserted answer booklet. mml 8430 4/04 s81907/3 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test october/november 2005 1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as specified in the confidential instructions read these instructions first follow the instructions on the front cover of the answer booklet. write your answers in the spaces provided in the answer booklet. answer all questions. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as they are made.an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.",
            "2": "1in this experiment you are to investigate the effect of a load on a rule attached to a spring. record all your observations on pages 2 and 3 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. the apparatus has been set up for you. fig. 1.1 the rule has one end taped to the bench so that it does not slip. the rule is attached to a spring. do not change the position of the spring. (a)place a mass m = 10 g on the rule at the 90.0 cm mark. (b)measure and record the angle  /afii9835between the rule and the bench. (c)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (b) using mass values of 20 g, 30 g, 40 g and 50 g. (d)complete the column headings in the table. (e)a student suggests that /afii9835is directly proportional to m. state with a reason whether or not your results support this suggestion.spring metre rulemass benchclamp h2 0625/05/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "3": "(f)a student carried out this experiment using a 360\u00b0 protractor, as shown in fig. 1.2. explain how the student could use this protractor to measure the angle /afii9835between the metre rule and the bench. y ou may draw a diagram if you wish. fig. 1.2 (g)the range of angles measured in this experiment may be quite small. using the same apparatus, with the masses and spring in the same positions, suggest another method ofinvestigating as reliably as possible the extent by which the rule is pulled down by themasses. this method must not use a protractor but an additional rule may be used. y ou maydraw a diagram if you wish. 0     10    20   30    40    50   60    70   80    90  100  110 120  130 140  150  160 170  180  190 200  210 220  230 240  250  260 270  280 290 300  310 320  330 340  3503 0625/05/o/n/05 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "4": "2in this experiment you are to investigate the resistance of resistance wire in different circuit arrangements. record all your observations and readings on page 3 of your answer booklet.the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you. the circuit includes only section abof the resistance wire. fig. 2.1 (a)switch on. measure and record in the table the current  iin the circuit and the p.d. v across the section of resistance wire. switch off. (b)calculate the resistance r using the equation r= . record this value of r in the table. (c)complete the column headings for each of the i, vand r columns of the table.v\u2013\u2013ia cdbpower  source a v4 0625/05/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "5": "(d)adjust the circuit to include section ac of the resistance wire, as shown in fig. 2.2. fig. 2.2 (e)repeat steps (a) and (b). (f)use a connecting lead to connect a to d. the rest of the circuit should stay as shown in fig. 2.2. (g)repeat steps (a) and (b). (h)draw a circuit diagram, using standard symbols, showing the circuit described in (f). use the symbol for a resistor to represent each section ab, bc and cd of the resistance wire.a cdbpower  source a v5 0625/05/o/n/05 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "6": "3in this experiment you are to investigate the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water. record all your observations on pages 4 and 5 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1 y ou are provided with two beakers labelled a and b. beaker b is insulated. do not remove this insulation. y ou also have a supply of hot water.(a)pour hot water into beaker a until it is approximately two thirds full. (b)measure the temperature  /afii9835of the hot water. record this temperature in the table for time  t= 0 s. (c)start the stopwatch and then record the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals for a total of four minutes. (d)complete the column headings in the table. (e)use the data in the table to plot a graph of /afii9835(y-axis) against t (x-axis). draw the best fit curve. (f)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (d) using beaker b. (g)use the data obtained from part (f) to plot another curve on the same graph axes that you used for part (e). (h)the experiment you have just done was designed to investigate the effect of insulation onthe rate of cooling. suggest two improvements that could be made to the design of theexperiment.thermometerinsulation b a6 0625/05/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "7": "4in this experiment you are to investigate reflection in a plane mirror. record all your observations on pages 6 and 7 of your answer booklet.carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 (a)on page 7 of the answer booklet, the line mm' shows the position of the mirror. draw a normal to this line at its centre. (b)place page 7 of the answer booklet on the pin board. place the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on the line mm'. (c)place the card so that it stands vertically with end bon the normal line and at a distance  x= 5.0 cm from the mirror. the card must be parallel to the mirror. (d)draw a line from the edge a of the card to the point where the normal meets the line mm'. place a pin p 1in this line, close to mm'. label the position of p1. (e)view the image of the edge a of the card in the mirror and position two pins p2and p3some distance apart so that pins p3, p2, p1and the edge a of the card all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p2and p3. (f)remove the pins and the mirror and draw in the line joining the positions of p2and p3. continue the line until it meets the normal. (g)measure and record the angle of reflection r between the normal and line p2p3. (h)repeat the steps (c) \u2013 (g) using values of x of 10.0 cm and 15.0 cm. (i)in spite of carrying out this experiment with care, it is possible that the values of the angle ofreflection rwill not be exactly the same as the values obtained from the theory. suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy.eyeap2p1 bp3mm 'normal normalxmirror card7 0625/05/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "8": "8 0625/05/o/n/05blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w05_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. (sp) mml 8431 5/04 s82205/3 \u00a9 ucles 2005 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2005 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.centre number candidate number name read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the question paper.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. if you have been given a label, look at thedetails. if any details are incorrect ormissing, please fill in your correct detailsin the space given at the top of this page. stick your personal label here, if provided.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "1the igcse class is investigating the effect of a load on a rule attached to a spring. the apparatus used is shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 the rule has the zero end taped to the bench so that it does not slip. the rule is attached to a spring at the 40.0 cm mark. the students hang masses, starting with a 10 g mass, on therule at the 90.0 cm mark. for each mass, they measure the angle  /afii9835between the rule and the bench. one student\u2019s readings are shown in the table. (a)complete the column headings in the table. [1] (b)a student suggests that /afii9835should be directly proportional to m. state, with a reason, whether the readings in the table support this suggestion. statement .  reason  ..  [2]zero end of rule taped to benchmetre rule mass benchspringclamp /afii98352 0625/06/o/n/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005m/ 0 10 20304050/afii9835/ 292826252219",
            "3": "(c)a student carries out this experiment using the 360 \u00b0 protractor shown in fig. 1.2. fig. 1.2 explain how the student could use this protractor to measure the angle /afii9835between the metre rule and the bench. y ou may draw a diagram if you wish. ..  [2] (d)the range of angles measured in this experiment may be quite small. using the same apparatus and with the masses and spring in the same positions, suggest anothermethod of investigating as reliably as possible the extent by which the rule is pulleddown by the masses. this method must not use a protractor but an additional rule maybe used. y ou may draw a diagram if you wish. ..  [2] 0     10    20   30    40    50   60    70   80    90  100  110 120  130 140  150  160 170  180  190 200  210 220  230 240  250  260 270  280 290 300  310 320  330 340  3503 0625/06/o/n/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "4": "2an igcse student investigates the resistance of resistance wire abcd in three different circuit arrangements. the circuits are shown in fig. 2.1. fig. 2.14 0625/06/o/n/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005a c dbpower  source a vcircuit (i) circuit (ii) circuit (iii)a c dbpower  source a v power  source",
            "5": "(a)circuit (iii)is the same as circuit (ii) but with an additional connecting lead between a and d. on fig. 2.1, complete the circuit diagram for circuit (iii) using the standard symbol for a resistor to represent each section ab, bc and cd of the resistance wire. [3] (b)the student measures and records the current iand the p.d. v in each circuit. the student\u2019s readings are shown in the table. (i)complete the column headings for each of the i, vand r columns of the table. [1] (ii)calculate the resistance r for each circuit using the equation r= . record in the table the values of r to an appropriate number of significant figures. [2] (c)look at the resistance values for circuits (i) and (ii). the sections of resistance wire ab, bcand cdare all of the same length. suggest a value for the resistance of the whole wire abcd. explain briefly how you obtained your value.value . ... explanation ... ...  [2]v\u2013\u2013i5 0625/06/o/n/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005i/ 0.91 0.451.37circuit (i) (ii) (iii)v/ 1.801.801.85r/",
            "6": "3the igcse class carries out an experiment to investigate the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water. the apparatus is shown in fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1 the students each have two glass beakers aand b. beaker b is insulated. they also have a supply of hot water.a student pours hot water into beaker a until it is approximately two thirds full and then measures the temperature  /afii9835of the hot water. he records this temperature in the table at time t= 0 s. he then starts a stopwatch and records the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals for a total of four minutes.he repeats the experiment using beaker b. all the readings are shown in the tables below.thermometer waterthermometer water beaker a beaker bbenchinsulation6 0625/06/o/n/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005t/beaker a beaker b 0 30 6090 120150180210240/afii9835/ 806759545148474645t/ 0 306090 120150180210240/afii9835/ 806962575350484746",
            "7": "(a)complete the column headings in the tables. [1] (b)use the readings for beaker a to plot a graph of temperature /afii9835(y-axis) against  time t (x-axis). start the temperature scale at 40 \u00b0c. draw the best-fit curve. [4] (c)use the readings for beaker b to plot another curve on the same graph axes that you used in part (b). [2] (d)the experiment you have just done was designed to investigate the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling. suggest two improvements that could be made to the design ofthe experiment. 1.  .. .. 2.  ..  [2]160 180 200 220 240 260 280 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 t / s7 0625/06/o/n/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "8": "4an igcse student is investigating the reflection of light by a plane mirror. fig. 4.1 on fig. 4.1, the line mm' shows the position of the mirror that is standing on a sheet of paper. the reflecting surface of the mirror is vertical. abis a card that is standing vertically and is parallel to the reflecting surface of the mirror. (a)draw a normal to the mirror such that the edge bof the card lies on the normal. [1] (b)measure the distance x along the normal between the line mm' and the edge b of the card. x= . [1] (c)draw a line from the edge aof the card to the point where the normal meets the line mm'. this represents an incident ray from the edge of the card. [1] (d)measure the angle i between the incident ray and the normal. i= .. [1]m abm' card8 0625/06/o/n/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "9": "(e)calculate the ratio where y = 5.0 cm, the length of the card. = ... [2] (f)the angle of reflection is to be determined as accurately as possible. on fig. 4.1, mark with the letters x, yand zthe points where the student would place three pins in order to plot the reflected ray. [4]x\u2013\u2013 yx\u2013\u2013 y9 0625/06/o/n/05 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "10": "5 (a) the igcse class carries out an experiment to investigate the rate of cooling from 100 \u00b0c of a range of hot liquids. underline any of the following variables that are likelyto have a significant effect on the temperature readings. (y ou may underline one, twoor all three of the suggested variables.) type and size of container volume of liquidtemperature of the surroundings [2] (b)in an experiment to find the resistance of a wire, the students record the current in the wire and the potential difference across it. they then calculate the resistance.underline any of the following variables that are likely to have a significant effect on thecurrent and/or potential difference readings. (y ou may underline one, two or all three ofthe suggested variables.) atmospheric pressure temperature of the wirelength of wire [2] (c)in an experiment, a short pendulum oscillates rapidly. a student is asked to find the period of oscillation tof the pendulum using a stopwatch. the student sets the pendulum swinging and records the time for one oscillation. a technique for improvingthe accuracy of the value obtained for the period t should be used in this experiment. state, briefly, what this technique is and any calculation involved to obtain the value of t. .. ..  [2]10 0625/06/o/n/05for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2005",
            "11": "blank page11 0625/06/o/n/05",
            "12": "blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 0625/06/o/n/05 \u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005\u00a9 ucles 2005"
        }
    },
    "2006": {
        "0625_s06_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "     university of cambridge international examinations    international general certificate of secondary education        physics 0625/01       paper 1  multiple choice     may/june 2006        45 minutes     additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet      soft clean eraser      soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)                          read these instructions first     write in soft pencil.    do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.   write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless   this has been done for you.      there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible    answers  a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.     read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.     each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.   any rough working should be done in this booklet.                                                  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib06 06_0625_01/3rp   \uf6d9 ucles 2006  [turn over  ",
            "2": "2    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/m/j/06 1 a measuring cylinder contains some water. when a stone is put in the water, the level rises.    150 100 50cm3 150100 50cm 3 200 200 stone     what is the volume of the stone?  a 50  cm3 b 70  cm3 c 75  cm3 d 125  cm3     2 the graph represents the movement of a body accelerating from rest.   1234510 8 642 0 time  / sspeed m / s     after 5 seconds how far has the body moved?  a 2  m b 10  m c 25  m d 50  m      3 a child is standing on the platform of a station, watching the trains.       a train travelling at 30  m / s takes 3  s to pass the child.    what is the length of the train?  a 10  m b 30  m c 90  m d 135  m ",
            "3": "3    \u00a9 ucles 2006  0625/01/m/j/06  [turn over  4 below are four statements about the effects of forces on objects.    three of the statements are correct.   which statement is incorrect ?  a a force can change the length of an object.  b a force can change the mass of an object.  c a force can change the shape of an object.  d a force can change the speed of an object.      5 a simple balance has two pans suspended from the ends of arms of equal length. when it is  balanced, the pointer is at 0.    0pointer pan x pan yarm pivot     four masses (in total) are placed on the pans, with one or more on pan x and the rest on pan y.    which combination of masses can be used to balance the pans?  a 1  g, 1  g, 5  g, 10  g  b 1  g, 2  g, 2  g, 5  g  c 2  g, 5  g, 5  g, 10  g  d 2  g, 5  g, 10  g, 10  g      6 a person measures the length, width, height and mass of a rectangular metal block.   which of these measurements are needed in order to calculate the density of the metal?  a mass only  b height and mass only  c length, width and height only  d length, width, height and mass     ",
            "4": "4    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/m/j/06 7 two forces act on an object.    in which situation is it impossible for the object to be in equilibrium?  a the two forces act in the same direction.  b the two forces act through the same point.  c the two forces are of the same type.  d the two forces are the same size.    8 the diagram shows four models of buses placed on different ramps.     centre of masscentre of masscentre of masscentre of mass     how many of these models will fall over?  a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4      9 which form of energy do we receive directly from the sun?  a chemical  b light  c nuclear  d sound      10 a labourer on a building site lifts a heavy concrete bl ock onto a lorry. he then lifts a light block the  same distance in the same time.    which of the following is true?     work done in lifting the  blocks power exerted by labourer  a less for the light block less for the light block  b less for the light block the same for both blocks  c more for the light block more for the light block  d the same for both blocks more for the light block     ",
            "5": "5    \u00a9 ucles 2006  0625/01/m/j/06  [turn over  11 the diagram shows a thick sheet of glass.    which edge must it stand on to cause the greatest pressure?    a d cb      12 a manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. a, b, c and d  show the manometer at different times.    at which time is the gas pressure inside the tank greatest?    gasabcd      13 brownian motion is seen by looking at smoke particles through a microscope.    how do the smoke particles move in brownian motion?  a all in the same direction  b at random  c in circles  d vibrating about fixed points     ",
            "6": "6    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/m/j/06 14 driving a car raises the temperature of the tyres.    this causes the pressure of the air in the tyres to increase.    why is this?  a air molecules break up to form separate atoms.  b air molecules expand with the rise in temperature.  c the force between the air molecules increases.  d the speed of the air molecules increases.      15 to mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, fixed points are needed.    which is a fixed point?  a the bottom end of the thermometer tube  b the top end of the thermometer tube  c the temperature of pure melting ice  d the temperature of pure warm water      16 four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal (heat)  energy.    which block has the greatest thermal capacity?    a temperature rise = 2ocb temperature rise = 4occ temperature rise = 6ocd temperature rise = 8oc     ",
            "7": "7    \u00a9 ucles 2006  0625/01/m/j/06  [turn over  17 a long thin bar of copper is heated evenly along its length.    copper ba r heat    what happens to the bar?  a it becomes lighter.  b it becomes longer. c it becomes shorter. d it bends at the ends.     18 a beaker contains water at room temperature.    x ywater     how could a convection current be set up in the water?  a cool the water at x  b cool the water at y  c stir the water at x  d stir the water at y     ",
            "8": "8    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/m/j/06 19 two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid  is put on top as shown.    lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench     which statement is correct?  a heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.  b no heat passes through the sides of either cup. c the bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup. d the lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.     20 which is the best description of the speed of a water wave?  a the distance between one wave crest and the next   b the distance between the crest of a wave and a trough  c the distance that a particle of water moves up and down in one second  d the distance that a wavefront moves along the surface in one second    ",
            "9": "9    \u00a9 ucles 2006  0625/01/m/j/06  [turn over  21 water waves travel more slowly in shallow water than in deep water.    which diagram shows what will happen to plane waves in deep water when they enter shallow  water?    a deep shallowb deep shallow d deep shallowc deep shallow      22 a ray of light passes through a window.      which path does it take?    a b c dglass air air     ",
            "10": "10    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/m/j/06 23 the diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.        what time is shown?  a 02:25 b 02:35 c 09:25 d 09:35      24 the diagram shows a man standing at x who shouts to a man standing at y.    n e swx y    the man\u2019s voice will be heard sooner and more clearly if the wind is blowing towards the  a north.  b south.  c east.  d west.      25 sounds are made by vibrating objects. a certain object vibrates but a person nearby cannot hear  any sound.    which statement might explain why nothing is heard?  a the amplitude of the sound waves is too large.  b the frequency of the vibration is too high.  c the sound waves are transverse.  d the speed of the sound waves is too high.   ",
            "11": "11    \u00a9 ucles 2006  0625/01/m/j/06  [turn over  26 a student investigates which end of a magnetic compass needle is attracted to a bar magnet.    what does the investigation show?  a both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the north pole of the magnet.  b both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the south pole of the magnet.  c one end of the compass needle is attracted by the north pole and the other end by the south  pole.  d the compass needle is not attracted by either end of the magnet.     27 from which materials are the coil and the core of an electromagnet made?     coil core  a copper copper  b copper iron  c iron copper  d iron iron      28 what are the symbols used for the units of current and resistance?     unit of current unit of resistance  a a w  b a \u03c9  c v w  d v \u03c9    29 when a plastic comb is placed next to a small piece of aluminium foil hanging from a nylon thread, the foil is repelled by the comb.    why is this?  a the comb is charged and the foil is uncharged.  b the comb is uncharged and the foil is charged.  c the comb and the foil have charge of opposite signs.  d the comb and the foil have charge of the same sign.     ",
            "12": "12    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/m/j/06 30 which symbol represents an electrical component used to store energy?    b ac d      31 four lamps and four switches are connected to a power supply as shown in the circuit diagram.    when all the switches are closed, all the lamps are lit.    when one of the switches is then opened, only one lamp goes out.    which switch is opened?    ab cd       32 four resistors and an ammeter are connected to a battery as shown.    the ammeter reads 2  a.    which of the four labelled points in the circuit is the only one where the current is less than 2  a?    ba c da     ",
            "13": "13    \u00a9 ucles 2006  0625/01/m/j/06  [turn over  33 why is a fuse used in an electrical circuit in a house?  a to increase the circuit resistance  b to keep the power used to a minimum value  c to prevent a short-circuit from occurring  d to stop the cables from carrying too much current      34 an electric power tool is being used outdoors in a shower of rain.    what is the greatest hazard to the user?  a the cable gets hot and causes burns.  b the circuit-breaker cuts off the current.  c the current passes through water and causes a shock.  d the tool rusts.     35 a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field experiences a turning effect.    nsvariable power supply     how can the turning effect be increased?  a increase the number of turns on the coil  b reduce the size of the current  c reverse the direction of the magnetic field  d use thinner wire for the coil     ",
            "14": "14    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/m/j/06 36 a transformer is to be used to produce a 6  v output from a 24  v input.    24  v6  vcoil y coil x     what are suitable numbers of turns for coil x and for coil y?     number of turns  on coil x number of turns  on coil y  a 240 60  b 240 240  c 240 960  d 960 60     37 a cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode.    which line in the table shows the charge and the temperature of the anode ?     anode charge anode temperature a negative cool  b negative hot  c positive cool  d positive hot    ",
            "15": "15    \u00a9 ucles 2006  0625/01/m/j/06  [turn over  38 the diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. the atoms each give out an \u03b1-particle.    atom 1 atom 5 atom 4atom 3atom 21st particle 2nd particle    atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. atom 3 is the second to give out a particle.    which atom will give out the next particle?  a atom 2  b atom 4  c atom 5  d impossible to tell     39 a geiger counter detects radiation from radioactive sources.    a radioactive source is inside a thick aluminium container as shown.    radioactive source 2 m geiger counter thick aluminium container    which type of radiation from this source is being detected?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d radio waves ",
            "16": "16      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publis her (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles),  which is itself a department  of the university of cambridge.   \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/m/j/06 40 the nucleus of a neutral atom of lithium is represented by li.7 3    how many protons, electrons and neutrons does the atom contain?     protons electrons neutrons  a 7 7 3  b 3 7 3  c 3 4 4  d 3 3 4       "
        },
        "0625_s06_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. mml 10757 3/05 s99216/2 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2  core may/june 2006 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.centre number candidate number name for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "1 (a) for a special parade, the guest of honour is to sit on a chair whilst the parade passes by. unfortunately the ground beneath the chair is soft, so the parade organisers put thechair on a large flat board, as shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 explain why the board prevents the chair from sinking into the ground. ..  [2] (b)at the parade, some air-filled balloons are used as decorations, as shown in fig. 1.2. fig. 1.2 (i)state what happens to the balloons when the sun makes them hotter.  [1] (ii)in terms of molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i). ..  [2] chair board soft ground2for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "3": "(c)a pump is used to pump up the balloons in (b). a valve in the pump becomes blocked, as shown in fig. 1.3. fig. 1.3 (i)the piston of the pump is pushed in. state what happens to the pressure of the airtrapped in the pump.  [1] (ii)in terms of molecules, explain your answer to (c)(i). ..  [3]blocked valveairpiston direction of motion of piston3 [turn overfor examiner's  use \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/02/m/j/06",
            "4": "2fig. 2.1 is a full-size diagram of a rectangular block. fig. 2.1 (a)use your rule to measure the lengths of the three sides ab, bc and cd. write your values below, in cm, to 2 significant figures. length of ab = . cm length of bc = . cmlength of cd =  cm [2] (b)write down the equation you would use to calculate the volume of the block. do not attempt a calculation. [1] (c)if you used your values from (a), what would be the unit for the volume of the block? unit of volume = ... [1]a bcd4for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "5": "3fig. 3.1(a) shows a measuring cylinder, containing some water, on a balance. fig. 3.1(b) shows the same arrangement with a stone added to the water. fig. 3.1 (a)which two readings should be subtracted to give the volume of the stone? reading .. and reading .. [1] (b)which two readings should be subtracted to give the mass of the stone? reading .. and reading .. [1] (c)in a certain experiment, mass of stone = 57.5 g,volume of stone = 25 cm 3. (i)write down the equation linking density, mass and volume. [1] (ii)calculate the density of the stone. density of stone =  [3]measuring cylinder water balance reading rreading preading q stone reading s (a) (b)5 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "6": "4a piece of fruit is falling from a tree. fig. 4.1 (a)the list below contains the names of some different forms of energy. put a tick in the box alongside four that are possessed by the falling fruit. chemical electricalgravitational (pe)internal (thermal)kinetic (ke)lightsoundstrain [4] (b)which form of energy increases as the fruit falls?  [1] (c)which form of energy decreases as the fruit falls?  [1] (d)which form of energy is stored in the body of a person as a result of eating the fruit?  [1]6for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "7": "5 (a) state two changes that usually happen to the molecules of a solid when the solid is heated. 1.  .. 2.   [2] (b)most substances expand when they are heated. (i)state one example where such expansion is useful.  [1] (ii)state one example where such expansion is a nuisance, and has to be allowed for.  [1] 6fig. 6.1 shows a section through a series of waves on water. fig. 6.1 (a)on fig. 6.1, carefully mark and label (i)the wavelength of the waves, [2] (ii)the level of the flat, still water surface after the waves have passed. [2] (b)describe how, using a stopwatch, the frequency of the waves could be found.   [2]7 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "8": "7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a ray of blue light shining onto a glass prism. fig. 7.1 with the aid of a straight edge, draw a possible path of the ray through the prism and into the air until it reaches the screen. [3] (b)when a ray of white light passes through the prism, it spreads into a spectrum ofcolours that can be seen on the screen. (i)what is the name of this spreading effect? tick one box. convergence diffractiondispersionreflection [1] (ii)which colour is deviated least by the prism? . [1] (iii)which colour is deviated most by the prism? . [1]screen air air normal ray of blue light8for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "9": "8 (a) state what is meant by the north pole of a magnet. ..  [2] (b)the north poles of two magnets are brought close together. what sort of force, if any, is there between the poles? tick one box. attractive repulsiveno force [1] (c)fig. 8.1 shows the north pole of a magnet close to an iron bar. fig. 8.1 (i)the iron bar is attracted to the north pole because of induced magnetism in the iron bar. on fig. 8.1, mark clearly the induced north pole and the induced south pole of the iron bar. [1] (ii)state what happens to the induced magnetism in the iron bar when the magnet istaken away.  [1]nmagnet iron bar9 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "10": "9 (a) the table below gives the half-lives of three radioactive substances. samples of each of the three substances have the same activity today. which sample will have the greatest activity in 1 year\u2019s time? explain your answer. substance with greatest activity after 1 year explanation ... ...  [2] (b)in 1986, an explosion at the chernobyl nuclear power station released radioactive substances into the air. one of the radioactive substances released was iodine-131.some of the iodine-131 found its way into cow\u2019s milk. the activity of a sample of this contaminated milk was measured each week for 4 weeks. the results are shown below.10for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006time / days 0 7 14 21 28 1000 547 294 162 88activity\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013counts / ssubstance half-life iodine-128 radon-222strontium-9025 minutes3.8 days28 years",
            "11": "(i)on fig. 9.1, plot the values given in the table. fig. 9.1 (ii)draw the best-fit curve through your points. (iii)use your graph to find the half-life of iodine-131, showing clearly on your graph how you obtained your value. half-life of iodine-131 = ... days [6]1000 800 600400200 0 0                 5               10               15              20               25              30activity counts_______  / s time  / days11 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "12": "10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a type of tube in which cathode rays can be produced. fig. 10.1 (i)a p.d. is connected between two terminals in order to cause thermionic emission. between which two of the four labelled terminals is the p.d. connected? between point .. and point  [1] (ii)where does the thermionic emission occur?  [1] (iii)what particles are emitted during thermionic emission? tick one box. /afii9825-particles electrons neutronsprotons [1] (iv)on fig. 10.1, draw the path of the cathode rays that are created when all the electrical connections are correctly made. [1] (v)state what is seen when the cathode rays strike the fluorescent screen.  [1]filament anodefluorescent screen a b cd12for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "13": "(b)fig. 10.2 shows the same tube as in fig. 10.1, with two metal plates alongside the tube. a high p.d. is connected between the plates. fig. 10.2 on fig. 10.2, draw the path of the cathode rays. [3] (c)the tube in fig. 10.1 and fig. 10.2 has a vacuum inside it. state why this vacuum is necessary...  [1]+v \u2013v13for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn over",
            "14": "11fig. 11.1 illustrates part of the journey of a car. fig. 11.1 the car engine is leaking oil. regularly, every 2.5 s, a drop of oil hits the road. (a)the car is driven at a steady speed of 10 m/s through the town. (i)calculate the distance on the road between one oil drop and the next oil drop. distance between oil drops = ... m [2] (ii)the town is 500 m across. show that it takes the car 50 s to travel through the town. [3] (b)at a distance of 1000 m outside the town, the car passes a tree. at a further distance of1500 m, the car passes a pylon. between the tree and the pylon the oil drops are all75 m apart. calculate the speed of the car between the tree and the pylon. speed of car =  m/s [2]start of townend of townoil drops on roadtree pylon500  m 1000  m 1500  m14for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "15": "(c)what has happened to the car between the end of the town and the tree? tick one box. the car has accelerated. the car has decelerated.the car has travelled at constant speed. [1] (d)each of the three parts of the journey takes 50 s. calculate the average speed of the car for the whole journey between the beginning of the town and the pylon. average speed =  m/s [5]15for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn over",
            "16": "12in the boxes of the left column below are some electrical hazards. in the boxes of the right column are means of protecting against those hazards. from each hazard, draw a line to the appropriate protection. one line has been drawn as an example. [3] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly beenincluded, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.16for examiner's  use 0625/02/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006electrical hazard loose live wire touches metal case of appliancefuse or circuit-breakerin the circuit use of switches witha nylon pull-cord earth wire connected to themetal case of the appliance visual check of cablesbefore connecting applianceworn insulation on cableto an appliance steam in a washroomcondenses inside a switch wires get hot becausecurrent is too highmeans of protection"
        },
        "0625_s06_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. sp (slm/ks) t04130/2 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics paper 3  extended  0625/03 may/june 2006 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you  hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). do not write in the barcode. do not write in the grey areas between the pages. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/03/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20061 a bus travels from one bus stop to the next. the journey has three distinct parts. stated in  order they are   uniform acceleration from rest for 8.0 s,   uniform speed for 12 s,   non-uniform deceleration for 5.0 s.  fig. 1.1 shows only the deceleration of the bus. 5  010 15   5 0 10 15 20 25 speed  m/s  time/s  fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, complete the graph to show the first two parts of the journey. [3]  (b) calculate the acceleration of the bus 4.0 s after leaving the first bus stop.  acceleration = [2]  (c) use the graph to estimate the distance the bus travels between 20 s and 25 s.  estimated distance = [2] (d) on leaving the second bus stop, the uniform acceleration of the bus is 1.2  m / s 2. the  mass of the bus and passengers is 4000 kg.   calculate the accelerating force that acts on the bus.  force = [2]  (e) the acceleration of the bus from the second bus stop is less than that from the first bus  stop.   suggest two reasons for this. 1.  ..  ..2.  .. ..[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/03/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20062 a student sets up the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1 in order to find the resultant of the two  tensions t1 and t2 acting at p . when the tensions t1, t2 and t3 are balanced, the angles  between t1 and the vertical and t2 and the vertical are as marked on fig. 2.1. vertical board pulley  pulley  69\u00b0 44\u00b0  p t1 = 6.0  n t2 = 8.0  n t3  fig. 2.1  in the space below, draw a scale diagram of the forces t1 and t2. use the diagram to find the  resultant of the two forces.  state  (a) the scale used, scale =    (b) the value of the resultant, value =    (c) the direction of the resultant. direction =    [6]",
            "4": "4 0625/03/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20063 an electric pump is used to raise water from a well, as shown in fig. 3.1. pump ground well fig. 3.1  (a) the pump does work in raising the water. state an equation that could be used to  calculate the work done in raising the water.  ..[2]  (b) the water is raised through a vertical distance of 8.0 m. the weight of water raised in  5.0 s is 100 n.   (i) calculate the work done in raising the water in this time.  work done =  ...[1]   (ii) calculate the power the pump uses to raise the water.  power = [1]  (iii) the energy transferred by the pump to the water is greater than your answer to (i).  suggest what the additional energy is used for. .. [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/03/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20064 (a) state two differences between evaporation of water and boiling of water. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  (b) the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2260 kj / kg.   explain why this energy is needed to boil water and why the temperature of the water  does not change during the boiling. .. .. .. ..[3]  (c) a laboratory determination of the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water uses a  120  w heater to keep water boiling at its boiling point. water is turned into steam at the rate of 0.050 g / s.   calculate the value of the specific latent heat of vaporisation obtained from this  experiment.  show your working.  specific latent heat of vaporisation = [3]",
            "6": "6 0625/03/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20065 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a tank used for evaporating salt solution to produce crystals. salt solution evaporating tank  steam outsteam in fig. 5.1   suggest two ways of increasing the rate of evaporation of the water from the solution.   changes may be made to the apparatus, but the rate of steam supply must stay constant.  y ou may assume the temperature of the salt solution remains constant. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..[2]  (b) a manufacturer of liquid-in-glass thermometers changes the design in order to meet  new requirements.   describe the changes that could be made to   (i) give the thermometer a greater range, .. [1]   (ii) make the thermometer more sensitive. .. [1]  (c) a toilet flush is operated by the compression of air. the air inside the flush has a  pressure of 1.0 \u00d7 10 5 pa and a volume of 150 cm3. when the flush is operated the  volume is reduced to 50 cm3. the temperature of the air remains constant during this  process.   calculate the new pressure of the air inside the flush.  pressure =  ...[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/03/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20066 fig. 6.1 shows white light incident at p on a glass prism. only the refracted red ray pq is  shown in the prism. pq white lightred ray screen fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, draw rays to complete the path of the red ray and the whole path of the violet ray up to the point where they hit the screen. label the violet ray. [3]  (b) the angle of incidence of the white light is increased to 40\u00b0. the refractive index of the glass for the red light is 1.52.    calculate the angle of refraction at p for the red light.  angle of refraction = [3]  (c) state the approximate speed of   (i) the white light incident at p , speed = [1]   (ii) the red light after it leaves the prism at q. speed = [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/03/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20067 fig. 7.1 shows how the air pressure at one instant varies with distance along the path of a  continuous sound wave. air pressure normal air pressurepx y distance in direction of travel of the wave fig. 7.1  (a) what type of waves are sound waves?  ..[1]  (b) on fig. 7.1, mark on the axis py   (i) one point c where there is a compression in the wave, [1]   (ii) one point r where there is a rarefaction in the wave. [1]  (c) describe the motion of a group of air particles situated on the path of the wave shown in  fig. 7.1.   .. .. ..[2]  (d) the sound wave shown has speed of 340 m / s and a frequency of 200 hz.   calculate the distance represented by px on fig. 7.1.  distance = [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/03/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20068 fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit. 12.0  v d.c.  4.0 \u03c9  r a c b  sliding  contact one metre resistance wire  fig. 8.1  the resistance of the lamp is 4.0 \u03c9 when it is at its normal brightness.  (a) the lamp is rated at 6.0 v, 9.0 w.   calculate the current in the lamp when it is at its normal brightness.  current = [2]  (b) the sliding contact c is moved to a. the lamp lights at its normal brightness.   calculate  (i) the total circuit resistance,  resistance = [1]   (ii) the potential difference across the 4.0 \u03c9 resistor r.  potential difference = [1]  (c) the sliding contact c is moved from a to b.   (i) describe any change that occurs in the brightness of the lamp.  .. [1]   (ii) explain your answer to (i). .. .. [2]  (d) the 1 m wire between a and b, as shown in fig. 8.1, has a resistance of 2.0 \u03c9.   calculate the resistance between a and b when   (i) the 1 m length is replaced by a 2 m length of the same wire,  resistance = [1]   (ii) the 1 m length is replaced by a 1 m length of a wire of the same material but of only  half the cross-sectional area.  resistance = [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/03/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20069 a transformer is needed to step down a 240  v a.c. supply to a 12  v a.c. output.  (a) in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a suitable transformer. [3]  (b) explain   (i) why the transformer only works on a.c.,  .. .. [1]   (ii) how the input voltage is changed to an output voltage. .. .. .. [2]  (c) the output current is 1.5 a.   calculate  (i) the power output,  power = [1]  (ii) the energy output in 30 s.  energy = [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/03/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200610 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a positively charged plastic rod, a metal plate resting on an insulator,  and a lead connected to earth. metal plate insulatorpositively charged plastic rod lead connected to earth fig. 10.1   describe how the metal plate may be charged by induction.  ..  .. ..[3]  (b) an electrostatic generator sets up a current of 20 ma in a circuit.   calculate  (i) the charge flowing through the circuit in 15 s,  charge =   (ii) the potential difference across a 10 k\u03c9 resistor in the circuit.  potential difference =   [3]",
            "12": "12 0625/03/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200611 fig. 11.1 shows a beam of radiation that contains \u03b1 -particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. the  beam enters a very strong magnetic field shown in symbol form by n and s poles. beam of radiationn s fig. 11.1  complete the table below. radiationdirection of deflection,  if anycharge carried by radiation, if any \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  [6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department  of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s06_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 7 printed pages, 1 blank page and 1 inserted answer booklet. mml 10773 4/05 t03989/2 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test may/june 2006 1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first if you have been given an answer booklet, follow the instructions on the front cover of the booklet. write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made.an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "1in this experiment you are to determine the density of a sample of card. record all your observations on page 2 of your answer booklet.you are provided with ten pieces of card. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a) (i) measure and record in grams the mass m of the stack of ten pieces of card. (ii)calculate the average mass m of one piece of card. (b) (i) measure and record the height h(in mm) of the stack of cards. (ii)calculate the average thickness t of one piece of card. (c) (i) measure and record the length l(in mm) and width w (in mm) of one piece of card. (ii)calculate the volume v of one piece of card using the equation v=ltw. (d)calculate the density d of the card using the equation d= . m\u2013\u2013 v/k6cw h2 0625/05/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "3": "(e)a sample of corrugated card of the same length and width as the card you have used consists of two thin sheets of card with an air gap in between. the sheets of card areseparated by paper as shown in the cross-section in fig. 1.2. the thickness y of the air gap as shown in fig. 1.2 is between 2 mm and 3 mm. fig. 1.2 estimate the volume v aof air trapped within the corrugated card shown in fig. 1.2.card paper cardy3 0625/05/m/j/06 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "4": "2in this experiment you are to investigate the resistance of lamps in different circuit arrangements. record all your observations and readings on page 3 of your answer booklet.a circuit has been set up for you. you are also provided with an additional lamp and some additional connecting leads. (a)draw a circuit diagram of the circuit that has been set up for you. use standard circuit symbols. (b) (i) switch on. measure and record the current  i1in the circuit and the p.d. v1across the lamp. switch off. (ii)calculate the resistance r1of the lamp using the equation r1= . (c)connect a second lamp in parallel with the first lamp. (i)switch on. measure and record the total current i2in the circuit and the p.d. v2across the lamps. switch off. (ii)calculate the resistance r2of the two lamps in parallel using the equation r2= .v2\u2013\u2013i2v1\u2013\u2013i14 0625/05/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "5": "3in this experiment you are to determine the weight of a metre rule. record all your observations on pages 4 and 5 of your answer booklet. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. the apparatus has been set up for you. fig. 3.1 you are provided with a metre rule supported at one end by a pivot through the 1.0 cm mark. theother end is supported by a newton meter hanging from a clamp. (a)adjust the position of the clamp supporting the newton meter so that the rule is supported at the 0.900 m mark and is horizontal. describe how you checked that the metre rule washorizontal. you may draw a diagram if you wish. (b)record the force f shown on the newton meter. also record the distance d (in m) from the pivot to the 0.900 m mark. (c)calculate and record the value of . (d)adjust the position of the clamp supporting the newton meter so that the rule is supported atthe 0.850 m mark and is horizontal. check that the metre rule is horizontal. (e)record the force f shown on the newton meter and the distance d from the pivot to the  0.850 m mark. calculate and record the value of . (f)repeat steps (d) and (e) with the newton meter at the 0.800 m, 0.750 m and 0.700 m marks. (g)plot a graph of f /n  (y-axis) against (x-axis). (h)determine the gradient gof the graph. (i)calculate the weight of the metre rule using the equation w= , where k = 0.490 m.g\u2013\u2013 k1\u2013\u2013 m/1\u2013\u2013 d1\u2013\u2013 d1\u2013\u2013 dn pivot benchnewton meter metre rule5 0625/05/m/j/06 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "6": "4in this experiment you are to investigate the refraction of light through a transparent block. record all your observations and answers on page 6 of the answer booklet. carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. fig. 4.130\u00b0p1 p2  p3 p4a b c de f g hn n/h11032 eyehole  sheet of paper6 0625/05/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "7": "(a)place the transparent block, largest face down, on the sheet of plain paper supplied. the block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline abcd of theblock . (b)remove the block and draw the normal nn/h11032 to side ab so that the normal is 2.0 cm from a. label the point g where nn/h11032 crosses dc. (c)draw the line ef at an angle of 30\u00b0 to the normal, as shown in fig. 4.1. (d)place the paper on the pin board. (e)place two pins p 1and p2on line ef as shown in fig. 4.1. (f)replace the block and observe the images of p1and p2through side cd of the block so that the images of p1and p2appear one behind the other. place two pins p3and p4between your eye and the block so that p3and p4and the images of p1and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other. mark the positions of p1, p2, p3and p4. remove the block. (g)draw a line joining the positions of p3and p4. continue the line until it meets cd. label this point h. (h)measure and record the length a of the line gh. (i)draw the line hf. (j)measure and record the length b of the line hf. (k)extend the straight line ef within the outline of the block to a point i. the distance fi mustbe exactly equal to b. (l)from i draw a line that meets nn /h11032at a right angle. label this position j. (m)measure and record the length c of the line ij. (n)calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation n= . tie your sheet of paper into your answer booklet opposite page 6.c\u2013\u2013 a7 0625/05/m/j/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "8": "8 0625/05/m/j/06blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s06_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. mml 10813 4/05 t06423/2 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2006 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.centre number candidate number name for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "1the igcse class is determining the density of a sample of card. each student has a stack of ten pieces of card, as shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the height hof the stack of card. h= ... [1] (ii)calculate the average thickness t of one piece of card. t=  [2] (b) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the length land width w of the top piece of card. l= .. w= ... [1] (ii)calculate the volume v of one piece of card using the equation v= ltw . v= ... [2]/k6cw h2 0625/06/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "3": "(c)calculate the density d of the card using the equation d=  where the mass m of one piece of card is 1.3 g. d= ... [2] (d)a sample of corrugated card of the same length and width as the card in fig. 1.1 consists of two thin sheets of card with an air gap in between. the sheets of card areseparated by paper, as shown in the cross-section in fig. 1.2. the thickness y of the air gap as shown in fig. 1.2 is between 2 mm and 3 mm. fig. 1.2 estimate the volume v aof air trapped within the corrugated card shown in fig. 1.2. va= . [1]card paper cardym\u2013\u2013 v3 0625/06/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "4": "2the igcse class is investigating the resistance of lamps in different circuit arrangements. fig. 2.1 shows a picture of the circuit. fig. 2.1 (a)draw a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in fig. 2.1. use standard circuit symbols. [3]power source 0-1 a ammeter0-2 v voltmeterlampvariable resistor4 0625/06/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "5": "(b)the current ithrough the lamp and the voltage v across the lamp are measured. then a second lamp is connected in parallel with the first. the total current iin the circuit and the voltage vacross the lamps are measured. the table below shows the readings. (i)complete the column headings for each of the i, v and r columns of the table. [1] (ii)calculate the resistance r in each case using the equation r= . enter the results in the table. [2]v\u2013\u2013i5 0625/06/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006i/ 0.24 0.45v/ 1.391.30r/",
            "6": "3the igcse class is determining the refractive index of the material of a transparent block. fig. 3.1. shows the drawing that a student makes. fig. 3.1p1 p2  p3 p4a b c de f gn n sheet of plain paper eye6 0625/06/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "7": "the student places two pins p1and p2on line ef to mark an incident ray. then she places the block on the paper and observes the images of p1and p2through side cd of the block so that the images of p1and p2appear one behind the other. she places two pins p3and p4between her eye and the block so that p3and p4and the images of p1and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other. (a) (i) draw a line joining the positions of p3and p4. continue the line until it meets cd. label this point h. (ii)measure the distance a between g and h. a= ... [1] (iii)draw the line hf. (iv)measure the length b of the line hf. b= ... [1] (v)extend the straight line ef within the outline of the block to a point i . the distance fi must be exactly equal to b. (vi)from i draw a line that meets nn/h11032 at a right angle. label this position j. (vii) measure the length c of the line ji. c=  [3] (viii) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation n= . n= ... [2] (b)suggest two improvements you would make to this experiment to ensure an accurate result for the refractive index n. 1 . .. .. 2 . ..  [2]c\u2013\u2013 a7 0625/06/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "8": "4an igcse student is investigating the temperature rise of water in beakers heated by different methods. the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. beaker a is heated electrically andbeaker b is heated with a bunsen burner. fig. 4.1a vfixed voltage power source bunsen burnerbeaker a beaker b8 0625/06/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "9": "the student first records room temperature. (a)fig. 4.2 shows the thermometer at room temperature. fig. 4.2 (i)write down the value of room temperature. room temperature = . [1] (ii)the two beakers are heated from room temperature for the same length of time. the new water temperature for beaker a is 30 \u00b0c and for beaker b is 28 \u00b0c. calculate the temperature rise of the water in each beaker. temperature rise in beaker a = ... temperature rise in beaker b = . [1] (b)the electrical heater and the bunsen burner both have the same power and both beakers were heated from room temperature for the same length of time. suggest whythere is a difference in temperature rise between beaker a and beaker b. .. ..  [2] (c)in order to keep the heating effect of the electrical heater constant throughout the heating period, the student adjusts the current. name the component in the circuit thatthe student uses for this purpose.  [1]\u201410       0      10     20     30     40     50     60     70     80     90    100   110 oc9 0625/06/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "10": "5the igcse class is determining the weight of a metre rule. the apparatus is shown in fig. 5.1. fig. 5.1 a metre rule is supported at one end by a pivot through the 1.0 cm mark. the other end is supported at the 91.0 cm mark by a newton meter hanging from a clamp. (a)describe how you would check that the metre rule is horizontal. y ou may draw a diagram if you wish. ..  [1]n pivot benchnewton meter metre rule10 0625/06/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "11": "(b)the students record the force f shown on the newton meter and the distance d from the pivot to the 91 cm mark. they then repeat the experiment several times using a range of values of the distance d. the readings are shown in the table. calculate and record in the table the values of . [1] (c) (i) on the graph grid below, plot a graph of f /n  (y-axis) against (x -axis). start the y -axis at 0.7 and the x -axis at 1.0. [2] (ii)draw the line of best fit on your graph. [2] question 5 continues on the next page.1\u2013\u2013 m/1\u2013\u2013 d1\u2013\u2013 d11 0625/06/m/j/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006f/n 0.74 0.780.810.860.92d/m 0.9000.8500.8000.7500.700 1\u2013\u2013 m/1\u2013\u2013 d",
            "12": "(iii)determine the gradient gof the line. g= ... [3] (d)calculate the weight of the metre rule using the equation w=  where k = 0.490 m. w= .. [2] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly beenincluded, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.g\u2013\u2013 k12 0625/06/m/j/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006"
        },
        "0625_w06_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "     university of cambridge international examinations    international general certificate of secondary education        physics 0625/01       paper 1  multiple choice     october/november 2006        45 minutes     additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet      soft clean eraser      soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)                          read these instructions first     write in soft pencil.    do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.   write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless   this has been done for you.      there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible    answers  a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.     read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.     each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.   any rough working should be done in this booklet.                                                  this document consists of 18 printed pages and  2 blank pages.  ib06 11_0625_01/rp   \uf6d9 ucles 2006  [turn over    ",
            "2": "2    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 1 a ruler is used to measure the length of a nail.    5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 cm    what is the length of the nail?  a 1.3  cm b 2.9  cm c 5.2  cm d 8.1  cm    2 a cyclist is riding along a road when an animal runs in front of him. the graph shows the cyclist\u2019s  motion. he sees the animal at p, starts to brake at q and stops at r.    00pq rspeed time    what is used to find the distance travelled after he applies the brakes?  a the area under line pq  b the area under line qr  c the gradient of line pq  d the gradient of line qr     ",
            "3": "3    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06  [turn over  3 a car travels along the route pqrst in 30 minutes.    pq rs t10  km5 km 5 km 10  km     what is the average speed of the car?  a 10  km  / hour  b 20  km  / hour  c 30  km  / hour  d 60  km  / hour      4 a newton is a unit of force.   which quantity is measured in newtons?  a acceleration  b density  c mass  d weight     ",
            "4": "4    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 5 a student pours liquid into a measuring cylinder.    digital balance100 90 8070605040302010measuring cylinder liquid     the student records the volume of the liquid from the scale on the measuring cylinder. he then  puts the measuring cylinder containing the liquid on a balance and records the mass.    what else needs to be measured before the density of the liquid can be calculated?  a the depth of the liquid in the measuring cylinder  b the mass of the empty measuring cylinder c the temperature of the liquid in the measuring cylinder  d the volume of the empty measuring cylinder     ",
            "5": "5    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06  [turn over  6 the diagram shows four blocks, each made of glass of density 2.6  g / cm3.    the top of each block has an area of 1  cm2.    which block has a mass of 13  g?    2 cm d5 cm c10  cm b15  cm a      7 a heavy beam is resting on two supports, so that there are three forces acting on it.    r1 r2 w    the beam is in equilibrium.    which statement is correct?  a all the forces are equal in value.  b the forces are in one direction and their turning effects are in the opposite direction.  c the resultant force is zero and the resultant turning effect is zero.  d the total upward force is twice the total downward force.     ",
            "6": "6    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 8 the diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. the position of the centre of mass of  each object has been marked with a cross.    which object is the most stable?    abcd       9 which source of energy uses the production of steam to generate electricity?  a hydroelectric  b nuclear  c tides  d waves      10 a cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point x without pedalling.    the cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point y.    x yhill     which energy changes have taken place between x and y?  a kinetic \u2192 internal (heat) \u2192 gravitational potential  b kinetic \u2192 gravitational potential \u2192 internal (heat)  c gravitational potential \u2192 internal (heat) \u2192 kinetic  d gravitational potential \u2192 kinetic \u2192 internal (heat)     ",
            "7": "7    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06  [turn over  11 to prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.    board soft groundcement mixer     why does this prevent the mixer sinking?  a the large area decreases the pressure on the ground.  b the large area increases the pressure on the ground.  c the large area decreases the weight on the ground.  d the large area increases the weight on the ground.      12 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.     v w x y zmercury     the atmospheric pressure increases.    which distance increases?  a vw b wy c xy d xz     ",
            "8": "8    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 13 a gas cylinder is left outside on a sunny day.    the sun heats the gas inside the cylinder.    what happens to the gas molecules?  a they collide less often.  b they expand.  c they move closer together.  d they move more rapidly.      14 water spilled on the ground on a hot day evaporates.    which diagram represents the change in arrangement of the particles in the water as it  evaporates?     a b cd      ",
            "9": "9    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06  [turn over  15 a block of ice is heated until it has all melted. the water that is produced is then heated until it  boils.    which line in the table states what happens to the temperature of the ice while it is melting, and  to the temperature of the water while it is boiling?     temperature of ice  while it is melting temperature of water  while it is boiling  a increases increases  b increases stays the same  c stays the same increases  d stays the same stays the same    16 a thermometer with no scale is taped to a ruler as shown. when placed in steam, the mercury level rises to 22  cm. when placed in pure melting ice, the mercury level falls to 2  cm.    30 2826242220181614121086420cm mercury     which temperature is shown by the mercury level in the diagram?  a 6 \u00b0c b 8 \u00b0c c 30  \u00b0c d 40  \u00b0c     ",
            "10": "10    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 17 which line in the table is correct about conduction and convection?     conduction convection  a can happen in a solid can happen in a solid  b can happen in a solid only happens in fluids  c only happens in fluids can happen in a solid  d only happens in fluids only happens in fluids     18 a heating element is positioned in a narrow sealed tube of liquid.    what would be the best place to position the heating element in order to obtain the best  circulation of the liquid through the tube?    liquid a db c      ",
            "11": "11    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06  [turn over  19 in a ripple tank experiment, plane water-waves meet a straight barrier with a wide gap in it.    wave motion barrier    which diagram shows the wave pattern beyond the barrier?    ab cd       20 the diagram shows a wave.    xydistancedisplacement 0     how many wavelengths are there between x and y?  a 32 b 1 c 121 d 3 ",
            "12": "12    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 21 a parallel beam of light falls on a converging lens.    which diagram shows what happens to the beam of light?    abcd       22 the image of a clock face as seen in a plane mirror is shown.    12 63 9     what is the time on the clock?  a 1.25 b 1.35 c 10.25 d 10.35    23 a police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy traffic. a pedestrian notices that,  although the loudness of the sound produc ed does not change, the pitch varies.    which line in the table describes the amplitude and the frequency of the sound?     amplitude frequency  a constant varying  b constant constant  c varying constant  d varying varying     ",
            "13": "13    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06  [turn over  24 a sports field is next to a large school building. at the far side of the sports field, a student sees a  groundsman hammer a pole into the ground.    school building hammer pole about 400  mstudent     the student hears two bangs each time the hammer hits the pole.    why does the student hear two bangs?     first bang caused by second bang caused by  a sound of hammer hitting pole  sound of pole hitting hammer   b sound reaching left ear sound reaching right ear  c sound reaching student directly sound due to echo from school building  d sound reflected back from school building sound reaching student directly     25 a student uses three small plotting compasses to investigate the magnetic field around a bar  magnet.    which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point?    s na s nb s n c s nd    ",
            "14": "14    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 26 the ends of three metal rods are tested by holding end q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.     rod 1 rod 2 rod 3qr st u     the results are as follows.    end q: attracts end r,  attracts end s,  attracts end t,  repels end u.    which of the metal rods is a magnet?  a rod 1 only  b rod 1 and rod 2 only  c rod 1 and rod 3 only  d rod 3 only      27 a student wishes to measure the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery and the potential  difference (p.d.) across a resistor.    she has the resistor, the battery and some connecting wires.   what else does she need?  a a voltmeter only   b an ammeter only  c an ammeter and a voltmeter  d a force meter (newton meter) and a voltmeter     28 which particle does  not experience a force due to an electric field?  a \u03b1-particle  b electron  c neutron  d proton     ",
            "15": "15    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06  [turn over  29 a student uses a length of wire as a resistor. he discovers that the resistance of the wire is too  small.    to be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is  a longer and thicker.  b longer and thinner.  c shorter and thicker.  d shorter and thinner.     30 which graph shows how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature?    ab cd0 0 temperature  / \u00b0cresistance  / \u03c9 temperature  / \u00b0cresistance  / \u03c9 temperature  / \u00b0cresistance  / \u03c9 temperature  / \u00b0cresistance  / \u03c9 0 00 0 0 0     31 in the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.    which lamp breaks?    ac d b     ",
            "16": "16    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 32 circuit-breakers are used with electrical appliances as safety devices.    which description is correct for a circuit-breaker?     position action when overloaded  a connected in the live wire melts  b connected in the live wire operates an electromagnet  c connected to the casing of the appliance melts  d connected to the casing of the appliance operates an electromagnet     33 an electric heater is connected to the mains using insulated copper wires. the wires become  very warm.    what can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?  a use thicker copper wires.  b use thinner copper wires.  c use thicker insulation.  d use thinner insulation.     34 the diagram shows an electrical device.    rotation nsmagnet commutator carbon brush battery    what is this electrical device?  a a d.c. motor   b an a.c. generator c a magnetising coil  d a transformer ",
            "17": "17    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06  [turn over  35 the graph shows the voltage input to a step-down transformer.    0 timevoltage input12  v     which diagram shows the voltage output from the transformer?    ab cd0 timevoltage output 0 timevoltage output0 timevoltage output 0 timevoltage output12  v1 2 v 12  v1 2 v      36 particles are emitted by a heated cathode in a cathode-ray tube.    particles cathodeheater anode    what are these particles?  a atoms  b electrons  c neutrons  d protons     ",
            "18": "18    \u00a9 ucles 2006 0625/01/o/n/06 37 which line in the table describes the nature of an \u03b1-particle and of a \u03b3-ray?     \u03b1-particle \u03b3-ray  a helium nucleus electromagnetic radiation  b helium nucleus electron  c proton electromagnetic radiation  d proton electron     38 the count rates of four radioactive sources were measured at the same time on three  consecutive days.    which source has a half-life of two days?     monday tuesday wednesday  a 100 50 25  b 200 140 100  c 300 300 300  d 400 200 100    39 which statement is true of all neutral atoms?  a the number of electrons equals the number of nucleons.  b the number of neutrons equals the number of protons.  c the number of nucleons equals the number of neutrons.  d the number of protons equals the number of electrons.     40 there are three nuclides of hydrogen.    nuclide 1 nuclide 2 nuclide 3  1 1h 2 1h 3 1h    which of these nuclides have the same number of protons in their nuclei?  a 1 and 2 only  b 2 and 3 only  c all of them  d none of them     ",
            "19": "19     0625/01/o/n/06  blank page  ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright  is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publis her (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles),  which is itself a department  of the university of cambridge.     0625/01/o/n/06 blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w06_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. mml 10757 3/05 s99316/2 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2  core october/november 2006 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.centre number candidate number name for examiner\u2019s use",
            "2": "1a worker on the production line in a factory is making brackets. an inspector times the worker whilst he makes 5 brackets. to start, the stopwatch is set to zero. after 5 brackets have been made, the stopwatch is as shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a)state the reading on the stopwatch. reading = .. s [1] (b)calculate the time taken to make 1 bracket. time taken = .. s [2] (c)the worker has a target of making 300 brackets per hour.does the worker meet his target? tick one box and show the working which led you to your answer. does the worker meet his target? y es no [4]5 10 5055 15 45 20 253060 354010 205060 30402for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "3": "2some igcse students were asked to write statements about mass and weight. their statements are printed below. put a tick in the box alongside each of the two correct statements. mass and weight are the same thing. mass is measured in kilograms.weight is a type of force.weight is the acceleration caused by gravity. [2]3for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn over",
            "4": "3fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a journey travelled by a tractor. fig. 3.1 (a)use the graph to describe the motion of the tractor during each of the marked sections. op   pq   qr  ... rs  .. [4] (b)which two points on the graph show when the tractor is stationary? point . and point . [1] (c)state the greatest speed reached by the tractor. greatest speed =  m/s [1] (d)for how long was the tractor travelling at constant speed? at constant speed for ... s [1] (e)state how the graph may be used to find the total distance travelled during the 200 s journey. do not attempt a calculation.  [1]06 42q p sr 50 100 time  / sspeed m / s 170 200o 04for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "5": "4 (a) name the process by which thermal energy is transferred (i)from the sun to the earth,  (ii)through the metal of a cooking pot. .. [2] (b)a child is sitting on an oscillating swing, as shown in fig. 4.1. at the top of the oscillation, the child and swing are momentarily at rest. fig. 4.1 (i)use the names of appropriate types of energy to complete the following wordequation. write on the lines in the boxes. (ii)the child continues to sit still on the swing. the amplitude of the oscillations slowlydecreases. explain why this happens. .. .. [3]energy losses +. energy at the bottom of theoscillation+. energy at thebottom of theoscillation=gravitationalpotential energyat the top of theoscillation5 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "6": "5 (a) state the two factors on which the turning effect of a force depends. 1.  .. 2.   [2] (b)forces f1and f2are applied vertically downwards at the ends of a beam resting on a pivot p . the beam has weight w. the beam is shown in fig. 5.1. fig. 5.1 (i)complete the statements about the two requirements for the beam to be in equilibrium. 1. there must be no resultant ..2. there must be no resultant .. (ii)the beam in fig. 5.1 is in equilibrium. f is the force exerted on the beam by the pivot p . complete the following equation about the forces on the beam. f=  (iii)which one of the four forces on the beam does not exert a moment about p? ... [4]f1pf2 wf    6for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "7": "6a woman stands so that she is 1.0 m from a mirror mounted on a wall, as shown in fig. 6.1. fig. 6.1 (a)on fig. 6.1, carefully draw (i)a clear dot to show the position of the image of her eye, (ii)the normal to the mirror at the bottom edge of the mirror, (iii)a ray from her toes to the bottom edge of the mirror and then reflected from the mirror. [5] (b)explain why the woman cannot see the reflection of her toes. ..  [1] (c) (i) how far is the woman from her image?  m (ii)how far must the woman walk, and in what direction, before the distance betweenher and her image is 6.0 m? distance walked =  m direction =  [4]1.0 mmirror7 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "8": "7a man is using an axe to chop down a tree, as shown in fig. 7.1. fig. 7.1 (a)a short time after the axe hits the tree, the man hears a clear echo. he estimates that the echo is heard 3 seconds after the axe hits the tree. (i)suggest what type of obstacle might have caused such a clear echo. .. (ii)the speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. calculate the distance of the obstacle from the tree. obstacle distance =  m [4]8for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "9": "(b)a branch from the tree falls into some shallow water in a pond nearby. the branch sets up a wave. the wave moves to the left a distance of 3.0 m before hitting the side of amoored boat and reflecting back again. fig. 7.2 the wave takes 5.0 s to travel from ab to the boat and back to ab. calculate the speed of the water-wave. speed of wave = . m/s [2]water wave a3.0 mb side of boat9 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "10": "8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows two groups of materials. fig. 8.1 (i)which group contains metals? ... (ii)which group contains insulators? ... (iii)write down the name of one of the eight materials above that may be charged by rubbing it with a suitable dry cloth. ... [3] (b)two charged metal balls are placed close to a positively-charged metal plate. one is attracted to the plate and one is repelled. fig. 8.2 write a + sign on the ball that is positively charged and a \u2013 sign on the one that is negatively charged. [1] (c)state what is meant by an electric field. ..  [3]charged plateattracted to plate repelled by plategroup 2 plastics silk glass ebonitegroup 1 copper iron gold aluminium10for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "11": "9the points plotted on the grid shown in fig. 9.1 were obtained from a spring-stretching experiment. fig. 9.1 (a)using a straight edge, draw a straight line through the first 5 points. extend your line tothe edge of the grid. [1] (b)suggest a reason why the sixth point does not lie on the line you have drawn.  [1] (c)calculate the extension caused by the 3 n load. extension = .. mm [2] (d)a small object is hung on the unloaded spring, and the length of the spring becomes62 mm. use the graph to find the weight of the object. weight of object = . n [1]100 80 60 40 20 0 012345 load  / nlength  / mm11 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "12": "10a person has a 6 v bell. he hopes to operate the bell from a 240 v a.c. mains supply, with the help of the transformer shown in fig. 10.1. fig. 10.1 (a)state how you can tell from fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer.  [1] (b)state how the output voltage compares with the input voltage in a step-down transformer.  [1] (c)calculate the output voltage of the transformer when connected to the 240 v mainssupply. output voltage =  v [3] (d)why would it not be wise for the person to connect the 6 v bell to this output? ..  [1]primary coil 5000 turnssecondary coil 250 turns240  v a.c. inputoutput12for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "13": "11the table below contains some information about uranium-238. (a)state how many electrons there are in a neutral atom of uranium-238.  [1] (b)state where in the atom the electrons are to be found.  [1] (c)state how many neutrons there are in an atom of uranium-238.  [1] (d)state where in the atom the neutrons are to be found.  [1] (e)state what happens to the number of protons in an atom of uranium-238 when an  /afii9825-particle is emitted.  [2]proton number z= 92 nucleon number a = 238 decays by emitting /afii9825-particle13 [turn overfor examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "14": "12fig. 12.1 shows an electric circuit. fig. 12.1 (a)the lamp lights, but the ammeter needle moves the wrong way. what change should be made so that the ammeter works correctly?  [1] (b)what does an ammeter measure? . [1] (c)in the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the circuit in fig. 12.1, using correct circuit symbols. [2]ammeter battery lamp 15 /afii9821 resistor14for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "15": "(d) (i) name the instrument that would be needed to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 15 /afii9821resistor. . (ii)using the correct symbol, add this instrument to your circuit diagram in (c), in aposition to measure the p.d. across the 15 /afii9821resistor. [2] (e)the potential difference across the 15 /afii9821resistor is 6 v. calculate the current in the resistor. current =  a [3] (f)without any further calculation, state the value of the current in the lamp. lamp current =  a [1] (g)another 15 /afii9821resistor is connected in parallel with the 15 /afii9821resistor that is already in the circuit. (i)what is the combined resistance of the two 15 /afii9821resistors in parallel? tick one box. 30/afii9821 15/afii9821 7.5/afii9821 zero (ii)state what effect, if any, adding this extra resistor has on the current in the lamp. .. [2]15for examiner's  use 0625/02/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "16": "blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.16 0625/02/o/n/06"
        },
        "0625_w06_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. sp (slm/ks) t04132/2 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education physics paper 3  extended  0625/03 october/november 2006 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you  hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). do not write in the barcode. do not write in the grey areas between the pages. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/03/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20061 (a) a stone falls from the top of a building and hits the ground at a speed of 32 m/s.   the air resistance-force on the stone is very small and may be neglected.   (i) calculate the time of fall.  time =   (ii) on fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling stone. 10 0203040 1 0 234speed m/s time/s fig. 1.1   (iii) the weight of the stone is 24 n.    calculate the mass of the stone.  mass =   [5]",
            "3": "3 0625/03/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2006 (b) a student used a suitable measuring cylinder and a spring balance to find the density of  a sample of the stone.   (i) describe how the measuring cylinder is used, and state the readings that are taken.  .. .. .. ..   (ii) describe how the spring balance is used, and state the reading that is taken. .. ..   (iii) write down an equation from which the density of the stone is calculated. ..   (iv) the student then wishes to find the density of cork. suggest how the apparatus and  the method would need to be changed.  .. .. ..  [6]",
            "4": "4 0625/03/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20062 in an experiment, forces are applied to a spring as shown in fig. 2.1a. the results of this  experiment are shown in fig. 2.1b. spring ruler  weights        4.0 08.01216 2.0 0 4.0 6.0force/n extension/mmq pr q pr  fig. 2.1a fig. 2.1b  (a) what is the name given to the point marked q on fig. 2.1b?  ..[1]  (b) for the part op of the graph, the spring obeys hooke\u2019s law.   state what this means.  .. ..[1]  (c) the spring is stretched until the force and extension are shown by the point r on the  graph. compare how the spring stretches, as shown by the part of the graph oq, with that shown by qr.  .. ..[1]  (d) the part op of the graph shows the spring stretching according to the expression f = kx.   use values from the graph to calculate the value of k.  k = ..[2]",
            "5": "5 0625/03/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20063 fig. 3.1 shows water falling over a dam. dam falling water 7.0  m fig. 3.1  (a) the vertical height that the water falls is 7.0 m.   calculate the potential energy lost by 1.0 kg of water during the fall.  potential energy = [2]  (b) assuming all this potential energy loss is changed to kinetic energy of the water,  calculate the speed of the water, in the vertical direction, at the end of the fall.  speed = [3]  (c) the vertical speed of the water is less than that calculated in (b). suggest one reason  for this. .. ..[1]",
            "6": "6 0625/03/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20064 some water is heated electrically in a glass beaker in an experiment to find the specific heat  capacity of water. the temperature of the water is taken at regular intervals.  the temperature-time graph for this heating is shown in fig. 4.1. 020 1040 3060 50 0 60 120 180 240 300 time  / stemperature  / \u00b0c fig. 4.1  (a) (i) use the graph to find    1.  the temperature rise in the first 120 s,       2.  the temperature rise in the second 120 s interval.     (ii) explain why these values are different.  .. ..  [2]  (b) the experiment is repeated in an insulated beaker. this time, the temperature of the  water increases from 20 \u00b0c to 60 \u00b0c in 210 s. the beaker contains 75 g of water. the power of the heater is 60 w. calculate the specific heat capacity of water.  specific heat capacity = [4]",
            "7": "7 0625/03/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2006 (c) in order to measure the temperature during the heating, a thermocouple is used.   draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple connected to measure temperature.  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/03/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20065 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a copper rod ab being heated at one end. bacopper rod bunsen burner fig. 5.1   (i) name the process by which heat moves from a to b.  ..   (ii) by reference to the behaviour of the particles of copper along ab, state how this  process happens.  .. ..  [3]  (b) give an account of an experiment that is designed to show which of four surfaces will  absorb most heat radiation.   the four surfaces are all the same metal, but one is a polished black surface, one is a  polished silver surface, one is a dull black surface and the fourth one is painted white. give your answer under the headings below.   labelled diagram of the apparatus   readings to be taken   one precaution to try to achieve a fair comparison between the various surfaces  ..  ..[3]",
            "9": "9 0625/03/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20066 fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light, from the top of an object pq, passing through two glass  prisms. a b  c  d  e f p  q  fig. 6.1  (a) complete the path through the two prisms of the ray shown leaving q. [1]  (b) a person looking into the lower prism, at the position indicated by the eye symbol, sees an image of pq.   state the properties of this image.  ..[2]  (c) explain why there is no change in direction of the ray from p at points a, c, d and f .  .. ..[1]  (d) the speed of light as it travels from p to a is 3 \u00d7 10 8 m/s and the refractive index of the  prism glass is 1.5.   calculate the speed of light in the prism.  speed = [2]  (e) explain why the ray ab reflects through 90\u00b0 at b and does not pass out of the prism  at b.  .. .. ..[2]",
            "10": "10 0625/03/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20067 fig. 7.1 is a drawing of a student\u2019s attempt to show the diffraction pattern of water waves that  have passed through a narrow gap in a barrier. direction of water wavesbarrier withnarrow gap fig. 7.1  (a) state two things that are wrong with the wave pattern shown to the right of the barrier. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  (b) in the space below, sketch the wave pattern when the gap in the barrier is made five  times wider.  [2]  (c) the waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 1.2 cm and a frequency of 8.0 hz.   calculate the speed of the water waves.  speed = ..[2]",
            "11": "11 0625/03/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20068 fig. 8.1 shows a low-voltage lighting circuit. 12 v d.c. supply x yz fig. 8.1  (a) on fig. 8.1, indicate with a dot and the letter s, a point in the circuit where a switch  could be placed that would turn off lamps y and z at the same time but would leave lamp x still lit. [1]  (b) (i) in the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a component that would vary the brightness of lamp x.   (ii) on fig. 8.1, mark with a dot and the letter r where this component should be placed.  [2]  (c) calculate the current in lamp y .  current = [2]  (d) the current in lamp z is 3.0 a. calculate the resistance of this lamp.  resistance = [2] (e) the lamp y is removed.   (i) why do lamps x and z still work normally?  .. ..   (ii) the current in lamp x is 1.0 a. calculate the current supplied by the battery with  lamp y removed.  current =   [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/03/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20069 (a) fig. 9.1 shows how a beam of electrons would be deflected by an electric field produced  between two metal plates.   the connections of the source of high potential difference are not shown. + \u2013 high potential difference beam of electronsmetal plate metal plate fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, draw in the missing connections.   (ii) explain why the beam of electrons is deflected in the direction shown. in your answer, consider all the charges involved and their effect on each other.  .. .. .. ..  [5]  (b) the deflection of a beam of electrons by an electric field is used in cathode-ray  oscilloscopes.   (i) what makes the electron beam move backwards and forwards across the screen?  .. ..   (ii) what makes the electron beam move up and down the screen? .. ..  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/03/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2006 (c) an a.c. waveform is displayed so that two full waves appear on the screen of a cathode- ray oscilloscope.   fig. 9.2 shows the face of the oscilloscope. on fig. 9.2, draw in the waveform. fig. 9.2  [1]",
            "14": "14 0625/03/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200610 fig. 10.1 shows a circuit that is used to switch on a lamp automatically when it starts to go  dark. \u2013+ a bd v c fig. 10.1  (a) write down the names of the components labelled a, b, c and d. a ... b ...c ... d ... [2]  (b) which of the four components a, b, c or d acts as a switch?   [1]  (c) explain why the lamp comes on as it goes dark. .. .. .. ..[3]",
            "15": "15 0625/03/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200611 (a) \u03b1-particles, \u03b2 -particles and \u03b3-rays are known as ionising radiations.   (i) describe what happens when gases are ionised by ionising radiations.  .. .. ..   (ii) suggest why \u03b1 -particles are considered better ionisers of gas than \u03b2 -particles.  .. ..  [3]  (b) (i) suggest two practical applications of radioactive isotopes.1.  ..2.  ..   (ii) for one of the applications that you have suggested, describe how it works, or draw  a labelled diagram to illustrate it in use.  .. .. ..  [4]",
            "16": "16 0625/03/o/n/06permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department  of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w06_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 6 printed pages, 2 blank pages and 1 inserted answer booklet. mml 10779 4/05 t04064/2 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test october/november 2006 1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as specified in the confidential instructions read these instructions first if you have been given an answer booklet, follow the instructions on the front cover of the booklet. write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. you are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made.an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.",
            "2": "1in this experiment you are to determine the density of a type of wood. record all your observations on pages 2 and 3 of your answer booklet.you are provided with a bundle of wooden rods. you have access to a balance. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a)measure and record the mass m of the bundle of wooden rods. (b)measure and record, in cm, the lengths of a sufficient number of the rods to enable theaverage length to be calculated. (c)calculate the average length l . show your working. (d)use the metre rule and the piece of string provided to determine the circumference c, in cm, of the bundle of rods. (e)calculate the volume v of the bundle of rods using the equation v= . (f)the equation used in (e) assumes that the bundle is a solid cylinder. however there are air gaps between the rods. consider your value of the volume vof the bundle of rods and estimate the total volume v rof the rods themselves. (g)calculate the density d of the wood using the equation d= .m\u2013\u2013 vrc2l\u2013\u2013 4\u03c0/k6c2 0625/05/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "3": "2in this experiment you are to investigate the swing of a loaded metre rule. record all your observations and answers on page 4 of the answer booklet.carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. fig. 2.1 the loaded metre rule has been set up for you.(a)adjust the position of the load attached to the metre rule so that its centre is 90.0 cm from the pivot. (b)displace the rule a small distance to one side and allow it to swing. measure and record thetime t taken for 10 complete swings. a complete swing is shown in fig. 2.1. (c)calculate the time t taken for one complete swing. (d)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (c)to obtain a total of five sets of readings. use values of d of 85.0 cm, 80.0 cm, 75.0 cm and 70.0 cm. (e)plot a graph of t /s  (y-axis) against d / cm (x -axis). (f)a student suggests that t is proportional to d . state whether your results support this suggestion and give a reason for your answer. (g)suggest one way that you could improve the accuracy of your results. (you are notasked to carry out any additional experimental work.)pivot metre rule load one complete swingd3 0625/05/o/n/06 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "4": "3in this experiment you are to investigate reflection in a plane mirror. record all your observations and answers on page 5 of the answer booklet.carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1mirrorholeg e f j eyeh30\u00b05.0 cm e/h11032g/h11032f/h11032 b a ray trace sheet4 0625/05/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "5": "(a)draw a straight line ef across the ray trace sheet, about 5 cm from the top of the sheet. (b)draw a normal gh to line ef so that point g is approximately at the centre of line ef. (c)draw a line gj at an angle of 30\u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 3.1. (d)mark a point a on line gj so that the distance ag is 11.5 cm. (e)place the ray trace sheet on the pin board. place the mirror so that its front surface stands along the line ef. (f)push a pin p1into the surface at point a. (g)push another pin p2into the surface at a point on gj closer to the mirror. label this point b. (h)view the images of the pins p1and p2from the direction indicated in fig. 3.1. push two pins p3and p4into the surface between your eye and the mirror so that p3, p4and the images of p1and p2appear exactly one behind the other. (i)mark the positions of pins p3and p4on the ray trace sheet with letters c and d. remove the pins and the mirror. using a rule, draw a line joining cand dand continue this line to meet the line ef. (j)measure and record the angle of reflection r1between lines gh and cd. (k)draw a line e/h11032f/h11032 that is parallel to and 5.0 cm below line ef. (see fig. 3.1.) label the point g/h11032where the normal crosses line e/h11032f/h11032. (l)draw a line from g/h11032 through the point a. (see fig. 3.1.) (m)place the ray trace sheet on the pin board. place the mirror so that its front surface standsalong line e/h11032f/h11032. (n)push a pin p 1into the surface at point a. (o)push another pin p2into the surface on line ag/h11032 closer to the mirror. label this point b/h11032. (p)repeat steps (h) and (i), marking the pin positions c/h11032 and d/h11032. draw a line joining c/h11032 and d/h11032 that continues to meet the line e/h11032f/h11032. (q)measure and record the angle of reflection r2between lines gh and c/h11032d/h11032. (r)state whether it is best to view the tops, bases or central parts of the pins in order to obtainaccurate results for this experiment. give a reason for your answer. tie your ray trace sheet into your answer booklet between pages 4 and 5.5 0625/05/o/n/06 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "6": "4in this experiment you are to investigate the conditions affecting the rate of cooling of a beaker of hot water. record all your observations and answers on pages 6 and 7 of the answer booklet.you are provided with a supply of hot water. carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 (a)pour hot water into beaker a until it is about two-thirds full. beaker a is insulated. do not remove the insulation. (b)measure and record the temperature  \u03b8of the hot water and at the same time start the stopwatch. record the temperature at time t= 0 s in the table. (c)measure and record the temperature of the water in beaker aevery 30 s for a total of five minutes. (d)pour the water from beaker ainto the measuring cylinder. measure and record the volume v of the water. (e)repeat steps (a) \u2013 (c)using beaker b. this beaker has a lid. as soon as you have poured the hot water into the beaker, replace the lid as shown in fig. 4.1 and do not remove the lid during the experiment. (f)look at the temperature readings obtained. state whether the insulation round beaker aor the lid on beaker b or neither of these is more effective in keeping the water hot. justify your answer by reference to the readings in your table. (g)to obtain reliable results in this experiment, it is important that variables are controlled. statethree variables that could have affected the results of this experiment.thermometer thermometer insulation waterlid water beaker a beaker b6 0625/05/o/n/06 \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "7": "blank page7 0625/05/o/n/06",
            "8": "8 0625/05/o/n/06blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w06_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. mml 10815 4/05 t06425/2 \u00a9 ucles 2006 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2006 1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.you may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.centre number candidate number name for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "1the igcse class is determining the density of a type of wood. the students are provided with a bundle of wooden rods, as shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1 (a)on fig. 1.1, measure the length lof a rod. l= ... cm [1] (b)a student winds five turns of string round the bundle and marks the beginning and the end of the five turns. she then uses the metre rule to measure the distance x between the marks. she records that x = 24.5 cm. (i)determine the circumference c of the bundle of rods. c= .. (ii)calculate the volume v of the bundle of rods using the equation v= . v= ... [4]c2l\u2013\u2013 4/afii9843/k6c2 0625/06/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "3": "(c)the equation used in (b)(ii) assumes that the bundle is a solid cylinder. however, there are air gaps between the rods. (i)estimate the total volume vrof the rods themselves. vr=  (ii)calculate the density d of the wood using the equation d=  where the mass m of the bundle = 6.3 g. d= ... [3]m\u2013\u2013 vr3 0625/06/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "4": "2the igcse class is investigating the swing of a loaded metre rule. the arrangement of the apparatus is shown in fig. 2.1. fig. 2.1 the load is attached to the metre rule so that its centre is 90.0 cm from the pivot. the rule is displaced a small distance to one side and allowed to swing. the time ttaken for  10 complete swings is recorded. this is repeated using different values of the distance d.the readings are shown in the table.pivot metre rule load one complete swingd4 0625/06/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006d/ 90.0 85.080.075.070.0t/ 18.3517.8717.5317.0616.72t/",
            "5": "(a)complete the column headings in the table. [1] (b)calculate the period tfor each value of d . the period is the time taken for one complete swing. enter the values in the table. [2] (c)on the grid below, plot a graph of t /s  (y-axis) against d / cm (x -axis). start the x -axis at d= 70.0 cm and the y -axis at a suitable value of t / s to make best use of the graph grid. [5] (d)a student suggests that t is proportional to d. state whether or not the results support this suggestion and give a reason for your answer. statement .  .. reason  ..  [1] (e)explain why the student takes the time for ten swings and then calculates the time for one swing (the period), rather than just measuring the time for one swing. ..  [1]5 0625/06/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "6": "3the igcse class is investigating reflection in a plane mirror. fig. 3.1 shows a ray diagram that a student is constructing. fig. 3.1mirrorg e f j k eyepaper6 0625/06/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006\u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "7": "(a) (i) draw a normal gh to line ef . (ii)mark a point a on line gj so that the distance ag is 11.5 cm. (iii)measure the angle of incidence i between line gj and the normal. i= . [3] (b)the student pushes two pins into the paper on line gj, one at point a, and the other at a point b nearer to the mirror. he views the images of the pins from the directionindicated in fig. 3.1. he then pushes in two pins on line gk between his eye and themirror so that these two pins and the images of the pins on line gj appear exactly onebehind the other. (i)on fig. 3.1, mark suitable positions for the pins on lines gj and gk. label themarks with letters b, c and d. (ii)to obtain an accurate result for this experiment, would you view the tops, bases orcentral parts of the pins when lining them up? give a reason for your answer. i would view ..reason .. ..  [3]7 0625/06/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "8": "4the igcse class is investigating conditions affecting the rate of cooling of a beaker of hot water. (a)the students start by measuring room temperature. record the value of room temperature as shown on the thermometer in fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1 temperature = .. [2] (b)the students are provided with hot water in beakers as shown in fig. 4.2. beaker a is insulated and beaker b has a lid. fig. 4.2 the students measure and record the temperature \u03b8of the water in each beaker every 30 s for a total of five minutes. one student\u2019 s readings are shown in the tables.thermometer thermometer insulation waterlid water beaker a beaker b\u201410       0      10     20     30     40     50     60     70     80     90    100   110 oc8 0625/06/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "9": "(i)look at the temperature readings in the tables. state whether the insulation round beaker a or the lid on beaker b or neither is most effective in keeping the waterhot. by reference to readings in the tables, justify your answer. statement .justification ...  [2] (ii)suggest a suitable material for the insulation around beaker a.  [1] (iii)to obtain reliable results in this experiment, it is important that variables are controlled. state three variables that should be controlled in this experiment. variable 1 ..variable 2 ..variable 3  [3]9 0625/06/o/n/06 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006time / s 0 30 6090 120150180210240270300\u03b8/\u00b0cbeaker a 83.082.081.079.579.077.075.074.072.071.070.0time / s 0 306090 120150180210240270300\u03b8/\u00b0cbeaker b 82.082.081.080.079.078.076.075.074.073.072.0",
            "10": "5a student is investigating the relationship between potential difference v across a resistor and the current iin it. fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus that the student is using. fig. 5.1 (a)draw the circuit diagram of the circuit shown in fig. 5.1. use standard circuit symbols. [3] (b)the student is using a lamp to show when the current is switched on. why is it unnecessary to use the lamp? ..  [1]power source ammeter voltmetervariable resistor lampswitch resistor10 0625/06/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "11": "(c)state which piece of apparatus in the circuit is used to control the size of the current.  [1] (d)the student removes the lamp from the circuit. he is told that the resistance of a conductor is constant if the temperature of the conductor is constant. he knows thatthe current in the resistor has a heating effect. suggest two ways in which the studentcould minimise the heating effect of the current in the resistor. 1.  .. 2.   [2] (e)fig. 5.2 shows a variable resistor with the sliding contact in two different positions. fig. 5.2 state which position, a or b, shows the higher resistance setting. explain your answer.statement explanation ... ...  [1]metal bar coil of resistance wiresliding contact in position a metal bar coil of resistance wiresliding contact in position b11 0625/06/o/n/06for examiner\u2019s  use \u00a9 ucles 2006",
            "12": "12 0625/06/o/n/06blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, thepublisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        }
    },
    "2007": {
        "0625_s07_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib07 06_0625_01/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2007  [turn over      *4300881997* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/01     paper 1 multiple choice  may/june 2007     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet    soft clean eraser    soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.           ",
            "2": "2    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 1 the diagram shows a thick-walled tube. the thickness of the wall is 3  mm.    12345d 67891 0 1 1 0 cm     what is the internal diameter d of the tube?  a 2.8  cm b 3.1  cm c 3.4  cm d 7.4  cm      2 the graph shows the progress of an athlete in a 100  m race.    0123456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4100 80 604020 0distance  travelled   / m time  / s    what time was taken to travel 10  m from the start?  a 2.4  s b 2.8  s c 65  s d 70  s     ",
            "3": "3    \u00a9 ucles 2007 0625/01/m/j/07  [turn over  3 two stones of different weight fall at the sa me time from a table. air resistance may be ignored.    what will happen and why?     what will happen why  a both stones hit the floor at the same time the acceleration of free fall is constant  b both stones hit the floor at the same  time they fall at constant speed  c the heavier stone hits the floor first acceleration increases with weight  d the heavier stone hits the floor first speed increases with weight     4 the diagram shows a bird in flight.    in which direction does the weight of the bird act?    b a dc      ",
            "4": "4    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 5  the mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30  kg.    when exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is  0.90  kg.        what is the mass of the empty bottle?  a 0.40  kg b 0.50  kg c 0.65  kg d 0.80  kg     6 which of the following is a unit of density?  a cm 3  / g b g / cm2 c g / cm3 d kg  / m2    7 each of the solids shown in the diagram has the same mass.   which solid has the greatest density?    2 cm 2  cm 2 cm 2  cm1 cm 1 cm 1 cm 1 cm1 cm 1 cm2 cm2 cmabcd      ",
            "5": "5    \u00a9 ucles 2007 0625/01/m/j/07  [turn over  8 a force acts on a moving rubber ball.    how many of the following changes could happen to the ball because of the force?    \u2022 a change in direction  \u2022 a change in shape \u2022 a change in mass  \u2022 a change in speed    a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4     9 a light aircraft stands at rest on the ground. it stands on three wheels, one at the front and two  further back.    which point could be its centre of mass?    a bc d       10 which form of energy is used to generate electrical energy in a tidal power station?  a chemical energy  b gravitational energy  c internal energy (thermal energy)  d nuclear energy      11 which line in the table gives an example of the stated form of energy?     form of energy  example  a gravitational the energy due to the movement of a train  b internal the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode ray tube  c   kinetic   the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a  high diving board  d strain the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat     ",
            "6": "6    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 12 a pressure is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.    h waterpressure to be measured     the water in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is more dense.     how does the value of h change?  a it becomes zero.  b it decreases, but not to zero.  c it stays the same .  d it increases.     13 a cylinder is filled with a gas and then sealed,  so that the gas has a fixed volume.    the gas molecules are given energy so that their average speed increases.  what happens to the pressure and to the temperature of the gas in the cylinder?     pressure temperature  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases   c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "7": "7    \u00a9 ucles 2007 0625/01/m/j/07  [turn over  14 diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.    diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.    microscope air molecules andsmoke particleslightdiagram 1 diagram 2 randommovement     why do the smoke particles move randomly?  a they are hit by air molecules.  b they are less dense than air. c they are moved by convection currents. d they gain energy from the light.     15 the graph shows how the temperature of hot liquid wax changes with time as the wax is allowed  to cool.    at which labelled point on the graph are both liquid wax and solid wax present?    temperature timea bc d 0 0    ",
            "8": "8    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 16 1  kg of water and 1  kg of aluminium are heated to the same temperature and then allowed to cool  in a room.    why does the aluminium cool more quickly than the water?  a aluminium contracts more than water.  b aluminium does not evaporate but water does.  c aluminium has a higher thermal capacity than water.  d aluminium has a lower thermal capacity than water.     17 bread can be cooked by placing it below, but not touching, a heating element.    heating element bread     which process transfers thermal energy from the heating element to the bread?  a conduction  b convection  c insulation  d radiation     ",
            "9": "9    \u00a9 ucles 2007 0625/01/m/j/07  [turn over  18 the diagram shows a refrigerator. the cooling unit is placed at the top. the cooling unit cools the  air near it.    cooling unit     what happens to the density of this air as it cools and how does it move?     density of the air movement of the air  a decreases moves down  b decreases stays where it is  c increases moves down  d increases stays where it is      19 water waves are reflected at a plane surface.    which property of the waves is changed by the reflection?  a direction  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength     ",
            "10": "10    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 20 plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. they travel more quickly in  the deeper water.    wave directionshallow water deep waterboundary     which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?    ab cd      ",
            "11": "11    \u00a9 ucles 2007 0625/01/m/j/07  [turn over  21 a man sees a stone at the bottom of a pool of water.    which path could be taken by light from the stone to the man?    air water stoneab c dman       22 a ray of light is reflected by two parallel plane mirrors x and y.    mirror x mirror y30\u00b0     which statement is correct?  a the angle of incidence at mirror x is 30 \u00b0.  b the angle of incidence at mirror y is 60 \u00b0.  c the angle of reflection at mirror x is 120 \u00b0.  d the angle of reflection at mirror y is 0 \u00b0.     ",
            "12": "12    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 23 music is produced by the loudspeaker of a radio.    which property of the sound wave increases when the music is made louder?  a amplitude  b frequency c speed d wavelength     24 a starting pistol is fired 640  m away from a spectator.    640  m spectator     the spectator hears the sound of the starting pisto l two seconds after seeing the flash from the  gun.    what is the speed of sound in air?  a 160  m / s b 320  m / s c 640  m / s d 1280  m / s     25 small particles of metal are scattered near a bar magnet to show the pattern of the magnetic  field.    which metal is suitable?  a aluminium  b brass c copper  d iron     ",
            "13": "13    \u00a9 ucles 2007 0625/01/m/j/07  [turn over  26 a strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.    core pins coil     what happens when the current in the coil is halved?  a no pins are attracted.  b fewer pins are attracted.  c the same number of pins is attracted.  d many more pins are attracted.     27 four plotting compasses are placed near a bar magnet.    which plotting compass is shown pointing in the correct direction?    ab c dn s       28 four wires are made from the same material.    which wire has the greatest resistance?     length of wire  / cm diameter of wire  / mm  a 50 0.1  b 50 0.2  c 100 0.1  d 100 0.2   ",
            "14": "14    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 29 a plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth and becomes positively charged.    why has the rod become positively charged?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained neutrons. c it has lost electrons. d it has lost neutrons.     30 which circuit is a variable potential divider (potentiometer)?    output output outputoutputab cd      ",
            "15": "15    \u00a9 ucles 2007 0625/01/m/j/07  [turn over  31 the circuit contains a relay.    lamp 1lamp 2 switch srelay     when switch s is closed, what is the state of the lamps?     lamp 1 lamp 2  a on on  b on off  c off on  d off off     32 which diagram shows a circuit that will allow the lamps to be switched on and off independently?    abcd       33 what is the symbol for a fuse?    abcd      ",
            "16": "16    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 34 a cable in a house is carrying too much current.    what is the greatest danger?  a appliances not working  b electric shock  c fire  d low power     35 a coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. the coil is connected to an oscilloscope,  which shows a graph of voltage output against time.    ns contactcontactoscilloscope     which graph shows the voltage output against time?    bcd a      36 the diagram shows a lamp connected to a transformer.    40 turns 200 turns 12  v a.c.     what is the potential difference across the lamp?  a 2.4  v b 12  v c 60  v d 240  v     ",
            "17": "17    \u00a9 ucles 2007 0625/01/m/j/07  [turn over  37 a beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.    ++++++ cathode rays \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013     in which direction is the beam deflected?  a into the page  b out of the page  c towards the bottom of the page  d towards the top of the page      38 what are the most penetrating and the least penetrating types of radiation?     most penetrating least penetrating  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles  c \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles     39 the half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. a sample is tested and found to contain 0.48  g  of the substance.    how much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested?  a 0.03  g b 0.12  g c 1.92  g d 7.68  g    ",
            "18": "18    \u00a9 ucles 2007  0625/01/m/j/07 40 the data below relates to the nucleus of a particular neutral atom of nitrogen.    proton number z = 7  nucleon number a = 17    which row represents the correct number of neutrons and electrons in this atom?     number of neutrons number of electrons  a 10 7  b 10 10  c 17 7  d 17 10     ",
            "19": "19     0625/01/m/j/07   blank page",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright  is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publis her (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.     0625/01/m/j/07 blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s07_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 101112 total this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. spa (mml 13116 3/06) t25803/4 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *8187295232* physics 0625/02 paper 2  core may/june 2007  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20071 the mechanical stop-clock shown in fig. 1.1 has   a seconds hand, which rotates once every minute  and a minutes hand, which rotates once every hour. 60 5 10 15 20 25 303540455055start reset stop minutes hand seconds hand fig. 1.1  (a) a student uses the clock to time the intervals between trains travelling along the railway  past his school.   he sets the clock to zero (both hands vertical).   as train 1 passes, he starts the clock and leaves it running.  after 35 s, train 2 passes.  on the blank face of fig. 1.2, show the positions of the two hands of the clock as train 2  passes. make sure it is clear which hand is which. [2] 60 5 10 15 20 25 303540455055 fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/02/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) train 3 passes the school 4 minutes and 55 s after the clock was started.   on the blank face of fig. 1.3, show the positions of the hands of the clock as train 3  passes. [2] 60 5 10 15 20 25 303540455055 fig. 1.3  (c) calculate the time interval between train 2 and train 3.  time interval =  ... min  ... s [1] [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20072 in a training session, a racing cyclist\u2019s journey is in three stages.  stage 1 he accelerates uniformly from rest to 12 m/s in 20 s.  stage 2 he cycles at 12 m/s for a distance of 4800 m.  stage 3 he decelerates uniformly to rest.  the whole journey takes 500 s.  (a) calculate the time taken for stage 2.  time =  ... s [2]  (b) on the grid of fig. 2.1, draw a speed/time graph of the cyclist\u2019s ride. [3] 14 1210 86420 0               100             200            300            400             500speed  / m / s time  / s fig. 2.1",
            "5": "5 0625/02/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) show that the total distance travelled by the cyclist is 5400 m. [4]  (d) calculate the average speed of the cyclist.  average speed = ... m/s [2] [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20073 a piece of stiff cardboard is stuck to a plank of wood by means of two sticky-tape \u201chinges\u201d.  this is shown in fig. 3.1. stiff cardboard sticky-tape \u201chinge\u201d plank of wooda bc fig. 3.1  (a) the cardboard is lifted as shown, using a force applied either at a or b or c.   (i) on fig. 3.1, draw the force in the position where its value will be as small as possible. [2]   (ii) explain why the position you have chosen in (a)(i) results in the smallest force.    [1]  (b) initially, the cardboard is flat on the plank of wood. a box of matches is placed on it. the  cardboard is then slowly raised at the left hand edge, as shown in fig. 3.2. stiff cardboard sticky-tape \u201chinge\u201d plank of wood fig. 3.2   state the condition for the box of matches to fall over.  ..     [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/02/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) the box of matches is opened, as shown in fig. 3.3. the procedure in (b) is repeated. stiff cardboard sticky-tape \u201chinge\u201d plank of wood fig. 3.3   (i) complete the sentence below, using either the words \u201cgreater than\u201d or \u201cthe same  as\u201d or \u201cless than\u201d.    in fig. 3.3, the angle through which the cardboard can be lifted before    the box of matches falls is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the angle    before the box of matches falls in fig. 3.2. [1]   (ii) give a reason for your answer to (c)(i).  ..   [1] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20074 in fig. 4.1, a small bird, a large bird and a squirrel are on the ground under a tree. fig. 4.1  a loud noise scares the two birds. they both fly up to the top of the tree.  (a) (i) which bird does the most work raising itself to the top of the tree?  ... [1]   (ii) explain your answer to (a)(i).    [1]  (b) a squirrel has the same weight as the large bird. it climbs the tree, to the same height  as the birds.   how does the increase in the squirrel\u2019s gravitational potential energy compare with that  of each of the two birds? answer the question by completing the sentences below.     compared with that of the small bird, the increase of the squirrel\u2019s potential     energy is  .  .    compared with that of the large bird, the increase of the squirrel\u2019s potential    energy is  .  . [2]  (c) which creature has the least gravitational potential energy when they are at the top of  the tree?    [1]  (d) the small bird flies back down to the ground.   what happens to the gravitational potential energy it had at the top of the tree?    [2] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/02/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20075 (a) here is a list of descriptions of molecules in matter. description solid gas free to move around from place to place can only vibrate about a fixed positionclosely packedrelatively far apartalmost no force between moleculesstrong forces are involved between molecules   in the columns alongside the descriptions, put ticks next to those which apply to the  molecules in   (i) a solid,   (ii) a gas. [4]  (b) the water in a puddle of rainwater is evaporating.   describe what happens to the molecules when the water evaporates.  ..    [2] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20076 (a) fig. 6.1 shows how the pressure of the gas sealed in a container varies during a period  of time. pressure time fig. 6.1   which of the following statements could explain this variation of pressure?   tick two statements.    the temperature of the gas is increasing.     the temperature of the gas is decreasing.     the volume of the container is increasing.     the volume of the container is decreasing.  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/02/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) fig. 6.2 shows some gas trapped in a cylinder with a movable piston. cylinder piston gas fig. 6.2   the temperature of the gas is raised.   (i) state what must happen to the piston, if anything, in order to keep the pressure of  the gas constant.    [1]   (ii) state your reasons for your answer to (b)(i). ..   [1] [total: 4]",
            "12": "12 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20077 an electric soldering iron is used to melt solder, for joining wires in an electric circuit. a  soldering iron is shown in fig. 7.1. copper tipmetal cylinder with heater coil insideplastic handle lead to electricity supply fig. 7.1  solder is a metal which melts easily. the heater coil inside the metal cylinder heats the copper tip.  (a) (i) suggest why the tip is made of copper.    [1]   (ii) suggest why the handle is made of plastic.   [1]  (b) the heater coil is switched on. when the tip is put in contact with the solder, some of the  heat is used to melt the solder.   (i) state the process by which the heat is transferred from the copper tip to the solder.     [1]   (ii) by which process or processes is the rest of the heat transferred to the surroundings?  tick the boxes alongside any of the following (you may tick as many as you think are correct).     conduction      convection      evaporation      radiation  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/02/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) a short time after switching on the soldering iron, it reaches a steady temperature, even  though the heater coil is constantly generating heat.   the soldering iron is rated at 40 w.   what is the rate at which heat is being lost from the soldering iron? tick one box.    greater than 40 w     equal to 40 w     less than 40 w  [1] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20078 a square wooden block is made to rotate 3000 times per minute. a springy metal strip presses  against the block, as shown in fig. 8.1. a person nearby observes what is happening. 3000 rotations  / minute springy metal strip fig. 8.1  (a) calculate how many times per second the block rotates.  number of rotations per second =  ... [1]  (b) calculate the frequency of the sound caused by this arrangement.  frequency =    hz [2]  (c) state whether or not this sound could be heard by the person nearby, and give a reason  for your answer.  ..   [1] [total: 4]",
            "15": "15 0625/02/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20079 (a) fig. 9.1 shows two resistors connected to a 6 v battery. 6 v x y2 \u03c9 10 \u03c9 fig. 9.1   (i) what name do we use to describe this way of connecting resistors?    [1]   (ii) calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.  combined resistance =  .. /afii9821 [1]   (iii) calculate the current in the circuit.  current =  .. [4]  (iv) use your answer to (a)(iii) to calculate the potential difference across the 10  /afii9821  resistor.  potential difference =  ..  v [2]  (v) state the potential difference between terminals x and y .    ..  v [1]",
            "16": "16 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) the circuit in fig. 9.2 is similar to the circuit in fig. 9.1, but it uses a resistor ab with a  sliding contact. 6 v x ya bsliding contact fig. 9.2   (i) state the potential difference between x and y when the sliding contact is at    1. end a of the resistor,  .. v    2. end b of the resistor.  .. v [2]   (ii) the sliding contact of the resistor ab is moved so that the potential difference  between x and y is 5 v.    on fig. 9.2, mark with the letter c the position of the sliding contact. [1] [total: 12]",
            "17": "17 0625/02/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200710 y our teacher gives you a length of wire, a sensitive millivoltmeter and a powerful magnet. y ou  are asked to demonstrate the induction of an e.m.f. in the wire.  (a) describe what you would do.  .. .. .. ..   [2]  (b) how would you know that an e.m.f. has been induced?   [1]  (c) name a device which makes use of electromagnetic induction.   [1] [total: 4]",
            "18": "18 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200711 fig. 11.1 shows a bar magnet on a board in a region where the magnetic field of the  surroundings is so weak it can be ignored. the letters n and s show the positions of the north and south poles of the magnet. also on the diagram are marked four dots. n                                             s fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, carefully draw four magnetic field lines, one passing through each of the four dots. the lines you draw should begin and end either on the magnet or at the edge of the board. [5]  (b) on one of your lines, put an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field. [1] [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/02/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200712 three particles you have learned about are protons, neutrons and electrons.  (a) how many of each of these particles   (i) are found in an /afii9825-particle, number of protons =  ... number of neutrons =  ...number of electrons =  ... [1]   (ii) are found in a  /afii9826-particle? number of protons =  ...number of neutrons =  ...number of electrons =  ... [1]  (b) sodium-24 can be represented as  24 11na.   how many of each of these particles are there in a neutral atom of 24 11na? number of protons =  .number of neutrons =  .number of electrons =  .  [3]  (c) a nucleus of sodium-24 decays to become magnesium-24, by the emission of one  particle. the equation below describes this change.   the symbol  x y/afii9835 represents the emitted particle.  24 11na   24 12mg + x y/afii9835   (i) state the value of x.     [1]   (ii) state the value of y.     [1]   (iii) what type of particle is /afii9835?     [1] [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/02/m/j/07blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s07_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. spa (mml 13116 3/06) t25815/6 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question orpart question. *9716875438* physics 0625/03 paper 3  extended may/june 2007  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/03/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20071 fig. 1.1 shows a model car moving clockwise around a horizontal circular track. p circular trackdirection of movement model car fig. 1.1  (a) a force acts on the car to keep it moving in a circle.   (i) draw an arrow on fig. 1.1 to show the direction of this force. [1]   (ii) the speed of the car increases. state what happens to the magnitude of this force.   [1]  (b) (i) the car travels too quickly and leaves the track at p . on fig. 1.1, draw an arrow to  show the direction of travel after it has left the track. [1]   (ii) in terms of the forces acting on the car, suggest why it left the track at p .  .. ..  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/03/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) the car, starting from rest, completes one lap of the track in 10 s. its motion is shown  graphically in fig. 1.2. 0        1       2       3        4       5        6        7       8       9      1025 201510 5 0speed  / cm / s time  / s30 fig. 1.2   (i) describe the motion between 3.0 s and 10.0 s after the car has started.   [1]   (ii) use fig. 1.2 to calculate the circumference of the track.  circumference =   [2]  (iii) calculate the increase in speed per second during the time 0 to 3.0 s.  increase in speed per second =   [2] [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/03/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20072 fig. 2.1 shows a steam safety valve. when the pressure gets too high, the steam lifts the  weight w and allows steam to escape. wpivot force of steam0.2 m fig. 2.1  (a) explain, in terms of moments of forces, how the valve works.  .. .. ..  [2]  (b) the moment of weight w about the pivot is 12 n m. the perpendicular distance of the  line of action of the force of the steam on the valve from the pivot is 0.2 m.   the area of the piston is 0.0003 m 2.   calculate   (i) the minimum steam force needed for the steam to escape,  force =   [2]  (ii) the minimum steam pressure for the steam to escape.  pressure =   [2] [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/03/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20073 a student wishes to work out how much power she uses to lift her body when climbing a  flight of stairs.  her body mass is 60 kg and the vertical height of the stairs is 3.0 m. she takes 12 s to walk up the stairs.  (a) calculate   (i) the work done in raising her body mass as she climbs the stairs,  work =   [2]   (ii) the output power she develops when raising her body mass.  power =   [2] (b) at the top of the stairs she has gravitational potential energy.   describe the energy transformations taking place as she walks back down the stairs  and stops at the bottom. .. .. ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/03/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20074 fig. 4.1 shows a student\u2019s attempt to estimate the specific latent heat of fusion of ice by  adding ice at 0 \u00b0c to water at 20 \u00b0c. the water is stirred continuously as ice is slowly added until the temperature of the water is 0 \u00b0c and all the added ice has melted. thermometer ice waterglass rod stirrer glass beaker top-pan balance fig. 4.1  (a) three mass readings are taken. a description of the first reading is given.   write down descriptions of the other two. reading 1 the mass of the beaker + stirrer + thermometer reading 2  .reading 3  ... [2]  (b) write down word equations which the student could use to find   (i) the heat lost by the water as it cools from 20 \u00b0c to 0 \u00b0c,  [1]   (ii) the heat gained by the melting ice.  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/03/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) the student calculates that the water loses 12 800 j and that the mass of ice melted is  30 g.   calculate a value for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.  specific latent heat of fusion =   [2]  (d) suggest two reasons why this value is only an approximate value.reason 1  . ..reason 2  .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/03/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20075 fig. 5.1 shows some apparatus designed to compare the ability of two surfaces to absorb  infra-red radiation. surface painted dull blacksurface painted shiny white bunsen burner fig. 5.1  the containers, which are identical, are painted on the outside. one is dull black, the other is shiny white. both are filled with water, initially at the same temperature.  (a) (i) describe how you would use the apparatus to compare the abilities of the two surfaces to absorb infra-red radiation.  ..  .. ..  [2]   (ii) state the result that you would expect.   [1]  (b) the thermometers used have high sensitivity and linear scales.   (i) state what is meant by high sensitivity. ..   [1]   (ii) explain why a high sensitivity is important for this experiment.  ..   [1]   (iii) state what is meant by a linear scale.  ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/03/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20076 fig. 6.1 shows a rectangular glass block abcd. a b c def 60o fig. 6.1  (a) the ray fe is partly reflected and partly refracted at e.   (i) on fig. 6.1, draw in the approximate path of the refracted ray, within and beyond  the block. label the ray refracted ray. [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, draw in the path of the reflected ray. label the ray reflected ray. [1]  (b) a second ray, almost parallel to ae, strikes the block at e and is partly refracted at an angle of refraction of 43\u00b0.   (i) state an approximate value for the angle of incidence at e.   . [1]   (ii) state an approximate value for the critical angle for the light in the glass block.   . [1]  (iii) calculate an approximate value for the refractive index of the glass of the block.  refractive index =   [2] (c) the speed of the light along ray fe is 3.0 x 10 8 m/s. calculate the speed of the refracted  light in the glass block.  speed =   [2] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/03/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20077 two students are asked to determine the speed of sound in air on the school playing fields.  (a) list the apparatus they need.  .. ..  [1]  (b) list the readings that the students need to take. .. ..  [1]  (c) state how the speed of sound is calculated from the readings.  [1]  (d) state one precaution that could be taken to improve the accuracy of the value obtained. ..  [1]  (e) the table gives some speeds. speed/ m/sspeed of sound  in airspeed of sound  in water 10 100 1000 10 000   place a tick in the table to show the speed which is closest to  (i) the speed of sound in air,   (ii) the speed of sound in water. [2] [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/03/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20078 fig. 8.1 shows part of a low-voltage lighting circuit containing five identical lamps. 12 v d.c. supply a b c d e fig. 8.1  (a) complete the circuit, by the addition of components as necessary, so that   (i) the total current from the supply can be measured,   (ii) the brightness of lamp e only can be varied,   (iii) lamps c and d may be switched on and off together whilst lamps a, b and e remain  on. [4]  (b) all five lamps are marked 12 v, 36 w. assume that the resistance of each lamp is the same fixed value regardless of how it is connected in the circuit.   calculate   (i) the current in one lamp when operating at normal brightness,  current =   [1]  (ii) the resistance of one lamp when operating at normal brightness,  resistance =   [1]  (iii) the combined resistance of two lamps connected in parallel with the 12 v supply,  resistance =   [1]  (iv) the energy used by one lamp in 30 s when operating at normal brightness.  energy =   [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/03/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) the whole circuit is switched on. explain why the brightness of lamps a and b is much  less than that of one lamp operating at normal brightness.  ..  ..  [2] [total: 10] 9 fig. 9.1 is a sketch of some apparatus, found in a science museum, which was once used to  show how electrical energy can be converted into kinetic energy.  when the switch is closed the wheel starts to turn. snsnmetal supportsswitch + \u2013d.c. supply metal spoked wheel small dish of mercurymagnet magnet wood base fig. 9.1  (a) explain why the wheel turns when the switch is closed.  .. .. ..  [2]  (b) on fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of rotation of the wheel. [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/03/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) the d.c. motor is another way to convert electrical energy into kinetic energy.   in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a d.c. motor. [3]  (d) describe how the split-ring commutator on an electric motor works.  .. .. ..  [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/03/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200710 fig. 10.1 shows a circuit based on a transistor and a thermistor. r1r2power supply fig. 10.1  (a) describe the action of the thermistor in this circuit.  .. .. ..  [3]  (b) state and explain how the circuit may be modified so that the lamp switches on at a  different temperature.  .. ..  [2]  (c) state one practical use of this circuit.  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/03/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200711 fig. 11.1 shows the paths of three \u03b1-particles moving towards a thin gold foil. a b cgold foil fig. 11.1  particle a is moving directly towards a gold nucleus.  particle b is moving along a line which passes close to a gold nucleus.  particle c is moving along a line which does not pass close to a gold nucleus.  (a) on fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the \u03b1-particles a, b and c.  [3]  (b) state how the results of such an experiment, using large numbers of \u03b1-particles,  provides evidence for the existence of nuclei in gold atoms.  .. .. ..  [3] [total: 12]",
            "16": "16 0625/03/m/j/07permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s07_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 8 printed pages and 1 answer booklet. spa (mml 13215 4/06) t25790/7 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first if you have been given an answer booklet, follow the instructions on the front cover of the booklet. write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. y ou are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made.an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet. *7473530614*physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test may/june 2007  1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions",
            "2": "2 0625/05/m/j/07 \u00a9 ucles 20071 in this experiment you are to investigate the temperature of a mixture of hot and cold water.  record all of your observations on page 2 of your answer booklet.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. thermometer beaker beakermeasuring cylinder a                                       b     fig. 1.1  (a) pour 50 cm3 of water from the supply labelled \u2018water at room temperature\u2019 into the measuring  cylinder. transfer this to the beaker labelled a.  (b) measure and record the temperature h1 of the water in beaker a.  (c) pour 50 cm3 of water from the supply labelled \u2018hot water\u2019 into the measuring cylinder. transfer  this to the beaker labelled b.  (d) measure and record the temperature h2 of the water in beaker b.  (e) as soon as you have recorded the temperature h2 pour the water from beaker b  into beaker a .  (f) measure and record the temperature h3 of the mixture of hot and cold water in beaker a.  (g) do not pour the water out of beaker a. repeat steps (c) and (d) and record the new value  of h2.",
            "3": "3 0625/05/m/j/07 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn over (h) as soon as you have recorded the new temperature h2 add the water from beaker b to the  water already in beaker a.  (i) measure and record the new temperature h3 of the mixture of hot and cold water in beaker a.  (j) a theoretical calculation based on the equation     thermal energy lost by hot water = thermal energy gained by cold water   predicts higher values of the temperature h3 than the values that are obtained by this  experiment.   suggest  (i) a practical explanation for this difference,   (ii) two practical improvements that you could make to the procedure for this experiment to  obtain a result that is closer to the theoretical result.",
            "4": "4 0625/05/m/j/07 \u00a9 ucles 20072 in this experiment you are to investigate the position of a sheet of card that is hanging from a  pivot.  record all of your observations on page 3 of your answer booklet.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. stand card massmetre rule pointer 0h0 a1  2  3  4  5  6pivot d     fig. 2.1",
            "5": "5 0625/05/m/j/07 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn over (a) place the metre rule close to the end of the pointer as shown in fig. 2.1. the rule should be  vertical. record the height h0 of the pointer above the bench.  (b) remove the card from the pivot.  (c) measure and record the distance d between the centre of the hole labelled 1 and the edge of the card at a as shown in fig. 2.1.  (d) repeat step (c) for each of the remaining holes 2 \u2013 6.  (e) replace the card on the pivot as shown in fig. 2.1.  (f) hang the 50 g mass from the hole 1 in the card. record the new height h of the pointer above  the bench.  (g) calculate the difference in heights b using the equation     b = (h \u2013 h 0).  (h) repeat steps (f) and (g) for each of the remaining holes 2 \u2013 6.  (i) plot the graph of b / mm (y-axis) against d / mm (x-axis).  (j) a student suggests that b is directly proportional to d. by reference to your graph state whether or not your results support the student\u2019s suggestion. give a reason for your answer.  (k) it is important when recording the heights that the rule is vertical. state briefly how you checked that the rule was vertical.",
            "6": "6 0625/05/m/j/07 \u00a9 ucles 20073 in this experiment you will investigate the resistance of a wire.  record all of your observations and answers on page 4 of your answer booklet.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1, which shows the circuit that has been set  up for you. power source a vcrocodile clipa                                                                               b c                                                                               d tapemetre rule tape     fig. 3.1  y ou are provided with two lengths of resistance wire ab and cd.  (a) connect the wire ab between the two crocodile clips.  (b) switch on and, using the voltmeter, record the p.d. v across the wire between a and b.  (c) using the ammeter, record the current i in the wire.",
            "7": "7 0625/05/m/j/07 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn over (d) switch off.  (e) calculate the resistance r of the wire ab, using the equation     r = v / i.  (f) repeat the steps (a) to (e) using the wire cd.  (g) complete the column headings in the table.  (h) the two wires, ab and cd are made of the same material and are of the same length. the  diameter of wire ab is half the diameter of wire cd. look at the results in the table. here are four possible relationships between r and the diameter d of the wire. select the relationship that best matches your results. tick the appropriate box in the answer booklet.   \u007f r is proportional to d   \u007f r is proportional to 1 / d   \u007f r is proportional to d   2   \u007f r is proportional to 1 / d  2  (i) explain the reason for your answer.",
            "8": "8 0625/05/m/j/07 \u00a9 ucles 20074 in this experiment you will investigate the formation of images by a lens.  record all of your observations and answers on page 5 of your answer booklet.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. illuminated object lensscreen x d     fig. 4.1  (a) place the screen at a distance d = 0.800 m from the illuminated object.  (b) place the lens between the object and the screen and adjust its position until a clearly focused  magnified image is formed on the screen.  (c) measure and record the distance x between the centre of the lens and the screen.  (d) without moving the illuminated object or the screen, move the lens towards the screen until a clearly focused diminished image is formed on the screen.  (e) measure and record the distance y between the centre of the lens and the screen.  (f) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation     f = xy d.  (g) repeat steps (a) to (f) with the distance d increased to 0.900 m.  (h) calculate the average value of the focal length f.  (i) outline any two steps that you took in this experiment in order to obtain an accurate result. permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s07_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. mml 13215 4/06 t25816/4 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write on any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *4019966178* physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2007  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper.no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/06/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20071 the igcse class is investigating the temperature changes that occur when hot and cold  water are mixed.  (a) a student pours 50 cm3 of water into a beaker. he then measures the temperature /afii98351  of the water in the beaker. write down the value of /afii98351 shown on the thermometer in  fig. 1.1.110 1009080706050403020100\u201310\u00b0c fig. 1.1  /afii98351 =  . [2]  (b) the student then measures the temperature /afii98352 of some hot water. he pours 50 cm3  of this hot water into the beaker of water at room temperature. he then records the  temperature /afii98353 of the water in the beaker. his readings are   /afii98352 = 76 \u00b0c,   /afii98353 = 42 \u00b0c.   calculate   (i) the temperature rise of the cold water,  ..   (ii) the temperature fall of the hot water.  . [2]  (c) a theoretical calculation based on the equation     thermal energy lost by hot water = thermal energy gained by cold water  predicts a higher value for the temperature  /afii98353 than the value that is obtained by this  experiment. suggest   (i) a practical explanation for the difference in values, ..   (ii) two practical improvements that you could make to the procedure for this experiment  to obtain a result that is closer to the theoretical result. 1.  ..2.   [3] [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/06/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20072 a student is investigating the position of a sheet of card that is hanging from a pivot.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus drawn full size. stand card massmetre rule pointer 0h0 a1  2  3  4  5  6pivot fig. 2.1",
            "4": "4 0625/06/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (a) on fig. 2.1 measure the distance d between the centre of the hole labelled 1 and the  edge of the card at a. record this value in the table. hole d / mm h / mm b / mm 1 140 2 135 3 132 4 128 5 124 6 120 [3]  (b) repeat step (a) for each of the remaining holes 2 \u2013 6.  (c) on fig. 2.1 measure the height h0 of the pointer above the bench.  h0 =  . [1]  (d) a student hangs a 10 g mass from the hole 1 in the card. she records the height h of  the end of the pointer above the bench. she then repeats this procedure by hanging the mass from each hole in turn. her results are shown in the table above.  (e) calculate the differences in heights b using the equation     b = (h \u2013 h 0)   and record the results in the table above.",
            "5": "5 0625/06/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (f) plot the graph of b / mm (y-axis) against d / mm (x-axis). 45 4035302520b / mm [4]  (g) the student suggests that b is directly proportional to d. by reference to your graph,  state whether or not the results support the student\u2019s suggestion. give a reason for your answer. statement  reason   ..  [2]  (h) it is important when recording the heights that the rule is vertical. state briefly how you  would check that the rule is vertical.  ..  [1] [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/06/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20073 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire. the circuit is as shown in fig. 3.1. power source a va                                      b c                                          d fig. 3.1  (a) a student uses the switches to connect the wire ab into the circuit and records the p.d.  v across the wire between a and b. he also records the current i in the wire.   the student then repeats the measurements using the wire cd in place of wire ab.   the readings are shown in the table below. wire v / i / r / ab 1.9 0.24 cd 1.9 0.96 [3]   (i) calculate the resistance r of each wire, using the equation     r = v / i.    record the values in the table.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "7": "7 0625/06/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) the two wires ab and cd are made of the same material and are of the same length.  the diameter of wire cd is twice the diameter of wire ab.   (i) look at the results in the table. below are four possible relationships between r and the diameter d of the wire. tick the relationship that best matches the results.     r is proportional to d      r is proportional to 1d      r is proportional to d   2      r is proportional to 1 d 2    (ii) explain briefly how the results support your answer in part (b)(i).  .. .. ..  [2]  (c) following this experiment, the student wishes to investigate whether two lamps in parallel  with each other have a smaller combined resistance than the two lamps in series. draw one circuit diagram showing   (i) two lamps in parallel with each other connected to a power source,   (ii) an ammeter to measure the total current in the circuit,   (iii) a voltmeter to measure the potential difference across the two lamps. [3] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/06/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20074 the igcse class is investigating the formation of images by a lens.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus that is being used. illuminated object lensscreen x d fig. 4.1  (a) a student places the screen at a distance d = 0.800 m from the illuminated object. she  adjusts the position of the lens until a clearly focused magnified image is formed on the screen. she measures the distance x between the centre of the lens and the screen. without moving the illuminated object or the screen, she moves the lens towards the screen until a second clearly focused (but diminished) image is formed on the screen. she measures the distance y between the centre of the lens and the screen. she repeats the experiment with the distance d increased to 0.900 m. the readings are shown in the table. x / m y / m d / m f / m 0.205 0.600 0.800 0.180 0.720 0.900   (i) for each set of readings calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation     f = xy d.    enter the values in the table.",
            "9": "9 0625/06/m/j/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007  (ii) calculate the average value of the focal length f.  average value of the focal length f =   [4]  (b) suggest two precautions that can be taken in this experiment in order to obtain an  accurate result. 1.  .. ..2.  ..  [2]  (c) the illuminated object is triangular in shape, as shown in fig. 4.2. fig. 4.2   in the space below, sketch the appearance of one of the images on the screen. [1] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/06/m/j/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20075 (a) an igcse student is investigating the relationship between the extension of a spring  of unstretched length l 0 and the load hung on the spring. the apparatus is shown in  fig. 5.1 below. the spring is shown larger than its actual size. clamp set of ten 0.1 n weightsl 0 fig. 5.1   consider the readings that the student should take and write appropriate column  headings, with units, in the table below.     l 0 = 25 mm 0.0 25  0 0.1 30  5 0.2 36 11 0.3 43 18 0.4 50 25 [4]  (b) the student decides to repeat the experiment using a spring made of a different metal in order to study how the extension may be affected by the metal from which the spring is made. to make a fair comparison, other variables must be kept constant. suggest three variables that the student should keep constant. 1.  ..2.  ..3.   [3] [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/06/m/j/07blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/06/m/j/07permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w07_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib07 11_0625_01/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2007  [turn over      *9483001639* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/01     paper 1 multiple choice  october/november 2007     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet    soft clean eraser    soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)        read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless  this has been done for you.    there are forty questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c, and d.  choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.       ",
            "2": "2    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 1 some water is poured into four tubes of different cross-sectional areas.    which tube contains the largest volume of water?    abcd 6 cm 4 cm3 cm2 cmarea = 10  cm2area = 20  cm2area = 30  cm2area = 40  cm2      2 four students try to explain what is meant by acceleration.    which student makes a correct statement?  a it is related to the changing speed of an object.  b it is the distance an object travels in one second.  c it is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.  d it is the force acting on an object when it is near to the earth.     3 a tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.4  s later hears an echo from a wall.        the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    how far away is the player from the wall?  a 66  m b 132  m c 264  m d 825  m    ",
            "3": "3    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07  [turn over  4 what are the correct units for force and for weight?     force weight  a kg kg  b kg n  c n kg  d n n    5 the table shows the weight of a 10  kg mass on each of five planets.    planet weight of a 10  kg mass  / n mercury 40  venus 90  earth 100  mars  40  jupiter 250    on which planets would an astronaut have a smaller weight than on earth?  a mercury, mars and jupiter  b mercury, venus and mars c mercury, venus and jupiter  d venus, mars and jupiter     6 a student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly-shaped solid.   which apparatus is needed to find the density of both ?  a balance, clock, ruler  b balance, measuring cylinder, ruler  c balance, measuring cylinder, string  d clock, ruler, string     ",
            "4": "4    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 7 a metal drum has a mass of 200  kg when empty and 1000  kg when filled with 1.0  m3 of  methylated spirit.    what is the density of methylated spirit?  a 0.0050  kg  / m3  b 0.11  kg  / m3  c 800  kg  / m3  d 1000  kg  / m3     8 an empty glass is placed on a join between two tables as shown. the glass remains stable.    which point is the centre of mass of the glass?    a b c d      ",
            "5": "5    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07  [turn over  9 an aeroplane is in equilibrium.    the diagram shows the forces acting on the aeroplane.    lift force from wings weightair resistanceforce from engine     which statement about the forces is correct?     force from engine lift force from wings  a equal to air resistance equal to weight  b equal to air resistance greater than weight  c greater than air resistance equal to weight  d greater than air resistance greater than weight     10 a student adds loads to an elastic cord. he measures the length of the cord for each load.    he then plots a graph from the results.    00 1234 load  / n    which length is plotted on the vertical axis?  a measured length  b original length  c (measured length \u2013 original length)  d (measured length + original length)     ",
            "6": "6    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 11 a person uses chemical energy to run up some stairs.        she stops at the top of the stairs.    what has the chemical energy been converted to when she is at the top of the stairs?  a kinetic energy and gravitational energy  b kinetic energy and strain energy  c gravitational energy and heat energy  d strain energy and heat energy      12 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in what order is the energy transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel \u2192 generator \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 turbines  b nuclear fuel \u2192 generator \u2192 turbines \u2192 reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 generator \u2192 turbines  d nuclear fuel \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 turbines \u2192 generator     ",
            "7": "7    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07  [turn over  13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer, used to measure atmospheric pressure.    mercurypl     atmospheric pressure increases.    what happens to the level l and to the pressure at p?     level l pressure at p  a falls increases  b falls stays the same   c rises  increases  d rises stays the same     14 the gas in a container is heated but is kept at constant volume.    why does the gas pressure increase?  a the molecules expand.  b the molecules increase in mass.  c the molecules move further apart.  d the molecules move more rapidly.     ",
            "8": "8    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 15 the table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances a, b, c and d.    which substance is a gas at 25  \u00b0c?    substance melting point  / \u00b0c boiling point  / \u00b0c  a \u2013219 \u2013183  b \u20137 58  c 98 890  d 1083 2582      16 the diagram shows four blocks of steel. the same quantity of heat is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    abcd       17 a wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.    wooden wheel iron circle     which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?  a cooling the iron circle  b heating the iron circle  c heating the wooden wheel  d heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle     ",
            "9": "9    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07  [turn over  18 which statement refers to convection?  a it does not involve energy transfer.  b it is the transfer of heat energy without the movement of particles.  c it only occurs in liquids or gases.  d it only occurs in solids.      19 spoons made of different materials were placed in four cups of coffee poured from the same jug.    which spoon will be hottest to touch at end x?    wooden spoonxexperiment a steel spoonxexperiment b white plastic spoonxexperiment c black plastic spoonxexperiment d       20 which line gives an example of a longitudinal wave and describes its vibrations?     example of a  longitudinal wave vibrations  a light wave at right angles to the direction the wave travels  b iight wave  in the same direction as the wave travels   c sound wave at right angles to the direction the wave travels  d sound wave in the same direction as the wave travels    21 the diagram shows a section through a series of waves on water.    which dotted line shows the position of the still water surface after the waves have passed?    a b c d      ",
            "10": "10    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 22 a student shines a narrow beam of white light into a prism as shown in the diagram. he sees a  spectrum of colours emerging from the prism.    narrow beam of white lightx y zspectrumof colours     which three colours does he see at x, at y and at z?     x y z  a blue yellow red  b red blue yellow  c red yellow blue  d yellow red blue     23 an object placed in front of a plane mirror at o produces an image at i.    o i    if the object moves towards the mirror in the dire ction shown by the arrow, in which direction does  the image move?    o iabcd     ",
            "11": "11    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07  [turn over  24 a girl stands at a distance from a large building. she claps her hands and a short time later hears  an echo.    why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?  a the sound waves are  absorbed.  b the sound waves are  diffracted.  c the sound waves are  reflected.  d the sound waves are  refracted.     25 the graph represents a sound wave. the horizontal (x) axis represents time.    y x    the frequency of the sound is increased.    the graphs below are shown to the same scale. which graph represents the new sound wave?    a b cdy x y xy x y x ",
            "12": "12    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 26 which materials are suitable for making a permanent magnet and the core of an electromagnet?     permanent magnet core of an electromagnet  a iron iron  b iron steel  c steel iron  d steel steel     27 three charged balls, p, q and r, are suspended by insulated threads. ball p is negatively charged.    \u2013pq qrinsulated thread     what are the charges on q and on r?     q r  a positive positive  b positive negative  c negative positive  d negative negative    ",
            "13": "13    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07  [turn over  28 the circuit shows a current i in a resistor of resistance r.    ri3.0  v     which line gives possible values of i and of r?     i / a r / \u03c9  a 1.5 1.5  b 1.5 2.0  c 6.0 2.0  d 4.0 12.0      29 the circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component x, hidden in a box.    the voltage-current graph for x is as shown.    a vx+ \u2013variable voltage supply voltage current 00     what is the component x?  a a capacitor  b a closed switch  c a metallic resistor  d an open switch     ",
            "14": "14    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 30 four lamps are connected in a circuit as shown in the diagram.    each lamp is designed to operate at 12  v.    12  v     the circuit is now switched on.    which statement is correct?  a each lamp can be switched off independently.  b if one lamp breaks all the others will stay alight.  c the current is the same in all the lamps.  d the lamps will all light at normal brightness.     31 the diagram shows a battery connected to three identical resistors. four ammeters a, b, c and  d are connected in the circuit.    which ammeter shows the smallest reading?    a b a caa ad      ",
            "15": "15    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07  [turn over  32 in the circuit shown, the switch is closed for a long time, then opened.    v vvvoltmeter 1 voltmeter 2 voltmeter 3    immediately after the switch is opened, which voltmeters will read zero?  a voltmeter 1 only  b voltmeter 2 only  c voltmeter 3 only  d voltmeter 1, voltmeter 2 and voltmeter 3      33 a householder asks an electrician to install a mains electrical socket in her bathroom so that she  may use a hairdryer there. the electrician refuses to do this because it would be dangerous.    why would installing the socket be dangerous?  a the current drawn by the hairdryer would cause overheating in the cables.  b the handling of electrical equipment in damp conditions could cause an electric shock.  c the hot air produced by the hairdryer would cause the fuse to melt.  d the temperature in the bathroom would damage the insulation.      34 a mains electrical circuit uses insulated copper cable and the cable overheats.    to prevent the cable overheating, ho w should the cable be changed, and why?  a use thicker copper cable which has less resistance.  b use thicker insulation which stops the heat escaping.  c use thinner copper cable which has more resistance.  d use thinner insulation which allows less heat to escape.     ",
            "16": "16    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 35 how is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way?     how why  a at high voltage for safety  b at high voltage to reduce energy loss  c at low voltage for safety  d at low voltage to reduce energy loss     36 which parts of an a.c. generator slide past each other when the generator is working?  a brushes and coil  b coil and magnets  c magnets and slip rings  d slip rings and brushes    37 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    anode y-plates x-platesscreentop bottomheater cathodey2 y1 x1x2electron beam     what must be done to deflect the electron beam upwards?  a make x 1 more positive than x 2  b make x 2 more positive than x 1  c make y 1 more positive than y 2  d make y 2 more positive than y 1     ",
            "17": "17    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07  [turn over  38 a sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector.    detector sheet of paperradioactive source    which types of radiation can pass through the paper?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     39 a sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.    the nuclei of which atoms will decay first?  a impossible to know, because radioactive decay is random  b impossible to know, unless the age of the material is known c atoms near the centre, because they are surrounded by more atoms d atoms near the surface, because the radiation can escape more easily     ",
            "18": "18    \uf6d9 ucles 2007 0625/01/o/n/07 40 an atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.    which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?    n n++ + \u2013\u2013a n+++ \u2013 \u2013\u2013b nn nn++ +nn nn++ + \u2013 \u2013\u2013cn + \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013d= a neutron = a proton= an electronkey (not to scale)      ",
            "19": "19     0625/01/o/n/07  blank page  ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publis her (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    0625/01/o/n/07 blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w07_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. sp (mml 13331 4/06) t25940/5 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education physics 0625/02 paper 2  core october/november 2007  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 101112 total *8902325113*",
            "2": "2 0625/02/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20071 fig. 1.1 shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. the metal can next to it has a cross- sectional area which is four times that of the measuring cylinder. cm3 100 90 8070605040302010metal canmeasuring cylinder liquid fig. 1.1  (a) state the volume of the liquid.  volume =    cm3 [1]  (b) the liquid is poured into the metal can.   on fig. 1.1, draw the surface of the liquid in the can. [2]  (c) complete the following sentence.   the pressure of the water at the bottom of the can is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 than  the pressure that the water had at the bottom of the measuring cylinder. [1] [total: 4]",
            "3": "3 0625/02/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20072 a theatre measures 100 m \u00d7 80 m \u00d7 25 m. the air inside it has a density of 1.3 kg / m3 when it  is cool.  (a) calculate the volume of the air in the theatre.  volume of air =  ..  m3 [1]  (b) calculate the mass of the air. state the equation you are using.  mass of air =   [4]  (c) some time after the doors are opened, the heating in the theatre is switched on.   state and explain what happens to the mass of the air in the theatre as it warms up. statement  . ..explanation  ..  [2]  (d) suggest why the temperature of the air in the balcony of the theatre (nearer the ceiling)  is likely to be greater than that lower down in the theatre.   [1] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/02/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20073 fig. 3.1 shows a simple mercury barometer, drawn 1/10 full size. glass tube mercury reservoir fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.1, use your rule to make an appropriate measurement, and then use it to  calculate the atmospheric pressure.  atmospheric pressure =  . cm hg [2]  (b) state what occupies the space in the tube above the mercury. ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/02/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) on another occasion, the atmospheric pressure is much less than that shown in  fig. 3.1.   on fig. 3.1, mark where the mercury surfaces in the tube and in the reservoir might  be.   [2]  (d) the tube above the mercury gets broken and allows air to move in to and out of the tube.   explain why the barometer no longer functions.  ..   [2] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/02/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20074 a diesel engine is used to drag a boat up a slipway (see fig. 4.1). diesel engine slipway s h fig. 4.1  the boat finishes in the position shown by the broken outline.  (a) on fig. 4.1, carefully mark   (i) the weight w of the boat, using an arrow labelled w, [1]   (ii) the friction force f on the boat, using an arrow labelled f. [1]  (b) state, in terms of w, f, h and s, how you could calculate   (i) the work done lifting the weight of the boat,  ..  [1]   (ii) the work done against the friction force, ..  [1]   (iii) the total work done pulling the boat up the slipway.  [1]  (c) what other measurement would you need to make if you wanted to calculate the useful  power output of the diesel engine?   [1] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/02/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20075 fig. 5.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. \u201310     0     10     20    30    40     50     60     70    80    90   100   110   120  130   140   150capillary tube liquid fig. 5.1  (a) the thermometer is used for measuring temperatures in school laboratory experiments. state the units in which the temperatures are measured.  .. [1]  (b) on fig. 5.1, mark where the liquid thread will reach when the thermometer is placed in   (i) pure melting ice (label this point ice),  [1]   (ii) steam above boiling water (label this point steam). [1]  (c) a liquid-in-glass thermometer makes use of the expansion of a liquid to measure  temperature. other thermometers make use of other properties that vary with temperature.   in the table below, write in two properties, other than expansion of a liquid, that can be  used to measure temperature. exampleexpansion of a liquid 1. of 2. of [2] [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/02/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20076 a motorcyclist drives along a straight road. fig. 6.1 gives information about the first 10 s of  his ride. start 0 m / safter 5  s 9 m / safter 10  s 18 m / s fig. 6.1  (a) from the information on fig. 6.1,   (i) describe the motion of the motorcyclist by ticking one of the following boxes,     constant speed      uniform acceleration      uniform deceleration  [1]   (ii) estimate the average speed of the motorcyclist during the 10 s,  average speed =   m / s [1]   (iii) calculate the distance travelled during the 10 s.  distance travelled =   m [2] (b) state why the distance travelled in the first 5 s is less than half of the distance travelled  in the first 10 s of the journey.  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/02/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20077 a girl drops a small stone from a bridge into a pond. x fig. 7.1  (a) the stone hits the water surface at point x. fig. 7.2, which is drawn full-size, shows the  wavefront a fraction of a second after the stone hits the water.   (i) the wave travels at 5 cm / s.    calculate how far the wave travels in 0.3 s.  distance travelled =  .. cm [1]   (ii) on fig. 7.2, draw the position of the wavefront 0.3 s after that already shown. [2] x fig. 7.2  (b) a ringing bell also sends out waves in all directions.   state two ways in which these waves are different from the waves in part (a), other than  the fact that one is created in air and the other in water. 1.  .. 2.   [2] [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/02/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20078 an object ox is placed in front of a converging lens. the lens forms an image iy.  fig. 8.1 shows two rays from the object to the image. x oi y fig. 8.1  (a) on fig. 8.1,   (i) clearly mark and label the principal focus and the focal length of the lens, [3]   (ii) draw a third ray from x to y . [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/02/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) the following list contains descriptions that can be applied to images.   tick any which apply to the image shown in fig. 8.1.    real       virtual    enlarged    diminished     inverted    upright    image distance less than object distance     image distance more than object distance  [4]  (c) state two things that happen to the image in fig. 8.1 when the object is moved further  away from the lens. 1.  ..2.   [2] [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/02/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20079 a thermistor connected to a variable voltage supply is immersed in a beaker of water.  the beaker of water is heated slowly, using a bunsen burner, as shown in fig. 9.1. variable voltage supply a v thermometer water bunsen burner fig. 9.1  at different temperatures, the voltage is adjusted until the current is 25 ma and the value of  the voltage is noted.  the results are shown below. temperature / \u00b0c 15 30 45 60 75 90 voltage / v 18.8 8.8 4.7 2.6 1.5 1.2  (a) on the axes of fig. 9.2, shown on page 13, plot a graph of voltage against temperature. [4]",
            "13": "13 0625/02/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20070                20              40               60              80              10025 201510 50voltage  / v temperature  / oc fig. 9.2  (b) from the graph, find the voltage needed to give a current of 25 ma   (i) at 40 \u00b0c, voltage needed =  . v [1]   (ii) at 80 \u00b0c. voltage needed =  . v [1]  (c) use your results in (b) to calculate the resistance of the thermistor   (i) at 40 \u00b0c,  resistance at 40 \u00b0c =  .   (ii) at 80 \u00b0c.  resistance at 80 \u00b0c =  . [5]  (d) use your results in (c) to complete the following sentence about thermistors of the sort  used in this experiment.   the thermistor in this experiment is a device whose resistance \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026  as the temperature increases. [1] [total: 12]",
            "14": "14 0625/02/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200710 a coil of insulated wire is connected in series with a battery, a resistor and a switch. fig. 10.1  (a) the switch is closed and the current in the coil creates a magnetic field.   (i) on fig. 10.1, draw the shape of the magnetic field, both inside and outside the coil. [4]   (ii) a glass bar, an iron bar and a perspex bar are placed in turn inside the coil. which one makes the field stronger?  . [1]  (b) two thin iron rods are placed inside the coil as shown in fig. 10.2. the switch is then  closed. fig. 10.2   the iron rods move apart. suggest why this happens.  ..   [3] [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/02/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200711 the activity of a sample of radioactive material is determined every 10 minutes for an hour.  the results are shown in the table. time / minutes 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 activity count / s461 332 229 162 106 81 51  (a) from the figures in the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.  half-life =  ..  minutes [1]  (b) a second experiment is carried out with another sample of the same material. at the  start of the experiment, this sample has twice the number of atoms as the first sample.   suggest what values might be obtained for   (i) the activity at the start of the second experiment,   ...  count / s [1]  (ii) the half-life of the material in the second experiment.   ...  minutes [1] (c) name one type of particle that the material might be emitting in order to cause this  activity.   [1] [total: 4]",
            "16": "16 0625/02/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200712 a beam of cathode rays is travelling in a direction perpendicularly out of the page. the beam  is surrounded by four metal plates p1, p2, p3 and p4 as shown in fig. 12.1.  on fig. 12.1, the beam is shown as the dot at the centre. qp1p2 p4p3 fig. 12.1  (a) cathode rays are produced by thermionic emission.   what is the name of the particles which make up cathode rays?   [1]  (b) a potential difference is applied between p1 and p3, with p1 positive with respect to p3.   state what happens to the beam of cathode rays.   [2]  (c) the potential difference in (b) is removed. suggest how the beam of cathode rays can now be deflected down the page towards q.  ..  [2]  (d) cathode rays are invisible. state one way to detect them.  [1] [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible.  every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance  have unwittingly been  included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university  of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w07_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. spa (mml 13331 4/06) t25941/7 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each questionor part question. *8019038925* physics 0625/03 paper 3  extended october/november 2007  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/03/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20071 a large plastic ball is dropped from the top of a tall building.  fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the falling ball until it hits the ground. 0       1        2       3       4        5       6 20  15 10  5 0  time  / s speed m / s fig. 1.1  (a) from the graph estimate,   (i) the time during which the ball is travelling with terminal velocity,  time =   [1]   (ii) the time during which the ball is accelerating,  time =   [1]  (iii) the distance fallen while the ball is travelling with terminal velocity,  distance =   [2]  (iv) the height of the building.  height =   [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/03/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) explain, in terms of the forces acting on the ball, why   (i) the acceleration of the ball decreases,  .. .. ..  [3]   (ii) the ball reaches terminal velocity. ..  [2] [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/03/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20072 fig. 2.1 shows a track for a model car. ts rqp 0.4 m0.4 m0.5 m fig. 2.1  the car has no power supply, but can run down a sloping track due to its weight.  (a) the car is released at q. it comes to rest just before it reaches s and rolls back.   (i) describe the motion of the car after it starts rolling back and until it eventually  comes to rest.  .. ..  [2]   (ii) explain in terms of energy transformations why the car, starting at q, cannot  pass s.  .. ..  [1]  (b) a second car, of mass 0.12 kg, is released from p . it continues until it runs off the track at  t.   calculate the maximum speed that the car could have at t assuming friction in the car is  negligible.  speed =   [3] [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/03/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20073 (a) a spring of original length 3.0 cm is extended to a total length of 5.0 cm by a force of  8.0 n.   assuming the limit of proportionality of the spring has not been reached, calculate the  force needed to extend it to a total length of 6.0 cm.  force =   [3]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows the arrangement for an experiment on moments. pivot fspring metre rule fig. 3.1   the spring exerts a force f on the metre rule.  (i) on fig. 3.1, mark another quantity which must be measured to find the moment of  the force f. [1]   (ii) state how the moment of the force f is calculated.  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/03/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20074 fig. 4.1 shows a sealed steel cylinder filled with high pressure steam. steam fig. 4.1  fig. 4.2 shows the same cylinder much later when all the steam has condensed. water fig. 4.2  (a) (i) describe the movement of the molecules in the high pressure steam.  .. ..  [2]   (ii) explain how the molecules in the steam exert a high pressure on the inside walls of  the cylinder.  .. ..  [2]  (b) describe, in terms of particles, the process by which heat is transferred through the  cylinder wall.  .. ..  [2]  (c) when all the steam has condensed, 75 g of water is in the cylinder.   under these high pressure conditions, the specific latent heat of vaporisation of steam  is 3200 j / g.   calculate the heat lost by the steam as it condenses.  heat =   [2] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/03/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20075 fig. 5.1 shows some apparatus which is to be used to compare the emission of infra-red  radiation from four differently painted surfaces. this side painted dull blackthis side painted shiny white metal boxthis side painted dull white this side painted shiny blackwater inlet fig. 5.1  near the centre of each side is an infra-red detector. the four detectors are identical.  a supply of very hot water is available.  (a) describe how you would use this apparatus to compare the infra-red radiation from the four surfaces.  .. ..  [3]  (b) suggest which surface will be the best emitter and which will be the worst emitter.best emitter  ...worst emitter  . [1]  (c) the infra-red detectors are made from thermocouples soldered to blackened metal  plates. these are connected to galvanometers.   in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple. [2] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/03/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20076 virtual images may be formed by both plane mirrors and by convex lenses.  fig. 6.1 shows a plane mirror and a convex lens. ffpo fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, draw rays to locate the approximate positions of the images of the tops of  the two arrow objects o and p .   label the images.  [5]  (b) both images are virtual.   (i) what is meant by a virtual image?   [1]   (ii) state one other similarity between the two images.  [1]   (iii) state one difference between the two images.  [1] [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/03/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20077 (a) in the space below, draw a diagram to represent a sound wave.   on your diagram, mark and label   (i) two consecutive compressions and two consecutive rarefactions,  (ii) the wavelength of the wave. [3]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows part of the electromagnetic spectrum. x-raysinfra\u2013 red fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, label the positions of \u03b3-rays, visible light waves and radio waves. [1]   (ii) state which of the three types of wave in (i) has the lowest frequency.  [1]   (iii) state the approximate value of the speed in air of radio waves.  [1] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/03/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20078 fig. 8.1 shows two electrical circuits. v aaa ammeter 2ammeter 1 4.0 \u03c94.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9 circuit 1 circuit 2pqp q  the batteries in circuit 1 and circuit 2 are identical. fig. 8.1  (a) put ticks in the table below to describe the connections of the two resistors p and q. series parallel circuit 1 circuit 2  [1]  (b) the resistors p and q are used as small electrical heaters.   state two advantages of connecting them as shown in circuit 2. advantage 1  . advantage 2  ... [2]  (c) in circuit 1, the ammeter reads 1.2 a when the switch is closed.   calculate the reading of the voltmeter in this circuit. voltmeter reading =   [2] (d) the two switches in circuit 2 are closed. calculate the combined resistance of the two  resistors in this circuit.  combined resistance =   [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/03/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (e) when the switches are closed in circuit 2, ammeter 1 reads 5 a and ammeter 2 reads  2 a.   calculate   (i) the current in resistor p ,  current =   [1]  (ii) the power supplied to resistor q,  power =   [1]  (iii) the energy transformed in resistor q in 300 s.  energy =   [1] [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/03/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20079 electromagnetic induction may be demonstrated using a magnet, a solenoid and other  necessary apparatus.  (a) explain what is meant by electromagnetic induction.  .. .. ..  [2]  (b) in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up so that  electromagnetic induction may be demonstrated. [2]  (c) describe how you would use the apparatus to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.  .. .. ..  [2]  (d) state two ways of increasing the magnitude of the induced e.m.f. in this experiment.1.  .. ..2.  ..  [2] [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/03/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200710 (a) fig. 10.1 shows an and gate with two inputs a and b and one output. a boutput fig. 10.1   state the output when   (i) a is high and b is low,  [1]   (ii) both a and b are low.  [1]  (b) an electrical thermometer in a greenhouse gives a low output if the temperature is too  low.   a humidity sensor in the same greenhouse gives a high output if the humidity in the  greenhouse is too high.   an alarm sounds when both the temperature is too low and the humidity is too high.   (i) complete the diagram below to show how a not gate and an and gate may be  used to provide the required output to the alarm. [2] electrical thermometer humidity sensoralarm   (ii) on your diagram, use either \u2018high\u2019 or \u2018low\u2019 to indicate the level of the inputs and outputs of both gates when the alarm sounds. [2] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/03/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200711 fig. 11.1 shows an experiment to test the absorption of \u03b2-particles by thin sheets of  aluminium. ten sheets are available, each 0.5 mm thick. \u03b2-particle source sheets of aluminiumdetector counter fig. 11.1  (a) describe how the experiment is carried out, stating the readings that should be taken.  .. .. .. ..  [4]  (b) state the results that you would expect to obtain. .. .. ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/03/o/n/07blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/03/o/n/07permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w07_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages, 3 blank pages and 1 answer booklet. mml 13215 4/06 t25798/3 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *5610404935*physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test october/november 2007  1 hour 15 minutes additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first if you have been given an answer booklet, follow the instructions on the front cover of the booklet. write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. answer all questions. y ou are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made.an account of the method of carrying out the experiments is not required. at the end of the examination, hand in only the answer booklet.",
            "2": "2 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 20071 in this experiment you are to investigate the rate of cooling of hot water.  record all of your observations on pages 2 and 3 of your answer booklet. carry out the instructions  referring to fig. 1.1. thermometer beaker     fig. 1.1  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water.  (a) measure and record room temperature /afii98350.  (b) pour hot water into the beaker until it is about one-third full.  (c) measure and record the temperature /afii9835 of the hot water and at the same time start the  stopwatch. record the temperature at time t = 0 s in the table.  (d) measure and record the temperature of the water in the beaker every 30 s for a total of five minutes.  (e) complete the column headings in the table.  (f) (i) calculate the temperature fall t 1 in the first minute of your experiment.   (ii) calculate the temperature fall t2 in the final minute of your experiment.",
            "3": "3 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn over (g) theory suggests that the rate of cooling of the hot water at any time depends on the difference  between the temperature of the water at that time and room temperature.   (i) state and explain whether your results support this theory.   (ii) suggest three variables that you would attempt to keep constant if you were to investigate this theory further.  (h) suggest one addition you could make to the apparatus provided in order to reduce the rate of evaporation of the water from the beaker.",
            "4": "4 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 20072 in this experiment you are to investigate a simple balance.  record all of your observations on page 4 of your answer booklet.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. stand cardmetre rule pointer 0h0pivot standhook tape tape bench     fig. 2.1",
            "5": "5 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn over (a) place the metre rule close to the end of the pointer as shown in fig. 2.1 and record the height  h0 of the pointer above the bench.  (b) hang one of the paper clips provided on the hook. record the new height h of the pointer above the bench.  (c) calculate and record the height difference d using the equation     d = (h \u2013 h 0).  (d) repeat steps (b) and (c) using different numbers of paper clips, from n = 2 to n = 6.  (e) plot the graph of d / mm (y-axis) against n (x-axis).  (f) remove the paper clips from the hook. hang the nail on the hook. record the height hn of the  pointer above the bench.  (g) use the graph to determine the number of paper clips that have the same mass as the nail. show your working and give your answer to 1 decimal place.",
            "6": "6 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 20073 in this experiment you will investigate the potential difference across lamps and the currents in the  lamps.  record all of your observations and answers on page 5 of your answer booklet.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig 3.1, which shows the circuit that has been set up for you. power source a lamp 1 lamp 2 lamp 3 v     fig. 3.1  (a) close the switch. record the current i, shown by the ammeter.   switch off.  (b) remove the ammeter from the circuit. reconnect the ammeter to measure the current i1 in  lamp 1.   close the switch. record the current i1. open the switch.  (c) repeat step (b) to measure and record the current i2 in lamp 2 and the current i3 in lamp 3.",
            "7": "7 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn over (d) theory suggests that i = i1 + i2 + i3. state whether or not your readings support this theory.  give a reason for your answer.  (e) to test the theory further you would need to vary the current i. state how you would vary the  current i.  (f) connect the voltmeter across lamp 3. close the switch. measure and record the potential  difference v across the lamps. open the switch.  (g) calculate the resistance r of the lamps arranged in parallel using the equation     r = v / i.  (h) connect the voltmeter across the switch.   (i) close the switch. measure and record the potential difference va across the switch.   (ii) open the switch. measure and record the potential difference vb across the switch.",
            "8": "8 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 20074 in this experiment you will investigate the refraction of light through a transparent block.  record all of your observations and answers on page 6 of your answer booklet.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1, fig. 4.2 and fig. 4.3. line image of line paperdirection of eye movementoptics pin     fig. 4.1 hstandoptics pin paper   hstandoptics pin paper  fig. 4.2 fig. 4.3",
            "9": "9 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 2007 (a) draw a straight line approximately in the centre of the sheet of plain paper.  (b) stand the transparent block on the paper with one of its shortest sides over the line as shown  in figs 4.1 and 4.2.  (c) look, with one eye closed, vertically down through the block. y ou will see the image within the block of the pencil line you have drawn on the paper.  (d) place the optics pin horizontally with its point touching the transparent block approximately in the centre so that the pencil line and the pin appear to form one straight line. move your eye slightly in a horizontal plane, as shown in fig. 4.1. y ou will see that the image of the pencil line and the pin appear to separate.  (e) continue to look vertically down through the block and slowly move the pin downwards until you find a position where the pin and the image of the pencil line do not separate when you move your eye.  (f) without changing the position of the point of the pin that is touching the block, measure and record the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin.  (g) measure and record the height h of the transparent block.  (h) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation     n = h \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 h \u2013x.  (i) stand the transparent block on the paper with one of its longest sides over the line as shown in fig. 4.3.  (j) repeat steps (c) to (h).  (k) calculate the average value of the refractive index n.  (l) to obtain a reliable value for the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin it is important that the pin is horizontal. explain briefly with the aid of a diagram how you checked that the pin was horizontal.",
            "10": "10 0625/05/o/n/07 \u00a9 ucles 2007blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/05/o/n/07blank page \u00a9 ucles 2007",
            "12": "12 0625/05/o/n/07permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page \u00a9 ucles 2007"
        },
        "0625_w07_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. spa (mml 13215 4/06) t25854/5 \u00a9 ucles 2007 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education write your centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *6786650342* physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2007  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper.no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/06/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20071 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of hot water.  (a) a student measures room temperature. write down the value of room temperature \u03b80  shown on the thermometer in fig. 1.1.110 1009080706050403020100\u201310\u00b0c fig. 1.1  \u03b80 =  . [1]  (b) he then pours hot water into a beaker until it is about two-thirds full. he measures and  records the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water and at the same time starts a stopwatch. as the water cools, he records the temperature every 30 s for a total of five minutes. his readings are shown in the table below. t / \u03b8 /   0 68.0  30 53.0  60 45.0 90 40.0 120 36.5150 33.5180 32.0210 30.0240 29.0270 28.5300 28.0   (i) complete the column headings in the table.   (ii) calculate the temperature fall t 1 in the first minute of the experiment. t1 =     (iii) calculate the temperature fall t2 in the final minute of the experiment. t2 =   [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/06/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (c) theory suggests that the rate of cooling of the hot water at any time depends on the  difference between the temperature of the water at that time and room temperature.   (i) state and explain whether your answers in (b) support this theory. statement  .explanation  ..  [1]   (ii) suggest three variables that you would attempt to keep constant if this theory were  to be investigated further. 1. ...2. ...3. . [3]  (d) suggest one addition you could make to the apparatus provided in order to reduce the  rate of evaporation of the water in the beaker.   [1] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/06/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20072 the igcse class is investigating a simple balance.  the diagram below shows the apparatus. stand cardmetre rule pointerpivot   hook paper clip 0 mm10 mm20 mm30 mm40 mm50 mm60 mm70 mm80 mm90 mm100  mm110  mm120  mm130  mm140  mm150  mm fig. 2.1  (a) a student records the height h0 of the pointer above the bench. she then hangs a paper  clip on the hook and records the new height h of the pointer above the bench. next she  records the heights of the pointer above the bench using different numbers n of paper clips. the readings are shown in the table below.     h 0 = 100 mm nh  / mm d / mm 1 108 2 114 3 120 4 125 5 134 6 141",
            "5": "5 0625/06/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007  calculate the height differences d using the equation     d = (h \u2013 h0)   and enter them in the table. [2]  (b) (i) plot the graph of d / mm (y-axis) against n (x-axis).   (ii) use your graph to predict the value of d if a nail with the same mass as 4.6 paper  clips were to be hung from the hook in place of the paper clips. show clearly on the graph how you obtained your value.  d =  . [6] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/06/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20073 the igcse class is investigating the potential difference across lamps and the currents in  the lamps.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit that is being used. power source a lamp 1 lamp 2 lamp 3 fig. 3.1  (a) a student uses the ammeter to record the current i in the wire connecting the power  source to the rest of the circuit. he then moves the ammeter to new positions in the  circuit and measures the current in each lamp in turn. the positions of the pointer on the ammeter scale are shown below.   (i)   (ii) 00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5a  00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5a current i =  ..  current i1 in lamp 1 =  .   (iii)   (iv) 00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5a  00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5a current i2 in lamp 2 =  .  current i3 in lamp 3 =  .   write down the ammeter readings i, i1, i2 and i3. [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/06/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) theory suggests that i = i1 + i2 + i3. state whether or not your readings support this  theory. give a reason for your answer. statement  reason   ..  [1]  (c) to test the theory further, you would need to vary the value of  i. state how you would  vary i.  ..  [1]  (d) the student uses a voltmeter to measure the potential difference v across the lamps.   his reading is v = 1.6 v.  (i) calculate the resistance r of the lamps arranged in parallel, using the equation     r = v /  i,    where i is the value of the current in (a)(i).  r =  .   (ii) on fig. 3.1, add the symbol for the voltmeter connected to measure the potential  difference across the lamps. [3] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/06/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20074 the igcse class is investigating the refraction of light through a transparent block.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used. eye transparent block optics pin sheet of paperh x fig. 4.1  (a) a student looks down through the transparent block at the image of a line drawn on the  sheet of paper. she carefully places the point of the optics pin exactly in line with the image.   (i) on fig. 4.1, measure the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin.  x =  .   (ii) on fig. 4.1, measure the height h of the transparent block.  h =  .   (iii) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation     n = h \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 h \u2013x.  n =   [5]",
            "9": "9 0625/06/o/n/07 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) to obtain a reliable value for the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin, it is   important that the pin is horizontal. explain briefly with the aid of a diagram how you  would check that the pin is horizontal.  ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/06/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20075 (a) an igcse student is investigating the differences in density of small pieces of different  rocks. she is using an electronic balance to measure the mass of each sample and using the \u2018displacement method\u2019 to determine the volume of each sample. fig. 5.1 shows the displacement method. 100 80 604020100 80604020cm 3cm3 v1 v2rock sample fig. 5.1   (i) write down the volume shown in each measuring cylinder.  v1 =  .  v2 =  .   (ii) calculate the volume v of the rock sample.  v =  .   (iii) calculate the density of sample a using the equation     density = m \u2013\u2013\u2013 v,    where the mass m of the sample of rock is 109 g.  density =  . [4]",
            "11": "11 0625/06/o/n/07for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2007 (b) the table shows the readings that the student obtains for samples of rocks b and c.  complete the table by   (i) inserting the appropriate column headings with units,   (ii) calculating the densities using the equation density = m \u2013\u2013\u2013 v. sample m / g v / density / b 193 84 50 34 c 130 93 50 43 [4]  (c) explain briefly how you would determine the density of sand grains.  ..  [1] [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/06/o/n/07permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        }
    },
    "2008": {
        "0625_s08_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib08 06_0625_01/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2008  [turn over      *1101906355* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/01     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2008     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  1 some liquid is heated in a flask.    the diagrams show the height of the liquid in the tube when the liquid is cold and when it is hot.    cm12345 cm12345cold hot liquid flasktube scale     what is the difference in the heights?  a 1.7  cm b 2.8  cm c 3.2  cm d 4.5  cm      2 the speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.    where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus the greatest?    speed timeabc d     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08 [turn over  3 the circuit of a motor racing track is 3  km in length. in a race, a car goes 25 times round the  circuit in 30 minutes.    what is the average speed of the car?  a 75  km  / hour  b 90  km  / hour  c 150  km  / hour  d 750  km  / hour     4 the force of gravity acting on an astronaut in an orbiting spacecraft is less than when she is on  the earth\u2019s surface.    compared with being on the earth\u2019s surface, how do her mass and weight change when she goes into orbit?     mass in orbit weight in orbit  a decreases decreases  b decreases unchanged  c unchanged decreases  d unchanged unchanged     5 when two blocks x and y are placed on a uniform beam, the beam balances on a pivot at its  centre as shown.    xy pivot    what does this show about x and y?  a they have the same mass and the same density.  b they have the same mass and the same weight. c they have the same volume and the same density. d they have the same volume and the same weight.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  6 the diagram shows a rectangular metal block measuring 10  cm \u00d7 5.0  cm \u00d7 2.0  cm.    5.0  cm10  cm 2.0  cm     its mass is 250  g.    what is the density of the metal?  a 0.20  g / cm3 b 0.40  g / cm3 c 2.5  g / cm3 d 5.0  g / cm3      7 the diagram shows an experiment to find the density of a liquid.    1020304050 1020304050cm3 cm3 200  g 250  gmeasuring cylinder balanceliquid     what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.5  g / cm3 b 2.0  g / cm3 c 8.0  g / cm3 d 10.0  g / cm3      8 what are the conditions for equilibrium?    resultant force  acting resultant turning  effect acting  a yes yes  b yes no  c no yes  d no no     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08 [turn over  9 the diagram shows four objects standing on a flat surface.    the centre of mass of each object is marked m.    which object will fall over?    m m m mabcd     10 a stone is thrown from the edge of a cliff. its path is shown in the diagram.    12 3 ground    in which position does the stone have its greatest kinetic energy and in which position does it have its least gravitational energy?     greatest kinetic  energy least gravitational  energy  a 1 2  b 2 3  c 3 1  d 3 3    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  11 a worker is lifting boxes of identical weight from the ground onto a moving belt.    at first, it takes him 2  s to lift each box. later in the day, it takes him 3  s.    which statement is correct?  a later in the day, less work is done in lifting each box.  b later in the day, more work is done in lifting each box.  c later in the day, less power is developed in lifting each box.  d later in the day, more power is developed in lifting each box.      12 a manometer is used to indicate the pressure in a steel vessel, as shown in the diagram.    steel vesselliquid manometer     what value does the liquid manometer give for the pressure in the vessel?  a it is zero.  b it is between zero and atmospheric pressure.  c it is equal to atmospheric pressure.  d it is greater than atmospheric pressure.     13 four glass tanks contain water.    in which tank is the pressure of the water on the base greatest?    2 m4 m 3 m 2 m3 m 4 m 2 m2 m 6 m 6 m1 m4  mab c d     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08 [turn over  14 which line in the table describes the properties of solids and of liquids at a fixed temperature?     solids liquids  a definite volume and definite shape no definite volume but definite shape  b no definite volume but definite shape definite volume and definite shape  c definite volume and definite shape definite volume but no definite shape  d no definite volume but definite shape no definite volume and no definite shape    15 air is pumped slowly into a car tyre to increase the pressure. the temperature of the air does not  change.    which line in the table is correct?     number of molecules  hitting 1  cm2 of the  tyre each second average speed at which  molecules hit the tyre  a increases increases  b increases unchanged  c unchanged increases  d unchanged unchanged    16 the thermometer in the diagram has no scale.    bulb     where must the bulb be placed so that 0  \u00b0c can be marked on the stem?  a in boiling water  b in cold water c in a freezer  d in melting ice ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  17 a sample of a solid is heated for 12 minutes and its temperature noted every minute.    the results are shown in the table.    time  / min 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12  temperature  / \u00b0c 11.5 16.1 22.1 31.0 31.1 31.1 31.1 31.3 45.0 65.2 66.2 66.3 66.3    how should the sample be described at the end of the 12 minutes?  a all solid  b in the process of melting  c all liquid  d in the process of boiling     18 a heater is placed in a room.    which diagram shows the movement of air as the room is heated?    a b c d      ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08 [turn over  19 the diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water.    in which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt?    ab cwaterice water ice wrapped in lead wirewater ice wrapped in lead wire watericed       20 the diagram represents water waves about to move into shallow water from deep water.    deep water shallow waterwavefront     which property of the waves remains the same after the waves move into shallow water?  a frequency  b speed c wavefront direction  d wavelength     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  21 two sets of water waves overlap as shown in the diagram.    p q rs tu     from which two points are the sets of waves coming?  a p and s b t and r c q and t d u and q     22 which diagram shows total internal reflection of light?    ab c d mirror glass prism      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08 [turn over  23 light from the sun passes through a prism and a spectrum is produced on a screen.    light from the sunscreen violetredpnarrow slit     a thermometer placed at p shows a large temperature rise.    which type of radiation causes this?  a infra-red  b microwave c ultra-violet d visible light     24 two thin converging lenses x and y are used as shown to give a focused image of an illuminated  slit. the rays shown are parallel between x and y.    30  cm 20  cm 15  cmsource of lightslit imagescreenxy     what are the correct values for the focal lengths of x and of y?     focal length  of x  / cm focal length  of y  / cm  a 50 35  b 30 20  c 30 15  d 20 20    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  25 which equation can be used to calculate the speed of sound?  a speed =timedistance  b speed = distance \u00d7 time  c speed =distancetime  d speed = time + distance     26 a battery-operated bell is surrounded by a box with double walls.    air box walls gapbell     the bell is ringing but no sound at all is heard outside the box.    what is in the gap?  a a solid  b a liquid  c a gas  d a vacuum      27 which line in the table shows whether iron and steel are ferrous or non-ferrous materials?     iron steel  a ferrous ferrous  b ferrous non-ferrous  c non-ferrous ferrous  d non-ferrous non-ferrous     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08 [turn over  28 a solenoid carrying a current is used to demagnetise a bar magnet.    power supplysolenoid bar magnet     which conditions achieve demagnetisation?     current through  solenoid movement of bar magnet  a a.c. around the solenoid quickly  b a.c. through the solenoid slowly  c d.c. around the solenoid quickly  d d.c. through the solenoid slowly      29 a polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.    what charges must the rod and the balloon carry?  a the rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.  b the rod and the balloon carry like charges.  c the rod is charged but the balloon is not.  d the balloon is charged but the rod is not.     30 which circuit symbol represents a component used to store energy?    abcd     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  31 in the circuit shown, the switches s 1 and s 2 may be open (off) or closed (on).    v 12  v+ \u2013s1s2switches shown open (off)     which line in the table shows the voltmeter reading for the switch positions given?     s1 s 2 voltmeter reading  / v  a open open 12  b closed closed 12  c open closed 0  d closed open 12      32 the device x in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much  current flows.    x     what is device x?  a a fuse  b a switch  c a resistor  d an ammeter     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08 [turn over  33 the diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.    circuit 1 circuit 2x y zxyz     which statement is correct?  a if lamp y breaks in circuit 1, both the other lamps will go out.  b if lamp y breaks in circuit 2, both the other lamps will go out.  c if lamp y breaks in circuit 1, lamp z will go out, but lamp x will remain on.  d if lamp y breaks in circuit 2, lamp z will go out, but lamp x will remain on.      34 the wire xy shown in the diagram is connected to a sensitive voltmeter with a centre zero. xy is  then moved quickly once through the magnetic field.    ns vx ymovement     what is observed on the voltmeter?  a the needle moves briefly in one direction and then returns to the centre.  b the needle moves quickly in one direction and stays deflected.  c the needle vibrates rapidly from side to side whilst xy is moving.  d the needle stays still.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  35 the diagram shows a transformer connected to a 240  v a.c. supply.    primary coil 60 turnssecondary coil 30 turns 240  v a.c.soft-iron core     what is the potential difference across the secondary coil of the transformer?  a 30  v b 120  v c 240  v d 480  v      36 in order to produce a beam of cathode rays, a heated filament is placed near to an anode in an  evacuated glass vessel.    evacuated glass vessel anode heated filament     what is the type of charge on the anode and why is this charge chosen?     charge reason  a negative to attract electrons  b negative to repel electrons  c positive to attract electrons  d positive to repel electrons     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08 [turn over  37 diagram 1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two 100  \u03c9 resistors.    one of the resistors is changed to 90  \u03c9, as shown in diagram 2.    100  \u03c9 100  \u03c9 vdiagram 1 90  \u03c9 100  \u03c9 vdiagram 2     how does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done?  a it becomes zero.  b it decreases a little. c it increases a little. d it stays the same.      38 what is a \u03b2-particle and from which part of a radioactive atom is it emitted?     \u03b2-particle emitted from  a electron nucleus  b electron outer orbits  c helium nucleus nucleus  d helium nucleus outer orbits      39 a sample of radioactive uranium has mass 1  g. another sample of the same material has   mass 2 g.    which property is the same for both samples?  a the amount of radiation emitted per second  b the half-life  c the number of uranium atoms  d the volume     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/m/j/08  40 a particular nuclide has the symbol 37 17cl.    what is true for atoms of this nuclide?  a there are 17 nucleons in the nucleus.  b there are 17 protons in the nucleus.  c there are 37 electrons in the nucleus.  d there are 37 neutrons in the nucleus.     ",
            "19": "19   0625/01/m/j/08  blank page  ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.     0625/01/m/j/08  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s08_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. sp (slm/cgw) t41975/6 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *3498617057* physics 0625/02 paper 2  core may/june 2008  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/02/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20081 (a) fig. 1.1 shows a uniform rod. fig. 1.1   (i) use your rule to find the length of the rod.  length = ...cm [1]   (ii) on fig. 1.1, show the position of the centre of mass of the rod using the letter c.  [1]  (b) fig. 1.2 shows another rod, of the same length as the previous one, but this rod is thicker  at one end. fig. 1.2   use your judgement to mark with the letter m approximately where the centre of mass  of this rod will be.  [2]  [total: 4]",
            "3": "3 0625/02/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20082 a motorcyclist is travelling along a country road, as shown in fig. 2.1. 1375 ma b fig. 2.1  the statements below describe the motion of the motorcycle from point a to point b.   1. the motorcycle accelerates uniformly from rest at point a, increasing its speed to  25 m/s in 10 s.   2. it then travels at a constant speed of 25 m/s for 40 s.   3. it then decelerates uniformly to rest at point b, 70 s after leaving point a. 0 0 time/s510152025speed m/s3035 fig. 2.2  (a) for the motorcycle moving from point a to point b, draw on fig. 2.2,   (i) a suitable time scale, [1]   (ii) the graph of the motion of the motorcycle. [5]  (b) the distance from a to b is 1375 m.   calculate the average speed of the motorcycle between a and b. give your answer to  the nearest m/s.  average speed = ..m/s [4]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/02/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20083 a beam is pivoted at its centre. three forces, f1, f2 and f3, act on the beam as shown in  fig. 3.1. ac b f1 f2 f3 fig. 3.1  (a) which of the forces exert(s)   a clockwise moment, ...   an anticlockwise moment? ... [3]  (b) when the beam is released, the right-hand side of the beam starts to go down.   which of the three distances, a, b or c, should be decreased in order to balance the  beam? explain your answer.which distance?  ..explanation  .. .. ..[3]  (c) fig. 3.2 represents a simple beam-balance with the pivot accurately at its centre. ? fig. 3.2   the person using the beam-balance puts the object to be weighed in the left-hand pan.  he has a selection of standard masses to put in the right-hand pan, but he finds he  cannot exactly balance the beam.   his best attempts are masses used effect 10 g, 10 g, 5 g, 2 g, 2 g beam tips down slightly on the left-hand side 20 g, 10 g beam tips down slightly on the right-hand side   estimate the mass of the object.  mass = . g [1]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/02/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20084 fig. 4.1 (a) an electrician climbs up to the platform  of a special tower, in order to reach a high-level spotlight, as shown in fig. 4.1.   which form of energy, possessed by the  electrician\u2019s body,   (i) is greater at the top of the tower than it was at the bottom,  . [1]   (ii) is less at the top of the tower than it  was at the bottom?  . [1]  (b) one of the electrician\u2019s assistants also  climbs up to the platform. the assistant weighs less than the electrician.   which of the two people does the most  work climbing up to the platform, and why? which person?  why?  ...  . . . [1]  (c) the electrician wishes to know what power he develops as he climbs the tower.   which quantities does he need to know in order to do this?  .. ..[1]  [total: 4]",
            "6": "6 0625/02/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20085 in the atomic model, the atom has a central mass. much smaller particles orbit this central  mass, as shown in fig. 5.1. central mass orbitingparticles fig. 5.1  (a) state the name given to the central mass.  ..[1]  (b) state the name given to the orbiting particles. ..[1]  (c) state the names of the particles from which the central mass is made and [2]  (d) the central mass of the helium atom is identical to one of the particles emitted in  radioactive decay. which particle is this? ...[1]  (e) state the name of the particles that form cathode rays. ..[1]  [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/02/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20086 fig. 6.1 and fig. 6.2 show two of the rays from the top of an object, passing through a lens. f2object f1 fig. 6.1 f2object f1 fig. 6.2  (a) on fig. 6.1, draw the third ray whose path from the top of the object through the lens is  known. [1]  (b) on fig. 6.2,   (i) copy the ray shown on fig. 6.1 and complete the diagram to locate the image   formed by the lens, [1]   (ii) mark and label the image. [2]  (c) on fig. 6.2, indicate clearly where you would position a screen on which to see the focused image. [1]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/02/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20087 (a) the table below describes the conditions of the molecules of a substance in each of the  three states of matter, solid, liquid and gas.   in the right-hand column, write the state of the substance that is described in the left- hand column. condition of the moleculesstate in which the  substance exists the molecules are a great distance apart, moving very rapidly, with negligible interaction. the substance occupies all the space available. the molecules are only able to vibrate rapidly about  fixed positions. the substance does not need a container to maintain its shape. the molecules move about amongst each other,  with attractive forces between them. the substance does not necessarily fill its container.  [2]  (b) (i) what is the state of matter just before a substance boils?  .. [1]   (ii) describe what happens to the molecules during boiling. .. .. [2]   (iii) state two differences between boiling and evaporating.1.  ..2.  ..[2]  (c) (i) what is the state of matter just before a substance melts? .. [1]   (ii) aluminium melts at 660 \u00b0c. at what temperature does it freeze? .. [1]  [total: 9]",
            "9": "9 0625/02/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20088 (a) the thermometer in fig. 8.1 is calibrated at two fixed points, and the space between  these is divided into equal divisions. 0 -10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 fig. 8.1   a thermometer is being calibrated with the celsius scale.   (i) 1. write down another name for the lower fixed point. .. [1]    2. how is this temperature achieved? .. .. .. [2]    3. what is the temperature of this fixed point? ...[1]   (ii) 1. write down another name for the upper fixed point. .. [1]    2. how is this temperature achieved?  .. .. .. [2]    3. what is the temperature of this fixed point? ...[2]  (b) a block of copper and a block of aluminium have identical masses. they both start at  room temperature and are given equal quantities of heat. when the heating is stopped, the aluminium has a lower temperature than the copper.   fill in the missing words in the sentence below, to explain this temperature difference.   the aluminium block has a smaller temperature rise than the copper block because the  aluminium block has a larger  than the copper block. [1]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/02/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20089 fuses are often included in circuits.  (a) in the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.  [1]  (b) when the statements in the boxes below are put in the correct order, they describe how  a fuse protects a circuit. a fuse wire heats up b circuit is broken,so current stops cfuse wire melts dcurrent becomestoo high   on the line below, list the letters of the four boxes in the correct order.  ..[2]  (c) by mistake, a fuse with too high a rated value is put in the fuse-holder in a circuit.   state two possible outcomes of this mistake. 1.  . 2.  .[2]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/02/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200810 fig. 10.1 shows a series circuit. r1xyr2 fig. 10.1  resistance r1 = 25 \u03c9 and resistance r2 = 35 \u03c9. the cell has zero resistance.  (a) calculate the combined resistance of r1 and r2.  resistance =  ... \u03c9 [2]  (b) on fig. 10.1, use the correct circuit symbol to draw a voltmeter connected to measure  the potential difference between x and y . [1]  (c) the variable resistor is set to zero resistance. the voltmeter reads 1.5 v.   (i) calculate the current in the circuit.  current =  ..[4]   (ii) state the value of the potential difference across the cell.  potential difference =  v [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/02/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (d) the resistance of the variable resistor is increased.   (i) what happens to the current in the circuit? tick one box.  increases   stays the same  decreases  [1]   (ii) what happens to the voltmeter reading? tick one box. increases   stays the same   decreases  [1]   (iii) state the resistance of the variable resistor when the voltmeter reads 0.75 v.  resistance =   \u03c9 [1]  [total: 11]",
            "13": "13 0625/02/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200811 (a) an experimenter uses a length of wire abc in an attempt to demonstrate  electromagnetic induction. the wire is connected to a sensitive millivoltmeter g. a b cg n  s  fig. 11.1   using the arrangement in fig. 11.1, the experimenter finds that she does not obtain the  expected deflection on g when she moves the wire abc down through the magnetic field.   (i) explain why there is no deflection shown on g.  .. .. .. [2]   (ii) what change should be made in order to observe a deflection on g? .. .. [1]  (b) name one device that makes use of electromagnetic induction. ..[1]  [total: 4]",
            "14": "14 0625/02/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200812 (a) the table below shows how the activity of a sample of a radioactive substance changes  with time. time/minutesactivity counts/s   0 128  30  58 60  25 90  11120   5   use the data in the table to estimate the half-life of the radioactive substance.  half-life =  .min [2] (b) the half-lives of various substances are given below. radon-220 55 seconds iodine-128 25 minutesradon-222 3.8 daysstrontium-90 28 years   (i) if the radioactive substance in (a) is one of these four, which one is it?  .. [1]   (ii) a sample of each of these substances is obtained.    which sample will have the greatest proportion of decayed nuclei by the end of one  year, and why? which?  .why?   .. [2]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/02/m/j/08blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/02/m/j/08blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s08_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "location entry codes       as part of cie\u2019s continual commitment to main taining best practice in assessment, cie uses  different variants of some question papers for our most popular assessments with large and  widespread candidature. the question papers are closely related and the relationships between  them have been thoroughly established using our assessment expertise.  all versions of the  paper give assessment of equal standard.     the content assessed by the examination papers and the type of questions is unchanged.   this change means that for this component there are now two variant question papers, mark  schemes and principal examiner\u2019s reports where previously there was only one.  for any individual country, it is intended that only one variant is used.  this document contains both  variants which will give all centres access to even more past examination ma terial than is usually  the case.      the diagram shows the relationship between the question papers, mark schemes and principal examiners\u2019 reports that are available.     question paper   mark scheme  principal examiner\u2019s  report  introduction     introduction   introduction   first variant question paper    first variant mark scheme  first variant principal  examiner\u2019s report    second variant question  paper  second variant mark  scheme    second variant principal  examiner\u2019s report      who can i contact for further information on these changes?  please direct any questions about this to cie\u2019s customer services team at: international@cie.org.uk              the titles for the variant items should correspond with the table above, so that at the top of the  first page of the relevant part of the document and on the header, it has the words:    \u2022 first variant question paper / mark scheme / principal examiner\u2019s report     or     \u2022 second variant question paper / mark scheme / principal examiner\u2019s report      as appropriate.    ",
            "2": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. spa (shw 00013 3/07) t49721/6 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question orpart question.physics 0625/31 paper 3 extended may/june 2008  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. *5079794953*",
            "3": "2 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graphs for two falling balls. 0123450102030 time  / sm / sspeedrubber ball plastic ball fig. 1.1  both balls fall from the same height above the ground.  (a) use the graphs to find   (i) the average acceleration of the falling rubber ball during the first 3.0 s,  acceleration =   [2]   (ii) the distance fallen by the rubber ball during the first 3.0 s,  distance =   [2]  (iii) the terminal velocity of the plastic ball.  terminal velocity =   [1]",
            "4": "3 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) both balls have the same mass but the volume of the plastic ball is much greater than  that of the rubber ball. explain, in terms of the forces acting on each ball, why the plastic ball reaches a terminal velocity but the rubber ball does not.  .. .. .. .. ..   [3]  (c) the rubber ball has a mass of 50 g. calculate the gravitational force acting on the rubber  ball.  force =   [2] [total: 10]",
            "5": "4 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use2 (a) name the process by which energy is released in the core of the sun.    [1]  (b) describe how energy from the sun becomes stored energy in water behind a dam. .. .. ..   [3]  (c) data for two small power stations is given in table 2.1. input to power station output of power station gas-fired 100 mw 25 mw hydroelectric  90 mw 30 mw table 2.1   (i) state what is meant by the efficiency of a power station. .. .. ..   [1]   (ii) use the data in table 2.1 to explain that the hydroelectric station is more efficient  than the gas-fired power station.  .. ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "6": "5 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 a cyclist rides up and then back down the hill shown in fig. 3.1. 14 mtop of hill starting and finishing point fig. 3.1  the cyclist and her bicycle have a combined mass of 90 kg. she pedals up to the top and  then stops. she turns around and rides back to the bottom without pedalling or using her brakes.  (a) calculate the potential energy gained by the cyclist and her bicycle when she has reached the top of the hill.  potential energy =   [2]  (b) calculate the maximum speed she could have when she arrives back at the starting  point.  speed =   [3]  (c) explain why her actual speed will be less than that calculated in (b). .. ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "7": "6 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 is a design for remotely operating an electrical switch using air pressure. electrical switch operated by air pressure metal boxconnecting pipeflexible rubber box cover fig. 4.1  the metal box and the pipe contain air at normal atmospheric pressure and the switch is off.  when the pressure in the metal box and pipe is raised to 1.5 times atmospheric pressure by pressing down on the flexible rubber box cover, the switch comes on.  (a) explain in terms of pressure and volume how the switch is made to come on.  .. .. ..   [2]  (b) normal atmospheric pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 10 5 pa. at this pressure, the volume of the box  and pipe is 60 cm3.   calculate the reduction in volume that must occur for the switch to be on.  reduction in volume =   [3]  (c) explain, in terms of air particles, why the switch may operate, without the rubber cover  being squashed, when there is a large rise in temperature.  .. .. ..   [2] [total: 7]",
            "8": "7 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 (a) explain, in terms of molecules, how thermal expansion takes place in a solid and in a  gas. solid  . .. .. .. ..gas  ... .. .. ..   [4]  (b) complete table 5.1 to show the relative expansion of equal volumes of liquids, gases  and solids.   choose words from   much less, slightly less, slightly more and much more. [2] state of matter expansion compared to solids, for the  same temperature rise liquids gases table 5.1  (c) alcohol is often used in thermometers.   state one property of alcohol that makes it suitable for use in thermometers.  ..   [1] [total: 7]",
            "9": "8 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use6 fig. 6.1 shows an object, the tip of which is labelled o, placed near a lens l.  the two principal foci of the lens are f1 and f2. f1 f2l o fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, draw the paths of two rays from the tip of the object so that they pass  through the lens and continue beyond.   complete the diagram to locate the image of the tip of the object. draw in the whole  image and label it i. [3]  (b) describe image i.  ..  .. ..   [3] [total: 6]",
            "10": "9 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 and fig. 7.2 show wavefronts of light approaching a plane mirror and a rectangular  glass block, respectively. direction of travel of wavefronts mirror fig. 7.1 direction of travel of wavefronts glass block fig. 7.2  (a) on fig. 7.1 and on fig. 7.2 draw wavefronts to show what happens after the waves strike the surface. [4]  (b) in fig. 7.2, the waves approaching the block have a speed of 3.0 \u00d7 10 8 m/s and an angle  of incidence of 70\u00b0. the refractive index of the glass of the block is 1.5.   (i) calculate the speed of light waves in the block.  speed =   [2]   (ii) calculate the angle of refraction in the block.  angle =   [2] [total: 8]",
            "11": "10 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 is the plan of a small apartment that has four lamps as shown. 2 \u00d7 60  w living room100  w kitchen 60 w bathroom fig. 8.1  power for the lamps is supplied at 200 v a.c. and the lamps are all in parallel.  (a) in the space below, draw a lighting circuit diagram so that there is one switch for each  room and one master switch that will turn off all the lamps. label the lamps as 60 w or 100 w. [3]  (b) the 100 w lamp is switched on. calculate   (i) the current in the lamp,  current =   [2]   (ii) the charge passing through the lamp in one minute.  charge =   [2]",
            "12": "11 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the three 60 w lamps are replaced by three energy-saving ones, that give the same  light output but are rated at only 15 w each.   calculate   (i) the total reduction in power,  reduction in power =   [1]  (ii) the energy saved when the lamps are lit for one hour.  energy saved = . [2] [total: 10]",
            "13": "12 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows apparatus used to investigate electromagnetic effects around straight wires. t1 t2t3 t4thin flexible wire thick rigid vertical wire large circular hole in card small circular hole in card fig. 9.1  fig. 9.2 is a view looking down on the apparatus shown in fig. 9.1. fig. 9.2  (a) a battery is connected to t1 and t2 so that there is a current vertically down the thick  wire.   on fig. 9.2, draw three magnetic field lines and indicate, with arrows, the direction of all  three. [2]  (b) using a variable resistor, the p.d. between terminals t1 and t2 is gradually reduced.   state the effect, if any, that this will have on   (i) the strength of the magnetic field,  ..  [1]   (ii) the direction of the magnetic field.  ..  [1]",
            "14": "13 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the battery is now connected to terminals t3 and t4, as well as to terminals t1 and t2,  so that there is a current down both wires. this causes the flexible wire to move.   (i) explain why the flexible wire moves.  .. .. ..   [2]   (ii) state the direction of the movement of the flexible wire.   [1]   (iii) the battery is replaced by one that delivers a smaller current.    state the effect that this will have on the force acting on the flexible wire. ..   [1] [total: 8]",
            "15": "14 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) in the space below, draw the symbol for a nor gate. [1]  (b) describe the action of a nor gate in terms of its inputs and output.  .. .. .. ..   [2]  (c) a chemical process requires heating at low pressure to work correctly.   when the heater is working, the output of a temperature sensor is high.  when the pressure is low enough, a pressure sensor has a low output.  both outputs are fed into a nor gate. a high output from the gate switches on an  indicator lamp.   (i) explain why the indicator lamp is off when the process is working correctly. .. ..   [1]   (ii) state whether the lamp is on or off in the following situations.    1. the pressure is low enough, but the heater stops working.  .   2. the heater is working, but the pressure rises too high.  .. [2] [total: 6]",
            "16": "15 0625/31/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) chlorine has two isotopes, one of nucleon number 35 and one of nucleon number 37.  the proton number of chlorine is 17.   table 11.1 refers to neutral atoms of chlorine.   complete table 11.1. nucleon number 35 nucleon number 37 number of protons number of neutrons number of electrons [3] table 11.1  (b) some isotopes are radioactive.   state the three types of radiation that may be emitted from radioactive isotopes. 1.  ...2.  ...3.  ... [1]  (c) (i) state one practical use of a radioactive isotope. ..   [1]   (ii) outline how it is used. .. .. .. ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "17": "16 0625/31/m/j/08blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.",
            "18": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. spa (shw 00013 3/07) t49725/4 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *2847911916* physics 0625/32 paper 3 extended may/june 2008  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "19": "2 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows the axes for a speed-time graph. 0123450102030 time  / sm / sspeed fig. 1.1  (a) an object a falls freely from rest with the acceleration due to gravity (g = 10 m/s2). it is  not affected by air resistance.   on fig. 1.1, draw the graph of the motion of object a. [1]  (b) using your graph, or an alternative method, calculate the distance fallen in the first 2 s  by object a in part (a).  distance fallen = . . [2]  (c) a second object b falls through the air from rest, but is affected by air resistance. it reaches a terminal velocity of 14 m/s.   on fig. 1.1, draw a possible graph for object b, including the region where it is travelling  at terminal velocity. [1]",
            "20": "3 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) (i) suggest a possible difference between objects a and b that could lead to b reaching  a terminal velocity.  .. ..   [1]   (ii) explain, in terms of the forces on b, why b reaches a terminal velocity. .. .. .. ..   [2]  (e) object a experiences a gravitational force of 2.0 n.   (i) state the value of the weight of a.  weight = . . [1]  (ii) calculate the mass of a.  mass = . . [1] (f) object a is floating in equilibrium on a liquid.   state the value of the upward force of the liquid on a. upward force =   [1] [total: 10]",
            "21": "4 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use2 (a) name the process by which energy is released in the core of the sun.    [1]  (b) describe how energy from the sun becomes stored energy in water behind a dam. .. .. .. .. ..   [3]  (c) data for two small power stations is given in table 2.1. input to power station output of power station gas-fired 100 mw 25 mw hydroelectric  90 mw 30 mw table 2.1   (i) state what is meant by the efficiency of a power station. .. .. ..   [1]   (ii) use the data in table 2.1 to explain that the hydroelectric station is more efficient  than the gas-fired power station.  .. .. .. ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "22": "5 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 a cyclist rides up and then back down the hill shown in fig. 3.1. 14 mtop of hill starting and finishing point fig. 3.1  the cyclist and her bicycle have a combined mass of 90 kg. she pedals up to the top and  then stops. she turns around and rides back to the bottom without pedalling or using her brakes.  (a) calculate the potential energy gained by the cyclist and her bicycle when she has reached the top of the hill.  potential energy =   [2]  (b) calculate the maximum speed she could have when she arrives back at the starting  point.  speed =   [3]  (c) explain why her actual speed will be less than that calculated in (b). .. .. ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "23": "6 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) one of the laws about the behaviour of gases states that   \u201cfor a fixed amount of gas at constant temperature, the pressure is inversely proportional  to the volume\u201d.   in the space below, write an equation that represents this law. [1]  (b) table 4.1 gives a series of pressures and their corresponding volumes, obtained in an  experiment with a fixed amount of gas. the gas obeys the law referred to in (a). pressure / kpa 100 200 400 500 1000 volume / cm350.0 25.0 12.5 10.0 5.0 table 4.1   how do these figures indicate that the temperature was constant throughout the  experiment?  .. .. ..   [2]  (c) air is trapped by a piston in a cylinder. the pressure of the air is 1.2 \u00d7 10 5 pa. the  distance from the closed end of the cylinder to the piston is 75 mm.   the piston is pushed in until the pressure of the air has risen to 3.0 \u00d7 105 pa.   calculate how far the piston has moved.  distance moved = . . [4] [total: 7]",
            "24": "7 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 (a) explain, in terms of molecules, how thermal expansion takes place in a solid and in a  gas. solid  . .. .. .. ..gas  ... .. .. ..   [4]  (b) complete table 5.1 to show the relative expansion of equal volumes of liquids, gases  and solids.   choose words from   much less, slightly less, slightly more and much more. [2] state of matter expansion compared to solids, for the  same temperature rise liquids gases table 5.1  (c) alcohol is often used in thermometers.   state one property of alcohol that makes it suitable for use in thermometers.  .. ..   [1] [total: 7]",
            "25": "8 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use6 fig. 6.1 shows an object, the tip of which is labelled o, placed near a lens l.  the two principal foci of the lens are f1 and f2. f1 f2l o fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, draw the paths of two rays from the tip of the object so that they pass  through the lens and continue beyond.   complete the diagram to locate the image of the tip of the object. draw in the whole  image and label it i. [2]  (b) state two changes to the image when the object is moved   (i) a small distance closer to the lens, 1. ...2. .  [2]   (ii) to a position between f 1 and the lens. 1. ...2. .  [2] [total: 6]",
            "26": "9 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 and fig. 7.2 show wavefronts of light approaching a plane mirror and a rectangular  glass block, respectively. direction of travel of wavefronts mirror fig. 7.1 direction of travel of wavefronts glass block fig. 7.2  (a) on fig. 7.1 and on fig. 7.2 draw wavefronts to show what happens after the waves strike the surface. [4]  (b) in fig. 7.2, the waves approaching the block have a speed of 3.0 \u00d7 10 8 m/s and an angle  of incidence of 70\u00b0. the refractive index of the glass of the block is 1.5.   (i) calculate the speed of light waves in the block.  speed =   [2]   (ii) calculate the angle of refraction in the block.  angle =   [2] [total: 8]",
            "27": "10 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 is the plan of a small apartment that has four lamps as shown. 2 \u00d7 60  w living room100  w kitchen 60 w bathroom fig. 8.1  power for the lamps is supplied at 200 v a.c. and the lamps are all in parallel.  (a) in the space below, draw a lighting circuit diagram so that there is one switch for each  room and one master switch that will turn off all the lamps. label the lamps as 60 w or 100 w. [3]  (b) the 100 w lamp is switched on. calculate   (i) the current in the lamp,  current =   [2]   (ii) the charge passing through the lamp in one minute.  charge =   [2]",
            "28": "11 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the three 60 w lamps are replaced by three energy-saving ones, that give the same  light output but are rated at only 15 w each.   calculate   (i) the total reduction in power,  reduction in power =   [1]  (ii) the energy saved when the lamps are lit for one hour.  energy saved = . [2] [total: 10]",
            "29": "12 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows apparatus used to investigate electromagnetic effects around straight wires. t1 t2t3 t4thin flexible wire thick rigid vertical wire large circular hole in card small circular hole in card fig. 9.1  fig. 9.2 is a view looking down on the apparatus shown in fig. 9.1. fig. 9.2  (a) a battery is connected to t1 and t2 so that there is a current vertically down the thick  wire.   on fig. 9.2, draw three magnetic field lines and indicate, with arrows, the direction of all  three. [2]  (b) using a variable resistor, the p.d. between terminals t1 and t2 is gradually reduced.   state the effect, if any, that this will have on   (i) the strength of the magnetic field,  ..  [1]   (ii) the direction of the magnetic field.  ..  [1]",
            "30": "13 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the battery is now connected to terminals t3 and t4, as well as to terminals t1 and t2,  so that there is a current down both wires. this causes the flexible wire to move.   (i) explain why the flexible wire moves.  .. .. .. ..   [2]   (ii) state the direction of the movement of the flexible wire.   [1]   (iii) the battery is replaced by one that delivers a smaller current.    state the effect that this will have on the force acting on the flexible wire. ..   [1] [total: 8]",
            "31": "14 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) in the space below, draw the symbol for a nor gate. [1]  (b) describe the action of a nor gate in terms of its inputs and output.  .. .. .. .. .. ..   [2]",
            "32": "15 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) a chemical process requires heating at low pressure to work correctly.   when the heater is working, the output of a temperature sensor is high.   when the pressure is low enough, a pressure sensor has a low output.  both outputs are fed into a nor gate. a high output from the gate switches on an  indicator lamp.   (i) explain why the indicator lamp is off when the process is working correctly. .. .. ..   [1]   (ii) state whether the lamp is on or off in the following situations.    1. the pressure is low enough, but the heater stops working.  .   2. the heater is working, but the pressure rises too high.  .. [2] [total: 6]",
            "33": "16 0625/32/m/j/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) chlorine has two isotopes, one of nucleon number 35 and one of nucleon number 37.  the proton number of chlorine is 17.   table 11.1 refers to neutral atoms of chlorine.   complete table 11.1. nucleon number 35 nucleon number 37 number of protons number of neutrons number of electrons [3] table 11.1  (b) some isotopes are radioactive.   state the three types of radiation that may be emitted from radioactive isotopes. 1.  ...2.  ...3.  ... [1]  (c) (i) state one practical use of a radioactive isotope. ..   [1]   (ii) outline how it is used. .. .. .. ..   [1] [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s08_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. sp (slm/cgw) t41960/5 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. *4186051396* physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test may/june 2008  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/05/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20081 in this experiment, you are to determine the weight of a mass using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. benchmass pivotmetre rule ab fig. 1.1  (a) place the mass on the metre rule so that its centre is directly above the 10.0 cm mark.  (b) describe, with the aid of a diagram, how you judged that the centre of the mass was  directly above the 10.0 cm mark.  [1]  (c) place the rule on the pivot so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced.   (d) measure and record the distance a from the 50.0 cm mark (centre) of the rule to the pivot and the distance b from the centre of the mass to the pivot.  a =  ..  b =  ..[3]",
            "3": "3 0625/05/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (e) calculate the weight w of the mass, using the equation w = ka b.   the value of k is given to you on a card close to the apparatus. record the value of k.  k =  ..  w =  ..[1]  (f) repeat the steps (c) to (e), with the centre of the mass directly above the 20.0 cm mark  on the metre rule.  a =  ..  b =  ..  w =  ..[3]  (g) calculate and record the average of the two values for w. show your working.  average value for w = ...[2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/05/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20082 in this experiment you are to compare the combined resistance of lamps in different circuit  arrangements.  (a) the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you. v a  a power  source  b  fig. 2.1   (i) switch on. measure and record in row 1 of table 2.1 (on page 5) the current i in the  circuit and the p.d. v across points a and b. switch off.   (ii) calculate the combined resistance r of the three lamps using the equation r = v i.    record this value of r in the table.   (iii) complete the column headings for each of the v, i and r columns of the table.",
            "5": "5 0625/05/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008  (iv) disconnect the lamps and then reconnect them between points a and b as shown  in fig. 2.2. ab fig. 2.2 a b fig. 2.3a b fig. 2.4   (v) switch on. measure and record in row 2 of table 2.1 the current i in the circuit and  the p.d. v across points a and b. switch off.   (vi) calculate the combined resistance r of the three lamps using the equation r = v i.    record this value of r in table 2.1. table 2.1 v / i / r / fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2fig. 2.3fig. 2.4   (vii) repeat steps (iv) to (vi) using the arrangements of the lamps shown in fig. 2.3 and  fig. 2.4. [7]",
            "6": "6 0625/05/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (b) theory suggests that, if all three lamps have the same resistance under all conditions,  the combined resistance r recorded in row 1 will be one ninth of the combined  resistance r recorded in row 4.   (i) state whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, your results support this theory. justify your answer by reference to the results. statement  . justification   ..   (ii) suggest a reason why the results may not support the theory. .. .. [3]  [total: 10]",
            "7": "7 0625/05/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20083 in this experiment you are to investigate the effect of surface area exposed to the air on the  rate of cooling of hot water.   carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. 100  cm3 100  cm3beaker abthermometer thermometer water watermeasuring cylinder fig. 3.1  y ou are provided with two containers labelled a (a beaker) and b (a measuring cylinder). y ou  also have a supply of hot water.  (a) (i) pour 100 cm3 of hot water into container a.   (ii) measure the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water.    record this temperature in table 3.1 (on page 8) for time t = 0 s.",
            "8": "8 0625/05/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008  (iii) start the stopwatch and then record the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals  for a total of four minutes. table 3.1 container a (beaker)container b  (measuring cylinder) t /s \u03b8 / \u00b0c \u03b8 / \u00b0c 0 30 6090 120150180210240  [3]   (iv) pour 100 cm 3 of hot water into container b.   (v) repeat steps (ii) and (iii).",
            "9": "9 0625/05/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (b) (i) use the data in table 3.1 to plot a graph of the temperature of the water in the  beaker (y-axis) against time (x-axis). draw the best fit curve.   (ii) using the same graph axes, plot another graph, of the temperature of the water in the measuring cylinder against time. 0 40 20 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220  t /s240   [5]  (c) the experiment you have just done was designed to investigate the effect of the surface area exposed to the air on the rate of cooling of hot water.   state the effect of a larger surface area on the rate of cooling. justify your answer by  reference to your graph. statement  .justification   ...  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/05/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20084 in this experiment you are to determine a quantity called the refractive index of the material  of a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. a e n  f  g  n'hb  d c  ray-trace sheet eye p4p3p230\u00b0 p1 fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd.  (b) remove the block and draw the normal nn' to side ab so that the normal is 2.0 cm from a. label the point g where nn' crosses dc. label the point f where nn' crosses ab.  (c) draw the line ef at an angle of 30\u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 4.1.",
            "11": "11 0625/05/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (d) place the paper on the pin board.  (e) place two pins p1 and p2 on line ef as shown in fig. 4.1.  (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so  that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   place two pins p3 and p4 between your eye and the block so that p3 and p4 and the  images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other.   mark the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. remove the block.  (g) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd. label  this point h.  (h) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =  ..[1]  (i) draw the line hf.  (j) measure and record the length b of the line hf .  b =  ..[1]  (k) extend the straight line ef through the outline of the block to a point j. the point j must  be at least 5 cm from the block. the line ej crosses the line cd. label this point k.  (l) (i) measure and record the length c of the line gk.  c =  ..   (ii) measure and record the length d of the line fk.  d =  ..[1]  (m) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation n = cb ad  n =  ..[2]   tie your ray-trace sheet opposite this page.  [5]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/05/m/j/08permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s08_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages and 4 blank pages. sp (slm/cgw) t40877/4 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *4130189347* physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2008  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper.no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/06/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20081 an igcse student is determining the density of a solid metal cylinder using a balancing  method. fig. 1.1. shows the apparatus. cylinder benchpivotmetre rule ab fig. 1.1  he places the cylinder on the metre rule so that its centre is directly above the 10.0 cm mark. the rule is placed on the pivot so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced.   he measures and records the distance a from the centre of the rule to the pivot and the distance b from the centre of the cylinder to the pivot. he repeats the experiment with the  same cylinder at different positions on the rule.  the readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 a / b / m / 12.6 27.4 11.0 24.0 9.5 20.5  (a) (i) complete the column headings in table 1.1.   (ii) for each set of readings, calculate the mass m of the cylinder using the equation m = ka b.    the value of k is the mass of the rule which is 108 g.    enter the results in table 1.1.  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/06/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (b) the cylinder completely covers the marks on the metre rule. describe, with the aid of  a diagram, how you would judge that the centre of the cylinder is directly above the 10.0 cm mark.  ..  ..[1]  (c) use your answers in table 1.1 to calculate and record the average of the three values  for m. show your working.  average value for m =  ..[2]",
            "4": "4 0625/06/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (d) fig. 1.2 shows the cylinder placed flat on the bench and viewed from one side.  fig. 1.2   (i) on the diagram, measure the diameter d and the thickness t of the cylinder.  d =  ..  t =  ..   (ii) calculate the volume v of the cylinder using the equation  v = \u03c0d 2t 4.  v =  ..   (iii) calculate the density \u03c1 of the cylinder using the equation  \u03c1 = m v.  \u03c1 =  ..[3]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/06/m/j/08 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/06/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20082 the igcse class is comparing the combined resistance of resistors in different circuit  arrangements. the first circuit is shown in fig. 2.1. v a  a power  source  b  circuit 1 fig. 2.1  (a) the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across the three resistors are measured and  recorded. three more circuit arrangements are used. for each arrangement, a student disconnects the resistors and then reconnects them between points a and b as shown in figs. 2.2\u20132.4. ab circuit 2 fig. 2.2 a b circuit 3a b circuit 4 fig. 2.3 fig. 2.4   the voltage and current readings are shown in the table 2.1. table 2.1 circuit v / i / r / 1 1.87 1.68 2 1.84 0.843 1.87 0.374 1.91 0.20   (i) complete the column headings for each of the v,  i and r columns of table 2.1.",
            "7": "7 0625/06/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008  (ii) for each circuit, calculate the combined resistance r of the three resistors using  the equation r = v i.    record these values of r in table 2.1. [3]  (b) theory suggests that, if all three resistors have the same resistance under all conditions, the combined resistance in circuit 1 will be one half of the combined resistance in circuit 2.   (i) state whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, your results support this theory. justify your answer by reference to the results. statement  . justification   ..   (ii) suggest one precaution you could take to ensure that the readings are as accurate  as possible.    .. .. [3]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/06/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20083 a student is investigating the effect of surface area exposed to the air on the rate of cooling  of hot water.  100  cm3 100  cm3 beaker  a b thermometer thermometer  water water measuring  cylinder  fig. 3.1  the student is provided with two containers. the beaker is labelled a and the measuring  cylinder is labelled b. each container contains 100 cm3 of hot water. he records the  temperature of the water at 30 s intervals for a total of four minutes. table 3.1 shows the  readings of time t and temperature \u03b8. table 3.1 container a (beaker)container b (measuring cylinder) t /s \u03b8\u03b8 / \u00b0c \u03b8 / \u00b0c   0 8 5 8 5  30 76 79 60 68 74 90 63 69120 59 66150 56 63180 54 61210 52 59240 51 58",
            "9": "9 0625/06/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (a) (i) use the data in table 3.1 to plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c (y-axis) against t /s (x-axis) for the  beaker. draw the best-fit curve.   (ii) use the data for the measuring cylinder to plot another curve on the same graph  axes that you used for part (a)(i). 04 0 20 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 t /s240  [6]  (b) the experiment is designed to investigate the effect of the surface area exposed to the air on the rate of cooling. state briefly the effect of a larger surface area on the rate of cooling. justify your answer by reference to your graph. statement ..justification  ..[2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/06/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20084 a student is determining a quantity called the refractive index of the material of a transparent  block.  fig. 4.1 shows the ray-tracing sheet that the student is producing. abcd is the outline of the  transparent block, drawn on the ray-tracing sheet. a b  d c  p4p3 fig. 4.1  (a) (i) draw the normal nn' to side ab, extended to cross side dc, so that the normal is 2.0 cm from a. label the point f where nn' crosses ab. label the point g where  nn' crosses dc.   (ii) draw the line ef at an angle of 30\u00b0 to the normal and to the left of the normal nn'.  e is a point outside the block and above ab on the ray-tracing sheet.  [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/06/m/j/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (b) read the following passage, taken from the student\u2019s notebook and then answer the  questions that follow. i placed two pins p1 and p2 on line ef.  i observed the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that  the images of p1 and p2 appeared one behind the other. i placed two  more pins p3 and p4 between my eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the  images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appeared one behind the  other. i marked the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4.   (i) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd.  label this point h.   (ii) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =  ..   (iii) draw the line hf.   (iv) measure and record the length b of the line hf.  b =  ..[3]  (c) extend the straight line ef through the outline of the block to a point j. the point j must  be at least 5 cm from the block. the line ej crosses the line cd. label this point k.   (i) measure and record the length c of the line gk.  c =  ..   (ii) measure and record the length d of the line fk.  d =  ..   (iii) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation n = cb ad .  n =  ..[3]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/06/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20085 an igcse student has carried out a timing experiment using a simple pendulum. she plotted  a graph of t 2/s2 against l /m. t is the time for one swing of the pendulum and l is the length  of the pendulum. the graph is shown below. 0 0 0.2 1 2 3 4 5 t 2  / s2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.1 l /m  (a) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained  the necessary information.  g =  ..   (ii) calculate the acceleration g of free fall using the equation g = 4\u03c02 g.  g =  ...m/s2   (iii) the student could have calculated the acceleration of free fall g from just one set of  readings. state the purpose of taking sufficient readings to plot a graph.  .. .. [5]",
            "13": "13 0625/06/m/j/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (b) the student next studies the relationship between the mass m of the pendulum and the  time for one swing t. the readings are shown in table 5.1. table 5.1 m /g t /s  50 1.58 100 1.60150 1.61200 1.57250 1.59   (i) suggest two variables that must be kept constant to make the experiment a fair  test. 1.  ..2.  ..   (ii) study the readings in the table and complete the following sentence.within the limits of experimental accuracy, the readings show that the mass m of  the pendulum  ...[3]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/06/m/j/08blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/06/m/j/08blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/06/m/j/08blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w08_qp_03.pdf": {
            "1": "location entry codes       as part of cie\u2019s continual commitment to main taining best practice in assessment, cie uses  different variants of some question papers for our most popular assessments with large and  widespread candidature. the question papers are closely related and the relationships between  them have been thoroughly established using our assessment expertise.  all versions of the  paper give assessment of equal standard.     the content assessed by the examination papers and the type of questions is unchanged.   this change means that for this component there are now two variant question papers, mark  schemes and principal examiner\u2019s reports where previously there was only one.  for any individual country, it is intended that only one variant is used.  this document contains both  variants which will give all centres access to even more past examination ma terial than is usually  the case.      the diagram shows the relationship between the question papers, mark schemes and principal examiners\u2019 reports that are available.     question paper   mark scheme  principal examiner\u2019s  report  introduction     introduction   introduction   first variant question paper    first variant mark scheme  first variant principal  examiner\u2019s report    second variant question  paper  second variant mark  scheme    second variant principal  examiner\u2019s report      who can i contact for further information on these changes?  please direct any questions about this to cie\u2019s customer services team at: international@cie.org.uk              the titles for the variant items should correspond with the table above, so that at the top of the  first page of the relevant part of the document and on the header, it has the words:    \u2022 first variant question paper / mark scheme / principal examiner\u2019s report     or     \u2022 second variant question paper / mark scheme / principal examiner\u2019s report      as appropriate.    ",
            "2": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. spa (shw 00014 3/07) t50468/5 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *0631463082* physics 0625/31 paper 3 extended october/november 2008  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "3": "2 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows apparatus used to find a relationship between the force applied to a trolley  and the acceleration caused by the force. trolley runwaystringroll of tapeticker- tapeticker-tape timer hanging mass fig. 1.1  for each mass, hung as shown, the acceleration of the trolley is determined from the tape. some of the results are given in the table below. weight of the hanging mass / nacceleration of the trolley m/s2 0.20 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.70 0.80 1.0  (a) (i) explain why the trolley accelerates.  ..   [2]   (ii) suggest why the runway has a slight slope as shown. ..   [1]  (b) calculate the mass of the trolley, assuming that the accelerating force is equal to the  weight of the hanging mass.  mass =   [2]",
            "4": "3 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) calculate the value missing from the table. show your working.  value =   [2]  (d) in one experiment, the hanging mass has a weight of 0.4 n and the trolley starts from  rest.   use data from the table to calculate   (i) the speed of the trolley after 1.2 s,  speed =   [2]  (ii) the distance travelled by the trolley in 1.2 s.  distance =   [2] [total: 11]",
            "5": "4 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows a circular metal disc of mass 200 g, freely pivoted at its centre. pivot fig. 2.1  masses of 100 g, 200 g, 300 g, 400 g, 500 g and 600 g are available, but only one of each  value. these may be hung with string from any of the holes. there are three small holes on each side of the centre, one at 4.0 cm from the pivot, one at 8.0 cm from the pivot and one at 12.0 cm from the pivot.  the apparatus is to be used to show that there is no net moment of force acting on a body when it is in equilibrium.  (a) on fig. 2.1, draw in two different value masses hanging from appropriate holes. the values of the masses should be chosen so that there is no net moment. alongside the masses chosen, write down their values. [2]  (b) explain how you would test that your chosen masses give no net moment to the disc.  .. .. ..   [1]  (c) calculate the moments about the pivot due to the two masses chosen.  moment due to first mass =  . moment due to second mass =  .. [2]",
            "6": "5 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) calculate the force on the pivot when the two masses chosen are hanging from the  disc.  force =   [2] [total: 7]",
            "7": "6 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use3 (a) a submarine descends to a depth of 70 m below the surface of water.   the density of the water is 1050 kg/m3. atmospheric pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.   calculate   (i) the increase in pressure as it descends from the surface to a depth of 70 m,  increase in pressure =   [2]  (ii) the total pressure on the submarine at a depth of 70 m.  total pressure =   [1] (b) on another dive, the submarine experiences a total pressure of 6.5 \u00d7 10 5 pa. a hatch  cover on the submarine has an area of 2.5 m2.   calculate the force on the outside of the cover.  force =   [2]  (c) the submarine undergoes tests in fresh water of density 1000 kg/m3.   explain why the pressure on the submarine is less at the same depth.  ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "8": "7 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 the whole of a sealed, empty, dusty room is kept at a constant temperature of 15 \u00b0c. light  shines into the room through a small outside window.  an observer points a tv camera with a magnifying lens into the room through a second small window, set in an inside wall at right angles to the outside wall.  dust particles in the room show up on the tv monitor screen as tiny specks of light.  (a) in the space below draw a diagram to show the motion of one of the specks of light over a short period of time. [1]  (b) after a period of one hour the specks are still observed, showing that the dust particles have not fallen to the floor.   explain why the dust particles have not fallen to the floor. y ou may draw a labelled  diagram to help your explanation.  ..  .. ..   [2]  (c) on another day, the temperature of the room is only 5 \u00b0c. all other conditions are the  same and the specks of light are again observed.   suggest any differences that you would expect in the movement of the specks when the  temperature is 5 \u00b0c, compared to before.  .. ..   [1] [total: 4]",
            "9": "8 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows apparatus that could be used to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of  ice. 40 w electric heaterfinely crushed ice glass funnel stand with clamps to hold funnel and heater fig. 5.1  (a) in order to obtain as accurate a result as possible, state why it is necessary to   (i) wait until water is dripping into the beaker at a constant rate before taking readings,  ..   [1]   (ii) use finely crushed ice rather than large pieces. ..   [1]  (b) the power of the heater and the time for which water is collected are known. write down  all the other readings that are needed to obtain a value for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.  ..   [2]",
            "10": "9 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) using a 40 w heater, 16.3 g of ice is melted in 2.0 minutes. the heater is then switched  off. in a further 2.0 minutes, 2.1 g of ice is melted.   calculate the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice from these results.  specific latent heat of fusion of ice =   [4] [total: 8]",
            "11": "10 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use6 fig. 6.1 shows two rays of monochromatic light, one entering the prism along the normal de  and the second one along pq. d acpe qf r42\u00b030\u00b0b fig. 6.1  (a) state what is meant b y monochromatic light.  .. ..  [1]  (b) the refractive index of the glass of the prism is 1.49. the ray ef is refracted at f . use information from fig. 6.1 to calculate the angle of refraction at f .  angle of refraction =   [3]  (c) on fig. 6.1, draw in the refracted ray, starting from f . [1]  (d) state how the refraction, starting at f , would be different if the monochromatic ray were replaced by a ray of white light.    [1]  (e) the critical angle for the glass of the prism is just over 42\u00b0. state the approximate angle  of refraction for the ray striking bc at r.    [1]  (f) another monochromatic ray, not shown in fig. 6.1, passes through the prism and strikes  bc at an angle of incidence of 50\u00b0. state what happens to this ray at the point where it strikes bc.    [1] [total: 8]",
            "12": "11 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 shows a scale drawing of plane waves approaching a gap in a barrier. direction of travel of plane waves barrier fig. 7.1  (a) on fig. 7.1, draw in the pattern of the waves after they have passed the gap. [3]  (b) the waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 2.5 cm and a speed of 20 cm/s.  calculate the frequency of the waves.  frequency =   [2]  (c) state the frequency of the diffracted waves.   [1] [total: 6]",
            "13": "12 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows a car battery being charged from a 200 v a.c. mains supply. 200  v~car battery fig. 8.1  (a) state the function of the diode.  ..   [1]  (b) the average charging current is 2.0 a and the battery takes 12 hours to charge fully.   calculate the charge that the battery stores when fully charged.  charge stored   [2]  (c) the battery has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12 v and, when connected to a circuit,  supplies energy to the circuit components.   state what is meant by an electromotive force of 12 v.  ..  ..   [2]",
            "14": "13 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) (i) in the space below, draw a circuit diagram to show how two 6.0 v lamps should be  connected to a 12 v battery so that both lamps glow with normal brightness. [1]   (ii) the power of each lamp is 8.0 w. calculate the current in the circuit.  current =  . [2]   (iii) calculate the energy used by the two lamps when both are lit for one hour.  energy =   [2] [total: 10]",
            "15": "14 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 is a block diagram of an electrical energy supply system, using the output of a coal- fired power station. step-up transformerpower stationconsumerstep-down transformeroutput at 1100  voutput at 240  v at 32  000  vtransmission output fig. 9.1  (a) suggest one possible way of storing surplus energy when the demand from the  consumers falls below the output of the power station.  ..   [1]  (b) state why electrical energy is transmitted at high voltage.   [1]  (c) a transmission cable of resistance r carries a current  i. write down a formula that gives  the power loss in the cable in terms of r and i.    [1]  (d) the step-up transformer has 1200 turns on the primary coil. using the values in fig. 9.1,  calculate the number of turns on its secondary coil. assume that the transformer has no energy losses.  number of turns = . [2]  (e) the input to the step-up transformer is 800 kw.   using the values in fig. 9.1, calculate the current in the transmission cables, assuming  that the transformer is 100% efficient.  current =   [3] [total: 8]",
            "16": "15 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use10 fig. 10.1 shows a circuit for a warning lamp that comes on when the external light intensity  falls below a pre-set level. + \u2013low voltage supply fig. 10.1  (a) on fig. 10.1, label   (i) with the letter x the component that detects the change in external light intensity,   (ii) with the letter y the lamp,   (iii) with the letter z the component that switches the lamp on and off. [3]  (b) describe how the circuit works as the external light intensity decreases and the lamp comes on.  .. .. .. .. .. ..   [3] [total: 6]",
            "17": "16 0625/31/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use11 fig. 11.1 shows the basic design of the tube of a cathode ray oscilloscope (cro). aheater filament bc d anodecathode rays fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, write the names of parts a, b, c and d in the boxes provided. [2]  (b) state the function of: part a,  .. ..part b.  ..   [2]  (c) a varying p.d. from a 12 v supply is connected to a cro, so that the waveform of the  supply is shown on the screen.   to which of the components in fig. 11.1   (i) is the 12 v supply connected,   [1]   (ii) is the time-base connected?   [1] [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible.  every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance  have unwittingly been  included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university  of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.",
            "18": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. spa (shw 00014 3/07) t50467/4 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *6625042981* physics 0625/32 paper 3 extended october/november 2008  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "19": "2 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/081 (a) a truck of mass 12 kg is rolling down a very slight incline as shown in fig. 1.1. 12 kg fig. 1.1   the truck travels at constant speed.   explain why, although the truck is on an incline, it nevertheless does not accelerate.  . ...  [1]  (b) the slope of the incline is increased. as a result of this, the truck now accelerates.   (i) explain why there is now acceleration. . ...  [1]   (ii) write down an equation linking the resultant force on the truck and the acceleration  of the truck. [1]   (iii) the truck\u2019s acceleration is 2.0 m/s 2.    calculate the resultant force on the truck.  resultant force =   [2]",
            "20": "3 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/08 (c) the friction force up the slope in (b)(iii) was 14.0 n.   by suitable lubrication, the friction force is now almost totally removed.   (i) calculate the new acceleration of the truck.  acceleration =   [3]   (ii) the lubricated truck travels down the incline, starting from rest at the top of the  incline. it takes 2.5 s to reach the bottom of the incline.    calculate its speed as it reaches the bottom of the incline.  speed =   [2]  (d) the incline is reduced to the original value and the lubricated truck is placed on it.   describe the motion of the truck when it is released.  .  . . ...  [1] [total: 11]",
            "21": "4 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/082 fig. 2.1 shows a circular metal disc of mass 200 g, freely pivoted at its centre. pivot fig. 2.1  masses of 100 g, 200 g, 300 g, 400 g, 500 g and 600 g are available, but only one of each  value. these may be hung with string from any of the holes. there are three small holes on each side of the centre, one at 4.0 cm from the pivot, one at 8.0 cm from the pivot and one at 12.0 cm from the pivot.  the apparatus is to be used to show that there is no net moment of force acting on a body when it is in equilibrium.  (a) on fig. 2.1, draw in two different value masses hanging from appropriate holes. the values of the masses should be chosen so that there is no net moment. alongside the masses chosen, write down their values. [2]  (b) explain how you would test that your chosen masses give no net moment to the disc.  . . . ...  [1]  (c) calculate the moments about the pivot due to the two masses chosen.  moment due to first mass =  . moment due to second mass =  . [2]",
            "22": "5 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/08 (d) calculate the force on the pivot when the two masses chosen are hanging from the  disc.  force =   [2] [total: 7]",
            "23": "6 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/083 (a) a submarine descends to a depth of 70 m below the surface of water.   the density of the water is 1050 kg/m3. atmospheric pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.   calculate   (i) the increase in pressure as it descends from the surface to a depth of 70 m,  increase in pressure =   [2]  (ii) the total pressure on the submarine at a depth of 70 m.  total pressure =   [1] (b) on another dive, the submarine experiences a total pressure of 6.5 \u00d7 10 5 pa. a hatch  cover on the submarine has an area of 2.5 m2.   calculate the force on the outside of the cover.  force =   [2]  (c) the submarine undergoes tests in fresh water of density 1000 kg/m3.   explain why the pressure on the submarine is less at the same depth.  . ...  [1] [total: 6]",
            "24": "7 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/084 the whole of a sealed, empty, dusty room is kept at a constant temperature of 15 \u00b0c. light shines into the room through a small outside window.  an observer points a tv camera with a magnifying lens into the room through a second small window, set in an inside wall at right angles to the outside wall.  dust particles in the room show up on the tv monitor screen as tiny specks of light.  (a) in the space below draw a diagram to show the motion of one of the specks of light over a short period of time. [1]  (b) after a period of one hour the specks are still observed, showing that the dust particles have not fallen to the floor.   explain why the dust particles have not fallen to the floor. y ou may draw a labelled  diagram to help your explanation.  .  . . ...  [2]  (c) on another day, the temperature of the room is only 5 \u00b0c. all other conditions are the  same and the specks of light are again observed.   suggest any differences that you would expect in the movement of the specks when the  temperature is 5 \u00b0c, compared to before.  . . ...  [1] [total: 4]",
            "25": "8 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/085 fig. 5.1 shows apparatus that could be used to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of ice. 40 w electric heaterfinely crushed ice glass funnel stand with clamps to hold funnel and heater fig. 5.1  (a) in order to obtain as accurate a result as possible, state why it is necessary to   (i) wait until water is dripping into the beaker at a constant rate before taking readings,  . ...  [1]   (ii) use finely crushed ice rather than large pieces. . ...  [1]  (b) the power of the heater and the time for which water is collected are known. write down  all the other readings that are needed to obtain a value for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.  . ...  [2]",
            "26": "9 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/08 (c) (i) using a 40 w heater, 250 g of water is heated for 3.0 minutes. the temperature rise  of the water is 5.9 \u00b0c.    use these values to calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of water.  specific heat capacity =   [3]   (ii) the accepted value for the specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 j/(g \u00b0c).    state one possible reason why the value you obtained in (c)(i) is different from  this. ...  [1] [total: 8]",
            "27": "10 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/086 fig. 6.1 shows a cross-section through a swimming pool. 40\u00b0 50\u00b0 waterair ab lamp fig. 6.1  (a) a ray of monochromatic light from a lamp at the bottom of the pool strikes the surface at  a, as shown.   (i) state what is meant by monochromatic light.  ...  [1]   (ii) the water in the swimming pool has a refractive index of 1.33.    using information from fig. 6.1, calculate the angle of refraction at a.  angle of refraction =   [3]  (iii) on fig. 6.1, draw the refracted ray. [1]  (b) the critical angle for the water-air surface is 48.8\u00b0.   another ray of monochromatic light from the lamp strikes the surface at b, as shown in  fig. 6.1.   (i) state and explain what happens to the ray after reaching b. . ...  [2]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, draw this ray. [1] [total: 8]",
            "28": "11 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/087 fig. 7.1 shows a scale drawing of plane waves approaching a gap in a barrier. direction of travel of plane waves barrier fig. 7.1  (a) on fig. 7.1, draw in the pattern of the waves after they have passed the gap. [3]  (b) the waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 2.5 cm and a speed of 20 cm/s.  calculate the frequency of the waves.  frequency =   [2]  (c) state the frequency of the diffracted waves. ...  [1] [total: 6]",
            "29": "12 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/088 fig. 8.1 shows a car battery being charged from a 200 v a.c. mains supply. 200  v~car battery fig. 8.1  (a) state the function of the diode.  . ...  [1]  (b) the average charging current is 2.0 a and the battery takes 12 hours to charge fully.   calculate the charge that the battery stores when fully charged.  charge stored . [2]  (c) the battery has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12 v and, when connected to a circuit,  supplies energy to the circuit components.   state what is meant by an electromotive force of 12 v.  .  . ...  [2]",
            "30": "13 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/08 (d) (i) in the space below, draw a circuit diagram to show how two 6.0 v lamps should be  connected to a 12 v battery so that both lamps glow with normal brightness. [1]   (ii) the power of each lamp is 8.0 w. calculate the current in the circuit.  current =  . [2]   (iii) calculate the energy used by the two lamps when both are lit for one hour.  energy =   [2] [total: 10]",
            "31": "14 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/089 fig. 9.1 is a block diagram of an electrical energy supply system, using the output of a coal- fired power station. step-up transformerpower stationconsumerstep-down transformeroutput at 1100  voutput at 240  v at 32  000  vtransmission output fig. 9.1  (a) suggest one possible way of storing surplus energy when the demand from the  consumers falls below the output of the power station.  . ...  [1]  (b) state why electrical energy is transmitted at high voltage. ...  [1]  (c) a transmission cable of resistance r carries a current  i. write down a formula that gives  the power loss in the cable in terms of r and i.  ...  [1]  (d) the step-up transformer has 1200 turns on the primary coil. using the values in fig. 9.1,  calculate the number of turns on its secondary coil. assume that the transformer has no energy losses.  number of turns =   [2]  (e) the input to the step-up transformer is 800 kw.   using the values in fig. 9.1, calculate the current in the transmission cables, assuming  that the transformer is 100% efficient.  current =   [3] [total: 8]",
            "32": "15 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/0810 fig. 10.1 shows a circuit for a warning lamp that comes on when the external light intensity  falls below a pre-set level. + \u2013low voltage supply fig. 10.1  (a) on fig.  10.1, label   (i) with the letter x the component that detects the change in e xter nal light intensity,   (ii) with the letter y the lamp,   (iii) with the letter z the component that switches the lamp on and off. [3]  (b) describe how the circuit works as the external light intensity decreases and the lamp comes on.  . . . . . . ...  [3] [total: 6]",
            "33": "16 \u00a9 ucles 2008for examiner\u2019s use 0625/32/o/n/0811 fig. 11.1 shows the basic design of the tube of a cathode ray oscilloscope (cro). aheater filament bc d anodecathode rays fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, write the names of parts a, b, c and d in the boxes provided. [2]  (b) state the function of: part a,  . .part b.  . ...  [2]  (c) a varying p.d. from a 12 v supply is connected to a cro, so that the waveform of the  supply is shown on the screen.   to which of the components in fig. 11.1   (i) is the 12 v supply connected, ...  [1]   (ii) is the time-base connected? ...  [1] [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_w08_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 20 printed pages.  ib08 11_0625_01/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2008  [turn over      *7002360314* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/01     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2008     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  1 two digital stopwatches x and y, which record in minutes and seconds, are used to time a race.    the readings of the two stopwatches, at the start and at the end of the race, are shown.    start 00:00end start end00:40 stopwatch x 01:30 02:20 stopwatch y     which statement about the time of the race is correct?  a both stopwatches record the same time interval.  b stopwatch x recorded 10  s longer than stopwatch y.  c stopwatch y recorded 10  s longer than stopwatch x.  d stopwatch y recorded 50  s longer than stopwatch x.     2 a tennis player hits a ball over the net.   p q r     in which position is the ball accelerating?  a p and q only  b p and r only  c q and r only  d p, q and r     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  3 a car travels at various speeds during a short journey.    the table shows the distances travelled and the time taken during each of four stages p, q, r and s.    stage p q r s  distance travelled  / km 1.8 3.6 2.7 2.7  time taken  / minutes 2 2 4 3    during which two stages is the car travelling at the same speed?  a p and q b p and s c q and r d r and s      4 what is the meaning of the weight  of an object?  a the density of the material from which it is made  b the force exerted on it by gravity  c the mass of the matter it contains  d the pressure it exerts on the floor      5 the weight of an object is to be found using the beam balance shown in the diagram.   ?object     the object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan, with the following results.    weights in the right hand pan effect  0.1  n, 0.1  n, 0.05  n, 0.02  n balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side  0.2  n, 0.1  n, 0.01  n balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side    what is the best estimate of the weight of the object?  a 0.27  n b 0.29  n c 0.31  n d 0.58  n     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  6 a student needs to find the density of a cubic block of wood.    which two pieces of apparatus should she use?  a balance and metre rule  b balance and thermometer c measuring cylinder and metre rule d measuring cylinder and thermometer     7 two identical measuring cylinders containing different liquids are placed on a simple balance.    they balance as shown.    liquid x volume = 200  cm3liquid y volume = 100  cm3     how does the density of x compare with the density of y?  a density of x = 21 \u00d7 density of y  b density of x = density of y  c density of x = 2 \u00d7 density of y  d density of x = 4 \u00d7 density of y     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  8 the diagrams show a uniform rod with its midpoint on a pivot.    two equal forces f are applied to the rod, as shown.    which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?    a ff pivotb f f pivot c ffpivotd ff pivot    9 a train is travelling along a horizontal track at constant speed. two of the forces acting on the  train are shown in the diagram.    force from engine 60 000  n friction 20 000  nforwards     a force of air resistance is also acting on the train to give it a resultant force of zero.    what is this air resistance force?  a 40 000  n backwards   b 80 000  n backwards  c 40 000  n forwards  d 80 000  n forwards     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  10 the diagram shows water stored behind a dam.    waterdam turbine generator water     the water flows to a turbine and turns a generator.    which sequence for the conversion of energy is correct?  a gravitational energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy  b kinetic energy \u2192 gravitational energy \u2192 electrical energy  c gravitational energy \u2192 electrical energy \u2192 kinetic energy  d kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy \u2192 gravitational energy     11 a rubber ball is dropped from a height of 2  m on to a table.    whilst in contact with the table, some of its energy is converted into internal energy.    what is the highest possible point the ball could reach after bouncing?    ball released from this height4 m 2 mheight 0a b c d table     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  12 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer used to measure atmospheric pressure.    p qmercury     which statement is correct?  a the pressure at p is atmospheric pressure.  b the pressure at p is nearly zero.  c the pressure at q is lower than the pressure at p.  d the pressure at q is nearly zero.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  13 a brick with rectangular sides rests on a table.    brick table     the brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.        how has this change affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?     force pressure  a unchanged unchanged  b increased unchanged  c unchanged increased  d increased increased      14 viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with brownian motion.    which line in the table is correct?     type of motion  of particles particles are  suspended in  a vibration a liquid or a gas  b vibration a solid, a liquid or a gas  c random a liquid or a gas  d random a solid, a liquid or a gas    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  15 the pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. the volume of the gas in the  cylinder is then slowly decreased.    which graph could show the change of pre ssure of the gas during this process?    pressure timea 0 0pressure timeb pressure timec pressure timed 0 00 0 0 0     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  16 equal masses of two different liquids are heated using the same heater. the graph shows how  the temperature of each liquid changes with time.    temperature timeliquid 1 liquid 2 0 0    what does the graph tell us about the liquids?  a liquid 1 has a higher melting point than liquid 2.  b liquid 1 has a higher boiling point than liquid 2.  c liquid 1 starts to melt sooner than liquid 2.  d liquid 1 starts to boil sooner than liquid 2.      17 an engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. the rod is just too big to fit into the hole  of the washer.    steel rodsteel washer     how can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod?  a cool the washer and put it over the rod.  b cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.  c heat the rod and then place it in the hole.  d heat the washer and then place it over the rod.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  18 a cup with a lid contains a hot drink.    lid hot drink     when the lid is removed, the rate of heat loss from the drink increases.    what causes this?  a convection only  b evaporation only  c both convection and evaporation  d neither convection nor evaporation      19 a cupboard is placed in front of a heater. air can move through a gap under the cupboard.    wall floorheatercupboard air moves through gap     which line in the table describes the temperature and the direction of the air that moves through  the gap?     air temperature air direction  a cool away from the heater  b cool towards the heater  c warm away from the heater  d warm towards the heater     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  20 waves in a tank pass from shallow to deep water.    the wavefront diagram is shown.    shallow waterdeep waterwavefront     which quantity increases as the waves enter the deep water?  a amplitude  b frequency c wave energy  d wavelength     21 the diagrams represent water waves in a tank.    which diagram represents waves that change speed?    d deeper watershallowe r watera barrierb barrierc barrier     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  22 which diagram shows the dispersion of white light?    ab white lightwhite light cd white lightwhite lightglass glassglass glass      23 in the diagram, the distance op is the focal length of the lens.    through which point will the ray shown pass, after refraction by the lens?    op b ca d focal length focal lengthlens       24 which word correctly completes the sentence below?    an echo is a sound wave which is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 by a large obstacle.  a absorbed  b dispersed  c reflected  d refracted     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  25 in an experiment to measure the speed of sound,  a student uses a stopwatch to find how long a  sound takes to travel from x to y. she does this six times.    sound travels from x to y xy    the table shows her results.     time  / s  first 0.5  second 0.7  third 0.6  fourth 0.4  fifth 0.9  sixth 0.5    what value for the time should be used to calculate the speed of sound?  a 0.4  s b 0.5  s c 0.6  s d 0.9  s      26 a student wishes to demagnetise a steel bar. he uses the apparatus shown.    electrical supplycoil steel bar    which type of electrical supply should the student use and what should he do with the steel bar?     supply what to do with the steel bar  a a.c. keep it inside the coil  b a.c. slowly remove it from the coil  c d.c. keep it inside the coil  d d.c. slowly remove it from the coil     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  27 two metal bars are held together. at least one of the bars is a magnet. the bars repel each  other.    what does this show about the bars and why?     what it shows why  a only one of the bars is  a magnet two magnets always attract each other  b only one of the bars is a magnet induced magnetism in the other bar makes it repel  c they are both magnets there must be like poles facing each other  d they are both magnets there must be opposite poles facing each other     28 when there is an electric current in a metal wire, what flows through the wire?  a atoms  b electrons  c neutrons  d protons    29 the table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters.    which heater has the least resistance?     voltage  / v current  / a  a 110 5.0  b 110 10.0  c 230 5.0  d 230 10.0    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  30 in the circuit below, x and y are identical 6  v lamps.    switch x y6 v     what happens when the switch is closed (the current is switched on)?  a x lights more brightly than y.  b y lights more brightly than x.  c x and y both light with full brightness.  d x and y both light with half brightness.      31 the diagram shows four different circuits.    3 \u03c9p 3 \u03c9 5 \u03c9r5 \u03c9q s 3 \u03c9 5 \u03c9    what is the order of increasing resistance of these circuits?     lowest  resistance  highest  resistance  a p q r s  b r s p q  c s p q r  d p r q s ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  32 a student makes four circuits.    in which circuit are both lamps protected by the fuse?    a b c d      33 a mains circuit can safely supply a current of 40  a.    a hairdryer takes 2  a. it is connected to the circuit by a lead which can safely carry up to 5  a.    which fuse is best to use in the plug fitted to the hairdryer lead?  a 1 a fuse b 3 a fuse c 10  a fuse d 50  a fuse     34 two different systems are used to transmit equal amounts of electrical power from one building to  another.    one system uses low voltage and the other uses high voltage. both systems use identical wires.    which line in the table is correct about which system wastes least energy and why?     least energy wasted why  a high voltage system the current in the wires is bigger  b high voltage system the current in the wires is smaller  c low voltage system the current in the wires is bigger  d low voltage system the current in the wires is smaller    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  35 when the electric current in wire xy is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the  wire.    current magnet magnet nsforcex y    if the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on  the wire act?  a downwards  b upwards  c to the left  d to the right      36 a cathode-ray beam passes through an electric field between charged parallel plates.    cathode-ray beam+ \u2013     in which direction is the beam deflected?  a towards the negative plate  b towards the positive plate  c into the page  d out of the page   ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08 [turn over  37 when the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.        why does this happen?  a the resistance of the lamp decreases.  b the resistance of the lamp increases.  c the resistance of the thermistor decreases.  d the resistance of the thermistor increases.     38 the diagram shows an experiment to monitor the radiation from a radioactive gas. the counter  readings are corrected for background radiation.    counter 000.0 radioactive gas     the table shows how the counter reading varies with time.    time  / seconds 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180  counter reading  /  counts per minute 140 105 82 61 44 36 27 20 15 10    what is the half-life of the gas?  a between 20 and 40 seconds  b between 40 and 60 seconds  c between 60 and 140 seconds  d between 140 and 180 seconds     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2008 0625/01/o/n/08  39 which material is commonly used as a lining for a box for storing radioactive samples?  a aluminium  b copper  c lead  d uranium     40 a uranium  u238 92 nucleus emits an \u03b1-particle.    what are the new nucleon and proton numbers?     nucleon number proton number  a 238 88  b 236 90  c 234 92  d 234 90       "
        },
        "0625_w08_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. sp (nf/cgw) t41976/4 \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *5545678956* physics 0625/02 paper 2  core october/november 2008  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/02/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20081 a boy is fishing in a river. nearby, a ferry-boat is taking passengers backwards and forwards  across the river. 12 6311 42 10 8 751 9                        12 6311 42 10 8 751 9  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  when he starts fishing one morning, the boy\u2019s wristwatch is as shown in fig. 1.1.  when he finishes his morning\u2019s fishing, the wristwatch is as shown in fig. 1.2.  (a) for how many minutes was the boy fishing?  number of minutes =    [3]  (b) it takes the ferry-boat 20 minutes to load up passengers, take them across the river,  load up with passengers at the other side, and return, to start all over again.   calculate how many journeys, across the river and back, the ferry made whilst the boy  was fishing.  number of journeys =    [2]  [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/02/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20082 the tank in fig. 2.1 measures 2.0  m \u00d7 1.5  m \u00d7 1.0  m. it is full of water. water  fig. 2.1  (a) calculate the volume of the tank.  volume =    [3]  (b) water has a density of 1000  kg/m3.   calculate the mass of water in the tank.  mass =    [3]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/02/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20083 a spring is hung from a beam, and a load is suspended from it.  fig. 3.1 shows the spring before and after suspending the load. before after  w x y z load  fig. 3.1  (a) using the letters on fig. 3.1, state which distance you would need to measure in order  to find the extension of the spring.  distance =    [1]  (b) an experimenter measures the extension of the spring with different loads, and obtains  the graph shown in fig. 3.2. 0 0 1 2 extension / cm load  / n 3  1 2 3 4 5  fig. 3.2   (i) when the experimenter hangs an unknown load on the spring, the extension     of the spring is 1.7  cm.    use fig. 3.2 to find the weight of the unknown load.  weight =    n  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/02/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008  (ii) state the value of the tension in the spring when this load is hanging from it.  tension =    [2]   (iii) the load is pulled down further.    state what happens to the tension in the spring.    [1]   (iv) after being pulled down, the load is released.    state what happens to the load immediately after it is released. ..   [1]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/02/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20084 fig. 4.1 represents the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, with an enlargement of the  visible light part of the spectrum. micro- wavesinfra -redvisible x-rays \u03b3 -rays visible  mn fig. 4.1  (a) two of the regions have not been named in fig. 4.1.   in the two boxes below the spectrum, write the names of these regions. [2]  (b) write \u201clong wavelength\u201d next to the long wavelength end of the electromagnetic spectrum. [1]  (c) state one use for the radiation of each of the following regions. microwaves  ..infra-red  ...\u03b3-rays  ...  [3]  (d) state the colour you would expect to find   (i) at end m of the visible spectrum, ..   (ii) at end n of the visible spectrum.  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/02/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20085 (a) make the following sentences about sound echoes correct by crossing out the incorrect  alternatives. an example has been given to help you.  large  (example)  an echo is caused when a sound wave hits a   small    obstacle.  thin  reflected   (i) an echo is a sound wave which is   refracted    by an obstacle. [1]  dispersed   (ii) an echo from a stationary obstacle has      a greater frequency than      the same frequency as      a smaller frequency than    the sound hitting the obstacle. [1]  (b) two students, a and b, are trying to use echoes to enable them to measure the speed  of sound. student a has two blocks of wood that make a loud sound when banged together. student b has a stopwatch. they stand 240  m from the school wall, as shown  in fig. 5.1. school  wall  240 mb         a fig. 5.1   student a bangs the blocks together and, at the same time, b starts the stopwatch.  b stops the stopwatch when he hears the echo. the watch then reads 1.6  s.   (i) how far did the sound travel during the 1.6  s?  m  [1]   (ii) calculate the speed of sound.   speed of sound =  .  m/s  [3]",
            "8": "8 0625/02/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008  (iii) the students expected that the value for the speed of sound would be closer to  330  m/s.    suggest two reasons that might explain why the students\u2019 value was different from what was expected. 1. ...2. .  [2]  [total: 8] 6 fig. 6.1 shows two mercury barometers standing side by side. the right-hand diagram is  incomplete. the space labelled x is a vacuum. x glass  tube  dish mercury  fig. 6.1  (a) on the left-hand barometer, carefully mark the distance that would have to be measured in order to find the value of the atmospheric pressure. [2]  (b) a small quantity of air is introduced into x.   (i) state what happens to the mercury level in the tube.    [1]   (ii) in terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).  ..    [2]  (c) the space above the mercury in the right-hand barometer is a vacuum.   on fig. 6.1, mark the level of the mercury surface in the tube. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/02/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (d) the left-hand tube now has air above the mercury; the right-hand tube has a vacuum.   complete the table below, using words chosen from the following list, to indicate the  effect of changing the external conditions. rises          falls          stays the same changeeffect on the level of the  mercury in the left-hand tubeeffect on the level of the  mercury in the right-hand tube atmospheric pressure rises temperature  rises  [4]  [total: 10] 7 this question requires the use of a ruler or other straight edge. fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light  striking a plane mirror. mirrorray of light a fig. 7.1  (a) on fig. 7.1,   (i) draw the normal to the mirror at a, [1]   (ii) draw the path of the reflected ray, [1]   (iii) mark and label the angle of incidence, i, [1]   (iv) mark and label the angle of reflection, r. [1]  (b) state the equation that links i and r.    [1]  (c) on fig. 7.1   (i) draw another mirror which is perpendicular to the one in the diagram and 2 cm to  the right of a, [1]   (ii) draw the path of the ray of light after reflection from this second mirror. [1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/02/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20088 (a) an iron rod is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in fig. 8.1. ns iron rod fig. 8.1   (i) on fig. 8.1, mark clearly the north pole and the south pole that are induced in the  iron rod. [1]   (ii) what happens to the magnet and the rod?  tick one box.  nothing   they attract   they repel  [1]  (b) a second bar magnet is now placed next to the iron rod, as shown in fig. 8.2. ns iron rodns fig. 8.2   (i) on fig. 8.2, mark clearly the magnetic poles induced in the iron rod. [1]   (ii) what happens to the iron rod and the second magnet?  tick one box.  nothing   they attract   they repel  [1]  (c) the iron rod is removed, leaving the two magnets, as shown in fig. 8.3. ns ns fig. 8.3   what happens to the two magnets?  tick one box.  nothing   they attract   they repel  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/02/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (d) the second magnet is removed and replaced by a charged plastic rod, as shown in  fig. 8.4. ns + charged plastic rod\u2013 fig. 8.4   what happens to the magnet and the plastic rod?  tick one box.  nothing   they attract   they repel  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/02/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20089 a toymaker wires a circuit in a toy house, so that a 6  v lamp can be switched on using either  switch 1 at the bottom of the stairs or switch 2 at the top of the stairs.  the circuit is shown in fig. 9.1. 6 v supply6 v lampswitch 2 switch 1x  a  b a  b y  fig. 9.1  (a) when switch 1 is in position a, what is the position of switch 2 so that the lamp is lit?    [1]  (b) when switch 2 is in position b, what is the position of switch 1 so that the lamp is lit?   [1]  (c) the lamp has a resistance of 4.0 \u03c9.   calculate the current in the circuit.  current =    [4]",
            "13": "13 0625/02/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (d) the toymaker decides he wants to have two 6  v lamps in the circuit with the 6 v supply.   which of the following means of connecting the lamps between x and y , shown in  fig. 9.2, is the best? give two reasons for your answer. connection 1xy connection 2xy fig. 9.2 which is best?  . reason 1  .reason 2  ...  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/02/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200810 the circuit in fig. 10.1 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to switch an electric motor  on and off. the relay coil has a much greater resistance than the potential divider. m  switch 6 v motor power supply  for motor  contacts  relay core  pivoted iron  armature  fig. 10.1  (a) the relay operates when there is a potential difference of 3 v across the coil.   on fig. 10.1, mark the position of the slider of the potential divider when the relay just  operates. [1]  (b) describe how the relay closes the contacts in the motor circuit.  .. .. .. ..   [3]  [total: 4]",
            "15": "15 0625/02/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 200811 fig. 11.1 shows a transformer being used to operate a 6  v lamp from a 240  v mains supply. a  b  iron 6 v lamp 8000 turns 240v  mains  fig. 11.1  (a) what name is given to the piece of iron that links the two coils?    [1]  (b) for the transformer to operate, must the mains supply be a.c., d.c., or doesn\u2019t it  matter?    [1]  (c) using the information on fig. 11.1, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  number of turns =    [3] (d) state why it would not be wise to connect a 1.5 v lamp between a and b.   [1]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/02/o/n/08 \u00a9 ucles 200812 the nucleus of one of the different nuclides of polonium can be represented by   the symbol  218 84po  (a) state the proton number of this nuclide.   [1]  (b) state the nucleon number of this nuclide.   [1]  (c) the nucleus decays according to the following equation. 218 84po  214 82pb + emitted particle   (i) state the proton number of the emitted particle. ..  [1]   (ii) state the nucleon number of the emitted particle. ..  [1]   (iii) name the emitted particle.  tick one box.  \u03b1-particle   \u03b2-particle   neutron   proton  [1]  [total: 5] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.for examiner\u2019s use"
        },
        "0625_w08_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. sp (sc/cgw) t73187/9 r \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *0518132754* physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test october/november 2008  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/05/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20081 in this experiment you will determine the density of the metal from which a load is made.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. metre rule h0spring stand bench0beaker water fig. 1.1  the distance h 0 is the height of the bottom of the spring from the bench.  (a) (i) record h 0 .   h 0 =  .   (ii) hang the load provided on the spring and record the new height h 1.   h 1 =  .   (iii) calculate the extension e1 of the spring using the equation   e1 = (h 0 \u2013 h 1).   e1 =  .[4]",
            "3": "3 0625/05/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (b) (i) carefully raise the beaker so that the load is completely under water. the load must  not touch the sides or the base of the beaker. record the new height h2.   h2 =    (ii) calculate the extension e2 of the spring using the equation   e2 = (h 0 \u2013 h 2).   e2 =  .[2]  (c) calculate the density /h9267 of the material of the load using the equation      e1      /h9267 = _______ /h11003k     ( e1 \u2013 e2)      where k = 1.00  g/cm3.   /h9267 =  .[2]  (d) if the load, made from the same material and with the same mass, had been just too long to be completely submerged in the water suggest whether   (i) the value obtained for e 2 would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in  part (b)(ii) above,  ..   (ii) the value calculated for /h9267 would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in  part (c) above. .. [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/05/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20082 in this experiment, you will investigate the potential difference across and the current in  wires.  (a) draw a circuit diagram of the circuit that has been set up for you. use standard circuit symbols. (the circuit includes two identical resistance wires ab and cd. use the standard symbol for a resistance to represent each of these wires). this is circuit 1. [3]  (b) (i) place the contact z on the resistance wire ab at a distance x from a, wherex = 0.500 m. switch on and, using the voltmeter, measure the p.d. v across the wire  between a and z. record the value of v in table 2.1 on page 5.   (ii) using the ammeter, measure the current  i in the circuit. record the value of i in  table 2.1.   (iii) take contact z away from the wire ab and switch off.   (iv) use one of the connecting wires provided to connect b to d. this is circuit 2. repeat steps (i) to (iii).   (v) disconnect the ammeter from b. disconnect a from c. disconnect b from d. connect b to c. connect the ammeter to d. this is circuit 3.   (vi) repeat steps (i) to (iii).",
            "5": "5 0625/05/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008table 2.1 circuit v/ i/ 1 23   (vii) complete the column headings in the table. [4]  (c) theory suggests that the value of potential difference v in circuit 3 will be half that in  circuit 1 or circuit 2.   (i) state whether or not, within the limits of experimental accuracy, your results support  this theory.  ..    justify your answer by reference to the results.  ..  ..   (ii) suggest one reason why the results may not support the theory.  ..  .. [3] [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/05/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20083 in this experiment you are to investigate the change in temperature of hot water as water at  room temperature is added.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. stirrer thermometer water  fig. 3.1    y ou are provided with 100 cm3 of hot water (labelled a) and a supply of water at room  temperature.  (a) measure and record the temperature  /h9258r of the water at room temperature.   /h9258r =  .[1]  (b) (i) measure and record in table 3.1 the temperature  /h9258 of the hot water.   (ii) pour 20 cm3 of the water at room temperature into the measuring cylinder and then  transfer this water to the beaker containing the hot water. stir, then measure and record in table 3.1 the temperature  /h9258 of the mixture of hot and room temperature  water. record in table 3.1 the total volume v of room temperature water added.   (iii) repeat step (ii) four times until you have added a total of 100 cm3 of room  temperature water.   (iv) complete the column headings in the table. table 3.1 v / /h9258 / 0      [ 3 ]",
            "7": "7 0625/05/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (c) use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature ( y-axis) against volume ( x-axis).  draw the best-fit curve.      [4]  (d) during this experiment some heat is lost from the hot water to the surroundings. also  the room temperature water is added at random times and in quite large volumes each time. suggest two improvements you could make to the procedure, that would show more accurately the pattern of temperature change of the hot water, due to addition of room temperature water alone, excluding other factors. 1.  . .2.  . . [2] [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/05/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20084 in this experiment, you are to determine the focal length of a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1 and fig. 4.2. screen object card  illuminated  object lens x y   fig. 4.1  (a) place the lens at a distance x = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. place the screen  close to the lens, then move it away from the lens until a sharply focused image is formed on the screen.   measure and record the distance y between the lens and the screen.   y =  .[1]  (b) calculate the focal length f using the equation     xy    f = ___ .     (x + y)   f =  .[2]  (c) repeat steps (a) and (b) with the lens at a distance x = 30.0 cm from the illuminated  object.   y =  .   f =  .[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/05/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (d) calculate the average value of f. show your working.   average value of f =   [2]   place the lens at a distance 25.0 cm from the illuminated object and place the mirror as  close to the lens as possible as shown in fig. 4.2. mirror object card  illuminated  object lens d   fig. 4.2   move the lens and the mirror, keeping the mirror close to the lens, towards the illuminated  object until a sharply focused image is formed on the object card next to the illuminated  object.  (e) measure and record the distance d between the illuminated object and the lens.   d =   [1]  (f) theory suggests that d is equal to the focal length f of the lens. state whether, within  the limits of experimental accuracy, your results support this theory.    [1]  (g) write down one similarity and one difference between the image and the object using  the apparatus as set up in part (e) when a sharply focused image is formed. one similarity  .. one difference . [2] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/05/o/n/08blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/05/o/n/08blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/05/o/n/08blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w08_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. sp (slm/cgw) t73783/6 r \u00a9 ucles 2008 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *2092097264* physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2008  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper.no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/06/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20081 an igcse student is determining the density of the metal from which a load is made.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1. metre rule0 spring s0 benchbeaker water fig. 1.1  (a) the student records the scale reading s0 on the metre rule at the bottom of the spring,  as shown in fig. 1.1.   s0 = 37.4 cm   describe briefly how the student can avoid a parallax error when taking the scale  reading.  .. ..[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/06/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (b) he then hangs the load on the spring as shown in fig. 1. 2. he records the new scale  reading s1. metre rule spring  s1 bench load0 fig. 1.2   s1 = 40.5 cm   (i) calculate the extension e1 of the spring using the equation e1 = (s1 \u2013 s0).  e1 =  ..   the student carefully raises the beaker under the load until it is completely under water.  the load does not touch the sides or base of the beaker. he records the new scale  reading s2.   s2 = 39.8 cm   (ii) calculate the extension e2 of the spring using the equation e2 = (s2 \u2013 s0).  e2 =  ..  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/06/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (c) calculate the density \u03c1 of the material of the load using the equation \u03c1 = e1 (e1 \u2013 e2) \u00d7 k   where k = 1.00 g/cm3.  \u03c1 = ...[3]  (d) a second load, made from the same material and with the same mass, is too long to be  completely submerged in the water.   suggest whether   (i) the value obtained for e2 would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in  part (b) (ii), ..   (ii) the value obtained for  \u03c1 would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in  part (c). ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/06/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20082 the igcse class is investigating the potential difference across, and the current in, wires.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 2.1. power source  s a  c b a  d v  fig. 2.1  (a) draw a circuit diagram of the apparatus. use standard circuit symbols.   (the circuit includes two identical resistance wires ab and cd. use the standard symbol  for a resistance to represent each of these wires.)   this circuit is called circuit 1.  [3]",
            "6": "6 0625/06/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 for circuit 1, the student places the contact s on the resistance wire ab at a distance of  0.500 m from a. he measures the p.d. v across the wire between a and s and the current i  in the circuit.   the student then records the measurements for circuits 2 and 3, shown in fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3. power source  s a  c b a  d v  circuit 2 fig. 2.2 power source  s a  c b a  d v  circuit 3 fig. 2.3",
            "7": "7 0625/06/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 the voltage v and current i for all three circuits are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 circuit v / i / 1 0.83 0.53 2 0.75 0.953 0.41 0.28  (b) complete the column headings in the table. [1]  (c) theory suggests that,   1. in circuits 1 and 2, the values of potential difference v will be equal,   2.  the value of potential difference v in circuit 3 will be half that in circuit 1 or circuit 2.   (i) state whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, the results support these  predictions.    justify your statement by reference to the results. prediction 1 ... ..prediction 2 ... .. [2]   (ii) suggest one reason, other than a change in temperature of the wires, why the  results may not support the theory.  .. .. [1]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/06/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20083 the igcse class is investigating the change in temperature of hot water as cold water is  added to the hot water.  a student measures and records the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water before adding any of the  cold water available.  he then pours 20 cm3 of the cold water into the beaker containing the hot water. he measures  and records the temperature \u03b8 of the mixture of hot and cold water.  he repeats this procedure four times until he has added a total of 100 cm3 of cold water.  the temperature readings are shown in table 3.1. v is the volume of cold water added. table 3.1 v / \u03b8 / 08 2 68 58504542  (a) (i) complete the column headings in the table.   (ii) enter the values for the volume of cold water added.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/06/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008 (b) use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against volume (x-axis).  draw the best-fit curve.  [4]  (c) during this experiment, some heat is lost from the hot water to the surroundings. also, each time the cold water is added, it is added in quite large volumes and at random times.   suggest two improvements you could make to the procedure to give a graph that more  accurately shows the pattern of temperature change of the hot water, due to addition of cold water alone. 1.  . ..2.  . ..[2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/06/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20084 an igcse student is determining the focal length of a converging lens.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. screen illuminated objectlensxy fig. 4.1  (a) the student places the lens at a distance x = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. she  places the screen close to the lens and then moves it away from the lens until a sharply focused image is formed on the screen. she measures and records the distance y  between the lens and the screen.   y = 37.1 cm   calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f =  xy (x + y)          .  f = ...[2]  (b) she then repeats the procedure with the lens at a distance x = 30.0 cm from the  illuminated object.   fig. 4.1 shows this position of the apparatus. it is a scale diagram.   (i) on fig. 4.1, measure the distance xs between the lens and the illuminated object.  also on fig. 4.1, measure the distance ys between the lens and the screen.  xs =  ..  ys =  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/06/o/n/08 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 2008  (ii) calculate the actual distance y between the lens and the screen.  y =  ..   (iii) calculate the focal length f using the new values of x and y.  f =  ..   (iv) calculate the average value of f. show your working.  average value of f =  ..  [7]  (c) the illuminated object has the shape shown below.   draw a diagram to show the appearance of the focused image in (b) on the screen.  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/06/o/n/08for examiner\u2019s use \u00a9 ucles 20085 (a) table 5.1 shows some measurements taken by three igcse students. the second  column shows the values recorded by the three students. for each quantity, underline the value most likely to be correct.    the first one is done for you. table 5.1 quantity measured recorded values the mass of a woodenmetre rule 0.112 kg 1.12 kg11.2 kg the weight of an empty 250 cm 3  glass beaker0.7 n7.0 n70 n the volume of one sheet of this  examination paper 0.6 cm 3 6.0 cm3 60 cm3 the time taken for one swing of a simple pendulum of length 0.5 m0.14 s 1.4 s14 s the pressure exerted on the ground  by a student standing on one foot0.4 n/cm 2 4.0 n/cm2 40 n/cm2  [4]  (b) (i) a student is to find the value of the resistance of a wire by experiment. potential difference v and current  i can be recorded. the resistance is then calculated using  the equation r = v/ i.    the student knows that an increase in temperature will affect the resistance of the wire. assuming that variations in room temperature will not have a significant effect, suggest two ways by which the student could minimise temperature increases in the wire during the experiment. 1.  .. 2.  ..[2]    (ii) name the circuit component that the student could use to control the current. .. [1]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        }
    },
    "2009": {
        "0625_s09_qp_1.pdf": {
            "1": "location entry codes       as part of cie\u2019s continual commitment to main taining best practice in assessment, cie uses  different variants of some question papers for our most popular assessments with large and  widespread candidature. the question papers are closely related and the relationships between  them have been thoroughly established using our assessment expertise.  all versions of the  paper give assessment of equal standard.     the content assessed by the examination papers and the type of questions is unchanged.   this change means that for this component there are now two variant question papers, mark  schemes and principal examiner\u2019s reports where previously there was only one.  for any individual country, it is intended that only one variant is used.  this document contains both  variants which will give all centres access to even more past examination ma terial than is usually  the case.      the diagram shows the relationship between the question papers, mark schemes and principal examiners\u2019 reports that are available.     question paper   mark scheme  principal examiner\u2019s  report  introduction     introduction   introduction   first variant question paper    first variant mark scheme  first variant principal  examiner\u2019s report    second variant question  paper  second variant mark  scheme    second variant principal  examiner\u2019s report      who can i contact for further information on these changes?  please direct any questions about this to cie\u2019s customer services team at: international@cie.org.uk              the titles for the variant items should correspond with the table above, so that at the top of the  first page of the relevant part of the document and on the header, it has the words:    \u2022 first variant question paper / mark scheme / principal examiner\u2019s report     or     \u2022 second variant question paper / mark scheme / principal examiner\u2019s report      as appropriate.    ",
            "2": "    this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib09 06_0625_01/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2009  [turn over      *7150187285* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2009     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "3": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  1 a metre rule is used to measure a length.    which reading is shown to the nearest millimetre?  a 0.7  m b 0.76  m c 0.761  m d 0.7614  m    2 the graph represents the movement of a body.   1 0 234510 8 642 0 time  / sspeed  m / s      how far has the body moved after 5  s?  a 2  m b 10  m c 25  m d 50  m     3 a car travels 100  km. the highest speed of the car is 90  km/h, and the lowest speed is  30  km/h. the journey takes two hours.    what is the average speed for the journey?  a 30  km  / h b 50  km  / h c 60  km  / h d 90  km  / h     4 which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the earth is correct?  a a balance can only be used to compare weights, not masses.  b heavy objects always have more mass than light ones.  c large objects always have more mass than small ones.  d mass is a force but weight is not.    ",
            "4": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09 [turn over  5 the table shows the weight in newtons of a10  kg mass on each of four planets.    planet weight of a 10  kg mass  / n  earth 100  jupiter 250  mercury 40  venus   90    the diagram shows a force meter (spring balance) being used.    18  n 2.0  kg     on which planet is the force meter (spring balance) being used?   a earth  b jupiter  c mercury  d venus      6 which items of apparatus are required to determine the density of a liquid?  a balance and measuring cylinder  b balance and thermometer  c metre rule and measuring cylinder  d metre rule and thermometer ",
            "5": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  7 which property of an object cannot  be changed by a force?  a its mass  b its motion  c its shape  d its size      8 a wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two boulders on opposite sides of a narrow stream. three  forces of size p, q and r act on the plank.    qp r plank      how are the sizes of the forces related?  a p + q = r  b p + r = q   c p = q = r   d p = q + r       9 electricity can be obtained from different energy resources.    which energy resource is used to obtain electricity without producing heat to boil water?  a coal  b geothermal c hydroelectric  d nuclear     ",
            "6": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09 [turn over  10 four people of equal weight on a beach use different routes to get to the top of a sea wall.    beach slipway pavement  sea wall     which person produces the greatest  average power?    person route time taken  a runs across the beach, then climbs the ladder 8  s  b walks across the beach, then climbs the ladder 16  s  c runs up the slipway 5  s  d walks up the slipway 10  s      11 the diagrams show two mercury barometers standing side by side. the right-hand diagram  shows a tube of bigger diameter, but the diagram is incomplete. there is a vacuum above the  mercury in both tubes.    which labelled position on the right-hand tube could show the mercury level in that tube?    mercury glass tubes dish  dishvacuum a  b  c  d      ",
            "7": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  12 a student fills two containers with water (density 1.0  g / cm3) and two with oil  (density 0.8  g / cm3),  as shown in the diagrams.    in which container is the pressure on the base the greatest?    water wateroil oilabcd      13 in an experiment, some of a substance changes from a liquid to a gas. the temperature of the  remaining liquid changes because of this.    what is the name for this change of state and how does the temperature change?     change of state how temperature changes  a condensation decreases  b condensation increases  c evaporation decreases  d evaporation increases    ",
            "8": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09 [turn over  14 a piston traps a certain mass of gas inside a cylinder. initially the piston is halfway along the  length of the cylinder.    the piston is now moved towards the open end of the cylinder. the temperature of the gas  remains constant.    initial position final position     how are the density and the pressure of the gas affected by moving the piston?     density pressure  a decreases decreases  b decreases unchanged  c increases decreases  d increases unchanged     15 the graph shows the change in temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.    which part of the graph shows when the substance is boiling?    temperature timeabcd      ",
            "9": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  16 four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal energy  (heat).    which block has the greatest thermal capacity?    a temperature rise = 2ocb temperature rise = 4occ temperature rise = 6ocd temperature rise = 8oc     17 a rod is made up of copper and wood joined together.    after the rod is heated at the join in the centre for about a minute, where would the lowest temperature be?    wood copperadbc       18 the diagram shows a fire.        why does the smoke rise above the fire?  a smoke evaporates more quickly at higher temperatures.  b smoke molecules diffuse more quickly at higher temperatures.  c the density of the air is lower at higher temperatures.  d the pressure of the air is greater at higher temperatures.   ",
            "10": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09 [turn over  19 the diagrams show water waves that move more slowly after passing into shallow water at the  broken line.    which diagram shows what happens to the waves?    a  fast slow  deep  water shallow  water b  fast slow  deep  water shallow water  c  fast slow  deep  water shallow  water d  fast slow  deep  water shallow water      ",
            "11": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  20 the diagrams show examples of wave motion.    1 2  waves on water waves in air  waves on a rope waves in a spring  (as shown) 3 4 ripple tank drum      which are longitudinal waves?  a 1 only  b 1, 2 and 4  c 2 and 3 only  d 2 and 4 only     ",
            "12": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09 [turn over  21 which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?    a  spectrum b spectrum c spectrumd spectrumwhite light white lightwhite light white light      22 the diagram shows the path of a ray of light passing through a principal focus f of a lens.    which broken line shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the lens?    f f\u2019lens a  b c d ray of  light       ",
            "13": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  23 a small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls.    seasea land sea small boat harbour harbourwallswaves     some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat.    what is the name for this effect?  a diffraction  b dispersion c reflection d refraction     24 an engineer standing at p sees an explosion at x.    z y x w vp danger -  blasting     after the explosion, she hears two bangs. on e bang is heard a fraction of a second after the  other. the second bang is an echo.    from which surface has the sound reflected to cause this echo?  a xy b pv c zy d wx     ",
            "14": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09 [turn over  25 the north pole of a bar magnet is placed next to end p of an iron bar pq, as shown. as a result,  magnetic poles are induced in the iron bar.    n s magnet q p  iron bar     what are the magnetic poles induced at p and at q?     magnetic pole at p magnetic pole at q  a north north  b north south  c south north  d south south     26 an electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals.    why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet?  a it forms a permanent magnet.  b it has a high density.  c it has a high thermal capacity.  d it is a good conductor of electricity.      27 which particle does  not experience a force due to an electric field?  a \u03b1-particle  b electron  c neutron d proton     ",
            "15": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  28 using the circuit shown, the current i is found for various voltages v. the temperature of the  resistor does not change.    a  i variable direct voltage v     which graph shows the results obtained?    i  va  i  vb  i  vc  i  vd  0 00 00 00 0      29 in the circuit shown, ammeter x reads 0.5  a.    4.0  v a a x y 3.0  \u03c95.0  \u03c9     what does ammeter y read?  a 0 b 0.5  a c 3.5  a d 4.0  a    ",
            "16": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09 [turn over  30 in the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical.    which circuit has the least  resistance?    a b c d      31 in the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.    which lamp breaks?    a c d  b      ",
            "17": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  32 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    y y electrical supplyx y appliance cable cablelive neutral     if a fuse is used, in which position in the circuit should it be connected, and if a circuit-breaker is  used, in which position should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y    33 the current in a lamp at full brightness is 0.25  a. the flexible cable to the lamp is designed for  currents up to 5.0  a, so it can safely carry the 0.25  a taken by the lamp.    which fuse should be inserted in the plug at the other end of the flexible cable?  a 0.2  a b 1.0  a c 5.0  a d 10.0  a    ",
            "18": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09 [turn over  34 a wire perpendicular to the page carries an electric current in a direction out of the page. there  are four compasses near the wire.    which compass shows the direction of the magnetic field caused by the current?    wire with current out of pagea c b  d       35 a transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. an alternating  voltage of 25.0  v is connected across the primary coil.    25.0  v primary coil 50 turnssecondary coil100 turns     what is the voltage across the secondary coil?  a 12.5  v b 50.0  v c 175  v d 200  v     36 in a cathode-ray tube, a hot tungsten cathode releases particles by thermionic emission.    what are these particles?  a \u03b1-particles  b electrons  c protons  d tungsten atoms     ",
            "19": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  37 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    cathode anode top y plate bottom y platescreenp     a student wants the cathode rays to make a spot at p on the screen.    which parts of the cathode-ray tube should be positive?  a anode and top y plate  b anode and bottom y plate c cathode and top y plate d cathode and bottom y plate      38 a radioactive nucleus contains 138 neutrons. the nucleus emits an \u03b1-particle.    how many neutrons are in the nucleus after it has emitted the \u03b1-particle?  a 134 b 136 c 138 d 139     ",
            "20": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/m/j/09  39 the graph shows the decay curve for one particular radioactive nuclide.    0 1 2 3 4 5 2500  2000 1500 1000  500  0 count rate counts  / min time  / days     what is the half-life of this nuclide?  a 1.0 day b 1.5 days c 2.0 days d 2.5 days      40 n16 7 is the symbol for a particular nuclide of nitrogen.  how many nucleons does this nuclide contain?  a 7 b 9 c 16 d 23     ",
            "21": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.     0625/11/m/j/09  blank page  ",
            "22": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib09 06_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2009  [turn over      *5002519 211* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2009     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "23": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  1 a car travels 100  km. the highest speed of the car is 90  km/h, and the lowest speed is  30  km/h. the journey takes two hours.    what is the average speed for the journey?  a 30  km  / h b 50  km  / h c 60  km  / h d 90  km  / h     2 the graph represents the movement of a body.   1 0 234510 8 642 0 time  / sspeed  m / s      how far has the body moved after 5  s?  a 2  m b 10  m c 25  m d 50  m     3 a metre rule is used to measure a length.   which reading is shown to the nearest millimetre?  a 0.7  m b 0.76  m c 0.761  m d 0.7614  m    ",
            "24": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09 [turn over  4 the table shows the weight in newtons of a10  kg mass on each of four planets.    planet weight of a 10  kg mass  / n  earth 100  jupiter 250  mercury 40  venus   90    the diagram shows a force meter (spring balance) being used.    18  n 2.0  kg     on which planet is the force meter (spring balance) being used?   a earth  b jupiter  c mercury  d venus      5 which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the earth is correct?  a a balance can only be used to compare weights, not masses.  b heavy objects always have more mass than light ones.  c large objects always have more mass than small ones.  d mass is a force but weight is not.    ",
            "25": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  6 a wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two boulders on opposite sides of a narrow stream. three  forces of size p, q and r act on the plank.    qp r plank      how are the sizes of the forces related?  a p + q = r  b p + r = q  c p = q = r  d p = q + r      7 which items of apparatus are required to determine the density of a liquid?  a balance and measuring cylinder  b balance and thermometer  c metre rule and measuring cylinder  d metre rule and thermometer      8 which property of an object cannot  be changed by a force?  a its mass  b its motion  c its shape  d its size    ",
            "26": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09 [turn over  9 four people of equal weight on a beach use different routes to get to the top of a sea wall.    beach slipway pavement  sea wall     which person produces the greatest  average power?    person route time taken  a runs across the beach, then climbs the ladder 8  s  b walks across the beach, then climbs the ladder 16  s  c runs up the slipway 5  s  d walks up the slipway 10  s     10 electricity can be obtained from different energy resources.    which energy resource is used to obtain electricity without producing heat to boil water?  a coal  b geothermal c hydroelectric d nuclear     11 a student fills two containers with water (density 1.0  g / cm3) and two with oil  (density 0.8  g / cm3),  as shown in the diagrams.    in which container is the pressure on the base the greatest?    water wateroil oilabcd  ",
            "27": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  12 the diagrams show two mercury barometers standing side by side. the right-hand diagram  shows a tube of bigger diameter, but the diagram is incomplete. there is a vacuum above the  mercury in both tubes.    which labelled position on the right-hand tube could show the mercury level in that tube?    mercury glass tubes dish  dishvacuum a  b  c  d       13 the graph shows the change in temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.    which part of the graph shows when the substance is boiling?    temperature timeabcd       14 in an experiment, some of a substance changes from a liquid to a gas. the temperature of the  remaining liquid changes because of this.    what is the name for this change of state and how does the temperature change?     change of state how temperature changes  a condensation decreases  b condensation increases  c evaporation decreases  d evaporation increases     ",
            "28": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09 [turn over  15 a piston traps a certain mass of gas inside a cylinder. initially the piston is halfway along the  length of the cylinder.    the piston is now moved towards the open end of the cylinder. the temperature of the gas  remains constant.    initial position final position     how are the density and the pressure of the gas affected by moving the piston?     density pressure  a decreases decreases  b decreases unchanged  c increases decreases  d increases unchanged     16 the diagram shows a fire.        why does the smoke rise above the fire?  a smoke evaporates more quickly at higher temperatures.  b smoke molecules diffuse more quickly at higher temperatures. c the density of the air is lower at higher temperatures.  d the pressure of the air is greater at higher temperatures.     ",
            "29": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  17 four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal energy  (heat).    which block has the greatest thermal capacity?    a temperature rise = 2ocb temperature rise = 4occ temperature rise = 6ocd temperature rise = 8oc     18 a rod is made up of copper and wood joined together.    after the rod is heated at the join in the centre for about a minute, where would the lowest temperature be?    wood copperadbc      ",
            "30": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09 [turn over  19 a small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls.    seasea land sea small boat harbour harbourwallswaves     some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat.    what is the name for this effect?  a diffraction  b dispersion c reflection d refraction     20 which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?    a  spectrum b spectrum c spectrumd spectrumwhite light white lightwhite light white light     ",
            "31": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  21 the diagram shows the path of a ray of light passing through the principal focus f of a lens.    which broken line shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the lens?    f f\u2019lens a  b c d ray of  light       22 the diagrams show water waves which move more slowly after passing into shallow water at the  broken line.    which diagram shows what happens to the waves?    a  fast slow  deep  water shallow  water b  fast slow  deep  water shallow water  c  fast slow  deep  water shallow  water d  fast slow  deep  water shallow water    ",
            "32": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09 [turn over  23 the diagrams show examples of wave motion.    1 2  waves on water waves in air  waves on a rope waves in a spring  (as shown) 3 4 ripple tank drum      which are longitudinal waves?  a 1 only  b 1, 2 and 4  c 2 and 3 only  d 2 and 4 only     ",
            "33": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  24 an engineer standing at p sees an explosion at x.    z y x w vp danger -  blasting     after the explosion, she hears two bangs. on e bang is heard a fraction of a second after the  other. the second bang is an echo.    from which surface has the sound reflected to cause this echo?  a xy b pv c zy d wx      25 an electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals.    why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet?  a it forms a permanent magnet.  b it has a high density.  c it has a high thermal capacity.  d it is a good conductor of electricity.      26 the north pole of a bar magnet is placed next to end p of an iron bar pq, as shown. as a result,  magnetic poles are induced in the iron bar.    n s magnet q p  iron bar     what are the magnetic poles induced at p and at q?     magnetic pole at p magnetic pole at q  a north north  b north south  c south north  d south south     ",
            "34": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09 [turn over  27 in the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.    which lamp breaks?    a c d  b       28 in the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical.    which circuit has the least  resistance?    a b c d     ",
            "35": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  29 using the circuit shown, the current i is found for various voltages v. the temperature of the  resistor does not change.    a  i variable direct voltage v     which graph shows the results obtained?    i  va  i  vb  i  vc  i  vd  0 00 00 00 0      30 in the circuit shown, ammeter x reads 0.5  a.    4.0  v a a x y 3.0  \u03c95.0  \u03c9     what does ammeter y read?  a 0 b 0.5  a c 3.5  a d 4.0  a    ",
            "36": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09 [turn over  31 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    y y electrical supplyx y appliance cable cablelive neutral     if a fuse is used, in which position in the circuit should it be connected, and if a circuit-breaker is  used, in which position should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y    32 the current in a lamp at full brightness is 0.25  a. the flexible cable to the lamp is designed for  currents up to 5.0  a, so it can safely carry the 0.25  a taken by the lamp.    which fuse should be inserted in the plug at the other end of the flexible cable?  a 0.2  a b 1.0  a c 5.0  a d 10.0  a     33 a transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. an alternating  voltage of 25.0  v is connected across the primary coil.    25.0  v primary coil 50 turnssecondary coil100 turns     what is the voltage across the secondary coil?  a 12.5  v b 50.0  v c 175  v d 200  v     ",
            "37": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  34 which particle does  not experience a force due to an electric field?  a \u03b1-particle  b electron  c neutron  d proton      35 a wire perpendicular to the page carries an electric current in a direction out of the page. there  are four compasses near the wire.    which compass shows the direction of the magnetic field caused by the current?    wire with current out of pagea c b  d       36 in a cathode-ray tube, a hot tungsten cathode releases particles by thermionic emission.    what are these particles?  a \u03b1-particles  b electrons  c protons  d tungsten atoms     ",
            "38": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09 [turn over  37 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    cathode anode top y plate bottom y platescreenp     a student wants the cathode rays to make a spot at p on the screen.    which parts of the cathode-ray tube should be positive?  a anode and top y plate  b anode and bottom y plate c cathode and top y plate d cathode and bottom y plate     38 the graph shows the decay curve for one particular radioactive nuclide.    0 1 2 3 4 5 2500  2000 1500 1000  500  0 count rate counts  / min time  / days     what is the half-life of this nuclide?  a 1.0 day b 1.5 days c 2.0 days d 2.5 days   ",
            "39": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/m/j/09  39 a radioactive nucleus contains 138 neutrons. the nucleus emits an \u03b1-particle.    how many neutrons are in the nucleus after it has emitted the \u03b1-particle?  a 134 b 136 c 138 d 139      40 n16 7 is the symbol for a particular nuclide of nitrogen.  how many nucleons does this nuclide contain?  a 7 b 9 c 16 d 23     ",
            "40": "19   0625/12/m/j/09  blank page",
            "41": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.     0625/12/m/j/09  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s09_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. spa shw 00151 2/08 t76303/3 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question orpart question. *4743961177* physics 0625/02 paper 2 core may/june 2009  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 a schoolteacher is concerned about the large number of vehicles passing along the busy  road next to the school. he decides to make a measurement to find the number of vehicles per minute. using the school clock he notes the following readings.  appearance of clock at beginning of investigation 12 63 9 5 71 11 4 82 10  appearance of clock at end of investigation 12 63 9 5 71 11 4 82 10  vehicles counted travelling left to right = 472  vehicles counted travelling right to left = 228  (a) calculate the time for which the schoolteacher was counting vehicles.  counting time =  .  min [1]  (b) calculate the total number of vehicles passing the school per minute.  vehicles per minute =    [3] [total: 4]",
            "3": "3 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 in the left-hand column below are four physical quantities that might be measured in the  physics laboratory. in the right-hand column are eight statements which might be definitions of the quantities in the left-hand column.  use a line to join each quantity with its definition. an example has been given to help you. there is only one definition for each quantity. work force of gravity on a body how big the body is mass power of a given forceweight \u00f7 mass weight amount of matter in a bodyforce \u00d7 distance moved density mass \u00f7 volumethe acceleration due to gravity [3] [total: 3]",
            "4": "4 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 the car in fig. 3.1 is on a level road. 500  n frictional forces2000  n force propelling car forwards fig. 3.1  (a) calculate the magnitude of the resultant force on the car.  resultant force =  . n [1]  (b) tick the box below that describes the motion of the car.    travels forward at constant speed     travels forward with increasing speed     travels forward with decreasing speed    travels backward at constant speed     travels backward with increasing speed    travels backward with decreasing speed    remains at rest  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the frictional forces increase to 2000 n when the car is moving. what happens to the  car?    [1]  (d) suggest two things that might have caused the frictional forces in (c) to increase. 1.  ..2.    [2] [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 shows a manometer, containing mercury, being used to monitor the pressure of a  gas supply. 300 250200150100 50 0mm from a gas supply mercury fig. 4.1  (a) using the scale on fig. 4.1, find the vertical difference between the two mercury levels.  difference =  .  mm [1]  (b) what is the value of the excess pressure of the gas supply, measured in millimetres of  mercury?  excess pressure =  ...  mm of mercury [1]  (c) the atmospheric pressure is 750 mm of mercury.   calculate the actual pressure of the gas supply.  actual pressure =  ...  mm of mercury [1]  (d) the gas pressure now decreases by 20 mm of mercury.   on fig. 4.1, mark the new positions of the two mercury levels. [2] [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a typical laboratory thermometer. \u2013 1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 0 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 5.1  (a) explain why the thermometer has   (i) thin walls on its bulb,  ..   [1]   (ii) thick walls on its stem, ..   [1]   (iii) a narrow capillary tube along which the liquid expands. ..   [1]  (b) suggest a liquid which the thermometer might contain.   [1]  (c) such a thermometer is calibrated at the ice point and the steam point. the scale is put  on between these two marks.   state the values of   (i) the ice point,  ..   (ii) the steam point.  . [2] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use6 fig. 6.1 shows the waveform of the note from a bell. a grid is given to help you take  measurements. time fig. 6.1  (a) (i) state what, if anything, is happening to the loudness of the note.    [1]   (ii) state how you deduced your answer to (a)(i).   [1]  (b) (i) state what, if anything, is happening to the frequency of the note.   [1]   (ii) state how you deduced your answer to (b)(i).   [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) how many oscillations does it take for the amplitude of the wave to decrease to half  its initial value?    [1]   (ii) the wave has a frequency of 300 hz.    1. what is meant by a frequency of 300 hz   ?  ... .  [1]    2. how long does 1 cycle of the wave take?  .  [1]    3. how long does it take for the amplitude to decrease to half its initial value?  .  [2]  (d) a student says that the sound waves, which travelled through the air from the bell, were  longitudinal waves, and that the air molecules moved repeatedly closer together and then further apart.   (i) is the student correct in saying that the sound waves are longitudinal?  .     (ii) is the student correct about the movement of the air molecules?   .   (iii) the student gives light as another example of longitudinal waves.    is this correct?   . [2] [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use7 two apartment blocks are one each side of a road, as shown in fig. 7.1. a beam of light from  a police helicopter is hitting the top window h of the left-hand apartment block. h gfedcbazyxwvuts beam of light apartment blockapartmentblock fig. 7.1  (a) (i) on fig. 7.1,    1. draw the normal at the point where the beam hits window h, [1]    2. label the angle of incidence of the beam of light on window h. [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) state the equation that links the angle of incidence with the angle of reflection.   .  [1]   (iii) which window does the beam hit next, after reflection from h?   .  [1]  (iv) which other windows, if any, receive light from the helicopter?   .  [1] (b) fig. 7.2 shows another example of reflection. the drawing is incomplete. mirror card fig. 7.2   the horizontal card with the letter p on it is being reflected in the vertical mirror.  on fig. 7.2, draw the reflection of the letter p . [2] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) four rods are shown in fig. 8.1. plastic rod iron rod wooden rod brass rod fig. 8.1   state which of these could be held in the hand at one end and be   (i) magnetised by stroking it with a magnet,   .  [1]  (ii) charged by stroking it with a dry cloth.   .  [1] (b) magnets a and b in fig. 8.2 are repelling each other. magnet an magnet b fig. 8.2   the north pole has been labelled on magnet a.  on fig. 8.2, label the other three poles. [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) charged rods c and d in fig. 8.3 are attracting each other. rod c+ rod d fig. 8.3   on fig. 8.3, show the charge on rod d. [1]  (d) fig. 8.4 shows a plotting compass with its needle pointing north. n fig. 8.4   a brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction. a plotting compass is put at each  end of the brass rod, as shown in fig. 8.5. n brass rod plotting compass fig. 8.5   on fig. 8.5, mark the position of the pointer on each of the two plotting compasses. [2] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit. a6 v reading 50 ma r fig. 9.1  (a) what is the value of   (i) the e.m.f. of the battery,   .  [1]   (ii) the current in the circuit?   .  [1] (b) calculate the resistance r of the resistor.  r =    [3]  (c) state how the circuit could be changed to   (i) halve the current in the circuit,   [2]   (ii) reduce the current to zero.   [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) a student wishes to include a switch in the circuit, but mistakenly connects it as shown  in fig. 9.2. a6 v student\u2019s incorrect connection r fig. 9.2   (i) comment on the size of the current in the circuit if the student closes the switch.    [1]   (ii) what effect would this current have on the circuit? .. ..   [2] [total: 11]",
            "16": "16 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use10 the apparatus in fig. 10.1 is called a force-on-conductor balance. when there is an electric  current i as shown in xy , there is a force on xy that pulls it down. this force is measured by  putting weights in the pan until xy is brought back to its original position. n scurrent incurrent out xypan i fig. 10.1  (a) state what would happen if the current direction were from y to x.    [1]  (b) an experimenter uses the balance to determine the force f on xy for different currents i.  his results are given below. i / a 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 f / n 0 0.012 0.023 0.035 0.047   (i) on the grid of fig. 10.2,    1. mark suitable scales to plot a graph of f / n against i / a for these values, [2]    2. plot the points on your grid, [2]    3. draw the best straight line through your points. [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0 0 i / af / n fig. 10.2   (ii) from your graph, find the force on xy when the current is 1.6 a.  force =  . n [1]  (c) name one common device that uses the effect demonstrated by the force-on-conductor  balance.    [1] [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use11 fig. 11.1 represents a cathode-ray tube containing a number of different parts. there are  empty boxes connected to four of the parts. these boxes are for some of the answers to this question. not all of the boxes will be used. heater filament anode gridcathode rays fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, write the word cathode in the appropriate box. [1]  (b) one part shown in fig. 11.1 is used to deflect the cathode rays up and down.   write up and down in the appropriate box. [1]  (c) one part glows when the cathode rays strike it.   write glows in the appropriate box. [1]  (d) on fig. 11.1, draw a battery connected so that the cathode is heated. [1]  (e) name the particles that make up cathode rays.    [1]  (f) what fills the rest of the space in the cathode-ray tube? tick one box.    air      alpha particles     hydrogen    steam     vacuum  [1] [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/02/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use12 the following table includes some of the properties of alpha, beta and gamma radiations.  complete the table by filling in the missing properties. alpha beta gamma nature2 protons +  2 neutrons[2]  approximate mass 1 unit [2] charge positive [2] ability to penetrate  solidsvery penetrating [2] [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/02/m/j/09permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s09_qp_3.pdf": {
            "1": "location entry codes       as part of cie\u2019s continual commitment to main taining best practice in assessment, cie uses  different variants of some question papers for our most popular assessments with large and  widespread candidature. the question papers are closely related and the relationships between  them have been thoroughly established using our assessment expertise.  all versions of the  paper give assessment of equal standard.     the content assessed by the examination papers and the type of questions is unchanged.   this change means that for this component there are now two variant question papers, mark  schemes and principal examiner\u2019s reports where previously there was only one.  for any individual country, it is intended that only one variant is used.  this document contains both  variants which will give all centres access to even more past examination ma terial than is usually  the case.      the diagram shows the relationship between the question papers, mark schemes and principal examiners\u2019 reports that are available.     question paper   mark scheme  principal examiner\u2019s  report  introduction     introduction   introduction   first variant question paper    first variant mark scheme  first variant principal  examiner\u2019s report    second variant question  paper  second variant mark  scheme    second variant principal  examiner\u2019s report      who can i contact for further information on these changes?  please direct any questions about this to cie\u2019s customer services team at: international@cie.org.uk              the titles for the variant items should correspond with the table above, so that at the top of the  first page of the relevant part of the document and on the header, it has the words:    \u2022 first variant question paper / mark scheme / principal examiner\u2019s report     or     \u2022 second variant question paper / mark scheme / principal examiner\u2019s report      as appropriate.    ",
            "2": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. spa shw 00151 2/08 t76318/3 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *7761601243* physics 0625/31 paper 3 extended may/june 2009  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "3": "2 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 an engineering machine has a piston which is going up and down approximately 75 times  per minute.  describe carefully how a stopwatch may be used to find accurately the time for one up-and-down cycle of the piston.  . . . . . . . . ...  [4] [total: 4]",
            "4": "3 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 (a) a certain volume of water at room temperature and the same volume of ice in a freezer  are each heated through the same temperature rise.   which of them will have the greater expansion, and why? which?  . why?  ..  [1]  (b) for strength, concrete pillars are usually reinforced with metal rods, which are embedded  in the concrete before it sets.   the list below shows how much a length of 1 m of each material expands when the  temperature rises by 1 \u00b0c.     aluminium 0.03 mm     concrete 0.01 mm     steel 0.01 mm   use this information to decide which metal should be used to reinforce concrete, why it  is suitable, and why the other metal is not suitable. which metal should be used? ..why is it suitable?  why is the other metal unsuitable?  ..   [3] [total: 4]",
            "5": "4 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 (a) fig. 3.1 shows a skier descending a hillside. fig. 3.2 shows the speed/time graph of his  motion. speed m / s6 4 2 2 00468 time  / s  fig. 3.1 fig. 3.2   (i) how can you tell that the acceleration of the skier is constant during the 8 s shown  on the graph?    [1]   (ii) calculate the acceleration of the skier.  acceleration =    [2]  (b) another skier starts from rest at the top of the slope. as his speed increases the friction  force on the skier increases.   (i) state the effect of this increasing friction force on the acceleration.    [1]   (ii) eventually the speed of the skier becomes constant.    what can be said about the friction force when the speed is constant?   [2]",
            "6": "5 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) 1. on the axes of fig. 3.3, sketch a possible speed/time graph for the motion of  the second skier. 0 0 timespeed fig. 3.3    2. on your graph, mark with the letter a a region where the acceleration is not  constant. mark with the letter b the region where the speed is constant. [4] [total: 10]",
            "7": "6 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) in an accident, a truck goes off the road and into a ditch. two breakdown vehicles a and  b are used to pull the truck out of the ditch, as shown in fig. 4.1. ditchroad breakdown vehiclesa b45\u00b0 fig. 4.1",
            "8": "7 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  at one point in the rescue operation, breakdown vehicle a is exerting a force of 4000 n  and breakdown vehicle b is exerting a force of 2000 n.   (i) using a scale of 1 cm = 500 n, make a scale drawing to show the resultant force on  the truck. [4]   (ii) use your diagram to find the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the truck.  magnitude of resultant force =  ..  direction of resultant force =  ...  to direction of road [2] (b) (i) state why the resultant force is an example of a vector quantity.   [1]   (ii) give an example of a vector quantity that is not a force.   [1] [total: 8]",
            "9": "8 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use5 a wind turbine has blades, which sweep out an area of diameter 25 m. 25 m blades fig. 5.1  (a) the wind is blowing directly towards the wind turbine at a speed of 12 m / s. at this wind  speed, 7500 kg of air passes every second through the circular area swept out by the blades.   (i) calculate the kinetic energy of the air travelling at 12 m / s, which passes through the circular area in 1 second.  kinetic energy =    [3]   (ii) the turbine converts 10% of the kinetic energy of the wind to electrical energy.    calculate the electrical power output of the turbine. state any equation that you  use.  power =    [3]",
            "10": "9 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) on another day, the wind speed is half that in (a).   (i) calculate the mass of air passing through the circular area per second on this day.  mass =    [1]   (ii) calculate the power output of the wind turbine on the second day as a fraction of  that on the first day.  fraction =    [3] [total: 10]",
            "11": "10 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) a man squeezes a pin between his thumb and finger, as shown in fig. 6.1. finger pinheadpinthumb fig. 6.1   the finger exerts a force of 84 n on the pinhead.   the pinhead has an area of 6.0 \u00d7 10\u20135 m2.   (i) calculate the pressure exerted by the finger on the pinhead.  pressure =    [2]  (ii) state the value of the force exerted by the pin on the thumb.   .  [1]  (iii) explain why the pin causes more pain in the man\u2019s thumb than in his finger. ..   [2]",
            "12": "11 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the density of the water in a swimming pool is 1000 kg / m3. the pool is 3 m deep.   (i) calculate the pressure of the water at the bottom of the pool.  pressure =    [2]   (ii) another pool has the same depth of water, but has twice the area.    state the pressure of the water at the bottom of this pool.  pressure =    [1] [total: 8]",
            "13": "12 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) some water is poured onto a plastic table-top, forming a puddle. the same volume of  water is poured into a plastic dish, which is placed alongside the puddle. this is illustrated in fig. 7.1. water in puddlewater in dish fig. 7.1   both lots of water begin to evaporate.   (i) in terms of the behaviour of molecules, describe what happens during the process  of evaporation.  .. .. ..   [2]   (ii) explain why the puddle dries out more rapidly than the water in the dish. .. .. ..   [2]   (iii) state two changes that would make both lots of water evaporate more rapidly.1. ...2. .  [2]",
            "14": "13 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) in a place where refrigeration is not possible, a person attempts to keep a bottle of milk  cool by using the procedure illustrated in fig. 7.2. bottledamp cloth milk bowlwater fig. 7.2   explain in terms of molecules why this procedure would be successful.  ..  ..   [3] [total: 9]",
            "15": "14 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use8 in an optics lesson, a physics student traces the paths of three rays of light near the boundary  between medium a and air. the student uses a protractor to measure the various angles.  fig. 8.1 illustrates the three measurements. 180 01020304050607080 100110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180170160150140130120110100908070 60 50 40 30 20 10 0air medium a ray 1 180 01020304050607080 100110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180170160150140130120110100908070 60 50 40 30 20 10 0air medium a ray 2 180 01020304050607080 100110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180170160150140130120110100908070 60 50 40 30 20 10 0air medium a ray 3 fig. 8.1",
            "16": "15 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) state which is the optically denser medium, a or air, and how you can tell this.  ..   [1]  (b) state in which medium the light travels the faster, and how you know this. ..   [1]  (c) state the critical angle of medium a.   ...[1] (d) state the full name for what is happening to ray 3.   ...[1] (e) the refractive index of medium a is 1.49.   calculate the value of the angle of refraction of ray 1, showing all your working.  angle of refraction =    [2]  (f) the speed of light in air is 3.0 \u00d7 10 8 m / s.   calculate the speed of light in medium a, showing all your working.  speed of light =    [2] [total: 8]",
            "17": "16 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows an a.c. supply connected in series to a diode and a resistor. fig. 9.1   on the axes of fig. 9.2, draw a graph showing the variation of the current in the  resistor. [1] current time0 fig. 9.2",
            "18": "17 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 9.3 shows four attempts, a, b, c and d, to connect a circuit known as a bridge  rectifier.   the circuit is connected to a 12 v a.c. supply. red blacka red black b red blackc red blackd12 v1 2 v 12 v1 2 v fig. 9.3   (i) in which circuit will the direction of the conventional current in the resistor always  be from red to black?    .  [1]   (ii) on the circuit you chose in (b)(i), clearly indicate with arrows the path of the  conventional current in the circuit when the upper terminal of the a.c. supply is positive with respect to the lower terminal. [2] [total: 4]",
            "19": "18 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use10 the circuit shown in fig. 10.1 uses a 12 v battery. 12 v 16 /afii9821 8 /afii9821sa fig. 10.1  (a) switch s is open, as shown in fig. 10.1.   state the value of   (i) the reading on the ammeter,  reading =    [1]  (ii) the potential difference (p.d.) across s.  p.d. =    [1] (b) switch s is now closed.   (i) calculate the current in the ammeter.  current =    [2]  (ii) calculate the p.d. across the 8  /afii9821 resistor.  p.d. =    [2]",
            "20": "19 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the two resistors are now connected in parallel.   calculate the new reading on the ammeter when s is closed, stating clearly any  equations that you use.  reading =    [4] [total: 10] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "21": "20 0625/31/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible.  every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance  have unwittingly been  included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university  of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 a beam of ionising radiation, containing /afii9825-particles, /afii9826-particles and /afii9828-rays, is travelling left to  right across the page. a magnetic field acts perpendicularly into the page.  (a) in the table below, tick the boxes that describe the deflection of each of the types of  radiation as it passes through the magnetic field. one line has been completed, to help you. not  deflecteddeflected towards top of pagedeflected towards bottom of pagelarge deflectionsmall deflection /afii9825-particles \u2713\u2713 /afii9826-particles /afii9828-rays [3]  (b) an electric field is now applied, in the same region as the magnetic field and at the same time as the magnetic field.   what is the direction of the electric field in order to cancel out the deflection of the  /afii9825-particles?    [2] [total: 5]",
            "22": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. spa shw 00151 2/08 t76321/3 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *2309904546* physics 0625/32 paper 3 extended may/june 2009  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "23": "2 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 a laboratory technician has ten pieces of plastic, all cut from the same thin sheet.  the technician wishes to find the thickness of a piece of plastic as accurately as possible.  (a) name the instrument that should be used.   .  [1]  (b) describe how the instrument should be used to find the thickness. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..   [3] [total: 4]",
            "24": "3 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 (a) a certain volume of water at room temperature and the same volume of ice in a freezer  are each heated through the same temperature rise.   which of them will have the greater expansion, and why? which?  . why?  ..  [1]  (b) for strength, concrete pillars are usually reinforced with metal rods, which are embedded  in the concrete before it sets.   the list below shows how much a length of 1 m of each material expands when the  temperature rises by 1 \u00b0c.     aluminium 0.03 mm     concrete 0.01 mm     steel 0.01 mm   use this information to decide which metal should be used to reinforce concrete, why it  is suitable, and why the other metal is not suitable. which metal should be used? ..why is it suitable?  why is the other metal unsuitable?  ..   [3] [total: 4]",
            "25": "4 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 a free-fall parachutist jumps out of an aeroplane, but doesn\u2019t open his parachute until after  some time has elapsed.  fig. 3.1 shows the graph of his speed during the fall. ab cd 00speed time fig. 3.1  (a) what is the value of the acceleration of the parachutist immediately after he has jumped from the aeroplane?   .  [1]  (b) how can you tell that the acceleration decreases until point a on the graph is reached? ..   [1]  (c) state why the acceleration of the parachutist decreases until point a on the graph. .. .. ..   [2]  (d) consider section ab of the graph.   (i) state what is happening to the parachutist\u2019s speed in this section.   [1]   (ii) what can be said about the forces on the parachutist during this section? ..   [1]",
            "26": "5 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (e) at which point did the parachutist open his parachute?   .  [1]  (f) explain why the speed decreases from b to c. .. ..   [2] [total: 9]",
            "27": "6 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) in an accident, a truck goes off the road and into a ditch. two breakdown vehicles a and  b are used to pull the truck out of the ditch, as shown in fig. 4.1. ditchroad breakdown vehiclesa b45\u00b0 fig. 4.1",
            "28": "7 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  at one point in the rescue operation, breakdown vehicle a is exerting a force of 4000 n  and breakdown vehicle b is exerting a force of 2000 n.   (i) using a scale of 1 cm = 500 n, make a scale drawing to show the resultant force on  the truck. [4]   (ii) use your diagram to find the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the truck.  magnitude of resultant force =  ..  direction of resultant force =  ...  to direction of road [2] (b) (i) state why the resultant force is an example of a vector quantity.   [1]   (ii) give an example of a vector quantity that is not a force.   [1] [total: 8]",
            "29": "8 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use5 a wind turbine has blades, which sweep out an area of diameter 25 m. 25 m blades fig. 5.1  (a) the wind is blowing directly towards the wind turbine at a speed of 12 m / s. at this wind  speed, 7500 kg of air passes every second through the circular area swept out by the blades.   (i) calculate the kinetic energy of the air travelling at 12 m / s, which passes through the circular area in 1 second.  kinetic energy =    [3]   (ii) the turbine converts 10% of the kinetic energy of the wind to electrical energy.    calculate the electrical power output of the turbine. state any equation that you  use.  power =    [3]",
            "30": "9 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) on another day, the wind speed is half that in (a).   (i) calculate the mass of air passing through the circular area per second on this day.  mass =    [1]   (ii) calculate the power output of the wind turbine on the second day as a fraction of  that on the first day.  fraction =    [3] [total: 10]",
            "31": "10 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) a man squeezes a pin between his thumb and finger, as shown in fig. 6.1. finger pinheadpinthumb fig. 6.1   the finger exerts a force of 84 n on the pinhead.   the pinhead has an area of 6.0 \u00d7 10\u20135 m2.   (i) calculate the pressure exerted by the finger on the pinhead.  pressure =    [2]  (ii) state the value of the force exerted by the pin on the thumb.   .  [1]  (iii) explain why the pin causes more pain in the man\u2019s thumb than in his finger. ..   [2]",
            "32": "11 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the density of the water in a swimming pool is 1000 kg / m3. the pool is 3 m deep.   (i) calculate the pressure of the water at the bottom of the pool.  pressure =    [2]   (ii) another pool has the same depth of water but has twice the area.    state the pressure of the water at the bottom of this pool.  pressure =    [1] [total: 8]",
            "33": "12 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) some water is poured onto a plastic table-top, forming a puddle. the same volume of  water is poured into a plastic dish, which is placed alongside the puddle. this is illustrated in fig. 7.1. water in puddlewater in dish fig. 7.1   both lots of water begin to evaporate.   (i) in terms of the behaviour of molecules, describe what happens during the process  of evaporation.  .. .. ..   [2]   (ii) explain why the puddle dries out more rapidly than the water in the dish. .. .. ..   [2]   (iii) state two changes that would make both lots of water evaporate more rapidly.1. ...2. .  [2]",
            "34": "13 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) in a place where refrigeration is not possible, a person attempts to keep a bottle of milk  cool by using the procedure illustrated in fig. 7.2. bottledamp cloth milk bowlwater fig. 7.2   explain in terms of molecules why this procedure would be successful.  ..  ..   [3] [total: 9]",
            "35": "14 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use8 in an optics lesson, a physics student traces the paths of three rays of light near the boundary  between medium a and air. the student uses a protractor to measure the various angles.  fig. 8.1 illustrates the three measurements. 180 01020304050607080 100110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180170160150140130120110100908070 60 50 40 30 20 10 0air medium a ray 1 180 01020304050607080 100110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180170160150140130120110100908070 60 50 40 30 20 10 0air medium a ray 2 180 01020304050607080 100110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180170160150140130120110100908070 60 50 40 30 20 10 0air medium a ray 3 fig. 8.1",
            "36": "15 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) state which is the optically denser medium, a or air, and how you can tell this.  ..   [1]  (b) state in which medium the light travels the faster, and how you know this. ..   [1]  (c) state the critical angle of medium a.   ...[1] (d) state the full name for what is happening to ray 3.   ...[1] (e) the refractive index of medium a is 1.49.   calculate the value of the angle of refraction of ray 1, showing all your working.  angle of refraction =    [2]  (f) the speed of light in air is 3.0 \u00d7 10 8 m / s.   calculate the speed of light in medium a, showing all your working.  speed of light =    [2] [total: 8]",
            "37": "16 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows an a.c. supply connected in series to a diode and a resistor. fig. 9.1   on the axes of fig. 9.2, draw a graph showing the variation of the current in the  resistor. [1] current time0 fig. 9.2",
            "38": "17 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 9.3 shows four attempts, a, b, c and d, to connect a circuit known as a bridge  rectifier.   the circuit is connected to a 12 v a.c. supply. red blacka red black b red blackc red blackd12 v1 2 v 12 v1 2 v fig. 9.3   (i) in which circuit will the direction of the conventional current in the resistor always  be from red to black?    .  [1]   (ii) on the circuit you chose in (b)(i), clearly indicate with arrows the path of the  conventional current through the circuit when the upper terminal of the a.c. supply is positive with respect to the lower terminal. [2] [total: 4]",
            "39": "18 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use10 the circuit shown in fig. 10.1 uses a 12 v battery. a and b are identical lamps, each designed  to work from a 6 v supply. 12 v a 18 \u03c9 18 \u03c9s b v fig. 10.1  (a) switch s is open, as shown in fig. 10.1.   (i) state the value of    1. the potential difference (p.d.) across s,  p.d. =    [1]   2. the reading on the voltmeter. reading =    [1]  (ii) comment on the brightness of the two lamps.   [1]  (b) switch s is now closed.   (i) state the new reading on the voltmeter.  new reading =    [1]  (ii) comment on the brightness of the two lamps.   [1]   (iii) under these conditions, each lamp has a resistance of 18  /afii9821.    calculate the current in each lamp.  current =    [3]",
            "40": "19 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) with switch s open, lamp b is connected in parallel with lamp a. with no current, each  lamp has a resistance of 1.8 /afii9821.   (i) calculate the value of the combined resistance of a and b.  combined resistance =    [2]   (ii) state why it would not be wise to close s when a and b are connected in parallel. ..   [1] [total: 11] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "41": "20 0625/32/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use11 a beam of ionising radiation, containing /afii9825-particles, /afii9826-particles and /afii9828-rays, is travelling left to  right across the page. a magnetic field acts perpendicularly into the page.  (a) in the table below, tick the boxes which describe the deflection of each of the types of  radiation as it passes through the magnetic field. one line has been completed, to help you. not  deflecteddeflected towards top of pagedeflected towards bottom of pagelarge deflectionsmall deflection /afii9825-particles \u2713\u2713 /afii9826-particles /afii9828-rays [3]  (b) an electric field is now applied, in the same region as the magnetic field, and at the same time as the magnetic field.   what is the direction of the electric field, in order to cancel out the deflection of the  /afii9825- particles?    [2] [total: 5] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible.  every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance  have unwittingly been  included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university  of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s09_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. sp sjf4894/sw t76311/3 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *4126398727* physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test may/june 2009  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 20091 in this experiment, you are to make two sets of measurements as accurately as you can in order  to determine the density of glass.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. dh fig. 1.1  method 1  (a) (i) use the two blocks of wood and the rule to measure the external diameter d of the test- tube in cm.  d =  . cm   (ii) draw a labelled diagram to show how you used the blocks of wood and the rule to find, as accurately as possible, a value for the external diameter of the test-tube.   (iii) measure the height h of the test-tube in cm.  h =  . cm",
            "3": "3 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn over  (iv) calculate the external volume ve of the test-tube using the equation ve = \u03c0d2h 4.  ve =  ... [3]  (b) use the balance provided to measure the mass m1 of the test-tube.  m1 =  .. [1]  (c) (i) completely fill the test-tube with water. pour the water into the measuring cylinder and  record the volume vi of the water.  vi =  ...   (ii) calculate the density \u03c1 of the glass using the equation \u03c1 = m1 (ve \u2013 vi).  \u03c1 =  ... [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 method 2  (d) (i) pour water into the measuring cylinder up to about the 175 cm3 mark. record this volume  v1.  v1 =  ...   (ii) carefully lower the test-tube, open end uppermost, into the measuring cylinder so that it  floats. record the new volume reading v2 from the measuring cylinder.  v2 =  ...   (iii) calculate the difference in volumes ( v2 \u2013v1).  ( v2 \u2013v1) =  ...   (iv) calculate the mass m2 of the test-tube using the equation m2 = k(v2 \u2013 v1)                        where k = 1.0 g/cm3.  m2 =  ... [3]  (e) (i) use the wooden rod to push the test-tube, open end uppermost, down to the bottom of the measuring cylinder so that the test-tube is full of water and below the surface. remove the wooden rod. record the new volume reading v 3 from the measuring cylinder.  v3 =  ...   (ii) calculate the density \u03c1 of the glass using the equation \u03c1 = m2 (v3 \u2013 v1).  \u03c1 =  ... [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 20092 in this experiment, you are to investigate the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different  conditions.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1.  y ou are provided with two thermometers, a and b. thermometer b has cotton wool wrapped  around the bulb. do not remove this cotton wool. hot waterthermometer stand fig. 2.1  (a) (i) place thermometer a in the beaker of hot water. measure \u03b8, the temperature of the water.  record \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s.   (ii) remove the thermometer from the water, starting the stopclock as you do so. record in table 2.1 the temperature  \u03b8 of the thermometer bulb at 30 s intervals until you have a  total of seven values. table 2.1 thermometer a thermometer b t /  \u03b8/ \u03b8/   (iii) repeat steps (i) and (ii) using thermometer b.   (iv) complete table 2.1 by inserting the appropriate unit in each of the time and temperature column headings. [6]",
            "7": "7 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn over (b) state which thermometer cooled more quickly. justify your answer by reference to your  readings. statement   . justification  ... ... .. [2]  (c) to make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the two thermometer bulbs under  different conditions (in this experiment one thermometer bulb is covered with cotton wool) it is important to control other experimental conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1   ...2   .. [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 20093 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a wire.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1, which shows the circuit that has been set  up for you. power source a acb vx fig. 3.1  y ou are provided with a length of resistance wire ab.  (a) place the sliding contact c on the resistance wire ab at a distance x from a, where x = 0.100 m.  (b) record the value of x in table 3.1.  (c) switch on. using the voltmeter, measure the p.d. v across the wire between a and c. record  the value of v in table 3.1.  (d) using the ammeter, measure the current i in the wire. record the value of i.  i =  .. [1]  (e) take the sliding contact away from the wire ab and switch off.  (f) calculate the resistance r of the section ac  of the wire using the equation r = v  i.  (g) record r in the table. table 3.1 x / m v / v r / \u03c9 [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn over (h) repeat steps (a) to (g) with the sliding contact at distances of x = 0.300 m, 0.500 m, 0.700 m  and 0.900 m from a.  (i) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against x / m (x-axis). [3]  (j) within the limits of experimental accuracy, what do you conclude about the variation of  resistance with distance along the wire? justify your conclusion by reference to your graph. statement   . justification  ... .. [1]  (k) using your graph, determine a value for the resistance r when the length x = 0.750 m. show  clearly on your graph how you obtained the necessary information.  r =  .. [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 20094 in this experiment, you are to determine the focal length of a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. lensscreenilluminated object uv fig. 4.1  (a) place the lens so that its centre is a distance u = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object.  (b) record in table 4.1 the distance u in cm from the centre of the lens to the illuminated object,  as shown in fig. 4.1.  (c) place the screen close to the lens. move the screen away from the lens until a focused image of the object is seen on the screen.  (d) measure and record in table 4.1 the distance v in cm from the centre of the lens to the screen. table 4.1 u / cm v / cm f / cm [5]  (e) calculate and record in the table the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = uv (u + v ).  (f) place the lens so that its centre is 45.0 cm from the illuminated object.  (g) repeat steps (b) to (e).",
            "11": "11 0625/05/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 (h) calculate the average value of the focal length.  average value of the focal length =  ... [3]  (i) state and briefly explain one precaution you took in order to obtain reliable measurements. statement   . explanation  .. .  .. [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/05/m/j/09blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s09_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. spa ff/dt t76304/3 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. *6752477947* physics 0625/06 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2009  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper.no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 an igcse student is making measurements as accurately as possible in order to determine  the density of glass.  fig. 1.1 shows a glass test-tube drawn actual size.  dx fig. 1.1  (a) (i) use your rule to measure, in cm, the external diameter d of the test-tube.  d =  ... cm",
            "3": "3 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) use your rule to measure, in cm, the length x of the test-tube.  x =     (iii) draw a labelled diagram to show how you would use two rectangular blocks of wood  and your rule to measure the length x of the test-tube as accurately as possible.  [4]  (b) the mass m of the test-tube is 31.2 g.   (i) calculate the external volume ve of the test-tube using the equation ve =  \u03c0d 2x 4 .  ve =  ",
            "4": "4 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the student then fills the test-tube with water and pours the water into a measuring  cylinder. fig. 1.2 shows the measuring cylinder.  102030405060708090100 watercm3 fig. 1.2    record the volume reading vi from the measuring cylinder. this is the internal  volume of the test-tube.  vi =     (iii) calculate the density \u03c1 of the glass from which the test-tube is made using the  equation \u03c1 =  m (ve \u2212 vi) .  \u03c1 =  ... [4]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/06/m/j/09 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different conditions.  the students are provided with two thermometers a and b. thermometer b has cotton wool  wrapped around the bulb. fig. 2.1 shows thermometer a.  thermometer a waterstand fig. 2.1  the students measure the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water in the beaker. fig. 2.2 shows the  thermometer reading. thermometer a-1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 01 0 0 1 0 0 \u00b0c fig. 2.2  (a) record in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s the temperature \u03b8  shown in fig. 2.2.  (b) the students remove the thermometer from the water, starting the stopclock at the same  time. table 2.1 shows the temperature of the thermometer bulb at 30 s intervals. the experiment is repeated using thermometer b which has cotton wool wrapped around the thermometer bulb.",
            "7": "7 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  complete table 2.1 by inserting the appropriate unit in the time and in the temperature  column headings. table 2.1 thermometer a thermometer b t  / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 08 1 30 51 7260 43 5890 37 49120 34 43150 30 38180 28 34 210 27 31 [2]   (c) suggest which thermometer cooled more quickly at first. justify your answer by reference  to the readings. statement  .justification   ...  . [2]  (d) to make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the two thermometer bulbs  under different conditions (in this experiment one thermometer bulb is covered with cotton wool), it is important to control other experimental conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1.  ..2.  . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. power source ax cba v fig. 3.1  ab is a resistance wire. the students place the sliding contact c on the resistance wire ab  at a distance x = 0.100 m from a. they switch on and measure the p.d. v across the wire  between a and c. they also measure the current i in the wire. the value of i is 0.38 a.   they repeat the procedure several times using different values of x. the readings are shown  in table 3.1. the current i is 0.38 a for each value of x. table 3.1 x / m v / v r / \u03c9 0.100 0.21 0.300 0.59 0.500 1.04 0.700 1.42 0.900 1.87  [2]  (a) calculate the resistance r of the section ac  of the wire for each value of x using the  equation r = v\u2013i. record the values of r in the table.",
            "9": "9 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) use the results in table 3.1 to plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against x / m (x-axis). draw  the best fit line.    [5]  (c) within the limits of experimental accuracy, what do you conclude about the variation of  resistance with distance along the wire? justify your conclusion by reference to your graph. statement  .justification   ...  . [2]  (d) using your graph, determine the value for r when x = 0.750 m. show clearly on your  graph how you obtained the necessary information.  r =  ... [2]  (e) a variable that may be difficult to control in this experiment is the heating effect of the  current, which affects the resistance of the wire. suggest how you would minimise the heating effect.  .. . [1]  [total: 12]",
            "10": "10 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 an igcse student is determining the focal length of a lens.  fig. 4.1 shows the experimental set-up. the student positions the illuminated object and the  lens and then moves the screen away from the lens until a sharply focused image of the object is formed on the screen. illuminated object screenuv fig. 4.1  (a) using your rule, measure on fig. 4.1 the distance u, in cm, from the centre of the lens to  the illuminated object and the distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen.  u = ...  v =  [2]  (b) (i) fig. 4.1 is drawn one fifth actual size. calculate the actual distance x from the  illuminated object to the centre of the lens and the actual distance y  from the centre of  the lens to the screen.    record these values in table 4.1. the first pair of readings obtained by the student has already been entered in the table. table 4.1 x / cm y / cm f / cm 57.0 15.0  [3]   (ii) calculate for both pairs of readings the focal length f of the lens using the equation f =  x y (x + y ) .    record the values of f in table 4.1.",
            "11": "11 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) calculate the average value of the focal length.  average value for the focal length =  ... [2]  (d) state two precautions you would take in the laboratory in order to obtain reliable  measurements. 1.  ..2.  . [2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/06/m/j/09 \u00a9 ucles 20095 an igcse student is investigating moments using a simple balancing experiment.  he uses a pivot on a bench as shown in fig. 5.1. pivot bench fig. 5.1  first, the student balances the metre rule, without loads, on the pivot. he finds that it does  not balance at the 50.0 cm mark, as he expects, but it balances at the 49.7 cm mark.  load q is a metal cylinder with diameter a little larger than the width of the metre rule, so  that it covers the markings on the rule. load q is placed carefully on the balanced metre rule with its centre at the 84.2 cm mark. the rule does not slip on the pivot.  (a) draw on fig. 5.1 the metre rule with load q on it. [2]  (b) explain, using a labelled diagram, how the student would ensure that the metre rule reading at the centre of q is 84.2 cm.  [2]  (c) calculate the distance between the pivot and the centre of load q.  distance =  ... [1]  [total: 5] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.for examiner\u2019s use"
        },
        "0625_w09_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib09 11_0625_01/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2009  [turn over      *7565115686* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2009     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09  1 a stopwatch is used to time an athlete running 100  m. the timekeeper forgets to reset the watch  to zero before using it to time another athlete running 100  m.    60 3010 455 15 20 25 35405055 seconds60 3010 455 15 20 25 35405055 seconds stopwatch at end of first athlete\u2019s runstopwatch at end of second athlete\u2019s run    how long does the second athlete take to run 100  m?  a 11.2  s b 11.4  s c 12.4  s d 23.8  s     2 a ball is thrown upwards.    what effect does the force of gravity have on the ball?  a it produces a constant acceleration downwards.  b it produces a constant acceleration upwards.  c it produces a decreasing acceleration upwards.  d it produces an increasing acceleration downwards.      3 a car accelerates from traffic lights. the graph shows the car\u2019s speed plotted against time.   time  / s20 100 0speed   m / s     how far does the car travel before it reaches a constant speed?  a 10  m b 20  m c 100  m d 200  m ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09 [turn over  4 which property of a body can be measured in newtons?  a density  b mass  c volume  d weight      5 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates as it cools.    what happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup as it cools?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same     6 the diagrams show a rectangular box with inside measurements of 5  cm \u00d7 6  cm \u00d7 4  cm.    4 cm  5 cm 6 cm liquid  total mass = 220  g mass = 40  g     the box has a mass of 40  g when empty. when filled with a liquid, it has a total mass of 220  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a ) 4 6 (5220 \u00d7 \u00d7g / cm3  b ) 4 6 (5)40 220 ( \u00d7 \u00d7\u2212g / cm3  c 220) 4 6 (5\u00d7 \u00d7g / cm3  d 40) (2204)6 (5 \u2212\u00d7 \u00d7g / cm3 ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09  7 passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.    upper deck lower deck    why is this?  a they would cause the bus to become unstable.  b they would  cause the bus to slow down.  c they would  increase the kinetic energy of the bus.  d they would  lower the centre of mass of the bus.     8 the object in the diagram is acted upon by the two forces shown.    object3 n2  n     what is the effect of these forces?  a the object moves to the left with constant speed.  b the object moves to the left with constant acceleration.  c the object moves to the right with constant speed.  d the object moves to the right with constant acceleration.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09 [turn over  9 the diagram shows a microphone being used in an interview.    microphone     which energy change takes place in the microphone?     input energy output energy  a chemical electrical  b electrical chemical  c electrical sound  d sound electrical    10 the table shows the times taken for four children to run up a set of stairs.    which child\u2019s power is greatest?     mass of child  / kg time  / s  a 40 10  b 40 20  c 60 10  d 60 20    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09  11 a water manometer is used to measure the pre ssure of a gas supply to a house. it gives a  reading of h cm of water.    gas supply h cm     why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer?  a h would be too large if mercury were used.  b h would be too small if mercury were used.  c the tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.  d the tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.      12 the diagrams show two swimming pools. one contains fresh water and the other contains salt  water. salt water is more dense than fresh water.    at which labelled point is the pressure the greatest?    a b fresh water (less dense)c d salt water (more dense)water surface water surface      13 brownian motion is observed by looking at smoke particles through a microscope.    how do the smoke particles move in brownian motion?  a all in the same direction  b at random  c in circles  d vibrating about fixed points     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09 [turn over  14 a small amount of air is introduced into the vacuum above the mercury in a mercury barometer  tube.    the mercury level goes down.    why does the mercury level go down?  a the air molecules cool the mercury and make it contract.  b the air molecules decrease the pressure above the mercury.  c the air molecules heat the mercury and make it expand.  d the air molecules increase the pressure above the mercury.      15 to mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are  needed.    which of these is a fixed point?  a room temperature  b the temperature inside a freezer  c the temperature of pure melting ice  d the temperature of pure warm water      16 the table gives the melting points and boiling points of glycerine and benzene.     melting point boiling point  glycerine 18  \u00b0c 290  \u00b0c  benzene 5.4  \u00b0c 80  \u00b0c    at which temperature will both glycerine and benzene be liquid?  a 0 \u00b0c b 50  \u00b0c c 100  \u00b0c d 150  \u00b0c     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09  17 a beaker contains water at room temperature.    x ywater     how could a convection current be set up in the water?  a cool the water at x  b cool the water at y  c stir the water at x  d stir the water at y     18 a student warms her hands near a fire.        which waves carry most heat to her hands and are these waves electromagnetic?     waves electromagnetic  a infra-red no  b infra-red yes  c visible light no  d visible light yes     19 the drawing shows a wave.    which labelled distance is the wavelength?    a b cd    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09 [turn over  20 sound waves travel from a point x to another point y.    x y    which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, caused by the sound waves, in the  region between x and y.    x yd c b a      21 a ray of light in glass is incident on a boundary with air.    which path does the ray of light take when the angle of incidence i is less than the critical angle?    a b c dair glass i ray of light      22 an object o is placed in front of a converging lens of focal length f.    at which point will the top of the image be seen?    o  f f a  b  c d       ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09  23 which range of frequencies typically can be heard by a 10 year-old child?  a 20  hz \u2013 2000  hz  b 20  hz \u2013 20 000  hz  c 200  hz \u2013 2000  hz  d 200  hz \u2013 20 000  hz      24 astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. astronaut 2 is nearby. there is no air in  space.    astronaut 1 astronaut 2hammer     compared with the sound heard if they were worki ng on earth, what does astronaut 2 hear?  a a louder sound  b a quieter sound  c a sound of the same loudness  d no sound at all     25 a permanent magnet is brought near to a piece of copper. the copper is not attracted by the  magnet.    why is there no attraction?  a copper is ferrous but is only attracted by an electromagnet.  b copper is ferrous but is not attracted by any type of magnet.  c copper is not ferrous and is only attracted by an electromagnet.  d copper is not ferrous and is not attracted by any type of magnet.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09 [turn over  26 four plotting compasses are placed in the magnetic field of two identical bar magnets as shown  in the diagram.    which compass is shown pointing in the wrong direction?    s n n s a c d b       27 a pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current + potential difference  b current \u00f7 potential difference  c potential difference \u00f7 current  d potential difference \u00d7 current     28 a student uses a length of wire as a resistor. he discovers that the resistance of the wire is too  small.    to be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is  a longer and thicker.  b longer and thinner.  c shorter and thicker.  d shorter and thinner.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09  29 the diagram shows a battery connected to two identical resistors. three ammeters m 1, m 2 and  m3 are connected in the circuit.    m1  m2 m3 a  a a      meter m 1 reads 1.0  a.    what are the readings on m 2 and on m 3?     reading on m 2 / a reading on m 3 / a  a 0.5 0.0  b 0.5 0.5  c 0.5 1.0  d 1.0 1.0     30 the diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.    plastic case brass connecting stripswitch lamp    what is the circuit diagram for the torch?    c b a d      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09 [turn over  31 an electrical component x is placed in water, as shown.    x thermometer  water a      when the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases.    what is component x?  a a capacitor  b a light-dependent resistor  c a relay  d a thermistor     32 a certain electrical appliance is powered from a mains supply. the appliance normally uses a  current of 3  a, but the current briefly rises to 4  a at the instant the appliance is switched on. the  cable to the appliance is designed for currents up to 6  a.    the fuses available to protect the cable are rated at 1  a, 3  a, 5  a and 13  a.    which fuse should be used?  a 1 a b 3 a c 5 a d 13 a      33 on a building site, metal scaffolding is firmly embedded in the damp ground. a builder holds a  mains-operated electric drill in one hand. with h is other hand he holds on to the scaffolding.     the power cable of the drill is damaged where it enters the metal casing of the drill.    what danger does this present to the builder?  a a current could pass through the builder and electrocute him.  b a current in the scaffolding could heat it up and burn him.  c the large current could blow the fuse and damage the drill.  d the large current could make the motor spin too quickly. ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09  34 which device is designed to allow a small direct current (d.c.) to control a large direct current  (d.c.)?  a a generator  b a motor  c a relay  d a transformer      35 a transformer is to be used to provide a 10  v output from a 100  v supply.    10  v 100  v  primary coil secondary coil     what are suitable numbers of turns for the primary coil and for the secondary coil?     number of turns on  the primary coil number of turns on  the secondary coil  a 100 1000  b 200 110  c 400 490  d 800 80    36 the diagram shows a beam of cathode rays entering an electric field.    \u2013 +beam      in which direction is the beam deflected by the field?  a downwards  b upwards  c into the page  d out of the page ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09 [turn over  37 to create cathode rays in a vacuum, what might be a suitable potential difference to connect  between the cathode and anode?    a 6  v a.c.  b 6  v d.c.  c 600  v a.c.  d 600  v d.c.     38 which statement explains the meaning of the half-life of a radioactive substance?  a half the time taken for half the substance to decay  b half the time taken for the substance to decay completely  c the time taken for half the substance to decay  d the time taken for the substance to decay completely    39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, x, y and z.    x yz 2  mm of plastic10  mm of aluminiumlead     which row in the table correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles              question 40 is on the next page.   ",
            "16": "16      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of  the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/11/o/n/09  40 how many neutrons and how many protons are contained in a nucleus of u238 92?     neutrons protons  a 92 146  b 146 92  c 146 238  d 238 92       "
        },
        "0625_w09_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib09 11_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2009  [turn over      *5234259312* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2009     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09  1 a car accelerates from traffic lights. the graph shows the car\u2019s speed plotted against time.    time  / s20 100 0speed   m / s     how far does the car travel before it reaches a constant speed?  a 10  m b 20  m c 100  m d 200  m    2 which property of a body can be measured in newtons?  a density  b mass  c volume  d weight    3 a stopwatch is used to time an athlete running 100  m. the timekeeper forgets to reset the watch  to zero before using it to time another athlete running 100  m.    60 3010 455 15 20 25 35405055 seconds60 3010 455 15 20 25 35405055 seconds stopwatch at end of first athlete\u2019s runstopwatch at end of second athlete\u2019s run    how long does the second athlete take to run 100  m?  a 11.2  s b 11.4  s c 12.4  s d 23.8  s    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09 [turn over  4 a ball is thrown upwards.    what effect does the force of gravity have on the ball?  a it produces a constant acceleration downwards.  b it produces a constant acceleration upwards.  c it produces a decreasing acceleration upwards.  d it produces an increasing acceleration downwards.      5 the diagrams show a rectangular box with inside measurements of 5  cm \u00d7 6  cm \u00d7 4  cm.    4 cm 5 cm6 cmliquid total mass = 220  g mass = 40  g    the box has a mass of 40  g when empty. when filled with a liquid, it has a total mass of 220  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a ) 4 6 (5220 \u00d7 \u00d7g / cm3  b ) 4 6 (5)40 220 ( \u00d7 \u00d7\u2212g / cm3  c 220) 4 6 (5\u00d7 \u00d7g / cm3  d 40) (2204)6 (5 \u2212\u00d7 \u00d7g / cm3     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09  6 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates as it cools.    what happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup as it cools?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same    7 the object in the diagram is acted upon by the two forces shown.   object3 n2  n     what is the effect of these forces?  a the object moves to the left with constant speed.  b the object moves to the left with constant acceleration.  c the object moves to the right with constant speed.  d the object moves to the right with constant acceleration.      8 passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.    upper deck lower deck    why is this?  a they would cause the bus to become unstable.  b they would  cause the bus to slow down.  c they would  increase the kinetic energy of the bus.  d they would  lower the centre of mass of the bus.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09 [turn over  9 the table shows the times taken for four children to run up a set of stairs.    which child\u2019s power is greatest?     mass of child  / kg time  / s  a 40 10  b 40 20  c 60 10  d 60 20    10 the diagram shows a microphone being used in an interview.    microphone     which energy change takes place in the microphone?     input energy output energy  a chemical electrical  b electrical chemical  c electrical sound  d sound electrical    11 the diagrams show two swimming pools. one contains fresh water and the other contains salt  water. salt water is more dense than fresh water.    at which labelled point is the pressure the greatest?    a b fresh water (less dense)c d salt water (more dense)water surface water surface     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09  12 a water manometer is used to measure the pre ssure of a gas supply to a house. it gives a  reading of h cm of water.    gas supply h cm     why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer?  a h would be too large if mercury were used.  b h would be too small if mercury were used.  c the tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.  d the tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.      13 to mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are  needed.    which of these is a fixed point?  a room temperature  b the temperature inside a freezer  c the temperature of pure melting ice  d the temperature of pure warm water     14 the table gives the melting points and boiling points of glycerine and benzene.     melting point boiling point  glycerine 18  \u00b0c 290  \u00b0c  benzene 5.4  \u00b0c 80  \u00b0c    at which temperature will both glycerine and benzene be liquid?  a 0 \u00b0c b 50  \u00b0c c 100  \u00b0c d 150  \u00b0c    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09 [turn over  15 brownian motion is observed by looking at smoke particles through a microscope.    how do the smoke particles move in brownian motion?  a all in the same direction  b at random  c in circles  d vibrating about fixed points     16 a small amount of air is introduced into the vacuum above the mercury in a mercury barometer  tube.    the mercury level goes down.    why does the mercury level go down?  a the air molecules cool the mercury and make it contract.  b the air molecules decrease the pressure above the mercury.  c the air molecules heat the mercury and make it expand.  d the air molecules increase the pressure above the mercury.     17 a student warms her hands near a fire.        which waves carry most heat to her hands and are these waves electromagnetic?     waves electromagnetic  a infra-red no  b infra-red yes  c visible light no  d visible light yes    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09  18 a beaker contains water at room temperature.    x ywater     how could a convection current be set up in the water?  a cool the water at x  b cool the water at y  c stir the water at x  d stir the water at y     19 which range of frequencies typically can be heard by a 10 year-old child?  a 20  hz \u2013 2000  hz  b 20  hz \u2013 20 000  hz  c 200  hz \u2013 2000  hz  d 200  hz \u2013 20 000  hz    20 astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. astronaut 2 is nearby. there is no air in  space.    astronaut 1 astronaut 2hammer     compared with the sound heard if they were worki ng on earth, what does astronaut 2 hear?  a a louder sound  b a quieter sound  c a sound of the same loudness  d no sound at all    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09 [turn over  21 the diagram shows a wave.    which labelled distance is the wavelength?    a b cd       22 sound waves travel from a point x to another point y.    x y    which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, caused by the sound waves, in the  region between x and y.    x yd c b a      23 an object o is placed in front of a converging lens of focal length f.    at which point will the top of the image be seen?    o  f f a  b  c d       ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09  24 a ray of light in glass is incident on a boundary with air.    which path does the ray of light take when the angle of incidence i is less than the critical angle?    a b c dair glass i ray of light      25 a pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current + potential difference  b current \u00f7 potential difference  c potential difference \u00f7 current  d potential difference \u00d7 current     26 a student uses a length of wire as a resistor. he discovers that the resistance of the wire is too  small.    to be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is  a longer and thicker.  b longer and thinner.  c shorter and thicker.  d shorter and thinner.      27 a permanent magnet is brought near to a piece of copper. the copper is not attracted by the  magnet.    why is there no attraction?  a copper is ferrous but is only attracted by an electromagnet.  b copper is ferrous but is not attracted by any type of magnet.  c copper is not ferrous and is only attracted by an electromagnet.  d copper is not ferrous and is not attracted by any type of magnet.   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09 [turn over  28 four plotting compasses are placed in the magnetic field of two identical bar magnets as shown  in the diagram.    which compass is shown pointing in the wrong direction?    s n n s a c d b       29 the diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.    plastic case brass connecting stripswitch lamp    what is the circuit diagram for the torch?    c b a d      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09  30 the diagram shows a battery connected to two identical resistors. three ammeters m 1, m 2 and  m3 are connected in the circuit.    m1  m2 m3 a  a a      meter m 1 reads 1.0  a.    what are the readings on m 2 and on m 3?     reading on m 2 / a reading on m 3 / a  a 0.5 0.0  b 0.5 0.5  c 0.5 1.0  d 1.0 1.0     31 a certain electrical appliance is powered from a mains supply. the appliance normally uses a  current of 3  a, but the current briefly rises to 4  a at the instant the appliance is switched on. the  cable to the appliance is designed for currents up to 6  a.    the fuses available to protect the cable are rated at 1  a, 3  a, 5  a and 13  a.    which fuse should be used?  a 1 a b 3 a c 5 a d 13 a     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09 [turn over  32 an electrical component x is placed in water, as shown.    x thermometer  water a      when the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases.    what is component x?  a a capacitor  b a light-dependent resistor  c a relay  d a thermistor     33 which device is designed to allow a small direct current (d.c.) to control a large direct current  (d.c.)?  a a generator  b a motor  c a relay  d a transformer      34 on a building site, metal scaffolding is firmly embedded in the damp ground. a builder holds a  mains-operated electric drill in one hand. with his other hand he holds on to the scaffolding.    the power cable of the drill is damaged where it enters the metal casing of the drill.    what danger does this present to the builder?  a a current could pass through the builder and electrocute him.  b a current in the scaffolding could heat it up and burn him.  c the large current could blow the fuse and damage the drill.  d the large current could make the motor spin too quickly. ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09  35 the diagram shows a beam of cathode rays entering an electric field.    \u2013 +beam      in which direction is the beam deflected by the field?  a downwards  b upwards  c into the page  d out of the page      36 to create cathode rays in a vacuum, what might be a suitable potential difference to connect  between the cathode and anode?    a 6  v a.c.  b 6  v d.c.  c 600  v a.c.  d 600  v d.c.    37 a transformer is to be used to provide a 10  v output from a 100  v supply.    10  v 100  v  primary coil secondary coil     what are suitable numbers of turns for the primary coil and for the secondary coil?     number of turns on  the primary coil number of turns on  the secondary coil  a 100 1000  b 200 110  c 400 490  d 800 80 ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2009 0625/12/o/n/09  38 how many neutrons and how many protons are contained in a nucleus of u238 92?     neutrons protons  a 92 146  b 146 92  c 146 238  d 238 92      39 which statement explains the meaning of the half-life of a radioactive substance?  a half the time taken for half the substance to decay  b half the time taken for the substance to decay completely  c the time taken for half the substance to decay  d the time taken for the substance to decay completely      40 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, x, y and z.    x yz 2  mm of plastic10  mm of aluminiumlead     which row in the table correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.     0625/12/o/n/09  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w09_qp_2.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dca (shw 00151 2/08) 12741/5 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question orpart question. *3735851861* physics 0625/02 paper 2 core october/november 2009  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing some water.  a student allows 200 drops of water to fall into the water in the measuring cylinder. fig. 1.2  shows the measuring cylinder after the addition of the drops. 50 40302010cm 3 original level of water50 40302010cm 3 final level of water  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) state   (i) the original volume of water in the cylinder,    cm3   (ii) the final volume of water in the cylinder.    cm3 [1]  (b) calculate the volume of water added.  volume added =  . cm3 [1]  (c) calculate the average volume of one of the drops of water.  average volume =  . cm3 [2] [total: 4]",
            "3": "3 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 as a pole vaulter runs towards the jump, his pole is straight. when he is jumping, the pole is  bent, as illustrated in fig. 2.1. pole fig. 2.1  (a) which form of energy of the athlete increases as he accelerates towards the jump?    [1]  (b) which form of energy is stored in the pole because it is bent?   [1]  (c) which form of energy of the athlete increases because he is rising towards the bar?   [1]  (d) which two quantities need to be known in order to calculate how much work is done  lifting the athlete up from the ground to the bar?  .  and  ..  [1] [total: 4]",
            "4": "4 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows the distance/time graph for a girl\u2019s bicycle ride and the axes for the  corresponding speed/time graph. 00a timedistance from starting point time a b c dspeedb c d fig. 3.1  (a) look at the distance/time graph that has been drawn for you.   (i) answer the following questions for the time interval ab.    1. what is happening to the distance from the starting point?  ...  .  [2]    2. what can you say about the speed of the bicycle?  .  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) on the speed/time axes in the lower part of fig. 3.1, draw a thick line that could  show the speed during ab. [1]  (b) on the speed/time axes of fig. 3.1   (i) draw a thick line that could show the speed during bc, [1]   (ii) draw a thick line that could show the speed during cd. [2]  (c) how far from her starting point is the girl when she has finished her ride?  distance from starting point =    [1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) the object illustrated in fig. 4.1 is not in equilibrium. it has a weight of 12 n. 6 n 15 n weight = 12  n12 n fig. 4.1   (i) state what happens to the object.  ..   [2]   (ii) on fig. 4.1, draw an arrow to show the extra force necessary to bring the object to  a state of equilibrium. label the arrow with the size of the force. [2]   (iii) on fig. 4.1, show where the centre of mass of the object is situated, using the letter g. [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 4.2 shows a car transporter, first unloaded and then loaded with two cars on the  upper deck. fig. 4.2   (i) what happens to the centre of mass of the transporter and its load when the cars are loaded?    tick one box.     rises      stays at the same height      falls   [1]   (ii) how do the two loaded cars affect the stability of the transporter?    tick one box.     more stable      no effect      less stable  [1] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows the cooling curve for a pure substance. the substance is liquid at a. a bc d timetemperature fig. 5.1   (i) describe what is happening to the substance between    1. a and b, . ..    2. b and c,  ...    3. c and d.  ...  [3]   (ii) during which of the sections of the graph is energy being lost from the substance to  the surroundings? put a tick in any of the boxes to indicate where this is happening.     between a and b      between b and c      between c and d  [2]   (iii) what is the state of the substance at d?   .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) when the temperature reaches that at d, the substance is then heated steadily until it  again reaches the temperature it had at a.   on the axes of fig. 5.2, sketch a graph of temperature against time for the heating of the  substance. [2] timetemperature fig. 5.2 [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use6 a bicycle pump has its outlet sealed with a tight rubber bung, as shown in fig. 6.1. a b air pistonhandle bung fig. 6.1  (a) the temperature of the air in the pump is kept constant. the handle of the pump is  pushed in so that the piston moves from a to b.   tick the correct box in each row of the table below to show how each quantity varies as  the piston is moved. greater with  piston at agreater with  piston at bsame with  piston at a or b the average speed of the air molecules the frequency with which the air  molecules hit the walls and the piston the pressure of the air in the pump [3]  (b) when the handle is pushed in even further, the rubber bung pops out of the hole.   which two forces are equal just before the bung pops out? tick two boxes.    friction force between bung and hole     resultant due to forces of air on each side of piston     resultant due to forces of air on each side of bung     gravitational force on bung     force of air on walls  [2] [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 shows an experiment in which an image is being formed on a card by a lens and a  plane mirror. pqrlens image hole cut in cardplane mirrortorch fig. 7.1  the card and the mirror are shown angled, so that you can see what is happening. in a real experiment they are each roughly perpendicular to the line joining the torch bulb and the centre of the lens.  (a) state which of the three marked distances, p, q and r, is the focal length of the lens.   .  [1]  (b) on fig. 7.1 clearly mark a principal focus of the lens, using the letter f . [1]  (c) tick the boxes alongside two features that describe the image formed on the card.    erect     inverted     real      virtual [2]  (d) what can be said about the size of the image, compared with the size of the object?    [1]  (e) in the experiment, the plane mirror is perpendicular to the beam of light.   state what, if anything, happens to the image on the card if  (i) the plane mirror is moved slightly to the left,   [1]   (ii) the lens is moved slightly to the left.   [1] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows a student standing midway between a bell tower and a steep mountainside. steep mountainside student bell tower and bell990  m 990  m fig. 8.1  the bell rings once, but the student hears two rings separated by a short time interval.  (a) explain why the student hears two rings.  .. ..   [2]  (b) state which of the sounds is loudest, and why. .. ..   [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) sound in that region travels at 330 m / s.   (i) calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for  the first time.  time interval =  .  s [2]   (ii) calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for  the second time.  time interval =  .  s [1]   (iii) calculate the time interval between the two sounds.  time interval =  .  s [1] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) the two circuits shown in fig. 9.1 each contain two resistors and a battery.   complete the statement under each circuit. r1 r2 r4r3   resistors r1 and r2 are resistors r3 and r4 are   connected in \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 connected in \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 [1] fig. 9.1  (b) a student connects the circuit shown in fig. 9.2. the resistance of the 12 v battery is so  low that it can be ignored. 280  \u03c9 12 v 200  \u03c9a b fig. 9.2   (i) calculate the total resistance in the circuit.  resistance =    \u03c9 [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the current delivered by the battery.  current =    [4]   (iii) calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the 200 \u03c9 resistor.  p.d. =  . v [2]  (iv) describe how the student could check whether the p.d. across the 200  \u03c9 resistor is  the same as you have calculated. include the name of the instrument he would use  for this.  .. ..   [2] [total: 11]",
            "16": "16 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use10 fig. 10.1 is a diagram of a transformer. 12 v a.c.30 turns 300 turns va.c. voltmeter fig. 10.1  (a) (i) on fig. 10.1, clearly label the core of the transformer. [1]   (ii) name a suitable material from which the core could be made.    [1]   (iii) state the purpose of the core.   [1]  (b) calculate the reading on the voltmeter.  voltmeter reading =  . v [3] [total: 6]",
            "17": "17 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 a woodworker buys an old electric drill that has been used before. the drill is illustrated in  fig. 11.1. fig. 11.1  the drill mechanism itself is guaranteed to be electrically safe.  suggest three checks the woodworker could make in order to ensure that the rest of his purchase is electrically safe. 1.  . .2.  . .3.  . ...  [3] [total: 3]",
            "18": "18 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use12 a radioactive material, x, has a half-life of 2 minutes.  at the beginning of an experiment, a sample of the material produces a count-rate of  800 counts / s.  fig. 12.1 shows the count-rate readings at the start of the experiment and after one half-life has elapsed. 0 0 time t  / minutescount-rate counts  / s 2 4 6 8 10 12 14100200300400500600700800900 fig. 12.1",
            "19": "19 0625/02/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use (a) complete the plot of the decay curve, for times up to t = 12 minutes. draw the best curve  through your points. [3]  (b) from your graph find   (i) the count-rate from the sample after 9 minutes,  count-rate =  . counts / s [1]   (ii) the time it takes for the count-rate to fall from 700 counts / s to 350 counts / s.  time =  ... minutes [1]  (c) a second sample of this radioactive material x gives an initial count-rate of 400 counts / s.   what will be the half-life of this sample?  half-life =  ... minutes [1]  (d) a river contains fine particles of mud. the mud builds up on the bottom of the river and  prevents the movement of large ships. to solve this problem, the authorities remove the mud and dump it at sea. to check where the mud goes after it is dumped, a radioactive material is mixed with it and tracked with radioactivity detectors.   (i) explain why the radioactive material x is not suitable to trace the movement of the dumped mud.  ..   [1]   (ii) state two other properties that a radioactive material must have to make it suitable  for tracking the mud. 1. ...2. .  [2] [total: 9]",
            "20": "20 0625/02/o/n/09permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w09_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (shw 00151 2/08) 14866/7 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *6024898353* physics 0625/31 paper 3 extended october/november 2009  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 fig 1.1 shows part of a measuring instrument. 025 20mm fig. 1.1  (a) state the name of this instrument.   .  [1]  (b) record the reading shown in fig. 1.1.   .  [1]  (c) describe how you would find the thickness of a sheet of paper used in a magazine.  .. .. .. .. ..   [3] [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 the list below gives the approximate densities of various metals.   gold 19 g / cm3   lead 11 g / cm3   copper  9 g / cm3   iron  8 g / cm3  at an antiques market, a collector buys what is advertised as a small ancient gold statue.  when the collector tests it in the laboratory, he finds its mass is 600 g and its volume is 65 cm 3.  (a) in the space below, describe how the volume of the statue could be measured. y ou may draw diagrams if you wish. [3]  (b) use the figures given above to decide whether the statue was really made of gold. show your working.   was the statue made of gold? (tick one box.) yes no [3] [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 a student investigated the stretching of a spring by hanging various weights from it and  measuring the corresponding extensions. the results are shown below. weight / n 012345 extension / mm 0 21 40 51 82 103  (a) on fig. 3.1, plot the points from these results. do not draw a line through the points yet.   [2] 0 0 weight  / nextension  / mm 12345620406080100120 fig. 3.1",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student appears to have made an error in recording one of the results.   which result is this?    [1]  (c) ignoring the incorrect result, draw the best straight line through the remaining points. [1]  (d) state and explain whether this spring is obeying hooke\u2019s law.  .. .. .. ..   [2]  (e) describe how the graph might be shaped if the student continued to add several more  weights to the spring.  .. .. ..   [1]  (f) the student estimates that if he hangs a 45 n load on the spring, the extension will be  920 mm.   explain why this estimate may be unrealistic.  ..  .. ..   [1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) a force acting on an object causes the object to accelerate.   in which direction is the acceleration?   .  [1] (b) any object moving in a circle has a force acting on it towards the centre of the circle.   what does this force do to the object?    [1]  (c) a woman of mass 60 kg is standing in a lift at a shopping centre.   (i) the lift is at rest.   1. state the value of the weight of the woman.   .  [1]   2. state the value of the force exerted on the woman by the floor of the lift.    [1]   (ii) calculate the force required to accelerate a mass of 60 kg at 2.5 m / s 2.  force =    [2]  (iii) the lift accelerates upwards at 2.5 m / s 2.    calculate the force exerted on the woman by the floor when the lift is accelerating.  force =    [1]   (iv) the lift reaches a steady upward speed.    state the value of the force exerted on the woman by the floor at this steady  speed.    [1] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 a farmer uses an electric pump to raise water from a river in order to fill the irrigation channels  that keep the soil in his fields moist. water pours into channel fieldelectric pump water rises up tube3 m riverirrigation channel fig. 5.1  every minute, the pump raises 12 kg of water through a vertical height of 3 m.  (a) calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy of 12 kg of water when it is  raised 3 m.  increase in gravitational potential energy =    [3]  (b) calculate the useful power output of the pump as it raises the water.  power =    [3] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use6 a vertical cylinder has a smooth well-fitting piston in it. weights can be added to or removed  from a tray on the top of the piston.  (a) weights are added to the tray, as shown in fig. 6.1. weights piston air cylinder fig. 6.1   (i) state what happens to the pressure of the air in the cylinder as a result of adding  these weights.    [1]   (ii) the initial pressure of the trapped air is 1.05 \u00d7 105 pa. when the weights are added,  the volume of the air decreases from 860 cm3 to 645 cm3.    the temperature of the air does not change.    calculate the final pressure of the trapped air.  pressure =    [3]   (iii) the area of the piston is 5.0 \u00d7 10\u20133 m2.    calculate the weight that is added to the piston.  weight added =    [4]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the weights are kept as shown in fig. 6.1. the temperature of the air in the cylinder is  increased.   (i) state what happens to the volume of the air in the cylinder as a result of this temperature rise.    [1]   (ii) state how, if at all, the pressure of the air changes as the temperature changes.   [1]   (iii) state what must be done to prevent the volume change in (b)(i).   [1]   (iv) the volume change in (b)(i) is prevented. state what happens to the pressure of  the air in the cylinder.    [1] [total: 12]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use7 three wires and a meter are used to construct a thermocouple for measuring the surface  temperature of a pipe carrying hot liquid, as shown in fig. 7.1. hot junctioncold junctionmeter wire 1 wire 2 wire 3 hot liquid in pipe fig. 7.1  (a) copper wire and constantan wire are used in the construction of the thermocouple.   state which metal might be used for  wire 1  ..  wire 2  ..  wire 3  .. [1]  (b) state what type of meter is used.   [1]  (c) state one particular advantage of thermocouples for measuring temperature.   [1] [total: 3]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows a thin converging lens. the two principal foci are shown. principal axisf2 f1 fig. 8.1  a vertical object, 2 cm tall, is to be positioned to the left of the lens, with one end on the  principal axis.  on fig. 8.1,  (a) draw the object in a position which will produce a virtual image, labelling the object with the letter o, [1]  (b) draw two rays showing how the virtual image is formed, [2]  (c) draw in the image, labelling it with the letter  i. [1] [total: 4]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) state what is meant by specific heat capacity.  ..   [2]  (b) water has a very high specific heat capacity.   suggest why this might be a disadvantage when using water for cooking.  ..   [1]  (c) fig. 9.1 illustrates an experiment to measure the specific heat capacity of some metal.  boiling water metal heaterinsulationlid thread watercupthermometerstirrer fig. 9.1   the piece of metal is heated in boiling water until it has reached the temperature of  the water. it is then transferred rapidly to some water in a well-insulated cup. a very  sensitive thermometer is used to measure the initial and final temperatures of the water in the cup.   specific heat capacity of water = 4200 j / (kg k)   the readings from the experiment are as follows.  mass of metal = 0.050 kg   mass of water in cup = 0.200 kg  initial temperature of water in cup = 21.1 \u00b0c  final temperature of water in cup = 22.9 \u00b0c   (i) calculate the temperature rise of the water in the cup and the temperature fall of  the piece of metal.  temperature rise of water =  ..  temperature fall of metal =  .. [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in the cup. state the equation  that you use.  thermal energy gained =    [3]   (iii) assume that only the water gained thermal energy from the piece of metal.    making use of your answers to (c)(i) and (c)(ii), calculate the value of the specific  heat capacity of the metal. give your answer to 3 significant figures.  specific heat capacity =    [2]   (iv) suggest one reason why the experiment might not have given a correct value for the specific heat capacity of the metal.  ..   [1] [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use10 alternating current electricity is delivered at 22 000 v to a pair of transmission lines.  the transmission lines carry the electricity to the customer at the receiving end, where the potential difference is v. this is shown in fig. 10.1. each transmission line has a resistance of 3  \u03c9. 22 000  vv3 \u03c9 3 \u03c9 fig. 10.1  (a) the a.c. generator actually generates at a much lower voltage than 22 000 v.   (i) suggest how the voltage is increased to 22 000 v.    [1]   (ii) state one advantage of delivering electrical energy at high voltage.   [1]  (b) the power delivered by the generator is 55 kw. calculate the current in the transmission  lines.  current =    [2]  (c) calculate the rate of loss of energy from one of the 3  \u03c9 transmission lines.  rate of energy loss =    [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) calculate the voltage drop across one of the transmission lines.  voltage drop =    [2]  (e) calculate the potential difference v at the receiving end of the transmission lines.  v =    [2] [total: 10] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 200911 fig. 11.1 is a schematic diagram of an electronic circuit controlling a lamp. temperature sensor light sensorrelay lamp ab fig. 11.1  (a) state the names of the logic gates a and b.    a  b        [2]  (b) the output of the temperature sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised temperature.   the output of the light sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised light levels.   state the outputs of a and b when the surroundings are   (i) dark and cold,    output of a =             output of b =          [1]   (ii) dark and warm,   output of a =             output of b =          [1]   (iii) bright and warm.   output of a =             output of b =          [1]  (c) (i) suggest why b is connected to a relay, rather than directly to the lamp.    [1]   (ii) the relay switches on when its input is high. in which of the three combinations in  (b) will the lamp light up?    [1]   (iii) suggest a practical use for this circuit.   [1] [total: 8] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.for examiner\u2019s use"
        },
        "0625_w09_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dca (shw 00151 2/08) 12748/5 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *7688327322* physics 0625/32 paper 3 extended october/november 2009  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 a weight attached to one end of a short length of string is swinging from side to side. the  highest points in the swing are a and b, as shown in fig. 1.1. ab fig. 1.1  (a) with reference to fig. 1.1, state what is meant by the amplitude of the oscillations.    [2]  (b) describe how the amplitude of the oscillations could be measured. .. .. .. ..   [3] [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 the list below gives the approximate densities of various metals.   gold 19 g / cm3   lead 11 g / cm3   copper  9 g / cm3   iron  8 g / cm3  at an antiques market, a collector buys what is advertised as a small ancient gold statue.  when the collector tests it in the laboratory, he finds its mass is 600 g and its volume is 65 cm 3.  (a) in the space below, describe how the volume of the statue could be measured. y ou may draw diagrams if you wish. [3]  (b) use the figures given above to decide whether the statue was really made of gold.   show your working.   was the statue made of gold? (tick one box.) yes no [3] [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 a student investigated the stretching of a spring by hanging various weights from it and  measuring the corresponding extensions. the results are shown below. weight / n 012345 extension / mm 0 21 40 51 82 103  (a) on fig. 3.1, plot the points from these results. do not draw a line through the points yet.  [2] 0 0 weight  / nextension  / mm 12345620406080100120 fig. 3.1",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student appears to have made an error in recording one of the results.   which result is this?    [1]  (c) ignoring the incorrect result, draw the best straight line through the remaining points. [1]  (d) state and explain whether this spring is obeying hooke\u2019s law.  .. .. .. ..   [2]  (e) describe how the graph might be shaped if the student continued to add several more  weights to the spring.  .. .. ..   [1]  (f) the student estimates that if he hangs a 45 n load on the spring, the extension will be  920 mm.   explain why this estimate may be unrealistic.  ..  .. ..   [1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 illustrates an object on a string being whirled anticlockwise in a vertical circle. grounda bstring fig. 4.1  the lowest point of the circle is a small distance above the ground. the diagram shows the  object at the top a of the circle, and at b, when it is at the same height as the centre of the circle.  (a) on fig. 4.1, mark clearly   (i) the force of the string on the object    1. at a,    2. at b. [2]   (ii) the path the object would take until it hit the ground, if the string broke    1. at a,    2. at b. [3]  (b) the mass of the object is 0.05 kg. at a, the tension in the string is 3.6 n.   (i) calculate the weight of the object.  weight =    [1]   (ii) calculate the total force on the object at a.  total force =    [2] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 a farmer uses an electric pump to raise water from a river in order to fill the irrigation channels  that keep the soil in his fields moist. water pours into channel fieldelectric pump water rises up tube3 m riverirrigation channel fig. 5.1  every minute, the pump raises 12 kg of water through a vertical height of 3 m.  (a) calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy of 12 kg of water when it is  raised 3 m.  increase in gravitational potential energy =    [3]  (b) calculate the useful power output of the pump as it raises the water.  power =    [3] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use6 a vertical cylinder has a smooth well-fitting piston in it. weights can be added to or removed  from a tray on the top of the piston.  (a) weights are added to the tray, as shown in fig. 6.1. weights piston air cylinder fig. 6.1   (i) state what happens to the pressure of the air in the cylinder as a result of adding  these weights.    [1]   (ii) the initial pressure of the trapped air is 1.05 \u00d7 105 pa. when the weights are added,  the volume of the air decreases from 860 cm3 to 645 cm3.    the temperature of the air does not change.    calculate the final pressure of the trapped air.  pressure =    [3]   (iii) the area of the piston is 5.0 \u00d7 10\u20133 m2.    calculate the weight that is added to the piston.  weight added =    [4]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the weights are kept as shown in fig. 6.1. the temperature of the air in the cylinder is  increased.   (i) state what happens to the volume of the air in the cylinder as a result of this temperature rise.    [1]   (ii) state how, if at all, the pressure of the air changes as the temperature changes.   [1]   (iii) state what must be done to prevent the volume change in (b)(i).   [1]   (iv) the volume change in (b)(i) is prevented. state what happens to the pressure of  the air in the cylinder.    [1] [total: 12]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use7 three wires and a meter are used to construct a thermocouple for measuring the surface  temperature of a pipe carrying hot liquid, as shown in fig. 7.1. hot junctioncold junctionmeter wire 1 wire 2 wire 3 hot liquid inpipe fig. 7.1  (a) copper wire and constantan wire are used in the construction of the thermocouple.   state which metal might be used for  wire 1  ..  wire 2  ..  wire 3  .. [1]  (b) state what type of meter is used.   [1]  (c) state one particular advantage of thermocouples for measuring temperature.   [1] [total: 3]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows a thin converging lens. the two principal foci are shown. principal axisf2 f1 fig. 8.1  a vertical object, 2 cm tall, is to be positioned to the left of the lens, with one end on the  principal axis.  on fig. 8.1,  (a) draw the object in a position which will produce a virtual image, labelling the object with the letter o, [1]  (b) draw two rays showing how the virtual image is formed, [2]  (c) draw in the image, labelling it with the letter  i. [1] [total: 4]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) state what is meant by specific heat capacity.  ..   [2]  (b) water has a very high specific heat capacity.   suggest why this might be a disadvantage when using water for cooking.  ..   [1]  (c) fig. 9.1 illustrates an experiment to measure the specific heat capacity of some metal. boiling water metal heaterinsulationlid thread watercupthermometerstirrer fig. 9.1   the piece of metal is heated in boiling water until it has reached the temperature of  the water. it is then transferred rapidly to some water in a well-insulated cup. a very  sensitive thermometer is used to measure the initial and final temperatures of the water in the cup.   specific heat capacity of water = 4200 j / (kg k)   the readings from the experiment are as follows.  mass of metal = 0.050 kg   mass of water in cup = 0.200 kg  initial temperature of water in cup = 21.1 \u00b0c  final temperature of water in cup = 22.9 \u00b0c   (i) calculate the temperature rise of the water in the cup and the temperature fall of  the piece of metal.  temperature rise of water =  ..  temperature fall of metal =  .. [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in the cup. state the equation  that you use.  thermal energy gained =    [3]   (iii) assume that only the water gained thermal energy from the piece of metal.    making use of your answers to (c)(i) and (c)(ii), calculate the value of the specific  heat capacity of the metal. give your answer to 3 significant figures.  specific heat capacity =    [2]   (iv) suggest one reason why the experiment might not have given a correct value for the specific heat capacity of the metal.  ..   [1] [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use10 alternating current electricity is delivered at 22 000 v to a pair of transmission lines. the  transmission lines carry the electricity to the customer at the receiving end, where the potential difference is v. this is shown in fig. 10.1. each transmission line has a resistance of 3  /afii9821. 22 000  v v3 x 3 x fig. 10.1  (a) the a.c. generator actually generates at a much lower voltage than 22 000 v.   (i) suggest how the voltage is increased to 22 000 v.    [1]   (ii) state one advantage of delivering electrical energy at high voltage.   [1]  (b) the power delivered by the generator is 55 kw. calculate the current in the transmission  lines.  current =    [2]  (c) calculate the rate of loss of energy from one of the 3  /afii9821 transmission lines.  rate of energy loss =    [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) calculate the voltage drop across one of the transmission lines.  voltage drop =    [2]  (e) calculate the potential difference v at the receiving end of the transmission lines.  v =    [2] [total: 10] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 200911 fig. 11.1 is an electronic circuit controlling an electric heater. +5 v 0 vqp relay coil a.c.electric heater fig. 11.1  the relay contacts close when there is a current in the relay coil.  (a) state the name of the logic gate in the circuit.    [1]  (b) (i) state the name of component p .   [1]   (ii) state what happens to p when its temperature falls.   [1]  (c) for the relay to operate, the output of the gate must be high (logic 1).   (i) what must be the input of the gate for the relay to operate?   [1]   (ii) state what the resistance of p must be, compared with the resistance of q, in order  to give this input to the gate.    [1]   (iii) under what conditions will p have this resistance?   [1]  (d) suggest why component q is a variable resistor, rather than one with a fixed value.   [1]  (e) suggest a practical use for this circuit.   [1] [total: 8] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.for examiner\u2019s use"
        },
        "0625_w09_qp_5.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dca sjf4893/cg 12745/4 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *7431200001* physics 0625/05 paper 5  practical test october/november 2009  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you are to investigate the period of oscillation of a simple pendulum.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. bob floord one complete oscillation  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  the pendulum has been set up for you. do not adjust the position of the clamp supporting  the pendulum.  (a) measure and record in table 1.1 the vertical distance d from the floor to the bottom of the pendulum bob.  (b) displace the pendulum bob slightly and release it so that it swings. measure and record in table 1.1 the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see fig. 1.2).  (c) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete oscillation.  record the value of t in table 1.1.  (d) without changing the position of the clamp supporting the pendulum, adjust the length until the vertical distance d from the floor to the bottom of the pendulum bob is about 20 cm. measure and record in table 1.1 the actual value of d to the nearest 0.1 cm. repeat steps (b) and (c).  (e) repeat steps (d) using d values of about 30 cm, 40 cm and 50 cm.",
            "3": "3 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s usetable 1.1 d/cm t/s t/s [4]  (f) plot a graph of t /s (y-axis) against d /cm (x-axis). [5]  (g) state whether or not your graph shows that t is directly proportional to d. justify your  statement by reference to the graph. statement  justification  .. . [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment you will investigate the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different  conditions.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3. clamp thermometer water       thermometer in position aclamp water  fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2 thermometerin position bclamp water fig. 2.3  (a) place the thermometer in the beaker of hot water (see fig. 2.1).   (i) record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water.  \u03b8h  .. [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) move the thermometer until the thermometer bulb is just above the surface of the  water (position a) as shown in fig. 2.2 and immediately start the stopclock.   (iii) after 30 s measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time t  (30 s) and the temperature reading in table 2.1.   (iv) continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30 s until you have six sets of readings. table 2.1 position a position b t / \u03b8/ \u03b8/ [5]  (b) complete the column headings in the table.  (c) replace the thermometer in the beaker of hot water and record its temperature.  \u03b8h  .. [1]  (d) move the thermometer at least 10 cm away from the beaker to position b as shown in fig. 2.3 and immediately start the stopclock.   (i) after 30 s measure the temperature  \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the  temperature reading in table 2.1.   (ii) continue recording the temperature every 30 s until you have six sets of readings.  (e) state in which position the thermometer bulb cooled more quickly. justify your answer by reference to your readings. statement  justification  .. . [1]  (f) to make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the thermometer bulbs in  the two positions it is important to control other experimental conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1  ...2  .. [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you are to compare the combined resistance of lamps arranged in series  and in parallel.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1 and fig. 3.2.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you. power source a v fig. 3.1  (a) switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v  across the two lamps. switch off.  (b) calculate the combined resistance r of the two lamps using the equation r = v i.   record this value of r in table 3.1. table 3.1 v / i / r / fig. 3.1 fig. 3.2[4]  (c) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "7": "7 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) disconnect the lamps and the voltmeter. set up the circuit shown in fig. 3.2. power source a v fig. 3.2  (e) switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v  across the two lamps. switch off.  (f) calculate the combined resistance r of the two lamps using the equation r = v i.   record this value of r in table 3.1.  (g) using the values of resistance obtained in (b) and (f), calculate the ratio y of the  resistances using the equation y =  resistance of lamps in series resistance of lamps in parallel.  y  =  .. [3] question 3 continues on the next page",
            "8": "8 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use (h) (i) fig. 3.3 shows a circuit including two motors a and b.  ammeter power source variable resistormotor bmotor a fig. 3.3    draw a diagram of the circuit using standard circuit symbols. the circuit symbol for  a motor is: m",
            "9": "9 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  an engineer wishes to measure the voltage across motor a.   (ii) on fig. 3.3 mark with the letters x and y where the engineer should connect the  voltmeter.   (iii) state the purpose of the variable resistor .  .. . [3]",
            "10": "10 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment you will determine the focal length of a converging lens by two different  methods.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. and fig. 4.2.  method 1 25.0  cm mirror  lensilluminated  object             image  fig. 4.1 fig. 4.2  (a) place the lens about 25 cm from the object screen and close to the mirror as shown in fig. 4.1.  (b) move the lens and the mirror slowly towards the object screen until a sharply focused image is obtained on the object screen as shown in fig. 4.2.  (c) measure the distance between the lens and the object screen. this distance is equal to the focal length f of the converging lens. record f below.  f =  .. [2]  method 2  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.3. dtlens lens fig. 4.3",
            "11": "11 0625/05/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use (d) remove the lens from its holder. by placing the lens on the metre rule, determine an  average value for the diameter d of the lens. record your readings in the space below.  d  =  . [3]  (e) using the two blocks of wood and the metre rule determine the thickness t of the lens.  t  =  . [1]  (f) draw a diagram to show how you used the two blocks of wood and the metre rule with the lens. [2]  (g) (i) theory shows that for a perfectly formed lens the focal length is given by the formula f = d2 kt                         where k = 4.16.    calculate the focal length f of the lens using this formula.  f =  . [1]   (ii) explain whether your results from methods 1 and 2 support this theory.  .. ..  . [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/05/o/n/09blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w09_qp_6.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dca (shw 00210 3/08) 12805/3 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *8413808010* physics 0625/06 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2009  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is investigating the period of oscillation of a simple pendulum.  fig. 1.1 shows the set-up. dbob floor one complete oscillation  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the vertical distance d from the floor to the bottom of the  pendulum bob.  d =  ..   (ii) fig. 1.1 is drawn one twentieth actual size. calculate the actual distance x from the floor to the bottom of the pendulum bob. enter this value in the top row of table 1.1.  the students displace the pendulum bob slightly and release it so that it swings. they measure and record in table 1.1 the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see fig. 1.2). table 1.1 x / cm t / s t / s t  2 / s2 20.0 20.0 19.0 30.0 17.9 40.0 16.8 50.0 15.5 [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) calculate the period t of the pendulum for each set of readings. the period is the  time for one complete oscillation. enter the values in table 1.1.   (ii) calculate the values of t  2. enter the t  2 values in table 1.1.  (c) use your values from table 1.1 to plot a graph of t  2 / s2 (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis).   draw the best-fit line. [5]",
            "4": "4 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use (d) state whether or not your graph shows that t  2 is directly proportional to x. justify your  statement by reference to the graph. statement  .justification  ...   [1]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/06/o/n/09 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use2 an igcse student is investigating the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different  conditions.  he places a thermometer in a beaker of hot water and records the temperature /afii9835h of the hot  water. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.1  (a) fig. 2.1 shows the thermometer. write down the value of /afii9835h that it shows.  /afii9835h    [1]  he then moves the thermometer until the thermometer bulb is just above the surface of the water (position a) and immediately starts a stopclock.  he records the time t and the temperature reading  /afii9835 every 30 s. the readings are shown in  table 2.1. table 2.1 position a position b t / /afii9835 / /afii9835 /  30 65 56  60 58 47  90 54 40 120 52 35 150 50 32 180 48 30  (b) complete the column headings in the table. [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use the student replaces the thermometer in the hot water and then moves the thermometer  15 cm away from the beaker to position b and immediately starts the stopclock. he records the time t and the temperature reading  /afii9835 every 30 s. the readings are shown in table 2.1.  (c) state in which position the thermometer bulb cooled more quickly. justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement  .justification  ...   [1]  (d) to make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the thermometer bulbs in  the two positions, it is important to control other experimental conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1.  ..2.    [2]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is comparing the combined resistance of lamps arranged either in series  or in parallel.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 is used. vapower source fig. 3.1  a student measures and records the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across the two  lamps.  fig. 3.2 shows the readings on the two meters. 0 0.50.1 0.40.2 0.3 a 051423 v fig. 3.2",
            "9": "9 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) (i) write the voltage and current readings in table 3.1, below.   (ii) complete the column headings in table 3.1.  [3]  (b) the student then sets up the circuit shown in fig. 3.3 and records the readings. these  readings have already been entered in table 3.1. vapower source fig. 3.3   for each set of readings in the table, calculate the combined resistance r of the two  lamps using the equation r = v / i. record the values of r in table 3.1. [2] table 3.1 v / i / r / circuit of fig. 3.1 circuit of fig. 3.3 1.8 0.52  (c) using the values of resistance you have obtained, calculate the ratio y of the resistances  using the equation y = resistance of lamps in series resistance of lamps in parallel .  y =  .. [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use (d) fig. 3.4 shows a circuit including two motors a and b. amotor aammeter motor bvariable resistorpower source fig. 3.4   (i) draw a diagram of the circuit using standard circuit symbols. the circuit symbol for  a motor is: m",
            "11": "11 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) an engineer wishes to measure the voltage across motor a.    1.  on fig. 3.4, mark with the letters x and y where the engineer should connect  the voltmeter.    2. state the purpose of the variable resistor.  ...  ... [3]    [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use4 an igcse student is determining the focal length of a lens by two different methods.  the set-up for method 1 is shown in fig. 4.1. mirror illuminated objectobject screen lensf fig. 4.1  the student moves the lens and the mirror slowly towards the object screen until a sharply  focused image is obtained on the object screen as shown in fig. 4.2. image fig. 4.2  (a) on fig. 4.1, use your rule to measure the distance f between the lens and the object screen. this is the focal length of the lens.  f =    [2]  (b) for method 2, the student takes measurements of the diameter d and maximum thickness t of the lens. use your rule to take measurements on fig. 4.3. fig. 4.3",
            "13": "13 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (i) determine an average value for the diameter d of the lens. record your readings in  the space below.  d =  ..   (ii) measure the maximum thickness t of the lens.  t =  ..   (iii) draw a diagram to show how, in the laboratory you would use two rectangular blocks of wood and a metre rule to measure the thickness of the lens as accurately as possible.   (iv) theory shows that, for a perfectly formed lens, the focal length is given by the formula f =  d 2 kt               where k = 4.16.    calculate the focal length f of the lens using this formula.  f =  ..  [7]",
            "14": "14 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use (c) explain whether your results from methods 1 and 2 support the theory in part (b)(iv).  .. ..   [1]  [total: 10]",
            "15": "15 0625/06/o/n/09 \u00a9 ucles 2009for examiner\u2019s use5 an igcse student is carrying out an optics experiment.  the experiment involves using a lens to focus the image of an illuminated object onto a  screen.  (a) complete the diagram below to show the apparatus you would use. include a metre rule to measure the distances between the object and the lens and between the lens and the screen. the illuminated object is drawn for you. illuminated object lamp card [3]  (b) state two precautions that you would take to obtain accurate results in this experiment. 1.  .. ..2.  ..   [2]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/06/o/n/09blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        }
    },
    "2010": {
        "0625_s10_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib10 06_0625_11/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2010  [turn over      *0334676086* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2010     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  1 a scientist needs to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped rock sample. only a rule  and a measuring cylinder, partially filled with water, are available.    measuring  cylinder rock sample rule cm3 cm     to determine the volume, which apparatus should the scientist use?  a both the measuring cylinder and the rule  b neither the measuring cylinder nor the rule  c the measuring cylinder only  d the rule only      2 a student uses a stopwatch to time a runner running around a circular track. the runner runs two  laps (twice around the track). the diagrams show the reading on the stopwatch when the runner  starts running, at the end of the first lap, and at the end of the second lap.    reading when runner startsreading at end of first lapreading at end of second lap    what is the time taken for the runner to run the second lap?  a 0 min 50  s b 1 min 10  s c 1 min 13  s d 2 min 03  s     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10 [turn over  3 two distance  / time graphs and two speed  / time graphs are shown.    which graph represents an object that is at rest?    a  distance  time b  distance  time  c  speed  time d  speed  time 0000 0000      4 a snail moves along a ruler. it takes 20  s to move from q to r.    p  0 q  2 r  12 cm    what is its average speed from q to r?  a 2012cm  / s  b 202 12\u2212cm  / s  c 1220cm  / s  d 2 1220 \u2212cm  / s     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  5 two blocks of metal x and y hang from spring balances as shown in the diagram.    0  1  2  3  4  5  x0  1  2  3  4  5  ynn     what does the diagram show about x and y?  a they have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.  b they have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes. c they have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.  d they have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10 [turn over  6 the graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet p and on planet q.    0 2 04 06 08 0400 300200100 0weight  / nplanet p  planet q  mass  / kg    an object weighs 400  n on planet p. the object is taken to planet q.    which row is correct?     mass of object  on planet q  / kg weight of object  on planet q  / n  a 40 200  b 40 400  c 80 200  d 80 400     7 the diagram shows a rectangular block of density 2  g / cm3.    2 cm2 cm3 cm     what is the mass of the block?  a 2  g b 6  g c 14  g d 24  g     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  8 which statement about a moving object is correct?  a when an object is accelerating, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.  b when an object is moving at a steady speed, the air resistance acting on it must equal zero.  c when an object is moving at a steady speed, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.  d when an object is moving, there must be a resultant force acting on it.      9 an experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.    the results are shown below.    load  / n 0 1 2 3  length  / cm 15.2 16.2  18.6  extension  / cm 0 1.0 2.1 3.4    which figure is missing from the table?  a 17.2  b  17.3  c  17.4  d  17.6      10 energy is stored in a battery and in a box of matches.    which type of energy is stored in each of them?     a battery a box of matches  a chemical chemical  b chemical internal (thermal)  c electrical chemical  d electrical internal (thermal)      11 a man lifts 20 bricks, each of weight 6  n.    what other information is needed to calculate the useful work done in lifting the bricks?  a the distance he lifts the bricks  b the mass of the bricks c the time taken to lift the bricks  d the volume of the bricks     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10 [turn over  12 to prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.    board  soft ground cement mixer      why does this prevent the mixer sinking?  a the large area decreases the pressure on the ground.  b the large area increases the pressure on the ground.  c the large area decreases the weight on the ground.  d the large area increases the weight on the ground.      13 the pressure of a gas is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.    hmercurypressure to be measured     the mercury in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is less dense.     how does the value of h change?  a it becomes zero.  b it decreases, but not to zero.  c it stays the same .  d it increases.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  14 the diagram represents the molecules of a gas in a closed container of constant volume.        what happens to the molecules when the gas is heated?  a they expand.  b they hit the walls less often.  c they move further apart.  d they move more quickly.     15 a liquid is left in an open dish. after several days there is less liquid in the dish.    which statement explains this?  a the least energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.  b the least energetic molecules leave the surface and return.  c the most energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.  d the most energetic molecules leave the surface and return.      16 a thermometer has a scale which starts at \u201310  \u00b0c and ends at 110  \u00b0c.    \u201310 0 100 110 \u00b0c    what is the value of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point of the scale?     lower fixed point  / \u00b0c upper fixed point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 100  b \u201310 110  c 0 100  d 0 110     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10 [turn over  17 a student carries out an experiment to find the melting point of wax. the graph shows how the  temperature  of the wax changes as it cools.     00temperature / \u00b0c melting point of wax time x  y  z      which statement is correct?  a at x the temperature drops more slowly than at z.  b at y all the wax is solid.  c at y thermal energy is being given out by the wax.  d at z the wax molecules are not moving.      18 hot liquid in a vacuum flask cools extremely slowly. this is because some methods of heat  transfer cannot take place in a vacuum.    which methods cannot  take place in a vacuum?  a conduction and convection only  b conduction and radiation only  c convection and radiation only  d conduction, convection and radiation    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  19 a teacher demonstrates convection currents using a box with two chimneys and a lighted candle.  she holds a smoking taper at point p.    in which direction does the convection current cause the smoke to move?    chimney chimneyb c dap       20 which waves are longitudinal?    88:88b a c d  light waves from a lampsound waves from a trumpetmicrowaves in an ovenwater waves on a pond    21 a navigation buoy floating on the sea oscillates up and down as a wave passes.     navigation buoy     in exactly two minutes, six complete wavelengths pass the buoy.    what is the frequency of the waves?  a 0.050  hz b 0.33  hz c 3.0  hz d 20  hz   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10 [turn over  22 the diagram shows a ray of light incident on the edge of a piece of glass. the angle i is bigger  than the critical angle.    which arrow correctly shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the edge of the glass?    d bc aairglassray of lightnormal i      23 which diagram correctly shows rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?    object  lens image camera a b  object lensimagecamerac  object  lens image camera d object lensimagecamera     24 what is the approximate value of the highest frequency that can be heard by a young person?  a 20  hz b 200  hz c 2000  hz d 20 000  hz    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  25 a police car siren emits two different sounds p and q. these are produced alternately. the  diagram represents the sounds emitted.    q q p p p  time displacement     which sound is the louder and which has the lower pitch?     louder lower pitch  a p p  b p q  c q p  d q q      26 a magnet attracts two pieces of iron.    n s iron     what is the arrangement of the induced poles in the pieces of iron?    n s s n a  n s n s b  s n s n c  s n n s d      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10 [turn over  27 a piece of iron and a piece of steel are picked up by an electromagnet as shown.    ns iron steelelectromagnet     the current to the electromagnet is switched off.    what happens?  a both the iron and the steel remain magnetised.  b neither the iron nor the steel remain magnetised.  c only the iron remains magnetised.  d only the steel remains magnetised.     28 the table shows the lengths and diameters of four copper wires.    which wire has the least  resistance?     length  / m diameter  / mm  a 0.50 1.0  b 0.50 2.5  c 0.75 1.0  d 0.75 2.5    29 a circuit is set up to measure the resistance of a resistor r. the meter readings are 2.0  a and   3.0  v.    v a  r     what is the resistance of the resistor r?  a 0.67  \u03c9 b 1.5  \u03c9 c 5.0  \u03c9 d 6.0  \u03c9   ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  30 the circuit shown is a potential divider.    output x      what is component x?  a a light-dependent resistor  b a relay c a thermistor d a variable resistor      31 a lamp is connected in four circuits in turn, each using identical batteries.    the resistors are all identical.    in which circuit will the lamp be brightest?    a b c d     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10 [turn over  32 which diagram shows the correct positions for both the switch and the fuse?    alive wire fuseneutral wirelamp blive wirefuse neutral wirelamp clive wirefuse neutral wirelamp dlive wireswitch switch switch switch fuseneutral wirelamp      33 after some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.    what is the greatest hazard?  a a fire  b a fuse will blow  c an electric shock  d no current will flow     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  34 a coil is connected to a battery and a soft iron bar is hung near to it.    coil soft iron      the current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections.    how does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?     with the battery as shown with the battery reversed  a attracted to the coil attracted to the coil  b attracted to the coil repelled from the coil  c repelled from the coil attracted to the coil  d repelled from the coil repelled from the coil      35 a transformer has 15 000 turns on its primary coil and 750 turns on its secondary coil.    connected in this way, for what purpose could this transformer be used?  a to convert the 8000  v a.c. output of a power station to 160  000  v for long-distance power  transmission  b to convert the 160 000  v d.c. supply from a power line to 8000  v for local power transmission  c to use a 12  v d.c. supply to operate a 240  v razor  d to use a 240  v a.c. mains supply to operate a 12  v motor      36 what are cathode rays?  a a beam of electrons  b a beam of neutrons  c a beam of protons  d electromagnetic waves    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  37 a cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode.    which row shows the charge on the anode  and the temperature of the cathode ?     anode charge cathode  temperature  a negative cool  b negative hot  c positive cool  d positive hot      38 which row describes the properties of \u03b1-particles?     ionizing  effect radiation stopped  by aluminium?  a large no  b large yes  c small no  d small yes     39 a radioactive substance has a half-life of 2 weeks. at the beginning of an investigation the  substance emits 3000 \u03b2-particles per minute.    how many \u03b2-particles will it emit per minute after 6 weeks?  a 0 b 375 c 500 d 1500     40 the nuclide notation for radium-226 is ra226 88 .    how many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226?  a 0 b 88 c 138 d 226     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  blank page     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  blank page      ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/m/j/10  blank page    "
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib10 06_0625_12/rp  \u00a9 ucles 2010  [turn over      *3778120552* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education        physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2010     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  1 a student uses a stopwatch to time a runner running around a circular track. the runner runs two  laps (twice around the track). the diagrams show the reading on the stopwatch when the runner  starts running, at the end of the first lap, and at the end of the second lap.    reading when runner startsreading at end of first lapreading at end of second lap    what is the time taken for the runner to run the second lap?  a 0 min 50 s b 1 min 10 s c 1 min 13 s d 2 min 03 s     2 a snail moves along a ruler. it takes 20  s to move from q to r.    p  0 q  2 r  12 cm    what is its average speed from q to r?  a 2012cm  / s  b 202 12\u2212cm  / s  c 1220cm  / s  d 2 1220 \u2212cm  / s     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10 [turn over  3 a scientist needs to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped rock sample. only a rule  and a measuring cylinder, partially filled with water, are available.    measuring  cylinder rock sample rule cm3 cm     to determine the volume, which apparatus should the scientist use?  a both the measuring cylinder and the rule  b neither the measuring cylinder nor the rule  c the measuring cylinder only  d the rule only      4 the diagram shows a rectangular block of density 2  g / cm3.    2 cm2 cm3 cm     what is the mass of the block?  a 2  g b 6  g c 14  g d 24  g     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  5 two distance  / time graphs and two speed  / time graphs are shown.    which graph represents an object that is at rest?    a  distance  time b  distance  time  c  speed  time d  speed  time 0000 0000      6 which statement about a moving object is correct?  a when an object is accelerating, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.  b when an object is moving at a steady speed, the air resistance acting on it must equal zero.  c when an object is moving at a steady speed, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.  d when an object is moving, there must be a resultant force acting on it.    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10 [turn over  7 an experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.    the results are shown below.    load  / n 0 1 2 3  length  / cm 15.2 16.2  18.6  extension  / cm 0 1.0 2.1 3.4    which figure is missing from the table?  a 17.2  b  17.3  c  17.4  d  17.6      8 two blocks of metal x and y hang from spring balances as shown in the diagram.    0  1  2  3  4  5  x0  1  2  3  4  5  ynn     what does the diagram show about x and y?  a they have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.  b they have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.  c they have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.  d they have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  9 the graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet p and on planet q.    0 2 04 06 08 0400 300200100 0weight  / nplanet p  planet q  mass  / kg    an object weighs 400  n on planet p. the object is taken to planet q.    which row is correct?     mass of object  on planet q  / kg weight of object  on planet q  / n  a 40 200  b 40 400  c 80 200  d 80 400     10 a man lifts 20 bricks, each of weight 6  n.    what other information is needed to calculate the useful work done in lifting the bricks?  a the distance he lifts the bricks  b the mass of the bricks c the time taken to lift the bricks d the volume of the bricks     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10 [turn over  11 to prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.    board  soft ground cement mixer      why does this prevent the mixer sinking?  a the large area decreases the pressure on the ground.  b the large area increases the pressure on the ground.  c the large area decreases the weight on the ground.  d the large area increases the weight on the ground.      12 the pressure of a gas is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.    hmercurypressure to be measured     the mercury in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is less dense.     how does the value of h change?  a it becomes zero.  b it decreases, but not to zero.  c it stays the same .  d it increases.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  13 a thermometer has a scale which starts at \u201310  \u00b0c and ends at 110  \u00b0c.    \u201310 0 100 110 \u00b0c    what is the value of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point of the scale?     lower fixed point  / \u00b0c upper fixed point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 100  b \u201310 110  c 0 100  d 0 110      14 energy is stored in a battery and in a box of matches.    which type of energy is stored in each of them?     a battery a box of matches  a chemical chemical  b chemical internal (thermal)  c electrical chemical  d electrical internal (thermal)      15 hot liquid in a vacuum flask cools extremely slowly. this is because some methods of heat  transfer cannot take place in a vacuum.    which methods cannot  take place in a vacuum?  a conduction and convection only  b conduction and radiation only  c convection and radiation only  d conduction, convection and radiation     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10 [turn over  16 a teacher demonstrates convection currents using a box with two chimneys and a lighted candle.  she holds a smoking taper at point p.    in which direction does the convection current cause the smoke to move?    chimney chimneyb c dap       17 the diagram represents the molecules of a gas in a closed container of constant volume.        what happens to the molecules when the gas is heated?  a they expand.  b they hit the walls less often.  c they move further apart.  d they move more quickly.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  18 a liquid is left in an open dish. after several days there is less liquid in the dish.    which statement explains this?  a the least energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.  b the least energetic molecules leave the surface and return.  c the most energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.  d the most energetic molecules leave the surface and return.     19 a student carries out an experiment to find the melting point of wax. the graph shows how the  temperature  of the wax changes as it cools.     00temperature / \u00b0c melting point of wax time x  y  z      which statement is correct?  a at x the temperature drops more slowly than at z.  b at y all the wax is solid.  c at y thermal energy is being given out by the wax.  d at z the wax molecules are not moving.     20 which waves are longitudinal?    88:88b a c d  light waves from a lampsound waves from a trumpetmicrowaves in an ovenwater waves on a pond    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10 [turn over  21 a police car siren emits two different sounds p and q. these are produced alternately. the  diagram represents the sounds emitted.    q q p p p  time displacement     which sound is the louder and which has the lower pitch?     louder lower pitch  a p p  b p q  c q p  d q q      22 what is the approximate value of the highest frequency that can be heard by a young person?  a 20  hz b 200  hz c 2000  hz d 20 000  hz      23 a navigation buoy floating on the sea oscillates up and down as a wave passes.     navigation buoy     in exactly two minutes, six complete wavelengths pass the buoy.    what is the frequency of the waves?  a 0.050  hz b 0.33  hz c 3.0  hz d 20  hz     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  24 which diagram correctly shows rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?    object  lens image camera a b  object lensimagecamerac  object  lens image camera d object lensimagecamera      25 the diagram shows a ray of light incident on the edge of a piece of glass. the angle i is bigger  than the critical angle.    which arrow correctly shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the edge of the glass?    d bc aairglassray of lightnormal i      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10 [turn over  26 a magnet attracts two pieces of iron.    n s iron     what is the arrangement of the induced poles in the pieces of iron?    n s s n a  n s n s b  s n s n c  s n n s d      27 a coil is connected to a battery and a soft iron bar is hung near to it.    coil soft iron      the current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections.    how does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?     with the battery as shown with the battery reversed  a attracted to the coil attracted to the coil  b attracted to the coil repelled from the coil  c repelled from the coil attracted to the coil  d repelled from the coil repelled from the coil    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  28 a piece of iron and a piece of steel are picked up by an electromagnet as shown.    ns iron steelelectromagnet     the current to the electromagnet is switched off.    what happens?  a both the iron and the steel remain magnetised.  b neither the iron nor the steel remain magnetised.  c only the iron remains magnetised.  d only the steel remains magnetised.     29 a lamp is connected in four circuits in turn, each using identical batteries.    the resistors are all identical.    in which circuit will the lamp be brightest?    a b c d  ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10 [turn over  30 a circuit is set up to measure the resistance of a resistor r. the meter readings are 2.0  a and   3.0  v.    v a  r     what is the resistance of the resistor r?  a 0.67  \u03c9 b 1.5  \u03c9 c 5.0  \u03c9 d 6.0  \u03c9      31 the table shows the lengths and diameters of four copper wires.    which wire has the least  resistance?     length  / m diameter  / mm  a 0.50 1.0  b 0.50 2.5  c 0.75 1.0  d 0.75 2.5      32 the circuit shown is a potential divider.    output x      what is component x?  a a light-dependent resistor  b a relay c a thermistor d a variable resistor     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  33 a transformer has 15 000 turns on its primary coil and 750 turns on its secondary coil.    connected in this way, for what purpose could this transformer be used?  a to convert the 8000  v a.c. output of a power station to 160  000  v for long-distance power  transmission  b to convert the 160 000  v d.c. supply from a power line to 8000  v for local power transmission  c to use a 12  v d.c. supply to operate a 240  v razor  d to use a 240  v a.c. mains supply to operate a 12  v motor     34 after some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.    what is the greatest hazard?  a a fire  b a fuse will blow  c an electric shock  d no current will flow     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10 [turn over  35 which diagram shows the correct positions for both the switch and the fuse?    alive wire fuseneutral wirelamp blive wirefuse neutral wirelamp clive wirefuse neutral wirelamp dlive wireswitch switch switch switch fuseneutral wirelamp       36 the nuclide notation for radium-226 is ra226 88 .    how many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226?  a 0 b 88 c 138 d 226      37 a radioactive substance has a half-life of 2 weeks. at the beginning of an investigation the  substance emits 3000 \u03b2-particles per minute.    how many \u03b2-particles will it emit per minute after 6 weeks?  a 0 b 375 c 500 d 1500    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  38 which row describes the properties of \u03b1-particles?     ionizing  effect radiation stopped  by aluminium?  a large no  b large yes  c small no  d small yes     39 what are cathode rays?  a a beam of electrons  b a beam of neutrons  c a beam of protons  d electromagnetic waves    40 a cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode.    which row shows the charge on the anode  and the temperature of the cathode ?     anode charge cathode  temperature  a negative cool  b negative hot  c positive cool  d positive hot    ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  blank page     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/m/j/10  blank page    "
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib10 06_0625_13/rp  \u00a9 ucles 2010  [turn over      *1424360 968* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2010     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  1 a student uses a stopwatch to time a runner running around a circular track. the runner runs two  laps (twice around the track). the diagrams show the reading on the stopwatch when the runner  starts running, at the end of the first lap, and at the end of the second lap.    reading when runner startsreading at end of first lapreading at end of second lap    what is the time taken for the runner to run the second lap?  a 0 min 50 s b 1 min 10 s c 1 min 13 s d 2 min 03 s     2 a snail moves along a ruler. it takes 20  s to move from q to r.    p  0 q  2 r  12 cm    what is its average speed from q to r?  a 2012cm  / s  b 202 12\u2212cm  / s  c 1220cm  / s  d 2 1220 \u2212cm  / s     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10 [turn over  3 a scientist needs to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped rock sample. only a rule  and a measuring cylinder, partially filled with water, are available.    measuring  cylinder rock sample rule cm3 cm     to determine the volume, which apparatus should the scientist use?  a both the measuring cylinder and the rule  b neither the measuring cylinder nor the rule  c the measuring cylinder only  d the rule only      4 the diagram shows a rectangular block of density 2  g / cm3.    2 cm2 cm3 cm     what is the mass of the block?  a 2  g b 6  g c 14  g d 24  g     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  5 two distance  / time graphs and two speed  / time graphs are shown.    which graph represents an object that is at rest?    a  distance  time b  distance  time  c  speed  time d  speed  time 0000 0000      6 which statement about a moving object is correct?  a when an object is accelerating, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.  b when an object is moving at a steady speed, the air resistance acting on it must equal zero.  c when an object is moving at a steady speed, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.  d when an object is moving, there must be a resultant force acting on it.    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10 [turn over  7 an experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.    the results are shown below.    load  / n 0 1 2 3  length  / cm 15.2 16.2  18.6  extension  / cm 0 1.0 2.1 3.4    which figure is missing from the table?  a 17.2  b  17.3  c  17.4  d  17.6      8 two blocks of metal x and y hang from spring balances as shown in the diagram.    0  1  2  3  4  5  x0  1  2  3  4  5  ynn     what does the diagram show about x and y?  a they have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.  b they have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.  c they have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.  d they have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  9 the graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet p and on planet q.    0 2 04 06 08 0400 300200100 0weight  / nplanet p  planet q  mass  / kg    an object weighs 400  n on planet p. the object is taken to planet q.    which row is correct?     mass of object  on planet q  / kg weight of object  on planet q  / n  a 40 200  b 40 400  c 80 200  d 80 400     10 a man lifts 20 bricks, each of weight 6  n.    what other information is needed to calculate the useful work done in lifting the bricks?  a the distance he lifts the bricks  b the mass of the bricks c the time taken to lift the bricks d the volume of the bricks     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10 [turn over  11 to prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.    board  soft ground cement mixer      why does this prevent the mixer sinking?  a the large area decreases the pressure on the ground.  b the large area increases the pressure on the ground.  c the large area decreases the weight on the ground.  d the large area increases the weight on the ground.      12 the pressure of a gas is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.    hmercurypressure to be measured     the mercury in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is less dense.     how does the value of h change?  a it becomes zero.  b it decreases, but not to zero.  c it stays the same .  d it increases.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  13 a thermometer has a scale which starts at \u201310  \u00b0c and ends at 110  \u00b0c.    \u201310 0 100 110 \u00b0c    what is the value of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point of the scale?     lower fixed point  / \u00b0c upper fixed point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 100  b \u201310 110  c 0 100  d 0 110      14 energy is stored in a battery and in a box of matches.    which type of energy is stored in each of them?     a battery a box of matches  a chemical chemical  b chemical internal (thermal)  c electrical chemical  d electrical internal (thermal)      15 hot liquid in a vacuum flask cools extremely slowly. this is because some methods of heat  transfer cannot take place in a vacuum.    which methods cannot  take place in a vacuum?  a conduction and convection only  b conduction and radiation only  c convection and radiation only  d conduction, convection and radiation     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10 [turn over  16 a teacher demonstrates convection currents using a box with two chimneys and a lighted candle.  she holds a smoking taper at point p.    in which direction does the convection current cause the smoke to move?    chimney chimneyb c dap       17 the diagram represents the molecules of a gas in a closed container of constant volume.        what happens to the molecules when the gas is heated?  a they expand.  b they hit the walls less often.  c they move further apart.  d they move more quickly.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  18 a liquid is left in an open dish. after several days there is less liquid in the dish.    which statement explains this?  a the least energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.  b the least energetic molecules leave the surface and return.  c the most energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.  d the most energetic molecules leave the surface and return.     19 a student carries out an experiment to find the melting point of wax. the graph shows how the  temperature  of the wax changes as it cools.     00temperature / \u00b0c melting point of wax time x  y  z      which statement is correct?  a at x the temperature drops more slowly than at z.  b at y all the wax is solid.  c at y thermal energy is being given out by the wax.  d at z the wax molecules are not moving.     20 which waves are longitudinal?    88:88b a c d  light waves from a lampsound waves from a trumpetmicrowaves in an ovenwater waves on a pond    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10 [turn over  21 a police car siren emits two different sounds p and q. these are produced alternately. the  diagram represents the sounds emitted.    q q p p p  time displacement     which sound is the louder and which has the lower pitch?     louder lower pitch  a p p  b p q  c q p  d q q      22 what is the approximate value of the highest frequency that can be heard by a young person?  a 20  hz b 200  hz c 2000  hz d 20 000  hz      23 a navigation buoy floating on the sea oscillates up and down as a wave passes.     navigation buoy     in exactly two minutes, six complete wavelengths pass the buoy.    what is the frequency of the waves?  a 0.050  hz b 0.33  hz c 3.0  hz d 20  hz     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  24 which diagram correctly shows rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?    object  lens image camera a b  object lensimagecamerac  object  lens image camera d object lensimagecamera      25 the diagram shows a ray of light incident on the edge of a piece of glass. the angle i is bigger  than the critical angle.    which arrow correctly shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the edge of the glass?    d bc aairglassray of lightnormal i      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10 [turn over  26 a magnet attracts two pieces of iron.    n s iron     what is the arrangement of the induced poles in the pieces of iron?    n s s n a  n s n s b  s n s n c  s n n s d      27 a coil is connected to a battery and a soft iron bar is hung near to it.    coil soft iron      the current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections.    how does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?     with the battery as shown with the battery reversed  a attracted to the coil attracted to the coil  b attracted to the coil repelled from the coil  c repelled from the coil attracted to the coil  d repelled from the coil repelled from the coil    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  28 a piece of iron and a piece of steel are picked up by an electromagnet as shown.    ns iron steelelectromagnet     the current to the electromagnet is switched off.    what happens?  a both the iron and the steel remain magnetised.  b neither the iron nor the steel remain magnetised.  c only the iron remains magnetised.  d only the steel remains magnetised.     29 a lamp is connected in four circuits in turn, each using identical batteries.    the resistors are all identical.    in which circuit will the lamp be brightest?    a b c d  ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10 [turn over  30 a circuit is set up to measure the resistance of a resistor r. the meter readings are 2.0  a and   3.0  v.    v a  r     what is the resistance of the resistor r?  a 0.67  \u03c9 b 1.5  \u03c9 c 5.0  \u03c9 d 6.0  \u03c9      31 the table shows the lengths and diameters of four copper wires.    which wire has the least  resistance?     length  / m diameter  / mm  a 0.50 1.0  b 0.50 2.5  c 0.75 1.0  d 0.75 2.5      32 the circuit shown is a potential divider.    output x      what is component x?  a a light-dependent resistor  b a relay c a thermistor d a variable resistor     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  33 a transformer has 15 000 turns on its primary coil and 750 turns on its secondary coil.    connected in this way, for what purpose could this transformer be used?  a to convert the 8000  v a.c. output of a power station to 160  000  v for long-distance power  transmission  b to convert the 160 000  v d.c. supply from a power line to 8000  v for local power transmission  c to use a 12  v d.c. supply to operate a 240  v razor  d to use a 240  v a.c. mains supply to operate a 12  v motor     34 after some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.    what is the greatest hazard?  a a fire  b a fuse will blow  c an electric shock  d no current will flow     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10 [turn over  35 which diagram shows the correct positions for both the switch and the fuse?    alive wire fuseneutral wirelamp blive wirefuse neutral wirelamp clive wirefuse neutral wirelamp dlive wireswitch switch switch switch fuseneutral wirelamp       36 the nuclide notation for radium-226 is ra226 88 .    how many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226?  a 0 b 88 c 138 d 226      37 a radioactive substance has a half-life of 2 weeks. at the beginning of an investigation the  substance emits 3000 \u03b2-particles per minute.    how many \u03b2-particles will it emit per minute after 6 weeks?  a 0 b 375 c 500 d 1500    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  38 which row describes the properties of \u03b1-particles?     ionizing  effect radiation stopped  by aluminium?  a large no  b large yes  c small no  d small yes     39 what are cathode rays?  a a beam of electrons  b a beam of neutrons  c a beam of protons  d electromagnetic waves    40 a cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode.    which row shows the charge on the anode  and the temperature of the cathode ?     anode charge cathode  temperature  a negative cool  b negative hot  c positive cool  d positive hot      ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  blank page     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/m/j/10  blank page     "
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dca (shw 00380 1/09) 20403/6 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *2425863101*physics 0625/21 paper 2 core may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 imagine that you live beside a busy road. one of your neighbours thinks that many of the  vehicles are travelling faster than the speed limit for the road.  y ou decide to check this by measuring the speeds of some of the vehicles.  (a) which two quantities will you need to measure in order to find the speed of a vehicle, and which instruments would you use to measure them? quantity measured instrument used  [4]  (b) state the equation you would use to calculate the speed of the vehicle. if you use symbols, state what your symbols mean. [1]  (c) one lorry travels from your town to another town. the lorry reaches a top speed of 90 km / h, but its average speed between the towns is only 66 km / h.   (i) why is the average speed less than the top speed?  .. ..   [1]   (ii) the journey between the towns takes 20 minutes.    calculate the distance between the towns.  distance =  ..  km [3] [total: 9]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 a helical spring is hung from the edge of a bench top, as shown in fig. 2.1. 1000 29.8 cmbench top 1000 62.8 cmspringpin metre rule load = 5.5  n fig. 2.1  before the load is hung on the spring, the pin points to the 29.8 cm mark on the metre rule.  when a load of 5.5 n is hung on the spring, the pin points to 62.8 cm.  (a) calculate the extension of the spring.  extension =  ..  cm [2]  (b) the law relating extension to load is given by the equation load = constant \u00d7 extension.   (i) calculate the numerical value of the constant.  constant =    [2]   (ii) suggest a suitable unit for the constant.    [1] [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 (a) fig. 3.1 represents the energy into and out of a machine. input energy i wasted energy wuseful output energy u fig. 3.1   write down the equation linking i, u and w.    [1]  (b) an electric motor and a pulley in a warehouse are being used to lift a packing case of  goods from the ground up to a higher level. this is shown in fig. 3.2. cablepulley chains pallet groundpacking caseelectric motor fig. 3.2   the packing case of goods, the chains and the pallet together weigh 850 n.   (i) state the value of the tension force in the cable when the load is being lifted at a  steady speed.  tension force =  . n [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) when the load is just leaving the floor, why is the force larger than your answer to  (b)(i)?  ..   [1]   (iii) the warehouse manager wishes to calculate the useful work done when the load  is lifted from the ground to the higher level. which quantity, other than the weight, does he need to measure?    [1]   (iv) which further quantity does the manager need to know, in order to calculate the  power required to lift the load?    [1]  (c) how does the electrical energy supplied to the electric motor compare with the increase  in energy of the load? answer by completing the sentence below.   the electrical energy supplied to the motor is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the   increase in energy of the load. [1] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) a musical note is being produced by a loudspeaker connected to a signal generator.   a person is listening to the note, as shown in fig. 4.1. signal generator amplitude frequency fig. 4.1   by adjusting the controls on the signal generator, the amplitude and the frequency of  the note from the loudspeaker can each be changed.   the person moves to a position further away from the loudspeaker.   (i) state what, if anything, happens to1. the pitch of the sound heard,  ...2. the loudness of the sound heard.  .  [2]   (ii) what adjustment, if any, should be made to the two controls so that the sound  heard in the new position is the same as in the original position? frequency control  ..amplitude control    [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 4.2 shows a girl standing some distance from a rock face. she has a bell in her  hand. rock face fig. 4.2   the girl rings the bell once. after a short time the sound of the bell reaches her again.   (i) why did the sound return to her?   [1]   (ii) why was there a short time delay before the girl heard the second sound?   [1] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a child\u2019s toy. it is made out of wood, in the shape of a bird. the toy includes a  metal weight stuck to the tail. when placed on a metal rod, the toy balances in equilibrium. metal weightmetal rod  fig. 5.1  (a) on fig. 5.1, mark with the letter x a possible position for the centre of mass of the toy. [1]  (b) the metal weight falls off the tail.   (i) on fig. 5.1, mark with the letter y a possible new position for the centre of mass. [1]   (ii) what happens to the toy immediately after the metal weight falls off?  .. ..   [2] [total: 4]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a beaker in which coffee is served at an airport kiosk.    section through beaker layer of corrugated cardboard stuck to a layer of smooth cardboard, with air trapped between them  fig. 6.1 fig. 6.2   the beaker itself is made of two layers of cardboard, as shown in section in fig. 6.2. it  has a thin plastic lid.   (i) state two sources of heat loss that are reduced by the lid. 1. ...2. .  [2]   (ii) state two reasons why the layer of corrugated cardboard stops the fingers of the  person holding the beaker from becoming uncomfortably hot. 1. ...2. .  [2]  (b) (i) state the meaning of the term thermal capacity. ..   [2]   (ii) another airport kiosk serves coffee in pottery mugs. the mugs all have the same  internal dimensions but some have a high thermal capacity and some have a low thermal capacity.    when hot drinks are poured into the mugs, the temperature of the drink always drops because of the thermal energy absorbed by the mug.    state which mug, high thermal capacity or low thermal capacity, causes the least fall in temperature of the hot drink, and explain why. mug  ..explanation  .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use7 the electric lamp in fig. 7.1 has \u201c240 v, 100 w\u201d marked on it. its filament is a coiled coil of  fine tungsten wire, as shown in fig. 7.2.  fig. 7.1 fig. 7.2  (a) (i) to give out white light, the filament has to reach a very high temperature.    suggest why having the filament as a coiled coil helps to achieve this high temperature.  .. ..   [1]   (ii) if your hand is close to the lamp when it is switched on for a few seconds, you can  feel warmth from the lamp but the glass will remain cool.    by what method has the thermal energy reached your hand? tick one box.     conduction      convection      evaporation      radiation  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) the markings on the lamp give electrical information about the lamp when it is  operating normally.    state the value of 1. the normal operating potential difference across the lamp,  ...2. the power of the lamp.  .  [2]   (ii) when the lamp is working normally, its resistance is 576  /afii9821.    calculate the current in the lamp.  current =    [4] [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows how an image is formed by a converging lens. o f2 f1i24 cm 10 cm 8cm fig. 8.1  (a) state the value of the focal length of the lens.  focal length =  ..  cm [1]  (b) the object o is moved a small distance to the left.   state two things that happen to the image i. 1.  .. 2.    [2]  (c) points f1 and f2 are marked on fig. 8.1.   (i) state the name we give to these two points.   [1]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, draw the ray from the top of the object which passes through f 2.    continue your ray until it meets the image. [4] [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 (a) a warning on the packaging of a light switch purchased from an electrical store reads safety warning this push-button switch is not suitable for use in a washroom. lights in washrooms should be  operated by pull-cord switches.   (i) explain why it might be dangerous to use a push-button switch in a washroom.  .. ..   [2]   (ii) why is it safe to use a pull-cord switch in a washroom? ..   [1]  (b) an electric heater, sold in the electrical store, has a current of 8 a when it is working  normally.   the cable fitted to the heater has a maximum safe current of 12 a.   which of the following fuses would be most suitable to use in the plug fitted to the cable  of the heater? tick one box.    5 a       10 a      13 a      20 a   [1]  (c) the cable for connecting an electric cooker is much thicker than the cable on a table  lamp.   (i) why do cookers need a much thicker cable?  ..   [1]   (ii) what would happen if a thin cable were used for wiring a cooker to the supply? ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use10 a transformer has 500 turns in both its primary and its secondary coils. it is connected to a  240 v mains supply. there are 4 possible connections to the secondary, labelled w, x, y and z on fig. 10.1. p w x y z240  v primary coil 500 turnssecondary coil 500 turns fig. 10.1  between w and x there are 300 turns.  between x and y there are 175 turns.  between y and z there are 25 turns.  (a) a person wishes to run a 12 v electric bell, using the transformer.   between which two of the labelled terminals should the bell be connected?   show your working.  bell connected between terminal  .  and terminal    [4]  (b) state the voltage between terminals w and z.    [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) state the name given to the part labelled p and the material from which it is made. name  material  ..  [2]  (d) why are the coils normally made from copper wire? ..   [1] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use11 fig. 11.1 shows apparatus being used to project a visible spectrum onto a screen, using a  lamp with a white-hot filament. p qa bvisible spectrumscreen glass prism glass lens filament lamp (white light source) fig. 11.1  (a) state two things that happen to the white light as it passes through surface pq of the prism. 1.  ..2.    [2]  (b) what colour light will be seen at   (i) edge a of the spectrum,  ...   (ii) edge b of the spectrum?  .. [2]  (c) a thermometer with a blackened bulb is moved very slowly across the screen.   (i) on fig. 11.1, mark using a cross ( \u00d7) the position where the thermometer will show  its largest reading. [2]   (ii) what type of radiation would cause this high reading?   [1] [total: 7]",
            "17": "17 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use12 (a) a scientist, who is also an antiques collector, buys an old watch at an antiques market.  the figures on the dial of the watch are painted with a type of luminous paint that is radioactive.   in his laboratory, he puts the watch close to a radiation detector and then places sheets  of different materials in the gap between them, as shown in fig. 12.1. watch sheetradiation detector counter fig. 12.1   the results of his investigation are given in the following table. material effect sheet of paper no observable change in count rate 1 mm thick sheet of aluminium a noticeable decrease in the count rate 1 mm thick sheet of leadconsiderable decrease in the count rate  but still above background   (i) from this information, deduce the type or types of radiation escaping from the watch.  .. ..   [2]   (ii) the back of the watch is made of steel 1 mm thick.    state one reason why there would be a health hazard when wearing this watch. .. ..   [1]",
            "18": "18 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (b) radioactive materials are stored in a cupboard.   (i) which of the symbols shown in fig. 12.2 is used on the door of the cupboard to  warn of the radiation hazard? tick one box. fig. 12.2 [1]   (ii) state one other safety precaution that should be taken when storing the radioactive substances in the cupboard.  ..   [1] [total: 5]",
            "19": "19 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/21/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dca (shw 00379 1/09) 20865/5 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *9522988088 *physics 0625/22 paper 2 core may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 five identical steel balls are measured with a rule graduated in cm, as shown in fig. 1.1. 123456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0cmwooden block fig. 1.1  (a) use fig. 1.1 to find the diameter of one ball.  diameter of ball =  ..  cm [2]  (b) what instrument would be used to measure the mass of a ball?    [1]  (c) another ball has a volume of 9.0 cm3 and a mass of 72 g.   calculate the density of this ball.  density =    [4] [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 (a) fig. 2.1 shows a space probe, far out into space, where there is no atmosphere. it is  moving at a constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow. rocket motors fig. 2.1   is a force necessary to keep the probe moving like this? tick one box.    yes       no      if your answer is \u201cyes\u201d, draw an arrow on the diagram to show this force. [1]  (b) fig. 2.2 shows the space probe just after the rocket motors are fired. exhaust gases fig. 2.2   state what effect this has on the space probe.  ..    [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (c) later into its mission, the space probe is brought back into the earth\u2019s atmosphere  again, with no rockets working.   suggest two effects that the atmosphere has on the space probe. 1.  .. 2.    [2] [total: 5]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 (a) here is a list of some energy resources which might be used to generate electricity.   put a tick in the box alongside any of these which relies on a fuel being consumed.    oil       hydroelectricity     nuclear fission     wind     w a v e s   [2]  (b) here is a list of devices which convert energy from one form to another. battery, electric motor, gas lamp, gas fire, generator, loudspeaker, microphone   which of these is designed to convert   (i) chemical energy into light energy, ..   (ii) electrical energy into mechanical energy, ..   (iii) sound energy into electrical energy? .. [3] [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) fig. 4.1 shows end views of the walls built by two bricklayers. ab soil reinforced concrete foundationreinforced concrete foundation fig. 4.1   which wall is the least likely to sink into the soil, and why?  ..  .. ..   [2]  (b) fig. 4.2 shows two horizontal squares p and q. q p fig. 4.2   the atmosphere is pressing down on both p and q.  (i) name two quantities that would need to be known in order to calculate the  atmospheric pressure on square p . 1. ...2. .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the area of p is four times that of q.    complete the following sentences.    1. the atmospheric pressure on p is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the      atmospheric pressure on q.    2. the force of the atmosphere on p is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the      force of the atmosphere on q. [3] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a device called a thermostat, which is being used to control the temperature  of the air in a room. brass striptemperature control screw contactsx yinsulatorpower supply heater fig. 5.1  x and y are strips of two different metals, joined together along their length. together they  are called a bimetallic strip. x expands more than y for the same temperature rise.  (a) the temperature rises and the bimetallic strip bends.   state   (i) which way the bimetallic strip bends,   [1]   (ii) what happens to the contacts,   [1]   (iii) what happens to the current in the circuit,   [1]   (iv) what adjustment could be made to this thermostat, in order to increase the  temperature at which the thermostat operates.  ..   [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 5.2 shows how the temperature of the water in a tank would rise if it were heated  continuously, starting with water at a temperature of 0 \u00b0c. 0 0 time  / minutestemperature / \u00b0c 10 20 30 40 50 60 701020304050607080 fig. 5.2   the thermostat controlling the temperature of the water switches off the heater current  when the temperature rises above 50 \u00b0c.   (i) use fig. 5.2 to determine how long the water is heated before the thermostat  operates.  time =  ... minutes [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the heater supplies energy at the rate of 2000 w.    calculate how much thermal energy is supplied to the water before the thermostat  switches off the heater.  energy =  .  j [3] [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use6 (a) fig. 6.1 illustrates a sound wave travelling through the air. direction of wave travel fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, mark clearly the direction in which the air particles are moving. [1]   (ii) use fig. 6.1 to measure the wavelength of the sound wave.  wavelength =  ..  cm [1]   (iii) the pitch of the sound wave is raised.    state how the sound wave pattern would differ from that shown in fig. 6.1.  ..   [1]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a section through a series of waves on water. direction of wave travel fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, mark clearly the direction in which the water molecules are moving. [1]   (ii) from fig. 6.2, measure the wavelength of the water wave.  wavelength =  ..  cm [1]   (iii) the amplitude of the water waves is increased.    state how the appearance of the water waves would differ from that shown in  fig. 6.2.  ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) a ray of light passes through one surface of a glass prism at right angles to the surface,  as shown in fig. 7.1. ray of light 45\u00b0 45\u00b0a fig. 7.1   (i) state why the ray is not deviated as it passes through the surface into the glass at a.  ..   [1]   (ii) on fig. 7.1, use a ruler to help you draw the rest of the path of the ray, until it has  emerged again into the air. [3]  (b) fig. 7.2 shows a periscope that uses two plane mirrors. mirror a mirror b fig. 7.2   (i) on fig. 7.2, clearly mark the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at  mirror a. [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) state the equation linking i and r. [1]   (iii) in the space below, use a ruler to redraw the periscope, but using prisms like that in  fig. 7.1 instead of mirrors at a and b. [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a 6 v lamp, two switches and a 6 v motorcycle battery.  the lamp has a resistance of 10 /afii9821 when it is glowing normally. s1 s2 6 v 6 v, 10  /afii9821 fig. 8.1   how can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? tick the box alongside any  action which will do this.    close s1 only     close s2 only     close both s1 and s2  [1]  (b) fig. 8.2 shows a similar circuit, but the switches are arranged in parallel. s1 s2 6 v, 10  x 6 v fig. 8.2   how can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? tick the box alongside any  action which will do this.    close s1 only     close s2 only     close both s1 and s2  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the lamp is now connected to a 12 v car battery, as shown in fig. 8.3. s 12v 6 v, 10  /afii9821 fig. 8.3   state why it would not be wise to close switch s.  ..    [1]  (d) resistor r is connected in series with the lamp, as shown in fig. 8.4. s 6 v, 10  /afii9821r 12 v fig. 8.4   (i) state what value r must have, in order to enable the lamp to have 6 v across it  when s is closed.  resistance =    /afii9821 [1]   (ii) with this resistor and the lamp in series, calculate the current in the circuit.  current =    [4] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use9 fill in the gaps in the sentences below, using only appropriate words from the following list.  do not use any word more than once. charge, current, few, many, potential difference, resistance  insulators are materials which possess very \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 free electrons.  because of this, when a \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 is applied across an  insulator, the electric \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 in it is very small.  the \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 of a piece of insulator is likely to be very high. [3] [total: 3]",
            "17": "17 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use10 (a) (i) what is an electromagnet?  .. ..   [1]   (ii) state one very useful property of an electromagnet. ..   [1]  (b) an iron bar has many turns of wire wrapped around it, as shown in fig. 10.1. the wire is  connected to an alternating current supply. alternating current supplyiron bar flat coillow voltage lamp fig. 10.1   some more wire is made into a flat coil and connected across a low voltage lamp. when  the flat coil is held close to the end of the iron bar, the lamp glows.   explain why this happens.  ..  .. .. ..   [3]",
            "18": "18 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (c) fig. 10.2 shows a relay being used to switch an electric motor m on and off. m  s core springy metal  contacts  a  b  pivot  iron armature insulator  coil of  wire  fig. 10.2   switch s is closed. state what happens to   (i) the core, ..   [1]   (ii) the iron armature, ..   [1]   (iii) the contacts a and b. ..   [1]  (d) a suggestion is made that the relay would work better if the armature were made of  steel instead of iron.   explain why this is not a good idea.  ..    [2] [total: 10]",
            "19": "19 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 (a) state what is meant by thermionic emission.  ..   [2]  (b) in fig. 11.1, a beam of cathode rays is entering the space between two charged metal  plates. + \u2013cathode rays fig. 11.1   (i) what sort of particles make up cathode rays? tick one box.     /afii9825-particles      electrons      neutrons      protons  [1]   (ii) on fig. 11.1, continue the dotted line to show the path of the cathode rays as they travel between the plates and into the space beyond the plates. [3] [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use12 (a) four students attempt to define the half-life of a sample of radioactive substance.   student a half-life is half the time for the activity of the sample to decrease to zero.   student b  half-life is half the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to  half its original value.   student c  half-life is the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to half its original value. which student has given a correct definition?  ...  [1]  (b) fig. 12.1 shows two samples of the same radioactive substance. the substance emits  /afii9826-particles. fig. 12.1   put a tick alongside any of the following quantities which is the same for both samples.    the half-life of the samples     the mass of the samples     the number of atoms decaying each second     the number of /afii9826-particles emitted per second  [1]",
            "21": "21 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (c) a quantity of radioactive material has to be taken from a nuclear reactor to a factory  some distance away. fig. 12.2 shows the decay curve for the quantity of radioactive material. 0 0 time  / hourscounts  / minutecount rate 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16500100015002000 fig. 12.2   just before it leaves the nuclear reactor, the count-rate from the material is 2000  counts / minute. when it arrives at the factory, the count-rate is 1000 counts / minute.   (i) how long did the journey take?  .  hours [1]   (ii) how many half-lives elapsed during the journey?  ...  [1]   (iii) the material is only useful to the factory if the activity is at least 100 counts / minute.    use fig. 12.2 to determine how many hours of useful life the factory has from the  radioactive material.  useful life =  ..  hours [2] [total: 6]",
            "22": "22 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "23": "23 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "24": "24 0625/22/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (leo/shw) 27132 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *2344733865 *physics 0625/23 paper 2 core may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 five identical steel balls are measured with a rule graduated in cm, as shown in fig. 1.1. 123456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0cmwooden block fig. 1.1  (a) use fig. 1.1 to find the diameter of one ball.  diameter of ball =  ..  cm [2]  (b) what instrument would be used to measure the mass of a ball?    [1]  (c) another ball has a volume of 9.0 cm3 and a mass of 72 g.   calculate the density of this ball.  density =    [4] [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 (a) fig. 2.1 shows a space probe, far out into space, where there is no atmosphere. it is  moving at a constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow. rocket motors fig. 2.1   is a force necessary to keep the probe moving like this? tick one box.    yes       no      if your answer is \u201cyes\u201d, draw an arrow on the diagram to show this force. [1]  (b) fig. 2.2 shows the space probe just after the rocket motors are fired. exhaust gases fig. 2.2   state what effect this has on the space probe.  ..    [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (c) later into its mission, the space probe is brought back into the earth\u2019s atmosphere  again, with no rockets working.   suggest two effects that the atmosphere has on the space probe. 1.  .. 2.    [2] [total: 5]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 (a) here is a list of some energy resources which might be used to generate electricity.   put a tick in the box alongside any of these which relies on a fuel being consumed.    oil       hydroelectricity     nuclear fission     wind     w a v e s   [2]  (b) here is a list of devices which convert energy from one form to another. battery, electric motor, gas lamp, gas fire, generator, loudspeaker, microphone   which of these is designed to convert   (i) chemical energy into light energy, ..   (ii) electrical energy into mechanical energy, ..   (iii) sound energy into electrical energy? .. [3] [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) fig. 4.1 shows end views of the walls built by two bricklayers. ab soil reinforced concrete foundationreinforced concrete foundation fig. 4.1   which wall is the least likely to sink into the soil, and why?  ..  .. ..   [2]  (b) fig. 4.2 shows two horizontal squares p and q. q p fig. 4.2   the atmosphere is pressing down on both p and q.  (i) name two quantities that would need to be known in order to calculate the  atmospheric pressure on square p . 1. ...2. .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the area of p is four times that of q.    complete the following sentences.    1. the atmospheric pressure on p is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the      atmospheric pressure on q.    2. the force of the atmosphere on p is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the      force of the atmosphere on q. [3] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a device called a thermostat, which is being used to control the temperature  of the air in a room. brass striptemperature control screw contactsx yinsulatorpower supply heater fig. 5.1  x and y are strips of two different metals, joined together along their length. together they  are called a bimetallic strip. x expands more than y for the same temperature rise.  (a) the temperature rises and the bimetallic strip bends.   state   (i) which way the bimetallic strip bends,   [1]   (ii) what happens to the contacts,   [1]   (iii) what happens to the current in the circuit,   [1]   (iv) what adjustment could be made to this thermostat, in order to increase the  temperature at which the thermostat operates.  ..   [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 5.2 shows how the temperature of the water in a tank would rise if it were heated  continuously, starting with water at a temperature of 0 \u00b0c. 0 0 time  / minutestemperature / \u00b0c 10 20 30 40 50 60 701020304050607080 fig. 5.2   the thermostat controlling the temperature of the water switches off the heater current  when the temperature rises above 50 \u00b0c.   (i) use fig. 5.2 to determine how long the water is heated before the thermostat  operates.  time =  ... minutes [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the heater supplies energy at the rate of 2000 w.    calculate how much thermal energy is supplied to the water before the thermostat  switches off the heater.  energy =  .  j [3] [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use6 (a) fig. 6.1 illustrates a sound wave travelling through the air. direction of wave travel fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, mark clearly the direction in which the air particles are moving. [1]   (ii) use fig. 6.1 to measure the wavelength of the sound wave.  wavelength =  ..  cm [1]   (iii) the pitch of the sound wave is raised.    state how the sound wave pattern would differ from that shown in fig. 6.1.  ..   [1]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a section through a series of waves on water. direction of wave travel fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, mark clearly the direction in which the water molecules are moving. [1]   (ii) from fig. 6.2, measure the wavelength of the water wave.  wavelength =  ..  cm [1]   (iii) the amplitude of the water waves is increased.    state how the appearance of the water waves would differ from that shown in  fig. 6.2.  ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) a ray of light passes through one surface of a glass prism at right angles to the surface,  as shown in fig. 7.1. ray of light 45\u00b0 45\u00b0a fig. 7.1   (i) state why the ray is not deviated as it passes through the surface into the glass at a.  ..   [1]   (ii) on fig. 7.1, use a ruler to help you draw the rest of the path of the ray, until it has  emerged again into the air. [3]  (b) fig. 7.2 shows a periscope that uses two plane mirrors. mirror a mirror b fig. 7.2   (i) on fig. 7.2, clearly mark the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at  mirror a. [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) state the equation linking i and r. [1]   (iii) in the space below, use a ruler to redraw the periscope, but using prisms like that in  fig. 7.1 instead of mirrors at a and b. [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a 6 v lamp, two switches and a 6 v motorcycle battery.  the lamp has a resistance of 10 /afii9821 when it is glowing normally. s1 s2 6 v 6 v, 10  /afii9821 fig. 8.1   how can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? tick the box alongside any  action which will do this.    close s1 only     close s2 only     close both s1 and s2  [1]  (b) fig. 8.2 shows a similar circuit, but the switches are arranged in parallel. s1 s2 6 v, 10  x 6 v fig. 8.2   how can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? tick the box alongside any  action which will do this.    close s1 only     close s2 only     close both s1 and s2  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the lamp is now connected to a 12 v car battery, as shown in fig. 8.3. s 12v 6 v, 10  /afii9821 fig. 8.3   state why it would not be wise to close switch s.  ..    [1]  (d) resistor r is connected in series with the lamp, as shown in fig. 8.4. s 6 v, 10  /afii9821r 12 v fig. 8.4   (i) state what value r must have, in order to enable the lamp to have 6 v across it  when s is closed.  resistance =    /afii9821 [1]   (ii) with this resistor and the lamp in series, calculate the current in the circuit.  current =    [4] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use9 fill in the gaps in the sentences below, using only appropriate words from the following list.  do not use any word more than once. charge, current, few, many, potential difference, resistance  insulators are materials which possess very \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 free electrons.  because of this, when a \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 is applied across an  insulator, the electric \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 in it is very small.  the \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 of a piece of insulator is likely to be very high. [3] [total: 3]",
            "17": "17 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use10 (a) (i) what is an electromagnet?  .. ..   [1]   (ii) state one very useful property of an electromagnet. ..   [1]  (b) an iron bar has many turns of wire wrapped around it, as shown in fig. 10.1. the wire is  connected to an alternating current supply. alternating current supplyiron bar flat coillow voltage lamp fig. 10.1   some more wire is made into a flat coil and connected across a low voltage lamp. when  the flat coil is held close to the end of the iron bar, the lamp glows.   explain why this happens.  ..  .. .. ..   [3]",
            "18": "18 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (c) fig. 10.2 shows a relay being used to switch an electric motor m on and off. m  s core springy metal  contacts  a  b  pivot  iron armature insulator  coil of  wire  fig. 10.2   switch s is closed. state what happens to   (i) the core, ..   [1]   (ii) the iron armature, ..   [1]   (iii) the contacts a and b. ..   [1]  (d) a suggestion is made that the relay would work better if the armature were made of  steel instead of iron.   explain why this is not a good idea.  ..    [2] [total: 10]",
            "19": "19 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 (a) state what is meant by thermionic emission.  ..   [2]  (b) in fig. 11.1, a beam of cathode rays is entering the space between two charged metal  plates. + \u2013cathode rays fig. 11.1   (i) what sort of particles make up cathode rays? tick one box.     /afii9825-particles      electrons      neutrons      protons  [1]   (ii) on fig. 11.1, continue the dotted line to show the path of the cathode rays as they travel between the plates and into the space beyond the plates. [3] [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use12 (a) four students attempt to define the half-life of a sample of radioactive substance.   student a half-life is half the time for the activity of the sample to decrease to zero.   student b  half-life is half the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to  half its original value.   student c  half-life is the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to half its original value. which student has given a correct definition?  ...  [1]  (b) fig. 12.1 shows two samples of the same radioactive substance. the substance emits  /afii9826-particles. fig. 12.1   put a tick alongside any of the following quantities which is the same for both samples.    the half-life of the samples     the mass of the samples     the number of atoms decaying each second     the number of /afii9826-particles emitted per second  [1]",
            "21": "21 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (c) a quantity of radioactive material has to be taken from a nuclear reactor to a factory  some distance away. fig. 12.2 shows the decay curve for the quantity of radioactive material. 0 0 time  / hourscounts  / minutecount rate 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16500100015002000 fig. 12.2   just before it leaves the nuclear reactor, the count-rate from the material is 2000  counts / minute. when it arrives at the factory, the count-rate is 1000 counts / minute.   (i) how long did the journey take?  .  hours [1]   (ii) how many half-lives elapsed during the journey?  ...  [1]   (iii) the material is only useful to the factory if the activity is at least 100 counts / minute.    use fig. 12.2 to determine how many hours of useful life the factory has from the  radioactive material.  useful life =  ..  hours [2] [total: 6]",
            "22": "22 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "23": "23 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "24": "24 0625/23/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (shw 00380 1/09) 20284/4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *777675399 2*physics 0625/31 paper 3 extended may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows the speed/time graph for a car travelling along a straight road.  the graph shows how the speed of the car changes as the car passes through a small  town. 0 0 time  / sm / sspeed 10 20 30 40 50 60 705101520253035 a b cd enters town hereleaves town here fig. 1.1  (a) describe what happens to the speed of the car   (i) between a and b,  .   (ii) between b and c,  .   (iii) between c and d.  . [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) calculate the distance between the start of the town and the end of the town.  distance =    [3]  (c) calculate the acceleration of the car between c and d.  acceleration =    [3] (d) state how the graph shows that the deceleration of the car has the same numerical  value as its acceleration.  ..   [1] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 a car of mass 900 kg is travelling at a steady speed of 30 m / s against a resistive force of  2000 n, as illustrated in fig. 2.1. 2000  n resistive force30 m / s fig. 2.1  (a) calculate the kinetic energy of the car.  kinetic energy =    [2]  (b) calculate the energy used in 1.0 s against the resistive force.  energy =    [2]  (c) what is the minimum power that the car engine has to deliver to the wheels?  minimum power =    [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) what form of energy is in the fuel, used by the engine to drive the car?    [1]  (e) state why the energy in the fuel is converted at a greater rate than you have calculated  in (c).  ..   [1] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 two students make the statements about acceleration that are given below.  student a:  for a given mass the acceleration of an object is proportional to the resultant  force applied to the object.  student b:  for a given force the acceleration of an object is proportional to the mass of the object.  (a) one statement is correct and one is incorrect.   re-write the incorrect statement, making changes so that it is now correct. for a given .  the acceleration of an object is  ...    [1]  (b) state the equation which links acceleration a, resultant force f and mass m. [1]  (c) describe what happens to the motion of a moving object when   (i) there is no resultant force acting on it,    [1]   (ii) a resultant force is applied to it in the opposite direction to the motion,   [1]   (iii) a resultant force is applied to it in a perpendicular direction to the motion.   [1] [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 (a) four identical metal plates, at the same temperature, are laid side by side on the ground.  the rays from the sun fall on the plates.     one plate has a matt black surface.     one plate has a shiny black surface.    one plate has a matt silver surface.    one plate has a shiny silver surface.  state which plate has the fastest-rising temperature when the sunlight first falls on the  plates.   [1]  (b) the apparatus shown in fig. 4.1 is known as leslie\u2019s differential air thermometer. glass bulb painted matt blackshiny glass bulbradiant heater air liquidt fig. 4.1   the heater is switched off. tap t is opened so that the air on the two sides of t has the  same pressure. tap t is then closed.   (i) the heater is switched on. on fig. 4.1, mark clearly where the two liquid levels  might be a short time later. [1]   (ii) explain your answer to (b)(i).  .. ..   [2] [total: 4]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use5 a certain substance is in the solid state at a temperature of \u201336 \u00b0c. it is heated at a constant  rate for 32 minutes. the record of its temperature is given in fig. 5.1. time / min 0126 1 0 1 4 1 8 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 8 3 0 3 2 temperature / \u00b0c \u201336 \u201316 \u20139 \u20139 \u20139 \u20139 32 75 101 121 121 121 121 fig. 5.1  (a) state what is meant by the term latent heat.  ..   [2]  (b) state a time at which the energy is being supplied as latent heat of fusion.   [1]  (c) explain the energy changes undergone by the molecules of a substance during the  period when latent heat of vaporisation is being supplied.  .. ..   [2]  (d) (i) the rate of heating is 2.0 kw.    calculate how much energy is supplied to the substance during the period  18 \u2013 22 minutes.  energy supplied =    [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the specific heat capacity of the substance is 1760 j / (kg \u00b0c).    use the information in the table for the period 18 \u2013 22 minutes to calculate the  mass of the substance being heated.  mass heated =    [3] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use6 some plane waves travel on the surface of water in a tank. they pass from a region of deep  water into a region of shallow water. fig. 6.1 shows what the waves look like from above. shallow waterdeep waterboundary waves move this way fig. 6.1  (a) state what happens at the boundary, if anything, to   (i) the frequency of the waves,    [1]   (ii) the speed of the waves,   [1]   (iii) the wavelength of the waves.   [1]  (b) the waves have a speed of 0.12 m / s in the deep water. wave crests are 0.08 m apart in  the deep water.   calculate the frequency of the source producing the waves. state the equation that you  use.  frequency =    [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) fig. 6.2 shows identical waves moving towards the boundary at an angle. shallow waterdeep waterboundary waves move this wayab fig. 6.2   on fig. 6.2, draw carefully the remainder of waves a and b, plus the two previous waves  which reached the shallow water. y ou will need to use your ruler to do this. [3] [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use7 during a thunderstorm, thunder and lightning are produced at the same time.  (a) a person is some distance away from the storm.   explain why the person sees the lightning before hearing the thunder.  ..  ..   [1]  (b) a scientist in a laboratory made the following measurements during a thunderstorm. time from start of storm / minutes 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 time between seeing lightning and hearing thunder / s 3.6 2.4 1.6 2.4 3.5 4.4 fig. 7.1   (i) how many minutes after the storm started did it reach its closest point to the  laboratory?    [1]   (ii) how can you tell that the storm was never immediately over the laboratory?   [1]   (iii) when the storm started, it was immediately above a village 1200 m from the  laboratory.    using this information and information from fig. 7.1, calculate the speed of sound.  speed of sound =    [2]   (iv) state the assumption you made when you calculated your answer to (b)(iii).    [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) some waves are longitudinal; some waves are transverse.   some waves are electromagnetic; some waves are mechanical.   put ticks ( \u2713) in the table below to indicate which of these descriptions apply to the light  waves of the lightning and the sound waves of the thunder. light waves sound waves longitudinal transverseelectromagneticmechanical [3] [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) the transformer in fig. 8.1 is used to convert 240 v a.c. to 6 v a.c. a bc diron core secondary coilprimary coil (480 turns) fig. 8.1   (i) using the information above, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  number of turns =    [2]   (ii) describe how the transformer works.  .. .. .. ..   [3]   (iii) state one way in which energy is lost from the transformer, and from which part it is  lost.    [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 8.2 shows a device labelled \u201cigcse transformer\u201d. fig. 8.2   study the label on the case of the igcse transformer.   (i) what is the output of the device?  ...  [1]   (ii) from the information on the case, deduce what other electrical component must be  included within the case of the igcse transformer, apart from a transformer.    [1]  (c) a transformer supplying electrical energy to a factory changes the 11 000 v a.c. supply to  440 v a.c. for use in the factory. the current in the secondary coil is 200 a.   calculate the current in the primary coil, assuming no losses from the transformer.  current =    [2] [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) fig. 9.1 illustrates the left hand rule, which helps when describing the force on a current- carrying conductor in a magnetic field. thumb first finger second fingermotion  / force fig. 9.1   one direction has been labelled for you.   in each of the other two boxes, write the name of the quantity that direction represents.  [1]  (b) fig. 9.2 shows a simple d.c. motor connected to a battery and a switch. n s switch batteryx fig. 9.2",
            "17": "17 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (i) on fig. 9.2, write in each of the boxes the name of the part of the motor to which  the arrow is pointing. [2]   (ii) state which way the coil of the motor will rotate when the switch is closed, when viewed from the position x.    [1]   (iii) state two things which could be done to increase the speed of rotation of the coil.1. ...2. .  [2] [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use10 a certain element is known to exist as two different isotopes.  (a) state one thing that is the same for atoms of both isotopes.    [1]  (b) state one thing that is different between atoms of these two isotopes.   [1]  (c) an atom of one of these isotopes is unstable and decays into a different element by  emitting a  /afii9826-particle.   (i) state one thing about the atom that remains the same during this decay.    [1]   (ii) state one thing about the atom that changes as a result of this decay.   [1] [total: 4]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) a coil of wire is connected into a circuit containing a variable resistor and a battery.   the variable resistor is adjusted until the potential difference across the coil is 1.8 v.   in this condition, the current in the circuit is 0.45 a.  calculate  (i) the resistance of the coil,  resistance =    [1]  (ii) the thermal energy released from this coil in 9 minutes.  energy released =    [3] (b) the coil in part (a) is replaced by one made of wire which has half the diameter of that  in (a).   when the potential difference across the coil is again adjusted to 1.8 v, the current is  only 0.30 a.   calculate how the length of wire in the second coil compares with the length of wire in  the first coil. length of wire in second coil is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the length of wire in first coil [4] [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/31/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dca (shw 00379 1/09) 20866/7 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *597859 4060*physics 0625/32 paper 3 extended may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 a ball player bounces a ball of mass 0.60 kg. its centre of mass moves down through a  distance of 0.90 m, as shown in fig. 1.1. ignore air resistance throughout this question. 0.90  m fig. 1.1  (a) calculate the decrease in gravitational potential energy of the ball as it moves down through the 0.90 m.  decrease in pe =    [2]  (b) the ball hits the ground at 7.0 m/s.   calculate the initial energy given to the ball by the player.  energy given =    [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) on another occasion, the player throws the ball into the air, to a height of 4.0 m above  the ground. the ball then falls to the ground.   during the impact, 22% of the ball\u2019s energy is lost.   (i) suggest one reason why energy is lost during bouncing. ..   [1]   (ii) calculate the height to which the ball rises after the bounce. [2]   (iii) an observer who sees the ball bounce says, \u201cthat ball should be slightly warmer  after that bounce.\u201d    explain why the observer\u2019s statement is true.  .. ..   [1] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 four students, a, b, c and d, each have a spring. they measure the lengths of their springs  when the springs are stretched by different loads.  their results are shown in fig. 2.1. student a student b student c student d load / n spring length / cm spring length / cm spring length / cm spring length / cm 0.5  6.7  9.2  9.1 10.0 1.0  7.7 10.0  9.9 11.1 1.5  8.7 10.8 10.7 12.2 2.0  9.7 11.6 11.5 13.3 2.5 10.7 12.6 12.3 14.4 3.0 11.7 13.8 13.1 15.5 3.5 12.7 15.2 13.9 16.6 4.0 13.7 16.8 14.7 17.7 fig. 2.1  (a) (i) state which student had loaded the spring beyond the limit of proportionality.    [1]   (ii) explain how you obtained your answer to (a)(i). .. ..   [2]  (b) for the spring used by student a, calculate   (i) the extra extension caused by each additional 0.5 n,  extra extension =    [1]   (ii) the unloaded length of the spring.  unloaded length =    [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) student a obtains a second spring that is identical to his first spring. he hangs the two  springs side by side, as shown in fig. 2.2. identical springs load fig. 2.2   use the table to calculate the length of each of the springs when a load of 2.5 n is hung  as shown in fig. 2.2. show your working.  length = .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 an ornamental garden includes a small pond, which contains a pumped system that causes  water to go up a pipe and then to run down a heap of rocks.  fig. 3.1 shows a section through this water feature. 0.8 m rockspumped water rises through pipe water inletto pumpwater runsdown rocks pump fig. 3.1  the density of water is 1000 kg / m3. a volume of 1 litre is equal to 0.001 m3.  (a) calculate the mass of 1 litre of water.  mass =    [2]  (b) calculate the work done raising 1 litre of water through a height of 0.8 m.  work =    [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the pump lifts 90 litres of water per minute.   calculate the minimum power of the pump.  power =    [2]  (d) the pump is switched off.   immediately after the pump is switched off, what is the value of the water pressure at  the bottom of the 0.8 m pipe, due to the water in the pipe?  pressure =    [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 a technician has been asked to design a liquid-in-glass thermometer, using alcohol as the  liquid.  (a) (i) state what is meant by the sensitivity of the thermometer.  ..   [1]   (ii) state one design feature the technician could use in order to ensure a very sensitive  thermometer.  ..   [1]  (b) (i) state what is meant by the range of the thermometer. ..   [1]   (ii) state one design feature that would ensure that the thermometer measured the  desired range of temperatures.  ..   [1]  (c) (i) state what is meant by linearity, as it applies to the thermometer. ..   [1]   (ii) state one design feature that would ensure linearity in the technician\u2019s thermometer. ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 the apparatus shown in fig. 5.1 is used to demonstrate how a coin and a piece of paper fall  when they are released from rest. piece of paper tube containing aircoin a fig. 5.1  (a) at the positions shown in fig. 5.1, the paper is descending at constant speed but the coin still accelerates.   in terms of the forces acting, explain these observations. paper   .. ..coin  .. ..   [4]  (b) a vacuum pump is now connected at a and the air in the tube is pumped out.   the paper and coin are again made to fall from rest.  state one difference that would be observed, compared with what was observed when  air was present. ..   [1] [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use6 a ray of monochromatic light passes through the glass prism shown in fig. 6.1. ray90\u00b0 45\u00b045\u00b0 61\u00b0 glass airab c fig. 6.1  (a) state what is meant by the term monochromatic.  ..   [1]  (b) state the name given to what happens to the ray at a.   [1]  (c) use the values on the diagram to calculate the angle of refraction at a (the angles in a  triangle add up to 180\u00b0).  angle of refraction =    [1]  (d) calculate the refractive index of the glass.  refractive index =    [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (e) explain why the ray does not emerge into the air at b, but does emerge at c.  .. .. ..   [2]  (f) an identical prism is stuck to the first prism using a transparent adhesive with the same  refractive index as the glass. this is shown in fig. 6.2. glassglass airraya b fig. 6.2   on fig. 6.2, draw the path of the ray after it has reached b and until it has passed into  the air again. [3] [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 a disused railway line has a length of 300 m. a man puts his ear against one end of the rail  and another man hits the other end with a metal hammer, as shown in fig. 7.1. 300  mrailway linehammer hits railman with ear against rail fig. 7.1  (a) (i) state an approximate value for the speed of sound in air.   .  [1]   (ii) sound travels at 5000 m / s in steel.    calculate the time it takes for the sound to travel along the rail.  time taken =    [2]  (b) the man with his ear to the railway line actually hears two sounds from the hammer, separated by a short interval.   explain why he hears two sounds.  ..  .. ..   [2] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) state the law of attraction and repulsion between electrostatic charges.  .. ..   [2]  (b) sometimes, when people have been riding in a car, they get an electric shock from the  door handle as they get out of the car.   suggest why this happens.  ..  ..   [2]  (c) a plastic rod is rubbed with a cloth and becomes positively charged. after charging, the  rod is held close to the suspended table-tennis ball shown in fig. 8.1. the table-tennis ball is covered with metal paint and is initially uncharged. positively charged rodlight table-tennis ball covered with metal paintnylon thread fig. 8.1   (i) describe what happens to the charges on the metal-painted table-tennis ball as the positively-charged rod is brought close to the ball.  .. ..   [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the ball is attracted towards the charged rod.    explain why this happens.  .. ..   [2]   (iii) when it is a few centimetres away from the rod, the ball is briefly touched by a wire  connected to earth.    in terms of the movement of charges, describe what happens to the charge on the ball.  ..   [2] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use9 the circuit in fig. 9.1 contains a 4.0 v battery, whose resistance can be ignored.  there are also three resistors, a 3-position switch, s, and another component, p . sa c pb22 /afii9821 2 /afii9821 8 /afii9821 4.0 v fig. 9.1  (a) state the name of component p .   .  [1]  (b) deduce the resistance of the circuit when switch s is connected to   (i) point a,  resistance =    [1]   (ii) point b.  resistance =    [3]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) state the current in component p when s is in position c, and explain your answer. current =  .explanation  .. .. ..   [2]  (d) the 22  /afii9821 resistor is removed as shown in fig. 9.2. sa c pb2 /afii9821 8 /afii9821 4.0 v   fig. 9.2   showing your working, decide which switch position will result in energy release from  the circuit at the rate of 2.0 w.  switch position =    [3] [total: 10]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use10 a student is using a cathode-ray oscilloscope to display the waveform of an alternating  current supply. the arrangement is shown in fig. 10.1. a.c. supplyr y -inputswitch s (open)cathode-ray oscilloscope fig. 10.1  when switch s is closed, the trace seen on the screen is as shown in fig. 10.2. to get this trace, the settings of the oscilloscope controls are   volts / cm: 5 v / cm   time-base: 10 ms / cm 1 cm fig. 10.2  (a) on fig. 10.2, carefully draw what is seen on the screen when the frequency of the supply is increased to 1.5 times its previous value. [3]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) what change, if any, must be made to the oscilloscope volts / cm and time-base controls  in order to reduce the peak-to-peak height of the trace to half that shown in fig. 10.2? volts / cm setting  .  [2]time-base setting  ...  [1] [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use11 a radium source emits /afii9825, /afii9826 and /afii9828 radiations. fig. 11.1 illustrates what happens to these  radiations when they pass through a magnetic field. the left hand beam is actually deviated  a great deal less than shown on fig. 11.1. radioactive source fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, label the three radiations by writing in the boxes provided. [2]  (b) state the direction of the magnetic field that gives the deflections shown in fig. 11.1.    [2] [total: 4] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (leo/shw) 27239 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *8006088596 *physics 0625/33 paper 3 extended may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 a ball player bounces a ball of mass 0.60 kg. its centre of mass moves down through a  distance of 0.90 m, as shown in fig. 1.1. ignore air resistance throughout this question. 0.90  m fig. 1.1  (a) calculate the decrease in gravitational potential energy of the ball as it moves down through the 0.90 m.  decrease in pe =    [2]  (b) the ball hits the ground at 7.0 m/s.   calculate the initial energy given to the ball by the player.  energy given =    [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) on another occasion, the player throws the ball into the air, to a height of 4.0 m above  the ground. the ball then falls to the ground.   during the impact, 22% of the ball\u2019s energy is lost.   (i) suggest one reason why energy is lost during bouncing. ..   [1]   (ii) calculate the height to which the ball rises after the bounce. [2]   (iii) an observer who sees the ball bounce says, \u201cthat ball should be slightly warmer  after that bounce.\u201d    explain why the observer\u2019s statement is true.  .. ..   [1] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 four students, a, b, c and d, each have a spring. they measure the lengths of their springs  when the springs are stretched by different loads.  their results are shown in fig. 2.1. student a student b student c student d load / n spring length / cm spring length / cm spring length / cm spring length / cm 0.5  6.7  9.2  9.1 10.0 1.0  7.7 10.0  9.9 11.1 1.5  8.7 10.8 10.7 12.2 2.0  9.7 11.6 11.5 13.3 2.5 10.7 12.6 12.3 14.4 3.0 11.7 13.8 13.1 15.5 3.5 12.7 15.2 13.9 16.6 4.0 13.7 16.8 14.7 17.7 fig. 2.1  (a) (i) state which student had loaded the spring beyond the limit of proportionality.    [1]   (ii) explain how you obtained your answer to (a)(i). .. ..   [2]  (b) for the spring used by student a, calculate   (i) the extra extension caused by each additional 0.5 n,  extra extension =    [1]   (ii) the unloaded length of the spring.  unloaded length =    [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) student a obtains a second spring that is identical to his first spring. he hangs the two  springs side by side, as shown in fig. 2.2. identical springs load fig. 2.2   use the table to calculate the length of each of the springs when a load of 2.5 n is hung  as shown in fig. 2.2. show your working.  length = .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 an ornamental garden includes a small pond, which contains a pumped system that causes  water to go up a pipe and then to run down a heap of rocks.  fig. 3.1 shows a section through this water feature. 0.8 m rockspumped water rises through pipe water inletto pumpwater runsdown rocks pump fig. 3.1  the density of water is 1000 kg / m3. a volume of 1 litre is equal to 0.001 m3.  (a) calculate the mass of 1 litre of water.  mass =    [2]  (b) calculate the work done raising 1 litre of water through a height of 0.8 m.  work =    [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the pump lifts 90 litres of water per minute.   calculate the minimum power of the pump.  power =    [2]  (d) the pump is switched off.   immediately after the pump is switched off, what is the value of the water pressure at  the bottom of the 0.8 m pipe, due to the water in the pipe?  pressure =    [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 a technician has been asked to design a liquid-in-glass thermometer, using alcohol as the  liquid.  (a) (i) state what is meant by the sensitivity of the thermometer.  ..   [1]   (ii) state one design feature the technician could use in order to ensure a very sensitive  thermometer.  ..   [1]  (b) (i) state what is meant by the range of the thermometer. ..   [1]   (ii) state one design feature that would ensure that the thermometer measured the  desired range of temperatures.  ..   [1]  (c) (i) state what is meant by linearity, as it applies to the thermometer. ..   [1]   (ii) state one design feature that would ensure linearity in the technician\u2019s thermometer. ..   [1] [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 the apparatus shown in fig. 5.1 is used to demonstrate how a coin and a piece of paper fall  when they are released from rest. piece of paper tube containing aircoin a fig. 5.1  (a) at the positions shown in fig. 5.1, the paper is descending at constant speed but the coin still accelerates.   in terms of the forces acting, explain these observations. paper   .. ..coin  .. ..   [4]  (b) a vacuum pump is now connected at a and the air in the tube is pumped out.   the paper and coin are again made to fall from rest.  state one difference that would be observed, compared with what was observed when  air was present. ..   [1] [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use6 a ray of monochromatic light passes through the glass prism shown in fig. 6.1. ray90\u00b0 45\u00b045\u00b0 61\u00b0 glass airab c fig. 6.1  (a) state what is meant by the term monochromatic.  ..   [1]  (b) state the name given to what happens to the ray at a.   [1]  (c) use the values on the diagram to calculate the angle of refraction at a (the angles in a  triangle add up to 180\u00b0).  angle of refraction =    [1]  (d) calculate the refractive index of the glass.  refractive index =    [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (e) explain why the ray does not emerge into the air at b, but does emerge at c.  .. .. ..   [2]  (f) an identical prism is stuck to the first prism using a transparent adhesive with the same  refractive index as the glass. this is shown in fig. 6.2. glassglass airraya b fig. 6.2   on fig. 6.2, draw the path of the ray after it has reached b and until it has passed into  the air again. [3] [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 a disused railway line has a length of 300 m. a man puts his ear against one end of the rail  and another man hits the other end with a metal hammer, as shown in fig. 7.1. 300  mrailway linehammer hits railman with ear against rail fig. 7.1  (a) (i) state an approximate value for the speed of sound in air.   .  [1]   (ii) sound travels at 5000 m / s in steel.    calculate the time it takes for the sound to travel along the rail.  time taken =    [2]  (b) the man with his ear to the railway line actually hears two sounds from the hammer, separated by a short interval.   explain why he hears two sounds.  ..  .. ..   [2] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) state the law of attraction and repulsion between electrostatic charges.  .. ..   [2]  (b) sometimes, when people have been riding in a car, they get an electric shock from the  door handle as they get out of the car.   suggest why this happens.  ..  ..   [2]  (c) a plastic rod is rubbed with a cloth and becomes positively charged. after charging, the  rod is held close to the suspended table-tennis ball shown in fig. 8.1. the table-tennis ball is covered with metal paint and is initially uncharged. positively charged rodlight table-tennis ball covered with metal paintnylon thread fig. 8.1   (i) describe what happens to the charges on the metal-painted table-tennis ball as the positively-charged rod is brought close to the ball.  .. ..   [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the ball is attracted towards the charged rod.    explain why this happens.  .. ..   [2]   (iii) when it is a few centimetres away from the rod, the ball is briefly touched by a wire  connected to earth.    in terms of the movement of charges, describe what happens to the charge on the ball.  ..   [2] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use9 the circuit in fig. 9.1 contains a 4.0 v battery, whose resistance can be ignored.  there are also three resistors, a 3-position switch, s, and another component, p . sa c pb22 /afii9821 2 /afii9821 8 /afii9821 4.0 v fig. 9.1  (a) state the name of component p .   .  [1]  (b) deduce the resistance of the circuit when switch s is connected to   (i) point a,  resistance =    [1]   (ii) point b.  resistance =    [3]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) state the current in component p when s is in position c, and explain your answer. current =  .explanation  .. .. ..   [2]  (d) the 22  /afii9821 resistor is removed as shown in fig. 9.2. sa c pb2 /afii9821 8 /afii9821 4.0 v   fig. 9.2   showing your working, decide which switch position will result in energy release from  the circuit at the rate of 2.0 w.  switch position =    [3] [total: 10]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use10 a student is using a cathode-ray oscilloscope to display the waveform of an alternating  current supply. the arrangement is shown in fig. 10.1. a.c. supplyr y -inputswitch s (open)cathode-ray oscilloscope fig. 10.1  when switch s is closed, the trace seen on the screen is as shown in fig. 10.2. to get this trace, the settings of the oscilloscope controls are   volts / cm: 5 v / cm   time-base: 10 ms / cm 1 cm fig. 10.2  (a) on fig. 10.2, carefully draw what is seen on the screen when the frequency of the supply is increased to 1.5 times its previous value. [3]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) what change, if any, must be made to the oscilloscope volts / cm and time-base controls  in order to reduce the peak-to-peak height of the trace to half that shown in fig. 10.2? volts / cm setting  .  [2]time-base setting  ...  [1] [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use11 a radium source emits /afii9825, /afii9826 and /afii9828 radiations. fig. 11.1 illustrates what happens to these  radiations when they pass through a magnetic field. the left hand beam is actually deviated  a great deal less than shown on fig. 11.1. radioactive source fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, label the three radiations by writing in the boxes provided. [2]  (b) state the direction of the magnetic field that gives the deflections shown in fig. 11.1.    [2] [total: 4] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (kn/sw) 17175/3 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *565900 2653*physics 0625/51 paper 5  practical test may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 in this experiment, you are to investigate the stretching of springs.  y ou have been provided with the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. clamp spring b spring a fig. 1.1  (a) (i) measure the length la of spring a.  la =   mm   (ii) on fig. 1.1 show clearly where you decided to start and end the length measurement  la.    (iii) hang the 200 g mass on spring a. measure the new length l of the spring.  l =   mm   (iv) calculate the extension ea of spring a using the equation ea = (l \u2013 la).  ea =   mm [3]  (b) (i) measure the length lb of spring b.  lb =   mm   (ii) hang the 200 g mass on spring b. measure the new length l of the spring.  l =   mm",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over  (iii) calculate the extension eb of spring b using the equation eb = (l \u2013 lb)  eb =   mm [2]  (c) use the small length of wooden rod provided to hang the 400 g mass midway between the  springs as shown in fig. 1.2. spring b 400  g massspring a rod fig. 1.2   (i) measure the new lengths of each of the springs.  spring a:  l =   mm  spring b:  l =   mm   (ii) calculate the extension of each spring using the appropriate equation from parts (a) and  (b).  spring a:  e =   mm  spring b:  e =   mm   (iii) calculate the average of these two extensions eav. show your working.  eav =  .mm  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 (d)  theory suggests that (ea + eb) \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u20132 = eav.    state whether your results support this theory and justify your answer with reference to the  results. statement  .justification  ... .. [2]  (e) describe briefly one precaution that you took to obtain accurate length measurements. ... ... .. [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20102 in this experiment, you are to investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1.  y ou are provided with a beaker containing hot water and a thermometer. hot waterthermometer fig. 2.1  (a) (i) place the thermometer in the beaker of water. measure the temperature \u03b8 of the water.  record \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s.   (ii) start the stopclock and record in table 2.1 the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals  until you have a total of six values up to time t = 150 s. do not stop the stopclock, but take one final reading of the temperature of the water at time t = 300 s. record this value in the table. table 2.1 t  / s \u03b8  /  \u00b0c     0   30  60  90120150 300  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) (i) using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change t1 of the water in  the first 150 s.  t1 =  ...   (ii) using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change t2 of the water in  the final 150 s.  t2 =  .. [3]  (c) plot a graph of \u03b8  / \u00b0c (y-axis) against t /s (x-axis) for the first 150 s. [5] 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 t / s",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20103 in this experiment, you will investigate the effect of the length of resistance wire in a circuit on the  potential difference across a lamp.  the circuit has been set up for you.   (a) fig. 3.1 shows the circuit without the voltmeter. draw on the circuit diagram the voltmeter as it is connected in the circuit. [2] power source sliding contactab cl fig. 3.1  (b) (i) switch on and place the sliding contact c on the resistance wire at a distance l = 0.150 m  from end a. record the value of l and the potential difference v across the lamp in  table 3.1. switch off.   (ii) repeat step (i) using the following values of l: 0.350 m, 0.550 m, 0.750 m and 0.950 m.  record all the values of l and v in table 3.1. table 3.1 l  /  m v  /  vv\u2013l /   (iii) for each pair of readings in the table calculate and record in the table the value of v\u2013l.   (iv) complete the table by writing in the unit for v\u2013l. [5]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (c) a student suggests that the potential difference v across the lamp is directly proportional to  the length l of resistance wire in the circuit. state whether or not you agree with this suggestion  and justify your answer by reference to your results. statement  .justification  ... .. [2]  (d) state one precaution that you would take in order to obtain accurate readings in this  experiment.  ... ... .. [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20104 in this experiment, you are to investigate reflection from a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. e e'f' gf h j\u03b8 fig. 4.1  (a) draw a straight line ef across the ray trace sheet, about 10 cm from the top of the sheet.  (b) draw a normal gh to line ef so that point g is approximately at the centre of line ef.  (c) draw a line gj at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 4.1.  (d) place the ray trace sheet on the pin board. place the mirror so that it stands along the line  ef.  (e) push a pin p1 into the surface at a point on gj close to the mirror. label this point a.  (f) push another pin p2 into the surface on gj some distance from the mirror. label this point b.  (g) view the images of the pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1. push  two pins p3 and p4 into the surface between your eye and the mirror so that p3, p4 and the  images of p1 and p2 appear exactly in line.  (h) mark the positions of pins p3 and p4 on the ray trace sheet with letters c and d. remove the  pins and the mirror. using a rule, draw a line joining c and d, and continue this line to meet the line ef.  (i) measure the angle of reflection r 1 between lines gh and cd.  r1 =  .. [1]  (j) draw a line e'gf' such that the angle \u03b8 between this line and the line egf is 10\u00b0.  (see fig. 4.1). place the mirror so that it stands along the line e'f'.  (k) push the pins p1 and p2 into the ray trace sheet at the same points a and b used previously.  (l) repeat step (g).",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 (m) mark the positions of pins p3 and p4 on the ray trace sheet with letters c' and d'. remove the  pins and the mirror. using a rule, draw a line joining c' and d', and continue this line to meet  the line e'f'.  (n) (i) measure the angle r2 between lines gh and c'd'.  r2 =  ...   (ii) calculate the angle \u03b1 through which the reflected ray has moved.  \u03b1 =  ...   (iii) calculate the difference between 2 \u03b8 and \u03b1.  difference between 2 \u03b8 and \u03b1 =  .. [2]  (o) theory suggests that if the mirror is moved through an angle \u03b8 then the reflected ray will  move through an angle of 2 \u03b8. state whether your result supports the theory and justify your  answer by reference to the result. statement  .justification  ... .. [2]  tie your ray trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11. [5]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (kn/sw) 17177/2 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *7257678 223*physics 0625/52 paper 5  practical test may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 in this experiment, you are to determine the mass of a load using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. mass m50.0  cm mark load x metre rule pivotd bench fig. 1.1  the load x has been taped to the metre rule so that its centre is exactly over the 90.0 cm mark. do  not move this load.   (a) place a mass of 40 g on the rule and adjust its position so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the pivot as shown in fig. 1.1.    (i) record in table 1.1 the distance d from the centre of the 40 g mass to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   (ii) repeat step (i) using masses of 50 g, 60 g, 70 g and 80 g to obtain a total of five sets of readings. record the readings in the table.   (iii) for each value of d calculate  1d and enter the values in the table. table 1.1 m  / g d  / cm1d  / 1 cm  40 50607080  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) plot a graph of m /g (y-axis) against 1 d / 1 cm  (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  .. [2]  (d) determine the mass  \u03bc of the load x using the equation \u03bc = g k where k = 40.0 cm.  \u03bc =  .. [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20102 in this experiment you will investigate the rate of cooling of water in different containers.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. thermometer container a thermometer container b fig. 2.1  (a) (i) pour approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into container a.   (ii) place the thermometer in container a.   (iii) record in table 2.1 the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals from t = 0 s until you  have a total of seven values up to time t = 180 s.   (iv) place the thermometer in container b.   (v) pour hot water into container b until there is sufficient at least to cover the thermometer bulb.    (vi) repeat step (iii).   (vii) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/10 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2010table 2.1 (container a) (container b) t  / \u03b8  / \u03b8  /      [5]  (b) calculate the temperature change of the water in each container over the period of 180 s.  container a temperature change =  ...  container b temperature change =  .. [1]  (c) state which container, a or b has the greater rate of cooling. justify your answer by reference  to your readings. statement  .justification  ... ... .. [2]  (d) to make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the hot water in the two containers  it is important to control other experimental conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1  2  ... [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20103 in this experiment, you are to determine the resistances of lamps in different circuit arrangements.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you. this is circuit 1. power source circuit 1 lamp p va fig. 3.1  (a) switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across  lamp p. switch off.  (b) calculate the resistance r of lamp p using the equation r = v i .    record this value of r in the table.  (c) replace lamp p with lamp q. this is circuit 2 (not shown). repeat steps (a) and (b).  (d) return lamp p to the circuit so that lamps p and q are in parallel with each other. this is circuit 3. repeat steps (a) and (b). table 3.1 v / i / r  / circuit 1 circuit 2circuit 3  [5]  (e) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (f) draw a diagram of circuit 3 using standard circuit symbols.    [3]  (g) a student suggests that the resistance of lamp p added to the resistance of lamp q should be  equal to the combined resistance of the two lamps when arranged in parallel in circuit 3. state whether or not your results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference to your experimental results. statement  .justification  ... ... ... .. [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20104 in this experiment you will investigate refraction and reflection of light in a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. a db fn n'p2p1e gc eye fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the block  should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd.  (b) remove the block and draw the normal nn' to side ab so that the normal is 2.0 cm from b. label the point f where nn' crosses ab.  (c) draw the line ef at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal. continue the line so that it crosses bc and extends about 5 cm beyond bc as shown in fig. 4.1. label the end of the line  g.  (d) place the paper on the pin board.  (e) push two pins p 1 and p2 into line ef as indicated in fig. 4.1.  (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block from the  direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1 so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind  the other.   push two pins p3 and p4 into the surface, between your eye and the block, so that p3, p4 and  the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear in line.   mark the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. remove the block.",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 (g) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line so that it crosses cd and  extends beyond bc to cross line efg. label the end of the line h.   (h) remove the pins from the ray trace sheet. measure the smaller angle \u03b8 between line efg  and the line joining the positions of p3, p4 and h.  \u03b8 =  .. [1]  (i) calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ).  ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =  .. [1]  (j) repeat steps (c) to (i) using an angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0 to the normal.  \u03b8 =  ...   ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =  .. [1]  (k) theory suggests that \u03b8 = 2i. state whether your result supports the theory and justify your  answer by reference to your results. statement  .justification  ... ... ...[2]  tie your ray trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9. [5]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 26564 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *3031729683*physics 0625/53 paper 5  practical test may/june 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 in this experiment, you are to determine the mass of a load using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. mass m50.0  cm mark load x metre rule pivotd bench fig. 1.1  the load x has been taped to the metre rule so that its centre is exactly over the 90.0 cm mark. do  not move this load.   (a) place a mass of 40 g on the rule and adjust its position so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the pivot as shown in fig. 1.1.    (i) record in table 1.1 the distance d from the centre of the 40 g mass to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   (ii) repeat step (i) using masses of 50 g, 60 g, 70 g and 80 g to obtain a total of five sets of readings. record the readings in the table.   (iii) for each value of d calculate  1d and enter the values in the table. table 1.1 m  / g d  / cm1d  / 1 cm  40 50607080  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) plot a graph of m /g (y-axis) against 1 d / 1 cm  (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  .. [2]  (d) determine the mass  \u03bc of the load x using the equation \u03bc = g k where k = 40.0 cm.  \u03bc =  .. [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20102 in this experiment you will investigate the rate of cooling of water in different containers.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. thermometer container a thermometer container b fig. 2.1  (a) (i) pour approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into container a.   (ii) place the thermometer in container a.   (iii) record in table 2.1 the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals from t = 0 s until you  have a total of seven values up to time t = 180 s.   (iv) place the thermometer in container b.   (v) pour hot water into container b until there is sufficient at least to cover the thermometer bulb.    (vi) repeat step (iii).   (vii) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/10 [turn over \u00a9 ucles 2010table 2.1 (container a) (container b) t  / \u03b8  / \u03b8  /      [5]  (b) calculate the temperature change of the water in each container over the period of 180 s.  container a temperature change =  ...  container b temperature change =  .. [1]  (c) state which container, a or b has the greater rate of cooling. justify your answer by reference  to your readings. statement  .justification  ... ... .. [2]  (d) to make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the hot water in the two containers  it is important to control other experimental conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1  2  ... [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20103 in this experiment, you are to determine the resistances of lamps in different circuit arrangements.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you. this is circuit 1. power source circuit 1 lamp p va fig. 3.1  (a) switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across  lamp p. switch off.  (b) calculate the resistance r of lamp p using the equation r = v i .    record this value of r in the table.  (c) replace lamp p with lamp q. this is circuit 2 (not shown). repeat steps (a) and (b).  (d) return lamp p to the circuit so that lamps p and q are in parallel with each other. this is circuit 3. repeat steps (a) and (b). table 3.1 v / i / r  / circuit 1 circuit 2circuit 3  [5]  (e) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (f) draw a diagram of circuit 3 using standard circuit symbols.    [3]  (g) a student suggests that the resistance of lamp p added to the resistance of lamp q should be  equal to the combined resistance of the two lamps when arranged in parallel in circuit 3. state whether or not your results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference to your experimental results. statement  .justification  ... ... ... .. [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 20104 in this experiment you will investigate refraction and reflection of light in a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. a db fn n'p2p1e gc eye fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the block  should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd.  (b) remove the block and draw the normal nn' to side ab so that the normal is 2.0 cm from b. label the point f where nn' crosses ab.  (c) draw the line ef at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal. continue the line so that it crosses bc and extends about 5 cm beyond bc as shown in fig. 4.1. label the end of the line  g.  (d) place the paper on the pin board.  (e) push two pins p 1 and p2 into line ef as indicated in fig. 4.1.  (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block from the  direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1 so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind  the other.   push two pins p3 and p4 into the surface, between your eye and the block, so that p3, p4 and  the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear in line.   mark the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. remove the block.",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 (g) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line so that it crosses cd and  extends beyond bc to cross line efg. label the end of the line h.   (h) remove the pins from the ray trace sheet. measure the smaller angle \u03b8 between line efg  and the line joining the positions of p3, p4 and h.  \u03b8 =  .. [1]  (i) calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ).  ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =  .. [1]  (j) repeat steps (c) to (i) using an angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0 to the normal.  \u03b8 =  ...   ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =  .. [1]  (k) theory suggests that \u03b8 = 2i. state whether your result supports the theory and justify your  answer by reference to your results. statement  .justification  ... ... ...[2]  tie your ray trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9. [5]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (kn/sw) 17179/5 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *5429162966*physics 0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2010  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use1 an igcse student is investigating the stretching of springs.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used for the first part of the experiment. clamp spring b spring a 200  g mass200  g massl l fig. 1.1  the unstretched length la of spring a is 15 mm.  the unstretched length lb of spring b is 16 mm.  (a) the student hangs a 200 g mass on each spring, as shown in fig. 1.1.   (i) on fig. 1.1 measure the new length l of spring a.  l =  . mm   (ii) calculate the extension ea of the spring using the equation ea = (l \u2013 la).  ea =  . mm   (iii) on fig. 1.1 measure the new length l of spring b.  l =  . mm   (iv) calculate the extension eb of the spring using the equation eb = (l \u2013 lb).  eb =  . mm     [2]",
            "3": "3 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) the student then sets up the apparatus as shown in fig. 1.2. loadspring bspring al l rod fig. 1.2   (i) on fig. 1.2 measure the new length of each of the springs.  spring a:  l =  . mm  spring b:  l =  . mm   (ii) calculate the extension of each spring using the appropriate equation from  part (a).  spring a:  e =  . mm  spring b:  e =  . mm   (iii) calculate the average of these two extensions eav . show your working.  eav =  ..mm   [3]  (c) it is suggested that (ea + eb)/4 = eav .    state whether your results support this theory and justify your answer with reference to  the results. statement  justification  .. . [2]  (d) describe briefly one precaution that you would take to obtain accurate length  measurements.  .. .. . [1]",
            "4": "4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the cooling of water.  fig. 2.1. shows the apparatus used. hot waterthermometer fig. 2.1  hot water is poured into the beaker and temperature readings are taken as the water cools.  table 2.1 shows the readings taken by one student. table 2.1 t  / s \u03b8  /  \u00b0c   0 8 5  30 78  60 74  90 71 120 69 150 67 300 63  (a) (i) using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change t1 of the water  in the first 150 s.  t1 =   ...",
            "5": "5 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use  (ii) using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change t2 of the water  in the final 150 s.  t2 =     [3]  (b) plot a graph of \u03b8  /  \u00b0c (y-axis) against t  / s (x-axis) for the first 150 s. [5] 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 t / s  (c) during the experiment the rate of temperature change decreases.    (i) describe briefly how the results that you have calculated in part (a) show this  trend.  .. ..   (ii) describe briefly how the graph line shows this trend. .. ..     [2]",
            "6": "6 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the effect of the length of resistance wire in a circuit on the  potential difference across a lamp.  (a) fig. 3.1 shows the circuit without the voltmeter. complete the circuit diagram to show the voltmeter connected in the circuit to measure the potential difference across the lamp. power source sliding contactabl fig. 3.1   [2]  (b) a student switches on and places the sliding contact on the resistance wire at a distance  l = 0.200 m from end a. he records the value of l and the potential difference v across  the lamp.   he then repeats the procedure using a range of values of l. table 3.1 shows the  readings. table 3.1 l / m v / vv \u2013l / 0.200 1.67 0.400 1.43 0.600 1.25 0.800 1.11 1.000 1.00   (i) for each pair of readings in the table calculate and record in the table the value of v\u2013 l.   (ii) complete the table by writing in the unit for v\u2013l.      [3]",
            "7": "7 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (c) a student suggests that the potential difference v across the lamp is directly proportional  to the length l of resistance wire in the circuit. state whether or not you agree with this  suggestion and justify your answer by reference to the results. statement  justification  .. ..[2]  (d) state one precaution that you would take in order to obtain accurate readings of v in  this experiment.  .. .. ..[1]",
            "8": "8 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use4 an igcse student is investigating reflection from a plane mirror. g hjkef p5 p2 p1p6 sheet of paper fig. 4.1  the student is using a sheet of plain paper on a pin board. fig. 4.1 shows the sheet of paper.  the straight line ef shows the position of the reflecting surface of a plane mirror standing vertically on the sheet of paper. line gh is a normal to line ef. line jg marks an incident ray and line gk is the corresponding reflected ray. the student marks the position of the incident ray with two pins (p 1 and p2) and uses two more pins (p3 and p4) to find the direction of the  reflected ray.  (a) (i) on fig. 4.1 mark with two neat crosses, labelled p3 and p4, suitable positions for  the pins to find the direction of the reflected ray.    (ii) on fig. 4.1 measure the angle of incidence i.  i =     (iii) on fig. 4.1 measure the angle of reflection r1.  r1 =       [3]",
            "9": "9 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) on fig. 4.1 draw a line e'gf' such that the angle \u03b8 between this line and the line  egf is 10\u00b0. start with e' below the line egf. the straight line e'f' shows a new  position of the reflecting surface of the plane mirror standing vertically on the sheet of paper.    the points labelled p 5 and p6 mark the positions of two pins placed so that p5, p6  and the images of p1 and p2 appear in line with each other. p1 and p2 have not  been moved since the original set-up.    (ii) using a ruler, draw a line joining the points labelled p5 and p6, and continue this  line to meet the line e'f'.   (iii) measure the angle of reflection r2 between line gh and the line joining the points  labelled p5 and p6.  r2 =     (iv) calculate the angle \u03b1 through which the reflected ray has moved.  \u03b1 =     (v) calculate the difference between 2 \u03b8 and \u03b1.    \u03b8 is the angle between the two positions of the mirror.  difference between 2 \u03b8 and \u03b1 =        [3]  (c)  theory suggests that if the mirror is moved through an angle \u03b8 then the reflected ray will  move through an angle of 2 \u03b8.    state whether your result supports the theory and justify your answer by reference to  the result. statement  justification  .. ..[2]",
            "10": "10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is investigating the swing of a loaded metre rule.  the arrangement of the apparatus is shown in fig. 5.1. metre ruledpivot at 10  cm mar k load at 90  cm mark fig. 5.1  a student displaces the rule a small distance to one side and allows it to swing. the time t  taken for 10 complete swings is recorded. she calculates the time t taken for one swing. she repeats the procedure using different values of the distance d.  the readings are shown in the table 5.1. table 5.1 0.900 18.4 1.84 0.850 17.9 1.79 0.800 17.5 1.75 0.750 17.1 1.71 0.700 16.7 1.67  (a) complete the column headings in the table. [3]",
            "11": "11 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/61/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) explain why the student takes the time for ten swings and then calculates the time for  one swing, rather than just measuring the time for one swing.  .. ..[1]  (c) the student tries to find a relationship between t and d. she first suggests that t \u00d7 d is  a constant.   (i) calculate the values of t \u00d7 d and enter the values in the final column of the table.    (ii) state whether or not the results support this suggestion and give a reason for your answer. statement  . ..reason  . ..     [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (kn/sw) 17182/4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *2000525855*physics 0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2010  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is determining the mass of a load using a balancing method.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. mass m50.0  cm mark load x metre rule pivotd bench fig. 1.1  the load x has been taped to the metre rule so that its centre is exactly over the 90.0 cm  mark. it is not moved during the experiment. a mass m of 40 g is placed on the rule and its position adjusted so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the pivot. this is repeated using a range of masses. the readings are shown in table 1.1 table 1.1 m /g d /cm1d  / 1 cm  40 30.2 50 23.9 60 20.0 70 17.1 80 15.1  (a) for each value of d, calculate 1/d and record it in the table. [2]",
            "3": "3 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of m /g (y-axis) against 1 d / 1 cm (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  ... [2]  (d) determine the mass  \u03bc of the load x using the equation \u03bc = g/k where k = 40.0 cm.  \u03bc =  ... [2]",
            "4": "4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use2 an igcse student is investigating the rate of cooling of water in different containers.  fig. 2.1 shows the two containers. thermometer container a thermometer container b fig. 2.1  approximately 200 cm3 of hot water is poured into container a. a stopclock is started and  the temperature of the water is recorded at 30 s intervals. hot water is then poured into container b until there is sufficient to cover the thermometer bulb. the stopclock is started  and the temperature of the water is recorded at 30 s intervals. all the temperature readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 container a container b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 08 0 7 8 71 66 65 59 59 55 56 51 55 49 54 48  (a) (i) complete the column headings in the table.   (ii) complete the time column in the table.      [2]",
            "5": "5 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) calculate the temperature change of the water in each container over the period of  180 s.  container a temperature change =    container b temperature change =  ... [1]  (c) state which container, a or b, has the greater rate of cooling. justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement  justification  .. . [2]  (d) to make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the hot water in the two  containers it is important to control other experimental conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1.  ..2.  . [2]",
            "6": "6 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is determining the resistances of lamps in different circuit arrangements.  the first circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. this is circuit 1. power source circuit 1 lamp p va fig. 3.1  a student measures the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across lamp p. he then replaces  lamp p with lamp q to set up circuit 2 (not shown) and records the readings of current i and  potential difference v.   he then returns lamp p to the circuit so that lamps p and q are in parallel with each other. this is circuit 3. he again records the readings of current i and potential difference v. all the readings are in table 3.1. table 3.1 v / i / r / circuit 1 1.9 0.31 circuit 2 1.8 0.30 circuit 3 1.9 0.61  (a) draw a diagram of circuit 3 using standard circuit symbols.   [3]",
            "7": "7 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) calculate the resistance r of the lamp arrangement for each circuit, using the  equation r = v/ i.     record the values of r in table 3.1.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [3]  (c) a student suggests that the resistance of lamp p added to the resistance of lamp q should be equal to the combined resistance of the two lamps when arranged in parallel in circuit 3. state whether or not the results in the table support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference to the results. statement  justification  .. .. . [2]",
            "8": "8 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating refraction and reflection of light in a transparent block.  the block rests on a pin board covered with a sheet of plain paper. some of the lines and  labels that a student draws are shown in fig. 4.1. e f b a cp3 p4gd fig. 4.1  (a) the student places the transparent block abcd on the sheet of plain paper. the student draws a line around the block and then draws a normal to side ab.    on fig. 4.1 label the normal nn'. [1]  (b) line ef shows an incident ray that is at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal. the student continues the line to a point g.   draw two neat crosses on line ef and label them p 1 and p2 to show suitable positions  for two pins that are to be used to trace the direction of the incident ray.  [1]",
            "9": "9 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (c) the student observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block from the  direction indicated in fig. 4.1 so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the  other. she then places two pins p3 and p4 between her eye and the block so that p3, p4  and the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear in line. the positions of p3  and p4 are marked.   (i) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line so that it crosses  cd and extends beyond bc to cross line efg. label the end of the line h.    (ii) measure the smaller angle \u03b8  between efg and the line joining the positions of p3,  p4 and h.  \u03b8 =     (iii) calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ). show your working.  ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =       [4]  (d) the student repeats the experiment using an angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0 to the normal  and obtains a value of \u03b8 = 82\u00b0.   calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ).  ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =  [1]  (e) theory suggests that \u03b8 = 2i . state whether the two results in parts (c) and (d) support  the theory and justify your answer by reference to the results. statement  justification  .. ..[2]",
            "10": "10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/62/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use5 an igcse student is determining the magnification of an image formed by a lens. the  experimental set up is shown in fig. 5.1.  lens illuminated objectscreen benchxy fig. 5.1  the screen consists of a sheet of white paper stuck to a vertical board.  the position of the screen is adjusted until a focused image of the object is formed on the  screen.  (a) (i) on fig. 5.1 measure the distances x and y.  x =    y =     (ii) calculate the magnification m using the equation m = y /x.  m =      [3]  (b) suggest two precautions that you would take to obtain reliable results in this experiment. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..[2]  (c) the student wishes to measure the height of the image on the screen in order to check  his result. however he finds that when he tries to do this his hand and the rule prevent the light reaching the screen. suggest briefly a method he could use to measure the height of the image on the screen that would overcome this problem.  .. ..[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s10_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (sm/sw) 26697/1 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *0348490074*physics 0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2010  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is determining the mass of a load using a balancing method.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. mass m50.0  cm mark load x metre rule pivotd bench fig. 1.1  the load x has been taped to the metre rule so that its centre is exactly over the 90.0 cm  mark. it is not moved during the experiment. a mass m of 40 g is placed on the rule and its position adjusted so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the pivot. this is repeated using a range of masses. the readings are shown in table 1.1 table 1.1 m /g d /cm1d  / 1 cm  40 30.2 50 23.9 60 20.0 70 17.1 80 15.1  (a) for each value of d, calculate 1/d and record it in the table. [2]",
            "3": "3 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of m /g (y-axis) against 1 d / 1 cm (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  ... [2]  (d) determine the mass  \u03bc of the load x using the equation \u03bc = g/k where k = 40.0 cm.  \u03bc =  ... [2]",
            "4": "4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use2 an igcse student is investigating the rate of cooling of water in different containers.  fig. 2.1 shows the two containers. thermometer container a thermometer container b fig. 2.1  approximately 200 cm3 of hot water is poured into container a. a stopclock is started and  the temperature of the water is recorded at 30 s intervals. hot water is then poured into container b until there is sufficient to cover the thermometer bulb. the stopclock is started  and the temperature of the water is recorded at 30 s intervals. all the temperature readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 container a container b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 08 0 7 8 71 66 65 59 59 55 56 51 55 49 54 48  (a) (i) complete the column headings in the table.   (ii) complete the time column in the table.      [2]",
            "5": "5 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) calculate the temperature change of the water in each container over the period of  180 s.  container a temperature change =    container b temperature change =  ... [1]  (c) state which container, a or b, has the greater rate of cooling. justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement  justification  .. . [2]  (d) to make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the hot water in the two  containers it is important to control other experimental conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1.  ..2.  . [2]",
            "6": "6 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is determining the resistances of lamps in different circuit arrangements.  the first circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. this is circuit 1. power source circuit 1 lamp p va fig. 3.1  a student measures the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across lamp p. he then replaces  lamp p with lamp q to set up circuit 2 (not shown) and records the readings of current i and  potential difference v.   he then returns lamp p to the circuit so that lamps p and q are in parallel with each other. this is circuit 3. he again records the readings of current i and potential difference v. all the readings are in table 3.1. table 3.1 v / i / r / circuit 1 1.9 0.31 circuit 2 1.8 0.30 circuit 3 1.9 0.61  (a) draw a diagram of circuit 3 using standard circuit symbols.   [3]",
            "7": "7 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) calculate the resistance r of the lamp arrangement for each circuit, using the  equation r = v/ i.     record the values of r in table 3.1.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [3]  (c) a student suggests that the resistance of lamp p added to the resistance of lamp q should be equal to the combined resistance of the two lamps when arranged in parallel in circuit 3. state whether or not the results in the table support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference to the results. statement  justification  .. .. . [2]",
            "8": "8 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating refraction and reflection of light in a transparent block.  the block rests on a pin board covered with a sheet of plain paper. some of the lines and  labels that a student draws are shown in fig. 4.1. e f b a cp3 p4gd fig. 4.1  (a) the student places the transparent block abcd on the sheet of plain paper. the student draws a line around the block and then draws a normal to side ab.    on fig. 4.1 label the normal nn'. [1]  (b) line ef shows an incident ray that is at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal. the student continues the line to a point g.   draw two neat crosses on line ef and label them p 1 and p2 to show suitable positions  for two pins that are to be used to trace the direction of the incident ray.  [1]",
            "9": "9 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use (c) the student observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block from the  direction indicated in fig. 4.1 so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the  other. she then places two pins p3 and p4 between her eye and the block so that p3, p4  and the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear in line. the positions of p3  and p4 are marked.   (i) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line so that it crosses  cd and extends beyond bc to cross line efg. label the end of the line h.    (ii) measure the smaller angle \u03b8  between efg and the line joining the positions of p3,  p4 and h.  \u03b8 =     (iii) calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ). show your working.  ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =       [4]  (d) the student repeats the experiment using an angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0 to the normal  and obtains a value of \u03b8 = 82\u00b0.   calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ).  ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =  [1]  (e) theory suggests that \u03b8 = 2i . state whether the two results in parts (c) and (d) support  the theory and justify your answer by reference to the results. statement  justification  .. ..[2]",
            "10": "10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/63/m/j/10for examiner\u2019s use5 an igcse student is determining the magnification of an image formed by a lens. the  experimental set up is shown in fig. 5.1.  lens illuminated objectscreen benchxy fig. 5.1  the screen consists of a sheet of white paper stuck to a vertical board.  the position of the screen is adjusted until a focused image of the object is formed on the  screen.  (a) (i) on fig. 5.1 measure the distances x and y.  x =    y =     (ii) calculate the magnification m using the equation m = y /x.  m =      [3]  (b) suggest two precautions that you would take to obtain reliable results in this experiment. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..[2]  (c) the student wishes to measure the height of the image on the screen in order to check  his result. however he finds that when he tries to do this his hand and the rule prevent the light reaching the screen. suggest briefly a method he could use to measure the height of the image on the screen that would overcome this problem.  .. ..[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib10 11_0625_11/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2010  [turn over      *0588341704* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2010     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  1 the diagrams show an experiment to determine the volume of a stone.    cm3cm310  9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 without stone with stone stone     what is the volume of the stone?  a 3  cm3 b 4  cm3 c 7  cm3 d 11  cm3      2 four athletes run twice around a track. the table shows their times at the end of each lap.    which athlete runs the second lap the fastest?    athlete time at end of first lap  / s time at end of second lap  / s  a 22.99 47.04  b 23.04 47.00  c 23.16 47.18  d 23.39 47.24    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10 [turn over  3 the diagram shows the speed  / time graph for an object moving at constant speed.    2 0 0 3 4 time  / sspeed m / s 1 12     what is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3  s?  a 1.5  m b 2.0  m c 3.0  m d 6.0  m      4 a car travels along the route pqrst in 30 minutes.    p q  r s  t 10  km 5 km 5 km  10  km      what is the average speed of the car?  a 10  km  / hour b 20  km  / hour c 30  km  / hour d 60  km  / hour      5 which list contains the name of a force?  a acceleration, charge, temperature  b density, resistance, speed  c distance, frequency, mass  d energy, power, weight     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  6 the reading on a spring balance with a holder and eight identical discs is 3.0  n.    six discs are removed and the reading becomes 1.2  n.    0  1  2  3  4 n spring balance holder for discs eight discstwo discs 0  1  2  3  4 n     what is the weight of one disc?  a 0.2  n b 0.3  n c 0.5  n d 0.6  n      7 a student is trying to find the density of water an d of a large, regularly shaped concrete block.    which apparatus is needed to find the density of both the water and the concrete block?  a balance, clock, measuring cylinder  b balance, clock, ruler c balance, measuring cylinder, ruler  d clock, measuring cylinder, ruler     8 a force acts on a moving rubber ball.   which of these changes could not happen to the ball because of the force?    a a change in direction  b a change in mass c a change in shape d a change in speed     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10 [turn over  9 the extension  / load graph for a spring is shown. the unloaded length of the spring is 15.0  cm.    3 210 012345 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object of unknown weight is hung on the spring, the length of the spring is 16.4  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 0.55  n b 0.67  n c 3.5  n d 4.1  n      10 which of these is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy?  a a capacitor  b a generator c a motor d a transformer     11 a car is driven on a long journey along a flat, horizontal road. the car stops several times on the  journey and its engine becomes hot.    which type of energy does not change during the journey?  a the chemical energy in the fuel tank  b the gravitational energy of the car  c the internal (thermal) energy of the engine  d the kinetic energy of the car     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  12 what is a simple mercury barometer designed to measure?  a the pressure beneath a liquid  b the pressure of a gas supply  c the pressure of car tyres  d the pressure of the atmosphere      13 liquid x has a density of 1010  kg  / m3. liquid y has a density of 950  kg  / m3.    the liquids are poured into tubes as shown.    which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?    a liquid xb liquid yc liquid xd liquid y      14 some gas in a sealed plastic bag is cooled.    how do the gas molecules behave when this happens?  a they move more quickly and become closer together.  b they move more quickly and become further apart.  c they move more slowly and become closer together.  d they move more slowly and become further apart.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10 [turn over  15 a block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. the  water evaporates from the newspaper.    which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water  molecules that remain in the newspaper?     escaping molecules average speed of the  remaining water molecules  a the more energetic ones decreases  b the more energetic ones increases  c the less energetic ones decreases  d the less energetic ones increases    16 which change is condensation?    solid liquid gas a  cb d      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  17 a beaker containing ice and a thermometer is left in a warm room for 15 minutes.    no water is visible in the beaker until 5 minutes has passed. after 15 minutes some ice is still  visible.    start of experimentafter  5 minutes after 15 minuteswaterice ice     which graph shows how the thermometer reading changes?    51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / mina  51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / minb  51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / minc  500 0 0 10 150 temperature / \u00b0c time  / mind       ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10 [turn over  18 a piece of wood has some iron nails pushed thr ough it. one side of the wood is covered with heat  sensitive paper which turns from pink to blue when heated. the wood is heated as shown for a  few minutes and blue dots appear on the heat sensitive paper where it touches the nails.    heat sensitive paperwood heatiron nailsblue dots     this experiment shows that, compared to wood, iron is a good  a absorber of heat.  b conductor of heat.  c convector of heat.  d emitter of heat.      19 an electric heater is placed inside a metal box which has one side open. the diagram shows four  possible positions for the box.    the heater is switched on for several minutes.    in which position does the box become the hottest?    abcd heater boxheater box     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  20 which group contains only transverse waves?  a infra-red waves, light waves, sound waves  b infra-red waves, light waves, ultra-violet waves  c infra-red waves, ultra-violet waves, sound waves  d light waves, sound waves, ultra-violet waves      21 water waves in a tank pass over a thin plastic block as shown.    tank plastic block     what happens to the waves as they reach the plastic block?  a they are diffracted because they slow down.  b they are diffracted because they speed up.  c they are refracted because they slow down.  d they are refracted because they speed up.      22 a girl writes the word left on a piece of card.    left     she looks at the image of this card, made by reflection by a plane mirror.  what does she see?    a b c d       ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10 [turn over  23 a scientist is trying to direct a ray of light through a glass block without any light leaving the top of  the block. however, some light does leave the top.    x glass block  ray of  light top of block light leaving top      the scientist changes angle x and stops the ray of light leaving the top.     which row in the table describes the change to  angle x and the name of the effect produced?     change to angle x name of effect produced  a decrease total internal reflection  b decrease total internal refraction  c increase total internal reflection  d increase total internal refraction     24 the diagrams represent two different sound waves.    wave p wave q time timedisplacement displacement     how do the frequency and pitch of p com pare with the frequency and pitch of q?     frequency of p pitch of p  a greater than q higher than q  b greater than q same as q  c same as q higher than q  d same as q same as q    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  25 a ship sends a pulse of sound vertically downw ards to the sea bed. an echo is heard   0.4 seconds later.    if the speed of sound in the water is 1200  m / s, how deep is the water below the ship?  a 240  m b 480  m c 1500  m d 3000  m     26 which statement about a magnet is not correct?  a it can attract another magnet.  b it can attract an unmagnetised piece of iron. c it can repel another magnet.  d it can repel an unmagnetised piece of iron.     27 a chain of steel nails and a chain of iron nails hang from a strong magnet. the chains are then  carefully removed from the magnet.    magnet steel iron     what happens to the chains?  a both chains fall apart.  b both chains stay together.  c only the chain of iron nails falls apart.  d only the chain of steel nails falls apart.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10 [turn over  28 a potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor causes a current in it.    current resistor  p.d.     the p.d. and the resistance of the resistor can both be changed.    which row shows two changes that will both  increase the current in the resistor?     change change  a decrease p.d. decrease resistance  b decrease p.d. increase resistance  c increase p.d. decrease resistance  d increase p.d. increase resistance     29 the diagram shows a circuit containing two ammeters and three resistors.    r1 r2 r3ammeter  x ammeter yaa     which of the ammeters will show the current in resistor r 2?  a ammeter x only  b ammeter y only c both ammeter x and ammeter y  d neither ammeter x nor ammeter y     30 which component can store energy and can be used in time-delay circuits?  a a capacitor  b a potentiometer  c a resistor  d a thermistor    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  31 a circuit contains two resistors connected in parallel with a battery.    2 \u03c9 4 \u03c9r p q     which of the following statements about the currents at p, q and r is true?  a the current at p is the greatest.  b the current  at q is the greatest.  c the current  at r is the greatest.  d the current is the same at points p, q and r.     32 the potential divider shown is connected across a constant 12  v supply.    v1  v2 20  \u03c9 12  v  r      when r has a value of 20  \u03c9, the voltmeter readings are equal.    how do these readings change when the value of r is reduced to 10  \u03c9?     reading on v 1 reading on v 2  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10 [turn over  33 a fuse is a safety device for use in an electrical appliance.    how does a fuse affect a circuit when the current in it becomes higher than the correct value for  the appliance?  a it completely stops the current.  b it reduces the current to the correct value for the appliance.  c it sends the current to the outer case of the appliance.  d it sends the excess current to the earth wire.     34 some electrical equipment is connected to a 230  v supply. it is kept inside a metal case which is  not earthed. the case is fixed to a plastic support. a strand of wire has become loose and  touches the metal case as shown.    electrical  equipment cable  metal case on plastic support strand of wire      which statement about this situation is correct?  a an electric current is passing through the metal case.  b a fuse in the live wire will blow. c someone touching the case would receive an electric shock. d the metal case is at 0  v.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  35 a coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. the coil is connected to an oscilloscope.    n s  contact contact oscilloscope      which graph shows the output voltage v against time t ?    bcd a v tv tv tv t      36 a village has to be supplied with electricity from a power station that is a long way from the  village.    which type of current should be used, and at which voltage?     type of current voltage  a alternating current high voltage  b alternating current low voltage  c direct current high voltage  d direct current low voltage    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10 [turn over  37 an electric field is set up between two parallel plates.    cathode rays are directed into this field, parallel to the plates.    cathode rays+ \u2013    in which direction are the cathode rays deflected by the electric field?  a downwards  b upwards  c into the page  d out of the page      38 a radioactive element has a half-life of 70  s.    the number of emissions per second, n, of a sample of the element is measured at a certain  time.    what was the number of emissions per second 70  s earlier?  a 0 b n / 2 c  n d 2n      39 s is a radioactive source emitting \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm  away from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which radiations can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  40 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central  mass  orbiting particles      what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  blank page     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/11/o/n/10  blank page    "
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib10 11_0625_12/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2010  [turn over      *5599113984* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2010     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  1 the reading on a spring balance with a holder and eight identical discs is 3.0  n.    six discs are removed and the reading becomes 1.2  n.    0  1  2  3  4 n spring balance holder for discs eight discstwo discs 0  1  2  3  4 n     what is the weight of one disc?  a 0.2  n b 0.3  n c 0.5  n d 0.6  n      2 the diagrams show an experiment to determine the volume of a stone.    cm3cm310  9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 without stone with stone stone     what is the volume of the stone?  a 3  cm3 b 4  cm3 c 7  cm3 d 11  cm3     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10 [turn over  3 a student is trying to find the density of water an d of a large, regularly shaped concrete block.    which apparatus is needed to find the density of both the water and the concrete block?  a balance, clock, measuring cylinder  b balance, clock, ruler c balance, measuring cylinder, ruler  d clock, measuring cylinder, ruler     4 what is a simple mercury barometer designed to measure?  a the pressure beneath a liquid  b the pressure of a gas supply c the pressure of car tyres  d the pressure of the atmosphere     5 four athletes run twice around a track. the table shows their times at the end of each lap.    which athlete runs the second lap the fastest?    athlete time at end of first lap  / s time at end of second lap  / s  a 22.99 47.04  b 23.04 47.00  c 23.16 47.18  d 23.39 47.24     6 a car travels along the route pqrst in 30 minutes.   p q  r s  t 10  km 5 km 5 km  10  km      what is the average speed of the car?  a 10  km  / hour b 20  km  / hour c 30  km  / hour d 60  km  / hour ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  7 the diagram shows the speed  / time graph for an object moving at constant speed.    2 0 0 3 4 time  / sspeed m / s 1 12     what is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3  s?  a 1.5  m b 2.0  m c 3.0  m d 6.0  m      8 a car is driven on a long journey along a flat, horizontal road. the car stops several times on the  journey and its engine becomes hot.    which type of energy does not change during the journey?  a the chemical energy in the fuel tank  b the gravitational energy of the car  c the internal (thermal) energy of the engine  d the kinetic energy of the car     9 which list contains the name of a force?  a acceleration, charge, temperature  b density, resistance, speed  c distance, frequency, mass  d energy, power, weight      10 a force acts on a moving rubber ball.    which of these changes could not happen to the ball because of the force?    a a change in direction  b a change in mass c a change in shape  d a change in speed     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10 [turn over  11 the extension  / load graph for a spring is shown. the unloaded length of the spring is 15.0  cm.    3 210 012345 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object of unknown weight is hung on the spring, the length of the spring is 16.4  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 0.55  n b 0.67  n c 3.5  n d 4.1  n      12 liquid x has a density of 1010  kg  / m3. liquid y has a density of 950  kg  / m3.    the liquids are poured into tubes as shown.    which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?    a liquid xb liquid yc liquid xd liquid y     13 which change is condensation?    solid liquid gas a  cb d      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  14 some gas in a sealed plastic bag is cooled.    how do the gas molecules behave when this happens?  a they move more quickly and become closer together.  b they move more quickly and become further apart. c they move more slowly and become closer together. d they move more slowly and become further apart.     15 a beaker containing ice and a thermometer is left in a warm room for 15 minutes.    no water is visible in the beaker until 5 minutes has passed. after 15 minutes some ice is still visible.    start of experimentafter  5 minutes after 15 minuteswaterice ice     which graph shows how the thermometer reading changes?    51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / mina  51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / minb  51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / minc  500 0 0 10 150 temperature / \u00b0c time  / mind   ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10 [turn over  16 an electric heater is placed inside a metal box which has one side open. the diagram shows four  possible positions for the box.    the heater is switched on for several minutes.    in which position does the box become the hottest?    abcd heater boxheater box       17 a block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. the  water evaporates from the newspaper.    which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water molecules that remain in the newspaper?     escaping molecules average speed of the  remaining water molecules  a the more energetic ones decreases  b the more energetic ones increases  c the less energetic ones decreases  d the less energetic ones increases    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  18 a piece of wood has some iron nails pushed thr ough it. one side of the wood is covered with heat  sensitive paper which turns from pink to blue when heated. the wood is heated as shown for a  few minutes and blue dots appear on the heat sensitive paper where it touches the nails.    heat sensitive paperwood heatiron nailsblue dots     this experiment shows that, compared to wood, iron is a good  a absorber of heat.  b conductor of heat.  c convector of heat.  d emitter of heat.      19 a girl writes the word left on a piece of card.    left     she looks at the image of this card, made by reflection by a plane mirror.  what does she see?    a b c d       20 which group contains only transverse waves?  a infra-red waves, light waves, sound waves  b infra-red waves, light waves, ultra-violet waves c infra-red waves, ultra-violet waves, sound waves d light waves, sound waves, ultra-violet waves     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10 [turn over  21 a scientist is trying to direct a ray of light through a glass block without any light leaving the top of  the block. however, some light does leave the top.    x glass block  ray of  light top of block light leaving top      the scientist changes angle x and stops the ray of light leaving the top.     which row in the table describes the change to  angle x and the name of the effect produced?     change to angle x name of effect produced  a decrease total internal reflection  b decrease total internal refraction  c increase total internal reflection  d increase total internal refraction     22 water waves in a tank pass over a thin plastic block as shown.    tank plastic block     what happens to the waves as they reach the plastic block?  a they are diffracted because they slow down.  b they are diffracted because they speed up.  c they are refracted because they slow down.  d they are refracted because they speed up.     23 a ship sends a pulse of sound vertically downwards to the sea bed. an echo is heard   0.4 seconds later.    if the speed of sound in the water is 1200  m / s, how deep is the water below the ship?  a 240  m b 480  m c 1500  m d 3000  m   ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  24 the diagrams represent two different sound waves.    wave p wave q time timedisplacement displacement     how do the frequency and pitch of p com pare with the frequency and pitch of q?     frequency of p pitch of p  a greater than q higher than q  b greater than q same as q  c same as q higher than q  d same as q same as q     25 which of these is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy?  a a capacitor  b a generator c a motor  d a transformer     26 the diagram shows a circuit containing two ammeters and three resistors.    r1 r2 r3ammeter  x ammeter yaa     which of the ammeters will show the current in resistor r 2?  a ammeter x only  b ammeter y only c both ammeter x and ammeter y  d neither ammeter x nor ammeter y ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10 [turn over  27 a potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor causes a current in it.    current resistor  p.d.     the p.d. and the resistance of the resistor can both be changed.    which row shows two changes that will both  increase the current in the resistor?     change change  a decrease p.d. decrease resistance  b decrease p.d. increase resistance  c increase p.d. decrease resistance  d increase p.d. increase resistance     28 which component can store energy and can be used in time-delay circuits?  a a capacitor  b a potentiometer  c a resistor  d a thermistor   ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  29 the potential divider shown is connected across a constant 12  v supply.    v1  v2 20  \u03c9 12  v  r      when r has a value of 20  \u03c9, the voltmeter readings are equal.    how do these readings change when the value of r is reduced to 10  \u03c9?     reading on v 1 reading on v 2  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     30 a circuit contains two resistors connected in parallel with a battery.    2 \u03c9 4 \u03c9r p q     which of the following statements about the currents at p, q and r is true?  a the current at p is the greatest.  b the current  at q is the greatest.  c the current  at r is the greatest.  d the current is the same at points p, q and r.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10 [turn over  31 some electrical equipment is connected to a 230  v supply. it is kept inside a metal case which is  not earthed. the case is fixed to a plastic support. a strand of wire has become loose and  touches the metal case as shown.    electrical  equipment cable  metal case on plastic support strand of wire      which statement about this situation is correct?  a an electric current is passing through the metal case.  b a fuse in the live wire will blow. c someone touching the case would receive an electric shock. d the metal case is at 0  v.     32 a fuse is a safety device for use in an electrical appliance.    how does a fuse affect a circuit when the current in it becomes higher than the correct value for the appliance?  a it completely stops the current.  b it reduces the current to the correct value for the appliance. c it sends the current to the outer case of the appliance. d it sends the excess current to the earth wire.      33 which statement about a magnet is not correct?  a it can attract another magnet.  b it can attract an unmagnetised piece of iron. c it can repel another magnet. d it can repel an unmagnetised piece of iron.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  34 a chain of steel nails and a chain of iron nails hang from a strong magnet. the chains are then  carefully removed from the magnet.    magnet steel iron     what happens to the chains?  a both chains fall apart.  b both chains stay together.  c only the chain of iron nails falls apart.  d only the chain of steel nails falls apart.      35 a village has to be supplied with electricity from a power station that is a long way from the  village.    which type of current should be used, and at which voltage?     type of current voltage  a alternating current high voltage  b alternating current low voltage  c direct current high voltage  d direct current low voltage   ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10 [turn over  36 a coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. the coil is connected to an oscilloscope.    n s  contact contact oscilloscope      which graph shows the output voltage v against time t ?    bcd a v tv tv tv t      37 an electric field is set up between two parallel plates.    cathode rays are directed into this field, parallel to the plates.    cathode rays+ \u2013    in which direction are the cathode rays deflected by the electric field?  a downwards  b upwards  c into the page  d out of the page     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  38 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central  mass  orbiting particles      what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons      39 s is a radioactive source emitting \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm  away from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which radiations can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  40 a radioactive element has a half-life of 70  s.    the number of emissions per second, n, of a sample of the element is measured at a certain  time.    what was the number of emissions per second 70  s earlier?  a 0 b n / 2 c  n d 2n     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  blank page     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  blank page     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/12/o/n/10  blank page     "
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib10 11_0625_13/rp  \u00a9 ucles 2010  [turn over      *9807725667* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2010     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  1 a student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly shaped concrete block.    which apparatus is needed to find the density of both the water and the concrete block?  a balance, clock, measuring cylinder  b balance, clock, ruler c balance, measuring cylinder, ruler  d clock, measuring cylinder, ruler     2 liquid x has a density of 1010  kg  / m3. liquid y has a density of 950  kg  / m3.    the liquids are poured into tubes as shown.    which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?    a liquid xb liquid yc liquid xd liquid y      3 what is a simple mercury barometer designed to measure?  a the pressure beneath a liquid  b the pressure of a gas supply  c the pressure of car tyres  d the pressure of the atmosphere     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10 [turn over  4 the diagrams show an experiment to determine the volume of a stone.    cm3cm310  9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 without stone with stone stone     what is the volume of the stone?  a 3  cm3 b 4  cm3 c 7  cm3 d 11  cm3      5 the reading on a spring balance with a holder and eight identical discs is 3.0  n.    six discs are removed and the reading becomes 1.2  n.    0  1  2  3  4 n spring balance holder for discs eight discstwo discs 0  1  2  3  4 n     what is the weight of one disc?  a 0.2  n b 0.3  n c 0.5  n d 0.6  n     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  6 the extension  / load graph for a spring is shown. the unloaded length of the spring is 15.0  cm.    3 210 012345 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object of unknown weight is hung on the spring, the length of the spring is 16.4  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 0.55  n b 0.67  n c 3.5  n d 4.1  n      7 four athletes run twice around a track. the table shows their times at the end of each lap.   which athlete runs the second lap the fastest?    athlete time at end of first lap  / s time at end of second lap  / s  a 22.99 47.04  b 23.04 47.00  c 23.16 47.18  d 23.39 47.24     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10 [turn over  8 a car travels along the route pqrst in 30 minutes.    p q  r s  t 10  km 5 km 5 km  10  km      what is the average speed of the car?  a 10  km  / hour b 20  km  / hour c 30  km  / hour d 60  km  / hour      9 the diagram shows the speed  / time graph for an object moving at constant speed.    2 0 0 3 4 time  / sspeed m / s 1 12     what is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3  s?  a 1.5  m b 2.0  m c 3.0  m d 6.0  m      10 which list contains the name of a force?  a acceleration, charge, temperature  b density, resistance, speed  c distance, frequency, mass  d energy, power, weight     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  11 a force acts on a moving rubber ball.    which of these changes could not happen to the ball because of the force?    a a change in direction  b a change in mass c a change in shape  d a change in speed     12 a car is driven on a long journey along a flat, horizontal road. the car stops several times on the  journey and its engine becomes hot.    which type of energy does not change during the journey?  a the chemical energy in the fuel tank  b the gravitational energy of the car c the internal (thermal) energy of the engine d the kinetic energy of the car     13 which of these is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy?  a a capacitor  b a generator c a motor  d a transformer     14 an electric heater is placed inside a metal box which has one side open. the diagram shows four  possible positions for the box.    the heater is switched on for several minutes.    in which position does the box become the hottest?    abcd heater boxheater box    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10 [turn over  15 some gas in a sealed plastic bag is cooled.    how do the gas molecules behave when this happens?  a they move more quickly and become closer together.  b they move more quickly and become further apart. c they move more slowly and become closer together. d they move more slowly and become further apart.     16 which change is condensation?    solid liquid gas a  cb d       17 a block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. the  water evaporates from the newspaper.    which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water  molecules that remain in the newspaper?     escaping molecules average speed of the  remaining water molecules  a the more energetic ones decreases  b the more energetic ones increases  c the less energetic ones decreases  d the less energetic ones increases     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  18 a beaker containing ice and a thermometer is left in a warm room for 15 minutes.    no water is visible in the beaker until 5 minutes has passed. after 15 minutes some ice is still  visible.    start of experimentafter  5 minutes after 15 minuteswaterice ice     which graph shows how the thermometer reading changes?    51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / mina  51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / minb  51 0 1 50 temperature / \u00b0c time  / minc  500 0 0 10 150 temperature / \u00b0c time  / mind       ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10 [turn over  19 a piece of wood has some iron nails pushed thr ough it. one side of the wood is covered with heat  sensitive paper which turns from pink to blue when heated. the wood is heated as shown for a  few minutes and blue dots appear on the heat sensitive paper where it touches the nails.    heat sensitive paperwood heatiron nailsblue dots     this experiment shows that, compared to wood, iron is a good  a absorber of heat.  b conductor of heat.  c convector of heat.  d emitter of heat.      20 which group contains only transverse waves?  a infra-red waves, light waves, sound waves  b infra-red waves, light waves, ultra-violet waves  c infra-red waves, ultra-violet waves, sound waves  d light waves, sound waves, ultra-violet waves     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  21 the diagrams represent two different sound waves.    wave p wave q time timedisplacement displacement     how do the frequency and pitch of p com pare with the frequency and pitch of q?     frequency of p pitch of p  a greater than q higher than q  b greater than q same as q  c same as q higher than q  d same as q same as q     22 a ship sends a pulse of sound vertically downwards to the sea bed. an echo is heard   0.4 seconds later.    if the speed of sound in the water is 1200  m / s, how deep is the water below the ship?  a 240  m b 480  m c 1500  m d 3000  m     23 a girl writes the word left on a piece of card.    left     she looks at the image of this card, made by reflection by a plane mirror.  what does she see?    a b c d       ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10 [turn over  24 water waves in a tank pass over a thin plastic block as shown.    tank plastic block     what happens to the waves as they reach the plastic block?  a they are diffracted because they slow down.  b they are diffracted because they speed up.  c they are refracted because they slow down.  d they are refracted because they speed up.      25 a scientist is trying to direct a ray of light through a glass block without any light leaving the top of  the block. however, some light does leave the top.    x glass block  ray of  light top of block light leaving top      the scientist changes angle x and stops the ray of light leaving the top.     which row in the table describes the change to  angle x and the name of the effect produced?     change to angle x name of effect produced  a decrease total internal reflection  b decrease total internal refraction  c increase total internal reflection  d increase total internal refraction     26 which statement about a magnet is not correct?  a it can attract another magnet.  b it can attract an unmagnetised piece of iron. c it can repel another magnet.  d it can repel an unmagnetised piece of iron. ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  27 a chain of steel nails and a chain of iron nails hang from a strong magnet. the chains are then  carefully removed from the magnet.    magnet steel iron     what happens to the chains?  a both chains fall apart.  b both chains stay together.  c only the chain of iron nails falls apart.  d only the chain of steel nails falls apart.      28 the diagram shows a circuit containing two ammeters and three resistors.    r1 r2 r3ammeter  x ammeter yaa     which of the ammeters will show the current in resistor r 2?  a ammeter x only  b ammeter y only c both ammeter x and ammeter y d neither ammeter x nor ammeter y     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10 [turn over  29 a circuit contains two resistors connected in parallel with a battery.    2 \u03c9 4 \u03c9r p q     which of the following statements about the currents at p, q and r is true?  a the current at p is the greatest.  b the current  at q is the greatest.  c the current  at r is the greatest.  d the current is the same at points p, q and r.     30 a potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor causes a current in it.    current resistor  p.d.     the p.d. and the resistance of the resistor can both be changed.    which row shows two changes that will both  increase the current in the resistor?     change change  a decrease p.d. decrease resistance  b decrease p.d. increase resistance  c increase p.d. decrease resistance  d increase p.d. increase resistance    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  31 the potential divider shown is connected across a constant 12  v supply.    v1  v2 20  \u03c9 12  v  r      when r has a value of 20  \u03c9, the voltmeter readings are equal.    how do these readings change when the value of r is reduced to 10  \u03c9?     reading on v 1 reading on v 2  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     32 which component can store energy and can be used in time-delay circuits?  a a capacitor  b a potentiometer  c a resistor  d a thermistor    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10 [turn over  33 a coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. the coil is connected to an oscilloscope.    n s  contact contact oscilloscope      which graph shows the output voltage v against time t ?    bcd a v tv tv tv t      34 a fuse is a safety device for use in an electrical appliance.    how does a fuse affect a circuit when the current in it becomes higher than the correct value for the appliance?  a it completely stops the current.  b it reduces the current to the correct value for the appliance. c it sends the current to the outer case of the appliance.  d it sends the excess current to the earth wire.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  35 some electrical equipment is connected to a 230  v supply. it is kept inside a metal case which is  not earthed. the case is fixed to a plastic support. a strand of wire has become loose and  touches the metal case as shown.    electrical  equipment cable  metal case on plastic support strand of wire      which statement about this situation is correct?  a an electric current is passing through the metal case.  b a fuse in the live wire will blow. c someone touching the case would receive an electric shock. d the metal case is at 0  v.     36 a village has to be supplied with electricity from a power station that is a long way from the  village.    which type of current should be used, and at which voltage?     type of current voltage  a alternating current high voltage  b alternating current low voltage  c direct current high voltage  d direct current low voltage    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10 [turn over  37 an electric field is set up between two parallel plates.    cathode rays are directed into this field, parallel to the plates.    cathode rays+ \u2013    in which direction are the cathode rays deflected by the electric field?  a downwards  b upwards  c into the page  d out of the page      38 s is a radioactive source emitting \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm  away from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which radiations can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  39 a radioactive element has a half-life of 70  s.    the number of emissions per second, n, of a sample of the element is measured at a certain  time.    what was the number of emissions per second 70  s earlier?  a 0 b n / 2 c  n d 2n      40 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central  mass  orbiting particles      what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  blank page     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2010 0625/13/o/n/10  blank page    "
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages and 4 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 24995/3 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *2512877189*physics 0625/21 paper 2  core october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 (a) (i) figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the dimensions of a rectangular block being measured using a  ruler. they are not shown full size.    use the scales shown to find the length and the width of the block, giving your answers in cm. 140 150 160 170 180 190 millimetres200 210 220 230 240 25050 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160length of block  . cm  [1]  fig. 1.1 210 220 230 240 250 260 millimetres270 280 290 30010 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90width of block  ..  cm  [1]  fig. 1.2   (ii) when the block was made, it was cut from a piece of metal 2.0 cm thick.    calculate the volume of the block.  volume =  .  cm3  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) another block has a volume of 20 cm3.   fig. 1.3 shows the reading when the block is placed on a balance. 40 50 gramsblock 60 70 fig. 1.3   find the density of this block.  density =  .  [4]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20102 a boy cycles a distance of 960 m from home to school in 8.0 minutes.  (a)  calculate his average speed for the journey.  average speed =  .  [4]  (b) the journey is all along a horizontal road. at the end of the journey the boy is tired because of  the work he has done.   against which force has this work been done?  .  [1]  [total: 5] 3 (a) name three different energy resources used to obtain energy directly from water (not steam). 1.  ...2.  ...3.  .  [3]  (b) choose one of the energy resources you have named in (a) and write a brief description of  how the energy is converted to electrical energy. which energy resource are you describing?  description   ... ... ... ... .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over4 fig. 4.1 shows four parallel rays of light reaching a thin converging lens. point f is a principal focus  of the lens. pf fig. 4.1  (a) what name do we give to the distance pf?  ...  [1]  (b) on fig. 4.1, carefully draw the paths of the rays through the lens and into the air as far as the broken line. [2]  (c) a flat white screen is placed at f , parallel to the broken line.   describe what is seen on the screen.  ...  .  [1]  (d) the screen is moved so that it is along the broken line.   describe what is now seen on the screen.  ... .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20105 here is a list of different types of radiation. alpha (\u03b1),      beta (\u03b2),      gamma (\u03b3),      infra-red,      radio,      ultra-violet,      visible,      x-rays  (a) underline all those radiations in the list which are not electromagnetic radiations. [2]  (b) which radiation is the most penetrating?    [1]  (c) which radiation has the longest wavelength?  .  [1]  (d) which radiation consists of particles that are the same as 4he nuclei?  .  [1]  [total: 5] 6 fig. 6.1 shows two experiments to investigate energy transfer in water. watericewater ice trapped by small piece of wire gauze gentle heatinggentle heating experiment 1 cold water is gently heated at the bottom. the ice at the top melts before the water boils.experiment 2cold water is gently heated at the top. the ice trapped at the bottom remains solid, even when the water at the top begins to boil. fig. 6.1  (a) name the process by which thermal (heat) energy travels through the glass.  .  [1]  (b) (i) name the principal process in experiment 1 which takes the energy from the water at the  bottom to the ice at the top.  .  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over  (ii) describe how the process in (b)(i) occurs.  ... ... ... ... .  [2]  (c) suggest two reasons why the ice in experiment 2 does not melt, even when the water at the  top begins to boil. 1.  ... ... 2.  ... .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "9": "9 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over7 (a) in fig. 7.1, a ray of light is shown passing into water from air. the angle of the refracted ray to  the normal is 40\u00b0.   on fig. 7.1, mark clearly the angle of incidence i. [1] 40\u00b0air waterray of light fig. 7.1  (b) in fig. 7.2, a ray of light is shown in water and reaching the surface with the air at an angle of  40\u00b0 to the normal. air water40\u00b0 fig. 7.2   (i) on fig. 7.2, draw accurately the path of the ray in the air. [2]   (ii) the angle in the water in fig. 7.2 is increased from 40\u00b0 to 70\u00b0, and the ray no longer  emerges into the air.    state what happens to the ray at the surface and explain why this happens.  ... ... ... .  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20108 fig. 8.1 shows a workman hammering a metal post into the ground. some distance away is a  vertical cliff. cliff boy girlworkman fig. 8.1  (a) a boy is standing at the foot of the cliff. the speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. it takes 1.5 s for the sound of the hammer hitting the post to reach the boy.   (i) what does the boy hear after he sees each strike of the hammer on the post?  .  [1]   (ii) calculate the distance between the post and the boy.  distance =  . m  [3]  (b) a girl is also watching the workman. she is standing the same distance behind the post as  the boy is in front of it. she hears two separate sounds after each strike of the hammer on the post.   (i) why does she hear two sounds?  ... ... .  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over  (ii) how long after the hammer strike does the girl hear each of these sounds?  girl hears first sound after  ... s  girl hears second sound after  ... s  [2] [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20109 (a) fig. 9.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a single bar magnet. ab fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, mark the north and south poles of the magnet, using the letters n and s.    [2]   (ii) a small piece of unmagnetised iron is placed at a.    what, if anything, happens to it?  .  [1]   (iii) a small piece of positively charged plastic is placed at b.    what, if anything, happens to it? .  [1]  (b) fig. 9.2 shows an electromagnet. coil core fig. 9.2   (i) what must be done to magnetise the core? .  [1]   (ii) suggest the material from which the core should be made. .  [1]   (iii) state one advantage of an electromagnet, compared with a magnet such as that in (a). .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over10 a cruise ship is anchored in a harbour. the crew holds a party for the guests on board, and the  ship\u2019s electrical department decorates the decks with strings of coloured lamps. fig. 10.1  each string of lamps contains thirty 100 v lamps. the strings of lamps are run from a 100 v generator. the resistance of each lamp is 250 \u03c9. ignore the resistance of the generator.  (a) state whether the lamps on a particular string are connected in series or in parallel.  .  [1]  (b) calculate the current in each lamp when it is at normal brightness.  current =  .  a  [3]  (c) what current does the generator supply to each string of lamps?  current =  .  a  [1]  (d) the generator supplies current to several strings of lamps.   state whether the strings are connected to the generator in series or in parallel.  .  [1]  (e) one of the lamps \u201cblows\u201d and forms an open circuit.   what effect, if any, does this have on  (i) the other lamps in the same string,  ...   (ii) the lamps in the other strings?    [2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over11 the reed switch (reed relay) shown in fig. 11.1 is a normally-closed one. fig. 11.1  when a magnet is held close to the reed switch, the contacts open, as shown in fig. 11.2.  fig. 11.2 also includes the circuit symbol for a bell. ns fig. 11.2  (a) complete fig. 11.2 so that it shows a circuit that will cause the bell to ring when the magnet is taken away. [2]  (b) fig. 11.3 shows a door in a wall.           (i) on fig 11.3, show where you would fix the reed switch and the magnet of fig 11.2, so that the bell rings when the door opens. use the letter s for the switch and the letter m for the magnet. [2]  (ii) suggest one application of this arrangement.     ..   [1] fig. 11.3  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201012 the table below lists the three types of emission which can occur during radioactive decay.  (a) complete the table to indicate whether each of the emissions has mass and whether it has  charge. three answers have been given to help you. mass charge alpha (\u03b1) yes beta (\u03b2) yes gamma (\u03b3)n o  [3]  (b) from which part of the atom do all of these emissions come?  .  [1]  (c) the values in the table below were obtained during the decay of a radioactive substance. elapsed time / minutes count rate counts / min   0 909  20 689  40 522  60 400  80 300 100 230 120 170 140 125 160  99   (i) on fig. 12.1, three points have been plotted for you.    plot the remaining points, using dots in circles as shown, and draw the best-fit curve for  these points. [3]",
            "17": "17 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over001002003004005006007008009001000 20 40 60 80 100 120 elapsed time  / minutescount rate counts  / min 140 160  time to decrease from 800 counts  / min to 200 counts  / min = .. minutes = .. minuteshalf-life of substance fig. 12.1",
            "18": "18 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010  (ii) from the graph, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 800 counts / min  to 200 counts / min. write your answer and any working in the space on the graph. [3]   (iii) use your value from (c)(ii) to determine the half-life of the radioactive substance.    write your answer in the space on the graph. [1]  (d) a different sample of the same radioactive substance as in (c) has an initial count rate of 4000 counts / min.   write down the time taken for the count rate to decrease to 1000 counts / min.  .  [1]  [total: 12]",
            "19": "19 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/21/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 24987/3 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9349479720*physics 0625/22 paper 2  core october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 drops of water from a cracked gutter fall past the window of an igcse physics student\u2019s room, as  shown in fig. 1.1. cracked gutter fig. 1.1  the student uses a digital stopwatch to find the time between one drop and the next.  to do this he     sets the stopwatch to zero,   then, starts the stopwatch as a drop comes into view at the top of the window,   then, stops the stopwatch 40 drops later.  the appearance of the stopwatch after 40 drops is shown in fig. 1.2. s fig. 1.2  (a) state the reading on the stopwatch. reading = ... s  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.  time =  .. s  [2]  (c) explain why it is better to time 40 intervals than to time just 1 interval. ... .  [1]  (d) using fig. 1.1, estimate the time for a drop to fall from the top of the upper window to the  ground.  time =  .. s  [3]  (e) fig. 1.1 shows that the drops get further apart as they get closer to the ground.   explain why this happens.  ... ... .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20102 an unstretched spring of overall length 50.0 mm is hung from a support, as shown in fig. 2.1. 50.0  mm load fig. 2.1  different loads are placed on the spring and the extension is measured each time.  (a) on fig. 2.1, mark clearly the extension caused by the load.   [1]  (b) the extensions for different loads are given in the table below. load / n extension / mm   0 1.02.03.04.0   010.020.531.041.5   (i) on fig. 2.2, plot these values, using dots in small circles (\u007f), and draw the best straight  line for the points.   [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over00102030405060 1 2 3 4 5extension  / mm load  / n fig. 2.2   (ii) complete the following sentence by inserting the appropriate word.    within the limits of experimental accuracy, the load and the extension of the spring  are .. to each other.   [1]   (iii) a load of 2.5 n is hung on the spring.    1.  what does the letter n stand for? ..   [1]   2.   use the graph to estimate the overall length of the spring when 2.5 n is hanging from  it.  length =  .. mm  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20103 (a) an aeroplane is flying horizontally at a steady speed in a straight line.   fig. 3.1 shows three of the four forces acting on it. air friction weightengine thrust fig. 3.1   (i) in order to fly horizontally at a steady speed, which two of the forces shown on the  aeroplane must be equal?     and  are equal.   [1]   (ii) in order to fly horizontally in a straight line, there must be a fourth force acting on the plane.    draw an arrow on fig. 3.1 to represent this force.   [1]  (b) the aeroplane in fig. 3.1 flies an outward journey from budapest (hungary) to palermo (italy) in 2.75 hours. the distance is 2200 km.   (i) calculate, in km / h, the average speed of the aeroplane.  average speed =  ...  km / h  [3]   (ii) on the return journey from palermo to budapest, the journey time is shorter, even though the engine thrust is the same.    suggest what might have caused the return journey to be shorter.  ... .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over4 a simple pendulum starts with its bob at position x, shown in fig. 4.1. the bob is pulled aside to y  and then released. it swings from y to z and back to y . support pendulum bob groundy xzthin cord fig. 4.1  write suitable words in the gaps in the following sentences. ignore air resistance.  in order to move the bob from x to y , . has to be done on it and its  ... energy increases because it is raised further from theground. as it moves towards x, some of this energy is converted into   ... energy. throughout the swing from y to z and back to y , the total energy is . . energy is measured in units called ... .  [5]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20105 (a) the list below contains terms that are used when dealing with heat and temperature. boiling point,          melting point,          internal energy,          thermal capacity   (i) which one of these quantities will increase when an object is heated?  .  [1]   (ii) which one of these determines the temperature rise when an object is given a quantity  of energy, without changing state?  .  [1]   (iii) some liquid is heated until its temperature stops rising.    which one of these quantities describes the temperature at which this happens? .  [1]  (b) fig. 5.1 shows an apparatus containing a brass rod. the brass rod is inside a tube, called a  steam jacket, through which steam may be passed. the rod is fixed at the right-hand end, but free to move at the left-hand end. the dial micrometer indicates any movement of the left hand end. thermometer steam insteam out rigid frame fixed enddial micrometersteam jacketbrass rod fig. 5.1   steam is now passed through the steam jacket. in the boxes below, write down what will  happen to the readings on the thermometer and the dial micrometer, and why. what will happen why reading on  thermometer reading on dial  micrometer  [4]    [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light ab striking a plane mirror at an angle of incidence of 40\u00b0. 40\u00b0 acb mirror fig. 6.1   state the value of the angle of reflection of the ray . [1]  (b) in fig. 6.2, the mirror has been rotated 10\u00b0 from its position in fig. 6.1. ab has remained  unchanged. 40\u00b010\u00b0 acb mirror fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, use a straight edge to draw the reflected ray.   (ii) state the value of the angle between the reflected ray and the line bc. .   (iii) through how many degrees does the reflected ray rotate when the mirror rotates through 10\u00b0? ..   [4]  (c) an object of height 2 cm is placed 5 cm in front of a plane mirror.   (i) state the height of the image formed by the mirror.    [1]   (ii) find the distance between the object and the image.  distance =  ... cm  [2]    [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20107 a narrow beam of white light enters a glass prism and is split into the colours of the visible  spectrum, as shown (not to scale) in fig. 7.1. space for answers to part (b) narrow beam of white light fig. 7.1  (a) what name do we give to   (i) the bending of the light as it enters the prism,  ...   (ii) the different amounts of bending that give rise to the spectrum? ...    [2]  (b) the lines leaving the prism represent rays of the seven main colours of the visible spectrum.   in the answer spaces provided on fig. 7.1, write  (i) \u2018red\u2019 in the space alongside the red ray,   (ii) \u2018yellow\u2019 in the space alongside the yellow ray.   [2]  (c) the visible spectrum is part of the electromagnetic spectrum.   state two other types of radiation that are also part of the electromagnetic spectrum. 1.  ...2.  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over8 a stretched string is vibrating between two fixed ends. fig. 8.1 shows how the string is vibrating. ba fig. 8.1  (a) state the name of   (i) distance a, ...   [1]   (ii) distance b. ...   [1]  (b) the string is causing a sound to be transmitted through the air.   (i) describe how the string causes the sound.  ... ... ... ... .  [2]   (ii) state what happens to the sound as the distance a decreases. ... .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20109 (a) (i) in the space below, draw a diagram of the circuit that you would use to determine the  resistance of a coil of wire using a voltmeter and an ammeter.    use conventional symbols and label the coil clearly.    [3]   (ii) state the equation you would use to calculate the resistance of the coil.    [1]   (iii) state two properties of the wire on which the resistance of the coil depends. 1. 2. ..  [2]  (b) in fig. 9.1, ab is a 2.0 m length of uniform resistance wire, connected into a circuit.   ignore the resistance of the battery. i ab3.06.0 v fig. 9.1",
            "13": "13 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over  the current i is 1.5 a.   calculate the resistance per metre of the resistance wire.  resistance per metre =    \u03c9 / m  [4]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201010 (a) the apparatus in fig. 10.1 is set up in a laboratory. the metal wheels are rolled along the rails  from the left-hand end to the right-hand end. metal wheels on metal axle metal rails sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter fig. 10.1   (i) describe what is seen happening to the pointer on the sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.  ... .  [2]   (ii) explain why this happens. ... ... ... ... .  [3]   (iii) the metal wheels are now rolled back to the left-hand end again.    describe what now happens to the millivoltmeter pointer. ... .  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) fig. 10.2 shows a magnet suspended above a coil of wire. sensitive centre-zero millivoltmetermagnet coilspring fig. 10.2   the end of the magnet is pushed into the coil and released, so that it bounces repeatedly in  and out of the coil.   describe what is seen on the sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.  ...  .  [1]    [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201011 (a) in the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.    [1]  (b) describe how a fuse protects an electric circuit.  ... ... ... .  [2]  (c) a mains electricity circuit has three wires, live, neutral and earth.   in which of these is the fuse connected? tick one box. live neutral earth   [1]    [total: 4]",
            "17": "17 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201012 (a) a \u03b2-particle may be represented by the symbol 0 \u20131e.   (i) what does the e indicate about a \u03b2-particle?  ...   (ii) what does the 0 indicate about a \u03b2-particle? ...   (iii) what does the \u20131 indicate about a \u03b2-particle? .  [4]  (b) the nuclide  250 97bk decays by emitting a \u03b2-particle.   complete the nuclear equation for this decay by writing appropriate numbers in the    boxes.  250 97bk   cf + 0 \u20131e   [2]    [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/22/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (sjf/sw) 33915 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *8792218070* physics 0625/23 paper 2  core october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 drops of water from a cracked gutter fall past the window of an igcse physics student\u2019s room, as  shown in fig. 1.1. cracked gutter fig. 1.1  the student uses a digital stopwatch to find the time between one drop and the next.  to do this he     sets the stopwatch to zero,   then, starts the stopwatch as a drop comes into view at the top of the window,   then, stops the stopwatch 40 drops later.  the appearance of the stopwatch after 40 drops is shown in fig. 1.2. s fig. 1.2  (a) state the reading on the stopwatch. reading = ... s  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.  time =  .. s  [2]  (c) explain why it is better to time 40 intervals than to time just 1 interval. ... .  [1]  (d) using fig. 1.1, estimate the time for a drop to fall from the top of the upper window to the  ground.  time =  .. s  [3]  (e) fig. 1.1 shows that the drops get further apart as they get closer to the ground.   explain why this happens.  ... ... .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20102 an unstretched spring of overall length 50.0 mm is hung from a support, as shown in fig. 2.1. 50.0  mm load fig. 2.1  different loads are placed on the spring and the extension is measured each time.  (a) on fig. 2.1, mark clearly the extension caused by the load.   [1]  (b) the extensions for different loads are given in the table below. load / n extension / mm   0 1.02.03.04.0   010.020.531.041.5   (i) on fig. 2.2, plot these values, using dots in small circles (\u007f), and draw the best straight  line for the points.   [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over00102030405060 1 2 3 4 5extension  / mm load  / n fig. 2.2   (ii) complete the following sentence by inserting the appropriate word.    within the limits of experimental accuracy, the load and the extension of the spring  are .. to each other.   [1]   (iii) a load of 2.5 n is hung on the spring.    1.  what does the letter n stand for? ..   [1]   2.   use the graph to estimate the overall length of the spring when 2.5 n is hanging from  it.  length =  .. mm  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20103 (a) an aeroplane is flying horizontally at a steady speed in a straight line.   fig. 3.1 shows three of the four forces acting on it. air friction weightengine thrust fig. 3.1   (i) in order to fly horizontally at a steady speed, which two of the forces shown on the  aeroplane must be equal?     and  are equal.   [1]   (ii) in order to fly horizontally in a straight line, there must be a fourth force acting on the plane.    draw an arrow on fig. 3.1 to represent this force.   [1]  (b) the aeroplane in fig. 3.1 flies an outward journey from budapest (hungary) to palermo (italy) in 2.75 hours. the distance is 2200 km.   (i) calculate, in km / h, the average speed of the aeroplane.  average speed =  ...  km / h  [3]   (ii) on the return journey from palermo to budapest, the journey time is shorter, even though the engine thrust is the same.    suggest what might have caused the return journey to be shorter.  ... .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over4 a simple pendulum starts with its bob at position x, shown in fig. 4.1. the bob is pulled aside to y  and then released. it swings from y to z and back to y . support pendulum bob groundy xzthin cord fig. 4.1  write suitable words in the gaps in the following sentences. ignore air resistance.  in order to move the bob from x to y , . has to be done on it and its  ... energy increases because it is raised further from theground. as it moves towards x, some of this energy is converted into   ... energy. throughout the swing from y to z and back to y , the total energy is . . energy is measured in units called ... .  [5]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20105 (a) the list below contains terms that are used when dealing with heat and temperature. boiling point,          melting point,          internal energy,          thermal capacity   (i) which one of these quantities will increase when an object is heated?  .  [1]   (ii) which one of these determines the temperature rise when an object is given a quantity  of energy, without changing state?  .  [1]   (iii) some liquid is heated until its temperature stops rising.    which one of these quantities describes the temperature at which this happens? .  [1]  (b) fig. 5.1 shows an apparatus containing a brass rod. the brass rod is inside a tube, called a  steam jacket, through which steam may be passed. the rod is fixed at the right-hand end, but free to move at the left-hand end. the dial micrometer indicates any movement of the left hand end. thermometer steam insteam out rigid frame fixed enddial micrometersteam jacketbrass rod fig. 5.1   steam is now passed through the steam jacket. in the boxes below, write down what will  happen to the readings on the thermometer and the dial micrometer, and why. what will happen why reading on  thermometer reading on dial  micrometer  [4]    [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light ab striking a plane mirror at an angle of incidence of 40\u00b0. 40\u00b0 acb mirror fig. 6.1   state the value of the angle of reflection of the ray . [1]  (b) in fig. 6.2, the mirror has been rotated 10\u00b0 from its position in fig. 6.1. ab has remained  unchanged. 40\u00b010\u00b0 acb mirror fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, use a straight edge to draw the reflected ray.   (ii) state the value of the angle between the reflected ray and the line bc. .   (iii) through how many degrees does the reflected ray rotate when the mirror rotates through 10\u00b0? ..   [4]  (c) an object of height 2 cm is placed 5 cm in front of a plane mirror.   (i) state the height of the image formed by the mirror.    [1]   (ii) find the distance between the object and the image.  distance =  ... cm  [2]    [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20107 a narrow beam of white light enters a glass prism and is split into the colours of the visible  spectrum, as shown (not to scale) in fig. 7.1. space for answers to part (b) narrow beam of white light fig. 7.1  (a) what name do we give to   (i) the bending of the light as it enters the prism,  ...   (ii) the different amounts of bending that give rise to the spectrum? ...    [2]  (b) the lines leaving the prism represent rays of the seven main colours of the visible spectrum.   in the answer spaces provided on fig. 7.1, write  (i) \u2018red\u2019 in the space alongside the red ray,   (ii) \u2018yellow\u2019 in the space alongside the yellow ray.   [2]  (c) the visible spectrum is part of the electromagnetic spectrum.   state two other types of radiation that are also part of the electromagnetic spectrum. 1.  ...2.  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over8 a stretched string is vibrating between two fixed ends. fig. 8.1 shows how the string is vibrating. ba fig. 8.1  (a) state the name of   (i) distance a, ...   [1]   (ii) distance b. ...   [1]  (b) the string is causing a sound to be transmitted through the air.   (i) describe how the string causes the sound.  ... ... ... ... .  [2]   (ii) state what happens to the sound as the distance a decreases. ... .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20109 (a) (i) in the space below, draw a diagram of the circuit that you would use to determine the  resistance of a coil of wire using a voltmeter and an ammeter.    use conventional symbols and label the coil clearly.    [3]   (ii) state the equation you would use to calculate the resistance of the coil.    [1]   (iii) state two properties of the wire on which the resistance of the coil depends. 1. 2. ..  [2]  (b) in fig. 9.1, ab is a 2.0 m length of uniform resistance wire, connected into a circuit.   ignore the resistance of the battery. i ab3.06.0 v fig. 9.1",
            "13": "13 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over  the current i is 1.5 a.   calculate the resistance per metre of the resistance wire.  resistance per metre =    \u03c9 / m  [4]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201010 (a) the apparatus in fig. 10.1 is set up in a laboratory. the metal wheels are rolled along the rails  from the left-hand end to the right-hand end. metal wheels on metal axle metal rails sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter fig. 10.1   (i) describe what is seen happening to the pointer on the sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.  ... .  [2]   (ii) explain why this happens. ... ... ... ... .  [3]   (iii) the metal wheels are now rolled back to the left-hand end again.    describe what now happens to the millivoltmeter pointer. ... .  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) fig. 10.2 shows a magnet suspended above a coil of wire. sensitive centre-zero millivoltmetermagnet coilspring fig. 10.2   the end of the magnet is pushed into the coil and released, so that it bounces repeatedly in  and out of the coil.   describe what is seen on the sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.  ...  .  [1]    [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201011 (a) in the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.    [1]  (b) describe how a fuse protects an electric circuit.  ... ... ... .  [2]  (c) a mains electricity circuit has three wires, live, neutral and earth.   in which of these is the fuse connected? tick one box. live neutral earth   [1]    [total: 4]",
            "17": "17 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201012 (a) a \u03b2-particle may be represented by the symbol 0 \u20131e.   (i) what does the e indicate about a \u03b2-particle?  ...   (ii) what does the 0 indicate about a \u03b2-particle? ...   (iii) what does the \u20131 indicate about a \u03b2-particle? .  [4]  (b) the nuclide  250 97bk decays by emitting a \u03b2-particle.   complete the nuclear equation for this decay by writing appropriate numbers in the    boxes.  250 97bk   cf + 0 \u20131e   [2]    [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/23/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 24990/4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *3428909673 *physics 0625/31 paper 3  extended october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 an object of weight w is suspended by two ropes from a beam, as shown in fig. 1.1. 60\u00b0 w86.6  n 50.0  n30\u00b0 fig. 1.1  the tensions in the ropes are 50.0 n and 86.6 n, as shown.  (a) in the space below, draw a scale diagram to find the resultant of the two tensions.   use a scale of 1.0 cm = 10 n.   clearly label the resultant. [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) from your diagram, find the value of the resultant.  resultant =  .  [1]  (c) state the direction in which the resultant is acting.  .  [1]  (d) state the value of w.  w =  .  [1]  [total: 6] 2 a car travels around a circular track at constant speed.  (a) why is it incorrect to describe the circular motion as having constant velocity? .  [1]  (b) a force is required to maintain the circular motion.   (i) explain why a force is required. ... ... .  [2]   (ii) in which direction does this force act? .  [1]   (iii) suggest what provides this force. .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20103 fig. 3.1 shows a hydraulic lift in a car repair workshop. hydraulic fluid 4 pistons, each of area 0.02  m2 piston a, area 0.01  m2car support fig. 3.1  the hydraulic fluid transmits the pressure, caused by piston a, equally to each of the four pistons  holding up the car supports. the pressure throughout the fluid is the same.  a force of 1000 n on piston a is just enough to raise the car.  (a) using values from fig. 3.1, find   (i) the pressure caused by piston a on the fluid,  pressure =  .  [2]   (ii) the total upward force caused by the fluid.  force =  .  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) the weight of each of the two car supports is 1000 n.   calculate the mass of the car.  mass =  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20104 a student in a laboratory uses the apparatus shown in fig. 4.1 to determine the specific heat  capacity of aluminium. to low voltage supply and measuring instruments electrical heaterthermometer aluminium block fig. 4.1  the readings obtained in the experiment are given below.  mass of aluminium block =  0.930 kg  initial temperature of block =  13.1 \u00b0c  final temperature of block  =  41.3 \u00b0c  electrical energy supplied =  23 800 j  (a) define specific heat capacity. ... .  [2]  (b) use the readings above to calculate the specific heat capacity of aluminium.   state the equation you use.  specific heat capacity =  .  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (c) because the student knows it is good scientific practice to repeat readings, after a short time  he carries out the experiment again, supplying the same quantity of electrical energy.   this time the temperature readings are:  initial temperature of block =  41.0 \u00b0c  final temperature of block  =  62.1 \u00b0c   (i) use these figures to calculate a second value for the specific heat capacity of  aluminium.  specific heat capacity =  .  [1]   (ii) the student did not make any mistakes when taking the readings.    suggest why the second value for the specific heat capacity of the aluminium is greater  than the first.  ... .  [2]  (d) suggest two ways of improving the experiment in order to give as accurate a result as  possible. 1.  ... ...2.  ... .. [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20105 fig. 5.1 shows a model cable-car system. it is driven by an electric motor coupled to a gear  system. 2.0 m6.0 mgears electric motor model cable-carsmooth pulley fig. 5.1  the model cable-car has a mass of 5.0 kg and is lifted from the bottom pulley to the top pulley in 40 s. it stops automatically at the top.  (a) calculate   (i) the average speed of the cable-car,  average speed =  .. [2]   (ii) the gravitational potential energy gained by the cable-car,  gravitational potential energy gained =  .. [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over  (iii) the useful output power of the driving mechanism.  power =  .  [2]  (b) how would the electrical power input to the motor compare with your answer to (a)(iii)? .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20106 fig. 6.1 shows part of the path of a ray of light pq travelling in an optical fibre. glass p rq fig. 6.1  pq undergoes total internal reflection at q.  (a) explain what is meant by total internal reflection, and state the conditions under which it  occurs.  ... ... ... ... .  [3]  (b) carefully complete the path of the ray of light, until it reaches the end r of the optical fibre.  [2]    [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over7 (a) the following list contains the names of types of energy transfer by means of waves.   \u03b3-rays,      infra-red,      radio/tv/microwaves,      sound,      visible light,      x-rays   (i) which one of these is not a type of electromagnetic wave? .  [1]   (ii) state the nature of the wave you have named in (a)(i). .  [1]   (iii) the remaining names in the list are all regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but one  region is missing.    name the missing region.  .  [1]  (b) a television station emits waves with a frequency of 2.5 \u00d7 10 8 hz. electromagnetic waves  travel at a speed of 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s.   calculate the wavelength of the waves emitted by this television station. state the equation  you use.  wavelength =  .  [3]   [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20108 the circuit in fig. 8.1 contains a 2.0 v cell, whose resistance you should ignore.  there are also three resistors, a 3-position switch, an ammeter and another component, p . 20.05.0 sa b c p 2.0 va fig. 8.1  (a) state the name of component p . ..  [1]  (b) deduce the resistance of the circuit when switch s is   (i) in position a,  resistance =  .  [1]   (ii) in position b.  resistance =  .  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (c) describe and explain what is seen on the ammeter when s is moved to position c.  ... ... ... .  [2]  (d) with s in position a, calculate how long it takes for the circuit to transfer 320 j of electrical  energy to other forms.  time taken =  .  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over9 in fig. 9.1, a and b are two conductors on insulating stands. both a and b were initially  uncharged. abxy fig. 9.1  (a) conductor a is given the positive charge shown on fig. 9.1.   (i) on fig. 9.1, mark the signs of the charges induced at end x and at end y of conductor b. [1]   (ii) explain how these charges are induced.  ... ... .  [3]   (iii) explain why the charges at x and at y are equal in magnitude. ... ... .  [1]  (b) b is now connected to earth by a length of wire.   explain what happens, if anything, to  (i) the charge at x, ... .  [1]   (ii) the charge at y . ... .  [2]    [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201010 emissions from a radioactive source pass through a hole in a lead screen and into a magnetic  field, as shown in fig. 10.1. 3 cmcbmagnetic field into paperradioactive source lead screena fig. 10.1  radiation detectors are placed at a, b and c. they give the following readings: abc 32 counts / min 543 counts / min 396 counts / min  the radioactive source is then completely removed, and the readings become: abc 33 counts / min 30 counts / min 31 counts / min  (a) explain why there are still counts being recorded at a, b and c, even when the radioactive source has been removed, and give the reason for them being slightly different.  ... ... ... .  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over [turn over (b) from the data given, deduce the type of emission being detected, if any, at a, at b and at c  when the radiation source is present.   state the reasons for your answers. detector at a  .  ... .  [2]detector at b  . ... .  [3]detector at c  . ... .  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201011 when no circuit is connected to the input of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (cro), there is a horizontal  trace across the middle of the screen.  fig. 11.1 shows three circuits, each connected to a cro.  on the grid alongside each circuit, draw the trace that might be seen on the screen of the cro. battery cro+ \u2013 a.c. supply a.c. supplycro cro  [6] fig. 11.1    [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/31/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 24992/4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *7292104438*physics 0625/32 paper 3  extended october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 a hillside is covered with snow. a skier is travelling down the hill. fig. 1.1  the table below gives the values of the acceleration of the skier at various heights above the  bottom of the hill. height  / m 350 250 150 50 acceleration m / s2 7.4 3.6 1.2  0",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (a) on fig. 1.2, plot the values given in the table, using dots in circles.   draw the best curve for these points.   [2] 0012345 50 100 150 200 250 300 height   / macceleration  m / s2 678 350 fig. 1.2",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 (b) describe what is happening, during the descent, to   (i) the acceleration of the skier,  ... ... .  [1]   (ii) the speed of the skier. ... ... .  [1]  (c) the acceleration becomes zero before the skier reaches the bottom of the hill.   use ideas about forces to suggest why this happens.  ... .  [1]  (d) below a height of 50 m, further measurements show that the acceleration of the skier has a  negative value.   what does this mean is happening to the speed of the skier in the last 50 m?  ...  .  [1]  (e) the skier has a mass of 60 kg.   calculate the resultant force on the skier at a height of 250 m.  resultant force =  .  [3]    [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20102 a bob of mass of 0.15 kg is tied at the end of a cord to form a simple pendulum 0.70 m long.  the upper end of the cord is fixed to a support and the pendulum hangs vertically. a peg is fixed  0.50 m vertically below the support, as shown in fig. 2.1. groundsupport 0.30  m0.10  m 0.20  m0.50  m peg bob fig. 2.1  the mass is pulled to the right, until it is in the position shown in fig. 2.1.  ignore air resistance throughout this question.  (a) calculate the gravitational potential energy of the bob, relative to the ground, when the bob is in the position shown in fig. 2.1.  gravitational potential energy =  .  [2]  (b) the bob is released and swings to the left.   (i) calculate the maximum kinetic energy of the bob.  kinetic energy =  .  [4]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over  (ii) calculate the maximum velocity of the bob.  velocity =  .  [2]   (iii) as the pendulum swings to the left of vertical, state the maximum height above the  ground that is reached by the bob.  .  [1]   (iv) on fig. 2.1, use your ruler to draw carefully the pendulum when the bob is at its maximum  height on the left.   [3]  [total: 12]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20103 (a) a uniform metre rule is pivoted at its centre, which is also the position of its centre of mass.   three loads, 2.0 n, f and 3.0 n are positioned on the rule at the 20 cm, 30 cm and 90 cm  marks respectively, as shown in fig. 3.1. 0 cm 20  cm 30  cm 2.0 n 3.0 npivot f50 cm 90 cm 100  cm fig. 3.1   (i) calculate the moment of the 3.0 n load about the pivot.  moment =  .  [1]   (ii) calculate the moment of the 2.0 n load about the pivot.  moment =  .  [1]   (iii) the force f maintains the metre rule in equilibrium on the pivot.    calculate the value of f.  f =  .  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) the weight of the metre rule is 1.2 n and can be considered to act at the 50 cm mark.   all the weights in (a) are removed. the pivot is positioned under the 30 cm mark and the 2.0 n  load is placed on the rule as shown in fig. 3.2. 30 cm 50  cm 2.0 n 1.2 npivot fig. 3.2   the position of the 2.0 n load is adjusted until the metre rule is again in equilibrium.   determine the position of the 2.0 n load.  2.0 n load is at the  .. cm mark  [3]    [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20104 a solar panel is mounted on the roof of a house. fig. 4.1 shows a section through part of the solar  panel. trapped airsunlight water insulating materialcopper pipe, painted black glass sheet metal backing sheet, painted black fig. 4.1  a pump makes water circulate through the copper pipes. the water is heated by passing through  the solar panel.  (a) suggest why   (i) the pipes are made of copper,  ... .  [1]   (ii) the pipes and the metal backing sheet are painted black, ... .  [1]   (iii) an insulating material is attached to the metal backing sheet, ... .  [1]   (iv) the presence of the glass sheet increases the energy collected by the water. ... .  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) during one day, 250 kg of water is pumped through the solar panel. the temperature of this  water rises from 16 \u00b0c to 38 \u00b0c.   the water absorbs 25% of the energy falling on the solar panel, and the specific heat capacity  of water is 4200 j / (kg \u00b0c).   calculate the energy falling on the solar panel during that day.  energy =  .  [4]    [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20105 the front views of two cars are shown in fig. 5.1, to the same scale. family car racing car fig. 5.1  (a) suggest which car has the greater stability, and give two reasons. car  .reason 1   ...reason 2   .  [2]  (b) the cars have the same weight.   study fig. 5.1 and suggest why the stationary racing car exerts less pressure on the ground.  ... .  [1]  (c) the family car\u2019s tyres each have an area of 0.012 m 2 in contact with the ground.   the weight of the car and its contents is 9600 n.  calculate the pressure exerted by the car on the ground.  pressure =  .  [2]    [total: 5]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over6 (a) explain what is meant by the terms analogue and digital, as applied to electronic circuits. analogue  ... ...digital   .  [2]  (b) describe, if necessary using a diagram, the function of an and gate in digital electronics.  ... ... ... .  [2]    [total: 4] 7 when he leaves work at 6.30 p.m. (18:30) one evening, a caretaker forgets to switch off the 100 w  lamp in his office. he doesn\u2019t discover this until he returns at 7.30 a.m. (07:30) the next morning.  the mains electricity supply is 250 v.  (a) calculate how much energy the caretaker has wasted.  energy wasted =  .  [2]  (b) calculate the charge that passed through the lamp during this time.  charge =  .  [3]  (c) what happened to the energy wasted by the lamp?  ... .  [1]    [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20108 fig. 8.1 shows a simple transformer. primary coilsecondary coiliron core fig. 8.1  (a) describe how a voltage across the primary coil causes a voltage across the secondary coil.  ... ... ... ... ... .  [3]  (b) state what design feature would cause the voltage across the secondary coil to be larger  than the voltage across the primary coil.  ... .  [1]  (c) the output of a power station is connected to a transformer, which you are to assume is  100% efficient.   the input to the primary coil is 24 000 v, 12 000 a.   the output from the secondary coil is 400 000 v. this is the voltage at which the electrical  energy is transmitted through the transmission lines.   calculate the current in the secondary coil.  current =  .  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (d) state two reasons why it is cheaper to transmit electrical energy at high voltage. 1.  ... ...2.  ... .  [2]    [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20109 fig. 9.1 shows three rays of light, parallel to the axis of a thin converging lens.  the rays strike the first surface of the lens. f1 and f2 are the two principal foci of the lens. f2 f1 fig. 9.1  (a) describe and explain what happens to the top ray as it enters the lens.  ... ... ... ... ... .  [3]  (b) on fig. 9.1, use a ruler to,   (i) complete the three rays through the lens, until they reach about 5 cm to the right of the  lens,   [2]   (ii) draw a fourth ray, parallel to the others on the left of the lens, which passes through f 2,  until it reaches about 5 cm to the right of the lens.   [1]  (c) a lens such as that shown in fig. 9.1 can be used as a magnifying glass.   (i) on fig. 9.1, show with an x where the object could be positioned for the lens to be used as a magnifying glass.   [1]   (ii) state 3 characteristics of the image formed by a magnifying glass. 1. 2. 3. ..  [2]    [total: 9]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over [turn over10 in geiger and marsden\u2019s \u03b1-particle scattering experiment, \u03b1-particles were directed at a very thin  gold foil.  fig. 10.1 shows five of the nuclei of the atoms in one layer in the gold foil. also shown are the paths of three \u03b1-particles directed at the foil. fig. 10.1  (a) on fig.10.1, complete the paths of the three \u03b1-particles.   [3]  (b) (i) what result of the experiment confirmed that an atom consisted of a very tiny charged core, containing almost all the mass of the atom?  ... .  [1]   (ii) what is the sign of the charge on this core?  ...  [1]   (iii) what occupies the space between these charged cores? .  [1]    [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 201011 an atom of one of the isotopes of sodium contains 11 protons,  11 electrons  and  13 neutrons.  (a) underline which of these three will be the same in neutral atoms of all isotopes of sodium. [2]  (b) state the nucleon number of this isotope.  ...  [1]  (c) what can you say about the chemical properties of the different isotopes of sodium?  .  [1]  (d) one isotope of sodium is 25na.   how many neutrons are there in one atom of this isotope?  ...  [1]   [total: 5]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/32/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sw) 24984/4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *18605057 15*physics 0625/33 paper 3  extended october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20101 a young athlete has a mass of 42 kg. on a day when there is no wind, she runs a 100 m race in  14.2 s. a sketch graph (not to scale) showing her speed during the race is given in fig. 1.1. 8.0 0 0 3.0 14.2 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 1.1  (a) calculate   (i) the acceleration of the athlete during the first 3.0 s of the race,  acceleration =  .  [2]   (ii) the accelerating force on the athlete during the first 3.0 s of the race,  force =  .  [2]   (iii) the speed with which she crosses the finishing line.  speed =  .  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) suggest two differences that might be seen in the graph if there had been a strong wind  opposing the runners in the race. 1.  ... ...2.  ... .  [2]    [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20102 (a) a loose uniform wooden floorboard weighs 160 n and rests symmetrically on four supports p ,  q, r and s.    the supports are 0.50 m apart, as shown in fig. 2.1. 0.20  mpq rs supportfloorboard 0.50  m 0.25  m 160  n fig. 2.1   calculate the force exerted on the floorboard by each of the supports, and state the direction  of these forces. one value is already given for you.  force exerted by p =  ...    40 n force exerted by q =  ...  force exerted by r =  ...  force exerted by s =  ...  direction =  .  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) a workman of weight w stands on the end of the floorboard described in (a).   this just causes the floorboard to tip up, as shown in fig. 2.2.    the supports are each 0.060 m thick. pq rs 0.060  m 160  nw fig. 2.2   (i) calculate the weight w of the workman.  weight w =  .  [3]   (ii) calculate the force that each of the supports now exerts on the floorboard.  force exerted by p =  ...  force exerted by q =  ...  force exerted by r =  ...  force exerted by s =  .  [2]    [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20103 (a) fig. 3.1 represents the path taken in air by a smoke particle, as seen in a brownian motion  experiment. the smoke particles can be seen through a microscope, but the air molecules cannot. fig. 3.1   (i) state what causes the smoke particles to move like this.  ... .  [1]   (ii) what conclusions about air molecules can be drawn from this observation of the smoke  particles?  ... ... ... ... .  [2]  (b) a can, containing only air, has its lid tightly screwed on and is left in strong sunlight. fig. 3.2   (i) state what happens to the pressure of the air in the can when it gets hot. .  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over  (ii) in terms of molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).  ... ... ... .  [3]    [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20104 (a) (i) name the process by which thermal energy is transferred through a metal rod.  .  [1]   (ii) describe how this process occurs. ... ... ... .  [2]  (b) an iron rod and a copper rod of equal length are each held by hand at one end, with the other  end in the flame from a bunsen burner, as shown in fig. 4.1. copper rod iron rod fig. 4.1   the copper rod becomes too hot to hold much sooner than the iron rod.   what does this information tell you about iron and copper?  .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (c) gas has to be above a certain temperature before it burns.   fig. 4.2 shows two similar wire gauzes, one made of iron wire and one made of copper wire.  each is held over a bunsen burner. when the gas supply is turned on and ignited below the  gauze, the effect is as shown in fig. 4.2. copper gauzeiron gauze observation: flame appears bothabove and belowthe gauzeobservation:flame onlyappears belowthe gauze fig. 4.2   how can these observations be explained?  ...  ... ... ... .  [4]    [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20105 (a) define specific heat capacity.  ... .  [2]  (b) solar energy is striking the steel deck of a ship.   (i) describe how the colour of the deck affects the absorption of the solar energy. ... .  [1]   (ii) the solar energy strikes the deck at the rate of 1400 w on every square metre.    the steel plate of the deck is 0.010 m thick.    steel has a density of 7800 kg / m 3 and a specific heat capacity of 450 j / (kg \u00b0c).    13% of the solar energy striking the deck is absorbed and the rest is reflected.    using these figures, calculate    1.  how many joules of solar energy are absorbed by 1.0 m2 of the deck in 1.0 s,  number of joules =  .  [1]   2.  the mass of 1.0 m 2 of deck,  mass =  .  [2]   3.  the rate of rise in temperature of the deck, stating the equation you use.  rate of rise =  .\u00b0c / s  [3]    [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overblank page",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20106 a boy drops a ball of mass 0.50 kg. the ball falls a distance of 1.1 m, as shown in fig. 6.1. ignore  air resistance throughout this question. 1.1 m fig. 6.1  (a) calculate the decrease in gravitational potential energy of the ball as it falls through the 1.1 m.  decrease in potential energy =  .  [2]  (b) the ball bounces and only rises to a height of 0.80 m.   (i) calculate the energy lost during the bounce.  energy lost =  .  [1]   (ii) suggest one reason why energy is lost during the bounce.  ... .  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (c) on another occasion, the boy throws the ball down from a height of 1.1 m, giving it an initial  kinetic energy of 9.0 j.   calculate the speed at which the ball hits the ground.  speed =  .  [3]    [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20107 fig. 7.1 shows how the resistance of the filament of a lamp changes as the current through the  lamp changes. 0051015202530 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 current  / aresistance  / 0.06 0.07 fig. 7.1  (a) describe how the resistance of the lamp changes.  ... ... .  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over (b) for a current of 0.070 a, find   (i) the resistance of the lamp,  resistance =  .  [1]   (ii) the potential difference across the lamp,  potential difference =  .  [2]   (iii) the power being dissipated by the lamp.  power =  .  [2] (c) two of these lamps are connected in parallel to a cell. the current in each lamp is 0.070 a.   (i) state the value of the e.m.f. of the cell.  e.m.f. =  .  [1]  (ii) calculate the resistance of the circuit, assuming the cell has no resistance.  resistance =  .  [2]   [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20108 a coil is wound on a cylindrical cardboard tube and connected to a sensitive centre-zero  millivoltmeter.  figs. 8.1, 8.2 and 8.3 show three situations involving the coil and a magnet.  (a) on the lines alongside each situation, describe what, if anything, is seen happening on the millivoltmeter. n smv fig. 8.1magnet inside coil, both moving at same speed... ..  [1] n mv fig. 8.2magnet  moving towards coil... ..  [1]coil  stationary mvn fig. 8.3magnet stationary... ..  [2]coil  moving towards magnet",
            "17": "17 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over [turn over (b) choose one of the situations in (a) where something is seen happening to the millivoltmeter.   for this situation, state three changes which could be made to increase the magnitude of  what is seen. 1.  ...2.  ...3.  .  [3]    [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 20109 in fig. 9.1, a ray of light trs is shown entering, passing through and leaving a semicircular glass  block. airglass tr us fig. 9.1  (a) as the light enters the block, its frequency remains constant.   state what happens to   (i) the speed of the light as it enters the block, ...   (ii) the wavelength of the light as it enters the block. .  [2]  (b) the refractive index of the glass is 1.48.   the speed of light in air is 3.00 \u00d7 10 8 m / s.   calculate the speed of the light in the glass. state the equation you use.  speed =  .  [2]  (c) another ray of light enters the block along ur.   on fig. 9.1, draw a line to show what happens to this ray after it has reached r.   [2]    [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn over [turn over10 (a) a small object s is dipped repeatedly into water near a flat reflecting surface.   fig. 10.1 gives an instantaneous view from above of the position of part of the waves  produced. sreflecting surface fig. 10.1   on fig. 10.1,   (i) put a clear dot at the point from which the reflected waves appear to come (label the  dot r),   (ii) draw the reflected portion of each of the three waves shown.   [3]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a small object p in front of a plane mirror m. pm fig. 10.2   on fig. 10.2, carefully draw two rays that show how the mirror forms the image of object p .  label the image i.   [3]    [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 a radioactive source is placed near a radiation detector connected to a counter, as shown in  fig. 11.1. radioactive sourceradiation detectorcounter fig. 11.1  (a) the count rate, measured over three successive minutes, gives values of     720 counts / minute     691 counts / minute     739 counts / minute.   explain why a variation like this is to be expected in such an experiment.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the radiation detector and counter are left untouched. the radioactive source is put in its lead  container and returned to the metal security cupboard.   once this has been done, a further measurement is taken over one minute.    this gives a reading of 33 counts / minute.  (i) state the name used for the radioactivity being detected during this minute. ...   (ii) suggest two possible sources for this radioactivity.1. 2. ..  [3]    [total: 4]"
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (leo/dj) 25080/4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *090307 4458*physics 0625/51 paper 5  practical test october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you are to determine the position of the centre of mass of an object using  a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1.     50.0  cm mark 75.0  cm markpivot metre rulemass mload x d     fig. 1.1  the load x has been taped to the metre rule so that one side of the base is exactly on the 75.0 cm mark. do not move this load.   (a) place a mass m of 30 g on the rule and adjust its position so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the pivot as shown in fig.1.1.   (i) record in table 1.1 the distance d from the centre of the 30 g mass to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   (ii) repeat step (i) using masses of 40 g, 50 g, 60 g and 70 g to obtain a total of five sets of readings. record the readings in the table.   (iii) for each value of d calculate  1d  and enter the values in the table.     table 1.1 m /g d /cm1d   1 cm 30 40506070  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of m /g (y-axis) against 1 d  1 cm (x-axis).       [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  . [2]  (d) determine the horizontal distance z from the 75.0 cm mark on the rule to the centre of mass of the load x using the equation z =  g \u2013 k x  where k = 1250 g cm and x = 50 g.  z =  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment you will investigate the rate of heating and cooling of a thermometer bulb.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. y ou are provided with a beaker of hot  water.     thermometer hot waterlid     fig. 2.1  (a) record the room temperature \u03b8 r .  \u03b8 r =  ..[1]  (b) (i) place the thermometer into the water as shown in fig. 2.1. when the temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising record the temperature  \u03b8 in table 2.1 at  time t = 0 s.   (ii) remove the thermometer from the beaker of water and immediately start the stopclock. record in table 2.1 the temperature shown on the thermometer as it cools in the air. take readings at 30 s intervals from t = 30 s until you have a total of  seven values up to time t = 180 s. [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) set the stopclock back to zero. with the thermometer still out of the beaker, record  in table 2.2 the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer at time t = 0 s.   (ii) replace the thermometer in the beaker of hot water as shown in fig. 2.1 and immediately start the stopclock. record in table 2.2 the temperature shown by the thermometer at 10 s intervals until you have a total of seven values up to time t = 60 s. [2] table 2.1 table 2.2 t / \u03b8 / t / \u03b8 /  (d) complete the column headings in both tables. [1]  (e) estimate the time that would be taken in part (b) for the thermometer to cool from the reading at time t = 0 s to room temperature  \u03b8 r .  estimated time =    [1]  (f) state in which table the rate of temperature change is the greater. justify your answer  by reference to your readings. the rate of temperature change is greater in table ..justification  ... ..[1]  (g) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to determine an average temperature for  each time, it would be important to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the current in a circuit when different resistors are  connected in the circuit.  the circuit provided contains a resistor x. there is a gap in the circuit between points a and b to be used for adding extra resistors, of resistance r, to the circuit.  (a) draw a circuit diagram of the circuit using standard symbols.   [3]  (b) connect points a and b together. switch on. measure the current i 0 in the circuit.   i0 =  ..   switch off and separate points a and b.  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) connect the 3.3 \u03c9 resistor between points a and b. switch on and record in table  3.1 the current i. switch off and disconnect the resistor from between a and b.    (ii) repeat the steps in part (c)(i) with each of the other two extra resistors.   (iii) repeat the steps in part (c)(i) with the 3.3 \u03c9 and 6.8 \u03c9 resistors connected in series  with each other.   (iv) complete the column headings in the table.  [4]     table 3.1 r / i / 3.3 4.76.8 10.1  (d) theory suggests that the current will be 0.5  i0 when the total resistance in the circuit  is twice the value of the resistance of x. use the readings in the table to estimate the  resistance of x.  estimate of the resistance of x =  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment you will investigate reflection of light through a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1.     eyemirror a den p1 p2i n' fcb     fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the  block should be on the top half of the paper. draw the outline of the block and label it abcd.  (b) remove the block and draw the normal nn' to side cd so that the normal is 2.0 cm from c. label the point e where nn' crosses cd.  (c) draw the line ef at an angle of incidence i = 20 \u00b0 as shown in fig. 4.1.   (d) place the paper on the pin board. stand the plane mirror vertically and in contact with face ab of the block as shown in fig. 4.1.  (e) push two pins p 1 and p2 into line ef. pin p1 should be about 1 cm from the block and  pin p2 some distance from the block.",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block  from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1 so that the images of p1 and p2 appear  one behind the other.   push two pins p3 and p4 into the surface, between your eye and the block, so that p3,  p4 and the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear in line.   mark the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. remove the block.  (g) continue the line joining the positions of p1 and p2 so that it crosses cd and extends as  far as side ab.  (h) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line so that it crosses cd  and extends as far as side ab. label the point g where this line crosses the line from p1  and p2.  (i) remove the pins, block and mirror from the ray trace sheet. measure the acute angle \u03b8  between the lines meeting at g.  \u03b8 =  . [1]  (j) calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i).   (\u03b8 \u2013 2i) =  . [1]  (k) repeat steps (c) to (j) using an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0.  \u03b8 =  ..   ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i) =  . [1]  (l) theory suggests that \u03b8 = 2i. state whether your result supports the theory and justify  your answer by reference to your results. statement  .justification  ... ..[2] tie your ray trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9. [5] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (leo/dj) 25084/4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *57966969 27*physics 0625/52 paper 5  practical test october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you are to determine the density of the material of a metre rule.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1.    metre rule pivot50.0  cm mark mass xab     fig. 1.1  y ou are provided with a 100 g mass, labelled x.  (a) place the mass x on the rule and adjust its position so that the rule is as near as  possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark to the left of the pivot as shown in fig.1.1.   (i) measure the distance a from the centre of the mass x to the pivot.   a =  . cm   (ii) measure the distance b from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   b =  . cm   (iii) calculate the mass m of the metre rule using the equation    m = k a b where k = 100 g.  m =  ..  [3]  (b) (i) take measurements to determine the average width w of the metre rule.  w =  . cm   (ii) take measurements to determine the average thickness t of the metre rule.  t =  . cm",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) calculate the volume v of the metre rule using the equation v = lwt where l is the  length of the metre rule (100.0 cm).  v =  ..   (iv) calculate the density \u03c1 of the metre rule using the equation \u03c1 = m v.  \u03c1 =  ..  [6]  (c) state the assumption that you have made about the position of the centre of mass of the metre rule.  .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment you will investigate the rate of cooling of water under different conditions.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. y ou are provided with a supply of hot  water.     thermometer hot waterlid beaker a     fig. 2.1  (a) record the room temperature \u03b8 r .  \u03b8 r =  . [1]  (b) (i) pour approximately 75 cm3 of hot water into the beaker labelled a. place the lid on  the beaker and place the thermometer through the hole in the lid and into the water as shown in fig. 2.1.   (ii) when the temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising record in table 2.1 the temperature  \u03b8 at time t = 0 s and immediately start the stopclock.   (iii) record in the table the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals from t = 30 s until you have a total of seven values up to time t = 180 s.  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) empty the water from beaker a. place beaker a into the larger beaker labelled b.   (ii) repeat the steps (b)(i), (ii) and (iii), recording the readings in table 2.2. [2] table 2.1 table 2.2 t / \u03b8 / t / \u03b8 /  (d) complete the column headings in both tables. [1]  (e) state whether the rate of cooling of the water is significantly faster or slower or about  the same under the conditions used in part (c) (table 2.2) compared with the conditions  in part (b) (table 2.1). justify your answer by reference to your readings. statement  .justification  ... ..[2]  (f) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results it would be important  to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the potential difference across a resistor.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1.     power supply x ab v     fig. 3.1  the circuit provided contains a resistor x. there is a gap in the circuit between points  a and b to be used for adding extra resistors, of resistance r, to the circuit.  (a) connect points a and b together. switch on. measure the potential  difference v0 across  resistor x.  v0 =  ..[1]  switch off and separate points a and b.  (b) (i) do not change the position of the voltmeter in the circuit. connect the 3.3 \u03c9 resistor  between points a and b. switch on and record in table 3.1 the potential difference v across the resistor x. switch off and disconnect the 3.3 \u03c9 resistor from between a and b.   (ii) repeat the steps in part (b)(i) with each of the other two extra resistors.    (iii) repeat the steps in part (b)(i) with the 3.3 \u03c9 and 6.8 \u03c9 resistors connected in series  with each other.    (iv) complete the column headings in the table. table 3.1 r / v / 3.3 4.76.8 10.1  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) plot the graph of v / v (y-axis) against r / \u03c9 (x-axis). begin both axes at 0.       [4]  (d) use the graph to estimate the value of potential difference v when r = 0 \u03c9. show clearly  on the graph how you obtained your result.  v =  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment you will investigate shadows formed on a screen.   carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1.   screenlight source object card ax 30.0 cmsuppor t     fig. 4.1  y ou are provided with a lamp behind a piece of card. the card has a circular hole which in  this experiment is referred to as the light source.  (a) place the screen so that its centre is 30.0 cm from the light source.  (b) measure the diameter d of the circular object card labelled a.  d =   cm [1]   (c) place the object card a at a distance x = 2.0 cm from the screen. switch on the light source. measure and record in table 4.1 the diameter s of the shadow of the object card formed on the screen. the screen has a sheet of graph paper taped to it. y ou may mark the graph paper to assist in measuring the diameter of the shadow.  (d) repeat the steps in (c) using values of x = 4.0 cm, 6.0 cm, 8.0 cm and 10.0 cm.     table 4.1 x /cm s /cm s 2/cm2  [5]  (e) calculate the values of s 2 and enter them in the table. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (f) a student suggests that the value of s 2 when x = 10.0 cm should be twice the value of  s 2 when x = 2.0 cm. state whether your experimental results support this suggestion  and justify your statement by reference to your results. statement  .explanation  .. ..[2]  (g) state one precaution you took in order to obtain reliable measurements. .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (em/dj) 33837 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *0738514528* physics 0625/53 paper 5  practical test october/november 2010  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you are to determine the density of the material of a metre rule.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1.    metre rule pivot50.0  cm mark mass xab     fig. 1.1  y ou are provided with a 100 g mass, labelled x.  (a) place the mass x on the rule and adjust its position so that the rule is as near as  possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark to the left of the pivot as shown in fig.1.1.   (i) measure the distance a from the centre of the mass x to the pivot.   a =  . cm   (ii) measure the distance b from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   b =  . cm   (iii) calculate the mass m of the metre rule using the equation    m = k a b where k = 100 g.  m =  ..  [3]  (b) (i) take measurements to determine the average width w of the metre rule.  w =  . cm   (ii) take measurements to determine the average thickness t of the metre rule.  t =  . cm",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) calculate the volume v of the metre rule using the equation v = lwt where l is the  length of the metre rule (100.0 cm).  v =  ..   (iv) calculate the density \u03c1 of the metre rule using the equation \u03c1 = m v.  \u03c1 =  ..  [6]  (c) state the assumption that you have made about the position of the centre of mass of the metre rule.  .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment you will investigate the rate of cooling of water under different conditions.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. y ou are provided with a supply of hot  water.     thermometer hot waterlid beaker a     fig. 2.1  (a) record the room temperature \u03b8 r .  \u03b8 r =  . [1]  (b) (i) pour approximately 75 cm3 of hot water into the beaker labelled a. place the lid on  the beaker and place the thermometer through the hole in the lid and into the water as shown in fig. 2.1.   (ii) when the temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising record in table 2.1 the temperature  \u03b8 at time t = 0 s and immediately start the stopclock.   (iii) record in the table the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals from t = 30 s until you have a total of seven values up to time t = 180 s.  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) empty the water from beaker a. place beaker a into the larger beaker labelled b.   (ii) repeat the steps (b)(i), (ii) and (iii), recording the readings in table 2.2. [2] table 2.1 table 2.2 t / \u03b8 / t / \u03b8 /  (d) complete the column headings in both tables. [1]  (e) state whether the rate of cooling of the water is significantly faster or slower or about  the same under the conditions used in part (c) (table 2.2) compared with the conditions  in part (b) (table 2.1). justify your answer by reference to your readings. statement  .justification  ... ..[2]  (f) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results it would be important  to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the potential difference across a resistor.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1.     power supply x ab v     fig. 3.1  the circuit provided contains a resistor x. there is a gap in the circuit between points  a and b to be used for adding extra resistors, of resistance r, to the circuit.  (a) connect points a and b together. switch on. measure the potential  difference v0 across  resistor x.  v0 =  ..[1]  switch off and separate points a and b.  (b) (i) do not change the position of the voltmeter in the circuit. connect the 3.3 \u03c9 resistor  between points a and b. switch on and record in table 3.1 the potential difference v across the resistor x. switch off and disconnect the 3.3 \u03c9 resistor from between a and b.   (ii) repeat the steps in part (b)(i) with each of the other two extra resistors.    (iii) repeat the steps in part (b)(i) with the 3.3 \u03c9 and 6.8 \u03c9 resistors connected in series  with each other.    (iv) complete the column headings in the table. table 3.1 r / v / 3.3 4.76.8 10.1  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) plot the graph of v / v (y-axis) against r / \u03c9 (x-axis). begin both axes at 0.       [4]  (d) use the graph to estimate the value of potential difference v when r = 0 \u03c9. show clearly  on the graph how you obtained your result.  v =  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment you will investigate shadows formed on a screen.   carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1.   screenlight source object card ax 30.0 cmsuppor t     fig. 4.1  y ou are provided with a lamp behind a piece of card. the card has a circular hole which in  this experiment is referred to as the light source.  (a) place the screen so that its centre is 30.0 cm from the light source.  (b) measure the diameter d of the circular object card labelled a.  d =   cm [1]   (c) place the object card a at a distance x = 2.0 cm from the screen. switch on the light source. measure and record in table 4.1 the diameter s of the shadow of the object card formed on the screen. the screen has a sheet of graph paper taped to it. y ou may mark the graph paper to assist in measuring the diameter of the shadow.  (d) repeat the steps in (c) using values of x = 4.0 cm, 6.0 cm, 8.0 cm and 10.0 cm.     table 4.1 x /cm s /cm s 2/cm2  [5]  (e) calculate the values of s 2 and enter them in the table. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (f) a student suggests that the value of s 2 when x = 10.0 cm should be twice the value of  s 2 when x = 2.0 cm. state whether your experimental results support this suggestion  and justify your statement by reference to your results. statement  .explanation  .. ..[2]  (g) state one precaution you took in order to obtain reliable measurements. .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (leo/dj) 25086/5 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *0199664493*physics 0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2010  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 a student is determining the position of the centre of mass of an object using a balancing  method.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used.     50.0  cm mark 75.0  cm markpivotmass mload of mass x d     fig. 1.1  a load of mass x is taped to the metre rule so that one side of the base is exactly on the 75.0 cm mark. the student places a mass m of 30 g on the rule and adjusts its position so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the pivot, as shown in fig. 1.1.   the student records the distance d from the centre of the 30 g mass to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule. he then repeats the procedure using different masses. the readings are shown in table 1.1.     table 1.1 m /g d / cm1d   1 cm 30 45.0 40 34.0 50 27.0 60 22.5 70 19.3  (a) for each value of d, calculate 1/d and enter the values in the table. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of m / g (y-axis) against 1 d  1 cm (x-axis).       [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  ..[2]  (d) determine the horizontal distance z from the 75.0 cm mark on the rule to the centre of mass of the load using the equation z =  g \u2013 k x,   where k = 1250 g cm and x = 50 g.  z =  . [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of heating and cooling of a thermometer bulb.  the apparatus used is shown in fig. 2.1.      thermometer waterlid     fig. 2.1  (a) record the room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer.   \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c  \u03b8r =  . [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) for the cooling experiment, a student places the thermometer into hot water as shown in  fig. 2.1. when the temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising, she records the temperature  \u03b8 at time t = 0 s. she removes the thermometer from the water, immediately  starts a stopclock, and records the temperature shown on the thermometer at 30 s intervals. the readings are shown in table 2.1.   for the heating experiment, the student takes another thermometer and records the  temperature  \u03b8 shown on the thermometer at time t = 0 s. she places the thermometer in  the beaker of hot water, immediately starts the stopclock, and records the temperature shown by the thermometer at 10 s intervals. the readings are shown in table 2.2. table 2.1 table 2.2 t / \u03b8 / t / \u03b8 / 07 4 02 5 30 60 10 69 60 52 20 8090 45 30 81 120 39 40 81150 35 50 82180 33 60 82   (i) complete the column headings in both tables. [1]   (ii) estimate the time that would be taken in the cooling experiment for the thermometer  to cool from the reading at time t = 0 s to room temperature  \u03b8r .  estimated time =  . [1]  (c) state in which table the initial rate of temperature change is the greater. justify your  answer by reference to your readings. the initial rate of temperature change is greater in table .justification  ... ..[1]  (d) if one of these experiments were to be repeated in order to determine an average  temperature for each time, it would be important to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the current in a circuit when different resistors are connected  in the circuit.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. the circuit contains a resistor x, and there is a gap in the circuit between points a and b that is used for adding extra resistors to the circuit. power sourcex aba     fig. 3.1  (a) a student connects points a and b together, switches on and measures the current i0 in  the circuit.   the reading is shown on the ammeter in fig. 3.2.     00.20.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 a     fig. 3.2   write down the ammeter reading.  i0 =  ..[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student connects a 3.3 \u03c9 resistor between points a and b, switches on and records  the current i. he repeats the procedure with a 4.7 \u03c9 resistor and then a 6.8 \u03c9 resistor.   finally he connects the 3.3 \u03c9 resistor and the 6.8 \u03c9 resistor in series between points a  and b, and records the current i.    (i) complete the column headings in the table. [1] r / i / 3.3 0.23 4.7 0.216.8 0.18 0.15   (ii) write the combined resistance of the 3.3 \u03c9 resistor and the 6.8 \u03c9 resistor in series  in the space in the resistance column of the table. [1]   (c) theory suggests that the current will be 0.5 i 0 when the total resistance in the circuit  is twice the value of the resistance of resistor x. use the readings in the table, and the  value of i0 from (a), to estimate the resistance of resistor x.  estimate of the resistance of resistor x =  ..[2]  (d) on fig. 3.1 draw two resistors in parallel connected between a and b and also a  voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across resistor x. [3]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating the reflection of light by a mirror as seen through a  transparent block.  fig. 4.1 shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet.   eye sheet of papermirror transparent blocka den p3 n' fcb p4     fig. 4.1",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) a student draws the outline of the transparent block abcd on the ray-trace sheet. he  draws the normal nn' to side cd. he draws the incident ray ef at an angle of incidence i = 20\u00b0. he pushes two pins p 1 and p2 into line ef and places the block on the sheet  of paper. he then observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block from  the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1 so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one  behind the other. he pushes two pins p3 and p4 into the surface, between his eye and  the block, so that p3, p4 and the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear in  line. (the plane mirror along side ab of the block reflects the light.)   the positions of p3 and p4 are marked on fig. 4.1.   (i) on line ef, mark with neat crosses (x) suitable positions for the pins p1 and p2.    (ii) continue the line ef so that it crosses cd and extends as far as side ab.    (iii) draw a line joining the positions of p4 and p3. continue the line so that it crosses  cd and extends as far as side ab. label the point g where this line crosses the line from p 1 and p2. [4]   (iv) measure the acute angle \u03b8 between the lines meeting at g.  \u03b8 =  ..    (v) calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ).  ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =  . [2]  (b) the student repeats the procedure using an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 and records the value of  \u03b8 as 62\u00b0.   (i) calculate the difference ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i).  ( \u03b8 \u2013 2i ) =  ..    (ii) theory suggests that \u03b8 = 2i . state whether the results support the theory and justify  your answer by reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... .. [3]  (c) to place the pins as accurately as possible, the student views the bases of the pins.  explain briefly why viewing the bases of the pins, rather than the tops of the pins, improves the accuracy of the experiment.  .. .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is investigating the time taken for ice cubes to melt when placed in water.  each student is able to use   glass beakers,   a thermometer,   a stopclock,   a measuring cylinder,   an electronic balance,   a supply of ice cubes of different sizes,   a supply of cold water,   a stirrer,   a method of heating the water  and any other common laboratory apparatus that may be useful.  a student decides to investigate the effect of the mass of ice cubes on the time they take to  melt in water.   (a) suggest three possible variables that should be kept constant in this investigation. 1.  ..2.  ..3.  ..[3]  (b) in the table below, write the names of three items of apparatus that are necessary in  order to take readings in this investigation. in the second column of the table write the quantity that the item measures. item of apparatus quantity measured  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (leo/dj) 25088/4 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *1157465662*physics 0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2010  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 an igcse student is determining the density of the material of a metre rule.  fig. 1.1 shows the balancing experiment used to determine the mass of the rule.     metre rule pivotload xab50.0  cm mark     fig. 1.1  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the distance a from the centre of the load x to the pivot.   a =  . cm   (ii) on fig. 1.1, measure the distance b from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   b =  . cm  [1]  (b) the diagram is drawn one tenth of actual size.   (i) calculate the actual distance x from the centre of the load x to the pivot.   x =  . cm   (ii) calculate the actual distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   y =  . cm   (iii) calculate the mass m of the metre rule using the equation m = k x y   where k = 100 g.  m =  ..  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) figs. 1.2 and 1.3 show part of the metre rule drawn actual size.     w     fig. 1.2     t     fig. 1.3   (i) take and record measurements from fig. 1.2 to determine the average width w of  the metre rule.  w =  . cm   (ii) take and record measurements from fig. 1.3 to determine the average thickness t  of the metre rule.  t =  . cm   (iii) calculate the volume v of the metre rule using the equation v = lwt where l is the length of the metre rule (100.0 cm).  v =  ..[3]   (iv) calculate the density  \u03c1 of the metre rule using the equation \u03c1 = m v.  \u03c1 =  ..[3]  (d) state the assumption that the student has made about the position of the centre of mass of the metre rule.  ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling and the rate of heating of a thermometer  bulb.  the set-up is shown in fig. 2.1 and fig. 2.2.  thermometer hot water       thermometer    fig. 2.1  fig. 2.2  a student places a thermometer in a beaker of hot water. when the reading on the thermometer is steady, she records the temperature reading  \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0.   she immediately removes the thermometer from the water and starts a stopclock. as the thermometer cools, she records the thermometer reading every 30 s, as shown in table 2.1.  at time t = 210 s, she records the thermometer reading and immediately puts the thermometer  back in the hot water. as the thermometer heats up, she records the time and thermometer reading every 30 s for 180 s, as shown in table 2.2. table 2.1 table 2.2 t / \u03b8 / t / \u03b8 / 0 82 210 50 30 74 240 66 60 66 270 75 90 63 300 77 120 57 330 78 150 55 360 78 180 52 390 78  (a) complete the column headings in both tables. [1]  (b) calculate the change in the thermometer reading \u03b8c in the first 90 s whilst the  thermometer cools.  \u03b8c =  ..[1]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) suggest a conclusion about the initial rate of cooling of the thermometer bulb compared  with the initial rate of heating. justify your conclusion by reference to tables 2.1 and 2.2. conclusion  justification  ... ..[2]  (d) when repeating this experiment in order to check the results, it is important to control  the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the potential difference across a resistor.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit used.     power supply x ab v     fig. 3.1  the circuit contains a resistor x. there is a gap in the circuit between points a and b that is  used for adding extra resistors to the circuit.   (a) a student connects points a and b together, switches on and measures the potential difference v 0 across resistor x. fig. 3.2 shows the voltmeter scale.      01234567 8 9 10 v     fig. 3.2   write down the value of potential difference v0 shown on fig. 3.2.  v0 =  . [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student does not change the position of the voltmeter in the circuit. she connects a  3.3 \u03c9 resistor between points a and b and records in table 3.1 the resistance r of the  resistor. she switches on and records the potential difference v across the resistor x.    she repeats the procedure with each of two other resistors and finally with the 3.3 \u03c9 and  6.8 \u03c9 resistors connected in series with each other.    (i) complete the column headings in the table.     table 3.1 r / v / 3.3 1.42 4.7 1.29 6.8 1.14 0.95   (ii) in the space provided in table 3.1, write the combined resistance of the 3.3 \u03c9 and  6.8 \u03c9 resistors connected in series with each other. [2]  (c) plot the graph of v / v (y-axis) against r / \u03c9 (x-axis). begin both axes at 0.       [5]  (d) use the graph to estimate the value of the potential difference v when r = 0 \u03c9. show  clearly on the graph how you obtained your result.  v =  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 an igcse student carries out a lens experiment to investigate the magnification of an image.    the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1.    illuminated objectlens screenv u     fig. 4.1  the object is a rectangular hole in a piece of card. there is a thin wire across the hole.  fig. 4.2 shows the rectangular hole and the wire.     2.0 cm1.5 cmwire     fig. 4.2  the student sets the distance u at 32.0 cm and moves the screen to obtain a sharply focused image. the image distance v is 58.9 cm.  (a) (i) calculate the magnification m using the equation m = v /u.  m =  ..[2]   (ii) draw a diagram of the image, actual size, for a magnification m = 2.0.   [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the object distance u is the distance from the object to the centre of the lens.   explain briefly how you would position a metre rule to obtain an accurate value for u.   y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]  (c) suggest two precautions that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain reliable  readings. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is investigating the rate at which salt dissolves in water.  each student is able to use   glass beakers,   a thermometer,   a stopclock,   a measuring cylinder,   an electronic balance,   a supply of salt,   a supply of cold water,   a stirrer,   a method of heating the water  and any other common laboratory apparatus that may be useful.  a student decides to investigate the effect of temperature on the rate at which salt dissolves  in water by observing the time taken for small amounts of salt to dissolve in water at different temperatures.  (a) suggest three possible variables that should be kept constant in this investigation. 1.  ..2.  ..3.  ..[3]  (b) in the table below, write the names of three items of apparatus that are necessary in  order to take the readings in this investigation. in the second column of the table write the quantity that the item measures. item of apparatus quantity measured  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w10_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (leo/dj) 25090/5 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. * 1 7 7 5 7 5 9 4 0 8 * physics 0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2010  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is studying the acceleration of a toy car that is pulled along a track by a  force f.  the arrangement is shown in fig. 1.1.     f     fig. 1.1  a student uses a force f of 0.5 n to pull a toy car along a track and electronically measures  the acceleration a. he records the results in a table. he repeats the procedure using a range  of different forces up to 2.5 n. the readings are shown in table 1.1.     table 1.1 f na m /s2 0.5 0.35 1.0 0.72 1.5 1.02 2.0 1.44 2.5 1.74  (a) plot a graph of f n (y-axis) against a m /s2 (x-axis).        [5]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) theory suggests that the acceleration is directly proportional to the force applied to the  toy car. state whether the results support this suggestion and justify your statement by reference to the graph. statement  .justification  ..[2]  (c) the gradient of the graph is equal to the mass of the toy car. from the graph, determine  the mass m of the toy car. show clearly how you obtained the necessary information.  m =  . [3]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water under different conditions.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus.     thermometer watersmall beakerlid     fig. 2.1  (a) fig. 2.2 shows a thermometer at room temperature \u03b8r . record room temperature \u03b8r .  \u2013100 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c     fig. 2.2 \t\u03b8r =  . [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) a student pours approximately 75 cm3 of hot water into the small beaker. when the  temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising, he records the temperature \u03b8 in  table 2.1 at time t = 0 s and immediately starts a stopclock. he records the temperature  of the water at 30 s intervals. he then proceeds as follows:  \t \u2022\t he\tempties\tthe\twater\tfrom\tthe\tbeaker;  \t \u2022\t he\tplaces\tthe\tempty\tbeaker\tinto\ta\tlarger\tbeaker;  \t \u2022\t he\tpours\tfresh\thot\twater\tinto\tthe\tsmall\tbeaker;  \t \u2022\t he\ttakes\ta\tnew\tset\tof\treadings,\trecording\tthem\tin\ttable\t2.2. table 2.1 table 2.2 t / \u03b8\t/ t / \u03b8\t/ 0 79 0 80 30 79 30 80 60 79 60 79 90 78 90 78 120 77 120 77 150 75 150 75 180 75 180 74   (i) complete the column headings in both tables.   (ii) state whether the rate of cooling of the water is significantly faster or slower or about  the same under the conditions used in table 2.1 compared with the conditions in table 2.2. justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement  .justification  ... ..[3]  (c) in order to make this experiment a fair test it is important to control the conditions.   suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating resistance in an electrical circuit.  part of the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1.     apower source y r     fig. 3.1  (a) (i) complete the circuit diagram by drawing in the symbol for a voltmeter connected  across the resistor r. [2]   (ii) name the component labelled y.   ...  [1]  (b) the first reading on the voltmeter is 2.2 v. on the voltmeter face shown in fig. 3.2, show the position of the pointer giving the reading 2.2 v.     01234567 8 9 10 v     fig. 3.2  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) a student takes readings of the potential difference v across the resistor r and the  current i in it. the readings are shown in table 3.1.     table 3.1 v / i / r / 2.2 0.36 4.1 0.68 6.0 0.98 7.9 1.28 9.8 1.61   (i) calculate the resistance r of the resistor for each set of v and i readings and write    the values in the table. use the equation r = v i. [2]   (ii) complete the column headings in the table.  [1]   (iii) a student suggests that the resistance r should be constant. state whether the  results in the table support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference to  the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating shadows formed on a screen.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus.   screenlight source object card ax asupport     fig. 4.1  the lamp is behind a piece of card. the card has a circular hole which, in this experiment, is  referred to as the light source.  (a) on fig. 4.1, measure the distance a between the light source and the screen.  a =   cm [1]  (b) the diagram is drawn one third of actual size. calculate the actual distance y between  the light source and the screen.  y =   cm [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) a student places a circular object card a in a holder between the light source and the  screen. fig. 4.2 shows the card and holder.     acircular piece of card labelled a thin stick holder     fig. 4.2   fig. 4.3 shows the object card drawn actual size.     a     fig. 4.3   take and record measurements from fig. 4.3 to determine the average diameter d of  the object card.  d =   cm [2] ",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use (d) the student places the object card at different distances x from the screen, as shown in  fig. 4.1. he switches on the light source and measures the diameter s of the shadow of  the object card formed on the screen. the readings are shown in table 4.1.     table 4.1 x /cm s /cm s 2/cm2 2.0 2.2 4.0 2.4 6.0 2.6 8.0 2.8 10.0 3.1   (i) calculate the values of s 2 and enter them in the table. [2]   (ii) a student suggests that the value of s 2 when x = 10.0 cm should be twice the  value of s 2 when x = 2.0 cm. state whether the experimental results support this  suggestion and justify your statement by reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [2]  (e) state two precautions you would take in order to obtain reliable measurements when  carrying out this experiment. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is investigating the stretching of springs.  each student is able to use a selection of different springs, a set of slotted masses to hang  on the end of a spring, a metre rule, and any other common laboratory apparatus that may be useful.  a student decides to investigate the effect of the type of metal from which the spring is made on the extension produced by loading the spring.  (a) suggest three possible variables that should be kept constant in this investigation. (do not include variables that are likely to have very little effect on the length of a spring in this context.) 1.  ..2.  ..3.  ..[3]  (b) in the investigation, the original length l 0 of a spring is measured and then the new  length l when a load is attached. fig. 5.1 shows an unloaded spring and the same   spring with a load attached. on fig. 5.1, show clearly the original length l0 and the new  length l.     support support     fig. 5.1  [1]  (c) it is not possible to position a metre rule immediately next to the spring. describe briefly  how you would overcome this problem when measuring the length l. y ou may draw a  diagram.  ..  ..[1]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/10 \u00a9 ucles 2010blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        }
    },
    "2011": {
        "0625_s11_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib11 06_0625_11/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2011  [turn over      *3129497903* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2011     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  1 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     2 an object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.    which graph shows this motion?    0 0 0 00000speed speed speed time timetimea b c dtime speed     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11 [turn over  3 a tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40  s later hears the echo from a wall.        the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    how far away is the player from the wall?  a 66  m b 132  m c 264  m d 825  m     4 which statement about mass and weight is correct?  a mass and weight are both forces.  b neither mass nor weight is a force. c only mass is a force.  d only weight is a force.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  5 the diagram shows a balance being used to find the weight of a baby. the weight of the basket  can be ignored.    at equilibrium, the pivot is nearer to the weight w than to the baby.    w pivot baby basketcentre of mass of beam     what is the weight of the baby?  a less than w  b more than w  c w  d impossible to tell     6 a cube of side 2.0  cm is placed on a balance.    2.0  cm balance 7.2  g     what is the density of the cube?  a 0.90  g / cm3 b 1.2  g / cm3 c 1.8  g / cm3 d 3.6  g / cm3    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11 [turn over  7 objects with different masses are hung on a spring. the diagram shows how much the spring  stretches.    100  g m10  cm 20  cm 30  cm     the extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.    what is the mass of object m?  a 110  g b 150  g c 200  g d 300  g     8 which row gives an example of the stated form of energy?    form of energy example  a gravitational the energy due to the movement of a train along a level track  b internal the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode-ray tube  c   kinetic   the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a  high diving board  d strain the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat      9 which energy resource is used to generate electricity by first boiling water?  a hydroelectric  b nuclear fission c tides d waves     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  10 two farmers use an electrically powered elevator to lift bales of hay. all the bales of hay have the  same mass.    bale of hay     as sunset approaches, they increase the speed of the  motor so that more bales are lifted up in a  given time.    how does this affect the work done in lifting each bale and the useful output power of the motor?     work done in  lifting each bale useful output power  of the motor  a increases decreases  b increases increases  c no change decreases  d no change increases     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11 [turn over  11 a brick with flat, rectangular sides rests on a table.    brick  table      the brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.        how has this affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?     force pressure  a increased increased  b increased unchanged  c unchanged increased  d unchanged unchanged     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  12 the diagram shows two mercury barometers.    barometer 1 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 1.    barometer 2 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 2.    barometer 1, da y 1 point x barometer 2, da y 2 point ymercury     which statement is true?  a the atmospheric pressure on day 1 is less than the atmospheric pressure on day 2.  b the atmospheric pressure on day 1 is the same as the atmospheric pressure on day 2. c the pressure at point x is less than the pressure at point y. d the pressure at point x is the same as the pressure at point y.      13 a sealed gas cylinder is left outside on a hot, sunny day.    what happens to the average speed of the molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the  cylinder as the temperature rises?     average speed of  the gas molecules gas pressure  a falls falls  b falls rises  c rises falls  d rises rises     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11 [turn over  14 when a liquid evaporates, some molecules escape from it and its temperature changes.    from where do the molecules escape and what is t he effect on the temperature of the liquid?     molecules escape from temperature of liquid  a all parts of the liquid decreases  b all parts of the liquid increases  c only the liquid surface decreases  d only the liquid surface increases     15 the diagram shows a thermometer calibrated in degrees celsius.    110  100  90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10  0  \u201310 \u00b0c     what are the values of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point on the celsius scale?     lower fixed  point  / \u00b0c upper fixed  point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 110  b 0 20  c 0 100  d 20 100      16 an ice cube at a temperature of 0  \u00b0c is put into a drink at a temperature of 10  \u00b0c.    after a short time, some of the ice has melted and the drink has cooled to a temperature of 8  \u00b0c.    what is the temperature of the remaining ice?  a 0  \u00b0c b 2  \u00b0c c 4  \u00b0c d 8  \u00b0c     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  17 an experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat.     balls are stuck with wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram 1.    the rods are heated at one end. some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram 2.    which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat?    before heating after heatingheated end heated enddiagram 1 diagram 2 abcd      18 food is kept in a cool-box which uses two ice packs to keep it cool.    where should the ice packs be placed to keep all the food as cool as possible?  a both at the bottom of the box  b both at the top of the box  c one at the front and one at the back of the box  d one on the left and one on the right of the box      19 water waves can be used to show reflection, refraction and diffraction.    for each of these, which row shows whether or not the speed of the water waves changes?     reflection refraction diffraction  a no no yes  b no yes no  c yes no no  d yes yes yes    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11 [turn over  20 a vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at p.     in two seconds, three wave crests are produced on the surface of the water.    p  xy wave  crests      which statement is correct?  a distance x is the amplitude of the waves.  b distance y is the wavelength of the waves.  c each circle represents a wavefront.  d the frequency of the waves is 3  hz.     21 the diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism.    red light violet light glass prismwhite light     why does dispersion occur when white light enters the glass?  a the frequency of red light decreases more than that of violet light.  b the frequency of violet light decreases more than that of red light.  c the speed of red light decreases more than that of violet light.  d the speed of violet light decreases more than that of red light.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  22 a thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.    candlelensscreen image     various focused images are produced on the screen by moving the lens and the screen  backwards and forwards.    which statement is always  correct?  a the image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.  b the image is bigger than the object.  c the image is closer to the lens than the object is.  d the image is inverted.      23 sound travels by wave motion.    which property of waves causes echoes?  a diffraction  b dispersion c reflection  d refraction     24 a student listens to a machine that makes sound s of different frequencies. he can only hear one  of the sounds.    which frequency of sound is the student able to hear?  a 2  hz b 10  hz c 2  khz d 30  khz     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11 [turn over  25 which test could be used to find which end of a magnet is the north pole?  a putting it near a compass needle  b putting it near a ferrous metal  c putting it near a non-ferrous metal  d putting it near a steel spoon      26 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    n s magnet x iron bar  n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1  experiment 2      which magnetic poles are induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s      27 an ammeter and an 18  \u03c9 resistor are connected in series with a battery. the reading on the  ammeter is 0.50  a. the resistance of the battery and the ammeter can be ignored.    18  \u03c9a     what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?  a 9.0  n b 9.0  v c 36  n d 36  v     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  28 a polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.    what charges must the rod and the balloon carry?  a the rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.  b the rod and the balloon carry like charges.  c the rod is charged but the balloon is not.  d the balloon is charged but the rod is not.     29 which circuit includes a capacitor and what does the capacitor do in this circuit?     circuit what the  capacitor does  a potential divider stores current  b potential divider stores energy  c time delay stores current  d time delay stores energy      30 a student sets up the circuit shown. the switch is open (off).    x  y z     which lamps are on and which lamps are off?     lamp x lamp y lamp z  a off off off  b on off off  c on off on  d on on on     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11 [turn over  31 the diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. a voltmeter is connected across the  thermistor.    v     the graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.    temperature resistance      as the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the  reading on the voltmeter?     resistance voltmeter reading  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  32 in this circuit, a component at x automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a  fault.    electrical supply x     which components are suitable to use at x?  a a circuit-breaker, a fuse or a switch  b only a circuit-breaker or a fuse c only a circuit-breaker or a switch d only a fuse      33 which graph shows how the output voltage varies with time for a simple a.c. generator?    0voltagea 0voltageb 0voltagec 0voltagedtime timetime time      ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11 [turn over  34 a magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil. the coil is  connected to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.    n sspring centre-zero ammetermoving magnet stationary coil    what does the ammeter show when the magnet repeatedly moves slowly up and down?  a a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left  b a steady reading to the left c a steady reading to the right  d a steady reading of zero     35 the diagram shows a simple step-down transformer used to decrease a voltage.    which part is the primary coil?    a  b c d      ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  36 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    power supply xyvacuum screen     what are the correct labels for x and for y?     x y  a negative anode positive cathode  b negative cathode positive anode  c positive anode negative cathode  d positive cathode negative anode     37 a beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage  d.c. power supply.    which path does the beam follow?    +++ cathode  rays  a b c  d+++       38 which row shows the relative ionising effects and penetrating abilities of \u03b1-particles and   \u03b2-particles?     ionising effect penetrating ability  a \u03b1 greater than \u03b2 \u03b1 greater than \u03b2  b \u03b1 greater than \u03b2 \u03b1 less than \u03b2  c \u03b1 less than \u03b2 \u03b1 greater than \u03b2  d \u03b1 less than \u03b2 \u03b1 less than \u03b2 ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  39 a powder contains 400  mg of a radioactive material that emits \u03b1-particles.    the half-life of the material is 5 days.    what mass of that material remains after 10 days?  a 0  mg b 40  mg c 100  mg d 200  mg      40 an atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.    which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?    n n++ + \u2013\u2013a n+++ \u2013 \u2013\u2013b nn nn++ +nn nn++ + \u2013 \u2013\u2013cn + \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013d= a neutron = a proton= an electronkey (not to scale)      ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third -party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/m/j/11  blank page     "
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib11 06_0625_12/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2011  [turn over      *4602902077* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2011     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  1 a tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40  s later hears the echo from a wall.        the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    how far away is the player from the wall?  a 66  m b 132  m c 264  m d 825  m     2 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11 [turn over  3 water waves can be used to show reflection, refraction and diffraction.    for each of these, which row shows whether or not the speed of the water waves changes?     reflection refraction diffraction  a no no yes  b no yes no  c yes no no  d yes yes yes    4 the diagram shows a balance being used to find the weight of a baby. the weight of the basket  can be ignored.    at equilibrium, the pivot is nearer to the weight w than to the baby.    w pivot baby basketcentre of mass of beam     what is the weight of the baby?  a less than w  b more than w  c w  d impossible to tell     5 which statement about mass and weight is correct?  a mass and weight are both forces.  b neither mass nor weight is a force. c only mass is a force.  d only weight is a force.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  6 an object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.    which graph shows this motion?    0 0 0 00000speed speed speed time timetimea b c dtime speed       7 a cube of side 2.0  cm is placed on a balance.    2.0  cm balance 7.2  g     what is the density of the cube?  a 0.90  g / cm3 b 1.2  g / cm3 c 1.8  g / cm3 d 3.6  g / cm3      8 an ice cube at a temperature of 0  \u00b0c is put into a drink at a temperature of 10  \u00b0c.    after a short time, some of the ice has melted and the drink has cooled to a temperature of 8  \u00b0c.    what is the temperature of the remaining ice?  a 0  \u00b0c b 2  \u00b0c c 4  \u00b0c d 8  \u00b0c     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11 [turn over  9 the diagram shows a thermometer calibrated in degrees celsius.    110  100  90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10  0  \u201310 \u00b0c     what are the values of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point on the celsius scale?     lower fixed  point  / \u00b0c upper fixed  point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 110  b 0 20  c 0 100  d 20 100      10 an experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat.     balls are stuck with wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram 1.    the rods are heated at one end. some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram 2.    which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat?    before heating after heatingheated end heated enddiagram 1 diagram 2 abcd      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  11 objects with different masses are hung on a spring. the diagram shows how much the spring  stretches.    100  g m10  cm 20  cm 30  cm     the extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.    what is the mass of object m?  a 110  g b 150  g c 200  g d 300  g     12 when a liquid evaporates, some molecules escape from it and its temperature changes.    from where do the molecules escape and what is t he effect on the temperature of the liquid?     molecules escape from temperature of liquid  a all parts of the liquid decreases  b all parts of the liquid increases  c only the liquid surface decreases  d only the liquid surface increases    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11 [turn over  13 a sealed gas cylinder is left outside on a hot, sunny day.    what happens to the average speed of the molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the  cylinder as the temperature rises?     average speed of  the gas molecules gas pressure  a falls falls  b falls rises  c rises falls  d rises rises      14 the diagram shows two mercury barometers.    barometer 1 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 1.    barometer 2 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 2.    barometer 1, da y 1 point x barometer 2, da y 2 point ymercury     which statement is true?  a the atmospheric pressure on day 1 is less than the atmospheric pressure on day 2.  b the atmospheric pressure on day 1 is the same as the atmospheric pressure on day 2. c the pressure at point x is less than the pressure at point y.  d the pressure at point x is the same as the pressure at point y.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  15 which row gives an example of the stated form of energy?     form of energy example  a gravitational the energy due to the movement of a train along a level track  b internal the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode-ray tube  c   kinetic   the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a  high diving board  d strain the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat     16 a brick with flat, rectangular sides rests on a table.    brick  table      the brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.        how has this affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?     force pressure  a increased increased  b increased unchanged  c unchanged increased  d unchanged unchanged    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11 [turn over  17 two farmers use an electrically powered elevator to lift bales of hay. all the bales of hay have the  same mass.    bale of hay     as sunset approaches, they increase the speed of the motor so that more bales are lifted up in a  given time.    how does this affect the work done in lifting each bale and the useful output power of the motor?     work done in  lifting each bale useful output power  of the motor  a increases decreases  b increases increases  c no change decreases  d no change increases    18 which energy resource is used to generate electricity by first boiling water?  a hydroelectric  b nuclear fission  c tides  d waves     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  19 a thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.    candlelensscreen image     various focused images are produced on the screen by moving the lens and the screen  backwards and forwards.    which statement is always  correct?  a the image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.  b the image is bigger than the object.  c the image is closer to the lens than the object is.  d the image is inverted.      20 food is kept in a cool-box which uses two ice packs to keep it cool.    where should the ice packs be placed to keep all the food as cool as possible?  a both at the bottom of the box  b both at the top of the box c one at the front and one at the back of the box  d one on the left and one on the right of the box     21 sound travels by wave motion.    which property of waves causes echoes?  a diffraction  b dispersion c reflection d refraction     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11 [turn over  22 a student listens to a machine that makes sounds of different frequencies. he can only hear one  of the sounds.    which frequency of sound is the student able to hear?  a 2  hz b 10  hz c 2  khz d 30  khz     23 the diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism.    red light violet light glass prismwhite light     why does dispersion occur when white light enters the glass?  a the frequency of red light decreases more than that of violet light.  b the frequency of violet light decreases more than that of red light.  c the speed of red light decreases more than that of violet light.  d the speed of violet light decreases more than that of red light.      24 a vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at p.     in two seconds, three wave crests are produced on the surface of the water.    p  xy wave  crests      which statement is correct?  a distance x is the amplitude of the waves.  b distance y is the wavelength of the waves.  c each circle represents a wavefront.  d the frequency of the waves is 3  hz.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  25 an ammeter and an 18  \u03c9 resistor are connected in series with a battery. the reading on the  ammeter is 0.50  a. the resistance of the battery and the ammeter can be ignored.    18  \u03c9a     what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?  a 9.0  n b 9.0  v c 36  n d 36  v     26 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    n s magnet x iron bar  n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1  experiment 2      which magnetic poles are induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s      27 which circuit includes a capacitor and what does the capacitor do in this circuit?     circuit what the  capacitor does  a potential divider stores current  b potential divider stores energy  c time delay stores current  d time delay stores energy     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11 [turn over  28 which test could be used to find which end of a magnet is the north pole?  a putting it near a compass needle  b putting it near a ferrous metal  c putting it near a non-ferrous metal  d putting it near a steel spoon      29 the diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. a voltmeter is connected across the  thermistor.    v     the graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.    temperature resistance      as the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the  reading on the voltmeter?     resistance voltmeter reading  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  30 a polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.    what charges must the rod and the balloon carry?  a the rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.  b the rod and the balloon carry like charges.  c the rod is charged but the balloon is not.  d the balloon is charged but the rod is not.     31 a student sets up the circuit shown. the switch is open (off).    x  y z     which lamps are on and which lamps are off?     lamp x lamp y lamp z  a off off off  b on off off  c on off on  d on on on     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11 [turn over  32 a magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil. the coil is  connected to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.    n sspring centre-zero ammetermoving magnet stationary coil    what does the ammeter show when the magnet repeatedly moves slowly up and down?  a a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left  b a steady reading to the left c a steady reading to the right  d a steady reading of zero     33 which graph shows how the output voltage varies with time for a simple a.c. generator?    0voltagea 0voltageb 0voltagec 0voltagedtime timetime time      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  34 the diagram shows a simple step-down transformer used to decrease a voltage.    which part is the primary coil?    a  b c d      35 in this circuit, a component at x automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a  fault.    electrical supply x     which components are suitable to use at x?  a a circuit-breaker, a fuse or a switch  b only a circuit-breaker or a fuse  c only a circuit-breaker or a switch  d only a fuse     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11 [turn over  36 an atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.    which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?    n n++ + \u2013\u2013a n+++ \u2013 \u2013\u2013b nn nn++ +nn nn++ + \u2013 \u2013\u2013cn + \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013d= a neutron = a proton= an electronkey (not to scale)      ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  37 a powder contains 400  mg of a radioactive material that emits \u03b1-particles.    the half-life of the material is 5 days.    what mass of that material remains after 10 days?  a 0  mg b 40  mg c 100  mg d 200  mg      38 which row shows the relative ionising effects and penetrating abilities of \u03b1-particles and   \u03b2-particles?     ionising effect penetrating ability  a \u03b1 greater than \u03b2 \u03b1 greater than \u03b2  b \u03b1 greater than \u03b2 \u03b1 less than \u03b2  c \u03b1 less than \u03b2 \u03b1 greater than \u03b2  d \u03b1 less than \u03b2 \u03b1 less than \u03b2      39 a beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage  d.c. power supply.    which path does the beam follow?    +++ cathode  rays  a b c  d+++      ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  40 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    power supply xyvacuum screen     what are the correct labels for x and for y?     x y  a negative anode positive cathode  b negative cathode positive anode  c positive anode negative cathode  d positive cathode negative anode     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/m/j/11  blank page     "
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib11 06_0625_13/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2011  [turn over      *0061274039* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2011     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  1 a tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40  s later hears the echo from a wall.        the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    how far away is the player from the wall?  a 66  m b 132  m c 264  m d 825  m     2 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11 [turn over  3 water waves can be used to show reflection, refraction and diffraction.    for each of these, which row shows whether or not the speed of the water waves changes?     reflection refraction diffraction  a no no yes  b no yes no  c yes no no  d yes yes yes    4 the diagram shows a balance being used to find the weight of a baby. the weight of the basket  can be ignored.    at equilibrium, the pivot is nearer to the weight w than to the baby.    w pivot baby basketcentre of mass of beam     what is the weight of the baby?  a less than w  b more than w  c w  d impossible to tell     5 which statement about mass and weight is correct?  a mass and weight are both forces.  b neither mass nor weight is a force. c only mass is a force.  d only weight is a force.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  6 an object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.    which graph shows this motion?    0 0 0 00000speed speed speed time timetimea b c dtime speed       7 a cube of side 2.0  cm is placed on a balance.    2.0  cm balance 7.2  g     what is the density of the cube?  a 0.90  g / cm3 b 1.2  g / cm3 c 1.8  g / cm3 d 3.6  g / cm3      8 an ice cube at a temperature of 0  \u00b0c is put into a drink at a temperature of 10  \u00b0c.    after a short time, some of the ice has melted and the drink has cooled to a temperature of 8  \u00b0c.    what is the temperature of the remaining ice?  a 0  \u00b0c b 2  \u00b0c c 4  \u00b0c d 8  \u00b0c     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11 [turn over  9 the diagram shows a thermometer calibrated in degrees celsius.    110  100  90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10  0  \u201310 \u00b0c     what are the values of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point on the celsius scale?     lower fixed  point  / \u00b0c upper fixed  point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 110  b 0 20  c 0 100  d 20 100      10 an experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat.     balls are stuck with wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram 1.    the rods are heated at one end. some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram 2.    which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat?    before heating after heatingheated end heated enddiagram 1 diagram 2 abcd      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  11 objects with different masses are hung on a spring. the diagram shows how much the spring  stretches.    100  g m10  cm 20  cm 30  cm     the extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.    what is the mass of object m?  a 110  g b 150  g c 200  g d 300  g     12 when a liquid evaporates, some molecules escape from it and its temperature changes.    from where do the molecules escape and what is t he effect on the temperature of the liquid?     molecules escape from temperature of liquid  a all parts of the liquid decreases  b all parts of the liquid increases  c only the liquid surface decreases  d only the liquid surface increases    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11 [turn over  13 a sealed gas cylinder is left outside on a hot, sunny day.    what happens to the average speed of the molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the  cylinder as the temperature rises?     average speed of  the gas molecules gas pressure  a falls falls  b falls rises  c rises falls  d rises rises      14 the diagram shows two mercury barometers.    barometer 1 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 1.    barometer 2 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 2.    barometer 1, da y 1 point x barometer 2, da y 2 point ymercury     which statement is true?  a the atmospheric pressure on day 1 is less than the atmospheric pressure on day 2.  b the atmospheric pressure on day 1 is the same as the atmospheric pressure on day 2. c the pressure at point x is less than the pressure at point y.  d the pressure at point x is the same as the pressure at point y.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  15 which row gives an example of the stated form of energy?     form of energy example  a gravitational the energy due to the movement of a train along a level track  b internal the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode-ray tube  c   kinetic   the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a  high diving board  d strain the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat     16 a brick with flat, rectangular sides rests on a table.    brick  table      the brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.        how has this affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?     force pressure  a increased increased  b increased unchanged  c unchanged increased  d unchanged unchanged    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11 [turn over  17 two farmers use an electrically powered elevator to lift bales of hay. all the bales of hay have the  same mass.    bale of hay     as sunset approaches, they increase the speed of the motor so that more bales are lifted up in a  given time.    how does this affect the work done in lifting each bale and the useful output power of the motor?     work done in  lifting each bale useful output power  of the motor  a increases decreases  b increases increases  c no change decreases  d no change increases    18 which energy resource is used to generate electricity by first boiling water?  a hydroelectric  b nuclear fission  c tides  d waves     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  19 a thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.    candlelensscreen image     various focused images are produced on the screen by moving the lens and the screen  backwards and forwards.    which statement is always  correct?  a the image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.  b the image is bigger than the object.  c the image is closer to the lens than the object is.  d the image is inverted.      20 food is kept in a cool-box which uses two ice packs to keep it cool.    where should the ice packs be placed to keep all the food as cool as possible?  a both at the bottom of the box  b both at the top of the box c one at the front and one at the back of the box  d one on the left and one on the right of the box     21 sound travels by wave motion.    which property of waves causes echoes?  a diffraction  b dispersion c reflection d refraction     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11 [turn over  22 a student listens to a machine that makes sounds of different frequencies. he can only hear one  of the sounds.    which frequency of sound is the student able to hear?  a 2  hz b 10  hz c 2  khz d 30  khz     23 the diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism.    red light violet light glass prismwhite light     why does dispersion occur when white light enters the glass?  a the frequency of red light decreases more than that of violet light.  b the frequency of violet light decreases more than that of red light.  c the speed of red light decreases more than that of violet light.  d the speed of violet light decreases more than that of red light.      24 a vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at p.     in two seconds, three wave crests are produced on the surface of the water.    p  xy wave  crests      which statement is correct?  a distance x is the amplitude of the waves.  b distance y is the wavelength of the waves.  c each circle represents a wavefront.  d the frequency of the waves is 3  hz.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  25 an ammeter and an 18  \u03c9 resistor are connected in series with a battery. the reading on the  ammeter is 0.50  a. the resistance of the battery and the ammeter can be ignored.    18  \u03c9a     what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?  a 9.0  n b 9.0  v c 36  n d 36  v     26 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    n s magnet x iron bar  n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1  experiment 2      which magnetic poles are induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s      27 which circuit includes a capacitor and what does the capacitor do in this circuit?     circuit what the  capacitor does  a potential divider stores current  b potential divider stores energy  c time delay stores current  d time delay stores energy     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11 [turn over  28 which test could be used to find which end of a magnet is the north pole?  a putting it near a compass needle  b putting it near a ferrous metal  c putting it near a non-ferrous metal  d putting it near a steel spoon      29 the diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. a voltmeter is connected across the  thermistor.    v     the graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.    temperature resistance      as the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the  reading on the voltmeter?     resistance voltmeter reading  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  30 a polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.    what charges must the rod and the balloon carry?  a the rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.  b the rod and the balloon carry like charges.  c the rod is charged but the balloon is not.  d the balloon is charged but the rod is not.     31 a student sets up the circuit shown. the switch is open (off).    x  y z     which lamps are on and which lamps are off?     lamp x lamp y lamp z  a off off off  b on off off  c on off on  d on on on     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11 [turn over  32 a magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil. the coil is  connected to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.    n sspring centre-zero ammetermoving magnet stationary coil    what does the ammeter show when the magnet repeatedly moves slowly up and down?  a a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left  b a steady reading to the left c a steady reading to the right  d a steady reading of zero     33 which graph shows how the output voltage varies with time for a simple a.c. generator?    0voltagea 0voltageb 0voltagec 0voltagedtime timetime time      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  34 the diagram shows a simple step-down transformer used to decrease a voltage.    which part is the primary coil?    a  b c d      35 in this circuit, a component at x automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a  fault.    electrical supply x     which components are suitable to use at x?  a a circuit-breaker, a fuse or a switch  b only a circuit-breaker or a fuse  c only a circuit-breaker or a switch  d only a fuse     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11 [turn over  36 an atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.    which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?    n n++ + \u2013\u2013a n+++ \u2013 \u2013\u2013b nn nn++ +nn nn++ + \u2013 \u2013\u2013cn + \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013d= a neutron = a proton= an electronkey (not to scale)      ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  37 a powder contains 400  mg of a radioactive material that emits \u03b1-particles.    the half-life of the material is 5 days.    what mass of that material remains after 10 days?  a 0  mg b 40  mg c 100  mg d 200  mg      38 which row shows the relative ionising effects and penetrating abilities of \u03b1-particles and   \u03b2-particles?     ionising effect penetrating ability  a \u03b1 greater than \u03b2 \u03b1 greater than \u03b2  b \u03b1 greater than \u03b2 \u03b1 less than \u03b2  c \u03b1 less than \u03b2 \u03b1 greater than \u03b2  d \u03b1 less than \u03b2 \u03b1 less than \u03b2      39 a beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage  d.c. power supply.    which path does the beam follow?    +++ cathode  rays  a b c  d+++      ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  40 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    power supply xyvacuum screen     what are the correct labels for x and for y?     x y  a negative anode positive cathode  b negative cathode positive anode  c positive anode negative cathode  d positive cathode negative anode     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/m/j/11  blank page     "
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/dj) 28876/6 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. *6993431972* physics 0625/21 paper 2 core may/june 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.  fig. 1.2 shows the same measuring cylinder after stone a has been lowered into it on a fine  string. 44.2  cm3 water60.4  cm3 aa fig. 1.1                        fig. 1.2  (a) calculate the volume of stone a.  volume = .. cm3 [2]  (b) the mass of stone a is measured as 40.5 g.   calculate the density of the rock from which stone a was formed.  density = . [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) stone b, from the same rock as stone a, has a larger volume.   stone a is removed from the water and replaced by stone b. the measurements are then  repeated.   which of the values in the experiment will be different when using stone b?   tick boxes alongside any of the quantities that will have changed. 60.4 cm3 40.5 g density  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20112 a fixed amount of dry gas is exerting a pressure on its container.  (a) in terms of molecules, explain what causes the pressure.  ... ... ... ...[3]  (b) one of the sketch graphs in fig. 2.1 shows how the pressure of the gas varies with volume  at constant temperature, and the other shows how the pressure varies with temperature at constant volume.   the pressure axis has been labelled in each case. pressure / pa 0pressure / pa 0 fig. 2.1   (i) on the appropriate graphs, label one horizontal axis \u201c volume / m3 \u201d and the other horizontal  axis \u201c temperature / \u00b0c \u201d.   (ii) on one of the graphs, mark, with the letter x, the pressure of the gas at the ice point.  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over3 electricity can be generated from either renewable or non-renewable energy sources.  (a) describe the difference between a renewable energy source and a non-renewable energy  source.  ...  ... ... ...[1]  (b) (i) name one renewable energy source. ...   (ii) suggest one reason why your choice in (b)(i) is not, so far, widely used for generating  electricity. ... ...[2]  (c) (i) name one non-renewable energy source. ...   (ii) suggest one reason why non-renewable sources have been widely used for generating  electricity up until the present time.  ... ...[2]  [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 the main parts of a cold store are shown in fig. 4.1. cooling tubes cold store refrigeration unit fig. 4.1  (a) explain why the cooling tubes are positioned at the top of the store.  ... ... ... ...[1]  (b) suggest why the refrigeration unit is outside the cold store. ... ... ... ...[2]  (c) the walls are made of thick thermally-insulating material.   why is it important to have the walls made like this?  ... ... ... ...[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (d) even when the refrigeration unit is running continuously, there comes a time when the  temperature in the store stops falling, and remains constant.   explain why this happens.  ...  ... ... ...[2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 (a) the four words below can each be used to describe waves.   put a tick in each of the boxes alongside any words that can be applied to sound waves. longitudinal transverseelectromagneticmechanical  [2]  (b) how does an echo occur?  ... ...[1]  (c) fig. 5.1 shows a boat steaming along a river. the river is in a wide gorge and there are high  cliffs on each side. cliff acliff b fig. 5.1   the boat sounds its hooter once. two clear echoes are heard by a person on the boat.    the first echo is 1.5 s after the hooter sounds. the second echo is 2.5 s after the hooter sounds.  (i) which cliff caused the first echo? ...[1]   (ii) sound travels at 330 m / s in air.    calculate the distance between the two cliffs.  distance = ...m [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (iii) further along the river, the cliffs are the same distance apart but the river is midway  between the cliffs. the boat sounds its hooter again.    without further calculation, describe what is now heard and approximately when it is heard. what is heard  . ...when  .. ...[2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20116 a laser is a device that gives a narrow parallel beam of monochromatic (single-colour)   light.  fig. 6.1 shows the light from a laser shining on a triangular glass prism. light from laserprismscreen fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, complete the path of the light until it reaches the screen. [2]  (b) what will be seen on the screen? ...[1]  (c) the beam of light from the laser is replaced by a beam of white light from a lamp.   state what is now seen on the screen.  ... ...[2]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over7 (a) two light, identical spheres, a and b, are suspended alongside each other on thin nylon  threads, as shown in fig. 7.1. a bnylon threads fig. 7.1   a is given a positive charge and b is given a negative charge.   on fig. 7.1, draw how the threads and spheres might look after the spheres have been  charged. [1]  (b) a cleaner is attempting to remove dust from some plastic-covered furniture, using a dry cloth.  unfortunately, this seems to make the dust cling more firmly to the plastic covering.   (i) suggest why this happens.  ... ... ... ...[3]   (ii) suggest why this would be less likely to happen if the cleaner used a cloth which was  very slightly damp.  ... ... ... ...[2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20118 fig. 8.1 shows two resistors forming part of a circuit. 3 \u03c9 7 \u03c9 4.2 vab cd fig. 8.1  (a) (i) complete the following sentence about the two resistors connected between a and d.    the two resistors are connected in . . [1]   (ii) the potential difference between a and d is 4.2 v.    state the value of the potential difference between b and c.  potential difference = v [1]   (iii) calculate the current in the 3 \u03c9 resistor.  current = [4]   (iv) state how the current in ab compares with    1. the current in each of the two resistors,  ...    2. the current in cd.  ...[2]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) in the boxes below, draw two circuit diagrams, each containing a battery and three identical  resistors. arrange each circuit so that all the resistors in the circuit carry the same current.   draw one circuit in each box.         [2]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 (a) a car headlamp circuit consists of a 12 v battery, a switch, two 12 v headlamps and a 12 v  indicator lamp (inside the car).    fig. 9.1 shows the symbols of these components. left headlamp right headlamp indicator lamp (inside car) switch 12 v battery fig. 9.1   complete fig. 9.1 to show the wiring necessary so that all three lamps light up at full brightness  when the switch is closed. [2]  (b) (i) explain briefly, in terms of molecules, why solids expand when heated.  ... ... ...[1]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) brass expands when heated.    invar is a metal that expands very little when heated.    the flasher lamp shown in fig. 9.2 is used as a warning lamp in a car. brass striplamp filamentcontact invar strip fig. 9.2    the flasher lamp is designed to flash on and off repeatedly.    it contains a bimetallic strip made of a brass strip and an invar strip joined together along  their lengths.    1. state what happens to the bimetallic strip when it is heated.  ...[2]    2 .  explain why the lamp flashes on and off repeatedly when it is connected to an appropriate battery.  ...  ... ... ... ...[4]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 201110 a rotating-coil generator consists of a rectangular coil of wire that rotates at constant speed  between the poles of a permanent magnet.  figs. 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 show views from one end of the coil, when the coil is in different positions. ns ns ns  fig. 10.1                      fig. 10.2                      fig. 10.3  (a) which diagram shows the coil in the position where   (i) the induced e.m.f. in the coil is at its maximum, .   (ii) the induced e.m.f. in the coil is zero? .. [2]  (b) on fig. 10.4, sketch the graph of e.m.f. against time, for two complete rotations of the coil. + 0 \u2013e.m.f. time fig. 10.4  [4]  [total: 6]",
            "17": "17 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over11 fig. 11.1 shows a cathode-ray tube connected to external voltage supplies and switches. the  terminals labelled h.t. are connected to a high voltage source. s1 v1 cathode anodech.t.\u2013+ s2 v2s3horizontal metal plates screen d fig. 11.1  (a) when the cathode becomes hot it releases electrons.   what name is used to describe the release of electrons by heating?  ...[1]  (b) (i) which switch should be closed to make the cathode become hot?   switch =  ...   (ii) which switch should then be closed to obtain a beam of electrons along cd?   switch =  ...   (iii) which switch should then be closed to deflect the beam of electrons downwards?   switch =  ...[2]  (c) what must be done in order to deflect the beam of electrons upwards, instead of downwards?  ... ... ...[1]  [total: 4]",
            "18": "18 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 201112 (a) complete the following definition of radioactive half-life. the half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken for . ... ... ...[2]  (b) fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of radioactive material changes with time. 00510152025count rate counts / s30 20 40 60 80 time  / s100 fig. 12.1",
            "19": "19 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011  (i) use fig. 12.1 to find the half-life of the radioactive material.  half-life =  ... s [1]   (ii) use the graph to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease from 30 counts / s to  10 counts / s.  time taken =  ... s [1]   (iii) use your answers to (i) and (ii) to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease from 30 counts / s to 5 counts / s.  time taken =  ... s [2]  [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/21/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sw) 28845/3 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *7393943469* physics 0625/22 paper 2  core may/june 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 the volume of a stone is to be found using the equipment illustrated in fig. 1.1. stone measuring cylinderwater fig. 1.1  the following five steps are intended to describe how the volume of the stone is found.  complete the sentences by adding appropriate words.  (a) pour some . into the measuring cylinder. [1]  (b) take the reading of the ... from the scale on the measuring cylinder. [1]  (c) carefully put .. into the measuring cylinder. [1]  (d) take the new reading of the ... from the scale on the measuring cylinder.   [1]  (e) calculate the volume of the stone by    ... .. [2]  [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over2 energy may be transferred from one place to another by means of conduction, convection or  radiation.  which process is involved when energy is transferred through  (a) a solid,  . [1]  (b) a liquid,  ...  and   [2]  (c) a vacuum?  ... [1]   [total: 4] 3 solar panels are fitted to the roof of a house.  describe briefly what they do. .. .. .. . [3]   [total: 3]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 fig. 4.1 shows how the speed of an object varies during a period of 30 s. 0010203040 speed m / s time  / s10 20 30 fig. 4.1  (a) state the speed of the object   (i) at the start of the 30 s,  speed = .. m / s   (ii) at the end of the 30 s.  speed = .. m / s   [2]  (b) describe what is happening to the speed during the period   (i) 0 s \u2013 10 s,  ...   (ii) 10 s \u2013 25 s,  .   (iii) 25 s \u2013 30 s.  .   [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) determine the distance travelled in the last 5 s.  distance =  .. m [3]  (d) the total distance travelled in the 30 s is 750 m.   calculate the average speed of the object during the 30 s.  average speed =  ..  m / s [3]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a girl looking at her reflection in a mirror on the wall. the reflecting surface of  the mirror is the surface in contact with the wall. mirror reflecting surface fig. 5.1   on fig. 5.1,   (i) put a small x where the image of the girl\u2019s eye is positioned,  [2]   (ii) carefully draw lines to find the lowest part of her body that she can see reflected in the  mirror. mark clearly the portion of her body that she cannot see.  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) a helicopter is hovering over a harbour. the pilot can see the waves arriving from out at sea.  the waves hit the harbour wall at an angle, as shown in fig. 5.2. harbour wall (seen from the air)incoming water waves fig. 5.2   the waves are reflected when they hit the harbour wall.   carefully complete fig. 5.2 to show the reflected parts of the first two waves to hit the wall.  [3]   [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20116 (a) the temperature of a block of iron is increased.   state what happens to   (i) the energy of the atoms due to their vibrations, ... .. [1]   (ii) the average separation of the atoms, ... .. [1]   (iii) the density of the iron. ... .. [1]  (b) when concrete roads are made, the concrete is laid in sections, with gaps between the  sections. the gaps are then filled with a soft material, called pitch. this is shown in fig. 6.1. concrete pitch fig. 6.1   suggest why the concrete is laid in sections like this.  ...  ... .. [2]   [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over7 (a) state what an electric current consists of.  .. [2]  (b) (i) what name do we give to materials in which it is easy to create an electric current? ...   (ii) state one example of such a material. .. [2]  (c) (i) what name do we give to materials in which it is difficult to create an electric current? ...   (ii) state one example of such a material. .. [2]   [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20118 the components in fig. 8.1 are connected in a circuit. aa rpq fig. 8.1  (a) complete the following sentence.   the components in the circuit of fig. 8.1 are connected in  with each  other.  [1]  (b) on fig. 8.1, draw   (i) an arrow to show the direction of the conventional current in the circuit,   (ii) a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across r.  [2]  (c) (i) state the name of the component represented by this symbol:  ...   (ii) what is the purpose of this component in the circuit?  ... .. [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (d) the top ammeter reads 1.5 a. the voltmeter reads 6.0 v.   (i) state the reading of the bottom ammeter.  a [1]   (ii) calculate the resistance of r.  resistance =  .. [4]  (e) a piece of low resistance wire is carelessly allowed to connect p and q.   state which component could be damaged when this happens.  .. [1]   [total: 11] 9 (a) state two advantages that electromagnets have, compared with permanent magnets.1.  ...2.  .. [2]  (b) tick one box in each of the columns below, to indicate what should be used to give the  strongest electromagnet. column 1 number of turns on  coilcolumn 2 type of corecolumn 3 current 1000 turns f 500 turns f 250 turns fair f plastic f iron f3.0 a f 2.0 a f 1.0 a f   [2]   [total: 4]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 201110 a sportsman is feared to have broken a leg, and is taken to hospital to have his leg x-rayed.  (a) complete the following sentence about x-rays.   x-rays are a form of . radiation that have    very .. wavelengths.  [2]  (b) in the hospital, what is used to detect the x-rays and produce an image of the bones of the  leg?  ... .. [1]  (c) describe the properties of x-rays that enable an image to be produced, which distinguishes  between bones and flesh.  ... ... ... ... ... .. [2]  (d) state one precaution taken by the technicians who operate the x-ray machines. ... .. [1]   [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over11 fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays, connected to two voltage supplies and  switches. 12 v 1000  vs1 s2filament cathode vacuum anode+ \u2013+\u2013 fig. 11.1  (a) which switch has to be closed in order to make the filament release electrons?  .. [1]  (b) (i) explain why closing the switch in (a) makes the filament release electrons. ... ... ... .. [4]   (ii) what name do we give to this means of electron release? .. [1]  (c) state and explain what will happen to the released electrons when both switches are closed. ... ... ... .. [3]   [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 201112 a radioactive source, which emits beta-particles, is used as shown in fig. 12.1 to detect whether  cartons on a conveyor belt have the required volume of pineapple juice in them. igcse pineapplebeta-particle emitting source fruit juice level carton belt travels this way conveyor beltto counterradiation detectornarrow detecting slit fig. 12.1  (a) state why an alpha-emitting source would not be suitable for this application.  ... .. [1]  (b) state why a gamma-emitting source would not be suitable for this application. ... .. [1]  (c) the factory has a choice of two beta-emitting sources. source half-life barium-139 85 minutes strontium-90  28 years   state, giving your reasons, which of these sources is the most suitable for this application.  ... ... ... .. [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 (d) the equipment is set to give a reading of 200 counts / s when there is a carton with the correct  amount of pineapple juice between the source and the detector.   tick the appropriate boxes to indicate what reading would be expected in each situation. reading more than  200 counts / s200 counts / sless than  200 counts / s carton containing too little juice carton containing  too much juice no carton at all   [3]   [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (leo/dj) 28843/5 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *9978941325* physics 0625/31 paper 3 extended may/june 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 in a laboratory, an experiment is carried out to measure the acceleration of a trolley on a horizontal  table, when pulled by a horizontal force. forcetrolley fig. 1.1  the measurements are repeated for a series of different forces, with the results shown in the table below. force / n 4.0 6.0 10.0 14.0 acceleration m / s20.50 0.85 1.55 2.25  (a) on fig. 1.2, plot these points and draw the best straight line for your points. [2] 00481216 force / n 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 acceleration m / s22.5 fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) the graph shows that below a certain force there is no acceleration.   (i) find the value of this force.  [1]   (ii) a force smaller than that in (b)(i) is applied to the stationary trolley. suggest what happens  to the trolley, if anything.  ...[1]  (c) show that the gradient of your graph is about 5.7.  gradient =  ...[1]  (d) (i) state the equation that links resultant force f, mass m and acceleration a.  [1]   (ii) use your gradient from (c) to find the mass of the trolley.  mass =  ...[2]  (e) on fig. 1.3, sketch a speed / time graph for a trolley with constant acceleration. time00speed fig. 1.3  [1]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20112 some builders decide to measure their personal power ratings using apparatus they already have  on site. fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement they use. pulley rope load pulley fig. 2.1  (a) in the table below, list the three quantities they must measure in order to calculate one man\u2019s power, and the instrument they would use for each measurement. quantity to be measured instrument used for measurement 1. 2.3.  [3]  (b) one workman is measured as having a power of 528 w. his weight is 800 n.   he can develop the same power climbing a ladder, whose rungs are 30 cm apart.   how many rungs can he climb in 5 s?  number of rungs =  ...[3]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) the human body is only about 15% efficient when climbing ladders.   calculate the actual energy used from the body of the workman in (b) when he climbs 20  rungs.  energy used =  ...[2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 during a period of hot weather, the atmospheric pressure on the pond in fig. 3.1 remains constant.  water evaporates from the pond, so that the depth h decreases. force due to air pressure hh fig. 3.1  (a) study the diagram and state, giving your reason, what happens during this hot period to   (i) the force of the air on the surface of the pond,  ... ...[1]   (ii) the pressure at the bottom of the pond. ... ...[1]  (b) on a certain day, the pond is 12 m deep.   (i) water has a density of 1000 kg / m 3.    calculate the pressure at the bottom of the pond due to the water.  pressure due to the water =  ...[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) atmospheric pressure on that day is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.    calculate the total pressure at the bottom of the pond.  total pressure =  ...[1]   (iii) a bubble of gas is released from the mud at the bottom of the pond. its initial volume is  0.5 cm3.    ignoring any temperature differences in the water, calculate the volume of the bubble as it reaches the surface.  volume =  ...[2]   (iv) in fact, the temperature of the water is greater at the top than at the bottom of the pond.    comment on the bubble volume you have calculated in (b)(iii). ... ... ...[1]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 the circuit of fig. 4.1 is set up to run a small immersion heater from a 6.0 v battery. x heater6.0 v a fig. 4.1  (a) state the name and purpose of component x. name  .purpose  .[1]  (b) the heater is designed to work from a 3.6 v supply.  it has a power rating of 4.5 w at this  voltage.   (i) calculate the current in the heater when it has the correct potential difference across it.  current =  ...[2]   (ii) calculate the resistance of component x if there is to be the correct potential difference across the heater. the battery and the ammeter both have zero resistance.  resistance =  ...[3]  (c) some time after the heater is switched on, the ammeter reading is seen to have decreased.   suggest why this happens.  ...  ...[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (d) as an alternative to running the heater from a battery, it is decided to construct a circuit to  enable it to be operated from the a.c. mains supply.   name the electrical component needed to   (i) reduce the potential difference from that of the mains supply down to a potential difference  suitable for the heater,  ...[1]   (ii) change the current from a.c. to a current which has only one direction. ...[1]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 the manufacturer\u2019s label on an electric heater is as shown in fig. 5.1. c.i.e. electrical company suitable for use on 110 v , 60 hz supply 1 kw/ 2 kw this appliance must be earthed when in use fig. 5.1  (a) state what electrical quantity is represented by   (i) 110 v,    (ii) 60 hz,    (iii) 1 kw.  [1]  (b) (i) which part of the electric heater must be earthed?  ...[1]   (ii) explain what the hazard might be if the heater is not earthed. ... ... ...[2]  (c) the heater has two 110 v heating elements, with two switches, so that either one or both  elements may be switched on.   in the space below, draw a circuit diagram showing how the heating elements and switches  are connected to the mains supply.   use the symbol   for each heating element.  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over6 (a) six different nuclides have nucleon and proton numbers as follows: nuclide nucleon number proton number a 214 84 b 214 85 c 211 84d 211 86 e 210 82 f 210 83   state which two nuclides are isotopes of the same element. .. and . [1]  (b) thorium-232 has a half-life of 1.4 \u00d7 10 10 years.   at a particular instant, the activity of a sample of thorium-232 is 120 bq.  (i) calculate the time taken for the activity of this sample to fall to 15 bq.  time taken  ...[1]  (ii) explain why, when the activity has become 15 bq, much of the sample will no longer be  thorium-232.  ... ... ...[1]   (iii) the sample of thorium-232 is used in an experiment in a laboratory.    explain why its activity may be regarded as constant. ... ... ...[1]  [total: 4]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20117 (a) the speed of light in air is known to be 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s.   outline how you would use a refraction experiment to deduce the speed of light in glass.  y ou  may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.  ...  ... ... ... ... ...[4]  (b) a tsunami is a giant water wave. it may be caused by an earthquake below the ocean.   waves from a certain tsunami have a wavelength of 1.9 \u00d7 10 5 m and a speed of 240 m  / s.   (i) calculate the frequency of the tsunami waves.  frequency =  ...[2]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) the shock wave from the earthquake travels at 2.5 \u00d7 103 m / s.    the centre of the earthquake is 6.0 \u00d7 105 m from the coast of a country.    calculate how much warning of the arrival of the tsunami at the coast is given by the  earth tremor felt at the coast.  warning time =  ...[4]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20118 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a section of an optical fibre. it consists of a fibre of denser transparent material,  coated with a layer of a less dense transparent material. ray denser materialless dense material fig. 8.1   one ray within the fibre has been started for you on fig. 8.1.   (i) state and explain what happens to the ray already drawn, after it reaches the boundary  between the materials.  ... ... ...[2]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, carefully continue the ray until it reaches the end of the section of optical  fibre. [1]  (b) fibre-optic cables are sometimes used to carry out internal examinations on the human stomach.   (i) suggest one reason why the cable is made of thousands of very thin optical fibres.  ... ... ...[1]   (ii) describe briefly how the inside of the stomach is illuminated. ... ... ...[1]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (iii) describe briefly how the light from the stomach is transferred to the detecting equipment  outside the body.  ... ... ...[1]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 a simple motor is made in a school laboratory.  a coil of wire is mounted on an axle between the  poles of a horseshoe magnet, as illustrated in fig. 9.1. battery+\u2013springy contacts (brushes)coil bc d ans fig. 9.1  (a) at the instant illustrated in fig. 9.1, the coil abcd is horizontal and the battery is connected as shown.   (i) for this position, state the direction of the force on ab and the direction of the motion of ab. force on ab  direction of motion of ab  ...[1]   (ii) explain why bc does not contribute to the turning force on the coil. ... ...[1]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) at the instant when the coil is vertical, the springy contacts do not, in fact, make contact with  the ends of the coil.   describe and explain what happens to the coil.  ...  ... ... ...[2]  (c) the motor in fig. 9.1 does not rotate very quickly. the designer of a commercial motor is  required to produce a faster-rotating motor.   suggest one change that could be made to increase the speed of the motor.  ...  ...[1]  [total: 5]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 201110 (a) a cathode-ray oscilloscope makes use of the process known as thermionic emission.   describe what happens during this process.  ...  ... ...[1]  (b) in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.   include in your diagram the tube, the cathode, the accelerating anode, the focusing anode  and both x- and y -plates. do not attempt to show any external circuits.  [3]  (c) a cathode ray is a beam of electrons.   suggest one way of controlling the number of electrons in the beam.  ... ...[1]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (d) one cathode-ray tube has 5000 v between the accelerating anode and the cathode.   the beam of electrons carries a total charge of 0.0095 c in 5.0 s.   calculate  (i) the current caused by the beam,  current =  ...[2]  (ii) the energy transferred by the beam in 20 s.  energy =  ...[2] [total: 9] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "20": "20 0625/31/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 201111 a mass of 0.36 kg of a certain substance is in the solid state in a well-insulated container. the  substance is heated at the rate of 1.2 \u00d7 104 j / minute.  2.0 minutes after starting the heating, the substance is all at the same temperature, and it starts to melt.  11.0 minutes after starting the heating, the substance finishes melting and the temperature starts to rise again.  (a) calculate the specific latent heat of the substance.  specific latent heat =  ...[3]  (b) (i) after 11 minutes of heating, when the temperature starts rising again, in which state is  the substance?  ...[1]   (ii) describe what happens to the molecules as thermal energy is supplied to them in this  state.  ... ... ... ...[2]  [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (leo/dj) 28932/5 \u00a9 ucles 2010 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *7530465199* physics 0625/32 paper 3 extended may/june 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 (a) complete the table below to identify the physical quantities as scalars or vectors. physical quantity scalar or vector speed  velocity distance force kinetic energy  [3]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows the path of a football as it is kicked along the ground between three players.  the distances between the players are shown on fig. 1.1. a cb18 m 21 m fig. 1.1   the ball takes 1.2 s to travel from player a to player b.   (i) calculate the average speed of the ball between a and b.  average speed =  ...[2]   (ii) player b kicks the ball to player c.    it travels with the same average speed.     calculate the time taken for the ball to travel from b to c.  time =  ...[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (iii) suggest why the speed of the ball might change during its motion from a to b.  ... ...[1]   (iv) discuss whether the average velocities, from a to b and from b to c, are the same. ... ... ...[1]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20112 fig. 2.1 shows a conveyor belt transporting a package to a raised platform. the belt is driven by a  motor.  package motorconveyor belt fig. 2.1  (a) state three types of energy, other than gravitational potential energy, into which the electrical  energy supplied to the motor is converted.  1.  ...2.  ...3.  ...[2]  (b) the mass of the package is 36 kg. calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy  (p.e.) of the package when it is raised through a vertical height of 2.4 m.   increase in p.e. =  ...[2]  (c) the package is raised through the vertical height of 2.4 m in 4.4 s. calculate the power needed to raise the package.  power =  .. [2]  (d) assume that the power available to raise packages is constant. a package of mass greater than 36 kg is raised through the same height. suggest and explain the effect of this increase in mass on the operation of the belt.  ... ... ... ... ...[3]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over3 (a) complete the following statement: the moment of a force about a point is   multiplied by  ..[1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a uniform iron bar b of weight 30 n and length 1.40 m. the bar is being used to  lift one edge of a concrete slab s. a stone, placed 0.20 m from one end of b, acts as a pivot. a force of 40 n pushing down at the other end of b is just enough to lift the slab and hold it as shown. 1.40  m force 40  niron bar b stoneconcrete slab s0.20  m fig. 3.1   (i) on fig. 3.1, draw an arrow to show the weight of bar b acting from its centre of mass. [1]   (ii) state the distance d of the centre of mass of bar b from the pivot.  d =  ...[1]   (iii) calculate the total clockwise moment, about the pivot, of the forces acting on bar b.  total clockwise moment =  ...[3]   (iv) calculate the downward force which the slab s exerts on the end of bar b.  force =  ...[2]   (v) suggest a change to the arrangement in fig. 3.1 that would reduce the force required to lift the slab.  ... ...[1]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 use the information in the table when answering this question. specific heat capacity of ice 2.0 j / (g \u00b0c) specific heat capacity of water 4.2 j / (g \u00b0c) specific latent heat of fusion of ice 330 j / g specific latent heat of vaporisation of water 2260 j / g  (a) explain what is meant by the statement: \u2018the specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 330 j / g\u2019.  ... ... ...[1]  (b) a block of ice is taken from a freezer at \u201325 \u00b0c, placed in a metal container, and heated by a  source of constant power.    the graph in fig. 4.1 shows how the temperature of the contents of the container changes  with time. at point e on the graph the container is empty. \u2013250 ab cd e 255075100 temperature / \u00b0c time fig. 4.1   (i) state what is taking place in the regions of the graph from b to c, and from d to e. b to c   ...d to e   ...[2]   (ii) use the information in the table to explain why the line de is longer than the line bc. ... ... ...[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (iii) use the information in the table to explain why the graph is steeper from a to b than from  c to d.  ... ... ...[2]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 fig. 5.1 shows a gas contained in a cylinder enclosed by a piston. gaspiston 100  cmpressure gauge cylinder fig. 5.1  at first, the length of cylinder containing the gas is 100 cm. the pressure of the gas, shown by the  pressure gauge, is 300 kpa. the area of cross-section of the cylinder is 0.12 m2.  (a) (i) describe the motion of the molecules of the gas.  ... ... ...[1]   (ii) explain how the molecules exert a force on the walls of the cylinder. ... ...[1]   (iii) calculate the force exerted by the gas on the piston.  force =  ...[2]  (b) the piston is moved so that the new length of cylinder occupied by the gas is 50 cm. the  temperature of the gas is unchanged.   (i) calculate the new pressure of the gas.  pressure =  ...[2]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) explain, in terms of the behaviour of the molecules, why the pressure has changed.  ... ... ...[1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20116 (a) (i) a long rope, fixed at one end, is being used by a student to demonstrate transverse  waves.    state what the student does to the rope to produce the transverse wave.   ... ...[1]   (ii) fig. 6.1 shows a section of the rope when the transverse wave is present. fig. 6.1    on fig. 6.1, show    1. a distance, labelled \u03bb, corresponding to the wavelength of the wave,    2. a distance, labelled a, corresponding to the amplitude of the wave. [2]     (iii) suggest what the student could do to reduce the wavelength of the wave.  ... ...[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) the diagram in fig. 6.2 represents waves on the surface of water in a ripple tank. the waves  are travelling from deep water across a boundary into shallow water. deep water shallow water fig. 6.2   explain how the diagram shows that water waves travel more slowly in shallow water than in  deep water.  ... ...  ... .. [3]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20117 (a) what is meant by the focal length of a converging lens?  ...  ...[1]  (b) an object is placed in front of a converging lens. a real image is formed, as shown in fig. 7.1.  the converging lens is not shown. a object image b fig. 7.1   (i) explain what is meant by a real image.  ...[1]   (ii) rays of light from point a on the object form point b on the image.    on fig. 6.1, draw    1.  a ray to find the position of the converging lens, showing the lens as a vertical straight line in this position,    2. a ray to find the position of a principal focus of the lens, marking this position f,    3. a third possible ray from a to b. [3]   (iii) the distance between the object and the lens is increased. state any changes which  take place in    1. the distance of the image from the lens,  ...    2. the size of the image.  ...[2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over8 (a) what is meant by the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of an electric power supply?  ...  ...[2]  (b) when connected to a 240 v supply, a desk lamp has a power rating of 60 w.   calculate  (i) the current in the lamp,  current =  ...[2]    (ii) the resistance of the lamp\u2019s filament.  resistance =  ...[2]  (c) a torch lamp is normally connected to a 3.0 v battery and carries a current of 0.25 a. the  resistance of its filament is 12 \u03c9.   the desk lamp in (b) and the torch lamp are connected in series.   students x and y plan to connect the lamp combination to a 240 v supply.  student x says that the filament of the torch lamp will melt and the circuit will no longer work.  student y says that both lamps will light up and stay on.   show, with a suitable calculation, whether student x or student y is correct.  ... ...[2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a wire, held between the poles of a magnet, carrying a current in the direction  of the arrow. current s n fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, draw an arrow, labelled f, to show the direction of the force acting on the wire. [1]   (ii) explain why the force f acts on the wire.  ... ...[1]   (iii) the directions of the current and the magnetic field are both reversed. state the effect on  the force f.  .. [1]  (b) fig. 9.2 shows a negatively charged particle travelling, in a vacuum, into a region where a  magnetic field acts. the magnetic field, shown by the crosses, is acting into the paper. \u2013 p fig. 9.2   (i) draw an arrow, labelled f, to show the direction of the force on the particle at point p where it enters the field.   (ii) describe the path of the particle as it continues to move through the magnetic field.  ...[2]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over10 (a) in the space below, draw the symbol for an or gate.  [1]  (b) describe the action of an or gate in terms of its inputs and outputs.  ... ... ... ... ...[2]  (c) a car manufacturer wishes to install an alarm system in a 2-door car to inform the driver if  either door is not properly closed. an or gate is to be used in the construction of this system.   describe suitable input and output arrangements for the gate.  ...  ... ... ... ... ...[3]  [total: 6] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) an atom consists of a nucleus made up of protons and neutrons, surrounded by orbiting  electrons.   (i) which of these particles has a positive charge? .[1]   (ii) which two of these particles have almost equal mass?  . and . [1]  (b) a silver nucleus is denoted by 107 47 ag. state the number of protons and the number of neutrons  in this nucleus.    number of protons = .              number of neutrons = . [2]  (c) the graph in fig. 11.1 shows part of the decay curve of a radioactive nuclide. the count rate is plotted against time. 00100200300 count rate counts / s 5 1 01 52 0 time  / hours25 30 fig. 11.1   (i) use the graph to find the half-life of this nuclide.  half-life = ...[1]   (ii) plot two more points on fig. 11.1 at times greater than 10 hours. use a dot in a circle to  indicate each point. [2]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nh/dj) 43389 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. *1803424254* physics 0625/33 paper 3 extended may/june 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 (a) complete the table below to identify the physical quantities as scalars or vectors. physical quantity scalar or vector speed  velocity distance force kinetic energy  [3]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows the path of a football as it is kicked along the ground between three players.  the distances between the players are shown on fig. 1.1. a cb18 m 21 m fig. 1.1   the ball takes 1.2 s to travel from player a to player b.   (i) calculate the average speed of the ball between a and b.  average speed =  ...[2]   (ii) player b kicks the ball to player c.    it travels with the same average speed.     calculate the time taken for the ball to travel from b to c.  time =  ...[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (iii) suggest why the speed of the ball might change during its motion from a to b.  ... ...[1]   (iv) discuss whether the average velocities, from a to b and from b to c, are the same. ... ... ...[1]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20112 fig. 2.1 shows a conveyor belt transporting a package to a raised platform. the belt is driven by a  motor.  package motorconveyor belt fig. 2.1  (a) state three types of energy, other than gravitational potential energy, into which the electrical  energy supplied to the motor is converted.  1.  ...2.  ...3.  ...[2]  (b) the mass of the package is 36 kg. calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy  (p.e.) of the package when it is raised through a vertical height of 2.4 m.   increase in p.e. =  ...[2]  (c) the package is raised through the vertical height of 2.4 m in 4.4 s. calculate the power needed to raise the package.  power =  .. [2]  (d) assume that the power available to raise packages is constant. a package of mass greater than 36 kg is raised through the same height. suggest and explain the effect of this increase in mass on the operation of the belt.  ... ... ... ... ...[3]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over3 (a) complete the following statement: the moment of a force about a point is   multiplied by  ..[1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a uniform iron bar b of weight 30 n and length 1.40 m. the bar is being used to  lift one edge of a concrete slab s. a stone, placed 0.20 m from one end of b, acts as a pivot. a force of 40 n pushing down at the other end of b is just enough to lift the slab and hold it as shown. 1.40  m force 40  niron bar b stoneconcrete slab s0.20  m fig. 3.1   (i) on fig. 3.1, draw an arrow to show the weight of bar b acting from its centre of mass. [1]   (ii) state the distance d of the centre of mass of bar b from the pivot.  d =  ...[1]   (iii) calculate the total clockwise moment, about the pivot, of the forces acting on bar b.  total clockwise moment =  ...[3]   (iv) calculate the downward force which the slab s exerts on the end of bar b.  force =  ...[2]   (v) suggest a change to the arrangement in fig. 3.1 that would reduce the force required to lift the slab.  ... ...[1]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 use the information in the table when answering this question. specific heat capacity of ice 2.0 j / (g \u00b0c) specific heat capacity of water 4.2 j / (g \u00b0c) specific latent heat of fusion of ice 330 j / g specific latent heat of vaporisation of water 2260 j / g  (a) explain what is meant by the statement: \u2018the specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 330 j / g\u2019.  ... ... ...[1]  (b) a block of ice is taken from a freezer at \u201325 \u00b0c, placed in a metal container, and heated by a  source of constant power.    the graph in fig. 4.1 shows how the temperature of the contents of the container changes  with time. at point e on the graph the container is empty. \u2013250 ab cd e 255075100 temperature / \u00b0c time fig. 4.1   (i) state what is taking place in the regions of the graph from b to c, and from d to e. b to c   ...d to e   ...[2]   (ii) use the information in the table to explain why the line de is longer than the line bc. ... ... ...[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (iii) use the information in the table to explain why the graph is steeper from a to b than from  c to d.  ... ... ...[2]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 fig. 5.1 shows a gas contained in a cylinder enclosed by a piston. gaspiston 100  cmpressure gauge cylinder fig. 5.1  at first, the length of cylinder containing the gas is 100 cm. the pressure of the gas, shown by the  pressure gauge, is 300 kpa. the area of cross-section of the cylinder is 0.12 m2.  (a) (i) describe the motion of the molecules of the gas.  ... ... ...[1]   (ii) explain how the molecules exert a force on the walls of the cylinder. ... ...[1]   (iii) calculate the force exerted by the gas on the piston.  force =  ...[2]  (b) the piston is moved so that the new length of cylinder occupied by the gas is 50 cm. the  temperature of the gas is unchanged.   (i) calculate the new pressure of the gas.  pressure =  ...[2]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) explain, in terms of the behaviour of the molecules, why the pressure has changed.  ... ... ...[1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20116 (a) (i) a long rope, fixed at one end, is being used by a student to demonstrate transverse  waves.    state what the student does to the rope to produce the transverse wave.   ... ...[1]   (ii) fig. 6.1 shows a section of the rope when the transverse wave is present. fig. 6.1    on fig. 6.1, show    1. a distance, labelled \u03bb, corresponding to the wavelength of the wave,    2. a distance, labelled a, corresponding to the amplitude of the wave. [2]     (iii) suggest what the student could do to reduce the wavelength of the wave.  ... ...[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) the diagram in fig. 6.2 represents waves on the surface of water in a ripple tank. the waves  are travelling from deep water across a boundary into shallow water. deep water shallow water fig. 6.2   explain how the diagram shows that water waves travel more slowly in shallow water than in  deep water.  ... ...  ... .. [3]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20117 (a) what is meant by the focal length of a converging lens?  ...  ...[1]  (b) an object is placed in front of a converging lens. a real image is formed, as shown in fig. 7.1.  the converging lens is not shown. a object image b fig. 7.1   (i) explain what is meant by a real image.  ...[1]   (ii) rays of light from point a on the object form point b on the image.    on fig. 6.1, draw    1.  a ray to find the position of the converging lens, showing the lens as a vertical straight line in this position,    2. a ray to find the position of a principal focus of the lens, marking this position f,    3. a third possible ray from a to b. [3]   (iii) the distance between the object and the lens is increased. state any changes which  take place in    1. the distance of the image from the lens,  ...    2. the size of the image.  ...[2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over8 (a) what is meant by the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of an electric power supply?  ...  ...[2]  (b) when connected to a 240 v supply, a desk lamp has a power rating of 60 w.   calculate  (i) the current in the lamp,  current =  ...[2]    (ii) the resistance of the lamp\u2019s filament.  resistance =  ...[2]  (c) a torch lamp is normally connected to a 3.0 v battery and carries a current of 0.25 a. the  resistance of its filament is 12 \u03c9.   the desk lamp in (b) and the torch lamp are connected in series.   students x and y plan to connect the lamp combination to a 240 v supply.  student x says that the filament of the torch lamp will melt and the circuit will no longer work.  student y says that both lamps will light up and stay on.   show, with a suitable calculation, whether student x or student y is correct.  ... ...[2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a wire, held between the poles of a magnet, carrying a current in the direction  of the arrow. current s n fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, draw an arrow, labelled f, to show the direction of the force acting on the wire. [1]   (ii) explain why the force f acts on the wire.  ... ...[1]   (iii) the directions of the current and the magnetic field are both reversed. state the effect on  the force f.  .. [1]  (b) fig. 9.2 shows a negatively charged particle travelling, in a vacuum, into a region where a  magnetic field acts. the magnetic field, shown by the crosses, is acting into the paper. \u2013 p fig. 9.2   (i) draw an arrow, labelled f, to show the direction of the force on the particle at point p where it enters the field.   (ii) describe the path of the particle as it continues to move through the magnetic field.  ...[2]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over10 (a) in the space below, draw the symbol for an or gate.  [1]  (b) describe the action of an or gate in terms of its inputs and outputs.  ... ... ... ... ...[2]  (c) a car manufacturer wishes to install an alarm system in a 2-door car to inform the driver if  either door is not properly closed. an or gate is to be used in the construction of this system.   describe suitable input and output arrangements for the gate.  ...  ... ... ... ... ...[3]  [total: 6] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) an atom consists of a nucleus made up of protons and neutrons, surrounded by orbiting  electrons.   (i) which of these particles has a positive charge? .[1]   (ii) which two of these particles have almost equal mass?  . and . [1]  (b) a silver nucleus is denoted by 107 47 ag. state the number of protons and the number of neutrons  in this nucleus.    number of protons = .              number of neutrons = . [2]  (c) the graph in fig. 11.1 shows part of the decay curve of a radioactive nuclide. the count rate is plotted against time. 00100200300 count rate counts / s 5 1 01 52 0 time  / hours25 30 fig. 11.1   (i) use the graph to find the half-life of this nuclide.  half-life = ...[1]   (ii) plot two more points on fig. 11.1 at times greater than 10 hours. use a dot in a circle to  indicate each point. [2]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/dj) 28930/6 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *8805948644* physics 0625/51 paper 5  practical test may/june 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment you are to determine the position of the centre of mass of a triangular  card.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. cork ba cpin or nail card plumblinestand fig. 1.1  y ou are provided with a small mass attached to a length of thread. this is referred to as the plumbline.  (a) measure and record the lengths of the three sides of the triangular sheet of card.  length 1 =  ..  length 2 =  ..  length 3 =  . [1]  (b) (i) hang the card on the nail through hole a.   (ii) hang the plumbline from the nail so that it is close to the card but not touching it.   (iii) when the card and plumbline are still, make a small mark at the edge of the card where the plumbline crosses the edge.   (iv) remove the card and draw a line from the mark to hole a.  (c) repeat the steps in (b) using hole b.  (d) repeat the steps in (b) using hole c.",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use (e) place your card in the space below and draw around its outline.",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use on your diagram on page 4,   (i) show the positions of each of the holes a, b and c with a small, neat circle. label  each circle with the appropriate letter ( a, b or c),   (ii) show the positions of each of the marks you made in (b)(iii) with a small neat cross  (\u2715),   (iii) draw the lines between the positions of the holes a, b and c and the corresponding marks, as on your sheet of card.  [5]  (f) if the experiment is completely accurate, the centre of mass of the card is at the position where the three lines meet.   on your diagram judge the best position for the centre of mass.   draw a line from this position to the right-angled corner of the card and measure the  distance a between the centre of mass and the right-angled corner of the card.  a =  . [3]  (g) in this experiment it is important that the card is able to swing freely. for this reason the  plumbline should not touch the card, but be a small distance from the card. this could cause an inaccuracy in marking the card at the correct position (part (b)(iii)).   describe how you minimised the possible inaccuracy. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment you will investigate the rate of cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. y ou are provided with a beaker of hot  water. thermometer beaker hot water fig. 2.1  (a) (i) place the thermometer into the water as shown in fig. 2.1.   (ii) when the temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising, record the temperature  \u03b8  in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s and immediately start the stopclock.   (iii) record in the table the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals from t  = 30 s until  you have a total of seven values up to t = 180 s. table 2.1 t / \u03b8 / 0  (b) complete the column headings in the table.  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) calculate the temperature fall  t1 during the first 30 s of cooling.  t1 =  ..   (ii) calculate the temperature fall  t2 during the final 30 s of cooling.  t2 =  ..   [1]  (d) plot the graph of temperature ( y-axis) against time (x-axis).   [4]  (e) (i) state how the rate of cooling in the first 30 s differs from the rate of cooling in the  final 30 s.  .. ..   (ii) explain how the graph line shows this difference. .. ..   [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment you will measure the currents in lamps in a circuit.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. av power source lamp 1 lamp 2 fig. 3.1  (a) the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 is set up for you.   switch on.   record in table 3.1 the potential difference v across the lamps and the current i in  lamp 1.   switch off.  [1]  (b) rearrange the circuit so that the ammeter is connected in series with lamp 2.   switch on, and record in the table the potential difference v across the lamps and the  current i in lamp 2.   switch off.  [1] table 3.1 v / i / r / lamp 1 lamp 2  (c) (i) calculate the resistance r of each lamp, using the equation r = v i  and enter the  results in the table.",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) add together the two values of r to calculate rs, the sum of the resistances.  rs =  ..   (iii) complete the column headings in the table.   [3]  (d) rearrange the circuit so that the lamps and the ammeter are all in series. do not change  the position of the voltmeter.   (i) record the readings on the voltmeter and the ammeter.  voltmeter reading =  ..  ammeter reading =  ..  (ii) use the voltmeter and ammeter readings to calculate r t the combined resistance  of the two lamps in series.  rt =  . [2]  (e) a student suggests that the values of rs and rt should be equal.   state whether your results support this suggestion and justify your statement by  reference to the calculated values.statement  .justification  ... . [2]  (f) state, without reference to the values of resistance that you have calculated, one piece of  evidence that you have observed during the experiment that shows that the temperature of the lamp filaments changes.  .. . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment you will investigate the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. eyeray trace sheet 12.0  cm 10.0  cmcard d cbmr n a fig. 4.1  (a) draw a line 10 cm long near the top of the ray trace sheet. label the line mr. draw a  normal to this line at its centre. label the normal nl.  (b) draw a line 10 cm long that is parallel to line mr and 12 cm below it. label this line cd.  (c) place the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on the line mr.  (d) place the card so that it stands  vertically with end b at c and such that the card is at  right angles to line cd (see fig. 4.1). draw a line along the edge of the card and label the line ab.  (e) remove the card and the mirror.  draw a line from the edge a of the card to the point n.  replace the card and the mirror.  (f) place a pin p 1 on line an. label the position of p1.  (g) view the image of the edge a of the card in the mirror from the direction indicated by the  eye in fig. 4.1. place two pins p2 and p3 some distance apart so that pins p3, p2 and  the reflections of p1 and the edge a of the card, all appear exactly one behind the other.  label the positions of p2 and p3.  (h) remove the pins and the mirror and draw in the line joining the positions of p2 and p3.   continue the line until it meets the normal.",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use (i) measure and record in table 4.1 the angle of incidence i between the line an and the  normal. measure, and record in the table, the angle of reflection r between the normal  and the line passing through p2 and p3. table 4.1 edge i / \u00b0 r / \u00b0 a b   [3]  (j) repeat the steps (e) \u2013 (i) but using edge b of the card instead of edge a.  (k) in spite of carrying out this experiment with care, it is possible that the values of the  angle of reflection r will not be exactly the same as the values obtained from theory.  suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy. 1.  .. ..2.  .. . [2]  tie in your ray trace sheet between pages 10 and 11.   [5]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (ac/dj) 28852/6 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *8465882130* physics 0625/52 paper 5  practical test may/june 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment you will investigate the loading of a metre rule.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. 50.0  cm mark string metre ruleforcemeterclamp bench fig. 1.1  y ou are provided with a metre rule that is attached at one end to the bench. the other end is  supported by a forcemeter. do not change the position of the forcemeter or move the end of the rule that is attached to the bench. y ou are also provided with a range of masses.   (a) without placing a mass on the rule, record in table 1.1 the reading f on the forcemeter.   (b) place a 100 g mass on the rule at the 50.0 cm mark shown in fig. 1.1. record in the table the value of the mass m and the reading f on the forcemeter.  (c) repeat step (b) using masses of 200 g, 300 g, 400 g and 500 g. table 1.1 m  / g f  / n 0  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) plot a graph of f / n (y-axis) against m / g (x-axis).  [4]  (e) use the graph to find the value of f when m = 375 g. show clearly on the graph how you  obtained the result.  f =  ... [2]  (f) the forcemeter shows a reading when no mass has been added to the metre rule. assuming that the forcemeter has no zero error, suggest a reason for the reading. suggested reason . . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment you will investigate the rate of cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. y ou are provided with a supply of hot  water. thermometer water test-tube fig. 2.1  (a) measure and record room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  ..  [1]  (b) pour hot water into the test-tube until it is about two thirds full of water. place the thermometer in the water.  (c) (i) when the thermometer reading stops rising, measure the temperature  \u03b8 of the  water in the test-tube and immediately start the stopclock. record \u03b8 in table 2.1 at  time t = 0 s.   (ii) record in the table the time t and the temperature \u03b8 of the water every 30 s until  you have a total of seven readings.  (d) remove the thermometer and pour away the water from the test-tube. wrap the cotton wool round the test-tube and secure it with the elastic bands. repeat the steps in (b) and (c).   (e) complete the time and temperature column headings in the table.",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s usetable 2.1 t  /tube without cotton wool \u03b8  /tube with cotton wool \u03b8  / 0      [5]  (f) state in which experiment the cooling was more rapid. justify your answer by reference  to your readings. experiment justification  .. ..[2]  (g) if these experiments were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be  important to control the conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  . [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment you will investigate the resistance of a wire in different circuit  arrangements.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you.  a metre rulepower source ad bc v fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across the section of wire ab. switch off.   (ii) record in the table the length l of the wire ab.    (iii) calculate the resistance r of the section of wire ab using the equation r = v i .      record this value of r in the table.   (iv) complete the column headings in the table.   (v) repeat steps (i) \u2013 (iii) with the voltmeter connected across section ac  of the wire.   (vi) repeat steps (i) \u2013 (iii) with the voltmeter connected across section ad of the wire. table 3.1 voltmeter  connected  acrossl / i / v  / r  / ab ac ad  [7]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) it is suggested that the resistance of the wire ab should be half the resistance of the  wire ad. state whether your results support this suggestion and justify your answer with  reference to your results. statement ..justification  ..[2]  (c) it is known that changes in temperature affect the resistance of the wire. suggest how  you can limit the temperature changes when carrying out this experiment.  .. . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment you will investigate the refraction of light through a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. eyesheet of paperc h gfn p3p2p1 n'db ae p430\u00b0hole fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the sheet of plain paper supplied.  the block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw and label the outline abcd of the block.  (b) remove the block and draw the normal nn' to side ab so that the normal is 2.0 cm from a. label the point f where nn' crosses ab and g where it crosses dc.  (c) draw the line ef at an angle of 30\u00b0 to the normal, as shown in fig. 4.1. . (d) place the paper on the pin board.  (e) place two pins p 1 and p2 on line ef as shown in fig. 4.1.  (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block  so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. place two pins p3 and  p4 between your eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the images of p1 and p2, seen  through the block, appear one behind the other. mark and label the positions of p1, p2,  p3 and p4. remove the block.",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use (g) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd. label  this point h.   (h) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =  ... [1]  (i) draw the line hf.  (j) measure and record the length b of the line hf.  b =  [1]   (k) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation n = b 2a .   n =  ... [2]  (l) this experiment can be carried out using a ray of light, produced by a ray box, instead of  by using optical pins. a student suggests that the ray box method will be more accurate. assuming that the experiment is carried out with care, suggest one possible cause of inaccuracy using the optical pin method and one using the ray box method. optical pin method  ..ray box method   . [2]  tie your ray trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9. [4]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (leo/sw) 28913/4 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9096717360* physics 0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2011  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use1 an igcse student is determining the position of the centre of mass of a triangular card.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1. cork ba cpin or nail card plumblinestand fig. 1.1  (a) the student hangs the card on the nail through hole a. he checks that the card is able  to swing freely and then hangs the plumbline from the nail so that it is close to, but not  touching, the card. when the card and plumbline are still, he makes a small mark at the edge of the card where the plumbline crosses the edge. he removes the card and draws a line from the mark to hole a.   he repeats the procedure using holes b and c.    fig.1.2 is a drawing of the card.",
            "3": "3 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use cba fig.1.2   on fig.1.2, the position of each of the marks the student makes is shown with a small  cross. on fig. 1.2, draw in the lines between the positions of the holes a, b and c and  the corresponding crosses on the card. [2]  (b) if the experiment is completely accurate, the centre of mass of the card is at the position  where the three lines meet. on fig. 1.2, judge the best position for the centre of mass,  marking it with a small cross. draw a line from this position to the right-angled corner of the card and measure the distance a between the centre of mass and the right-angled  corner of the card.  a =  [3]  (c) in this experiment, it is important that the card is able to swing freely. for this reason, the plumbline should not touch the card but be a small distance from it. this could cause an inaccuracy in marking the card at the correct position. describe how you would minimise this possible inaccuracy. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  ..[1]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 2.1. thermometer beaker water fig. 2.1  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r as shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.2. \u2013100102030405060708090100110\u00b0c fig. 2.2  \u03b8r =  [1]  (b) the beaker contains 200 cm3 of hot water. a student takes temperature readings as the  water cools, as shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 t / \u03b8 / 07 9 30 65 60 58 90 55 120 53 150 52 180 51",
            "5": "5 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use  (i) complete the column headings in table 2.1.   (ii) calculate the temperature fall t1 during the first 30 s of cooling.  t1 =     (iii) calculate the temperature fall t2 during the final 30 s of cooling.  t2 =  [3]  (c) plot the graph of temperature (y-axis) against time (x-axis).  [5]  (d) (i) state how the rate of cooling in the first 30 s differs from that in the final 30 s.   .. ..   (ii) explain how the graph line shows this difference. .. .. [2]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is measuring the currents in lamps in different circuits.  the first circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. av power source lamp 1 lamp 2 fig. 3.1  (a) a student records the potential difference v across the lamps and the current i in  lamp 1. she rearranges the circuit so that the ammeter is connected in series with lamp 2 and again records the potential difference v across the lamps and the current i in lamp 2.   the readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 v / i / r / lamp 1 1.9 0.35 lamp 2 1.9 0.32   (i) calculate the resistance r of each lamp, using the equation r = v i, and enter the  results in the table.   (ii) add together the two values of r to calculate rs, the sum of the resistances of the  two lamps.  rs =     (iii) complete the column headings in the table.  [3]",
            "7": "7 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use (b) the student rearranges the circuit so that the lamps and the ammeter are in series. she  does not change the position of the voltmeter.   she records the readings on the voltmeter and the ammeter. voltmeter reading...1.9 v ammeter reading...0.23 a   (i) draw a circuit diagram of the rearranged circuit using conventional symbols.   (ii) use the voltmeter and ammeter readings to calculate rt , the combined resistance  of the two lamps in series.  rt =  [3]  (c) a student suggests that the values of rs and rt should be equal. state whether the  results support this suggestion and justify your statement by reference to the calculated values. statement  .justification  ...  .[2]  (d) state, without reference to the values of resistance that you have calculated, one piece  of evidence that the student can observe during the experiment that shows that the temperature of the lamp filaments changes.  .. ..[1]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating reflection of light using a plane mirror.  a student has set up a ray trace sheet and this is shown in fig. 4.1. the line mr shows the  position of a plane mirror. mrn p3 p4 eyemirror fig. 4.1  (a) (i) draw a normal to line mr at n.   (ii) draw a line 10 cm long that is parallel to line mr and 12 cm below it. the ends of this line must be at the same distance from the edges of the page as the ends of line mr. label this line cd with c directly below m. [3]  (b) the student places a pin p 1 so that it stands vertically at c . he places another pin p2 as  close as possible to the point n.   (i) draw a line from c to n.   (ii) measure and record the angle of incidence i between the line cn and the normal.  i =  [2]",
            "9": "9 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use (c) the student views the image in the mirror of the pin p1 from the direction indicated by  the eye in fig. 4.1. he places two pins p3 and p4 some distance apart so that pins p4,  p3, p2 and the image of p1 all appear exactly one behind the other. the positions of p3  and p4 are shown on fig. 4.1.   (i) draw in the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets  the normal.   (ii) measure and record the angle of reflection r between the normal and line p3p4.  r =  [2]  (d) several students found that, in spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable  care, the measured value of the angle of reflection r was not exactly the same as the value obtained from theory.   suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy. 1.  ..  ..2.  .. ..[2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/61/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use5 table 5.1 shows some measurements taken by three igcse students. the second column  shows the values recorded by the three students. for each quantity, underline the value most likely to be correct.  the first one is done for you. table 5.1 quantity measured recorded values the mass of a wooden metre rule 0.112 kg 1.12 kg11.2 kg the diameter of a test tube 0.15 cm 1.5 cm 15 cm the volume of a coffee cup 10 cm 3 100 cm3 1000 cm3 the area of a computer keyboard 0.07 m2 0.70 m2 7.0 m2 the current in a 1.5 v torch lamp at normal brightness0.12 a 12 a 120 a the circumference of a 250 cm 3 beaker 2.3 cm 23 cm 230 cm  [5]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (cw/dj) 28877/3 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *3941613923* physics 0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2011  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is investigating the loading of a metre rule.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. 50.0  cm mark string metre ruleforcemeterclamp bench fig. 1.1  (a) a metre rule is attached at one end to the bench. the other end is supported by a  forcemeter.   a student records in table 1.1 the reading f on the forcemeter.   he places a 100 g mass on the rule at the 50.0 cm mark and records in the table the  value of the reading f on the forcemeter. he repeats the procedure using masses of  200 g, 300 g, 400 g and 500 g. the forcemeter readings are shown in the table.   write the mass values in the table. table 1.1 m   / g f  / n 0 1.10 1.852.202.953.504.20  [1]",
            "3": "3 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of f  / n (y-axis) against m   / g (x-axis).  [5]  (c) use the graph to find the value of f when m = 375 g. show clearly on the graph how you  obtained the result.  f =  [2]  (d) the forcemeter shows a reading when no mass has been added to the metre rule. assuming that the forcemeter has no zero error, suggest a reason for the reading.  .. ..[1] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus. thermometer water test-tube fig. 2.1  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r as shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.2. -10010203040506070809010 0110\u00b0c fig. 2.2  \u03b8r =  [1]",
            "5": "5 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use (b) a student pours hot water into the test-tube until it is about two thirds full of water and  places the thermometer in the water. when the thermometer reading stops rising, she measures the temperature  \u03b8 of the water and records \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0. she  starts a stopclock and records in the table the time t and the temperature \u03b8 of the water  every 30 s. she removes the thermometer and pours away the water from the test-tube. she then wraps cotton wool insulation round the test-tube and repeats the procedure.   (i) complete the time and temperature column headings in the table.   (ii) complete the time column in the table. table 2.1 t  / tube without  cotton wool \u03b8  /tube with  cotton wool \u03b8  / 07 9 8 0 65 67 58 6055 5753 5652 5551 54  [2]  (c) state in which experiment the cooling is more rapid. justify your answer by reference to  the readings. experiment  ...justification  ... ..[2]  (d) if these experiments were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be  important to control the conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  (e) suggest two alternative insulating materials that could be used in place of cotton wool.1.  ..2.  ..[2] [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit. a metre rulepower source ad bc v fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across the section of wire  ab. he records the length l of the wire ab. he repeats the procedure with the voltmeter  connected across section ac of the wire and then with the voltmeter connected across  section ad of the wire. the readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 voltmeter connected across l  / i / v / r / ab 50 0.21 0.9 ac 75 0.22 1.4 ad 100 0.20 1.7   (i) calculate the values of resistance r for each length of wire using the equation    r = v i. enter the values in the table.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [3]  (b) it is suggested that the resistance across ab should be half the resistance across ad.  state whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..[2]  (c) it is known that changes in temperature affect the resistance of the wire. state how you  can limit the temperature changes when carrying out this experiment.  ..  ..[1]",
            "7": "7 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use (d) the student wishes to use a lower current so he adds a variable resistor to the circuit.   (i) draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor.   (ii) on fig. 3.1, mark with an x a suitable position in the circuit for the variable resistor.  [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating the refraction of light through a transparent block.  fig. 4.1 shows a student\u2019s ray trace sheet. it is not drawn full size. eyesheet of paperc gfn p3p2p1 n'db ae p4 fig. 4.1  (a) the student places a transparent block, largest face down, on a sheet of plain paper  and draws the outline abcd of the block. she removes the block and draws the normal nn' to side ab. she then draws the line ef at an angle of incidence i.   on fig. 4.1, measure the angle of incidence i.  i =  [1]",
            "9": "9 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use (b) she places two pins p1 and p2 on line ef, as shown in fig. 4.1, and replaces the block.  she observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the images  of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. she places two pins p3 and p4 between her  eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block,  appear one behind the other.   (i) on fig. 4.1, draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it  meets cd. label this point h.   (ii) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =     (iii) draw the line hf.   (iv) measure and record the length b of the line hf.  b  =     (v) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation    n = b 2a.  n =   [5]  (c) (i) suggest how far apart you would place the pins p3 and p4 if you were carrying out  this experiment using a ray trace sheet the same size as this page.  suggested distance =     (ii) give a reason for your answer to (i).reason  .. [2]  (d) this experiment may be carried out using a ray of light, produced by a ray box, instead of  by using optical pins. a student suggests that the ray box method will be more accurate. assuming that the experiment is carried out with care, suggest one possible cause of inaccuracy using the optical pin method and one using the ray box method. optical pin method  ..ray box method   ..[2] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/62/m/j/11for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) an igcse student is investigating the relationship between the extension of a metal  wire of unstretched length 3.000 m, and the load hung on the wire. he has a set of 10 n weights.   consider the readings that the student should take and write appropriate column  headings, with units, in table 5.1. table 5.1 0 3.000 0 20 3.001 0.001 40 3.002 0.002 60 3.003 0.003 80 3.010 0.010  [2]  (b) the student decides to repeat the experiment using a wire made of a different metal in order to study how the extension may be affected by the metal from which the wire is made. to make a fair comparison, other variables must be kept constant. suggest two variables that the student should keep constant. 1.  ..2.  ..[2] [total: 4]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s11_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (slm) 43665 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9088095776* physics 0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2011  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is investigating the loading of a metre rule.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. 50.0  cm mark string metre ruleforcemeterclamp bench fig. 1.1  (a) a metre rule is attached at one end to the bench. the other end is supported by a  forcemeter.   a student records in table 1.1 the reading f on the forcemeter.   he places a 100 g mass on the rule at the 50.0 cm mark and records in the table the  value of the reading f on the forcemeter. he repeats the procedure using masses of  200 g, 300 g, 400 g and 500 g. the forcemeter readings are shown in the table.   write the mass values in the table. table 1.1 m   / g f  / n 0 1.10 1.852.202.953.504.20  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of f  / n (y-axis) against m   / g (x-axis).  [5]  (c) use the graph to find the value of f when m = 375 g. show clearly on the graph how you  obtained the result.  f =  [2]  (d) the forcemeter shows a reading when no mass has been added to the metre rule. assuming that the forcemeter has no zero error, suggest a reason for the reading.  .. ..[1] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus. thermometer water test-tube fig. 2.1  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r as shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.2. -10010203040506070809010 0110\u00b0c fig. 2.2  \u03b8r =  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) a student pours hot water into the test-tube until it is about two thirds full of water and  places the thermometer in the water. when the thermometer reading stops rising, she measures the temperature  \u03b8 of the water and records \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0. she  starts a stopclock and records in the table the time t and the temperature \u03b8 of the water  every 30 s. she removes the thermometer and pours away the water from the test-tube. she then wraps cotton wool insulation round the test-tube and repeats the procedure.   (i) complete the time and temperature column headings in the table.   (ii) complete the time column in the table. table 2.1 t  / tube without  cotton wool \u03b8  /tube with  cotton wool \u03b8  / 07 9 8 0 65 67 58 6055 5753 5652 5551 54  [2]  (c) state in which experiment the cooling is more rapid. justify your answer by reference to  the readings. experiment  ...justification  ... ..[2]  (d) if these experiments were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be  important to control the conditions. suggest two conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..[2]  (e) suggest two alternative insulating materials that could be used in place of cotton wool.1.  ..2.  ..[2] [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit. a metre rulepower source ad bc v fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across the section of wire  ab. he records the length l of the wire ab. he repeats the procedure with the voltmeter  connected across section ac of the wire and then with the voltmeter connected across  section ad of the wire. the readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 voltmeter connected across l  / i / v / r / ab 50 0.21 0.9 ac 75 0.22 1.4 ad 100 0.20 1.7   (i) calculate the values of resistance r for each length of wire using the equation    r = v i. enter the values in the table.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [3]  (b) it is suggested that the resistance across ab should be half the resistance across ad.  state whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..[2]  (c) it is known that changes in temperature affect the resistance of the wire. state how you  can limit the temperature changes when carrying out this experiment.  ..  ..[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) the student wishes to use a lower current so he adds a variable resistor to the circuit.   (i) draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor.   (ii) on fig. 3.1, mark with an x a suitable position in the circuit for the variable resistor.  [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating the refraction of light through a transparent block.  fig. 4.1 shows a student\u2019s ray trace sheet. it is not drawn full size. eyesheet of paperc gfn p3p2p1 n'db ae p4 fig. 4.1  (a) the student places a transparent block, largest face down, on a sheet of plain paper  and draws the outline abcd of the block. she removes the block and draws the normal nn' to side ab. she then draws the line ef at an angle of incidence i.   on fig. 4.1, measure the angle of incidence i.  i =  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) she places two pins p1 and p2 on line ef, as shown in fig. 4.1, and replaces the block.  she observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the images  of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. she places two pins p3 and p4 between her  eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block,  appear one behind the other.   (i) on fig. 4.1, draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it  meets cd. label this point h.   (ii) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =     (iii) draw the line hf.   (iv) measure and record the length b of the line hf.  b  =     (v) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation    n = b 2a.  n =   [5]  (c) (i) suggest how far apart you would place the pins p3 and p4 if you were carrying out  this experiment using a ray trace sheet the same size as this page.  suggested distance =     (ii) give a reason for your answer to (i).reason  .. [2]  (d) this experiment may be carried out using a ray of light, produced by a ray box, instead of  by using optical pins. a student suggests that the ray box method will be more accurate. assuming that the experiment is carried out with care, suggest one possible cause of inaccuracy using the optical pin method and one using the ray box method. optical pin method  ..ray box method   ..[2] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) an igcse student is investigating the relationship between the extension of a metal  wire of unstretched length 3.000 m, and the load hung on the wire. he has a set of 10 n weights.   consider the readings that the student should take and write appropriate column  headings, with units, in table 5.1. table 5.1 0 3.000 0 20 3.001 0.001 40 3.002 0.002 60 3.003 0.003 80 3.010 0.010  [2]  (b) the student decides to repeat the experiment using a wire made of a different metal in order to study how the extension may be affected by the metal from which the wire is made. to make a fair comparison, other variables must be kept constant. suggest two variables that the student should keep constant. 1.  ..2.  ..[2] [total: 4]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 20 printed pages.  ib11 11_0625_11/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2011  [turn over      *1240126518* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2011     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  1 a ruler is used to measure the length of an object.    123456789 1 0 cmobject     what is the length of the object?  a 3.0  cm b 4.0  cm c 5.0  cm d 6.5  cm    2 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.    speed u v w x y time 0     between which two times is the car stationary?  a u and v b v and w c w and x d x and y      3 a child is standing on the platform of a station.        a train travelling at 30  m / s takes 3.0  s to pass the child.    what is the length of the train?  a 10   m b 27   m c 30  m d 90   m    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  4 the weight of an object is to be found using the balance shown in the diagram.    object     the object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan. these are the results.    weights in the right-hand pan effect  0.1  n, 0.1  n, 0.05  n, 0.02  n balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side  0.2  n, 0.1  n, 0.01  n balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side    what is the best estimate of the weight of the object?  a 0.27  n b 0.29  n c 0.31  n d 0.58  n     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  5 the diagrams show four blocks with the same mass.    which block is made from the least dense material?    ab cd2 cm1 cm8 cm 2 cm3 cm 3 cm 3 cm2 cm4 cm 2 cm5 cm 2 cm      6 a student is told to measure the density of a liquid and also of a large cube of metal.    which pieces of equipment are sufficient to be able to take the measurements needed?  a balance, measuring cylinder and ruler  b balance and thermometer c measuring cylinder and ruler  d measuring cylinder, ruler and thermometer     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  7 a uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. the rod is not attached to the pivot. forces are then  applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. the weight of the rod can be ignored.    which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?    a 100  n 100  nb 100  n 100  n c 100  n 100  nd 100  n 100  n100  n      8 which combination of forces produces a resultant force acting towards the right?   a 10  n5 n 2 nb 5 n4 n 3 nc 7 n5 n 3 n10  n6 n 4 nd     9 a student adds weights to an elastic cord. he measures the length of the cord for each weight.    he then plots a graph from the results, as shown.    00 1234 weight  / n    which length has he plotted on the vertical axis?  a measured length  b original length  c (measured length \u2013 original length)  d (measured length + original length) ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  10 a force f moves a load from the bottom of a slope to the top.    qr p f  load      the work done by the force depends on the size of the force, and on a distance.    what is this distance?  a p b q c r d p + q      11 a water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    initial level of water10  cm 10  cm gas supply water     when it is attached to the gas supply, the water falls on the left side and rises on the right side.  the difference in the levels of water on the two sides is now 20  cm.    what is the pressure of the gas supply?  a the pressure due to 10  cm depth of water  b the pressure due to 20  cm depth of water  c the pressure due to 10  cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure  d the pressure due to 20  cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  12 a chair is placed on protective cups to pr event damage to the carpet underneath it.     chair  carpet  protective cups     how do the cups change the area of conta ct with the carpet and the pressure on it?     area of contact pressure  a decreased decreased  b decreased increased  c increased decreased  d increased increased      13 evaporation occurs when molecules escape from a liquid surface into the air above it. during this  process the temperature of the liquid falls.    why does the temperature of the liquid fall?  a the molecules in the vapour expand because the pressure is less.  b the molecules left in the liquid have more space to move around.  c the molecules move more slowly when they escape into the air.  d the molecules with the highest energies escape into the air.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  14 the pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. the volume of the gas in the  cylinder is then slowly decreased. the temperature of the gas does not change.    which graph could show the change of pre ssure of the gas during this process?    pressure  time a  0 0pressure timeb pressure  time c  pressure timed 0 00 0 0 0     15 to mark the lower fixed point of a celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be  placed in  a pure alcohol.  b pure distilled water.  c pure melting ice.  d pure mercury.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  16 the diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical  beaker of oil for several minutes.    water oil electric heate r    the temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase constantly. the rise in  temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.    why is this?  a the oil has a higher boiling point than water.  b the oil has a higher thermal capacity than water.  c the oil has a lower boiling point than water.  d the oil has a lower thermal capacity than water.     17 the diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.    cooling unit     why is the cooling unit placed at the top?  a cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.  b cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.  c cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.  d cold air remains at the top and so prevents convection.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  18 two identical copper cans are filled with boiling water.     uninsulated can insulated cancopper can  wool hot water thermometer     one can is insulated with wool. the temperature of the water in each can is taken every minute  for several minutes. graphs of the results are plotted.    which graph shows the results obtained?    a temperature timeinsulated uninsulatedb temperature timeinsulated uninsulated c temperature timeinsulateduninsulatedd temperature timeuninsulated insulated       19 which of these waves is longitudinal?  a infra-red  b radio  c sound  d water     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  20 radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.    hillradio waves house     the waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be  a diffracted.  b radiated.  c reflected.  d refracted.      21 the diagram shows a ray of light travelling from x. angle p is less than the critical angle.    in which direction does the ray continue?    a  c b  dair glass x  p      22 the diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.        what time is shown?  a 02:25 b 02:35 c 09:25 d 09:35     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  23 a student wishes to measure the speed of sound in air. she plans to measure the time between  making a sound and hearing the echo from a cliff.    studentcliff     she will use the equation: speed =  timedistance.  which type of sound should she make and which distance should she use in her calculation?     type of sound distance to use  a continuous sound 2cliff  to distance  b continuous sound distance to cliff \u00d7 2  c short, sharp sound 2cliff  to distance  d short, sharp sound distance to cliff \u00d7 2     24 the diagrams show the wave shapes of two different sounds. the scales are the same in each  diagram.    sound 1 sound 2time time     how does sound 2 compare with sound 1?  a sound 2 is louder than sound 1.  b sound 2 is quieter than sound 1.  c sound 2 has a higher pitch than sound 1.  d sound 2 has a lower pitch than sound 1.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  25 a horseshoe magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar.    iron barns     which row in the table shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron bar and the direction of the  forces between the bar and the magnet?     magnetic poles induced  in iron bar force between iron bar  and magnet  a ns  attraction  b ns  repulsion  c sn  attraction  d sn  repulsion    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  26 four nails, a, b, c and d, are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded. the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is recorded. each nail is tested in turn.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?    number of paper clips attached to the nail  nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed  a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2      27 which symbols are used for the units of current and of resistance?     unit of current unit of resistance  a a w  b a \u03c9  c c w  d c \u03c9    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  28 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit     29 the diagram shows an electric circuit containing three meters, x, y and z, all connected  correctly.    x z y     what are meters x, y and z?     x y z  a ammeter ammeter ammeter  b ammeter voltmeter ammeter  c voltmeter ammeter voltmeter  d voltmeter voltmeter voltmeter    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  30 the diagrams show four arrangements of resistors.    which arrangement has the smallest  total resistance?    4 \u03c9a  c 2 \u03c9b  2 \u03c9 4 \u03c9 4 \u03c9d  4 \u03c9 4 \u03c9      31 the diagram shows a potential divider circuit with two identical lamps l 1 and l 2.    l1 l2x  k  y      the contact k is halfway between x and y and the lamps are equally bright.    what will happen to the brightness of the lamps when contact k is moved a short distance  towards x?     lamp l 1 lamp l2  a brighter brighter  b brighter dimmer  c dimmer brighter  d dimmer dimmer    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  32 a fuse and a relay each use an effect of an electric current.    which effect of an electric current is used by a fuse and which effect is used by a relay?     effect used by  a fuse effect used by  a relay  a heating effect heating effect  b heating effect magnetic effect  c magnetic effect heating effect  d magnetic effect magnetic effect      33 which diagram represents the direction of the magnetic field around a straight wire carrying a  current out of the page?    a b current out of page c d current out of page      ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  34 the diagram shows an a.c. generator.    nscoil output voltagerotation of coil     with the coil in the position shown, the output voltage is +10  v.    when does the output voltage become \u201310  v?  a when the coil has turned 90 \u00b0  b when the coil has turned 180 \u00b0  c when the coil has turned 270 \u00b0  d when the coil has turned 360 \u00b0     35 the diagram shows a simple transformer.     core output input     from which material should the core be made?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d steel     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11 [turn over  36 cathode rays are emitted in a vacuum tube. they consist of particles that are found in atoms.    what is the name of the particles and how are the cathode rays produced?     name of particles how the cathode rays  are produced  a electrons electromagnetic induction  b electrons thermionic emission  c protons electromagnetic induction  d protons thermionic emission      37 two parallel metal plates in a vacuum are connected to the terminals of a high-voltage power  supply. a beam of cathode rays is passed into th e space between the two plates, as shown.    in which direction does the beam of cathode rays deflect?    +\u2013high-voltage power supply ab c d cathode raysmetal plate metal plate       38 a scientist needs to use a source of \u03b3-rays as safely as possible.    which action will not reduce the amount of radiation that reaches the scientist?  a keeping the distance between the source and the scientist as large as possible  b keeping the temperature of the source as low as possible c keeping the time for which the scientist uses the source as small as possible d placing a lead screen between the scientist and the source     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third -party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/11/o/n/11  39 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.    2000  1500 1000  500  0  0 1 2 3  time  / hour activity / counts per second     what is the half-life of the source?  a 21 hour b 1 hour c 121  hours d 3 hours      40 a nuclide of substance x has the symbol x26 12.    how many electrons are there in a neutral atom of substance x?  a 12 b 14 c 26 d 38       "
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib11 11_0625_12/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2011  [turn over      *6658930791* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2011     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  1 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.    speed u v w x y time 0     between which two times is the car stationary?  a u and v b v and w c w and x d x and y      2 a ruler is used to measure the length of an object.   123456789 1 0 cmobject     what is the length of the object?  a 3.0  cm b 4.0  cm c 5.0  cm d 6.5  cm     3 a student is told to measure the density of a liquid and also of a large cube of metal.    which pieces of equipment are sufficient to be able to take the measurements needed?  a balance, measuring cylinder and ruler  b balance and thermometer c measuring cylinder and ruler  d measuring cylinder, ruler and thermometer     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  4 the diagrams show four blocks with the same mass.    which block is made from the least dense material?    ab cd2 cm1 cm8 cm 2 cm3 cm 3 cm 3 cm2 cm4 cm 2 cm5 cm 2 cm      5 a child is standing on the platform of a station.        a train travelling at 30  m / s takes 3.0  s to pass the child.    what is the length of the train?  a 10   m b 27   m c 30  m d 90   m    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  6 which combination of forces produces a resultant force acting towards the right?    a 10  n5 n 2 nb 5 n4 n 3 nc 7 n5 n 3 n10  n6 n 4 nd       7 a student adds weights to an elastic cord. he measures the length of the cord for each weight.   he then plots a graph from the results, as shown.    00 1234 weight  / n    which length has he plotted on the vertical axis?  a measured length  b original length  c (measured length \u2013 original length)  d (measured length + original length)     8 the weight of an object is to be found using the balance shown in the diagram.   object     the object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan. these are the results.    weights in the right-hand pan effect  0.1  n, 0.1  n, 0.05  n, 0.02  n balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side  0.2  n, 0.1  n, 0.01  n balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side    what is the best estimate of the weight of the object?  a 0.27  n b 0.29  n c 0.31  n d 0.58  n ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  9 a uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. the rod is not attached to the pivot. forces are then  applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. the weight of the rod can be ignored.    which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?    a 100  n 100  nb 100  n 100  n c 100  n 100  nd 100  n 100  n100  n      10 a force f moves a load from the bottom of a slope to the top.    qr p f  load      the work done by the force depends on the size of the force, and on a distance.    what is this distance?  a p b q c r d p + q      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  11 the pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. the volume of the gas in the  cylinder is then slowly decreased. the temperature of the gas does not change.    which graph could show the change of pre ssure of the gas during this process?    pressure  time a  0 0pressure timeb pressure  time c  pressure timed 0 00 0 0 0     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  12 a water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    initial level of water10  cm 10  cm gas supply water     when it is attached to the gas supply, the water falls on the left side and rises on the right side.  the difference in the levels of water on the two sides is now 20  cm.    what is the pressure of the gas supply?  a the pressure due to 10  cm depth of water  b the pressure due to 20  cm depth of water  c the pressure due to 10  cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure  d the pressure due to 20  cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  13 a chair is placed on protective cups to pr event damage to the carpet underneath it.     chair  carpet  protective cups     how do the cups change the area of conta ct with the carpet and the pressure on it?     area of contact pressure  a decreased decreased  b decreased increased  c increased decreased  d increased increased      14 to mark the lower fixed point of a celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be  placed in  a pure alcohol.  b pure distilled water. c pure melting ice. d pure mercury.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  15 two identical copper cans are filled with boiling water.     uninsulated can insulated cancopper can  wool hot water thermometer     one can is insulated with wool. the temperature of the water in each can is taken every minute  for several minutes. graphs of the results are plotted.    which graph shows the results obtained?    a temperature timeinsulated uninsulatedb temperature timeinsulated uninsulated c temperature timeinsulateduninsulatedd temperature timeuninsulated insulated       16 evaporation occurs when molecules escape from a liquid surface into the air above it. during this  process the temperature of the liquid falls.    why does the temperature of the liquid fall?  a the molecules in the vapour expand because the pressure is less.  b the molecules left in the liquid have more space to move around.  c the molecules move more slowly when they escape into the air.  d the molecules with the highest energies escape into the air. ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  17 the diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.    cooling unit     why is the cooling unit placed at the top?  a cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.  b cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.  c cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.  d cold air remains at the top and so prevents convection.      18 the diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical  beaker of oil for several minutes.    water oil electric heate r    the temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase constantly. the rise in temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.    why is this?  a the oil has a higher boiling point than water.  b the oil has a higher thermal capacity than water.  c the oil has a lower boiling point than water.  d the oil has a lower thermal capacity than water.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  19 the diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.        what time is shown?  a 02:25 b 02:35 c 09:25 d 09:35      20 the diagram shows a ray of light travelling from x. angle p is less than the critical angle.    in which direction does the ray continue?    a  c b  dair glass x  p      21 radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.    hillradio waves house     the waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be  a diffracted.  b radiated.  c reflected.  d refracted.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  22 which of these waves is longitudinal?  a infra-red  b radio  c sound  d water      23 the diagrams show the wave shapes of two different sounds. the scales are the same in each  diagram.    sound 1 sound 2time time     how does sound 2 compare with sound 1?  a sound 2 is louder than sound 1.  b sound 2 is quieter than sound 1. c sound 2 has a higher pitch than sound 1. d sound 2 has a lower pitch than sound 1.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  24 a student wishes to measure the speed of sound in air. she plans to measure the time between  making a sound and hearing the echo from a cliff.    studentcliff     she will use the equation: speed =  timedistance.  which type of sound should she make and which distance should she use in her calculation?     type of sound distance to use  a continuous sound 2cliff  to distance  b continuous sound distance to cliff \u00d7 2  c short, sharp sound 2cliff  to distance  d short, sharp sound distance to cliff \u00d7 2     25 which symbols are used for the units of current and of resistance?     unit of current unit of resistance  a a w  b a \u03c9  c c w  d c \u03c9    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  26 the diagrams show four arrangements of resistors.    which arrangement has the smallest  total resistance?    4 \u03c9a  c 2 \u03c9b  2 \u03c9 4 \u03c9 4 \u03c9d  4 \u03c9 4 \u03c9      27 the diagram shows an electric circuit containing three meters, x, y and z, all connected  correctly.    x z y     what are meters x, y and z?     x y z  a ammeter ammeter ammeter  b ammeter voltmeter ammeter  c voltmeter ammeter voltmeter  d voltmeter voltmeter voltmeter    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  28 the diagram shows a potential divider circuit with two identical lamps l 1 and l 2.    l1 l2x  k  y      the contact k is halfway between x and y and the lamps are equally bright.    what will happen to the brightness of the lamps when contact k is moved a short distance  towards x?     lamp l 1 lamp l2  a brighter brighter  b brighter dimmer  c dimmer brighter  d dimmer dimmer     29 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit  d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  30 a fuse and a relay each use an effect of an electric current.    which effect of an electric current is used by a fuse and which effect is used by a relay?     effect used by  a fuse effect used by  a relay  a heating effect heating effect  b heating effect magnetic effect  c magnetic effect heating effect  d magnetic effect magnetic effect      31 four nails, a, b, c and d, are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded. the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is recorded. each nail is tested in turn.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?    number of paper clips attached to the nail  nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed  a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  32 a horseshoe magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar.    iron barns     which row in the table shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron bar and the direction of the  forces between the bar and the magnet?     magnetic poles induced  in iron bar force between iron bar  and magnet  a ns  attraction  b ns  repulsion  c sn  attraction  d sn  repulsion    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  33 which diagram represents the direction of the magnetic field around a straight wire carrying a  current out of the page?    a b current out of page c d current out of page      34 the diagram shows a simple transformer.     core output input     from which material should the core be made?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d steel     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11 [turn over  35 the diagram shows an a.c. generator.    nscoil output voltagerotation of coil     with the coil in the position shown, the output voltage is +10  v.    when does the output voltage become \u201310  v?  a when the coil has turned 90 \u00b0  b when the coil has turned 180 \u00b0  c when the coil has turned 270 \u00b0  d when the coil has turned 360 \u00b0      36 a scientist needs to use a source of \u03b3-rays as safely as possible.    which action will not reduce the amount of radiation that reaches the scientist?  a keeping the distance between the source and the scientist as large as possible  b keeping the temperature of the source as low as possible  c keeping the time for which the scientist uses the source as small as possible d placing a lead screen between the scientist and the source      37 a nuclide of substance x has the symbol  x26 12.    how many electrons are there in a neutral atom of substance x?  a 12 b 14 c 26 d 38     ",
            "20": "20  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  38 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.    2000  1500 1000  500  0  0 1 2 3  time  / hour activity / counts per second     what is the half-life of the source?  a 21 hour b 1 hour c 121 hours d 3 hours     39 cathode rays are emitted in a vacuum tube. they consist of particles that are found in atoms.    what is the name of the particles and how are the cathode rays produced?     name of particles how the cathode rays  are produced  a electrons electromagnetic induction  b electrons thermionic emission  c protons electromagnetic induction  d protons thermionic emission    ",
            "21": "21  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  40 two parallel metal plates in a vacuum are connected to the terminals of a high-voltage power  supply. a beam of cathode rays is passed into th e space between the two plates, as shown.    in which direction does the beam of cathode rays deflect?    +\u2013high-voltage power supply ab c d cathode raysmetal plate metal plate      ",
            "22": "22  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  blank page     ",
            "23": "23  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  blank page     ",
            "24": "24    permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/12/o/n/11  blank page    "
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 22 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib11 11_0625_13/rp  \u00a9 ucles 2011  [turn over      *5380410204* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2011     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  1 a child is standing on the platform of a station.        a train travelling at 30  m / s takes 3.0  s to pass the child.    what is the length of the train?  a 10   m b 27   m c 30  m d 90   m    2 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.    speed u v w x y time 0     between which two times is the car stationary?  a u and v b v and w c w and x d x and y     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  3 a student wishes to measure the speed of soun d in air. she plans to measure the time between  making a sound and hearing the echo from a cliff.    studentcliff     she will use the equation: speed =  timedistance.  which type of sound should she make and which distance should she use in her calculation?     type of sound distance to use  a continuous sound 2cliff  to distance  b continuous sound distance to cliff \u00d7 2  c short, sharp sound 2cliff  to distance  d short, sharp sound distance to cliff \u00d7 2     4 a ruler is used to measure the length of an object.   123456789 1 0 cmobject     what is the length of the object?  a 3.0  cm b 4.0  cm c 5.0  cm d 6.5  cm     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  5 a student adds weights to an elastic cord. he measures the length of the cord for each weight.    he then plots a graph from the results, as shown.    00 1234 weight  / n    which length has he plotted on the vertical axis?  a measured length  b original length  c (measured length \u2013 original length)  d (measured length + original length)      6 which combination of forces produces a resultant force acting towards the right?   a 10  n5 n 2 nb 5 n4 n 3 nc 7 n5 n 3 n10  n6 n 4 nd     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  7 a force f moves a load from the bottom of a slope to the top.    qr p f  load      the work done by the force depends on the size of the force, and on a distance.    what is this distance?  a p b q c r d p + q      8 a uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. the rod is not attached to the pivot. forces are then  applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. the weight of the rod can be ignored.    which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?    a 100  n 100  nb 100  n 100  n c 100  n 100  nd 100  n 100  n100  n      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  9 the weight of an object is to be found using the balance shown in the diagram.    object     the object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan. these are the results.    weights in the right-hand pan effect  0.1  n, 0.1  n, 0.05  n, 0.02  n balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side  0.2  n, 0.1  n, 0.01  n balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side    what is the best estimate of the weight of the object?  a 0.27  n b 0.29  n c 0.31  n d 0.58  n      10 a chair is placed on protective cups to pr event damage to the carpet underneath it.     chair  carpet  protective cups     how do the cups change the area of conta ct with the carpet and the pressure on it?     area of contact pressure  a decreased decreased  b decreased increased  c increased decreased  d increased increased    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  11 a student is told to measure the density of a liquid and also of a large cube of metal.    which pieces of equipment are sufficient to be able to take the measurements needed?  a balance, measuring cylinder and ruler  b balance and thermometer c measuring cylinder and ruler d measuring cylinder, ruler and thermometer     12 the diagrams show four blocks with the same mass.    which block is made from the least dense material?    ab cd2 cm1 cm8 cm 2 cm3 cm 3 cm 3 cm2 cm4 cm 2 cm5 cm 2 cm     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  13 a water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    initial level of water10  cm 10  cm gas supply water     when it is attached to the gas supply, the water falls on the left side and rises on the right side.  the difference in the levels of water on the two sides is now 20  cm.    what is the pressure of the gas supply?  a the pressure due to 10  cm depth of water  b the pressure due to 20  cm depth of water  c the pressure due to 10  cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure  d the pressure due to 20  cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure     14 the diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical  beaker of oil for several minutes.    water oil electric heate r    the temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase constantly. the rise in  temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.    why is this?  a the oil has a higher boiling point than water.  b the oil has a higher thermal capacity than water.  c the oil has a lower boiling point than water.  d the oil has a lower thermal capacity than water.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  15 evaporation occurs when molecules escape from a liquid surface into the air above it. during this  process the temperature of the liquid falls.    why does the temperature of the liquid fall?  a the molecules in the vapour expand because the pressure is less.  b the molecules left in the liquid have more space to move around.  c the molecules move more slowly when they escape into the air.  d the molecules with the highest energies escape into the air.     16 to mark the lower fixed point of a celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be  placed in  a pure alcohol.  b pure distilled water.  c pure melting ice.  d pure mercury.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  17 two identical copper cans are filled with boiling water.     uninsulated can insulated cancopper can  wool hot water thermometer     one can is insulated with wool. the temperature of the water in each can is taken every minute  for several minutes. graphs of the results are plotted.    which graph shows the results obtained?    a temperature timeinsulated uninsulatedb temperature timeinsulated uninsulated c temperature timeinsulateduninsulatedd temperature timeuninsulated insulated      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  18 the pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. the volume of the gas in the  cylinder is then slowly decreased. the temperature of the gas does not change.    which graph could show the change of pre ssure of the gas during this process?    pressure  time a  0 0pressure timeb pressure  time c  pressure timed 0 00 0 0 0     19 the diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.    cooling unit     why is the cooling unit placed at the top?  a cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.  b cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.  c cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.  d cold air remains at the top and so prevents convection. ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  20 the diagrams show the wave shapes of two different sounds. the scales are the same in each  diagram.    sound 1 sound 2time time     how does sound 2 compare with sound 1?  a sound 2 is louder than sound 1.  b sound 2 is quieter than sound 1. c sound 2 has a higher pitch than sound 1. d sound 2 has a lower pitch than sound 1.     21 the diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.        what time is shown?  a 02:25 b 02:35 c 09:25 d 09:35     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  22 radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.    hillradio waves house     the waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be  a diffracted.  b radiated.  c reflected.  d refracted.      23 the diagram shows a ray of light travelling from x. angle p is less than the critical angle.    in which direction does the ray continue?    a  c b  dair glass x  p      24 which of these waves is longitudinal?  a infra-red  b radio c sound  d water     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  25 which diagram represents the direction of the magnetic field around a straight wire carrying a  current out of the page?    a b current out of page c d current out of page      ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  26 four nails, a, b, c and d, are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded. the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is recorded. each nail is tested in turn.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?    number of paper clips attached to the nail  nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed  a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  27 a horseshoe magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar.    iron barns     which row in the table shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron bar and the direction of the  forces between the bar and the magnet?     magnetic poles induced  in iron bar force between iron bar  and magnet  a ns  attraction  b ns  repulsion  c sn  attraction  d sn  repulsion    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  28 the diagram shows an electric circuit containing three meters, x, y and z, all connected  correctly.    x z y     what are meters x, y and z?     x y z  a ammeter ammeter ammeter  b ammeter voltmeter ammeter  c voltmeter ammeter voltmeter  d voltmeter voltmeter voltmeter      29 which symbols are used for the units of current and of resistance?     unit of current unit of resistance  a a w  b a \u03c9  c c w  d c \u03c9     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  30 the diagrams show four arrangements of resistors.    which arrangement has the smallest  total resistance?    4 \u03c9a  c 2 \u03c9b  2 \u03c9 4 \u03c9 4 \u03c9d  4 \u03c9 4 \u03c9      31 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit  c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit  d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  32 the diagram shows a potential divider circuit with two identical lamps l 1 and l 2.    l1 l2x  k  y      the contact k is halfway between x and y and the lamps are equally bright.    what will happen to the brightness of the lamps when contact k is moved a short distance  towards x?     lamp l 1 lamp l2  a brighter brighter  b brighter dimmer  c dimmer brighter  d dimmer dimmer     33 a fuse and a relay each use an effect of an electric current.    which effect of an electric current is used by a fuse and which effect is used by a relay?     effect used by  a fuse effect used by  a relay  a heating effect heating effect  b heating effect magnetic effect  c magnetic effect heating effect  d magnetic effect magnetic effect    ",
            "20": "20  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  34 the diagram shows an a.c. generator.    nscoil output voltagerotation of coil     with the coil in the position shown, the output voltage is +10  v.    when does the output voltage become \u201310  v?  a when the coil has turned 90 \u00b0  b when the coil has turned 180 \u00b0  c when the coil has turned 270 \u00b0  d when the coil has turned 360 \u00b0     35 the diagram shows a simple transformer.     core output input     from which material should the core be made?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d steel     ",
            "21": "21  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11 [turn over  36 two parallel metal plates in a vacuum are connected to the terminals of a high-voltage power  supply. a beam of cathode rays is passed into th e space between the two plates, as shown.    in which direction does the beam of cathode rays deflect?    +\u2013high-voltage power supply ab c d cathode raysmetal plate metal plate      37 cathode rays are emitted in a vacuum tube. they consist of particles that are found in atoms.    what is the name of the particles and how are the cathode rays produced?     name of particles how the cathode rays  are produced  a electrons electromagnetic induction  b electrons thermionic emission  c protons electromagnetic induction  d protons thermionic emission     38 a nuclide of substance x has the symbol  x26 12.    how many electrons are there in a neutral atom of substance x?  a 12 b 14 c 26 d 38     ",
            "22": "22  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  39 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.    2000  1500 1000  500  0  0 1 2 3  time  / hour activity / counts per second     what is the half-life of the source?  a 21 hour b 1 hour c 121 hours d 3 hours      40 a scientist needs to use a source of \u03b3-rays as safely as possible.    which action will not reduce the amount of radiation that reaches the scientist?  a keeping the distance between the source and the scientist as large as possible  b keeping the temperature of the source as low as possible  c keeping the time for which the scientist uses the source as small as possible  d placing a lead screen between the scientist and the source     ",
            "23": "23  \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  blank page     ",
            "24": "24      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2011 0625/13/o/n/11  blank page    "
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (cw/cgw) 34004/4 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *1264537134* physics 0625/21 paper 2  core october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of a moving object. b a5 001 0 2 0 3 5 time  / sspeed m / sc d fig. 1.1  (a) which part, or parts, of fig. 1.1 indicate when the object is   (i) travelling at uniform speed,  ...[1]   (ii) accelerating?  .[1]  (b) calculate the distance travelled in the last 15 s.  distance =  .. m [3] [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over2 two girls attempt to measure the speed of the water in a river, as shown in fig. 2.1. bridge 1 bridge 250  m fig. 2.1  (a) the distance between the two bridges is measured as 50 m.   suggest an appropriate instrument that they might use to measure this distance.  ...[1]  (b) the girl on bridge 1 drops a piece of wood into the water. the girl on bridge 2 measures how  long it takes for the piece of wood to reach bridge 2. it takes 400 s to travel between the two bridges.   (i) name an appropriate instrument that could be used to measure this time.  ...[1]   (ii) describe the procedure for measuring this time. ... ... ... ... ...[3]   (iii) calculate the speed of the water.  speed =  ...[4] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 (a) in a laboratory experiment to find the centre of mass of a triangular piece of card, the card is  suspended first from point a and then from point b, as shown in figs. 3.1 and 3.2. a b de c                  cdba e   fig. 3.1 fig. 3.2   when suspended from a, point d is found to be vertically below a.   when suspended from b, point e is vertically below b.  (i) what piece of apparatus might be used to determine the vertical lines through a and b? ...[1]   (ii) on fig. 3.3 below, draw construction lines to find the position of the centre of mass of  the triangular card. label this point clearly with the letter g. cd ba e  [3] fig. 3.3",
            "5": "5 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) fig. 3.4 illustrates a toy that always returns to the upright position, whatever position it is put  in to start with. fig. 3.4   on one of the three positions of the toy shown in fig. 4.3, clearly mark x at a possible position  for the centre of mass of the toy. [2] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 in fig. 4.1, the smoke cell consists of an illuminated glass box into which some smoke has been  injected. microscope smoke cell light fig. 4.1  (a) describe briefly what is seen when the contents of the smoke cell are viewed through the focused microscope.  ... ... ... ...[3]  (b) state the name we normally give to what is seen. ...[1]  (c) what deductions about the properties and behaviour of air molecules can be made from  these observations?  ... ... ... ...[3] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over5 a card is held against a rotating toothed wheel, as shown in fig. 5.1. card fig. 5.1  the wheel has 150 teeth and rotates 3 times per second.  (a) calculate the frequency of the sound produced.  frequency =    hz [2]  (b) state the approximate range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear.  lowest frequency = ... hz   highest frequency = ... hz [1]  (c) the speed of rotation of the wheel is increased.   what happens, if anything, to the pitch of the sound that is heard?  ...[1] [total: 4]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20116 the list below contains the names of the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but they  are in the wrong order and an extra, non-electromagnetic type of wave motion has been included. infra-red radiation x-rays gamma rays visible light radio waves ultrasound waves ultra-violet radiation  (a) which one of these is not electromagnetic?  ...[1]  (b) (i) in the boxes below, list the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in order of  wavelength. the first and last boxes have been filled in for you. radio waves gamma rays  [2]   (ii) which of these has the longest wavelength?  ...[1]   (iii) which of these produces a significant heating effect? ...[1]   (iv) which of these may be used to obtain a picture of a broken bone inside the body? ...[1] [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over7 the pivoted steel arrow from a small compass has become demagnetised.  the coil shown in fig. 7.1 is to be used to magnetise it again. coil steel arrow fig. 7.1  (a) describe carefully   (i) how the coil is used to magnetise the steel arrow,  ... ... ... ... ...[3]   (ii) how the polarity of the magnetised needle may be checked. ... ... ... ...[1]  (b) on fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field pattern of the magnetised needle. [2] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20118 a student learning about electric circuits connects up the circuit shown in fig. 8.1. batteryammeter coil of wire variable resistor (rheostat)2103 amps45 fig. 8.1  (a) the student has already made one mistake with his connections.   what is his mistake?  ...[1]  (b) in the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the arrangement shown in fig. 8.1, using  standard symbols. [2]  (c) the student now connects a voltmeter to the circuit, so that readings can be taken to find the resistance of the coil of wire. on your circuit diagram, draw the voltmeter, connected to  measure the potential difference across the coil. [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (d) having obtained a correctly-working circuit, the readings on the two meters for one setting of  the variable resistor are as shown in figs. 8.2 and 8.3. amps0 51 423            volts051 0 15   fig. 8.2  fig. 8.3   (i) record these two readings.  ammeter reading =  ..  a   voltmeter reading =  ... v [1]   (ii) the slider on the variable resistor (see fig. 8.1) is moved a small distance to the left, reducing its resistance.    state what happens to the readings on the two meters. ammeter reading  .. . voltmeter reading  ...[2]   (iii) the slider is adjusted so that the total resistance in the circuit is double that which gave  the readings in figs. 8.2 and 8.3.    calculate the new values of the readings on the meters.  ammeter reading =  ..  a   voltmeter reading =  ... v [2] [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 (a) the circuit symbol shown in fig. 9.1 represents a device often used in electrical equipment. fig. 9.1   state the name of this device.  ...[1]  (b) fig. 9.2 shows, in simplified form, the essential parts of a grid system for distributing electrical  energy from a power station to domestic consumers. the device in part (a) is used both at x and at y . power stationx22 000  v132  000  v transmission cables and pylons240  v domesticconsumer y fig. 9.2   (i) using information from fig. 9.2, deduce the ratio secondary turns primary turns necessary at x and  at y .  turns ratio at x =  ...  turns ratio at y =  ...[3]   (ii) state two reasons why power transmission is cheaper if the voltage across the cables is  very high. 1.  ...2.  ...[2] [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over10 (a) complete the following statement about an electric field.   an electric field is a region in which    experiences a ... [2]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows two identical light uncharged balls suspended on thin nylon threads. nylon thread ball b a fig. 10.1   ball a is given a positive charge and ball b is given a negative charge.   in the space below, draw a diagram showing the positions that the balls and threads will take,  now that the balls are charged.  [2]  (c) on ball b in your diagram, use labelled arrows to show the directions of   (i) the electrostatic force on the ball (label it e),   (ii) the weight of the ball (label it w),   (iii) the tension force of the thread on the ball (label it t). [2]  (d) ball b is in equilibrium. state the value of the resultant of forces e, w and t.  resultant =  ...[1] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201111 fig. 11.1 shows a tube that can be used to produce cathode rays. metal plates above and below  the tube have zero potential difference between them. fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, clearly label   (i) the filament cathode (label it c),   (ii) the anode (label it a). [2]  (b) on fig. 11.1, draw   (i) a battery (label it b), connected to cause thermionic emission of electrons,   (ii) a 1000 v power supply (label it p), connected to cause a beam of cathode rays along the tube,   (iii) the path of the beam of cathode rays along the tube.  [3]  (c) what is seen when the beam of cathode rays hits the screen?  ... ...[1]  (d) a high potential difference is now connected between the two metal plates, so that the lower  plate is positive and the upper plate is negative.   what change is seen on the screen?  ...  ...[1] [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201112 the count-rate from a sample of radioactive material is investigated by a team of scientists in a  laboratory.  (a) with the radioactive sample in place, the count-rate from the sample is determined every 7 days, with the results shown below. the background count-rate has already been subtracted. time / days 0 7 14 21 28 count-rate counts / s1000 550 300 160 90   on fig. 12.1, plot a graph of count-rate from the sample against time. [3] 0200 0 5 10 15 time  / days20 25 30400600 count-rate counts / s8001000 fig. 12.1  (b) (i) from your graph, find the time at which the count-rate is    1.    800 counts / s,  .. days    2.    200 counts / s.  .. days  [2]   (ii) from the figures in (b)(i), find the value of the half-life of the substance.  half-life =  .  days [3] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nf/sw) 34010/4 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *6588482680* physics 0625/22 paper 2  core october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question orpart question.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 (a) an empty glass beaker has a mass of 210 g.   when 200 cm3 of olive oil is poured into the beaker, the total mass is 394 g.   calculate the density of the olive oil.  density =  .. [4]  (b) when the beaker and olive oil are heated, the olive oil expands.   what happens to the density of the olive oil?  .. [1]   [total: 5] 2 (a) describe what is meant by an echo.  ...  ... .. [2]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows the mouth of a river, viewed from above. a and b are on opposite banks, and  are 800 m apart. a b800  m fig. 2.1",
            "3": "3 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  echo depth measurements use the time taken for sound to go from the surface to the river  bed and back again.   such measurements give the following values for the depth of the water at different distances  from a, along the line ab. distance from a / m 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 depth of water / m 0 1.8 5.1 12.9 18.9 22.2 16.5 6.3 0   (i) the speed of sound in water is 1500 m / s.    calculate how long a sound wave takes to travel from the surface to the bottom of the  river at a point 300 m from a.  time =  ... s [3]   (ii) a ship has 3 m of itself below the surface of the water.    from the figures in the table, estimate how close to a it can sail without hitting the bottom  of the river.  distance from a =  .. m [1]   [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 (a) state what is meant by the moment of a force.  ...  .. [1]  (b) a warehouse worker is about to close a large door, as shown in fig. 3.1. a b fig. 3.1   (i) state, with a reason, which of the two positions, a or b, will enable him to close the door  with least force.  ... ... .. [1]   (ii) on another occasion, with the door in the position shown in fig. 3.1, two workers each  push on the door with the same force at the same time. one worker pushes at a, from the side seen in fig. 3.1. the other worker pushes at b, from the other side of the door.    which way does the door move, if at all? tick one box.      the door closes       the door opens       the door remains as it is   [1]   [total: 3]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over4 (a) state what is meant by the term melting point.  ...  .. [2]  (b) some ice has all reached its melting point, and it begins to melt. what happens to the  temperature of the ice as it melts?  .. [1]  (c) a certain substance has a melting point of \u201310 \u00b0c (minus 10 \u00b0c). a small amount of this  substance is cooled from 50 \u00b0c to \u201318 \u00b0c in a very cold freezer unit.   on fig. 4.1, sketch a possible graph that shows how the temperature of the substance varies  with time during the cooling process. \u2013600 \u201340\u201320204060 temperature  / \u00b0c time     fig. 4.1  [4]   [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 the circuit in fig. 5.1 is connected, and the ammeter reading is noted as the water is heated. a xinsulated connectingwires heat fig. 5.1  it is found that the ammeter reading increases as the temperature rises.  (a) (i) state what happens to the resistance of component x as the temperature rises.  .. [1]   (ii) suggest what component x might be. .. [1]  (b) this circuit is to be used as a thermometer.   (i) what must be done to calibrate it    1.  at 0\u00b0c,  ... ... .. [2]    2.  at 100 \u00b0c?  ... ... .. [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) the resistance of x does not vary linearly with temperature between 0 \u00b0c and 100 \u00b0c.    how will this affect the use of this circuit as a thermometer?  ... ... .. [2]   [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20116 (a) in a laboratory optics experiment, a student stands a cylindrical converging lens on a large  piece of paper and shines two parallel rays of light into it. this is shown in fig. 6.1. pp p p qqparallel rays of lightconverging lens qq fig. 6.1   the student traces one of the rays using four pins, labelled p in fig. 6.1. he traces the other  ray using four more pins, labelled q.   (i) using a ruler, draw    1.  the paths of the two rays in the air to the right of the lens,    2.  the paths of the two rays as they pass through the lens.  (ii) on fig. 6.1, use the letter f to label the principal focus of the lens.   [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) fig. 6.2 shows part of the path of a ray of light through a glass block.   the critical angle for the glass/air boundary is 42\u00b0. abair ray of lightglassblockc fig. 6.2   (i) state the name that describes what is happening to the ray 1.  at a,  ..2.  at b.  . [3]   (ii) on fig. 6.2, draw the path of the ray after it has reached c.  [2]   [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20117 plane waves travel on the surface of some water in a tank. fig. 7.1 shows the appearance, from  above, of the waves before and after the boundary between two different depths of water in the tank. waves move this way boundarylr fig. 7.1  (a) state what happens to the wavelength as the waves cross the boundary.  .. [1]  (b) water waves travel more slowly when the water is shallower, but the frequency does not  change.   (i) state, giving your reasons, which side of the boundary, l or r, has the deeper water.  ... ... ... .. [3]   (ii) some more water is poured into the tank, and waves of the same frequency as before  are generated in the tank.    what difference, if any, will this make to the appearance of the waves    1. to the left of the boundary,  ...    2. to the right of the boundary?  .. [2]   [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over8 (a) two charged metal spheres are placed next to each other.   + indicates that the sphere is positively charged.   \u2013 indicates that the sphere is negatively charged.   in the box alongside each pair of spheres, write \u201cattract\u201d or \u201crepel\u201d or \u201cno effect\u201d to describe  the effect the spheres have on each other.   (i) +  \u2013     (ii) +  +     (iii) \u2013  \u2013     [3]  (b) water is flowing in a very narrow stream from a water tap (faucet). a negatively-charged  plastic strip is held close to the stream of water, as shown in fig. 8.1. tap (faucet) negatively-charged plastic strip x water fig. 8.1   the stream of water moves towards the plastic strip.   in terms of the water at the point labelled x, suggest why this happens.  ... ... ... .. [3]   [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 (a) two coils are wound on an iron rod, as shown in fig. 9.1. one coil is connected to a cell and a  switch. the other is connected to a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter. sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeteriron rod fig. 9.1   (i) the open switch is now closed.    state what happens to    1.  the iron rod,  .. [1]    2.  a small steel pin held close to one end of the iron rod,  .. [1]    3.  the needle of the millivoltmeter.  ...  .. [2]   (ii) the switch is opened again.    state what happens to the needle of the millivoltmeter. ... .. [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) y ou are given an iron bar, a length of insulated wire, a battery and a variable resistor.   y ou are to make an electromagnet whose strength can be varied.   (i) in the space below, draw a diagram of the electromagnet that includes the circuit. [2]   (ii) what is the setting of the variable resistor that gives the strongest magnetism of the  electromagnet?  .. [1]   [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201110 the circuit in fig. 10.1 is connected. the potential difference across resistor r is measured as 8.0 v. a a a ammeter 2 ammeter 1ammeter 3 current reading= 2.0  a 4.0 \u03c9 r potential difference = 8.0  v fig. 10.1  (a) (i) what instrument is used to measure the potential difference across r?  .. [1]   (ii) on fig. 10.1, draw this instrument in position in the circuit, using the correct circuit  symbol.  [2]  (b) the reading on ammeter 1 is 2.0 a. state   (i) the reading on ammeter 2,     (ii) the reading on ammeter 3.   .. [2]  (c) using the values on fig. 10.1, calculate   (i) the resistance of r,  resistance =  .. \u03c9 [3]   (ii) the total resistance of the circuit.  total resistance =  .. \u03c9 [1]  (d) state the value of the potential difference across the 4.0 \u03c9 resistor.  potential difference =  .. [1]   [total: 10]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over11 the count rate from a sample of radioactive material is measured every 20 minutes for 2 hours.  the results, suitably corrected for background radiation, are shown in the table. time / s 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 count rate counts / s280 210 164 122  88 72 54  (a) suggest one possible source for the background radiation.  .. [1]  (b) name the two types of particle that the radioactive material might be emitting.1.  ...2.  .. [2]  (c) from the table, without attempting a graph, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.  half-life =  ... s [1] (d) a similar experiment is carried out, using a larger quantity of the same radioactive material.   state what effect, if any, this has on  (i) the readings in the table, .. [1]   (ii) the half-life of the material. .. [1]  (e) state one precaution that should be taken for safe handling of the radioactive material. ... .. [1]   [total: 7] question 12 is on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/22/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 fig. 12.1 represents the radioactive decay of a 238 92u nucleus. u238 92 tha zhe4 2 fig. 12.1  (a) in the space below, write the nuclear equation for this decay, including the numerical values of  a and z.  [3]  (b) what does the letter a stand for?  .. [1]  (c) what does the letter z stand for? .. [1]   [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (cw/cgw) 34016/3 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *6402514491* physics 0625/23 paper 2  core october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 fig. 1.1 shows the route opqr taken by a car. 10 km10 km 5 kmp qr o fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2 shows the speed-time graph for the car journey. the car starts from rest at o. op qr timespeed fig. 1.2  (a) state the value of the distance represented by the shaded area.  ...[1]  (b) state what the car was doing during the interval   (i) op ,  .[1]   (ii) pq,  [1]   (iii) qr.  [1]  (c) is the average speed during the journey the same as, less than or more than the maximum  speed shown on the graph?  ...[1] [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over2 some very fine grains of powder are mixed with some water. the powder does not dissolve.  a small drop of the mixture is put on a glass slide and viewed through a microscope.  the powder grains are observed to be moving with a jerky, random motion.  (a) what name is given to this movement of the powder grains?  ...[1]  (b) explain why the powder grains behave like this. ... ... ... ...[2] [total: 3]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 fig. 3.1 shows a vertical strip made of springy metal, clamped at the top. clamp xzymetal strip fig. 3.1  (a) the strip is moved from position y to position x.   the work done moving the strip is stored as energy in the strip.   in which form is this energy?  ...[1]  (b) the strip is released from x and it initially oscillates between x and z.   in which position does the strip have maximum kinetic energy?  ...[1]  (c) as time progresses, the frequency of the oscillation remains the same but the amplitude  becomes less.   (i) state what is meant by    1. frequency,  ...  ...[2]    2. amplitude.  ... ...[2]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) what happens to the total energy of the strip as the amplitude decreases?  ... ...[1]  (d) when the oscillations eventually cease, in which position does the strip come to rest? ...[1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 matter exists in three states: solid, liquid and gas.  steam is coming out of a kettle of boiling water. when the steam strikes a cold jug, it makes the  jug wet.  (a) in which of the three states is   (i) the boiling water,  ...   (ii) the steam,  .   (iii) the water on the jug?  .[3]  (b) all of the following words are names of things that could happen during a change of state.  boiling, condensation, evaporation, melting, solidification   state which of these is used to describe what happens to the steam to make the jug wet.  ...[1]  (c) when the steam hits the jug, what happens to the energy stored in the steam?  ...[1] [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over5 a flask with a tap has a volume of 200 cm3.  when full of air, the flask has a mass of 30.98 g.  the flask is connected to a vacuum pump, the air is pumped out and then the tap is closed.  the flask now has a mass of 30.72 g.  calculate  (a) the mass of the air in the flask before connecting to the vacuum pump,  mass =  .. g [2]  (b) the density of the air in the flask.  density =  . [4] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20116 a boat is using echo-sounding equipment to measure the depth of the water underneath it, as  illustrated in fig. 6.1. fig. 6.1  (a) the equipment in the boat sends a short pulse of sound downwards and detects the echo after a time interval of 0.80 s.   (i) describe how an echo is caused.  ... ... ...[2]   (ii) the speed of sound in water is 1500 m / s.    calculate the distance travelled by the sound in 0.80 s.  distance travelled =  . m [3]   (iii) state the depth of water under the boat.  depth =  ..m [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) the boat is sailing away from the shore. the depth of water increases uniformly with distance  from the shore.   on fig. 6.2, sketch a graph that shows how the time interval to hear the echo might change  as the distance from the shore changes. 0distance from shoretime interval to hear echo 0 fig. 6.2  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20117 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a point object p above a horizontal plane mirror. plane mirrorobject peye fig. 7.1   on fig. 7.1,   (i) mark and label the position of the image of p , [2]   (ii) draw a line showing how a ray of light travels from the object to the eye. [2]  (b) a boy carefully writes he checked his book on a piece of graph paper. he lays the paper  on the table and then positions a vertical mirror as shown in fig. 7.2. vertical mirror he checked his book fig. 7.2   which word of the reflection of the sentence in the mirror looks different from that written on  the paper?  ...[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) the two prisms shown in fig. 7.3 are made of glass.  a ray of red light enters each prism from the air, as shown. 60\u00b030\u00b0 ray of red light 45\u00b045\u00b0 ray of red light fig. 7.3   the critical angle for red light at the glass-air boundary is 42\u00b0.   on fig. 7.3, complete the paths of the rays through the prisms and out into the air again. [5] [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20118 (a) a student tests to see whether certain materials conduct electricity. he uses the circuit in  fig. 8.1 and connects the materials in turn in the gap between p and q. a6 v battery pqx fig. 8.1   (i) what is the purpose of component x in the circuit?  ... ...[1]   (ii) state how the student can tell if a certain material conducts electricity. ... ...[1]   (iii) which of the following materials is a good conductor of electricity? put a tick alongside  each material that is a good conductor. copper  glass  iron  nylon  perspex  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) the student now connects a small heater in the gap in the circuit, as shown in fig. 8.2. he  wishes to determine the resistance of the heater. a6 v battery heaterx fig. 8.2   (i) what other meter must he connect in the circuit, in order to determine the resistance?  ...[1]   (ii) on fig. 8.2, draw this meter in the correct position in the circuit. [1]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 (c) fig. 8.3 shows a radiant electric fire with 3 heating elements, each of which operates at full  temperature when 250 v is connected across it. fig. 8.3   (i) fig. 8.4 shows an incomplete circuit diagram of the fire.    there are 2 switches. the top switch controls one heating element and the bottom switch controls two heating elements connected in parallel. 250  v a.c. fig. 8.4    complete fig. 8.4, showing all the electrical connections. [2]   (ii) the current in one heating element is 2.5 a when it is connected to the 250 v supply.    calculate the resistance of the heating element.  resistance =  . [4]   (iii) all three heating elements are switched on. which statement about the total resistance of the electric fire is correct? tick one box.     no resistance      smaller resistance than in (c)(ii)      same resistance as in (c)(ii)      larger resistance than in (c)(ii)  [1] [total: 12]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over9 (a) a girl has two metal bars, 1 and 2.   (i) when the girl holds one end of bar 1 near a magnet, she finds that it attracts both the  n pole and the s pole of the magnet.    what does this tell you about bar 1?  ...  ...[2]   (ii) when the girl holds one end of bar 2 near the magnet, it attracts the n pole of the  magnet, but repels the s pole.    what does this tell you about bar 2?  ... ...[1]  (b) in another experiment, the girl uses two table-tennis balls a and b. each is coated with a thin  layer of conducting material. ball a is mounted on an insulating stand and ball b is suspended from a thin nylon thread. the arrangement is shown in fig. 9.1. ab fig. 9.1   ball a is given a negative charge, and is slowly moved towards ball b until it touches.   predict what is seen to happen.  ... ... ... ...[2] [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201110 a coil p is joined to a battery and a switch s. a similar coil q is joined to a sensitive centre-zero  millivoltmeter g.  p and q are placed end to end, as shown in fig. 10.1. s pqg fig. 10.1  (a) describe what is seen happening to the reading of g   (i) as switch s is closed,  ... ... ...[2]   (ii) as switch s is opened again. ... ... ...[1]  (b) a soft iron bar, as long as the combined lengths of p and q, is placed inside p and q.   state what difference this makes to what is observed on g as s is closed.  ... ...[1]  (c) the bar in (b) is removed and the battery is changed for one with a smaller e.m.f.   state what difference this makes to what is observed on g as s is closed.  ... ...[1]",
            "17": "17 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (d) the battery is replaced by an a.c. power supply of frequency 50 cycles per second, and then  s is closed.   describe what is seen on g.  ...  ...[1] [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201111 the counter in fig. 11.1 records the total number of times that a radiation is detected whilst the  counter is switched on. tens units onoffhundredscounter radiation detectorx\u0081 fig. 11.1  (a) with no radioactive source present, the counter is set to zero and then switched on for  4 minutes.   after this time, the counter reads: 136   (i) what radiation is the apparatus detecting?  ...[1]   (ii) calculate the average count rate of this radiation.  count rate =  ..  counts / min [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) (i) point x is 25 cm from the radiation detector. a source that is known to be highly radioactive  is placed at x.    the counter is reset to zero, and the count again taken for 4 minutes.    the counter now reads: 132    state what type of radiation is being emitted by the source.  ...[1]   (ii) the source is moved to a position 2 cm from the detector. the counter is set to zero and  restarted. the counter reading after counting for 4 minutes is: 876    estimate the count rate due to the radioactive source alone.  count rate =  .  counts / min [3] [total: 7] question 12 is on the next page.",
            "20": "20 0625/23/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 fig. 12.1 represents a neutral lithium atom. all the particles in the atom are shown on the diagram. orbit nucleus fig. 12.1  (a) use fig. 12.1 to help you answer the following questions.   (i) how many electrons does this atom have?  ...  [1]   (ii) what is the value of the proton number of this atom?  ...  [1]   (iii) how many neutrons does the atom have?  ...  [1]   (iv) what is the value of the nucleon number of this atom?  ...  [1]  (b) write the appropriate numbers in the boxes below, to represent this atom of lithium in nuclide  notation. li [1] [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1  blank page . dc (nh/dj) 33051/8 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *4203780552* physics 0625/31 paper 3 extended october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 (a) define acceleration. explain any symbols in your definition.  ... ...[1]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows a graph of speed against time for a train. after 100 s the train stops at a  station. 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 time  / s140 160 180 200 220 240 260 2805101520speed m / s2530 fig. 1.1   (i) for the time interval between 40 s and 100 s, calculate the distance travelled by the train.  distance =  ...[2]   (ii) the train stops for 80 s, then accelerates to 30 m / s with an acceleration of 0.60 m / s2. it  then travels at constant speed.    complete the graph for the interval 100 s to 280 s, showing your calculations in the space below.  [5] [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over2 (a) energy from the sun evaporates water from the sea. some of this water eventually drives a  hydroelectric power station. give an account of the processes and energy changes involved.  ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...[4]  (b) in a hydroelectric power station, 200 000 kg of water per second fall through a vertical distance  of 120 m. the water passes through turbines to generate electricity, and leaves the turbines with a speed of 14 m / s.   (i) calculate the gravitational potential energy lost by the water in 1 second. use g  = 10 m / s 2.  potential energy lost = [2]   (ii) calculate the kinetic energy of the water leaving the turbines in 1 second.  kinetic energy = [2] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 (a) state the two conditions required for the equilibrium of a body acted upon by a number of  forces. 1.  ... ...2.  ... ...[2]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of an arm with the hand holding a weight of 120 n. 15 cmp2 cmf 33 cm20 n120  n fig. 3.1   the 20 n force is the weight of the forearm, acting at its centre of mass. f is the force in the  muscle of the upper arm. p is the point in the elbow about which the arm pivots. the distances  of the forces from point p are shown.   (i) by taking moments about point p , calculate the force f.  force f =  ...[3]   (ii) a force acts on the forearm at point p . calculate this force and state its direction.  force =  ...  direction =  ...[2] [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over4 (a) complete fig. 4.1 to show a simple mercury barometer. insert the correct labels in the  boxes. label with the letter h the measurement required to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere.  [3] fig. 4.1  (b) the value of h  taken using this barometer is 0.73 m. the density of mercury is 13 600 kg / m3.  calculate the value of the atmospheric pressure suggested by this measurement. use g = 10 m / s 2.  atmospheric pressure =  ...[2]  (c) standard atmospheric pressure is 0.76 m of mercury. suggest a reason why the value of h in (b) is lower than this.  ... ...[1] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 (a) equal volumes of a gas held at constant pressure, a liquid and a solid undergo the same  temperature rise.   (i) state which of the three, solid, liquid or gas,    1 . expands the most, ..    2 . expands the least. ..   (ii) explain why the pressure of the gas must be kept constant for this comparison.  ... ...[2]  (b) fig. 5.1 shows an alcohol thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 \u00b0c fig. 5.1   (i) state two properties of alcohol which make it suitable for use in a thermometer.1.  ...2.  ...[2]   (ii) state two changes to the design of this thermometer which would make it more  sensitive.1.  ...2.  ...[2]  (c) explain why it is an advantage for the glass surrounding the alcohol in the bulb of the  thermometer to be very thin.  ... ...[1] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows the position of layers of air, at one moment, as a sound wave of constant  frequency passes through the air. compressions are labelled c. rarefactions are labelled r. c        r        c         r        c        r        c        r        c        r        c fig. 6.1   (i) state how fig. 6.1 would change if    1 . the sound had a higher frequency,  [1]    2 . the sound were louder.     [2]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, draw a line marked with arrows at each end to show the wavelength of the  sound. [1]  (b) in an experiment to measure the speed of sound in steel, a steel pipe of length 200 m is struck at one end with a hammer. a microphone at the other end of the pipe is connected to an accurate timer. the timer records a delay of 0.544 s between the arrival of the sound transmitted by the steel pipe and the sound transmitted by the air in the pipe.   the speed of sound in air is 343 m / s. calculate the speed of sound in steel.  speed of sound in steel =  ...[3] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20117 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a ray of monochromatic red light, in air, incident on a glass block at an angle of  incidence of 50\u00b0. 50\u00b0 fig. 7.1   (i) state what is meant by monochromatic light.  ...[1]   (ii) for this red ray the refractive index of the glass is 1.52. calculate the angle of refraction for the ray.  angle of refraction =  ...[2]   (iii) without measuring angles, use a ruler to draw the approximate path of the ray in the glass block and emerging from the block. [2] ",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) the red ray in fig. 7.1 is replaced by a ray of monochromatic violet light. for this violet ray the  refractive index of the glass is 1.54. the speed of light in air is 3.00 \u00d7 108 m / s.   (i) calculate the speed of the violet light in the glass block.  speed =  ...[2]   (ii) use a ruler to draw the approximate path of this violet ray in the glass block and emerging  from the block. make sure this path is separated from the path drawn for the red light in (a)(iii). mark both parts of this path with the letter v. [2] [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20118 (a) in fig. 8.1, a magnet is moving towards one end of a solenoid connected to a sensitive centre- zero meter. during this movement a current is induced in the solenoid. sn fig. 8.1   suggest three possible changes to the system in fig. 8.1 that would increase the induced  current. 1.  ...2.  ...3.  ...[3]  (b) fig. 8.2 shows a transformer. p is the primary coil. s is the secondary coil. the coils are  wound on an iron core. ps fig. 8.2   p has 200 turns and s has 800 turns. the e.m.f. induced across s is 24 v. the current in s is  0.50 a. the transformer operates with 100% efficiency.",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  calculate   (i) the voltage of the supply to p ,  voltage =  ...[2]  (ii) the current in p .  current =  ...[2] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 the graphs in fig. 9.1 show the relation between the current i and the potential difference v for a  resistor and a lamp. 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 v / v7 8 91234i / a56 lamp resistor fig. 9.1  (a) (i) describe how, if at all, the resistance varies as the current increases in 1. the resistor,  ...2. the lamp.  ...[2]   (ii) state the value of the potential difference when the resistor and the lamp have the same  resistance.  potential difference =  ...[1]  (b) the two components are connected in parallel to a supply of e.m.f. 4.0 v. calculate the total resistance of the circuit.  total resistance =  ...[4] [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over10 (a) in fig. 10.1, a is a 1000 /afii9821 resistor, c is a transistor, and d is a lamp. s is a 9 v supply. ad cs+ \u2013 b fig. 10.1   (i) name the component labelled b.  ...[1]   (ii) at 20 \u00b0c the resistance of b is 800 /afii9821.    at 100 \u00b0c the resistance of b is 25 /afii9821.    in terms of the p.d. across b, explain what happens in the circuit as the temperature  varies from 20 \u00b0c to 100 \u00b0c.  ... ... ... ... ... ...[4]  (b) suggest a practical use for this circuit. ... ...[1] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201111 fig. 11.1 shows the main components of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. heater cathode y-plates x-platesvacuumfluorescent screen electron beam anode system fig. 11.1  (a) state the purpose of   (i) the heater,  ... ...   (ii) the cathode, ... ...   (iii) the anode system. ... ... ...  [4]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 (b) without deflection, the electron beam produces a spot at the centre of the fluorescent screen.  a deflection of the spot towards the top of the screen is required.   (i) describe how the y -plates can be used to bring about this deflection.  ...  ...   (ii) fig. 11.2 shows the y -plates. fig. 11.2    on fig. 11.2, sketch the pattern of the electric field produced between the plates.  [4] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 33055/6 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *7656704974* physics 0625/32 paper 3  extended october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 fig. 1.1 shows a simple pendulum being used by a student to investigate the energy changes at  various points in the pendulum\u2019s swing. 2.000  m (from pivot to centre of mass of cylinder) narrow light beam light sourcesmall cylinder mass 80  glight sensor (connected to timing circuit)stringpivot fig. 1.1  (a) when the string is displaced by a small angle from the vertical, the height of the cylinder changes so that its centre of mass is now 1.932 m below the pivot. determine the gravitational potential energy gained by the cylinder. use g = 10 m / s 2.  gravitational potential energy gained =  .. [3]  (b) the cylinder is released from the displaced position in (a). calculate the expected speed of  the cylinder when the string is vertical.  expected speed =  .. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) as the string passes through the vertical, the narrow beam of light is interrupted by the  cylinder for 22 ms. the cylinder has a diameter of 2.5 cm.   (i) calculate the actual speed of the cylinder.  actual speed =  ...   (ii) suggest how the difference between the actual and expected speeds could occur. ... ... ... ...   [3]   [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20112 the racing car shown in fig. 2.1 uses a kinetic energy recovery system (kers). this system  stores within the car some of the kinetic energy lost when the car slows down for a corner. the driver can later release the stored energy when maximum power is required. fig. 2.1  (a) the car approaches a corner and decelerates from 82 m / s to 61 m / s in 0.90 s.   calculate the deceleration.  deceleration =  .. [2]  (b) (i) the energy lost during the braking in (a) is 8.4 \u00d7 105 j. 40% of this lost energy is directed  to the kers system. determine the amount of energy stored.  energy stored =  ...   (ii) the driver later uses all of this stored energy to give 60 kw of useful extra power for 3.0 s.    calculate the energy released.  energy released =  ...    (iii) calculate the efficiency of the kers system.  efficiency =  ...  [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) suggest a possible device to store energy when a moving vehicle slows down. for this device,  state the change that occurs as more energy is stored. device  ...change  .. ... .. [2]   [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 fig. 3.1 shows a house brick of dimensions 21.0 cm \u00d7 10.0 cm \u00d7 7.00 cm. 7.00  cm21.0  cm 10.0  cm fig. 3.1  the brick is held under water with its largest surfaces horizontal. the density of water is 1000 kg / m3.  (a) calculate the difference in pressure between the top and the bottom surfaces of the brick.  pressure difference =  .. [2]  (b) use your value from (a) to calculate the upward force exerted on the brick by the water.  upward force =  .. [2]  (c) the mass of the brick is 3.09 kg. calculate the acceleration of the brick when it is released.  acceleration =  .. [3]   [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over4 a sealed balloon containing some helium gas is released and rises into the upper atmosphere. as  the balloon rises the temperature of the helium falls and the balloon expands.  explain, in terms of atoms,  (a) the effect of the fall in temperature on the helium pressure,  ... ... ... ... .. [3]  (b) the effect of the expansion of the balloon on the helium pressure. ... ... ... ... .. [3]   [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 fig. 5.1 shows an x-ray tube. target glass tube vacuumhigh speed electron beam x-rayscopper rodblack surfacefins fig. 5.1  in the production of x-rays, the target gets very hot. thermal energy must be removed from the  target. the tube has several design features to enable this to happen.  for each of the following types of energy transfer, describe how the design of the tube increases the rate of energy transfer. state where the thermal energy transfer mostly happens, the particular design feature that increases the rate of this transfer, and a brief explanation.  (a) conduction where  design feature  ...explanation  ... .. [3]  (b) convectionwhere  design feature  ...explanation  ... .. [3]  (c) radiationwhere  design feature  ...explanation  ... .. [3]   [total: 9]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over6 fig. 6.1 shows an enlarged view of a spherical raindrop, centre o. raindrop oaira fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, draw a ray in the air striking the raindrop at a with an angle of incidence of 59\u00b0  and coming from the left.  [1]  (b) the water in the raindrop has a refractive index of 1.33.   (i) show by calculation that the angle of refraction at a is about 40\u00b0.   [2]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, draw the path of the refracted ray to the point where it strikes the inner surface of the raindrop. label this point b.  [1]  (c) the ray is partially reflected at b.   draw the normal and the reflected ray at b.  [1]  (d) extend the reflected ray to strike the surface of the raindrop again. at this point it is partially refracted out of the raindrop. draw the approximate path of this ray as it emerges into the air. [1]   [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20117 (a) state an approximate value for   (i) the speed of sound in air, .   (ii) the speed of light in air. .  [2]  (b) use your value from (a)(i) to calculate the frequency of a sound wave that has a wavelength  of 1.2 m.  frequency =  .. [2]  (c) a meteorologist observes an approaching thunderstorm and records a time difference of 4.8 s between seeing a lightning flash and hearing the thunder that follows.   (i) calculate the distance of the thunderstorm from the meteorologist.  distance =  ...   (ii) state an assumption you made when calculating this distance.  ... ... ...   [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over8 fig. 8.1 shows a loudspeaker cone oscillating to produce sound waves. cone oscillates to produce sound waves loudspeakercone fig. 8.1  (a) as the sound wave passes a point, it produces regions of higher and lower pressure. state  the names of these regions.  higher pressure  ..  lower pressure  .. [2]  (b) describe how the movement of the loudspeaker cone produces these regions of different pressure. higher pressure  .. ...  ...lower pressure  .. .. [2]  (c) state the effect on the loudness and pitch of the sound from the loudspeaker when   (i) the amplitude increases but the frequency of the sound stays the same,loudness  pitch  ...   (ii) the amplitude stays the same but the frequency increases.loudness  pitch  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 fig. 9.1 shows a circuit containing a battery, three resistors and an ammeter. 2 \u03c9 6 \u03c91 \u03c9 a fig. 9.1  (a) (i) write down the equation for the effective resistance rp of two resistors of resistances r1  and r2 connected in parallel.   (ii) use this equation to calculate the effective resistance of the two resistors in parallel in  fig. 9.1.  effective resistance =  .. [2]  (b) a voltmeter is to be used to measure the potential difference across the resistors in parallel.   (i) on fig. 9.1, draw the voltmeter in position in the circuit, using the correct circuit symbol.   (ii) the ammeter reads 1.6 a. calculate the reading on the voltmeter.  voltmeter reading =  .. [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) state what happens to the ammeter reading if the 1 \u03c9 resistor is replaced by a 3 \u03c9 resistor.  ...  .. [1]   [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201110 the circuit shown in fig. 10.1 was designed by an electronics student to provide a warning, by  sounding the buzzer, that there is light in a photographic darkroom at times when it is in use. a c p r qswitchblogic gate xcomponent ybuzzer + \u20136 v fig. 10.1  when the darkroom is in use the switch is moved to position p .  when it is not in use, the switch is in position q.  depending upon the light level, the resistance of the light dependent resistor varies between much higher and much lower than the resistance of resistor r.  (a) state what happens to the resistance of the light dependent resistor when the light level changes from dark to light.  ... .. [1]  (b) write down whether the voltage level is high (logic 1) or low (logic 0) at the various points in  the circuit in the following situations:   (i) at a light in the darkroom,       dark in the darkroom,    (ii) at b switch in position p ,       switch in position q.    [2]  (c) the output c of logic gate x is only high (logic 1) when both inputs a and b are high (logic 1). state which type of gate is logic gate x.  .. [1]  (d) state the name of component y . .. [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (e) explain whether or not the student\u2019s circuit achieves the aim of providing a warning that there  is light in the darkroom when it is in use.  ... ... ... .. [2]   [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201111 in the laboratory demonstration shown in fig. 11.1, a copper rod rolls at a steady speed down  the sloping parallel copper rails. the rails are in the region of a strong magnetic field that acts vertically downwards. parallel copper rails sloping downwards in direction of arrowcopper rodconnecting wiresdirection of magnetic fieldvery sensitive centre-zero voltmeter v fig. 11.1  (a) explain why the voltmeter shows a deflection.  ... ... ... .. [2]  (b) state, with reasons, the effect on the voltmeter deflection of the following changes:   (i) increasing the strength of the magnetic field,deflection  ...reason  ... ... ...   (ii) slightly increasing the slope of the copper rails,deflection  ...reason  ... ... ...",
            "17": "17 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (iii) changing the direction of the magnetic field so it is parallel to the copper rails and directed  down the slope. deflection  ...reason  ... ... ...   [4]   [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201112 the most abundant stable isotope of strontium is strontium-88. its nucleon number is 88 and its  proton number is 38. in nuclide notation it is written x ysr.  (a) write down   (i) the values of x and y for strontium-88, x = .  y = .   (ii) the number of neutrons in a nucleus of strontium-88, .   (iii) the number of electrons in a neutral atom of strontium-88. .   [3]  (b) strontium-90 is a radioactive isotope produced by nuclear reactions. state how the structure of this isotope differs from that of strontium-88.  ... ... ... ... .. [2]   [total: 5]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/32/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (leo/dj) 33048/8 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. *7105893052* physics 0625/33 paper 3 extended october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over1 an astronaut has a mass of 65 kg on earth, where the gravitational field strength is 10 n / kg.  (a) calculate the astronaut\u2019s weight on earth.  weight on earth = [2]  (b) complete the following sentence.   the astronaut\u2019s weight on earth is the ... force  between the astronaut and ... . [1]  (c) the astronaut undertakes a moon landing. on the moon the gravitational field strength  is 1.6 n / kg.   (i) state the astronaut\u2019s mass on the moon.  mass =  ...   (ii) calculate the weight of the astronaut on the moon.  weight on moon =  ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20112 a person is standing on the top of a cliff, throwing stones into the sea below. cliff sea fig. 2.1  (a) the person throws a stone horizontally.   (i) on fig. 2.1, draw a line to show the path which the stone might take between leaving the  person\u2019s hand and hitting the sea.   (ii) on the line you have drawn, at a point halfway to the sea, mark the stone and the direction of the force on the stone.  [3]  (b) later, the person drops a small stone and a large stone vertically from the edge of the cliff.   comment on the times taken for the two stones to hit the water.  ...  ... ... ...[2]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) 800 m from the point where the person is standing, a navy ship is having target practice.   the person finds that if a stone is dropped vertically at the same time as the spurt of smoke  from the ship\u2019s gun is seen, the stone hits the water at the same time as the sound from the  gun is heard.   sound travels at 320 m / s in that region.   calculate the velocity with which the stone hits the water.  velocity =  ...[4]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 (a) (i) state the difference between a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.  ... ...   (ii) state one example of a vector quantity. ...  [2]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows the top of a flagpole. 100  n 60\u00b0 t fig. 3.1   the flagpole is held vertical by two ropes. the first of these ropes has a tension in it of 100 n  and is at an angle of 60\u00b0 to the flagpole. the other rope has a tension t, as shown.   the resultant force is down the pole and of magnitude 200 n.  in the space below, using a scale of 1 cm = 20 n, draw a scale drawing to find the value of the  tension t. clearly label 100 n, 200 n and t on your drawing.  tension t =  ...[3]  [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over4 a soldier wears boots, each having an area of 0.016 m2 in contact with the ground.  the soldier weighs 720 n.  (a) (i) write down the equation that is used to find the pressure exerted by the soldier on the  ground.   (ii) calculate the pressure exerted by the soldier when he is standing to attention, with both boots on the ground.  pressure =  ... [2]  (b) the soldier is crossing a sandy desert.   explain, stating the relevant physics, why this soldier is at an advantage over another soldier  who has the same weight but smaller feet.  ... ... ... ...[2]  (c) the soldier\u2019s unit is sent to a cold country, and on one occasion he has to cross a frozen lake.   suggest one way that the soldier can reduce the risk of the ice breaking under his weight.  ... ... ...[1]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 two workmen are employed on a building project, as shown in fig. 5.1. workman 1 workman 2 fig. 5.1  (a) workman 1 drops a hammer, which falls to the ground. the hammer has a mass of 2.0 kg,  and is dropped from a height of 4.8 m above the ground.   (i) calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the hammer when it is dropped.  change in gravitational potential energy =  ...[2]   (ii) describe the energy changes from the time the hammer leaves the hand of workman 1 until it is at rest on the ground.  ... ... ... ...[2]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) workman 2 picks up the hammer and takes it back up the ladder to workman 1.   he climbs the first 3.0 m in 5.0 s. his total weight, including the hammer, is 520 n.   (i) calculate the useful power which his legs are producing.  power =  ...[2]  (ii) in fact his body is only 12% efficient when climbing the ladder.    calculate the rate at which energy stored in his body is being used.  rate =  ...[1] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20116 (a) (i) in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus you would use to measure  the specific heat capacity of a liquid. if you choose an electrical method, you must include the circuit.  [3]   (ii) list the quantities you would need to measure, or previously know, in order to calculate the specific heat capacity of the liquid.  ... ... ... ... ...[3]  (b) some sea water has a specific heat capacity of 3900 j / (kg \u00b0c) and a boiling point of  100.6 \u00b0c.   (i) calculate the energy required to raise the temperature of 0.800 kg of this sea water from 12.0 \u00b0c up to its boiling point. state the equation that you use.  energy =  ...[4]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) the energy to raise the temperature in (b)(i) is supplied at the rate of 620 w.    calculate the time taken to raise the sea water to its boiling point.  time =  ...[2]  [total: 12]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20117 fig. 7.1 shows a circuit containing a 12 v power supply, some resistors and an ammeter whose  resistance is so small that it may be ignored. 6 \u03c9 2 \u03c9 4 \u03c912 v a 3 \u03c9 fig. 7.1  (a) (i) determine the potential difference across the 2 \u03c9 resistor.  potential difference =  ...[1]   (ii) state the potential difference across the 3 \u03c9 resistor.  .. [1]  (b) calculate the effective resistance of   (i) the 2 \u03c9 and 4 \u03c9 resistors connected in series,  resistance =  ...[1]   (ii) the 3 \u03c9 and 6 \u03c9 resistors connected in parallel.  resistance =  ...[2]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) calculate the reading on the ammeter.  ammeter reading =  ...[2]  (d) without further calculation, state what happens, if anything, to the ammeter reading if   (i) the 2 \u03c9 resistor is shorted out with a thick piece of wire,  ...   (ii) the thick piece of wire from (d)(i) and the 3 \u03c9 resistor are both removed.  ...  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20118 fig. 8.1 shows a simple motor with a rectangular coil that is free to rotate about an axis a1a2. the  coil is connected to a battery by brushes b1 and b2. n + \u2013s b2b1 a2a1 fig. 8.1  (a) brush b1 is connected to the positive terminal of the battery and brush b2 is connected to the  negative terminal of the battery.   (i) on fig. 8.1, use an arrow to show the direction of the conventional current in the coil. [1]   (ii) state the direction in which the coil rotates, when viewed from the end closest to the  brushes.  ...[1]  (b) state what difference, if any, each of the following changes makes to the rotation of the coil:   (i) using a battery with a larger potential difference, ...   (ii) using a coil with several turns of wire carrying the same current as in (a),  ...   (iii) using a stronger magnetic field. ...  [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) the structure of the motor is very similar to that of an a.c. generator. use ideas about induction  to suggest why the current from the battery falls as the motor speeds up.  ... ... ...[1]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20119 fig. 9.1 represents a ray of monochromatic light passing through a rectangular glass block. 45\u00b0 26\u00b0glass block \u03b1 fig. 9.1 (not to scale)  (a) what is meant by the term monochromatic?  ...  ...[1]  (b) use the information on fig. 9.1 to determine the refractive index of the glass.  refractive index =  ...[2]  (c) the angle \u03b1 on fig. 9.1 is not drawn with the correct value.state the correct value of angle \u03b1.  \u03b1 =  ...[1]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (d) after the ray has left the glass block, it passes into a block of ice, whose refractive index is  1.31.   how does the speed of light in ice compare with   (i) the speed of light in air,  .   (ii) the speed of light in glass.  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201110 fig. 10.1 shows schematically a digital electronic circuit. light sensor heat sensorrelay and lampa b fig. 10.1  (a) state the name of the logic gate   (i) at a,  ...   (ii) at b.  ...  [2]  (b) the light sensor has a \u201chigh\u201d (logic 1) output in bright light and a \u201clow\u201d (logic 0) output when it  is dark.   the heat sensor has a \u201chigh\u201d (logic 1) output when it is hot and a \u201clow\u201d (logic 0) output when it  is cold.   state the outputs of a and b when   (i)  it is bright and cold,  output of a =  ...  output of b =  ...   (ii) it is dark and hot.  output of a =  ...  output of b =  ...  [4]  (c) suggest why b is connected to a relay in order to light the lamp. ... ...[1]  (d) suggest a practical use for this circuit. ... ... ...[1]  [total: 8]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 201111 (a) in a laboratory\u2019s secure radioactivity cupboard are two unlabelled radioactive sources. a  scientist knows that one is an alpha-emitter and the other is a beta-emitter, but is not sure which is which.   a radiation detector, a magnet and some paper are available.   briefly describe two different experimental tests, using this equipment, which would allow the  scientist to identify which is the alpha-emitter and which is the beta-emitter. test outcome for alpha outcome for beta  [4]  (b) radioactive carbon-14 (14 6c) decays by emitting \u03b2-particles.   (i) what are the values of the proton and nucleon numbers of carbon-14?  proton number  ... nucleon number  ...[2]  (ii) carbon-14 is absorbed by living organisms. when the organism dies, no more carbon-14  is absorbed. the carbon-14 already absorbed decays with a half-life of 5730 years.    recent human skeletons have an activity of 64 units, but a human skeleton dug up by an archaeologist has an activity of 8 units.    determine the age of this ancient skeleton.  age =  ...[2]  [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (leo/cgw) 34179/2 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *9094760038* physics 0625/51 paper 5  practical test october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a metre rule.   carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. y 50.0  cm markmetre rule pivotzero endx d x fig. 1.1  y ou are provided with a 1.0 n load, labelled x.  (a) (i) place the load x  on the rule so that its centre is at d = 5.0 cm from the zero end of  the rule as shown in fig. 1.1. record the value of d in table 1.1.   (ii) adjust the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to being balanced,  with the 50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot.    (iii) measure, and record in the table, the distance x from the centre of the load x to the  pivot.   (iv) measure, and record in the table, the distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.    (v) repeat the steps (i) \u2013 (iv) using d values of 10.0 cm, 15.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 25.0 cm.  table 1.1 d / cm x / cm y / cm  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) plot the graph of y / cm (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis). y ou do not need to include the  origin (0,0) on your graph.  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ..[2]  (d) calculate the weight w of the metre rule using the equation w = l g, where l = 1.0 n.  w  =  ..[2]   [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate temperature changes when hot water and cold water  are mixed.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water and a supply of cold (room temperature) water.  (a) (i) pour 100 cm3 of cold water into the beaker labelled a.    measure and record the temperature \u03b8c of the water in beaker a.  \u03b8c =  ..   (ii) measure and record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water supplied.  \u03b8h =  ..   (iii) add 100 cm3 of the hot water to the water in beaker a.    measure and record the temperature \u03b8m of the mixture of hot and cold water.  \u03b8m =  ..    (iv) state two precautions that you took to ensure the reliability of your value of the temperature  \u03b8m. 1.  ...  .. 2.  ...  ..   (v) calculate \u03b8av, the average of \u03b8c and \u03b8h.  average \u03b8av =  ..[4]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) empty the water from beaker a.   (ii) repeat the steps (a)(i), (ii), (iii) and (v) using 130 cm3 of cold water and 130 cm3 of  hot water.  \u03b8c =  ..    \u03b8h =  ..  \u03b8m =  ..  average \u03b8av =  ..[2]   (c) a student suggests that the temperature of the mixture \u03b8m should be the average of \u03b8c  and \u03b8h.   state whether your experimental results support this suggestion and justify your  statement by reference to your results. statement  .justification  ... .. .. ..[2]  (d) suggest a practical reason in this experiment for the temperature of the mixture  \u03b8m  being different from the average value \u03b8av, even when the precautions you have stated  in (a)(iv) have been taken. .. ..[1]  (e) suggest a modification to the experiment which should reduce the difference between  \u03b8m and \u03b8av.  .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the current in resistors in a circuit.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. the circuit is set up for you. apower source d ba c fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. record the current ia in the circuit.  ia=  ..    switch off.   (ii) change the position of the ammeter to the position marked b on fig. 3.1. switch  on. record the current ib in the circuit.  ib=  ..    switch off.   (iii) change the position of the ammeter to the position marked c on fig. 3.1. switch  on. record the current ic in the circuit.  ic=  ..    switch off.   (iv) change the position of the ammeter to the position marked d on fig. 3.1. switch  on. record the current id in the circuit.  id=  ..[4]    switch off.",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) theory suggests that ia= ib+ ic and id= ib+ ic.   (i) calculate ib+ ic.  ib+ ic =  ..   (ii) state whether your experimental results support the theory and justify your  statement by reference to your results. statement  .justification  ... .. .. [3]  (c) (i) connect the voltmeter so that it measures the potential difference v across the  combination of the three resistors. record the potential difference v.  v =  ..   (ii) calculate the resistance r of the combination of the three resistors using the     equation r =  v i.  r =  ..[2]  (d) on fig. 3.1, draw in the voltmeter connected as described in (c)(i) using the standard  symbol for a voltmeter. [1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will investigate the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. n lb aco rr1ray trace sheet mm1 2 cm  eye fig. 4.1  (a) draw a line 10 cm long near the middle of the ray trace sheet. label the line mr. draw a  normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the point at which nl crosses mr with the letter b.  (b) draw a line 8 cm long from b at an angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0 to the normal below mr and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a. record the angle of incidence i  in table 4.1.  (c) place the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on the line mr. the mirror has a line drawn on it. one end of this line must be at point b.  (d) place a pin p 1 at a. ",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use (e) view the line on the mirror and the image of pin p1 from the direction indicated by the  eye in fig. 4.1. place two pins p2 and p3 some distance apart so that pins p3, p2, the  image of p1, and the line on the mirror all appear exactly one behind the other. label the  positions of p2 and p3.  (f) remove the pins and the mirror and draw in the line joining the positions of p2 and p3.  continue the line until it meets the normal.  (g) measure, and record in the table, the angle of reflection r between the normal and the  line passing through p2 and p3. table 4.1 i / \u00b0 r / \u00b0  [3]  (h) draw a line parallel to mr and 2  cm above it. label the line m1r1. label the point at  which nl crosses the line with the letter c.   (i) draw a line from a to c. measure, and record in the table, the angle of incidence i  between line ac  and the normal.  (j) place the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on the line m1r1. one end of the line on  the mirror must be at point c.  (k) repeat the steps (d) \u2013 (g).  (l) in spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable care, it is possible that the values of the angle of reflection r will not be exactly the same as the values obtained from  theory. suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..[2]   tie in your ray trace sheet between pages 10 and 11. [5] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (sjf/sw) 34187/2 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *2613651556* physics 0625/52 paper 5  practical test october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will investigate the principle of moments.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. y 50.0  cm markmetre rule pivot modelling clayzero endx d fig. 1.1  y ou are provided with a piece of modelling clay.   (a) mould the piece of modelling clay into a cube shape. place the modelling clay on the  rule so that its centre is at a distance d = 10.0 cm from the zero end of the rule as shown  in fig. 1.1.    adjust the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to being balanced, with the  50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot.    (i) measure the distance x from the centre of the modelling clay to the pivot.   x =  ..   (ii) measure the distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   y =  ..   (iii) the mass m of the metre rule is provided for you on a card. record this value.  m =  ..   (iv) calculate the mass m1 of the piece of modelling clay using the equation  m1 = my x.   m1 =  .. [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) divide the modelling clay into two pieces, with one piece approximately twice the size of  the other piece.    (i) using the larger piece of modelling clay, of mass m2, repeat the steps in (a).   x =  ..  y =  ..  m2 =  ..   (ii) using the smaller piece of modelling clay, of mass m3, repeat the steps in (a).   x =  ..  y =  ..  m3 =  ..   (iii) calculate m2 + m3.   m2 + m3 =  .. [4]  (c) assuming that the experiment has been carried out with care, suggest two reasons why m 2 + m3 may not be equal to m1. 1.  ..  ..2.  .. ..[2]  (d) explain briefly how you ensured that the centre of the cube of modelling clay was at the  10.0 cm mark on the metre rule. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1] [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate temperature changes when hot and cold water are  mixed.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water and a supply of cold (room temperature) water.  (a) (i) pour 100 cm3 of hot water into the beaker labelled a. measure and record the  temperature \u03b8 h of the water in beaker a.  \u03b8 h =  ..   (ii) measure and record the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water supplied.  \u03b8c =  ..   (b) (i) add 10 cm 3 of the cold water to the water in beaker a. briefly stir the water in  beaker a.    (ii) measure and record in table 2.1 the temperature \u03b8m of the water in beaker a. also  record the volume v of water added.   (iii) as soon as possible repeat step (b)(i) five times. each time add 10 cm3 of cold  water to the water already in beaker a until a total of 60 cm3 has been added. each  time record in the table the temperature \u03b8m of the water in beaker a and the total  volume v of water added so far.  table 2.1 v / cm3\u03b8m / \u00b0c [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c)  plot the graph of \u03b8m / \u00b0c (y-axis) against v / cm3 (x-axis). include on your graph the  temperature \u03b8 h at volume v = 0, as recorded in (a)(i).   [4]  (d) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be important  to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled.  1.  ..2.  ..[2]  (e) suggest a practical precaution that will enable readings in this experiment to be taken  as accurately as possible.  .. ..[1] [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the potential difference across resistors in a circuit.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. the circuit is set up for you. a r1r2 r3power source fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. use the voltmeter to measure the potential difference va across  resistor r1.  va =  ..   (ii) measure the potential difference vb across resistors r2 and r3.   vb =  ..   (iii) measure the potential difference vc across the combination of the three resistors.  vc =  .. [4]    switch off.",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b)  theory suggests that vc = va + vb.    (i) calculate va + vb.  va + vb =  ..   (ii)  state whether your experimental results support the theory and justify your  statement by reference to your results. statement  .justification  ... .. .. [3]  (c) (i)  switch on. record the current i indicated on the ammeter.  i =  ..     switch off.  (ii) calculate the resistance r of the combination of the three resistors using the  equation r =  vc i.  r =  . [2]  (d)  on fig. 3.1 draw in the voltmeter connected as required in (a)(iii) using the standard  symbol for a voltmeter. [1] [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will investigate the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. eye3.0 cm ray trace sheetmnr ac lb fig. 4.1  (a) draw a line 16 cm long near the top of the ray trace sheet. label the line mr. draw a  normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the point at which the normal crosses mr with the letter n.  (b) draw a line 16 cm long parallel to and 10 cm below the line mr. label this line ab. label the point at which the normal crosses this line with the letter l.  (c)  place the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on the line mr. the mirror has a line drawn on it. one end of this line must be at point n.  (d) place a pin p 1 on line ab at a point 3.0 cm to the left of the normal. label this point c.",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use (e) view the line on the mirror and the image of pin p1 from the direction indicated by the  eye in fig. 4.1. place two pins p2 and p3 some distance apart so that the image of p1,  the line on the mirror, and pins p2 and p3, all appear exactly one behind the other. label  the positions of p2 and p3.  (f) remove the pins and the mirror and draw in the line joining the positions of p2 and p3.   continue the line until it meets the normal. draw in the line joining point c and point n.  (g)  measure, and record in table 4.1, the angle of incidence i  between the normal and the  line cn. measure, and record in the table, the angle of reflection r  between the normal  and the line passing through p2 and p3.  (h) repeat the steps (d) \u2013 (g) using a position of p1 5.0 cm from the normal.  table 4.1 i / \u00b0 r / \u00b0 [3]  (i) in spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable care, it is possible that the values of the angle of reflection r will not be exactly the same as the values obtained from  theory. suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..[2]   tie in your ray trace sheet between pages 10 and 11. [5] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (sjf/cgw) 34205/2 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *9126505672* physics 0625/53 paper 5  practical test october/november 2011  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will determine the density of modelling clay by two methods.  (a) method 1.   carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. y ou are provided with a piece of  modelling clay. wh dmodelling clay fig. 1.1   (i) mould the piece of modelling clay into a shape that is approximately a cube.  measure the height h, width w and depth d of the piece of modelling clay.  h  =    cm  w  =    cm  d  =    cm   (ii) calculate the volume v  of the piece of modelling clay using the equation v = hwd.  v  =  ... cm3   (iii) measure the mass m of the piece of modelling clay using the balance provided.  m  =  ... g   (iv) calculate the density \u03c1 of the modelling clay using the equation \u03c1 = m v.  \u03c1 =  . [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) method 2.   carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.2. y ou are provided with a beaker  containing water at room temperature. waterthread modelling clay measuring cylinder fig. 1.2   break the piece of modelling clay into two pieces with one piece approximately twice the  size of the other piece.    (i) using the smaller piece of modelling clay, measure its mass ms.   ms =  ..   (ii) pour approximately 50 cm3 of water into the measuring cylinder. record the volume  of water v1 in the measuring cylinder.  v1 =  ..   (iii) tie the thread around the smaller piece of modelling clay and lower it into the  measuring cylinder until it is completely covered with water. record the new volume v 2.  v2 =  ..   (iv) calculate the volume vs of the modelling clay using the equation vs = v2 \u2013 v1.  vs =  ..   (v) calculate the density \u03c1 of the modelling clay using the equation \u03c1 = ms vs.  \u03c1 =  ..[5]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use (c) assuming that the experiment has been carried out with reasonable care, suggest two  reasons why the two values obtained for the density of the modelling clay may not be the same. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..[2] [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the energy changes that occur when hot and cold  water are mixed.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water and a supply of cold (room temperature) water.  (a) (i) pour 50 cm3 of cold water into the beaker labelled a. measure and record the  temperature \u03b8c of this water.  \u03b8c =  ..   (ii) pour 50 cm3 of hot water into the beaker labelled b. measure and record the  temperature \u03b8h of this water.    \u03b8h =  ..   (iii) as soon as you have taken the temperature, pour the 50 cm3 of water from beaker  a into beaker b. briefly stir the mixture then measure and record the temperature  \u03b8m of the mixture.  \u03b8m =  .. [3]  (b) (i) calculate the gain in thermal energy ec of the cold water using the equation ec = k(\u03b8m \u2013 \u03b8c)    where k = 210 j / \u00b0c.  ec =  ..   (ii) calculate the loss in thermal energy eh of the hot water using the equation  eh = k(\u03b8h \u2013 \u03b8m)    where k = 210 j / \u00b0c.  eh =  .. [2]  (c) a student suggests that all the thermal energy lost by the hot water is gained by the cold water. e c and eh should therefore be equal.   (i) state whether your experimental results support this suggestion and justify your statement by reference to your results. statement  .justification  ... .. [2]   (ii) suggest a practical reason in this experiment why e c might be different from eh.  .. .. [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) another student was asked to suggest quantities that should be kept constant if this  experiment is repeated in order to check the readings. table 2.1 shows the suggestions. place a tick (\u2713) in the second column of the table next to each correctly suggested quantity.  table 2.1 suggestion avoid parallax errors when taking readings number of stirsroom temperaturestarting temperature of cold water starting temperature of hot wateruse only two or three significant figures for the final answers[2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a wire.   y ou will use the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. a vpower source pq metre rulel fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v  across a length l = 0.250 m of the wire pq as shown in fig. 3.1. switch off.   (ii) calculate the resistance r of the length l = 0.250 m of wire using the equation r = v i.    record this value of r in the table.   (iii) repeat steps (i) and (ii) using l  values of 0.500 m and 0.750 m.   (iv) complete the heading for each column of the table. table 3.1 l  / v / i /r  / 0.250 0.5000.750[5]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) use data from the table to suggest and justify a relationship between the length l  of the wire and its resistance r. show your working. relationship  ..  ..justification  ... .. ..[3]  (c) use your results to predict the resistance of a 1.500 m length of the same wire. show  your working.  prediction =  . [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will investigate the formation of images by a converging lens.    carry out the following instructions referring to fig 4.1. illuminated object lensscreen v u fig. 4.1  (a) (i) place the screen about 1.0 m from the illuminated object.   (ii) place the lens between the object and the screen so that the centre of the lens is at a distance u = 0.200 m from the object. adjust the position of the screen until a  clearly focused image is formed on the screen.    (iii) measure (in metres) the distance v  between the centre of the lens and the screen.   (iv) record the values of u and v  in table 4.1.   (v) repeat the steps in (i) \u2013 (iv) using values for u of 0.250 m, 0.300 m, 0.350 m and  0.400 m. table 4.1 u / m v / m 1 u/1 m 1 v/1 m   (vi) calculate the values of 1u and 1 v and enter them in the table. [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011for examiner\u2019s use (b) plot the graph of  1 v/1 m (y-axis) against  1 u/1 m (x-axis).  0 01 010 [4]  (c) (i) use the graph to find the intercept on the y-axis.  intercept on the y-axis =  ..   (ii) use the graph to find the intercept on the x-axis.  intercept on the x-axis =  .. [2]  (d) state and briefly explain one precaution you took in order to obtain reliable  measurements. precaution   ..explanation  .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (sjf/cgw) 34182/5 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *1313135592* physics 0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2011  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 an igcse student is determining the weight of a metre rule.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. y 50.0  cm markmetre rule pivotx d x fig. 1.1  x is a 1.0 n load.  the student places the load x on the rule so that its centre is at d = 5.0 cm from the zero end of  the rule, as shown in fig.1.1. he adjusts the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to  being balanced, with the 50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot.   he measures and records the distance x  from the centre of the load x to the pivot, and the  distance y  from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule. he repeats the procedure using d values  of 10.0 cm, 15.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 25.0 cm. the readings of d, x and y are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 d / cm x / cm y / cm   5.0 23.7 21.3 10.0 21.0 19.115.0 18.5 16.320.0 16.0 14.125.0 13.9 12.0",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (a) plot the graph of y / cm (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis). y ou do not need to include the origin  (0,0) on your graph. [4]  (b) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.   g =  .. [2]  (c) calculate the weight w of the metre rule using the equation w = l g, where l = 1.0 n.  w  =  .. [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 (d) the calculation of w is based on the assumption that the centre of mass of the rule is at the  50.0 cm mark.   (i) describe briefly how you would determine the position of the centre of mass of the rule.  ... ...   (ii) describe how you would modify the experiment if the centre of mass was at the 49.7 cm  mark.  ... ...[2] [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over2 the igcse class is investigating temperature changes when cold water and hot water are mixed.  (a) a student records the temperature \u03b8c of 100 cm3 of cold water and the temperature \u03b8h of  100 cm3 of hot water. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.1   write down the temperature \u03b8c shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.1.  \u03b8c =  .. [2]  (b) the hot water is at a temperature \u03b8h = 86 \u00b0c.   calculate \u03b8av , the average of \u03b8c and \u03b8h.  average \u03b8av =  .. [1]  (c) the student adds 100 cm3 of the hot water to the cold water. she records the temperature \u03b8m  of the mixture of hot and cold water, \u03b8m = 48 \u00b0c.    state two precautions (other than repeating the experiment) that the student could take to  ensure the reliability of her value of the temperature \u03b8m. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2]  (d) suggest a practical reason in this experiment for the temperature of the mixture \u03b8m being  different from the average value \u03b8av , even when the student has taken the precautions you  suggested in (c). ... ...[1]  (e) suggest a modification to the experiment which should reduce the difference between  \u03b8m  and \u03b8av.  ... ...[1]  (f) the student decides to repeat the experiment to check the readings. suggest one possible  variable that she should keep constant.  ...[1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 the igcse class is investigating the current in resistors in a circuit.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. apower source d ba c fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures the current ia at the position a shown by the ammeter, and then at  positions b (ib), c (ic) and d (id).   the readings are:   ia= 0.28 a                     ib = 0.13 a                     ic = 0.14 a                     id = 0.27 a   theory suggests that ia = ib + ic and id = ib + ic.    (i) calculate ib + ic.  ib + ic =  ...   (ii) state whether the experimental results support the theory. justify your statement by  reference to the readings. statement  ..justification   ... ... [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) the student suggests repeating the experiment to confirm her conclusion. she connects a  variable resistor (rheostat) in series with the switch. state the purpose of the variable resistor.  ... ...[1]  (c) the student connects a voltmeter and records the potential difference v across the combination of the three resistors.   (i) on fig. 3.1, draw in the voltmeter connected as described, using the standard symbol for  a voltmeter.   [1]   (ii) write down the voltmeter reading shown on fig. 3.2. 0192 837465 v10 fig. 3.2  v =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate the resistance r of the combination of the three resistors using the equation     r = v i.  r =  .. [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 an igcse student is investigating reflection of light in a plane mirror.  fig. 4.1 shows the student\u2019s ray trace sheet. p2 p3o r m eyeray trace sheet fig. 4.1  (a) the line mr shows the position of a mirror.    (i) draw a normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the  point at which nl crosses mr with the letter b.  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) draw a line 8 cm long from b at an angle of incidence i = 40 \u00b0 to the normal below mr  and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a. record the angle of incidence i  in the first row of table 4.1. table 4.1 i  / \u00b0 r  / \u00b0 34 33  [2]  (b) fig. 4.2 shows the mirror which is made of polished metal and has a vertical line drawn on it.  mirror line fig. 4.2   the student places the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on mr. the lower end of the  line on the mirror is at point b. he places a pin p1 at a. he views the line on the mirror and  the image of pin p1 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1. he places two pins p2  and p3 some distance apart so that pins p3, p2, the image of p1, and the line on the mirror all  appear exactly one behind the other. the positions of p2 and p3 are shown.   (i) draw the line joining the positions of p2 and p3. continue the line until it meets the  normal.   (ii) measure, and record in the first row of table 4.1, the angle of reflection r between the  normal and the line passing through p2 and p3.  [2]  (c) the student draws a line parallel to mr and 2 cm above it. he places the mirror on this line  and repeats the procedure without changing the position of pin p1. his readings for i and r are  shown in the table.   in spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable care, it is possible that the values  of the angle of reflection r will not be exactly the same as the values obtained from theory.  suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy. 1.  ... ...2.  ... ...[2]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 (d) the student was asked to list precautions that should be taken with this experiment in order  to obtain readings that are as accurate as possible. table 4.2 shows the suggestions.    place a tick (\u2713) in the second column of the table next to each correctly suggested  precaution.  table 4.2 suggested precaution avoid parallax (line of sight) errors when taking readings with the protractor carry out the experiment in a darkened roomdraw the lines so that they are as thin as possible keep room temperature constantplace pins p 2 and p3 as far apart as possible  use only two or three significant figures for the final answers[3] [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over5 the igcse class is carrying out an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air.  fig. 5.1 indicates the method used. the experiment is conducted outside the school building.  student a student b stopwatch drum d fig. 5.1 (not to scale)  student a strikes a drum once as loudly as possible. student b stands some distance away from  student a and starts a stopwatch when she sees the drum being hit. she stops the stopwatch when she hears the sound. she records the time interval t in table 5.1. the experiment is repeated several times. she calculates the speed of sound v and enters the values in the table. table 5.1 t / s v / (m / s) 0.87 344.83 0.92 326.090.84 357.140.83 361.450.86 338.84  (a) suggest a suitable distance d  for students to use when carrying out this experiment.  d  =  .. [1]  (b) suggest a suitable instrument for measuring the distance d.  ...[1]  (c) calculate the average value v av for the speed of sound from the results in the table. show  your working.  vav =  .. [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (d) the student has recorded the values for the speed of sound v  to five significant figures.    state whether this is a suitable number of significant figures for the speed of sound in air in  this experiment. give a reason for your answer. statement  ..reason  ... ...[1] [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (sjf/sw) 34190/5 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *2897200453* physics 0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2011  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 the igcse class is investigating the law of moments.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used. y 50.0  cm markmetre rule pivot modelling clayx d fig. 1.1  (a) a student moulds a piece of modelling clay into a cube shape. he places the modelling clay   on the rule so that its centre is a distance d = 10.0 cm from the zero end of the rule, as shown  in fig.1.1.    he adjusts the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to being balanced, with the  50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot.    (i) on fig.1.1, measure the distance x  from the centre of the modelling clay to the pivot.   x =  ...   (ii) on fig.1.1, measure the distance y  from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   y =  ... [1]  (b) the diagram is drawn one tenth of actual size.    (i) calculate the actual distance x  from the centre of the modelling clay to the pivot.   x =  ...   (ii) calculate the actual distance y  from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   y =  ...   (iii) calculate the mass m1 of the piece of modelling clay using the equation m1 = my x    where the mass of the metre rule m = 112 g.  m1 =  ... [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) the student cuts the piece of modelling clay into two pieces, with one piece approximately  twice the size of the other piece.   using the larger piece of modelling clay, he repeats the procedure and obtains a result for the  mass m2 of 64.9 g.   using the smaller piece of modelling clay, he repeats the procedure and obtains a result for  the mass m3 of 34.5 g.   calculate (m2 + m3).  (m2 + m3) =  .. [1]  (d) assuming that the experiment has been carried out with care, suggest two reasons why  (m2 + m3) may not be equal to m1. 1.  ...  ...2.  ... ...[2]  (e) explain briefly how you would ensure that the centre of the cube of modelling clay is at the  10.0 cm mark on the metre rule. y ou may draw a diagram.  ...  ... ...[1] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20112 an igcse student is investigating temperature changes when hot water and cold water are mixed.  she is provided with a supply of hot water and a supply of cold water. (a) the temperature  \u03b8c of the cold water is 24 \u00b0c.   she pours 100 cm3 of the hot water into a beaker. record the temperature \u03b8h of this water, as  shown on the thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.1  \u03b8h =  ..  [1]  (b) she adds 10 cm3 of the cold water to the beaker of hot water. she briefly stirs the mixture of  hot and cold water and records in table 2.1 the temperature \u03b8m of the mixture of hot and cold  water. she quickly repeats this five times, adding 10 cm3 of cold water each time, until a total  of 60 cm3 has been added. she records the temperature \u03b8m of the mixture of hot and cold  water at each stage.  table 2.1 v / \u03b8m / 78 7468636159   (i) complete the volume column in the table, where v  is the total volume of cold water so  far added.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) plot the graph of temperature \u03b8 (y-axis) against volume v (x-axis). [4]  (d) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be important to  control the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled.  1.  ...2.  ...[2]  (e) suggest a practical precaution that will enable readings in this experiment to be taken as  accurately as possible.  ... ...[1] [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 the igcse class is investigating the potential difference across resistors in a circuit.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit. a r1r2 r3power source fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures the potential difference va across resistor r1.   write down the reading of va  shown in fig. 3.2. 5678 9 10 0.11.010 100432 1 0range v fig. 3.2  va  .. [1]  (b) he then measures the potential difference vb across resistors r2 and r3 and the potential  difference vc across the combination of the three resistors.   the values are: vb  = 1.4 v and vc  = 2.1 v.   theory suggests that vc = (va + vb ).    (i) calculate (va + vb ).  (va + vb ) =  ...",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over  (ii) state whether the experimental results support the theory. justify your statement by  reference to the results. statement  ..justification   ... ... [3]  (c) the current i indicated by the ammeter is 0.27 a. calculate the resistance r of the   combination of the three resistors using the equation r =  vc i.  r =  .. [1]  (d) on fig. 3.1, draw in the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference vb across  resistors r2 and r3. use the standard symbol for a voltmeter. [1]  (e) refer to fig. 3.2. comment on the student\u2019s choice of the 10 v range for the measurement  of va.  ...  ... ...[1] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 an igcse student is investigating the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  fig. 4.1 shows her ray trace sheet. mr ab eyep2 p3ray trace sheet fig. 4.1  (a) the line mr shows the position of a mirror.    (i) draw a normal to mr at its centre. label the normal nl with n at the centre of mr and l  on ab.    (ii) mark a point on ab, 3.0 cm to the left of l. label this point c. [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) fig. 4.2 shows the mirror which is made of polished metal and has a vertical line drawn on it.  the lower end of this line is at point n.  mirror line fig. 4.2   in the experiment, the student places a pin p1 at c. the student views the line on the mirror  and the image of pin p1 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1. she places two  pins p2 and p3 some distance apart so that the image of p1, the line on the mirror, and pins  p2 and p3, all appear exactly one behind the other. the positions of p2 and p3 are shown.    (i) draw the line joining the positions of p2 and p3. continue the line until it meets the  normal.    (ii) draw the line joining point c and point n.  [1]   (iii) measure, and record in table 4.1, the angle of incidence i  between the normal nl and the line cn. measure, and record in the table, the angle of reflection r  between the  normal and the line passing through p 2 and p3.   (iv) complete the column headings in the table. table 4.1 distance of p1 from the normal / i / r / 3.0 4.0 23 22 5.0 27 28 [2]  (c)  the student repeats the procedure using positions of p1 that are 4.0 cm and 5.0  cm from the  normal. the readings are shown in the table.   in spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable care, it is possible that the values  of the angle of reflection r will not be exactly the same as the values obtained from theory.  suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy. 1.  ... ...2.  ... ...[2]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 (d) suggest one precaution that you would take in this experiment to ensure that the results are  as accurate as possible.  ... ...[1] [total: 8] 5  the igcse class is investigating springs.  a student measures the length l  0 of a spring and then uses a stand and clamp to suspend the  spring vertically. he hangs a weight w on the spring and measures the new length l. he calculates  the extension e of the spring. he repeats the procedure using a range of weights.   table 5.1 shows some readings obtained by the student. the unstretched length l 0 of the spring is  16 mm. table 5.1 w / n 01 6 0 0.10 17 0.20 190.30 210.40 230.50 270.60 33",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 (a) complete the column headings in table 5.1. [1]  (b) complete the third column in the table by calculating the extension e of the spring.  [1]  (c) state whether the results support the suggestion that the extension is directly proportional to  the load. justify your answer by reference to the results. statement  ..justification   ... ...[2]  (d)  draw a diagram of the apparatus including the spring, clamp, a weight hanging on the spring  and a ruler positioned to measure the length of the spring. [2] [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w11_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (sjf/cgw) 34207/4 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *9564582109* physics 0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2011  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20111 an igcse student is investigating the passage of light through a transparent block using optics  pins.   the student\u2019s ray trace sheet is shown in fig. 1.1.  the student places two pins p1 and p2 to mark the incident ray. he looks through the block and  places two pins p3 and p4 to mark the emergent ray so that p3, p4 and the images of p1 and p2  appear to be exactly one behind the other. he draws the outline of the block. he removes the block and pins and draws in the incident ray and the emergent ray. a bray trace sheet eyetransparent block emergent rayincident ray fig. 1.1  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, mark suitable positions for the four pins. label the pins p1, p2, p3 and p4.   (ii) draw the normal at point a. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) (i) draw in the line ab. measure and record the angle of refraction r  between the line ab  and the normal.  r =  ...   (ii) measure and record the angle of incidence i  between the incident ray and the normal.  i =  ... [2]  (c) the student does not have a set square or any other means to check that the pins are vertical.  suggest how he can ensure that his p3 and p4 positions are as accurate as possible.  ...  ...[1] [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20112 an igcse student is investigating the energy changes that occur when hot water and cold water  are mixed.  the student is provided with a supply of hot water and a supply of cold water.  the temperature of the cold water \u03b8c = 23 \u00b0c.  (a) the temperature of the hot water is shown in fig. 2.1. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.1   record the temperature \u03b8h of this hot water.  \u03b8h =  .. [1]  (b) the student pours 50 cm3 of the hot water into 50 cm3 of the cold water. he briefly stirs the  mixture and then records the temperature \u03b8m of the mixture, \u03b8m = 49 \u00b0c.   (i) calculate the gain in thermal energy ec of the cold water using the equation  ec = k (\u03b8m \u2013 \u03b8c),     where k = 210 j / \u00b0c.  ec =  ...   (ii) calculate the loss in thermal energy eh of the hot water using the equation  eh = k (\u03b8h \u2013 \u03b8m),     where k = 210 j / \u00b0c.  eh =  ... [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (c) the student suggests that all the thermal energy lost by the hot water is gained by the cold.  thus ec and eh should be equal.   (i) state whether the experimental results support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference to the results. statement  ..justification   ... ...[1]   (ii) suggest a practical reason in this experiment why e c might be different from eh.  ... ...[1]  (d) another student is asked to suggest quantities that should be kept constant if this experiment  is repeated in order to check the readings. table 2.1 shows the suggestions.    place a tick (\u2713) in the second column of the table next to each correctly suggested quantity.  table 2.1 suggested quantities avoid parallax (line of sight) errors when taking readings number of stirsroom temperaturestarting temperature of hot wateruse a digital thermometeruse only two or three significant figures for the final answers[2] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20113 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire.    the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1.  a q p l v2v power source metre rule fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures and records in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the potential  difference v across a length l =  0.250 m of wire pq.   she repeats the procedure using l  values of 0.500 m and 0.750 m.   (i) complete the heading for each column of the table.   (ii) calculate the resistance r  of each length l  of the wire using the equation r = v i.    record the values of r  in the table. table 3.1 l  / v / i /r  / 0.250 0.54 0.32 0.500 1.10 0.320.750 1.61 0.32[4]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) use numbers from the table to suggest and justify a relationship between the length l of the  wire and its resistance r. show your working. relationship  ...  ...justification   ... ...[3]  (c) use the results to predict the resistance of a 1.50 m length of the same wire. show your  working.  prediction  .. [2]  (d) another student proposes that the accuracy of the experiment would be improved by using a 12 v power source.    suggest two effects that this might have on the experiment. 1.  ...  ...2.  ... ...[2] [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20114 the igcse class is investigating the formation of images by a lens.  fig 4.1 shows the apparatus. illuminated object lensscreen v u fig. 4.1  a student places the screen about 1.0 m from the illuminated object. he places the lens between  the object and the screen at a distance u = 0.200 m from the object. he adjusts the position of the  screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the screen. he records the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen. he repeats the procedure  using different values of u. the  readings are shown in table 4.1. table 4.1 u / m v / m 1 u/1 m 1 v/1 m 0.200 0.596 5.00 1.68 0.300 0.304 3.33 3.29 0.400 0.244 2.50 4.10 0.500 0.214 2.00 4.67 0.600 0.198 1.67 5.05  (a) state and briefly explain one precaution you would take in order to obtain reliable measurements in this experiment. precaution  . ...explanation  ... ... ...[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) plot the graph of  1 v/1 m  (y-axis) against  1 u/1 m  (x-axis). both axes must start at 0 and extend  to 7.0. [4]  (c) (i) use the graph to find the intercept on the y-axis.  intercept on the y-axis =  ...   (ii) use the graph to find the intercept on the x-axis.  intercept on the x-axis =  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 20115 the igsce class is determining the density of modelling clay by two methods.  (a) method 1   a student moulds a piece of modelling clay into a cube shape as shown in fig. 5.1.  front viewwh d side view fig. 5.1   (i) on fig 5.1, measure the height h, width w and depth d of the cube-shaped piece of  modelling clay.  h  =  . cm  w  =  . cm  d  =  . cm   (ii) calculate the volume v of the modelling clay using the equation v = h w d.  v  =  ...   (iii) calculate the density \u03c1  of the modelling clay using the equation \u03c1 =  m v, where the mass  of the modelling clay m = 103 g.  \u03c1 =  .. [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 [turn over (b) method 2   the student cuts the piece of modelling clay into two pieces. one piece is approximately twice  the size of the other piece. the mass ms of the smaller piece is 34.5 g.    fig. 5.2a shows a measuring cylinder containing water. fig. 5.2b shows the same measuring  cylinder after the smaller piece of modelling clay has been lowered into it.  60 50 40 3070cm3 20 1060 50 4070cm3 10waterwaterthread modelling clay30 20  fig. 5.2a fig. 5.2b   (i) record the volume of water v1 in the measuring cylinder, as shown in fig. 5.2a.  v1 =  .. [1]   (ii) record the new volume v2 in the measuring cylinder, as shown in fig. 5.2b.  v2 =  .. [1]   (iii) describe briefly one precaution you would take to read the measuring cylinder correctly.  ... ... ...[1]   (iv) calculate the volume v s of the modelling clay using the equation vs = (v2 \u2013 v1).  vs =  ...   (v) calculate the density \u03c1 of the modelling clay using the equation \u03c1 =  ms vs, where  ms = 34.5 g.  \u03c1 =  .. [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/11 \u00a9 ucles 2011 (c) (i) assuming that the experiment has been carried out with care, suggest two reasons why  the two values obtained for the density of the modelling clay in (a) and (b) may not be the  same. 1.  ...2.  ...[2]   (ii) state which of the two methods for determining density (method 1 or method 2) you  judge to be less accurate. give a reason for your judgement. method  ..reason  ... ...[1] [total: 10] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        }
    },
    "2012": {
        "0625_s12_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib12 06_0625_11/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2012  [turn over      *9772978782* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2012     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  1 a cylindrical can is rolled along the ruler shown in the diagram.    0 c m 5 1 01 52 02 53 0  cmstarting position final position can rolled mark on can     the can rolls over twice.    what is the circumference (distance all round) of the can?  a 13  cm b 14  cm c 26  cm d 28  cm      2 a car is moving downhill along a road at a constant speed.   which graph is the speed  / time graph for the car?    a speed time00b speed time00 c speed time00d speed time00     3 in a race, a car travels 60 times around a 3.6  km track. this takes 2.4 hours.    what is the average speed of the car?  a 1.5  km  / h b 90  km  / h c 144  km  / h d 216  km  / h     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12 [turn over  4 which quantity is measured in newtons?  a density  b energy  c pressure  d weight      5 a geologist places a small rock on the left-han d pan of a balance. the two pans are level as  shown when masses with a total weight of 23  n are placed on the right-hand pan.   take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n.     0rock masses     what is the mass of the small rock?  a 0.023  kg b 2.3  kg c 23  kg d 230  kg      6 a stone has a volume of 0.50  cm3 and a mass of 2.0  g.    what is the density of the stone?  a 0.25  g / cm3  b 1.5  g / cm3  c 2.5  g / cm3  d 4.0  g / cm3     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  7 passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.    upper deck lower deck    why is this?  a they would cause the bus to become less stable.  b they would  cause the bus to slow down.  c they would  increase the kinetic energy of the bus.  d they would  lower the centre of mass of the bus.     8 the diagram shows a handle with three forces, each 100  n, applied to it. the handle is free to  move.    pivothandle100  n 100  n100  n     what is the effect of the forces on the handle?  a the handle will move downwards.  b the handle will not move. c the handle will turn anticlockwise (to the left). d the handle will turn clockwise (to the right).     9 in which pair of energy sources are both sources renewable?  a oil and coal  b oil and tidal  c tidal and geothermal  d tidal and nuclear fission   ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12 [turn over  10 an object on a thread is swinging between x and z, as shown in the diagram. it is momentarily at  rest at x and at z.    yxzthread     an incomplete word equation about the energy of the object is shown below.    gravitational potential energy   = kinetic energy   +  \u2026\u2026\u2026 energy   +   energy losses          at x            at y    at y    which form of energy is needed to complete the word equation?  a chemical  b gravitational potential  c internal  d strain      11 which statement is explained by reference to pressure?  a objects with greater mass have greater weight.  b one kilogram of water occupies more volume than one kilogram of lead. c spikes on running-shoes sink into the ground.  d water cooled to a low enough temperature turns to ice.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  12 the diagram shows a mercury manometer used to measure the pressure of gas in a container.   atmospheric pressure is 76  cm of mercury.    20  cm 12  cmmercurygas     what is the pressure of the gas?  a 56  cm of mercury  b 68  cm of mercury  c 84  cm of mercury  d 96  cm of mercury      13 brownian motion is observed when looking at smoke particles in air using a microscope.    what causes the smoke particles to move at random?  a smoke particles are hit by air molecules.  b smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.  c smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.  d smoke particles hit the walls of the container.      14 the molecules of a substance become more closely packed and move more quickly.    what is happening to the substance?  a a gas is being heated and compressed.  b a gas is being heated and is expanding.  c a liquid is boiling.  d a liquid is evaporating at room temperature.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12 [turn over  15 which pair contains only physical quantities that vary with temperature and so could be used in  making a thermometer?  a activity of a radioactive source, volume of a gas  b mass of a liquid, volume of a liquid  c activity of a radioactive source, mass of a solid  d volume of a gas, volume of a liquid      16 a heater supplies 80  j of energy to a block of metal. the temperature of the block rises by 20  \u00b0c.    what happens to the block of metal when its temperature falls by 10  \u00b0c?  a its internal energy decreases by 40  j.  b its internal energy decreases by 160  j.  c its internal energy increases by 40  j.  d its internal energy increases by 160  j.      17 an engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. the rod is just too big to fit into the hole  of the washer.    steel rodsteel washer     how can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod?  a cool the washer and put it over the rod.  b cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together. c heat the rod and then place it in the hole.  d heat the washer and then place it over the rod.     18 why does convection take place in a liquid when it is heated?  a liquids expand when they are heated.  b liquids start to bubble when they get close to boiling point.  c molecules in the liquid expand when they are heated.  d molecules near to the surface of the liquid escape into the air.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  19 two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid  is put on top, as shown.    lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench     which statement is correct?  a heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.  b no heat passes through the sides of either cup. c the bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup. d the lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.     20 what is the unit of wavelength?  a hertz  b metre  c metre per second  d second    21 which row correctly describes light waves and radio waves?     light waves radio waves  a longitudinal longitudinal  b longitudinal transverse  c transverse longitudinal  d transverse transverse    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12 [turn over  22 the diagram shows water waves passing through a gap in a harbour wall. the waves curve  round the wall and reach a small boat in the harbour.    boatharbour wall harbou rwaves gap     what is the name of this curving effect, and how can the gap be changed so that the waves are  less likely to reach the boat?     name of effect change to the gap  a diffraction make the gap slightly bigger  b diffraction make the gap slightly smaller  c refraction make the gap slightly bigger  d refraction make the gap slightly smaller     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  23 the image formed by a plane mirror is upright.    position of image eyeobject     what are the other characteristics of the image?     laterally inverted  (left to right) magnified  (larger than the object) virtual  a no yes yes  b yes no  no  c yes no  yes  d yes yes no     24 a student draws three rays of light from point p through a converging lens.    each point labelled f is a principal focus of the lens.    ffp ray x ray z ray y    which of the rays are drawn correctly?  a ray y only  b ray z only  c ray x and ray y  d ray x and ray z ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12 [turn over  25 a girl stands at a distance from a large building. she claps her hands and a short time later hears  an echo.    why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?  a the sound waves are  absorbed.  b the sound waves are  diffracted.  c the sound waves are  reflected.  d the sound waves are  refracted.     26 the diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of sound. the scales are the same  for all the diagrams.    which sound has the highest frequency?      a  b  c  dtime time time time    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  27 which statement describes a property of a magnet?  a it attracts ferrous materials.  b it could have only one pole (north or south).  c it points in a random direction when suspended.  d it repels non-ferrous materials.      28 which procedure may be used to demagnetise a steel bar?  a cooling it in a freezer  b earthing it with a copper wire  c placing it in a solenoid carrying a large direct current (d.c.)  d striking it repeatedly with a hammer      29 in which unit is potential difference measured?  a ampere  b ohm  c volt  d watt    30 the circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component x, hidden in a box.    the voltage-current graph for x is as shown.    a  v x + \u2013 variable voltage supply  voltage  current 0 0      what is the component x?  a a capacitor  b a closed switch c an open switch  d a resistor of constant resistance     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12 [turn over  31 which circuit contains a fuse?    a ab c dv a      32 a thermistor is used in a circuit to control a piece of equipment automatically.  what might this circuit be used for?  a lighting an electric lamp as it becomes darker  b ringing an alarm bell if a locked door is opened c switching on a water heater at a pre-determined time  d turning on an air conditioner when the temperature rises     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  33 a student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.    r  s tv  12  v     what happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal t is moved from r to s?  a it decreases from 12  v to 0  v.  b it increases from 0  v to 12  v.  c it remains at 0  v.  d it remains at 12  v.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12 [turn over  34 a circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2  a.    the time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.    160 140120100 80604020 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 current  / atime taken  to break the circuit  / s      what happens when the current in the circuit is 2  a and what happens when the current 18  a?     when the current is 2  a when the current is 18  a  a the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds  b the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit does not break  c the circuit does not break the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds  d the circuit does not break the circuit does not break      35 the diagram shows a coil connected to a battery and a switch. two unmagnetised iron bars hang  freely near opposite ends of the coil.    y xcoil  iron bar iron bar      what happens to the iron bars when the switch is closed?  a both x and y move away from the coil.  b both x and y move towards the coil.  c x moves towards the coil, y moves away from the coil.  d y moves towards the coil, x moves away from the coil. ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  36 a wire passes between the poles of a horseshoe magnet. there is a current in the wire in the  direction shown, and this causes a force to act on the wire.    n swirecurrentmagnet force    three other arrangements, p, q and r, of the wire and magnet are set up as shown.    s nn ss npqr magnet turned around current direction reversed current direction reversed and magnet turned around    which arrangement or arrangements will cause a force in the same direction as the original  arrangement?  a p, q and r b p and q only c p only d r only    37 the diagram shows a device to produce cathode rays.    evacuated glass container cathodeanode    which part of the device is heated and why?     part heated reason  a anode to emit electrons  b anode to emit protons  c cathode to emit electrons  d cathode to emit protons ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  38 a radioactive nucleus emits a \u03b2-particle.    nucleus \u03b2-particle     what happens to the proton number (atomic number) of the nucleus?  a it stays the same.  b it increases by 1. c it decreases by 2. d it decreases by 4.     39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row in the table correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles      40 which diagram could represent the structure of a neutral atom?    + + \u2013\u2013 \u2013key neutron proton electrona b ++\u2013 ++c +++d \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013   ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  blank page     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  blank page     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/m/j/12  blank page    "
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib12 06_0625_12/5rp  \u00a9 ucles 2012  [turn over      *8683799799* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2012     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  1 a cylindrical can is rolled along the ruler shown in the diagram.    0 c m 5 1 01 52 02 53 0  cmstarting position final position can rolled mark on can     the can rolls over twice.    what is the circumference (distance all round) of the can?  a 13  cm b 14  cm c 26  cm d 28  cm      2 drops of water are dripping steadily from a tap (faucet). the diagram shows a measuring cylinder  which has collected 120 drops of water.    2 4 6 8 10 cm3  water      how many drops in total will have been collected when the measuring cylinder reads 10  cm3?  a 48 b 60 c 180 d 300     3 in a race, a car travels 60 times around a 3.6  km track. this takes 2.4 hours.    what is the average speed of the car?  a 1.5  km  / h b 90  km  / h c 144  km  / h d 216  km  / h   ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12 [turn over  4 a metal block is heated until it is completely melted. it is then allowed to solidify.    what happens to the mass of the metal during the changes of state?     mass during  melting mass during  solidification  a decreases increases  b increases decreases  c increases stays constant  d stays constant stays constant      5 two objects x and y are placed on a balance.    the balance tilts as shown.    x y     what does this show about the masses and weights of objects x and y?     masses weights  a x has less mass than y x has less weight than y  b x has less mass than y x has more weight than y  c x has the same mass as y x has less weight than y  d x has the same mass as y x has more weight than y     6 a stone has a volume of 0.50  cm3 and a mass of 2.0  g.    what is the density of the stone?  a 0.25  g / cm3  b 1.5  g / cm3  c 2.5  g / cm3  d 4.0  g / cm3     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  7 passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.    upper deck lower deck    why is this?  a they would cause the bus to become less stable.  b they would  cause the bus to slow down.  c they would  increase the kinetic energy of the bus.  d they would  lower the centre of mass of the bus.     8 on which ball is a non-zero resultant force acting?     a  a ball moving at constant  speed on a smooth surface  direction of movementb  a ball at rest on a bench  c a free-falling ball which has just been releasedd  a ball floating on water  water direction of movement     9 electricity can be obtained from different energy resources.   which energy resource is used to obtain electricity without producing heat to boil water?  a coal  b gas  c hydroelectric  d nuclear ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12 [turn over  10 a ball is dropped on to a hard surface and bounces. it does not bounce all the way back to where  it started, so it has less gravitational potential energy than when it started.    hard surface ball dropped from here ball bounces  to here      what happens to the \u2018lost\u2019 energy?  a it is converted into chemical and strain energy.  b it is converted into internal (heat) energy and sound.  c it is destroyed as the ball rises upwards after hitting the ground.  d it is destroyed when the ball hits the ground.     11 what does a barometer measure?  a atmospheric density  b atmospheric pressure  c liquid density  d liquid pressure      12 in which position would a boy exert the most  pressure on the ground?  a lying on his back  b sitting down  c standing on one foot  d standing on two feet     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  13 on a warm day, a swimmer climbs out of a swimming pool into the open air and water evaporates  from his skin.    as the water evaporates, which molecules escape into the air first and what happens to the  average speed of the remaining water molecules?     first molecules  to escape average speed of the  remaining molecules  a least energetic decreases  b least energetic increases  c most energetic decreases  d most energetic increases    14 some air is trapped inside a metal can with a tightly fitting lid.    air  heat tightly fitting lid  metal can     when the can is heated strongly behind a safety screen, the lid is blown off by the increased  pressure inside the can.    what causes the increase in pressure of the air inside the can?  a the air molecules expand and take up more room.  b the air molecules move more quickly. c the number of molecules inside the can increases.  d the volume occupied by the molecules decreases.     15 a solid object has a very large thermal capacity.  what does this mean?  a a large amount of energy is needed to make the object become hot.  b a large amount of energy is needed to make the object melt.  c a small amount of energy is needed to make the object become hot.  d a small amount of energy is needed to make the object melt. ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12 [turn over  16 a hot drink is left in a room that is at a temperature of 20  \u00b0c.    what has happened to the drink after ten minutes?  a its density is lower.  b its internal energy is lower.  c its particles have equal energies.  d its particles move more quickly.     17 an engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. the rod is just too big to fit into the hole  of the washer.    steel rodsteel washer     how can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod?  a cool the washer and put it over the rod.  b cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.  c heat the rod and then place it in the hole.  d heat the washer and then place it over the rod.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  18 a rod is made of copper and wood joined together.    wood copper ps qr heat    the rod is heated at the join in the centre for about a minute.    at which labelled point will the temperature be lowest, and at which point will it be highest?     lowest  temperature highest  temperature  a p q  b p r  c s p  d s r     19 two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid  is put on top, as shown.    lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench     which statement is correct?  a heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.  b no heat passes through the sides of either cup.  c the bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.  d the lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12 [turn over  20 which row shows the nature of light waves, sound waves and x-rays?     light waves sound waves x-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal transverse  b longitudinal transverse longitudinal  c transverse longitudinal transverse  d transverse transverse longitudinal     21 the diagram shows plane water waves passing through a narrow gap in a barrier.    barrier     the waves spread out on the far side of the barrier.    which property of waves does this illustrate?  a diffraction  b reflection  c refraction  d vibration     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  22 the diagram shows radiation from a lamp passing through a prism.    radiation from lampp  violet light red light screen  prism     which type of radiation is found at p?  a \u03b3-rays  b infra-red  c ultraviolet d x-rays     23 a plane mirror is used to form an image of an object.    at which labelled point is the image formed?    object b c da ray of light plane mirror      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12 [turn over  24 a converging lens in a projector is used to make an enlarged  image of a small piece of film on a  screen.    at which labelled point could the piece of film be placed so that the lens produces this image?    a b c d 2 \u00d7 focal length of lensfocal length of lens screenconverging lens       25 a girl stands at a distance from a large building. she claps her hands and a short time later hears  an echo.    why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?  a the sound waves are  absorbed.  b the sound waves are  diffracted.  c the sound waves are  reflected.  d the sound waves are  refracted.      26 three loudspeakers vibrate at different frequencies of 5  hertz, 25  kilohertz and 50  kilohertz.    5 hertz 25 kilohertz 50 kilohertz    which row shows whether the vibrations from each loudspeaker can be heard by a human?     5  hertz 25  kilohertz 50  kilohertz  a no no no  b no yes no  c yes no yes  d yes yes yes     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  27 the diagram shows a magnet being brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes the  iron bar to become magnetised.    ns magnet x iron bar     which magnetic pole is induced at x and how is the iron bar affected?     pole induced effect on iron bar  a north attracted  b north repelled  c south attracted  d south repelled      28 a student wishes to make a permanent magnet. she has an iron rod and a steel rod.    which rod should she use to make the permanent magnet, and is this rod a hard magnetic  material or a soft magnetic material?     rod type of magnetic material  a iron hard  b iron soft  c steel hard  d steel soft     29 in which unit is potential difference measured?  a ampere  b ohm  c volt  d watt    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12 [turn over  30 the circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component x, hidden in a box.    the voltage-current graph for x is as shown.    a  v x + \u2013 variable voltage supply  voltage  current 0 0      what is the component x?  a a capacitor  b a closed switch  c an open switch  d a resistor of constant resistance      31 a relay is used to operate a large electric motor using a switch some distance from the motor.    motorswitch relay m     what is the purpose of the relay?  a to allow a large current in the relay coil to control a smaller current in the motor  b to allow a small current in the relay coil to control a larger current in the motor  c to allow the current in the relay coil to pass to the motor  d to disconnect the battery from the motor automatically if too much current flows     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  32 the circuit diagram includes two resistors connected in parallel.    a 4 \u03c92 \u03c9wire q wire rwire s wire p     which statement is correct?  a the current in wire p is equal to the current in wire q.  b the current in wire q is equal to the current in wire r.  c the current in wire r is equal to the current in wire s.  d the current in wire s is equal to the current in wire p.     33 a circuit is connected for use as a potential divider.    v10 \u03c9 x y12 v     the resistance of resistor x is 10  \u03c9.    when the resistance of the variable resistor y is 20  \u03c9, what is the reading on the voltmeter?  a 4.0  v b 6.0  v c 8.0  v d 12  v     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12 [turn over  34 an air conditioner and a television are both connected to the same electrical circuit.    air  conditioner television x  power supply     the current in the air conditioner is 4.0  a and the current in the television is 6.0  a.    several different fuses are available.    which fuse should be connected at x?  a 3  a b 5  a c 10  a d 13  a     35 the diagram shows a transformer. the input voltage and the number of turns on each coil are  shown.    400 turns on primary coil800 turns onsecondary coil 200  v a.c.     what is the output voltage?  a 100  v b 200  v c 400  v d 800  v      36 which device uses slip rings?  a a cathode-ray tube  b a d.c. motor c an a.c. generator  d a solenoid     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  37 the diagram shows some parts of a cathode-ray tube which is producing cathode rays.    screen cathode anode      which is a correct description of the cathode?   a negative and cool   b negative and hot   c positive and cool   d positive and hot    38 when measuring the emissions from a radioactive rock brought into the laboratory, a teacher  mentions that background radiation must be taken into account.    what is this background radiation?  a infra-red radiation from warm objects in the laboratory  b infra-red radiation from the sun  c ionising radiation from the radioactive rock brought into the laboratory  d ionising radiation in the laboratory when the radioactive rock is not present     39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row in the table correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles   ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  40 which statement about a neutral atom of ra226 88  is correct?  a it has an equal number of neutrons and protons.  b it has more electrons than neutrons.  c it has more electrons than protons.  d it has more neutrons than protons.     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  blank page  ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  blank page  ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/m/j/12  blank page   "
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib12 06_0625_13/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2012  [turn over      *4197283083* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2012     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  1 a cylindrical can is rolled along the ruler shown in the diagram.    0 c m 5 1 01 52 02 53 0  cmstarting position final position can rolled mark on can     the can rolls over twice.    what is the circumference (distance all round) of the can?  a 13  cm b 14  cm c 26  cm d 28  cm      2 which quantity is measured in newtons?  a density  b energy c pressure d weight     3 in a race, a car travels 60 times around a 3.6  km track. this takes 2.4 hours.    what is the average speed of the car?  a 1.5  km  / h b 90  km  / h c 144  km  / h d 216  km  / h    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12 [turn over  4 a car is moving downhill along a road at a constant speed.    which graph is the speed  / time graph for the car?    a speed time00b speed time00 c speed time00d speed time00    5 the diagram shows a handle with three forces, each 100  n, applied to it. the handle is free to  move.    pivothandle100  n 100  n100  n     what is the effect of the forces on the handle?  a the handle will move downwards.  b the handle will not move.  c the handle will turn anticlockwise (to the left).  d the handle will turn clockwise (to the right).     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  6 a stone has a volume of 0.50  cm3 and a mass of 2.0  g.    what is the density of the stone?  a 0.25  g / cm3  b 1.5  g / cm3  c 2.5  g / cm3  d 4.0  g / cm3     7 passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.    upper deck lower deck    why is this?  a they would cause the bus to become less stable.  b they would  cause the bus to slow down.  c they would  increase the kinetic energy of the bus.  d they would  lower the centre of mass of the bus.    8 a geologist places a small rock on the left-hand pan of a balance. the two pans are level as  shown when masses with a total weight of 23  n are placed on the right-hand pan.   take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n.     0rock masses     what is the mass of the small rock?  a 0.023  kg b 2.3  kg c 23  kg d 230  kg     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12 [turn over  9 an object on a thread is swinging between x and z, as shown in the diagram. it is momentarily at  rest at x and at z.    yxzthread     an incomplete word equation about the energy of the object is shown below.    gravitational potential energy   = kinetic energy   +  \u2026\u2026\u2026 energy   +   energy losses          at x            at y    at y    which form of energy is needed to complete the word equation?  a chemical  b gravitational potential  c internal  d strain      10 which pair contains only physical quantities that vary with te mperature and so could be used in  making a thermometer?  a activity of a radioactive source, volume of a gas  b mass of a liquid, volume of a liquid  c activity of a radioactive source, mass of a solid  d volume of a gas, volume of a liquid     11 the molecules of a substance become more closely packed and move more quickly.    what is happening to the substance?  a a gas is being heated and compressed.  b a gas is being heated and is expanding.  c a liquid is boiling.  d a liquid is evaporating at room temperature.   ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  12 why does convection take place in a liquid when it is heated?  a liquids expand when they are heated.  b liquids start to bubble when they get close to boiling point.  c molecules in the liquid expand when they are heated.  d molecules near to the surface of the liquid escape into the air.      13 in which pair of energy sources are both sources renewable?  a oil and coal  b oil and tidal  c tidal and geothermal  d tidal and nuclear fission     14 the diagram shows a mercury manometer used to measure the pressure of gas in a container.   atmospheric pressure is 76  cm of mercury.    20  cm 12  cmmercurygas     what is the pressure of the gas?  a 56  cm of mercury  b 68  cm of mercury  c 84  cm of mercury  d 96  cm of mercury    15 which statement is explained by reference to pressure?  a objects with greater mass have greater weight.  b one kilogram of water occupies more volume than one kilogram of lead.  c spikes on running-shoes sink into the ground.  d water cooled to a low enough temperature turns to ice. ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12 [turn over  16 brownian motion is observed when looking at smoke particles in air using a microscope.    what causes the smoke particles to move at random?  a smoke particles are hit by air molecules.  b smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.  c smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.  d smoke particles hit the walls of the container.     17 an engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. the rod is just too big to fit into the hole  of the washer.    steel rodsteel washer     how can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod?  a cool the washer and put it over the rod.  b cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.  c heat the rod and then place it in the hole.  d heat the washer and then place it over the rod.      18 a heater supplies 80  j of energy to a block of metal. the temperature of the block rises by 20  \u00b0c.    what happens to the block of metal when its temperature falls by 10  \u00b0c?  a its internal energy decreases by 40  j.  b its internal energy decreases by 160  j.  c its internal energy increases by 40  j.  d its internal energy increases by 160  j.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  19 two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid  is put on top, as shown.    lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench     which statement is correct?  a heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.  b no heat passes through the sides of either cup. c the bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup. d the lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12 [turn over  20 the diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of sound. the scales are the same  for all the diagrams.    which sound has the highest frequency?      a  b  c  dtime time time time      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  21 a student draws three rays of light from point p through a converging lens.    each point labelled f is a principal focus of the lens.    ffp ray x ray z ray y    which of the rays are drawn correctly?  a ray y only  b ray z only  c ray x and ray y  d ray x and ray z     22 the image formed by a plane mirror is upright.    position of image eyeobject     what are the other characteristics of the image?     laterally inverted  (left to right) magnified  (larger than the object) virtual  a no yes yes  b yes no  no  c yes no  yes  d yes yes no ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12 [turn over  23 which row correctly describes light waves and radio waves?     light waves radio waves  a longitudinal longitudinal  b longitudinal transverse  c transverse longitudinal  d transverse transverse     24 what is the unit of wavelength?  a hertz  b metre  c metre per second  d second    25 a girl stands at a distance from a large building. she claps her hands and a short time later hears  an echo.    why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?  a the sound waves are  absorbed.  b the sound waves are  diffracted.  c the sound waves are  reflected.  d the sound waves are  refracted.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  26 the diagram shows water waves passing through a gap in a harbour wall. the waves curve  round the wall and reach a small boat in the harbour.    boatharbour wall harbou rwaves gap     what is the name of this curving effect, and how can the gap be changed so that the waves are  less likely to reach the boat?     name of effect change to the gap  a diffraction make the gap slightly bigger  b diffraction make the gap slightly smaller  c refraction make the gap slightly bigger  d refraction make the gap slightly smaller      27 a thermistor is used in a circuit to control a piece of equipment automatically.  what might this circuit be used for?  a lighting an electric lamp as it becomes darker  b ringing an alarm bell if a locked door is opened c switching on a water heater at a pre-determined time  d turning on an air conditioner when the temperature rises     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12 [turn over  28 which circuit contains a fuse?    a ab c dv a      29 in which unit is potential difference measured?  a ampere  b ohm  c volt  d watt    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  30 the circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component x, hidden in a box.    the voltage-current graph for x is as shown.    a  v x + \u2013 variable voltage supply  voltage  current 0 0      what is the component x?  a a capacitor  b a closed switch  c an open switch  d a resistor of constant resistance     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12 [turn over  31 a circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2  a.    the time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.    160 140120100 80604020 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 current  / atime taken  to break the circuit  / s      what happens when the current in the circuit is 2  a and what happens when the current 18  a?     when the current is 2  a when the current is 18  a  a the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds  b the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit does not break  c the circuit does not break the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds  d the circuit does not break the circuit does not break     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  32 a student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.    r  s tv  12  v     what happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal t is moved from r to s?  a it decreases from 12  v to 0  v.  b it increases from 0  v to 12  v.  c it remains at 0  v.  d it remains at 12  v.      33 a wire passes between the poles of a horseshoe magnet. there is a current in the wire in the  direction shown, and this causes a force to act on the wire.    n swirecurrentmagnet force    three other arrangements, p, q and r, of the wire and magnet are set up as shown.    s nn ss npqr magnet turned around current direction reversed current direction reversed and magnet turned around    which arrangement or arrangements will cause a force in the same direction as the original  arrangement?  a p, q and r b p and q only c p only d r only   ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12 [turn over  34 which statement describes a property of a magnet?  a it attracts ferrous materials.  b it could have only one pole (north or south).  c it points in a random direction when suspended.  d it repels non-ferrous materials.      35 which procedure may be used to demagnetise a steel bar?  a cooling it in a freezer  b earthing it with a copper wire  c placing it in a solenoid carrying a large direct current (d.c.)  d striking it repeatedly with a hammer      36 the diagram shows a coil connected to a battery and a switch. two unmagnetised iron bars hang  freely near opposite ends of the coil.    y xcoil  iron bar iron bar      what happens to the iron bars when the switch is closed?  a both x and y move away from the coil.  b both x and y move towards the coil.  c x moves towards the coil, y moves away from the coil.  d y moves towards the coil, x moves away from the coil.      37 which diagram could represent the structure of a neutral atom?    + + \u2013\u2013 \u2013key neutron proton electrona b ++\u2013 ++c +++d \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  38 the diagram shows a device to produce cathode rays.    evacuated glass container cathodeanode    which part of the device is heated and why?     part heated reason  a anode to emit electrons  b anode to emit protons  c cathode to emit electrons  d cathode to emit protons      39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row in the table correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  40 a radioactive nucleus emits a \u03b2-particle.    nucleus \u03b2-particle     what happens to the proton number (atomic number) of the nucleus?  a it stays the same.  b it increases by 1. c it decreases by 2. d it decreases by 4.     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/m/j/12  blank page    "
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/jg) 43201/2 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *4808110537* physics 0625/21 paper 2  core may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2  3 4 5  6 7 8 9101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 a car is travelling along a level road at a steady speed. fig. 1.1 shows the speedometer in  the car. a speedometer registers how fast the car is going. 0 14020 12040 10060 80 km / hour fig. 1.1  (a) how far, in km, does the car travel in \u00bd hour at the speed shown in fig. 1.1?  distance =  ..  km  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) on the axes shown in fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the motion of the car for the  \u00bd hour mentioned in (a). do not go beyond \u00bd hour. [3] 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2020406080100 time / hoursspeed km / hour fig. 1.2   (ii) at the end of the \u00bd hour, the car reaches a region where the road begins to rise up  into some mountains. the car climbs the mountains for a further \u00bd hour.    during the climb, its speed steadily decreases to 30 km / hour. the driver then stops the car so that he can admire the view.    on fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the climb and the stopping of the car. [4]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 a student carries out an experiment to find the density of water, using a method that is  slightly different from normal. in his method, he starts with a measuring cylinder containing some water, and then adds more water to that already in the measuring cylinder.  his experiment is illustrated in fig. 2.1. measuring cylinder water balance reading 3reading 1reading 2 reading 4 fig. 2.1  the readings he obtains are as follows:     reading 1 53 cm3     reading 2 84 cm3     reading 3 205 g     reading 4 238 g  calculate  (a) the volume of the added water,  volume =  .  cm3  [2]  (b) the mass of the added water,  mass =  .  g  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the density of water, stating clearly the equation you are using.  density =  . [4]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 a train is passing through a station at constant speed, as shown in fig. 3.1. the track is  horizontal. fig. 3.1  the engine produces a forward thrust of 70 000 n. there is a 25 000 n force opposing the motion, due to friction in the wheels.  (a) mark these forces on fig. 3.1, using an arrow labelled 70 000 n and an arrow labelled 25 000 n. [2]  (b) the train is travelling at constant speed, so there must be another horizontal force acting on it.   (i) state the direction of this force.  ..   (ii) calculate the size of this force.  size of force =  ... n  (iii) suggest what might be causing this force. ..  [3]  (c) once the train has passed the station, the driver increases the engine\u2019s forward thrust.   all other forces stay the same.  (i) what happens to the train?  ..   (ii) why does this happen?   .. ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 (a) explain, in terms of molecules, how a gas causes a pressure on the walls of its container.  .. .. .. .. .. . [4]  (b) complete the following two sentences.   (i) at constant temperature, the pressure of a gas increases as its volume    .. .   (ii) at constant volume, the pressure of a gas increases as its temperature    .. .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) the principle of conservation of energy states that energy can neither be created nor  destroyed.   what, then, does happen to the energy supplied to a device such as a motor or a  television?  .. .. . [1]  (b) the television in fig. 5.1 is switched on to watch a programme. during this time, 720 kj  of electrical energy is supplied. electrical energy input = 720 kj light energyoutput = 4 kjsound energyoutput = 20 kj fig. 5.1   (i) from the information on fig. 5.1, find the total energy provided for the viewer to see  and hear the television during this programme.  energy =   kj  [1]   (ii) suggest what happens to the rest of the energy supplied. .. .. . [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) calculate how much energy is involved in (b)(ii).  energy =   kj  [1]   (iv) comment on the efficiency of the television. .. .. . [1]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use6 the ray diagram in fig. 6.1 shows one ray from the top of an object placed to the left of a  converging lens. object f2 f1 fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, use your ruler to draw another ray from the top of the object until it crosses the ray printed on the diagram. [2]  (b) on fig. 6.1, draw the image of the object. [1]  (c) which of the following descriptions fit the image formed by the lens? tick 3 boxes. much larger than the object much smaller than the object same size as the object upright inverted real [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) the object is moved to a position further from the lens.   what differences are seen in the image, compared with the previous image?  ..  . [2]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) remote controllers for television sets send a beam of electromagnetic radiation to the  television.   which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? tick one box. microwaves infra-red visible ultra-violet x-rays [1]  (b) modern warfare often uses heat-seeking missiles.   which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? tick one box. microwaves infra-red visible ultra-violet x-rays [1]  (c) injured legs may be checked for possible fractures using electromagnetic radiation.   which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? tick one box. microwaves infra-red visible ultra-violet x-rays [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) mobile phones communicate using electromagnetic radiation.   which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? tick one box. microwaves infra-red visible ultra-violet x-rays [1]  [total: 4]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) complete the following sentences.   (i) an electric current exists in a wire when .. are made  to flow in the wire. [1]   (ii) the current in a wire may be measured using an instrument called      . [1]   (iii) the potential difference across a wire may be measured by connecting     ... across the wire. [1]  (b) a length of resistance wire is connected in a simple series circuit.   the current in it is 0.8 a. the potential difference across it is 9.6  v.   calculate the resistance of the wire.  resistance =  . [4]  (c) the resistance wire in (b) is replaced by a greater length of wire from the same reel.   without further calculation, state the effect this has on  (i) the resistance in the circuit, ..   (ii) the current in the new wire when there is a potential difference of 9.6 v across it, as  before.  ..  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 the coil in the d.c. motor in fig. 9.1 is rotating as shown.  batterymagnetrotation \u2013+ fig. 9.1  (a) on fig. 9.1, clearly label the coil. [1]  (b) state two things that could be done to the apparatus shown in fig. 9.1 in order to make  the coil rotate more rapidly. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  (c) suggest how the coil could be made to rotate in the opposite direction. .. . [1]  [total: 4]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 fig. 10.1 shows four different types of switch. plug metal sectionsceiling-mountedpull-cordswitch nylon cordwall-mountedswitch flush wall-mountedswitch plug switch fig. 10.1  (a) in the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a switch.  [1]  (b) (i) which one of the switches is definitely dangerous to use with mains voltages?  ..   (ii) state the reason for your answer to (b)(i).  ..  ..  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) a laundry, where clothes are washed, is likely to have lots of steam and condensation.   (i) which switch is the most suitable for turning the lights on or off from within the  laundry?  ..   (ii) state the reason for your answer to (c)(i).  .. .. ..  [3]  (d) the laundry is lit by three mains-voltage lamps. fig. 10.2 shows the mains supply and  the three lamps. mains supply fig. 10.2   complete fig. 10.2 by adding the switch and the wiring that will allow all three lamps to  light at full brightness when the switch is on. [2]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use11 fig. 11.1 shows an electron beam about to enter, at point a, the electric field between two  charged metal plates. b a celectron beam\u2013 + fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, carefully draw the path of the electron beam between a and the line bc.  [3]  (b) the voltage across the plates is reversed. state what difference this makes to the path of the electron beam.  .. . [1]  [total: 4]",
            "19": "19 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use12 the table below gives details about some radioactive substances. substance symbol type of radiation emitted half-life barium-139 139 56 ba beta (\u03b2) 85 minutes silver-110 110 47 ag beta (\u03b2) 24 seconds technetium-99m 99 43 tc gamma (\u03b3) 6.0 hours thorium-232 232 90 th alpha (\u03b1) 1.4 \u00d7 1010 years  (a) which of these substances has the greatest number of particles in the nucleus of its  atoms?  . [1]  (b) which of these substances has the least number of electrons in the orbits of a neutral  atom?  . [1]  (c) which of these substances are emitting particles? .. . [2]  (d) samples of each of these substances are decaying. each sample starts with the same  number of atoms.   which sample decays the most in one hour?  . [1]  (e) in the investigation of a blood circulation problem, a patient is given an injection containing one of these substances. the radiation needs to be detectable from outside the body.   which of the substances might be suitable for this use?  . [1]  [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/21/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sw) 43195/3 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9433445886* physics 0625/22 paper 2  core may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2  3 4 5  6 7 8 9101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of a truck varies during a period of 80 s. 00246810 speed m / s 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130ab c d time  / s fig. 1.1  (a) in which section of the journey is the truck   (i) travelling at constant speed,  .   (ii) increasing its speed?  ...  [2]  (b) calculate the distance travelled by the truck in   (i) the section bc,  distance =   m  [4]   (ii) the section cd.  distance =   m  [2]  (c) after point d, the truck takes 30 s to come to rest.   on fig. 1.1, draw a line to show this part of the motion of the truck. [1]  [total: 9]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows a simple mercury barometer alongside a mercury manometer that contains  some trapped gas. 60 50trapped gasvacuum mercury40 30 20 10708090cm 76 cm fig. 2.1  from fig. 2.1 find  (a) the pressure of the atmosphere,  pressure of atmosphere =  . cm of mercury  [1]  (b) the pressure of the trapped gas.  pressure of trapped gas =  . cm of mercury  [3]  (c) the atmospheric pressure increases.   state what happens to the levels of mercury in the manometer. left-hand level ... right-hand level    [2]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows a rectangular block of wood on a flat, rough horizontal board. pushed hereblock of wood protractor board90100110 120 130 140 150 160 170180807060 50 40 30 20 10 0 fig. 3.1  the block is pushed at the top, as shown in fig. 3.1, and it tilts to the right.  (a) on the front face of the block, draw the line that will be vertical at the instant before the  block topples over. [1]  (b) use the protractor shown on fig. 3.1 to measure the angle through which the block tilts before it topples over.  angle =  . [1]  (c) the block is put back on the board, as in fig. 3.1. this time, instead of the block being pushed, the left-hand edge of the board is raised.   state the angle that the board makes with the horizontal at the instant the block topples  over.  angle =  . [1]  (d) state how your answer to (c) might differ if the procedure is repeated after several centimetres have been cut off the top of the block.  .. . [1]  [total: 4]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 two geologists are collecting rocks from the bottom of a cliff. the rocks are loaded into a  basket and then pulled up the cliff on the end of a rope, as shown in fig. 4.1. the basket of rocks is brought to rest at the top of the cliff. cliff basket of rocks fig. 4.1 (a) (i) which form of energy that the basket possesses is significantly greater at the top of the cliff than when it is at the bottom of the cliff?  . [1]   (ii) which two measurements must be made  in order to calculate the increase in energy in (i)? 1. ...2. ...  [2] (b) which form of energy in his body has the man  at the top of the cliff used in order to raise the basket of rocks?  . [1]  (c) state the measurement needed, in addition to those in (a)(ii), in order to calculate the  useful power developed by the man at the top of the cliff. . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 the boy shown in fig. 5.1 has just thrown a number of stones into a pond, one after the  other. fig. 5.1 shows the crests of the waves a short time after the stones landed in the water. fig. 5.1  (a) on fig. 5.1, mark with a cross the point where the stones hit the water. [1]  (b) fig. 5.2 shows a section through the surface of the water before the stones land. surface waterair fig. 5.2   on fig. 5.2, sketch what the section of the surface might look like at the instant shown  in fig. 5.1. [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) later, the boy throws a single stone into the water. fig. 5.3 shows, from above, the  position of the wavefront at 2 s, 4 s and 6 s after the stone landed. 6 s 4 s 2 s fig. 5.3   (i) from fig. 5.3, what can be deduced about the speed of the wave?  .. .. . [2]   (ii) on fig. 5.3, draw the wavefront 8 s after the stone landed. [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use6 the liquid-in-glass thermometer in fig. 6.1 has a scale from \u201310 \u00b0c to 110 \u00b0c. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 6.1  (a) two of the temperatures marked on the thermometer are known as fixed points.   state the values of these fixed points.     \u00b0c and  \u00b0c  [1]  (b) the bulb of the thermometer shown in fig. 6.1 is put into some boiling water.   (i) what happens to the liquid in the bulb when its temperature is raised? ..   (ii) what is seen happening to the liquid in the capillary tube when the bulb is put in the  boiling water?  .. ..  [3]  (c) on a certain day in a cold country, the air temperature is \u201312 \u00b0c.   on fig. 6.1, use an arrow to show approximately where the surface of the liquid will be  at this temperature. [1]  [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 a teacher is trying to find an unusual way to measure the speed of sound using an echo  method.  she has a firework, which will make a loud bang at ground level when ignited. she also has a stopwatch and a tape measure.  (a) to obtain an echo, she needs a suitable reflector.   suggest something that she could use as a reflector.  . [1]  (b) she stands a measured distance of 360 m from her chosen reflector and ignites the firework in a safe manner.   (i) when should she start the stopwatch?  ..   (ii) when should she stop the stopwatch? ..  [2]  (c) after she stops the stopwatch, its appearance is as shown in fig. 7.1. s fig. 7.1   (i) using this reading and the distance from (b), calculate the speed of sound in air.  speed of sound =    m / s  [4]   (ii) suggest one reason why the speed calculated in (c)(i) might not be quite correct.  assume that the stopwatch and tape measure function correctly.  .. .. . [1]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) in terms of molecules, explain why solids expand when they are heated.  .. .. .. .. . [2]  (b) (i) state one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is a problem.  describe how this problem is solved. y ou may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.          [2]   (ii) describe one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is useful. y ou  may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.          [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 a solenoid with many turns is connected across a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter, as  shown in fig. 9.1. sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter n ssolenoidmagnet fig. 9.1  (a) the n pole of a magnet is moved into the solenoid, and then held stationary in the  solenoid.   describe what happens to the needle of the millivoltmeter during this process.  ..  . [2]  (b) the n pole is then removed from the solenoid.   describe what happens to the needle during this process.  .. . [1]  (c) complete the following sentence.   when the n pole moves into the solenoid, . is   in the solenoid. [2]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 a length of bare uniform resistance wire is included in the circuit of fig. 10.1. contact c can  be moved to any position along the resistance wire. resistance wire contact ca 2.0 v li 5.0 1 fig. 10.1  (a) on the axes of fig. 10.2, sketch the graph that relates the current i in the circuit to the  length l of the resistance wire. i / a l / cm0 0     fig. 10.2 [2]  (b) calculate the reading on the ammeter when the length l  is zero.  ammeter reading =  .  a  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) contact c is moved so that the resistance of the length l of the resistance wire is 15.0 \u03c9.   calculate   (i) the total resistance of the circuit,  resistance =   \u03c9   (ii) the new ammeter reading.  ammeter reading =    a  [2]  (d) when l = 25 cm, the reading on the ammeter is half that found in (b).   calculate the resistance of 25 cm of the resistance wire.  resistance =  .. \u03c9  [2]  (e) which of the following effects is caused by the current in the resistance wire?   tick the boxes alongside two correct effects.    heating     light     sound     magnetism  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) a particular radioactive source is known to emit either \u03b1-particles or \u03b2-particles.   describe an experiment involving a solid absorber to determine which type of particle is  being emitted. include a diagram of the experimental arrangement.   diagram  [1]   method  ..  .. .. . [4]   statement of how the results identify the particles  .. .. . [1]  (b) the table below gives the count-rate obtained from a radioactive source over a period of  80 minutes. time / minutes 0 15 30 42 58 80 count-rate counts / s400 228 128 80 44 16   from this table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive source.  half-life =  ..  minutes  [1] [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use12 fig. 12.1 represents a neutral atom. central mass orbiting particle fig. 12.1  (a) what name do we give to   (i) the central mass,  ..   (ii) the two orbiting particles?    [2]  (b) the central mass contains two neutrons.   (i) what other type of particle does it contain?  .   (ii) how many of these other particles are there?  .   [2]   (iii) use nuclide notation, a z x, to describe the nuclide in fig. 12.1, writing appropriate  numbers in place of a and z.         x  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (cw/sw) 57150/1 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *3877435969* physics 0625/23 paper 2  core may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2  3 4 5  6 7 8 9101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of a truck varies during a period of 80 s. 00246810 speed m / s 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130ab c d time  / s fig. 1.1  (a) in which section of the journey is the truck   (i) travelling at constant speed,  .   (ii) increasing its speed?  ...  [2]  (b) calculate the distance travelled by the truck in   (i) the section bc,  distance =   m  [4]   (ii) the section cd.  distance =   m  [2]  (c) after point d, the truck takes 30 s to come to rest.   on fig. 1.1, draw a line to show this part of the motion of the truck. [1]  [total: 9]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows a simple mercury barometer alongside a mercury manometer that contains  some trapped gas. 60 50trapped gasvacuum mercury40 30 20 10708090cm 76 cm fig. 2.1  from fig. 2.1 find  (a) the pressure of the atmosphere,  pressure of atmosphere =  . cm of mercury  [1]  (b) the pressure of the trapped gas.  pressure of trapped gas =  . cm of mercury  [3]  (c) the atmospheric pressure increases.   state what happens to the levels of mercury in the manometer. left-hand level ... right-hand level    [2]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows a rectangular block of wood on a flat, rough horizontal board. pushed hereblock of wood protractor board90100110 120 130 140 150 160 170180807060 50 40 30 20 10 0 fig. 3.1  the block is pushed at the top, as shown in fig. 3.1, and it tilts to the right.  (a) on the front face of the block, draw the line that will be vertical at the instant before the  block topples over. [1]  (b) use the protractor shown on fig. 3.1 to measure the angle through which the block tilts before it topples over.  angle =  . [1]  (c) the block is put back on the board, as in fig. 3.1. this time, instead of the block being pushed, the left-hand edge of the board is raised.   state the angle that the board makes with the horizontal at the instant the block topples  over.  angle =  . [1]  (d) state how your answer to (c) might differ if the procedure is repeated after several centimetres have been cut off the top of the block.  .. . [1]  [total: 4]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 two geologists are collecting rocks from the bottom of a cliff. the rocks are loaded into a  basket and then pulled up the cliff on the end of a rope, as shown in fig. 4.1. the basket of rocks is brought to rest at the top of the cliff. cliff basket of rocks fig. 4.1 (a) (i) which form of energy that the basket possesses is significantly greater at the top of the cliff than when it is at the bottom of the cliff?  . [1]   (ii) which two measurements must be made  in order to calculate the increase in energy in (i)? 1. ...2. ...  [2] (b) which form of energy in his body has the man  at the top of the cliff used in order to raise the basket of rocks?  . [1]  (c) state the measurement needed, in addition to those in (a)(ii), in order to calculate the  useful power developed by the man at the top of the cliff. . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 the boy shown in fig. 5.1 has just thrown a number of stones into a pond, one after the  other. fig. 5.1 shows the crests of the waves a short time after the stones landed in the water. fig. 5.1  (a) on fig. 5.1, mark with a cross the point where the stones hit the water. [1]  (b) fig. 5.2 shows a section through the surface of the water before the stones land. surface waterair fig. 5.2   on fig. 5.2, sketch what the section of the surface might look like at the instant shown  in fig. 5.1. [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) later, the boy throws a single stone into the water. fig. 5.3 shows, from above, the  position of the wavefront at 2 s, 4 s and 6 s after the stone landed. 6 s 4 s 2 s fig. 5.3   (i) from fig. 5.3, what can be deduced about the speed of the wave?  .. .. . [2]   (ii) on fig. 5.3, draw the wavefront 8 s after the stone landed. [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use6 the liquid-in-glass thermometer in fig. 6.1 has a scale from \u201310 \u00b0c to 110 \u00b0c. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 6.1  (a) two of the temperatures marked on the thermometer are known as fixed points.   state the values of these fixed points.     \u00b0c and  \u00b0c  [1]  (b) the bulb of the thermometer shown in fig. 6.1 is put into some boiling water.   (i) what happens to the liquid in the bulb when its temperature is raised? ..   (ii) what is seen happening to the liquid in the capillary tube when the bulb is put in the  boiling water?  .. ..  [3]  (c) on a certain day in a cold country, the air temperature is \u201312 \u00b0c.   on fig. 6.1, use an arrow to show approximately where the surface of the liquid will be  at this temperature. [1]  [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 a teacher is trying to find an unusual way to measure the speed of sound using an echo  method.  she has a firework, which will make a loud bang at ground level when ignited. she also has a stopwatch and a tape measure.  (a) to obtain an echo, she needs a suitable reflector.   suggest something that she could use as a reflector.  . [1]  (b) she stands a measured distance of 360 m from her chosen reflector and ignites the firework in a safe manner.   (i) when should she start the stopwatch?  ..   (ii) when should she stop the stopwatch? ..  [2]  (c) after she stops the stopwatch, its appearance is as shown in fig. 7.1. s fig. 7.1   (i) using this reading and the distance from (b), calculate the speed of sound in air.  speed of sound =    m / s  [4]   (ii) suggest one reason why the speed calculated in (c)(i) might not be quite correct.  assume that the stopwatch and tape measure function correctly.  .. .. . [1]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) in terms of molecules, explain why solids expand when they are heated.  .. .. .. .. . [2]  (b) (i) state one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is a problem.  describe how this problem is solved. y ou may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.          [2]   (ii) describe one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is useful. y ou  may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.          [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 a solenoid with many turns is connected across a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter, as  shown in fig. 9.1. sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter n ssolenoidmagnet fig. 9.1  (a) the n pole of a magnet is moved into the solenoid, and then held stationary in the  solenoid.   describe what happens to the needle of the millivoltmeter during this process.  ..  . [2]  (b) the n pole is then removed from the solenoid.   describe what happens to the needle during this process.  .. . [1]  (c) complete the following sentence.   when the n pole moves into the solenoid, . is   in the solenoid. [2]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 a length of bare uniform resistance wire is included in the circuit of fig. 10.1. contact c can  be moved to any position along the resistance wire. resistance wire contact ca 2.0 v li 5.0 1 fig. 10.1  (a) on the axes of fig. 10.2, sketch the graph that relates the current i in the circuit to the  length l of the resistance wire. i / a l / cm0 0     fig. 10.2 [2]  (b) calculate the reading on the ammeter when the length l  is zero.  ammeter reading =  .  a  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) contact c is moved so that the resistance of the length l of the resistance wire is 15.0 \u03c9.   calculate   (i) the total resistance of the circuit,  resistance =   \u03c9   (ii) the new ammeter reading.  ammeter reading =    a  [2]  (d) when l = 25 cm, the reading on the ammeter is half that found in (b).   calculate the resistance of 25 cm of the resistance wire.  resistance =  .. \u03c9  [2]  (e) which of the following effects is caused by the current in the resistance wire?   tick the boxes alongside two correct effects.    heating     light     sound     magnetism  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) a particular radioactive source is known to emit either \u03b1-particles or \u03b2-particles.   describe an experiment involving a solid absorber to determine which type of particle is  being emitted. include a diagram of the experimental arrangement.   diagram  [1]   method  ..  .. .. . [4]   statement of how the results identify the particles  .. .. . [1]  (b) the table below gives the count-rate obtained from a radioactive source over a period of  80 minutes. time / minutes 0 15 30 42 58 80 count-rate counts / s400 228 128 80 44 16   from this table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive source.  half-life =  ..  minutes  [1] [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use12 fig. 12.1 represents a neutral atom. central mass orbiting particle fig. 12.1  (a) what name do we give to   (i) the central mass,  ..   (ii) the two orbiting particles?    [2]  (b) the central mass contains two neutrons.   (i) what other type of particle does it contain?  .   (ii) how many of these other particles are there?  .   [2]   (iii) use nuclide notation, a z x, to describe the nuclide in fig. 12.1, writing appropriate  numbers in place of a and z.         x  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nf/jg) 43223/5 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9344122459* physics 0625/31 paper 3  extended may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 the period of the vertical oscillations of a mass hanging from a spring is known to be  constant.  (a) a student times single oscillations with a stopwatch. in 10 separate measurements, the stopwatch readings were: 1.8 s,  1.9 s,  1.7 s,  1.9 s,  1.8 s,  1.8 s,  1.9 s,  1.7 s,  1.8 s,  1.8 s.   what is the best value obtainable from these readings for the time of one oscillation?  explain how you arrive at your answer. best value =  . explanation  .. .. . [1]  (b) describe how, using the same stopwatch, the student can find the period of oscillation  more accurately.  .. .. .. .. .. .. . [4]  [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 a girl rides her bicycle along a straight level road. fig. 2.1 shows a graph of her distance  moved against time. 00100300 distance  / m time  / s400 200 10 20 30 40 50 60abcd fig. 2.1  (a) describe her motion   (i) from a to b,  ..   (ii) from b to c,  ..   (iii) from c to d.  ..  [3]  (b) calculate   (i) her average speed from a to d,  average speed =  . [2]   (ii) her maximum speed.  maximum speed =  . [3]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 (a) state an example of the conversion of chemical energy to another form of energy. example  ...energy conversion  ...[1]  (b) the electrical output of a solar panel powers a pump. the pump operates a water  fountain. the output of the solar panel is 17  v and the current supplied to the pump is 0.27 a.   (i) calculate the electrical power generated by the solar panel.  power =  . [2]   (ii) the pump converts electrical energy to kinetic energy of water with an efficiency of 35%.    calculate the kinetic energy of the water delivered by the pump in 1 second.  kinetic energy =  . [2]   (iii) the pump propels 0.00014 m 3 of water per second. this water rises vertically as a  jet. the density of water is 1000 kg / m3.    calculate    1. the mass of water propelled by the pump in 1 second,  mass =  . [2]    2. the maximum height of the jet of water.  maximum height =  . [2] [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 represents part of the hydraulic braking system of a car. f1f2piston x piston y fig. 4.1  the force f1 of the driver\u2019s foot on the brake pedal moves piston x. the space between  pistons x and y is filled with oil which cannot be compressed. the force f2 exerted by the oil  moves piston y . this force is applied to the brake mechanism in the wheels of the car.  the area of cross-section of piston x is 4.8 cm2.  (a) the force f1 is 90 n. calculate the pressure exerted on the oil by piston x.  pressure =  . [2]  (b) the pressure on piston y is the same as the pressure applied by piston x. explain why  the force f2 is greater than the force f1.  ..  . [1]  (c) piston y moves a smaller distance than piston x. explain why. .. .. . [2]  (d) suggest why the braking system does not work properly if the oil contains bubbles of air. .. .. . [2]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) suggest   (i) an example of a change of state resulting from the removal of thermal energy from  a quantity of material,  .. [1]   (ii) the effect of this change of state on the temperature of the material. . [1]  (b) define the thermal capacity of a body. .. .. . [2]  (c) a polystyrene cup holds 250 g of water at 20 \u00b0c. in order to cool the water to make a  cold drink, small pieces of ice at 0 \u00b0c are added until the water reaches 0 \u00b0c and no unmelted ice is present.   [specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 j / (g \u00b0c), specific latent heat of fusion of  ice = 330 j / g]   assume no thermal energy is lost or gained by the cup.   (i) calculate the thermal energy lost by the water in cooling to 0 \u00b0c.  thermal energy lost =  . [2]   (ii) state the thermal energy gained by the ice in melting.  thermal energy gained =  . [1]   (iii) calculate the mass of ice added.  mass of ice =  . [2]  [total: 9]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use6 fig. 6.1 shows a glass flask full of water at 10 \u00b0c and sealed with a bung. a long glass tube  passes through the bung into the water. the water level in the tube is at x. glass flask waterbung x fig. 6.1  when the flask is placed in hot water, the water level initially falls a little below x, and then  rises some way above x.  (a) suggest why   (i) the water level initially falls,  .. . [2]   (ii) the water level then rises, .. . [2]   (iii) the rise is greater than the fall. .. . [1]  (b) suggest a change to the apparatus that would make the fall and rise of the water level  greater.  .. . [1]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) a wave passes along the surface of the water in a ripple tank. describe the motion of a  molecule on the surface as the wave passes.  .. . [1]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows a view from above of water waves approaching a narrow gap in a barrier.  the water on both sides of the barrier has the same depth. barrier with narrow gap direction ofwater waves p fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, sketch the pattern of waves in the region to the right of the barrier. [2]   (ii) state the process by which waves arrive at point p to the right of the barrier.  .. [1]  (c) the waves approaching the barrier in fig. 7.1 have a wavelength of 1.4 cm and travel at  a speed of 12 cm / s.   calculate the frequency of the waves.  frequency =  . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use8 (a) in fig. 8.1, s is a metal sphere standing on an insulating base. r is a negatively charged  rod placed close to s. \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013r s insulating base fig. 8.1   (i) name the particles in s that move when r is brought close to s.  . [1]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, add + signs and \u2013 signs to suggest the result of this movement. [1]   (iii) describe the actions which now need to take place so that s becomes positively  charged with the charge distributed evenly over its surface. a positively charged object is not available.  .. .. . [3]  (b) during a thunderstorm, the potential difference between thunderclouds and the ground  builds up to 1.5 \u00d7 10 6  v. in each stroke of lightning, 30 c of charge passes between the  thunderclouds and the ground. lightning strokes to the ground occur, on average, at 2 minute intervals.   calculate   (i) the average current between the thunderclouds and the ground,  average current =  . [2]   (ii) the energy transferred in each stroke of lightning.  energy =  . [2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use9 this question refers to quantities and data shown on the circuit diagram of fig. 9.1. xy6.0 v ari1 i2 i3i4 2.013.0 1 fig. 9.1  (a) state the relationship between   (i) the currents i1, i2 and i3,  .[1]   (ii) the currents i1 and i4.  . [1]  (b) the ammeter reads 0.80 a. assume it has zero resistance.   calculate   (i) the potential difference between x and y ,  p.d. =  . [1]   (ii) the current i3,  current =  . [2]   (iii) the resistance of r.  resistance =  . [4]  [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a wire pq placed between the poles of a magnet. there is a current in  wire pq. pq s n  fig. 10.1   (i) on fig. 10.1, sketch lines with arrows to show the direction of the magnetic field  between the poles of the magnet.  [1]   (ii) the force on pq is into the paper.    draw an arrow on pq to show the direction of the current. [1]  (b) the wire pq in fig. 10.1 is replaced by a narrow beam of \u03b2-particles travelling from left to right.   (i) suggest a suitable detector for the \u03b2-particles.  . [1]   (ii) state the direction of the force on the \u03b2-particles.  . [1]   (iii) describe the path of the \u03b2-particles in the space between the poles of the magnet.  .. . [1]   (iv) state what happens to the air molecules along the path of the \u03b2-particles. . [1]  [total: 6] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 fig. 11.1 shows part of a circuit designed to switch on a security lamp when it gets dark. + \u2013a bxl s relay coil fig. 11.1  when there is a current in the relay coil, switch s closes and the lamp l comes on.  (a) write down the name of the component x.  .. [1]  (b) the circuit has gaps at a and at b.   state the components that need to be connected into these gaps for the circuit to  perform its required function. gap a  ...gap b  ...  [3]  (c) the circuit in fig. 11.1 is modified. the function of lamp l is now to give a warning when  the temperature becomes too high.   state any necessary changes of components in the circuit.  ..  .. . [2]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sw) 43228/5 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *1876126653* physics 0625/32 paper 3  extended may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2 3  4 5  6  7 8 91011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 is a distance / time graph showing the motion of an object. 0051015distance  / m time  / s2025 1 2 3 4 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) describe the motion shown for the first 2 s, calculating any relevant quantity.  ..  ..  [2]   (ii) after 2 s the object accelerates.    on fig. 1.1, sketch a possible shape of the graph for the next 2 s.  [1]  (b) describe how a distance / time graph shows an object that is stationary. .. . [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) fig. 1.2 shows the axes for a speed / time graph. 00246speed m / s time  / s810 1 2 3 4 fig. 1.2   on fig. 1.2, draw   (i) the graph of the motion for the first 2 s as shown in fig. 1.1,   (ii) an extension of the graph for the next 2 s, showing the object accelerating at 2 m / s2.  [3]  (d) describe how a speed / time graph shows an object that is stationary. .. . [2]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows a mobile bird sculpture that has been created by an artist. 12 cm 30 cmpivottail bird sculpture me hole in sculpture for pivot fig. 2.1  m is the centre of mass of the bird sculpture, including its tail (but not including the  counter-weight that will be added later). the mass of the bird and tail is 1.5 kg.  the bird sculpture is placed on a pivot.  the artist adds the counter-weight at the end e of the tail so that the bird remains stationary in the position shown.  (a) calculate the mass of the counter-weight.  mass =  . [2]  (b) the centre of mass of the sculpture with counter-weight is at the pivot.   calculate the upward force acting at the pivot.  force =  . [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the sculpture is rotated clockwise to the position shown in fig. 2.2. it is held still, then  carefully released. pivot counter-weightm fig. 2.2   (i) state whether the sculpture will stay in that position, rotate further clockwise or rotate back anticlockwise.  .. ..   (ii) explain your answer to (i). .. .. .. ..   [3]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows a water turbine that is generating electricity in a small tidal energy scheme. barrage 3.0 m water level in tidal basinsea-water level at high tide turbine connected to electricity generator fig. 3.1  at high tide, 1.0 m3 of sea-water of density 1030 kg / m3 flows through the turbine every  second.  (a) calculate the loss of gravitational potential energy when 1.0 m3 of sea-water falls  through a vertical distance of 3.0 m.  loss of gravitational potential energy =  . [3]  (b) assume that your answer to (a) is the energy lost per second by the sea-water passing  through the turbine at high tide. the generator delivers a current of 26 a at 400 v.   calculate the efficiency of the scheme.  efficiency =  ..% [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) at low tide, the sea-water level is lower than the water level in the tidal basin.   (i) state the direction of the flow of water through the turbine at low tide.  ..   (ii) suggest an essential feature of the turbine and generator for electricity to be  generated at low tide.  .. .. ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 figs. 4.1 and 4.2 show a semi-circular glass block as rays of blue light are directed into the  block at different angles. the rays are directed towards the centre c of the semi-circle so that no refraction occurs as the rays enter the block.  (a) at the angle shown in fig. 4.1, no refracted ray emerges from the block at c. 40\u00b0 incident rayreflected ray glass airc fig. 4.1   (i) determine the angle of reflection at c.  angle of reflection =  ..   (ii) state the type of reflection occurring at c.  ..  [2]  (b)  50\u00b0 incident rayreflected rayray emerges in air close to glass surface glass airc fig. 4.2   calculate the refractive index of the glass.  refractive index =  . [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the experiment in (b) is now repeated with red light.   on fig. 4.3, draw and label the paths of the reflected and refracted rays of red light. the  dashed lines show the paths taken by the blue light in (b). 50\u00b0 red lightpaths taken by rays of blue light in (b)c     fig. 4.3 [2]  (d) fig. 4.4 shows a 45\u00b0 \u2013 45\u00b0 \u2013 90\u00b0 prism used in an optical instrument. part of the path of  a ray of light passing through the instrument is also shown. light leaves the instrument along path b. path bprism fig. 4.4   in the dashed box, draw another 45\u00b0 \u2013 45\u00b0 \u2013 90\u00b0 prism and complete the path of the  light through this box.  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a view from above of waves on the surface of water in a water tank. d aregion q region pbef c fig. 5.1  the wavefront ab is travelling in region p towards region q, where the water is shallower  and the waves travel more slowly.  (a) some time later, the wavefront has moved into region q.   cd, ce and cf are suggested positions of the new wavefront.   (i) state which is the correct position of the new wavefront. ..   (ii) explain your answer to (i). .. .. .. ..   [4]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 5.2 shows the waves after a change is made to the way the tank is set up, and the  experiment is repeated. g region q region pc b a fig. 5.2   the wave from position ab in region p now moves to position cg in region q.   state the change that has been made and explain your reasoning. change  .explanation  .. .. . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) two students hang out identical t -shirts to dry at the same time in the same  neighbourhood. the only difference between the drying conditions is that one t -shirt is sheltered from any wind and the other is in a strong breeze, as shown in fig. 6.1.   fence strong breezeclothes line no breeze fig. 6.1   state and explain, in terms of water molecules, the difference between the drying times  of the t -shirts.  .. .. .. .. . [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 6.2 shows another occasion when a student hangs out two identical t -shirts to dry  next to each other on a line. one t -shirt is folded double as shown in fig. 6.2. clothes line fig. 6.2   state and explain, in terms of water molecules, the difference between the drying times  of the t -shirts.  .. .. .. .. . [2]  (c) a runner in a hot country feels cooler if she pours water over her hair to keep it wet,  even when the water is at the same temperature as the air around her.   explain, in terms of a change of state of water, why she feels cooler.  ..  .. .. . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a conducting sphere a, initially uncharged, mounted on an insulating  base. the positively-charged, non-conducting sphere b is brought close to sphere a without touching the sphere. +++ +++++ insulating basenon-conducting sphere b conducting sphere a fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, draw the resulting distribution of any positive and negative charges on sphere a. [2]   (ii) the sphere a is now earthed as shown in fig. 7.2. +++ +++++ insulating basenon-conducting sphere b conducting sphere a connection to earth fig. 7.2   on fig. 7.2, draw the distribution of any positive and negative charges on sphere a after  it is earthed. [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) on fig. 7.3, draw lines of force with direction arrows to represent the electric field  pattern in the plane of the paper around a negative point charge at point x. x fig. 7.3   (ii) state what is represented by the directions of the arrows on the lines.  .. ..   [2]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use8 a student holds a magnet above a solenoid, which is connected to a centre-zero milli-ammeter  as shown fig. 8.1. solenoidmagnet ma fig. 8.1  (a) the student drops the magnet so that it falls through the solenoid.   state and explain what would be observed on the milliammeter   (i) as the magnet enters the solenoid,  .. .. . [2]   (ii) as the magnet speeds up inside the solenoid. .. .. . [2]  (b) as the magnet passes into the coil in part (a), the coil exerts a force on the magnet even  though there is no contact between them.   (i) state the direction of this force. ..   (ii) explain how this force is caused.  ..  .. ..   [3]  [total: 7]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 40 lamps, each of resistance 8.0 \u03c9, are connected in series to a 240 v supply in order to  decorate a tree.  (a) calculate   (i) the current in each lamp,  current =  . [2]   (ii) the power dissipated in each lamp.  power =  . [2] (b) the lamps are designed to \u201cfail-short\u201d. if a filament fails, the lamp shorts so that it has  no resistance. the other lamps continue to light and the current increases.   the lamps are connected through a fuse that blows when the current rises above  0.9 a. at this current, the resistance of each lamp is 5% greater than its normal working resistance.   calculate the maximum number of lamps that can fail before the fuse blows.  number of lamps =  . [4]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 a student is designing a digital electronics circuit and needs to use the logic gate x shown  in fig. 10.1. input a input b xoutput fig. 10.1  (a) name the logic gate x.  .. [1]  (b) write down the values of the output when the inputs are   (i) input a low (logic 0), input b low (logic 0), output  ..   (ii) input a low (logic 0), input b high (logic 1), output  ..  (iii) input a high (logic 1), input b low (logic 0), output  ..  (iv) input a high (logic 1), input b high (logic 1). output  ..   [2]  (c) when the student starts to build the circuit, he finds that the store room has run out  of this type of logic gate. there is a supply of and, or and not gates. the student\u2019s teacher explains that a combination of two of these gates may be used instead of logic gate x.   (i) state the two gates he should use to replace logic gate x. .. and ..   (ii) draw clearly in the space below these two logic gates, correctly connected, using  standard symbols.  [3]  (d) fig. 10.2 shows a block diagram, not using standard symbols, of a combination of gates. andnot notu wyz fig. 10.2   state the logic levels of points y and z when the logic levels of points u and w are both 1.  logic level at point y  ..  logic level at point z  ..   [2]  [total: 8]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use11 in a research laboratory, a radioactive sample is placed close to a radiation detector. the  graph in fig. 11.1 shows the decay of the sample. 00102030detector reading counts  / min time  / days405060 2 4 6 8 9 10 1 3 5 7 fig. 11.1  (a) after 6 days the count rate hardly decreases and, in fact, increases a little at times.  explain these observations.  .. .. .. . [2]  (b) use the graph to determine the half-life of the sample. explain your working carefully.  half-life =  . [4]  (c) another radioactive sample is a strong emitter of \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays. a junior  researcher suggests that a sufficient safety precaution, when working with this sample, would be to hold the sample with long forceps. explain why this suggestion, although helpful, may be insufficient.  .. .. ..  . [2]  [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sw) 58313 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *0437932456* physics 0625/33 paper 3  extended may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2 3  4 5  6  7 8 91011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 is a distance / time graph showing the motion of an object. 0051015distance  / m time  / s2025 1 2 3 4 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) describe the motion shown for the first 2 s, calculating any relevant quantity.  ..  ..  [2]   (ii) after 2 s the object accelerates.    on fig. 1.1, sketch a possible shape of the graph for the next 2 s.  [1]  (b) describe how a distance / time graph shows an object that is stationary. .. . [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) fig. 1.2 shows the axes for a speed / time graph. 00246speed m / s time  / s810 1 2 3 4 fig. 1.2   on fig. 1.2, draw   (i) the graph of the motion for the first 2 s as shown in fig. 1.1,   (ii) an extension of the graph for the next 2 s, showing the object accelerating at 2 m / s2.  [3]  (d) describe how a speed / time graph shows an object that is stationary. .. . [2]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows a mobile bird sculpture that has been created by an artist. 12 cm 30 cmpivottail bird sculpture me hole in sculpture for pivot fig. 2.1  m is the centre of mass of the bird sculpture, including its tail (but not including the  counter-weight that will be added later). the mass of the bird and tail is 1.5 kg.  the bird sculpture is placed on a pivot.  the artist adds the counter-weight at the end e of the tail so that the bird remains stationary in the position shown.  (a) calculate the mass of the counter-weight.  mass =  . [2]  (b) the centre of mass of the sculpture with counter-weight is at the pivot.   calculate the upward force acting at the pivot.  force =  . [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the sculpture is rotated clockwise to the position shown in fig. 2.2. it is held still, then  carefully released. pivot counter-weightm fig. 2.2   (i) state whether the sculpture will stay in that position, rotate further clockwise or rotate back anticlockwise.  .. ..   (ii) explain your answer to (i). .. .. .. ..   [3]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows a water turbine that is generating electricity in a small tidal energy scheme. barrage 3.0 m water level in tidal basinsea-water level at high tide turbine connected to electricity generator fig. 3.1  at high tide, 1.0 m3 of sea-water of density 1030 kg / m3 flows through the turbine every  second.  (a) calculate the loss of gravitational potential energy when 1.0 m3 of sea-water falls  through a vertical distance of 3.0 m.  loss of gravitational potential energy =  . [3]  (b) assume that your answer to (a) is the energy lost per second by the sea-water passing  through the turbine at high tide. the generator delivers a current of 26 a at 400 v.   calculate the efficiency of the scheme.  efficiency =  ..% [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) at low tide, the sea-water level is lower than the water level in the tidal basin.   (i) state the direction of the flow of water through the turbine at low tide.  ..   (ii) suggest an essential feature of the turbine and generator for electricity to be  generated at low tide.  .. .. ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 figs. 4.1 and 4.2 show a semi-circular glass block as rays of blue light are directed into the  block at different angles. the rays are directed towards the centre c of the semi-circle so that no refraction occurs as the rays enter the block.  (a) at the angle shown in fig. 4.1, no refracted ray emerges from the block at c. 40\u00b0 incident rayreflected ray glass airc fig. 4.1   (i) determine the angle of reflection at c.  angle of reflection =  ..   (ii) state the type of reflection occurring at c.  ..  [2]  (b)  50\u00b0 incident rayreflected rayray emerges in air close to glass surface glass airc fig. 4.2   calculate the refractive index of the glass.  refractive index =  . [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the experiment in (b) is now repeated with red light.   on fig. 4.3, draw and label the paths of the reflected and refracted rays of red light. the  dashed lines show the paths taken by the blue light in (b). 50\u00b0 red lightpaths taken by rays of blue light in (b)c     fig. 4.3 [2]  (d) fig. 4.4 shows a 45\u00b0 \u2013 45\u00b0 \u2013 90\u00b0 prism used in an optical instrument. part of the path of  a ray of light passing through the instrument is also shown. light leaves the instrument along path b. path bprism fig. 4.4   in the dashed box, draw another 45\u00b0 \u2013 45\u00b0 \u2013 90\u00b0 prism and complete the path of the  light through this box.  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a view from above of waves on the surface of water in a water tank. d aregion q region pbef c fig. 5.1  the wavefront ab is travelling in region p towards region q, where the water is shallower  and the waves travel more slowly.  (a) some time later, the wavefront has moved into region q.   cd, ce and cf are suggested positions of the new wavefront.   (i) state which is the correct position of the new wavefront. ..   (ii) explain your answer to (i). .. .. .. ..   [4]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 5.2 shows the waves after a change is made to the way the tank is set up, and the  experiment is repeated. g region q region pc b a fig. 5.2   the wave from position ab in region p now moves to position cg in region q.   state the change that has been made and explain your reasoning. change  .explanation  .. .. . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) two students hang out identical t -shirts to dry at the same time in the same  neighbourhood. the only difference between the drying conditions is that one t -shirt is sheltered from any wind and the other is in a strong breeze, as shown in fig. 6.1.   fence strong breezeclothes line no breeze fig. 6.1   state and explain, in terms of water molecules, the difference between the drying times  of the t -shirts.  .. .. .. .. . [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 6.2 shows another occasion when a student hangs out two identical t -shirts to dry  next to each other on a line. one t -shirt is folded double as shown in fig. 6.2. clothes line fig. 6.2   state and explain, in terms of water molecules, the difference between the drying times  of the t -shirts.  .. .. .. .. . [2]  (c) a runner in a hot country feels cooler if she pours water over her hair to keep it wet,  even when the water is at the same temperature as the air around her.   explain, in terms of a change of state of water, why she feels cooler.  ..  .. .. . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a conducting sphere a, initially uncharged, mounted on an insulating  base. the positively-charged, non-conducting sphere b is brought close to sphere a without touching the sphere. +++ +++++ insulating basenon-conducting sphere b conducting sphere a fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, draw the resulting distribution of any positive and negative charges on sphere a. [2]   (ii) the sphere a is now earthed as shown in fig. 7.2. +++ +++++ insulating basenon-conducting sphere b conducting sphere a connection to earth fig. 7.2   on fig. 7.2, draw the distribution of any positive and negative charges on sphere a after  it is earthed. [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) on fig. 7.3, draw lines of force with direction arrows to represent the electric field  pattern in the plane of the paper around a negative point charge at point x. x fig. 7.3   (ii) state what is represented by the directions of the arrows on the lines.  .. ..   [2]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use8 a student holds a magnet above a solenoid, which is connected to a centre-zero milli-ammeter  as shown fig. 8.1. solenoidmagnet ma fig. 8.1  (a) the student drops the magnet so that it falls through the solenoid.   state and explain what would be observed on the milliammeter   (i) as the magnet enters the solenoid,  .. .. . [2]   (ii) as the magnet speeds up inside the solenoid. .. .. . [2]  (b) as the magnet passes into the coil in part (a), the coil exerts a force on the magnet even  though there is no contact between them.   (i) state the direction of this force. ..   (ii) explain how this force is caused.  ..  .. ..   [3]  [total: 7]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 40 lamps, each of resistance 8.0 \u03c9, are connected in series to a 240 v supply in order to  decorate a tree.  (a) calculate   (i) the current in each lamp,  current =  . [2]   (ii) the power dissipated in each lamp.  power =  . [2] (b) the lamps are designed to \u201cfail-short\u201d. if a filament fails, the lamp shorts so that it has  no resistance. the other lamps continue to light and the current increases.   the lamps are connected through a fuse that blows when the current rises above  0.9 a. at this current, the resistance of each lamp is 5% greater than its normal working resistance.   calculate the maximum number of lamps that can fail before the fuse blows.  number of lamps =  . [4]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 a student is designing a digital electronics circuit and needs to use the logic gate x shown  in fig. 10.1. input a input b xoutput fig. 10.1  (a) name the logic gate x.  .. [1]  (b) write down the values of the output when the inputs are   (i) input a low (logic 0), input b low (logic 0), output  ..   (ii) input a low (logic 0), input b high (logic 1), output  ..  (iii) input a high (logic 1), input b low (logic 0), output  ..  (iv) input a high (logic 1), input b high (logic 1). output  ..   [2]  (c) when the student starts to build the circuit, he finds that the store room has run out  of this type of logic gate. there is a supply of and, or and not gates. the student\u2019s teacher explains that a combination of two of these gates may be used instead of logic gate x.   (i) state the two gates he should use to replace logic gate x. .. and ..   (ii) draw clearly in the space below these two logic gates, correctly connected, using  standard symbols.  [3]  (d) fig. 10.2 shows a block diagram, not using standard symbols, of a combination of gates. andnot notu wyz fig. 10.2   state the logic levels of points y and z when the logic levels of points u and w are both 1.  logic level at point y  ..  logic level at point z  ..   [2]  [total: 8]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use11 in a research laboratory, a radioactive sample is placed close to a radiation detector. the  graph in fig. 11.1 shows the decay of the sample. 00102030detector reading counts  / min time  / days405060 2 4 6 8 9 10 1 3 5 7 fig. 11.1  (a) after 6 days the count rate hardly decreases and, in fact, increases a little at times.  explain these observations.  .. .. .. . [2]  (b) use the graph to determine the half-life of the sample. explain your working carefully.  half-life =  . [4]  (c) another radioactive sample is a strong emitter of \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays. a junior  researcher suggests that a sufficient safety precaution, when working with this sample, would be to hold the sample with long forceps. explain why this suggestion, although helpful, may be insufficient.  .. .. ..  . [2]  [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (nf/cgw) 42238/6 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *7413011205* physics 0625/51 paper 5  practical test may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 the aim of this experiment is to determine the internal volume of a test-tube using two  displacement methods.  carry out the following instructions referring to figs. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3. y ou are supplied with a beaker of water. measuring cylinder watertest-tube test-tubefinger  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2 fig. 1.3  (a) (i) pour approximately 80 cm3 of water from the beaker into the measuring cylinder.  record the volume v1 of water.  v  1 =  ..   (ii) lower the test-tube, closed end first, into the water in the measuring cylinder and  push it down until it is filled with water, as shown in fig. 1.2. record the new water level v 2.  v2 =  ..   (iii) calculate the volume vg of the glass of the test-tube using the equation  vg = (v2 \u2013 v1).  vg =  ..  [3]  (b) remove the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and pour the water from the tube and the measuring cylinder into the beaker.    (i) pour approximately 70 cm 3 of water from the beaker into the measuring cylinder.  record the volume v3 of water.  v3 =  ..   (ii) gently put the test-tube, open end first, into the water in the measuring cylinder and carefully push it down with your finger or pencil until it is just covered with water, as shown in fig. 1.3. record the new water level v 4.  v4 =  ..",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) calculate the increase in water level ( v4 \u2013 v3).  ( v4 \u2013 v3) =  ..   (iv) calculate the volume va of air in the test-tube using the equation va = (v4 \u2013 v3) \u2013 vg.  va =  ..  [3]  (c) remove the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and pour the water from the measuring  cylinder into the beaker. fill the test-tube to the top with water from the beaker. pour the water from the test-tube into the measuring cylinder. record the volume v w of water  from the tube.  vw =  ..  [1]  (d) the aim of this experiment is to determine the internal volume of the test-tube by two methods. the two values are v a (obtained from parts (a) and (b)) and vw (obtained  from part (c)). the values obtained from your readings may not be the same.   assuming that the experiments have been carried out correctly and carefully, and that  the measuring cylinder scale is accurate, suggest two reasons why the value va may be  inaccurate and two reasons why the value vw may be inaccurate. va:  reason 1  ...  ..reason 2  ... ..v w:  reason 1  ... ..reason 2  ... ..  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the heating of a thermometer bulb.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 2.1 and 2.2. card lampthermometer thermometer bulb ruled fig. 2.1  y ou are provided with a lamp and a rule. do not  move the lamp or the rule. during the  experiment, you will read temperature values from the thermometer. y ou should use the card  provided to shield your eyes from the direct rays of the lamp.  (a) record the value of room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer.  \u03b8r =  . [1]  (b) switch on the lamp. leave the lamp switched on until you have completed all the readings.   (i) place the thermometer so that its bulb is a horizontal distance d = 100 mm from  the surface of the lamp, as shown in fig. 2.1. record in table 2.1 the distance d  between the thermometer bulb and the surface of the lamp. also record the  temperature \u03b8  shown on the thermometer.   (ii) move the thermometer so that its bulb is a distance d = 80 mm from the surface of the  lamp.    in the table, record the distance d and the temperature \u03b8. table 2.1 d  / \u03b8  /   (iii) repeat the steps described in (b)(ii), but using values of d of 60 mm, 40 mm, 20 mm  and 10 mm.   (iv) complete the column headings in the table.  [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) move the thermometer away from the lamp and wait for about a minute for the  thermometer to cool. lampthermometer d v fig. 2.2   (i) place the thermometer so that its bulb is a vertical distance dv = 100 mm from  the top surface of the lamp, as shown in fig. 2.2. use the 100 mm rod provided to obtain the correct distance. record the temperature   \u03b8v shown on the thermometer.  \u03b8v =  . [1]   (ii) calculate the difference between \u03b8v and the thermometer reading \u03b8h at a horizontal  distance of 100 mm from the lamp. state whether \u03b8v is higher, lower or the same  as \u03b8h.  temperature difference =  ..  \u03b8v is  . [1]  (d) a student suggests that \u03b8v will be higher than the thermometer reading \u03b8h because  thermal energy will travel by infra-red radiation and convection to the thermometer bulb above the lamp but by infra-red radiation only when the bulb is to one side of the lamp.   if the experiment were to be repeated in order to investigate this suggestion, it would  be important to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions, relevant to this investigation, that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  (e) briefly describe a precaution that you took in this experiment in order to obtain a reliable  result.  .. . [1]   [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will determine the resistance of a resistor in a circuit.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. the circuit is set up for you. vapower source resistance wire acdr b fig. 3.1  (a) (i) place the sliding contact c on the resistance wire at a distance d = 30.0 cm from  point a. switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and  the p.d. v across the resistor r. switch off.   (ii) repeat the procedure in step (i) using d values of 40.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and  90.0 cm.   (iii) complete the column headings in the table. table 3.1 d  / v / i / 30.0 40.050.070.090.0  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  . [2]  (d) the gradient g of the graph is numerically equal to the resistance r of the resistor r.   write a value for the resistance r to a suitable number of significant figures for this  experiment.  r =  . [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a lens.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1. lensscreen x dilluminated object fig. 4.1  (a) place the screen at a distance d = 0.800 m from the illuminated object.  (b) place the lens between the object and the screen and close to the object. move the lens  towards the screen until an enlarged image is formed on the screen. adjust the position of the lens until the image is as clearly focused as possible.  (c) measure and record the distance x between the centre of the lens and the screen.  x  =  . [1]  (d) without moving the illuminated object or the screen, move the lens towards the screen until a clearly focused diminished image is formed on the screen.  (e) measure and record the distance y between the centre of the lens and the screen.  y  =  . [2]  (f) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f =  xy d.  f  =  . [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (g) turn the lens through an angle of 180\u00b0 so that the other side of the lens faces the  screen. repeat steps (a) to (f).  x  =  ..  y  =  ..  f  =  ..  [3]  (h) a student suggests that the two values of the focal length f should be the same. state whether or not your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [2]  (i) briefly describe a precaution that you took in this experiment in order to obtain a reliable  result.  .. .. . [1]   [total: 10] ",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (leo/sw) 42226/4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *4288656769* physics 0625/52 paper 5  practical test may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will investigate the effect of a load on a rule attached to a forcemeter.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. the apparatus has been set up for  you. 10.0  cm mark90.0  cm markmetre rule benchstand masspivotstandforcemeter d fig. 1.1  the rule is pivoted near one end. near the other end, the rule is attached to a forcemeter. a   mass is hanging from the rule at a distance d from the pivot.  (a) (i) move the mass to a distance d = 70.0 cm from the pivot. record the distance d in  table 1.1.   (ii) adjust the position of the forcemeter by raising or lowering the clamp until the rule is horizontal and the forcemeter is vertical. measure and record in the table the reading f on the forcemeter. table 1.1 d / f /   (iii) repeat steps (i) and (ii) using d values of 60.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 30.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 10.0 cm.   (iv) complete the column headings in the table. [5]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) a student thinks that f is directly proportional to d.   (i) suggest the graph that you could plot to test this idea. y ou are not asked to plot the  graph.  . against .   (ii) state the properties of the line that would indicate that f is directly proportional to d. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [3]  (c) a spirit level is a piece of equipment that is placed on a surface to check whether the  surface is horizontal.   suggest why a spirit level balanced on the rule is not suitable for checking whether the  rule is horizontal in this experiment.  .. ..[1]  (d) describe briefly how you checked that the rule was horizontal. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the rate of cooling of water.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water. carry out the following instructions referring to  fig. 2.1. thermometer water     fig. 2.1  (a) measure and record room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  [1]  (b) (i) pour approximately 200 cm3 of the hot water supplied into the beaker. place the  thermometer in the beaker of water.    measure the temperature \u03b8 of the water. record \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s.   (ii) start the stopclock and record in the table the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until you have a total of six values up to time t = 150 s. table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis).  [5]  (d) as you read these words, this experiment is being carried out by candidates in many  different countries, using identical apparatus.   suggest two differences in the conditions in the various laboratories that might lead to  different graphs. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate resistor combinations in circuits.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. power source va fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v1 across the resistors and  the current i1 in the circuit. switch off.  v1 =    i1 =     (ii) calculate the total resistance rp of the combination of the two resistors arranged in  parallel, using the equation rp = v1 i1.  rp =     (iii) calculate 4rp.  4 rp =    [2]  (b) rearrange the circuit so that the two resistors are connected in series and the voltmeter  is connected to measure the potential difference across both resistors.   (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v2 across the resistors and  the current i2 in the circuit. switch off.  v2 =    i2 =  ",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the total resistance rs of the combination of the two resistors arranged  in series, using the equation rs = v2 i2.  rs =    [2]  (c) theory suggests that rs = 4rp if the two resistors have the same value.   state whether your results indicate that the two resistors have the same value. justify  your answer with reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [1]  (d) using the circuit described in (b), replace the two series resistors with the two lamps.   (i) draw a circuit diagram of the new circuit using standard symbols.  [2]   (ii) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v 3 across the lamps and  the current i3 in the circuit. switch off.  v3 =    i3 =     (iii) calculate the total resistance ls of the combination of the two lamps arranged in  series using the equation ls = v3 i3.  ls =  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (e) rearrange the circuit to that shown in fig. 3.1 but with the lamps in place of the resistors.    (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v4 across the lamps and  the current i4 in the circuit. switch off.  v4 =    i4 =     (ii) calculate the total resistance lp of the combination of the two lamps arranged in parallel using the equation lp = v4 i4.  lp =     (iii) calculate 4lp.  4 lp =    [1]  (f) a student suggests that using lamps instead of resistors changes the conditions of the  experiment and that 4lp will not be equal to ls because of a heating effect.   from your own observations, state one piece of evidence that supports the student\u2019s  suggestion that there is a heating effect. y ou should not do any further calculations.   .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will determine the refractive index of the material of a transparent  block.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. eyec ray-trace sheetdb efn 20\u00b0normal a fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd.  (b) remove the block and draw a normal at the centre of side ab. label the point e where the normal crosses ab. mark a point n on the normal 4.0 cm from e and outside the  block as shown in fig. 4.1.",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (c) draw a line nf to the right of the normal and at an angle of 20\u00b0 to the normal as shown  in fig. 4.1. f is the point where the line meets ab. measure and record the length a of  the line nf.  a =  ... [1]  (d) extend the line nf beyond n and place the paper on the pin board.  (e) place two pins p1 and p2 on the line through f and n, placing one pin close to f.  (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so  that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   place two pins p3 and p4 between your eye and the block so that p3 and p4 and the  images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other.   mark the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. remove the block.  (g) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd. label  this point g.  (h) draw the line gf and continue it until it meets the normal. label this point h.  (i) measure and record the length b of the line fh.  b =  [1]  (j) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block, using the equation n = ba.  n =  [2]  (k) repeat steps (c) \u2013 (j) but with the line from n drawn at 25\u00b0 to the left of the normal.  a =     b =     n =    [1]  tie your ray trace into this booklet between pages 10 and 11. [5]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (slm/sw) 57712 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *6173585894* physics 0625/53 paper 5  practical test may/june 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will investigate the effect of a load on a rule attached to a forcemeter.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. the apparatus has been set up for  you. 10.0  cm mark90.0  cm markmetre rule benchstand masspivotstandforcemeter d fig. 1.1  the rule is pivoted near one end. near the other end, the rule is attached to a forcemeter. a   mass is hanging from the rule at a distance d from the pivot.  (a) (i) move the mass to a distance d = 70.0 cm from the pivot. record the distance d in  table 1.1.   (ii) adjust the position of the forcemeter by raising or lowering the clamp until the rule is horizontal and the forcemeter is vertical. measure and record in the table the reading f on the forcemeter. table 1.1 d / f /   (iii) repeat steps (i) and (ii) using d values of 60.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 30.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 10.0 cm.   (iv) complete the column headings in the table. [5]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) a student thinks that f is directly proportional to d.   (i) suggest the graph that you could plot to test this idea. y ou are not asked to plot the  graph.  . against .   (ii) state the properties of the line that would indicate that f is directly proportional to d. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [3]  (c) a spirit level is a piece of equipment that is placed on a surface to check whether the  surface is horizontal.   suggest why a spirit level balanced on the rule is not suitable for checking whether the  rule is horizontal in this experiment.  .. ..[1]  (d) describe briefly how you checked that the rule was horizontal. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the rate of cooling of water.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water. carry out the following instructions referring to  fig. 2.1. thermometer water     fig. 2.1  (a) measure and record room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  [1]  (b) (i) pour approximately 200 cm3 of the hot water supplied into the beaker. place the  thermometer in the beaker of water.    measure the temperature \u03b8 of the water. record \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s.   (ii) start the stopclock and record in the table the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until you have a total of six values up to time t = 150 s. table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis).  [5]  (d) as you read these words, this experiment is being carried out by candidates in many  different countries, using identical apparatus.   suggest two differences in the conditions in the various laboratories that might lead to  different graphs. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate resistor combinations in circuits.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. power source va fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v1 across the resistors and  the current i1 in the circuit. switch off.  v1 =    i1 =     (ii) calculate the total resistance rp of the combination of the two resistors arranged in  parallel, using the equation rp = v1 i1.  rp =     (iii) calculate 4rp.  4 rp =    [2]  (b) rearrange the circuit so that the two resistors are connected in series and the voltmeter  is connected to measure the potential difference across both resistors.   (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v2 across the resistors and  the current i2 in the circuit. switch off.  v2 =    i2 =  ",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the total resistance rs of the combination of the two resistors arranged  in series, using the equation rs = v2 i2.  rs =    [2]  (c) theory suggests that rs = 4rp if the two resistors have the same value.   state whether your results indicate that the two resistors have the same value. justify  your answer with reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [1]  (d) using the circuit described in (b), replace the two series resistors with the two lamps.   (i) draw a circuit diagram of the new circuit using standard symbols.  [2]   (ii) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v 3 across the lamps and  the current i3 in the circuit. switch off.  v3 =    i3 =     (iii) calculate the total resistance ls of the combination of the two lamps arranged in  series using the equation ls = v3 i3.  ls =  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (e) rearrange the circuit to that shown in fig. 3.1 but with the lamps in place of the resistors.    (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v4 across the lamps and  the current i4 in the circuit. switch off.  v4 =    i4 =     (ii) calculate the total resistance lp of the combination of the two lamps arranged in parallel using the equation lp = v4 i4.  lp =     (iii) calculate 4lp.  4 lp =    [1]  (f) a student suggests that using lamps instead of resistors changes the conditions of the  experiment and that 4lp will not be equal to ls because of a heating effect.   from your own observations, state one piece of evidence that supports the student\u2019s  suggestion that there is a heating effect. y ou should not do any further calculations.   .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will determine the refractive index of the material of a transparent  block.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. eyec ray-trace sheetdb efn 20\u00b0normal a fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd.  (b) remove the block and draw a normal at the centre of side ab. label the point e where the normal crosses ab. mark a point n on the normal 4.0 cm from e and outside the  block as shown in fig. 4.1.",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (c) draw a line nf to the right of the normal and at an angle of 20\u00b0 to the normal as shown  in fig. 4.1. f is the point where the line meets ab. measure and record the length a of  the line nf.  a =  ... [1]  (d) extend the line nf beyond n and place the paper on the pin board.  (e) place two pins p1 and p2 on the line through f and n, placing one pin close to f.  (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so  that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   place two pins p3 and p4 between your eye and the block so that p3 and p4 and the  images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other.   mark the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. remove the block.  (g) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd. label  this point g.  (h) draw the line gf and continue it until it meets the normal. label this point h.  (i) measure and record the length b of the line fh.  b =  [1]  (j) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block, using the equation n = ba.  n =  [2]  (k) repeat steps (c) \u2013 (j) but with the line from n drawn at 25\u00b0 to the left of the normal.  a =     b =     n =    [1]  tie your ray trace into this booklet between pages 10 and 11. [5]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nf/cgw) 42235/7 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *4468101826* physics 0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2012  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 an igcse student is determining the mass of a metre rule using a balancing method.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. metre ruley x d pivot50.0  cm mark m fig. 1.1  mass m is placed on the rule. the position of the pivot is adjusted until the rule balances.  (a) the student chooses a mass m which is similar to the mass of the metre rule. suggest a  suitable value for the mass.  suitable mass =  . [1]  (b) the mass is cylindrical and has a diameter slightly larger than the width of the metre rule.   describe briefly how you would place the mass so that its centre of mass is exactly over  the 90.0 cm mark on the metre rule. y ou should draw a diagram and mark the position of  the centre of mass on the cylinder.  ..  .. . [2]  (c) from your experience of carrying out balancing experiments of this type, suggest one  difficulty that you are likely to come across that could make the final result inaccurate.  .. .. . [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) the student takes a reading of x and the corresponding reading of y. he then calculates  the mass of the metre rule.   suggest how you would improve the reliability of the value of the mass of the metre rule,  using this method.  .. . [1]  (e) another student carries out a similar experiment to determine the mass of a 50 cm metal  strip. she calculates the mass and writes down \u201cmass = 234.872 g\u201d.   she checks the mass on an accurate balance. the value is 235 g. she thinks she must  have made a mistake in her experiment.   write a brief comment on the accuracy of her experimental result.  ..  .. . [1]   [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the heating of a thermometer bulb.  the apparatus is shown in figs. 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3. card lampthermometer metre rule d fig. 2.1  (a) record the value of room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer. 60 100 110\u00b0c90 80 70 10 50 40 30 20 -10 0 fig. 2.2  \u03b8r =  . [1]  (b) a student switches on the lamp and places the thermometer so that its bulb is a horizontal  distance d = 100 mm from the surface of the lamp, as shown in fig. 2.1. she records the  distance d between the thermometer bulb and the surface of the lamp. she also records  the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. she repeats the procedure using values  of d of 80 mm, 60 mm, 40 mm, 20 mm and 10 mm. the temperature readings are shown  in table 2.1.   (i) record the d  values in the table.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. table 2.1 d / 00 \u03b8 / 00 52 5661677586   [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the student moves the thermometer away from the lamp and waits for about a minute  for the thermometer to cool. she places the thermometer so that its bulb is a vertical  distance dv = 100 mm from the top surface of the lamp, as shown in fig. 2.3.  lampthermometer dv fig. 2.3   she records the temperature  \u03b8v shown on the thermometer: \u03b8v = 55 \u00b0c.   calculate the difference between \u03b8v and the thermometer reading \u03b8h at a horizontal  distance of 100 mm from the lamp. state whether \u03b8v is higher, lower or the same as \u03b8h.  temperature difference =  ..  \u03b8v is  . [1]  (d) a student suggests that \u03b8v will be higher than the thermometer reading \u03b8h because  thermal energy will travel by infra-red radiation and convection to the thermometer bulb above the lamp but by infra-red radiation only when the bulb is to one side of the lamp.   if the experiment were to be repeated in order to investigate this suggestion it would  be important to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions, relevant to this investigation, that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  (e) briefly describe a precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain a  reliable result.  .. .. . [1]   [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is determining the resistance of a fixed resistor in a circuit.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. vapower source resistance wire adr fig. 3.1  (a) a student places the sliding contact on the resistance wire at a distance d = 10.0 cm  from point a. he measures the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across the resistor  r. he repeats the procedure using d values of 30.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and 90.0 cm.   the readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 v / v i / a 10.0 1.7 1.13 30.0 1.3 0.87 50.0 1.0 0.67 70.0 0.8 0.53 90.0 0.7 0.47   (i) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "7": "7 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) plot a graph of v / v ( y-axis) against i / a (x-axis). y ou do not need to include the  origin (0, 0) on your graph.  [5]   (iii) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained  the necessary information.  g  =  . [3]  (b) the gradient g of the graph is numerically equal to the resistance r of the resistor r.   write a value for the resistance r  to a suitable number of significant figures for this  experiment.  r =  . [2]   [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is determining the focal length of a lens.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. lensscreen x dilluminated object fig. 4.1  (a) a student places the lens between the object and the screen and close to the object.  she moves the lens towards the screen until a clearly focused, enlarged image is formed on the screen.   (i) on fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance d between the object and the screen.  d  =  ..   (ii) on fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance x between the centre of the lens and  the screen.  x  =  ..   [2]   (iii) fig. 4.1 is drawn one tenth actual size.    1. calculate the actual distance d between the object and the screen.  d  =  ..    2. calculate the actual distance x between the centre of the lens and the screen.  x  =  ..   [1]  (b) without moving the illuminated object or the screen, the student moves the lens towards  the screen until a clearly focused, diminished image is formed on the screen. she measures the distance y  between the centre of the lens and the screen: y = 19.0 cm.   calculate the focal length f  of the lens using the equation f =  xy d .  f  =  . [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the student turns the lens through an angle of 180\u00b0 and repeats the procedure obtaining  a value for the focal length f = 14.7 cm.   theory suggests that the two values of the focal length f should be the same. state  whether the results support this theory and justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [2]  (d) briefly describe a precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain a  reliable result.  .. .. . [1]   [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is determining the internal volume of a test-tube using two displacement  methods.  the apparatus used is shown in figs. 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3. cm3 102030405060708090100 measuring cylinder test-tubecm3 102030405060708090100 water  fig. 5.1 fig. 5.2  (a) (i) fig. 5.1 shows water in a measuring cylinder. record the volume v1 of the water.  v1 =  . [1]   (ii) on fig. 5.1, show clearly the line of sight that you would use to obtain an accurate  volume reading.  [2]  (b) (i) a student lowers a test-tube, closed end first, into the water in the measuring  cylinder and pushes the tube down until it is filled with water. from fig. 5.2, record  the new water level v2.  v2 =  ..   (ii) calculate the volume vg of the glass of the test-tube using the equation vg = (v2 \u2013 v1).  vg =  ..   [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the student removes the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and empties the water  back into the measuring cylinder. he then puts the test-tube, open end first, into the  water in the measuring cylinder and carefully pushes it down with his finger until it is covered with water as shown in fig. 5.3. test-tubefinger cm3 102030405060708090100 fig. 5.3   (i) record the new water level v3.  v3 =  ..   (ii) calculate the increase in water level ( v3 \u2013 v1).  ( v3 \u2013 v1) =  ..   (iii) calculate the volume va of air in the test-tube using the equation va = (v3 \u2013 v1) \u2013 vg.  va =  ..   [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (d) the student removes the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and fills the test-tube  with water from a beaker. he pours the water from the test-tube into an empty measuring cylinder and records the volume v w of water:      18 cm3 vw =  ..   the student has attempted to determine the internal volume of the test-tube by two  methods. his two values for the internal volume are va and vw.   assuming that the experiments have been carried out correctly and carefully and that  the measuring cylinder scale is accurate, suggest two reasons why the value va may be  inaccurate and two reasons why the value vw may be inaccurate. va:  reason 1  ...  ..reason 2  ... ..v w:  reason 1  ... ..reason 2  ... ..   [3]   [total: 9]"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (leo/sw) 42234/5 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *4763140547* physics 0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2012  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is investigating the effect of a load on a metre rule attached to a forcemeter.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1. 10.0  cm mark90.0  cm markmetre rule benchstand mass mpivotstandforcemeter d fig. 1.1  the rule is pivoted near one end at the 10.0 cm mark. near the other end, at the 90.0 cm  mark, the rule is attached to a forcemeter. a  mass is hanging from the rule at a distance d  from the pivot.  (a) a student moves the mass to a distance d = 70.0 cm from the pivot. he adjusts the height of the forcemeter until the rule is again horizontal. he records the reading f on  the forcemeter.   he repeats the procedure using d values of 60.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 30.0 cm, 20.0 cm  and 10.0 cm. the forcemeter readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 d / f / 2.9 2.52.21.81.51.20.8   (i) record the d values in the table.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [2]",
            "3": "3 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use (b) the student thinks that f is directly proportional to d.   (i) suggest the graph that you could plot to test this idea. y ou are not asked to plot the  graph.   against ..   (ii) state the properties of the line that would indicate that f is directly proportional to d. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [3]  (c) a spirit level is a piece of equipment that is placed on a surface to check whether the surface is horizontal.   suggest why a spirit level balanced on the rule is not suitable for checking whether the  rule is horizontal in this experiment.  .. ..[1]  (d) describe briefly how you would check that the rule is horizontal in this experiment. y ou  may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus. thermometer water fig. 2.1  (a) record the value of room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c  \u03b8r =  [1]  (b) a student pours approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker. she measures the  temperature \u03b8 of the water. she starts a stopclock and records the temperature \u03b8 of the  water at 30 s intervals up to time t = 150 s. the readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c 08 6 30 75 60 6790 61 120 56150 52",
            "5": "5 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use  plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis).  [5]  (c) as you read these words, this experiment is actually being carried out by candidates in  many different countries, using identical apparatus.   suggest two differences in the conditions in the various laboratories that might lead to  different graphs. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating resistor combinations in circuits.  the first circuit used is shown in fig. 3.1. power source va fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures the potential difference v1 across the resistors and the current i1 in  the circuit. the readings are shown in figs. 3.2 and 3.3. 5 v6789 104321 0 fig. 3.2 a0.6 0.8 1.00.40.2 0 fig. 3.3   (i) record the potential difference v1 and the current i1.  v1 =    i1 =    [3]",
            "7": "7 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the total resistance rp of the combination of the two resistors arranged in parallel using the equation rp = v1 i1.  rp =     (iii) calculate 4rp.  4 rp =    [2]  (b) the student rearranges the circuit so that the two resistors are connected in series and  the voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across both resistors.   the new potential difference and current readings are v2 = 1.9 v and i2 = 0.08 a.   calculate the total resistance rs of the combination of the two resistors arranged in series using the equation rs = v2 i2.  rs =  [1]  (c) theory suggests that rs = 4rp if the two resistors have the same value. state whether  your results indicate that the resistors have the same value. justify your answer with  reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [1]  (d) using the circuit described in (b), the student replaces the two series resistors with two  lamps.    in the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the new circuit using standard symbols.  [1]",
            "8": "8 \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use (e) a student suggests repeating the experiment described in parts (a) to (c). he connects  a variable resistor between the power source and the switch.   (i) state the function of the variable resistor.  ..   (ii) explain why you might want to use a variable resistor in this way. .. ..  [2]  [total: 10] 4 a student is measuring some small glass spheres.  (a) the student has a 30 cm rule and two rectangular blocks of wood.   in the space below, draw a diagram to show clearly how you would arrange the  apparatus to measure the diameter of one of the spheres.   [2]",
            "9": "9 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn over 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use (b) the student then determines the average volume of a glass sphere by a displacement  method. she pours some cold water into a measuring cylinder and records the volume v of the water, as shown in fig. 4.1.    20406080100cm3     fig. 4.1   (i) on fig. 4.1, show clearly the line of sight that you would use to obtain an accurate  volume reading. [2]   (ii) using fig. 4.1, record the volume v of water in the measuring cylinder.  v =  ... [1]   (iii) the student carefully puts 15 of the glass spheres into the measuring cylinder. the new water level reading is 78 cm 3.    calculate the volume v1 of one sphere.  v1 =  ... [1]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is determining the refractive index of the material of a transparent block.  fig. 5.1 shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. ray-trace sheeta p3 p4b dc fig. 5.1",
            "11": "11 \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/62/m/j/12for examiner\u2019s use (a) abcd is a transparent block placed, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet.   (i) on fig. 5.1, draw a normal at the centre of side ab. label the point e where the  normal crosses ab. mark a point n on the normal 4.0 cm from e and outside the outline of the block. [1]   (ii) draw a line nf from n to the block. this line must be to the right of the normal and at an angle of 20\u00b0 to the normal. mark the point f where the line meets ab.  measure and record the length a of the line nf.  a =  ... [2]  (b) the student places two pins p 1 and p2 on the line through f and n. she observes the  images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the images of p1 and p2  appear one behind the other.   she places two pins p3 and p4 between her eye and the block so that p3 and p4 and  the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other. the  positions of p3 and p4 are marked on fig. 5.1.   (i) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd.  label this point g.   (ii) draw the line gf and continue it until it meets the normal. label this point h.   (iii) measure and record the length b of the line fh.  b =    [3]   (iv) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block, using the equation     n = ba.  n =  [2]  (c) suggest one precaution that you would take in this experiment to obtain readings that are as accurate as possible.  .. ..[1]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s12_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sw) 58817 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *0256034116* physics 0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2012  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is investigating the effect of a load on a metre rule attached to a forcemeter.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1. 10.0  cm mark90.0  cm markmetre rule benchstand mass mpivotstandforcemeter d fig. 1.1  the rule is pivoted near one end at the 10.0 cm mark. near the other end, at the 90.0 cm  mark, the rule is attached to a forcemeter. a  mass is hanging from the rule at a distance d  from the pivot.  (a) a student moves the mass to a distance d = 70.0 cm from the pivot. he adjusts the height of the forcemeter until the rule is again horizontal. he records the reading f on  the forcemeter.   he repeats the procedure using d values of 60.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 30.0 cm, 20.0 cm  and 10.0 cm. the forcemeter readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 d / f / 2.9 2.52.21.81.51.20.8   (i) record the d values in the table.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student thinks that f is directly proportional to d.   (i) suggest the graph that you could plot to test this idea. y ou are not asked to plot the  graph.   against ..   (ii) state the properties of the line that would indicate that f is directly proportional to d. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [3]  (c) a spirit level is a piece of equipment that is placed on a surface to check whether the surface is horizontal.   suggest why a spirit level balanced on the rule is not suitable for checking whether the  rule is horizontal in this experiment.  .. ..[1]  (d) describe briefly how you would check that the rule is horizontal in this experiment. y ou  may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus. thermometer water fig. 2.1  (a) record the value of room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c  \u03b8r =  [1]  (b) a student pours approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker. she measures the  temperature \u03b8 of the water. she starts a stopclock and records the temperature \u03b8 of the  water at 30 s intervals up to time t = 150 s. the readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c 08 6 30 75 60 6790 61 120 56150 52",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis).  [5]  (c) as you read these words, this experiment is actually being carried out by candidates in  many different countries, using identical apparatus.   suggest two differences in the conditions in the various laboratories that might lead to  different graphs. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating resistor combinations in circuits.  the first circuit used is shown in fig. 3.1. power source va fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures the potential difference v1 across the resistors and the current i1 in  the circuit. the readings are shown in figs. 3.2 and 3.3. 5 v6789 104321 0 fig. 3.2 a0.6 0.8 1.00.40.2 0 fig. 3.3   (i) record the potential difference v1 and the current i1.  v1 =    i1 =    [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the total resistance rp of the combination of the two resistors arranged in parallel using the equation rp = v1 i1.  rp =     (iii) calculate 4rp.  4 rp =    [2]  (b) the student rearranges the circuit so that the two resistors are connected in series and  the voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across both resistors.   the new potential difference and current readings are v2 = 1.9 v and i2 = 0.08 a.   calculate the total resistance rs of the combination of the two resistors arranged in series using the equation rs = v2 i2.  rs =  [1]  (c) theory suggests that rs = 4rp if the two resistors have the same value. state whether  your results indicate that the resistors have the same value. justify your answer with  reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [1]  (d) using the circuit described in (b), the student replaces the two series resistors with two  lamps.    in the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the new circuit using standard symbols.  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (e) a student suggests repeating the experiment described in parts (a) to (c). he connects  a variable resistor between the power source and the switch.   (i) state the function of the variable resistor.  ..   (ii) explain why you might want to use a variable resistor in this way. .. ..  [2]  [total: 10] 4 a student is measuring some small glass spheres.  (a) the student has a 30 cm rule and two rectangular blocks of wood.   in the space below, draw a diagram to show clearly how you would arrange the  apparatus to measure the diameter of one of the spheres.   [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student then determines the average volume of a glass sphere by a displacement  method. she pours some cold water into a measuring cylinder and records the volume v of the water, as shown in fig. 4.1.    20406080100cm3     fig. 4.1   (i) on fig. 4.1, show clearly the line of sight that you would use to obtain an accurate  volume reading. [2]   (ii) using fig. 4.1, record the volume v of water in the measuring cylinder.  v =  ... [1]   (iii) the student carefully puts 15 of the glass spheres into the measuring cylinder. the new water level reading is 78 cm 3.    calculate the volume v1 of one sphere.  v1 =  ... [1]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is determining the refractive index of the material of a transparent block.  fig. 5.1 shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. ray-trace sheeta p3 p4b dc fig. 5.1",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (a) abcd is a transparent block placed, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet.   (i) on fig. 5.1, draw a normal at the centre of side ab. label the point e where the  normal crosses ab. mark a point n on the normal 4.0 cm from e and outside the outline of the block. [1]   (ii) draw a line nf from n to the block. this line must be to the right of the normal and at an angle of 20\u00b0 to the normal. mark the point f where the line meets ab.  measure and record the length a of the line nf.  a =  ... [2]  (b) the student places two pins p 1 and p2 on the line through f and n. she observes the  images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the images of p1 and p2  appear one behind the other.   she places two pins p3 and p4 between her eye and the block so that p3 and p4 and  the images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other. the  positions of p3 and p4 are marked on fig. 5.1.   (i) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd.  label this point g.   (ii) draw the line gf and continue it until it meets the normal. label this point h.   (iii) measure and record the length b of the line fh.  b =    [3]   (iv) calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block, using the equation     n = ba.  n =  [2]  (c) suggest one precaution that you would take in this experiment to obtain readings that are as accurate as possible.  .. ..[1]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib12 11_0625_11/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2012  [turn over      *8913251826* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2012     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  1 a pendulum is set in motion and timed. the time measured for 20 complete swings is 30  s.    what is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?  a 0.67  s b 0.75  s c 1.5  s d 3.0  s     2 two stones of different weight fall at the sa me time from a table. air resistance may be ignored.    what will happen and why?     what will happen why  a both stones hit the floor at the same time acceleration of free fall is constant  b both stones hit the floor at the same  time they fall at constant speed  c the heavier stone hits the floor first acceleration increases with weight  d the heavier stone hits the floor first speed increases with weight      3 the speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.   where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus greatest?    speed  time a b c  d      ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12 [turn over  4 a large bag of feathers and a steel block balance each other on some scales.    bag of featherssteel block     what does this show about the masses and the we ights of the bag of feathers and the steel  block?  a it shows that the masses are equal and the weights are equal.  b it shows that the masses are equal, but the weights might be different.  c it shows that the masses might be different and the weights might be different.  d it shows that the weights are equal, but the masses might be different.    5 a parachutist inside an aeroplane has a mass of 70  kg.        what is his mass after he has jumped from the aeroplane?  a 0  kg  b between 0  kg and 70  kg  c 70  kg  d greater than 70  kg     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  6 a liquid has a density of 0.80  g / cm3.    which could be the volume and mass of this liquid?     volume  / cm3 mass  / g  a 2.0 16  b 8.0 10  c 10 8.0  d 16 2.0     7 the diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. the position of the centre of mass of  each object has been marked with a cross.    which object is the most stable?    a b c d      8 a see-saw is made by resting a long plank of wood with its centre of mass on a barrel.    a boy sits on one side of the barrel and a girl sits on the other side so that the see-saw is  balanced.    boy\u2019s weight girl\u2019s weightx y boy girl     which statement must  be true?  a boy\u2019s weight = girl\u2019s weight  b distance x = distance y  c total downward force = total moment about the barrel  d resultant force and resultant moment are both zero     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12 [turn over  9 a power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.    in this process, nuclear energy is first changed into  a chemical energy.  b electrical energy.  c gravitational energy.  d thermal (heat) energy.    10 a person lifts boxes of equal weight on to a platform.    boxes platform     which quantity will not affect the work done by the person?  a the height of the platform above the ground  b the number of boxes lifted  c the time taken to lift the boxes  d the weight of the boxes     11 a skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10  000  j of gravitational potential  energy.    she skis down the slope. at the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000  j.        how much energy was converted into thermal energy and sound energy as the skier moved  down the slope?  a 2000  j b 8000  j c 10  000  j d 12  000  j     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  12 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    25  cm 5 cm75  cmmercury     which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?  a 25  cm b 75  cm c 80  cm d 100  cm     13 a heavy table has six legs. the area of cross-section of each leg is x.    the legs of the table make marks in a carpet. these marks become deeper with increased  pressure.    what would reduce the depth of the marks for a table of a fixed weight?  a using three legs, each of an area smaller than x  b using four legs, each of an area the same as x  c using six legs, each of an area smaller than x  d using eight legs, each of an area the same as x     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12 [turn over  14 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright light shines from the side.    looking through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random, jerky  manner.    light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains     15 a swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day.    why does she feel cold even though the air is warm?  a the less energetic water molecules on her skin escape quickly.  b the more energetic water molecules on her skin do not escape quickly. c the water on her skin does not evaporate quickly enough to keep her warm. d the water on her skin evaporates quickly and cools her skin.      16 which physical property is used to measure temperature in a liquid-in-glass thermometer?  a the length of the thermometer  b the thickness of the glass bulb  c the volume of the glass bulb  d the volume of the liquid ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  17 the graph shows the temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.    in which part of the graph is the substance boiling?    temperature timeabcd       18 a night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the  night. during the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.         which thermal capacity and which night-time temperature increase will cause the most energy to  be stored by the block?    thermal capacity   of block night-time  temperature increase  a large large  b large small  c small large  d small small     19 after a sheep has its wool cut off, it is harder for it to stay warm when the air temperature falls.    how does the wool help the sheep to stay warm?  a air can circulate between the wool fibres and heat up the skin by convection.  b air trapped by the wool fibres reduces heat losses from the skin by convection. c the wool fibres are curly so it takes longer for heat to be conducted away from the skin.  d the wool fibres conduct heat to the skin from the air outside.   ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12 [turn over  20 a boy sits near a campfire. he pokes the fire with an iron bar. his hand becomes hot.    iron bar     in which ways does thermal energy (heat) from the fire reach his hand?  a conduction and convection only  b conduction and radiation only  c convection and radiation only  d conduction, convection and radiation      21 the diagram shows plane waves reflected by a plane surface.    which line represents a wavefront?     bc da        22 a swimmer is sitting on a rock at the sea shore looking at passing waves. he notices that five  complete wavelengths pass him in 20  s.    what is the frequency of this wave?  a 0.25  hz b 4.0  hz c 15  hz d 100  hz     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  23 a thin converging lens forms an image.    ffobject image     what is the nature of this image and can it be formed on a screen?     nature of image can be formed  on a screen?  a not real no  b not real yes  c real no  d real yes     24 a piece of paper has \u2018pal\u2019 written on it.    a student holds the paper in front of a plane mirror.    palback of mirror     what does the student see?    pala palbpalpalc d      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12 [turn over  25 a girl notices that when she shouts into a cave she hears an echo.    which wave property causes the echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion c reflection d refraction     26 in a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high.    what information does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave produced?     amplitude frequency  a too large too large  b too large too small  c too small too large  d too small too small    27 two bars of soft iron are placed near a bar magnet.    sn pqsoft iron soft iron bar magnet     which row states and explains the behaviour of poles p and q of the soft iron bars?     p and q reason  a attract p and q are like poles  b attract p and q are unlike poles  c repel p and q are like poles  d repel p and q are unlike poles    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  28 some electrical devices require a magnet which may be switched on and off many times in a  second.    which type of magnet may be used?  a an electromagnet only  b a permanent magnet only  c either a permanent magnet or an electromagnet  d neither a permanent magnet nor an electromagnet     29 which of these is an electric current?  a a beam of atoms  b a beam of electrons  c a beam of molecules  d a beam of neutrons     30 the diagram shows a circuit used to find the resistance of lamp l.    blocks p, q and r represent the different components used.    12  v p r ql     which is a correct possible choice of components to use for p, q and r?     p q r  a ammeter variable resistor voltmeter  b variable resistor  voltmeter  ammeter   c voltmeter ammeter variable resistor  d voltmeter  variable resistor ammeter     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12 [turn over  31 a student connects the circuit shown.    1 2 34     which switches must be closed for the bell to ring without lighting the lamp?  a 1 and 2 only  b 1 and 3 only  c 1, 3 and 4 only  d 2, 3 and 4 only      32 which row shows a use of a capacitor and a use of a relay?     use of a capacitor use of a relay  a switching circuit voltage transformation  b time-delay circuit switching circuit  c voltage transformation switching circuit  d voltage transformation time-delay circuit    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  33 the diagram shows two voltmeters, p and q, connected to a potential divider.    xv vvoltmeter p voltmeter q     the sliding connection at point x is moved towards the top of the diagram.    what happens to the reading on p and to the reading on q?     reading on p reading on q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     34 an electric oven is connected to the mains supply using insulated copper wires. the wires  become very warm.    what can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?  a use thicker copper wires.  b use thinner copper wires.  c use thicker insulation.  d use thinner insulation.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12 [turn over  35 which graph shows how the voltage of a simple a.c. generator varies with time?    0 0 voltage voltage voltage voltagea  time time time time0 0 b  0 0 c  0 0 d       ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  36 the diagram shows a wire in the magnetic field between two poles of a magnet.    n smagnet wire    the current in the wire repeatedly changes between a constant value in one direction and a  constant value in  the opposite direction. this is shown on the graph.     current time00      what is the effect on the wire?  a the force on the wire alternates between one direction and the opposite direction.  b the force on the wire is constant in size and direction.   c there is no force acting on the wire at any time.  d there is only a force on the wire when the current reverses.    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12 [turn over  37 a beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel, charged metal plates in a vacuum.    + ++++ + ++++\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013cathode rays     in which direction is the beam deflected?  a into the page  b out of the page c to the left of the page d to the right of the page      38 how does the ionising effect of \u03b1-particles compare with that of \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays?     compared with \u03b2-particles compared with \u03b3-rays  a \u03b1-particles are less strongly ionising \u03b1-particles are less strongly ionising  b \u03b1-particles are less strongly ionising \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising  c \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising \u03b1-particles are less strongly ionising  d \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising      39 the table shows the count rates obtained from four radioactive sources. the measurements were  taken at noon on four consecutive days.    which source has the longest half-life?    count rate  /.counts per second    day 1 day 2 day 3 day 4  a 100 48 27 11  b 200 142 99 69  c 300 297 292 290  d 400 202 99 48     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  40 which statement about a carbon nucleus represented by  c14 6 is correct?  a it contains 6 neutrons.  b it contains 6 electrons.  c it contains 8 protons.  d it contains 14 nucleons.     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  blank page",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/11/o/n/12  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib12 11_0625_12/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2012  [turn over     *1634639746*   university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2012     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.    there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all  questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  1 the speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.    where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus greatest?    speed  time a b c  d      2 a parachutist inside an aeroplane has a mass of 70  kg.        what is his mass after he has jumped from the aeroplane?  a 0  kg  b between 0  kg and 70  kg  c 70  kg  d greater than 70  kg     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12 [turn over  3 a large bag of feathers and a steel block balance each other on some scales.    bag of featherssteel block     what does this show about the masses and the we ights of the bag of feathers and the steel  block?  a it shows that the masses are equal and the weights are equal.  b it shows that the masses are equal, but the weights might be different.  c it shows that the masses might be different and the weights might be different.  d it shows that the weights are equal, but the masses might be different.    4 two stones of different weight fall at the sa me time from a table. air resistance may be ignored.    what will happen and why?     what will happen why  a both stones hit the floor at the same time acceleration of free fall is constant  b both stones hit the floor at the same time they fall at constant speed  c the heavier stone hits the floor first acceleration increases with weight  d the heavier stone hits the floor first speed increases with weight      5 a pendulum is set in motion and timed. the time measured for 20 complete swings is 30  s.    what is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?  a 0.67  s b 0.75  s c 1.5  s d 3.0  s     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  6 the diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. the position of the centre of mass of  each object has been marked with a cross.    which object is the most stable?    a b c d        7 a heavy table has six legs. the area of cross-section of each leg is x.    the legs of the table make marks in a carpet. these marks become deeper with increased  pressure.    what would reduce the depth of the marks for a table of a fixed weight?  a using three legs, each of an area smaller than x  b using four legs, each of an area the same as x  c using six legs, each of an area smaller than x  d using eight legs, each of an area the same as x      8 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.   25  cm 5 cm75  cmmercury     which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?  a 25  cm b 75  cm c 80  cm d 100  cm    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12 [turn over  9 a liquid has a density of 0.80  g / cm3.    which could be the volume and mass of this liquid?     volume  / cm3 mass  / g  a 2.0 16  b 8.0 10  c 10 8.0  d 16 2.0     10 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright light shines from the side.    looking through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random, jerky manner.    light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  11 a see-saw is made by resting a long plank of wood with its centre of mass on a barrel.    a boy sits on one side of the barrel and a girl sits on the other side so that the see-saw is  balanced.    boy\u2019s weight girl\u2019s weightx y boy girl     which statement must  be true?  a boy\u2019s weight = girl\u2019s weight  b distance x = distance y  c total downward force = total moment about the barrel  d resultant force and resultant moment are both zero     12 a skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10  000  j of gravitational potential  energy.    she skis down the slope. at the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000  j.        how much energy was converted into thermal energy and sound energy as the skier moved  down the slope?  a 2000  j b 8000  j c 10  000  j d 12  000  j     13 a power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.    in this process, nuclear energy is first changed into  a chemical energy.  b electrical energy.  c gravitational energy.  d thermal (heat) energy.   ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12 [turn over  14 a person lifts boxes of equal weight on to a platform.    boxes platform     which quantity will not affect the work done by the person?  a the height of the platform above the ground  b the number of boxes lifted  c the time taken to lift the boxes  d the weight of the boxes      15 which physical property is used to measure temperature in a liquid-in-glass thermometer?  a the length of the thermometer  b the thickness of the glass bulb  c the volume of the glass bulb  d the volume of the liquid    16 a boy sits near a campfire. he pokes the fire with an iron bar. his hand becomes hot.    iron bar     in which ways does thermal energy (heat) from the fire reach his hand?  a conduction and convection only  b conduction and radiation only  c convection and radiation only  d conduction, convection and radiation   ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  17 the graph shows the temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.    in which part of the graph is the substance boiling?    temperature timeabcd       18 a swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day.    why does she feel cold even though the air is warm?  a the less energetic water molecules on her skin escape quickly.  b the more energetic water molecules on her skin do not escape quickly. c the water on her skin does not evaporate quickly enough to keep her warm. d the water on her skin evaporates quickly and cools her skin.     19 after a sheep has its wool cut off, it is harder for it to stay warm when the air temperature falls.    how does the wool help the sheep to stay warm?  a air can circulate between the wool fibres and heat up the skin by convection.  b air trapped by the wool fibres reduces heat losses from the skin by convection.  c the wool fibres are curly so it takes longer for heat to be conducted away from the skin.  d the wool fibres conduct heat to the skin from the air outside.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12 [turn over  20 a night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the night.  during the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.         which thermal capacity and which night-time temperature increase will cause the most energy to  be stored by the block?    thermal capacity   of block night-time  temperature increase  a large large  b large small  c small large  d small small     21 a swimmer is sitting on a rock at the sea shore looking at passing waves. he notices that five  complete wavelengths pass him in 20  s.    what is the frequency of this wave?  a 0.25  hz b 4.0  hz c 15  hz d 100  hz     22 in a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high.    what information does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave produced?     amplitude frequency  a too large too large  b too large too small  c too small too large  d too small too small    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  23 a girl notices that when she shouts into a cave she hears an echo.    which wave property causes the echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion c reflection d refraction     24 a piece of paper has \u2018pal\u2019 written on it.    a student holds the paper in front of a plane mirror.    palback of mirror     what does the student see?    pala palbpalpalc d      25 the diagram shows plane waves reflected by a plane surface.    which line represents a wavefront?     bc da     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12 [turn over  26 a thin converging lens forms an image.    ffobject image     what is the nature of this image and can it be formed on a screen?     nature of image can be formed  on a screen?  a not real no  b not real yes  c real no  d real yes     27 which of these is an electric current?  a a beam of atoms  b a beam of electrons  c a beam of molecules  d a beam of neutrons    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  28 a student connects the circuit shown.    1 2 34     which switches must be closed for the bell to ring without lighting the lamp?  a 1 and 2 only  b 1 and 3 only  c 1, 3 and 4 only  d 2, 3 and 4 only      29 the diagram shows two voltmeters, p and q, connected to a potential divider.    xv vvoltmeter p voltmeter q     the sliding connection at point x is moved towards the top of the diagram.    what happens to the reading on p and to the reading on q?     reading on p reading on q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12 [turn over  30 the diagram shows a circuit used to find the resistance of lamp l.    blocks p, q and r represent the different components used.    12  v p r ql     which is a correct possible choice of components to use for p, q and r?     p q r  a ammeter variable resistor voltmeter  b variable resistor  voltmeter  ammeter   c voltmeter ammeter variable resistor  d voltmeter  variable resistor ammeter     31 which row shows a use of a capacitor and a use of a relay?     use of a capacitor use of a relay  a switching circuit voltage transformation  b time-delay circuit switching circuit  c voltage transformation switching circuit  d voltage transformation time-delay circuit    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  32 which graph shows how the voltage of a simple a.c. generator varies with time?    0 0 voltage voltage voltage voltagea  time time time time0 0 b  0 0 c  0 0 d       33 some electrical devices require a magnet which may be switched on and off many times in a  second.    which type of magnet may be used?  a an electromagnet only  b a permanent magnet only c either a permanent magnet or an electromagnet d neither a permanent magnet nor an electromagnet     34 two bars of soft iron are placed near a bar magnet.    sn pqsoft iron soft iron bar magnet     which row states and explains the behaviour of poles p and q of the soft iron bars?     p and q reason  a attract p and q are like poles  b attract p and q are unlike poles  c repel p and q are like poles  d repel p and q are unlike poles    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12 [turn over  35 the diagram shows a wire in the magnetic field between two poles of a magnet.    n smagnet wire    the current in the wire repeatedly changes between a constant value in one direction and a  constant value in  the opposite direction. this is shown on the graph.     current time00      what is the effect on the wire?  a the force on the wire alternates between one direction and the opposite direction.  b the force on the wire is constant in size and direction.   c there is no force acting on the wire at any time.  d there is only a force on the wire when the current reverses.    36 an electric oven is connected to the mains supply using insulated copper wires. the wires  become very warm.    what can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?  a use thicker copper wires.  b use thinner copper wires.  c use thicker insulation.  d use thinner insulation.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  37 a beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel, charged metal plates in a vacuum.    + ++++ + ++++\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013cathode rays     in which direction is the beam deflected?  a into the page  b out of the page c to the left of the page d to the right of the page      38 which statement about a carbon nucleus represented by  c14 6 is correct?  a it contains 6 neutrons.  b it contains 6 electrons.  c it contains 8 protons.  d it contains 14 nucleons.      39 how does the ionising effect of \u03b1-particles compare with that of \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays?     compared with \u03b2-particles compared with \u03b3-rays  a \u03b1-particles are less strongly ionising \u03b1-particles are less strongly ionising  b \u03b1-particles are less strongly ionising \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising  c \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising \u03b1-particles are less strongly ionising  d \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  40 the table shows the count rates obtained from four radioactive sources. the measurements were  taken at noon on four consecutive days.    which source has the longest half-life?    count rate  /.counts per second    day 1 day 2 day 3 day 4  a 100 48 27 11  b 200 142 99 69  c 300 297 292 290  d 400 202 99 48     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  blank page",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  blank page",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third -party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/12/o/n/12  blank page "
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib12 11_0625_13/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2012  [turn over      *8400222432* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2012     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  1 a pendulum is set in motion and timed. the time measured for 20 complete swings is 30  s.    what is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?  a 0.67  s b 0.75  s c 1.5  s d 3.0  s     2 two stones of different weight fall at the sa me time from a table. air resistance may be ignored.    what will happen and why?     what will happen why  a both stones hit the floor at the same time acceleration of free fall is constant  b both stones hit the floor at the same  time they fall at constant speed  c the heavier stone hits the floor first acceleration increases with weight  d the heavier stone hits the floor first speed increases with weight      3 the speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.   where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus greatest?    speed  time a b c  d      ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12 [turn over  4 a large bag of feathers and a steel block balance each other on some scales.    bag of featherssteel block     what does this show about the masses and the we ights of the bag of feathers and the steel  block?  a it shows that the masses are equal and the weights are equal.  b it shows that the masses are equal, but the weights might be different.  c it shows that the masses might be different and the weights might be different.  d it shows that the weights are equal, but the masses might be different.    5 which row identifies quantities that are measured in newtons?    electromotive force  (e.m.f.) mass weight  a no no yes  b no yes yes  c yes no no  d yes yes no     6 a liquid has a density of 0.80  g / cm3.    which could be the volume and mass of this liquid?     volume  / cm3 mass  / g  a 2.0 16  b 8.0 10  c 10 8.0  d 16 2.0     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  7 the diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. the position of the centre of mass of  each object has been marked with a cross.    which object is the most stable?    a b c d        8 a large parcel is on a horizontal conveyor belt. the conveyor belt moves the parcel towards a  lorry.    parcel  conveyor beltlorry      the parcel travels towards the lorry at a constant speed. only two horizontal forces act on the  parcel: air resistance, and friction with the conveyor belt.    which row correctly compares the directions and the sizes of these two forces?     directions sizes  a opposite different  b opposite the same  c the same different  d the same the same    9 a power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.   in this process, nuclear energy is first changed into  a chemical energy.  b electrical energy.  c gravitational energy.  d thermal (heat) energy.    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12 [turn over  10 a person lifts boxes of equal weight on to a platform.    boxes platform     which quantity will not affect the work done by the person?  a the height of the platform above the ground  b the number of boxes lifted  c the time taken to lift the boxes  d the weight of the boxes      11 a skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10  000  j of gravitational potential  energy.    she skis down the slope. at the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000  j.        how much energy was converted into thermal energy and sound energy as the skier moved  down the slope?  a 2000  j b 8000  j c 10  000  j d 12  000  j     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  12 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    25  cm 5 cm75  cmmercury     which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?  a 25  cm b 75  cm c 80  cm d 100  cm     13 a dam across a lake is divided into two sections by a rock. section x is longer than section y but  the two sections are otherwise identical. the water in the lake by the dam is the same depth everywhere. the diagram shows a view from above of the lake and the dam.    rockwater in lake section y of damsection x of dam     the water creates a force on each section of the dam and a pressure on each section of the dam.    which statement is correct?  a the force on x equals the force on y.  b the force on x is less than the force on y. c the pressure on x equals the pressure on y. d the pressure on x is less than the pressure on y.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12 [turn over  14 a car tyre contains a constant volume of air.    during use, the air gets hotter and the air pressure increases.    what explains this increase in pressure in terms of the motion of air molecules?     number of air  molecules in tyre force between air  molecules and tyre wall number of collisions per second  between air molecules and tyre wall  a increased increased decreased  b increased unchanged decreased  c unchanged increased increased  d unchanged unchanged increased     15 the table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances.    which substance is a liquid at 0  \u00b0c?     melting point  / \u00b0c boiling point  / \u00b0c  a \u2013219 \u2013183  b \u20137 58  c 98 890  d 1083 2582     16 a student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a \u00b0c scale.    which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a freezing point of mercury boiling point of mercury  b freezing point of mercury boiling point of water  c freezing point of water boiling point of mercury  d freezing point of water boiling point of water     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  17 the graph shows the temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.    in which part of the graph is the substance boiling?    temperature timeabcd       18 four blocks, made from different materials, are each heated so that they have the same increase  in internal energy.    which block has the smallest thermal capacity?    a  temperature  rise = 3  \u00b0cb  temperature  rise = 6  \u00b0cc  temperature  rise = 9  \u00b0cd  temperature  rise = 12  \u00b0c     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12 [turn over  19 a convector heater is fixed to a wall.    which diagram shows how warm air near the heater moves because of convection in the air?    wall heatera movement of airwall heaterb movementof air wall heaterc movementof air wall heaterd movementof air      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  20 a double-glazed window consists of two panes of glass with a vacuum between them.    the vacuum reduces the amount of thermal energy transferred through the window.    glassvacuum glass     which row shows how much thermal energy is transferred through the vacuum by conduction, by  convection and by radiation?     conduction convection radiation  a none none some  b none some some  c some none none  d some some none     21 the diagram shows a water wave in a ripple tank.    which line represents a wavefront?    cdab      22 which statement about radio waves is correct?  a they travel as longitudinal waves.  b they travel at the same speed as sound waves. c they travel by means of molecular vibration.  d they can travel through a vacuum.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12 [turn over  23 the converging lens in a camera is used to make an image on a film.    at which labelled point could a large object be placed so that it makes a smaller image?    a b dfocal length of lens 2 \u00d7 focal length of lensfilm lensc      24 a ray of light in water is incident on the surface. the angle of incidence is much smaller than the  critical angle.    air water ray of light    what happens to this ray?  a it is completely reflected.  b it is completely refracted.  c it is partially reflected and partially refracted.  d it is refracted at an angle of refraction of 90 \u00b0.     25 sound waves may cause an echo.    what happens to sound waves to cause an ec ho and what is the nature of sound waves?     what an echo  is caused by nature of  sound waves  a reflection longitudinal  b reflection transverse  c refraction longitudinal  d refraction transverse    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  26 in a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high.    what information does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave  produced?     amplitude frequency  a too large too large  b too large too small  c too small too large  d too small too small     27 which row shows whether iron and steel are ferrous or non-ferrous?     iron steel  a ferrous ferrous  b ferrous non-ferrous  c non-ferrous ferrous  d non-ferrous non-ferrous     28 the n pole of a magnet repels one end of bar x.    x ns repels    what happens when the other  end of bar x is placed near to the poles of the magnet?     other end near  n pole other end near  s pole  a attracts attracts  b attracts repels  c repels attracts  d repels repels    29 which is the worst electrical conductor?  a aluminium  b carbon (graphite) c iron d sulfur     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12 [turn over  30 the circuit shows a 24  v battery connected to two resistors in series.    a vr     the reading on the ammeter is 2.0  a and the reading on the voltmeter is 8.0  v.    what is the resistance of resistor r?  a 0.25  \u03c9 b 4.0  \u03c9 c 10  \u03c9 d 16  \u03c9     31 a relay allows a small current in one circuit to control a different circuit.    which type of force is produced by the small current to activate the relay?  a electrical  b frictional  c gravitational  d magnetic      32 the diagram shows a circuit containing two identical lamps.    rp q     which switches must be closed to light both of the lamps?  a p and q only  b p and r only  c q and r only  d p, q and r     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  33 the diagram shows a potential divider circuit.    v     the temperature of the thermistor increases.    what happens to the resistance of the thermistor, and what happens to the reading on the  voltmeter?     resistance of  thermistor voltmeter  reading  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      34 an electric oven is connected to the mains supply using insulated copper wires. the wires  become very warm.    what can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?  a use thicker copper wires.  b use thinner copper wires.  c use thicker insulation.  d use thinner insulation.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12 [turn over  35 which graph shows how the voltage of a simple a.c. generator varies with time?    0 0 voltage voltage voltage voltagea  time time time time0 0 b  0 0 c  0 0 d       36 in the construction of a transformer, which items must be included?  a an iron core and a permanent magnet  b an iron core and two coils of wire  c a steel core and a permanent magnet  d a steel core and two coils of wire     37 the metal filament shown is heated by passing a current through it. this makes it hot and it  releases electrons.    vacuum metal filament      what is the name of this process of releasing electrons?  a convection  b evaporation  c radioactive emission  d thermionic emission     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  38 how do the ionising effect and the penetrating ability of \u03b1-particles compare with those of \u03b2- particles and \u03b3-rays?     ionising  effect penetrating  ability  a higher higher  b higher lower  c lower higher  d lower lower      39 a student is investigating how the radiation from a radioactive source changes with time.   the table shows the results from the detector.    time  /  min count-rate  /   counts per min  0 340  2 180  4 100  6 60  8 40    the experiment is repeated by other students, who also measure the count-rate every two  minutes.  the half-life of the source is known to be exactly two minutes. why is the measured count-rate always  higher than half the previous value?  a radioactive emissions occur randomly with time.  b the detector used is very close to the source. c there is background radiation present.  d the radioactive source is decaying.     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  40 which of the following is not a charged particle?  a \u03b1-particle  b \u03b2-particle  c neutron  d proton   ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  blank page",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  blank page",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2012 0625/13/o/n/12  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (cw/sw) 49779/4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *0295058232* physics 0625/21 paper 2  core october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you  hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use 1 (a) state the name that is given to the turning effect of a force.  ..[1]  (b) a gate has rusty hinges that are very stiff. a man opens the gate by pulling on it, as  shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1   after he has passed through the opening, he closes the gate behind him.   when closing the gate, the man pulls it at a point halfway along its length.  state two differences between his force when closing the gate and his force when he  opened the gate.1.  ..2.  .. [2]  (c) suggest one way of reducing the force needed to open the gate. ..[1] [total: 4]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 (a) state the equation linking the density of a substance with its mass and volume.  .. ..[1]  (b) when oil leaks out of a damaged oil-tanker, it forms a very thin layer of oil, known as an  oil slick, on the water.   one such oil slick covers an approximately rectangular area measuring 2.5 \u00d7 10 4 m by  6.0 \u00d7 103 m.   the oil slick is 3.0 \u00d7 10\u20136 m (0.0000030 m) thick.   (i) calculate the volume of the oil slick.  volume =  ...  m3 [3]   (ii) the density of the oil is 900 kg / m3.    calculate the mass of oil in the slick.  mass =    kg [2] [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows four runners at the start of an 80 m race on a school sports day. 80 mstarting pistol timekeeper fig. 3.1 (not to scale)  (a) sound travels at 320 m / s.   calculate the time taken for the sound from the starting pistol to reach the timekeeper.  time =  ..  s [3]  (b) the timekeeper takes 0.20 s to react after hearing the sound and then starts the  stopwatch.   he makes no other experimental inaccuracies.   (i) by how much will his time for the race be in error?  time error =  ..  s [2]   (ii) suggest how he can reduce this error, whilst still using the same stopwatch. .. .. .. [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) when he stops the stopwatch as the winner crosses the finishing line, the appearance  of the stopwatch is as shown in fig. 3.2. 5 0 5min 10 15 20seconds 25303540455055 fig. 3.2   how long did the winner actually take to run the race?  time =  ..  s [2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 an archer pulls the string of his bow, and moves the arrow to the position shown in fig. 4.1.   he then releases the string so that the arrow is fired towards a target. bow arrowstring fig. 4.1  (a) the archer does work on the bow.   when is this work done? tick one box.    as the string is pulled back to the position shown in fig. 4.1     whilst holding the string in the position shown in fig. 4.1     after releasing the string to fire the arrow  [1]  (b) what type of energy is stored in the bow because it is bent? ..[1]  (c) what type of energy does the arrow have because it is moving? ..[1]  (d) on another occasion, the archer fires the arrow so that it rises up to a maximum height  before falling back down to the ground.   use words from the following list to complete the sentences below.   gravitational potential,      kinetic,      thermal,      maximum,      minimum,      zero  as the arrow rises, its . energy increases. at the top of   the flight, this energy is at a . . as the arrow falls, this   energy is converted into . energy. when it hits the ground,  the energy of the arrow is converted into . energy.  [4] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 (a) a metal ruler with a rectangular cross-section is heated in an oven.   (i) state two things that happen to the atoms of the metal. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]   (ii) state what happens to1. the length of the ruler,  ..2. the width of the ruler,  3. the thickness of the ruler. ..  [2]  (b) the nut in fig. 5.1 has become jammed on the bolt, so that it will not rotate. very hot flamenut bolt fig. 5.1   explain why heating the nut with a very hot flame is likely to free the jammed nut.  .. .. ..[2] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) in fig. 6.1, a ray of red light is shown passing through a triangular glass prism and on to  another prism that is identical but upside down. i red light fig. 6.1   (i) the angle of incidence of the red light at the first surface is shown on fig. 6.1 as i.    on fig. 6.1, use the letter r to mark clearly the angle of refraction at the first surface.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the right-hand prism and out into the air again. label the emergent ray \u201cline r\u201d. [3]   (iii) the beam of red light is moved so that it shines into the right-hand prism along line r.    using the letter p , mark clearly the point where this ray will emerge from the left-hand prism. [1]  (b) on another occasion, a beam containing a mixture of red and blue light is shone into a prism, as shown in fig. 6.2. i red light+ blue lightred light fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, draw the path of the blue light through the prism and out into the air again. [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) refraction is occurring at the first surface.    which of the following is also occurring? tick one box.     diffraction      dispersion      focusing      total internal reflection  [1] [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 shows a compass needle that has come to rest in the earth\u2019s magnetic field. nscompass needle fig. 7.1  (a) on fig. 7.1, draw an arrow pointing towards the north pole of the earth. [1]  (b) the s pole of a bar magnet is brought towards the s pole of the compass needle, as  shown in fig. 7.2. nss fig. 7.2   describe what is seen happening to the compass needle as this is done.  ..  .. ..[2]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the magnet in (b) is removed and a horizontal wire is positioned above the compass  needle, as shown in fig. 7.3.   nswire fig. 7.3   when there is a current in the wire, the compass needle rotates through a small angle.   suggest why this rotation occurs.  .. .. ..[2] [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows a cell. fig. 8.1  (a) what does the 1.5 v indicate about the cell?  ..[2]  (b) three cells identical to the cell in fig. 8.1 make up a 4.5 v battery. the battery is  connected in series with a 180 \u03c9 resistor.   calculate the current in the circuit.  current =  ..[4]  (c) a second 180 \u03c9 resistor is connected in parallel with the 180 \u03c9 resistor from (b).   (i) in the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the two resistors in parallel,  connected to the battery. use standard symbols.  [3]   (ii) state the value of 1. the potential difference across the second 180 \u03c9 resistor,  ... 2. the current in the second 180 \u03c9 resistor.  .. [2] [total: 11]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows a time-delay circuit that includes a capacitor c and a resistor of very high  resistance. v c fig. 9.1  (a) on fig. 9.1, use the letter s to label the switch. [1]  (b) when the switch is open, the voltmeter in the circuit registers zero.   after the switch has been closed, what happens, if anything, to   (i) the charge in the circuit, .. .. [1]   (ii) the reading on the voltmeter? .. .. [2]  (c) the switch is now opened again.   state what happens, if anything, to the reading on the voltmeter.  .. ..[1] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 a 240 v a.c. mains supply is connected to the primary coil of the transformer shown in  fig. 10.1. a lamp that gives full brightness with a 6 v supply is connected to the secondary coil. 240  v mains soft iron 8000 turns6 v lamp fig. 10.1  (a) name a suitable material from which the coils may be made.  ..[1]  (b) state the name given to the part of the transformer that is made of soft iron (see  fig. 10.1).  ..[1]  (c) calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil that will enable the lamp to  light at full brightness.  number of turns =  ..[3]  (d) state what would happen to the lamp if the number of turns in the secondary coil was   (i) much less than that calculated in (c),  .. [1]   (ii) much more than that calculated in (c). .. [1] [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 the apparatus for investigating the absorption of the emissions from a radioactive source is  shown in fig. 11.1. radioactive sourceabsorbing materialdetector fig. 11.1  the source and detector are about 2 cm apart. the detector is connected to a scaler, which measures the count rate.  different absorbing materials are placed between the source and the detector.  the table below shows the count rate obtained with each of five absorbers. absorbing materialcount rate counts / s air sheet of paper0.5 mm of aluminium10 mm of aluminium10 mm of lead523523391214122  (a) how can you tell that the source is not emitting any \u03b1-particles?  .. .. ..[2]  (b) what is the evidence that \u03b2-particles are being emitted?  .. .. ..[2]  (c) what is the evidence that \u03b3-rays are being emitted?  .. .. ..[2] [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use12 (a) the symbol for an \u03b1-particle is either 4 2\u03b1 or 42he.   (i) what does the 4 indicate about an \u03b1-particle?  .. [1]   (ii) what does the 2 indicate about an \u03b1-particle? .. [1]  (b) the symbol for a \u03b2-particle is either  0 \u20131\u03b2 or 0 \u20131e.   (i) what does the 0 indicate about a \u03b2-particle? .. [1]   (ii) what does the \u20131 indicate about a \u03b2-particle? .. [1]  (c) the list below gives, in nuclide notation, the symbols of five radioactive nuclides.    240 94pu                    244 96cm                    248 98cf                    250 97bk                    250 98cf   (i) 244 96cm decays by emitting an \u03b1-particle. into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay?  [1]   (ii) 250 97bk decays by emitting a \u03b2-particle. into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay?  [1] [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (cw/sw) 49780/3 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *3706685376* physics 0625/22 paper 2  core october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you  hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows the distance / time graph for a bus that goes to collect supporters from a  football match and take them home to their villages. 002467 135 10 20 30 5 15 25 time  / minutesdistance from bus depot / km fig. 1.1  (a) the bus drives from its depot, without stopping, along the straight road to the football ground.   from fig. 1.1, find   (i) the distance from the bus depot to the football ground,  distance =  ...  km [1]   (ii) the time taken, in hours, to travel from the bus depot to the football ground,  time =  ... hours [2]   (iii) the speed, in km / hour, of the bus on its journey to the football ground.  speed =  ..  km / hour [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) state how you can tell from fig. 1.1 that the bus travelled at a constant speed to the  football ground.  .. ..[1]  (c) the bus returned to the depot by the same route, stopping a number of times to let  supporters get off near to their home villages.   (i) at how many villages did the bus stop?  ...[1]   (ii) what was the smallest distance from a village to the football ground?  distance =  ...  km [1] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 (a) the length of a rectangular sheet of plastic is measured using a short ruler, as shown in  fig. 2.1 (not full size).1 mm6 5 4 3 2 1 ins2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11 12 13 14 15sheet of plastic fig. 2.1 (not full size)   from the ruler in fig. 2.1, find the length, in cm, of the sheet.  length =  ...  cm [1]  (b) the sheet of plastic in (a) has a thickness of 0.50 cm and a width that is half its length.   calculate the volume of the sheet of plastic.  volume =  .. cm3 [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the plastic has a density of 1.2 g / cm3.   (i) calculate the mass of the sheet.  mass =  .. g [2]   (ii) which laboratory instrument could be used to check the mass of the sheet? .. [1] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows a manometer being used to measure the pressure of some gas in a container.  the container is connected to the manometer by a length of rubber tubing. rubber tubing to container of gas mercury61 mm184  mmmillimetre scale fig. 3.1  (a) state whether the pressure of the gas in the container is greater than, the same as, or less than the pressure of the atmosphere.  ..[1]  (b) from fig. 3.1, deduce the difference between the gas pressure and the atmospheric  pressure.  difference in pressure =   mm of mercury [1]  (c) the atmospheric pressure is 752 mm of mercury.   calculate the actual pressure of the gas in the container.  pressure of gas =   mm of mercury [2]  (d) state how the vertical height difference of the two mercury surfaces changes, if at all, if  a mercury manometer made from a narrower tube is used.  ..[1] [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 a busy factory has a corner in a corridor where people are likely to collide. to avoid such  collisions, a plane mirror is fixed across the corner, as shown in fig. 4.1. ap officesplane mirror a' b'workshopcorridor b fig. 4.1  (a) using this mirror, people at a and at b can see each other\u2019s reflections.   on fig. 4.1, put x to show where the image of the person at a will be, as seen by the  person at b. [2]  (b) the two people move to a'  and b' respectively.   (i) on fig. 4.1, draw the normal to the mirror at end p . [1]   (ii) draw lines on fig. 4.1 to help you decide whether the two people can still see each other\u2019s reflections.    can they still see each other\u2019s reflections? having drawn your lines, tick one box below.     definitely yes      just about      definitely no  [2] [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 a boy is sitting still on a swing that is oscillating from side to side, as shown in fig. 5.1. ab fig. 5.1  (a) at the highest point of the oscillation, the boy\u2019s gravitational potential energy is 150 j  more than it is at the lowest point of the oscillation.   state the value of the kinetic energy of the boy   (i) at the highest point of the oscillation, ... j   (ii) at the lowest point of the oscillation. ... j  [2]  (b) the time for the boy to swing from a to b and back to a is approximately 3 s.   describe how you would determine this time as accurately as possible. state the simple  laboratory instrument you would use.instrument used  ...[1]method  . .. .. .. .. ..[4] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use6 (a) a crystal that dissolves slowly is put into some water in a beaker, as shown in fig. 6.1. crystal heat fig. 6.1   as it dissolves, the crystal colours the water around itself. when the beaker is heated,  the coloured water moves as shown in fig. 6.1.   (i) what name is given to this movement of the water?  .. [1]   (ii) describe why this movement happens. .. .. .. .. .. .. [4]  (b) a decorator, up a step-ladder painting the ceiling of a room, comments, \u201cit is hotter up  here by the ceiling than it is down on the floor.\u201d   explain why his observation is correct.  ..  .. ..[1] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. two regions have not been  named, and there is an enlargement of the visible region. x-rays ultra- violetvisible visible lmmicro- wavesradio waves fig. 7.1  (a) in the two boxes on fig. 7.1, write the names of the regions they are indicating. [2]  (b) state the name of the colour of the light that is found   (i) at the end l of the visible spectrum, .   (ii) at the end m of the visible spectrum.   [2]  (c) (i) a man stands in the beam of light from a spot-lamp and finds that it makes him feel warm.    which radiation, other than visible, does this observation show that the spotlight is emitting?  ..   (ii) suggest one use to which x-rays are put. ..  [2]  (d) state one property, apart from their electromagnetic nature, that is the same for    the radiations in all the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.  ..[1] [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use8 a student has two wires a and b. she connects each in turn between the terminals p and q  in the circuit of fig. 8.1. meter 1meter 2 p wire a or wire bq fig. 8.1  for each wire, she measures the current in the wire when there are various potential differences across it.  (a) (i) which of the two meters measures the current?  ..   (ii) name this type of meter.  ..  (b) (i) which of the two meters measures the potential difference (p.d.)?  .   (ii) name this type of meter.  ..  [2] question 8 continues on page 12.",
            "12": "12 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (c) when the student draws the graphs of p.d. against current for the two wires, she gets  the lines shown in fig. 8.2. 0012 wire awire b 34 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8p.d.  / v current  / a fig. 8.2   (i) from fig. 8.2, find the p.d. across wire a when there is a current of 0.8 a in it.  p.d. =  ...v [1]   (ii) calculate the resistance of wire a when the current in it is 0.8 a.  resistance =  . [4]   (iii) from fig. 8.2, how can you tell that the resistance of wire a remains constant  during the experiment?  .. .. .. [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iv) how can you tell that the resistance of wire b is greater than the resistance of  wire a?  .. .. .. [1]   (v) wires a and b are made of the same material and have the same thickness.    state, giving your reasons, which of the wires is the longer wire.  .. .. .. [1] [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use9 in the circuit of fig. 9.1, a 12 v car battery is connected to three identical lamps and two  switches. the resistance of the battery is so small that it may be ignored. l2 l112 v l3 s2s1 fig. 9.1  (a) (i) when switches s1 and s2 are both open, which two lamps are in series?    . and ..   (ii) when switches s1 and s2 are both closed, which two lamps are in parallel?    . and ..  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) each of the three lamps glows with full brightness when there is a p.d. of 12 v across the  lamp.   with a smaller p.d., a lamp will glow with partial brightness.   with no p.d. across it, it will be off.  complete the tables below, to show how the lamps glow with different switch  combinations. tick one box in each row. switch combination: s1 closed and s2 open full brightnesspartial brightnessoff l1 l2l3 [2] switch combination: s1 open and s2 closed full brightnesspartial brightnessoff l1l2l3 [2] [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 a wire between the poles of a large horseshoe magnet is carrying a current.  fig. 10.1 shows the direction of the force acting on the wire. s nmagnet magnetforcecurrent wire fig. 10.1  (a) the magnetic poles are interchanged.   on fig. 10.2 below, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the wire. n smagnet magnetcurrent fig. 10.2  [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the battery is now reversed.   on fig. 10.3 below, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the wire. n smagnet magnetcurrent fig. 10.3  [1]  (c) in the arrangement of fig. 10.1 at the beginning of this question, the electromagnetic  force on the wire is greater than the weight of the wire.   (i) suggest what happens to the wire as the current is switched on.  .. .. [1]   (ii) suggest one common device that makes use of this effect. .. [1] [total: 4]",
            "18": "18 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) what is meant by  radioactive decay    ?  ..  .. ..[3]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows the decay curve for a particular radioactive substance. 005001000150020002500 1 2 3 4 5count rate counts  / min time  / minutes fig. 11.1   (i) use numbers from the graph to show that the half-life of the radioactive substance  is 2 minutes.  [3]   (ii) estimate the value of the count rate at a time of 6 minutes from the start of the measurements.  count rate =  .. counts / min [2] [total: 8]",
            "19": "19 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use12 fig. 12.1 shows parts of a tube in which cathode rays are produced. p1 cathode anode electron beam (cathode rays)y -plates x-plates screen p2 p3p4 fig. 12.1  (a) what occupies the remaining space within the tube? tick one box.    air     hydrogen     nitrogen     vacuum  [1]  (b) how does the screen show the presence of electrons?  .. ..[2]  (c) what is done to the cathode to make it release electrons? .. ..[1]  (d) between which two parts shown on fig. 12.1 is there a large potential difference that  causes the electrons to be accelerated into a beam?   ...  and   ...[2]  (e) the electron beam normally travels along the axis of the tube, as shown in fig. 12.1.  between which two parts must a potential difference be connected in order to deflect the beam upwards?  ..[1] [total: 7]",
            "20": "20 0625/22/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (cw/sw) 49782/4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *0501610434* physics 0625/23 paper 2  core october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you  hand in.write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 two boys, x and y , decide to measure the speed of some of the vehicles travelling along a  road. the two boys stand 405 m apart beside the road, as shown in fig. 1.1. 405  m x y cambridge transport company fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  boy x has a stopwatch which he sets to zero. as a vehicle passes boy y , boy y drops his hand as a signal to boy x to start his stopwatch. boy x then stops the stopwatch as the vehicle goes past him.  the appearance of the stopwatch is then as shown in fig. 1.2. 5 10 15 20 2530354045505560 seconds fig. 1.2  (a) how long did it take for the vehicle to travel from y to x?  time =  ... s [1]  (b) calculate the average speed of the vehicle as it travels from y to x.  average speed =  . [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the vehicle in (a) and (b) is accelerating as it travels from y to x.   (i) how does its speed at x compare with that at y?    tick one box.     greater than at y      same as that at y      less than that at y    (ii) how does its speed at x compare with the average speed calculated in (b)?    tick one box.    greater than average speed      same as average speed      less than average speed   [2]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 solids, liquids and gases have different properties. the list below gives some of them.    completely fills the container  shape  fills the container from the bottom    fixed shape    move around, close together   molecules  move around, far apart     vibrate about a fixed position  use descriptions from the list to complete the table. any description may be used more than  once if appropriate. two spaces have been filled in to help you. shape molecules (a) solid [2] (b) liquid move around, close together [1] (c) gas completely fills the container [1]  [total: 4]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 here is a list of energy resources available to the world. some of these are renewable and  some are non-renewable.  in the first blank column, put a tick by any two resources that are renewable.  in the second blank column, put a tick by any two resources that are non-renewable. renewable non-renewable coal hydroelectricity nuclear energyoilsolar energytidal energywind energy  [4] [total: 4]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 an aluminium rod is cut into a longer section and a shorter section, as shown in fig. 4.1. fig. 4.1  (a) the shorter section of the rod is placed into a measuring cylinder containing water.   fig. 4.2 shows the appearance of the measuring cylinder before and after this is done. 1020304050cm3 1020304050cm3 shorter section of aluminium rodwater fig. 4.2 (not full size)   (i) calculate the volume of the shorter section of aluminium rod.  volume =  .. cm3 [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the mass of this shorter section is measured as 21.2 g.    1.  name a laboratory instrument that might have been used to measure this mass.  .. [1]    2.  calculate the density of aluminium.  density =  ..[4]  (b) (i) name an instrument that could be used to measure the length of the longer section  of aluminium rod.  .. [1]   (ii) suggest a method, different from that in fig. 4.2, that could be used to determine  the volume of this longer section.  .. .. .. .. [2] [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) in fig. 5.1, a and b are two parallel plane mirrors. a ray of light strikes mirror a at an  angle of incidence of 45\u00b0. the ray then reflects, to strike mirror b. 45\u00b0normal ba normalyx fig. 5.1   (i) state the name given to the angle  x shown on fig. 5.1.  .. [1]   (ii) state the value of    1.  angle x, .    2.  angle y. .  [2]   (iii) on fig. 5.1, use your ruler to draw the path of the ray after it leaves the surface of b. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the mirror b is now rotated so that it reflects the ray of light back along its original path.   on fig. 5.2, draw mirror b in the correct position to do this. 45\u00b0normala x  [1] fig. 5.2  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use6 some water in a glass beaker is heated from below, as shown in fig. 6.1. heatwater fig. 6.1  (a) name the process by which thermal energy is transferred   (i) through the glass,  .   (ii) throughout the water.    [2]  (b) as thermal energy is supplied, the temperature of the water begins to rise. although  the supply of energy remains constant, eventually the temperature becomes steady at about 80\u00b0c.   suggest why this happens.  ..  .. ..[1]  (c) the rate of energy supply is increased. the temperature of the water begins to rise  again, but eventually becomes steady at a higher temperature. this time many bubbles are seen throughout the water.   (i) state what is now happening to the water.  .. [1]   (ii) what gas do the bubbles contain? tick one box.    air     hydrogen     oxygen     steam  [1] [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 (a) state what is meant by the echo of a sound.  ..  .. ..[2]  (b) describe how the echo of a sound may be demonstrated. include a diagram that shows  approximate sizes and distances.   diagram description of method  ..  .. .. .. .. ..[3]  (c) the demonstration in (b) is used to find the speed of sound in air.   (i) which two measurements should be made?1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]   (ii) state how you would calculate the speed of sound from these measurements. .. .. .. [2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 represents the circuit that operates two of the lamps on a car. car batteryfuseswitch lampsl1 l2 fig. 8.1  (a) in the space below, draw the circuit diagram for this circuit, using conventional symbols.  [3]  (b) the car battery has an e.m.f. of 12 v and, when the lamps are switched on, there is a  current of 1.6 a in each lamp.   calculate the resistance of one of the lamps.  resistance =  ..[4]",
            "13": "13 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) when the switch is turned on, both lamps should light up. on one occasion when the  driver operates the switch, lamp l2 fails to light up.   suggest a reason for this.  ..  .. ..[1]  (d) an amateur workman connects a length of wire across lamp l 2 and shorts it out.   when the switch is closed for the first time after this, what happens, if anything, to  (i) the fuse,     (ii) lamp l 1,     (iii) lamp l2?  ...  [3] [total: 11]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) magnets a and b, shown in fig. 9.1, attract each other. s magnet a magnet b fig. 9.1   the s pole of magnet a has been marked.   on fig. 9.1, mark the polarities of the other poles, using the letters n or s. [1] (b) a soft-iron rod and a steel rod each have coils around them. both rods are initially  unmagnetised. the coils are attached to circuits, as shown in fig. 9.2. soft iron steel fig. 9.2   (i) use the following statements to complete the table referring to the soft-iron rod and the steel rod shown in fig. 9.2. magnetised          loses its magnetism          keeps its magnetism switch closed switch open soft iron steel [2]   (ii) which words apply to the force between the rods when the switches are closed?    tick one box.     no force      attractive force      repulsive force   [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) which of the two arrangements in fig. 9.2 would be used as the electromagnet on  the crane in a scrap-metal yard?  .. [1]   (iv) state one advantage that an electromagnet could have in comparison with a  similar-sized permanent magnet.  .. .. [1] [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) suggest how a plastic rod may be given an electrostatic charge.  .. .. .. ..[2]  (b) a charged sphere is suspended on an insulating thread.   when a plastic rod with a positive charge is held near the suspended charged sphere,  the sphere moves to the position shown in fig. 10.1. +plastic rod + ++++++charged sphereinsulating thread fig. 10.1   (i) state the sign of the charge on the sphere.  ..   (ii) give the reason for your answer to (b)(i).  ..  .. .. ..  [2]  (c) on fig. 10.1, draw an arrow to show the electrostatic force on the sphere. [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) the positively-charged plastic rod is removed and replaced by a plastic rod with a  negative charge.   describe the position that the suspended sphere now takes.  ..  .. ..[1] [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) the charges on the particles in an atom may be represented by 0    or    +1    or    \u20131.   the masses of the particles in an atom may be represented by 0    or    m    or    2000 m.   using these choices, complete the table below. particle charge mass electron \u20131 m neutron proton  [4]  (b) how many of each of these particles are there in a neutral atom of 238 92u?  number of electrons =  ..  number of neutrons =  .. number of protons =  .. [3] [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use12 fig. 12.1 shows the graph of the count rate from a radioactive source over a period of time.  the readings have already had the background count rate subtracted. 002004006008001000 10 20 30 40 50 60count rate counts  / s time  / s fig. 12.1  (a) from fig. 12.1, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 1000 counts / s to 125 counts / s.  time =  ..  s [1]  (b) how many half-lives of the radioactive material were there during the time interval in (a)?  number of half lives =  ..[1]  (c) from your answers to (a) and (b), calculate the half-life of the material.  half-life =  ..  s [2]  (d) on fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might have been plotted if the background count rate had not been subtracted. [1] [total: 5]",
            "20": "20 0625/23/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (ac/sw) 49515/3 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *4158352429* physics 0625/31 paper 3 extended october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows the graph of speed v against time t for a train as it travels from one station to  the next. 001020 20 40 t / sv m / s 60 80 100 120 140 160  fig. 1.1  (a) use fig. 1.1 to calculate   (i) the distance between the two stations,  distance = .  [4]   (ii) the acceleration of the train in the first 10 s.  acceleration = .  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the mass of the train is 1.1 \u00d7 105 kg.    calculate the resultant force acting on the train in the first 10 s.  resultant force = .  [2]  (c) the force generated by the engine of the train is called the driving force.    write down, in words, an equation relating the driving force to any other forces acting on  the train during the period t = 10 s to t = 130 s.      [1]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 (a) state the factors which completely describe a vector quantity.  ..   [1]  (b) an aeroplane is flying towards the east in still air at 92 m / s. a wind starts to blow at  24 m / s towards the north.    draw a vector diagram to find the resultant velocity of the aeroplane. use a scale of  1.0 cm = 10 m / s.  resultant speed =  ..  angle between resultant and easterly direction =  ..  [5]  [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 (a) a stationary body is acted upon by a number of forces. state the two conditions which  must apply for the body to remain at rest. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a device used for compressing crushed material.  380  mm 120  mm h plunger cylinder fcrushed material cross-sectional area alever arm 20 n  fig. 3.1   the lever arm rotates about the hinge h at its right-hand end. a force of 20 n acts  downwards on the left-hand end of the lever arm. the force f of the crushed material on  the plunger acts upwards. ignore the weight of the lever arm.   (i) use the clockwise and anticlockwise moments about h to calculate the upward force f which the crushed material exerts on the plunger. the distances are shown  on fig. 3.1.  force f = .  [3]   (ii) the cross-sectional area a of the plunger in contact with the crushed material is  0.0036 m 2. calculate the pressure exerted on the crushed material by the plunger.  pressure = .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) state what is meant by the centre of mass of a body.  ..  ..   [1]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows an athlete successfully performing a high jump.    fig. 4.1   the height of the bar above the ground is 2.0 m. the maximum increase in gravitational  potential energy (g.p.e.) of the athlete during the jump is calculated using the expression  g.p.e. = mgh.    explain why the value of h used in the calculation is much less than 2.0 m.  ..  ..   [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) fig. 4.2 shows, in order, five stages of an athlete successfully performing a pole-vault.    fig. 4.2   describe the energy changes which take place during the performance of the pole- vault, from the original stationary position of the pole-vaulter before the run-up, to the  final stationary position after the vault.  .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..   [6]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) explain   (i) how gas molecules exert a force on a solid surface,  .. ..   [1]   (ii) the increase in pressure of a gas when its volume is decreased at constant  temperature.  .. .. ..   [3]  (b) a cylinder of volume 5.0 \u00d7 10 3 cm3 contains air at a pressure of 8.0 \u00d7 105 pa.    a leak develops so that air gradually escapes from the cylinder until the air in the cylinder  is at atmospheric pressure. the pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.    calculate the volume of the escaped air, now at atmospheric pressure. assume that the  temperature stays constant.    volume = cm3 [4]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use6 (a) define specific latent heat of fusion.  .. ..   [1]  (b) (i) a tray of area 0.25 m 2, filled with ice to a depth of 12 mm, is removed from a  refrigerator.     calculate the mass of ice on the tray. the density of ice is 920 kg / m3.  mass = .  [2]  (ii) thermal energy from the sun is falling on the ice at a rate of 250 w / m 2. the ice  absorbs 60 % of this energy.     calculate the energy absorbed in 1.0 s by the 0.25 m2 area of ice on the tray.   energy = .  [2]  (iii) the ice is at its melting temperature.     calculate the time taken for all the ice to melt. the specific latent heat of fusion of  ice is 3.3 \u00d7 10 5 j / kg.  time = .  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) explain why a liquid cools when evaporation takes place from its surface.  .. ..   [2]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows five vessels each made of the same metal and containing water.    vessels a, b, c and d are identical in size and shape. vessel e is shallower and wider.  the temperature of the air surrounding each vessel is 20 \u00b0c.    ab c d e  fig. 7.1   the table shows details about each vessel and their contents. vessel outer surfacevolume of  water / cm3initial temperature  of water / \u00b0c a dull 200 80 b shiny 200 80 c dull 200 95 d dull 100 80 e dull 200 80   the following questions are about the time taken for the temperature of the water in the  vessels to fall by 10 \u00b0c from the initial temperature.   (i) explain why the water in b takes longer to cool than the water in a. ..   [1]   (ii) explain why the water in c cools more quickly than the water in a. ..   [1]   (iii) explain why the water in d cools more quickly than the water in a. ..   [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iv) suggest two reasons why the water in e cools more quickly than the water in a. 1.  ...  ..2.  ...  ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) a ray of light in air travels across a flat boundary into glass. the angle of incidence is  51\u00b0. the angle of refraction is 29\u00b0.   (i) in the space below, draw a labelled diagram to illustrate this information. [3]   (ii) calculate the refractive index of the glass.  refractive index = .  [2]  (b) a ray of light in glass travels towards a flat boundary with air. the angle of incidence is  51\u00b0. this ray does not emerge into the air.    state and explain what happens to this ray.  ..  .. ..   [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows a thin, straight rod xy placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a  magnet. the wires from the ends of xy are connected to a centre-zero voltmeter.   vyx ns  fig. 9.1  (a) when xy is moved slowly upwards the needle of the voltmeter shows a small deflection.    (i) state how xy must be moved to produce a larger deflection in the opposite direction.  ..   [2]   (ii) xy is now rotated about its central point by raising x and lowering y . explain why  no deflection is observed.  .. ..   [2]  (b) the effect of moving xy can be seen if the wires are connected to the terminals of a  cathode-ray oscilloscope instead of the voltmeter.   (i) state the parts inside the oscilloscope tube to which these terminals are connected.    [1]   (ii) the spot on the oscilloscope screen moves up and down repeatedly. state how xy  is being moved.    [1]   (iii) state the setting of the time-base of the oscilloscope during the process described  in (ii).    [1]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) state the electrical quantity that has the same value for each of two resistors connected  to a battery   (i) when they are in series,    (ii) when they are in parallel.  ..   [1]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows a circuit with a 1.2 k\u03c9 resistor and a thermistor in series. there is no current in the voltmeter.  v1.2 k1 9.0 v  fig. 10.1   calculate the voltmeter reading when the resistance of the thermistor is 3.6 k \u03c9.    voltmeter reading = .  [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use [turn over (c) fig. 10.2 shows a fire-alarm circuit. the circuit is designed to close switch s and ring  bell b if there is a fire.  9.0 vs relay coilb  fig. 10.2   explain the operation of the circuit.  ..  .. .. .. .. ..   [3]  [total: 7]  question 11 is on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) a radioactive source emits \u03b1-, \u03b2- and \u03b3-radiation.    which of these radiations   (i) has the shortest range in air, ..   (ii) has a negative charge, ..   (iii) is not deflected in a magnetic field? ..  [2]  (b) in a famous experiment, carried out in a vacuum, a very thin sheet of gold was placed in  the path of alpha particles.    it was found that a large number of the alpha particles passed through the sheet with  little or no deflection from their original path. a very small number of the alpha particles were reflected back towards the source.   (i) explain, in terms of the force acting, why the direction of motion of an alpha particle changes when it comes close to the nucleus of a gold atom.  .. ..   [2]   (ii) state two conclusions, about the nuclei of atoms, that were made from the results  of this experiment.1.  ...  ..2.  ...  ..   [2]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (rw/sw) 49514/4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *8454570444* physics 0625/32 paper 3  extended october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not useappropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question orpart question.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows a car on a roller-coaster ride. ab cwaterh fig. 1.1  mass of car = 600 kg  kinetic energy of car at point a = 160 kj  (a) calculate the speed of the car at a.  speed =  . [3]  (b) as the car travels from a to b, it loses 40 kj of energy due to friction.   the car just manages to roll over the crest of the hill at b.   calculate the height h.  height h =  . [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) at c, the car is slowed down by a shallow tank of water and the kinetic energy of the car  is reduced to zero.   make three suggestions for what happens to this kinetic energy. 1.  .. 2.  ..3.  ..  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 is a head-on view of an airliner flying at constant speed in a circular horizontal path.  the centre of the circle is to the left of the diagram.          fig. 2.1  (a) on fig. 2.1, draw the resultant force acting on the airliner. explain your answer.  .. .. . [3]  (b) the weight of the airliner is 1.20 \u00d7 10 6 n and there is an aerodynamic lift force of  1.39 \u00d7 106 n acting at 30\u00b0 to the left of the vertical.   by drawing a scale vector diagram, or otherwise, show that the resultant of these two  forces is in the same direction as the resultant force you drew in (a).  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the speed is constant as the airliner flies in this circular path.   state and explain what is happening to the velocity.  ..  .. .. . [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 a thermometer uses the value of a physical property to indicate the temperature.  (a) a particular thermometer is sensitive, linear and has a wide range.   draw a straight line from each characteristic of this thermometer to the appropriate  feature. characteristic of thermometer feature of thermometer reacts quickly to change of temperature sensitive large difference between highest and lowest  measurable temperatures linear same change of physical property for same change of temperature fixed points at 0\u00b0c and 100\u00b0c wide range large change of physical property for small  change of temperature  [3]  (b) (i) in the space below, draw a diagram to show the structure of a thermocouple thermometer.  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) explain why a thermocouple thermometer is particularly well suited to measure    1. high temperatures,  ..  ..    2. very rapidly changing temperatures. .. ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) fig. 4.1 shows some gas contained in a cylinder by a heavy piston. the piston can move  up and down in the cylinder with negligible friction.     heavy pistoncylinder gasatmosphere     fig. 4.1   there is a small increase in the pressure of the atmosphere above the piston.   (i) on fig. 4.1, draw a possible new position for the lower face of the piston. [1]   (ii) explain, in terms of the molecules of the gas and the molecules of the atmosphere,  your answer to (a)(i).  .. .. .. .. .. . [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the pressure of the atmosphere above the piston returns to its original value, and the  piston returns to its original position, as shown in fig. 4.2.     heavy pistoncylinder gasatmosphere     fig. 4.2   the gas, piston and cylinder are now heated to a much higher temperature.   (i) on fig. 4.2, draw a possible new position for the lower face of the piston. [1]   (ii) explain, in terms of the molecules of the gas and the molecules of the atmosphere,  your answer to (b)(i).  .. .. .. .. . [2]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a thin plastic cup containing hot coffee, which an igcse physics student gets  from a machine.  fig. 5.2 shows how another student, who finds an empty second cup, has placed his identical cup of coffee inside this second cup. coffee single cup double cupcoffeethick rim thin cup    fig. 5.1     fig. 5.2  (a) suggest and explain a difference that the students will feel when holding the cups.  .. .. .. . [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the students discuss this experience with their teacher, who makes hot drinks the  subject of an experiment.   the same volume of hot water at the same temperature is placed in the single cup and  in the double cup.   the temperature of the water in each cup is recorded for 10 minutes.   fig. 5.3 shows the cooling curve for the water in the single cup. 060 4080 5070 2 4 time  / minutestemperature / \u00b0c 6 8 10single cup fig. 5.3   on fig. 5.3, sketch and label a possible cooling curve for the water in the double cup.  [2]  (c) explain why a cup of coffee cools more slowly when a lid is placed over the cup.  .. .. .. .. . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use6 solar panels are positioned on the roof of the house shown in fig. 6.1. they use thermal  energy from the sun to provide hot water in an environmentally friendly way.     solar panels     fig. 6.1  cold water flows to the panels at 15 \u00b0c. during the day, the panels supply 3.8 kg of hot water at 65 \u00b0c every hour.  (a) calculate the average energy that the solar panels deliver to the water in one hour. specific heat capacity of water = 4200 j / (kg \u00b0c).  energy =  . [3]   (b) the solar power incident on the roof during this heating period is 170 w / m 2. the solar  panels have a total area of 8.0 m2.   calculate the solar energy incident on the panels in one hour.  solar energy =  . [2]   (c) calculate the efficiency of the solar panels, stating the equation you use.  efficiency =  . [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) explain why solar energy is called renewable energy.  .. . [1]  (e) state one disadvantage of using solar energy. .. . [1]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 a small object is placed 3.0 cm from the centre of a convex lens of focal length 6.0 cm. an  enlarged image is observed from the other side of the lens.  (a) on fig. 7.1, draw a ray diagram to show the formation of this image. fig. 7.1  [3]  (b) (i) state why this type of image is called virtual.  .. . [1]   (ii) state the common name given to a convex lens used in this manner. . [1]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use8 (a) a student rubs one side of an inflated balloon on her hair. this side of the balloon  becomes positively charged. explain this.  .. .. . [2]  (b) the charged side of the balloon is now brought close to a stream of water flowing from  a pipe. the original position of the stream of water is shown in fig. 8.1.   on fig. 8.1, write in the boxes to indicate how each side of the stream of water is  electrically charged.   choose your answer in each case from: positive, negative or neutral. + + + ++pipe stream of water charge is charge is  balloon fig. 8.1  [2]  (c) on fig. 8.1, draw the new position of the stream of water. explain this new position.  .. .. .. . [2]  (d) explain why rubbing one side of a metal sphere does not cause it to become charged. .. . [1]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows an experiment carried out in a vacuum to investigate the deflection of  \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays in a magnetic field. n s lead cylinder with small holethin beam of _-particles and a-raysmagnet radioactive source emitting _-particles and a-rays fig. 9.1  (a) complete the table to describe the deflection, if any, of the \u03b1-particles and the \u03b3-rays in  the magnetic field shown. place one tick in each column. possible deflection \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays no deflection towards n pole of magnettowards s pole of magnetout of paperinto paper  [3]  (b) the experiment of fig. 9.1 was carried out in a vacuum.   state the effect of carrying out the experiment in air.  ..  .. . [2]  (c) state and explain the purpose of the lead cylinder. .. .. . [2]  [total: 7]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use10 (a) determine which one of the following resistors, connected in parallel with a 24.0 \u03c9  resistor, would give a total resistance of 8.0 \u03c9. show your working.   available resistors: 2.0 \u03c9, 4.0 \u03c9, 6.0 \u03c9, 8.0 \u03c9, 12.0 \u03c9, 16.0 \u03c9, 18.0 \u03c9, 32.0 \u03c9  value of resistor =  . [3]  (b) (i) in the space below, draw the parallel combination of resistors from (a) connected in  a circuit with a 6.0 v battery. the circuit should also include an ammeter to measure  the current in the 24.0 \u03c9 resistor.  [2]   (ii) calculate the current in each of the resistors when connected as in (b)(i). show  your working.  current in 24.0 \u03c9 resistor =  ..  current in the other resistor =  ..  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use11 a student carries out an experiment with the circuit shown in fig. 11.1. the component in the   dashed box labelled x is a diode.     v3.0 1 3.0 1x aba     fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, draw the correct symbol for a diode, connected either way round, in the  dashed box labelled x. [1]  (b) (i) + 6.0 v is applied to point a, 0 v to point b.    state what the student observes on the ammeter.  ..   (ii) \u2013 6.0 v is applied to point a, 0 v to point b.    state what the student observes on the ammeter. ..  [2]  (c) the voltage shown in fig. 11.2 is applied to the point a of the circuit in fig. 11.1. point b  is kept at 0 v.   on fig. 11.2, draw a graph of the readings indicated by the voltmeter.     \u20135 \u2013100510 v / v t / s 1 2 3 4     fig. 11.2  [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (d) the circuit shown in fig. 11.3 contains two switches s1 and s2 and two indicator lamps  l1 and l2.     zs1 l1 l2 s2     fig. 11.3   (i) name component z. ... [1]   (ii) complete the table to state whether the lamps are on or off with the switches in the  positions stated. switch s1switch s2lamp l1lamp l2 open closed closed open  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nf/sw) 49538/4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *5757795995* physics 0625/33 paper 3  extended october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2  3 4  5 6 7 8 910 11 total",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 a brick is dropped from the top of a very tall building as it is being constructed.  fig. 1.1 is the speed / time graph for the brick as it falls to the ground. 0010203040speed m / s506070 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 time  / s16 fig. 1.1  (a) state a time at which the acceleration of the brick is   (i) zero,  time =  . [1]   (ii) constant but not zero,  time =  . [1]   (iii) not constant.  time =  . [1]  (b) explain in terms of the forces acting on the brick why, between 0 and 14.0 s, its speed  varies in the way shown by the graph.  .. .. .. .. . [4]  (c) state the direction of the resultant force acting on the brick at time 15.0 s. . [1]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 a bucket is full of oil. the total mass of the bucket of oil is 5.4 kg and the gravitational field  strength is 10 n / kg.  (a) calculate the total weight of the bucket of oil.  weight =  . [1]  (b) the bucket of oil is hung from a spring of unstretched length 20 cm. the limit of  proportionality of the spring is not exceeded and its length increases to 35 cm.   (i) state what is meant by the limit of proportionality.  ..  . [1]   (ii) the oil is poured into a measuring tank. the empty bucket stretches the spring to a  length of 25 cm.    calculate     1. the force that stretches the spring to a length of 25 cm,  force =  . [3]     2. the mass of the oil in the measuring tank.  mass =  . [2]   (iii) the volume of the oil in the measuring tank is 0.0045 m3. calculate the density of  the oil.  density =  . [2]  (c) explain, in terms of their molecules, why the density of the oil is greater than that of air. .. . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows an aeroplane of mass 3.4 \u00d7 105 kg accelerating uniformly from rest along a  runway. fig. 3.1  after 26 s it reaches a speed of 65 m / s.  (a) calculate   (i) the acceleration of the aeroplane,  acceleration =  . [2]   (ii) the resultant force on the aeroplane.  force =  . [2]  (b) just after taking off, the aeroplane continues to accelerate as it gains height.   (i) state two forms of energy that increase during this time.1.  ..2.  . [2]   (ii) state one form of energy that decreases during this time. . [1]   (iii) state why the total energy of the aeroplane decreases during this time. .. . [1]  (c) when the aeroplane reaches its maximum height, it starts to follow a curved path at a  constant speed.   state the direction of the resultant force on the aeroplane.  . [1]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 a diver is at a depth of 25 m beneath the surface of a lake. he carries a cylinder of  high-pressure air on his back.  (a) (i) explain how the air molecules exert a pressure on the inside surface of the cylinder.  .. .. .. . [3]   (ii) the diver gradually uses up the air in the cylinder. explain why the pressure falls. .. .. . [1]  (b) the density of the water in the lake is 1000 kg / m 3 and the atmospheric pressure at the  surface is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.   calculate the total pressure 25 m beneath the surface of the lake.  total pressure =  . [3]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 the water in a copper hot-water tank is heated during the night. during the day, the water  cools as thermal energy (heat) passes from the water to the air surrounding the tank.  (a) (i) describe the process by which the thermal energy is transferred from the hot water to the air.  .. .. .. .. . [3]   (ii) state why the rate at which thermal energy passes into the air decreases as the  water temperature falls.  .. . [1]  (b) the manufacturer of the hot-water tank says that when the outside surface is polished  regularly and kept bright and shiny, the hot water will cool more slowly.   describe, with the aid of a diagram, an experiment that shows whether a container with  a bright and shiny surface is better at keeping its contents warm than one with a dull and dark surface.  ..  .. .. .. .. . [4]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use6 a laser produces a ray of blue light of wavelength 4.0 \u00d7 10\u20137 m (0.000 000 40 m).  (a) (i) state the speed of light in a vacuum.  speed =  . [1]   (ii) calculate the frequency of the light produced by the laser.  frequency =  . [2]  (b) the ray of blue light passes from air into a glass block. fig. 6.1 shows the ray making an  angle of 35\u00b0 with the side of the block. 35\u00b0ray air glass fig. 6.1   (i) state the angle of incidence of the ray of blue light on the glass.  angle of incidence =  . [1]   (ii) glass has a refractive index of 1.5.    calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the glass.  angle of refraction =  . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use7 a converging lens has a focal length of 7.0 cm. an object of height 2.0 cm is placed 3.0 cm  from the centre of the lens. fig. 7.1 is a full-scale grid that shows the arrangement of the object, the lens and the two principal foci (focal points). principal focusprincipal focus object lens fig. 7.1  (a) (i) by drawing on fig. 7.1, show how the lens forms an image of the object. [3]   (ii) state two features of the image. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  (b) (i) determine the height of the image.  height =  . [1]   (ii) state the name of one device where a lens is used in the way shown in fig. 7.1. . [1]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use8 an electric heater is connected to a 230 v mains supply. the heater circuit includes two  resistors r1 and r2, and two switches s1 and s2. fig. 8.1 is the circuit diagram. r1230  v mains supplyr2s2 s1 fig. 8.1  the resistance of r1 is 46 \u03c9 and the resistance of r2 is also 46 \u03c9.  switch s1 is closed and switch s2 remains open.  (a) calculate   (i) the current from the mains supply,  current =  . [2]   (ii) the power dissipated in the heater.  power =  . [2]  (b) switch s2 is now closed.   state the current in r2.  current =  . [1]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) a very sensitive, centre-zero voltmeter is connected to the two terminals of a solenoid  (long coil). fig. 9.1 shows the s pole of a cylindrical magnet being inserted into the solenoid. ns v fig. 9.1   as the magnet is inserted into the left-hand end of the solenoid, the needle of the  voltmeter deflects.   (i) explain why the needle deflects as the magnet is inserted.  .. . [2]   (ii) state and explain the effect of inserting the magnet more slowly. .. . [2]   (iii) state what is observed when the magnet is withdrawn from the left-hand end of the  solenoid. . [1]  (b) a transformer consists of a primary coil and a secondary coil on an iron core. an  alternating voltage is connected to the primary coil.   describe and explain the operation of the transformer.  ..  .. .. .. .. . [4]  [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use10 a warning bell is fitted in a photographic dark room. in the dark, the bell is silent but in bright  light, it rings. two circuits linked by a relay r control the bell b. fig. 10.1 is the circuit diagram for the arrangement. zb r fig. 10.1  (a) (i) state the name of component z.  . [1]   (ii) explain why b rings in bright light. .. .. .. .. .. .. . [4]  (b) a change is made to one of the circuits so that b starts to ring when the temperature in  the room rises.   state the change made.  ..  . [1]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 the isotope thorium-234 is radioactive. it emits \u03b2-particles as it decays.  (a) the incomplete nuclide equation represents the decay of thorium-234 to an isotope of  protactinium (pa).   complete the equation. 234 90th      ... ...pa +  ..\u03b2  [3]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows a beam of \u03b2-particles from a sample of thorium-234 passing into the  electric field between two charged plates in a vacuum. beam of `-particles++++++++++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 fig. 11.1   (i) by drawing on fig. 11.1, show how the \u03b2-particles move as they pass between the plates. [1]   (ii) explain why the \u03b2-particles move in this way.  .. . [1]  [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (rw/jg) 49785/4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9305487841* physics 0625/51 paper 5  practical test october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will investigate the stretching of a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. the spring has been set up for you.  do not change its position.     clamp spring bench     fig. 1.1  (a) (i) measure the vertical distance d0, in mm, between the bottom of the spring and the  surface of the bench.  d0 =  mm   (ii) on fig. 1.1, mark clearly the distance you have measured.   (iii) hang a 1.0 n load on the spring. record the value of the load l in table 1.1.  measure, and record in the table, the distance d between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench.   (iv) calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation e = (d 0 \u2013 d ). record the  value of e in the table.   (v) repeat steps (iii) and (iv) using loads of 2.0 n, 3.0 n, 4.0 n and 5.0 n. record all the readings and results in the table.",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use    table 1.1 l / n d / mm e / mm  [4]  (b) plot a graph of e / mm (y-axis) against l / n (x-axis).       [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained  the necessary information.  g =  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the rate of cooling of water.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water. carry out the following instructions, referring to  fig. 2.1.     thermometer water     fig. 2.1  (a) measure and record room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  ..[1]  (b) (i) pour 150 cm3 of the hot water supplied into the measuring cylinder. transfer the  water from the measuring cylinder to the beaker.   (ii) place the thermometer in the beaker of water.   (iii) measure and record in the table the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until you have a total of six values up to time t = 150 s.  (c) empty the beaker. repeat step (b) using 250 cm 3 of hot water.  (d) complete the column headings in table 2.1.",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use    table 2.1 volume of water 150 cm3250 cm3 t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0  [5]  (e) state whether the rate of cooling is significantly faster, slower, or about the same when  using the larger volume. justify your answer by reference to your readings. statement  .justification  ... .. .. ..  [2]  (f) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be important  to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the potential differences across circuit components.  the circuit is set up for you.  (a) draw a circuit diagram of the circuit set up for you, using standard symbols.  [3]  (b) (i) switch on. measure and record the current ia, and the potential difference vl  across lamp l. switch off.  ia =  ..  vl =  ..   (ii) disconnect the voltmeter and reconnect it across lamp m. switch on.    measure and record the potential difference vm across lamp m. switch off.  vm =  ..   (iii) calculate the potential difference across both lamps using the equation va = vl + vm.  va =  ..   (iv) calculate the combined resistance ra of the three lamps using the equation ra = va ia.  ra =   [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) rearrange the circuit so that the three lamps are in series with each other.   (i) switch on. by connecting the voltmeter suitably each time, measure and record the  potential difference across each lamp in turn. switch off.  vl =  ..  vm =  ..  vn =  ..   (ii) calculate the potential difference vb across the three lamps using the equation vb = vl + vm + vn.  vb =  ..  [2]  (d) a student suggests that va should be equal to vb.   state whether your results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference  to the results. statement  .justification  ... .. ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light passing through a transparent  block.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1.     a b c def ray-trace sheet eyeo     fig. 4.1",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the  block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd.  (b) remove the block and draw a normal at the centre of side ab. label the point e where the normal crosses ab.  (c) draw a line fe to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30 \u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 4.1.  (d) place two pins p 1 and p2 on the line fe, placing one pin close to e. mark the positions  of p1 and p2.  (e) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block,  so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. place two pins p3 and  p4 between your eye and the block so that p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2  seen through the block, appear one behind the other. mark the positions of p3 and p4.  remove the block.  (f) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd and  label this point g.  (g) draw the line ge.  (h) measure and record the angle of refraction r between the line ge and the normal.  r =  ..[1]  (i) calculate the ratio i r.  i r =  ..[1]  (j) repeat steps (c) \u2013 (i) but with the angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0.  r =  ..  i r =  ..[2]  (k) a student suggests that the ratio i r should be a constant. state and explain briefly  whether your results support this suggestion.  .. .. ..[1]   tie your ray trace into this booklet between pages 10 and 11. [5] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (sm/sw) 49787/5 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *3522980232* physics 0625/52 paper 5  practical test october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will investigate a pendulum.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. the apparatus has been set up for  you.  do not adjust the length of the pendulum or the position of the clamp.  lclamp pendulum bob bench     fig. 1.1  (a) measure and record the length l  of the pendulum.  l  =  ..[1]  (b) place the metre rule on the bench so that the 50.0 cm mark is vertically below the centre of the pendulum bob. describe how you judge that the 50.0 cm mark is vertically below the centre of the pendulum bob. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) pull the pendulum bob to one side until it is vertically above the 52.0 cm mark on  the rule. release the pendulum bob, then measure and record in table 1.1 thetime t   taken for 10 complete swings of the pendulum. the distance d  that the  pendulum bob was moved is recorded in the first column of the table.   (ii) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period t is the time taken for one  complete swing of the pendulum.     table 1.1 d / t / t / 2.0 3.04.05.06.0   (iii) repeat steps (i) and (ii) using d  values of 3.0 cm, 4.0 cm, 5.0 cm and 6.0 cm.   (iv) complete the column headings in the table.  [5]  (d) using the evidence in the table, describe the effect on the period t of increasing the  distance d.  justify your answer by reference to your results. description  ... ..justification  ... .. .. [2]  (e) explain briefly why it is sensible to measure the time taken for ten swings of the  pendulum rather than one.  .. .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the rate of cooling of water.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water and a supply of water at room temperature. carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1.     thermometer water     fig. 2.1  (a) measure and record room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  ..[1]  (b) (i) pour 200 cm3 of the hot water supplied into the beaker. place the thermometer in  the beaker of water.     measure and record the temperature \u03b80 of the water.  \u03b80 =  ..[1]   (ii) start the stopclock and record the temperature \u03b81 of the water at time t  = 100 s.  \u03b81 =  ..[1]   (iii) calculate the temperature difference \u03b8a between \u03b80 and room temperature \u03b8r using  the equation  \u03b8a = (\u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8r ).  \u03b8a =  ..   (iv) calculate the temperature fall \u03b8h of the hot water using the equation  \u03b8h = (\u03b80 \u2013 \u03b81 ).  \u03b8h =  ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) empty the beaker. pour 100 cm3 of the hot water supplied into the beaker. add 100 cm3  of the water at room temperature to the beaker. briefly stir the water.   (i) measure and record the temperature \u03b82 of the warm water.  \u03b82 =  ..   (ii) start the stopclock and record the temperature \u03b83 of the water at time t  = 100 s.  \u03b83 =  ..  [1]   (iii) calculate the temperature difference \u03b8b between \u03b82 and room temperature \u03b8r using  the equation  \u03b8b = (\u03b82 \u2013 \u03b8r ).  \u03b8b =  ..   (iv) calculate the temperature fall \u03b8w of the warm water using the equation  \u03b8w = (\u03b82 \u2013 \u03b83 ).  \u03b8w =  ..  [1]  (d) a student suggests that the rate of temperature change is proportional to the difference  between the starting temperature and room temperature. this can be expressed as   \u03b8a \u03b8h = \u03b8b \u03b8w .   state whether your results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference  to the results. statement  . justification  ... .. ..  [2]  (e) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be important  to control the conditions.   suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  .. 2.  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate current and potential difference using lamps in series  and parallel circuits.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 3.1 and 3.2. the circuit shown infig. 3.1 is set up for you.     a vpower source     fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the current is in the lamps and the potential  difference vs across the three lamps. switch off.  is  =  ..  vs =  ..   (ii) calculate the combined resistance rs of the lamps using the equation  rs = vs is .  rs =  ..  [3]  (b) rearrange the circuit as shown in fig. 3.2. the ammeter is in position 1.     apower source v1 2 3     fig. 3.2",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference vp across the combination  of lamps.  vp =  ..   (ii) measure and record the current i1. switch off.  i1 =  ..   (iii) move the ammeter to position 2 as shown in fig. 3.2. switch on. measure and  record the current i2. switch off.  i2 =  ..   (iv) move the ammeter to position 3 as shown in fig. 3.2. switch on. measure and record the current i 3. switch off.  i3 =  ..   (v) calculate the total current ic using the equation  ic = i2 + i3.  ic =  ..   (vi) calculate the total resistance rp of the combination of the lamps, using the equation    rp = vp i1 .  rp =  ..  [5]  (c) a student decides to investigate the effect on rp of changing the current i1, using a  variable resistor (rheostat).   in the space below, copy the diagram shown in fig. 3.2, but with the addition of a variable  resistor connected in the circuit at a suitable position for the investigation.  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1.  illuminated object lensscreen v u     fig. 4.1  (a) place the lens a distance u  = 30.0 cm from the illuminated object. move the screen until  a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.   (i) measure, and record in table 4.1, the distance v  between the centre of the lens  and the screen.   (ii) calculate uv  and enter the value in the table.   (iii) measure, and record in the table, the distance d  between the illuminated object and the screen.  (b) repeat the steps in (a) using u  values of 45.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 55.0 cm and 60.0 cm.     table 4.1 u / cm v / cm uv / cm2d / cm 30.0 45.050.055.060.0  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (c) plot a graph of uv / cm2 ( y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). y ou do not need to begin the  axes at the origin (0,0).       [4]  (d) the gradient of the graph is numerically equal to the focal length of the lens.   (i) determine the gradient g  of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained  the necessary information.  g  =  ..[2]   (ii) state a value for the focal length f of the lens, giving your answer to a suitable  number of significant figures for this experiment.  f  =  ..[2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/jg) 49788/7 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn over *3378059649* physics 0625/53 paper 5 practical test october/november 2012  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.university of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will determine the mass of an object.  (a) carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 1.1 and 1.2.   the spring has already been set up for you. clamp l 1 100  g massl 0 fig. 1.1                   fig. 1.2   (i) measure and record the length l0 of the spring without any load.  l0 =  ..   (ii) suspend the 100 g mass from the spring.    measure and record the stretched length l1 of the spring.  l1 =  ..[1]   (iii) calculate the extension e1 of the spring using the equation e1 = (l1 \u2013 l0).  e1 =  ..[1]   (iv) determine a value for k using the equation k = m e1, where m = 100 g.  k  =  unit ...[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) set up the apparatus as shown in fig. 1.3. hookxmetre rule benchl 2 fig. 1.3   (i) place the object x with its centre at the mark on the metre rule that is 40.0 cm from  the end resting on the bench.    explain briefly how you made sure that the object was in the correct position. y ou may wish to use a diagram.  ..  .. .. [1]   (ii) measure and record the length l 2 of the spring.  l2 =  ..   (iii) remove the object x. measure and record the new length l3 of the spring.  l3 =  ..   (iv) determine the change in the extension e2 for the mass at 40.0 cm, where e2 = (l2 \u2013 l3).  e2 =  ..   (v) calculate the mass m of the object x using your answer to (a)(iv) and (b)(iv) and the    equation m = k /h20898e2 0.40/h20899.  m = ...[3]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (c) suggest two practical causes of inaccuracy in this experiment. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate how different surfaces absorb thermal radiation.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. the apparatus is set up for you.  a screen is provided to the side of the lamp in order to shield your eyes from direct glare. do  not place it between the lamp and the thermometer. screenclamp thermometer white cardd fig. 2.1  (a) (i) adjust the distance d between the lamp and the thermometer so that it is approximately 1 cm. y ou are provided with a spacer to do this.   (ii) in table 2.1, record the initial temperature  \u03b8 (with the lamp switched off).   (iii) switch on the lamp.    in table 2.1, record the temperature \u03b8 at 60 s intervals until you have a total of  5 values up to t = 240 s.    switch off the lamp.   (iv) replace the white card with the piece of black card, making sure that it makes good contact with the thermometer bulb.   (v) repeat step (i).   (vi) when the thermometer has cooled down, repeat steps (ii) and (iii).   (vii) complete the column headings in the table. table 2.1 white card black card t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /  [4]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) calculate the overall temperature change for each card after 240 s.     white card: temperature change = ..     black card: temperature change = ..  [1]   (ii) determine which surface, white or black, absorbs thermal radiation more efficiently.  state the experimental evidence for your choice. surface ...evidence  .. ..  [1]   (iii) a student suggests that the rate of temperature rise will be greater at the beginning  of the experiment than towards the end.    do your results support this? justify your answer with reference to your data for black card. statement  .justification  ... .. ..  [2]  (c) another igcse student wants to repeat your experiment.   suggest one precaution with the apparatus which she should take to make the  comparison between white and black surfaces a fair one. explain why not taking this  precaution might cause the test to be unfair. precaution   ..explanation  .. .. .. .. ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a lamp.  the apparatus has been set out for you as shown in fig. 3.1. resistance wirepower source acrocodile clip fig. 3.1  (a) (i) on fig. 3.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter correctly connected to measure the  potential difference across the lamp.   (ii) connect the voltmeter as described in (i).  [2]  (b) switch on.   (i) adjust the position of the crocodile clip on the resistance wire to give a voltmeter      reading of 1.0 v.   (ii) measure, and record in table 3.1, the potential difference v and the current i.   (iii) repeat (i) and (ii) for 3 more positions of the crocodile clip giving larger values of  potential difference. include the maximum length of wire.   switch off.  (c) (i) complete the column headings in table 3.1.   (ii) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance r of the lamp at each potential    difference using the equation r = v i.",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s usetable 3.1 v / i / r /  [5]  (d) an igcse student suggests that the resistance of a lamp stays the same whatever its  temperature.   state whether your findings support this suggestion. justify your answer, using your  results and your observations during the experiment. statement  . ..justification  ... .. .. ..  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. illuminated object lensscreenv u fig. 4.1  (a) (i) set the object distance u to 0.200 m.   (ii) place the screen near the lens. move the screen until a sharp image of the object is  seen on the screen.   (iii) carefully measure, and record in table 4.1, the image distance v in metres.   (iv) repeat steps (ii) and (iii) for object distances u of 0.250 m, 0.350 m, 0.450 m and  0.600 m.  (b) calculate the values of 1 v and record them in the table. table 4.1 u / m1 u/1 mv / m1 v/1 m 0.200 5.00 0.250 4.00 0.350 2.86 0.450 2.22 0.600 1.67  [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) plot a graph of 1 v/1 m (y-axis) against 1 u/1 m (x-axis). begin both axes at the origin (0,0).   the scale must allow the best-fit line, when extended beyond the range of the data, to  cross both axes. 0 0  [4]  (d) (i) from the graph, determine the value p of 1 u when 1 v is zero (the x-intercept).  p =  ..   (ii) from the graph, determine the value q of 1 v when 1 u is zero (the y-intercept).  q =  ..[1]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (e) (i) calculate z, where z is the average of p and q.  z =  ..   (ii) calculate the focal length f of the lens where f = 1 z .  f =  ..  [2]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (cw/sw) 50194/4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn over *1179464083* physics 0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2012  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.university of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is investigating the stretching of a spring.  fig. 1.1 shows the experimental set up. clamp d0 benchspring fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, measure the vertical distance d0, in mm, between the bottom of the spring  and the surface of the bench.  d0 =  .. mm [1]  (b) the diagram is drawn 1/10th actual size. calculate the actual distance d0, in mm,  between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench.  d0 =  .. mm [1]  (c) a student hangs a 1.0 n load on the spring. he measures and records the distance d  between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench, and the value of the  load l.   he repeats the procedure using loads of 2.0 n, 3.0 n, 4.0 n and 5.0 n. the distance  readings are shown in table 1.1.   calculate the extension e of the spring, for each set of readings, using the equation  e = (d0 \u2013 d). record the values of l and e in table 1.1. table 1.1 l / n d / mm e / mm 199 191179171160  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) plot a graph of e / mm (y-axis) against l / n (x-axis).  [4]  (e) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ..[2]  (f) when making measurements, the student is careful to avoid a line-of-sight error.   suggest one other precaution that the student should take when measuring the distance  d between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench.  .. ..[1] [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water under different conditions.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 2.1. thermometer water                                      \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c  fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2  (a) record the value of room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.2.  \u03b8r =  ..[1]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) a student pours 150 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. she measures the temperature \u03b8 of  the water at time t = 0 and records it in a table.   she starts a stopclock and records the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until  she has a total of six values up to time t = 150 s. the readings are shown in table 2.1.    she repeats the procedure, using 250 cm3 of hot water. table 2.1 volume of water 150 cm3250 cm3 t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /     0 84 85   30 79 79  60 74 75  90 70 72120 68 70150 66 68   (i) complete the column headings in the table. [1]   (ii) state whether the rate of cooling is significantly faster, slower, or about the same  when using the larger volume of hot water. justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement  .justification  ... .. .. [2]  (c) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be important  to control the conditions. suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  ..2.  .. [2] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the potential differences across circuit components.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus used. power pack lamp nammeter lamp l lamp m voltmeter fig. 3.1  (a) draw a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in fig. 3.1, using standard symbols.  [3]  (b) a student records the current ia, the potential difference vl across lamp l and the  potential difference vm across lamp m.       0.65 a ia =  ..    0.9 v vl =  ..    1.0 v vm =  ..   (i) calculate the potential difference va across lamps l and m using the equation  va = vl + vm.  va =  ..",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate ra, the combined resistance of lamps l, m and n, using the equation    ra = va ia.  ra =  .. [2]   (iii) on fig. 3.2, draw a pointer showing the current ia = 0.65 a. 00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0     fig. 3.2 [1]  (c) the student rearranges the circuit so that the three lamps are in series with each other.  he records the potential difference across each lamp in turn.       0.6 v vl =  ..    0.7 v vm =  ..    0.7 v vn =  ..   calculate the potential difference vb across the three lamps using the equation  vb = vl + vm + vn.  vb =  ..  (d) a student suggests that va should be equal to vb.    state whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference  to the results. statement  .justification  ... .. [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating the refraction of light passing through a transparent block.  the apparatus and ray-trace sheet are shown in fig. 4.1. o eye ray-trace sheetab dcp3 p4 fig. 4.1",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) a student places the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet. she  draws the outline of the block abcd.   (i) on fig. 4.1, draw a normal at the centre of side ab. label the point e where the normal crosses ab.   (ii) draw a line fe to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal. [2]  (b) the student places two pins p 1 and p2 on the line fe, placing one pin close to e. she  observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the images of p1  and p2 appear one behind the other. she places two pins p3 and p4 between her eye  and the block so that p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2 seen through the block,  appear one behind the other.   (i) on fig. 4.1, mark suitable positions for the pins p1 and p2. [1]   (ii) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd  and label this point g.   (iii) draw the line ge.  [1]  (c) (i) measure and record the angle of refraction r between the line ge and the normal.  r =  ..[1]   (ii) calculate the ratio i r.  i r =  ..[1]  (d) the student repeats the procedure but with the angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0. the angle of  refraction r = 26\u00b0.   (i) calculate the ratio i r.  i r =  ..[1]   (ii) a student suggests that the ratio i r should be a constant.    state and explain briefly whether your results support this suggestion.  .. .. .. [1]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) the igcse class has a range of apparatus available. here is a list of some of the  apparatus.    ammeter    barometer   beaker   electronic balance   manometer   measuring cylinder   metre rule   newtonmeter (spring balance)   stopwatch   tape measure   thermometer   voltmeter  complete table 5.1 by inserting the name of one piece of apparatus from the list that is  the most suitable for measuring each quantity described. table 5.1 quantity to be measured most suitable apparatus volume of water a distance of about 50 mthe force required to lift a laboratory stoolthe mass of a cointhe pressure of the laboratory gas supply  [5]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (b) the igcse class is carrying out a lens experiment. this involves using an illuminated  object, a screen and a lens.    firstly, the distance between the illuminated object and the lens is measured with a  metre rule. next, a clearly focused image is obtained on the screen.   (i) explain briefly how you would avoid a parallax (line-of-sight) error when using the metre rule.  .. .. .. [1]   (ii) state a precaution that you would take to ensure that the image is well focused. .. .. .. [1]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (leo/jg) 50193/4 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. *6078595043* physics 0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2012  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is carrying out refraction experiments using a rectangular glass block and  optical pins.  (a) in the middle of the space below, draw a line, 10 cm long, across the page and label it ab. this line represents one side of the glass block.  [1]  (b) draw a normal to this line at the centre of ab. [1]  (c) draw a line at 30\u00b0 to the normal to represent an incident ray. this line should be at least 6 cm long. label this line ef. [1]  (d) mark the positions of two pins p 1 and p2 on line ef. they should be positioned at  suitable places on the line in order carry out a ray-tracing experiment as accurately as possible. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (e) a student finds that his completed results from the refraction experiment do not quite  match the theory. the student carried out the experiment correctly and with reasonable care.   suggest a practical reason why the results could differ slightly from the results expected  from the theory.  .. .. ..[1]  [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 an igcse class is investigating the rate of cooling of water.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 2.1.  thermometer water                                  \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c  fig. 2.1                                fig. 2.2  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r as shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.2.  \u03b8r =  ..[2]  (b) a student pours 200 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. she records the temperature \u03b80 of  the water.   86 \u00b0c \u03b80 =  ..   she starts a stopclock and records the temperature \u03b81 of the water at time t = 100 s.    72 \u00b0c \u03b81 =  ..   (i) calculate the temperature difference \u03b8a between \u03b80 and room temperature \u03b8r using  the equation \u03b8a = (\u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8r).  \u03b8a =  ..   (ii) calculate the temperature fall \u03b8h of the hot water using the equation \u03b8h = (\u03b80 \u2013 \u03b81).  \u03b8h =  ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the student empties the beaker. she pours 100 cm3 of hot water into the beaker, adds  100 cm3 of cold water to the beaker, and stirs.   she records the temperature \u03b82 of the warm water.   59 \u00b0c \u03b82 =  ..   she starts the stopclock and records the temperature \u03b83 of the water at time t = 100 s.   44 \u00b0c \u03b83 =  ..   (i) calculate the temperature difference \u03b8b between \u03b82 and room temperature \u03b8r using  the equation \u03b8b = (\u03b82 \u2013 \u03b8r).  \u03b8b =  ..   (ii) calculate the temperature fall \u03b8w of the warm water using the equation \u03b8w = (\u03b82 \u2013 \u03b83).  \u03b8w =  ..  [1]  (d) the student suggests that the rate of temperature change is proportional to the difference  between the starting temperature and room temperature. this can be expressed as   \u03b8a \u03b8h = \u03b8b \u03b8w.   state whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference  to the results. statement  . justification  ... ..  [2]  (e) if this experiment were to be repeated in order to check results, it would be important to  control the conditions.   suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1.  .. 2.  ..  [2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating current and potential difference using identical lamps in a  circuit.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. apower source 1 2 3 fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference v across the combination of lamps. [1]  (b) on fig. 3.2, draw a pointer showing the voltmeter reading v = 1.9 v. 00.4 0.20.81.0 0.61.21.4 v1.6 1.8 2.0 fig. 3.2  [1]  (c) (i) a student measures the current at positions 1, 2 and 3 in the circuit. record the  current at each position as shown on the ammeters in fig. 3.3. 00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0 00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0 00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0 position 1 position 2 position 3 fig. 3.3 i1 =              i2 =              i3 =   [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the total current ic in the combination of lamps using the equation  ic = i2 + i3.  ic =  ..   (iii) theory indicates that i1 = ic. suggest why a student may find the two values to be  different in this experiment.  .. .. .. [1]  (d) the student decides to investigate the effect of changing the current i 1, using a variable  resistor (rheostat).   in the space below, copy the diagram shown in fig. 3.1, but with the addition of a variable  resistor connected at a suitable position for the investigation.  [2]  (e) a student sets up the circuit as shown in fig. 3.1. neither of the two lamps in series  glows. he suspects that one of the lamps is faulty.   suggest how the apparatus may be used to find out which lamp is faulty.  ..  ..[1] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is determining the focal length of a lens.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. illuminated object lens screen v u fig. 4.1  a student places a lens at a distance u = 30.0 cm from an illuminated object. she moves the  screen until a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.   she measures the distance v  between the centre of the lens and the screen. she calculates d, using the equation d = u + v.  she repeats the procedure using a range of values of u. the values of u, v and d are shown  in table 4.1. table 4.1 u / cm v / cm uv / d / 30.0 29.8 59.8 45.0 22.0 67.0 50.0 21.8 71.8 55.0 21.0 76.0 60.0 19.9 79.9  (a) (i) calculate the value of uv for each set of readings and enter the values in the table.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table by inserting the units for uv and d.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) complete the labelling of the axes below, and plot the graph using data from the table.  y ou do not need to begin the axes at the origin (0,0). uv /  d / [4]  (c) the gradient of the graph is numerically equal to the focal length of the lens.   (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained  the necessary information.  g =  ..[2]   (ii) state a value for the focal length f of the lens, giving your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  f =  ..[2] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is investigating a pendulum.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 5.1. lclamp benchpendulum bob fig. 5.1  (a) on fig. 5.1, measure the length l of the pendulum.  l =  ..[1]  (b) the diagram is drawn 1/5th actual size.   calculate the actual length l of the pendulum.  l =  ..[2]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) a student places a metre rule on the bench so that the 50.0 cm mark is vertically below  the centre of the pendulum bob. describe how you would judge that the 50.0 cm mark is vertically below the centre of the pendulum bob. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  ..[1]  (d) the student pulls the pendulum bob to one side until it is vertically above the 52.0 cm  mark on the rule. he has moved the pendulum bob a horizontal distance d = 2.0 cm.   he releases the pendulum bob, then measures the time t taken for 12 complete swings  of the pendulum. he repeats the procedure using a range of d values. the values of d and t are shown in table 5.1. table 5.1 d / t / t / 2.0 17.4 3.0 17.6 4.0 17.2 5.0 17.3 6.0 17.5   (i) calculate the period t of the pendulum for each value of d. enter the values in the table. the period t is the time taken for one complete swing of the pendulum. [2]   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [1]  (e) using the evidence in the table, describe the effect on the period t of increasing the  distance d. justify your answer by reference to your results. description  ... ..justification  ... .. ..  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (f) suggest why the student measures the time taken for twelve swings of the pendulum  rather than for one swing.  .. .. ..[1] [total: 10"
        },
        "0625_w12_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/sw) 50041/6 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. *9194447886* physics 0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2012  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use1 an igcse class is carrying out this experiment to determine the mass of a metal block.  fig. 1.1 shows a spring drawn full size.  fig. 1.2, also full size, shows the spring with a load of 100 g suspended from it. clamp l 0 l 1 100  g mass fig. 1.1                       fig. 1.2  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the length l0, in cm, of the spring without any load.  l0 =  . cm   (ii) on fig. 1.2 measure the stretched length l1, in cm.  l1 =  . cm  [1]   (iii) calculate the extension e1 of the spring using the equation e1 = (l1 \u2013 l0).  e1 =  ..[1]   (iv) determine a value for k using the equation k = m e1, where m = 100 g.  k  =  unit ...[2]",
            "3": "3 [turn over 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (b) the apparatus is then set up as shown in fig. 1.3.   the rule is at a small angle to the bench. l 2 metre rule hook benchzero mark fig. 1.3   a student measures the length of the stretched spring and obtains the result         4.4 cm l2 =  ..   (i) he then places a metal block x with its centre at the 40.0 cm mark on the rule.    explain briefly how the student can make sure that the block is in the correct  position. y ou may wish to use a diagram.  ..  .. .. [1]   (ii) the student measures the new length l 3 of the spring and records it as         7.5 cm l3 =  ..    determine the change in the extension e2 due to block x, using the equation  e2 = (l3 \u2013 l2).  e2 =  ..   (iii) calculate the mass m of block x using your answers to (a)(iv) and (b)(ii) and the    equation m = k /h20898e2 0.40/h20899.  m = ...[2]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (c) suggest two practical causes of inaccuracy in this experiment. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use2 some igcse students have been asked to investigate how different surfaces absorb thermal  radiation.  the apparatus is set up as shown in fig. 2.1, with a piece of white card in close contact with the thermometer bulb.  the distance between the card and the lamp is 1.0 cm.  fig. 2.1 shows the reading on the thermometer before the lamp is switched on. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c 1.0 cm white cardlampclamp fig. 2.1  (a) in table 2.1, record the temperature before the lamp is switched on, as shown in fig. 2.1.  (b) the lamp is switched on and the temperature recorded every minute.   after 300 s, the lamp is switched off and the white card is replaced with a piece of  black card.   the lamp is then switched on for a further 300 s, and the temperature recorded every  minute.",
            "7": "7 [turn over 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use  table 2.1 shows the readings obtained during the experiment.   (i) complete the column headings in the table. table 2.1 white card black card t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 02 4 60 25 30 120 28 37 180 30 42 240 32 45 300 33 47  [2]   (ii) calculate the overall temperature change for each card after 300 s.  white card: temperature change =   black card: temperature change =   [1]   (iii) determine which surface, white or black, absorbs thermal radiation more efficiently. state the experimental evidence for your choice. surface ...evidence  ..  [1]   (iv) a student suggests that the rate of temperature rise will be greater at the beginning  of the experiment than towards the end of the experiment.    state whether the results support this. justify your answer with reference to the data for black card. statement  .justification  ... .. ..  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (c) another igcse student wants to repeat the experiment.    suggest one precaution which she should take with the apparatus to make the  comparison between white and black surfaces a fair one. explain why not taking this  precaution might cause the test to be unfair. precaution  explanation  .. .. ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a lamp.  the apparatus has been set out as shown in fig. 3.1. avariable power supply fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter correctly connected to measure the potential  difference across the lamp. [2]  (b) table 3.1 shows the values of potential difference v and current i obtained during the  experiment, and observations regarding the lamp. table 3.1 v / i / r / observation 1.5 0.15 lamp is just glowing 3.2 0.23 lamp is lit but is dim 4.7 0.26 lamp is brighter 6.5 0.31 lamp is very bright  [3]",
            "11": "11 [turn over 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use  (i) complete the column headings in table 3.1.   (ii) calculate, and record in the table, the resistance r  of the lamp at each potential    difference v using the equation r = v i.  (c) a student suggests that the resistance of a lamp stays the same whatever its  temperature.   state whether the results support this idea. justify your answer, using the results and  the observations obtained during the experiment. statement  . ..justification  ... .. .. ..  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use4 an igcse class is carrying out an experiment to determine the focal length of a converging  lens.  the apparatus is set up as shown in fig. 4.1. illuminated object lensscreenv u fig. 4.1  (a) the object distance u is set and a sharp image is obtained on the screen.   (i) measure the object distance u  on fig. 4.1.  u =  ..   (ii) measure the image distance v  on fig. 4.1.  v =  ..  [1]   (iii) the diagram is drawn to 1 5th full size. determine the actual values, in metres, of u  and v. record these values in table 4.1.  (b) four more object distances are set up and these and the corresponding image distances  are recorded in table 4.1.   complete the table by calculating values of 1 u and 1 v as necessary. table 4.1 u / m1 u/1 mv / m1 v/1 m 0.200 5.00 0.600 0.250 4.00 0.392 0.450 2.22 0.222 0.600 1.67 0.196  [2]",
            "13": "13 [turn over 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (c) plot a graph of 1 v/1 m (y-axis) against 1 u/1 m (x-axis). begin both axes at the origin (0,0).   the scale must allow the best-fit line, when extended beyond the range of the data, to  cross both axes. 00  [4]  (d) (i) from the graph, determine the value p of 1 u when 1 v is zero (the x-intercept).  p =  ..   (ii) from the graph, determine the value q of 1 v when 1 u is zero (the y-intercept).  q =  ..[1]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use (e) (i) calculate z, where z is the average value of p and q.  z =  ..   (ii) calculate the focal length f of the lens where f = 1 z .  f =  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "15": "15 [turn over 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use5 some igcse students are carrying out an experiment to investigate how a tennis ball  bounces on various surfaces.  fig. 5.1 shows how they are doing this. the ball is dropped from a known height and the height of the bounce is measured. metre rule tennis ball surface being tested fig. 5.1  (a) one student drops the ball several times from a height of 100 cm. each time he measures the height to which the ball bounces. his measurements are shown in table 5.1. table 5.1 test 12345 height of bounce / cm74 70 72 53 69   explain how a valid average value for the height of the bounce could be achieved from  these results. y ou are not asked to calculate it.  .. .. ..[2]",
            "16": "16 0625/63/o/n/12 \u00a9 ucles 2012for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (b) another student releases the ball from a height of 100 cm on to a stone floor. it bounces  to a height of 75 cm.   calculate the efficiency of the bounce on the stone floor using the equation   efficiency = height of bounce height of release \u00d7 100%.  efficiency = ...[1] (c) a third student releases the ball from a height of 85 cm on to a concrete floor and it  bounces to a height of 75 cm.   without any further calculation, state whether the efficiency for the concrete floor is less  than, greater than, or roughly the same as the efficiency for the stone floor. explain your reasoning. statement .. ..explanation ... .. ..  [2]  [total: 5]"
        }
    },
    "2013": {
        "0625_s13_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 20 printed pages.  ib13 06_0625_11/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2013  [turn over      *7627854085* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2013     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  1 the diagrams show the readings on a measuring cylinder before and after a small metal cube is  added.    10 9 87654321cm3cm3 10 987654321 before afterwater metal cube     how many more identical cubes can be added to the cylinder, without causing the water to  overflow? do not include the cube already in the cylinder.  a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4    2 which person is experiencing an acceleration?  a a driver of a car that is braking to stop at traffic lights  b a passenger in a train that is stationary in a railway station c a shopper in a large store ascending an escalator (moving stairs) at a uniform rate d a skydiver falling at constant speed towards the earth     3 a car travels at various speeds during a short journey.   the table shows the distances travelled and the times taken during each of four stages p, q, r and s.    stage p q r s  distance travelled  / km 1.8 3.6 2.7 2.7  time taken  / minutes 2 2 4 3    during which two stages is the car travelling at the same average speed?  a p and q b p and s c q and r d r and s    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  4 two blocks of metal x and y hang from spring balances, as shown in the diagrams.    0 1 2 3 4 5 x yn 0 1 2 3 4 5n     what does the diagram show about x and y?  a they have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.  b they have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.  c they have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.  d they have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.      5 a 1  kg sample of aluminium is stored in a laboratory. in a different laboratory, in the same town,   there is a 1  kg sample of iron.    which quantity must these two samples always  have in common?  a the same density  b the same temperature  c the same volume  d the same weight     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  6 a measuring cylinder has a mass of 120  g when empty.    when it contains 50  cm3 of a liquid, the total mass of the measuring cylinder and the liquid is  160  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 5040  g / cm3  b 4050  g / cm3  c 50120  g / cm3  d 50160  g / cm3     7 a car moves along a level road.   the diagram shows all of the horizontal forces acting on the car.    2000  n force from engine500  n friction800  n air resistance     which statement is correct?  a the car is slowing down.  b the car is speeding up.  c the car is moving at a constant speed.  d the car is moving backwards.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  8 the diagram shows a force being applied to a lever to lift a heavy weight.    force pivot lever heavy weight     which change would enable the heavy weight to be lifted with a smaller force?  a move the force to the right.  b move the heavy weight to the right.  c move the force to the left.  d move the pivot to the left.      9 the diagram shows a hydroelectric system.    water power stationpipereservoir     what are the main energy changes taking place?  a chemical energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy  b electrical energy \u2192 gravitational energy \u2192 kinetic energy  c gravitational energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy  d kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy \u2192 gravitational energy     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  10 an escalator (moving stairs) and a lift (elevator) are both used to carry passengers from the same  underground railway platform up to street level.    escalator lift    the escalator takes 20 seconds to carry a man to street level. the useful work done is w. the  useful power developed is p. the lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man to street level.    how much useful work is done by the lift, and how much useful power is developed by the lift?     useful work  done by lift useful power  developed by lift  a more than w less than p  b more than w p  c w less than p  d w p     11 a man stands on the ground.    which action will increase the pressure that the man exerts on the ground?  a the man slowly bends his knees.  b the man slowly lies down on the ground.  c the man slowly raises his arms.  d the man slowly raises one foot off the ground.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  12 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    90 8070605040302010cm vacuum metre rule mercury     which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?  a 12  cm b 74  cm c 86  cm d 100  cm      13 a thermometer bulb is covered by a piece of damp absorbent cloth.    thermomete r airdamp cloth bulb    air at room temperature is blown across the damp cloth.    what happens to the thermometer reading?  a it remains constant.  b it rises.  c it rises then falls.  d it falls.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  14 a gas storage tank has a fixed volume. the gra ph shows how the temperature of the gas in the  tank varies with time.    x timetemperature y    at time y, the gas molecules are  a closer together than at time x.  b hitting the sides of the tank harder than at time x. c larger in size than at time x.  d moving more slowly than at time x.     15 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy (heat) is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d       ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  16 a mercury thermometer with no scale is taped to a ruler as shown.     when the thermometer is placed in steam, the mercury level rises to 22.0  cm.    when the thermometer is placed in pure melting ice, the mercury level falls to 2.0  cm.    30  28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 cm  mercuryrulerthermomete r     which temperature is shown by the mercury level in the diagram?  a 6 \u00b0c b 8 \u00b0c c 30  \u00b0c d 40  \u00b0c     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  17 the diagram shows the cross-section of a vacuum flask containing a hot liquid in a cold room.    x and y are points on the inside surfaces of the walls of the flask.    xycold room vacuumhot liquid     how is thermal energy transferred between x and y?  a by conduction and convection  b by conduction only  c by radiation and convection  d by radiation only     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  18 the diagram shows a refrigerator.     the cooling unit is placed at the top. the cooling unit cools the air near it.    cooling unit     what happens to the density of the air as it cools, and how does it move?     density of the air movement of the air  a decreases moves down  b decreases stays at the top  c increases moves down  d increases stays at the top      19 visible light and \u03b3-rays are both waves.    how may they correctly be described?     visible light \u03b3-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal  b longitudinal transverse  c transverse longitudinal  d transverse transverse     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  20 the diagram represents a wave.    xydistancedisplacement 0     how many wavelengths are there between x and y?  a 32 b 1 c 211 d 3      21 different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. below are four  statements about parts of the spectrum.    statement 1: infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.  statement 2: radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to earth. statement 3: ultra-violet waves are used for intruder alarms. statement 4: x-rays are used for security checks.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 3 and 4      22 which diagram shows how a ray of light could pass through a glass block in air?    a glassb glass glassc glassd    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  23 which diagram correctly represents rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?    a b c  objectimagecameradobjectimagecamera object lensimagecameralensobjectimagecamera lens lens       24 the diagrams represent two sound waves. the scales in the two diagrams are the same.    displacement time sound wave 1displacement time sound wave 2    which statement describes the waves?  a the waves have different loudness and different pitch.  b the waves have different loudness but the same pitch. c the waves have the same loudness and the same pitch.  d the waves have the same loudness but different pitch.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  25 a student claps once when standing 100  m away from a large wall.    the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    how long after clapping does the student hear an echo?  a 0.30  s b 0.61  s c 1.7  s d 3.3  s     26 which statement about magnetism is correct?  a aluminium is a ferrous metal.  b a steel magnet can be demagnetised by heating it.  c the core of an electromagnet is usually made of steel.  d the magnetic field lines around a bar magnet are evenly spaced.      27 two soft-iron rods are placed end to end inside a coil which is connected to a battery.    soft-iron rod soft-iron rodcoil     the connections from the battery to the coil are now reversed.    what happens to the soft-iron rods in each case?     battery connections  as shown battery connections  reversed  a rods attract rods attract  b rods attract rods repel  c rods repel rods attract  d rods repel rods repel     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  28 three charged balls, p, q and r are suspended by insulating threads. ball p is negatively  charged.    ball q is brought close to ball p.    \u2013pqinsulating thread     ball q is now brought close to ball r.    qr    what are the charges on ball q and on ball r?     ball q ball r  a positive positive  b positive negative  c negative positive  d negative negative     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  29 which circuit could be used to determine the resistance of the resistor r?    a vd v ac rrv aa a vb r r      30 which copper wire would have the smallest resistance?    a a long, thick wire  b a long, thin wire  c a short, thick wire  d a short, thin wire      31 the diagram shows an electrical circuit.    p on lm     between which two points must a voltmeter be connected to find the potential difference across  the bell?  a l and m b m and n c n and o d o and p     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  32 the reading on the ammeter in the circuit is 1.0  a.    a second ammeter is connected in the circuit. it also reads 1.0  a.    at which labelled point is it connected?    1.0 a a  b c d a       33 the circuit shows a battery and four lamps. all the lamps are lit.    one lamp fails and all the lamps go out.    which lamp failed?    a  b  cd       34 a desk lamp should have a 3  a fuse fitted, but a 13  a fuse has been fitted by mistake.    the lamp is not faulty.    the lamp is switched on. what happens?  a the fuse blows.  b the fuse does not blow but the lamp does not light.  c the lamp draws too much current and the supply cables could melt.  d the lamp works normally.     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  35 an electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.    which row shows the effect that a relay uses, together with one application of a relay?     effect used by a relay one application of a relay  a heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  b heating effect changing the voltage of an alternating current  c magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  d magnetic effect changing the voltage of an alternating current      36 the diagram shows a mains transformer that has an output voltage of 12  v.    240  v a.c. input12 v a.c. outputcoil with 1000 turnssoft-iron core     how many turns of wire are in the secondary coil?  a 12 b 20 c 50 d 20  000    ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13 [turn over  37 the diagram shows an experiment to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.    nsx ya wire     x and y are joined, in turn, by four wires, each made of a different material.    each wire is then moved quickly downwards between the magnets.    which material will not give rise to an induced current in the wire?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d nylon     38 in a cathode-ray tube, particles are fired at a screen.    what are these particles?  a \u03b1-particles  b electrons  c neutrons  d protons     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third -party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/m/j/13  39 the graph shows how the count rate on a detector due to a radioactive source changes with time.    4800 2400 0 012345count rate counts per minute time  / hours    what is the count rate at 5.0 hours?  a 960 counts per minute  b 600 counts per minute  c 150 counts per minute  d 0 counts per minute      40 the diagram represents a carbon atom.    + + +  + + +  + \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013key  neutron  proton  electron      what is the nucleon number (mass number) for this atom?  a 6 b 8 c 14 d 20       "
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib13 06_0625_12/5rp  \u00a9 ucles 2013  [turn over      *1730835311* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2013     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  1 a student measures the length of a rod xy by holding it next to a metre rule.    99 98 97 96 95 94 cmxy     the student writes down the length as 94.8  cm.    which statement is correct?  a the value is correct.  b the value is incorrect because it should be 95.2  cm.  c the value is incorrect because it should be in millimetres.  d the value is incorrect because the student should subtract the reading for end y from the  reading for end x.     2 a heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels j, k, l  and m.    level j level klevel llevel mmetal ball     the times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.    where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?     speed is  greatest between time is  shortest between  a j and k j and k  b j and k l and m  c l and m j and k  d l and m l and m     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13 [turn over  3 a car travels at various speeds during a short journey.    the table shows the distances travelled and the times taken during each of four stages p, q, r and s.    stage p q r s  distance travelled  / km 1.8 3.6 2.7 2.7  time taken  / minutes 2 2 4 3    during which two stages is the car travelling at the same average speed?  a p and q b p and s c q and r d r and s      4 two blocks of metal x and y hang from spring balances, as shown in the diagrams.   0 1 2 3 4 5 x yn 0 1 2 3 4 5n     what does the diagram show about x and y?  a they have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.  b they have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.  c they have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.  d they have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.      5 a student stands with both feet on some scales in order to measure his weight.   the reading on the scales is 500  n. he lifts one foot off the scales and keeps it lifted.    what is the new reading on the scales?  a 0 b 250  n c 500  n d 1000  n ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  6 a measuring cylinder containing liquid is pl aced on a top-pan balance. the apparatus is left  overnight and some of the liquid evaporates. the diagrams show the readings.    g251252 249 248250cm3 before liquid evaporatesliquid g243244 241 240242cm3 after liquid evaporatesliquid measuring cylinder     what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.875  g / cm3 b 1.14  g / cm3 c 1.40  g / cm3 d 1.42  g / cm3      7 a child sits on a rubber ball and bounces up and down on the ground.       what stays the same when the ball hits the ground?  a the acceleration of the ball  b the mass of the ball  c the shape of the ball  d the velocity of the ball     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13 [turn over  8 the diagrams show different objects, each being acted upon by only the two forces shown.    which object is in equilibrium?    3 n 3 na  4 n4  nb  5 n 5 n4 n 5 nc d       9 the diagram shows a hydroelectric system.    water power stationpipereservoir     what are the main energy changes taking place?  a chemical energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy  b electrical energy \u2192 gravitational energy \u2192 kinetic energy  c gravitational energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy  d kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy \u2192 gravitational energy     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  10 a car moves along a level road at constant speed. work is done by the engine and power is  developed by the engine.    which pair of graphs shows how the work done and the power developed vary with time?    work timepower timea work timepower timeb work timepower timec work timepower timed 0 00 00 00 0 0 00 00 00 0      ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13 [turn over  11 a mercury manometer is used to measure a pressu re difference. the difference is shown by the  levels x and y in the diagram.    0102030405060708090100mm xy mercury     what is the pressure difference represented by x and y?  a 5  mm of mercury  b 50  mm of mercury  c 90  mm of mercury  d 95  mm of mercury      12 the diagrams show the actual size of the heels of four different lady\u2019s shoes, as seen from  underneath the shoe.    which heel is most  likely to cause damage to floors?    abcd      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  13 which diagram best shows the path of a gas molecule?    abcd      14 a gas storage tank has a fixed volume. the graph shows how the temperature of the gas in the  tank varies with time.    x timetemperature y    at time y, the gas molecules are  a closer together than at time x.  b hitting the sides of the tank harder than at time x. c larger in size than at time x. d moving more slowly than at time x.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13 [turn over  15 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy (heat) is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d       16 a mercury thermometer with no scale is taped to a ruler as shown.     when the thermometer is placed in steam, the mercury level rises to 22.0  cm.    when the thermometer is placed in pure melting ice, the mercury level falls to 2.0  cm.    30  28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 cm  mercuryrulerthermomete r     which temperature is shown by the mercury level in the diagram?  a 6 \u00b0c b 8 \u00b0c c 30  \u00b0c d 40  \u00b0c     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  17 which statement about the transfer of thermal energy is correct?    a convection can occur in air, but only when the air is trapped.  b convection can only occur in a gas.  c radiation cannot occur in air.  d radiation can occur in a vacuum, but convection cannot.      18 the diagram shows a refrigerator.     the cooling unit is placed at the top. the cooling unit cools the air near it.    cooling unit     what happens to the density of the air as it cools, and how does it move?     density of the air movement of the air  a decreases moves down  b decreases stays at the top  c increases moves down  d increases stays at the top    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13 [turn over  19 the diagram shows the surface of water in a ripple tank. a wave is travelling in the direction of  the arrow towards a gap in a barrier.    water surface wavefrontsbarrier     what happens to the wave as it passes through t he gap, and what happens to the shape of the  wavefronts after passing through the gap?     what happens  at the gap shape after passing  through the gap  a diffraction curved  b diffraction straight  c refraction curved  d refraction straight     20 the diagram represents a wave.    xydistancedisplacement 0     how many wavelengths are there between x and y?  a 32 b 1 c 211 d 3      21 which group of electromagnetic radiations is arranged in order of increasing frequency?  a infra-red, visible light, ultraviolet  b \u03b3-rays, x-rays, infra-red  c ultra-violet, visible light, radio waves  d x-rays, radio waves, \u03b3-rays ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  22 an electronic engineer makes devices which can receive television pictures from satellites.    which type of electromagnetic radiation must these devices be able to receive?  a infra-red waves  b microwaves c radio waves  d ultra-violet waves     23 which diagram correctly represents rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?    a b c  objectimagecameradobjectimagecamera object lensimagecameralensobjectimagecamera lens lens     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13 [turn over  24 a tuning fork is marked with the number 320.    320     this indicates the size of the frequency.    what does this mean?  a the length of the tuning fork is 320  mm.  b the note from the tuning fork will last for up to 320  s.  c the sound waves produced by the tuning fork travel at 320  m / s.  d the tuning fork vibrates 320 times every second.     25 some sound from a loudspeaker at p travels directly to q. sound also reaches q after being  reflected from a wall at r.    8 m 8 m10 mwallloudspeaker p qr     the speed of sound is 330  m / s.    what is the difference  in time for a sound to travel from p to q by the two routes?  a \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb 3306s b  \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb 33016s c (6 \u00d7 330) s d (16 \u00d7 330) s      26 an electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals.    why is steel not  suitable as the core of the electromagnet?  a it forms a permanent magnet.  b it has a high density.  c it has a high thermal capacity.  d it is a good conductor of electricity.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  27 an old and expensive steel watch becomes magnetised.    the owner wants to use the watch again. he must demagnetise the watch.    what is the best method to do this?  a heat it until it glows red hot.  b pass direct current though it.  c place it in a plastic bag and put the bag in hot water for several hours.  d place it in a solenoid that carries alternating current and then slowly remove it.      28 three charged balls, p, q and r are suspended by insulating threads. ball p is negatively  charged.    ball q is brought close to ball p.    \u2013pqinsulating thread     ball q is now brought close to ball r.    qr    what are the charges on ball q and on ball r?     ball q ball r  a positive positive  b positive negative  c negative positive  d negative negative     29 which group contains only good electrical conductors?  a air, carbon (graphite), plastic  b air, gold, mercury c carbon (graphite), copper, mercury  d copper, gold, plastic     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13 [turn over  30 a student investigates a circuit that contains  two parallel resistors. the circuit includes meters r,  s and t which are all connected correctly.    resistorsr st     which types of meter are r, s and t?     meter r meter s meter t  a ammeter ammeter ammeter  b ammeter voltmeter voltmeter  c voltmeter ammeter ammeter  d voltmeter voltmeter voltmeter      31 a circuit contains the component shown by the following symbol.        which change would the component detect?    a change in  a light level.  b potential difference.  c radioactivity.  d temperature.    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  32 the diagram shows a circuit which includes a switch and a capacitor.    switchcapacitor p q    what happens to the capacitor when the switch is at p and when it is at q?     switch at p switch at q  a charging charging  b charging discharging  c discharging charging  d discharging discharging     33 the circuit diagram shows a cell connected to three identical lamps x, y and z. all the lamps are  lit.    xz y     lamp y is removed by unscrewing it from its holder.    what happens to lamp z?  a it goes out completely.  b it becomes dimmer but stays lit. c it stays the same brightness.  d it becomes brighter.     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13 [turn over  34 each branch of a domestic circuit often includes a circuit-breaker. this protects the wiring if too  much current flows in the circuit.    in which wire is the circuit-breaker placed and what does it do when it operates?     circuit-breaker in when the circuit-breaker operates it  a live wire disconnects the circuit  b live wire reduces the current to a safe value (not zero)  c neutral wire disconnects the circuit  d neutral wire reduces the current to a safe value (not zero)     35 a student wants to make a transformer to step 12  v down to 6.0  v.    she winds 60 turns of wire around an iron core as shown in the diagram.         soft-iron core 6.0 v a.c. 12 v a.c. primary coil 60 turnssecondary coil     how many turns of wire should she wind on the secondary coil of her transformer?  a 5 b 30 c 60 d 120     36 a toy railway engine is driven around a track by a d.c. electric motor.    how can the speed of the motor be increased?  a use a motor made with fewer turns of wire.  b use a smaller d.c. voltage.  c use a stronger magnet in the motor.  d use the supply with its connections reversed.     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  37 the diagram shows an experiment to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.    nsx ya wire     x and y are joined, in turn, by four wires, each made of a different material.    each wire is then moved quickly downwards between the magnets.    which material will not give rise to an induced current in the wire?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d nylon     38 a beam of cathode rays passes between two charged metal plates.    + \u2013cathode rays     what happens to the beam as it passes between the plates?  a it is deflected into the paper.  b it is deflected out of the paper.  c it is deflected towards the negative plate.  d it is deflected towards the positive plate.     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  39 a radiation detector is placed close to a source of \u03b2-particles.    aluminium sheets of increasing thickness are placed between the source and the detector.    source of \u03b2-particles aluminium sheet detector    eventually a sheet which is 2.0  cm thick is used. the reading on the detector decreases, but does  not fall to zero.    why does the reading not fall to zero?  a some of the \u03b2-particles go round the edges of the sheet.  b the detector is too close to the source.  c there is always some background radiation.  d the sheet can never be thick enough to absorb all the \u03b2-particles.      40 a nuclide is represented by the notation shown.        how many nucleons are there in one atom of this nuclide?  a p b q c p + q d p \u2013 q     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third -party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/m/j/13  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 20 printed pages.  ib13 06_0625_13/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2013  [turn over      *8539725258* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2013     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  1 the diagrams show the readings on a measuring cylinder before and after a small metal cube is  added.    10 9 87654321cm3cm3 10 987654321 before afterwater metal cube     how many more identical cubes can be added to the cylinder, without causing the water to  overflow? do not include the cube already in the cylinder.  a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4    2 a car travels at various speeds during a short journey.   the table shows the distances travelled and the times taken during each of four stages  p, q, r and s.    stage p q r s  distance travelled  / km 1.8 3.6 2.7 2.7  time taken  / minutes 2 2 4 3    during which two stages is the car travelling at the same average speed?  a p and q b p and s c q and r d r and s     3 which person is experiencing an acceleration?  a a driver of a car that is braking to stop at traffic lights  b a passenger in a train that is stationary in a railway station c a shopper in a large store ascending an escalator (moving stairs) at a uniform rate  d a skydiver falling at constant speed towards the earth     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  4 a 1  kg sample of aluminium is stored in a laboratory. in a different laboratory, in the same town,   there is a 1  kg sample of iron.    which quantity must these two samples always  have in common?  a the same density  b the same temperature  c the same volume  d the same weight     5 two blocks of metal x and y hang from spring balances, as shown in the diagrams.    0 1 2 3 4 5 x yn 0 1 2 3 4 5n     what does the diagram show about x and y?  a they have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.  b they have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.  c they have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.  d they have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  6 a car moves along a level road.    the diagram shows all of the horizontal forces acting on the car.    2000  n force from engine500  n friction800  n air resistance     which statement is correct?  a the car is slowing down.  b the car is speeding up.  c the car is moving at a constant speed. d the car is moving backwards.     7 a measuring cylinder has a mass of 120  g when empty.    when it contains 50  cm3 of a liquid, the total mass of the measuring cylinder and the liquid is  160  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 5040  g / cm3  b 4050  g / cm3  c 50120  g / cm3  d 50160  g / cm3     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  8 the diagram shows a hydroelectric system.    water power stationpipereservoir     what are the main energy changes taking place?  a chemical energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy  b electrical energy \u2192 gravitational energy \u2192 kinetic energy  c gravitational energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy  d kinetic energy \u2192 electrical energy \u2192 gravitational energy     9 the diagram shows a force being applied to a lever to lift a heavy weight.    force pivot lever heavy weight     which change would enable the heavy weight to be lifted with a smaller force?  a move the force to the right.  b move the heavy weight to the right. c move the force to the left.  d move the pivot to the left.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  10 a man stands on the ground.    which action will increase the pressure that the man exerts on the ground?  a the man slowly bends his knees.  b the man slowly lies down on the ground. c the man slowly raises his arms. d the man slowly raises one foot off the ground.     11 an escalator (moving stairs) and a lift (elevator) are both used to carry passengers from the same  underground railway platform up to street level.    escalator lift    the escalator takes 20 seconds to carry a man to street level. the useful work done is w. the  useful power developed is p. the lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man to street level.    how much useful work is done by the lift, and how much useful power is developed by the lift?     useful work  done by lift useful power  developed by lift  a more than w less than p  b more than w p  c w less than p  d w p    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  12 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    90 8070605040302010cm vacuum metre rule mercury     which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?  a 12  cm b 74  cm c 86  cm d 100  cm      13 a thermometer bulb is covered by a piece of damp absorbent cloth.    thermomete r airdamp cloth bulb    air at room temperature is blown across the damp cloth.    what happens to the thermometer reading?  a it remains constant.  b it rises.  c it rises then falls.  d it falls.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  14 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy (heat) is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d       15 a gas storage tank has a fixed volume. the graph shows how the temperature of the gas in the  tank varies with time.    x timetemperature y    at time y, the gas molecules are  a closer together than at time x.  b hitting the sides of the tank harder than at time x.  c larger in size than at time x.  d moving more slowly than at time x.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  16 a mercury thermometer with no scale is taped to a ruler as shown.     when the thermometer is placed in steam, the mercury level rises to 22.0  cm.    when the thermometer is placed in pure melting ice, the mercury level falls to 2.0  cm.    30  28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 cm  mercuryrulerthermomete r     which temperature is shown by the mercury level in the diagram?  a 6 \u00b0c b 8 \u00b0c c 30  \u00b0c d 40  \u00b0c     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  17 the diagram shows a refrigerator.     the cooling unit is placed at the top. the cooling unit cools the air near it.    cooling unit     what happens to the density of the air as it cools, and how does it move?     density of the air movement of the air  a decreases moves down  b decreases stays at the top  c increases moves down  d increases stays at the top     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  18 the diagram shows the cross-section of a vacuum flask containing a hot liquid in a cold room.    x and y are points on the inside surfaces of the walls of the flask.    xycold room vacuumhot liquid     how is thermal energy transferred between x and y?  a by conduction and convection  b by conduction only  c by radiation and convection  d by radiation only      19 visible light and \u03b3-rays are both waves.    how may they correctly be described?     visible light \u03b3-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal  b longitudinal transverse  c transverse longitudinal  d transverse transverse     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  20 different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. below are four  statements about parts of the spectrum.    statement 1: infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.  statement 2: radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to earth. statement 3: ultra-violet waves are used for intruder alarms. statement 4: x-rays are used for security checks.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 3 and 4      21 the diagram represents a wave.    xydistancedisplacement 0     how many wavelengths are there between x and y?  a 32 b 1 c 211 d 3      22 which diagram shows how a ray of light could pass through a glass block in air?    a glassb glass glassc glassd  ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  23 which diagram correctly represents rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?    a b c  objectimagecameradobjectimagecamera object lensimagecameralensobjectimagecamera lens lens       24 the diagrams represent two sound waves. the scales in the two diagrams are the same.    displacement time sound wave 1displacement time sound wave 2    which statement describes the waves?  a the waves have different loudness and different pitch.  b the waves have different loudness but the same pitch. c the waves have the same loudness and the same pitch.  d the waves have the same loudness but different pitch.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  25 two soft-iron rods are placed end to end inside a coil which is connected to a battery.    soft-iron rod soft-iron rodcoil     the connections from the battery to the coil are now reversed.    what happens to the soft-iron rods in each case?     battery connections  as shown battery connections  reversed  a rods attract rods attract  b rods attract rods repel  c rods repel rods attract  d rods repel rods repel     26 a student claps once when standing 100  m away from a large wall.    the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    how long after clapping does the student hear an echo?  a 0.30  s b 0.61  s c 1.7  s d 3.3  s     27 which statement about magnetism is correct?  a aluminium is a ferrous metal.  b a steel magnet can be demagnetised by heating it. c the core of an electromagnet is usually made of steel. d the magnetic field lines around a bar magnet are evenly spaced.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  28 three charged balls, p, q and r are suspended by insulating threads. ball p is negatively  charged.    ball q is brought close to ball p.    \u2013pqinsulating thread     ball q is now brought close to ball r.    qr    what are the charges on ball q and on ball r?     ball q ball r  a positive positive  b positive negative  c negative positive  d negative negative     29 which copper wire would have the smallest resistance?    a a long, thick wire  b a long, thin wire  c a short, thick wire  d a short, thin wire     30 the diagram shows an electrical circuit.    p on lm     between which two points must a voltmeter be connected to find the potential difference across the bell?  a l and m b m and n c n and o d o and p   ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  31 which circuit could be used to determine the resistance of the resistor r?    a vd v ac rrv aa a vb r r      32 the circuit shows a battery and four lamps. all the lamps are lit.    one lamp fails and all the lamps go out.    which lamp failed?    a  b  cd      ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  33 the reading on the ammeter in the circuit is 1.0  a.    a second ammeter is connected in the circuit. it also reads 1.0  a.    at which labelled point is it connected?    1.0 a a  b c d a       34 a desk lamp should have a 3  a fuse fitted, but a 13  a fuse has been fitted by mistake.    the lamp is not faulty.    the lamp is switched on. what happens?  a the fuse blows.  b the fuse does not blow but the lamp does not light.  c the lamp draws too much current and the supply cables could melt.  d the lamp works normally.      35 the diagram shows a mains transformer that has an output voltage of 12  v.    240  v a.c. input12 v a.c. outputcoil with 1000 turnssoft-iron core     how many turns of wire are in the secondary coil?  a 12 b 20 c 50 d 20  000    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  36 an electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.    which row shows the effect that a relay uses, together with one application of a relay?     effect used by a relay one application of a relay  a heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  b heating effect changing the voltage of an alternating current  c magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  d magnetic effect changing the voltage of an alternating current      37 in a cathode-ray tube, particles are fired at a screen.    what are these particles?  a \u03b1-particles  b electrons  c neutrons  d protons     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13 [turn over  38 the diagram shows an experiment to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.    nsx ya wire     x and y are joined, in turn, by four wires, each made of a different material.    each wire is then moved quickly downwards between the magnets.    which material will not give rise to an induced current in the wire?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d nylon     39 the diagram represents a carbon atom.    + + +  + + +  + \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013key  neutron  proton  electron      what is the nucleon number (mass number) for this atom?  a 6 b 8 c 14 d 20     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    university of cambridge international examinations is part of t he cambridge assessment group. ca mbridge assessment is the brand name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/m/j/13  40 the graph shows how the count rate on a detector due to a radioactive source changes with time.    4800 2400 0 012345count rate counts per minute time  / hours    what is the count rate at 5.0 hours?  a 960 counts per minute  b 600 counts per minute  c 150 counts per minute  d 0 counts per minute       "
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (sjf/cgw) 58289/4 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *8769716985* physics 0625/21 paper 2  core may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2  3 4 5  6 7 8 9101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use1 some liquid is poured into the measuring cylinder shown in fig. 1.1. 50100150200250cm3 50 fig. 1.1  (a) use fig. 1.1 to estimate the volume of the liquid.        volume =  .. cm3 [1]  (b) on the enlarged part of fig. 1.1, draw the liquid level when another 25 cm3 of liquid  has been added to the measuring cylinder. [1]  (c) explain why it would be more accurate to use a narrower measuring cylinder to measure  liquid volumes like that in fig. 1.1.  .. .. ..[1] [total: 3]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 (a) fig. 2.1 shows a brick. fig. 2.1   500 bricks like the one shown in fig. 2.1 are stacked on a wooden platform, known as  a pallet. the pallet of bricks is to be loaded on to a lorry by means of a fork-lift truck, as  shown in fig. 2.2. palletbricksfork-lift truck fig. 2.2   each brick has a volume of 0.0012 m3 and is made of a material of density 2300 kg / m3.   (i) calculate the mass of one brick.  mass =  ...  kg  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the fork-lift truck can safely lift a load of mass 2 tonnes (2000 kg). the wooden  pallet has a mass of 100 kg.    1. calculate the total mass of the pallet and 500 bricks.  total mass =  .  kg    2. is it safe for the fork-lift truck to lift the total mass of the pallet and 500 bricks?        y e s       n o   [3]  (b) the brick shown in fig. 2.3 has the same dimensions as the brick in fig. 2.1 and is  made of the same material. however, this brick has a hollow in one face. hollow fig. 2.3   complete the following sentences.   (i) the density of the brick in fig. 2.3 is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the density    of the brick in fig. 2.1, because \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026. .   (ii) the mass of the brick in fig. 2.3 is \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 the mass of  the brick in fig. 2.1. [2]    [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows a man pulling a truck of logs at a constant speed along a level path from  p to q against a resistive (frictional) force. plogs truck q fig. 3.1  (a) state the two quantities, and their units, that must be measured in order to calculate the work done on the truck. quantity unit [2]  (b) state the additional quantity needed in order to calculate the useful power of the man.   ..[1]  (c) on another occasion, there is a smaller number of logs in the truck. the resistive force  on the truck is smaller when the truck is pulled from p to q at the same speed as  before.   what effect does this have on   (i) the force exerted by the man, ..   (ii) the work done by the man, ..   (iii) the useful power of the man? .. [3]  (d) what form of energy stored in his body does the man use to pull the truck of logs?  ..[1] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 shows a typical laboratory liquid-in-glass thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 4.1  (a) name a liquid that is likely to be used in this thermometer.  ..[1]  (b) what occupies the space in the tube, between the end of the liquid thread and the end  of the tube?  ..[1]  (c) on fig. 4.1, clearly indicate and label   (i) the ice point,   (ii) the steam point. [2]  (d) the thermometer is moved into a hotter place.   (i) state what happens to the position of the end of the liquid thread.  .. ..   (ii) explain why this happens. .. .. [2]   [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 a family goes on holiday in a car. to stop the journey being boring for the children, every half  an hour they note down the distance they have travelled since they left home. they then plot the graph shown in fig. 5.1. 0100 0123 time since leaving home  / hoursdistance from home  / km 456200300400 fig. 5.1  the first half hour and the last half hour of their journey are on small roads. the rest of the  journey is on major roads.   answer the following questions using information from fig. 5.1.  (a) for how many hours were they travelling on major roads?    time =  hours [1]  (b) how far did they travel   (i) in total,  total distance =    km   (ii) on small roads,  distance on small roads =    km   (iii) on major roads?  distance on major roads =    km [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) they had two refreshment stops whilst on the journey.    on fig. 5.1, clearly mark where they had these stops. [1]  (d) apart from the times when they stopped, during which section of the journey was their  speed slowest? explain your answer. section ..explanation ... ..  [2]  (e) calculate the average speed for the whole journey. y our answer must include the unit.  average speed =  ..[4] [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 a manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas in a container, as shown in  fig. 6.1. oil3 cmcontainer of gas (a) before(b) after fig. 6.1  (a) the appearance of the oil in the manometer before connecting it to the container is shown in fig. 6.1(a).   explain why the oil levels are the same in both limbs of the manometer.  ..  ..[1]  (b) fig. 6.1(b) shows the oil levels after connecting to the container.   by how much does the gas pressure in the container differ from atmospheric pressure?  tick one box.    3 cm of oil greater than atmospheric pressure     3 cm of oil less than atmospheric pressure     6 cm of oil greater than atmospheric pressure     6 cm of oil less than atmospheric pressure  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) when the gas in the container is heated, the pressure rises.   (i) what happens to the oil level    1. in the left-hand limb,  ..    2. in the right-hand limb?  .. [1]   (ii) explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the gas rises when it is heated. .. .. .. .. .. [3] [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use7 the apparatus in fig. 7.1 is producing a visible spectrum from a filament lamp (white light  source). screenglass prism glasslens filament lamp (white light source)visible spectrum xy fig. 7.1  (a) which two things is the lens in fig. 7.1 doing to the light?    tick two boxes.    refracting     reflecting     converging     diverging  [2]  (b) which two things is the prism in fig. 7.1 doing to the light?    tick two boxes.    diffracting         dispersing     focusing     refracting  [2]  (c) which colour light will be seen at point x, at the bottom edge of the visible spectrum?  ..[1]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) a sensitive thermometer shows a small rise in temperature when held at point y , just  above the top edge of the visible spectrum.   (i) which type of electromagnetic radiation is the thermometer detecting?  ..   (ii) suggest why this radiation is present. .. [2] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) fig. 8.1 is a ray diagram of parallel rays passing through a lens. x ap fb y fig. 8.1   (i) state the name given to point f .  ..   (ii) which distance is the focal length of the lens? .. [2]  (b) fig. 8.2 is another drawing of the same lens as in fig. 8.1, with an object ax placed in  front of it. x a p f fig. 8.2     (i) on fig. 8.2, draw two rays to locate the image of point x. label this point z.   (ii) on fig. 8.2, draw in the image of ax, and label it \u201cimage\u201d. [4] [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 (a) which electrical quantity is described as \u201cthe flow of charge\u201d? tick one box.    current     electromotive force     potential difference     p o w e r     resistance  [1]  (b) fig. 9.1 shows a circuit in which switch s is open. the battery and ammeter have  resistances that can be ignored. a 8 1 16 112 v s fig. 9.1   (i) switch s is closed.    calculate    1. the combined resistance of the two resistors,  resistance =  .  \u03c9 [2]    2.  the reading on the ammeter. include the unit.  ammeter reading =  ..[4]   (ii) switch s is opened again.    state, including units,    1 .  the reading on the ammeter,   ammeter reading =  ..[1]    2. the potential difference across the battery.    potential difference =  ..[1] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 the circuit for adjusting the brightness of the lamp in the display panel of a car is shown in  fig. 10.1. panel lampsb abrightness control12 v fig. 10.1  the brightness control is uniformly wound with resistance wire and has a sliding contact s.  (a) state the name of the component used as the brightness control.  ..[1]  (b) state the potential difference across the panel lamp when   (i) s is at end a,  \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 v   (ii) s is at end b.  \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026 v  [2]  (c) describe what happens to the brightness of the lamp as s is moved from a to b.  ..  ..[2] [total: 5]",
            "17": "17 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 (a) fig. 11.1 shows the cross-section of a horizontal wire carrying a current. the wire is  positioned between the poles of a large horseshoe magnet. sncurrent-carrying wire fig. 11.1   the wire is perpendicular to the page and the direction of the current is into the page.   there is a force on the wire due to the current being in a magnetic field. this magnetic  force balances the weight of the wire.   in which direction is the magnetic force on the wire? tick one box.   towards the n pole     towards the s pole     towards the top of the page     perpendicularly out of the page  [1]",
            "18": "18 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (b) two pieces of bare wire are fixed to terminals on a wooden board. a third piece of bare  wire x rests on the other two and is free to move.    this is shown in fig. 11.2. fixed bare wires x fig. 11.2   y ou are given a 6 v battery and a strong horseshoe magnet.   on fig. 11.2, show how you would use the battery and the magnet to make x move  along the two fixed wires. [3] [total: 4]",
            "19": "19 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use12 (a) complete the table below.    in the centre column, state whether the particle is inside or outside the nucleus.   in the right-hand column, state whether the particle has a positive charge or a negative  charge or no charge. particle position charge proton [2]  electron [2] neutron [2]  (b) which of the particles in the above table   (i) is the same as a \u03b2-particle,  ..   (ii) makes up cathode rays?  .. [2]        [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/21/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (nh/sw) 58288/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *1967526888* physics 0625/22 paper 2 core may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 the highlight of super academy\u2019s athletics calendar is the end-of-year cross-country race.  this is a circular race over a distance of 6.0 km. by tradition, it starts and ends below the school clock tower.  student goodrunner is the school\u2019s fastest athlete. his dream is to beat the school record for the race, which is 26 minutes.  at the start of the race, the school clock looks as shown in fig. 1.1. 1211 10 9 8 7 54321 6 fig. 1.1  as student goodrunner crosses the finishing line, the school clock looks as shown in fig. 1.2. 1211 10 9 8 7 54321 6 fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) (i) calculate goodrunner\u2019s race time. show your working.  race time =  . minutes   (ii) did goodrunner beat the record?      yes       no  \uf020 [3]  (b) calculate goodrunner\u2019s average speed during the race.  average speed =  .  m / s [3]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 a piece of stiff cardboard is attached to a plank of wood by two sticky-tape \u201chinges\u201d, as  shown in fig. 2.1. stiff cardboard sticky-tape \u201chinge\u201d plank of wood fig. 2.1  (a) the cardboard in fig. 2.1 is to be lifted by a vertical force f , so that it turns about the  hinges.   (i) what name do we give to the turning effect of a force?  .. [1]   (ii) force f  is to be as small as possible.     on fig. 2.1, show force f, positioned so that it fulfils this requirement. [1]  (b) a box of matches is balanced on the cardboard, as shown in fig. 2.2.supermatches fig. 2.2   (i) the left-hand edge of the cardboard is gradually raised. the box does not slide.    what will eventually happen to the box of matches as the edge is raised? .. [1]   (ii) state where the centre of mass of the box is positioned when this happens. .. .. [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) filing cabinets often have a mechanism that prevents more than one drawer being  opened at a time. fig. 2.3 shows a filing cabinet standing on the floor with the middle drawer open. fig. 2.3   state and explain why it might be dangerous to open the top drawer at the same time as  the middle drawer.  .. .. .. ..[2]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 (a) a spring is hung from a support. a load, hung on the spring, makes it extend.   describe how you would use a ruler to measure the extension.  ..  .. .. .. .. ..[3]  (b) the lengths of the spring are found for loads of various weights. from these lengths, the  extensions are calculated. most of the results are shown in the table below. load / n length / mm extension / mm   0 200   0 1.0 220  20 2.0 249  49 3.0 258 4.0 279  79 5.0  97 6.0 318 118   (i) calculate the two missing values and insert them in the table. [1]   (ii) on fig. 3.1, plot the values of extension against load, but do not draw the line yet. [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 0020406080100120 1 2 3 4 5 6 load  / nextension  / mm fig. 3.1   (iii) a mistake was made with one of the length values.    state the value of the length that is incorrect. .. [1]   (iv) ignoring the value in (iii), draw the best-fit straight line through your points and the  origin. [1]   (v) complete the following sentences.    within the limits of the experiment, when the load doubles, the extension of the spring  . .    the straight-line graph through the origin shows that the extension and the load are. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 shows a typical laboratory liquid-in-glass thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 \u00b0cliquidcapillary tube fig. 4.1  (a) what is seen happening when the thermometer is put into a hot liquid?  .. ..[1]  (b) why does this happen? .. ..[1]  (c) on fig. 4.1, clearly mark with an arrow the point that the liquid will reach when the  thermometer is put in pure boiling water at standard atmospheric pressure. [1]  (d) state why it is necessary for the capillary tube to be very narrow.  .. .. ..[1]  [total: 4]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 (a) the descriptions in the table below each give information about the molecules of a  substance.   in the space alongside each description, write the state of the substance being  described. description state of the substance the molecules are close together but not tightly-packed. they move around amongst each other. the molecules of the substance  exert virtually no force on each other. they move around freely and fill their container. the molecules are tightly-packed.  they have \u201cfixed\u201d positions, about which they can only vibrate. during these vibrations, they exert strong forces on each other.  [2]  (b) which word is used to describe what is happening   (i) when a solid turns to a liquid, without change of temperature,  ..   (ii) when a gas turns to a liquid, without change of temperature, ..   (iii) when more molecules of a liquid are escaping from the surface than are returning  to it?  ..  [3]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 fig. 6.1 shows a converging lens with an object placed to one side of it.  points f1 and f2 are the principal foci of the lens. f2 object f1 fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, mark the focal length of the lens, showing clearly where it starts and finishes.  [2]  (b) one ray has been drawn through the lens from the top of the object.   (i) on fig. 6.1, draw another ray to locate the image of the top of the object. draw and label the image of the whole object. [2]   (ii) state two ways in which this image differs from the object. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 a student has devised the circuit in fig. 7.1 to control the lighting of three lamps, a, b and c. a b c321 4 5 fig. 7.1  more than one switch must be closed in order to light any lamp.  (a) in the table below, put ticks to indicate which switches must be closed in order to light  the lamps. the first row has been completed for you. lamp that is litswitches closed 12345 lamp a only \u2713\u2713\u2713 lamp b only lamp c only  [3]  (b) all the switches are now closed.   which of the lamps light up?  [1] (c) which one switch must be open to ensure that none of the lamps light up? ... [1]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) there is a current in a wire.   (i) what is moving in the wire, to create this current?  ..   (ii) what must be done to the wire in order to cause a current? ..   (iii) in which unit do we measure the current? ..  [3]  (b) fig. 8.1 shows a circuit connected to a 6.0 v power supply. ignore the resistance of the  power supply and the ammeter. a8.0 1 \u0003 6.0 v+ \u2013 4.0 1 \u0003 fig. 8.1   (i) calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.  resistance =  .. \u03c9 [2]   (ii) calculate the current indicated by the ammeter. y our answer must include the unit.  reading =  ..[3]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) the 8.0 \u03c9 resistor is replaced by another resistor with a larger resistance.    without further calculation, state the effect this has on    1. the ammeter reading,  ..    2. the potential difference across the 4.0 \u03c9 resistor.  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) a transformer consists of two coils of insulated wire, wound on a core.   state a suitable material from which to make   (i) the coils, ..   (ii) the core. ..  [2]  (b) a lamp has a normal working voltage of 6.0 v.       the transformer in fig. 9.1 is used to enable the 6.0 v lamp to be lit at normal brightness  using a 240 v mains supply. 240  v mains 800 turnsa b6.0 v lamp fig. 9.1   the primary coil has 800 turns. the secondary coil is connected to terminals a and b.   calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.  number of turns =  ..[3]  (c) a technician wishes to use the transformer in fig. 9.1 to light three 6.0 v lamps.   (i) what would happen to the lamps if the technician connected them directly across  the mains supply?  .. .. [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) on fig. 9.2 below, show how the three lamps should be connected to terminals  a and b, so that they all light with normal brightness    240  v mains 800 turnsa b fig. 9.2  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a bar magnet. ns fig. 10.1   (i) on fig. 10.1, carefully draw the magnetic field pattern around the magnet, ignoring  the earth\u2019s magnetic field.   (ii) on one of your lines, draw an arrowhead to show the direction of the field.  [4]",
            "17": "17 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 10.2 shows a coil wound on a hollow cardboard tube. there is a current in the coil. current cardboard tube fig. 10.2   (i) on fig. 10.2, carefully draw the magnetic field pattern around and through the coil.  y ou do not need to use arrows to show any directions. [2]   (ii) suggest one material that could be inserted into the tube to increase the strength of the magnetic field.  .. [1]   (iii) what name is given to a current-carrying coil used to provide a magnetic field?  tick one box.     capacitor       potentiometer      relay       solenoid   [1]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) the emissions from some radioactive sources are tested.   use the information in the table below to deduce the types of the emissions being  described. passes through a sheet  of paperpasses through 8 mm of  aluminiumtype of emission yes yes yes no no no  [2]  (b) a radioactive sample has a half-life of x seconds.   which one of the following statements is correct? tick one box.       at a time of x seconds after starting measurements, there will be only half as     many atoms in the sample.       at a time of x seconds after starting measurements, there will be only half as     many atoms of the original sort in the sample.    it will take x /2 seconds for all of the atoms in the sample to decay.    it will take 2x seconds for all of the atoms in the sample to decay.  [1]  (c) the number of atoms of a radioactive nuclide in a sample decreases with time, as    shown in fig. 11.1. 01000 01 0 time  / snumber of atoms 20 30 402000300040005000 fig. 11.1",
            "19": "19 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (i) use fig. 11.1 to find the time taken for the number of atoms to decrease from 4000  to 1000.  time = . s   (ii) how many half-lives elapse as the number of atoms decreases from 4000 to 1000? ..   (iii) calculate the half-life of this nuclide.  half-life = . s  [3]  [total: 6] question 12 is on the next page.",
            "20": "20 0625/22/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 (a) atoms are composed of protons, neutrons and electrons.   (i) which of these particles has the smallest mass?  ..   (ii) which two of these types of particle are found in the nucleus? .  and .  [2]  (b) naturally-occurring chlorine gas contains two types of atom.   these are  35 17cl and 3717cl.   (i) what does the number 17 tell us about the nuclei of chlorine atoms?  .. [1]   (ii) which particle does an atom of 37 17cl contain more of than an atom of 3517cl ?  .. [1]   (iii) state the number of electrons in a neutral atom of 1. 35 17cl,  . 2. 3717cl.  .  [2]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (leo/jg) 58286/4 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *3694149821* physics 0625/23 paper 2  core may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2  3 4 5  6 7 8 9101112 total",
            "2": "2 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 small drops of water fall at regular intervals from a leaking tap (faucet). tap (faucet) fig. 1.1  immediately after a drop has fallen, a student puts an empty measuring cylinder under the  tap, to catch the drops.  at the same time, her friend starts a stopwatch.  after 50 drops have fallen, she stops the stopwatch.  fig. 1.2 shows the reading on the stopwatch at the start and finish of this experiment.  minutes seconds02:57 minutes seconds06:14time at start time at finish fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use fig. 1.3 shows the measuring cylinder at the finish. 12345678910cm3 fig. 1.3  (a) (i) for how many seconds did the girl catch drops from the tap?  number of seconds =  ..[3]   (ii) calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.  time interval =  ..  s [2]  (b) (i) what is the total volume of the 50 drops?  volume =  ... cm3   (ii) calculate the volume of one drop.  volume =  ... cm3  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows a simple barometer. the vertical tube is fixed in position. 25 cm 75 cm 5 cmtube liquid reservoir fig. 2.1  (a) suggest which liquid is contained in the barometer.  ..[1]  (b) what occupies the space in the tube, above the liquid? ..[1]  (c) three distances are marked on fig. 2.1.   which distance enables the atmospheric pressure to be deduced?  ..[1]  (d) the atmospheric pressure increases.   state one of the three marked distances that decreases.  ..[1]  (e) the tube is accidentally knocked at the top, so that a small crack is caused at the top of  the tube. air leaks in through the crack.   describe what effect, if any, this has on the level of the liquid in the tube.  ..  .. ..[2]  [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 the arrows on fig. 3.1 indicate the changes between the three states of matter. solid liquid gasmelting condensation fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.1, two of the changes have been labelled. in the empty boxes, label the other  two changes. [2]  (b) in terms of molecules and temperatures, describe what happens during melting.  .. .. .. ..[3]  (c) pure water turns from liquid to solid at 0 \u00b0c.   (i) what name do we give to this temperature? ..   (ii) at what temperature does solid water (ice) turn back to liquid water? ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) explain why metals are able to conduct electricity well, whereas insulators, like plastic,  are very poor conductors.  .. .. .. .. .. ..[4]  (b) a plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth, as shown in fig. 4.1. plastic rod dry cloth fig. 4.1   after this, the rod is held close to a girl\u2019s long hair. the hair is attracted to the rod.   suggest why this happens.  .. .. ..[2]  [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a circuit with two ammeters, x and y . a ay x 5.0 13.0 14.0 v fig. 5.1  (a) name the component that has 5.0 \u03c9 resistance.  ..[1]  (b) (i) calculate the current in the circuit. y our answer must include the unit.  current =  ..[5]   (ii) state the reading on    1. ammeter x, ..    2. ammeter y . ..  [1]  (c) (i) on fig. 5.1 show a voltmeter connected to record the potential difference across the resistor. use the standard symbol for a voltmeter. [2]   (ii) calculate the reading on the voltmeter.  reading =  .. v [1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) a technician has an unmagnetised steel rod.   describe how the technician can permanently magnetise the steel rod.  ..  .. .. .. ..[2]  (b) the technician places two magnets on a bench, in the positions shown in fig. 6.1. nsns fig. 6.1   which of the following describes the magnetic force between the magnets? tick one  box.    attractive      repulsive      no force    [1]  (c) the technician now places an unmagnetised iron rod between the magnets, as shown  in fig. 6.2. ns ns iron rod fig. 6.2   on fig. 6.2, label the n pole and the s pole induced on the iron rod. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) finally, the technician places one magnet and a charged plastic rod on the bench, as  shown in fig. 6.3. ns + charged plastic rod fig. 6.3   which of the following describes the magnetic force between the magnet and the rod?  tick one box.    attractive      repulsive      no force    [1]  [total: 5]  7 waves are either transverse or longitudinal.  write either \u201ctransverse\u201d or \u201clongitudinal\u201d in the space alongside each of the following descriptions. description type of wave this type of wave has vibrations at right angles to the direction in which the wave energy is travelling. this type of wave has vibrations along the direction  in which the wave energy is travelling. a sound wave is an example of this type of wave.a ripple on the surface of water is an example of  this type of wave.  [3]  [total: 3]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) an electric bell hangs from flexible wires inside a glass bell-jar, as shown in fig. 8.1. to battery electric bell bell-jar to vacuumpump fig. 8.1   (i) when air is present in the bell-jar, the electric bell can be heard ringing clearly.    what properties of sound does this observation illustrate? tick the box alongside  any appropriate answer.     sound travels through air        sound travels through glass       sound travels faster than light       sound travels infinitely fast   [2]   (ii) as the vacuum pump removes the air from the bell-jar, the sound becomes quieter.   eventually the sound cannot be heard at all, even though the bell can still be seen to be working.    suggest what property of sound this observation demonstrates.  .. .. [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 8.2 illustrates a quarry where rock blasting is being carried out. p xyz danger - blasting fig. 8.2   an engineer at p sees the blast of an explosion at x, and after a short delay he hears  two bangs separated by a very short interval.   (i) explain why the engineer hears two bangs.  .. .. .. .. [3]   (ii) the distance px is 195 m and the short delay between seeing the blast and hearing  the first bang is 0.60 s.    calculate the speed of sound.  speed =  .  m / s [3]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) the transformer in fig. 9.1 is being used in an attempt to light a lamp using a 120 v a.c. mains supply. the lamp is designed for use in a country where the mains supply is 240 v a.c. 150 turns 300 turns lamp120  v  a.c. fig. 9.1   (i) 1. calculate the voltage across the lamp in this arrangement.  voltage =  .. v [3]    2. comment on the brightness of the lamp in this arrangement.  ...  ... ...[2]   (ii) the transformer is reversed, so that the 300 turn coil is connected to the 120 v a.c.  supply and the 150 turn coil is connected to the lamp.    comment on the brightness of the lamp in this arrangement. explain your answer.  .. .. .. [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) in the national grid system of electrical energy transmission, a transformer links the  power station to the transmission cables, as shown in fig. 9.2. power station transformertransmission cables fig. 9.2   (i) why is a transformer used here?  .. .. [1]   (ii) what has to be done at the other end of the transmission cables, before connection  is made to a factory in a town?  .. .. [1]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 fig. 10.1 illustrates the energy into and out of a machine. input energy  i machineuseful energy output  u wasted energy  w fig. 10.1  (a) write an equation that links i, u and w.  [1]  (b) which of these three quantities needs to be as low as possible in order to keep the  efficiency of the machine as high as possible?  ..[1]  (c) the machine gets older and parts of it become worn.   suggest what is likely to happen, for the same input energy i, to   (i) the useful energy output u,  ..   (ii) the wasted energy w,  ...   (iii) the efficiency of the machine.  ...  [3]  [total: 5] ",
            "15": "15 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 (a) the \u03b1-particle source in fig. 11.1 is placed 1 cm from a radiation detector connected to  a ratemeter. the ratemeter gives a count-rate reading of 600 counts / min. 6 0  0 detectorratemeter _\u2013source1 cm fig. 11.1   the source is then moved to a distance of 50 cm from the detector and the count-rate  reading on the ratemeter becomes 25 counts / min.   predict what the count-rate will be when the source is moved to a distance of 100 cm  from the detector. explain your answer. count-rate =  .. counts / minexplanation  .. ..[2]  (b) fig. 11.2 shows aluminium being rolled into a thin sheet suitable for cooking foil.  \u03b2-particles are being used to monitor and control the thickness of the foil. aluminium rollers aluminium foilsource of `-particles detector fig. 11.2   (i) an adjustment to the rollers is made and the foil becomes thicker.    what happens to the rate at which \u03b2-particles are detected?  .. [1]   (ii) assuming that all suitable safety precautions are taken, explain    1. why \u03b1-particles would not be suitable in this application,  ...  ...    2. why \u03b3-rays would not be suitable in this application.  ... ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use12 the nucleus of uranium-238 is represented in nuclide notation as 238 92u.  (a) (i) state the meaning of the nucleon number of a nuclide.  .. ..   (ii) state the value of the nucleon number of  238 92u.  ..  [2]  (b) a nucleus of 238 92u decays by emitting an \u03b1-particle. it becomes a nucleus of  thorium (th).   (i) state    1. the nucleon number of an \u03b1-particle,  ...   2. the proton number of an \u03b1-particle.  ..  [2]   (ii) in nuclide notation, the thorium nucleus formed is written as  x yth.    state the values of    1. x  .. ,    2. y  .. .  [2]  (c) (i) how many electrons are to be found in a neutral atom of  238 92u? ...   (ii) where in the atom are these electrons to be found?  ..  [2]  [total: 8] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (sjf/cgw) 58285/4 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *6422850785* physics 0625/31 paper 3  extended may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use 1 23456789 1011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 (a) define density.  .. ..[1]  (b) the density of aluminium is 2.70 g / cm 3. the thickness of a rectangular sheet of  aluminium foil varies, but is much less than 1 mm.   a student wishes to find the average thickness. she obtains the following measurements.   mass of sheet = 60.7 g    length of sheet = 50.0 cm   width of sheet = 30.0 cm   calculate the student\u2019s values for  (i) the volume of the sheet,  volume =  ..[2]  (ii) the average thickness of the sheet.  thickness =  ..[2] (c) another student, provided with a means of cutting the sheet, decides to find its average  thickness using a single measuring instrument. assume the surfaces of the sheet are perfectly smooth.   (i) name a measuring instrument she could use.  .. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) describe the procedure she should follow to obtain an accurate value of the  average thickness of the sheet.     details of how to read the instrument are not required.  ..  .. .. .. .. .. [3] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 (a) underline the vectors in the following list of quantities.     density      energy      force      mass      velocity      volume [2]  (b) a small metal ball is projected into the air with a velocity of 40 m / s vertically upwards.    the graph in fig. 2.1 shows how the velocity changes with time until the ball reaches its  maximum height. 40 20velocity m / s 0 \u201340\u2013201.0 0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 time  / s fig. 2.1   use the graph to find,   (i) the time at which the ball reaches its maximum height,  time =  ..[1]    (ii) the deceleration of the ball,  deceleration =  ..[2]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) the maximum height reached by the ball.  maximum height =  ..[2]  (c) on fig. 2.1, add a line to the graph to show how the velocity of the ball changes after it  reaches its maximum height. y our line should extend to time 6.0 s. [1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows the descent of a sky-diver from a stationary balloon. 2000  m 500  mparachutesky-diver fig. 3.1 (not to scale)  the sky-diver steps from the balloon at a height of 2000 m and accelerates downwards.   his speed is 52 m / s at a height of 500 m.   he then opens his parachute. from 400 m to ground level, he falls at constant speed.  (a) the total mass of the sky-diver and his equipment is 92 kg.   (i) calculate, for the sky-diver,    1. the loss of gravitational potential energy in the fall from 2000 m to 500 m,  loss of gravitational potential energy =  ..[2]    2. the kinetic energy at the height of 500 m.  kinetic energy =  ..[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the kinetic energy at 500 m is not equal to the loss of gravitational potential energy.  explain why there is a difference in the values.  .. .. .. [1]  (b) state    (i) what happens to the air resistance acting on the sky-diver during the fall from  2000 m to 500 m,  .. [1]   (ii) the value of the air resistance during the fall from 400 m to ground.  air resistance =  ..[1]       [total: 7] ",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 shows a cross-section of a double-walled glass vacuum flask, containing a hot liquid.  the surfaces of the two glass walls of the flask have shiny silvered coatings. vacuum hot liquidsilvered surfaces fig. 4.1  (a) explain   (i) why the rate of loss of thermal energy through the walls of the flask by conduction  is very low,   .. .. .. ..   (ii) why the rate of loss of thermal energy through the walls of the flask by radiation  is  very low. .. .. .. .. [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) suggest, with reasons, what must be added to the flask shown in fig. 4.1 in order to  keep the liquid hot.   .. .. .. .. ..[3] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 (a)  on a hot day, sweat forms on the surface of a person\u2019s body and the sweat evaporates.    explain, in terms of the behaviour of molecules,   (i) the process of evaporation, .. .. ..   (ii) how this process helps the body to cool down. .. .. .. .. .. .. [3]  (b) the temperature of a person of mass 60 kg falls from 37.2 \u00b0c to 36.7 \u00b0c.   (i) calculate the thermal energy lost from the body. the average specific heat capacity  of the body is 4000 j / (kg \u00b0c).  thermal energy lost =  ..[2]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the cooling of the body was entirely due to the evaporation of sweat.     calculate the mass of sweat which evaporated. the specific latent heat of  vaporisation of sweat is 2.4 \u00d7 106 j / kg.  mass =  ..[2] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) (i) define pressure.  .. [1]   (ii) a closed box contains a gas.     explain, in terms of molecules, how the gas exerts a pressure on the walls of the  box.   .. .. .. .. .. [3]     (b) fig. 6.1 shows a flask connected to a pump and also to a manometer containing mercury.  250  mmmanometer flaskto pump fig. 6.1   the right-hand tube of the manometer is open to the atmosphere.    the pump has been operated so that the mercury levels differ, as shown, by 250 mm.  the density of mercury is 13 600 kg / m3.   (i) calculate the pressure, in pa, due to the 250 mm column of mercury.  pressure =  ..[2]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the pressure of the atmosphere is 1.02 \u00d7 105 pa.     calculate the pressure of the air in the flask.  pressure =  ..[1] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 shows the principal axis pq of a converging lens and the centre line xy of the lens.  p q yx fig. 7.1   an object 2.0 cm high is placed 2.0 cm to the left of the lens. the converging lens has a  focal length of 3.0 cm. ",
            "15": "15 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) on fig. 7.1, draw a full-scale diagram to find the distance of the image from the lens,  and the height of the image.    distance of image from the lens =  .. height of image =  .. [5]  (b) state and explain whether the image in  (a) is real or virtual.  .. ..[1]  [total: 6]     ",
            "16": "16 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 (a)  state the range of frequencies of sound which can be heard by a healthy human ear.  ..[1]  (b) compressions and rarefactions occur along the path of sound waves.    state, in terms of the behaviour of molecules, what is meant by  (i) a compression,  .. ..   (ii) a rarefaction. .. ..  [2]  (c) state the effect on what is heard by a listener when there is   (i) an increase in the amplitude of a sound, .. [1]   (ii) a decrease in the wavelength of a sound. .. [1]  (d) a student carries out an experiment to find the speed of sound in air.    he stands facing a high cliff and shouts. he hears the echo 1.9 s later.   he then walks 250 m further away from the cliff and shouts again, hearing the echo 3.5 s  later.    calculate the speed of sound given by this experiment.  speed =  ..[3] [total: 8] ",
            "17": "17 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows the circuit that operates the two headlights and the two sidelights of a car.  12 v 4.0 1 4.0\u00031 12\u00031 12\u00031a1 2 3 fig. 9.1  two of the lamps have resistances of 4.0 \u03c9 when lit. the other two lamps have resistances of  12 \u03c9 when lit. switch a can be connected to positions 1, 2 or 3.   (a) state what happens when switch a is connected to   (i) position 1,  .   (ii) position 2,  .   (iii) position 3.  . [1]  (b) (i) state the potential difference across each lamp when lit.  potential difference =  ..[1]   (ii) calculate the current in each 12 \u03c9 lamp when lit.  current =  ..[2]  (c)  show, with reasons for your answer, which type of lamp, 4.0 \u03c9 or 12 \u03c9, has the higher  power.  .. .. .. ..[3] [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows the cross-section of a wire carrying a current into the plane of the paper. fig. 10.1   on fig. 10.1, sketch the magnetic field due to the current in the wire. the detail of your  sketch should suggest the variation in the strength of the field. show the direction of the  field with arrows. [3]  (b)  fig. 10.2 shows part of a model of a d.c. motor. as nb c daxis x y fig. 10.2   a loop of wire abcd is placed between the poles of a magnet. the loop is free to rotate  about the axis shown. there is a current in the loop in the direction indicated by the arrows.   (i) on fig. 10.2, draw arrows to show the directions of the forces acting on side ab and on side cd of the loop. [1]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) with the loop in the position shown in fig. 10.2, explain why the forces on ab and  cd cause the loop to rotate about the axis.  .. .. .. .. [1]   (iii) the ends x and y of the loop are connected to a battery using brushes and a split- ring commutator.     state why a split-ring commutator is used.  ..  .. .. .. [2] [total: 7] turn over for question 11",
            "20": "20 0625/31/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.  every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance  have unwittingly been  included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of  university of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) complete the following statements.   (i) an \u03b1-particle consists of  .  .   (ii) a \u03b2-particle consists of  ...  . [3]  (b) as \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles pass through a gas, molecules of the gas become ionised.    explain what is meant by the ionisation of a gas molecule.  ..  ..[1]  (c)  fig. 11.1 shows a beam of \u03b1-particles and a beam of \u03b2-particles in a vacuum. the  beams are about to enter a region in which a very strong magnetic field is acting. the direction of the magnetic field is into the page. _-particles uniform magnetic field`-particles fig. 11.1   (i) suggest why the paths of the particles in the magnetic field are curved.  .. [1]   (ii) sketch the paths of both types of particle in the magnetic field.  [3] [total: 8]"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (sjf/sw) 58287/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *5638748962* physics 0625/32 paper 3  extended may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2 3  4 5  6  7 8 91011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 fig. 1.1 shows a side view of a large tank in a marine visitor attraction.  msea-water viewing panel tank fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  the tank is 51 m long and 20 m wide. the sea-water in the tank is 11 m deep and has a  density of 1030 kg / m3.  (a) calculate the mass of water in the tank.  mass =  . [3]  (b) the pressure at point m, halfway down the large viewing panel, is 60 kpa more than atmospheric pressure.    calculate the depth of m below the surface of the water.  depth =  . [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the viewing panel is 32.8 m wide and 8.3 m high.    calculate the outward force of the water on the panel. assume that the pressure at m is  the average pressure on the whole panel.  force =  . [2]   [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows the extension-load graph for a spring.  00 loadextensionp fig. 2.1  point p is the limit of proportionality.  (a) (i) name the law obeyed by the spring from the origin to p .  .. [1]   (ii) describe two features of the graph which show that the law is obeyed.1.  ... 2.  ... [2]     (b) on fig. 2.1, sketch a possible continuation of the graph when the spring is loaded beyond the limit of proportionality.  [1]  [total: 4]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3  water molecules evaporate from a puddle and escape to the atmosphere. water molecules  also escape to the atmosphere from water boiling in a kettle.  (a) state two ways in which evaporation differs from boiling.  1.  .. ..2.  .. .. [2]  (b) this part of the question is about an experiment to determine the specific latent heat of  vaporisation of water.   (i) suggest apparatus that will provide thermal energy (heat) and state the readings needed to determine the amount of thermal energy provided. apparatus  . ..readings  ... .. .. [2]   (ii) suggest apparatus required for determining the mass of liquid vaporised and state  the readings needed to determine that mass. apparatus  . ..readings  ... .. .. [2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 a rocket, initially at rest on the ground, accelerates vertically.   it accelerates uniformly until it reaches a speed of 900 m / s after 30 s.   after this period of uniform acceleration, the rocket engine cuts out. during the next 90 s, the  upward speed of the rocket decreases uniformly to zero.   (a) on fig. 4.1, plot a speed-time graph for the rocket for the first 120 s of its flight. time  / sspeed m / s fig. 4.1  [4]  (b) using the graph,   (i) calculate the acceleration during the first 30 s,  acceleration =  ..[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) determine the height reached by the rocket after 120 s.  height reached =  ..[2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows an aerial view of wavefronts passing from the open sea into an outer  harbour. direction of wave travelouter harbour wall outer harbouropen sea inner harbourinner harbour wall fig. 5.1   (i) the wavefronts in the outer harbour are curving at their ends.     name the process that is occurring at the entrance to the harbour.  .. [1]   (ii) on fig. 5.1, carefully complete the wave pattern as the wavefronts progress through  the outer harbour and into the inner harbour. show the rest of the wave pattern in the outer harbour and three wavefronts in the inner harbour. [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 5.2 shows an aerial view of wavefronts in deep water approaching a region of  shallow water where they travel more slowly. direction of wave traveldeep water shallow water interface fig. 5.2   (i) name the process that occurs as the wavefronts pass from deep to shallow water.   .. [1]   (ii) complete fig. 5.2 to show possible positions of the five wavefronts in the shallow  water.  [2] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows two rays from a point object p incident on a water surface.    an observer sees the image of p produced by reflection at the surface of the water. p air waterwater surface fig. 6.1   on fig. 6.1, draw the reflected rays and complete the diagram to locate the position of  the image. label the position of the image i.  [2]   (b) fig. 6.2 shows two rays from a point object q incident on another water surface.    an observer sees the image of q produced by refraction at the surface of the water. qair waterwater surface fig. 6.2   on fig. 6.2, draw possible refracted rays and complete the diagram to locate a possible  position of the image. label the position of the image j.    y ou do not need to calculate any angles. [2] ",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the refractive index of water is 1.33.    calculate the critical angle.  critical angle =  ..[2]  (d) describe, with a diagram, a medical use of optical fibres.  .. .. .. .. ..[3]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use7  the solar charger shown in fig. 7.1 is used to charge portable electronic devices in a part of  the world without any other electricity supply. solar panels fig. 7.1  the dimensions of each of the solar panels are 0.25 m \u00d7 0.20 m. the solar power incident on 1.0 m 2 of flat ground in this part of the world is 260 w.  (a) calculate the total solar power incident on the two panels of the charger.  solar power =  . [2]  (b) the output of the charger is 0.95 a at 20 v.    calculate the efficiency of the charger.  efficiency =  ..[3]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) three devices a, b and c are connected together and then connected to the 20 v  charger. the potential difference (p.d.) across a is measured as 14 v, across b it is 14 v and across c it is 6 v.    complete fig. 7.2 to show the arrangement of the devices connected to the charger.  draw devices b and c as similar boxes to the box shown for device a. device aoutput from charger 20 v fig. 7.2 [2]  (d) two other devices, d and e, have resistances of 20 \u03c9 and 30 \u03c9.   calculate the total resistance of d and e when they are connected in parallel.   total resistance =  ..[2] [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows a vertical current-carrying wire passing through a card at point x. current directioncardz y x fig. 8.1  (a) on fig. 8.1, sketch on the card the pattern of the magnetic field produced by the current  in the wire. the detail of your sketch should suggest the variation in the strength of the field. show the direction of the field with arrows. [3]  (b) using your knowledge of investigating the magnetic field around a bar magnet, suggest  an experiment or experiments to confirm that you have drawn the correct pattern and direction in (a).   .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. [4]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) a second current-carrying wire is inserted vertically through the card at y .    suggest why there is now a force on the wire at x.  ..  .. .. ..[2]  (d) the wire at y is moved to z. it still carries the same current.    tick the appropriate box to indicate whether the force on the wire at x is now smaller,  greater or the same.   smaller    greater    same  [1] [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use9 there is an alternating current in the primary coil of the transformer shown in fig. 9.1.  soft-iron core primary coilsecondary coil fig. 9.1  (a) tick one box in each line of the table that best describes the magnetic field in the core  and the magnetic field in the secondary coil. magnetic field continually  increasing and  decreasingcontinually  increasingcontinually  decreasingzero soft-iron core secondary coil [2]  (b) state and explain the effect on the output from the secondary coil of   (i) increasing the voltage across the primary coil,output  ...explanation  ... .. .. .. [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) replacing the alternating current in the primary coil with direct current from a battery. output  ...explanation  ... .. .. .. [2] [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10  there are two stable, naturally occurring isotopes of hydrogen.   common hydrogen (hydrogen-1) has a proton number of 1 and a nucleon number of 1.  hydrogen-2 (deuterium) has a nucleon number of 2.   there is also a radioactive isotope of hydrogen called tritium (hydrogen-3), with a nucleon  number of 3.  (a) complete the table for neutral atoms of these isotopes. hydrogen-1 hydrogen-2  (deuterium)hydrogen-3  (tritium) number of protons  number of neutrons number of electrons  [3]  (b) two samples of tritium are stored in aluminium containers of different thickness.    sample 1 is in a container of thickness 0.5 mm and radiation can be detected coming  through the container.    sample 2 is in a container of thickness 5 mm and no radiation comes through.   (i) state the type of radiation coming through the container of sample 1.  .. [1]   (ii) explain your answer to (b)(i). .. .. .. .. [2]  (c) under conditions of extremely high temperature and pressure, as in the interior of the  sun, hydrogen nuclei can join together.   (i) name this process.   .. [1]   (ii) state whether energy is released, absorbed or neither released nor absorbed  during this reaction.  .. [1]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) when a nucleus of a certain isotope of uranium is bombarded by a suitable neutron, it  splits into two smaller nuclei and energy is released.   name this process.  ..[1] [total: 9] turn over for question 11",
            "20": "20 0625/32/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.  every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance  have unwittingly been  included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university  of cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 fig. 11.1 shows the main components of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. khdwhu fdwkrgh <\u0010sodwhv ;\u0010sodwhvydfxxpioxruhvfhqw vfuhhq dqrgh v\\vwhpjulgehdp fig. 11.1   (a) (i) name the particles that are in the beam.  .. [1]   (ii) explain the purpose of the heater.  .. [1]   (iii) explain why there is a vacuum in the tube. .. .. [1]  (b) when no potential difference (p.d.) is applied across either the x-plates or the y -plates,  a spot is seen in the centre of the fluorescent screen.   describe the p.d.s applied to the x-plates and to the y -plates when the spot moves up  and down in the centre of the screen.  x-plates .. .. y -plates   [2] [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nf/cgw) 58581/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9180479009* physics 0625/33 paper 3  extended may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.for examiner\u2019s use  1  2 3  4 5  6  7 8 91011 total",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 a train is at rest in a railway station. at time t = 0, the train starts to move forwards with an  increasing speed until it reaches its maximum speed at time t = 48 s.  fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the first 48 s of the journey. 40 30 20 06 0 40 80 time  / sspeed m / s 120 10020 010 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) state how the graph shows that, during the first 48 s of the journey, the acceleration  of the train is constant.  .. . [1]   (ii) calculate the acceleration of the train during the first 48 s of the journey.  acceleration =  .. [2]  (b) after time t = 48 s, the train continues at its maximum speed for another 72 s.   (i) on fig. 1.1, sketch the speed-time graph for the next 72 s of the journey. [1]   (ii) determine the total distance travelled by the train in the 120 s after it starts moving.  distance =  .. [3]  [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 water is stored in a reservoir at an average vertical height of 350 m above the turbines of a  hydroelectric power station.  during a 7.0 hour period, 1.8 \u00d7 106 m3 of water flows down from the reservoir to the turbines.  (a) the density of water is 1000 kg / m3.   for this 7.0 hour period, calculate   (i) the mass of water that flows from the reservoir to the turbines,  mass =  .. [2]  (ii) the gravitational potential energy transformed as the water flows to the turbines,  energy =  .. [2]  (iii) the maximum possible average output power.  power =  .. [2] (b) a hydroelectric power station generates electricity from a renewable energy source.   (i) explain what is meant, in this context, by renewable.  .. . [1]   (ii) state two other renewable energy sources.1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 on a windy day, a parachutist of mass 85 kg jumps from an aeroplane.  fig. 3.1 shows the parachutist falling through the air at a constant vertical velocity of 8.4 m / s  downwards. 8.4 m / s fig. 3.1  (a) distinguish between speed and velocity.  ..  . [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) as the parachutist falls, the wind is moving him towards the right of the diagram, at a  horizontal velocity of 6.3 m / s.   (i) on fig. 3.1, draw an arrow to show the horizontal velocity of the parachutist. [1]   (ii) on the grid below, draw a vector diagram to determine graphically the size and direction of the resultant velocity of the parachutist.  size =  ...  direction =  ... [4]   (iii) calculate the kinetic energy of the parachutist.  kinetic energy =  .. [3]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 a large crane has a mass of 8500 kg. fig. 4.1 shows the crane on a muddy building-site. lifting-arm axle caterpillar trackshook fig. 4.1  (a) calculate the weight of the crane.  weight =  .. [1]  (b) the crane rests on two caterpillar tracks each of which has a contact area with the  ground of 3.4 m2.   (i) calculate the pressure that the crane exerts on the ground.  pressure =  .. [2]   (ii) as the crane driver walks towards the crane, he starts to sink into the mud. he lays a wide plank of wood on the mud and he walks along the plank.    explain why he does not sink into the mud when he walks along the plank.  .. .. . [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) when the crane lifts a heavy load with its hook, the load exerts a moment on the  lifting-arm about the axle.   (i) explain what is meant by moment of a force.  ..  . [1]   (ii) despite the moment exerted on the lifting-arm, the crane remains in equilibrium.    state the two conditions required for any object to be in equilibrium.1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a saucepan of boiling water on an electric hotplate. fig. 5.1  as time passes, thermal energy (heat) is constantly supplied to the water but its temperature  remains at 100 \u00b0c.  (a) state two ways in which boiling differs from evaporation. 1.  . ..2.  . ..  [2]  (b) explain, in terms of the water molecules, what happens to the thermal energy supplied  to the water as it boils.  .. .. .. . [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) describe an experiment to measure the specific latent heat of steam. y ou may include a  diagram.  ..  .. .. .. .. . [4]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) (i) state two ways in which the molecular structure of a gas differs from the molecular  structure of a liquid. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]   (ii) compressibility is the ease with which a substance can be compressed.    state and explain, in terms of the forces between the molecules, how the  compressibility of a gas differs from that of a liquid.  .. .. . [2]  (b) fig. 6.1 shows a weather balloon being inflated by helium from a cylinder. helium fig. 6.1   (i) the helium that inflates the balloon had a volume of 0.035 m3 at a pressure of  2.6 \u00d7 106 pa, inside the cylinder.    the pressure of the helium in the balloon is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa and its temperature is the  same as it was when in the cylinder.    calculate the volume occupied by the helium in the balloon.  volume =  .. [3]   (ii) as the balloon rises up through the atmosphere, the temperature of the helium  decreases.    state the effect of this temperature change on the helium molecules.  .. . [1]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use7 the frequency of the monochromatic light produced by a laser is 4.7 \u00d7 1014 hz.  a ray of light from the laser passes from a vacuum, where the speed of light is 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s,  into a fibre-optic cable.  (a) state   (i) what is meant by monochromatic,  ..  . [1]   (ii) the frequency of light from the laser in the fibre-optic cable. . [1]  (b) the speed of light in the fibre-optic cable is 2.0 \u00d7 10 8 m / s.   calculate  (i) the refractive index of the material from which fibre-optic cable is made,  refractive index =  .. [2]  (ii) the wavelength of light from the laser in the fibre-optic cable.  wavelength =  .. [2] [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows a small, uncharged copper sphere suspended from a nylon thread, and a  plastic rod being rubbed with a woollen cloth. woollen clothplastic rodnylon thread coppersphere fig. 8.1  the rod becomes negatively charged as it is rubbed.  (a) explain, in terms of electrons, why copper is a conductor but nylon is an insulator.  .. .. . [2]  (b) describe how the negatively charged rod may be used to induce a positive charge on  the copper sphere.  .. .. .. . [3]  (c) the copper sphere is given a positive charge, as shown in fig. 8.2. + fig. 8.2   on fig. 8.2, draw arrows to indicate the direction and pattern of the electric field that  surrounds the positively charged sphere. [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 in a laboratory experiment, the isotope uranium-238 is used as a source of \u03b1-particles.  (a) state   (i) one feature of uranium-238 nuclei that is the same for the nuclei of other uranium  isotopes,  . [1]   (ii) one feature of uranium-238 nuclei that is different for the nuclei of other uranium  isotopes.  . [1]  (b) fig. 9.1 shows the \u03b1-particles from the uranium source being directed at a very thin gold  foil, in a vacuum. thin gold foil uranium source _-particlesvacuummoveable _-particledetector fig. 9.1   to investigate the scattering of \u03b1-particles, a detector is moved to different positions  around the very thin gold foil and measurements are recorded.   describe the results from this scattering experiment and explain what they show about  the structure of atoms.  .. .. .. .. .. .. . [4]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 fig. 10.1 is the symbol for a nand gate with inputs a and b. input a input boutput fig. 10.1  (a) input a and input b can be set to 1 (high) or to 0 (low).   complete the table below to give the outputs for this nand gate. input  ainput boutput 00 011011  [1]  (b) the two inputs of the nand gate are joined together and connected to an input c, as  shown in fig. 10.2. input c output fig. 10.2   (i) determine the output of this nand gate when    1. input c is set to 0,  output =  ...    2. input c is set to 1.  output =  ...  [1]   (ii) state the name of the logic gate that behaves in the same way as the nand gate in  fig. 10.2.  . [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) a circuit combines three nand gates.   the inputs to the circuit are p and q, as shown in fig. 10.3. p qtr s fig. 10.3   points r, s and t in the circuit are also labelled.   input p is set to 0 and input q is set to 1.  determine the logic states (0 or 1) of points r, s and t. point r =  ..  point s =  ..  point t =  ..  [2]  [total: 5] turn over for question 11",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 a remote ski lodge receives 18 kw of electric power from a 120 v supply.  (a) calculate   (i) the current that the ski lodge draws from the supply,  current =  .. [2]   (ii) the electrical energy supplied to the ski lodge in 30 minutes.  energy =  .. [2] (b) the power supply to the ski lodge is from a nearby transformer that is connected to  long-distance transmission cables. the voltage of the transmission cables is very much larger than 120 v.   explain why energy losses in the transmission cables are lower when the voltage is  high.  .. .. .. .. . [3]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (rw/cgw) 58672/4 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *1552315196* physics 0625/51 paper 5  practical test may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 the aim of this experiment is to investigate the stability of a block.  carry out the following instructions referring to figs. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3.     a db cd hw  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) measure and record the height h, width w and depth d of your transparent block.  h =  ..  w =  ..  d =  ..  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) place the block in the space below with the smallest face in contact with the paper.  carefully draw round the outline, as shown in fig. 1.2. remove the block from the paper.   (i) label the corners of your outline a, b, c and d, as shown in fig. 1.2.   (ii) on your diagram, draw a line ac .   (iii) measure and record the angle \u03b1 between lines ad and ac .  \u03b1 =  ..[1]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) place the block on the paper towel at the edge of the bench, as shown in fig. 1.3. 102030 40 50 60 70 80 90100110120130140150160170 180 0 protractorbencha db cpaper towel     fig. 1.3   (i) hold the protractor next to face abcd of the block as shown in fig. 1.3. gently  push the top of the block (as indicated in fig. 1.3) until the block tips over.   (ii) record the angle \u03b8, between side bc of the block and the vertical line on the  protractor, when the block just starts to tip over.  \u03b8 =  ..[1]   (iii) repeat steps (i) and (ii) a suitable number of times for this experiment. record the readings in the space below.  [2]   (iv) calculate the average  \u03b8av of all your values for \u03b8. show your working. give your  value of \u03b8av to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  \u03b8av =  ..[2]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) a student suggests that \u03b8av should be equal to \u03b1.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference  to your results. statement  .justification  ... .. ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the scale of a thermometer.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 2.1 and 2.2.  (a) record the value of room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer.  \u03b8r =  ..[1]  (b) y ou are provided with a supply of hot water. pour 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker.  place the thermometer into the beaker of hot water, as shown in fig. 2.1.     thermometer water     fig. 2.1  (c) (i) when the thermometer reading stops rising, measure the temperature \u03b8 of the  water in the beaker and immediately start the stopclock. record \u03b8 in table 2.1 at  time t = 0 s.   (ii) record in the table the time t and the temperature \u03b8 of the water every 30 s until  you have a total of seven readings. [3]     table 2.1     t / \u03b8 / d /",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) remove the thermometer from the beaker and the clamp.   (i) measure and record in the table the distance d from the bottom end of your  thermometer to the position of the first temperature reading in the table. fig. 2.2  shows a measurement of d being made for a temperature of 81 \u00b0c. y ou must use your own temperature reading and thermometer.  010 -102030405060708090100110\u00b0cd     fig. 2.2   (ii) measure d for all the other temperature readings. record your values in the table.  [1]   (iii) complete the column headings in the table. [1] question 2 continues on the next page.",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (e) a student carried out this experiment and plotted a graph of \u03b8 against d. a sketch of the  graph obtained is shown in fig. 2.3.     80 0\u01a8 / \u00b0c d / cm 0     fig. 2.3   (i) explain how the graph line shows that \u03b8 is not directly proportional to d.  ..  ..   (ii) suggest why, when \u03b8 = 0 \u00b0c, the value of d is not zero.  .. .. .. ..  [2]   (iii) describe briefly the method you would use to determine, as accurately as possible,  the distance between the 1 \u00b0c marks on the thermometer.  .. .. .. .. [2]  [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a wire.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you.     va acbpower supply resistance wirex     fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure, and record in table 3.1, the current i in the circuit and the  potential difference v across a length x = 10.0 cm of the wire ab. switch off.   (ii) calculate the resistance r of 10.0 cm of the wire ab, using the equation r = v i.  record this value of r in the table.   (iii) complete the column headings in the table.   (iv) repeat steps (i) and (ii) with values of x equal to 30.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and 90.0 cm.     table 3.1     x / v / i / r / 10.0 30.050.070.090.0  [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against r / \u03c9 (x-axis).       [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ..[3]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will investigate the position of the image in a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 4.1.   n r mb ap2 p1 ray-trace sheeteyelhole      fig. 4.1",
            "13": "13 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) draw a line 10.0 cm long near the middle of the ray-trace sheet. label the line mr. draw  a normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the point at which nl crosses mr with the letter b.  (b) draw a line 8.0 cm long from b at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal below mr and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a.  (c) place a pin p 1 on line ab at a distance 7.0 cm from b.   (d) place a pin p 2 on line ab at a distance 1.0 cm from b.  (e) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr.  (f) view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1.  place two pins p3 and p4 some distance apart so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of  p2 and p1, all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.  (g) remove the pins and the mirror and draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4.  continue the line until it crosses mr and extends at least 8.0 cm beyond mr.  (h) replace pin p1 on line ab in the same position as in (c), at a distance 7.0 cm from b.  (i) place pin p2 1.0 cm to the right of its position in part (d).  (j) repeat the steps in parts (e) to (g).  (k) label with a y the point where the two lines beyond mr cross.  (l) (i) draw a line from p1 to mr that meets mr at a right angle. measure and record the  length a of this line.  a =  ..   (ii) draw a line from the point labelled y to mr that meets mr at a right angle. measure and record the length b of this line.  b =  ..  [2]  (m) a student suggests that the length a should be equal to the length b.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference  to your results. statement  .justification  ... .. ..  [2]",
            "14": "14 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (n) suggest a precaution that you took, when placing the pins, in order to obtain reliable  results.  .. ..[1]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 12 and 13. [5] [total: 10]",
            "15": "15 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/51/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/jg) 58684/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *2921277581* physics 0625/52 paper 5 practical test may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will determine the mass of a metre rule using two methods.  method 1.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1.     dx y x pivot50.0  cm mark metre rule     fig. 1.1  y ou are provided with a 100 g mass, labelled x.  (a) (i) place the mass x on the rule so that its centre is at a distance d = 5.0 cm from the  zero end of the rule, as shown in fig. 1.1. record the value of d  in table 1.1.   (ii) adjust the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to being balanced, with the 50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot.   (iii) measure, and record in the table, the distance x from the centre of the mass x to the pivot.   (iv) measure, and record in the table, the distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.   (v) repeat the steps (i) \u2013 (iv) using d = 10.0 cm.     table 1.1 d /cm x /cm y /cm  [3]  (b) (i) using the values of x and y in the first row of the table, calculate the mass m of the  rule using the equation m = 100x y.  m =  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) repeat step (b)(i) using the values of x and y in the second row of the table.  m =  [1]   (iii) calculate the average value of m.  average value of m =  [1]  method 2.  (c) measure the mass m of the rule using the balance provided.  m =  [1]  (d) a student carrying out this experiment expects that the values of the mass m obtained  by the two methods will be exactly the same.   suggest two practical reasons why, in spite of following the instructions with care, the  values may differ. assume that the balance used in method 2 is accurate. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2] question 1 continues on the next page.",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (e) explain briefly how you judge the position of the centre of the mass x when it is on the  rule in (a)(iii). y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water and a supply of cold water. carry out the following  instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.     thermometer water     fig. 2.1  (a) measure and record the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water supplied.  \u03b8c =  [1]  (b) (i) pour approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker. place the thermometer  in the beaker of water. when the thermometer reading stops rising, measure the temperature  \u03b8 of the water in the beaker and immediately start the stopclock. in  table 2.1, record \u03b8 at time t = 0 s.   (ii) in the table, record the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until you have a total of six values up to time t = 150 s.     table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c   0  30  60 90 120150  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) empty the beaker. pour approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker. place  the thermometer in the beaker of water. when the thermometer reading stops rising,  measure the temperature \u03b8 h of the water in the beaker.  \u03b8 h =  [1]  (d) (i) pour 10 cm3 of the cold water into the beaker of hot water. stir briefly. measure and  record the temperature \u03b81 of the water.  \u03b81 =  [1]   (ii) pour another 10 cm3 of the cold water into the beaker of hot water. stir briefly.  measure and record the temperature \u03b82 of the water.  \u03b82 =  [1]  (e) using the evidence that you have from the table and the readings in parts (c) and (d), estimate the volume v of cold water that added to the hot water would give the same  temperature drop as allowing the hot water to cool for 150 s. explain briefly how you arrived at your answer.  .. .. .. ..  v =  [2]  (f) this laboratory investigation could be used as a small-scale model for a process in a  factory. the laboratory investigation would be repeated many times.   suggest two conditions that should be kept constant in order to provide reliable results. 1.  .. 2.  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated object lensscreenu     fig. 3.1  (a) place the lens a distance u = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. move the screen until  a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.  (b) measure, and record in table 3.1, the height h of the image on the screen.  (c) repeat the steps in (a) and (b) using u values of 30.0 cm, 35.0 cm, 40.0 cm and 45.0 cm.  (d) calculate, and record in the table, the values of 1h.     table 3.1 u / cm h / cm1h 1 cm 25.0 30.035.040.045.0  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (e) plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against 1 h 1 cm (x-axis). y ou do not need to begin the axes  at the origin (0,0).       [4]  (f) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  [2]  (g) calculate the focal length f of the lens, using the equation f = g 1.5 cm. give your answer  to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  f =  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will investigate lamps in series and parallel combinations.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1.     power supply va lamp 1 lamp 2 lamp 3pq     fig. 4.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v1 across lamp 1 and the  current i in the circuit. switch off.  v1 =    i =    [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r1 of lamp 1 using the equation r1 = v1 i.  r1 =  [1]   (iii) disconnect the voltmeter and reconnect it to measure the potential difference v2  across lamp 2.  v2 =     (iv) disconnect the voltmeter and reconnect it to measure the potential difference v3  across lamp 3.  v3 =    [1]   (v) calculate the total potential difference vt across the three lamps using the equation  vt = v1 + v2 + v3.  vt =  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) complete the circuit diagram in fig. 4.2 to show the three lamps in parallel with  each other between p and q. show the voltmeter connected to measure the  potential difference vp across the lamps. use standard symbols.     a pqpower supply     fig. 4.2  [2]   (ii) disconnect the lamps and the voltmeter. rearrange them to make the circuit shown in your circuit diagram.   (iii) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v p across the lamps and  the total current it . switch off.  vp =    it =     (iv) calculate the total resistance rp of the lamps arranged in parallel, using the    equation rp = vp it.  rp =    [1] question 4 continues on the next page.",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) a student suggests that rp should be equal to r1 3.   state whether your results support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference  to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [1]  (d) another student suggests that r p may not be equal to r1 3 because the lamp filaments   are hotter when the lamps are connected in parallel than when the lamps are connected  in series.   state one piece of evidence that shows that the lamp filaments are hotter in the parallel  circuit. .. ..[1]  [total: 10] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (kn/sw) 58834/6 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9243784656* physics 0625/53 paper 5  practical test may/june 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will determine the magnification produced by a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1.  the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens has been set for you.  do not change this distance. illuminated triangle lensscreenud ho fig. 1.1  (a) (i) carefully measure u and record the value.  u =     (ii) place the screen near the lens. move the screen away from the lens until a sharp  image of the triangle is seen on the screen.   (iii) carefully measure d, the distance between the illuminated triangle and the screen,  and record the value.  d =     (iv) calculate a value m for the magnification, using your answers to (a)(i) and (a)(iii),     and the equation m = d \u2013 u\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013u.  m =      [2]   (b) (i) measure ho, the height of the illuminated triangle, and record the value.  ho =     (ii) measure hi, the height of the sharp image on the screen, and record the value.  hi =     (iii) calculate m, another value for the magnification, using your answers to (b)(i) and     (b)(ii), and the equation m = hi\u2013\u2013ho.  m =     [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) a student says that the values of m and m should be the same.    state whether or not your findings support this. justify your answer by reference to your  results for m and m. statement  . ..justification  ... .. ..    [2]  (d) (i) in the space below, sketch the sharp image seen on the screen.   (ii) describe one difficulty you might have found when measuring the height of this  image.  .. .. ..     [2]  (e) state two precautions which you took to make the experiment reliable.1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2]    [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate how water cools.  the thermometers have been set up in the clamps for you. do not adjust the heights of the  thermometers.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. thermometer stand hot water fig. 2.1  (a) (i) pour hot water into the beaker until it just covers the bulb of the upper thermometer.    do not stir the water for the rest of the experiment.   (ii) wait for about 30 seconds before taking any measurements.   (iii) start the stopclock and read both thermometers.      in the top row of table 2.1, record these temperatures.    (iv) record in the table the temperature \u03b8 of each thermometer at 1 minute intervals  until time t = 6 minutes.   (v) complete the column headings in the table. table 2.1 thermometer bulb near  the bottom of the beakerthermometer bulb near  the surface of the water t / min \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 123456 [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) state in which position of the thermometer bulb the average rate of cooling is the greater.     justify your answer by referring to your results. position   justification  ... .. ..    [2]  (c) what precaution do your results suggest should be taken when measuring the  temperatures of liquids?   explain how your results show that this is a sensible precaution.  precaution    ..explanation  .. .. ..    [2]  (d) another igcse student wants to repeat your experiment in order to check the results.     suggest two experimental conditions which should be kept the same. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..    [2]    [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of electric circuits with lamps connected  in different combinations.   the apparatus has been set up for you as shown in fig. 3.1. apower supply acircuit 1 b fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter, connected to measure the potential difference between a and b. [1]  (b) (i) connect your voltmeter to the apparatus to measure the potential difference v between a and b.   (ii) switch on. measure, and record in table 3.1, the potential difference v and the current i shown by the ammeter. switch off. table 3.1 circuit v / i / r / 1 23  [5]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) reconnect the lamps between a and b as shown in fig. 3.2.   (ii) repeat steps (b)(i) and (b)(ii) for circuit 2. apower supply acircuit 2 b l fig. 3.2  (d) (i) reconnect the lamps between a and b as shown in fig. 3.3.   (ii) repeat steps (b)(i) and (b)(ii) for circuit 3. apower supply acircuit 3 b fig. 3.3  (e) calculate, and record in the table, the total resistance r of each combination of the  lamps, using the equation r = v\u2013i .  (f) complete the column headings in the table. question 3 continues on the next page.",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (g) if each of the lamps has the same resistance, the total resistance of the lamps in  circuit 3 should be twice the total resistance of the lamps in circuit 1.   state whether your findings show this to be the case. justify your answer by reference  to your results. statement  . ..justification  ... .. ..    [2]  (h) the resistance of a lamp is significantly affected by the temperature of its filament.   explain whether this might have affected the results of the experiment.  .. .. ..[1]  (i) an igcse student wants to measure the potential difference across the lamp marked l  in circuit 2.   on the diagram for circuit 2, fig. 3.2, show how a voltmeter should be connected to  measure this potential difference. [1]   [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overturn over for question 4",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will investigate the oscillations of a pendulum.  (a) carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 4.1 and 4.2. the pendulum has  already been set up for you. bhbobclamp one complete oscillationa         fig. 4.1                                     fig. 4.2   (i) measure, and record in the first row of table 4.1, the height h of the pendulum bob above the bench.   (ii) pull the pendulum bob a small distance to one side, as shown in fig. 4.2, and release it.    it will oscillate backwards and forwards between a and b, as shown in fig. 4.2.    one complete oscillation is from a to b and back to a.    measure the time t for 10 complete oscillations. record this value in the table. table 4.1 h / cm t / s t / s t 2 / s2   (iii) without changing the height of the clamp, adjust the string to shorten the pendulum by approximately 10 cm.      repeat steps (a)(i) and (a)(ii).   (iv) repeat step (a)(iii) to obtain 3 more sets of readings. [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) (i) for each value of height h, calculate the time t for one complete oscillation using  the equation t = t\u2013\u201310.    record these values in the table.   (ii) calculate the values of t 2 and record these in the table. [1]  (c) plot a graph of t 2 / s2 (y-axis) against h / cm (x-axis).    [4]  (d) determine the gradient g of the graph.   show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (e) describe a precaution you took in order to measure h as accurately as possible. y ou  may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]   [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (rw/cgw) 58670/3 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *4040097107* physics 0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2013  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2345 total",
            "2": "2 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is investigating the stability of a block of wood.  figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the dimensions of the block.     a db cd hw  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) (i) on figs. 1.1 and 1.2, measure the height h, width w and depth d of the block.  h =  ..  w =  ..  d =  ..  [2]   (ii) on fig. 1.2, draw the line ac . [1]   (iii) measure and record the angle \u03b1 between lines ad and ac .  \u03b1 =  ..[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) a student places the block on the edge of the bench, as shown in fig. 1.3. 102030 40 50 60 70 80 90100110120130140150160170 180 0 protractorbencha db c     fig. 1.3   he holds the protractor next to face abcd of the block, as shown in fig. 1.3. he gently  pushes the top of the block (as indicated in fig. 1.3) so that the block tips over.   he records the angle \u03b8 between side bc of the block and the vertical line on the  protractor. the angle \u03b8 is when the block just tips over. he repeats this procedure a  suitable number of times.   suggest the number of measurements of \u03b8 that you think would be suitable for this  experiment.  number =  ..[1]  (c) the student calculates the average value \u03b8av of all his values for \u03b8.  20\u00b0  \u03b8av =  ..   he suggests that \u03b8av should be equal to \u03b1. state whether the results support this  suggestion. justify your statement by reference to the results. statement  .justification  ... .. ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the scale of a thermometer.  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r as shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.1. 010 -102030405060708090100110\u00b0c     fig. 2.1  \u03b8r =  ..[1]   a student pours hot water into a beaker. she measures the temperature \u03b8 of the water  in the beaker every 30 s. the readings are shown in table 2.1.     table 2.1     t / \u03b8 / d /   0 8 0  30 74  60 69  90 65 120 63 150 61 180 60  (b) (i) using fig. 2.2, measure, and record in the table, the distance d from the end of the  thermometer to the position of the liquid in the thermometer at the first temperature  reading in the table. d 010 -102030405060708090100110\u00b0c     fig. 2.2   (ii) repeat the measurement in (b)(i) for all the other temperature readings. [2]   (iii) complete the column headings in the table. [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the student plotted a graph of \u03b8 against d. a sketch of the graph obtained is shown in  fig. 2.3.     80 0\u01a8 / \u00b0c d / cm 0     fig. 2.3   (i) explain how the graph line shows that \u03b8 is not directly proportional to d.  ..  .. [1]   (ii) suggest why, when \u03b8 = 0 \u00b0c, the value of d is not zero.  .. .. ..  [1]  (d) determine, as accurately as possible, the distance x between the 1 \u00b0c marks on the  thermometer shown in fig. 2.2. show your working.  x =  ..[3]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire.  the circuit used is shown in fig. 3.1.     va acbpower supply resistance wirex     fig. 3.1  a student moves contact c to give a range of values of the length x. for each length x, the  current i and potential difference v are measured and recorded in table 3.1.  (a) (i) calculate the resistance r of 10.0 cm of the resistance wire using the equation    r = v i. record this value of r in the table.   (ii) repeat step (i) for each of the other values of x.   (iii) complete the column headings in the table.     table 3.1     x / v / i / r / 10.0 0.20 0.33 30.0 0.60 0.3350.0 1.01 0.3270.0 1.41 0.3390.0 1.81 0.33  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against r / \u03c9 (x-axis).       [5]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ..[3]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is investigating the position of the image in a plane mirror.  a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet is shown in fig. 4.1.   n r m ab p2p3 p4dc p1 ray-trace sheeteyel     fig. 4.1",
            "9": "9 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use the line mr shows the position of a plane mirror. nl is the normal at the centre of the mirror.  ab marks the position of an incident ray.  the student pushes two pins, p1 and p2 into this line. she views the images of pins p1 and  p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1.  she places two pins p3 and p4 some distance apart so that pins p4 and p3, and the images  of p2 and of p1, all appear exactly one behind the other. the positions of p3 and p4 are  labelled.  (a) draw in the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it crosses mr  and extends at least 8.0 cm beyond mr. [1]  (b) the student repeats the procedure without moving pin p1 but using a different angle of  incidence. on fig. 4.1, the new positions of pins p3 and p4 are marked c and d.   (i) draw in the line joining the positions c and d. continue the line until it extends at  least 8.0 cm beyond mr.   (ii) label with a y the point where the two lines beyond mr cross. [1]  (c) (i) draw a line from p1 to mr that meets mr at a right angle. measure and record the  length a of this line.  a =  ..   (ii) draw a line from the point labelled y to mr that meets mr at a right angle. measure and record the length b of this line.  b =  ..  [2]  (d) a student suggests that the length of a should equal the length of b.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference  to your results. statement  .justification  ... .. ..  [2]  (e) suggest a precaution that you would take, when placing the pins, in order to obtain  reliable results.  .. ..[1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is determining the mass of a load x using a balancing method.  fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus.   d mass m 50.0  cm mark pivotload x metre rule 90.0  cm markbench     fig. 5.1  the centre of the load x is fixed at the 90.0 cm mark on the rule.  a student uses a range of values of the mass m and determines the distance d from the  pivot where the mass must be placed to balance the rule.  the readings are shown in table 5.1.     table 5.1     m / g d / cm 40 30.2 50 23.9 60 20.0 70 17.1 80 15.1  (a) calculate the distance x between the centre of the load x and the centre of the rule.  x =  ..[1]  (b) suggest a reason for the student using a range of m values.  ..  .. ..[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) using each set of readings and the value of x, the student calculates values for the  mass of the load x.   he writes his results: 30.2 g, 29.875 g, 30 g, 29.925 g, 30.2 g.   use these results to calculate an average value for the mass of x and give it to a suitable  number of significant figures for this type of experiment.  average value for the mass of x =  ..[2]  (d) this type of balancing experiment is difficult to carry out.   suggest one practical difficulty and one way to try to overcome the difficulty. y ou may  draw a diagram, if you wish.practical difficulty  . .. ..way to overcome the difficulty  ..  ..  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nh/jg) 58683/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *7705473056* physics 0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2013  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is determining the mass of a metre rule using two methods.  method 1.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used.     dx y x pivot50.0  cm mark metre rule     fig. 1.1  a student places a 100 g mass x on the rule so that its centre is at a distance d = 5.0 cm from  the zero end of the rule, as shown in fig. 1.1. he adjusts the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to being balanced.  he measures the distance x  from the centre of the mass x to the pivot and the distance y  from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule.  he repeats the procedure using d = 10.0 cm.  the readings are shown in table 1.1.     table 1.1 d / cm x / cm y / cm  5.0 23.7 21.1 10.0 21.0 18.5  (a) (i) using the values of x and y in the first row of the table, calculate the mass m of the  rule using the equation m = 100x y.  m =  ",
            "3": "3 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) repeat step (a)(i) using the values of x and y in the second row of the table.  m =    [2]   (iii) calculate the average value of m.  average value of m =  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use method 2.  (b) the student measures the mass m of the rule, using a spring balance as shown in  fig. 1.2. metre rule scale pan150100500g     fig. 1.2   write down the reading shown in fig. 1.2.  m =  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the student expects that the values of the mass m obtained by the two methods will be  exactly the same.   suggest two practical reasons why, in spite of following the instructions with care, the  values may differ. assume that the balance used in method 2 is accurate. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2]  (d) explain briefly how you would judge the position of the centre of the mass x when it is  on the rule in method 1. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the cooling of water.  (a) a student places a thermometer in a beaker of cold water.   using fig. 2.1, record the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water supplied to the student. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c     fig. 2.1  \u03b8c = . ...[1]  (b) the student pours 200 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. she measures the temperature of  the water at 30 s intervals. the readings are shown in table 2.1.     table 2.1 t / \u03b8 /    0 8 0  30 75  60 72  90 69 120 67 150 66   complete the column headings in the table. [1]  (c) the student empties the beaker and pours another 200 cm3 of the hot water into the  beaker. she measures the temperature \u03b8h of the water in the beaker.           78 \u00b0c \u03b8h =     she then empties the cold water from the measuring cylinder shown in fig. 2.2 into the  beaker of hot water. she measures the temperature \u03b8a of the water in the beaker.           74 \u00b0c \u03b8a =  ",
            "7": "7 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  using fig. 2.2, record the volume va of cold water. 510152025cm3 water     fig. 2.2  va =  [1]  (d) estimate the volume v  of cold water that, added to the hot water, would give the same  temperature drop as allowing the hot water to cool for 150 s.   use the evidence from the table and the readings in parts (b) and (c). explain briefly how  you arrived at your answer.  .. .. ..  v =  [2]  (e) this laboratory investigation could be used as a small-scale model for a process in a  factory. the laboratory investigation would be repeated many times.   suggest two conditions that should be kept constant in order to provide reliable results. 1.  .. 2.  ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating resistor combinations in circuits.  the first circuit used is shown in fig. 3.1.     power supply va lamp 1 lamp 2 lamp 3     fig. 3.1  a student measures the potential difference v1 across lamp 1 and the current i in the circuit.  (a) (i) using fig. 3.2, record the student\u2019s readings. 0123 4 5 v 00.20.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 a     fig. 3.2  v1 =    i =    [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r1 of lamp 1 using the equation r1 = v1 i.  r1 =  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student uses the voltmeter to measure the potential difference v2 across lamp 2,  and the potential difference v3 across lamp 3.   (i) using fig. 3.3, record the student\u2019s reading of v2.     0123 4 5 v     fig. 3.3  v2 =     (ii) using fig. 3.4, record the student\u2019s reading of v3.     0123 4 5 v     fig. 3.4  v3 =    [1]  (c) calculate the total potential difference vt across the three lamps using the equation vt = v1 + v2 + v3.  vt =  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (d) the student rearranges the circuit so that the lamps are in parallel with each other and  the ammeter is connected to measure the total current it in the circuit.   he connects the voltmeter to measure the potential difference vp across the lamps.   in the space below, draw a circuit diagram of this new circuit using standard symbols.  [2]  (e) the student measures the potential difference vp and the current it, and calculates the  total resistance rp of the lamps arranged in parallel.            2.1 \u03c9 rp =     the student suggests that rp should be equal to r1 3.   state whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference  to the results. statement  . justification  ... ..  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (f) another student suggests that rp should not be equal to r1 3 because the lamp filaments   are hotter when the lamps are connected in parallel than when the lamps are connected  in series.   state one piece of evidence, that you would see during the investigation, that shows  that the lamp filaments are hotter in the parallel circuit.  .. ..[1]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 a student carries out an experiment using a simple pendulum.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus.     xclamp string pendulum bob one complete oscillation     fig. 4.1  the student records the time t  taken for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum for a range  of different lengths x of the string. the readings are shown in table 4.1.     table 4.1 x / cm t / s t / s 90.0 38.5 80.0 36.0 70.0 33.4 60.0 31.4 50.0 28.2 40.0 25.5  (a) the period t of the pendulum is the time taken for one complete oscillation.   for each set of readings in the table, calculate the period t and enter the results in the  table. [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) suggest a reason for measuring the time for twenty oscillations rather than just one.  .. .. ..[1]  (c) in this experiment, the length x of the string is measured with a metre rule.   suggest one precaution that you would take when measuring the length in order to  obtain an accurate reading. .. ..[1]  (d) the student decides that a more useful result is possible if the length is measured to the  centre of mass of the pendulum bob.   the pendulum bob is a small metal ball. the student has a 30 cm ruler and two  rectangular blocks of wood that are about 10 cm long.   suggest how the student can use this equipment to measure accurately the diameter of  the pendulum bob. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[2]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is determining the focal length of a lens.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 5.1. illuminated object lensscreenu     fig. 5.1  a student places the lens a distance u = 25.0 cm from an illuminated object of height 1.5 cm.  she moves the screen until a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.  she measures the height h of the image on the screen. she calculates 1 h.  she repeats the procedure using a range of u values. her results are shown in table 5.1.     table 5.1 u / cm h / cm1h 1 cm 25.0 2.2 0.45 30.0 1.5 0.6735.0 1.1 0.9140.0 0.9 1.145.0 0.8 1.3",
            "15": "15 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) pl ot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against 1 h 1 cm (x-axis). y ou do not need to begin the axes  at the origin (0,0).       [5]  (b) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  [2]  (c) calculate the focal length f of the lens, using the equation f = g 1.5 cm. give your answer  to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  f =  [2]",
            "16": "16 0625/62/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (d) state two precautions that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain reliable  results. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2]  [total: 11]"
        },
        "0625_s13_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (kn/sw) 58836/7 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *3068816922* physics 0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical may/june 2013  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 some igcse students are investigating the cooling of water.  fig. 1.1 shows how the apparatus is set up. thermometers stand hot water fig. 1.1  (a) a thermometer is placed on the bench so that room temperature can be measured.    read and record room temperature \u03b8r as shown on the thermometer in fig. 1.2.  \u03b8r =  [1] \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 1.2  (b) a student pours hot water into the beaker so that the level is as shown in fig. 1.1.   in table 1.1, he then records the temperatures \u03b8 every minute as the water cools until  time t = 6 minutes.   complete the column headings and complete the time column in table 1.1. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s usetable 1.1 thermometer bulb near the  bottom of the beakerthermometer bulb near the  surface of the water t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 82.0 76.0 79.5 74.0 77.0 72.075.0 70.073.0 68.070.5 66.069.0 64.5  (c) state in which position of the thermometer bulb the average rate of cooling is the greater.     justify your answer by referring to the results. position   justification  ... .. ..    [2]  (d) what precaution do the results suggest should be taken when measuring the  temperature of a liquid?   explain how the results show that this is a sensible precaution.  precaution    ..explanation  .. .. ..    [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (e) a student in a different school wants to repeat the experiment in order to check the  results.     suggest two experimental conditions which should be kept the same. 1.  ..  ..2.  .. ..    [2]    [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the oscillation of a pendulum.  the apparatus is set up as shown in fig. 2.1. hbobclamp one complete oscillation         fig. 2.1                                     fig. 2.2  the height h of the pendulum bob above the bench is measured and recorded.   this is repeated, to obtain a total of five different values of h, by shortening the string of the  pendulum but without changing the height of the clamp.  for each value of h, the pendulum bob is pulled to one side by a small distance, as shown in fig. 2.2.   the pendulum is then released and the time t for 10 complete oscillations is measured and  recorded.  (a) describe a precaution which the igcse students might have taken in order to measure h as accurately as possible. y ou may draw a diagram.  ..  .. ..[1]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (b) figs. 2.3 to 2.7 are scale diagrams showing the height h of the pendulum bob above the  bench for each of the five experiments. bench     fig. 2.3 fig. 2.4 fig. 2.5 fig. 2.6 fig. 2.7   (i) measure, and record in table 2.1, the height h in each experiment.   (ii) the diagrams are drawn to 1/5 scale.     calculate, and record in table 2.1, the actual heights h of the pendulum bob above the bench.    [2] table 2.1 h /cm h /cm t /s t /s t 2/s 2 fig. 2.3 14.01 fig. 2.4 12.39 fig. 2.5 10.85 fig. 2.6   8.93 fig. 2.7   6.30",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) for each value of height h, calculate the time t for one complete oscillation, using  the equation t = t\u2013\u201310. record these values in table 2.1.   (ii) calculate the values of t 2 and record these in the table. [1]  (d) plot a graph of t 2  / s 2 (y-axis) against h / cm (x-axis).    [4]  (e) determine the gradient g of the graph.   show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =       [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (f) one of the students wishes to carry out the experiment again to obtain results which are  more reliable.    describe one change she might make to the method to achieve this.  ..  .. ..[1]    [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 students in the igcse class are investigating the resistance of electric circuits with parallel  branches.   the apparatus has been set up as shown in fig. 3.1.   apower supply acircuit 1 b fig. 3.1  the current in the circuit and the potential difference across the combination of lamps connected between a and b are to be measured.  (a) on fig. 3.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter, connected to measure the potential difference v between a and b.    [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (b) the values of potential difference v across ab and current i for circuit 1 are recorded  in table 3.1.   the lamps are then reconnected as shown in fig. 3.2 and then fig. 3.3 and the  experiment is repeated. apower supply acircuit 2 b l fig. 3.2 apower supply abcircuit 3 fig. 3.3   (i) calculate, and record in the table, the total resistance r of each combination of  lamps, using the equation r = v\u2013i .     [2]   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [1] table 3.1 circuit v / i / r / 1 1.81 0.70 2 1.76 0.22 3 1.72 0.44",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) if each of the lamps had the same resistance, the total resistance of the lamps in  circuit 3 would be twice the total resistance of the lamps in circuit 1.    state whether the results in the table show this to be the case. justify your answer by  reference to the results. statement  . ..justification  ... .. .. ..    [2]  (d) an igcse student wants to measure the potential difference across the lamp marked  l in circuit 2.   on the diagram for circuit 2, fig. 3.2, show how a voltmeter should be connected to  measure this potential difference. [1]     [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class has been asked to determine the density of an object.  one student is finding the volume of the object using a measuring cylinder containing water  in which the object is to be placed.    the measuring cylinder containing only water is shown in fig. 4.1.  the measuring cylinder after the object has been placed in the water is shown in fig. 4.2. 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10cm3 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10measuring cylinder objectcm3          fig. 4.1       fig. 4.2  (a) (i) read and record the volume v1 of the water in the measuring cylinder shown in  fig. 4.1.  v1 =     (ii) read and record the volume v2 of the water in the measuring cylinder shown in  fig. 4.2.  v2 =      [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student then uses a balance to measure the mass m of the object, as shown in  fig. 4.3. 114g fig. 4.3   calculate the density of the object using the equation  density = m\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 (v2 \u2013 v1).  density =  [2]  (c) suggest a possible practical cause of inaccuracy in this method.  .. .. ..[1]    [total: 5] ",
            "14": "14 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 igcse students are investigating the magnification produced by a converging lens.  the apparatus is set up as shown below. illuminated trianglelensscreenud fig. 5.1  the screen is moved until a sharp image of the object is seen on the screen.  (a) (i) on fig. 5.1, carefully measure u and record the value.  u =     (ii) on fig. 5.1, carefully measure d, the distance between the illuminated triangle and  the screen when the image is sharp, and record the value.  d =     (iii)  calculate a value m for the magnification, using your answers to (a)(i) and (a)(ii),  and the equation m = d \u2013 u\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013u.  m =      [2]  (b) the illuminated triangle is shown in fig. 5.2. the image of the triangle seen on the  screen is shown in fig. 5.3. hoilluminated triangle fig. 5.2",
            "15": "15 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use screen hi fig. 5.3   (i) measure ho, the height of the illuminated triangle, as shown in fig. 5.2, and record  the value.  ho =     (ii)  measure hi, the height of the image on the screen, as shown in fig. 5.3, and record  the value.  hi =     (iii) calculate m, another value for the magnification, using your answers to (b)(i) and     (b)(ii), and the equation m = hi\u2013\u2013ho.  m =       [2]  (c) a student says that the values of m and m should be the same.    state whether your findings support this. justify your answer by reference to your results  for m and m. statement  . ..justification  ... .. ..     [2]",
            "16": "16 0625/63/m/j/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (d) (i) describe one difficulty the students might have found when measuring the height  of the image on the screen.    suggest a solution for the problem. difficulty   ..solution  . ..    [2]   (ii) suggest one further precaution which should be taken to make the experiment  reliable.  .. .. .. [1]     [total: 9]"
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib13 11_0625_11/5rp  \u00a9 ucles 2013  [turn over      *8694020048* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2013     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13  1 a student uses a ruler to measure the length and the width of a small rectangular metal plate.    012345 cmwidth 012345 cmlengthmetal plate     what is the area of the plate?  a 14.0  cm2 b 14.7  cm2 c 16.0  cm2 d 16.8  cm2     2 the diagram shows the speed  / time graph for a train as it travels along a track.    0 0speed timepqr st     for which part of the graph is the tra in\u2019s speed changing at the greatest rate?  a pq b qr c rs d st    3 a small steel ball is dropped from a low balcony.    ignoring air resistance, which statement describes its motion?  a it falls with constant acceleration.  b it falls with constant speed.  c it falls with decreasing speed.  d it falls with increasing acceleration.     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13 [turn over  4 which is the unit for force and which is the unit for weight?     force weight  a kg kg  b kg n  c n kg  d n n    5 a cup contains hot liquid.   some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same     6 four rectangular blocks, p, q, r and s are shown. each block is labelled with its size and its  mass.    p 2.0 cm 2.0 cm2.0 cmq 2.0 cm 3.0 cm2.0 cm r 2.0 cm 4.0 cm2.0 cms10 g 10 g 20 g 20 g 2.0 cm 2.0 cm2.0 cm     which two blocks have the same density?  a p and q b p and r c q and r d r and s   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13  7 a force acting on an object causes some properties of the object to change.    which list contains only properties that can be changed by the action of the force?  a mass, motion and shape  b mass, motion and size c mass, shape and size d motion, shape and size     8 a box is being moved by a fork-lift truck. the total weight of the box is 3000  n.    fork-lift truck box      the force exerted by the fork-lift truck on the box is 3500  n upwards.    what is the resultant force on the box?  a 500  n downwards  b 500  n upwards  c 6500  n downwards  d 6500  n upwards    9 some energy sources are reliably available at all times, and some are not.   which row shows three sources all in their correct columns?     available at all times not available at all times  a geothermal nuclear fission, solar   b geothermal, nuclear fission solar  c solar, nuclear fission geothermal  d solar nuclear fission, geothermal    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13 [turn over  10 a woman in a factory has to lift a box on to a shelf.    boxhigh shelf low shelf     which action involves the woman in doing the least  amount of work?  a lifting the box quickly to the high shelf  b lifting the box slowly to the high shelf c lifting the box to the low shelf first then lifting it to the high shelf  d lifting the box to the low shelf instead of to the high shelf     11 a drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point and a flat end.    flat end sharp point     the pin is pushed into a wooden board.    how do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force at the flat end?     force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point  a greater than at the flat end greater than at the flat end  b greater than at the flat end less than at the flat end  c the same as at the flat end greater than at the flat end  d the same as at the flat end less than at the flat end    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13  12 the diagrams show four divers at the bottom of four different swimming pools.    two swimming pools contain fresh water and two contain salt water. fresh water is less dense  than salt water.    which diver feels the least pressure from the water?    ab fresh waterfresh watercd salt watersalt water       13 the diagram shows a sealed jar containing a gas.    gas     which statement about the gas in the jar is correct?  a the gas molecules collide with the inside of the jar more often as the temperature increases.  b the gas molecules move more slowly as the temperature increases. c the pressure of the gas decreases as the temperature increases. d the pressure of the gas is higher at the top of the jar than at the bottom of the jar.      14 a block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. the  water evaporates from the newspaper.    which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water molecules that remain in the newspaper?     escaping molecules average speed of the  remaining water molecules  a the less energetic ones decreases  b the less energetic ones increases  c the more energetic ones decreases  d the more energetic ones increases ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13 [turn over  15 equal masses of two different liquids are heated  using the same heater. the graph shows how  the temperature of each liquid changes with time.    temperature  timeliquid 1 liquid 2 0 0    what does the graph tell us about the liquids?  a liquid 1 has a higher melting point than liquid 2.  b liquid 1 has a higher boiling point than liquid 2.  c liquid 1 starts to melt sooner than liquid 2.  d liquid 1 starts to boil sooner than liquid 2.      16 a wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.    wooden wheel iron circle     which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?  a cooling the iron circle  b heating the iron circle  c heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle  d heating the wooden wheel but not heating or cooling the iron circle     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13  17 a man goes into a cold room and switches on a heater. the man then stands one metre away  from the heater. he feels warmer almost immediately.    room heate r     how is thermal energy transferred from the heater to the man so quickly?  a by conduction, convection and radiation  b by conduction only c by convection only  d by radiation only     18 a rod is made half of glass and half of copper. four pins, a, b, c and d are attached to the rod  by wax. the rod is heated in the centre as shown.    which pin falls off first?    heatpin apin bpin cpin dglass copper       19 which row shows an example of a transverse wave and an example of a longitudinal wave?     transverse longitudinal  a light radio  b radio sound  c sound water  d water light    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13 [turn over  20 a boy throws a small stone into a pond. waves spread out from where the stone hits the water  and travel to the side of the pond.    the boy notices that eight waves reach the side of the pond in a time of 5.0  s.    what is the frequency of the waves?  a 0.20  hz b 0.63  hz c 1.6  hz d 40  hz      21 the table gives common uses for three types of electromagnetic wave.    which row correctly identifies the waves?     satellite television terrestrial television  (not satellite) television remote  controllers  a infra-red waves microwaves radio waves  b microwaves radio waves infra-red waves  c radio waves infra-red waves microwaves  d radio waves microwaves infra-red waves      22 the diagram shows a ray of light passing through a semicircular glass block into air.    p ray of lightglassair     which row gives the correct name for angle p and states how angle p compares with the critical  angle?     name of angle p angle p compared with  the critical angle  a angle of incidence larger than the critical angle  b angle of incidence smaller than the critical angle  c angle of refraction larger than the critical angle  d angle of refraction smaller than the critical angle   ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13  23 which diagram shows how an image of an object is formed on a screen by a converging lens?    screenobject2 \u00d7 focal lengtha screenobject2 \u00d7 focal length focal length focal lengthb screenobjectc screenobjectd      24 when the volcano krakatoa erupted in 1883, it was heard 5000  km away.    which statement about the sound from the volcano is not correct?  a if such a loud sound were to be made today, an astronaut orbiting in space (a vacuum) at a  height of 400  km could hear it.  b people further from the volcano heard the so und later than people nearer to the volcano.  c the amplitude of the sound waves would have been smaller further from the volcano.  d the sound was very loud because a lot of energy was transferred to vibrations of the air.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13 [turn over  25 a loudspeaker on a boat produces a pulse of sound in the sea. the echo of the pulse is received  back at the boat after 3.0  s. the depth of the sea under the boat is 2250  m.    pulse of sound sea bedboat (not to scale)    from this information, what is the speed of sound in the sea water?  a 330  m / s b 750  m / s c 1500  m / s d 6750  m / s     26 a hard magnetic material can be used to make a permanent magnet.    a soft magnetic material can be used to make a temporary magnet.   which row shows whether iron and steel are hard or soft magnetic materials?    iron steel  a hard hard  b hard soft  c soft hard  d soft soft     27 how can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?  a cool the magnet for a long time  b hit the magnet repeatedly with a hammer  c leave the magnet in a coil which is connected to a battery  d shine bright light onto the magnet      28 which equation can be used to calculate the resistance r of a resistor?  a v = i \u00f7 r b i = v \u00d7 r c r = v  \u00d7 i d v = i \u00d7 r     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13  29 a student wishes to measure first the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery, and then the  potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor.    she has the resistor, the battery and some connecting wires.    what else does she need?  a a force meter (newton meter) and a voltmeter  b an ammeter and a voltmeter  c an ammeter only  d a voltmeter only      30 two similar balloons hang side by side, on insulating threads, a short distance apart. they are  both rubbed with the same dry cloth and become charged.    which diagram shows how the balloons hang after charging?    a d b c      31 when the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the current in the lamp increases.        why does this happen?  a the resistance of the lamp decreases.  b the resistance of the lamp increases.  c the resistance of the thermistor decreases.  d the resistance of the thermistor increases.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13 [turn over  32 a student connects various resistors in parallel pairs.    underneath each diagram is a statement about the total resistance of each pair of resistors.    which statement is correct?    2 \u03c9a the total resistance is 4  \u03c9.2 \u03c95 \u03c9b the total resistance is between 1  \u03c9 and 5  \u03c9.1 \u03c9 10 \u03c9c the total resistance is less than 5  \u03c9.5 \u03c920 \u03c9d the total resistance is more than 20  \u03c9.10 \u03c9      33 the circuit shown contains a relay.   both lamps are initially off.    lamp 1lamp 2 switch s  relay     when switch s is closed, the relay operates. what is the state of the lamps?     lamp 1 lamp 2  a on on  b on off  c off on  d off off     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13  34 the diagram shows the connections to an electric heater. three fuses have been added to the  circuit.    fuse 3fuse 1 fuse 2 heate rplastic case live neutralheating element     which of the fuses are correctly placed?  a fuse 1, fuse 2 and fuse 3  b fuse 1 and fuse 2 only c fuse 1 only  d fuse 2 only     35 which diagram shows a movement that will not produce the changing magnetic field needed to  induce an e.m.f. in the coil?    ns ns ns nsa  b c d moving a magnet and a coil towards each other at the same speed moving a magnet and a coil in the same direction at the same speed moving a magnet away from a fixed coil moving a coil away from a fixed magnet    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a simple d.c. electric motor which is rotating.    sn magnet magnet coil     which change will make the motor rotate more quickly?  a increasing the number of turns on the coil  b removing the magnets  c reversing the battery  d reversing the polarity of the magnets      37 a transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240  v a.c. into 4800  v a.c.    npns 240  v a.c. 4800  v a.c.     which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?     number of turns  on primary coil np number of turns  on secondary coil ns  a 50 1000  b 240 48  000  c 480 24  d 2000 100    ",
            "16": "16      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/11/o/n/13  38 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube used to produce cathode rays.    \u2013\u2013++ current ianodefilament (cathode) metal platescathode-ray tube power supply     which change would increase the deflection of the cathode rays?  a decreasing the current i in the filament  b increasing the current i in the filament  c increasing the potential difference between the filament and the anode  d increasing the potential difference between the metal plates     39 a radioactive substance emits a particle from the nucleus of one of its atoms. the particle  consists of two protons and two neutrons.    what is the name of this process?  a \u03b1-emission  b \u03b2-emission  c \u03b3-emission  d nuclear fission      40 a nucleus x has 17 protons and 18 neutrons.    which notation is correct for this nucleus?  a  x17 18 b x1735 c x1817 d x3517       "
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib13 11_0625_12/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2013  [turn over      *1637585820* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2013     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13  1 the diagram shows the speed  / time graph for a train as it travels along a track.    0 0speed timepqr st     for which part of the graph is the tra in\u2019s speed changing at the greatest rate?  a pq b qr c rs d st      2 a student uses a ruler to measure the length and the width of a small rectangular metal plate.    012345 cmwidth 012345 cmlengthmetal plate     what is the area of the plate?  a 14.0  cm2 b 14.7  cm2 c 16.0  cm2 d 16.8  cm2     3 a small steel ball is dropped from a low balcony.    ignoring air resistance, which statement describes its motion?  a it falls with constant acceleration.  b it falls with constant speed.  c it falls with decreasing speed.  d it falls with increasing acceleration.     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13 [turn over  4 four rectangular blocks, p, q, r and s are shown. each block is labelled with its size and its  mass.    p 2.0 cm 2.0 cm2.0 cmq 2.0 cm 3.0 cm2.0 cm r 2.0 cm 4.0 cm2.0 cms10 g 10 g 20 g 20 g 2.0 cm 2.0 cm2.0 cm     which two blocks have the same density?  a p and q b p and r c q and r d r and s     5 which is the unit for force and which is the unit for weight?     force weight  a kg kg  b kg n  c n kg  d n n     6 a cup contains hot liquid.   some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13  7 a box is being moved by a fork-lift truck. the total weight of the box is 3000  n.    fork-lift truck box      the force exerted by the fork-lift truck on the box is 3500  n upwards.    what is the resultant force on the box?  a 500  n downwards  b 500  n upwards  c 6500  n downwards  d 6500  n upwards     8 a force acting on an object causes some properties of the object to change.    which list contains only properties that can be changed by the action of the force?  a mass, motion and shape  b mass, motion and size c mass, shape and size d motion, shape and size     9 some energy sources are reliably available at all times, and some are not.   which row shows three sources all in their correct columns?     available at all times not available at all times  a geothermal nuclear fission, solar   b geothermal, nuclear fission solar  c solar, nuclear fission geothermal  d solar nuclear fission, geothermal    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13 [turn over  10 a woman in a factory has to lift a box on to a shelf.    boxhigh shelf low shelf     which action involves the woman in doing the least  amount of work?  a lifting the box quickly to the high shelf  b lifting the box slowly to the high shelf c lifting the box to the low shelf first then lifting it to the high shelf  d lifting the box to the low shelf instead of to the high shelf     11 a drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point and a flat end.    flat end sharp point     the pin is pushed into a wooden board.    how do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force at the flat end?     force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point  a greater than at the flat end greater than at the flat end  b greater than at the flat end less than at the flat end  c the same as at the flat end greater than at the flat end  d the same as at the flat end less than at the flat end    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13  12 the diagrams show four divers at the bottom of four different swimming pools.    two swimming pools contain fresh water and two contain salt water. fresh water is less dense  than salt water.    which diver feels the least pressure from the water?    ab fresh waterfresh watercd salt watersalt water       13 a block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. the  water evaporates from the newspaper.    which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water  molecules that remain in the newspaper?     escaping molecules average speed of the  remaining water molecules  a the less energetic ones decreases  b the less energetic ones increases  c the more energetic ones decreases  d the more energetic ones increases     14 the diagram shows a sealed jar containing a gas.    gas     which statement about the gas in the jar is correct?  a the gas molecules collide with the inside of the jar more often as the temperature increases.  b the gas molecules move more slowly as the temperature increases.  c the pressure of the gas decreases as the temperature increases.  d the pressure of the gas is higher at the top of the jar than at the bottom of the jar. ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13 [turn over  15 equal masses of two different liquids are heated using the same heater. the graph shows how  the temperature of each liquid changes with time.    temperature  timeliquid 1 liquid 2 0 0    what does the graph tell us about the liquids?  a liquid 1 has a higher melting point than liquid 2.  b liquid 1 has a higher boiling point than liquid 2.  c liquid 1 starts to melt sooner than liquid 2.  d liquid 1 starts to boil sooner than liquid 2.      16 a wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.    wooden wheel iron circle     which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?  a cooling the iron circle  b heating the iron circle  c heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle  d heating the wooden wheel but not heating or cooling the iron circle     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13  17 a rod is made half of glass and half of copper. four pins, a, b, c and d are attached to the rod  by wax. the rod is heated in the centre as shown.    which pin falls off first?    heatpin apin bpin cpin dglass copper      18 a man goes into a cold room and switches on a heater. the man then stands one metre away  from the heater. he feels warmer almost immediately.    room heate r     how is thermal energy transferred from the heater to the man so quickly?  a by conduction, convection and radiation  b by conduction only  c by convection only  d by radiation only      19 which row shows an example of a transverse wave and an example of a longitudinal wave?     transverse longitudinal  a light radio  b radio sound  c sound water  d water light    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13 [turn over  20 the diagram shows a ray of light passing through a semicircular glass block into air.    p ray of lightglassair     which row gives the correct name for angle p and states how angle p compares with the critical  angle?     name of angle p angle p compared with  the critical angle  a angle of incidence larger than the critical angle  b angle of incidence smaller than the critical angle  c angle of refraction larger than the critical angle  d angle of refraction smaller than the critical angle     21 a boy throws a small stone into a pond. waves spread out from where the stone hits the water  and travel to the side of the pond.    the boy notices that eight waves reach the side of the pond in a time of 5.0  s.    what is the frequency of the waves?  a 0.20  hz b 0.63  hz c 1.6  hz d 40  hz      22 the table gives common uses for three types of electromagnetic wave.    which row correctly identifies the waves?     satellite television terrestrial television  (not satellite) television remote  controllers  a infra-red waves microwaves radio waves  b microwaves radio waves infra-red waves  c radio waves infra-red waves microwaves  d radio waves microwaves infra-red waves   ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13  23 which diagram shows how an image of an object is formed on a screen by a converging lens?    screenobject2 \u00d7 focal lengtha screenobject2 \u00d7 focal length focal length focal lengthb screenobjectc screenobjectd      24 when the volcano krakatoa erupted in 1883, it was heard 5000  km away.    which statement about the sound from the volcano is not correct?  a if such a loud sound were to be made today, an astronaut orbiting in space (a vacuum) at a  height of 400  km could hear it.  b people further from the volcano heard the so und later than people nearer to the volcano.  c the amplitude of the sound waves would have been smaller further from the volcano.  d the sound was very loud because a lot of energy was transferred to vibrations of the air.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13 [turn over  25 a loudspeaker on a boat produces a pulse of sound in the sea. the echo of the pulse is received  back at the boat after 3.0  s. the depth of the sea under the boat is 2250  m.    pulse of sound sea bedboat (not to scale)    from this information, what is the speed of sound in the sea water?  a 330  m / s b 750  m / s c 1500  m / s d 6750  m / s     26 how can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?  a cool the magnet for a long time  b hit the magnet repeatedly with a hammer  c leave the magnet in a coil which is connected to a battery  d shine bright light onto the magnet     27 a hard magnetic material can be used to make a permanent magnet.    a soft magnetic material can be used to make a temporary magnet.   which row shows whether iron and steel are hard or soft magnetic materials?     iron steel  a hard hard  b hard soft  c soft hard  d soft soft     28 which equation can be used to calculate the resistance r of a resistor?  a v = i \u00f7 r b i = v \u00d7 r c r = v  \u00d7 i d v = i \u00d7 r     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13  29 a student wishes to measure first the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery, and then the  potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor.    she has the resistor, the battery and some connecting wires.    what else does she need?  a a force meter (newton meter) and a voltmeter  b an ammeter and a voltmeter  c an ammeter only  d a voltmeter only      30 when the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the current in the lamp increases.        why does this happen?  a the resistance of the lamp decreases.  b the resistance of the lamp increases.  c the resistance of the thermistor decreases.  d the resistance of the thermistor increases.     31 two similar balloons hang side by side, on insulating threads, a short distance apart. they are  both rubbed with the same dry cloth and become charged.    which diagram shows how the balloons hang after charging?    a d b c     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13 [turn over  32 the circuit shown contains a relay.   both lamps are initially off.    lamp 1lamp 2 switch s  relay     when switch s is closed, the relay operates. what is the state of the lamps?     lamp 1 lamp 2  a on on  b on off  c off on  d off off      33 a student connects various resistors in parallel pairs.    underneath each diagram is a statement about the total resistance of each pair of resistors.    which statement is correct?    2 \u03c9a the total resistance is 4  \u03c9.2 \u03c95 \u03c9b the total resistance is between 1  \u03c9 and 5  \u03c9.1 \u03c9 10 \u03c9c the total resistance is less than 5  \u03c9.5 \u03c920 \u03c9d the total resistance is more than 20  \u03c9.10 \u03c9     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13  34 which diagram shows a movement that will not produce the changing magnetic field needed to  induce an e.m.f. in the coil?    ns ns ns nsa  b c d moving a magnet and a coil towards each other at the same speed moving a magnet and a coil in the same direction at the same speed moving a magnet away from a fixed coil moving a coil away from a fixed magnet       35 the diagram shows the connections to an electric heater. three fuses have been added to the  circuit.    fuse 3fuse 1 fuse 2 heate rplastic case live neutralheating element     which of the fuses are correctly placed?  a fuse 1, fuse 2 and fuse 3  b fuse 1 and fuse 2 only c fuse 1 only  d fuse 2 only   ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13 [turn over  36 a transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240  v a.c. into 4800  v a.c.    npns 240  v a.c. 4800  v a.c.     which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?     number of turns  on primary coil np number of turns  on secondary coil ns  a 50 1000  b 240 48  000  c 480 24  d 2000 100      37 the diagram shows a simple d.c. electric motor which is rotating.    sn magnet magnet coil     which change will make the motor rotate more quickly?  a increasing the number of turns on the coil  b removing the magnets  c reversing the battery  d reversing the polarity of the magnets     ",
            "16": "16      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/12/o/n/13  38 a radioactive substance emits a particle from the nucleus of one of its atoms. the particle  consists of two protons and two neutrons.    what is the name of this process?  a \u03b1-emission  b \u03b2-emission  c \u03b3-emission  d nuclear fission      39 a nucleus x has 17 protons and 18 neutrons.    which notation is correct for this nucleus?  a x17 18 b x1735 c x1817 d x3517     40 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube used to produce cathode rays.    \u2013\u2013++ current ianodefilament (cathode) metal platescathode-ray tube power supply     which change would increase the deflection of the cathode rays?  a decreasing the current i in the filament  b increasing the current i in the filament  c increasing the potential difference between the filament and the anode  d increasing the potential difference between the metal plates       "
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib13 11_0625_13/6rp  \u00a9 ucles 2013  [turn over      *1728159141* university of cambridge international examinations  international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2013     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  1 a cyclist rides round a track three times.        her friend uses a stopwatch to record the time at the start of the ride, after one circuit, and at the end of the three circuits. the readings from the stopwatch are shown.    at the startafter one circuitat the end of three circuits    what is the average time for one circuit of the track?  a 174  s b 180  s c 198  s d 200  s     2 the graph shows how the distance travelled by a vehicle changes with time.    0 0distance timepqr s     which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?     p to q q to r r to s  a constant zero constant  b constant zero decreasing  c increasing constant decreasing  d increasing zero decreasing     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13 [turn over  3 a small steel ball is dropped from a low balcony.    ignoring air resistance, which statement describes its motion?  a it falls with constant acceleration.  b it falls with constant speed. c it falls with decreasing speed. d it falls with increasing acceleration.     4 which is the unit for force and which is the unit for weight?    force weight  a kg kg  b kg n  c n kg  d n n     5 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  6 a student is given four different objects and a metre rule.   each object has a known mass. she is asked to determine the densities of the materials from  which the four objects are made.    the objects are a copper cylinder, a glass cube, a steel spanner and a stone tile.    copper glass steel stone    using only the metre rule, she is able to find the densities of only three of the four materials.    which three materials are these?  a copper, glass and steel  b copper, glass and stone  c copper, steel and stone  d glass, steel and stone     7 the diagrams show a steel spring and a graph of its length against the load applied to it.    loadlengthsteel spring16 141210 86420 0 1 02 03 0 load  / n40 50length  / cm     what is the extension of the spring when a load of 20  n is applied to it?  a 3.0  cm b 4.5  cm c 5.0  cm d 8.0  cm     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13 [turn over  8 a box is being moved by a fork-lift truck. the total weight of the box is 3000  n.    fork-lift truck box      the force exerted by the fork-lift truck on the box is 3500  n upwards.    what is the resultant force on the box?  a 500  n downwards  b 500  n upwards  c 6500  n downwards  d 6500  n upwards     9 an aeroplane is landing. as it descends towards the runway, its speed reduces.    what are the energy changes that take place during the descent?  a kinetic  +  gravitational  \u2192  thermal (heat)  b kinetic  \u2192  gravitational  +  thermal (heat)  c kinetic  +  thermal (heat)  \u2192  gravitational  d thermal (heat)  \u2192  kinetic  +  gravitational       10 energy from uranium is transferred to electrical energy in a nuclear power station.    what is the correct order of the stages of this process?  a boiler \u2192 generator \u2192 reactor \u2192 turbine  b generator \u2192 boiler \u2192 turbine \u2192 reactor  c reactor \u2192 boiler \u2192 turbine \u2192 generator  d reactor \u2192 turbine \u2192 boiler \u2192 generator     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  11 it is dangerous for submarines to dive to very great depths.    why is it dangerous?  a the density of water is less at greater depths.  b the pressure of water is greater at greater depths. c the temperature of water is higher at greater depths. d the weight of the submarine is greater at greater depths.     12 which block exerts the greatest pressure on the surface below it?    weightweight 100100  nweightweight 100100  nweight 100  nweight 100  nweightweight 200200  nweightweight 200200  nweight 200  nweight 200  nabc d area 10  cm2area 10  cm2 area 20  cm2area 20  cm2      13 a closed flask of gas is placed in a cold-water bath.    cold water gasthermometer     as the flask cools, the temperature of the gas decreases.    what happens to the molecules of the gas?  a they contract.  b they expand.  c they move more quickly.  d they move more slowly.   ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13 [turn over  14 a block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. the  water evaporates from the newspaper.    which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water  molecules that remain in the newspaper?     escaping molecules average speed of the  remaining water molecules  a the less energetic ones decreases  b the less energetic ones increases  c the more energetic ones decreases  d the more energetic ones increases    15 equal masses of two different liquids are heated using the same heater. the graph shows how  the temperature of each liquid changes with time.    temperature  timeliquid 1 liquid 2 0 0    what does the graph tell us about the liquids?  a liquid 1 has a higher melting point than liquid 2.  b liquid 1 has a higher boiling point than liquid 2. c liquid 1 starts to melt sooner than liquid 2. d liquid 1 starts to boil sooner than liquid 2.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  16 a wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.    wooden wheel iron circle     which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?  a cooling the iron circle  b heating the iron circle  c heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle  d heating the wooden wheel but not heating or cooling the iron circle      17 a piece of hot metal is held by a clamp in a cold room. the air next to the metal becomes hot.      the density of the air changes and the air moves.   hot metalclamp     which row shows the density change of the air and the direction in which the air moves?     density of air movement of air  a decreases downwards  b decreases upwards  c increases downwards  d increases upwards    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13 [turn over  18 a rod is made half of glass and half of copper. four pins, a, b, c and d are attached to the rod  by wax. the rod is heated in the centre as shown.    which pin falls off first?    heatpin apin bpin cpin dglass copper      19 which row shows an example of a transverse wave and an example of a longitudinal wave?     transverse longitudinal  a light radio  b radio sound  c sound water  d water light      20 water waves may be used to demonstrate refraction by making them pass into water of a  different depth.    deep watershallow water wavefrontswave direction     why does the water wave change direction as it passes into the shallow water?  a the frequency of the wave decreases.  b the frequency of the wave increases. c the speed of the wave decreases.  d the speed of the wave increases.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  21 infra-red waves, microwaves, radio waves and sound waves are all used for communications.    which waves travel at the same high speed in a vacuum?  a infra-red waves, microwaves and radio waves  b infra-red waves, microwaves and sound waves c infra-red waves, radio waves and sound waves  d microwaves, radio waves and sound waves     22 the diagram represents a converging lens forming an image of an object.    r pqobject imagesconverging lens     which distance is the focal length of the lens?  a pq b pr c qr d qs    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13 [turn over  23 a teacher demonstrates the dispersion of white light using a triangular glass prism.    which diagram shows how this dispersion happens?    white light spectrumwhite light spectrumab prism white light spectrumwhite light spectrumcd prism      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  24 to estimate the width of a valley, a climber starts a stopwatch as he shouts. he hears an echo  from the opposite side of the valley after 1.0  s.  valleysound climber    the sound travels at 330  m / s.   what is the width of the valley?  a 82.5  m b 165  m c 330  m d 660  m      25 a police car sounds its siren when travelling to an emergency. the siren produces two different  sounds p and q, which are emitted alternately.    the diagram represents the sound waves emitted by the siren.    pppp qqqq     which of the two sounds p and q is t he louder and which has the higher pitch?     louder  sound sound of  higher pitch  a p p  b p q  c q p  d q q    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13 [turn over  26 in which pair are both metals ferrous?  a aluminium and copper  b aluminium and steel  c copper and iron  d iron and steel      27 how can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?  a cool the magnet for a long time  b hit the magnet repeatedly with a hammer  c leave the magnet in a coil which is connected to a battery  d shine bright light onto the magnet      28 a negatively charged plastic rod p is placed above a positively charged plastic rod q.    +++++q\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013p     what are the directions of the electrostatic forces on rod p and on rod q?     electrostatic force  on rod p electrostatic force  on rod q  a downwards downwards  b downwards upwards  c upwards downwards  d upwards upwards     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  29 a student wishes to measure first the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery, and then the  potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor.    she has the resistor, the battery and some connecting wires.    what else does she need?  a a force meter (newton meter) and a voltmeter  b an ammeter and a voltmeter  c an ammeter only  d a voltmeter only      30 two similar balloons hang side by side, on insulating threads, a short distance apart. they are  both rubbed with the same dry cloth and become charged.    which diagram shows how the balloons hang after charging?    a d b c      31 the diagram shows an electrical component.        what is it?  a a capacitor  b a light-dependent resistor c a thermistor d a variable resistor     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13 [turn over  32 the diagram shows a circuit.    a     what should be increased to increase the current in the circuit?  a the e.m.f. of the battery  b the length of the connecting wires  c the resistance of the resistor  d the temperature of the resistor      33 the circuit shown contains a relay.   both lamps are initially off.    lamp 1lamp 2 switch s  relay     when switch s is closed, the relay operates. what is the state of the lamps?     lamp 1 lamp 2  a on on  b on off  c off on  d off off     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  34 an electric motor is connected to the mains supply by insulated wires. the circuit is protected by  a fuse, but the connecting wires become hot.    live neutralmoto rinsulated connecting wire insulated connecting wirem     how could the wires be prevented from becoming so hot?  a connect a second fuse in the neutral wire.  b use a fuse with a higher current rating. c use thicker connecting wires. d use thicker insulation on the connecting wires.     35 the diagram shows a transformer.      core  wire coil     which materials are suitable to use in its construction?     core wire coil  a copper iron  b iron copper  c steel copper  d steel iron    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13 [turn over  36 the direction of the current flowing in a straight wire x is into the paper.    which diagram shows the shape of the magnetic field pattern around the wire?    a bcd x x x x      37 a metal rod pq rests on two horizontal metal wires that are attached to a battery. the rod lies  between the poles of a magnet.    pqn smetal rodmagnet magnet    when the switch is closed, the rod moves to the right.    what could be changed so that the rod moves to the left?  a open the switch.  b reverse the battery terminals and exchange the poles of the magnet.  c reverse the battery terminals but without exchanging the poles of the magnet.  d turn the metal rod around (p and q exchanged).     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  38 the diagram shows the screen of a cathode-ray tube. cathode rays produced behind the screen  strike the screen at p. on their way to the scr een, the cathode rays pass between two parallel  metal plates.    p sscreen     which arrangement of the metal plates will cause the beam to be deflected and strike the screen  at s?    +\u2013a + \u2013b + \u2013 +\u2013cd     39 why are some radioactive sources stored in boxes made from lead?  a lead absorbs emissions from the radioactive sources.  b lead decreases the half-life of radioactive sources.  c lead increases the half-life of radioactive sources.  d lead repels emissions from the radioactive sources.     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  40 a nucleus of helium has the symbol he.3 2     which diagram represents an atom of he?3 2     pp p n e= proton = neutron= electronpa e epp nb e e nnc e ee nn pd e ekey      ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2013 0625/13/o/n/13  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nh/sw) 64825/7 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *5310358764* physics 0625/21 paper 2 core october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 a wind turbine can be seen through the window of the igcse physics class laboratory, as  shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1  the blades on the wind turbine are turning slowly, so a student uses a laboratory stopclock to time 40 rotations of the blades.  fig. 1.2 shows the stopclock after 40 rotations of the blades. 60 305 10 minutes hand seconds hand15 455055 20 25 3540start reset stop fig. 1.2  (a) (i) state the reading on the stopclock.  reading = . minutes . seconds [1]   (ii) calculate the time, in seconds, for one rotation of the blades.  time for one rotation =  ..  s [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) later in the day, the blades of the wind turbine are found to take 15 s to rotate once.   the tip of the blade travels in a circle of circumference 75 m.   calculate the average speed of the tip of the blade.  average speed =  .. m / s [3] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 (a) the mass of 35 cm3 of mercury is measured as 476 g.   calculate the density of mercury. give the unit.  density = ...[4]  (b) the density of water is much less than the density of mercury.   how does the mass of 35 cm3 of water compare with the mass of 35 cm3 of mercury?   tick one box.   mass of water is less than mass of mercury     mass of water is the same as mass of mercury     mass of water is greater than mass of mercury   [1]  (c) the mercury in a thermometer expands when it is heated.   (i) what happens to the mass of the mercury? tick one box.     decreases      stays the same      increases    (ii) what happens to the density of the mercury? tick one box.     decreases      stays the same      increases   [2]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use3 (a) state what is meant by the moment of a force.  ..  ..[1]  (b) a plank balances horizontally on a log of wood, which acts as a pivot.   a girl sits on one end of the plank, and a boy pushes down on the other end to keep the  plank horizontal. fig. 3.1 shows this arrangement. pivot fig. 3.1   (i) what two things can be said about the moments caused by the boy and by the girl? 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]   (ii) there are four forces acting on the plank when it is in equilibrium. three of the  forces are:     \u0081 the weight of the girl    \u0081 the weight of the plank    \u0081 the force provided by the boy    1. where does the fourth force act?  ..    2. what is the direction of this force?  ..  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) state what is meant by the frequency of the vibration of a vibrating object.  ..  ..[2]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows a tuning fork. its frequency is indicated by the number on the handle. 512  hz handlea b fig. 4.1   when the tuning fork is struck on a solid surface, the prongs a and b vibrate as indicated  by the arrows.   (i) explain how a sound is produced and transmitted when the prongs are vibrating.  .. .. .. .. [3]   (ii) after the tuning fork was struck on the solid surface, the sound from the tuning fork  gradually gets quieter.    state what happens to the tuning fork to cause this.  .. .. [1]   (iii) another tuning fork is marked with 256 hz, to indicate its frequency.    state how the sound from this tuning fork compares with the sound from the tuning  fork in fig. 4.1.  .. .. [2]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 the apparatus in fig. 5.1 is used to investigate temperature rise when some water is heated. + \u2013 heater beakerlagging water fig. 5.1  (a) name the instrument used to measure the temperature of the water.  ..[1]  (b) state the purpose of the lagging. .. ..[1]  (c) describe how the mass of the water may be determined, stating the apparatus you  would use.  .. .. .. .. .. ..[4]  (d) the heater is switched on and eventually the water starts to boil.   state two things that may be observed about the water when it is boiling. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) a ray of red light passes through a rectangular glass block, as shown in fig. 6.1. 26\u00b0glass block45\u00b0a b e fig. 6.1   (i) what name describes what happens to the ray of light at b?  ..   (ii) on fig. 6.1, the emergent ray is not drawn at the correct angle  \u03b8  to the normal.    state the correct value of the angle \u03b8.  \u03b8 =  ..  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) a ray of blue light is directed into a glass prism, as shown in fig. 6.2. screen air glass prismair normal ray of blue light fig. 6.2   (i) using your ruler, draw a possible path for the blue light, until it reaches the screen.   (ii) the ray of blue light is replaced by a ray of red light.    on fig. 6.2, mark an x to show where the red light might hit the screen.  [3]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 is a ray diagram for a converging lens. object image fig. 7.1  (a) on fig. 7.1, clearly mark and label   (i) the focal length of the lens,   (ii) one principal focus of the lens (use the letter f).  [2]  (b) the following can be used to describe the image formed by a lens. enlarged diminished inverted upright image distance  greater than object distanceimage distance less than object distance   put ticks in the boxes containing descriptions that apply to the image in fig. 7.1. [3]  (c) on fig. 7.1, draw one more ray from the top of the object to the top of the image. [1]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use8 fig. 8.1 shows the outline of a bar magnet. a compass needle is being used to show the  magnetic field pattern around the bar magnet. the needle is a small, freely-pivoted magnet. s n fig. 8.1  (a) the compass is placed to the left of the n pole of the magnet. its needle points in the direction shown by the arrow.   four other positions are indicated around the magnet, each marked by a circle.   in each circle, draw an arrow to indicate the direction in which the compass needle  would point at each of these positions. other magnetic fields can be ignored. [4]  (b) five pieces of metal are placed, in turn, near the s pole of the magnet.   in the table below tick the box that states what happens to each of the different metals.  an example has been given to help you. type of metalattracted by  magnetrepelled by magnetno effect gold \u2713 aluminium copperironsteel  [4]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows a series circuit. the resistances of the ammeter and of the battery may be  ignored. 6.0 v xareading 250  ma fig. 9.1  (a) what is component x? tick one box.    bell     fuse     relay     resistor   [1]  (b) state the value of   (i) the e.m.f. of the battery,  ..   (ii) the potential difference across component x,     (iii) the current in the circuit.  .  [3]  (c) use values from fig. 9.1 to calculate the resistance of component x. give the unit.  resistance =  ..[4]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) a resistor r is connected in parallel with component x.   state what effect, if any, this has on   (i) the total resistance of the circuit, ..   (ii) the reading on the ammeter, ..   (iii) the current in component x. ..  [3]  [total: 11]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 the transformer in fig. 10.1 is to be connected to a circuit containing two electric motors. output 18 v240  v secondary coilprimary coil 4800 turns fig. 10.1  to operate at full speed, each motor requires a voltage of 18 v.  at a lower voltage the motors will operate but at a lower speed.  (a) on fig. 10.1, draw the two motors connected in parallel across the output of the  transformer. use the circuit symbol m to represent each motor. [1]  (b) calculate the number of turns needed in the secondary coil in order to supply 18 v.  number of turns =  ..[3]  (c) the motors are now connected in series across the output of the transformer.   state the effect on the motors.  ..  ..[1]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 a radiation detector is used to monitor the radiation from a radioactive source. a ratemeter  records the number of counts per minute.  (a) the source is brought close to the detector. the table below shows how the ratemeter reading varies with time. time / s 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 ratemeter reading counts / min300 230 184 142 108 92 74 60 50 42 count rate due to source counts / min280 164 88 54 40 30 22   (i) the bottom row gives the count rate due only to the source.    fill in the missing values. [1]   (ii) from the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive source.  half-life =  ... s [2]  (b) even when the source is a long way from the detector, the ratemeter registers a reading of 20 counts / min.   suggest a cause of this 20 counts / min.  ..  ..[1]  [total: 4] question 12 is on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/21/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use12 (a) how many protons are in the nucleus of an atom of 212 84po?  [1]  (b) how many neutrons are in the nucleus of an atom of 212 84po? .. [1]  (c) (i) how many electrons are in a neutral atom of 212 84po? ...   (ii) where in the atom are these electrons to be found?  ..  [2]  (d) when a nucleus of 212 84po decays by emitting an alpha-particle, it becomes a nucleus of  lead (pb).   the equation below represents this process. 212 84po  x ypb + 42\u03b1   deduce the values of x and y .  x = ..  y = ..  [2]  [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nf/jg) 64874/6 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *1185896176* physics 0625/22 paper 2  core october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 a slope is made by resting one end of a plank of wood on a block, as shown in fig. 1.1. plank trolley fig. 1.1  three students each use a digital stopwatch to time a small trolley rolling down the full length  of the slope.  the times on their stopwatches as the trolley reached the bottom of the slope are shown in fig. 1.2. student 1 student 2 student 3time = ... s time = ... s time = ... smin sec1/100 min sec1/100 min sec1/100 fig. 1.2  (a) on the line next to each stopwatch, write the time measured by each student. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) calculate the average time measured for the trolley to roll down the slope. show your  working.  average time =  ... s  [2]  (c) what other measurement must be taken in order to be able to calculate the average  speed of the trolley?  . [1]  (d) suggest one change that might be made to the arrangement in fig. 1.1 so that the  same trolley takes less time to roll down the full length of the slope.  . [1]  [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 a lorry travels at constant speed for 50 s and then steadily slows down, taking another 50 s to  come to a stop.  fig. 2.1 is the speed-time graph for the 100 s. 10 8 64 2 0 0 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 0 90 100 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 2.1  (a) calculate the distance travelled by the lorry in the first 50 s.  distance =  .  m  [3]  (b) calculate the distance travelled between 50 s and 100 s.  distance =  .  m  [2]  (c) calculate the total distance travelled.  distance =  .  m  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) (i) a car takes 60 s to travel the distance calculated in (c) at a constant speed.    calculate the speed of the car.  speed =  .. [3]   (ii) on fig. 2.1, draw the speed-time graph for the 60 s at this constant speed. [2]  [total: 11] 3 (a) (i) state one example of a fuel in which chemical energy is stored.  . [1]   (ii) state one example of a renewable source of energy. . [1]   (iii) state one energy resource that involves liquid water (not steam). . [1]  (b) state two reasons why it is important that nations investigate energy resources other  than fossil fuels (coal, oil, natural gas). 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) fig. 4.1 shows a boy in four positions on a flat floor.      fig. 4.1   (i) put a tick in the box under the position where the boy is exerting the least pressure  on the floor.   (ii) state the reason for your answer to (a)(i).  ..  ..  [2]  (b) the pressure of carbon dioxide in a container is being measured by means of a mercury  manometer. this is shown in fig. 4.2. carbon dioxide manometermercurygas cylinder h fig. 4.2   (i) how does the pressure of the carbon dioxide compare with atmospheric pressure?  complete the sentence below.    the pressure of the carbon dioxide is .. the atmospheric pressure. [1]   (ii) the atmospheric pressure increases.    state what happens to the value of the distance h, shown on fig. 4.2.  . [1]  [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows a wave on a water surface, at a particular instant. fig. 5.1  (a) on fig. 5.1, measure carefully, in mm, the wavelength of the wave.  wavelength =   mm [2]  (b) state what is meant by   (i) the frequency of a wave, .. ..   (ii) the amplitude of a wave. .. ..  [3]  (c) a large barrier, of height greater than the height of the wave in fig. 5.1, is put in the path  of the wave.   what, if anything, does this do to the wave? tick one box. it diffracts the wave. it does nothing to the wave. it reflects the wave. it refracts the wave.  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) a certain mass of water at  20 \u00b0c is heated using a 30 w immersion heater. initially the temperature rises at  4 \u00b0c per minute. eventually, the temperature  stops rising at 100 \u00b0c.the same mass of glycerol at 20 \u00b0c is heated using the same 30 w immersion heater. initially the temperature rises at  8 \u00b0c per minute. eventually, the temperature  stops rising at 290 \u00b0c.   state and explain   (i) which has the greater boiling point, water or glycerol, statement  .explanation  ... ..   (ii) which has the greater thermal capacity, the water or the glycerol.statement  .explanation  ... ..  [3]  (b) fig. 6.1 shows a cross-section through a room. floorceiling wall window metal case hot water fig. 6.1",
            "9": "9 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  the room is heated by a heater containing hot water. the heater is mounted on one  wall, as shown.   (i) by what process does thermal energy pass through the metal case of the heater in  fig. 6.1?  . [1]   (ii) state the two main processes by which the thermal energy from the heater is  transferred to the whole room. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]   (iii) one of the processes in (b)(ii) involves the air moving.    on fig. 6.1, draw arrows to show how the air moves in the room. [2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use7 fig. 7.1 shows circuit symbols for four electrical components. w x y z fig. 7.1  (a) in the box next to each component, write the name of that component. [4]  (b) in the space below, draw a circuit diagram that shows these four components connected  in series with an ammeter.  [2]  (c) the reading on the ammeter is gradually increased.   which one of the components is adjusted in order to do this? tick one box. w x y z [1]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use8 an igcse physics student is set a puzzle by his teacher.  he is given four rods, a, b, c and d, all painted white. he is told that two rods are permanent  magnets, another rod is made of iron and the final rod is made of copper. his teacher asks him to find out, by experiment, which rod is which.  fig. 8.1 shows the results the student obtains when he puts the rods next to each other. ab repel ac attract bd no effect fig. 8.1  (a) which two rods are magnets?   . and . [1]  (b) which is the iron rod?  [1]  (c) which is the copper rod? ... [1]  (d) what will be the result of putting   (i) b and c end to end,     ...   (ii) c and d end to end?     ..  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use9 fig. 9.1 shows a thick, vertical copper rod ab, of negligible resistance, connected into an  electrical circuit. ab passes through a hole in a horizontal card pqrs. + \u2013d.c. power supply4 1 p sa bq r fig. 9.1  (a) the d.c. power supply produces a current in the circuit, which causes a magnetic field  around ab.   (i) fig. 9.2 shows the view from above of the card pqrs, with the hole through which ab passes. pqr s fig. 9.2    on fig. 9.2, draw the pattern of the magnetic field around ab. include at least four magnetic field lines. [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) describe briefly how the pattern of the magnetic field may be shown experimentally.  .. .. .. . [2]  (b) the d.c. power supply contains a circuit breaker that operates at a current of 5 a.   (i) what is the purpose of the circuit breaker? .. .. .. . [1]   (ii) the power supply is set at 12 v and then switched on. the resistor has a resistance  of 4 \u03c9.    1.  calculate the current in the circuit of fig. 9.1.  current =    a    2.  deduce what, if anything, happens to the circuit breaker.  ..  ..  [4]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 fig. 10.1 shows a ray of light incident on a plane mirror at point a. mirrormirror ray of light a fig. 10.1  (a) the construction in this question requires you to draw rays carefully.   on fig. 10.1,   (i) draw the normal to the mirror at a,   (ii) draw the ray reflected at a,   (iii) label the angles of incidence i and reflection r at a, using the letters i and r.   [3]  (b) which of the following equations correctly links i and r? tick one box. i + r = 90\u00b0 i + r = 180\u00b0 i = r  [1]  (c) a second mirror is positioned as shown in fig. 10.1, parallel to the first mirror.   (i) continue the ray reflected from a, to show what happens to it after it reaches the  second mirror. [2]   (ii) state how the direction of the ray, after it has reflected from both mirrors, compares with its original direction.  . [1]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 (a) radon-220 is a radioactive gas. it decays by emitting \u03b1-particles. an \u03b1-particle is a  helium nucleus.   (i) what four particles together make up an \u03b1-particle?  ..   (ii) suggest one reason why the fact that radon-220 is a gas makes it potentially more dangerous than an \u03b1-emitting solid source of similar activity.  .. ..  [4]  (b) in the situations illustrated in fig. 11.1, the radioactive source is emitting \u03b1-particles,  \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. the detector is sensitive to all three types of radiation. the  apparatus is in air. d ca b radiation detector thickaluminiumthick paper 1 cm 2 cm 15 cm 1 cmradioactivesource fig. 11.1 (not to scale)   ignore background radiation.   state one of the situations, a, b, c or d where   (i) \u03b1-particles are detected, ..   (ii) only \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays are detected,    (iii) only \u03b3-rays are detected,    (iv) \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays are all detected. ..  [4]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 fig. 12.1 shows a locked box. fig. 12.1  (a) suggest what is stored in this box.  . [1]  (b) suggest why the box is locked. .. . [1]  (c) the interior of the box is lined with thick lead.   suggest the reason for this.  .. .. . [2]  [total: 4]"
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages dc (slm/sw) 64841/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *0185771738* physics 0625/23 paper 2 core october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. ",
            "2": "2 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 a ruler is used to measure the length of a piece of cotton, as shown in fig. 1.1. 1 0 cm23456789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16cotton fig. 1.1 (not actual size)  (a) use the ruler in fig. 1.1 to find the length of the piece of cotton.  length =   cm [2]  (b) the left-hand end of the cotton is moved to the 1.0 cm mark on the ruler.   on fig. 1.1, mark clearly and carefully, with an arrow, where the right-hand end will  reach on the ruler. [1]  (c) the piece of cotton is wound around a wooden rod.    the rod has a square cross-section. the cotton goes around the rod exactly 3 times, as  shown in fig. 1.2. fig. 1.2   calculate the thickness of the square wooden rod.    thickness =   cm [3]  [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows two athletes training for a race.  fig. 2.1  they run up a hill at steady speed.  (a) during the run up the hill,   (i) which form of energy decreases,   ..   (ii) which form of energy increases? ..  [2]  (b) state the three quantities that need to be known in order to calculate the useful power of  one of the athletes. 1.  ..2.  ..3.  ..  [2]  (c) the two athletes run side-by-side all the way to the top of the hill, but one athlete  develops more useful power than the other.   suggest a reason for this difference.  ..  ..[1]  [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 an explosion at x in a quarry is heard by a boy at y and a girl at z. their relative positions  are shown in fig. 3.1. x quarryboy 1700  mgirl explosion rock face yz fig. 3.1 (not to scale)  (a) the girl hears the explosion 5.0 s after she sees the explosion happening.   (i) explain why there is a delay between seeing and hearing the explosion.  .. .. .. [1]   (ii) the girl is standing 1700 m from the explosion site x.    calculate the speed of sound.  speed of sound =  ..[4]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the boy is standing at y, between the explosion site and the girl.   (i) when does he hear the explosion? tick one box.    immediately it happens     before the girl     at the same time as the girl     later than the girl \uf020 [1]   (ii) how does the sound heard by the boy compare with the sound heard by the girl?    tick one box.    the sound heard by the boy is quieter.     the sounds are equally loud.     the sound heard by the boy is louder. \uf020 [1]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 shows a common laboratory instrument. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 4.1  (a) state the name of this instrument.  ..[1]  (b) what does this instrument measure? ..[1]  (c) suggest the liquid that this instrument contains. ..[1]  (d) what must be done in order to make the instrument give a zero reading? .. .. .. .. ..[2]  (e) what happens within the instrument to make it give a reading larger than zero? .. ..[1] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a small object in front of a vertical plane mirror. pobjectplane mirror fig. 5.1   on fig. 5.1,   (i) mark carefully with a clear cross, labelled i, where the image of the object is  located, [2]   (ii) draw the path of a ray from the object to point p on the mirror, and its path after the ray is incident on the mirror, [2]   (iii) mark clearly the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at p . [2]  (b) when you look into a mirror, you see an image of your face.   state two characteristics of the image you see. 1.  .. 2.  ..  [2]  (c) if you look from a brightly-lit room into a thick glass window when it is dark outside, you  can see two images of your face.   suggest why there are two images.  .. ..[1]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 fig. 6.1 shows two light, uncharged balls a and b suspended next to each other on vertical,  insulating threads. ab fig. 6.1  (a) a and b are each given a positive charge.   (i) how will the two threads appear? tick one box.    both still vertical     further apart at the bottom     closer together at the bottom    (ii) explain your answer to (a)(i).  .. ..  [2]  (b) the charge on a is made negative, but b remains positively charged.   (i) how will the two threads appear? tick one box.    both still vertical     further apart at the bottom     closer together at the bottom    (ii) explain your answer to (b)(i). .. ..  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) ball a remains negatively charged and ball b remains positively charged. a rod with a  large positive charge is positioned to the left of a.   state what happens to a and to b. ball a   ball b    [2]  [total: 6] 7 three methods of transfer of thermal energy are conduction, convection and radiation.  (a) which one is involved when thermal energy is transferred through a solid? ..[1]  (b) which one can occur only in a liquid or a gas? ..[1]  (c) which two are impossible in a vacuum?... and  ...[2]  [total: 4]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 in alphabetical order, some major regions of the electromagnetic spectrum are gamma, infra-red,radio,ultra-violet,visible,x-rays.  (a) list these regions in order of decreasing wavelength. the first one has been filled in for you.   radio longest wavelength ...   ...   ...   ...   ...  shortest wavelength ...  [2]  (b) where in this list would you insert microwaves?   ..[1]  (c) a microwave oven is one device that makes use of microwaves.   explain why the design of microwave ovens must include effective screening, so that  microwaves do not escape. .. .. ..[1]  (d) suggest one other use for microwaves. ..[1]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 a 6.0 v battery is connected as shown in the circuit of fig. 9.1. 6.0 v 0.3 a 10 1 10 1q prx fig. 9.1  (a) the current to the right of point p is 0.3 a.   an ammeter is inserted into the circuit.   what value will the ammeter show when it is inserted  (i) at q,  .   (ii) at r?  .  [2]  (b) calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across one of the 10 \u03c9 resistors.  potential difference =  .. v [3]  (c) (i) state the name of the component labelled x. .. [1]   (ii) deduce the value of the resistance of x when the 6.0 v battery is supplying 0.3 a to  the circuit.  resistance =  .. \u03c9 [1]   (iii) what happens to the current in the circuit when the resistance of x is increased?  .. [1]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a light-dependent resistor (ldr) connected with a 1000 \u03c9 resistor to  form a potential divider. 1000  1 + \u201312.0  v d.c. ldr fig. 10.1 \u0081 in daylight, the ldr has a resistance much lower than 1000 \u03c9. \u0081 in the dark, the ldr has a resistance much higher than 1000 \u03c9.   (i) what is the potential difference across the ldr when it is dark? tick one box.    0 v     greater than 0 v but less than 6.0 v     exactly 6.0 v     greater than 6.0 v but less than 12.0 v     12.0 v    (ii) explain your answer to (a)(i).  .. ..  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 10.2 shows the potential divider of fig. 10.1 connected to a relay and a lamp. 1000  1 relay coil 2000  1switch in relaylamp + \u201312 v d.c. ldr fig. 10.2   in order to close the switch in the relay, there must be at least 6.0 v across the relay coil.   (i) at a certain time, the potential difference across the relay coil is greater than 6.0 v.    describe how this potential difference causes the switch to close.  .. .. .. .. [3]   (ii) what happens to the lamp when the switch in the relay is closed?  .. [1]  (c) (i) the circuit of fig. 10.2 is positioned in a laboratory.    use your answers to (a) and (b) to deduce the condition in the laboratory that will  cause the lamp to glow. complete the sentence below. the lamp will glow when  ..  .. [1]   (ii) a similar circuit in the laboratory has a thermistor instead of the ldr.    which one of the following will cause this circuit to switch the lamp on or off? tick  one box.    change in temperature     change in light level     change in sound level     change in air pressure     change in background radiation  [1]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use11 (a) fig. 11.1 shows an arrangement to monitor the level of the fuel in the tank of a car. tank fueldetector of radioactive emissions plastic float containingradioactive sourcelevel indicator fig. 11.1   (i) suggest why the radioactive source in the float is unlikely to be an \u03b1-particle emitter.  ..  .. [1]   (ii) explain why the detector gives different readings for different fuel levels. .. .. .. [1]   (iii) comment on the value of the half-life of the radioactive source used in the float. .. .. [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) radium-226 (226 88ra) decays according to the equation below, emitting a particle x. 226 88ra  222 86rn + particle x   (i) how many protons are there in a nucleus of radium-226?   .. [1]   (ii) how many neutrons are there in a nucleus of radium-226? .. [2]   (iii) from the equation, deduce the nature of particle x.  particle x is  ... . [2] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 fig. 12.1 shows a simple transformer. coil a 5000 turnscore 240  v coil b250 turns fig. 12.1  coil a has 5000 turns and coil b has 250 turns.  (a) name a suitable material for    (i) the core,  ...   (ii) the coils.  ...  [2]  (b) coil a is connected to a 240 v alternating voltage.   calculate the output voltage across coil b.  output voltage =  .. v [3]  (c) three lamps each require a voltage equal to the output voltage of coil b in order to  operate at full brightness.   on fig. 12.1, show these three lamps, suitably connected to run at full brightness. use  the standard circuit symbol for each lamp. [2]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (nf/sw) 65162/6 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *1136975068* physics 0625/31 paper 3  extended october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 (a) state hooke\u2019s law.  .. . [1]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows a graph of the stretching force f acting on a spring against the extension  x of the spring. 0050100f / n x / mm150200250 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 fig. 1.1   (i) state the features of the graph that show that the spring obeys hooke\u2019s law. .. . [1]   (ii) calculate k, the force per unit extension of the spring.  k  =  ...[3]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) the limit of proportionality of the spring is reached at an extension of 50 mm.    continue the graph in fig. 1.1 to suggest how the spring behaves when the  stretching force is increased to values above 125 n. [1]   (iv) another spring has a smaller value of k. this spring obeys hooke\u2019s law for extensions up to 80 mm.    on the grid of fig. 1.1, draw a possible line of the variation of f with x  for this  spring. [1]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 a train has a total mass of 7.5 \u00d7 105 kg.  (a) the train accelerates from rest at a constant rate along a straight, horizontal track.  it reaches a speed of 24 m / s in 60 s.   calculate   (i) the train\u2019s acceleration,  acceleration =  .. [2]  (ii) the resultant force acting on the train.  force =  .. [2] (b) the train now travels with a constant speed of 24 m / s along a straight, horizontal track.  the total force opposing the motion due to friction and air resistance is 7.2 \u00d7 10 4 n.   (i) by considering the work done by the train\u2019s engine in 1.0 s, calculate its output power.  power =  .. [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the train begins to travel up a slope.    explain why the power of the train\u2019s engine must be increased to maintain the  speed of 24 m / s.  .. .. .. .. . [3]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 (a) (i) write down the names of three man-made devices in everyday use that depend,  for their action, upon the moments of forces. 1.  ... 2.  ... 3.  ...  [2]   (ii) fig. 3.1 shows a uniform rod ab acted upon by three equal forces f. ff fb a fig. 3.1    state two reasons why the rod is not in equilibrium. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 3.2 shows a uniform rod pq, supported at its centre and held in a horizontal position.  the length of pq is 1.00 m. 12 npq s0.30  m1.00  m fig. 3.2   a force of 12 n acts at a distance of 0.30 m from the support. a spring s, fixed at its  lower end, is attached to the rod at q.   (i) calculate the force exerted on pq by the spring.  force =  .. [2]   (ii) explain why it is not necessary to know the weight of pq.  .. . [1]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 (a) state the energy changes that take place when   (i) a cyclist rides down a hill without pedalling,  .. ..   (ii) a cyclist pedals up a hill at a constant speed. .. ..  [3]  (b) a car of mass 940 kg is travelling at 16 m / s.   (i) calculate the kinetic energy of the car.  kinetic energy =  .. [2]  (ii) the car is brought to rest by applying the brakes.    the total mass of the brakes is 4.5 kg. the average specific heat capacity of the  brake material is 520 j / (kg \u00b0c).    calculate the rise in temperature of the brakes. assume there is no loss of thermal energy from the brakes.  rise in temperature =  .. [3]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 one side of a copper sheet is highly polished and the other side is painted matt black.  the copper sheet is very hot and placed in a vertical position, as shown as in fig. 5.1. polished sidecopper sheet matt black side left hand right hand fig. 5.1  a student places her hands at equal distances from the sheet, as shown in fig. 5.1.  (a) explain   (i) why her hands are not heated by convection,  .. . [1]   (ii) why her hands are not heated by conduction. .. . [1]  (b) state and explain which  hand gets hotter.  .. .. . [2]  (c) it is suggested that one side of the copper sheet cools to a lower temperature than the  other side.   explain why this does not happen.  ..  .. . [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) complete the following statements by writing appropriate words in the spaces.   the pressure of a gas in a sealed container is caused by the collisions of    .. with the container wall.  an increase in the temperature of the gas increases the pressure because the   .. of the .. increases.  the force on the wall due to the gas is the pressure multiplied by the ..   of the wall. [2]  (b) a mountaineer takes a plastic bottle containing some water to the top of a mountain.  he removes the cap from the bottle, drinks all the water and then replaces the cap, as shown in fig. 6.1.   on returning to the base of the mountain, he finds that the bottle has collapsed to a  much smaller volume, as shown in fig. 6.2.  fig. 6.1 fig. 6.2   (i) explain why the bottle collapsed.  .. .. .. . [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) at the top of the mountain the atmospheric pressure was 4.8 \u00d7 104 pa and the  volume of the bottle was 250 cm3.    calculate the volume of the bottle at the base of the mountain where the pressure  of the air inside the bottle is 9.2 \u00d7 104 pa. assume no change of temperature.  volume =  .. [3]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows the surface of water in a tank. barrier fig. 7.1   straight wavefronts are produced at the left-hand end of the tank and travel towards a  gap in a barrier. curved wavefronts travel away from the gap.   (i) name the process that causes the wavefronts to spread out at the gap.  . [1]   (ii) suggest a cause of the reduced spacing of the wavefronts to the right of the barrier. . [1]   (iii) state how the pattern of wavefronts to the right of the barrier changes when the  gap is made narrower.  . [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 7.2 shows a wave travelling, in the direction of the arrow, along a rope. 2.4 m fig. 7.2   (i) explain why the wave shown in fig. 7.2 is described as a transverse wave.  .. . [1]   (ii) the speed of the wave along the rope is 3.2 m / s.    calculate the frequency of the wave.  frequency =  .. [3]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) describe an experiment that shows how a magnet can be used to produce a current in  a solenoid by electromagnetic induction. sketch and label the arrangement of apparatus you would use.  ..  .. . [3]  (b) fig. 8.1 represents a transformer with primary coil p and secondary coil s, wound on an  iron core.   there is an alternating current in coil p . psiron core fig. 8.1   (i) state what happens in the iron core as a result of the alternating current in p . .. . [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) tick the box next to the correct description of the current in s.     higher frequency a.c.     same frequency a.c.     lower frequency a.c.     rectified d.c.     constant d.c. [1]   (iii) coil p has 50 turns of wire, an applied voltage of 12 v, and a current of 0.50 a.  coil s has 200 turns.    calculate the current in s. assume the transformer is 100 % efficient.  current =  .. [3]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) state the relationship between   (i) the resistance r and the length l of a wire of constant cross-sectional area,   ..   (ii) the resistance r and the cross-sectional area a of a wire of constant length.  ..  [1]  (b) a 60 w filament lamp x is connected to a 230 v supply, as shown in fig. 9.1. x230  v fig. 9.1   calculate the current in the filament.  current =  .. [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) lamp y has a filament made of the same metal as the filament of lamp x in (b).   this filament has half the length and one-third of the cross-sectional area of the filament  of x.   lamp y is also connected to a 230 v supply.   calculate the ratio current in filament of y current in filament of x. show your working.  ratio =  .. [4]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows an electron beam travelling, in a vacuum, towards the space between a  pair of oppositely-charged parallel plates. +++++ +++++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013electron beam fig. 10.1   on fig. 10.1, draw carefully the path of the beam between the plates and in the space  to the right of the plates. [2]  (b) the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) has a grid of 1 cm squares. fig. 10.2 shows the trace of an alternating voltage on this screen. 1 cm1 cm fig. 10.2   (i) a potential difference of 5.0 v across the y -plates of the oscilloscope moves the spot on the screen a vertical distance of 1.0 cm.    use fig. 10.2 to determine the maximum p.d. across the y -plates.  maximum p.d. =  .. [1]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) the spot on the screen takes 1.0 ms to move 1.0 cm horizontally.    from fig. 10.2, determine the time for 1 cycle of the waveform on the screen, and  use this time to find the frequency of the alternating voltage.  frequency =  .. [3]  [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/31/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) describe the action of   (i) a not gate,  . [1]   (ii) a thermistor. . [1]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows a circuit that switches on a warning lamp when the temperature in an  oven falls below a set value. p rthermistor warning lamp fig. 11.1   explain, with reference to the components in the circuit and point p ,   (i) why the warning lamp is on when the temperature in the oven is below the set value, .. .. .. .. .. .. . [4]   (ii) the effect of changing the resistance of r. .. . [1]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (cw/cgw) 64811/6 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *8985843551* physics 0625/32 paper 3  extended october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 a school athlete does a sprint training run. fig. 1.1 shows how her speed varies with time. 22 0468 46 time  / sspeed m / s 81 0 0 fig. 1.1  (a) explain how the graph in fig. 1.1 can be used to determine the distance she runs.  .. ..[1]  (b) determine her maximum acceleration. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  maximum acceleration =  ..[4]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) she runs a distance of 62 m.   calculate her average speed.  average speed =  ..[2] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 fig. 2.1 shows a model fire engine used by a student to take measurements of force and  motion. firemodel fire engine containing water tank jet of water forcemeterlightbeams 12  mm fig. 2.1  the model projects a jet of water forwards. the forcemeter holds the model stationary.  it indicates a force of 0.060 n acting on the model.  the forcemeter is now disconnected and the model accelerates to the right at 0.030 m / s2.   (a) the back of the model breaks a pair of light beams and the time to pass between them is measured electronically. the beams are 12 mm apart and the second beam is broken 0.080 s after the first.   the student times with a stopwatch how long it takes from the release of the model until  the beams are cut.   calculate the time he measures.  time measured =  ..[4]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) this experiment is carried out with the water tank in the model nearly full.   calculate the mass of the model including the water in the tank.  mass =  ..[2]  (c) the student repeats the experiment with the same force but with the water tank nearly  empty.   state and explain how the acceleration will compare to that of the first experiment.  ..  .. .. .. ..[2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 (a) (i) state one similarity and one difference between vector and scalar quantities. similarity  ...difference  ..[2]   (ii) give an example of each quantity.vector quantity  ..scalar quantity  ..[2]  (b) fig. 3.1 is an overhead view of two tractors pulling a tree trunk. tractors 20 000  n30 000  n 20\u00b0tree trunk fig. 3.1   the force exerted by each tractor is indicated in the diagram.  in the space below, carefully draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant force on  the tree trunk. state the scale you use.   write down the magnitude of the resultant force and the angle between the resultant  force and one of the original forces.  magnitude of resultant force =  ..  direction of resultant force =  .. [4] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use4 fig. 4.1 shows a small, closed, transparent chamber containing smoke. bright lightsmoke in chambermicroscope closed transparent chamber fig. 4.1  the chamber is brightly lit and observed through a microscope. the smoke particles are  seen as very small, bright dots.  (a) describe the movement of the dots.  .. .. .. ..[2]  (b) explain, in terms of molecules, how this movement is caused. .. .. .. ..[2]  (c) describe what is seen as the smoke particles move towards and away from the observer. .. .. .. ..[1] [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 fig. 5.1 shows two identical metal cans, open at the top, used in an experiment on thermal  energy. the outside of can a is polished and the outside of can b is painted black. can a can bblack surfacepolishedsurface fig. 5.1  (a) the cans are heated to the same temperature. predict and explain the relative rates of  loss of thermal energy by infra-red radiation from the two cans.  .. .. .. ..[2]  (b) (i) a student is provided with the two cans, a supply of hot water and two thermometers.     describe the experiment he should carry out to test your answer to (a).  .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. [4]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) another student is given the same equipment but finds two polystyrene tiles.  fig. 5.2 shows the tiles alongside the cans. can a can bblack surfacepolishedsurface polystyrene tiles fig. 5.2    state how she could use the tiles to improve the experiment, and explain why this  is effective.  .. .. .. .. [2]  (c) the two cans are now filled with cold water and placed equal distances from a strong  source of infra-red radiation.   state and explain which can of water heats up more quickly.  ..  .. .. ..[2] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 (a) draw a straight line from each wave to the most appropriate speed on the right. wave speed light in air sound in air sound in water15 m / s  (1.5 \u00d7 10 m / s) 300 m / s (3 \u00d7 102 m / s) 1500 m / s (1.5 \u00d7 103 m / s) 1 500 000 m / s (1.5 \u00d7 106 m / s) 300 000 000 m / s (3 \u00d7 108 m / s) 1 500 000 000 m / s (1.5 \u00d7 109 m / s) [3]  (b) fig. 6.1 shows a railway-line testing-team checking a continuous rail of length 120 m.  the diagram is not to scale. earphone sensorsteel rail hammer fig. 6.1 (not to scale)",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  one tester strikes one end of the rail with a hammer. the other tester hears the sound  transmitted through the air and transmitted through the rail. he hears the two sounds at  different times.   the speed of sound in steel is 5000 m / s.   calculate the time difference, using your value from (a) for the speed of sound in air.  time difference =  ..[4] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a ray diagram of a converging lens forming the image i of the object o. ac observer\u2019s eyed ob i fig. 7.1   (i) put a tick in two boxes in the following list to describe the image formed by the lens  in fig. 7.1. description place two ticks in this column real virtual magnified (enlarged) same size diminished (smaller)   (ii) which length, on fig. 7.1, is the focal length of the lens?    circle one of the lengths below.     ab    bc    bd    cd  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) in this question, you will apply the laws of reflection for a plane mirror to a curved mirror.   this mirror is shown in fig. 7.2. the normal at any point on this mirror is the line from  that point to the point c. co mmirror p fig. 7.2   two rays have been drawn from the object o.   on fig. 7.2,  (i) draw the normal to the mirror at m, [1]   (ii) draw the ray reflected from m, [1]   (iii) draw the ray reflected from p , [1]   (iv) extend the reflected rays back to the right of the mirror and locate the image.     label this image i. [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 (a) a piece of wire has a resistance of 0.45 \u03c9.   calculate the resistance of another piece of wire of the same material with a third of the  length and half the cross-sectional area.  resistance =  ..[3]  (b) fig. 8.1 shows a circuit with three resistors, a power supply and four voltmeters.  v vvv reading v1 reading v4power supply 1 1 3 1 2 1i2i1 i3 i4 reading v2 reading v3 fig. 8.1",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (i) calculate the combined resistance of the three resistors.  resistance =  ..[3]   (ii) write down two relationships for the currents in the circuit. [2]   (iii) write down two relationships for the voltmeter readings in the circuit. [2] [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use9 (a) an electrical safety expert is inspecting a laundry. the main workroom has a very hot  and damp atmosphere.   the safety expert recommends that normal domestic light switches, as shown in fig. 9.1,  are replaced. fig. 9.1   (i) explain why this recommendation is made.  .. .. .. .. [2]   (ii) suggest how the lights should be switched on and off. .. .. .. .. [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) fig. 9.2 shows an aircraft being refuelled through a rubber hose.  fig. 9.2   (i) suggest how fuel flowing through the hose can cause a large build-up of electric  charge on the aircraft.  .. .. .. .. [2]   (ii) the aircraft is refuelled on a particular day when the tyres and wheels are wet.    explain why there will be no large build-up of charge in this case. .. .. .. .. [1] [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 (a) (i) fig. 10.1 shows the symbol for a logic gate. fig. 10.1 name this logic gate.  ..   (ii) draw the symbol for a nor gate. [2]  (b) (i) the two inputs of a nand gate are both low (logic level 0).write down the output state. ..   (ii) one input of a nand gate is low (logic level 0) and the other input is high (logic  level 1). write down the output state. .. [2]  (c) a logic gate contains a number of components.   circle one of the following that is contained in a logic gate. thermistor    transformer    transistor    transmitter [1] [total: 5]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use11 strontium-90 is a radioactive isotope that emits \u03b2-particles as it decays. the nuclear equation  below shows this decay. 90 38sr  abx + 0 \u20131e  (a) calculate    (i) the value of a,  a =  ..   (ii) the value of b.  b =  .. [2]  (b) (i) tick the element from the list below that is produced by this decay. element proton number place one tick in this column selenium 34 bromine 35krypton 36rubidium 37strontium 38yttrium 39zirconium 40niobium 41molybdenum 42  [1]   (ii) the isotope a bx is also radioactive and undergoes \u03b2-decay.    state the name of the element that is produced by this decay.  .. [1] question 11 continues on the next page.",
            "20": "20 0625/32/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) three nuclei are represented as 83 42x   209 83y   8442z   state and explain which nuclei are isotopes of the same element.  ..  .. .. ..[2] [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (slm/jg) 64758/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *6384565021* physics 0625/33 paper 3 extended october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 an archaeologist digging at an ancient site discovers a spoon. the spoon is made from an  unidentified material.   (a) the archaeologist suspects that the spoon is made of metal. she places it above a flame, as shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1   (i) she notices that the handle of the spoon quickly becomes very hot.    state why this observation supports the suggestion that the spoon is made of metal.  .. .. [1]   (ii) describe, in terms of its atoms, how thermal energy is transferred through a metal. .. .. .. .. .. [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the archaeologist hopes that, by determining its density, she will be able to identify the  metal.   describe a method for determining the density of the metal from which the spoon is  made.  .. .. .. .. .. .. ..[4]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 a spring s is suspended from a clamp stand in a school laboratory.  a student hangs various masses from the end of s and determines the extension x produced  by each mass.   (a) calculate the weight of a 250 g mass.  weight =  . [2]  (b) the student plots a graph of the force f applied to the spring against the extension x.  fig. 2.1 is the student\u2019s graph. 6.0 5.0 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0 0246 8 1 0 1 2p x / cmf / n fig. 2.1   at point p on the graph, the line begins to curve.    (i) state the name given to point p . .. .. [1]   (ii) use the section of the graph where spring s obeys hooke\u2019s law ( f = kx) to  determine the spring constant k of the spring.  k =  . [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) fig. 2.2 shows a mass of 0.12 kg resting on the bottom of a box. mass spring box fig. 2.2   a spring that is identical to s connects the mass and one side of the box. ignore friction  between the mass and the box.   (i) the box and the mass are at rest.    state the resultant force acting on the mass.  force =  . [1]   (ii) the box is firmly attached, in a horizontal position, to the body of a racing car.    as the car accelerates the spring stretches by 2.0 cm.    1. using fig. 2.1, determine the tension in the spring.  tension =  . [1]    2. calculate the acceleration of the mass produced by this tension.  acceleration =  . [2]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 fig. 3.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a crate on to a high shelf in a warehouse. fork-lift truckcrate fig. 3.1   the fork-lift truck lifts a crate of weight 640 n through a vertical distance of 3.5 m in 4.0 s.  (a) calculate the useful work done in lifting the crate.  work done =  . [2]  (b) a motor drives a mechanism to lift the crate. the current in the motor is 25 a. the motor  is connected to a 75 v battery.   calculate   (i) the energy supplied to the motor in 4.0 s,  energy =  . [2]   (ii) the overall efficiency of the fork-lift truck in lifting the crate.  efficiency =  . [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) not all of the energy supplied is used usefully in lifting the crate.    suggest two mechanisms by which energy is wasted. 1.  . 2.   [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 a child\u2019s toy launches a model parachutist of mass 0.40 kg vertically upwards. the model  parachutist reaches a maximum height of 8.5 m.  (a) calculate   (i) the gravitational potential energy gained by the model parachutist,   energy =  . [2]   (ii) the minimum possible speed with which the model parachutist was launched.  speed =  . [3] (b) in practice, the launch speed must be greater than the value calculated in (a)(ii).    explain why.  .. .. . [2]  (c) as the model parachutist returns to the ground, it loses gravitational potential energy.    explain what happens to this energy as the model parachutist falls through the air at  constant speed. .. . [1]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use5 the sun is a large sphere of high temperature gas. an extremely large quantity of energy  radiates from the sun into space every second.  (a) a process releases energy inside the sun and its temperature stays high.   state the name of this process.  . [1]   (b) a gardener stores water in a large, cylindrical metal drum. the drum is painted black and has no lid. on a bright, sunny day, the water evaporates quickly and the water level in the drum falls.   (i) suggest how, by using a drum of a different shape, the gardener can reduce the quantity of water lost by evaporation.  .. . [1]    (ii) the gardener is told that, by painting the drum white, he can reduce the quantity of  radiation absorbed and so reduce the rate of evaporation.    describe an experiment to show that black surfaces are better absorbers of radiation than white surfaces. y ou may include a diagram.  ..  .. .. .. . [4]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use6 a student uses a 2400 w electric kettle to obtain a value for the specific heat capacity of  sunflower oil.    fig. 6.1 shows the apparatus. plugthermometer kettle watchmeasuring jug fig. 6.1  the student uses a measuring jug and pours 1.5 kg of sunflower oil into the empty kettle. he  uses a thermometer to measure the temperature of the oil.  the kettle is switched on and left on for 50 s. the temperature of the oil increases by 32 \u00b0c.  the student assumes that all the electrical energy is transferred as thermal energy to the oil.  (a) calculate the value for the specific heat capacity of sunflower oil obtained by the student.  specific heat capacity =  . [4]  (b) state and explain whether the value for the specific heat capacity obtained by the student is too large or too small.  .. . [1]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overblank page",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use7 a ray of light from a laser passes from air into a clear, semi-circular, plastic block. fig. 7.1  shows the ray entering the block. normal 40\u00b0 light rayplastic block fig. 7.1  the ray continues in the same direction and meets the middle of the opposite surface at an angle of 40 \u00b0 to the normal. the refractive index of the plastic is 1.5.  (a) the ray continues into the air.   calculate the angle between the normal and the path taken by the light after it leaves  the block.  angle =  . [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the frequency of the light produced by this laser is 3.8 \u00d7 1014 hz and its wavelength in  the plastic block is 5.3 \u00d7 10\u20137 m (0.000 53 mm).   calculate   (i) the speed of light in this plastic,  speed =  . [2]  (ii) the speed of light in air.  speed =  . [2] (c) explain why the ray does not change direction as it enters the plastic block. .. .. ..[2]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use8 an a.c. power supply is connected in series with a metal-filament lamp. a cathode-ray  oscilloscope (c.r.o.) is in parallel with the lamp, as shown in fig. 8.1.  fig. 8.2 is the trace seen on the c.r.o. screen. power supplylamp cathode-rayoscilloscope fig. 8.1 fig. 8.2  a diode is inserted in the circuit, as shown in fig. 8.3.  powersupplylamp cathode-rayoscilloscope fig. 8.3 fig. 8.4  (a) (i) on fig. 8.4, draw the shape of the trace now seen on the screen.  [2]   (ii) suggest a device that uses a diode in this way.  . [1]  (b) state and explain the effect on the lamp of inserting the diode into the circuit. .. .. . [2]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use9 the a.c. supply from a power station is connected to the primary coil of a transformer. the  secondary coil is connected to long-distance transmission cables.  (a) the output voltage of the transformer is greater than the input voltage.    explain how a transformer produces this output voltage.  ..  .. .. .. .. . [4]  (b) there are energy losses in the transmission cables.    (i) explain why the energy losses become greater when the length of the transmission  cables is greater.  .. .. . [2]   (ii) discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using transmission cables of greater  cross-sectional area.   .. .. . [2]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use10 fig. 10.1 shows a variable resistor (rheostat) and a solenoid (long coil) connected to a  battery. solenoidvariable resistor battery fig. 10.1  the current in the solenoid produces a magnetic field.   (a) (i) on fig. 10.1, draw lines to show the pattern of the magnetic field due to the current.  [2]   (ii) state the feature of the pattern of the magnetic field lines that indicates the strength of the magnetic field at particular points.   .. . [1]  (b) state and explain the effect on the magnetic field of increasing the resistance of the  variable resistor.   .. .. .. . [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) in a laboratory vacuum chamber, some current-carrying coils produce a very strong  magnetic field near a source of \u03b1-particles.   fig. 10.2 shows the arrangement. _-particle source path of _-particlesuniform magneticfield intopage fig. 10.2   (i) in the shaded region of fig. 10.2, draw a possible path for the \u03b1-particles in the  magnetic field. [2]   (ii) state and explain the effect on this path of reversing the current in the coils.  .. .. . [2]  [total: 9]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use11 in a laboratory at a nuclear power station, a radiation detector is connected to a computer.  the readings recorded are displayed on the computer screen.  the detector is switched on. ten minutes later, at time t = 10 minutes, a small sample of radioactive material is removed from a nuclear reactor and placed near to the detector. readings are recorded for a further 40 minutes. fig. 11.1 shows the display. 0 0 1 02 03 04 05 0102030405060708090 time t / minutescount-rate counts  / minute fig. 11.1  (a) use fig. 11.1 to determine the background count-rate in the laboratory.   background count-rate =  . [1]  (b) use fig. 11.1 to determine the count-rate due to the radioactive sample   (i) at t = 10 minutes,  count-rate due to sample =  ..   (ii) at t = 19 minutes.  count-rate due to sample =  ..  [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) use the values obtained in (b) to estimate the half-life of the radioactive sample.  half-life =  . [2]  [total: 5]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (leg/sw) 65805/7 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *2655477732* physics 0625/51 paper 5  practical test october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will investigate the stretching of a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. do not move the large  load that is on the bench. at the start of the experiment, the spring should not be attached to  the forcemeter. forcemeter spring load benchunstretched spring load benchclamp          fig. 1.1               fig. 1.2           (a) (i) measure the unstretched length l 0 of the spring  , in mm.  l 0 =  mm   (ii) on fig. 1.1, mark clearly the distance you have measured.   (iii) attach the spring to the forcemeter, as shown in fig. 1.2. the load must remain on  the bench.   (iv) gently raise the forcemeter until it reads 1.0 n. clamp the forcemeter in this position.    record the forcemeter reading f in table 1.1. measure, and record in the table, the  new length l of the spring.   (v) calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation e = (l \u2013 l0). record the  value of e in the table.",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (vi) repeat steps (iv) and (v) using forcemeter readings of 2.0 n, 3.0 n, 4.0 n and 5.0 n.  record all the readings and results in the table. table 1.1 f / n l / mm e / mm  [4]  (b) plot a graph of e / mm (y-axis) against f / n (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  . [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of a thermometer bulb.   carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3. water waterclamp thermometerclampthermometer in position a  fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2 waterclampthermometer in position b fig. 2.3  place the thermometer in the beaker of hot water, as shown in fig. 2.1.  (a) (i) when the thermometer reading stops rising, record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot  water.  \u03b8h =  ..[1]   (ii) quickly move the thermometer until the thermometer bulb is in position a, just  above the beaker, as shown in fig. 2.2. immediately start the stopclock.   (iii) after 30 s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time  t = 30 s and the temperature reading in table 2.1.   (iv) continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30 s until you have six sets of readings.",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s usetable 2.1 position a position b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /  [5]  (b) complete the column headings in the table.  (c) replace the thermometer in the beaker of hot water. when the thermometer reading  stops rising, record the temperature \u03b8h.  \u03b8h =  ..[1]  (d) (i) quickly move the thermometer at least 10 cm away from the beaker to position b, as shown in fig. 2.3. immediately start the stopclock.   (ii) after 30 s, measure the temperature  \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the  temperature reading in table 2.1.   (iii) continue recording the temperature every 30 s until you have six readings.  (e) describe briefly a precaution that you took in order to make the temperature readings reliable.  .. ..[1]  (f) a scientist is using this experiment as part of research into convection currents of air  above hot water.   suggest two conditions that should be kept constant when this experiment is repeated. 1.  .. 2.  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the power of lamps in a circuit.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. a vxlamp 1 lamp 2power supply lamp 3y fig. 3.1  (a) (i) 1.  switch on. measure and record the potential difference v1 across lamp 1 and  the current i in the circuit. switch off.  v1 =  ..  i =  ..  [2]    2. calculate the power p1 of lamp 1 using the equation p1 = iv1.  p1 =  ..[1]   (ii) 1.  disconnect the voltmeter and reconnect it to measure the potential difference  v2 across lamp 2. switch on to take the reading and then switch off.  v2 =  ..    2. calculate the power p2 of lamp 2 using the equation p2 = iv2.  p2 =  ..  [1]   (iii) 1.  disconnect the voltmeter and reconnect it to measure the potential difference v 3 across lamp 3. switch on to take the reading and then switch off.  v3 =  ..     2. calculate the power p3 of lamp 3 using the equation p3 = iv3.  p3 =  ..  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iv) 1.   disconnect the voltmeter. reconnect the voltmeter to measure the potential  difference v across all three lamps. switch on to take the reading and then  switch off.  v =  ..    2. calculate the total power pt of the three lamps using the equation pt = iv.  pt =  ..  [1]  (b) a student suggests that pt should be equal to p1 + p2 + p3.   state whether your results support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference  to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [1]  (c) (i) draw a circuit diagram, similar to that in fig. 3.1, to show    \u0081 a variable resistor in series with the power supply,    \u0081 the three lamps in parallel with each other between x and y,    \u0081 the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the lamps.    use standard symbols. y ou are not asked to set up this circuit.  [2]   (ii) state the purpose of the variable resistor in this circuit. .. .. .. [1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. illuminated object lensscreenuv fig. 4.1  (a) place the lens a distance u = 30.0 cm from the illuminated object. move the screen until  a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.   (i) measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.  v =  ..[1]   (ii) calculate uv.  uv =  ..   (iii) calculate (u + v ).  (u + v ) =  ..  [1]   (iv) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = uv (u + v).  f =  ..[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (b) repeat the steps in (a) using u = 40.0 cm.  v =  ..  uv =  ..  u  + v =  ..  f =  ..  [2]  (c) (i) check that u = 40.0 cm. carefully move the screen backwards and forwards to  obtain the range of v values for which the image is well focused.  range of v values = ... to ... [1]   (ii) from your results in parts (a) and (b), calculate an average value fav for the focal  length of the lens, giving your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  f av =  ..[2]   (iii) state two precautions that you could take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...  ..2.  ...  ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/jg) 65726/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *5833808786* physics 0625/52 paper 5  practical test october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will investigate pendulums.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 1.1 and 1.2. l bob one complete oscillationclamp clamp  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  a pendulum has been set up for you.  (a) adjust the pendulum until its length l = 30.0 cm. the length l is measured to the centre  of the bob.  (b) displace the pendulum bob slightly from its vertical position and release it so that it  swings. measure and record in table 1.1 the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the  pendulum (see fig. 1.2).  (c) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.   record the value of t in the table.  (d) adjust the length of the pendulum until its length l = 60.0 cm. repeat steps (b) and (c). table 1.1 l / cm t / s t / s 30.0 60.0  [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (e) a student suggests that doubling the length l of the pendulum should double the  period t.   state whether your results support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference  to the results. statement  .justification  ... .. ..  [2]  (f) another student suggests that   l should be directly proportional to t2. the student plots  a graph of l against t2.   state two pieces of information from the graph that would indicate that l is directly  proportional to t2. 1.  ..2.  ..  [2]  (g) remove the pendulum and replace it with the other pendulum provided. this pendulum  has a mass that is double the mass of the first pendulum.   adjust the length of the pendulum until its length  l = 30.0 cm. repeat steps (b) and (c).  record the readings in table 1.2. table 1.2 l / cm t / s t / s 30.0  [1]  (h) suggest a conclusion about the effect of doubling the mass of the pendulum.  .. . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 in this laboratory investigation, you will investigate the cooling of water by four different  methods.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water.  experiment a (cooling with stirring).  (a) (i) pour approximately 200 cm3 of the hot water supplied into beaker 1. place the  thermometer in the beaker of water. when the thermometer reading stops rising,  record the temperature \u03b81.  \u03b81 =  ...   (ii) start the stopclock and stir the water for one minute. record the temperature \u03b82 of  the water.  \u03b82 =  ...   (iii) calculate the temperature difference ( \u03b81\u2013\u03b82).  ( \u03b81\u2013\u03b82) =  ..  [3]  experiment b (cooling with pouring).  (b) (i) empty beaker 1 . pour approximately 200 cm3 of the hot water supplied into  beaker 2. place the thermometer in the beaker of water. when the thermometer  reading stops rising, record the temperature \u03b83.  \u03b83 =  ...   (ii) remove the thermometer. carefully pour the water from beaker 2 into beaker 1.  pour the water back into beaker 2. repeat this process four times.   (iii) place the thermometer in the beaker of water. record the temperature \u03b84 of the  water.  \u03b84 =  ...   (iv) calculate the temperature difference ( \u03b83\u2013 \u03b84).  ( \u03b83\u2013 \u03b84) =  ...  [1]  experiment c (cooling with a lid) and experiment d (cooling without a lid). (c) (i) empty both beakers.   (ii) pour approximately 200 cm 3 of the hot water supplied into beaker 1 . place the  thermometer in the beaker of water. when the thermometer reading stops rising,  record the temperature  \u03b85.  \u03b85 =  ...",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) pour approximately 200 cm3 of the hot water supplied into beaker 2. place the  thermometer in the beaker of water. when the thermometer reading stops rising,  measure the temperature \u03b86.  \u03b86 =  ...   (iv) place the lid on beaker 1. start the stopclock. allow both beakers to cool for  3 minutes.   (v) at the end of the 3 minute cooling period, record the temperature \u03b87 of the water in  beaker 1 and the temperature \u03b88 of the water in beaker 2.  \u03b87 =  ...  \u03b88 =  ...   (vi) calculate the temperature difference  (\u03b85\u2013 \u03b87).  ( \u03b85\u2013 \u03b87) =  ..   (vii) calculate the temperature difference  (\u03b86\u2013 \u03b88).  ( \u03b86\u2013 \u03b88) =  ...  [3]  (d) rank the experiments in order with the one that produced the greatest temperature drop first.    greatest temperature drop 1.  ..     2.  ..     3.  ..    smallest temperature drop 4.  ..  [1]  (e) if this laboratory investigation is to be repeated many times to check the results, suggest one condition that should be kept constant in order to provide reliable results.  . [1]  (f) a student complains that the investigation is not a fair comparison.   suggest one way in which the investigation could be made more fair.  .. . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a wire.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1 which shows the circuit that has  been set up for you. x va acbpower supply resistance wire metre rule fig. 3.1  y ou are provided with a length of resistance wire ab.  (a) (i) place the sliding contact c on the resistance wire ab at a distance x from a, where  x = 0.200 m.   (ii) record the value of x in table 3.1.   (iii) switch on. measure the potential difference v across the wire between a and c.  record the value of v in table 3.1.   (iv) measure the current i in the wire.   i =  .. [1]   (v) take the sliding contact away from the wire ab and switch off.   (vi) calculate the resistance r of the section ac of the wire using the equation r = v i.    record r in table 3.1. table 3.1 x / m v / v r / \u03c9  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) repeat the steps in (a) with the sliding contact at distances x = 0.350 m, 0.500 m,  0.650 m and 0.800 m from a.  (c) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 ( y-axis) against x / m (x-axis).  [4]  (d) using your graph, determine the length l of the resistance wire necessary to make a  resistor of resistance 1.2 \u03c9. show clearly on your graph how you obtained the necessary  information.  l =  .. [1]  (e) predict the resistance z of 1.50 m of the resistance wire. show your working.  z  =  .. [1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. illuminated object lensscreenuv fig. 4.1  (a) (i) place the lens a distance u = 20.0 cm from the illuminated object.    move the screen until a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.  the screen and the illuminated object must now remain in the same positions during the experiment.   (ii) measure and record the distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen.  v  =  .. [1]   (iii) calculate the value of uv.  uv =  ...   (iv) calculate the value of ( u + v).  ( u + v) =  ..   (v) calculate a value f 1 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation f1 = uv (u + v ).  f1 =  ...  [2]  (b) (i) do not move the position of the screen or the illuminated object. move the lens  towards the screen until a smaller, sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.   (ii) measure and record the distance v  from the centre of the lens to the screen.  v  =  ...",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) measure and record the distance u from the centre of the lens to the illuminated  object.  u  =  ...   (iv) calculate the value of uv.  uv =  ...   (v) calculate the value of ( u + v ).  ( u + v ) =  ...  [1]   (vi) calculate a second value f2 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation    f2 = uv (u + v ).  f2 =  .. [1]  (c) a student suggests that f1 should be equal to f2.   state whether your results support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference  to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [2]  (d) state two precautions that you could take in this experiment to obtain reliable results.1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2] question 4 continues on the next page",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (e) sketch a diagram of the image seen in part (b).  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (cw/sw) 65166/4 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *9471839755* physics 0625/53 paper 5 practical test october/november 2013  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 234 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 in this experiment, you will measure the capacity of a drinks cup by three methods. the  capacity of a cup is the maximum volume of liquid that it will hold in normal use.  y ou have been supplied with a cup on which the maximum level max is marked both inside and out, as shown in fig. 1.1. do not fill the cup beyond this level. max fig. 1.1  (a) method 1  in method 1, the capacity v 1 is determined from the mass of water in the cup.   (i) fill the cup to the marked level with water.   (ii) place the cup, containing the water, on the balance.    read and record its mass m.  m =  ...g [1]   (iii) leave the water in the cup for the next experiment.   (iv) calculate a value for the capacity v1, using your reading from (a)(ii) and the    equation v1 = m \u03c1, where \u03c1 = 1.00 g / cm3.  v1 =  ..[2]  (b) method 2  in method 2, the capacity v 2 is measured directly from the volume of water in the cup.   (i) carefully tip the water into the measuring cylinder.   (ii) read and record the volume v2 of the water in the measuring cylinder.   v2 =  ..[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) method 3   in method 3, the capacity v3 is estimated using the average diameter of the cup and   considering the cup as an approximate cylinder. d1 d2hmax fig. 1.2   (i) measure and record the diameter d1 of the top of the cup, as shown in fig. 1.2.  d1 =    cm   (ii) measure and record the diameter d2 of the base of the cup.  d2 =    cm   (iii) measure and record the height h from the base to the marked level max.  h =    cm [1]   (iv) calculate the average diameter d using your readings from (c)(i) and (c)(ii), and    the equation d = (d1 + d2) 2.  d =  ..   (v) calculate an approximate value for the capacity v3, using your results from (c)(iii)  and (c)(iv) and the equation v3 = \u03c0d  2h 4.  v3 =  .. [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (d) state a possible practical source of inaccuracy in method 2 and a possible practical  source of inaccuracy in method 3. method 2  ..  ..method 3  .. .. [2]  (e) state an additional measurement which could be taken to give a more accurate result in  method 1.  .. ..[1] [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 in this experiment, you will investigate methods of preventing loss of thermal energy.  y ou are provided with two beakers labelled a and b. beaker a has a layer of insulation.  do not remove this insulation. beaker b has a lid but no insulation. y ou are also provided with a supply of hot water.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. water beaker a beaker bwaterinsulationthermometerclamp clamp lid fig. 2.1  (a) (i) pour approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into beaker a.   (ii) place the thermometer into the water. when the reading has stopped rising, measure the initial temperature of the hot water in the beaker and, at the same time, start the stopclock.    record this temperature at time t = 0 s in the first row of table 2.1.   (iii) measure, and record in the table, the temperature of the hot water at times t = 30 s,  60 s, 90 s, 120 s, 150 s and 180 s.   (iv) remove the lid from beaker b and pour approximately 200 cm 3 of hot water into the  beaker. replace the lid.   (v) repeat steps (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) for beaker b.",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (vi) complete the column headings and enter the values of t in the table. table 2.1 beaker a beaker b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /  [5]  (b) state from which beaker, if any, the rate of loss of thermal energy is the greater. justify  your answer by referring to your results.   beaker  justification  ...  .. .. [2]  (c) state one condition that should be controlled to ensure that the comparison between  beaker a and beaker b is a fair one.  .. ..[1]  (d) a student points out that the experiment does not test the effectiveness of insulation in  reducing thermal energy loss.   suggest a change to this experiment which could be made so that the effect of insulation  could be investigated. explain why this change would help. suggestion  ... ..explanation  .. .. .. [2] [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 in this experiment, you will investigate the current and potential difference in an electrical  circuit.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. v acrocodile clippower supply fe d c b aresistance wire fig. 3.1  (a) (i) connect the crocodile clip to the resistance wire at the position labelled a.   (ii) switch on.    read and record in table 3.1, the potential difference v and the current i.    switch off.   (iii) repeat step (a)(ii) with the crocodile clip at positions b, c, d, e and f. table 3.1 position v / v i / a a bcd e f  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis). [4]  (c) (i) determine the gradient m of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained  the necessary information.  m  =  ..[2]   (ii) the gradient m is numerically equal to the resistance r of the power supply.    write down the resistance r to a suitable number of significant figures for this  experiment.   r =  ..[2] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 in this experiment, you will investigate the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. c dl anbo eyeray-trace sheet _ fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (a) draw a line about 8 cm from the bottom of your ray-trace sheet. label this line ab.   mark a point n, near the centre of ab.   draw a normal to ab at point n. label the other end of this normal l.  (b) draw a line cd passing through n and at an angle  \u03b1 to ab where \u03b1 = 20\u00b0.   (c) place two pins p 1 and p2 some distance apart on line ln.   label the positions of p1 and p2.  (d) place the mirror on line cd and view the images of p1 and p2 from the direction   indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1.   place two pins p3 and p4 some distance apart so that the images of p1 and p2, and the  pins p3 and p4, all appear exactly one behind the other.   label the positions of p3 and p4.  (e) remove the mirror and the pins.   repeat steps (b), (c) and (d) for an angle \u03b1 = 30\u00b0, replacing pins p1 and p2 in their  original positions in step (c).  (f) remove the mirror and the pins.  (g) draw a line passing through the first p3 and p4 positions and reaching ab.  (h) measure, and record in table 4.1, the angle \u03b8 between this line and the normal nl.  (i) repeat steps (g) and (h) for the second set of p3 and p4 positions. table 4.1 \u03b1 / \u00b0 \u03b8 / \u00b0 20 30 [1]  (j) a student suggests that \u03b8 should always be equal to 2 \u03b1.   state whether your experimental results support this idea. justify your answer with  reference to the results. statement  . ..justification  ...  .. .. [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (k) suggest two precautions that could be taken to ensure accurate results from this  experiment. 1.  .. ..2.  .. .. [2]   tie your ray-trace sheet between pages 10 and 11.  [5] [total: 10] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (sjf/cgw) 66236/6 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn over *5477409816* physics 0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2013  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.university of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is carrying out a moments experiment by balancing a metre rule on a small  pivot.  (a) a student has a small pivot and a metre rule.    explain briefly how the student finds the position of the centre of mass of the metre rule.  ..  .. ..[1]  (b) the student finds that the centre of mass is not in the middle of the rule but at the  50.2 cm mark.    explain what the student could do to prevent this from affecting her results.  ..  ..[1]  (c) the student places the metre rule on a pivot so that it balances.    she places a load p on one side of the metre rule at a distance x from the pivot. she  places another load q on the metre rule and adjusts the position of the load q so that  the rule balances, as shown in fig. 1.1. xy metre rule pivotpq fig. 1.1   the load q is a distance y from the pivot.   the readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 weight of p / n weight of q / n x / y / 2.0 5.0 39.0 15.5   (i) complete the column headings in the table. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (ii) calculate the clockwise moment and the anticlockwise moment using the equation     moment of a force = force \u00d7 perpendicular distance to the pivot.  clockwise moment =  ..  anticlockwise moment =  .. [1]  (d) in practice, it is difficult to adjust the loads to make the rule balance exactly.    explain briefly how you would reduce the uncertainty in the position of q required for  exact balance. .. ..[1] [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 an igcse student is investigating the cooling of a thermometer bulb.   the apparatus used is shown in figs. 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3. clampclamp waterthermometer constant temperature water bathconstant temperaturewater baththermometerin position a water clamp constant temperaturewater baththermometerin position b waterfig. 2.1 fig. 2.2 fig. 2.3  (a) the student places the thermometer in the water bath, as shown in fig. 2.1. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.4   write down the temperature \u03b8h of the water bath, shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.4.  \u03b8h =  . [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the student moves the thermometer until the thermometer bulb is in position a above  the surface of the water, as shown in fig. 2.2. she starts a stopclock.  she records the  time and temperature readings every 30 s.    she replaces the thermometer in the water bath, still at temperature \u03b8h.   she then moves the thermometer to position b, as shown in fig. 2.3. she records the  time and temperature readings every 30 s.   all the readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 position a position b  t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 30 79 66 60 74 42 90 70 29 120 66 27 150 61 26 180 56 26   (i) complete the column headings in the table. [1]   (ii) state in which position, a or b, the thermometer has the greater rate of cooling in  the first 30 s.   position  ..   (iii) explain briefly how you reached this conclusion.  .. .. .. [1]   (iv) calculate the temperature difference from 30 s to 180 s for each set of readings.  temperature difference for position a =  ..  temperature difference for position b =  .. [1]   (v) estimate room temperature  \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  . [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) describe briefly a precaution you would take to make the temperature readings reliable.  .. ..[1]  (d) a scientist is using this experiment as part of research into convection currents above  hot water.   suggest two conditions that should be kept constant when this experiment is repeated. 1.  .. 2.  .. [2] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overquestion 3 begins on page 8.",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the power of lamps in a circuit.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit used. a vlamp 1pqlamp 2power supply lamp 3 fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures the potential difference v1 across lamp 1 and the current i in the  circuit. the meters are shown in fig. 3.2. 01 01 92 837465 v0 1.00.2 0.80.4 0.6 a fig. 3.2   (i) write down the readings shown on the meters in fig. 3.2.   v1 =  ..  i =  ..    (ii) calculate the power p1 of lamp 1 using the equation p1 = iv1.  p1 =  .. ",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) the student reconnects the voltmeter to measure the potential difference v2 across  lamp 2 and then v3 across lamp 3.     write down the readings shown on the meters in figs. 3.3 and 3.4. 01 01 92 837465 v01 01 92 837465 v  fig. 3.3 fig. 3.4  v2 =  .  v3 =  ...   (iv) calculate the power for each lamp using the equation p = iv.    p2 =  ..  p3 =  .. [3]   (v) calculate the total power pt for the three lamps using the equation pt = p1 + p2 + p3.  pt =  . [1]  (b) the student connects the voltmeter across the three lamps and records the potential  difference. he calculates the power p.  1.61 w p  =  ..   another student suggests that pt should be equal to p.    state whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference  to the results. statement  .justification  ... .. [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) (i) draw a circuit diagram, similar to that in fig. 3.1,  to show:    \u0081 a variable resistor in series with the power supply,     \u0081 three lamps in parallel with each other between p and q,   \u0081 a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the lamps.    use standard symbols.  [2]   (ii)  state the purpose of the variable resistor in this circuit.  .. .. [1] [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overquestion 4 begins on page 12.",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is determining the focal length of a converging lens.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used to produce an image on the screen. illuminated object lensscreenuv fig. 4.1  (a) (i) on fig. 4.1, measure the distance u  between the illuminated object and the centre  of the lens.   u =  ..   (ii) on fig. 4.1, measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.  v =  .. [2]  (b) (i) calculate uv.  uv =  ..   (ii) calculate u + v.  u + v =  ..   [1]   (iii) calculate x using the equation x = uv (u + v).  x =  . [1]  (c) fig. 4.1 is drawn 1/10th of actual size. the focal length f of the lens is given by the  equation f = 10x.    calculate a value for the focal length f of the lens, giving your answer to a suitable  number of significant figures for this experiment.  f =  . [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (d) a student carrying out this experiment changes the position of the lens and then moves  the screen to produce a well-focused image.    she records the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen as v = 18.2 cm.  she finds it difficult to decide the exact point at which the image is sharpest.    suggest a range of v values for which the image may appear well-focused.   range of v values = ... to ... [1]  (e) state two precautions that you could take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  .. ..2.  .. .. [2] [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is investigating the stretching of a spring.  fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus. forcemeter spring l 0 load benchn 1050 fig. 5.1  (a) on fig. 5.1, measure the unstretched length l 0 of the spring, in mm.  l 0 =  ...mm [1]  (b) a student hangs the spring on the forcemeter with the load attached to the bottom of the  spring, as shown in fig. 5.1. the load remains on the bench.    he gently raises the forcemeter until it reads 1.0 n. he measures the new length l of the  spring. he repeats the procedure using a range of forcemeter readings. the readings  are recorded in table 5.1.",
            "15": "15 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s usetable 5.1 f / n l / mm e / mm 1.0 67 2.0 773.0 914.0 1055.0 115     (i) calculate the extension e of the spring, for each set of readings, using the equation  e = (l  \u2013 l  0 ). record the values of e in table 5.1. [1]   (ii) plot a graph of e / mm (y-axis) against f / n (x-axis). [5]",
            "16": "16 0625/61/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use  (iii) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained  the necessary information.  g =  . [2] [total: 9] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages and 4 blank pages. dc (cw/cgw) 66361/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *2371989261* physics 0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2013  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions.electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 the igcse class is investigating pendulums.  the apparatus is shown in figs. 1.1 and 1.2. l bob one complete oscillationclamp clamp  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the length l of the pendulum.  l =  ..[1]   (ii) the pendulum is drawn 1/10th of actual size.    write the actual length of the pendulum in the first row of table 1.1.  (b) a student displaces the pendulum bob slightly and releases it so that it swings.   fig. 1.2 shows one complete oscillation of the pendulum bob.   the student uses a stopwatch to record the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the  pendulum. the reading is recorded in the table.   (i) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.    record the value of t in table 1.1.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. table 1.1 l / cm t / t / 22.4 61.9 31.6 1.58 [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (c) the student adjusts the length of the pendulum until its length l = 61.9 cm. he repeats  the procedure in (b) and calculates t. the results are shown in table 1.1.   the student suggests that doubling the length l of the pendulum should double the  period t.   state whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference  to the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [2]  (d) the student repeats the procedure in (b) four more times with different lengths of the  pendulum.   the student plots a graph of l against t     2.   state two pieces of information from the graph that would indicate that l is directly  proportional to t    2. 1.  ..2.  .. [2]  (e) the student uses another pendulum.   this pendulum has a mass that is double the mass of the first pendulum. its length is  61.9 cm. the period t = 1.61 s.   suggest a conclusion about the effect of doubling the mass of the pendulum.  .. ..[1] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 the igcse class is investigating the cooling of water.  a student cools some water by four different methods.  experiment a (cooling with stirring)  (a) the student pours approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into a beaker.   she measures the temperature \u03b81. fig. 2.1 shows the thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.1   write down the temperature \u03b81 shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.1.  \u03b81 =  ..[1]  (b) the student stirs the water for one minute. she then records the temperature \u03b82 of the  water. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.2   (i) write down the temperature \u03b82 shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.2.  \u03b82 =  ..   (ii) calculate the temperature difference ( \u03b81 \u2013 \u03b82).  ( \u03b81 \u2013 \u03b82) =  ..  [1]  experiment b (cooling with pouring)  (c) the student starts again with approximately 200 cm3 of hot water at the same initial  temperature \u03b81.   she carefully pours the water from the beaker into another beaker. she pours the water  back into the first beaker. she repeats this process four times.   she measures the temperature \u03b83 of the water. fig. 2.3 shows this temperature. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.3",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (i) write down the temperature \u03b83 shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.3.  \u03b83 =  ..   (ii) calculate the temperature difference ( \u03b81 \u2013 \u03b83).  ( \u03b81 \u2013 \u03b83) =  .. [1]  experiment c (cooling with a lid) and experiment d (cooling without a lid)  (d) the student pours approximately 200 cm3 of the hot water into each of two beakers. the  initial temperature of the water in each beaker is \u03b81.   she places a lid on one of the beakers. she allows both beakers to cool for 5 minutes.  at the end of the cooling period, she calculates the temperature differences. 11\u00b0c  temperature difference of c (with a lid) =  .. 31\u00b0c  temperature difference of d (without a lid) =  ..  rank the experiments a, b, c and d in order, with the one that produced the greatest  temperature drop first.   greatest temperature drop 1.  2.  3.   smallest temperature drop 4.   [1]  (e) if this laboratory investigation is to be repeated many times to check the results, suggest two conditions that should be kept constant in order to provide reliable results. 1.  ..2.  .. [2]  (f) a student complains that the investigation is not a fair comparison.   suggest one way in which the investigation could be more fair.  .. ..[1] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire.  the circuit used is shown in fig. 3.1. x va acbpower supply resistance wire fig. 3.1  (a) a student places the sliding contact c on the resistance wire ab at a distance x from a,  where x = 0.200 m.   (i) he measures the current i in the wire. fig. 3.2 shows the ammeter. 0 1.00.8 0.20.6 0.4 a fig. 3.2    record the value of i.  i =  ..[1]   (ii) the student measures the potential difference v across the wire between a and c.  fig. 3.3 shows the voltmeter. 0.0 2.01.8 0.21.6 0.41.4 0.61.2 0.81.0 v fig. 3.3    in the first row of table 3.1 record the value of v.",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) calculate the resistance r of the section ac  of the wire using the equation r = v i.    record r in the first row of the table. table 3.1 x / m v / v r / \u03c9 0.200 0.350 0.80 2.670.500 1.00 3.330.650 1.25 4.170.800 1.60 5.33 [2]  (b) the student records the voltmeter readings using a range of x values. the readings are  shown in table 3.1.   plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against x / m (x-axis). [5]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) using your graph, determine the length l of the resistance wire necessary to make  a resistor of resistance 1.20 \u03c9. show clearly on your graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  l =  ..[1]  (d) predict the resistance z of 1.50 m of the resistance wire. show your working.  z =  ..[1]  [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 the igcse class is determining the focal length of a converging lens.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus. illuminated object lensscreenuv fig. 4.1  (a) (i) on fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance u, in mm, between the illuminated  object and the lens.  u =  ... mm   (ii) measure and record the distance v, in mm, from the centre of the lens to the image  on the screen.  v =  ... mm [1]   (iii) calculate the value of uv.  uv =  ..   (iv) calculate the value of ( u + v  ).  ( u + v  ) =  ..   (v) calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation f1 = uv (u + v  ).  f1 =  .. [2]  (b) a student does not move the position of the screen or the illuminated object. she moves the lens towards the screen until a smaller, sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.   the new values of u and v are 42 mm u = ...  25 mm v = ...   (i) calculate the value of uv.  uv =  ..   (ii) calculate the value of ( u + v  ).  ( u + v  ) =  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (iii) calculate a second value f2 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation     f2 = uv (u + v  ).  f2 =  .. [1]  (c) a student suggests that f1 should be equal to f2.   state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  the results. statement  .justification  ... ..  [2]  (d) state two precautions that you could take in this experiment to obtain reliable results.1.  .. ..2.  .. .. [2]  (e) the illuminated object is triangular, as shown in fig. 4.2. fig. 4.2   sketch the image you would see on the screen. [1]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 the igcse class is investigating pressure.  a student places a rectangular block on a sheet of paper on the bench and draws the outline.   fig. 5.1 shows the outline. x y fig. 5.1  (a) (i) on fig. 5.1, measure the length x of the block.  x =  ..[1]   (ii) on fig. 5.1, measure the width y of the block.  y =  ..[1]  (b) fig. 5.2 shows the block being weighed using a forcemeter.    (i) using fig. 5.2, write down the weight w of the block.  w =  ..[1]",
            "13": "13 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use forcemetern 100 fig. 5.2   (ii) calculate the pressure p that the block exerts on the bench. use the equation    p  = w a where a is the area of the block in contact with the bench ( a = xy  ).  p =  .. [1]  (c) the value calculated for p is slightly too small.   suggest one practical source of inaccuracy that would account for this.  ..  ..[1]  [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/62/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w13_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 65303/5 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overuniversity of cambridge international examinations international general certificate of secondary education *4598864690* physics 0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2013  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used.y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use1 an igcse student is measuring the capacity of a drinks cup by three methods.  the capacity of a cup is the maximum volume of liquid that it will hold in normal use. this  maximum level is marked on the cup, as shown in fig. 1.1. max g  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) method 1  in method 1, the capacity v 1 is determined from the mass of water in the cup.   (i) the cup is filled to the marked level with water.  it is then placed on the balance, as shown in fig. 1.2.    read and record its mass m.  m =  .. [1]   (ii) calculate a value for the capacity v 1, using your reading from (a)(i) and the equation     v1 = m \u03c1, where \u03c1 = 1.00 g / cm3.  v1 =  .. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) method 2   in method 2, the capacity v2 is measured directly from the volume of water in the cup.   the cup is filled to the marked level and the water is tipped into a measuring cylinder, as  shown in fig. 1.3. 255075100125150175200225250cm3 measuring cylinder fig. 1.3   read and record the volume  v2 of water in the measuring cylinder.  v2 =  .. [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (c) method 3   in method 3, the capacity v3 is calculated by considering the cup as a cylinder, using  the average diameter of the cup and an approximate equation. d1 d2hmax fig. 1.4   (i) on fig. 1.4, measure and record the diameter d1 of the top of the cup.  d1 =  .. cm   (ii) on fig. 1.4, measure and record the diameter d2 of the base of the cup.  d2 =  .. cm   (iii) on fig. 1.4, measure and record the height h  from the base to the marked level  max.  h =  .. cm  [1]    (iv) calculate the average diameter d using your readings from (c)(i) and (c)(ii), and    the equation d = (d1 + d2) 2.  d =  ...",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (v) calculate a value for the capacity v3, using your results from (c)(iii) and (c)(iv)      and the equation v3 = \u03c0d2h 4.  v3 =  ...  [2]  (d) state a possible practical source of inaccuracy in method 2 and a possible practical  source of inaccuracy in method 3. method 2  ..  ..method 3  .. ..  [2]  (e) state an additional measurement which could be taken to give a more accurate result in  method 1.  .. . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use2 an igcse student is investigating methods of preventing loss of thermal energy.  the student is using two beakers labelled a and b, as shown in fig. 2.1. hot water beaker a beaker binsulationthermometer thermometer lid\u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.1  beaker a has a layer of insulation and beaker b has a lid but no insulation.  the beakers contain hot water at the start of the experiment. the initial temperatures are as   shown in fig. 2.1.  (a) read, and record in the first row of table 2.1, the temperatures of the water in beakers  a and b at time t = 0. [1]  (b) the temperatures of the hot water after 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s, 150 s and 180 s are shown in table 2.1.   complete the column headings and enter the values of t in the table.  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s usetable 2.1 beaker a beaker 8 t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 85.0 87.0 83.5 85.582.0 84.581.0 84.079.5 83.078.5 82.5  (c) state from which beaker, if either, the rate of loss of thermal energy is the greater. justify  your answer by referring to the results. beaker justification  ... .. ..  [2]  (d) state one condition that should be controlled to ensure that the comparison between  beaker a and beaker b is a fair one.  .. . [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (e) a student points out that the experiment does not test the effectiveness of insulation in  reducing thermal energy loss.   suggest a change to this experiment which could be made so that the effect of insulation  could be investigated. explain why this change would help. suggestion  ... ..explanation  .. .. ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use3 igcse students are investigating the current and potential difference in an electrical circuit.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. a crocodile clippower supply fxy ed c b a resistance wire fig. 3.1  (a) the potential difference across part of the resistance wire, and the current in the circuit  are to be measured.   on fig. 3.1, use an appropriate circuit symbol to draw a voltmeter connected to measure  the potential difference between x and y.  [1]  (b) the crocodile clip is connected in turn to the resistance wire at points a , b, c, d, e and f .   the potential difference v and current i are measured for each position and recorded in  table 3.1. table 3.1 position v / v i / a a 1.3 0.20 b 1.2 0.35 c 1.1 0.46 d 0.9 0.74 e 0.8 0.87 f 0.6 1.13",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use  (i) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis).  [4]   (ii) determine the gradient m of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained  the necessary information.  m  =  ..  [2]   (iii) the gradient m is numerically equal to the resistance r of the power supply.    write down the resistance r to a number of significant figures suitable for this  experiment.  r =  ..  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use4 an igcse class is investigating the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  one student\u2019s ray-trace sheet is shown in fig. 4.1. c d fe anp5p3p4 p6 beyeray-trace sheet _ fig. 4.1  (a) in the first part of the experiment, a plane mirror is to be placed on line cd.   (i) draw a normal to ab at point n, towards the top of the page. label the other end of  this normal l.   (ii) two pins p1 and p2 are placed on line ln. label suitable positions for p1 and p2.  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013 [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use (b) the mirror is placed on line cd and the images of p1 and p2 are viewed from the  direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1.   two pins p3 and p4 are placed so that the images of p1 and p2, and the pin p3 all  appear exactly in line with p4.   (i) draw a line passing through p3 and p4 and reaching ab.   (ii) measure the angle \u03b8 between this line and the normal nl. record this value in  table 4.1. [1]  (c) the mirror is then moved to line ef and pins p5 and p6 are placed in line with the new  images.   repeat steps (b)(i) and (b)(ii) using the new mirror line and pin positions. [1] table 4.1 \u03b1 / \u00b0 \u03b8 / \u00b0 mirror on cd 20 mirror on ef 30  [1]  (d) a student suggests that \u03b8 should always be equal to 2 \u03b1.   state whether the experimental results support this idea. justify your answer with  reference to the results. statement  . ..justification  ...    .. ..  [2]  (e) suggest two precautions that could be taken to ensure accurate results from this  experiment. 1.  .. ..2.  .. ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use5 two igcse students are investigating the melting of ice cubes in water.  they are dropping ice cubes into hot water at different temperatures and measuring the time  taken for the cubes to melt.  this is a page from one student\u2019s notebook. temperature 20 \u00b0c \u2013 time 216 seconds temperature 40 \u2013 time 95 sec temperature 60 \u00b0c \u2013 time 72 seconds temperature 30 \u2013 time 180 temperature 50 \u2013 time 108 seconds  (a) in the space below, draw a suitable table. enter the readings in such a way that it is easier to see a pattern from them.  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013for examiner\u2019s use (b) it appears that one of the readings does not fit the general pattern.   (i) at which temperature does this occur?  temperature  . [1]   (ii) suggest what the student might do next with the data to show more clearly that this  reading does not fit the general pattern.    explain how this would help to make it more clear. suggestion   ..explanation  ... ..  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/63/o/n/13 \u00a9 ucles 2013permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. university of cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand  name of university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        }
    },
    "2014": {
        "0625_s14_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib14 06_0625_11/7rp  \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over       *7061813147* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2014     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  1 a student wishes to measure accurately the volume of approximately 40 cm3 of water. she has  two measuring cylinders, a larger one that can hold 100  cm3, and a smaller one that can hold  50  cm3. the water forms a meniscus where it touches the glass.    top of meniscus bottom of meniscus     which cylinder should the student use and which water level should she use to ensure an  accurate result?     cylinder water level  a larger one bottom of meniscus  b larger one top of meniscus  c smaller one bottom of meniscus  d smaller one top of meniscus    2 which distance  / time graph represents the motion of an object moving at constant speed?    a 0 0distance timeb 0 0distance time c 0 0distance timed 0 0distance time    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14 [turn over  3 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.    014 02 4 time  / sspeed m / s     which calculation gives the distance travelled by the car in 24 seconds?  a m2414\uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb  b m1424\uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb  c  m 21424     \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7  d ) ( 1424   \u00d7 m     4 which instrument is used to compare the masses of objects?  a a balance  b a barometer  c a manometer  d a measuring cylinder    5 a liquid has a volume of 100  cm3 and a mass of 85  g.     the density of water is 1.0  g / cm3 .    how does the density of the liquid compare with the density of water?  a its density is higher than that of water.  b its density is lower than that of water.  c its density is the same as that of water.  d it is impossible to say with only this data.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  6 a plane lamina with centre of mass x touches the ground at point p.    which diagram shows the lamina in equilibrium?    pa pb p cp d 45\u00b0 45\u00b070\u00b0 20\u00b0 xxxx      ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14 [turn over  7 a student adds weights to an elastic cord. he measures the length of the cord for each weight.    he then plots a graph from the results, as shown.    00 weight    what has he plotted on the vertical axis?  a measured length  b original length  c (measured length + original length)  d (measured length \u2013 original length)      8 which energy transfer takes place when a matchstick burns?  a chemical to thermal  b chemical to nuclear  c nuclear to chemical  d thermal to chemical      9 four cars are driven along a road.    the table shows the work done by the engine in  each car and the time taken by each car.    which engine produces the most power?     work done by  engine  / j time taken  / s  a 50  000 20  b 50  000 40  c 100  000 20  d 100  000 40    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  10 which situation is an example of a force acting over a large area to produce a small pressure?  a a builder hammering a nail into a piece of wood  b a cook using a sharp knife to cut vegetables  c a nurse pushing a needle into a patient\u2019s arm  d a soldier marching in flat-soled boots      11 a student places four identical beakers on a bench.    two beakers contain salt water of density 1.1  g / cm3 and two beakers contain pure water of  density 1.0  g / cm3.    which beaker exerts the greatest pressure on the bench?    ab c d 150  cm3 of salt water100  cm3 of purewater150  cm3 of purewater100  cm3 of saltwater       12 a student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.    direction of  motion  handle trappe d air      what happens to the pressure and what happens to the volume of the trapped air as the pump  handle is pushed in?     pressure volume  a decreases decreases  b decreases remains the same  c increases decreases  d increases remains the same    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14 [turn over  13 during evaporation, molecules escape rapidly from the surface of a liquid.    what happens to the average energy of the molecules of the remaining liquid and what happens  to the temperature of the remaining liquid?     average energy of  remaining molecules temperature of  remaining liquid  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same increases      14 a telephone engineer connects a wire between two poles when the weather is very cold.  he makes the wire very loose. the wire passes over a road.    pole polevery loose wire     the weather changes and it becomes very hot.   what could happen to the wire and why?     what could happen why  a it breaks it contracts  b it breaks it expands  c it sags and touches  cars on the road it contracts  d it sags and touches  cars on the road it expands     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  15 in an experiment, a thermometer is placed in a test-tube of hot liquid. the temperature of the  liquid is recorded every half minute. the table shows the results.    time  / minutes 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 temperature  / \u00b0c 73 65 59 55 55 55 51 48 45 42 40 38 36 35 34 33    what is the melting point of the substance?  a 0 \u00b0c b 33  \u00b0c c 55  \u00b0c d 73  \u00b0c     16 which statement about the transfer of thermal energy is correct?  a all metals conduct thermal energy equally well.  b convection can only occur in solids or liquids.  c convection occurs in liquids because hot liquid is more dense than cold liquid.  d the radiation that transfers thermal energy is a type of electromagnetic radiation.    17 the diagram shows a heater above a thermometer. the thermometer bulb is in the position  shown.    thermometerthermometer bulbairheater     which row shows how the heat energy from the heater reaches the thermometer bulb?     conduction convection radiation  a yes yes no  b yes no yes  c no yes no  d no no yes    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14 [turn over  18 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s rays.    mirror scout p sun\u2019s  rays  scout q      which mirror position would allow the sun\u2019s rays to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s raysmirrora b c d        19 a small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls.    seasea land sea small boat harbour harbour wallswaves     some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat.    what is the name of this effect?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  20 which list shows electromagnetic waves in order of increasing frequency?  a visible light, x-rays, \u03b3-rays  b visible light, \u03b3-rays, x-rays  c x-rays, \u03b3-rays, visible light  d \u03b3-rays, x-rays, visible light     21 which statement about a converging lens is not correct?  a a ray parallel to the principal axis of the lens is refracted through the principal focus.  b all rays of light refracted by the lens pass through the principal focus.  c the distance between the centre of the lens and the principal focus is the focal length.  d the principal focus of the lens is a point on the principal axis.     22 rays of light enter and leave a box.    ray 1 ray 2ray 1 ray 2     what could be inside the box to make the rays behave as shown?  a a converging lens  b a parallel-sided glass block  c a plane mirror  d a triangular prism     23 a boy blows a whistle that has a frequency of 10  000  hz. the boy\u2019s friend cannot hear the sound  from the whistle. the friend has normal hearing.    what could be a reason why he cannot hear the sound?  a the amplitude is too large.  b the amplitude is too small.  c the frequency is too high.  d the frequency is too low.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14 [turn over  24 a lighted candle is placed in front of a loudspeaker that is making a loud, steady note. the candle  flame vibrates because of the sound wave.    candle flameloudspeaker     which type of waves are sound waves and in which direction does the flame vibrate?     type of wave direction of vibration  a longitudinal    b transverse    c longitudinal   d transverse      25 two iron nails hang from a bar magnet.    which diagram shows the magnetic poles induced in the nails?    a n n ns s sb n s ns n sc n n ss s nd n s ss n nbar magnet      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  26 a steel magnet is placed inside a coil of wire. there is a large alternating current in the coil. the  magnet is slowly moved out of the coil to position p.    steel magnet moved out of coil 12 v a.c.pcoil of wire     how has the steel changed, if at all, when it reaches position p?  a it has become a stronger magnet.  b it has become demagnetised.  c the poles have changed ends.  d there has been no change.      27 a plastic rod and a dry cloth are uncharged.  the rod is now rubbed with the cloth and t hey both become charged. the rod becomes  negatively charged because some charged part icles move from the cloth to the rod.  what is the charge on the cloth and which particles moved in the charging process?   charge on  cloth particles that  moved  a negative electrons  b negative neutrons  c positive electrons  d positive neutrons    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14 [turn over  28 the diagram shows an incomplete circuit.    axy     four wires of different length and thickness are connected in turn between point x and point y.  all four wires are made of the same metal.    which wire will cause the greatest reading on the ammeter?  a long and thick  b long and thin  c short and thick  d short and thin     29 the diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, a lamp, a switch and another component x.  the switch is initially closed and the lamp is lit.  the switch is now opened and the lamp remains lit for several seconds before slowly going out.    component x    what is component x?  a a capacitor  b a light-dependent resistor  c a thermistor  d a variable resistor    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  30 the diagram shows a circuit containing three lamps and three switches s 1, s2 and s 3.    lamp 1 lamp 2 lamp 3s1 s2 s3     lamp 1 and lamp 3 are lit, but lamp 2 is not lit.  which switch or switches is/are closed? a s 1 only  b s1 and s 2  c s1 and s 3  d s2 and s 3     31 the diagram shows part of an electric circuit.    12 v 0 vv     the light falling on the light-dependent resistor (ldr) increases in brightness.  what happens to the resistance of the ldr and what happens to the reading on the voltmeter?    resistance of  ldr reading on  voltmeter  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14 [turn over  32 which labelled component in the circuit shown controls the brightness of lamp x?    v a b  dcx      33 an appliance is connected to a mains supply. its circuit also contains a switch and a fuse.    which circuit shows the fuse in the correct position?    live neutralappliance live neutralappliance live neutralappliance live neutralapplianceab cd     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  34 an electric current is passed through a coil of wire.    coil of wire    which diagram shows the shape of the magnetic field produced in the middle of the coil?    a b cd      ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14 [turn over  35 when a wire is moved upwards between the poles of a magnet, an electromotive force (e.m.f.) is  induced across the ends of the wire.    wire motion of wire n s      which device uses a moving wire to induce an e.m.f.?  a a cathode-ray tube  b a generator  c a transformer  d an electromagnet      36 an input voltage of 10  v is supplied to the primary coil of a transformer. an output voltage of 40  v  is produced across the secondary coil.    the 10  v supply at the primary coil is now replaced with a 40  v supply.    what is the new output voltage across the secondary coil?  a 10  v b 40  v c 70  v d 160  v     37 a beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage  d.c. power supply.    which path does the beam follow?    +++ cathode  rays  dcb a+++metal plate metal plate     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  38 the table shows the results of an experiment to find the half-life of a radioactive substance.  time  / s second/ countssubstance from rate count  0 150  60 120  120 95  180 75  240 60    what is the half-life of the substance?  a 60 seconds  b 120 seconds  c 180 seconds  d 240 seconds     39 the diagram shows a box used for storing radioactive sources.        which material is best for lining the box to prevent the escape of most radioactive emissions?  a aluminium  b copper  c lead  d steel     40 a lithium nucleus contains 3 protons and 4 neutrons.    what is its nuclide notation?  a  li3 4 b li4 3 c li73 d li7 4   ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  blank page ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third -party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/m/j/14  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib14 06_0625_12/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over       *7124809139* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2014     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  1 the diagram shows part of a ruler. the ruler is used to find the length of a nail.    0 1234cm    what is the length of the nail?  a 2.2  cm b 2.7  cm c 3.2  cm d 3.7  cm     2 which distance  / time graph represents the motion of an object moving at constant speed?    a 0 0distance timeb 0 0distance time c 0 0distance timed 0 0distance time    3 a car takes 15 minutes to travel along a road that is 20 km long.  what is the average speed of the car?  a 0.75  km  / h b 5.0  km  / h c 80  km  / h d 300  km  / h    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14 [turn over  4 a customer goes to a market and buys some rice. the stallholder pours rice into a dish that  hangs from a spring balance. he records the reading on the spring balance.    0 1  2  3 4 5 6 spring balance  rice  dish     the customer then buys some pasta and the stallholder notices that the reading on the spring  balance, with just pasta in the dish, is the same as it was with just rice in the dish.    the rice and the pasta must have the same  a density.  b temperature.  c volume.  d weight.      5 the table gives the volumes and masses of four objects.    which object has the greatest density?     mass  / g volume  / cm3  a 5.4 2.0  b 13 3.0  c 15 6.0  d 18 5.0    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  6 a wooden bar is pivoted at its centre so that it can rotate freely. two equal forces f are applied to  the bar.    in which diagram is the turning effect greatest?    ffa f fb f f c pivotd f fpivot      ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14 [turn over  7 a student adds weights to an elastic cord. he measures the length of the cord for each weight.    he then plots a graph from the results, as shown.    00 weight    what has he plotted on the vertical axis?  a measured length  b original length  c (measured length + original length)  d (measured length \u2013 original length)      8 in a hydroelectric power station, one form of energy is stored in a lake or reservoir. this energy is  then transferred in stages to another useful form, which is the output.    which row gives the name of the stored energy and the name of the output energy?     stored energy output energy  a electrical thermal (heat)  b electrical kinetic  c gravitational electrical  d kinetic electrical      9 a certain machine is very efficient.  what does this mean?  a it produces a large amount of power.  b it uses very little energy.  c it wastes very little energy.  d it works very quickly.    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  10 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    p qmercury     atmospheric pressure decreases.    what happens to the level of the mercury at p and what happens to the level of the mercury at  q?     p q  a falls falls  b falls rises  c rises falls  d rises rises     11 a student places four identical beakers on a bench.    two beakers contain salt water of density 1.1  g / cm3 and two beakers contain pure water of  density 1.0  g / cm3.    which beaker exerts the greatest pressure on the bench?    ab c d 150  cm3 of salt water100  cm3 of purewater150  cm3 of purewater100  cm3 of saltwater      ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14 [turn over  12 a student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.    direction of  motion  handle trappe d air      what happens to the pressure and what happens to  the volume of the trapped air as the pump  handle is pushed in?     pressure volume  a decreases decreases  b decreases remains the same  c increases decreases  d increases remains the same      13 the diagram represents molecules of gas moving in a container.        what happens to the gas molecules when the temperature of the gas increases?  a they move more quickly.  b they move more slowly.  c they vibrate more quickly.  d they vibrate more slowly.      14 a liquid-in-glass thermometer is marked with a scale in \u00b0c.    \u2013 1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 1 1 0\u00b0c     what is the temperature difference between the two fixed points for this thermometer?  a  40\u00b0c b 50\u00b0c c 100 \u00b0c d 120 \u00b0c   ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  15 which statement gives the thermal capacity of a solid body?  a the energy needed to melt the body without a change in temperature  b the energy per degree celsius needed to  raise the temperature of the body  c the increase in the volume of the body when its temperature is raised by one degree celsius  d the total amount of internal energy in the body      16 in an experiment, a thermometer is placed in a test-tube of hot liquid. the temperature of the  liquid is recorded every half minute. the table shows the results.    time  / minutes 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 temperature  / \u00b0c 73 65 59 55 55 55 51 48 45 42 40 38 36 35 34 33    what is the melting point of the substance?  a 0 \u00b0c b 33  \u00b0c c 55  \u00b0c d 73  \u00b0c     17 the diagram shows an air-conditioning unit on the wall of a room. the unit draws in warm air  from the room and releases cold air into the room.    air-conditioning unit     what happens to the cold air and why?   cold air why?  a falls it is less dense than warm air  b falls it is more dense than warm air  c rises it is less dense than warm air  d rises it is more dense than warm air    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14 [turn over  18 which statement about thermal radiation is correct?  a it can only occur in a vacuum.  b it involves movement of electrons through a material.  c it involves movement of atoms.  d it is infra-red radiation.      19 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s rays.    mirror scout p sun\u2019s  rays  scout q      which mirror position would allow the sun\u2019s rays to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s raysmirrora b c d       ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  20 a small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls.    seasea land sea small boat harbour harbour wallswaves     some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat.    what is the name of this effect?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction     21 which statement about ultraviolet waves is correct?  a they are used in television remote controllers.  b they can be detected by the human eye.  c they travel as longitudinal waves.  d they have the same speed in a vacuum as radio waves.    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14 [turn over  22 a boy wears a shirt with a letter f on the front. he stands in front of a plane mirror.    mirro r     what does he see in the mirror?    abcd      23 rays of light enter and leave a box.    ray 1 ray 2ray 1 ray 2     what could be inside the box to make the rays behave as shown?  a a converging lens  b a parallel-sided glass block  c a plane mirror  d a triangular prism     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  24 the diagrams show the wave patterns of four sounds shown on a cathode-ray oscilloscope  (c.r.o.). the oscilloscope controls are set the same for each sound.    which sound has the highest pitch?    ab cd      25 a lighted candle is placed in front of a loudspeaker that is making a loud, steady note. the candle flame vibrates because of the sound wave.    candle flameloudspeaker     which type of waves are sound waves and in which direction does the flame vibrate?     type of wave direction of vibration  a longitudinal    b transverse    c longitudinal   d transverse     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14 [turn over  26 which row correctly shows whether copper and steel are ferrous or non-ferrous?     copper steel  a ferrous ferrous  b ferrous non-ferrous  c non-ferrous ferrous  d non-ferrous non-ferrous     27 a steel magnet is placed inside a coil of wire. there is a large alternating current in the coil. the  magnet is slowly moved out of the coil to position p.    steel magnet moved out of coil 12 v a.c.pcoil of wire     how has the steel changed, if at all, when it reaches position p?  a it has become a stronger magnet.  b it has become demagnetised.  c the poles have changed ends.  d there has been no change.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  28 two balloons, x and y, are suspended by insu lating threads. they are each held near a  negatively charged balloon. the balloons hang as shown.    \u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013insulating threads x\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013insulating threads y     what is the charge on balloon x and what is the charge on balloon y?     balloon x balloon y  a negative negative  b negative positive  c positive negative  d positive positive      29 which quantities is a voltmeter used to measure?  a current and e.m.f. only  b current and p.d. only  c e.m.f. and p.d. only  d e.m.f., current and p.d    30 the diagram shows a lamp and a resistor connected in a circuit. the lamp is too bright.        which change to the circuit will decrease the current in the lamp and make it less bright?  a connecting another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b connecting another resistor in series with the one in the circuit  c exchanging the positions of the lamp and the resistor in the circuit  d increasing the e.m.f. of the battery in the circuit    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14 [turn over  31 which statement is not correct for lamps connected in parallel?  a they can be switched on and off separately.  b they will remain bright if another lamp is connected in parallel.  c they share the supply voltage equally between them.  d they still operate if one lamp is removed.      32 a student connects a circuit using an uncharged capacitor c, with a large capacitance, and a  resistor r, with a high resistance.     the switch is closed. the reading on the voltmeter p rises immediately to a maximum value, then  starts to fall gradually.  vv r p q c     what happens to the reading on the voltmeter q and what happens to the energy stored in the  capacitor?     reading on  voltmeter q energy stored  in capacitor  a falls decreases  b falls increases  c rises decreases  d rises increases     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  33 which labelled component in the circuit shown controls the brightness of lamp x?    v a b  dcx      34 in the circuit shown, the current from the battery divides equally between the two lamps. each  ammeter reads 6.0  a.    a a     what is a suitable rating for the fuse in this circuit?  a 3.0  a b 6.0  a c 10.0  a d 13.0  a     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14 [turn over  35 a metal wire is placed between the poles of a magnet.    the wire can be moved in each of three directions op, qr and st.    r t qss pole n pole o p metal wire     in which direction or directions must the wire be moved to induce an e.m.f. across the ends of the  wire?    a op only b op or st c qr d st only    36 a transformer has 100 turns on its primary coil and 25 turns on its secondary coil. the primary  coil is connected to a 12  v a.c. supply.    100 turns primary coil 12 v secondary coil25 turns     what is the voltage induced across the secondary coil?  a 3.0  v b 4.0  v c 48  v d 300  v     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  37 a beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage  d.c. power supply.    which path does the beam follow?    +++ cathode  rays  dcb a+++metal plate metal plate      38 compared with \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays, \u03b1-particles  a are the only type of radiation to carry a charge.  b have the greatest ionising effect.  c have the greatest penetrating effect.  d have the smallest mass.     39 the diagram shows a box used for storing radioactive sources.        which material is best for lining the box to prevent the escape of most radioactive emissions?  a aluminium  b copper  c lead  d steel     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  40 a particular nuclide of chlorine can be represented by the symbol shown.    lc37 17    how many electrons are there in a neutral atom of this nuclide?  a 17 b 20 c 37 d 54     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/m/j/14  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib14 06_0625_13/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over       *4419978703* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2014     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  1 which instrument is used to compare the masses of objects?  a a balance  b a barometer  c a manometer  d a measuring cylinder      2 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.    014 02 4 time  / sspeed m / s     which calculation gives the distance travelled by the car in 24 seconds?  a m2414\uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb  b m1424\uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb  c  m 21424     \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7  d ) ( 1424   \u00d7 m     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14 [turn over  3 which distance  / time graph represents the motion of an object moving at constant speed?    a 0 0distance timeb 0 0distance time c 0 0distance timed 0 0distance time     4 a student wishes to measure accurately the volume of approximately 40 cm 3 of water. she has  two measuring cylinders, a larger one that can hold 100  cm3, and a smaller one that can hold  50  cm3. the water forms a meniscus where it touches the glass.    top of meniscus bottom of meniscus     which cylinder should the student use and which water level should she use to ensure an  accurate result?     cylinder water level  a larger one bottom of meniscus  b larger one top of meniscus  c smaller one bottom of meniscus  d smaller one top of meniscus     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  5 a student adds weights to an elastic cord. he measures the length of the cord for each weight.    he then plots a graph from the results, as shown.    00 weight    what has he plotted on the vertical axis?  a measured length  b original length  c (measured length + original length)  d (measured length \u2013 original length)      6 a liquid has a volume of 100  cm3 and a mass of 85  g.    the density of water is 1.0  g / cm3 .    how does the density of the liquid compare with the density of water?  a its density is higher than that of water.  b its density is lower than that of water.  c its density is the same as that of water.  d it is impossible to say with only this data.      7 which situation is an example of a force acting over a large area to produce a small pressure?  a a builder hammering a nail into a piece of wood  b a cook using a sharp knife to cut vegetables  c a nurse pushing a needle into a patient\u2019s arm  d a soldier marching in flat-soled boots    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14 [turn over  8 a student places four identical beakers on a bench.    two beakers contain salt water of density 1.1  g / cm3 and two beakers contain pure water of  density 1.0  g / cm3.    which beaker exerts the greatest pressure on the bench?    ab c d 150  cm3 of salt water100  cm3 of purewater150  cm3 of purewater100  cm3 of saltwater      9 a plane lamina with centre of mass x touches the ground at point p.    which diagram shows the lamina in equilibrium?    pa pb p cp d 45\u00b0 45\u00b070\u00b0 20\u00b0 xxxx      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  10 four cars are driven along a road.    the table shows the work done by the engine in  each car and the time taken by each car.    which engine produces the most power?     work done by  engine  / j time taken  / s  a 50  000 20  b 50  000 40  c 100  000 20  d 100  000 40     11 which energy transfer takes place when a matchstick burns?  a chemical to thermal  b chemical to nuclear  c nuclear to chemical  d thermal to chemical    12 the diagram shows a heater above a thermometer. the thermometer bulb is in the position  shown.    thermometerthermometer bulbairheater     which row shows how the heat energy from the heater reaches the thermometer bulb?     conduction convection radiation  a yes yes no  b yes no yes  c no yes no  d no no yes     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14 [turn over  13 which statement about the transfer of thermal energy is correct?  a all metals conduct thermal energy equally well.  b convection can only occur in solids or liquids.  c convection occurs in liquids because hot liquid is more dense than cold liquid.  d the radiation that transfers thermal energy is a type of electromagnetic radiation.      14 in an experiment, a thermometer is placed in a test-tube of hot liquid. the temperature of the  liquid is recorded every half minute. the table shows the results.    time  / minutes 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 temperature  / \u00b0c 73 65 59 55 55 55 51 48 45 42 40 38 36 35 34 33    what is the melting point of the substance?  a 0 \u00b0c b 33  \u00b0c c 55  \u00b0c d 73  \u00b0c     15 a telephone engineer connects a wire between two poles when the weather is very cold.  he makes the wire very loose. the wire passes over a road.    pole polevery loose wire     the weather changes and it becomes very hot.  what could happen to the wire and why?    what could happen why  a it breaks it contracts  b it breaks it expands  c it sags and touches  cars on the road it contracts  d it sags and touches  cars on the road it expands    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  16 during evaporation, molecules escape rapidly from the surface of a liquid.    what happens to the average energy of the molecules of the remaining liquid and what happens  to the temperature of the remaining liquid?     average energy of  remaining molecules temperature of  remaining liquid  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same increases      17 a student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.    direction of  motion  handle trappe d air      what happens to the pressure and what happens to  the volume of the trapped air as the pump  handle is pushed in?     pressure volume  a decreases decreases  b decreases remains the same  c increases decreases  d increases remains the same      18 a boy blows a whistle that has a frequency of 10  000  hz. the boy\u2019s friend cannot hear the sound  from the whistle. the friend has normal hearing.    what could be a reason why he cannot hear the sound?  a the amplitude is too large.  b the amplitude is too small.  c the frequency is too high.  d the frequency is too low.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14 [turn over  19 a lighted candle is placed in front of a loudspeaker that is making a loud, steady note. the candle  flame vibrates because of the sound wave.    candle flameloudspeaker     which type of waves are sound waves and in which direction does the flame vibrate?     type of wave direction of vibration  a longitudinal    b transverse    c longitudinal   d transverse      20 which list shows electromagnetic waves in order of increasing frequency?  a visible light, x-rays, \u03b3-rays  b visible light, \u03b3-rays, x-rays  c x-rays, \u03b3-rays, visible light  d \u03b3-rays, x-rays, visible light     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  21 a small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls.    seasea land sea small boat harbour harbour wallswaves     some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat.    what is the name of this effect?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction     22 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s rays.    mirror scout p sun\u2019s  rays  scout q      which mirror position would allow the sun\u2019s rays to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s rayssun\u2019s raysmirrora b c d      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14 [turn over  23 which statement about a converging lens is not correct?  a a ray parallel to the principal axis of the lens is refracted through the principal focus.  b all rays of light refracted by the lens pass through the principal focus.  c the distance between the centre of the lens and the principal focus is the focal length.  d the principal focus of the lens is a point on the principal axis.      24 rays of light enter and leave a box.    ray 1 ray 2ray 1 ray 2     what could be inside the box to make the rays behave as shown?  a a converging lens  b a parallel-sided glass block  c a plane mirror  d a triangular prism      25 a plastic rod and a dry cloth are uncharged.  the rod is now rubbed with the cloth and t hey both become charged. the rod becomes  negatively charged because some charged part icles move from the cloth to the rod.  what is the charge on the cloth and which particles moved in the charging process?   charge on  cloth particles that  moved  a negative electrons  b negative neutrons  c positive electrons  d positive neutrons    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  26 the diagram shows a circuit containing three lamps and three switches s 1, s2 and s 3.    lamp 1 lamp 2 lamp 3s1 s2 s3     lamp 1 and lamp 3 are lit, but lamp 2 is not lit.  which switch or switches is/are closed? a s 1 only  b s1 and s 2  c s1 and s 3  d s2 and s 3     27 which labelled component in the circuit shown controls the brightness of lamp x?    v a b  dcx      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14 [turn over  28 the diagram shows part of an electric circuit.    12 v 0 vv     the light falling on the light-dependent resistor (ldr) increases in brightness.   what happens to the resistance of the ldr and what happens to the reading on the voltmeter?    resistance of  ldr reading on  voltmeter  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      29 the diagram shows an incomplete circuit.    axy     four wires of different length and thickness are connected in turn between point x and point y. all four wires are made of the same metal.    which wire will cause the greatest reading on the ammeter?  a long and thick  b long and thin  c short and thick  d short and thin     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  30 the diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, a lamp, a switch and another component x.  the switch is initially closed and the lamp is lit.  the switch is now opened and the lamp remains lit for several seconds before slowly going out.    component x    what is component x?  a a capacitor  b a light-dependent resistor  c a thermistor  d a variable resistor      31 an appliance is connected to a mains supply. its circuit also contains a switch and a fuse.    which circuit shows the fuse in the correct position?    live neutralappliance live neutralappliance live neutralappliance live neutralapplianceab cd     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14 [turn over  32 two iron nails hang from a bar magnet.    which diagram shows the magnetic poles induced in the nails?    a n n ns s sb n s ns n sc n n ss s nd n s ss n nbar magnet       33 a steel magnet is placed inside a coil of wire. there is a large alternating current in the coil. the  magnet is slowly moved out of the coil to position p.    steel magnet moved out of coil 12 v a.c.pcoil of wire     how has the steel changed, if at all, when it reaches position p?  a it has become a stronger magnet.  b it has become demagnetised.  c the poles have changed ends.  d there has been no change.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  34 when a wire is moved upwards between the poles of a magnet, an electromotive force (e.m.f.) is  induced across the ends of the wire.    wire motion of wire n s      which device uses a moving wire to induce an e.m.f.?  a a cathode-ray tube  b a generator  c a transformer  d an electromagnet     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14 [turn over  35 an electric current is passed through a coil of wire.    coil of wire    which diagram shows the shape of the magnetic field produced in the middle of the coil?    a b cd       36 an input voltage of 10  v is supplied to the primary coil of a transformer. an output voltage of 40  v  is produced across the secondary coil.    the 10  v supply at the primary coil is now replaced with a 40  v supply.    what is the new output voltage across the secondary coil?  a 10  v b 40  v c 70  v d 160  v     37 a lithium nucleus contains 3 protons and 4 neutrons.    what is its nuclide notation?  a  li3 4 b li4 3 c li73 d li7 4     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  38 the diagram shows a box used for storing radioactive sources.        which material is best for lining the box to prevent the escape of most radioactive emissions?  a aluminium  b copper  c lead  d steel     39 the table shows the results of an experiment to find the half-life of a radioactive substance.  time  / s second/ countssubstance from rate count  0 150  60 120  120 95  180 75  240 60    what is the half-life of the substance?  a 60 seconds  b 120 seconds  c 180 seconds  d 240 seconds     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  40 a beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage  d.c. power supply.    which path does the beam follow?    +++ cathode  rays  dcb a+++metal plate metal plate     ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/m/j/14  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (ac/jg) 81302/5 \u00a9 ucles 2014  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education * 6 0 9 5 6 0 8 8 0 2 * physics  0625/21 paper 2 core  may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1  kg to be 10  n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 a gardener studies the growth of one of his plants. at the same time each day, he measures the  height h of the top of the plant from the ground, as shown in fig. 1.1. h fig. 1.1  the table of his results is shown below. time since first measurement  / days 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 height h / cm 2.1 6.5 11.4 18.4 24.5 26.7 30.7 37.1  (a) from the values in the table, deduce the average speed of growth of the plant during the  7 days. work in days and cm.  average speed =  ...  cm / day [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) (i) complete fig. 1.2 by plotting the last three values of height h against time. do not draw a  line through the points. h / cm 0 2 4 6 8010203040 time  / days  [2] fig. 1.2   (ii) describe how the graph shows that the speed of growth of the plant is not constant.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 fig. 2.1 shows a spring before and after a load is added. loadspring fig. 2.1  (a) what is meant by the extension  of the spring?  ...  ... [1]  (b) when the graph of extension against load is drawn for the spring, the result is the line shown  in fig. 2.2. extension  / cm load  / n00123 1 2 3 4 5 fig. 2.2",
            "5": "5 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (i) the unstretched length of the spring is 9.0  cm.    1. calculate the total length of the spring when a 5.0  n load is hanging from the spring.  length =  ...  cm [2]    2. find the extension that will be caused by a load of 2.0  n.  extension =  ..  cm [1]   (ii) calculate the mass of a load of weight 2.0  n.  mass =  .. [2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 the apparatus in fig. 3.1 is being used to view the movement of some smoke particles trapped in  a box. air molecules and smoke particlesmicroscope light fig. 3.1  (a) describe what is seen when the smoke is viewed through the microscope.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) in the space below, sketch how one smoke particle might move during a short interval of time.  [2]  (c) what causes the smoke particles to move?  ...  ...  ... [2]  (d) what name is used for this motion of the smoke particles? complete the sentence. the motion of the smoke particles is known as    motion.  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over4 a young boy, skating on a frozen pond, has fallen through some thin ice about 10  m from the shore  of the pond. fig. 4.1 shows the situation. fig. 4.1  a man, standing near the pond, hears the boy\u2019s shouts for help.  the man weighs more than the boy.  (a) why would it be unsafe for the man to walk on the ice to rescue the boy?  ...  ... [1]  (b) suggest and explain what the man could do to cross the ice to reach the boy safely.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 the thermometer in fig. 5.1 is recording the temperature of the laboratory.  \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 5.1  (a) the bulb of the thermometer is placed in pure, boiling water at standard atmospheric pressure.   state the temperature increase .  temperature increase =  . \u00b0c [1]  (b) during the day, the temperature in the laboratory rises. in the late afternoon a thermometer  attached to the ceiling records a higher temperature than a thermometer placed close to the  ground.   explain why this happens.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (c) at night, the temperature in the laboratory falls.    describe what can be seen happening to the liquid in a thermometer as the temperature falls,  and explain why this happens.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (d) on fig. 5.1, draw an arrow to show where the end of the liquid thread might be seen when the  temperature being measured is \u221215\u00b0c.  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over6 (a) a periscope is an optical instrument containing two mirrors in a long tube.    fig. 6.1 shows the path of a ray of light through a periscope, without the tube. mirror a mirror bnormal normal fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1,     1. use the letter i to indicate clearly the angle of incidence of the ray striking mirror a,    2. use the letter r to indicate clearly the angle of reflection of the ray leaving mirror a.  [1]   (ii) write down the equation that links i and r.  ... [1]   (iii) suggest a use for the periscope.  ... [1]   (iv) state what happens if mirror b is rotated through a small angle.  ... [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (b) fig. 6.2 shows a converging lens. the lens has one principal focus at f1 and the other principal  focus at f2. f2f1principal axis fig. 6.2   use your ruler to help you answer this question.   (i) on fig. 6.2, clearly mark two distances that are each the focal length of the lens.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.2, draw a ray on the left side of the lens, which strikes the lens, above and  parallel to the principal axis. label this ray: ray 1 .    continue this ray to show its path through the lens and at least 6  cm to the right of the  lens.  [2]   (iii) on fig. 6.2, draw a ray that emerges from the lens, below and parallel to the principal  axis. label this ray: ray 2 .     show clearly the path of this ray before it reached the lens.  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over7 in fig. 7.1, xy is a copper rod placed between the n and s poles of a magnet. n s xy a b fig. 7.1  xy is connected to the terminals a and b of a sensitive, centre-zero instrument that measures  current.  (a) state the name of this instrument.  ...[1]  (b) when there is no current, the pointer on the instrument points half-way between a and b.   state what, if anything, is seen  happening to the pointer when xy is   (i) held stationary,   ... [1]   (ii) moved horizontally at a steady speed towards the n pole,  ... [1]   (iii) moved horizontally at a steady speed towards the s pole,  ... [1]   (iv) moved repeatedly up and down at right angles to the magnetic field.  ... [2]  (c) suggest one electrical device that makes use of the effect demonstrated in  (b).  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20148 a student connects the circuit shown in fig. 8.1.  6.0  v10 \u03c9s2s1 fig. 8.1  when operating normally, the lamp has a resistance of 10  \u03c9.  (a) (i) state the current in the lamp when both s1 and s2 are open.  ... [1]   (ii) the student closes switch s1.    calculate the current in the lamp, stating the unit of your answer.  current =  .  [4]   (iii) the student now closes s2 as well as s1.    state the current in the lamp with both switches closed.  ... [1]  (b) the student decides that she would like to be able to vary the brightness of the lamp.   (i) name an electrical component that she could add to the circuit to do this.  ... [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) in the space below, redraw the circuit of fig. 8.1, including the component for varying the  lamp brightness.  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 (a) describe how the n pole of a bar magnet can be identified.   ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) use words from the following list to answer the three questions below. attractive force repulsive force no force   what force is there between   (i) two n poles,  ...   (ii) two s poles,  ...   (iii) a n pole and a s pole?  ...  [3]  (c) fig. 9.1 shows an iron bar placed close to the n pole of a bar magnet. nmagnet iron bar fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, write n and s, to indicate the induced poles in the iron bar.  [1]   (ii) use a word from the list in  (b) to describe the force between the magnet and the iron bar.  ... [1]   (iii) the iron bar is reversed end-to-end.    describe the force that now exists between the magnet and the iron bar.  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over10 a transformer is a device for changing voltages.  fig. 10.1 shows a transformer that has a primary coil with 1000 turns and a secondary coil with  50 turns. primary coil 1000 turnssecondary coil 50 turnscore fig. 10.1  (a) state the material from which the core of the transformer is made.  ... [1]  (b) the primary coil is connected to a 240  v alternating current supply.   calculate the voltage across the secondary coil.  secondary coil voltage =  .. v [3]  [total: 4]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 polonium-210 84210poj `  is radioactive.  (a) name three  types of emission from radioactive sources. 1.  ... 2.  ... 3.  ...  [2]  (b) state which of these radiations   (i) carries a negative charge,  .   (ii) is most easily absorbed,     (iii) is the emitted particle in the decay 84210po82206pb+ emitted particle.  .  [3]  (c) polonium-210 has a half-life of 138 days.   a sample containing 8 \u00d7  1010 atoms of polonium-210 decays for 276 days.   (i) how many half-lives elapse in this time?  ...   (ii) how many atoms decay in this time?  number that decay =  ...   (iii) how many particles are emitted from the polonium-210 during this time?  number emitted =  ... [4]  [total: 9] 12 one nuclide of chlorine has 35 nucleons and the other nuclide of chlorine has 37 nucleons. the  proton number of chlorine is 17.  (a) how many protons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-35?    (b) how many neutrons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-37?  ..  (c) how many electrons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-37?  ..  [3]  [total: 3]"
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (ac/jg) 81309/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education * 3 9 5 6 7 0 6 6 2 6 * physics  0625/22 paper 2 core  may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1  kg to be 10  n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the motion of a bus along a road. 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8012345678910 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 1.1  (a) calculate the distance travelled by the bus in the first 40  s.  distance =  . m [3]  (b) the distance travelled between 40  s and 80  s is 315  m.   calculate the average speed of the bus during the whole 80  s.  average speed =  . m / s [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) describe the motion of the bus   (i) between 40  s and 70  s,  ...   (ii) between 70  s and 80  s.  ...  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 a student has been told to find the density of some liquid paraffin by measuring its mass and its  volume.  (a) which piece of laboratory equipment should she use to measure the volume of the liquid  paraffin?  ... [1]  (b) which piece of laboratory equipment should she use to find the mass of the liquid paraffin?  ... [1]  (c) describe the procedure she would follow in order to find the mass.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (d) these are the student\u2019s results.    mass of liquid =  62.4 g    volume of liquid =  80 cm3   calculate the density of the liquid paraffin.  density =  .. [4]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over3 a rowing boat is moving through water, in the direction shown in fig. 3.1. oar movement of boatdrag forward thrustupthrust weight fig. 3.1  there are four forces acting on the boat.  the weight is the force of gravity on the boat.  the upthrust is the upwards force of the water on the boat.  the forward thrust is the force that drives the boat through the water, and is caused by the action  of the oars.  the drag is the resistance to the motion due to friction.  (a) the boat is floating.  what can be said about the upthrust and the weight?  ... [1]  (b) explain why it is important that the weight is not greater than the upthrust.  ...  ... [1]  (c) describe what happens to the boat when the forward thrust is greater than the drag.  ... [2]  (d) describe what happens to the moving boat when the oars are out of the water and the forward  thrust is zero.  ... [1]  [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 a metal tyre for a wooden wheel is made from an iron ring. this is shown in fig. 4.1. wooden wheel iron ring joints fig. 4.1  the iron ring is made slightly too small to fit on the wheel.  (a) explain why heating the iron ring will help it fit on the wheel.  ...  ... [1]  (b) explain your answer to (a) in terms of the particles in the iron ring.  ...  ... [2]  (c) explain what will happen to the iron ring after it has been fitted on the wheel and left to cool.  ...  ... [1]  (d) suggest what happens to the joints in the wooden wheel after fitting the iron ring.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 5]  ",
            "7": "7 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over5 (a) a copper rod and a plastic rod each pass through holes in rubber bungs, so that their ends  are inside a tank, as shown in fig. 5.1. hot waterrubber bung copper rod plastic rod fig. 5.1   both rods are covered with wax.   very hot water is poured into the tank, covering the end of each rod.   (i) what, if anything, is seen  happening on the rods during the next few minutes? copper rod  . plastic rod  ..  [2]   (ii) explain your answers to (a)(i) .  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) explain, in terms of particles, how evaporation causes the hot water to cool.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20146 a metal rail is 330  m long.  sound travels at 5000  m / s in the metal.  (a) calculate the time taken for a sound to travel the length of the rail.  time taken =  .. s [3]  (b) sound in air takes 1.0  s to travel 330  m.   as shown in fig. 6.1, a man puts his right ear against one end of the rail. another man strikes  the other end of the rail with a hammer. hammer hits rail 330  m fig. 6.1 (not to scale)   describe and explain what each man hears. man with hammer  ..  ... man with one ear against rail  .  ...  ...  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over7 (a) fig. 7.1 represents a longitudinal wave. direction of wave travel fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, mark carefully a distance that represents the wavelength of the wave.  [2]   (ii) a long spring (slinky) is used to demonstrate a longitudinal wave motion.     describe how a longitudinal wave could be set up in the spring.  ...  ...  ... [1]  (b) fig. 7.2 represents a cross-section through a water wave. direction of wave travel fig. 7.2   (i) on fig. 7.2, mark carefully a distance that represents the wavelength of the wave.  [1]   (ii) describe the change that would need to be made to fig. 7.2 in order to show a wave of  bigger amplitude.  ...  ... [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) fig. 7.3 shows a cross-section through the water wave as it moves into a shallow region and  then out of the shallow region. shallow water piece of plasticwave moving this way fig. 7.3   state what, if anything, fig. 7.3 shows happening to   (i) the amplitude of the wave as it moves into the shallow region,  ...   (ii) the wavelength of the wave as it moves into the shallow region.  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over8 here is a list of eight substances that may be found in a physics laboratory.    aluminium    copper    ebonite    glass    gold    iron    plastic    silk  (a) state one substance in the list above that   (i) is a conductor,  ...   (ii) is an insulator,  ...   (iii) can be magnetised,  ...   (iv) can be charged by rubbing with a cloth.    [4]  (b) describe briefly a method for magnetising a sample of the substance named in  (a)(iii) .  ...  ...  ..  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 the electric circuit shown in fig. 9.1 contains a battery, two resistors, a switch and another  component. 12 v sa 16.0  \u03c9 8.0 \u03c9 fig. 9.1  (a) (i) which instrument does the symbol a represent?  ... [1]   (ii) which quantity does this instrument measure? tick one box. charge current potential difference power  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) the switch is closed so that there is a current in the circuit.   (i) what flows in the circuit in order to create the current? tick one box. charge potential difference power resistance  [1]   (ii) using values from fig. 9.1, calculate    1. the combined resistance of the two resistors,  combined resistance =  . \u03c9 [2]    2. the current in the circuit, stating the unit of your answer.  current =  .. [4]  (c) when the switch is open, what is the potential difference across the 16  \u03c9 resistor? tick one  box. 12 v 8.0 v 6.0 v    0 v  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 201410 a laboratory technician has a 12  v a.c. power supply. he wishes to use it to light a 6.0  v, 1.5  \u03c9  lamp, using either a transformer or a resistor.   (a) state what will happen if he connects the lamp directly to the 12  v power supply.  ... [1]  (b) (i) using a standard transformer symbol, complete the circuit in fig. 10.1 to show how the  transformer could be used to light the lamp at normal brightness.  input12 v a.c.6.0  v 1.5  \u03c9 lamp  [1] fig. 10.1   (ii)  the transformer is to light the lamp at normal brightness.      determine the value of the ratio:  number of turns on secondary coil  number of turns on primary coil.  ratio =  .. [2]  (c) (i) complete the circuit in fig. 10.2 to show how a single resistor could be connected so that  the lamp lights at normal brightness.   input12 v a.c.6.0  v 1.5  \u03c9 lamp  [2] fig. 10.2   (ii)  state the value of the resistance that is needed for the lamp to light at normal brightness.  resistance =  . \u03c9 [1]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over11 one nuclide of sodium is represented in nuclide notation as 1123na.  for one neutral atom of 1123na, state  (a) its nucleon number,  ...  (b) its proton number,  ...  (c) the number of neutrons,    (d) the number of electrons.  ...  [4]  [total: 4] question 12 is on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/22/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 201412 fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a radioactive specimen changes with time. 00500100015002000 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16count rate counts  / minute time  / hours fig. 12.1  (a) use the graph to determine the half-life of the radioactive material.  make clear marks on the  graph to show how you obtained the answer.  half-life =  ..  hours  [2]  (b) measurements are made over the same period of time for another specimen of the same  material as the specimen in (a). the second specimen has half as many radioactive atoms at  time zero.   suggest the values this second specimen gives for   (i) the count rate at time zero,     counts  / minute   (ii) the half-life,    ...  hours   (iii) the count rate after 16 hours.     counts  / minute  [3]  [total: 5] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (ac/jg) 81311/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *3241510999* physics  0625/23 paper 2 core may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 a motorcyclist travels from a to b along a straight road, as shown in fig. 1.1. 1850  mfloodba fig. 1.1  the motorcyclist passes over the minor crossroads at a at 15 m / s and, for most of the distance  between a and b, he continues at 15 m / s.    the road is flooded at one point, so he has to slow down to ride through the water. he also slows  down and stops at the major crossroads at b.  (a) on fig. 1.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the journey between a and b. 15 0 0               speed        m  / s        time [5] fig. 1.2  (b)  the distance between a and b is 1850 m.      (i) if the motorcyclist had been able to maintain 15 m / s all the way from a to b, calculate the  total time the ride would have taken.  time =  .. s [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) suggest how the actual time taken from a to b compares with your value in (b)(i) . tick  one box. greater than calculated the same as calculated less than calculated  [1]    (c) the motorcyclist completes another journey. the speed-time graph for this journey is shown  in fig. 1.3. 2025 051015 0 5 10 15 20 25speed        m  / s        time  / s fig. 1.3   use the graph to determine the distance travelled by the motorcyclist during this journey.  distance travelled =  .m [4]  [total: 13]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 a spring is attached to the underside of the edge of a bench. a metre rule is fixed next to it, as  shown in fig. 2.1. xbench top pin metre rule fig. 2.1yspring load l fig. 2.2  when there is no load on the spring, the marker pin is at x.  when a load of weight l is hanging on the spring, the marker pin is at y , as shown in fig. 2.2.  (a) describe how you would determine the value of the extension of the spring caused by the  load.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (b) on fig. 2.3, sketch the graph you would expect to be able to obtain as the spring is gradually  stretched from x to y . length xy 0 0 load l  [1] fig. 2.3  [total: 4]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over3 a wheel f on an axle is free to rotate about a horizontal axis, as shown in fig. 3.1. fp s waxle fig. 3.1  string s has a loop on one end, which is hooked over peg p on the axle. the string is wound  several times around the axle, and has a weight w attached to the other end.    w is released and accelerates downwards. the string comes off the peg just as w reaches the  ground.  (a) as w is accelerating downwards, what, if anything, happens to   (i) the gravitational potential energy of w, .   (ii) the kinetic energy of w, .   (iii) the gravitational potential energy of f , ..   (iv) the kinetic energy of f? .  [4]  (b) what happens to the kinetic energy of w when it hits the ground?  .. .[1]  (c) what happens to the kinetic energy of f after w hits the ground?  .. .[1]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 a mercury manometer is connected to a gas supply, as shown in fig. 4.1. 050100150200250300mm from a gas supply mercury fig. 4.1  (a) using the scale on fig. 4.1, state the reading of   (i) the mercury level in the left-hand column, . mm   (ii) the mercury level in the right-hand column. . mm  [2]  (b) (i) is the pressure of the gas from the supply greater than or less than atmospheric pressure,  and how do you know?  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) by how much is the gas pressure greater or less than atmospheric pressure?  pressure difference =  . mm of mercury [1]  ",
            "7": "7 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the gas supply is turned off.  the rubber tube connecting the manometer to the gas supply is  disconnected, so that both ends of the manometer are open to the atmosphere.   what are the new readings of the mercury levels in each column?  left-hand column reading =  ... mm  right-hand column reading =  ... mm  [2]  (d) suggest why water could not be used in this manometer to measure the gas pressure from  the supply.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 as part of his meal, a workman has a cup containing a hot drink.  in order to keep the drink hot whilst he eats the rest of his meal, he covers the cup, as shown in  fig. 5.1. fig. 5.1  (a) which sources of energy loss does this action reduce? tick two boxes. convection from the surface of the liquid evaporation from the surface of the liquidconduction through the cupradiation from the surface of the cup  [2]        (b) suggest one other way that the workman can help to keep the drink hot while he eats the rest  of his meal.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 3]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over6 a laboratory worker hears the sound from a loudspeaker, as illustrated in fig. 6.1.   frequencyamplitudesignal generator fig. 6.1  the amplitude control knob and the frequency control knob on the signal generator are set so that  the worker hears a particular note from the loudspeaker.  (a) the two control knobs are left untouched but the worker stands further away from the  loudspeaker.   what difference, if any, does this make to the sound heard by the worker?  .. .[1]  (b) what difference, if any, does it make to the note heard by the worker if   (i) the amplitude of the sound wave is increased,  .. .   (ii) the frequency of the sound wave is increased?  .. .  [2]  (c) describe what happens to the air in order for the sound from the loudspeaker to reach the  laboratory worker\u2019s ear.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (d) the human ear cannot detect all frequencies.   state the approximate range of frequencies for a healthy human ear.  lower frequency limit =  . hz  upper frequency limit =  . hz  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20147 a filament lamp emits white light, which passes through a small hole in a card. the light spreads  out from the hole, as shown in fig. 7.1. glass lensglass prism carda b qp filament lamp (white light source)screen fig. 7.1  the light from the hole then passes through a glass lens and a glass prism, and finally reaches a  screen.  (a) state what is seen in the region ab on the screen.  .. .[1]  (b) in fig. 7.1, what two things are shown happening to the light at surface pq? tick two boxes. diffraction dispersion reflection refraction  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) fig. 7.2 shows the same arrangement as in fig. 7.1, but with the prism removed. glass lens filament lamp (white light source)screen fig. 7.2   (i) on fig. 7.2, continue the rays until they reach the screen. [1]   (ii) describe fully what is now seen on the screen.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 6]  ",
            "12": "12 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20148 fig. 8.1 shows a lens, to the left of which is a vertical object ax with one end on the principal axis. ax f p fig. 8.1  (a) distance pf is the focal length of the lens. state the name given to the point f .   .[1]  (b) (i) on fig. 8.1, draw a ray from the top of the object x, which is parallel to the principal axis.   continue this ray at least 6 cm after the lens, to show its path through the air on the other  side of the lens. [2]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, draw another ray that will enable you to locate the image of x. label this  image with the letter y . [2]  [total: 5]  ",
            "13": "13 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over9 (a) what is the usual purpose of a transformer? tick one box. to increase or decrease a.c. to increase or decrease d.c. to turn a.c. into d.c.  [1]  (b) the transformer in fig. 9.1 is connected to a 240 v mains supply, and is being used to light a  6.0 v lamp connected between a and b. 240  v mains supply 8000 turns iron6.0 v lampa b fig. 9.1   (i) what name is given to the part of the transformer that is shown on fig. 9.1 as being  made of iron?  .. .[1]   (ii) the primary coil has 8000 turns.    1 . state the material from which the coil is usually made.     ... ..[1]    2 .  calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil in order to provide 6.0 v  between a and b.  number of turns =  ..[3]    3 .  suggest one difference that is seen in the appearance of the lamp when the mains  supply voltage is reduced to 120 v.     ... ..[1]  [total: 7] ",
            "14": "14 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 201410 a positively charged plastic ball is suspended on an insulating nylon thread, as shown in fig. 10.1.   negatively charged rodnylon thread positively charged plastic ball fig. 10.1   a negatively charged plastic rod is brought towards the positively charged ball.  (a) (i) describe how the rod might have been given its charge.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) describe what is seen  happening to the ball as the rod is brought near to it.  .. .  .. .[2]   (iii) state the reason for what you have described in (a)(ii) .  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) the negatively charged rod is removed.   an identical plastic ball is suspended on another nylon thread of equal length, so that the  balls are a short distance from each other. the second ball is also given a positive charge.   in the space below, sketch how the two balls and their threads will hang.   [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 201411 in an attempt to measure the current in a lamp and a resistor, a student connects the circuit shown  in fig. 11.1. v fig. 11.1  (a) what instrument does the symbol v  represent?  .. .[1]  (b) when the lamp fails to light, she realises that she has used the wrong instrument to measure  the current.   (i) with which instrument should she replace it, in order to be able to measure the current?  .. .[1]   (ii) in the space below, redraw the circuit of fig. 11.1, but with the correct instrument in the     place of v, and with v connected in parallel with the cell.  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) when the circuit is working correctly, the student records that the potential difference across  the cell is 1.9 v and that the current in the circuit is 0.038 a.   (i) calculate the combined resistance of the lamp and the resistor. state the unit.  resistance = ...[4]   (ii) the positions in the circuit of the lamp and the resistor are interchanged, as shown in  fig. 11.2. the measuring instruments are not shown. fig. 11.2    what difference, if any, does interchanging the components make to the value of the  current? tick one box. increases the current decreases the currentmakes no difference to the current  [1]   [total: 9]  ",
            "18": "18 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 201412 a dish contains a sample of radioactive powder. the half-life of the radioactive substance is known  to be 26 minutes. it decays by \u03b2-particle emission.  a radiation detector, held close to the powder, records a count rate of 800 counts / min, after  subtraction of the background count rate.  a time of 26 minutes is allowed to elapse after recording the 800 counts / min count rate. a new  count rate is then taken.  (a) calculate the new count rate due to the powder.  count rate =  . counts / min [1]  (b) how many radioactive atoms of the original type remain in the sample after the 26 minutes  have elapsed? tick one box. no atoms are left the same as at the start half the number at the start twice the number at the start  [1]    (c) how many atoms in total remain in the sample after 26 minutes has elapsed? tick one box.   no atoms are left the same as at the start half the number at the start twice the number at the start  [1]  (d) the sample contains zirconium rz4084.   for one atom of rz4084, state   (i) its nucleon number, .    (ii) its proton number,  ...   (iii) the number of neutrons.  ..  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/23/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nf/sw) 81293/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4923685292* physics  0625/31 paper 3 extended may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 (a) fig. 1.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 1.1   (i) in the process of making the thermometer, the scale divisions were spaced equally.    what assumption was made about the liquid?  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) suggest two changes to the thermometer that would require the spacing of the scale  divisions to be larger. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]   (iii) as a result of the changes in (ii), what other change is needed to enable the thermometer  to be used for the same temperature range?  ..  [1]  (b) the expansion of a liquid is an example of a physical property that may be used to measure  temperature.   state two other physical properties that may also be used to measure temperature. 1. the  . of  .  2. the  . of  .   [2]  [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over2 a student has a large number of coins of different diameters, all made of the same metal. she  wishes to find the density of the metal by a method involving placing the coins in water.  (a) state the formula needed to calculate the density.  ..  [1]  (b) describe how the measurements of the required quantities are carried out.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [5]  (c) state one precaution taken when carrying out the measurements in (b) to ensure that  the  result is as accurate as possible.  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 (a) on a day with no wind, a fountain in switzerland propels 30  000 kg of water per minute to a  height of 140 m.    calculate the power used in raising the water.  power =  ... [4]  (b) the efficiency of the pump which operates the fountain is 70%.   calculate the power supplied to the pump.  power =  ... [3]  (c) on another day, a horizontal wind is blowing. the water does not rise vertically.   explain why the water still rises to a height of 140 m.  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over4 fig. 4.1 shows a heavy ball b of weight w suspended from a fixed beam by two ropes p and q. 45\u00b0 45\u00b0 b30 npbeam q 30 n w fig. 4.1  p and q are both at an angle of 45\u00b0 to the horizontal. the tensions in p and q are each 30 n.  (a) in the space below, draw a scale diagram to find the resultant of the tensions in p and q. use  a scale of 1.0 cm to represent 5.0 n. label the forces and show their directions with arrows.  resultant =  ... [4]  (b) state the direction of the resultant.  .. [ 1]  (c) state the magnitude of w. magnitude of w =  ... [1]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 (a) a water tank has a rectangular base of dimensions 1.5 m by 1.2 m and contains 1440 kg of  water.   calculate   (i) the weight of the water,  weight =  ... [1]   (ii) the pressure exerted by the water on the base of the tank.  pressure =  ... [2]    (b) fig. 5.1 shows two water tanks p and q of different shape. both tanks are circular when  viewed from above. the tanks each contain the same volume of water. the depth of water in  both tanks is 1.4 m. 1.4 m q p fig. 5.1   (i) the density of water is 1000 kg / m3. the pressures exerted by the water on the base of  the two tanks are equal.    calculate this pressure.  pressure =  ... [2]   (ii) equal small volumes of water are removed from each tank.    state which tank, p or q, now has the greater water pressure on its base. explain your  answer.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over6 fig. 6.1 shows a quantity of gas in a cylinder fitted with a piston p . gasp fig. 6.1  (a) describe the motion of the molecules of the gas.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]  (b) the piston is now slowly pushed down to decrease the volume of the gas. the temperature of  the gas does not change.   (i) state and explain, in terms of molecules, what happens to the pressure of the gas.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) before pushing the piston down, the pressure of the gas was 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa. pushing the  piston down reduces the volume of the gas from 500 cm3 to 240 cm3.    calculate the final pressure of the gas.  pressure =   [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20147 (a) the following are three statements about boiling. \u0081 a liquid boils at a fixed temperature.\u0081 during boiling, vapour can form at any point within the liquid.\u0081 without a supply of thermal energy, boiling stops.   complete the following equivalent statements about evaporation. \u0081 a liquid evaporates at  . ...  .. ... . \u0081 during evaporation .. ...  .. ... . \u0081 without a supply of thermal energy, evaporation   .  [3]  (b) a pan containing water boiling at 100 \u00b0c   is standing on an electrically heated hot-plate. in  20 minutes, 0.075 kg of water is lost as steam. the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.25 \u00d7 10 6 j / kg.   (i) calculate the energy used in converting 0.075 kg of boiling water to steam.  energy =  ... [2]   (ii) the hot-plate operates at 240 v, 0.65 a.    calculate the energy supplied to the hot-plate in 20 minutes.  energy =  ... [2]   (iii) suggest why the answers to (b)(i)  and (b)(ii)  are not the same.  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over8 (a) draw a straight line from each quantity on the left-hand side to a speed on the right-hand side  which is typical for that quantity. speed of sound in gas speed of sound in solid30 m / s 300 m / s 3000 m / s 30 000 m / s 300 000 m / s  [2]  (b) explain why sound waves are described as longitudinal .  .. .  ..  [2]  (c) fig. 8.1 shows how the displacement of air molecules, at an instant of time, varies with  distance along the path of a sound wave. 0displacement distance along path of sound wave0 fig. 8.1   (i) on fig. 8.1, sketch two cycles of a sound wave that has a shorter wavelength and a  greater amplitude. [2]   (ii) state two changes in the sound heard from this wave compared with the original wave. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 in the circuit shown in fig. 9.1, resistors can be connected between terminals p and q. the e.m.f.  of the battery is 6.0 v. a pq6.0 v fig. 9.1  (a)  calculate the current shown by the ammeter when a 12.0 \u03c9 resistor and a 4.0 \u03c9 resistor are   (i) connected in series between p and q,  current =  ... [2]   (ii) connected in parallel between p and q.  current   =  ... [3]  (b) state the relationship between   (i) the resistance r and the length l of a wire of constant cross-sectional area,  .. .   (ii) the resistance r and the cross-sectional area a of a wire of constant length.  .. .  [2]   (c) the 12.0 \u03c9 and 4.0 \u03c9 resistors in (a) are wires of the same length and are made of the same  alloy.   calculate the ratio: cross-sectional area of 12.0 \u03c9 resistor cross-sectional area of 4.0 \u03c9 resistor  ratio =  ... [1]  [total: 8]  ",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over10 fig. 10.1 shows a coil of wire rotating steadily in the magnetic field between the poles of a  permanent magnet. the current generated in the coil is to pass through resistor r. nsrotation of coilcoil ab rd c fig. 10.1  (a) the apparatus in fig. 10.1 is part of an a.c. generator. what is connected between the ends a  and b of the coil and the connections c and d?  ..  [1]  (b) (i) on fig. 10.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time of the current through r. [1] current 0 time fig. 10.2   (ii) on fig. 10.2, show the time t corresponding to one complete rotation of the coil. [1]   (iii) state two ways in which the graph would be different if the coil spins at a faster rate. 1.  ...  2.  ... ... [2]  (c) suggest what could be connected between c and r so that the current in r is always in the  same direction.  ..  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) complete the table below for the three types of radiation. radiation nature charge stopped by \u03b3electromagnetic  radiation \u03b2 negative \u03b1 thick paper  [3]  (b) an isotope of strontium is represented in nuclide notation as 90 38sr.   for a neutral atom of this isotope, state  (i) the proton number, ...   (ii) the nucleon number, ...   (iii) the number of neutrons, ...   (iv) the number of electrons. ...  [3]  (c) a sample of a radioactive material is placed near a radiation detector. a count-rate of  4800 counts / s is detected from the sample. after 36 hours the count-rate has fallen to 600 counts / s.   calculate how many more hours must pass for the count-rate to become 150 counts / s.  number of hours =  ... [3]  [total: 9]"
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 81295/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4400796608* physics  0625/32 paper 3 extended may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 fig. 1.1 shows a distance-time graph for a moving object. 0030distance  / m time  / s50 15 40abc fig. 1.1  (a) describe the speed of the object between points   (i) a and b,  .. .   (ii) b and c.  .. .  [2]  (b) state whether the acceleration of the object is zero, negative or positive, as shown on the  graph between points   (i) a and b,  .. .   (ii) b and c.  .. .  [2]  (c) calculate the average speed of the object during the 40 seconds.  speed =   [2]  [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over2 a surveyor measures the dimensions of a room of constant height. fig. 2.1 is a top view of the  room and shows the measurements taken. 6.01  m 4.25  m 3.26  m6.75  m fig. 2.1  (a) state an instrument that would be suitable to take these measurements.  ..  [1]  (b) the volume of air in the room is 76.4 m3. the density of the air is 1.2 kg / m3.   calculate the mass of air in the room.  mass =   [2]  (c) a window in the room is open. the next day, the temperature of the room has increased, but  the pressure of the air has stayed the same.   state and explain what has happened to the mass of air in the room.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 when a salmon swims up a river to breed, it often has to jump up waterfalls. fig. 3.1 shows a  salmon jumping above the surface of the water. on this occasion the salmon falls back down into  the river. salmon waterfall river fig. 3.1  the salmon has a mass of 2.0 kg.  (a) the salmon leaves the water vertically with a kinetic energy of 16.2 j.   (i) calculate the speed of the salmon as it leaves the water.  speed =   [2]   (ii) calculate the maximum height gained by the salmon. ignore air resistance.  gain in height =   [3]   (iii) after the salmon has re-entered the river, it has lost nearly all its original kinetic energy.    state what has happened to the lost energy.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) another salmon, of much greater mass, leaves the water vertically with the same speed.   state and explain how the height of this salmon\u2019s jump compares to the height reached by the  first salmon.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014blank page",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over4 (a) define the specific heat capacity of a substance.  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows a cylinder of aluminium heated by an electric heater. electric heater aluminium cylinderthermometerc.i.e. power pack v \u2013+ fig. 4.1   the mass of the cylinder is 800 g. the heater delivers 8700 j of thermal energy to the cylinder  and the temperature of the cylinder increases by 12 \u00b0c.   (i) calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of aluminium.  specific heat capacity =   [2]   (ii) calculate the thermal capacity (heat capacity) of the aluminium cylinder.  thermal capacity =   [2]  (c) state and explain a method of improving the accuracy of the experiment.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 (a) puddles of water form on a path after rainfall on a windy day.   in terms of molecules, state and explain how the rate of evaporation of the puddles is  affected by   (i) a reduction of wind speed,  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) an increase of water temperature.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) fig. 5.1 shows two puddles. large puddle small puddle fig. 5.1   state and explain how the rate of evaporation from the large puddle compares to that from the  small puddle under the same conditions.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) describe an experiment to demonstrate the difference between good and bad emitters of  infra-red radiation. y ou may include a diagram to help your description. state what readings should be taken.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20146 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light incident on the surface of a glass block. fig. 6.1   on fig. 6.1, accurately draw the reflected ray. [2]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a ray of light incident on a glass prism. wx y zuv fig. 6.2   put one tick only  in each line of the table to indicate which of the angles labelled in fig. 6.2  are the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction. uvwxyz angle of incidence angle of refraction  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the refractive index of water is 1.33. a ray of light passes from water into air. the angle of  incidence at the water-air interface is 30 \u00b0.   calculate the angle of refraction.  angle of refraction =   [3]  (d) fig. 6.3 shows rays of violet and red light incident on a prism. the dashed line shows the path  taken by the ray of violet light in the prism. path of rays of violet and red light fig. 6.3   on fig. 6.3, draw and label the path that the ray of red light takes in the prism. a calculation is  not required. [2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20147 (a) a solenoid connected to a battery produces a magnetic field. the wires are then connected to  the battery terminals the other way round.    tick one box in the table to indicate the effect on the magnetic field. decreases but not to zero decreases to zero reverses direction increases stays the same  [1]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows a top view of two bar magnets and a vertical rigid conducting rod carrying a  current. the direction of the current in the rod is coming out of the paper . s n s nvertical rod perpendicular to paper fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, draw a single line with an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field  due to the bar magnets at the position of the rod. [2]   (ii) state the direction of the force exerted on the vertical rod.  ..  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the rod has a mass of 350 g and the resultant force acting on the rod is 0.21 n. the rod is free  to move.   calculate the initial acceleration of the rod.  acceleration =   [2]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20148 fig. 8.1 shows three cells each with e.m.f. 1.5 v connected in series. 1.5 v 1.5 v 1.5 v 1.0 14.0 1 1.0 1 fig. 8.1  (a) calculate the combined e.m.f. of the cells.  e.m.f. =   [1]  (b) calculate the combined resistance of the three resistors shown in fig. 8.1.  resistance =   [2]  (c) calculate the current in the 4.0 \u03c9 resistor in fig. 8.1.  current =   [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) calculate the combined e.m.f. of the cells if one cell is reversed.  e.m.f. =   [1]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 fig. 9.1 shows a positively charged plastic rod, a metal block resting on an insulator, and a wire  connected to earth. positively charged plastic rod metal block wire connected to earthinsulator fig. 9.1  (a) on fig. 9.1, draw the charge distribution in the metal block. [2]  (b) the earth wire is held against the metal block, as shown in fig. 9.2. positively charged plastic rod metal block wire connected to earthinsulator fig. 9.2   on fig. 9.2, draw the new charge distribution. [1]  (c) the charged rod and the earth wire are removed and the metal block is left charged.   state the order in which the rod and the wire were removed. explain your answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (d) name this charging process.  ..  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a digital logic circuit, not using the recognised symbols. and gate or gated output einput a input b input c fig. 10.1   complete the table below to indicate the logic levels of points d and e in the circuit, when  points a, b and c are at the logic levels indicated.   0 represents low or off. 1 represents high or on. abcde 000 001 111  [3]  (b) draw the recognised symbol for an and gate.  [1]  (c) a nand gate can be replaced by an and gate and a not gate.   draw a diagram to show how the and gate and the not gate should be connected. label  clearly the logic gates and any input or output.  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 201411 fig. 11.1 shows a beam of radiation that contains \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. the beam  enters a very strong electric field between charged plates in a vacuum. plate at positive voltage plate at negative voltagebeam of radiation fig. 11.1  (a) indicate the deflection, if any, of the \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays, by placing one tick in  each  column of the table. possible deflection \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays no deflection towards positive plate towards negative plate out of the paper into the paper  [3]  (b) the radiation is said to be ionising . explain what this means.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) \u03b1-particles are more strongly ionising and have a shorter range in air than \u03b3-rays.   use your knowledge of the nature of these radiations to explain these differences.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/32/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 81294/3 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *7907131038* physics  0625/33 paper 3 extended may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 parachutes are used to slow down a certain racing car.  fig. 1.1 shows the racing car, of total mass 750 kg, slowing down by using parachutes. fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for 20 s after the car reaches full speed. 001020304050607080 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 time t / sspeed m / s fig. 1.2  at time t  = 6.0 s, the parachutes open.  (a) on fig. 1.2,   (i) mark a point, labelled a, where the car is moving at constant speed,   (ii) mark a point, labelled b, where the car is decelerating at a uniform rate,   (iii) mark a point, labelled c, where the car is decelerating at non-uniform rate.  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) calculate   (i) the deceleration of the car at time t  = 6.5 s,  deceleration =  ... [2]   (ii) the resultant force acting on the car at this time.  resultant force =  ... [2]  (c) explain why there is no resultant force acting on the car at time t  = 4.0 s.  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 a student wishes to determine the density of a small, irregularly shaped stone.  (a) with the aid of a labelled diagram, describe an experiment to determine the volume of the  stone.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [4]  (b) (i) state the other quantity, apart from the volume, that must be measured in order to  determine the density.  ..  [1]   (ii) state the formula that is used to calculate the density.  .. .  ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the student now wishes to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped piece of wood  that floats in water. he notices that a small lead weight tied to the wood makes it sink in water.   describe how the student can adapt the experiment in (a) to determine the volume of the  wood. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 a metre rule balances when the 50 cm mark is directly above a pivot.  (a) state where in the rule its centre of mass is located.  .. .  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows an apple and a 0.40 n weight placed on the rule so that the rule remains  balanced at the 50 cm mark. 25 cm45 cm pivot50 cm markapple0.40  n weight fig. 3.1 (not to scale)   the centre of mass of the apple is 25 cm from the pivot and the centre of mass of the weight  is 45 cm from the pivot.   calculate   (i) the weight of the apple,  weight =  ... [2]   (ii) the mass of the apple.  mass =  ... [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the apple is not moved. the weight is removed from the rule and the pivot is moved to the left  until the rule balances as shown in fig. 3.2. pivot50 cm markapple fig. 3.2  (not to scale)   (i) explain why the arrangement in fig. 3.2 balances.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) the pivot in fig. 3.2 is closer to the 50 cm mark than to the centre of mass of the apple.    compare the weight of the rule to the weight of the apple.  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 a teacher shows a class examples of three states of matter. these are a solid metal block resting  on the bench, a liquid in a glass beaker and a gas in a clear balloon in the laboratory.  fig. 4.1a represents the arrangement of molecules in the solid. solid liquid gas  fig. 4.1a fig. 4.1b fig. 4.1c  (a) (i) complete fig. 4.1b, to show the arrangement of molecules in the liquid.   (ii) complete fig. 4.1c, to show the arrangement of molecules in the gas.  [3]  (b) (i) in the list below, draw a ring around the state of matter that is the easiest to compress. the solid                                 the liquid                                 the gas  [1]   (ii) in terms of its molecules, explain why this state of matter is the easiest to compress.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over5 during both boiling and evaporation, liquid water is converted into water vapour.  the rate at which the mass of boiling  water decreases depends only on the rate at which the  water is gaining thermal energy.  (a) the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 \u00d7 106 j / kg. thermal energy is supplied  to boiling water in a kettle at a rate of 460 w.   calculate the mass of water that is boiled away in 180 s.  mass =  ... [2]  (b) the rate at which the mass of evaporating  water decreases depends on other factors.   (i) state two of these factors. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]   (ii) state two other ways in which evaporation is different from boiling. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20146 the liquids in five liquid-in-glass thermometers a, b, c, d and e expand linearly with temperature.  all the thermometers have scales marked in \u00b0c. fig. 6.1 accurately represents the scales of these  five thermometers. 250\u00b0c\u00b0c \u00b0c \u00b0c\u00b0c \u201350110 \u2013100 050 100300 3045 ab cde fig. 6.1  (a) (i) use information from the scales of the thermometers in fig. 6.1 to state which  thermometer has the greatest range.  ..  [1]   (ii) state and explain which thermometer has the greatest sensitivity.  .. .  ..  [1]  (b) suggest two design features that would cause a liquid-in-glass thermometer to have a large  sensitivity. 1.  ... ... 2.  ... ...  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the distance on thermometer b between the 110 \u00b0c mark and the \u221210 \u00b0c mark is 18 cm.   calculate the length of the liquid thread above the \u221210 \u00b0c mark when the temperature  recorded by b is 70 \u00b0c.  length =  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20147 (a) state how a longitudinal wave differs from a transverse wave.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) a sound wave of frequency 7.5 khz travels through a steel beam at a speed of 6100 m / s.   (i) calculate the wavelength of this sound wave in the steel beam.  wavelength =  ... [2]   (ii) the sound wave passes from the end of the beam into air.    state    1.  the  effect on the speed of the  sound,  .. . [1]    2.  the  effect on the wavelength of the  sound.  .. . [1]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over8 a lamp in a large room is suspended below a horizontal mirror that is fixed to the ceiling. fig. 8.1 is  a scale diagram of the lamp and mirror. lampreflecting surface of mirror fig. 8.1  an image of the lamp is formed by the mirror.  (a) (i) on fig. 8.1, draw two rays from the centre of the lamp that strike the mirror. use these  rays to locate the image. label the image i. [3]   (ii) state two characteristics of this image. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  (b) suggest an advantage of positioning a mirror above the lamp.  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 fig. 9.1 represents two identical metal plates, positioned horizontally, one above the other in a  vacuum. fig. 9.1  a negative charge of 0.000 000 042 c (4.2 \u00d7 10\u22128 c) is transferred to the upper plate, leaving the  lower plate with a positive charge of the same size.  (a) on fig. 9.1, draw the pattern of the electric field between the two plates and indicate the  direction of the lines of force. [3]  (b) (i) a conducting copper wire is used to connect the two plates and this leaves the plates  uncharged. charge flows in the wire for 0.000 000 035 s (3.5 \u00d7 10\u22128 s).    calculate the average current in the wire during this time.  current =  ... [3]   (ii) state, in terms of its atomic structure, why the copper wire is an electrical conductor.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over10 the electric circuit in a clothes dryer contains two heaters x and y in parallel. fig. 10.1 shows the  circuit connected to a 230 v power supply. 230  v x y fig. 10.1  when both switches are closed, the current in x is 3.5 a.  (a) calculate the power developed in heater x.  power =  ... [2]  (b) the resistance of x is double that of y .   determine the total resistance of x and y in parallel.  resistance =  ... [4]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 201411 a battery charger includes a transformer and a rectifier.  fig. 11.1 represents the transformer, consisting of an iron core with two coils p and q wound on to  the core. coil p , 40  000 turns iron corecoil q, 2000 turns fig. 11.1  p consists of 40 000 turns and q consists of 2000 turns.  when p is connected to a 230 v a.c. supply, there is an e.m.f. across the terminals of q.  (a) (i) calculate the size of this e.m.f.  e.m.f. =  ... [2]   (ii) explain how this e.m.f. is generated.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) the output of q is connected to the rectifier circuit.   state   (i) the name of the circuit component that is used in a rectifier circuit to rectify the a.c.  (alternating current),  ..  [1]   (ii) the property of this component that is used to rectify the current.  ..  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 201412 overhead power cables supply electrical power to a town that is a considerable distance from the  power station.  the voltage at which the power is transmitted in the cables is very much greater than the voltage  at the power station and the voltage of the mains supply in the town.  (a) explain the advantage of transmitting electrical power at a very high voltage.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]  (b) it is suggested that the resistance of the cables can be changed by doubling their diameter.   (i) explain the effect of this change on the resistance of the cables.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) suggest one disadvantage of doubling the diameter of the cables.  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/33/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "*7270233363* physics  0625/51 paper 5 practical test may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/sw) 81258/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014  [turn overthe syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over1 in this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a mass hanging on a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 1.1 and 1.2. the spring has been set up for  you. clamp l massl 0 pin in cork clamp fig. 1.1                  fig. 1.2  (a) measure and record the length l0 of the unstretched spring, in mm.  l0 =  .mm [1]  (b) suspend a mass of 300 g from the spring.   (i) measure and record the new length l of the spring.  l =  .mm [1]   (ii) calculate the extension e of the spring, using the equation e = (l \u2013l0).  e  =  ..mm   (iii) calculate a value for the spring constant k using the equation k = f e , where f = 3.0 n.  include the appropriate unit.  k =    [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) adjust the position of the lower clamp so that the pin is level with the bottom of the mass  when the mass is not moving. pull the mass down a short distance and release it so that it  oscillates up and down. fig. 1.3 shows one complete oscillation. highest position of mass lowest position of massposition of mass when stationaryposition of pin one complete oscillation fig. 1.3   (i) measure and record the time t taken for 10 complete oscillations.  t =     (ii) calculate the time t taken for one complete oscillation.  t =    [2]  (d) replace the mass of 300 g with a mass of 500 g. repeat the steps in part (c).  t  =    t  =    [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (e) a student suggests that the time t taken for one oscillation should not be affected by the  change in mass.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to your  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .   [2]  (f) explain briefly how you can avoid a line-of-sight (parallax) error when measuring the length of  the spring. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of a thermometer bulb under different conditions.   carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 2.1 and 2.2. thermometer waterthermometer cotton wool fig. 2.1                  fig. 2.2  (a) place the thermometer in the beaker of hot water, as shown in fig. 2.1.   (i) when the thermometer reading stops rising, record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water.  \u03b8h =  [1]   (ii) remove the thermometer  from the beaker of hot water. immediately start the stopclock.   (iii) after 30 s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record in table 2.1  the time t = 30 s and the temperature reading.   (iv) continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30 s until you have six sets  of readings. table 2.1 without insulation with insulation t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /  [5]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) complete the column headings in the table.  (c) replace the thermometer in the beaker of hot water and record its temperature.  \u03b8h =  [1]  (d) (i) remove the thermometer from the beaker of hot water and place it in the beaker  containing cotton wool. immediately start the stopclock. ensure that the thermometer bulb is completely surrounded by cotton wool as shown in fig. 2.2.   (ii) after 30 s, measure the temperature  \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the temperature  reading in table 2.1.   (iii) continue recording the temperature every 30 s until you have six readings.  (e) state whether the cotton wool insulation increases, decreases, or has no significant effect  on the rate of cooling of the thermometer bulb, compared with the rate of cooling with no insulation. justify your answer by reference to your results. statement   .. justification     .. .  [2]  (f) suggest one condition that should be kept constant when this experiment is repeated.  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a lamp filament.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. x z resistance wirepower supply y s va fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. connect the sliding contact s to point x in the circuit. measure and record the  potential difference v across the lamp and the current i in the circuit. switch off.  v =    i =     [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r of the lamp filament using the equation r = v i.  r =  [1]  (b) (i) switch on. connect the sliding contact s to point y in the circuit. measure and record the  potential difference v across the lamp and the current i in the circuit. switch off.  v =    i =      (ii) calculate the resistance r of the lamp filament using the equation r = v i.  r =    [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) (i) switch on. connect the sliding contact s to point z in the circuit. measure and record the  potential difference v across the lamp and the current i in the circuit. switch off.  v =    i =      (ii) calculate the resistance r of the lamp filament using the equation r = v i.  r =  [1]  (d) comment on the effect of increasing the current i on the resistance of the lamp filament. an increase in the current i in the lamp filament  ..  .. .[1]  (e) suggest a practical reason why, if you were to repeat this experiment, the repeat  measurements might be slightly different from the results you obtained.  .. .  .. .[1]  (f) a student carries out this experiment using a different lamp. he takes readings using various  lengths of resistance wire in the circuit. he plots a graph of v / v against i / a.   fig. 3.2 is a sketch of the graph. v / v i / a00 fig. 3.2   state whether the graph shows that the resistance increases, decreases or remains constant  as the current increases. justify your conclusion by reference to the graph. the resistance ... . justification     .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 in this experiment, you will investigate reflection using a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. 30\u00b0bn mr la\u0219 ray-trace sheet eye fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (a) draw a line 10 cm long near the middle of the ray-trace sheet. label the line mr. draw a  normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the point at  which nl crosses mr with the letter b.  (b)  draw a line 8 cm long from b at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal, below  mr and to  the left of the normal. label the end of this line a.  (c) place two pins p1 and p2 on line ab a suitable distance apart.  (d) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr.  (e) view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1. place  two pins p3 and p4 some distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p2 and p1,  all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.  (f) remove pins p3 and p4 and the mirror. draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4.  extend the line until it meets nl.  (g)  measure, and record in table 4.1, the angle \u03b1 between nl and the line joining the positions  of p3 and p4. at this stage the angle \u03b8 between the mirror and line mr is 0\u00b0 as shown in the  table.  (h) do not move pins p1 and p2. draw lines at angles \u03b8 = 10\u00b0, 20\u00b0, 30\u00b0 and 40\u00b0 to mr, one of  which is shown in fig. 4.1. repeat steps (d) to (g), placing the mirror on each of the new lines   in turn, so that you obtain five sets of readings.  [5] table 4.1 \u03b8 / \u00b0 \u03b1 / \u00b0  01020 3040",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (i)  plot a graph of \u03b1 / \u00b0 (y-axis) against \u03b8 / \u00b0 (x-axis).  [5] tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11.  [total: 10]  permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "*7238610702* physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/sw) 81261/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014  [turn overthe syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 in this experiment, you will take measurements of a pencil.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. x lysharpened section pencil fig. 1.1  (a) (i) measure, in cm, the total length l of the pencil supplied.  l =  ...cm   (ii) measure, in cm, the length x of the unsharpened section of the pencil.  x  =  ...cm   (iii) calculate the length y of the sharpened section of the pencil, using the equation y = (l \u2013 x).  y  =  ...cm  [2]  (b) use the string and the ruler to determine the circumference  c of the unsharpened  section of  the pencil. show your working.  c =  ..cm [3]  (c) suggest a source of inaccuracy in determining the circumference of the pencil.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) calculate the volume v of the unsharpened section of the pencil using the equation v = c2x 4\u03c0.  v =  [2]  (e) estimate the volume ve of the sharpened  section of the pencil. show your working or  reasoning.  ve =  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. thermometer water fig. 2.1  (a) pour 200 cm3 of hot water into the beaker. place the thermometer in the beaker of hot water,  as shown in fig. 2.1.   (i) when the thermometer reading stops rising, record in table 2.1 the temperature \u03b8h of  the hot water at time t = 0 s.  immediately start the stopclock.   (ii) after 30 s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time  t = 30 s and the temperature reading in the table.   (iii) continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30 s until you have six sets  of readings. table 2.1 t /s \u03b8 / \u00b0c 0  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c ( y-axis) against t/ s (x-axis).  [5]  (c) (i) describe briefly the shape of the best-fit graph line that you have drawn.  .. .   (ii) state what the shape of the graph line tells you about the change, if any, in the rate of  cooling of the water during the experiment.  .. .  .. .  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (d) describe briefly how you would read a measuring cylinder to obtain an accurate value for the  volume of water. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overblank page",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a resistor.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. vaxz spower supply resistance wireresistory fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. connect the sliding contact s to point x in the circuit. measure and record the  potential difference v across the resistor and the current i in the circuit. switch off.  v  =    i =    [2]   (ii) calculate  the resistance r of the resistor using the equation r = v i.  r  =  [1]  (b) (i) switch on. connect the sliding contact s to point y in the circuit. measure and record the  potential difference v across the resistor and the current i in the circuit. switch off.  v  =    i =    [1]   (ii) calculate  the resistance r of the resistor using the equation r = v i.  r  =    (c) (i) switch on. connect the sliding contact s to point z in the circuit. measure and record the  potential difference v across the resistor and the current i in the circuit. switch off.  v  =    i =  ",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) calculate  the resistance r of the resistor using the equation r = v i.  r  =     [2]  (d) state how the value of r changes when i decreases.  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) a student carries out this experiment using a different resistor. he takes readings using  various lengths of resistance wire in the circuit. he plots a graph of v / v against i / a.   fig. 3.2 is a sketch of the graph. v / v i / a00 fig. 3.2   explain briefly how the student would use the graph to determine the gradient of the line. y ou  may draw on the graph of fig. 3.2. y ou are not asked to calculate the value of the gradient.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (f) in this experiment, the resistance wire xyz acts as a variable resistor (rheostat).   draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor.  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. illuminated object lensscreend x fig 4.1  (a) place the screen at a distance d = 80.0 cm from the illuminated object. the screen and the  illuminated object must remain in the same positions throughout the experiment.  (b) place the lens close to the illuminated object. move the lens until a sharply-focused, enlarged  image of the object is seen on the screen.   (i) measure and record, in cm, the distance x from the illuminated object to the centre of the  lens.  x =  ...cm   (ii) measure and record, in cm, the height h from the top to the bottom of the image on the  screen.  h =  ...cm  [2]  (c) move the lens towards the screen until a smaller, sharply-focused image of the object is seen  on the screen. measure and record, in cm, the distance y from the illuminated object to the  centre of the lens.  y =  ..cm [1]  (d) (i) calculate d using the equation d = (y \u2013 x).  d =     (ii) calculate d 2.  d 2 =    [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (e) calculate the focal length f of the lens, using the equation f = d2 \u2013 d 2 4d.  f =  [2]  (f) state two precautions that you could take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  (g) sketch a diagram of the image seen in part  (b).  [1]  (h) suggest a variable that could be changed when repeating this experiment to check the  accuracy of the value obtained for the focal length f. y ou are not asked to repeat the  experiment.  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "*4753582642* physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test may/june 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nh/sw) 81266/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014  [turn overthe syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 in this experiment, you will determine the density of water using two methods.  (a) method 1   carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 1.1 and 1.2. water measuring cylinder balance fig. 1.1                 fig. 1.2   (i) place the empty measuring cylinder on the balance as shown in fig. 1.1. measure and  record the mass m1 of the empty measuring cylinder. remove the measuring cylinder  from the balance.  m1 =  ..g   (ii) pour approximately 70 cm3 of water into the measuring cylinder. measure and record the  volume v1 of the water.  v1 =  . cm3   (iii) place the measuring cylinder containing the water on the balance as shown in fig. 1.2.  measure and record the mass m2 of the measuring cylinder and water.  m2 =  ..g  [2]    leave the water in the measuring cylinder for use in method 2 . remove the measuring  cylinder from the balance.   (iv) calculate a value \u03c11 for the density of water using the equation \u03c11 = m2 \u2013 m1 v1. give an    appropriate unit.  \u03c11 =  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) method 2   carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 1.3 and 1.4. test-tube air cotton fig. 1.3                  fig. 1.4   (i) place the empty test-tube on the balance as shown in fig. 1.3. measure and record the  mass m3 of the test-tube.  m3 =  ..g   (ii) carefully lower the test-tube, by means of the cotton, into the measuring cylinder until it  floats as shown in fig. 1.4. measure and record the new water level v2 in the measuring  cylinder.  v2 =  . cm3   (iii) using your results from (a)(ii)  and (b)(ii) , calculate v3, the change in the water level,  where v3 = (v2 \u2013 v1).  v3 =  . cm3  [2]   (iv) calculate and record a value \u03c12 for the density of water using the equation \u03c12 = m3 v3.  \u03c12 =  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) calculate an average value  \u03c1av for the density of water  using your  results from  (a)(iv) and (b)(iv) .  \u03c1av =  [1]  (d) suggest a precaution that should be taken in method 1  to ensure that the volume reading is  as accurate as possible. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) suggest a possible source of experimental inaccuracy in method 2 , other than with the  volume reading.   state and explain the effect that this would have on your value for \u03c12. suggestion  ... .  .. . effect and explanation    .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overturn over for question 2",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.  the thermometer must remain in the clamp throughout the experiment, at the same height. thermometer beaker ab fig. 2.1  (a) (i) pour approximately 200 cm3 of hot water into beaker a.   (ii) wait for about 30 seconds before taking any measurements.   (iii) start the stopclock and read the thermometer.     in the top row of table 2.1, record this temperature \u03b8 at time t = 0.   (iv) in the table, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,150 s  and 180 s.   (v) complete the column headings in the table.   (vi) carefully remove the thermometer from beaker a.    place the thermometer in beaker b. table 2.1 beaker a with approximately  200 cm3 of waterbeaker b with approximately  100 cm3 of water t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /  [5]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) (i) pour approximately 100 cm3 of hot water into beaker b.   (ii) repeat (a)(ii)  to (iv) for beaker b.  (c) describe a similarity in the patterns of temperature change of the two volumes of water, apart  from the fact that the temperature of each decreases.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (d) a student suggests that the rate of cooling is smaller for a larger volume of water than for a  smaller volume of water.   state whether your readings support this suggestion. justify your answer by referring to your  readings. statement . .. justification .   .. .  .. .  [2]  (e) another igcse student wants to repeat your experiment in order to check the results.   suggest two factors that should be kept the same in order for the comparison to be fair. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 in this experiment, you will investigate resistance using a set of wires.  the circuit in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. power supply crocodile clipsva fig. 3.1  (a) (i) connect the crocodile clips to the ends of wire a.   (ii) switch on. measure, and record in table 3.1, the potential difference v and the current i.  switch off. table 3.1 wire v / i / a b c  [3]  (b) (i) disconnect wire a and connect the crocodile clips to the ends of wire b.   (ii) repeat step (a)(ii) .  (c) (i) disconnect wire b and connect the crocodile clips to the ends of wire c.   (ii) repeat step (a)(ii) .  (d)  complete the column headings in the table.",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (e) (i) calculate and record the resistance r of each wire, using your readings from the table    and the equation r = v\u2013i.      resistance of wire a, ra =       resistance of wire b, rb =       resistance of wire c, rc =   [3]   (ii) a student suggests that ra should be equal to rb + rc.    state whether your findings support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  your results. statement . ..  .. . justification .   .. .  .. .  [1]  (f) one problem encountered in this type of investigation is that resistance can be affected by a  rise in temperature of the wire.   suggest one way in which this effect could be kept to a minimum.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (g) in a variation of this experiment, an igcse student wants to change the current in wire a  using a variable resistor (rheostat).   (i) in the space below, draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor.   (ii) on fig. 3.1, mark with an x where the variable resistor could be connected so that it may  be used in this way.  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 in this experiment, you will investigate shadows.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. object screenlamp card d d fig. 4.1  the lamp, card and screen have been set up for you. the card is to protect your eyes from the  glare of the lamp and should remain at the side of the lamp.  (a) (i) set the distance d between the centre of the lamp and the screen to 60 cm.    do not change this distance during the experiment.   (ii) place the object at a distance d = 55 cm from the centre of the lamp so that it produces a  shadow on the screen.   (iii) measure, and record in table 4.1, the width w and the height h of the shadow of the  square object. table 4.1 d / cm w / cm h / cm s / cm 55 45 35 25 20 15  [2]   (iv) repeat (a)(iii)  for d values of 45 cm, 35 cm, 25 cm, 20 cm and 15 cm.",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) (i) for each distance d, calculate, and record in the table, a value for the average side length    s, using your readings for w and h and the equation s = w + h 2.   (ii) the object you are using is square in shape.  state a practical reason why it is useful to  calculate s rather than just rely on w or h to show the size of the shadow.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) plot a graph of s / cm ( y-axis) against d /cm ( x-axis).  [5]  (d) a value of d = 20 cm has been inserted between d = 25 cm and d = 15 cm. this does not  follow the pattern of the gaps of 10 cm between the other distances.   explain why it is useful to have this value when drawing the line on the graph.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (e) a student suggests that the distance between the lamp and the object in this experiment  should be no less than 15 cm.   from your observations, give a reason why this is a sensible suggestion.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (sjf/kn) 81312/3 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *7177366145* physics  0625/61 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2014  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 the igcse class is investigating the motion of a mass hanging on a spring.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus clamp holding spring spring clamp holding cork pin in cork benchl 0 fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, measure the length l 0 of the unstretched spring, in mm.  l 0 =   mm  [1]  (b) the diagram is drawn one tenth of actual size. write down the actual length l0 of the  unstretched spring, in mm.  l0 =  .mm [1]   a student hangs a 300 g mass on the spring and measures the new length l of the spring. 255 mm l  =     (i) calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation e = (l \u2013 l0 ).   e  =  ..mm     (ii) calculate a value for the spring constant k using the equation k = f e , where f = 3.0 n.  include the appropriate unit.  k =    [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the student adjusts the position of the lower clamp so that the pin is level with the bottom  of the mass when the mass is not moving. she pulls the mass down a short distance and  releases it so that it oscillates up and down. fig. 1.2 shows one complete oscillation. highest position of mass lowest position of massposition of mass when stationaryposition of pin one complete oscillation fig. 1.2   she measures the time t taken for 20 complete oscillations. 26.84 s t  =     calculate the time t taken for one complete oscillation.  t  =  ...  [1]  (d) she replaces the 300 g mass with a 500 g mass. she repeats the timing as described in part  (c).  34.48 s t  =     (i) calculate the time t taken for one complete oscillation.  t  =     (ii) the student suggests that the time taken for the oscillations of the spring should not be  affected by the change in mass.    state whether her results support this suggestion and justify your answer by reference to  the results.  statement   .. justification     .. .  .. . [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (e)  explain briefly how you avoid a line-of-sight (parallax) error when measuring the length of a  spring in this type of experiment. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over2 a student carries out an experiment to compare how quickly thermal energy is conducted along  rods made from different metals. each rod is heated at one end with a bunsen burner flame.  each rod carries a marker held on the rod with a little wax. when the wax melts, the marker falls.  heatrodwax marker tripod bench fig. 2.1  (a) one other piece of equipment is required to compare how quickly thermal energy is conducted.  name this piece of equipment.  .. .[1]  (b) suggest three  possible variables that the student should keep constant in order to make a  fair comparison between the different metals. 1.  ...  2.  ...  3.  ...  [3]  (c)  another student suggests that it would be helpful to measure the temperatures at both ends  of the rod. he suggests using a liquid-in-glass thermometer, normally used for measuring the  temperature of hot water.   suggest two reasons why a liquid-in-glass thermometer is not suitable. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 the igcse class is investigating the cooling of a thermometer bulb under different conditions.  a student places a thermometer in a beaker of hot water, as shown in fig. 3.1. thermometer water        \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 3.1              fig. 3.2  (a) write down the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water, as shown on the thermometer in fig. 3.2.  \u03b8h  ... [1]  (b) the student removes the thermometer from the beaker of water. he immediately starts a  stopclock. he records the temperature \u03b8 every 30 s. the readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 without insulation with insulation t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 30 78 84 60 71 79 90 67 76 120 65 74 150 63 73",
            "7": "7 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  he replaces the thermometer in the beaker of hot water and records its temperature. 90 \u00b0c \u03b8h     he removes the thermometer from the beaker of hot water and places it in a beaker containing  only dry cotton wool. the thermometer bulb is completely surrounded by cotton wool. he immediately starts a stopclock, and records the temperature  \u03b8 every 30 s. the readings are  shown in table 3.1.   (i)  complete the column headings in the table. [1]   (ii)  state whether the cotton wool insulation increases, decreases, or has no significant  effect on the rate of cooling of the thermometer bulb, compared with the rate of cooling with no insulation. justify your answer by reference to the results. statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  (c)  suggest two conditions that should be kept constant when this experiment is repeated.  1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a lamp filament.  the circuit is shown in fig. 4.1. x z resistance wirepower supply y s va fig. 4.1  (a) a student connects the sliding contact s to point x in the circuit. she measures the potential  difference v across the lamp and the current i in the circuit. the meters are shown in fig. 4.2. 00.20.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 a 01234567 8 9 10 v fig. 4.2   (i) write down the readings shown on the meters in fig. 4.2.  v  =    i =    [2]   (ii) calculate  the resistance r of the lamp filament using the equation r = v i.  r  =  ... [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) the student repeats the steps in  (a) with the sliding contact s at point y and then at point z.   comment on the effect, if any, on the brightness of the lamp that you would expect to see  when the sliding contact is moved from x to y to z.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) the student moves the sliding contact s back to point x.   suggest one practical reason why the new meter readings might be slightly different from  those shown in fig. 4.2.  .. .  .. .[1]  (d) another student carries out the experiment using a different lamp. he takes readings using  various lengths of resistance wire in the circuit. he plots a graph of v / v against i / a.    fig. 4.3 is a sketch of the graph. v / v i / a0 0 fig. 4.3   state whether the graph shows that the resistance increases, decreases or remains constant  as the current increases. justify your conclusion by reference to the graph.   the resistance ... . justification     .. . [2] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 the igcse class is investigating reflection using a plane mirror.  fig. 5.1 shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet with a line mr drawn on it. in the experiment the  reflecting face of a mirror is placed vertically on the line mr. the additional dashed line shows a  second mirror position. bmn r l\u0219 p3 p4ray-trace sheet fig. 5.1  (a) nl is a normal to line mr. draw a line 8.0 cm long from b at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to  the normal, below  mr and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a.  [1]  (b)  the student  places two pins, p1 and p2, on line ab a suitable distance apart for this ray  tracing experiment. he views the images of pins p1 and p2 in the mirror and places two pins  p3 and p4 so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p2 and p1, all appear exactly one behind  the other. the positions of p3 and p4 are shown in fig. 5.1.   (i) draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. extend the line until it meets nl.   (ii) measure the angle \u03b10 between nl and the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. at this  stage the angle \u03b8 between the mirror and line mr is 0\u00b0.   \u03b10 =   [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the student  draws lines at angles \u03b8 = 10\u00b0, 20\u00b0, 30\u00b0, and 40\u00b0 to mr. the first line, at 10\u00b0 to  mr, is shown in fig. 5.1. he repeats the procedure described in part (b), placing the mirror on  each of the new lines in turn. the readings are shown in table 5.1. table 5.1 \u03b8 / \u00b0 \u03b1 / \u00b0 10 5120 6930 9040 11150 130   plot a graph of  \u03b1 / \u00b0 (y-axis) against \u03b8 / \u00b0 (x-axis). [5]  (d) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g  =  ... [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (e) in this experiment, when the mirror is moved though an angle \u03b8, the reflected ray moves  through an angle ( \u03b1 \u2013 \u03b10). table 5.2 \u03b8 / \u00b0\u03b1 / \u00b0(\u03b1 \u2013 \u03b10)/\u00b0 10 5120 6930 9040 11150 130   (i) complete table 5.2.   (ii) suggest the relationship between ( \u03b1 \u2013 \u03b10) and \u03b8. y ou may express the relationship in  words or as an equation.  .. .  .. .  [1]  (f) state one precaution, to improve accuracy, which you would take in this experiment.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 12]  permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (sjf/kn) 81313/3 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8982503172* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2014  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 an igcse student is taking measurements of a pencil.  fig. 1.1 shows the pencil, drawn full size. [ l\\vkdushqhg\u0003vhfwlrq shqflo fig. 1.1  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure, in cm, the total length l of the pencil.  l  =  .. cm   (ii) measure, in cm, the length x of the unsharpened section of the pencil.  x =  .. cm   (iii) calculate the length y of the sharpened section of the pencil, using the equation  y = (l \u2013 x).  y =  .. cm [2]  (b) describe how you would use a length of string and a rule to determine the circumference c of  the unsharpened section of the pencil.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the student\u2019s value for the circumference is c = 2.4 cm.   (i) suggest a source of inaccuracy in determining the circumference of the pencil.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) calculate the volume v of the unsharpened section of the pencil using the equation     v = c 2x 4\u03c0 .  v =  ... [1]   (iii) estimate the volume ve of the sharpened section of the pencil. show your working or  reasoning.  ve =  ... [2] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142  the igcse class is investigating the cooling of water.  a student places a thermometer into a beaker containing 200 cm3 of hot water, as shown in  fig. 2.1. thermometer water fig. 2.1  (a) (i) record the temperature  \u03b8 h of the hot water, shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.2. write  the value in table 2.1 for time t = 0 s. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.2",
            "5": "5 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) the student leaves the thermometer in the hot water and records the temperature \u03b8  every 30 s. the readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 t / \u03b8 / 0 30 7460 6790 63 120 61150 59    complete the column headings in the table.  [2]  (b)  plot a graph of  \u03b8 / \u00b0c ( y-axis) against t /s (x-axis).  [5]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) (i) describe briefly the shape of the best-fit graph line that you have drawn.  .. .   (ii) state what the shape of the graph line tells you about the change, if any, in the rate of  cooling of the water during the experiment.  .. .  .. . [2]  (d) describe briefly how you would read a measuring cylinder to obtain an accurate value for the  volume of water. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 10]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overblank page",
            "8": "8 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a resistor.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit. vaxz spower supply resistance wireresistory fig. 3.1  (a) a student connects the sliding contact s to point x in the circuit. she measures the potential  difference v across the resistor and the current i in the circuit. the meters are shown in  fig. 3.2. 00.20.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 a 01234567 8 9 10 v fig. 3.2   (i) write down the readings shown on the meters in fig. 3.2.  v =    i =    [2]    (ii)  calculate the resistance r of the resistor using the equation r = v i.  r  =  ... [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) the student repeats the steps in (a), moving the sliding contact to point y and then to point z.   comment on the effect, if any, on the current i in the circuit of changing the position of the  sliding contact in this way.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) in this experiment, the resistance wire xyz acts as a variable resistor (rheostat).    draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor. [1]  (d) a student carries out this experiment using a different resistor. he takes readings using  various lengths of resistance wire in the circuit. he plots a graph of v / v against i / a.    fig. 3.3 is a sketch of the graph. v / v 0 0i / a fig. 3.3   explain briefly how the student would use the graph to determine the gradient of the line. y ou  may draw on the graph of fig. 3.3. y ou are not asked to calculate the value of the gradient.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 an igcse student is determining the focal length of a lens.   fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus. illuminated object lens lens position 1screend lens position 2 fig. 4.1  (a) the student places the screen at a distance d = 80.0 cm from the illuminated object. he  places the lens close to the illuminated object. he moves the lens until a sharply-focused  image of the object is seen on the screen (lens position 1).   he measures the distance x from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens.  19.5 cm  x =     he does not move the object or the screen, but moves the lens towards the screen until  another sharply-focused image of the object is seen on the screen (lens position 2). he  measures the distance y from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens.  60.4 cm y =     (i) on fig. 4.1, carefully mark and label the distances x and y. [1]   (ii) calculate d using the equation d = (y \u2013 x).  d =     (iii) calculate d 2.   d 2 = .",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (iv) calculate the focal length  f of the lens, using the equation f = d 2 \u2013 d 2 4d.  f =   [2]  (b) state two precautions that you would take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  (c) in the experiment, the student produces two images on the screen. they are both sharply  focused.   (i) suggest two differences between the two images. 1.   2.     (ii) suggest one similarity between the two images.  .. .  .. . [3]  (d) suggest a variable that could be changed when repeating this experiment to check the  accuracy of the value obtained for the focal length f.  .. .[1] [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.5 an igcse student is investigating the average speed of a toy car travelling down a slope.  she releases the toy car on the slope. she uses a stopwatch to measure the time taken for the car  to travel down part of the slope. fig. 5.1 shows the slope. support slopebenchhl fig. 5.1  (a) (i) suggest a suitable length l for the slope used in this school laboratory experiment.  l =      (ii)  suggest a suitable height h, above the laboratory bench, for one end of the slope.   h =    [2]  (b) the student tries to determine the time that the toy car takes to travel a distance down the  slope.   make three suggestions about what she could do to ensure that the distance travelled and  the time taken by the toy car are measured as reliably as possible.  1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . 3.  ...   .. . [3] [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_s14_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (sjf/kn) 81314/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1926427520* physics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2014  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141  the igcse students are carrying out measurements in order to determine the density of water  using two methods.  (a) method 1     fig. 1.1 shows an empty measuring cylinder on a balance and fig. 1.2 shows the measuring  cylinder containing water. 40:6880100 60 40 20 gcm3 measuring  cylinder balance 113:6080100 60 40 20 gcm3  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2   (i)  read and record the mass m1 of the empty measuring cylinder.  m1 =  . g    (ii) read and record the mass m2 of the measuring cylinder and water.  m2 =  . g   (iii) read and record the volume v1 of water, as shown in fig. 1.2.  v1 =  . cm3      (iv) calculate a value \u03c11 for the density of water using your readings from (a)(i) , (ii) and (iii)     and the equation \u03c11 = m2 \u2013 m1 v1 . give an appropriate unit.  \u03c11 =   [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) method 2    in this method, a test-tube is floated in the water left in the measuring cylinder from method 1  and the change in water level is measured. test-tube 15:47100 40 20gcm3 80 6080 cotton  fig. 1.3 fig. 1.4   (i) read and record the mass m3 of the test-tube, as shown in fig. 1.3.  m3 =     (ii) the test-tube is carefully lowered, by means of a piece of cotton, into the measuring  cylinder until it floats as shown in fig. 1.4. read and record the new water level v2 in the  measuring cylinder.  v2 =     (iii) using your results from (a)(iii)  and (b)(ii) , calculate v3, the change in the water level,  where v3 = (v2 \u2013 v1).   v3 =     (iv) calculate and record a value \u03c12 for the density of water using the equation \u03c12 = m3 v3 .  \u03c12 =   [3]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) calculate an average value \u03c1av for the density of water using your results from (a)(iv) and  (b)(iv) .  \u03c1av =  ... [1]  (d) suggest a precaution that should be taken in method 1  to ensure that the volume reading is  as accurate as possible.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) suggest a possible source of experimental inaccuracy in method 2 , other than with the  volume reading.    state and explain the effect that this would have on your value for \u03c12.  suggestion  ... .  .. . effect and explanation  ...   .. . [2] [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142  the igcse class is investigating the cooling of water.  the apparatus is shown in figs. 2.1 and 2.2. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 6070 8090 100 110\u00b0c beaker a\u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 6070 8090 100 110\u00b0c beaker bthermometer  fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2  (a) approximately 200 cm3 of hot water is poured into beaker a and, after a short while, the  thermometer reading rises to the value shown in fig. 2.1.   read, and record in the top row of table 2.1, this temperature  \u03b8 at time  t = 0.  (b) approximately 100 cm3 of hot water is poured into beaker b. the thermometer reading rises  to the value shown in fig. 2.2.   read, and record in the top row of table 2.1, this temperature \u03b8 at time  t = 0.  (c) the temperatures \u03b8 of the thermometer in each experiment at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,  150 s and 180 s are shown in table 2.1.     complete the column headings and record the values of t in the table.",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overtable 2.1 beaker a with approximately  200 cm3 of waterbeaker b with approximately  100 cm3 of water t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 85.0 86.0 83.0 83.081.5 80.580.0 78.078.5 75.577.5 74.0[3]  (d)  describe a similarity in the patterns of temperature change of the two volumes of water, apart  from the fact that the temperature of each decreases.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) a student suggests that the rate of cooling is less for a larger volume of water than for a  smaller volume of water.   state whether the readings support this suggestion. justify your answer by referring to the  readings. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. . [2]  (f)  another igcse student wants to repeat the experiment in order to check the results. suggest  two factors that should be kept the same in order for the comparison to be fair. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2] [total: 8] ",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143  some igcse students are investigating resistance using a set of wires.  the circuit they are using is shown in fig. 3.1.  they measure the potential difference and current for three wires a, b and c inserted in turn  between the crocodile clips. all three wires have the same diameter and are made from the same  material. power supply crocodile clipsva fig. 3.1  (a) the crocodile clips are connected to the ends of wire a and the circuit is switched on.   the readings on the voltmeter and ammeter are shown in fig. 3.2.  5 v6789 104321 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.40.2 0 fig. 3.2   read, and record in table 3.1, the potential difference v and the current i. table 3.1 wire length / cm v / i / a 90.0 b 60.0 2.6 1.33 c 30.0 2.3 2.31[3]  (b) the procedure is repeated for wire b and for wire c and the readings are as shown in the table.         complete the column headings in the table.",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) (i) calculate and record the resistance r of each wire, using the readings from table 3.1    and the equation r = v i.  resistance of wire a, ra =  ...  resistance of wire b, rb =  ...  resistance of wire c, rc =  ... [2]   (ii)  one student suggests that ra should be equal to ( rb + rc).    state whether the findings support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  the results. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. . [1]  (d)  one problem encountered in this type of investigation is that resistance can be affected by a  rise in temperature of the wire.   suggest one way in which this effect could be kept to a minimum.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 the igcse students are investigating the effect of an electromagnet.    fig. 4.1 shows part of the equipment they are using.  the current i in the coil of the electromagnet is gradually increased and the reading m on the  balance is recorded. gelectromagnet iron block balancepower supply fig. 4.1  (a) the students are using a variable resistor (rheostat) to change the current in the series circuit  that is connected to the electromagnet.   on fig. 4.1, use standard symbols to draw a circuit containing a variable resistor and an  ammeter connected in a way that would be suitable for the experiment. [2]     (b) the readings are shown in table 4.1.  table 4.1 i / a m / g m / g 0.00 61.37 0.00 1.00 57.25 4.12 2.00 53.13 3.00 49.01   (i) at each current, a value m is calculated.    m  = m0 \u2013 m, where m0 = 61.37 g, the balance reading when i = 0.00 a.    complete the table by calculating and recording m for currents of 2.00 a and 3.00 a. [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii)  state whether the results suggest that m is proportional to i.    justify your statement with reference to the results. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. .  [2]   [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 an igcse student is investigating shadows.  the apparatus she is using is shown in fig. 5.1.  the object and the screen are square, with dimensions as shown in fig. 5.1. object screen dlamp 1.5 cm 8.0  cm fig. 5.1  she places the object at a distance d from the centre of the lamp so that it produces a shadow on  the screen.   for various values of d, she measures the width w and height h of the shadow and records them in  table 5.1.  for each distance d, she calculates a value s, the average side length of the shadow, using her  readings for w and h and the equation s = w + h 2 .  (a) fig. 5.2 shows the shadow produced on the screen when d = 35 cm. the shadow and screen  are shown full size. w hscreen shadow fig. 5.2",
            "13": "13 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (i) measure, and record in table 5.1, the width w and the height h of the shadow. table 5.1 d / cm w / cm h / cm s / cm 55 1.7 1.7 1.745 2.0 2.0 2.03525 3.8 3.9 3.920 4.4 4.6 4.515 5.8 6.2 6.0[2]   (ii) calculate, and record in the table, the value of s when d = 35 cm.   (iii) the object is square in shape. state a practical reason why it is useful to calculate s  rather than just rely on w or h to show the size of the shadow.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b)  plot a graph of s / cm ( y-axis) against d / cm ( x-axis). [5]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) a value of d = 20 cm has been inserted between d = 25 cm and d = 15 cm. this does not  follow the pattern of the gaps of 10 cm between the other distances.   explain why it is useful to have this value when drawing the line on the graph.   .. .  .. .[1]  (d) a student suggests that the distance between the lamp and the object in this experiment  should be no less than 15 cm.   from your observations of the readings and the apparatus being used, give a reason why this  is a sensible suggestion.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 10]",
            "15": "15 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/63/m/j/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib14 11_0625_11/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over       *0254908917* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2014     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  1 diagram 1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.    five identical steel balls are now lowered into the measuring cylinder. diagram 2 shows the new  water level in the cylinder.    cm3 diagram 1100 90 8070605040302010cm3 diagram 2100 908070605040302010 steel ball     what is the volume of each steel ball?  a 6  cm3 b 14  cm3 c 30  cm3 d 70  cm3      2 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.    speed uv w x y time 0     between which two times is the car stationary?  a u and v b v and w c w and x d x and y     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14 [turn over  3 a man stands by a railway track.      a train travelling at 40  m / s takes 2.0 s to pass the man.   what is the length of the train?  a 20  m b 38  m c 40  m d 80  m      4 the mass of an astronaut is 70  kg on the moon.    what is the mass of the astronaut on the earth?  a 7 kg b 70  kg c 80  kg d 700  kg     5 the weight of an object is found using the balance shown in the diagram. the object is put in the  left-hand pan and various weights are put in the right-hand pan.    object weights     these are the results.    weights in the right-hand pan effect  0.1  n, 0.1  n, 0.05  n, 0.02  n balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side  0.2  n, 0.1  n, 0.01  n balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side    what is the best estimate of the weight of the object?  a 0.27  n b 0.29  n c 0.31  n d 0.58  n     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  6 the diagram shows the dimensions of a rectangular block of metal of mass m.    pq r     which expression is used to calculate the density of the metal?  a m \u00d7 p \u00d7 q  b m \u00d7 p \u00d7 q \u00d7 r  c ) (qpm \u00d7  d )  ( rqpm \u00d7\u00d7      7 in which situation is no resultant force needed?  a a car changing direction at a steady speed  b a car moving in a straight line at a steady speed  c a car slowing down  d a car speeding up      8 which properties of a body can be changed by applying a force to the body?  a mass, motion and shape  b mass and motion, but not shape  c mass and shape, but not motion  d motion and shape, but not mass    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14 [turn over  9 the list contains three energy resources p, q and r.     p geothermal energy from hot rocks   q nuclear fission in reactors   r sunlight on solar panels    which of these resources are renewable?  a p and q only  b p and r only  c q and r only  d p, q and r      10 the diagram shows three different containers j, k and l. each container contains water of the  same depth.    jk l    which statement about the pressure of the water on the base of each container is correct?  a the water pressure is greatest in container j.  b the water pressure is greatest in container k.  c the water pressure is greatest in container l.  d the water pressure is the same for all three containers.     11 which movement will require the greatest amount of work to be done?  a a force of 10  n moving an object a distance of 3.0  m  b a force of 10  n moving an object a distance of 5.0  m  c a force of 15  n moving an object a distance of 3.0  m  d a force of 15  n moving an object a distance of 5.0  m    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  12 a water manometer is connected to a gas supply.    watergas supply pq     there is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.    what happens to the water level at p and what happens to the water level at q?     water level at p water level at q  a falls falls  b falls rises  c rises falls  d rises rises     13 the diagram shows a beaker of water. four molecules are labelled. the relative amount of  energy of each molecule is shown.    which molecule is most likely to escape from the liquid?    molecule a (high energy) molecule b (low energy) molecule c (high energy)molecule d (low energy)    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14 [turn over  14 some gas is trapped in a container of fixed volume.  the temperature of the gas increases.  which graph shows how the pressure of the gas changes with temperature?    0 0pressure  / pa temperature  / \u00b0ca 0 0pressure  / pa temperature  / \u00b0cb 0 0pressure  / pa temperature  / \u00b0cc 0 0pressure  / pa temperature  / \u00b0cd      15 which points are the fixed points of the liquid-in-glass thermometer shown?    \u2013 1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 \u00b0c    a the beginning and end points of the column of liquid  b the beginning and end points of the thermometer scale  c the points marked 0  \u00b0c and 100  \u00b0c  d the top and bottom points of the thermometer bulb    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  16 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.     liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power.     the temperature of both liquids increases by the same amount.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sheaters of same powerdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a both liquids receive the same amount of energy.  b liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  c both liquids have equal thermal capacity.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.     17 the metal surface of a kettle is hot.    what happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?  a the density of the air decreases and the air falls.  b the density of the air decreases and the air rises.  c the density of the air increases and the air falls.  d the density of the air increases and the air rises.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14 [turn over  18 one type of double glazing consists of two panes of glass separated by a vacuum.    glass vacuumglass     which method or methods of energy transfer are prevented by the vacuum?  a conduction and convection  b conduction and radiation  c convection and radiation  d radiation only      19 the diagram shows four waves drawn to the same scale.    00p distance00q distance 00r distance00s distancedisplacement displacement displacement displacement     which statement is correct?  a the amplitude of wave p is the same as the amplitude of wave r.  b the amplitude of wave s  is double the amplitude of wave q.  c the wavelength of wave q  is double the wavelength of wave p.  d the wavelength of wave s  is the same as the wavelength of wave q.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  20 light waves pass from air into glass and are refracted.  what always remains constant when this happens?  a direction  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength     21 which type of electromagnetic wave is used in airport security scanners?  a infra-red  b microwaves  c radio waves  d x-rays    22 which waves are longitudinal?    88:88b a c d light waves from a lampmicrowaves in an ovenwater waves on a pondsound waves from a trumpet    23 an object is placed in front of a converging lens. the lens has a focal length f.  the lens produces a real, enlarged image of the object.    in which labelled position is the object placed?    a b c d 2fflens  ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14 [turn over  24 a fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. an engineer adjusts the alarm so that it  produces a louder note of a higher pitch.  what effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound waves that the  alarm produces?     amplitude frequency  a larger larger  b larger smaller  c smaller larger  d smaller smaller      25 in an experiment to measure the speed of sou nd, a student uses a stopwatch to find the time  taken for a sound wave to travel from x to y. she does this six times.    sound travels from x to y x y    the table shows her results.    measurement time  / s  first 0.5  second 0.7  third 0.6  fourth 0.4  fifth 0.9  sixth 0.5    which value for the time should be used to calculate the speed of sound?  a 0.4  s b 0.5  s c 0.6  s d 0.9  s     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  26 the ends of three metal rods are tested by hol ding end q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.    rod 1 rod 2 rod 3qr st u     the results are as follows.    end q: attracts end r,  attracts end s,  attracts end t,  repels end u.    which of the metal rods is a magnet?  a rod 1 only  b rod 1 and rod 2  c rod 1 and rod 3  d rod 3 only      27 a permanent magnet is made from metal and an electromagnet uses a metal core.  which metal is suitable for each of these purposes?   permanent  magnet core of  electromagnet a iron iron  b iron steel  c steel iron  d steel steel     28 which row gives the unit for energy and the unit for electromotive force (e.m.f.)?     energy e.m.f.  a j n  b j v  c w n  d w v     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14 [turn over  29 a student carries out an experiment to investi gate the resistance of a resistor r. she takes a  series of readings of potential difference (p.d.) and current, and plots a graph of her results.    which circuit should she use?    a r va a rvb a r vc a rvd       30 the diagram shows a circuit with a 3.0  \u03c9 resistor and a 2.0  \u03c9 resistor connected in parallel.    3.0 \u03c96.0 v 2.0 \u03c9a     the switch is open, and the ammeter reads 2.0  a.     the switch is now closed and the ammeter reads the total current in both resistors.    what is the ammeter reading with the switch closed?  a 1.2  a b 3.0  a c 4.0  a d 5.0  a     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  31 the diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.    plastic  case  brass  connecting  strip switch  lamp cells     which is the circuit diagram for the torch?    c b a d       32 an engineer uses the potential divider shown in the diagram. he needs the output voltage to be  one tenth ( 101) of the input voltage.    x y output voltageinput voltage     which pair of values could he use for the two resistors x and y?     x / k\u03c9 y  / k\u03c9  a 1.0 9.0  b 1.0 10.0  c 9.0 1.0  d 10.0 1.0     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14 [turn over  33 the current in a kettle is 10  a and it is protected by a 13  a fuse.    the owner of the kettle replaces the 13  a fuse with a 3  a fuse.    what happens when the kettle is switched on?  a the fuse blows and the kettle is damaged.  b the fuse blows and the kettle is undamaged.  c the fuse does not blow and the kettle works correctly.  d the fuse does not blow but the kettle fails to work.      34 the diagram shows cables used in the transmission of electrical energy. high voltages are used  for the transmission.    transmission cables  power station    why are high voltages used for the transmission of electrical energy?  a fear of high voltages stops people from interfering with the cables.  b heat loss in the cables is smaller than if low voltages are used.  c high voltages increase the current in the cables.  d high voltages produce large magnetic fields, so less insulation is needed.      35 which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern around a wire that is carrying a current  perpendicular to the page?    a wire wirebc d      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  36 the diagram shows a simple transformer with an input of 240  v and an output of 40  v.    there are 600 turns on the primary coil.    output input 600  turns 240  v4 0  vprimary coil secondary coil     how many turns are there on the secondary coil?  a 100 b 320 c 400 d 3600     37 in a cathode-ray tube, a hot tungsten cathode releases particles by thermionic emission.    what are these particles?  a \u03b1-particles  b electrons  c protons  d tungsten atoms     38 the diagram shows a radioactive source, a thick aluminium sheet and a radiation detector.    radioactive sourcethick aluminium sheetradiation detector      the radiation detector shows a reading greater than the background reading.    which type of radiation is being emitted by  the source and detected by the detector?  a \u03b1-radiation  b \u03b2-radiation  c \u03b3-radiation  d infra-red radiation    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  39 the count rate from a radioactive isotope is recorded every hour. the count rate is corrected for  background radiation.   the table shows the readings.  time  / hours 0 1 2 3 4 5  s/ countsrate count corrected    800 620 480 370 290 220    what estimate of the half-life of the isotope can be obtained from the readings in the table?  a between 1 and 2 hours  b between 2 and 3 hours  c between 3 and 4 hours  d between 4 and 5 hours      40 a nuclide is represented by the symbol .xp q  how many neutrons are in one nucleus of the nuclide?  a p b q c p + q d p \u2013 q     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  blank page ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  blank page ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/11/o/n/14  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib14 11_0625_12/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over       *9297760973* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2014     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  1 a man stands by a railway track.      a train travelling at 40  m / s takes 2.0 s to pass the man.   what is the length of the train?  a 20  m b 38  m c 40  m d 80  m      2 diagram 1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.    five identical steel balls are now lowered into the measuring cylinder. diagram 2 shows the new  water level in the cylinder.    cm3 diagram 1100 90 8070605040302010cm3 diagram 2100 908070605040302010 steel ball     what is the volume of each steel ball?  a 6  cm3 b 14  cm3 c 30  cm3 d 70  cm3     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14 [turn over  3 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.    speed uv w x y time 0     between which two times is the car stationary?  a u and v b v and w c w and x d x and y      4 the diagram shows the dimensions of a rectangular block of metal of mass m.    pq r     which expression is used to calculate the density of the metal?  a m \u00d7 p \u00d7 q  b m \u00d7 p \u00d7 q \u00d7 r  c ) (qpm \u00d7  d )  ( rqpm \u00d7\u00d7     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  5 the weight of an object is found using the balance shown in the diagram. the object is put in the  left-hand pan and various weights are put in the right-hand pan.    object weights     these are the results.    weights in the right-hand pan effect  0.1  n, 0.1  n, 0.05  n, 0.02  n balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side  0.2  n, 0.1  n, 0.01  n balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side    what is the best estimate of the weight of the object?  a 0.27  n b 0.29  n c 0.31  n d 0.58  n     6 the mass of an astronaut is 70  kg on the moon.    what is the mass of the astronaut on the earth?  a 7 kg b 70  kg c 80  kg d 700  kg      7 which properties of a body can be changed by applying a force to the body?  a mass, motion and shape  b mass and motion, but not shape  c mass and shape, but not motion  d motion and shape, but not mass    8 in which situation is no resultant force needed?  a a car changing direction at a steady speed  b a car moving in a straight line at a steady speed  c a car slowing down  d a car speeding up    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14 [turn over  9 the diagram shows three different containers j, k and l. each container contains water of the  same depth.    jk l    which statement about the pressure of the water on the base of each container is correct?  a the water pressure is greatest in container j.  b the water pressure is greatest in container k.  c the water pressure is greatest in container l.  d the water pressure is the same for all three containers.     10 a water manometer is connected to a gas supply.    watergas supply pq     there is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.    what happens to the water level at p and what happens to the water level at q?     water level at p water level at q  a falls falls  b falls rises  c rises falls  d rises rises    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  11 the list contains three energy resources p, q and r.     p geothermal energy from hot rocks   q nuclear fission in reactors   r sunlight on solar panels    which of these resources are renewable?  a p and q only  b p and r only  c q and r only  d p, q and r      12 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.     liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power.     the temperature of both liquids increases by the same amount.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sheaters of same powerdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a both liquids receive the same amount of energy.  b liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  c both liquids have equal thermal capacity.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14 [turn over  13 which points are the fixed points of the liquid-in-glass thermometer shown?    \u2013 1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 \u00b0c    a the beginning and end points of the column of liquid  b the beginning and end points of the thermometer scale  c the points marked 0  \u00b0c and 100  \u00b0c  d the top and bottom points of the thermometer bulb      14 the metal surface of a kettle is hot.    what happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?  a the density of the air decreases and the air falls.  b the density of the air decreases and the air rises.  c the density of the air increases and the air falls.  d the density of the air increases and the air rises.     15 some gas is trapped in a container of fixed volume.  the temperature of the gas increases.  which graph shows how the pressure of the gas changes with temperature?    0 0pressure  / pa temperature  / \u00b0ca 0 0pressure  / pa temperature  / \u00b0cb 0 0pressure  / pa temperature  / \u00b0cc 0 0pressure  / pa temperature  / \u00b0cd  ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  16 the diagram shows four waves drawn to the same scale.    00p distance00q distance 00r distance00s distancedisplacement displacement displacement displacement     which statement is correct?  a the amplitude of wave p is the same as the amplitude of wave r.  b the amplitude of wave s  is double the amplitude of wave q.  c the wavelength of wave q  is double the wavelength of wave p.  d the wavelength of wave s  is the same as the wavelength of wave q.      17 the diagram shows a beaker of water. four molecules are labelled. the relative amount of  energy of each molecule is shown.    which molecule is most likely to escape from the liquid?    molecule a (high energy) molecule b (low energy) molecule c (high energy)molecule d (low energy)    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14 [turn over  18 one type of double glazing consists of two panes of glass separated by a vacuum.    glass vacuumglass     which method or methods of energy transfer are prevented by the vacuum?  a conduction and convection  b conduction and radiation  c convection and radiation  d radiation only      19 the diagram shows a circuit with a 3.0  \u03c9 resistor and a 2.0  \u03c9 resistor connected in parallel.    3.0 \u03c96.0 v 2.0 \u03c9a     the switch is open, and the ammeter reads 2.0  a.     the switch is now closed and the ammeter reads the total current in both resistors.    what is the ammeter reading with the switch closed?  a 1.2  a b 3.0  a c 4.0  a d 5.0  a     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  20 the diagram shows cables used in the transmission of electrical energy. high voltages are used  for the transmission.    transmission cables  power station    why are high voltages used for the transmission of electrical energy?  a fear of high voltages stops people from interfering with the cables.  b heat loss in the cables is smaller than if low voltages are used.  c high voltages increase the current in the cables.  d high voltages produce large magnetic fields, so less insulation is needed.      21 the diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.    plastic  case  brass  connecting  strip switch  lamp cells     which is the circuit diagram for the torch?    c b a d       ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14 [turn over  22 which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern around a wire that is carrying a current  perpendicular to the page?    a wire wirebc d       23 the diagram shows a simple transformer with an input of 240  v and an output of 40  v.    there are 600 turns on the primary coil.    output input 600  turns 240  v4 0  vprimary coil secondary coil     how many turns are there on the secondary coil?  a 100 b 320 c 400 d 3600     24 an engineer uses the potential divider shown in the diagram. he needs the output voltage to be  one tenth ( 101) of the input voltage.    x y output voltageinput voltage     which pair of values could he use for the two resistors x and y?     x / k\u03c9 y  / k\u03c9  a 1.0 9.0  b 1.0 10.0  c 9.0 1.0  d 10.0 1.0 ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  25 the current in a kettle is 10  a and it is protected by a 13  a fuse.    the owner of the kettle replaces the 13  a fuse with a 3  a fuse.    what happens when the kettle is switched on?  a the fuse blows and the kettle is damaged.  b the fuse blows and the kettle is undamaged.  c the fuse does not blow and the kettle works correctly.  d the fuse does not blow but the kettle fails to work.      26 which waves are longitudinal?    88:88b a c d light waves from a lampmicrowaves in an ovenwater waves on a pondsound waves from a trumpet     27 which type of electromagnetic wave is used in airport security scanners?  a infra-red  b microwaves  c radio waves  d x-rays      28 light waves pass from air into glass and are refracted.  what always remains constant when this happens?  a direction  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14 [turn over  29 in an experiment to measure the speed of sound, a student uses a stopwatch to find the time  taken for a sound wave to travel from x to y. she does this six times.    sound travels from x to y x y    the table shows her results.    measurement time  / s  first 0.5  second 0.7  third 0.6  fourth 0.4  fifth 0.9  sixth 0.5    which value for the time should be used to calculate the speed of sound?  a 0.4  s b 0.5  s c 0.6  s d 0.9  s      30 a permanent magnet is made from metal and an electromagnet uses a metal core.  which metal is suitable for each of these purposes?   permanent  magnet core of  electromagnet a iron iron  b iron steel  c steel iron  d steel steel     31 a fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. an engineer adjusts the alarm so that it  produces a louder note of a higher pitch.  what effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound waves that the  alarm produces?     amplitude frequency  a larger larger  b larger smaller  c smaller larger  d smaller smaller ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  32 which row gives the unit for energy and the unit for electromotive force (e.m.f.)?     energy e.m.f.  a j n  b j v  c w n  d w v     33 the ends of three metal rods are tested by hol ding end q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.    rod 1 rod 2 rod 3qr st u     the results are as follows.    end q: attracts end r,  attracts end s,  attracts end t,  repels end u.    which of the metal rods is a magnet?  a rod 1 only  b rod 1 and rod 2  c rod 1 and rod 3  d rod 3 only     34 which movement will require the greatest amount of work to be done?  a a force of 10  n moving an object a distance of 3.0  m  b a force of 10  n moving an object a distance of 5.0  m  c a force of 15  n moving an object a distance of 3.0  m  d a force of 15  n moving an object a distance of 5.0  m    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14 [turn over  35 an object is placed in front of a converging lens. the lens has a focal length f.  the lens produces a real, enlarged image of the object.    in which labelled position is the object placed?    a b c d 2fflens      36 a student carries out an experiment to investi gate the resistance of a resistor r. she takes a  series of readings of potential difference (p.d.) and current, and plots a graph of her results.    which circuit should she use?    a r va a rvb a r vc a rvd     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  37 the diagram shows a radioactive source, a thick aluminium sheet and a radiation detector.    radioactive sourcethick aluminium sheetradiation detector      the radiation detector shows a reading greater than the background reading.    which type of radiation is being emitted by the source and detected by the detector?  a \u03b1-radiation  b \u03b2-radiation  c \u03b3-radiation  d infra-red radiation     38 the count rate from a radioactive isotope is recorded every hour. the count rate is corrected for  background radiation.   the table shows the readings.  time  / hours 0 1 2 3 4 5  s/ countsrate count corrected    800 620 480 370 290 220    what estimate of the half-life of the isotope can be obtained from the readings in the table?  a between 1 and 2 hours  b between 2 and 3 hours  c between 3 and 4 hours  d between 4 and 5 hours      39 a nuclide is represented by the symbol .xp q  how many neutrons are in one nucleus of the nuclide?  a p b q c p + q d p \u2013 q     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  40 in a cathode-ray tube, a hot tungsten cathode releases particles by thermionic emission.    what are these particles?  a \u03b1-particles  b electrons  c protons  d tungsten atoms     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  blank page     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  blank page       ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/12/o/n/14  blank page       "
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib14 11_0625_13/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over       *2442981417* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2014     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  1 a stopwatch is used to time a runner in a race. the diagrams show the stopwatch at the start and  at the end of a lap of the race.    start of lap end of lap0 : 50 : 10 1  : 40 : 10     how long did the runner take to finish the lap of the race?  a 50.00 seconds  b 50.10 seconds  c 90.00 seconds  d 100.10 seconds     2 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.    speed uv w x y time 0     between which two times is the car stationary?  a u and v b v and w c w and x d x and y     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14 [turn over  3 an aeroplane flies from town x to town z, stopping for 1 hour at town y to pick up more  passengers. the distances between the towns are shown in the diagram.    300  km 200  kmy xz     the total time taken between leaving x and arriving at z is 3 hours.    what is the average speed of the aeroplane in the air ?  a 4500  km  / h b 3500  km  / h c 2500  km  / h d 1500  km  / h      4 the mass of an astronaut is 70  kg on the moon.    what is the mass of the astronaut on the earth?  a 7 kg b 70  kg c 80  kg d 700  kg     5 the weight of an object is found using the balance shown in the diagram. the object is put in the  left-hand pan and various weights are put in the right-hand pan.    object weights     these are the results.    weights in the right-hand pan effect  0.1  n, 0.1  n, 0.05  n, 0.02  n balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side  0.2  n, 0.1  n, 0.01  n balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side    what is the best estimate of the weight of the object?  a 0.27  n b 0.29  n c 0.31  n d 0.58  n     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  6 diagram 1 shows an empty measuring cylinder on a balance.    diagram 2 shows the same measuring cylinder on the balance, but it now contains a liquid.    cm3 diagram 116.0 14.012.010.0 8.0 6.04.02.0 gcm3 diagram 216.0 14.012.010.0 8.0 6.04.02.0 g     what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.2  g / cm3 b 0.5  g / cm3 c 2.0  g / cm3 d 5.0  g / cm3      7 in which situation is no resultant force needed?  a a car changing direction at a steady speed  b a car moving in a straight line at a steady speed  c a car slowing down  d a car speeding up    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14 [turn over  8 the diagram shows a uniform, flat metal sheet hanging freely from a nail at point a. a weight also  hangs freely on a string tied to a.     one of the labelled points is at the centre of mass of the metal sheet.   which point is at the centre of mass?    nail  metal sheet weighta  b  c  d        9 when a bicycle lamp is switched on, what is the useful energy change within the battery ?  a chemical energy to electrical energy  b electrical energy to chemical energy  c electrical energy to light energy  d light energy to chemical energy     10 a student does some work by pulling a suitcase along a corridor.    she now pulls a second suitcase along the corridor.    which row indicates that the student is now doing twice as much work?     the force used  to pull suitcase the distance the  suitcase is pulled  a is doubled is doubled  b is doubled is halved  c stays the same is doubled  d stays the same is halved    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  11 the scale diagram shows three identical blocks, p, q and r. the blocks have different areas of  contact with the ground.    pq r    which block exerts the greatest pressure on the ground?  a block p  b block q  c block r  d they all exert the same pressure      12 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of the air in a container.    hconnection to containermanometer liquid     which change would give a bigger value of height h ?  a using a less dense liquid  b using a more dense liquid  c using a narrower tube  d using a wider tube     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14 [turn over  13 the volume of a gas in a sealed syringe is increased. the temperature of the gas does not  change.    before change after change     after this change is made, what has happened to the gas molecules in the syringe?  a they move more quickly.  b they move more slowly.  c they hit the syringe walls less often.  d they hit the syringe walls more often.     14 some liquid is poured into a metal dish on a wooden table. the dish, the liquid, the table and the  air around the dish are all at the same temperature.    metal dishliquid wooden table     the temperature of the liquid now starts to decrease.    what could cause this temperature decrease?  a convection currents in the liquid  b conduction of heat through the metal dish  c evaporation of the liquid  d heat radiation from the liquid     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  15 the diagram shows four labelled changes of state between solid, liquid and gas.    solid liquid gasp sq r    which changes need an energy input?  a p and q b q and r c r and s d s and p      16 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.    liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power.      the temperature of both liquids increases by the same amount.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sheaters of same powerdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a both liquids receive the same amount of energy.  b liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  c both liquids have equal thermal capacity.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14 [turn over  17 two methods by which thermal energy can be transferred are conduction and radiation.  which statement is correct?  a conduction involves density changes in fluids.  b conduction only occurs in solids.  c radiation cannot occur in a vacuum.  d radiation involves electromagnetic waves.     18 a heater is to be fitted in a room to warm the air throughout the room.  the diagram shows two possible positions to fit the heater, p and q.    position pposition q room     which position is better and why?   position why?  a p warmer air is less dense and rises  b p warmer air is more dense and rises  c q warmer air is less dense and falls  d q warmer air is more dense and falls    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  19 the diagram shows four waves drawn to the same scale.    00p distance00q distance 00r distance00s distancedisplacement displacement displacement displacement     which statement is correct?  a the amplitude of wave p is the same as the amplitude of wave r.  b the amplitude of wave s  is double the amplitude of wave q.  c the wavelength of wave q  is double the wavelength of wave p.  d the wavelength of wave s  is the same as the wavelength of wave q.      20 waves travel more quickly on the surface of water when the water is deep.  a stone is dropped at point x into a pool of va rying depth. the diagram shows the first wavefront  on the surface of the pool.  the region between x and which labelled point is likely to be the deepest?    wavefront ab dcx      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14 [turn over  21 an intruder alarm sensor detects that a human is warmer than his surroundings.    which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?  a infra-red  b radio  c ultraviolet  d visible light     22 which waves are longitudinal?    88:88b a c d light waves from a lampmicrowaves in an ovenwater waves on a pondsound waves from a trumpet    23 an object is placed in front of a converging lens. the lens has a focal length f.  in which labelled position should the object be placed in order to produce a real image of the object that is smaller than the object?    a b c d 2fflens     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  24 three vibrating objects p, q and r produce waves in the air of different frequencies as shown.  object frequency  / hz  p 25  q 1000  r 15  000  which of these waves can be heard by a human ear?  a p, q and r  b p and q only  c p and r only  d q and r only     25 in an experiment to measure the speed of sou nd, a student uses a stopwatch to find the time  taken for a sound wave to travel from x to y. she does this six times.    sound travels from x to y x y    the table shows her results.    measurement time  / s  first 0.5  second 0.7  third 0.6  fourth 0.4  fifth 0.9  sixth 0.5    which value for the time should be used to calculate the speed of sound?  a 0.4  s b 0.5  s c 0.6  s d 0.9  s    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14 [turn over  26 the ends of three metal rods are tested by hol ding end q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.    rod 1 rod 2 rod 3qr st u     the results are as follows.    end q: attracts end r,  attracts end s,  attracts end t,  repels end u.    which of the metal rods is a magnet?  a rod 1 only  b rod 1 and rod 2  c rod 1 and rod 3  d rod 3 only      27 the diagram shows two bar magnets, stored with metal keepers across the ends. the keepers  help to keep the magnets magnetised.    magnet magnetkeeper keeper     the material used for the keepers becomes strongly magnetised when placed in contact with the  magnets, but does not remain magnetised when taken away from the magnets.    what is a suitable metal to use for the magnets and what is a suitable metal to use for the keepers?     metal for  magnets metal for  keepers  a iron iron  b iron steel  c steel iron   d steel steel   ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  28 four wires are made from the same material.  which wire has the least resistance?     diameter of  wire  / mm length of  wire  / cm  a 0.2 100  b 0.2 200  c 0.4 100  d 0.4 200      29 a 30  \u03c9 resistor is connected in series with another resistor and a 6.0  v battery. the current in the  circuit is 0.12  a. a voltmeter is connected across the other resistor.    30 \u03c9 v0.12  a6.0 v     what is the reading on the voltmeter?  a 2.4  v b 3.6  v c 6.0  v d 9.6  v     30 a circuit contains four ammeters a, b, c and d, and three resistors with different values.  which ammeter shows the largest reading?    aaa a20 \u03c910 \u03c9 30 \u03c9a b cd      ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14 [turn over  31 the diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.    plastic  case  brass  connecting  strip switch  lamp cells     which is the circuit diagram for the torch?    c b a d       32 the diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a light-dependent  resistor (ldr). a voltmeter is connected across the ldr.    v     a bright lamp shines light onto the ldr. the lamp is then switched off and this causes the voltmeter reading to change.    which row shows the change in the resistance of the ldr and the change in the voltmeter reading when the lamp is switched off?   resistance of  ldr voltmeter  reading  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  33 the current in an electrical heater is 5.0  a.    the heater is connected to the mains by a flexible cable that can carry a current of up to 15  a.  the mains circuit can carry a current of up to 30  a.    different fuses are available for the heater.    which fuse is the most suitable?  a 4.0  a b 10  a c 20  a d 40  a     34 the diagram shows a thin copper wire in a magnetic field. the current in the wire is from right to  left. this causes an upward force on the wire.    force on wirecurrent     the direction of the current and the direction of the magnetic field are both reversed.    in which direction does the force act on the wire, after these changes are made?  a downwards  b into the page  c out of the page  d upwards     35 a solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. a rod is inserted into one end of the  solenoid. the ammeter shows that there is a small electric current in the circuit while the rod is moving.    solenoidrod a    which rod is being inserted?  a a heated copper rod  b a magnetised steel rod  c an uncharged nylon rod  d a radioactive uranium rod     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14 [turn over  36 the diagram shows the structure of a transformer.      primary coil core     which row shows a suitable material for the primary coil and a suitable material for the core?     primary coil core  a copper copper  b copper iron  c iron copper  d iron iron     37 in a cathode-ray tube, a hot tungsten cathode releases particles by thermionic emission.    what are these particles?  a \u03b1-particles  b electrons  c protons  d tungsten atoms     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  38 a radioactive source emits three types of radiation r, s and t.     the diagram shows an experiment set up to study the penetrating properties of r, s and t.   paper few mm of aluminiumfew cm of leadr ts     which types of radiation are r, s and t?     r s t  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles  c \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  d \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles      39 the half-life of a radioactive substance is 10 minutes. a sample of the radioactive substance  contains 2000 nuclei.  how many radioactive nuclei were in the sample half an hour earlier?  a 250 b 4000 c 6000 d 16  000    40 which statement about the nuclei of all atoms is correct?  a they are very small compared with the size of the atoms.  b they always contain the same number of protons as neutrons.  c they contain electrons, neutrons and protons.  d they have a total charge of zero.    ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  blank page ",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where t hird-party owned material protected by copyright  is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2014 0625/13/o/n/14  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (ac/sw) 81802/5 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *9691108524* physics  0625/21 paper 2  core october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 a student hangs a spring vertically from a hook, as shown in fig. 1.1. 12.0  cm15.0  cm 2.0 n fig. 1.1  (a) describe how the length of the spring can be measured accurately, after it has been hung  from the hook.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (b) with no load, the spring is 12.0 cm long.   with a load of 2.0 n on the end of the spring, its length is 15.0 cm.   calculate the extension of the spring.  extension =  . cm [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the load is attached to the spring and then released.   fig. 1.2 represents the forces acting on the load just after it is released. 2.0 n2.8 n fig. 1.2   calculate the resultant force acting on the load and give its direction.  resultant force =  ... n  direction =  ..  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 a steel object has 5 kg stamped on its side, as shown in fig. 2.1.   5 kg fig. 2.1  (a) express 5.0 kg in grams. 5.0 kg =  g [1]  (b) the density of the steel is 7.81 g / cm3.   calculate the volume of the object.   volume =  cm3 [3]  [total: 4]  ",
            "5": "5 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over3 (a) use words from the list below to complete the sentences about work and energy.   initial acceleration   distance moved  force exerted  potential energy  time taken  an object is dragged across a rough surface.  in order to find the work done on the object, it is   necessary to know the . and the . .   to calculate the power, it is also necessary to know the . . [3] (b) a machine working in a factory actually uses more energy than is needed to do the task it is  involved in.   suggest why this is so.  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 5]  ",
            "6": "6 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 (a) thermal energy is supplied to a certain substance at a constant rate. the temperature of the  substance varies with time as shown in fig. 4.1. abcd timetemperature fig. 4.1   at the temperature indicated by point a on fig. 4.1, the substance is in the solid state.     state what is happening to the substance   (i) in the region ab,  .. .  .. .   (ii) in the region bc,  .. .  .. .   (iii) in the region cd.  .. .  .. .  [3]  (b) suggest why ice at 0 \u00b0c is more effective for cooling a drink than the same mass of water at  0 \u00b0c.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) steam is pumped into cold water in a container.   (i) state and explain what happens to the temperature of the water in the container. statement   .. explanation  .. ..  .. .  .. .  [2]   (ii) state and explain what happens to the mass of water in the container. statement   .. explanation  .. ..  .. .  [2]  [total: 9]  ",
            "8": "8 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 fig. 5.1 shows a girl standing some distance away from a rock face. she has a flat piece of wood  in each hand.   rock face fig. 5.1  (not to scale)  when the girl bangs the two pieces of wood together, they make a loud sound. a short time later  she hears the sound again.  (a) why does she hear this second sound?  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the time interval between the two sounds is 1.8 s. sound travels at 330 m / s in air.   calculate the distance of the girl from the rock face.  distance =  ... m [3]  (c) a boy standing very close to the rock face only hears one sound.   how long after the girl makes the sound does he hear this sound?  time interval =   s [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) state two ways in which a sound wave is different from a light wave. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]  [total: 7]  ",
            "10": "10 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20146 (a) describe   (i) how a dry cloth can be used to charge a plastic rod,  .. .  .. .   (ii) how the rod may be tested to check that it is charged.  .. .  .. .  [2]  (b) a lady has been riding in a car with plastic-covered seats. she gets out of the car. she touches  the door handle when her feet are on the ground. she experiences an electric shock.   suggest why this happens.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 4]  ",
            "11": "11 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over7 fig. 7.1 is a ray diagram representing the formation of an image by a converging lens.   f2 f1oi c fig. 7.1  f1 and f2 are the two principal focuses of the lens.  the object is at o and its image is at i.  (a) on fig. 7.1,   (i) accurately mark the focal length of the lens and label it f, [2]   (ii) from the top of the object, draw the path of the ray that passes through f2, until it reaches  the image. [2]  (b) where would a screen need to be placed in order to see a focused image? tick one box. at f2 at c at f1 at i [1]    (c) the object is moved a small distance away from the lens.   state what this causes to happen to   (i) the position of the image,  .. .   (ii) the size of the image.  .. .  [2]  [total: 7]  ",
            "12": "12 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20148 the electric circuit in fig. 8.1 contains a cell, two resistors and another component.   xy r1 r2 fig. 8.1  (a) (i) name the component that is shown in fig. 8.1 by the symbol .  .. .   (ii) what is the function of this component in the circuit?  .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]  (b) (i) what flows in the circuit in order to create the current in the circuit? tick one box. charge potential difference power resistance   (ii) in which unit do we measure current? ...  [2]  (c) resistor r1 has a resistance of 8 \u03c9 and resistor r2 has a resistance of 12 \u03c9.   calculate the combined resistance of r1 and r2 when arranged as in fig. 8.1.  resistance =  ..  \u03c9 [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) r1 and r2 are removed from the circuit and then re-connected between x and y , so that they  have a different combined resistance.   (i) in the space below, draw the circuit showing r1 and r2 connected in this different way.  [2]   (ii) what word is used to describe this different way of connecting r1 and r2?  .. .[1]  [total: 9]  ",
            "14": "14 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 fig. 9.1 shows a transformer used to allow lamps of different voltage ratings to be operated from a  240 v mains supply. 240  v primary coil 500 turnssecondary coil 500 turnsw zp yx fig. 9.1  the primary coil and the secondary coil both have 500 uniformly-wound turns.    electrical connections to the secondary coil can be made at four places, w, x, y and z.  (a) the piece of metal p provides a magnetic link between the coils.   state   (i) the name of this part of the transformer,    (ii) the metal from which p is made. ...  [2]  (b) a lamp, designed to light at normal brightness with a 120 v supply, lights normally when  connected between w and x.   calculate the number of turns between w and x.  number of turns = ...[3]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the lamp in (b) is connected between x and y .   describe and explain what happens to the lamp.  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (d) state what would happen if the 120 v lamp in (b) is connected between w and z.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 9]  ",
            "16": "16 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201410 fig. 10.1 is a simplified drawing of a tube for producing, deflecting and detecting cathode rays.   h2 h1heater cathode anodeca y1y2 x1x2 path of cathode raysbottomtop screen y -plates x-plates fig. 10.1  the cathode rays are represented by the broken line in fig. 10.1.  (a) which particles make up cathode rays? ...[1]  (b) how does the screen show the presence of cathode rays?  .. .[1]  (c) between which two of the labelled terminals should a potential difference be connected in  order to   (i) make the cathode hot,  and  [1]   (ii) accelerate the cathode rays along the tube,   and  [1]   (iii) deflect the cathode rays to the top of the screen.  and  [1]  (d) in (c)(iii) , which of the two terminals should be made   (i) positive,    (ii) negative? .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "17": "17 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over11 fig. 11.1 represents the atomic structure of three neutral atoms.   a cab hydrogen deuteriumnucleusb nucleusc ca tritiumb nucleus fig. 11.1  (a) what letter in fig. 11.1 is used to represent   (i) an electron, ...   (ii) a proton,    (iii) a neutron? .  [2]  (b) state the nucleon number of the tritium atom. ... [1]  (c) all three atoms may be represented by the chemical symbol h. hydrogen can be represented  in nuclide notation as h11.   write down the nuclide notation for   (i) deuterium,    (ii) tritium. ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "18": "18 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201412 350 dice are made from small cubes of wood with one face painted blue, as shown in fig. 12.1. blue face fig. 12.1  throwing large numbers of dice represents radioactive decay.  the 350 dice are thrown on a bench. all those dice that land with the blue face uppermost are removed. they are regarded as having \u201cdecayed\u201d.    the remaining dice are then thrown again, and the \u201cblue-uppermost\u201d dice are removed. this  process is repeated until the number of dice remaining is quite small.  the table below shows the number of dice remaining after each throw. throw 0 1 2 3456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 number of dice  remaining350 289 237 201 168 138 115 94 79 67 59 50 41 39 35  on fig. 12.2, points have been plotted for some of the readings in the table.  (a) on fig. 12.2, plot the first five points and draw the best smooth curve for all the points. [3]  (b) (i) complete the sentence below.    the half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken to reduce the number of nuclei     of the original sort to ... its original value. [1]   (ii) throwing dice obeys the same laws as radioactive decay.    from your graph in fig. 12.2, find the \u201chalf-life\u201d of dice, showing clearly on fig. 12.2 how  you obtained your answer.  \u201chalf-life\u201d of dice =    throws [3]",
            "19": "19 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20140050100150200250300350 2 4 6 8 10 12 throw numbernumber of dice remaining 14 fig. 12.2   (iii) the experiment is repeated with 800 dice.    1.  suggest how many throws it takes to reduce the number of dice to 400.  .. . 2. explain your answer.  .. .  .. .  [2]  [total: 9]  ",
            "20": "20 0625/21/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (ac/sw) 81803/5 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *0756672347* physics  0625/22 paper 2  core october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 (a) which two conditions apply for an object on earth to be in equilibrium? tick two boxes. there are no forces acting on the object the object has no mass there is no resultant force on the object there is no resultant moment [2]  (b) fig. 1.1 is a simplified diagram of a balance with equal arms. fig. 1.1   a copper block of unknown mass is placed on the left-hand pan. six standard masses, placed  on the right-hand pan, cause the balance to be in equilibrium, with the beam horizontal.   the six standard masses on the right-hand pan are: 100 g,  100 g,  50 g,  10 g,  5 g,  2 g   (i) what is the mass of the copper block?   mass =  ...  g [1]   (ii) what will be seen to happen if the 2 g mass is removed from the right-hand pan?  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) the volume of the copper block is 30 cm3.    calculate the density of copper. state the unit in your answer.  density =  . [4]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over2 a car travels along a straight, horizontal road at a steady speed of 36 m / s. the total resistive force  on the car is 2800 n, as represented on fig. 2.1. 2800  n36 m / s resistive forcedriving force fig. 2.1  (a) the speed of the car is constant at 36 m / s.    what is the value of the driving force?  driving force =  ... n [1]  (b) later in the journey, the car\u2019s speed decreases uniformly from 36 m / s to zero in 18 s.   (i) on the axes in fig. 2.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the motion of the car during  these 18 s. mark 36 m / s and 18 s clearly on your graph. 0time  / sspeed m / s 0  [3] fig. 2.2   (ii) determine the distance travelled by the car in these 18 s.  distance =  ..  m [3]  [total: 7]  ",
            "4": "4 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 (a) state two sources of energy that are renewable. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]   (b) state two sources of energy that will eventually run out or become uneconomic to extract. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  (c) in a hydroelectric power station, water is stored high up behind a dam.   (i) state the type of energy stored by the water.  .. .[1]   (ii) explain what happens to the water in order to generate electricity.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over4 some water forms a shallow puddle on a metal surface in a laboratory, as shown in fig. 4.1. puddle of water metal surface fig. 4.1  later in the day, it is noticed that the puddle has disappeared and the metal surface is dry.  (a) which process has caused the disappearance of the puddle? tick one box. boiling condensation evaporation freezing [1]  (b) in terms of molecules, describe how this process occurs.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (c) when this process occurs, it causes cooling.   in terms of molecules, explain why this cooling occurs.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 5]  ",
            "6": "6 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 here are some statements about forces.  some statements are correct. put a tick ( \uf0fc) in the box alongside each of these.  other statements are false. put a cross ( \uf0fb) in the box alongside each of these. on earth, an object has weight due to a force acting towards the earth. work is done when an object moves in the direction of the force acting on it. when a single force acts on an object, it moves at constant speed. if the only forces acting on an object are two equal and opposite forces in the same  straight line, then the object is in equilibrium. an object at rest always has no forces acting on it.  [5]  [total: 5]  ",
            "7": "7 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over6 (a) a laboratory liquid-in-glass thermometer has a range from \u201310 \u00b0c to 110 \u00b0c.   describe what you would do to check the accuracy of   (i) the 0 \u00b0c mark on the thermometer,  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) the 100 \u00b0c mark on the thermometer.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the temperature of some water is reduced to \u201310 \u00b0c. in which state is the water at this temperature? [1]  (c) the measurement of temperature can be carried out using any physical property that changes  with temperature. two examples are given below.  the volume ofa liquid the resistance ofa wire   add two more examples. y ou may re-use words from the examples if you wish, but you do not  have to do so. 1. the of 2. the of   [2]   [total: 6]  ",
            "8": "8 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20147 four school athletes are about to run a 100 m race, as shown in fig. 7.1.   100 m winning linebatimekeeperstarting pistolstarter fig. 7.1  (not to scale)  the runners start at a, when the starter fires the starting pistol, and they finish at b.  (a) suggest what equipment   (i) the groundsman used when he measured out the 100 m before marking the track,  .. .   (ii) the timekeeper uses to time how long the runners take to run the 100 m.  .. .  [2]  (b) the timing instrument is known to work correctly.   what might cause the timekeeper to introduce an inaccuracy into the timing of the race?  .. .[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the winner takes 12.5 s to run the race.   (i) calculate the average speed of the winner.  average speed =  ..  m / s [3]    (ii) suggest one reason why the average speed of the winner is less than his top speed.  .. .[1]  (d) on another occasion, the starter and timekeeper decide to measure the speed of the sound  from the gun. they use the same equipment they used to time the race.   (i) suggest how far apart they should be. ...   (ii) suggest how the timekeeper would know when to start timing.  .. .  .. . [2]  [total: 9]  ",
            "10": "10 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20148 fig. 8.1 shows a section through the swimming pool in a hotel.   to make the pool more attractive at night, there are submerged lamps in the pool. fig. 8.1 shows  three rays coming from one of these lamps.  40\u00b0 50\u00b0 30\u00b0air water lampb a fig. 8.1  the critical angle for the water/air boundary is 48 \u00b0.  (a) state what is meant by the critical angle  for a ray of light.  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (b) on fig. 8.1, use your ruler to draw approximate paths for the rays after they reach the surface  at a and b. [4]  [total: 7]  ",
            "11": "11 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over9 (a) which electrical quantity does a voltmeter measure? tick one box. current potential difference power resistance [1]  (b) the transformer in fig. 9.1 has 600 turns on its primary coil ab, and 400 turns on its secondary  coil cd. a bc d primary coil 600 turnssecondary coil 400 turnsiron core fig. 9.1   (i) ab is connected to a 120 v alternating mains supply. an a.c. voltmeter is connected  across cd.    calculate the reading on the voltmeter.  voltmeter reading =  .. v [3]   (ii) a large number of cells are connected in series, to make a 120 v battery.    the mains supply is disconnected from ab, and the 120 v battery is connected in its  place.    1.  state the voltage across cd. ..    2.  explain your answer.  .. .  .. .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201410 a student is attempting to measure the resistance of a resistor r. to do this, she connects the  circuit of fig. 10.1. r es fig. 10.1  (a) the letter e on fig. 10.1 represents the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery. in which unit is e measured?            [1]  (b) the circles on fig. 10.1 represent a voltmeter and an ammeter.   write v and a in the appropriate circles, to show which meter is which. [1]  (c) the battery cannot be changed.   (i) write down the label of the component that is used to vary the current in the circuit.  .. .   (ii) what is this component called?   .. .  [2]  (d) the table below gives the readings obtained by the student for different currents. ammeter reading / a 0 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.75 1.00 voltmeter reading / v 0 1.15 1.65 2.65 4.10 5.55",
            "13": "13 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (i) on fig. 10.2, draw a graph of these values. the first two points have been plotted for you.  [2]    00123456 0.2 0.4 0.6 ammeter reading  / avoltmeter reading  / v 0.8 1.0 fig. 10.2   (ii) use your graph to find a value for the resistance of r.  resistance =  ..  \u03c9 [3]  [total: 9]  ",
            "14": "14 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201411 the radiation detector and counter in fig. 11.1 are being used to count particles from a radioactive  source. counter radiation detectory x fig. 11.1  each time the counter is used to make a measurement, it is first reset to zero and then left switched  on for 3 minutes.  (a) with no radioactive source anywhere near the radiation detector, after being switched on for 3  minutes the reading on the counter is 85 counts.   suggest what radiation caused this reading.  .. .[1]  (b) a radioactive source emitting \u03b2-particles is placed at x. after 3 minutes, the counter reads  592 counts.   calculate the average count rate, in counts / min, from the radioactive source.  count rate =  ... counts / min [3]  (c) the \u03b2-particle source is left at x and a block of aluminium 4 cm thick is placed at y .   (i) suggest what the counter would read on this occasion, after 3 minutes.  .. .   (ii) explain your answer to (c)(i) .  .. .  .. .  [3]  [total: 7]  ",
            "15": "15 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201412 fig. 12.1 is a very simple representation of the structure of an atom.   \u2013nucleus \u2013 \u2013\u2013 + + ++ fig. 12.1  the broken circle indicates the nucleus, and the particles inside this broken circle are the particles  in the nucleus.  charged particles are marked + or \u2013. uncharged particles are shown as empty circles.  (a) state the number of neutrons in this atom.     [1]  (b) state   (i) the nucleon number of the atom, ..   (ii) the proton number of the atom. ..  [2]  (c) what name is given to the negatively-charged particles?  [1]    [total: 4]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (lk/sw) 98699 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *7553808084* physics  0625/23 paper 2  core october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 a student hangs a spring vertically from a hook, as shown in fig. 1.1. 12.0  cm15.0  cm 2.0 n fig. 1.1  (a) describe how the length of the spring can be measured accurately, after it has been hung  from the hook.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (b) with no load, the spring is 12.0 cm long.   with a load of 2.0 n on the end of the spring, its length is 15.0 cm.   calculate the extension of the spring.  extension =  . cm [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the load is attached to the spring and then released.   fig. 1.2 represents the forces acting on the load just after it is released. 2.0 n2.8 n fig. 1.2   calculate the resultant force acting on the load and give its direction.  resultant force =  ... n  direction =  ..  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 a steel object has 5 kg stamped on its side, as shown in fig. 2.1.   5 kg fig. 2.1  (a) express 5.0 kg in grams. 5.0 kg =  g [1]  (b) the density of the steel is 7.81 g / cm3.   calculate the volume of the object.   volume =  cm3 [3]  [total: 4]  ",
            "5": "5 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over3 (a) use words from the list below to complete the sentences about work and energy.   initial acceleration   distance moved  force exerted  potential energy  time taken  an object is dragged across a rough surface.  in order to find the work done on the object, it is   necessary to know the . and the . .   to calculate the power, it is also necessary to know the . . [3] (b) a machine working in a factory actually uses more energy than is needed to do the task it is  involved in.   suggest why this is so.  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 5]  ",
            "6": "6 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 (a) thermal energy is supplied to a certain substance at a constant rate. the temperature of the  substance varies with time as shown in fig. 4.1. abcd timetemperature fig. 4.1   at the temperature indicated by point a on fig. 4.1, the substance is in the solid state.     state what is happening to the substance   (i) in the region ab,  .. .  .. .   (ii) in the region bc,  .. .  .. .   (iii) in the region cd.  .. .  .. .  [3]  (b) suggest why ice at 0 \u00b0c is more effective for cooling a drink than the same mass of water at  0 \u00b0c.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) steam is pumped into cold water in a container.   (i) state and explain what happens to the temperature of the water in the container. statement   .. explanation  .. ..  .. .  .. .  [2]   (ii) state and explain what happens to the mass of water in the container. statement   .. explanation  .. ..  .. .  [2]  [total: 9]  ",
            "8": "8 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 fig. 5.1 shows a girl standing some distance away from a rock face. she has a flat piece of wood  in each hand.   rock face fig. 5.1  (not to scale)  when the girl bangs the two pieces of wood together, they make a loud sound. a short time later  she hears the sound again.  (a) why does she hear this second sound?  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the time interval between the two sounds is 1.8 s. sound travels at 330 m / s in air.   calculate the distance of the girl from the rock face.  distance =  ... m [3]  (c) a boy standing very close to the rock face only hears one sound.   how long after the girl makes the sound does he hear this sound?  time interval =   s [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) state two ways in which a sound wave is different from a light wave. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]  [total: 7]  ",
            "10": "10 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20146 (a) describe   (i) how a dry cloth can be used to charge a plastic rod,  .. .  .. .   (ii) how the rod may be tested to check that it is charged.  .. .  .. .  [2]  (b) a lady has been riding in a car with plastic-covered seats. she gets out of the car. she touches  the door handle when her feet are on the ground. she experiences an electric shock.   suggest why this happens.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 4]  ",
            "11": "11 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over7 fig. 7.1 is a ray diagram representing the formation of an image by a converging lens.   f2 f1oi c fig. 7.1  f1 and f2 are the two principal focuses of the lens.  the object is at o and its image is at i.  (a) on fig. 7.1,   (i) accurately mark the focal length of the lens and label it f, [2]   (ii) from the top of the object, draw the path of the ray that passes through f2, until it reaches  the image. [2]  (b) where would a screen need to be placed in order to see a focused image? tick one box. at f2 at c at f1 at i [1]    (c) the object is moved a small distance away from the lens.   state what this causes to happen to   (i) the position of the image,  .. .   (ii) the size of the image.  .. .  [2]  [total: 7]  ",
            "12": "12 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20148 the electric circuit in fig. 8.1 contains a cell, two resistors and another component.   xy r1 r2 fig. 8.1  (a) (i) name the component that is shown in fig. 8.1 by the symbol .  .. .   (ii) what is the function of this component in the circuit?  .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]  (b) (i) what flows in the circuit in order to create the current in the circuit? tick one box. charge potential difference power resistance   (ii) in which unit do we measure current? ...  [2]  (c) resistor r1 has a resistance of 8 \u03c9 and resistor r2 has a resistance of 12 \u03c9.   calculate the combined resistance of r1 and r2 when arranged as in fig. 8.1.  resistance =  ..  \u03c9 [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) r1 and r2 are removed from the circuit and then re-connected between x and y , so that they  have a different combined resistance.   (i) in the space below, draw the circuit showing r1 and r2 connected in this different way.  [2]   (ii) what word is used to describe this different way of connecting r1 and r2?  .. .[1]  [total: 9]  ",
            "14": "14 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 fig. 9.1 shows a transformer used to allow lamps of different voltage ratings to be operated from a  240 v mains supply. 240  v primary coil 500 turnssecondary coil 500 turnsw zp yx fig. 9.1  the primary coil and the secondary coil both have 500 uniformly-wound turns.    electrical connections to the secondary coil can be made at four places, w, x, y and z.  (a) the piece of metal p provides a magnetic link between the coils.   state   (i) the name of this part of the transformer,    (ii) the metal from which p is made. ...  [2]  (b) a lamp, designed to light at normal brightness with a 120 v supply, lights normally when  connected between w and x.   calculate the number of turns between w and x.  number of turns = ...[3]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the lamp in (b) is connected between x and y .   describe and explain what happens to the lamp.  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (d) state what would happen if the 120 v lamp in (b) is connected between w and z.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 9]  ",
            "16": "16 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201410 fig. 10.1 is a simplified drawing of a tube for producing, deflecting and detecting cathode rays.   h2 h1heater cathode anodeca y1y2 x1x2 path of cathode raysbottomtop screen y -plates x-plates fig. 10.1  the cathode rays are represented by the broken line in fig. 10.1.  (a) which particles make up cathode rays? ...[1]  (b) how does the screen show the presence of cathode rays?  .. .[1]  (c) between which two of the labelled terminals should a potential difference be connected in  order to   (i) make the cathode hot,  and  [1]   (ii) accelerate the cathode rays along the tube,   and  [1]   (iii) deflect the cathode rays to the top of the screen.  and  [1]  (d) in (c)(iii) , which of the two terminals should be made   (i) positive,    (ii) negative? .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "17": "17 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over11 fig. 11.1 represents the atomic structure of three neutral atoms.   a cab hydrogen deuteriumnucleusb nucleusc ca tritiumb nucleus fig. 11.1  (a) what letter in fig. 11.1 is used to represent   (i) an electron, ...   (ii) a proton,    (iii) a neutron? .  [2]  (b) state the nucleon number of the tritium atom. ... [1]  (c) all three atoms may be represented by the chemical symbol h. hydrogen can be represented  in nuclide notation as h11.   write down the nuclide notation for   (i) deuterium,    (ii) tritium. ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "18": "18 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201412 350 dice are made from small cubes of wood with one face painted blue, as shown in fig. 12.1. blue face fig. 12.1  throwing large numbers of dice represents radioactive decay.  the 350 dice are thrown on a bench. all those dice that land with the blue face uppermost are removed. they are regarded as having \u201cdecayed\u201d.    the remaining dice are then thrown again, and the \u201cblue-uppermost\u201d dice are removed. this  process is repeated until the number of dice remaining is quite small.  the table below shows the number of dice remaining after each throw. throw 0 1 2 3456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 number of dice  remaining350 289 237 201 168 138 115 94 79 67 59 50 41 39 35  on fig. 12.2, points have been plotted for some of the readings in the table.  (a) on fig. 12.2, plot the first five points and draw the best smooth curve for all the points. [3]  (b) (i) complete the sentence below.    the half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken to reduce the number of nuclei     of the original sort to ... its original value. [1]   (ii) throwing dice obeys the same laws as radioactive decay.    from your graph in fig. 12.2, find the \u201chalf-life\u201d of dice, showing clearly on fig. 12.2 how  you obtained your answer.  \u201chalf-life\u201d of dice =    throws [3]",
            "19": "19 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20140050100150200250300350 2 4 6 8 10 12 throw numbernumber of dice remaining 14 fig. 12.2   (iii) the experiment is repeated with 800 dice.    1.  suggest how many throws it takes to reduce the number of dice to 400.  .. . 2. explain your answer.  .. .  .. .  [2]  [total: 9]  ",
            "20": "20 0625/23/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (nh/jg) 81775/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over *8269683414* physics  0625/31 paper 3 extended october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 (a) fig. 1.1 shows the distance-time graphs for three different objects a, b and c. distance 00a b c time fig. 1.1   describe the motion of each of the objects a, b and c by selecting the appropriate description  from the list below. constant speed  increasing speed  decreasing speed  stationary a   ... b   ... c   ... [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) fig. 1.2 shows the speed-time graphs for three more objects d, e, and f . speed 00f timed e fig. 1.2   describe the motion of each of the objects d, e and f by selecting the appropriate description  from the list below. constant speed  constant acceleration  increasing acceleration  stationary d   ... e   ... f . ... [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) fig. 1.3 shows a person bungee-jumping from a bridge. the person is attached to a long  elastic rope. riverstrong fixed point rope jumper fig. 1.3   (i) in 1.5 s the speed of the jumper increases from zero to 10.5 m / s.    calculate her average acceleration during this time.  acceleration =  [2]   (ii) at one point during the fall, she reaches her maximum speed.    1. state her acceleration at this point.  acceleration =  [1]    2. what can be said about the forces acting on her at this point?  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 8] ",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overturn over for question 2",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 a diver climbs some steps on to a fixed platform above the surface of the water in a swimming-pool.  he dives into the pool. fig. 2.1 shows the diver about to enter the water. 8.0 m fig. 2.1  the mass of the diver is 65 kg. the platform is 8.0 m above the surface of the water.  (a) calculate   (i) the increase in the gravitational potential energy of the diver when he climbs up to the  platform.  increase in gravitational potential energy =  [1]   (ii) the speed with which the diver hits the surface of the water. ignore any effects of air  resistance.  speed =  [4]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) in another dive from the same platform, the diver performs a somersault during the descent.  he straightens, and again enters the water as shown in fig. 2.1.   discuss whether the speed of entry into the water is greater than, less than or equal to the  speed calculated in (a)(ii) . ignore any effects of air resistance.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 (a) fig. 3.1 shows an oil can containing only air at atmospheric pressure. can fig. 3.1   atmospheric pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.   the pressure of the air in the can is reduced by means of a pump. the can collapses when  the pressure of the air in the can falls to 6000 pa.   (i) explain why the can collapses.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) the surface area of face x of the can is 0.12 m2.    calculate the resultant force on face x when the can collapses.  force =  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) mercury is poured into a u-shaped glass tube. water is then poured into one of the limbs of  the tube. oil is poured into the other limb until the surfaces of the mercury are at the same  level in both limbs.   fig. 3.2 shows the result. oilwater mercury0.32  m 0.25  m fig. 3.2   (i) state a condition that must be true in order for the mercury surfaces to be at the same  level in both limbs of the tube.  .. .[1]   (ii) the height of the water column is 0.25 m. the height of the oil column is 0.32 m. the  density of water is 1000 kg / m3.    calculate    1. the pressure exerted by the water on the surface of the mercury,  pressure =  [2]    2. the density of the oil.  density =  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 fig. 4.1 shows some of the apparatus that a student uses to determine the specific heat capacity  of aluminium. connections to electric circuit  electric heater insulating lid thermometer aluminium block insulating container fig. 4.1  (a) state the measurements the student needs to make, including those from the electric circuit.  for each quantity measured, state a symbol.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) use your symbols from (a) to complete the formula used to determine the specific heat  capacity c.  specific heat capacity c =   ...[2]  (c) another student performs the experiment without using insulation. he obtains a higher value  for c.   explain why this student\u2019s measurements lead to this higher value.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 (a) two types of seismic waves are produced by earthquakes. they are called p-waves and  s-waves. p-waves are longitudinal and s-waves are transverse.   (i) explain what is meant by the terms longitudinal and transverse . longitudinal  . ...  .. . transverse . .. ...  .. .  [2]   (ii) state another example of    1 .  a longitudinal wave,      2 .  a transverse wave.  .  [2]   (iii) a seismic wave has a speed of 7.2 km / s and a frequency of 30 hz.    calculate its wavelength.  wavelength = .[2]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) fig. 5.1 shows an electric bell ringing in a sealed glass chamber containing air. to vacuum pump bell fig. 5.1   a student hears the bell ringing. the air is then removed from the chamber.   state and explain any change in the sound heard by the student.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20146 (a) fig. 6.1 shows an object o placed in front of a plane mirror m. two rays from the object to the  mirror are shown. m o fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, for one of the rays shown,    1. draw the normal to the mirror,    2. mark the angle of incidence. label this angle x.  [2]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, draw    1 .  the reflected rays for both incident rays,    2. construction lines to locate the image of o. label this image i.  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) in fig. 6.2, circular wavefronts from a point source in a tank of water strike a straight barrier. barrier source fig. 6.2   (i) the reflected wavefronts seem to come from a single point.    on fig. 6.2, mark a dot to show the position of this point. label this point c. [1]   (ii) draw, as accurately as you can, the reflected circular wavefronts. [2] [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20147 a small cylinder of compressed helium gas is used to inflate balloons for a celebration.  (a) (i) in the box below, sketch a diagram to represent the arrangement of helium molecules in  a balloon.  [2]   (ii) state and explain how the size of the attractive forces acting between the molecules of a  gas compares with the size of the attractive forces between the molecules of a solid.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) the helium in the cylinder has a volume of 6.0 \u00d7 10\u20133 m3 (0.0060 m3) and is at a pressure of  2.75 \u00d7 106 pa.   (i) the pressure of helium in each balloon is 1.1 \u00d7 105 pa. the volume of helium in an inflated  balloon is 3.0 \u00d7 10\u20133 (0.0030 m3). the temperature of the helium does not change.    calculate the number of balloons that were inflated.  number of balloons =  [3]   (ii) later, the temperature increases and some of the balloons burst.    suggest and explain why this happens.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 9]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over8 a charger for a cellphone (mobile phone) is marked:     input: a.c. 240 v, 50 hz, 80 ma.     output: d.c. 5.3 v, 500 ma.  (a) state   (i) the component in the charger that converts a.c. to d.c.,  .. .   (ii) the quantity that has the value 50 hz.  .. .  [2]  (b) calculate   (i) the output power of the charger,  output power =  [2]   (ii) the energy transferred in the output circuit when the cellphone is charged for 1.5 hours.  energy =  [2]  (c) in the following list, underline the quantity that is stored in the battery of the cellphone.      voltage  current  power  energy [1] [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 a technician sets up a radiation detector in a university laboratory, for use in some experiments.  even before the radioactive source for the experiment is brought into the laboratory, the detector  registers a low count rate.  (a) suggest what causes this count rate.  .. .[1]  (b) a radioactive source that emits \u03b1-particles is placed on the laboratory bench and the source  is gradually moved closer to the detector.   at first, the detector continues to register a low count rate sometimes slightly less than the  count rate registered without the source. the count rate suddenly increases to a very high  value when the source is very close to the detector.   explain these changes in the count rate.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (c) in a second experiment, \u03b1-particles pass between two parallel, horizontal metal plates in a  vacuum.   they then continue to the detector as shown in fig. 9.1. _-particles metal platesource detectormetal plate fig. 9.1   a positive charge is established on the upper plate and a negative charge on the lower plate.   (i) on fig. 9.1, sketch the new path of the \u03b1-particles. [2]   (ii) state what happens to the count rate registered by the detector.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over10 (a) in a room in a house there are four electric lamps in parallel with each other, controlled by a  single switch.   with all the lamps working, one of the lamp filaments suddenly breaks.   what, if anything happens to the remaining lamps? explain your answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows the circuit diagram for the lamp in another room. x and y are 2-way switches. 1 221lamp xy fig. 10.1   (i) complete the table, by indicating whether the lamp is on or off for each of the switch  positions. position of switch x position of switch y state of lamp 11 12 21 22 [2]   (ii) explain why this arrangement of switches is useful.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 5]",
            "20": "20 0625/31/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201411 (a) name the process that causes a potential difference across a solenoid due to the movement  of a nearby magnet.  .. .[1]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows a solenoid connected to a centre-zero voltmeter, m.   a bar magnet is held with its n-pole close to one end of the solenoid. n msolenoid fig. 11.1   (i) the magnet is pushed into the solenoid, and then brought to rest with its n-pole just  inside the solenoid.    describe the movement of the pointer of the meter m.  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) the magnet is now pulled to the left out of the solenoid, at a higher speed than in (i).    compare the movement of the pointer of the meter with that seen in (i).  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 5] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nf/jg) 81774/2 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8627088378* physics  0625/32 paper 3 extended october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 (a) state the two conditions necessary for a system of forces acting on a body to be in equilibrium. 1.  ... ...  .. . 2.  ... ...  .. .  [2]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows a loaded wheelbarrow held in equilibrium by a gardener. the wheel of the  wheelbarrow is in contact with the ground at point c. p q c w fig. 1.1   in fig. 1.1, there are three vertical forces acting on the wheelbarrow.  p is the upward force applied by the gardener.  q is the upward force of the ground on the wheel at point c.  w is the weight of the wheelbarrow and its contents.   explain why the force p is less than the force w   (i) by considering the forces p , q and w,  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) by considering the moments of the forces p and w about point c.  .. .  ..  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) fig. 1.2 shows a kitchen cupboard resting on a support and attached to a wall by a screw. f 0.75  m 75 n0.24  m supportscrew wall cupboard pg fig. 1.2   the weight of the cupboard and its contents is 75 n. g is the position of the centre of mass of  the cupboard.   the clockwise and anticlockwise moments about point p are equal.   calculate the force f exerted by the screw.  f =  ... [3]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 fig. 2.1 shows a tanker lorry full of liquid. cieliquids fig. 2.1  the tanker delivers the liquid and drives away empty.  (a) (i) compare the acceleration of the empty tanker with the acceleration of the full tanker for  the same resultant force. tick one box. acceleration of full tanker is less than acceleration of empty tanker acceleration of full tanker is the same as acceleration of empty tanker acceleration of full tanker is more than acceleration of empty tanker  [1]   (ii) explain your answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) the empty tanker has a weight of 50 000 n. the forward force is 6000 n and the total resistive  force is 2000 n.   calculate the acceleration.  acceleration =  ... [3]  [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over3 fig. 3.1 shows the speed- time graph of a firework rocket as it rises and then falls to the ground. rocket moving upwards rocket moving downwardsspeed timee d c b a  0 0  fig. 3.1  the rocket runs out of fuel at a. it reaches its maximum height at b. at e it returns to the ground.  (a) (i) state the gradient of the graph at b. gradient =  ... [1]   (ii) state why the gradient has this value at b.  .. .  ..  [1]  (b) state and explain the relationship between the shaded areas above and below the time axis.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]  (c) another rocket, of the same size and mass, opens a parachute at point b.   on fig. 3.1, sketch a possible graph of its speed from b until it reaches the ground. [3]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 fig. 4.1 shows a small wind-turbine used to generate electricity. fig. 4.1  the wind-turbine drives an electric generator.  the wind blows with a velocity of 7.0 m / s at right angles to the plane of the turbine. the mass of  air passing per second through the turbine is 6.7 kg.  (a) (i) calculate the kinetic energy of the air blown through the turbine per second.  kinetic energy =  ... [2]   (ii) only 8% of this energy is converted to electrical energy.    calculate the power output of the electric generator.  power output =  ... [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) the volume of air passing through the  turbine each second is 5.6 m3 (flow rate is 5.6 m3 / s).   calculate the density of the air.  density of air =  ... [2]  (c) the turbine turns a generator.   describe the essential action within the generator that produces electricity.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 (a) in the box below, sketch a diagram to represent the molecular structure of a liquid. show the  molecules as small circles of equal size.  [2]  (b) a teacher in a school laboratory pours liquid ethanol from a bottle into a glass dish. the  glass dish rests on an electronic balance. although the temperature of the laboratory is below the boiling point of ethanol, the mass of ethanol in the dish quickly decreases as ethanol evaporates.   (i) state the effect of this evaporation on the temperature of the remaining ethanol.  ..  [1]   (ii) explain, in terms of the ethanol molecules, why this is happening.  .. .  ..  [1]   (iii) the specific latent heat of vaporisation of ethanol is 850 j / g.    calculate the thermal energy required to evaporate 3.4 g of ethanol.  thermal energy =  ... [2]   (iv) suggest two ways in which the rate of evaporation of ethanol from the dish can be  reduced. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over6 a technician is designing a liquid-in-glass thermometer. the following is a list of properties of the  thermometer that she is considering. sensitivity               range               speed of response               linearity  (a) (i) 1.  which one of these properties is affected by the length of the stem of the  thermometer?  .. ..    2. explain your answer.  .. ..  .. ..  [2]   (ii) 1. which property is affected by the diameter of the capillary?  .. ..    2. explain your answer.  .. ..  .. ..  [2]  (b) the thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures between \u221210 \u00b0c and 50 \u00b0c. the  technician considers using water or red-coloured alcohol as the liquid in the thermometer.   (i) write down which liquid would be suitable.  .. .   (ii) give two reasons for your answer. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20147 (a) a police car siren emits sound waves that vary in pitch.   tick two boxes that apply to the sound waves emitted by the siren. electromagnetic longitudinal transverse visible frequency 0.1\u201310 hz frequency 100\u201310 000 hz frequency 100 000\u20131 000 000 hz  [2]  (b) fig. 7.1 is a top view of one wavefront of a water wave before it strikes a hard boundary. wavefrontdirection of travel of wavefrontboundary fig. 7.1   (i) name the process that occurs as the wavefront strikes the boundary.  ..  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) explain, in terms of wave theory, what occurs as the wavefront strikes the boundary.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (iii) state whether there is an increase, a decrease or no change in the wavelength of the  wave after it strikes the boundary.  ..  [1]   (iv) the speed of the wave is 3.0 m / s and its wavelength 7.0 cm.    calculate the frequency of the wave.  frequency =  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20148 (a) fig. 8.1 shows two resistors x and y in series. y x r2 ri fig. 8.1   complete the table below, using only the symbols i and r, alone or in combination. resistor resistance current potential differencepower x r i i2r y 2r 2ir  [3]  (b) fig. 8.2 represents the system used to transmit electricity from a power station to a factory. power stationfactorypower line power line750  a 11 000  v fig. 8.2   the power station generates 11 000 v and supplies a current of 750 a. the total resistance of  the power lines between the power station and the factory is 1.5 \u03c9.   calculate   (i) the power output of the power station,  power =  ... [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) the potential difference across the 1.5 \u03c9 of the power lines,  potential difference =  ... [1]   (iii) the power supplied to the factory.  power =  ... [3]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 a transformer is used to reduce the voltage of a supply from 120 v a.c. to 12 v a.c.  (a) explain how a transformer works. y our answer should include an explanation of why a  transformer would not work with a d.c. supply voltage.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]  (b) the output current is 1.2 a.   (i) calculate the input current.  input current =  ... [2]   (ii) state an assumption you made in your calculation for (b)(i) .  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over10 (a) a technician sets up a radiation detector in a university laboratory for use in a class   experiment.   (i) a radioactive source that emits \u03b2-particles is placed on the laboratory bench, 10 cm from  the detector. a small count rate is registered.    1. state the name of the particle, found in an atom, that is identical to a \u03b2-particle.  .. . [1]    2. the technician sets up the same equipment in the same way every year. he notices  that the count rate registered by the detector every year is slightly smaller than it  was the previous year.     suggest why this is so.  .. ..  .. ..  .. . [2]   (ii) in a second experiment, the same equipment is set up but a radioactive source that  emits \u03b1-particles is placed 10 cm from the detector. the same number of particles are  emitted every second from this source as were emitted from the \u03b2-source in (i).    explain why the count rate obtained is much lower.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) in another experiment, \u03b2-particles pass between two parallel, horizontal metal plates in a  vacuum. they then continue to the detector as shown in fig. 10.1. `\u2013particles metal platesource detectormetal plate fig. 10.1   a very high p.d. is connected between the plates, with the lower plate positive.   on fig. 10.1, sketch the new path of the \u03b2-particles. [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201411 fig. 11.1 shows part of the path of a ray of light pq travelling in an optical fibre. glass pq fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, carefully complete the path of the ray of light, until it leaves this section of the  optical fibre. [2]  (b) the material of an optical fibre has a refractive index of 1.52.   calculate the critical angle.  critical angle =  [2]  (c) (i) state what sort of reflection takes place within an optical fibre.  ..  [1]   (ii) explain your answer.  .. .  ..  [1]  [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (sjf/jg) 81773/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1843469512* physics  0625/33 paper 3 extended october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 a free-fall parachutist jumps from a helium balloon, but does not open his parachute for some  time.  fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for his fall. point b indicates when he opens his parachute. ab cd 00speed time fig. 1.1  (a) (i) state the value of the gradient of the graph immediately after time t = 0.      gradient =  [1]   (ii) explain why the gradient has this value.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) state how fig. 1.1 shows that the acceleration decreased between time t = 0 and the time to a.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) explain, in terms of forces, what is happening in section ab of the graph in fig. 1.1.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) a second parachutist of the same size and mass jumps from the balloon with a larger  parachute. he also opens his parachute at point b.    on fig. 1.1, sketch a possible speed-time graph for his fall after he opens his parachute. [3] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142  fig. 2.1 shows a uniform, rectangular slab of concrete abcd standing upright on the ground. the  slab has height 0.60 m, width 0.30 m and mass 18 kg. a force of 40 n acts horizontally to the left  at b. 40 n 0.30  m0.60  m dab c fig. 2.1      (a) (i) calculate  the weight w of the concrete slab.  w  =  [1]   (ii) the thickness of the slab is 0.040 m.    calculate the pressure exerted by the slab on the ground.  pressure =  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) (i)  on fig. 2.1, draw and label an arrow to show the weight w of the slab acting at its centre  of mass. [1]   (ii)  calculate    1. the moment of the 40 n force about point d,  moment =     2. the moment of w about point d.  moment =  [3]   (iii) the ground is rough so that the slab does not slide.     state and explain what happens to the slab as the horizontal force at b is gradually  increased.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 fig. 3.1 shows a long, plastic tube, sealed at both ends. the tube contains 0.15 kg of small metal  spheres. small metal spheres fig. 3.1  a physics teacher turns the tube upside down very quickly and the small metal spheres then fall  through 1.8 m and hit the bottom of the tube.  (a) calculate   (i) the decrease in gravitational potential energy as the spheres fall 1.8 m,  decrease in gravitational potential energy =  [2]   (ii) the speed of the  spheres as they hit the bottom of the tube.  speed =  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) the gravitational potential energy of the spheres is eventually transformed to thermal energy  in the metal spheres. the physics teacher explains that this procedure can be used to determine the specific heat capacity of the metal.   (i) state one other measurement that must be made in order for the specific heat capacity  of the metal to be determined.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) suggest a source of inaccuracy in determining the specific heat capacity using this  experiment.  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) the teacher turns the tube upside down and lets the spheres fall to the bottom 100 times  within a short period of time.    explain why turning the tube upside down 100 times, instead of just once, produces a  more accurate value of the specific heat capacity.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 (a) fig. 4.1 shows a syringe containing 100 cm3 of air at atmospheric pressure. atmospheric  pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa. piston  fig. 4.1   the open end of the syringe is sealed and the piston is pushed inwards until the air occupies  a volume of 40 cm3. the temperature of the air remains constant.    calculate the new pressure of the air in the syringe.  air pressure =  [2]  (b) a syringe is used to transfer smokey air from above a flame to a small glass container.    extremely small solid smoke particles are suspended in the air in the container.   the container is brightly illuminated from the side and viewed through a microscope.    (i) the movement of the suspended smoke particles is called brownian motion. describe  this brownian motion.   .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) explain what causes the motion of the smoke particles.   .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) in the space below, sketch a diagram to represent the molecular structure of a solid. show the  molecules as small circles of equal sizes. [2] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 light enters a glass fibre from air at an angle of incidence of 62 \u00b0. the angle of refraction in the  glass is 36 \u00b0.  (a) the speed of light in air is 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s.   determine the speed of light in the glass fibre.  speed =  [4]  (b) describe how glass fibres are used in communications technology.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3] [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over6 (a) explain why   (i) metals are good conductors of electricity,   .. .  .. .   (ii) insulators do not conduct electricity.  .. .  .. . [3]  (b) the battery of an electric car supplies a current of 96 a at 120 v to the motor which drives  the car.   (i) state the useful energy change that takes place in the battery.  .. .[1]   (ii) calculate the energy delivered to the motor in 10 minutes.  energy =  [2]   (iii) the motor operates with an efficiency of 88 %.    calculate the power output of the motor.  power =  [2] [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20147 (a)  underline the most appropriate value below for the speed of sound in water. [1]   1.5 m / s   15 m / s   150 m / s   1 500 m / s   15 000 m / s  (b) sound travels in water as a series of compressions and rarefactions.   describe what is meant by a compression  and by a rarefaction . compression  .. ...  .. . rarefaction  .. ...  .. . [2]    (c) an echo-sounder sends out a pulse of sound to determine the depth of the sea bed. it  measures the time between sending out the pulse and receiving its echo.   fig. 7.1 shows a boat using an echo-sounder. echo sea bedpulse of sound 12 mecho-sounder fig. 7.1   the sea bed is 12 m below the echo-sounder.   (i) use your value for the speed of sound in water from (a) to calculate the time between the  sending out of the pulse and receiving its echo.  time =  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) the boat passes over a region of the sea bed of the same depth, where the reflection of  sound waves is weaker.     state whether there is an increase, a decrease or no change in the amplitude and pitch  of the reflected wave. amplitude   ... pitch   ... [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20148 a student sets up a circuit containing three identical cells. each cell has an e.m.f. (electromotive  force) of 2.0 v.     fig. 8.1 shows the cells in series with a length of uniform metal wire connected between two  terminals k and l, an ammeter and a resistor x. a xlkuniform metal wire fig. 8.1  (a) state the total e.m.f. of the three cells in series.  total e.m.f. =  [1]  (b) the ammeter reading is 0.25 a.     (i) state the name of the unit in which electric charge is measured.  .. .[1]   (ii) calculate the charge that flows through the circuit in twelve minutes.  charge =  [2]   (iii) the metal wire has a resistance of 16 \u03c9.    calculate the resistance of resistor x.  resistance =  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) the student removes the 16 \u03c9 wire from the circuit and cuts it into two equal lengths.   he then connects the two lengths in parallel between k and l, as shown in fig. 8.2. a xlkuniform metal wire fig. 8.2   calculate the resistance of the two lengths of wire in parallel.  resistance =  [3] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20149 a circuit contains a battery, a variable resistor and a solenoid. fig. 9.1 shows the magnetic field  pattern produced by the current in the solenoid. magnetic field linesolenoid fig. 9.1  (a) (i) state how the magnetic field pattern indicates regions where the magnetic field is  stronger.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) state what happens to the magnetic field when the current in the circuit is reversed.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) a second solenoid is placed next to the first solenoid.   fig. 9.2 shows the second solenoid connected to a very sensitive ammeter. avery sensitive ammeter second solenoid fig. 9.2   (i) the variable resistor is adjusted so that its resistance changes quickly.    state and explain what is seen to happen in the circuit of the second solenoid.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]   (ii) the variable resistor is adjusted much more slowly than in (i).    state and explain the difference in what is seen to happen in the circuit of the second  solenoid.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 201410 a technician sets up a radiation detector in a university laboratory, for use in some experiments.  even before the radioactive source for the experiments is brought into the laboratory, the detector registers a small count rate due to background radiation.  (a) suggest one source of this background radiation.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the radioactive source emits \u03b3-rays. it is placed on the laboratory bench close to the detector.    (i) state what \u03b3-rays are.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) a lead sheet of thickness 10 mm is positioned between the detector and the radioactive  source.    state and explain what happens to the count rate on the detector.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) in a second experiment, \u03b3-rays pass through air to the detector, as shown in fig. 10.1. a-rays sourcedetector fig. 10.1   one end of a bar magnet is brought close to the path of the \u03b3-rays.   (i) tick one box to indicate the effect on the path of the \u03b3-rays. [1]      deflected into the page      deflected out of the page      deflected downwards      deflected upwards      no deflection   (ii) explain your answer to (i).  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (sjf/kn) 82879/3 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1804511447* physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 in this experiment, you will take measurements of a drinks cup.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. kg7 g% fig. 1.1  (a) (i) measure and record the height h of the cup supplied.  h =   cm   (ii) measure and record the diameter dt of the top of the cup.  dt =   cm   (iii) measure and record the diameter db of the bottom of the cup.   db =   cm   (iv) calculate the average diameter da using the equation da =  dt + db 2.   da =   cm   (v) calculate an approximate value for the volume v of the cup, using the equation    v = \u03c0da2h 4.  v  =  .. [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) (i) use the string and the metre rule to determine the average circumference  (distance  around the outside) c of the cup. show your working.  c =  ... cm [3]   (ii) draw a diagram of the cup to show where you used the string to determine the average  circumference c.  [1]  (c) place the cup in the container provided. the container is to catch any water that may spill.   (i) use the measuring cylinder to determine the volume vw of water required to fill the cup  to the top.  vw =  . [1]   (ii) state which of the two values, vw or v obtained in (a)(v) , you would expect to be the  more reliable value for the volume of the cup. explain your answer.    more reliable value  explanation  .. ..  .. . [1] [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of hot water under different conditions.   carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 2.1 and 2.2.  (a) measure and record room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  . [1]  (b) pour hot water into the  beaker labelled a until it is about two-thirds full. place the thermometer  in the beaker of hot water, as shown in fig. 2.1. thermometerclamp stand water fig. 2.1   (i) wait until the thermometer reading stops rising. read the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water  and immediately start the stopclock. record the temperature \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s.   (ii) after 30 s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time  t = 30 s and the temperature reading in table 2.1.   (iii) continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30 s until you have six sets  of readings.",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overtable 2.1 without insulation with insulation t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / [5]  (c)  complete the column headings in the table.  (d) pour hot water into the  insulated  beaker until it is about two-thirds full. place the thermometer  in the beaker of hot water, as shown in fig. 2.2. thermometerclamp stand waterinsulation fig. 2.2   (i) wait until the thermometer reading stops rising. read the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water  and immediately start the stopclock. record the temperature \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s.   (ii) after 30 s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time  t = 30 s and the temperature reading in table 2.1.   (iii) continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30 s until you have six sets  of readings.",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (e) state whether the cotton wool insulation increases, decreases, or has no significant effect on  the rate of cooling of the water, compared with the rate of cooling with no insulation. justify your answer by reference to your results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  .. . [2]  (f) a student suggests that a significant cause of loss of thermal energy from the beakers is  evaporation.    suggest how you would reduce the evaporation in this experiment.  .. .[1]  (g) suggest one condition that should not be changed when this experiment is repeated.   .. .[1] [total: 10]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overquestion 3 begins on page 8",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a wire.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you. a la bpower supply resistance wire vsliding contact c fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the potential  difference v across a length l = 10.0 cm of the wire ab. switch off.    (ii)  calculate the resistance r of 10.0 cm of the wire ab, using the equation r = v i. record  this value of r in the table.   (iii) repeat steps (i) and (ii) with values of l equal to 20.0 cm, 30.0 cm, 40.0 cm and 50.0 cm. table 3.1 l / cm v / v i / a r / \u03c9 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against  l / cm ( x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0). 00 [4]  (c) state whether your graph shows that the resistance r is directly proportional to the length l.  justify your answer by reference to the graph. statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  (d) suggest how you could further test your statement, in part (c), using the same apparatus. y ou  are not asked to carry out any further practical work.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 in this experiment, you will determine the magnification of an image produced by a lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. illuminated object lensscreenu x benchv fig. 4.1  (a) place the lens a distance u = 20.0 cm from the illuminated object. move the screen until a  sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.     (i) measure and record the distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen.   v =   cm    (ii) measure and record the height h from the top to the bottom of the image on the screen.  h =   cm  [2]   (iii) sketch a diagram of the image seen on the screen.    [1]   (iv) switch off the lamp. measure and record the height x from the top to the bottom of the  triangular illuminated object.  x =   cm   (b) (i) calculate h x.  h x =  ..   (ii) calculate v u.  v u =  .. [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) the magnification m of the image is given by the equation m = h x. a student suggests that the    ratio v u also gives the magnification m.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to your  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. . [2]  (d) state two precautions that you could take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (rw/sw) 82877/3 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *3555524507* physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 in this experiment, you will take measurements of a sample of modelling clay.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 1.1. wmodelling clay dh fig. 1.1  (a) y ou are provided with a piece of modelling clay. the shape of the piece of modelling clay is  approximately a cube.   (i) measure the height h, width w and depth d of the piece of modelling clay.  h  =  .cm  w  =  .cm  d  =  .cm   (ii) calculate the volume va of the modelling clay, using the equation va = hwd.  va =  ... cm3   (iii) measure the mass m of the modelling clay, using the balance provided.  m  =  g   (iv) calculate the density \u03c1 of the modelling clay, using the equation \u03c1 = m va.  \u03c1 =  ..  [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) (i) mould the piece of modelling clay into an approximate sphere. use the rule and the  blocks of wood to measure the diameter d of the sphere of modelling clay.  d  =  . [1]   (ii) draw a diagram to show how you used the blocks of wood and the rule to measure the  diameter of the sphere of modelling clay.  [1]  (c) (i) pour approximately 100 cm3 of water into the measuring cylinder. record the volume of  water v1 in the measuring cylinder.  v1 =  ..   (ii) mould the modelling clay into a shape that will fit into the measuring cylinder.    tie the thread round the modelling clay and lower it into the measuring cylinder until it is  completely covered with water. record the new volume v2.  v2 =  ..   (iii) calculate the volume vb of the modelling clay using the equation vb = (v2 \u2212 v1).  vb =  ..  [2]  (d) a student suggests that the volume of the modelling clay should not change when the shape  is changed.   assuming that the experiment has been carried out with care, suggest two reasons why the  values va and vb may not be the same. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014blank page",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of hot water as cold water is added.  y ou are provided with a supply of hot water and a supply of cold water. carry out the following  instructions, referring to figs. 2.1 and 2.2. thermometerclamp stand water fig. 2.1  (a) measure and record the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water supplied.  \u03b8c =  . [1]  (b) (i) pour approximately 150 cm3 of the hot water supplied into the empty beaker. without  adding any cold water, place the thermometer in the beaker of hot water. when the  thermometer reading stops rising, measure the temperature \u03b8 of the water in the beaker.  in table 2.1, record \u03b8 at v = 0 cm3. v is the total volume of cold water added.   (ii) add 10 cm3 of the cold water to the hot water in the beaker. stir briefly. measure, and  record in the table, the temperature \u03b8 of the water in the beaker and the total volume v of  cold water added.   (iii) repeat step (ii) until you have added a total of 50 cm3 of cold water. record the readings  in the table. table 2.1 v / cm3\u03b8 / \u00b0c 0  [3]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) y ou are provided with a drinks cup held above a measuring cylinder, as shown in fig. 2.2. the  cup has a small hole in its base. clamp stand measuring cylindercup 50100150200250  cm3 fig. 2.2   (i) place a finger over the hole in the cup, to prevent water coming out of the cup.   (ii) pour approximately 150 cm3 of cold water into the cup.   (iii) check that the measuring cylinder is directly under the cup. remove your finger from the  hole and immediately start the stopclock.    measure and record the time t1 taken for 50 cm3 of water to fall into the measuring  cylinder and immediately stop the flow of water with your finger.  t1 =  ..   (iv) return the stopclock to its zero reading. remove your finger from the hole and  immediately start the stopclock.    measure and record the time t2 taken for the next 50 cm3 of water to fall into the measuring  cylinder.  t2 =  ..   (v) allow the cup to empty into the measuring cylinder without taking any further  measurements.   (vi) calculate the average rate of flow of water r1 for the first 50 cm3, using the equation    r1 = k t1, where k = 50 cm3.  r1 =  ..",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (vii) calculate the average rate of flow of water r2 for the next 50 cm3, using the equation    r2 = k t2, where k = 50 cm3.  r2 =  ..  [3]  (d) a student suggests that the experiment described in parts (a) and (b) would be improved by  having a steady flow of cold water added to the hot water by the method described in part (c).   suggest one possible disadvantage of using the method described in part (c) to produce  such a flow of water.  .. .  ..  [1]  (e) the experiment described in parts (a) and (b) could be repeated to check the results.   suggest two conditions that should be kept constant in order to provide a reliable check. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a wire.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. a l pqpower supply resistance wiremetre rule v fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record in table 3.1 the current i in the circuit and the potential  difference v across a length l = 0.250 m of the resistance wire connected between p and  q, as shown in fig. 3.1. switch off.   (ii) calculate the resistance r of the length l = 0.250 m of wire using the equation r = v i.    record this value of r in the table.   (iii) repeat steps (i) and (ii) using l  values of 0.350 m, 0.450 m, 0.550 m, 0.650 m and 0.750 m.   (iv) complete the heading for each column of the table. table 3.1 l  / v / i / r / 0.250 0.350 0.450 0.550 0.650 0.750  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against l  / m (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  . [2]  (d) predict the value of the resistance r1 of 1.00 m of the resistance wire connected between p  and q. give your answer to a number of significant figures that is suitable for this experiment.  r1 =  . [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 in this experiment, you will investigate refraction of light through a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. eye ray-trace sheethole abne f m dc fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the blank ray-trace sheet supplied. the  block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw and label the outline of the  block abcd .  (b) remove the block and draw the normal nm to side ab so that the normal is 2.0 cm from a.  label the point f where nm crosses ab.  (c) draw the line ef at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 4.1.  (d) place the paper on the pin board.  (e) place two pins p1 and p2 on line ef at a suitable distance apart for this experiment.",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that  the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   place two pins p3 and p4 between your eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the images of  p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other.   label the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. remove the block and the pins.  (g) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets side cd of the  block. label the point g where the line meets side cd. draw the line fg.  (h) measure and record the angle r between the normal and line fg.  r  =  . [1]  (i) turn the ray-trace sheet over. place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace  sheet but at right angles to the previous position. label the outline abcd  as shown in fig. 4.2. eyeray-trace sheethole a fe bn m d c fig. 4.2  (j) repeat steps (b) to (h).  r  =  . [1]  (k) a student suggests that the value of r should be the same in both experiments because the  material of the block has not changed.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to your  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (l) state two precautions that you should take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11.  [5]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nf/sw) 82873/4 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4314503940* physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test october/november 2014  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 in this experiment, you will investigate the magnification produced by a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. illuminated object lensscreenu h0 fig. 1.1  (a) measure and record the height h0 of the triangular object.  h0 =  .  cm  (b) (i) switch on the lamp.   (ii) set the distance u between the illuminated object and the lens to 30.0 cm.   (iii) move the screen until a sharp image of the illuminated object is seen.   (iv) measure, and record in table 1.1, the height hi of the image. table 1.1 u / cm hi / cm s 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0  [3]   (v) repeat (b)(iii) and (b)(iv)  for u values of 35.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 45.0 cm, 50.0 cm and 55.0 cm.    (vi) switch off the lamp.  (c) for each distance u calculate, and record in the table, a value s using your results from (a)    and (b) and the equation s = h0 hi .",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) plot a graph of s (y-axis) against u / cm ( x-axis).  [5]  (e) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph.    show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g  =  .. [1]   (ii) calculate the focal length f of the lens, where f = 1 g cm.  f =  .. [1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 in this experiment, you will investigate how the surface of a container affects the rate at which  water cools.  two test-tubes, labelled a and b, have been set up for you. test-tube a has no covering.  test-tube b is covered with foil. each test-tube has a mark to show the required water level.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. \u00b0c \u00b0c ab foilcork water level mark fig. 2.1  (a) (i) remove the cork and thermometer from test-tube a. pour hot water into the test-tube, up  to the mark.   (ii) carefully replace the cork and thermometer.  wait for about 30 seconds before taking any  measurements.   (iii) start the stopclock and read the thermometer. in the first row of table 2.1, record this  temperature \u03b8 at time t = 0 s.   (iv) record, in the table, the temperature \u03b8 of the thermometer at times  t = 30 s, 60 s,  90 s,120 s,150 s and 180 s.   (v) complete the column headings and column t values in the table.",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overtable 2.1 test-tube a test-tube b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /  [5]  (b) (i) remove the cork and thermometer from test-tube b. pour hot water into the test-tube, up  to the mark.   (ii) repeat steps (a)(ii) to (a)(iv) .  (c) state in which test-tube, a or b, the water cools at the greater rate. justify your answer by  referring to your results.   test-tube .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (d) suggest one aspect of the practical procedure which may be a source of unreliability in the  experiment.  .. .  ..  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (e) another igcse student wants to extend your experiment in order to test the effects of other  surface materials.   suggest two factors relating to the apparatus which she should keep the same in order for the  tests to be a fair comparison. 1.  ... ...  .. . 2.  ... ...  .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over3 in this experiment, you will determine the resistance of a lamp in different electrical circuits.  circuit 1 has been set up for you as shown in fig. 3.1. do not alter the connections of the lamp,  voltmeter and ammeter between terminals x and y during the whole experiment.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. circuit 1 a xyl vpower supply fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure, and record in table 3.1, the potential difference v and the current i  for lamp l. switch off. table 3.1 circuit v / i / r / 1 2 3  [6]   (ii) calculate, and record in the table, the resistance r of lamp l, using the equation r = v i .   (iii) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (b) (i) disconnect terminal y from the circuit. use the extra lamps and leads which have been  provided to connect circuit 2 as shown in fig. 3.2. circuit 2 a xyl vpower supply fig. 3.2   (ii) repeat steps (a)(i) and (a)(ii) .  (c) (i) disconnect terminal y from the circuit. use the lamps and leads which have been  provided to connect circuit 3 as shown in fig. 3.3. circuit 3 a xyl vpower supply fig. 3.3   (ii) repeat steps (a)(i) and (a)(ii) .",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) a student suggests that, as the same lamp l is used throughout the experiment, its resistance  in each circuit should be the same.   state whether your findings agree with this idea. justify your answer by reference to your  results. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. .  [1]  (e) theory suggests that the resistance of a lamp increases if its temperature rises.   explain whether or not your observations support this.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]  (f) it is possible to obtain sets of readings in this experiment by using a variable resistor rather  than rearranging the circuit.   in the space below, redraw circuit 1 showing how a variable resistor could be included for this  purpose.  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 in this experiment, you will investigate the downward deflection of a metre rule clamped at one  end.  the metre rule has been set up for you and you are provided with an object m. carry out the  following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. clamp metre rule free end floorh0 fig. 4.1  (a) measure and record the height h0 of the free end of the metre rule above the floor as indicated  in fig. 4.1.  h0 =  ...  cm  [1]  (b) carefully place m on the rule at a distance d = 60.0 cm from the free end of the rule, as shown  in fig. 4.2. hm fig. 4.2",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (i) explain how you made sure that m was at the 60.0 cm mark. y ou may use a diagram.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) measure, and record in table 4.1, the new height h of the free end above the floor, as  indicated in fig. 4.2. table 4.1 d / cm h / cm h / cm ( d \u00d7 h) / cm2   60.050.040.030.020.0  [4]   (iii) repeat (b)(ii)  for d = 50.0 cm, d = 40.0 cm, d = 30.0 cm and d = 20.0 cm.  (c) (i) for each value of d, calculate and record in the table the downward deflection  h (change  in height) produced by m. use your results from (a) and from the table and the equation  h = h 0 \u2212 h.   (ii) for each value of d, calculate and record in the table the value of ( d \u00d7 h). use your  results from the table.  (d) a student suggests that d is inversely proportional to h (that is, d is proportional to 1 / h).   using some appropriate figures from table 4.1, explain why this cannot be the case.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (e) (i) when the metre rule is clamped in this way, the free end is slightly deflected downwards  even before m is placed on it.    explain why this deflection occurs.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) suggest how you could find the value of this deflection. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (sjf/kn) 82881/3 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *6996537100* physics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2014  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 the igcse class is investigating the reflection of light by a plane mirror. fig. 1.1 shows a student\u2019s  ray-trace sheet. mirror fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, draw a normal to the centre of the mirror. [1]  (b) on fig. 1.1, draw an incident ray at 30 \u00b0 to the normal and to the left of the normal. [1]  (c)   fig. 1.2  shows a diagram of a ray box.  lamp hole ray box fig. 1.2    on fig. 1.1, draw the ray box in a suitable position to produce the incident ray that you have  drawn. [1]  (d)  on fig. 1.1,  draw a reflected ray in the position you would expect it to be using the incident  ray that you have drawn. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (e) state two precautions that you could take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2] [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142  the igcse class is investigating the cooling of hot water under different conditions.   figs. 2.1 and 2.2 show the apparatus used. thermometer waterinsulationthermometer water  fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r as shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.3. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.3  \u03b8r =  . [1]  (b) a student  pours hot water into the  uninsulated  beaker shown in fig. 2.1 until it is about  two-thirds full. she measures the temperature and immediately starts a stopclock. she  records the temperature every 30 s. she repeats the procedure using the insulated beaker as  shown in fig. 2.2. the readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 without insulation with insulation t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /  08 0 7 9 30 77 76 60 74 73 907 2 7 1 120 70 70 150 6 9 69   complete the column headings in the table. [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (c) state whether the cotton wool insulation increases, decreases, or has no significant effect on  the rate of cooling of the water, compared with the rate of cooling with no insulation. justify your answer by reference to the results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (d) the student suggests that a significant cause of loss of thermal energy from the beakers is  evaporation.    suggest how you would reduce the evaporation in this experiment.  .. .[1]  (e) suggest one condition that should not be changed when this experiment is repeated.   .. .[1] [total: 6] ",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire.  the circuit used is shown in fig. 3.1. $ l$ %&srzhu\u0003vrxufh 9 fig. 3.1  (a) a student  measures the potential difference  v across different lengths l of the wire ab and  the current i in the wire. the wire ab is 1.00  m long. the readings are shown in table 3.1.   calculate the resistance r of each length l of the wire ab, using the equation r = v i. record  the values of r in the table. table 3.1 l / cm v / v i / a r / \u03c9 10.0 0.36 0.73 20.0 0.70 0.71 30.0 1.10 0.73 40.0 1.45 0.73 50.0 1.80 0.72 [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against  l / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0). 00 [5]  (c) state whether your graph shows that the resistance r is proportional to the length l. justify  your answer by reference to the graph. statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  (d) suggest how you could further test your statement in (c), using the same apparatus.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144  the igcse class is determining the magnification of an image produced by a lens.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. illuminated object lensscreenu benchv fig. 4.1  (a) (i) on fig. 4.1,  measure and record in mm the distance u from the illuminated object to the  centre of the lens.   u =  ... mm    (ii) on fig. 4.1,  measure and record in mm the distance v from the centre of the lens to the  screen.   v =  ... mm  [1]  (b) calculate the ratio v u.   v u =  . [1]  (c)  the diagram is drawn one tenth of actual size.    (i) calculate the actual distance u from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens.   u =  ... mm    (ii) calculate the actual distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen.   v =  ... mm  [1]  (d) the student measures the height  h from the top to the bottom of the image on the screen.  4.5  h =   cm ",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (i) on fig. 4.2, measure the height x of the illuminated object. illuminated object fig. 4.2 (full size)  x =  ..   (ii) calculate h x.  h x =  ..  [1]  (e) the magnification m of the image is given by the equation m = h x. the student suggests that    the ratio v u also gives the magnification m. state whether the results support this suggestion   and justify your answer by reference to the results. statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  (f) state two precautions that you could take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  (g) the image on the screen in this experiment is magnified and dimmer than the object.    state one other difference that you would expect to see between the image and the illuminated  object.  .. .[1]  (h) suggest one precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to focus the image as  clearly as possible.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145  an igcse student is taking measurements of a drinks cup.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 5.1. d t d bh fig. 5.1  (a) (i) on fig. 5.1, measure the height h of the cup.   h  =   cm   (ii) on fig. 5.1, measure the diameter dt of the top of the cup.  dt =   cm   (iii) on fig. 5.1, measure the diameter db of the bottom of the cup.  db =   cm   (iv) calculate the average diameter da, using the equation da = dt + db 2.   da =   cm",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over   (v) calculate an approximate value for the volume v of the cup, using the equation     v = \u03c0da2h 4.  v  =  .. [3]  (b) the student determines the average circumference  of the cup, using a 50 cm length of string  and a metre rule.   fig. 5.2 shows how the student used the string to determine the average circumference. fig. 5.2   describe how you would use the string to obtain a more reliable value for the average  circumference.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] question 5 continues on the next page.",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) the student fills a measuring cylinder to the 500 cm3 mark. he pours water from the measuring  cylinder into the cup until the cup is full. fig. 5.3 shows the water remaining in the measuring  cylinder. 50100150200250300350400450500cm3 water fig. 5.3   (i) record the volume of water vr remaining in the measuring cylinder.  vr =  ..   (ii) calculate the volume vw of the water in the cup.  vw =  .. [2]  (d)  on fig. 5.3, show clearly the line of sight required to take the reading of vr. [1] [total: 8] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (rw/sw) 82878/3 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *0185447811* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2014  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 an igcse student is taking measurements of a sample of modelling clay. she has moulded the  sample of modelling clay into a cube, as shown in fig. 1.1. wmodelling clay dh fig. 1.1  (a) (i) on fig. 1.2, measure the height h and width w of the piece of modelling clay. wh fig. 1.2  h  =  .cm  w  =  .cm   (ii) on fig. 1.3, measure the depth d of the piece of modelling clay. d fig. 1.3  d  =  .cm   (iii) calculate the volume va of the modelling clay using the equation va = hwd.  va =  ... cm3",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (iv) the mass m of the piece of modelling clay is shown in fig. 1.4.     calculate the density \u03c1 of the modelling clay using the equation \u03c1 = m va. 58.6  g fig. 1.4  \u03c1 =  ..  [3]  (b) the student moulds the piece of modelling clay into a spherical shape.    draw a diagram to show how you would use two rectangular blocks of wood and a rule to  measure the diameter of the sphere of modelling clay.  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (c) the student pours water into a measuring cylinder, as shown in fig. 1.5. 100 watercm3 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 fig. 1.5   (i) record the volume v1 of water shown in fig. 1.5.  v1 =  ..[1]   (ii) on fig. 1.5, show clearly the line of sight required to take the reading of v1. [1]  (d) the student uses a piece of string to lower the sample of modelling clay into the measuring  cylinder until it is completely covered with water. the new volume reading v2 is 84 cm3.   calculate the volume vb of the modelling clay using the equation vb = (v2 \u2013 v1).  vb =  ..[1]  (e) the student suggests that the volume of the modelling clay should not change when the  shape is changed.    assuming that the experiment has been carried out with care, suggest two reasons why the  values va and vb may not be the same. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   ..  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 the igcse class is investigating the cooling of hot water as cold water is added.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 2.1. thermometerclamp stand water fig. 2.1  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r as shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.2. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.2  \u03b8r =  . [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) a student pours approximately 150 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. she measures the  temperature \u03b8 of the water in the beaker.   she adds a volume v = 10 cm3 of water at room temperature to the hot water in the beaker  and stirs it briefly. she measures the temperature of the water in the beaker.   she adds  a total of 50 cm3 of cold water, 10 cm3 at a time, stirring and measuring the  temperature each time. the readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 v / \u03b8 / 08 2 75 69 656158   (i) the total volume of cold water added is v.    in table 2.1, complete the volume v column.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table.  [2]  (c) suggest one way you could reduce the loss of thermal energy to the surroundings during the  experiment.  .. .  ..  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (d) the student has a drinks cup, held above a measuring cylinder, as shown in fig. 2.3. the cup  has a small hole in its base. measuring cylindercup 50100150200250  cm3 fig. 2.3   she pours water into the cup until it is about two-thirds full.  she measures the time t1 taken for  50 cm3 of water to fall into the measuring cylinder. the stopwatch reading is shown in fig. 2.4. fig. 2.4   after setting the stopwatch to zero, she measures the time t2 taken for the next 50 cm3 of  water to fall into the measuring cylinder. the stopwatch reading is shown in fig. 2.5. fig. 2.5",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (i) calculate the average rate of flow of water r1 for the first 50 cm3, using the equation    r1 = k t1, where k = 50 cm3.  r1 =  ..   (ii) calculate the average rate of flow of water r2 for the next 50 cm3, using the equation    r2 = k t2, where  k = 50 cm3.  r2 =  ..  [2]  (e) a student suggests that the experiment described in part (b) would be improved by having a  steady flow of cold water added to the hot water.    suggest one possible disadvantage of using the method described in part (d) to produce  such a flow of water.  .. .  .. .  [1]  (f) the experiment described in part (b) could be repeated to check the results.    suggest two conditions that should be kept constant in order to provide a reliable check. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20143 the igcse class is investigating the resistance of a wire.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit used. a l pqpower supply resistance wiremetre rule v fig. 3.1  (a) a student  measures the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across a length l = 0.250 m of  the wire pq.   he repeats the readings using a range of different lengths of the wire. the readings are shown  in table 3.1. table 3.1 l / v / i / r / 0.250 0.50 0.33 0.350 0.6 9 0.36 0.450 0. 90 0.32 0.550 1.11 0.34 0.650 1.32 0.35 0.750 1.50 0.33   (i) calculate the resistance r of each length l of wire using the equation r = v i. record the  values of r in the table.   (ii)  complete the heading for each column of the table.  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against l / m (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  . [2]  (d) predict the value of the resistance r1 of 1.00 m of the resistance wire connected between p  and q. give your answer to a number of significant figures that is suitable for this experiment.  r1 =  . [2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 the igcse class is investigating refraction of light through a transparent block.  fig. 4.1 shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. eye ray-trace sheetabn 30\u00b0 m dc fig. 4.1",
            "13": "13 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (a) (i) on fig. 4.1, label the point f at which the incident ray crosses the normal nm. label the  other end of the ray e.   (ii) on fig. 4.1, draw a refracted ray from f, at an angle of refraction r = 20\u00b0, to meet side cd  of the block. label the point g at which this ray meets side cd of the block.  [1]  (b) predict and draw on fig. 4.1 the line of the ray that emerges from the block at point g. label  the end of your line h. [2]  (c) to obtain the correct positions for the emergent ray in this experiment, the student places two  pins p1 and p2 on line ef. he observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block  so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   he places two pins p3 and p4 between his eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the images of  p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other.   (i) on fig. 4.1, mark the positions of the pins p3 and p4 at a suitable distance apart for this  experiment. [1]   (ii) state two precautions that you should take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.    .. . 2.    .. .  [2]",
            "14": "14 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (d) the student repeats the experiment with the block turned through 90\u00b0, as shown in fig. 4.2.  he measures the angle of refraction r.  r = . . eyeray-trace sheet30\u00b0 a bn m d c fig. 4.2   he suggests that the value of r should be the same in both experiments because the material  of the block has not changed.    state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  [1]  [total: 7]22\u00b0",
            "15": "15 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over5 the igcse class is investigating the current in copper wires.  each student has a selection of wires and a range of apparatus that could be used, listed below.    30 cm ruler    ammeter   electrical leads   electromagnet   electronic balance   lamp   metre rule   12 v fixed-voltage power supply   switch   tape measure   variable resistor (rheostat)   voltmeter  (a) from the list, choose the most suitable device to measure the length of approximately 20 m of  copper wire.   ..  [1]  (b) (i) draw a circuit diagram to show the circuit that you would set up to measure the current in  a sample of copper wire. the current is to be measured for a range of potential differences that must also be measured. draw the symbol for a resistor to represent the sample of copper wire.  [3]   (ii) a student replaces the copper wire with a lamp. she switches on the circuit but the lamp  does not glow.     suggest how she can check that the lamp filament is not broken by using the circuit, and  without removing the lamp.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "16": "16 0625/62/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.  (iii) state whether a 0 \u2013 300 v voltmeter is suitable for measuring a potential difference in the  circuit you have drawn in part (b)(i) . give a reason for your answer. statement   .. reason  ...   .. .  .. .  [1]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_w14_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nf/sw) 82870/5 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1315059264* physics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2014  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20141 the igcse class is investigating the downward deflection of a metre rule clamped at one end.  the apparatus has been set up as shown in fig. 1.1. the 0.0 cm mark is at the free end of the rule. clamp metre rule free end floorh0bench fig. 1.1  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure h0.  h0 =    cm   (ii) fig. 1.1 is drawn to 1/10th scale.    calculate and record the actual height h0 of the free end of the metre rule above the  floor.  h0 =    cm [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (b) a student carefully places a mass on the rule at a distance d = 60.0 cm from the free end of  the rule.   explain how he could make sure that the centre of the mass was at this 60.0 cm mark. y ou  may use a diagram.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]  (c) fig. 1.2 shows the mass in place on the rule. 0.0 cm mark d hmass100.0  cm mark fig. 1.2   (i) on fig. 1.2, measure h.  h =    cm",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014  (ii) fig. 1.2 is also drawn to 1/10th scale.    calculate, and record in table 1.1, the actual height h of the free end of the rule above  the floor. table 1.1 d / cm h / cm d / cm ( d \u00d7 d) / cm2 60.0 50.0 82.5 1.540.0 81.5 2.530.0 80.3 3.720.0 79.0 5.0  [2]  (d) the procedure is repeated for d values of 50.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 30.0 cm and 20.0 cm. the results  are shown in the table.   (i) for d = 60.0 cm, calculate and record in the table the downward deflection d (change in  height) produced by the mass. use the results from (a)(ii)  and from the table, and the  equation d = h 0 \u2212 h.   (ii) for each value of d, use the results from the table to calculate and record in the table the  value of ( d \u00d7 d).  (e) a student suggests that the downward deflection d is inversely proportional to the distance d  (that is, d is proportional to 1/ d).   using some appropriate figures from table 1.1, explain why this cannot be the case.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]  (f) (i) although the metre rule is flat when placed on the bench, one student notices that the  free end is slightly deflected downwards when clamped as shown in fig. 1.1, even when the mass is not placed on it.    explain why this deflection occurs.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) suggest how to find the value of this deflection. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20142 an igcse student is investigating how the surface of a container affects the rate at which water  cools.  she is using two test-tubes, labelled a and b, as shown in fig. 2.1. test-tube a has no covering.  test-tube b is covered with foil. a bfoilwater-level markthermometers cork water water\u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.1  (a) the cork and thermometer are removed from test-tube a and hot water is poured into the  test-tube up to the marked level. the cork and thermometer are replaced.   (i) the thermometer reading rises to the value shown in fig. 2.1.    read and record, in the first row of table 2.1, this temperature \u03b8  at time t = 0 s.",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over  (ii) the temperatures \u03b8 of the thermometer in test-tube a at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,  150 s and 180 s are shown in table 2.1.    complete the column headings and column t  values in the table. table 2.1 test-tube a test-tube b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 71.5 76.0 67.5 73.064.0 70.560.5 68.558.0 66.556.0 65.0  [3]  (b) the procedure is repeated for test-tube b. fig. 2.1 shows the thermometer reading of test- tube b at the start of the experiment.   read and record, in the first row of table 2.1, this temperature  \u03b8  at time t = 0 s.  (c) the temperatures \u03b8 of the thermometer in test-tube b at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s, 150 s  and 180 s are shown in the table.   state in which test-tube, a or b, the water cools at the greater rate. justify your answer by  referring to the results.   test-tube . justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (d) suggest one aspect of the practical procedure which may be a source of unreliability in the  experiment.  .. .  ..  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (e) another igcse student wants to extend the experiment in order to test the effects of other  surface materials.   suggest two factors relating to the apparatus which he should keep the same in order for the  tests to be fair. 1.  ... ...  .. . 2.  ... ...  .. .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over3 the igcse class is investigating the magnification produced by a converging lens.  the apparatus is set up as shown in fig. 3.1. illuminated object lensscreenu fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.2, measure and record the height h0 of the triangular object.  h0 =  ..  cm  [1] h0 fig. 3.2",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 (b) the distance u between the illuminated object and the lens is set to 30.0 cm. the screen is  moved until a sharp image of the illuminated object is seen, as shown in fig. 3.3. hiimage fig. 3.3   measure, and record in the first row of table 3.1, the height hi of the image. table 3.1 u / cm hi / cm s 30.0 35.0 1.5 40.0 1.2 45.0 1.0 50.0 0.9 55.0 0.8  [2]  (c) the process is repeated for u values of 35.0 cm, 40.0 cm, 45.0 cm, 50.0 cm and 55.0 cm. the  hi values obtained are shown in the table.   complete table 3.1 by calculating the values of s, using your result from (a) and the   equation s = h0 hi .",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (d) plot a graph of s (y-axis) against u / cm ( x-axis).  [5]  (e) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g  =  . [1]   (ii) calculate the focal length f of the lens, where f = 1 g cm.  f =  . [1]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20144 an igcse student is investigating the motion of a ball down a slope.  she is using the apparatus shown in fig. 4.1. epath of centre of the ball floorslope dbench fig. 4.1  she measures the angle \u03b8 of the slope, releases the ball from a marked point on the slope and  watches where it hits the floor.  she then measures the distance d  from the table to where the ball lands.  this is repeated for a number of angles, releasing the ball from the same point on the slope. her  results are shown in table 4.1. table 4.1 \u03b8 / \u00b0 d / cm 20 42 30 55 40 64 50 51 60 40",
            "13": "13 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn over (a) (i) describe the pattern in the values of d as \u03b8 is increased.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) from the pattern of results, predict what the d values may be for slope angles of 10 \u00b0  and 70 \u00b0.  10 \u00b0 ... 70 \u00b0 ...  [1]  (b) the student is being assessed and must carry out the experiment on her own. she says that  it is difficult to release the ball carefully and then be able to see exactly where it lands.   suggest an improvement she might make to the experiment, so that she could obtain a more  accurate measurement of d.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]  (c) suggest how she might make sure that the results of the experiment are reliable.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 20145 some igcse students are finding the resistance of a lamp in two different electrical circuits.  (a) circuit 1 is shown in fig. 5.1. circuit 1 alpower supply fig. 5.1   on fig. 5.1, draw a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across lamp  l.  [1]  (b) the switch is closed.   fig. 5.2 shows the readings on the voltmeter and ammeter measuring the potential difference  and the current for lamp l. 012 3 v4 5 00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0 fig. 5.2   read, and record in table 5.1, the potential difference  v and the current i.",
            "15": "15 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014 [turn overtable 5.1 circuit v / i / r /appearance of  lamp l 1 bright 2 0.91 0.12 dim  (c) the circuit is reconnected as shown in fig. 5.3. circuit 2 alpower supply fig. 5.3   the potential difference v and the current i  for lamp l in this circuit are shown in the table.   (i) using the equation r = v i , calculate and record in the table the resistance r of lamp l    when connected in each circuit.   (ii) complete the column headings in the table.  [4]  (d) a student suggests that, as the same lamp l is used throughout the experiment, its resistance  in each circuit should be the same.   state whether the findings agree with this idea. justify your answer by reference to the results. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. .  [1]",
            "16": "16 0625/63/o/n/14 \u00a9 ucles 2014permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (e) theory suggests that the resistance of a lamp increases when its temperature rises.   explain whether the observations in table 5.1 support this.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]  (f) it is possible to change the current in this type of experiment by using a variable resistor  rather than rearranging the circuit.   in the space below, draw a circuit with a power supply, a lamp, an ammeter and a variable  resistor used for this purpose.  [2]  [total: 9]"
        }
    },
    "2015": {
        "0625_m15_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern irela nd as a cambridge international level1/level 2 certificate .  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib15 03_0625_12/5rp  \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over       *1743635004* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  february/march 2015     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  1 a student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of some water. the diagram shows  part of the measuring cylinder. the top and bottom of the meniscus are labelled.    50 4540top of  meniscus bottom of meniscuscm3     what is the volume of the water?  a 47.0  cm3 b 47.5  cm3 c 49.0  cm3 d 49.5  cm3     2 the graph represents the motion of a train travelling between two stations.    00 100 200 300 400 50020 10 600 700 800 900speed m / s time  / s    which statement about the train is correct?  a its acceleration takes a longer time than its deceleration.  b it travels at constant speed for less than half of its journey time.  c it travels 2000  m in the first 100  s.  d it travels 10  000  m at constant speed.     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15 [turn over  3 a car travels 6.0  km along a main road in 6.0 minutes. it then travels 2.0  km along a minor road in  6.0 minutes.    main roadminor road 6.0 km 6.0 minutes2.0 km 6.0 minutes     which calculation of average speed for the whole journey is correct?  a 8.0 \u00f7 12.0 = 0.67  km  / minute  b 12.0 \u00f7 8.0 = 1.5  km  / minute  c 8.0 + 12.0 = 20  km  / minute  d 8.0 \u00d7 12.0 = 96  km  / minute      4 two metal blocks p and q have identical dimensions. they hang on identical spring balances.    0 1 2 3 4 65n 0 1 2 3 4 65n p q    what can be deduced about p and q?  a they have different volumes and different weights.  b they have different volumes, but equal masses.  c they have equal volumes and equal weights.  d they have equal volumes, but different masses.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  5 a person measures the length, width, height and mass of a metal block with rectangular sides.    which of these measurements must be used in order to calculate the density of the metal?  a mass only  b height and mass only  c length, width and height only  d length, width, height and mass     6 the diagram shows the only three forces acting on an object.    5.0 n3.0 n 2.0 n    what is the resultant force on the object?  a 0 n  b 5.0  n towards the left  c 5.0  n towards the right  d 10.0  n towards the right    7 a uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. the rod is not attached to the pivot. forces are then  applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. the weight of the rod can be ignored.    which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?    a 100  n 100  nb 100  n 100  n c100  n 100  n d 100  n 100  n100  n     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15 [turn over  8 a helicopter takes off from the ground and rises vertically. it then hovers at a constant height  above the ground.    which sequence of energy changes takes place during the gain in height?  a chemical \u2192 gravitational potential \u2192 kinetic  b chemical \u2192 kinetic \u2192 gravitational potential  c gravitational potential \u2192 chemical \u2192 kinetic  d kinetic \u2192 chemical \u2192 gravitational potential     9 four people of equal weight on a beach use different routes to get to the top of a sea wall.    beachslipwayladder sea wall     which person produces the greatest average power?    person route time taken  / s  a runs across the beach, then climbs the ladder 8  b walks across the beach, then climbs the ladder 16  c runs up the slipway 5  d walks up the slipway 10    10 a vehicle sinks into soft ground.    the vehicle is changed so that it does not sink as far.    which change is made?  a a lower centre of mass  b a more powerful engine  c wheels that are further apart  d wider tyres    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  11 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas trapped in a cylinder.    at which labelled point on the diagram is the pressure greatest?    gas cylinder acd b      12 extremely small pollen grains in water are viewed through a microscope. the grains are seen to  move continually and randomly.    what is the reason for this random movement?  a the grains are moved by randomly moving water molecules.  b the grains are moved by random convection currents in the water.  c the grains are moved by random rays of light reflecting off them.  d the grains are moved by the random motion of their own atoms.      13 a gas is compressed in a sealed cylinder by moving a piston.    gas initial positionpiston gas after gas has been compressedpiston     which row in the table states what happens to t he density of the gas and to the pressure of the  gas when it is compressed?     density pressure  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15 [turn over  14 when steam condenses it becomes liquid water. when liquid water solidifies it becomes ice.    what happens to the temperature of steam while  it is condensing, and what happens to the  temperature of water while it is solidifying?     temperature of steam  while it is condensing temperature of water  while it is solidifying  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same      15 a thermometer has graduations which start at \u201310  \u00b0c and end at 110  \u00b0c.    \u201310 0 100 110 \u00b0c    what is the lower fixed point and what is the upper fixed point of the celsius scale?     lower fixed point  / \u00b0c upper fixed point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 100  b \u201310 110  c 0 100  d 0 110     16 what is the name of the process of heat transfer using electromagnetic waves?  a conduction  b convection  c evaporation  d radiation    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  17 ice is trapped by a metal gauze at the bottom of a tube containing water.    the water is heated strongly at the top, but the ice only melts very slowly.    heatwater boiling metal gauze ice     why does the ice melt so slowly?  a heat energy always travels upwards.  b hot water is more dense than cold water.  c metal gauze does not allow heat to pass through.  d water is a poor conductor of heat.      18 a transverse wave moves along a rope.    the diagram shows the position of the rope at one particular time.    wx y zrope     which two labelled points are one wavelength apart?  a w and x b w and z c x and z d y and z     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15 [turn over  19 the diagram shows a water wave passing through a gap in a harbour wall. the wavefronts curve  round the wall and reach a small boat in the harbour.    boatharbour wall harbou rwavefront gap     what is the name of this curving effect, and how can the gap be changed so that the wavefronts  do not reach the boat?     name of effect change to the gap  a diffraction make the gap slightly bigger  b diffraction make the gap slightly smaller  c refraction make the gap slightly bigger  d refraction make the gap slightly smaller      20 which labelled distance is the focal length of the lens?    a cb d     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  21 a ray of light is reflected by two parallel plane mirrors x and y.    mirror x  mirror y 30\u00b0 30\u00b0 eye     which statement is correct?  a the angle of incidence at mirror x is 30 \u00b0.  b the angle of incidence at mirror y is 60 \u00b0.  c the angle of reflection at mirror x is 120 \u00b0.  d the angle of reflection at mirror y is 0 \u00b0.      22 how do infra-red waves differ from ultraviolet waves?  a infra-red waves are longitudinal.  b infra-red waves have a lower speed in vacuo  (in a vacuum).  c infra-red waves have lower frequencies.  d infra-red waves have smaller wavelengths.    23 what is the approximate range of audible sound frequencies for a human with good hearing?  a from 20  hz to 2000  hz  b from 20  hz to 20  000  hz  c from 200  hz to 20  000  hz  d from 200  hz to 200  000  hz    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15 [turn over  24 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from the sea-bed. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.3  s. the sea-bed is 1000  m  below the boat.    sea-bedboat 1000  m     using this information, what is the speed of sound in the water?  a 769  m / s b 1300  m / s c 1538  m / s d 2600  m / s     25 which metal is suitable to use to make a permanent magnet?  a aluminium  b brass  c iron  d steel    26 the diagram shows two magnets and two iron rods placed in a line.    ns magnet iron rodns magnetj iron rodk     which magnetic poles are induced at the ends j and k of the iron rods?     pole induced  at end j pole induced  at end k  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  27 a teacher wishes to show the production of electrostatic charges.    she holds a rod and rubs it with a cotton cloth. a copper rod, a glass rod, a plastic rod and a steel  rod are available.    which two rods would both be suitable to use?  a a copper rod and a glass rod  b a glass rod and a plastic rod  c a plastic rod and a copper rod  d a plastic rod and a steel rod      28 a student wishes to determine the resistance of a resistor. she uses an ammeter and a voltmeter  in a circuit.  in which circuit are the ammeter and voltmeter connected correctly?    a va a v avb c a vd      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15 [turn over  29 a battery is connected to two crocodile clips and a lamp.    there is a gap between the crocodile clips.    crocodile clips    four cylinders w, x, y and z are made of the same metal but have different dimensions. the  cylinders are connected in turn, by their ends, between the crocodile clips. the diagrams of the  cylinders are all drawn to the same scale.    w x y z    which cylinder makes the lamp glow most brightly and which cylinder makes the lamp glow least  brightly?     most brightly least brightly  a w y  b w z  c x y  d x z     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  30 in which circuit can the lamps be switched on and off independently?    a b d c       31 two resistors, with resistances r1 and r2, are connected in parallel.    the resistance r1 is greater than the resistance r2.    r1 r2     what is the resistance of the parallel combination?  a less than either r1 or r2  b equal to r1  c equal to r2  d the average of r1 and r2    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15 [turn over  32 in the circuit shown, the switch is closed for a long time, then opened.    v v v voltmeter 1  voltmeter 2 voltmeter 3 resistor capacitor     immediately after the switch is opened, which of the voltmeters reads zero?  a voltmeter 1 only  b voltmeter 2 only  c voltmeter 3 only  d voltmeter 1, voltmeter 2 and voltmeter 3     33 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    electrical supplyx y appliance cable cablelive neutral     when a fuse is used, where should it be connected, and when a circuit-breaker is used, where  should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  34 which device uses slip rings?  a a d.c. electric motor  b a relay  c a transformer  d an a.c. generator      35 the diagram shows a coil of wire connected to a voltmeter.    vcoil of wire     a student has a magnet and an unmagnetised iron rod.  how can an e.m.f. be induced across the coil? a holding the magnet inside the coil  b holding the iron rod inside the coil  c pushing the magnet into the coil  d pushing the iron rod into the coil     36 a step-down transformer is used to light a 12  v lamp from a 240  v mains supply. the lamp lights  at normal brightness. the primary coil has 600 turns.    240  v 12 v lampprimary coil 600 turnssecondary coil     how many turns are in the secondary coil?  a 12 b 20 c 30 d 50     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  37 what happens in the process of thermionic emission?  a complete molecules are emitted from the surface of a hot liquid.  b single atoms are emitted from the surface of a hot liquid.  c electrons are emitted from the surface of a hot metal.  d protons are emitted from the surface of a hot metal.      38 which row shows the relative ionising effects and penetrating abilities of \u03b1-particles and   \u03b2-particles?     ionising effect penetrating ability  a \u03b1 greater than \u03b2 \u03b1 greater than \u03b2  b \u03b1 greater than \u03b2 \u03b1 less than \u03b2  c \u03b1 less than \u03b2 \u03b1 greater than \u03b2  d \u03b1 less than \u03b2 \u03b1 less than \u03b2      39 a radioactive substance has a half-life of 2 weeks. at the beginning of an investigation, a sample  of the substance emits 3000 \u03b2-particles per minute.    how many \u03b2-particles will it emit per minute after 6 weeks?  a 0 b 375 c 500 d 1500      40 a nuclide has the symbol c14 6.    how many protons are there in one nucleus of this nuclide?  a 6 b 8 c 14 d 20     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  blank page ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  blank page ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is  produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge a ssessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/f/m/15  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_m15_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (st/sw) 90397/5 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *2675880176* physics  0625/22 paper 2 core february/march 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 a coconut falls from position x to position y , as shown in fig. 1.1. xcoconut y fig. 1.1  (a) state what causes the coconut to accelerate.  .. .[1]  (b) compare the acceleration at positions x and y . tick one box.    much greater at x than at y    much greater at y than at x    about the same at x as at y [1]  (c) using the axes in fig. 1.2, sketch the graph showing how the speed of the coconut changes  as it falls from x to y . [2] 0 timespeed 0 fig. 1.2  (d) state how the distance xy is determined from your graph in (c).  .. .[1] [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 fig. 2.1 shows a spring before and after it is stretched by a small load. loadafter before fig. 2.1  (a) on fig. 2.1,    (i) mark the extension caused by the load,   (ii) draw the apparatus needed to determine the extension.  [2]  (b) fig. 2.2 shows a sketch graph of the length of the spring, plotted against the weight of the  load. weight of load 00length fig. 2.2   on fig. 2.2, mark clearly the unstretched length of the spring. [1]  (c) state the unit in which the weight of the load is measured.  .. .[1] [total: 4]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 (a) a microphone is a device designed to convert an input of sound energy into an output of  electrical energy.   complete the table below. in each case, give the name of a device that is designed to give the  stated energy output with the stated energy input.  energy input useful energy output device sound electrical microphone electrical sound chemical electrical electrical thermalelectrical kinetic [4]  (b) the electrical energy output from the microphone is less than the sound energy input.   (i) state the principle of conservation of energy.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) explain how this principle applies to the microphone.  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over4 fig. 4.1 is a ray diagram representing two rays passing through a converging lens. a bx yz c fig. 4.1  (a) state which of the labelled points is a principal focus of the lens. ...  [1]  (b) state which of the distances bx, xy , yz or xz is the focal length of the lens.  ...  [1]  (c) on fig. 4.1, draw another ray from point a to locate the image of point a. label this image i.  [3]  (d) on the ray diagram in fig. 4.1, the refraction is shown occurring at the centre line of the lens.   state where the refraction actually occurs.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 (a) a ray of light in glass meets a boundary with air.    in fig. 5.1, the three diagrams x, y and z each show a different angle of incidence for the ray. glass air ray xglass air yglass air z fig. 5.1   (i) write down the letter of any diagram, x, y or z, in which the ray undergoes    1.  refraction,  ..    2.  total internal reflection.  ..  [2]   (ii) on fig. 5.1, use the letter c to mark the critical angle for light at the glass-air boundary.  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) water waves move more slowly in shallow water than in deep water.   fig. 5.2 shows wavefronts of a wave in deep water meeting the boundary with some shallow  water. wave moves in this direction wavefrontsdeep water (fast) 321shallow water (slow) fig. 5.2   (i) using your ruler, carefully complete the wavefronts 1, 2 and 3, showing their possible  positions in the shallow water where they move more slowly. [3]   (ii) tick the one box that describes what is happening at the boundary.     diffraction     echo     refraction     total internal reflection [1] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 two students a and b are carrying out an experiment to determine the speed of sound.   they are standing side by side at a distance of 480 m from the school wall, as shown in fig. 6.1. a 480  mschool wall b fig. 6.1 (not to scale)  student a makes a loud sound by banging two pan lids together once. a short time later, both  students hear the sound again.  (a) state what causes this second sound.  .. .[1]  (b) underline the phrases that correctly complete the sentences below.    louder than   the second sound is equally as loud as the original sound.    quieter than                    amplitude    frequency  changed.   this is because the  of the sound has                                    speed  not changed.                                        wavelength [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the time between the two sounds, as measured by student b, is 3.0 s.   (i) suggest the instrument that student b used to measure the time.  .. .[1]   (ii) use the measurements to calculate the speed of sound.  speed =  .. m / s [3] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 the electric circuit in fig. 7.1 consists of a battery, two lamps and a switch. a voltmeter is connected  across one of the lamps.  v12 v ab fig. 7.1  (a) which quantity does the voltmeter measure? tick one box.    charge    current    potential difference    power [1]  (b) the switch is closed so that there is a current in the lamps.   (i) what flows in the circuit in order to create the current? tick one box.     charge     potential difference     power     resistance [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) the resistance of each lamp is 18 \u03c9.    calculate    1.   the combined resistance of the lamps,  combined resistance =  .. \u03c9 [1]    2. the current in the circuit, stating the unit in your answer.  current =  ...[4]   (iii) calculate the value of the reading on the voltmeter.  voltmeter reading =   .. v [2]  (c) suggest one disadvantage of connecting lamps in series rather than in parallel.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20158 (a) when materials are heated, they usually expand.   describe one example where   (i) the expansion is useful,  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) the expansion causes problems that need to be allowed for.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) state two things that happen to the molecules of a solid when it is cooled. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]  (c) fig. 8.1 shows some balloons that have been filled with gas and tied to a heavy box. heavy box fig. 8.1   (i) in the sunlight, the gas in the balloons gets warmer.    state what is seen to happen to the balloons.  .. .[1]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) in terms of molecules, explain your answer to (c)(i) .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3] [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 fig. 9.1 shows a simple motor. coil batteryswitch\u2013+n s fig. 9.1  (a) the switch is closed.    explain why the coil starts to rotate.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]  (b) suggest one way of making the coil rotate faster.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over10 (a) complete the three sentences below, to describe attraction and repulsion in electrostatics.   two positive charges .. .   two negative charges .. .   a positive charge and a negative charge .. .    a positive charge and an uncharged conductor .. . [3]  (b) a charged plastic sphere is hanging on an insulating thread.    when a negatively-charged rod is brought near, the sphere and thread move to the position  shown in fig. 10.1. \u2013rod insulating thread charged sphere\u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 fig. 10.1   (i) state the sign of the charge on the sphere.  ... .[1]   (ii) describe what happens to the sphere and thread when the rod is moved far away from them.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) state the name of a material that is an electrical conductor.  .. .[1] [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 fig. 11.1 shows how the count rate from a radioactive source varies with time. 00102030405060 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 time  / scount rate counts  / s 160 fig. 11.1  (a) using fig. 11.1, describe how the count rate changes with time.  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) (i) using fig. 11.1, determine how many seconds it takes for the count rate to change from  60 counts / s to 15 counts / s.  number of seconds =  ...[1]   (ii) state the number of half-lives in this time.   number of half-lives =  ...[1]  (c) calculate the half-life of the radioactive substance.  half-life =  ... s [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (d) state the time taken for the count rate to change from 10 counts / s to 5 counts / s.  time =  s [1] [total: 7] question 12 is on the next page.",
            "18": "18 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 201512 fig. 12.1 represents a simple model of an atom. orbits nucleus fig. 12.1  the atom is composed of electrons, protons and neutrons.  (a) where in the atom are   (i) the electrons,     (ii) the protons,     (iii) the neutrons?   [3]  (b) which of these particles, electrons, protons or neutrons, have   (i) a positive charge,     (ii) a negative charge,     (iii) zero charge?   [2]  (c) complete the following sentence.   in every neutral atom, the number of  is equal to the number of     . [1] [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/22/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_m15_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nf/jg) 95528/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4817934472* physics  0625/32 paper 3 extended february/march 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 (a) a large stone, initially at rest, falls from the top of a building. the stone takes 3.2 s to fall to the  ground. for this stone, air resistance can be ignored.   (i) stating the formula that you use, show that the speed of the stone when it hits the ground  is 32 m / s. [1]   (ii) on fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the fall of the stone. label with an x the line  on the graph. [1] speed m / s40 30 20 10 0 01234 time  / s fig. 1.1   (iii) use the graph in (ii) to determine the height of the building.  height =   [2]  (b) a smaller stone than the stone in (a) falls from the same building. this stone is affected by air  resistance.   (i) what happens to the air resistance as the stone falls? underline your choice of answer.  air resistance decreases.            air resistance is constant.            air resistance increases. [1]   (ii) on fig. 1.1, draw a possible speed-time graph for the fall of this stone. label with a y this  line on the graph. [3] [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 the rocket shown in fig. 2.1 is about to be launched. rocket fig. 2.1  the total mass of the rocket and its full load of fuel is 2.8 \u00d7 106 kg. the constant force provided by  the rocket\u2019s motors is 3.2 \u00d7 107 n.  (a) calculate   (i) the total weight of the rocket and the fuel,  weight =   [1]   (ii) the resultant force acting on the rocket,  resultant force =   [2]   (iii) the vertical acceleration of the rocket immediately after lift-off.  acceleration =   [2]  (b) suggest why the acceleration of the rocket increases as it rises above the earth\u2019s surface.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 (a) complete the following statement.   an object is in equilibrium when both the .. and the   .. on the object are zero. [2]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a ladder ab. end a of the ladder rests against a vertical wall. end b rests on  rough ground. 3.2 m ground 240  n1.2 ma p bladder wallf fig. 3.1   fig. 3.1 shows two of the forces acting on the ladder. the only force on the ladder at a is f,  which acts at right-angles to the wall. the weight of the ladder is 240 n acting at the centre of  mass of the ladder.   (i) 1.  calculate the moment of the weight of the ladder about point b.  moment =   [1]    2.  write an expression, in terms of f, for the moment of f about point b.  moment =   [1]   (ii) use your answers from (i) to calculate f.  f =   [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (iii) explain why there must be an upwards force acting on the ladder at b.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 a scientist finds that the temperature of the water at the bottom of waterfalls is greater than the  temperature of the water at the tops of those waterfalls.  (a) (i) state the type of energy that falling water has because of its motion.  ..  [1]   (ii) in one waterfall, the water falls 300 m.    calculate the decrease in the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of 1.0 kg of water as it  falls through this distance.  decrease in g.p.e. =   [2]   (iii) assume that the increase in internal energy of the 1.0 kg of water is equal to its decrease  in g.p.e.    calculate the rise in temperature of the water. the specific heat capacity of water is  4200 j / (kg \u00b0c).  rise in temperature =   [2]   (iv) suggest a reason why the actual increase in temperature of the water is less than the  value calculated in (a)(iii) .  .. .  ..  [1]  (b) state why the thermometer used to measure the temperature of the water in the scientist\u2019s  experiment required a high sensitivity.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 (a) state the type of electromagnetic radiation   (i) used in luggage security checks at airports,  .. .   (ii) used by remote controls for tv sets.  .. . [2]  (b) (i) the electromagnetic waves used in a microwave oven have a frequency of 2.45 \u00d7 109 hz.  the speed of the waves is 3.00 \u00d7 108 m / s.    calculate the wavelength of the waves.  wavelength =   [2]   (ii) a 150 g block of ice at 0 \u00b0c is placed in the oven. the input power of the oven is 1100 w.  the energy absorbed by the block is 65% of the input energy.    calculate the time taken to melt the ice to water at 0 \u00b0c. the specific latent heat of fusion  of ice is 330 j / g.  time =   [4] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 fig. 6.1 shows a glass block abcd surrounded by air. a ray of red light, pq, is incident on face cd  of the block. b c da pq fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1,   (i) draw the normal at q and the refracted ray inside the block so that it meets face ab,   (ii) draw the ray emerging from face ab of the block and the normal where the ray emerges,   (iii) between the rays and the normals you have drawn, label two equal angles x. [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the angle of incidence of another red ray is 65\u00b0. the refractive index of the glass of block  abcd for red light is 1.62.   (i) calculate the angle of refraction in the glass for this ray.  angle =   [2]   (ii) the speed of light in air is 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s.    calculate the speed of the red light in the glass.  speed =   [2]  (c) for the same angle of incidence, the angle of refraction of red light in glass is greater than the  angle of refraction of violet light.   state the term which describes the separation of red and violet refracted rays in glass.  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 (a) (i) state what is meant by an electric field .  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) fig. 7.1 shows a small, positively charged sphere. + fig. 7.1    on fig. 7.1, sketch the pattern of the electric field in the space around the sphere. [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 7.2 shows a metal sphere on an insulating support. fig. 7.2   a student has available two rods, one charged positively and one charged negatively. using  one of these rods, she gives the sphere a uniform negative charge by induction.   state which rod she chooses, and describe the procedure she follows.  .. .  .. . . . .  .. .  .. .  ..  [4] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20158 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a 12.0 v battery connected to a resistor and a component x in series. 4.0 1x 12.0  v fig. 8.1   (i) identify the component x.  ..  [1]   (ii) the p.d. across the 4.0 \u03c9 resistor is 11.3 v.    calculate    1. the p.d. across component x,  p.d. =   [1]    2.  the current in the 4.0 \u03c9 resistor.  current =   [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the circuit in fig. 8.1 is now modified as shown in fig. 8.2. 8.0 1 4.0 1 12.0  v fig. 8.2   (i) calculate    1. the current in the 8.0 \u03c9 resistor,  current =   [1]    2.  the current in the battery.  current =   [1]   (ii) the battery is now reversed.    state the current in the battery.  current =   [1] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 fig. 9.1 shows a simple electric motor with a single rectangular coil between magnetic poles x  and y . pxycoil fig. 9.1  (a) (i) add labels to the empty boxes to the right of fig. 9.1, to identify the parts indicated. [2]   (ii) the coil rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from point p .    state which of the magnetic poles, x or y , is the n-pole. .. [1]  (b) (i) suggest two changes that cause the motor to spin faster. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]   (ii) state the effect on the motor of reversing the connections to the battery.  ..  [1]  (c) the battery in fig. 9.1 is replaced with a resistor. the coil is made to rotate by an external  mechanism.   explain why there is a current in the resistor.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over10 some older types of oscilloscope contain a cathode-ray tube.  (a) in a cathode-ray tube,   (i) 1.  state the purpose of the heater,  .. .    2.  identify the electrode that emits electrons,  .. .    3.  identify the electrode that accelerates electrons.  .. . [3]   (ii) explain why the space inside the tube is a vacuum.  .. .  ..  [1]  (b) the trace shown in fig. 10.1 is seen on the screen of the tube. fig. 10.1   state   (i) what causes the up and down movement of the electron beam,  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) what causes the horizontal movement of the electron beam,  .. .  ..  [1]   (iii) how the peak-to-peak height of the trace on the screen can be reduced.  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 in a famous experiment, a beam consisting of a very large number of \u03b1-particles was projected, in  a vacuum, at a very thin gold foil.  fig. 11.1 shows the paths of three of the \u03b1-particles a, b and c travelling towards the foil. a b cgold foil fig. 11.1  \u03b1-particle a is travelling along a line which does not pass very close to a gold nucleus.  \u03b1-particle b is travelling along a line which passes close to a gold nucleus.  \u03b1-particle c is travelling directly towards a gold nucleus.  (a) explain why an \u03b1-particle and a gold nucleus repel each other.  ..  [1]  (b) on fig. 11.1, draw lines with arrows to show the continuation of the paths of \u03b1-particles a, b  and c. [3]  (c) state two conclusions, about gold atoms, which resulted from the experiment.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_m15_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/cgw) 94505/4 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over *1703754357* physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test february/march 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 in this experiment, you will investigate the link between the brightness of a filament lamp and its  resistance.  the circuit has been set up for you. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. apower supply 2 v \u2013 3 v 0.0 cm markmetre rule resistance wire crocodile clipl fig. 1.1  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, use standard symbols to show a voltmeter connected to measure the  potential difference across the lamp. [1]   (ii) connect the voltmeter in this position.  (b) (i) connect the crocodile clip to a length l of the resistance wire, where l = 100 cm.   (ii) switch on.  in table 1.1, record the potential difference v and the current i for the lamp.  switch off. table 1.1 l / cm v / v i / a r / \u03c9 100  70  30   (iii) repeat steps  (b)(i) and (b)(ii) for values of  l = 70 cm and 30 cm.  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) calculate, and record in the table, the resistance r of the lamp for each value of  l, using the   equation r = v i. [2]  (d) from your results and your observations of the lamp filament, state the link, if any, between  the brightness of the lamp and its resistance. explain clearly how your results support your statement. statement   .. explanation  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]  (e) a student wishes to see if another lamp shows the same link between brightness and  resistance. however, his lamp only glows dimly when a potential difference of 3 v is applied across it.   the student decides that a method using a resistance wire is not suitable.   suggest an alternative circuit and apparatus which would allow him to vary the brightness  of his lamp and to measure the potential difference and current for his lamp. y ou may draw a circuit diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. illuminated object screen lensu1 v1 fig. 2.1  (a) (i) place the lens at a distance u1 = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object.   (ii) move the screen until a sharp image of the object appears on the screen.    do not move the screen from this position for the remainder of the experiment.   (iii) record the distance v1 between the lens and the screen.  v1 =  ...[2]  (b)  calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the lens, using the values from (a) and the equation   f1 = u1v1 (u1 + v1) .  f1 =  ...[2]  (c) (i) keeping the illuminated object and screen in the same positions, move the lens towards  the screen until a second sharp image is seen on the screen.   (ii) record the new distance u2 between the illuminated object and the lens, and the new  distance v2 between the lens and the screen.  u2 =  ...  v2 =  ...  [1]  (d) calculate another value f2 for the focal length of the lens, using your results from (c)(ii)  and   the equation f2 = u2v2 (u2 + v2) .  f2 =  ...[1]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (e) a student suggests that u2 and v1 should be equal.   state whether your findings support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference to  your results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (f) describe two precautions you took in order to obtain reliable results in this experiment.  1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 in this experiment, you will determine the mass of a metre rule by a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. mass mmetre rule pivot 50.0  cm mark 95.0 cm markb a fig. 3.1  (a) (i) place the metre rule on the pivot.  place a mass m = 20 g with its centre at the 95.0 cm  mark. keeping the mass at the 95.0 cm mark, adjust the position of the metre rule on the  pivot until the metre rule is as near to being balanced as possible.    record, in table 3.1, the position of the pivot.   (ii) record in the table    \u0081 the distance a between the 50.0 cm mark and the pivot,    \u0081 the distance b between the 95.0 cm mark and the pivot. table 3.1 m / g position of  pivot / cma / cm b / cm s  20  40  60  80 100   (iii) repeat steps  (a)(i) and (a)(ii) for values of m = 40 g, 60 g, 80 g and 100 g.  [2]  (b) for each value of m, calculate and record in the table the value s, where s = a b. [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) plot a graph of  s (y-axis) against m /g (x-axis).  [4]  (d) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ...[1]   (ii) the mass mr of the metre rule  is numerically equal to 1 g.    write down a value for mr to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  mr =  g [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) determination of mr by this method relies on the centre of mass of the rule being at the  50.0 cm mark.   suggest how you could use the apparatus to test whether this is the case. y ou may draw a  diagram. y ou are not asked to carry out the experiment.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 in this experiment, you will investigate how the insulation around a container affects the rate at  which water cools.  two test-tubes, labelled a and b, have been set up for you. test-tube a has one layer of insulation.  test-tube b has three layers of insulation.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. ab three layers of insulationone layer of insulationcorkthermometer fig. 4.1  (a) (i) remove the cork and thermometer from test-tube a. pour hot water into the test-tube, up  to the level of the top of the insulation.   (ii) carefully replace the cork and thermometer. the water level will rise.   (iii) measure the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water and start the stopclock. record this  temperature in the first row of table 4.1.   (iv) record in the table the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times  t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,  150 s and 180 s.",
            "11": "11 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (v) complete the column headings in the table. table 4.1 test-tube a (1 layer)test-tube b (3 layers) t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /  [4]  (b) (i) pour hot water into test-tube b, up to the level of the top of the insulation.    remove the cork and thermometer from test-tube a. place the cork and thermometer in  test-tube b.   (ii) repeat steps (a)(iii) and (a)(iv) .  (c) from your results, state how increasing the number of layers of insulation affects the rate at  which water cools. justify your answer by referring to your results. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]  (d) state two ways in which the temperature readings in this experiment were made as reliable  as possible. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (e) suggest two improvements to the apparatus or procedures which will ensure that the  investigation into the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling is more reliable. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_m15_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/cgw) 94506/4 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over *4390321859* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical february/march 2015  1 hour  candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 a student is determining the mass of a metre rule by a balancing method.  he is using the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. mass mmetre rule pivot 50.0  cm mark 95.0 cm markb a fig. 1.1  (a) he places the metre rule on the pivot and then places a mass m = 20 g with its centre at the  95.0 cm mark.   suggest how he could ensure that the mass is placed accurately at the 95.0 cm mark. y ou  may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) keeping the mass at the 95.0 cm mark, he adjusts the position of the metre rule on the pivot  until the metre rule is as near to being balanced as possible.   the student then determines the distance a between the 50.0 cm mark and the pivot and the  distance b between the 95.0 cm mark and the pivot.   he repeats the procedure for values of m = 40 g, 60 g, 80 g and 100 g. his results are shown in  table 1.1. table 1.1 m / g a / cm b / cm s  20  6.5 38.5  40 11.2 33.8  60 15.2 29.8  80 17.1 27.9 100 20.0 25.0   for each value of m, calculate and record in the table the value s, where s = a b. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) plot a graph of  s (y-axis) against m / g (x-axis).  [4]  (d) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ...[1]   (ii) the mass mr of the metre rule  is numerically equal to 1 g.    write down a value for mr to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  mr =  g [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) determination of mr by this method relies on the centre of mass of the rule being at the  50.0 cm mark.   suggest how you could use the apparatus to test whether this is the case. y ou may draw a  diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 the class is investigating whether the insulation around a container affects the rate at which water  cools.  two test-tubes are set up as shown in fig. 2.1. athermometers b fig. 2.1  test-tube  a has one layer of insulation. test-tube  b has three layers of insulation. this is indicated  by the cross-sections of the test-tubes shown in fig. 2.2. test-tube athree layers of insulationoverlap fixed by tape one layer of insulation test-tube b fig. 2.2",
            "6": "6 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (a) the students pour hot water into each test-tube, up to the level of the top of the insulation.   they record, in table 2.1, the temperatures \u03b8 of the water in each test-tube and immediately  start a stopclock. they also record the temperatures \u03b8 at times  t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,150 s  and 180 s.   complete the table. table 2.1 test-tube a (1 layer)test-tube b (3 layers) t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 71.0 75.568.5 73.566.0 71.064.0 69.562.0 67.560.5 66.058.5 64.5  [2]  (b) from the results in the table, state how increasing the number of layers of insulation affects  the rate at which water cools. justify your answer by referring to the results. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]  (c) state two ways in which the temperature readings in this experiment could be made as  reliable as possible. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (d) suggest two improvements to the apparatus or procedures which will ensure that the  investigation into the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling is more reliable. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 some students are investigating the link between the brightness of a filament lamp and its  resistance.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. power supply 3 v a0.0 cm markmetre rule resistance wire crocodile clipl fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.1, use standard symbols to show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential  difference across the lamp. [1]  (b) the students attach the crocodile clip to various lengths l of the resistance wire and record,  in table 3.1, the potential difference v and the current i for the lamp. they also record  observations of the lamp filament. table 3.1 l / cm v / v i / aobservation of  lamp filamentr / \u03c9 100 2.5 0.26 bright 60 1.5 0.19 dim 20 0.5 0.11 just glowing",
            "9": "9 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  voltmeters with the ranges shown in fig. 3.2 are available. 1.0 v1.21.41.6 1.8 2.00.80.60.4 0.2 0 v3 4 52 1 0 5 v6789 104321 0 fig. 3.2   (i) on fig. 3.2, circle the voltmeter which is most appropriate for this experiment.   (ii) draw an arrow on this voltmeter to show the reading when the crocodile clip is attached  to a length l = 60 cm of the resistance wire.  [2]  (c) calculate, and record in the table, the resistance r of the lamp for each value of  l, using the   equation r = v i. [2]  (d) from the results and the observations of the lamp filament, state the link, if any, between  the brightness of the lamp and its resistance. explain clearly how the results support your  statement. statement   .. explanation  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) a student wishes to see if another lamp shows the same link between brightness and  resistance. however, his lamp only glows dimly when a potential difference of 3 v is applied across it.   the student decides that a method using a resistance wire is not suitable.   suggest an alternative circuit and apparatus which would allow him to vary the brightness  of his lamp and measure the potential difference and current for his lamp. y ou may draw a circuit diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overblank page",
            "12": "12 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 a student is carrying out an experiment with a small converging lens. the student sets up the  apparatus as shown in fig. 4.1. the distances are shown full size. illuminated objectscreen lensu1 v1 fig. 4.1  (a) she moves the screen until a sharp image of the illuminated object appears on the screen.   (i) using fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance u1 between the illuminated object and  the lens, and the distance v1 between the lens and the screen.  u1 =  ...  v1 =  ...  [2]   (ii) calculate a value for the focal length f of the lens, using your results from (a)(i)  and the    equation f = u1v1 (u1 + v1) .  f =  ...[2]  (b) keeping the illuminated object and screen in the same positions, she moves the lens towards  the screen until a second sharp image is seen on the screen. the distances are shown full  size. illuminated objectscreen lensu2 fig. 4.2   (i) using fig. 4.2, measure and record the new distance u2 between the illuminated object  and the lens.  u2 =  ...",
            "13": "13 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) the student suggests that u2 and v1 should be equal.    state whether the lens positions obtained by the student support this suggestion. justify  your statement by reference to the results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (c) describe two precautions that should be taken in order to obtain reliable results in this type of  experiment. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 two students are investigating thermal energy transfer.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 5.1. iron block beaker a beaker b \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c\u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 5.1  beaker a contains hot water and beaker b contains cold water at room temperature.  (a) record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water and the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water as  shown on the thermometers in fig. 5.1.  \u03b8h =  ...  \u03b8c =  ...  [1]  (b) using metal tongs, one of the students places the iron block in the hot water in beaker a for  30 seconds.   he then removes the block and places it in the cold water in beaker b.   the other student then measures the temperature of the water in beaker b and finds that it  has risen to 35 \u00b0c. their teacher suggests that this value is lower than expected.",
            "15": "15 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015  (i) the students suggest that, immediately before the iron block was put into the cold water,  the temperature of the iron block was not the same as \u03b8h.    suggest one reason for this and a possible improvement to the experiment which could  make the temperature of the block nearer to \u03b8h. reason  ...   .. .  .. . improvement  ..   .. .  .. .  [2]   (ii) the students also think that, when the block cooled in the water, not all of the thermal  energy lost by the block raised the temperature of the water.    suggest one reason for this and a possible improvement to the experiment which would  reduce thermal losses. reason  ...   .. .  .. . improvement  ..   .. .  .. .  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/62/f/m/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib15 06_0625_11/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over       *6194823567* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2015     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  1 a geologist compares the volumes of three rocks, x, y and z. three measuring cylinders contain  different volumes of water. he places each rock into one of the measuring cylinders.    the diagrams show the measuring cylinders before and after the rocks are put in.    100 90 80706050403020 10100 90 80706050403020 10to find the volume of x before aftercm3cm3 100 90 80706050403020 10100 90 80706050403020 10to find the volume of y before aftercm3cm3 100 90 80706050403020 10100 90 80706050403020 10to find the volume of z before aftercm3cm3 xy z     which row shows the volumes of x, y and z in order, from largest to smallest?     largest  volume  smallest  volume  a x z y  b y x z  c y z x  d z y x     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15 [turn over  2 a car moves with constant speed and then constant acceleration.   which graph is the speed-time graph for the car?    speed timea 0 0speed timeb 0 0speed timec 0 0speed timed 0 0    3 a car travels 100  km. the journey takes two hours. the highest speed of the car is 80  km  / h, and  the lowest speed is 40  km  / h.    what is the average speed for the journey?  a 40  km  / h b 50  km  / h c 60  km  / h d 120  km  / h      4 diagram 1 shows a piece of foam rubber that contains many pockets of air. diagram 2 shows the  same piece of foam rubber after it has been compressed so that its volume decreases.    diagram 1 (before compression)diagram 2 (after compression)     what happens to the mass and to the weight of the foam rubber when it is compressed?    mass weight  a increases increases  b increases no change  c no change increases  d no change no change     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  5 a metal block has the dimensions shown. its mass is 1000  g.    2 cm10  cm5 cm     what is the density of the metal?  a \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 2  100010  5g / cm3  b \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 100010  5 2g / cm3  c \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 10  52  1000g / cm3  d \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d710  5 21000g / cm3     6 four objects are each acted on by only two forces, as shown.    which object is in equilibrium?    a b 3.0 n 2.0 n4.0 n 4.0 n1.0 n 2.0 n2.0 n 2.0 nc d     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15 [turn over  7 a student measures the length of a spring. she then hangs different weights from the spring. she  measures the length of the spring for each different weight.    the table shows her results.    weight  / n length  / mm  0 520  1.0 524  2.0 528  3.0 533  4.0 537  5.0 540    what is the extension of the spring when the weight hung from it is 3.0  n?  a 4 mm b 5 mm c 12  mm d 13  mm     8 which energy resource is used to generate electricity without using any moving parts?  a geothermal  b hydroelectric  c nuclear  d solar    9 a cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point x, without pedalling.    the cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point y.    x yhill     which energy changes have taken place between x and y?  a gravitational potential \u2192 kinetic \u2192 thermal (heat)  b gravitational potential \u2192 thermal (heat) \u2192 kinetic  c kinetic \u2192 gravitational potential \u2192 thermal (heat)  d kinetic \u2192 thermal (heat) \u2192 gravitational potential     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  10 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?    d cb amercury       11 a block with flat, rectangular sides rests on a table.    block table     the block is now turned so that it rests with its largest side on the table.        how has this change affected the force and the pre ssure exerted by the block on the table?     force pressure  a decreased decreased  b decreased unchanged  c unchanged decreased  d unchanged unchanged     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15 [turn over  12 two states of matter are described as follows.  in state 1, the molecules are very far apart. they move about very quickly at random in straight  lines until they hit something.  in state 2, the molecules are quite closely packed together. they move about at random. they do  not have fixed positions.   what is state 1 and what is state 2?   state 1 state 2  a gas liquid  b gas solid  c liquid gas  d solid liquid     13 the pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. the temperature of the gas in the  cylinder is then slowly increased. the volume of the cylinder does not change.   which graph shows the pressure of the gas during this process?   pressure timea 0 0pressure timeb pressure timec pressure timed 0 00 0 0 0    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  14 the thermometer in the diagram has no scale.    bulb stem     where must the bulb be placed so that 0  \u00b0c can be marked on the stem?  a in a freezer  b in pure boiling water  c in pure cold water  d in pure melting ice      15 a solid is heated from room temperature.    the graph shows how its temperature changes with time as it is heated constantly.    at which time has it just become completely  liquid?    0 0ab c droom temperaturetemperature time    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15 [turn over  16 thermal energy travels through space from the sun to the earth. space is a vacuum.    how is thermal energy transferred from the sun to the earth?  a by conduction only  b by convection only  c by radiation only  d by convection and radiation     17 a cupboard is placed in front of a heater. air can move through a gap under the cupboard.    wall floorheatercupboard air moves through gap     which row describes the temperature, and the direction of movement, of the air in the gap?     air temperature air direction  a cool away from the heater  b cool towards the heater  c warm away from the heater  d warm towards the heater      18 what is the number of wavefronts per second that pass a fixed point?  a the amplitude of the wave  b the frequency of the wave  c the speed of the wave  d the wavelength of the wave     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  19 the diagrams represent water waves in a tank.    which diagram represents a wave that changes speed?    d deeper watershallower watera barrierb barrierc barrier       20 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum, in order of increasing wavelength.    three types of radiation, p, q and r, are missing from the spectrum diagram.    \u03b3-rays x-rays p visible light q microwaves r    which types of electromagnetic radiation are represented by p, by q and by r?     p q r  a infra-red radio waves ultraviolet  b infra-red ultraviolet radio waves  c ultraviolet infra-red radio waves  d ultraviolet radio waves infra-red     21 radiation from the sun is dispersed by a prism. the prism does not absorb any of the radiation.  four identical thermometers are placed, one at each of the labelled positions.    in which position does the thermometer show the greatest rise in temperature?    a  b c dred light  violet light radiation from  the sun prism      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15 [turn over  22 a scientist tries to direct a ray of light in a glass block so that no light escapes from the top of the  block.     however, some light does escape.    x glass block  ray of  light top of block light escaping from top of block     the scientist changes angle x and stops the light escaping from the top.     which row in the table describes the change to  angle x and the name of the effect produced?     change to angle x name of effect produced  a decrease total internal reflection  b decrease total internal refraction  c increase total internal reflection  d increase total internal refraction      23 which row states two properties of sound waves?     can travel through type of wave  a a vacuum longitudinal  b a vacuum transverse  c water longitudinal   d water transverse    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  24 a man holding a starting pistol stands 640  m away from a spectator.    640  m spectator      the spectator hears the sound of the starting pistol 2.0  s after seeing the flash from the pistol.    using this information, what is the speed of sound in air?  a 160  m / s b 320  m / s c 640  m / s d 1280  m / s      25 a magnet is placed on a balance. the balance reading changes when an iron bar or another  magnet is held close to the first magnet.    the arrangements are shown in the diagrams.    g 100 diagram 1s n g diagram 2s n g diagram 3s ns niron bar     which row gives the balance reading in diagram 2 and in diagram 3?     balance reading in diagram 2   / g balance reading in diagram 3   / g  a less than 100 less than 100  b less than 100 more than 100  c more than 100 less than 100  d more than 100 more than 100     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15 [turn over  26 an electromagnet with a soft-iron core is connected to a battery and an open switch. the soft-iron  core is just above some small soft-iron nails.    electromagnet soft-iron core soft-iron nails     the switch is now closed, left closed for a few seconds, and then opened.    what do the soft-iron nails do as the switch is clos ed, and what do they do when the switch is  then opened?     as switch is closed as switch is opened  a nails jump up nails fall down  b nails jump up nails stay up  c nails stay down nails jump up  d nails stay down nails stay down      27 the diagram shows a piece of metal resistance wire.        which wire, made of the same metal, has a smaller resistance?  a a wire of the same length with a larger diameter   b a wire of the same length with a smaller diameter   c a wire of greater length with the same diameter  d a wire of greater length with a smaller diameter      28 what is the unit of electromotive force (e.m.f.)?  a ampere  b joule  c volt  d watt    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  29 the circuit diagram shows a 4.0  \u03c9 resistor and an 8.0  \u03c9 resistor connected to a 6.0  v battery.    4.0 \u03c9 8.0 \u03c96.0 v     what is the current in the battery?  a 0.50  a b 0.75  a c 1.5  a d 2.0  a      30 the diagram shows a circuit which includes an uncharged capacitor and a switch.    xy switch capacitor      the switch can be moved between position x and position y.    what happens to the capacitor when the switch is moved to position x, and what happens when  the switch is then moved to position y?     switch at x switch at y  a capacitor charges capacitor charges  b capacitor charges capacitor discharges c capacitor discharges capacitor charges  d capacitor discharges capacitor discharges   ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15 [turn over  31 the diagram shows a 3.0  \u03c9 resistor and a 6.0  \u03c9 resistor connected in parallel.    3.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9    what is the total resistance of this arrangement?  a less than 3.0  \u03c9  b 3.0  \u03c9  c 4.5  \u03c9  d more than 6.0  \u03c9      32 the diagram shows a 10  \u03c9 resistor and a 20  \u03c9 resistor connected in a potential divider circuit.    v10 \u03c9 20 \u03c912.0  v     what is the reading on the voltmeter?  a 4.0  v b 6.0  v c 8.0  v d 12.0  v     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  33 in the circuit shown, only one of the fuses has blown, but none of the lamps is lit.    which fuse has blown?    a bc dpower supply      34 which diagram shows the pattern of the magnetic field produced by a current-carrying solenoid?    abcd solenoid solenoid solenoid solenoid       35 what is an advantage of transmitting electricity at a high voltage?  a it is faster.  b it is safer.  c less energy is wasted.  d less equipment is needed.    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15 [turn over  36 a transformer has 1200 turns on its primary coil and 400 turns on its secondary coil. an output  voltage of 90  v is induced across the secondary coil.    primary coil 1200 turnssecondary coil 400 turns output voltage 90 v     what is the input voltage of the transformer?  a 30  v b 90  v c 270  v d 1200  v      37 the diagram shows a design for a cathode-ray tube. a tube with this design does not work.    power supply cold cathodeheatedanode vacuum     which change should be made so that the t ube works properly to produce cathode rays?  a heat the cathode instead of the anode.  b reverse the connections of the power supply.  c use air in the tube instead of a vacuum.  d use an a.c. power supply instead of a d.c. power supply.     38 which row gives the properties of the radiation from radioactive materials?   most penetrating radiation most highly ionising radiation  a \u03b1 \u03b2  b \u03b2 \u03b3  c \u03b3 \u03b1  d \u03b3 \u03b3    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  39 in a laboratory, a detector of ionising radiation records an average background count rate of  8 counts per second.    detector counts  / s    a radioactive source is now placed close to the det ector. the count rate on the detector rises to  200 counts per second.    radioactive sourcedetector counts  / s     what is the count rate due to radiation from the radioactive source?  a 25 counts  / s  b 192 counts  / s  c 200 counts  / s  d 208 counts  / s      40 c14 6 is a nuclide of carbon.    what is the composition of one nucleus of this nuclide?     neutrons protons  a   6   8  b   6 14  c   8   6  d 14   6     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  blank page ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/m/j/15  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib15 06_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over       *1041620377* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2015     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  1 the diagram shows four identical spheres placed between two wooden blocks on a ruler.    cmwooden blocksphere 0 5 10 15    what is the diameter of one sphere?  a 1.0  cm b 2.0  cm c 3.0  cm d 4.0  cm     2 what does the area under a speed-time graph represent?  a acceleration  b average speed  c deceleration  d distance travelled    3 a car travels 100  km. the journey takes two hours. the highest speed of the car is 80  km  / h, and  the lowest speed is 40  km  / h.    what is the average speed for the journey?  a 40  km  / h b 50  km  / h c 60  km  / h d 120  km  / h      4 the diagram shows a uniform beam being used as a balance. the beam is pivoted at its centre.    a 1.0  n weight is attached to one end of the beam. an empty pan weighing 0.2  n is attached to  the other end of the beam.    1.0 nbeam pan (0.2  n)pivot     how many 0.1  n weights must be placed on the pan in order to balance the beam?  a 5 b 8 c 10 d 12    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15 [turn over  5 a metal block has the dimensions shown. its mass is 1000  g.    2 cm10  cm5 cm     what is the density of the metal?  a \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 2  100010  5g / cm3  b \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 100010  5 2g / cm3  c \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 10  52  1000g / cm3  d \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d710  5 21000g / cm3     6 the diagrams show four identical objects. each object is acted on by only the three forces shown.    which object accelerates to the right, with the smallest  acceleration?    a 10 n20 n 30 nb 10 n 20 n30 n c 10 n 30 n20 nd 10 n 20 n 30 n    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  7 different weights are hung from a spring. the diagram shows the original length of the spring,  and the lengths when different weights are added.    20 n w15 cm 25 cm 35 cm     the extension of the spring is directly proportional to the weight hung from it.    what is the weight of w?  a 30  n b 35  n c 40  n d 45  n     8 which source of energy involves the splitting of heavy atoms?  a chemical energy  b geothermal energy  c hydroelectric energy  d nuclear energy    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15 [turn over  9 a cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point x, without pedalling.    the cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point y.    x yhill     which energy changes have taken place between x and y?  a gravitational potential \u2192 kinetic \u2192 thermal (heat)  b gravitational potential \u2192 thermal (heat) \u2192 kinetic  c kinetic \u2192 gravitational potential \u2192 thermal (heat)  d kinetic \u2192 thermal (heat) \u2192 gravitational potential     10 the diagram shows a stone suspended under the surface of a liquid from a string. the stone  experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.    liquidstring stone     what would increase the pressure on the stone?  a decreasing the surface area of the stone   b increasing the mass of the stone  c lowering the stone deeper into the liquid  d using a liquid with a lower density     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  11 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer, used to measure atmospheric pressure.    mercuryp l     atmospheric pressure decreases.    which row states what happens to the pressure at point p and what happens to the level l?     pressure at p level l  a decreases falls  b decreases rises  c stays the same falls  d stays the same rises      12 puddles of rain water remain after a storm. the water in the puddles gradually evaporates.    how does the evaporation affect the temperature of the water remaining in the puddle, and how  does it affect the average speed of the remaining water molecules in the puddle?     temperature of  water in puddle average speed of  water molecules  in puddle  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15 [turn over  13 the diagram represents moving gas molecules in a sealed container of fixed volume.    container gas molecule     the temperature of the gas is now increased.    what happens to the pressure of the gas, and w hat happens to the speed of the gas molecules?     pressure  of gas speed of  molecules  a increases increases  b increases unchanged  c unchanged increases  d unchanged unchanged     14 the thermometer in the diagram has no scale.    bulb stem     where must the bulb be placed so that 0  \u00b0c can be marked on the stem?  a in a freezer  b in pure boiling water  c in pure cold water  d in pure melting ice    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  15 two metal blocks x and y are at room temperature. each block is heated so that its temperature  rises by 10  \u00b0c.    the blocks are now allowed to cool back to room temperature.    block y has a greater thermal capacity than block x.    which block needs more thermal (heat) energy to heat it up by 10  \u00b0c and which block loses more  thermal (heat) energy as it cools back to room temperature?     more energy  heating cooling  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y     16 the diagram shows a vacuum flask used to keep liquid hot.    vacuum hot liquid     how does thermal energy pass through the vacuum?  a conduction only  b convection only  c radiation  d conduction and convection     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15 [turn over  17 a cupboard is placed in front of a heater. air can move through a gap under the cupboard.    wall floorheatercupboard air moves through gap     which row describes the temperature, and the direction of movement, of the air in the gap?     air temperature air direction  a cool away from the heater  b cool towards the heater  c warm away from the heater  d warm towards the heater     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  18 the diagrams show two water waves p and q that are travelling at the same speed on the  surface of a pond. the diagrams are to the same scale.    p q     which wave has the greater amplitude and which wave has the greater frequency?     greater amplitude greater frequency  a p p  b p q  c q p  d q q      19 the diagrams represent water waves in a tank.    which diagram represents a wave that changes speed?    d deeper watershallower watera barrierb barrierc barrier      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15 [turn over  20 an object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.    the diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the object.    objectconverging lens     an image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of the lens.    how does this image compare with the object?  a it is larger and inverted.  b it is larger and the same way up.  c it is smaller and inverted.  d it is smaller and the same way up.     21 radiation from the sun is dispersed by a prism. the prism does not absorb any of the radiation.  four identical thermometers are placed, one at each of the labelled positions.    in which position does the thermometer show the greatest rise in temperature?    a  b c dred light  violet light radiation from  the sun prism      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  22 a scientist tries to direct a ray of light in a glass block so that no light escapes from the top of the  block.     however, some light does escape.    x glass block  ray of  light top of block light escaping from top of block     the scientist changes angle x and stops the light escaping from the top.     which row in the table describes the change to  angle x and the name of the effect produced?     change to angle x name of effect produced  a decrease total internal reflection  b decrease total internal refraction  c increase total internal reflection  d increase total internal refraction      23 a quiet sound is produced by a loudspeaker. the loudness of the sound is increased.   which property of the sound wave is increased?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15 [turn over  24 a man holding a starting pistol stands 640  m away from a spectator.    640  m spectator      the spectator hears the sound of the starting pistol 2.0  s after seeing the flash from the pistol.    using this information, what is the speed of sound in air?  a 160  m / s b 320  m / s c 640  m / s d 1280  m / s      25 which group contains only non-ferrous metals?  a aluminium, brass, iron  b brass, copper, lead  c copper, iron, steel  d copper, lead, steel     26 an electromagnet with a soft-iron core is connected to a battery and an open switch. the soft-iron  core is just above some small soft-iron nails.    electromagnet soft-iron core soft-iron nails     the switch is now closed, left closed for a few seconds, and then opened.    what do the soft-iron nails do as the switch is clos ed, and what do they do when the switch is  then opened?     as switch is closed as switch is opened  a nails jump up nails fall down  b nails jump up nails stay up  c nails stay down nails jump up  d nails stay down nails stay down   ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  27 a student has wires of different lengths and different diameters. the wires are all made of the  same metal.    the student measures the resistance of one wire.    which wire has a greater resistance than the wire he has measured?  a a shorter wire with a larger diameter  b a shorter wire with the same diameter  c a wire of the same length with a larger diameter  d a wire of the same length with a smaller diameter      28 the circuit diagram shows a 4.0  \u03c9 resistor and an 8.0  \u03c9 resistor connected to a 6.0  v battery.    8.0 \u03c94.0 \u03c96.0 v     what is the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0  \u03c9 resistor?  a 0.5  v b 2.0  v c 4.0  v d 6.0  v     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15 [turn over  29 diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.    diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.    diagram 1 diagram 2strips of plastic     which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after  rubbing?     charge on strips force between strips  a opposite attraction  b opposite repulsion  c the same attraction  d the same repulsion     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  30 the diagram shows a circuit which includes an uncharged capacitor and a switch.    xy switch capacitor      the switch can be moved between position x and position y.    what happens to the capacitor when the switch is moved to position x, and what happens when  the switch is then moved to position y?     switch at x switch at y  a capacitor charges capacitor charges  b capacitor charges capacitor discharges c capacitor discharges capacitor charges  d capacitor discharges capacitor discharges    31 two 5.0  \u03c9 resistors are connected as shown in the diagram.    5.0 \u03c9 5.0 \u03c9    what is the total resistance of this combination?  a less than 5.0  \u03c9  b 5.0  \u03c9  c more than  5.0  \u03c9 but less than 10.0  \u03c9  d 10.0  \u03c9     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15 [turn over  32 the diagram shows a 10  \u03c9 resistor and a 20  \u03c9 resistor connected in a potential divider circuit.    v10 \u03c9 20 \u03c912.0  v     what is the reading on the voltmeter?  a 4.0  v b 6.0  v c 8.0  v d 12.0  v     33 in the circuit shown, only one of the fuses has blown, but none of the lamps is lit.    which fuse has blown?    a bc dpower supply     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  34 an e.m.f. is induced across a wire when it moves through the magnetic field between the poles of  a magnet.    which electrical device operates because of this effect?  a a battery  b a cathode-ray tube  c a generator  d a motor     35 the diagram shows a flat, rectangular coil placed between the poles of a magnet.    there is a current in the coil that makes it turn in the direction shown in the diagram.    n scoildirection of turning current    which change would make the coil turn in the opposite direction?  a decreasing the current in the coil  b increasing the number of turns on the coil   c reversing both the direction of the current in the coil and the poles of the magnet  d reversing only the direction of the current in the coil     36 a transformer has 1000 turns on its primary coil. an input voltage of 12  v is applied to the primary  coil, and an output voltage of 120  v is induced across the secondary coil.     primary coil 1000 turns secondary coil input voltage 12 voutput voltage 120  v     how many turns are on the secondary coil of the transformer?  a 100 b 120 c 1000 d 10  000     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  37 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    heated cathodecold anodepower supply vacuum     the tube is not working properly.    which change should be made so that the tube works properly to produce a continuous beam of  cathode rays?  a heat the anode instead of the cathode.  b reverse the connections of the power supply.  c use an a.c. power supply instead of a d.c. power supply.  d use air in the tube instead of a vacuum.      38 which statement about \u03b1-radiation is correct?  a it is a stream of fast-moving electrons.  b it is a form of electromagnetic radiation.  c it is more highly ionising than \u03b3-radiation.  d it is more penetrating than \u03b2-radiation.     39 a radioactive source produces a count rate on a detector of 1600 counts  / s.   after 32 hours the count rate has fallen to 100 counts  / s.   both count rates have been corrected for background radiation.   what is the half-life of the source?  a 2.0 hours b 6.4 hours c 8.0 hours d 16 hours      40 a nuclide has the symbol ne22 10 .    what is the proton number of a nucleus of this nuclide?  a 10 b 12 c 22 d 32   ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/m/j/15  blank page   "
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib15 06_0625_13/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over       *0951356906* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2015     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  1 a cook wants to prepare some food to be cooked by 1.15  p.m. he uses an oven with an  automatic timer that can be set to switch on and off at certain times. the oven needs to be  switched on for 2 hours 10 minutes.    at which time does the oven need to switch on?  a 11.05  a.m. b 11.25  a.m. c 3.05  p.m. d 3.25  p.m.     2 the speed-time graph shows the motion of a car.    0 0speed timepqr     which row describes the motion?     between p and q between q and r  a accelerating moving at constant speed  b accelerating not moving  c moving at constant speed decelerating  d moving at constant speed not moving    3 a car travels 100  km. the journey takes two hours. the highest speed of the car is 80  km  / h, and  the lowest speed is 40  km  / h.    what is the average speed for the journey?  a 40  km  / h b 50  km  / h c 60  km  / h d 120  km  / h     4 weight is an example of which quantity?  a acceleration  b force  c mass  d pressure    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15 [turn over  5 a metal block has the dimensions shown. its mass is 1000  g.    2 cm10  cm5 cm     what is the density of the metal?  a \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 2  100010  5g / cm3  b \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 100010  5 2g / cm3  c \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d7 10  52  1000g / cm3  d \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb \u00d7\u00d710  5 21000g / cm3     6 a car travels along a horizontal road at a constant speed. three horizontal forces act on the car.  the diagram shows two of these three forces.    air resistance 300  nforce from engine 1500  ndirection of motion forwards     what is the size and the direction of the third horizontal force acting on the car?  a 1200  n backwards  b 1200  n forwards  c 1800  n backwards  d 1800  n forwards    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  7 the extension-load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretched length of the spring is 17.0  cm.    3 210 01234 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object is hung from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 1.4  n b 1.6  n c 2.6  n d 3.0  n     8 to calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the force must be known.     what else needs to be known to calculate the power?     the distance the force   moves the object the time for which the   force acts on the object   a \u0013 \u0013 key  b \u0013 \u0017 \u0013= needed  c \u0017 \u0013 \u0017= not needed  d \u0017 \u0017     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15 [turn over  9 a cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point x, without pedalling.    the cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point y.    x yhill     which energy changes have taken place between x and y?  a gravitational potential \u2192 kinetic \u2192 thermal (heat)  b gravitational potential \u2192 thermal (heat) \u2192 kinetic  c kinetic \u2192 gravitational potential \u2192 thermal (heat)  d kinetic \u2192 thermal (heat) \u2192 gravitational potential     10 the diagram shows a manometer with one side connected to a gas cylinder and the other side  open to the atmosphere.    gas cylinder liquid     which conclusion can be made using only the information from liquid levels in the manometer?  a the density of the gas is less than the density of air.  b the density of the gas is greater than the density of air.  c the pressure of the gas is less than atmospheric pressure.  d the pressure of the gas is greater than atmospheric pressure.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  11 the diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. the dimensions of the block are shown.    bench80 cm20 cm40 cm prq     on which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?  a p  b q  c r  d any of p, q or r     12 small smoke particles suspended in air are viewed through a microscope.    the smoke particles move randomly.    what does this show?  a the air consists of fast-moving molecules.  b the pressure of the air is increasing.  c there are convection currents in the air.  d the temperature of the air is increasing.    13 molecules escape from a liquid during evaporation. the temperature of the remaining liquid  changes.  which molecules escape and how does the temperature change?   molecules escaping temperature of  remaining liquid  a least energetic decreases  b least energetic increases  c most energetic decreases  d most energetic increases    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15 [turn over  14 the thermometer in the diagram has no scale.    bulb stem     where must the bulb be placed so that 0  \u00b0c can be marked on the stem?  a in a freezer  b in pure boiling water  c in pure cold water  d in pure melting ice      15 a solid is heated from room temperature. the graph shows how its temperature changes with  time as it is heated constantly.    timetemperature 00room temperaturepq rs t     between which labelled points on the graph is the substance partly solid and partly liquid?  a between p and q  b between q and r  c between r and s  d between s and t     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  16 one method of heat transfer involves the energy travelling at a much greater speed than in other  methods.   what is the name of this method?  a conduction  b convection  c evaporation  d radiation     17 a cupboard is placed in front of a heater. air can move through a gap under the cupboard.    wall floorheatercupboard air moves through gap     which row describes the temperature, and the direction of movement, of the air in the gap?     air temperature air direction  a cool away from the heater  b cool towards the heater  c warm away from the heater  d warm towards the heater      18 what is the frequency of a wave?  a the distance that a wavefront travels every second  b the distance from one wavefront to the next  c the number of wavefronts produced per second  d the time taken for a wavefront to pass a certain point    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15 [turn over  19 the diagrams represent water waves in a tank.    which diagram represents a wave that changes speed?    d deeper watershallower watera barrierb barrierc barrier       20 which diagram shows how the light from a candle is reflected by a mirror, and shows the position  of the image formed?    eye candleimage of candlea  eyecandleeye candleimage of candleb  image of candlec d  eyecandle image of candlemirror  mirror mirror  mirror       ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  21 radiation from the sun is dispersed by a prism. the prism does not absorb any of the radiation.  four identical thermometers are placed, one at each of the labelled positions.    in which position does the thermometer show the greatest rise in temperature?    a  b c dred light  violet light radiation from  the sun prism      22 a scientist tries to direct a ray of light in a glass block so that no light escapes from the top of the  block.     however, some light does escape.    x glass block  ray of  light top of block light escaping from top of block     the scientist changes angle x and stops the light escaping from the top.     which row in the table describes the change to  angle x and the name of the effect produced?     change to angle x name of effect produced  a decrease total internal reflection  b decrease total internal refraction  c increase total internal reflection  d increase total internal refraction    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15 [turn over  23 the frequency of a musical note is increased.    a student hearing the sound detects an increase in which property?  a loudness of the sound  b pitch of the sound  c speed of the sound wave  d wavelength of the sound wave     24 a man holding a starting pistol stands 640  m away from a spectator.    640  m spectator      the spectator hears the sound of the starting pistol 2.0  s after seeing the flash from the pistol.    using this information, what is the speed of sound in air?  a 160  m / s b 320  m / s c 640  m / s d 1280  m / s     25 which action will demagnetise a magnetised piece of steel?  a cool it in a freezer for several hours.  b hit it repeatedly with a hammer.  c put it in a coil carrying a direct current (d.c.).  d put it near an unmagnetised piece of iron.    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  26 an electromagnet with a soft-iron core is connected to a battery and an open switch. the soft-iron  core is just above some small soft-iron nails.    electromagnet soft-iron core soft-iron nails     the switch is now closed, left closed for a few seconds, and then opened.    what do the soft-iron nails do as the switch is clos ed, and what do they do when the switch is  then opened?     as switch is closed as switch is opened  a nails jump up nails fall down  b nails jump up nails stay up  c nails stay down nails jump up  d nails stay down nails stay down      27 what is the unit of electromotive force (e.m.f.)?  a ampere  b newton  c ohm  d volt    28 which sample of copper wire has the greatest electrical resistance?   length of wire  / m diameter of wire  / mm  a 1.0 2.0  b 1.0 4.0  c 10 2.0  d 10 4.0    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15 [turn over  29 the circuit diagram shows a 4.0  \u03c9 resistor and an 8.0  \u03c9 resistor connected to a 6.0  v battery.    8.0 \u03c94.0 \u03c96.0 v     what is the current in the 8.0  \u03c9 resistor?  a 0 a b 0.50  a c 0.75  a d 1.0  a      30 the diagram shows a circuit which includes an uncharged capacitor and a switch.    xy switch capacitor      the switch can be moved between position x and position y.    what happens to the capacitor when the switch is moved to position x, and what happens when the switch is then moved to position y?     switch at x switch at y  a capacitor charges capacitor charges  b capacitor charges capacitor discharges c capacitor discharges capacitor charges  d capacitor discharges capacitor discharges    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  31 which component is represented by this circuit symbol?        a a bell  b a fuse  c a relay  d a transformer      32 the diagram shows a 10  \u03c9 resistor and a 20  \u03c9 resistor connected in a potential divider circuit.    v10 \u03c9 20 \u03c912.0  v     what is the reading on the voltmeter?  a 4.0  v b 6.0  v c 8.0  v d 12.0  v     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15 [turn over  33 in the circuit shown, only one of the fuses has blown, but none of the lamps is lit.    which fuse has blown?    a bc dpower supply      34 a student investigates the force on a bar magnet placed near a current-carrying coil. she carries  out three different experiments.    ns magnet attracted to coil experiment 1ns experiment 2n s experiment 3    in experiment 1, the magnet is attracted to the coil.    which row shows what happens in the other two experiments?     experiment 2 experiment 3  a magnet attracted magnet attracted  b magnet attracted magnet repelled  c magnet repelled magnet attracted  d magnet repelled magnet repelled    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  35 which diagram represents the voltage output of a simple a.c. generator?    0voltage timea 0voltage timeb 0voltage timec 0voltage timed       36 a transformer has 400 turns on its secondary coil. an input voltage of 12  v is applied to the  primary coil, and an output voltage of 120  v is induced across the secondary coil.    primary coil secondary coil 400 turns input voltage 12 voutput voltage 120  v     how many turns are on the primary coil of the transformer?  a 12 b 40 c 400 d 4000     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15 [turn over  37 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    anode cathodecathode-rays     which electrode should be heated, and which electrode should be positive?     heated electrode positive electrode  a anode anode  b anode cathode  c cathode anode  d cathode cathode      38 \u03b1, \u03b2 and \u03b3-radiations are emitted by radioactive substances.    which statement is correct?  a \u03b1-radiation consists of charged particles and is the most highly ionising radiation.  b \u03b2-radiation consists of charged particles and is the most penetrating radiation.  c \u03b2-radiation consists of uncharged particles and is the least highly ionising radiation.  d \u03b3-radiation consists of uncharged particles and is the least penetrating radiation.     39 the nucleus of an americium atom contains 146 neutrons and 95 protons. it decays by emitting  an \u03b1-particle.    how many neutrons and how many protons remain in the nucleus when this form of americium  decays?   number of neutrons  remaining number of protons  remaining  a 142 93  b 142 95  c 144 93  d 144 95   ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  40 which statement is correct for the nucleus of any atom?  a the nucleus contains electrons, neutrons and protons.  b the nucleus contains the same number of protons as neutrons.  c the nucleus has a total charge of zero.  d the nucleus is very small compared with the size of the atom.     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  blank page ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/m/j/15  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_14.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib15 06_0625_14/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over       *3647450 832* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/14     paper 1  multiple choice  may/june 2015     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  1 the diagram shows a measuring instrument.        which quantity is this instrument used to measure?  a area  b density  c mass  d volume     2 the diagram shows the distance-time graph of an object.    00distance time    which statement describes the object?  a it is accelerating.  b it is moving at a constant speed.  c it is slowing down.  d it is stationary.    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15 [turn over  3 a tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40  s later hears the echo from a wall.        the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    how far away is the player from the wall?  a 66  m b 132  m c 264  m d 825  m     4 weight is an example of which quantity?  a acceleration  b force  c mass  d pressure    5 which substance in the table has the lowest density?     substance mass  / g volume  / cm3  a nylon 1.2 1.0  b cotton 1.5 1.0  c olive oil 1.8 2.0  d water 2.0 2.0    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  6 a car travels along a horizontal road at a constant speed. three horizontal forces act on the car.  the diagram shows two of these three forces.    air resistance 300  nforce from engine 1500  ndirection of motion forwards     what is the size and the direction of the third horizontal force acting on the car?  a 1200  n backwards  b 1200  n forwards  c 1800  n backwards  d 1800  n forwards     7 the extension-load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretched length of the spring is 17.0  cm.    3 210 01234 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object is hung from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 1.4  n b 1.6  n c 2.6  n d 3.0  n     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15 [turn over  8 which form of energy is used to generate electrical energy in a tidal power station?  a chemical energy  b gravitational energy  c internal energy (thermal energy)  d nuclear energy      9 four different model steam engines each lift a 1.0  kg object from the same  laboratory floor to the  same  laboratory bench. each engine takes a different time to lift the object.    how does the most powerful engine compare with the other engines?     speed of lifting  object onto bench useful work done  a faster more than other engines  b faster same as other engines  c slower less than other engines  d slower same as other engines     10 which statement is explained by reference to pressure?  a objects with greater mass have greater weight.  b one kilogram of water occupies more volume than one kilogram of lead.  c spikes on running-shoes sink into the ground.  d water cooled to a low enough temperature turns to ice.    11 small smoke particles suspended in air are viewed through a microscope.    the smoke particles move randomly.    what does this show?  a the air consists of fast-moving molecules.  b the pressure of the air is increasing.  c there are convection currents in the air.  d the temperature of the air is increasing.    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  12 the gas in a container is heated but is kept at constant volume.    why does the gas pressure increase?  a the molecules expand.  b the molecules increase in mass.  c the molecules move further apart.  d the molecules move more rapidly.     13 which row is correct for the evaporation of a liquid?     the particles escaping  from the liquid are on  average the average kinetic  energy of particles  remaining in the liquid  a the least energetic decreases  b the least energetic increases  c the most energetic decreases  d the most energetic increases     14 a long thin bar of copper is heated evenly along its length.    copper ba r heat    what happens to the bar?  a it becomes less heavy.  b it becomes longer.  c it becomes shorter.  d it bends at the ends.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15 [turn over  15 a solid is heated from room temperature. the graph shows how its temperature changes with  time as it is heated constantly.    timetemperature 00room temperaturepq rs t     between which labelled points on the graph is the substance partly solid and partly liquid?  a between p and q  b between q and r  c between r and s  d between s and t      16 one method of heat transfer involves the energy travelling at a much greater speed than in other  methods.   what is the name of this method?  a conduction  b convection  c evaporation  d radiation    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  17 the diagram shows four markings on a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    \u201310  \u00b0c0 \u00b0c100  \u00b0c110  \u00b0c     which temperatures are the upper and lower fixed points?     upper fixed  point  / \u00b0c lower fixed  point  / \u00b0c  a 110 0  b 110 \u201310  c 100 0  d 100 \u201310     18 the diagram shows a block of ice placed in a warm room.    at which point is the temperature the lowest ?    tableclamp iceb c da     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15 [turn over  19 the thermal capacity of solid y is greater than that of solid z.    what is a consequence of this?  a solid y needs less thermal energy to melt it than solid z.  b solid y needs less thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1  \u00b0c than solid z.  c solid y needs more thermal energy to melt it than solid z.  d solid y needs more thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1  \u00b0c than solid z.      20 the diagram shows a water wave in a ripple tank.    which line represents a wavefront?    cdab      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  21 which diagram shows how the light from a candle is reflected by a mirror, and shows the position  of the image formed?    eye candleimage of candlea  eyecandleeye candleimage of candleb  image of candlec d  eyecandle image of candlemirror  mirror mirror  mirror       ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15 [turn over  22 the diagram shows a ray of white light incident on a triangular glass prism.    ray of white lightglass prism     the ray enters the prism.    which row correctly states if the light is refracted, and if the light is dispersed?     refracted dispersed  a no no  b no yes  c yes no  d yes yes      23 a parallel beam of light falls on a converging lens.    which diagram shows what happens to the beam of light?    a b c d      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  24 in the experiment shown, the bell is heard ringing.  the air is gradually pumped out of the jar. no  change is made to the ringing bell.    air pump rubber bands bell glass jar     after a few minutes the bell can no longer be heard.    why is this?  a the amplitude of vibration of the bell decreases.  b the frequency of vibration of the bell increases.  c the sound waves from the bell become transverse.  d the sound waves need a medium to travel through.      25 what can be heard by the human ear?  a a whistle emitting a wave of frequency 50  khz  b a bat emitting a wave of frequency 30  khz  c an insect emitting a wave of frequency 300  hz  d a vibrating spring emitting a wave of frequency 5  hz    26 which action will demagnetise a magnetised piece of steel?  a cool it in a freezer for several hours.  b hit it repeatedly with a hammer.  c put it in a coil carrying a direct current (d.c.).  d put it near an unmagnetised piece of iron.    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15 [turn over  27 which row gives the unit for electromotive force (e.m.f.) and the unit for potential difference  (p.d.)?     electromotive  force potential  difference  a newton joule  b newton volt  c volt joule  d volt volt     28 a student investigates the force on a bar magnet placed near a current-carrying coil. she carries  out three different experiments.    ns magnet attracted to coil experiment 1ns experiment 2n s experiment 3    in experiment 1, the magnet is attracted to the coil.    which row shows what happens in the other two experiments?     experiment 2 experiment 3  a magnet attracted magnet attracted  b magnet attracted magnet repelled  c magnet repelled magnet attracted  d magnet repelled magnet repelled    29 which sample of copper wire has the greatest electrical resistance?   length of wire  / m diameter of wire  / mm  a 1.0 2.0  b 1.0 4.0  c 10 2.0  d 10 4.0    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  30 a student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of the two identical resistors.    a v    the voltmeter reading is 2.2  v and the ammeter reading is 0.25  a.    what is the resistance of each resistor?  a 0.275  \u03c9 b 0.55  \u03c9 c 4.4  \u03c9 d 8.8  \u03c9     31 which component is represented by this circuit symbol?        a a bell  b a fuse  c a relay  d a transformer      32 a student sets up this circuit.        what is the purpose of the circuit?  a to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required  b to amplify the sound of a voice  c to light a lamp in the dark  d to sound a bell when the temperature rises   ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15 [turn over  33 three cores of different metals, p, q and r, are placed inside identical coils of wire.    at least one of the metals is non-ferrous.    the cores are held above some iron nails.    the three diagrams below show what happens when there is a current in the coils.      pcoil core iron nailsq r+ \u2013+ \u2013+ \u2013       the three diagrams below show what happens when the current is then switched off.     p q r+ \u2013+ \u2013+ \u2013      which row identifies whether the core metals are ferrous or non-ferrous?     ferrous non-ferrous  a p q and r  b p and q r  c q and r p  d r p and q    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  34 which diagram represents the voltage output of a simple a.c. generator?    0voltage timea 0voltage timeb 0voltage timec 0voltage timed       35 in an electrical circuit, what is the purpose of a fuse?  a to connect the metal case of an appliance to the earth  b to cut off the electrical supply if the current is too large  c to keep an electrical appliance dry in damp conditions  d to maintain a steady voltage as the current varies    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.    anode cathodecathode-rays     which electrode should be heated, and which electrode should be positive?     heated electrode positive electrode  a anode anode  b anode cathode  c cathode anode  d cathode cathode      37 which particles are emitted during thermionic emission?  a atoms  b electrons  c neutrons  d protons     38 a uranium  u238 92 nucleus emits an \u03b1-particle.    what are the new nucleon and proton numbers?     nucleon number proton number  a 238 88  b 236 90  c 234 92  d 234 90     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  39 which row shows the nature and the penetrating ability of \u03b2-particles?     nature most are stopped by  a electron a few mm of aluminium  b electron a thin sheet of paper  c helium nucleus a few mm of aluminium  d helium nucleus a thin sheet of paper     40 a radioactive isotope is placed near a detector. the readings on the detector are corrected for  background radiation and recorded every hour.    the table shows the corrected readings.    time  / hours 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0  count rate  / counts per second 500 375 280 210 160    what is the half-life of the isotope?  a between 0 and 1 hour  b between 1 hour and 2 hours  c between 2 hours and 3 hours  d between 3 hours and 4 hours     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  blank page ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/14/m/j/15  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 90323/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *0930793009* physics  0625/21 paper 2 core may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 a student has a stack of 20 identical coins.  fig. 1.1 shows the student measuring the height of the stack using a ruler. 15cm 10 5 0eye stack of 20 coins fig. 1.1  (a) with his eye at the position shown, the student\u2019s measurement of the height of the stack is  6.8 cm.   suggest two reasons why the student\u2019s measurement is inaccurate. 1.  ... ...  .. . 2.  ... ...  .. . [2]  (b) another student correctly determines the height of the stack as 7.7 cm.   calculate the average thickness of one coin.  thickness =    cm  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the mass of a single coin is 12 g.   state this mass in kg.  mass =  .  kg  [1] [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 (a) a car is travelling at a constant speed of 80 km / h.   calculate the distance travelled by the car in half an hour.  distance =   km  [1]  (b) the car in fig. 2.1 is travelling along a road on which there is a speed detector.   the speed detector consists of two parallel strips attached to the road and connected to a  timer. speed detector strips fig. 2.1   the speed detector strips are 0.50 m apart. the time interval between the car hitting the first  strip and the second strip is 0.040 s.   calculate the average speed of the car between the strips.  speed =  ... m / s  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) (i) a car is travelling at a speed of 15 m / s. the driver applies the brakes and brings the car  to a stop.    fig. 2.2 represents the last part of the journey. 00246810121416 1 2 3 4 5 6 time  / sspeed m / s 7 8 9 10 11 12 fig. 2.2    calculate the distance travelled by the car as it slows down.  distance =  ..  m  [2]   (ii) on another occasion, the car is travelling at the same speed of 15 m / s when the driver  sees a hazard ahead. she uses emergency braking to stop the car in 2.0 seconds.    on fig. 2.2, draw the speed-time graph for the emergency stop. [1] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 a student is sitting on a chair as shown in fig. 3.1. fig. 3.1  (a) (i) estimate the mass of the student. .. [1]   (ii) which statement is correct for the mass of the chair on the moon and the mass of the  chair on the earth?    tick the box next to the correct statement.     the mass of the chair is greater on the moon.     the mass of the chair is less on the moon but not zero.     the mass of the chair is the same on the moon.     the mass of the chair is zero on the moon. [1]  (b) the student tips his chair back to the position shown in fig. 3.2. centre of mass of student and chair fig. 3.2   (i) state and explain how the pressure exerted by the chair on the floor in fig. 3.2 compares  with the pressure exerted by the chair in fig. 3.1. statement   .. explanation  .. ..  .. .  .. . [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) explain why the chair will topple over backwards. y ou may draw on fig. 3.2 as part of  your answer.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "9": "9 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over4 fig. 4.1 shows a battery-operated alarm clock. 1211 10 9 8 7654321 fig. 4.1  use words from the box to complete the sentences. chemical        electrical        kinetic        light        sound        thermal  the battery stores .. energy. when the battery is first connected, electrical  energy is transferred to .. energy of the clock\u2019s hands. some of the electrical  energy is transferred to the surroundings as .. energy. when the alarm bell  rings, electrical energy is transferred to .. energy. [4] [total: 4]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 (a) fig. 5.1 shows four traces produced by an oscilloscope for different sounds. for each trace  the same settings of the oscilloscope were used. a b c d fig. 5.1   (i) in the box, write the letter a, b, c or d of the trace showing the sound with the highest  pitch. [1]   (ii) complete the statement using the letters of the traces.    the two traces that have the same amplitude are .  and  . . [1]  (b) students are provided with a 100 m tape measure and stopwatches. the teacher has a  starting pistol.   describe an experiment that they can carry out to determine the speed of sound in air.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [5] [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over6 a round-bottomed flask is connected to a mercury manometer. the air inside the flask is warm.  the arrangement is shown in fig. 6.1. 500mm 400 300 200 100 0airmercury fig. 6.1  (a) (i) state the scale reading for the left-hand column.  left-hand column =  .  mm    state the scale reading for the right-hand column.  right-hand column =  .  mm [1]   (ii) atmospheric pressure is equal to 760 mm of mercury.    calculate the pressure of the air inside the flask.  pressure =  .  mm of mercury  [3]  (b) the air inside the flask cools.   (i) state what happens to the pressure of the air inside the flask as the air cools.  ..  [1]   (ii) in terms of the air molecules, state two ways in which the air changes as it cools.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 fig. 7.1 shows a domestic hot water system. heatermetal storage tankwater jacket from water supplyto taps fig. 7.1  (a) the heater is placed at the bottom of the storage tank.   (i) name the process by which water in contact with the heater becomes hot.  ..  [1]   (ii) 1.   explain how the water at the top of the storage tank becomes hot. include the word  density  in your answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]    2. state the name given to this process.  ..  [1]  (b) hot water storage tanks are often covered in a material such as polystyrene or a \u2018jacket\u2019 made  from a woollen material.   (i) state the purpose of this covering.  ..  [1]   (ii) suggest two reasons why the use of such a material is important. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2] [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over8 (a) a ray of red light passes through a glass block, as shown in fig. 8.1. air glass ray of red light fig. 8.1   (i) on fig. 8.1, clearly label the angle of refraction. [1]   (ii) state the name given to the dashed line drawn at 90\u00b0 to the boundary.  ..  [1]  (b) a roadside reflector is made of plastic. it reflects the light from car headlamps.   fig. 8.2 shows part of the path of a ray of light through the reflector. a 45\u00b0 45\u00b0roadside reflector fig. 8.2   the critical angle for the plastic is less than 45\u00b0.   (i) on fig. 8.2, complete the path of the ray of light. [1]   (ii) state the term used to describe this type of reflection.  ..  [1]   (iii) explain why the ray turns though 90\u00b0 at a.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 in cold weather, houses are often heated with an electrical heater.  fig. 9.1 shows a simplified electrical circuit for a household heater. ma b c fig. 9.1  (a) what does the symbol    represent?  ..  [1]  (b) the heater has three identical heating elements, a fan driven by a motor and a lamp.   name the components that are working when switch a only is closed.  ..  [1]  (c) the heater has two switches, b and c, to give high, medium and low heat settings.   identify how each heat setting is obtained. complete the table by adding ticks to represent a  closed switch. heater settings switch b switch c high medium low [3]  (d) write down the equation that relates resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.  ..  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (e) the current in one of the heating elements is 5.0 a. the resistance of the heating element  is 50 \u03c9.   calculate the p.d. across the heating element. include the appropriate unit.  p.d. =  ... [2]  (f)  explain how the component with the symbol    protects the circuit.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 (a) the box below contains the names of some metals. copper         gold         iron         lead         silver         steel   circle the metals which may be attracted to a magnet. [2]  (b) a student has 3 metal bars which all look the same. two of the metal bars are magnets and  one is not.   explain how the student can identify the two magnets without using any other equipment.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (c) from the metals given in (a), state the name of the metal that can be used to make a  permanent magnet.  ..  [1]  (d) fig. 10.1 shows a vertical wire passing through a horizontal piece of card.  wire fig. 10.1   there is a direct current (d.c.) in the wire. the current produces a magnetic field around the  wire.   (i) name a piece of equipment that can be used to investigate the magnetic field produced  by the current-carrying wire.  ..  [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) fig. 10.2 shows the wire and the card viewed from above. vertical wire fig. 10.2    on fig. 10.2, carefully draw two complete field lines produced by the current-carrying  wire. [1] [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 fig. 11.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum. visible lightradio wavesx-raysultra- violeta-rays fig. 11.1  (a) identify one feature that is the same for all radiations that form the electromagnetic spectrum.  .. .  ..  [1]  (b) fill in the blank spaces between visible light and radio waves by adding the names of the  radiations. [2]  (c) state the radiation that has the shortest wavelength.  ..  [1]  (d) (i) describe a common use of x-rays.  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) state a precaution taken by those who work with x-rays.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201512 some water is contaminated with a radioactive element.  in a laboratory, the count rate from a sample of the contaminated water is measured every 10 days.  the results are shown in the table. time / days    0   10   20   30  40  50  60  70 count rate counts / s3250 2300 1650 1200 980 550 400 320  (a) on fig. 12.1, complete the graph by plotting the first three points and drawing the best-fit  curve. [2] 00500100015002000250030003500 10 20 30 40 time  / dayscount-rate counts  / s 50 60 70 80 fig. 12.1  (b) one of the readings is incorrect due to an error.   circle this point on the graph and estimate the correct count rate for this day.    count rate =  ... [2]  (c) use the graph to determine the half-life of the radioactive element. ignore background  radiation.  half-life =  ... [3] [total: 7]",
            "20": "20 0625/21/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nh/sw) 90331/4 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over *2843429858* physics  0625/22 paper 2 core may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 fig. 1.1 shows a distance-time graph for a falling object. 00.20.40.60.81.01.21.41.61.82.0 distance fallen / m 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 time  / s0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 fig. 1.1  (a) use this graph to find the time it takes the object to fall from 0.60 m to 1.60 m.  time =  ... s [2]  (b) state and explain what the graph shows about the motion of the falling object.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 4]",
            "3": "3 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 fig. 2.1 shows an irregularly shaped piece of card. fig. 2.1  a student is asked to find the centre of mass of the card. the student is provided with a clamp and  stand, a small mass attached to a thin string and a long pin.  (a) describe the procedure for finding the centre of mass of the card. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[ 3]  (b) what simple test can be carried out to confirm that the centre of mass has been found?  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 4]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 a student has a beaker of liquid as shown in fig. 3.1. beaker liquid fig. 3.1  (a) the student makes some measurements. his results are shown in the table. mass of beaker and liquid 280 g mass of empty beaker 120 g volume of liquid 200 cm3   (i) calculate the mass of the liquid in the beaker.  mass of liquid =  ... g [1]   (ii) calculate the density of the liquid.  density =  ... g / cm3 [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the student warms the beaker and liquid on an electric heater as shown in fig. 3.2. electric heater fig. 3.2   (i) state the name of the process by which thermal energy is transferred through the glass  of the beaker.  .. .[1]   (ii) explain how thermal energy is transferred throughout the liquid by convection.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (c) after heating for 20 minutes, the student re-weighs the beaker and liquid. he finds that the  mass of the beaker and liquid has decreased to 260 g.   (i) state the name of the process that causes this decrease in mass.  .. .[1]   (ii) in terms of molecules, explain how this process occurs.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 at a party, three balloons are filled with a gas less dense than air. the balloons are tied to an  empty drink can. the can floats, without moving, in the air above a table, as shown in fig. 4.1. top of tableempty drink canx y               fig. 4.1                  fig. 4.2  (a) fig. 4.2 represents the vertical forces acting on the can as it floats in the air.   state the name given to the downward force labelled y .  .. .[1]  (b) in terms of the vertical forces acting on the can, explain why the can does not rise or fall.  .. .  .. .[2]  (c) a window is opened, causing a draught of air into the room. the window is to the left of the  balloons and can, and at the same height.   on fig. 4.1, draw an arrow indicating the direction of the resultant force on the can. [1]  (d) one of the balloons suddenly bursts.   state and explain what happens to the can.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 a footballer kicks a football and it bounces to another player.  fig. 5.1 shows part of the path taken by the ball. fig. 5.1  (a) use words from the box to complete the sentences below. each word may be used once,  more than once, or not at all. direction  downwards  forwards  mass  shape  slower  upwards    (i) each time the football moves ., it gains gravitational potential  energy. [1]   (ii) each time the football hits the ground, it changes ., and this results  in energy stored as strain energy (elastic potential energy). [1]  (b) each time the football hits the ground, energy is transferred away from the ball.   (i) state how you can tell this from the diagram.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) state what happens to the energy that is transferred away from the ball.  .. .[1]  [total: 4]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 fig. 6.1 shows a hydroelectric power station. reservoir damhydroelectric power station outflow of waterpipes fig. 6.1  (a) these are some of the stages explaining how the power station works. they are not in the  correct order.   a the electromagnets turn inside a large coil.   b water flows down pipes from the reservoir to the turbine.   c inside the generator, the spinning shaft turns electromagnets.   d the falling water keeps the turbine spinning.   use the letters a, b, c and d to complete the flow chart to explain how the power station  works. rainwater flows off the hills into the reservoir behind the dam. the turbine transfers energy by a spinning shaft to a generator. electricity is generated.  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) hydroelectric power is described as a renewable source of energy.   explain what is meant by the term renewable.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) using a renewable source of energy is one advantage of hydroelectric power compared with  other energy sources.   (i) state two other advantages of hydroelectric power. 1.   2.    [2]   (ii) state one disadvantage of hydroelectric power.  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 fig. 7.1 shows a car and a snow tractor. fig. 7.1  the car and the snow tractor have the same weight.  (a) explain why the snow tractor can travel across soft snow without sinking, but the car cannot.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (b) the car driver checks his tyre pressure in a warm garage. the pressure of the air inside the  tyre when it is warm is 24.0 n / cm2.   the car is driven outside and left in the snow.  (i) suggest a value for the pressure of the air inside the tyre when it is cold.  pressure =  .. n / cm 2 [1]   (ii) in terms of the air molecules inside the tyre, explain the change in the pressure of the air.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over8 (a) a student arranges two 45\u00b0 prisms as shown in fig. 8.1. he aims a ray of red light to hit the  surface of one of the prisms at 90\u00b0. 45\u00b0 45\u00b045\u00b0 45\u00b0ray of red light fig. 8.1   the critical angle for the glass is 42 \u00b0.   on fig. 8.1, draw the path of the light through the prisms. [4]  (b) visible light is one region of the electromagnetic spectrum, as represented in fig. 8.2. radio  wavesmicrowavesinfra-red  wavesvisible lightultraviolet waves long wavelength                             short wavelength fig. 8.2   (i) two regions of the electromagnetic spectrum are missing from fig. 8.2.    state the name of the missing region with the longer wavelength.  .. .[1]   (ii) an infra-red sensor is fitted into a room as part of an intruder alarm system.    explain how the sensor detects a person in the room.  .. .  .. .[2]   (iii) state two properties that are the same for all electromagnetic waves. 1.   2.    [2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 a student has two powerful bar magnets and an iron rod.  the student uses the n pole of one magnet and the s pole of the other magnet. starting from the  centre of the iron rod he rubs the poles against the rod out to its ends. he repeats this many times.  fig. 9.1 shows how the student uses the two magnets to make the iron rod into a magnet. n sns iron rod fig. 9.1  (a) label the magnetic poles created on the iron rod. [1]  (b) describe how to test whether the iron rod has become a magnet.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) suggest a material that could be used to make a permanent magnet.  .. .[1]  (d) describe how a permanent magnet can be demagnetised.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (e) another way of making a magnet is shown in fig. 9.2. iron nail coil of insulated wire fig. 9.2   (i) state the name given to this type of magnet.  .. .[1]   (ii) suggest an advantage of this type of magnet.  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) suggest one use for this type of magnet.  .. .[1]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 fig. 10.1 shows  a charger for a mobile phone (cell phone). charger fig. 10.1  the charger contains a transformer.  (a) (i) suggest a suitable material for the coils of the transformer.  .. .[1]   (ii) the transformer has an input voltage of 240 v and an output voltage of 6.0 v. there are  6000 turns on the input coil.    calculate the number of turns on the output coil.  number of turns =  ...[3]  (b) place a tick in the box alongside the condition in which it could be dangerous to use the  charger.      cool      damp      dry      w a r m  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over11 in some areas there are high levels of background radiation.  (a) explain what is meant by background radiation .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) suggest how background radiation can be detected.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) radon-219 (21 89 6rn) is a radioactive gas.   complete the table below to show the number of each type of particle in a neutral atom  of 21 89 6rn. type of particle number electron neutron proton  [3]  (d) alpha particles are emitted when radon-219 decays.   (i) tick the box alongside the correct symbol for an alpha particle.       \u03b1       \u03b2       \u03b3  [1]   (ii) from what part of the radon-219 atom is the alpha particle emitted?  .. .[1]   (iii) complete the table below to show the composition of an alpha particle. type of particle number electron neutron proton  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201512 a student sets up the circuit shown in fig. 12.1. fig. 12.1  (a) on fig. 12.1, label the thermistor with a t. [1]  (b) the student wants to determine the resistance of the thermistor at different temperatures.   complete the sentences for the meters he should use in the circuit.   (i) the meter to be connected in series with the thermistor is .. . [1]   (ii) the meter to be connected in parallel with the thermistor is  . [1]  (c) these are the student\u2019s results for a temperature of 20 \u00b0c. p.d. across thermistor / v current in thermistor / a 3.2 0.0050   (i) calculate the resistance of the thermistor at 20 \u00b0c.  resistance =  ... \u03c9 [3]   (ii) when the temperature increases, the resistance of the thermistor decreases.    state what happens, if anything, to the current in the thermistor.  .. .[1]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (cw/cgw) 90391/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4669960870* physics  0625/23 paper 2 core may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 in the past, burning candles were used as timers.  a boy carries out an experiment to make his own timer using a burning candle.  fig. 1.1 shows the length of the candle, and the clock he used, at the start of the experiment and  at the end of the experiment. start of the experiment end of the experiment 11:  50 5.0 cm 3.2 cmcandle at the startcandle at the end14 : 05clock clock fig. 1.1  (not to scale)  (a) the candle has a cross-sectional area of 1.6 cm2.   calculate the volume of candle at the start of the experiment.  volume =  ..  cm3 [2]  (b) use fig. 1.1 to complete the table. time at start of the experiment time at end of the experiment time for which the candle  was burning.. hours ..minutes = .. hours  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the difference in the length of the candle from the start to the end of the experiment  was 1.8 cm.   calculate the rate, in cm / hour, at which the candle burns.  rate =  ... cm / hour [2]  (d) the boy estimates that he would need a candle about 24 cm long, of the same material and  diameter, to make a candle timer that would last at least one day.   state whether the boy\u2019s estimate is correct. give a reason for your answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 (a) a student is asked to find the density of a small block of metal, as shown in fig. 2.1. length width height fig. 2.1   use words from the list below to complete the following sentences. balance           beaker           measuring cylinder           protractor           rule           thermometer   (i) the student should use a . to measure the length, width and  height of the metal block.   (ii) the student should use a . to find the mass of the metal  block.  [2]  (b) a jeweller has a small block of metal. the block has a mass of 15.2 g and a volume of 1.36 cm3.   (i) calculate the density of the metal.  density =  ..  g / cm3 [3]   (ii) the jeweller looks up the values for the density of various metals and produces a table,  part of which is shown below. metaldensity g / cm3 gold 19.3 lead 11.3 platinum 21.5 silver 10.5    using your answer to (b)(i)  and the information in the table, state which metal the block is  most likely to be made from.  .. .[1]  [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over3 in the columns below are physical quantities and the units in which they are measured.  draw a line from each quantity to its corresponding unit. one line is drawn for you. quantity unit energy \u00b0c resistance m / s speed j temperature \u03c9  [total: 2]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 a toy car is rolling down a slope. fig. 4.1 shows the total forward force and the total backward force  acting on the car. 16 n 12 n fig. 4.1  (a) calculate the resultant force on the car.  size of force =   n  direction of force =  ... [2]  (b) what will be the effect of this resultant force on the car\u2019s motion?  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 a girl cycles to meet a friend. the distance-time graph for her journey from start to finish is shown  in fig. 5.1. 020040060080010001200 0123 time  / minutesdistance  / m 45 ab cde fig. 5.1  (a) how far does the girl travel from start to finish?  distance =  ...[1]  (b) describe the motion of the girl between points b and c.  .. .[1]  (c) which section of the graph shows   (i) the part of the girl\u2019s journey that involves cycling up a hill 500 m long,  between  and  [1]   (ii) the girl travelling at the fastest speed?  between  and  [1]  (d) calculate her average speed, in m / s, for the whole journey.  average speed =  .. m / s [3]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 different types of power station use different sources of energy.  (a) draw one straight line from each energy source to the type of power station that uses it. energy source type of power station fossil fuel hot rocks underground uranium fuel rodshydroelectric nuclear geothermal coal-fired wind farm  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 6.1 shows part of a solar power station. pluuruslsh\u0003fduu\\lqj zdwhu fig. 6.1   these are some of the stages explaining how the power station works. they are not in the  correct order.    a electricity is generated.    b the turbine turns the generator.    c steam drives the turbine.    d water in the pipe absorbs energy.   use the letters a, b, c and d to complete the flow chart to explain how the power station  works. radiation from the sun hits the mirror. radiation is reflected onto the pipe. hot water turns into steam. [3]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 (a) the arrows on fig. 7.1 represent four changes of state. solid liquid gas fig. 7.1   on each arrow, write the name for the change of state. [3]  (b) the statements below are about particles in a gas.   tick three  boxes to show which statements are correct.     the particles move randomly.     the particles are in a regular repeating pattern.     the particles are much further apart than they are in a solid.     the particles vibrate about fixed positions.     the particles expand when they are heated.     the particles move faster when they are heated.  [3]  (c) a student spills a small amount of nail varnish remover on one of her hands. nail varnish  remover is a liquid with a low boiling point.   explain why this hand feels colder than her other hand.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3] [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over8 a student looks into a vertical mirror to see the reflection of a burning candle.  fig. 8.1 shows one ray of light being reflected by the mirror. candleflamemirroreye fig. 8.1  (a) on the ray in fig. 8.1, mark arrows to indicate the direction of travel of the light. [1]  (b) on fig. 8.1, carefully mark the position of the image of the candle flame. [2]  (c) the candle is moved further from the mirror.   state what, if anything, happens to   (i) the position of the image  .. .   (ii) the size of the image.  .. .  [2] [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 (a) fig. 9.1 represents a wave in a water tank. five distances are shown, labelled a, b, c, d  and e. a cbd e fig. 9.1   (i) 1.  which property of the wave is represented by distance c?  .. ..[1]    2. which of the labelled distances represents the wavelength of the wave?  .. ..[1]   (ii) water waves are transverse waves.    state another example of a transverse wave.  .. .[1]   (iii) the speed of the wavefronts is 7.5 cm / s.    calculate the distance moved by a wavefront in 4.0 s.  distance =   cm [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 9.2 shows, from above, a wave travelling on water. shallow water wavefrontdirection of travel of wavewater tank deep water fig. 9.2   the wave has reached an area of shallow water, where it travels more slowly.   (i) complete the diagram to show the wavefronts in the shallow water. [3]   (ii) state the term used to describe what happens to the wave as it enters the shallow water.  .. .[1]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 a student is investigating static electricity.   (i) the student charges a plastic rod by rubbing it with a dry cloth. the rod becomes  positively charged as shown in fig. 10.1. + ++ ++++ ++ +++++ +cloth rod fig. 10.1    1. state the sign of the charge, if any, on the cloth.  .. ..[1]    2. state which particles the cloth has gained for it to have this charge.  .. ..[1]   (ii) the student then rubs two thin plastic strips with another dry cloth. the strips are  suspended so that they are free to move.    fig. 10.2 shows the two plastic strips before and after the student rubs them with the dry  cloth. before rubbing after rubbing sticky tapestring string plastic strips fig. 10.2    explain why the bottom ends of the strips move apart after rubbing.  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (iii) a boy wears a shirt made from nylon. after wearing the shirt for some time he finds the  shirt clinging to his body.    use your knowledge of electrostatic charges to explain why this occurs.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 some cars have electrically heated front seats. each seat has a warm and a hot setting, controlled  by a switch.  the circuit for one seat is shown in fig. 11.1. 12.0  v heaterswitchfuse a bcx fig. 11.1  (a) the circuit contains a switch that can connect to any of the contacts a, b or c.   in the table below, put one tick for each switch setting to indicate the condition of the seat. condition of seat switch setting off warm hot a b c  [3]  (b) when the heater setting is on \u2018hot\u2019, the current in the heater is 6.0 a. the potential difference  across the heater is 10.0 v.   calculate the resistance of the heater.  resistance =  .. [3]",
            "17": "17 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) what is the name and purpose of component x? name of component   .. purpose  ... ..  .. . [2]  (d) the heated seat develops a fault and there is a large current in the circuit.   explain what happens to prevent further damage to the circuit.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 10]",
            "18": "18 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201512 fig. 12.1 represents an atom of carbon. neutron x y fig. 12.1 (not to scale)  (a) (i) state the name of particle x.  .. .[1]   (ii) state the name of particle y .  .. .[1]  (b) carbon-14 is unstable. it decays by beta emission to form nitrogen.   complete the equation for this decay. 14 6c  . .n  +  0 \u20131e  [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) the half-life of carbon-14 is 5800 years.   a piece of wood contained 20 000 carbon-14 atoms when it was buried in a landslide.   calculate the number of years it takes until the number of carbon-14 atoms in the wood  is 2500.  number of years =  .. [4]  [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/23/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/jg) 94500/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8981335670* physics  0625/31 paper 3 extended may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over1 (a) figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show speed-time graphs for two objects, each moving in a straight line. speed timespeed time0 00 0  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2   (i) describe the motion of the object shown by the graph in fig. 1.1.  .. .  .. .   (ii) describe the motion of the object shown by the graph in fig. 1.2.  .. .  .. . [3]  (b) on a day with no wind, a large object is dropped from a tall building. the object experiences  air resistance during its fall to the ground.   state and explain, in terms of the forces acting, how the acceleration of the object varies  during its fall.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [4] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 a large stone block is to be part of a harbour wall. the block is supported beneath the surface of  the sea by a cable from a crane. fig. 2.1 shows the block with its top face a distance h beneath the  surface of the sea. blockcable surface of sea h fig. 2.1  the force acting downwards on the top face of the block, due to the atmosphere and the depth h  of water, is 3.5 \u00d7 104 n.  (a) the top face of the block has an area of 0.25 m2.   (i) calculate the pressure on the top face of the block.  pressure =   [2]   (ii) the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.    calculate the pressure on the top face of the block due to the depth h of water.  pressure =   [1]   (iii) the density of sea water is 1020 kg / m3.    calculate the depth h.  h =   [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) suggest two reasons why the tension force in the cable is not 3.5 \u00d7 104 n. 1.  ... ... 2.  ... ... [2]  (c) the block is lowered so that it rests on the sea-bed.   state what happens to the tension force in the cable.  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 fig. 3.1 shows an early water-powered device used to raise a heavy load. the heavy load rests on  piston b. cylinder a water piston acylinder b load pivot beampiston b connecting rod connecting rod fig. 3.1 (not to scale)  initially, a large weight of water in cylinder a pushes piston a down. this causes the left-hand end  of the beam to move down and the right-hand end of the beam to move up. piston b rises, lifting  the heavy load.  (a) the weight of water in cylinder a is 80 kn.   calculate the mass of water in cylinder a.  mass =   [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the density of water is 1000 kg / m3.   calculate the volume of water in cylinder a.  volume =   [2]  (c) piston a moves down a distance of 4.0 m.   calculate the gravitational potential energy lost by the water.  loss of gravitational potential energy =   [2]  (d) the heavy load lifted by piston b gains 96 kj of gravitational potential energy.   calculate the efficiency of the device.  efficiency =   [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 (a) (i) state two ways in which the molecular structure of a liquid is different from the molecular  structure of a solid. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]   (ii) explain, in terms of energy, the process which takes place as a solid at its melting point  changes into a liquid at the same temperature.  .. .  .. .  ..  [1]  (b) during a severe snowstorm, a layer of snow (ice crystals) forms on the body of an animal in a  field. the snow and the surrounding air are at 0 \u00b0c. the snow begins to melt.   (i) the mass of snow that falls on the animal is 1.65 kg. the specific latent heat of fusion of  snow is 330 000 j / kg.    calculate the thermal energy needed to melt this snow.  thermal energy =  ... [2]   (ii) the animal derives energy from its food to maintain its body temperature.    state the energy change that takes place.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 (a) state what is meant by the specific heat capacity  of a substance.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) a student carries out an experiment to find the specific heat capacity of aluminium. he uses  an electric heater and a thermometer, inserted into separate holes in an aluminium block.   the following data are obtained.     mass of aluminium block = 2.0 kg     power of heating element = 420 w    time of heating = 95 s    initial temperature of block = 19.5 \u00b0c    final temperature of block = 40.5 \u00b0c   calculate the value of the specific heat capacity of aluminium given by this experiment.  specific heat capacity =   ... [4]  (c) in the experiment in (b), no attempt is made to prevent loss of thermal energy from the  surfaces of the block.   suggest two actions the student could take to reduce the loss of thermal energy from the  surfaces of the block. 1.  ... ... 2.  ... ... [2] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 a water wave in a tank travels from a region where the speed of the wave is faster into a region  where it is slower.  fig. 6.1 is a one-quarter scale diagram that shows the wavefronts in the region where the speed is  faster. slower regionfaster region wavefronts tank fig. 6.1 (scale: 1.0 cm represents 4.0 cm)  (a) (i) take measurements from the scale diagram in fig. 6.1 to determine the wavelength of  the water wave as it travels in the faster region.  wavelength =   [2]   (ii) the speed of the wave in the faster region is 0.39 m / s.    calculate the frequency of the wave.  frequency =   [2]  (b) on fig. 6.1, draw lines that indicate the positions of the wavefronts of the water wave in the  slower region. [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) state what happens to the frequency of the water wave as it passes into the slower region.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "13": "13 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over7 (a) fig. 7.1 represents an object o placed in front of a converging lens. pq s roi fig. 7.1   (i) state a full description of the image i.  ..  [2]   (ii) using the letters on fig. 7.1, identify the focal length of the lens.  ..  [1]   (iii) on fig. 7.1, draw an eye suitably placed to view the image i. [1]  (b) fig. 7.2 shows an object o placed to the left of a converging lens. a principal focus of the lens  is at the position marked f . fo fig. 7.2   (i) on fig. 7.2,  draw two rays to locate the image of object o. draw the image.   (ii) on fig. 7.2,  draw one other ray from the upper tip of o to the image. [4] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20158 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a bar magnet suspended by a spring over a coil. the coil is connected to a  sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter. spring magnet coilsensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter fig. 8.1   (i) the lower end of the magnet is pushed down into the upper end of the coil and  held at rest.    during the movement, an e.m.f. is induced in the coil. the meter shows a deflection to  the right and then returns to zero.    explain why this e.m.f. is induced.  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) state what happens to the needle of the meter when    1.  the magnet is released from rest and is pulled up by the spring,  ..  [1]    2 .   the magnet continues to oscillate up and down, moving in and out of the coil with  each oscillation.  ..  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 8.2 shows a transformer. 240  v mains8000 turnscoil p coil s6.0 v lamp fig. 8.2   the primary coil p , connected to the 240 v mains supply, has 8000 turns. the secondary  coil s supplies 6.0 v to a lamp.   (i) calculate the number of  turns in the secondary coil.  number of turns =   [2]   (ii) 1. the current in the primary coil is 0.050 a.      calculate the power input to the transformer.  power =   [1]    2. 90% of the power input to the transformer is transferred to the lamp.      calculate the current in the lamp.  current =   [2] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 in fig. 9.1, a 12 v battery supplies a current i to a circuit. the circuit contains a thermistor and a  1000 \u03c9 resistor in parallel, with a 500 \u03c9 resistor in series. 12 v 1000  1500  1i fig. 9.1  (a) at a certain temperature, the thermistor has a resistance of 1000 \u03c9.   calculate   (i) the combined resistance of the thermistor and the 1000 \u03c9 resistor,  resistance =   [2]   (ii) the current i,  current =   [1]   (iii) the potential difference across the 500 \u03c9 resistor.  potential difference =   [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the temperature of the thermistor is increased so that its resistance decreases.   state the effect of this change in resistance on the current through the 500 \u03c9 resistor. explain  your answer.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 fig. 10.1 shows two parallel conducting plates connected to a very high voltage supply. + + + + + + + + + + + + +\u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 voltage supplyconducting plate fig. 10.1  the left-hand plate is positively charged and the right-hand plate is negatively charged.  (a) on fig. 10.1, draw the electric field pattern produced between the charged plates. use arrows  to show the direction of the field. [2]  (b) a light, conducting ball is suspended by an insulating string. fig. 10.2 shows the ball in the  middle of the gap between the plates. + + + + + + + + + + + + +\u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 voltage supply fig. 10.2   on fig. 10.2, show the distribution of charge on the ball. [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the ball is displaced to the left and then oscillates backwards and forwards between the two  plates.   the ball touches a plate once every 0.05 s. every time it touches a plate, a charge of  2.8 \u00d7 10\u22128 c (0.000 000 028 c) is transferred.   calculate the average current produced by the repeated transfer of charge.  current =   [2] [total: 6] question 11 is on the next page.",
            "20": "20 0625/31/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) state the nature of \u03b3-rays.  .. .  ..  [1]  (b) a beam of \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles passes, in a vacuum, between the poles of a strong  magnet.   compare the deflections of the paths of the two types of particle.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (c) a beam of \u03b2-particles passes, in a vacuum, through the electric field between a pair of  oppositely charged metal plates.   describe the path of the particles.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (d) the nuclear equation shows the decay of an isotope of polonium. a z po    206 82 pb + 42 x   (i) state the nature of x.  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the values of a and z.  a =   z = . [1] [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (leg/sw) 91111/3 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *0807724150* physics  0625/32 paper 3 extended may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 an experiment is carried out to find the acceleration of free fall.  a strip of paper is attached to a heavy object. the object is dropped and falls to the ground, pulling  the paper strip through a timer. the timer marks dots on the paper strip at intervals of 0.020 s.  fig. 1.1 shows a section of the paper strip with the first three dots marked. the first dot on the  paper strip, labelled a, is marked at the instant the object is dropped.  0.0076  m paper strip0.001 9 m a fig. 1.1  (not to scale)  (a) state how the dots on the paper strip show that the object is accelerating.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) calculate the average speed of the object     (i) in the first 0.020 s after the object is dropped,  average speed =  .   (ii) in the second 0.020 s after the object is dropped.  average speed =  .  [3]  (c) use the results from (b) to calculate the acceleration of the falling object.  acceleration =  .[3]  [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 fig. 2.1 shows a cylinder containing gas compressed by the movement of a piston. compressed gas final position of piston initial position of pistoncylinder fig. 2.1  initially the volume of the gas was 470 cm3. the piston moves up and compresses the gas to a  volume of 60 cm3. the whole arrangement is left for some time until the gas cools to its original  temperature. the pressure of the gas is now 800 kpa.  (a) calculate the initial pressure of the gas.  pressure =  .[3]  (b) explain, in terms of molecules, the effect on the pressure of the gas if it was not given time to  cool to its original temperature.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (c) the area of the piston is 5.5 \u00d7 10\u20133 m2 (0.0055 m2).   calculate the force exerted by the gas on the piston when the pressure is 800 kpa.  force =  .[2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 an athlete of mass 64 kg is bouncing up and down on a trampoline.   at one moment, the athlete is stationary on the stretched surface of the trampoline. fig. 3.1 shows  the athlete at this moment.  springs fig. 3.1  (a) state the form of energy stored due to the stretching of the surface of the trampoline.  .. .[1]  (b) the stretched surface of the trampoline begins to contract. the athlete is pushed vertically  upwards and she accelerates. at time t, when her upwards velocity is 6.0 m / s, she loses  contact with the surface.   (i) calculate her kinetic energy at time t.   kinetic energy =  .[2]   (ii) calculate the maximum possible distance she can travel upwards after time t.  maximum distance =  .[3]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (iii) in practice, she travels upwards through a slightly smaller distance than the distance  calculated in (ii).    suggest why this is so.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) the trampoline springs are tested. an extension-load graph is plotted for one spring. fig. 3.2  is the graph. 00extension loadx fig. 3.2   (i) state the name of the point x.  .. .[1]   (ii) state the name of the law that the spring obeys between the origin of the graph and  point x.  .. .[1]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 (a) fig. 4.1 shows a device used as a thermocouple thermometer.  meter z wire of material ywire of material x wire of material x fig. 4.1   in the table put three  ticks against the correct statements about the thermocouple  thermometer.  meter z measures energy. meter z measures potential difference. meter z measures power. materials x and y are different materials. materials x and y are the same material. materials x and y are electrical conductors. materials x and y are electrical insulators.  [3]  (b) a liquid-in-glass thermometer is replaced by a similar thermometer with a larger bulb. no  other change is made.   state and explain the effect on the sensitivity.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the capillary of a liquid-in-glass thermometer should have a constant diameter.   fig. 4.2 shows the capillary of a thermometer made with a manufacturing fault.  bulb capillarywalls of non-uniform capillaryglass fig. 4.2  (not to scale)   state and explain the effect of this fault on the linearity of the thermometer.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a metal strip, held in a clamp.  xmetal strip clampy z fig. 5.1   the end of the strip is pulled down and released, so that the strip vibrates. x and z are the  extreme positions of the end of the strip during this vibration. y is the mid-position.   explain what is meant by   (i) the frequency  of vibration of the strip,  .. .  .. .   (ii) the amplitude  of vibration of the end of the strip.  .. .  .. .  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (b) fig. 5.2 shows two tall buildings, a and b, that are 99 m apart. 33 m99 m pab fig. 5.2 (not to scale)   a student stands at p so that his distance from building a is 33 m. after clapping his hands  once, he hears several echoes. the speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.   calculate the time interval between clapping his hands and hearing    (i) the first echo,  time =  .[2]   (ii) the third  echo.  time =  .[1]  (c) write down an approximate value for the speed of sound   (i) in water,  speed =  .   (ii) in steel.  speed =  .  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (d) fig. 5.3 shows a dolphin in water emitting a sound wave of frequency 95 khz.  fig. 5.3 (not to scale)   using your value from (c)(i) , calculate the wavelength of this sound wave.  wavelength =  .[2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 the refractive index n of glass in air is 1.5.  (a) (i) state the equation that relates the speed of light in air va, the speed of light in glass vg  and n.  .. .[1]   (ii) the speed of light in air is 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s.    calculate the speed of light in glass.  speed =  .[1]  (b) light travelling in glass strikes the edge of the glass. fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light at an angle  of 41\u00b0 to the normal. 41\u00b0air glassnormal fig. 6.1   (i) the light passes from the glass into the air.    calculate the angle that the ray makes with the normal in the air.  angle =  .[2]   (ii) state what happens to light that strikes the edge of the glass at an angle to the normal  much larger than 41\u00b0.  .. .[1]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) describe one example of how optical fibres are used in medicine.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 a physics teacher suspends two pointers in a magnetic field. one pointer is made of brass and the  other is a magnet.  she holds the pointers in the initial positions shown in the two upper circles of fig. 7.1. she then  releases the pointers. brass pointer arrows show direction of strong magnetic field draw final position of brass pointer in this circledraw final position of magnet in this circlen pole of magnets pole of magnetns fig. 7.1  (a) in the lower circles of fig. 7.1, draw the settled final positions of the two pointers. [2]  (b) (i) explain the final position of the brass pointer.  .. .  .. .  .. .   (ii) explain the final position of the magnet.  .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]  (c) suggest a material from which the magnet is made.  .. .[1]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over8 fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 v and a heater of  resistance 6.0 \u03c9. a 6.0 112 v fig. 8.1  (a) state what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) (i) calculate the current in the heater.  current =  .[2]   (ii) state the name of the particles that flow through the heater.  .. .[1]   (iii) on fig. 8.1, draw an arrow next to the heater symbol to show the direction of flow of  these particles through the heater. [1]  (c) calculate the thermal energy produced in the heater in 10 minutes.  thermal energy =  .[2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 fig. 9.1 represents a transformer. a coil s coil p240  v a.c. 8000 turnsb fig. 9.1  (a) (i) name the process by which a changing current in the primary coil p causes a changing  current in the secondary coil s.  .. .[1]   (ii) suggest a material used for the coils. explain why this material is used.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) the input to the primary coil p is 240 v. this coil has 8000 turns of wire. the voltage obtained  between terminals a and b is 12 v.   (i) calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil s.  number of turns =  .[2]   (ii) the resistor connected between the terminals a and b is replaced by four 12 v lamps  connected in parallel. the current in each lamp is 1.5 a.    calculate the current in coil p . assume the transformer is 100% efficient.  current =  .[3]  [total: 8]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over10 (a) state the nature of an \u03b1-particle.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) describe how an electric field between two charged plates could be used to determine  whether a beam of particles consists of \u03b1- or \u03b2-particles.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (c) describe the path of \u03b3-rays in a magnetic field.  .. .  .. .[1]  (d)  state what is meant by the term isotopes . use the terms proton number and nucleon number  in your explanation.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 fig. 11.1 shows the main components of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. heater p plate y2plate y1 plate x1plate x2fluorescent screen anode systemgridbeam fig. 11.1  (a) (i) state the function of component p .  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) tick one box to complete the sentence correctly.     a cathode-ray oscilloscope contains     air at about five times normal atmospheric pressure.     air at about normal atmospheric pressure.     air at about one fifth of normal atmospheric pressure.     a vacuum.     neon gas.  [1]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (b) fig. 11.2 shows the front view of the screen of the cathode-ray oscilloscope.  ab c fig. 11.2   with no voltage applied between the x-plates or between the y -plates, the spot is at a.   (i) place two ticks in each  of the blank columns of the table to describe the voltages across  the plates when the spot is at points b and c. the column for the spot at a has been  completed as an example. spot at a spot at b spot at c plate x1 at higher voltage than plate x2 plate x1 at lower voltage than plate x2 no voltage between x-plates \u2713 plate y1 at higher voltage than plate y2 plate y1 at lower voltage than plate y2 no voltage between y -plates \u2713  [3]   (ii) explain your answers for the spot at point b.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (cw) 105194/1 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *7651586991* physics  0625/33 paper 3 extended may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 at a sports event, a champion runner and a car take part in a race.  (a) the runner runs at a constant speed of 10 m / s from the start of the race. during the first 5.0 s  of the race, the car\u2019s speed increases from 0 m / s to 25 m / s at a uniform rate.   on fig. 1.1, draw   (i) a graph to show the motion of the runner, [1]   (ii) a graph to show the motion of the car. 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.030 20 10 0speed m / s time  / s fig. 1.1 [1]  (b) use your graphs to determine   (i) the distance travelled by the runner in the 5.0 s,  distance =  ...[1]   (ii) the distance travelled by the car in the 5.0 s,  distance =  ...[2]   (iii) the time at which the car overtakes the runner.  time =  ...[2] [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 an electric train is initially at rest at a railway station. the motor causes a constant force of  360 000 n to act on the train and the train begins to move.  (a) state the form of energy gained by the train as it begins to move.  .. .[1]  (b) the train travels a distance of 4.0 km along a straight, horizontal track.   (i) calculate the work done on the train during this part of the journey.  work done =  ...[2]   (ii) the mass of the train is 450 000 kg.    calculate the maximum possible speed of the train at the end of the first 4.0 km of the  journey.  maximum possible speed =  ...[3]   (iii) in practice, the speed of the train is much less than the value calculated in (ii).    suggest one reason why this is the case.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) after travelling 4.0 km, the train reaches its maximum speed. it continues at this constant  speed on the next section of the track where the track follows a curve which is part of a circle.   state the direction of the resultant force on the train as it follows the curved path.  .. .[1] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 (a) the boxes on the left contain the names of some sources of energy. the boxes on the right  contain properties of some sources of energy.   draw two straight lines from each box  on the left to the two boxes on the right which describe  that source of energy. renewable not renewable polluting not pollutingsolar energy natural gas  [2]  (b) coal-fired power stations are polluting.   state an advantage of using coal as a source of energy.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) a coal-fired power station generates electricity at night when it is not needed.   some of this energy is stored by pumping water up to a mountain lake. when there is high  demand for electricity, the water is allowed to flow back through turbines to generate electricity.   on one occasion, 2.05 \u00d7 108 kg of water is pumped up through a vertical height of 500 m.   (i) calculate the weight of the water.  weight =  ...[1]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the water.  energy gained =  ...[2]   (iii) the electrical energy used to pump the water up to the mountain lake is 1.2 \u00d7 1012 j.  only 6.2 \u00d7 1011 j of electrical energy is generated when the water is released.    calculate the efficiency of this energy storage scheme.  efficiency =  ...[2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 a liquid-in-glass thermometer has a linear scale and a range of 120 \u00b0c.  (a) state what is meant by a linear scale .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the highest temperature that this thermometer can measure is 110 \u00b0c.   state the lowest temperature that it can measure.  lowest temperature =  ...[1]  (c) a second liquid-in-glass thermometer has the same range but it has a greater sensitivity.   suggest two ways in which the second thermometer might differ from the first. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (d) a thermometer has a bulb that is painted white and is shiny.   it is placed in boiling water for several minutes. it is then removed from the water and is held  in air.   fig. 4.1 shows how the thermometer reading changes during the next 8 minutes. 100 80 60 40 20 0 024 6 8 time  / minutestemperature / \u00b0c fig. 4.1   the bulb of this thermometer is now re-painted so that it has a matt, black surface.   the procedure is repeated.   (i) on fig. 4.1, sketch a second line to suggest how the reading of the re-painted  thermometer changes during the 8 minutes. [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015  (ii) tick one of the boxes to show how painting the bulb black affects the linearity of the  scale, the range and the sensitivity of the thermometer.     the linearity, the range and the sensitivity all change.     only the linearity and the range change.     only the linearity and the sensitivity change.     only the range and the sensitivity change.     only the linearity changes.     only the range changes.     only the sensitivity changes.     none of these properties changes.  [1] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 (a) state what is meant by the specific latent heat of fusion  (melting ) of a substance.  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) ice cubes of total mass 70 g, and at 0 \u00b0c, are put into a drink of lemonade of mass 300 g.   all the ice melts as 23 500 j of thermal energy transfers from the lemonade to the ice. the  final temperature of the drink is 0 \u00b0c.   (i) calculate the specific latent heat of fusion for ice.  specific latent heat of fusion =  ...[2]   (ii) the thermal energy that causes the ice to melt is transferred from the lemonade as  it cools. the loss of this thermal energy causes the temperature of the 300 g of the lemonade to fall by 19 \u00b0c.    calculate the specific heat capacity of the lemonade.  specific heat capacity =  ...[2]   (iii) the melting ice floats on top of the lemonade.    explain the process by which the lemonade at the bottom of the drink becomes cold.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 a glass, converging lens is used as a magnifying glass to observe a red ant.  (a) fig. 6.1 shows the lens, the principal axis, and the two principal focuses f1 and f2. lensf2 f1 principal axis fig. 6.1   (i) 1.   on fig. 6.1, mark a point on the principal axis, labelled a, to indicate a suitable  position for the ant.     2.   on fig. 6.1, mark a point on the principal axis, labelled e, to indicate a suitable  position for the observer\u2019s eye.  [1]   (ii) tick one of the boxes to indicate where, on the principal axis, the image of the ant is  located.     to the left of f1     between f1 and the lens     within the lens     between the lens and f2     to the right of f2 [1]   (iii) underline two words in the list that describe the image produced by the magnifying  glass. diminished            inverted            real            upright            virtual  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) (i) the red light from the ant passes into the lens.    as the light enters the lens, state what happens to    1.  its wavelength,  .. ..[1]    2.  its frequency.  .. ..[1]   (ii) state how the wavelength of violet light in air differs from the wavelength of red light in  air.  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 (a) a sound wave in air consists of alternate compressions and rarefactions along its path.   (i) explain how a compression differs from a rarefaction.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) explain, in terms of compressions, what is meant by    1.  the wavelength of the sound,  .. ..  .. ..[1]    2.  the frequency of the sound.  .. ..  .. ..[1]  (b) at night, bats emit pulses of sound to detect obstacles and prey. the speed of sound in air is  340 m / s.   (i) a bat emits a pulse of sound of wavelength 0.0085 m.    calculate the frequency of the sound.  frequency =  ...[2]   (ii) state why this sound cannot be heard by human beings.  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) the pulse of sound hits a stationary object and is reflected back to the bat. the pulse is  received by the bat 0.12 s after it was emitted.    calculate the distance travelled by the pulse of sound during this time.  distance =  ...[2] [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over8 (a) a student determines the resistance of a length of aluminium wire.   she connects the wire in series with a battery and a variable resistor. the circuit is shown in  fig. 8.1. aluminium wire fig. 8.1   she knows that an ammeter and a voltmeter are needed in the circuit.   (i) on fig. 8.1, draw the circuit symbol for an ammeter connected in a suitable position. [1]   (ii) a variable resistor is included so that the current in the circuit may be changed.    suggest an advantage of being able to change the current.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) electricity is transmitted from a power station to a distant city using an aluminium cable of  resistance 1.2 \u03c9. power loss occurs because of the resistance of the cable.   the current in the cable is 250 a.   (i) calculate the power loss in the cable.  power loss =  ...[3]   (ii) the aluminium cable is replaced with a new aluminium cable of the same length. the  current remains at 250 a. the diameter of the new cable is double the diameter of the  original cable.    state and explain how the power loss is affected by this change.  .. .  .. .  .. .[3] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 an extremely violent nuclear reaction is taking place at the centre of the sun. it is this reaction that  enables the sun to emit both a very large quantity of energy and an extremely large number of charged particles.  (a) name the type of nuclear reaction taking place in the sun.  .. .[1]  (b) many of the charged particles produced by the sun are emitted from its surface at high  speeds and travel out into space.   (i) explain why these particles constitute an electric current.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) state the equation that relates the electric current i to the charge q that is flowing. define  any other terms in the equation.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) some of the particles emitted by the sun travel straight towards the earth until they enter the  earth\u2019s magnetic field. because they constitute a current, they experience a force and are deflected.   (i) describe the relationship between the direction of the force and    1.  the direction of the current,  .. ..[1]    2.  the direction of the magnetic field.  .. ..[1]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) a negatively charged particle is travelling in a magnetic field. this is represented in  fig. 9.1. the direction of the magnetic field is into the page. negative particledirection of travel of particle magnetic field into page fig. 9.1    on fig. 9.1, draw an arrow, labelled f , to show the direction of the force that acts on the  particle. [1]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 a solenoid is held in a vertical position. the solenoid is connected to a sensitive, centre-zero  ammeter.  a vertical bar magnet is held stationary at position x just above the upper end of the solenoid as  shown in fig. 10.1. magnet solenoids n magnetposition x position ya fig. 10.1    the magnet is released and it falls through the solenoid. during the initial stage of the fall, the  sensitive ammeter shows a small deflection to the left.  (a) explain why the ammeter shows a deflection.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the magnet passes the middle point of the solenoid and continues to fall. it reaches  position y .   describe and explain what is observed on the ammeter as the magnet falls from the middle  point of the solenoid to position y .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) suggest two changes to the apparatus that would increase the initial deflection of the  ammeter. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 (a) an underground water pipe has cracked and water is leaking into the surrounding ground.   fig. 11.1 shows a technician locating the position of the leak. technician crack in water pipemetal water pipewater that leaked into groundground surface fig. 11.1   a radioactive isotope is introduced into the water supply and the water that leaks from the  crack is radioactive.   the technician tries to locate an area above the pipe where the radioactive count rate is  higher than in the surrounding area.   (i) state and explain the type of radiation that must be emitted by the isotope for the leak to  be detected.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) the half-life of the isotope used is 6.0 hours.    explain why an isotope with this half-life is suitable.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (b) caesium-133 is a stable isotope of the element caesium, but caesium-135 is radioactive.   a nucleus of caesium-133 contains 78 neutrons and a nucleus of caesium-135 contains  80 neutrons.   put one tick in each row of the table to indicate how the number of particles in a neutral atom  of caesium-133 compares with the number of particles in a neutral atom of caesium-135.   the first row has been completed already. particles in caesium-133 2 more than  caesium-1351 more than  caesium-135equal to  caesium-1351 fewer than  caesium-1352 fewer than  caesium-135 number of  neutrons\u2713 number of protons number of  nucleons number of  electrons  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (leg/jg) 91116/1 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *5163115603* physics  0625/51 paper 5 practical test may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.   carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. pxy benchmetre rule pivot50.0  cm mark 90.0 cm mark fig. 1.1  (a) place the metre rule on the pivot. place the load p on the metre rule at the 90.0 cm mark.    keeping p at the 90.0 cm mark, adjust the position of the metre rule on the pivot so that the  metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.   (i) write down the reading on the metre rule at the position of the pivot.  the pivot is at the   cm mark of the metre rule.   (ii) record the distance x from the 90.0 cm mark to the pivot.  x =  ...[1]   (iii) record the distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark.  y =  ...[1]   (iv) determine the weight w of the metre rule using the equation w = px y, where p = 2.0 n. p is the weight of load p.  w =  ...[1]  (b) keep the pivot at the same position, as recorded in (a)(i) .   move load p to the 95.0 cm mark. place the load q on the metre rule and adjust its position so  that the rule balances.   (i) on fig. 1.2 mark, with a letter x, the approximate position of q. [1] pa bench pivot50.0  cm mark 95.0 cm mark fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) record the distance a from the 95.0 cm mark to the pivot.  a =  ...   (iii) record the distance b from q to the pivot.  b =  ...   (iv)  record the distance c from the 50.0  cm mark to the pivot.  c =  ...  [1]   (v) calculate the product ap, where p = 2.0 n. include the unit.  ap =  ...   (vi) calculate the product bq, where q = 1.0 n. q is the weight of load q.  bq =  ...   (vii) calculate the product cw, using the value of w determined in part (a)(iv) .  cw =  ...  [2]  (c) a student suggests that ap should be equal to bq + cw.   state whether your results support the suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  [2]  (d)  suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain exact results with this experiment.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. y ou are provided with a beaker containing  hot water and a thermometer. thermometer water fig. 2.1  (a) (i) place the thermometer in the beaker of water. when the thermometer reading stops  rising, measure the temperature \u03b8 of the water and immediately start the stopclock.  record \u03b8 in table 2.1 at time t = 0 s.   (ii) in table 2.1, record the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until you have a total of  six values up to time t = 150 s.  table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c 0 30 60 90 120 150  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c ( y-axis) against t / s (x-axis).  [5]  (c) (i) state whether the rate of cooling of the water in the beaker increases, decreases or  stays approximately constant during the period of cooling. the rate of cooling of the water  .[1]   (ii) justify your statement by reference to the graph.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of lamp filaments in series and parallel  circuits.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you.  power supply a v fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference vs across the lamps and the  current is in the circuit. switch off.  vs =  ...  is =  ...   [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance rs of the lamp filaments using the equation rs = vs is.  rs =  ...[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the circuit is to be rearranged so that    \u0081 the lamps are in parallel   \u0081 the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit   \u0081 the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across the lamps.   draw a diagram of this circuit using standard circuit symbols.  [2]  (c) rearrange the circuit as described in (b).   (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference vp across the lamps and the  current ip in the circuit. switch off.  vp =  ...  ip =  ...   [1]   (ii) calculate the resistance rp of the lamp filaments using the equation rp = vp ip.  rp =  ...   (iii) calculate the ratio rs rp.  rs rp =  ...  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (d) a student wishes to investigate whether the ratio rs rp for the two lamps is the same under all  conditions.   (i) suggest a variable that you could change in order to obtain further sets of readings. y ou  are not asked to take any further readings.  .. .   (ii) explain briefly how you would change this variable.  .. .  .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light passing through a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. gh b ln j f a e dm c eyeray-trace sheethole          fig. 4.1  (a) place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the block  should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd .  (b) remove the block and draw a normal nl at the centre of side ab. label the point e where  the normal crosses ab. label the point m where the normal crosses cd.  (c) draw a line gh, parallel to ab and 6.0 cm above ab. label the point j where the normal  crosses gh.  (d) draw a line, starting at e, to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the  normal as shown in fig. 4.1. label the point f where the line meets gh.",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) place two pins p1 and p2 on the line fe, placing one pin close to e. label the positions of p1  and p2.  (f) replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that  the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. place two pins p3 and p4 between your  eye and the block so that p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2 seen through the block,  appear one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4. remove the block.  (g) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd and label  this point k. draw the line ke.  (h) (i) measure and record the length a between points f and j.  a =  ...   (ii) measure and record the length b between points f and e.  b =  ...   (iii) measure and record the length c between points e and k.  c =  ...   (iv) measure and record the length d between points m and k.  d =  ...   [2]  (i) calculate n, the refractive index of the material of the block, using the equation n = ac bd .  n =  .. [1]  (j) repeat steps (d) \u2013 (h) but with the angle of incidence i = 50\u00b0.  a =  ...  b =  ...  c =  ...  d =  ...  n =  ...  [2]  (k) suggest one precaution that you should take with this experiment to obtain reliable results.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11. [4]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (cw/jg) 91127/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *3908655948* physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 in this experiment, you will investigate a pendulum.  carry out the following instructions referring to figs. 1.1 and 1.2. l bob one complete oscillationclamp clamp  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  a pendulum has been set up for you.   (a) adjust the pendulum until its length l = 50.0 cm. the length l is measured to the centre of the  bob.   state one precaution that you took to measure the length l as accurately as possible. y ou may  draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) (i) displace the pendulum bob slightly and release it so that it swings. measure the time t  for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see fig. 1.2).  t =  .. [1]   (ii) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t =  ...[1]   (iii) explain why measuring the time for 20 oscillations, rather than for 1 oscillation, gives a  more accurate value for t.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) adjust the length of the pendulum until its length l = 100.0 cm. repeat steps (b)(i)  and (b)(ii) .  t =  ...  t =  ...  [2]  (d) a student suggests that doubling the length l of the pendulum should double the period t.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  (e) to continue the investigation of the relationship between the length l of the pendulum and the  period t, it is necessary to use a range of values of length l.   list additional l values that you would plan to use in the laboratory. y ou are not asked to make  any more measurements.  .. .[2] [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. thermometer water beaker a fig. 2.1  (a) pour 100 cm3 of hot water into beaker a. place the thermometer in beaker a, as shown in  fig. 2.1.   (i) record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water in beaker a.  \u03b8h =  ...[1]   (ii) state one precaution that you took to ensure that the temperature reading for the hot  water is as reliable as possible.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) (i) add 50 cm3 of cold water to the hot water in beaker a. stir briefly. record the  temperature \u03b81.  \u03b81 =  ...    (ii) calculate the decrease in temperature \u03b8a using the equation \u03b8a = (\u03b8h \u2013 \u03b81).  \u03b8a =  ... [2]  (c) (i) add a further 100 cm3 of cold water to the water in beaker a. stir briefly. record the  temperature \u03b82.  \u03b82 =  ...    (ii) calculate the decrease in temperature \u03b8b using the equation \u03b8b = (\u03b81 \u2013 \u03b82).  \u03b8b =  ... [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (d) suggest two factors, other than the volume and temperature of the cold water added, that  affect the decrease in temperature of the hot water. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  (e) describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain an accurate value for the volume  of water. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of lamps.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you. power supply av fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference vp across the lamps and the  current ip in the circuit. switch off.  vp =  ...  ip =  ... [2]   (ii) calculate the combined resistance rp of the lamps using the equation rp = vp ip.  rp =  ...[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) disconnect and remove one of the lamps.   the remaining components are to be arranged to make a circuit in which   \u0081 the two lamps are in series   \u0081 the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit   \u0081 the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across both lamps.   in the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit using standard circuit symbols. [2]  (c) set up the circuit as described in (b).   (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference vs across the two lamps and the  current is in the circuit. switch off.  vs =  ...  is =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate the resistance rs of the lamps using the equation rs = vs is.  rs =  ...[2]  (d) (i) a student wishes to vary the current in the circuit in fig. 3.1, using a variable resistor.    in the space below, draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor. [1]   (ii) on fig. 3.1, label with x a suitable position in the circuit for a variable resistor used to  vary the current in all the lamps. [1] [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 in this experiment, you will investigate reflection using a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. mr ln ba eye30\u00b0 ray-trace sheetehole fig. 4.1  (a) draw a line 10 cm long near the middle of the blank ray-trace sheet supplied. label the line  mr. draw a normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the  point at which nl crosses mr with the letter a.  (b) draw a line 8 cm long from a at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal, below mr and to  the left of the normal. label the end of this line b.  (c) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr.",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (d) place two pins p1 and p2 on line ab a suitable distance apart.  (e) view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1. place  two pins p3 and p4, some distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and  p2, all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.  (f) remove pins p3 and p4 and the mirror. draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4.  extend the line until it meets nl.  (g) measure, and record in table 4.1, the angle \u03b1 between nl and the line joining the positions  of p3 and p4. at this stage the angle \u03b8 between the mirror and line mr is 0 \u00b0, as shown in the  table.  (h) remove pins p1 and p2. draw lines at angles \u03b8 = 10 \u00b0, 20 \u00b0 and 30 \u00b0 to mr, one of which is  shown in fig. 4.1. repeat steps (d) to (g), placing the mirror on each of the new lines in turn,  so that you obtain four sets of readings. table 4.1 \u03b8 / \u00b0\u03b1 / \u00b0  0102030 [1]  (i) plot a graph of  \u03b1 / \u00b0 (y-axis) against \u03b8 / \u00b0 (x-axis). [4]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (j) state whether your graph line shows that the angle \u03b1 is directly proportional to the angle \u03b8.  justify your statement by reference to your graph line. statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11. [3] [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (rw/sw) 91113/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *6846973442* physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test may/june 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 in this experiment, you will determine the mass of an object using two strings.  the apparatus has been set up for you. do not change  the position of the rule or the distance  between the stands. y ou are also provided with two loops of string labelled p and q.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 1.1 and 1.2. string metre rule x 100  gpoint astand point b fig. 1.1  (a) (i) record the scale reading a0 on the rule, at point a, where the string crosses the rule, as  indicated in fig. 1.1.  a0 =  ...   (ii) record the scale reading b0 at point b.  b0 =  ...  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) carefully place loop p around the vertical strings so that the strings are pulled closer together  as shown in fig. 1.2. the loop must be horizontal and should be just above the rule. x 100  gloop p da point a1point b1db fig. 1.2   (i) record in table 1.1 the scale reading a1 at point a1, as indicated in fig. 1.2.   (ii) record in table 1.1 the scale reading b1 at point b1. table 1.1 loop a1 / cm b1 / cm da / cm db / cm m / g p q   (iii) calculate and record in the table the distance da, as indicated in fig. 1.2. use your results  from (a)(i)  and from the table. da is the difference between a0 and a1.   (iv) calculate and record the distance db. use your results from (a)(ii)  and from the table.   db is the difference between b0 and b1.   (v) calculate and record in the table a value for the mass m of object x, using your results  from the table  and the equation m = k db da , where k = 100 g.   (vi) remove loop  p from the vertical strings and replace it with loop q.   (vii) repeat steps  (b)(i) to (b)(v) for loop  q.  [5]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) explain how you made sure that the loops were horizontal. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (d) a student suggests that da and db might be directly proportional to each other.   briefly describe how this experiment could be extended to investigate the suggestion.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. thermometer beaker fig. 2.1  (a) (i) pour approximately 100 cm3 of hot water into the beaker.   (ii) read the temperature of the hot water and immediately start the stopclock.    in the first row of table 2.1, record this temperature \u03b8.   (iii) record in the table, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times  t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,  150 s, 180 s, 210 s, 240 s and 270 s. table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c 0  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) (i) calculate the average cooling rate x1 for the first 90 s of the experiment. use your  readings from the table and the equation x1 = (\u03b80 \u2013 \u03b890) t, where t = 90 s and \u03b80 and \u03b890  are the temperatures at 0 s and 90 s. give the unit for the cooling rate.  x1 =  ...[2]   (ii) calculate the average cooling rate x2 in the next 90 s of the experiment. use your readings  from the table and the equation x2 = (\u03b890 \u2013 \u03b8180) t, where t = 90 s and \u03b890 and \u03b8180 are the  temperatures at 90 s and 180 s.  x2 =  ...[1]   (iii) calculate the average cooling rate x3 in the last 90 s of the experiment. use your readings  from the table and the equation x3 = (\u03b8180 \u2013 \u03b8270) t, where t = 90 s and \u03b8180 and \u03b8270 are  the temperatures at 180 s and 270 s.  x3 =  ...[1]  (c) use your results from (b) to predict the average cooling rate x4 for the next 90 s, if the  experiment had been carried on for a longer time. justify your prediction by reference to your results.   prediction for x 4 = ... justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (d) state one precaution which you took to ensure that the temperature readings were as reliable  as possible.  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) a student wishes to find out if a similar pattern of results might be obtained under different  conditions.   state a variable which he could change in your experiment to explore this.  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 in this experiment, you will determine the resistance per unit length of a wire.  the circuit has been set up for you as shown in fig. 3.1.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. a v tpower supply crocodile clip resistance wire metre rule fig. 3.1  (a) (i) connect the crocodile clip to a length l of the resistance wire where l = 0.900 m measured  from the end t.    switch on. measure, and record in table 3.1, the potential difference v and the current i.  switch off.   (ii) repeat (a)(i)  for l = 0.800 m, 0.700 m, 0.600 m and 0.500 m. table 3.1 l / m v / v i / a r / \u03c9 0.900 0.800 0.700 0.600 0.500  [2]  (b) calculate, and record in the table, the resistance r of each length of the wire, using the  equation r = v i. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against l / m (x-axis).  [4]  (d) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g  =  ...[1]   (ii) for this experiment and wire, the resistance per unit length r of the wire is numerically  equal to g.    give a value for r, to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. include  the unit.  r =  ...[2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a converging lens by two methods.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 4.1 and 4.2. illuminated objectd f lensmirror card c fig. 4.1  (a) (i) arrange the illuminated object, lens and mirror as shown in fig. 4.1. set the distance d  between the mirror and the illuminated object to 20 cm.   (ii) move the lens until a sharp image appears on the front of the card c by the side of the  illuminated object.   (iii) measure, and record in table 4.1, the distance f between the lens and the illuminated  object. f is a value for the focal length of the lens in this experiment. table 4.1 d / cm f / cm 20 40  [1]  (b) (i) repeat steps (a)(i)  to (a)(iii)  for a distance d = 40 cm.   (ii) use your results from the table to calculate f1, an average value for f.  f1 =  ...[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) (i) set up the lens, illuminated object and screen as shown in fig. 4.2. illuminated object u lensscreen v fig. 4.2   (ii) set the distance u between the illuminated object and the lens to 20.0 cm.   (iii) move the screen until a sharp image of the illuminated object appears on the screen.   (iv) measure, and record in table 4.2, the distance v between the lens and the screen. table 4.2 u / cm v / cm f / cm 20.0 30.0  [3]   (v) repeat steps (c)(ii)  to (c)(iv)  for a value of  u = 30.0 cm.   (vi) for each value of u, calculate and record in the table the focal length f, using your results  from the table and the equation f = uv (u + v) .  (d) (i) use your results from table 4.2 to calculate f2, a second average value for f.  f2 =  ...[1]   (ii) a student suggests that f1 and f2 should be equal.    state whether your findings support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference  to your results. statement   .. justification     .. .  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (e) describe two precautions you took in order to obtain reliable results in this experiment. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (leg/jg) 91120/3 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4659947087* physics  0625/61 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2015  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 the class is determining the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1. pxy benchmetre rule pivot50.0  cm mark 90.0 cm mark fig. 1.1  (a)   a student places a load p at the 90.0 cm mark on a metre rule and then balances the rule on  a pivot.   (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the distance x from the 90.0 cm mark to the pivot.  x =  ...[1]   (ii) on fig. 1.1, measure the distance y from the pivot to the centre of the rule.  y =  ...[1]  (b) fig. 1.1 is drawn one tenth of actual size.   (i) calculate the actual distance x from the 90.0 cm mark to the pivot.  x =  ...   (ii) calculate the actual distance y from the pivot to the centre of the rule.  y =  ...  [1]   (iii) determine a value w1 for the weight of the metre rule using the equation w1 = px y,  where p = 2.0 n. p is the weight of the load p.  w1 =  ...[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the student keeps the pivot at the same position and moves load p to the 95.0 cm mark. he  places a load q of weight q = 1.0 n, on the metre rule. he adjusts its position so that the rule  balances.   on fig. 1.2 mark, with a letter z, the approximate position of the load q. y ou do not need to  carry out a detailed calculation. pa bench pivot50.0  cm mark 95.0 cm mark fig. 1.2  [1]  (d) the student uses the values of p and q and their distances from the pivot to calculate a  second value w2 for the weight of the rule.  1.12 n w2 =  ...   the student expects w1 and w2 to be the same.   state whether the results support his idea. justify your answer by reference to the results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (e) suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain exact results with this experiment.   .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 the class is investigating the cooling of water.  fig. 2.1 shows some of the apparatus used.  (a) a student measures the initial temperature of hot water in a beaker, as indicated by the  thermometer in fig. 2.1. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8090 100 110\u00b0c water fig. 2.1   record this initial temperature in the first row of table 2.1.  (b) the student allows the water in the beaker to cool and records the temperature at 30 s  intervals. the readings are shown in the table.   complete the column headings in the table. table 2.1 t / \u03b8 / 0 30 72 60 64 90 60 120 57 150 56  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c ( y-axis) against t / s (x-axis).  [5]  (d) (i) state whether the rate of cooling of the water in the beaker increases, decreases or  stays approximately constant during the period of cooling. the rate of cooling of the water  ... .[1]   (ii) justify your statement by reference to the graph.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 9] ",
            "6": "6 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 the class is investigating the resistance of lamp filaments in series and parallel circuits.  fig. 3.1 shows the first circuit used. power supply a v fig. 3.1  (a) (i) write down the readings shown on the meters in figs. 3.2 and 3.3.  fig. 3.20123 v894567 10  vs =  ... fig. 3.300.20.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 a is =  ...  [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance rs of the lamp filaments using the equation rs = vs is.  rs =  ...[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the student rearranges the circuit so that    \u0081 the lamps are in parallel   \u0081 the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit   \u0081 the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across the lamps.   (i) draw a diagram of this circuit using standard circuit symbols.  [2]   (ii) the student measures the potential difference vp across the lamps and the current ip in  the circuit.  2.0 v vp =  ...  0.60 a ip =  ...    calculate the resistance rp of the lamp filaments using the equation rp = vp ip.  rp =  ...   (iii) calculate the ratio rs rp.  rs rp =  ...  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) a student wishes to investigate whether the ratio rs rp for the two lamps is the same under all  conditions.   (i) suggest a variable that you could change in order to obtain further sets of readings.  .. .   (ii) explain briefly how you would change this variable.  .. .  .. .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 the class is investigating the refraction of light passing through a transparent block.  fig. 4.1 shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. ab dc p3 p4 eyeray\u2013trace sheet fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over a student draws the outline abcd  of a transparent block.  (a) (i) draw a normal nl at the centre of side ab. label the point e where the normal crosses  ab. label the point m where the normal crosses cd.   (ii) draw a line gh, parallel to ab and 6.0 cm above ab. label the point j where the normal  crosses gh.   (iii) draw a line, starting at e, to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30 \u00b0 to  the normal. label the point f where the line meets gh.  [3]  (b) the student places two pins p1 and p2 on the line fe.   on fig. 4.1, label suitable positions for pins p1 and p2. [1]  (c) the student observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the  images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   she places two pins p3 and p4 between her eye and the block so that p3 and p4, and the  images of p1 and p2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other. the positions of p3  and p4 are shown on fig. 4.1.   (i) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets cd and  label this point k.   (ii) draw the line ke.   [1]  (d) (i) measure and record the length a between points f and j.  a =  ...   (ii) measure and record the length b between points f and e.  b =  ...   (iii) measure and record the length c between points e and k.  c =  ...   (iv) measure and record the length d between points m and k.  d =  ...  [1]   (v) calculate n, the refractive index of the material of the block, using the equation n = ac bd  .  n =  ...[1]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) suggest one precaution that you would take with this experiment to obtain reliable results.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (f) fig. 4.2 shows a ray box. lamp slit fig. 4.2   this experiment can be carried out using a ray box instead of the pins.    on fig. 4.1, draw a ray box in a suitable position for this experiment. [1]  [total: 9]",
            "13": "13 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overblank page",
            "14": "14 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 the class is investigating the oscillations of a pendulum.   figs. 5.1 and 5.2 show the apparatus. bob one complete oscillationclamp clamp l  fig. 5.1 fig. 5.2   a student measures the length l of the pendulum and takes readings of the time t for  20 complete oscillations. she calculates the period t of the pendulum. t is the time taken for  one complete oscillation. she repeats the procedure for a range of lengths.   she plots a graph of t 2 / s2 against l / m. fig. 5.3 shows the graph. t 2 / s2 l / m0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.01234 fig. 5.3",
            "15": "15 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (a) using the graph, determine the length l of a pendulum that has a period t = 2.0 s. show  clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  l =  ...[3]  (b) explain why measuring the time for 20 swings, rather than for 1 swing, gives a more accurate  value for t.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) another student investigates the effect that changing the mass m of the pendulum bob has on  the period t of the pendulum.   (i) suggest how many different masses the student should use for this laboratory experiment.  number of different masses =  ...   (ii) suggest a range of suitable values for the masses.  suitable range of masses =  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/61/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (cw/jg) 91130/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *9466982423* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2015  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 the class is investigating a pendulum.  figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the pendulum. l bob one complete oscillationclamp clamp  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) a student adjusts the pendulum until its length l = 50.0 cm.   state one precaution that you would take to measure the length l as accurately as possible.  y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the student displaces the pendulum bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. she  measures the time t  for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see fig. 1.2).   (i) record the time t, in s, shown on the stopwatch in fig. 1.3. 0 : 28 40 fig. 1.3  t =  ... s [1]   (ii) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t =  ...[1]   (iii) explain why measuring the time for 20 oscillations, rather than 1 oscillation, gives a more  accurate value for t.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) the student adjusts the length of the pendulum until its length l = 100.0 cm. she repeats the  procedure and obtains a value for the period t.       2.06 s  t =  ...   another student suggests that doubling the length l of the pendulum should double the  period t.   state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  [2]  (d) to continue the investigation of the relationship between the length l of the pendulum and the  period t, it is necessary to use a range of values of length l.   list additional l values that you would plan to use in the laboratory.  .. .[2] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 the class is investigating the cooling of water.  (a) a student pours 100 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. he places a thermometer in the water.  fig. 2.1 shows the thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8090 100 110\u00b0c water fig. 2.1   (i) record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water as shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.1.  \u03b8h =  ...[1]   (ii) state one precaution that you would take to ensure that the temperature reading for the  hot water is as reliable as possible.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the student adds 50 cm3 of cold water to the hot water. he records the temperature \u03b81.       71 \u00b0c  \u03b81 =  ...   calculate the decrease in temperature \u03b8a using the equation \u03b8a = (\u03b8h \u2013 \u03b81).  \u03b8a =  ...[1]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the student adds a further 100 cm3 of cold water to the water in the beaker. he records the  temperature \u03b82.       57 \u00b0c  \u03b82 =  ...   calculate the decrease in temperature \u03b8b using the equation \u03b8b = (\u03b81 \u2013 \u03b82).  \u03b8b =  ...[1]  (d) suggest two factors, other than the volume and temperature of the cold water added, that  affect the decrease in temperature of the hot water. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  (e) describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain an accurate value for the volume  of water. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 the class is investigating the resistance of lamps.  fig. 3.1 shows the first circuit used. power supply av fig. 3.1  (a) a student measures the potential difference vp across the lamps and the current ip in the  circuit. the readings are shown in figs. 3.2 and 3.3. 0123 v894567 10 00.20.4 0.60.8 1.0 a  fig. 3.2 fig. 3.3   (i) write down the readings shown on the meters.  vp =  ...  ip =  ...   [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance rp of the lamp filaments using the equation rp = vp ip.  rp =  ...[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the student rearranges the circuit so that    \u0081 the lamps are in series   \u0081 the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit   \u0081 the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across all three lamps.   in the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit using standard circuit symbols. [2]  (c) the student measures the potential difference vs across the lamps and the current is in the  circuit in (b).       2.5 v  vs =  ...       0.22 a  is =  ...   calculate the resistance rs of the lamp filaments using the equation rs = vs is.  rs =  ...[1]  (d) (i) a student wishes to vary the current in the first circuit, shown in fig. 3.1, using a variable  resistor.    in the space below, draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 3.1, label with x a suitable position in the first circuit for a variable resistor used  to vary the current in all the lamps. [1] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 the class is investigating reflection using a plane mirror.  fig. 4.1 shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. the student uses an a4 sheet of plain paper. mr ba eye30\u00b0 ray-trace sheete fig. 4.1  (a) on fig. 4.1, the mirror is placed along the line mr. label the normal nl. [1]  (b) the student places two pins p1 and p2 on line ab at a suitable distance apart, so that she  can accurately observe the reflection of line ab.   suggest a suitable distance between the two pins.  distance =  ...[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the student determines the angle between the reflected ray and the normal by viewing the  images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1. she places two  pins p3 and p4, some distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p2 and p1, all  appear exactly one behind the other. she draws a line joining the positions of p3 and p4.   she measures the angle \u03b1 between the normal and the line joining the positions of p3 and p4.  at this stage the angle \u03b8 between the mirror and line mr is 0 \u00b0, as shown in table 4.1.   she moves the mirror to a new position, shown by the dotted line on fig. 4.1, at an angle  \u03b8 = 10 \u00b0 to mr. she repeats the procedure with pins p3 and p4.   she continues using angles \u03b8 = 20 \u00b0, 30 \u00b0 and 40 \u00b0. the readings are shown in table 4.1. table 4.1 \u03b8 / \u00b0\u03b1 / \u00b0  0 3 210  5020  6930  9240 108   (i) plot a graph of  \u03b1 / \u00b0 (y-axis) against \u03b8 / \u00b0 (x-axis).  [5]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015  (ii) state whether your graph line shows that the angle \u03b1 is directly proportional to the  angle \u03b8. justify your statement by reference to your graph line. statement   .. justification     .. . [2]   (iii) suggest why, when this experiment is carried out carefully, the points plotted may not all  lie on the graph line.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 the class is investigating the image formed by a converging lens.  fig. 5.1 shows the experimental set up. illuminated object u lensscreenv fig. 5.1  a student positions the illuminated object and the lens and then moves the screen away from the  lens until a sharply focused image of the object is formed on the screen.  the student measures the distances u and v, as shown in fig. 5.1.       25.8 cm  u =  ...       36.2 cm  v =  ...  (a) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = uv (u + v). give your answer to a  suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  f =  ...[2]  (b) state two precautions you would take in the laboratory in order to obtain reliable measurements  when doing this experiment. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2] question 5 continues on the next page.",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) the object in fig. 5.1 is an illuminated triangle, as shown in fig. 5.2. fig. 5.2   suggest two differences between the appearance of the illuminated object and the well- focused image on the screen. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2] [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s15_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (rw/sw) 91114/3 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *6795210236* physics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2015  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 the class is determining the mass of an object using two strings.  the apparatus is set up as shown in fig. 1.1. strings metre rulex 100  gpoint a point b76 75 7477 26 2527 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) record the scale reading a0 at point a, where the string crosses the rule, as indicated in  the enlarged section of fig. 1.1.  a0 =  ...   (ii) record the scale reading b0 at point b.  b0 =  ...  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) a loop of string is placed around the vertical strings so that they are pulled closer together, as  shown in fig. 1.2. the loop is horizontal and is just above the rule. loop da point a1 point b1x 100  gdb72 71 70 33 3234 fig. 1.2   (i) record the scale reading a1 at point a1 as indicated in the enlarged section of fig. 1.2.  a1 =  ...   (ii) record the scale reading b1 at point b1.  b1 =  ...  [1]   (iii) calculate and record the distance da, shown in fig. 1.2. use your results from (a)(i)  and  (b)(i) . da is the difference between a0 and a1.  da =  ...   (iv) calculate and record the distance db. use your results from (a)(ii)  and (b)(ii) .    db is the difference between b1 and b0.  db =  ...  [1]  (c) calculate the mass m of object x, using your results from (b)(iii)  and (b)(iv)  and the equation  m = k db da  where k = 100 g.  m =  ...[2]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (d) explain how you could ensure that the loop is horizontal in (b). y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) a student suggests that da and db might be directly proportional to each other.   briefly describe how this experiment could be extended to investigate the suggestion.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 a student is studying the cooling of water.  she is using the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1. \u2013100 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 090 100 110\u00b0c thermometer beaker fig. 2.1  (a) record the room temperature \u03b8r as indicated by the thermometer in fig. 2.1.  \u03b8r =  ...[1]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (b) the student pours approximately 100 cm3 of hot water into the beaker.   she reads the thermometer at the start of the experiment and again at times t = 30 s, 60 s,  90 s, 120 s, 150 s, 180 s, 210 s, 240 s and 270 s.   her readings of the temperature \u03b8 are shown in table 2.1.   complete the table. table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c 0 85.0 82.080.077.575.574.072.070.569.067.5  [1]  (c) (i) calculate the average cooling rate x 1 for the first 90 s of the experiment. use the readings  from the table and the equation x1 = (\u03b80 \u2013 \u03b890) t , where t = 90 s and \u03b80 and \u03b890 are the  temperatures at 0 s and 90 s. give the unit for the cooling rate.  x1 =  ...[2]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) calculate the average cooling rate x2 in the next 90 s of the experiment. use the readings  from the table and the equation x2 = (\u03b890 \u2013 \u03b8180) t , where t = 90 s and \u03b890 and \u03b8180 are the  temperatures at 90 s and 180 s.  x2 =  ...   (iii) calculate the average cooling rate x3 in the last 90 s of the experiment. use the readings  from the table and the equation x3 = (\u03b8180 \u2013 \u03b8270) t , where t = 90 s and \u03b8180 and \u03b8270 are  the temperatures at 180 s and 270 s.  x3 =  ...  [1]  (d) use your results from (c) to predict the average cooling rate x4 for the next 90 s, if the  experiment had been carried on for a longer time. justify your prediction by reference to your results.   prediction for x 4 = ... justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (e) state two precautions that you would take in this experiment to ensure that the temperature  readings are as reliable as possible. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 some students are determining the resistance per unit length of a wire.  they are using the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. apower supply resistance wire metre rule l fig. 3.1  the crocodile clip is connected to a length l of the wire and the current and potential difference are  measured.  (a) on fig. 3.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter correctly connected to measure the potential  difference across the selected length l of the resistance wire. [1]  (b) the potential difference v and current i for various lengths l of the wire are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 l / m v / v i / a r / \u03c9 0.900 2.98 0.42 0.800 2.86 0.46 0.700 2.89 0.53 0.600 2.82 0.60 0.500 2.83 0.72   for each value of l, calculate and record in the table the resistance r of the wire, using the  equation r = v i . [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against l / m (x-axis).  [4]  (d) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph.    show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  ...[1]   (ii) for this experiment and wire, the resistance per unit length r of the wire is numerically  equal to g.    give a value for r, to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. include  the unit.  r =  ...[2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 a student is determining the focal length of a converging lens by two methods.  first, he uses the apparatus shown in fig. 4.1. illuminated objectd f lensmirror card c fig. 4.1  (a) he sets the distance d between the mirror and the illuminated object to 30.0 cm.   he then moves the lens until a sharp image appears on card c by the side of the illuminated  object.   (i) on fig. 4.1, measure the distance f between the illuminated object and the lens.  f =  ...[1]   (ii) fig. 4.1 is drawn to 1/5th scale.    calculate, and record in table 4.1, the actual distance f between the illuminated object  and the lens. f is a value for the focal length of the lens in this experiment. table 4.1 d / cm f / cm 30.0 50.0 15.7  [1]  (b) the student repeats the procedure for a distance d = 50.0 cm. his result is shown in the table.   use the results from the table to calculate f1, an average value of f.  f1 =  ...[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the student arranges the lens, illuminated object and a screen as shown in fig. 4.2. illuminated object u lensscreen v fig. 4.2   he measures the distance u between the illuminated object and the lens.   he moves the screen until a sharp image of the illuminated object appears on the screen, and  measures the distance v between the lens and the screen.  20.0 cm his readings are: u =  ...  72.5 cm  v =  ...   (i) calculate f2, another value for the focal length of the lens, using the student\u2019s results  and the equation f2 = uv (u + v) .  f2 =  ...[1]   (ii) a student suggests that f1 and f2 should be equal.    state whether your findings support this idea. justify your statement by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  [2]  (d) describe a precaution that you would take in order to obtain reliable results in this experiment.   .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 a student is investigating the behaviour of a solar panel.  she is using the apparatus shown in fig. 5.1. v ae stand lamp solar panel fig. 5.1  she switches the lamp on. she changes the angle \u03b8 between the solar panel and the vertical and  measures the voltage produced at each angle.  figs. 5.2 and 5.3 show the solar panel at two different angles. the voltmeter readings for these  angles are shown in table 5.1. stand solar panel  fig. 5.2  fig. 5.3",
            "13": "13 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (a) (i) measure each value of the angle \u03b8 and record it in the table. table 5.1 \u03b8 / \u00b0 v / v fig. 5.2 3.62fig. 5.3 2.50  [1]   (ii) explain what practical steps should be taken to obtain accurate measurements of  \u03b8 in  the experiment. y ou may draw a diagram to show the procedure.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the student finds that a reading of 0.63 v is obtained even when the lamp is switched off.   suggest a reason for this and explain what she could do to overcome this problem. reason  ...   .. . solution  .   .. .  [2]  (c) suggest two aspects of the apparatus that should be kept constant in order to make the  results of the experiment as reliable as possible. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/63/m/j/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib15 11_0625_11/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over       *3168315335* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2015     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15  1 which option contains only apparatus that could be used to determine the volume of a small  block of unknown material?  a measuring cylinder, metre rule  b measuring cylinder, stopwatch  c metre rule, balance  d metre rule, stopwatch      2 the graph represents the motion of a car.    0 0 20  10  5 10 15 20 25 30  time  / sspeed m / s     what is the distance travelled by the car while it is moving at a constant speed?  a 100  m b 150  m c 250  m d 300  m      3 a car travels along the route pqrst in 30 minutes.    pq rs t10 km5 km 5 km 10 km     what is the average speed of the car?  a 10  km  / hour b 20  km  / hour c 30  km  / hour d 60  km  / hour     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15 [turn over  4 the mass of an object is measured on earth. the mass is 5.0  kg.    the object is taken to the moon. the mass of the object is measured on the moon.    what is the mass of the object on the moon?  a 0 kg  b more than 0  kg, but less than 5.0  kg  c 5.0  kg  d more than 5.0  kg      5 a student wishes to determine the density of the solid block shown.        which quantities must be known?  a the area of the shaded face and the volume of the block  b the area of the shaded face and the weight of the block  c the mass of the block and the height of the block  d the mass of the block and the volume of the block     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15  6 a heavy beam rests on two supports. the diagram shows the only three forces f 1, f2 and f 3  acting on the beam.    f1 f2 f3support supportbeam     the beam is in equilibrium.    which statement is correct?  a all the forces are equal in size.  b the resultant force on the beam is in the opposite direction to the resultant turning effect.  c the resultant force on the beam is zero and the resultant turning effect on the beam is zero.  d the total upward force is twice the total downward force.     7 which list contains only properties of an object that can be changed by a force?  a direction of motion, mass, shape  b direction of motion, mass, speed  c direction of motion, shape, speed  d mass, shape, speed    8 what needs to be known to calculate the work done by a force acting on an object?     the size of   the force the distance  the force  moves the  object the time for  which the force  acts   a \u0013 \u0013 \u0013 key  b \u0013 \u0013 \u0017 \u0013= needed  c \u0013 \u0017 \u0013 \u0017= not needed  d \u0013 \u0017 \u0017     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15 [turn over  9 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel \u2192 generator \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 turbines  b nuclear fuel \u2192 generator \u2192 turbines \u2192 reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 generator \u2192 turbines  d nuclear fuel \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 turbines \u2192 generator      10 the diagram shows a manometer containing a liquid. the manometer is used to find the  difference between the pressure of a gas and atmospheric pressure.    which distance represents this pressure difference?    bac dgas pressure liquid    11 four physics teachers investigate pressure. they wear identical clothes and lie on different beds  of nails.    the table gives the weight of each teacher and the total area of contact between the teacher and  the nails.    which teacher experiences the least pressure from the nails?     weight of  teacher  / n total area of  contact  / cm2  a 700 13  b 800 20  c 900 14  d 1000 21    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15  12 a cylinder of constant volume contains a fixed mass of gas. the gas is cooled.    what happens to the pressure of the gas and what happens to the kinetic energy of the gas  molecules?     pressure of gas kinetic energy   of molecules  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      13 a swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day.    why does she feel cold even though the air is warm?  a the less energetic water molecules on her skin escape quickly.  b the more energetic water molecules on her skin do not escape quickly.  c the water on her skin does not evaporate quickly enough to keep her warm.  d the water on her skin evaporates quickly and cools her skin.    14 a circular metal disc is heated.    which quantity decreases?  a its density  b its diameter  c its thickness  d its volume     15 the same quantity of thermal (heat) energy is given to two objects x and y. the temperature rise  of object x is less than the temperature rise of object y.    what accounts for this difference?  a x has a larger thermal capacity than y.  b x is a better thermal conductor than y.  c y has a larger thermal capacity than x.  d y is a better thermal conductor than x.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15 [turn over  16 the air in a room is heated by a heater. the diagr am shows the circulation of the air in the room.    roomcirculation of air heater     which statement about the air that is heated is correct?  a the air contracts and becomes less dense.  b the air contracts and becomes more dense.  c the air expands and becomes less dense.  d the air expands and becomes more dense.     17 four rods are made from different metals p, q, r and s. the rods have equal lengths and equal  diameters. the rods are heated at one end, in the same way.    the table shows the time taken for the temperatur e at the other end of each rod to rise by 1.0  \u00b0c.    which metal is the best conductor of thermal energy (heat)?    metal time taken  / s  p 35  q 30  r 45  s 40    a metal p b metal q c metal r d metal s    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15  18 the diagram shows a side view of a water wave at a particular time. the diagram is drawn full  size.    direction of travel of wave     which statement about the wave is correct?  a the wave is longitudinal and the frequency can be measured from the diagram.  b the wave is longitudinal and the wavelength can be measured from the diagram.  c the wave is transverse and the frequency can be measured from the diagram.  d the wave is transverse and the wavelength can be measured from the diagram.      19 the diagram shows a water wave approaching a barrier with a gap.    barrier direction of travel water wavep     the wave reaches point p.    what is the name of the effect that causes the wave to reach point p?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction      20 the diagram represents the electromagnetic spectrum.    some regions have been labelled, and some labels are missing.    which region should be labelled as infra-red waves?    radio  waves a b visible  light c d \u03b3-rays    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15 [turn over  21 a student draws a diagram representing three rays of light from point p passing through a  converging lens. each point labelled f is a principal focus of the lens.    ffp ray x ray y ray zlens     which of the rays has the student drawn correctly?  a ray x and ray y  b ray x and ray z  c ray y only  d ray z only     22 the diagram shows a ray of light inside a glass rod. the critical angle for the light in the glass is  42\u00b0.    40\u00b0normal glass rodray of lightairsurface of glass rod     which row shows what happens to the light when it reaches the surface of the glass rod?     any light  reflected? any light  refracted?  a no no  b no yes  c yes no  d yes yes     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15  23 which row states whether light waves and whether sound waves can travel in a vacuum?   sound waves light waves  a no no  b no yes  c yes no  d yes yes      24 sounds are produced by vibrating objects. a certain object vibrates but a person nearby cannot  hear any sound.    which statement could explain why nothing is heard?  a the amplitude of the sound waves is too large.  b the frequency of the vibration is too high.  c the sound waves are transverse.  d the speed of the sound waves is too high.      25 which row states whether each metal is ferrous or non-ferrous?   ferrous non-ferrous  a aluminium copper  b copper iron  c iron steel  d steel aluminium     26 which procedure may be used to demagnetise a steel bar?  a cooling it in a freezer for several hours  b earthing it with a copper wire for several seconds  c removing it slowly from a coil carrying an alternating current (a.c.)  d rubbing it in one direction with a woollen cloth    27 what is the unit of electrical power?  a ampere  b joule  c volt  d watt   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15 [turn over  28 some resistors are made using one type of wire. two different lengths of wire are available. each  length is available in two different diameters.    which wire has the highest resistance?  a the wire with the greater length and the larger diameter  b the wire with the greater length and the smaller diameter  c the wire with the smaller length and the larger diameter  d the wire with the smaller length and the smaller diameter     29 four students are each given an identical resistor and asked to find its resistance. they each  measure the potential difference across the resistor and the current in it.   one student makes a mistake.   which row shows the results of the student that makes a mistake?   potential difference  / v current  / a  a 1.2 0.500  b 2.4 1.100  c 1.5 0.625  d 3.0 1.250     30 what is the circuit symbol for a variable resistor?    a b c d     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15  31 the diagram shows a circuit containing three ammeters p, q and r.    a a a qr p     which statement about the readings on the ammeters is correct?  a the reading on p is equal to the reading on q.  b the reading on p is equal to the reading on r.  c the reading on q is greater than the reading on p.  d the reading on q is greater than the reading on r.      32 the diagram shows a light-dependent resistor (ldr) connected in a potential divider circuit.    v     the brightness of the light falling on the ldr is increased.    which row shows what happens to the resistanc e of the ldr, and what happens to the reading  on the voltmeter?     resistance of ldr reading on voltmeter  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15 [turn over  33 four lamps are each labelled '60  w 230  v'.    in which circuit are the lamps connected so that they operate at normal brightness?    a 230  vb 230  vc  230  vd  230  v      34 a step-up transformer is used before electricity is transmitted by overhead cables.    which statement explains why the step-up transformer is used?  a it increases the current to increase the speed at which the electricity travels.  b it increases the current to reduce energy loss in the cables.  c it increases the voltage to increase the speed at which the electricity travels.  d it increases the voltage to reduce energy loss in the cables.    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15  35 a current-carrying wire xy lies in the magnetic field between the two poles of a u-shaped  electromagnet. a force acts on the wire xy because of the magnetic field.    current-carrying wireelectromagnety x    each of the following actions is carried out separately.    \u25cf the current in the wire xy is reversed.  \u25cf the magnetic field is reversed.  \u25cf both the current in the wire xy and the magnetic field are reversed at the same  time.    how many of these actions cause the directi on of the force on the wire xy to be reversed?  a 0 b 1 c 2 d 3     36 a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field experiences a turning effect.    nspower supply +\u2013 coil    how can the turning effect be increased?  a increase the number of turns on the coil.  b reduce the size of the current.  c reverse the direction of the magnetic field.  d use thinner wire for the coil.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15 [turn over  37 the diagram shows cathode rays entering an electric field between two charged plates.    \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013+++ +++ cathode rays     how does the path of the cathode rays change and why?  a they move towards the negative plate because cathode rays have a negative charge.  b they move towards the negative plate because cathode rays have a positive charge.  c they move towards the positive plate because cathode rays have a negative charge.  d they move towards the positive plate because cathode rays have a positive charge.      38 the nuclide symbol for radioactive polonium is po210 84 .    a nucleus of this type of polonium emits an \u03b1-particle.    what is the proton number (atomic number) of the nucleus after it has emitted the \u03b1-particle?  a 82 b 83 c 84 d 85     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/11/o/n/15  39 a student investigates how the radiation from a radioactive source changes with time.    the table shows the results from the detector used by the student.    time  /  minutes count rate  /  counts per minute 0 340  2.0 180  4.0 100  6.0 60  8.0 40    the experiment is repeated by many other students, who also measure the count rate every two  minutes.    the half-life of the source is known to be exactly 2.0 minutes.    why is the measured count rate always  greater  than half the previous value?  a radioactive emissions occur randomly with time.  b the detector used is very close to the source.  c there is background radiation present.  d the radioactive source is decaying.     40 the nuclide notation for radium-226 is ra226 88 .    how many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226?  a 0 b 88 c 138 d 226       "
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib15 11_0625_12/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over       *4829649266* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2015     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  1 the diagram shows a measuring cylinder used to measure the volume of a small stone.    1020304050cm3 1020304050cm3 stone     what is the volume of the stone?  a 8  cm3 b 9  cm3 c 14  cm3 d 26  cm3      2 the table shows the readings on a car speedometer at 5 second intervals.    time  / s h/kmspeed     0 0  5 30  10 50  15 60  20 65    which row describes the speed and the acceleration of the car?   speed acceleration  a decreasing zero  b decreasing not zero  c increasing zero  d increasing not zero    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15 [turn over  3 a car travels along the route pqrst in 30 minutes.    pq rs t10 km5 km 5 km 10 km     what is the average speed of the car?  a 10  km  / hour b 20  km  / hour c 30  km  / hour d 60  km  / hour      4 which statement about mass or weight is correct?  a mass is a force.  b mass is measured in newtons.  c weight is a force.  d weight is measured in kilograms.     5 two cylinders are made of the same metal. both cylinders have the same cross-sectional area  but one is longer than the other.    cylinder 1 cylinder 2    which quantity is the same for both cylinders?  a density  b mass  c resistance  d volume     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  6 a heavy beam rests on two supports. the diagram shows the only three forces f 1, f2 and f 3  acting on the beam.    f1 f2 f3support supportbeam     the beam is in equilibrium.    which statement is correct?  a all the forces are equal in size.  b the resultant force on the beam is in the opposite direction to the resultant turning effect.  c the resultant force on the beam is zero and the resultant turning effect on the beam is zero.  d the total upward force is twice the total downward force.     7 the diagrams show four solid cones. the centre of mass of each cone is marked by a point  labelled m.    which cone is the most stable?    abcd mmmm       8 a car is stationary at the top of a hill with the engine switched off. the brakes are released and the car rolls down the hill.    at which labelled point does the car have the greatest kinetic energy? ignore friction.    a b d c    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15 [turn over  9 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel \u2192 generator \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 turbines  b nuclear fuel \u2192 generator \u2192 turbines \u2192 reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 generator \u2192 turbines  d nuclear fuel \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 turbines \u2192 generator      10 the table gives four forces and the surface area on which each force acts.    which row gives the largest pressure on the surface?     force  / n area  / m2  a 20 2  b 40 2  c 20 4  d 40 4      11 what does a barometer measure?  a the current in a circuit  b the density of a liquid   c the pressure of air   d the temperature of an object      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  12 the diagrams represent the molecules in two different states of matter. the arrows show the  motion of the molecules.    state 2 state 1molecule     what is state 1, and what is state 2?     state 1 state 2  a gas liquid  b gas solid  c liquid gas  d liquid solid     13 a swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day.    why does she feel cold even though the air is warm?  a the less energetic water molecules on her skin escape quickly.  b the more energetic water molecules on her skin do not escape quickly.  c the water on her skin does not evaporate quickly enough to keep her warm.  d the water on her skin evaporates quickly and cools her skin.     14 a circular metal disc is heated.    which quantity decreases?  a its density  b its diameter  c its thickness  d its volume     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15 [turn over  15 a block of copper and a block of lead are heated. the internal energy of each block increases by  the same amount.    the block of copper has a lower thermal capacity than the block of lead.    which conclusion can be made from this information?  a the temperature increase of the copper is greater than the temperature increase of the lead.  b the temperature increase of the copper is the same as the temperature increase of the lead.  c the temperature increase of the copper is less than the temperature increase of the lead.  d the melting point of copper is lower than the melting point of lead.      16 in a refrigerator, the cooling unit can be fitted either at the top or at the bottom. in an oven, the  heater can be fitted either at the top or at the bottom.    which row shows the best position for the cooling unit and the best position for the heater?     cooling unit heater  a bottom bottom  b bottom top  c top bottom  d top top      17 a girl is outdoors. she warms her hands by holding them near a fire, as shown.    hands fire      how does the heat from the fire reach her hands?  a conduction only  b convection and conduction  c convection and radiation  d radiation only     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  18 the diagram represents a water wave.    4 m 2 m     which row shows the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave?     amplitude  / m wavelength  / m  a 1 2  b 1 4  c 2 2  d 2 4     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15 [turn over  19 the diagram represents circular wavefronts coming from point s. the wavefronts strike a barrier  and are reflected so that they appear to come from point s 1.    ss1 barrier    which diagram shows the reflected wavefronts?    c dba ss1 ss1ss1 ss1      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  20 a plane mirror is fitted to a wall.    which statement about the image formed by the mirror is correct?  a the image is real.  b the image is left to right (laterally inverted).  c the image is smaller than the object.  d the image is upside down.     21 a student draws a diagram representing three rays of light from point p passing through a  converging lens. each point labelled f is a principal focus of the lens.    ffp ray x ray y ray zlens     which of the rays has the student drawn correctly?  a ray x and ray y  b ray x and ray z  c ray y only  d ray z only      22 which group contains only electromagnetic waves?  a light waves, radio waves, \u03b3-rays  b light waves, radio waves, sound waves  c light waves, sound waves, \u03b3-rays  d radio waves, sound waves, \u03b3-rays    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15 [turn over  23 two sounds x and y are produced by loudspeakers.  the amplitude and frequency of each sound wave is given in the table.   amplitude  / mm frequency  / hz  x 1.3 475  y 2.0 235    how does sound y compare with sound x?  a y is louder and has a higher pitch.  b y is louder and has a lower pitch.  c y is quieter and has a higher pitch.  d y is quieter and has a lower pitch.     24 sounds are produced by vibrating objects. a certain object vibrates but a person nearby cannot  hear any sound.    which statement could explain why nothing is heard?  a the amplitude of the sound waves is too large.  b the frequency of the vibration is too high.  c the sound waves are transverse.  d the speed of the sound waves is too high.     25 which statement about a permanent bar magnet is correct?  a it is made from a soft magnetic material.  b it repels a non-magnetic material.  c its field lines cross each other where the magnetic field is strong.  d its n-pole repels the n-pole of another magnet.    26 which procedure may be used to demagnetise a steel bar?  a cooling it in a freezer for several hours  b earthing it with a copper wire for several seconds  c removing it slowly from a coil carrying an alternating current (a.c.)  d rubbing it in one direction with a woollen cloth    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  27 two plastic rods p and q are both negatively charged. rod p hangs freely.    xy rod p rod q     the end of rod q is brought near to end x of rod p, and then near to end y  of rod p.    what happens to the rods in each position?     near end x  near end y   a they attract they attract  b they attract they repel  c they repel they attract  d they repel they repel     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15 [turn over  28 which circuit shows a voltmeter measuring the p.d. across a resistor?    va vb vc vd      29 a student has four pieces of resistance wire made of the same material. each piece is connected  in turn between the terminals x and y in the circuit.    xy     in which wire is the current the largest?     length of wire  / m diameter of wire  / mm  a 0.5 0.5  b 0.5 1.0  c 1.0 0.5  d 1.0 1.0    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  30 a student connects the circuit shown.    1 2 34     which switches must be closed for both the bell to ring and the lamp to light?  a 1 and 4 only  b 2 and 3 only  c 1, 2 and 3 only  d 1, 2, 3 and 4      31 two resistors are connected in parallel.    20 \u03c9 30 \u03c9     which value could be the resistance of the combination?  a 12  \u03c9 b 20  \u03c9 c 25  \u03c9 d 50  \u03c9     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15 [turn over  32 the circuit contains a variable potential divider pq, a lamp and a voltmeter.    power supply +\u2013 pq sliding contact v    the sliding contact of the potential divider is moved towards end q.    what happens to the brightness of the lamp and what happens to the voltmeter reading?     brightness of lamp voltmeter reading  a becomes brighter decreases  b becomes brighter increases  c does not change decreases  d does not change increases      33 four lamps are each labelled '60  w 230  v'.    in which circuit are the lamps connected so that they operate at normal brightness?    a 230  vb 230  vc  230  vd  230  v     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  34 a fuse is used to protect an electric circuit.    which diagram shows where the fuse should be connected?    live  neutral a  live  neutral b  live  neutral c d  live  neutral      35 a transformer has 2400 turns on its primary coil and 200 turns on its secondary coil.    secondary coil 200 turnsprimary coil 2400 turns output voltage 240  v     what input voltage is needed to give an output voltage of 240  v?  a 12  v b 20  v c 240  v d 2880  v    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15 [turn over  36 a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field experiences a turning effect.    nspower supply +\u2013 coil    how can the turning effect be increased?  a increase the number of turns on the coil.  b reduce the size of the current.  c reverse the direction of the magnetic field.  d use thinner wire for the coil.     37 a beam of cathode rays enters an electric field between two charged plates.    which diagram shows a path that the rays could take?    \u2013 +a \u2013 +b \u2013 +c \u2013 +dcathode rays cathode rayscathode rays cathode rays     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  38 radioactive carbon-14 decays into nitrogen by emitting a \u03b2-particle. the equation below  represents the decay.    c14 p  \u2192  n14 7  +  \u03b20 q    what are the values of p and q?     p q  a 6 1  b 6 \u20131  c 8 1  d 8 \u20131     39 a student investigates how the radiation from a radioactive source changes with time.    the table shows the results from the detector used by the student.    time  /  minutes count rate  /  counts per minute 0 340  2.0 180  4.0 100  6.0 60  8.0 40    the experiment is repeated by many other students, who also measure the count rate every two minutes.    the half-life of the source is known to be exactly 2.0 minutes.    why is the measured count rate always  greater  than half the previous value?  a radioactive emissions occur randomly with time.  b the detector used is very close to the source.  c there is background radiation present.  d the radioactive source is decaying.      40 the nuclide notation for radium-226 is ra226 88 .    how many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226?  a 0 b 88 c 138 d 226   ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  blank page ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/12/o/n/15  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib15 11_0625_13/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over       *1302138713* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice  october/november 2015     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15  1 a student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of a quantity of water.    which action would make her result less accurate?  a making sure her eye is level with the water surface  b making sure the cylinder is vertical  c reading the bottom of the meniscus  d using the largest measuring cylinder possible     2 the diagram shows the distance-time graph for a car.    at which labelled point is the car moving with constant speed?    a d b cdistance 0 0t i m e    3 a car travels along the route pqrst in 30 minutes.    pq rs t10 km5 km 5 km 10 km     what is the average speed of the car?  a 10  km  / hour b 20  km  / hour c 30  km  / hour d 60  km  / hour     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15 [turn over  4 what is the weight of an object?  a the force of gravity on the object  b the gravitational potential energy of the object  c the internal energy of the object  d the mass of the object      5 the mass of a piece of metal is 1200  g.    a measuring cylinder contains 150  cm3 of water.    the piece of metal is put into the measuring cylinder. the water level rises to 250  cm3 and covers  the metal.    what is the density of the metal?  a 3.0  g / cm3 b 4.8  g / cm3 c 8.0  g / cm3 d 12.0  g / cm3     6 a heavy beam rests on two supports. the diagram shows the only three forces f 1, f2 and f 3  acting on the beam.    f1 f2 f3support supportbeam     the beam is in equilibrium.    which statement is correct?  a all the forces are equal in size.  b the resultant force on the beam is in the opposite direction to the resultant turning effect.  c the resultant force on the beam is zero and the resultant turning effect on the beam is zero.  d the total upward force is twice the total downward force.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15  7 a heavy truck on wheels has a platform attached to it.    a man stands on the platform.    the truck does not fall over.    which position a, b, c or d could be the centre of mass of the whole system (truck, platform and  man)?    truck abcdplatformman       8 which row gives the energy change in a battery and the energy change in a solar cell?     battery solar cell  a chemical to electrical electrical to light  b chemical to electrical light to electrical  c electrical to chemical electrical to light  d electrical to chemical light to electrical     9 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel \u2192 generator \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 turbines  b nuclear fuel \u2192 generator \u2192 turbines \u2192 reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 generator \u2192 turbines  d nuclear fuel \u2192 reactor and boiler \u2192 turbines \u2192 generator     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15 [turn over  10 a man is in contact with the floor.   in which of these situations does he produce the least pressure on the floor?  a kneeling  b lying flat on his back  c standing on both feet  d standing on one foot      11 the water in a lake is at 5  \u00b0c. a diver measures the pressure of the water at two different depths  in the lake. he repeats the measurements on a different day when the water is at 15  \u00b0c.    the density of the water decreases when its temperature increases.    which combination of depth and temperat ure produces the greatest water pressure?     depth  / m temperature  / \u00b0c  a 10 5  b 10  15  c 20 5  d 20  15      12 a car tyre has a constant volume.    why does the pressure of the air in the tyre increase when its temperature increases?  a the air molecules hit each other less often.  b the air molecules hit the inside of the tyre less often.  c the average speed of the air molecules in the tyre is greater.  d there are more air molecules in the tyre.     13 a swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day.    why does she feel cold even though the air is warm?  a the less energetic water molecules on her skin escape quickly.  b the more energetic water molecules on her skin do not escape quickly.  c the water on her skin does not evaporate quickly enough to keep her warm.  d the water on her skin evaporates quickly and cools her skin.    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15  14 a circular metal disc is heated.    which quantity decreases?  a its density  b its diameter  c its thickness  d its volume     15 the diagram shows a mercury-in-glass thermometer. the scale of the thermometer has not been  marked.    l     the length l increases uniformly with temperature.    the length l is measured when the thermometer bulb is placed in water at 0  \u00b0c, and also when it  is in water at 100  \u00b0c. the table shows the results.    temperature  / \u00b0c length l / cm  0 2.0  100 26.0    what is the value of l when the bulb is placed in water at 50  \u00b0c?  a 12.0  cm b 13.0  cm c 14.0  cm d 16.0  cm     16 a heating engineer fits a heater to the ceiling of an office so that workers in the office are kept  warm.   how does thermal energy reach the workers below the heater?  a conduction and convection  b convection and radiation  c convection only  d radiation only     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15 [turn over  17 which row shows how heating changes the density of air, and the name of the method of energy  transfer caused by this density change?   density method of energy transfer  a decreases conduction  b decreases convection  c increases conduction  d increases convection     18 which row correctly defines a type of wave and gives a correct example?     wave type direction of vibrations example  a longitudinal parallel to direction of wave travel radio waves  b longitudinal perpendicular to direction of wave travel light waves  c transverse parallel to direction of wave travel light waves  d transverse perpendicular to direction of wave travel radio waves    19 a water wave moves quickly in deep water.    deep watershallow water water waves    the wave now enters shallow water and its speed decreases.    which row shows what happens to the frequency of the wave, and what happens to the wavelength of the wave?     frequency wavelength  a decreases decreases  b decreases does not change  c does not change decreases  d does not change does not change    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15  20 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.    \u03b3-rays x-rays ultraviolet visible light infra-red microwavesradio waves increasing ..    a word is missing from the label below the spectrum.    which word is missing?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength      21 a student draws a diagram representing three rays of light from point p passing through a  converging lens. each point labelled f is a principal focus of the lens.    ffp ray x ray y ray zlens     which of the rays has the student drawn correctly?  a ray x and ray y  b ray x and ray z  c ray y only  d ray z only     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15 [turn over  22 the diagram shows a ray of light travelling in a substance p. the ray reaches a boundary with a  substance q. total internal reflection occurs at the boundary.    substance p substance q angle x ray of lightboundarynormal     which row contains correct statements about angle x and about the optical density of substance  q?     angle x substance q  a smaller than the critical angle less dense than substance p  b smaller than the critical angle more dense than substance p  c greater than the critical angle less dense than substance p  d greater than the critical angle more dense than substance p      23 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from the sea bed. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.2  s. the speed of sound in  the water is 1500  m / s.    sea bedboat     how far below the bottom of the boat is the sea bed?  a 450  m b 900  m c 1800  m d 3600  m     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15  24 sounds are produced by vibrating objects. a certain object vibrates but a person nearby cannot  hear any sound.    which statement could explain why nothing is heard?  a the amplitude of the sound waves is too large.  b the frequency of the vibration is too high.  c the sound waves are transverse.  d the speed of the sound waves is too high.     25 which metal could be used for a permanent magnet and which metal could be used for the core  of an electromagnet?     permanent  magnet core of  electromagnet  a iron copper  b iron steel  c steel copper  d steel iron    26 which procedure may be used to demagnetise a steel bar?  a cooling it in a freezer for several hours  b earthing it with a copper wire for several seconds  c removing it slowly from a coil carrying an alternating current (a.c.)  d rubbing it in one direction with a woollen cloth    27 a plastic rod is rubbed with a cotton cloth. this process causes the rod and the cloth to become  charged. these charges cause a force between the rod and the cloth.   which row compares the charges on the rod and the cloth, and describes the effect of the force between the rod and the cloth?   charges on rod  and cloth effect  a opposite they attract  b opposite they repel  c the same they attract  d the same they repel    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15 [turn over  28 a metal wire of circular cross-section has diameter d and length l.    current wire dl     which pair of changes, if both are carried out, must  increase the resistance of the wire?  a decrease l and decrease d  b decrease l and increase d  c increase l and decrease d  d increase l and increase d      29 the circuit shown contains a battery, a 6.0  \u03c9 resistor and two meters x and y.    one meter records current and one meter records potential difference.    meter x meter y6.0 \u03c9     which row shows possible values for the readings on the meters?     meter x meter y  a 2.0  a 12  v  b 2.0  v 12  a  c 12  a 2.0  v  d 12  v 2.0  a     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15  30 a student designs a circuit to switch on a lamp after a time delay.    which components are used in a time-delay circuit?  a a light-dependent resistor and a relay  b a resistor and a capacitor  c a resistor and a transformer  d a thermistor and a variable resistor     31 identical resistors are connected together to form arrangements x, y and z.    arrangement x arrangement y arrangement z    what is the correct order of the resistances of the arrangements from the largest to the smallest?  a x \u2192 y \u2192 z  b y \u2192 x \u2192 z  c z \u2192 x \u2192 y  d z \u2192 y \u2192 x     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15 [turn over  32 the diagram shows a potential divider circuit.    vqvp     the resistance of the variable resistor is increased.    which row shows what happens to the readings on voltmeter p and on voltmeter q?     reading on voltmeter p reading on voltmeter q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      33 four lamps are each labelled '60  w 230  v'.    in which circuit are the lamps connected so that they operate at normal brightness?    a 230  vb 230  vc  230  vd  230  v      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15  34 a student investigates electromagnetic induction. she has a bar magnet and a coil of wire that is  connected to a sensitive ammeter.    ns  sens itive ammeter  coil of wirea magnet    which movement does not cause a reading on the ammeter?  a moving the coil to the right  b moving both the magnet and the coil to the left at the same speed  c moving both the magnet and the coil towards each other at the same speed  d moving the magnet to the left     35 the primary coil of a transformer has 200 turns. this primary coil is connected to an a.c. power  supply of 25  v.    a voltmeter connected across the secondary coil reads 50  v.         25 v a.c.50 vprimary coil 200 turns secondary coil v     how many turns are on the secondary coil?  a 25 b 100 c 200 d 400     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15 [turn over  36 a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field experiences a turning effect.    nspower supply +\u2013 coil    how can the turning effect be increased?  a increase the number of turns on the coil.  b reduce the size of the current.  c reverse the direction of the magnetic field.  d use thinner wire for the coil.     37 the diagram shows a cathode-ray tube. the tube is not working.    power supply heated cathodecoldanode air     which change should be made to make the tube work to produce cathode rays?  a change round the connections of the power supply.  b heat the anode instead of the cathode.  c use an a.c. power supply instead of a d.c. power supply.  d use a vacuum in the tube instead of air.     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2015 0625/13/o/n/15  38 a radioactive nucleus contains 128 nucleons. it emits a \u03b2-particle.    how many nucleons are now in the nucleus?  a 124 b 127 c 128 d 129     39 a student investigates how the radiation from a radioactive source changes with time.    the table shows the results from the detector used by the student.    time  /  minutes count rate  /  counts per minute 0 340  2.0 180  4.0 100  6.0 60  8.0 40    the experiment is repeated by many other students, who also measure the count rate every two minutes.    the half-life of the source is known to be exactly 2.0 minutes.    why is the measured count rate always  greater  than half the previous value?  a radioactive emissions occur randomly with time.  b the detector used is very close to the source.  c there is background radiation present.  d the radioactive source is decaying.     40 the nuclide notation for radium-226 is ra226 88 .    how many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226?  a 0 b 88 c 138 d 226       "
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (nf/cgw) 96018/4 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *9482364447* physics  0625/21 paper 2 core october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 a student investigates the density of three different liquids.  the student pours liquid honey into a container, as shown in fig. 1.1. 10203040 honey50cm3 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) name the container shown in fig. 1.1.  ..  [1]   (ii) name the other piece of apparatus necessary when determining the density of the honey.  ..  [1]  (b) the student then carefully adds some water and then some kerosene. the liquids do not mix  but form three separate layers as shown in fig. 1.2. 10203040kerosene water honey50cm3 fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  identify the correct statements about the densities of the liquids. tick only two boxes. honey has the smallest density. honey has a larger density than water.kerosene has the largest density.kerosene has a smaller density than water.water has a larger density than honey.water has a smaller density than kerosene. [2]  (c) the mass of 13 cm 3 of the kerosene is 10.5 g.   calculate the density of the kerosene, including an appropriate unit.  density =  .. [4] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 cameras are used to check average speeds on a long straight road. each camera records the  exact time that a car passes the camera.  fig. 2.1 shows three cameras and the times at which the car passes. camera a camera b camera c min sh 08 : 54 : 20min sh 08 : 45 : 57min sh 08 : 43 : 17 fig. 2.1 (not to scale)  (a) (i) calculate the time taken for the car to travel between camera a and camera b. state your  answer in seconds.  time taken =  ... s  [2]   (ii) the cameras are placed 5000 m apart.    calculate the average speed of the car between camera a and camera b.  average speed = .. m / s  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (iii) using the information on the clocks, describe the average speed of the car between  camera b and camera c. tick one box. slightly slower than between a and b much slower than between a and bsame as between a and bslightly faster than between a and bmuch faster than between a and b [1]  (b) the speed limit for the road is 30 m / s.   use your answers to (a)(ii)  and (a)(iii)  to estimate whether the car\u2019s average speed was  greater or less than the speed limit when travelling between camera a and camera c. explain how you decided on your answer. estimate  . ... explanation  .. .  .. .  .. . [3] [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 (a) there are three states of matter.   draw three lines, each line connecting a state of matter to the diagram representing the  arrangement of the particles in that state of matter. diagram state of matter solid liquid gas [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a perfume bottle. air and vapour perfume bottleperfumeplastic stopper fig. 3.1   (i) a student pours a small amount of perfume onto her arm. she notices that her arm feels  cold as the perfume evaporates.    explain why the evaporating perfume produces a cooling effect on her arm.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) when the perfume bottle is left by a window on a hot day, the stopper pops out of the  bottle.    suggest why the stopper pops out of the bottle.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 a student has a mobile (cell) phone. the phone receives a signal from a transmitter and produces  a ring tone.  (a) state two differences between the microwave signal received by the phone and the sound  wave produced when the phone rings. 1.  ... ... 2.  ... ... [2]  (b) fig. 4.1 represents the waves emitted by the mobile phone. the waves interact with a wall,  and a doorway, in the room. mobile phoneview from above walldoorway fig. 4.1 (not to scale)   with reference to fig. 4.1, complete each of  the following sentences using a word from the  box below. diffracted        dispersed        reflected        refracted   (i) when the waves hit the wall, the waves are .. . [1]   (ii) when the waves pass through the doorway, the waves are .. . [1] [total: 4]",
            "9": "9 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 fig. 5.1 shows a simple liquid-in-glass (alcohol) thermometer made by a technician in a laboratory.  fig. 5.1  the thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures in the range \u221210 \u00b0c to 110 \u00b0c. there is  no scale on the thermometer.  (a) the scale is added using fixed points.   state the temperature of each of the fixed points used.  upper fixed point =  ..  \u00b0c lower fixed point =  ..  \u00b0c [2]  (b) describe how the thermometer is cooled to its lower fixed point.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (c) identify the physical property used by a liquid-in-glass thermometer to measure temperature.  tick one box. colour expansionpressureresistance [1] [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 fig. 6.1 shows a sign used to warn drivers of a road hazard. slow downsolar panels fig. 6.1  the sign lights up as cars approach.  (a) the sign makes use of two sources of renewable energy, one of which is solar energy.   identify the other source of renewable energy used by the sign. tick the correct box. chemical geothermal light wind [1]  (b) fill in the blank spaces to complete one of the useful energy conversions taking place when  the sign is operating using solar energy.     solar energy    .    . [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) (i) in certain conditions, the sign cannot use its sources of renewable energy.    state these conditions.  ..  [2]   (ii) the sign needs to be able to operate at all times.    suggest a way of overcoming the problem identified in (c)(i) .  ..  [1]  (d) after passing the sign, the cars climb a steep hill.   state the type of energy gained by cars as they climb the hill.  ..  [1] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 fig. 7.1 shows an experiment to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar  magnet. paper ab dc magnet ns fig. 7.1  the bar magnet is placed on a sheet of paper. a plotting compass is placed in each of the four  positions labelled a, b, c and d.  the plotting compass is a small pivoted magnet, as shown in fig. 7.2. sn pivot pointerplotting compass fig. 7.2",
            "13": "13 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (a) in each of positions a, b, c and d on fig. 7.1, carefully draw an arrow showing the position of  the pointer. ignore the magnetic field due to the surroundings. [3]  (b) on fig. 7.1, carefully draw two complete magnetic field lines, one through position b and the  other through position d. the lines you draw should start and finish on the bar magnet. [1]  (c) state the material from which a permanent magnet is made.  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20158 fig. 8.1 shows part of a wiring diagram for a car. relay coilsstarter motor m fig. 8.1  when the driver closes switch s, there is a current of 200 a in the starter motor.  (a) (i) explain how closing switch s causes the starter motor to operate.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) explain why the cable connecting the motor to the battery is much thicker than the wire  connecting the switch s to the battery.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 8.2 shows part of a lighting circuit for a car. fuse12 vp fig. 8.2   (i) the switch is closed. there is a current of 1.2 a in the fuse.    state the current at point p .  current =  .. a  [1]   (ii) the lights of the car are connected in parallel.    state one reason for connecting lights in parallel.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 a student investigates how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature. fig. 9.1  shows the circuit that the student uses. a fig. 9.1  (a) (i) label clearly the thermistor in fig. 9.1. [1]   (ii) on fig. 9.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that the resistance of the thermistor can be  determined. [2]  (b) the student varies the temperature of the thermistor and records the ammeter readings. the  results are shown in table 9.1. table 9.1 temperature of thermistor / \u00b0c 0 10 20 30 40 50 current in thermistor / ma 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.5 14.0 24.5   (i) the potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor is 6.0 v at 20 \u00b0c.    calculate the resistance of the thermistor at 20 \u00b0c. include the unit.  resistance =  .. [4]",
            "17": "17 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) fig. 9.2 shows the student\u2019s results plotted on a graph. 25 20 15 10 01 0 2 0 3 0 temperature  / \u00b0c40 50current in thermistor  / ma 5 0 fig. 9.2    the student suggests that the current in the thermistor is directly proportional to the  temperature of the thermistor.    explain how the graph shown in fig. 9.2 shows that the suggestion is incorrect.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 a camera has a circuit containing a light-dependent resistor (ldr). fig. 10.1 shows part of this  circuit. 6v fig. 10.1  (a) describe what happens to the resistance of the ldr and the current in the ldr when a bright  light is shone on the ldr.  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) a camera lens is used to produce an image of an object ox. the arrangement is shown in  fig. 10.2. fprincipal axisx of fig. 10.2   the principal focuses of the lens are labelled f .   on fig. 10.2,   (i) draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the principal axis and continuing through  and beyond the lens, [2]   (ii) draw in another ray to locate the position of the image of ox, [2]   (iii) carefully draw and label the image obtained. [1] [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over11 three types of radioactive decay are by the emission of  \u03b1 - radiation,  \u03b2 - radiation,  \u03b3 - radiation.  (a) state which of the three types of emission has the greatest speed.  ..  [1]  (b) a nucleus of americium-241 decays to become a nucleus of neptunium-237 by the emission  of one particle.   the equation below describes the change. the symbol a z x represents the particle emitted. 241 95am      237 93 np  +  a z x   (i) state the name given to each of the numbers a and z.  a is the   number.  z is the   number. [2]   (ii) determine the values of a and z.  a  =  ...  z =  ... [2]   (iii) state the name of the particle emitted.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201512 fig. 12.1 is a diagram of a power station that uses coal. boiler coalwatersteam cooling towertransformergenerator transmission linesx fig. 12.1  (a) (i) state the name of the part of the power station labelled x.  ..  [1]   (ii) state two disadvantages of generating electricity using fossil fuels. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]  (b) the transformer converts the 25 kv output from the generator to 115 kv. the primary coil of  the transformer has 500 turns.   calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  number of turns =  .. [3]",
            "21": "21 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) explain the advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages such as 115 kv.  .. .  .. .  ..  [3] [total: 9]",
            "22": "22 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "23": "23 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "24": "24 0625/21/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/cgw) 96017/4 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *9171762934* physics  0625/22 paper 2 core october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over1 a student uses a rule to measure a thin piece of wire as shown in fig. 1.1. 0 cm123456789 1 0 1 1wire 12 13 14 15 fig. 1.1  the student records the length of the wire as 12.8 cm.  (a) state two errors in the student\u2019s measurement of the length of wire. 1.  ... ...  .. . 2.  ... ...  .. . [2]  (b) the student is asked to measure the thickness of the wire using the same ruler. the student  does this by bending a short length of the wire and measuring distance x as shown in fig. 1.2. 0 cm12 3xwire fig. 1.2   (i) use the ruler in fig. 1.2 to determine the distance x.  distance x =   cm   [1]   (ii) calculate the average thickness of the wire, in mm . give your answer correct to two  significant figures.  average thickness of wire =  .. mm  [3] [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 two cyclists, a and b, are riding their bicycles on a flat and straight road.   (a) fig. 2.1 shows a speed-time graph for the first part of their journey. 0520 10 0 10 time  / sspeed m / s 15 20cyclist a cyclist acyclist b cyclist b fig. 2.1   (i) state the speed of cyclist b.  speed =  .. m / s  [1]   (ii) calculate the distance travelled by cyclist b during the first 20 s.  distance travelled =  .  m  [2]   (iii) determine the time for which cyclist a was accelerating.  time =  .. s  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 2.2 shows the horizontal forces acting on cyclist a and his bicycle at one instant. forwards force 90 nbackwards force 40 n fig. 2.2   (i) calculate the resultant force acting on cyclist a and his bicycle.  force =   n  direction =  .. [2]   (ii) describe the effect of this resultant force on the cyclist\u2019s motion.  ..  [1]   (iii) at time t = 20 s, the backwards force on the cyclist increases suddenly to 100 n. the  forwards force remains the same at 90 n.    state the immediate effect on the cyclist\u2019s motion.  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 the following statements are about solids, liquids and gases.  complete each of the statements by adding in the spaces the words decreases , increases  or  does not change .  (a) when a liquid evaporates, the more energetic molecules escape from the surface and the  temperature of the remaining liquid ... . [1]  (b) when the volume of a gas is decreased at constant temperature, the pressure of the gas  ... . [1]  (c) when the temperature of a gas is increased at constant volume, the pressure of the gas  ... . [1]  (d) when a metal block is heated, the volume of the block ... , the mass of  the block ... and the density of the block ... .  [3] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over4 fig. 4.1 shows a farmer driving a tractor that has a diesel engine. fig. 4.1  (a) (i) state the unit of energy.  ..  [1]   (ii) state the useful energy obtained from the diesel engine as the tractor starts to move.  ..  [1]   (iii) state two other forms of energy output from the diesel engine.    .. and .. [2]   (iv) complete the following sentence by ticking one box.    modern diesel engines waste less energy than older diesel engines. this means modern  diesel engines are faster. more efficient.more reliable. [1]  (b) the tractor in fig. 4.1 is a lot heavier than a car. a car sinks into soft ground. the tractor does  not sink.   explain why this is.  .. .  .. .  ..  [3] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 a bimetallic strip is made from two metals, brass and invar, stuck together. a student clamps the  bimetallic strip, as shown in fig. 5.1, and heats the end. clamp standclamp invar heatbrass fig. 5.1  when the bimetallic strip is heated, the brass expands more than the invar. the bimetallic strip  bends.  (a) on fig. 5.1, sketch the position of the strip after it has been heated. [1]  (b) (i) suggest how the bimetallic strip may be used to measure temperature. include the idea  of fixed points.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3]   (ii) suggest one reason why, in practice, a thermometer using this bimetallic strip would be  difficult to use.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over6 fig. 6.1 shows a piece of apparatus used to show the transfer of thermal energy in liquids. water glass tubecrystals heatcoloured water fig. 6.1  the glass tube is filled with cold water. crystals that dissolve slowly are inserted into the bottom of  the tube. the water around the crystals becomes coloured.  when the glass tube is heated as shown in fig. 6.1, the coloured water moves.  (a) (i) on fig. 6.1, draw arrows indicating the direction of movement of the water in each section  of the tube. [1]   (ii) state the name of this method of thermal energy transfer in the water.  ..  [1]  (b) explain why the water moves in this way.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [4] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 a battle re-enactment enables observers to see and hear an old cannon being fired.  fig. 7.1 shows the battle site and the distant cliffs. 500  mvalleycliffs observerscannon fig. 7.1 (not to scale)  the cannon is fired. observers see the smoke and then hear the bang.  (a) (i) explain why there is a short delay between seeing the smoke and hearing the bang of  the cannon.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) an observer notices that, after the cannon is fired, she hears a loud bang and then a  quieter bang a short time later.    tick one box to identify the reason for the second bang. diffraction of the sound in the valley dispersion of the sound in the valley reflection of the sound from the cliff refraction of the sound from the cliff [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) another observer is standing 500 m away from the cannon. he uses a stopwatch to measure  the time delay between seeing the smoke and hearing the first bang. his timings are shown in the table. measurement time delay / s 1 1.92 1.53 1.34 1.45 1.7   use the measurements in the table to calculate an accurate value for the speed of the sound  produced by the cannon.  speed of sound =  .. m / s  [4] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20158 fig. 8.1 represents an object positioned on the principal axis of a thin lens. f1object c fig. 8.1  the principal focus on the left hand side of the lens is labelled f1.  (a) (i) on fig. 8.1, clearly mark the position of the principal focus on the right hand side of the  lens and label it f2.   (ii) on fig. 8.1, carefully draw a ray from the top of the object  that passes through the  centre c of the lens. continue the path of the ray to the edge of the graph paper.   (iii) on fig. 8.1, carefully draw a second ray from the top of the object that passes through a  principal focus. continue the path of the ray to the edge of the graph paper.   (iv) on fig. 8.1, carefully draw the position of the image produced. [4]  (b) which of the following words describe the image produced? tick all that are correct. diminished enlarged inverted upright real [3] [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over9 a child has an electric car racing game. the game operates from a 120 v a.c. supply.  (a) on fig. 9.1, sketch a graph showing how voltage output varies with time for an a.c. supply. 0     fig. 9.1  [1]  (b) (i) a device is used to change the 120 v supply to the 10 v needed by the toy cars.    state the name of the device.  ..  [1]   (ii) the device used in part (b)(i)  has a primary coil consisting of 4800 turns.    calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  turns on secondary coil =  .. [3] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 a coil is wound on an iron core. a student places a permanent bar magnet near the coil, as shown  in fig. 10.1. switchd.c. supply ns iron corebar magnet fig. 10.1  when the switch is closed, the bar magnet moves away from the coil.  (a) (i) explain why the magnet moves away.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) the iron core is replaced with a new core. when the current is switched on, this new core  becomes a permanent magnet.    state the name of the material used for the new core.  ..  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 10.2 shows apparatus used to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar  magnet. the bar magnet is placed on a piece of card. a small pivoted magnet, with n-pole  and s-pole as shown in fig. 10.3, is placed near the magnet. card bar magnet pivoted magnetns fig. 10.2 pivotn s fig. 10.3   starting from the arrangement shown in fig. 10.2, describe how the apparatus is used to  produce a pattern of the field lines around the bar magnet.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3] [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 hair dryers are used by many people. fig. 11.1 shows an example of a hair dryer.  blower heater hot air motor fig. 11.1  the hair dryer has two switches, one for the heater, the other for the motor that operates the  blower. fig. 11.2 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the hair dryer. s tm fig. 11.2  (a) complete the table identifying which of the circuit\u2019s components, if any, is operating. switch s switch t component or components operating closed closed closed open open closed open open [3]  (b) state the equation that links potential difference (p.d.), current and resistance.  ..  [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the current in the heater is 2.0 a when the potential difference across the heater is 250 v.    calculate the resistance of the heater.  resistance =  . \u03c9  [2]  (d) the hair dryer circuit contains a fuse.   (i) on fig. 11.2, draw the symbol for a fuse between the power supply and switch s. [1]   (ii) state what happens if a fault develops in the hair dryer, causing a large current in the  circuit.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 9]",
            "18": "18 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201512 a smoke detector contains a source of ionising radiation.  (a) different types of ionising radiation have different properties, as shown in the table. name nature charge \u03b1-particle 2+ \u03b2-particle an electron \u03b3-ray electromagnetic wave zero   complete the table by filling in the two blank spaces. [2]  (b) a smoke detector is placed in a building to warn people if there is a fire.   (i) fig. 12.1 is a diagram of a smoke detector. \u00efcharged metal platesair _-particle source__ _+ alarm circuit fig. 12.1    the \u03b1-particles ionise the air inside the smoke detector. this results in a small current  between the charged metal plates.    when smoke enters the smoke detector the current decreases and an alarm sounds.     explain why \u03b1-particles are used rather than \u03b2-particles or \u03b3-rays.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015  (ii) suggest which of the following times would be a suitable half-life for the source of  \u03b1-particles used in the smoke detector. tick one box. 100 minutes 100 hours100 days100 years [1]  (c) the radioactive source in the smoke detector contains americium-241.   an americium-241 nucleus emits an \u03b1-particle to become a neptunium nucleus.   complete the equation to show the nucleon number and proton number of neptunium. 241 95 am         np   +   4 2 \u03b1 [2] [total: 7]",
            "20": "20 0625/22/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (cw/cgw) 116361 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *2005035584* physics  0625/23 paper 2 core october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 a student investigates the density of three different liquids.  the student pours liquid honey into a container, as shown in fig. 1.1. 10203040 honey50cm3 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) name the container shown in fig. 1.1.  ..  [1]   (ii) name the other piece of apparatus necessary when determining the density of the honey.  ..  [1]  (b) the student then carefully adds some water and then some kerosene. the liquids do not mix  but form three separate layers as shown in fig. 1.2. 10203040kerosene water honey50cm3 fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  identify the correct statements about the densities of the liquids. tick only two boxes. honey has the smallest density. honey has a larger density than water.kerosene has the largest density.kerosene has a smaller density than water.water has a larger density than honey.water has a smaller density than kerosene. [2]  (c) the mass of 13 cm 3 of the kerosene is 10.5 g.   calculate the density of the kerosene, including an appropriate unit.  density =  .. [4] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 cameras are used to check average speeds on a long straight road. each camera records the  exact time that a car passes the camera.  fig. 2.1 shows three cameras and the times at which the car passes. camera a camera b camera c min sh 08 : 54 : 20min sh 08 : 45 : 57min sh 08 : 43 : 17 fig. 2.1 (not to scale)  (a) (i) calculate the time taken for the car to travel between camera a and camera b. state your  answer in seconds.  time taken =  ... s  [2]   (ii) the cameras are placed 5000 m apart.    calculate the average speed of the car between camera a and camera b.  average speed = .. m / s  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (iii) using the information on the clocks, describe the average speed of the car between  camera b and camera c. tick one box. slightly slower than between a and b much slower than between a and bsame as between a and bslightly faster than between a and bmuch faster than between a and b [1]  (b) the speed limit for the road is 30 m / s.   use your answers to (a)(ii)  and (a)(iii)  to estimate whether the car\u2019s average speed was  greater or less than the speed limit when travelling between camera a and camera c. explain how you decided on your answer. estimate  . ... explanation  .. .  .. .  .. . [3] [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 (a) there are three states of matter.   draw three lines, each line connecting a state of matter to the diagram representing the  arrangement of the particles in that state of matter. diagram state of matter solid liquid gas [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a perfume bottle. air and vapour perfume bottleperfumeplastic stopper fig. 3.1   (i) a student pours a small amount of perfume onto her arm. she notices that her arm feels  cold as the perfume evaporates.    explain why the evaporating perfume produces a cooling effect on her arm.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) when the perfume bottle is left by a window on a hot day, the stopper pops out of the  bottle.    suggest why the stopper pops out of the bottle.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [3] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 a student has a mobile (cell) phone. the phone receives a signal from a transmitter and produces  a ring tone.  (a) state two differences between the microwave signal received by the phone and the sound  wave produced when the phone rings. 1.  ... ... 2.  ... ... [2]  (b) fig. 4.1 represents the waves emitted by the mobile phone. the waves interact with a wall,  and a doorway, in the room. mobile phoneview from above walldoorway fig. 4.1 (not to scale)   with reference to fig. 4.1, complete each of  the following sentences using a word from the  box below. diffracted        dispersed        reflected        refracted   (i) when the waves hit the wall, the waves are .. . [1]   (ii) when the waves pass through the doorway, the waves are .. . [1] [total: 4]",
            "9": "9 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 fig. 5.1 shows a simple liquid-in-glass (alcohol) thermometer made by a technician in a laboratory.  fig. 5.1  the thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures in the range \u221210 \u00b0c to 110 \u00b0c. there is  no scale on the thermometer.  (a) the scale is added using fixed points.   state the temperature of each of the fixed points used.  upper fixed point =  ..  \u00b0c lower fixed point =  ..  \u00b0c [2]  (b) describe how the thermometer is cooled to its lower fixed point.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (c) identify the physical property used by a liquid-in-glass thermometer to measure temperature.  tick one box. colour expansionpressureresistance [1] [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 fig. 6.1 shows a sign used to warn drivers of a road hazard. slow downsolar panels fig. 6.1  the sign lights up as cars approach.  (a) the sign makes use of two sources of renewable energy, one of which is solar energy.   identify the other source of renewable energy used by the sign. tick the correct box. chemical geothermal light wind [1]  (b) fill in the blank spaces to complete one of the useful energy conversions taking place when  the sign is operating using solar energy.     solar energy    .    . [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) (i) in certain conditions, the sign cannot use its sources of renewable energy.    state these conditions.  ..  [2]   (ii) the sign needs to be able to operate at all times.    suggest a way of overcoming the problem identified in (c)(i) .  ..  [1]  (d) after passing the sign, the cars climb a steep hill.   state the type of energy gained by cars as they climb the hill.  ..  [1] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 fig. 7.1 shows an experiment to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar  magnet. paper ab dc magnet ns fig. 7.1  the bar magnet is placed on a sheet of paper. a plotting compass is placed in each of the four  positions labelled a, b, c and d.  the plotting compass is a small pivoted magnet, as shown in fig. 7.2. sn pivot pointerplotting compass fig. 7.2",
            "13": "13 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (a) in each of positions a, b, c and d on fig. 7.1, carefully draw an arrow showing the position of  the pointer. ignore the magnetic field due to the surroundings. [3]  (b) on fig. 7.1, carefully draw two complete magnetic field lines, one through position b and the  other through position d. the lines you draw should start and finish on the bar magnet. [1]  (c) state the material from which a permanent magnet is made.  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20158 fig. 8.1 shows part of a wiring diagram for a car. relay coilsstarter motor m fig. 8.1  when the driver closes switch s, there is a current of 200 a in the starter motor.  (a) (i) explain how closing switch s causes the starter motor to operate.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]   (ii) explain why the cable connecting the motor to the battery is much thicker than the wire  connecting the switch s to the battery.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 8.2 shows part of a lighting circuit for a car. fuse12 vp fig. 8.2   (i) the switch is closed. there is a current of 1.2 a in the fuse.    state the current at point p .  current =  .. a  [1]   (ii) the lights of the car are connected in parallel.    state one reason for connecting lights in parallel.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 a student investigates how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature. fig. 9.1  shows the circuit that the student uses. a fig. 9.1  (a) (i) label clearly the thermistor in fig. 9.1. [1]   (ii) on fig. 9.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that the resistance of the thermistor can be  determined. [2]  (b) the student varies the temperature of the thermistor and records the ammeter readings. the  results are shown in table 9.1. table 9.1 temperature of thermistor / \u00b0c 0 10 20 30 40 50 current in thermistor / ma 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.5 14.0 24.5   (i) the potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor is 6.0 v at 20 \u00b0c.    calculate the resistance of the thermistor at 20 \u00b0c. include the unit.  resistance =  .. [4]",
            "17": "17 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) fig. 9.2 shows the student\u2019s results plotted on a graph. 25 20 15 10 01 0 2 0 3 0 temperature  / \u00b0c40 50current in thermistor  / ma 5 0 fig. 9.2    the student suggests that the current in the thermistor is directly proportional to the  temperature of the thermistor.    explain how the graph shown in fig. 9.2 shows that the suggestion is incorrect.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 a camera has a circuit containing a light-dependent resistor (ldr). fig. 10.1 shows part of this  circuit. 6v fig. 10.1  (a) describe what happens to the resistance of the ldr and the current in the ldr when a bright  light is shone on the ldr.  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) a camera lens is used to produce an image of an object ox. the arrangement is shown in  fig. 10.2. fprincipal axisx of fig. 10.2   the principal focuses of the lens are labelled f .   on fig. 10.2,   (i) draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the principal axis and continuing through  and beyond the lens, [2]   (ii) draw in another ray to locate the position of the image of ox, [2]   (iii) carefully draw and label the image obtained. [1] [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over11 three types of radioactive decay are by the emission of  \u03b1 - radiation,  \u03b2 - radiation,  \u03b3 - radiation.  (a) state which of the three types of emission has the greatest speed.  ..  [1]  (b) a nucleus of americium-241 decays to become a nucleus of neptunium-237 by the emission  of one particle.   the equation below describes the change. the symbol a z x represents the particle emitted. 241 95am      237 93 np  +  a z x   (i) state the name given to each of the numbers a and z.  a is the   number.  z is the   number. [2]   (ii) determine the values of a and z.  a  =  ...  z =  ... [2]   (iii) state the name of the particle emitted.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201512 fig. 12.1 is a diagram of a power station that uses coal. boiler coalwatersteam cooling towertransformergenerator transmission linesx fig. 12.1  (a) (i) state the name of the part of the power station labelled x.  ..  [1]   (ii) state two disadvantages of generating electricity using fossil fuels. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]  (b) the transformer converts the 25 kv output from the generator to 115 kv. the primary coil of  the transformer has 500 turns.   calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  number of turns =  .. [3]",
            "21": "21 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) explain the advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages such as 115 kv.  .. .  .. .  ..  [3] [total: 9]",
            "22": "22 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "23": "23 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "24": "24 0625/23/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (cw/sw) 96031/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1020540899* physics  0625/31 paper 3 extended october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 fig. 1.1 shows a rocket-powered sled travelling along a straight track. the sled is used to test  components before they are sent into space. sled track fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for the sled from time t = 0 s. 00200400600speed m / s8001000 1.0 2.0 3.0 time  / s4.0 fig. 1.2  (a) on fig. 1.2, mark a point labelled p to indicate a time when the acceleration of the sled is not  constant. [1]  (b) (i) calculate the acceleration of the sled at t = 1.0 s.  acceleration =  ...[2]   (ii) determine the distance travelled by the sled between t = 1.0 s and t = 2.0 s.  distance =  ...[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the resultant force acting on the sled remains constant during the test.   suggest why the acceleration of the sled is not constant.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 (a) (i) mass is a scalar quantity.    state another scalar quantity.  .. .   (ii) force is a vector quantity.    state another vector quantity.  .. . [2]  (b) a boat is floating on still water.   the mass of the boat is 290 000 kg. a resultant force of 50 kn acts on the boat.   calculate the acceleration of the boat.  acceleration =  ...[3]  (c) fig. 2.1, not to scale, shows the view from above of the boat, now on a fast-flowing river. the  boat accelerates.   two forces are shown acting on the boat. the resultant of these forces is at right angles to the  river banks. river bank boatdirection of river current direction of force on boat from river currentdirection of force from engine river bank fig. 2.1  (not to scale)",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  fig. 2.2 is an incomplete vector diagram of the forces acting on the boat. force from river currentresultant force fig. 2.2   the force from the river current is 80 kn.     (i) determine the scale that has been used in the vector diagram.  scale is  ...   (ii) on fig. 2.2, complete the vector diagram to determine the magnitude and direction of the  force from the engine. measure the angle between the direction of the current and the  force from the engine.  magnitude of force from engine =  ...  angle =  ... [4]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 fig. 3.1 shows a skier taking part in a downhill race. fig. 3.1  (a) the mass of the skier, including his equipment, is 75 kg. in the ski race, the total vertical  change in height is 880 m.   calculate the decrease in the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the skier.  decrease in g.p.e. =  ...[2]  (b) the skier starts from rest. the total distance travelled by the skier during the descent is  2800 m. the average resistive force on the skier is 220 n.   calculate  (i) the work done against the resistive force,  work done =  ...[2]   (ii) the kinetic energy of the skier as he crosses the finishing line at the end of the race.  kinetic energy =  ...[2]  (c) suggest why the skier bends his body as shown in fig. 3.1.   .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over4 (a) an object of mass m and specific heat capacity c is supplied with a quantity of thermal  energy q. the temperature of the object increases by \u03b4\u03b8.   write down an expression for c in terms of q, m and \u03b4\u03b8.  c = [1]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows the heating system of a hot water shower. power supply cold water in hot water out heating element fig. 4.1   cold water at 15 \u00b0c flows in at the rate of 0.0036 m3 / minute. hot water flows out at the same  rate.   (i) calculate the mass of water that passes the heating element in one minute. the density  of water is 1000 kg / m3.  mass =  ...[2]   (ii) the power of the heating element is 8.5 kw.    calculate the temperature of the hot water that flows out. the specific heat capacity of  water is 4200 j /(kg \u00b0c).  temperature =  ...[4]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 (a) smoke particles are introduced into a glass box containing air. light shines into the box so  that, when observed through a microscope, the smoke particles can be seen as bright points  of light.   describe the motion of the smoke particles and account for this motion in terms of the air  molecules.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]  (b) fig. 5.1 shows a quantity of gas in a cylinder sealed by a piston that is free to move. gas cylinder piston fig. 5.1   (i) the temperature of the gas is increased.    state what happens, if anything,    1. to the piston,  .. .    2. to the pressure of the gas.  .. . [2]   (ii) the piston is now fixed in place and the temperature of the gas is increased further.    explain, in terms of the behaviour of molecules, what happens to the pressure of the gas.   .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over6 a sound wave, travelling in air, approaches a solid barrier with a gap in the middle. fig. 6.1  represents the compressions and rarefactions of the sound wave. the compressions are labelled  a, b and c. a compressionbarrier rarefactionbc fig. 6.1  (a) state how a compression  differs from a rarefaction .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the speed of sound in air is 340 m / s. the frequency of the sound is 850 hz.   for this wave, determine   (i) the wavelength,  wavelength =  ...[2]   (ii) the time that elapses before compression a reaches the barrier.  time =  ...[2]  (c) on fig. 6.1, draw the shape and positions of compressions b and c as compression a  reaches the barrier. [2]  (d) sound waves can also travel in water.   state how the speed of sound in water compares with the speed of sound in air.  .. .[1]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a convex lens being used to produce an image of an object. image objectprincipal focus fig. 7.1   (i) place three  ticks in the table that describe this image. can only be formed on a screen diminished enlarged inverted real same size upright virtual  [3]   (ii) on fig. 7.1, mark a letter e to indicate a possible position for an eye to be placed to  observe this image. [1]   (iii) state an application in which a convex lens is used in this way.  .. .[1]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) in the space below, draw a ray diagram to locate the image of an object of height 1.0 cm  placed 5.0 cm from a convex lens of focal length 2.0 cm. draw your diagram full size. y ou are advised to locate the lens roughly in the centre of the space. label the image.  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20158 a digital watch is powered by a 1.3 v cell. the cell supplies a current of 4.1 \u00d7 10\u20135 a (0.000041 a)  for 1.6 \u00d7 107 s.  calculate (a) the charge that passes through the cell in this time,  charge =  ...[2]  (b) the resistance of the electrical circuit in the watch,  resistance =  ...[2]  (c) the output power of the cell.  power =  ...[2]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over9 fig. 9.1 shows two separate coils of wire wound around an iron core. iron coreprimary coilsecondary coil fig. 9.1  an a.c. supply is connected across the primary coil and a 12 v lamp is connected across the  secondary coil. the lamp glows with normal brightness.  (a) state the name of the device shown in fig. 9.1.  .. .[1]  (b) explain why there is a current in the lamp.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]  (c) (i) the coil connected to the lamp has 450 turns. the e.m.f. of the a.c. supply is 240 v.    calculate the number of turns on the coil connected to the a.c. supply.  number of turns =  ...[2]   (ii) a 240 v d.c. supply is used instead of the 240 v a.c. supply. tick one box to indicate what  happens to the lamp.     glows more brightly     glows with the same brightness     glows less brightly     does not glow [1]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 (a) fig. 10.1 shows the symbol for a logic gate. fig. 10.1   (i) state the name of this gate. . [1]   (ii) on fig. 10.1, label an input and an output. [1]    (iii) in the space below, draw the symbol for a nand gate.  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) a very low frequency alternating voltage is applied between a and b in the circuit shown in  fig. 10.2. a centre-zero ammeterab fig. 10.2   on each diagram, draw a possible position of the indicator needle of the ammeter at the time  in the cycle when   (i) a is positive and b is negative, 0 \u20131 +1 \u20132 +2 a   (ii) there is no p.d. between a and b, 0 \u20131 +1 \u20132 +2 a   (iii) a is negative and b is positive. 0 \u20131 +1 \u20132 +2 a  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 (a) state, in terms of the particles in each nucleus, how the nuclei of two isotopes of the same  element are different.  .. .[1]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows a graph of nucleon number against proton number. the nucleus 21 82 3 bi is  plotted on the graph at the cross marked p . 208 7980 81 82 proton number83 84209210211 nucleon number212213 p fig. 11.1   (i) on fig. 11.1,    1.   plot a cross labelled q for the nucleus formed when the 21 82 3 bi nucleus emits an  \u03b1-particle,    2.   plot a cross labelled r for the nucleus formed when the 21 82 3 bi nucleus emits a  \u03b2-particle.  [4]   (ii) the half-life for the decay of 21 82 3 bi is 60 minutes.    a sample of 21 82 3 bi is placed at a fixed distance from a detector. the initial measurement  of the count rate from the sample of 21 82 3 bi is 2400 counts per minute.    calculate the count rate from the sample 5.0 hours later.  count-rate =  ...[2]  [total: 7] to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series."
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (cw/sw) 96033/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *5862445146* physics  0625/32 paper 3 extended october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 a comet, travelling in space, enters the atmosphere of a planet.  fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the comet from time t = 0 s.  0010 000speed m / s 20 00030 00040 000 4.0 8.0 12.0 time  / s16.0 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) during the period t = 0 s to t = 6.0 s, both the speed of the comet and the velocity of the  comet remain constant.    state what this suggests about the motion of the comet.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) determine the distance travelled during the period t = 0 s to  t = 6.0 s.  distance =  ...[2]  (b) explain what the graph shows about the motion of the comet during the period t = 6.0 s to  t = 10.0 s.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) determine the acceleration of the comet at t = 11.0 s.  acceleration =  ...[2]  (d) suggest what happens to the comet at t = 12.0 s.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 a student wishes to find the volume of a piece of wood of irregular shape. her experiment requires  the use of a small brass object of mass 200 g.  (a) calculate the volume of the brass object. the density of brass is 8.4 g / cm3.  volume =  ...[2]  (b) to find the volume of the piece of wood, the student has a measuring cylinder, a supply of  water and the brass object in (a). the piece of wood and the brass object are small enough to  be placed in the measuring cylinder.    (i) the piece of wood does not sink in water.    suggest why.  .. .[1]   (ii) describe what the student does to find the volume of the piece of wood, stating the  measurements that she makes and any calculations required.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over3 (a) (i) define power .  .. .[1]   (ii) in the following list, tick the two boxes next to the two quantities needed to calculate the  work done on an object.     mass of the object     force acting on the object     speed of the object     acceleration of the object     distance moved by the object [1]  (b) a lift (elevator) in a high building transports 12 passengers, each of mass 65 kg, through a  vertical height of 150 m in a time of 64 s.   (i) calculate the power needed to transport the passengers through this height.  power =  ...[4]   (ii) the lift (elevator) is driven by an electric motor.    state a reason, other than friction, why the power supplied by the motor is greater than  the power needed to transport the passengers.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 (a) fig. 4.1 shows a top view of a tourist vehicle in a game park and two elephants pushing  against the vehicle. the two forces indicated are at right angles to each other. 4.0 kn 6.0 knvehicle elephant elephant fig. 4.1   in the space below, draw a scale vector diagram to determine the magnitude of the resultant  force. label the two forces applied and the resultant, and clearly state the scale you use.  magnitude of resultant force =  ...[3]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 4.2 shows another elephant pushing horizontally against a vehicle with a force of 11 kn at  a distance 1.8 m above the ground. point m is the centre of mass of the vehicle. elephant vehicle 1.25  m11 kn 1.8 m am fig. 4.2   (i) calculate the moment about point a of the force exerted by the elephant.  moment =  ...[2]   (ii) the mass of the vehicle is 1900 kg, and it does not slide when pushed by the elephant.    determine whether the elephant tips the vehicle over. show your working.    calculation conclusion  ... ..[2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 (a) x and y are liquid-in-glass thermometers. the scale of each thermometer starts at 0 \u00b0c.   x has a large range, good linearity and high sensitivity.   y has a small range, poor linearity and low sensitivity.   explain what is meant by    (i) the difference in their ranges ,  .. .  .. .   (ii) the difference in their linearities ,  .. .  .. .   (iii) the difference in their sensitivities .  .. .  .. . [3]  (b) a thermocouple is used to measure the temperature of a small volume of liquid.   (i) draw and label a sketch of the arrangement.  [3]   (ii) the temperature of the liquid is changing rapidly.     explain why the thermocouple is able to respond quickly to this rapid change.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over6 (a) in the space below, draw a simple labelled diagram of the apparatus used to demonstrate  brownian motion.  [2]  (b) state what is observed.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (c) explain what is observed in terms of molecules.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 sound from a loudspeaker is travelling in air towards a solid wall.  fig. 7.1 shows compressions of the incident sound wave and the direction of travel of the wave. 8.5 m compressionsdirection of travelwallpq fig. 7.1  (a) state what is meant by a compression .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) the distance from point p to point q is 8.5 m. it takes 25 ms for the compression at p to  reach q.   for this sound wave, determine   (i) the wavelength,  wavelength =  ...[1]   (ii) the frequency.   frequency =  ...[2]  (c) as it strikes the wall, the sound reflects.   complete fig. 7.1 to show the positions of three compressions of the reflected sound wave.  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (d) the loudspeaker is immersed in water, where it continues to produce sound of the same  frequency.   state and explain how the wavelength of the sound wave in water compares with the  wavelength determined in (b)(i) .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20158 (a) fig. 8.1 is a ray diagram of a convex lens being used as a magnifying glass to produce a  virtual image. fig. 8.1   on fig. 8.1,   (i) label the object o,   (ii) label the image i,   (iii) label a principal focus f ,   (iv) put arrows on the two rays to indicate their directions.  [4]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) fig. 8.2 shows a ray of light in air incident on an interface with glass. the refractive index of  glass is 1.5. glass air incident ray fig. 8.2   on fig. 8.2, accurately draw the ray as it travels in the glass. y ou will need to take a  measurement from fig. 8.2 and carry out an appropriate calculation. show your working.  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 (a) fig. 9.1 shows the symbol for a logic gate. fig. 9.1   (i) state the name of this gate.  .. .   (ii) on fig. 9.1, clearly label an input and an output.  [2]  (b) in the space below, draw the symbol for a fuse.  [1]  (c) fig. 9.2 shows a circuit. a b6 v fig. 9.2   component a is not emitting light. it only emits light when the p.d. across it is greater than 1 v.   (i) a change to the environment around component b causes component a to emit light.    state the environmental change.  .. .[1]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) explain your answer to (i).  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (d) the combined resistance of the two resistors shown in fig. 9.3 is 4.0 \u03c9. r6.0 1 fig. 9.3   calculate the resistance of resistor r.  resistance of r =  ...[2]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201510 (a) fig. 10.1 shows the gap between the n-pole and the s-pole of a magnet. n s fig. 10.1   the magnetic field in the gap is uniform.   on fig. 10.1, draw four field lines to show the pattern and direction of the magnetic field in the  gap. [2]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a horizontal copper wire pq between two opposite magnetic poles. q pcopper wirean s fig. 10.2   a circuit is made by connecting a sensitive digital ammeter between p and q. the wire pq is  then moved vertically downwards.   (i) state and explain what is observed on the ammeter.   .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) state what is observed on the ammeter when pq is moved     1. vertically downwards at a greater speed,  .. .[1]    2. vertically upwards at the same speed as in 1.  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 (a) the counter of a radiation detector placed close to a radioactive source gives a count rate of  1600 counts / s. the half-life of the source is 1 week.   ignoring background radiation, calculate the count rate   (i) 1 week after the first measurement,  count rate =  ...[1]   (ii) 3 weeks after the first measurement.  count rate =  ...[1]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows the arrangement for an experiment to investigate the shielding of radioactive  sources. e d c b a 20 cm airposition of samplesthick card 5  mm steel 20  cm lead fig. 11.1  (not to scale)   samples containing three different radioactive sources are placed, one at a time, in the  position shown.   the table shows the count rates when a radiation detector is placed at the positions a to e.   complete the table to indicate whether \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles or \u03b3-rays are emitted from each  sample. a b c d e type of radiation emitted sample 1 high high high high low sample 2 high high low 0 0 sample 3 high 0 0 0 0  [3]  (c) state which type of radiation, \u03b1, \u03b2 or \u03b3, is the most strongly ionising.  .. .[1]  [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/32/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (cw/sw) 96032/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8951814332* physics  0625/33 paper 3 extended october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 n (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 a plastic ball is dropped from the balcony of a tall building and falls towards the ground in a straight  line.  fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the falling ball. 002.0speed m / s 4.06.08.0 1.0 2.0time  / s3.0 fig. 1.1  (a) state and explain, in terms of forces,  what is happening to the speed of the ball between time  t = 2.0 s and t = 3.0 s.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) on fig. 1.1, mark a point p on the line where the acceleration of the ball is not constant. [1]  (c) using fig. 1.1,   (i) calculate the acceleration of the ball between t = 0 s and t = 0.25 s,  acceleration =  ...[2]   (ii) estimate the distance that the ball falls in the first 3.0 s.  distance =  ...[2]  [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 a student has 500 identical, rectangular sheets of paper.  the mass of 1.0 m2 of the paper is  0.080 kg.  (a) using a metre rule, she measures the length of one sheet of paper and its width. the length is  0.300 m and the width is 0.210 m.   (i) calculate the mass of one sheet of paper.  mass =  ...[1]   (ii) the student makes a single pile of the 500 sheets of paper.    with a metre rule, she measures the height of the pile. the height of the pile is 0.048 m.    calculate the density of the paper.  density =  ...[3]  (b) a second student has only 5 sheets of the same type of paper.   suggest how this student determines the density of the paper to a similar accuracy. additional  apparatus may be used.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 fig. 3.1 shows part of the extension-load graph for a spring. 3.0 00 12.0b a load  / nextension  / cm fig. 3.1  the spring obeys hooke\u2019s law between points a and b.  (a) (i) on fig. 3.1, complete the graph between a and b. [1]   (ii) state the name of point b.  .. .[1]  (b) the average value of the load between a and b is 6.0 n.   calculate the work done in extending the spring from a to b.  work done =  ...[2]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the spring has an unstretched length of 4.0 cm.   an object is hung on the spring and the spring length increases from 4.0 cm to 6.0 cm.   (i) calculate the mass of the object.  mass =  ...[3]   (ii) the object is immersed in a liquid but remains suspended from the spring.    the liquid exerts an upward force on the object and the length of the spring decreases  to 5.0 cm.    calculate the upward force exerted on the object by the liquid.  upward force =  ...[2]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 a soft rubber ball of mass 0.15 kg is dropped, in a vacuum, from a height of 2.0 m on to a hard  surface. the ball then bounces.  (a) state the main energy changes taking place when   (i) the ball is falling,  .. .   (ii) the ball hits the surface and is changing shape,     .. .   (iii) the ball is regaining its shape and is rising from the surface.  .. . [3]  (b) calculate the speed with which the ball hits the surface.  speed =  .. [4]  (c) after rebounding from the surface, the ball rises to a height of 1.9 m.   suggest why the height to which the ball rises is less than the height from which the ball falls.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 (a) state two examples of physical properties that vary with temperature and that may be used  for the measurement of temperature. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]  (b) when first manufactured, a liquid-in-glass thermometer has no scale markings.   (i) describe the procedure needed to determine    1. the position on the thermometer of the lower fixed point,  .. ..  .. ..  .. ..    2. the position on the thermometer of the upper fixed point.  .. ..  .. ..  .. .. [3]   (ii) explain why    1.   the graduations marked on the thermometer between the fixed points are spaced  equally,  .. ..  .. ..[1]    2.  the expansion of the glass of the thermometer is ignored.  .. ..  .. ..[1] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20156 a dolphin produces a sound wave in water of frequency 7800 hz.  fig. 6.1 represents rarefactions of the sound wave travelling in the water and hitting the side of a  wooden ship at an angle. abwater wood rarefactionsdirection of wave travel fig. 6.1  (a) state what is meant by a rarefaction .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) on fig. 6.1, two rarefactions a and b are labelled. the distance between rarefaction a and  rarefaction b is 0.76 m.   determine   (i) the wavelength in water of the sound wave,  wavelength =  ...[1]   (ii) the time taken for the rarefaction at a to reach the point where rarefaction b is now  positioned.  time =  ...[2]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) the sound wave passes from the water into the wood where the speed of sound is greater.   state what happens to   (i) the frequency,  .. .[1]   (ii) the wavelength.  .. .[1]  (d) on fig. 6.1, sketch the positions in the wood of the three incomplete rarefactions. [2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20157 (a) the refractive index of a type of glass is 1.6.   calculate the critical angle for light in this type of glass.  critical angle =  ...[3]  (b) a waterproof laser is immersed in water. fig. 7.1 shows the laser shining light up towards the  horizontal surface of the water. beam of light lasermovement of lasernormalair water e fig. 7.1   initially, the angle \u03b8 is much less than the critical angle for this light in water.   the laser moves and \u03b8 gradually increases until it is much greater than the critical angle.   describe, for different angles of the laser, what happens to the light beam after it hits the  surface.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over8 a metal sphere, mounted on an insulating plastic stand, is positively charged.  (a) state the name of the unit in which electric charge is measured.   .. .[1]  (b) a smaller metal sphere, also mounted on an insulating plastic stand, is uncharged.   this smaller sphere is moved close to the positively charged sphere. fig. 8.1 shows the two  spheres. plastic standssmaller spherepositively charged sphere fig. 8.1   (i) on fig. 8.1, draw the distribution of charge on the smaller sphere. [2]   (ii) an earthed metal wire is touched against the smaller metal sphere.    state and explain what happens to the charge on the smaller sphere.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (c) explain, in terms of their structures, why the metal wire is an electrical conductor but the  plastic stand is an electrical insulator.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20159 (a) place one tick in each row of the table to indicate one use of a thermistor and one use of a  transistor. heat  detectorlight  detectormagnetic  field  detectorrectifier switch thermistor transistor  [2]  (b) in fig. 9.1, lamp a is not glowing brightly. 6 vb a fig. 9.1   suggest and explain what could be done to component b to make lamp a glow brightly.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over10 the output of an a.c. generator in a power station is 5000 v.  a transformer increases the voltage to 115 000 v before the electrical power is transmitted to a  distant town.  (a) state and explain, using a relevant equation, one advantage of transmitting electrical power  at a high voltage.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (b) the transformer contains two coils, the primary coil and the secondary coil.   (i) state the other main component of a transformer and the material from which it is made.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) state the component in the transformer to which the a.c. generator is connected.  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) there are 400 turns on the primary coil of the transformer.    calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  number of turns =  ...[2]  (c) transformers within the town reduce the voltage to 230 v.   suggest one reason for this.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 201511 uranium-238 and uranium-234 are radioactive isotopes of the element uranium.  a uranium-238 nucleus is different from a uranium-234 nucleus but both decay by the emission of  an \u03b1-particle.  (a) (i) in terms of the particles in each, state how a nucleus of uranium-238 differs from a  nucleus of uranium-234.  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) although the two nuclei are different, they are both nuclei of uranium.    state a property that makes these isotopes the same element.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) when \u03b1-particles pass through air, they are more strongly ionising than \u03b2-particles.   suggest two reasons why this is so.   .. .  .. .[2]  (c) in an experiment, \u03b1-particles are allowed to strike a thin gold foil in a vacuum.   almost all the \u03b1-particles pass straight through the gold undeflected. only a very small  number of \u03b1-particles are deflected from their original path.   this result reveals certain features of the atoms of the gold.   state what is shown about atoms by the fact that   (i) most \u03b1-particles pass straight through the gold undeflected,  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) some \u03b1-particles are deflected back the way they came.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (lk/cgw) 95682/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over *3777290667* physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 in this experiment, you will investigate two different types of pendulum.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3. clamp boblclamp one complete oscillationclamp0 cm mark 50.0  cm mark1.0 cm markpivot fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2 fig. 1.3  a pendulum has been set up for you as shown in fig. 1.1.  (a) adjust the pendulum until its length l = 50.0 cm. the length l is measured to the centre of the  bob.   explain briefly how you measured the length l as accurately as possible.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) (i) displace the pendulum bob slightly and release it so that it swings.     measure the time ts for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see fig. 1.2).  ts =  ...[1]   (ii) calculate the period ts of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  ts =  ...[2]   (iii) explain why measuring the time for 20 swings, rather than for 1 swing, gives a more  accurate value for ts.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) the pendulum shown in fig. 1.3 is a solid strip of length 50.0 cm. it has been set up for you.   (i) displace this pendulum slightly and release it so that it swings.     measure the time tc for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum.  tc =  ...   (ii) calculate the period tc of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  tc =  ...  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (d) a student suggests that tc should be equal to  ts.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (e) assume that the length l of the first pendulum has been measured accurately and that the  length of the strip that forms the second pendulum is exactly 50.0 cm long.   suggest why it may not be fair to state that both pendulums have the same length  l = 50.0 cm.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  (a) measure the temperature \u03b8 r of the water in beaker a.  \u03b8 r =  ...[1]  (b) pour 100 cm3 of hot water into beaker b. place the thermometer in beaker b, as shown in  fig. 2.1. thermometer waterbeaker b fig. 2.1   (i) record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water in beaker b.  \u03b8h =  ...[1]   (ii) state one precaution that you took to ensure that the temperature reading is as reliable  as possible.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) add the water from beaker a to the hot water in beaker b. stir briefly. record the  temperature \u03b8 m.  \u03b8 m =  ...[1]  (d) calculate the average temperature \u03b8a of the hot water and the cold water using the equation   \u03b8a = (\u03b8h + \u03b8r) 2.  \u03b8a =  ...[2]  (e) a student carefully carries out this experiment and finds that \u03b8 m is less than \u03b8 a.    he was expecting that the temperature \u03b8 m of the mixture would be the same as the average  temperature \u03b8 a of the hot water and cold water.    suggest two factors that could cause \u03b8 m and \u03b8 a  to be different. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  .. . [2]  (f) fig. 2.2 shows a measuring cylinder. 102030405060708090100 cm3 fig. 2.2",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  three students take the volume reading. their readings are:    \u0081 student 1: 80 cm3    \u0081 student 2: 79 cm3    \u0081 student 3: 78 cm3   (i) state the correct reading.  correct reading =  ...   (ii) explain briefly the mistake made by one of the other students. student ... is incorrect, because   .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 in this experiment, you will determine the resistance of a resistor.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you. apower supply resistance wire sliding contact cr abl v fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure the current i in the circuit.  i =  ...[1]    (ii) place the sliding contact c at a distance  l = 20.0 cm from a.    measure, and record in table 3.1, the reading on the voltmeter.   (iii) repeat the procedure in (ii) using  l values of 40.0 cm, 60.0 cm, 80.0 cm and 100.0 cm.  switch off. table 3.1 l / cm v / v  20.0  40.0  60.0  80.0 100.0  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against l / cm ( x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0, 0).  [5]  (c) (i) determine the value of the intercept y on the y-axis.  y =  ...[1]   (ii) calculate the ratio y i. the value of i is your answer to part (a) (i).  y i =  ...   (iii) y i is numerically equal to the resistance r of the resistor r.    write down a value for r to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  include the unit.  r  =  ...  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 in this experiment, you will investigate reflection using a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. y ou may refer to  fig. 4.1 for guidance. eyeman l30\u00b0rhole b fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (a) draw a line 10.0 cm long near the middle of your ray-trace sheet. label the line mr. draw  a normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the point at  which nl crosses mr with the letter a.  (b) draw a line 8.0 cm long from a at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal, below mr and  to the left of the normal. label the end of this line b.   (c) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr.  (d) place a pin p1 at point b, 8.0 cm from the point a.   (e) place pin p2 on line ab a suitable distance from pin p1.  (f) view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1. place  two pins p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p2  and p1, all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.  (g) remove the pins and the mirror. draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. extend the  line until it meets nl.  (h) measure, and record in table 4.1, the angle r between nl and the line joining the positions of  p3 and p4. table 4.1 i / \u00b0 r / \u00b0 30  [2]  (i) draw a second normal to line mr, 2.0 cm to the right of nl. label the normal xy. label the  point at which xy crosses mr with the letter c. draw the line bc. measure, and record in the  table, the angle i between bc and xy.  (j) place pin p1 at point b. place pin p2 on line bc a suitable distance from pin p1.  (k) repeat the procedure in parts (f) and (g) using the new normal xy.  (l) measure, and record in the table, the angle  r between xy and the line joining the new positions  of p3 and p4.  (m) state two precautions that you took in this experiment in order to obtain reliable readings. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (n) a student has done this experiment very carefully, taking these precautions.   she is disappointed to find that her lines for the reflected rays are not exactly where she  predicts from the theory.   suggest a practical reason for this.  .. .[1]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11.  [5]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (cw/sw) 96027/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *5893801224* physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 in this experiment, you will investigate the masses of two loads, p and q.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. pabq 10.0  cm mark50.0  cm mark metre rule bench pivot fig. 1.1  (a) place the metre rule on the pivot at the 50.0 cm mark. place the load p on the metre rule at  the 10.0 cm mark.   place the load q on the metre rule and adjust its position so that the metre rule is as near as  possible to being balanced.   (i) measure, and record in table 1.1, the distance a between the centre of load p and the  50.0 cm mark.   (ii) measure, and record in the table, the distance b from the 50.0 cm mark to the centre of  load q.  (b) repeat the procedure in (a) using distances a = 35.0 cm, 30.0 cm, 25.0 cm and 20.0 cm. table 1.1 a / cm b / cm  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) plot a graph of b / cm ( y-axis) against a / cm ( x-axis). [4]  (d) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ...[2]  (e) the gradient g is the ratio of the masses of the two loads p and q.   estimate an approximate value for the mass of p. use this, and your value for g, to determine  an estimate for the mass of q.  estimated mass of p =  ...  estimated mass of q =  ...  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of a thermometer bulb.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 2.1 and 2.2. y ou are provided with a beaker  labelled a containing hot water, a thermometer and a supply of cold water. thermometer water  fig. 2.1  fig. 2.2  (a) place the thermometer in the beaker of hot water labelled a. when the thermometer reading  stops rising, measure the temperature of the water. in table 2.1, record this temperature in  the \u03b81 column at time t = 0 s. [1]  (b) remove the thermometer from the beaker, as shown in fig. 2.2, immediately start the  stopclock and record the temperature \u03b81 every 10 s for 1 minute. record your readings in the  table. table 2.1 t / \u03b81 / \u03b82 / 0  [3]  (c) add 100 cm3 of the cold water supplied to the water in beaker a. replace the thermometer in  beaker a.   (i) when the thermometer reading stops rising, measure the temperature of the water.  record this temperature in the \u03b82 column of the table at time t = 0 s. [1]   (ii) remove the thermometer from the beaker, immediately start the stopclock and record  the temperature \u03b82 every 10 s for 1 minute. record the readings in the table.   (iii) complete the column headings in the table.",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (d) (i) using the readings in the \u03b81 column of the table, calculate the decrease in temperature  \u03b4\u03b81 in 60 s.  \u03b4\u03b81 =  ...   (ii) using the readings in the \u03b82 column of the table, calculate the decrease in temperature  \u03b4\u03b82 in 60 s.  \u03b4\u03b82 =  ... [2]   (iii) state the reason why \u03b4\u03b82 is less than \u03b4\u03b81.  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) state a precaution that you took when reading the thermometer scale in order to obtain  reliable readings.  .. .[1]  (f) suggest one reason why other students, carrying out this experiment with care, might obtain  values of \u03b4\u03b81 and \u03b4\u03b82 different from your values.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 in this experiment, you will investigate the combined resistance of resistors in series and parallel  arrangements.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you. a vpower supply xyabc fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v1 across the three resistors, and  the current i1 in the circuit. switch off.  v1 =  ...  i1 =  ... [2]   (ii) calculate the combined resistance r1 of the resistors, using the equation r1 = v1 i1 .  r1 =  ...[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the circuit is now to be rearranged.    \u0081 disconnect resistors a and b.   \u0081 connect together the resistors a and b in parallel.   \u0081  connect one side of this parallel combination to the resistor c at the point labelled y in  fig. 3.1.   \u0081 connect the other side of the parallel combination to the point labelled x in fig. 3.1.   \u0081 do not make any other changes to the circuit.   on fig. 3.2, complete the diagram of this new circuit using standard circuit symbols. apower supply x fig. 3.2  [2]  (c) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v2 across the three resistors, and  the current i2 in the circuit. switch off.  v2 =  ...  i2 =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate the combined resistance r2 of the resistors using the equation r2 = v2 i2 .  r2 =  ...",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015  (iii) calculate the ratio r1 r2 .  r1 r2 =  ...  [2]  (d) r1 should equal 2 \u00d7 r2 when all three resistors are identical.   state whether your results indicate that the resistors are identical. justify your answer by  reference to your results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over4 in this experiment, you will investigate reflection using a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. y ou may refer to   fig. 4.1 for guidance. 30\u00b0 ba ln r m eyehole fig. 4.1  (a) draw a line 10.0 cm long near the middle of your ray-trace sheet. label the line mr. draw  a normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the point at  which nl crosses mr with the letter a.  (b) draw a line 8.0 cm long from a at an angle of incidence i = 30 \u00b0 to the normal, below mr and  to the left of the normal. label the end of this line b.",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr.   (d) place a pin p1 at point b, 8.0 cm from the point a.  (e) place a pin p2 on line ab a suitable distance from pin p1.  (f) view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1. place  two pins p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p2  and p1, all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.  (g) remove the pins and the mirror. draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. extend the  line until it meets nl.  (h) measure, and record in the first row of table 4.1, the angle r between nl and the line joining  the positions of p3 and p4. table 4.1 i / \u00b0 r / \u00b0 3030  [2]  (i) state two precautions that you took with the pins in this experiment in order to obtain reliable  readings. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (j) turn your ray-trace sheet through 180 \u00b0. draw a line 8 cm long from a at an angle of incidence  i = 30 \u00b0 to the normal, below mr and to the right of the normal, as shown in fig. 4.2. label the  end of this line c.n lr m b creflecting surface a eyehole fig. 4.2  (k) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr, so that it is facing you.  (l) repeat the procedure in (d) \u2013 (h) using point c and the line ac. record the angle r in the  second row of table 4.1.",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (m) a student, doing this experiment with care, expected that the results would show all the  incident rays and reflected rays meeting at point a.   suggest a practical reason why the lines may not meet exactly at point a.  .. .  .. .[1]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11. [5]  [total: 10] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (lk/ar) 96014/5 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over *2366762448* physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test october/november 2015  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of identical wires connected in parallel.  the circuit has been set up for you as shown in fig. 1.1, with crocodile clip a connected to the  right-hand end of wire a.    carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. srzhu\u0003vxsso\\ zluh\u0003$$ zluh\u0003% zluh\u0003&%& furfrgloh\u0003folsv$ fig. 1.1  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, use the appropriate symbol to show a voltmeter connected to measure the  potential difference across wire a. [1]   (ii) connect the voltmeter in this position.  (b) (i) switch on. measure, and record in table 1.1, for wire a, the potential difference v and  the current i in the circuit. switch off. table 1.1 wire combinationv / v i / a a a and b a, b and c  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) without disconnecting crocodile clip a, connect crocodile clip b to the right hand end of  wire b. it does not matter if crocodile clips a and b touch.    repeat step  (b)(i)  for this combination of wires, a and b in parallel.   (iii) without disconnecting crocodile clips a or b, connect crocodile clip c to the right hand  end of wire c. it does not matter if the crocodile clips touch.    repeat step (b)(i)  for this combination of wires, a, b and c in parallel.   (c) calculate the resistance r of each wire combination, using the equation r =  v i.     resistance of wire a r1 = .     resistance of wires a and b in parallel  r2 = .     resistance of wires a, b and c in parallel   r3 = .  [3]  (d) (i) a student suggests that when 2 identical wires are connected in parallel, their resistance  should be equal to 1 2 of the resistance of a single wire.    state whether your findings agree with this suggestion.     justify your answer by reference to your results, giving values to support your justification. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. .  [2]   (ii) use your results to suggest the relationship that should exist between r3 and r1.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light in a transparent block. y ou will  determine a quantity known as the refractive index of the material of the block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. y ou may refer to  fig. 2.1 for guidance.  kroh wudqvsduhqw\u0003eorfnh\\h $%&' /1 fig. 2.1  (a) draw a line approximately 12 cm long and about 6 cm from the bottom of the ray-trace sheet.   label this line ab.   draw a normal to ab at its centre. extend the normal for at least 15 cm above ab towards the  top of the sheet. label the normal nl.   label the point at which nl crosses ab with the letter c.  (b) place the transparent block so that its long side is on line ab, as shown in fig. 2.1.     (c) (i) carefully draw around the block.   (ii) place a pin p1 at point c.",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (iii) view the image of p1 through the block, from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 2.1.     place two pins p2 and p3 , a suitable distance apart, so that pins p2 and p3 and the  image of p1 all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p2 and p3.   (iv) remove the block and pins from the ray-trace sheet.    (v) label the point at which nl crosses the top edge of the block with the letter d.   (vi) draw a line joining the positions of p2 and p3. extend this line until it crosses nl. label  the point at which the line crosses nl with the letter e.  (d) (i) measure the length a of line dc.  a =  ...   (ii) measure the length b of line de.  b =  ...  [2]   (iii) calculate a value n1 for the refractive index of the block, using your values from (d)(i) and  (d)(ii)  and the equation n1 = a b.  n1 =  ...[1] question 2 continues on the next page.",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) (i) place the block so that its shorter side is on line ab, as shown in fig. 2.2. wudqvsduhqw\u0003eorfn $%& /1 ) fig. 2.2   (ii) repeat steps (c)(i)  to (c)(iv) .   (iii) label the point at which nl crosses the top edge of the block with the letter f.    (iv) draw a line joining the new positions of p2 and p3. extend this line until it crosses nl.   label the point at which the line crosses nl with the letter g.   (f) (i) measure the length c of line  fc.  c =  ...   (ii) measure the length d of line fg.  d =  ...   (iii) calculate a second value n 2 for the refractive index of the block, using your values from  (f)(i) and (f)(ii)  and the equation n2 = c d.  n2 =  ...  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (g) a student suggests that a third value for the refractive index could be obtained by repeating  the experiment with the block standing on edge, as shown in fig. 2.3.   y ou are not required to carry out this experiment. wudqvsduhqw\u0003eorfn $%& /1 fig. 2.3   state and explain whether this third value for the refractive index is likely to be more or less  reliable than the other two values for the refractive index. statement   .. explanation  .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 6 and 7.  [4]  [total: 10] ",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 in this experiment, you will investigate the behaviour of a spring, and then use the spring to  determine the weight of an object.  the stand and spring have been set up. y ou are provided with an object x and a set of loads which  will be used to stretch the spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. fodps l  ordgvsulqj fig. 3.1  (a) (i) hang a load of weight l = 1.0 n on the spring.     measure, and record in table 3.1, the stretched length l of the spring, as indicated in  fig. 3.1.   (ii) describe a precaution that you took when measuring the length of the spring, to ensure  a reliable reading. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (iii) repeat step (a)(i) for l values of 2.0 n, 3.0 n, 4.0 n and 5.0 n.   (iv) remove the load from the spring.  table 3.1 l / n l / cm 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0  [1]  (b)  plot a graph of l / cm ( y-axis) against l / n (x-axis). 0 0  [4]  (c) use your graph to determine the length l 0 of the spring with no load attached.  l 0 =  ...[1]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (d) (i) suspend object x from the spring and measure the stretched length l of the spring.  l =  ...   (ii) use the graph, and your reading from (d)(i) , to determine the weight w of object x. show  clearly on the graph how you obtained your answer.  w  =   n   [2]  (e) a student measures the weight of a different load using this same method. he gives the  weight as 2.564 n.   explain why this is not a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over4 in this experiment, you will investigate the transfer of thermal energy.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 4.1. thermometers boiling tubebeaker fig. 4.1  (a) (i) pour 40 cm3 of cold water into the boiling tube.     record, in the first row of table 4.1, the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water.   (ii) pour 300 cm3 of hot water into the beaker.    record, in the first row of the table, the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water.   (iii) lower the boiling tube into the beaker of hot water and immediately start the stopclock.      record, in the table, the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water and the temperature \u03b8h of the  hot water at times  t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s, 150 s and 180 s. table 4.1 boiling tube with 40 cm3  of cold waterboiling tube with 20 cm3  of cold water t / \u03b8c / \u03b8h / \u03b8c / \u03b8h / 0 30 60 90 120 150 180    [4]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (b) (i) carefully pour away the water from the boiling tube and the beaker. make sure that the  boiling tube is secure in the clamp.    pour 20 cm3 of cold water into the boiling tube. record its temperature \u03b8c in the table.    repeat steps (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) .   (ii) complete the column headings in the table.  (c) write a conclusion stating how the quantity of cold water in the boiling tube affects its  temperature rise.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (d) another student wishes to check your conclusion by repeating the experiment with 10 cm 3 of  cold water.   suggest two conditions which he should keep the same so that the comparison will be fair. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  (e) scientists in an industrial laboratory wish to use this experiment as a model of a heat  exchanger, which transfers thermal energy between liquids.   suggest two different improvements to the apparatus which would make the heating of the  cold water more efficient.   for your first suggestion, explain why it would be an improvement. suggestion 1  .  explanation  .. .  .. . suggestion 2  .    [3]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (lk/cgw) 95681/4 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over *4128547204* physics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2015  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 the class is investigating two different types of pendulum.  figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the apparatus used.   clamp bobstring lclamp0 cm mark 50.0  cm mark1.0 cm markpivot rule fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the length l of the pendulum.   l =  ...[1]   (ii) explain briefly how you would measure the length l of a pendulum, of the type shown in  fig. 1.1, as accurately as possible.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) a student adjusts the length l of the pendulum shown in fig. 1.1 to be exactly 50.0 cm. she  displaces the pendulum bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. she measures the time  ts for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum.   (i) record the time ts as shown in fig. 1.3. 00.28  20plq v fig. 1.3  ts =  ...[1]   (ii) calculate the period ts of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  ts =  ...[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (iii) explain why measuring the time for 20 oscillations, rather than for 1 oscillation, gives a  more accurate value for ts.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) the pendulum shown in fig. 1.2 is a 50.0 cm rule. the student displaces this pendulum slightly  and releases it so that it swings. she measures the time tc for 20 complete oscillations of the  pendulum.  tc = 23.2 s     (i) state a precaution that you would take to ensure that the measurement of time tc is  reliable.  .. .   (ii) calculate the period tc of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  tc =  ...   [1]  (d) a student suggests that tc should be equal to  ts.    state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (e) assume that the length l of the first pendulum has been measured accurately at 50.0 cm and  that the length of the strip that forms the second pendulum is exactly 50.0 cm long.   suggest why it may not be correct to state that both pendulums have the same length   l = 50.0 cm.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 the class is determining the resistance of a resistor.  fig. 2.1 shows the circuit. apower supply resistance wire sliding contact cr abl v fig. 2.1  (a) a student places the sliding contact c at a distance  l from end a of the resistance wire. she  records the reading on the voltmeter.    (i) read the meter shown in fig. 2.2. record, in table 2.1, this value of v for length  l = 100 cm. 5 v6789 104321 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0     fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3 table 2.1 l / cm v / v  20.0 1.1  40.0 1.4  60.0 1.6  80.0 1.9 100.0  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over  (ii) read the meter shown in fig. 2.3. record this current i.  i =  ...[1]  (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against l   / cm ( x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0, 0).  [4]  (c) (i) determine the value of the intercept y on the y-axis.  y =  ...[1]   (ii) calculate the ratio y i. the value of i is your answer to part (a) (ii).  y i =  ...   (iii) y i is numerically equal to the resistance r of the resistor r.    write down a value for r to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  include the unit.  r  =  ...  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 the class is investigating reflection using a plane mirror.  fig. 3.1. shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. eyemr p3 p4 ray-trace sheet fig. 3.1",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (a) the student draws the line mr to mark the position of a plane mirror.    (i) draw a normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the  point at which nl crosses mr with the letter a.   (ii) draw a line 8.0 cm long from a at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal, below mr  and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line b.  [3]  (b) the student places a pin p1 at point b. he places a second pin p2 on line ab.   label a position x on line ab to show a suitable position for pin p2. [1]  (c) he views the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 3.1. he  places two pins p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p2  and p1, all appear exactly one behind the other. the positions of p3 and p4 are shown in fig. 3.1.   (i) draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. extend the line until it meets nl.   (ii) measure the angle r between nl and the line joining the positions of p3 and p4.  r =  ... [2]  (d) state two precautions that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain reliable  readings.  1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  (e) a student has done this experiment very carefully, taking these precautions.   she is disappointed to find that her line for the reflected ray is not exactly where she predicts  from the theory.    suggest a practical reason for this.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 9] ",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 the class is investigating the cooling of water.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used. thermometer water fig. 4.1  (a) record the temperature \u03b8 c of the cold water shown on the thermometer in fig. 4.2. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 4.2  \u03b8 c =  ...[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) a student pours 100 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. he records the temperature \u03b8 h of the hot  water in the beaker.  \u03b8 h = 83 \u00b0c     state one precaution that you would take to ensure that the temperature reading is as reliable  as possible.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) the student adds 100 cm3 of cold water to the hot water in the beaker. he records the  temperature \u03b8 m of the mixture.  \u03b8 m = 46 \u00b0c     calculate the average temperature \u03b8a of the hot water and the cold water using the equation   \u03b8a = (\u03b8h + \u03b8c) 2.  \u03b8a =  ...  [1]  (d) the student carried out this experiment carefully.    he was expecting that the temperature \u03b8 m of the mixture would be the same as the average  temperature \u03b8 a of the hot water and the cold water.   suggest two factors that could cause \u03b8 m and \u03b8 a to be different. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) fig. 4.3 shows a measuring cylinder.   three students take the volume reading. their readings are:    \u0081 student 1: 80 cm3    \u0081 student 2: 79 cm3    \u0081 student 3: 78 cm3 102030405060708090100 cm3 fig. 4.3   (i) state the correct reading.  correct reading =  ...    (ii) explain briefly the mistake made by one of the other students. student ... is incorrect, because    .. .  [2]  [total:  7]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 the class is doing a lens experiment.  fig. 5.1 shows some of the apparatus used. lens screenilluminated object fig. 5.1  (a) draw a diagram to show how the apparatus shown in fig. 5.1 is arranged for an experiment to  determine the focal length of the lens. the laboratory bench is drawn for you. bench  [2]  (b) the focal length of the lens is known to be approximately 15 cm.    suggest a suitable distance d between the illuminated object and the screen so that a  well-focused image can be seen on the screen.  d  =  . cm [1]  (c) suggest two practical difficulties that may cause inaccuracy in the value of focal length  obtained. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (d) fig. 5.2 shows the shape of the illuminated object.  fig. 5.2   in the space below, draw a diagram to show the focused image that you would expect to see  on the screen. [1]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (cw/sw) 96029/2 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *7002032522* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2015  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 the class is investigating the masses of two loads, p and q.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. pq benchmetre rule pivot fig. 1.1  (a) a student places the metre rule on the pivot at the 50.0 cm mark.   he places the load p on the metre rule. he then places the load q on the metre rule and  adjusts its position so that the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.   (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the distance x from the centre of load p to the pivot.  x =  ...   (ii) on fig. 1.1, measure the distance y from the pivot to the centre of load q.  y =  ...  [1]   (iii) fig. 1.1 is drawn 1/10th full size.    calculate the actual distance a from the centre of load p to the pivot. calculate the actual  distance b from the pivot to the centre of load q. write the results in table 1.1. [1] table 1.1 a / cm b / cm 35.0 17.6 30.0 14.8 25.0 12.7 20.0 10.1",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the student repeats the procedure using different positions of p. his readings are shown in  the table.   plot a graph of b / cm ( y-axis) against a / cm ( x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ...[2]  (d) the gradient g is the ratio of the masses of the two loads p and q.   suggest a suitable value for the mass of p in this experiment. use this, and your value for g,  to determine an estimate for the mass of q.  estimated mass of p =  ...  estimated mass of q =  ... [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20152 the class is investigating the cooling of a thermometer bulb.  figs. 2.1 and 2.2 show the apparatus. thermometer stand beakerthermometer water  fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2  (a) in the space in table 2.1, record the temperature \u03b81 of the hot water as shown on the  thermometer in fig. 2.3.  [1] fig. 2.3",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) a student removes the thermometer from the beaker of hot water, as shown in fig. 2.2. she  immediately starts a stopclock, and records the temperature \u03b81 every 10 s for 1 minute. the  temperature readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 t / \u03b81 / \u03b82 / 03 3 72 3065 2859 2753 2648 2643 25   she then adds 100 cm 3 of cold water to the water in the beaker and repeats the procedure.  she records the temperature readings in the \u03b82 column of the table.   (i) complete the column headings in the table.   (ii) record the time readings in the table.  [2]  (c) (i) using the readings in the \u03b81 column of the table, calculate the decrease in temperature  \u03b4\u03b81 in 60 s.  \u03b4\u03b81 =  ...   (ii) using the readings in the \u03b82 column of the table, calculate the decrease in temperature  \u03b4\u03b82 in 60 s.  \u03b4\u03b82 =  ...   (iii) state the reason why \u03b4\u03b82 is less than \u03b4\u03b81.  .. .  .. . [2]  (d) state a precaution that you would take when reading the thermometer scale in order to obtain  reliable readings.  .. .[1]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) suggest one reason why other students, carrying out this experiment with care, might obtain  values of \u03b4\u03b81 and \u03b4\u03b82 different from the values in part (c).  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over3 the class is investigating the combined resistance of resistors in series and parallel arrangements.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. a vpower supply xyabc fig. 3.1  (a) (i) record the potential difference v1 across the resistors and the current i1 in the circuit, as  shown in figs. 3.2 and 3.3. v32 1 0 fig. 3.2  v1 =  ... a0.60.8 1.00.40.2 0 fig. 3.3  i1 =  ... [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015  (ii) calculate the combined resistance r1 of the resistors using the equation r1 = v1 i1 .  r1 =  ...[1]  (b) a student rearranges the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. he follows these instructions:   \u0081 disconnect resistors a and b.   \u0081 connect together the resistors a and b in parallel.   \u0081  connect one side of this parallel combination to the resistor c at the point labelled y in  fig. 3.1.   \u0081 connect the other side of the parallel combination to the point labelled x in fig. 3.1.   \u0081 do not make any other changes to the circuit.   on fig. 3.4, complete the diagram of this new circuit using standard circuit symbols. apower supply x fig. 3.4  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (c) using the new circuit, a student measures the potential difference v2 across the three  resistors and the current i2 in the circuit.  v2 = 2.1 v    i2 = 0.69 a     (i) calculate the combined resistance r2 of the resistors using the equation r2 = v2 i2 .  r2 =  ...   (ii) calculate the ratio r1 r2 .  r1 r2  =  ...  [2]  (d) r1 should equal 2 \u00d7 r2 when all three resistors are identical.   state whether the results indicate that the resistors are identical. justify your answer by  reference to the results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2] [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 the class is investigating reflection using a plane mirror.  fig. 4.1 shows a student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. r m eye ray-trace sheetp3 p4 fig. 4.1  (a) the student draws the line mr to mark the position of a plane mirror.    (i) on fig. 4.1, draw a normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal  nl. label the point at which nl crosses mr with the letter a.   (ii) draw a line 8.0 cm long from a at an angle of incidence i = 30 \u00b0 to the normal, below mr  and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line b.  [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) the student places a pin p1 at point b. she places a second pin p2 on line ab.   label a position x on line ab to show a suitable position for pin p2. [1]  (c) she views the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 4.1.  she places two pins p3 and p4, some distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images  of p2 and p1, all appear exactly one behind the other. the positions of p3 and p4 are shown in  fig. 4.1.   (i) draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. extend the line until it meets nl.   (ii) measure the angle r between nl and the line joining the positions of p3 and p4.  r =  ...  [2]  (d) state two precautions that you would take with the pins in this experiment in order to obtain  reliable readings. 1.  ...   .. . 2. . ..   .. .  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) the student turns the ray-trace sheet through 180 \u00b0. she draws a line ac at an angle of  incidence i = 30 \u00b0 to the normal, below mr and to the right of the normal.   she repeats the procedure described in parts (b) and (c). her ray-trace is shown in fig. 4.2.r mn a b c l eyeray-trace sheetreflecting surface fig. 4.2   she carried out the experiment very carefully. she expected that the results would show all  the incident rays and reflected rays meeting at point a.   suggest a practical reason why the lines may not meet exactly at point a.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 9]",
            "13": "13 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over5 the class is investigating the motion of a small steel ball when it is dropped on to a tray full of  sand. fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus. steel ball sand fig. 5.1  (a) a student is measuring the time it takes for the steel ball to fall through 2.00 m on to the sand.  he uses a stopwatch.   suggest a cause of inaccuracy in the timing.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) when the steel ball falls into the sand it creates a circular hole.   suggest how you would measure the diameter of the hole as reliably as possible. name the  measuring device that you would use. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "14": "14 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (c) the student suggests that the diameter of the hole depends on the height from which the ball  is dropped, because this affects the speed.   suggest two other variables on which the size of the hole may depend. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/62/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w15_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (lk/ar) 96012/3 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over *8062298981* physics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2015  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20151 a student is investigating the transfer of thermal energy.  he uses the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. glass tubethermometers glass  beakerwater  level water  level cold water hot water fig. 1.1  (a) the student pours 50 cm3 of cold water into the glass tube and 300 cm3 of hot water into the  beaker. the water levels are approximately as shown in fig. 1.1.   in table 1.1, record the temperatures \u03b8c of the cold water and \u03b8h of the hot water as shown  on the thermometers in fig. 1.1. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overtable 1.1 tube with 50 cm3  of cold watertube with 25 cm3  of cold water t / \u03b8c / \u03b8h / \u03b8c / \u03b8h / 0 20.0 87.0 30 33.0 82.0 34.0 82.060 40.5 79.0 49.0 79.590 49.0 78.0 59.5 76.0 120 56.0 76.0 65.5 75.0150 60.0 75.0 69.5 74.5180 63.0 74.0 72.0 74.0  (b) the student lowers the glass tube into the beaker of hot water and immediately starts a  stopclock.   table 1.1 shows the readings of the temperature  \u03b8c of the cold water and the temperature \u03b8h  of the hot water at times  t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s, 150 s and 180 s.   the student repeats the procedure with the same volume of hot water in the beaker but with  25 cm3 of cold water in the glass tube. the results are shown in the table.    complete the column headings in the table. [1]  (c) write a conclusion stating how the volume of cold water in the tube affects its temperature  rise.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (d) another student wishes to check the conclusion by repeating the experiment with 12.5 cm 3 of  cold water.   suggest two conditions which he should keep the same so that the comparison will be fair. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) scientists in an industrial laboratory wish to use this experiment as a model of a heat  exchanger, which transfers thermal energy between liquids.   suggest two different improvements to the apparatus which would make the heating of the  cold water more efficient.   for your first suggestion, explain why it would be an improvement. suggestion 1  .  explanation  .. .  .. . suggestion 2  .   [3]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over2 the class is investigating the behaviour of a spring, and then using the spring to determine the  weight of an object.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 2.1. l  loadclamp spring fig. 2.1  (a) a load of weight l = 1.0 n is hung on the spring. the stretched length l of the spring, as  indicated in fig. 2.1, is recorded in table 2.1.   suggest a precaution that you would take when measuring the length of the spring, to ensure  a reliable reading. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (b) step (a) is repeated for values of l = 2.0 n, 3.0 n, 4.0 n and 5.0 n. the readings are shown in  table 2.1. table 2.1 l / n l / cm 1.0 6.1 2.0 9.0 3.0 13.4 4.0 16.8 5.0 21.0   plot a graph of l /cm ( y-axis) against l / n (x-axis). 0 0  [4]  (c) use your graph to determine the length l 0 of the spring with no load attached.  l 0 =  ...[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overl  object fig. 2.2  (d) the loads are removed and an object is suspended from the spring, as shown in fig. 2.2.   (i) on fig. 2.2, measure the stretched length l of the spring.  l =  ...[1]   (ii) use the graph, and your reading from (d)(i) , to determine the weight w of the object.  show clearly on the graph how you obtained your answer.  w  =   n   [2]  (e) a student measures the weight of a different load using this same method. he gives the  weight as 2.564 n.   explain why this is not a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20153 some students are carrying out experiments on a model wind turbine.  some of their apparatus is shown in fig. 3.1. jhqhudwrueodghv idq vsrzhu vxsso\\ fig. 3.1  the turbine blades have been cut from cardboard. an electric fan is used to make the blades  rotate. when they rotate, they turn a small generator.    (a) one student is studying the effect of changing the electric current in the fan.     (i) using standard symbols, complete the circuit in fig. 3.1 to show a variable resistor and  an ammeter connected for this purpose. [2]   (ii) the student is carrying out the investigation over a number of days.     suggest a variable that he must keep constant in each of his tests.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over (b) other students wish to test different aspects of the model wind turbine.   suggest two variables, other than that already mentioned in (a)(ii) , which they could change  and which would affect the output of the generator. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]   [total: 5] ",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20154 the class is studying the resistance of identical wires connected in parallel.  the circuit is set up as shown in fig. 4.1, with a crocodile clip connected to the right-hand end of  wire a. srzhu\u0003vxsso\\ zluh\u0003$ phwuh\u0003uxoh zluh\u0003% zluh\u0003&furfrgloh\u0003folsv$ fig. 4.1  (a) on fig. 4.1, use the appropriate symbol to show a voltmeter connected to measure the  potential difference across wire a. [1]  (b) in table 4.1, write down the potential difference v and the current i for wire a as shown in  figs. 4.2 and 4.3.  5 v6789 104321 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 4.2 fig. 4.3",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overtable 4.1 wire combinationv / v i /a a only a and b  in parallel2.9 0.77 a, b and c in parallel2.6 0.98  [1]  (c) the other crocodile clips are used, first to connect wires a and b in parallel, and then wires  a, b and c in parallel. the readings for each circuit are shown in table 4.1.   on figs. 4.4 and 4.5, draw arrows to show the meter readings for the circuit in which wires  a and b are connected in parallel. 5 v6789 104321 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 4.4 fig. 4.5  [1]  (d) calculate, and record below, the resistance r of each wire combination, using the equation   r = v i.     resistance of wire a r1 =  ...     resistance of wires a and b in parallel r2 =  ...     resistance of wires a, b and c in parallel r3 =  ...  [3]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) (i) a student suggests that when 2 identical wires are connected in parallel, their resistance  should be equal to 1/2 of the resistance of a single wire.    state whether your findings agree with this suggestion.     justify your answer by reference to your results, giving values to support your justification. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  [2]   (ii) use your results to suggest the relationship that should exist between r3 and r1.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 9]",
            "13": "13 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn overturn over for question 5.",
            "14": "14 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 20155 a student is investigating the refraction of light in a transparent block. her ray-trace will be used to  determine a quantity known as the refractive index of the material of the block.  fig. 5.1 shows her ray-trace sheet. transparent blockray-trace sheet p2 p3 a b dnc fig. 5.1",
            "15": "15 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 [turn over the student draws the outline abcd  of the transparent block.  (a) draw a normal to the line dc through point n. extend the normal beyond line ab.    label the upper end of the normal with the letter l. label the point at which nl crosses ab  with the letter e. [1]    (b) the student places a pin p1 against the block at point n and views the image of p1 through  the side ab of the block.   she places two pins p2 and p3, as shown in fig. 5.1, so that pins p2 and p3, and the image of  p1, all appear exactly one behind the other.   (i) draw a line joining the positions of p2 and p3. extend this line until it crosses nl. label  the point at which the line crosses nl with the letter f. [1]   (ii) measure the length a of line en.  a =  ...   (iii) measure the length b of line ef.  b =  ...  [2]  (c) calculate a value n for the refractive index of the block, using your values from (b)(ii) and  (b)(iii)  and the equation n = a b.  n =  ...[1]  (d) suggest a practical precaution that you would take to ensure a reliable result in this type of  experiment.   .. .  .. .[1] question 5 continues on the next page.",
            "16": "16 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015 (e) the student  obtains a second value for the refractive index n by repeating the experiment with  the block standing on edge, as shown in fig. 5.2.   she views the image of p1 from the direction indicated by the arrow. the block is 1.5 cm thick. ud\\\u0010wudfh\u0003vkhhw wudqvsduhqw\u0003eorfn 3\u0014gluhfwlrq\u0003 ri\u0003ylhzlqj \u0014\u0011\u0018\u0003fp fig. 5.2",
            "17": "17 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015  state and explain whether this value for the refractive index is likely to be more or less reliable  than the value n obtained for the refractive index in part (c). statement   .. explanation  .. .  .. .  .. .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/63/o/n/15 \u00a9 ucles 2015permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        }
    },
    "2016": {
        "0625_m16_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib16 03_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over       *7917388689* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  february/march 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  1 a student wishes to find the volume of a small, irregularly-shaped stone.    stone     a ruler and a measuring cylinder containing some water are available.    which apparatus is needed?  a neither the ruler nor the measuring cylinder  b the measuring cylinder only  c the ruler and the measuring cylinder  d the ruler only      2 a ball is dropped from a table-top. air resistance may be ignored.    x     which row describes the velocity and the acceleration of the ball at point x?     acceleration velocity  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16 [turn over  3 the diagram shows the speed-time graph for a car.    0 0xyspeed time    which area represents the distance travelled while the car is accelerating?  a x b x + y c y d y \u2013 x     4 which quantities are measured in the same unit?  a energy, power and work  b energy and power, but not work  c energy and work, but not power  d power and work, but not energy    5 five identical bags of rice are balanced on a uniform beam by an object of mass 10  kg.    10 kg pivotfive bags of rice     two more identical bags of rice are added to the other five. the average position of the bags on the beam does not change.    what mass now balances the bags?  a 3.5  kg b 7.0  kg c 12  kg d 14  kg     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  6 the diagram shows a cuboid block made from a metal of density 2.5  g / cm3.    2.0 cm 2.0 cm10 cm     what is the mass of the block?  a 8.0  g b 16  g c 50  g d 100  g     7 the diagram shows an unbalanced rod. two loads x and y can be moved along the rod.     pivotrod movement of rodmovement of rodxy     the rod turns in a clockwise direction as shown.    which action could make the rod balance?  a moving x to the left  b moving x to the right  c moving y to the right  d moving the pivot to the left    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16 [turn over  8 a box is being lifted by a fork-lift truck.     fork-lift truck box      the weight of the box is 3000  n.   the force exerted by the fork-lift truck on the box is 3500  n vertically upwards.    what is the resultant vertical force on the box?  a 500  n downwards  b 500  n upwards  c 6500  n downwards  d 6500  n upwards      9 the diagram shows a ball hanging on a string. the ball swings from point w to point z and back  to point w.    ball w x yz     which statement about the ball is correct?  a the kinetic energy of the ball is greatest at point w.  b the kinetic energy of the ball is greatest at point x.  c the kinetic energy of the ball is greatest at point y.  d the kinetic energy of the ball is the same at all points of the swing.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  10 a person in a factory has to lift a box on to a shelf.    boxhigh shelf low shelf     which action involves the person doing the least  amount of work?  a lifting the box quickly to the high shelf  b lifting the box slowly to the high shelf  c lifting the box to the low shelf first then lifting it to the high shelf  d lifting the box to the low shelf instead of to the high shelf     11 which is a non-renewable energy resource?  a coal  b solar  c tides  d wind    12 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    which labelled length is measured when finding atmospheric pressure?    mercurya bcd     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16 [turn over  13 identical toy bricks are placed one on top of another to make a tower on a table.    bricks tower of bricks table     which graph shows the relationship between the pressure p that the tower exerts on the table  and the weight w of the tower?    a p w0 0b p w0 0c p w0 0d p w0 0     14 the table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances.    which substance is a liquid at 0  \u00b0c?     melting point  / \u00b0c boiling point  / \u00b0c  a \u2013219 \u2013183  b \u20137 58  c 98 890  d 1083 2582    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  15 air in a sealed syringe is slowly compressed by mo ving the piston. the temperature of the air  stays the same.    syringeair piston    which statement about the air is correct?  a the pressure of the air decreases because its molecules now travel more slowly.  b the pressure of the air decreases because the area of the syringe walls is now smaller.  c the pressure of the air increases because its molecules now hit the syringe walls more  frequently.  d the pressure of the air increases because its molecules now travel more quickly.     16 which quantity gives the thermal capacity  of a solid object?  a the energy lost by radiation from the object in 1.0  s  b the energy needed to melt the object  c the energy needed to raise the temperature of the object by 1.0  \u00b0c  d the total amount of thermal energy in the object     17 to mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are  needed.    which of these is a fixed point on the celsius scale?  a room temperature  b the temperature inside a freezer  c the temperature of pure melting ice  d the temperature of pure warm water     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16 [turn over  18 the diagram shows electricity cables being put up on a warm day. the cables are left loose  between the poles, as shown in the diagram.        why are the cables left loose?  a they will contract on cold days.  b they will contract on very warm days.  c they will expand on cold days.  d they will expand on very warm days.      19 a cotton sheet is ironed with a hot electric iron.    how is energy transferred through the metal base of the iron to the sheet?  a by conduction only  b by convection only  c by radiation only  d by convection and radiation only    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  20 two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. a small spacer keeps the two cups separated.     hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid is put on top, as shown.   lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench     which statement is correct?  a the bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.  b the lid reduces the energy lost by convection.  c there is no thermal conduction through the sides of either cup.  d thermal radiation is prevented by the small air gap.     21 a water wave in a shallow tank passes through a gap in a barrier.    water wavebarrie r gap     what happens to the speed and what happens to the wavelength of the wave as it passes through the gap?     speed wavelength  a decreases decreases  b decreases remains constant  c remains constant decreases  d remains constant remains constant   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16 [turn over  22 which is a unit of wavelength?  a hertz  b metre  c metre per second  d second      23 which diagram correctly shows a ray of light reflected by a plane mirror?    40\u00b0 ray of light50\u00b0a 40\u00b0 ray of light 50\u00b0b 40\u00b0 40\u00b0ray of lightcray of light 50\u00b050\u00b0 d      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  24 a ray of white light is incident on a glass prism.    prismray of white light     which ray diagram shows the ray as it passes through the prism and emerges from the opposite  side?    violeta red violetspectrumb redspectrum c red violetspectrumd redviolet spectrum       25 a sound wave travels from a point x to another point y.    x y    which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, due to the sound wave, in the  region between x and y?    d c b a       26 sound wave p has a greater amplitude and a larger wavelength in air than sound wave q.    how do the loudness and pitch of p com pare with the loudness and pitch of q?  a p is louder and higher in pitch than q.  b p is louder and lower in pitch than q.  c p is quieter and higher in pitch than q.  d p is quieter and lower in pitch than q. ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16 [turn over  27 in which pair are both materials magnetic?  a aluminium and copper  b copper and iron  c iron and steel  d steel and aluminium      28 the diagram shows the magnetic field around two bar magnets.        which diagram shows the poles of the magnets?    n a sn s n b ss n s c nn s s d ns n     29 which produces an electromotive force (e.m.f.)?  a a battery  b a filament lamp  c a resistor  d a spring balance    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  30 the table describes four different resistance wires. they are all made from the same metal.    which wire has the smallest resistance?     length of   wire  / m diameter of   wire  / mm  a 2.0 1.0  b 2.0 1.5  c 3.0 1.0  d 3.0 1.5      31 four lamps are each labelled 240  v.    in which circuit do all four lamps have normal brightness?    240  va 240  vb 240  vc 240  vd      ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16 [turn over  32 the diagram shows a 40  \u03c9 resistor and a 60  \u03c9 resistor connected in parallel.    40 \u03c960 \u03c9 pq     what is the total resistance between points p and q?  a less than 40  \u03c9  b 50  \u03c9  c between 60  \u03c9 and 100  \u03c9  d 100  \u03c9      33 the diagram shows a potential divider connected to two voltmeters p and q.    vvoltmeter qvvoltmeter p     the resistance of the variable resistor is decreased.    which row shows what happens to the reading on each voltmeter?     reading on  voltmeter p reading on  voltmeter q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  34 after some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.    what is the greatest hazard?  a a fire  b a fuse blows  c an electric shock  d no current flows     35 a coil carries a current in a magnetic field. the coil experiences a turning effect.    which device uses this effect?  a a d.c. motor  b an electromagnet  c a relay  d a transformer      36 a magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a stationary coil. the coil is  connected to a sensitive centre-zero galvanometer.    n sspring moving magnet stationary coilcentre-zero galvanometer     the magnet repeatedly moves slowly up and down.  what does the galvanometer show?  a a constantly changing reading  b a steady reading to the left  c a steady reading to the right  d a steady reading of zero     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  37 a nucleus of element x is represented as x56 26.    which is an isotope of element x?  a x2656 b x5426 c x56 24 d x54 28     38 the charge on a proton is e.    what is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a neutron?     electron neutron  a e e  b e 0  c \u2013e \u2013e  d \u2013e 0     39 a scientist carries out an experiment using a sealed source which emits \u03b2-particles. the range of  the \u03b2-particles in the air is about 30  cm.    which precaution is the most effective to protect the scientist from the radiation?  a handling the source with long tongs  b keeping the temperature of the source low  c opening all windows in the laboratory  d washing his hands before leaving the laboratory      40 which row describes the nature of \u03b1-particles and of \u03b3-rays?     \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  a helium nuclei electromagnetic radiation  b helium nuclei electrons  c protons electromagnetic radiation  d protons electrons     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  blank page      ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  blank page      ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is  produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/f/m/16  blank page      "
        },
        "0625_m16_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib16 03_0625_22/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over       *5652212684* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  february/march 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  1 the diameter of a copper wire is thought to be approximately 0.3  mm.    which instrument should be used to obtain a more accurate measurement of the diameter of the  wire?  a measuring tape  b metre rule  c micrometer  d ruler     2 which is a unit of acceleration?  a g  / cm3 b m  / s c m  / s2 d n  / m    3 an object is released from rest and falls to earth. during its fall, the object is affected by air  resistance. the air resistance eventua lly reaches a constant value.    which description about successive stages of the motion of the object is correct?  a constant acceleration, then constant deceleration  b constant deceleration, then zero acceleration  c decreasing acceleration, then constant deceleration  d decreasing acceleration, then zero acceleration    4 a concrete post is carried up a very high mountain. at the top of the mountain, the gravitational  field is slightly weaker than at the bottom.    what is the effect of this weaker field on the mass and on the weight of the post at the top of the mountain?     mass weight  a is less is less  b is less is unchanged  c is unchanged is less  d is unchanged is unchanged    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16 [turn over  5 the diagram shows a cuboid block made from a metal of density 2.5  g / cm3.    2.0 cm 2.0 cm10 cm     what is the mass of the block?  a 8.0  g b 16  g c 50  g d 100  g     6 the diagram shows an object moving at a constant speed in a circular path in the direction  shown.    a force acts on the object to keep it in the circular path.    in which labelled direction does this force act, when the object is in the position shown?    a cdbobject path of object     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  7 a spring obeys hooke\u2019s law.    which graph is obtained by plotting the exten sion of the spring against the load applied?    extension 0 0 loadb extension 0 0 loadc extension 0 0 loaddextension 0 0 loada      8 which is the value of a vector quantity?  a 200  v  b 100  kg  / m3  c 20  m / s, east  d 50  j / (kg  \u00b0c)    9 the table gives four energy sources and states whether the energy of the source is derived from  the sun.    which row is correct?     source of energy derived from the sun  a geothermal yes  b oil no  c water held behind a dam yes  d wind no    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16 [turn over  10 a weight-lifter raises a 2000  n weight through a vertical height of 2.0  m in 0.80  s.    what useful power does he develop in doing this?  a 800  w b 3200  w c 4000  w d 5000  w     11 a wind turbine generates 54  kw of useful power from an input of 180  kw of wind power.    which calculation gives the percentage efficiency of the turbine?  a 100  00018000054    \u00d7 %  b 100  00054000180    \u00d7 %  c 000180100  00054   \u00d7 %  d 00054100  000180   \u00d7 %      12 a force acts on an area to produce a pressure.    which changes produce the same pressure?  a double the area and double the force  b double the area and halve the force  c double the area and make the force four times bigger  d halve the area and double the force    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  13 identical toy bricks are placed one on top of another to make a tower on a table.    bricks tower of bricks table     which graph shows the relationship between the pressure p that the tower exerts on the table  and the weight w of the tower?    a p w0 0b p w0 0c p w0 0d p w0 0     14 gases can be compressed, but liquids cannot.    which statement explains this difference?  a each molecule in a gas is more compressible than each molecule in a liquid.  b molecules in a gas are further apart than molecules in a liquid.  c molecules in a gas attract each other more strongly than molecules in a liquid.  d molecules in a gas move more slowly than molecules in a liquid.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16 [turn over  15 the diagram shows a quantity of gas trapped in a cylinder. the piston is pushed in slowly and the  gas is compressed. the temperature of the gas does not change.    gas pistonpiston pushed in     which graph shows the relationship between the pressure and the volume of the gas?    a pressure volume0 0b pressure volume0 0 c pressure volume0 0d pressure volume0 0     16 which quantity gives the thermal capacity  of a solid object?  a the energy lost by radiation from the object in 1.0  s  b the energy needed to melt the object  c the energy needed to raise the temperature of the object by 1.0  \u00b0c  d the total amount of thermal energy in the object    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  17 to mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are  needed.    which of these is a fixed point on the celsius scale?  a room temperature  b the temperature inside a freezer  c the temperature of pure melting ice  d the temperature of pure warm water     18 in an experiment, a liquid is heated at a constant rate.    the temperature of the liquid increases and eventually becomes constant.    which statement about the experiment is correct?  a boiling occurs at all temperatures but only on the liquid surface.  b boiling occurs throughout the liquid but only at the constant temperature.  c evaporation occurs throughout the liquid and at all temperatures.  d evaporation occurs only at the constant temperature and only on the liquid surface.     19 one end of a copper rod is heated.    what is one method by which thermal energy is transferred in the copper rod?  a free electrons transfer energy from the cooler end to the hotter end.  b free electrons transfer energy from the hotter end to the cooler end.  c molecules of copper move from the cooler end to the hotter end.  d molecules of copper move from the hotter end to the cooler end.    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16 [turn over  20 two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. a small spacer keeps the two cups separated.     hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid is put on top, as shown.   lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench     which statement is correct?  a the bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.  b the lid reduces the energy lost by convection.  c there is no thermal conduction through the sides of either cup.  d thermal radiation is prevented by the small air gap.     21 which is a unit of wavelength?  a hertz  b metre  c metre per second  d second    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  22 which diagram correctly shows a ray of light reflected by a plane mirror?    40\u00b0 ray of light50\u00b0a 40\u00b0 ray of light 50\u00b0b 40\u00b0 40\u00b0ray of lightcray of light 50\u00b050\u00b0 d      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16 [turn over  23 which diagram shows how a converging lens is used as a magnifying glass?    lensfa bf objectimage lensfc f objectimage d lensf fobject imagelensf fimage object      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  24 a sound wave travels from a point x to a point y.    x y    which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, due to the sound wave, in the  region between x and y?    d c b a     25 the speed of sound in air is 340  m / s.    which row gives typical values for the speed of sound in a liquid and in a solid?     speed of sound in  a liquid  / (m  / s) speed of sound in  a solid  / (m  / s)  a   250   180  b   250 5000  c 1500   180  d 1500 5000    26 in which pair are both materials magnetic?  a aluminium and copper  b copper and iron  c iron and steel  d steel and aluminium    27 which methods could be used to demagnetise a magnet?    method 1: place it in an east-west direction and hammer it  method 2: place it in an east-west direction and heat it until it is red hot  method 3: pull it slowly from a coil that is carrying an alternating current  method 4: put it slowly into a coil that is carrying a direct current    a methods 1, 2 and 3  b methods 2, 3 and 4  c methods 1 and 2 only  d methods 3 and 4 only     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16 [turn over  28 which produces an electromotive force (e.m.f.)?  a a battery  b a filament lamp  c a resistor  d a spring balance      29 the table describes four different resistance wires. they are all made from the same metal.    which wire has the smallest resistance?     length of   wire  / m diameter of   wire  / mm  a 2.0 1.0  b 2.0 1.5  c 3.0 1.0  d 3.0 1.5     30 which circuit shows the directions of the conventional current i and the flow of electrons?    electrons ia electrons ib electrons ic electrons id      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  31 four lamps are each labelled 240  v.    in which circuit do all four lamps have normal brightness?    240  va 240  vb 240  vc 240  vd      32 a battery charger plugs into a 230  v a.c. supply. the charger is used to charge a 6.0  v d.c.  battery.    the charger contains diodes and a transformer.    what is the purpose of these components?     diodes transformer  a rectify the a.c. steps down the voltage  b rectify the a.c. steps up the voltage  c step down the voltage rectifies the a.c.  d step up the voltage rectifies the a.c.    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16 [turn over  33 the diagram shows a potential divider connected to two voltmeters p and q.    vvoltmeter qvvoltmeter p     the resistance of the variable resistor is decreased.    which row shows what happens to the reading on each voltmeter?     reading on  voltmeter p reading on  voltmeter q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      34 after some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.    what is the greatest hazard?  a a fire  b a fuse blows  c an electric shock  d no current flows     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  35 an electron moves into a uniform magnetic field.    the arrow shows the initial direction of motion of the electron.    the direction of the magnetic field is into the plane of the page (away from you).    uniform magnetic field electron     in which direction does a force act on the electron when it enters the magnetic field?  a into the page  b out of the page  c towards the bottom of the page  d towards the top of the page      36 the diagram shows an a.c. generator.    nscoil output voltagerotation of coil     as the coil passes through the position shown, the output voltage is +10  v.    when does the output voltage become \u201310  v?  a when the coil has turned through 90 \u00b0  b when the coil has turned through 180 \u00b0  c when the coil has turned through 270 \u00b0  d when the coil has turned through 360 \u00b0   ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  37 the scattering of \u03b1-particles by a thin metal foil supports the nuclear model of an atom.    why are \u03b1-particles used rather than neutrons?  a because they always travel more slowly  b because they are heavier  c because they are larger in diameter  d because they have a positive charge      38 a nucleus of a radioactive substance  po218 84 undergoes an \u03b1-decay followed by a \u03b2-decay.    what are the nucleon (mass) number and proton (atomic) number of the nuclide formed after  both decays have happened?     nucleon number proton number  a 214 85  b 216 85  c 214 83  d 216 83     39 a scientist carries out an experiment using a sealed source which emits \u03b2-particles. the range of  the \u03b2-particles in the air is about 30  cm.    which precaution is the most effective to protect the scientist from the radiation?  a handling the source with long tongs  b keeping the temperature of the source low  c opening all windows in the laboratory  d washing his hands before leaving the laboratory      40 which row describes the nature of \u03b1-particles and of \u03b3-rays?     \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  a helium nuclei electromagnetic radiation  b helium nuclei electrons  c protons electromagnetic radiation  d protons electrons     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  blank page      ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  blank page      ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to t race copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is  produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/f/m/16  blank page       "
        },
        "0625_m16_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 23 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/sg) 107600/3 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over *2580177094* physics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core) february/march 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 a student is investigating volume and density.  the student has a box, as shown in fig. 1.1, a balance, a rule and some dry sand.  (a) fig. 1.1 shows the dimensions of the inside of the box. 4.0 cm 4.0 cm 5.0 cm fig. 1.1 (not to scale)   calculate the volume of sand needed to fill the box.  volume of sand =  ... cm3 [1]  (b) the student measures the mass of the box when empty and when filled with sand. quantity mass / g mass of box filled with sand 216.0 mass of empty box  40.0   calculate the mass of the sand in the box, using her results.  mass of sand =  ... g [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) calculate the density of the sand.  density of sand =  ... g / cm3 [3]  (d) a miner has a bag containing a mixture of gold dust and sand. gold has a density of  19.3 g / cm3.   he heats the mixture until the gold melts.   predict whether the sand will float on top of the molten gold. explain your answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 three students walk together from school to a bridge. the students stand together on the bridge  for three minutes and then return separately to school.  the distance-time graphs for student a, student b and student c are shown in fig. 2.1. 400 200 0 0 5 10 15 time  / minutesdistance  / m students walk togetherstudents together on bridge student astudent bstudent c fig. 2.1  (a) (i) determine the distance from the school to the bridge.  distance =  ..  m [1]   (ii) calculate the average speed of the students when they are walking to the bridge. give  your answer in m / s.  average speed =  ...m / s [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) the students return to school at different speeds. one student walks slowly, one student  walks quickly and the other student runs.   state which student runs. explain how this is shown by the graph.   student  explanation  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 fig. 3.1 shows a see-saw. the see-saw is horizontal when not in use. p fig. 3.1  a small child sits on one seat of the see-saw. this creates a turning effect about point p .  (a) which of these words means the turning effect of a force? tick one box. equilibrium moment resultant  [1]  (b) state the scientific name for point p .  .. .[1]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) a much heavier boy sits on the other end of the see-saw, as shown in fig. 3.2. p end a end bboy moves fig. 3.2   the heavier boy moves slowly along the see-saw from end b until he reaches point p .   describe and explain what happens to the see-saw.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 fig. 4.1 shows  a balloon near a window on a warm sunny day. fig. 4.1  fig. 4.2 shows how the volume of the balloon changes throughout the day. 510 508 506 504 502 500 10:00 12:00 time of day14:00 16:00 18:00volume of balloon  / cm3 fig. 4.2",
            "9": "9 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (a) describe how the volume changes throughout the day.  .. .[1]  (b) explain, in terms of the gas molecules inside the balloon, why the volume changes in this way  between 10:00 and 14:00.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  [to tal: 4]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20165 fig. 5.1 shows a wave-powered generator. it generates electricity from the movement of sea  waves. chamber air incoming waves waves make water rise and fallturbine and generator fig. 5.1  (a) the sentences below describe how the wave-powered generator works.    a  air is pushed through the turbine, making it spin.    b water rises and falls in the chamber.    c the turbine turns a generator.    d the generator produces electrical energy.    e waves travel towards the chamber.   write letters in the boxes below to arrange the sentences in the correct order. the first one is  done for you. e  [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) more electricity needs to be generated from renewable sources instead of from burning fossil  fuels.   state three  benefits of generating electricity from renewable sources rather than from fossil  fuels.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20166 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a plane mirror reflecting a ray of light. wxy zmirror fig. 6.1   (i) there is a dashed line drawn at right angles to the mirror.    state the name of this line.  .. .[1]   (ii) state which angle, w, x, y, or z, is the angle of reflection.  .. .[1]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a ray of white light entering a semi-circular glass block. the ray of light emerges  at point r and travels alongside the flat surface. glass white lightrs tscreen fig. 6.2   a spectrum of colours can be seen on the screen between s and t.   (i) state the colours in the correct order. one has been done for you.          red     colour at s .       .       .       .       .       .      colour at t . [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) the angle of the ray is changed.    on fig. 6.3, complete the path of the ray of light. explain your answer. glass white lightair fig. 6.3  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20167 fig. 7.1 shows a room with a heater. convector heaterceiling of room fig. 7.1  (a) the temperature in the room is hottest near to the ceiling. explain why.  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) the ceiling of the room is made from an insulating material as shown in fig. 7.2. top bottomaluminium foil foam with air trapped inside aluminium foil fig. 7.2   explain how this reduces the transfer of thermal energy through the ceiling.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]  [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over8 (a) some students want to determine the speed of sound in air.   describe a method they could use. include the measurements they must make.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[4]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (b) the graph in fig. 8.1 represents a sound wave. 0a cd efbdisplacement distance fig. 8.1   (i) which distance represents the amplitude of the wave? circle your answer. [1] ac   af   be   de   cf   (ii) which distance represents the wavelength of the wave? circle your answer. [1] ac   af   be   de   cf   (iii) another sound wave, of the same wavelength, is louder.    on fig. 8.1, draw this wave. [2]  [total: 8]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over9 waves from different regions of the electromagnetic spectrum have different uses.  (a) draw one line from each type of electromagnetic wave to its use. household lights microwaves television remote control loudspeaker infra-red waves satellite communications security check of suitcases  [2]  (b) many years ago, some shoe shops used x-ray machines to make images of feet, as shown in  fig. 9.1. fig. 9.1   explain the risk to health of using these x-ray machines.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 4]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 201610 a student  uses a bar magnet to distinguish between an unlabelled magnet and an iron bar.  (a)  describe how the student identifies which is the magnet and which is the iron bar.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) the student suspends the iron bar near to a coil, as shown in fig. 10.1. the iron bar is free to  move. s coilsuspended iron bar fig. 10.1   describe and explain what happens when the switch s is closed.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) fig. 10.2 shows a wire passing through a piece of card. cardlarge current fig. 10.2   there is a current in the wire in the direction of the arrow.   on fig. 10.3, draw the pattern of the magnetic field lines due to the current in the wire. include  the direction of the field. [3] card wire carrying current into the page fig. 10.3  [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 201611 (a) a student changes the current in a filament lamp. she measures the current and the potential  difference (p.d.) across the lamp.   fig. 11.1 is an incomplete circuit diagram. fig. 11.1   (i) on fig. 11.1, complete the unfinished circuit symbols. [3]   (ii) one pair of readings for the lamp is shown in the table. p.d. / v current /a 6.0 1.2    calculate the resistance of the filament in the lamp for these readings.  resistance of filament =  ... \u03c9 [3]   (iii) after many hours of use, the filament wire in a lamp becomes thinner.    state the effect, if any, on the resistance of the lamp.  .. .[1]",
            "21": "21 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (b)(i) complete the circuit in fig. 11.2 to show a battery connected to three lamps arranged in  parallel. fig. 11.2  [2]   (ii) describe two advantages of connecting these lamps in parallel with the battery.  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 11]",
            "22": "22 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 201612 three types of ionising radiation are alpha, beta and gamma.  (a) draw one straight line from each type of radiation to a property of that radiation. type of radiation property of radiation alpha \u03b1 beta \u03b2 gamma \u03b3has a negative charge has a long half-life is stopped by paper is electromagnetic radiation  [3]  (b) polonium-210 has the nuclide notation 210 84po.   for one neutral atom of polonium-210,   (i) determine the number of protons,  .[1]   (ii) determine the number of neutrons.  ...[1]",
            "23": "23 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (c) fig. 12.1 shows a decay curve for polonium-210. 0 2 04 06 08 0 1 0 0 time  / weeks18000 16000 14000 12000 10000 8000 6000 4000 2000 0count rate  /  counts per second fig. 12.1    use the graph to determine the half-life of polonium-210.  half-life =  ... weeks [2]  [total: 7]",
            "24": "24 0625/32/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_m16_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (st/sg) 107601/3 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *7032633375* physics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended) february/march 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 a driving instructor gives a student a sudden order to stop the car in the shortest possible time.     fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of the motion of the car from the moment the order is given. speed m / s30 20 10 0 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 time t  / s fig. 1.1  (a) the order to stop is given at time t = 0 s.   (i) state the speed of the car at t = 0 s.  speed =  ...[1]   (ii) suggest why the car continues to travel at this speed for 0.9 s.  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) calculate   (i) the deceleration of the car between t = 0.9 s and t = 4.0 s,  deceleration =  ...[2]   (ii) the total distance travelled by the car from t = 0 s.  distance =  ...[3]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) describe and explain a danger to a driver of not wearing a safety belt during a sudden stop.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 fig. 2.1 shows a hammer being used to drive a nail into a piece of wood. hammer head nail wood fig. 2.1             the mass of the hammer head is 0.15 kg.  the speed of the hammer head when it hits the nail is 8.0 m / s.  the time for which the hammer head is in contact with the nail is 0.0015 s.  the hammer head stops after hitting the nail.             (a) calculate the change in momentum of the hammer head.   change in momentum =  ...[2]  (b) state the impulse given to the nail.  impulse =  ...[1]  (c) calculate the average force between the hammer and the nail.  average force =  ...[2]  [total: 5]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over3 (a) (i) on fig. 3.1, draw a graph of extension against load for a spring which obeys hooke\u2019s law.  [1] extension 0 0load fig. 3.1   (ii) state the word used to describe the energy stored in a spring that has been stretched or  compressed.  .. .[1]  (b) fig. 3.2 shows a model train, travelling at speed v, approaching a buffer. model train buffer spring fig. 3.2   the train, of mass 2.5 kg, is stopped by compressing a spring in the buffer. after the train has  stopped, the energy stored in the spring is 0.48 j.    calculate the initial speed v of the train.   v =  ...[4] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 (a) the source of solar energy is the sun.   tick the box next to those resources for which the sun is also the source of energy.     coal      geothermal      hydroelectric      nuclear      wind  [2]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows a solar water-heating panel on the roof of a house.  copper tubes, painted black roof fig. 4.1   cold water flows into the copper tubes, which are heated by solar radiation. hot water flows  out of the tubes and is stored in a tank.   (i) explain why the tubes are made of copper and are painted black.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]    (ii) in 5.0 s, 0.019 kg of water flows through the tubes. the temperature of the water increases  from 20 \u00b0c to 72 \u00b0c. the specific heat capacity of water is 4200 j / (kg \u00b0c).    calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in 5.0 s.   thermal energy =  ...[3]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (iii) the efficiency of the solar panel is 70 %.    calculate the power of the solar radiation incident on the panel.  power =  ...[2]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20165 (a) a student carries out an experiment to find the relationship between the pressure p and the  volume v of a fixed mass of gas. the table contains four of her sets of measurements. p / kpa 250 500 750 1000 v / cm330.0 15.2 9.8 7.6   (i) use the data in the table to suggest the relationship between the pressure and the  volume in this experiment. explain how you reach your conclusion.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) state the property of the gas, apart from the mass, that remains constant during the  experiment.  .. .[1]  (b) a lake is 5.0  m deep. the density of the water is 1000  kg / m3.   (i) calculate the pressure at the bottom of the lake due to this depth of water.   pressure =  ...[2]   (ii) a bubble of gas escapes from the mud at the bottom of the lake and rises to the surface.    place one tick in each row of the table to indicate what happens to the volume, the mass  and the density of the gas in the bubble. assume that no gas or water vapour enters or leaves the bubble.   increases stays the same decreases volume of bubble mass of gas in bubble  density of gas in bubble [2] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over6 (a) fig. 6.1 represents the waveform of a sound wave. the wave is travelling at constant speed. displacement of particles distance along wave fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1,    1.  label with the letter x the marked distance corresponding to the amplitude of the  wave, [1]    2.   label with the letter y the marked distance corresponding to the wavelength of the  wave. [1]   (ii)  state what happens to the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave if    1.  the loudness of the sound is increased at constant pitch, amplitude  ... wavelength  .  [1]     2. the pitch of the sound is increased at constant loudness. amplitude  ... wavelength  .  [1]   (b) a ship uses pulses of sound to measure the depth of the sea beneath the ship. a sound pulse  is transmitted into the sea and the echo from the sea-bed is received after 54 ms. the speed  of sound in seawater is 1500 m / s.   calculate the depth of the sea beneath the ship.  depth =  ...[3] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20167 (a) explain what is meant by   (i) total internal reflection ,  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) critical angle .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light, travelling in air, incident on a glass prism. 60\u00b0 30\u00b0 fig. 7.1   (i) the speed of light in air is 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s. its speed in the glass is 2.0 \u00d7 108 m / s.    calculate the refractive index of the glass.  refractive index =  ...[2]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) show that the critical angle for the glass-air boundary is 42\u00b0. [1]   (iii) on fig. 7.1, draw carefully, without calculation, the continuation of the ray through the  prism and into the air. [3] [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20168 (a) fig. 8.1 shows 3 lamps and a fuse connected to a power supply. 220  v fig. 8.1   the e.m.f. of the supply is 220 v. each lamp is labelled 220 v, 40 w. the rating of the fuse is  2.0 a.   calculate   (i) the current in each lamp,  current =  ...[2]   (ii) the current in the fuse,  current =  ...[1]   (iii) the total number of lamps, all in parallel, that could be connected without blowing the  fuse.  number =  ...[2]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) after a very long period of use, the wire filament of one of the lamps becomes thinner.   (i) underline the effect of this change on the resistance of the filament.    resistance increases  resistance remains the same  resistance decreases [1]  (ii) state and explain the effect of this change on the power of the lamp.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20169 (a) (i) state what is meant by the direction  of an electric field.  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) fig. 9.1 shows a pair of oppositely-charged horizontal metal plates with the top plate  positive. + + + + + + + + + + + + +  \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013  fig. 9.1    the electric field between the plates in fig. 9.1 is uniform.    draw lines on fig. 9.1 to represent this uniform field. add arrows to these lines to show  the direction of the field. [3]  (b) fig. 9.2 shows a very small negatively-charged oil drop in the air between a pair of oppositely  charged horizontal metal plates. the oil drop does not move up or down. \u2013 oil drop fig. 9.2   (i) suggest, in terms of forces, why the oil drop does not move up or down.  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) without losing any of its charge, the oil drop begins to evaporate.    state and explain what happens to the oil drop.  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over10 (a) an iodine isotope 131 53 i decays by \u03b2-emission to an isotope of xenon (xe).   (i) state the number of each type of particle in a neutral atom of 131 53 i.    protons .  neutrons .  electrons .  [2]   (ii) state the symbol, in nuclide notation, for the xenon nucleus.  .. .[2]  (b) the background count rate of radioactivity in a laboratory is 30 counts / min.   a radioactive sample has a half-life of 50 minutes. the sample is placed at a fixed distance  from a detector. the detector measures an initial count rate from the sample, including  background, of 310 counts / min.    on fig. 10.1, plot suitable points and draw a graph of the count rate from the sample,  corrected for background , as it changes with time.    300 200 100 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160corrected count rate counts  / min time  / min fig. 10.1 [3]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 201611 (a) (i) fig. 11.1 shows the symbol for a logic gate and its truth table. outputa binput a input b output 0 1 0 10 0 1 10 0 0 1 fig. 11.1  state the name of this logic gate.  [1]   (ii) complete the truth table for the logic gate shown in fig. 11.2. outputa binput a input b output 0 1 0 10 0 1 1 fig. 11.2 [2]  (b) fig. 11.3 shows the system of logic gates used to ensure the security of the strongroom of a  bank. a b cd ef fig. 11.3   the strongroom door will only open when the output f is logic 1.   complete the table to show the logic states at a, b, c, d and e when the strongroom door  can be opened. input a input b input c output d output e output f 1 [3] [total: 6] to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series."
        },
        "0625_m16_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (lk/sg) 107589/3 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *3488363661* physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test february/march 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 in this experiment, you will determine the density of glass.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. d lboiling tube fig. 1.1  (a) (i) \u0081 measure the length l of the boiling tube provided.  l  =  ..cm    \u0081  measure the external diameter d of the boiling tube. use the wooden blocks to  help you.  d =  ..cm  [1]   (ii) describe how you measured the external diameter d of the boiling tube. y ou may draw a  diagram. include one precaution you took to ensure that the value of d is as reliable as  possible.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (iii) assuming that the boiling tube is an approximate cylinder, calculate a value for its    external volume v1 using the equation v1 = \u03c0d 2l 4.  v1 =  ... cm3 [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) (i) \u0081 completely fill the boiling tube with water.    \u0081 pour the water from the boiling tube into the measuring cylinder.    \u0081 read and record the volume v2 of the water.  v2 =  ..  cm3 [1]   (ii) describe briefly how you read the measuring cylinder to obtain a reliable value for the  volume of water. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) calculate the volume v3 of the glass, using the equation v3 = v1 \u2013 v2.  v3 =  ..  cm3 [1]  (c) \u0081 use the balance to measure the mass m of the boiling tube.  m =  .g   \u0081 calculate the density \u03c1 of the glass, using the equation  \u03c1 = m v3.  \u03c1 =  ...  [2]  (d) state one possible source of inaccuracy in the experiment. explain what effect this inaccuracy  would have on the value obtained for \u03c1.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 in this experiment, you will investigate the relationship between potential difference and current for  a resistor.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. power supply a vslide wire crocodile clipresistor fig. 2.1  (a) \u0081 switch on.   \u0081 adjust the position of the crocodile clip on the slide wire until the potential difference  v across the resistor is 0.4 v.   \u0081 record, in table 2.1, the value of the current  i shown on the ammeter.    \u0081 move the crocodile clip and record values of i for v = 0.8 v, 1.2 v, 1.6 v and 2.0 v.   \u0081 switch off.  table 2.1 v / v i / a 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0). 00  [4]  (c) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g  =  ...[1]   (ii) the resistance r of the resistor is numerically equal to g.    give a value for r, to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. include  the unit.  r =  ...[2] ",
            "6": "6 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (d) a student suggests that potential difference and current for this resistor should be proportional.   state whether your graph supports this suggestion. justify your statement by reference to  your graph. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (e) the student notices that her slide wire becomes very hot during the experiment.   suggest a change to the apparatus or procedure that might prevent this.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overblank page",
            "8": "8 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light by a transparent block. y ou will  determine a quantity known as the refractive index for the material of the block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. y ou may refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance. m a dn lcbhole ray-trace sheet eyee fig. 3.1  (a) \u0081  place the block approximately in the centre of the ray-trace sheet. carefully draw around  the block and label the corners abcd  as indicated by fig. 3.1.   \u0081 remove the block from the ray-trace sheet.   \u0081  draw a normal to line ab at its centre. extend the normal so that it crosses line cd.  label the point at which the normal crosses ab with the letter n and the point at which it  crosses cd with the letter l. [1]  (b) draw a line nm, as indicated by fig. 3.1, approximately 8 cm long and at an angle  \u03b8 = 20\u00b0.  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) \u0081 replace the block in exactly the same position as in (a).   \u0081 place two pins p1 and p2 on line nm, a suitable distance apart.   \u0081 label the positions of p1 and p2.   \u0081 view the images of p1 and p2 through the block, from the direction indicated by the eye  in fig. 3.1. place two pins p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4,  and the images of p1 and p2, all appear exactly one behind the other.    \u0081 label the positions of p3 and p4.   \u0081 remove the block and pins from the ray-trace sheet.  [1]  (d) (i) \u0081 draw a line joining p3 and p4. extend this line until it meets nl.    \u0081 label the point at which this line crosses cd with the letter e, and the point at which it  meets nl with the letter f.    \u0081 draw a line joining points n and e.  [1]   (ii) \u0081 measure the length a of line ne.  a =  ...    \u0081 measure the length b of line fe.  b =  ...    \u0081 calculate a value n1 for the refractive index, using the equation n1 = a b.  n1 =  ...  [3]  (e) (i) \u0081 repeat steps (b) and (c) for a new angle \u03b8 = 40\u00b0.    \u0081 draw a line joining the new positions of p3 and p4. extend this line until it meets nl.    \u0081 label the point at which this line crosses cd with the letter g and the point at which it  meets nl with the letter h.    \u0081 draw a line joining points n and g.  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016  (ii) \u0081 measure the length c of line ng.  c =  ...    \u0081 measure the length d of line hg.  d =  ...    \u0081 calculate a second value n2 for the refractive index, using the equation n2 = c d .  n2 =  ...  [1]  (f) describe two precautions you took in order to obtain reliable results in this experiment.  1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11. [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over4 a student suggests that the area of the water surface will affect the rate of cooling of hot water in a  container.  plan an experiment to investigate the relationship between surface area and rate of cooling.  write a plan for the experiment, including:  \u0081 the apparatus needed  \u0081 how you will obtain a range of surface areas  \u0081 instructions for carrying out the experiment   \u0081 the measurements you will take  \u0081 the precautions you will take to ensure that the results are as reliable as possible  \u0081 the graph you will plot from your results \u2013 you should sketch the axes, with appropriate labels.  a diagram is not required but you may draw one if it helps to explain your plan.  ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. ",
            "12": "12 0625/52/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_m16_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (lk/sg) 107592/4 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *3251965538* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical february/march 2016  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 some students are investigating the relationship between potential difference and current for a  resistor. they are using the circuit shown in fig. 1.1. power supply a vslide wire crocodile clipresistor fig. 1.1  the crocodile clip is connected at various positions on the slide wire, and the current and potential  difference for the resistor are measured.  (a) the readings of potential difference v and current i for various positions of the crocodile clip  are shown in table 1.1.   draw arrows on figs. 1.2 and 1.3 to show the meter readings for the values of v and i in the  first row of the table. 9\u0016 \u0017 \u0018\u0015 \u0014 \u0013 $\u0013\u0011\u0019 \u0013\u0011\u001b \u0014\u0011\u0013\u0013\u0011\u0017 \u0013\u0011\u0015 \u0013 fig. 1.2 fig. 1.3  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overtable 1.1 v / v i / a 0.4 0.08 0.8 0.17 1.2 0.25 1.6 0.34 2.0 0.41    (b)  plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis).  start both axes at the origin (0,0). 0 0  [4]  (c) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g  =  ...[1]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016  (ii) the resistance value r of the resistor is numerically equal to g.    give a value for r, to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. include  the unit.  r =  ...[2]   (d) a student suggests that potential difference and current for this resistor should be proportional.   state whether your graph supports this suggestion. justify your statement by reference to  your graph. statement   ..  .. . justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (e) the students notice that the slide wire becomes very hot during the experiment.   suggest a change to the apparatus or procedure that might prevent this.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 12]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over2 the class is carrying out an experiment to determine the density of glass.   each student has a test-tube, as shown in fig. 2.1.   d lglass test-tube fig. 2.1  (a) (i) \u0081 measure the length l of the test-tube shown in fig. 2.1.  l  =  ..cm    \u0081 measure the external diameter d of the test-tube.  d =  ..cm  [1]   (ii) a student uses two wooden blocks to help him to measure the diameter d of the test-tube.     describe his method. y ou may draw a diagram. include one precaution which could be  taken to ensure that the value of d is as reliable as possible.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016  (iii) assuming that the test-tube is an approximate cylinder, calculate a value for its    external volume v1 using the equation v1 = \u03c0d 2l 4.  v1 =  ... cm3 [1]  (b) the test-tube is completely filled with water and then the water from the test-tube is poured  into a measuring cylinder.   (i) read and record the volume v2 of the water as shown in fig. 2.2. 100 80 60 40 20cm3 fig. 2.2  v2 =  ..  cm3 [1]   (ii) describe briefly how you would read the measuring cylinder to obtain a reliable value for  the volume of water. y ou may add to fig. 2.2 to illustrate your explanation.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) calculate the volume v3 of the glass, using the equation v3 = v1 \u2013 v2.  v3 =  ..  cm3 [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) one student uses a balance to measure the mass m of the test-tube, as shown in fig. 2.3. gtest-tube fig. 2.3   (i) calculate the density \u03c1 of the glass, using the equation  \u03c1 = m v3.  \u03c1 =  .. [2]   (ii) other students are using a balance which only measures to the nearest gram.    record the mass m of the test-tube to the nearest gram.     m =  ... g [1]  (d) the precision of the balance does not affect the accuracy of this experiment.   state one possible source of inaccuracy in the experiment. explain what effect this inaccuracy  would have on the value obtained for \u03c1.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  [total: 12]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163  a student is investigating the refraction of light by a transparent block. she uses her results to  determine a quantity known as the refractive index for the material of the block.  the student\u2019s ray-trace sheet is shown in fig. 3.1. ray-trace sheet eyem ab dcn p3 p4 fig. 3.1",
            "9": "9 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (a) the student places a transparent block abcd  on the ray-trace sheet, as indicated in fig. 3.1.  she draws a line nm.   (i) \u0081 draw a normal to line ab at point n. the normal should start above  ab and extend  below ab so that it crosses line cd.    \u0081 label the point at which the normal crosses cd with the letter l.  [1]   (ii) measure the angle \u03b8 between the normal and line nm.  \u03b8 =  ...[1]  (b) the student places two pins p1 and p2 on line nm, a suitable distance apart.    on fig. 3.1, mark and label appropriate positions for p1 and p2. [1]  (c) the student views the images of p1 and p2 through the block, from the direction indicated by  the eye in fig. 3.1.   she places two pins p3 and p4, as shown in fig. 3.1, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images  of p1 and p2, all appear exactly one behind the other.    (i) \u0081 draw a line joining p3 and p4. extend this line until it meets nl.    \u0081 label the point at which this line crosses cd with the letter e, and the point at which it  meets nl with the letter  f.    \u0081 draw a line joining points n and e.     \u0081 measure the length a of line ne.  a =  ...    \u0081 measure the length b of line fe.  b =  ...  [2]    (ii)  calculate a value n for the refractive index, using the equation n = a b.  n =  ...[2]  (d) describe two precautions that you would take in order to obtain reliable results in this type of  experiment.  1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a student suggests that the area of the water surface will affect the rate of cooling of hot water in a  container.  plan an experiment to investigate the relationship between surface area and rate of cooling.  write a plan for the experiment, including:  \u0081 the apparatus needed  \u0081 how you will obtain a range of surface areas  \u0081 instructions for carrying out the experiment   \u0081 the measurements you will take  \u0081 the precautions you will take to ensure that the results are as reliable as possible  \u0081 the graph you will plot from your results \u2013 you should sketch the axes, with appropriate labels.  a diagram is not required but you may draw one if it helps to explain your plan.   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. ",
            "11": "11 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/f/m/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib16 06_0625_11/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over       *1549637503* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  1 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     2 a train begins a journey from a station and travels 60  km in a time of 20 minutes.    what is the average speed of the train?  a 3.0  m / s b 5.0  m / s c 50  m / s d 60  m / s      3 two runners take part in a race.    the graph shows how the speed of each runner changes with time.    00speed timerunner 1 runner 2 t    what does the graph show about the runners at time t ?  a both runners are moving at the same speed.  b runner 1 has zero acceleration.  c runner 1 is overtaking runner 2.  d runner 2 is slowing down.    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16 [turn over  4 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same     5 an object has a mass of 50  kg.    the gravitational field strength on earth is 10.0  n / kg.    the gravitational field strength on a distant planet is 4.0  n / kg.    what is the weight of the object on earth, and what is its weight on the distant planet?     on earth on the distant  planet  a 5.0  kg 12.5  kg  b 5.0  n 12.5  n  c 500  kg 200  kg  d 500  n 200  n    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  6 a student wishes to determine the density of an irregularly-shaped stone.    first he finds the mass of the stone. next he lo wers the stone into a measuring cylinder  containing water.    the diagrams show the measuring cylinder before and after the stone is lowered into it.    stonestone waterwaterreading 2 reading 1     how should the student calculate the density of the stone?  a mass of stone \u00d7 reading 2  b mass of stone \u00d7 (reading 2 \u2013 reading 1)  c mass of stone \u00f7 reading 2  d mass of stone \u00f7 (reading 2 \u2013 reading 1)      7 which is an example of a force?  a energy  b power  c pressure  d weight    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16 [turn over  8 the diagram shows an object of weight w and an object of weight z balanced on a uniform metre  rule.    pivot50 cm markab object of weight wobject ofweight z metre rule    which equation relating to w, z, a and b is correct?  a bz aw=  b w \u00d7 z = a \u00d7 b  c w \u00d7 a = z \u00d7 b  d w \u00d7 (a + b) = z     9 a skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10  000  j of gravitational potential  energy.    she skis down the slope. at the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000  j.        how much energy is dissipated in overcoming friction and air resistance as the skier moves down the slope?  a 2000  j b 8000  j c 10  000  j d 12  000  j     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  10 a coal-fired power station generates electricity. coal is burnt and the energy released is used to  boil water. the steam from the water makes the generator move and this produces electricity.    which words are used to describe the energy stored in the coal and the energy of the moving  generator?     coal generator  a chemical hydroelectric  b chemical kinetic  c geothermal hydroelectric  d geothermal kinetic      11 four different children run up the same set of stairs.    for which child is the useful power to climb the stairs the greatest?     mass of child  / kg time taken  / s  a 40 15  b 50 25  c 60 25  d 70 15      12 the diagram shows three vases each with the same base area. each vase contains water of the  same depth.    p q rwater water water     which statement about the water pressures at points p, q and r is correct?  a the pressure at point p is the greatest.  b the pressure at point q is the least.  c the pressure at point r is the greatest.  d the pressures at points p, q and r are the same.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16 [turn over  13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    v w x y zmercury     the atmospheric pressure increases.    which distance increases?  a vw b wy c xy d xz      14 which statement about evaporation is correct?  a evaporation causes the temperature of the remaining liquid to decrease.  b evaporation does not occur from a cold liquid near its freezing point.  c evaporation does not occur from a dense liquid, such as mercury.  d evaporation occurs from all parts of a liquid.      15 a gas is stored in a sealed container of consta nt volume. the temperature of the gas increases.  this causes the pressure of the gas to increase.    what happens to the gas molecules during this pressure increase?  a the average kinetic energy of the molecules increases.  b the average separation of the molecules decreases.  c the average separation of the molecules increases.  d the volume of each molecule increases.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  16 a substance loses thermal energy (heat) to the surroundings at a steady rate.    the graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes with time.    00 timetemperature p q     what could the portion pq of the graph represent?  a gas condensing  b gas cooling   c liquid cooling  d liquid solidifying      17 a student wishes to check the upper and the lo wer fixed points on a celsius scale thermometer.    110\u00b0c 10090 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 100 \u201310     she has four beakers p, q, r and s.    beaker p contains a mixture of ice and salt.  beaker q contains a mixture of ice and water. beaker r contains boiling salt solution.  beaker s contains boiling water.    which two beakers should she use to check the fixed points?  a p and r b p and s c q and r d q and s     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16 [turn over  18 the same quantity of thermal energy is supplied to two solid objects x and y. the temperature  increase of object x is greater than the temperature increase of object y.    which statement explains this?  a x has a lower melting point than y.  b x has a lower density than y.  c x has a lower thermal capacity than y.  d x is a better thermal conductor than y.     19 a liquid is heated in a beaker.    heatingliquid     the density of the liquid changes as its temperature increases. this causes energy to be transferred throughout the liquid.    how does the density change and what is this energy transfer process?     density energy transfer  process  a decreases conduction  b decreases convection  c increases conduction  d increases convection      20 a rod is made half of glass and half of copper. four pins a, b, c and d are attached to the rod by  wax. the rod is heated in the centre as shown.    the pins fall off when the wax melts.    which pin falls off first?    heatpin apin bpin cpin dglass copper  ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  21 which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and x-rays?     light waves sound waves x-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal transverse  b longitudinal transverse longitudinal  c transverse longitudinal transverse  d transverse transverse longitudinal     22 radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.    hillradio waves house     the waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be  a diffracted.  b radiated.  c reflected.  d refracted.     23 the ray diagram shows the image of an object formed by a converging lens.    72 cm 40 cm 50 cmobject imageconverging lens     what is the focal length of the lens?  a 40  cm b 50  cm c 72  cm d 90  cm     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16 [turn over  24 the diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a prism.    white lightx y zspectrumof coloursprism     which row could be correct for the colours seen at x, at y and at z?     colour at x colour at y colour at z  a red violet yellow  b red yellow violet  c violet yellow red  d yellow red violet     25 why can ultrasound not be heard by humans?  a the amplitude is too great.  b the frequency is too great.  c the speed is too great.  d the wavelength is too great.    26 a sound wave has a certain amplitude and a certain frequency.    a second sound wave is quieter and lower in pitch than the first sound wave.    the second wave has  a a larger amplitude and a greater frequency.  b a larger amplitude and a smaller frequency.  c a smaller amplitude and a greater frequency.  d a smaller amplitude and a smaller frequency.     27 which statement about a magnet is correct?  a a magnet attracts a gold rod.  b a magnet does not attract a plastic rod.  c a magnet never repels another magnet.  d a magnet sometimes repels an unmagnetised nickel rod.   ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  28 a student wishes to make a permanent magnet. she has an iron rod and a steel rod.    which rod should she use to make the permanent magnet, and is this rod a hard magnetic  material or a soft magnetic material?     rod type of magnetic material  a iron hard  b iron soft  c steel hard  d steel soft      29 the circuit shown includes two meters x and y, connected correctly.    yx     which row gives the unit of the quantity measured by x and the unit of the quantity measured   by y?     meter x meter y  a ampere ampere  b ampere volt  c volt ampere  d volt volt    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16 [turn over  30 a polythene rod is rubbed with a cloth.    polythene rod cloth    the rod and the cloth both become charged as electrons move between them.    the rod becomes negatively charged.    which diagram shows how the rod becomes negatively charged, and the final charge on the  cloth?    a + +++ + ++++\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013electron movementelectronmovement electron movement electronmovementb + +++ + ++++\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 c \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013d \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013      31 what is the function of a relay?  a to allow a current in one circuit to operate a switch in another circuit  b to prevent an electric shock by earthing a metal case  c to protect a circuit by melting if the current becomes too large  d to transform a d.c. voltage to a different value    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  32 the circuit shown contains three ammeters x, y and z.    10 \u03c9 20 \u03c9aaax yz     which ammeter has the largest reading?  a x  b y  c z  d they all have the same reading.     33 the diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.    + \u2013ldr     in the evening it gets dark.    which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (ldr) and on the  potential difference (p.d.) across it?     resistance of ldr p.d. across ldr  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16 [turn over  34 a domestic circuit includes a 30  a fuse. this protects the wiring if there is too much current in the  circuit.    in which wire is the 30  a fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?     position operation  a live wire disconnects the circuit  b live wire reduces the current to 30  a  c neutral wire disconnects the circuit  d neutral wire reduces the current to 30  a     35 a strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.    core pinscoilcurrent     what happens when the current in the coil is halved?  a no pins are attracted.  b some pins are attracted, but not as many.  c the same number of pins is attracted.  d more pins are attracted.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  36 the diagram shows a transformer.    primary coil 800 turnssecondary coil 40 turnsinput voltageoutput  voltage       the input voltage is 240  v.    what is the output voltage?  a 6.0  v b 12  v c 20  v d 40  v      37 how many neutrons are in a nucleus of the nuclide lc37 17 ?  a 17 b 20 c 37 d 54      38 a certain element has several isotopes.  which statement about these isotopes is correct?  a they must have different numbers of electrons orbiting their nuclei.  b they must have the same number of neutrons in their nuclei.  c they must have the same number of nucleons in their nuclei.  d they must have the same number of protons in their nuclei.      39 a radioactive nucleus emits either an \u03b1-particle or a \u03b2-particle.    what are the products of these two types of radioactive emission?     product after \u03b1-emission product after \u03b2-emission  a a nucleus of a different element a nucleus of a different element  b a nucleus of a different element a nucleus of the same element  c a nucleus of the same element a nucleus of a different element  d a nucleus of the same element a nucleus of the same element     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  40 a reading is taken every 10 minutes of the number of emissions per second from a radioactive  source. the table shows the readings.    time  / min number of  emissions  per second  0 800  10 560  20 400  30 280  40 200  50 140  60 100    what is the half-life of the source?  a 10  min b 20  min c 40  min d 60  min     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  blank page     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  blank page     ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/m/j/16  blank page      "
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib16 06_0625_12/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over       *8209657760* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16  1 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     2 the graph shows how the speed of a van changes with time for part of its journey.    in which labelled section is the van decelerating?    0 0speed time ab c d    3 a large stone is dropped from a bridge into a river. air resistance can be ignored.    which row describes the acceleration and the speed of the stone as it falls?     acceleration   of the stone speed of   the stone  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16 [turn over  4 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same     5 a boy throws a stone. the stone leaves the boy\u2019s hand and moves vertically upwards. air  resistance can be ignored.    how should the force on the stone be descri bed just after the stone leaves the boy\u2019s hand?  a downwards and constant  b downwards and increasing  c upwards and constant  d upwards and decreasing    6 the diagrams show the dimensions and masses of four regular solid objects. the objects are  made from different metals.    which metal has the greatest density?    a mass = 20  g1.0 cm 2.0 cm 2.0 cmb mass = 6.0  g1.0 cm 1.0 cm 1.0 cmc mass = 14  g1.0 cm 1.0 cm2.0 cmd mass = 32  g2.0 cm 2.0 cm 2.0 cm      ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16  7 a car travels along a straight road.    the speed-time graph for this journey is shown.    during which labelled part of the journey is the resultant force on the car zero?    timespeed 0 0abc d      8 the diagrams show four objects a, b, c and d. the centre of mass m of each object is marked  on the diagrams.    which object is not in equilibrium?    ab c d m m mm       9 a skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10  000  j of gravitational potential  energy.    she skis down the slope. at the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000  j.        how much energy is dissipated in overcoming friction and air resistance as the skier moves down the slope?  a 2000  j b 8000  j c 10  000  j d 12  000  j     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16 [turn over  10 which energy source is one that is used to boil water to make steam in power stations?  a energy from tides  b energy from waves  c hydroelectric energy  d nuclear energy      11 in a factory, two men x and y try to move identical heavy boxes p and q.    man x tries to push box p along the floor. the box does not move because an object is in the  way.    man y lifts box q from the floor onto a shelf.    box p box qman x man y direction of forcedirection of force objectshelf     which man does the most work on the box, and which box gains the most energy?     man doing  most work box gaining  most energy  a x p  b x q  c y p  d y q     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16  12 a t-shaped girder is placed on the ground in positi on x. it is then turned over to position y.    position x position yground     what happens to the force on the ground and w hat happens to the pressure on the ground?     force pressure  a increases increases  b increases remains the same  c remains the same increases  d remains the same remains the same     13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    v w x y zmercury     the atmospheric pressure increases.    which distance increases?  a vw b wy c xy d xz     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16 [turn over  14 a liquid is evaporating. the liquid is not boiling.    which statement about the liquid is correct?  a any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.  b any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid surface.  c only molecules with enough energy can escape, and only from the liquid surface.  d only molecules with enough energy can escape, but from any part of the liquid.     15 the diagram shows a quantity of gas enclosed in a cylinder by a piston.    gas cylinder pistonmoves to the left moves to the right     the piston is moved to the left or to the right. the temperature of the gas is kept constant.    which row describes the effect of moving the piston slowly in the direction shown in the table?     movement   of piston speed of gas  molecules pressure   of gas  a to the left increases decreases  b to the left no change increases  c to the right increases decreases  d to the right no change increases     16 which statement describes what happens as ice at 0  \u00b0c starts to melt to become water?  a energy is absorbed and the temperature remains constant.  b energy is absorbed and the temperature rises.  c energy is released and the temperature remains constant.  d energy is released and the temperature rises.      17 what is meant by the fixed points  of the scale of a liquid-in-glass thermometer?  a the distance between one scale division and the next  b the highest and lowest temperatures that the thermometer can record  c the maximum and minimum depth to which the thermometer should be submerged in a liquid  d the two agreed temperatures used for marking the temperature scale   ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16  18 a liquid at room temperature fills a flask and a glass tube to level x.    x y liquid     the flask is now placed in ice, and the liquid level in the tube falls to level y.    why does the level fall?  a the flask contracts.  b the flask expands.  c the liquid contracts.  d the liquid expands.     19 which process involves convection?  a bread toasting under a grill  b energy from the sun warming a road surface  c hot air rising to the top of a cool room  d thermal energy transfer through a copper bar    20 a rod is made half of glass and half of copper. four pins a, b, c and d are attached to the rod by  wax. the rod is heated in the centre as shown.    the pins fall off when the wax melts.    which pin falls off first?    heatpin apin bpin cpin dglass copper    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16 [turn over  21 which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and x-rays?     light waves sound waves x-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal transverse  b longitudinal transverse longitudinal  c transverse longitudinal transverse  d transverse transverse longitudinal     22 radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.    hillradio waves house     the waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be  a diffracted.  b radiated.  c reflected.  d refracted.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16  23 the diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass block. some of the light is refracted,  and some of the light is reflected. two angles p and q are marked on the diagram.    air glasspqray of light     which row gives the angle of incidence and shows whether the ray undergoes total internal  reflection?     angle of  incidence total internal  reflection  a p no  b p yes  c q no  d q yes      24 visible light has a frequency of approximately 5.0 \u00d7 1014  hz.    m and n are two other types of electromagnetic radiation.    the frequency of m is 5.0 \u00d7 106  hz.    the frequency of n is 5.0 \u00d7 1015  hz.    which types of radiation are m and n?     m n  a radio waves infra-red  b radio waves ultraviolet  c ultraviolet x-rays  d x-rays infra-red     25 what is the approximate range of hearing of a healthy human ear?  a 2.0  hz to 2.0  khz  b 2.0  hz to 20  khz  c 20  hz to 2.0  khz  d 20  hz to 20  khz   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16 [turn over  26 a singer sings two notes. the first note is louder and lower in pitch than the second note.    which statement about the two notes is correct?  a the first note has a larger amplitude and a larger frequency than the second note.  b the first note has a larger amplitude and a smaller frequency than the second note.  c the first note has a smaller amplitude and a larger frequency than the second note.  d the first note has a smaller amplitude and a smaller frequency than the second note.     27 two nickel bars are placed close to the n-pole of a bar magnet.    the nickel bars become magnetised.    q p n smagnetnickel bars     which row states the pole induced at p, the pole induced at q, and the type of magnetic force  between p and q?     pole induced  at p pole induced  at q force between  p and q  a n s attraction  b n s repulsion  c s n attraction  d s n repulsion    28 a student wishes to make a permanent magnet. she has an iron rod and a steel rod.    which rod should she use to make the permanent magnet, and is this rod a hard magnetic material or a soft magnetic material?     rod type of magnetic material  a iron hard  b iron soft  c steel hard  d steel soft    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16  29 two meters are connected in a circuit to measure the current in a component and the potential  difference across the component.    which meters are used and how are they connected to the component?  a an ammeter in parallel for current, a voltmeter in series for potential difference  b an ammeter in series for current, a voltmeter in parallel for potential difference  c a voltmeter in parallel for current, an ammeter in series for potential difference  d a voltmeter in series for current, an ammeter in parallel for potential difference     30 a wire has a certain electrical resistance.    the diameter and length of the wire may be changed.    which pair of changes must  cause the resistance of the wire to increase?     change of  diameter change of  length  a decrease decrease  b decrease increase  c increase decrease  d increase increase      31 p and q are the circuit symbols for two electrical components.    pq    which components are represented by p and by q?     p q  a thermistor fuse  b thermistor relay  c variable resistor fuse  d variable resistor relay     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16 [turn over  32 the diagram shows two resistors connected in a circuit.    6.0 \u03c9 12 \u03c9    what could be the combined resistance of this arrangement of resistors?  a 4.0  \u03c9 b 6.0  \u03c9 c 9.0  \u03c9 d 18  \u03c9      33 the diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.    + \u2013ldr     in the evening it gets dark.    which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (ldr) and on the  potential difference (p.d.) across it?     resistance of ldr p.d. across ldr  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16  34 a domestic circuit includes a 30  a fuse. this protects the wiring if there is too much current in the  circuit.    in which wire is the 30  a fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?     position operation  a live wire disconnects the circuit  b live wire reduces the current to 30  a  c neutral wire disconnects the circuit  d neutral wire reduces the current to 30  a     35 a strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.    core pinscoilcurrent     what happens when the current in the coil is halved?  a no pins are attracted.  b some pins are attracted, but not as many.  c the same number of pins is attracted.  d more pins are attracted.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a transformer.    primary coil 800 turnssecondary coil 40 turnsinput voltageoutput  voltage       the input voltage is 240  v.    what is the output voltage?  a 6.0  v b 12  v c 20  v d 40  v     37 a neutral atom consists of electrons orbiting a nucleus. the nucleus contains protons and  neutrons.    which statement about the atom must  be correct?  a the number of electrons is equal to the number of neutrons.  b the number of electrons is equal to the number of protons.  c the number of neutrons is equal to the number of protons.  d the number of electrons, neutrons and protons are all different.    38 below are the symbols for five different nuclides.    x35 17                x3717                x38 18                x81 35                x81 37   nuclide 1 nuclide 2 nuclide 3 nuclide 4 nuclide 5    which two nuclides are isotopes of the same element?  a nuclide 1 and nuclide 2  b nuclide 2 and nuclide 3  c nuclide 2 and nuclide 5  d nuclide 4 and nuclide 5     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/m/j/16  39 which row describes the nature and a property of all \u03b2-particles?     nature property  a electrons can travel through a vacuum  b electrons stopped by a thin sheet of paper  c helium nuclei can travel through a vacuum  d helium nuclei stopped by a thin sheet of paper     40 the graph shows how the decay rate of a radioactive source changes with time.    4000 300020001000 0 02468 1 0 time  / daysdecay rate decays  / s     what will be the activity at 8 days?  a 0 decays  / s  b 125 decays  / s  c 250 decays  / s  d 500 decays  / s       "
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib16 06_0625_13/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over       *0740940604* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  1 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     2 an object moves at a constant speed for some time, then begins to accelerate.    which distance-time graph shows this motion?    distance time0 0a distance time0 0b distance time0 0c distance time0 0d     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16 [turn over  3 a car travels at an average speed of 60  km  / h for 15 minutes.    how far does the car travel in this time?  a 4.0  km b 15  km c 240  km d 900  km     4 a heavy object is released near the surface of the earth and falls freely. air resistance can be  ignored.    which statement about the acceleration of the object due to gravity is correct?  a the acceleration depends on the mass of the object.  b the acceleration depends on the volume of the object.  c the acceleration is constant.  d the acceleration is initially zero and increases as the object falls.      5 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  6 diagram 1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.    diagram 2 shows the same measuring cylinder and water after 10 identical solid glass spheres  have been added.    diagram 1100 90 8070605040302010100 908070605040302010cm3 diagram 2cm3     the mass of one of the spheres is 10  g.    what is the density of the glass from which the spheres are made?  a 0.25  g / cm3 b 0.40  g / cm3 c 2.5  g / cm3 d 4.0  g / cm3      7 a feather falls through the air. its downward speed is constant.    which statement about the feather is correct?  a no energy is lost to the air as the feather falls.  b the air resistance acting on the feather is greater than its weight.  c the feather experiences no resultant vertical force.  d there is a resultant downward force on the feather.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16 [turn over  8 the diagram shows an l-shaped piece of card suspended freely from a pin at b.    when the card is pushed, it swings and then comes to a stop in the position shown.    at which labelled point is the centre of mass of the card?    a b cdcard suspended from here      9 a skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10  000  j of gravitational potential  energy.    she skis down the slope. at the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000  j.        how much energy is dissipated in overcoming friction and air resistance as the skier moves down the slope?  a 2000  j b 8000  j c 10  000  j d 12  000  j     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  10 which energy source is renewable and reliably available at all times?  a coal  b geothermal  c nuclear  d wind      11 two workers are stacking cans on to a shelf in a shop. the workers lift the same number of  identical cans on to the same shelf from the same level.    worker p takes 3.0 minutes to lift the cans. worker q takes 4.0 minutes to lift the cans.    which statement about the workers is correct?  a worker p develops less useful power than worker q.  b worker p develops more useful power than worker q.  c worker p does less useful work than worker q.  d worker p does more useful work than worker q.     12 the diagram shows four solid pieces of the same metal. each piece has the same thickness and  stands on a bench as shown.    which piece of metal produces the greatest pressure on the bench?    1.0 cm 1.0 cm 3.0 cm 2.0 cmabcd     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16 [turn over  13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    v w x y zmercury     the atmospheric pressure increases.    which distance increases?  a vw b wy c xy d xz      14 what causes the random, zig-zag movement (brownian motion) of smoke particles suspended in  air?  a air molecules colliding with smoke particles  b convection currents as the hot smoke rises  c smoke particles colliding with each other  d smoke particles reacting with oxygen molecules in the air      15 a sealed bottle of constant volume contains air.    the air in the bottle is heated by the sun.    what is the effect on the average speed of the air molecules in the bottle, and the average  distance between them?     average speed   of air molecules average distance  between air  molecules  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c increases increases  d increases stays the same    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  16 the melting points of ethanol and mercury are shown.     melting point  / \u00b0c  ethanol \u2013114  mercury   \u201339    which of these two liquids is  / are suitable to use in a liquid-in-glass thermometer to measure  temperatures of \u201350  \u00b0c and \u2013120  \u00b0c?  a ethanol only  b ethanol and mercury  c mercury only  d neither ethanol nor mercury      17 a jug of water is at room temperature.     several ice cubes at a temperature of 0  \u00b0c are dropped into the water and they begin to melt  immediately.    what happens to the temperature of the water and what happens to the temperature of the ice  cubes while they are melting?     temperature of  the water temperature of  the ice cubes  a decreases increases  b decreases stays constant  c stays constant increases  d stays constant stays constant      18 which quantity gives the thermal capacity  of a beaker?  a the thermal energy required to change the state  of the beaker at constant temperature  b the thermal energy required to raise the temperature of the beaker by 1  \u00b0c  c the total mass of hot liquid that the beaker can hold  d the total volume of hot liquid that the beaker can hold    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16 [turn over  19 a student suggests some uses for containers made from good thermal conductors and for  containers made from poor thermal conductors.    in which row are both suggested uses correct?     good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  a keeping a cold liquid at  a low temperature transferring thermal energy  quickly from a hot liquid  b keeping a hot liquid at  a high temperature keeping a cold liquid at  a low temperature  c  transferring thermal energy  quickly from a hot liquid transferring thermal energy  quickly to a cold liquid  d transferring thermal energy  quickly to a cold liquid keeping a hot liquid at  a high temperature      20 a rod is made half of glass and half of copper. four pins a, b, c and d are attached to the rod by  wax. the rod is heated in the centre as shown.    the pins fall off when the wax melts.    which pin falls off first?    heatpin apin bpin cpin dglass copper      21 which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and x-rays?     light waves sound waves x-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal transverse  b longitudinal transverse longitudinal  c transverse longitudinal transverse  d transverse transverse longitudinal    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  22 radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.    hillradio waves house     the waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be  a diffracted.  b radiated.  c reflected.  d refracted.      23 the diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror.    at which labelled position is the image of the object formed?    objecteyeadbc plane mirro r      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16 [turn over  24 white light enters a glass prism. the light leaving the other side of the prism is separated into  colours.    diagram 1white light colour 1 colour 2 diagram 2whitelight colour 1 colour 2glassprism glassprism     which row correctly describes what happens?     path taken by  the light colour 1 colour 2  a diagram 1 red violet  b diagram 1 violet red  c diagram 2 red violet  d diagram 2 violet red     25 which range of wave frequencies includes only sounds that can be heard by a human with  normal hearing?  a 3.0  hz to 300  hz  b 30  hz to 3000  hz  c 300  hz to 30  000  hz  d 3000  hz to 300  000  hz     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  26 a candle flame is placed in front of a loudspeaker.    the loudspeaker produces a sound wave that causes air particles to vibrate. the vibrating air  particles make the candle flame vibrate in the same direction as the air particles.    candle flame loudspeaker     which row shows the direction of vibration of the candle flame, and the nature of sound waves?     direction of  vibration nature of   sound waves  a   longitudinal  b   transverse  c  longitudinal  d  transverse      27 which statement about magnetism is correct?  a an unmagnetised iron bar becomes magnetised when it is placed near a magnet.  b an unmagnetised steel bar can be magnetised by passing a current through it.  c the direction of magnetic field lines is from an s-pole to an n-pole.  d the n-poles of two magnets attract each other.     28 a student wishes to make a permanent magnet. she has an iron rod and a steel rod.    which rod should she use to make the permanent magnet, and is this rod a hard magnetic material or a soft magnetic material?     rod type of magnetic material  a iron hard  b iron soft  c steel hard  d steel soft    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16 [turn over  29 a flexible electrical cable consists of a central conductor and outer insulation.    outer insulationcentral conductor     which pair of materials is suitable for the cable?     central conductor outer insulation  a copper plastic  b lead wood  c plastic copper  d wood lead      30 the diagram shows a battery connected to two resistors.    r     four students separately measure the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery, the current in  the resistors, and the potential difference (p.d.) across resistor r.    their results are shown in the table below.    which row shows values with their correct units?     e.m.f. current p.d.  a 3.0  a 0.30  v 1.5  a  b 3.0  a 0.30  a 1.5  v  c 3.0  v 0.30  v 1.5  a  d 3.0  v 0.30  a 1.5  v      31 why are lamps in a house lighting circuit connected in parallel rather than in series?  a if one lamp stops working, the remaining lamps become brighter.  b less current is taken from the power supply.  c the lamps can be turned off independently using switches.  d when more lamps are added, their brightness decreases.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  32 the diagram shows a cell connected to two 6.0  \u03c9 resistors. three currents, i1, i2 and i3, are  labelled.    6.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9i2i1 i3     which row correctly compares i2 and i3 with i1?     i2 i3  a same as i1 same as i1  b same as i1 smaller than i1  c smaller than i1 same as i1  d smaller than i1 smaller than i1      33 the diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.    + \u2013ldr     in the evening it gets dark.    which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (ldr) and on the potential difference (p.d.) across it?     resistance of ldr p.d. across ldr  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases   ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16 [turn over  34 a domestic circuit includes a 30  a fuse. this protects the wiring if there is too much current in the  circuit.    in which wire is the 30  a fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?     position operation  a live wire disconnects the circuit  b live wire reduces the current to 30  a  c neutral wire disconnects the circuit  d neutral wire reduces the current to 30  a     35 a strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.    core pinscoilcurrent     what happens when the current in the coil is halved?  a no pins are attracted.  b some pins are attracted, but not as many.  c the same number of pins is attracted.  d more pins are attracted.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  36 the diagram shows a transformer.    primary coil 800 turnssecondary coil 40 turnsinput voltageoutput  voltage       the input voltage is 240  v.    what is the output voltage?  a 6.0  v b 12  v c 20  v d 40  v     37 a proton and a neutron are each close to a positive nucleus.    + proton neutron positive nucleus    how does the charge on the nucleus affect  the proton and the neutron, if at all?  a the neutron is attracted; the proton is repelled.  b the neutron is not affected; the proton is repelled.  c the proton is attracted; the neutron is repelled.  d the proton is not affected; the neutron is repelled.    38 below are four statements about isotopes of a certain element.  which statement about the isotopes must  be correct?  a they are radioactive.  b they are unstable.  c they have the same number of neutrons.  d they have the same number of protons.    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  39 radioactive materials should be handled carefully.    which safety precaution does not reduce the risk to people using a radioactive material?  a keeping the material a long distance from people  b keeping the material at a low temperature  c using lead screening between the material and people  d using the material for only a short time     40 a sample of a radioactive isotope has an initial rate of emission of 128 counts per minute and a  half-life of 4 days.    how long will it take for the rate of emission to fall to 32 counts per minute?  a 2 days b 4 days c 8 days d 12 days     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  blank page      ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  blank page      ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/m/j/16  blank page      "
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib16 06_0625_21/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over       *9170531728* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/21     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  1 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     2 the speed-time graph shown is for a car moving in a straight line.    15 10 50 0 2 04 06 08 0 time  / sspeed m / s     what is the acceleration of the car when the time is 40  s?  a 0  m / s2 b 04315\u2212m / s2 c 0415m / s2 d (15 \u2013 3)  m / s2     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16 [turn over  3 two runners take part in a race.    the graph shows how the speed of each runner changes with time.    00speed timerunner 1 runner 2 t    what does the graph show about the runners at time t ?  a both runners are moving at the same speed.  b runner 1 has zero acceleration.  c runner 1 is overtaking runner 2.  d runner 2 is slowing down.      4 a satellite orbits the earth above the atmosphere at a constant speed.    the diagram shows the satellite at one point in its circular orbit around the earth.    which labelled arrow shows the direction of the resultant force on the satellite at the position shown?    earthdirection of rotation of satellite a b cd satellite     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  5 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same     6 the diagrams show three uniform beams p, q and r, each pivoted at its centre.    the two forces acting on each beam are also shown.    4.0 n2.0 m 1.0  m 4.0 np 2.0 n4.0 m 2.0  m 5.0 nq 1.5 n2.0 m 4.0  m 1.0 nr     which beams rotate clockwise?  a p and q only  b p and r only  c q and r only  d p, q and r    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16 [turn over  7 an object of mass 50  kg accelerates from a velocity of 2.0  m / s to a velocity of 10  m / s in the same  direction.    what is the impulse provided to cause this acceleration?  a 250  n s b 400  n s c 850  n s d 2500  n s     8 a scalar quantity has  a magnitude and direction.  b no magnitude and no direction.  c magnitude but no direction.  d direction but no magnitude.    9 energy is released in some nuclear reactions.    which nuclear reaction takes place in a nuclear power station, and which nuclear reaction takes  place in the sun?     nuclear power  station the sun  a fission fission  b fission fusion  c fusion fission  d fusion fusion     10 a lorry of mass 4000  kg is travelling at a speed of 4.0  m / s.    a car has a mass of 1000  kg. the kinetic energy of the car is equal to the kinetic energy of the  lorry.    what is the speed of the car?  a 2.0  m / s b 4.0  m / s c 8.0  m / s d 16.0  m / s     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  11 a force acts on an object and causes the object to move a certain distance, in the same direction  as the force.    which row represents a situation in which the largest amount of work is done on the object by the  force?     force  / n distance moved  / m  a 2.0 40.0  b 10.0 2.0  c 20.0 6.0  d 100.0 1.0      12 a diver under water uses breathing apparatus at a depth where the pressure is 1.25 \u00d7 105  pa.        a bubble of gas breathed out by the diver has a volume of 20  cm3 when it is released. the bubble  moves upwards to the surface of the water.    at the surface of the water, the atmospheric pressure is 1.00 \u00d7 105  pa.    the temperature of the water is the same at all depths.    what is the volume of this bubble when it reaches the surface?  a 15  cm3 b 16  cm3 c 20  cm3 d 25  cm3     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16 [turn over  13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    v w x y zmercury     the atmospheric pressure increases.    which distance increases?  a vw b wy c xy d xz      14 which statement about evaporation is correct?  a evaporation causes the temperature of the remaining liquid to decrease.  b evaporation does not occur from a cold liquid near its freezing point.  c evaporation does not occur from a dense liquid, such as mercury.  d evaporation occurs from all parts of a liquid.      15 a beaker contains 0.500  kg of water at a temperature of 3.0  \u00b0c. the beaker is heated, and the  internal energy of the water increases by 21.0  kj.    the specific heat capacity of water is 4200  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    what is the temperature of the water after it has been heated?  a 5.5  \u00b0c b 10.0  \u00b0c c 13.0  \u00b0c d 31.5  \u00b0c     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  16 a substance loses thermal energy (heat) to the surroundings at a steady rate.    the graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes with time.    00 timetemperature p q     what could the portion pq of the graph represent?  a gas condensing  b gas cooling   c liquid cooling  d liquid solidifying      17 a student wishes to check the upper and the lo wer fixed points on a celsius scale thermometer.    110 \u00b0c 10090 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 100 \u201310     she has four beakers p, q, r and s.    beaker p contains a mixture of ice and salt.  beaker q contains a mixture of ice and water. beaker r contains boiling salt solution.  beaker s contains boiling water.    which two beakers should she use to check the fixed points?  a p and r b p and s c q and r d q and s     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16 [turn over  18 two otherwise identical cars, one black and one white, are at the same initial temperature. the  cars are left in bright sunshine and their temperatures increase. during the night their  temperatures decrease.    which car shows the greater rate of temperature increase and which car shows the greater rate  of temperature decrease?     greater rate of  temperature  increase greater rate of  temperature  decrease  a black black  b black white  c white black  d white white     19 a liquid is heated in a beaker.    heatingliquid     the density of the liquid changes as its temperature increases. this causes energy to be  transferred throughout the liquid.    how does the density change and what is this energy transfer process?     density energy transfer  process  a decreases conduction  b decreases convection  c increases conduction  d increases convection      20 sound waves of frequency 2.0  khz travel through a substance at a speed of 800  m / s.  what is the wavelength of the waves?  a 0.40  m b 2.5  m c 400  m d 1600  m     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  21 which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and x-rays?     light waves sound waves x-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal transverse  b longitudinal transverse longitudinal  c transverse longitudinal transverse  d transverse transverse longitudinal     22 the diagram shows light travelling from air into glass.    four angles v, w, x and y are shown.    vw y xnormal air glasslight     which formula is used to calculate the refractive index n of the glass?  a n =  yv  sin sin b n =  xv  sin sin c n =  yw  sin sin d n =  xw  sin sin      23 the diagram shows a converging lens forming an image of an object.    image objectx y     which statement about the image is correct?  a it is real and can be seen by an eye at x.  b it is real and can be seen by an eye at y.  c it is virtual and can be seen by an eye at x.  d it is virtual and can be seen by an eye at y. ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16 [turn over  24 a sound wave travels through air as a series of compressions and rarefactions.    which row correctly compares the air pressure in a compression and the air pressure in a  rarefaction to the air pressure nearby where there is no sound wave?     air pressure in  a compression air pressure in  a rarefaction  a higher higher  b higher lower  c lower higher  d lower lower      25 a sound wave has a certain amplitude and a certain frequency.    a second sound wave is quieter and lower in pitch than the first sound wave.    the second wave has  a a larger amplitude and a greater frequency.  b a larger amplitude and a smaller frequency.  c a smaller amplitude and a greater frequency.  d a smaller amplitude and a smaller frequency.      26 what is an electric field?  a a region around a wire carrying an electric current in which a compass needle experiences a  force  b a region in which an electric charge experiences a force  c a region in which an electric charge is attracted by the earth\u2019s gravity  d a region through which electromagnetic radiation is passing     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  27 a negatively charged rod is held close to one side of a metal sphere. the other side of the sphere  is earthed.    which diagram shows the distribution of charge on the metal sphere?    a \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013+ +\u2013\u2013b \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 ++++c \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013+++ +d \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013      28 a cell is connected to a lamp, as shown.    +\u2013     a charge of 4.0  c flows through the lamp in 2.0  s.    what is the direction of the electron flow in the lamp and what is the current in the lamp?     direction of electron  flow in lamp current  / a  a from left to right 2.0  b from left to right 8.0  c from right to left 2.0  d from right to left 8.0    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16 [turn over  29 the diagrams show four current-voltage graphs.    which two graphs show the characteristics of an ohmic resistor and of a filament lamp?    current voltagew current voltagex current voltagey current voltagez 0 00 00 00 0     ohmic  resistor filament  lamp  a w y  b x y  c w z  d x z      30 the four circuits shown all include an a.c. power supply, two diodes and a lamp.    in which circuit is there a rectified current in the lamp?    a c db     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  31 the diagram shows a combination of logic gates.    input p (= 0)output x output y input q (= 1)    input p is at a logic state 0 (low) and input q is at a logic state 1 (high).    what are the logic states at output x and at output y?     output x output y  a 0 0  b 0 1  c 1 0  d 1 1     32 the diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.    + \u2013ldr     in the evening it gets dark.    which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (ldr) and on the potential difference (p.d.) across it?     resistance of ldr p.d. across ldr  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16 [turn over  33 a domestic circuit includes a 30  a fuse. this protects the wiring if there is too much current in the  circuit.    in which wire is the 30  a fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?     position operation  a live wire disconnects the circuit  b live wire reduces the current to 30  a  c neutral wire disconnects the circuit  d neutral wire reduces the current to 30  a     34 a strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.    core pinscoilcurrent     what happens when the current in the coil is halved?  a no pins are attracted.  b some pins are attracted, but not as many.  c the same number of pins is attracted.  d more pins are attracted.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  35 the diagram shows a transformer.    primary coil 800 turnssecondary coil 40 turnsinput voltageoutput  voltage       the input voltage is 240  v.    what is the output voltage?  a 6.0  v b 12  v c 20  v d 40  v     36 the diagram shows a shaded area where the direction of a magnetic field is into the page.    a beam of \u03b2-particles enters the field as shown.    magnetic field into the page beam of \u03b2-particles     in which direction is the beam of \u03b2-particles deflected as they enter the magnetic field?  a into the page  b out of the page  c down the page  d up the page     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16 [turn over  37 the arrangement shown is used to check whether the flour inside a cardboard packet is above a  certain level. if it is above this level, the flour absorbs the radiation from the source so that it  doesn\u2019t reach the detector.    radioactive source cardboard packetdetecto r flour     which type of radiation is suitable to use?  a \u03b1-particles only  b \u03b2-particles only  c either \u03b1-particles or \u03b2-particles  d \u03b3-rays only      38 a nucleus of americium am243 95  emits an \u03b1-particle to form a nucleus of neptunium (np).    which equation represents this decay?  a am243 95   \u2192  np247 97   +  \u03b14 2  b am243 95   \u2192  np243 96   +  \u03b10 1-  c am243 95   \u2192  np243 94   +  \u03b10 1-  d am243 95   \u2192  np239 93   +  \u03b14 2     39 a certain element has several isotopes.  which statement about these isotopes is correct?  a they must have different numbers of electrons orbiting their nuclei.  b they must have the same number of neutrons in their nuclei.  c they must have the same number of nucleons in their nuclei.  d they must have the same number of protons in their nuclei.     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  40 a reading is taken every 10 minutes of the number of emissions per second from a radioactive  source. the table shows the readings.    time  / min number of  emissions  per second  0 800  10 560  20 400  30 280  40 200  50 140  60 100    what is the half-life of the source?  a 10  min b 20  min c 40  min d 60  min     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  blank page      ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/m/j/16  blank page      "
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib16 06_0625_22/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over       *5762424157* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16  1 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     2 a car travels along a straight road.    the speed-time graph for this journey is shown.    during which labelled part of the journey is the resultant force on the car zero?    timespeed 0 0abc d      3 a large stone is dropped from a bridge into a river. air resistance can be ignored.    which row describes the acceleration and the speed of the stone as it falls?     acceleration   of the stone speed of   the stone  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16 [turn over  4 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same     5 below are four statements about acceleration.  which statement is not correct?  a acceleration always involves changing speed.  b changing direction always involves acceleration.  c changing speed always involves acceleration.  d circular motion always involves acceleration.     6 the diagram shows a non-uniform beam of weight 120  n, pivoted at one end. the beam is kept in  equilibrium by force f.    20 cm 60  cm weight 120  nfpivot centre of mass of beam     what is the value of force f?  a 30  n b 40  n c 360  n d 480  n     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16  7 an object is acted upon by a 3  n force and by a 4  n force.    each diagram shows the two forces.    which diagram also shows the resultant x of these two forces?    a 3 n 4 nxb 3 n 4 nxc 3 n 4 n xd 3 n 4 nx       8 the engine of a car produces a driving force of 5000  n on the car. resistive forces r also act on  the car, as shown.    r 5000  n     the car has a mass of 800  kg and an acceleration of 1.0  m / s2.    what is the value of r?  a 800  n b 4200  n c 5800  n d 8000  n     9 a stone of mass m is held at rest in water. the stone is released and falls vertically a distance h.  the stone reaches a speed v.    some of the original energy of the stone is transferred to the water. as it falls, resistive forces  cause the temperature of the water and stone to increase.    which expression gives the work done against the resistive forces?  a  21mv  2  b mgh  \u2013  21mv  2  c mgh  d mgh  +  21mv  2     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16 [turn over  10 which energy resource does not derive its energy from the sun?  a geothermal  b hydroelectric  c oil  d waves      11 some processes are more efficient than others.    which expression gives the efficiency of a process?  a  input energy  totaloutput energy  total \u00d7 100%  b  input energy  totaloutput energy  useful \u00d7 100%  c  input energy  totaloutput energy  wasted \u00d7 100%  d  output energy  usefuloutput energy  wasted \u00d7 100%      12 a diver under water uses breathing apparatus at a depth where the pressure is 1.25 \u00d7 105  pa.        a bubble of gas breathed out by the diver has a volume of 20  cm3 when it is released. the bubble  moves upwards to the surface of the water.    at the surface of the water, the atmospheric pressure is 1.00 \u00d7 105  pa.    the temperature of the water is the same at all depths.    what is the volume of this bubble when it reaches the surface?  a 15  cm3 b 16  cm3 c 20  cm3 d 25  cm3     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16  13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    v w x y zmercury     the atmospheric pressure increases.    which distance increases?  a vw b wy c xy d xz      14 which statement describes what happens as ice at 0  \u00b0c starts to melt to become water?  a energy is absorbed and the temperature remains constant.  b energy is absorbed and the temperature rises.  c energy is released and the temperature remains constant.  d energy is released and the temperature rises.      15 smoke particles, illuminated by a bright light, are seen through a microscope. they move about  randomly.    what causes this motion?  a attraction between the smoke particles and the molecules of the air  b collisions between the smoke particles and the molecules of the air  c evaporation of the faster-moving smoke particles  d warming of the smoke particles by the lamp     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16 [turn over  16 a liquid is at a temperature below its boiling point.    the liquid is then heated so that it becomes a gas at a temperature above its boiling point.    which row correctly compares the liquid with the gas?     average distance  between the particles average speed  of the particles  a greater in the liquid greater in the liquid  b greater in the liquid smaller in the liquid  c smaller in the liquid greater in the liquid  d smaller in the liquid smaller in the liquid     17 a beaker of liquid is left on a laboratory bench. there is an electric fan in the laboratory causing a  draught over the liquid.    the liquid evaporates.    which row shows two changes that will both  cause the liquid to evaporate more quickly?     change to  surface area  of the liquid change to  speed of fan  a decrease decrease  b decrease increase  c increase decrease  d increase increase    18 which processes occur in a metal to cause thermal conduction?     electron  transfer proton  transfer lattice  vibration   a \u0013 \u0013 \u0013 key  b \u0013 \u0013 \u0017 \u0013= process occurs  c \u0013 \u0017 \u0013 \u0017= process does not occur  d \u0017 \u0013 \u0013     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16  19 a wooden beam is painted part black and part white. the beam absorbs infra-red radiation from  the sun during the day, and loses infra-red radiation to the surroundings at night.    wooden beam     which part of the beam heats up more quickly during the day, and which part cools down more  quickly at night?     part heating up  more quickly part cooling down  more quickly  a black black  b black white  c white black  d white white      20 5.0  g of water at 25  \u00b0c is dropped onto a large block of ice at 0  \u00b0c. the water cools to 0  \u00b0c and  some of the ice melts.    assume that all the energy lost by the water is gained by the ice.    what is the mass of ice that melts?    the specific heat capacity of water is 4.2  j / (g \u00b0c).    the specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 340  j / g.  a 0.062  g b 0.087  g c 1.5  g d 10  g     21 the frequency of a wave is doubled. the speed of the wave does not change.  what happens to the wavelength of the wave?  a it becomes four times as large.  b it does not change.  c it doubles.  d it halves.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16 [turn over  22 which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and x-rays?     light waves sound waves x-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal transverse  b longitudinal transverse longitudinal  c transverse longitudinal transverse  d transverse transverse longitudinal     23 the diagram shows light passing from air into glass.    30\u00b060\u00b0air glass normalnot to scale     the glass has a refractive index of 1.5.    what is the angle of refraction in the glass?  a 19 \u00b0 b 22 \u00b0 c 35 \u00b0 d 49 \u00b0      24 visible light has a frequency of approximately 5.0 \u00d7 1014  hz.    m and n are two other types of electromagnetic radiation.    the frequency of m is 5.0 \u00d7 106  hz.    the frequency of n is 5.0 \u00d7 1015  hz.    which types of radiation are m and n?     m n  a radio waves infra-red  b radio waves ultraviolet  c ultraviolet x-rays  d x-rays infra-red     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16  25 the diagram shows a converging lens forming an image of an object.    image objectx y     which statement about the image is correct?  a it is real and can be seen by an eye at x.  b it is real and can be seen by an eye at y.  c it is virtual and can be seen by an eye at x.  d it is virtual and can be seen by an eye at y.      26 a small potential difference v is applied across a filament lamp. the current i in the lamp is  measured. v is increased in stages and i is measured at each stage.    which graph shows the results obtained?    0 0 via 0 0 vib 0 0 vic 0 0 vid      27 a resistor of resistance r is connected to a battery of e.m.f. v.    there is a current i in the resistor.    power p is dissipated by the resistor, and in time t the energy transferred is e.    which expression is correct?  a e = ivt b e = pit c p = vir d  rvp=     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16 [turn over  28 a wire has a certain electrical resistance.    the diameter and length of the wire may be changed.    which pair of changes must  cause the resistance of the wire to increase?     change of  diameter change of  length  a decrease decrease  b decrease increase  c increase decrease  d increase increase     29 the four circuits shown all include an a.c. power supply, two diodes and a lamp.    in which circuit is there a rectified current in the lamp?    a c db      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16  30 p and q are the circuit symbols for two electrical components.    pq    which components are represented by p and by q?     p q  a thermistor fuse  b thermistor relay  c variable resistor fuse  d variable resistor relay     31 the diagram shows a combination of logic gates.    input p (= 0)output x output y input q (= 1)    input p is at a logic state 0 (low) and input q is at a logic state 1 (high).    what are the logic states at output x and at output y?     output x output y  a 0 0  b 0 1  c 1 0  d 1 1     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16 [turn over  32 the diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.    + \u2013ldr     in the evening it gets dark.    which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (ldr) and on the  potential difference (p.d.) across it?     resistance of ldr p.d. across ldr  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     33 a domestic circuit includes a 30  a fuse. this protects the wiring if there is too much current in the  circuit.    in which wire is the 30  a fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?     position operation  a live wire disconnects the circuit  b live wire reduces the current to 30  a  c neutral wire disconnects the circuit  d neutral wire reduces the current to 30  a     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16  34 a strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.    core pinscoilcurrent     what happens when the current in the coil is halved?  a no pins are attracted.  b some pins are attracted, but not as many.  c the same number of pins is attracted.  d more pins are attracted.     35 the diagram shows a transformer.    primary coil 800 turnssecondary coil 40 turnsinput voltageoutput  voltage       the input voltage is 240  v.    what is the output voltage?  a 6.0  v b 12  v c 20  v d 40  v     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a shaded area where the direction of a magnetic field is into the page.    a beam of \u03b2-particles enters the field as shown.    magnetic field into the page beam of \u03b2-particles     in which direction is the beam of \u03b2-particles deflected as they enter the magnetic field?  a into the page  b out of the page  c down the page  d up the page     37 a very important experiment increased scientists\u2019 understanding of the structure of matter.    in the experiment, particles scattered as they passed through a thin metal foil.    which particles were used, and to which conclusion did the experiment lead?     particles conclusion  a alpha particles matter is made up of atoms  b alpha particles atoms have a very small nucleus  c beta particles matter is made up of atoms  d beta particles atoms have a very small nucleus      38 below are the symbols for five different nuclides.    x35 17                x3717                x38 18                x81 35                x81 37   nuclide 1 nuclide 2 nuclide 3 nuclide 4 nuclide 5    which two nuclides are isotopes of the same element?  a nuclide 1 and nuclide 2  b nuclide 2 and nuclide 3  c nuclide 2 and nuclide 5  d nuclide 4 and nuclide 5   ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/m/j/16  39 a radioactive decay can be represented as shown.    pa233 91  \u2192 u233 92    the equation is incomplete.    in this decay, the nucleus changes by  a absorbing a neutron.  b absorbing a proton.  c emitting an \u03b1-particle.  d emitting a \u03b2-particle.     40 the graph shows how the decay rate of a radioactive source changes with time.    4000 300020001000 0 02468 1 0 time  / daysdecay rate decays  / s     what will be the decay rate at 8 days?  a 0 decays  / s  b 125 decays  / s  c 250 decays  / s  d 500 decays  / s       "
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib16 06_0625_23/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over       *5153628261* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/23     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  1 the diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. it is being used to measure  the length of a small feather.    1mm cm 2 310 20 30     what is the length of the feather?  a 19  mm b 29  mm c 19  cm d 29  cm     2 an object moves at a constant speed for some time, then begins to accelerate.    which distance-time graph shows this motion?    distance time0 0a distance time0 0b distance time0 0c distance time0 0d     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16 [turn over  3 a heavy object is released near the surface of the earth and falls freely. air resistance can be  ignored.    which statement about the acceleration of the object due to gravity is correct?  a the acceleration depends on the mass of the object.  b the acceleration depends on the volume of the object.  c the acceleration is constant.  d the acceleration is initially zero and increases as the object falls.     4 a cup contains hot liquid.    some of the liquid evaporates.    what happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?     mass weight  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same stays the same    5 an object moves in a circle at constant speed.    which statement about the force needed on the object is correct?  a a force away from the centre of the circle keeps the object moving in the circle.  b a force in the direction of motion of the object keeps it moving in the circle.  c a force towards the centre of the circle keeps the object moving in the circle.  d no force is needed to keep the object moving at constant speed in the circle.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  6 a long plank xy lies on the ground. a load of 120  n is placed on it, at a distance of 0.50  m from  end x, as shown.    end y is lifted off the ground. the upward force needed to do this is 65  n.    120  n0.50  m 1.5  m 2.0  m65 n wxyload ground     in the diagram, w is the weight of the plank, acting at its mid-point.    what is the value of w ?  a 35  n b 47  n c 100  n d 133  n     7 which list contains only vector quantities?  a energy, force, velocity  b speed, acceleration, force  c velocity, energy, acceleration  d velocity, force, acceleration     8 a gas molecule strikes the wall of a container. the molecule rebounds with the same speed.    before hitting the wall after hitting the wallwall gas moleculewall gas molecule     what happens to the kinetic energy and what happens to the momentum of the molecule?     kinetic energy momentum  a changes changes  b changes stays the same  c stays the same changes  d stays the same stays the same    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16 [turn over  9 which energy resource does not derive its energy from the sun?  a hydroelectric  b nuclear fission  c waves  d wind      10 the diagram shows the energy used by a modern lamp.    60 w input of electrical power 48 w of power wasted in heating surroundings12 w of useful power output as light     which expression gives the efficiency of the lamp?  a  6012 \u00d7 100% b  4812 \u00d7 100% c  6048 \u00d7 100% d  1248 \u00d7 100%     11 three boxes each weigh 100  n. a man lifts all the boxes together from the ground on to a shelf  that is 1.5  m above the ground. the man takes 2.0  s to do this.    boxes shelf 1.5 m     how much useful power does the man produce to lift the boxes?  a 75  w b 225  w c 300  w d 900  w     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  12 a diver under water uses breathing apparatus at a depth where the pressure is 1.25 \u00d7 105  pa.        a bubble of gas breathed out by the diver has a volume of 20  cm3 when it is released. the bubble  moves upwards to the surface of the water.    at the surface of the water, the atmospheric pressure is 1.00 \u00d7 105  pa.    the temperature of the water is the same at all depths.    what is the volume of this bubble when it reaches the surface?  a 15  cm3 b 16  cm3 c 20  cm3 d 25  cm3      13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    v w x y zmercury     the atmospheric pressure increases.    which distance increases?  a vw b wy c xy d xz      14 what causes the random, zig-zag movement (brownian motion) of smoke particles suspended in  air?  a air molecules colliding with smoke particles  b convection currents as the hot smoke rises  c smoke particles colliding with each other  d smoke particles reacting with oxygen molecules in the air ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16 [turn over  15 a sealed bottle of constant volume contains air.    the air in the bottle is heated by the sun.    what is the effect on the average speed of the air molecules in the bottle, and the average  distance between them?     average speed   of air molecules average distance  between air  molecules  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays the same  c increases increases  d increases stays the same     16 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 110\u00b0c liquid threadstem glass bulb liquidtube     how can the thermometer be made more sensitive?  a increase the internal diameter of the tube containing the liquid thread  b increase the internal volume of the glass bulb and the volume of the liquid  c increase the length of the tube and stem  d increase the thickness of the glass in the glass bulb      17 in an experiment to measure specific heat capacity, a block of aluminium is heated and its rise in  temperature is measured.    the amount of energy gained by the block is e. the mass of the block is m. the rise in  temperature of the block is \u2206t.    which expression gives the specific heat capacity of aluminium?  a  tem \u2206  b  etm\u2206  c  tme \u2206  d  mte\u2206      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  18 which row shows the surface that is the better absorber and the surface that is the better emitter  of infra-red radiation?     better absorber better emitter  a black surface black surface  b black surface white surface  c white surface black surface  d white surface white surface     19 a student suggests some uses for containers made from good thermal conductors and for  containers made from poor thermal conductors.    in which row are both suggested uses correct?     good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  a keeping a cold liquid at  a low temperature transferring thermal energy  quickly from a hot liquid  b keeping a hot liquid at  a high temperature keeping a cold liquid at  a low temperature  c  transferring thermal energy  quickly from a hot liquid transferring thermal energy  quickly to a cold liquid  d transferring thermal energy  quickly to a cold liquid keeping a hot liquid at  a high temperature    20 a water wave passes into a region where the wave travels more slowly.    as it passes into the slow region, what happens to the frequency and what happens to the wavelength of the wave?     frequency wavelength  a decreases remains the same  b increases remains the same  c remains the same decreases  d remains the same increases    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16 [turn over  21 which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and x-rays?     light waves sound waves x-rays  a longitudinal longitudinal transverse  b longitudinal transverse longitudinal  c transverse longitudinal transverse  d transverse transverse longitudinal     22 the diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror. the mirror forms an image of the object.    nm object     at which labelled point is the image formed, and which type of image is formed?     where the image  is formed type of image  a at m real  b at m virtual  c at n real  d at n virtual      23 light enters a glass block at an angle of incidence of 46 \u00b0.    the light refracts at an angle of refraction of 26 \u00b0.    what is the refractive index of the glass?  a 0.57 b 0.61 c 1.64 d 1.77     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  24 the diagram shows a converging lens forming an image of an object.    image objectx y     which statement about the image is correct?  a it is real and can be seen by an eye at x.  b it is real and can be seen by an eye at y.  c it is virtual and can be seen by an eye at x.  d it is virtual and can be seen by an eye at y.      25 the sound from a loudspeaker must pass through two materials to reach a microphone.    material 1 material 2loudspeaker microphone     which combination of materials gives the shortest time for the sound to reach the microphone?     material 1 material 2  a air hydrogen  b air water  c copper aluminium  d water oil     26 which range of wave frequencies includes only sounds that can be heard by a human with  normal hearing?  a 3.0  hz to 300  hz  b 30  hz to 3000  hz  c 300  hz to 30  000  hz  d 3000  hz to 300  000  hz     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16 [turn over  27 each diagram shows two charged metal plates.    which diagram shows the pattern and the direction of the electric field between the plates?    \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 ++++a \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 ++++b \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 ++++c d \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 ++++      28 the four circuits shown all include an a.c. power supply, two diodes and a lamp.    in which circuit is there a rectified current in the lamp?    a c db     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  29 the diagram shows a battery connected to two resistors.    r     four students separately measure the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery, the current in  the resistors, and the potential difference (p.d.) across resistor r.    their results are shown in the table below.    which row shows values with their correct units?     e.m.f. current p.d.  a 3.0  a 0.30  v 1.5  a  b 3.0  a 0.30  a 1.5  v  c 3.0  v 0.30  v 1.5  a  d 3.0  v 0.30  a 1.5  v      30 a 3.0  \u03c9 resistor and a 6.0  \u03c9 resistor are connected in parallel.    6.0 \u03c93.0 \u03c9     what is their combined resistance?  a 0.50  \u03c9 b 2.0  \u03c9 c 4.5  \u03c9 d 9.0  \u03c9     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16 [turn over  31 the diagram shows a combination of logic gates.    input p (= 0)output x output y input q (= 1)    input p is at a logic state 0 (low) and input q is at a logic state 1 (high).    what are the logic states at output x and at output y?     output x output y  a 0 0  b 0 1  c 1 0  d 1 1     32 the diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.    + \u2013ldr     in the evening it gets dark.    which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (ldr) and on the potential difference (p.d.) across it?     resistance of ldr p.d. across ldr  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  33 a domestic circuit includes a 30  a fuse. this protects the wiring if there is too much current in the  circuit.    in which wire is the 30  a fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?     position operation  a live wire disconnects the circuit  b live wire reduces the current to 30  a  c neutral wire disconnects the circuit  d neutral wire reduces the current to 30  a     34 a strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.    core pinscoilcurrent     what happens when the current in the coil is halved?  a no pins are attracted.  b some pins are attracted, but not as many.  c the same number of pins is attracted.  d more pins are attracted.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16 [turn over  35 the diagram shows a transformer.    primary coil 800 turnssecondary coil 40 turnsinput voltageoutput  voltage       the input voltage is 240  v.    what is the output voltage?  a 6.0  v b 12  v c 20  v d 40  v     36 the diagram shows a shaded area where the direction of a magnetic field is into the page.    a beam of \u03b2-particles enters the field as shown.    magnetic field into the page beam of \u03b2-particles     in which direction is the beam of \u03b2-particles deflected as they enter the magnetic field?  a into the page  b out of the page  c down the page  d up the page     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  37 below are four statements about isotopes of a certain element.  which statement about the isotopes must  be correct?  a they are radioactive.  b they are unstable.  c they have the same number of neutrons.  d they have the same number of protons.     38 which diagram represents an experiment that provided evidence for the nuclear atom?    gold nucleus\u03b1-particlea gold nucleus\u03b2-particleb gold nucleus\u03b1-particle \u03b2-particlec gold nucleusd     39 sodium-24 decays to magnesium-24 according to the following equation.    24 11na \u2192 24 12mg  +  emitted particle    what is the emitted particle?  a \u03b1-particle  b \u03b2-particle  c neutron  d proton     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  40 the reading on a detector placed near a radioactive material is 536 counts per second.    the background count rate is 44 counts per second.    the half-life of the radioactive material is 34 hours.    what is the reading on the detector after 68 hours?  a 44 counts per second  b 123 counts per second  c 134 counts per second  d 167 counts per second     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  blank page     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  blank page     ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where thir d-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/m/j/16  blank page      "
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (lk/fd) 107602/6 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *6437538466* physics  0625/31 paper 3 theory (core) may/june 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 fig. 1.1 shows part of the speed-time graphs for a cyclist and for a runner. 002468 speed p\u0003/ v10 246 time w / s81 0 1 2runnercyclist fig. 1.1  (a) compare the motion of the cyclist and the runner during the first 6 seconds. explain your  answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[3]  (b) describe the motion of the cyclist between time t = 6.0 s and time t = 12.0 s.  .. .[1]  (c) calculate the total distance travelled by the cyclist between t = 0 and t = 12.0 s.  distance travelled =  .. m [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (d) after the first 6.0 seconds, the runner moves at constant speed for 4.0 seconds. he then  slows down uniformly and stops in a further 2.0 seconds.   on fig. 1.1, complete the graph for the runner\u2019s motion. [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 a boy steps off a high board into a swimming pool.  fig. 2.1 shows the forces acting on the boy at one point in his fall. 100  nboard swimming pool540  n fig. 2.1  (a) the 540 n force is caused by gravitational attraction.   state the cause of the 100 n force.  .. .[1]  (b) calculate the mass of the boy.  mass of boy =  . kg [2]  (c) calculate the resultant force on the boy. state its direction.  resultant force =  ..   n  direction =  ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over3 fig. 3.1 shows a metal plate-warmer. metal warming-trayplate of food handle candle heater fig. 3.1  the plate-warmer contains two small candle heaters. plates of food are placed on top of the  warming-tray.  (a) (i) state the name of a process by which the thermal energy from the candles passes to the  warming-tray.  .. .[1]   (ii) state the name of the process by which thermal energy moves through the warming-tray.  .. .[1]  (b) the outside of the plate-warmer is shiny.    suggest how this helps the plate-warmer to stay hot.  .. .[1]  (c) the handles of the plate-warmer are made from metal.    identify a problem with this, and suggest how the problem could be solved. problem:  . ... action:  .. .  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 fig. 4.1 is a simplified diagram of a geothermal power station. xvery hot watersteamturbine generator steamcooling towerpower lines water fig. 4.1  (a) describe the energy resource labelled x in fig. 4.1.  .. .[1]  (b) identify the useful energy transformation that takes place in the geothermal power station.  tick one box in each column. input energy output energy chemical chemical electrical electrical gravitational gravitational sound sound thermal thermal  [2]  (c) state two disadvantages of obtaining energy from fossil fuels. 1.  ... ...  .. . 2.  ... ...  .. .  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over5 fig. 5.1 shows two men repairing a weak roof using a crawler-board.  crawler-boardroof fig. 5.1  (a) explain why use of the crawler-board prevents the men from falling through the roof.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) the crawler-board has a weight of 400 n. the total weight of the two men is 1600 n. the area  of the crawler-board in contact with the roof is 0.8 m2.   calculate the pressure on the roof when the men are on the crawler-board. include the unit.  pressure = [5]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20166 fig. 6.1 shows an experiment to observe the motion of smoke particles in air. microscope light smoke particles in airp bright dot fig. 6.1 fig. 6.2  (a) (i)  fig. 6.2 shows the view through the microscope of one smoke particle, labelled p .    on fig. 6.2, draw 3 lines to show the movement of this particle.  [2]   (ii) explain what causes the smoke particle to move.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) the air containing the smoke particles becomes warmer.   suggest how this changes the movement of the smoke particles.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over7 fig. 7.1 shows equipment used to demonstrate thermal expansion. pointer roller supportheatcopper rod fixed block fig. 7.1  (a) the copper rod is heated and expands. it turns the roller and moves the pointer.    on fig. 7.1, draw the new position of the pointer.   [1]  (b) as the rod is heated, some of its properties change.    identify how each property changes. place one tick in each row of the table. property of rod decreases increasesstays the  same volume mass density  [3]  (c) suggest one disadvantage of thermal expansion.  .. .[1]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20168 a student directs a ray of light towards a plane mirror, as shown in fig. 8.1. ray of lightplane mirror ;de fig. 8.1  (a) (i) name the line labelled x.  .. .[1]   (ii) when angle a is 45\u00b0, angle b is also 45\u00b0.    angle a is changed to 20\u00b0.    what is the new value of angle b? tick one box.     20\u00b0  25\u00b0  45\u00b0  65\u00b0  80\u00b0   [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) the student now makes the ray of light from fig. 8.1 pass into a glass block, as shown in  fig. 8.2. ray of lightplane mirror d fg h i j 67534eglass block fig. 8.2   complete the table, using the labels from fig. 8.2. the first label is done for you. description label an angle of incidence a an angle of refraction an internally reflected angle a critical angle a refracted ray  [4]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (c) the student uses a converging lens to produce an image of an object. fig. 8.3 shows the  arrangement. o ffkey: f = principal focus o = object fig. 8.3   on fig. 8.3, using a ruler, carefully draw two rays from the object o to locate the position of  the image. use an arrow to represent the image. [3]  [total: 9]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over9 fig. 9.1 represents the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. radio wavesmicro- wavesvisible lightultraviolet wavesx-raysgamma rays increasing fig. 9.1  (a) complete fig. 9.1:   (i) add the label of the missing region. [1]   (ii) complete the label under the arrow. [1]  (b) (i) state two uses of x-rays. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]   (ii) describe two safety precautions taken by people using x-rays. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]   (iii) x-rays and light waves can both travel through a vacuum.    identify the correct statement. tick one box.     x-rays travel at a slower speed than light waves.     x-rays travel at the same speed as light waves.     x-rays travel at a faster speed than light waves.  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 201610 a student makes the circuit shown in fig. 10.1 using a 12 v battery. x y12 v fig. 10.1  (a) complete the sentences about the circuit. use words from the box. fixed resistor      lamp       light-dependent resistor        parallel       series         thermistor   (i) components x and y are connected in  .[1]   (ii) the component y is a  [1]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows how the resistance of y varies with temperature. 0020406080100120140160 5 1 01 52 02 53 03 5 temperature  / \u00b0cresistance  / 1 40 45 50 fig. 10.2   (i) describe how the resistance of y varies with temperature.   .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) the temperature of y is 10 \u00b0c. the resistance of x is 20 \u03c9.    calculate the combined resistance of y and x.  resistance =  . \u03c9  [3]   (iii) calculate the current in the circuit.  current =  .  a  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 201611 (a) put a ring around the names of the metals which are attracted to magnets. aluminium     copper     iron     mercury      magnesium      steel      tin  [2]  (b) fig. 11.1 and fig. 11.2 show magnetic field patterns for bar magnets.   on each diagram, correctly label the poles. write n or s. fig. 11.1 fig. 11.2  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) for each diagram in fig. 11.3, describe the force acting, if any. use the words attraction ,  repulsion , or no force . charged sphere magnet uncharged plastic strip... ... ...ss n snn++ + ++++++ ++ + ++++++ fig. 11.3  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 201612 two radioactive sources are used by a teacher. one source emits only alpha particles and the  other source emits only beta particles.   (a) suggest how the sources can be identified.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (b) the teacher also has a source that emits gamma rays.    state two ways in which gamma rays are different from alpha particles. 1.  ... ... 2.  ... ...  [2]  (c) state an effect of ionising radiation on living things.  .. .[1]  [total: 5]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/31/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sg) 107603/6 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *5249192930* physics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core) may/june 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 a student investigates water dripping from a tap (faucet).  fig. 1.1 shows the dripping tap and a rule next to a container collecting the drops of water. 0cm 1234567891 0ruletap (faucet) drop of water container water fig. 1.1  (a) name the quantity that the student is measuring with the rule.  ..  [1]  (b) the student uses a digital stopwatch to measure the time between the drops of water. she  repeats her measurement.   fig. 1.2 shows the reading on the stopwatch for all her measurements. min sec1/100th sec min sec1/100th sec min sec1/100th sec time =  s time =  s time =  s fig. 1.2   (i) on the line below each stopwatch, record the time, in seconds, measured by the student.  [1]   (ii) calculate the average time between drops of water. show your working.  average time between drops =   s  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) the student collects drops of water for 15.5 minutes.   calculate how many drops leave the tap in 15.5 minutes. use your answer to part b(ii).  number of drops =  ... [3] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 fig. 2.1 shows the speed-time graph for a student cycling along a straight, flat road. 8 6 4 2 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 2.1  (a) calculate the distance he travels in the first 10 s.  distance =  ..  m  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) fig. 2.2 shows three pairs of forces a, b and c. a60 n backward force20 n forward force b50 n backward force50 n forward force c20 n backward force70 n forward force fig. 2.2   identify which pair of forces, a, b or c, acts on the cyclist between 11 s and 16 s. explain your  choice. pair of forces  ... .. explanation  .. .  .. .  .. . [3]  (c) the cyclist pushes on one pedal with a force of 120 n. the area of his shoe in contact with the  pedal is 16 cm2.   calculate the pressure on the pedal. include the unit.  pressure =  ... [4] [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 fig. 3.1 shows a girl and a boy on a see-saw. 300 n w log pivotboygirl2.4 m1 . 6  m fig. 3.1  the see-saw pivots on the log.  (a) calculate the girl\u2019s moment about the pivot.  girl\u2019s moment =  ...  n m  [2]  (b) the see-saw is balanced horizontally.    calculate the weight w of the boy.  weight of boy =  ... n  [3] [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over4 a student is investigating a mixture of water and ice. the water and ice are at the same temperature.  he uses a thermometer.  (a) fig. 4.1 shows a thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0cx                                        y                                         scale narrow tube glass fig. 4.1   (i) on fig. 4.1, label x and y . [2]   (ii) the thermometer is put into the mixture of water and ice.    on fig. 4.2, draw an arrow pointing to the reading on the scale. [1] \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 4.2  (b) the beaker of ice and water is left in a warm room for five hours.   state what happens to the ice during this time. describe this process in terms of the molecules  in the ice.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. . [4] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20165 fig. 5.1 shows two circuits, a and b. circuit a circuit b fig. 5.1  both circuits contain a 6 v power supply and two 6 v lamps.  (a) state two advantages of circuit b compared to circuit a.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) fig. 5.2 shows the energy input and outputs, in one second, for one electric lamp. energy input 10.0  j wasted energy 8.2 juseful energy output fig. 5.2   (i) calculate the useful energy output, in one second, of the lamp.  useful energy output =   j  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) in the space below draw a labelled diagram, similar to fig. 5.2, for a more efficient lamp. [1]  (c) electricity can be generated using wind turbines.   fig. 5.3 shows two wind turbines. fig. 5.3   state two advantages and two disadvantages of using wind turbines, rather than fossil fuels,  to generate electricity. advantages  ...   .. .  .. .  .. . disadvantages  ...  .. .  .. .  .. . [4] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20166 fig. 6.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. two regions have not been named. gamma  raysultraviolet raysvisible  lightinfra-red wavesradio  waves fig. 6.1  (a) complete fig. 6.1 by labelling the two regions that have not been named. [2]  (b) on fig. 6.1, circle the region with the longest wavelength. [1]  (c) (i) suggest a use for gamma radiation.  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) suggest a use for ultraviolet radiation.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over7 fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light incident on a rectangular glass block at point x. w x q s rp air glass fig. 7.1  the ray of light is refracted at x.  on fig. 7.1,  (a) draw the normal at x, [1]  (b) draw the path of the ray through the glass block until it reaches the surface rs, [1]  (c) label, at x, the angle of incidence with a letter  i and the angle of refraction with a letter r, [2]  (d) draw the path of the ray of light leaving the glass block. [1] [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20168 researchers have found that the best temperature for drinking coffee is  60 \u00b0c.  a designer has developed a new type of cup for keeping coffee at 60 \u00b0c. the cup is shown in  fig. 8.1. plastic lid inner steel walls shiny outer steel wall vacuumcoffee material z fig. 8.1  material z has a melting point of 60 \u00b0c. at room temperature, material z is solid.  coffee, at a temperature of 90 \u00b0c, is poured into the cup. the coffee cools rapidly to 60 \u00b0c.  (a) state what happens to material z when the hot coffee is poured into the cup.  ..  [1]  (b) explain how the features of the cup enable the coffee to be kept at 60 \u00b0c for a long time. plastic lid  .. .  .. .  .. . vacuum  ... ..  .. .  .. . shiny outer steel wall  ... .  .. .  .. .",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overmaterial z  ... ...  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. . [5] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20169 (a) the resistance of a long piece of wire is 6.0 \u03c9. the potential difference across the wire is 2.0 v.   calculate the current in the wire.  current =  ... a  [3]  (b) a force acts on a wire carrying a current in a magnetic field.   fig. 9.1 shows the direction of the current in the wire and the direction of the force acting on  the wire. n swire current direction of force fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, draw arrows to indicate the direction of the magnetic field. [1]   (ii) the magnetic field is reversed.    state what happens, if anything, to the direction of the force on the wire.  ..  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c)  fig. 9.2 shows a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field. n n ssaxle axlecoil magnetmagnet + \u2013to battery fig. 9.2   the coil starts to turn about its axle.   (i) state two ways of increasing the turning effect on the coil. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]   (ii) describe and  explain  the effect of reversing the connections to the battery.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 201610 fig. 10.1 shows the charger for a laptop computer. charger fig. 10.1  the charger contains a transformer.  (a) the voltage across the primary coil of the transformer is 230 v.   the primary coil has  4995 turns and the secondary coil has 555 turns.   calculate the output voltage of the transformer.  output voltage =  ...  v  [3]  (b) state the term used to describe this type of transformer.  ..  [1] [total: 4]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over11 (a) any atomic nucleus can be represented as a zx.   (i) state which letter, a, x or z, is the \u0081 chemical symbol, .\u0081 nucleon number, .\u0081 proton number. . [2]   (ii) a nucleus of americium-241 can be written as  241 95am.    1.  determine the number of electrons in a neutral atom of americium-241.  number of electrons =  ... [1]    2.  determine the number of neutrons in a nucleus of americium-241.  number of neutrons  =  ... [1]  (b) explain what is meant by isotopes  of an element.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 201612 (a) a radioactive nucleus decays by the emission of a \u03b2-particle.   state what a \u03b2-particle is and give its charge.  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) the graph in fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of a radioactive substance  varies with time. count rate counts  / min time  / days4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 fig. 12.1   use the graph to find the half-life. show your working on the graph.  half-life =  .  days  [2]  (c) following an accident, the soil around a nuclear power station is contaminated by  caesium-137, which is radioactive.   a sample of this soil containing caesium-137 has a count rate of 180 counts / min. caesium-137  has a half-life of 30 years and decays by \u03b2-emission.   (i) calculate the count rate from the caesium-137 in the sample after 60 years.  count rate =  ..  counts / min  [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016  (ii) suggest why people do not want to live near the power station, even after it has closed.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (fd/sg) 126848 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1137125136* physics  0625/33 paper 3 theory (core) may/june 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 a student investigates water dripping from a tap (faucet).  fig. 1.1 shows the dripping tap and a rule next to a container collecting the drops of water. 0cm 1234567891 0ruletap (faucet) drop of water container water fig. 1.1  (a) name the quantity that the student is measuring with the rule.  ..  [1]  (b) the student uses a digital stopwatch to measure the time between the drops of water. she  repeats her measurement.   fig. 1.2 shows the reading on the stopwatch for all her measurements. min sec1/100th sec min sec1/100th sec min sec1/100th sec time =  s time =  s time =  s fig. 1.2   (i) on the line below each stopwatch, record the time, in seconds, measured by the student.  [1]   (ii) calculate the average time between drops of water. show your working.  average time between drops =   s  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) the student collects drops of water for 15.5 minutes.   calculate how many drops leave the tap in 15.5 minutes. use your answer to part b(ii).  number of drops =  ... [3] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 fig. 2.1 shows the speed-time graph for a student cycling along a straight, flat road. 8 6 4 2 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 2.1  (a) calculate the distance he travels in the first 10 s.  distance =  ..  m  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) fig. 2.2 shows three pairs of forces a, b and c. a60 n backward force20 n forward force b50 n backward force50 n forward force c20 n backward force70 n forward force fig. 2.2   identify which pair of forces, a, b or c, acts on the cyclist between 11 s and 16 s. explain your  choice. pair of forces  ... .. explanation  .. .  .. .  .. . [3]  (c) the cyclist pushes on one pedal with a force of 120 n. the area of his shoe in contact with the  pedal is 16 cm2.   calculate the pressure on the pedal. include the unit.  pressure =  ... [4] [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 fig. 3.1 shows a girl and a boy on a see-saw. 300 n w log pivotboygirl2.4 m1 . 6  m fig. 3.1  the see-saw pivots on the log.  (a) calculate the girl\u2019s moment about the pivot.  girl\u2019s moment =  ...  n m  [2]  (b) the see-saw is balanced horizontally.    calculate the weight w of the boy.  weight of boy =  ... n  [3] [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over4 a student is investigating a mixture of water and ice. the water and ice are at the same temperature.  he uses a thermometer.  (a) fig. 4.1 shows a thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0cx                                        y                                         scale narrow tube glass fig. 4.1   (i) on fig. 4.1, label x and y . [2]   (ii) the thermometer is put into the mixture of water and ice.    on fig. 4.2, draw an arrow pointing to the reading on the scale. [1] \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 4.2  (b) the beaker of ice and water is left in a warm room for five hours.   state what happens to the ice during this time. describe this process in terms of the molecules  in the ice.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. . [4] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20165 fig. 5.1 shows two circuits, a and b. circuit a circuit b fig. 5.1  both circuits contain a 6 v power supply and two 6 v lamps.  (a) state two advantages of circuit b compared to circuit a.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) fig. 5.2 shows the energy input and outputs, in one second, for one electric lamp. energy input 10.0  j wasted energy 8.2 juseful energy output fig. 5.2   (i) calculate the useful energy output, in one second, of the lamp.  useful energy output =   j  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) in the space below draw a labelled diagram, similar to fig. 5.2, for a more efficient lamp. [1]  (c) electricity can be generated using wind turbines.   fig. 5.3 shows two wind turbines. fig. 5.3   state two advantages and two disadvantages of using wind turbines, rather than fossil fuels,  to generate electricity. advantages  ...   .. .  .. .  .. . disadvantages  ...  .. .  .. .  .. . [4] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20166 fig. 6.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. two regions have not been named. gamma  raysultraviolet raysvisible  lightinfra-red wavesradio  waves fig. 6.1  (a) complete fig. 6.1 by labelling the two regions that have not been named. [2]  (b) on fig. 6.1, circle the region with the longest wavelength. [1]  (c) (i) suggest a use for gamma radiation.  .. .  ..  [1]   (ii) suggest a use for ultraviolet radiation.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over7 fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light incident on a rectangular glass block at point x. w x q s rp air glass fig. 7.1  the ray of light is refracted at x.  on fig. 7.1,  (a) draw the normal at x, [1]  (b) draw the path of the ray through the glass block until it reaches the surface rs, [1]  (c) label, at x, the angle of incidence with a letter  i and the angle of refraction with a letter r, [2]  (d) draw the path of the ray of light leaving the glass block. [1] [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20168 researchers have found that the best temperature for drinking coffee is  60 \u00b0c.  a designer has developed a new type of cup for keeping coffee at 60 \u00b0c. the cup is shown in  fig. 8.1. plastic lid inner steel walls shiny outer steel wall vacuumcoffee material z fig. 8.1  material z has a melting point of 60 \u00b0c. at room temperature, material z is solid.  coffee, at a temperature of 90 \u00b0c, is poured into the cup. the coffee cools rapidly to 60 \u00b0c.  (a) state what happens to material z when the hot coffee is poured into the cup.  ..  [1]  (b) explain how the features of the cup enable the coffee to be kept at 60 \u00b0c for a long time. plastic lid  .. .  .. .  .. . vacuum  ... ..  .. .  .. . shiny outer steel wall  ... .  .. .  .. .",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overmaterial z  ... ...  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. . [5] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20169 (a) the resistance of a long piece of wire is 6.0 \u03c9. the potential difference across the wire is 2.0 v.   calculate the current in the wire.  current =  ... a  [3]  (b) a force acts on a wire carrying a current in a magnetic field.   fig. 9.1 shows the direction of the current in the wire and the direction of the force acting on  the wire. n swire current direction of force fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, draw arrows to indicate the direction of the magnetic field. [1]   (ii) the magnetic field is reversed.    state what happens, if anything, to the direction of the force on the wire.  ..  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c)  fig. 9.2 shows a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field. n n ssaxle axlecoil magnetmagnet + \u2013to battery fig. 9.2   the coil starts to turn about its axle.   (i) state two ways of increasing the turning effect on the coil. 1.  ...  2.  ...  [2]   (ii) describe and  explain  the effect of reversing the connections to the battery.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 201610 fig. 10.1 shows the charger for a laptop computer. charger fig. 10.1  the charger contains a transformer.  (a) the voltage across the primary coil of the transformer is 230 v.   the primary coil has  4995 turns and the secondary coil has 555 turns.   calculate the output voltage of the transformer.  output voltage =  ...  v  [3]  (b) state the term used to describe this type of transformer.  ..  [1] [total: 4]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over11 (a) any atomic nucleus can be represented as a zx.   (i) state which letter, a, x or z, is the \u0081 chemical symbol, .\u0081 nucleon number, .\u0081 proton number. . [2]   (ii) a nucleus of americium-241 can be written as  241 95am.    1.  determine the number of electrons in a neutral atom of americium-241.  number of electrons =  ... [1]    2.  determine the number of neutrons in a nucleus of americium-241.  number of neutrons  =  ... [1]  (b) explain what is meant by isotopes  of an element.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 201612 (a) a radioactive nucleus decays by the emission of a \u03b2-particle.   state what a \u03b2-particle is and give its charge.  .. .  ..  [2]  (b) the graph in fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of a radioactive substance  varies with time. count rate counts  / min time  / days4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 fig. 12.1   use the graph to find the half-life. show your working on the graph.  half-life =  .  days  [2]  (c) following an accident, the soil around a nuclear power station is contaminated by  caesium-137, which is radioactive.   a sample of this soil containing caesium-137 has a count rate of 180 counts / min. caesium-137  has a half-life of 30 years and decays by \u03b2-emission.   (i) calculate the count rate from the caesium-137 in the sample after 60 years.  count rate =  ..  counts / min  [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016  (ii) suggest why people do not want to live near the power station, even after it has closed.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education 0625/41 physics may/june 2016 paper 4 theory (extended) 1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.donot write in any barcodes. answer allquestions. electronic calculators may be used.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 20printed pages. [turn over 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 2016 *9332191914*",
            "2": "a bus travels at a constant speed. it stops for a short time and then travels at a higher constant speed.(a)1 using the axes in fig. 1.1, draw a distance-time graph for this bus journey. timedistance 0 0 fig. 1.1 [3] a lift (elevator) starts from rest at the ground floor of a building.(b) fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for the motion of the lift to the top floor of the building. 4.0 3.02.01.0 0 0 5 10 15 20 25speed m  / s time  / s fig. 1.2 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 20162",
            "3": "use the graph to determine the distance from the ground floor to the top floor of the building. distance =. [4] [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 20163",
            "4": "fig. 2.1 shows a dummy of mass 70 kg used in a crash test to investigate the safety of a new car.2 barrierpassenger compartmentdummy windscreen fig. 2.1 the car approaches a solid barrier at 20 m / s. it crashes into the barrier and stops suddenly. calculate the momentum of the dummy immediately before the crash.(i) (a) momentum = . [2] determine the impulse that must be applied to the dummy to bring it to rest.(ii) impulse = . [1] 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 20164",
            "5": "in the crash test, the passenger compartment comes to rest in 0.20 s.(b) calculate the deceleration of the passenger compartment. deceleration = . [2] the seat belt and air bag bring the dummy to rest so that it does not hit the windscreen. the dummy has an average deceleration of 80 m / s2.(c) calculate the average resultant force applied to the dummy, of mass 70 kg. force = . [2] the deceleration of the dummy is less than the deceleration of the passenger compartment.(d) explain why this is of benefit for the safety of a passenger  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  [2] [total: 9] [turn over 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 20165",
            "6": "fig. 3.1 shows an oil tank that has a rectangular base of dimensions 2.4 m by 1.5 m.3 2.4 m1.5 mdepth of oil 1.5 moil fig. 3.1 the tank is filled with oil of density 850 kg / m3to a depth of 1.5 m. calculate(a) the pressure exerted by the oil on the base of the tank,(i) pressure = . [2] the force exerted by the oil on the base of the tank.(ii) force = . [2] 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 20166",
            "7": "the force calculated in (a)(ii) is the weight of the oil. (b) calculate the mass of oil in the tank. mass = . [1] when he is checking the level of oil in the tank, a man drops a brass key into the oil and it sinks to the bottom of the oil.(c) state what this shows about the density of brass.(i) ... . [1] explain how attaching the key to a piece of wood could prevent the key from sinking.(ii) ... . ... . ... . [1] [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 20167",
            "8": "explain, in terms of molecules, why it is possible to compress a gas, but not a liquid.(a)4 ...  ...  ...  ...  [2] two containers made of insulating material contain the same volume of water at room temperature. the containers do not have lids. the volume of liquid in each container graduallydecreases.(b) after a certain time, the temperature of the water has decreased to below room temperature.(i) explain, in terms of molecules, why the temperature has decreased. ... . ... . ... . ... . [2] one of the containers is wide and shallow. the other container is narrow and deep.(ii) predict which container has the greater rate of cooling. explain your answer . ... . ... . [2] [total: 6] 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 20168",
            "9": "state what happens to the molecules of a gas in a sealed container when the temperature of the gas is increased.(a)5 ...  [1] a quantity of gas is contained in a sealed container of fixed volume. the temperature of the gas is increased.(b) state, in terms of molecules, tworeasons why the pressure of the gas increases. 1. .  2. .  [2] a helium-filled weather balloon is held at ground level. the volume of the balloon is 4800 m3. the pressure of the helium is 98 kpa.(c) the balloon is released and rises to a height where the volume of the balloon is 7200 m3. calculate the new pressure of the helium. assume that the temperature stays constant.(i) pressure = . [2] suggest why it may be necessary to release helium from the balloon as it rises even higher.(ii) ... . ... . [1] [total: 6] [turn over06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 20169",
            "10": "two students are measuring the speed of sound. the students are provided with a starting pistol, a stopwatch and a long measuring tape. the starting pistol, when fired, produces a loud sound and a puff of smoke at the same instant.(a)6 describe how the students use the apparatus and how they calculate the speed. you may draw a diagram. ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  [4] 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201610",
            "11": "a device at the bottom of the sea emits a sound wave of frequency 200 hz.(b) the speed of sound in sea-water is 1500 m / s.(i) calculate the wavelength of the sound in sea-water. wavelength = . [2] the sound wave passes from the sea-water into the air.(ii) state what happens, if anything, to\u2022 the frequency of the sound, ... ... . \u2022 the speed of the sound.  . [2] [total: 8] [turn over 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201611",
            "12": "a ray of light passes through a length of curved optical fibre.(i) (a)7 draw a diagram showing the fibre and the path of the ray of light. [1] describe one use of optical fibres in medicine. you may draw a diagram.(ii) ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . [3] 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201612",
            "13": "draw a straight line from each wave on the left to the most appropriate speed.(b) light in air90 m / s (9 \u00d7 10) 6000  m / s (6 \u00d7 103) 100  000  m / s (1 \u00d7 105) 1 000  000  m / s (1 \u00d7 106) 300  000  000  m / s (3 \u00d7 108) 60 000  000  000  m / s (6 \u00d7 1010)microwaves in a vacuum sound in steel [3] the refractive index of a block of glass is 1.5.(c) use your value for the speed of light from (b)to calculate the speed of light in this block. speed = . [2] [total: 9] [turn over06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201613",
            "14": "two straight, vertical wires x and y pass through holes in a horizontal card.(a)8 fig. 8.1 shows the card viewed from above. xy wire in holecard wire in hole fig. 8.1 there is a current in each wire in a downward direction (into the page). the magnetic field at y due to the current in x produces a force on y.(i) place a tick in each blank column of the table to indicate the direction of this magnetic field and the direction of the force. force on ymagnetic field at y towards the top of the page towards the bottom of the pageto the leftto the rightinto the pageout of the page [2] 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201614",
            "15": "state and explain whether there is also a force on wire x.(ii) ... . ... . [1] fig. 8.2 shows a d.c. supply connected to the input of a transformer.(b) iron core s d.c. supply galvanometer fig. 8.2 when switch s is first closed, the needle of the galvanometer deflects briefly, then returns to zero. explain why the brief deflection occurs  ...  ...  ...  ...  [3] [total: 6] [turn over 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201615",
            "16": "fig. 9.1 shows a 12 v battery connected in a circuit containing resistors a, b, c and d. each resistor has a resistance of 6.0 \u03c9.9 a b cd12 v fig. 9.1 calculate the combined resistance of(a) resistors a and b,(i) resistance = . [1] resistors a, b and c,(ii) resistance = . [2] resistors a, b, c and d.(iii) resistance = . [1] 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201616",
            "17": "calculate(b) the current in the battery,(i) current = . [1] the energy transferred from the battery to the circuit in 50 s.(ii) energy transferred = . [2] [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201617",
            "18": "fig. 10.1 shows the symbol for a circuit component.(i) (a)10 fig. 10.1 name this component. ... . [1] in the space below, draw the symbol for a not gate.(ii) [1] fig. 10.2 shows a digital circuit.(b) a b dec fig. 10.2 complete the truth table for this circuit. output e input d output c input b input a 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 [3] 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201618",
            "19": "suggest a modification to the circuit in fig. 10.2 to produce the output z in the truth table below. it may help you to compare this truth table with the truth table in (b).(c) output z input d input b input a 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...  ...  [1] [total: 6] [turn over06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201619",
            "20": "bismuth-214 is radioactive. it has a half-life of 20 minutes.11 the nuclide notation for bismuth-214 is  bi. (a) state the composition of the nucleus of bismuth-214. ...  ...  [2] bismuth-214 decays by \u03b2-decay to an isotope of polonium, po. (b) complete the equation for the decay of bismuth-214. 214bi\u03b2  + po83\u2192... .. ... [3] the count rate from a sample of bismuth-214 is 360 counts / s.(c) predict the count rate from the sample after 60 minutes. count rate = . [2] state twoof the social, economic or environmental issues involved in the storage of radioactive materials with very long half-lives.(d) ...  ...  ...  ...  [2] [total: 9] to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridg e international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.o rg.uk after the live examination series. 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 \u00a9 ucles 201620"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education 0625/42 may/june 2016 1 hour 15 minutesphysics paper 4 theory (extended) candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.donot write in any barcodes. answer allquestions. electronic calculators may be used.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 22printed pages and 2blank pages. [turn over 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 2016 *6573684646*",
            "2": "an object is moving in a straight line at constant speed. a force is applied to the object. state the possible changes in the motion of the object.(a)1 ...  ...  ...  [2] fig. 1.1 shows a skier taking part in a speed competition. the winner of the competition has the highest average speed over the 100 m section shown in fig. 1.1.(b) start skier 100  m fig. 1.1 the skier starts from rest and has a constant acceleration. he reaches a speed of 60 m / s in 16 s. calculate the skier\u2019s acceleration.(i) acceleration = . [2] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 20162",
            "3": "over the length of the 100 m section, the time recorded is 1.85 s. calculate the skier\u2019s average speed over the section.(ii) average speed = . [2] suggest why the skier bends his body, as shown in fig. 1.1. explain your answer.(iii) ... . ... . ... . [2] [total: 8] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 20163",
            "4": "fig. 2.1 shows two railway trucks on a track.2 truck b 5000  kgtruck a track6000  kg5.0 m / s buffer fig. 2.1 truck a of mass 6000 kg is moving at 5.0 m / s. it is approaching truck b of mass 5000 kg, which is stationary. calculate the momentum of truck a.(a) momentum = . [2] the trucks collide, their buffers compress and then they bounce off each other, remaining undamaged.(b) after the collision, truck b has a momentum of 27 000 kg m / s. determine the impulse applied to truck b.(i) impulse = . [2] the trucks are in contact for 0.60 s. calculate the average force on truck b.(ii) force = . [2] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 20164",
            "5": "calculate the final speed of truck a.(iii) speed = . [3] [total: 9] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 20165",
            "6": "fig. 3.1 shows a cabin used to transport passengers up a hillside.3 pulley pulleypulley a bcdrive pulley connected to electric moto r cable50 m cabin support cabinnot to scale fig. 3.1 the cabin is attached to a cable which moves horizontally from a to b, then up the hill from b to c. there is an electrical input of energy to the motor which moves the cable.place twoticks against types of energy that increase as the cabin moves horizontally at constant speed f r o mat ob .(a) kinetic energy of the cabin gravitational potential energy of the cabin gravitational potential energy of the cable internal energy of the surroundings internal energy of the wires of the motor [2] the cabin and passengers have a total mass of 800 kg. the vertical distance between ba n dci s5 0m . calculate the increase of gravitational potential energy of the cabin and passengers when they move from b to c.(b) energy = . [2] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 20166",
            "7": "the cabin then descends back from c to b. the weight of the cabin pulls the cable, which rotates the motor. the electric motor acts as a generator when rotated in this way. explain the environmental and economic benefits of this arrangement.(c) ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  [3] [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 20167",
            "8": "an archaeologist is investigating a shipwreck and discovers a wooden box on the seabed.4 surface of sea 15 m 0.80  m 1.2 mwooden boxlidnot to scale fig. 4.1 the dimensions of the lid of the box are 1.2 m by 0.80 m and the pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 \u00d7 105pa. the lid is 15 m below the surface of the sea. the density of sea-water is 1020 kg / m3. (a) calculate the pressure on the lid of the box due to the sea-water,(i) pressure = . [2] the total pressure on the lid,(ii) pressure = . [1] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 20168",
            "9": "the downward force that the total pressure produces on the lid.(iii) force = . [2] the force needed to open the lid is notequal to the value calculated in (a)(iii) . suggest tworeasons for this.(b) 1. . .. ...  2. . .. ...  [2] [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 20169",
            "10": "two pans containing water are placed on the hotplates of an electric cooker, as shown in fig. 5.1.5 hotplateslarge pansmall pan fig. 5.1 the hotplates are switched on and the temperature of the water in the pans starts to increase. when the temperature of the water is below 100 \u00b0c, some water is evaporating. at 100 \u00b0c, the water starts to boil and its temperature remains constant. state and explain which pan has the greater rate of evaporation of water when both pans of water are at the same temperature.(a) ...  ...  ...  [1] apart from the temperature at which it occurs, state how boiling differs from evaporation.(b) ...  ...  ...  [1] when the water is boiling, thermal energy is being supplied to the water at a rate of 920 w.(c) explain the effect on the molecules of the thermal energy supplied.(i) ... . ... . ... . [2] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201610",
            "11": "the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 \u00d7 106j / kg. calculate the mass of water that boils away in 5.0 minutes.(ii) mass = . [3] [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201611",
            "12": "fig. 6.1 shows a protractor superimposed on the path of a ray of light. the light is travelling in glass towards the boundary with air.(a)60 180170160150140130120110100 807060 50 40 30 20 10 01020304050607080 100110120 130 140 150 160 17018090air glass incident ray fig. 6.1 use the protractor to measure the angle of incidence of the ray of light at the boundary with the air.(i) angle of incidence = . [1] the refractive index of the glass is 1.56. calculate the angle of refraction in the air.(ii) angle of refraction = . [3] state what is meant by critical angle . (i) (b) ... . ... . [1] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201612",
            "13": "calculate the critical angle of light in glass of refractive index 1.56.(ii) critical angle = . [2] fig. 6.2 shows a water wave crossing a boundary from shallow water to deep water.(c) original wave directionnew wave direction shallow waterdeep water fig. 6.2 name the process that takes place at the boundary between the shallow water and the deep water.(i) ... . [1] tickone box corresponding to the property of the wave that is the same in the shallow water as in the deep water.(ii) amplitude frequency speed wavelength [1] [total: 9] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201613",
            "14": "describe the use of x-rays in a security application. include a diagram.(a)7 ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  [3] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201614",
            "15": "draw a straight line from each wave to the most appropriate speed.(b) radio waves in air300  m / s (3 \u00d7 102) 6000  m / s (6 \u00d7 103) 1 000  000  m / s (1 \u00d7 106) 300  000  000  m / s (3 \u00d7 108) 60 000  000  000  m / s (6 \u00d7 1010) 1 000  000  000  000  m / s (1 \u00d7 1012)ultrasound in air x-rays in a vacuum [3] [total: 6] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201615",
            "16": "fig. 8.1 shows a coil wound around a steel bar that is initially unmagnetised. any appropriate power supply can be connected between the terminals a and b. no other apparatus is available.(a)8 absteel bar fig. 8.1 describe \u2022how the steel bar can be magnetised, \u2022how the steel bar can then be demagnetised. magnetised:  .. ...  ...  demagnetised: .. ...  ...  [4] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201616",
            "17": "fig. 8.2 shows a transformer.(b) p s lamp240  v mains fig. 8.2 a 240 v mains supply is connected to the primary coil p. the voltage across the secondary coil s is 12 v. a lamp, in series with a 3.0 a fuse, is connected to s. the number of turns in the coils of the transformer is not shown accurately in fig. 8.2.predict, with a suitable calculation, whether the fuse blows when there is a current of 0.20 a in the primary coil. ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  [3] [total: 7] [turn over 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201617",
            "18": "fig. 9.1 shows a conducting ball that oscillates between two charged plates.9 sensitive ammeterpositive plate negative plateclamp insulating thread \u2013 + very high voltage supplyball fig. 9.1 the ball repeatedly strikes each plate in turn. explain, in terms of the charge on the ball, why the ball moves to the positive plate after striking the negative plate.(a) ...  ...  ...  ...  [2] state which particles move through the sensitive ammeter and the direction in which they move.(b) ...  ...  [2] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201618",
            "19": "for each complete oscillation of the ball moving between the plates, a charge of 8.5 \u00d7 10-10c is transferred from one plate to the other. the frequency of oscillation is 4.0 hz. calculate the current shown on the sensitive ammeter.(c) current = . [3] [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201619",
            "20": "fig. 10.1 shows part of the circuit of a hair-dryer with a 240 v a.c. supply.10 z yxa b c240  v fig. 10.1 the switch can be in one of three positions: \u2022 position a: off (as shown), \u2022 position b: low heater power,\u2022 position c: high heater power. all three heaters x, y and z each have a power of 1000 w when used in this hair-dryer.heaters y and z have equal resistances.calculate the resistance of heater x,(a) resistance = . [2] the resistance of heater y,(b) resistance = . [1] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201620",
            "21": "the current in heater z when the switch is in position c.(c) current = . [2] [total: 5] [turn over06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201621",
            "22": "radon-220 is a radioactive isotope.11 the nuclide notation for radon-220 is  rn. describe the composition of a neutral atom of radon-220.(a) ...  ...  ...  ...  [3] a nucleus of radon-220 decays to an isotope of polonium (po) by emitting an alpha particle. complete the nuclide equation for the decay of radon-220.(b) 220rn \u03b1  + po86\u2192... .. ... [3] a detector of radiation is placed near a sample of radon-220 and gives a reading of 720 counts / s. the half-life of radon-220 is 55 s. calculate the reading after 220 s. ignore background radiation.(c) reading = . [2] [total: 8] 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201622",
            "23": "blank page 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201623",
            "24": "blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the pub lisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridg e international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.o rg.uk after the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge l ocal examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 \u00a9 ucles 201624"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education 0625/43 may/june 2016 1 hour 15 minutesphysics paper 4 theory (extended) candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen.you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.donot write in any barcodes. answer allquestions. electronic calculators may be used.you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s 2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 22printed pages and 2blank pages. [turn over 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 2016 *8543501407*",
            "2": "state why force is a vector quantity. (a)1 ...  [1] a 20 n force and a 15 n force act at the same time on an object of mass 14 kg.(b) calculate the maximum possible force on the object due to these two forces,(i) force = . [1] the acceleration caused by a resultant force equal to this maximum force.(ii) acceleration = . [2] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 20162",
            "3": "fig. 1.1 shows a river in which the velocity of the flowing water is 0.85 m / s parallel to the river banks.(c) river bank velocity of water 0.85  m / svelocity of swimmer    relative to water      1.2  m / s 45\u00b0not to  scale fig. 1.1 a swimmer sets off from one bank. the velocity of the swimmer relative to the water is 1.2 m / s at 45\u00b0 to the river banks, as shown in fig. 1.1. in the space below, draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant velocity of the swimmer relative to the river banks. this velocity is the resultant of the two velocities shown on fig. 1.1.label this resultant on your diagram. resultant velocity = . [3] [total: 7] [turn over 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 20163",
            "4": "fig. 2.1 shows two cars, a and b, before they collide.2 car a car bstationary18 m / s fig. 2.1 car b, of mass 1200 kg, is stationary. car a, of mass 2000 kg, is travelling towards car b at 18 m / s. calculate the momentum of car a.(a) momentum = . [2] the cars collide and car b experiences an impulse. car a continues to move in the same direction, with a momentum of 21 000 kg m / s.(b) calculate the momentum of car b immediately after the collision.(i) momentum = . [1] determine the average impulse experienced by car b during the collision.(ii) impulse = . [1] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 20164",
            "5": "the cars are in contact for 0.20 s. calculate the average resultant force experienced by car b during the collision.(iii) force = . [2] a modern car is designed so that, during a collision, the front section of the car is crushed and the time of contact increases. explain the benefit of increasing the time of contact for the people in the car.(c) ...  ...  ...  ...  [2] [total: 8] [turn over06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 20165",
            "6": "a test-tube containing solid wax is heated by placing it in a beaker of very hot water for several minutes. the solid wax becomes a liquid.3 state, in terms of molecules, how a solid differs from a liquid.(a) ...  ...  ...  ...  [2] explain, in terms of molecules, why thermal energy must be supplied for a solid to become a liquid.(b) ...  ...  ...  [1] the test-tube is removed from the hot water and held in a clamp stand.(c) fig. 3.1 shows the test-tube and liquid wax cooling in air. hot waterthermometer liquid waxstopwatch fig. 3.1 as the wax cools, its temperature is recorded at regular time intervals. 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 20166",
            "7": "fig. 3.2 is the temperature-time graph for the wax. 0 4 8 12 16 20 time  / min100 806040 20temperature  / \u00b0c fig. 3.2 using fig. 3.2, determine the melting point of the wax.(i) melting point = . [1] the specific latent heat of fusion of the wax is 210 j / g. the test-tube contains 50 g of wax. using fig. 3.2, determine the rate at which the wax is losing internal energy as the wax solidifies. give your answer in j / min.(ii) rate of loss of energy = ... j / min [4] [total: 8] [turn over06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 20167",
            "8": "in an industrial process, a gas that is already at high pressure is trapped in a large cylinder by a piston.4 fig. 4.1 shows the gas, the cylinder and the piston. high-pressure gas cylinderpiston fig. 4.1 the piston is pushed into the cylinder. as the pressure of the gas changes, its temperature remains constant. fig. 4.2 shows how the pressure of the trapped gas depends on its volume.(a) 20 1510 50 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 volume  / m3pressure  / mpa fig. 4.2 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 20168",
            "9": "describe the relationship shown by the graph between the pressure of the gas and the volume it occupies. explain this relationship in terms of the molecules.(i) ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . [3] determine the volume occupied by the gas when it is released into the atmosphere at a pressure of 0.10 mpa. you will need to use data from fig. 4.2.(ii) volume = ... [2] an unused cylinder of the compressed gas is moved into a cold warehouse. the temperature of the gas decreases.(b) state how the decrease in the temperature affects the motion of the gas molecules,(i) ... . [1] the pressure of the gas in the cylinder.(ii) ... . [1] [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 20169",
            "10": "radio waves, ultrasound and visible light are all waves.(a)5 state what is meant by ultrasound and suggest a value for the minimum possible frequency of ultrasound waves.(i) ... . ... . ... . [2] state which of these waves are(ii) \u2022 electromagnetic, ... . \u2022 longitudinal . [2] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201610",
            "11": "ultrasound passes through both human flesh and bone. fig. 5.1 shows an ultrasound source sending an ultrasound wave into human flesh.(b) flesh flesh bone xy ultrasound source thickness t fig. 5.1 the ultrasound wave travels through the flesh to point x and then through the thickness of the bone to point y. at y, some ultrasound is reflected and returns to x. the total time taken for ultrasound to travel in the bone from x to y and back to x is 9.0 \u00d7 10\u20136s. the speed of ultrasound in bone is 4100 m / s. calculate the thickness tof the bone. [3] thickness t= . [total: 7] [turn over06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201611",
            "12": "a block is made from a particular type of glass.(a)6 fig. 6.1 shows light passing from air into the glass block. 33\u00b029\u00b0air glass not to scale fig. 6.1 using information from fig. 6.1, calculate the refractive index of light in this type of glass,(i) refractive index = . [3] the critical angle for light travelling in this type of glass.(ii) critical angle = . [2] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201612",
            "13": "state one application of optical fibres. draw a diagram that shows how an optical fibre is used in this application.(b) ...  ...  ...  [3] [total: 8] [turn over06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201613",
            "14": "a lightning conductor protects a tall building and the people in it against damage and injury caused by lightning strikes.7 the lightning conductor is a very long strip of copper that is attached to the side of the building. at the top of the building, the strip of copper is connected to a vertical metal pole and at the bottomof the building, it is buried in the ground. fig. 7.1 shows a thundercloud passing over the building. building groundmetal pole lightning conductor\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013thundercloud fig. 7.1 the bottom of the thundercloud is negatively charged. as the cloud moves closer to the building, the top of the metal pole becomes charged. state the sign of the charge at the top of the metal pole. explain, in terms of the particles involved, how it becomes charged.(a) ...  ...  ...  ...  [2] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201614",
            "15": "as the cloud passes over the building, a lightning strike occurs and a charge of 0.84 c flows through the lightning conductor. the charge flows for 3.5 \u00d7 10\u20135s.(b) calculate the average current in the lightning conductor during this time.(i) current = . [2] it is suggested that the current in the lightning conductor could be measured by connecting a laboratory ammeter between the pole and the copper strip. state one reason why this cannot be successful.(ii) ... . ... . [1] the copper strip has a large cross-sectional area. state how increasing the cross-sectional area of the copper strip affects its resistance.(c) ...  ...  [1] [total: 6] [turn over06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201615",
            "16": "in the space below, draw the symbol for a nor gate.(i) (a)8 [1] complete the truth table for a nor gate.(ii) output input 2 input 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 [2] the fuel for an engine needs to be warm in order for the engine to work. if the temperature of the fuel is below the working temperature tw, an led emits light.(b) fig. 8.1 is the diagram of the circuit that includes the led. x y fig. 8.1 component y is in thermal contact with the fuel. state the name of component x and the name of component y.(i) x  y  [2] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201616",
            "17": "the fuel is too cold and the led is emitting light. state and explain what happens in the circuit as the temperature of the fuel increases to a value above tw.(ii) ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . [3] in fig. 8.2, the led is now in parallel with component x instead of with component y.(c) x y fig. 8.2 the temperature of component y increases from a value below twto a value above tw. predict what happens in this circuit. suggest a use for the circuit  ...  ...  ...  [2] [total: 10] [turn over 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201617",
            "18": "the two ends of a metal rod are connected by copper wire to a very sensitive ammeter. the rod is placed horizontally in the horizontal magnetic field between the n-pole and s-pole of a permanentmagnet, as shown in fig. 9.1.9 n sahorizontal metal rod magnet magnetsensitive ammetervertical movementn s fig. 9.1 the rod is moved upwards at constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow in fig. 9.1.(a) an e.m.f. is induced in the rod. state twofactors that determine the size of the induced e.m.f. (i) 1.  2.  [2] the size of the current in the ammeter depends on the size of the induced e.m.f. state one other factor that affects the size of the current.(ii) ... . [1] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201618",
            "19": "the direction of motion of the rod is now changed . it moves at a constant speed towards the n-pole, as shown in fig. 9.2.(iii) ahorizontal movement n sn s fig. 9.2 state and explain what happens to the induced e.m.f. ... . ... . ... . [2] [turn over06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201619",
            "20": "fig. 9.3 shows a rectangular coil of wire placed in the same horizontal magnetic field.(b) rotation rectangular coil n sn s fig. 9.3 the coil rotates in the direction shown by the arrow in fig. 9.3. an e.m.f. is induced in the coil. on fig. 9.4, sketch a graph to show how the e.m.f. varies with time for twocomplete revolutions of the coil.(i) 0 0 timee.m.f. fig. 9.4 [2] on your sketch in fig. 9.4, mark a letter t to indicate a time when the coil is horizontal, as shown in fig. 9.3. [1](ii) [total: 8] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201620",
            "21": "a sample contains atoms of a particular isotope of protactinium  . 10 a nucleus of this protactinium isotope contains 91 protons and 143 neutrons.(a) state the values of x and y in the symbol  . (i) x = . y = . [2] this isotope is radioactive and it decays by the emission of a \u03b2-particle,  \u03b2,t oa n isotope of uranium, u. complete the equation for the decay of a protactinium nucleus.(ii) \u03b2  + u. . pa..0 \u20131 [2] a radiation detector measures a background count rate in a laboratory of 32 counts / minute.(b) suggest twonaturally occurring sources of background radiation. (i) 1.  2.  [2] the sample is placed in the laboratory close to the radiation detector, and the count rate increases to 544 counts / minute. this isotope of protactinium has a half-life of 400 minutes.predict a value for the count rate measured 1200 minutes later.(ii) count rate = ... [4] [turn over 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201621",
            "22": "suggest one reason why the count rate measured 1200 minutes later may differ slightly from the value predicted in (b)(ii) .(iii) ... . ... . [1] [total: 11] 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201622",
            "23": "blank page 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201623",
            "24": "blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the pub lisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridg e international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.o rg.uk after the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge l ocal examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 \u00a9 ucles 201624"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 107596/4 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8691016182* physics  0625/51 paper 5 practical test may/june 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. 5.0 cm mark 45.0  cm markmetre rule benchpivotpqxy fig. 1.1  (a) \u0081 place load p on the metre rule at the 5.0 cm mark. place the metre rule on the pivot at     the 45.0 cm mark. place load q on the rule and adjust its position so that the metre rule  is as near as possible to being balanced. \u0081 record, in table 1.1, the distance x between the centre of load p and the pivot. \u0081 measure, and record in the table, the distance y from the centre of load q to the pivot. \u0081 calculate a = px, where p = 1.00 n. record the value in the table. p is the weight of  load p. \u0081 calculate b = qy, where q = 0.80 n. record the value in the table. q is the weight of  load q. \u0081 repeat the steps above, placing the load p at the 10.0 cm mark, 15.0 cm mark, 20.0 cm  mark and 25.0 cm mark. keep the pivot at the 45.0 cm mark each time.  record all the  readings and values of a and b in the table. table 1.1 x / cm y / cm a / n cm b / n cm [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) plot a graph of a / n cm ( y-axis) against b / n cm ( x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0). [4]  (c) use the graph to determine the vertical intercept y, the value of a when b = 0 n cm. show  clearly on the graph how you obtained this value.  y =  ... [1]  (d) calculate the weight w of the  metre rule using the equation w = y z , where z = 5.0 cm.  w =  ... [1]  (e) suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain exact results with this experiment.  .. .  ..  [1]  (f) use the balance provided to  measure the mass of the metre rule.  mass =  ... [1] [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a lamp filament.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. the circuit is set up for you. va resistance wirepower supply ld ac b fig. 2.1  (a) \u0081 switch on. place the sliding contact c on the resistance wire at a distance d = 0.200 m     from point a. \u0081 measure and record in table 2.1 the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across the  lamp l. switch off. \u0081 calculate the resistance r of the lamp filament, using the equation r = v i . \u0081 repeat the procedure using values for d of 0.400 m, 0.600 m and 0.800 m. \u0081 complete the column headings in the table. table 2.1 d / v / i / r / 0.200 0.400 0.600 0.800 [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b)  a student suggests that the resistance r of the lamp filament should be constant.   state and explain whether your results show that r is constant within the limits of experimental  accuracy. statement   .. explanation  .. .  .. .  .. . [2]  (c) suggest, referring to a practical observation, a reason why the resistance r may not be  constant in this experiment.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (d) (i) name an electrical component that could be used, in place of the resistance wire ab  and sliding contact, to vary the current i.  ..  [1]   (ii) draw a diagram of the circuit including this component in place of the resistance wire  and sliding contact. [2] [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a lens by two different methods.  method 1  (a) set up the apparatus as shown in fig. 3.1. illuminated object u lensscreen v fig. 3.1   (i) \u0081 place the lens at a distance u = 50.0 cm from the illuminated object. \u0081 move the screen until a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen. \u0081 measure and record the distance v from the screen to the centre of the lens.  v =  . cm  [1]   (ii) calculate  a value f1 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation f1 = uv (u + v) .  f1 =  ..  [1]  (b) (i) \u0081 place the lens at a distance u = 60.0 cm from the illuminated object. move the screen       until a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen. \u0081 measure and record the distance v  from the screen to the centre of the lens.  v =  . cm  [1]   (ii) calculate  a value f2 for the focal length of the lens using the equation f2 = uv (u + v) .  f2 =  ..  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) calculate the average value fa for the focal length of the lens. show your working.  fa  =  ..  [1]  method 2  (d) \u0081 remove the screen. \u0081 place the lens about 25 cm from the object. \u0081 place the mirror close to the lens, as shown in fig. 3.2. 25.0  cm illuminated object lensmirror fig. 3.2 \u0081 move the lens slowly towards the object until a sharply focused image is obtained close  to the object, as shown in fig. 3.3. image illuminated object fig. 3.3 \u0081 measure the distance f3 between the lens and the object. this is the focal length of the  lens.  f3 =  ... [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (e) (i) \u0081 remove the mirror. \u0081 place the lens a distance x = 2f3 from the illuminated object. record the value of x.  x =  ... \u0081 place the screen the same distance x = 2f3 from the centre of the lens. the lens  must be between the illuminated object and the screen. \u0081 carefully adjust the position of the screen until a sharply focused image of the object  is seen on the screen. \u0081 measure the distance y between the centre of the lens and the screen.  y =    [1]   (ii) calculate the difference x \u2212 y.  x \u2212 y =  ... [1]  (f) state two precautions that should be taken in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ... ...  .. . 2.  ... ...  .. . [2] [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a student is investigating the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water in a 250 cm3  container.  the student can choose from the following apparatus:   thermometer   250 cm3 glass beaker   250 cm3 plastic beaker   250 cm3 copper can   250 cm3 measuring cylinder   three different insulating materials  clamp, boss and stand  stopwatch.  plan an experiment to investigate the effectiveness of the three insulating materials. y ou are not  required to carry out this investigation.  y ou should  \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation,\u0081 state the key variables that you would control,\u0081 draw a table or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings.  y ou are not required to enter any readings in the table, \u0081 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  a diagram is not required but you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ..   .. ",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. ... [7] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 5 blank pages. dc (st/cgw) 108858/4 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *6498998425* physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test may/june 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 in this experiment, you will investigate the stretching of a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1.  metre rule scale readingclamp benchspring 1000   fig. 1.1  (a) \u0081  record the scale reading s0 on the metre rule at the level of the bottom of the spring, as  shown in fig. 1.1.  s0 =   mm   \u0081  hang a load l of 1.0 n on the spring. record, in table 1.1, the scale reading s on the  metre rule at the level of the bottom of the spring.    \u0081  calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation e = (s \u2013 s0). record the value  of e in the table.   \u0081  repeat the procedure using loads l of 2.0 n, 3.0 n, 4.0 n and 5.0 n. record all the  readings and results in the table.",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overtable 1.1 l / n s / mm e / mm 0.0 0 1.02.03.04.05.0 [3]  (b) explain briefly one precaution that you took in order to obtain reliable readings.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) plot a graph of e / mm ( y-axis) against l / n (x-axis). [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (d)  \u0081 remove the loads from the spring. hang the load x on the spring.   \u0081  record the scale reading sx on the metre rule at the level of the bottom of the spring.   sx =   mm   \u0081 calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation e = (sx \u2013 s0).  e =   mm   \u0081  use the graph to determine the weight w of the load x. show clearly on the graph how  you obtained the necessary information.   w =  ... [3] [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.   lidthermometer waterinsulation beaker a fig. 2.1  (a) \u0081  pour 200 cm3 of hot water into beaker a. place the thermometer in beaker a, as shown  in fig. 2.1, with the lid covering the top of the beaker. this beaker is insulated and has  a lid.   \u0081  measure the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water in beaker a. record this temperature in  table 2.1 at time  t = 0 s.   \u0081 immediately start the stopclock.   \u0081  after 30 s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the temperature  in the table.   \u0081 continue recording the temperature every 30 s until you have six sets of readings.   \u0081 repeat the procedure using beaker b. this beaker is insulated but has no lid.    \u0081 repeat the procedure using beaker c. this beaker has a lid but no insulation. ",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overtable 2.1 beaker a insulation and lidbeaker b insulation, no lidbeaker c lid, no insulation t / s \u03b8 / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /   0 30 60 90120150 [4]  (b) complete the column headings in the table.                    [1]  (c) (i)  tick the statement that best describes the results of your experiment.       removing the lid speeds up the cooling significantly more than removing the  insulation.      removing the insulation speeds up the cooling significantly more than removing  the lid.      there is no significant difference between removing the lid and removing the  insulation. [1]   (ii)  justify your answer by reference to your readings.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (d)  state two of the conditions that should be kept the same in this experiment in order for the  comparison to be fair. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (e) describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain a reliable value for the volume of  water. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 in this experiment, you will investigate the magnification of images produced by a lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. ab dscreen lensilluminated object fig. 3.1   place the screen at a distance d = 80.0 cm from the illuminated object. the screen and the  illuminated object must remain in the same positions throughout the experiment.  (a) (i) \u0081 place the lens close to the illuminated object.     \u0081  move the lens until a sharply focused, enlarged  image of the object is seen on the  screen.     \u0081  measure and record the distance a from the illuminated object to the centre of the  lens.   a =  ..cm    \u0081 measure and record the distance b from the centre of the lens to the screen.   b =  ..cm  [2]   (ii) calculate the magnification m1 of the image, using the equation m1 = b a .  m1 =  .. [1]   (iii) measure and record the height h1 from the top to the bottom of the image on the screen.  h1 =   cm [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) (i) move the lens towards the screen until a smaller , sharply focused image of the object is  seen on the screen.     \u0081  measure and record the distance x from the illuminated object to the centre of the  lens.   x =  ..cm    \u0081 measure and record the distance y from the centre of the lens to the screen.   y =  . cm  [1]   (ii) \u0081 calculate the magnification m2 of the image, using the equation m2 = y x .  m2 =  ...    \u0081  measure and record the height h2 from the top to the bottom of the image on the  screen.  h2 =  ..cm  [2]  (c) a student suggests that m1 \u00d7 m2 should equal 1.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to your  results.   statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  (d) state two precautions that you would take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164  a student is investigating how the resistance of a wire depends on the length of the wire. the  student aims to plot a graph.  the following apparatus is available to the student:  ammeter   voltmeter  power supply  variable resistor  switch  connecting leads  resistance wires of different lengths   metre rule.  plan an experiment to investigate how the resistance of a wire depends on the length of the wire.  y ou are not required to carry out this investigation.  y ou should   \u0081 draw a diagram of the circuit you could use to determine the resistance of each wire \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u0081 suggest suitable lengths of wire \u0081 state the key variables that you would control \u0081  draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings.  y ou are not required to enter any readings in the table.",
            "13": "13 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. [7] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/52/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 5 blank pages. dc (nf/cgw) 124937 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *5573062538* physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test may/june 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 in this experiment, you will investigate the stretching of a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1.  metre rule scale readingclamp benchspring 1000   fig. 1.1  (a) \u0081  record the scale reading s0 on the metre rule at the level of the bottom of the spring, as  shown in fig. 1.1.  s0 =   mm   \u0081  hang a load l of 1.0 n on the spring. record, in table 1.1, the scale reading s on the  metre rule at the level of the bottom of the spring.    \u0081  calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation e = (s \u2013 s0). record the value  of e in the table.   \u0081  repeat the procedure using loads l of 2.0 n, 3.0 n, 4.0 n and 5.0 n. record all the  readings and results in the table.",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overtable 1.1 l / n s / mm e / mm 0.0 0 1.02.03.04.05.0 [3]  (b) explain briefly one precaution that you took in order to obtain reliable readings.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) plot a graph of e / mm ( y-axis) against l / n (x-axis). [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (d)  \u0081 remove the loads from the spring. hang the load x on the spring.   \u0081  record the scale reading sx on the metre rule at the level of the bottom of the spring.   sx =   mm   \u0081 calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation e = (sx \u2013 s0).  e =   mm   \u0081  use the graph to determine the weight w of the load x. show clearly on the graph how  you obtained the necessary information.   w =  ... [3] [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overblank page",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.   lidthermometer waterinsulation beaker a fig. 2.1  (a) \u0081  pour 200 cm3 of hot water into beaker a. place the thermometer in beaker a, as shown  in fig. 2.1, with the lid covering the top of the beaker. this beaker is insulated and has  a lid.   \u0081  measure the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water in beaker a. record this temperature in  table 2.1 at time  t = 0 s.   \u0081 immediately start the stopclock.   \u0081  after 30 s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the temperature  in the table.   \u0081 continue recording the temperature every 30 s until you have six sets of readings.   \u0081 repeat the procedure using beaker b. this beaker is insulated but has no lid.    \u0081 repeat the procedure using beaker c. this beaker has a lid but no insulation. ",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overtable 2.1 beaker a insulation and lidbeaker b insulation, no lidbeaker c lid, no insulation t / s \u03b8 / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /   0 30 60 90120150 [4]  (b) complete the column headings in the table.                    [1]  (c) (i)  tick the statement that best describes the results of your experiment.       removing the lid speeds up the cooling significantly more than removing the  insulation.      removing the insulation speeds up the cooling significantly more than removing  the lid.      there is no significant difference between removing the lid and removing the  insulation. [1]   (ii)  justify your answer by reference to your readings.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (d)  state two of the conditions that should be kept the same in this experiment in order for the  comparison to be fair. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (e) describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain a reliable value for the volume of  water. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overblank page",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 in this experiment, you will investigate the magnification of images produced by a lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. ab dscreen lensilluminated object fig. 3.1   place the screen at a distance d = 80.0 cm from the illuminated object. the screen and the  illuminated object must remain in the same positions throughout the experiment.  (a) (i) \u0081 place the lens close to the illuminated object.     \u0081  move the lens until a sharply focused, enlarged  image of the object is seen on the  screen.     \u0081  measure and record the distance a from the illuminated object to the centre of the  lens.   a =  ..cm    \u0081 measure and record the distance b from the centre of the lens to the screen.   b =  ..cm  [2]   (ii) calculate the magnification m1 of the image, using the equation m1 = b a .  m1 =  .. [1]   (iii) measure and record the height h1 from the top to the bottom of the image on the screen.  h1 =   cm [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) (i) move the lens towards the screen until a smaller , sharply focused image of the object is  seen on the screen.     \u0081  measure and record the distance x from the illuminated object to the centre of the  lens.   x =  ..cm    \u0081 measure and record the distance y from the centre of the lens to the screen.   y =  . cm  [1]   (ii) \u0081 calculate the magnification m2 of the image, using the equation m2 = y x .  m2 =  ...    \u0081  measure and record the height h2 from the top to the bottom of the image on the  screen.  h2 =  ..cm  [2]  (c) a student suggests that m1 \u00d7 m2 should equal 1.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to your  results.   statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  (d) state two precautions that you would take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164  a student is investigating how the resistance of a wire depends on the length of the wire. the  student aims to plot a graph.  the following apparatus is available to the student:  ammeter   voltmeter  power supply  variable resistor  switch  connecting leads  resistance wires of different lengths   metre rule.  plan an experiment to investigate how the resistance of a wire depends on the length of the wire.  y ou are not required to carry out this investigation.  y ou should   \u0081 draw a diagram of the circuit you could use to determine the resistance of each wire \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u0081 suggest suitable lengths of wire \u0081 state the key variables that you would control \u0081  draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings.  y ou are not required to enter any readings in the table.",
            "13": "13 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. [7] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/53/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nf/sw) 107598/3 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *9948394932* physics  0625/61 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2016  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 a student is determining the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1. 5.0 cm mark 45.0  cm markmetre rule benchpivotpqxy     fig. 1.1  (not to scale)    (a) \u0081 the student places the load p on the metre rule at the 5.0 cm mark. \u0081 she places the metre rule on the pivot at the 45.0 cm mark. \u0081 she places load q on the rule and adjusts its position so that the metre rule is as near as  possible to being balanced. \u0081 she measures the distance x between the centre of load p and the pivot and the  distance y  from the centre of load q to the pivot. \u0081 she repeats the procedure, placing the load p at the 10.0 cm mark, at the 15.0 cm mark,  at the 20.0 cm mark and at the 25.0 cm mark. the readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 x / y  / a / b / 40.0 42.5 35.0 36.0 30.0 30.0 25.0 24.0 20.0 17.5   (i) \u0081 for each value of x, calculate a = px, where p = 1.00 n. record the values in the      table. p is the weight of load p. \u0081 for each value of y, calculate b = qy, where q = 0.80 n. record the values in the  table. q is the weight of load  q. [1]   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) plot a graph of a / n cm ( y-axis) against b / n cm ( x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0). [4]  (c)  using the graph, determine the vertical intercept y (the value of a when b = 0 n cm). show  clearly on the graph how you obtained this value.  y =  ... [1]  (d) calculate the weight w of the  metre rule using the equation w = y z , where z = 5.0 cm.  w =  ... [1]  (e) suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain exact results with this experiment.  .. .  ..  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (f) the student uses an accurate electronic balance  to obtain a second value  for the weight of  the metre rule.   1.24 n  weight obtained on the balance =     state and explain whether the two values for the weight agree within the limits of experimental  accuracy. statement   .. justification     .. . [1] [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over2 a student is heating  water in a beaker using an electrical heater.  (a) he measures the potential difference v across the heater and the current i in the heater. 01 019283746  5 va 01 . 00.2 0.80.4 0.6  fig. 2.1   write down the readings shown on the meters in fig. 2.1.  v  =    i =   [3]  (b) he measures the temperature of the water before heating. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 2.2   write down the temperature reading  \u03b8 shown in fig. 2.2.  \u03b8 =  ... [1]  (c) on fig. 2.3, draw a line and an eye to show clearly the line of sight required to read the  volume of water in the measuring cylinder. 510152025cm3 water [1] fig. 2.3 [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 a student is investigating the resistance of a lamp filament.  the circuit is shown in fig. 3.1. va resistance wirepower supply 2.5 v ld ac b fig. 3.1  (a) the student  places a sliding contact c on the resistance wire at a distance d  = 0.200 m from  point a. he measures the current i in the circuit and the p.d. v across the lamp l.   he repeats the procedure using values for d of 0.400 m, 0.600 m and 0.800 m. the readings  are shown in table 3.1.   (i) calculate the resistance r of the lamp filament for each set of readings. use the equation     r  =  v i . [2]   (ii) complete the column headings in the table. [1] table 3.1 d  / v / i / r /appearance of  lamp filament 0.200 1.6 1.00 very bright 0.400 1.3 0.86 bright 0.600 1.0 0.74 dim 0.800 0.8 0.66 does not glow",
            "7": "7 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) the student notices that the lamp does not glow when he takes the final set of readings. he  thinks that the filament has broken.   state whether the student is correct and give a reason for your answer. statement   .. reason  ...   .. . [1]  (c) a student suggests that the resistance r of the lamp filament should be constant.   suggest, referring to the observations, a reason why the resistance r may not be constant in  this experiment.  .. .  .. .  .. .  ..  [2]  (d) (i) name an electrical component that could be used, instead of the resistance wire ab and  sliding contact, to vary the current i.  ..  [1]   (ii) draw a diagram of the circuit including this component instead of the resistance wire and  sliding contact. [2] [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a student is investigating the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water in a 250 cm3  container.  the student can choose from the following apparatus:   thermometer   250 cm3 glass beaker   250 cm3 plastic beaker   250 cm3 copper can   250 cm3 measuring cylinder   three different insulating materials  clamp, boss and stand  stopwatch.  plan an experiment to investigate the effectiveness of the three insulating materials.  y ou should \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation,\u0081 state the key variables that you would control,\u0081 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings.  y ou are not required to enter any readings in the table, \u0081 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  a diagram is not required but you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ..   .. ",
            "9": "9 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. ... [7] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20165 a student determines the focal length of a lens.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 5.1. illuminated object u lensscreen v fig. 5.1  (a) the student places the lens at a distance u from the illuminated object. he moves the screen  until a sharply focused image of the object is seen on the screen.   on fig. 5.1, \u0081 measure the distance u from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens,  u  =  .  mm \u0081 measure the distance v from the screen to the centre of the lens.  v  =  .  mm [1]  (b) fig. 5.1 is drawn 1/10th actual size.   (i) \u0081 calculate the actual distance u from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens.  u  =  .  mm \u0081 calculate the actual distance v  from the screen to the centre of the lens.  v  =  .  mm [1]   (ii) calculate  a value f1 for the focal length of the lens using the equation f1 = uv (u + v) .  f1 =  .  mm [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) a second student repeats the experiment three times using a different lens. his values for the  focal length of his lens are shown in table 5.1. table 5.1 123 focal length /mm 132 141 135   calculate the average value f2 for the focal length of this student\u2019s lens.  f2 =    mm [1]  (d) a third student, using the same method, finds that the focal length f of her lens is 200 mm.    she reads in a book that when u = 2f, the distances u and v, as shown in fig. 5.1, are equal. \u0081 calculate 2 f  for this student\u2019s lens.  2 f =  .  mm   the student sets up the apparatus as shown in fig. 5.2. she adjusts both x and y to be  400 mm. illuminated objectx screen y fig. 5.2   she observes that the image is blurred. the student slowly increases the distance y, and  obtains a sharply focused image when y = 406 mm.   discuss whether the student\u2019s results confirm the statement in the book.  .. .  .. .  .. . [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (e) suggest two precautions that you would take in this investigation in order to obtain reliable  results. 1.  ... ...  .. . 2.  ... ...  .. . [2] [total: 9]"
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (st/cgw) 108857/4 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *6408338408* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2016  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 a student is investigating the stretching of a spring.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1.  clamp springl 0 fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, measure the unstretched length l 0 of the spring. record l 0 in the first row of  table 1.1. [1]  (b)  the student hangs a load l of 1.0 n on the spring and measures the new length l of the spring.  she repeats the measurements using loads of 2.0 n, 3.0 n, 4.0 n and 5.0 n. the readings are  shown in table 1.1.     (i) for each set of readings, calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation  e = (l \u2013 l 0). record the values of e in the table. table 1.1 l / n l / mm e / mm 0.0 0 1.0 59 2.0 64 3.0 69 4.0 74 5.0 78 [1]   (ii) explain briefly one precaution that you would take in order to obtain reliable readings.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) plot a graph of e / mm ( y-axis) against l / n (x-axis). [4]  (d)  the student removes the load from the spring and hangs an unknown load x on the spring.  she measures the length l of the spring.   72 mm l =  ...   (i)  calculate the extension e of the spring.  e =  .. [1]   (ii) use the graph to determine the weight w of the load x. show clearly on the graph how  you obtained the necessary information.   w =  .. [2] [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 a student is using a balancing method to determine the weight of a piece of soft modelling clay.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 2.1. pq pivotbench50.0  cm marksoft modelling clay metre rule fig. 2.1  p  is a metal cube of weight p = 1.0 n. q is the piece of soft modelling clay.   the student places the cube p so that its weight acts at a distance x from the pivot.   he adjusts the position of q to balance the rule and measures the distance y from the centre of q  to the pivot. he calculates the weight w of q using the equation w = px y .  (a) on fig. 2.1 , mark clearly the distance x.   [1]  (b) suggest a change to q that would make it easier to find the value of y accurately.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) it is difficult to achieve an exact balance of the metre rule in this type of experiment. this can  make the result unreliable.    explain how you would reduce the effect of this problem to improve the reliability of the  experiment.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (d) the metal cube p is larger than the width of the metre rule.    explain briefly how you would determine the reading of the metre rule scale at the position of  the centre of mass of p. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]  (e) before starting the experiment, the student determines the position of the centre of mass of  the metre rule.    explain briefly how you would do this.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 a student is investigating the magnification of images produced by a lens.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 3.1. ab dscreen lensilluminated object fig. 3.1  the student places a screen at a distance d = 80.0 cm from an illuminated object. the screen and  the illuminated object remain in the same positions throughout the experiment.  (a) she places the lens close to the illuminated object. she moves the lens until she sees a  sharply focused, enlarged  image of the object on the screen.    she measures the distance a from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens.   20.3 cm  a =    she measures the distance b from the centre of the lens to the screen.   59.7 cm  b =    calculate the magnification m1 of the image, using the equation m1 = b a .  m1 =  .. [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) the student then  moves the lens towards the screen until a smaller , sharply focused image  of the object is seen on the screen.    she measures the distance x from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens.   60.2 cm x =  ...   she measures the distance y from the centre of the lens to the screen.   19.8 cm  y =  ...   calculate the magnification m2 of the image, using the equation m2 = y x .  m2 =  .. [1]  (c) a student suggests that m1 \u00d7 m2 should equal 1.    state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results.   statement   .. justification     .. . [2]  (d) state two precautions that you would take in this experiment to obtain reliable results. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  (e)  suggest one reason why it is difficult, in this type of experiment, to decide on the best position  of the lens to obtain a sharply focused image on the screen.  .. .  .. .[1] [total: 7] ",
            "8": "8 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164  a student is investigating how the resistance of a wire depends on the length of the wire. the  student aims to plot a graph.  the following apparatus is available to the student:  ammeter   voltmeter  power supply  variable resistor  switch  connecting leads  resistance wires of different lengths   metre rule.  plan an experiment to investigate how the resistance of a wire depends on the length of the wire.   y ou should   \u0081 draw a diagram of the circuit you could use to determine the resistance of each wire  \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u0081 suggest suitable lengths of wire \u0081 state the key variables that you would control \u0081  draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings.  y ou are not required to enter any readings in the table.",
            "9": "9 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. [7] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20165  a student is investigating the cooling of water.  some of the apparatus is shown in fig. 5.1.   lidthermometer waterinsulation beaker a 70 80 90\u00b0c fig. 5.1  (a) the student pours 200 cm3 of hot water into a 250 cm3 insulated beaker labelled a. he covers  the top of the beaker with a lid.   the student takes a temperature reading every 30 s as the water cools. the readings are  shown in table 5.1.   (i) complete the column headings in the table.  [1]   (ii) the starting temperature \u03b8 of the hot water in beaker a is shown on fig. 5.1.     record this temperature in the table at time t = 0 s. [1] table 5.1 beaker a insulation and lidbeaker b insulation, no lidbeaker c lid, no insulation t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / \u03b8 /   0 8 5 7 8  30 80 79 74  60 77 74 71  90 75 70 68 120 73 67 66 150 71 64 64",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) the student repeats the procedure using a 250 cm3 beaker labelled b. this beaker is insulated  but has no lid.    he repeats the procedure again using a 250 cm3 beaker labelled c. this beaker has a lid but  no insulation.    all the readings are shown in table 5.1.   (i) tick the statement that best describes the results of the investigation.      removing the lid speeds up the rate of cooling significantly more than removing  the insulation.      removing the insulation speeds up the rate of cooling significantly more than  removing the lid.      there is no significant difference between removing the lid and removing the  insulation. [1]   (ii)  justify your answer by reference to the readings.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (c)  state two of the conditions that should be kept the same in this experiment in order for the  comparison to be fair. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. . [2]  (d)  suggest a suitable material for the lid. give a reason for your choice of material. material  .  reason  ...   .. . [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (e) describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read in order to obtain a reliable value for the  volume of water. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] [total: 10]  permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s16_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (leg/sg) 108868/5 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4731768129* physics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical may/june 2016  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 some students are comparing the rates of cooling of two thermometer bulbs under wet and dry  conditions.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. thermometer a insulationthermometer b hot waterinsulation fig. 1.1  thermometer a has a layer of cotton wool insulation fixed around the bulb.  (a) record the room temperature \u03b8r, as shown on the thermometer in fig. 1.2. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c fig. 1.2  \u03b8r =  ...[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) \u0081 thermometer a is placed into hot water, at 81.0 \u00b0c, for two minutes and then removed.   \u0081 a student records, in table 1.1, the temperature \u03b8 of the thermometer bulb every 30 s.   \u0081  thermometer b is placed into hot water, also at 81.0 \u00b0c, for two minutes.   \u0081  the student removes thermometer b from the water and quickly wraps a layer of dry  cotton wool insulation around the bulb.   \u0081  he then records the temperature \u03b8 of the thermometer bulb every 30 s.   complete the column headings and time column in table 1.1. table 1.1 thermometer a with wet insulationthermometer b with dry insulation time / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 80.0 77.5 75.0 70.567.0 64.059.5 5 9.0 53.5 54.548.0 50.543.0 47.5  [2]  (c) (i) write a conclusion to this experiment, stating for which thermometer the cooling is faster.   explain your answer by reference to the results.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii) describe what is unusual about the pattern of cooling for thermometer a.   .. .  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (d) the student first wrapped dry insulation around the bulb of thermometer b before starting the  timing.    (i) suggest why he did this.   .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) suggest what problem this delay in starting the timing might have caused with the  procedure.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) suggest two factors which should be kept constant to ensure that the comparison is fair. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over2 a student is using a forcemeter and a set of different loads to determine the weight of a metre rule.  she is using the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1. forcemeter loadmetre rule bench fig. 2.1  (a) fig. 2.2 shows the position of the load on the metre rule. the load is always at this position on  the rule.68 67 66 65 6469707172737475load fig. 2.2 (not full size)   determine the scale reading  on the metre rule at which the centre of the load is located.   show your working.  scale reading  =  .cm [2]  ",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (b) the student measures the force f indicated by the forcemeter for different loads placed on  the rule.    figs. 2.3 (a)\u2013(e) show the scale of the forcemeter for values of load l = 1.00 n, 2.00 n, 3.00 n,  4.00 n and 5.00 n. 0 1 2 3 4 50 1 2 3 4 5n 0 1 2 3 4 50 1 2 3 4 5n 0 1 2 3 4 50 1 2 3 4 5n 0 1 2 3 4 50 1 2 3 4 5n 0 1 2 3 4 50 1 2 3 4 5n (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) fig. 2.3   in table 2.1, record the value of f for each load. table 2.1 l / n f / n 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) plot a graph of  f / n (y-axis) against l / n (x-axis). start your graph at the origin (0,0).  [4]  (d) (i)  determine the value y of the intercept of the line on the f axis.  y =  ...[1]    (ii) the weight w of the metre rule  is numerically equal to 2 y.    write down a value for w to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  w  =  ...[2]  (e) assuming that the procedure is carried out carefully, suggest a possible source of inaccuracy  in this experiment.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 12]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 a student notices that the size of the image produced by a converging lens changes when the lens  is moved further away from an object.  plan an experiment to investigate how the size of the image varies with the object distance for a  converging lens suitable for school experiments.  write a plan for the experiment, including:  \u0081 a labelled diagram of the apparatus needed   \u0081 instructions for carrying out the experiment  \u0081 the factors that will limit the range of object distances  \u0081 the graph you will plot  \u0081  one precaution you will take to ensure reliable results, explaining what might be the effect of  not taking this precaution.  ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. ",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. [7]  [total: 7] ",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 the class is investigating a circuit containing two lamps in series.  they are using the circuit shown in fig. 4.1. apower supply pq fig. 4.1  (a) on fig. 4.1, use the standard symbol to show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential  difference (p.d.) across lamp p. [1]  (b) record the current i in the circuit, as shown on the ammeter in fig. 4.2.  i =  ...[2] a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 4.2",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) fig. 4.3 shows the readings on voltmeters connected to measure the potential difference  across each lamp. v3 4 52 1 0 v3 4 52 1 0 lamp p lamp q fig. 4.3   in table 4.1, record the potential difference vp across lamp p and the potential difference vq  across lamp q. table 4.1 lamppotential  difference / vobservation of  brightness p vp = . very bright q vq = . not glowing  [1]  (d) table 4.1 also shows the brightness of each lamp.   (i) a student thinks that, as lamp q is not glowing, its filament must have broken.    state one piece of evidence from the results in (b) and (c) that shows this cannot be the  case.  .. .  .. .[1]    (ii) the working potential difference for each lamp to be at its full brightness is 2.5 v.    suggest how the results for vp and vq might help to explain the observations of the  brightness of the lamps.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] ",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (e) calculate the total resistance r of the lamps in the circuit, using the equation    r  = (vp + vq) i .  r  =  ...[2]  (f) a student measures the potential difference vs across the power supply.  vs = 3.1 v      he suggests that vs should be equal to vp + vq .   state whether the measurements support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference  to the results. statement   .. justification     .. .  [2]  [total: 11] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib16 11_0625_11/5rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over     *8912063471* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).        ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  1 a student has a can of oil.   which quantity can be measured using only a measuring cylinder?  a density of the oil  b mass of the oil  c volume of the oil  d weight of the oil      2 the graph shows how the distance trave lled by a vehicle changes with time.    0 0distance timepqrs     which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?     p to q q to r r to s  a constant zero constant  b constant zero decreasing  c increasing constant decreasing  d increasing zero constant    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16 [turn over  3 a stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. air resistance may be ignored.    which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?    0 0 time acceleration a  0 0 time acceleration b  0 0 time acceleration c  0 0 time acceleration d        4 what name is given to the gravitational force of the earth on an object?  a density  b mass  c volume  d weight     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  5 the diagrams show an empty rectangular box, and the same box filled with liquid.    the box has a mass of 60  g when empty. when filled with liquid, the total mass of the box and the  liquid is 300  g.    box filled with liquid 300  gempty box 60  g    the density of the liquid is 1.2  g / cm3.    what is the volume of the liquid in the box?  a 50  cm3 b 200  cm3 c 250  cm3 d 300  cm3      6 the diagrams show four identical objects. each object is acted on by only the forces shown.    which diagram shows an object in equilibrium?    a 10 n1 0  n 20 nb 10 n1 0  n 10 nc 10 n 10 n 10 nd 10 n1 0  n20 n     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16 [turn over  7 a student investigates a steel spring. he measures the length of the spring, then he hangs  different weights from the spring. he measures th e length of the spring for each different weight.    the table shows his results.    weight  / n length of  spring  / mm  0.0 108  2.0 116  4.0 124  6.0 132    a weight of 3.0 n is hung from the spring.    what is the extension of the spring?  a 4 mm b 12  mm c 40  mm d 120  mm     8 the diagram shows a plank balanced on a pivot. three forces f, p and q act on the plank, as  shown.    pivot pf q    the force f is increased, but continues to act at the same distance from the pivot. the plank is no  longer balanced.    which change could make the plank balance again?  a decrease q  b increase p  c move p further from the pivot  d move q further from the pivot    9 which energy transfer takes place when petrol is burned?  a chemical to internal energy of surroundings (heat)  b chemical to nuclear  c gravitational potential to internal energy of surroundings (heat)  d kinetic to chemical    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  10 the box contains the names of eight different energy resources.    natural gas geothermal solar waves  hydroelectric oil wind coal    how many of these energy resources are renewable?  a 3 b 4 c 5 d 6     11 a child runs up a set of stairs four times. the time taken for each run is recorded.    which time is measured when the child\u2019s useful power is greatest?    a 10  s b 20  s c 30  s d 40  s    12 the diagrams show the actual sizes of the heels of four different shoes, as seen from underneath  the shoe.    which heel is most  likely to cause damage to wooden floors?    abcd     13 the diagram shows an instrument used to measure gas pressure.    liquid     what is the instrument called?  a ammeter  b barometer  c manometer  d thermometer     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16 [turn over  14 smoke particles in air are illuminated by a beam of light. the particles are viewed through a  microscope. they are seen to move in a random zig-zag way.    what causes this movement?  a convection currents in the air  b impacts of fast-moving air molecules  c the energy of the beam of light  d vibrations of the atoms in the smoke particles     15 when a liquid evaporates, some of its molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of  the liquid changes.    which row describes the escaping molecules and the change in temperature of the liquid?     escaping molecules temperature of  the liquid  a less energetic goes down  b less energetic goes up  c more energetic goes down  d more energetic goes up     16 a piece of melting ice at 0  \u00b0c and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. the  laboratory is at 20  \u00b0c.    melting iceboiling water bunsen burner heating water     what is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the  temperature of the boiling water?     temperature of  melting ice temperature of  boiling water  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  17 changes in which physical property cannot  be used for temperature measurement?  a decay rate of a radioactive source  b electrical resistance of a solid  c pressure of a gas  d volume of a liquid      18 which statement about infra-red radiation is correct?  a a black surface is a poor absorber of infra-red radiation.  b a dull surface is a better emitter of infra-red radiation than a shiny surface.  c a shiny surface is a better absorber of infra-red radiation than a dull surface.  d a white surface is a poor reflector of infra-red radiation.      19 a pan is made for heating water on a stove.    handle pan     from which type of materials should the pan and its handle be made?     material for pan material for handle  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16 [turn over  20 a toy boat floats on water in a tank. the boat is initially stationary.    a stone is thrown into the tank, which causes a transverse water wave to move across the  surface.    the diagram shows the view from above the tank.    stone toy boatwaterwavefront     how does the boat behave as the wave passes it?  a it moves steadily away from where the stone hit the water.  b it moves steadily towards where the stone hit the water.  c it stays the same distance from where the stone hi t the water, and vibrates from side to side.  d it stays the same distance from where the stone hit the water, and vibrates up and down.      21 below are four statements about the diffraction of a wave on the surface of water.  which statement is correct?  a diffraction involves a change in the speed of the wave.  b diffraction involves a change in the wavelength of the wave.  c when a wave passes through a gap, its direction changes.  d when a wave passes through a gap, its frequency changes.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  22 a child wears a t-shirt with the letter \u2018f\u2019 written on it.        the child stands in front of a vertical plane mirror.    what does the child see?    a b c d      23 when white light passes through a glass prism, it disperses as shown in the diagram.    red violetface 2 face 1 glass prismwhite light     which row compares the refraction of violet light with the refraction of red light at the faces 1 and  2 of the prism?     face 1 face 2  a violet refracts less violet refracts less  b violet refracts less violet refracts more  c violet refracts more violet refracts less  d violet refracts more violet refracts more     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16 [turn over  24 radiation from which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used in the remote controller for a  television?  a infra-red waves  b microwaves  c radio waves  d ultraviolet waves     25 a girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.    which wave property causes the echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction     26 the diagrams represent the displacement in four different sound waves. all the diagrams are  drawn to the same scale.    which diagram represents the sound with the highest pitch?    a b d ctime time time timedisplacementdisplacement displacementdisplacement 0 0 0 00 0 0 0      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  27 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    ns magnet x iron bar n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1 experiment 2     which magnetic pole is induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s      28 a polythene rod is rubbed with a cloth. the rod becomes positively charged because of the  movement of charged particles.    which row gives the name of these charged particles, and the direction in which they move?     charged  particles direction of  movement  a electrons from cloth to rod  b electrons from rod to cloth  c protons from cloth to rod  d protons from rod to cloth    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16 [turn over  29 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit  c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit  d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit      30 an ammeter and an 18  \u03c9 resistor are connected in series with a battery. the reading on the  ammeter is 0.50  a.    18  \u03c9a     what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?  a 9.0  n b 9.0  v c 36  n d 36  v    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  31 a source of constant electromotive force (e.m.f.) is connected across a thermistor.    there is an electric current in the thermistor.    current     the temperature of the thermistor is reduced.    which row shows what happens to the resistance of the thermistor and what happens to the current?     resistance current  a increases decreases  b increases increases  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same increases     32 the diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, a resistor with high resistance, a switch and a  lamp.    12 v battery 12 v lampresistor     initially the switch is open.    what happens to the lamp when the switch is closed?  a it glows more brightly.  b it glows less brightly.  c it goes out.  d its brightness does not change.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16 [turn over  33 the diagram shows a circuit containing two identical lamps and three ammeters.    aa a ammeter 1 ammeter 3 ammeter 2     the current in ammeter 1 is 0.30  a.    which row gives possible values for the currents in ammeters 2 and 3?     ammeter 2   / a ammeter 3   / a  a 0.15 0.00  b 0.15 0.30  c 0.30 0.00  d 0.30 0.30      34 two electrical appliances are connected to the mains supply.     the cable connected to one appliance includes an earth wire.     the cable connected to the second appliance does not need an earth wire.    what is a reason for this difference?  a one appliance has a metal case, but the other appliance does not.  b one appliance is fitted with a fuse, but the other appliance is not.  c one appliance is fitted with a switch, but the other appliance is not.  d one appliance needs more current than the other appliance.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  35 the diagram represents a transformer.    primary coilcore     which row shows materials suitable for making the core and the primary coil?     core primary coil  a iron copper  b iron plastic  c steel copper  d steel plastic      36 an electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.    which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?     effect used by a relay one application of a relay  a heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  b heating effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply  c magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  d magnetic effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply      37 a nuclide of sodium can be represented by na.23 11    which row gives the numbers of particles in a neutral sodium atom?     number of  electrons number of  protons number of  neutrons  a 11 11 12  b 12 11 23  c 12 12 11  d 23 23 11     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  38 radioactive materials may emit \u03b1-particles or \u03b2-particles.  which statement about the effect of these emissions is correct?  a both \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles cause the nucleus to change into that of a different chemical  element.  b neither \u03b1-particles nor \u03b2-particles cause the nucleus to change into that of a different  chemical element.  c only \u03b1-particles cause the nucleus to change into that of a different chemical element.  d only \u03b2-particles cause the nucleus to change into that of a different chemical element.      39 radioactive source s emits \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm away  from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which emissions from the source can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     40 the half-life of a radioactive nuclide is 2.0 hours.    the decay rate of a sample of this nuclide is measured at 1.0 hour intervals. the table shows the  measurements, with one value shown as x.    time  /  hours s / decaysrate decay     0 240  1.0 170  2.0 120  3.0 85  4.0 x    what is the most likely value of x?  a 15 b 42 c 50 d 60 ",
            "18": "18    blank page   \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  ",
            "19": "19    blank page   \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16  ",
            "20": "20    blank page     permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.   cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/11/o/n/16   "
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib16 11_0625_12/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over     *9107539250 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).        ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  1 the diagram shows two identical spheres placed beside a ruler.    mmspheres 01 0 2 0 3 0     what is the radius of one sphere?  a 4.0  mm b 5.0  mm c 8.0  mm d 10  mm     2 the graph shows how the distance trave lled by a vehicle changes with time.    0 0distance timepqrs     which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?     p to q q to r r to s  a constant zero constant  b constant zero decreasing  c increasing constant decreasing  d increasing zero constant    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16 [turn over  3 a stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. air resistance may be ignored.    which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?    0 0 time acceleration a  0 0 time acceleration b  0 0 time acceleration c  0 0 time acceleration d        4 a student writes about mass and weight.   which statement is correct?  a a ship which is floating has mass but no weight.  b mass is a scientific word that means the same as weight.  c mass is measured in newtons.  d the mass of an astronaut is the same on the moon as on the earth.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  5 a student uses a measuring cylinder and a balance to find the density of oil. the diagram shows  the arrangement used.    g gm1 m2empty measuring cylindermeasuring cylinder containing volume v of oil oil     which calculation gives the density of the oil?  a  2mv b () 1 2m mv \u2212 c  vm2 d ( ) vm m 1 2\u2212     6 each diagram shows all the forces acting on an object.    in which diagram is the object in equilibrium?    15 na 15 n1 5  n 15 n15 n 15 nb 15 n 15 n 15 nc 15 n 15 n1 5  n 15 n 15 n15 nd 15 n ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16 [turn over  7 the diagrams show a spring and a graph of the length of the spring against the load applied to it.    loadlengthspring8 76543210 0 2 04 06 0 load  / n80 100length  / cm     what is the extension of the spring when a load of 40  n is applied to it?  a 1.5  cm b 2.5  cm c 4.0  cm d 6.5  cm      8 a force is applied to a long crowbar so as to move a large rock.    which labelled arrow represents the smallest force needed to move the rock?    crowbar a b cd pivotrock       9 what is the main energy change taking place in the battery of a mobile phone (cell phone) as it is  being charged but not used?  a chemical energy increases  b elastic energy increases  c gravitational potential energy increases  d kinetic energy increases     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  10 electricity can be generated using different energy resources.  which energy resource is used to generate electricity without needing any moving parts?  a geothermal  b hydroelectric  c solar  d water waves     11 a child runs up a set of stairs four times. the time taken for each run is recorded.    which time is measured when the child\u2019s useful power is greatest?    a 10  s b 20  s c 30  s d 40  s     12 the diagrams show the actual sizes of the heels of four different shoes, as seen from underneath  the shoe.    which heel is most  likely to cause damage to wooden floors?    abcd       13 the diagram shows an instrument used to measure gas pressure.    liquid     what is the instrument called?  a ammeter  b barometer  c manometer  d thermometer   ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16 [turn over  14 water can exist in three states: solid (ice), liquid and gas (steam).    in which state, or states, is the motion of the molecules only vibrational?  a ice only  b steam only  c liquid water only  d liquid water and ice only     15 which statement about evaporation is correct?  a evaporation causes heating of the liquid.  b evaporation only happens from liquids.  c molecules escape from anywhere in the liquid.  d only the least energetic molecules escape.     16 a piece of melting ice at 0  \u00b0c and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. the  laboratory is at 20  \u00b0c.    melting iceboiling water bunsen burner heating water     what is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the temperature of the boiling water?     temperature of  melting ice temperature of  boiling water  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  17 a liquid-in-glass thermometer is to be calibrated in degrees celsius.  where should the bulb of the thermometer be placed to set a fixed point on the temperature  scale?  a in a mixture of water and ice  b in a hot drink  c in a bunsen burner flame  d in a refrigerator      18 aluminium foil is attached to the walls of a warm room in a cold country. this reduces the rate of  thermal energy loss from inside the warm room.    which method or methods of thermal energy transfer are reduced by the foil?  a conduction and convection only  b conduction only  c convection and radiation only  d radiation only    19 on a very cold day, a boy puts one hand on the metal handlebars of his bicycle. he puts the  other hand on the rubber hand grip.    the metal feels colder than the rubber hand grip, although they are both at the same  temperature.    why is this?  a the metal has a higher melting point than the rubber.  b the metal has a lower thermal capacity than the rubber.  c the metal is a better thermal conductor than the rubber.  d the metal radiates more infra-red radiation than the rubber.     20 the box contains a list of four types of wave.  \u03b3-rays      sound      ultraviolet      x-rays     how many waves in the list are transverse waves?  a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16 [turn over  21 which wave has an amplitude equal to half its wavelength?    displacement / cm1.0 0 \u20131.01234 0 distance  / cma displacement / cm1.0 0 \u20131.01234 0 distance  / cmb displacement / cm1.0 0 \u20131.01234 0 distance  / cmc displacement / cm1.0 0 \u20131.01234 0 distance  / cmd      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  22 a card with the letter r is made by a student. the letter is drawn on one side , as shown.        a plane mirror is mounted vertically on a bench. the student places the card on the bench so that  the letter is upright and facing the mirror .    benchplane mirro r     how does the image formed by the mirror appear to the student?    d c b a      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16 [turn over  23 a student draws four diagrams to represent light passing from air through a glass block and then  back into the air.    the critical angle for the glass is 42 \u00b0.    in which diagram is the path of the light through the glass block not correct?    45\u00b045\u00b0ab 60\u00b0 60\u00b0cd 45\u00b0 glass glassglassglass       24 which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used to send television signals from a satellite to  earth?  a infra-red  b microwaves  c ultraviolet  d visible light      25 a girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.    which wave property causes the echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  26 which property of a sound wave affects the loudness of the sound?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength      27 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    ns magnet x iron bar n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1 experiment 2     which magnetic pole is induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s      28 in the diagram, rod r hangs from an insulating thread.    +++++q r moves away from rod qinsulating thread     when the positively charged rod q is brought close to rod r, rod r moves away from rod q.    which conclusion can be made from this observation?  a rod r is charged, but it is not possible to identify the sign of the charge.  b rod r must be positively charged.  c rod r must be negatively charged.  d rod r is uncharged. ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16 [turn over  29 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit  c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit  d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit      30 an ammeter and an 18  \u03c9 resistor are connected in series with a battery. the reading on the  ammeter is 0.50  a.    18  \u03c9a     what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?  a 9.0  n b 9.0  v c 36  n d 36  v    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  31 a source of constant electromotive force (e.m.f.)  is connected across a light-dependent resistor  (ldr).    there is an electric current in the ldr.    current     the brightness of the light falling on the ldr is reduced.    which row shows what happens to the resistance of the ldr and what happens to the current?     resistance current  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      32 the diagram shows an electric circuit.    r st switch    when the switch is open, which lamp or lamps are not lit?  a r only  b s only  c r, s and t  d s and t only    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16 [turn over  33 in which circuit does the ammeter read 2.0  a?    aa 12 v 6.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9 ab 6.0 v 6.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9a c12 v 3.0 \u03c9 3.0 \u03c9 ad 18 v 3.0 \u03c9 3.0 \u03c9     34 an electric kettle has a metal casing. the cable for the kettle contains a wire that is connected to  the earth pin of the plug.    which danger does this guard against?  a the cable to the kettle becoming too hot  b the casing of the kettle becoming live  c the casing of the kettle becoming wet on the outside  d the casing of the kettle overheating     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  35 a transformer has an input voltage of 240  v and an output voltage of 12  v.    input voltage 240  v  output voltage 12  v     what is a possible pair of values for the number of turns in the primary coil and the number of  turns in the secondary coil?     number of turns  in primary coil number of turns  in secondary coil  a 12 4800  b 240 4800  c 4800 12  d 4800 240      36 an electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.    which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?     effect used by a relay one application of a relay  a heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  b heating effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply  c magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  d magnetic effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply      37 a nuclide of sodium can be represented by na.23 11    which row gives the numbers of particles in a neutral sodium atom?     number of  electrons number of  protons number of  neutrons  a 11 11 12  b 12 11 23  c 12 12 11  d 23 23 11   ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  38 which is the most effective precaution to reduce the risk when handling, storing or using a  radioactive source that emits \u03b3-rays?  a handle the source for the least possible time.  b have a fire extinguisher nearby when using the source.  c store the source at a low temperature.  d wear plastic safety goggles when handling the source.     39 radioactive source s emits \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm away  from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which emissions from the source can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     40 a radioactive source has a half-life of 3.0 days. it emits radiation at a rate of 1200 particles per  minute.  at what rate was it emitting radiation 6.0 days earlier ?  a 300 particles per minute  b 2400 particles per minute  c 4800 particles per minute  d 7200 particles per minute    ",
            "18": "18    blank page   \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  ",
            "19": "19    blank page   \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16  ",
            "20": "20    blank page     permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.   cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/12/o/n/16   "
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib16 11_0625_13/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over     *7133156965 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).        ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  1 diagram 1 shows a measuring cylinder containing some water.    diagram 2 shows the same measuring cylinder after a piece of rock has been slowly submerged  in the water.    50 40302010 diagram 1cm 3 5040302010 diagram 2cm 3 piece of rock     what is the volume of the piece of rock?  a 15  cm3 b 20  cm3 c 23  cm3 d 35  cm3      2 the graph shows how the distance trave lled by a vehicle changes with time.    0 0distance timepqrs     which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?     p to q q to r r to s  a constant zero constant  b constant zero decreasing  c increasing constant decreasing  d increasing zero constant    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16 [turn over  3 a stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. air resistance may be ignored.    which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?    0 0 time acceleration a  0 0 time acceleration b  0 0 time acceleration c  0 0 time acceleration d        4 which statement about mass or weight is not correct?  a masses can be compared using a balance.  b mass is a force.  c weights can be compared using a balance.  d weight is a force.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  5 the diagrams show an empty container, and the same container filled with liquid.    the empty container has a mass of 120  g. when filled with the liquid, the total mass of the  container and the liquid is 600  g.    container filled with liquid 600  gempty container 120  g    the volume of liquid in the container is 600  cm3.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.020  g / cm3 b 0.80  g / cm3 c 1.0  g / cm3  d 1.2  g / cm3      6 the diagram shows all the horizontal forces acting on a truck.    300  n500  n 500  ntruck     what is the size of the resultant horizontal force on the truck?  a 200  n b 300  n c 700  n d 1000  n     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16 [turn over  7 different loads are hung on a spring. the diagram shows the length of the spring with and without  the loads attached.    200  n 400  n20  cm 40  cm 65  cm     what is the extension of the spring when the load is 400  n?  a 5 cm b 25  cm c 40  cm d 45  cm     8 a uniform bar is pivoted at its centre.    4.0 m 3.0  m pivot 6.0 n f    what force f is needed to balance the bar?  a 2.0  n b 4.5  n c 6.0  n d 8.0  n    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  9 a ball is released from point x on a rough semicircular track. it comes to rest for an instant at  point y. the gravitational potential energy of the ball at point x is ex. the gravitational potential  energy of the ball at point y is ey.    x y     which equation relates the energy of the ball at point x to its energy at point y?  a ex = ey + work done against friction  b ex = ey \u2013 work done against friction  c ex + ey = work done against friction  d ex + ey + work done against friction = 0      10 two cars p and q have different engines.  the input power from the fuel is the same for both engines. the engine in car p is more efficient than the engine in car q.  which statement about the cars or their engines must  be true?  a car p has a higher maximum speed than car q.  b car p has a lower maximum speed than car q.  c the engine in car p uses less energy per hour than the engine in car q.  d the engine in car p wastes less energy per hour than the engine in car q.     11 a child runs up a set of stairs four times. the time taken for each run is recorded.    which time is measured when the child\u2019s useful power is greatest?    a 10  s b 20  s c 30  s d 40  s    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16 [turn over  12 the diagrams show the actual sizes of the heels of four different shoes, as seen from underneath  the shoe.    which heel is most  likely to cause damage to wooden floors?    abcd      13 the diagram shows an instrument used to measure gas pressure.    liquid     what is the instrument called?  a ammeter  b barometer  c manometer  d thermometer     14 which diagram best represents the movement of a smoke particle displaying brownian motion?    ab cdsmoke particlesmoke particle smoke particlesmoke particle    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  15 a cylinder containing trapped air is put into a freezer.    cylinder piston at room temperaturecylinder piston in a freezerair air     as the air cools, the piston moves to the left as shown.    how has the air changed?  a its density is less.  b its mass is less.  c the average speed of its molecules is less.  d the average volume of its molecules is less.      16 a piece of melting ice at 0  \u00b0c and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. the  laboratory is at 20  \u00b0c.    melting iceboiling water bunsen burner heating water     what is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the  temperature of the boiling water?     temperature of  melting ice temperature of  boiling water  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16 [turn over  17 a liquid-in-glass thermometer works because the liquid shows a change in  a colour.  b mass.  c thermal capacity.  d volume.      18 which description applies to infra-red radiation?  a longitudinal and electromagnetic  b longitudinal but not electromagnetic  c transverse and electromagnetic  d transverse but not electromagnetic     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  19 the diagram shows the temperature-time graph for hot water that is cooling in an uninsulated  beaker.    80 604020 0 0123 time  / hourstemperature / \u00b0c     the beaker is now insulated. the same volume of hot water, at the same initial temperature as  before, is put into the insulated beaker. the beaker is in the same room as before.    which is the new temperature-time graph for the water as it cools?    80 604020 0 0123 time  / hourstemperature / \u00b0cc 80604020 0 0123 time  / hourstemperature / \u00b0cd80 6040 20 0 0123 time  / hourstemperature / \u00b0ca 80 6040 20 0 0123 time  / hourstemperature / \u00b0cb      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16 [turn over  20 a small plastic ball floats on the surface of deep water. a stone is dropped into the water at   point x.    a wave spreads out across the water surface, causing the ball to move.    xwater surface ball     which type of wave is produced by the stone, and in which direction does the ball move?     type of wave direction of  movement of ball  a longitudinal left and right  b longitudinal up and down  c transverse left and right  d transverse up and down      21 waves travel more slowly on the surface of shallow water than on the surface of deep water.    which diagram shows a wave travelling from deep water into shallower water?    shallow water (slow)c shallow water (slow)dshallow water (slow)a shallow water (slow)b deep water (fast)deep water (fast)deep water (fast)deep water (fast)      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  22 light strikes a plane mirror and is reflected. the angle between the ray of light and the mirror is  20\u00b0.    20\u00b0ray of lightnormal mirror    what is the size of the angle of reflection?  a 20 \u00b0 b 70 \u00b0 c 140 \u00b0 d 160 \u00b0      23 a student draws a ray diagram to show how a converging lens, of focal length f, forms an image  of an object.    he draws three rays to locate the image.    he then adds a fourth ray after the position of the image is known.    which of the labelled rays must have been drawn after  the position of the image was known?    object image f fa b c d      24 which group shows four electromagnetic waves in order, from the largest wavelength to the  smallest?  a microwaves, radio waves, x-rays, visible light  b radio waves, microwaves, visible light, x-rays  c visible light, x-rays, radio waves, microwaves  d x-rays, visible light, microwaves, radio waves     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16 [turn over  25 a girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.    which wave property causes the echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction     26 a man stands 110  m from a high wall. he makes a short, sharp sound and then hears an echo  from the wall.  the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.  how long after making the sound does the man hear the echo?  a 0.33  s b 0.67  s c 1.5  s d 3.0  s     27 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    ns magnet x iron bar n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1 experiment 2     which magnetic pole is induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  28 a student holds a rod in his hand.    rodhandcloth     he rubs the rod with a cloth. the rod gains a positive charge.     of which material could the rod be made, and which transfer of charge has happened?     material of rod transfer of charge  a metal negative charge from rod to cloth  b metal positive charge from cloth to rod  c plastic negative charge from rod to cloth  d plastic positive charge from cloth to rod     29 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit  c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit  d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16 [turn over  30 an ammeter and an 18  \u03c9 resistor are connected in series with a battery. the reading on the  ammeter is 0.50  a.    18  \u03c9a     what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?  a 9.0  n b 9.0  v c 36  n d 36  v    31 in which circuit will the ammeter reading be greatest?    2.0  \u03c9 2.0  \u03c92.0  v 2.0  v 2.0  v 2.0  v aa 2.0  \u03c92.0  \u03c9 ab 2.0  \u03c9 2.0  \u03c9ac d 2.0  \u03c92.0  \u03c9 a       32 an electric washing machine is protected by an earth wire.    to which part of the washing machine should the earth wire be connected?  a the fuse  b the live wire  c the metal case  d the switch     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  33 the diagram shows a potential divider.    6 v 0 v     when brighter light falls on the light-dependent resistor (ldr), its resistance changes.    what happens to the resistance of the ldr and what happens to the current in it?     resistance of ldr current in ldr  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     34 why is a fuse used in an electrical circuit?  a so that the current can have only one value  b to prevent the current becoming too large  c to provide a path to earth if a fault occurs  d to save electrical energy     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16 [turn over  35 which transformer can change a 240  v a.c. input into a 15  v a.c. output?    800 turns 40 turnsa 1000 turns 25 turnsb 1200 turns 75 turnsc 2400 turns 15 turnsd      36 an electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.    which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?     effect used by a relay one application of a relay  a heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  b heating effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply  c magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  d magnetic effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply      37 a nuclide of sodium can be represented by na.23 11    which row gives the numbers of particles in a neutral sodium atom?     number of  electrons number of  protons number of  neutrons  a 11 11 12  b 12 11 23  c 12 12 11  d 23 23 11     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  38 below are four statements about different isotopes of a certain element.  which statement must  be true?  a they have a different number of electrons.  b they have the same number of neutrons.  c they have the same number of nucleons.  d they have the same number of protons.     39 radioactive source s emits \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm away  from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which emissions from the source can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16  40 a radioactive material emits \u03b1-particles.    the table shows the rate of emission of \u03b1-particles from the material at different times.    time   / hours rate of emission  / particles per minute  0.0 160  4.0 40  8.0     what is the half-life of the material and what is the missing value at 8.0 hours?     half-life  / hours rate of emission at 8.0 hours  / particles per minute  a 2.0 0  b 2.0 10  c 4.0 0  d 4.0 10     ",
            "20": "20    blank page     permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.   cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/13/o/n/16   "
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib16 11_0625_21/8rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over     *2117549282* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/21     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).       ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16  1 the graph shows how the distance trave lled by a vehicle changes with time.    0 0distance timepqrs     which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?     p to q q to r r to s  a constant zero constant  b constant zero decreasing  c increasing constant decreasing  d increasing zero constant     2 a stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. air resistance may be ignored.    which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?    0 0 time acceleration a  0 0 time acceleration b  0 0 time acceleration c  0 0 time acceleration d   ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16 [turn over  3 a car travels along a horizontal road in a straight line. the driver presses the accelerator to  increase the speed of the car.    the speed-time graph for the car is shown.    30 2010 0 0 5 10 15 20speed m / s time  / s    what is the acceleration of the car?  a 0.50  m / s2 b 1.00  m / s2 c 1.50  m / s2 d 2.00  m / s2     4 a spaceship approaches the earth from deep space. near the earth, a force on the spaceship  causes it to have weight. this causes it to change its speed and direction.   which type of force causes the spaceship\u2019s wei ght, and which property of the spaceship resists  its change in speed and direction?   force that  causes weight property that resists change in  speed and direction  a gravitational mass  b gravitational volume  c magnetic mass  d magnetic volume    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16  5 the diagrams show an empty rectangular box, and the same box filled with liquid.    the box has a mass of 60  g when empty. when filled with liquid, the total mass of the box and the  liquid is 300  g.    box filled with liquid 300  gempty box 60  g    the density of the liquid is 1.2  g / cm3.    what is the volume of the liquid in the box?  a 50  cm3 b 200  cm3 c 250  cm3 d 300  cm3      6 an object travels in a circular path at constant speed.  which statement about the object is correct?  a it has changing kinetic energy.  b it has changing momentum.  c it has constant velocity.  d it is not accelerating.      7 which diagram shows the magnitude and direction of the resultant r of the two forces f1 and f2?    f1 f2b f1 f2r ra f1 f2rc rf1 f2d      ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16 [turn over  8 two cars, p and q, have different masses and different speeds as shown.    speed 20  m / smass 500  kg car pspeed 10  m / smass 1000  kg car q    which row correctly compares the momentum and the kinetic energy of p with the momentum  and the kinetic energy of q?     momentum kinetic energy  a p greater than q p equal to q  b p equal to q p equal to q  c p equal to q p less than q  d p less than q p greater than q    9 a car of mass 800  kg travels over a hill of height h.    hhill not to scale    by travelling to the top of the hill, the car gains 40  000  j of gravitational potential energy.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the height h of the hill?  a 5.0  m b 20  m c 50  m d 500  m    10 a lamp has a power input of 5.0  w. it wastes 1.0  w of power heating the surroundings.  what is the efficiency of the lamp?  a 20% b 50% c 80% d 120%      11 the box contains the names of eight different energy resources.    natural gas geothermal solar waves  hydroelectric oil wind coal    how many of these energy resources are renewable?  a 3 b 4 c 5 d 6 ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16  12 the diagram shows a dam holding back water.    damwater 65 m     the depth of the water is 65  m.    the density of the water is 1000  kg  / m3. the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the pressure exerted at the base of the dam due to the water?  a 15.4  pa b 154  pa c 65  000  pa d 650  000  pa     13 air is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. the original volume of the trapped air is v and the original  pressure of the trapped air is p. the piston is pushed to the left. the temperature of the gas does  not change.    25 50 25 50 trapped airbefore piston is pushed in after piston is pushed in piston cylinder trapped air    what is the new volume and what is the new pressure of the trapped air?     new volume new pressure  a 2v 2p  b 2v 2 p  c 2v 2p  d 2v 2p     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16 [turn over  14 when a liquid evaporates, some of its molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of  the liquid changes.    which row describes the escaping molecules and the change in temperature of the liquid?     escaping molecules temperature of  the liquid  a less energetic goes down  b less energetic goes up  c more energetic goes down  d more energetic goes up     15 a gas at a constant temperature is in a container of fixed volume. the gas exerts a pressure on  the walls of the container. the pressure is caused by the gas molecules striking the walls.  which statement about the gas molecules when they strike the walls is correct?  a the average kinetic energy of the gas molecules changes.   b the average momentum of the gas molecules changes.  c the average speed of the gas molecules changes.  d the chemical energy of the gas molecules changes.      16 a piece of melting ice at 0  \u00b0c and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. the  laboratory is at 20  \u00b0c.    melting iceboiling water bunsen burner heating water     what is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the  temperature of the boiling water?     temperature of  melting ice temperature of  boiling water  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16  17 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 110\u00b0c liquid threadstem glass bulb liquidtube     which feature would give a thermometer with an increased range?  a a smaller internal diameter of the tube containing the liquid thread  b a thinner glass bulb  c a larger length of the tube and stem  d a larger volume of the liquid     18 a copper container of mass 0.20  kg contains 0.10  kg of water.    the specific heat capacity of copper is 385  j / (kg  \u00b0c) and the specific heat capacity of water  is 4200  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    how much energy, in joules, is needed to raise the temperature of the copper container and the  water by 10  \u00b0c?  a (0.20 \u00d7 385 \u00d7 10) \u2013 (0.10 \u00d7 4200 \u00d7 10)  b (0.20 \u00d7 385 \u00d7 10) + (0.10 \u00d7 4200 \u00d7 10)  c (0.10 + 0.20) \u00d7 \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb + 2385  4200 \u00d7 10  d (0.10 + 0.20) \u00d7 (4200 + 385) \u00d7 10     19 the thermal transfer of energy through a copper rod involves electrons.   a second process is also involved.   what is this method of thermal energy transfer, and what is the second process?   method second process  a conduction density change  b conduction lattice vibration  c convection density change  d convection lattice vibration     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16 [turn over  20 the diagrams show four spherical objects at the same temperature. two of the objects are small  and two are large. two of the objects are white and two are black.    which object emits infra-red radiation at the greatest rate?    a b c d       21 the diagram represents plane wavefronts being diffracted by passing through a gap in a barrier.    barrier wavefronts gap     which pair of changes must  increase the amount of diffraction that occurs?  a decrease the wavelength and decrease the size of the gap  b decrease the wavelength and increase the size of the gap  c increase the wavelength and decrease the size of the gap  d increase the wavelength and increase the size of the gap     22 an image is formed by a plane mirror. a second image is formed by a lens used as a magnifying  glass.  which row states the nature of each of these images?   plane mirror magnifying glass  a real real  b real virtual  c virtual real  d virtual virtual     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16  23 light travelling at a speed of 3.0 \u00d7 108  m / s strikes the surface of a glass block and undergoes  refraction as it enters the block.    the diagram shows a ray of this light before and after it enters the block.    33\u00b055\u00b0 glass block     what is the speed of light in the glass?  a 1.8 \u00d7 108  m / s  b 2.0 \u00d7 108  m / s  c 4.5 \u00d7 108  m / s  d 5.0 \u00d7 108  m / s     24 radiation from which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used in the remote controller for a  television?  a infra-red waves  b microwaves  c radio waves  d ultraviolet waves      25 a girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.    which wave property causes the echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16 [turn over  26 the diagrams represent the displacement in four different sound waves. all the diagrams are  drawn to the same scale.    which diagram represents the sound with the highest pitch?    a b d ctime time time timedisplacementdisplacement displacementdisplacement 0 0 0 00 0 0 0      27 a student suggests three methods for demagnetising a piece of steel.    1 placing it in an east-west direction and hammering it hard  2 placing it in an east-west direction and heating it until red hot 3 removing it slowly from a coil carrying alternating current    which of the methods will demagnetise the piece of steel?  a 1 only b 2 only c 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16  28 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    ns magnet x iron bar n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1 experiment 2     which magnetic pole is induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s      29 a polythene rod is rubbed with a cloth. the rod becomes positively charged because of the  movement of charged particles.    which row gives the name of these charged particles, and the direction in which they move?     charged  particles direction of  movement  a electrons from cloth to rod  b electrons from rod to cloth  c protons from cloth to rod  d protons from rod to cloth     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16 [turn over  30 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit  c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit  d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit      31 a 12.0  \u03c9 resistor and a 6.0  \u03c9 resistor are connected in parallel.    another 6.0  \u03c9 resistor is then connected in series with the parallel combination.    6.0 \u03c912.0  \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9    what is the combined resistance of all three resistors?    a 8.0  \u03c9 b 10  \u03c9 c 15  \u03c9 d 24  \u03c9     32 the circuit shows a 12  v battery connected to a lamp of resistance 3.0  \u03c9.    12 v     how much energy is transferred to the surroundings by the lamp in 2.0 minutes?  a 48  j b 96  j c 2880  j d 5760  j     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16  33 the diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, a resistor with high resistance, a switch and a  lamp.    12 v battery 12 v lampresistor     initially the switch is open.    what happens to the lamp when the switch is closed?  a it glows more brightly.  b it glows less brightly.  c it goes out.  d its brightness does not change.     34 this is the truth table for a logic gate.    input 1 input 2 output  0 0 1  0 1 1  1 0 1  1 1 0    which symbol represents the logic gate?    abc d       35 why is a fuse used in an electrical circuit?  a so that the current can have only one value  b to prevent the current becoming too large  c to provide a path to earth if a fault occurs  d to save electrical energy     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16 [turn over  36 an electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.    which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?     effect used by a relay one application of a relay  a heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  b heating effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply  c magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  d magnetic effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply      37 a very important experiment improved scientists\u2019 understanding of the structure of matter.  the experiment involved \u03b1-particles being fired at a thin gold foil.  what happened?  a all the \u03b1-particles were absorbed by the nuclei of the gold atoms.  b all the \u03b1-particles were unaffected by the gold atoms.  c some of the \u03b1-particles were attracted by the neutrons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.  d some of the \u03b1-particles were repelled by the protons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.      38 what is meant by nuclear fusion?  a the emission of an electron from a nucleus  b the emission of two protons from a nucleus  c the joining together of two nuclei  d the splitting of a nucleus into two smaller nuclei    39 a nucleus undergoes radioactive decay. the proton number increases by one. the nucleon  number does not change.   which particle has been emitted in this decay?  a a neutron  b a proton  c an \u03b1-particle  d a \u03b2-particle    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material pr otected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/21/o/n/16  40 radioactive source s emits \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm away  from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which emissions from the source can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays       "
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib16 11_0625_22/6rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over     *0209924104 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).       ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16  1 the graph shows how the distance trave lled by a vehicle changes with time.    0 0distance timepqrs     which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?     p to q q to r r to s  a constant zero constant  b constant zero decreasing  c increasing constant decreasing  d increasing zero constant     2 a stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. air resistance may be ignored.    which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?    0 0 time acceleration a  0 0 time acceleration b  0 0 time acceleration c  0 0 time acceleration d   ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16 [turn over  3 the speed-time graph for an object is shown.    05 1 5 2 520 0 time  / sspeed m / s pxy zw     below are four statements about the acceleration of the object.    which statement is correct?  a the acceleration in the first 5  s is given by area p.  b the acceleration increases between w and x.  c the acceleration is negative between y and z.  d the deceleration between y and z is (20 \u00f7 25)  m / s2.     4 an object tends to keep moving with the same speed and in the same direction due to a certain  property.   the object also has weight due to the action of a field.   what is the name of the property, and what is the name of the field?   property field  a mass electric  b mass gravitational  c volume electric  d volume gravitational     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16  5 a student uses a measuring cylinder and a balance to find the density of oil. the diagram shows  the arrangement used.    g gm1 m2empty measuring cylindermeasuring cylinder containing volume v of oil oil     which calculation gives the density of the oil?  a  2mv b () 1 2m mv \u2212 c  vm2 d ( ) vm m 1 2\u2212      6 an object travels in a circular path at constant speed.  which statement about the object is correct?  a it has changing kinetic energy.  b it has changing momentum.  c it has constant velocity.  d it is not accelerating.    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16 [turn over  7 the diagrams show a spring and a graph of the length of the spring against the load applied to it.    loadlengthspring8 76543210 0 2 04 06 0 load  / n80 100length  / cm     what is the extension of the spring when a load of 40  n is applied to it?  a 1.5  cm b 2.5  cm c 4.0  cm d 6.5  cm      8 a girl of mass 50  kg runs at 6.0  m / s.    what is her momentum?  a 300  j b 300  kg  m / s c 900  j d 900  kg  m / s    9 which list contains only vector quantities?  a acceleration, energy, force, mass  b acceleration, force, momentum, velocity  c distance, energy, mass, speed  d distance, momentum, power, speed    10 electricity can be generated using different energy resources.  which energy resource is used to generate electricity without needing any moving parts?  a geothermal  b hydroelectric  c solar  d water waves ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16  11 a lamp has a power input of 5.0  w. it wastes 1.0  w of power heating the surroundings.  what is the efficiency of the lamp?  a 20% b 50% c 80% d 120%    12 a pendulum bob swings along the path wxyz and back again.    resistive forces can be ignored.    pendulum bob w z xy    which statement describes the total energy of the bob?  a it has a maximum value at x.  b it has a maximum value at y.  c it has a maximum value at z.  d it has the same value at w, x, y and z.     13 the equation used to find the pressure caused by a liquid can be written as    p = h \u00d7 y \u00d7 z    where p is the pressure and h is the depth of the liquid.    which row gives the quantities y and z?     y z  a cross-sectional area gravitational field strength  b cross-sectional area volume  c density cross-sectional area  d density gravitational field strength     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16 [turn over  14 the diagram shows a gas that is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. the volume of the gas is  120  cm3 and the pressure of the gas is p.    gas piston    the piston is moved slowly to the left so that the volume of the gas is reduced to 30  cm3. the  temperature of the gas does not change.    what is the new pressure of the trapped gas?  a 4p b 2p c p d 4p      15 a piece of melting ice at 0  \u00b0c and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. the  laboratory is at 20  \u00b0c.    melting iceboiling water bunsen burner heating water     what is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the temperature of the boiling water?     temperature of  melting ice temperature of  boiling water  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16  16 a puddle of water is formed after a rain shower on a windy day.    which statement explains the effect of the wind on the rate of evaporation of the water in the  puddle?  a the wind gives molecules in the water extra kinetic energy and so increases the rate of  evaporation.  b the wind removes evaporated water from near the surface and so decreases the rate of  evaporation.  c the wind removes evaporated water from near the surface and so increases the rate of  evaporation.  d the wind takes energy from molecules near the surface and so decreases the rate of  evaporation.    17 a copper container of mass 0.20  kg contains 0.10  kg of water.    the specific heat capacity of copper is 385  j / (kg  \u00b0c) and the specific heat capacity of water  is 4200  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    how much energy, in joules, is needed to raise the temperature of the copper container and the  water by 10  \u00b0c?  a (0.20 \u00d7 385 \u00d7 10) \u2013 (0.10 \u00d7 4200 \u00d7 10)  b (0.20 \u00d7 385 \u00d7 10) + (0.10 \u00d7 4200 \u00d7 10)  c (0.10 + 0.20) \u00d7 \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb + 2385  4200 \u00d7 10  d (0.10 + 0.20) \u00d7 (4200 + 385) \u00d7 10     18 on a very cold day, a boy puts one hand on the metal handlebars of his bicycle. he puts the  other hand on the rubber hand grip.     the metal feels colder than the rubber hand grip, although they are both at the same  temperature.    why is this?  a the metal has a higher melting point than the rubber.  b the metal has a lower thermal capacity than the rubber.  c the metal is a better thermal conductor than the rubber.  d the metal radiates more infra-red radiation than the rubber.    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16 [turn over  19 the diagrams show four spherical objects of the same colour and same type of surface. two of  the objects are small and two are large. two of the objects are at the same high temperature and two are at the same low temperature.    which object emits infra-red radiation at the greatest rate?    a b c d high temperaturelow temperaturehigh temperaturelow temperature     20 which wave has an amplitude equal to half its wavelength?    displacement / cm1.0 0 \u20131.01234 0 distance  / cma displacement / cm1.0 0 \u20131.01234 0 distance  / cmb displacement / cm1.0 0 \u20131.01234 0 distance  / cmc displacement / cm1.0 0 \u20131.01234 0 distance  / cmd  ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16  21 which diagram shows what happens when plane waves pass the edge of the object shown?    a objectb c dobject object object      22 an image is formed by a plane mirror. a second image is formed by a lens used as a magnifying  glass.  which row states the nature of each of these images?   plane mirror magnifying glass  a real real  b real virtual  c virtual real  d virtual virtual     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16 [turn over  23 the diagram shows light passing from air into glass. two angles p and q are marked.    air glassnormal p q     which pair of equations can both be used to calculate the refractive index n of the glass?  a n =  glass in light of speedair in light of speed, n =  qp  sin sin  b  n =  air in light of speedglass in light of speed, n =  qp  sin sin  c n =  glass in light of speedair in light of speed, n =  pq  sin sin  d n =  air in light of speedglass in light of speed, n =  pq  sin sin      24 which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used to send television signals from a satellite to  earth?  a infra-red  b microwaves  c ultraviolet  d visible light      25 a girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.    which wave property causes the echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16  26 which property of a sound wave affects the loudness of the sound?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength      27 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    ns magnet x iron bar n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1 experiment 2     which magnetic pole is induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s      28 a student suggests three methods for demagnetising a piece of steel.    1 placing it in an east-west direction and hammering it hard  2 placing it in an east-west direction and heating it until red hot  3 removing it slowly from a coil carrying alternating current    which of the methods will demagnetise the piece of steel?  a 1 only b 2 only c 3 only d 1, 2 and 3    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16 [turn over  29 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit  c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit  d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit     30 the diagram shows a circuit.    a    the reading on the ammeter is 12  a.    how much charge passes through the ammeter in 2.0 minutes?  a 0.10  c b 6.0  c c 24  c d 1440  c     31 a copper wire has a resistance of 2.0  \u03c9.    a second copper wire is twice as long as the firs t wire, and its diameter is twice the diameter of  the first wire.    what is the resistance of the second wire?  a 1.0  \u03c9 b 2.0  \u03c9 c 8.0  \u03c9 d 16.0  \u03c9     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16  32 which combination of resistors in parallel has an effective resistance of 0.50  \u03c9?    a b c d1.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9 1.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c91.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9 3.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c9      33 in the circuit shown, the voltmeter reads 2.0  v. a charge of 5.0  c passes through the resistor in a  certain time.    v    how much energy is supplied to the resistor in this time?  a 0.40  j b 2.5  j c 10  j d 20  j     34 two nand gates are connected together as shown.    input 1 input 2output     the arrangement acts like a single logic gate.    what is the name of this single logic gate?  a and b nor c not d or    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16 [turn over  35 an electric kettle has a metal casing. the cable for the kettle contains a wire that is connected to  the earth pin of the plug.    which danger does this guard against?  a the cable to the kettle becoming too hot  b the casing of the kettle becoming live  c the casing of the kettle becoming wet on the outside  d the casing of the kettle overheating    36 an electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.    which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?     effect used by a relay one application of a relay  a heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  b heating effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply  c magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  d magnetic effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply      37 what happens in the process of nuclear fission?  a electrons are added to a nucleus  b electrons are removed from a nucleus  c the nucleus of an atom splits  d two atomic nuclei join together      38 a \u03b2-particle enters a uniform magnetic field directed out of the page.    uniform magnetic field out of the page\u03b2-particle     in which direction is the \u03b2-particle deflected by the field?  a towards the top of the page  b into the page  c out of the page  d towards the bottom of the page    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material pr otected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/22/o/n/16  39 the radioactive nucleus bi214 83   decays to another nucleus by the emission of a \u03b2-particle.  what is the proton number and what is the nucleon number of the nucleus formed by this decay?   proton number nucleon number  a 81 210  b 81 212  c 84 213  d 84 214      40 radioactive source s emits \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm away  from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which emissions from the source can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays      "
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib16 11_0625_23/6rp  \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over     *5649030721 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/23     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2016     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).       ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  1 the graph shows how the distance trave lled by a vehicle changes with time.    0 0distance timepqrs     which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?     p to q q to r r to s  a constant zero constant  b constant zero decreasing  c increasing constant decreasing  d increasing zero constant     2 a stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. air resistance may be ignored.    which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?    0 0 time acceleration a  0 0 time acceleration b  0 0 time acceleration c  0 0 time acceleration d   ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16 [turn over  3 the speed-time graph for an object is shown.    01 0 3 0 5 010 0 time  / sspeed m / sxy zw     below are four statements about the acceleration of the object.    which statement is true?  a the acceleration in the first 10  s is (10 \u00f7 10)  m / s2.  b the acceleration increases between w and x.  c the acceleration decreases between y and z.  d the deceleration between y and z is (10 \u00f7 50)  m / s2.      4 an astronaut on the moon weighs less than on earth.  what is the reason for this difference, and how does his mass on the moon compare with his  mass on earth?   reason for weight difference mass on moon  a the moon has a weaker  gravitational field less than on earth  b the moon has a weaker  gravitational field same as on earth  c the moon has a weaker  magnetic field less than on earth  d the moon has a weaker  magnetic field same as on earth    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  5 the diagrams show an empty container, and the same container filled with liquid.    the empty container has a mass of 120  g. when filled with the liquid, the total mass of the  container and the liquid is 600  g.    container filled with liquid 600  gempty container 120  g    the volume of liquid in the container is 600  cm3.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.020  g / cm3 b 0.80  g / cm3 c 1.0  g / cm3  d 1.2  g / cm3     6 an object travels in a circular path at constant speed.  which statement about the object is correct?  a it has changing kinetic energy.  b it has changing momentum.  c it has constant velocity.  d it is not accelerating.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16 [turn over  7 different loads are hung on a spring. the diagram shows the length of the spring with and without  the loads attached.    200  n 400  n20  cm 40  cm 65  cm     what is the extension of the spring when the load is 400  n?  a 5 cm b 25  cm c 40  cm d 45  cm     8 a vehicle of mass 900  kg is travelling with a velocity of 20  m / s.    what is the momentum of the vehicle?  a 45  kg  m / s b 450  kg  m / s c 18  000  kg  m / s d 180  000  kg  m / s      9 which list contains only scalar quantities?  a acceleration, energy, force, mass  b acceleration, force, momentum, velocity  c distance, energy, mass, speed  d distance, momentum, speed, velocity     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  10 a ball is dropped onto a floor.    its speed just before hitting the floor is 3.0  m / s.    which change would result in a speed of 6.0  m / s just before hitting the floor?  ignore any effects due to air resistance.  a drop the ball from double the height above the floor.  b drop the ball from four times the height above the floor.  c use a ball with double the mass.  d use a ball with four times the mass.      11 which list contains only energy resource s that derive their energy from the sun?  a geothermal, nuclear, tidal  b hydroelectric, water waves, wind  c geothermal, hydroelectric, solar  d nuclear, solar, water waves      12 a lamp has a power input of 5.0  w. it wastes 1.0  w of power heating the surroundings.  what is the efficiency of the lamp?  a 20% b 50% c 80% d 120%      13 a container is filled with liquid to a certain depth h.    hcontainer liquid     the pressure of the liquid at the bottom of the container depends on several factors.    which is one factor on which the pressure does not depend?  a the strength of the earth\u2019s gravitational field  b the density of the liquid  c the depth of the liquid  d the strength of the earth\u2019s magnetic field     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16 [turn over  14 which diagram best represents the movement of a smoke particle displaying brownian motion?    ab cdsmoke particlesmoke particle smoke particlesmoke particle       15 the volume of a gas is measured at different pressures.   the pressure p and the volume v of the gas are found to be related by the equation:  pv = constant.  which quantities are kept constant and which quantities change?   density of gas mass of gas temperature of gas   a \u0016 \u0016 \u001a key  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016 \u0016= constant  c \u001a \u0016 \u0016 \u001a= changed  d \u001a \u001a \u0016      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  16 a piece of melting ice at 0  \u00b0c and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. the  laboratory is at 20  \u00b0c.    melting iceboiling water bunsen burner heating water     what is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the temperature of the boiling water?     temperature of  melting ice temperature of  boiling water  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing     17 a scientist has two thermometers available: a liquid-in-glass thermometer and a thermocouple  thermometer.  which thermometer is better for measuring a very high temperature, and which thermometer is  better for measuring a rapidly varying temperature?   very high temperature rapidly varying temperature  a liquid-in-glass liquid-in-glass  b liquid-in-glass thermocouple  c thermocouple liquid-in-glass  d thermocouple thermocouple     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16 [turn over  18 a copper container of mass 0.20  kg contains 0.10  kg of water.    the specific heat capacity of copper is 385  j / (kg  \u00b0c) and the specific heat capacity of water  is 4200  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    how much energy, in joules, is needed to raise the temperature of the copper container and the  water by 10  \u00b0c?  a (0.20 \u00d7 385 \u00d7 10) \u2013 (0.10 \u00d7 4200 \u00d7 10)  b (0.20 \u00d7 385 \u00d7 10) + (0.10 \u00d7 4200 \u00d7 10)  c (0.10 + 0.20) \u00d7 \uf8f7 \uf8f8\uf8f6\uf8ec \uf8ed\uf8eb + 2385  4200 \u00d7 10  d (0.10 + 0.20) \u00d7 (4200 + 385) \u00d7 10     19 the diagrams show four spherical objects of the same size. two of the objects are white and two  are black. two of the objects are at the same high temperature and two are at the same low temperature.    which object emits infra-red radiation at the greatest rate?    a bcd high temperaturehigh temperaturelow temperaturelow temperature      20 a man is talking at the side of a house. he can be heard by a woman at the front of the house  even though she cannot see him.        what is the explanation for this?  a sound waves are longitudinal and light waves are transverse.  b sound waves are transverse and light waves are longitudinal.  c the sound waves have a long wavelength and the light waves have short wavelength.  d the sound waves have a short wavelength and the light waves have long wavelength.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  21 an image is formed by a plane mirror. a second image is formed by a lens used as a magnifying  glass.  which row states the nature of each of these images?   plane mirror magnifying glass  a real real  b real virtual  c virtual real  d virtual virtual      22 the speed of light in air is 3.0 \u00d7 108  m / s.    the critical angle for light in a transparent plastic material placed in air is 37 \u00b0.    what is the speed of light in the plastic material?  a 1.8 \u00d7 108  m / s  b 2.4 \u00d7 108  m / s  c 3.8 \u00d7 108  m / s  d 5.0 \u00d7 108  m / s      23 which description applies to infra-red radiation?  a longitudinal and electromagnetic  b longitudinal but not electromagnetic  c transverse and electromagnetic  d transverse but not electromagnetic    24 a girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.    which wave property causes the echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16 [turn over  25 a man stands 110  m from a high wall. he makes a short, sharp sound and then hears an echo  from the wall.  the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.  how long after making the sound does the man hear the echo?  a 0.33  s b 0.67  s c 1.5  s d 3.0  s    26 a student suggests three methods for demagnetising a piece of steel.    1 placing it in an east-west direction and hammering it hard  2 placing it in an east-west direction and heating it until red hot  3 removing it slowly from a coil carrying alternating current    which of the methods will demagnetise the piece of steel?  a 1 only b 2 only c 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     27 in two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. this causes  the bar to become magnetised.    ns magnet x iron bar n s magnet y iron barexperiment 1 experiment 2     which magnetic pole is induced at x and at y?     pole induced at x pole induced at y  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  28 a student holds a rod in his hand.    rodhandcloth     he rubs the rod with a cloth. the rod gains a positive charge.     of which material could the rod be made, and which transfer of charge has happened?     material of rod transfer of charge  a metal negative charge from rod to cloth  b metal positive charge from cloth to rod  c plastic negative charge from rod to cloth  d plastic positive charge from cloth to rod     29 the diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.    p     which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?  a adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit  b adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit  c decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit  d moving the lamp to point p in the circuit    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16 [turn over  30 the graph shows the relationship between the current in a circuit component and the potential  difference (p.d.) across it. the graph has a straight section and a curved section.    current p.d.0 0    what happens to the resistance of the component in these two sections as the current increases?     straight section curved section  a resistance increases resistance decreases  b resistance increases resistance increases  c no change in resistance resistance decreases  d no change in resistance resistance increases      31 in the circuit shown there is a current of 10  a.        how much charge passes through the resistor in 2.0 minutes?  a 0.083  c b 5 c c 20  c d 1200  c    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  32 the four circuits shown each contain four diodes.    in which circuit is the direction of the current in the resistor always from the red terminal to the  black terminal?    red terminalblack terminal12 va red terminalblack terminal12 vb red terminalblack terminal12 vc red terminalblack terminal12 vd      ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16 [turn over  33 the diagram shows a potential divider.    6 v 0 v     when brighter light falls on the light-dependent resistor (ldr), its resistance changes.    what happens to the resistance of the ldr and what happens to the current in it?     resistance of ldr current in ldr  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      34 the diagram shows two logic gates connected together.    low (0) low (0)p q     the two inputs are both low (0).    what are the logic states at p and at q?     p q  a high (1) high (1)  b high (1) low (0)  c low (0) high (1)  d low (0) low (0)     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  35 two electrical appliances are connected to the mains supply.     the cable connected to one appliance includes an earth wire.     the cable connected to the second appliance does not need an earth wire.    what is a reason for this difference?  a one appliance has a metal case, but the other appliance does not.  b one appliance is fitted with a fuse, but the other appliance is not.  c one appliance is fitted with a switch, but the other appliance is not.  d one appliance needs more current than the other appliance.     36 an electric current can produce a heating effect and a magnetic effect.    which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?     effect used by a relay one application of a relay  a heating effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  b heating effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply  c magnetic effect allowing a small current to switch on a large current  d magnetic effect changing the voltage of an a.c. supply     37 which particle is absorbed by a nucleus to cause nuclear fission?  a a neutron  b a proton  c an \u03b1-particle  d a \u03b2-particle     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16 [turn over  38 an \u03b1-particle enters a uniform magnetic field directed out of the page.    uniform magnetic field out of the page \u03b1-particle    in which direction is the \u03b1-particle deflected by the field?  a into the page  b out of the page  c to the left  d to the right     39 radioactive source s emits \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. a detector is placed 5  cm away  from s. a thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.    s 5 cmthin sheet of paper detecto r     which emissions from the source can be detected?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  40 uranium-238 is radioactive and decays to thorium-234 by the emission of a particle.    u238 92  \u2192  th234 90   +  particle    which particle is emitted in this process?  a an \u03b1-particle  b a \u03b2-particle  c a neutron  d a proton    ",
            "19": "19    blank page   \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16  ",
            "20": "20    blank page     permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.   cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2016 0625/23/o/n/16   "
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (kn/sg) 115850/8 \u00a9 ucles 2016  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *0501787989* physics  0625/31 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 1 fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a cyclist travelling along a flat, straight road. 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40810 6 4 2 0 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 1.1  (a) complete the following sentence.   the cyclist has the greatest acceleration between .. seconds   and .. seconds.  [1]  (b) calculate the distance travelled by the cyclist between 10  s and 25  s.  distance = ..  m [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (c) fig. 1.2 shows the horizontal forces acting on the cyclist at three different times.   the length of each arrow represents the size of the force. a b c fig. 1.2   (i) which pair of forces, a, b or c, act on the cyclist when the time is 20  s? tick one box.      a        b        c  [1]   (ii) explain your answer to (c)(i) .  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 2 a student investigates the stretching of elastic bands.  table 2.1 shows some of his results for elastic band a. table 2.1 load attached  / nelastic band a length  / cm extension  / cm 0 10.2 0.0 1 10.9 0.7 2 11.5 1.3 3 12.3 2.1 4 13.0 2.8 5 13.7 6 14.5  (a) complete table 2.1 by calculating the missing extensions.   [2]  (b) the student repeats his experiment using elastic band b. elastic band b is twice as long as  elastic band a. it has the same thickness and is made of the same material.   fig. 2.1 shows how he uses the apparatus. 0 10 20 30 40 50support elastic band loadruler with cm scale fig. 2.1   describe two changes the student could make to improve the accuracy of his measurements. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...    [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (c) the student draws a graph of extension against load for each elastic band.   the lines of best fit for elastic bands a and b are shown in fig. 2.2. 0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.02.04.06.08.010.012.0 extension  / cm load  / n fig. 2.2   (i) use information from table 2.1 to label each of the graph lines. label the lines band a   and band b . explain how you decided on your answer.  ...  ...  ... [1]   (ii) the student repeats his experiment using elastic band c, which is three times as long as  elastic band a. it has the same thickness and is made of the same material.    on fig. 2.2, draw a line to suggest how extension would vary with load for elastic   band c. label the line band c . [1]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 3 fig. 3.1 shows a barrier pivoted near one end. the barrier is raised to allow cars to pass. pivot barrier support 2.0 m 200  n fig. 3.1  (a) a force is used to raise the barrier off the support.   on fig. 3.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of the smallest force that can be  used to raise the barrier.   [2]  (b) the barrier has a weight of 200  n. this acts at a distance of 2.0  m from the pivot, as shown in  fig. 3.1.   calculate the moment of the weight of the barrier about the pivot.  moment = ...  n m [2]  (c) to reduce the force needed to raise the barrier, a counterweight is added, as shown in fig. 3.2. pivot 2.0 m 200  ncounterweight 0.50  m w fig. 3.2 (not to scale)   the weight w of the counterweight acts at a distance of 0.5  m from the pivot. the barrier is in  equilibrium, without the support.   calculate the weight w of the counterweight.  weight = ..  n [2]  [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 4 an electric motor is used to lift a load. the energy involved is shown in fig. 4.1. energy input to motor 100  jwork done in lifting load 80 j waste energy 20 j fig. 4.1  (a) (i) state the term used to describe the energy gained by the load due to its increase in  height.  ... [1]   (ii) what effect does the waste energy from the motor have on its surroundings?  ... [1]   (iii) state the principle of conservation of energy and explain how it applies to the working of  the motor. use information from fig. 4.1 in your answer.  ...  ...  ... [2]    (b) the electrical power for the motor is generated in a coal-fired power station.   state two benefits of using coal-fired power stations and state two problems that arise from  their use. benefits 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ... problems 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...    [4]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a ray of red light passing through a semi-circular glass block. ray of red light semi-circular glass block fig. 5.1   (i) the ray of light changes direction as it travels into the block.    state the name that is given to this change of direction.  ... [1]   (ii) fig. 5.2 shows another ray of red light travelling into the semi-circular glass block.   it meets the curved surface at 90\u00b0.     inside the block, the ray meets the flat surface of the block at an angle greater than the  critical angle. ray of red lightair glassflat surface of block fig. 5.2    on fig. 5.2, complete the path of the ray of red light.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (b) fig. 5.3 shows the view from above of a car approaching an observer, marked with a   cross ( \u00d7). carheadlights treesshop window shop window shop window houses observer\u00d7 fig. 5.3   (i) the observer sees the car\u2019s headlights reflected in one of the shop windows.   the car\u2019s headlights are labelled.     in which shop window does the observer see the reflection? show your answer  by drawing, on fig. 5.3, the path of a ray of light from a headlight to the observer.   use a ruler.  [1]   (ii) state the law that you used to answer (b)(i) .  ... [1]   (iii) add labels to fig. 5.3 to show how the law stated in (b)(ii)  applies.  [2]    [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 6 fig. 6.1 shows a flask of hot water. liquid waterflask water vapour in the air table fig. 6.1  (a) describe the arrangement and movement of the molecules in the liquid water and in the  water vapour.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) describe, in terms of molecules, how water in the flask becomes water vapour in the air.    state the name of the process. description    ...  ... process  .    [3]  (c) the total weight of the flask and water is 5.6  n.    the area of the flask in contact with the table is 140  cm2.   calculate the pressure of the flask on the table.  pressure = ..  n / cm2 [3]    [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum. radio  wavesmicro-  wavesinfra-red wavesvisible  lightx-raysgamma  rays fig. 7.1  (a) one type of wave is missing from fig. 7.1.   state its name.  ... [1]  (b) one type of electromagnetic wave is used to send signals to satellites.   state its name.  ... [1]  (c) gamma rays and light waves travel through the vacuum of space to the earth.   which statement is correct? tick one box.      gamma rays travel at a slower speed than light waves.        gamma rays travel at the same speed as light waves.        gamma rays travel at a faster speed than light waves.  [1]  (d) state one way in which sound waves are different from electromagnetic waves.  ... [1]    [total: 4]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 8 a student measures the resistance of a sample of wire.  she plans to use the circuit shown in fig. 8.1. 6.0 v sample of wire fig. 8.1  two circuit symbols are incomplete.  (a) complete the symbols for the two meters on fig. 8.1.  [2]  (b) the current in the wire is 0.20  a. the potential difference across the wire is 6.0  v.   calculate the resistance of the wire.  resistance = ..  \u03c9 [3]  (c) the student tests a thinner wire. it is the same length as the wire in (b) and is made of the  same material. the potential difference across the wire is 6.0  v.   explain how the current in this thinner wire compares with that in the first wire.   ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 9 the charger for a mobile phone contains a transformer. fig. 9.1 shows a simple transformer. output voltagecore secondary coil primary coil240  v a.c. fig. 9.1  (a) state the name of the material used in the core.  ... [1]  (b) (i) the transformer has 36  000 turns on the primary coil and 900 turns on the secondary  coil. the input voltage is 240  v.    calculate the output voltage.  output voltage = ... v [3]   (ii) state whether this transformer is step-up  or step-down . give a reason for your answer.  ...  ... [1]  (c) transformers can produce high voltages for transmitting electricity from power stations to  towns.   describe the advantages of transmitting electricity at a high voltage.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows two bar magnets. s n s n fig. 10.1   draw a ring around the correct description of the force between the magnets. attractive force                  repulsive force                  no force  [1]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a current-carrying solenoid, wound on a piece of card.  card b a fig. 10.2   the ends of the solenoid are labelled a and b. the arrows show the direction of the current in  the solenoid.   (i) when there is a current in the solenoid, the ends of the solenoid act like the poles of a  bar magnet.    complete table 10.1 by naming the pole produced at end a and at end b. table 10.1 position pole end a end b  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over   (ii) fig. 10.3 shows the current-carrying solenoid viewed from above. the arrows show the  direction of the current in the solenoid. cardb a fig. 10.3    on fig. 10.3, draw the pattern of the magnetic field produced by the solenoid.     draw at least two magnetic field lines above line ab and two below the line ab.  [2]   (iii)  draw arrows on the field lines to show the direction of the magnetic field produced by the  solenoid.  [1]  (c)  a current-carrying solenoid is wrapped around an iron rod to create an electromagnet.   state two reasons why an electromagnet can be more useful than a permanent magnet. 1.  ... 2.  ...   [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 11 a student is given a length of wire, a sensitive voltmeter and two bar magnets.  (a) describe how he could use the equipment to demonstrate the induction of an e.m.f. in the  wire. you may include a diagram in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) state how the student will know when an e.m.f. has been induced.  ... [1]  (c) describe two ways the student could increase the size of the induced e.m.f. 1.  ... 2.  ...      [2]  [total: 6]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 12 caesium-137 is formed in nuclear reactors.  the nucleus of caesium-137 can be represented as 137 55 cs  (a) complete table 12.1 by stating the two types of particle in a nucleus of caesium-137, and the  number of each particle present. table 12.1 type of particle number of particles  [4]  (b) caesium has more than one isotope.   explain what is meant by the term isotope .  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/31/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nh/ar) 115919/8 \u00a9 ucles 2016  [turn over *8749902441* physics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 1 fig. 1.1 is an incomplete graph that shows the motion of an object. the axes labels are incomplete. 9 8 7 6 65 4 3 2 8 4 21 0 0 10. m / s . /  sab cd e  fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, complete the label on each of the axes.  [1]  (b) identify the part of the graph which shows the greatest acceleration. tick one box.     a to b     b to c     c to d     d to e  [1]  (c) calculate the distance travelled by the object between points c and d.  distance =  ..  m [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (d) another object starts from rest at the same time as the object shown by the graph in fig. 1.1.   this object has constant acceleration for 10  s. after 10  s it moves at 8.0  m / s.   on fig. 1.1, draw a line to show the motion of this object between 0 and 10  s. [1]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 2 fig. 2.1 shows a block of wood. 5.0 cm 5.0 cm 10.0  cm fig. 2.1  (not to scale)  (a) a student measures the mass of the block. he then measures the length of each side, as  shown in fig. 2.1.   state the names of the measuring instruments used by the student. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  (b) calculate the volume of the block of wood.  volume =  ... cm3 [1]  (c) the block of wood shown in fig. 2.1 has a mass of 200  g.   calculate the density of the wood.  density =   g / cm3 [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (d) the table shows the densities of five liquids. liquiddensity g / cm3 does the block float? alcohol 0.75 freon 1.37 glycerol 1.13 petrol 0.72 sea water 1.02   indicate the liquids on which the block of wood will float by placing ticks ( 3) in the final column.  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 3 fig. 3.1 shows a child and an adult on a see-saw. 1.4 m 0.6 m 300  n wpivot fig. 3.1  (a) the see-saw shown in fig. 3.1 is in equilibrium.   tick the box alongside any correct statement.     the resultant force on the see-saw is zero.     the resultant turning effect on the see-saw is zero.  [1]  (b) calculate the moment of the child about the pivot.  moment =  ...  n m [3]  (c) calculate the weight w of the adult.  weight =  ... n [3]  (d) state what would happen if the child moved further away from the pivot.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 4 fig. 4.1 shows a student standing on soft sand. the student does not sink into the sand. soft sand fig. 4.1  the student has a mass of 40  kg.  (a) calculate the force of her body acting on the sand.  force =  ... n [2]  (b) the total area of both her shoes in contact with the sand is 0.02  m2.   calculate the pressure the student exerts on the sand, when standing as shown in fig. 4.1.  pressure =    n / m2 [3]  (c) the student lifts one foot off the sand. the other foot sinks into the sand.   explain why this happens. a calculation is not required.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 5 fig. 5.1 shows an electrical heater placed so that it is the same distance from two cans. shiny silver can with waterlid lid dull black can with waterthermometers electrical  heater fig. 5.1  the cans are the same size and contain equal volumes of water, initially at the same temperature.   (a) energy travels to the cans from the heater.   state the name of this process.  ... [1]  (b) both cans are heated by the process in (a) for 20 minutes.   compare the temperature of the water in the two cans at the end of the 20 minutes. explain  your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (c) some water is spilt on the bench when the cans are filled. at the end of the experiment the  bench is dry.   state what happened to the water on the bench and explain the process in terms of the water  molecules.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light striking a plane mirror. plane  mirror ray of lightx fig. 6.1   state the name given to angle x.  ... [1]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows an incorrect  ray diagram for an image of object o formed by a plane mirror. oplane mirror fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, clearly mark the correct  position of the image. label this i. [1]   (ii) explain why the ray diagram shown in fig. 6.2 is incorrect.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 4]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 7 fig. 7.1 shows how a fishing boat uses ultrasound to locate fish. sea surface fishsound wave returnedsound wave sent out fig. 7.1  (a) the boat sends out a pulse of ultrasound. the pulse reflects off the fish and returns to the  boat.   the time between sending and receiving the pulse is 0.3  s. the speed of sound in sea water  is 1500  m / s.   calculate the distance from the boat to the fish.  distance =  ... m [3]  (b) tick the box alongside the correct statement for ultrasound.     the frequency of ultrasound is less than 20  hz.     the frequency of ultrasound is between 20  hz and 2000  hz.     the frequency of ultrasound is between 2000  hz and 20  000 hz.     the frequency of ultrasound is more than 20  000 hz. [1]  (c) ultrasound is not part of the electromagnetic spectrum.   state the name of a wave that forms part of the electromagnetic spectrum.  ... [1]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 8 a vibrating source sends a wave along a string.  fig. 8.1 shows the wave on the string. 30 cmstring fig. 8.1  (a) calculate the wavelength of the wave using information from fig. 8.1.  wavelength =  . cm [2]  (b) explain what is meant by the frequency of a wave.  ...  ... [1]  (c) the wave pattern shown in fig. 8.1 is produced by the vibrating source in a time of 0.05  s.   calculate the frequency of the wave. include the unit.  frequency =  ... [3]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 9 fig. 9.1 shows a laptop and a charger. the charger contains a step-down transformer. charger laptop fig. 9.1  (a) (i) explain the function of a step-down transformer.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) state the name of the material from which the two coils of the transformer are made.  ... [1]   (iii) the transformer has an input voltage of 240  v and an output voltage of 12  v. there are  10 000 turns on the input coil.    calculate the number of turns on the output coil.  number of turns =  ... [3]  (b) electricity is transmitted at high voltages.   state two advantages of transmitting electricity in this way. 1.  ...   2.  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 10 fig. 10.1 shows a simplified circuit diagram for a fan-assisted electric oven. the fan is driven by a  motor. component xpower supply m        fig. 10.1  (a) on fig. 10.1, circle the symbol representing the heater.  [1]  (b) fig. 10.1 includes a variable resistor.   (i) state the function of a variable resistor.  ... [1]   (ii) suggest how using a variable resistor can affect the heater.  ... [1]  (c) the potential difference across the motor is 250  v. the current in the motor is 2.0  a.   calculate the resistance of the motor.  resistance =  ... \u03c9 [3]  (d) state the name of component x and explain how it contributes to the safety of the user. name of component x  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 11 fig. 11.1 shows a relay. contacts pivot iron armature circuit 1switch xcircuit 2 high-voltage a.c. supplymotor ym fig. 11.1  (a) (i) the relay is used to switch on the motor in the high-voltage circuit 2.    circuit 1 uses direct current (d.c.).    state what is meant by direct current .  ... [1]   (ii) state a suitable material for y and explain why it is made from this material. material  . explanation    ...  [2]  (b) closing switch x in circuit 1 results in a current in circuit 2.   use fig. 11.1 to explain why this happens.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (c) circuit 2 requires thicker wires than the wires in circuit 1.   suggest why circuit 2 needs thicker wires.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 12 (a) carbon-14 is a radioactive element.   describe what is meant by the term radioactive .  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) the radioactive decay curve for carbon-14 is shown in fig. 12.1. count rate counts  / min time  / years70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 5000 10 000 15 000 20 000 25 000 30 000 fig. 12.1   (i) complete the table using information from fig. 12.1. the first value has been done for  you. count rate counts  / minutetime / years 40 3800 20 10  [1]   (ii) determine the half-life of carbon-14.  half-life =  . years [1]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (c) a radioactive iodine isotope has a half-life of 8 days. a sample contains 10  g of this iodine  isotope.   calculate the mass of the iodine isotope remaining in the sample after 16 days.  mass remaining =  ...  g [2]  (d) state one safety precaution taken by people who use radioactive sources.  ... [1]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/jg) 120582/6 \u00a9 ucles 2016  [turn over *1691942825* physics  0625/33 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 1 fig. 1.1 shows a speed-time graph for part of a train\u2019s journey. 00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.220406080100120 speed km / h time  / hoursl pr s t km n fig. 1.1  (a) state the maximum speed of the train.  maximum speed =  ...  km / h  [1]  (b) identify the regions of the graph that show the train moving at constant speed.    tick (\u2713) the correct boxes. k\u2013l l\u2013m m\u2013n p\u2013r r\u2013s s\u2013t [1]  (c) during the journey the train stopped for a short period of time.   state the time, in minutes, for which the train was not moving.  time =  ...  minutes  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (d) calculate the distance travelled by the train between points m and n.  distance travelled =  .  km [3] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 blank page",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a cyclist travelling along a level road. forwards forcebackwards force fig. 2.1  (a) describe the movement of the bicycle when the forces shown in fig. 2.1 are of equal size.  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 2.2 shows the forces on the bicycle later in the journey. 225  n 150  n fig. 2.2   determine the size and direction of the resultant force.  size of resultant force =    n  direction of resultant force =  ... [2]  (c) at the end of the journey the cyclist applies the brakes to stop the bicycle.   name and describe the force that causes the bicycle to stop. force  .. description    ... [2] [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 3 a load is hung from a spring, as shown in fig. 3.1. load fig. 3.1  the load is pulled down a few centimetres and then released. the spring and load oscillate up  and down.  (a) state the position of the load   (i) when the spring has maximum elastic (strain) energy,  ..  [1]   (ii) when the load has maximum kinetic energy.  ..  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (b) the spring oscillates up and down for a short time.   (i) state the principle of conservation of energy.  ...  ..  [1]   (ii) describe the energy changes as the spring and load oscillate and suggest why the load  and spring eventually stop moving.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 4 fig. 4.1 shows a car parked on a road. fig. 4.1  (a) the car has a mass of 1000  kg.   calculate the weight of the car.  weight of car =  ..  n  [2]  (b) (i) the combined weight of the car and its driver is 10  500 n. the area of each tyre in contact  with the road is 125  cm2. each tyre supports a quarter of the combined weight of the car  and driver.    calculate the pressure that each tyre exerts on the ground.  pressure =  ..  n / cm2  [3]   (ii) later, the car is parked on some long wooden planks on a muddy field.    explain why the planks prevent the car from sinking into the mud.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (c) (i) a driver needs to remove a wheel from the car. to undo the wheel nuts the driver uses a  wrench, as shown in fig. 4.2. wrench wheel nut0.25 m0.25 m200  n200  n200  n fig. 4.2    a force of 200  n is applied perpendicular to the wrench. the force is applied 0.25  m from  the centre of a wheel nut.    calculate the moment produced by this force. include the unit.  moment =  ..  [3]   (ii) one of the wheel nuts is difficult to turn.    describe how the driver can increase the moment when using the same force of 200  n  applied to the wrench.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 5 a fisherman notices that the water in a lake is warm and that there is a cool breeze from the land,  as shown in fig. 5.1. warm lakelandcool breeze fig. 5.1  (a) the fisherman tries to explain why there is a cool breeze from the land.   the statements below describe his ideas.   put a tick ( \u2713) in the box alongside each correct statement.     air above the surface of the warm lake becomes less dense.     air is a good thermal conductor.     denser water rises to the surface of the lake.     the cool breeze occurs as a result of convection.     warmer air rises.     water is a good thermal conductor. [3]  (b) as the night gets colder, the fisherman puts on a jacket to keep warm.   explain how the jacket keeps the fisherman warm.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [2] [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 6 a candle is placed in front of a vertical mirror. fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light reflected from the mirror. candlemirror normal fig. 6.1  (a) (i) on fig. 6.1, draw an arrow on the ray to show the direction of travel of the ray of light.       [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, label the angle of incidence  i and the angle of reflection  r. [1]   (iii) tick (\u2713) two boxes to describe the image of the candle in the mirror.      closer to the mirror than the candle      the same distance from the mirror as the candle      on the surface of the mirror      smaller than the candle      the same size as the candle  [2]  (b) other rays of light also strike the mirror and are reflected.   state the rule that always links the angle of incidence and the angle of reflection.  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 7 two people watch a storm cloud above a tree. person a is watching from her house and person b  is watching from a distant hill.  lightning creates a bright flash and loud thunder at the same time. the lightning strikes the tree  not far from person a\u2019s house, as shown in fig. 7.1. ablightning fig. 7.1  for each person, describe the time interval between seeing the lightning and hearing the thunder  and explain your answers. person a description of time interval    ..  .. person b description of time interval    ..  .. explanation  ...  ..  ..  ..  .. [4]  [total: 4]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 8 fig. 8.1 shows two uncharged (neutral) plastic spheres. each sphere is suspended by an insulating  thread. insulating thread fig. 8.1  (a) suggest a material for the insulating threads.  ..  [1]  (b) the spheres can be given a charge.   three different experiments are carried out using the arrangements shown in fig. 8.2. experiment 1 experiment 2 experiment 3negatively charged positively chargedkey fig. 8.2   for each experiment, describe the force, if any, between the spheres. experiment 1  . experiment 2  . experiment 3  . [3]  (c) state and explain how one of the plastic spheres can be given a positive charge.  ...  ...  ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 9 fig. 9.1 shows the electric circuit for a fan heater. 24 v mp motor for fan heater fig. 9.1  the fan blows air over the heater. the fan is driven by a motor connected to a 24  v d.c. supply.  (a) explain the difference between an a.c. supply and a d.c. supply.  ...  ..  [1]  (b) the circuit includes a component labelled p.   (i) name this component.  ..  [1]   (ii) explain the function of this component in the circuit.  ...  ..  [2]  (c) (i) the heater has a resistance of 8.5  \u03c9 and the potential difference across it is 24  v.    calculate the current in the heater. include the unit.  current =  ..  [4]   (ii) suggest the rating of the fuse needed for the heater.  ..  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (d) a different fan heater for use in a house is connected to a 110  v supply. this heater has a  metal case.    explain the benefit of earthing the metal case.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [1] [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 10 this question is about atoms.  (a) complete the sentences below with the correct type of particle in each case. \u2022 in a neutral atom, the nucleus is surrounded by negative   . \u2022 the nucleus is made up of positive  and neutral       . [2]  (b) explain the meaning of the term isotope .  ...  ...  ..  [1]  (c) \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays may be emitted from radioactive nuclei.   complete the table. place one tick (\u2713) in each column. negatively charged most ionising most penetrating \u03b1-particle \u03b2-particle \u03b3-rays [3] [total: 6]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 11 fig. 11.1 represents part of an electricity transmission system. power station transformers housetransmission lines x y fig. 11.1  (a) transformers can be step-up  or step-down .   state the type of transformer shown at x and the type of transformer shown at y. x  ... y  ... [1]  (b) a transformer has a primary coil of 24  000 turns, a secondary coil of 2000 turns and an input  voltage of 132  000 v.   calculate the output voltage.  output voltage =  ..  v  [2]  (c)  state two advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages. 1.  .. 2.  .. [2] [total: 5]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 12 fig. 12.1 shows a coil of wire between the poles of a magnet. b cmagnet a dn s springy contacts (brushes) fig. 12.1  (a) (i) on fig. 12.1, complete the circuit diagram by adding a battery and a switch in series with  the coil.  [2]   (ii) when the switch is closed there is a current in the coil which produces a turning effect.    state three  ways of increasing the turning effect on the coil. 1.  .. 2.  .. 3.  .. [3]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016  (b) (i) a student has a coil of wire, a magnet and a galvanometer.    describe an experiment using this equipment to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.  you may draw a diagram to show the arrangement.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]   (ii) the strength of the magnetic field affects the size of the induced e.m.f.    name two other factors that also affect the size of the induced e.m.f. 1.  .. 2.  .. [2] [total: 10]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (cw/fd) 116034/8 \u00a9 ucles 2016  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *5254520812* physics  0625/41 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 1 an astronaut on the moon drops a feather from rest, off the top of a small cliff. the acceleration  due to gravity on the moon is 1.6  m / s2. there is no air on the moon.  (a) the feather falls for 4.5  s before it hits the ground.   (i) on fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling feather.  [2] 00246speed m / s8 1 2 3 4 time  / s5  fig. 1.1   (ii) determine the distance fallen by the feather.  distance =  ..  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (b) on fig. 1.2, sketch the shape of a speed-time graph for the same feather falling on earth. 0 timespeed 0 fig. 1.2  [2]  (c) explain the difference between speed and velocity. include the words vector  and scalar  in  your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 2 fig. 2.1 represents the cross-section of an oil tanker in a river. 15 mtanker river water fig. 2.1  (a) the bottom of the tanker is 15  m below the surface of the water. the area of the bottom of the  tanker is 6000  m2. the density of the water is 1000  kg / m3.   (i) calculate the pressure due to the water at the depth of 15  m.  pressure =  ... [2]   (ii) calculate the force due to the water pressure on the bottom of the tanker.  force =  ... [2]   (iii) deduce the weight of the tanker.  weight =  ... [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (b) the tanker sails out onto a calm sea. the density of sea-water is greater than the density of  river water.   state and explain any change in the depth of the bottom of the tanker below the surface.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 3 (a) a closed container holds a quantity of gas.   explain, in terms of momentum, how molecules of the gas exert a force on a wall of the  container.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a glass tube containing mercury. airmercury qh fig. 3.1   the mercury traps a fixed mass of air in the left-hand arm of the tube. the right-hand arm of  the tube is open to the atmosphere. the difference in mercury levels in the two arms is h.   (i) the pressure of the atmosphere on the surface of the mercury in the right-hand arm of  the tube is 760  mm hg. the distance h is 120  mm.    calculate the total pressure at level q, in mm of mercury (mm  hg), due to the atmosphere  and the mercury above q.  pressure =  ..  mm hg [1]   (ii) state the pressure exerted by the air in the left-hand arm of the tube.  pressure =  ..  mm hg [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over   (iii) initially, the volume of air trapped in the left-hand arm of the tube is 12  cm3.    more mercury is poured into the right-hand arm of the tube. the volume of the trapped  air decreases. the temperature does not change. the difference in levels, h, becomes  240 mm.    calculate the new volume of the trapped air.  volume =  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 4 (a) in an experiment, cold water is poured into a bowl made of an insulating material. the container  is placed in a draught-free room. after several hours, the volume and the temperature of the  water are found to have decreased.   name and describe the process that causes the decrease in the volume of the water, and  explain why the temperature of the water decreases.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  (b) in a second experiment, using the same apparatus and the same initial amount of cold water  as in (a), an electric fan blows air over the top of the bowl.   predict and explain how the results of this experiment compare with the results of the  experiment in (a).  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) in a third experiment, the same initial amount of cold water as in (a) is poured into a metal   bowl. the metal bowl is the same shape and size as the bowl used in (a).   compared with the experiment in (a), the decrease in temperature is less in the same time.   explain why.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 5 (a) compare the arrangement and motion of the molecules in ice and in liquid water. ice  .  ... water  .  ... [2]  (b) an ice-hockey rink has an area of 1800  m2. the ice has a thickness of 0.025  m. the density of  ice is 920  kg / m3.   (i) calculate the mass of ice on the rink.  mass =  ... [2]   (ii) the ice is at 0  \u00b0c. to form the ice, water at 0  \u00b0c was poured onto the floor of the rink and  then frozen. the specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 \u00d7 105 j / kg.    calculate the energy removed from the water to form the ice at  0 \u00b0c.  energy =  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 6 (a) (i) state a typical value for the speed of sound in air.  speed =  ... [1]   (ii) state the range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear.  ... [1]  (b) a sound wave in air has a wavelength of 22  mm.   fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of this sound. these wavefronts are successive compressions. 22 mm fig. 6.1   (i) using your value for the speed of sound in (a)(i) , calculate the frequency of the sound  wave.  frequency =  ... [2]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, draw dotted lines to represent three  different rarefactions.  [1]   (iii) state, in terms of both molecules and pressure, what is meant by a rarefaction .  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 shows a box abcd. a b d cemergent rayprism 1 ray of light box fig. 7.1  the box contains two identical glass prisms, one of which is shown. light incident on prism 1  undergoes total internal reflection within the glass.  (a) (i) on fig. 7.1, complete the path of the ray of light through prism 1.  [2]   (ii) on fig. 7.1, draw a second prism inside the dashed square, positioned so that the light  reflects inside the glass and emerges from the box as shown. complete the path of the  ray. [2]  (b) select the statements that correctly describe the necessary conditions for the light to undergo  total internal reflection. tick two boxes.    the angle of incidence in the glass is less than the critical angle of light in the glass.    the angle of incidence in the glass is greater than the critical angle of light in the  glass.    the angle of reflection in the glass is equal to the angle of refraction.    the speed of light in the glass is greater than the speed of light in air.    the speed of light in the glass is equal to the speed of light in air.    the speed of light in the glass is less than the speed of light in air.  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 8 a battery is made up of 8 cells in series. each cell has an e.m.f. of 1.5  v.  the battery is connected to one 8.0  \u03c9 resistor for 40 minutes.  (a) calculate the e.m.f. of the battery.  e.m.f. =  ... [1]  (b) calculate the energy transferred from the battery in 40 minutes.  energy =  ... [4]  (c) describe the energy changes that take place during the 40 minutes.  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 9 fig. 9.1 shows a gardener cutting damp grass with a high-powered electric mower. weather-proof socket on walldamp grass gardener electric mower cut in insulation covered with tapesocket designed for indoor useexcess length of cable coiled upextension cable with thin wires plug fig. 9.1  the mower cable has thick wires appropriate for the current of the mower and the correct fuse.  this cable is too short, and so the gardener uses an extension cable with thin wires, intended for  use with a reading lamp. this cable has no fuse.  discuss any dangers of the electrical arrangement shown in fig. 9.1.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [4]  [total: 4]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 10 fig. 10.1 shows a wire ab suspended on two supports so that it is between the poles of a strong  magnet.  the wire ab is loosely held so that it is free to move. a b ns support support magnetpower supply fig. 10.1  describe and explain any movement of the wire ab when there is  (a) a large direct current (d.c.) in the wire in the direction from a to b,  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) a large alternating current (a.c.) in the wire.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 11 (a) state what is meant by   (i) an electric field ,  ...  ... [1]   (ii) the direction of an electric field at a point.  ...  ... [1]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows a positively charged sphere. fig. 11.1   on fig. 11.1, draw the pattern of the electric field in the region around the positively charged  sphere. show the direction of the field with arrows.  [2]  (c) the charge on the sphere in (b) is + 2.0 \u00d7 10\u20135 c. a high resistance wire is now connected  between the sphere and earth. it takes 20 minutes for the sphere to become completely  discharged through the wire.   (i) suggest why there is a current in the wire between the sphere and earth.  ... [1]   (ii) calculate the average current in the wire between the sphere and earth.  average current =  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 12 the nuclear equation below shows the decay of a plutonium (pu) nucleus to an americium (am)  nucleus and a \u03b2-particle. 241 zpu  241 95am + \u03b2  (a) (i) state the quantity that is represented by the letter z in this equation.  ... [1]   (ii) state the numerical value of z.  z = ..[1]  (b) the americium nucleus decays by the emission of an \u03b1-particle into a neptunium (np)  nucleus.   complete the nuclear equation for this decay. 241 95am   [2]  (c) the half-life of this americium nuclide is 470 years. a sample of this nuclide contains  8.0 \u00d7 1014 atoms.   after some time, 6.0 \u00d7 1014 americium atoms have decayed.   calculate the time required for this decay.  time =  ... [3]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/ar) 116042/5 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1785823706* physics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended) october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 fig. 1.1 shows a student travelling down a hill in an unpowered vehicle. fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2 is part of the speed-time graph for the vehicle travelling down the hill. 8 6 4 2 0 0246 8 1 0 time  / sspeed m / sc b a fig. 1.2  (a) (i) state how the graph shows that the acceleration is constant between a and b.  ..  [1]   (ii)  calculate the acceleration between a and b.  acceleration =  .. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (iii) describe how the acceleration changes between b and c.  ..  [1]  (b) use fig. 1.2 to obtain an approximate value for the distance travelled by the vehicle in the first  10 s, as shown on the graph.  distance =  .. [4] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 (a) (i) state an expression for the kinetic energy of an object of mass m that is moving with a  speed v.  ..  [1]   (ii) state and explain whether kinetic energy is a scalar quantity or a vector quantity.  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows  two fairground \u201cbumper\u201d cars. stationary  empty car 50 kgmoving  car 200  kg springs2.5 m / s fig. 2.1   the car with passengers, of total mass 200 kg, is moving in a straight line. it is travelling at  2.5 m / s when it hits a stationary empty car of mass 50 kg.   after the collision, the empty car moves forwards in the same direction at a speed of 4.0 m / s.   for the car with passengers, determine   (i) its momentum when it is travelling at 2.5 m / s,  momentum =  .. [2]   (ii) the speed and direction of its motion immediately after the collision.  speed =  ...  direction:  ... [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (iii) fixed to the front and the back of the cars are large springs.    when the cars collide the springs compress.    the total kinetic energy of the cars after the collision is equal to the total kinetic energy  before the collision.    describe the energy transfers that occur as the cars collide and then separate.  .. .  .. .  ..  [2] [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 fig. 3.1 shows a mercury barometer correctly set up to measure the atmospheric pressure in  mm hg (millimetres of mercury). p tube mercury dish  fig. 3.1  (a) (i) state what is in the space labelled p .  ..  [1]   (ii) on fig. 3.1, mark carefully the length which gives the atmospheric pressure. [1]   (iii) the tube containing mercury is pushed further down into the dish.    state what happens, if anything, to the vertical distance between the mercury surface in  the tube and the mercury surface in the dish.  ..  [1]  (b) another barometer is set up incorrectly. the space p contains some air which exerts a  pressure equivalent to 15 mm hg. the true atmospheric pressure is 760 mm hg.   (i) calculate the reading of atmospheric pressure given by the barometer.  reading =  .  mm hg  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) the tube is now pushed down into the dish so that the volume of the space p is reduced  from 12.0 cm3 to 4.0 cm3.    calculate the new reading of atmospheric pressure given by the barometer.  reading =  .  mm hg  [4] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a small wind turbine drives a generator to provide electricity for an isolated village.  (a) the decrease in kinetic energy of the wind striking the turbine is 16 200 j every second. the  output of the generator is 23 a at 240 v.   calculate the efficiency of the turbine and generator.  efficiency =  .. [4]  (b) when electrical energy is not required, the generator charges batteries that then provide  electricity during periods of no wind.   state the term used to describe the energy stored in the batteries.  ..  [1]  (c) the use of wind turbines on a large scale has environmental and economic impacts.   describe one environmental impact and one economic impact. environmental     .. .  .. . economic  . ..  .. .  .. . [2] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over5 (a) state a comparison of   (i) the arrangement of the molecules in ice and in liquid water, ice  ..  liquid water  . ... [1]   (ii) the movement of the molecules of ice and liquid water. ice  ..  liquid water  . ...  [1]  (b) the mass of the ice on an ice-hockey rink is 51 000 kg.   (i) the density of ice is 920 kg / m3.    calculate the volume of ice on the rink.  volume =  .. [2]   (ii) to form the ice, water at 0 \u00b0c was poured onto the floor of the rink and then frozen. the  specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 \u00d7 105 j / kg.    calculate the quantity of energy removed from the water to form this ice at 0 \u00b0c.  energy =  .. [2]  (c) the temperature of the ice is monitored by a thermometer made up of wires of two different  metals connected to a remote voltmeter. the junction of the two wires is embedded in the ice.   state the name of this type of thermometer.  ..  [1] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20166 (a) (i) the pitch of a sound wave increases.    tick one box to indicate the change that occurs.   amplitude decreases   amplitude increases   frequency decreases   frequency increases  [1]   (ii) the loudness of a sound wave increases.    tick one box to indicate the change that occurs.   amplitude decreases   amplitude increases   frequency decreases   frequency increases [1]  (b) fig. 6.1 shows an astronaut and a spacecraft on the surface of the moon, where there is no  atmosphere. fig. 6.1   a piece of machinery within the spacecraft produces a loud sound of frequency 12 khz.   tick the one box that indicates the reason why the astronaut cannot hear this sound.   the material of the space suit is soundproof.   sound cannot travel through a vacuum.   sound of frequency 12 khz cannot travel through the air in the spacesuit.   sound of frequency 12 khz cannot be heard by any human ear.  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) some training for space travel is carried out under water.   (i) state an approximate value for the speed of sound in water.  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the wavelength in water of a sound wave of frequency 12 khz.  wavelength =  .. [2]  (d) fig. 6.2 shows successive crests of a water wave approaching a narrow gap in a barrier. direction of travel of wave barrier barriergap fig. 6.2   on fig. 6.2, draw three crests of the wave that have just passed through the gap in the barrier.  [3] [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016blank page",
            "13": "13 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over7 (a) in the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a thermistor. [1]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows the connections between two logic gates. a b cd e fig. 7.1   complete the truth table of this combination of logic gates. inputs intermediate  pointoutput abc d e 011 101 110 111 [3]  (c) in the space below, draw a truth table to show the action of a not gate. [2] [total: 6] ",
            "14": "14 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20168 a student draws a diagram to represent the electromagnetic spectrum.  fig. 8.1 is the student\u2019s diagram. visible light gamma-rays x-rays ultrasound radiationinfra-red radiationmicrowaves earthquake waves increasing wavelength fig. 8.1  the student has made two mistakes.  (a) on fig. 8.1, cross out what is wrong and correct the diagram. [2]  (b) the speed of light in an optical fibre is 2.0 \u00d7 108 m / s.   (i) state the speed of light in a vacuum.  speed of light =  .. [1]   (ii) for light in the material from which the optical fibre is made, calculate    1 .  the refractive index,  refractive index =  .. [2]    2 .  the critical angle.  critical angle =  .. [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (iii) fig. 8.2 shows a section of the optical fibre. ray optical  fibre fig. 8.2    light is travelling in the optical fibre.    state the full name of the process that takes place each time the light changes direction.  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20169 fig. 9.1 is a circuit diagram. 55 160 1 30 1 fig. 9.1  the circuit consists of three resistors and three identical 1.5 v cells.  (a) state the total electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the three 1.5 v cells in series.  total e.m.f. =  .. [1]  (b) calculate   (i) the combined resistance of the resistors in parallel,  resistance =  .. [2]   (ii) the total resistance of the circuit,  resistance =  .. [1]   (iii) the current  in the 55 \u03c9 resistor.  current =  .. [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) the currents in the 30 \u03c9, the 55 \u03c9 and the 60 \u03c9 resistors are all dif ferent.   state the resistance of the resistor in which the current is   (i) the largest,  resistance =  .. [1]   (ii) the smallest.  resistance =  .. [1] [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 201610 (a) the size of  the charge on an electron is e. since the charge on an electron is negative, it is  written \u2013 e.   complete the table by writing down the charges, in terms of e, on the particles and radioactive  emissions shown. particle charge proton neutron \u03b1-particle \u03b2-particle \u03b3-ray [3]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows a radioactive source emitting \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays into a vacuum  tube. radioactive source n pole of  strong magnet n block of lead with hole s pole of strong magnettubevacuum s fig. 10.1   the block of lead ensures that the radiation is in a narrow beam when it passes between the  poles of the magnet.   state the direction of any deflection of   (i) the \u03b1-particles,  .. .  ..  [1]",
            "19": "19 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) the \u03b2-particles,  .. .  ..  [1]   (iii) the \u03b3-rays.  .. .  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/42/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 201611 a radioactive nuclide has a half-life of 4.0 days. a sample contains 9.6 \u00d7 108 atoms of the nuclide.  (a) calculate the number of atoms of the nuclide remaining after 12 days.  number =  .. [2]  (b) the count rate from the sample is measured in a laboratory where the background count rate  is 16 counts / minute.   a detector is placed at a fixed distance from the sample. the initial count rate measured by  the detector is 160 counts / minute.   calculate the count rate measured by the detector after 12 days.  count rate =  .. [2] [total: 4] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/fd) 116044/8 \u00a9 ucles 2016  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1030994387* physics  0625/43 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 1 a diver in the sea uses breathing apparatus, which releases gas bubbles.  fig. 1.1 shows bubbles rising to the surface. fig. 1.1  the bubbles start from rest and, at first, they move upwards with a constant acceleration.  fig. 1.2 is an incomplete speed-time graph for one of the bubbles from time t = 0 s until t = 10 s. 001.02.0speed m / s2.5 0.51.5 2.0 4.0 6.0 t / s8.0 10 fig. 1.2  (a) using fig. 1.2, determine the acceleration of the bubble during the first 2.0  s.  acceleration =  ..  [3]  (b) (i) after t = 2.0 s, the acceleration of this bubble decreases gradually until at t = 10 s its  acceleration is zero.    complete fig. 1.2, by sketching a possible continuation of the speed-time graph.  [2]   (ii) state the name given to a negative acceleration.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 2 two mechanics, a and b, are trying to use a two-person spanner (wrench) to loosen a nut on a  large wheel.  fig. 2.1 shows the forces exerted by the two mechanics. 1.2 m1.2 mp500  n force exerted by mechanic a400  n force exerted by mechanic btwo-person spanner (wrench)nutswheel fig. 2.1  mechanic a exerts a force of 500  n at a distance of 1.2  m from nut p. mechanic b exerts a force of  400 n at a distance of 1.2  m on the other side of nut p.  (a) calculate the magnitude and the direction of the resultant moment exerted by the mechanics  on nut p.  magnitude of resultant moment =  ...  direction  ... [4]  (b) mechanic b reverses the direction of the 400  n force that he exerts on the spanner.  mechanic  a continues to exert the same force of 500  n downwards.   (i) calculate the magnitude of the new resultant moment exerted by the mechanics.  magnitude of resultant moment =  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the magnitude of the resultant force now exerted by the mechanics on the spanner.  force =  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 3 (a) (i) state how a vector quantity differs from a scalar  quantity.  ...  ..  [1]   (ii) state and explain whether momentum  is a vector quantity or a scalar quantity.  ...  ..  [1]  (b) a spacecraft of mass 35  kg is travelling in a straight line at a velocity of 1200  m / s. assume no  external forces act on the spacecraft.   calculate   (i) the momentum of the spacecraft,  momentum =  ..  [2]   (ii) the kinetic energy of the spacecraft.  kinetic energy =  ..  [2]  (c) the rocket fuel stored in the moving spacecraft in (b) explodes and the spacecraft splits into  two sections. one section speeds up and the other section slows down.   (i) state what happens to the total momentum.  ..  [1]   (ii) predict and explain what happens to the total kinetic energy.  ...  ..  [2] [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 4 a manometer containing a liquid x, is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply. fig. 4.1  shows the manometer.   liquid xhgas supply fig. 4.1  atmospheric pressure is 9.9  \u00d7 104 pa.  (a) the height h is 0.36  m. the density of liquid x is 840  kg / m3.   calculate   (i) the pressure due to a column of liquid x of height 0.36  m,  pressure =  ..  [2]   (ii) the pressure of the gas supply.  pressure =  ..  [1]  (b) the pressure of the gas supply stays constant.   describe what happens to the liquid levels when   (i) the liquid x is replaced by the same volume of a liquid of greater density,  ...  ..  [2]   (ii) a manometer tube with a slightly smaller area of cross-section, containing an identical  volume of liquid x, is used.  ...  ..  [2] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 5 (a) (i) the temperature of a quantity of air is increased.    describe the effect of this increase in temperature on the air molecules.  ...  ..  [1]   (ii) the temperature of a block of aluminium is decreased.    describe the effect of this decrease in temperature on the density of the aluminium.  explain your answer in terms of the separation of the atoms. effect .. explanation    ..  [2]  (b) a road is covered with a layer of snow. the temperature of the snow is 0  \u00b0c. the specific  latent heat of fusion of snow is 3.3  \u00d7 105 j / kg.   the snow forms a layer of uniform thickness on the road surface.   (i) calculate the power needed to melt 0.12  kg of the snow in 220  s.  power =  ..  [4]   (ii) the snow is melted by solar radiation. in 220  s, exactly 0.12  kg of the snow melts to  produce water at 0  \u00b0c.    the power of the solar radiation incident on each 0.12  kg of snow is greater than the  power calculated in (b)(i) .    suggest one reason why this is so.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows the crests of a wave in the sea as it reaches the entrance to a harbour. direction of travel of wavesea gapharbour wallharbour fig. 6.1   (i) the wave reaches the gap in the harbour wall and passes into the harbour.    on fig. 6.1, draw the first three crests to the right of the harbour wall.  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over   (ii) a wave with a larger wavelength approaches the harbour. fig. 6.2 shows this wave. sea gapharbour wallharbour direction of travel of wave fig. 6.2    this second wave reaches the gap in the harbour wall and passes into the harbour.    on fig. 6.2, draw the first three crests to the right of the harbour wall.  [1]  (b) an earthquake produces two types of wave, p-waves and s-waves.   the vibrations in p-waves are parallel to the direction of travel of the wave.   the vibrations in s-waves are perpendicular to the direction of travel of the wave.   place one tick for each type of wave, to indicate whether it is longitudinal or transverse. type of wave longitudinal wave transverse wave electromagnetic wave p-wave s-wave sound wave ultrasound wave [3] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 7 some of the components of the electromagnetic spectrum, in order of decreasing wavelength, are  shown.  radio waves       microwaves       visible light       ultraviolet radiation       gamma rays  (a) (i) state the speed at which all electromagnetic waves travel in a vacuum.  ..  [1]   (ii) state which of the components of the electromagnetic spectrum shown has the lowest  frequency.  ..  [1]   (iii) two components of the electromagnetic spectrum are not listed above.    state the names of these components. 1.  .. 2.  .. [2]  (b) one application of microwaves is in microwave ovens, which cook food very quickly.   fig. 7.1 shows the inside of the glass door of a microwave oven, covered with a metal mesh. metal mesh fig. 7.1   the metal mesh prevents the microwaves from escaping by reflecting them back into the  oven.   (i) suggest one reason why it is sensible to prevent microwaves from escaping.  ...  ..  [1]   (ii) state one further application of microwaves, other than in microwave ovens.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over 8 for blue light, the refractive index of a particular type of transparent plastic is 1.5.  (a) calculate the critical angle for blue light in this type of plastic.  critical angle =  ..  [2]  (b) a block is made of this type of plastic. blue light travelling in a vacuum is incident on the side  of the block at point p.   fig. 8.1 shows that the angle of incidence is 45\u00b0. 45\u00b0 p fig. 8.1   at p, some of the light is refracted into the block and some of the light is reflected.   (i) the blue light used in this experiment is monochromatic.    state, in terms of a measurable quantity, what is meant by monochromatic .  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the block.  angle of refraction =  ..  [2]   (iii) on fig. 8.1, draw the path taken by the light that passes into the block and the path of  the light that is reflected at p.  [1] [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 9 a circuit consists of a 12  v battery, three resistors and a switch.  fig. 9.1 is the circuit diagram. 12 v 20 \u03c9 24 \u03c928 \u03c9 fig. 9.1  (a) the battery consists of 2.0  v cells in series.   state the number of 2.0  v cells in series in the battery.  number of cells =  ..  [1]  (b) calculate   (i) the combined resistance of the two resistors in series,  resistance =  ..  [1]   (ii) the total resistance of the circuit.  resistance =  ..  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (c) the switch is closed.   calculate   (i) the current in the 20  \u03c9 resistor,  current =  ..  [2]   (ii) the charge that flows through the 20  \u03c9  resistor in 6.0 minutes.  charge =  ..  [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 10 a wire ab hangs loosely between the n pole and the s pole of a strong magnet.  fig. 10.1 shows the arrangement. power supply bsna fig. 10.1  (a) the wire is connected to a power supply.   (i) when the power supply is switched on, there is a very large  direct current (d.c.) in the  wire in the direction from b to a.    describe what happens to the wire as the power supply is switched on.  ...  ..  [2]   (ii) the power supply is adjusted and there is now a large alternating current (a.c.) in the  wire.    describe what happens to the wire.  ...  ..  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (b) the power supply is removed from the circuit and a galvanometer is connected in its place.   (i) the wire is moved quickly to the right, between the poles of the magnet.    explain why the galvanometer registers a current.  ...  ..  [2]   (ii) state what is observed on the galvanometer when the wire is moved to the left at the  same speed as in (b)(i) .  ...  ..  [2]   (iii) state what is observed on the galvanometer when the wire is moved to the right at a  much lower speed than in (b)(i) .  ...  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/43/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 11 (a) state, using nuclide notation, the symbol for   (i) an iron (atomic symbol fe) nucleus which has nucleon number 56 and proton number  26,  ..  [1]   (ii) a platinum (atomic symbol pt) nucleus which contains 78 protons and 118 neutrons.  ..  [2]  (b) (i) a nucleus of plutonium-238 (238 94pu) decays to a uranium (atomic symbol u) nucleus by  the emission of an \u03b1-particle.    write down the nuclear equation that represents this radioactive decay.  ..  [3]   (ii) the half-life of plutonium-238 is 90 years. a sample contains 9.6  \u00d7 1010 atoms  of plutonium-238.    predict the number of plutonium-238 atoms in the sample that decay in 270  years.  number of atoms that decay =  ..  [3] [total: 9] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (rw/fd) 115984/6 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8880412447* physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 in this experiment, you will use a pendulum to determine a value for the acceleration of free fall g.  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 1.1 and 1.2. bobclamp lclamp one complete oscillation  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  a pendulum has been set up for you as shown in fig. 1.1.  (a) adjust the pendulum until its length l = 50.0 cm. the length l is measured to the centre of the  bob.   explain briefly how you avoided a parallax (line of sight) error when measuring the length l.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (b) displace the pendulum bob slightly and release it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one  complete oscillation of the pendulum.   (i) measure the time t for 20 complete oscillations.  t =  ...[1]   (ii) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t =  ...[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (iii) measuring the time for a large number of oscillations, rather than for 1 oscillation, gives a  more accurate value for t.    suggest one practical reason why measuring the time for 200 oscillations, rather than  20 oscillations, may not be suitable.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) (i) calculate t 2.  t 2 =  ...[1]   (ii) calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 4\u03c02l t 2 . give your answer to  a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  g =  . m / s2 [2]  (d) a student checks the value of the acceleration of free fall g in a text book. the value in the  book is 9.8 m / s2.   (i) suggest a practical reason why the result obtained from the experiment may be different.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) suggest two improvements to the experiment. 1.    .. . 2.    .. .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  (a) \u0081 pour 100 cm3 of the hot water provided into beaker a.   \u0081 measure the temperature \u03b8h of the water in beaker a.  \u03b8h =  ...   \u0081 pour 100 cm3 of the cold water provided into beaker b.   \u0081 measure the temperature \u03b8c of the water in beaker b.  \u03b8c =  ...   \u0081 calculate the average temperature  \u03b8av using the equation \u03b8av = \u03b8h + \u03b8c 2 .  \u03b8av =  ...  [3]  (b) add the water from beaker b to the hot water in beaker a. stir briefly.   measure the temperature \u03b8m of the mixture.  \u03b8m =  ...[1]  (c) state one precaution that you took to ensure that the temperature readings are as reliable as  possible.  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (d) empty both beakers.   y ou are provided with    \u0081 a lid, with a hole for the thermometer,   \u0081 some insulating material,   \u0081 two elastic bands.  (i) in the space below, draw a labelled diagram to show how you will use these items to  reduce the loss of thermal energy when the procedure is repeated.  [2]   (ii) using the improvements shown in your diagram, repeat the procedure in parts (a) and  (b).   \u03b8h =  ...  \u03b8c =  ...  \u03b8av =  ...  \u03b8m =  ...  [1]   (iii) comment on whether the improvements made to the apparatus have significantly  changed the value of the temperature \u03b8m. use your results to justify your answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (iv) suggest two conditions that should be kept constant for all parts of this experiment. 1.   2.    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 in this experiment, you will investigate refraction using a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. y ou may refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance. hole angle eyea db e ce fig. 3.1",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (a) \u0081  place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the block  should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd .   \u0081  remove the block and draw a normal at the centre of side ab. label the point e where  the normal crosses ab.   \u0081 draw a line fe to the left of the normal and at an angle i = 20\u00b0 to the normal.   \u0081  place a pin p on the line fe, at a suitable distance from the block for producing an  accurate ray trace.   \u0081  there are vertical lines l1 and l2 drawn on the block. replace the block so that line l1 is  at point e.   \u0081  observe the images of l1 and p through side cd of the block. carefully move the block,  keeping line l1 at point e, until the vertical line l2 and the images of l1 and p appear  one behind the other. this is indicated by the dashed position of the block shown in fig. 3.1.   \u0081 draw a line along side ab of the block to mark its new position.   \u0081 remove the block.  \u0081  measure the angle  \u03b8 between the original position of ab and the new position of ab, as  indicated in fig. 3.1.   \u0081 record i = 20\u00b0 and \u03b8 in table 3.1.   \u0081 repeat the procedure using values of i = 30\u00b0, 40\u00b0, 50\u00b0 and 60\u00b0. table 3.1 i / \u00b0 \u03b8 / \u00b0  [4]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016blank page",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0 (y-axis) against i / \u00b0 (x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ...[2]  (d) referring to your graph, comment on the quality of your measurements.  .. .  .. .[1]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9. [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a student is investigating resistors connected in parallel.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   ammeter   voltmeter   power supply   variable resistor   switch   connecting leads   a box of identical resistors.  plan an experiment to investigate how the combined resistance of the resistors, connected in  parallel, depends on the number of resistors. y ou are not required to carry out this investigation.  y ou should: \u0081  draw a diagram of the circuit you could use to determine the resistance of resistors connected  in parallel (show only two resistors in your diagram)  \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u0081  draw a table or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings.  y ou are not required to enter any readings into the table.  ..   ..   ..   .. ",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/jg) 115584/2 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over *4374149433* physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a load using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. 1.0 nxyqmetre rule bench pivot fig. 1.1  (a) (i)  place the metre rule on the pivot and adjust its position so that the metre rule is as near  as possible to being balanced. the rule must remain at this position on the pivot  throughout the experiment .    record the scale reading of the metre rule at the point where the rule balances on the  pivot.  scale reading = . ..cm [1]   (ii) place the 1.0 n load on the metre rule so that its centre is exactly at the 20.0 cm mark on  the rule.    record the distance x between the 20.0 cm mark and the pivot.  x  =  .cm [1]   (iii)  place the load q on the metre rule and adjust the position of q so that the metre rule is  as near as possible to being balanced.    measure the distance y between the centre of load q and the pivot.  y  =  .cm [1]   (iv) calculate the weight w of the load q using the equation w = kx y, where k = 1.0 n.  w =  ...[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) repeat the procedure using a different, suitably chosen, distance x.  x =  ..cm  y  =  ..cm  w =  ..  [3]  (c) suggest two reasons why your values for w in (a)(iv) and (b) may not be the same. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  (d)  calculate the average wav of your values for w, the weight of load q. give your answer to a  suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  wav =  ...[2]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a resistor.  the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you. r a db cvapower supply wandering lead fig. 2.1  (a) (i) connect the wandering lead to point b in the circuit. switch on.    measure and record the potential difference v1 across the resistor r and the current i1 in  the circuit. switch off.  v1 =  ...  i1 =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate  the resistance r of the resistor r using the equation r = v1 i1.  r  =  ...[1]  (b) connect the wandering lead to point d in the circuit. switch on.   (i) measure and record the potential difference v2 across the resistor r and the current i2 in  the circuit. switch off.  v2 =  ...  i2 =  ...  [2]   (ii) calculate  the resistance r of the resistor r using the equation r = v2 i2.  r  =  ...[1]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) connect points a and d together using a spare lead.   connect the wandering lead to point b in the circuit. switch on.   (i) measure and record the potential difference v3 across the resistor r and the current i3 in  the circuit. switch off.  v3 =  ...  i3 =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate  the resistance r of the resistor r using the equation r = v3 i3.  r  =  ...[1]  (d) connect the wandering lead to point a in the circuit. switch on.   (i) measure and record the potential difference v4 across the resistor r and the current i4 in  the circuit. switch off.  v4 =  ...  i4 =  ...   (ii) calculate  the resistance r of the resistor r using the equation r = v4 i4.  r  =  ...[1]  (e) a student suggests that the resistance r should be constant throughout the experiment.   state whether your results agree with this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .[2]  (f) suggest one practical reason why the value obtained for v1 may be different from your value  in (a)(i)  if the experiment is repeated. y ou are not required to repeat the experiment.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 in this experiment, you will investigate reflection using a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. y ou may refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance. 20\u00b0 bca ln mr y x eyehole fig. 3.1",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (a) \u0081 draw a line 18.0 cm long near the top of your ray-trace sheet. label the line mr.   \u0081  draw a normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the  point at which nl crosses mr with the letter a.   \u0081  draw a line 8.0 cm long from a at an angle of incidence i = 20\u00b0 to the normal, below  mr  and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line b.   \u0081  draw a line 18.0 cm long, 5.0 cm below mr and parallel to mr. label the line xy. label  the point at which nl crosses xy with the letter c.  [2]  (b) \u0081  place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically along the line mr. the mirror should be  approximately centred on point a.   \u0081 place a pin p1 at point b, 8.0 cm from the point a.   \u0081 place a pin p2 on line ab a suitable distance from pin p1.   \u0081  view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 3.1.  place two pins p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and the  images of p2 and p1, all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p3  and p4.  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (c) \u0081  remove the pins and the mirror. draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. label  the point at which this line crosses xy with the letter d.   \u0081 measure, and record in table 3.1, the distance d between c and d, for i = 20\u00b0.   \u0081 when i = 0\u00b0, d = 0.0 cm. these values are already entered in table 3.1.   \u0081  repeat the procedure to determine the distance d for lines with  i values of 30\u00b0, 40\u00b0, 50\u00b0  and 60\u00b0. record all your results in table 3.1. table 3.1 i / \u00b0 d / cm 0 0.0 2030405060  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (d) plot a graph of d / cm ( y-axis) against i / \u00b0 (x-axis).  [4]  (e) suggest one practical difficulty in obtaining accurate readings in this experiment.  .. .  .. .[1]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9.  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a student is investigating whether using a lid reduces the time taken to heat a beaker of water to  boiling point.  the student can use the following apparatus:   thermometer   250 cm3 glass beaker   250 cm3 measuring cylinder   heatproof mat   lid to fit the beaker   clamp, boss and stand.  plan an experiment to investigate whether using a lid reduces the heating time. y ou are not  required to carry out this experiment.  y ou should  \u0081 list the additional apparatus that you would require  \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation  \u0081 state the key variables that you would control  \u0081 draw a table with column headings, to show how you would display your readings; you are not  required to enter any readings in the table  \u0081 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  a diagram is not required but you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ..   .. ",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. blank page"
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (lk/jg) 115856/6 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over *7758375544* physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test october/november 2016  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper additional materials: as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. y ou are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 in this experiment, you will investigate how the surface area of water exposed to the air affects the  rate at which the water cools.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. beaker b is bigger than beaker a. thermometer a b fig. 1.1  (a) \u0081 pour 75 cm3 of hot water into beaker a. \u0081   record, in the first row of table 1.1, the temperature \u03b8 of the water in beaker a and  immediately start the stopclock. \u0081 record, in the table, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30 s, 60 s, 90 s, 120 s,  150 s and 180 s.  [1]  (b) (i) repeat step (a), using beaker b. [1]   (ii) complete the headings and the time column in the table. [2] table 1.1 beaker a beaker b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) describe a precaution that you took to ensure that the temperature readings were as reliable  as possible in the experiment.  .. .  .. .[1]  (d) (i) write a conclusion stating how increasing the surface area of the hot water affects the  rate of cooling of the water. justify your answer by reference to your results.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]   (ii)  suggest a change to the apparatus to make the comparison of the effect of surface area  on cooling a fairer test.    explain why this change is an improvement and state the likely effect on the recorded  temperatures. change  ... ...  .. . explanation  .. ..  .. . effect on temperatures  .. .. .  [3]  (e) students in other classrooms are carrying out the same experiment.   suggest a factor that they should all keep the same if they are to obtain temperature readings  that are similar to your readings.   .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a lamp.  the circuit has been set up for you. carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. power supply slide wire crocodile clip va fig. 2.1  (a) \u0081 switch on. \u0081 adjust the position of the crocodile clip on the slide wire until the potential difference  v across the lamp is 0.2 v. \u0081 record, in table 2.1, the value of the current i shown on the ammeter. \u0081 move the crocodile clip and record values of i for v = 0.8 v, 1.4 v, 2.0 v and 2.6 v. \u0081 switch off.   [2]  (b) calculate, and record in the table, the resistance r of the lamp at each value of v.   use the equation r = v i.  [1] table 2.1 v / v i / a r / \u03c9 0.2 0.8 1.4 2.0 2.6",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c)  plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against v / v (x-axis).  [4]  (d) state what the shape of the graph tells you about the change, if any, in the resistance of the  lamp during the experiment.   .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2] question 2 continues on the next page.",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (e) in this type of experiment, it is possible to change the current and potential difference for the  lamp by using a variable resistor rather than a slide wire.   on fig. 2.2, complete the circuit diagram to show a variable resistor used for this purpose. power supply va fig. 2.2  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overblank page",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length of a converging lens by two different  methods.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated triangleu holensscreen v fig. 3.1  (a) arrange the apparatus as shown in fig. 3.1.   set the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens to 30.0 cm.    place the screen near the lens. move the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is seen on  the screen.   (i) \u0081 measure ho, the height of the illuminated triangle, as indicated in fig. 3.1.  ho =  ... \u0081 measure hi, the height of the image on the screen.  hi =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate a value m for the magnification, using the equation m = hi ho.  m =  ...[2]   (iii) calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation f1 = u m (m + 1).  f1 =  ...[2] ",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (iv) describe one difficulty experienced when measuring the height of the image on the  screen.    suggest an improvement to the apparatus to overcome this difficulty. difficulty  ... ..  .. . improvement  ..   .. .  [2]  (b) adjust the position of the lens so that u = 40.0 cm.   move the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is seen on the screen.   (i) measure the distance v between the lens and the screen, as indicated in fig. 3.1.  v  =  ...[1]   (ii) calculate a second value f2 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation    f2 = u v (u + v ) .  f2 =  ...[1]    (iii) a student suggests that f1 and f2 should be equal.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference  to your results.   .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) state one precaution, not included in your answer to (a)(iv) , that should be taken to make the  experiment reliable.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a student has noticed that different types of paper have different strengths.  plan an experiment which will enable you to compare the strengths of different samples of thin  paper, prepared as shown in fig. 4.1. y ou are not required to carry out the experiment. hookthin paperwooden block adhesive tape fig. 4.1  write a plan for the experiment, including: \u0081 the additional apparatus needed \u0081 instructions for carrying out the experiment, including any precautions you will take \u0081 what you will measure \u0081 how you will present your results \u0081 how you will determine which paper is the strongest \u0081 the variables you will keep the same to ensure the comparison is a fair test.     y ou may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.   ..   .. ",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. ... [7] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (rw/fd) 115986/5 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *3067840024* physics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical october/november 2016  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 a student uses a pendulum to determine a value for the acceleration of free fall g.  figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the apparatus.   bobclamp lclamp one complete oscillation  fig. 1.1 fig. 1.2  (a) on fig. 1.1, measure the length l of the pendulum.  l =   cm [1]  (b) the student adjusts the pendulum until its length l = 50.0 cm. the length l is measured to the  centre of the bob.   explain briefly how the student avoids a parallax (line of sight) error when measuring length l.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (c) the student displaces the pendulum bob slightly and releases it so that it swings.   he measures the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum.  27.8 s t =  ...   (i) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t =  ...[1]   (ii) measuring the time for a large number of oscillations, rather than for one oscillation,  gives a more accurate value for t.    suggest one practical reason why measuring the time for 200 oscillations, rather than  20 oscillations, may not be suitable.  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) calculate t 2.  t 2 =  ...[1]   (iv) calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 4\u03c02l t 2 . give your answer to  a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  g =  . m / s2 [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (d) the student checks the value of the acceleration of free fall g in a text book. the value in the  book is 9.8 m / s2.   (i) suggest a practical reason why the result obtained from the experiment may be different.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (ii) suggest two improvements to the experiment. 1.    .. . 2.    .. .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over2 a student is investigating the cooling of water.  (a) she pours 100 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 \u00b0c hot water fig. 2.1   (i) record the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water, as shown in fig. 2.1.  \u03b8h =  ...[1]   (ii) the student measures the temperature \u03b8c of an equal volume of cold water.  19 \u00b0c \u03b8c =  ...    calculate the average temperature \u03b8av using the equation \u03b8av = \u03b8h + \u03b8c 2 .  \u03b8av =  ...[1]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (b) the student adds the cold water to the hot water. she records the temperature \u03b8m of the  mixture.  46 \u00b0c \u03b8m =  ...   state one precaution that you would take to ensure that the temperature readings are as  reliable as possible.  .. .  .. .[1]  (c) the student is provided with:   \u0081 a lid, with a hole for the thermometer  \u0081 some insulating material  \u0081 two elastic bands.  in the space below, draw a labelled diagram to show how you would use these items to  reduce the loss of thermal energy when the procedure is repeated.  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (d) using the improvements shown in your diagram, the student repeats the procedure and  obtains these readings.  86 \u00b0c \u03b8h =  ...  20 \u00b0c \u03b8c =  ...  53 \u00b0c \u03b8av =  ...  49 \u00b0c \u03b8m =  ...   comment on whether the improvements made to the apparatus have significantly changed  the value of the temperature \u03b8m. use the results to justify your answer.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  (e) suggest two conditions that should be kept constant for all parts, (a) to (d), of this experiment. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 a student is investigating refraction using a transparent block.  fig. 3.1 shows the first stage of the student\u2019s ray trace. abcd  is the outline of the transparent  block. e is at the centre of ab and g is at the centre of cd. anglenormal eyea db e g ce fig. 3.1",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (a) on fig. 3.1, draw a line fe to the left of the normal, above the outline of the block, and at an  angle i = 20\u00b0 to the normal. [1]  (b) \u0081 the student places a pin p on the line fe, at a suitable distance from the block.   \u0081  there is a vertical line l1 drawn on side ab of the block at point e. there is a second  vertical line l2 drawn on side cd at point g.   \u0081  the student observes the images of l1 and p through side cd of the block. he carefully  turns the block to the dashed position in fig. 3.1. in this position the vertical line l2 and  the images of l1 and p appear one behind the other.   (i) on fig. 3.1, mark with a cross (\u00d7) a suitable position for pin p . [1]   (ii) explain briefly the experimental reason for your choice of position for pin p .  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]   (iii) on fig. 3.1, measure the angle \u03b8 and enter it in the first row of table 3.1, on page 10. [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (c) \u0081  the student measures the angle \u03b8 between the original position of ab and the new  position of ab, as indicated in fig. 3.1.   \u0081 he repeats the procedure, using values of i = 30\u00b0, 40\u00b0, 50\u00b0 and 60\u00b0.   \u0081 the readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 i / \u00b0 \u03b8 / \u00b0 2030 2940 4150 5160 59   plot a graph of  \u03b8 / \u00b0 (y-axis) against i / \u00b0 (x-axis).  [4]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (d) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ...[2]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a student is investigating resistors connected in parallel.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   ammeter   voltmeter  power supply  variable resistor  switch  connecting leads  a box of identical resistors.  plan an experiment to investigate how the combined resistance of the resistors, connected in  parallel, depends on the number of resistors.  y ou should:  \u0081  draw a diagram of the circuit you could use to determine the resistance of resistors connected  in parallel (show only two resistors in your diagram),  \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, \u0081  draw a table or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings.  y ou are not required to enter any readings into the table.  ..   .. ",
            "13": "13 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   [7]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20165 a student is investigating the extension of a spring.  (a) fig. 5.1 shows the spring with, and without, a load attached. spring loada b c d fig. 5.1   tick the distance that shows the extension of the spring when the load is added.    a  b  c  d  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (b) the graph shows the student\u2019s results. 001234 load  / n extension  / mm5 5 10 15 20 25   (i) state whether the graph shows that the load and the extension are directly proportional.  justify your answer by reference to the graph. statement   .. justification     .. .  [2]   (ii) the student determines the gradient g of the graph line.   0.1744729 g =  ...    g is numerically equal to a constant k for the spring.    write down the value of the constant k. give your answer to a suitable number of  significant figures and include the unit.  k =  ...[2]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/61/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nh/jg) 115585/3 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over *8820346500* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2016  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 a student is determining the weight of a load using a balancing method.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. it is not drawn to scale. pxyqmetre rule bench pivot fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  (a) the student places the metre rule on the pivot and adjusts its position so that the metre rule  is as near as possible to being balanced. he records the scale reading of the metre rule at the  point where the rule balances on the pivot.     50.2 cm scale reading =  ...   he places a 2.00 n load p on the metre rule so that its centre is exactly at the 20.0 cm mark  on the rule.   (i) use this information to determine the distance x.  x  =  .cm [1]   (ii) explain how you would ensure that the centre of the load p is exactly at the 20.0 cm mark  on the rule. y ou may draw a diagram.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) the student places a load q on the metre rule and adjusts its position so that the metre rule  is as near as possible to being balanced.   he measures the distance y between the centre of load q and the pivot.     15.3 cm y =    calculate the weight w of load q using the equation w = kx y, where k = 2.00 n.  w =  ...[1]  (c) the student repeats the procedure using a different, suitably chosen, distance x.   suggest a suitable distance x.  x =  .cm [1]  (d) the student calculates a new value of w.     4.04 n w =  ...   suggest two reasons why the values determined for w may not be the same. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  (e) calculate the average wav of the values for w, the weight of load q. give your answer to a  suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  wav =  ... n [2]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20162 a student is investigating the resistance of a resistor.  the circuit is shown in fig. 2.1. ab and cd are lengths of resistance wire. r a db cvapower supply wandering lead fig. 2.1  (a) the student connects the wandering lead to point b in the circuit. the readings of potential  difference v1 and current i1 are shown in figs. 2.2 and 2.3. 5 v6789 104321 0 fig. 2.2 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 2.3   (i) record the readings shown on the meters.  v1 =  ...  i1 =  ...  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) calculate the resistance r of the resistor r using the equation r = v1 i1.  r =  ...[1]  (b) the student connects the wandering lead to point d in the circuit and repeats the readings.   she connects points a and d together. she connects the wandering lead to point b and  repeats the readings.   finally, she connects the wandering lead to point a and repeats the readings.   the new values for the resistance r of resistor r that she obtains are:     4.96 \u03c9, 5.12 \u03c9, 4.89 \u03c9 r =  ...   a student suggests that the resistance r should be constant throughout the experiment.   state whether the results agree with this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement   .. justification     .. .  .. .  [2]  (c) (i) name a component that could be used to control the current in the circuit, in place of the  wires ab and cd.  .. .[1]   (ii) in the space below, draw the circuit with this component in place of the wires ab and cd.  show one end of the component connected at a and the wandering lead connected to  the other end of the component.  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 (a) a student hangs a mass on a spring and observes it as it oscillates up and down.   the student wants to find the factors that affect the time taken for one complete oscillation.  she finds that increasing the mass increases the time.   suggest two other variables that the student could investigate. 1.  ...  2.  ...   [2]  (b) another student is investigating the oscillations of the pendulum shown in fig. 3.1. le mass m fig. 3.1   the variables are   \u0081 the length l of the pendulum   \u0081 the mass m of the pendulum bob   \u0081 the amplitude \u03b8 of the swing.   the time taken for one complete oscillation is called the period t.   she carries out three experiments. each experiment investigates the effect on the period t of  changing one variable.",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  her results are shown in tables 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3. table 3.1       table 3.2       table 3.3 l / m t / s 0.200 0.890.400 1.250.600 1.540.800 1.781.000 1.99m / g t / s 50 1.4060 1.4270 1.3980 1.4190 1.38\u03b8 / \u00b0 t / s  4 2.00 6 1.98 8 2.0610 2.0212 1.97   (i) study the results tables and use words from this list to complete the sentences.      increases     decreases     has no effect on     is proportional to   \u0081 an increase in length l  the period t.    \u0081 an increase in mass m  the period t.    \u0081 an increase in amplitude  \u03b8  the period t.  [3]   (ii) suggest a precaution you would take in this pendulum experiment to obtain t values that  are as reliable as possible.  .. .  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20164 a student is investigating whether using a lid reduces the time taken to heat a beaker of water to  boiling point.  the student has the following apparatus available:   thermometer   250 cm3 glass beaker   250 cm3 measuring cylinder   heatproof mat  lid to fit the beaker  clamp, boss and stand.  plan an experiment to investigate whether using a lid reduces the heating time.  y ou should  \u0081 list the additional apparatus that you would require \u0081 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u0081 state the key variables that you would control \u0081  draw a table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings; you are  not required to enter any readings in the table  \u0081 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion. a diagram is not required but you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ..   .. ",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20165 a student is investigating reflection using a plane mirror.  fig. 5.1 shows the student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. 20\u00b0 bca mr y x eye fig. 5.1  (a) the line mr marks the position of the mirror. the student draws another line xy parallel to  line mr. he draws a line from a at an angle of incidence i = 20\u00b0. he labels the end of this line  b. the student places a pin p1 at point b. he places a pin p2 on line ab at a suitable distance  from pin p1 to produce a ray trace.   (i) on fig. 5.1, measure the length l of line ab.  l =  ...[1]   (ii) on fig. 5.1, mark with a cross (x) a suitable position for pin p2. [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) the student views the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in  fig. 5.1. he places two pins p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and  the images of p2 and p1, all appear exactly one behind the other.   he draws a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. he labels the point at which this line  crosses xy with the letter d. he measures the distance d between c and d.   he repeats the procedure using i values of 0\u00b0, 30\u00b0, 40\u00b0, 50\u00b0 and 60\u00b0. the readings are shown  in table 5.1. table 5.1 i / \u00b0 d / cm 0 0.0 20 1.830 2.940 4.250 6.060 8.7   plot a graph of d / cm ( y-axis) against i / \u00b0 (x-axis).  [4]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (c) a student suggests that i should be directly proportional to d.   state whether the graph supports this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  graph. statement   .. justification     .. .  [2]  (d) suggest two practical difficulties in obtaining accurate readings in this experiment.  1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  [total: 10] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w16_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (lk/jg) 115857/4 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over *3359455932* physics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical october/november 2016  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. y ou may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. y ou may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20161 some students are investigating how the surface area of water exposed to the air affects the rate  at which the water cools.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. beaker b is bigger than beaker a. \u2013100 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 090100 110 \u201310 \u20131001 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 060 70 80 90 100 110 abwater surface hot water\u00b0c\u00b0c fig. 1.1   (a) the students pour 75 cm3 of hot water into beaker a and 75 cm3 of hot water into beaker b.  they immediately start a stopclock.    (i) record, in the first row of table 1.1, the initial temperatures \u03b8 of the water in beaker a  and in beaker b, as shown in fig. 1.1. [1]   (ii) the students record the temperatures \u03b8 of the water every 30 s. their readings are  shown in table 1.1.    complete the headings and the time t column in table 1.1. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn overtable 1.1 beaker a beaker b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 80.0 76.078.0 73.576.5 71.075.0 68.573.5 66.572.5 65.0  (b) describe two precautions which should be taken, when using this apparatus, to ensure that  the temperature readings are as reliable as possible in the experiment. 1.  ...   .. . 2.  ...   .. .  [2]  (c) (i) write a conclusion, stating how increasing the surface area of the hot water affects the  rate of cooling of the water. justify your answer by reference to the results.  .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016  (ii)  suggest a change to the apparatus to make the comparison of the effect of surface area  on cooling a fairer test.    explain why the change is an improvement and state the likely effect on the recorded  temperatures. change  ... ...  .. . explanation  .. ..  .. . effect on temperatures  .. .. .  [3]  (d) students in other classrooms are carrying out the same experiment.    suggest a factor that they should keep the same if they are all to obtain similar temperature  readings.   .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over2 some students are determining the focal length of a converging lens by two different methods.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1. illuminated triangle u lensscreen fig. 2.1  (a) a student sets the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens to 20.0 cm. she  moves the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is seen on the screen.   (i) \u0081 measure ho, the height of the illuminated triangle, as shown in fig. 2.2.  ho =  ... \u0081 measure hi, the height of the image on the screen, as shown in fig. 2.3.  hi =  ...  [2] ho                                             h i     fig. 2.2 fig. 2.3   (ii) calculate a value m for the magnification, using the equation m = hi ho.  m =  ...[1]   (iii) calculate a value for the focal length f1 of the lens, using the equation f1 = u m (m + 1) ,  where u = 20.0 cm.  f1 =  ...[2] ",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016  (iv) describe one difficulty that might be experienced when measuring the height of the  image. suggest an improvement to the apparatus to overcome this. difficulty  ... ..  .. . improvement  ..   .. .  [2]  (b) the student adjusts the position of the lens so that u = 40.0 cm.   she moves the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is again seen on the screen.  fig. 2.4 is a scale diagram showing her result. illuminated triangle lensscreen fig. 2.4   (i) \u0081 on fig. 2.4, measure the distance between the lens and the screen.  distance =  ... \u0081 fig. 2.4 is drawn to 1/5th scale. determine the actual distance v between the lens and the screen in the experiment.  v =  ...  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over  (ii) \u0081 calculate a second value f2 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation      f2 = u v (u + v ) , where u = 40.0 cm.  f2 =  ...  \u0081 the student suggests that f1 and f2 should be equal. state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your statement with  reference to the results.   .. ..  .. ..  .. ..  [2]  (c) state one precaution, not included in your answer to (a)(iv) , that you would take to make the  experiment reliable.  .. .  .. .[1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 20163 a student is investigating the resistance of a lamp.  he is using the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. power supply slide wire crocodile clip va fig. 3.1  (a) the student connects the crocodile clip on the slide wire to give particular values of the  potential difference v across the lamp. he measures the current i in the lamp for each  position.   figs. 3.2 to 3.6 show the ammeter readings for values of v = 0.5 v, 1.0 v, 1.5 v, 2.0 v and 2.5 v,  respectively.   read, and record in table 3.1, the value of i for each value of potential difference v. record  each value to 2 significant figures. 00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5a 00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5a 00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5a 00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5a 00.10.2 0.3 0.4 0.5afig. 3.2 fig. 3.3 fig. 3.4 fig. 3.5 fig. 3.6  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over (b) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance r of the lamp at each value of v.    use the equation r = v i.  [1] table 3.1 v / v i / a r / \u03c9 0.51.01.52.02.5  (c)  plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against v / v (x-axis).  [4]  (d) state what the shape of the graph tells you about the change, if any, in the resistance of the  lamp during the experiment.   .. .  .. .  .. .  .. .[2]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 (e) in this type of experiment, it is possible to change the current and potential difference for the  lamp by using a variable resistor rather than a slide wire.   on fig. 3.7, complete the circuit diagram to show a variable resistor used for this purpose. power supply va fig. 3.7  [2]   [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016 [turn over4 a student has noticed that different types of paper have different strengths.  plan an experiment which will enable you to compare the strengths of different samples of thin  paper, prepared as shown in fig. 4.1. hookthin paperwooden block adhesive tape fig. 4.1  write a plan for the experiment, including: \u0081 the additional apparatus needed \u0081 instructions for carrying out the experiment, including any precautions you will take \u0081 what you will measure \u0081 how you will present your results \u0081 how you will determine which paper is the strongest \u0081 the variables you will keep the same to ensure the comparison is a fair test.  y ou may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.  ..   .. ",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/16 \u00a9 ucles 2016permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every reasonable  effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly  been included, the publisher will  be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to do wnload at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   .. ... [7] [total: 7]"
        }
    },
    "2017": {
        "0625_m17_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib17 03_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over       *9265727117* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  february/march 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  1 the diagram shows the height of a stack of identical coins.    2.40  cmstack of coins     what is the thickness of one coin?  a 0.20  mm b 2.0  mm c 0.24  cm d 2.0  cm     2 in a laboratory, a ball is dropped in a vacuum and falls 200  cm.    0 cm 50 cm 100  cm 150  cm 200  cmball rule     which statement describes the acceleration of the ball?  a it is greater at 10  cm than at 200  cm.  b it is greatest at 200  cm.  c it is smaller at 50  cm than at 100  cm.  d it is the same value at 50  cm as at 150  cm.    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17 [turn over  3 a man stands by a railway track.        a train travelling at 40  m / s takes 2.0  s to pass the man.    what is the length of the train?  a 20  m b 38  m c 40  m d 80  m      4 which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the earth is correct?  a a balance can only be used to compare weights, not masses.  b heavy objects always have more mass than light ones.  c large objects always have more mass than small ones.  d mass is a force but weight is not.     5 a stone has a weight of 5.7  n.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the mass of the stone?  a 0.57  kg b 5.7  kg c 57  kg d 570  kg     6 the block of metal shown has a mass of 240  g.    5.0 cm3.0 cm4.0 cm     what is the density of the metal?  a 0.25  g / cm3 b 4.0  g / cm3 c 16  g / cm3 d 14  400  g / cm3     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  7 a car engine causes a forward force of 100  kn to act on the car. the total resistive force on the  car is 20  kn.    what is the resultant force on the car?  a 5.0  kn b 60  kn c 80  kn d 120  kn     8 a student sets up the apparatus shown in the diagr am to find the centre of mass of the card.    cork standpin or nail card string bobsmall hole     the student makes sure that the card, the string and the bob are all at rest.    what should the student do next?  a mark a horizontal line on the card level with the middle of the string.  b mark the line of the string on the card.  c pull the bob on the string to one side and release it.  d replace the bob with a heavier bob.    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17 [turn over  9 a man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.    escalator lift    the escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. the useful work done  against gravity is w. the useful power developed is p.    the lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.    how much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is developed by the lift?     useful work  done against  gravity by lift useful power  developed by lift  a more than w less than p  b more than w p  c w less than p  d w p    10 the engine of a motor vehicle develops a large amount of power.    which statement is correct?  a the driving force acting on the vehicle must be large.  b the engine must have a very large volume.  c the engine must transfer large amounts of energy each second.  d the vehicle must be very fast.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  11 the diagrams show two mercury barometers. the right-hand diagram shows a tube of larger  diameter. there is a vacuum above the mercury in both tubes.    which labelled position on the right-hand tube shows the mercury level in the right-hand tube?    mercury glass tubesa  b  c  d       12 the diagram shows four solid objects resting on a horizontal surface. the objects all have the  same  weight, and are drawn to the same scale.    which object exerts the least pressure on the surface?    a sphereb cylinderc cubed cone     13 on a hot day, the pressure of the air in a car tyre is greater than on a cold day.    why is the pressure greater on a hot day?  a the air molecules strike each other more frequently.  b the air molecules strike each other with greater force.  c the air molecules strike the tyre walls more frequently.  d the number of air molecules in the tyre increases.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17 [turn over  14 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright light shines from the side.    when looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,  jerky manner.    bright light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains     15 when a thermometer is calibrated, the fixed points are marked.    what are fixed points?  a all the marks on the temperature scale which cannot be removed  b all the marks of the temperature scale  c the lowest and highest temperatures shown on the thermometer  d two temperatures of known value which are easily reproduced     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  16 which statement defines the thermal capacity (heat capacity) of a solid body?  a the energy needed to melt the body without a change in temperature  b the energy needed to raise the temperature of the body by one degree celsius  c the increase in the volume of the body when its temperature is raised by one degree celsius  d the total amount of internal energy in the body      17 a substance can exist in three different states: solid, liquid or gas.    each of the two statements below describes a change of state.    change 1 molecules move closer together but continue to travel throughout the  substance.  change 2 molecules stop travelling throughout the substance and just vibrate about  fixed positions.    which changes of state do these statements describe?     change 1 change 2  a condensation melting  b condensation solidification  c solidification condensation  d solidification melting      18 the diagram shows the gap between a hot surface and a cold surface. the gap can contain air,  solid iron, a vacuum or liquid water.    gapcold hot    which row shows whether heat can be transferred between the surfaces by conduction and  convection?      conduction convection  a air (gas) yes no  b iron (solid) yes no  c vacuum no yes  d water (liquid) yes no     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17 [turn over  19 ice is trapped by a piece of wire gauze at the bottom of a tube containing water. the water at the  top of the tube boils before the ice at the bottom of the tube melts.    gentle heatingwater wire gauze ice    why does this happen?  a convection currents are circulating throughout the water.  b ice is a poor emitter of thermal energy.  c water is a poor conductor of thermal energy.  d wire gauze is a good conductor of thermal energy.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  20 in a shallow tank, a water wave moves towards a barrier with a narrow gap.    barrier water wave     which diagram shows the wave beyond the barrier?    ab cd      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17 [turn over  21 a ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass block.    air glassnormal direction of ray of light     which row describes how the speed and the direction of the ray of light change when it enters the  glass?     speed in glass direction in glass  a decreases closer to the normal  b decreases further from the normal  c increases closer to the normal  d increases further from the normal      22 a boy sees a fish in a lake.    which labelled path is taken by the light travelling from the fish to the boy\u2019s eye?    air water ab c d      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  23 the points labelled f are the principal foci of a lens. a beam of parallel light is incident on the  lens.    which diagram shows the path of the light after it passes through the lens?    a ff b ff c ff d ff       24 what is the main type of radiation given out by a campfire?  a infra-red  b microwave  c ultraviolet  d x-ray    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17 [turn over  25 a student stands a few hundred metres away from a wall and shouts. he hears a faint echo.    which statement is correct?  a the sound waves returning are quiet because they have a reduced frequency.  b the sound waves returning are quiet because they have a reduced wavelength.  c the sound waves returning to the student are longitudinal.  d the sound waves returning to the student are transverse.     26 which statement about ultrasound is correct?  a it is produced by a rapidly vibrating source.  b it is uncomfortable to human ears.  c its frequency must be greater than 300  khz.  d it travels the fastest in a vacuum.    27 a small compass is placed close to a strong bar magnet, the same distance from each end.    which diagram shows the direction in which the compass needle points?    na snb snc snd scompass compass compass compass       28 a student wishes to magnetise two steel bars x and y.    she places bar x in a coil connected to a d.c. power supply.    she places bar y parallel to a magnetic field and hammers it.    which bars become magnetised?  a x and y  b x only  c y only  d neither x nor y     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  29 which particles move in a metal to cause an electric current?  a electrons  b neutrons  c nucleons  d protons      30 the diagrams represent four copper wires.    which wire has the greatest resistance?    10 mm 1 mm 2  mm 1  mm 2  mm10 mm20 mm 20 mma b c d       31 an air-conditioning unit, a lamp and an electric fire all receive electrical energy from the mains  supply.    from which of these devices is all this energy eventually transferred to the surroundings?     air- conditioning  unit lamp electric  fire   a \u0013 \u0013 \u0013 key  b \u0013 \u0017 \u0013 \u0013= all energy transferred to surroundings  c \u0017 \u0013 \u0013 \u0017= not all energy transferred to surroundings  d \u0017 \u0017 \u0013     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17 [turn over  32 in the circuits shown, each of the resistors has a resistance of 1.0  \u03c9.    which circuit has the greatest resistance?    a b c d      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  33 the diagram shows an electric circuit.    v     the light falling on the light-dependent resistor (ldr) increases in brightness.    what happens to the resistance of the ldr, the current in the fixed resistor and the reading on  the voltmeter?     resistance of  ldr current in  fixed resistor reading on  voltmeter  a decreases increases decreases  b decreases increases increases  c increases decreases decreases  d increases decreases increases    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17 [turn over  34 the diagram shows two linked circuits to control when a bell is switched on.        the conditions are altered and only one pair of conditions causes the bell to ring.    which pair causes the bell to ring?  a bright light and high temperature  b bright light and low temperature  c dim light and high temperature  d dim light and low temperature     35 in this circuit, a component at x automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a  fault.    electrical supply x     which row indicates components that are suitable?     circuit  breaker fuse switch   a \u0013 \u0013 \u0013 key  b \u0013 \u0013 \u0017 \u0013= suitable  c \u0013 \u0017 \u0013 \u0017= not suitable  d \u0017 \u0013 \u0017     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  36 the diagram shows a simple transformer with an input of 240  v and an output of 40  v.    there are 600 turns on the primary coil.    output input 600  turns 240  v4 0  vprimary coil secondary coil     how many turns are there on the secondary coil?  a 100 b 320 c 400 d 3600     37 a wire is placed between the poles of a horseshoe magnet. there is a current in the wire in the  direction shown, and this causes a force to act on the wire.    n s wirecurrentmagnet force    three other arrangements p, q and r of the wire and magnet are set up as shown.    s nn ss npqr magnet turned around current direction reversed current direction reversed and magnet turned around    which arrangements cause a force in the same direction as the original arrangement?  a p, q and r b p and q only c p only d r only      38 the nuclide notation for an isotope of silver is ag109 47 .    how many nucleons are in a nucleus of this isotope?  a 47 b 62 c 109 d 156     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  39 a radioactive substance emits radiation at a rate of 600 emissions per second. four hours later, it  emits radiation at a rate of 300 emissions per second.    what is the half-life of the substance and what is the rate of emission after a further four hours?     half-life  / hours rate of emission after  a further four hours  / emissions per second  a 2 0  b 2 150  c 4 0  d 4 150      40 a radioactive source is placed near a detector.    the radiation arriving at the detector from the source is measured for 10 minutes with different materials placed between the source and the detector.    materials placed here detector(geiger-m\u00fcller tube) radioactivesource     material between  source and detector radiation detected  / counts  none 5626  sheet of paper 5629  thick sheet of aluminium 2226  thick sheet of lead 255    which types of radiation are emitted by the source?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays  b \u03b1-particles only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays  d \u03b2-particles only     ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/f/m/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_m17_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib17 03_0625_22/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over       *9900917881* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  february/march 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17  1 the diagram shows the height of a stack of identical coins.    2.40  cmstack of coins     what is the thickness of one coin?  a 0.20  mm b 2.0  mm c 0.24  cm d 2.0  cm     2 four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.    4.0 kgp 1.0 m3.0 kgq 2.0 m2.0 kgr 3.0 m1.0 kgs 4.0 m ground     air resistance may be ignored.    which statement about the balls is correct?  a ball p has the greatest acceleration.  b balls q and r take the same time to fall to the ground.  c the acceleration of ball r is half the acceleration of ball p.  d ball s has the greatest average speed.     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17 [turn over  3 an object is travelling in a straight line. the diagram is the speed-time graph for the object.    at which labelled point is the object accelerating at a changing rate?    b 0 0speed m / s time  / sac d       4 which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the earth is correct?  a a balance can only be used to compare weights, not masses.  b heavy objects always have more mass than light ones.  c large objects always have more mass than small ones.  d mass is a force but weight is not.    5 an object in a space probe above the earth weighs 3.5  n. the gravitational field strength at the  height of the space probe is 7.0  n / kg.    the gravitational field strength on the earth\u2019s surface is 10  n / kg.    what are the mass and the weight of the object on the earth\u2019s surface?     mass  / kg weight  / n  a 0.50 3.5  b 0.50 5.0  c 2.0 3.5  d 2.0 20    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17  6 a skydiver jumps from a stationary helicopter and reaches a steady vertical speed. she then  opens her parachute.    which statement about the falling skydiver is correct?  a as her parachute opens, her acceleration is upwards.  b as she falls at a steady speed with her parachute open, her weight is zero.  c when she accelerates, the resultant force on her is zero.  d when she falls at a steady speed, air resistance is zero.     7 a car moves in a circular path as it turns a corner on a horizontal road.    the car moves at constant speed.    path of ca rcar direction of travel     which description of the forces acting on the car is correct?  a all the forces are balanced as the car is moving at constant speed.  b the forces are unbalanced and the resultant force acts away from the centre of the circle.  c the forces are unbalanced and the resultant force acts towards the centre of the circle.  d the forces are unbalanced and the resultant force is in the direction of travel of the car.     8 a moving body undergoes a change of momentum.    what is a unit for change of momentum?  a n  m b n / m c n s d n / s     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17 [turn over  9 a man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.    escalator lift    the escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. the useful work done  against gravity is w. the useful power developed is p.    the lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.    how much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is developed by the lift?     useful work  done against  gravity by lift useful power  developed by lift  a more than w less than p  b more than w p  c w less than p  d w p    10 a 40  w lamp wastes 34  j of energy every second by heating its surroundings.    what is the efficiency of the lamp?  a 0.15% b 15% c 18% d 85%      11 a column of liquid has height h, mass m and density \u03c1. the gravitational field strength is g.    which expression gives the pressure due to the column of liquid?  a h\u03c1 b m\u03c1 c mgh d \u03c1 gh     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17  12 the diagrams show two mercury barometers. the right-hand diagram shows a tube of larger  diameter. there is a vacuum above the mercury in both tubes.    which labelled position on the right-hand tube shows the mercury level in the right-hand tube?    mercury glass tubesa  b  c  d       13 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright light shines from the side.    when looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,  jerky manner.    bright light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17 [turn over  14 at \u201339  \u00b0c, liquid mercury solidifies without a change of temperature.    which row shows whether the mercury absorbs or releases energy and what happens to the  bonds between the mercury atoms?     energy bonds between  atoms  a absorbed stronger  b absorbed weaker  c released stronger  d released weaker    15 a model thermometer consists of a flask of coloured water and a stopper with a glass tube  passing through it, as shown.    glass tube stopper coloured wate rflasktemperature scale     the model thermometer can be changed in one of two ways.    \u25cf the flask can be replaced with a larger one full of coloured water.  \u25cf the glass tube can be replaced with one with a larger internal diameter.    which statement is correct?  a only using a larger flask increases the sensitivity.  b only using a wider tube increases the sensitivity.  c using a larger flask increases the sensitivity and using a wider tube increases the sensitivity.  d neither using a larger flask nor using a wider tube increases the sensitivity.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17  16 a metal has a specific heat capacity of 360  j / (kg  \u00b0c). an object made of this metal has a mass of  2.0  kg.    what is the thermal capacity (heat capacity) of the object?  a 180  j / \u00b0c b 180  j / kg c 720  j / \u00b0c d 720  j / kg      17 in which type of substance are free electrons involved in the transfer of thermal energy?  a all liquids  b all solids  c metals only  d plastics only      18 four objects, made of the same material and having the same mass, are at the same  temperature. the objects have different surfaces and different surface areas.    which object emits infra-red radiation at the greatest rate?     surface surface area  a dull large  b dull small  c shiny large  d shiny small     19 a person uses a surfboard to ride every 30th wave crest towards the beach. the wave crest  travels at a speed of 1.6  m / s and the distance between each wave crest is 24  m.    how many wave crests does the person surf in one hour?  a 1 b 2 c 8 d 450    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17 [turn over  20 in a shallow tank, a water wave moves towards a barrier with a narrow gap.    barrier water wave     which diagram shows the wave beyond the barrier?    ab cd       21 light passes along an optical fibre.    what happens to the light within the fibre?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c refraction  d total internal reflection     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17  22 the points labelled f are the principal foci of a lens. a beam of parallel light is incident on the  lens.    which diagram shows the path of the light after it passes through the lens?    a ff b ff c ff d ff       23 which statement about sound waves is correct?  a they are able to travel through a vacuum.  b they are able to travel through solids.  c they are transverse waves.  d they travel at the same speed in all substances.     24 which statement about ultrasound is correct?  a it is produced by a rapidly vibrating source.  b it is uncomfortable to human ears.  c its frequency must be greater than 300  khz.  d it travels the fastest in a vacuum.   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17 [turn over  25 a small compass is placed close to a strong bar magnet, the same distance from each end.    which diagram shows the direction in which the compass needle points?    na snb snc snd scompass compass compass compass      26 a bar magnet can be demagnetised by hammering it for a long time or by slowly removing it from  a coil connected to a power supply.    which row completes the descriptions of how these processes are carried out?     hammering bar magnet  for a long time with slowly removing bar magnet from a coil connected to  a magnet aligned e-w a d.c. power supply  b magnet aligned e-w an a.c. power supply  c magnet aligned n-s a d.c. power supply  d magnet aligned n-s an a.c. power supply    27 which particles move in a metal to cause an electric current?  a electrons  b neutrons  c nucleons  d protons    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17  28 the diagrams represent four copper wires.    which wire has the greatest resistance?    10 mm 1 mm 2  mm 1  mm 2  mm10 mm20 mm 20 mma b c d        29 an air-conditioning unit, a lamp and an electric fire all receive electrical energy from the mains  supply.    from which of these devices is all this energy eventually transferred to the surroundings?     air- conditioning  unit lamp electric  fire   a \u0013 \u0013 \u0013 key  b \u0013 \u0017 \u0013 \u0013= all energy transferred to surroundings  c \u0017 \u0013 \u0013 \u0017= not all energy transferred to surroundings  d \u0017 \u0017 \u0013     30 four circuits are set up.    in which circuit does the ammeter show the greatest reading?    2.0 \u03c9 3.0 \u03c9a12 va 2.0 \u03c9 3.0 \u03c9a12 vb 2.0 \u03c9 3.0 \u03c9a12 vc 2.0 \u03c9 3.0 \u03c9a12 vd      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17 [turn over  31 the diagram shows an electric circuit.    v     the light falling on the light-dependent resistor (ldr) increases in brightness.    what happens to the resistance of the ldr, the current in the fixed resistor and the reading on  the voltmeter?     resistance of  ldr current in  fixed resistor reading on  voltmeter  a decreases increases decreases  b decreases increases increases  c increases decreases decreases  d increases decreases increases    32 the diagram shows two linked circuits to control when a bell is switched on.        the conditions are altered and only one pair of conditions causes the bell to ring.    which pair causes the bell to ring?  a bright light and high temperature  b bright light and low temperature  c dim light and high temperature  d dim light and low temperature   ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17  33 the truth table for a logic gate is shown.    input 1 input 2 output  0 0 1  0 1 0  1 0 0  1 1 0    which type of logic gate is it?  a and b nor c not d or      34 in this circuit, a component at x automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a  fault.    electrical supply x     which row indicates components that are suitable?     circuit  breaker fuse switch   a \u0013 \u0013 \u0013 key  b \u0013 \u0013 \u0017 \u0013= suitable  c \u0013 \u0017 \u0013 \u0017= not suitable  d \u0017 \u0013 \u0017      ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17 [turn over  35 the diagram shows a simple transformer with an input of 240  v and an output of 40  v.    there are 600 turns on the primary coil.    output input 600  turns 240  v4 0  vprimary coil secondary coil     how many turns are there on the secondary coil?  a 100 b 320 c 400 d 3600      36 the diagram shows a current-carrying wire. the wire is at 90 \u00b0 to a magnetic field. the direction of  the magnetic field is into the page.    wiremagnetic field into the pagecurrent     a force acts on the wire due to the current and the magnetic field.    in which direction does the force act?  a into the page  b out of the page  c towards the bottom of the diagram  d towards the top of the diagram     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-par ty owned material protected by copyright is  included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holder s, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge asse ssment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/f/m/17  37 a radioactive substance emits radiation at a rate of 600 emissions per second. four hours later, it  emits radiation at a rate of 300 emissions per second.    what is the half-life of the substance and what is the rate of emission after a further four hours?     half-life  / hours rate of emission after  a further four hours  / emissions per second  a 2 0  b 2 150  c 4 0  d 4 150      38 the nuclide notation for an isotope of silver is ag109 47 .    how many nucleons are in a nucleus of this isotope?  a 47 b 62 c 109 d 156     39 the equation represents an isotope of radium ra decaying to an isotope of radon rn with the  emission of particle x.    ra226 88  \u2192 rn222 86  + x    what is particle x?  a e0 1\u2212 b h1 1 c he4 2 d n1 0      40 an atomic nucleus decays by one or more radioactive decay processes.    what causes the proton number to decrease  by 1?  a \u03b1-decay followed by \u03b2-decay  b \u03b1-decay only  c \u03b2-decay followed by \u03b3-decay  d \u03b2-decay only      "
        },
        "0625_m17_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nh/sw) 127036/8 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn over *9619798250* physics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  february/march 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of a car varies over a short time. 00481216 4 8 12 16 time  / sspeed m / s 20 24 32 28abc d e fig. 1.1  (a) different parts of the journey are labelled  a, b, c, d and e.   (i) state a part of the graph that shows the car at rest.  ... [1]   (ii) state a part of the graph that shows the car moving with constant speed.  ... [1]   (iii) during part of the journey the car decelerates.    calculate the distance travelled by the car when it is decelerating.  distance travelled =  ... m [3]  (b) another car accelerates, from rest, starting at time 0  s. this car has a constant acceleration.  its speed at 20  s is 10  m / s.   on fig. 1.1, draw a line to show this motion.  [2]  (c) describe, using fig. 1.1, how you can decide which car has the greater acceleration.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 a student wants to find the density of a small stone. fig. 2.1 shows a measuring cylinder, containing  water, placed on a balance. measuring cylinder waterreading k balance reading l fig. 2.1  the stone is placed in the water as shown in fig. 2.2.   reading m stone reading n fig. 2.2  (a) the student determines the mass of the stone and its volume.   use the labels k, l, m and n from fig. 2.1 and fig. 2.2 to show how to calculate the mass  and the volume of the stone.     mass of stone = reading   minus reading      volume of stone = reading   minus reading   [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (b) the student obtained the following values.          78.0 g mass of stone =  ...          30.0 cm3  volume of stone =  ...   calculate the density of the stone. include the unit.  density =  ...  unit ... [3]  [total: 5]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows a beam on a pivot. the beam is balanced at its centre of mass. benchpivotbeam fig. 3.1  (a) explain the meaning of centre of mass .  ...  ... [1]  (b) fig. 3.2 shows a load of 2.5  n on one side of the beam. the beam is balanced by a load of  1.5 n suspended by a thin string. 18 cm x load of 2.5 n load of 1.5 nstring fig. 3.2  (not to scale)   (i) calculate the distance x from the pivot to the string.  distance from pivot =  . cm [3]   (ii) calculate the mass of the 2.5  n load.  mass =  .. kg [3]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 nuclear power stations produce a useful form of energy. fig. 4.1 shows part of a nuclear reactor. cold water from turbines pumpsteam to drive turbines control rod fuel rodconcrete casing fig. 4.1  (a) state the name of the process that releases energy in the nuclear reactor.   ... [1]  (b) suggest a suitable radioactive material used for the fuel rods.  ... [1]  (c) below are four statements that describe the operation of a nuclear power station.   they are not in the correct order.   j the generator produces electricity.   k the energy is used to boil water.   l the nuclei split, releasing energy.   m the steam drives a turbine.   place the statements in the correct order.            [3]  (d) the nuclear reactor is contained in a very thick concrete casing. suggest why.  ...  ... [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (e) suggest one advantage  and one disadvantage  of a nuclear power station compared with a  wind turbine. advantage  .  ... disadvantage    ...  [2]  (f) wind turbines use a renewable source of energy.   state the name of another renewable source of energy.  ... [1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 5 the bucket at the front of a tractor is used to push fence posts down into the ground, as shown in  fig. 5.1. bucket tractor fence post fig. 5.1  the area of each post in contact with the ground is 100  cm2. when the bucket pushes a post, the  downward force from the post on the ground is 6500  n.  (a) calculate the pressure that the post exerts on the ground.  pressure =  ... n / cm2 [3]  (b) a farmer cuts the bottom of one of the posts to make it more pointed. the bucket applies the  same force as before.   explain the effect this has on the pressure exerted by the post on the ground.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 6 water can exist as ice, liquid water and steam. fig. 6.1 represents the arrangement of the  molecules in the three forms of water. steamliquid waterice fig. 6.1  (a) each diagram in fig. 6.2 shows a change of state.    add the correct label for each change. the first has been done for you. condensation ... ... ...  [3] fig. 6.2  (b) some gas is heated at constant pressure.   describe what happens to the molecules of gas as the temperature increases.  ...  ... [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (c) fig. 6.3 shows a metal bar. width lengthheight fig. 6.3   when the metal bar is heated, the bar expands.   identify the dimensions that increase in size when the bar is heated.   tick (3) all boxes that apply.     length     width     height  [1]  (d) state one use and one disadvantage  of the expansion of materials when they are heated. use   disadvantage    [2]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 represents a wave on a string. position of string without a wave p q r fig. 7.1  (a) complete the sentences about the wave. use words from the box.   amplitude      energy      frequency      matter      oscillation      wavelength   the wave transfers .  .   the number of waves per second passing point  p is the .  .   the distance between p and q is the .  .   the distance between points q and r is the .  .  [4]  (b) the wave on the string is an example of a transverse wave.   explain how a transverse wave differs from a longitudinal wave.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 a cruise ship has a firework display near a cliff as shown in fig. 8.1. 1.0 kmexploding firework 1.0 kmcliff cruise ship container ship fig. 8.1 (not to scale)  a firework is sent into the air from the cruise ship. the firework explodes with a bright flash of light  and a loud bang.  (a) people on a container ship see the flash before they hear the bang.   explain why.  ...  ... [2]  (b) the people on the container ship hear two bangs. they hear the second bang shortly after  the first bang.   (i) explain why they hear two bangs.  ...  ... [2]   (ii) the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s. the firework explodes at a distance of 1.0  km from  the container ship.    1. calculate the time for the first bang to reach the people on the container ship.  time =   s [3]    2. estimate the time delay between hearing the first bang and second bang.  time =   s [1]  [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 9 fig. 9.1 shows an electric heating element in a beaker containing water. the heating element is  switched on. water heating elementbeaker fig. 9.1  explain how thermal energy is transferred throughout the water in the beaker. use ideas about  density and expansion in your answer.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [5]  [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 fig. 10.1 shows two mirrors placed at right angles to each other. a ray of light is incident on  mirror  a, which is then reflected towards mirror b. 20\u00b0 mirror bmirror a fig. 10.1  (a) determine the angle of incidence of the ray on mirror a.  angle of incidence =  ... [1]  (b) (i) the ray is also reflected from mirror b.    on fig. 10.1, continue the path of the ray of light. show the position of the reflected ray  and the normal to mirror b.  [2]   (ii) on fig. 10.1, use the letter r to label the angle of reflection from mirror b . [1]  (c) state the law you used to complete the ray diagram.  ... [1]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 11 an electrical conductor is placed between the poles of a magnet as shown in fig. 11.1. electrical conductor n poles pole0 fig. 11.1  (a) state a material from which an electrical conductor can be made.  ... [1]  (b) (i) a centre-zero meter measures the electromotive force (e.m.f.) across the conductor.    state the unit of e.m.f.  unit =  ... [1]   (ii) state what, if anything, is shown by the centre-zero meter when the conductor is moved.     \u2022 horizontally, from side-to-side, between the poles of the magnet,      \u2022 vertically, up-and-down, between the poles of the magnet.    [3]  (c) state two factors that affect the size of the e.m.f. across the conductor. 1   2    [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 12 this question is about the structure of an atom.  (a) an atom contains three types of particle.   complete the table with the name of each type of particle. particle charge 0 +1 \u20131  [3]  (b) draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of a lithium atom, 7 3li.  [4]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_m17_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (lk/fd) 125811/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *0342021651* physics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  february/march 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 (a) fig. 1.1 shows the axes used to plot distance-time graphs. distance time 00 fig. 1.1   on fig. 1.1, draw graphs for an object that is   (i) moving with constant speed, labelling the graph a,   (ii) moving with decreasing speed, labelling the graph b.  [2]  (b) fig. 1.2 shows the axes used to plot speed-time graphs. speed time 00 fig. 1.2   on fig. 1.2, draw graphs for an object that is   (i) moving with constant acceleration, labelling the graph s,   (ii) moving with increasing acceleration, labelling the graph t.  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) a plane is at rest on an airport runway. the brakes of the plane are released and the engine  of the plane provides a constant accelerating force.   using the following data, calculate the take-off speed of the plane. ignore any resistive forces.   constant forward force = 56  000 n   mass of plane = 16  000 kg   time of travel along runway = 16  s  speed =  ... [4]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 (a) explain why momentum is a vector quantity.  ... [1]  (b) the crumple zone at the front of a car is designed to collapse during a collision. crumple zoneconcrete wall fig. 2.1   in a laboratory test, a car of mass 1200  kg is driven into a concrete wall, as shown in fig.  2.1.   a video recording of the test shows that the car is brought to rest in 0.36  s when it collides  with the wall. the speed of the car before the collision is 7.5  m / s.   calculate   (i) the change of momentum of the car,  change of momentum =  ... [2]   (ii) the average force acting on the car.  average force =  ... [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) a different car has a mass of 1500  kg. it collides with the same wall and all of the energy  transferred during the collision is absorbed by the crumple zone.   (i) the energy absorbed by the crumple zone is 4.3 \u00d7 105 j. show that the speed of the car  before the collision is 24  m / s.  [2]   (ii) suggest what would happen to the car if it is travelling faster than 24  m / s when it hits   the wall.   ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 (a) a stationary object is acted upon by a number of forces.   state the conditions which must  be true if the object   (i) does not accelerate,  ... [1]   (ii) does not rotate.  ... [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a boat that has been lifted out of a river. the boat is suspended by two ropes.  it is stationary. t1 t2 1.20  m0.40  m 24 knc p fig. 3.1 (not to scale)   the weight of the boat, acting at the centre of mass, is 24  kn. the tensions in the ropes are  t1 and t2.   determine   (i) the moment of the weight of the boat about the point p,  moment =  ... [1]   (ii) the tension t1,  t1 =  ... [3]   (iii) the tension t2.  t2 =  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over4 fig. 4.1 shows a galilean thermometer. this thermometer is used to measure the approximate  temperature of the surrounding air. glass cylinderbulb e, label: 28  \u00b0c bulb d, label: 26  \u00b0c bulb c, label: 24  \u00b0c bulb b, label: 22  \u00b0c bulb a, label: 20  \u00b0cwater fig. 4.1  the glass cylinder contains water. when the temperature of the water changes, so does its density.  each bulb has a label printed with a temperature, as shown in fig. 4.1. the bulbs have different  densities. at 21 \u00b0c, only bulb a is at the bottom of the cylinder.  (a) explain, in terms of density, why bulb a is at the bottom of the cylinder and the other bulbs are  floating.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) the temperature of the surrounding air increases to a temperature above 23 \u00b0c.    (i) suggest one reason why there is a delay before the temperature of the water increases to 23 \u00b0c.  ... [1]   (ii) explain why, after this delay, bulb b sinks. assume the bulbs do not expand.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (c) bulbs a, b and c are now at the bottom of the cylinder. bulbs d and e are floating.   state the possible temperature range of the water in the cylinder.  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 5 (a) (i) state two ways in which evaporation  is different from boiling . 1    ... 2    ...  [2]   (ii) give one example of a change of state which does not involve boiling or evaporation.  ... [1]   (b) the graph in fig. 5.1 shows the variation of temperature with time for a substance that is  initially liquid. temperature timeab c fig. 5.1   (i) state what is taking place at points a, b and c. you should say what changes of state, if  any, are taking place. point a  ... point b   point c  ...  [3]   (ii) suggest why the graph is steeper at point c than at point a.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 shows apparatus that is used to demonstrate some effects of the transfer of energy by  radiation. glass bulb painted matt black glass tubeheater shiny glass bulb glass tube air liquidair fig. 6.1  the glass bulb painted matt black, the shiny glass bulb and the spaces above the liquid in the tube  all contain air.  the heater glows red when switched on. the heater is the same distance from each bulb.  (a) state the two types of radiation that are emitted by the heater. 1   2    [1]  (b) before the heater is switched on, the liquid levels in the glass tube are the same.   state and explain any changes in the liquid levels that take place when the heater is  switched  on.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 7 fig. 7.1 shows an object and its image formed by a converging lens. one ray from the tip of the  object to the tip of the image is shown.  fig. 7.1 is drawn full size. object imagelens fig. 7.1  (a) place a tick ( 3) in all boxes that correctly describe the image.       diminished       enlarged       inverted         upright       real       virtual  [2]  (b) on fig. 7.1, draw a ray, passing through a principal focus of the lens, from the tip of the object  to the tip of the image. label the principal focus f.  [1]  (c) use the ray you have drawn in (b) to determine the focal length of the lens.  focal length =  ... [1]  (d) draw another ray, not passing through a principal focus of the lens, that passes from the tip  of the object to the tip of the image.  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 8 (a) a transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a core.   (i) suggest the material from which the two coils are made. state the reason for using this  material. material  .. reason    [2]   (ii) suggest the material from which the core is made. state the reason for using this  material. material  .. reason    [2]  (b) fig. 8.1 represents the system of transmission of electrical energy from a power station to a  home that is a long distance away. power station hometransmission cables and pylons132  kv 22 kvtransformer x transformer y 240  v fig. 8.1   (i) state the difference between transformer x and transformer y.  ... [1]   (ii) explain why a very high voltage is used for transmission over large distances.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]   (iii) suggest why the voltage for use by a home consumer is 240  v, and not a much higher  value.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 fig. 9.1 shows a graph of current against potential difference (p.d.) for a filament lamp. 000.200.400.600.80 current  / a 2.0 4.0 6.0 p.d.  / v8.0 fig. 9.1  (a) state what happens to the resistance of the filament of the lamp as the p.d. changes    (i) from 0  v to 1.0  v,  ... [1]   (ii) from 1.0  v to 8.0  v.  ... [1]  (b) at normal brightness, the p.d. across the lamp is 8.0  v.   calculate, for normal brightness,   (i) the resistance of the lamp,  resistance =  ... [3]   (ii) the power of the lamp.  power =  ... [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) five of these lamps, operating at normal brightness, are connected in parallel to a power  supply. power supply fig. 9.2   determine   (i) the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the power supply,  e.m.f. =  ... [1]   (ii) the current from the power supply.  current =  ... [1]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 (a) describe, in terms of particles and the terminals of the battery, the movement of charge in an  electric circuit.  ...  ... [2]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows a lightning flash between a cloud and the ground beneath. cloud lightning flash ground fig. 10.1   the charge built up on the cloud before the lightning flash is 0.60  c. this charge is completely  transferred to the ground by the lightning flash in 5.0 \u00d7 10\u20135 s (0.000050  s).   (i) calculate the current between the cloud and the ground.  current =  ... [2]   (ii) the potential difference (p.d.) between the cloud and the ground during the lightning flash is   2.5 \u00d7 108 v.    calculate the energy transferred during the lightning flash.  energy =  ... [2]   (iii) suggest what happens to the energy calculated in (b)(ii) .  ...  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 11 a radioactive source is placed 20  mm from a radiation detector, as shown in fig. 11.1. 20 mmsourcelead narrow beam of radiationdetector fig. 11.1 (not to scale)  the initial count rate recorded by the detector is 150 counts  / s.  a sheet of paper is placed between the source and the detector. the count rate recorded by the  detector falls to 60 counts  / s.  with the paper still in place, a magnetic field is set up perpendicular to the direction of the radiation.  the count rate recorded by the detector falls to 20 counts  / s.  the count rates have not been corrected for background. the background count is measured as  20 counts  / s.  (a) state the evidence that each type of radiation is present in, or absent from, the radiation  emitted by the source. \u03b1-particles  .  ... \u03b2-particles   .    ... \u03b3-rays      ...  [5]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (b) determine how much of the original count rate of 150 counts  / s, if any, is due to each type of  radiation.  \u03b1-particles    counts  / s  \u03b2-particles    counts  / s  \u03b3-rays    counts  / s  [2]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_m17_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/fd) 125966/8 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn over *7131906396* physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  february/march 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 in this experiment, you will investigate how the surrounding temperature affects the rate at which  water cools.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. boiling tube beakerthermometer fig. 1.1  (a) (i) \u2022 pour 200  cm3 of cold water into the beaker.    \u2022 record the temperature \u03b81 of the water in the beaker. \t\u03b81 =  ... [1]   (ii) \u2022  pour hot water into the boiling tube until it is about half full. gently place the  thermometer into the boiling tube. place the boiling tube into the beaker of water.    \u2022  record, in the first row  of table 1.1, the temperature \u03b8 of the water in the boiling  tube and immediately start the stopclock.    \u2022  record, in the table, the temperature \u03b8 of the water in the boiling tube at times   t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s, 150  s and 180  s. use the first and second columns.  [1]  (b) (i) \u2022 carefully empty the boiling tube and the beaker.    \u2022 pour 150  cm3 of cold water and 50  cm3 of hot water into the beaker .    \u2022 record the temperature \u03b82 of the warm water in the beaker.  \u03b82 =  ...    \u2022  repeat the steps in (a)(ii) , recording the temperature  \u03b8 of the water in the boiling  tube in the third column of the table . [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (ii) complete the heading and the time column in the table.  [2] table 1.1 tube in beaker with  cold watertube in beaker  with warm water t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / (first row) 0  (c) describe two precautions that you took to ensure that the temperature readings were as  accurate as possible in the experiment. 1    ... 2    ...  [2]  (d)  write a conclusion stating how increasing the temperature of the surrounding water affects  the rate of cooling of the water in the boiling tube.   justify your answer by reference to your results.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (e) suggest one change to the apparatus or procedure to ensure that the comparison of the  effect of surrounding temperature on cooling is a fair test.   explain why the change is an improvement. change  ..  ... explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over question 2 begins on the next page.",
            "6": "6 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of three wires x, y and z. the circuit has  been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.       x y za resistance wirespower supply vcrocodile clip fig. 2.1  (a) (i) \u2022 measure and record, in table 2.1, the length l of resistance wire x.    \u2022 switch on.    \u2022 record, in the table, the potential difference v and the current i for wire x.    \u2022 switch off.    \u2022  disconnect both crocodile clips from x and connect them to the ends of wire y.  record your measurements for l, v and i.    \u2022 take and record measurements for wire z. table 2.1 wire l  /  m v  /  v i  /  a r  /  \u03c9 x y z  [3]   (ii) on fig. 2.2, draw an arrow ( ) to indicate precisely  between which two points you  measured l . connecting leadresistance wire crocodile clip      fig. 2.2  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) calculate, and record in the table, the resistance r of each wire.   use the equation r = v i .  [2]  (c) (i) calculate the resistance per unit length r of each wire using the equation r = r l.  r  for wire x =  ...  r  for wire y =  ...  r  for wire z =  ...  [2]   (ii) a student suggests that r should be the same for each wire.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference  to your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]  (d) one possible problem with this type of experiment is heating of the resistance wires.    suggest a precaution that could be taken to reduce this.  ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the magnification produced by a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated triangle lensscreenu ho fig. 3.1  (a) measure the height ho of the illuminated triangle, as indicated in fig. 3.1.  ho =  ... [1]  (b) arrange the apparatus as shown in fig. 3.1.   \u2022 set the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens to 20.0  cm.   \u2022  place the screen near the lens. move the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is  formed on the screen.   \u2022 measure and record, in table 3.1, the height hi of the image formed on the screen.   \u2022 repeat the procedure for values of u = 25.0  cm, 35.0  cm, 45.0  cm and 55.0  cm. table 3.1 u  / cm hi  / cm m 20.0 25.0 35.0 45.0 55.0  [1]  (c) calculate and record, in table 3.1, a value for the magnification  m at each distance of u.   use your result from (a) and the equation  m = hi ho .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) plot a graph of m (y-axis) against u  / cm (x-axis).  [4]  (e) from your graph, determine the value of u when m = 1.0. show clearly on your graph how  you obtained the information.  u =  ... [2]  (f) describe one difficulty that might be experienced when measuring the height of the image.  suggest one improvement to the apparatus to overcome this. difficulty  .  ... improvement  .  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4  a student is investigating how the material of a spring affects its behaviour when stretched.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   wires of different thickness, length and material   a set of 10  g masses and a set of 100  g masses, both with hangers   a wooden rod approximately 1  cm in diameter   other standard laboratory equipment.  plan an experiment which would enable you to test the stretch of springs made from different  materials. you are not required to carry out the experiment.  in your plan, you should include:  \u2022 instructions for making a spring from the wire that is provided,  \u2022 what you would measure,  \u2022 instructions for carrying out the experiment,  \u2022 the variables you would keep the same to ensure the comparison is a fair test,  \u2022 any precaution which should be taken or difficulty which might occur,  \u2022 how you would present your results.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_m17_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (st/fc) 125968/9 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *5901732637* physics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  february/march 2017  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 some students are investigating how the surrounding temperature affects the rate at which water  cools.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1.  test-tube hot water beaker\u00b0c \u00b0c cold water beaker  a beaker  bhot water \u20131001020304050607080 102030405060708090100 warm water fig. 1.1   (a) using fig. 1.1 \u2022 record the temperature \u03b8a of the cold water in beaker a, \t\u03b8a =  ... \u2022 record the temperature \u03b8b of the warm water in beaker b.  \t\u03b8b =  ... [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b)  the test-tubes of hot water are placed into beakers a and b.    the students record the temperatures \u03b8 of the water in the test-tubes every 30  s. their  readings are shown in table 1.1.   complete the units and the time column in table 1.1. table 1.1 timetube in beaker a  with cold watertube in beaker b  with warm water t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 80.5 81.0 52.5 64.5 42.0 55.0 36.0 50.5 32.5 48.0 30.5 46.5 29.0 45.5   [2]  (c) describe two precautions that you would take, before reading the thermometer, to ensure  that the temperature readings are as accurate as possible in the experiment. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (d)  write a conclusion stating how increasing the temperature of the surrounding water affects  the rate of cooling of the water in the test-tube.   justify your answer by reference to the results in table 1.1.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]   ",
            "4": "4 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (e) suggest one change to the experiment shown in fig. 1.1 to ensure that the comparison of the  effect of surrounding temperature on cooling is a fair test.   explain why the change is an improvement. change  ..  ... explanation  ...  ... [2]  (f) the students use a measuring cylinder to measure 200  cm3 of cold water.   describe briefly how to read a measuring cylinder to obtain an accurate value for the volume  of water. you may draw a diagram.   ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 a student is investigating the resistance of three wires a, b and c. he is using the circuit shown in  fig. 2.1.  the circuit is set up to test wire a. the length, l of each wire is measured and recorded. a b ca resistance wirespower supply crocodile clip fig. 2.1  (a) on fig. 2.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that it will measure the potential difference across  wire a.  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (b) in the first line of table 2.1, record the potential difference v and current i for wire a, as  shown in figs. 2.2 and 2.3.  [2] v3 4 52 1 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0  fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3 table 2.1 wire l / m v / v i / a r / \u03c9 a 0.900 b 0.500 2.4 0.75 c 0.400 2.2 0.85  (c) the student connects the crocodile clips to wire b and then wire c in turn. his readings of  potential difference and current are shown in table 2.1.   calculate, and record in table 2.1, the resistance r of each wire.    use the equation r = v i.    [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) (i)  calculate the resistance per unit length r of each wire using the equation r = r l .    include the unit.   r  for wire a =  ...  r  for wire b =  ...  r  for wire c =  ... [2]    (ii) another student suggests that r should be the same for each wire.     state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference  to your results.  statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]    (e)  the student measures the length of each wire to be tested.    on fig. 2.4, draw an arrow ( ) to indicate precisely  between which two points he should  measure l.  connecting leadresistance wire crocodile clip fig. 2.4   [1]  (f) one possible problem with this type of experiment is heating of the resistance wires.   suggest a precaution that could be taken to reduce this.   ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3  some students are investigating the magnification produced by a converging lens.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 3.1. illuminated triangle lensscreenu fig. 3.1  (a) a student sets the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens to 20.0  cm.    she moves the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is seen on the screen.   the student measures the height of the illuminated triangle ho.     1.5 cm ho =  ...   measure and record, in table 3.1, the height of the image of the triangle hi on the screen, as  shown in fig.  3.2. [1] hi fig. 3.2 table 3.1 u / cm hi / cm m 20.0 25.0 2.25 35.0 1.10 45.0 0.75 55.0 0.55",
            "9": "9 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) the student measures the height hi of the image for u values of 25.0  cm, 35.0  cm, 45.0  cm  and 55.0  cm. her results are shown in table 3.1.   for each value of u, calculate and record in table 3.1 a value for the magnification m.    use the equation m = hi ho and the value of ho from (a). [1]  (c) plot a graph of m (y-axis) against u / cm (x-axis). [4]  (d)  from your graph, determine the value of  u when m = 1.0. show clearly on your graph how  you obtained the information.  u =  ... [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (e) describe one difficulty that might be experienced when measuring the height of the image in  this experiment. suggest one improvement to the apparatus to overcome this. difficulty  .  ... improvement  .  ... [2]  (f) when setting up the apparatus, the student makes sure that the card with the illuminated  triangle, the lens and the screen are all perpendicular to the bench.   explain why this is an important precaution in this experiment.  ...  ...  ... [1] [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4  a student is investigating how the material of a spring affects its behaviour when stretched.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   wires of different thickness, length and material   a set of 10  g masses and a set of 100  g masses, both with hangers   a wooden rod approximately 1  cm in diameter   other standard laboratory equipment.  plan an experiment which will enable you to test the extension of springs made from different  types of wire.  in your plan, you should include: \u2022 instructions for making a spring from the wire that is provided, \u2022 what you will measure, \u2022 instructions for carrying out the experiment,  \u2022 the variables you will keep the same to ensure the comparison is a fair test, \u2022 any precaution which should be taken or difficulty which might occur , \u2022 how you will present your results.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.   ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/62/f/m/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib17 06_0625_11_ml/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *8820004965 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)    modified language       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.  write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.    there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet.  electronic calculators may be used.  take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  1 a stopwatch is used to time a runner in a race. the diagrams show the stopwatch at the start and  at the end of the race.    min s1/100 sstart min s1/100 send     how long did the runner take to run the race?  a 70.00 seconds  b 110.00 seconds  c 115.20 seconds  d 155.20 seconds      2 on earth, a ball is dropped and falls 2.0  m in a vacuum.    the acceleration of the ball at 1.0  m is 10  m / s2.    0 m 0.5 m 1.0 m 1.5 m 2.0 mball     what is the acceleration of the ball at 0.5  m?  a 5.0  m / s2 b 10  m / s2 c 15  m / s2 d 20  m / s2    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17 [turn over  3 the speed-time graph represents a motorcycle journey.    in which part of the graph is the acceleration equal to zero?    10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10040 302010 0 0speed m  / s aabbcc dd time  / s     4 diagram 1 shows a sealed plastic bottle containing a hollow glass sphere and a steel ball.    diagram 2 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken.    diagram 3 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken again until the broken glass is in tiny pieces.    sealed plastic bottle steel ballhollow glasssphere steel ballbrokenglass steel balltiny piecesof brokenglass diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 1 is m1.    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 2 is m2.    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 3 is m3.    which statement gives the correct relation between m1, m2 and m3?  a m1 is equal to m2 and m2 is equal to m3.  b m1 is greater than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.  c m1 is less than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.  d m1 is less than m2 and m2 is less than m3.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  5 a student is weighed on laboratory scales.    which row about weight and mass is correct?     unit of weight unit of mass  a kg kg  b kg n  c n kg  d n n     6 a measuring cylinder containing only water is placed  on an electronic balance. a small, irregularly  shaped stone is now completely immersed in the water.    the diagrams show the equipment before and after the stone is immersed.    100 90 8070605040302010measuring cylinder water balance g before the stone is immersed100 90 8070605040302010 g after the stone is immersedcm3cm3 stone     what is the density of the material of the stone?  a 1.7  g / cm3 b 3.3  g / cm3 c 4.5  g / cm3 d 8.7  g / cm3     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17 [turn over  7 a boat is travelling at a steady speed in a straight line across the surface of a lake.    which statement about the boat is correct?  a the resultant force on the boat is in the direction of motion.  b the resultant force on the boat is in the opposite direction to its motion.  c the resultant force on the boat is vertically downwards.  d the resultant force on the boat is zero.    8 the diagram shows three uniform, solid wooden bl ocks with a square cross-sectional area resting  on a horizontal table.    tablepq r     which list puts the blocks in order from the least  stable to the most  stable?  a p \u2192 q \u2192 r  b p \u2192 r \u2192 q  c r \u2192 p \u2192 q  d r \u2192 q \u2192 p    9 energy resources are used to generate electricity.    which resource is renewable and does not release carbon dioxide when being used to produce  electricity?  a biomass  b nuclear  c oil  d wind     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  10 a student does some simple exercises.    in which exercise is the most work done?    1 kglifting through 1  ma 1 kgpushing through 1 m against a frictional force of 4  nb 2 kglifting through 2  m 2 kgpulling through 2 m against a frictional force of 2  nc d       11 the diagram shows a box of dimensions 6.0  cm \u00d7 8.0  cm \u00d7 4.0  cm.    8.0 cm6.0 cm 4.0 cmx yz     the box rests on a flat horizontal surface.    on which face must the box rest to exert the least pressure?  a face x  b face y  c face z  d the pressure is the same for all the faces.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17 [turn over  12 two identical fish tanks are filled to the same level with water.    one tank contains fresh water. the other tank contains sea-water.    sea-water is more dense than fresh water.    which fish experiences the greatest pressure?    fresh water sea-waterca db       13 a student has a syringe which has its open end sealed. the syringe is completely filled with a  certain substance, as shown in diagram 1. the student pushes the piston of the syringe in as far as possible, as shown in diagram 2.    sealed endsyringe piston diagram 1 diagram 2    what is in the syringe?  a a gas and a liquid  b a solid and a liquid  c a liquid only  d a solid only     14 when a microscope is used to look at smoke particles in air, brownian motion is observed.    what causes the smoke particles to move at random?  a smoke particles are hit by air molecules.  b smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.  c smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.  d smoke particles hit the walls of the container.    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  15 the diagram shows a metal foot bridge located in the sahara desert where the temperature is  much less at night than during the day. the ends of the bridge are firmly fixed to the sides of a narrow valley.    the solid line shows the bridge during the coldest part of the night.    which dotted line shows the bridge at the hottest part of the day?    a b c d      16 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.    liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power .    each liquid has the same rise in temperature.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a each beaker of liquid has the same thermal capacity.  b each beaker of liquid receives the same energy.  c liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17 [turn over  17 it is a warm and humid day. a glass contains an iced drink. water starts to form on the outside of  the glass.        what is the name of the effect by which the water forms?  a condensation  b conduction  c convection  d evaporation     18 a copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. a piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.    the bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side only.    paper copper wood heat    which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?     brown side wood copper  a copper conductor insulator  b copper insulator conductor  c wood conductor insulator  d wood insulator conductor     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  19 four identical metal plates are painted either black or white and have either a dull or a shiny  surface.    they are heated to the same temperature.    which plate radiates thermal energy at the greatest rate?  a the plate that is dull and black  b the plate that is dull and white  c the plate that is shiny and black  d the plate that is shiny and white      20 what causes the change in direction when light travels from air into glass?  a the amplitude of the light changes.  b the colour of the light changes.  c the frequency of the light changes.  d the speed of the light changes.     21 the diagram shows rays of light passing through a converging lens.    which labelled arrow represents the focal length of the lens?    a b dc      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17 [turn over  22 which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?    a  spectrum b spectrum c spectrumd spectrumwhite light white lightwhite light white light      23 the diagrams show four sources of waves.    which source produces longitudinal waves?    d c b a stick pushed up and down in waterradio transmitterloudspeaker lamp      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  24 the table shows different types of wave in the electromagnetic spectrum.    radio  waves micro- waves infra-red  waves visible  light ultraviolet  waves x-rays gamma  rays    where do all the waves travel at the same speed?  a in a vacuum  b in diamond  c in glass  d in water     25 a fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. an engineer adjusts the alarm so that it  produces a louder note of a higher pitch.  what effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?     amplitude frequency  a larger greater  b larger smaller  c smaller greater  d smaller smaller     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17 [turn over  26 in a child\u2019s toy, a metal rod is used to lift metal fish out of a toy pond. the fish are magnetically  attracted to the end of the rod. there is no magnetic force between the fish.    toy pondmetal rod metal fish    what are possible materials from which the fish and the rod are made?     fish rod  a aluminium soft iron  b aluminium steel  c soft iron soft iron  d soft iron steel     27 which diagram shows the pattern of magnetic field lines around a bar magnet?    s na s nb s nc s nd      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  28 a student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.    the rod becomes positively charged.    what has happened to the rod?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained protons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost protons.     29 the circuit shows a 2.0  \u03c9 resistor and a 1.0  \u03c9 resistor connected to a 12  v battery.    2.0 \u03c912 v 1.0 \u03c9     what is the current in the 2.0  \u03c9 resistor?  a 4.0  a b 6.0  a c 24  a d 36  a     30 a computer engineer wants the speed of a fan to increase automatically when the temperature  inside a computer rises. the engineer knows that a larger current causes the fan to turn more quickly.    power supply xfan motor computerm     which component should be placed at x to make this happen?  a a relay  b a thermistor  c a transformer  d a variable resistor    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17 [turn over  31 the diagram shows a power supply with a constant electromotive force (e.m.f.). it is connected to  a voltmeter, a variable resistor and two identical lamps, p and q. both lamps are lit.    v qp     the resistance of the variable resistor is increased. the voltmeter reading remains unchanged.    what happens to the brightness of the lamps?     lamp p lamp q  a brighter brighter  b dimmer dimmer  c dimmer unchanged  d unchanged unchanged     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  32 a student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.    r  s t v  12  v     as the sliding terminal t is moved from r to s,  what happens to the reading on the voltmeter?  a it decreases from 12  v to 0  v.  b it increases from 0  v to 12  v.  c it remains at 0  v.  d it remains at 12  v.     33 a light-dependent resistor (ldr) and a resistor r are connected in a series circuit. light falls on  the ldr.    a r    the brightness of the light falling on the ldr decreases.    what happens to the resistance of the ldr and what happens to the reading on the ammeter?     resistance  of ldr reading on  ammeter  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17 [turn over  34 a circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2  a.    the time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.    0.16 0.140.120.100.080.060.040.02 0 0 2 4 6 8 1 01 21 41 61 82 0 current  / atime taken to break thecircuit  / s     what happens when the current in the circuit is 2  a and what happens when the current is 18  a?     when the current is 2  a when the current is 18  a  a the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s  b the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s the circuit does not break  c the circuit does not break the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s  d the circuit does not break the circuit does not break     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  35 the diagram shows a transformer with primary coil p and secondary coil s. the input potential  difference across coil p is vp. the output potential difference across coil s is vs. the number of  turns in coil p is np. the number of turns in coil s is ns.    outputcore input ps     which equation relates the input and output voltages to the numbers of turns in p and in s?  a  sp vv =  sp nn  b vp \u00d7 vs = np \u00d7 ns  c  sp vv =  ps nn  d  sp vv = ) (s pp nnn +      36 what is the purpose of a relay?  a to change a large voltage into a small voltage  b to change a small voltage into a large voltage  c to use a large current to switch on a small current  d to use a small current to switch on a large current     37 which row gives the relative charge of an electron, a neutron and a proton?     electron neutron proton  a \u20131 0 \u20131  b \u20131 0 +1  c +1 \u20131 0  d +1 0 +1     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  38 an element has two isotopes.    which row compares the numbers of particles in the nuclei of the atoms of these isotopes?     number of  neutrons number of  protons number of  nucleons  a different the same different  b different the same the same  c the same different different  d the same different the same      39 a hospital doctor is using a source of \u03b3-rays for a medical treatment.    each diagram shows a view from  above of the treatment room.    which diagram shows the best way to protect the doctor and staff in the corridor from the \u03b3-rays?    a  dense  concrete  source of \u03b3-rays source of \u03b3-rayssource of \u03b3-rayssource of \u03b3-rays corridor doctor b  dense  concrete  corridor doctor  c  dense  concrete  corridor doctor d  dense  concrete  corridor doctor wooden  door wooden door  wooden door  wooden door        40 a sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.    the nuclei of which atoms will decay first?  a it is impossible to know because radioactive decay is random.  b it is impossible to know unless the age of the material is known.  c the atoms near the centre will decay first because they are surrounded by more atoms.  d the atoms near the surface will decay first because the radiation can escape more easily.     ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material pr otected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/m/j/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 20 printed pages.  ib17 06_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *2009621188* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.  write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.    there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet.  electronic calculators may be used.  take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  1 which device is used to measure the time it takes for a 10  cm3 block of ice to melt in a laboratory  at room temperature?  a measuring cylinder  b ruler  c stopwatch  d thermometer     2 a student determines the average speed of a bubble rising through a liquid at constant speed.    when the student starts the stopwatch the bubble is at position p.    after 2.0  s the bubble is at position q.    18 1920212223242526 cm 27q pbubble bubble    what is the speed of the bubble between p and q?  a 3.2  cm  / s b 3.7  cm  / s c 6.4  cm  / s d 7.4  cm  / s     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  3 the speed-time graph represents a motorcycle journey.    in which part of the graph is the acceleration equal to zero?    10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10040 302010 0 0speed m  / s aabbcc dd time  / s      4 which expression is used to find gravitational field strength g?  a mass \u00d7 density  b mass \u00f7 weight  c weight \u00d7 mass  d weight \u00f7 mass     5 a block of ice is removed from a freezer. some of the ice melts to produce water. some of the  water that is produced evaporates.    the original mass of the ice is p. the mass of the ice that has not yet melted is q. the mass of  the water is r. the mass of the water vapour is s.    the diagram shows these changes.    before melting mass pafter melting and evaporation mass q mass r mass sice ice water water vapour     which equation gives the relationship between p, q, r and s?  a p = q + r  b p = q + r + s  c p = q + r \u2013 s  d p = q + s     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  6 the masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the  diagram.    200 100cm3 mass = 80  g200100cm 3 mass = 180  gliquid     what is the density of the liquid?  a 120100g / cm3 b 140100g / cm3 c 120180g / cm3 d 140180g / cm3      7 a car travels forwards along a straight horizontal road. only the horizontal forces acting on it are  shown.    driving forceair resistance and friction     the length of each arrow represents the size of each force.    how do these forces affect the motion of the car?  a the car moves at constant speed.  b the car moves backwards.  c the car slows down.  d the car\u2019s forward speed increases.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  8 the centre of a uniform metre rule rests on a pivot. a load of weight 3.0  n is placed at the 70  cm  mark.    a force f acts upwards at the 80  cm mark. the rule is in equilibrium.    0 cm 100  cm 50 cm 70 cm 3.0 n80 cm pivotrulef     what is the magnitude of f ?  a 2.0  n b 2.6  n c 3.0  n d 4.5  n      9 an energy resource is used to generate electrical energy.    which energy resource uses a transfer of gravitational potential energy to generate this electrical  energy?  a geothermal  b hydroelectric  c solar  d wind     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  10 the diagrams show athletes training by stretching springs.    each spring has the same stiffness.    which athlete does the most work?    a one spring stretched by 0.60  m two springs stretched by 0.60  mb one spring stretched by 0.80  m cd two springs stretched by 0.80  m     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  11 the diagram shows a conical vessel full of water.    the pressure at point x due to the water is p. a point q is a distance h above point x.    water xq h     which graph shows how the pressure due to the water at q varies with distance h?    00pressure p distance hc 00pressure p distance hd00pressure p distance ha 00pressure p distance hb      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  12 in diagram 1 a manometer containing mercury (hg) is connected to a gas tap. the tap is turned  off and the mercury is at the same level on both sides.    gas supplygas tap mercurydiagram 1     when the gas supply is turned on, the mercury in the tube connected to the supply falls by 40  mm  and the mercury in the tube open to the atmosphere rises by 40  mm, as shown in diagram 2.    gassupplygas tap mercurydiagram 2     what is the pressure of the gas in the gas supply?  a 40  mm hg above atmospheric pressure  b 40  mm hg below atmospheric pressure  c 80  mm hg above atmospheric pressure  d 80  mm hg below atmospheric pressure     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  13 brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.    what causes the smoke particles to move at random?  a smoke particles are hit by air molecules.  b smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.  c smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.  d smoke particles hit the walls of the container.     14 which change is evaporation?    liquidsolid gasliquidda bc     15 a glass bottle has a metal cap. the cap fits very tightly and is difficult to remove.    the cap and the neck of the bottle are dipped in a bowl of hot water. the cap can be removed more easily.    what happens to allow the cap to be removed more easily from the bottle?  a the cap contracts.  b the cap expands.  c the glass bottle contracts.  d the glass bottle expands.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  16 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.    liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power .    each liquid has the same rise in temperature.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a each beaker of liquid has the same thermal capacity.  b each beaker of liquid receives the same energy.  c liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  17 a copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. a piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.    the bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side  only.    paper copper wood heat    which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?     brown side wood copper  a copper conductor insulator  b copper insulator conductor  c wood conductor insulator  d wood insulator conductor     18 a glass of water is taken out of a refrigerator. several ice cubes are put into the glass of water.  the glass is then left in the room for several hours.    the graph shows how the temperature of the water in the glass varies from the time it is taken  out of the refrigerator.    temperature time 0x     what does the temperature marked x represent?  a boiling point of water  b melting point of ice  c room temperature  d temperature inside refrigerator     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  19 a hollow aluminium cube is filled with very hot water.    side x of the cube is opposite side y of the cube. one of these two sides is black and one is  white.    a student holds the back of one hand 5  cm from side x, and then immediately holds the back of  the other hand 5  cm from side y.    5 cm 5 cmside x side y very hot wateraluminium cube     the hand held near side y feels warmer than the hand held near side x.    which row identifies the black side and correctly compares the rate of emission of thermal radiation from each side?     black side rate of emission  of thermal radiation  a x greater for x  b x the same for x and y  c y greater for y  d y the same for x and y     20 what causes the change in direction when light travels from air into glass?  a the amplitude of the light changes.  b the colour of the light changes.  c the frequency of the light changes.  d the speed of the light changes.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  21 light passes into a glass block.    which is the angle of refraction?    a b cd       22 which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?    a  spectrum b spectrum c spectrumd spectrumwhite light white lightwhite light white light      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  23 the diagrams show four sources of waves.    which source produces longitudinal waves?    d c b a stick pushed up and down in waterradio transmitterloudspeaker lamp      24 the table shows different types of wave in the electromagnetic spectrum.    radio  waves micro- waves infra-red  waves visible  light ultraviolet  waves x-rays gamma  rays    where do all the waves travel at the same speed?  a in a vacuum  b in diamond  c in glass  d in water     25 a fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. an engineer adjusts the alarm so that it  produces a louder note of a higher pitch.  what effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?     amplitude frequency  a larger greater  b larger smaller  c smaller greater  d smaller smaller    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  26 what is wrong with this labelled diagram of a permanent magnet?    n siron disc     a the cross-section should be rectangular.  b the length should be greater than the diameter.  c the magnet should be made of steel.  d the n-pole and the s-pole should be reversed.      27 which statement about magnetism is correct?  a an unmagnetised iron bar becomes magnetised when it is placed near a magnet.  b an unmagnetised steel bar can be magnetised by passing a current through it.  c steel is used as the core of an electromagnet.  d when an iron bar has been magnetised, it is difficult to demagnetise it.     28 a student tests the electrical conduction of four materials.    aluminium  iron  plastic silver    which materials conduct electricity?  a aluminium, iron and silver only  b aluminium and silver only  c iron, silver and plastic only  d plastic only     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  29 the circuit diagram shows three resistors connected in series across a 6.0  v supply.    3.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c96.0 v 5.0 \u03c9    what is the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0  \u03c9 resistor?  a 0.67  v b 1.5  v c 2.0  v d 6.0  v    30 a thermistor is connected in series with a sensitive ammeter and a battery.    thermistor a    which change will give a larger ammeter reading?  a adding another thermistor in series  b cooling the thermistor  c heating the thermistor  d reducing the number of cells in the battery    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  31 three ammeters measure the currents in different parts of the circuit shown. the diagram  indicates the reading on the ammeters.    18 \u03c9 6 \u03c9a a a3.0 a 2.0 a 1.5 a    how do we know that at least one of the ammeters must be faulty?  a all three ammeters must read the same value.  b all the current takes the easier path through the 6  \u03c9 resistor.  c the current from the battery must be equal to the sum of the currents in the two resistors.  d the current in the two parallel resistors must be the same.    32 a student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.    r  s t v  12  v     what happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal t is moved from r to s?  a it decreases from 12  v to 0  v.  b it increases from 0  v to 12  v.  c it remains at 0  v.  d it remains at 12  v.    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  33 the diagram shows an electric circuit.    10 \u03c90.40  a 20 \u03c9     what is the potential difference (p.d.) across the ldr?  a 4.0  v b 8.0  v c 25  v d 50  v    34 a circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2  a.    the time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.    0.16 0.140.120.100.080.060.040.02 0 0 2 4 6 8 1 01 21 41 61 82 0 current  / atime taken to break thecircuit  / s     what happens when the current in the circuit is 2  a and what happens when the current is 18  a?     when the current is 2  a when the current is 18  a  a the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s  b the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s the circuit does not break  c the circuit does not break the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s  d the circuit does not break the circuit does not break     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17 [turn over  35 what is the purpose of a relay?  a to change a large voltage into a small voltage  b to change a small voltage into a large voltage  c to use a large current to switch on a small current  d to use a small current to switch on a large current      36 a coil of four loops of wire is placed in a magnetic field. when there is a current, the coil  experiences a turning effect.    some extra loops of wire are wound on the coil but the current is unchanged.    how does this affect the turning effect?  a it is unchanged.  b its direction changes.  c it decreases.  d it increases.    37 which particle has a negative charge?  a an alpha particle  b an electron  c a neutron  d a proton     38 the diagram represents the nucleus of an atom. the charged particles are shown.    + + +     which row gives the proton number and the nucleon number for this nucleus?     proton  number nucleon  number  a 3 4  b 3 7  c 4 3  d 4 7     ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/m/j/17  39 a sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.    the nuclei of which atoms will decay first?  a it is impossible to know because radioactive decay is random.  b it is impossible to know unless the age of the material is known.  c the atoms near the centre will decay first because they are surrounded by more atoms.  d the atoms near the surface will decay first because the radiation can escape more easily.    40 the half-life of a radioactive isotope is 4.0 years.    a sample of this material contains 24 million radioactive nuclei.    how many of these radioactive nuclei remain undecayed after 12 years?  a 0.5 million  b 2.0 million  c 3.0 million  d 6.0 million       "
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib17 06_0625_13/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *3488282495* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  1 a candle burns evenly. it is used as a timer.    the candle is lit and burns down to point x in 2 hours.    to which labelled point does the candle burn down after a further 30 minutes?    height of candle before it is lit a b x c d       2 a pendulum is swinging. five students each measure the time it takes to swing through ten  complete swings.    three students measure the time as 17.2  s. another student measures it as 16.9  s, and the fifth  student measures it as 17.0  s.    what is the average period of the pendulum?  a 1.69  s b 1.70  s c 1.71  s d 1.72  s     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17 [turn over  3 the speed-time graph represents a motorcycle journey.    in which part of the graph is the acceleration equal to zero?    10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10040 302010 0 0speed m  / s aabbcc dd time  / s     4 a shopkeeper pours rice into a dish that hangs from a spring balance. he records the reading.    01 2 3456spring balance rice dish    a customer buys some pasta. the shopkeeper notices that the reading on the spring balance, with just pasta in the dish, is the same as it was with just rice in the dish.    which quantity must  be the same for the rice and for the pasta?  a density  b temperature  c volume  d weight    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  5 four identical steel blocks weigh 120  n in total.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the mass of one steel block?  a 3.0  kg b 12  kg c 30  kg d 48  kg     6 a steel ball bearing has a mass of 24  g and a density of 8.0  g / cm3. it is lowered into a measuring  cylinder containing 12  cm3 of water.    what is the new water level in the cylinder?  a 3.0  cm3 b 4.0  cm3 c 15  cm3 d 16  cm3    7 the diagram shows an object being acted upon by two forces.    3.0 n 6.0 n     what is the size of the resultant force on the object?  a 2.0  n b 3.0  n c 9.0  n d 18  n     8 a student is asked to investigate the extension of a spring using the apparatus shown in the  diagram.    known weights     which other piece of equipment is needed?  a measuring cylinder  b metre rule  c stopwatch  d protractor     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17 [turn over  9 in which power station are atoms of one elemen t changed to atoms of other lighter elements?  a a coal-fired power station  b a hydroelectric power station  c a nuclear power station  d a solar power station      10 the diagrams show four different athletes training by doing pull-ups.    which athlete does the most work?    a weight of athlete = 700  n distance lifted = 0.50  mb weight of athlete = 700  n distance lifted = 0.55  mc weight of athlete = 800  n distance lifted = 0.50  md weight of athlete = 800  n distance lifted = 0.55  m    11 a student uses her thumb to push in a drawing pin (thumb tack) into a notice board.    the pin goes into the board but does not penetrate her thumb.    which statement explains this?  a the force exerted by the pin on her thumb is greater than the force exerted on the notice  board.  b the force exerted by the pin on the notice board is greater than the force exerted on her  thumb.  c the pressure of the pin on her thumb is greater than the pressure on the notice board.  d the pressure of the pin on the notice board is greater than the pressure on her thumb.    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  12 a solid cube has sides 0.50  m long and a mass of 120  kg. it stands on the ground on one face.    what pressure does the cube exert on the ground?  a 480  kg  / m3 b 960  kg  / m3 c 4800  n / m2 d 9600  n / m2      13 the diagram represents molecules of a gas inside a closed container of constant volume.        what happens to the molecules of the gas when the container is heated?  a they expand.  b they get closer together.  c they hit the container walls with less force.  d they move faster.     14 brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.    what causes the smoke particles to move at random?  a smoke particles are hit by air molecules.  b smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.  c smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.  d smoke particles hit the walls of the container.      15 the temperature of a bridge rises from 5  \u00b0c on a cold night to 25  \u00b0c at midday.    what happens to the bridge?  a it becomes heavier.  b it becomes more dense.  c its length increases.  d its mass increases.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17 [turn over  16 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.    liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power .    each liquid has the same rise in temperature.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a each beaker of liquid has the same thermal capacity.  b each beaker of liquid receives the same energy.  c liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  17 a solid substance is heated at a constant rate. the solid changes into a liquid and then into a  gas.    the graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes.    700 600500400300200100 0temperature /  \u00b0c time 0    what is the melting point and what is the boiling point of the substance?     melting  point  / \u00b0c boiling  point  / \u00b0c  a 200 300  b 200 500  c 300 500  d 300 700     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17 [turn over  18 a copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. a piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.    the bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side  only.    paper copper wood heat    which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?     brown side wood copper  a copper conductor insulator  b copper insulator conductor  c wood conductor insulator  d wood insulator conductor    19 which types of thermal energy transfer require a medium?  a conduction and convection  b conduction only  c convection and radiation  d radiation only     20 what causes the change in direction when light travels from air into glass?  a the amplitude of the light changes.  b the colour of the light changes.  c the frequency of the light changes.  d the speed of the light changes.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  21 which diagram shows how a converging lens forms a real image of an object o?    a b c d o oo o      22 which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?    a  spectrum b spectrum c spectrumd spectrumwhite light white lightwhite light white light     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17 [turn over  23 the table shows different types of wave in the electromagnetic spectrum.    radio  waves micro- waves infra-red  waves visible  light ultraviolet  waves x-rays gamma  rays    where do all the waves travel at the same speed?  a in a vacuum  b in diamond  c in glass  d in water     24 the diagrams show four sources of waves.    which source produces longitudinal waves?    d c b a stick pushed up and down in waterradio transmitterloudspeaker lamp     25 a fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. an engineer adjusts the alarm so that it  produces a louder note of a higher pitch.  what effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?     amplitude frequency  a larger greater  b larger smaller  c smaller greater  d smaller smaller    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  26 from which materials are the coil and the core of an electromagnet made?     coil core  a copper soft iron  b copper steel  c soft iron copper  d steel soft iron      27 in which way are a bar magnet and an electromagnet similar?  a a bar magnet and an electromagnet are always magnetised when stored.  b a bar magnet and an electromagnet can both be used to separate magnetic and   non-magnetic materials.  c a bar magnet can be made of steel and an electromagnet uses a steel core.  d the magnetic field strength of a bar magnet and of an electromagnet can both be varied.     28 which material is a conductor of electricity?  a brass  b glass  c plastic  d wood     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17 [turn over  29 the diagram shows a circuit containing two resistors of resistance 1.0  \u03c9 and 2.0  \u03c9.    a voltmeter is connected across the 1.0  \u03c9 resistor by connecting p to x.    the reading on the voltmeter is 6.0  v.    v1.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9xy p     p is moved to point y in the circuit.    what is the new reading on the voltmeter?  a 3.0  v b 6.0  v c 12  v d 18  v     30 the circuit diagram shows a simple circuit with  a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 6.0  v and  two bulbs each of resistance 2.0  \u03c9.    a a ammeter 2 ammeter 1     which row gives the readings on the ammeters?     reading on  ammeter 1  / a reading on  ammeter 2  / a  a 1.5 0  b 1.5 1.5  c 3.0 0  d 3.0 1.5     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  31 the diagram shows three identical heating elements connected to a power supply.    switch 1 switch 2 switch 3 power supply    which arrangement of switches causes most  power to be used?     switch 1 switch 2 switch 3  a closed closed closed  b closed open closed  c closed open open  d open closed closed     32 a student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.    r  s t v  12  v     what happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal t is moved from r to s?  a it decreases from 12  v to 0  v.  b it increases from 0  v to 12  v.  c it remains at 0  v.  d it remains at 12  v.    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17 [turn over  33 the diagram shows a circuit used to make a light detector.    a xy    one component is connected between x and y.    which component causes the ammeter reading to increase when the light gets brighter?    a b c d      34 a circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2  a.    the time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.    0.16 0.140.120.100.080.060.040.02 0 0 2 4 6 8 1 01 21 41 61 82 0 current  / atime taken to break thecircuit  / s     what happens when the current in the circuit is 2  a and what happens when the current is 18  a?     when the current is 2  a when the current is 18  a  a the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s  b the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s the circuit does not break  c the circuit does not break the circuit breaks in less than 0.01  s  d the circuit does not break the circuit does not break     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  35 a wire moves in the direction shown between the poles of a magnet.    n s movement of wirewire     which change increases the magnitude of the induced electromotive force (e.m.f.) across the  ends of the wire?  a increasing the gap between the poles of the magnet  b moving the wire faster  c using a shorter wire  d using a thinner wire    36 what is the purpose of a relay?  a to change a large voltage into a small voltage  b to change a small voltage into a large voltage  c to use a large current to switch on a small current  d to use a small current to switch on a large current     37 which description of a neutral atom of copper is correct?  a a nucleus surrounded by electrons  b a nucleus surrounded by molecules  c electrons surrounded by a nucleus  d electrons surrounded by molecules     38 a nuclide of iodine is represented by  i131 53.  how many neutrons are in a nucleus of this nuclide?  a 53 b 78 c 131 d 184    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  39 a sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.    the nuclei of which atoms will decay first?  a it is impossible to know because radioactive decay is random.  b it is impossible to know unless the age of the material is known.  c the atoms near the centre will decay first because they are surrounded by more atoms.  d the atoms near the surface will decay first because the radiation can escape more easily.    40 the diagram shows a decay curve for a radioactive substance.    timecount rate counts  / s50 4540353025201510 50 0     according to the curve shown, what is the background radiation count?  a 40 counts  / s  b 20 counts  / s  c 5 counts  / s  d 0 counts  / s     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  blank page",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material pr otected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/m/j/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib17 06_0625_21_vi_lil/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *8388841185* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/21     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  1 what is the most accurate and precise method to measure the thickness of a coin?  a use a micrometer screw gauge.  b use a ruler and look at the scale perpendicularly.  c use a top pan balance.  d use the displacement method with water in a measuring cylinder.      2 on earth, a ball is dropped and falls 2.0  m in a vacuum.    the acceleration of the ball at 1.0  m is 10  m / s2.    0 m 0.5 m 1.0 m 1.5 m 2.0 mball     what is the acceleration of the ball at 0.5  m?  a 5.0  m / s2 b 10  m / s2 c 15  m / s2 d 20  m / s2    3 a skydiver reaches terminal velocity. then he opens his parachute.    what happens to the skydiver as the parachute opens?  a there is a decrease in weight.  b there is acceleration upwards.  c there is an increase in speed.  d there is movement upwards.     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17 [turn over  4 a piece of steel is taken from the earth to the moon for an experiment. the gravitational field  strength on the moon is smaller than on the earth.    which statement about the piece of steel is correct?  a it has less mass on the moon than on the earth.  b it has more mass on the moon than on the earth.  c it weighs less on the moon than on the earth.  d it weighs more on the moon than on the earth.     5 a measuring cylinder containing only water is placed  on an electronic balance. a small, irregularly  shaped stone is now completely immersed in the water.    the diagrams show the equipment before and after the stone is immersed.    100 90 8070605040302010measuring cylinder water balance g before the stone is immersed100 90 8070605040302010 g after the stone is immersedcm3cm3 stone     what is the density of the material of the stone?  a 1.7  g / cm3 b 3.3  g / cm3 c 4.5  g / cm3 d 8.7  g / cm3     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  6 a boat is travelling at a steady speed in a straight line across the surface of a lake.    which statement about the boat is correct?  a the resultant force on the boat is in the direction of motion.  b the resultant force on the boat is in the opposite direction to its motion.  c the resultant force on the boat is vertically downwards.  d the resultant force on the boat is zero.     7 a ball of weight 1.2  n drops through the air at terminal velocity.    a sudden gust of wind exerts a horizontal force of 0.5  n on the ball from the left.    which diagram shows the resultant force on the ball while the wind is blowing?    ball resultant force1.2 n0.5 na ball resultant force1.2 n0.5 nb resultant force0.5 nc ballresultant force1.2 n1.2 n 1.2 n0.5 nd ball     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17 [turn over  8 the diagram shows a uniform bridge, 4.0  m long and weighing 10  000  n.    the bridge is pivoted at one end. a force at the other end gradually increases until the bridge  begins to lift.    pivotbridge 4.0 mlifting force     what is the lifting force as the bridge starts to move upwards?   a 2500  n b 5000  n c 10  000  n d 20  000  n     9 a bullet of mass 0.10  kg travels horizontally at a speed of 600  m / s. it strikes a stationary wooden  block of mass 1.90  kg resting on a frictionless, horizontal surface.    the bullet stays in the block.    what is the speed of the bullet and the block immediately after the impact?  a 30  m / s b 32  m / s c 60  m / s d 134  m / s     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  10 a box of mass m slides down a slope of length l and vertical height d against a frictional force f.    dlmass m f stop     as the box slides down the slope, it loses gravitat ional potential energy and it does work against  the friction.    which row gives the loss in gravitational potential energy and the work done against friction?     loss in gravitational  potential energy work done  against friction  a mgd f l  b mgd fd  c mg l f l  d mg l fd      11 the diagram represents the energy transfers for a device.    input energy wasted output energyuseful output energy     the device is 50% efficient.    which equation is correct?  a input energy = useful output energy \u00f7 2  b useful output energy = wasted output energy \u00f7 2  c wasted output energy = useful output energy  d wasted output energy = useful output energy \u00f7 2     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17 [turn over  12 a student carries out some simple exercises.    in which exercise is the most work done?    1 kglifting through 1  ma 1 kgpushing through 1 m against a frictional force of 4  nb 2 kglifting through 2  m 2 kgpulling through 2 m against a frictional force of 2  nc d      13 four different liquids are poured into four containers.    the diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.    in which container is the pressure on its base the greatest?    a liquid density = 3.1  g / cm310 cmb liquid density = 1.2  g / cm320 cmc liquid density = 1.3  g / cm330 cmd liquid density = 0.8  g / cm340 cm      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  14 brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.    what causes the smoke particles to move at random?  a smoke particles are hit by air molecules.  b smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.  c smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.  d smoke particles hit the walls of the container.     15 gas molecules striking a container wall cause a pressure to be exerted on the wall.    which statement explains this?  a when a molecule rebounds there must be a change in its energy.  b when a molecule rebounds there must be a change in its momentum.  c when a molecule rebounds there must be a change in its speed.  d when a molecule rebounds there must be a change in its temperature.       ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17 [turn over  16 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.    liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power .    each liquid has the same rise in temperature.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a each beaker of liquid has the same thermal capacity.  b each beaker of liquid receives the same energy.  c liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.      17 water of mass 100  g at a temperature of 100  \u00b0c is converted into steam at 100  \u00b0c. the specific  latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2300  j / g.    how much thermal energy is absorbed by the water?  a 23  j b 230  j c 230  000  j d 23  000  000  j     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  18 a copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. a piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.    the bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side  only.    paper copper wood heat    which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?     brown side wood copper  a copper conductor insulator  b copper insulator conductor  c wood conductor insulator  d wood insulator conductor    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17 [turn over  19 different waves hit barriers with different sized gaps.    the waves will diffract.    in which diagram does the greatest spreading occur?    gap 2.0  cma barrier wavelength 1.0 cmgap 2.0  cmb barrier wavelength 2.0 cm wavelength 2.0 cmgap 3.0  cmc barrier wavelength 1.0 cmgap 3.0  cmd barrier      20 a converging lens is used as a magnifying glass to view an object.    which statement is correct?  a the image is inverted.  b the image is nearer the lens than the object.  c the image is the same size.  d the image is virtual.    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  21 which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?    a  spectrum b spectrum c spectrumd spectrumwhite light white lightwhite light white light      22 light travels in a vacuum and then enters a glass block. the speed of the light in the glass block  is 2.0 \u00d7 10 8  m / s.    which statement about the speed of light is correct?  a the speed in a vacuum is 1.5 times the speed in the glass.  b the speed in the glass is the same as the speed in a vacuum.  c the speed in the glass is 1.5 times the speed in a vacuum.  d the speed in the glass is 1.0 \u00d7 108 times the speed in a vacuum.    23 a fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. an engineer adjusts the alarm so that it  produces a louder note of a higher pitch.  what effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?     amplitude frequency  a larger greater  b larger smaller  c smaller greater  d smaller smaller    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17 [turn over  24 in a child\u2019s toy, metal fish are lifted out of a toy pond using a metal rod. the fish are magnetically  attracted to the end of the rod. there is no magnetic force between the fish themselves.    toy pondmetal rod metal fish    what are possible materials from which the fish and the rod are made?     fish rod  a aluminium soft iron  b aluminium steel  c soft iron soft iron  d soft iron steel      25 what is the most effective method of demagnetising a bar magnet?  a placing the magnet in a solenoid carrying a large alternating current and gradually  decreasing the current  b placing the magnet in a solenoid carrying a large direct current and gradually decreasing the  current  c placing the magnet in a solenoid that produces a magnetic field in the opposite direction to  the magnet  d placing the magnet next to an identical bar magnet with its poles in the opposite direction     26 a magnet near a coil of wire is attracted to the coil only when there is a current in the coil.    which statement explains this force of attraction?  a the coil of wire has its own gravitational field.  b the coil of wire is made from soft iron.  c the current in the coil of wire creates a magnetic field.  d the current in the coil of wire induces a charge on the magnet.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  27 a student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.    the rod becomes positively charged.    what has happened to the rod?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained protons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost protons.     28 which quantity is measured in coulombs?  a charge  b current  c electromotive force  d power     29 a cylinder of conducting putty has length l, diameter d and resistance r. the putty is now  moulded into a cylinder of diameter 2 d that has the same volume.    rl d     by which factor does the resistance of the putty cylinder decrease?  a 2 b 4 c 8 d 16      30 the average current during a lightning strike between a cloud and the ground is 1.5 \u00d7 104  a.    the lightning releases 3.0 \u00d7 108  j of energy and lasts for 2.0 \u00d7 10\u20134  s.    what is the average electromotive force (e.m.f.) between the cloud and the ground?  a 4.0  v b 100  v c 1.0 \u00d7 108  v d 9.0 \u00d7 108  v     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17 [turn over  31 a student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.    r  s t v  12  v     what happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal t is moved from r to s?  a it decreases from 12  v to 0  v.  b it increases from 0  v to 12  v.  c it remains at 0  v.  d it remains at 12  v.     32 the circuit diagram shows a circuit with an a.c. supply, a diode and a resistor.        which diagram shows how the current i in the resistor varies with time t ?    a b c d0ii iitt tt00 0 0 00 0      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  33 a light-dependent resistor (ldr) and a resistor r are connected in a series circuit. light falls on  the ldr.    a r    the brightness of the light falling on the ldr decreases.    what happens to the resistance of the ldr and what happens to the reading on the ammeter?     resistance  of ldr reading on  ammeter  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     34 the diagram shows a logic gate.    pr q     which input combinations at p and q gives an output of 0 at r?     p q  a 0 0  b 0 1  c 1 0  d 1 1    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17 [turn over  35 a simple d.c. electric motor is fitted with a coil that rotates in a magnetic field. a commutator  connects the power supply to the coil.    what is the purpose of the commutator?  a it converts a.c. into d.c. in the coil.  b it prevents the current from becoming too great, because the coil has a low resistance.  c it reverses the direction of the current in the coil after every 180 \u00b0 rotation of the coil.  d it switches the current off momentarily after every 90 \u00b0 rotation of the coil.      36 what is the purpose of a relay?  a to change a large voltage into a small voltage  b to change a small voltage into a large voltage  c to use a large current to switch on a small current  d to use a small current to switch on a large current      37 which row gives the relative charge of an electron, a neutron and a proton?     electron neutron proton  a \u20131 0 \u20131  b \u20131 0 +1  c +1 \u20131 0  d +1 0 +1      38 a nuclide of element x undergoes \u03b2-decay.    which statement is correct?  a the nucleon number increases by 1.  b the nucleon number stays the same.  c the product is another nuclide of an isotope of x.  d the proton number decreases by 1.    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  39 a sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.    the nuclei of which atoms will decay first?  a it is impossible to know because radioactive decay is random.  b it is impossible to know unless the age of the material is known.  c the atoms near the centre will decay first because they are surrounded by more atoms.  d the atoms near the surface will decay first because the radiation can escape more easily.    40 a detector of ionising radiation gives a background reading of 20 counts  / minute.    a radioactive isotope with a half-life of 2.0 days is brought near to the detector. the reading on  the detector increases to 100 counts  / minute.    how long does it take for the reading on the detector to decrease to 40 counts  / minute?  a 2.0 days b 4.0 days c 5.0 days d 10 days    ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/m/j/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.  ib17 06_0625_22/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *7478947670* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  1 what is the most accurate and precise method to measure the thickness of a coin?  a use a micrometer screw gauge.  b use a ruler and look at the scale perpendicularly.  c use a top pan balance.  d use the displacement method with water in a measuring cylinder.      2 a student determines the average speed of a bubble rising through a liquid at constant speed.    when the student starts the stopwatch the bubble is at position p.    after 2.0  s the bubble is at position q.    18 1920212223242526 cm 27q pbubble bubble    what is the speed of the bubble between p and q?  a 3.2  cm  / s b 3.7  cm  / s c 6.4  cm  / s d 7.4  cm  / s     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17 [turn over  3 the diagram shows the speed-time graph for a toy car travelling in a straight line.    01.0 2.0 3.0 time  / s4.0 5.04.0 3.02.01.0 0speed m  / s     what is the acceleration of the car during the first two seconds and what is the total distance that  it travels?     acceleration  m / s2 total  distance  / m  a 0.50 10  b 0.50 20  c 2.0 10  d 2.0 20     4 in which pair are both quantities measured in newtons?  a force and pressure  b force and weight  c mass and pressure  d mass and weight     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  5 the masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the  diagram.    200 100cm3 mass = 80  g200100cm 3 mass = 180  gliquid     what is the density of the liquid?  a 120100g / cm3 b 140100g / cm3 c 120180g / cm3 d 140180g / cm3      6 a spring which obeys hooke\u2019s law has an unstretched length of 10  cm.    a load of 20  n is hung from the spring.    the new length of the spring is 36  cm.    what is the spring constant k of the spring?  a 0.56  n / cm b 0.77  n / cm c 1.3  n / cm d 1.8  n / cm     7 a car travels forwards along a straight horizontal road. only the horizontal forces acting on it are  shown.    driving forceair resistance and friction     the length of each arrow represents the size of each force.    how do these forces affect the motion of the car?  a the car moves at constant speed.  b the car moves backwards.  c the car slows down.  d the car\u2019s forward speed increases.    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17 [turn over  8 the diagram shows a wooden beam of weight 20  n. the centre of mass of the beam is labelled  m.    there is a pivot at one end of the beam. the beam is kept horizontal by an upward force, f.    1.2 m2.0 mf m 20 npivot wooden beam     what is the magnitude of f ?  a 12  n b 20  n c 30  n d 33  n      9 a ball of mass 2.0  kg is travelling at a speed of 12  m / s. it moves towards an object of mass 3.0  kg  which is at rest.    12 m / s 2.0 kg3.0 kg at rest     the ball hits the object and sticks to it.    which row gives the total momentum, and the speed of both objects immediately after the  collision?     total momentum  kg  m / s speed  m / s  a 0 4.8  b 0 8.0  c 24 4.8  d 24 8.0    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  10 an object falls from a height of 5.0  m.    air resistance can be ignored.    as it hits the ground the object has 750  j of kinetic energy.    what is its mass?  a 15  kg b 50  kg c 75  kg d 150  kg     11 an electric generator produces an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 200  v and produces a current of  3.0  a in a circuit. the generator is driven by an engine with a power of 2.4  kw.    what is the efficiency of the generator?  a 2.8% b 25% c 28% d 36%    12 the diagrams show athletes training by stretching springs.    each spring has the same stiffness.    which athlete does the most work?    a one spring stretched by 0.60  m two springs stretched by 0.60  mb one spring stretched by 0.80  m cd two springs stretched by 0.80  m    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17 [turn over  13 four different liquids are poured into four containers.    the diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.    in which container is the pressure on its base the greatest?    a liquid density = 3.1  g / cm310 cmb liquid density = 1.2  g / cm320 cmc liquid density = 1.3  g / cm330 cmd liquid density = 0.8  g / cm340 cm       14 brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.    what causes the smoke particles to move at random?  a smoke particles are hit by air molecules.  b smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.  c smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.  d smoke particles hit the walls of the container.     15 a student blows air through a liquid using a straw. this causes the liquid to evaporate quickly and  therefore to cool.    which statement explains why the remaining liquid cools?  a slower-moving molecules are carried away by the air bubbles.  b the air molecules conduct heat from the liquid.  c the air sets up convection currents in the liquid.  d the molecules with most energy leave the liquid.      16 what is meant by the specific latent heat of fusion of ice?  a the energy needed to change unit mass of ice into water at constant temperature  b the energy needed to change unit volume of ice into water at constant temperature  c the energy needed to produce unit temperature increase of unit mass of ice  d the energy needed to produce unit temperature increase of unit volume of ice     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  17 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.    liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power .    each liquid has the same rise in temperature.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a each beaker of liquid has the same thermal capacity.  b each beaker of liquid receives the same energy.  c liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17 [turn over  18 a copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. a piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.    the bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side  only.    paper copper wood heat    which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?     brown side wood copper  a copper conductor insulator  b copper insulator conductor  c wood conductor insulator  d wood insulator conductor    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  19 different waves hit barriers with different sized gaps.    the waves will diffract.    in which diagram does the greatest spreading occur?    gap 2.0  cma barrier wavelength 1.0 cmgap 2.0  cmb barrier wavelength 2.0 cm wavelength 2.0 cmgap 3.0  cmc barrier wavelength 1.0 cmgap 3.0  cmd barrier      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17 [turn over  20 the incomplete ray diagram shows two rays of light that have passed from one point on an object  through a thin converging lens.    lens rightobject rays of lightleft     which type of image is formed, and on which side of the lens is it formed?     type of image which side of lens  a real on the left  b real on the right  c virtual on the left  d virtual on the right     21 which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?    a  spectrum b spectrum c spectrumd spectrumwhite light white lightwhite light white light     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  22 light travels in a vacuum and then enters a glass block. the speed of the light in the glass block  is 2.0 \u00d7 108  m / s.    which statement about the speed of light is correct?  a the speed in a vacuum is 1.5 times the speed in the glass.  b the speed in the glass is the same as the speed in a vacuum.  c the speed in the glass is 1.5 times the speed in a vacuum.  d the speed in the glass is 1.0 \u00d7 108 times the speed in a vacuum.      23 a fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. an engineer adjusts the alarm so that it  produces a louder note of a higher pitch.  what effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?     amplitude frequency  a larger greater  b larger smaller  c smaller greater  d smaller smaller      24 a student demagnetises a magnetised steel bar.    he places the bar in a solenoid connected to a power supply. he then removes the bar from the solenoid.    which row indicates the most effective way of demagnetising the bar?     type of  power supply speed to  remove bar  a a.c. fast  b a.c. slow  c d.c. fast  d d.c. slow     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17 [turn over  25 a magnet near a coil of wire is attracted to the coil only when there is a current in the coil.    which statement explains this force of attraction?  a the coil of wire has its own gravitational field.  b the coil of wire is made from soft iron.  c the current in the coil of wire creates a magnetic field.  d the current in the coil of wire induces a charge on the magnet.     26 what is wrong with this labelled diagram of a permanent magnet?    n siron disc     a the cross-section should be rectangular.  b the length should be greater than the diameter.  c the magnet should be made of steel.  d the n-pole and the s-pole should be reversed.    27 a student tests the electrical conduction of four materials.    aluminium  iron plastic silver    which materials conduct electricity?  a aluminium, iron and silver only  b aluminium and silver only  c iron, silver and plastic only  d plastic only     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  28 what is the unit of charge?  a ampere  b coulomb  c ohm  d volt      29 an isolated metal sphere is positively charged.    it is then brought near to another isolated metal sphere that is neutral.    ++ + +++++++++ neutral metal spherepositively charged metal sphere    what happens to the charges on the neutral sphere as the positively charged sphere is brought  close to it?  a some positive charges move to the left and some negative charges move to the right.  b some positive charges move to the right and some negative charges move to the left.  c some positive charges move to the right, but the negative charges do not move.  d the positive charges do not move, but some negative charges move to the left.      30 which diagram is the current-voltage ( i-v) characteristic graph for a metallic conductor at  constant temperature?    a 00 vib 00 vic 00 vid 00 vi      ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17 [turn over  31 four circuits each contain a 6  v battery, a diode, an ammeter and a lamp. none of the  components is faulty.    which circuit shows a possible ammeter reading?    aa reading = 1.0  aab reading = 0  a ac reading = 1.0  aad reading = \u20131.0  a     32 a student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.    r  s t v  12  v     what happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal t is moved from r to s?  a it decreases from 12  v to 0  v.  b it increases from 0  v to 12  v.  c it remains at 0  v.  d it remains at 12  v.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  33 the diagram shows an electric circuit.    10 \u03c90.40  a 20 \u03c9     what is the potential difference (p.d.) across the ldr?  a 4.0  v b 8.0  v c 25  v d 50  v     34 what does the symbol shown represent?        a an and gate  b a nor gate  c a not gate  d an or gate     35 what is the purpose of a relay?  a to change a large voltage into a small voltage  b to change a small voltage into a large voltage  c to use a large current to switch on a small current  d to use a small current to switch on a large current      36 which device uses a split-ring commutator?  a a d.c. motor  b a relay  c a transformer  d an a.c. generator     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  37 which particle has a negative charge?  a an alpha particle  b an electron  c a neutron  d a proton      38 a type of nuclear reaction takes place in stars.    which row describes this type of reaction?     nuclear reaction nuclei formed energy transfer  a fission larger than original nuclei released  b fission smaller than original nuclei absorbed  c fusion larger than original nuclei released  d fusion smaller than original nuclei absorbed    39 a sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.    the nuclei of which atoms will decay first?  a it is impossible to know because radioactive decay is random.  b it is impossible to know unless the age of the material is known.  c the atoms near the centre will decay first because they are surrounded by more atoms.  d the atoms near the surface will decay first because the radiation can escape more easily.     40 a sample of a radioactive isotope emits particles at a rate of 240 per minute.    after 48 hours the rate of emission has decreased to 15 per minute.    what is the half-life of the radioactive material?  a 4.0 hours b 8.0 hours c 12 hours d 16 hours    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  blank page",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/m/j/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib17 06_0625_23_vi_yel/fp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *3182427838* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/23     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number a nd candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you. do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each questi on there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet.  electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  1 what is the most accurate and precise method to measure the thickness of a coin?  a use a micrometer screw gauge.  b use a ruler and look at the scale perpendicularly.  c use a top pan balance.  d use the displacement method with water in a measuring cylinder.      2 a pendulum is swinging. five students each meas ure the time it takes to swing through ten  complete swings.    three students measure the time as 17.2  s. another student measures it as 16.9  s, and the fifth  student measures it as 17.0  s.    what is the average period of the pendulum?  a 1.69  s b 1.70  s c 1.71  s d 1.72  s     3 which distance-time graph represents a body whose speed is decreasing?    a 00distance timeb 00distance time c 00distance timed 00distance time    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17 [turn over  4 what are the units for mass, pressure and velocity?     mass pressure velocity  a kg n  s pa  b kg pa m  / s  c n s pa m  / s  d pa n  s m  / s      5 a steel ball bearing has a mass of 24  g and a density of 8.0  g / cm3. it is lowered into a measuring  cylinder containing 12  cm3 of water.    what is the new water level in the cylinder?  a 3.0  cm3 b 4.0  cm3 c 15  cm3 d 16  cm3      6 the diagram shows an object being acted upon by two forces.    3.0 n 6.0 n     what is the size of the resultant force on the object?  a 2.0  n b 3.0  n c 9.0  n d 18  n     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  7 the diagram shows a man holding a sack and barrow stationary. he applies a vertical force to  the handle.    the centre of mass and the weight of the sack and barrow are shown. the wheel acts as a pivot.    weight of sack and barrow 200  n15 cm 45  cm80 cm20 cmforce exerted by man centre of mass of sack and barrow     what is the magnitude of the vertical force exerted by the man?  a 38  n b 50  n c 67  n d 200  n     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17 [turn over  8 the diagram shows the only two forces f1 and f2 acting on an object. the magnitude of each  force is represented by the length of each arrow.    f2110 \u00b0f1     the resultant force acting on the object is r.    which vector diagram shows how forces f1 and f2 add to produce r?    f1 f2110 \u00b0a f1f270\u00b0 r rrb f1 f2110 \u00b0c f1f2r 70\u00b0d      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  9 the diagrams show four bodies moving in the directions shown. the only forces acting on the  bodies are shown in each diagram.    which body gains the most kinetic energy when moving a distance of 1.0  m?    a 20 n 10 nb 10 n c 10 n3 0  n3 0  n 25 ndmovement movement movementmovement      10 a steel ball is fired vertically upwards with a velocity v. the ball reaches a height h.    the same ball is now fired vertically upwards from the same position with a velocity 2 v.    air resistance can be ignored.    what is the new height reached by the ball?  a h b 2h c 4h d 8h    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17 [turn over  11 a solar panel is used to recharge a battery. the solar panel produces 0.80  w of electrical power.  the panel is 20% efficient.    solar panel sunlight power to battery 0.80  w     what is the power input of the sunlight onto the solar panel?  a 0.16  w b 4.0  w c 8.0  w d 16  w     12 the diagrams show four different athletes training by doing pull-ups.    which athlete does the most work?    a weight of athlete = 700  n distance lifted = 0.50  mb weight of athlete = 700  n distance lifted = 0.55  mc weight of athlete = 800  n distance lifted = 0.50  md weight of athlete = 800  n distance lifted = 0.55  m    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  13 four different liquids are poured into four containers.    the diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.    in which container is the pressure on its base the greatest?    a liquid density = 3.1  g / cm310 cmb liquid density = 1.2  g / cm320 cmc liquid density = 1.3  g / cm330 cmd liquid density = 0.8  g / cm340 cm       14 brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.    what causes the smoke particles to move at random?  a smoke particles are hit by air molecules.  b smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.  c smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.  d smoke particles hit the walls of the container.     15 the diagrams show four open dishes. each dish contains water at the same temperature.    the dishes are different shapes and a draught blows over two of them.    from which container does the water evaporate at the greatest rate?    a draughtb draught no draught no draughtc d      ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17 [turn over  16 equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.    liquid 1 is heated for 100  s and liquid 2 is heated for 200  s by heaters of the same power .    each liquid has the same rise in temperature.    liquid 1 liquid 2 heating time = 100  s heating time = 200  sdifferent liquids of same mass     which statement is correct?  a each beaker of liquid has the same thermal capacity.  b each beaker of liquid receives the same energy.  c liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.  d the thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  17 a block of ice at \u201320  \u00b0c is heated until it turns to steam. the graph of temperature against thermal  energy absorbed is shown.    the latent heat of fusion of ice is 340  kj / kg.    100 80 604020 0 \u201320temperature \u00b0c 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 1146  kj 126  kj 2406  kj thermal energy absorbed  / kj    what is the mass of the ice?  a 1.0  kg b 2.0  kg c 3.0  kg d 4.0  kg     18 a copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. a piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.    the bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side  only.    paper copper wood heat    which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?     brown side wood copper  a copper conductor insulator  b copper insulator conductor  c wood conductor insulator  d wood insulator conductor     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17 [turn over  19 different waves hit barriers with different sized gaps.    the waves will diffract.    in which diagram does the greatest spreading occur?    gap 2.0  cma barrier wavelength 1.0 cmgap 2.0  cmb barrier wavelength 2.0 cm wavelength 2.0 cmgap 3.0  cmc barrier wavelength 1.0 cmgap 3.0  cmd barrier      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  20 a converging lens is used to make an image on a screen.    candlescreen converging lens image formed here     what type of image is formed on the screen?  a real and inverted  b real and upright  c virtual and inverted  d virtual and upright     21 which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?    a  spectrum b spectrum c spectrumd spectrumwhite light white lightwhite light white light     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17 [turn over  22 light travels in a vacuum and then enters a glass blo ck. the speed of the light in the glass block  is 2.0 \u00d7 108  m / s.    which statement about the speed of light is correct?  a the speed in a vacuum is 1.5 times the speed in the glass.  b the speed in the glass is the same as the speed in a vacuum.  c the speed in the glass is 1.5 times the speed in a vacuum.  d the speed in the glass is 1.0 \u00d7 108 times the speed in a vacuum.      23 a fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. an engineer adjusts the alarm so that it  produces a louder note of a higher pitch.  what effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?     amplitude frequency  a larger greater  b larger smaller  c smaller greater  d smaller smaller      24 in which way are a bar magnet and an electromagnet similar?  a a bar magnet and an electromagnet are always magnetised when stored.  b a bar magnet and an electromagnet can both be used to separate magnetic and   non-magnetic materials.  c a bar magnet can be made of steel and an electromagnet uses a steel core.  d the magnetic field strength of a bar magnet and of an electromagnet can both be varied.      25 a magnet near a coil of wire is attracted to the coil only when there is a current in the coil.    which statement explains this force of attraction?  a the coil of wire has its own gravitational field.  b the coil of wire is made from soft iron.  c the current in the coil of wire creates a magnetic field.  d the current in the coil of wire induces a charge on the magnet.    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  26 a steel magnet is placed in a coil and demagnetised.    which type of current is established in the coil, and how is the current changed?  a a direct current in the coil, then reduce the current quickly to zero  b a direct current in the coil, then reduce the current slowly to zero  c an alternating current in the coil, then reduce the current quickly to zero  d an alternating current in the coil, then reduce the current slowly to zero      27 which material is a conductor of electricity?  a brass  b glass  c plastic  d wood     28 the diagrams each show a positive point charge.    which diagram represents the pattern and the direction of the electric field due to the charge?    +a +b +cd +      29 which quantity is equivalent to 1.0  v?  a 1.0  j / c b 1.0  kj / c c 1.0  j / s d 1.0  kj / s      30 a circuit contains a fixed resistor. the potential difference across the resistor is 24.0  v and the  current in the resistor is 2.30  a.    how much energy is transferred in the resistor in a time of 17.0  minutes?  a 938  j b 5630  j c 56.3  kj d 9.38  kj    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17 [turn over  31 a battery, an ammeter, a switch, a lamp and a resistor are connected together in a circuit.    a     with the switch open, the ammeter reads 2.4  a. when the switch is closed, this reading increases  to 4.0  a.    what is the current through the resistor with the switch closed?  a 0  a b 1.6  a c 3.2  a d 6.4  a     32 a student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.    r  s t v  12  v     what happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal t is moved from r to s?  a it decreases from 12  v to 0  v.  b it increases from 0  v to 12  v.  c it remains at 0  v.  d it remains at 12  v.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  33 the diagram shows a circuit used to make a light detector.    a xy    one component is connected between x and y.    which component causes the ammeter reading to increase when the light gets brighter?    a b c d      34 a truth table for a type of logic gate is shown.    input 1 input 2 output  0 0 0  0 1 1  1 0 1  1 1 1    which type of logic gate is it?  a and b nor c not d or    35 in which device is a split-ring commutator used, and what is its purpose?     device purpose  a   a.c. generator   to change the direction of the  current in the coil as it turns  b   a.c. generator   to change the output current  from d.c. into a.c.  c   d.c. motor   to change the direction of the  current in the coil as it turns  d   d.c. motor   to change the input current  from a.c. into d.c.    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17 [turn over  36 what is the purpose of a relay?  a to change a large voltage into a small voltage  b to change a small voltage into a large voltage  c to use a large current to switch on a small current  d to use a small current to switch on a large current      37 when a source of d-particles is directed towards a thin metal foil they become scattered.    which observation of this experiment provides evidence for a small charged nucleus?  a a small proportion of the d-particles come straight back from the foil towards the source.  b a small proportion of the d-particles pass straight through the foil.  c some of the d-particles are deflected by an angle of less than 90 \u00b0.  d some of the d-particles follow a curved path after leaving the foil.      38 which description of a neutral atom of copper is correct?  a a nucleus surrounded by electrons  b a nucleus surrounded by molecules  c electrons surrounded by a nucleus  d electrons surrounded by molecules      39 a sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.    the nuclei of which atoms will decay first?  a it is impossible to know because radioactive decay is random.  b it is impossible to know unless the age of the material is known.  c the atoms near the centre will decay first because they are surrounded by more atoms.  d the atoms near the surface will decay first because the radiation can escape more easily.    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  40 a student determines the half-life of a radioactive isotope.    the student uses a detector over five minutes and plots a graph showing how the count rate shown on the detector varies with time.    the count rate due to background radiation is 30 counts per minute.    250 200150100 50 0 0 1 2 3 4 5count rate counts  / minute time  / minutes    what is the half-life of this isotope?  a 0.30 minutes  b 1.2 minutes  c 1.5 minutes  d 5.0 minutes    ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/m/j/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/jg) 148052/5  r \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4319809767* physics  0625/31 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 a pipe drips water into an empty glass jar. a student takes measurements to find how fast the  water is rising up the jar. fig. 1.1 shows the arrangement. pipe water drip glass jar water fig. 1.1  (a) the student measures the depth of the water every minute.   state the two pieces of equipment that she uses. 1.  .. 2.  .. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) the student records her observations in a table. she then plots a graph using the axes shown  in fig. 1.2. 00 fig. 1.2   (i) on fig. 1.2, label both axes with title and unit.  [2]   (ii) the water rises up the jar at a constant rate.    draw a line on fig. 1.2 to show the student\u2019s graph. start the line from the time when the  jar is empty.  [2]  (c) a puddle of water forms on the ground. the average depth of the water is 2.5  mm.   determine the average depth of the water in m.  depth =  .  m  [2] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 three racing cars, a, b and c, all accelerate steadily and then continue at a constant speed.  fig. 2.1 gives information about the movement of car a and car b at the start of the race. 0 10 20 30 40010203040 time  / sspeed m / s a b fig. 2.1  (a) state the maximum speed of car a.  ..  [1]  (b) calculate the distance travelled by car b when accelerating.  distance =  .  m  [3]  (c) car c has a greater acceleration than car a, but it reaches a lower constant speed than car b.   on fig. 2.1, draw a line to show the movement of car c.  [2] [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows a tyre hanging from the branch of a tree. 2.5 m pbranch rope tyre fig. 3.1  (a) the mass of the tyre is 15  kg.   calculate its weight.  weight of tyre =  ..  n  [2]  (b) the weight of the tyre exerts a moment on the branch, about point p where the branch joins  the tree.   (i) explain what is meant by the term moment .  ..  [1]   (ii) a child sits on the tyre. the weight of the child and tyre together is 425  n. calculate the  moment of this force about point p. use information given in fig. 3.1. include the unit.  moment =  ..  [4]   (iii) a heavier child wants to sit on the tyre. describe how the tyre position should be adjusted  so that the moment is the same as in (b)(ii) .  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 fig. 4.1 shows a hydroelectric power system located in the mountains. reservoir areservoir b reservoir c pipeline pipeline citypumping stationhydroelectric station fig. 4.1  (a) the reservoirs store energy.   state the terms used to describe the energy stored in the reservoirs.  ..  [1]  (b) describe how the energy stored in reservoir c becomes useful energy for the city at the  hydroelectric station.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (c) some of the stored energy is wasted. explain what happens to this energy.  ...  ..  [2]  (d) water from reservoirs a and b may flow into reservoir c. it is more efficient to fill reservoir c  using water from reservoir b only.   suggest a reason for this.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 a laboratory floor has a surface that prevents people from slipping when the floor is wet.  (a) name the force that prevents a person from slipping.  ..  [1]  (b) a stool has a round non-slip pad fitted to the bottom of each leg.   (i) the stool has four legs. the area of each pad is 3  cm2. the weight of the stool is 75  n.  a student sits on the stool. the weight of the student is 525  n.    calculate the pressure acting on the floor due to the student and the stool.  pressure =  ..  n / cm2  [5]   (ii) the legs of the stool are made of hollow metal tubes. fig. 5.1 shows the bottom of a  stool leg with and without a pad. with pad without a padmetal tube fig. 5.1    explain why a stool leg without a pad does more damage to the floor.  ...  ..  [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 6 fig. 6.1 shows workers pouring liquid metal. fig. 6.1  (a) the metal changes from hot liquid to cool solid.   describe what happens to the arrangement, separation and motion of the atoms as the metal  changes from hot liquid to cool solid.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (b) the workers cool their tools in water. they spill some water onto the floor but later the floor is  dry.   explain what happens to the water. state the name of the process. explanation  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... process  . [3] [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 7 this question is about the electromagnetic spectrum.  (a) fig. 7.1 shows labels for parts of the electromagnetic spectrum, in order. radio wavesmicrowaves visible light gamma raysinfra-red radiation.. .. fig. 7.1  complete fig. 7.1 by adding the two missing labels.  [2]  (b) state a use of infra-red radiation.  ..  [1]  (c) describe the harmful effect of microwaves on people.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 4]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 iodine-131 is a radioactive isotope of iodine. iodine-131 decays by the emission of a \u03b2-particle  and a \u03b3-ray.  (a) a nucleus of iodine-131 can be represented as 131 53i   determine the number of neutrons in a nucleus of iodine-131.  number of neutrons  ..  [1]  (b) \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays are ionising radiations.   explain the meaning of ionising  radiations.  ...  ..  [1]  (c) fig. 8.1 shows a decay curve for iodine-131. 004000800012 00016 00020 00024 00028 00032 000 481216202428323640count rate counts  / minute time  / days fig. 8.1   use information from fig. 8.1 to determine the half-life of iodine-131. show clearly how you  used the graph.  half-life =    days  [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) a different radioactive substance has a half-life of 120 hours.   calculate the time for it to decay to 25% of its original amount.  time =  ...  hours  [2] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 fig. 9.1 shows the position of a man working in a rock quarry. a single explosion is used to break  part of one rock face. front rock faceback rock faceexplosion man 430  m170  m fig. 9.1  (a) explain why the man sees the flash of the explosion before he hears the bang.  ...  ..  [1]  (b) the man hears a second bang shortly after the first bang.   (i) state the name given to this second bang.  ..  [1]   (ii) state how the second bang compares with the first bang in terms of its amplitude and  speed. amplitude  ... speed   [2]  (c) the man stands 170  m from the back rock face. the time between hearing the first bang and  hearing the second bang is 1.0  s.   use the information in fig. 9.1 to determine the speed of sound in the quarry.  speed of sound =  ..  m / s  [3] [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 10 fig. 10.1 shows a demonstration with magnets. strong magnet small magnet string bench fig. 10. 1  the strong magnet has a pole on its top surface and a pole on its bottom surface. the strong  magnet is placed above a small magnet that is connected to a bench by a string.  (a) (i) explain why the small magnet is in the position shown in fig. 10.1.  ...  ..  [2]   (ii) the strong magnet is turned so that the opposite surface is now facing the small magnet.  state and explain what happens, if anything.  ..  [1]  (b) (i) describe a method for magnetising an iron pin using a permanent magnet.  ...  ...  ..  [2]   (ii) explain how you would identify the poles of the magnet made in (b)(i) .  ...  ..  [2] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 11 fig. 11.1 shows a power supply in series with a resistance wire and a switch. power supply thin resistance wire fig. 11.1  (a) when the switch is closed, energy is transferred from the power supply. explain what happens  to this energy.  ...  ..  [2]  (b) a student wants to determine the resistance of the wire. he adds components to the circuit  shown in fig. 11.1.   (i) he measures the current in the circuit. state the name of the component that he uses.  ..  [1]   (ii) the student measures the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistance wire.  on fig. 11.1, draw the correct symbol for the component he uses and show how he  connects it.  [2]   (iii) fig. 11.2 shows the symbol for another component that the student adds to the circuit. fig. 11.2    state the name and function of this component. name  . function  ..  ... [2] [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 12 a student demonstrates electromagnetic induction.  (a) describe how to demonstrate electromagnetic induction using a magnet, a coil of wire and a  sensitive ammeter. you may include a diagram.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (b) state two factors that affect the size of an induced electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.  ... 2.  ..  [2] [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (rw/sw) 125817/6 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4195070969* physics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 fig. 1.1 shows students about to start a 50.0  m swimming race. fig. 1.1  (a) the length of the pool is 50.0  m.   name a suitable piece of equipment that could be used to measure the length of the pool.  ... [1]  (b) the race starts and the students swim to the end of the 50.0  m pool.   fig. 1.2 shows the times recorded on the stop watches for the winner and the swimmer in  second place. 0.5875min s s1 100winner 1.0587min s s1 100second place fig. 1.2   (i) determine the time taken by the winner to swim 50.0  m. use information from fig. 1.2. \t winner\u2019s\ttime\t=\t ..  s [1]   (ii) calculate the average speed of the winner.  average speed =  ..  m/s [2]   (iii) calculate the time difference between the winner and the swimmer in second place.  time difference =  ..  s [1]  [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 (a) the walls of a room are to be painted.   a tin of paint has a total mass of 7000  g and a volume of 5000  cm3.   the empty tin has a mass of 500  g.   (i) determine the mass of the paint.  mass of paint =  ..  g [1]   (ii) calculate the density of the paint. include the unit.  density =  .  [3]  (b) the painter drops a brush into the tin of paint. the brush floats.   suggest why the brush floats.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 fig. 3.1 shows a large sunshade. basesupportpivotarm sunshade fig. 3.1  the arm holding the sunshade pivots about the end of a support.  (a) the sunshade has a mass of 20.0  kg.   calculate the weight of the sunshade.  weight =  .  n [3]  (b) (i) another sunshade is shown in fig. 3.2.    this sunshade weighs 180  n.    the arm holding the sunshade extends 2.5  m from the pivot. basesupport 180  npivot2.5 m fig. 3.2    calculate the moment of the sunshade about the pivot.  moment =  ..  n m [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (ii) how can the moment produced by the sunshade be reduced? tick one box.     by decreasing the height of the support     by decreasing the length of the arm holding the sunshade     by increasing the weight of the base     by increasing the weight of the sunshade  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 a house has white wooden walls and a black wooden door, as shown in fig. 4.1. white black fig. 4.1  (a) the sun is shining on the door and the front wall of the house.   (i) state the name of the process by which thermal energy is transferred from the sun to the  earth.  ... [1]   (ii) fig. 4.2 shows part of the white wall and the black door of the house. two thermometers  have been attached, one to the wall and the other to the door. thermometer a thermometer b fig. 4.2    thermometer  a measures the temperature of the white wall. thermometer  b measures  the temperature of the black door.    the thermometer readings are recorded after the sun has been shining on the house for  some time.    suggest which thermometer has the higher temperature and explain why. higher temperature   explanation    ...  ...  ... [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) the air conditioning unit inside a room in the house is switched on. the air conditioning unit  takes in warm air and gives out cold air, as shown in fig. 4.3. doorcold air air conditioning unitceiling room fig. 4.3   explain how the air conditioning unit cools all the air in the room.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 5 (a) a potato snack packet is taken onto an aeroplane. during the flight the pressure inside the  aeroplane changes and the potato snack packet changes shape, as shown in fig.  5.1. potaansckto potato snack potato snack potaanscktopotato snack packet before flight potato snack packet during flight fig. 5.1   explain why the packet changes shape. use ideas about the gas molecules inside and  outside the packet in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) a deep-sea diver on a diving-boat experiences atmospheric pressure. when she is working  underwater, she experiences an increased pressure.   state two factors that affect the size of the increased pressure. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) fig. 5.2 shows a device used for measuring atmospheric pressure. mercury fig. 5.2   (i) state the name of the device shown in fig. 5.2.  ... [1]   (ii) fig. 5.3 shows a manometer connected to a gas supply. the pressure of the gas supply  is greater than atmospheric pressure. atmospheric pressure is equal to 1033.6  cm of  water. 1 cm234 watergas supply fig. 5.3    determine the pressure of the gas supply.  pressure =  .  cm of water  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows an overhead view of two cars approaching a road junction. a plane mirror  helps the drivers to see other cars. driver 2 tall buildingdriver 1ray of light from car 1plane mirror car 1car 2road fig. 6.1   (i) a ray of light from car 1 is shown.    on fig. 6.1, clearly draw the normal to the plane mirror where this ray hits the plane  mirror. label the normal n.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, carefully draw the reflected ray of light.  [1]   (iii) state the law used in your answer to (a)(ii) .  ... [1]   (iv) can each driver see the other car?  ...    explain your answer.  ... [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a ray of light incident on a glass block. ray of lightglass block fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, continue the path of the ray into the block.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.2, clearly label the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r. [2]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 7 fig. 7.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. radio wavesmicrowavesinfra-red waves1ultraviolet wavesx-rays 2 fig. 7.1  (a) (i) give the names of the two regions that are labelled 1 and 2. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]   (ii) use words from the box to complete the sentence.    acceleration            amplitude            frequency            speed            wavelength    compared with other regions in the electromagnetic spectrum, radio waves have the     largest . and the smallest . .  [2]  (b) sound is not an electromagnetic wave.   give one other way in which sound waves are different from radio waves.  ... [1]  (c) two students, x and y, carry out an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air.   x has two blocks of wood that make a loud, sharp sound when banged together.   y has a tape measure and a stopwatch.   describe how x and y can use the equipment to measure the speed of sound in air.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 9]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a bar magnet. s n fig. 8.1   on fig. 8.1, draw lines to show the shape of the magnetic field around the bar magnet.   include at least one arrow to show the direction of the field.  [3]  (b) explain how a coil of wire can be used to create a bar magnet from a suitable piece of metal.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) which of these metals could be used to make a bar magnet? tick one box.     aluminium     copper     soft iron     steel  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 fig. 9.1 shows a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field. batteryccoil connections to batterydb a f + \u2013n scurrent fig. 9.1  the direction of the current in side ab of the coil is labelled.  the force f on side ab is also labelled.  (a) on fig. 9.1, draw   \u2022  an arrow labelled x, on side cd, to show the direction of the current in this side of the  coil,   \u2022 an arrow labelled p, to show the direction of the force on cd.  [2]  (b) give two ways of increasing the forces f and p on the sides of the coil. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) (i) name the particles that flow in the metal wire of the coil.  ... [1]   (ii) the wire of the coil is replaced by a thinner wire. this wire is the same length and is  made of the same metal.    state and explain how this changes the current in the coil.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 a student wants to investigate how the resistance of a light-dependent resistor (ldr) varies with  the brightness of the light in the room.  (a) to investigate this, the student connects the circuit shown in fig. 10.1. vv fig. 10.1   the student has made three errors.   identify the three\terrors\tin\tthe\tstudent\u2019s\tcircuit. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ... 3.  ...  ...  [3]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) the student corrects the errors. his results are shown in fig. 10.2. 0 0 20 40 60 % of full brightnessresistance of ldr  / \u03c9 80 100200040006000800010 00012 00014 00016 00018 000 fig. 10.2   (i) use the information in fig. 10.2 to describe how the brightness of the light in the room  affects the resistance of the ldr.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) the potential difference across the ldr is 8.0  v.    calculate the current in the ldr when the light is 60% of full brightness.  current =  ..  a [4]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 11 (a) the plug for a television contains a fuse.   explain the purpose of the fuse.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) the circuit of the television includes transformers.   (i) state the metal used for the two coils of each transformer.  ... [1]   (ii) one transformer has an input voltage of 224  v and an output voltage of 16.0  v.    the input coil contains 308 turns.    calculate the number of turns on the output coil.  number of turns =  .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 12 fig. 12.1 represents the particles in an atom of the element lithium. xneutron fig. 12.1  (not to scale)  (a) (i) state the name of particle x.  ... [1]   (ii) state the charge of particle x.  ... [1]   (iii) tick one box in fig.  12.2 that correctly represents an isotope of lithium.         fig. 12.2  [1]  (b) a sample of lithium contains 1.00  mg of a radioactive isotope of lithium.   calculate the mass of the isotope that remains after 2 half-lives.  mass =  ...  mg [2]  [total: 5]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (st/sw) 125970/6 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *9365024139* physics  0625/33 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1  a student measures a book.   (a)  he measures the length of the book, as shown in fig. 1.1. physics 0 5 centimetres10 15 20 25 30 fig. 1.1   the student records his measurement.     19.9 cm length of book =  ...   his measurement is not accurate.   describe two ways that the student can improve the accuracy of his measurement. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ... [2]  (b) the book contains 200 thin sheets of paper.   the student wants to find the average (mean) thickness of a sheet of paper in the book.   describe how he can determine such a small distance using only a ruler.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c)  the book has a mass of 400  g.   calculate the weight of the book. include the unit.  weight =  .. [4] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 a student has a laptop computer. the computer is powered by a battery.  (a)  state the word used to describe the energy stored in the battery.  ... [1]  (b)  the student opens the laptop using a force of 3.0  n, as shown in fig. 2.1.   3.0 n 25.0  cm pivot fig. 2.1   (i) calculate the moment of the 3.0  n force about the pivot.  moment =  .  n cm [3]   (ii) the student does work as he opens the laptop.    explain how the principle of conservation of energy applies to this example.  ...  ... [2]  (c)  the student is in a country with many hours of sunshine each day. he charges his laptop  using a solar panel.   give two advantages of using a solar panel, compared with using a mains electrical supply. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2]  (d)  a mains battery charger has a power output of 80  w.   the solar panel has a power output of 16  w.   describe one disadvantage of using the solar panel, compared with using the mains battery  charger.  ... [1] [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 3 a woman drives a car from town a to town b. she stops at a garage during her journey.  the distance-time graph for the journey is shown in fig. 3.1. 0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 time  / hdistance  / km 2.0 2.520406080100120 town atown b fig. 3.1  (a)  (i)  determine the total time for the whole journey.  time =  ...  h [1]   (ii)  determine the time for which the car is not moving.    time =  ...  h [1]   (iii)  determine the distance between town a and town b.  distance =    km [1]   (iv)  calculate the average speed of the car between 0 and 0.75  h.  average speed =    km / h [3]  (b)  the speed of the car before stopping at the garage is different from its speed after stopping at  the garage.    describe this difference in speed and explain how the graph in fig. 3.1 shows it.  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4  fig. 4.1 shows a car tyre in contact with the road.     roadtyre fig. 4.1  the area of tyre in contact with the road is 0.015  m2.  the tyre exerts a pressure on the road of 240  kn / m2.  (a)  calculate the force on the road from the tyre.  force =  ..  n [4]  (b) the tyre is filled with air at high pressure.    use ideas about molecules to explain how this air exerts a pressure on the inside of the tyre.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 a nuclear power station generates electricity.  (a) the main stages in the operation of a nuclear power station are listed below. they are not in  the correct order.     a  the turbine turns a generator    b  fission produces thermal energy     c  water in the boiler becomes hot    d  steam turns a turbine    e  nuclei split apart in the reactor     f  electromagnetic induction produces the output energy    g  steam is produced    complete the flow chart to describe how a nuclear power station works. insert the missing  letters in the empty boxes.   e          c          d           [3]  (b)  some people are opposed to the use of nuclear power stations.   give two disadvantages of using nuclear power stations. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (c)  one use of electricity is to turn an electric motor.   the efficiency of an electric motor is always less than 100  %.    state the meaning of the term efficiency .  ...  ... [2] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 6  (a)  the diagrams in fig. 6.1 show reflection , refraction  and diffraction .   on fig. 6.1, write the correct word next to each diagram for the process shown. ray of light ray of light air waterbarrier  . . fig. 6.1 [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a transverse wave. 0displacement distance fig. 6.2   (i)  on fig. 6.2, label the amplitude of the wave.   [1]   (ii)  on fig. 6.2, label the wavelength of the wave.  [1]  (c)  a thin converging lens forms an image of an object, as shown in fig. 6.3. objectlens imagex y fig. 6.3   only one ray is shown in fig. 6.3.   on fig. 6.3, draw two more rays from point x on the object that can be used to locate point y  on the image.   [2] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 7  a sound wave is a longitudinal wave.  fig. 7.1 shows a spring being used to demonstrate a longitudinal wave. spring coilsdirection of wave travel fig. 7.1  (a) the coils of the spring vibrate.    draw two arrows on fig. 7.1 to show the directions of the vibrations.  [2]  (b) through which of these is sound not able to travel? tick one box.    air    steel    vacuum    water [1]  (c)  (i) very old people cannot hear the highest frequencies of sound that can be heard by  young people.     suggest the highest frequency that very old people can hear.  ... [2]   (ii) state the meaning of the term ultrasound .  ... [1] [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 8  a theatre has three coloured lamps. fig. 8.1 shows the circuit for the coloured lamps. it is not  complete. redypower supply x green blue fig. 8.1  (a) the circuit needs additional components so that \u2022 each lamp can be switched on and off separately, \u2022 the brightness of each lamp can be changed.   complete the circuit diagram in fig. 8.1.   [3]  (b) suggest the purpose of switch x.  ... [1]  (c) state the name of component y and describe how it works. name  . description    ...  ...  ...  ... [3] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 (a) a student has four similar metal bars. two of the bars are permanent magnets, one is a bar of  unmagnetised iron and the other is a bar of tin.   in four different experiments, the bars are placed end-to-end in pairs, as shown in fig. 9.1. n s s n  s n tin  n s n s  s n unmagnetised iron  fig. 9.1   state what happens to each pair of metal bars. choose from the words attract, repel and no  effect. you may use each word once, more than once or not at all.  [2]  (b)  the magnetic properties of soft iron and steel are different.   describe the differences.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 4]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 10 a transformer is connected to a 240  v supply. it is used to provide the correct voltage for the motor  in an electric drill. fig. 10.1 shows the circuit.   mcoil x coil y240  v fig. 10.1  (a) the transformer consists of two coils, labelled coil x and coil y.   state the name of each coil. x  ...   y  ... [1]  (b) coil x has 6400 turns and coil y has 400 turns.   calculate the voltage provided to the motor of the electric drill.  voltage =  ..  v [3]  [total: 4]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 11  fig. 11.1 shows a coil connected in series with a d.c. supply. b coila fig. 11.1  (a) fig. 11.2 shows a plan view of the coil. the arrows represent the current direction at the top  of the coil. b a fig. 11.2   on fig. 11.2, draw lines to show the magnetic field due to the current in the coil.  \u2022 draw two field lines above the line ab and two lines below it. \u2022 add arrows to show the direction of the magnetic field.  [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) (i)  an iron rod is placed inside the coil, as shown in fig. 11.3. iron rod fig. 11.3    state the name given to the combination of iron rod and coil when used in this way.  ... [1]   (ii)  the arrangement shown in fig. 11.3 is adapted to a number of commercial uses.    suggest one of these uses.  ... [1] [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 (a)  a scientist has a sample of a radioactive substance.   suggest how he can determine whether the sample is emitting \u03b1-particles and whether it is  emitting \u03b2-particles.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  (b) the table lists the charge and location of particles in an atom.    complete the table by stating the charge and the location for each type of particle in an atom. particle charge location electron negative neutron proton in the nucleus [3] [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (st/jg) 129077/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8058158713* physics  0625/41 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for an ice skater. 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0speed m / s time t / s024681012   fig. 1.1  (a) explain what is meant by deceleration .    ... [1]  (b) use fig. 1.1 to determine     (i) the distance travelled between times t = 3.0  s and t = 6.0  s,    distance =  ... [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (ii) the deceleration between times t = 3.0  s and t = 6.0  s.    deceleration =  ... [2]  (c) (i) state what happens to the size of the deceleration after time t = 6.0  s.    ...  ... [1]     (ii) state what happens to the resultant force on the skater after time t = 6.0  s.    ...  ... [1] [total: 7]  ",
            "4": "4 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 a footballer kicks a ball vertically upwards. initially, the ball is stationary.  (a) his boot is in contact with the ball for 0.050  s. the average resultant force on the ball during  this time is 180  n. the ball leaves his foot at 20  m / s.     calculate   (i) the impulse of the force acting on the ball,    impulse =  ... [2]   (ii) the mass of the ball,    mass =  ... [2]   (iii) the height to which the ball rises. ignore air resistance.    height =  ... [3]  (b) while the boot is in contact with the ball, the ball is no longer spherical.    state the word used to describe the energy stored in the ball.    ... [1] [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over3 fig. 3.1 shows remote sensing equipment on the surface of a distant planet.   fig. 3.1  (a) the mass of the equipment is 350 kg. the acceleration of free fall on the surface of this planet  is 7.5 m / s2.    (i) state what is meant by the term weight .    ...  ... [1]   (ii) calculate the weight of the equipment on the planet.    weight =  ... [2]  (b) the equipment releases a balloon from a point that is a small distance above the surface  of the planet. the atmosphere at the surface of this planet has a density of 0.35 kg / m 3. the  inflated balloon has a mass of 80 g and a volume of 0.30 m3.   make an appropriate calculation and then predict and explain the direction of any motion of  the balloon. show your working.   prediction  .. explanation  ...  ... [4] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 (a) a 240  v, 60  w lamp is connected to a 240  v supply. the lamp has a constant temperature.     state   (i) the rate at which the lamp transfers energy to the surroundings,    rate =  ... [1]   (ii) the names of the thermal processes by which the lamp transfers energy to the  surroundings.    ...  ... [1]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows a thick copper block that has been heated to 400  \u00b0c. one side of the block is  dull black. the other side of the block is polished and shiny.      thermometer a thermometer b copper block dull black surface polished shiny surface   fig. 4.1   (i) in experiment 1, the thermometer bulbs are both painted black. they are placed at equal  distances from the surfaces of the block. the maximum temperature shown by each  thermometer is recorded.    explain any difference between the maximum temperature shown by the two  thermometers.    ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  ",
            "7": "7 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (ii) in experiment 2, the thermometer bulbs are both shiny silver-coloured. they are placed  at the same distances from the surfaces of the block as in experiment 1.    state and explain any differences that are observed in the maximum temperatures  shown by the thermometers in experiments 1 and 2.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) fig. 4.2 shows a firefighter wearing shiny silver-coloured clothing. fig. 4.2     state the benefit to a firefighter of wearing shiny silver-coloured clothing.  ...  ... [1] [total: 8]  ",
            "8": "8 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 5 fig. 5.1 shows some gas trapped in a metal cylinder by a piston. gaspistonmetal cylinder   fig. 5.1  (a) the position of the piston is fixed. the cylinder is moved from a cold room to a warm room.    explain, in terms of molecules, what happens to the pressure of the gas in the cylinder.    ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  (b) the piston is now released. it moves to the right and finally stops.   explain these observations in terms of the pressure and the volume of the gas in the cylinder.    ...  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 6]  ",
            "9": "9 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 6 (a) a ray of light in glass is incident on a boundary with air.     state what happens to the ray when the angle of incidence of the ray is   (i) less than the critical angle of the glass,    ... [1]   (ii) greater than the critical angle of the glass.    ... [1]  (b) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light incident on a glass block at a. the critical angle of the glass   is 41\u00b0.   30\u00b0air ray of lightab glass block   fig. 6.1 (not to scale)   (i) on fig. 6.1, without calculation, continue the ray from point b until it leaves the glass  block.  [2]   (ii) calculate the refractive index of the glass.    refractive index =  ... [2] [total: 6]  ",
            "10": "10 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 7 a loudspeaker produces a sound wave of constant frequency.  (a) state what is meant by frequency .    ...  ... [1]  (b) the sound wave travels in air towards a barrier with a small gap at its centre. fig.  7.1  represents the compressions of the wave travelling towards the barrier.   direction of travel compression\u03bbbarrier gap barrier fig. 7.1   (i) state what is meant by a compression .    ... [1]   (ii) the width of the gap is smaller than the wavelength \u03bb of the wave.     on fig. 7.1, draw the pattern of the compressions after the sound wave has passed  through the gap.  [2]   (iii) the barrier is adjusted so that the gap becomes wider.    describe how this affects the pattern of the compressions after the sound wave has  passed through the gap.    ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) the frequency of the sound wave is 6800  hz. the speed of sound in air is 340  m / s.     (i) calculate the wavelength of the sound wave in air.    wavelength =  ... [2]   (ii) state a typical value for the speed of sound in a liquid.    ... [1] [total: 8]  ",
            "12": "12 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 a bar magnet is made of metal.  (a) suggest a metal from which the bar magnet is made.    ... [1]  (b) fig. 8.1 shows the bar magnet being inserted into a coil of wire. the n-pole and the s-pole of  the bar magnet are marked.   n smovement of magnetcoil   fig. 8.1   the coil is connected to a galvanometer.   (i) explain why the galvanometer deflects as the bar magnet is being inserted into the coil.    ...  ...  ...  ... [3]   (ii) explain what determines the direction of the reading on the galvanometer.    ...  ...  ... [2]    (c) describe a method for demagnetising a bar magnet.    ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 8]  ",
            "13": "13 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 9 (a) the resistance of a circuit component varies with the brightness of the light falling on its  surface.     (i) state the name of the component.    ... [1]   (ii) draw the circuit symbol for this component.   [1]  (b) fig. 9.1 shows a 6.0  v battery connected in series with a 1.2  k\u03c9 resistor and a thermistor.   1.2 k\u03c9 6.0 v v fig. 9.1   (i) at a certain temperature, the resistance of the thermistor is 2.4  k\u03c9.     calculate the reading on the voltmeter.    voltmeter reading =  ... [4]   (ii) the battery connected to the circuit in fig. 9.1 is not changed.    suggest a change that would cause the reading of the voltmeter to decrease.    ... [1] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 (a) describe the movement of charge that causes an object to become positively charged.    ... [1]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows a negatively charged rod held over an uncharged metal sphere.               insulating supportuncharged metal spherenegatively charged rod\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 fig. 10.1   (i) on fig. 10.1, add + and \u2013 signs to represent the results of the movement of charge  within the sphere.  [2]     (ii) describe the actions that must be taken to obtain an even distribution of positive charge  on the surface of the sphere.    ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 5]  ",
            "15": "15 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 11 (a) a radioactive source is tested over a number of hours with a radiation detector. the readings  are shown in table 11.1.   table 11.1 time / hours 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 detector reading  / (counts  / s) 324 96 39 23 21 17 21 20 19 20 18   use the readings to suggest a value for the background count rate during the test, and to  determine the half-life of the sample.  background count rate =  ...  half-life of sample =  ... [4]  (b) hydrogen-3 (tritium) has one proton and two neutrons. the nucleon number of tritium is three.  it decays by emitting a \u03b2-particle.   complete the nuclide equation to show this decay. the symbol x represents the nuclide  produced by this decay.   h \u03b2  + x... .. .. ... [3]  ",
            "16": "16 0625/41/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (c) the arrows in fig. 11.1 show the paths of three \u03b1-particles moving towards gold nuclei in a  thin foil.   gold nucleus gold nucleus gold nucleus   fig. 11.1   on fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the three \u03b1-particles.  [3] [total: 10]  "
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (st/jg) 129079/5 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *2094772086* physics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 (a) (i) speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity.     state how a scalar  quantity differs from a vector  quantity.    ...  ... [1]   (ii) underline the two scalar quantities in the list below.    energy     force     impulse     momentum     temperature  [1]    (b) a boat is moving at constant speed.   on fig. 1.1, sketch a distance-time graph for the boat.   distance time   fig. 1.1    [1]  ",
            "3": "3 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) the boat in (b) is moving due west at a speed of 6.5  m / s relative to the water. the water is  moving due south at 3.5  m / s.   in the space below, draw a scale diagram to determine the size and direction of the resultant  of these two velocities. state the scale used.    scale  ...  size of resultant velocity =  ...  direction of resultant  ... [4] [total: 7]  ",
            "4": "4 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 20172 fig. 2.1 shows a vehicle designed to be used on the moon.   fig. 2.1  the brakes of the vehicle are tested on earth.  (a) the acceleration of free fall on the moon is one sixth (61) of its value on earth.   tick one box in each column of the table to predict the value of that quantity when the vehicle  is used on the moon, compared to the test on earth.   mass of vehicle on  moonweight of vehicle on  moondeceleration of vehicle  on moon with same  braking force 10 # value on earth  6 # value on earth same as value on earth  61 # value on earth  101 # value on earth [3]  ",
            "5": "5 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) fig. 2.2 shows the brake pedal of the vehicle. 24 cm7.0 cmpivotpiston pedallink force exerted by driveroilcylinder   fig. 2.2 (not to scale)   the driver exerts a force on the pedal, which increases the pressure in the oil to operate the  brakes.   the area of the piston in the cylinder is 6.5 # 10\u20134 m2 (0.00065  m2). the pressure increase in  the oil is 5.0 # 105 pa (500  000 pa).   calculate the force exerted by the driver on the brake pedal.  force =  ... [4] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 (a) underline the pair of quantities which must be multiplied together to calculate impulse .      force and mass  force and velocity  mass and time      time and velocity  weight and velocity  force and time   [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a collision between two blocks a and b on a smooth, horizontal surface.   before collision2.4 kga 1.2 kgb after collisiona b 3.0 m / s v   fig. 3.1   before the collision, block a, of mass 2.4  kg, is moving at 3.0  m / s. block b, of mass 1.2  kg, is  at rest.    after the collision, blocks a and b stick together and move with velocity v.   (i) calculate      1. the momentum of block a before the collision,  momentum =  ... [2]    2. the velocity v,  velocity =  ... [2]    3. the impulse experienced by block b during the collision.  impulse =  ... [2]   (ii) suggest why the total kinetic energy of blocks a and b after the collision is less than the  kinetic energy of block a before the collision.  ...  ... [1] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4 a balloon contains a fixed mass of gas.  (a) explain, in terms of the momentum of molecules, how the gas in the balloon exerts a pressure.    ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the gas increases when the volume of the  balloon decreases. the temperature of the gas is constant.    ...  ...  ...  ... [2]    (c) the initial volume of the gas is 500  cm3 and its pressure is 1.1  # 105 pa. the volume is  reduced to 200  cm3. the temperature of the gas is constant.   calculate the new pressure.    pressure =  ... [2] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 5 (a) (i) an electric kettle contains 600  g of water at 20  \u00b0c. the heater in the kettle operates at  240 v. the specific heat capacity of water is 4200  j / (kg \u00b0c).    the current in the heater is 12   a.    calculate the time taken for the temperature of the water to rise to 100  \u00b0c.    time =  ... [4]   (ii) state one assumption you made in your calculation in  (a)(i) .    ... [1]  ",
            "9": "9 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) using the apparatus shown in fig. 5.1, describe an experiment to demonstrate good and bad  emitters of thermal radiation. include the expected results and the conclusion.   you may use a diagram. a ruler supply of hot water 2 thermometers metal water bottleblack sidewhite side fig. 5.1  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4] [total: 9]  ",
            "10": "10 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 6 (a) the graph in fig. 6.1 represents a wave on a rope.   0 20 40 60 80 100 1208.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0 distance along rope  / cmvertical position  / cm fig. 6.1   using fig. 6.1, determine   (i) the amplitude of the wave,    amplitude =  ... [1]   (ii) the wavelength of the wave.    wavelength =  ... [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) a wave travelling on the surface of water has a wavelength of 2.5  cm and a speed of 8.0  cm / s.    calculate the frequency of the wave.    frequency =  ... [2]  (c) the wave in (b) approaches a barrier that has a large gap in its centre.     fig. 6.2 shows the crests of the wave viewed from above. direction of wave travel wave crest\u03bb barriergapbarrier fig. 6.2   the gap in the barrier is larger than the wavelength \u03bb.   (i) on fig. 6.2, draw the pattern formed by three crests after the wave passes through the  gap in the barrier.  [2]   (ii) water is added to the tank and the speed of a wave in the deeper water is greater  than that in the shallower water. the frequency of the wave remains constant but its  wavelength is different.      1. state and explain how the wavelength in the deeper water has changed.     [1]    2. apart from the change in wavelength, describe one other difference in the pattern  formed by the crests after the wave passes through the gap.     [1] [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 7 (a) the speed of light in air is 3.0  # 108 m / s.    the speed of light in a transparent liquid is 2.0  # 108 m / s.     a ray of light is incident on the surface of the liquid at an angle of incidence of 40\u00b0.    calculate     (i) the refractive index of the liquid,    refractive index =  ... [2]   (ii) the angle of refraction in the liquid.    angle of refraction =  ... [2]  ",
            "13": "13 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) fig. 7.1 shows a side view of an object at the bottom of a tank of liquid. light travels slower in  this liquid than in air.   tankeye air liquid object   fig. 7.1   on fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the object into the air. use these rays to locate the image.  label this image i. [3] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 fig. 8.1 shows a 12.0  v power supply connected in a circuit. 12.0  v a x b sliding contactresistance wire   fig. 8.1 (not to scale)  the circuit includes a lamp and a resistance wire ab of constant cross-sectional area. there is a  sliding contact that can be moved between a and b.  (a) the rating of the lamp at normal brightness is 6.0  v, 9.0  w.     calculate     (i) the current in the lamp at normal brightness,    current =  ... [2]   (ii) the resistance of the lamp at normal brightness.    resistance =  ... [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) ab is 1.00  m long and has a resistance of 5.0  \u03c9. the lamp has normal brightness when the  sliding contact is at x.     (i) the sliding contact is moved to b.    explain, without a calculation, why the lamp becomes dimmer.    ...  ...  ... [1]   (ii) calculate the distance ax for the lamp to have normal brightness.    distance ax =  ... [3] [total: 8]  ",
            "16": "16 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 fig. 9.1 shows a horizontal wire pq placed in the gap between the n  pole and the s  pole of a  magnet. n s pq   fig. 9.1  there is a current in the wire in the direction p to q.   a force acts on the current-carrying wire in the magnetic field.  (a) on fig. 9.1, draw     (i) an arrow, labelled m to show the direction of the magnetic field in the gap between the  poles of the magnet,  [1]     (ii) an arrow, labelled f to show the direction of the force on the current-carrying wire due to  the magnetic field of the magnet.  [1]    (b) state the effect of reversing the direction of the current in wire pq.    ... [1]  (c) the magnet is removed and the horizontal, current-carrying wire is left on its own, as shown  in fig. 9.2.   pq   fig. 9.2   (i) on fig. 9.2, sketch the pattern of the magnetic field due to the current in the wire.     indicate the field direction.  [3]     (ii) the current in pq is increased .    state the effect of this change in current on the magnetic field.    ... [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) a small magnet is placed at a point where the magnetic field is vertically upwards. state the  direction of the force on the s  pole of the small magnet.    ...  ... [1] [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 (a) in the space, draw the standard symbol for a light-emitting diode (led). [1]  (b) table 10.1 shows the truth table for a logic gate.   table 10.1 input 1 input 2 output 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0   state the name of the logic gate which has this truth table.    ... [1]    (c) it is possible to connect together the two inputs of the gate in (b).   using two or more of the logic gates in (b), design a circuit with two inputs and one output  which has the truth table shown in table 10.2. table 10.2 input 1 input 2 intermediate point, x output 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1   (i) draw your circuit in the space below.     there is no need to use the symbol for the logic gate. boxes with the two inputs and one  output are sufficient.  [2]   (ii) label an intermediate point of your circuit with the letter x. complete the table with the  logic levels for this point in the blank column of the table.  [1] [total: 5]",
            "19": "19 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 11 (a) the arrows in fig. 11.1 represent the paths of three \u03b1-particles moving towards gold nuclei in  a thin foil. the gold nuclei are shown as shaded circles.     fig. 11.1   on fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the three \u03b1-particles.  [3]  ",
            "20": "20 0625/42/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (b) fig. 11.2 shows a geologist holding a radiation detector near a rock.   radiation detectorrock fig. 11.2   she holds the detector in a fixed position and records the readings shown in table 11.1. table 11.1 time / minutes 0 1 2 3 4 5 detector reading   counts  / minute16 14 17 13 17 15   explain the changes in the detector readings.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) a technician is handling a solid radioactive sample that emits \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles.   the technician wears thick rubber gloves.   explain why this may provide some protection from the radiation, but it is not sufficient  protection.    ...  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (kn/jg) 129080/5 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *0161671419* physics  0625/43 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 (a) acceleration is a vector quantity.   underline the two vector quantities in the list below.   energy    force    frequency    impulse    mass    refractive index  [1]  (b) a car accelerates uniformly from rest at 2.2  m / s2 for 3.0  s.   (i) calculate the speed of the car at time t = 3.0  s.  speed =  ... [2]   (ii) at time t = 3.0  s, it has travelled a distance of 9.9  m.    calculate the average speed of the car during the first 3.0  s of the journey.  speed =  ... [1]   (iii) on fig. 1.1, sketch a distance-time graph for the first 3.0  s of the journey. distance  / m time  / s010 0 3.0 fig. 1.1  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 (a) state the word equation that defines momentum .  ... [1]  (b) a metal block a, travelling in a straight line at 4.0  m / s on a smooth surface, collides with a  second metal block b which is at rest. fig. 2.1 shows the two metal blocks a and b before  and after the collision. 4.0 m / sat restbefore collision a3.2 kg 1.6 kg b 1.5 m / svafter collision ab fig. 2.1   the mass of a is 3.2  kg. the mass of b is 1.6  kg.    after the collision, the velocity of a is 1.5  m / s.   calculate   (i) the momentum of a before the collision,  momentum =  ... [2]   (ii) the velocity v of b after the collision.  v =  ... [3]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (c) in the collision that occurred in (b), block a and block b are in contact for 0.050  s.    calculate the average force that is exerted on b during the collision.  average force =  ... [2]  (d) after the collision in (b), the total kinetic energy of the two blocks is less than the kinetic  energy of block a before the collision.   suggest one reason for this.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 3 a block of wood has a volume of 210  cm3 and a mass of 180  g.  (a) calculate the density of the block of wood.  density =  ... [2]  (b) the block is held just above the surface of a liquid of density 0.88  g / cm3.    predict and explain what happens when the block is released.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 4]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 in the braking system of a car, the brake pedal rotates about a pivot when the pedal is pressed.  fig. 4.1 shows part of the braking system. 22 cm8.0 cmpivotpiston pedallink 200  n oilcylinder fig. 4.1  (not to scale)  the driver exerts a force of 200  n on the pedal at a distance 22  cm from the pivot. as the pedal  rotates about the pivot, a force is exerted on the piston and the pressure of the oil increases.  the area of the piston in the cylinder is 5.0 \u00d7 10 \u20134 m2 (0.00050  m2).   calculate the increase in the pressure of the oil.  increase in pressure =  ... [4] [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 a footballer and a referee are discussing a puddle of water that has formed on the pitch. the  footballer wears a white shirt whilst the referee wears a black shirt which, apart from its colour, is  identical.  fig. 5.1 shows the two men looking at the puddle. puddlewhite shirt black shirt fig. 5.1  the weather is bright and sunny.  (a) state and explain how the temperature of the white shirt differs from the temperature of the  black shirt.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) the volume of water in the puddle is slowly decreasing.   (i) describe how two changes in the weather conditions could affect the rate at which the  puddle dries. change 1  ... effect  ..  ... change 2  ... effect  ..  ...    [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017   (ii) explain, in terms of the water molecules, what happens as the puddle dries.  ...  ...  ... [2]    [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over6 fig. 6.1 shows a child releasing a balloon filled with helium. fig. 6.1  the pressure of the helium in the balloon keeps the balloon inflated.  (a) explain how the particles of helium produce this pressure.  ... ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) as the balloon travels upwards through the atmosphere, the volume o f the helium increases.  the temperature of the helium remains constant.   (i) state an equation th at relates the volume of the helium to its pressure.  ... [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017   (ii) fig. 6.2 shows how the air pressure in the atmosphere changes with the height above  ground level. 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 2000 4000 height  / mpressure kpa 6000 8000 fig. 6.2    1. using fig. 6.2, determine the pressure at ground level. give the unit.  pressure =    unit = . [2]    2. using fig. 6.2, determine the height at which the volume of the helium in the balloon  is twice the volume at ground level.  height =  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 7 a loudspeaker is built into the side of a swimming pool. the loudspeaker produces sound waves  in the water of wavelength 0.25  m.  (a) (i) the frequency of the sound waves is 6.0  khz.    calculate the speed of the sound waves in water.  speed of sound waves in water =  ... [2]   (ii) state a typical value for the speed of sound in air.  speed of sound in air =  ... [1]   (iii) state and explain, for the sound produced by the loudspeaker, how the wavelength of  the sound in air compares with the wavelength of the sound in water.  ...  ... [1]  (b) sound is a longitudinal wave.   explain what is meant by a longitudinal  wave.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) the sound emerges from the loudspeaker through a gap. the sound diffracts as it passes  through the gap.   (i) state how the width of the gap affects the diffraction.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) state how the wavelength of the sound affects the diffraction.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 red light travelling in air strikes the curved surface of a semi-circular glass block at p.   fig. 8.1 shows the ray of light. o p qred light air 30\u00b0semi-circular glass block fig. 8.1  the light travels in a straight line from o to q.  (a) explain why the light does not change direction as it enters the glass block at p.  ...  ... [1]  (b) the light travels in the glass to q where it strikes the edge of the block at 30\u00b0 to the normal.   the light then emerges into the air.   (i) the refractive index of the glass is 1.5.    calculate the angle between the normal and the ray in the air after the light emerges  from the block at q.  angle =  ... [3]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, sketch the path of the light in the air after it emerges at q.  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) the direction of the light striking the curved surface of the glass block is changed. the angle  between the ray and the normal at q gradually increases from 30\u00b0 to 90\u00b0.   describe what happens to the light that strikes the block at q as this angle increases.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 a 12 v battery is connected in series to a 24  w lamp and to a parallel pair of identical resistors x  and y. fig. 9.1 is the circuit diagram. x ya b12 v fig. 9.1  the 24  w lamp lights at normal brightness when the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 6.0  v.  the lamp is at normal brightness.   (a) calculate the resistance of the lamp.  resistance =  ... [3]  (b) determine   (i) the p.d. between a and b,  p.d. =  ... [1]   (ii) the combined resistance of the parallel pair of identical resistors x and y,  resistance =  ... [1]   (iii) the resistance of x.  resistance =  ... [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) resistor x is removed from the circuit in fig 9.1.    explain why the lamp becomes dimmer.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 fig. 10.1 shows a transformer that consists of two coils p and q, and an iron core.    iron core coil p 200 turnscoil q 340 turns fig. 10.1  there are 200 turns on coil p and 340 turns on coil q.  a 4.0  v a.c. power supply is connected to coil p.  (a) (i) explain why there is a voltage between the two terminals of coil q.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]   (ii) explain why the core of the transformer is made of soft iron.  ...  ... [1]  (b) (i) calculate the voltage between the two terminals of coil q.  voltage =  ... [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (ii) a heater is connected to coil q. the current in the heater is 3.5  a. the transformer is  100% efficient.    calculate the current in coil p.  current =  ... [2]  (c) a transformer is used to step up the voltage before electrical energy is transmitted over long  distances.   state and explain one economic effect of transmitting electrical energy at a high voltage.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 10]",
            "18": "18 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 11 (a) fig. 11.1 shows equipment that is used to investigate the effect of a magnetic field on the  path of a beam of \u03b3-rays. beam of \u03b3-rays source of \u03b3-rays \u03b3-ray detectorthick lead plates fig. 11.1   a radioactive source emits \u03b3-rays. the \u03b3-rays pass through two small holes in thick lead  plates. then the \u03b3-rays pass through the shaded region and into the detector.   (i) suggest the purpose of the two lead plates.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) a magnetic field, directed into the page, is set up in the shaded region.     state and explain what happens to the reading of the detector.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) state the relative ionising effects of \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays. suggest an explanation  for the differences.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/43/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (st/fc) 126913/6 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *9788788264* physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20  minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15  minutes on question  4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the stretching of a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1.  benchmetre rule clamp spring standboss   fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  (a) \u2022 do not remove the spring from the clamp. use the metre rule to measure the length l0 of  the coiled part of the spring.     record l0, in table 1.1 at load l = 0.0  n.   \u2022 on fig. 1.1, show clearly the length l0. [1]  (b) \u2022 place a load l = 1.0  n on the spring. record, in table 1.1, the length l of the coiled part  of the spring.   \u2022 repeat this procedure using loads l = 2.0  n, 3.0  n, 4.0  n and 5.0  n. table 1.1 l / n 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 l / mm [2]  (c) describe one precaution that you took in order to obtain reliable readings.  ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) plot a graph of l / mm ( y-axis) against l / n (x-axis). [4]  (e) a student suggests that the length l of the spring is directly proportional to the load l.   state whether your readings support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  graph line.  ...  ...  ... [1]  (f) use your results to predict the load l that would give a length l twice the value of l0.    show clearly how you obtained your answer.  load l =  ... [2] [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  (a) use the thermometer to measure room temperature \u03b8r.   \u03b8r =  ... [1]  (b) \u2022 pour 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker. place the thermometer in the beaker.    \u2022 measure the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water in the beaker. record this temperature in  table 2.1 at time t = 0 s.   \u2022 immediately start the stopclock.   \u2022 after 180  s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time and  temperature in the table.   \u2022 after a total of 360  s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the  time and temperature in the table. table 2.1 t / s \u03b8\u2009/ \u00b0c 0 [4]  (c)  (i) \u2022 calculate the temperature fall \u03b4\u03b81 during the first 180  s. \u2009 \u03b4\u03b81 =  ...    \u2022 calculate the temperature fall \u03b4\u03b82 during the next 180  s. \u2009 \u03b4\u03b82 =  ... [1]   (ii)  suggest why \u03b4\u03b81 is different from \u03b4\u03b82.  ...  ... [1]   (d) suggest two changes that you could make to the procedure to obtain a larger difference  between the values of \u03b4\u03b81 and \u03b4\u03b82. 1.   2.   [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (e) fig. 2.1 shows a measuring cylinder. a, b, c and d are four possible lines of sight that could  be used to read the volume of the water.  100cm3 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10cd ab water fig. 2.1   give two reasons why b should be used to obtain the most accurate reading.  1.         2.         [2] [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light passing through a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. you may refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance.   a e m lnfhole db c ray-trace sheet eye fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022  place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the  block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block  abcd .   \u2022  remove the block and draw a normal nl at the centre of side ab. label the point e  where the normal crosses ab. label the point m where the normal crosses cd.",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   \u2022 draw a line fe, to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the  normal, as shown in fig. 3.1.    \u2022 place two pins p1 and p2 on the line fe placing one pin close to point e. label the  positions of p1 and p2.   \u2022 replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block  so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. place two pins p3 and p4  between your eye and the block so that p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2 seen  through the block, appear one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.    \u2022 remove the block.   \u2022 draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the normal  nl and label this point k. [4]  (b) \u2022 measure and record the angle \u03b1 between the line joining the positions of p3 and p4 and  the line kl.  \u03b1 =  ...   \u2022 measure and record the length x between points m and k.  x =  ...    [2]  (c) repeat steps (a) and (b) with the angle of incidence i = 50\u00b0.   \u03b1 =  ...  x =  ... [2]  (d) a student suggests that the angle \u03b1 should always be equal to the angle of incidence i.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  readings. statement  .. justification    ... [2]  (e) suggest one precaution that you should take with this experiment to obtain reliable results.  ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this question paper between pages 6 and 7.",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 a student is investigating whether the resistance of a wire depends on the material from which the  wire is made.   resistance r is given by the equation r = v i .  the following apparatus is available to the student:   ammeter   voltmeter   power supply (0\u20133  v)   micrometer screw gauge   variable resistor   switch   connecting leads   wires made of different materials.  plan an experiment to investigate whether the resistance of a wire depends on the material from  which the wire is made. you are not required to carry out this investigation.  you should:  \u2022 draw a diagram of the circuit you would use to determine the resistance of each wire  \u2022  explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take  \u2022 state the key variables that you would control  \u2022  draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table).  ..  ..",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "*5092083713* this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (cw/fd) 127040/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of two resistance wires. the circuit has been  set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. a vpower supply resistance wiresdb ca s fig. 1.1  (a) (i) \u2022  switch on. place the sliding contact s on the resistance wire ab at a distance  l = 0.200  m from point a.    \u2022  measure and record in table 1.1 the current i in the circuit and the potential  difference (p.d.) v across the length l = 0.200  m of resistance wire ab.    \u2022  calculate the resistance r of the length l = 0.200  m of resistance wire ab, using the      equation r = v i. record r in the table.    \u2022 repeat the procedure using the distance l = 0.400  m. switch off.    \u2022 complete the column headings in the table. table 1.1 l\u2009\u200a\u200a/ v / i / r / 0.200 0.400  [4]   (ii) calculate the difference between the two values for r.  difference =  ..  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) (i) \u2022  switch on. place the sliding contact s on the resistance wire ab at a distance  l = 0.500  m from point a.    \u2022 measure and record the current i1 in the circuit and the potential difference v1.  i1 =  ...  v1 =  ...    \u2022  calculate the resistance r1 of the length l = 0.500  m of resistance wire ab, using      the equation r1 = v1 i1.  r1 =  ..  [1]   (ii) use the short connecting lead provided to connect points b and d.    \u2022  switch on. place the sliding contact s on the resistance wire ab at a distance  l = 0.500  m from point a.    \u2022 measure and record the current i2 in the circuit and the potential difference v2.  i2 =  ...  v2 =  ...      calculate the combined resistance r2 of resistance wires ab and cd, using the      equation r2 =  v2 i2.  r2 =  ..  [2]  (c) use the results in (b)(i)  and (b)(ii)  to compare the resistance r1 of wire ab with the resistance  r2 of wires ab and cd connected together.    tick one box next to the description that most closely matches your results.    r1 = r2    r1 = 2r2    2r1 = r2    there is no simple relationship between r1 and r2.  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) suggest two reasons why different students all carrying out this experiment carefully, with the  same apparatus, may not obtain identical results. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the principle of moments.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. p qa 5.0 cm mark45.0  cm markmetre rule bench pivotb fig. 2.1  (a) place the load p on the metre rule at the 5.0  cm mark. place the metre rule on the pivot at the  45.0 cm mark. place load q on the rule and adjust its position so that the metre rule is as near  as possible to being balanced.   \u2022 record, in table 2.1, the distance a between the centre of load p and the pivot.   \u2022 measure and record in the table the distance b from the centre of load q to the pivot.   \u2022  repeat the steps above, placing the load p at the 10.0  cm mark, 15.0  cm mark, 20.0  cm  mark and 25.0  cm mark. keep the pivot at the 45.0  cm mark each time. record all the  readings in the table. table 2.1 a / cm b / cm  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (b) plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against a / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) a student suggests that a is directly proportional to b.   state whether your readings support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  graph line.  ...  ...  ... [1]  (d) (i) \u2022 use the balance provided to measure the mass m, in grams, of the metre rule.  m =    g    \u2022 calculate the value of mx, where x = 0.05  n cm / g.  mx =  .  n cm [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (ii) \u2022  use the value of a in the first row of table 2.1 to calculate pa, where p = 1.00  n.      p is the weight of load p. include the unit.  pa =  ...    \u2022  use the value of b in the first row of table 2.1 to calculate qb, where q = 0.80  n.      q is the weight of load q. include the unit.  qb =  ...  [2]  (e) a student states that pa should be equal to qb.    look carefully at fig. 2.1 and your answers to (d) and suggest what the student has not  realised.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light passing through a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. you may refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance. da e m ln cb ray-trace sheeteyefhole fig. 3.1  \u2022 place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the block  should be approximately in the middle of the paper. draw the outline of the block abcd .  \u2022 remove the block and draw a normal nl at the centre of side ab. label the point e where  the normal crosses ab. label the point m where the normal crosses cd.",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (a) \u2022  draw a line fe to the left of the normal, and at an angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0 to the normal,  as shown in fig.  3.1.   \u2022  place two pins p1 and p2 on the line fe, placing one pin close to e. label the positions  of p1 and p2.   \u2022  replace the block and observe the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block  so that the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. place two pins p3 and  p4 between your eye and the block so that p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2  seen through the block, appear one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.  remove the block.  [2]  (b) \u2022  draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the normal  nl. label the point k where this line crosses cd.   \u2022  measure and record the angle \u03b1 between the line joining the positions of p3 and p4 and  the normal nl.  \u03b1 =  ...   \u2022 measure and record the length x between points m and k.  x =  ...    [3]  (c) \u2022 repeat the steps in (a) but with the line fe to the right of the normal.   \u2022  draw a line joining the new positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the  normal nl. label the point q where this line crosses cd.   \u2022  measure and record the angle \u03b2 between the line joining the new positions of p3 and p4  and the normal nl.  \u03b2 =  ...   \u2022 measure and record the length y between points m and q.  y =  ...  [3]  (d) a student suggests that the results for \u03b1 and x should be the same as the results for   \u03b2 and y. state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference  to the results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (e) suggest one precaution that you should take with this experiment to obtain reliable results.  ...  ...  ... [1]   tie your ray-trace sheet into this question paper between pages 8 and 9.  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4 a student is investigating the effect of draughts (moving air) on the rate of cooling of hot water.  the following apparatus is available:   electric fan with four speed settings   supply of hot water   thermometer   250 cm3 beaker   250 cm3 measuring cylinder   stopwatch   clamp, boss and stand.  plan an experiment to investigate the effect of draughts on the rate of cooling of hot water.  you are not required to carry out this investigation.  you should:   \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation   \u2022 state the key variables that you would control   \u2022  draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your  readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table)   \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (kn/sg) 125972/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *9430622255* physics  0625/53 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1   in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of a power supply. the circuit has been set  up for you.    carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. a resistance wire crocodile clippower supply p q xv fig. 1.1  (a) \u2022 connect the crocodile clip near end x of the resistance wire.   \u2022 switch on.   \u2022  adjust the position of the crocodile clip until the potential difference v across terminals p  and q is 2.0  v.   \u2022 record, in table 1.1, the value of the current i shown on the ammeter.   \u2022 move the crocodile clip and record values of i for v = 1.8  v, 1.6  v, 1.4  v and 1.2  v.   \u2022 switch off.       table 1.1 i / a v / v 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2    [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis).    [4]    (c) (i)  determine the gradient m of the graph.    show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  m =  ..  [1]   (ii) the gradient m is numerically equal to the resistance r of the power supply.      write down the resistance r to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.   r =  ..  [2]  (d) suggest one practical reason why the crocodile clip should not be connected to very short  lengths of resistance wire in order to obtain smaller potential differences.  ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (e) in this type of experiment, it is possible to change the potential difference by using a variable  resistor rather than using different lengths of a resistance wire.   in the space, draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor.  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will determine the density of water by two methods.    method 1  carry out the following instructions, referring to figs. 2.1 and 2.2. forcemeter modelling clayloop of string          measuring cylinder           fig. 2.1                                                                      fig. 2.2  (a) measure the weight w1 of the piece of modelling clay, as shown in fig. 2.1.     w1 =  ... n [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (b) (i) pour approximately 150  cm3 of water into the measuring cylinder.    record the volume v1 of the water in the measuring cylinder.  v1 =  ... cm3 [1]   (ii) describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain an accurate value for the  volume of water. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) lower the piece of modelling clay into the water as shown in fig. 2.2.   \u2022 record the new reading w2 of the forcemeter.  w2 =   n    \u2022  record the new reading v2 of the measuring cylinder, with the piece of modelling clay in  the water.  v2 =   cm3     \u2022 remove the modelling clay from the measuring cylinder.   \u2022 do not empty the measuring cylinder . [1]  (d)  calculate a value \u03c11 for the density of water, using your readings from (a), (b) and (c) and the  equation        \u03c11 = (w1 \u2013 w2) (v2 \u2013 v1) \u00d7 k   where k = 100  g / n.   \t\u03c11 =  ... [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  method 2  (e) \u2022  measure the mass m1 of the measuring cylinder, still containing the volume v1 of water.   use the balance provided.  m1 =  ...     \u2022 empty the measuring cylinder.   \u2022 measure the mass m2 of the empty measuring cylinder.  m2 =  ...     [1]  (f)  calculate a second value \u03c12 for the density of water, using your readings from (b) and (e) and   the equation \t\t\t \t\t \t \t \u03c12 = (m1 \u2013 m2) v1 .  \u03c12 =  ..  [1]  (g) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in either method 1  or method 2 , even when they  are carried out carefully.   explain how an improvement might be made to reduce this inaccuracy. suggestion    ... explanation of improvement  .  ...  ...    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light by a transparent block.  you will determine a quantity known as the refractive index of the material of the block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided.    you may refer to fig. 3.1 for guidance. i eye position xeye position y f n l a b d chole ray-trace sheet 1 cm fig. 3.1",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (a) \u2022  place the block approximately in the centre of the ray-trace sheet. carefully draw round  the block and label the corners abcd , as indicated in fig. 3.1.   \u2022 remove the block from the ray-trace sheet.   \u2022  draw a normal to line ab at a point l, 1 cm from a. label the other end of the normal  with the letter n.   \u2022 draw a line fl, 8 cm long and at an angle \u03b8 = 30\u00b0, as indicated by fig. 3.1.  [1]  (b) \u2022 replace the block in exactly the same position as in (a).   \u2022 place two pins p1 and p2 on line fl, a suitable distance apart for accurate ray tracing.     \u2022 label the positions of p1 and p2.   \u2022  view the images of p1 and p2 through the block, from the direction indicated by the eye  in position x in fig. 3.1. place two pins p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart, so that pins  p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2, all appear exactly one behind the other.     \u2022 label the positions of p3 and p4.   \u2022 remove the block and pins from the ray-trace sheet.    [1]  (c) (i)  \u2022 draw a line joining p3 and p4. extend this line until it meets cd.     \u2022 label the point at which this line meets  cd with the letter g.     \u2022 draw a line through g, at 90\u00b0 to cd. extend this line until it crosses ab.     \u2022 label the point at which this line crosses ab with the letter h.     \u2022 extend line fl until it meets gh.     \u2022 label the point at which it meets gh with the letter k.     \u2022 join points  l and g with a straight line.   [1]   (ii) \u2022 measure the length a of line lg.  a =  .  cm    \u2022 measure the length b of line lk.  b =  .  cm    \u2022 calculate a value n for the refractive index, using the equation n = a\u2013b .  n =  ...  [3]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) \u2022 replace the block in exactly the same position as in (a).   \u2022 replace the two pins p1 and p2 on line fl.     \u2022 place the mirror against side cd, with the reflecting surface towards the block.   \u2022  view the images of p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in position y in   fig. 3.1. place two pins p5 and p6, a suitable distance apart, so that pins p5 and p6, and  the images of p1 and p2, all appear exactly one behind the other.     \u2022 label the positions of p5 and p6.     \u2022 remove the block and pins from the ray-trace sheet.    [1]  (e)  (i) \u2022 draw a line joining p5 and p6.  extend this line until it meets gh.    \u2022 label the point at which this line meets gh with the letter m.    \u2022 label the other end of the line with the letter r.    \u2022 measure the angle \u03b1, where \u03b1 is the smaller angle between lines rm and gh.    \u03b1 =  ..  [1]   (ii) a student suggests that angle \u03b1 and angle \u03b8, measured in part (a), should be equal.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer with reference to  your results. statement  .. justification    ...     [2]   (f) suggest why different students, all carrying out this experiment carefully, may not obtain  identical results.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11] tie your ray-trace sheet into this question paper between pages 8 and 9.",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4 plan an experiment to investigate how increasing the number of layers of insulation affects the  rate of cooling of hot water in a beaker.    you are not required to carry out the experiment.  write a plan for the experiment, including:  \u2022 the apparatus needed  \u2022 what you would measure  \u2022 the variables you would keep the same to ensure the comparison is a fair test  \u2022 instructions for carrying out the experiment  \u2022 how you would present your results  \u2022 how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.    you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.   ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (st/fc) 126914/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *4000051718* physics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2017  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 the class is investigating the stretching of a spring.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. l0 x benchmetre rule clamp spring standboss fig. 1.1  (a) (i) on fig. 1.1, measure the length l0.    record l0 in table 1.1 at load l = 0.0  n. [1]   (ii) explain why l0 is not measured to point x on the spring.  ...  ... [1]  (b) a student hangs a 1.0  n load on the spring. he records the new length l of the spring.   he repeats the procedure using loads of 2.0  n, 3.0  n, 4.0  n and 5.0  n. the readings are shown  in table 1.1. table 1.1 l / n 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 l / mm 17 20 21 23 25   describe one precaution that you would take in order to obtain reliable readings.  ...  ... [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) plot a graph of l / mm ( y-axis) against l / n (x-axis). [4]  (d) a student suggests that the length l of the spring is directly proportional to the load l.   state whether your readings support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  graph line.  ...  ... [1]  (e) use the results to predict the load l that would give a length l twice the value of l0.   show clearly how you obtained your answer.  load l =  ... [2] [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 the class is investigating the refraction of light passing through a transparent block. a student is  using optics pins to trace the paths of rays of light.  fig. 2.1 shows the student\u2019s ray-trace sheet.   a db c p3 p4 ray-trace sheet eye fig. 2.1",
            "5": "5 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (a) \u2022 on fig. 2.1, draw a normal at the centre of side ab. label this line nl. label the point e  where the normal crosses ab. label the point m where the normal crosses cd.   \u2022 draw a line above ab to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the  normal. label this line fe.   \u2022 label the positions of two pins p1 and p2 placed a suitable distance apart on fe for  accurate ray tracing.  [2]  (b) the student observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the  images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. he places two pins p3 and p4 between his  eye and the block so that p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2 seen through the block,  appear one behind the other. the positions of p3 and p4 are marked on fig. 2.1.   draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the normal.  label this point k. [1]  (c) \u2022 measure and record the angle \u03b1 between the line joining the positions of p3 and p4 and  the line km. \t\u03b1  =  ...   \u2022 measure and record the length  x between points m and k.  x =  ...  [2]  (d)  the student repeats the procedure with the angle of incidence i = 50\u00b0.    his readings for \u03b1 and x are shown.     52\u00b0 \u03b1 =  ...     19 mm x =  ...   a student suggests that the angle \u03b1 should always be equal to the angle of incidence i.    state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  values of \u03b1 for i = 30\u00b0 and i = 50\u00b0. statement  .. justification   [2]  (e) suggest one precaution that you would take with this experiment to obtain reliable results.  ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 the class is investigating the cooling of water.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus. waterthermometer beaker fig. 3.1  (a) the thermometer in fig. 3.2 shows the room temperature \u03b8r at the beginning of the  experiment.   record \u03b8r. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 3.2  \u03b8r =  ... [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) \u2022 a student pours 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker.    \u2022 she measures the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water in the beaker.    \u2022 she immediately starts a stopclock.   \u2022 after 180  s, she measures the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water.   \u2022 after 360  s, she measures the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water again.    the readings are shown in table 3.1.  table 3.1 t / s \u03b8\t/ \u00b0c   0 85 180 74 360 66   (i) \u2022 calculate the temperature fall \u03b4\u03b81 during the first 180  s. \t\u03b4 \u03b81 =  ...    \u2022 calculate the temperature fall \u03b4\u03b82 during the next 180  s. \t\u03b4 \u03b82 =  ... [1]   (ii)  suggest why \u03b4\u03b81 is different from \u03b4\u03b82 .  ...  ... [1]   (c)  another student plans to investigate the factors affecting the difference between the values of  \u03b4\u03b81 and \u03b4\u03b82 .   suggest two changes that he could make to the procedure to obtain a larger value of this  difference. 1.   2.   [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) the volume of water used in this experiment is measured using a measuring cylinder.    fig. 3.3 shows a measuring cylinder.    a, b, c and d are four possible lines of sight that could be used to read the volume of the  water.   100cm3 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10cd ab water   fig. 3.3   give two reasons why b should be used to obtain the most accurate reading.  1.         2.         [2] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4 the class is investigating the motion of a pendulum.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus. metre rule set squarebobclamp fig. 4.1    (a) (i)  on fig. 4.1, show clearly the length l of the pendulum.  [1]   (ii) use fig. 4.2 to explain how you would measure the length l accurately. you may draw on  the diagram.      bobclamp fig. 4.2  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (b) a student determines the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time taken for one  complete oscillation. the student measures the time  t for 20 oscillations.   fig. 4.3 shows the time t.  fig. 4.3   (i) calculate the period t of the pendulum.  t =  ... [1]   (ii) explain how measuring the time for 20 oscillations rather than one oscillation helps the  student to obtain a more reliable value for the period.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) the student wants to determine a value for the acceleration of free fall from his results.   he needs the value of t  2 to do this.    calculate t  2.   give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures and include the unit.  t  2 =  ..  [2] [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 a student is investigating whether the resistance of a wire depends on the material from which the  wire is made.   resistance r is given by the equation r = v i.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   ammeter   voltmeter   micrometer screw gauge   power supply (0\u20133  v)   variable resistor   switch   connecting leads   wires of different materials.  plan an experiment to investigate whether the resistance of a wire depends on the material from  which it is made.  you should:  \u2022 draw a diagram of the circuit you would use to determine the resistance of each wire  \u2022  explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take  \u2022 state the key variables that you would control  \u2022  draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings   (you are not required to enter any readings in the table).  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7] [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "*3211388097* this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (cw/fd) 127039/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2017  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 the class is investigating the resistances of two resistance wires.  the circuit used is shown in fig. 1.1. a vpower supply resistance wiresdb ca s fig. 1.1  (a) a student places a sliding contact s on the resistance wire ab at a distance l = 0.200  m from  point a. she measures the current i in the circuit and the potential difference v across the  length l = 0.200  m of resistance wire.   figs. 1.2 and 1.3 show the voltmeter and ammeter readings.     (i) write down the readings shown on the meters in figs. 1.2 and 1.3.  5 v6789 104321 0  a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0  fig. 1.2  fig. 1.3  v = ...  i = ...  [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r of the length l = 0.200  m of resistance wire, using the equation    r = v i.   r =  ... [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) the student repeats the procedure using the distance l = 0.400  m. her result is shown.   2.54 \u03c9 r =  ...   (i) calculate the difference between the two values for r.  difference =  ... [1]   (ii) suggest a relationship between the length l and the resistance r of the wire that matches  the results, within the limits of experimental accuracy.  ...  ... [1]  (c) using the same method as in (a), the student determines the resistance r1 of the resistance  wire ab of total length l = 0.500  m.   3.08 \u03c9 r1 =  ...   she then uses a short lead to connect points b and d. she uses the same method again  to determine the combined resistance r2 of the resistance wires ab and cd connected  together.   1.50 \u03c9 r2 =  ...   use the student\u2019s results to compare the resistance r1 of wire ab with the resistance r2 of  wires ab and cd connected together.   tick the box next to the description that most closely matches the results.    r1 = r2    r1 = 2r2    2r1 = r2    there is no simple relationship between r1 and r2.  [1]  (d) suggest two reasons why different students, all carrying out this experiment carefully, with  the same apparatus, may not obtain identical results. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 the class is investigating the refraction of light passing through a transparent block. a student is  using optics pins to trace the paths of rays of light.  fig. 2.1 shows the student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. da c p3 p4b ray-trace sheeteye fig. 2.1  (a) \u2022  on fig. 2.1, draw and label a normal nl at the centre of side ab. label the point e  where the normal crosses ab. label the point m where the normal crosses cd. [1]   \u2022  draw a line fe, to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 40\u00b0 to the  normal.   \u2022  label the positions of two pins p1 and p2 on fe placed a suitable distance apart for  accurate ray tracing.  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) the student observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the  images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   he places two pins p3 and p4 between his eye and the block so that p3 and p4, and the  images of p1 and p2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other.   the positions of p3 and p4 are marked on fig. 2.1.   draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the normal nl.  label the point k where this line crosses cd. [1]  (c) \u2022  measure and record the angle \u03b1 between the line joining the positions of p3 and p4 and  the normal line.  \u03b1 =  ...   \u2022 measure and record the length x between points m and k.  x =  ...    [2]  (d) the student repeats the procedure but with the line fe to the right of the normal.   he measures the angle \u03b2 between the line joining the new positions of p3 and p4 and the  normal.   41\u00b0 \u03b2 =  ...   he measures the length y between m and the new position of k.   21 mm y =  ...   a student suggests that the results for \u03b1 and x should be the same as the results for \u03b2 and y.   state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]  (e) suggest one precaution that you would take with this experiment to obtain reliable results.  ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 the class is investigating images formed on a screen using a lens.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus. illuminated object lensscreenv u fig. 3.1  (a) the lens has a focal length of 15.0  cm.   suggest a suitable distance d between the illuminated object and the screen in order to form  a clearly focused image on the screen.  d =  ... [1]  (b) the student places the lens as shown in the diagram a distance u from the object. she then  moves the screen until she obtains a clearly focused image on the screen.   it is difficult to decide on the exact position of the screen that gives the best image.   explain how you would find the best position for the screen as reliably as possible.  ...  ... [1]  (c) another student uses a different lens and obtains these readings:   15.0 cm u =  ...   29.7 cm v =  ...   calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = uv (u + v).    include the unit and give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures.  f =  ... [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) suggest one difference that you would expect to see in this experiment between the  appearance of the object and the image.  ... [1]  (e) which of the following procedures, a\u2013f, are sensible for this experiment?   circle one or more of the letters.   a carry out the experiment in a darkened room.   b close one eye when taking readings.   c draw thin lines.   d fix the rule in position on the bench.   e make sure the pins are at least 5  cm apart.   f repeat the experiment using different values of u and determine an average value for f.  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 the class is investigating the principle of moments.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used. p qa 5.0 cm mark 45.0  cm markmetre rule bench pivotb fig. 4.1  (a) a student places a load p on the metre rule at the 5.0  cm mark. he places the metre rule on  the pivot at the 45.0  cm mark. he places a load q on the rule and adjusts its position so that  the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.   \u2022 he measures the distance a between the centre of load p and the pivot.    \u2022 he measures the distance b from the centre of load q to the pivot.    \u2022  he repeats the procedure placing the load p at the 10.0  cm mark, the 15.0  cm mark, the  20.0 cm mark and at the 25.0  cm mark. he keeps the pivot at the 45.0  cm mark each  time. the readings are recorded in table 4.1. table 4.1 a  / cm b  / cm 40.0 42.5 35.0 36.4 30.0 30.1 25.0 23.9 20.0 17.5",
            "9": "9 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (i) plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against a / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [3]   (ii) draw the line of best fit.  [1]  (b) a student suggests that a is directly proportional to b.   state whether the readings support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  graph line.  ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (c) the student uses a balance to measure the mass m of the metre rule.   120 g m =  ...   \u2022 calculate the value of mx, where x = 0.05  n cm / g.  mx =  ..  n cm   \u2022  use the value of a in the first row of table 4.1 to calculate pa, where p = 1.00  n.      p is the weight of load p. include the unit.  pa =  ...   \u2022  use the value of b in the first row of table 4.1 to calculate qb, where q = 0.80  n.      q is the weight of load q.  qb =  ...  [2]  (d) a student states that pa should be equal to qb.   look carefully at fig. 4.1 and the information in (c) and suggest what the student has not  realised.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 a student is investigating the effect of draughts (moving air) on the rate of cooling of hot water.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   an electric fan with four speed settings   a supply of hot water   thermometer   250 cm3 beaker   250 cm3 measuring cylinder   stopwatch   clamp, boss and stand.  plan an experiment to investigate the effect of draughts on the rate of cooling of hot water.   you should:   \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation   \u2022 state the key variables that you would control   \u2022  draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your  readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table)   \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s17_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (kn/sg) 125971/6 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8290184847* physics  0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2017  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 a student is determining the density of water by two methods.  method 1 n 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 5075125 25100150175200225250cm3forcemeter modelling claymeasuring cylinder fig. 1.1                                                               fig. 1.2  (a) record the weight w1 of the piece of modelling clay shown in fig. 1.1.  w1 =  ... n [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) (i) record the volume v1 of the water in the measuring cylinder shown in fig. 1.2.  v1 =  ... cm3 [1]    (ii) describe briefly how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain an accurate value for the  volume of water. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ... [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 n 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 5075125 25100150175200225250cm3 fig. 1.3",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) the student lowers the modelling clay into the water, as shown in fig. 1.3.   \u2022 record the new reading w2 of the forcemeter.  w2 =   n    \u2022  record the new reading v2 of the measuring cylinder, with the piece of modelling clay in  the water.  v2 =  ...  cm3  [1]  (d) calculate a value \u03c11 for the density of water, using your readings from (a), (b) and (c) and the   equation       \u03c11 = (w1 \u2013 w2) (v2 \u2013 v1) \u00d7 k       where k = 100  g / n.   \t\u03c11 =  ... [2]  method 2  (e) the student removes the modelling clay from the water and places the measuring cylinder on  a balance. 5075125 25100150175200225250cm3 measuring cylinder gbalance fig. 1.4   the reading for the mass m1 of the measuring cylinder and water is shown in fig. 1.4.   record m1 to the nearest gram.  m1 =  ... [1] ",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (f) the student pours the water out of the measuring cylinder and measures the mass m2 of the  empty measuring cylinder. 93 m2 =  . g   \u2022  calculate a second value \u03c12 for the density of water, using your readings from (b), (e)  and (f) and the equation            \u03c12 = (m1 \u2013 m2) v1 .  \u03c12 =  ...   \u2022 calculate an average value \u03c1av for the density of water, using your results for \u03c11 and \u03c12.  \u03c1av =  ...      [1]  (g) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in either method 1  or method 2 , even when they  are carried out carefully.   explain how an improvement might be made to reduce this inaccuracy. suggestion    ... improvement  .  ...    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 some students are investigating the resistance of a power supply.  they are using the circuit shown in fig. 2.1.  a resistance wirepower supply p q crocodile clip fig. 2.1  (a) (i) a student connects the crocodile clip to the resistance wire at positions which give  particular values of the potential difference v between terminals p and q. he measures  the current i in the circuit for each position.    on fig. 2.1, draw a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference v between  terminals p and q. [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017   (ii) fig. 2.2 shows the ammeter reading for a value of v = 2.2  v. a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 2.2    read, and record in table 2.1, this value of i. table 2.1 i / a v / v 2.2 0.47 2.0 0.55 1.8 0.69 1.6 0.76 1.4  [1]  (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis).    [4]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) (i) determine the gradient m of the line you have drawn.    show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  m =  ..  [1]   (ii) the gradient m is numerically equal to the resistance r of the power supply.      write down the resistance r to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.   r =  ..  [2]  (d) suggest one practical reason why the crocodile clip should not be connected to very short  lengths of resistance wire in order to obtain smaller potential differences.  ...  ...  ... [1]  (e) in this type of experiment, it is possible to change the potential difference by using a variable  resistor rather than using different lengths of a resistance wire.   in the space below, draw the standard circuit symbol for a variable resistor.  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 a student is investigating the refraction of light by a transparent block.  she uses her results to determine a quantity known as the refractive index of the material of the  block.  the student\u2019s ray-trace sheet is shown full size in fig. 3.1. i eye position xeye position y e n l a b sr d g c fp1 p5 p2 p3 p4p6 fig. 3.1",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (a) the student places a transparent block abcd  at the centre of the ray-trace sheet, as indicated  in fig. 3.1. she draws round the block. she removes the block and then draws lines nl   and el.   measure the angle \u03b8 between the lines nl and el.  \u03b8 =  ... [1]  (b)  the student places two pins p1 and p2 on line el, a suitable distance apart for accurate   ray-tracing.     suggest a suitable distance between the two pins.  distance =  ... [1]  (c) the student replaces the block. she views the images of p1 and p2 through the block from  the direction indicated by the eye in position x in fig. 3.1.     she places two pins p3 and p4 so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2, all  appear exactly one behind the other.     she labels the positions of p3 and p4 and then removes the block and pins from the ray-trace  sheet.   she draws a line fg through p3 and p4, extending it as far as cd.   (i) \u2022 draw a normal to cd at point g and extend it to meet ab.    \u2022 label the point at which this normal meets ab with the letter h.      [1]   (ii) \u2022 draw a line joining points l and g.    \u2022 extend line el until it meets gh.    \u2022 label the point at which this line meets gh with the letter k.     \u2022 measure the length a of line lg.  a =  .  cm    \u2022 measure the length b of line lk.  b =  .  cm  [1]     (iii) calculate a value n for the refractive index, using the equation n = a\u2013b .       n =  ... [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) the student places a mirror against side cd, with the reflecting surface facing towards the  block.   she views the images of p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in position y in   fig. 3.1.     she places two pins p5 and p6 so that pins p5 and p6, and the images of p1 and p2, all  appear exactly one behind the other.     she labels the positions of p5 and p6 and then removes the mirror and the pins from the   ray-trace.   the student draws a line rs through pins p5 and p6.   (i) \u2022 extend line rs until it meets gh.    \u2022 label the point at which this line meets gh with the letter t.     \u2022 measure the angle \u03b1, where \u03b1 is the smaller angle between lines rt and gh.    \u03b1 =  ...  [2]   (ii) a student suggests that angle \u03b1 and angle \u03b8, measured in part (a), should be equal.    state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer with reference to  the results. statement  .. justification    [2]   (e) suggest why different students, all carrying out this experiment carefully, may not obtain  identical results.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11]",
            "13": "13 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4  plan an experiment to investigate how increasing the number of layers of insulation affects the  rate of cooling of hot water in a beaker.  write a plan for the experiment, including:  \u2022 the apparatus needed  \u2022 what you would measure  \u2022 the variables you would keep the same to ensure the comparison is a fair test  \u2022 instructions for carrying out the experiment  \u2022 how you would present your results  \u2022 how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.   ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "14": "14 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]   [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/63/m/j/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib17 11_0625_11/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *2729597850 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  1 a student measures the volume of a cork.    he puts some water into a measuring cylinder and then one glass ball. he puts the cork and then  a second, identical glass ball into the water as shown.    100 806040 20 diagram 1cm3 100 806040 20 diagram 2cm3 100 806040 20 diagram 3cm3 glass ball glass ballcorkglass ball     diagram 1 shows the first water level.    diagram 2 shows the water level after one glass ball is added.    diagram 3 shows the water level after the cork and the second glass ball are added.    what is the volume of the cork?  a 30  cm3 b 40  cm3 c 50  cm3 d 100  cm3     2 the graph shows how the speed of a car varies over a period of 10  s.    010 0 5 10speed m / s time  / s    how far does the car travel during the 10  s?  a 10  m b 50  m c 75  m d 100  m    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17 [turn over  3 the diagram shows how the speed of a falling object changes with time.    00speed timexyz     which row describes the motion of the object between x and y, and between y and z?     between x and y between y and z  a accelerating at rest  b accelerating constant speed  c decelerating at rest  d decelerating constant speed     4 a spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.    spring metal     which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?  a friction  b mass  c pressure  d weight     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  5 the graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet p and on planet q.    0 2 04 06 08 0400 300200100 0weight  / nplanet p planet q mass  / kg    an object weighs 400  n on planet p. the object is taken to planet q.    which row is correct?     mass of object  on planet q  / kg weight of object  on planet q  / n  a 40 200  b 40 400  c 80 200  d 80 400      6 what is needed to determine the density of a regularly shaped block?  a a balance and a beaker  b a balance and a ruler  c a measuring cylinder and a beaker  d a measuring cylinder and a ruler     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17 [turn over  7 a student conducts an experiment by hanging different loads on a spring. the diagrams show the  lengths of the spring with different loads.    2.0  n 4.0  n3.0  cm 6.0  cm 9.0  cm     which row gives the correct extensions of the spring?     extension  / cm  0 n 2.0  n 4.0  n  a 0 3.0 3.0  b 0 3.0 6.0  c 3.0 3.0 3.0  d 3.0 6.0 9.0     8 a car mechanic is trying to loosen a wheel nut. he applies a force to the end of a spanner  (wrench) at right-angles to the spanner.    which method provides the largest turning effect on the nut?  a applying double the force to a spanner that is half as long  b applying double the force to a spanner that is twice as long  c applying double the force to the same spanner  d applying the same force to a spanner that is twice as long    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  9 the diagrams show four table lamps resting on a table. the position of the centre of mass of  each lamp is labelled x.    which lamp is the most stable?    a b c d xx xxx xx      10 a pendulum bob swings from w, through points x and y, to z and then back to w.    w xyz     which statement is correct?  a the gravitational potential energy of the bob is smallest at w.  b the gravitational potential energy of the bob is smallest at x.  c the gravitational potential energy of the bob is smallest at y.  d the gravitational potential energy of the bob is the same at all points of the swing.    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17 [turn over  11 a student runs up a flight of stairs.    lengthheight     which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against  gravity?  a the height of the flight of stairs  b the length of the flight of stairs  c the time taken to run up the stairs  d the weight of the student      12 what is a manometer used to determine?  a the difference between two densities  b the difference between two forces  c the difference between two heights  d the difference between two pressures     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    90 8070605040302010cm vacuum metre rule mercury     which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?  a 12  cm b 74  cm c 86  cm d 100  cm     14 a pollen grain in a beaker of still water is viewed through a microscope.    which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?    a b c d     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17 [turn over  15 the diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. a child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.    the temperature of the air in the toy does not change.        how does the air pressure in the toy change and why?     pressure reason  a decreases air molecules move more slowly  b decreases air molecules strike the rubber less frequently  c increases air molecules move more quickly  d increases air molecules strike the rubber more frequently     16 a strip of iron and a strip of brass are firmly attached to each other along their entire length. this  combination is a bimetallic strip.    iron strip brass strip    this bimetallic strip is heated and it bends as shown.    fixed supportiron brass     the bimetallic strip is now cooled and becomes straight again.    what causes the bimetallic strip to become straight again?  a the brass contracts more than the iron.  b the brass expands more than the iron.  c the iron contracts more than the brass.  d the iron expands more than the brass.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  17 the diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical  beaker containing oil. both are heated for one minute.    water oil electric heate r    the temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase steadily. the increase in  temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.    why is this?  a oil has a higher boiling point than water.  b oil has a lower boiling point than water.  c the oil has a larger thermal capacity than the water.  d the oil has a smaller thermal capacity than the water.      18 the air temperature in a cold room is 15  \u00b0c.    a heater that contains water at 50  \u00b0c is used to heat the room.    by which process is most of the thermal energy transferred throughout the air in the room?  a conduction  b convection  c evaporation  d radiation      19 which statement about convection currents is correct?  a convection currents occur because, when cooled, liquids contract and become more dense.  b convection currents occur because, when warmed, liquids expand and become more dense.  c convection currents only occur in liquids.  d convection currents only occur in solids and liquids.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17 [turn over  20 the diagram represents a wave travelling along a rope.    which labelled arrow indicates the wavelength of the wave?    b acdrope      21 the diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.    wavefronts     which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?    reflecteda reflectedb reflectedc reflectedd  ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  22 the diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror. a ray of light from the object is incident on  the mirror.    object q pr s plane mirror    through which point does the reflected ray pass, and at which point is the image of the object  formed?     point through which  reflected ray passes point at which  image is formed  a p r  b p s  c q r  d q s    23 which ray diagram shows a converging lens forming a real image of a small object o?    oa ob oc od     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17 [turn over  24 visible light, x-rays and microwaves are all components of the electromagnetic spectrum.    which statement about the waves is correct?  a in a vacuum, microwaves travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.  b in a vacuum, microwaves travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter  wavelength.  c in a vacuum, x-rays travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.  d in a vacuum, x-rays travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter wavelength.    25 space is a vacuum. waves from stars are used to reveal information about the stars.    which type of waves do not reveal information about stars?  a infra-red  b radio waves  c ultrasound  d \u03b3-rays     26 a student stands 180  m in front of a vertical, flat cliff and bangs together two pieces of wood to  make a short, loud sound.    a timer records the echo of the sound 1.5 seconds after the pieces of wood are banged together.    based on this result, what is the speed of sound?  a 120  m / s b 240  m / s c 270  m / s d 540  m / s    27 a train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.    magnet train of steel nailstrain of iron nails     the trains are then carefully removed from the magnet.    what happens to the trains?  a both trains fall apart.  b both trains stay together.  c only the train of iron nails falls apart.  d only the train of steel nails falls apart.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  28 the north pole of a bar magnet is placed in turn next to each end of a rod x. one end of the rod  moves away from the north pole but the other end moves towards the north pole.    the experiment is repeated with the bar magnet and a different rod y but this time both ends of  the rod move towards the north pole.    from which materials could the rods x  and y be made?     rod x rod y  a soft iron copper  b soft iron soft iron  c steel copper  d steel soft iron      29 a student investigates the electrostatic charges on three objects p, q and r.    the student places object p on the insulated pan of a balance and notes the reading on the balance.    the student then holds object q a small distance above object p and notes the reading on the balance.    finally, the student holds object r the small distance above object p and notes the reading on  the balance.    the student\u2019s observations are shown.    86.5  gobject p 131.7  g 78.2  gobject q object r     which row gives possible charges that explain these observations?     charge on p charge on q charge on r  a negative positive negative  b negative negative negative  c positive positive negative  d positive negative positive     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17 [turn over  30 which equation is used to calculate resistance?  a resistance = p.d. + current  b resistance = p.d. \u2013 current  c resistance = p.d. \u00d7 current  d resistance = p.d. \u00f7 current     31 a student connects a circuit with a power supply, a lamp and an ammeter.    where must the ammeter be connected?  a in parallel with the lamp to measure current in the lamp  b in parallel with the lamp to measure potential difference across the lamp  c in series with the lamp to measure current in the lamp  d in series with the lamp to measure potential difference across the lamp     32 two 3.0  \u03c9 resistors are connected in parallel.    which statement about their combined resistance is correct?  a the combined resistance is less than 3.0  \u03c9.  b the combined resistance is 3.0  \u03c9.  c the combined resistance is more than 3.0  \u03c9 but less than 6.0  \u03c9.  d the combined resistance is 6.0  \u03c9.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  33 the diagram shows a potential divider circuit.    x z yvslider     how does the movement of the slider affect the voltmeter reading?     movement  of slider voltmeter  reading  a z to x falls to zero  b z to x increases  c z to y falls to zero  d z to y increases     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17 [turn over  34 the diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an  ammeter.    a     which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the current in the circuit?     temperature resistance of  thermistor current in circuit  a decreases decreases increases  b decreases increases decreases  c increases decreases decreases  d increases increases increases      35 an appliance is connected to a mains supply. its circuit also contains a switch and a fuse.    which circuit shows the fuse in the correct position?    live neutralappliance live neutralapplianceab live neutralappliancelive neutralappliance cd      ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  36 there is an electric current in a straight wire in the direction into the page. this produces a  magnetic field around the wire. all the field lines are circles but only one field line is shown.    wire with current into the pagemagnetic field line     which row describes the magnetic field?     direction of  the field lines spacing of  the field lines  a   anti-clockwise   evenly spaced over  the whole field  b   anti-clockwise   more widely spaced  further from the wire  c   clockwise   evenly spaced over  the whole field  d   clockwise   more widely spaced  further from the wire     37 a wire carrying a current is placed in a magnetic field. the wire experiences a force due to the  field.    which action does not change the direction of the force?  a increasing the current and reversing the field direction  b increasing the current, keeping the field direction constant  c reversing the current and increasing the field strength  d reversing the current, keeping the field direction constant     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  38 different isotopes of chlorine are represented as lc35 17  and lc37 17 .    they behave the same way chemically.    why is this?  a they have the same nuclide notation.  b they have the same number of neutrons.  c they have the same number of nucleons.  d they have the same number of protons.    39 a radioactive source emits three types of radiation r, s and t.    the diagram shows an experiment set up to study the penetrating properties of r, s and t.    paper few mm of aluminiumfew cm of leadr ts     which types of radiation are r, s and t?     r s t  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles  c \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  d \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles     40 what is meant by the half-life  of a radioactive isotope?  a half of the time taken for all of the original nuclei to decay  b the time taken for half of the original nuclei to decay  c the time taken for the charges on all the nuclei to halve  d the time taken for the mass of each nucleus to halve    ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/11/o/n/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib17 11_0625_12/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *0285820688 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  1 a student investigates the rate of flow of oil through a funnel.    the diagrams show the experiment and the volume of oil in the measuring cylinder at the start of  the experiment, and one minute later.    80 6040 20cm380 6040 20cm 3 initial measurementafter 1.0 minute    what is the rate of flow of oil through the funnel during the one minute?  a 0.73  cm3  / s b 0.80  cm3  / s c 44  cm3  / s d 48  cm3  / s      2 the graph represents the motion of a vehicle.    20 0 0 400 time  / sspeed m / s     what is the distance travelled by the vehicle in 400  s?  a 20  m b 400  m c 4000  m d 8000  m     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17 [turn over  3 the speed-time graph represents the motion of an object.    18 16141210 8.0 6.04.02.00.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0speed m  / s time  / s    what is the average speed of the object?  a 2.0  m / s b 6.0  m / s c 8.5  m / s d 11  m / s     4 a spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.    spring metal     which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?  a friction  b mass  c pressure  d weight     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  5 the graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet p and on planet q.    0 2 04 06 08 0400 300200100 0weight  / nplanet p planet q mass  / kg    an object weighs 400  n on planet p. the object is taken to planet q.    which row is correct?     mass of object  on planet q  / kg weight of object  on planet q  / n  a 40 200  b 40 400  c 80 200  d 80 400      6 what is needed to determine the density of a regularly shaped block?  a a balance and a beaker  b a balance and a ruler  c a measuring cylinder and a beaker  d a measuring cylinder and a ruler     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17 [turn over  7 the diagram shows an aircraft flying in a straight horizontal line at constant speed.    w is the weight of the aircraft.  l is the lift (upward force) due to air flow over the wings.  t is the thrust force due to the engine.  d is the air resistance (drag).    the diagram shows the direction of these forces.    dtl w    what are the relationships between the forces?  a l = w and t = d  b l = w and t is greater than d  c l is greater than w and t = d  d l is greater than w and t is greater than d     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  8 a pivoted beam supports a load p at one end and a load q at the other end.    the weight of the beam can be ignored.    30 cm 70  cm pqpivot     the beam is balanced.    which row gives possible values for p and for q?     p / n q / n  a 21 7  b 21 9  c 30 10  d 30 70     9 each diagram shows a metal plate with four parallel forces acting on it. these are the only forces  acting on the plates.    in which diagram is the plate in equilibrium?    a 1.0 n 2.0 n2.0 n 1.0 nb 2.0 n 1.0 n1.0 n 2.0 n c 1.0 n 2.0 n1.0 n 2.0 nd 2.0 n 2.0 n1.0 n 2.0 n    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17 [turn over  10 a load is attached to the end of a spring. a student pulls the load down from its rest position and  releases it. it oscillates vertically and eventually comes to rest.    loadload     which row gives the type of energy transferred to the apparatus, and the type of energy to which  this has then been transferred when the load comes to rest?     type of energy transferred  to the apparatus type of energy to which this  has then been transferred  when the load comes to rest  a elastic energy in the spring   chemical energy in the  spring and in the air  b elastic energy in the spring   thermal energy in the  spring and in the air  c gravitational potential  energy in the load chemical energy in the  spring and in the air  d gravitational potential  energy in the load thermal energy in the  spring and in the air      11 a student runs up a flight of stairs.    lengthheight     which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against  gravity?  a the height of the flight of stairs  b the length of the flight of stairs  c the time taken to run up the stairs  d the weight of the student     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  12 a book has a mass of 400  g.    one of its surfaces measures 0.10  m \u00d7 0.20  m. this surface is in contact with a table.    the gravitational field strength g is10  n / kg.    what is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?  a 0.08  n / m2 b 8.0  n / m2 c 20  n / m2 d 200  n / m2      13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    90 8070605040302010cm vacuum metre rule mercury     which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?  a 12  cm b 74  cm c 86  cm d 100  cm     14 a pollen grain in a beaker of still water is viewed through a microscope.    which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?    a b c d     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17 [turn over  15 the diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. a child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.    the temperature of the air in the toy does not change.        how does the air pressure in the toy change and why?     pressure reason  a decreases air molecules move more slowly  b decreases air molecules strike the rubber less frequently  c increases air molecules move more quickly  d increases air molecules strike the rubber more frequently     16 which row identifies the fixed points on the celsius scale?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a boiling point of mercury melting point of pure ice  b boiling point of pure water melting point of pure ice  c melting point of mercury boiling point of pure water  d melting point of pure ice boiling point of pure water    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  17 the diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical  beaker containing oil. both are heated for one minute.    water oil electric heate r    the temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase steadily. the increase in  temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.    why is this?  a oil has a higher boiling point than water.  b oil has a lower boiling point than water.  c the oil has a larger thermal capacity than the water.  d the oil has a smaller thermal capacity than the water.      18 which statement about the direction of a change of state is correct?  a evaporation is the reverse process to boiling.  b evaporation is the reverse process to condensation.  c evaporation is the reverse process to melting.  d evaporation is the reverse process to solidification.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17 [turn over  19 three cups are made from the same insulating material.    cup 1 cup 2 cup 3    the cups are each filled with the same volume of hot tea.    in which cup does the tea cool most quickly and in which cup does it cool most slowly?     most quickly most slowly  a 1 3  b 2 1  c 3 2  d 3 1      20 why does a balloon filled with hot air rise?  a cold air is less dense than hot air.  b cold air is more dense than hot air.  c heat rises.  d the density of the balloon is greater than the density of the surrounding gas.     21 a wave moves along the surface of water.    what is the wavelength of the wave?  a the distance between one crest and the next crest  b the distance that a crest moves along the surface in one second  c the distance that a particle of water moves up and down  d the number of waves that pass a fixed point in one second     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  22 the diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.    wavefronts     which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?    reflecteda reflectedb reflectedc reflectedd      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17 [turn over  23 the diagram shows an object o in front of a thin converging lens of focal length f.    at which point will the lens form a sharp image of the object?    ffa b c do       24 the diagram shows light travelling from glass to air.    air glass20\u00b0 50\u00b0     what is the angle of refraction for this ray of light?  a 20\u00b0 b 40\u00b0 c 50\u00b0 d 70\u00b0      25 which piece of equipment is designed to produce a type of electromagnetic wave?  a electric fire  b electric generator  c electric motor  d electromagnet      26 what is ultrasound?  a sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing  b sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear  c sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear  d sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  27 a student finds that it takes sound 0.33 seconds to travel 100 metres.    from this information, what is the speed of sound?  a 30  m / s b 60  m / s c 300  m / s d 600  m / s      28 a train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.    magnet train of steel nailstrain of iron nails     the trains are then carefully removed from the magnet.    what happens to the trains?  a both trains fall apart.  b both trains stay together.  c only the train of iron nails falls apart.  d only the train of steel nails falls apart.     29 two circuits are set up as shown. the iron rods are placed close together and are able to move.    xs iron rod iron rod     what happens to the size of the gap at x when switch s is closed?  a it decreases.  b it decreases then increases.  c it increases.  d it does not change.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17 [turn over  30 which circuit can be used to determine the resistance of resistor r?    aa v ab v ac v ad rr rrv       31 a wire has a resistance r.    a second wire made from the same metal has double the length and has double the diameter of  the first wire.    what is the resistance of the second wire?  a 2r b r c 4r d 8r      32 the circuit diagram shows a 4.0  \u03c9 resistor and an 8.0  \u03c9 resistor connected to a 6.0  v battery.    8.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c96.0 v     what is the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0  \u03c9 resistor?  a 0.5  v b 2.0  v c 4.0  v d 6.0  v    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  33 the diagram shows a motor and a light-dependent resistor (ldr) connected in a circuit.    m     which change decreases the current in the motor so that it turns more slowly?  a connecting a resistor in parallel with the ldr  b connecting a resistor in series with the ldr  c exchanging the positions of the motor and the ldr in the circuit  d increasing the brightness of the light falling on the ldr     34 the diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an  ammeter.    a     which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the  current in the circuit?     temperature resistance of  thermistor current in circuit  a decreases decreases increases  b decreases increases decreases  c increases decreases decreases  d increases increases increases     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17 [turn over  35 an appliance is connected to a mains supply. its circuit also contains a switch and a fuse.    which circuit shows the fuse in the correct position?    live neutralappliance live neutralapplianceab live neutralappliancelive neutralappliance cd       36 the diagram shows a bar magnet and a coil of wire. the bar magnet is moved at the same speed  in each experiment.    in which situation is the largest el ectromotive force (e.m.f.) induced?    bar magnet coilmoves right stationarya bar magnet coilmoves left stationaryb bar magnet coilmoves rightmoves left at same speed as bar magnetc bar magnet coilmoves leftmoves left at same speed as bar magnetd      ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  37 diagram 1 shows a wire carrying an electric current. the wire is between the poles of a magnet.    the current and the magnetic field produce a force on the wire which is upwards, as shown.    ns currentforce diagram 1sncurrent diagram 2    the magnetic poles and the current are now both reversed, as in diagram 2.    in which direction is the force on the wire in diagram 2?  a downwards  b towards the north pole of the magnet  c towards the south pole of the magnet  d upwards     38 a nuclide of radon-222 is represented by  rn222 86 .    how many protons and how many neutrons are in a nucleus of this nuclide?     protons neutrons  a 86 136  b 86 222  c 222 86  d 222 136     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  39 a radioactive source emits three types of radiation r, s and t.    the diagram shows an experiment set up to study the penetrating properties of r, s and t.    paper few mm of aluminiumfew cm of leadr ts     which types of radiation are r, s and t?     r s t  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles  c \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  d \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles     40 a radioactive source has a half-life of 0.5 hours.    a detector near the source shows a reading of 6000 counts per second.    background radiation can be ignored.    what is the reading on the detector 1.5 hours later?  a 750 counts per second  b 1500 counts per second  c 2000 counts per second  d 3000 counts per second    ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/12/o/n/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib17 11_0625_13/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *2982654513 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  1 a measuring cylinder contains some water. a small metal block is slowly lowered into the water  and is then removed.    finally a piece of plastic is attached to the metal block and the block is again slowly lowered into  the water.    the diagrams show the measuring cylinder at each stage of this process.    100 908070605040302010cm 31 100908070605040302010cm 32 100908070605040302010cm 33 metal block metal blockplastic     what is the volume of the piece of plastic?  a 10  cm3 b 25  cm3 c 70  cm3 d 80  cm3     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17 [turn over  2 a car accelerates from rest and travels a distance of 100  m in 10 seconds.    which speed-time graph represents the motion of this car?    15 10 0 00 05 0speed m / s time  / sa 20 100speed m / s time  / sb 10 10 100speed m / s time  / sc 100speed m / s time  / sd      3 the diagram is the speed-time graph for a bicycle journey.    0 0 20 40 50 70speed time  / s    when is the bicycle moving at a constant speed?  a between 0 and 20  s  b between 20  s and 40  s  c between 40  s and 50  s  d between 50  s and 70  s    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  4 a spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.    spring metal     which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?  a friction  b mass  c pressure  d weight     5 the graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet p and on planet q.    0 2 04 06 08 0400 300200100 0weight  / nplanet p planet q mass  / kg    an object weighs 400  n on planet p. the object is taken to planet q.    which row is correct?     mass of object  on planet q  / kg weight of object  on planet q  / n  a 40 200  b 40 400  c 80 200  d 80 400     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17 [turn over  6 what is needed to determine the density of a regularly shaped block?  a a balance and a beaker  b a balance and a ruler  c a measuring cylinder and a beaker  d a measuring cylinder and a ruler      7 a cart experiences a forward force of 500  n.    the cart also experiences a backward force of 200  n.    there are no other forward or backward forces on the cart.    what is the resultant force on the cart?  a 300  n backwards  b 300  n forwards  c 700  n backwards  d 700  n forwards      8 the diagram shows a beam with a pivot, a load p at one end and a load q at the other end.    the pivot can be moved left or right and the loads can be increased or decreased.    the weight of the beam can be ignored.    0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 load p load qpivot     which combination of pivot position and loads causes the beam to be in equilibrium?     pivot position  / cm load p  / n load q  / n  a 30 6.0 4.0  b 40 6.0 4.0  c 50 5.0 9.0  d 60 3.0 9.0    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  9 the lamp in the diagram is not very stable and falls over easily.    basestemshade     which row shows changes that would definitely make the lamp more stable?     base centre of gravity  a narrower higher  b narrower lower  c wider higher  d wider lower     10 a toy car without a motor is moving at high speed along a track. the toy car follows a vertical  loop as shown.    start    which row describes the changes that are taking place in the kinetic energy and in the  gravitational potential energy of the car in the position shown?     kinetic energy gravitational  potential energy  a decreasing decreasing  b decreasing increasing  c increasing decreasing  d increasing increasing    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17 [turn over  11 a student runs up a flight of stairs.    lengthheight     which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against  gravity?  a the height of the flight of stairs  b the length of the flight of stairs  c the time taken to run up the stairs  d the weight of the student      12 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    90 8070605040302010cm vacuum metre rule mercury     which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?  a 12  cm b 74  cm c 86  cm d 100  cm     13 a polystyrene cube of mass 5.0  kg is placed on a horizontal surface. the pressure due to the  cube is 89  n / m2.    what is the length of the sides of the cube?  a 0.56  m b 0.75  m c 1.3  m d 1.8  m     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  14 a pollen grain in a beaker of still water is viewed through a microscope.    which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?    a b c d       15 the diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. a child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.    the temperature of the air in the toy does not change.        how does the air pressure in the toy change and why?     pressure reason  a decreases air molecules move more slowly  b decreases air molecules strike the rubber less frequently  c increases air molecules move more quickly  d increases air molecules strike the rubber more frequently     16 which property cannot  be used for the measurement of temperature?  a half-life of a radioactive isotope  b length of a solid metal bar  c pressure of a gas  d volume of a liquid     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17 [turn over  17 the diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical  beaker containing oil. both are heated for one minute.    water oil electric heate r    the temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase steadily. the increase in  temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.    why is this?  a oil has a higher boiling point than water.  b oil has a lower boiling point than water.  c the oil has a larger thermal capacity than the water.  d the oil has a smaller thermal capacity than the water.      18 why is the heating coil of a domestic immersion heater placed at the bottom of the tank?  a cold water is less dense than hot water and therefore sinks.  b cold water is more dense than hot water and therefore rises.  c hot water is less dense than cold water and therefore rises.  d hot water is more dense than cold water and therefore sinks.     19 a plane wave in a shallow tank of water of uniform depth is incident normally on the small gap in  a barrier.    what happens after the wave passes through the gap?  a the frequency increases.  b the speed decreases.  c the wavelength decreases.  d the wave spreads out.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  20 the diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.    wavefronts     which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?    reflecteda reflectedb reflectedc reflectedd      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17 [turn over  21 the diagram shows a ray of light in glass. the ray reaches a boundary with air.    one weak ray of light is missing from the diagram.    50\u00b0air glass     which statement is correct?  a at the boundary, the speed of the light will become less.  b the critical angle for light at this boundary is 50 \u00b0.  c the diagram shows an example of diffraction of light.  d the missing ray is a weak reflected ray.     22 light enters a transparent block.    the light is refracted into the block and then strikes the top edge of the block at the critical angle.    which diagram correctly shows the angle of refraction r and the critical angle c?    a b c drc cc rr rc      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  23 which statement about radio waves is correct?  a they are used in television remote controllers.  b they can be detected by the human eye.  c they travel as longitudinal waves.  d they have the same speed in a vacuum as ultraviolet waves.      24 which types of thermal energy transfer are due to electromagnetic waves?  a conduction and convection  b convection and radiation  c convection only  d radiation only      25 the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    the speed of ultraviolet waves in air is 300  000  000  m / s.    which row gives a possible frequency and speed of an ultrasound wave in air?     frequency  / hz speed  m / s  a 4000 330  b 4000 300  000  000  c 40  000 330  d 40  000 300  000  000    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17 [turn over  26 the diagram shows the earth and its surroundings.    through which labelled region can sound not be transmitted?    a sea (water)b land (rock)c atmosphere (air)d outer space (vacuum) not to scale      27 a train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.    magnet train of steel nailstrain of iron nails     the trains are then carefully removed from the magnet.    what happens to the trains?  a both trains fall apart.  b both trains stay together.  c only the train of iron nails falls apart.  d only the train of steel nails falls apart.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  28 the diagram shows an electromagnet.    x     which material is part x made from?  a copper  b iron  c steel  d tin     29 in which unit is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery measured?  a a b j c n d v    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17 [turn over  30 the diagram shows a circuit symbol for a component that can be used as an input transducer.        which graph shows how the resistance of the component varies with its intended input variable?    a resistance temperature0 0b resistance temperature0 0 c resistance light intensity0 0d resistance light intensity0 0      31 which statement is not correct for two identical lamps connected in parallel?  a the potential difference across each lamp is half the supply voltage.  b the remaining lamp still operates when one lamp is removed.  c they can be switched on and off separately.  d they remain bright if another lamp is connected in parallel.     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  32 only one of the ammeters in the circuit is showing an incorrect reading.    which ammeter is showing the incorrect  reading?    a aaaammeter a: reading = 0.30  a ammeter d: reading = 0.20  a ammeter c: reading = 0.25  aammeter b: reading = 0.10  a       33 the diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an  ammeter.    a     which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the  current in the circuit?     temperature resistance of  thermistor current in circuit  a decreases decreases increases  b decreases increases decreases  c increases decreases decreases  d increases increases increases    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17 [turn over  34 an appliance is connected to a mains supply. its circuit also contains a switch and a fuse.    which circuit shows the fuse in the correct position?    live neutralappliance live neutralapplianceab live neutralappliancelive neutralappliance cd       35 an electrical device requires a voltage of 5.0  v to operate normally. the mains supply voltage is  250  v.    which row shows a transformer that provides output voltage that enables the device to operate  normally when connected to the mains supply?     number of turns on  the primary coil number of turns on  the secondary coil  a 500 2500  b 500 25  000  c 2500 500  d 25  000 500     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  36 a straight current-carrying wire has a magnetic field around it.    which diagram best shows the magnetic field pattern around the wire?    a b c d      37 which row states the charge on an electron and states whether electrons are located inside the  nucleus of an atom?     charge located inside  the nucleus  a negative no  b negative yes  c positive no  d positive yes    38 the element sodium, symbol na, has a proton number of 11.    which is a possible symbol for a sodium nuclide?  a  na9 11  b na11 9 c na11 23  d na23 11      ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  39 a radioactive source emits three types of radiation r, s and t.    the diagram shows an experiment set up to study the penetrating properties of r, s and t.    paper few mm of aluminiumfew cm of leadr ts     which types of radiation are r, s and t?     r s t  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles  c \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  d \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles      40 radioactive iodine-131 emits \u03b2-particles and has a half-life of 8 days. it decays to produce   xenon-131.    which statement about this decay is correct?  a after 8 days no more \u03b2-particles are emitted.  b after 8 days the number of xenon-131 atoms has halved.  c after 16 days the iodine-131 has decayed completely.  d after 16 days the number of iodine-131 atoms has reduced to one quarter.     ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/13/o/n/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 20 printed pages.  ib17 11_0625_21/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *6133216338 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/21     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  1 a student measures the volume of a cork.    he puts some water into a measuring cylinder and then one glass ball. he puts the cork and then  a second, identical glass ball into the water as shown.    100 806040 20 diagram 1cm3 100 806040 20 diagram 2cm3 100 806040 20 diagram 3cm3 glass ball glass ballcorkglass ball     diagram 1 shows the first water level.    diagram 2 shows the water level after one glass ball is added.    diagram 3 shows the water level after the cork and the second glass ball are added.    what is the volume of the cork?  a 30  cm3 b 40  cm3 c 50  cm3 d 100  cm3     2 four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.    air resistance may be ignored.    which ball has the smallest average speed?    4.0 kga 1.0 m3.0 kgb 2.0 m2.0 kgc 3.0 m1.0 kgd 4.0 m ground     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  3 an ice crystal falls vertically from a cloud.    what happens to the acceleration of the ice crystal as it falls?  a it decreases because of air resistance.  b it decreases because of gravity.  c it increases because of air resistance.  d it increases because of gravity.     4 a spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.    spring metal     which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?  a friction  b mass  c pressure  d weight      5 which object has the greatest weight?  a an object of mass 10  kg in a 15  n / kg gravitational field  b an object of mass 15  kg in a 13  n / kg gravitational field  c an object of mass 20  kg in a 9.0  n / kg gravitational field  d an object of mass 50  kg in a 3.0  n / kg gravitational field     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  6 a uniform beam xy is 100  cm long and weighs 4.0  n.    fx y 8.0 ncentre of beampivot10 cm60 cm80 cm     the beam rests on a pivot 60  cm from end x.    a load of 8.0  n hangs from the beam 10  cm from end x.    the beam is kept balanced by a force f acting on the beam 80  cm from end x.    what is the magnitude of force f ?  a 8.0  n b 18  n c 22  n d 44  n     7 the diagrams show four table lamps resting on a table. the position of the centre of mass of  each lamp is labelled x.    which lamp is the most stable?    a b c d xx xxx xx      ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  8 the diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10  n forces acting at  a point in the directions shown.    10 n 10 n     what is the magnitude of the resultant force?  a 7.5  n b 8.6  n c 18  n d 20  n     9 a tennis ball of mass 0.060  kg travels horizontally at a speed of 25  m / s. the ball hits a tennis  racket and rebounds horizontally at a speed of 40  m / s.    ballracket before hitting racket25 m / s after hitting racket40 m / s     the ball is in contact with the racket for 50  ms.    what force does the racket exert on the ball?  a 0.018  n b 0.078  n c 18  n d 78  n    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  10 the diagram shows the path of a stone that is thrown from x and reaches its maximum height  at y.    path of stoney x    the stone gains 10  j of gravitational potential energy as it moves from x to y.    the stone has 2.0  j of kinetic energy at y.    air resistance can be ignored.    how much kinetic energy did the stone have immediately after it was thrown at x?  a 2.0  j b 8.0  j c 10  j d 12  j     11 a motor is used to lift a load of 40  n.    40 nloadmotor load lifted through 0.50  m     the power of the motor is 40  w and the system is 20% efficient.    how long does it take the motor to lift the load through 0.50  m?  a 0.50  s b 2.5  s c 5.0  s d 25  s     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  12 a student runs up a flight of stairs.    lengthheight     which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against  gravity?  a the height of the flight of stairs  b the length of the flight of stairs  c the time taken to run up the stairs  d the weight of the student      13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    90 8070605040302010cm vacuum metre rule mercury     which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?  a 12  cm b 74  cm c 86  cm d 100  cm     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  14 the diagram shows a glass flask, sealed with a small volume of mercury in a glass tube. when  the flask is gently warmed the mercury rises up the tube.    air watermercuryglass tube     what is the main cause of the movement of the mercury?  a expansion of air in the flask  b expansion of the glass flask  c expansion of the glass tube  d expansion of the mercury     15 a pollen grain in a beaker of still water is viewed through a microscope.    which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?    a b c d     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  16 the diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. a child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.    the temperature of the air in the toy does not change.        how does the air pressure in the toy change and why?     pressure reason  a decreases air molecules move more slowly  b decreases air molecules strike the rubber less frequently  c increases air molecules move more quickly  d increases air molecules strike the rubber more frequently     17 a strip of iron and a strip of brass are firmly attached to each other along their entire length. this  combination is a bimetallic strip.    iron strip brass strip    this bimetallic strip is heated and it bends as shown.    fixed supportiron brass     the bimetallic strip is now cooled and becomes straight again.    what causes the bimetallic strip to become straight again?  a the brass contracts more than the iron.  b the brass expands more than the iron.  c the iron contracts more than the brass.  d the iron expands more than the brass.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  18 an aluminium block has a mass of 200  g.    the specific heat capacity of aluminium is 900  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    how much energy is needed to raise the temperature of the block from 20  \u00b0c to 110  \u00b0c?  a 2.0  j b 200  j c 16  200  j d 16  200  000  j      19 which statement about convection currents is correct?  a convection currents occur because, when cooled, liquids contract and become more dense.  b convection currents occur because, when warmed, liquids expand and become more dense.  c convection currents only occur in liquids.  d convection currents only occur in solids and liquids.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  20 the diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.    wavefronts     which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?    reflecteda reflectedb reflectedc reflectedd      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  21 the diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror. a ray of light from the object is incident on  the mirror.    object q pr s plane mirror    through which point does the reflected ray pass, and at which point is the image of the object  formed?     point through which  reflected ray passes point at which  image is formed  a p r  b p s  c q r  d q s    22 a laser is a source of light with a single frequency.    which description of this type of light is correct?  a dispersed  b focused  c monochromatic  d refracted     23 visible light, x-rays and microwaves are all components of the electromagnetic spectrum.    which statement about the waves is correct?  a in a vacuum, microwaves travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.  b in a vacuum, microwaves travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter  wavelength.  c in a vacuum, x-rays travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.  d in a vacuum, x-rays travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter wavelength.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  24 the moon is 380  000  km from the earth. a laser light beam is directed from the earth to the  moon. the beam is reflected back to the earth.    how long does it take for the light to travel to the moon and back to the earth?  a 1.27  ms b 2.53  ms c 1.27  s d 2.53  s      25 which wavefront is travelling at a speed closest to that of a sound wave through a solid?  a one that moves 10  m in 0.01  s  b one that moves 50  m in 0.5  s  c one that moves 1000  m in 100  s  d one that moves 2000  m in 2000  s      26 different waves travel through air.    which waves have the greatest difference in speed?  a ultrasound waves and sound waves  b ultrasound waves and ultraviolet waves  c ultraviolet waves and light waves  d ultraviolet waves and radio waves     27 a student stands 180  m in front of a vertical, flat cliff and bangs together two pieces of wood to  make a short, loud sound.    a timer records the echo of the sound 1.5 seconds after the pieces of wood are banged together.    based on this result, what is the speed of sound?  a 120  m / s b 240  m / s c 270  m / s d 540  m / s    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  28 a train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.    magnet train of steel nailstrain of iron nails     the trains are then carefully removed from the magnet.    what happens to the trains?  a both trains fall apart.  b both trains stay together.  c only the train of iron nails falls apart.  d only the train of steel nails falls apart.      29 how can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?  a cool the magnet for a long time.  b place it next to another magnet.  c slowly pull it out of a coil connected to an a.c. supply.  d slowly pull it out of a coil connected to a d.c. supply.     30 a positively-charged rod is held near to, but not touching, an uncharged metal sphere.    the sphere is briefly now connected to earth.    the rod is removed.    which statement about the charge on the sphere is correct?  a it is charged negatively because negative charges have moved from earth to the sphere.  b it is charged negatively because positive charges have moved from the sphere to earth.  c it is charged positively because negative charges have moved from the sphere to earth.  d it is charged positively because positive charges have moved to earth from the sphere.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  31 the diagram shows a circuit with a gap between points p and q.    four pieces of metal wire of the same material are connected, in turn, between points p and q in  the circuit.    a pq    the table gives the diameters and lengths of the wires.    in which wire is the current the largest?  diameter  / mm length  / m  a 0.10 1.0  b 0.10 2.0  c 0.20 1.0  d 0.20 2.0    32 a torch has a simple circuit with a 3.0  v battery and a lamp. there is a 20  ma current in the lamp.    how much energy is transferred to the lamp in 5.0 minutes?  a 0.30  j b 18  j c 60  j d 0.30  kj     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  33 a student connects the circuit shown.        which graph shows the variation with time of the current in the resistor?    current 0 0 timea current timeb 0 0 0 0current 0 0 timec current timed      ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  34 the diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an  ammeter.    a     which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the  current in the circuit?     temperature resistance of  thermistor current in circuit  a decreases decreases increases  b decreases increases decreases  c increases decreases decreases  d increases increases increases      35 what does the symbol shown represent?        a an and gate  b a nor gate  c a not gate  d an or gate     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  36 the diagram shows a copper wire xy connected to a resistor.    the wire is moved in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.    there is an induced current in the wire from x to y.    in which labelled direction is the wire moving?    nsab c dc yx       37 the graph shows how the voltage induced across a coil changes with time as the coil spins in a  magnetic field.    voltage 0 0 time     which graph shows what happens when the coil spins more quickly?    (all graphs are drawn to the same scale.)    voltagea 0 0 timevoltageb 0 0 time voltagec 0 0 timevoltaged 0 0 time     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17 [turn over  38 emissions x and y from radioactive material are passed through a magnetic field. the diagram  shows the direction of the emissions, the direction of the magnetic field and the effect on the emissions.    emission x emission ymagnetic field into the page     which type of emission is x, and which type of emission is y?     emission x emission y  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles  b \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles  d \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays      39 what is meant by the half-life  of a radioactive isotope?  a half of the time taken for all of the original nuclei to decay  b the time taken for half of the original nuclei to decay  c the time taken for the charges on all the nuclei to halve  d the time taken for the mass of each nucleus to halve    ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/21/o/n/17  40 the rate of emission of a radioactive source is measured until the reading reaches the  background rate of 20 counts per minute.    the results are shown.    0 1 02 03 04 05 06 0200 190180170160150140130120 110 100 908070605040302010 0rate of emission counts  / minute time  / minute    what is the best estimate of the half-life of the source?  a 10 minutes  b 12 minutes  c 14 minutes  d 30 minutes       "
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib17 11_0625_22/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *2664559192 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  1 a student investigates the rate of flow of oil through a funnel.    the diagrams show the experiment and the volume of oil in the measuring cylinder at the start of  the experiment, and one minute later.    80 6040 20cm380 6040 20cm 3 initial measurementafter 1.0 minute    what is the rate of flow of oil through the funnel during the one minute?  a 0.73  cm3  / s b 0.80  cm3  / s c 44  cm3  / s d 48  cm3  / s      2 four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.    air resistance may be ignored.    which ball hits the floor last?    1.0 kga 0.5 m2.0 kgb 1.0 m3.0 kgc 1.5 m4.0 kgd 2.0 m ground      ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17 [turn over  3 the gravitational field strength on the earth is greater than the gravitational field strength on the  moon. the earth has an atmosphere, but the moon does not.    which speed-time graph represents the motion of a light ball dropped from a great height near  the surface of the earth and near the surface of the moon?    0 0speed timea earth moon 0 0speed timeb earthmoon 0 0speed timec earth moon 0 0speed timed earth moon      4 a spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.    spring metal     which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?  a friction  b mass  c pressure  d weight     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  5 a body of mass m has a weight w in a location where the gravitational field strength is g.    which statement about these quantities is correct?  a m and w are both forces.  b m and w are both vector quantities.  c m and w are related by the equation mw= g.  d m and w have the same unit.      6 an object is pivoted at point p. a student ties a length of string to a peg on the object. he pulls  the string with a force f.    p qrstf objectstring peg     what is the moment of the force f about the point p?  a f \u00d7 q b f \u00d7 r c f \u00d7 s d f \u00d7 t      7 each diagram shows a metal plate with four parallel forces acting on it. these are the only forces  acting on the plates.    in which diagram is the plate in equilibrium?    a 1.0 n 2.0 n2.0 n 1.0 nb 2.0 n 1.0 n1.0 n 2.0 n c 1.0 n 2.0 n1.0 n 2.0 nd 2.0 n 2.0 n1.0 n 2.0 n   ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17 [turn over  8 the diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10  n forces acting at  a point in the directions shown.    10 n 10 n     what is the magnitude of the resultant force?  a 7.5  n b 8.6  n c 18  n d 20  n     9 a ball has a mass of 0.30  kg. it moves horizontally with a speed of 3.0  m / s in the direction shown.    the ball hits a wall.    before hitting the wall3.0 m / s after hitting the wall2.0 m / swall ballwall ball     the ball rebounds from the wall with a horizontal speed of 2.0  m / s.    what is the change in momentum of the ball?  a 0.30  kg  m / s b 1.0  kg  m / s c 1.5  kg  m / s d 5.0  kg  m / s    10 an object has a mass of 500  kg.    it moves with a speed of 30  m / s.    what is its kinetic energy?  a 7.5  kj b 15  kj c 225  kj d 450  kj    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  11 different processes have different efficiencies.    which row shows the most efficient process?     energy  input  / j useful energy  output  / j  a 10 3  b 40 10  c 100 25  d 2000 250     12 a student runs up a flight of stairs.    lengthheight     which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against  gravity?  a the height of the flight of stairs  b the length of the flight of stairs  c the time taken to run up the stairs  d the weight of the student     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17 [turn over  13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    90 8070605040302010cm vacuum metre rule mercury     which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?  a 12  cm b 74  cm c 86  cm d 100  cm     14 a pollen grain in a beaker of still water is viewed through a microscope.    which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?    a b c d     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  15 the diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. a child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.    the temperature of the air in the toy does not change.        how does the air pressure in the toy change and why?     pressure reason  a decreases air molecules move more slowly  b decreases air molecules strike the rubber less frequently  c increases air molecules move more quickly  d increases air molecules strike the rubber more frequently     16 the diagram shows a glass flask, sealed with a small volume of mercury in a glass tube. when  the flask is gently warmed the mercury rises up the tube.    air watermercuryglass tube     what is the main cause of the movement of the mercury?  a expansion of air in the flask  b expansion of the glass flask  c expansion of the glass tube  d expansion of the mercury     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17 [turn over  17 which row identifies the fixed points on the celsius scale?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a boiling point of mercury melting point of pure ice  b boiling point of pure water melting point of pure ice  c melting point of mercury boiling point of pure water  d melting point of pure ice boiling point of pure water      18 aluminium has a specific heat capacity of 900  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    the internal energy of a 2.0  kg block of aluminium increases by 13  500  j.    by how much does the temperature of the block increase?  a 0.067  \u00b0c b 0.13  \u00b0c c 7.5  \u00b0c d 15  \u00b0c     19 why does a balloon filled with hot air rise?  a cold air is less dense than hot air.  b cold air is more dense than hot air.  c heat rises.  d the density of the balloon is greater than the density of the surrounding gas.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  20 the diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.    wavefronts     which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?    reflecteda reflectedb reflectedc reflectedd      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17 [turn over  21 the diagram shows an object o in front of a thin converging lens of focal length f.    at which point will the lens form a sharp image of the object?    ffa b c do       22 the diagram shows a ray of light incident on the surface of a rectangular glass block at 90 \u00b0 to the  surface.    ray of light glass block     which quantities remain unchanged as the light enters the glass block?  a direction and frequency  b direction and speed  c frequency and speed  d speed and wavelength      23 which piece of equipment is designed to produce a type of electromagnetic wave?  a electric fire  b electric generator  c electric motor  d electromagnet     24 the moon is 380  000  km from the earth. a laser light beam is directed from the earth to the  moon. the beam is reflected back to the earth.    how long does it take for the light to travel to the moon and back to the earth?  a 1.27  ms b 2.53  ms c 1.27  s d 2.53  s    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  25 different waves travel through air.    which waves have the greatest difference in speed?  a ultrasound waves and sound waves  b ultrasound waves and ultraviolet waves  c ultraviolet waves and light waves  d ultraviolet waves and radio waves     26 the speed of sound is different in different states of matter.    the speed of sound in water is 1500  m / s.    which row correctly compares the speed of sound in ice and the speed of sound in steam with the speed of sound in water?     speed of sound in ice  m / s speed of sound in steam  m / s  a less than 1500 less than 1500  b less than 1500 more than 1500  c more than 1500 less than 1500  d more than 1500 more than 1500    27 a student finds that it takes sound 0.33 seconds to travel 100 metres.    from this information, what is the speed of sound?  a 30  m / s b 60  m / s c 300  m / s d 600  m / s     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17 [turn over  28 a train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.    magnet train of steel nailstrain of iron nails     the trains are then carefully removed from the magnet.    what happens to the trains?  a both trains fall apart.  b both trains stay together.  c only the train of iron nails falls apart.  d only the train of steel nails falls apart.     29 an old and expensive steel watch becomes magnetised.    the owner wants to use the watch again. he must demagnetise the watch.    what is the best method to do this?  a insert the watch in a solenoid that carries alternating current and then slowly remove it.  b insert the watch in a solenoid that carries direct current and then slowly remove it.  c pass alternating current through the watch.  d pass direct current through the watch.    30 which diagram represents the electric field due to a negatively-charged conducting sphere?    a \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013b cd      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  31 the diagram shows a circuit with a gap between points p and q.    four pieces of metal wire of the same material are connected, in turn, between points p and q in  the circuit.    a pq    the table gives the diameters and lengths of the wires.    in which wire is the current the largest?  diameter  / mm length  / m  a 0.10 1.0  b 0.10 2.0  c 0.20 1.0  d 0.20 2.0    32 the graph shows the way in which one physical quantity y varies with another physical quantity x.    0 0y x    which row gives suitable quantities for y and x?     y x  a   the number of atoms of a  radioactive isotope present the time taken    b   the potential difference  across a metallic conductor the current in the metallic conductor    c the resistance of a length of wire the diameter of the wire  d   the volume of a 1.0  kg object   the density of the material from  which the object is made     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17 [turn over  33 the potential difference across a car headlamp is 12  v. the current in the lamp is 2.5  a.    how much energy is transferred by the lamp in 1.0 hour?  a 1800  j b 1800  w c 108  000  j d 108  000  w      34 the diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an  ammeter.    a     which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the  current in the circuit?     temperature resistance of  thermistor current in circuit  a decreases decreases increases  b decreases increases decreases  c increases decreases decreases  d increases increases increases    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  35 an incomplete truth table for a nand gate is shown.    input p input q output  0 0 w  0 1 x  1 0 y  1 1 z    what are the values of w, x, y and z?     w x y z  a 0 0 0 1  b 0 1 1 1  c 1 0 0 0  d 1 1 1 0     36 the diagram shows a wire hanging freely between the poles of a magnet. there is a current in  the wire in the direction shown.    s n currentwire     the magnet and current cause a force to act on the wire.    in which direction does this force act?  a into the page (away from you)  b out of the page (toward you)  c to the left  d to the right    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17 [turn over  37 a 100% efficient transformer has 6000 turns on its primary coil and 600 turns on its secondary  coil. the output voltage of the transformer is 12  v.    a resistor is connected across the secondary coil and dissipates 24  w of power.    primary coil 6000 turnssecondary coil 600 turns  output voltage 12  v power 24  w     what is the current in the primary coil of the transformer?  a 0.050  a b 0.20  a c 5.0  a d 20  a     38 in the diagram, the circle represents an atom (not to scale) with the nucleus at its centre.    a particle is emitted by a radioactive source and approaches the nucleus of the atom. the curved  arrow shows the path of the particle.    path of particlenucleus     what is the nature and charge of the particle?     nature of particle charge of particle  a \u03b1-particle negative  b \u03b1-particle positive  c \u03b2-particle negative  d \u03b2-particle positive     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  39 which row describes the behaviour of \u03b3-rays in an electric field and in a magnetic field?     electric field magnetic field  a deflected deflected  b deflected undeflected  c undeflected deflected  d undeflected undeflected     40 a radioactive source has a half-life of 0.5 hours.    a detector near the source shows a reading of 6000 counts per second.    background radiation can be ignored.    what is the reading on the detector 1.5 hours later?  a 750 counts per second  b 1500 counts per second  c 2000 counts per second  d 3000 counts per second     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/22/o/n/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib17 11_0625_23/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over     *7509628836 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/23     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2017     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  1 a measuring cylinder contains some water. a small metal block is slowly lowered into the water  and is then removed.    finally a piece of plastic is attached to the metal block and the block is again slowly lowered into  the water.    the diagrams show the measuring cylinder at each stage of this process.    100 908070605040302010cm 31 100908070605040302010cm 32 100908070605040302010cm 33 metal block metal blockplastic     what is the volume of the piece of plastic?  a 10  cm3 b 25  cm3 c 70  cm3 d 80  cm3     2 four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.    air resistance may be ignored.    which ball hits the floor first?    1.0 kga 0.5 m2.0 kgb 1.0 m3.0 kgc 1.5 m4.0 kgd 2.0 m ground      ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17 [turn over  3 the diagram shows the vertical forces acting on a ball as it falls vertically through the air. the ball  does not reach terminal velocity.    air resistance weight    which row describes what happens to the resultant force on the ball and what happens to the  acceleration of the ball as it falls through the air?     resultant force acceleration  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    4 a spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.    spring metal     which name is given to the force that stretches the spring?  a friction  b mass  c pressure  d weight     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  5 on the moon, all objects fall with the same acceleration.    which statement explains this?  a on the moon, all objects have the same weight.  b the moon has a smaller gravitational field strength than the earth.  c the weight of an object is directly proportional to its mass.  d the weight of an object is inversely proportional to its mass.     6 a pair of cutters is used to cut a rope.    rsqpblade bladehandle handle    where should the rope be positioned and at which labelled points should the hands be positioned to produce the greatest cutting force?     rope  positioned hands  positioned  a p r  b p s  c q r  d q s    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17 [turn over  7 the lamp in the diagram is not very stable and falls over easily.    basestemshade     which row shows changes that would definitely make the lamp more stable?     base centre of gravity  a narrower higher  b narrower lower  c wider higher  d wider lower     8 the diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10  n forces acting at  a point in the directions shown.    10 n 10 n     what is the magnitude of the resultant force?  a 7.5  n b 8.6  n c 18  n d 20  n    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  9 an object has a mass of 60  kg.    it decelerates from 50  m / s to 20  m / s when a resultant force of 300  n acts on it.    for how long does the force act?  a 0.071  s b 0.17  s c 6.0  s d 14  s     10 a car, starting from rest at position x, accelerates up a hill. the car reaches a speed of 10  m / s at  position y.    the kinetic energy of the car at position y is equal to its gain in gravitational potential energy from  x to y.    xy gain in height of car    take the gravitational field strength g to be 10  n / kg.    what is the gain in height of the car between x and y?  a 0.50  m b 5.0  m c 10  m d 50  m    11 a 150  w filament lamp has an efficiency of 10%. a 40  w compact fluorescent lamp (cfl) has an  efficiency of 30%.    each lamp is switched on for the same amount of time.    which lamp produces more light and which lamp converts more energy into other forms of  energy?     produces more light converts more energy  into other forms  a cfl lamp cfl lamp  b cfl lamp filament lamp  c filament lamp cfl lamp  d filament lamp filament lamp    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17 [turn over  12 a student runs up a flight of stairs.    lengthheight     which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against  gravity?  a the height of the flight of stairs  b the length of the flight of stairs  c the time taken to run up the stairs  d the weight of the student      13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    90 8070605040302010cm vacuum metre rule mercury     which length is used to find the value of atmospheric pressure?  a 12  cm b 74  cm c 86  cm d 100  cm     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  14 a pollen grain in a beaker of still water is viewed through a microscope.    which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?    a b c d       15 the diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. a child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.    the temperature of the air in the toy does not change.        how does the air pressure in the toy change and why?     pressure reason  a decreases air molecules move more slowly  b decreases air molecules strike the rubber less frequently  c increases air molecules move more quickly  d increases air molecules strike the rubber more frequently    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17 [turn over  16 the diagram shows a glass flask, sealed with a small volume of mercury in a glass tube. when  the flask is gently warmed the mercury rises up the tube.    air watermercuryglass tube     what is the main cause of the movement of the mercury?  a expansion of air in the flask  b expansion of the glass flask  c expansion of the glass tube  d expansion of the mercury      17 which property cannot  be used for the measurement of temperature?  a half-life of a radioactive isotope  b length of a solid metal bar  c pressure of a gas  d volume of a liquid     18 a student uses an immersion heater to heat some water in a beaker.    the water is heated from 20  \u00b0c to 80  \u00b0c.    the energy supplied to the water is 60.0  kj.    what is the thermal capacity of the water? (ignore any heat loss.)  a 667  j / \u00b0c b 750  j / \u00b0c c 1000  j / \u00b0c d 3000  j / \u00b0c     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  19 why is the heating coil of a domestic immersion heater placed at the bottom of the tank?  a cold water is less dense than hot water and therefore sinks.  b cold water is more dense than hot water and therefore rises.  c hot water is less dense than cold water and therefore rises.  d hot water is more dense than cold water and therefore sinks.      20 the diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.    wavefronts     which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?    reflecteda reflectedb reflectedc reflectedd     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17 [turn over  21 the diagram shows a ray of light in glass. the ray reaches a boundary with air.    one weak ray of light is missing from the diagram.    50\u00b0air glass     which statement is correct?  a at the boundary, the speed of the light will become less.  b the critical angle for light at this boundary is 50 \u00b0.  c the diagram shows an example of diffraction of light.  d the missing ray is a weak reflected ray.      22 light travelling in air enters a plastic block at an angle of incidence of 62 \u00b0.    the plastic has a refractive index of 1.48.    62\u00b0 ray of lightplastic block     what is the angle of refraction?  a 18\u00b0 b 28\u00b0 c 37\u00b0 d 42\u00b0     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  23 a sound wave travels from a medium in one state into the same medium but in another state.  this causes the speed of the wave to change from approximately 300  m / s to approximately  3000  m / s.    between which two states is the sound wave travelling?  a gas to solid  b liquid to gas  c liquid to solid  d solid to liquid      24 the moon is 380  000  km from the earth. a laser light beam is directed from the earth to the  moon. the beam is reflected back to the earth.    how long does it take for the light to travel to the moon and back to the earth?  a 1.27  ms b 2.53  ms c 1.27  s d 2.53  s      25 which statement about radio waves is correct?  a they are used in television remote controllers.  b they can be detected by the human eye.  c they travel as longitudinal waves.  d they have the same speed in a vacuum as ultraviolet waves.     26 the diagram shows the earth and its surroundings.    through which labelled region can sound not be transmitted?    a sea (water)b land (rock)c atmosphere (air)d outer space (vacuum) not to scale    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17 [turn over  27 different waves travel through air.    which waves have the greatest difference in speed?  a ultrasound waves and sound waves  b ultrasound waves and ultraviolet waves  c ultraviolet waves and light waves  d ultraviolet waves and radio waves    28 a train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.    magnet train of steel nailstrain of iron nails     the trains are then carefully removed from the magnet.    what happens to the trains?  a both trains fall apart.  b both trains stay together.  c only the train of iron nails falls apart.  d only the train of steel nails falls apart.      29 what is the best method to demagnetise a steel rod?  a pass the rod through a coil connected to an a.c. supply.  b pass the rod through a coil connected to a d.c. supply.  c place the rod next to another magnet.  d stroke the rod with another magnet.     30 there is a current in a metal wire.    which particles in the wire move to cause this current?  a \u03b1-particles  b electrons  c neutrons  d protons    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  31 the diagram shows a circuit with a gap between points p and q.    four pieces of metal wire of the same material are connected, in turn, between points p and q in the circuit.    a pq    the table gives the diameters and lengths of the wires.    in which wire is the current the largest?  diameter  / mm length  / m  a 0.10 1.0  b 0.10 2.0  c 0.20 1.0  d 0.20 2.0     32 a battery is connected to a circuit. it is switched on for 1.0 minute. during that time, there is a  current of 0.40  a in the circuit and the battery supplies a total of 48  j of energy.    which row gives the charge that passes and the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?     charge that passes  in 1.0 minute  / c e.m.f. of the  battery  / v  a 0.40 2.0  b 0.40 120  c 24 2.0  d 24 120     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17 [turn over  33 identical cells and identical resistors are used to make the circuits shown.    a a circuit 1 circuit 2    in circuit 1, the ammeter reads 2.0  a.    what is the ammeter reading in circuit 2?  a 1.0  a b 2.0  a c 4.0  a d 8.0  a    34 the diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an  ammeter.    a     which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the  current in the circuit?     temperature resistance of  thermistor current in circuit  a decreases decreases increases  b decreases increases decreases  c increases decreases decreases  d increases increases increases     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  35 the diagram shows an and gate and an or gate connected together.    outputx y z    which combination of inputs x, y and z gives an output of 0?     x y z  a 0 0 1  b 0 1 1  c 1 0 0  d 1 1 0     36 the diagram shows a short-circuited copper coil swinging about an axis at right-angles to a  strong magnetic field. the motion induces a current in the coil.    magnetic fieldaxis of rotation of coil coil direction of swing of coil    what is the effect, if any, of this induced current in the coil?  a the induced current has no effect on the movement of the coil because copper is non- magnetic.  b the induced current produces a magnetic field of constant magnitude in the coil.  c the induced current produces forces that assist the change causing it.  d the induced current produces forces that oppose the changes causing it.     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17 [turn over  37 diagram 1 shows a magnet being pushed into a coil that is connected to a centre-zero  galvanometer.    n s diagram 10n s diagram 20 n s diagram 30stationary magnet     which row shows the directions of the pointer when the magnet is as shown in diagrams 2   and 3?     diagram 2 diagram 3  a     b     c     d        ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  38 radioactive carbon-14 decays to nitrogen-14 by the emission of a particle.    c14 6  \u2192  n14 7  +  particle    which particle has been emitted in this process?  a a \u03b2-particle  b an \u03b1-particle  c a neutron  d a proton     39 as \u03b1-particles pass through the electric field be tween two charged plates, they are deflected  downwards.    +++++++++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u03b1-particles     what happens to \u03b3-rays passing through the same electric field?  a they are deflected downwards more than the \u03b1-particles.  b they are deflected upwards.  c they are not deflected at all.  d they follow the same path as the \u03b1-particles.     40 radioactive iodine-131 emits \u03b2-particles and has a half-life of 8 days. it decays to produce   xenon-131.    which statement about this decay is correct?  a after 8 days no more \u03b2-particles are emitted.  b after 8 days the number of xenon-131 atoms has halved.  c after 16 days the iodine-131 has decayed completely.  d after 16 days the number of iodine-131 atoms has reduced to one quarter.    ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2017 0625/23/o/n/17  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sg) 132269/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8414511595* physics  0625/31 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 a student clamps a metre rule to the end of a bench, as shown in fig. 1.1. he attaches a mass to  the end of the rule. mass metre rulebench fig. 1.1  the student displaces the end of the rule by a small distance. the rule oscillates up and down.  the student measures the time for ten complete oscillations.  (a) state the name of a measuring device for timing the oscillations.  ..  [1]  (b) state a reason why the student measures the time for ten oscillations, rather than for one.  ..  [1]  (c) the student repeats the procedure. his results are shown in the table. results time for ten complete oscillations  / seconds 1st 3.93 2nd 4.07 3rd 3.55 4th 3.99   (i) one of the results is incorrect. on the table, draw a ring around the incorrect result.  [1]   (ii) calculate the average value for the time for ten complete oscillations.  average time = ...  s  [2]   (iii) determine the time for one complete oscillation. state your answer to two significant  figures.  time =   s [1] [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a river flowing through a village. there are two bridges across the river.  bridge x bridge ydirection of flow fig. 2.1  two students plan to measure the speed of a stick as it floats on the river between bridge x  and bridge  y.  (a) the students plan to drop a stick into the middle of the river from bridge x. the stick moves  with the water between bridge x and bridge y.   describe how the students can determine the average speed of the stick.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [4]  (b) the stick moves with constant speed.    one statement correctly describes the horizontal forces acting on the stick.   put a tick ( \u2713) in the box next to the correct statement.     only a forward force acts.     the forward force and the backward force are equal.     the forward force is greater than the backward force.     the backward force is greater than the forward force. [1] [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 fig 3.1 shows a warning marker floating on the surface of a lake. warning marker heavy objectsurface of lake bottom of lakemetal chain fig. 3.1  the marker is attached by a metal chain to a heavy object on the bottom of the lake.  (a) fig. 3.2 shows the forces acting on the marker at one moment in time. 280  n 250  n fig. 3.2   calculate the resultant force on the marker.  resultant force =   n  direction = ... [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) fig. 3.3 shows part of the metal chain. it is made from small metal loops. fig. 3.3   a damaged loop is removed from the chain. describe a method to determine the density of  the metal from which the loops are made.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [5] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 fig. 4.1 shows two methods for generating electricity using renewable sources.  fig. 4.1a  fig. 4.1b fig. 4.1  (a) name the energy source for each method. in fig. 4.1a, the energy source is  . in fig. 4.1b, the energy source is  . [2]  (b) (i) state two advantages of using renewable sources for generating electricity compared to  using a coal-fired power station. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ..  [2]   (ii) state one disadvantage of using renewable sources for generating electricity compared  to using a coal-fired power station.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 complete the sentences. choose from the words in the box. solid                liquid                gas  the words may be used once, more than once or not at all.  (a) the atoms are usually arranged in regular patterns in a .  . [1]  (b) the state of matter with the lowest density is a .  . [1]  (c) evaporation takes place when the most energetic molecules leave the surface of a     .  . [1]  (d) a small force can change the volume of a .  . [1] [total: 4]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light inside a semi-circular glass block. air glass fig. 6.1   the angle of incidence at the straight surface is less than the critical angle for the glass.   on fig. 6.1, continue the path of the ray.  [2]  (b)  fig. 6.2 shows another ray of light inside a semi-circular glass block. air glass     fig. 6.2     the angle of incidence at the straight surface is greater  than the critical angle for the glass.   (i) on fig. 6.2, continue the path of the ray.  [2]   (ii) state the term used to describe what happens to the light when it strikes the straight  surface in fig. 6.2.  ..  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) a wave on the surface of water approaches a barrier. there is a small gap in the barrier, as  shown in fig. 6.3. water wavebarrier gap fig. 6.3   on fig. 6.3, draw three  wavefronts that have passed through the gap.  [2] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a man listening to a radio. x centre of loudspeaker fig. 7.1   (i) sound from the radio makes an air particle at x vibrate.    on fig. 7.1 draw two arrows on point x to show the directions of vibration of the air  particle.  [2]   (ii) which of these terms correctly describes the sound wave?    tick one box.      transverse      longitudinal      electromagnetic   [1]   (iii) suggest a value for the frequency of the sound that the man can hear. state the unit.  frequency =    [2]   (iv) explain why the man cannot hear ultrasound.  ...  ..  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) fig. 7.2 shows a distance-time graph for ultrasound travelling in sea-water. 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80distance  / m time  / s fig. 7.2   (i) use the graph to calculate the speed of ultrasound in sea-water.  speed = .  m / s  [2]   (ii) a scientist measures the depth of the sea by using ultrasound. she sends a pulse of  ultrasound from the ship to the seabed. it reflects from the seabed as shown in fig. 7.3. pulse of ultrasoundreflection fig. 7.3    the time taken between sending a pulse and receiving the echo is 0.60  s. use the graph  to determine the depth of the sea.  depth = .  m  [2] [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 fig. 8.1 shows a plotting compass and a bar magnet. the plotting compass consists of a small  magnet in the shape of an arrow. the arrow can rotate freely on a pivot. n splotting compass bar magnetpivot fig. 8.1  (a) describe how to use this apparatus to identify the magnetic field pattern of the bar magnet.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b)  fig. 8.2 shows a bar magnet. n s fig. 8.2   on fig. 8.2 draw the magnetic field pattern around the bar magnet. use arrows to show the  direction of the field.  [3] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 a student investigates how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature.  fig. 9.1 shows part of the circuit the student uses. apower source fig. 9.1  (a) (i) on fig. 9.1, label the thermistor.  [1]   (ii) the student measures the potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor.    on fig. 9.1, draw a voltmeter symbol, correctly connected, to measure this potential  difference.  [2]  (b) the student varies the temperature of the thermistor and measures the current in it.   some of the results are shown in the table. temperature of  thermistor  / \u00b0c20 40 60 80 current in thermistor  / a 0.005 0.010 0.040   (i) the potential difference across the thermistor is 6.0  v.    calculate the resistance of the thermistor when its temperature is 40  \u00b0c.   resistance = ..  \u03c9  [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (ii) describe and explain what happens to the current in the thermistor as the temperature of  the thermistor rises.  ...  ...  ..  [2]   (iii) suggest a value for the current in the thermistor at 80  \u00b0c. ...  a  [1]  (c) at a different temperature, the resistance of the thermistor is 300  \u03c9 and the resistance of the  variable resistor is 400  \u03c9.   calculate the value of their combined resistance.  combined resistance = ..  \u03c9  [1] [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 (a) a student investigates electromagnetic induction.   fig. 10.1 shows the arrangement she uses. s 0+2 \u20132 sensitive centre-zero meterwire n fig. 10.1   when the student holds the wire stationary, as shown in fig. 10.1, the reading on the meter is  zero.   she moves the wire down between the poles of the magnet. then she holds it stationary and  then moves it up.   (i) the meter measures the size and direction of the induced electromotive force (e.m.f.).  on fig. 10.2, draw the position of the pointer on the meter at each stage.    one has been done for you. 0+2 \u201320+2 \u201320+2 \u20132 wire stationary wire moving up wire moving down [2] fig. 10.2   (ii) describe how the student could increase the size of the induced electromotive force  (e.m.f.).  ...  ...  ..  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) a transformer is used near a power station.   there are 60 turns on the input coil and 660 turns on the output coil.   the input voltage is 25  000 v.   calculate the output voltage.  output voltage = ..  v  [3]  (c) state two advantages of high-voltage transmission of electrical energy. 1.  ... 2.  ..  [2] [total: 9]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 11 a nucleus of polonium-210 can be represented as 210 84po.  (a) (i) state the number of protons in a nucleus of polonium-210  ..  [1]   (ii) state the number of neutrons in a nucleus of polonium-210    [1]   (iii) state the number of electrons in a neutral atom of polonium-210  ...  [1]  (b) polonium-210 is radioactive. when polonium-210 decays it emits alpha radiation.   name two other types of radiation emitted when radioactive elements decay.   ...      and      ...  [1]  (c) polonium-210 has a half-life of 138 days.   a sample of polonium-210 has a mass of 0.4  g.   calculate the time for the sample to decay until only 0.1  g of polonium-210 remains.  time =   days  [3] [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 12 a scientist needs to reduce the risks when working with radioactive sources.  (a) explain why radioactive sources can be dangerous.  ...  ...  ..  [2]  (b) describe how to reduce the risks when working with radioactive sources.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [2] [total: 4]",
            "20": "20 0625/31/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/sg) 132270/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn over *4342807288* physics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 (a) nuclear power stations generate electricity.   which of these statements describe an advantage of using nuclear power stations, and which  of them describe a disadvantage?   put a tick ( \u2713) in the correct column for each statement. the first one is done for you. statement advantage disadvantage nuclear power stations require high levels of security \u2713 nuclear power stations produce small amounts of carbon  dioxide nuclear power stations have a small effect on climate  change waste radioactive material can take a very long time to  decay [3]  (b) describe how electricity may be generated using geothermal resources.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3] [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a speed-time graph for a ship starting to move. 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 time  / minutesspeed m / s abcd fig. 2.1  (a) describe the motion of the ship during each section of the graph. a  ...  ... b  ...  ... c  ...  ... d  ...  ..  [4]  (b) determine the distance travelled by the ship in section b of the graph.  distance =  .  m  [3] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 20173 fig. 3.1 shows a glass vase used for displaying flowers. fig. 3.1  (a) the mass of the glass is 450 g. the volume of glass in the vase is 145 cm3.   (i) calculate the density of the glass.  density =  ..  g / cm3  [3]   (ii) calculate the weight of the glass.  weight =  ..  n  [3]  (b) another vase has a weight of 30 n. the area of the base in contact with a table is 80.0 cm2.   calculate the pressure this vase exerts on the table.  pressure =  ..  n / cm2  [3] [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4 fig. 4.1 shows a fairground ride. cabinpath of cabinstarting positionpylonpylon fig. 4.1  people sit inside a cabin suspended between two pylons. the cabin is lifted to the starting position  shown in fig. 4.1.  (a) state the name of the type of energy gained by the cabin as it rises.  ..  [1]  (b) the cabin is released and swings down between the two pylons. the path of the cabin is  shown on fig. 4.1. the cabin has maximum kinetic energy at one point on its path. draw this  point on fig. 4.1 and label this point x.  [1]  (c) a force opposes the motion of the cabin as it falls. state the name of this force.  ..  [1]  (d) after a few swings, a brake system stops the cabin (not shown on the diagram).   use ideas about energy transfer to suggest how the brake system stops the cabin.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 5 a cup made from plastic, containing a hot drink, is shown in fig. 5.1. plastic sides hot drink air fig. 5.1  (a) state the term given to materials that reduce the transfer of thermal energy.  ..  [1]  (b) the hot drink gradually cools.   describe and explain two processes by which thermal energy is transferred from the hot  drink.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [5] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light reflected from mirror 1 at point p and striking mirror 2 at point q. 45\u00b0 p qplane mirror 1 plane mirror 2ray of light fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, \u2022 clearly mark the position of the normal at q, \u2022 draw the ray reflected from point q, \u2022 mark the angle of reflection at q using the letter r,   state the law you used to draw the reflected ray.  ... [4]  (b) compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 at q with the direction of the ray  incident on mirror 1 at p. tick one box.   the ray of light reflected from mirror 2 is    parallel to the incident ray at p,    perpendicular to the incident ray at p,    at an angle of 45\u00b0 to the incident ray at p.  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (c) a thin, converging lens forms an image, i, of an object, o, as shown in fig. 6.2. o24 cm 10 cm 8 cm i fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, label a principal focus of the lens, using the letter f. [1]   (ii) state the focal length of the lens.  focal length =    cm  [1] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. r o y _ b _ vvisibleradio wavesmicro- wavesinfra-red ultraviolet x-rays gamma rays fig. 7.1  (a) fig. 7.1 shows the first letter of some colours in the visible part of the spectrum.   state which colours are missing.   ... and ...  [1]  (b) state the names of the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum that are used in   (i) communications,     ... and ...  [1]   (ii) remote controls for televisions and dvd players.  ..  [1]  (c) describe how high levels of microwave energy can be dangerous to people.  ...  ..  [1]  (d) state two safety precautions required when using x-rays. 1.  ... 2.  ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 (a) an atom of carbon contains protons, neutrons and electrons.   indicate where each particle is found in the atom. place a tick in the appropriate box. particle in the   nucleusorbiting the   nucleus electron neutron proton [3]  (b) an atom of carbon contains 6 protons, 7 neutrons and 6 electrons.   (i) state the proton number of the carbon.  ..  [1]   (ii) state the nucleon number of the carbon.  ..  [1]  (c) carbon has many different isotopes.   (i) explain the meaning of the term  isotope .  ...  ...  ..  [2]   (ii) the nuclide notation for the carbon in (b) is 13 6c.    suggest the nuclide notation for another possible isotope of carbon.  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 9 some metals can be used to make permanent magnets.  (a) identify the metal that can form a permanent magnet.   tick one box.    copper   iron  steel  [1]  (b) fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that is used to make a permanent magnet. a12 v coil fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, label the variable resistor with the letter x.  [1]   (ii) describe how the circuit is used to make a permanent magnet.  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (c) fig. 9.2 shows the coil from fig. 9.1. fig. 9.2   on fig. 9.2 carefully sketch the pattern of the magnetic field produced by the coil.  [2] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 fig. 10.1 shows a series circuit. a5.6 \u03c9fixed resistor light-dependent resistor (ldr) fig. 10.1  (a) in dim light, the resistance of the ldr is 20.0  \u03c9.   (i) the resistance of the battery and ammeter can be ignored.    calculate the resistance of the circuit.  resistance =  ..  \u03c9  [1]   (ii) the current in the circuit is 0.23  a.    calculate the potential difference across the fixed resistor.  potential difference (voltage) =  ..  v  [3]  (b) a bright light shines on to the ldr.   state and explain what happens to the current in the circuit.  ...  ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 11 fig. 11.1 shows a charger for a mobile (cell) phone. the charger contains a transformer. fig. 11.1  (a) the primary coil of the transformer has 900 turns and the secondary coil has 49 turns.   the input voltage to the transformer is 220  v.   calculate the output voltage.  output voltage =  ..  v  [3]  (b) state the name of the metal used to make the coils of the transformer.  ..  [1]  (c) a transformer uses an alternating current (a.c.).   describe the difference between alternating current (a.c.) and direct current (d.c.).  ...  ...  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 12 fig. 12.1 shows some equipment used in a demonstration. rubber bungwires from battery electric bellglass jar hammer gong to vacuum pump fig. 12.1  the glass jar is connected to a vacuum pump. the electric bell is switched on. the observers see  and hear the bell working.  (a) (i) the vacuum pump removes air from the glass jar. state what the observers see and  what they hear after the air is removed. observers see    ... observers hear  ..  ..  [2]   (ii) state what the demonstration in (a)(i)  shows about the transmission of sound waves.  ...  ...  ..  [2]   (iii) when the bell is working, the hammer strikes the gong. describe how the gong produces  the sound.  ...  ..  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (b) indicate the lowest and highest frequencies that can be heard by the human ear.   tick one box from each column.  lowest frequency  highest frequency   2 hz  20 khz   20 hz  200 khz   200 hz  2 mhz   2 khz  20 mhz [2] [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (nf/sg) 132271/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn over *6324801284* physics  0625/33 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 (a) a student determines the speed of three cars on a straight road.   the student measured the time for the cars to travel 50  m.   the table shows the measurements. car distance travelled  / m time taken  / s a 50 3.2 b 50 4.0 c 50 3.6   (i) without calculation, identify the fastest car and the slowest car.    complete the table. car the fastest car the slowest car [2]   (ii) calculate the speed of car b.  speed =  ..  m / s  [3]  (b) (i) estimate the time, in minutes, for car c to travel 5000  m.  estimated time =  ...  minutes  [2]   (ii) explain why your answer in (b)(i)  may not be the same as the actual time taken for the  car to travel 5000  m.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a metal object discovered by a scientist using a metal detector. fig. 2.1  the scientist wants to know the type of metal from which the object is made. she needs to find the  density of the metal.  (a) describe how the scientist can measure the volume of the object, using the method of  displacement.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [4]  (b) the mass of the metal object is 347  g and its volume is 18  cm3.   calculate the density of the metal.  density =  ..  g / cm3  [3] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 fig. 3.1 shows a large box with a heavy lid. fig. 3.1  (a) the weight of the box is 2250  n.   calculate the mass of the box.  mass =  .  kg  [3]  (b) a man wants to lift the lid of the box. he puts a strong metal bar between the box and the lid.  he applies a force to the bar as shown in fig. 3.2. 400  n pivot40 cmmetal bar fig. 3.2   (i) calculate the moment of his force about the pivot. state the unit.  moment =  ..  [4]   (ii) the moment in (b)(i)  is not sufficient to lift the lid. describe how the man can increase  the moment, using the same force.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4 a catapult consists of a rubber band attached to a handle. a student uses the catapult to fire a ball  towards a target. fig. 4.1 shows the catapult just before the student releases the rubber band. rubber band ball handle fig. 4.1  (a) when the student releases the rubber band, the ball moves towards the target.   complete the following sentences about energy transfers during this process. use words  from the box. you may use each word once, more than once or not at all.   elastic            force            friction            gravitational            kinetic            thermal   (i) as the rubber band is pulled back, the work done is transferred into ...  potential energy.  [1]   (ii) when the student releases the rubber band, the ball moves forward horizontally. stored     ... potential energy is transferred into  ... energy.  [2]   (iii) as the ball travels through the air there is friction with air molecules. this causes some of     the ball\u2019s ... energy to be transferred into ... energy.  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (b) the ball does not reach the target, as shown in fig. 4.2. path of ball fig. 4.2   describe how the student can increase the energy of the ball, using the same catapult.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 a vehicle may have tyres of type a or type b, as shown in fig. 5.1. type a type b fig. 5.1  (a) state and explain the type of tyre that is suitable for travelling over soft ground.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (b) the temperature of the air in a tyre increases. this affects the motion of the air molecules in  the tyre.   describe and explain the changes.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 6 fig. 6.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0cliquid fig. 6.1  (a) (i) which of these metals is often used for the liquid in thermometers?    tick the correct box.   magnesium   mercury   silver  [1]   (ii) the thermometer is placed inside a freezer containing ice.    suggest the temperature of the ice. draw an arrow on fig. 6.1.  [1]   (iii) a thermometer is calibrated using two fixed points. state the temperatures of the two  fixed points.    lower fixed point = .  \u00b0c    upper fixed point = .  \u00b0c [1]  (b) the sentences are about thermal processes.   complete each sentence. use words from the box. each word may be used once, more than  once or not at all.   conductor           convection           emitter           insulator           radiation           reflection \u2022 a dull black surface is a good ... \u2022 copper is used to make pans because it is a good thermal  \u2022 in fluids, thermal energy is transferred mainly by  \u2022 thermal energy reaches earth from the sun by means of .. [4] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 shows a floating plastic ball attached by a long rope to a weight on the bottom of a lake.  a water wave on the surface of the lake causes the ball to move vertically up and down. direction of travel of the water waveball rope weight24 cm fig. 7.1  (a) on fig. 7.1, indicate the wavelength of the wave. label the distance w. [1]  (b) determine the amplitude of the wave.  amplitude =    cm  [1]  (c) the ball reaches its maximum height 40 times in 60 seconds. calculate the frequency of the  wave.  frequency =    hz  [2]  (d) explain how the motion of the ball shows that the water wave is transverse.  ...  ...  ..  [1]  (e) state another example of a transverse wave.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 fig 8.1 shows two parallel rays of light that pass through a thin converging lens. the diagram is  incomplete. there is a principal focus at f1 and at f2. x yf1f2cc fig. 8.1  (a) (i) on fig. 8.1, complete the ray diagram to show how the lens focuses the light.  [3]   (ii) which distance on fig. 8.1 is a focal length of the lens? tick ( \u2713) one box.      c to f2      f1 to f2      f2 to y [1]  (b) (i) a ray of light travels through a semicircular glass block, as shown in fig. 8.2. zair glass block fig. 8.2    state the term given to the angle of incidence labelled z.  ..  [1]   (ii) fig. 8.3 shows another ray of light travelling in the semicircular glass block. air glass block fig. 8.3    the angle of incidence is greater than z. continue the path of the ray of light until it  leaves the block.  [2] [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 9 a machine pushes a metal post into the ground using a hammer, as shown in fig. 9.1. the hammer  makes a loud noise when it hits the post. hammer postmachine fig. 9.1  a man stands 160  m from the hammer.  (a) a man sees the hammer hit the post and a short time later hears the sound of the post being  hit. explain the delay in hearing the sound.  ...  ..  [1]  (b) (i) the hammer is 320  m from a large building as shown in fig. 9.2. large building 320  m 160  m postmachine man fig. 9.2    the man hears the hammer hit the post and then hears an echo. explain why he hears  the echo.  ...  ..  [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017   (ii) the speed of sound in air is 320  m / s.    calculate the time difference between the man hearing the first sound and the time at  which he hears the echo.  time difference =  ..  [3]  (c) suggest how the sound of the echo is different from the first sound.  ..  [1] [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 10 a student places a bar magnet onto a sheet of paper, as shown in fig. 10.1. s nx ysheet of paper fig. 10.1  (a) the student shows the pattern of the magnetic field lines around the magnet.   (i) on fig. 10.1 carefully draw two magnetic field lines above the centre line xy and two  magnetic field lines below xy.  [2]   (ii) indicate the direction of the magnetic field lines. use an arrow. mark one field line above  xy and one field line below xy.  [1]   (iii) state the name of a piece of equipment that can be used to determine the direction of  the magnetic field.  ..  [1]  (b) describe how the student can use a bar magnet to test whether a metal rod is a magnet.  ...  ...  ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 11 a student wants to find the resistance of a wire. he connects the circuit shown in fig. 11.1. wirev a fig. 11.1  (a) a teacher checks the circuit and identifies three errors.   using the components given in fig. 11.1, carefully draw the correct circuit diagram in the  space below. [3]  (b) the student uses the correct circuit. the student finds that the current is 0.3  a when the  potential difference across the wire is 2.7  v.   calculate the resistance of the wire.  resistance =  ..  \u03c9  [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) the student tests two other pieces of wire made of the same metal. he compares each  resistance value with that of the first wire.   state how the resistance compares with the first wire   (i) for a wire that is longer, but of the same thickness,  ..  [1]   (ii) for a wire that is thicker, but of the same length.  ..  [1] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 12 this question is about radioactive materials.  (a) state the name of the electromagnetic radiation emitted by some nuclei when they decay.  ..  [1]  (b) describe the composition and the penetrating ability of an \u03b1-particle. composition  ..  ... penetrating ability  .  ..  [2]  (c) americium-241 is a radioactive isotope. it has a half-life of 400 years.   a sample contains americium-241. calculate the percentage of americium-241 that remains  in the sample after 800 years have passed.  percentage remaining =  .  %  [2] [total: 5] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (lk/sg) 133346/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *2939187014* physics  0625/41 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the motion of a car. 20 15 10 5 0 0 10 20 30 40 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 1.1  the mass of the car is 1200  kg.  (a) calculate, for the first 20  s of the motion,   (i) the distance travelled by the car,  distance =  ... [2]   (ii) the acceleration of the car,  acceleration =  ... [2]   (iii) the resultant force acting on the car.  resultant force =  ... [2]  (b) describe the motion of the car in the period of time from 25  s to 40  s.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 (a) state hooke\u2019s law.  ...  ... [1]  (b) for forces up to 120  n, a spring obeys hooke\u2019s law.   a force of 120  n causes an extension of 64  mm.   (i) on fig. 2.1, draw the force-extension graph for the spring for loads up to 120  n. [1] 150 100 50 0 0 20 40 60 80 extension  / mmforce  / n fig. 2.1   (ii) calculate the spring constant k of the spring.  k =  ... [2]  (c) a student makes a spring balance using the spring in (b). the maximum reading of this  balance is 150  n.   the student tests his balance with a known weight of 140  n. he observes that the reading of  the balance is not 140  n.   suggest and explain why the reading is not 140 n.     ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 all the sides of a plastic cube are 8.0  cm long. fig. 3.1 shows the cube. 8.0 cm fig. 3.1 (not to scale)  the mass of the cube is 0.44  kg.  (a) explain what is meant by mass .  ... [1]  (b) (i) calculate the density of the plastic from which the cube is made.  density =  ... [2]   (ii) the density of one type of oil is 850  kg / m3.    state and explain whether the cube floats or sinks when placed in a container of this oil.  ...  ... [1]  (c) on the moon, the weight of the cube is 0.70  n.    (i) calculate the gravitational field strength on the moon.  gravitational field strength =  ... [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (ii) in a laboratory on the moon, the plastic cube is held stationary, using a clamp, in a  beaker of  the oil of density 850  kg / m3.    the arrangement is shown in fig. 3.2. 3.0 cmcube oilclamp standclamp bench fig. 3.2    the lower face of the cube is 3.0  cm below the surface of the oil.      use your answer to (c)(i)  to calculate the pressure due to the oil on the lower face of the  cube.  pressure =  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 fig. 4.1 shows a balloon filled with helium that is used to lift measuring instruments to a great  height above the earth\u2019s surface. fig. 4.1  (a) explain, in terms of momentum, how the atoms of helium produce a force on the wall of the  balloon.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) at ground level, the pressure of the helium in the balloon is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa. the volume occupied  by the helium is 9.6  m3.    the balloon is released and it rises quickly through the atmosphere. the volume occupied by  the helium increases, but the temperature of the helium may be assumed to stay constant.   (i) explain, in terms of the helium atoms in the balloon, why the pressure in the balloon is  smaller than at ground level.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) calculate the pressure of the helium when it occupies a volume of 12  m3.  pressure =  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 (a) a wave passes through a gap in a barrier. the wavelength of the wave is the same magnitude  as the width of the gap in the barrier.   tick one box to indicate what happens to the wave. diffraction and dispersion diffraction only dispersion only refraction and diffraction refraction and dispersion refraction only  [1]  (b) fig. 5.1 shows six wavefronts of a wave travelling on the surface of deep water. the wave is  incident on a boundary with a region where the water is shallow.  direction of wave deep waterboundary shallow water fig. 5.1   (i) on fig. 5.1, draw the wavefronts of the wave in the shallow water where the wave travels  more slowly.  [2]   (ii) the depth of the shallow water is now changed so that the speed of the wave in the  shallow water is 0.60  m / s. the speed of the wave in the deep water is 0.80  m / s.    the distance between successive wavefronts in the deep water is 1.4  cm.    calculate the wavelength of the wave in the shallow water.  wavelength =  ... [4]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 6 (a) the left-hand column of the table shows some possible speeds of a sound wave.   in the right-hand column, write down the medium in which a sound wave has this speed.   choose from solid, liquid or gas. speed of sound wave m / smedium 1500 5000 300  [2]  (b) fig. 6.1 represents a series of compressions and rarefactions of a sound wave. fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, mark, with the letters x and y, the mid-points of two rarefactions.  [1]   (ii) state, in terms of pressure, what is meant by a rarefaction .  ...  ... [1]  (c) astronauts set up a mirror on the moon\u2019s surface. a laser beam is transmitted from the earth\u2019s  surface to the mirror and is then reflected back to earth.   on a certain day, the time between transmitting the beam from a point on the earth\u2019s surface  and receiving the reflected signal at the same point is 2.56  s.   the speed of the laser beam is 3.00 \u00d7 108 m / s.   calculate the distance between the earth\u2019s surface and the moon\u2019s surface.  distance =  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and its principal axis. the points labelled f are each a  principal focus of the lens. f fo fig. 7.1   on fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the top of the object o, to locate the image of o.   label the image i. [3]  (b) underline three  of the terms below to describe the nature of the image produced by a  converging lens used as a magnifying glass. diminished    enlarged    inverted    real   same size    upright    virtual  [2]  (c) fig. 7.2 shows the path of a ray of red light passing through a glass prism. prism air fig. 7.2   a ray of green light enters the prism along the same path as the ray of red light.   on fig. 7.2, draw the path of the ray of green light as it passes through the prism and emerges  into the air.  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 8 (a) describe a renewable process by which electrical energy is obtained from the energy stored  in water. you may draw a diagram in the space.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  (b) explain why the process described in (a) can be regarded as renewable.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) explain whether the sun is the source of the energy stored in the water in (a).  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 9 fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with three 1.5  v cells. 3.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9a c d eb g fh fig. 9.1  (a) calculate   (i) the total electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cells,  e.m.f. =  ... [1]   (ii) the total resistance of the circuit,  resistance =  ... [3]   (iii) the current in the 3.0  \u03c9 resistor.  current =  ... [2]  (b) state, using the letters in fig. 9.1, how you would connect   (i) an ammeter to measure the total current in the circuit,  ...  ... [1]     (ii) a voltmeter to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 6.0  \u03c9 resistor.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 (a) (i) draw the circuit symbol for a diode.  [1]   (ii) state the function of a diode.  ... [1]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows the proposed system for charging the battery of an electric toothbrush.  b acoil x 230  v a.c.coil ybattery handle of toothbrush base of charger+ \u2013 fig. 10.1   the handle of the brush contains the battery and a coil x. the circuit from coil x to the battery  is not shown.   the base of the charger contains a coil y, wound on an iron core, connected to the a.c. mains  supply.   to charge the battery, the handle is lowered so that coil y is inside coil x.   fig. 10.1 shows the direction needed for the charging current at the battery.",
            "13": "13 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (i) on fig. 10.1, complete the circuit from terminals a and b of coil x to the battery.    include a diode.  [2]   (ii) explain how an alternating voltage is produced in coil x.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 11 the radioactive isotope carbon-14 (14 6 c) emits \u03b2-particles as it decays.  (a) the decay of carbon-14 produces an isotope of nitrogen (n).   (i) state the nature of a \u03b2-particle and state where it is produced.  ...  ... [2]   (ii) complete the nuclide equation for the radioactive decay of carbon-14.     14 6 c          . .n  +    . .\u03b2\b [3]  (b) the half-life of carbon-14 is 5700 years.   explain what is meant by the term half-life .  ...  ... [1]  (c) a workman operates a machine that uses \u03b2-particles to determine the level of liquid in a  plastic water bottle that is  being filled.   suggest why   (i) \u03b1-particles are not suitable for the same purpose,  ...  ... [1]   (ii) \u03b3-rays are not suitable for the same purpose.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/41/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (lk/sg) 133347/6 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *7664196292* physics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 fig. 1.1 shows a cylinder made from copper of density 9000  kg / m3.   fig. 1.1   the volume of the cylinder is 75  cm3.  (a) calculate the mass of the cylinder.  mass =  ... [2]  (b) the gravitational field strength is 10  n / kg.   (i) calculate the weight of the cylinder.  weight =  ... [2]   (ii) state one way in which weight differs from mass.  ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) fig. 1.2 shows the cylinder immersed in a liquid.  2.7 cmliquid cylinder fig. 1.2 (not to scale)   the upper face of the cylinder is at a depth of 2.7  cm below the surface of the liquid.   the pressure due to the liquid at the upper face of the cylinder is 560  pa.   (i) calculate the density of the liquid.  density =  ... [2]   (ii) explain why the cylinder does not float in this liquid.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 (a) an object is moving in a straight line at constant speed. a resultant force begins to act upon  the object.   state the  ways in which the force may change the motion of the object.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) state one other effect a force could have on the object.  ... [1]  (c) the mass of a car is 1400  kg. the car, initially at rest, is moved along a level road by a  resultant force of 3500  n. the car reaches a speed of 30  m / s.   (i) calculate the average acceleration of the car.  acceleration =  ... [2]   (ii) calculate  the time for which the force is applied.  time =  ... [2]   (iii) state the name of a force which opposes the motion of the car.  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 3 (a) state the name of a fuel that is burnt to produce large amounts of electrical energy.   describe a process by which electrical energy is obtained from the chemical energy stored in  this fuel. name of fuel:   description of process:  .  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  (b) explain why the sun is the source of the energy stored in the fuel in (a).  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) explain whether the process in (a) is renewable.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 a beaker contains water at room temperature. fig. 4.1 shows the beaker placed on a tripod above  a bunsen burner. fig. 4.1  the bunsen burner is lit and the temperature of the water begins to increase.  (a) the water is evaporating.   (i) describe one difference between evaporation and boiling.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) state and explain what happens to the rate at which the water evaporates as its  temperature increases.  ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) after a few minutes, the water reaches its boiling point temperature. the water continues to  gain energy from the bunsen burner.   (i) state what happens to the temperature of the water in the beaker.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 \u00d7 106 j / kg. after the water reaches  its boiling point, it takes 12 minutes for 0.095  kg of water to boil away.    calculate the average rate at which energy is being supplied to the water by heating.  rate of energy supplied =  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 5 (a) explain why houses in hot countries are often painted white.   use ideas about the transfer of thermal energy in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b)  as a star approaches the end of its life, the amount of radiation emitted from it per second  changes.   the star cools down.   state any effect on the rate of emission of radiation.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 4]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of a water wave on the surface of water approaching a gap in a  barrier.  direction of travel of wavefrontsbarrier with gap fig. 6.1  (a) the wavefronts to the right of the barrier spread out as far as the dashed lines in fig. 6.1.   (i) state the name of the process of spreading out.  ... [1]   (ii) draw four wavefronts to the right of the barrier.  [2]  (b) (i) state the effect of increasing the width of the gap in the barrier.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) state and explain the effect of decreasing the frequency of the water wave.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 7 (a) fig. 7.1 is a diagram of a converging lens used to produce an image of an object. each point  marked f is a principal focus. f fobject image fig. 7.1   write down three  terms that describe the image produced.  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) fig. 7.2 shows a plane mirror, a point object o and an observer\u2019s eye. omirror eye fig. 7.2   (i) on fig. 7.2, draw two rays from the object reflected to the observer\u2019s eye.  [2]   (ii) on fig. 7.2, complete your drawing to determine the position of the image of the object  o.  label this image i.  [2]  [total: 7] ",
            "11": "11 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 8 fig. 8.1 is a circuit diagram.  24 v 8.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9 fig. 8.1  calculate  (a) the resistance of the circuit,  resistance =  ... [4]   (b) the potential difference (p.d.) across the 8.0  \u03c9 resistor.  p.d. =  ... [2]   [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 (a) fig. 9.1 is a circuit diagram. a bc fig. 9.1   (i) state the names of circuit components a, b and c. component a  .   component b  .   component c  .  [2]   (ii) the circuit can be used to indicate a change in temperature.    state and explain what would be observed when the temperature changes from hot   to cold.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit. a b cx  fig. 9.2   complete column x of the truth table for this circuit. use the blank column for your working.   a b c x 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1  [3]   [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a wire that carries a current into the page.   the circles on fig. 10.1 show the pattern of the magnetic field around the wire. fig. 10.1   (i) on fig. 10.1, draw an arrow on each circle to show the direction of the magnetic field.  [1]   (ii) state why the spacing of the circles increases as the distance from the wire increases.  ...  ... [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) fig. 10.2 shows an  electric door lock.   the slot in the door contains an unmagnetised iron bolt attached to a spring.    the slot in the door frame is empty. this slot is surrounded by the coils of a solenoid.   in fig. 10.2 the door is unlocked. the spring is not stretched. door door frame solenoid spring unmagnetised iron bolt s fig. 10.2   in fig. 10.3 the door is locked. the spring is now stretched. fig. 10.3   the bolt is initially in the position shown in fig. 10.2.   describe and explain what happens when    (i) the switch s is closed,  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]   (ii) the switch s is reopened.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 the radioactive isotope bismuth-210 (210 83 bi) decays by \u03b2-particle emission to an isotope of  polonium  (po).  (a) complete the nuclide equation that represents this decay. 210 83 bi          . .po  +    . .\u2009\u03b2  [3]  (b) a radiation detector is placed on a bench in a laboratory where there are no artificial sources  of radiation. the detector is switched on.   in seven one-minute periods, the detector displays these readings. 24            22            25            25            21            20            24   (i) explain why, in the absence of any artificial source, there are readings on the detector.  suggest one origin of this effect.  ...  ...  ... [2]    (ii) explain why the readings obtained are not all the same.  ...  ... [1]   (iii) the half-life of bismuth-210 is 5.0 days.    a sample of bismuth-210 is brought close to the detector and in one minute, the reading  displayed is 487. the equipment is left in the same place for exactly 10 days.    predict the reading in a one-minute period at the end of this time.  reading =  ... [3]  [total: 9]"
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (lk/sg) 133348/6 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *1159195484* physics  0625/43 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 a truck accelerates uniformly along a straight, horizontal road. the mass of the truck is  2.0 \u00d7 104 kg.   (a) the speed of the truck increases from rest to 12  m / s in 30  s.   calculate   (i) the distance travelled by the truck during this time,  distance =  ... [2]   (ii) the resultant force on the truck.   resultant force =  ... [4]  (b) to maintain a uniform acceleration, the forward force on the truck must change.   explain why.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a measuring cylinder that contains a coloured liquid. xh90100cm3 01020304050607080 fig. 2.1  the measuring cylinder contains 82  cm3 of the liquid. the density of the liquid is 950  kg / m3.  (a) calculate the mass of the liquid.  mass =  ... [3]  (b) the height h of the liquid in the measuring cylinder is 0.094  m.   (i) calculate the pressure due to the liquid at point x in fig. 2.1.  pressure =  ... [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017   (ii) the true pressure at point x is different from the value calculated in (b)(i) .    explain why.  ...  ... [1]  (c) a small object is made of steel. it is placed level with the top surface of the liquid in the  measuring cylinder and then released. the object sinks in this liquid.   (i) explain why the object sinks in this liquid.  .. .  ... [1]        (ii) describe how the volume of the object can now be determined.  ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows  solar cells that use radiation from the sun to generate electricity. fig. 3.1  (a) (i) state the name of the process which releases energy in the sun.  ... [1]   (ii) a reaction takes place in the sun as energy is released.    describe what happens in this reaction.    ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) apart from solar cells, there are other energy resources used on earth for which the radiation  from the sun is the source.   state the name of one of these energy resources and explain whether it is renewable.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) state two advantages and two disadvantages of using solar cells to generate electricity. advantage 1  ..  ... advantage 2  ..  ... disadvantage 1  .  ... disadvantage 2  .  ...  [4]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 (a) the molecules of most liquids are, on average, slightly further apart than the molecules of a  solid.   state one other difference between the molecular structures of a solid and a liquid.  ...  ... [1]  (b) a glass tube passes through a stopper and into a glass flask. fig. 4.1 shows that the flask is  completely full of a liquid and that there is also some liquid in the tube. stopper glass flaskglass tube liquid fig. 4.1   the flask is immersed in a large beaker of very hot water. at first, the level of the liquid in the  tube falls, but after a short time it rises.   (i) explain why, at first, the level of the liquid in the tube falls.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]   (ii) explain why the liquid level in the tube stops falling and starts to rise.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 5 a silver spoon has a thermal capacity of 7.2  j / \u00b0c.  (a) explain what is meant by thermal capacity .  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) the silver spoon is dropped into a saucepan of boiling water. the internal energy of the  spoon increases as its temperature increases from 22  \u00b0c to 100  \u00b0c.   (i) calculate the increase in the internal energy of the spoon.  increase in internal energy =  ... [1]   (ii) state, in terms of the atoms, what is meant by internal energy .   ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) the spoon is removed from the boiling water and immediately it begins to transfer energy to  the surroundings. the temperature of the surroundings is 22  \u00b0c.    on fig. 5.1, sketch a graph to show how the temperature of the spoon changes with time  from the instant that it is removed from the water.  [3] 100 80 60 40 20 0 0temperature  / \u00b0c time fig. 5.1  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 6 visible light is one component of the electromagnetic spectrum.   (a) (i) in the table, place a tick in the box next to the approximate value of the speed of light   in air.  [1] speed m / s   3.0 \u00d7 1010 3.0 \u00d7 108 3.0 \u00d7 106 3.0 \u00d7 104 3.0 \u00d7 102   (ii) the frequency of a light wave is 4.8 \u00d7 1014 hz.     calculate the wavelength of this light in air.  wavelength =  ... [2]  (b) light is travelling in an optical fibre that is made of glass.   (i) the glass has a refractive index of 1.5.     1. explain why the quantity refractive index  does not have a unit.       [1]      2. calculate the speed of light in the glass.  speed =  ... [2]   (ii) describe one use of optical fibres in communication technology.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 9]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and its principal axis. the points f1 and f2 are each a  principal focus of the lens. principal axis f1f2o fig. 7.1   an object o is placed between f1 and the lens.   (i) on fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the top of the object o to locate the image.     label the image i. [3]   (ii) the object o is moved to the left along the principal axis so that it is further from the lens  than f1.    fig. 7.2 is a diagram of the new arrangement with the new image shown.  f1f2o imageprincipal axis fig. 7.2    underline three  of the terms below that describe the image shown in fig. 7.2.  [2] diminished         enlarged         inverted         real           same size          upright         virtual",
            "10": "10 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (b) fig. 7.3 shows yellow light passing through a glass prism. fig. 7.3   blue light enters the prism along the same path as the yellow light.   on fig. 7.3, draw the path of the blue light as it enters, passes through and leaves the prism.  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows an uncharged conducting sphere on an insulating stand placed close to a  positively charged rod. + + + + + +positively charged rod insulating standconducting sphere fig. 8.1   the rod and the sphere are not moved.   describe how to charge the sphere using a wire connected to earth and explain whether the  sphere becomes positively charged or negatively charged.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) fig. 8.2 shows a small black circle that represents a positive charge.   on fig. 8.2, draw the pattern and the direction of the electric field in the region around the  charge.  [2] fig. 8.2  (c) a charge of 7.0  c flows along a wire in 5.0 minutes.   calculate the current in the wire.  current =  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows the structure of an alternating current (a.c.) generator.   ndirection of rotationcoil slip rings voltage outputs coil fig. 9.1   the coil completes one rotation every 0.020  s.   (i) using the axes in fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to show how the voltage output of the generator  varies with time during a period of 0.040  s. [2] 0 0 0.020 0.040voltage output time  / s fig. 9.2   (ii) on your graph in fig. 9.2, mark a point labelled a to indicate a time when the coil is  vertical.  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) there is an alternating current (a.c.) in a horizontal wire that is buried in a wall. a builder must  miss this wire when drilling a hole in the wall.   the builder places an instrument against the wall that registers a reading when it is close to  the wire. the instrument includes a long coil (solenoid) s that has an iron core and a sensitive  voltmeter. fig. 9.3 shows the circuit of the instrument close to the wire. s vx alternating current in wiresurface of wall iron coreend view of wire fig. 9.3   (i) explain why there is a reading on the voltmeter.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]   (ii) state the name and the effect of the component labelled x in fig. 9.3.   ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 10 (a) state the nature of \u03b3-rays.  ...  ... [2]  (b) a nucleus of technetium-99 (99 43tc) emits only a \u03b3-ray.   state any effect of this on   (i) the proton number of the nucleus,  ... [1]   (ii) the nucleon number of the nucleus.  ... [1]  (c) in a laboratory a radiation detector displays a count rate of 16  counts  / minute due to  background radiation.   (i)  state what is meant by background radiation .  ...  ... [1]   (ii) a sample of a radioactive isotope is placed near to the radiation detector and a count  rate of 112 counts  / minute is recorded.    after 18 hours, the count rate recorded is 28  counts  / minute.    determine the half-life of this isotope.  half-life =  ... [3]  (d) radioactive isotopes are stored in thick lead containers.   state two precautions to be taken when radioactive isotopes are used . 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/43/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/ar) 133341/5 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn over *4606254857* physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a load using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. metre rule pivotbenchp qa b fig. 1.1  (a) place the metre rule on the pivot and adjust its position so that the metre rule is as near as  possible to being balanced. the 30.0  cm mark must be on the left-hand side of the pivot. the  metre rule must remain at this position on the pivot throughout the experiment.   place the load p on the metre rule so that its centre is exactly at the 30.0  cm mark on the  metre rule.   record the distance a between the 30.0  cm mark and the pivot.  a =  . cm [1]  (b) place a load q on the metre rule and adjust the position of q so that the metre rule is as near  as possible to being balanced. load q has a weight q of 1.0  n.   (i) measure the distance b between the centre of load q and the pivot. record the weight q  and the distance b in table 1.1.   (ii) repeat the procedure, with the load p remaining at the 30.0  cm mark, using q values of  2.0 n, 3.0  n, 4.0  n and 5.0  n. record all the readings in the table. table 1.1 q  /  n b\u200a\u2009/\u2009\u200acm q11 n   (iii) for each value of q, calculate q1 and record the result in the table.  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) plot a graph of b\u200a\u2009/\u200a\u2009cm\u2009(y-axis) against q11 n (x-axis).  [4]  (d) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ... [2]  (e) calculate the weight p of load  p using the equation pag=.  p =  ... [1]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 in this experiment, you will investigate resistance.  the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you. apower  supply ra v fig. 2.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v1 across the resistor ra and the  current i1 in the circuit.   v1 =  ...  i1 =  ...  [2]   (ii) switch off. calculate  the resistance r1 of the resistor ra using the equation irv 1 11= .  r1 =  ... [1]  (b) disconnect the voltmeter.   connect the resistor rb in series with ra.   connect the voltmeter across the two resistors ra and rb. switch on.   (i) measure and record the potential difference v2 across resistors ra and rb combined  and the current i2 in the circuit.  v2 =  ...  i2 =  ...   (ii) switch off. calculate  the resistance r2 of resistors ra and rb combined in series, using      the equation irv 2 22= .  r2 =  ...  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) disconnect the voltmeter.   connect the resistor rc in series with ra and rb.   connect the voltmeter across all three resistors. switch on.   (i) measure and record the potential difference v3 across the three resistors and the current  i3 in the circuit.   v3 =  ...  i3 =  ...  [1]   (ii) switch off. calculate  the resistance r3 of resistors ra, rb and rc combined in series,      using the equation irv 3 33= .  r3 =  ... [1]  (d) a student suggests that r3 = 3 \u00d7 r1.   state whether your results agree with this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [1]  (e) another student suggests that the three resistors,  ra, rb and rc, have the same value of  resistance.    explain how you could use the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 to check this suggestion.   you are not required to carry out this experiment.  ...  ... [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (f) complete the circuit diagram in fig. 2.2 to show: \u2022 the three resistors connected in parallel \u2022 the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the resistors \u2022 a variable resistor connected to control the current in all three resistors. apower  supply fig. 2.2  [2]  (g) the circuit in fig. 2.2 could be used to determine the combined resistance of three resistors  connected in parallel.   suggest a reason for connecting a variable resistor in the circuit.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length f of a lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated objectscreen lensud v bench fig. 3.1  (a) place the centre of the lens at a distance u = 20.0  cm from the illuminated object.   place the screen close to the lens and move it away from the lens until a sharply-focused  image is formed on the screen.   \u2022 measure the distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen. record v in table 3.1.   \u2022 calculate uv and record the result in the table.   \u2022 measure and record in the table the distance d from the illuminated object to the screen.  [3]  (b) repeat the steps in (a) with the lens at a distance u = 30.0  cm from the illuminated object.  record all the readings in the table. table 3.1 u\u200a/\u200acm v\u200a/\u200acm uv\u200a/\u200acm2d\u200a/\u200acm 20.0 30.0  [2]  (c) state one difference that you observe between the image formed on the screen when  u = 20.0 cm and when u = 30.0  cm.  ...  ... [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) (i) use the results in the first row of the table to calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the    lens. use the equation fduv 1= .  f1 =  ...   (ii) use the results in the second row of the table to calculate a value f2 for the focal length of     the lens. use the equation fduv 2= .  f2 =  ...  [1]   (iii) calculate the average  value  fa for the focal length of the lens. give your answer to a  suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  fa =  ...  [2]  (e) suggest two reasons why the results you have obtained may not be reliable. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 a student is investigating whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a  pendulum. the period is the time taken for one complete oscillation of the pendulum. fig. 4.1  shows a pendulum.   fig. 4.2 shows one complete oscillation. bobclamp threadstand          one complete oscillation            fig. 4.1                  fig. 4.2  the student has the following apparatus: pendulum bobs made of polystyrene with diameters 1  cm, 2  cm, 3  cm, 4  cm and 5  cm a supply of thread and a pair of scissors clamp and stand  plan an experiment to investigate whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a  pendulum. you are not required to carry out this experiment.  you should:   \u2022 list additional apparatus that you would require   \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation   \u2022 state the key variables that you would control   \u2022  draw a table with column headings, to show how you would display your readings (you  are not required to enter any readings in the table.)   \u2022 explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "*9855181159* this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (st/sg) 134121/5 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overphysics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 in this experiment, you will compare the oscillations of two pendulums. carry out the following  instructions, referring to figs. 1.1 and 1.2.   clamp d bobclamp one complete oscillation  fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  a pendulum has been set up for you as shown in fig. 1.1. this pendulum has a spherical  pendulum  bob.  (a) adjust the pendulum until the distance d measured to the bottom  of the bob is 50.0  cm.    explain briefly how to use the set-square to avoid a parallax (line of sight) error when  measuring the distance d. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ... [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) move the bob slightly to the side and release it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one complete  oscillation of the pendulum.   (i) measure the time t1 for 20 complete oscillations.      t1 =  ... [1]   (ii) calculate the period t1 of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t1 =  ... [2]  (c) remove the pendulum from the clamp and attach the second pendulum provided to the  clamp. this has a long, thin bob. adjust the pendulum until the distance d measured to the  bottom  of the bob is 50.0  cm.    displace the bob slightly and release it so that it swings.    (i) measure the time t2 for 20 complete oscillations.       t2 =  ... [1]   (ii) calculate the period t2 of the pendulum.   t2 =  ... [1]  (d) a student suggests that the periods t1 and t2 should be equal.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (e) the period t of a pendulum can be determined by measuring the time t for 20 complete  oscillations and then calculating the period. some students are asked to explain the reason  for this method being more accurate than measuring the time taken for one oscillation.   tick the box next to the sentence that gives the best explanation.    the method eliminates errors from the measurements.    the method is more accurate because the experiment is repeated.    the method includes more readings so there is less chance for errors.    the method reduces the effect of errors when starting and stopping the stopwatch. [1]  (f) a student plans to carry out more pendulum experiments. he considers possible variables,  and precautions to improve accuracy.   in the following list, mark the possible variables with the letter v and the precautions with the  letter p.    amplitude of swing    length of pendulum    mass of pendulum bob    shape of pendulum bob    use of a reference point to aid counting    viewing the rule at right angles when measuring the length [2] [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  (a) measure room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  ... [1]  (b) \u2022 pour 50  cm3 of the hot water provided into beaker a.  \u2022 measure the temperature \u03b8h of the water in beaker a.   \u03b8h =  ... \u2022 add 50  cm3 of the cold water provided to the hot water in beaker a. stir the water briefly. \u2022 measure the temperature \u03b8m of the water in beaker a.   \u03b8m =  ... \u2022 calculate the temperature fall \u03b8f using the equation \u03b8f  = \u03b8h \u2212 \u03b8m.  \u03b8f =  ... \u2022 empty beaker a.  [3]  (c) suggest one reason for stirring the water before reading \u03b8m.  ...  ... [1]  (d) repeat the procedure in (b) using 75  cm3 of hot water and 75  cm3 of cold water.  \u03b8h =  ...  \u03b8m =  ...    \u03b8f =  ... [1]  (e) repeat the procedure in (b) using 100  cm3 of hot water and 100  cm3 of cold water.  \u03b8h =  ...  \u03b8m =  ...    \u03b8f =  ... [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (f) measure room temperature \u03b8r again.  \u03b8r =  ...   complete the appropriate sentence. \u2022 room temperature has remained constant at ... . \u2022 room temperature has decreased by ... . \u2022 room temperature has increased by ... . [1]  (g)  a student states that the temperature fall \u03b8f should be the same each time because the  proportions of hot and cold water are the same.    suggest a reason why \u03b8f could be very different in  (b), (d) and (e).   ...  ...  ... [1]  (h) suggest an improvement to the apparatus to make it more likely that \u03b8f would be the same  each time.    ...  ...  ... [1]  (i)  suggest a condition, not included in your answer to (h), that could be controlled to make it  more likely that \u03b8f would be the same each time.    ...  ...  ... [1] [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length f of a lens.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated objectu lensscreen benchv fig. 3.1  (a)  (i) place the screen 100  cm from the illuminated object. \u2022 place the lens between the object and the screen so that the centre of the lens is at  a distance u = 20.0  cm from the object.  \u2022 adjust the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the  screen. \u2022 measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen. record the  values of u and v in table 3.1. table 3.1 u / cm v / cm   (ii)  repeat the procedure using values for u of 22.0  cm, 25.0  cm, 30.0  cm and 35.0  cm. [3] ",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b)  plot a graph of v / cm (y-axis) against u / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0, 0). draw the best-fit curve.   [4]  (c) (i) \u2022 mark, with a cross, the point on the graph grid where u = 25.0  cm and v = 25.0  cm. \u2022 mark, with a cross, the point on the graph grid where u = 35.0  cm and v = 35.0  cm. \u2022 join these two points with a straight line.  [1]   (ii) \u2022  record u1, the value of u at the point where the straight line crosses your graph line.  u1 =  .. cm \u2022 record v1, the value of v at the point where the straight line crosses your graph line.                                                                                                    v1 =  .. cm [1]   (iii) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = (u1 + v1) 4.    f =  .. cm  [2] [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 a student has a selection of rubber bands of different thicknesses. he is investigating the amount  of stretch produced by different loads. fig. 4.1 shows the set-up used. clamp rubber band bench hookstandboss fig. 4.1  in addition to the apparatus shown in fig. 4.1, the following apparatus is available to the student:   metre rule   selection of different rubber bands   selection of loads.  plan an experiment to investigate how rubber bands of different thicknesses stretch when loaded.   you are not required to carry out this experiment.  you should \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation  \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table.) \u2022 explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]    [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (st/ar) 132966/7 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *2763230970* physics  0625/53 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2017  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question  4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 in this experiment, you will investigate how the use of a lid affects the rate of cooling of water in a  beaker.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. a bbeakers lidthermometer fig. 1.1   (a) \u2022 pour 100  cm3 of hot water into beaker a.    \u2022 place the thermometer in the water in beaker a.   \u2022  in table 1.1, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at time t = 0 s and immediately start  the stopclock.    \u2022  record, in the table, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s,  150 s and 180  s.    \u2022 remove the thermometer from the beaker.     [1]  (b) (i) remove the lid from beaker b.     repeat the procedure in (a) for beaker b, using 75  cm3 of hot water, and replace the lid  immediately after pouring in the water.   [1]     (ii) complete the headings and the time column in table 1.1.   [2] table 1.1 beaker a without a lidbeaker b with a lid t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (c) describe two precautions that you took to ensure that the temperature readings were as  accurate as possible in the experiment. 1    ... 2    ... [2]  (d) (i) write a conclusion, stating how the use of the lid affects the rate of cooling of the water.    justify your answer by reference to your results.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]     (ii) suggest one change to the apparatus or procedure to make the comparison a fairer test.    explain why the change makes the test fairer. change  ..  ... explanation    ...  ...  [2]   (iii) the temperature of the water in each beaker decreases.    describe one other similarity in the pattern of cooling in beakers a and b.  ...  ...  ... [1]    [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2  in this experiment, you will investigate a circuit containing resistors.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.   apower supply x y fig. 2.1  (a) on fig. 2.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that it measures the potential difference across  resistor x. [1]  (b) (i) switch on. record the value of the current is in the circuit.   is =  ... [1]    (ii) \u2022  use the voltmeter to measure and record the value of the potential difference vx  across resistor x.  vx =  ...    disconnect the voltmeter.    \u2022  reconnect the voltmeter to measure and record the potential difference vy across  resistor y.  vy =  ...  [1]    disconnect the voltmeter.   (iii) reconnect the voltmeter to measure and record the potential difference vs across the  combination of both resistors.  vs =  ... [1]    switch off. ",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (iv) a student suggests that vs should be equal to ( vx + vy).     state whether your readings support this suggestion. justify your statement with  reference to your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]   (c) calculate the resistance rs of the combination of resistors, using your readings from (b)(i)   and (b)(iii)  and the equation                   rs = vs is .  rs =  ... [2]  ",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) the circuit components are to be rearranged so that: \u2022 resistors x and y are in parallel \u2022 the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit \u2022 the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across both resistors.   in the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit using standard electrical symbols. [2]  (e) set up the circuit as described in (d).     switch on. measure and record the total current ip in the circuit and the potential difference  vp across the resistors.   ip =  ...       vp =  ... [1]   switch off.  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3  in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a metre rule.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. 0.0 cm mark 100  g massforcemeter metre ruleclamp 100.0  cm mark benchclamp d fig. 3.1  (a) (i) \u2022 move the 100  g mass to a distance d = 10.0  cm from the 0.0  cm end of the rule.    \u2022 adjust the height of the clamp holding the forcemeter so that the rule is horizontal.    \u2022 read, and record in table 3.1, the forcemeter reading f.    \u2022 repeat this procedure for values of d =  30.0 cm, 50.0  cm, 70.0  cm and 90.0  cm.  table 3.1 d / cm f / n 10.0 30.0 50.0 70.0 90.0[2]   (ii)  explain how you made sure that the rule was horizontal before each reading.     you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b)  plot a graph of f / n (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis).   start your axes from the origin (0,0).   draw a best-fit line. [4]  (c) (i) from your graph, determine f0, the value of f when d = 0.0  cm.  f0  ...   (ii) calculate the weight wr of the metre rule, using the equation wr = 2 \u00d7 f0.      give wr to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  wr =  ... [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) a student correctly plots your data points on another sheet of graph paper.   state and explain whether his best-fit line is likely to be the same as yours.   justify your answer with reference to the plots.   statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  ... [1]  (e) another student, carrying out the same experiment, is not sure if some of his values of f are  correct.   suggest one improvement to the procedure which would help him to obtain more reliable f  values.  ...  ...  ... [1] [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4  a student has a box of converging lenses, but does not know their focal lengths.  plan an experiment that will enable her to determine an accurate value for the focal length f of one  of the lenses, using the equation  f = uv (u + v )  where u is the distance between an object and the lens and v is the distance between the lens and  the focused image of the object.  the apparatus available includes:   a lens holder   a 12 v lamp in a holder, with a power supply   a card with a triangular hole covered with tracing paper.  write a plan for the experiment.  you should:   \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed    \u2022 draw a diagram of how the apparatus would be arranged, clearly labelling u and v   \u2022 write a method for carrying out the experiment including how f would be determined   \u2022 state the precautions which should be taken to obtain a clear, focused image   \u2022  state the precautions which should be taken to ensure that measurements are accurate  once a focused image has been obtained.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]   [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nh/ar) 133344/5 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn over *0337260198* physics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2017  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 a student is investigating resistance using the circuit shown in fig. 1.1. apower  supply ra v fig. 1.1  (a) the student  measures the potential difference v1 across the resistor ra and the current i1 in  the circuit. figs. 1.2 and 1.3 show the voltmeter and ammeter scales. 5 v67891043210    a0.60.8 1.00.40.2 0 fig. 1.2              fig. 1.3   (i) write down the readings shown on the scales in figs. 1.2 and 1.3.  v1 =  ...  i1 =  ...  [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r1 of the resistor ra using the equation irv 1 11= .  r1 =  ..  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) the student connects a resistor rb in series with ra.   she measures the potential difference v2 across the two resistors ra and rb combined and  the current i2 in the circuit.  1.8 v v2 =  ...  0.19 a i2 =  ...   calculate  the resistance r2 of resistors ra and rb combined in series, using the equation   irv 2 22= .  r2 =  ... [1]  (c) the student connects a third resistor rc in series with ra and rb.   she measures the potential difference v3 across the three resistors and the current i3 in the  circuit.  1.7 v v3 =  ...  0.13 a i3 =  ...   (i) calculate  the resistance r3 of resistors ra, rb and rc combined in series, using the    equation irv 3 33= .  r3 =  ...",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017   (ii) on fig. 1.4, draw a line for the needle on the ammeter to show the reading of 0.13  a. a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0  [1] fig. 1.4  (d) a student suggests that r3 = 3 \u00d7 r1.   state whether the results agree with this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to the  results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [1]  (e) another student suggests that the three resistors ra, rb and rc each have the same value  of resistance.   explain how you could use the circuit shown in fig. 1.1 to check this suggestion.  ...  ... [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (f) complete the circuit diagram in fig. 1.5 to show:    \u2022 the three resistors connected in parallel    \u2022 the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the resistors    \u2022 a variable resistor connected to control the current in all three resistors. apower  supply fig. 1.5  [2]  (g) the circuit in fig. 1.5 could be used to determine the combined resistance of three resistors  connected in parallel.   suggest a reason for connecting a variable resistor in the circuit.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 a student is determining the focal length f of a lens.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus used. illuminated objectscreen lensud v bench fig. 2.1  (a) the student obtains a sharply-focused image on the screen.   (i) on fig. 2.1, measure the distance v from the lens to the screen.  v =  ...   (ii) on fig. 2.1, measure the distance d from the illuminated object to the screen.   d =  ...  [2]  (b) fig. 2.1 is drawn 1/10th actual size.   (i) calculate v, the actual distance from the lens to the screen. record the value of v in the  first row of table 2.1.   (ii) calculate d, the actual distance from the illuminated object to the screen. record the  value of d in the first row of the table.   (iii) calculate uv and record the result in the table.  [2]  (c) the student repeated the procedure with the lens at a distance u = 30.0  cm from the  illuminated object. all the readings are recorded in the table. table 2.1 u / cm v / cm uv / cm2d / cm 20.0 30.0 29.5 885 59.5   state one difference that you would expect to observe between the image formed on the  screen when u = 20.0  cm and when u = 30.0  cm.  ...  ... [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) (i) use the results in the first row of the table to calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the    lens. use the equation fduv 1= .  f1 =  ...   (ii) use the results in the second row of the table to calculate a value f2 for the focal length of     the lens. use the equation fduv 2= .  f2 =  ...   (iii) calculate the average  value  fa for the focal length of the lens. give your answer to a  suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  fa =  ...  [3]  (e) suggest two reasons why it may be difficult to obtain reliable results in this experiment. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (f) a student states that a more reliable value for the focal length is obtained if more values of u,  v and d are collected, enabling a graph to be drawn of uv against d.   (i) suggest a suitable number of values for u.  ...   (ii) suggest a suitable range of values for u.  ...  [2]  [total: 12]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 a student is investigating whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a  pendulum. the period is the time taken for one complete oscillation of the pendulum. fig.  3.1  shows a pendulum.  fig. 3.2 shows one complete oscillation. bobclamp threadstand      one complete oscillation fig. 3.1           fig. 3.2  the student has the following apparatus: pendulum bobs made of polystyrene with diameters 1  cm, 2  cm, 3  cm, 4  cm and 5  cm a supply of thread and a pair of scissors clamp and stand.  plan an experiment to investigate whether the diameter of a pendulum bob affects the period of a  pendulum.  you should:   \u2022 list additional apparatus that you would require   \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation   \u2022 state the key variables that you would control   \u2022  draw a table with column headings, to show how you would display your readings (you  are not required to enter any readings in the table.)   \u2022 explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 a student is determining the weight of a load using a balancing method.  fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used. metre rule pivotbenchp qa b fig. 4.1  the student places the metre rule on the pivot and adjusts its position so that the metre rule is as  near as possible to being balanced.  he places a load p on the metre rule so that its centre is exactly at the 30.0  cm mark.  he records the distance a between p and the pivot.  19.8 cm a =  ...  he places a load q of weight q = 1.0  n on the metre rule and adjusts the position of q so that the  metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.  he measures the distance b between the centre of load q and the pivot.  he repeats the procedure, with the load p remaining at the 30.0  cm mark, using q values of 2.0  n,  3.0 n, 4.0  n and 5.0  n. all the readings are recorded in table 4.1. table 4.1 q / n b / cm q11 n 1.0 40.0 2.0 19.5 3.0 13.5 4.0 10.5 5.0 7.5  (a) for each value of q, calculate q1 and record the result in the table.  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against q11 n (x-axis).  [4]  (c) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ... [2]   (ii) calculate the weight p of load p using the equation p = ag, where a = 19.8  cm.  p =  ... [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) the student measures the weight p of load p using a forcemeter. fig. 4.2 shows the  forcemeter. n0.0 1.0 2.0 load p fig. 4.2   write down the reading p shown on the forcemeter.  p =  ... n [1]  (e) the student has carried out the experiment with care and is expecting the two values of p in  (c) and (d) to be the same.   suggest two reasons why the values of p may be different. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "*2329403777* this document consists of 12 printed page s. dc (st/fc) 134120/4 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn overphysics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2017  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 a student is comparing the oscillations of two pendulums. fig. 1.1 shows the first pendulum.   clamp d bob fig. 1.1   (a) (i)  on fig. 1.1, measure the distance d, from the bottom of the clamp to the bottom of the  bob.  d =  . cm [1]   (ii)  fig. 1.1 is drawn 1/10th actual size. calculate the actual distance d from the bottom of  the clamp to the bottom of the bob.  d =  . cm [1]   (iii)  explain briefly how to use a set-square to avoid a parallax (line-of-sight) error when  measuring the length of this pendulum. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ... [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) the student displaces the bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. she measures the  time t for 20 complete oscillations. the time t is shown on the stopwatch in fig. 1.2.  fig. 1.2   (i) write down the time t shown in fig. 1.2.  t =  ... [1]   (ii) calculate the period t1 of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t1 =  ... [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (c) the student repeats the procedure using another pendulum as shown in fig. 1.3. this has  a long, thin pendulum bob. the distance d from the bottom of the clamp to the bottom of the  pendulum bob is the same as for the first pendulum.  bobclamp d fig. 1.3   she determines the period t2 of this pendulum.   1.37 s t2 =  ...   in this experiment, both pendulum bobs have the same mass. a student suggests that since  both pendulums have the same overall length d and mass, the periods t1 and t2 should be  equal. state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  the results. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2] ",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (d) the period t of a pendulum can be determined by measuring the time t for 20 complete  oscillations and then calculating the period. some students are asked to explain the reason  for this method being more accurate than measuring the time taken for a single oscillation.   tick the box next to the sentence that gives the best explanation.    the method eliminates errors from the measurements.    the method is more accurate because the experiment is repeated.    the method includes more readings so there is less chance for errors.    the method reduces the effect of errors when starting and stopping the stopwatch. [1]  (e) a student plans to carry out more pendulum experiments. he considers possible variables  and precautions to improve accuracy.    in the following list, mark the possible variables with the letter v and the precautions with the  letter p.    amplitude of swing    length of pendulum    mass of pendulum bob    shape of pendulum bob    use of a reference point to aid counting    viewing the rule at right-angles when measuring the length [2] [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 2 a student is investigating the cooling of water.  (a) the thermometer in fig. 2.1 shows room temperature \u03b8r at the beginning of the experiment.  record \u03b8r. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 110\u00b0c fig. 2.1  \u03b8r =  .  \u00bac [1]  (b) the student pours 50  cm3 of hot water into a beaker.    he measures the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water.   86 \u00b0c  \u03b8h =  ...     he adds 50  cm3 of cold water to the beaker. he stirs the water briefly.   he measures the new temperature \u03b8m of the water in the beaker.   52 \u00b0c  \u03b8m =  ...     calculate the temperature fall \u03b8f using the equation \u03b8f = (\u03b8h \u2212 \u03b8m).     \u03b8f =  ... [1]  (c) he repeats the procedure in (b) using 100  cm3 of hot water and 100  cm3 of cold water.  84 \u00b0c  \u03b8h =  ...    54 \u00b0c  \u03b8m =  ...     calculate the temperature fall \u03b8f using the equation \u03b8f = (\u03b8h \u2212 \u03b8m).  \u03b8f =  ... [1]   (d) suggest one reason for stirring the water before reading \u03b8m.  ...  ... [1]  (e)  a student states that the temperature fall \u03b8f should be the same each time because the  proportions of hot and cold water are the same.    suggest one reason why \u03b8f could be significantly different in  (b) and (c).   ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (f) suggest an improvement to the apparatus to make it more likely that \u03b8f would be the same  each time.   ...  ...  ... [1]  (g)  suggest a condition, not included in your answer to (f), that you would control to make it more  likely that \u03b8f would be the same each time.   ...  ...  ... [1]  (h)  the student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of water he uses. draw a  measuring cylinder about half-full of water. show clearly on your diagram the line-of-sight  required for obtaining a correct reading for the volume of water. [3]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 3 a student is determining the focal length f of a lens.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus used. illuminated objectu lensscreen v fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 the student places the screen about 100  cm from the illuminated object. \u2022 she places the lens between the object and the screen so that the centre of the lens is at  a distance u = 20.0  cm from the object.  \u2022 she adjusts the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the  screen. \u2022 she measures the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.  \u2022 she repeats the procedure using values for u of 22.0  cm, 25.0  cm, 30.0  cm and 35.0  cm. \u2022 the readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 u / cm v / cm 20.0 60.0 22.0 47.1 25.0 37.5 30.0 29.8 35.0 26.3  ",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   plot a graph of v / cm (y-axis) against u / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0, 0). draw the best-fit curve. [4]  (b) (i) \u2022 mark, with a cross, the point on the graph grid where u = 25.0  cm and v = 25.0  cm. \u2022 mark with a cross, the point on the graph grid where  u = 35.0  cm and v = 35.0  cm. \u2022 join these two points with a straight line.  [1]   (ii) \u2022 record u1, the value of u at the point where the straight line crosses your graph line.   u1 =  .. cm \u2022 record v1, the value of v at the point where the straight line crosses your graph line.   v1 =  .. cm [1]   (iii) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = (u1 + v1) 4.    f =  .. cm  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (c) suggest two differences that you would expect to see between the appearance of the  illuminated object and the image on the screen. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2]  (d)  suggest two precautions that you would take in order to obtain reliable readings in this  experiment. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2] [total: 12]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 4 a student has a selection of rubber bands of different widths. he is investigating the extension  produced by adding loads. fig. 4.1 shows the set-up used. clamp rubber band bench hookstandboss fig. 4.1  in addition to the apparatus shown in fig. 4.1, the following apparatus is available to the student:   a metre rule   a selection of different rubber bands   a selection of loads.  plan an experiment to investigate how strips of rubber of different widths stretch when loaded.   you should  \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation  \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table.) \u2022 explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w17_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/cgw) 132967/3 \u00a9 ucles 2017  [turn over *4841109280* physics  0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2017  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 1 some students are investigating how the use of a lid affects the rate of cooling of water in a  beaker.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. a bbeakers lidthermometer fig. 1.1   \u2022 a student pours 100  cm3 of hot water into beaker a.   \u2022 he records the temperature of the water in beaker a and immediately starts a stopclock.    \u2022  the student records the temperature \u03b8 of the water every 30  s. his readings are shown  in table 1.1.   \u2022 the student repeats the procedure for beaker b using 75  cm3 of hot water.  (a) complete the headings and the time column in table 1.1.  [2] table 1.1 beaker a without a lidbeaker b with a lid t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 80.0 81.0 77.0 79.0 74.5 77.5 72.5 76.0 70.5 75.0 69.0 74.0 68.0 73.5",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) describe two precautions which should be taken to ensure that the temperature readings are  as accurate as possible in the experiment. 1    ... 2    ...  [2]  (c) (i) write a conclusion, stating how the use of the lid affects the rate of cooling of the water.    justify your answer by reference to the results.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) suggest one change to the apparatus or procedure to make the comparison a fairer test.    explain why the change makes the test fairer. change  ..  ... explanation    ...  ...  [2]   (iii) the temperature of the water in each beaker decreases.    describe one other similarity in the pattern of cooling in beakers  a and b.  ...  ... [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 1.2   (i) record the room temperature \u03b8r, shown on the thermometer in fig. 1.2.  \u03b8r =  ..  [1]     (ii) another student is carrying out the same experiment in a room with a room temperature  that is much higher than \u03b8r.    suggest whether this might affect the cooling of the water in beaker a in her experiment.  briefly explain your answer.  suggestion  . explanation    ...    ...  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 2 a student is investigating a circuit containing resistors.  she is using the circuit shown in fig. 2.1. a xpower supply y fig. 2.1  (a) on fig. 2.1, show a voltmeter connected so that it measures the potential difference across  resistor x. [1]  (b) the student uses the ammeter to measure the current is in the circuit. a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 2.2   record the current is, as shown on the ammeter in fig. 2.2.  is =  ... [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (c) (i) the student uses the voltmeter to measure the potential difference  vx across resistor x  and then reconnects it to measure the potential difference vy across resistor  y. v3 4 52 1 0   v3 4 52 1 0 fig. 2.3                   fig. 2.4    \u2022 record the value of the potential difference  vx across resistor x, shown in fig. 2.3.  vx =  ...    \u2022 record the value of the potential difference  vy across resistor y, shown in fig. 2.4.  vy =  ...   [1]   (ii) she then measures  the potential difference  vs across the combination of both resistors. v3 4 52 1 0 fig. 2.5    record the value of the potential difference  vs across the combination of both resistors,  shown in fig. 2.5.  vs =  ... [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over   (iii) a student suggests that vs should be equal to ( vx + vy).    state whether the readings support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference  to the results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]  (d) calculate the resistance rs of the combination of resistors, using the readings from (b)  and (c)(ii)  and the equation                   rs = vs is.  rs =  ... [2]  (e) (i) the circuit components are to be rearranged so that:    \u2022 resistors x and y are in parallel    \u2022 the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit    \u2022 the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across both resistors.    in the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit using standard electrical symbols.  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017   (ii) the student sets up the circuit as described in (e)(i) .    she measures and records the total current ip in the circuit and the potential difference  vp across the resistors.  ip =  0.81  a  vp =    3.6  v    the resistance of two resistors connected in parallel is less than the resistance of the  same two resistors connected in series.    state whether the readings indicate that she has set up the circuit correctly.    explain your answer. suggestion  . explanation    ...  ...  [1]  [total: 11]\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over 3 some students are determining the weight of a metre rule.  they use the apparatus shown in fig. 3.1. 0.0 cm mark 200  g massforcemeter metre ruleclamp 100.0  cm mark benchclamp d fig. 3.1  (a) (i) the students suspend a 200  g mass at a distance d from the end of the rule.    they then adjust the height of the clamp holding the forcemeter so that the rule is  horizontal.    fig. 3.2 shows the forcemeter when the value of d is 10.0  cm. n 0.50.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 metre rule fig. 3.2",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017    in table 3.1, record the forcemeter reading f, as shown in fig. 3.2.  [1] table 3.1 d / cm f / n 10.0 30.0 1.05 50.0 1.65 70.0 1.95 90.0 2.25   (ii) the students repeat the procedure for values of d = 30.0  cm, 50.0  cm, 70.0  cm and  90.0 cm. their readings are shown in table 3.1.    explain how the students could make sure that the rule is horizontal before each reading.    you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of f / n (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis).   start your axes from the origin (0, 0).   draw a best-fit line.  [4]  (c) (i) from your graph, determine  f0, the value of f when d = 0.0  cm.  f0 =  ... [1]   (ii) calculate the weight wr of the metre rule, using the equation wr = 2 \u00d7 f0.    give wr to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  wr =  ... [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  (d) a student correctly plots your data points on another sheet of graph paper.   state and explain whether his best-fit line is likely to be the same as yours.   justify your answer with reference to the plots. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  ...  [1]  (e) another student, carrying out the same experiment, is not sure if some of his values of f are  correct.   suggest one improvement to the procedure which would help him to obtain more reliable  f values.  ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11]",
            "13": "13 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 [turn over blank page",
            "14": "14 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 4 a student has a box of converging lenses but does not know their focal lengths.  plan an experiment which will enable her to determine an accurate value for the focal length f of  one of the lenses, using the equation f = uv (u + v )  where u is the distance between an object and the lens and v is the distance between the lens and  the focused image of the object.  the apparatus available includes:   a lens holder   a 12 v lamp in a holder, with a power supply   a card with a triangular hole covered with tracing paper.  write a plan for the experiment.  you should:   \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed    \u2022 draw a diagram of how the apparatus will be arranged, clearly labelling u and v   \u2022 write a method for carrying out the experiment including how  f will be determined   \u2022 state the precautions which should be taken to obtain a clear, focused image   \u2022  state the precautions which should be taken to ensure that measurements are accurate  once a focused image has been obtained.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "15": "15 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/63/o/n/17 \u00a9 ucles 2017 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        }
    },
    "2018": {
        "0625_m18_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib18 03_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *8208222047 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  february/march 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  1 a student is asked to find the volume of a small irregularly-shaped piece of rock.    he has the following apparatus available.    100 90 8070605040302010 10 0 2 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 measuring cylinder containing waterrule balance     which apparatus must the student use to find the volume of the small piece of rock?  a balance and rule  b rule only  c balance and measuring cylinder  d measuring cylinder only      2 the speed-time graph represents the motion of a car travelling along a straight level road.    0 0speed time    which statement describes the motion of the car?  a it accelerates and reaches a constant speed.  b it accelerates and then stops moving.  c it decelerates and then reaches a constant speed.  d it decelerates and then stops moving.     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 [turn over  3 an athlete runs 300 metres up a hill at a steady speed of 3.0  m / s.    she then immediately runs the same distance down the hill at a steady speed of 6.0  m / s.    what is her average speed for the 600 metre run?  a 2.0  m / s b 3.0  m / s c 4.0  m / s d 4.5  m / s      4 which statement is correct?  a mass is a gravitational force but weight is not a gravitational force.  b mass is not a gravitational force and weight is not a gravitational force.  c the unit of mass is the kilogram and the unit of weight is the newton.  d the unit of mass is the newton and the unit of weight is the kilogram.     5 the diagram shows a bird in flight. the bird is flying in a horizontal direction to the right.    in which direction does air resistance act on the bird?    a d cb     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  6 a measuring cylinder contains 30  cm3 of a liquid.    1020304050cm3 balance     some more of the liquid is added until the liquid level reaches the 50  cm3 mark.    the reading on the balance increases by 30  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.60  g / cm3 b 0.67  g / cm3 c 1.5  g / cm3 d 1.7  g / cm3     7 a car is travelling along a straight horizontal road. the speed-time graph is shown.    in which labelled part of the journey is the resultant force on the car zero?    0 0speed timeabc d     8 the diagram shows a uniform metre rule balanced at its mid-point.    0 20 50 70 100 w 6.0 n    what is the weight w placed at the 20  cm mark?  a 0.25  n b 4.0  n c 9.0  n d 21  n   ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 [turn over  9 a wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two rocks on opposite sides of a narrow stream.    three forces p, q and r act on the plank.    qp r plank     how are the sizes of the forces related?  a p + q = r  b p + r = q  c p = q = r  d p = q + r     10 a ball is at rest at the top of a hill. it rolls down the hill. at the bottom of the hill the ball hits a wall  and stops.    which energy changes occur?  a gravitational potential energy \u2192 internal energy \u2192 kinetic energy  b gravitational potential energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 internal energy  c kinetic energy \u2192 gravitational potential energy \u2192 internal energy  d kinetic energy \u2192 internal energy \u2192 gravitational potential energy    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  11 a man pulls a truck a distance of 20  m, as shown in the three diagrams.    10 m1 2 10 m10 m10 m 10 m10 m 3     which statement concerning the work done against gravity is correct?  a most work is done in 1.  b no work is done in 3.  c the work done in all three is equal.  d the work done in 1 and 2 is equal.     12 which source of energy is used in a nuclear power station to generate electrical energy?  a different types of atom regrouping  b heavy nuclei splitting  c radioactive isotopes decaying  d radioactive atoms emitting \u03b2-particles     13 two beakers are filled to the same depth, one with water and one with oil.    the density of water is 1000  kg  / m3 and the density of oil is 920  kg  / m3.    in which position is the pressure the greatest?    a ba bcd wateroil    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 [turn over  14 a water manometer is connected to a gas supply.    watergas supply pq     there is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.    what happens to the water level at p and what happens to the water level at q?     water level at p water level at q  a falls falls  b falls rises  c rises falls  d rises rises     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  15 a cylinder with a tap contains a fixed mass of gas x. the gas is contained by a piston which can  move freely towards or away from the tap.    tap closedgas x piston cylinderatmosphere     when the tap is opened, the piston moves slightly to the right, towards the tap.    tap opengas xatmosphere     what can be deduced about the pressure of gas x?     before opening tap after opening tap  a less than atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure  b same as atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure  c more than atmospheric pressure less than atmospheric pressure  d more than atmospheric pressure same as atmospheric pressure      16 which quantity does not change when there is an increase in temperature?  a the density of a steel block  b the diameter of the hole in a metal nut  c the length of an iron rod  d the mass of a metal coin     17 a thermometer has a low thermal capacity.    why is this an advantage?  a the thermometer does not absorb much thermal energy to raise its own temperature.  b the thermometer does not conduct much thermal energy to the surroundings.  c the thermometer does not melt when it gets hot.  d the thermometer does not radiate much thermal energy to the surroundings.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 [turn over  18 in an experiment, a thermometer is placed in a test-tube of hot liquid. the temperature reading of  the liquid is recorded every half minute. the table shows the results.    time  / minutes 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 temperature  / \u00b0c 73 65 59 55 55 55 51 48 45 42 40 38 36 35 34 33    what is the melting point of the substance?  a 0 \u00b0c b 33  \u00b0c c 55  \u00b0c d 73  \u00b0c     19 a teacher demonstrates an experiment to a class. a boiling tube is filled with water and some ice  cubes are trapped at the bottom of the tube. the teacher then heats the boiling tube in the  position shown until the water at the top boils.    icewater metal meshheat     the ice does not melt.    what does this demonstrate?  a water is a good conductor of thermal energy.  b water is a good convector of thermal energy.  c water is a poor conductor of thermal energy.  d water is a poor convector of thermal energy.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  20 a hot metal plate is placed near to a cold metal plate. infra-red radiation transfers thermal energy  between the two plates.    cold platehot plate     which choice of colour causes the temperature of the cold plate to increase most slowly?     hot plate cold plate  a matt black matt black  b matt black shiny white  c shiny white matt black  d shiny white shiny white      21 which row shows an example of a transverse wa ve and an example of a longitudinal wave?     transverse longitudinal  a light radio  b radio sound  c sound water  d water light      22 an object is placed before a plane mirror as shown.    a student views the image of the object in the mirror from point p.    where does she see the image?    object pbca d mirror   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 [turn over  23 light passes through a prism as shown. the light changes direction and produces a spectrum of  colours.    white light spectrum of colours    which term is used to describe the production of the spectrum of colours?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c refraction  d total internal reflection      24 which type of waves are produced by a television remote controller?  a infra-red waves  b radio waves  c ultraviolet waves  d visible light      25 both the amplitude and the frequency of a sound wave decrease.    what happens to the sound heard?  a the sound is louder and has a higher pitch.  b the sound is louder and has a lower pitch.  c the sound is quieter and has a higher pitch.  d the sound is quieter and has a lower pitch.    26 an electromagnet is used to remove a splinter from an eye.    what material is the splinter made from?  a aluminium  b glass  c iron  d wood    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  27 which diagram shows the magnetic field around a bar magnet?    a b cdns ns ns ns       28 a metal conductor is connected to a battery.     which statement describes the current in the metal conductor?  a it is a flow of electrons from the negative to the positive terminal.  b it is a flow of electrons from the positive to the negative terminal.  c it is a flow of protons from the negative to the positive terminal.  d it is a flow of protons from the positive to the negative terminal.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 [turn over  29 a student sets up the circuit shown to measure three quantities.    1 the current in the circuit  2 the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell  3 the potential difference across the lamp        how many ammeters and how many voltmeters are needed?     ammeters voltmeters  a 0 3  b 1 2  c 2 1  d 3 0      30 the current in a car headlamp is 3.0  a when connected to a 12  v battery.    what is the resistance of the lamp when it is lit?  a 0.25  \u03c9 b 4.0  \u03c9 c 15  \u03c9 d 36  \u03c9    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  31 the diagram shows a circuit containing a cell, an ammeter, a lamp and a variable resistor.    a     the resistance of the variable resistor is increased.    what happens to the ammeter reading and what happens to the brightness of the lamp?     ammeter reading lamp brightness  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      32 diagram 1 shows two identical lamps connected in series with a cell. diagram 2 shows the same  two lamps connected in parallel with an identical cell.    diagram 1 diagram 2    which statement is correct?  a the cell in diagram 1 can supply current to the lamps for longer than the cell in diagram 2.  b the current in the cell in diagram 1 is greater than the current in the cell in diagram 2.  c the lamps in diagram 1 are brighter than the lamps in diagram 2.  d the voltage across each lamp in diagram 1 is greater than the voltage in diagram 2.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 [turn over  33 a circuit contains four ammeters and three resistors with different values.  which ammeter shows the largest reading?    aaa a20 \u03c910 \u03c9 30 \u03c9a b cd      34 the diagram shows the arrangement of the coil, armature and contacts of a relay.    which diagram shows this arrangement when there is no current in the coil?    pivota contacts coilb c darmature      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  35 the diagram represents a magnetic field.        what causes this field?  a a bar magnet  b a solenoid carrying a current  c a straight wire carrying a current  d two north poles close together     36 the diagram shows a simple d.c. electric motor which is rotating.    sn magnet magnetcoil     which change makes the motor rotate more quickly?  a increasing the number of turns on the coil  b removing the magnets  c reversing the battery  d reversing the polarity of the magnets     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 [turn over  37 the notation for an isotope of sodium is na23 11 .    which row gives the composition of a neutral atom of this isotope of sodium?     number of  protons number of  neutrons number of  electrons  a 11 12 11  b 11 12 12  c 11 23 11  d 12 11 12      38 which diagram represents a nucleus of h3 1?    nn pa nppb nnn ppp pp nncd key = a neutron = a proton      39 when measuring the emissions from a radioactive rock brought into the laboratory, a teacher  mentions that background radiation must be taken into account.    what is this background radiation?  a infra-red radiation from warm objects in the laboratory  b infra-red radiation from the sun  c ionising radiation from the radioactive rock brought into the laboratory  d ionising radiation in the laboratory when the radioactive rock is not present    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18  40 the graph shows the percentage of a radioactive isotope that remains as time passes.    100 755025 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 time  / minutespercentage of isotoperemaining  / %     a student measures the initial rate of emission of this isotope as 40  000 emissions per second.    how long does it take for the rate of emission to fall to 5000 emissions per second?  a 5 minutes b 15 minutes c 20 minutes d 40 minutes    ",
            "19": "19    blank page   \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18 ",
            "20": "20    blank page     permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/f/m/18   "
        },
        "0625_m18_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib18 03_0625_22/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *8385724903 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  february/march 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18  1 which instrument is used to measure accurately the diameter of a thin metal wire?  a 30  cm ruler  b measuring tape  c metre rule  d micrometer screw gauge      2 a parachutist is falling through  the air at terminal velocity.    which statement about the parachutist is correct?  a every force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his acceleration is equal to zero.  b every force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his velocity is equal to zero.  c the resultant force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his acceleration is equal to  zero.  d the resultant force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his velocity is equal to zero.     3 the curved line on the graph shows the motion of a car.    12.0 10.0 8.06.04.02.0 0 0 2.01.0 3.0 4.0 5.0speed m  / s time  / s    what is the acceleration of the car at the time of 4.0  s?  a 0.33  m / s2 b 0.44  m / s2 c 2.3  m / s2 d 3.0  m / s2     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18 [turn over  4 the diagram shows a bird in flight. the bird is flying in a horizontal direction to the right.    in which direction does air resistance act on the bird?    a d cb      5 the gravitational field strength on the moon is 1.6  n / kg.    an astronaut has a mass of 75  kg.    what is the weight of the astronaut on the moon?  a 47  n b 75  n c 120  n d 750  n    6 a measuring cylinder contains 30  cm3 of a liquid.    1020304050cm3 balance     some more of the liquid is added until the liquid level reaches the 50  cm3 mark.    the reading on the balance increases by 30  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.60  g / cm3 b 0.67  g / cm3 c 1.5  g / cm3 d 1.7  g / cm3 ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18  7 a stone of mass 0.12  kg is fired from a catapult. the velocity of the stone changes from 0 to  5.0  m / s in 0.60  s.    what is the average resultant force acting on the stone while it is being fired?  a 1.0  n b 2.5  n c 3.6  n d 8.3  n      8 a uniform rod xy of weight 2.0  n has a length of 80  cm.    the rod is suspended by a thread 20  cm from end x. a weight of 5.0  n is suspended from end x.    20 cm 80 cm 5.0 nthread uniform rod x y     a student hangs a 6.0  n weight on the rod so that it is in equilibrium.    what is the distance of the 6.0  n weight from end x?  a 6 cm b 10  cm c 26  cm d 30  cm      9 a wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two rocks on opposite sides of a narrow stream.    three forces p, q and r act on the plank.    qp r plank     how are the sizes of the forces related?  a p + q = r  b p + r = q  c p = q = r  d p = q + r     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18 [turn over  10 a ball of mass 0.16  kg is moving forwards at a speed of 0.50  m / s. a second ball of mass 0.10  kg  is stationary. the first ball strikes the second ball. the second ball moves forwards at a speed of 0.50  m / s.    what is the speed of the first ball after the collision?  a 0.0  m / s b 0.19  m / s c 0.31  m / s d 0.50  m / s     11 a ball is at rest at the top of a hill. it rolls down the hill. at the bottom of the hill the ball hits a wall  and stops.    which energy changes occur?  a gravitational potential energy \u2192 internal energy \u2192 kinetic energy  b gravitational potential energy \u2192 kinetic energy \u2192 internal energy  c kinetic energy \u2192 gravitational potential energy \u2192 internal energy  d kinetic energy \u2192 internal energy \u2192 gravitational potential energy    12 a student cycles along a level road at a speed of 5.0  m / s.    the total mass of the student and bicycle is 120  kg.    the student applies the brakes and stops. the braking distance is 10  m.    what is the average braking force?  a 150  n b 300  n c 15  000  n d 30  000  n     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18  13 a water manometer is connected to a gas supply.    watergas supply pq     there is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.    what happens to the water level at p and what happens to the water level at q?     water level at p water level at q  a falls falls  b falls rises  c rises falls  d rises rises      14 a submarine is 20  m below the surface of the sea. the pressure due to the water at this depth  is p.    on another day, the submarine is 26  m below the surface of fresh water.    the density of sea water is 1.3 times the density of fresh water.    what is the pressure due to the fresh water at a depth of 26  m?  a 3.1p b p c 1.3  p d 1.7  p     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18 [turn over  15 a cylinder with a tap contains a fixed mass of gas x. the gas is contained by a piston which can  move freely towards or away from the tap.    tap closedgas x piston cylinderatmosphere     when the tap is opened, the piston moves slightly to the right, towards the tap.    tap opengas xatmosphere     what can be deduced about the pressure of gas x?     before opening tap after opening tap  a less than atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure  b same as atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure  c more than atmospheric pressure less than atmospheric pressure  d more than atmospheric pressure same as atmospheric pressure      16 liquid evaporates from a beaker.    what happens to the temperature of the remaining liquid and how does this temperature change  affect the rate of evaporation?     temperature rate of  evaporation  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18  17 which quantity does not change when there is an increase in temperature?  a the density of a steel block  b the diameter of the hole in a metal nut  c the length of an iron rod  d the mass of a metal coin      18 a thermocouple is used to measure temperature.    which is an advantage of using a thermocouple instead of a liquid-in-glass thermometer?  a it can measure temperature in the range \u201310  \u00b0c to 110  \u00b0c.  b it can measure temperature that changes rapidly.  c it has a linear scale.  d it is more sensitive.    19 a block of copper has a mass of 2.0  kg.    the block of copper absorbs 12  000  j thermal energy.    the specific heat capacity of copper is 385  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    what is the temperature rise of the copper?  a 15.6  \u00b0c b 31.2  \u00b0c c 46.8  \u00b0c d 62.4  \u00b0c    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18 [turn over  20 a teacher demonstrates an experiment to a class. a boiling tube is filled with water and some ice  cubes are trapped at the bottom of the tube. the teacher then heats the boiling tube in the position shown until the water at the top boils.    icewater metal meshheat     the ice does not melt.    what does this demonstrate?  a water is a good conductor of thermal energy.  b water is a good convector of thermal energy.  c water is a poor conductor of thermal energy.  d water is a poor convector of thermal energy.    21 a metal cup has a plastic lining. the cup is filled with hot water and held by a hand.     which statement about the transfer of thermal energy from the water to the hand is correct?  a in the plastic, no energy is transferred directly between adjacent molecules.  b in the plastic, fast moving molecules interact with free electrons, making the electrons move  very quickly.  c in the metal, energy is transferred only by electrons.  d in the metal, energy is transferred by electrons and by vibrations of the lattice.     22 which row shows an example of a transverse wave and an example of a longitudinal wave?     transverse longitudinal  a light radio  b radio sound  c sound water  d water light     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18  23 a wave passes through a gap and diffraction causes the wave to spread out.    which wave spreads out the most?  a large wavelength through a gap slightly larger than the wavelength  b large wavelength through a gap much smaller than the wavelength  c small wavelength through a gap much larger than the wavelength  d small wavelength through a gap much smaller than the wavelength    24 an object is placed before a plane mirror as shown.    a student views the image of the object in the mirror from point p.    where does she see the image?    object pbca d mirror      25 light has a speed of 1.24 \u00d7 108  m / s in diamond.    what is the refractive index of diamond?  a 0.41 b 1.54 c 2.42 d 3.72     26 which statement describes monochromatic light?  a light that does not diffract  b light that has a single frequency  c light that spreads out when shone through a glass prism  d light that travels at the same speed in all materials    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18 [turn over  27 both the amplitude and the frequency of a sound wave decrease.    what happens to the sound heard?  a the sound is louder and has a higher pitch.  b the sound is louder and has a lower pitch.  c the sound is quieter and has a higher pitch.  d the sound is quieter and has a lower pitch.    28 a sound wave is travelling through water.    what is a possible speed for the wave?  a 150  m / s b 300  m / s c 1500  m / s d 5000  m / s     29 an electromagnet is used to remove a splinter from an eye.    what material is the splinter made from?  a aluminium  b glass  c iron  d wood    30 a metal conductor is connected to a battery.    which statement describes the current in the metal conductor?  a it is a flow of electrons from the negative to the positive terminal.  b it is a flow of electrons from the positive to the negative terminal.  c it is a flow of protons from the negative to the positive terminal.  d it is a flow of protons from the positive to the negative terminal.     31 in an electric circuit, 40  c of electric charge pass a point in 5.0  s.    what is the current in the circuit?  a 0.13  a b 8.0  a c 45  a d 200  a    32 there is a current of 5.0  a in a resistor.    the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor is 24  v.    how much energy is transferred in the resistor in 1.0 minute?  a 5.0  j b 120  j c 290  j d 7200  j ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18  33 the diagram shows a circuit.    slamp 1 lamp 2     switch s is closed.    which lamps light?  a lamp 1 only  b lamp 2 only  c lamp 1 and lamp 2  d neither lamp 1 nor lamp 2      34 a circuit contains four ammeters and three resistors with different values.  which ammeter shows the largest reading?    aaa a20 \u03c910 \u03c9 30 \u03c9a b cd      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18 [turn over  35 the diagrams show pairs of circuits containing logic gates.    in which diagram does the lower circuit of the pair not behave in the same way as the upper  circuit?    a b c d      36 the current in a coil produces a magnetic field around it, as shown.    \u2013 +     the magnitude of the potential difference across the coil is increased and its direction is reversed.    what happens to the magnetic field?  a the lines become closer together and the right-hand end becomes a south pole.  b the lines become closer together and the right-hand end remains a north pole.  c the lines become further apart and the right-hand end becomes a south pole.  d the lines become further apart and the right-hand end remains a north pole.    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18  37 the notation for an isotope of sodium is na23 11 .    which row gives the composition of a neutral atom of this isotope of sodium?     number of  protons number of  neutrons number of  electrons  a 11 12 11  b 11 12 12  c 11 23 11  d 12 11 12      38 the radioactive isotope of hydrogen undergoes beta decay to the isotope he3 2.    what is the nuclide notation for the hydrogen isotope?  a h1 1 b h2 1 c h3 1 d h4 2     39 when measuring the emissions from a radioactive rock brought into the laboratory, a teacher  mentions that background radiation must be taken into account.    what is this background radiation?  a infra-red radiation from warm objects in the laboratory  b infra-red radiation from the sun  c ionising radiation from the radioactive rock brought into the laboratory  d ionising radiation in the laboratory when the radioactive rock is not present     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18 40 solid caesium-137 decays by the emission of a \u03b2-particle to form solid barium-137, which emits a  \u03b3-ray.    the barium-137 undergoes no further decay. the half-life of caesium-137 is 33 years.    a block of pure caesium-137 has a mass of 2.0  \u00b5g.    the diagram shows a radiation detector a distance of 5  cm from the block. the detector registers  a count rate of 2000 counts  / second.    5 cmcounte rdetector block     which statement is not correct?  a after 33 years, the mass of the block is 1.0  \u00b5g.  b after 66 years, the sample contains 1.5  \u00b5g of barium.  c with 5  cm of lead between the block and the detector, the count rate is just above  background level.  d with 2  mm of aluminium between the block and the detector, the count rate is reduced  significantly.     ",
            "16": "16    blank page     permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/f/m/18   "
        },
        "0625_m18_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "*7183265192* this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (nf/sw) 149763/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overphysics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  february/march 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a student has a pile of a4 paper for his computer printer.  fig. 1.1 shows the dimensions of the pile of paper. 30.0  cm20.0  cm 5.0 cm fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  (a) the pile contains 500 sheets of paper.   calculate the average thickness of one sheet of paper.  average thickness =    cm  [1]  (b) show that the pile of paper has a volume of 3000  cm3. use the information shown in fig.  1.1. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) the student measures the total mass of the paper in the pile.   state the name of a device used to measure mass.  ..  [1]  (d) the mass of the paper in the pile is 2400  g.   calculate the density of the paper.  density =  ..  g / cm3  [3] [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 some cyclists are racing around a track.  (a) fig. 2.1 shows the speed-time graph for one cyclist. 005.010.015.020.025.0 10 20 30 40 50 time  / sspeed m / s 60 70ab c d fig. 2.1   (i) tick the box that represents the cyclist travelling at constant speed.      a      b      c      d [1]   (ii) calculate the distance travelled by the cyclist in the first 5 seconds.  distance =  .  m  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) the length of the track is  250 m.   another cyclist goes around the track four times (four laps). this takes 80.0 seconds.   (i) calculate the average speed of this cyclist.  average speed =  .  m / s  [4]   (ii) a friend of the cyclist starts a stopwatch at the beginning of the race.    fig. 2.2 shows the reading on the stopwatch when the cyclist has gone around the track  once .    fig. 2.3 shows the reading on the stopwatch when the cyclist has gone around the track  twice . min s s1 100 min s s1 100  fig. 2.2 fig. 2.3    calculate the time taken for the cyclist to go around the track during the second lap.  time =  ...  s  [1] [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 fig. 3.1 shows the load-extension graphs for two springs, a and b. 00102025 515 10 20 30 40 extension  / mmload  / n spring a spring b fig. 3.1  (a) determine the extension of spring a for a load of 10  n.  extension =  ..  mm  [1]  (b) state which spring is easier to stretch and give a reason for your answer. spring   reason  ...  ... [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) a different spring is suspended from the edge of a bench, as shown in fig.  3.2. 19.7 cmbench 43.9 cmpinspring metre rule 100  cm mark 100  cm markload = 6.0  n  fig. 3.2 fig. 3.3   with no load on the spring, the pin points to 19.7  cm on the metre rule, as shown in fig. 3.2.   when a load of 6.0  n is attached to the spring, the pin points to 43.9  cm, as shown in fig. 3.3.   (i) calculate the extension of this spring for a load of 6.0  n.  extension =    cm  [1]   (ii) describe how a student could use the equipment in fig. 3.2 to obtain accurate readings  for a load-extension graph for this spring.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [2] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 fig. 4.1 represents a hydroelectric system for generating electrical energy. power stationpipe waterreservoir fig. 4.1  (a) describe how the power station uses the water in the reservoir to generate electrical energy.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (b) state three  advantages of generating electrical energy using a hydroelectric system  compared with using a coal-fired power station. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ... 3.  ...  ... [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) an electric drill is shown in fig.  4.2. it uses electrical energy. fig. 4.2   complete the sentences about the electric drill.   use words from the box. each word may be used once, more than once, or not at all. efficient        kinetic        potential        powerful        reliable        thermal   (i) the electric drill usefully transforms electrical energy into .. energy.  [1]   (ii) a second electric drill transforms the same amount of electrical energy per second as the  first one. it wastes more of this energy.    the second drill is less . than the first drill.  [1] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 fig. 5.1 shows a glass bottle containing air. the bottle is sealed with a cap. cap air fig. 5.1  (a) the air in the bottle becomes warmer.   (i) state what happens to the pressure of the air in the bottle.  ..  [1]   (ii) explain why the pressure of the air in the bottle changes. use your ideas about gas  molecules.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [4]  (b) the bottle has a weight of 5.4  n and an area of 9.2  cm2 in contact with the table.   calculate the pressure produced by the bottle on the table. give the unit.  pressure =  .   [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) fig. 5.2 shows another bottle. the bottle is on a table. part of the base of this bottle is not in  contact with the table. bottom of bottlecap air fig. 5.2   fig. 5.3 shows the base of the bottle. the shaded area is not in contact with the table. 4.0 cm fig. 5.3 (not to scale)   (i) the base of the bottle is circular. the radius of the outer circle is 4.0  cm as shown in  fig. 5.3. calculate the area of this circle.  area =  ..  cm2  [1]   (ii) the bottle shown in fig. 5.2 has the same mass as the bottle shown in fig. 5.1. explain  why the bottle shown in fig. 5.2 exerts more pressure on the table than the bottle shown  in fig. 5.1.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 a thermometer is used to measure the temperature inside a room in a house.  (a) state a physical property that varies with temperature and can be used in a thermometer.  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 6.1 shows how the temperature of the room changes between 6:00  pm and 11:00  pm. 6:00  pm 7:00  pm 8:00  pm 9:00  pm time of day10:00  pm 11:00  pm101520 temperature  / \u00b0c fig. 6.1   a heater in the room is switched on at 6  pm. the room has a large window. a large amount of  thermal energy is transferred through the window. the window in the room has thick curtains.  closing the curtains reduces the loss of thermal energy from the room.   (i) suggest the time at which the heater is switched off.  ..  [1]   (ii) suggest the time at which the curtains were closed and explain your answer. use  information from the graph. time  ... explanation    ... [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) in cool climates, people use mineral wool to reduce heat loss from houses. mineral wool is  made of fibres and trapped air, as shown in fig.  6.2. pocket of trapped airfibres fig. 6.2   use words from the box to complete the sentences. each word may be used once, more than  once, or not at all. conductor      conduction      convection      emitter      insulator      radiation      radiator   air is a good   .   when air is trapped between fibres, it reduces heat loss by . and by    . [3] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 (a) a ray of light refracts as it travels from air into glass, as shown in fig.  7.1. wx y zray of lightnormal air glass fig. 7.1   (i) state which angle w, x, y or z, is the angle of refraction.  ..  [1]   (ii) light is a transverse wave.    state another example of a transverse wave.  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 7.2 represents some wavefronts approaching a barrier with a narrow gap. direction of travel for wavefrontsbarrier with narrow gap fig. 7.2   (i) on fig.  7.2, draw three wavefronts that have passed through the gap.  [2]   (ii) state the name of the effect in (b)(i) .  ..  [1] [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8 a student sets up an electrical circuit. she draws part of the circuit diagram, as shown in  fig. 8.1. lamp a lamp b fig. 8.1  (a) on fig.  8.1, draw the circuit symbols for three devices so that the student can:   (i) measure the total current in the circuit  [1]   (ii) vary the current in the lamp b only  [1]   (iii) measure the potential difference (p.d.) across lamp b.  [2]  (b) the current in lamp a is 0.20  a. the potential difference (p.d.) across lamp a is 6.0  v.   calculate the resistance of lamp a.  resistance =  ..  \u03c9  [3] [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 (a) fig. 9.1 represents the seven main regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. radio waves microwavesinfra-red  radiationultraviolet visible light gamma rays fig. 9.1   (i) in fig.  9.1, one region is not named.    state the name of the radiation in this region.  ..  [1]   (ii) state which region has waves with the longest wavelength.  ..  [1]  (b) tick the box for the wave with the lowest speed in air.      ultraviolet      ultrasound      visible light  [1]  (c) a group of students want to determine the speed of sound in air.   describe a method they can use. state the measurements they need to make.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [4] [total: 7]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 10 (a) a teacher demonstrates electromagnetic induction using the apparatus shown in fig.  10.1. centre-zero millivoltmeternsmagnet coilspring fig. 10.1   the teacher pulls the magnet down until one end is inside the coil. the teacher then releases  the magnet. the magnet moves up and down repeatedly. as it moves, one end of the magnet  enters and leaves the coil.   describe and explain the readings on the centre-zero millivoltmeter as the magnet enters and  leaves the coil.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [4]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a system for transmitting electricity from a power station. homespower station x ypylon 240  v 22 000  v132  000  v fig. 10.2   state the name of the device used in x and the name of the device used in y. x  ... y  ... [2] [total: 6]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 11 (a) a student rubs a polythene rod with a dry cloth. the polythene rod becomes negatively  charged.   describe and explain how the rod becomes negatively charged.  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (b) the negatively charged polythene rod hangs from a nylon thread so that it is free to turn.   the student charges a second polythene rod and brings it close to the first rod, as shown in  fig. 11.1. negatively charged polythene rodnylon thread negatively charged polythene rod fig. 11.1   describe and explain what happens when the negatively charged rods are close to each  other.  ...  ..  [2] [total: 5]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 12 fig. 12.1 shows a radioactive source placed close to a radiation detector and counter. the detector  can detect \u03b1, \u03b2 and \u03b3 radiation. radioactive sourceradiation detectorcounter fig. 12.1  the radioactive source emits \u03b2-particles only.  describe how you could show that the source emits \u03b2-particles only.  as part of your answer, you may draw on fig.  12.1 and add any other apparatus you may need.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .  [4] [total: 4] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_m18_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "*9439985640* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (sc/sw) 149762/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  february/march 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 (a) define acceleration .  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time axes for the graph of the motion of a car. 00102030 10 20 30 40 time  / sspeed m / s 50 fig. 1.1   (i) the car starts from rest.    from time = 0 to time = 15  s, the car has a constant acceleration to a speed of 28  m / s.    from time = 15  s to time = 32  s, the car has a constant speed of 28  m / s.    from time = 32  s, the car has a constant deceleration of 2.0  m / s2 until it comes to rest.    on fig. 1.1, draw the graph, using the space below for any calculations.  [5]   (ii) from time = 15  s to time = 32  s, the path of the car is part of a circle.    for this motion, state    1. the direction of the resultant force on the car,  ...    2. what happens to the velocity of the car.  ...  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 (a) a force is used to move an object from the earth\u2019s surface to a greater height.   explain why the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the object increases.  ...  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows a train moving up towards the top of a mountain. fig. 2.1   the train transports 80 passengers, each of average mass 65  kg, through a vertical height of  1600  m.   calculate the increase in the total gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the passengers.  increase in g.p.e. =  .  [2]  (c) the engine of the train has a power of 1500  kw. the time taken to reach the top of the  mountain is 30 minutes.    calculate the efficiency of the engine in raising the 80 passengers 1600  m to the top of the  mountain.  efficiency =  .  [4]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 (a) complete the statement by writing in the blank spaces. the moment of a force about a pivot is equal to  .. multiplied by  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a horizontal rod of length 2.4  m and weight 160  n. the weight of the rod acts  at its centre. the rod is suspended by two vertical ropes x and y. the tension in each rope is  80 n. 2.4 m80 n rope x rope y rod80 n 160  n fig. 3.1   (i) state the name given to the point at which the weight of the rod acts.  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the mass of the rod.  mass =  .  [1]   (iii) the rod is in equilibrium.    using data from fig. 3.1, explain why.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [4]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 fig. 4.1 shows a cold plastic spoon that has just been placed in hot liquid in a cup. plastic spoon hot liquid fig. 4.1  (a) describe, in terms of molecules, why the temperature of the whole of the spoon increases.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (b) the plastic spoon is replaced by a metal spoon.   describe an additional process by which the temperature of the whole of this spoon increases.  ...  ...  ..  [2]  (c) the cup contains 150  g of liquid of specific heat capacity 4.2  j / (g \u00b0c). when the cold spoon is  placed into the hot liquid, the temperature of the liquid decreases from 80  \u00b0c to 56  \u00b0c.   calculate the loss of thermal energy from the liquid.  energy loss =  .  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus used to observe the motion of smoke particles that are in the air  in a box. lightair molecules and smoke particlesmicroscopeeye fig. 5.1   light from a lamp enters the box through a window in one side of the box. the smoke particles  are observed using a microscope fixed above a window in the top of the box.   (i) the motion of a single smoke particle is observed through the microscope.    in the circle shown, sketch the path of this smoke particle.  [1]   (ii) explain why the smoke particle follows the path that is observed.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) a tennis player is practising by hitting a ball many times against a wall.   the ball hits the wall 20 times in 60  s. the average change in momentum for each collision  with the wall is 4.2  kg m / s.   calculate the average force that the ball exerts on the wall.  average force =  .  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 (a) fig. 6.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum. radio waves microwaves a bvisible light c d fig. 6.1   state the radiation in each of the regions represented by a, b, c and d in fig.  6.1. a   b  ... c  ... d  ...  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) a source emits visible light.   fig. 6.2 shows a ray of red light from the source incident on the face xy of a glass prism at  point s. is y zx normal ray of red light fig. 6.2   the angle of incidence i of the ray is 35  \u00b0. the refractive index of the glass for red light is 1.5.   (i) calculate the angle of refraction in the glass at s.  angle of refraction =  .  [2]   (ii) on fig. 6.2, draw the refracted ray at face xy and the ray emerging from face xz of the  prism. label this ray r.  [2]   (iii) a ray of blue light follows the same path as the ray of red light incident on the face xy.    on fig. 6.2, draw the path of this ray in the prism and emerging from the prism.    label this ray b.  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 (a) the speed of a light wave in air is 3.00 \u00d7 108 m / s. the refractive index of water is 1.33.   calculate the speed of the light wave in water.  speed =  .  [2]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in air incident on a boundary with a  transparent plastic. direction of light wave air transparent plastic fig. 7.1   on fig. 7.1,    (i) draw the positions of the four refracted wavefronts in the plastic,  [3]   (ii) draw an arrow to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave,  [1]   (iii) label the angle of refraction r of the light wave.  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8 (a) the lamp of a car headlight is rated at 12  v, 50  w.   calculate the current in the lamp when operating normally.  current =  .  [2]  (b) a car is driven at night.   in a journey, the total charge that passes through the 12  v battery is 270  kc.   (i) calculate the electrical energy transferred.  energy =  .  [3]   (ii) the fuel used by the car provides 3.6 \u00d7 104 j / cm3.    calculate the volume of fuel used to provide the energy calculated in (b)(i) .  volume =  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference graphs for a resistor and for a lamp. 002.04.06.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 potential difference  / vcurrent  / a lamp resistor fig. 9.1  (a) (i) the potential difference (p.d.) applied to the resistor is increased. tick the box that  indicates the effect on the resistance of the resistor.      resistance increases      resistance is constant      resistance decreases  [1]   (ii) the potential difference (p.d.) applied to the lamp is increased. tick the box that indicates  the effect on the resistance of the lamp.      resistance increases      resistance is constant      resistance decreases  [1]  (b) the p.d. across the lamp is 6.0  v. calculate the resistance of the lamp.  resistance =  .  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over (c) the lamp and the resistor are connected in parallel  to a 6.0  v supply.   calculate the current from the supply.  current =  .  [2]  (d) the lamp and the resistor are connected in series  to another power supply. the current in  the circuit is 4.0  a.   calculate the total p.d. across the lamp and the resistor.  p.d. =  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a straight wire ab placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.  the ends of ab are connected to a galvanometer. n sa b fig. 10.1   when ab is moved vertically, the needle of the galvanometer shows a deflection.   state three  factors that affect the size of the deflection. 1  ... 2  ... 3  ...  [3]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a transformer. 240  v p12 v s ba fig. 10.2   (i) the primary coil p has 8000 turns and an input of 240  v. the secondary coil s has an  output of 12  v.    calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.  number =  .  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018   (ii) a circuit containing a resistor is connected to the terminals a and b.    a direct current (d.c.) is required in this resistor.    on fig. 10.2, draw this circuit.  [1]  [total: 6] [turn over",
            "16": "16 0625/42/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) to ensure the safety of workers in laboratories where radioactive sources are used, describe  how radioactive materials   (i) should be stored,  ...  ..  [1]   (ii) should be handled.  ...  ..  [1]  (b) complete the table below for three types of emission from radioactive sources. type of emission nature range in air absorbed by electromagnetic radiation several km helium nucleus 0.2 mm paper electron  [3]  (c) state the type of radiation emitted when   (i) an americium nucleus (241 95 am) decays into a neptunium nucleus (237 93 np),  ..  [1]   (ii) a phosphorus nucleus (32 15 p) decays into a silicon nucleus (32 16 si).  ..  [1]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_m18_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "*0725775348* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (sc/jg) 150178/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overphysics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  february/march 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 in this experiment, you will determine the mass of a metre rule by a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig.  1.1. a b metre rule 50.0  cm mark 0 cm mark 100  cm markpivot pblock q fig. 1.1  (a) place the metre rule on the pivot. place block q on the metre rule with its centre at the  95.0 cm mark. keep q at the 95.0  cm mark and adjust the position of the metre rule on the  pivot until the metre rule is as near to being balanced as possible.   the distance a between the centre of q and the 50.0  cm mark has been recorded in table  1.1.   in the table, record the position of the pivot p.   calculate the distance b between the centre of q and the pivot p, using the formula b = (position of q \u2013 position of p).   repeat the procedure for positions of q at the 90.0  cm, 85.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 75.0  cm marks.  record your values for the position of p and your values for b in the table. table 1.1 position of q  / cma / cmposition of p  / cmb / cm 95.0 45.0 90.0 40.0 85.0 35.0 80.0 30.0 75.0 25.0  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate the mass mr of the metre rule using the equation mr = m (g \u2013 1) ,    where m = 20  g. record the value for mr to a suitable number of significant figures for  this experiment.  mr =  ...  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (d) describe why it is difficult to place the block q at the correct mark on the metre rule each time.  explain how you overcame this difficulty. you may draw a diagram to help your explanation.  ...  ...  ..  [1]  (e) two students carry out the experiment correctly but with different values for the mass of  block  q. one student obtains values of b that are larger than those obtained by the other  student.   state and explain whether the larger values of b are likely to produce a more accurate value  for the mass of the metre rule.  ...  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate a circuit containing different lamps.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. power supply a vx y fig. 2.1  (a) (i) switch on. record the current is in the circuit.  is =  ...  [1]   (ii) record the potential difference (p.d.) vx across lamp x.  vx =      disconnect the voltmeter.     connect the voltmeter to measure the p.d. vy across lamp y.     record vy .  vy =    [1]   (iii) disconnect the voltmeter.     connect the voltmeter to measure the p.d. vs across both lamps x and y connected in  series.    record vs.  vs =   [1]    switch off. ",
            "6": "6 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018   (iv) a student suggests that vs should be equal to ( vx + vy).    state whether your readings support this suggestion. justify your statement with  reference to your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]   (b) calculate the resistance r1 of lamp x. use your readings from (a)(i)  and (a)(ii)  and the   equation r1 = vx is . record your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for your  experiment.  r1 =  ...  [2]  (c) the circuit components are to be rearranged so that   \u2022 lamps x and y are connected in parallel   \u2022 the ammeter measures the current in lamp x only   \u2022 the voltmeter measures the p.d. across the lamps.   draw a circuit diagram of this arrangement.  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (d) (i) set up the circuit as described in (c).    switch on. measure and record the current ip in lamp x and the p.d. vp across the  lamps.  ip =    vp =    [1]    switch off.   (ii) calculate the new resistance r2 of lamp x. use your readings from (d)(i)  and the    equation r2 = vp ip .  r2 =  ...  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 in this experiment, you will investigate how the volume of water affects the rate at which water in a  beaker cools.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1.  the thermometer must remain in the clamp throughout the experiment. beaker benchclamp thermometer fig. 3.1  (a) pour 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker.    place the thermometer in the water.   in the first row of table 3.1, record the maximum temperature \u03b8 of the water and immediately  start the stopclock.   record, in the table, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s, 150  s  and 180  s.   remove the thermometer from the beaker and empty the beaker.  [1]  (b) (i) repeat (a), using 100  cm3 of hot water in the beaker.  [1]   (ii) complete the headings and the time column in the table.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over table 3.1 beaker   with 200  cm3 of hot waterbeaker   with 100  cm3 of hot water t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0  (c) write a conclusion stating how the volume of water in the beaker affects the rate of cooling of  the water. justify your answer by reference to your results.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [2]  (d) (i) using your results for 100  cm3 of water, calculate the average rate of cooling x1 for the  first 90 s of the experiment. use your readings from the table and the equation x1 = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b890 t,    where t = 90  s and \u03b80 and \u03b890 are the temperatures at 0  s and 90  s.    include the unit for the rate of cooling.  x1 =  ...  [1]   (ii) using your results for 100  cm3 of water, calculate the average rate of cooling x2 in the  last 90 s of the experiment. use your readings from the table and the equation  x2 = \u03b890 \u2013 \u03b8180 t,    where t = 90  s and \u03b890 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures at 90  s and 180  s.    include the unit for the rate of cooling.  x2 =  ...  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) a student suggests that it is important that the experiments with the two volumes of water  should have the same starting temperatures.    state whether your values for x1 and x2 support this suggestion. justify your statement with  reference to your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [1]   (f) another student wants to investigate whether more thermal energy is lost from the water  surface than from the sides of the beakers.   describe an experiment that could be done to investigate this.   you are not required to carry out the experiment.   you may draw a diagram to help your description.  ...  ...  ..  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 a student is investigating the factors that affect the size of the crater (hole) a ball makes when it is  dropped into sand.  plan an experiment which would enable you to investigate one factor which might affect the size  of the crater. you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes:   metal balls of different sizes    a tray of sand.  write a plan for the experiment.  in your plan, you should:  \u2022 state which factor is being investigated,  \u2022 state the key variables that you would control,  \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed,  \u2022  explain briefly how you would carry out the experiment including what would be measured  and how this would be done,  \u2022 state the precautions which should be taken to obtain reliable results,  \u2022 suggest a suitable graph which could be drawn from the results.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.    ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/52/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .  [7]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_m18_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "*7917946542* this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/sw) 150177/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  february/march 2018  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 1 a student is determining the mass of a metre rule by a balancing method.  he is using the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. a b metre rule 50.0  cm mark 0 cm mark 100  cm markpivotblock q fig. 1.1  (a) he places the metre rule on the pivot and then places block q with its centre at the 95.0  cm  mark.   the student stated that it is difficult to place the mass accurately at the 95.0  cm mark.   explain how the student could overcome this. you may draw a diagram to help your  explanation.  ...  ...  ... [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) the student keeps block  q at the 95.0  cm mark and adjusts the position of the metre rule on  the pivot until the metre rule is as near to being balanced as possible.   describe a method to find the point at which the metre rule is as near to being balanced as  possible.    ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) the student determines the distance a between the centre of block q and the 50.0  cm mark  and also the distance b between the centre of block q and the pivot.   he repeats the procedure for positions of block q at the 90.0  cm, 85.0  cm, 80.0  cm and  75.0 cm marks. his results are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 position of q  / cma / cm b / cm 95.0 45.0 39.0 90.0 40.0 34.3 85.0 35.0 30.0 80.0 30.0 25.2 75.0 25.0 21.4",
            "5": "5 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (i) plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at  the origin (0,  0). [4]   (ii)  determine the gradient g of your line. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ... [1]   (iii) calculate the mass mr of the metre rule  using the equation mr  =  m (g \u2013 1) ,    where m = 20  g. record the value for mr to a suitable number of significant figures for  this experiment.  mr =  ... [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (d) two students carry out the experiment correctly but with different values for the mass of  block  q. one student obtains values of b that are larger than those obtained by the other  student.   state and explain whether the larger values of b are likely to produce a more accurate value  for the mass of the metre rule.  ...  ...  ... [1] [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 some students are investigating how the volume of water affects the rate at which water in a  beaker cools.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1. 8090100 8090100 clampclamp beaker athermometer a beaker bbenchthermometer b fig. 2.1  (a) (i) 200 cm3 of hot water is poured into beaker a and the initial temperature rises to the value  shown on thermometer a in fig. 2.1.    in the first row of table 2.1, record this temperature \u03b8a for time  t = 0.    100 cm3 of hot water is poured into beaker b. the temperature rises to the value shown  on thermometer b in fig. 2.1.    in the first row of the table, record this temperature \u03b8b for time  t = 0. [1]   (ii) the temperatures \u03b8a and \u03b8b of the water in each experiment at times t = 30 s, 60  s, 90  s,  120 s, 150  s and 180  s are shown in the table.    complete the headings and the time column in the table.  [2] table 2.1 beaker a with 200  cm3 of waterbeaker b with 100  cm3 of water t / \u03b8a / \u03b8b / 0 85.0 86.0 83.0 83.0 81.5 80.5 80.0 78.0 78.5 76.0 77.5 74.5",
            "9": "9 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) describe one precaution which should be taken to ensure that the temperature readings in  the experiment are as accurate as possible.  ...  ... [1]  (c) write a conclusion stating how the volume of water in the beaker affects the rate of cooling of  the water. justify your answer by reference to the results.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (d) (i) using the results for 100  cm3 of water, calculate the average rate of cooling x1 for the  first 90 s of the experiment. use the readings from the table and the equation x1 = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b890 t ,    where t = 90 s and \u03b80 and \u03b890 are the temperatures at time 0 and at time 90  s.    include the unit for the rate of cooling.  x1 =  ... [1]   (ii) using the results for 100  cm3 of water, calculate the average rate of cooling x2 in the last  90 s of the experiment. use the readings from the table and the equation  x2 = \u03b890 \u2013 \u03b8180 t ,    where t = 90 s and \u03b890 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures at time 90  s and at time 180  s.    include the unit for the rate of cooling.  x2 =   [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) a student suggests that it is important that the experiments with the two volumes of water  should have the same starting temperatures.   state whether your values for x1 and x2 support this suggestion. justify your statement with  reference to your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [1]  (f) another student plans to investigate whether more thermal energy is lost from the water  surface than from the sides of the beakers.   describe an experiment that could be done to investigate this.   you may draw a diagram to help your description.  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 3 a student is investigating a circuit containing different lamps.  she is using the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. x ypower supply a fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that it measures the potential difference (p.d.)  across lamp x. [1]  (b) the student uses the ammeter to measure the current in the circuit. a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 3.2  record the current is in the circuit, as shown in fig. 3.2.  is =   [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (c) (i) the student uses the voltmeter to measure the p.d.  vx across lamp x and then  reconnects the voltmeter to measure the p.d. vy across lamp  y. v3 4 52 1 0 v3 4 52 1 0  fig. 3.3  fig. 3.4    record the value of the p.d.  vx across lamp x, shown in fig. 3.3.  vx =  ...    record the value of the p.d.  vy across lamp y, shown in fig. 3.4.  vy =  ... [1]   (ii) she then measures  the p.d.  vs across both lamps in series. v3 4 52 1 0 fig. 3.5    record the value of the p.d.  vs across both lamps in series, shown in fig. 3.5.  vs =  ... [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (iii) a student suggests that vs should be equal to ( vx + vy).    state whether the readings support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference  to the results. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]  (d) calculate the resistance r1 of lamp x. use the readings from (b) and (c)(i)  and the    equation r1 = vx is .  r1 =  ..  \u03c9  [1]  (e) (i) the circuit components are to be rearranged so that \u2022 lamps x and y are connected in parallel \u2022 the ammeter measures the current in lamp x only \u2022 the voltmeter measures the p.d. across the lamps.    draw a circuit diagram of this arrangement. [2]",
            "14": "14 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018   (ii) the student sets up the circuit as described in (e)(i) .    she measures and records the current in lamp x and the p.d. across the lamps.    she then calculates a new resistance r2 for lamp x in this parallel circuit.   8.3 \u03c9  r2 =  ...    the student notices that lamp x is very bright in this parallel circuit, but it was dim in the  series circuit in (a).    suggest how temperature affects the resistance of a lamp.    justify your suggestion by reference to the value of r1 from (d) and the value of r2.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 11]",
            "15": "15 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 a student is investigating the factors that affect the size of the crater (hole) a ball makes when it is  dropped into sand.  plan an experiment which would enable you to investigate one factor which might affect the size  of the crater.  the apparatus available includes   metal balls of different sizes   a tray of sand  write a plan for the experiment.  in your plan you should: \u2022 state which factor is being investigated, \u2022 state the key variables that you would control, \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed, \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the experiment including what would be measured  and how this would be done, \u2022 state the precautions which should be taken to obtain reliable results, \u2022 suggest a suitable graph which could be drawn from the results.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.  ..  ..",
            "16": "16 0625/62/f/m/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..   .  .. [7] [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib18 06_0625_11/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *8871621324 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  1 a length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.    1 c m 23456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6cotton     when the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.    pensix turns of cotton     what is the distance once round the pen?  a 2.2  cm b 2.6  cm c 13.2  cm d 15.6  cm      2 a car is moving along a straight, level road, with a constant acceleration.    which graph shows the motion of the car?    distance 0 0a timedistance 0 0b time speed 0 0c timespeed 0 0d time      3 a car takes 15 minutes to travel along a road that is 20  km long.  what is the average speed of the car?  a 0.75  km  / h b 5.0  km  / h c 80  km  / h d 300  km  / h   ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18 [turn over  4 diagram 1 shows a beam balance. a beaker with a wire loop balances the standard masses.    the beaker is then removed and hung from a spring. the spring extends by 5.0  cm, as in  diagram 2.    diagram 1 diagram 2 beam balancestandard massesbeaker with wire loopattached beaker withwire loopattachedspring     the experiment is repeated with the same apparatus on the moon, where the acceleration of free  fall is less than on earth.    which statement describes what happens on the moon?  a the beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by 5.0  cm.  b the beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by less than 5.0  cm.  c the right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by 5.0  cm.  d the right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by less than 5.0  cm.     5 an empty beaker is placed on a top-pan balance. some water is now poured into the beaker.    0.106  kg beaker + water0.062  kg empty beaker    what is the weight of the water?  a 0.044  kg b 0.168  kg c 0.0044  n d 0.44  n    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  6 three liquids p, q and r have different densities and do not mix. the liquids are placed in a  measuring cylinder and allowed to settle. a small block is then dropped into the measuring  cylinder and comes to rest, as shown.    blockr q p     which statement about the density of the block is correct?  a it is equal to the density of q.  b it is greater than the density of p.  c it is greater than the density of r.  d it is less than the density of q.     7 the diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder.    the mass of the liquid is 16  g.    25 201510 5cm 3     what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.80  g / cm 3 b 1.25  g / cm 3 c 36  g / cm 3 d 320  g / cm 3     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18 [turn over  8 a car is moving in a straight line on a level road. its engine provides a forward force on the car. a  second force of equal size acts on the car due to resistive forces.    which statement describes what happens?  a the car changes direction.  b the car moves at a constant speed.  c the car slows down.  d the car speeds up.     9 a hole is drilled in a square tile. the diagram shows the tile hanging freely on a nail.    where is the centre of mass of the tile?    a d b cnail tile     10 the diagram shows the energy transferred in a lamp in one second.    total energy in = 100  jlight energy out = 60  j wasted energy out = 40  j    which type of wasted energy is produced by the lamp?  a chemical potential energy  b electrical energy  c gravitational potential energy  d thermal energy ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  11 which energy resource is not renewable?  a fossil fuel  b sunlight  c tides  d wind      12 a student does work by pulling a box across a horizontal floor.    she now pulls a second box along the same floor.    which row indicates that the student is now doing twice as much work?     force used  to pull box distance the  box is pulled  a is doubled is doubled  b is doubled is halved  c stays the same is doubled  d stays the same is halved     13 four identical beakers are filled with equal volumes of liquids p or q, as shown. liquid p is more  dense than liquid q.    at which point is the pressure the least?    liquid p ab liquid q cd      14 a woman has a weight of 600  n. she stands on a horizontal floor. the area of her feet in contact  with the floor is 0.050  m2.    what is the pressure she exerts on the floor?  a 1.2 \u00d7 103  n / m2  b 2.4 \u00d7 103  n / m2  c 1.2 \u00d7 104  n / m2  d 2.4 \u00d7 104  n / m2     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18 [turn over  15 on a warm day, a carton of fresh milk is covered with a wet cloth.    why does this help to reduce the temperature of the milk?  a some water evaporates from the cloth so the remaining water becomes cooler.  b the water has a very high thermal capacity.  c the water insulates the milk from the warm air around it.  d water is always colder than the air around it.     16 air is trapped in a cylinder by a piston.    the piston is pushed inwards and the volume of the air is reduced.    the temperature of the trapped air remains constant.    which row describes how the average speed of the air molecules and the average distance between them changes?     average speed  of molecules average distance  between molecules  a increases decreases  b increases unchanged  c unchanged decreases  d unchanged increases     17 a wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.    wooden wheel iron circle     which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?  a cooling the iron circle  b heating the iron circle  c heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle  d heating the wooden wheel but not heating or cooling the iron circle     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  18 a student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a \u00b0c scale.    which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a melting point of ice boiling point of mercury  b melting point of ice boiling point of water  c melting point of mercury boiling point of mercury  d melting point of mercury boiling point of water     19 which row gives the correct name for each change of state shown?     change of state  gas to liquid liquid to solid solid to liquid  a condensation melting solidification  b condensation solidification melting  c evaporation melting solidification  d evaporation solidification melting    20 on a cold day, a metal front-door knob x and a similar plastic knob y are at the same  temperature.    why does x feel cooler to the touch than y?  a x convects thermal energy better than y.  b x is a better thermal conductor than y.  c x is a better insulator than y.  d x is a better radiator of thermal energy than y.      21 a liquid is heated and it expands.    how does this lead to the formation of a convection current?  a the density of the heated liquid decreases.  b the density of the heated liquid increases.  c the mass of the heated liquid molecules decreases.  d the mass of the heated liquid molecules increases.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18 [turn over  22 which arrow on the graph shows the amplitude of the wave?    0 0displacement distancec dab      23 in which situation is the wavelength of the wave changed?  a light from the sun passing from air into water  b radio waves travelling from an earth satellite to the moon  c sound reflecting from a wall  d water waves passing through a narrow gap     24 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s light.    mirrorscout psun\u2019s light scout q     which mirror position allows the sun\u2019s light to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightmirrora b c d      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  25 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum. the numbers indicate the approximate  wavelength at the boundaries between the various regions of the spectrum.    for a device to be able to make use of electromagnetic radiation, it needs an aerial of  approximately the same size as the radiation it is designed to work with.    p q r s t u v   1  m 10\u20133  m 7 \u00d7 10\u20137  m 4 \u00d7 10\u20137  m 10\u20138  m 10\u201311  m    which statement is correct?  a a mobile phone uses radiation from region p.  b a television satellite dish uses radiation from region q.  c the receptor cells in an eye use radiation from region r.  d the remote controller for a television uses radiation from region u.      26 a dolphin has a range of audible frequencies of 150  hz\u2013150  khz.    which range of frequencies can be heard both by humans with good hearing and by dolphins?  a 20  hz\u2013150  hz  b 20  hz\u2013150  khz  c 20  khz\u2013150  khz  d 150  hz\u201320  khz     27 a permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.    sn pqpermanent magnetsoft iron bar     what are the polarities of end p and of end q?     end p end q  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18 [turn over  28 which metal is used for the core of an electromagnet?  a copper  b iron  c magnesium  d steel      29 the diagram shows a cell connected to three resistors r 1, r2 and r 3.    r1 position 3r2 r3position 4 position 1 position 2     a student connects an ammeter first in position 1, then in position 2, 3 and 4 in turn.    in which positions does the ammeter show the current in r 1?  a 1, 2 and 4 b 1 and 2 only c 3 only d 4 only    30 a plastic rod is rubbed with a cloth. the rod becomes positively charged.    what happens to the plastic rod and what is the charge on the cloth?     plastic rod charge on cloth  a gains electrons negative  b gains electrons positive  c loses electrons negative  d loses electrons positive      31 a student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current  +  potential difference  b current   \u00f7   potential difference  c potential difference   \u00f7   current  d potential difference   \u00d7   current     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  32 the diagram shows three identical resistors, three ammeters and a battery, connected in a  circuit.    a aa ammeter 3ammeter 2ammeter 1     what is the order of the magnitudes of the readin gs on the ammeters from smallest to largest?     smallest intermediate largest  a ammeter 1 ammeter 2 ammeter 3  b ammeter 1 ammeter 3 ammeter 2  c ammeter 2 ammeter 3 ammeter 1  d ammeter 3 ammeter 2 ammeter 1      33 a student sets up this circuit.        what is the purpose of the circuit?  a to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required  b to amplify the sound of a voice  c to light a lamp in the dark  d to sound a bell when the temperature rises    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18 [turn over  34 the diagram shows two voltmeters p and q connected to a potential divider.    xv vvoltmeter p voltmeter q     the sliding connection at point x is moved towards the top of the diagram.    what happens to the reading on p and to the reading on q?     reading on p reading on q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     35 which statement about electromagnetic induction is correct?  a a strong magnet that is held stationary near a stationary conductor causes a greater effect  than a weak magnet.  b the effect occurs when a magnet and a conductor are both moved with the same speed and  in the same direction.  c the effect occurs when a magnet is moved away from a nearby conductor.  d the effect only occurs when a magnet is moved towards a conductor.    36 an electrical device changes the voltage of an electrical supply from 240  v a.c. to 20  v a.c.    what is this device?  a a generator  b a relay  c a transformer  d a voltmeter     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  37 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central massorbitingparticle     what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons      38 a neutral atom of argon-40 ( a40 18) and a neutral atom of potassium-39 ( k3919) are compared.    which atom has more electrons, and which atom has more protons?     more electrons more protons  a argon argon  b argon potassium  c potassium argon  d potassium potassium      39 which statement about \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles is correct?  a \u03b1-particles are less ionising than \u03b2-particles.  b \u03b1-particles are more penetrating than \u03b2-particles.  c \u03b1-particles have greater mass than \u03b2-particles.  d \u03b1-particles have the same charge as \u03b2-particles.    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  40 an explosion in a nuclear reactor spread the isotope caesium-137 across a large area.    ninety years after the explosion, the quantity of caesium-137 present will be 12.5 % of its original  level.    what is the half-life of caesium-137?  a 11.25 years b 22.5 years c 30.0 years d 45.0 years    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/m/j/18  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 06_0625_12/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *0690604720 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18  1 a length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.    1 c m 23456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6cotton     when the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.    pensix turns of cotton     what is the distance once round the pen?  a 2.2  cm b 2.6  cm c 13.2  cm d 15.6  cm      2 a ball is dropped in an evacuated tube. a series of photographs is taken at equal time intervals  from the time of release. another ball of the same size but twice the mass is also dropped in the  same evacuated tube and photographed.    which diagram shows the motion of the heavier ball?    a first ball b c d heavier ball (mass \u00d72)      ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18 [turn over  3 a car takes 15 minutes to travel along a road that is 20  km long.  what is the average speed of the car?  a 0.75  km  / h b 5.0  km  / h c 80  km  / h d 300  km  / h      4 which statement about the mass and the weight of an object is correct?  a they are both affected by changes in the acceleration of free fall.  b they are both forces.  c they have different units.  d weight is calculated by dividing mass by the acceleration of free fall.     5 two objects p and q are placed in a beaker containing a liquid.    object p floats in the liquid and object q sinks.    which row for the densities of object p, object q and the liquid is possible?      3cm / gp object of density  3cm / gq object of density  3cm / gliquid of density   a 1.2 0.6 0.8  b 1.2 1.4 1.0  c 11.3 8.9 13.6  d 11.3 19.3 13.6    6 the diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder.    the mass of the liquid is 16  g.    25 201510 5cm 3     what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.80  g / cm 3 b 1.25  g / cm 3 c 36  g / cm 3 d 320  g / cm 3     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18  7 a spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force and no resultant moment acting on it.    which statement about the spacecraft is correct?  a its direction is changing.  b it is in equilibrium.  c its speed is decreasing.  d its speed is increasing.     8 a man holds a short ladder in four different positions.    the weight of the ladder causes a moment about the man\u2019s shoulder.    in which position is the moment greatest?    ab c d      9 a hole is drilled in a square tile. the diagram shows the tile hanging freely on a nail.    where is the centre of mass of the tile?    a d b cnail tile      ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18 [turn over  10 which source of energy is renewable?  a coal  b natural gas  c oil  d wind      11 a student does work by pulling a box across a horizontal floor.    she now pulls a second box along the same floor.    which row indicates that the student is now doing twice as much work?     force used  to pull box distance the  box is pulled  a is doubled is doubled  b is doubled is halved  c stays the same is doubled  d stays the same is halved     12 air is trapped in a closed tube by a thread of mercury. the mercury thread is 100  mm long. the  tube is held as shown.    mercuryair 100  mm     atmospheric pressure is 770  mm  hg.    what is the pressure of the trapped air?  a 100  mm  hg b 670   mm  hg c 770   mm  hg d 870   mm  hg     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18  13 brownian motion is the random motion of particles due to molecular bombardment.    in which states of matter is brownian motion observed?  a gases, liquids and solids  b gases and liquids only  c gases and solids only  d liquids and solids only     14 the diagram shows the relative number of molecules in a liquid that have a given kinetic energy.    the graph is divided into sections so that each section contains the same number of molecules.    from which section does the greatest number of molecules escape from the liquid per unit time?    0 0relative number of molecules kinetic energyab c d      15 an electric kettle heats some water. the same kettle then heats a different liquid. the  temperature of the liquid rises more rapidly than the temperature of the water.    what is a possible explanation of this difference?  a the liquid condenses on the cooler parts of the kettle less than the water does.  b the liquid expands more than the water as it heats up.  c the liquid has a lower boiling point than the water.  d the liquid has a smaller thermal capacity than the water.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18 [turn over  16 a wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.    wooden wheel iron circle     which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?  a cooling the iron circle  b heating the iron circle  c heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle  d heating the wooden wheel but not heating or cooling the iron circle      17 a student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a \u00b0c scale.    which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a melting point of ice boiling point of mercury  b melting point of ice boiling point of water  c melting point of mercury boiling point of mercury  d melting point of mercury boiling point of water      18 four thermometers, with their bulbs painted different colours, are placed at equal distances from  a radiant heater.    which thermometer shows the slowest temperature rise when the heater is first switched on?  a matt black  b matt white  c shiny black  d shiny white     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18  19 a tank contains water. ripples are produced on the surface of the water.    what causes the ripples to refract?  a the cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.  b the ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow water.  c the ripples hit the wall of the tank.  d the ripples pass through a narrow gap.     20 the diagrams show a wave on the surface of the water in a tank at times 1.0  s apart. the wave is  produced at p and travels to the right.    p p4.0 cm     which row gives the frequency and the speed of this water wave?     frequency  / hz speed  cm  / s  a 2.0 4.0  b 2.0 8.0  c 4.0 4.0  d 4.0 8.0    21 light passes from glass into air.    which diagram shows a ray of light incident at the critical angle on the air-glass boundary?    glass aira glass airb glass airc glassaird      ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18 [turn over  22 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s light.    mirrorscout psun\u2019s light scout q     which mirror position allows the sun\u2019s light to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightmirrora b c d       23 the table describes white light that passes through a prism and forms a spectrum.    which row is correct?     colour refracted  the most colour next  to the red  a red orange  b red yellow  c violet orange  d violet yellow     24 where do all types of electromagneti c waves travel at the same speed?  a air  b a vacuum  c glass  d water     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18  25 a siren is emitting a sound. as time passes, the sound becomes louder and higher pitched.    what is happening to the amplitude and to the frequency of the emitted sound wave?     amplitude frequency  a decreasing decreasing  b decreasing increasing  c increasing decreasing  d increasing increasing     26 a permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.    sn pqpermanent magnetsoft iron bar     what are the polarities of end p and of end q?     end p end q  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s    27 the diagrams show three ammeters.    0.01.02.03.0 4.0 5.0 a12 0.02.04.06.0 8.0 10.0 a3 4.50  a     which ammeters show the same value of current?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18 [turn over  28 a student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current  +  potential difference  b current  \u00f7  potential difference  c potential difference  \u00f7  current  d potential difference  \u00d7  current      29 a lamp is connected across one cell, then across two cells. the potential difference (p.d.) across  the lamp and the current in it are measured in each case.    the results are shown.    number  of cells p.d.  / v current  / a  1 2.8 0.25  2 5.4 0.40    what is the change in the resistance of the lamp when the number of cells is increased from one  to two?  a it decreases by 0.015  \u03c9.  b it increases by 1.5  \u03c9.  c it increases by 2.3  \u03c9.  d it increases by 17  \u03c9.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18  30 an electrical heater transfers thermal energy to the surroundings.    the graph shows how the amount of thermal energy transferred varies with time.    0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0400 300200100 0thermal energy transferred  / j  time  / s     the heater continues to transfer energy at the same rate.    how much thermal energy is transferred by the heater in 5.0 minutes?  a 200  j b 400  j c 2000  j d 12  000  j     31 which electrical component does the symbol represent?        a a fuse  b a relay coil  c a thermistor  d a variable resistor    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18 [turn over  32 a student sets up this circuit.        what is the purpose of the circuit?  a to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required  b to amplify the sound of a voice  c to light a lamp in the dark  d to sound a bell when the temperature rises     33 the diagram shows two voltmeters p and q connected to a potential divider.    xv vvoltmeter p voltmeter q     the sliding connection at point x is moved towards the top of the diagram.    what happens to the reading on p and to the reading on q?     reading on p reading on q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      34 a simple electric generator induces an electromotive force (e.m.f.).    which modification would increase the induced e.m.f.?  a increase the number of turns in the coil of the generator.  b increase the distance between the magnetic poles.  c reduce the strength of the magnetic field around the coil.  d reverse the direction of the magnetic field. ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18  35 a transformer has np turns in the primary coil and ns turns in the secondary coil.    which row gives the values of np and ns for a transformer that steps up a voltage of 1200  v to  36  000  v?     np ns  a 2 000 60  000  b 2 000 600  000  c 60  000 2  000  d 600  000 2  000      36 a straight wire is perpendicular to the paper. it carries a current into the paper.    what is the magnetic field pattern and its direction near the wire?    a b c d key wire with current into the page     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18 [turn over  37 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central massorbitingparticle     what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons     38 the table shows the composition of three different nuclei.    nucleusnumber of  protons number of  neutrons  x 3 3  y 3 4  z 4 3    which nuclei are isotopes of the same element?  a x, y and z b x and y only c x and z only d y and z only    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/m/j/18  39 the table compares the penetrating abilities and ionising effects of \u03b1-radiation and of \u03b3-radiation.    which row is correct?     least  penetrating most  ionising  a \u03b1 \u03b1  b \u03b1 \u03b3  c \u03b3 \u03b1  d \u03b3 \u03b3     40 radioactive materials must be handled in a safe way.    what is not a safety procedure?  a monitor exposure time to radioactive materials.  b store radioactive materials in cardboard boxes.  c use tongs to pick up the radioactive source.  d wear protective clothing.       "
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 06_0625_13/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *9915199420* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18  1 a length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.    1 c m 23456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6cotton     when the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.    pensix turns of cotton     what is the distance once round the pen?  a 2.2  cm b 2.6  cm c 13.2  cm d 15.6  cm      2 four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.    air resistance may be ignored.    which ball has the greatest average speed?    4.0 kga 1.0 m3.0 kgb 2.0 m2.0 kgc 3.0 m1.0 kgd 4.0 m ground       3 a car takes 15 minutes to travel along a road that is 20  km long.  what is the average speed of the car?  a 0.75  km  / h b 5.0  km  / h c 80  km  / h d 300  km  / h     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18 [turn over  4 a person steps onto a bathroom scales.    the bathroom scales records both mass and weight.    which row shows the readings on the scales?     mass weight  a 60  n 600  kg  b 60  kg 600  n  c 600  kg 60  n  d 600  n 60  kg      5 which properties of an object can be changed by a force?  a direction of motion, mass and speed   b direction of motion, shape and speed  c direction of motion and speed only  d mass, shape and speed      6 a man holds a ladder in four different positions, pivoting around his shoulder.    the weight of the ladder causes a moment about the man\u2019s shoulder.    in which position is the moment greatest?    ab c d    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18  7 a hole is drilled in a square tile. the diagram shows the tile hanging freely on a nail.    where is the centre of mass of the tile?    a d b cnail tile      8 which method of drying clothes has the least impact on the environment?  a evaporate the water in them in an electrically heated tumble dryer.  b hang them on a washing line in direct sunlight.  c remove the water from them in an electric spin dryer.  d suspend them close to a coal fire.     9 a student does work by pulling a box across a horizontal floor.    she now pulls a second box along the same floor.    which row indicates that the student is now doing twice as much work?     force used  to pull box distance the  box is pulled  a is doubled is doubled  b is doubled is halved  c stays the same is doubled  d stays the same is halved     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18 [turn over  10 a simple barometer includes a column of mercury.    which property of this column of mercury is used to give a measurement of atmospheric  pressure?  a its cross-sectional area  b its height  c its temperature  d its thermal capacity     11 the diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder.    the mass of the liquid is 16  g.    25 201510 5cm 3     what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.80  g / cm 3 b 1.25  g / cm 3 c 36  g / cm 3 d 320  g / cm 3     12 brownian motion of particles is observed.    which statements describe the movement of the particles?    1 the particles all travel along a curved path.  2 the particles move randomly. 3 the particles all travel in the same direction.    a 1 and 3 b 1 only c 2 and 3 d 2 only     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18  13 a pure liquid is left in an open beaker and some of the liquid molecules escape by evaporation.    which statement about this process is correct?  a none of the escaping molecules return to the liquid.  b the escaping molecules are generally the more energetic ones.  c the rate of escape of the molecules can be increased by increasing the depth of the liquid in  the beaker.  d the temperature of the remaining liquid is unaffected by the escape of the molecules.     14 a wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.    wooden wheel iron circle     which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?  a cooling the iron circle  b heating the iron circle  c heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle  d heating the wooden wheel but not heating or cooling the iron circle      15 a student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a \u00b0c scale.    which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a melting point of ice boiling point of mercury  b melting point of ice boiling point of water  c melting point of mercury boiling point of mercury  d melting point of mercury boiling point of water     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18 [turn over  16 which diagram shows how the thermal capacity of a silver object depends on its mass?    thermal capacity massa 0 0thermalcapacity massb 0 0 thermalcapacity massc 0 0thermalcapacity massd 0 0      17 the diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.    base of panhandle of pan     which row is correct for the materials used to make the base and the handle of the pan?     base of pan handle of pan  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18  18 a saucepan of water is heated from its base on an electric hob.    after five minutes the water near the top of the saucepan is becoming hot.    what is the main process of heat transfer within the water?  a condensation  b conduction  c convection  d radiation      19 the diagram shows a wave.    2.0 1.0 0 \u20131.0\u20132.0displacement /  cm distance/  cm0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0     which row is correct?     amplitude of  the wave  / cm wavelength of  the wave  / cm  a 1.0 4.0  b 1.0 8.0  c 2.0 4.0  d 2.0 8.0     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18 [turn over  20 the diagram shows a ray of light passing from glass to air, at the critical angle.    xw yzair glass     which angles are the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction?     angle of  incidence angle of  refraction  a w y  b w z  c x y  d x z      21 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s light.    mirrorscout psun\u2019s light scout q     which mirror position allows the sun\u2019s light to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightmirrora b c d     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18  22 it takes 0.24 seconds for a microwave signal to travel from a transmitting station on earth to a  satellite and then back to the station on earth. microwaves travel at 3.0 \u00d7 108  m / s.    how far is the transmitting station from the satellite?  a 36  000  km  b 72  000  km  c 36  000  000  km  d 72  000  000  km      23 the diagram shows the ranges of human hearing and of ultrasound waves.    01 01 2 \u00d7 1012 \u00d7 104102103104105106range of human hearingultrasound     to which characteristic of sound waves do the numbers on the diagram refer?  a amplitude in cm  b frequency in hz  c speed in metres  / second  d wavelength in metres     24 a permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.    sn pqpermanent magnetsoft iron bar     what are the polarities of end p and of end q?     end p end q  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18 [turn over  25 the diagram shows a permanent bar magnet placed on a wooden table. a student draws arrows  to show the direction of the magnetic field at four points.    which arrow shows the direction of the magnetic field at that position?    nsa cb d       26 which statement about electric charges is correct?  a like charges attract and unlike charges attract.  b like charges attract and unlike charges repel.  c like charges repel and unlike charges attract.  d like charges repel and unlike charges repel.     27 the diagrams show two readings on the same ammeter. reading 1 is taken before the ammeter  is connected in a circuit. reading 2 shows the reading when the ammeter is connected in a circuit.    2 31 0 a reading 1 not connected in a circuit2 31 0 a reading 2 connected in a circuit    what is the current in the circuit?  a 0.80  a b 0.90  a c 0.95  a d 1.20  a     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18  28 a student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current  +  potential difference  b current   \u00f7   potential difference  c potential difference   \u00f7   current  d potential difference   \u00d7   current      29 a battery in an electric circuit is connected to a lamp.    chemical energy in the battery is transferred to which other types of energy?  a internal energy only  b kinetic energy and sound energy  c light energy and thermal energy  d light energy only    30 which component is represented by the symbol shown?        a fixed resistor  b fuse  c thermistor  d variable resistor    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18 [turn over  31 a student sets up a circuit which she calls circuit 1. she records the value of the current i1, and  calculates the resistance r1 of the circuit.    a v circuit 1a v circuit 2    she then connects an identical resistor in parallel with the original resistor. she calls this circuit 2.  she records current i2 and calculates the total resistance r2 of this circuit.    which row correctly compares the two currents and the two resistances in the circuits?     i2 r2  a greater than i1 greater than r1  b greater than i1 less than r1  c less than i1 greater than r1  d less than i1 less than r1     32 a student sets up this circuit.        what is the purpose of the circuit?  a to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required  b to amplify the sound of a voice  c to light a lamp in the dark  d to sound a bell when the temperature rises    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18  33 the diagram shows two voltmeters p and q connected to a potential divider.    xv vvoltmeter p voltmeter q     the sliding connection at point x is moved towards the top of the diagram.    what happens to the reading on p and to the reading on q?     reading on p reading on q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      34 the diagram shows a transformer.    primary coil secondary coil  core     which materials are the most suitable for the core and for the coils?     core material coil material  a copper copper  b copper iron  c iron copper  d iron iron     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18 [turn over  35 a current-carrying conductor placed in a magnetic field experiences a force.    which changes result in reversing the direction of the force?  a decrease the current, keeping the field direction constant.  b increase the current and reverse the field direction.  c increase the current, keeping the field direction constant.  d reverse the current and reverse the field direction.    36 a solenoid is connected to a battery.    solenoidaxis of solenoid     which statement about the magnetic field at the centre of the solenoid is correct?  a the magnetic field along the axis is zero.  b the direction of the magnetic field is at an angle of 45 \u00b0 to the axis.  c the direction of the magnetic field is parallel to the axis.  d the direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the axis.     37 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central massorbitingparticle     what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/m/j/18  38 one isotope of lead is represented by the nuclide symbol 214 82pb.    how many neutrons and how many protons does one nucleus of this isotope contain?     number of  neutrons number of  protons  a 82 132  b 82 214  c 132 82  d 214 82     39 three sources of background radiation are listed.    1 cosmic rays  2 medical x-rays  3 radioactive emissions from radon gas from the ground    which of these sources are naturally occurring?  a 1 and 3 only b 1 only c 2 and 3 only d 2 only     40 the rates of emission from four radioactive sources are measured at 20 minute intervals.    each row in the table shows the results for one of the radioactive sources.    which source has the longest half-life?     rate of emission  / emissions per minute  time 0 time 20  min time 40  min  a 120 60 30  b 120 110 101  c 240 60 15  d 240 170 122       "
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib18 06_0625_21/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *7516764361 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/21     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  1 a length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.    1 c m 23456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6cotton     when the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.    pensix turns of cotton     what is the distance once round the pen?  a 2.2  cm b 2.6  cm c 13.2  cm d 15.6  cm     2 when does an object falling vertically through the air reach terminal velocity?  a when the acceleration of the object becomes negative  b when the acceleration of the object is equal to g  c when the air resistance equals the weight of the object  d when the air resistance is greater than the weight of the object    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18 [turn over  3 a car is moving along a straight, level road, with a constant acceleration.    which graph shows the motion of the car?    distance 0 0a timedistance 0 0b time speed 0 0c timespeed 0 0d time     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  4 diagram 1 shows a beam balance. a beaker with a wire loop balances the standard masses.    the beaker is then removed and hung from a spring. the spring extends by 5.0  cm, as in  diagram 2.    diagram 1 diagram 2 beam balancestandard massesbeaker with wire loopattached beaker withwire loopattachedspring     the experiment is repeated with the same apparatus on the moon, where the acceleration of free  fall is less than on earth.    which statement describes what happens on the moon?  a the beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by 5.0  cm.  b the beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by less than 5.0  cm.  c the right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by 5.0  cm.  d the right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by less than 5.0  cm.     5 an object always has mass but does not always have weight.    what must be present and acting on the mass for it to have weight?  a a gravitational field  b a set of scales  c displaced water  d friction due to air resistance    6 a force acting on a moving ball causes its motion to change. this force stays constant.    what makes the force produce a greater change in the motion of the ball?  a decreasing the total mass of the ball  b increasing the temperature of the ball  c using a ball with a hollow centre but the same mass  d using a different material for the ball so that it has a lower density but the same mass   ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18 [turn over  7 a balloon and a mass are attached to a rod that is pivoted at p.    35 40 45 cm30 25 20 15 10 5p massballoon     the balloon is filled with helium, a gas less dense than air, so that it applies an upward force on  the rod.    the rod is horizontal and stationary.    which action causes the rod to rotate clockwise?  a move both the balloon and mass 10  cm to the left.  b move both the balloon and mass 10  cm to the right.  c move both the balloon and mass to the 25  cm mark.  d move the balloon to the 20  cm mark and the mass to the 30  cm mark.     8 a car is moving in a straight line on a level road. its engine provides a forward force on the car. a second force of equal size acts on the car due to resistive forces.    which statement describes what happens?  a the car changes direction.  b the car moves at a constant speed.  c the car slows down.  d the car speeds up.      9 which expression gives the momentum of an object?  a mass \u00d7 acceleration  b mass \u00d7 gravitational field strength  c mass \u00d7 velocity  d  21 \u00d7 mass \u00d7 (velocity)2     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  10 as energy is transferred into different forms, it eventually becomes dissipated.    what does this mean?  a all the energy disappears.  b the energy finally changes into every possible form of energy.  c the energy spreads out among the objects and their surroundings.  d the total amount of energy becomes less.     11 a ball of mass 1.2  kg is dropped from a height of 30  m. as it falls, 25% of its initial gravitational  potential energy is transferred to thermal energy.    what is the kinetic energy of the ball just before it hits the ground?  a 27  j b 90  j c 270  j d 360  j    12 a girl hangs by her hands from a bar in the gymnasium. she pulls herself up until her chin is level  with the bar.    the mass of the girl is 48  kg.    she pulls herself up through a distance of 0.25  m.    she does this in 2.0  s.    what is the useful power she uses to pull herself up?  a 6.0  w b 24  w c 60  w d 240  w    13 four identical beakers are filled with equal volumes of liquids p or q, as shown. liquid p is more  dense than liquid q.    at which point is the pressure the least?    liquid p ab liquid q cd     14 an oil tank has a base of area 2.5  m2 and is filled with oil to a depth of 1.2  m.    the density of the oil is 800  kg  / m3.    what is the force exerted on the base of the tank due to the oil?  a 960  n b 2400  n c 9600  n d 24  000  n     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18 [turn over  15 when molecules of a gas rebound from a wall of a container, the wall experiences a pressure.    what is the cause of this pressure?  a the change in energy of the molecules  b the change in momentum of the molecules  c the change in power of the molecules  d the change in speed of the molecules      16 a student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a \u00b0c scale.    which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a melting point of ice boiling point of mercury  b melting point of ice boiling point of water  c melting point of mercury boiling point of mercury  d melting point of mercury boiling point of water      17 which statements about boiling and about evaporation are both correct?     boiling evaporation  a takes place only at the surface takes place only at the surface  b takes place only at the surface takes place throughout the liquid  c takes place throughout the liquid takes place only at the surface  d takes place throughout the liquid takes place throughout the liquid     18 on a cold day, a metal front-door knob x and a similar plastic knob y are at the same  temperature.    why does x feel cooler to the touch than y?  a x convects thermal energy better than y.  b x is a better thermal conductor than y.  c x is a better insulator than y.  d x is a better radiator of thermal energy than y.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  19 light travels at a speed of  2.0 \u00d7 108  m / s in a glass block.    in the glass, the wavelength of the light is 4.0 \u00d7 10\u20137  m.    what is the frequency of the light?  a 2.0 \u00d7 10\u201315  hz  b 1.3 \u00d7 10\u20132  hz  c 80  hz  d 5.0 \u00d7 1014  hz      20 which arrow on the graph shows the amplitude of the wave?    0 0displacement distancec dab      21 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s light.    mirrorscout psun\u2019s light scout q     which mirror position allows the sun\u2019s light to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightmirrora b c d    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18 [turn over  22 a prism is made from transparent plastic. in this plastic, light travels at 0.80  c, where c is its speed  in air. light enters one face of the prism at right-angles as shown.    \u03b8not to scale     the light just escapes from the sloping face of the prism.    what is angle \u03b8 ?  a 37 \u00b0 b 39 \u00b0 c 51 \u00b0 d 53 \u00b0     23 the sun emits infra-red radiation and light.    light from the sun reaches the earth in 8 minutes.    which row gives correct information about the infra-red radiation?     wavelength of  infra-red radiation time taken for infra-red  radiation to reach earth  a longer than wavelength of light 8 minutes  b longer than wavelength of light much less than 8 minutes  c shorter than wavelength of light 8 minutes  d shorter than wavelength of light much more than 8 minutes     24 a dolphin has a range of audible frequencies of 150  hz\u2013150  khz.    which range of frequencies can be heard both by humans with good hearing and by dolphins?  a 20  hz\u2013150  hz  b 20  hz\u2013150  khz  c 20  khz\u2013150  khz  d 150  hz\u201320  khz    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  25 a permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.    sn pqpermanent magnetsoft iron bar     what are the polarities of end p and of end q?     end p end q  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s     26 a steel magnet is placed inside a coil of wire.    which method is used to demagnetise the magnet?  a connect the coil to an a.c. power supply  b connect the coil to an a.c. power supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil  c connect the coil to a d.c. power supply  d connect the coil to a d.c. power supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil    27 the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a rechargeable battery is 6.0  v.    what does this mean?  a 6.0  j is the maximum energy the battery can provide in 1.0  s.  b 6.0  j is the total energy the battery can provide before it has to be recharged.  c 6.0  j of energy is provided by the battery to drive a charge of 1.0  c around a complete circuit.  d 6.0  j of energy is provided by the battery to drive a current of 1.0  a around a complete circuit.     28 a student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current  +  potential difference  b current  \u00f7  potential difference  c potential difference  \u00f7  current  d potential difference  \u00d7  current    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18 [turn over  29 a water heater is connected to a 230  v supply and there is a current of 26  a in the heater. it takes  20 minutes to heat the water to the required temperature.    how much energy is supplied by the heater?  a 6.0 \u00d7 103  j b 1.0 \u00d7 104  j c 1.2 \u00d7 105  j d 7.2 \u00d7 106  j     30 which electrical symbol represents a diode?    abcd      31 a student sets up this circuit.        what is the purpose of the circuit?  a to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required  b to amplify the sound of a voice  c to light a lamp in the dark  d to sound a bell when the temperature rises    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  32 the diagram shows two voltmeters p and q connected to a potential divider.    xv vvoltmeter p voltmeter q     the sliding connection at point x is moved towards the top of the diagram.    what happens to the reading on p and to the reading on q?     reading on p reading on q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      33 the diagram represents a digital circuit using a nor gate and an and gate.    x y zoutputnor and     what is the truth table for this circuit?    x 0 000111 1y 0 011001 1z 0 101010 1output 0 001010 1 a x 0 000111 1y 0 011001 1z 0 101010 1output 0 100000 0 b x 0 000111 1y 0 011001 1z 0 101010 1output 1 110101 0 c x 0 000111 1y 0 011001 1z 0 101010 1output 1 011111 1 d      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18 [turn over  34 which statement about electromagnetic induction is correct?  a a strong magnet that is held stationary near a stationary conductor causes a greater effect  than a weak magnet.  b the effect occurs when a magnet and a conductor are both moved with the same speed and  in the same direction.  c the effect occurs when a magnet is moved away from a nearby conductor.  d the effect only occurs when a magnet is moved towards a conductor.    35 the diagram shows a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field.    which arrow shows the direction of the force acting on the conductor?    sna b cd       36 power losses in transmission cables are reduced by increasing the transmission voltage.    what is the explanation for this reduction?  a the current decreases, reducing thermal energy losses.  b the current increases, increasing the flow of charge.  c the resistance of the cable increases, reducing the current.  d the resistance of the cable decreases.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  37 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central massorbitingparticle     what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons     38 nuclear fusion is a reaction that takes place in stars.    which row describes this reaction?     action of atomic nuclei energy  a   an atomic nucleus splits into  two or more smaller nuclei absorbed    b   an atomic nucleus splits into  two or more smaller nuclei released    c   atomic nuclei join together  to form a larger nucleus absorbed    d   atomic nuclei join together  to form a larger nucleus released      ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  39 the diagram shows emissions from a source passing into the electric field between two charged  plates.    ++++++++++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013source     what is emitted by this source?  a neutrons and \u03b3-rays only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  c \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only    40 the graph shows how the count rate registered by a counter near to a sample of a radioactive  isotope changes over a period of a few days. the background count rate is 5 counts per minute.    50 40302010 0count rate counts  / minute time  / days012345678     what is the half-life of the isotope?  a 2.0 days b 2.5 days c 3.0 days d 4.0 days    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/m/j/18  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib18 06_0625_22/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *7373168877 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  1 a length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.    1 c m 23456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6cotton     when the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.    pensix turns of cotton     what is the distance once round the pen?  a 2.2  cm b 2.6  cm c 13.2  cm d 15.6  cm     2 when does an object falling vertically through the air reach terminal velocity?  a when the acceleration of the object becomes negative  b when the acceleration of the object is equal to g  c when the air resistance equals the weight of the object  d when the air resistance is greater than the weight of the object    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18 [turn over  3 a ball is dropped in an evacuated tube. a series of photographs is taken at equal time intervals  from the time of release. another ball of the same size but twice the mass is also dropped in the  same evacuated tube and photographed.    which diagram shows the motion of the heavier ball?    a first ball b c d heavier ball (mass \u00d72)      4 which statement about the mass and the weight of an object is correct?  a they are both affected by changes in the acceleration of free fall.  b they are both forces.  c they have different units.  d weight is calculated by dividing mass by the acceleration of free fall.      5 which statement about the mass of an object is correct?  a it is equal to the density divided by the volume.  b it is equal to weight multiplied by the gravitational field strength.  c it is the effect of a gravitational field on the object.  d it is the property that resists a change in velocity.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  6 an object decelerates from 25.0  m / s to 5.0  m / s in a time of 4.0  s.    it has a mass of 50  kg.    what is the resultant force on the object?  a 0.63  n b 10  n c 250  n d 4000  n     7 a beam is pivoted at one end, as shown.    pivot40 cm 6.0 nbeamx     the beam weighs 6.0  n and its weight acts at a point x, 40  cm from the pivot.    a force of 4.0  n is applied to the beam causing it to balance horizontally.    in which direction and where is the 4.0  n force applied?  a downwards at 20  cm to the left of x  b downwards at 20  cm to the right of x  c upwards at 20  cm to the left of x  d upwards at 20  cm to the right of x    8 a spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force and no resultant moment acting on it.    which statement about the spacecraft is correct?  a its direction is changing.  b it is in equilibrium.  c its speed is decreasing.  d its speed is increasing.      9 a car of mass 1000  kg travelling at 8.0  m / s collides with a lorry of mass 3000  kg that is travelling  at 2.0  m / s in the same direction. after colliding, the two vehicles stick together.    what is their speed after the collision?  a 2.0  m / s b 2.5  m / s c 3.5  m / s d 5.0  m / s     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18 [turn over  10 what is the main process by which energy is released in the sun?  a \u03b1-decay  b \u03b2-decay  c nuclear fission  d nuclear fusion    11 the work done w by a force is related to the magnitude f of the force and the distance d moved  in the direction of the force.  which equation for w is correct?  a w = d \u00f7 f  b w = d + f  c w = f \u00f7 d  d w = f \u00d7 d    12 a crane on a construction site lifts concrete beams.    the useful work done by the crane is 4000  kj in a time of 160  s.    what is the useful output power of the crane?  a 0.04  kw b 25  w c 25  kw d 640  kw     13 a submarine is in water of density 1.0  \u00d7 103  kg  / m3. the submarine changes its depth. this causes  the pressure on it to change by 0.10  mpa.    what is the change in depth of the submarine?    a 0.10  m b 10  m c 100  m d 1000  m    14 an oil tank has a base of area 2.5  m2 and is filled with oil to a depth of 1.2  m.    the density of the oil is 800  kg  / m3.    what is the force exerted on the base of the tank due to the oil?  a 960  n b 2400  n c 9600  n d 24  000  n    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  15 when molecules of a gas rebound from a wall of a container, the wall experiences a pressure.    what is the cause of this pressure?  a the change in energy of the molecules  b the change in momentum of the molecules  c the change in power of the molecules  d the change in speed of the molecules     16 a student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a \u00b0c scale.    which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a melting point of ice boiling point of mercury  b melting point of ice boiling point of water  c melting point of mercury boiling point of mercury  d melting point of mercury boiling point of water      17 in an experiment, an object is heated.    the data from the experiment is shown.    \u25cf the energy transferred to the object is 3.0  kj.  \u25cf the mass of the object is 2.0  kg.  \u25cf the rise in temperature of the object is 10  \u00b0c.  \u25cf the specific heat capacity of the object is 150  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    what is the thermal capacity of the object?  a 30  j / \u00b0c b 300  j / \u00b0c c 3000  j / \u00b0c d 9000  j / \u00b0c    18 four thermometers, with their bulbs painted different colours, are placed at equal distances from  a radiant heater.    which thermometer shows the slowest temperature rise when the heater is first switched on?  a matt black  b matt white  c shiny black  d shiny white     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18 [turn over  19 a tank contains water. ripples are produced on the surface of the water.    what causes the ripples to refract?  a the cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.  b the ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow water.  c the ripples hit the wall of the tank.  d the ripples pass through a narrow gap.     20 light travels at a speed of  2.0 \u00d7 10 8  m / s in a glass block.    in the glass, the wavelength of the light is 4.0 \u00d7 10\u20137  m.    what is the frequency of the light?  a 2.0 \u00d7 10\u201315  hz  b 1.3 \u00d7 10\u20132  hz  c 80  hz  d 5.0 \u00d7 1014  hz     21 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s light.    mirrorscout psun\u2019s light scout q     which mirror position allows the sun\u2019s light to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightmirrora b c d      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  22 a scientist describes light as being monochromatic.    what does this tell you about the light?  a it has a single frequency.  b it has more than one wavelength.  c it travels at a single speed in a single direction.  d it travels at different speeds in different directions.     23 which statement is not correct?  a the speed of long-wavelength infra-red radiation in a vacuum is greater than that of short- wavelength ultraviolet light.  b the speed of microwaves in air is approximately 3.0 \u00d7 10 8  m / s.  c the speed of \u03b3-rays emitted from a sample of cobalt-60 is 3.0 \u00d7 105  km  / s.  d the x-rays emitted in a supernova explosion reach the earth at the same time as the visible  light emitted.     24 a siren is emitting a sound. as time passes, the sound becomes louder and higher pitched.    what is happening to the amplitude and to the frequency of the emitted sound wave?     amplitude frequency  a decreasing decreasing  b decreasing increasing  c increasing decreasing  d increasing increasing     25 a permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.    sn pqpermanent magnetsoft iron bar     what are the polarities of end p and of end q?     end p end q  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18 [turn over  26 which method is used to demagnetise a bar magnet?  a lower it into water  b heat it with a bunsen burner  c place it in a metal box  d suspend it in a sling      27 what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a cell?  a the amount of charge that passes through the cell per unit time  b the energy gained per unit charge as charge passes through the cell  c the total amount of charge flowing through the cell  d the total energy stored in the cell      28 a student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current  +  potential difference  b current  \u00f7  potential difference  c potential difference  \u00f7  current  d potential difference  \u00d7  current      29 a piece of wire is 40  cm long and has a diameter of 2.0  mm.    its resistance is 0.30  \u03c9.    which wire of the same material has a resistance of 0.15  \u03c9?     length  / cm diameter  / mm  a 20 1.0  b 20 4.0  c 80 1.0  d 80 4.0     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  30 a diode is used as a rectifier.    what is the purpose of a rectifier?  a to allow current to pass in either direction  b to change alternating current into direct current  c to switch off the circuit in case of a large current  d to provide an efficient source of light    31 a student sets up this circuit.        what is the purpose of the circuit?  a to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required  b to amplify the sound of a voice  c to light a lamp in the dark  d to sound a bell when the temperature rises     32 the diagram shows two voltmeters p and q connected to a potential divider.    xv vvoltmeter p voltmeter q     the sliding connection at point x is moved towards the top of the diagram.    what happens to the reading on p and to the reading on q?     reading on p reading on q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18 [turn over  33 the circuit shown contains two gates.    p qr     which truth table describes the operation of the circuit?    a  b  c  d  p q r  p q r  p q r  p q r  0 0 0  0 0 0  0 0 1  0 0 1  0 1 1  0 1 0  0 1 0  0 1 0  1 0 1  1 0 1  1 0 0  1 0 1  1 1 1  1 1 1  1 1 0  1 1 1     34 in an a.c. generator, a coil is rotated in a magnetic field and an electromotive force (e.m.f.) is  induced in the coil.    in which position of the coil does the e.m.f. have the largest value?    n scoila n scoilb n scoilc n scoild      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  35 wire p carries a current directed perpendicularly into the page. a compass is placed at point q  which is close to wire p.    the magnetic field at q due to the current is very much larger than the magnetic field of the  earth.    in which direction does the north pole of the compass point?    p q ab c d      36 a transformer has np turns in the primary coil and ns turns in the secondary coil.    which row gives the values of np and ns for a transformer that steps up a voltage of 1200  v to  36  000  v?     np ns  a 2 000 60  000  b 2 000 600  000  c 60  000 2  000  d 600  000 2  000     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18 [turn over  37 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central massorbitingparticle     what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons      38 an isotope of polonium has the nuclide notation po218 84 .    a nucleus of this isotope decays by emitting an \u03b1-particle. a \u03b2-particle is then emitted to form  nuclide x.    what is the notation for nuclide x?  a 214 81x b 213 82x c 213 83x d 214 83x      39 the table compares the penetrating abilities and ionising effects of \u03b1-radiation and of \u03b3-radiation.    which row is correct?     least  penetrating most  ionising  a \u03b1 \u03b1  b \u03b1 \u03b3  c \u03b3 \u03b1  d \u03b3 \u03b3     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  40 the graph shows how the count rate registered by a counter near to a sample of a radioactive  isotope changes over a period of a few days. the background count rate is 5 counts per minute.    50 40302010 0count rate counts  / minute time  / days012345678     what is the half-life of the isotope?  a 2.0 days b 2.5 days c 3.0 days d 4.0 days     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  blank page",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/m/j/18  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 06_0625_23/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *9561144955* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/23     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18  1 a length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.    1 c m 23456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6cotton     when the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.    pensix turns of cotton     what is the distance once round the pen?  a 2.2  cm b 2.6  cm c 13.2  cm d 15.6  cm     2 when does an object falling vertically through the air reach terminal velocity?  a when the acceleration of the object becomes negative  b when the acceleration of the object is equal to g  c when the air resistance equals the weight of the object  d when the air resistance is greater than the weight of the object     3 a sprinter runs a 100  m race in a straight line. the table shows how his speed changes with time  for the first 5.0  s of the race.    s/mspeed 0 1.7 4.1 5.7 6.5 6.8  time  / s 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0    what is the average acceleration of the sprinter between time 2.0  s and time 3.0  s?  a 1.6  m / s2 b 1.9  m / s2 c 4.1  m / s2 d 5.7  m / s2     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18 [turn over  4 a person steps onto a bathroom scales.    the bathroom scales records both mass and weight.    which row shows the readings on the scales?     mass weight  a 60  n 600  kg  b 60  kg 600  n  c 600  kg 60  n  d 600  n 60  kg      5 an object has a weight of 7600  n in a gravitational field of strength 100  n / kg.    what is the mass of the object?  a 76  kg b 760  n c 7600  g d 76  000  n      6 a load is hung from a steel wire. the load is increased.    the length of the wire increases until the limit of proportionality is reached.    the load is now increased slightly.    what happens?  a the extension of the wire increases and the wire no longer obeys hooke\u2019s law.  b the extension of the wire decreases and the wire no longer obeys hooke\u2019s law.  c the extension of the wire increases and it obeys hooke\u2019s law.  d the extension of the wire decreases and it obeys hooke\u2019s law.      7 the diagram shows a uniform metre rule pivoted at the 30  cm mark.    6.0 n30 cm 0 cm 100  cm 70 cm 2.0 nmetre rule pivot     the rule balances when a weight of 6.0  n is hanging from the zero mark and a weight of 2.0  n is  hanging from the 70  cm mark.    what is the weight of the rule?  a 2.0  n b 5.0  n c 6.0  n d 13.0  n ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18  8 an astronaut orbits the earth in a space station.    which is a vector quantity?  a the mass of the astronaut  b the speed of the satellite  c the temperature inside the satellite  d the weight of the astronaut     9 a visitor to a fairground throws a soft object of mass 0.12  kg at a coconut of mass 0.48  kg. the  soft object stops moving when it hits the coconut. in order to dislodge the coconut, it must be  made to move at 0.10  m/s.     what is the minimum speed with which the visitor should throw the soft object in order to dislodge  the coconut?  a 0.20  m/s  b 0.40  m/s  c 2.0  m/s  d 4.0  m/s     10 an aircraft with a mass of 300  000  kg is flying at an altitude of 2000  m with a speed of 100 m  / s.    what is the kinetic energy of the aircraft?  a 1.5 \u00d7 104  kj b 1.5 \u00d7 106  kj c 3.0 \u00d7 106  kj d 6.0 \u00d7 106  kj     11 which method of drying clothes has the least impact on the environment?  a evaporate the water in them in an electrically heated tumble dryer.  b hang them on a washing line in direct sunlight.  c remove the water from them in an electric spin dryer.  d suspend them close to a coal fire.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18 [turn over  12 the vertical displacement of a mass of 0.20  kg changes with time. the graph shows how this  displacement changes.    3 210 \u20131 \u20132\u201330 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 time  / sdisplacement / cm     at which rate does it gain gravitational potential energy as it moves upwards?  a 0.025  w b 0.050  w c 0.20  w d 0.40  w     13 a simple barometer includes a column of mercury.    which property of this column of mercury is used to give a measurement of atmospheric  pressure?  a its cross-sectional area  b its height  c its temperature  d its thermal capacity     14 an oil tank has a base of area 2.5  m2 and is filled with oil to a depth of 1.2  m.    the density of the oil is 800  kg  / m3.    what is the force exerted on the base of the tank due to the oil?  a 960  n b 2400  n c 9600  n d 24  000  n     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18  15 when molecules of a gas rebound from a wall of a container, the wall experiences a pressure.    what is the cause of this pressure?  a the change in energy of the molecules  b the change in momentum of the molecules  c the change in power of the molecules  d the change in speed of the molecules     16 two liquid-in-glass thermometers p and q contain the same volume of mercury and have  capillary tubes of the same length.    thermometer p has a capillary tube with a smaller diameter than thermometer q.    which thermometer has the greater range and which has the greater sensitivity?     greater  range greater  sensitivity  a p p  b p q  c q p  d q q      17 a student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a \u00b0c scale.    which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?     lower fixed point upper fixed point  a melting point of ice boiling point of mercury  b melting point of ice boiling point of water  c melting point of mercury boiling point of mercury  d melting point of mercury boiling point of water   ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18 [turn over  18 the diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.    base of panhandle of pan     which row is correct for the materials used to make the base and the handle of the pan?     base of pan handle of pan  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     19 the diagram shows a wave.    2.0 1.0 0 \u20131.0\u20132.0displacement /  cm distance/  cm0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0     which row is correct?     amplitude of  the wave  / cm wavelength of  the wave  / cm  a 1.0 4.0  b 1.0 8.0  c 2.0 4.0  d 2.0 8.0     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18  20 light travels at a speed of  2.0 \u00d7 108  m / s in a glass block.    in the glass, the wavelength of the light is 4.0 \u00d7 10\u20137  m.    what is the frequency of the light?  a 2.0 \u00d7 10\u201315  hz  b 1.3 \u00d7 10\u20132  hz  c 80  hz  d 5.0 \u00d7 1014  hz      21 scout p signals to scout q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the sun\u2019s light.    mirrorscout psun\u2019s light scout q     which mirror position allows the sun\u2019s light to be reflected to scout q?    sun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightsun\u2019s lightmirrora b c d      ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18 [turn over  22 images formed by lenses and mirrors can either be described as real or as virtual.    which row describes real and virtual images of a point object?     real images virtual images  a   formed where light rays  meet an image in a plane mirror is an  example of a virtual image  b   formed where light rays  meet can be projected onto a screen    c   formed from where light rays  appear to diverge  an image in a plane mirror is an  example of a virtual image  d   formed from where light rays  appear to diverge  can be projected onto a screen       23 the diagram shows the air molecules in part of a sound wave at a particular moment in time.    x     which statement is not correct?  a earlier, there was compression at x.  b later, there will be a rarefaction at x.  c this part of the wave is travelling horizontally across the page.  d this part of the wave is travelling towards the top of the page.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18  24 the diagram shows the ranges of human hearing and of ultrasound waves.    01 01 2 \u00d7 1012 \u00d7 104102103104105106range of human hearingultrasound     to which characteristic of sound waves do the numbers on the diagram refer?  a amplitude in cm  b frequency in hz  c speed in metres  / second  d wavelength in metres     25 a permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.    sn pqpermanent magnetsoft iron bar     what are the polarities of end p and of end q?     end p end q  a n n  b n s  c s n  d s s     26 which method is used to demagnetise a magnet?  a cool it in a freezer  b drop it into a beaker of water  c place it inside a coil carrying a direct current  d strike it with a hammer     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18 [turn over  27 two power supplies are connected in separate circuits. both power supplies provide the same  magnitude current.    power supply p has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5  v and power supply q has an e.m.f. of  3.0  v.    which statements are correct?    1 source q supplies twice the charge per unit time.  2 source q supplies twice the energy per unit charge.  3 source q supplies twice the energy per unit time.    a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only     28 a student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.    which calculation gives the resistance of the device?  a current  +  potential difference  b current  \u00f7  potential difference  c potential difference  \u00f7  current  d potential difference  \u00d7  current     29 an electricity meter records that 200  mj of electrical energy are drawn from the 240  v mains  supply in a 24 hour period.    what is the average rate of electrical charge passing through the meter?  a 9.6  c / h b 580  c / h c 35  kc  / h d 0.83  mc  / h     30 a 3.0  \u03c9 resistor is connected in parallel with a 4.0  \u03c9 resistor.    4.0 \u03c93.0 \u03c9     what is the resistance of this combination?  a 0.14  \u03c9 b 0.58  \u03c9 c 1.7  \u03c9 d 7.0  \u03c9     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18  31 a student sets up this circuit.        what is the purpose of the circuit?  a to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required  b to amplify the sound of a voice  c to light a lamp in the dark  d to sound a bell when the temperature rises     32 the diagram shows two voltmeters p and q connected to a potential divider.    xv vvoltmeter p voltmeter q     the sliding connection at point x is moved towards the top of the diagram.    what happens to the reading on p and to the reading on q?     reading on p reading on q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18 [turn over  33 the diagram shows a logic circuit with inputs x and y.    qx y     the output is q.    which truth table is correct?     a    b   x y q  x y q  0 0 0  0 0 1  0 1 1  0 1 0  1 0 1  1 0 0  1 1 0  1 1 1   c    d   x y q  x y q  0 0 1  0 0 0  0 1 1  0 1 0  1 0 1  1 0 0  1 1 1  1 1 0     34 a wire connected to a resistor is moved in a magnetic field. a current is induced in the direction  shown.    in which direction is the wire moved?    nsda b cb rwire induced current     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18  35 the diagram shows a transformer.    primary coil secondary coil  core     which materials are the most suitable for the core and for the coils?     core material coil material  a copper copper  b copper iron  c iron copper  d iron iron      36 a solenoid is connected to a battery.    solenoidaxis of solenoid     which statement about the magnetic field at the centre of the solenoid is correct?  a the magnetic field along the axis is zero.  b the direction of the magnetic field is at an angle of 45 \u00b0 to the axis.  c the direction of the magnetic field is parallel to the axis.  d the direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the axis.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18 [turn over  37 in the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.    central massorbitingparticle     what is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?     central mass orbiting particles  a neutron \u03b1-particles  b neutron electrons  c nucleus \u03b1-particles  d nucleus electrons     38 the radiation from a radioactive source passes between two metal plates, and is deflected as  shown in the diagram. between the plates there is a magnetic field directed into the plane of the paper, as indicated by the crosses.    \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7 \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7   \u00d7    only one type of radiation is present.    which situation is possible?  a the source emits alpha particles and there is an upwards electric field between the plates.  b the source emits alpha particles and there is no electric field between the plates.  c the source emits beta particles and there is an upwards electric field between the plates.  d the source emits gamma radiation and there is a downwards electric field between the  plates.    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/m/j/18  39 the nucleus of an isotope of nitrogen (n) absorbs a neutron. it then decays into an isotope of  carbon (c) and emits x.    n1 0  +  n14 7  \u2192  c14 6  +  x    what is x?  a \u03b1-particle  b \u03b2-particle  c \u03b3-radiation  d proton    40 the graph shows how the count rate registered by a counter near to a sample of a radioactive  isotope changes over a period of a few days. the background count rate is 5 counts per minute.    50 40302010 0count rate counts  / minute time  / days012345678     what is the half-life of the isotope?  a 2.0 days b 2.5 days c 3.0 days d 4.0 days      "
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "*1535064344* this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (lk/cgw) 150265/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/31 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 model trains move along a track passing through two model stations.  students analyse the motion  of a train. they start a digital timer as the train starts to move. they record the time that it enters  station a and the time it enters station b.  fig. 1.1 shows the time on entering station a and the time on entering station b. time entering station a time entering station bhour min sec hour min sec fig. 1.1  (a) calculate the time taken from the train entering station a to the train entering station b.   state your answer in seconds.  time taken =  ...  s [1]  (b) a faster train takes 54  s to travel from station a to station b. the distance between the stations  is 120  m.   calculate the average speed of this train.  average speed =  ..  m / s [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) fig. 1.2 shows the speed-time graph for a train travelling on a different part of the track. 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 time  / sspeed m / s 14.0 fig. 1.2  determine the total distance travelled by the train on this part of the track.  distance =  ..  m [4]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 a 250  cm3 beaker containing some liquid is shown in fig. 2.1.  unknown volume of liquidbeaker fig. 2.1  (a) (i) a student has a measuring cylinder and a balance.    describe an experiment to determine the density of the liquid.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [5]   (ii) suggest the unit of density used by the student.  ... [1]  (b) fig. 2.2 shows a block of polythene. polythene fig. 2.2   (i) polythene floats in water. explain why polythene floats.  ... [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) the weight of the polythene block is 0.84  n.    calculate the mass of the block.  mass =  .  kg [3]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 (a) fig. 3.1 shows the vertical forces on a rocket. weight 43.0  nair resistance 2.4  nthrust 74.2  n fig. 3.1   calculate the resultant force on the rocket.  resultant force =  ...  n  direction =  ... [3]  (b) fig. 3.2 shows the speed and direction of motion of an object at a point in time. 150.0  m / s object fig. 3.2   the resultant force on the object is zero for 10 seconds.   deduce the speed and direction of motion after 5 seconds. indicate the speed and direction  of the object by drawing a labelled  arrow next to the object in fig. 3.3. fig. 3.3  [1]  [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 (a) fig. 4.1 shows a smoke cell. the cell contains smoke particles and air molecules. it is lit from  the side. a student views the motion of smoke particles in the cell by using a microscope. lightsmoke cellmicroscope air molecules and smoke particles fig. 4.1   describe and explain what the student sees when viewing the smoke particles through the  microscope.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  (b) drops of water on a warm surface disappear after a short time. state the term used to  describe this process. explain the process, using your ideas about molecules. name of process   ... explanation  ...  ...  ...  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 fig. 5.1 shows a geothermal power station. it generates electricity. hot water rises to the surfacecold water pumped downgenerating station fig. 5.1  (a) in a geothermal power station, the process of generating electricity includes seven stages.  four of the stages are shown below.   p steam turns a turbine   q hot underground rocks heat the cold water   r the turbine spins a generator   s hot water rises to the surface   the flow chart in fig.  5.2 shows the seven stages, but it is incomplete. complete the flow  chart by adding the letters p, q, r and s in the correct sequence. cold water is pumped down hot water produces steam electricity is generated fig. 5.2  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) the cost of electrical energy obtained from a geothermal power station is similar to the cost of  electrical energy obtained from wind turbines.   describe one advantage and one disadvantage of using a geothermal power station to  generate electricity compared with using wind turbines. advantage  .  ... disadvantage    ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 a student constructs a device for absorbing thermal energy from the sun. fig.  6.1 shows the  device. thermometerthermometer tank a tank bcold water white plastic pipe warm watersun fig. 6.1  the student places the white plastic pipe in sunlight. the cold water flows slowly from tank a to  tank b. energy from the sun heats the water in the pipe.  fig. 6.2 shows the temperatures in tank a and tank b. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c thermometer showing temperature in tank a. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c thermometer showing temperature in tank b. fig. 6.2  (a) determine the rise in temperature of the water.  temperature rise =    \u00b0 c [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) the student wants to increase the thermal energy absorbed by the water in the pipe. suggest  three improvements he can make to increase the thermal energy absorbed. 1    ... 2    ...   3    ...  [3]  (c) describe how the thermal energy is transferred from the sun to the water inside the pipe.  ...  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 the spectrum of white light is made up of seven colours.  (a) fig. 7.1 shows a partially-completed spectrum. two labels are missing. violet indigo green orange red fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, write the name of the missing colour in each blank space.  [2]   (ii) on fig. 7.1, indicate the direction of increasing  wavelength for the spectrum. draw an  arrow in the box below the spectrum of colours.  [1]  (b) a ray of red light strikes one face of a triangular glass prism as shown in fig. 7.2. glass prismray of red light fig. 7.2   (i) on fig.  7.2, draw the path of the ray as it travels through the glass prism and enters   the air.  [2]   (ii) state the term used to describe what happens to the ray of red light as it enters and  leaves the prism.  ... [1]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8 this question is about measuring the speed of sound in air.  a student stands in front of a large wall. she hits a drum and hears an echo. fig. 8.1 shows the  position of the student and the wall. studentwall fig. 8.1  (a) (i) state the name of a piece of equipment for measuring the distance from the student to  the wall.  ... [1]   (ii) explain how sound forms an echo.  ...  ... [1]  (b) the student hits her drum repeatedly once per second. she walks away from the wall and  listens for the echo. when the student is 170  m from the wall she hears the echo from one  beat of the drum at the same time as the next beat of the drum.   use this information to determine the speed of sound. state the unit.  speed =  ..  [4]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 fig. 9.1 shows a partially-labelled diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum. gamma ray ultraviolet visible infra-red radioa b fig. 9.1   (a) (i) on fig. 9.1, add the names of the missing radiations at a and at b. [2]   (ii) indicate the radiation that has the lowest frequency. on fig. 9.1, draw a ring around the  radiation.  [1]  (b) state two safety precautions when handling sources that emit gamma radiation. 1   2    [2]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 10 fig. 10.1 shows a circuit for determining the resistance of a component. a v fig. 10.1  (a) on fig. 10.1, label the fixed resistor, by writing the letter r.  [1]  (b) two components in fig. 10.1 measure electrical quantities.   identify the quantity that each component measures.   write each quantity and the unit of each quantity in the correct place in table 10.1. component quantity unit a v table 10.1  [4]  (c) a student uses the circuit in fig.  10.1 to determine the resistance of wires made from the  same material.    state how the resistance of a wire is related to its length and its diameter. length    ... diameter    ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 11 fig. 11.1 shows a vertical conductor passing through a horizontal piece of card. cardconductor fig. 11.1  (a) (i) on fig.  11.1, draw a cell and a switch in series with the conductor to form a complete  circuit.    use the correct circuit symbols.  [2]   (ii) a student sprinkles iron filings onto the card and closes the switch. there is a current in  the conductor. describe the pattern of the magnetic field seen.  ...  ... [2]   (iii) the student reverses the direction of the current in the conductor. state the effect, if any,  on the pattern he sees.  ... [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) describe an experiment to show that a force acts on a current-carrying conductor in a  magnetic field. show how to arrange the equipment. include a diagram in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 9]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 12 radioactive decay may include the emission of:     \u03b1-radiation \t\t\t\t\u03b2 -radiation \t\t\t\t\u03b3 -radiation  (a) (i) from the list, state the type of radiation which has the greatest  ionising effect.  ... [1]   (ii) from the list, state the type of radiation which has the lowest  penetrating ability.  ... [1]  (b) in a factory, rollers press aluminium metal to make thin foil sheets. an automatic system for  controlling the thickness of the foil uses  a radioactive source. the automatic system changes  the gap between the top and bottom roller. fig. 12.1 shows the equipment. rollersradioactive source radiation detectorradiationthin aluminium foil roller controller counter fig. 12.1   (i) use your ideas about the properties of radiation to suggest and explain the type of  radiation used. type of radiation  . explanation    ...  ...  ...  [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018   (ii) the aluminium foil passing the radiation detector is too thin. describe how this fault  affects the reading on the counter.   ... [1]   (iii) suggest how the fault in (b)(ii)  is corrected. state what happens to the rollers.  ... [1]   (iv) the source used is strontium-90. a nucleus of strontium-90 can be described as 90 38 sr.  state the number of protons in a nucleus of strontium-90.  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "20": "20 0625/31/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "*4631482877* this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (lk/cgw) 150266/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a car. 25 20speed m / s 15 10 5 0 0 20 10 30 40 60 50 70 time  / s80 100 90x y z w fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, the labels w, x, y and z show the points when the car\u2019s motion changed.   on fig. 1.2, draw a line from each section of the graph to the correct description of the motion. section of graph from w to x from x to y from y to zdescription of the motion accelerating decelerating stationary constant speed     fig. 1.2  [3]  (b) calculate the distance that the car travels between 60  s and 100  s.  distance travelled =  ..  m [3]  (c) fig. 1.1 shows that the car\u2019s acceleration is greater than its deceleration.   explain how the graph shows this.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a wooden raft. the raft is made from 8 logs.  the logs are all of the same type of wood. log of wood fig. 2.1  (a)  the average mass of each log is 65.0  kg.   calculate the total weight of the raft.  total weight of the raft =  ... n [3]  (b) (i) the mass of one of the logs is 66.0  kg. it is 3.0  m long and has a cross sectional area of  0.040  m2.    calculate the density of the wood in the log.  density =  ...  kg / m3 [3]   (ii) explain why the log in (b)(i)  floats on water.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a man uses a metal bar to remove an iron nail from a piece of wood, as shown in fig. 3.1. nail wood pivot150  n 0.50  m fig. 3.1  (a) (i) the man applies a force of 150  n at a distance of 0.50  m from the pivot.    calculate the moment of this force about the pivot. include a unit.  moment =  ... [4]   (ii) the force applied by the man produces a turning effect (moment) about the pivot.    describe another example of using the turning effect of a force.  ...  ... [1]  (b) the man tries to use the metal bar to remove another nail from the piece of wood. he applies  the same force of 150  n at a distance of 0.50  m from the pivot.   the turning effect produced is not enough to remove this nail from the piece of wood.   describe how the man can increase the turning effect without increasing the force.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 a bunsen burner heats a beaker of water, as shown in fig. 4.1. standthermometer beaker water bunsen burner fig. 4.1  (a) (i) fig. 4.2 shows the thermometer used in fig. 4.1.    state the temperature shown on the thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 4.2  temperature =    \u00b0 c [1]   (ii) the thermometer shown in fig.  4.2 uses a physical property that changes with  temperature.    indicate the measurable property that changes with temperature. tick one box.     expansion of glass     expansion of liquid     colour of liquid     colour of glass  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) thermal energy (heat) transfers through the bottom of the beaker to the water.   state the name given to this process.  ... [1]  (c) thermal energy transfers throughout the water in the beaker.   describe and explain how this happens.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 5 fig. 5.1 represents an object positioned on the principal axis of a thin lens. f fobjectprincipal axis fig. 5.1  each small square of the grid represents 0.5  cm. each principal focus of the lens is labelled f.  (a) use the grid to determine the focal length of the lens.  focal length =  . cm [1]  (b) (i) on fig. 5.1, draw a ray from the top of the object that passes through a principal focus,  then through the lens and beyond it.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 5.1, draw a second ray from the top of the object that passes through the centre  of the lens. continue the path of this ray to the edge of the grid.  [1]   (iii) on fig. 5.1, draw an arrow to show the position and nature of the image produced by the  lens.  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 nuclear fission is used in nuclear power stations to release thermal energy.  (a) describe how the thermal energy is used to generate electricity.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) describe two environmental problems that are due to using nuclear power stations. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 shows some parts of the electromagnetic spectrum. radio wavesinfra-red wavesvisible lightultraviolet wavesx-rays \u03b3-rays fig. 7.1  (a) (i) in fig. 7.1, one part of the electromagnetic spectrum is not labelled.    state the name of this part.  ... [1]   (ii) the speed of visible light waves in a vacuum is 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s.    suggest a value for the speed of infra-red waves in a vacuum.  speed =  ..  m / s [1]   (iii) some parts of the electromagnetic spectrum have a wavelength shorter than that of  visible light.    state one example.  ... [1]  (b) (i) x-rays and \u03b3-rays are used in hospitals.    describe one medical use for x-rays and one use for \u03b3-rays. x-rays    ... \u03b3-rays  .  ... [2]   (ii) explain why \u03b3-rays are dangerous to living things.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 8 (a) complete the sentences about sound. use words from the box above each sentence.   (i) glows     reflects     refracts     vibrates    sound is produced when a source ..  . [1]   (ii) electromagnetic     longitudinal     transverse    sound waves are .. waves.  [1]   (iii) metal     vacuum     liquid    sound waves cannot travel through a ..  . [1]  (b) humans, elephants, mice and dolphins have different hearing ranges. fig.  8.1 shows the  hearing range for each type of animal. 010100 humans elephants mice dolphins1000frequency  / hz 10 000100  0001000  000 fig. 8.1   (i) state the lowest frequency of sound that can be heard by mice.    hz [1]   (ii) state the highest frequency of sound that can be heard by elephants.    hz [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (iii) explain how the chart shows that elephants can hear some sounds that humans cannot   hear.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (iv) state the term given to the high frequencies that dolphins can hear but humans cannot    hear.  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit. va0.50  a 12.0  \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9 fig. 9.1   (i) the current in the wires of the circuit is a flow of particles.    indicate the name of these particles. tick one box.     electrons     atoms     protons  [1]   (ii) calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.  resistance =  ..  \u03c9 [1]   (iii) calculate the potential difference (p.d.) reading that would be shown on the voltmeter.  potential difference (p.d.) =  ..  v [3]  (b) the circuit is changed.   the two resistors are connected in parallel.   explain what happens, if anything, to the current reading on the ammeter.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a balloon hanging from an insulating thread. insulating thread balloon fig. 10.1   (i) a student gives the balloon a positive charge.    which statement explains why the balloon becomes positively charged? tick one box.     the balloon gains electrons     the balloon loses electrons     the balloon gains protons     the balloon loses protons  [1]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018   (ii) the student brings a charged rod close to the balloon as shown in fig. 10.2. charged rod++ ++ + + +++++++ fig. 10.2    state the type of charge on the rod.    ..    explain your answer.  ...  ...  [2]  (b) electrical charges can move easily through some materials.   draw a circle around each material that charges can move through easily.  copper     plastic     rubber     silver     wood  [1]  [total: 4]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 11 fig. 11.1 represents a transformer. qp a.c. input primary coil fig. 11.1  (a) (i) state the name of the part of the transformer labelled q in fig. 11.1.  ... [1]   (ii) in fig. 11.1, part p is made from a metal. 1. state the metal used to make part p.  .. 2. state the term given to part p.    [2]   (iii) there is an alternating current (a.c.) in the primary coil.    describe what this current produces in part p.  ...  ... [2]   (iv) complete the sentence using terms from the box. more     fewer     step-up     step-down    when there are . turns in the primary coil than in q, the device is called a    . transformer.  [1]  (b) the high-voltage transmission of electricity uses transformers.   describe two advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages rather than at low  voltages. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 (a) the nuclide notation a z x describes the nucleus of one type of atom.   draw a line from each symbol to the correct description for that symbol. symbol description a z xnumber of neutrons element symbol proton number nucleon number number of atoms  [3]  (b) (i) one radioactive isotope has a half-life of 6.0  years.    a sample of this isotope has a mass of 12  mg.    calculate the mass of this isotope that remains in the sample after 18  years.  mass remaining =    mg [3]   (ii) the sample decays by emitting a \u03b2-particle.    describe the nature of a \u03b2-particle.  ...  ... [2]   (iii) describe how the nucleus of the isotope changes due to the emission of a \u03b2-particle.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 9]"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "*5561498289* this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (lk/cgw) 150267/3 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/33 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a student watches a car race around a track. he uses a stopwatch to measure the time for the car  to make one lap of the track.  (a) the student forgets to reset the stopwatch at the start of the race. fig. 1.1 shows the time on  the stopwatch at the start and the time after going around the track once.     time at start   time after going around the track once 01:22 .min s s1 100 02:33 .min s s1 100 fig. 1.1   calculate the time the car takes to go around the track once, in seconds.  time =  ...  s [2]  (b) the length of the track is 4.0  km. the car goes around the track 20 times. the car takes  26 minutes and 40 seconds to complete the 20 laps.   calculate the average speed of the car in m  / s.  average speed =  ..  m / s [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) fig. 1.2 shows a speed-time graph for the car during part of the race. 020.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 time  / s30.0 35.0 040.0speed m / s 60.080.0 pqrstv fig. 1.2   (i) state the section of the graph that shows the greatest acceleration.  ...    explain your answer.  ...  [2]   (ii) calculate the distance travelled by the car during the first 2.5 seconds.  distance =  ..  m [3]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 a student is using some 50  g masses.  (a) calculate the weight of one 50  g mass.  weight of 50  g mass =  ..  n [3]  (b) the student uses the 50  g masses as loads to stretch a spring.   fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus the student uses to obtain readings for a load-extension graph. 50 g masses 50 g mass hangerspring stand rulepin fig. 2.1 (not to scale)   describe how the student could use the apparatus and ensure that the readings are  accurate.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 3 (a) the mass of a small steel ball is 120  g. the volume of the ball is 16.0  cm3.   (i) calculate the density of the steel ball.  density =  ...  g / cm3 [3]   (ii) the ball falls to the ground from rest. at a time of 0.2  s after it started to fall, its acceleration  is 10  m / s2.    state the acceleration of the ball at a time of 0.1  s after it started to fall.  ... [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows the vertical forces that act on a large plastic ball as it is falling. 0.3 n 1.2 nlarge plastic ball fig. 3.1  (not to scale)   (i) state the name given to each of the forces shown in fig. 3.1. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate the size of the resultant force on the ball.  resultant force =  ..  n [1]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a lamp is attached to a wall, as shown in fig. 4.1. 90.0  cm pivotlamp 25.0  nwall fig. 4.1  calculate the moment of the lamp about the pivot. give the unit.  moment =  ..  [4]  [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a metal can containing air. the can is sealed with a lid. canlid fig. 5.1  the air in the can exerts a pressure of 20  000 n / m2 on the lid. the area of the can lid is 0.09  m2.  calculate the force on the lid due to the air in the can.  force =  ..  n [3]  (b) the air in the can becomes warmer.   state and explain what happens to the pressure of the air in the can. use your ideas about  gas molecules.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 a student investigates the thermal energy lost from two metal cans, x and y. the cans are identical  apart from their outside colour.  the student pours the same volume of hot water into each can and seals each can. the student  records the temperature of the water in each can at regular time intervals for a period of 35  minutes.  the equipment is shown in fig. 6.1. hot water hot water can x can ythermometer thermometer fig. 6.1  fig. 6.2 is a graph of the results from the investigation. 5.0 10.0 0020406080 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 time  / minutestemperature  / \u00b0c 35.0can x can y fig. 6.2",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (a) for can x, use fig. 6.2 to determine the drop in temperature of the water   (i) in the first five minutes  ... [1]   (ii) in the last five minutes.  ... [1]  (b) explain why the water cools at a greater rate during the first five minutes of the experiment,  compared with the last five minutes.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) the outside of one can is dull black and the outside of the other is shiny white.   state the colour of can y.   ..   explain your answer.  ...  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 fig. 7.1 shows an incomplete diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum. 1mwavelength  / m 10\u2212110\u2212210\u2212310\u2212410\u2212510\u2212610\u2212710\u2212810\u2212910\u22121010\u221212 \u03b3-rays x-rays infra-red ultraviolet microwaves b a10\u22121310\u221211 fig. 7.1  (a) (i) in fig. 7.1, section  a and section b of the electromagnetic spectrum are not labelled.    state the names of these parts. a   b    [2]   (ii) an electromagnetic wave has a wavelength of 1.0 \u00d7 10\u20139 m. use fig. 7.1 to identify the  type of electromagnetic wave.  ... [1]  (b) all electromagnetic waves travel at the same speed in a vacuum.   state one other property that is the same for all electromagnetic waves.  ... [1]  (c) for each purpose, state one type of electromagnetic radiation that can be used.   (i) remote controllers for televisions  ... [1]   (ii) killing bacterial cells  ... [1]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8  (a) the boxes contain words about waves.   complete each sentence. choose a term from each box.   (i) an electromagnetic     a longitudinal     a transverse    sound travels as .. wave.  [1]   (ii) amplitude     pitch     speed     wavelength    a loud sound has a large ..  . [1]   (iii) amplitude     pitch     speed     wavelength    a student listens to two sounds. the sound with the higher frequency has a higher     ..  . [1]  (b) explain what is meant by the term ultrasound .  ...  ... [2]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 a student magnetises a steel rod by using a permanent magnet.  (a) describe a method that the student could use. you may draw a diagram to help you.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) explain how the student could test that the steel rod has been magnetised.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) magnets can be made from soft iron or from steel.   state one difference between the magnetic properties of soft iron and steel.  ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 5]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows an electrical circuit. v12 v power supply a x r fig. 10.1   (i) state the name for the component labelled x and state its function in this circuit. name for component  . function  ..  ... [2]   (ii) describe how the circuit shown in fig. 10.1 could be used to find the resistance of the  fixed resistor r.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) an electrical heater has a resistance of 21.8  \u03c9 when connected to a 240  v mains supply.    (i) calculate the current in the heater.  current =  ...  a [3]   (ii) suggest a rating for the fuse to be fitted to the mains plug for the heater.  fuse rating =  ...  a [1]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 11 fig. 11.1 shows a coil (solenoid) wrapped around a plastic tube. there is a current in the coil.  the arrows show the direction of the current in the coil. plastic tube fig. 11.1  (a) on fig. 11.1, draw the pattern of the magnetic field lines around the coil.    add arrows to show the direction of the magnetic field.  [3]  (b) a long soft iron bar is placed inside the plastic tube. there is a current in the coil. this forms a  device. state the name of the device.  ... [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) fig. 11.2 shows a relay operated by switch s.  pivot soft iron armature soft iron core scoil of wireinsulatorspringy metal bacontactsm fig. 11.2   using fig. 11.2, describe how closing the switch, s, causes the electric motor to operate.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... ...   [4]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 (a) fig. 12.1 shows a diagram to represent a helium atom, and an incomplete key. proton.. .. ..key fig. 12.1   complete the key in fig. 12.1. state the name of each particle.  [2]  (b) the table in fig. 12.2 compares two isotopes of helium. 3 2he5 2he number of protons number of neutrons  fig. 12.2   for each isotope, write the number of protons and the number of neutrons in the correct  places in the table.  [2]  (c) the nucleus of the helium atom in (a) is the same as an \u03b1-particle.    (i) describe the penetrating ability of \u03b1-particles.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) explain why it is dangerous to swallow a source that emits \u03b1-particles.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "*5498152391* this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (ce/sw) 150767/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/41 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a vehicle accelerating from rest. 0051015202530 20 40 60 80 time  / sspeed m / s 100 120 140 160 fig. 1.1  (a) calculate the acceleration of the vehicle at time = 30  s.  acceleration =  ... [2]  (b) without further calculation, state how the acceleration at time = 100  s compares to the  acceleration at time = 10  s. suggest, in terms of force, a reason why any change has taken  place.  ...  ...  ... [3]  (c) determine the distance travelled by the vehicle between time = 120  s and time = 160  s.  distance =  ... [3]    [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a box. box fig. 2.1  the electric motor that drives the lifting mechanism is powered by batteries.  (a) state the form of the energy stored in the batteries.  ... [1]  (b) the lifting mechanism raises a box of mass 32  kg through a vertical distance of 2.5  m in 5.4  s.   (i) calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the box.  gravitational potential energy =  ... [2]   (ii) the efficiency of the lifting mechanism is 0.65 (65%).    calculate the input power to the lifting mechanism.  input power =  ... [3]  (c) the batteries are recharged from a mains voltage supply that is generated in an oil-fired  power station.   by comparison with a wind farm, state one advantage and one disadvantage of running a  power station using oil. advantage  .  ... disadvantage    ... [2] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a rectangular container has a base of dimensions 0.12  m \u00d7 0.16 m. the container is filled with a  liquid. the mass of the liquid in the container is 4.8  kg.  (a) calculate   (i) the weight of liquid in the container,  weight =  ... [1]   (ii) the pressure due to the liquid on the base of the container.  pressure =  ... [2]  (b) explain why the total pressure on the base of the container is greater than the value calculated  in (a)(ii) .  ...  ... [1]  (c) the depth of liquid in the container is 0.32  m.   calculate the density of the liquid.  density =  ... [2] [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 (a) describe the movement of the molecules in   (i) a solid,  ...  ... [1]   (ii) a gas.  ...  ... [2]  (b) a closed box contains gas molecules.   explain, in terms of momentum, how the molecules exert a pressure on the walls of the box.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 (a) a ray of light in air is incident on a glass block. the light changes direction.   state   (i) the name of this effect,  ... [1]   (ii) the cause of this effect.  ... [1]  (b) fig. 5.1, drawn to full scale, shows a thin converging lens of focal length 3.5  cm. 1.0 cm1.0 cmo lens fig. 5.1   (i) on fig. 5.1, mark each of the two principal focuses and label each with the letter f.  [1]   (ii) an object o of height 4.4  cm is placed a distance of 7.5  cm from the lens.    on fig. 5.1, draw rays from the tip of the object o to locate the image. draw and label  the image.  [3]   (iii) determine the height of the image.  height of the image =  ... [1]   (iv) state and explain whether the image is real or virtual.  ...  ... [1] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts approaching a gap in a barrier. wavefront barrier fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, draw three  wavefronts to the right of the barrier.  [2]   (ii) fig. 6.2 shows the gap in the barrier increased to five times the gap in fig. 6.1. wavefront barrier fig. 6.2    on fig. 6.2, draw three  wavefronts to the right of the barrier.  [2] ",
            "8": "8 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) describe, with a labelled diagram, an experiment using water waves that shows the reflection  of wavefronts that occur at a straight barrier.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4] [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "10": "10 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 (a) state, in terms of their structure, why metals are good conductors of electricity.  ...  ... [1]  (b) a cylindrical metal wire w1, of length l and cross-sectional area a, has a resistance of 16  \u03c9.   a second cylindrical wire w2 having length l 2 and cross-sectional area 2  a, is made from the  same metal.   determine   (i) the resistance of w2,  resistance of w2 =  ... [2]   (ii) the effective resistance of w1 and w2 when connected in parallel.  resistance of parallel pair =  ... [2]  (c) the parallel pair of resistors in (b)(ii)  is connected to a battery that is made from three cells in  series, each of electromotive force (e.m.f.) e. there is a current in each resistor.   (i) state the e.m.f. of the battery.  ... [1]   (ii) the current in the battery is ib, the current in w1 is i1 and the current in w2 is i2.    place a tick ( 3) in one box to indicate how these three currents are related.     i1 > i2 > ib     i1 > ib > i2     i2 > i1 > ib     i2 > ib > i1     ib > i1 > i2     ib > i2 > i1     i1 = i2 = ib  [1] [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8 in a laboratory at normal room temperature, 200  g of water is poured into a beaker. a thermometer  placed in the water has a reading of 22  \u00b0c.  small pieces of ice at 0  \u00b0c are added to the water one by one. the mixture is stirred after each  addition until the ice has melted. this process is continued until the temperature recorded by the  thermometer is 0  \u00b0c.  the total mass of ice added to the water is found to be 60  g.  (a) the specific heat capacity of water is 4.2  j/(g \u00b0c).   calculate the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker.  thermal energy =  ... [2]  (b) assume that all the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker is transferred to  the ice.   calculate the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.  specific latent heat of fusion of ice =  ... [2]  (c) suggest a reason for any inaccuracy in the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice  calculated in (b). assume the temperature readings and the values for the mass of the water  and the mass of the ice are accurate.  ...  ... [1] [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 (a) a student wants to demagnetise a permanent bar magnet. she suggests these steps:   1. place the magnet in a long coil.   2. switch on a large alternating current in the coil.   3. switch off the current.   4. remove the bar from the coil.   state and explain whether the steps will always be able to demagnetise the magnet.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) (i) fig. 9.1 shows a coil supplied with current using a split-ring commutator. nscoil magnet split-ring carbon brush battery fig. 9.1    state and explain any motion of the coil.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) the coil in fig. 9.1 consists of three turns of wire. the magnetic field strength of the  magnet is m. with a current of 2.0  a in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect t.    the first row of table 9.1 shows this data. table 9.1 number of turns current in the coil  / amagnetic field  strengthturning effect 3 2.0 m t 3 8.0 m 6 2.0 m 3 2.0m 2    complete table 9.1 to give the turning effect for the changes made to the arrangement  shown in fig. 9.1. choose your answers from the box. t 8 t 4 t 2 t 2 t 4 t 8 t  [3] [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 10 (a) explain why the voltage of the supply to the primary coil of a transformer must be alternating.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]     (b) fig. 10.1 shows a transformer. 240  v mains8000 turnsa b fig. 10.1   there are 8000 turns in the primary coil of the transformer. the primary coil is connected to a  240 v mains supply. a 6.0  v lamp connected to the secondary coil operates at full brightness.    (i) calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil,  number of turns =  ... [2]   (ii) the current in the lamp is 2.0  a. the transformer operates with 100% efficiency.    calculate the current in the primary circuit.  current =  ... [2]   (iii) the primary circuit contains a 2  a fuse.    calculate the maximum number of lamps, identical to the lamp in (ii), that can be  connected in parallel in the secondary circuit without blowing the fuse.  number of lamps =  ... [1] [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 11 radon-222 is radioactive. it can be represented as 222 86 rn.  (a) for a neutral atom of radon-222, state   1. the number of protons,   ...   2. the number of neutrons,   ...   3. the number of electrons.   ...  [2]  (b) a radon-222 nucleus decays by \u03b1-particle emission to a polonium (po) nucleus.   complete the equation for the decay of radon-222.    222 86 rn   [2]  (c) radon-222 has a half-life of 3.8 days.   at a certain time, a sample contains 6.4 \u00d7 106 radon nuclei.   calculate the number of \u03b1-particles emitted by the radon nuclei in the following 7.6 days.  number =  ... [3] [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "*0939772161* this document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (ce/sw) 150768/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 (a) fig. 1.1 shows the axes of a distance-time graph for an object moving in a straight line.  0020406080 10 8 6 4 2 time  / sdistance  / m fig. 1.1   (i) 1.  on fig. 1.1, draw between time = 0 and time = 10  s, the graph for an object moving  with a constant speed of 5.0  m / s. start your graph at distance = 0  m.    2. state the property of the graph that represents speed.   [2]   (ii) between time = 10  s and time = 20  s the object accelerates. the speed at time = 20  s is        9.0 m / s.    calculate the average acceleration between time = 10  s and time = 20  s.  acceleration =  ... [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) fig. 1.2 shows the axes of a speed-time graph for a different object.  001020304050 40 time  / s80 100 20 60speed m / s fig. 1.2   (i) the object has an initial speed of 50  m / s and decelerates uniformly at 0.35  m / s2 for  100 s.    on fig. 1.2, draw the graph to represent the motion of the object.  [2]   (ii) calculate the distance travelled by the object from time = 0 to time = 100  s.  distance =  ... [3] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 fig. 2.1 shows a hollow metal cylinder containing air, floating in the sea. 1.2 m1.8 m bottomairsurface of sea seawater fig. 2.1  (a) the density of the metal used to make the cylinder is greater than the density of seawater.   explain why the cylinder floats.  ...  ... [1]  (b) the cylinder has a length of 1.8  m. it floats with 1.2  m submerged in the sea. the bottom of  the cylinder has an area of cross-section of 0.80  m2.   the density of seawater is 1020  kg / m3. calculate the force exerted on the bottom of the  cylinder due to the depth of the seawater.  force =  ... [4]  (c) deduce the weight of the cylinder. explain your answer.   weight = ... explanation  ...  ... [2] [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft on the deck of an aircraft carrier. fig. 3.1  the aircraft accelerates from rest along the deck. at take-off, the aircraft has a speed of 75  m / s.  the mass of the aircraft is 9500  kg.  (a) calculate the kinetic energy of the aircraft at take-off.  kinetic energy =  ... [3]  (b) on an aircraft carrier, a catapult provides an accelerating force on the aircraft. the catapult  provides a constant force for a distance of 150  m along the deck.   calculate the resultant force on the aircraft as it accelerates. assume that all of the kinetic  energy at take-off is from the work done on the aircraft by the catapult.  force =  ... [2] [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 (a) fig. 4.1 represents an atom. fig. 4.1   representing atoms by circles approximately the same size as in fig. 4.1, sketch   (i) on fig. 4.2, the arrangement of atoms in a crystalline solid,  [1]   (ii) on fig. 4.3, the arrangement of atoms in a gas.  [1]               solid  gas  fig. 4.2  fig. 4.3  (b) (i) describe the motion of the atoms in a solid.  ... [1]    (ii) a sculptor makes a statue from a block of crystalline rock using a cutting tool. explain  why he must apply a large force to the tool to remove a small piece of rock.  ...  ... [2]  (c) a helium-filled balloon in the room of a house suddenly bursts.   state and explain, in terms of atoms, what happens to the helium from the balloon after the  balloon has burst.  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 5 a student wants to investigate good and bad absorbers of thermal radiation. she has the apparatus  shown in fig. 5.1, a supply of cold water and a metre rule. small polished cansmall black-painted can2 thermometers electric heater fig. 5.1  explain how the student could use the apparatus she has available to carry out her investigation.  describe the results she would expect to obtain. draw a diagram of the set-up.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [4] [total: 4]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 (a) circle two of the following that apply to an ultrasound wave travelling in air.   frequency 3.5  hz   frequency 350  hz   frequency 35  000 hz   longitudinal   transverse    speed 1.5  m / s   speed 1.5 \u00d7 103 m / s   speed 1.5 \u00d7 106 m / s  [2]  (b) calculate the wavelength in a vacuum of x-rays of frequency 1.3 \u00d7 1017 hz.  wavelength =  ... [3]  (c) a dentist takes an x-ray photograph of a patient\u2019s teeth. explain why it is safe for the patient  to be close to the source of x-rays, but the dentist must stand away from the source.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (d) state, with a reason, why microwave ovens are designed only to work with the door closed.  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 9]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "10": "10 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light in water that is incident on a submerged, transparent plastic  block.  water plastic fig. 7.1   state what happens to the speed of light as it enters the plastic block. explain your answer.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) fig. 7.2 shows the two principal focuses f1 and f2 of a thin converging lens. 1.0 cmf1f2 1.0 cmo lens fig. 7.2   fig. 7.2 also shows an object o of height 1.2  cm placed close to the lens. two rays from the  tip of the object o are incident on the lens.",
            "11": "11 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (i) on fig. 7.2, continue the paths of these two rays for a further distance of at least 5  cm.  [2]   (ii) using your answer to (b)(i) , find and mark on fig. 7.2 the image i of object o and label  this image.  [2]   (iii) determine the height of image i.  height =  ... [1]   (iv) state and explain whether i is a real image or a virtual image.  ...  ... [1] [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 8 fig. 8.1 shows a circuit that contains a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 6.0  v, an ammeter, a  20 \u03c9 resistor and component x. a 20 \u03c96.0 v x fig. 8.1  (a) (i) state the name of component x.  ... [1]   (ii) the potential difference (p.d.) across the 20  \u03c9 resistor is measured with a voltmeter.    on fig. 8.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit.  [1]   (b) the p.d. across the 20  \u03c9 resistor is varied from zero to 6.0  v. for each value of p.d. a  corresponding current is measured.",
            "13": "13 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   on fig. 8.2, draw a line to indicate how the current measured by the ammeter depends on  the p.d. across the 20  \u03c9 resistor. 000.100.200.300.40 1.0 2.0 p.d.  / vcurrent  / a 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 fig. 8.2  [3]  (c) a second resistor is connected into the circuit in parallel with the 20  \u03c9 resistor.   (i) state how the combined resistance of the two resistors in parallel compares with the  resistance of each of the resistors on its own.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) the p.d. across the two parallel resistors is changed and the current in the battery for  each value of the p.d. is measured. a second line could be drawn on fig. 8.2 to indicate  how the current measured by the ammeter depends on the p.d. across the two resistors  in parallel.    state how the second line differs from the original line. you are not expected to draw this  second line.  ...  ... [1] [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a coil abcd with two turns. the coil is in a magnetic field.  n sb c ad fig. 9.1   when there is a current in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect.   (i) explain why there is a turning effect.  ...  ...  ... [1]   (ii) the value of the current is 3  a. place one tick in each column of the table to indicate how  the turning effect changes with the change described. turning effect number of turns on coil  increased to sixcurrent increased to 9  astrength of magnetic  field decreased by a  factor of 2 decreased by factor of 4 decreased by factor of 3 decreased by factor of 2 no change increased by factor of 2 increased by factor of 3 increased by factor of 4 [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) fig. 9.2 shows a magnet held just below a vertical coil connected to a galvanometer. n s fig. 9.2   the magnet is released.   (i) state any effect on the galvanometer.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) state any effect on the magnetic field produced by the coil.  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 10 (a) an uncharged conducting metal plate rests on insulating supports. fig. 10.1 shows the plate  and a positively charged insulating plastic sheet placed on top of the metal plate. plastic sheet metal plate insulating support insulating support fig. 10.1   (i) describe any flow of charge that takes place when the plastic sheet is placed onto the  metal plate.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) on fig. 10.1, draw how charges are now arranged within the metal plate.  [1]   (iii) state and explain if this arrangement of charge helps to keep the plastic sheet in place.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) fig. 10.2 shows two uncharged conducting spheres suspended on insulating threads. fig. 10.2   1.  the spheres are now both given positive charges. on fig. 10.2, draw a possible position  of each sphere and thread.   2. explain the positions you have drawn.  ...  ... [2] [total: 6]",
            "18": "18 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 11 (a) a radioactive nucleus of uranium-235 decays to a nucleus of thorium and emits an \u03b1-particle.   complete the equation. 235 92 u      ... ...   th  +  \u200a\u200a4 2 \u03b1  [2]  (b) a nucleus of uranium-235 undergoes nuclear fission in a reactor.   (i) state what is meant by nuclear fission .  ...  ...  ... [1]   (ii) suggest why a nuclear reactor is surrounded by thick concrete walls.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]    (iii) state one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage of using a  fission reactor to generate electrical energy in a power station. advantage  .  ... disadvantage  .  ... [2]  (c) the thorium produced by the decay in (a) is also radioactive and has a half-life of 26 hours.   at a certain time, a pure sample of this isotope initially contains 4.8 \u00d7 109 atoms.   calculate the number of atoms of this sample that decay in the following 52 hours.  number =  ... [3] [total: 10]",
            "19": "19 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/42/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (leg/sg) 152968/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *5718291804* physics  0625/43 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 there is no atmosphere on the moon.  a space probe is launched from the surface of the moon. fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of  the space probe.  5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 0 100 time  / s200 300speed m / s fig. 1.1  (a) determine the acceleration of the space probe at time = 0.  acceleration =  ... [3]  (b) between time = 0 and time = 150  s, the acceleration of the space probe changes.   (i) without calculation, state how the graph shows this.  ...  ... [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) during this time, the thrust exerted on the space probe by the motor remains constant.    state one possible reason why the acceleration changes in the way shown by fig. 1.1.  ...    ... [1]  (c) calculate the distance travelled by the space probe from time = 200  s to time = 300  s.  distance =  ... [3]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 a rifle fires a bullet of mass 0.020  kg vertically upwards through the air. as it leaves the rifle, the  speed of the bullet is 350  m / s.  (a) calculate   (i) the kinetic energy of the bullet as it leaves the rifle,  kinetic energy =  ... [3]   (ii) the maximum possible height that the bullet can reach.  maximum height =  ... [2]  (b) the actual height reached by the bullet is less than the value calculated in (a)(ii) .   (i) explain, in terms of the forces acting on the bullet, why this is so.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) as the bullet rises through the air, its kinetic energy decreases.    state what happens to this energy.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 3 on a particular day, the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa. a bubble of gas forms at a point  5.0 m below the surface of a lake. the density of water is 1000  kg / m3.  (a) determine   (i) the total pressure at a depth of 5.0  m in the water,  pressure =  ... [3]   (ii) the pressure of the gas in the bubble.  pressure =  ... [1]  (b) as the bubble rises to the surface, the mass of gas in the bubble stays constant. the  temperature of the water in the lake is the same throughout.   explain why the bubble rises to the surface and why its volume increases as it rises.   ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a beaker contains some water at room temperature. a student places a mercury-in-glass  thermometer in the water with the bulb of the thermometer just beneath the surface of the water.  fig. 4.1 shows the arrangement. waterthermometer fig. 4.1  the student uses an electric fan to blow air across the open top of the beaker. she notices that the  reading on the thermometer begins to decrease.   (a) explain, in terms of water molecules, why the temperature of the water at the surface begins  to decrease.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) the student places the thermometer near the bottom of the beaker. the electric fan continues  to blow air across the top of the beaker. after some time, the student observes that the  temperature of the water at the bottom of the beaker is decreasing.   state the name of the thermal transfer method causing this and explain what is happening in  the water.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) the thermometer used in this experiment has a small range and a large sensitivity.   (i) state what is meant by    1. range ,     [1]    2. sensitivity .     [1]   (ii) state and explain the effect on the range of the thermometer of using a smaller bulb that  contains less mercury.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 (a) a microscope that produces a very high magnification is used to observe the brownian motion  of smoke particles in air.   fig. 5.1(a) shows the apparatus used with the microscope. fig. 5.1(b) represents the view  through the microscope and shows one of the smoke particles being observed. lightmicroscope air molecules and smoke particlessmoke particle            fig. 5.1(a)                                                  fig. 5.1(b)   (i) on fig. 5.1(b), draw a possible path for the smoke particle.  [2]   (ii) describe how air molecules cause the smoke particle to follow the observed path.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]   (b) fig. 5.2 shows a volume of gas in a cylinder. gaspiston air at atmospheric pressure fig. 5.2   the piston in the cylinder is free to move. the piston moves to the left when the temperature  of the gas is decreased.   explain, in terms of the molecules of the gas, why this happens.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 6 sound is a longitudinal wave.  (a) sketch a representation of a longitudinal wave. on your sketch \u2022 indicate and label a distance to show the wavelength , \u2022 mark and label the centre of one compression, \u2022 mark and label the centre of one rarefaction.  [3]  (b) a longitudinal wave passes from one medium into another medium.  the speed of the wave is  slower in the second medium.   state what happens to   (i) the frequency of the wave,  ... [1]   (ii) the wavelength of the wave.  ... [1]  (c) state a typical value for the speed of sound in air.  ... [1]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 (a) a ray of light travelling in air strikes a glass block at an angle of 30\u00b0 to the normal. the light  slows down as it enters the glass block.   state and explain, in terms of wavefronts, what happens to the light.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) the speed of light in this block of glass is 1.9 \u00d7 108 m / s.   calculate the refractive index of the glass.  refractive index =  ... [2]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8 (a) a thin converging lens is used to produce an image i of object o.   fig. 8.1 shows o, i and the screen on which the image is produced. o principal axis i 1.0 cm 1.0 cmscreen fig. 8.1     (i) on fig. 8.1, draw a straight line to represent a ray from the tip of the arrowhead of o to  the tip of the arrowhead of i. draw a vertical dotted line to indicate the position of the  lens. this dotted line must extend above and below the principal axis.  [2]   (ii) draw a second ray from the tip of the object o to the tip of image i. this ray should pass  through a principle focus. label the principle focus, f.  [1]   (iii) determine the focal length of the lens.    focal length =  ... [1]   (iv) image i is further from the lens than object o is from the lens. image i is described as  enlarged and inverted.    state and explain one other characteristic of i.  ...  ... [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) fig. 8.2 shows a spherical fishbowl, full of water, by a window. a black curtain hangs behind  the fishbowl. black curtain bright sunlightwindow waterfishbowl fig. 8.2   when full of water, the fishbowl can act as a converging lens.   suggest one possible hazard of leaving the fishbowl next to the window in bright sunlight.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 9 fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that includes a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12  v.  a v 20 \u03c912 v fig. 9.1  the reading on the ammeter is 0.15  a.  (a) calculate the resistance of the circuit.  resistance =  ... [2]  (b) the variable resistor is adjusted so that its resistance decreases.   (i) state what happens to the reading on the ammeter.  ... [1]   (ii) state and explain what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) the battery is formed from cells of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5  v.   (i) explain, in terms of electrical energy, what is meant by an electromotive force  (e.m.f.)   of 1.5  v.  ...  ... [2]   (ii) state how many 1.5  v cells are connected in series to form the battery.  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 10 (a) a bar magnet is held with its n-pole just inside one end of a coil.   fig. 10.1 shows the coil connected to a galvanometer that has the zero mark in the centre of  the scale. l s n fig. 10.1   the magnet is pulled horizontally to the right at a constant speed through a large distance.     (i) state what happens to the galvanometer reading as time passes.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii)  as the magnet moves, an n-pole is produced at the left-hand end l of the coil.     explain why the pole at l is an n-pole.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) a transformer has np turns on the primary coil and ns turns on the secondary coil. the  transformer is used in a school laboratory as a 12  v alternating current (a.c.) supply. the  transformer is powered from the 240  v a.c. mains supply.     (i) determine the turns ratio np / ns of the transformer.  np / ns  =  ... [2]   (ii) the laboratory 12  v a.c. supply is rectified to produce a direct current (d.c.) supply.    underline the component that the rectification circuit must include. and gate          diode          not gate          potentiometer          thermistor  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 11 (a) state the type of radioactive emission that causes   (i) the proton number of a nuclide to increase by 1,  ... [1]   (ii) the nucleon number of a nuclide to decrease by 4,  ... [1]   (iii) no change in the proton number and no change in the nucleon number of a nuclide.  ... [1]  (b) the isotope radon-220 is radioactive and it decays by \u03b1-particle emission.   (i) fig. 11.1 shows a beam of \u03b1-particles entering the electric field between two charged  plates. electric field beam of \u03b1-particles+++++++++ \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013+charged plate charged plate fig. 11.1    on fig. 11.1, sketch the path that the beam of \u03b1-particles follows in the electric field.  [1]   (ii) the half-life of radon-220 is 56  s.    a sample of this isotope contains 7.2 \u00d7 106 atoms.    predict the number of \u03b1-particles that the radon-220 in the sample emits in the next  168 s.  number of \u03b1-particles emitted =  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/43/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "*6269455228* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (st/ct) 150765/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20  minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15  minutes on question  4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 in this experiment, you will determine the acceleration of free fall g using a pendulum. carry out  the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. dclamp bob         clamp one complete oscillation  fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  a pendulum has been set up for you as shown in fig. 1.1.   (a) adjust the length of the pendulum until the distance d measured to the centre of the bob is  50.0 cm.    displace the bob slightly and release it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one complete  oscillation of the pendulum.   (i) measure the time t for 10 complete oscillations.   t =  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t =  ..  [1]   (iii) calculate t 2.  t 2 =  ..  [2]   (iv) calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 20 t 2.  g =  ..  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) adjust the pendulum until the distance d measured to the centre of the bob is 100.0  cm.    (i) repeat the procedure in (a)(i) , (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) .    t =  ...    t =  ...    t 2 =  ... [1]   (ii)  calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 40 t 2.  g =  ...   [2]  (c) a student states that repeating the experiment improves the reliability of the value obtained  for g.    suggest two changes that you would make to improve the reliability. the stopwatch cannot  be changed. 1.         2.         [2]  (d) state one precaution that you took in this experiment in order to obtain accurate readings.  ...  ... [1] [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2  in this experiment, you will investigate resistance.  the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you.  vapower supply r1r2r3 fig. 2.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v1 across the resistor r1 and the  current i in the circuit. switch off.  v1 =  ...  i =  ... [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance of the resistor r1 using the equation r1 = v1 i.  r1 =  ..  [1]  (b) disconnect the voltmeter.    connect the voltmeter across the resistor r2. switch on.    (i) measure and record the potential difference v2 across the resistor r2. switch off.  v2 =  ...   (ii) calculate the resistance of the resistor r2 using the equation r2 = v2 i.  r2 =  ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) disconnect the voltmeter.    connect the voltmeter across the resistor r3. switch on.    (i) measure and record the potential difference v3 across the resistor r3. switch off.  v3 =  ...   (ii) calculate the resistance of the resistor r3 using the equation r3 = v3 i.  r3 =  ..  [1]   (iii) calculate the resistance r of resistors r1, r2 and r3 connected in series, using the  equation r = r1 + r2 + r3. give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures  for this experiment.  r =  ..  [1]  (d) state whether your results suggest that the three resistors have the same value of resistance.  justify your statement by reference to your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) complete the circuit diagram in fig. 2.2 to show:    \u2022 the three resistors connected in parallel   \u2022 the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the resistors   \u2022 a variable resistor connected to control the current in all three resistors.   you are not required to set up this circuit.   apower supply fig. 2.2 [3] [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length f of a lens.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated object u lensscreen v fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 place the screen a distance d = 70.0  cm from the illuminated object.   \u2022 place the lens between the object and the screen so that the lens is very close to the  screen.   \u2022 move the lens slowly away from the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on  the screen.   (i) \u2022 measure, and record in table 3.1, the distance u between the centre of the lens and  the illuminated object.     \u2022 measure, and record in the table, the distance v between the centre of the lens and  the screen.    (ii) calculate the product uv. record your answer in the table.   (iii) repeat the procedure using values for d of 75.0  cm, 80.0  cm, 85.0  cm and 90.0  cm. table 3.1 d / cm u / cm v / cm uv / cm2 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of uv / cm2 (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at  the origin (0,0). [4]  (c)  the focal length f of the lens is numerically equal to the gradient of the line.   determine the gradient g of the line. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ... [2]  (d) suggest two difficulties in this experiment when trying to obtain accurate readings. 1.         2.         [2]   [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating the effect of double-walled insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water  in a copper container. the student places the copper container inside a larger metal container. he  is investigating the effect of the size of the air gap between the copper container and larger metal  containers.   plan an experiment to investigate the effect of the size of the air gap between the copper container  and larger metal containers on the rate of cooling of hot water.   the following apparatus is available:   a copper container   a number of metal containers of different diameters (all larger than the copper container)    a thermometer   a stopwatch   a measuring cylinder   a supply of hot water.  you can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  you are not required to carry out this investigation.  in your plan, you should:  \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation  \u2022 state the key variables that you would control  \u2022  draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table)  \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (leg/cgw) 150763/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education *8353946662* physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 in this experiment, you will determine the density of water.   carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1.   you are provided with a plastic drinks cup.  cup square arim base fig. 1.1  (a) (i) place the cup, with the base at the bottom, in square a on this page. draw carefully  around the base of the cup. remove the cup from the paper. take measurements from  your drawing to determine an accurate value for the diameter db of the base of the cup.    square a  db =    cm [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) place the cup, with the rim at the bottom, in square b on this page. draw carefully around  the rim of the cup.    remove the cup from the paper. take measurements from your drawing to determine  the diameter dt of the rim of the cup.    square b  dt =    cm [1]   (iii) calculate the average diameter d of the cup using the equation d = db + dt 2.  d =    cm [1]  (b) (i) measure the vertical height h of the cup.  h =    cm [1]   (ii) 1. calculate the volume v of the cup using the equation v =  0.785  d 2 h.  v =  ...  cm3    2. calculate v / 2.  v / 2 =  ...  cm3  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (c) you are provided with water in beaker w.    pour a volume  v / 2 of water into the measuring cylinder. pour this water into the cup.   (i) use the balance provided to measure the mass m of the cup containing the water.  m =  ...  g [1]   (ii) determine the density \u03c1 of water using the equation \u03c1 = 2 m v.     give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. include  the unit.  \u03c1 =  ..  [3]  (d) a student carries out all the instructions for this experiment with care, but his value for the  density of water \u03c1 is not equal to the expected value.   suggest, with a reason, a part of the procedure, (a), (b) or (c) that could give an unreliable  result. part   reason  ...  ...  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. thermometer bench fig. 2.1  (a) use the thermometer to measure room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =  ..  [1]  (b) pour 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker. place the thermometer in the beaker of hot water. \u2022 record in table 2.1 the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water at time t = 0 s. immediately start  the stopclock. \u2022 after 30  s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time   t = 30 s and the temperature reading in the table. \u2022 continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30  s until you have six sets  of readings.  [2] table 2.1 t / s \u03b8 / \u00b0c 0",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c)  plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis). you do not need to start the y-axis at the  origin (0,0) but the value of room temperature \u03b8r must be marked on the y-axis.  [4]  (d) draw a horizontal line across the graph grid to show the value of room temperature \u03b8r during  the experiment.  [1]  (e) a student plans to repeat the experiment using the same thermometer and the same volume  of water. suggest  two changes to the apparatus or the procedure that would increase the  rate of cooling of the water. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (f) state one precaution that you took in order to record accurate readings.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length f of a lens.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated object u lensscreenv fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 place the screen about 100  cm from the illuminated object.   \u2022  place the lens between the object and the screen so that the centre of the lens is at a  distance u1 = 20.0  cm from the object.   \u2022 adjust the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the screen.   (i) measure the distance v1 between the centre of the lens and the screen.   v1 =  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the focal length f1 of the lens using the equation f1 = u1v1 (u1 + v1).  f1 =  ..  [1]  (b)  (i) repeat the procedure in (a), placing the lens between the object and the screen so that  the centre of the lens is at a distance u2 = 30.0  cm from the object.  v2 =  ..  [1]   (ii)  calculate the focal length f2 of the lens using the equation f2 = u2v2 (u2 + v2).  f2 =  ..  [2]  (c)  calculate the average value of the focal length f of the lens, using the two results from parts  (a) and (b). give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  f  =  ..  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (d)  the student states that taking more measurements improves the reliability of the value  obtained for f.   suggest additional values for u that you would use.   ...  ...  ... [2]  (e) state two precautions that should be taken in this experiment to obtain accurate readings. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating whether the distance that a toy truck will travel along a horizontal floor,  before stopping, depends on its mass.   the following apparatus is available to the student:   a ramp   blocks to support the ramp as shown in fig. 4.1   toy truck   a selection of masses   other standard apparatus from the physics laboratory.  plan an experiment to investigate whether the distance that the toy truck will travel along a  horizontal floor, before stopping, depends on its mass.   you are not required to carry out this investigation.  in your plan, you should:   \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation   \u2022 state any apparatus that you would use that is not included in the list above   \u2022 state the key variables that you would control   \u2022  draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your  readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table).  you may add to the diagram in fig. 4.1 to help your description. ramp floorblocks fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "*6034350790* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (st/jg) 150761/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/53 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1  in this experiment, you will investigate how partly covering the surface of the water in a beaker  affects the rate at which the water cools.   carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. thermometer lid partly covering surface fig. 1.1  lid a lid b beaker uncovered area uncovered area  fig. 1.2  fig. 1.3  (a) \u2022 pour 100  cm3 of hot water into the beaker and cover half of it with lid a as shown in  fig. 1.2. this leaves 50  % of the water surface uncovered.    \u2022 place the thermometer into the hot water and record, in the first row of table 1.1, the  temperature \u03b8 of the water at time t = 0. immediately start the stopclock.    \u2022 record, in the table, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s,  150 s and 180  s.       \u2022 pour the water out of the beaker.  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) (i) repeat (a), using lid b instead of lid a to cover more of the beaker as shown in fig. 1.3.  this leaves only 25  % of the water surface uncovered.   [1]   (ii) complete the headings and the time t column in the table.   [2] table 1.1 beaker with lid a beaker with lid b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0   (c) (i) write a conclusion to this experiment, stating for which lid the cooling rate is greater.    explain your answer by reference to your results.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]       (ii) suggest a change to the apparatus  that could produce a greater difference between the  rates of cooling for lid a and lid b.    explain why the change might produce a greater difference.  change  ..  ... explanation    ...  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (d) a student thinks that the cooling rate is directly proportional to the percentage of the surface  area uncovered. he wants to draw a graph of cooling rate against the percentage of uncovered  area to investigate this.    describe how his graph line will show whether the cooling rate and the percentage of surface  area uncovered are directly proportional.  ...  ... [2]  (e) students in other countries are carrying out the same experiment.    suggest a factor that they should keep the same if they are to obtain similar readings.   ...  ... [1] [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2  in this experiment, you will investigate a circuit containing resistors.  the circuit has been set up for you.  the fixed resistor must remain connected throughout the experiment.  resistor x has a resistance r = 1 \u03c9.   carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.  power supplyfixed resistor a v x    fig. 2.1  (a) \u2022 switch on.     measure, and record in table 2.1, the value of the current i in the circuit and the value of  the potential difference v across resistor x.      switch off.   \u2022 replace resistor x with resistor y of value r = 3 \u03c9.     repeat the above procedure.   \u2022 replace resistor y with resistor z of value r = 10  \u03c9.     repeat the above procedure. [3] table 2.1     resistor r / \u03c9 i / v / x  1 y  3 z 10  (b) add appropriate units to the column headings in the table.  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (c) calculate the power p supplied to each of the resistors x, y and z.   use your readings from (a) and the equation p = i \u00d7 v.   give your answers to a suitable number of significant figures.    power p supplied to resistor x =  ... w  power p supplied to resistor y =  ... w  power p supplied to resistor z =  ... w  [3]    (d) describe how the value of the power p changes as r increases.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (e) a student wishes to investigate the relationship between p and r in more detail.   suggest two modifications to the procedure that will enable him to do this. 1.         2.         [2] [total: 11]  ",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the image produced by a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. triangular object u holensscreen fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 measure and record the height ho of the triangular object.  ho =  .. cm   \u2022 switch on the lamp.   \u2022 set the distance between the triangular object and the lens, u, to 30.0  cm.     move the screen until a clear focused image of the triangular object is seen.    measure, and record in table 3.1, the height hi of the image.    \u2022 repeat the procedure for u values of 35.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 45.0  cm and 50.0  cm.    \u2022 switch off the lamp.      table 3.1 u / cm hi / cm n 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0   [2]  (b) for each distance u, calculate, and record in the table, a value n using your results from (a)    and the equation n = ho hi. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against n (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0,0).  [4]  (d) determine the gradient g of the graph.   show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.         g =  ... [2]  (e) describe one difficulty that might be experienced when measuring the height of the image hi.  suggest an improvement to the apparatus to overcome this difficulty. difficulty  .  ... improvement  .    ...  [2]  [total: 11]  ",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4  a student is investigating the force needed to just slide a block across a surface.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate how the force needed varies with the  mass of the block.  the apparatus available includes:   a light, flat wooden block fitted with a hook as shown in fig. 4.1   a pulley which can be clamped to a bench. flat block hook fig. 4.1  in your plan, you should:   \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed   \u2022 draw a clearly labelled diagram of how the apparatus will be arranged   \u2022 give brief instructions for carrying out the experiment   \u2022 describe any precautions which should be taken to ensure reliable results   \u2022 suggest a graph which could be drawn.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "*3553402582* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (sc/cgw) 150894/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2018  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a student is determining the acceleration of free fall g using a pendulum. fig. 1.1 shows the  pendulum. fig. 1.2 shows one complete oscillation of the pendulum. dclamp bob         clamp one complete oscillation  fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  (a) on fig. 1.1, measure the distance d.  d =  ...  cm [1]  (b) fig. 1.1 is drawn 1/10th actual size.   (i) calculate the actual distance d from the bottom of the clamp to the centre of the bob.  d =  ...  cm [1]   the student displaces the bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. he measures the  time t for 10 complete oscillations. the time t is shown on the stopwatch in fig. 1.3. min sec fig. 1.3   (ii) write down the time t shown in fig. 1.3.  t =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t =  .  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (iv) calculate t2.  t2 =  .  [1]   (v) calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 20 t2.  g =  .  [1]  (c) the student adjusts the pendulum until the distance d measured to the centre of the bob  is 100.0  cm.    he repeats the procedure and obtains another value of t2.  3.94 t2 = ..   (i) on the dotted line above, write the unit for t2. [1]   (ii) calculate the acceleration of free fall g using the equation g = 40 t2 and the value of t2    from (c). give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  g =  .  [1]  (d) another student states that repeating the experiment improves the reliability of the value  obtained for g.   suggest two changes that you would make to improve the reliability. the stopwatch cannot  be changed. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (e) state one precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain accurate  readings.  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 a student is investigating resistance.  she uses the circuit shown in fig. 2.1.  vpower supply r1r2r3a fig. 2.1  (a) she measures the potential difference v1 across the resistor r1 and the current i in the  circuit.   figs. 2.2 and 2.3 show the voltmeter and ammeter readings.   (i) write down the readings shown on the meters in figs. 2.2 and 2.3.  v1 =  ..  i =  ..  [2]  a0.4 0.6 0.2 1.00.8 0 v4 653 72 1 9 108 0  fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3",
            "5": "5 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) calculate the resistance of the resistor r1 using the equation r1 = v1 i.  r1 =  .  [1]  (b) the student measures the potential difference across each resistor in turn. she calculates  values for the resistance r2 and r3 of the resistor r2 and of the resistor r3. she records her  values as:  4.75 \u03c9 r2 =  ..  4.81 \u03c9 r3 =  ..   state whether the results suggest that the three resistors have the same value of resistance.  justify your statement by reference to the results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]  (c) calculate the combined resistance r of resistors r1, r2 and r3 connected in series, using  the equation r = r1 + r2 + r3. give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures  for this experiment.  r =  .  [2]  (d) the student checks her result by connecting the voltmeter across all three resistors connected  in series. tick the potential difference reading you would expect to be closest to the reading  she obtains.    v1 3    v1    3v1  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) complete the circuit diagram in fig. 2.4 to show   \u2022 the three resistors connected in parallel   \u2022 the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the resistors   \u2022 a variable resistor connected to control the current in all three resistors. apower supply fig. 2.4  [3]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn overquestion 3 starts on the next page.",
            "8": "8 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a student is determining the focal length f of a lens.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus. illuminated object u lensscreen v fig. 3.1  (a) the student places the screen a distance d = 70.0  cm from the illuminated object.   he places the lens close to the screen and moves the lens slowly away from the screen until  a clearly focused image is formed on the screen.   he measures the distance u between the centre of the lens and the illuminated object.   he measures the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.   he repeats the procedure using values for d of 75.0  cm, 80.0  cm, 85.0  cm and 90.0  cm.   the readings are shown in table 3.1.   calculate, and record in table 3.1, uv for each value of d. table 3.1 d / cm u / cm v / cm uv / cm2 70.0 22.0 48.4 75.0 20.7 54.5 80.0 20.0 60.0 85.0 19.5 65.8 90.0 19.0 71.2  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) plot a graph of uv / cm2 (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at  the origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the line. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  .  [2]  (d) the focal length f of the lens is numerically equal to the gradient g of the graph. write down  a value for the focal length f of the lens. give your answer to a suitable number of significant  figures for this experiment.  f =  .  [2]  (e) suggest two difficulties in this experiment when trying to obtain accurate readings. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11] [turn over",
            "10": "10 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating the effect of double-walled insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water  in a copper container. the student places the copper container inside a larger metal container. he  is investigating the effect of the size of the air gap between the copper container and larger metal  containers.  plan an experiment to investigate the effect of the size of the air gap between the copper container  and larger metal containers on the rate of cooling of hot water.   the following apparatus is available:   a copper container   a number of metal containers of different diameters (all larger than the copper container)    a thermometer   a stopwatch   a measuring cylinder   a supply of hot water.  you can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  in your plan, you should:   \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation  \u2022 state the key variables that you would control  \u2022  draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table)  \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "*4322915781* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (sc/cgw) 150895/6 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2018  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a student is determining the density of water. she is provided with a plastic cup, shown in fig.  1.1. fig. 1.1  (a) she draws around the base of the cup. her drawing is shown in fig. 1.2. fig. 1.2   (i) from fig. 1.2, take and record measurements to determine an accurate value for the  diameter db of the base of the cup.  db =  ...  cm [2]   (ii) the student places the cup upside down and draws around the rim of the cup.    she determines the diameter dt of the rim of the cup.  7.2 cm dt =  ..    calculate the average diameter d of the cup using the equation d = db + dt 2 .  d =  ...  cm [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) 1. on fig. 1.3, measure the vertical height h of the cup. h fig. 1.3  h =    cm   2. calculate the volume v of the cup using the equation v =  0.785  d 2 h.   v =  ..  cm3  [1]  (c) the student fills the cup with water. the mass of the cup with the water is shown in fig. 1.4. 232  g fig. 1.4   determine the density \u03c1 of water using the equation \u03c1 = m v  and your value from (b)2.   give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. include the  unit.  \u03c1 =  .  [3]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (d) suggest, with a reason, a part of the procedure (a), (b) or (c) that could give an unreliable  result for the density of water. part  ... reason  ...  ...  [1]  (e) the student pours the water from the cup into a measuring cylinder.   draw a diagram to show water in a measuring cylinder. show clearly the meniscus and the  line of sight the student should use to obtain an accurate value for the volume of the water.  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 a student is investigating the cooling of water.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus used. thermometer bench fig. 2.1  (a) the thermometer in fig. 2.2 shows room temperature \u03b8r at the beginning of the experiment.  record \u03b8r. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 2.2  \u03b8r =  .  [1]  (b) the student pours 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker.   he records the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water at time t = 0 and immediately starts a  stopclock.   he continues recording the temperature readings every 30  s. the readings are shown in  table  2.1.   (i) explain why the student should wait a few seconds after placing the thermometer in the  hot water before taking the first temperature reading.  ...  ..  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018   (ii) complete the column headings in table 2.1.  [1]   (iii) complete the time column in table 2.1.  [1] table 2.1 t / \u03b8 / 0 70 60 52 49 46 43   (iv) plot a graph of \u03b8 / \u00b0c (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis). you do not need to start the y-axis at  the origin (0,0) but the value of room temperature \u03b8r must be marked on the y-axis.  [4]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) draw a horizontal line across the graph grid to indicate the value of room temperature \u03b8r, as  shown by the thermometer in fig. 2.2.  [1]  (d) state two precautions that you would take in order to obtain accurate readings in  this experiment. 1.  ..  ... 2.  ..  ...  [2]  (e) a student plans to repeat the experiment using the same thermometer and the same volume  of water.   suggest two changes to the apparatus or the procedure that would increase  the rate of  cooling of the water. 1.  ..  ... 2.  ..  ...  [2]  [total: 13]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a student is determining the focal length of a lens.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus used. illuminated object lensscreen v fig. 3.1  (a) the student adjusts the position of the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on  the screen.   (i) on fig. 3.1, measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.  v =  .  [1]   (ii) fig. 3.1 is drawn 1/5th actual size.    calculate v, the actual distance from the lens to the screen  v =  .  [1]   (iii) with a clearly focused image formed on the screen, the actual distance from the centre  of the lens to the illuminated object, u is 20.0  cm.     calculate the focal length f1 of the lens using the equation f1 = uv (u + v).  f1 =  .  [2]  (b) the student repeats the procedure in (a), using a different distance u. she obtains another  value for the focal length f2.  12.2 cm f2 =  ..   calculate the average value fa of the focal length of the lens, using f2 and your value for f1  in (a)(iii) . give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  fa =  .  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) the student states that taking more measurements improves the reliability of the value  obtained for fa.   suggest additional values for u that you would use.   ...  ...  ..  [2]  (d) state two precautions that you would take in this experiment to obtain accurate readings. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating whether the distance that a toy truck will travel along a horizontal floor,  before stopping, depends on its mass.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   a ramp   blocks to support the ramp as shown in fig. 4.1   toy truck   a selection of masses   other standard apparatus from the physics laboratory.  plan an experiment to investigate whether the distance that the toy truck will travel along a  horizontal floor, before stopping, depends on its mass.  in your plan, you should:   \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation   \u2022 state any apparatus that you would use that is not included in the list above   \u2022 state the key variables that you would control   \u2022  draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your  readings (you are not required to enter any readings in the table).  you may add to the diagram in fig. 4.1 to help your description. ramp floorblocks fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s18_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "*6072737399* this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (sc/cgw) 150896/6 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2018  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a student is investigating how partly covering the surface of the water in a beaker affects the rate  at which the water cools.  the apparatus used is shown in fig. 1.1. thermometer waterlid fig. 1.1  (a) \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 1.2   record the room temperature \u03b8r, shown on the thermometer in fig. 1.2.  \u03b8r =  .  [1]  (b) the student pours 100  cm3 of hot water into a beaker. she places lid a on the beaker. this  leaves half of the water surface uncovered, as shown in fig.  1.3.   she records the temperature of the water in the beaker and immediately starts a stopclock.   she records the temperature \u03b8 of the water every 30  s. her readings are shown in table 1.1.   she repeats the procedure using lid b. this leaves a quarter of the water surface uncovered,  as shown in fig. 1.4. beakerlid a lid b beaker uncovered areauncovered area  fig. 1.3  fig. 1.4",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   complete the headings and the time t column in table 1.1.  [2] table 1.1 beaker with lid abeaker with lid b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 80.0 81.0 77.0 79.0 74.5 77.5 72.5 76.0 70.5 75.0 69.0 74.0 68.0 73.5  (c) describe a precaution that should be taken to ensure that the temperature readings are as  accurate as possible in the experiment.  ...  ..  [1]  (d) (i) write a conclusion to this experiment, stating for which lid the rate of cooling is greater.    explain your answer by reference to the results.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [2]   (ii) suggest a change to the apparatus  that could produce a greater difference between the  rates of cooling for lid a and lid b.    explain why the change might produce a greater difference.  change  ..  ... explanation    ...  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) a student suggests that the rate of cooling is directly proportional to the percentage of the  uncovered surface area. he wants to draw a graph of cooling rate against the percentage of  uncovered area to investigate this.    describe how his graph line will show whether the rate of cooling and the percentage of  uncovered surface area are directly proportional.  ...  ..  [2]  (f) students in other countries carry out the same experiment.   suggest one factor that they should keep the same if they are to obtain similar readings.  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 a student is investigating a circuit containing resistors.  he is using the circuit shown in fig. 2.1.  resistor x has a resistance r = 1 \u03c9. a xpower supply fig. 2.1  (a) on fig. 2.1, draw a voltmeter connected so that it measures the potential difference  (p.d.)  across resistor  x. [1]  (b) the student uses the ammeter to measure the current in the circuit and uses the voltmeter to  measure the potential difference  (p.d.) across resistor x. the readings are shown in fig.  2.2  and fig.  2.3. a0.4 0.6 0.2 1.00.8 0 v2 3 1 54 0  fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (i) the student repeats the procedure using resistors y and z.    his readings are shown in table 2.1.     record, in table 2.1, the value of the current i in the circuit and the value of the potential  difference  (p.d.) v across resistor x shown in fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3. table 2.1 resistor r / i / v / x 1 y 3 0.55 1.7 z 10 0.24 2.4  [2]   (ii) add units to the column headings in table 2.1.  [2]  (c) calculate the power p supplied to each of the resistors x, y and z.   use the readings from table 2.1 and the equation p = i \u00d7 v.   give your answers to a suitable number of significant figures.  power p supplied to resistor x =  .  w  power p supplied to resistor y =  .  w  power p supplied to resistor z =  .  w  [2]  (d) describe how the value of the power p changes as r increases.  ...  ...  ..  [2]  (e) another student plans to investigate the relationship between p and r in more detail.   suggest two modifications to the procedure that will enable her to do this. 1.  ..  ... 2.  ..  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a student is investigating the image produced by a converging lens.  she is using the apparatus shown in fig. 3.1. illuminated object u lensscreen fig. 3.1  (a) the illuminated object consists of a triangular-shaped hole in a piece of card. fig. 3.2 shows,  full size, the illuminated object. measure and record the height ho of the triangular -shaped  hole.  ho =  ...  cm [1] hocard fig. 3.2",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over (b) the distance u between the triangular object and the centre of the lens is set to 20.0  cm.   the screen is moved until a focused image of the illuminated object is seen, as shown  in fig. 3.3. hiscreen fig. 3.3   the student repeats the procedure for u values of 30.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 50.0  cm and 60.0  cm. her  results are shown in table 3.1.    (i) measure and record in the first row of table 3.1, the height hi of the image.  [1]   (ii)  calculate, and record in the table, a value n using your measurements for ho and hi and     the equation n = ho hi. table 3.1 u / cm hi / cm n 20.0 30.0 1.5 0.93 40.0 0.9 1.6 50.0 0.6 2.3 60.0 0.5 2.8  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (c) plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against n (x-axis). you do not have to start your graph at the  origin (0, 0).  [4]  (d) determine the gradient g of the graph.   show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  g =  .  [2]  (e) describe one difficulty that might be experienced when measuring the height of the   image hi. suggest an improvement to the apparatus to overcome this difficulty. difficulty  .  ... improvement  .  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating the force needed to just slide a block across a surface.  plan an experiment that will enable him to investigate how the force needed varies with the mass  of the block.  the apparatus available includes:    a light, flat wooden block with a hook fitted as shown in fig. 4.1    a pulley which can be clamped to a bench. wooden block hook fig. 4.1  in your plan, you should:   \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed   \u2022 draw a clearly labelled diagram of how the apparatus will be arranged   \u2022 give brief instructions for carrying out the experiment   \u2022 describe any precautions which should be taken to ensure reliable results   \u2022 suggest a graph which could be drawn. [turn over",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .  [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 11_0625_11/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *2777991637 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18  1 a pendulum is set in motion and timed. the time measured for 20 complete swings is 30  s.    what is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?  a 0.67  s b 0.75  s c 1.5  s d 3.0  s      2 the diagrams are distance-time graphs for four bodies.    which body is moving with an increasing speed?    distance timea 0 0distance timeb distance timec distance timed 0 00 0 0 0     3 a runner runs 300  m at an average speed of 3.0  m / s. she then runs another 300  m at an average  speed of 6.0  m / s.    what is her average speed for the total distance of 600  m?  a 2.0  m / s b 4.0  m / s c 4.5  m / s d 8.0  m / s     4 which quantity is measured in newtons?  a energy  b mass  c weight  d work     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18 [turn over  5 four identical steel blocks are placed on a balance. the reading on the balance is 220  n.    what is the mass of one steel block?  a 5.5  kg b 22  kg c 55  kg d 88  kg      6 a liquid has a volume of 0.040  m3 and a mass of 30  000  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.075  kg  / m3 b 7.5  kg  / m3 c 750  kg  / m3 d 7500  kg  / m3     7 the unstretched lengths and extension-load graphs are shown for each of four different springs.    which spring is the longest when a load of 5.0  n is hung from each spring?    100 90 8070605040 30 20 10 0 012345a unstretched length 65  mm 6789 1 0 load  / nextension / mm100 908070605040 30 20 10 0 012345b unstretched length 90  mm 6789 1 0 load  / nextension / mm 100 908070605040302010 0 012345c unstretched length 105  mm 6789 1 0 load  / nextension/  mm100 908070605040302010 0 012345d unstretched length 110  mm 6789 1 0 load  / nextension/  mm      ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18  8 a car moves along a level road.    the diagram shows all of the horizontal forces acting on the car.    2000  n force from engine500  n friction800  n air resistance     which statement is correct?  a the car is slowing down.  b the car is speeding up.  c the car is moving at a constant speed.  d the car is moving backwards.      9 which force and distance produce the smallest moment about a pivot?  a a 6.0  n force at a perpendicular distance of 4.0  m from the pivot  b a 7.0  n force at a perpendicular distance of 6.0  m from the pivot  c a 10  n force at a perpendicular distance of 4.0  m from the pivot  d a 12  n force at a perpendicular distance of 3.0  m from the pivot      10 which device is designed to convert chemical energy into kinetic energy?  a an a.c. generator  b a battery-powered torch  c a car engine  d a wind-up mechanical clock     11 a man climbs a ladder.    which two quantities can be used to calculate the useful power of the man?  a the weight of the man and the time taken only  b the weight of the man and the vertical distance moved only  c the work done by the man and the time taken only  d the work done by the man and the vertical distance moved only    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18 [turn over  12 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of gas inside a metal container.    liquidmetal containergas     what is the pressure inside the container?  a equal to the atmospheric pressure  b greater than the atmospheric pressure  c less than the atmospheric pressure but greater than zero  d zero      13 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    hconnection to gas supplymanometer liquid     which change gives a greater value of height h ?  a using a less dense liquid  b using a more dense liquid  c using a narrower tube  d using a wider tube     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18  14 during evaporation of a liquid, the more energetic molecules escape. the temperature of the  remaining liquid changes.    which row identifies where these molecules escape from and describes the temperature change?     molecules  escape from the temperature of  remaining liquid  a body of the liquid decreases  b body of the liquid increases  c surface of the liquid decreases  d surface of the liquid increases     15 diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.    diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.    microscope air molecules andsmoke particleslightdiagram 1 diagram 2 random movementeye     why do the smoke particles move randomly?  a they are hit by air molecules.  b they are less dense than air.  c they are moved by convection currents.  d they gain energy from the light.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18 [turn over  16 the distance between two electricity pylons is 60  m. an engineer fits a cable of length 62  m  between the pylons.    why does the engineer choose a cable that is longer than the distance between the two pylons?  a to allow for contraction of the cable in cold weather  b to create a slope in the cable for electrons to flow down  c to keep the current low and the voltage high   d to reduce magnetic fields around the cable     17 some ice is slowly heated and its temperature is measured. a graph is plotted of temperature  against time.    100 0 \u201310temperature  / \u00b0c timex     which row describes what happens to the thermal energy and to the temperature in section x?     thermal energy temperature of ice  a gained by ice rises  b gained by ice stays the same  c not gained by ice rises  d not gained by ice stays the same    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18  18 some of the sun\u2019s radiation passes through a prism. the diagram shows the spectrum of the  radiation.    which point on the screen does the infra-red radiation reach?    radiation from thesunprism screenab c dvisiblenot visible not visiblered violet       19 on a cold day, a shiny metal rod feels colder to the touch than a black plastic rod.    which statement explains this observation?  a the metal rod is a better absorber of infra-red radiation than the plastic rod.  b the metal rod is a better thermal conductor than the plastic rod.  c the metal rod is a worse absorber of infra-red radiation than the plastic rod.  d the metal rod is a worse thermal conductor than the plastic rod.     20 a boat moves up and down repeatedly as a water wave passes it.    which name is given to the number of up-and-down movements of the boat per unit time?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18 [turn over  21 plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. they travel more quickly in  the deeper water.    wave directionshallow water deep waterboundary     which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?    abcd       22 a parallel beam of light is incident on a plane mirror.    which diagram shows how the beam is reflected by the mirror?    a b c d spectrum    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18  23 the diagram shows a parallel, cyli ndrical light beam of diameter d incident on a thin converging  lens. a screen is placed a distance equal to two focal lengths 2 f from the lens.    d2f screenlensbeam of light     which diagram shows the size of the spot of light seen on the screen?    abcd 2d dd 2       24 different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. below are four  statements about parts of the spectrum.    statement 1: infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.  statement 2: radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to earth.  statement 3: ultraviolet waves are used for intruder alarms.  statement 4: x-rays are used for security checks.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 3 and 4     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18 [turn over  25 a woman hears the first note produced by a clarinet.    she then hears a second note that has a higher pitch and is quieter.    which row compares the frequency and the amplitude of the two notes?     first note second note  a higher frequency larger amplitude  b higher frequency smaller amplitude  c lower frequency larger amplitude  d lower frequency smaller amplitude      26 the diagram shows a bar magnet and four plotting compasses.    which compass shows the direction of the magnetic field due to the magnet?    sna b d c    27 iron is used for the core of a transformer and steel is used to make a bar magnet.    which statement explains these uses of iron and of steel?  a iron is a magnetic material and steel is a non-magnetic material.  b iron is a permanent magnetic material and steel is a temporary magnetic material.  c iron is a temporary magnetic material and steel is a permanent magnetic material.  d iron is a non-magnetic material and steel is a magnetic material.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18  28 a negatively charged plastic rod p is placed above a positively charged plastic rod q.    +++++q\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013p     what are the directions of the electrostatic forces on rod p and on rod q?     electrostatic force  on rod p electrostatic force  on rod q  a downwards downwards  b downwards upwards  c upwards downwards  d upwards upwards      29 the diagrams show the scales of three ammeters.    3 4 52 1 03 4 52 1 06 8 104 2 0 a ammeter 1a ammeter 2a ammeter 3    which ammeters show the same current reading?  a all three ammeters  b ammeter 1 and ammeter 2 only  c ammeter 1 and ammeter 3 only  d ammeter 2 and ammeter 3 only      30 the resistance of a component in a circuit is found using an ammeter and a voltmeter.    how are the ammeter and the voltmeter connected?  a the voltmeter and ammeter in parallel with the component  b the voltmeter and ammeter in series with the component  c the voltmeter in parallel with the component and the ammeter in series with the component  d the voltmeter in series with the component and the ammeter in parallel with the component   ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18 [turn over  31 the diagram shows a circuit with a power supply and four components.    +\u2013 n    what is component n?  a fixed resistor  b fuse  c thermistor  d variable resistor     32 two lamps are connected in parallel.    s1 s2 s3     which switches must be closed so that both lamps light?  a s 1 and s 2 only  b s 1 and s 3 only  c s 2 and s 3 only  d s 1, s2 and s 3     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18  33 the circuit diagram shows a variable potential divider.    vpq slider     the slider is moved from p towards q.    what happens to the reading on the voltmeter and to the brightness of the lamp?     reading on  voltmeter brightness  of lamp  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     34 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    electrical supplyx y appliancecable cablelive neutral     when a fuse is used, where should it be connected, and when a circuit-breaker is used, where  should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18 [turn over  35 which electrical device uses the turning effect produced by a current-carrying coil in a magnetic  field?  a a.c. generator  b d.c. motor  c relay  d transformer     36 a wire is placed in a strong magnetic field. when a current is passed through the wire it moves  upwards, as shown.    s nmovement     the current is reversed.    in which direction does the wire move?  a downwards  b towards the north pole  c towards the south pole  d upwards     37 which diagram represents the structure of a neutral atom?    + + \u2013\u2013 \u2013key neutron proton electrona b ++\u2013 ++c +++d \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/11/o/n/18  38 each nucleus of nuclide x contains 10 protons and a total of 22 nucleons.    which notation is correct for this nuclide?  a x22 10 b x22 32 c x12 10 d x10 22      39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles      40 a sample of a radioactive isotope emits 9600 \u03b1-particles per second.    after 40 hours the rate of emission has fallen to 600 \u03b1-particles per second.    what is the half-life of this isotope?  a 4.0 hours b 8.0 hours c 10 hours d 20 hours      "
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 11_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *0300250686* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18  1 a pendulum is set in motion and timed. the time measured for 20 complete swings is 30  s.    what is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?  a 0.67  s b 0.75  s c 1.5  s d 3.0  s      2 the graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.    at which point on the graph is the greatest distance travelled per second?    0 0speed timeabcd      3 an athlete runs at a speed of 8  m / s for 10  s, and then at a speed of 6  m / s for 12  s.    which calculation gives the average speed of the athlete in  m / s?  a 268+  b  2212)(6 10)(8 \u00d7+ \u00d7  c  2212)(6 10)(8 \u00f7+ \u00f7  d  226) (128) (10 \u00f7 +\u00f7    4 which quantity is measured in newtons?  a energy  b mass  c weight  d work    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18 [turn over  5 an object is suspended from a spring balance on the earth. the same object is suspended from  the same spring balance on another planet.    32 410 reading on earth32 410 reading on another planet    which statement explains the difference between the two readings?  a both the mass and the weight of the object are greater on the other planet.  b the mass of the object is greater on the other planet than on earth, but the weight is  unchanged.  c the spring stretches more easily when on the other planet.  d the weight of the object is greater on the other planet than on earth, but the mass is  unchanged.     6 the diagram shows four blocks of different metals. each block has a mass of 12  g.    which metal has the largest density?    2 cm1 cm1 cm 3 cm1 cm1 cm2 cm2 cm1 cm 3 cm2 cm1 cmab cd     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18  7 which is an example of a force?  a density  b mass  c volume  d weight      8 a car moves along a level road.    the diagram shows all of the horizontal forces acting on the car.    2000  n force from engine500  n friction800  n air resistance     which statement is correct?  a the car is slowing down.  b the car is speeding up.  c the car is moving at a constant speed.  d the car is moving backwards.     9 point x is the centre of mass of a lamina in the shape of a triangle with sides of equal length. the  top of the triangle is cut off along the dotted line shown.    x     what happens to the centre of mass, x?  a moves towards the bottom of the page  b moves to the left  c moves to the right  d moves towards the top of the page     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18 [turn over  10 which device is designed to convert chemical energy into kinetic energy?  a an a.c. generator  b a battery-powered torch  c a car engine  d a wind-up mechanical clock      11 which two physical quantities must be used to calculate the power developed by a student  running up a flight of steps?  a force exerted and the vertical height of the steps only  b force exerted and the time taken only  c work done and the vertical height of the steps only  d work done and the time taken only     12 a simple mercury barometer is used to measure the atmospheric pressure.    which height is measured to find the atmospheric pressure?    a bcd       13 the particles of a gas, in a container of fixed volume, are given more energy.    which effect does this have on the gas?  a both the pressure and temperature of the gas increase.  b only the temperature of the gas increases.  c neither the pressure nor temperature of the gas increases.  d only the pressure of the gas increases.    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18  14 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    hconnection to gas supplymanometer liquid     which change gives a greater value of height h ?  a using a less dense liquid  b using a more dense liquid  c using a narrower tube  d using a wider tube      15 diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.    diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.    microscope air molecules andsmoke particleslightdiagram 1 diagram 2 random movementeye     why do the smoke particles move randomly?  a they are hit by air molecules.  b they are less dense than air.  c they are moved by convection currents.  d they gain energy from the light.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18 [turn over  16 the metal lid on a glass jar is difficult to unscrew.    the jar is placed in a warm oven until the jar and the lid reach the same temperature. the lid is  now easily unscrewed.    which property accounts for this?  a thermal capacity of the jar  b thermal capacity of the lid  c thermal conduction  d thermal expansion      17 two cold metal containers x and y are both filled with the same mass of hot water at the same  temperature.    both containers are well insulated.    the thermal capacity of container x is greater than that of container y.    how do the final temperatures of the water in x and in y compare?  a the temperature in x is higher than in y.  b the temperature in x is lower than in y.  c the temperatures in x and in y are equal but lower than the initial temperature of the water.  d the temperatures in x and in y are the same as the initial temperature of the water.    18 some of the sun\u2019s radiation passes through a prism. the diagram shows the spectrum of the  radiation.    which point on the screen does the infra-red radiation reach?    radiation from thesunprism screenab c dvisiblenot visible not visiblered violet      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18  19 which statement about convection is not correct?  a it enables water in a pan on a cooker to get evenly heated.  b it happens in liquids and gases.  c it means that heat rises.  d it occurs because the density of a fluid decreases when it is heated.      20 what is meant by the frequency of a water wave?  a the distance between consecutive crests of the wave  b the distance moved by the wave per unit time  c the maximum vertical displacement of the wave  d the number of crests passing a point per unit time      21 plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. they travel more quickly in  the deeper water.    wave directionshallow water deep waterboundary     which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?    abcd     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18 [turn over  22 the diagram shows two plane mirrors at 90 \u00b0 to each other. a ray of light is incident on one of the  mirrors. the ray reflects off both mirrors before reaching a screen.    at which labelled point does the ray reach the screen?    ray of lightscreen a b c d       23 which diagram shows the formation of a real image  of an object o placed in front of a converging  lens?    a b c do oo o      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18  24 different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. below are four  statements about parts of the spectrum.    statement 1: infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.  statement 2: radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to earth.  statement 3: ultraviolet waves are used for intruder alarms. statement 4: x-rays are used for security checks.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 3 and 4      25 which statement about ultrasound is correct?  a ultrasound must have greater amplitude than audible sound.  b ultrasound must have greater frequency than audible sound.  c ultrasound must have lower amplitude than audible sound.  d ultrasound must have lower frequency than audible sound.      26 an iron bar pq is placed close to a bar magnet.    in which diagram does end p become an induced north pole?    a s n p qb n sp qc p q s nd s np q     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18 [turn over  27 the diagram shows a bar magnet at rest on a smooth horizontal surface. a length of soft-iron  wire is held parallel to the magnet.    n ssoft-iron wire magnet     the wire is released.    what happens?  a the wire moves away from the magnet.  b the wire moves towards the magnet.  c the wire\u2019s centre stays in its present position and the wire rotates through 90 \u00b0 in a clockwise  direction.  d the wire\u2019s centre stays in its present position and the wire rotates through 90 \u00b0 in an  anticlockwise direction.     28 a negatively charged plastic rod p is placed above a positively charged plastic rod q.    +++++q\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013p     what are the directions of the electrostatic forces on rod p and on rod q?     electrostatic force  on rod p electrostatic force  on rod q  a downwards downwards  b downwards upwards  c upwards downwards  d upwards upwards    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18  29 the diagrams show the readings on an ammeter in a series circuit before and after the switch in  the circuit has been closed.    3 4 52 1 0 aswitch open 3 4 52 1 0 aswitch closed     what is the current in the circuit when the switch is closed?  a 3.2  a b 3.4  a c 3.6  a d 3.8  a     30 a student investigates the resistance of a lamp.    which row states how the meters must be connected?     ammeter voltmeter  a in parallel with the lamp in parallel with the lamp  b in parallel with the lamp in series with the lamp  c in series with the lamp in parallel with the lamp  d in series with the lamp in series with the lamp    31 a lamp is connected into a circuit so that the potential difference across it can be varied from 0 to  12  v.    which circuit is suitable?    12 va 12 vb 12 vc 12 vd     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18 [turn over  32 the diagram shows a circuit.    a     which statement describes and explains how the circuit behaves?  a the ammeter reading decreases when the light intensity decreases.  b the ammeter reading decreases when the temperature decreases.  c the ammeter reading increases when the light intensity decreases.  d the ammeter reading increases when the temperature decreases.      33 which component uses a small direct current (d.c.) in one circuit to switch on a much larger  current in a second circuit?  a potential divider  b relay  c transformer  d variable resistor     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18  34 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    electrical supplyx y appliancecable cablelive neutral     when a fuse is used, where should it be connected, and when a circuit-breaker is used, where  should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y    35 the diagram shows a horizontal wire between the two magnetic poles of a u-shaped magnet.  the u-shaped magnet is on a balance.    when the switch closed, the reading on the balance decreases.    125.20 g123.49 gswitch open magnetic polesswitch closed magnetic poles     the experiment is carried out three more times with the following changes made.    1 only the current is reversed.  2 only the magnetic field is reversed.  3 both the current and the magnetic field are reversed at the same time.    which changes cause an increase in the reading on the balance?  a 1 only b 2 only c 3 only d 1 and 2 only   ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a coil of wire between the poles of a magnet.    20 turns ns +\u2013 power supply    the coil consists of 20 turns of insulated wire.    the coil is connected to a variable resistor and a power supply.    how can the turning effect on the coil be increased?  a by moving the poles of the magnet closer to the coil  b by reducing the number of turns on the coil while keeping the current constant  c by increasing the resistance of the variable resistor  d by reversing the terminals of the power supply      37 which diagram represents the structure of a neutral atom?    + + \u2013\u2013 \u2013key neutron proton electrona b ++\u2013 ++c +++d \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013      38 the nuclide notation for the isotope lithium-7 is li7 3.    how many neutrons are there in an atom of lithium-7?  a 3 b 4 c 7 d 10     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/12/o/n/18  39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles      40 samples of four different radioactive isotopes all emit radiation at the same rate.    as time passes, the rates of emission decrease for all the samples.    which sample of isotope has the greatest decrease in rate?     isotope half-life  a americium-241 470 years  b iodine-128 25 minutes  c thoron-220 54.5 seconds  d uranium-237 6.75 days       "
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 11_0625_13/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *6069758649 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18  1 a pendulum is set in motion and timed. the time measured for 20 complete swings is 30  s.    what is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?  a 0.67  s b 0.75  s c 1.5  s d 3.0  s      2 a girl goes for a ride on her bicycle.    the diagram shows how her speed changes with time for part of her journey.    in which labelled section is she moving with constant speed?    0 0speed time ab c d     3 a boy runs 400  m at an average speed of 4.0  m / s.    he runs the first 200  m in 40  s.    how long does he take to run the second 200  m?  a 60  s b 66.7  s c 80  s d 140  s     4 which quantity is measured in newtons?  a energy  b mass  c weight  d work     5 the acceleration of free fall on mars is 3.7  m / s2.    what is the weight of a 100  g mass on mars?  a 0.037  n b 0.37  n c 37  n d 370  n    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18 [turn over  6 a student carries out experiments to find the mass and the volume of four samples of rock.    the graph shows the results.    200 100 0 0 50 100mass  / g volume  / cm3sample p sample q sample r sample s     which pair are samples of the same type of rock?  a p and q b p and s c r and q d q and s      7 four objects each have two forces acting on them.    which object is in equilibrium?    1.0 n 1.0  na1.0 n 1.0 nb 1.0 n1.0 nc 1.0 n1.0 nd      8 a car moves along a level road.    the diagram shows all of the horizontal forces acting on the car.    2000  n force from engine500  n friction800  n air resistance     which statement is correct?  a the car is slowing down.  b the car is speeding up.  c the car is moving at a constant speed.  d the car is moving backwards. ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18  9 the diagram shows an aluminium sheet of constant thickness.    four significant points on the aluminium sheet are labelled p, q, r and s.    p q rs     how can the centre of mass be found?  a by finding where a line from p to r crosses a line from s to q  b by suspending the sheet and a plumb-line from q and finding where the plumb-line crosses a  line from p to r  c by suspending the sheet and a plumb-line from p and then from s and finding where the  plumb-lines cross  d by suspending the sheet and a plumb-line from p and finding where the plumb-line crosses a  line from s to q     10 which device is designed to convert chemical energy into kinetic energy?  a an a.c. generator  b a battery-powered torch  c a car engine  d a wind-up mechanical clock     11 a weight hangs from a rope.    force weight     in which case does the force do the most work on the weight?  a the force raises the weight 1.0  m in 15  s.  b the force raises the weight 2.0  m in 45  s.  c the weight is held at the same level for 10  s.  d the weight is held at the same level for 60  s.   ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18 [turn over  12 diagram 1 shows a conical flask containing water.    diagram 2 shows a beaker with the same base area as the flask and containing water of the  same depth d.    d d diagram 1 diagram 2water water xp y     which statement is correct?  a the pressure at p is equal to the pressure at x.  b the pressure at p is greater than the pressure at y.  c the pressure at p is greater than the pressure at x.  d the pressure at y is greater than the pressure at x.     13 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    hconnection to gas supplymanometer liquid     which change gives a greater value of height h ?  a using a less dense liquid  b using a more dense liquid  c using a narrower tube  d using a wider tube     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18  14 liquid in a dish evaporates. this causes the temperature of the remaining liquid to change.    which row is correct?      change in  temperature reason for temperature change  a increase the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid  b increase the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid  c decrease the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid  d decrease the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid      15 diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.    diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.    microscope air molecules andsmoke particleslightdiagram 1 diagram 2 random movementeye     why do the smoke particles move randomly?  a they are hit by air molecules.  b they are less dense than air.  c they are moved by convection currents.  d they gain energy from the light.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18 [turn over  16 which row shows the relative order of thermal expansion of solids, liquids and gases?     most expansion  least expansion  a solids liquids gases  b solids gases liquids  c gases solids liquids  d gases liquids solids      17 steam at 100  \u00b0c condenses to form water at 100  \u00b0c.    what happens to the average separation and what happens to the average speed of the water  molecules?     separation average speed  a decreases decreases  b decreases remains the same  c increases decreases  d increases remains the same     18 some of the sun\u2019s radiation passes through a prism. the diagram shows the spectrum of the  radiation.    which point on the screen does the infra-red radiation reach?    radiation from thesunprism screenab c dvisiblenot visible not visiblered violet      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18  19 one end of a shiny metal rod is heated and the other end quickly gets hot.    which statement describes why the other end quickly gets hot?  a metals are good thermal conductors.  b metals are poor thermal conductors.  c shiny surfaces are good emitters of infra-red radiation.  d shiny surfaces are poor emitters of infra-red radiation.      20 which statement about waves is correct?  a waves do not transfer either energy or matter.  b waves transfer both energy and matter.  c waves transfer energy without transferring matter.  d waves transfer matter without transferring energy.     21 plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. they travel more quickly in  the deeper water.    wave directionshallow water deep waterboundary     which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?    abcd     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18 [turn over  22 a plane mirror is fixed so that it is at an angle of 45 \u00b0 to a table. a ray of light, initially parallel to  the table, is incident on the mirror.    45\u00b0ray of lightplane mirror table     which angle does the reflected ray make with the table?  a 0\u00b0 b 22.5 \u00b0 c 45\u00b0 d 90\u00b0     23 an object is placed 20  cm in front of a thin converging lens. the scale drawing shows how the  lens forms a real, inverted image.    object scale 5.0 cmimage     which row gives the focal length of the lens and the distance of the image from the lens?     focal length  of lens  / cm distance of image  from lens  / cm  a 4.0 5.0  b 5.0 4.0  c 8.0 10.0  d 10.0 8.0    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18  24 different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. below are four  statements about parts of the spectrum.    statement 1: infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.  statement 2: radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to earth.  statement 3: ultraviolet waves are used for intruder alarms. statement 4: x-rays are used for security checks.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 3 and 4      25 which row gives the nature of sound waves and the name of the effect that causes an echo of a  sound?     nature of sound waves effect causing an echo  a longitudinal reflection  b longitudinal refraction  c transverse reflection  d transverse refraction      26 which diagram shows the pattern and the direction of the magnetic field lines around a bar  magnet?    s nc s nds na s nb     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18 [turn over  27 the diagram shows part of a circuit which contains an ammeter, a voltmeter and a resistor r. the  ammeter and the voltmeter are in the correct po sitions to determine the resistance of r.    r meter qmeter p     which expression gives the value of r?  a reading of meter p \u00f7 reading of meter q  b (reading of meter p)2 \u00d7 reading of meter q  c reading of meter q \u00d7 reading of meter p  d reading of meter q \u00f7 reading of meter p     28 a negatively charged plastic rod p is placed above a positively charged plastic rod q.    +++++q\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013p     what are the directions of the electrostatic forces on rod p and on rod q?     electrostatic force  on rod p electrostatic force  on rod q  a downwards downwards  b downwards upwards  c upwards downwards  d upwards upwards    29 which row shows the meaning of the quantity e.m.f. and the unit in which it is measured?     meaning unit  a electromagnetic force n  b electromagnetic force v  c electromotive force n  d electromotive force v    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18  30 diagram 1 shows a voltmeter that is not connected to anything. it shows a small reading, called a  zero error, because it is not correctly adjusted.    diagram 2 shows the same meter used to measure the p.d. across a resistor in a circuit.    6 8 104 2 0 v diagram 16 8 104 2 0 v diagram 2    what is the p.d. across the resistor?  a 4.6  v b 4.7  v c 5.2  v d 5.4  v     31 the diagram shows a potential divider used to control the brightness of a lamp.        what happens as the slider on the potential divider is moved to the right?  a the potential difference across the lamp decreases and the lamp gets brighter.  b the potential difference across the lamp decreases and the lamp gets dimmer.  c the potential difference across the lamp increases and the lamp gets brighter.  d the potential difference across the lamp increases and the lamp gets dimmer.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18 [turn over  32 the diagram shows three identical resistors connected to a battery.    aa aammeter 1 ammeter 2ammeter 3     which row gives the possible readings on the three ammeters?     ammeter 1  / a ammeter 2  / a ammeter 3  / a  a 1.5 3.0 4.5  b 3.0 1.5 4.5  c 3.0 4.5 1.5  d 4.5 1.5 3.0      33 a 4  \u03c9 resistor and a 2  \u03c9 resistor are connected to a 12  v battery in a circuit.    4 \u03c9 2 \u03c912 v     what is the current in the 2  \u03c9 resistor?  a 0.5  a b 2.0  a c 3.0  a d 6.0  a    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18  34 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    electrical supplyx y appliancecable cablelive neutral     when a fuse is used, where should it be connected, and when a circuit-breaker is used, where should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y     35 there is an electric current in a wire. the wire is placed in a magnetic field. a force acts on the  wire due to the current.    which statement is correct?  a the magnetic field must be produced by a permanent magnet and not by an electromagnet.  b the wire must be made from a magnetic material.  c when both the current and the magnetic field are reversed, the direction of the force is  unchanged.  d when the current is reversed, but not the magnetic field, there will be no force on the wire.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18 [turn over  36 which diagram shows the pattern and direction of the magnetic field due to a current in a straight  wire?    currentab ccurrent currentd current       37 which diagram represents the structure of a neutral atom?    + + \u2013\u2013 \u2013key neutron proton electrona b ++\u2013 ++c +++d \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013     ",
            "16": "16    to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/13/o/n/18  38 what is a carbon nucleus, c12 6, composed of?  a 6 neutrons and 6 electrons  b 6 neutrons, 6 protons and 6 electrons  c 6 protons and 6 electrons  d 6 protons and 6 neutrons     39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles     40 the count rate due to a sample of a radioactive isotope is measured for 80 minutes.    time  /  minutes second/ countsrate count     0 480  20 380  40 300  60 240  80 190    what is the half-life of the isotope?  a 20 minutes b 40 minutes c 60 minutes d 80 minutes    "
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 11_0625_21/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *8207631209 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/21     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18  1 the diagram shows part of a micrometer screw gauge.    0 mm1245 40 35 30     what is the smallest reading that can be achieved using this micrometer screw gauge?  a 0.0001  mm b 0.01  mm c 0.1  mm d 1 mm     2 a small, light ball is dropped from the top of a tall building.    which graph shows how the speed of the ball changes with time?    speed time 0a 0speed time 0b 0 speed time 0c 0speed time 0d 0     3 a runner runs 300  m at an average speed of 3.0  m / s. she then runs another 300  m at an average  speed of 6.0  m / s.    what is her average speed for the total distance of 600  m?  a 2.0  m / s b 4.0  m / s c 4.5  m / s d 8.0  m / s    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18 [turn over  4 a helium balloon is tied to a top-pan balance. a metal block of mass 100  g is placed on the  balance. the reading on the balance is 91  g.    91 gmetal blockhelium balloon     which statement can be deduced from this experiment?  a the balloon exerts a downward force of 0.09  n on the top-pan balance.  b the helium has a mass of \u20139  g.  c the helium has a mass of +9  g.  d the resultant downward force on the top-pan balance is 0.91  n.     5 a liquid has a volume of 0.040  m3 and a mass of 30  000  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0.075  kg  / m3 b 7.5  kg  / m3 c 750  kg  / m3 d 7500  kg  / m3    6 a resultant force of 4.0  n acts on an object of mass 0.50  kg for 3.0 seconds.    what is the change in velocity caused by this force?  a 4.0  m / s b 6.0  m / s c 12  m / s d 24  m / s      7 which quantities are both vectors?  a acceleration and force  b acceleration and pressure  c density and force  d density and pressure     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18  8 a moving ball with a momentum of 25  kg  m / s collides head-on with a wall.    wall ball     it rebounds from the wall with the same speed but in the opposite direction. the time of collision  is 50  ms.    what is the average force exerted on th e wall by the ball during the collision?  a 0.50  n b 1.00  n c 500  n d 1000  n    9 which device is designed to convert chemical energy into kinetic energy?  a an a.c. generator  b a battery-powered torch  c a car engine  d a wind-up mechanical clock     10 an object, initially at rest, is  dropped from a height of 12.0  m. the change in gravitational potential  energy when it falls to the ground is 565  j.    the frictional forces are negligible.    what is its speed when it hits the ground?  a 4.71  m / s b 15.5  m / s c 47.1  m / s d 240  m / s     11 a man climbs a ladder.    which two quantities can be used to calculate the useful power of the man?  a the weight of the man and the time taken only  b the weight of the man and the vertical distance moved only  c the work done by the man and the time taken only  d the work done by the man and the vertical distance moved only    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18 [turn over  12 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    hconnection to gas supplymanometer liquid     which change gives a greater value of height h ?  a using a less dense liquid  b using a more dense liquid  c using a narrower tube  d using a wider tube      13 a washbasin has an exit pipe covered with a plug of area 12  cm2. a chain is attached to the  centre of the plug to assist in pulling the plug away from the exit hole. the washbasin contains  water to a depth of 0.080  m.    the density of the water is 1000  kg  / m3.    chain plug     what is the force acting on the plug due to the water?  a 0.96  n b 800  n c 9600  n d 80  000  n     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18  14 diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.    diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.    microscope air molecules andsmoke particleslightdiagram 1 diagram 2 random movementeye     why do the smoke particles move randomly?  a they are hit by air molecules.  b they are less dense than air.  c they are moved by convection currents.  d they gain energy from the light.     15 the gas in a sealed container is compressed at constant temperature.    which graph shows how the pressure of the gas changes with its volume?    0 0pressure volumea 0 0pressure volumeb 0 0pressure volumec 0 0pressure volumed  ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18 [turn over  16 the distance between two electricity pylons is 60  m. an engineer fits a cable of length 62  m  between the pylons.    why does the engineer choose a cable that is longer than the distance between the two pylons?  a to allow for contraction of the cable in cold weather  b to create a slope in the cable for electrons to flow down  c to keep the current low and the voltage high   d to reduce magnetic fields around the cable     17 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    bulb capillary tube     which change increases the sensitivity of the thermometer?  a a narrower capillary tube  b a wider capillary tube  c thicker glass around the bulb  d thinner glass around the bulb      18 an object of mass 800  g and specific heat capacity 250  j / (kg  \u00b0c) is heated. it absorbs 5300  j of  energy.    what is the increase in temperature of the object?  a 0.027  \u00b0c b 17  \u00b0c c 27  \u00b0c d 17  000  \u00b0c     19 on a cold day, a shiny metal rod feels colder to the touch than a black plastic rod.    which statement explains this observation?  a the metal rod is a better absorber of infra-red radiation than the plastic rod.  b the metal rod is a better thermal conductor than the plastic rod.  c the metal rod is a worse absorber of infra-red radiation than the plastic rod.  d the metal rod is a worse thermal conductor than the plastic rod.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18  20 one end of a copper bar is heated to a high temperature.    which mechanism is responsible for the transfer of thermal energy to the other end of the copper  bar?  a the lattice vibrations of copper ions only  b the lattice vibrations of copper ions and the movement of high energy electrons along the bar  c the movement of high energy copper ions along the bar  d the movement of high energy electrons along the bar only     21 plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. they travel more quickly in  the deeper water.    wave directionshallow water deep waterboundary     which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?    abcd      22 which statement about the image formed by a plane mirror is correct?  a the image is larger than the object.  b the image is smaller than the object.  c the image is twice as far from the mirror as the object.  d the image is virtual.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18 [turn over  23 a ray of light is incident on a glass-air surface. the diagrams show the ray of light at different  angles of incidence in the glass.    40\u00b0air glass 44\u00b0airglass 48\u00b0airglass     what is the refractive index of the glass?  a 1.35 b 1.44 c 1.50 d 1.55     24 different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. below are four  statements about parts of the spectrum.    statement 1: infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.  statement 2: radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to earth. statement 3: ultraviolet waves are used for intruder alarms. statement 4: x-rays are used for security checks.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 3 and 4      25 iron is used for the core of a transformer and steel is used to make a bar magnet.    which statement explains these uses of iron and of steel?  a iron is a magnetic material and steel is a non-magnetic material.  b iron is a permanent magnetic material and steel is a temporary magnetic material.  c iron is a temporary magnetic material and steel is a permanent magnetic material.  d iron is a non-magnetic material and steel is a magnetic material.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18  26 a sheet of ice floats on water. a source of sound s is positioned at the edge of the ice sheet.    four microphones are placed equal distances from s.    which microphone detects the sound from s first?    sa cdb iceair water      27 a bar magnet is placed inside a current-carrying coil. the diagram shows four different  experiments.    magnet slowly removed1 magnet slowly removed2 current in coil slowly reduced3+ \u2013 current in coil slowly reduced4 + \u2013    in which experiments is the magnet demagnetised?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 2 and 4 d 3 and 4     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18 [turn over  28 the diagrams represent two different electric fields.    field 1 field 2    a single electron is located in each of the fields.    which row gives the correct direction of the force on the electron and the field in which there is a larger force on it?     direction of  the force larger force  a \u2193 field 1  b \u2193 field 2  c \u2191 field 1  d \u2191 field 2     29 the resistance of a component in a circuit is found using an ammeter and a voltmeter.    how are the ammeter and the voltmeter connected?  a the voltmeter and ammeter in parallel with the component  b the voltmeter and ammeter in series with the component  c the voltmeter in parallel with the component and the ammeter in series with the component  d the voltmeter in series with the component and the ammeter in parallel with the component    30 the table gives data for four different electrical devices.    which device develops the greatest power?     device voltage current  a car headlight 12  v 3.0  a  b cooling fan 110  v 0.40  a  c electric spark generator 400  kv 0.10  ma  d mains lamp 240  v 0.20  a     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18  31 the circuit diagram shows a fixed resistor r and a thermistor t used in a potential divider circuit.    t r     vr and vt are the potential differences across r and t respectively.    what happens to vr and to vt as the temperature of the thermistor decreases?     vr vt  a decreases increases  b increases decreases  c stays the same decreases  d stays the same increases     32 the circuit diagram shows a power supply connected to some circuit components.    in the diagram, p and q are the terminals of the d.c. power supply.    apq r1 r2     under which circumstances does the ammeter show a reading other than zero?  a when p is positive or negative  b the ammeter always shows a zero reading  c only when p is negative  d only when p is positive     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18 [turn over  33 the diagram shows a digital circuit with two inputs and one output.    outputinput 1 input 2     what describes the action of the circuit?  a and b nand c nor d or      34 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    electrical supplyx y appliancecable cablelive neutral     when a fuse is used, where should it be connected, and when a circuit-breaker is used, where should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18  35 there is a current of 3.0  a in a conductor.    the current is changed to 6.0  a in the opposite direction.    which effect does this have on the magnetic field around the conductor?  a it decreases and it acts in the opposite direction.  b it decreases and it acts in the same direction.  c it increases and it acts in the opposite direction.  d it increases and it acts in the same direction.     36 a wire is placed in a strong magnetic field. when a current is passed through the wire it moves  upwards, as shown.    s nmovement     the current is reversed.    in which direction does the wire move?  a downwards  b towards the north pole  c towards the south pole  d upwards    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18 [turn over  37 which diagram represents the structure of a neutral atom?    + + \u2013\u2013 \u2013key neutron proton electrona b ++\u2013 ++c +++d \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013     38 when a uranium-235 nucleus absorbs a neutron, it becomes unstable and undergoes fission.    the fission process produces a barium (ba) nucleus, a krypton (kr) nucleus and 3 neutrons.    the fission process is represented by the nuclear equation shown.    n1 0  +  u235 92  \u2192  ba144 56   +  kr... ...  +  3 n1 0    which symbol represents the resulting krypton nucleus?  a kr89 36 b kr91 34 c kr91 35 d kr91 36     39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/21/o/n/18  40 a scientist measures the count rate of a radioactive sample in a laboratory over a period of  12 weeks.    the background radiation count rate in the laboratory remains constant at 20 counts per minute.    the table shows the scientist\u2019s results before the background radiation count rate is taken into account.    time  /  weeks count rate  / counts per minute  0 100  2 80  4 65  6 54  8 45  10 39  12 34    in which range does the half-life of the radioactive isotope lie?  a between 4 and 6 weeks  b between 6 and 8 weeks  c between 8 and 10 weeks  d more than 12 weeks       "
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 11_0625_22/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *3081874355 * cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18  1 the diagram shows part of a micrometer screw gauge.    0 mm1245 40 35 30     what is the smallest reading that can be achieved using this micrometer screw gauge?  a 0.0001  mm b 0.01  mm c 0.1  mm d 1 mm     2 the speed-time graph shows the motion of a car.    at which time is its acceleration greatest?    speed timea bcd00     3 an athlete runs at a speed of 8  m / s for 10  s, and then at a speed of 6  m / s for 12  s.    which calculation gives the average speed of the athlete in  m / s?  a 268+  b  2212)(6 10)(8 \u00d7+ \u00d7  c  2212)(6 10)(8 \u00f7+ \u00f7  d  226) (128) (10 \u00f7 +\u00f7     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18 [turn over  4 a helium balloon is tied to a top-pan balance. a metal block of mass 100  g is placed on the  balance. the reading on the balance is 91  g.    91 gmetal blockhelium balloon     which statement can be deduced from this experiment?  a the balloon exerts a downward force of 0.09  n on the top-pan balance.  b the helium has a mass of \u20139  g.  c the helium has a mass of +9  g.  d the resultant downward force on the top-pan balance is 0.91  n.     5 the diagram shows four blocks of different metals. each block has a mass of 12  g.    which metal has the largest density?    2 cm1 cm1 cm 3 cm1 cm1 cm2 cm2 cm1 cm 3 cm2 cm1 cmab cd     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18  6 the graph shows how the length of a spring changes when the stretching force is increased.    30 25201510 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6length of spring  / cm force  / n    in the hooke\u2019s law region, what is the spring constant for this spring?  a 0.20  n / cm b 0.22  n / cm c 0.28  n / cm d 0.33  n / cm     7 point x is the centre of mass of a lamina in the shape of a triangle with sides of equal length. the  top of the triangle is cut off along the dotted line shown.    x     what happens to the centre of mass, x?  a moves towards the bottom of the page  b moves to the left  c moves to the right  d moves towards the top of the page     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18 [turn over  8 an object of mass 3.0  kg, travelling at a speed of 6.0  m / s, collides with an object of mass 2.0  kg,  travelling in the opposite direction at a speed of 2.0  m / s.    3.0 kg6.0 m / s 2.0 kg2.0 m / s     the objects stick together during the collision.    what is the speed and direction of the combined mass after the collision?  a 4.4  m / s to the left  b 4.4  m / s to the right  c 2.8  m / s to the left  d 2.8  m / s to the right      9 which device is designed to convert chemical energy into kinetic energy?  a an a.c. generator  b a battery-powered torch  c a car engine  d a wind-up mechanical clock      10 the diagram shows a pendulum.    pr q10 cm     the pendulum swings from p to q to r and back to p.    p is 10  cm higher than q.    at which speed does the pendulum bob pass through q?  a 0.44  m / s b 1.0  m / s c 1.4  m / s d 2.0  m / s    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18  11 a crane on a building site lifts bricks of total mass 200  kg, initially at rest on the ground, with  uniform acceleration.    when the bricks are 5.0  m from the ground, they have a speed of 5.0  m / s.    how much work is done during this process?  a 2.5  kj b 10.0  kj c 12.5  kj d 35  kj     12 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    hconnection to gas supplymanometer liquid     which change gives a greater value of height h ?  a using a less dense liquid  b using a more dense liquid  c using a narrower tube  d using a wider tube     13 a washbasin has an exit pipe covered with a plug of area 12  cm2. a chain is attached to the  centre of the plug to assist in pulling the plug away from the exit hole. the washbasin contains water to a depth of 0.080  m.    the density of the water is 1000  kg  / m3.    chain plug     what is the force acting on the plug due to the water?  a 0.96  n b 800  n c 9600  n d 80  000  n     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18 [turn over  14 diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.    diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.    microscope air molecules andsmoke particleslightdiagram 1 diagram 2 random movementeye     why do the smoke particles move randomly?  a they are hit by air molecules.  b they are less dense than air.  c they are moved by convection currents.  d they gain energy from the light.     15 a closed container of gas is heated. the pressure of the gas increases.    which statement explains this increase in pressure?  a the changes in the momentum of the gas molecules striking the walls of the container increase.  b the forces of attraction between the gas molecules and the walls of the container increase.  c the gas molecules collide with each other more frequently.  d the gas molecules lose more energy when they strike the walls of the container.    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18  16 the metal lid on a glass jar is difficult to unscrew.    the jar is placed in a warm oven until the jar and the lid reach the same temperature. the lid is now easily unscrewed.    which property accounts for this?  a thermal capacity of the jar  b thermal capacity of the lid  c thermal conduction  d thermal expansion      17 a block of iron of mass m is heated and gains 10  kj of internal energy. the temperature of the  block rises by \u03b8 \u00b0c.    a second block of iron of mass 2 m is heated and gains 5.0  kj of internal energy.    what is the temperature rise of the second block in \u00b0c?  a 4\u03b8 b 2\u03b8 c 2\u03b8 d 4\u03b8     18 which factors affect the sensitivity of a thermometer?    1 the diameter of the bore of the tube  2 the length of the capillary tube 3 the thickness of the bulb wall    a 1 only b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3      19 which statement about convection is not correct?  a it enables water in a pan on a cooker to get evenly heated.  b it happens in liquids and gases.  c it means that heat rises.  d it occurs because the density of a fluid decreases when it is heated.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18 [turn over  20 a lamp has a metal filament that glows when heated by an electric current.    the middle of the filament is at a very high temperature. the ends of the filament, which are  connected to the base of the lamp, are cooler.    which statement is correct?  a some thermal energy is conducted to the base of the lamp.  b the filament radiates energy equally at all points along its length.  c the lamp transfers all of the electrical energy it receives into light energy.  d when the voltage across the filament is halved, the power output is halved.      21 plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. they travel more quickly in  the deeper water.    wave directionshallow water deep waterboundary     which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?    abcd       22 a thin converging lens has a focal length of 6.0  cm. an observer looks through the lens at an  object which is placed 4.0  cm from the lens.    4.0 cm objecteye     which description of the image that is observed is correct?  a diminished and inverted  b diminished and virtual  c enlarged and inverted  d enlarged and virtual ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18  23 a transmitter produces radio waves of wavelength 1500  m. it takes the waves 0.025  s to travel  from the transmitter to a radio receiver.    what is the distance between the radio transmitter and the receiver?  a 5.0 \u00d7 103  m b 2.0 \u00d7 105  m c 7.5 \u00d7 106  m d 1.1 \u00d7 1010  m     24 different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. below are four  statements about parts of the spectrum.    statement 1: infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.  statement 2: radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to earth. statement 3: ultraviolet waves are used for intruder alarms. statement 4: x-rays are used for security checks.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 3 and 4     25 a sheet of ice floats on water. a source of sound s is positioned at the edge of the ice sheet.    four microphones are placed equal distances from s.    which microphone detects the sound from s first?    sa cdb iceair water      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18 [turn over  26 the diagram shows a bar magnet at rest on a smooth horizontal surface. a length of soft-iron  wire is held parallel to the magnet.    n ssoft-iron wire magnet     the wire is released.    what happens?  a the wire moves away from the magnet.  b the wire moves towards the magnet.  c the wire\u2019s centre stays in its present position and the wire rotates through 90 \u00b0 in a clockwise  direction.  d the wire\u2019s centre stays in its present position and the wire rotates through 90 \u00b0 in an  anticlockwise direction.    27 the diagram shows point x between two charged plates.    + +++++\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 x     which diagram shows the electric field pattern near point x?    a b c d      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18  28 a bar magnet is placed inside a current-carrying coil. the diagram shows four different  experiments.    magnet slowly removed1 magnet slowly removed2 current in coil slowly reduced3+ \u2013 current in coil slowly reduced4 + \u2013    in which experiments is the magnet demagnetised?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 2 and 4 d 3 and 4     29 copper wire is available in fixed lengths but in various diameters d. each diameter has a different  resistance r.    which relationship between r and d is correct?  a r is directly proportional to d.  b r is directly proportional to d  2.  c r is inversely proportional to d.  d r is inversely proportional to d 2.    30 a student investigates the resistance of a lamp.    which row states how the meters must be connected?     ammeter voltmeter  a in parallel with the lamp in parallel with the lamp  b in parallel with the lamp in series with the lamp  c in series with the lamp in parallel with the lamp  d in series with the lamp in series with the lamp ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18 [turn over  31 the circuit shown is used to change the voltage vout as the temperature of device x changes.    voutdevice x 0 v+6.0  v     which row is correct?     name of this  type of circuit name of  device x  a potential divider fuse  b potential divider thermistor  c variable resistor fuse  d variable resistor thermistor     32 the circuit diagram shows a d.c. power supply connected to two resistors r 1 and r 2 and four  diodes.    + \u2013r1 r2     which statement is correct?  a there is a current in r 1 and a current in r 2.  b there is a current in r 1 but no current in r 2.  c there is no current in r 1 but a current in r 2.  d there is no current in r 1 and no current in r 2.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18  33 a logic gate has inputs 0,0 and an output 1.    which two types of logic gate behave in this way?  a or, and  b or, nand  c nor, and  d nor, nand    34 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    electrical supplyx y appliancecable cablelive neutral     when a fuse is used, where should it be connected, and when a circuit-breaker is used, where should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y     35 electrical power is transmitted at 400  kv and transformed down to 240  v before being delivered to  consumers.    which statement is correct?  a a 400  kv cable requires less insulation than a 240  v cable.  b birds are subject to a high-voltage shock when resting on a high-voltage cable.  c the current in the transmission wires is equal to the current delivered to the consumers.  d with a 400  kv transmission system, a smaller proportion of the energy is used to heat the  atmosphere than with a 240  v system.    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a coil of wire between the poles of a magnet.    20 turns ns +\u2013 power supply    the coil consists of 20 turns of insulated wire.    the coil is connected to a variable resistor and a power supply.    how can the turning effect on the coil be increased?  a by moving the poles of the magnet closer to the coil  b by reducing the number of turns on the coil while keeping the current constant  c by increasing the resistance of the variable resistor  d by reversing the terminals of the power supply      37 which diagram represents the structure of a neutral atom?    + + \u2013\u2013 \u2013key neutron proton electrona b ++\u2013 ++c +++d \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013      38 a radioactive nucleus rn220 86  decays in two stages to produce pb212 82 .    which two particles are emitted in this process?  a an \u03b1-particle and a \u03b2-particle  b an \u03b1-particle and a proton  c two \u03b1-particles  d two \u03b2-particles     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/22/o/n/18  39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles      40 the count rate measured when near a radioactive source drops from 542 counts per minute to  94 counts per minute in 12 hours. the background count remains constant at 30 counts per minute.    what is the half-life of the source?  a 2 hours b 3 hours c 4 hours d 8 hours       "
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "  the syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ir eland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificat e.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib18 11_0625_23/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over     *9510057274* cambridge international examinations  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/23     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2018     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18  1 the diagram shows part of a micrometer screw gauge.    0 mm1245 40 35 30     what is the smallest reading that can be achieved using this micrometer screw gauge?  a 0.0001  mm b 0.01  mm c 0.1  mm d 1 mm     2 an object falls in a gravitational field with air resistance.    which distance-time graph shows this motion?    distance fallen timea 0 0distancefallen timeb 0 0 distancefallen timec 0 0distancefallen timed 0 0     3 a boy runs 400  m at an average speed of 4.0  m / s.    he runs the first 200  m in 40  s.    how long does he take to run the second 200  m?  a 60  s b 66.7  s c 80  s d 140  s    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18 [turn over  4 a helium balloon is tied to a top-pan balance. a metal block of mass 100  g is placed on the  balance. the reading on the balance is 91  g.    91 gmetal blockhelium balloon     which statement can be deduced from this experiment?  a the balloon exerts a downward force of 0.09  n on the top-pan balance.  b the helium has a mass of \u20139  g.  c the helium has a mass of +9  g.  d the resultant downward force on the top-pan balance is 0.91  n.     5 a student carries out experiments to find the mass and the volume of four samples of rock.    the graph shows the results.    200 100 0 0 50 100mass  / g volume  / cm3sample p sample q sample r sample s     which pair are samples of the same type of rock?  a p and q b p and s c r and q d q and s     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18  6 an object accelerates from 10  m / s to 30  m / s in 4.0 seconds.    the accelerating force is 150  n.    what is the mass of the object?  a 0.033  kg b 5.0  kg c 7.5  kg d 30  kg     7 the diagram shows a uniform bar of length 120  cm and weight w. the bar is pivoted at a point  40  cm from the left end of the bar.  a load of 2w is suspended from the right-hand end of the bar.  a downward force f is applied to the left-hand end of the bar to keep it in equilibrium.    pivot bar f bar\u2019s weight w w 204 0  cm 60  cm 120  cm     what is the magnitude of force f ?  a 2w b w c 23w d 2w      8 an electron is moving at a speed of 5 \u00d7 106  m / s.  a neutron is moving at a speed of 5 \u00d7 104  m / s.    the mass of the electron is m.  the mass of the neutron is 2000 m.    which row is correct?     greater  momentum greater  kinetic energy  a electron electron  b electron neutron  c neutron electron  d neutron neutron     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18 [turn over  9 which device is designed to convert chemical energy into kinetic energy?  a an a.c. generator  b a battery-powered torch  c a car engine  d a wind-up mechanical clock      10 a barrel of mass 40  kg is raised to a height of 1.5  m by rolling it up a ramp. the length of the ramp  is 8.0  m. the force f applied to the barrel acts parallel to the ramp. the frictional force is  negligible.    1.5 m8.0 m 40 kgf     which row is correct?     gain in gravitational  potential energy  / j force f / n  a 60 7.5  b 60 40  c 600 75  d 600 400     11 what is the main process by which energy is produced in the sun?  a combustion  b nuclear fission  c nuclear fusion  d radioactive decay     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18  12 a manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.    hconnection to gas supplymanometer liquid     which change gives a greater value of height h ?  a using a less dense liquid  b using a more dense liquid  c using a narrower tube  d using a wider tube      13 a washbasin has an exit pipe covered with a plug of area 12  cm2. a chain is attached to the  centre of the plug to assist in pulling the plug away from the exit hole. the washbasin contains  water to a depth of 0.080  m.    the density of the water is 1000  kg  / m3.    chain plug     what is the force acting on the plug due to the water?  a 0.96  n b 800  n c 9600  n d 80  000  n     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18 [turn over  14 diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.    diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.    microscope air molecules andsmoke particleslightdiagram 1 diagram 2 random movementeye     why do the smoke particles move randomly?  a they are hit by air molecules.  b they are less dense than air.  c they are moved by convection currents.  d they gain energy from the light.     15 a bubble of air has a volume of 2.0  cm3 at the bottom of a lake where the total pressure is  4.0 \u00d7 105  pa. the temperature of the water in the lake is constant. the atmospheric pressure at  the surface is 1.0 \u00d7 105  pa.    what is the volume of the bubble when it rises to the surface?  a 0.13  cm3 b 0.17  cm3 c 6.0  cm3 d 8.0  cm3      16 which row shows the relative order of thermal expansion of solids, liquids and gases?     most expansion  least expansion  a solids liquids gases  b solids gases liquids  c gases solids liquids  d gases liquids solids     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18  17 a block of ice is at a temperature of \u2013100  \u00b0c. energy is supplied at a constant rate. the graph  shows how its temperature changes.    time200 100 0 \u2013100temperature / \u00b0c 1 23 4     at which points has the ice completely changed state to water and all the water completely  changed state to steam?     completely  changed to water completely  changed to steam  a 1 3  b 1 4  c 2 3  d 2 4     18 the temperature of the water at the bottom of a waterfall is greater than the temperature of the  water at the top.    the gravitational potential energy of the water at the top is transferred to thermal energy at the  bottom.    the specific heat capacity of water is 4200  j / (kg  \u00b0c).    what is the temperature difference for a waterfall of height 21  m?  a 0.005  \u00b0c b 0.05  \u00b0c c 20  \u00b0c d 200  \u00b0c    19 one end of a shiny metal rod is heated and the other end quickly gets hot.    which statement describes why the other end quickly gets hot?  a metals are good thermal conductors.  b metals are poor thermal conductors.  c shiny surfaces are good emitters of infra-red radiation.  d shiny surfaces are poor emitters of infra-red radiation.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18 [turn over  20 four different surfaces are at the same high temperature.    which surface will emit thermal radiation at the slowest rate?     colour of  surface texture of  surface surface  area  / cm2  a black dull 10  b black dull 100  c white shiny 10  d white shiny 100      21 plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. they travel more quickly in  the deeper water.    wave directionshallow water deep waterboundary     which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?    abcd      22 an object is placed 8.0  cm from a thin converging lens of focal length 5.0  cm.    5.0 cm 8.0 cmconverging lens fobject     which statement about the image formed by the lens is correct?  a the image is real and inverted.  b the image is real and upright.  c the image is virtual and inverted.  d the image is virtual and upright. ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18  23 light travels through air and then enters and travels through a parallel-sided glass block.    which statement is correct?  a the angle of incidence is greater than the angle of refraction as the light leaves the block.  b the light emerging from the block is parallel to the light entering the block.  c the speed of the light decreases as it leaves the block.  d the wavelength of the light does not change as it enters the block.     24 different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. below are four  statements about parts of the spectrum.    statement 1: infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.  statement 2: radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to earth. statement 3: ultraviolet waves are used for intruder alarms. statement 4: x-rays are used for security checks.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 3 and 4     25 a sheet of ice floats on water. a source of sound s is positioned at the edge of the ice sheet.    four microphones are placed equal distances from s.    which microphone detects the sound from s first?    sa cdb iceair water     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18 [turn over  26 which diagram shows the pattern and the direction of the magnetic field lines around a bar  magnet?    s nc s nds na s nb      27 a bar magnet is placed inside a current-carrying coil. the diagram shows four different  experiments.    magnet slowly removed1 magnet slowly removed2 current in coil slowly reduced3+ \u2013 current in coil slowly reduced4 + \u2013    in which experiments is the magnet demagnetised?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 2 and 4 d 3 and 4 ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18  28 which row shows the meaning of the quantity e.m.f. and the unit in which it is measured?     meaning unit  a electromagnetic force n  b electromagnetic force v  c electromotive force n  d electromotive force v      29 which diagram shows the current-voltage ( i - v) characteristic for a filament lamp?    0 0 va i 0 0 vb i 0 0 vc i 0 0 vd i      30 the diagram shows a light-dependent resistor (ldr) connected in a potential divider circuit.    v     the brightness of the light falling on the ldr is increased.    which row shows what happens to the resistance of the ldr, and what happens to the reading on the voltmeter?     resistance of ldr reading on voltmeter  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18 [turn over  31 the diagram shows part of an electric circuit. the reading on the voltmeter is 16  v. the current in  the resistor is 8.0  a.    v pq 8.0 a    one coulomb of charge flows from p to q through the resistor.    how much energy is transferred in the resistor?  a 2.0  j b 8.0  j c 16  j d 128  j     32 which symbol represents an and gate?    abcd       33 either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that  could cause overheating.    electrical supplyx y appliancecable cablelive neutral     when a fuse is used, where should it be connected, and when a circuit-breaker is used, where  should it be connected?     position  of fuse position of  circuit-breaker  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18  34 the circuit diagram shows an a.c. power supply connected to two diodes and a resistor.    a.c. power supplyx y     the graph shows the current from the supply.    current time 00     which graph shows the current in diode x?    current timea 00current timeb 00 current timec 00current timed 00       35 a 100% efficient step-down transformer has primary voltage  vp and primary current  ip.    which row compares the secondary voltage with vp and the secondary current with ip?     secondary voltage secondary current  a greater than vp greater than ip  b greater than vp less than ip  c less than vp greater than ip  d less than vp less than ip   ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18 [turn over  36 there is an electric current in a wire. the wire is placed in a magnetic field. a force acts on the  wire due to the current.    which statement is correct?  a the magnetic field must be produced by a permanent magnet and not by an electromagnet.  b the wire must be made from a magnetic material.  c when both the current and the magnetic field are reversed, the direction of the force is  unchanged.  d when the current is reversed, but not the magnetic field, there will be no force on the wire.     37 which diagram represents the structure of a neutral atom?    + + \u2013\u2013 \u2013key neutron proton electrona b ++\u2013 ++c +++d \u2013 \u2013\u2013 \u2013      38 a nucleus of ra228 88  decays into an isotope of actinium, which then decays into a nucleus of  th228 90.    what types of radiation have been emitted during this process?  a one alpha particle only  b one alpha particle and one beta particle  c two alpha particles  d two beta particles     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  international examinations copyright acknow ledgements booklet. this is produced for each  series of examinations and is freely a vailable to download at  www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.    cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge as sessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of unive rsity of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2018 0625/23/o/n/18  39 the diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation x, y and z.    x  y z  2  mm of plastic10 mm of aluminium50 mm of lead    which row correctly identifies x, y and z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  c \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles  d \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles      40 the count rate due to a sample of a radioactive isotope is measured for 80 minutes.    time  / minutes second/ countsrate count     0 480  20 380  40 300  60 240  80 190    what is the half-life of the isotope?  a 20 minutes b 40 minutes c 60 minutes d 80 minutes       "
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/cgw) 151472/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn over *7220313829* physics  0625/31 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 fig. 1.1 shows a speed-time graph for a student who is running. 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100123speed m / s time  / s45 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) describe the movement of the student, as shown in fig. 1.1.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) calculate the distance travelled by the student between 80  s and 100  s.  distance travelled =  ... m [3]  (b) an athlete runs 630  m in 130  s on a flat section of a road and then 254  m in 40  s on a downhill  slope.   calculate the average speed for the total distance run by the athlete.  average speed =  ... m / s [3]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a raft floating on water. raft water fig. 2.1  (a) a force of 20  000 n acts on the raft in the direction of the arrow shown in fig. 2.1.   (i) state the name given to the force shown in fig. 2.1.  ... [1]   (ii) calculate the mass of the raft.  mass =  .. kg [3]  (b) a sail is added to the raft, as shown in fig. 2.2. 800  n 1200  nsail fig. 2.2   fig. 2.2 shows the horizontal forces acting on the raft at one moment.   calculate the resultant horizontal force acting on the raft and state the direction of this force.  force =   n  direction =  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a tower crane has a load w, as shown in fig. 3.1. loadpivot tower80 000  ncounterweight8.0 m 5.0 m w fig. 3.1  (a) the counterweight has a weight of 80  000 n. this acts at a distance of 5.0  m from the pivot, as  shown in fig. 3.1.   calculate the moment of the counterweight about the pivot. give the unit.  moment =  ... [3]  (b) the tower crane in fig. 3.1 balances horizontally when holding the load w.   calculate the weight of load w.  weight =  ... n [3]  [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 a student draws diagrams that represent three states of matter, as shown in fig. 4.1.  box b shows the arrangement of particles in a liquid. box a box b box c fig. 4.1  (a) (i) in box a, draw the arrangement of particles in a solid.  [1]   (ii) in box c, draw the arrangement of particles in a gas.  [1]  (b) write the correct term for each change of state below each arrow in fig. 4.2. solid liquid gas liquid  [2] fig. 4.2  (c) a wet beaker is in a warm room. after several hours the beaker is dry.   state and explain what happens to the water.    use your ideas about molecules in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 a tidal barrage (dam) produces electricity using tides. fig. 5.1 shows a diagram of a tidal barrage  (simplified). tide coming in river turbinehigh tide flow of waterflow of water ocean oceanlow tidetide going out riverbarrage barrage turbine fig. 5.1  (a) the water behind the barrage (dam) is a store of energy. state the name of this stored energy.  ... [1]  (b) explain how the tidal barrage (dam) produces electricity.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 6  (a) some materials are poor conductors of thermal energy (heat energy).   state the term that describes materials that are poor conductors of thermal energy.  ... [1]  (b) some materials are good conductors of thermal energy.   draw a ring around each material that is a good conductor of thermal energy.     air    aluminium     copper     glass     plastic     water  [1]  (c) a student has two rods made of different materials. the rods are the same size.   describe an experiment to identify which material is the better conductor of thermal energy.   you may draw a diagram in the space below.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 fig. 7.1 shows the electromagnetic spectrum. one type of radiation is not labelled. radio wavesmicro- wavesinfra-red wavesvisible lightx-raysgamma rays fig. 7.1  (a) (i) on fig. 7.1, add the label for the missing type of radiation.  [1]   (ii) the arrow in fig. 7.1 indicates a property that is increasing.    state the name of the property that is increasing in the direction of the arrow.   ... [1]   (iii) compare the speeds of radio waves and visible light in a vacuum.  ... [1]  (b) (i) describe how x-rays are used for security in airports.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) explain the properties of x-rays that make them useful in airport security.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a tuning fork and a wooden block. tuning fork wooden block fig. 8.1   (i) the tuning fork is hit against the wooden block and then makes a sound.    describe how the tuning fork produces the sound.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) the tuning fork produces a sound with a frequency of 659  hz.    state whether a healthy human ear can hear this frequency of sound. explain your  answer.  ...  ... [2]  (b) fig. 8.2 represents the sound wave produced by a tuning fork. time fig. 8.2   a second tuning fork produces a different sound.   compared with the sound represented in fig. 8.2, this sound is quieter and has half the  frequency.   on fig. 8.2, draw the wave to show the sound produced by the second tuning fork.  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 a student experiments with electric charge.  (a) the student uses a dry cloth to rub a plastic rod. the rod becomes positively charged.   explain how the friction between the rod and the cloth causes the rod to become positively  charged.   use your ideas about the movement of charge.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) the student suspends a balloon from an insulating thread, as shown in fig. 9.1. ballooninsulating thread fig. 9.1   the balloon has an electric charge.   explain how the student can use a positively charged rod to determine the charge on the  balloon.  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 10 (a) a student does an experiment to determine the resistance of a fixed resistor, r.   the student draws an incomplete diagram of the circuit, as shown in fig. 10.1. open switch variable resistor r fig. 10.1   (i) on fig. 10.1, draw the missing circuit symbols.  [3]   (ii) describe how the student could use the circuit to determine a reliable value for the  resistance of r.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a 20  \u03c9 resistor connected to a power supply. 20 \u03c90.4 a fig. 10.2   a second 20  \u03c9 resistor is connected in series with the first. state and explain how this affects  the current in the circuit.  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 11]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 11 (a) a student has a model electric railway. the model railway uses a step-down transformer.   the input voltage is 230  v. the transformer has 1710 turns on the input coil and 90 turns on  the output coil.   calculate the output voltage of the transformer.  output voltage =  ... v [3]  (b) a step-up  transformer is used to increase voltage.   step-up transformers and step-down transformers have different coil arrangements.   describe the differences in the coil arrangement for the two types of transformer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) explain the advantage of transmitting electricity at high voltages, rather than at low voltages.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 12 this notation represents the nucleus of a neutral atom of carbon-14. 14 6c  (a) state the number of:   1. protons in the nucleus of an atom of carbon-14  ... [1]   2. electrons orbiting the nucleus of an atom of carbon-14  ... [1]   3. neutrons in the nucleus of an atom of carbon-14.  ... [1]  (b) carbon-14 is an isotope of carbon. carbon-12 is another isotope of carbon.   compare the nucleus of carbon-14 with the nucleus of carbon-12.   state the similarities and differences.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (c) scientists use carbon-14 to estimate the age of wood that is very old.   a very old sample of wood contains 1.0 \u00d7 108 carbon-14 atoms.   when the sample was new, it contained 8.0 \u00d7 108 carbon-14 atoms.   the half-life of carbon-14 is 5  700 years.   estimate the age of the sample of wood.  age of wood =    years [3]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "*3218157755* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (sc/sw) 151471/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overphysics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a person on roller skates makes a journey. fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the journey. 00510152025 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 time  / sspeed m / s 90 100wx y z fig. 1.1  (a) the graph shows three types of motion.   complete the table to show when each type of motion occurs. use the letters shown on  fig. 1.1. add a letter to each of the blank spaces.   the first row is done for you. motion start of motion end of motion acceleration w x deceleration constant speed  [2]  (b) calculate the distance travelled between 60  s and 100  s.  distance =  .  m [3]  (c) the size of the acceleration is greater than the deceleration.    describe how fig. 1.1 shows this.  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 a student is studying elephants. fig. 2.1 shows an elephant.  fig. 2.1  (a) the student measures the elephant and records the values, as shown in the table.   complete the table by adding a suitable unit for each measurement. choose the units from  those shown in the box. m2    kg    cm    mm2    g    m    cm2    mg    mm measurements value unit mass of elephant 4000 height of elephant      3.0 average area of an elephant\u2019s foot        0.125  [2]  (b) using information from the table in (a):   (i) calculate the weight of the elephant.  weight =  .  n [3]   (ii) calculate the pressure the elephant exerts on the ground when it is standing on four  feet. include a unit.  pressure =  .  [4]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a flask contains gas with a pressure lower than atmospheric pressure.  fig. 3.1 shows equipment being used to measure the pressure of the gas in the flask. a b280  mm mercurygasflaskatmospheric pressure fig. 3.1  (a) state the name of the equipment shown in fig. 3.1 that is used to measure the pressure of  the gas.  ..  [1]  (b) the atmospheric pressure is equal to 760  mm hg.    the distance between mercury level a and mercury level b is 280  mm.   determine the pressure of the gas inside the flask.  pressure =    mm hg [2]  (c) the flask is cooled. describe the effect, if any, the cooling has on mercury level a  . mercury level b  .  [1]  [total: 4]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over4 a drone is a machine that can fly. fig. 4.1 shows a drone rising into the air, lifting a camera. camera fig. 4.1  the drone obtains energy from a battery of cells.  (a) complete the sequence of useful energy transfers as the drone rises into the air. one part is  done for you.   .  electrical energy  .. [2]  (b) the drone can move in any direction up or down, backwards or forwards, left or right. it can  also remain stationary above the ground.   describe the motion and position of the drone when it has both a large  quantity of potential  energy and a small  quantity of kinetic energy.  ...  ..  [2]  (c) when the drone moves, it wastes some energy. state the form of wasted energy and describe  what happens to this energy. form of energy  .. description    ..  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 (a) state the meaning of the term thermal capacity .  ...  ..  [1]  (b) when a material is cooled or heated there may be a change of state.   complete each statement by using words from the box. each word can be used once, more  than once or not at all. condensation     evaporation     freezing     melting the change from solid to liquid is called  . the change from liquid to gas is called   . the change from liquid to solid is called  . the change from gas to liquid is called   .  .  [4]  (c) a student heats a gas and keeps its volume constant.   state and explain the effect on the pressure of the gas. in your answer, use your ideas about  molecules.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of red light incident on part of a lens. lens red light fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, continue the path of the ray as it passes through the lens and emerges  from it. [2]   (ii) state the term used to describe the process as the ray enters and leaves the lens.  ..  [1]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows two parallel rays of light travelling towards another lens. fig. 6.2   the two rays of light pass through the lens to form an image.   on fig. 6.2, continue the path of the rays. extend the rays for at least 5  cm beyond the  lens.  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 (a) a ray of white light is incident on a glass prism. it forms a spectrum that is visible on the  screen. fig. 7.1 shows the arrangement. ray of white lightnarrow slit violetredscreen fig. 7.1   two of the colours in the visible spectrum are listed in the box below.   complete the box. list the five missing colours of the visible spectrum, in the correct order. red  ..   ..   ..   ..   ..   violet  [2]  (b) electromagnetic radiation has many uses.   (i) draw a line from each use to the type of radiation it requires.  use type of radiation  detecting an intruder at night communicating by satellite  for a telephone detecting broken bones in  the bodyradio waves infra-red gamma raysx-raysultravioletvisible lightmicrowaves  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) the types of radiation listed in (b)(i)  form the electromagnetic spectrum. amplitude     frequency     velocity    complete the sentence. choose a word from the box. the position of each type of radiation in the electromagnetic spectrum depends on its      . [1]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 8 (a) a healthy human ear can hear a range of frequencies.   three frequency ranges are shown.   draw a ring around the range for a healthy human ear. 0 hz \u2013 20  hz      10 hz \u2013 10  000 hz      20 hz \u2013 20  000 hz  [1]  (b) explain the meaning of the term ultrasound .  ...  ..  [2]  (c) a student listens to two different sounds, p and q.   the two different sounds are represented on a computer screen on the same scale.   fig. 8.1 shows the screens. sound p sound q fig. 8.1   state and explain how sound p is different from sound q.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 9 a student fits an electrical generator to a bicycle. when the front wheel turns, a magnet rotates  between two coils of wire.  a lamp is connected to the coils of wire. when the magnet is rotating, the lamp is lit.  fig. 9.1 shows the magnet, the coils of wire and the lamp. n s lamp fig. 9.1  (a) describe and explain how rotating the magnet causes the lamp to light.  ...  ...  ...  ..  [3]  (b) state three ways of increasing the brightness of the bicycle lamp. 1.  ... 2.  ... 3.  ..  [3]  (c) the generator provides an a.c. supply for the lamp.   (i) state the meaning of the term  a.c.  ..  [1]   (ii) describe how a.c. differs from d.c.  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 10 fig. 10.1 shows a circuit used by a student to test a metal wire made of nichrome. a avammeter x ammeter y0.8 a nichrome wirecomponent z fig. 10.1  (a) state the name of component z.  ..  [1]  (b) the current reading on ammeter x is 0.8  a. state the reading on ammeter y.  ..  [1]  (c) the current in the nichrome wire is 0.8  a. the potential difference (p.d.) across the nichrome  wire is 4.5  v.   calculate the resistance of the nichrome wire.   resistance =  .  \u03c9 [3]  (d) the student tests a different nichrome wire, which is thicker than the wire in (c), but of the  same length. when testing this wire, the current in the wire is different from the value given  in (c).   state and explain the difference in current.  ...  ...  ..  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 11 (a) a long straight wire passes through a piece of card. there is a current in the wire, as shown  in fig. 11.1. current card fig. 11.1   fig. 11.2 shows the view of the card from above. the current is into the page. card magnetic field line fig. 11.2   the current in the wire produces a magnetic field around the wire. one magnetic field line is   drawn.   on fig. 11.2, draw two more magnetic field lines around the wire. show the direction of the  magnetic field by drawing an arrow on each field line.  [2]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) fig. 11.3 shows the circuit for an electric bell. springy metal strip coils of wire switchcontact screw soft iron armaturehammer bell fig. 11.3   explain how the circuit causes the hammer to hit the bell repeatedly when the switch is  closed.   use your ideas about circuits and electromagnets.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ..  [5]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 12 (a) draw a line from each part of the atom to its description.  part of the atom  description  nucleus electron neutronis an electromagnetic wave has no electric charge orbits the centre of an atomis the centre of the atom  [3]  (b) tritium is an isotope of hydrogen. it can be represented by 13h.   (i) explain the meaning of the term isotope .  ...  ...  ..  [2]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018   (ii) fig. 12.1 shows how the activity of a sample of tritium varies with time. 00200040006000800010 00012 00014 00016 00018 000 10 20 30 40 50 time  / yearscount rate counts  / min 60 fig. 12.1    use fig. 12.1 to calculate the half-life of tritium. show clearly how you used the graph.  half-life =  ...  years [3]  [total: 8] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "*2763639155* this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (lk/ct) 151470/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overphysics  0625/33 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 fig. 1.1 shows a large tank containing water. the tank leaks. drops of water fall from the tank.  the drops hit the ground at a regular rate. 12 mtank water grounddrops of water fig. 1.1  (a) a student measures the time interval between two drops of water hitting the ground.   she uses a stopwatch and repeats the procedure three times. fig. 1.2 shows each stopwatch     reading. 0...0124min s s1 100 0.0114 min s s1 100 0.0116min s s1 100 .. .. time =  s   time =  s   time =  s fig. 1.2   (i) on the line below each stopwatch, state the time readings shown, in seconds.  [1]   (ii) calculate the average time interval between two drops of water hitting the ground.  average time =  ...  s [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) another student measures the average time taken for a drop of water to fall from the tank to  the ground. the time taken is 1.6  s.   calculate the average speed of this drop of water.  average speed =  ...  m/s [3]  (c) fig. 1.3 shows the speed-time graph for a different drop of water. 0.50.51.01.52.02.53.03.54.04.55.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.50 0speed m / s time  / sp q fig. 1.3   use fig. 1.3 to determine the distance fallen by the drop between p and q.   distance  =  ..  m [3]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 (a) a student has a piece of metal that has an irregular shape. the weight of the metal is 3.0  n.   calculate the mass of the metal.  mass =  .  kg [2]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows the piece of metal, a measuring cylinder and a beaker containing water. metal measuring cylinderbeakerwater fig. 2.1   (i) describe how to determine the volume of the metal, using the equipment in fig. 2.1.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]   (ii) explain why the procedure in (b)(i)  is not suitable for finding the volume of a piece of   low-density wood that is of similar shape and size to the piece of metal in (a).  ...  ... [1]    (iii) the mass of another piece of metal is 405  g and its volume is 150  cm3.    calculate the density of the metal. state the unit.  density =  ..  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows devices that generate electricity. fig. 3.1  (a) describe how the devices shown in fig. 3.1 generate electrical energy.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) describe the  advantages and disadvantages of generating electrical energy by using a  coal-fired power station compared with the devices shown in fig. 3.1.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 (a) in fig. 4.1, each box represents a state of matter. each arrow shows a change of state. some  labels are missing. liquidfreezing boiling fig. 4.1   (i) on fig. 4.1, write the name of the state of matter in each of the empty boxes.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 4.1, on each unlabelled arrow, write the change of state that it represents.  [1]  (b) these statements are about particles in a liquid. two statements are correct.   tick the boxes next to the two correct statements.    the particles are in a regular pattern.    the particles are as far apart as those in a gas.    the particles are a similar distance apart to those in a solid.    the particles vibrate about fixed positions.    the particles move randomly.  [2]  [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 5  (a) fig. 5.1 shows a transverse wave.  four distances a, b, c and d are marked on the wave. ba cd fig. 5.1   state the letter that shows the amplitude of the wave.   ... [1]  (b) state the meaning of the term frequency  of a wave.  ...  ... [2]  (c) a long spring is fixed at one end, as shown in fig. 5.2. the spring is moved towards and  away from the fixed end, repeatedly. the compressions and rarefactions on the spring at a  particular time can be seen. direction of wave travel towards and away from fixed endfixed end 0 1 m 2 m 3 m 4 m tape measure fig. 5.2   (i) state the type of wave in the spring.  ... [1]   (ii) state one other example of this type of wave.  ... [1]   (iii) use the scale in fig. 5.2 to  determine  the wavelength of the wave in the spring.  wavelength =    cm [1]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of green light hitting a glass prism. ray of green lightnormalscreen fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, label the angle of incidence for the ray, using the letter, i. [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray of green light until it hits the screen.  [2]  (b) the ray of green light is replaced with a ray of white light.   (i) the white light splits into a spectrum of colours. state the term used to describe this  effect.  ... [1]   (ii) state the colour that is refracted most by the prism.  ... [1]  [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 7 some students make statements about sound.  in each part of the question, only one statement is correct.   place a tick in the box next to each correct statement.  (a)  sound travels at the same speed as light.    sound travels faster than the speed of light.    sound travels slower than the speed of light.  [1]  (b)  healthy human ears can hear sounds in the range 2.0  hz to 2000  hz.    healthy human ears can hear sounds in the range 20  hz to 20  000 hz.    healthy human ears can hear sounds in the range 200  hz to 200  000 hz. [1]  (c)  increasing the amplitude of a sound wave increases its speed.    increasing the amplitude of a sound wave increases its frequency.    increasing the amplitude of a sound wave increases its loudness.  [1]  (d)  an echo is produced when sound is diffracted.    an echo is produced when sound is refracted.    an echo is produced when sound is reflected.  [1]  [total: 4]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 8 fig. 8.1 shows a sheet of paper. a bar magnet is underneath the paper. a student sprinkles iron  filings onto the paper. paper position of magnet under paper fig. 8.1  (a) on fig. 8.1 \u2022 label the position of each pole of the magnet. use the label n for the north pole and s  for the south pole. \u2022 draw one magnetic field line above the magnet and draw one magnetic field line below  the magnet.  \u2022 add one arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field.    [4]  (b) a student places a soft iron rod inside a coil of insulated wire. the coil is connected to a  battery, as shown in fig. 8.2. switchbatterysoft iron rod coil of insulated wire fig. 8.2   (i) state the name given to the device shown in fig. 8.2.  ... [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) the student puts one end of the device in fig. 8.2 just above a pile of iron filings.     he closes the switch for a short time and then opens it again.     describe the effect this has on the iron filings.  ...  ... [1]   (iii) the student removes the soft iron rod and replaces it with a steel rod.    he puts one end of the steel rod just above the pile of iron filings. he closes the switch  for a short time and then opens it again.    describe the effect this has on the iron fillings.  ...  ...  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with two lamps and three ammeters connected in series to a power supply. a2a1a3 fig. 9.1  (a) the current shown on ammeter a1 is 0.6  a.   complete the table with the values for the current that would be shown on the other two  ammeters. ammeter current  / a a2 a3  [1]  (b) the resistance of each lamp is 20  \u03c9.   determine the combined resistance of the lamps.  resistance =  ..  \u03c9 [1]  (c) the circuit is changed. the two lamps are connected in parallel.   (i) compare the current from the power supply with the current in each lamp.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) compare the resistance of one lamp in this circuit with the combined resistance of the  two lamps connected in parallel.  ...  ... [1]  (d) a different series circuit contains a 140  \u03c9 fixed resistor. an ammeter in the circuit shows a  current of 0.30  a.    calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor. state the unit.  potential difference =  ..  [4]  [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 10  (a) state the name of the component represented by the symbol .   describe its purpose. name  . purpose  . [2]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows an electrical cooker hood used in some kitchens.  fan driven by motor light fig. 10.1   the cooker hood removes steam from the kitchen. it has a fan driven by a motor. it also has  a lamp.   fig. 10.2 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the cooker hood. t szym fig. 10.2   (i) state the type of electrical supply used by the cooker hood.  ... [1]   (ii) switch s is closed. switch t is moved to position y. state the name of any components  that are switched on.  ... [1]   (iii) switch t is moved from position y to position z. suggest how this change affects the  motor.  ... [1]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (c) electrical appliances with metal cases can become dangerous if there is a fault. suggest a  hazard and describe a safety feature to reduce the danger. hazard  ...  ... safety feature    ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 11 (a) fig. 11.1 shows a simple electric motor. n s wzxy brush contact fig. 11.1   (i) there is a current in the coil wxyz. the direction of this current is shown by the arrows.    on fig. 11.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force acting on side wx and an  arrow to show the direction of the force acting on side yz.  [1]   (ii) state three ways of increasing the turning effect of the motor. 1.  ... 2.  ... 3.  ... [3]  (b) in a home, a step-down transformer reduces the mains voltage of 225  v to 4.5  v.   the transformer has 4000 turns on the primary coil.   calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  number of turns =  ..  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.12 a nuclear power station uses uranium to generate thermal energy.   (a) the fuel for the power station is an isotope of uranium.   explain the meaning of the term isotope .  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) when the nucleus of a uranium atom decays, it releases a \u03b2-particle.    describe the relative ionising effect, and the relative penetrating ability, of a \u03b2-particle. relative ionising effect  ...  ... relative penetrating ability  .  ... [2]  (c) a sample of rock includes some uranium-239.    the half-life of uranium-239 is 23 minutes.     determine the fraction of the uranium-239 that remains after 46 minutes.  fraction remaining =  ... [2]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nh/sw) 151945/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn over *8192377358* physics  0625/41 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a train of mass 5.6 \u00d7 105 kg is at rest in a station.  at time t = 0 s, a resultant force acts on the train and it starts to accelerate forwards.  fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the train for the first 120  s. 0010002000300040005000 20 40 60 80 100 time t / sdistance  / m 120 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) use fig. 1.1 to determine:    1. the average speed of the train during the 120  s  average speed =  ... [1]    2. the speed of the train at time t = 100  s.  speed =  .. .[2]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) describe how the acceleration of the train at time t = 100  s differs from the acceleration  at time t = 20  s.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) (i) the initial acceleration of the train is 0.75  m / s2.    calculate the resultant force that acts on the train at this time.  resultant force =  ... [2]   (ii) at time t = 120  s, the train begins to decelerate.    state what is meant by deceleration .  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 fig. 2.1 shows a uniform plank ab of length 2.0  m suspended from two ropes x and y. 0.5 m1.5 m rope x a b w = 210  nrope yp q fig. 2.1  the weight w of the plank is 210  n. the force in rope x is p. the force in rope y is q.  (a) state, in terms of p, the moment of force p about b.  ... [1]  (b) calculate:   (i) the moment of w about b  moment =  ... [1]   (ii) the force p  force p =  ... [2]   (iii) the force q.  force q =  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 3 (a) state what is meant by the principle of conservation of energy .  ...  ... [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a girl throwing a heavy ball. ball fig. 3.1   (i) state the energy changes that take place from when the girl begins to exert a force on  the ball until the ball hits the ground and stops moving.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) the mass of the ball is 4.0  kg. the girl exerts a force on the ball for 0.60  s. the speed of  the ball increases from 0  m / s to 12  m / s before it leaves the girl\u2019s hand.    calculate:    1. the momentum of the ball  on leaving the girl\u2019s hand  momentum =  ... [2]    2. the average resultant force exerted on the ball.  average resultant force =  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 (a) fig. 4.1 shows liquid in a cylinder. cylinder liquid fig. 4.1   the depth of the liquid is 10  cm and the radius of the cylinder is 3.0  cm. the weight of the  liquid in the cylinder is 2.5  n.   calculate the density of the liquid.  density =  ... [3]  (b) fig. 4.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas supply. liquidgas supply h fig. 4.2   (i) state the name of the device.  ... [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) the difference h between the two liquid levels is 2.0  cm. the density of the liquid  is  800 kg / m3.    calculate the difference between the pressure of the gas and atmospheric pressure.  pressure difference =  ... [2]   (iii) a similar device with a tube of smaller cross-sectional area is connected to a gas supply  at the same pressure.    state and explain any effect on the value of h.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 (a) (i) in the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the structure of a thermocouple  thermometer. include the device from which a reading is taken.  [3]   (ii) a thermocouple thermometer is used to measure the temperature of the flame of a small   candle.    state two reasons why the thermocouple thermometer is suitable for this application. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (b) state and explain any effect on the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer of:   (i) reducing the diameter of the capillary tube  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) increasing the volume of the liquid-filled bulb.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 9]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 6 (a) state three factors that determine the rate of evaporation of water. 1.  ... 2.  ... 3.  ...  [3]  (b) a person climbs out of a swimming pool and stands in the open air.   explain why evaporation of water from the surface of the person\u2019s body causes the person to  feel cold.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 (a) a laser produces a beam of monochromatic light. state what is meant by the term  monochromatic .  ... [1]  (b) a wave, in air, is incident on a glass block. fig. 7.1 shows the wavefronts at the air-glass  boundary. the arrow shows the direction of travel of the wavefronts. airdirection of travel of wavefronts glass fig. 7.1   the wave undergoes reflection and refraction at the air-glass boundary.   on fig. 7.1 draw:   (i) the wavefronts of the reflected wave  [3]   (ii) the wavefronts of the refracted wave.  [3]  (c) a transverse wave is produced in a long, horizontal rope. the rope is much longer than the  wavelength of the wave.   in the space below, sketch a diagram to show the appearance of the rope as the wave passes  along it. label two important features of the wave.  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8 a vibrating source on a ship produces a sound wave that travels through the ocean. the wave  produced is a longitudinal wave.  (a) explain what is meant by the term longitudinal wave .  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  (b) the frequency of the sound wave is 800  hz.   (i) the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.    state a typical value for the speed of sound in a liquid.  ..  [1]   (ii) using your value from (b)(i) , calculate the wavelength of the sound wave in the  ocean.  wavelength =  ... [2]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 fig. 9.1 shows the symbol for a 12  v battery. 12 v fig. 9.1  (a) two lamps are connected in parallel with the battery. on fig. 9.1, using the correct symbols,  complete the circuit diagram.  [1]  (b) one of these lamps has a resistance of 6.0  \u03c9.   calculate, for this lamp:   (i) the current  current =  ... [1]   (ii) the power.  power =  ... [2]  (c) the power of the other lamp is 36  w.   calculate the total energy delivered to this lamp in 20 hours.  energy =  ... [3]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 10 a transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a metal core. fig.  10.1 represents the  transformer. core secondary coil primary coil fig. 10.1  (a) state the name of the metal from which the core is made.  ... [1]  (b) the primary coil of the transformer is connected to the output voltage of an a.c. generator  which supplies an alternating current.   (i) explain why there is a voltage between the two terminals of the secondary coil.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]   (ii) there are 560 turns on the primary coil and 910 turns on the secondary coil of the   transformer. the voltage between the two terminals of the secondary coil is 78  v.    calculate the voltage supplied by the a.c. generator.  generator voltage =   [2]  (c) transformers are used to increase the voltage when electrical energy is transmitted in cables  across long  distances.   explain why power losses in the cables are lower when the voltage is high.  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 11 (a) fig. 11.1 shows data about nine elements. proton number element symbol 2 helium he 3 lithium li 4 beryllium be 5 boron b 6 carbon c 7 nitrogen n 8 oxygen o 9 fluorine f 10 neon ne fig. 11.1   carbon-14 is a radioactive isotope with a nucleon number of 14. it decays by emitting  \u03b2-particles.   use any data you need from fig. 11.1 to write down the nuclide equation for this decay.  [4]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) a radioactive sample is placed close to a detector. the radioactive isotope in the sample has  a long half -life. the detector records a count rate of 597  counts  / s.   fig. 11.2 shows the readings when different materials are placed between the radioactive  sample and the detector. materialcount rate  counts  / s a sheet of paper 602 a piece of thin aluminium 598 a piece of thin lead 510 fig. 11.2   explain whether any \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles or \u03b3-rays are emitted by the radioactive sample. \u03b1-particles  .  ... \u03b2-particles  .  ... \u03b3-rays    ...  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/sw) 151944/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn over *6754074248* physics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a lorry is travelling along a straight, horizontal road.  fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the lorry. 00100020003000 20 40 60 80 100 time t / sdistance  / m 120 140 fig. 1.1  (a) using fig. 1.1, determine:   (i) the speed of the lorry at time t = 30  s  speed =  ... [2]   (ii) the average speed of the lorry between time t = 60  s and time t = 120  s.  average speed =  ... [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) at time t = 30  s, the total resistive force acting on the lorry is 1.4 \u00d7 104 n.   (i) using fig. 1.1, determine  the magnitude of the acceleration of the lorry at time t = 30  s.  acceleration =  ... [1]   (ii) determine the forward force on the lorry due to its engine at time t = 30  s.  forward force =  ... [1]  (c) describe the motion of the lorry between time t = 60  s and time t = 130  s.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 (a) fig 2.1 shows liquid in a cylinder. cylinder liquid fig. 2.1   table 2.1 gives some data about the cylinder and the liquid. table 2.1 radius of cylinder  3.5 cm weight of empty cylinder 2.5 n depth of liquid 12.0 cm density of liquid 900 kg / m3   the cylinder containing liquid is placed on a digital balance that displays the mass in kg.   calculate the reading shown on the balance.  reading  .. kg [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) fig. 2.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas. 50 mmglass tubegas supply liquid fig. 2.2   (i) state the name of the device.  ... [1]   (ii) the pressure of the gas is 400  pa greater than atmospheric pressure.    calculate the density of the liquid.  density =  ... [2]   (iii) with the gas supply connected, the top of the tube on the left of the device is sealed  securely with a rubber stopper. the gas pressure is then increased.    state and explain what happens to the liquid in the device.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 (a) the velocity of an object of mass m increases from u to v.   state, in terms of m, u and v, the change of momentum of the object.  ... [1]  (b) in a game of tennis, a player hits a stationary ball with his racquet.   (i) the racquet is in contact with the ball for 6.0  ms. the average force on the ball during  this time is 400  n.    calculate the impulse on the tennis ball.  impulse =  ... [2]   (ii) the mass of the ball is 0.056  kg.    calculate the speed with which the ball leaves the racquet.  speed =  ... [2]   (iii) state the energy transfer that takes place:    1. as the ball changes shape during the contact between the racquet and the ball  ...  ...    2. as the ball leaves the racquet .  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 fig. 4.1 shows apparatus used by a student to measure the specific heat capacity of iron. electric heater iron blockthermometer fig. 4.1  (a) the student improves the accuracy of the experiment by placing material around the block,  as shown in fig. 4.2. material fig. 4.2   (i) suggest the name of a possible material the student could use and explain how it  improves the accuracy of the experiment. suggestion  . explanation    ...  ...  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) state how the student could further improve the accuracy of the experiment by using  more of the material used in fig. 4.2.  ...  ...  ... [1]  (b) the current in the heater is 3.8  a and the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 12  v. the iron  block has a mass of 2.0  kg. when the heater is switched on for 10 minutes, the temperature  of the block rises from 25  \u00b0c to 55  \u00b0c.   calculate the specific heat capacity of iron.  specific heat capacity =  ... [4]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a visible spectrum focused on a screen by passing light from a source of white  light through a lens and a prism. visible spectrumascreenglass prism bglass lens filament lamp (white light source) fig. 5.1   (i) state the name of the process that separates the colours in white light.  ... [1]   (ii) state the colour of the light on the screen at:    point a      point b    [1]   (iii) state the property of the glass of the prism that causes white light to be split into the  different colours  of the spectrum.  ... [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) fig. 5.2 shows a section of an optical fibre in air. a ray of light is incident on the fibre wall at x. x optical fibre ray of light fig. 5.2   (i) on fig. 5.2, continue the path of the ray of light up to the end of the fibre.  [1]   (ii) the refractive index of the material of the fibre is 1.46. calculate the critical angle of the  material of the fibre.  critical angle =  ... [2]   (iii) state two uses of optical fibres. 1   2    [2]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 fig. 6.1 represents a sound wave of wavelength 0.45  m travelling from left to right. fig. 6.1  (not to scale)  (a) on fig. 6.1:   (i) at the centre of a compression, mark a cross and label it c  [1]   (ii) at the centre of a rarefaction, mark a cross and label it r  [1]   (iii) draw a double-headed arrow to represent a distance of 0.90  m. [1]  (b) the frequency of the wave is 750  hz.   calculate the speed of the wave.  speed =  ... [2]  (c) suggest a medium through which the sound wave is travelling and state your reasoning. medium  .. reason    ...  [1]  (d) another type of wave that consists of compressions and rarefactions is ultrasound.   (i) state one other similarity between sound of frequency 750  hz and ultrasound.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) state one way in which sound of frequency 750  hz is different from ultrasound.  ...  ... [1]  [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "14": "14 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 fig. 7.1 shows three identical lamps and an ammeter connected to a power supply. apower supply fig. 7.1  the switches are closed. each lamp is rated at 60  w and operates at its normal working voltage of  110 v.  (a) calculate:   (i) the current in each lamp  current =   [2]   (ii) the current in the ammeter  current =  ... [1]   (iii) the voltage of the power supply.  voltage =  ... [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) (i) calculate the resistance of the filament of one of the lamps when working normally.  resistance =  ... [2]   (ii) another lamp x has a filament with twice the resistance of each lamp in the circuit of  fig. 7.1. the material and the temperature of the filament in lamp x is the same as the  filaments in the lamps in fig.  7.1.    in table 7.1, tick any box in the right-hand column that shows a possible difference  between the filament of lamp x and a filament of one of the lamps in the circuit. table 7.1 x has half the length x has twice the length x has one quarter the area of cross-section x has half the area of cross-section x has two times the area of cross-section x has four times the area of cross-section  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 8 (a) (i) fig. 8.1 shows a positively charged cube of insulating material. the cube is fixed to a  piece of wood that is floating on water. a negatively charged rod is held above the piece  of wood and brought close to the cube, as shown. +\u2013 +\u2013 +\u2013positively charged cube of insulating materialnegatively charged rod piece of wood floating on water fig. 8.1    state and explain any movement of the piece of wood.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) fig. 8.2 shows two cubes of insulating material. one is positively charged and the other  is negatively charged. the cubes are fixed to a piece of wood that is floating on water.  charged rods are held above the piece of wood and brought close to the cubes, as  shown. negatively charged cube of insulating material positively charged rodpositively charged cube of insulating materialnegatively charged rod piece of wood floating on water\u2013\u2013\u2013+\u2013 + +\u2013 + +\u2013 fig. 8.2",
            "17": "17 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over    state and explain any movement of the piece of wood.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) in terms of a simple electron model, describe the differences between conductors and  insulators. conductors    ...  ... insulators  ..  ...  ...  [2]  (c) on fig. 8.3, draw the electric field pattern around a single point positive charge. + fig. 8.3  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 fig. 9.1 shows a permanent bar magnet next to a circuit that contains a coil and a galvanometer. n s q fig. 9.1  (a) suggest a metal from which the magnet is made.  ... [1]  (b) the magnet is moved to the left and inserted a small distance into the coil. the galvanometer  deflects briefly and shows that there is a current in the coil.   (i) explain why there is a current in the coil.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]   (ii) as the magnet is moving near to the coil, end q of the coil behaves as a magnetic pole.    state the polarity of end q and explain why it has this polarity.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) suggest two ways in which the deflection of the galvanometer can be reversed. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 10 (a) a detector of ionising radiation measures the background count rate in a classroom where  there are no radioactive samples present.   the readings, in counts/minute, taken over a period of time are shown in table 10.1. table 10.1 counts  / minute 16 12 14 16 15 17   (i) state two possible sources of this background radiation.  ...  ... [2]   (ii) explain why the readings are not the same.  ...  ... [1]  (b) with no radioactive sample present, a scientist records a background radiation count of  40 counts  / minute.   he brings a radioactive sample close to the detector. the count rate increases to  200 counts  / minute.   after 24 days the count rate is 50 counts  / minute.   calculate the half-life of the radioactive sample.  half-life =  ... [4]",
            "20": "20 0625/42/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. (c) draw a line between each type of ionising radiation and its property and another line between  the property and its use. one has been done for you. name of  ionising  radiation x-ray \u03b1-particle \u03b2-particle \u03b3-rayproperty it is the most  ionising radiation  and is most easily  absorbed by very  small amounts of  substance penetration is  affected by small  changes in the  amount of solid it is  passing through it is highly  penetrating and is  poorly ionising can pass easily  through soft living  tissue. calcium  absorbs more than  soft tissueuse remotely detecting  leaks in underground  water pipes detecting fractures in  bones detecting smoke in a  fire alarm system detecting a change  in  the thickness of  aluminium foil during  its manufacture  [3]  [total: 10]"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/sw) 151946/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn over *6076533628* physics  0625/43 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for a moving car. 00100200300400500 10 20 30 40 50 time t / sdistance  / m 60 fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, mark a point p where the acceleration of the car is zero.  [1]  (b) determine:   (i) the speed of the car at time t = 15  s  speed =  ... [2]   (ii) the average speed of the car between time t = 30  s and time t = 45  s.  average speed =  ... [2]  (c) at time t = 45  s, the car starts to decelerate. at time t = 55  s and at a distance of 400  m from  the starting point, the car stops. it then remains stationary for 5.0  s.   on fig. 1.1, draw a possible continuation of the distance-time graph.  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 (a) complete fig. 2.1 by writing in the right-hand column the name of the quantity given by the  product in the left-hand column. product quantity mass \u00d7 acceleration force \u00d7 time  [2] fig. 2.1 (b) fig. 2.2 shows a man hitting a ball with a golf club. golf club ball fig. 2.2   the ball has a mass of 0.046  kg. the golf club is in contact with the ball for 5.0  \u00d7 10\u20134 s and  the ball leaves the golf club at a speed of 65  m / s.   (i) calculate:    1. the momentum of the ball as it leaves the golf club  momentum =  ... [2]    2. the average resultant force acting on the ball while it is in contact with the golf club.  average force =  ... [2]   (ii) while the golf club is in contact with the ball, the ball becomes compressed and changes  shape.    state the type of energy stored in the ball during its contact with the golf club.  ... [1]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 the density of mercury is 1.4 \u00d7 104 kg / m3.  (a) fig. 3.1 shows an instrument that is being used to determine the atmospheric pressure. 760  mmspace a mercury fig. 3.1  (not to scale)   (i) state the name of the instrument.  ... [1]   (ii) state what is in space a.  ... [1]   (iii) calculate the atmospheric pressure.  atmospheric pressure =  ... [2]  (b) fig. 3.2 shows mercury stored in a cylindrical glass jar of internal radius 4.0  cm. the depth of  mercury in the jar is 12  cm. 12 cm 8.0 cmmercury fig. 3.2 (not to scale)   calculate the weight of mercury in the jar.  weight =  ... [3]  [total: 7]  ",
            "5": "5 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 a wave is travelling across the surface of water in a tank at a speed of 0.15  m / s.  (a) the wavelength of the wave is 0.030  m.   calculate the frequency of the wave.  frequency =  .. .[2]  (b) this water wave is a transverse wave.   (i) explain what is meant by the term transverse wave motion .  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]   (ii) draw a diagram that represents a transverse wave travelling from left to right across the  page. on your diagram, label: \u2022 the wavelength \u2022 the amplitude.  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 5 (a) a student is supplied with a small block of iron, a thermometer and an electrical heater of  power p.   there are two holes drilled in the iron block. the heater fits tightly into one hole and the  student places the thermometer into the other hole.   fig. 5.1 shows the equipment. cable heater iron blockthermometer fig. 5.1   the student uses this equipment when determining the specific heat capacity of iron.   state: \u2022 the other equipment the student will need \u2022 the measurements the student needs to take \u2022 the equation used when calculating the value of the specific heat capacity of iron.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ... [4]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) in the student\u2019s home there is a wood-burning stove, which is also made of iron. the mass of  the wood-burning stove is 85  kg.   (i) state what is meant by the thermal capacity  of an object.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) the specific heat capacity of iron is 460  j / (kg \u00b0c).    calculate the thermal capacity of the wood-burning stove.   thermal capacity =  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows white light incident at point x on a glass prism. prismscreen ray of white lightx fig. 6.1   (i) from point x on fig. 6.1, draw a ray of red light, labelled r and a ray of violet light,  labelled v, to show how a spectrum is formed on the screen.  [2]   (ii) state the colour of light in the visible spectrum with the shortest wavelength.  ... [1]  (b) the critical angle for a type of glass is 42\u00b0.   fig. 6.2 and fig. 6.3 show two prisms abc and pqr made of this type of glass. a ray of  monochromatic red light passes into each of the prisms. normal normalp q c ba ry 60\u00b0 60\u00b0 45\u00b045\u00b0         fig. 6.2                  fig. 6.3   (i) state what is meant by monochromatic  light.  ...  ... [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) describe and explain what happens to the ray of light in fig. 6.2 as it strikes side ac of  the prism.  ...  ...  ... [2]   (iii) describe and explain what happens to the ray of light in fig. 6.3 as it strikes the glass at  point y.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 7 a defibrillator is a machine that sends an electrical charge  through the heart of a patient whose  heart is not beating correctly. doctors learn to use a defibrillator by practising on a medical dummy.  fig. 7.1 shows the two contacts of a defibrillator attached to a medical dummy. medical dummydefibrillatorcontacts fig. 7.1  the contacts that touch the dummy are made from metal, and when the defibrillator is being used,  one contact becomes strongly negatively charged and the other contact becomes strongly positively  charged. the handles of the contacts are made from plastic, which is an electrical insulator.  (a) (i) state how the structure of an electrical insulator differs from the structure of a conductor.  ...  ... [1]   (ii) suggest why the handles are made from an electrical insulator.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) explain, in terms of the particles involved, how one contact becomes negatively charged and  how the other contact becomes positively charged.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (c) the defibrillator passes a charge of 9.1 \u00d7 10\u20133 c through the medical dummy in 6.5 \u00d7 10\u20134 s.   calculate the average current in the dummy.  current =  ... [2]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 8 a 9.0  v battery is connected to a 120  \u03c9 resistor in series with wire p.  fig. 8.1 shows a voltmeter connected across the 120  \u03c9 resistor. 9.0 v 120  \u03c9 vp fig. 8.1  (a) state the energy changes that are taking place in the circuit.  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) the reading on the voltmeter is 2.4  v.   calculate:   (i) the current in the 120  \u03c9 resistor  current =  ... [2]   (ii) the potential difference (p.d.) across wire p  p.d. =  ... [1]   (iii) the resistance of wire p.  resistance =  ... [1]  (c) wire p has a diameter d and a length l. a second piece of wire q is made of the same  material as p.   the diameter of wire q is 0.50 \u00d7 d and its length is 5.0 \u00d7 l.   calculate the resistance of wire q.  resistance =  ... [4]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 9 (a) describe how a direct current (d.c.) differs from an alternating current (a.c.).  ...  ... [1]  (b) fig. 9.1 shows how the voltage output of an a.c. generator varies with time. 02.0 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.04.0voltage  / v time  / s6.08.0 \u20138.0\u20136.0\u20134.0\u20132.00.2 time  / s1.21.2 1.0 0.8 0.4 0.6 0.2 0 fig. 9.1   a heater is connected directly to the a.c. generator and the maximum current in the heater is  0.75 a.   (i) on fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to indicate how the current in the heater varies with time. 00.25 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.00.50current  / a time  / s0.751.00 \u20131.00\u20130.75\u20130.50\u20130.250.2 time  / s1.21.2 1.0 0.8 0.4 0.6 0.2 0  [1] fig. 9.2",
            "13": "13 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) calculate the power produced by the heater when the current is 0.75  a.  power =  ... [2]  (c) fig. 9.3 shows the coil abcd of the a.c. generator between two magnetic poles. a db crotation direction n ss fig. 9.3   (i) on fig. 9.3, draw a straight arrow to indicate the direction in which side ab of the coil is  moving. label this arrow m.  [1]   (ii) deduce the direction of the current induced in side ab of the coil and explain your  reasoning.  ...  ...  ...  ... [2]   (iii) the rate at which the coil of the a.c. generator rotates increases.    state two ways in which the alternating voltage changes. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 10 thorium-234 (23 94 0th) is radioactive. it decays by \u03b2-emission to form an isotope of protactinium  (pa).  (a) complete the nuclide equation for this decay. 23 94 0th  . .pa + . .\u03b2  [2]  (b) a pure sample of thorium-234 emits \u03b2-particles at a count rate of 2480 counts  / second.   the half-life of thorium-234 is 24 days.   calculate the count rate for the emission of \u03b2-particles from the thorium in the sample after  72 days have passed.  count rate  ... [3]  (c) the isotope of protactinium in (a) is also radioactive. it decays by \u03b2-emission and has a  half-life of 70 seconds.   state and explain how this would affect the observed  count rate for the sample in (b) after  72 days.  ...  ...  ...  ... [3]  [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/43/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages and 4 blank pages. dc (nh/sg) 151996/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn over *0695520946* physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 totalcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 in this experiment, you will determine the spring constant k of a spring by two methods.  some of the apparatus has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2.  method 1  (a) measure the unstretched length l0 of the spring, in mm.  l0 =  ... .mm [1]  (b) hang the 300  g mass on the spring, as shown in fig. 1.1. clamp holding corkclamp holding spring spring mass pin in cork bench fig. 1.1   (i) measure the new length l of the spring.  l =   mm [1]   (ii) use the equation e = ( l \u2013 l0) to calculate the extension e of the spring.  e =   mm [1]   (iii) calculate a value for the spring constant k using the equation kef=, where f = 3.0  n.  k =  ... n / mm [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  method 2  (c) adjust the position of the lower clamp so that the pin is level with the bottom of the mass when  the mass is not moving. pull the mass down about 1.5  cm and release it so that it oscillates  up and down. fig. 1.2 shows one complete oscillation. clamp holding corkclamp holding spring one complete oscillation bench fig. 1.2   (i) measure the time t taken for 10 complete oscillations. start the stopwatch as the bottom  of the mass passes the pin.  t =   s [1]   (ii) 1. calculate the time t taken for one complete oscillation.  t =  . s    2. calculate t 2.  t 2 =  ...  [1]   (iii) calculate the spring constant k using the equation .ktm 0040 2= , where m = 0.300  kg.  k =  ... n / mm [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (d) state and explain briefly whether your two values for k are the same within the limits of  experimental accuracy. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  (e) a student states that repeating method 1 with different masses would improve the reliability of  the value obtained for k.   suggest additional values for the mass m that you would use when repeating the experiment  to improve the reliability.  ...  ...  ... [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 in this experiment, you will determine the resistance of a piece of wire. a vpower supply sliding contact cwirepl fig. 2.1  (a) (i) carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. \u2022 switch on. \u2022 measure the current i in the circuit.  i =  ... [1]   (ii) place the sliding contact c at a distance  l = 20.0  cm from p. \u2022 measure, and record in table 2.1, the reading on the voltmeter. \u2022 repeat the procedure using  l values of 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm. \u2022 switch off. table 2.1 l / cm v / v  20.0  40.0  60.0  80.0 100.0  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ... [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r of each centimetre of the wire. use the equation r = g k i,     where  k = 1.0  v / cm and i is the current recorded in (a)(i) . include the unit.  r =  ... [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 in this experiment, you will determine the refractive index n of the material of a transparent block. hole eyee a dbn lf gc fig. 3.1  (a) carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance. \u2022 place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the  block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. \u2022 draw and label the outline of the block abcd . \u2022 remove the block and draw the normal nl at the centre of side ab. continue the normal  so that it passes through side cd of the block. \u2022 label the point f where nl crosses ab. \u2022 label the point g where nl crosses cd.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) \u2022 draw the line ef at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 3.1. \u2022 place the paper on the pin board. \u2022 place two pins p1 and p2 on line ef at a suitable distance apart for this experiment. \u2022 replace the block and look from the position of the eye shown in fig. 3.1, to observe  the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block. adjust your line of sight until the  images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. \u2022 place two pins p3 and p4 between your eye and the block so that p3, p4, and the images  of p1 and p2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other. \u2022 label the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. \u2022 remove the block and the pins. \u2022 draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the normal  nl. \u2022 label the point h where the line meets side cd. draw the line fh.  [1]  (c) (i) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =  ... [1]   (ii) measure and record the length b of the line fh.  b =  ... [1]   (iii) calculate the refractive index n using the equation .nab050= .  n =  ... [2]  (d) repeat the procedure in (b) using an angle i = 45\u00ba.   (i) repeat the measurements in (c)(i)  and (c)(ii)  for i = 45\u00ba.  a =  ...  b =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate the refractive index n using the equation .nab071= .  n =  ... [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) a student carries out this experiment with care and expects the two values of refractive index   n obtained in this experiment to be equal.   state two difficulties with this type of experiment that could explain any difference in the two  values of n. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]   tie your ray-trace sheet into this question booklet between pages 10 and 11.",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating the relationship between the power produced by an electrical heater and  the time taken to heat a beaker of water. the power of the heater is given by the equation p = vi,  where v is the potential difference (p.d.) across the heater and i is the current in the heater.  plan an experiment to investigate the relationship between the power produced by an electrical  heater and the time taken to heat a beaker of water.  you are not required to carry out this investigation.  the following apparatus is available:   ammeter   voltmeter   0\u201312  v variable power supply   250 cm3 beaker   heater   thermometer   stopwatch  the student can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school  laboratory.  you should: \u2022 complete the diagram in fig. 4.1 to show the circuit that you would use \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table with column headings, to show how you would display your readings (you  are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your results to reach a conclusion.",
            "13": "13 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over beaker heater water fig. 4.1  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "14": "14 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/51/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nh/sw) 152111/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn over *4019313866* physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 totalcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 in this experiment, you will determine the spring constant k of a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. clamp standspringmetre rule \u2018blu-tack\u2019 between ruler and clamp rod benchl0 fig. 1.1  (a) the metre rule is fixed in position close to the spring. do not change the position of the  metre rule.   (i) use the set-square provided to take readings from the metre rule in order to determine  the length l0 of the coiled part of the spring. record of readings taken  ..  ... [1]   (ii) record in table 1.1 the value of the length of the spring l0 when the load l is 0.00  n. [1]   (iii) \u2022  place a load of 0.20  n on the spring. record in table 1.1 the new length l of the  spring. \u2022 use the equation e = ( l \u2013 l0) to calculate the extension e of the spring. record the  value of e in the table. \u2022 repeat the procedure  using loads of 0.40  n, 0.60  n, 0.80  n and 1.00  n. record all  the readings and results in the table.",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over table 1.1 l / n l / mm e / mm 0.00 0 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00  [2]  (b) plot a graph of l / n (y-axis) against  e / mm ( x-axis).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ... [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (d) the gradient g is numerically equal to the spring constant k.   write down a value for k to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  k =  ... n / mm [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the power of lamps.  the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you.  va x y fig. 2.1  (a) (i) switch on.    measure and record the potential difference (p.d.) vt across the lamps and the current  it in the circuit. switch off.  vt =  ...  it =  ...  [2]   (ii) calculate  the power pt produced by  the lamp filaments, using the equation pt = vt it .  pt =  ... [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) disconnect the voltmeter. reconnect the voltmeter across lamp x. switch on.   (i) measure and record the potential difference (p.d.) vx across lamp x and the current ix in  the circuit. switch off.  vx =  ...  ix =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate  the power px produced by  the lamp filament using the equation px = vx ix.  px =  ... [1]  (c) disconnect the voltmeter. reconnect the voltmeter across lamp y. switch on.   (i) measure and record the potential difference vy across lamp y and the current iy in the  circuit. switch off.  vy =  ...  iy =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate  the power py produced by  the lamp filament using the equation py = vy iy.  py =  ... [1]  (d) state and explain briefly whether your two values for power,  px and py are the same within  the limits of experimental accuracy. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...    [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (e) draw a circuit diagram to show the circuit rearranged so that: \u2022 the lamps are connected in parallel \u2022 the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit \u2022 the voltmeter will measure the p.d. across the lamps.   you are not asked to set up this circuit.  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 in this experiment, you will determine the refractive index n of the material of a transparent block.  eyeholee n lf gb a c d fig. 3.1  (a) carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance. \u2022 place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the  block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. \u2022 draw and label the outline of the block abcd . \u2022 remove the block and draw the normal nl at the centre of side ab. continue the normal  so that it passes through side cd of the block. \u2022 label the point f where nl crosses ab. \u2022 label the point g where nl crosses cd.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) \u2022 draw the line ef at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 3.1. \u2022 place the paper on the pin board. \u2022 place two pins p1 and p2 on line ef at a suitable distance apart for this experiment. \u2022 replace the block and look from the position of the eye shown in fig. 3.1, to observe  the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block. adjust your line of sight until the  images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. \u2022 place two pins p3 and p4 between your eye and the block so that p3, p4, and the images  of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other. \u2022 label the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. \u2022 remove the block and the pins. \u2022 draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the normal  nl. \u2022 label the point j where the line meets the normal nl. \u2022 label the point h where the line meets side cd. draw the line fh.  [1]  (c) (i) measure and record the length a of the line fh.  a =  ... [1]   (ii) measure and record the length b of the line hj.  b =  ... [1]   (iii) calculate the refractive index n using the equation n = a b  n =  ... [2]  (d) repeat the procedure in (b) using the angle of incidence  i = 40\u00b0.   (i) repeat the measurements in (c) for i = 40\u00b0.  a =  ...  b =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate the refractive index n using the equation n = a b  n =  ... [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) a student carries out this experiment with care and expects the two values of refractive index   n obtained in this experiment to be equal.    state two difficulties with this type of experiment that could account for any difference in the  two values of n. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]   tie your ray-trace sheet into this question booklet between pages 8 and 9.",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 4 a student is investigating whether the type of container affects the time taken for water to be  heated from room temperature to boiling point.  the following apparatus is available:   250 cm3 copper can   250 cm3 aluminium can   250 cm3 glass beaker   bunsen burner   measuring cylinder   thermometer   tripod and gauze   stopwatch  other apparatus normally used in the school laboratory is also available.  plan an experiment to investigate whether the type of container affects the time taken for water  to be heated from room temperature to boiling point. you are not required to carry out this  investigation.  you should: \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .. [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "*2895237765* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 12 printed pages and 4 blank pages. dc (sc/cgw) 152107/4 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overcambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education physics  0625/53 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2018  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question  4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 in this experiment, you will determine the density of modelling clay.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. modelling clayw h l fig. 1.1  (a) (i) measure the length l, width w and height h of the block of modelling clay.  l =    cm  w =    cm  h =    cm  [1]   (ii) calculate the volume v1 of the block, using your measurements from (a)(i)  and the  equation v1 = l \u00d7 w \u00d7 h.  v1 =  ..  cm3 [1]  (b) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in measuring the block and describe an improvement  to the procedure that will produce more reliable measurements of the block. suggestion    ... improvement  .  ...  ...  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over forcemeter loop of string modelling clay fig. 1.2  (c) measure the weight w of the block of modelling clay, as shown in fig. 1.2.  w =  .  n [1]  (d) calculate a value \u03c11 for the density of the modelling clay, using your results from (a)(ii)  and   (c) and the equation \u03c11 = w \u00d7 k v1, where k = 100  g / n.  \u03c11 =  .  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 modelling claymeasuring cylinder fig. 1.3  (e) \u2022 pour approximately 150  cm3 of water into the measuring cylinder.   \u2022 record the volume v2 of the water in the measuring cylinder.  v2 =  ...  cm3   \u2022  remove the loop of string from the forcemeter and lower the block of modelling clay  carefully into the water in the measuring cylinder as shown in fig. 1.3.   \u2022  record the new reading v3 of the measuring cylinder, with the piece of modelling clay in  the water.  v3 =  ...  cm3  [1]  (f) describe how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain a value for the volume of water.  you  may draw a diagram to help you.  ...  ...  ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (g) (i) calculate another value \u03c12 for the density of modelling clay, using your readings from (c)    and (e) and the equation \u03c12 = w \u00d7 k (v3 \u2013 v2), where k = 100  g / n.  \u03c12 =  .  [1]   (ii) suggest which of \u03c11 or \u03c12 is likely to be the more accurate value for the density of the  modelling clay.    justify your answer by referring to the procedure.  ...  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 in this experiment, you will determine the resistance per unit length of wire x.  the circuit has been set up for you. apower supply wire x v crocodile clip c resistance wire fig. 2.1  (a) carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.   \u2022 connect the crocodile clip c to the free end of the resistance wire.   \u2022  switch on. adjust the position of the crocodile clip c until the current shown on the  ammeter is as near to 0.40  a as possible.   \u2022  measure, and record in table 2.1, the potential difference (p.d.) v across wire x.  switch  off.   \u2022 repeat the procedure for i = 0.50  a, 0.60  a, 0.70  a and 0.80  a. table 2.1 i / a v / v 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis).  [4]  (c) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  .  [1]   (ii) measure the length l of wire x.  l =  ...  cm [1]   (iii) calculate the resistance r of each centimetre of wire x, using the equation r = g \u00d7 k l,    where k = 1.0  \u03c9 cm.    give the value for r, to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.   r =  .  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (d) a student discovers that the resistance wire becomes very hot when the crocodile clip is  connected to short lengths of the wire.   suggest an improvement that would help to reduce this effect.  ...  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the reflection of light by a plane mirror. a b dnholeray-trace sheet eye c \u03b1 fig. 3.1  (a) carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided.     refer to fig. 3.1 for guidance.   \u2022 draw a line about 10  cm from the bottom of your ray-trace sheet. label this line ab.   \u2022 mark a point n, near the centre of ab.   \u2022  draw a normal to ab at point n, towards the top of the page. label the other end of this  normal line l. [1]  (b) draw a line cd passing through n and at an angle \u03b1 to ab where \u03b1 = 20\u00b0.  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) \u2022  place two pins p1 and p2 on line ln, a suitable distance apart for ray tracing. label the  positions of p1 and p2.   \u2022  place the reflecting surface of the mirror on line cd and view the images of p1 and p2  from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 3.1.   \u2022  place two pins p3 and p4 some distance apart so that the images of p1 and p2, and the  pins p3 and p4, all appear exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.   \u2022 remove the mirror and the pins.   \u2022 draw a line passing through the p3 and p4 positions and reaching ln.   \u2022 measure and record in table 3.1, the angle \u03b8 between this line and the normal ln. table 3.1 \u03b1 / \u00b0 \u03b8 / \u00b0 20 35  [3]  (d) repeat steps (b) and (c) for an angle \u03b1 = 35\u00b0, replacing pins p1 and p2 in their original  positions in step (c). [2]  (e) a student suggests that when the mirror is moved, the change in  \u03b8 should be equal to twice  the change in  \u03b1.   state whether your readings support this idea. justify your answer with reference to the  readings. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]  (f) suggest two precautions that you took to ensure accurate results from this type of experiment. 1    ... 2 .  ...  [2]  [total: 11] tie your ray trace sheet between pages 10 and 11.",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating the conduction of thermal energy by metals.  plan an experiment to compare the rates at which different metals conduct thermal energy.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes:   strips of different metals, shaped as shown in fig. 4.1   a test-tube in a clamp stand   a beaker   a supply of cold water   a supply of hot water. fig. 4.1  the shorter section of each strip of metal can fit inside a test-tube.  write a plan for the experiment.  you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 draw a labelled diagram of how the apparatus will be arranged \u2022 explain briefly how you will carry out the experiment \u2022 explain how the metals will be compared \u2022 state the precautions which should be taken to obtain reliable results.",
            "13": "13 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .  [7]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/53/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "*2551796082* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (sc/cgw) 152085/3 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overphysics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2018  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a student is determining the spring constant k of a spring by two methods.  fig. 1.2 shows how the apparatus is used.  method 1  (a) on fig. 1.1, measure the unstretched length l0 of the spring, in mm. springl0 fig. 1.1  l0 =  .  mm [1]  (b) the student attaches the spring to the clamp as shown in fig. 1.2.   he hangs a 300  g mass on the spring. clamp holding cork pin in cork benchclamp holding spring spring 300  g mass fig. 1.2   he measures the new length l of the spring.   53  l =  ..  mm",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (i) calculate the extension e of the spring using the equation e = l \u2013 l0.  e =  .  mm [1]   (ii) calculate a value for the spring constant k using the equation k = f e, where f = 3.0  n.  k =    n / mm [1]  method 2  (c) the student pulls the mass down a short distance and releases it so that it oscillates up and  down. fig. 1.3 shows the time t taken for 10 complete oscillations. 00:03 .46min sec sec fig. 1.3   (i) record the time t taken for 10 complete oscillations.  t =    [1]   (ii) 1. calculate the time t taken for one complete oscillation.  t =  .    2. calculate t2.   t2 =  .  [2]   (iii) calculate the spring constant k using the equation k = 0.040  m t2, where m = 0.300  kg.  k =    n / mm [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (d) state and explain whether your two values for k are the same within the limits of experimental  accuracy. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  (e) a student states that repeating method 1 with different masses would improve the reliability of  the value obtained for k.   suggest additional values for the mass m that you would use when repeating the experiment  to improve the reliability.  ...  ...  ..  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 a student is determining the resistance of a piece of wire.  fig. 2.1 shows the circuit she uses. a vpower supply sliding contact cl wirep fig. 2.1  (a) record the current i in the circuit, as shown on the ammeter in fig. 2.2.  i =    [1] a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0    v3 4 52 1 0  fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3  (b) the student places the sliding contact c at a distance l = 20.0  cm from p. the voltmeter  reading is shown in fig. 2.3. record the voltmeter reading in table 2.1 for l = 20.0  cm. [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) the student repeats the procedure using values of l = 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm.  the readings are shown in table 2.1.   complete the column headings in the table.  [1] table 2.1 l / v / 20.0 40.0 0.9 60.0 1.6 80.0 2.0 100.0 2.4  (d) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0, 0).  [4]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r of each centimetre of the wire. use the equation r = g k i,  where k = 1.0  v / cm and where i is the current recorded in (a).    include the unit.  r =    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a student is determining the refractive index n of the material of a transparent block.  fig. 3.1 shows the outline abcd  of the transparent block. a b d p3 p4c eye fig. 3.1",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (a) (i) on fig. 3.1: \u2022 draw a normal nl at the centre of side ab \u2022 continue the normal so that it passes through side cd of the block \u2022 label the point f where nl crosses ab \u2022 label the point g where nl crosses cd. [1]   (ii) draw a line ef at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to the left of the normal and above side ab. [1]   (iii) mark the positions of two pins p1 and p2 on line ef placed at a suitable distance apart  for this type of ray-tracing experiment.  [1]  (b) the student observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block so that the  images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   he places two pins p3 and p4 between his eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the images of  p1 and p2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other.   the positions of p3 and p4 are marked on fig. 3.1.   (i) \u2022  draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the  normal nl. \u2022 label the point h where the line meets side cd. draw the line fh.  [1]   (ii) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =    [1]   (iii) measure and record the length b of the line fh.  b =    [1]   (iv) calculate the refractive index n using the equation n = 0.5b a .  n =    [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (c) the student repeats the procedure using the angle of incidence i = 45\u00b0.   3.2  a =  ...  cm   6.9  b =  ...  cm   calculate the refractive index n, using the equation n = 0.71b a .  n =    [1]  (d) the student expected the two values of refractive index n obtained in this experiment to be  equal.   state two difficulties with this type of experiment that could explain any difference in the two  values of n. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (e) a student suggests precautions to take in this experiment to obtain reliable results.   tick one box to indicate the most sensible suggestion.    carry out the experiment in a darkened room.    use pins that are taller than the height of the block.    view the bases of the pins.    view the pins with one eye closed.  [1]  [total: 11] ",
            "13": "13 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "14": "14 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating the relationship between the power produced by an electrical heater and  the time taken to heat a beaker of water. the power of the heater is given by the equation p = vi,  where v is the potential difference (p.d.) across the heater and i is the current in the heater.  plan an experiment to investigate the relationship between the power produced by an electrical  heater and the time taken to heat a beaker of water.  the following apparatus is available:   ammeter   voltmeter   0\u201312  v variable power supply   250 cm3 beaker   heater   thermometer   stopwatch  the student can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school  laboratory.  you should: \u2022 complete the diagram in fig. 4.1 to show the circuit that you would use \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table with column headings, to show how you would display your readings (you  are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your results to reach a conclusion.",
            "15": "15 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over electrical heaterbeaker water fig. 4.1  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "16": "16 0625/61/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .  [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "*9270767330* this document consists of 11 printed page s and 1 blank page . dc (nf/sw) 152110/5 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overphysics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2018  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a student is determining the spring constant k of a spring.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used. clamp standspringmetre rule \u2018blu-tack\u2019 between ruler and clamp rod benchl0 fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, measure the unstretched length l0 of the coiled part of the spring, in mm.   record this value of length l in table 1.1 for l = 0.00 n. [1]  (b) on fig. 1.1, show how a set-square could be used to take readings in order to determine the  length l0 of the coiled part of the spring.  [1]  (c) the student places a 0.20  n load on the spring. he records the new length l of the spring in  table 1.1.   he repeats the procedure using loads of 0.40  n, 0.60  n, 0.80  n and 1.00  n. all the readings  are recorded in table 1.1.   (i) calculate the extension e of the spring for each value of load l, using the equation    e = (l \u2013 l0). record the values of e in table 1.1.  [1]   (ii) complete the column headings in table 1.1.",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over table 1.1 l / l / e / 0.00 0 0.20 31 0.40 40 0.60 46 0.80 55 1.00 63 [1]  (d) plot a graph of l / n (y-axis) against  e / mm ( x-axis). [4]  (e) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ..  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (f) the gradient g is numerically equal to the spring constant k.   write down a value for k to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  k =  ..  n / mm  [1] [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over 2 a student is investigating the power of two lamps.  the circuit is shown in fig. 2.1. va x y fig. 2.1  (a) (i) record the potential difference (p.d.) vt across the lamps and the current it in the circuit,  as shown in fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3. a0.4 0.6 0.2 1.00.8 0 v4 653 72 1 9 108 0                        a0.4 0.6 0.2 1.00.8 0 v4 653 72 1 9 108 0  fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3  vt = ...  it = ... [2]   (ii)  calculate  the power pt produced by  the lamp filaments, using the equation pt = vtit .  pt =  ...  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (b) the student connects the voltmeter across lamp x  only. she records the p.d. vx across lamp  x and the current ix in the circuit.  1.3 vx =  .  v  0.18 ix =  .  a   she repeats the procedure with the voltmeter connected across lamp y only.  1.2 vy =  .  v  0.18 iy =  .  a   (i) calculate the power px produced by the lamp filament x using the equation px = vxix,  and calculate the power py produced by the lamp filament y using the equation  py = vyiy.  px =    py =   [1]   (ii) state and explain briefly whether the two values for power  px and py are the same  within the limits of experimental accuracy. statement  .. explanation    ... [2]  (c) the student repeats the experiment using two other lamps. she notices that one lamp is  dimly lit, but the other lamp does not light at all.   the p.d. vt across the lamps is the same as in (b), but the current it in the circuit is  approximately half of the original value.   the student concludes that the filament of one of the lamps  is broken.   state whether you agree with the student and give a reason for your answer. statement  .. reason  ...  ... [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (d) draw a circuit diagram to show the circuit in fig. 2.1 rearranged so that: \u2022 the lamps are connected in parallel \u2022 a variable resistor is connected to control the total current in the circuit \u2022 the ammeter will measure the total current in the circuit \u2022 the voltmeter will measure the p.d. across the lamps. [3] [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a student is determining the refractive index n of the material of a transparent block.  fig. 3.1 shows the outline abcd  of the block. a b d c p3 p4 eye fig. 3.1  (a) (i) \u2022 on fig. 3.1, draw a normal nl at the centre of side ab. \u2022 continue the normal so that it passes through side cd of the block. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over   (ii) \u2022 label the point f where nl crosses ab. \u2022 label the point g where nl crosses cd. \u2022 draw a line ef at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to the left of the normal and above side ab. [1]   (iii) mark the positions of two pins p1 and p2 on line ef placed  at a suitable distance apart  for this type of ray-tracing experiment.  [1]  (b) the student observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block.   he places two pins p3 and p4 between his eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the images of  p1 and p2 seen through the block, all appear exactly one behind the other.   the positions of p3 and p4 are marked on fig. 3.1. \u2022 draw a line passing through p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets the normal  nl. \u2022 label the point j where the line meets the normal. \u2022 label the point h where the line meets side cd. draw the line fh. [1]  (c) (i) measure and record the length a of the line fh.  a =  ...  [1]   (ii) measure and record the length b of the line hj.  b =  ...  [1]   (iii) calculate the refractive index n using the equation n = a b .  n =  ...  [2]  (d) a student states that repeating the experiment improves the reliability of the value obtained  for n.   suggest additional values for the angle of incidence i  that you would use when repeating the  experiment to improve the reliability.  ...  ...  ..  [2]  (e) state one precaution that you would take in this experiment to obtain accurate results.  ...  ..  [1] [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating whether the type of container affects the time taken for water to be  heated from room temperature to boiling point.  the following apparatus is available:   250 cm3 copper can   250 cm3 aluminium can   250 cm3 glass beaker   bunsen burner   measuring cylinder   thermometer   tripod and gauze   stopwatch  other apparatus normally available in the school laboratory is also available.  plan an experiment to investigate whether the type of container affects the time taken for water to  be heated from room temperature to boiling point.  you should: \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .  [7] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w18_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "*8273129571* this syllabus is approved for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 12 printed pages and 4 blank pages. dc (sc/ct) 152109/6 \u00a9 ucles 2018  [turn overphysics  0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2018  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge international examinations cambridge international general certificate of secondary education",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 1 a student is determining the density of modelling clay.  he is using the block shown in fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. l w h  fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  (side view)  (a) (i) measure the dimensions of the block of modelling clay, as shown in fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2.  length l =    cm   width w =    cm  height h =    cm  [1]   (ii) calculate the volume v1 of the block, using your measurements from (a)(i)  and the  equation v1 = l \u00d7 w \u00d7 h.  v1 =  ..  cm3 [1]  (b) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in measuring the dimensions of the block and  describe an improvement to the procedure that will produce more reliable measurements of  the block. suggestion    ... improvement  .  ...  ...  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) the student suspends the piece of modelling clay from a forcemeter, as shown in fig. 1.3. n 0.4 0.6 0.80.0 0.2 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 modelling clayforcemeter fig. 1.3   record the weight w of the block of modelling clay shown in fig. 1.3.  w =  .  n [1]  (d) calculate a value \u03c11 for the density of the modelling clay, using your results from (a)(ii)  and  (c) and the equation  \u03c11 = w \u00d7 k v1 ,   where k = 100  g / n.  \u03c11 =  .  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  (e) the student pours some water into a measuring cylinder, as shown in fig. 1.4. 255075100125150175200225250cm3 fig. 1.4   (i) record the volume v2 of the water in the measuring cylinder shown in fig. 1.4.  v2 =  ..  cm3 [1]    (ii) describe how a measuring cylinder is read to obtain an accurate value for the volume of  water. you may draw a diagram to help you.  ...  ...  ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (f) the student lowers the modelling clay into the water, as shown in fig. 1.5. cm3 255075100125150175200225250 modelling clay fig. 1.5   (i) \u2022  record the new reading v3 of the measuring cylinder in fig. 1.5, with the block of  modelling clay in the water.  v3 =  ...  cm3 \u2022 calculate another value \u03c12 for the density of modelling clay, using your value for v3,  your readings from (c) and (e)(i)  and the equation  \u03c12 = w \u00d7 k (v3 \u2013 v2),  where k = 100  g / n.  \u03c12 =  ..  [1]   (ii) suggest which of \u03c11 or \u03c12 is likely to be the more accurate value for the density of the  modelling clay.    justify your answer by referring to the procedure.  ...  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 2 some students are determining the resistance per unit length of wire x.  they are using the circuit shown in fig. 2.1. power supply awire x crocodile clip resistance wire fig. 2.1  the crocodile clip is connected to a length of the resistance wire. the current in the circuit and  potential difference (p.d.) across wire x are measured.  (a) on fig. 2.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter correctly connected to measure the p.d. across  wire x. [1]  (b) a student adjusts the position of the crocodile clip until the current in the circuit is 0.80  a.   in table 2.1, record the value of the p.d. v across wire x, as shown in fig. 2.2. 10.5 1.5 2 0 v fig. 2.2  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (c) the student records the p.d. v for different currents, as shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 i / a v / v 0.80 0.70 1.58 0.60 1.34 0.50 1.03 0.40 0.81   (i) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against i / a (x-axis).  [4]   (ii) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  .  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018   (iii) fig. 2.3 shows wire x. l fig. 2.3 \u2022 on fig. 2.3, measure the length l.  l =    cm \u2022 the wire in fig. 2.3 is shown to 1/3rd scale. calculate the actual length l of wire x.  l =    cm  [1]   (iv) calculate the resistance r of each centimetre of wire x, using the equation  r = g \u00d7 k l,     where k = 1.0  \u03c9\u2009cm.    give the value for r, to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  r =  .  [2]  (d) a student notices that the resistance wire becomes very hot when the crocodile clip is  connected to short lengths of the wire.   suggest an improvement that would help to reduce this effect.  ...  ...  ..  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over blank page",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 3 a student is investigating the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  her ray-trace sheet is shown in fig. 3.1. a nc b dray-trace sheeteye p4p3 p6p5 \u03b1 fig. 3.1  (a) (i) measure and record in table 3.1 the angle \u03b1 between an and cn, as shown in fig. 3.1.   [1]   (ii) draw a normal to ab at point n, towards the top of the page. label the top point of this  normal l. [1]   (iii) two pins p1 and p2 are placed on line ln, a suitable distance apart for ray tracing. on  fig. 3.1, label suitable positions for p1 and p2. [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 [turn over  (b) the student places the reflecting surface of a plane mirror on line cd and views the images  of p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 3.1.   she places two pins p3 and p4 so that the images of p1 and p2, and the pins p3 and p4, all  appear exactly one behind the other.   (i) draw a line passing through p3 and p4 and reaching point n. [1]   (ii) measure the angle \u03b8 between this line and the normal ln. record this value in table 3.1.  [1]   table 3.1 \u03b1\u2009/ \u00b0 \u03b8 / \u00b0 mirror on cd mirror on ef 35  (c) the student moves the mirror to a line ef at an angle \u03b1 = 35\u00b0 to an. line ef is not shown in  fig. 3.1.   the student repeats the process with the mirror on ef and places pins p5 and p6 in line with  the new images.   (i) draw a line passing through p5 and p6 and reaching point n. [1]   (ii) measure the angle \u03b8 between this new line and the normal ln. record this value in table 3.1.  [1]  (d) a student suggests that when the mirror is moved, the change in  \u03b8 should be equal to twice  the change in  \u03b1.   state whether your readings support this idea. justify your answer with reference to the  readings. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]  (e) suggest two precautions that you would take to ensure accurate results from this type of  experiment. 1    ... 2    ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 4 a student is investigating the conduction of thermal energy by metals.  plan an experiment to compare the rates at which different metals conduct thermal energy.  the apparatus available includes:   strips of different metals, shaped as shown in fig. 4.1   a test-tube in a clamp stand   a beaker   a supply of cold water   a supply of hot water. fig. 4.1  the shorter section of each strip of metal can fit inside a test-tube.  write a plan for the experiment.  you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 draw a labelled diagram of how the apparatus will be arranged \u2022 explain briefly how you will carry out the experiment \u2022 explain how the metals will be compared \u2022 state the precautions which should be taken to obtain reliable results.",
            "13": "13 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  .  [7]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/63/o/n/18 \u00a9 ucles 2018 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge international  examinations copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after  the live examination series. cambridge international examinations is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of university of cambridge local  examinations syndicate (ucles), which is itself a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        }
    },
    "2019": {
        "0625_m19_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib19 03_0625_12/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019   [turn over     *2318147385 * cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  february/march 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19  1 water drips from a tap into a measuring cylinder.    the table shows the volume of water in the cylinder every minute for four minutes.    time  / minutes volume of  water  / cm3  0 0  1.0 27  2.0 57  3.0 83  4.0 112    what is the average volume of water collected in the cylinder each minute?  a 22  cm3 b 28  cm3 c 56  cm3 d 57  cm3     2 an object is moving with uniform deceleration.    which statement describes its motion?  a its rate of change of speed is decreasing.  b its speed is constant.  c its speed is decreasing.  d its speed is increasing.      3 a ball rolls down a ramp. the time it takes to move from x to y is measured.    x yrampheight of rampball     which other quantity must be measured in order to calculate the average speed of the ball  between point x and point y?  a angle of slope  b diameter of ball  c distance between x and y  d height of ramp     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19 [turn over  4 an astronaut in a space station orbits above the earth.    in the space station, the acceleration due to gravity is 7.5  m / s2.    on earth, the acceleration due to gravity is 10  m / s2.    which statement about the astronaut\u2019s mass and weight in the space station is correct?     mass of astronaut weight of astronaut  a same as on the earth less than on the earth  b same as on the earth greater than on the earth  c lower than on the earth less than on the earth  d lower than on the earth greater than on the earth      5 the mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30  kg.    when exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is 0.90  kg.    0.90kg 1.30kg     what is the mass of the empty bottle?  a 0.40  kg b 0.50  kg c 0.65  kg d 0.80  kg     6 a solid ball has a volume of 4.0  cm3. the density of the ball is 1.6  g / cm3.    what is the mass of the ball?  a 0.4  g b 2.5  g c 4.0  g d 6.4  g    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19  7 which property of an object cannot  be changed by applying forces?  a mass  b shape  c speed  d volume      8 the extension  / load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretched length of the spring is 15.0  cm.    3 210 012345 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object of unknown weight is suspended on the spring, the length of the spring is  16.4  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 0.55  n b 0.67  n c 3.5  n d 4.1  n     9 the diagram shows a wooden beam with two forces acting on it.    5.0 n5.0 n     which way will the beam move?  a accelerate up the page  b accelerate down the page  c turn anticlockwise  d turn clockwise ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19 [turn over  10 which source of energy uses the production of steam to generate electrical energy?  a hydroelectric  b nuclear  c tides  d waves      11 what is the unit of power?  a joule  b newton  c pascal  d watt      12 the diagram shows a u-tube manometer containing three liquids: mercury, liquid x and liquid y.  neither liquid x or liquid y mixes with mercury.    liquid x liquid y mercury     which row compares the pressure exerted by liquid x and by liquid y on the mercury, and the  density of liquid x and the density of liquid y?     pressure exerted by x and  by y on the mercury densities of   x and of y  a pressure of x is greater than y density of x is greater than y  b pressure of y is greater than x density of y is greater than x  c pressure of x and of y is the same density of x is greater than y  d pressure of x and of y is the same density of y is greater than x    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19  13 which diagram shows an athlete exerting least pressure on the ground?    ab c d      14 a car tyre runs over a nail which makes a hole in it. the air in the tyre leaks out.    air    why does the air leave the tyre?  a the pressure inside the tyre is greater than the pressure outside.  b the pressure inside the tyre is less than the pressure outside.  c the temperature inside the tyre is greater than the temperature outside.  d the temperature inside the tyre is less than the temperature outside.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19 [turn over  15 on a cold day, a metal measuring tape graduated in millimetres is used to measure the distance  between two fence posts. the measuring tape reads 3.000  m.    on a much hotter day, the metal measuring tape is used to measure the length of the same  distance again. the metal measuring tape has a higher temperature than the ground. the  temperature of the ground remains constant.    which statement is correct?  a the measuring tape reads less than 3.000  m because the graduations are closer together.  b the measuring tape reads less than 3.000  m because the graduations are further apart.  c the measuring tape reads more than 3.000  m because the graduations are closer together.  d the measuring tape reads more than 3.000  m because the graduations are further apart.     16 a thermometer has graduations which start at \u201310  \u00b0c and end at 110  \u00b0c.    \u201310 0 100 110 \u00b0c    what is the lower fixed point and what is the upper fixed point of the celsius scale?     lower fixed point  / \u00b0c upper fixed point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 100  b \u201310 110  c 0 100  d 0 110     17 which row describes the process of melting?     initial state final state change in  temperature?  a liquid gas yes  b liquid solid no  c solid gas yes  d solid liquid no    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19  18 four campers are warming their food on a fire.    they use different rods, each of the same dimensions, to hold their food near the fire.    rod food fire     which material is the best choice to prevent their hands from getting too hot?  a aluminium  b copper  c steel  d wood     19 a beaker of water is heated and thermal energy travels through the water by convection.    what happens to the density of the water when it is heated and how does the water move?  a the density decreases and the heated water moves downwards.  b the density decreases and the heated water moves upwards.  c the density increases and the heated water moves downwards.  d the density increases and the heated water moves upwards.     20 the diagram shows a wave before it reflects from a barrier.    which labelled section of the diagram represents a wavefront?    ba c dbarrier  ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19 [turn over  21 the diagram shows a transverse wave.    12 3 54 distance     which distance is equal to one wavelength?  a the distance between points 1 and 2  b the distance between points 1 and 3  c the distance between points 2 and 3  d the distance between points 4 and 5      22 a ray of light is reflected by a plane mirror.    psqr     which row shows the angle of incidence and the angle of reflection?     angle of  incidence angle of  reflection  a p q  b p s  c q r  d r s     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19  23 which diagram correctly represents rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?    a b c objectimagecameradobjectimagecamera object lensimagecameralensobjectimagecamera lens lens       24 which statement about microwaves is correct?  a microwaves are longitudinal waves.  b the frequencies of microwaves are greater than the frequencies of visible light.  c the speed of microwaves in a vacuum is equal to the speed of visible light in a vacuum.  d the wavelengths of microwaves are smaller than the wavelengths of infra-red.      25 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from the sea-bed. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.3  s. the sea-bed is 1000  m  below the boat.    sea-bedboat 1000  m     using this information, what is the speed of sound in the water?  a 770  m / s b 1300  m / s c 1500  m / s d 2600  m / s   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19 [turn over  26 which action will not magnetise a rod?  a placing a copper rod inside a coil carrying a direct current  b stroking a steel rod with a permanent magnet  c hammering a steel rod aligned with the earth\u2019s magnetic field  d placing a soft-iron rod close to a permanent magnet      27 the ends of three metal rods are tested by holding end q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.    rod 1 rod 2 rod 3qr st u     the results are as follows.    end q attracts end r.  end q attracts end s. end q attracts end t.  end q repels end u.    which of the metal rods is a magnet?  a rod 1 only  b rod 1 and rod 2  c rod 1 and rod 3  d rod 3 only      28 which statement about a voltmeter is correct?  a a voltmeter measures the current in a component and is connected in series with the  component.  b a voltmeter measures the current in a component and is connected in parallel with the  component.  c a voltmeter measures the potential difference (p.d.) across a component and is connected in  series with the component.  d a voltmeter measures the potential difference (p.d.) across a component and is connected in  parallel with the component.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19  29 four wires are made from the same metal.    which wire has the lowest resistance?     length of  wire  / cm diameter of  wire  / mm  a 20 0.20  b 20 0.40  c 40 0.20  d 40 0.40     30 a student sets up a circuit containing a battery of two cells and three lamps, as shown.    + \u2013 + \u2013     what is the circuit diagram for this arrangement?    a b c d      31 the diagrams show different resistor arrangements.    which arrangement has the smallest combined resistance?    10 \u03c9a 5 \u03c910 \u03c9 10 \u03c9 10 \u03c9 10 \u03c9 5 \u03c9b 10 \u03c9cd      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19 [turn over  32 the diagram shows a potential divider circuit.    vqvp     the resistance of the variable resistor is increased.    which row shows what happens to the reading on voltmeter p and on voltmeter q?     reading on voltmeter p reading on voltmeter q  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     33 the current in a kettle is 10  a and the kettle is protected by a 13  a fuse.    the owner of the kettle replaces the 13  a fuse with a 3  a fuse.    what happens when the kettle is switched on?  a the fuse melts and the kettle might be damaged.  b the fuse melts and the kettle is undamaged.  c the fuse does not melt and the kettle works correctly.  d the fuse does not melt but the kettle fails to work.     34 a student wishes to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.    he has a magnet and connecting wires.    which other apparatus does he need?     voltmeter battery   a \u0016 \u0016 key  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016= needed  c \u001a \u0016 \u001a= not needed  d \u001a \u001a  ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19  35 the diagram shows a transformer connected to a 240  v a.c. supply.    primary coil 60 turnssecondary coil 30 turns 240  v a.c.soft-iron core     what is the potential difference across the secondary coil of the transformer?  a 30  v b 120  v c 240  v d 480  v    36 a current-carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field.    magnetic field linesview from above coil    which effect does the coil experience?  a a change in shape  b a change in weight  c a resultant force  d a turning effect      37 which statement about the structure of an atom is correct?  a negative electrons surround a neutral nucleus.  b negative electrons surround a positive nucleus.  c positive electrons surround a neutral nucleus.  d positive electrons surround a negative nucleus.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19 [turn over  38 what are isotopes of an element?  a atoms of a different element with a different number of neutrons  b atoms of a different element with a different number of protons  c atoms of the same element with a different number of neutrons  d atoms of the same element with a different number of protons      39 a student measures the level of radiation emitted by a radioactive sample.    radioactive sampledetectorcounte r     the table shows the readings she records on the counter over a short period of time.    counter reading  / counts per minute 106 96 98 100    the sample is removed and the counter then shows a background radiation reading of 4 counts per minute.    what is the best estimate for the average count rate due to the radioactive sample?  a 96 counts per minute  b 98 counts per minute   c 100 counts per minute  d 104 counts per minute     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/f/m/19  40 four students are discussing ideas about radioactive decay.    which student\u2019s statement is correct?    when a \u03b3-ray is emitted, the nucleus changes to that of a different element.a cb dwhen a \u03b2-particle is emitted, the nucleusremains unchanged.when an \u03b1-particle is emitted, the nucleus changes to thatof a different element. stable nuclei are dangerousbecause they emit highlevels of \u03b3-radiation.        "
        },
        "0625_m19_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib19 03_0625_22/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019   [turn over     *1358010994 * cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  february/march 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19  1 which row shows the best choice of measuring instruments to obtain accurate values for the  distances shown?     diameter of wire height of bench length of laboratory  a   measuring tape   measuring tape   micrometer  screw gauge  b   metre rule   micrometer  screw gauge measuring tape    c   micrometer  screw gauge measuring tape   metre rule    d   micrometer  screw gauge metre rule   measuring tape       2 an object is moving with uniform deceleration.    which statement describes its motion?  a its rate of change of speed is decreasing.  b its speed is constant.  c its speed is decreasing.  d its speed is increasing.     3 the graph shows how the speed of a car varies during part of its journey.    20 1510 50 02468 1 0 1 2speed m  / s time  / s    what is the value of the car\u2019s acceleration between 6  s and 10  s?  a 0.50  m / s2 b 0.80  m / s2 c 1.25  m / s2 d 1.50  m / s2     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19 [turn over  4 the gravitational field strength on the moon is less than on the earth.    which of these is different  when done on the moon compared with when done on the earth?  a the gravitational potential energy gained by a stone lifted through the same vertical height  b the kinetic energy gained by a ball when hit with the same force for the same period of time  c the momentum gained by a bullet when fired from the same gun  d the work done in accelerating a stone from rest to the same speed     5 the mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30  kg.    when exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is 0.90  kg.    0.90kg 1.30kg     what is the mass of the empty bottle?  a 0.40  kg b 0.50  kg c 0.65  kg d 0.80  kg      6 a solid ball has a volume of 4.0  cm3. the density of the ball is 1.6  g / cm3.    what is the mass of the ball?  a 0.4  g b 2.5  g c 4.0  g d 6.4  g     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19  7 the extension  / load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretched length of the spring is 15.0  cm.    3 210 012345 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object of unknown weight is suspended on the spring, the length of the spring is  16.4  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 0.55  n b 0.67  n c 3.5  n d 4.1  n     8 a box of mass 2.0  kg is pulled across the floor by a force of 6.0  n.    the frictional force acting on the box is 1.0  n.    what is the acceleration of the box?  a 0.40  m / s2 b 2.5  m / s2 c 3.0  m / s2 d 3.5  m / s2      9 which moving body has a resultant force acting on it?  a a diver rising vertically through water at constant speed  b an aircraft circling an airport at constant speed  c a train going up a straight incline at constant speed  d a parachutist descending vertically at terminal velocity     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19 [turn over  10 a constant force acts on a body causing the momentum of the body to increase.    which expression relates the force to the momentum and the time taken?  a force = taken timemomentum in change  b force = taken timemomentum  c force = change in momentum \u00d7 time taken  d force = momentum \u00d7 time taken     11 a car of mass 1500  kg has a speed of 20  m / s. it accelerates until its speed is 25  m / s.    what is the increase in the kinetic energy of the car?  a 19  kj b 38  kj c 170  kj d 340  kj    12 which source of energy uses the production of steam to generate electrical energy?  a hydroelectric  b nuclear  c tides  d waves     13 a car, travelling on a straight horizontal road, has 1.6  mj of kinetic energy. it accelerates for 20  s  until it has 2.5  mj of kinetic energy.    what is the average power output used to increase the kinetic energy of the car?  a 45  w b 205  w c 45  kw d 205  kw      14 which diagram shows an athlete exerting least pressure on the ground?    ab c d      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19  15 the diagram shows a u-tube manometer containing three liquids: mercury, liquid x and liquid y.  neither liquid x or liquid y mixes with mercury.    liquid x liquid y mercury     which row compares the pressure exerted by liquid x and by liquid y on the mercury, and the  density of liquid x and the density of liquid y?     pressure exerted by x and  by y on the mercury densities of   x and of y  a pressure of x is greater than y density of x is greater than y  b pressure of y is greater than x density of y is greater than x  c pressure of x and of y is the same density of x is greater than y  d pressure of x and of y is the same density of y is greater than x      16 gas molecules exert a pressure when they collide with the walls of a container.    which statement is correct?  a they experience a change in force which exerts a pressure equal to momentum \u00d7 area on  the walls.  b they experience a change in force which exerts a pressure equal to areamomentum on the  walls.  c they experience a change in momentum which exerts a pressure equal to force \u00d7 area on  the walls.  d they experience a change in momentum which exerts a pressure equal to areaforce on the  walls.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19 [turn over  17 a thermometer has graduations which start at \u201310  \u00b0c and end at 110  \u00b0c.    \u201310 0 100 110 \u00b0c    what is the lower fixed point and what is the upper fixed point of the celsius scale?     lower fixed point  / \u00b0c upper fixed point  / \u00b0c  a \u201310 100  b \u201310 110  c 0 100  d 0 110      18 a 1  kg block of aluminium requires more thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1  \u00b0c than a  1 kg block of copper requires.    why is this?  a aluminium is a better conductor of thermal energy than copper.  b aluminium is a poorer conductor of thermal energy than copper.  c aluminium has a higher specific heat capacity than copper.  d aluminium has a lower specific heat capacity than copper.     19 four campers are warming their food on a fire.    they use different rods, each of the same dimensions, to hold their food near the fire.    rod food fire     which material is the best choice to prevent their hands from getting too hot?  a aluminium  b copper  c steel  d wood ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19  20 two metal cans are identical, except that one has a shiny silver outer surface and the other has a  dull black outer surface. they each have 300  g of water at 80  \u00b0c sealed inside them. they are  both in a vacuum, in the darkness of outer space.    how does the temperature of the water in each one change?  a neither one will cool down.  b the water in the black can cools more slowly than that in the shiny can.  c the water in the shiny can cools more slowly than that in the black can.  d they both cool down at the same rate.      21 the diagram shows a wave before it reflects from a barrier.    which labelled section of the diagram represents a wavefront?    ba c dbarrier       22 a vibrating object produces ripples on the surface of a liquid. the object completes 20 vibrations  every second. the spacing of the ripples, from one crest to the next, is 3.0  cm.    what is the speed of the ripples?  a 0.15  cm  / s b 6.7  cm  / s c 60  cm  / s d 120  cm  / s     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19 [turn over  23 a narrow beam of light is travelling through a transparent liquid. it meets the surface as shown, at  an angle of incidence of 40 \u00b0. the refractive index of the liquid is 1.5.    40\u00b0air liquid     what is the angle of refraction as the light enters the air?  a 25 \u00b0 b 27 \u00b0 c 60 \u00b0 d 75 \u00b0     24 which diagram correctly represents rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?    a b c objectimagecameradobjectimagecamera object lensimagecameralensobjectimagecamera lens lens     25 what is the speed of x-rays in a vacuum and in air?     in a vacuum in air  a 3.0 \u00d7 106  m / s 2.0 \u00d7 106  m / s  b 3.0 \u00d7 106  m / s 3.0 \u00d7 106  m / s  c 3.0 \u00d7 108  m / s 2.0 \u00d7 108  m / s  d 3.0 \u00d7 108  m / s 3.0 \u00d7 108  m / s ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19  26 a sound wave passes a point. the air pressure at that point increases and then decreases  300 times every second.    which descriptions apply to this sound wave?     the type of wave motion the frequency of the sound  a longitudinal outside human hearing range  b longitudinal within human hearing range  c transverse outside human hearing range  d transverse within human hearing range     27 a boy stands 150  m from a wall. he claps and when he hears the echo, he immediately claps  again. he continues this for some time.    another student has a stop-watch. she starts the watch on the first clap and stops it on the eleventh clap. the watch reads 10.0  s.    which value do her measurements give for the speed of sound in air?  a 150  m / s b 170  m / s c 300  m / s d 330  m / s      28 the ends of three metal rods are tested by holding end q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.    rod 1 rod 2 rod 3qr st u     the results are as follows.    end q attracts end r.  end q attracts end s. end q attracts end t.  end q repels end u.    which of the metal rods is a magnet?  a rod 1 only  b rod 1 and rod 2  c rod 1 and rod 3  d rod 3 only     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19 [turn over  29 a metal sphere is charged by induction. there are four stages w, x, y and z in this process.    w a charged rod is brought near to the sphere  x the sphere is earthed  y the charged rod is taken away from the sphere  z the earth connection is removed    in which order are the four stages carried out?  a w  \u2192  x  \u2192  y  \u2192  z  b w  \u2192  x  \u2192  z  \u2192  y  c z  \u2192  w  \u2192  x  \u2192  y  d x  \u2192  z  \u2192  w  \u2192  y     30 which electrical quantity is defined in terms of the energy supplied in driving charge round a  complete circuit?  a current  b electromotive force  c potential difference  d power    31 a student sets up a circuit containing a battery of two cells and three lamps, as shown.    + \u2013 + \u2013     what is the circuit diagram for this arrangement?    a b c d  ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19  32 in which circuit does the lamp light?    d c b a       33 each potential divider is placed in a circuit with a power supply.    which potential divider makes the potential difference across component y increase when the  light intensity increases?    xa yxb yxc yxd y      ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19 [turn over  34 there are two inputs to the combination of logic gates shown, and one output.    input 1 input 2output     which truth table represents the action of this combination of gates?    input 1 input 2 output 0 01101010001a input 1 input 2 output 0 01101010111b input 1 input 2 output 0 01101011110c input 1 input 2 output 0 01101011000d      35 the current in a kettle is 10  a and the kettle is protected by a 13  a fuse.    the owner of the kettle replaces the 13  a fuse with a 3  a fuse.    what happens when the kettle is switched on?  a the fuse melts and the kettle might be damaged.  b the fuse melts and the kettle is undamaged.  c the fuse does not melt and the kettle works correctly.  d the fuse does not melt but the kettle fails to work.      36 which statement about the direction of a magnetic field at a point is correct?  a it is the direction of the force on a north pole placed at that point.  b it is the direction of the force on a south pole placed at that point.  c it is the direction of the force on a positive charge placed at that point.  d it is the direction of the force on a negative charge placed at that point.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19  37 a current-carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field.    magnetic field linesview from above coil    which effect does the coil experience?  a a change in shape  b a change in weight  c a resultant force  d a turning effect     38 what are isotopes of an element?  a atoms of a different element with a different number of neutrons  b atoms of a different element with a different number of protons  c atoms of the same element with a different number of neutrons  d atoms of the same element with a different number of protons    39 a radioactive isotope of carbon  14c decays by beta emission to give an isotope of nitrogen 14n  and a beta particle. the equation for the reaction is shown.    14c  \u2192  14n  +  0\u03b2x7 y    what is the value of x and of y?     x y  a 6 \u20131  b 6 1  c 8 \u20131  d 8 1     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19 40 a beta particle is a fast moving electron.    which statement explains how beta particles are emitted from an atom?  a an electron is emitted as a beta particle from an inner electron shell of the atom.  b an electron is emitted as a beta particle from an outer electron shell of the atom.  c a neutron changes into a proton and a beta particle is emitted from the nucleus.  d a proton changes into a neutron and a beta particle is emitted from the nucleus.     ",
            "16": "16    blank page     permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/f/m/19   "
        },
        "0625_m19_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (st/jg) 167382/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *6422375003* physics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  february/march 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "    this document consists of 1 printed page.   \u00a9 uc les 2019          \uf02a\uf038\uf039\uf034\uf038\uf038\uf039\uf031\uf036\uf035\uf034 \uf02a\uf020  cambridge assessment international education   cambridge international  general certificate of secondary education        physics  0625/32     paper 3 theory (core)  february/march 2019      1 hour 15 minutes         erratum notice  to be opened on the day of the examination        for the attention of the examinations officer and invigilator    to be given to candidates with the question paper        turn to page 9.    question 6(a) reads:    fig. 6.1 shows a cross-section of the inside of an electric oven.      question 6(a) should read:    fig. 6.1 is a diagram of the inside of an electric oven. the diagram shows a side view of the  oven.",
            "3": "2 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 fig. 1.1 shows a set of masses made from the same material. fig. 1.1  (a) identify the quantity that is the same for all the masses.   tick one box.     density     volume     weight  [1]  (b) the largest mass is 2.5  kg.   state the number of grams in 2.5  kg.  2.5 kg =  ..  g [1]  (c) the three largest masses are 2.5  kg, 1.0  kg and 0.5  kg.   calculate the combined weight  of these three masses. include the unit.  weight =  .  [4] [total: 6]",
            "4": "3 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows students getting onto a school bus. fig. 2.1  (a) a student describes part of the journey.   the bus accelerates from rest at a constant rate for 10  s. it reaches a maximum speed of  10 m / s.   the bus maintains a constant speed of 10  m / s for 60  s.   the bus then decelerates at a constant rate for 15  s, until it stops.   on fig. 2.2, draw the speed-time graph for this part of the journey made by the bus. 0024681012 20 10 40 50 60 70 30 80 90 100 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 2.2 [5]  (b) on another part of the journey, the average speed of the bus is 7.5  m / s.   calculate the distance the bus travels in 150  s.  distance =  .  m [3] [total: 8]",
            "5": "4 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 a load is attached to a spring, as shown in fig. 3.1. two arrows indicate the vertical forces acting  on the load. the spring and the load are stationary. loadspring 4.0 nsupport fig. 3.1  (a) (i) state the name of the force acting vertically downwards.  .  [1]   (ii) the vertical force that acts upwards is 4.0  n.     state the value of the force acting vertically downwards.  force =  .  n [1]  (b) the load is pulled downwards and then released. the load moves up and down.   fig. 3.2 represents the vertical forces acting on the load at some time after it is released. 7.6 n 2.8 n fig. 3.2   calculate the resultant force on the load and state its direction.  resultant force =  ...  n  direction =  ... [2]",
            "6": "5 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) (i) state the principle of conservation of energy.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) eventually the load stops moving up and down.     describe and explain why the load stops moving. use your ideas about conservation of  energy.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "7": "6 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 fig. 4.1 shows a truck lifting a heavy load. truckload pivot fig. 4.1  (a) (i) the truck is stationary. identify the quantities that determine the work done as it lifts the  load.    tick the box next to each correct quantity.      distance      force      time [1]   (ii)  draw a ring around the unit for work done from the list.     joule       newton       pascal       watt [1]  (b) identify the quantities that determine the power of the truck.   tick the box next to each correct quantity.     energy transferred     temperature     time [1]",
            "8": "7 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) the truck has a pivot near the front wheel. fig. 4.2 represents the pivot and the vertical forces  acting on the truck. 1.5 m 1.0 m 30 000  n load pivot fig. 4.2   the truck is in equilibrium.    calculate the load.  load =  .  n [3]  (d)  fig. 4.3 shows another truck lifting a pile of identical bricks. pile of bricks fig. 4.3   (i) on fig. 4.3, draw a cross to indicate the centre of mass of the pile of bricks.  [1]   (ii) the truck can tilt the pile of bricks backwards, as shown in fig. 4.4. fig. 4.4    explain how tilting the pile of bricks backwards makes the truck more stable.  ...  ...  ...  .  [1] [total: 8]",
            "9": "8 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 5 fig. 5.1 shows part of a solar farm. the solar panels tilt and rotate. solar panel support fig. 5.1  (a) the solar farm converts energy from a source into a different, useful form of energy.   state the energy source and the useful form of energy. source  ... useful form of energy   [2]  (b) solar farms have advantages and disadvantages.   (i) state two advantages of a solar farm. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2]   (ii) state one disadvantage of a solar farm.  .  [1]  (c)  suggest why it is useful that the panels can tilt and rotate.  ...  .  [1] [total: 6]",
            "10": "9 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 6 (a)  fig. 6.1 shows a cross-section of the inside of an electric oven. metal casing glass front heating element  fig. 6.1   the heater is switched on.   (i)  on fig. 6.1, draw two arrows to show how thermal energy moves throughout the oven by  convection.  [2]   (ii) explain how thermal energy moves throughout the oven by convection. use your ideas  about density and expansion.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (iii) use a word from the box to complete the sentence. conduction     expansion     insulation     radiation thermal energy travels at the speed of light by  ..  [1]  (b) the oven is in a kitchen that is fitted with a smoke detector.   warm, moving air can carry smoke particles.   suggest the best position for the smoke detector in the kitchen.  .  [1] [total: 7]",
            "11": "10 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 7 light and sound both travel as waves.  draw a line from each statement to the correct term that describes it. one has been done for you. statement term amplitudechange in direction of light when  entering a medium very high frequency sounds a glass prism producing a spectrum light spreading after passing through a narrow gap sound reflecting from a wall seven colours of lightdispersion diffraction echo longitudinal refraction spectrum ultrasound [5] [total: 5]",
            "12": "11 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 8 (a)  fig. 8.1 shows an incomplete diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum. visible light ultraviolet higher frequencyradio waves longer wavelength fig. 8.1   complete fig. 8.1 with the names of the missing types of radiation in the correct boxes.  [4]  (b) state one use for ultraviolet radiation.  .  [1] [total: 5]",
            "13": "12 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 9 fig. 9.1 and fig. 9.2 each show an electrical circuit. each circuit has two lamps connected to an  electrical supply.  x y    .. circuit  .. circuit  fig. 9.1  fig. 9.2  (a)  state the term used to describe each electrical circuit. write the term under each circuit.  [2]  (b) state two disadvantages of the circuit in fig. 9.2. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2]  (c) redraw the circuit in fig. 9.1 with switches that will turn lamps x and y on and off independently  of each other. [2]",
            "14": "13 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d) fig. 9.3 shows another circuit. k w z js1s2 fig. 9.3   the lamps can be turned on and off using two different switches s1 and s2.   complete the table stating when the lamps are on or off. the first one has been done for you. switch positionslamps on or offs1s2 k z off k w j w j z [3] [total: 9]",
            "15": "14 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 10 fig. 10.1 shows the apparatus for an experiment on electrostatics. aluminium clamp and standiron nail cotton thread plastic stirrup polythene strip fig. 10.1  (a) identify the pieces of equipment that are electrical conductors and those that are electrical  insulators. draw a line from each piece of equipment to the correct box. aluminium clamp and stand plastic stirrup iron nail cotton threadconductor insulator [1]  (b) state and explain how the polythene strip can be given a negative charge.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) describe how the apparatus in fig.  10.1 could be used to demonstrate that the polythene  strip has a negative charge.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 5]",
            "16": "15 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 11 fig. 11.1 shows a relay. contacts armaturepivot primary circuitto secondary circuit c fig. 11.1  (a) the statements describe the action of a relay. they are not in the correct order.    p current in the coil creates an electromagnet.    q secondary circuit is completed.    r armature pivots, closing the contacts.    s part c attracts the armature.    t the switch in the primary circuit is closed.   place the statements in the correct order. one has been done for you.     s    [3]  (b) fig. 11.1 includes the part labelled c, which is made from a metal.    state the name of the metal and explain why this metal is used in the electromagnet. metal  . explanation  ...  ... [2] [total: 5]",
            "17": "16 0625/32/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.12 astatine-210 is a radioactive material. the nucleus of astatine can be represented by the symbol  shown. 210 85at  (a) complete the table to describe the nucleus of astatine-210. type of particle number of particles charge on particle neutron positive [4]  (b) astatine-210 has a half-life of 8 hours.   (i)  the count rate of a sample of astatine-210 is measured over 24 hours.     on fig. 12.1, sketch a line to show how the count rate changes over the 24 hours.   time  / hourscount rate 0 8 16 24 fig. 12.1 [2]   (ii) the mass of a sample of astatine-210 is 0.500  kg.     calculate how long it takes for 0.375  kg of the sample to decay.  decay time =  ...  hours  [3] [total: 9]"
        },
        "0625_m19_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (st/ct) 167383/5 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *6092531240* physics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  february/march 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 (a) define acceleration .  .  [1]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows the distance-time graph for the journey of a cyclist. 0 5 15 25 350100150 50200250300350 10 20 30 40 time  / sdistance  / m fig. 1.1   (i) describe the motion of the cyclist in the time between:    1. time = 0 and time = 15  s  ...    2. time = 15  s and time = 30  s  ...    3. time = 30  s and time = 40  s.  ... [3]   (ii)  calculate, for the 40  s journey:    1. the average speed  average speed =  .  [2]    2. the maximum speed.  maximum speed =  .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 (a) state one advantage and one disadvantage of using a wind turbine as a source of electrical  energy. advantage  . disadvantage   [2]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows a wind turbine. wind speed 16 m / s area swept out by the turbine blades fig. 2.1   (i) the wind blows at a speed of 16  m / s towards the turbine blades. in one second, a  volume of 24  000 m3 of air passes through the circular area swept out by the blades. the  density of air is 1.3  kg / m3.    calculate:    1. the mass of air that passes through the circular area swept out by the blades in 1.0  s  mass =  .  [2]    2.  the kinetic energy of the mass of air that passes through the area swept out by the  blades.  kinetic energy =  .  [2]   (ii) suggest why some of the kinetic energy of the air that passes through the circular area  swept out by the blades is not converted into electrical energy.  ...  .  [1] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 (a) an object is moving in a straight line at constant speed.   state three  ways in which a force may change the motion of the object. 1  ... 2  ... 3  ... [2]  (b)  fig. 3.1 shows an object suspended from two ropes. the weight of the object is 360  n. the  magnitude of the tension in each rope is t. object45\u00b0 360  n45\u00b0t t fig. 3.1   in the space below, determine the tension t by drawing a vector diagram of the forces acting  on the object.   state the scale you have used.  scale  ...  t =  ... [5] [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4 (a) fig. 4.1 shows a mercury barometer. the tube containing the mercury is vertical. hs mercury fig. 4.1   (i)  the height h indicates a value of the atmospheric pressure.    state what is contained in the space labelled s.  .  [1]   (ii)  on a particular day the atmospheric pressure is 1.02 \u00d7 105 pa. the density of mercury  is 13  600 kg / m3.    calculate the value of h indicated by the barometer.  h =  .  [2]   (iii)  the tube containing mercury is now tilted so that it makes an angle of 10\u00b0 with the  vertical. after tilting, there continues to be a space above the mercury in the tube.    state and explain whether the vertical height of mercury in the tube is smaller, the same,  or greater than the value calculated in (a)(ii) .  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b)  another mercury barometer in the same room at the same time shows a lower value of h than  the barometer in (a).   suggest and explain a reason for the lower value.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 5  (a)  state the values of the fixed points  of a temperature scale.  .  [1]  (b) (i) the graduations on a liquid-in-glass thermometer are equally spaced.    for the equal spacing of the graduations to be correct, state:    1. an assumption that is made about the liquid in the thermometer  ...    2. an assumption that is made about the structure of the thermometer.  ...    [2]   (ii) liquid-in-glass thermometer a has a greater range than liquid-in-glass thermometer b.    state one way the design of thermometer a is different from thermometer b.  ...  .  [1]   (iii) liquid-in-glass thermometer c has a greater sensitivity than liquid-in-glass thermometer d.    state one way the design of thermometer c is different from thermometer d.  ...  .  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) (i) in the space provided, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple thermometer. [3]   (ii) suggest when a thermocouple thermometer is more suitable than a liquid-in-glass  thermometer.  ...  .  [1] [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6  an electrical heater is placed on the floor of a room in a house. the heater is switched on.  (a) state the main process by which thermal energy is transferred to the air in all parts of the  room.  .  [1]  (b)  the heater has a power of 1.5  kw. the air in the room has a mass of 65  kg. the specific heat  capacity of air is 720  j / (kg \u00b0c).   (i) calculate the time it takes for this heater to raise the temperature of the air in the room  from 8.0  \u00b0c to 15.0  \u00b0c.  time =  .  [4]   (ii) state two reasons why the time calculated in (b)(i)  is smaller than the actual time taken  to raise the temperature of the air in the room from 8.0  \u00b0c to 15.0  \u00b0c. 1  ...  ... 2  ...  ... [2] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 7 (a) in fig. 7.1, the small circles represent molecules. the arrows refer to the change of state  from the arrangement of molecules on the left to the arrangement of molecules on the right. x y fig. 7.1   complete the following by writing solid, liquid or gas in each of the blank spaces.   1. change of state x is from  to  .   2. change of state y is from  to  . [2]  (b) explain, in terms of the forces between their molecules, why gases expand more than solids  when they undergo the same rise in temperature.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c)  a cylinder of volume 0.012  m3 contains a compressed gas at a pressure of 1.8 \u00d7 106 pa.   a valve is opened and all the compressed gas escapes from the cylinder into the atmosphere.   the temperature of the gas does not change.   calculate the volume that the escaped  gas occupies at the atmospheric pressure  of 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.  volume =  .  [3] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 8  fig. 8.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in ice. the wavefronts are incident on a boundary  with air. direction of wave airice fig. 8.1  the speed of the light wave in air is 3.0 \u00d7 108 m / s. the refractive index of the ice is 1.3.  (a)  on fig. 8.1:   (i)  draw the wavefronts of the wave that passes into the air  [3]   (ii)  draw arrows to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave   [1]   (iii)  label the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r.  [1]  (b)  calculate the speed of the light wave in the ice.  speed =  .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 9  fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference (p.d.) graphs for a resistor and for a thermistor. 02.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 04.06.0 current  / a p.d.  / vthermistorresistor fig. 9.1  (a)  calculate the resistance of the thermistor when the p.d. across it is 7.0  v.  resistance =  .  [2]  (b)  in table 9.1, tick the boxes that indicate the effect on the resistances of the resistor and of the  thermistor when the p.d. across them is increased from 0 to 7.0  v.  table 9.1 component resistance increases resistance is constant resistance decreases resistor thermistor  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c)  the thermistor and the resistor are connected in  parallel  to a 7.0  v supply.   calculate:   (i)  the current from the supply  current =  .  [2]   (ii) the energy transferred from the supply in 5.0 minutes.  energy =  .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 10  (a) the electrical energy produced by a power station is transmitted over long distances at a very  high voltage.   explain why a very high voltage is used.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b)  fig. 10.1 represents a transformer. 120  v 9.0 v s p ba 4000 turnscore fig. 10.1   (i)  the primary coil p has 4000 turns and an input of 120  v. the secondary coil s has an  output of 9.0  v.    calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.  number =  .  [2]   (ii) state a suitable material for the core of the transformer.  .  [1] [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 11 (a) (i) one isotope of iridium-194 is represented by 194 77 ir    this isotope decays by \u03b2-emission to a stable isotope of platinum (pt).    complete the nuclide equation for this decay. 194 77 ir  .. .. pt  +  .. .. \u03b2  [3]   (ii) the half-life of iridium-194 is 19 hours. a sample of iridium-194 has an initial count-rate  of 1100 counts  / min.    calculate the count-rate from this sample after 38 hours.  count-rate =  .  [2]  (b)  state two ways in which \u03b3-emission differs from \u03b2-emission. 1  ... 2  ... [2] [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_m19_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (kn/tp) 168081/6 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *1574295149* physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  february/march 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided.    you may refer to fig. 1.1 for guidance.  10 cm 4 cm\u03b8ray-trace sheet lamphole a e b fnl dc screen with slit fig. 1.1  (a) \u2022  draw a line ab 4 cm from the edge of the ray-trace sheet and in the middle of the paper,  as shown in fig. 1.1.   \u2022 draw a line cd parallel to line ab and 10  cm from it.    \u2022  draw a normal to line ab at a point n in the centre of line ab. point n must be an equal  distance from the top and bottom of the sheet.    \u2022  extend the normal to line cd and label the point at which it crosses line cd with the  letter l.  [1]  (b) draw a line ef, through point n, as shown in fig. 1.1 and at an angle \u03b8 = 5\u00b0.  [1]  (c) \u2022  place the plane mirror on line ef with the reflecting surface facing to the right.   \u2022   place the screen with a slit on line cd and arrange the lamp so a ray of light shines  along line ln.    \u2022   mark the ray that is reflected from the mirror, using a small cross at a suitable distance  from point n. label this cross g.    \u2022  remove the mirror, screen and lamp from the ray-trace sheet.  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d) \u2022  draw a line joining point n and point g. extend this line until it meets line cd.   \u2022  label the point at which line ng meets line cd with the letter h.   \u2022  measure, and record in table 1.1, the length a of line lh.    [1]  (e) repeat (b), (c) and (d) for values of \u03b8 = 10\u00b0, 15\u00b0, 20\u00b0 and 25\u00b0. table 1.1   \u03b8\u2009/ \u00b0 a / cm 5 10 15 20 25  [1]  (f) plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against \u03b8\u2009/ \u00b0 (x-axis).  [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (g) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in this experiment, even if it is carried out carefully.  ...  .  [1]  (h) a student wishes to check if his values for a are reliable.   suggest how he could extend the experiment, using the same apparatus, to check the  reliability of his results.   you are not required to carry out this extended experiment.   ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this question paper between pages 2 and 3.",
            "5": "5 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2  in this experiment, you will investigate how the use of a lid or insulation affects the rate of cooling  of hot water in a beaker.   carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.   insulation lid beaker athermometer beaker b bench fig. 2.1   (a) the thermometer must remain in the clamp throughout the experiment. \u2022 use the measuring cylinder to pour 100  cm3 of hot water into beaker a.  \u2022 place the thermometer in the water in beaker a. \u2022 in the first row of table 2.1, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at time t = 0 and  immediately start the stopclock.  \u2022 record, in table 2.1, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s,  150 s and 180  s.  \u2022 remove the thermometer from the beaker.  [1]  (b)  (i) repeat (a) for beaker b. ensure that the lid is removed before pouring the hot water into  the beaker. replace the lid immediately after pouring.  [2]   (ii) complete the headings and the time column in the table.  [2] table 2.1 beaker a with insulation  onlybeaker b with a lid only t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0",
            "6": "6 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) write a conclusion stating whether the insulation or the lid is more effective in reducing the  cooling rate of the water in the beakers in this experiment.   justify your answer by reference to your results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]    (d) a student thinks that the experiment does not show how effective insulation is on its own or  how effective a lid is on its own.   suggest an additional experiment which could be used to show how effective a lid or insulation  is on its own.   explain how the additional results could be used.   you are not required to carry out this experiment. additional experiment  ...  ...  ... explanation  ...  ...  ...  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (e) students in another school are carrying out this experiment using equipment which is identical  to yours.   state whether it is important for the students to make the initial temperature of the water the  same as yours if they are to obtain average cooling rates that are the same as yours. assume  that the room temperature is the same in each case.   use values from your results for beaker a in table 2.1 to justify if this factor should be  controlled.  statement  ..  ... explanation  ...  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 in this experiment, you will investigate a resistance wire.    the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. power supply a resistance wirecrocodile clip lv 0.0 cm markmetre rule fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 connect the crocodile clip to a length l = 90.0  cm of the resistance wire. \u2022 switch on. \u2022 record, in table 3.1, the value of potential difference (p.d.) v and current i for the wire.  \u2022 switch off.  \u2022 move the crocodile clip and repeat the procedure for lengths of resistance wire   l = 60.0  cm and l = 40.0  cm.  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) complete the column headings in table 3.1.  [1] table 3.1 l / cm v / i / r / \u03c9r l / \u03c9 cm  (c) (i) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance r of each length l of the wire.      use your readings from the table and the equation r = v i .  [2]   (ii) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the value of r l  for each wire.  [1]  (d) use your results in table 3.1 to calculate the resistance r25 of a 25.0  cm length of the  resistance wire.   show your working.   you must not carry out an experiment to measure this value.  r25 =  .. \u03c9 [1]  (e) suggest one reason why different students, carrying out the experiment carefully with the  same equipment, may not obtain identical results.    ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (f) a student finds that, during the experiment, the wire becomes hot because of a high current.     he decides to use a variable resistor to prevent this.   complete the circuit in fig. 3.2 to show a variable resistor used for this purpose in the  experiment.   you are not required to carry out this experiment.  power supply resistance wire fig. 3.2  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4  a student wants to investigate the effect of air resistance on the swing of a pendulum.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate how air resistance changes the way in  which a pendulum swings.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes:    a light wooden rod, approximately 80  cm long with a hole at one end, through which a nail   will fit   a piece of modelling clay to act as a pendulum bob, as shown in fig. 4.1   a sheet of thick card which will provide the air resistance when the pendulum swings.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the experiment including exactly which measurements  should be taken \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may add to fig. 4.1 or draw an additional diagram if it helps to explain your plan. nail bobwooden rod fig. 4.1  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/52/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_m19_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (nh/tp) 168080/5 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *9499791551* physics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  february/march 2019  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a student is investigating the reflection of light by a plane mirror.  fig. 1.1 shows his ray-trace sheet at full size. e ac dbn\u03b8 fp lampray-trace sheet fig. 1.1  (a) the student carries out an initial experiment.   he draws lines ab and cd as shown in fig. 1.1.   he then draws a line ef through a point n as shown in fig. 1.1 and at an angle \u03b8 to line ab.   (i) measure the angle \u03b8.  \u03b8 =    [1]   (ii) draw a normal to line ab at point n and extend the normal to line cd. label the point at  which the normal crosses line cd with the letter l. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) the student places a plane mirror on line  ef and a screen with a 2  mm slit on line cd. he  arranges the screen so that a ray of light shines along line ln.   the ray reflected from the mirror passes through point p.   state and explain whether point p, shown on fig. 1.1, is at a suitable distance from point n  for this investigation. statement  .. explanation  ...  [1]  (c) \u2022 draw a line joining point n and point p. extend this line until it meets line cd. \u2022 label the point at which this line meets line cd with the letter g. \u2022 measure the length a of line lg.  a =  ... cm [2]  (d) the student repeats the procedure for values of \u03b8 = 25\u00b0, 20\u00b0, 15\u00b0, 10\u00b0 and 5\u00b0.   his values for a are shown in table 1.1.   table 1.1 \u03b8 / \u00b0 a / cm 25 12.2 20 8.3 15 5.7 10 3.6 5 1.8",
            "4": "4 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019   use the values from table 1.1 to plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against \u03b8 / \u00b0 (x-axis).  [4]  (e) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in this experiment, even if it is carried out carefully.  ...  .  [1]  (f) a student wishes to check if his values for a are reliable.   suggest how he could improve the experiment, using the same apparatus, to check the  reliability of his results.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 students are investigating how the use of a lid or insulation affects the rate of cooling of hot water  in a beaker. they use the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1. thermometer 2030400lid beakers a binsulation fig. 2.1  (a) record the room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.1.  \u03b8r =    [1]  (b) \u2022  100 cm3 of hot water is poured into beaker a and the initial temperature \u03b8 is recorded in  table 2.1. \u2022 the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s, 150  s and 180  s are  shown in table 2.1. \u2022 this process is repeated for beaker b.   complete the headings and the time column in table 2.1.  [2] table 2.1 beaker a with insulationbeaker b with a lid t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 83.0 86.0 79.0 84.0 75.5 82.5 73.0 81.0 71.0 80.0 69.5 79.0 68.5 78.5",
            "6": "6 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) write a conclusion stating whether the insulation or the lid is more effective in reducing the  cooling rate of the water in the beakers in this experiment.   justify your answer by reference to the results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (d) one student thinks that the experiment does not show how effective insulation is on its own  or how effective a lid is on its own.   suggest an additional experiment which could be used to show how effective a lid or insulation  is.   explain how the additional results could be used. additional experiment  ...  ...  ... explanation  ...  ...  ...  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (e) (i) calculate xa, the average cooling rate for beaker a over the whole experiment. use the  readings for beaker a from table 2.1 and the equation xa = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8180 t    where t = 180  s and \u03b80 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures at time t = 0 and time t = 180  s.    include the unit for the cooling rate.  xa =    [2]   (ii) students in another school are carrying out this experiment using identical equipment.    state why they should make the initial temperature of the water the same as in this  experiment if they are to obtain average cooling rates that are the same as in table 2.1.  assume that the room temperature is the same in each case.    use the results from beaker  a to explain why this factor should be controlled. statement  ..  ... explanation    ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 a student is investigating a resistance wire. she uses the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. apower supply crocodile clipq resistance wirelp fig. 3.1  (a) (i) on fig. 3.1, draw a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference v across   terminals p and q. [1]   (ii) the student connects the crocodile clip to a length l = 90.0  cm of the resistance wire  and  measures the potential difference v across terminals p and q and the current i in the  circuit. v3 4 52 1 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 3.2                  fig. 3.3    read, and record in table 3.1, the values of v and i shown on the meters in fig. 3.2 and  fig. 3.3. [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) the student then connects the crocodile clip to lengths l = 60.0  cm and l = 40.0  cm of the  resistance wire. she measures the potential difference v across terminals p and q and the  current i in the circuit. her readings are shown in table 3.1.   complete the column headings in table 3.1.  [1] table 3.1 l / cm v / i / r / \u03c9r l / \u03c9 cm 90.0 60.0 2.5 0.52 40.0 2.3 0.71  (c) (i) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance r of each length  l of the wire.    use the readings from table 3.1 and the equation r = v i.  [2]   (ii) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the value of  r l for each length of the wire.  [1]  (d) use your results in table 3.1 to calculate the resistance r25 of a 25.0  cm length of the  resistance wire.   show your working.  r25 =  . \u03c9 [1]  (e) suggest one reason why different students, carrying out the experiment carefully with the  same equipment, may not obtain identical results.   ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (f) the student finds that, during the experiment, the wire becomes hot because of a high  current.   she decides to use a variable resistor to prevent this.   complete the circuit in fig. 3.4 to show a variable resistor used for this purpose in the  experiment.  power supply resistance wire  [2] fig. 3.4  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4  a student wants to investigate the effect of air resistance on the swing of a pendulum.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate how air resistance changes the way in  which a pendulum swings.  the apparatus available includes:   a light wooden rod, approximately 80  cm long with a hole at one end, through which a nail  will fit   a piece of modelling clay to act as a pendulum bob, as shown in fig. 4.1   a sheet of thick card which will provide the air resistance when the pendulum swings.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the experiment including exactly which measurements  should be taken \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may add to fig. 4.1 or draw an additional diagram if it helps to explain your plan. nail bobwooden rod fig. 4.1  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/62/f/m/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib19 06_0625_11/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019   [turn over     *1585078804* cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  1 a digital stop-clock measures time in minutes and seconds.    the stop-clock reads 00:50 when it is started (i.e. 00 minutes 50 seconds).    it reads 02:10 when it is stopped.    what is the shortest possible time that has elapsed between starting and stopping the   stop-clock?  a 1 minute 20 seconds  b 2 minutes 00 seconds  c 2 minutes 10 seconds  d 3 minutes 00 seconds     2 a long-distance runner wishes to calculate her average speed for a race.    which calculation should she use?  a average speed =  time totaldistance total  b average speed = total distance \u00d7 total time  c average speed = distance totaltime total  d average speed = total distance + total time     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 [turn over  3 a heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels j, k, l  and m.    level j level k level l level mmetal ball     the times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.    where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?     speed is  greatest between time is  shortest between  a j and k j and k  b j and k l and m  c l and m j and k  d l and m l and m     4 an arrow travels horizontally in a straight line at constant speed.    in which direction does the weight act?    direction of motion ad bc ground      ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  5 two rectangular blocks consist of different materials.    four different methods are suggested to compare the two masses.    1 compare the accelerations with which they fall freely.  2 compare the values of their lengths \u00d7 breadths \u00d7 heights.  3 hang each in turn from the same spring. compare the extensions.  4 place one in the right-hand pan of a beam balance and the other in the left-hand  pan.    which methods give a comparison of the two masses?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 3 and 4 only d 4 only     6 the diagrams show four solid blocks with their dimensions and masses.    which block has the greatest density?    a mass = 14  garea = 10  cm2 b mass = 48  garea = 20  cm2 2.0 cm 2.0  cm c mass = 54  garea = 10  cm2 d mass = 68  g2.0 cm 2.0 cmarea = 20  cm2     7 a mass of 20  kg is held stationary by a rope passing over a frictionless pulley.    20 kgtpulley     what is the tension t in the rope?  a 10  kg b 20  kg c 100  n d 200  n    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 [turn over  8 a spring is suspended from a stand. loads are added and the extensions are measured.    loadsspring stand rule     which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load?    loadextensiona loadextensionb loadextensionc loadextensiond0 00 0 0 00 0     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  9 a wooden bar is pivoted at its centre so that it can rotate freely. two equal forces f are applied to  the bar.    in which diagram is the turning effect greatest?    ffa f fb f f c d f fpivot pivot pivot pivot      10 a machine is very efficient.    what does this mean?  a it produces a large amount of power.  b it uses very little energy.  c it wastes very little energy.  d it works very quickly.      11 an object is lifted vertically by a motor.    in which example is the power produced the greatest?  a lifting it a shorter distance in a longer time  b lifting it the same distance in a longer time  c lifting it a shorter distance in the same time  d lifting it the same distance in a shorter time ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 [turn over  12 four identical submarines p, q, r and s are lowered from one depth to another in water of a  constant density.    the initial and final depths of each submarine are shown in the diagram.    submarine p 10 m submarine q30 msubmarine r 50 msubmarine s 70 mwater surface     which row is correct for the difference in pressure from the initial to final depth of each  submarine?     least change  in pressure greatest change  in pressure  a submarines p and q submarines r and s  b submarines p and q submarine r only  c submarine p only submarines r and s  d submarine p only submarine r only    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  13 the diagram shows a stone suspended on a string under the surface of a liquid. the stone  experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.    liquidstring stone     what would increase the pressure on the stone?  a decreasing the surface area of the stone   b increasing the mass of the stone  c lowering the stone deeper into the liquid  d using a liquid with a lower density      14 why can a gas be compressed easily into a smaller volume?  a the molecules are far apart.  b the molecules do not attract each other.  c the molecules move randomly.  d the volume of each molecule can be reduced.      15 when a liquid evaporates, some molecules escape. the temperature of the remaining liquid changes.    what is the effect on the temperature and from where do the molecules escape?     temperature of liquid molecules escape from  a decreases everywhere within the liquid  b decreases the surface only  c increases everywhere within the liquid  d increases the surface only     16 what happens when a metal block is heated?  a its breadth, height and length all increase.  b its width increases only.  c its height increases only.  d its length increases only. ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 [turn over  17 a night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the  night. during the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.        which thermal capacity and which night-time temp erature increase will cause the most energy to  be stored by the block?     thermal capacity  of block night-time  temperature increase  a large large  b large small  c small large  d small small      18 the diagram shows the changes of state p, q, r and s that occur in solids, liquids and gases when they gain or lose thermal energy.    liquid gas solidp sq rgain thermal energy lose thermal energy    what is the name of change r?  a condensation  b solidification  c boiling  d melting     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  19 in which does thermal conduction not occur?  a a gas  b a liquid  c a solid  d a vacuum      20 the metal surface of a kettle is hot.    what happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?  a the density of the air decreases and the air falls.  b the density of the air decreases and the air rises.  c the density of the air increases and the air falls.  d the density of the air increases and the air rises.     21 ultrasound is used in a hospital to scan a patient. ultrasound refracts at the boundary between muscle and bone because it travels at a greater speed in bone.    which change takes place when the ultrasound travels from muscle into bone?  a the frequency of the wave decreases.  b the frequency of the wave increases.  c the wavelength of the wave decreases.  d the wavelength of the wave increases.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 [turn over  22 the diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright in water.    xycork water surface weight    transverse waves travel across the water from x to y.    in which direction do the waves make the cork move?  a \u2192 \u2190 right and left  b \u2191\u2193 up and down  c \u2192 only to the right  d \u2190 only to the left     23 an object is placed 30  cm in front of a plane mirror.    which statement describes the image of the object?  a the image is the same size and 30  cm from the object.  b the image is the same size and 60  cm from the object.  c the image is smaller and 30  cm from the object.  d the image is smaller and 60  cm from the object.    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  24 the diagram shows light incident at a glass-air boundary. the angle of incidence i of the ray is  greater than the critical angle.    which line shows the path of the light after it meets the boundary?    air glassi incident ray of light abcd       25 the diagram shows radiation from a lamp passing through a prism.    radiation from lampp red lightscreen prism     which type of radiation is found at p?  a \u03b3-rays  b infrared  c ultraviolet  d x-rays    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 [turn over  26 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from a shoal of fish. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.2  s. the speed of sound  in the water is 1500  m / s.    shoal of fishboat     how far below the bottom of the boat is the shoal of fish?  a 450  m b 900  m c 1800  m d 3600  m      27 which range is approximately correct for the audio frequencies that can be detected by a healthy  human ear?  a 2 hz to 2000  hz  b 2 hz to 20  000  hz  c 20  hz to 2000  hz  d 20  hz to 20  000  hz      28 why is soft iron used for the core of an electromagnet?  a soft iron easily becomes a permanent magnet.  b soft iron is a good electrical conductor.  c soft iron is a poor thermal conductor.  d soft iron loses its magnetism when the current in the coil is switched off.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  29 an iron ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet which is lying  on the table.    which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table?    s na magnet balls nb magnet s nc magnet balls nd magnet ballstops hereball      30 diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.    diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.    diagram 1 diagram 2strips of plasticstrips of plastic     which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after  rubbing?     charge on strips force between strips  a opposite attraction  b opposite repulsion  c the same attraction  d the same repulsion ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 [turn over  31 a voltmeter and an ammeter are used to measure the resistance of a resistor.    which diagram shows the voltmeter and the ammeter correctly connected?    a va a v av a vbcd      32 a student sets up four circuits.    in which circuit is there a heater in series with a fuse?    a b c d      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  33 the diagram shows a circuit containing a d.c. power supply, a motor and a variable resistor.    three ammeters x, y and z show the current in different parts of the circuit.    aa a mxz y+\u2013     the reading on x is 4.0  a.    which statement is correct?  a the readings on y and z are both less than 4.0  a.  b the readings on y and z are both equal to 4.0  a.  c the readings on y and z are both greater than 4.0  a.  d the reading on z is zero.    34 a lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the potential difference (p.d.) across it can be varied  from 0 to 6  v.    which circuit would be most suitable?    6 va 6 vb 6 vc 6 vd      ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 [turn over  35 an electric heater is plugged into the mains supply using a fused plug.    the current in the heater is 10  a.    the cable attached to the heater is rated at 15  a.    the fuses available are rated at 1  a, 3  a, 5  a and 13  a.    which fuse should be used?  a 1 a b 3 a c 5 a d 13 a      36 a bar magnet is held near a coil of wire. the coil is connected to a sensitive voltmeter.    nbar magnet vcoil of wire     the n-pole of the magnet is moved quickly towards the coil. the voltmeter shows a reading of +10  mv.    the n-pole of the magnet is then moved slowly away from the same end of the coil. the reading  on the voltmeter is observed.    which voltmeter reading is possible?  a \u201315  mv b \u20135  mv c 0  mv d +5  mv    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19  37 four small compasses are placed around a solenoid.    solenoid     a current is now switched on in the solenoid.    which diagram shows possible new directions of the compass needles?    a b c d       38 four nuclides are represented below.    e6 3          g73          l64          m75    which pair of nuclides are isotopes of the same element?  a e and g b e and l c g and l d g and m     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19 39 a student measures the level of radiation emitted from a radioactive substance. he places a  detector very close to the substance. he puts different absorbers between the radioactive substance and the detector.    radioactive substancedetectorcounte r absorber    the student\u2019s results are shown. these results are corrected for background radiation.    absorber minute per countsreading counter  none 95  thin paper 52  few mm of aluminium 52  several cm of lead 12    which types of radiation are being emitted by the substance?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     40 the nuclei of the atoms in a substance are changing randomly and emitting radiation.    what is happening to the substance?  a it is undergoing electromagnetic induction.  b it is undergoing magnetisation.  c it is undergoing solidification.  d it is undergoing radioactive decay.    ",
            "20": "20    blank page     permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/m/j/19   "
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 20 printed pages.  ib09 06_0625_12_ml/rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over     *4935266364 * cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)    modified language      read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.  write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.    there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet.  electronic calculators may be used.  take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).     ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  1 diagram 1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water. a metal weight with a cork attached by  a thread is held above the water.    diagram 2 shows the apparatus after the weight has been lowered into the water.    diagram 3 shows the apparatus after the weight and the cork have been submerged.    cm3 diagram 150 40302010cm 3 diagram 25040302010cm 3 diagram 3cork metal weightmeasuringcylinder50 40302010thread     what is the volume of the cork?  a 20  cm3 b 30  cm3 c 45  cm3 d 70  cm3     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  2 a car travels at constant speed.    which pair of graphs show how the distance travelled by the car and how the car\u2019s speed vary  with time?    distance timea 0 0speed time0 0 distance timeb 0 0speed time0 0 distance timec 0 0speed time0 0 distance timed 0 0speed time0 0     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  3 a heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels j, k, l  and m.    level j level k level l level mmetal ball     the times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.    where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?     speed is  greatest between time is  shortest between  a j and k j and k  b j and k l and m  c l and m j and k  d l and m l and m     4 which row contains two correct statements about the mass and the weight of an object?     mass of an object weight of an object  a is measured using a measuring cylinder is measured using a balance  b is the gravitational force exerted on the object is the amount of matter in the object  c is measured in newtons is measured in kilograms  d is the same everywhere can vary from place to place    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  5 the table gives approximate values of the acceleration due to gravity and the atmospheric  pressure on three planets.     earth venus mars  acceleration due to gravity  m / s2 10 9 4  atmospheric pressure  / kpa 100 9000 1    a body has a mass of 10  kg on earth.    which statement about the weight of the body is correct?  a the weight is greatest on earth.  b the weight is greatest on mars.  c the weight is greatest on venus.  d the weight is the same on each planet.     6 a metal has a density of 8.0  g / cm3. a solid cube of mass 1.0  kg is made from this metal.    how long is each side of the cube?  a 0.50  cm b 2.0  cm c 5.0  cm d 42  cm    7 which object is in equilibrium?    a 2 n 2 nb 2 n2 nc 2 n2  n 2 nd 2 n     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  8 a spring is suspended from a stand. loads are added and the extensions are measured.    loadsspring stand rule     which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load?    loadextensiona loadextensionb loadextensionc loadextensiond0 00 0 0 00 0     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  9 a wooden bar is pivoted at its centre so that it can rotate freely. two equal forces f are applied to  the bar.    in which diagram is the turning effect greatest?    ffa f fb f f c d f fpivot pivot pivot pivot      10 a machine is very efficient.    what does this mean?  a it produces a large amount of power.  b it uses very little energy.  c it wastes very little energy.  d it works very quickly.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  11 an object falls under gravity.    what happens to the gravitational potential energy and to the kinetic energy of the object?     gravitational potential  energy kinetic energy  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     12 a student is testing four different electric motors. he measures the time it takes for a motor to lift  either a heavy load or a light load through a height of 1 metre.    motor load     he makes a similar measurement for the other three motors.    the table shows his results.    which motor produces the most power?     load time taken  / s  a heavy 12  b heavy 16  c light 12  d light 16    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  13 the diagram shows a stone suspended on a string under the surface of a liquid. the stone  experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.    liquidstring stone     what would increase the pressure on the stone?  a decreasing the surface area of the stone   b increasing the mass of the stone  c lowering the stone deeper into the liquid  d using a liquid with a lower density      14 a sample of mercury is heated.    in which states of matter will its volume increase as its temperature rises?  a gas only  b liquid and gas only  c solid and liquid only  d solid, liquid and gas      15 when water evaporates, what escapes from the surface of the water?  a individual atoms  b individual molecules   c individual protons  d tiny drops of water     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  16 the resistance of a resistor varies linearly with temperature as shown on the graph.    120 110 100 90807060 \u201320 0 20 40 60 80 100resistance  / \u03c9 temperature  / \u00b0c    which statement is correct?  a when immersed in boiling water, the resistance is 120  \u03c9.  b the resistance at the lower fixed point is 80  \u03c9.  c when the resistance is 100  \u03c9 the temperature is 120  \u00b0c.  d the resistor can only be used at temperatures between 0  \u00b0c and 100  \u00b0c.     17 a night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the  night. during the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.        which thermal capacity and which night-time temp erature increase will cause the most energy to  be stored by the block?     thermal capacity  of block night-time  temperature increase  a large large  b large small  c small large  d small small ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  18 which row describes the process of condensation?     change of state separation  of molecules  a gas to liquid decreases  b gas to liquid increases  c liquid to gas decreases  d liquid to gas increases     19 the metal surface of a kettle is hot.    what happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?  a the density of the air decreases and the air falls.  b the density of the air decreases and the air rises.  c the density of the air increases and the air falls.  d the density of the air increases and the air rises.     20 vacuum flasks usually have silvered walls that help to keep the contents of the flask hot.    why are the walls silvered?  a to absorb thermal energy from the air around the flask  b to increase the rate of convection inside the flask  c to reduce energy loss to the surroundings by conduction  d to reflect thermal radiation back into the flask     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  21 the diagrams show graphs of displacement against time for four waves. all the graphs are drawn  to the same scale.    which wave has the largest amplitude and the highest frequency?    displacementa timedisplacementb time displacementc timedisplacementd time0 0 0 00 0 0 0       22 the diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright in water.    xycork water surface weight    transverse waves travel across the water from x to y.    in which direction do the waves make the cork move?  a \u2192 \u2190 right and left  b \u2191\u2193 up and down  c \u2192 only to the right  d \u2190 only to the left     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  23 which conditions are necessary for light to be totally internally reflected?     the incident light is in angle of incidence  a the less dense medium less than the critical angle  b the less dense medium greater than the critical angle  c the more dense medium less than the critical angle  d the more dense medium greater than the critical angle      24 which diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism?    violetreda violetvioletred redb white white violetredc violet violetred redd violetred white white      25 the diagram shows radiation from a lamp passing through a prism.    radiation from lampp red lightscreen prism     which type of radiation is found at p?  a \u03b3-rays  b infrared  c ultraviolet  d x-rays ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  26 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from a shoal of fish. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.2  s. the speed of sound  in the water is 1500  m / s.    shoal of fishboat     how far below the bottom of the boat is the shoal of fish?  a 450  m b 900  m c 1800  m d 3600  m      27 an observer stands at the finish line of a 100  m race. he wants to time the winner\u2019s run. he starts  his stop-watch as soon as he sees the smoke from the starting gun instead of when he hears the bang.    what is the reason for doing this?  a light travels much faster than sound.  b there is a risk he might respond to an echo from a wall.  c humans react slower to sound than to light.  d humans react more quickly to sound than to light.     28 a soft iron bar is a long way from any magnetic field.    how can the material of the bar be described?  a it is magnetic and strongly magnetised.  b it is magnetic and unmagnetised.  c it is non-magnetic and strongly magnetised.  d it is non-magnetic and unmagnetised.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  29 an iron ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet which is lying  on the table.    which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table?    s na magnet balls nb magnet s nc magnet balls nd magnet ballstops hereball      30 diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.    diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.    diagram 1 diagram 2strips of plasticstrips of plastic     which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after  rubbing?     charge on strips force between strips  a opposite attraction  b opposite repulsion  c the same attraction  d the same repulsion ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  31 an ammeter and a voltmeter are used to determine the resistance of a resistor.    which circuit diagram shows the ammeter and the voltmeter correctly connected?    ava avb a vcd r r vrra      32 the diagram shows a circuit.        what is connected in parallel with the thermistor?  a heater  b lamp  c light-dependent resistor  d variable resistor    ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  33 the circuit shows a relay being used to operate a mains lamp.    two ammeters are labelled p and q.    a ap q mains lamp     the variable resistor is used to vary the current in the relay coil. the mains lamp switches on  when there is a large enough current in the relay coil.    the graph shows how the reading on ammeter q changes as the reading on ammeter p increases.    0.20 0.150.100.050.00 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 reading on ammeter p  / areading on ammeter q  / a     what is the minimum current needed in the relay coil to switch on the mains lamp?  a 0.15  a b 0.20  a c 0.35  a d 0.60  a    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  34 a lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the potential difference (p.d.) across it can be varied  from 0 to 6  v.    which circuit would be most suitable?    6 va 6 vb 6 vc 6 vd      35 which components are designed to improve the safe working of a mains electrical supply?     circuit  breaker earth  wire fuse  a \u0016 \u0016 \u001a  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016  c \u001a \u0016 \u0016  d \u0016 \u0016 \u0016     ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19 [turn over  36 a bar magnet is held near a solenoid. the coil is connected to a galvanometer.    bar magnetsolenoid     the magnet is moved into the coil of wire and then held stationary inside the coil.    which graph shows how the induced electromotive force (e.m.f.) varies with time?    e.m.f. time0 0a e.m.f. time0 0b e.m.f. time0 0c e.m.f. time0 0d      37 a wire xy lies between the poles of a magnet.    the diagram shows the upward force on the wire xy caused when there is an electric current in  the direction xy as shown.    n sforcex ycurrent     three tests are made using this apparatus.    1 the current direction is reversed.  2 the n and s poles are swapped around. 3 the current is switched off.    which will result in no change  in the size of the force on the wire?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 only c 2 only d 3 only     ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/m/j/19  38 a simple model of the atom consists of small particles orbiting a central nucleus.    which row is correct?     charge on  nucleus charge on  orbiting particles  a negative negative  b negative positive  c positive negative  d positive positive      39 which statement explains the meaning of the half-life of a radioactive isotope?  a half the time taken for one nucleus of the isotope to decay  b half the time taken for the isotope to decay completely  c the time taken for half of the nuclei of the isotope to decay  d the time taken for one nucleus of the isotope to split in half    40 the diagram shows a lead-lined box used for storing radioactive sources.        why is the inside of the box lined with lead?  a it helps the sources to stay radioactive for longer.  b it makes the box heavier.  c it makes the radioactive sources more stable.  d it reduces the amount of radiation that can escape from the box.      "
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 20 printed pages.  ib19 06_0625_13/2rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019   [turn over     *2575934791 * cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  may/june 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  1 the diagram shows a measuring cylinder containing liquid.    50 40302010cm 3 liquidmeasuring  cylinder     what is the reading for the volume of liquid in the cylinder?  a 13.0  cm3 b 13.5  cm3 c 16.0  cm3 d 17.0  cm3      2 the diagram shows the speed-time graph for a car.    speed time0 0y x     which row describes the motion of the car at point x and at point y?     point x point y  a at rest moving with constant speed  b moving with constant speed at rest  c moving with changing speed at rest  d moving with changing speed moving with constant speed    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  3 a heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels j, k, l  and m.    level j level k level l level mmetal ball     the times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.    where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?     speed is  greatest between time is  shortest between  a j and k j and k  b j and k l and m  c l and m j and k  d l and m l and m     4 an object which has a mass of 600  kg is on the planet mars.    the acceleration due to gravity on mars is 4.0  m / s2.    what is the weight of the object on mars?  a 60  n b 150  n c 2400  n d 6000  n     5 two objects are placed on a balance, one on each side:        which properties of the objects can be compared using the balance?  a weight, mass and volume  b weight and mass only  c volume and density  d density only   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  6 x, y and z are three regularly shaped solid objects.    their dimensions and masses are shown in the diagrams.    200 g10 cm2 cm 5 cmobject x 200 g6 cm3 cm 4 cmobject y 50 g25 cm1 cm 1 cmobject zelectronic balance     which objects have the same density?  a x, y and z b x and y only c x and z only d y and z only     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  7 a car is driven from rest on a long straight ro ad. the car engine exerts a constant driving force.    the diagram shows the horizontal forces acting on the car. the resistive forces are proportional  to the speed of the car.    resistive forcesdriving force (from engine)     why does the car eventually reach a maximum speed?  a the resistive forces decrease to make the acceleration of the car negative.  b the resistive forces decrease to make the acceleration of the car zero.  c the resistive forces increase to make the acceleration of the car negative.  d the resistive forces increase to make the acceleration of the car zero.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  8 a spring is suspended from a stand. loads are added and the extensions are measured.    loadsspring stand rule     which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load?    loadextensiona loadextensionb loadextensionc loadextensiond0 00 0 0 00 0     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  9 a wooden bar is pivoted at its centre so that it can rotate freely. two equal forces f are applied to  the bar.    in which diagram is the turning effect greatest?    ffa f fb f f c d f fpivot pivot pivot pivot      10 a machine is very efficient.    what does this mean?  a it produces a large amount of power.  b it uses very little energy.  c it wastes very little energy.  d it works very quickly.      11 a body is lifted against gravity.    which equation shows the work done on the body?  a work done = change in distance moved by the body  b work done = change in energy of the body  c work done = change in force on the body  d work done = change in power of the body ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  12 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    hvacuum glass tube mercury     a change is made and the vertical height h of the column increases.    which change causes this increase?  a a liquid with a lower density than mercury has been used.  b atmospheric pressure decreases.  c a narrower glass tube is used.  d the glass tube is tilted.      13 the diagram shows a stone suspended on a string under the surface of a liquid. the stone  experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.    liquidstring stone     what would increase the pressure on the stone?  a decreasing the surface area of the stone   b increasing the mass of the stone  c lowering the stone deeper into the liquid  d using a liquid with a lower density     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  14 which statement is correct?  a a solid can flow.  b a solid can be compressed easily.  c a solid has a fixed shape.  d a solid takes the shape of its container.      15 on a hot summer day, the level of the water in a pond falls.    which statement explains this?  a the least energetic water molecules escape from the surface and do not return.  b the least energetic water molecules escape from the surface and then return.  c the most energetic water molecules escape from the surface and do not return.  d the most energetic water molecules escape from the surface and then return.     16 here are three statements about a liquid-in-glass thermometer with a celsius scale.    1 the lower fixed point is the temperature at which pure water freezes.  2 the upper fixed point is the temperature at which pure water boils.  3 a scale is made by dividing the dist ance between the fixed points into equal  divisions.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 2 and 3 only c 1 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  17 a night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the  night. during the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.        which thermal capacity and which night-time temp erature increase will cause the most energy to  be stored by the block?     thermal capacity  of block night-time  temperature increase  a large large  b large small  c small large  d small small      18 a student investigates the melting point of a pure substance. she heats the substance slowly and takes readings of its temperature as the substance starts to melt and when it finishes melting.    which statement is correct?  a the temperature decreases slightly as the substance melts.  b the temperature fluctuates as the substance melts.  c the temperature increases as the substance melts.  d the temperature stays the same as the substance melts.     19 a person holds an empty glass beaker and pours hot water into it.    why does it take a few seconds before his hand starts to feel hot?  a glass is a poor conductor of heat.  b water is a poor conductor of heat.  c glass is a better conductor of heat than water.  d water is a better conductor of heat than glass.     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  20 the metal surface of a kettle is hot.    what happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?  a the density of the air decreases and the air falls.  b the density of the air decreases and the air rises.  c the density of the air increases and the air falls.  d the density of the air increases and the air rises.     21 a student draws a diagram to show two different properties of a water wave. the arrows show  the wave directions.    shallow waterdeep water     which two wave properties does the diagram show?  a refraction and diffraction  b reflection and dispersion  c reflection and diffraction  d reflection and refraction     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  22 the diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright in water.    xycork water surface weight    transverse waves travel across the water from x to y.    in which direction do the waves make the cork move?  a \u2192 \u2190 right and left  b \u2191\u2193 up and down  c \u2192 only to the right  d \u2190 only to the left     23 a student draws a ray diagram to show how a ray of light is reflected by a number of mirrors.    which reflection has not been drawn correctly?    a bc d     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  24 light passes through a glass block.    what is the path of the light?    air glass dc b a     25 the diagram shows radiation from a lamp passing through a prism.    radiation from lampp red lightscreen prism     which type of radiation is found at p?  a \u03b3-rays  b infrared  c ultraviolet  d x-rays     26 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from a shoal of fish. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.2  s. the speed of sound  in the water is 1500  m / s.    shoal of fishboat     how far below the bottom of the boat is the shoal of fish?  a 450  m b 900  m c 1800  m d 3600  m ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  27 which statement about ultrasound is correct?  a it has a higher frequency than audible sound, and it is a longitudinal wave.  b it has a higher frequency than audible sound, and it is a transverse wave.  c it has a lower frequency than audible sound, and it is a longitudinal wave.  d it has a lower frequency than audible sound, and it is a transverse wave.      28 a metal bar is placed inside a current-carrying coil, as shown in diagram 1.    there is a small current in the coil. the bar holds a few nails, as shown in diagram 2.    diagram 1 diagram 2nails     when there is no current in the coil, the nails drop off.    which row is correct?     metal from which  the bar is made effect of a larger  current in the coil  a soft iron it makes no difference  b soft iron the bar holds more nails  c steel it makes no difference  d steel the bar holds more nails     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  29 an iron ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet which is lying  on the table.    which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table?    s na magnet balls nb magnet s nc magnet balls nd magnet ballstops hereball      30 diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.    diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.    diagram 1 diagram 2strips of plasticstrips of plastic     which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after  rubbing?     charge on strips force between strips  a opposite attraction  b opposite repulsion  c the same attraction  d the same repulsion ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  31 a battery stores chemical potential energy. the battery is connected to a resistor.    as the battery runs down, what happens to its chemical energy?     the energy is transferred by and ends up as  a electrical working internal energy in the resistor  b electrical working potential energy in the resistor  c mechanical working internal energy in the resistor  d mechanical working potential energy in the resistor     32 the diagram shows a circuit including a lamp, an electric bell and three switches s 1, s2 and s 3.     the lamp and bell are not faulty.    s1 s2 s3    the bell is ringing but the lamp is not lit.    which switches are closed?  a s 1 only  b s 1 and s 2 only  c s 1 and s 3 only  d s 1, s2 and s 3     ",
            "17": "17  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  33 a student is designing a lighting circuit for a dolls\u2019 house. he sets up two different circuits.    each circuit contains a 12  v power supply and three identical lamps.    each lamp is designed to operate at normal brightness when connected individually to a 12  v  supply.    circuit 1 circuit 2121212 v power supply12 v power supply     which statement is correct?  a in circuit 1, each of the lamps is at normal brightness.  b in circuit 1, if one lamp fails, the other lamps remain lit.  c in circuit 2, if one lamp fails, the other lamps remain lit.  d in circuit 2, the current from the power supply is less than in circuit 1.     34 a lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the potential difference (p.d.) across it can be varied  from 0 to 6  v.    which circuit would be most suitable?    6 va 6 vb 6 vc 6 vd  ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  35 a simple wiring diagram for an electric cooker is shown.    live neutral earth connection to casingelectric cooker metal casing     why is there a wire connecting the metal case of the cooker to earth?  a it improves the efficiency of the cooker.  b it prevents the metal case from becoming too hot when the cooker is left on.  c it reduces the risk of an electric shock if the live wire touches the metal case.  d the electric cooker will not switch on without it.    ",
            "19": "19  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19 [turn over  36 in an experiment, a wire is held above a compass needle as shown.    ns     an electric current is switched on in the wire and the compass needle is deflected.    which row explains why this happens and then describes what happens when the current is reversed?     why this happens what happens when  the current is reversed  a   there is a magnetic  field inside the wire the compass needle deflects  in the opposite direction  b   there is a magnetic  field inside the wire there is no effect on  the compass needle  c   there is a magnetic  field around the wire the compass needle deflects  in the opposite direction  d   there is a magnetic  field around the wire there is no effect on  the compass needle    37 which device relies upon the magnetic effect of an electric current?  a fuse  b relay  c thermistor  d variable resistor    38 which statement about the structure of an atom is correct?  a it contains positively charged particles only.  b it contains negatively charged particles only.  c it contains no charged particles.  d it contains positively charged particles and negatively charged particles.    ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/m/j/19  39 which statement about \u03b3-radiation is correct?  a it consists of very small charged particles.  b it is a form of electromagnetic radiation.  c it is less penetrating than \u03b2-radiation.  d it is more highly ionising than \u03b1-radiation.     40 a radioactive element undergoes \u03b1-decay.    which statement is not correct?  a a different element is formed.  b radiation is emitted from the nucleus.  c the decay is a random process.  d the number of particles in the nucleus stays the same.     "
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib19 06_0625_21/3rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019   [turn over     *7296374499* cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/21     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19  1 which quantity can be measured dire ctly using a micrometer screw gauge?  a the area of a sheet of paper  b the mass of a sheet of paper  c the thickness of a sheet of paper  d the volume of a sheet of paper      2 the velocity of an object increases from 30  m / s to 50  m / s in 5.0 seconds.    what is the average acceleration of the object?  a 0.10  m / s2 b 0.25  m / s2 c 4.0  m / s2 d 10  m / s2     3 a heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels j, k, l  and m.    level j level k level l level mmetal ball     the times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.    where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?     speed is  greatest between time is  shortest between  a j and k j and k  b j and k l and m  c l and m j and k  d l and m l and m     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19 [turn over  4 a body is moved from place x to place y where the gravitational field strength is different.    what happens to its mass and to its weight due to the move?     mass weight  a changes changes  b changes stays the same  c stays the same changes  d stays the same stays the same     5 the diagrams show four solid blocks with their dimensions and masses.    which block has the greatest density?    a mass = 14  garea = 10  cm2 b mass = 48  garea = 20  cm2 2.0 cm 2.0  cm c mass = 54  garea = 10  cm2 d mass = 68  g2.0 cm 2.0 cmarea = 20  cm2     6 a student wishes to determine the spring constant of a spring where it obeys hooke\u2019s law.    different loads are hung from the spring and its length is measured for each different load.    the table shows the results of the experiment.    weight of load  / n 0 2.0 4.0 5.0  length of spring  / cm 12 20 28 38    what is the value of the spring constant of the spring?  a 0.13  n / cm b 0.14  n / cm c 0.19  n / cm d 0.25  n / cm     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19  7 a mass of 20  kg is held stationary by a rope passing over a frictionless pulley.    20 kgtpulley     what is the tension t in the rope?  a 10  kg b 20  kg c 100  n d 200  n      8 a boat starts moving across a river at velocity v perpendicular to the river bank.    the boat encounters a current along the river of velocity u, as shown.    v u river     which vector diagram shows the resultant velocity r of the boat?    v ua r v ub r vuc rvu rd      ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19 [turn over  9 a ball of mass 0.50  kg falls and hits the floor at 10  m / s.    it rebounds at speed 8.0  m / s, as shown.    10 m / s 8 m / sbefore collision after collision     the collision between the ball and the floor lasts for 0.50  s.    what is the average force acting on the ball during the collision?  a 2.0  n upwards  b 2.0  n downwards  c 18  n upwards  d 18  n downwards     10 an object falls from the top of a building that is 25  m high. air resistance is negligible.    what is the speed of the object when it hits the ground?  a 10  m / s b 22  m / s c 25  m / s d 625  m / s     11 a machine is very efficient.    what does this mean?  a it produces a large amount of power.  b it uses very little energy.  c it wastes very little energy.  d it works very quickly.     12 a crane takes 2.0 minutes to lift a load to the top of a building. the change in gravitational  potential energy of the load is 360  kj.    what is the useful power output of the crane?  a 3.0  kw b 180  kw c 720  kw d 43  200  kw     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19  13 the diagram shows a stone suspended on a string under the surface of a liquid. the stone  experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.    liquidstring stone     what would increase the pressure on the stone?  a decreasing the surface area of the stone   b increasing the mass of the stone  c lowering the stone deeper into the liquid  d using a liquid with a lower density      14 a stationary smoke particle is hit by a fast-moving nitrogen molecule.    which row describes the motion of the smoke particle and of the nitrogen molecule after the collision?     smoke particle nitrogen molecule  a moves rebounds  b moves stops  c remains stationary rebounds  d remains stationary stops    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19 [turn over  15 a night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the  night. during the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.        which thermal capacity and which night-time temp erature increase will cause the most energy to  be stored by the block?     thermal capacity  of block night-time  temperature increase  a large large  b large small  c small large  d small small      16 100  g of water at 25  \u00b0c is poured into an insulating cup. 50  g of ice at 0  \u00b0c is added to the water.  the water is stirred until the temperature of the water has fallen to 0  \u00b0c.    18  g of ice remains unmelted.    the specific heat capacity of water is 4.2  j / g \u00b0c.    which value does this experiment give for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice?  a 210  j / g b 330  j / g c 580  j / g d 770  j / g      17 in which does thermal conduction not occur?  a a gas  b a liquid  c a solid  d a vacuum     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19  18 the metal surface of a kettle is hot.    what happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?  a the density of the air decreases and the air falls.  b the density of the air decreases and the air rises.  c the density of the air increases and the air falls.  d the density of the air increases and the air rises.     19 some hot water is sealed inside a metal can. the can is in a vacuum in outer space. the hot  water slowly cools down.    how does the thermal energy escape into space?  a by conduction then convection  b by conduction then radiation  c by evaporation then convection  d by evaporation then radiation     20 when water waves pass through a gap they diffract.    the diagrams show wavefronts approaching a narrow gap.    in which diagram will the diffraction be least?    a b c d      21 an object is placed 30  cm in front of a plane mirror.    which statement describes the image of the object?  a the image is the same size and 30  cm from the object.  b the image is the same size and 60  cm from the object.  c the image is smaller and 30  cm from the object.  d the image is smaller and 60  cm from the object.     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19 [turn over  22 a small object o is placed near a converging lens, as shown. the lens forms an image i.    i o     which statement is correct?  a the image i is diminished.  b the image i is inverted.  c the image i is real.  d the object o is closer to the lens than its principal focus.     23 an eclipse of the sun happens when the moon comes between the earth and the sun.    which statement is correct?  a infra-red radiation from the sun disappears before visible light and ultra-violet radiation.  b ultra-violet radiation from the sun disappears before visible light and infra-red radiation.  c visible light from the sun disappears before ultra-violet radiation and infra-red radiation.  d infra-red radiation, ultra-violet radiation and visible light from the sun all disappear at the  same moment.      24 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from a shoal of fish. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.2  s. the speed of sound  in the water is 1500  m / s.    shoal of fishboat     how far below the bottom of the boat is the shoal of fish?  a 450  m b 900  m c 1800  m d 3600  m     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19  25 what is the approximate value of the speed of sound in air at normal temperature?  a 340  m / s b 34  000  m / s c 340  km  / s d 3.0 \u00d7 108  m / s      26 why is soft iron used for the core of an electromagnet?  a soft iron easily becomes a permanent magnet.  b soft iron is a good electrical conductor.  c soft iron is a poor thermal conductor.  d soft iron loses its magnetism when the current in the coil is switched off.     27 diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.    diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.    diagram 1 diagram 2strips of plasticstrips of plastic     which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after  rubbing?     charge on strips force between strips  a opposite attraction  b opposite repulsion  c the same attraction  d the same repulsion     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19 [turn over  28 a cell has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5  v.    what does this statement mean?  a the cell converts 1.0  j of energy when driving 1.5  c of charge round a complete circuit.  b the cell converts 1.5  j of energy when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete circuit.  c the cell converts 1.5  j of energy per second when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete  circuit.  d the cell converts 1.5  w of power when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete circuit.      29 which two changes to a metal wire both increase resistance?  a decreasing its length and increasing its temperature  b increasing its length and decreasing its temperature  c decreasing its thickness and increasing its temperature  d increasing its thickness and decreasing its temperature     30 the diagram shows a circuit containing a d.c. power supply, a motor and a variable resistor.    three ammeters x, y and z show the current in different parts of the circuit.    aa a mxz y+\u2013     the reading on x is 4.0  a.    which statement is correct?  a the readings on y and z are both less than 4.0  a.  b the readings on y and z are both equal to 4.0  a.  c the readings on y and z are both greater than 4.0  a.  d the reading on z is zero.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19  31 a lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the potential difference (p.d.) across it can be varied  from 0 to 6  v.    which circuit would be most suitable?    6 va 6 vb 6 vc 6 vd      32 which logic gate is represented by the symbol shown?        a and b nand c nor d or    33 the diagram shows a combination of logic gates.        which single logic gate is equivalent to this combination?  a and b nor c not d or    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19 [turn over  34 an alternating current (a.c.) power supply is connected in series with a resistor r and a diode.    r v    which graph shows how the voltage v across the resistor r varies with time?    voltage v 0 00 0timea voltage v timeb voltage v 0 timec voltage v timed 00 0       35 an electric heater is plugged into the mains supply using a fused plug.    the current in the heater is 10  a.    the cable attached to the heater is rated at 15  a.    the fuses available are rated at 1  a, 3  a, 5  a and 13  a.    which fuse should be used?  a 1 a b 3 a c 5 a d 13 a    36 what is the purpose of the commutator in a d.c. electric motor?  a to control the speed at which the motor rotates  b to reverse the direction of the voltage across the power supply every half-turn  c to reverse the direction of the current in the motor coil every half-turn  d to reverse the direction of spin of the motor coil every half-turn ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19  37 the diagram shows a wire between two magnetic poles. the wire is connected in a circuit with an  ammeter.    n s awire     the wire is moved downwards, towards the bottom of the page. a current is induced in the wire.    in which direction is the force on the wire caused by this current?  a towards the bottom of the page  b towards the left of the page  c towards the right of the page  d towards the top of the page     38 the chemical symbol for sodium is na. the equation represents the radioactive decay of   sodium-24.    24na\u21921124mg +xye\u20131    what are the numbers x and y?     x y  a 10 0  b 10 1  c 12 0  d 12 1    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19 [turn over  39 a radioactive source emits \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays into a vacuum where there is a  magnetic field.    the magnetic field acts perpendicularly into the plane of the paper.    the paths x, y and z of the three types of radiation through the magnetic field are shown.    xy z radioactive sourcemagnetic fieldinto paper     which radiation follows path x, path y and path z?     x y z  a \u03b1-particles \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays  b \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b2-particles  c \u03b2-particles \u03b1-particles \u03b3-rays  d \u03b2-particles \u03b3-rays \u03b1-particles     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/m/j/19  40 a student measures the level of radiation emitted from a radioactive substance. he places a  detector very close to the substance. he puts different absorbers between the radioactive substance and the detector.    radioactive substancedetectorcounte r absorber    the student\u2019s results are shown. these results are corrected for background radiation.    absorber minute per countsreading counter  none 95  thin paper 52  few mm of aluminium 52  several cm of lead 12    which types of radiation are being emitted by the substance?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     "
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib19 06_0625_22_ml/rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over     *8579442859 * cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)    modified language      read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.  write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.    there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.   read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.   each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet.  electronic calculators may be used.  take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19  1 which quantity can be measured dire ctly using a micrometer screw gauge?  a the area of a sheet of paper  b the mass of a sheet of paper  c the thickness of a sheet of paper  d the volume of a sheet of paper      2 four objects are moving along a straight line.    the distance of an object from a fixed point on the line is plotted against time for each object.    which object is decelerating?    00a distance from fixed point time00b distance fromfixed point time 00c distance fromfixed point time 00d distance fromfixed point time      ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19 [turn over  3 a heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels j, k, l  and m.    level j level k level l level mmetal ball     the times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.    where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?     speed is  greatest between time is  shortest between  a j and k j and k  b j and k l and m  c l and m j and k  d l and m l and m     4 four students make statements about the mass of an object.    which statement is correct?  a the mass of an object depends on the gravitational field which acts on the object.  b the mass of an object divided by its weight is equal to the acceleration with which it falls  freely.  c the mass of an object increases when the temperature of the object increases.  d the mass of an object resists change in motion of the object.      5 a metal has a density of 8.0  g / cm3. a solid cube of mass 1.0  kg is made from this metal.    how long is each side of the cube?  a 0.50  cm b 2.0  cm c 5.0  cm d 42  cm    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19  6 an experiment is done to determine the spring constant for a spring.    different loads are hung from the spring and its length is measured for each different load.    the graph shows how its length varies with load.    4.0 3.02.01.0 0 048 1 2 1 6 length of spring  / cmweight of load  / n 20     what is the value of the spring constant?  a 0.20  n / cm b 0.25  n / cm c 4.0  n / cm d 5.0  n / cm      7 a beam is pivoted at its centre of mass.    it is acted upon by two forces, 10  n and 5.0  n, as shown.    15 cm25 cm 10 n 5.0 npivot     what is the resultant moment about the pivot?  a 25  n cm anticlockwise  b 25  n cm clockwise  c 175  n cm anticlockwise  d 175  n cm clockwise     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19 [turn over  8 which object is in equilibrium?    a 2 n 2 nb 2 n2 nc 2 n2  n 2 nd 2 n       9 an object of mass 4.0  kg is moving with a velocity of 3.0  m / s in a straight line.    what is the momentum of the object?  a 0.75  kg  m / s b 1.3  kg  m / s c 12  kg  m / s d 24  kg  m / s     10 a machine is very efficient.    what does this mean?  a it produces a large amount of power.  b it uses very little energy.  c it wastes very little energy.  d it works very quickly.     11 a force f acts on a body and the body moves a distance d in the direction of the force.    which expression for the work done w is correct?  a w = fd b w = fd  2 c w = 21fd d w = 21fd  2     12 a boy produces an average power output of 60  w as he rides his bicycle for 2.0 minutes.    how much useful energy does he expend?  a 0.50  j b 30  j c 120  j d 7200  j     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19  13 the diagram shows a stone suspended on a string under the surface of a liquid. the stone  experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.    liquidstring stone     what would increase the pressure on the stone?  a decreasing the surface area of the stone   b increasing the mass of the stone  c lowering the stone deeper into the liquid  d using a liquid with a lower density      14 at room temperature, iron is difficult to compress.    at the same temperature, oxygen is much easier to compress.    which comparison of the structures of iron and oxygen explains this?  a the iron particles are closer together.  b the iron particles have a greater mass.  c the iron particles can be magnetised.  d the iron particles have less average kinetic energy.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19 [turn over  15 a night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the  night. during the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.        which thermal capacity and which night-time temp erature increase will cause the most energy to  be stored by the block?     thermal capacity  of block night-time  temperature increase  a large large  b large small  c small large  d small small      16 100  g of water at 25  \u00b0c is poured into an insulated cup. 50  g of ice at 0  \u00b0c is added to the water.  the water is stirred until the temperature of the water has fallen to 0  \u00b0c.    18  g of ice remains unmelted.    the specific heat capacity of water is 4.2  j / g \u00b0c.    which value does this experiment give for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice?  a 210  j / g b 330  j / g c 580  j / g d 770  j / g     17 the handle of a metal saucepan is made of plastic. as the saucepan heats up, the handle gets  warmer.    which statement explains this?  a molecules of the plastic radiate their energy to other molecules.  b molecules of the plastic vibrate more and pass on their energy to nearby molecules.  c the free electrons in the plastic transfer the thermal energy along the handle.  d the heated molecules very slowly move along the plastic handle.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19  18 the metal surface of a kettle is hot.    what happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?  a the density of the air decreases and the air falls.  b the density of the air decreases and the air rises.  c the density of the air increases and the air falls.  d the density of the air increases and the air rises.     19 vacuum flasks usually have silvered walls that help to keep the contents of the flask hot.    why are the walls silvered?  a to absorb thermal energy from the air around the flask  b to increase the rate of convection inside the flask  c to reduce energy loss to the surroundings by conduction  d to reflect thermal radiation back into the flask     20 when water waves pass through a gap they diffract.    the diagrams show wavefronts approaching a narrow gap.    in which diagram will the diffraction be least?    a b c d      21 which conditions are necessary for light to be totally internally reflected?     the incident light is in angle of incidence  a the less dense medium less than the critical angle  b the less dense medium greater than the critical angle  c the more dense medium less than the critical angle  d the more dense medium greater than the critical angle     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19 [turn over  22 light is travelling through air. the light strikes a glass block at an angle of incidence of 45 \u00b0. the  glass has a refractive index of 1.4.    what is the angle of refraction of the light as it enters the glass?  a 29 \u00b0 b 30 \u00b0 c 32 \u00b0 d 82 \u00b0     23 an eclipse of the sun happens when the moon comes between the earth and the sun.    which statement is correct?  a infra-red radiation from the sun disappears before visible light and ultra-violet radiation.  b ultra-violet radiation from the sun disappears before visible light and infra-red radiation.  c visible light from the sun disappears before ultra-violet radiation and infra-red radiation.  d infra-red radiation, ultra-violet radiation and visible light from the sun all disappear at the  same moment.      24 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from a shoal of fish. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.2  s. the speed of sound  in the water is 1500  m / s.    shoal of fishboat     how far below the bottom of the boat is the shoal of fish?  a 450  m b 900  m c 1800  m d 3600  m      25 an observer stands at the finish line of a 100  m race. he wants to time the winner\u2019s run. he starts  his stop-watch as soon as he sees the smoke from the starting gun instead of when he hears the bang.    what is the reason for doing this?  a light travels much faster than sound.  b there is a risk he might respond to an echo from a wall.  c humans react slower to sound than to light.  d humans react more quickly to sound than to light.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19  26 a soft iron bar is a long way from any magnetic field.    how can the material of the bar be described?  a it is magnetic and strongly magnetised.  b it is magnetic and unmagnetised.  c it is non-magnetic and strongly magnetised.  d it is non-magnetic and unmagnetised.     27 diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.    diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.    diagram 1 diagram 2strips of plasticstrips of plastic     which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after  rubbing?     charge on strips force between strips  a opposite attraction  b opposite repulsion  c the same attraction  d the same repulsion     28 a cell has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5  v.    what does this statement mean?  a the cell converts 1.0  j of energy when driving 1.5  c of charge round a complete circuit.  b the cell converts 1.5  j of energy when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete circuit.  c the cell converts 1.5  j of energy per second when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete  circuit.  d the cell converts 1.5  w of power when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete circuit.   ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19 [turn over  29 a metal wire of length 100  cm and cross-sectional area 0.20  mm2 has a resistance of 8.0  \u03c9.    what is the resistance of a wire of the same metal of length 50  cm and cross-sectional area of  0.40  mm2?  a 2.0  \u03c9 b 8.0  \u03c9 c 16  \u03c9 d 32  \u03c9     30 the diagram shows a circuit.        what is connected in parallel with the thermistor?  a heater  b lamp  c light-dependent resistor  d variable resistor     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19  31 a lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the potential difference (p.d.) across it can be varied  from 0 to 6  v.    which circuit would be most suitable?    6 va 6 vb 6 vc 6 vd      32 components x and y can be inserted to complete the circuit below. the completed circuit is a  potential divider in which the potential difference across component y increases when the temperature increases.    vx y     which row shows the components x and y?     x y  a light-dependent resistor resistor  b resistor light-dependent resistor  c resistor thermistor  d thermistor resistor     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19 [turn over  33 which two logic gates each have a high output (1) when both of their inputs are low (0)?  a and and or  b and and nor  c nand and nor  d nand and or      34 two nand gates are joined together as shown.    input 1 input 2output     which single logic gate is equivalent to this combination?  a and b nand c nor d or    35 which components are designed to improve the safe working of a mains electrical supply?     circuit  breaker earth  wire fuse  a \u0016 \u0016 \u001a  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016  c \u001a \u0016 \u0016  d \u0016 \u0016 \u0016     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19  36 the diagram shows a current-carrying wire placed between two magnetic poles. the current is in  the direction shown.    s nwire current direction    what is the direction of the force on the wire?  a towards the bottom of the page  b towards the top of the page  c towards the left-hand side of the page  d towards the right-hand side of the page    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19 [turn over  37 diagram 1 shows an a.c. generator. the coil is turning as shown.    n scoildiagram 1     diagram 2 shows the output voltage produced by the generator as the coil turns.    which point on diagram 2 shows the voltage induced when the coil is moving through the position  shown in diagram 1?    0 0output voltage timediagram 2 a b c d      38 which observation provides evidence for the nuclear atom?  a attraction of opposite charges  b emission of \u03b3-rays during the decay of a radioactive nuclide  c scattering of \u03b1-particles by thin metal foils  d scattering of \u03b3-rays by a thin metal foil    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/m/j/19  39 the chemical symbol for uranium is u. the equation represents the radioactive decay of  uranium-235.    \u2192 +4he2235u92xthy    what are the numbers x and y?     x y  a 231 94  b 231 90  c 239 94  d 239 90      40 an experiment is done to measure the radiation from a radioactive source that has a   half-life of 10 minutes.    the source is placed close to a detector that is connected to a counter, as shown.    radioactive source detectorcounter     the average background count-rate is 20 counts  / minute.    at the start of the experiment, the count-rate recorded by the counter is 1000 counts  / minute.    what is the count-rate 10 minutes later?  a 490 counts  / minute  b 500 counts  / minute  c 510 counts  / minute  d 530 counts  / minute      "
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib19 06_0625_23/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019   [turn over     *7151954492* cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/23     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19  1 which quantity can be measured dire ctly using a micrometer screw gauge?  a the area of a sheet of paper  b the mass of a sheet of paper  c the thickness of a sheet of paper  d the volume of a sheet of paper      2 a brass ball and a feather are released at the same time.    on earth, the ball reaches the ground first.    on the moon, they reach the ground at the same time.    what is the explanation for this?  a both weigh the same on the moon.  b both weigh less on the moon.  c there is a greater air resistance on the moon.  d there is no air resistance on the moon.      3 a heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels j, k, l  and m.    level j level k level l level mmetal ball     the times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.    where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?     speed is  greatest between time is  shortest between  a j and k j and k  b j and k l and m  c l and m j and k  d l and m l and m     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19 [turn over  4 on earth, a spring stretches by 5.0  cm when a mass of 3.0  kg is suspended from one end.    the gravitational field strength on the moon is 1 6 of that on earth.    which mass, on the moon, would stretch the spring by the same extension?  a 0.50  kg b 3.0  kg c 5.0  kg d 18  kg     5 x, y and z are three regularly shaped solid objects.    their dimensions and masses are shown in the diagrams.    200 g10 cm2 cm 5 cmobject x 200 g6 cm3 cm 4 cmobject y 50 g25 cm1 cm 1 cmobject zelectronic balance     which objects have the same density?  a x, y and z b x and y only c x and z only d y and z only     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19  6 an experiment is carried out to determine the spri ng constant for a spring that obeys hooke\u2019s law.    a load is hung from the spring and the extension of the spring is measured.    which calculation is used to calculate the spring constant?  a load the of massextension  b load the of weightextension  c extensionload the of smas  d extensionload the of weight      7 a car is driven from rest on a long straight road. the car engine exerts a constant driving force.    the diagram shows the horizontal forces acting on the car. the resistive forces are proportional to the speed of the car.    resistive forcesdriving force (from engine)     why does the car eventually reach a maximum speed?  a the resistive forces decrease to make the acceleration of the car negative.  b the resistive forces decrease to make the acceleration of the car zero.  c the resistive forces increase to make the acceleration of the car negative.  d the resistive forces increase to make the acceleration of the car zero.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19 [turn over  8 a beam of weight 6.0  n is suspended from two strings p and q.    string p is 30  cm from the left-hand end of the beam, as shown. string q is not shown.    20 cm30 cm 6.0 n2.0 n string p beam     the tension in string p is 2.0  n.    what is the tension in string q and where is it attached so that the beam is in equilibrium?  a 4.0  n at 10.0  cm from the left-hand end  b 4.0  n at 15.0  cm from the left-hand end  c 6.0  n at 10.0  cm from the left-hand end  d 8.0  n at 7.5  cm from the left-hand end    9 how is momentum p calculated in terms of the mass m of a body and its velocity v, and what type  of quantity is p?     equation type of quantity  a p = m \u00d7 v scalar  b p = m \u00d7 v vector  c p = vm scalar  d p = vm vector      10 an object is in free fall. the change in gravitational potential energy of the body depends upon its  mass m, the change in height \u2206h and the gravitational field strength g.    what is the correct expression for the change in gravitational potential energy?  a gm\u2206h b hgm \u2206 c mhg\u2206 d ghm\u2206     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19  11 a machine is very efficient.    what does this mean?  a it produces a large amount of power.  b it uses very little energy.  c it wastes very little energy.  d it works very quickly.    12 a box is pulled along a floor by a force of 3.0  n.    the friction acting on the box is 1.0  n, as shown.    3.0 n 1.0 nbox     how much kinetic energy does the box gain in moving 2.0  m?  a 2.0  j b 4.0  j c 6.0  j d 8.0  j    13 the diagram shows a stone suspended on a string under the surface of a liquid. the stone  experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.    liquidstring stone     what would increase the pressure on the stone?  a decreasing the surface area of the stone   b increasing the mass of the stone  c lowering the stone deeper into the liquid  d using a liquid with a lower density    ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19 [turn over  14 water in a beaker evaporates when it is left on a bench for a period of time.    increasing the surface area and increasing the temperature of the water each change the rate of evaporation.    which row is correct?     increasing the surface area increasing the temperature  a rate of evaporation decreases rate of evaporation decreases  b rate of evaporation decreases rate of evaporation increases  c rate of evaporation increases rate of evaporation decreases  d rate of evaporation increases rate of evaporation increases      15 a night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the  night. during the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.        which thermal capacity and which night-time temp erature increase will cause the most energy to  be stored by the block?     thermal capacity  of block night-time  temperature increase  a large large  b large small  c small large  d small small      16 100  g of water at 25  \u00b0c is poured into an insulating cup. 50  g of ice at 0  \u00b0c is added to the water.  the water is stirred until the temperature of the water has fallen to 0  \u00b0c.    18  g of ice remains unmelted.    the specific heat capacity of water is 4.2  j / g \u00b0c.    which value does this experiment give for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice?  a 210  j / g b 330  j / g c 580  j / g d 770  j / g   ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19  17 why does a metal rod conduct thermal energy much better than a similar-sized plastic rod?  a the molecules in the plastic are much closer together than the atoms in the metal.  b the molecules in the plastic are much larger than the atoms in the metal.  c the molecules in the plastic are much more tightly held together than the atoms in the metal.  d the molecular structure in the plastic contains no free electrons, but the metal has free  electrons.     18 the metal surface of a kettle is hot.    what happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?  a the density of the air decreases and the air falls.  b the density of the air decreases and the air rises.  c the density of the air increases and the air falls.  d the density of the air increases and the air rises.    19 when water waves pass through a gap they diffract.    the diagrams show wavefronts approaching a narrow gap.    in which diagram will the diffraction be least?    a b c d      20 sound travels through air at a speed of 340  m / s. a source generates sound waves at a frequency  of 1.2  khz.    what is the wavelength of the sound waves?  a 0.28  m b 3.5  m c 280  m d 410  m    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19 [turn over  21 which conditions are necessary for light to be totally internally reflected?     the incident light is in angle of incidence  a the less dense medium less than the critical angle  b the less dense medium greater than the critical angle  c the more dense medium less than the critical angle  d the more dense medium greater than the critical angle      22 a beam of light passes through a vacuum and then  enters a liquid. the diagram shows the path it  takes.    40\u00b0 25\u00b0vacuum liquid     the light travels through the vacuum at a speed of 3.0 \u00d7 108  m / s.    what is the speed of light in the liquid?  a 1.9 \u00d7 108  m / s  b 2.0 \u00d7 108  m / s  c 4.6 \u00d7 108  m / s  d 4.8 \u00d7 108  m / s     23 an eclipse of the sun happens when the moon comes between the earth and the sun.    which statement is correct?  a infra-red radiation from the sun disappears before visible light and ultra-violet radiation.  b ultra-violet radiation from the sun disappears before visible light and infra-red radiation.  c visible light from the sun disappears before ultra-violet radiation and infra-red radiation.  d infra-red radiation, ultra-violet radiation and visible light from the sun all disappear at the  same moment.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19  24 a pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. the sound travels through the water and is  reflected from a shoal of fish. the sound reaches the boat again after 1.2  s. the speed of sound  in the water is 1500  m / s.    shoal of fishboat     how far below the bottom of the boat is the shoal of fish?  a 450  m b 900  m c 1800  m d 3600  m      25 which statement about ultrasound is correct?  a it has a higher frequency than audible sound, and it is a longitudinal wave.  b it has a higher frequency than audible sound, and it is a transverse wave.  c it has a lower frequency than audible sound, and it is a longitudinal wave.  d it has a lower frequency than audible sound, and it is a transverse wave.      26 a metal bar is placed inside a current-carrying coil, as shown in diagram 1.    there is a small current in the coil. the bar holds a few nails, as shown in diagram 2.    diagram 1 diagram 2nails     when there is no current in the coil, the nails drop off.    which row is correct?     metal from which  the bar is made effect of a larger  current in the coil  a soft iron it makes no difference  b soft iron the bar holds more nails  c steel it makes no difference  d steel the bar holds more nails     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19 [turn over  27 diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.    diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.    diagram 1 diagram 2strips of plasticstrips of plastic     which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after  rubbing?     charge on strips force between strips  a opposite attraction  b opposite repulsion  c the same attraction  d the same repulsion     28 a cell has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5  v.    what does this statement mean?  a the cell converts 1.0  j of energy when driving 1.5  c of charge round a complete circuit.  b the cell converts 1.5  j of energy when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete circuit.  c the cell converts 1.5  j of energy per second when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete  circuit.  d the cell converts 1.5  w of power when driving 1.0  c of charge round a complete circuit.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19  29 two wires x and y are made from the same metal and have the same resistance.    which row identifies a possible pair of values for x and for y?     length of x  / cm diameter of x  / mm length of y  / cm diameter of y  / mm  a 50 0.40 200 0.10  b 50 0.40 200 0.20  c 50 0.40 200 0.80  d 50 0.40 200 1.60     30 the diagram shows a circuit including a lamp, an electric bell and three switches s 1, s2 and s 3.     the lamp and bell are not faulty.    s1 s2 s3    the bell is ringing but the lamp is not lit.    which switches are closed?  a s 1 only  b s 1 and s 2 only  c s 1 and s 3 only  d s 1, s2 and s 3    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19 [turn over  31 a lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the potential difference (p.d.) across it can be varied  from 0 to 6  v.    which circuit would be most suitable?    6 va 6 vb 6 vc 6 vd       32 a 12  v battery is connected to a combination of 2.0  \u03c9 resistors as shown.    2.0 \u03c92.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c912 v     what is the current in the battery?  a 1.5  a b 2.0  a c 4.0  a d 6.0  a    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19  33 a student is designing a lighting circuit for a dolls\u2019 house. he sets up two different circuits.    each circuit contains a 12  v power supply and three identical lamps.    each lamp is designed to operate at normal brightness when connected individually to a 12  v  supply.    circuit 1 circuit 2121212 v power supply12 v power supply     which statement is correct?  a in circuit 1, each of the lamps is at normal brightness.  b in circuit 1, if one lamp fails, the other lamps remain lit.  c in circuit 2, if one lamp fails, the other lamps remain lit.  d in circuit 2, the current from the power supply is less than in circuit 1.     34 the combination of logic gates shown has two inputs and one output.    input 1 input 2output     which single logic gate is equivalent to this combination?  a and b nor c not d or    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19 [turn over  35 a simple wiring diagram for an electric cooker is shown.    live neutral earth connection to casingelectric cooker metal casing     why is there a wire connecting the metal case of the cooker to earth?  a it improves the efficiency of the cooker.  b it prevents the metal case from becoming too hot when the cooker is left on.  c it reduces the risk of an electric shock if the live wire touches the metal case.  d the electric cooker will not switch on without it.     36 \u03b1-particles are directed at a metal foil.    most of the particles pass through the foil with little change in direction.    a small proportion of the particles are scattered back through large angles.    what does this evidence suggest about the structure of an atom?  a it consists of a charged centre much smaller than the size of the atom and with little of the  mass of the atom.  b it consists of a negative charge the size of the atom containing small positive charges  scattered through it.  c it consists of a charged centre much smaller than the size of the atom but with most of the  mass of the atom.  d it consists of a positive charge the size of the atom containing small negative charges  scattered through it.    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/m/j/19  37 a conductor carrying a current is placed in a magnetic field.    in which direction does the force on the conductor act?    current nsa b cd       38 what is nuclear fission?  a the merging of two nuclei to create a heavier nucleus  b the process by which electrons are removed from an atom  c the process by which stars generate energy  d the splitting of a nucleus to create two smaller nuclei     39 which statement about \u03b3-radiation is correct?  a it consists of very small charged particles.  b it is a form of electromagnetic radiation.  c it is less penetrating than \u03b2-radiation.  d it is more highly ionising than \u03b1-radiation.      40 a radium nucleus with nucleon number 226 decays by emitting an \u03b1-particle.    the proton number of radium is 88.    what are the nucleon number and proton number for the nucleus produced by this decay?     nucleon number proton number  a 222 86  b 222 87  c 226 86  d 226 87   "
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (leg/jg) 168104/5 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *9089743291* physics  0625/31 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 (a) a student has a metal object.   (i) the student measures the mass of the object.    state the name of the equipment used to measure the mass.  .  [1]    (ii) the mass of the metal object is 1260  g. the volume of the metal is 150  cm3.    calculate the density of the metal. include the unit.  density =  .  [4]   (iii) the mass of the metal object is given in grams. state the mass in kg.  mass =    kg [1]  (b) a vase is placed on a table. forces x and y act on the vase, as shown in fig. 1.1. vasex y fig. 1.1   the mass of the vase is 0.25  kg. the vase is not moving.   calculate the value of force x and the value of force y.   x ...   y ...  [4]  [total: 10]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a man pushing down on a lever to lift one end of a heavy log. heavy loglever fig. 2.1  (a) state the term used to describe the turning force exerted by the man.  .  [1]  (b) (i) fig. 2.2 shows the forces acting as the man starts to lift the heavy log. 0.3 m1.2 m 400  n pivot lever f fig. 2.2    calculate the force f, exerted by the lever on the heavy log.  force f =  .  n [3]   (ii) describe how the man can use a smaller force to lift the heavy log.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 a teacher investigates the reaction time of five students. a 0.50  m ruler is held above the hand of a  student before being allowed to fall. the arrangement is shown in fig. 3.1. teacher\u2019s handstudent\u2019s hand fig. 3.1  as soon as the ruler falls the student closes their hand, catching the ruler. the further the ruler  falls, the greater the reaction time of the student. the results obtained are shown in fig. 3.2. 2 04681012141618202224 a b c d edistance ruler falls  / cm students fig. 3.2",
            "5": "5 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (a) using the results shown in fig. 3.2, calculate the average distance that the ruler drops.  average distance =  ...  cm [2]  (b) list the students in order of their reaction times, with the shortest reaction time at the top of  the table. one has been done for you. order student 1st 2nd 3rd b 4th 5th  [2]  (c) in a similar investigation, a ruler drops a distance of 11.0  cm and has an average speed   of 16  cm / s.   calculate the reaction time.  reaction time =  ..  s [3]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 fig. 4.1 shows a pin. fig. 4.2 shows a person pushing the pin into a wall.  top surface of the pin    fig. 4.1  fig. 4.2  (a) (i) the area of the top surface of the pin is 1.8  cm2. the person applies a force of 50  n.    calculate the pressure exerted on the top surface of the pin.  pressure =  .  n / cm2 [3]   (ii) the area of the top surface of the pin is 500 times larger than the area of the point.  calculate the value of the pressure exerted by the point on the wall.  pressure =  .  n / cm2 [1]  (b) fig. 4.3 shows a simple device for measuring atmospheric pressure. mercurymercury columnspace 760  mm fig. 4.3   (i) state the name given to the device shown in fig. 4.3.  .  [1]   (ii) state what, if anything, is in the space at the top of the tube, above the mercury column.  .  [1]   (iii) fig. 4.3 shows normal atmospheric pressure. suggest a possible value for the height of  the mercury column when atmospheric pressure decreases. include the unit.  reading =  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 coal is a non-renewable source of energy.  (a) (i) explain what is meant by the term non-renewable .  ...  .  [1]   (ii) there are other non-renewable sources of energy.     place a tick in the box by each non-renewable source of energy.      nuclear       oil      solar      wave      wind  [1]  (b) state two advantages and two disadvantages of using natural gas as an energy source. advantages 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ... disadvantages 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [4]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 a liquid-in-glass thermometer is placed in some ice made from pure water. the ice is heated. it  changes to water and then to steam.   the graph in fig. 6.1 shows how the temperature varies with time. the values of temperature are  missing from the y-axis. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 time  / minutestemperature  / \u00b0c yy xx fig. 6.1  (a) on fig. 6.1, suggest a value for the temperature at each of the three points marked on the  y-axis.   write a value in each of the boxes.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) in both section x and section y the line on the graph is horizontal.     for each section, state the name for the process taking place and explain what is happening  to the molecules.   (i) section x  name  . explanation    ...  ...  ...  [2]   (ii) section y name  . explanation    ...  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows some devices that each use one type of electromagnetic radiation.  device  electromagnetic radiation radio binoculars for daytime use sunbedtv remote controllergamma rays x-rays ultraviolet light visible light infra-red rays microwaves radio waves fig. 7.1   draw one line from each device to the correct type of electromagnetic radiation. one has  been done for you.  [3]  (b) (i) state the name of one type of radiation that has a longer wavelength than visible light.  .  [1]   (ii) complete the sentence about electromagnetic radiation. use a word from the box. amplitude       frequency       speed       wavelength    all types of electromagnetic radiation travel through a vacuum with the same   ..   [1]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 8 (a) a student rubs a plastic rod with a dry cloth, as shown in fig. 8.1. the rod becomes negatively  charged. plastic rod dry cloth fig. 8.1   (i) use words from the box to complete the sentence. air       cloth       electrons       hand       neutrons       protons    the rod becomes negatively charged because . move from the     . to the rod.  [2]   (ii) the student moves the rod close to a suspended, charged rod. the two rods repel each  other.    state the type of charge on the suspended rod.  .  [1]   (iii) explain your answer to (a)(ii) .  ...  .  [1]  (b) a device has a metal case. any charge on the case must be able to move to earth.    (i) draw one ring around a material that is suitable for the connection to earth.     copper             glass             plastic             rubber  [1]   (ii) explain your answer to (b)(i) .  ...  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 9 a student makes a circuit to switch on a 6.0  v lamp from two different switches x and y.  fig. 9.1 shows the circuit. 6.0 v+ \u2013 switch x switch yp r s q fig. 9.1  (a) switch x is in position p. state the position of switch y for the lamp to be lit.  .  [1]  (b) the current in the lamp is 0.50  a when the potential difference (p.d.) across the lamp is 6.0  v.   calculate the resistance of the lamp. include the unit.  resistance =  .  [4]  (c) the student connects another 6.0  v lamp in parallel with the first lamp, as shown in fig. 9.2. 6.0 v+ \u2013 switch x switch y fig. 9.2   give two advantages of connecting the lamps in parallel.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 10 (a) a teacher demonstrates the action of a device. fig. 10.1 shows the symbol for the device. fig. 10.1   state the name of this device.   .  [1]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows another device being used in a circuit. the circuit contains a 6.0  v lamp. 12 v+ \u2013 sliding contactc b a fig. 10.2   (i) the sliding contact of this device is at position a, as shown in fig. 10.2.    describe and explain the brightness of the lamp when the sliding contact is in this  position. brightness of lamp  . explanation    [2]   (ii) the teacher moves the sliding contact from position a to position b. describe and explain  what happens to the brightness of the lamp.  ...  .  [2]   (iii) the teacher moves the sliding contact from position b to position c. suggest what  happens to the lamp.  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 11 (a) fig. 11.1 shows in each of the diagrams a current-carrying conductor and a magnetic field  pattern. a b ccurrent-carrying conductorcurrent-carrying conductorcurrent-carrying conductor fig. 11.1   state the diagram which correctly shows the magnetic field around a current-carrying  conductor.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 11.2 shows three pieces of equipment. coil coil with 100 turns of wiresensitive centre-zero meterbar magnets n  fig. 11.2   (i) describe how to generate and detect an electromotive force (e.m.f.) using the equipment  in fig.  11.2. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (ii) describe two changes that will generate a larger e.m.f. using similar equipment to that in  fig. 11.2.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) a student connects a lamp and centre-zero galvanometer in series with a generator, as shown  in fig. 11.3. lamp centre-zero galvanometergenerator g fig. 11.3   the student observes the galvanometer needle moving from side-to-side repeatedly.   explain why the needle moves in this way.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 12 (a) use words from the box to complete the sentences about the charges in an atom. words can  be used once, more than once or not at all. negative                 neutral                 positive   the charge on the nucleus of an atom is ..   the charge on a proton is ..   the charge on electrons orbiting the nucleus is ..  [3]  (b) a nucleus of radium-226 has the nuclide notation shown. 226 88ra   (i) determine the number of protons in a nucleus of radium-226.  .  [1]   (ii) determine the number of neutrons in a nucleus of radium-226.  .  [1]   (iii) radium has another isotope, radium-223.    write the nuclide notation for radium-223 in the space.  [1]  (c) radium-226 has a half-life of 1600 years.   a sample contains 8.0  mg of radium-226.   calculate the time for the sample to decay until only 1.0  mg of radium-226 remains.  time =  ...  years  [2]  [total: 8] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (ce/jg) 168103/5 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *0781809913* physics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a student moves a model car along a bench.  fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the motion of the model car. 001.02.03.04.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0ab c d time  / sspeed m / s fig. 1.1  (a) describe the motion of the car in each of the sections a, b, c and d. a  ... b  ... c  ... d  ...  [4]  (b) determine the distance moved by the model car in the first five seconds.  distance =     m [3]  [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 a bottle contains some oil.  (a) the mass of the oil and the bottle is 678  g. the mass of the empty bottle is 318  g.   calculate the mass of the oil.  mass =   .  g [1]  (b) some of the oil from (a) is poured into measuring cylinder a. the rest of the oil is poured into  measuring cylinder b, as shown in fig. 2.1. 250 200 150 100 50oilcm3 250 200 150 100 50oilcm3 a b fig. 2.1   (i) state the volume of oil in measuring cylinder b, as shown in fig. 2.1.  volume =   .  cm3 [1]   (ii) calculate the total volume of oil.  volume =   .  cm3 [1]   (iii) calculate the density of the oil.  density =   .  g / cm3 [3]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 fig. 3.1 shows a simple pendulum swinging backwards and forwards between p and q. one  complete oscillation of the pendulum is when the bob swings from p to q and then back to p. support string p rq pendulum bob fig. 3.1  (a) a student starts two stopwatches at the same time while the pendulum bob is swinging.   the student stops one stopwatch when the pendulum bob is at p. he stops the other  stopwatch when the pendulum bob next is at q.   fig. 3.2 shows the readings on the stopwatches. 0 :2 :22min s s1 100 0 :2 :77min s s1 100reading at p reading at q fig. 3.2   (i) use readings from fig. 3.2 to determine the time for one complete oscillation of the  pendulum.   time =   .. s [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (ii) the method described in (a) does not give an accurate value for one complete oscillation  of the pendulum.    describe how the student could obtain an accurate value for one complete oscillation of  the pendulum.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) as the pendulum bob moves from r to q it gains 0.4  j of gravitational potential energy.   air resistance can be ignored.   state the value of kinetic energy of the pendulum bob at   1. r    j   2. q  . j [2]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 20194 a student places a balloon filled with air next to a window, as shown in fig. 4.1. the sun warms  the air in the balloon. fig. 4.1  (a) (i) suggest what happens to the balloon as the air in it becomes hotter than the surroundings.  .  [1]   (ii) use ideas about molecules to explain your answer to (a)(i) .  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the student uses a pump to inflate another balloon.   fig. 4.2 shows the student inflating a balloon. pump handleballoon fig. 4.2   the student applies a force of 30 n to the pump handle. the force acts on an area of 12 cm2.   calculate the pressure on the pump handle. include the unit.  pressure =    [4]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 (a) a nuclear power station generates electrical energy.   the main stages in the operation of the nuclear power station are listed.   they are not in the correct order.   e electrical energy is produced.   f the fission of uranium nuclei releases thermal energy.   g a turbine drives a generator.   h thermal energy heats water to produce steam.   complete the flow chart to describe how a nuclear power station works.   in each empty box, insert the letter for the correct statement. the nuclear power station uses uranium as a fuel. \u2193 \u2193 \u2193 the steam drives a turbine. \u2193 \u2193 electrical energy is transmitted.   [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) electrical energy from the power station is used to power two different lamps. fig. 5.1 shows  how the light outputs from two types of lamp vary with the power input. 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 1202004006008001000 light output j/spower input to lamp  / wfilament lamp led lamp fig. 5.1   (i) an experiment requires a lamp with a light output of 70  j / s.    for the led lamp and for the filament lamp determine the input power required to give a  light output of 70  j / s. use information from fig. 5.1.     1. for the led lamp, input power =  w     2. for the filament lamp, input power =  w  [2]   (ii) explain why using led lamps is better for the environment. use information from fig.  5.1  in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light that is reflected by a mirror. mirror line xray of lightzy fig. 6.1  (a) (i) state the name of line x shown on fig. 6.1.  .  [1]   (ii) state the name of angle y shown on fig. 6.1.  .  [1]   (iii) a student moves the ray of light and doubles the size of angle y. state the effect on  angle  z.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a converging lens used to form an image i of an object o. object o image iff f lens fig. 6.2   (i) state the name of the points labelled f on fig. 6.2.  .  [1]   (ii) describe the nature of the image i.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 7 (a) solid, liquid and gas are three states of matter.   for each state of matter describe the arrangement of the molecules. solid  ..  ... liquid  .  ... gas    ...  [3]  (b) a liquid is spilt on a bench in a warm laboratory. after a short time, the liquid disappears.   (i) state the name of the process that causes the liquid to disappear.  .  [1]   (ii) the process in (b)(i)  causes a cooling effect.    explain why the cooling effect occurs. use your ideas about molecules.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a bar magnet. fig. 8.1   (i) on fig. 8.1, mark the north and south poles of the magnet. use the letter n for the north  pole and s for the south pole.  [1]   (ii) a small bar of unmagnetised iron is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in fig. 8.2. n smagnet iron bar fig. 8.2    the iron bar moves towards the magnet.    explain why the iron bar moves.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) fig. 8.3 shows a coil of wire wrapped around an iron core. a student uses these to make an  electromagnet. iron corecoil fig. 8.3   (i) complete the diagram in fig. 8.3 to show how it could be used to make an electromagnet.  [1]     (ii) state one advantage of an electromagnet compared to a permanent magnet.  .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 9 fig. 9.1 shows a plastic ruler. fig. 9.1  (a) suggest and explain how a student could give a positive charge to a plastic ruler.  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) a plastic ruler is given a positive charge. a sphere hangs from an insulating thread.   a student holds the ruler near the sphere, as shown in fig. 9.2. the ruler repels the sphere. positively charged ruler sphereinsulating thread fig. 9.2   (i) state what charge, if any, the sphere carries.  .  [1]   (ii) explain your answer to (b)(i) .  .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 10 fig. 10.1 shows an incomplete circuit diagram for two identical lamps arranged in parallel. the  circuit contains an ammeter and a voltmeter. fig. 10.1  (a) on fig. 10.1, complete the symbols for two lamps, an ammeter and a voltmeter positioned  correctly.  [5]  (b) one of the lamps breaks.   state the effect, if any, this has on the brightness of the other lamp. explain your answer. effect  . explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 11 fig. 11.1 shows a transformer that can provide two different output voltages from a 240 volt mains  a.c. supply. 240  v  a.c. metal core primary coil 5000 turnssecondary coilp q r fig. 11.1  in the transformer, the primary coil has 5000 turns.  the secondary coil has 250 turns between p and r.  (a) state the term used to describe this type of transformer.  .  [1]  (b) the primary and secondary coils are mounted on a metal core.   state the metal used for the core and explain why it is suitable. metal  . explanation  ...  ...  [2]  (c) (i) the secondary coil has 125 turns between p and q. calculate the output voltage  between connections p and q.  voltage =  .  v [3]   (ii) compare the output voltage between p and q with the output voltage between p and r.    explain your answer. comparison   explanation   [2] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.12 (a) radioactive emission is a random process.   explain the meaning of the word random .  ...  .  [1]  (b) the table compares three types of radioactive emission. emission relative ionising ability relative penetrating ability alpha beta gamma   table 12.1   complete the table by choosing words from the box. high    low    medium  [3]  (c) a radioactive substance decays by emitting an \u03b1-particle.   an \u03b1-particle can be represented as 4 2\u03b1.   draw a labelled diagram showing the composition of an \u03b1-particle.      [3]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 16 printed pages. dc (lk/ct) 168102/6 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *4410060547* physics  0625/33 paper 3  theory (core)  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 fig. 1.1 shows three metal blocks. each block has the same mass. a b c fig. 1.1  the volumes of the blocks are different.  each block is made of a different metal. the table gives the density of each metal. name of metal density (g  / cm3) aluminium 2.83 iron 6.95 lead 11.3  (a) use the data from the table to identify the metal used to make each block.   a ...   b ...   c ...  [1]  (b) another metal block is made of brass. its mass is 200  g.   the density of brass is 8.4  g / cm3.   calculate the volume of the brass block.  volume =  .  cm3 [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) describe a method for determining the volume of a small, dense, irregularly-shaped object.   you may draw a labelled diagram.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 fig. 2.1 shows a distance-time graph for a man walking from home to a caf\u00e9. at the caf\u00e9 the man  stops for a drink. on the return journey from the caf\u00e9, the man stops to rest. 002.04.06.08.010.012.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 time  / hoursdistance  / km 4.0 5.0 6.0 fig. 2.1  (a) using fig. 2.1, determine   (i) the distance from the man\u2019s home to the caf\u00e9.  distance =  ..  km [1]   (ii) the time taken to walk to the caf\u00e9.  time =  ..  hours  [1]   (iii) the speed, in km  / hour, of the man as he walks to the caf\u00e9.  speed =  .  km / hour [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) on the return journey from the caf\u00e9, the man stopped to rest.   (i) the man left home at 13:00.     determine the time when the man began his rest.  time when rest began    [1]   (ii) for how long did the man rest on the return journey? state the time in minutes.  time =  ..  minutes  [1]   (iii) describe, in words, how the graph in fig. 2.1 shows that the man travelled at a slower  speed on the return journey after resting.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 fig. 3.1 shows a wheelbarrow and fig. 3.2 shows the dimensions of its wheel. pivotload 1.50  m 35 cm = diameter of wheel  25 mm = diameter of axle     fig. 3.1  fig. 3.2  (a) complete the table to show the diameter of the wheel and axle in metres. measurement  measurement in metres diameter of wheel 35 cm diameter of axle 25 mm  [2]  (b) the mass of the wheelbarrow is 20  kg. the mass of the load in the wheelbarrow is 30  kg.    calculate the total weight of the wheelbarrow and its load.  weight of wheelbarrow and load =    n [3]  (c) a man lifts the handle of the wheelbarrow. he applies a force of 140  n, as shown in fig. 3.3. wheelbarrow handle140  n 1.30  m pivot fig. 3.3   calculate the moment of the force about the pivot. include the unit.  moment =    [4]  [total: 9]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4 fig. 4.1 shows a flat-top cone and a sphere, resting on a table. flat-top conesphere table fig. 4.1  (a) on fig. 4.1, mark a cross on each object to show the position of the centre of mass of each  object.  [2]  (b) the cone is inverted and balanced on its top, as shown in fig. 4.2. inverted flat-top coneflat-top cone fig. 4.2   explain why the flat-top cone is less stable when it is inverted.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 5 fig. 5.1 represents part of a roller coaster track.  car and passengersa bc d e fig. 5.1  (a) the car is lifted to point a and then released. it continues along the track.   complete the sentences about the energy of the car using letters from fig. 5.1.   the car has maximum gravitational potential energy at point  ...   the car has maximum kinetic energy at point  ...  [2]  (b) (i) state the principle of conservation of energy.  ...  .  [2]   (ii) a machine lifts the car to point a. the machine is not 100% efficient.    suggest why the machine is not 100% efficient. use your ideas about energy.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over6 fig. 6.1 shows a metal pan containing water being heated by an electrical heater. water electrical heatermetal pan fig. 6.1  (a) complete the sentences to describe how thermal energy is transferred.   (i) thermal energy is transferred from the electrical heater to the bottom of the pan by . [1]   (ii) thermal energy is transferred through the bottom of the metal pan  by .  [1]   (iii) thermal energy is transferred throughout the water by  ..  [1]  (b) a student carries out an experiment to determine which surface is the better emitter of thermal  energy. she uses two similar metal containers. one of the containers has a dull black surface.  the other has a shiny white surface. fig. 6.2 shows the metal containers on a bench.    (i) suggest a procedure for her experiment. you may add to fig. 6.2 to assist with your  explanation. shiny white surface benchdull black surface fig. 6.2  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) predict the result of the experiment described in (b)(i) .   ...  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 7 fig. 7.1 shows a ray of red light being reflected at the flat surface of a glass block. glass block ray of red lightair fig. 7.1  (a) explain why the ray of red light is totally internally reflected by the surface of the glass block.  ...  .  [1]  (b) a ray of white light passes through a prism and produces a spectrum of colours on a screen,  as shown in fig. 7.2. a bscreen ray of white light spectrum of colours fig. 7.2   (i) state the name of the process of separating white light into a spectrum.  .  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (ii) write the names of the seven colours that appear on the screen between a and b.    colour at a  ..      ..      ..      ..      ..      ..    colour at b  ..  [1]  (c) visible light is one part of the electromagnetic spectrum.   state the name of one other part of the electromagnetic spectrum and describe a use of this  type of radiation. name of radiation  .. use of radiation  .  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows an incomplete ray diagram of a converging lens forming an image of the  object, o. x lenso y fig. 8.1   (i) state the term given to the line xy.  .  [1]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, indicate the position of one principal focus of the lens. label the principal  focus, f.  [1]  (b) (i) on fig. 8.1, draw a ray of light from the top of the object that passes through the lens to  form the image. use a ruler.  [2]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, draw the image formed by the lens. label the image i. [1]   (iii) choose words from the box that describe the image formed by the lens in fig. 8.1. diminished   enlarged   horizontal   inverted   same size   upright    draw a ring around each correct word.  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 9 (a) a student tests some materials to find which ones are electrical conductors.   he uses the circuit in fig. 9.1. a x ycomponent b fig. 9.1   (i) state the name of component b.  .  [1]   (ii) describe how the student can use the circuit in fig. 9.1  to test whether a material is an  electrical conductor.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]   (iii) state which materials are electrical conductors.    put a tick in the box next to each material that is an electrical conductor.    plastic   copper      rubber   gold  [1]  (b) the student connects a resistor r, between x and y. the student determines the resistance  of the resistor.   (i) name the instrument he uses to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across resistor  r.  .  [1]   (ii) the current in resistor r is 0.2  a when the p.d. across the resistor is 6.0  v. calculate the  resistance of resistor r.  resistance =    \u03c9 [3]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 10 fig. 10.1 shows a desktop computer. the computer is connected to a mains supply by a plug  containing a fuse. fig. 10.1  (a) the computer has a metal case.  a fault occurs and a live wire touches the metal case.   explain how an earth wire and the fuse in the plug protect the user.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the computer contains a transformer. the input voltage to the transformer is 240  v and the  output voltage is 12.0  v. the input coil of the transformer has 3000 turns.   calculate the number of turns on the output coil.  number of turns =    [3]  [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 11 (a) table 11.1 includes information about the properties of three types of naturally occurring,  nuclear radiation. table 11.1 type of radiation charge mass (atomic mass units) nature 0 0 electromagnetic wave  \u03b1  (alpha) +2 helium-4 nucleus 1/2000   complete the table.  [4]  (b) the graph shows the decay curve for a radioactive substance. 0010002000300040005000600070008000count rate counts  /minute900010000 20 40 time  / minutes60 80   use the graph to determine the half-life of the radioactive substance.  half-life =  ..  minutes  [3]   [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 12 a student uses the equipment shown in fig. 12.1. s ncoil magnet pointer sensitive centre-zero milli-voltmeter fig. 12.1  the student moves the magnet to the right into the coil and then holds the magnet stationary for a  few seconds. the pointer deflects to the right and then returns to the centre.  the student then moves the magnet to the left so that it is completely out of the coil and moves it  far away from the coil.  (a) describe how the pointer moves when the student moves the magnet out of the coil.  ...  .  [2]  (b) explain why the pointer behaves as described in (a).  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 5] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (ks/tp) 169309/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *4702702278*cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.physics  0625/41 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.",
            "2": "2 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a rocket is stationary on the launchpad. at time t = 0, the rocket engines are switched on and  exhaust gases are ejected from the nozzles of the engines. the rocket accelerates upwards.  fig. 1.1 shows how the acceleration of the rocket varies between time t = 0 and time t = tf. acceleration 0 tf0 time  t fig. 1.1  (a) define acceleration .  ...  .  [1]  (b) on fig. 1.2, sketch a graph to show how the speed of the rocket varies between time t = 0  and time t = tf. 0 tf0 time  tspeed fig. 1.2  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) some time later, the rocket is far from the earth. the effect of the earth\u2019s gravity on the  motion of the rocket is insignificant. as the rocket accelerates, its momentum increases.   (i) state the principle of the conservation of momentum.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) explain how the principle of the conservation of momentum applies to the accelerating  rocket and the exhaust gases.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 fig. 2.1 shows a sign that extends over a road. 1.8 m w 1.3 mconcrete block p 70 cmsupport post signaccident slow down  fig. 2.1  the mass of the sign is 3.4  \u00d7 103 kg.  (a) calculate the weight w of the sign.  w =  .  [2]  (b) the weight of the sign acts at a horizontal distance of 1.8  m from the centre of the support  post and it produces a turning effect about point p.    point p is a horizontal distance of 1.3  m from the centre of the support post.   (i) calculate the moment about p due to the weight of the sign.  moment =  .  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (ii) a concrete block is positioned on the other side of the support post with its centre of  mass a horizontal distance of 70  cm from the centre of the support post.    1. state what is meant by centre of mass .    ..  [1]    2. the weight of the concrete block produces a moment about point p that exactly  cancels the moment caused by the weight w.     calculate the weight of the concrete block.  weight =  .  [2]  (c) the concrete block is removed. the sign and support post rotate about point p in a clockwise  direction.   state and explain what happens to the moment about point p due to the weight of the sign as  it rotates.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 a cube of side 0.040  m is floating in a container of liquid. fig. 3.1 shows that the surface of the  liquid is 0.028  m above the level of the bottom face of the cube. cube liquid pump0.040  mair 0.028  m valve fig. 3.1  the pressure of the air above the cube exerts a force on the top face of the cube. the valve is  closed.  (a) explain, in terms of air molecules, how the force due to the pressure of the air is produced.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the density of the liquid in the container is 1500  kg / m3.   calculate:    (i) the pressure due to the liquid at a depth of 0.028  m  pressure =  .  [2]   (ii) the force on the bottom face of the cube caused by the pressure due to the liquid.  force =  .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) the valve is opened and liquid is pumped into the container. the surface of the liquid rises a  distance of 0.034  m.   the cube remains floating in the liquid with its bottom face 0.028  m below the surface of the  liquid.   (i) calculate the work done on the cube by the force in (b)(ii) .  work done =  .  [2]   (ii) suggest one reason why this is not an efficient method of lifting up the cube.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 gas of mass 0.23  g is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. the gas is at atmospheric pressure which  is 1.0  \u00d7 105 pa. fig. 4.1 shows the piston held in position by a catch.  gas catch heaterpistoncylinder air at atmospheric pressure fig. 4.1  the volume of the trapped gas is 1.9  \u00d7 10\u20134 m3.  an electrical heater is used to increase the temperature of the trapped gas by 550  \u00b0c.  (a) the specific heat capacity of the gas is 0.72  j / (g \u00b0c).   (i) calculate the energy required to increase the temperature of the trapped gas by 550  \u00b0c.  energy =  .  [2]   (ii) the power of the heater is 2.4  w.    1. calculate how long it takes for the heater to supply the energy calculated in (a)(i) .   time =  .  [2]    2. in practice, it takes much longer to increase the temperature of the gas by 550  \u00b0c  using the heater.     suggest one reason for this.      ..  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) when the temperature of the gas has increased by 550  \u00b0c, its pressure is 2.9  \u00d7 105 pa. the  catch is then released allowing the piston to move. as the piston moves, the temperature of  the gas remains constant.   (i) state and explain what happens to the piston.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) determine the volume of the gas when the piston stops moving.  volume =  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 5 liquids and gases are two states of matter.  (a) in both boiling and evaporation, a liquid changes into a gas.    (i) state two ways in which boiling differs from evaporation. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]   (ii) before injecting a patient, a doctor wipes a small amount of a volatile liquid on to the  patient\u2019s skin.     explain, in terms of molecules, how this procedure cools the patient\u2019s skin.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]   (b) gases can be compressed but liquids are incompressible.   explain, in terms of molecules, why liquids are incompressible.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 green light of frequency 5.7  \u00d7 1014 hz is travelling in air at a speed of 3.0  \u00d7 108 m / s. the light is  incident on the surface of a transparent solid.  fig. 6.1 shows the wavefronts and the direction of travel of the light in the air.  airwavefront solid fig. 6.1  the light travels more slowly in the transparent solid.  (a) explain, in terms of the wavefronts, why the light changes direction as it enters the solid. you  may draw on fig. 6.1 as part of your answer.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (b) the refractive index of the transparent solid is 1.3.    (i) the light is incident on the surface of the solid at an angle of incidence of 67\u00b0.    calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the solid.  angle of refraction =  .  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (ii) determine the wavelength of the green light in the transparent solid.  wavelength =  .  [4]  [total: 9]  ",
            "14": "14 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 7 fig. 7.1 shows a circuit diagram that includes component x. a 20 \u03c9x 30 \u03c9 fig. 7.1  (a) state the name of component x.  .  [1]  (b) the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is e. the switch is closed.   the potential difference (p.d.) across the 30  \u03c9 resistor is v30.    the p.d. across the 20  \u03c9 resistor is v20.    the p.d. across component x is vx.   state an equation that relates vx to:   (i) v30  .  [1]   (ii) e and v20.  .  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) the e.m.f. of the battery is 6.0  v and the resistance of component x is 15  \u03c9.   calculate:   (i) the total resistance of the circuit   resistance =  .  [3]   (ii) the ammeter reading.  reading =  .  [2]  (d) the temperature of component x increases.   state and explain what happens to the ammeter reading.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 8 a student turns the handle of an alternating current (a.c.) generator and the coil rotates.   fig. 8.1 represents the structure of the a.c. generator. ncoil slip rings voltage outputhandle s coil brush fig. 8.1  (a) there is an alternating voltage output between the two terminals.   (i) explain why rotating the coil produces an output voltage.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) state the position of the rotating coil when the alternating output voltage is at a maximum  value and explain why the maximum output occurs at this position.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) a lamp and an open switch are connected in series to the output terminals of the a.c.  generator.   the switch is closed and the lamp lights up. the student has to apply a greater force on the  handle.   explain why a greater force is needed to keep the lamp lit.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a beam of \u03b1-particles moving towards a thin sheet of gold in a vacuum.  beam of \u03b1-particles vacuumdetectorsgold sheet fig. 9.1   detectors in the region surrounding the thin gold sheet detect the \u03b1-particles and determine  the number of particles that travel in various directions.   state and explain what can be deduced from the following observations.   (i) the majority of the \u03b1-particles pass through the gold sheet undeflected and are detected  on the far side. deduction  ... explanation    .  [2]   (ii) a small number of \u03b1-particles are deflected as they pass through the gold sheet. deduction  ... explanation    .  [2]   (iii) a very small number of \u03b1-particles are deflected through very large angles or return back  the way they came. deduction  ... explanation    .  [2]",
            "19": "19 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) a beam that consists of both \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles is passed through a region of space  where there is a magnetic field perpendicular to the direction of the beam.   state two ways in which the deflection of the \u03b1-particles differs from that of the \u03b2-particles. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/41/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (ce/fc) 169310/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *3376120828* physics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a bus is travelling between points a and d. there are bus stops at \u200aa, b, c and d but the bus does  not stop at b and c. fig. 1.1 is a speed-time graph for the bus. speed km / h40 30 20 10 0 0 1.0 2.0ab c d 3.0 4.0 time  / min5.0 fig. 1.1  (a) describe the motion of the bus between each of the bus stops. select the appropriate  description from the list below.   constant acceleration    decreasing acceleration       increasing acceleration    moving backwards at constant speed   moving forwards at constant speed    stationary   1. between a and b  ..   2. between b and c  ..   3. between c and d  .  [3]  (b) the average speed of the bus between a and d is 23  km / h.   calculate the distance between a and d.  distance =    [3]  (c) the bus stops at d for 1 min and then travels at a constant acceleration for 30 seconds.   on fig. 1.1, sketch a possible graph for this additional motion. label x when the bus starts to  accelerate and label y for 30 seconds later.  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a model fire engine. its brakes are applied. firemodel fire engine containing water tank jet of water fig. 2.1  0.80 kg of water is emitted in the jet every 6.0  s at a velocity of 0.72  m / s relative to the model.  (a) calculate the change in momentum of the water that is ejected in 6.0  s.  momentum =    [2]  (b) calculate the magnitude of the force acting on the model because of the jet of water.  force =    [2]  (c) the brakes of the model are released.   state and explain the direction of the acceleration of the model. statement  . explanation  ...  ...  [2]  (d) in (c) the model contains a water tank, which is initially full.   state and explain any change in the magnitude of the initial acceleration if the brakes are first  released when the tank is nearly empty. statement  . explanation  ...  ...  ...  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 fig. 3.1 shows solar cells used to generate electrical energy. fig. 3.1  (a) state the main form of energy transferred from the sun to the solar cells for the generation of  electrical energy.  .  [1]  (b) consider the generation of electrical energy by a large number of solar cells, as shown in  fig. 3.1.   (i) state one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage. advantage  .  ... disadvantage  .  ...  [2]   (ii) state and explain whether this source of electrical energy is renewable.  ...  .  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) each group of solar cells is arranged in a rectangle 1.2  m \u00d7 2.8  m. the solar cells are situated  in a region where 260  w of solar energy is received per square metre of the cells. the  electrical output of each group of solar cells is a current of 2.5   a with a potential difference of  86 v.   calculate the efficiency of the solar cells.  efficiency =    % [4] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 (a) state and explain, in terms of molecules, any change in the pressure of a gas when the  volume is reduced at a constant temperature. statement  . explanation  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  [3]  (b) complete table 4.1 to give the relative order of magnitude of the expansion of gases, liquids  and solids for the same increase of temperature.   write one of these words in each blank space: gas   liquid    solid table 4.1 expands most expands least  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 (a) (i) a liquid is heated so that bubbles of its vapour rise to the surface and molecules escape  to the atmosphere. state the name of this process    [1]   (ii) at a lower temperature than in (a)(i) , molecules escape from the surface to the  atmosphere. state the name of this process    [1]  (b) (i) fig. 5.1 shows apparatus used to determine the power output of a heater. electric heater metal blockthermometer fig. 5.1    the metal block has a mass of 2.7  kg. the metal of the block has a specific heat capacity  of 900  j / (kg \u00b0c).    in 2 min 30  s, the temperature of the block increases from 21  \u00b0c to 39  \u00b0c.    calculate the power of the heater.  power =    [4]   (ii) state and explain a precaution that can be taken to improve the accuracy of the  experiment. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a water wave in a ripple tank. original wave directionnew wave direction region aregion b fig. 6.1   (i) state the name of the process that occurs as the wave moves from region a to region b.  .  [1]   (ii) suggest a cause for the change in direction of the wave.  .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a transverse wave. displacement 0 time fig. 6.2   on fig. 6.2, draw a wave which has half the amplitude and a greater frequency than the wave  shown.  [2]  (c) a train travels along steel rails. a person waiting at a station hears the sound of the train  through the rails before he hears the sound through the air.   (i) explain why this happens.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) the speed of sound in the rails is 5800  m / s.    calculate the wavelength of sound of frequency 1100  hz travelling at this speed.  wavelength =    [2]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 7 (a) in fig. 7.1, a converging lens projects a sharp image of an object o on to a screen.   complete the paths of the two rays from the object to the screen. converging lensscreen o fig. 7.1  [2]  (b) the converging lens in (a) is replaced with a thinner converging lens. the object o and the  screen remain in the same positions as in (a). the thinner converging lens has a longer focal  length than the converging lens in (a).   complete the paths of the two rays from the object to the screen in fig. 7.2. thinner converging lensscreen o fig. 7.2  [2]  (c) a converging lens is used as a magnifying glass.   the focal length of the lens is 10  cm.   (i) describe the position of the object in relation to the lens.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) describe the position of the image in relation to the lens and the object.  ...  .  [1]   (iii) give three properties of the image formed by a magnifying glass.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 8 (a) a conducting sphere is mounted on an insulating stand. explain how you would use a  positively charged rod of insulating material to charge the sphere by induction.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) fig. 8.1 shows an electronic component. fig. 8.1 state the name of the component shown in fig. 8.1  ..  [1]  (c) in the space below, write down the truth table for a nand gate. [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (d) fig. 8.2 shows the connections to two logic gates. cbad e fig. 8.2   table 8.1 shows part of the truth table for the arrangement of logic gates in fig. 8.2.   complete table  8.1 for the input values shown. table 8.1 inputsintermediate  pointoutput a b c d e 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 9 (a) describe how to demagnetise a bar magnet using alternating current (a.c.) in a coil.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) motor. d.c. power supply split-ring commutator coiln s fig. 9.1   (i) explain the purpose of the split-ring commutator.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) the voltage of the power supply is increased.     state the effect this has on the motor.  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 10 fig. 10.1 shows a circuit containing a filament lamp of resistance 0.30  \u03c9 and two resistors, each of  resistance 0.20  \u03c9. 0.20  \u03c90.20  \u03c9 0.30\u03c9 fig. 10.1  (a) calculate the combined resistance of the lamp and the two resistors.  resistance =    [3]  (b) the potential difference (p.d.) of the supply is increased so that the current in the lamp  increases.   state and explain any change in the resistance of the lamp. statement  . explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 11 (a) a radon-222 nucleus contains 86 protons and 136 neutrons. it decays by emitting an  \u03b1-particle and becomes a nucleus of an isotope of polonium. the symbol for radon is rn and  the symbol for polonium is po.   write down the nuclide equation for this decay.  [3]  (b) carbon-14 is radioactive with a half-life of 5700 years. an animal bone is dug up in an  archaeological excavation. the quantity of carbon-14 in the bone is 25% of what it was when  the bone was buried.   calculate the time that has elapsed since it was buried.  time =  ..  years  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (rw/sw) 169311/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *8247445056* physics  0625/43 paper 4  theory (extended)  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 1 fig. 1.1 shows a distance\u2011time graph for a cyclist travelling between points p and v on a straight  road. 00200400600800 100 200 300 400 time  / sdistance  / m 500q prs tuv fig. 1.1  (a) describe the motion between: q and r   r and s  . s and t.  .  [3]  (b) calculate the speed between u and v.  speed =  .  [2]  (c) after point v, the straight road continues down a steep hill. the cyclist travels down the steep  hill. he does not apply the brakes and all resistive forces can be ignored.   on fig.  1.1, sketch a possible motion for the cyclist after v.  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 fig. 2.1 is the top view of a small ship of mass 1.2  \u00d7 106 kg. the ship is moving slowly sideways at  0.040  m / s as it comes in to dock. 0.040  m / ssmall shipdock walllarge wooden pillars fig. 2.1  the ship hits the wooden pillars which move towards the dock wall.  (a) calculate the kinetic energy of the ship before it hits the pillars.  kinetic energy =  .  [2]  (b) the ship is in contact with the pillars for 0.30  s as it comes to rest.   calculate the average force exerted on the side of the ship.  force =  .  [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) assume that the kinetic energy calculated in (a) is used to do work moving the pillars.   calculate the distance moved by the pillars.  distance =  .  [2]  (d) dock walls sometimes have the pillars replaced with rubber car tyres.   explain how this reduces the possibility of damage when a boat docks.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 fig. 3.1 shows a small submarine submerged below the surface of the sea. 3.0 \u00d7 103 msea water submarinesurface of the sea fig. 3.1  (a) the density of sea water is 1030  kg / m3.   calculate the pressure due to the sea water on the top of the submarine when it is 3.0  \u00d7 103 m  below the surface.  pressure =  .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) the submarine emits a pulse of sound to detect other objects in the sea. the speed of sound  in sea water is 1500  m / s. an echo is received with a time delay of 0.50  s after the original  sound is emitted.   (i) calculate the distance between the submarine and the other object.  distance =  .  [3]   (ii) another pulse of sound is emitted through the air when the submarine is on the surface.    an echo is received from a second object that is in the air. this echo is received 0.50  s  after the pulse of sound is emitted.    compare the distance of the second object from the submarine with the distance  calculated in (b)(i) . tick one box. give a reason for your answer.    distance is smaller      distance is the same      distance is larger   reason    [1]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 (a) water molecules escape to the atmosphere from water boiling in a pan. water molecules  evaporate from the surface of a bowl of cool water and also escape to the atmosphere.   state two ways in which boiling is different from evaporation. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows a heater in a metal block. electric heater metal blockthermometer fig. 4.1   the power of the heater is 370  w and it is switched on for 4.0  minutes. the metal block has a  specific heat capacity of 420  j / (kg \u00b0c) and a mass of 5.0  kg.   calculate the increase of temperature of the block. assume all the thermal energy from the  heater is transferred to the block.  temperature increase =  .  [4]  [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 fig. 5.1 shows a cross\u2011section of the inside of a vacuum flask containing a cold liquid. the walls of  the vacuum flask are made of glass. stopper silvered surfaces vacuum glass fig. 5.1  (a) the vacuum flask is being used to keep a liquid cool on a hot day.   explain how the labelled features of the vacuum flask keep the liquid cool by reducing thermal  energy transfer. include the names of the processes involved.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [5]  (b) suggest a suitable material for the stopper.  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts of a wave approaching a narrow gap and passing through the gap.  the wavelength is \u03bb. \u03bbdirection of travelwavefronts gap barrier barrier fig. 6.1   (i) state the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes through the gap.  .  [1]   (ii) a wave with a wavelength \u03bb 2 approaches the same gap.    on fig.  6.2, draw three wavefronts for this wave as it approaches the gap and three  more wavefronts as the wave continues beyond it.  [3] fig. 6.2",
            "11": "11 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) table  6.1 shows 5 different types of electromagnetic wave.   in the blank column in table  6.1, write the numbers 1 to 5 to show the order of wavelength.  write  1 for the wave with the shortest wavelength and 5 for the wave with the longest  wavelength.  [2] table 6.1 type of electromagnetic wave order of wavelength gamma rays light microwaves ultraviolet x\u2011rays  (c) (i) state the speed of radio waves in air.  .  [1]   (ii) a radio station transmits radio waves with a frequency of 96  mhz.    calculate the wavelength of these radio waves.  wavelength =  .  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "13": "13 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 shows light approaching a boundary between two materials at speed v. the speed of the  light after crossing the boundary is 1.3 v. 50\u00b0light boundary fig. 7.1  (a) determine the angle of incidence.  angle of incidence =  .  [1]  (b) calculate the angle of refraction.  angle of refraction =  .  [3]  [total: 4]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 8 fig. 8.1 shows a 240  v mains supply connected to an air\u2011conditioning unit and a freezer. a fuse x  is placed in the circuit as shown. freezerair-conditioning unitx 240  v mains supply fig. 8.1  the freezer has an operating power of 700  w.  (a) calculate the current in the freezer.  current =  .  [2]  (b) the maximum operating current of the air\u2011conditioning unit is 7.5  a.   fuses of current rating 1  a, 3 a, 5 a, 10  a, 13  a and 30  a are available.   suggest a suitable rating for fuse x. give two reasons for your answer. fuse rating  . reason 1  ..  ...  ... reason 2  ..  ...  .  [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) a fuse is made out of a short length of wire.   explain why fuses of a higher rating are made of thicker wire.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (d) electrical energy can be obtained from renewable and non\u2011renewable sources of energy.   (i) state two renewable sources of energy.    source 1     source 2   [2]   (ii) state one social, economic or environmental disadvantage of one of your answers to  (d)(i) .  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "16": "16 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows an electrical component. fig. 9.1 state the name of the component shown in fig.  9.1.  .  [1]  (b) in the space below, write down the truth table for a nor gate.  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) fig. 9.2 shows the connections between two logic gates. a b ced fig. 9.2   complete the truth table shown in table  9.1 for this combination of logic gates. table 9.1 inputs intermediate  pointoutput a b c d e 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1  [3]  (d) referring to a simple electron model, state what distinguishes electrical conductors from  electrical insulators.  ...  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 10 fig. 10.1 shows a simple alternating current generator. outputcoilrotation of coil n s p q fig. 10.1  (a) on fig.  10.2, sketch a graph to show how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced varies with  time for one revolution of the coil. assume that the coil starts in the horizontal position, as  shown in fig.  10.1.   label the points on the time axis where the coil has completed 1/4 revolution and  3/4 revolution.  [3] timee.m.f. 00 fig. 10.2  (b) explain why an e.m.f. is induced only when the coil is turning.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "19": "19 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) state the name of the components labelled p and q and state their purpose. name:  ... purpose:  ...  .  [2]  (d) state two possible changes that cause a larger e.m.f. to be induced. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "20": "20 0625/43/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third \u2011party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer \u2011related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) americium (am) is a radioactive isotope. a nucleus of americium contains 95 protons and  146 neutrons. it decays by emitting an \u03b1\u2011particle to form a nucleus of an isotope of neptunium  (np).   write down the nuclide equation for the decay of americium to neptunium.  [4]  (b) ionisation smoke detectors contain americium and two small electrodes with a small voltage  between them. the air between the electrodes is ionised by \u03b1\u2011particles so that there is a  small electric current between the electrodes.   (i) suggest and explain the effect of smoke on the current between the electrodes in the  smoke detector. suggestion:  ...  ... explanation:  ..  .  [1]   (ii) suggest two reasons for using an \u03b1\u2011particle emitter in a smoke detector. reason 1  ...  ... reason 2  ...  .  [2]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (kn/fc) 171384/3 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *3276272928* physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20  minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15  minutes on question  4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. 90.0  cm mark50.0  cm mark metre rule 0 100bench pivotp a b fig. 1.1  (a) place the metre rule on the pivot. place the load p with its centre on the metre rule at the  90.0 cm mark. keeping the load p at the 90.0  cm mark, adjust the position of the metre rule on  the pivot so that the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.   measure, and record in the first row of table 1.1, the distance a from the 90.0  cm mark to the  pivot.   measure, and record in the first row of table 1.1, the distance b from the pivot to the 50.0  cm  mark.   repeat the steps above, placing the centre of the load p at the 85.0  cm, 80.0  cm, 75.0  cm and  70.0 cm marks. record all values of a and b in table 1.1. table 1.1 a / cm b / cm    [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). you do not need to begin your axes at  the origin (0, 0).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [1]  (d) calculate the weight w of the metre rule using the equation w = g \u00d7 p, where p = 1.0  n.  w =    [1]  (e) suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain accurate readings for a and b in this  type of experiment.  ...  .  [1]  (f)  use the balance provided to measure the mass of the metre rule.  mass =    [1]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 in this experiment, you will determine the resistance of a resistance wire.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. power supply sliding contact cresistance wiremetre rule 100l b va fig. 2.1  (a) (i) switch on.    measure the current i in the circuit.  i =    [1]    (ii)  place the sliding contact c at a distance l = 20.0  cm from b.    measure, and record in table 2.1, the potential difference v across the length l of the  resistance wire.    calculate, and record in table 2.1, v l .    repeat the procedure using l values of 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm.    switch off. table 2.1 l / cm v / vv lv  cm  20.0  40.0  60.0  80.0 100.0  [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) look carefully at the values of v l in table 2.1.   (i)  tick the box to show your conclusion from the results.     v l  is approximately constant.     v l  is decreasing as v increases.     v l  is increasing as v increases.     there is no simple pattern for v l  in the results.     [1]   (ii)  justify your conclusion by reference to your results.  ...  .  [1]  (c) calculate the resistance of 100  cm of the resistance wire using the equation r = v i , where v  is the potential difference across 100  cm of the resistance wire. use the value of current i from  part (a)(i) . give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment  and include the unit.  r =    [3]  (d) in this type of experiment, it is sensible to keep the temperature of the resistance wire as  close to room temperature as possible. suggest one way to minimise the rise in temperature  of the resistance wire.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3  in this experiment, you will investigate the rate of cooling of water under different conditions. a  greater rate of cooling occurs if there is a greater change in the temperature during the same  period of time.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. you are provided with a beaker labelled a  and a can labelled b. thermometer clamp stand benchbeaker ahot waterlid fig. 3.1  (a) use the thermometer to measure room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =    [1]  (b) pour 200  cm3 of hot water into beaker a. place the lid on the beaker and place the thermometer  in the beaker, as shown in fig. 3.1.   record in table 3.1 the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water at time t = 0. immediately start the  stopclock.   after 30  s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time t = 30  s  and the temperature reading in table 3.1.   continue recording the time and the temperature readings every 30  s until you have six sets  of readings.  [3]      table 3.1  table 3.2 beaker a can b t\u200a\u2009/\u2009\u200as \u03b8\u200a\u2009/\u2009\u200a\u00bac t\u200a\u2009/\u2009\u200as \u03b8\u200a\u2009/\u2009\u200a\u00bac",
            "7": "7 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) pour 200  cm3 of hot water into can b. place the lid on the can and place the thermometer in  the can.   record in table 3.2 the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water at time t = 0. immediately start the  stopclock.   after 30  s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time t = 30  s  and the temperature reading in table 3.2.   continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30  s until you have six sets of  readings.    [2]  (d)  look carefully at the readings in table 3.1 and in table 3.2.   (i)  tick the box to show your conclusion from the readings.     the water in the beaker has a greater rate of cooling than the water in the can.     the water in the beaker has a smaller rate of cooling than the water in the can.      there is no significant difference between the rates of cooling of the water in the  beaker and the can.    [1]   (ii)  justify your conclusion by reference to your readings.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (e) a student in another school carries out the experiment and reports that the rate of cooling of  the water in the can is different from the rate of cooling of the water in the beaker. he plans a  change to the experiment to find out whether this difference in the rates of cooling is caused  by  \u2022 the matt black surface of the can being a better radiator of thermal energy than the shiny  surface of the beaker \u2022 the metal of the can being a better conductor of thermal energy than the material of the  beaker.   suggest two suitable changes to the apparatus that the student could make. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4  a student is investigating the work required to pull a box containing some masses up a sloping  wooden board. fig. 4.1 shows the board and the box.  plan an experiment to investigate how the work required to pull the box up the slope depends on  the mass of the box and its contents.   work done is calculated using the equation:   work done = force \u00d7 distance moved in the direction of the force.  you are not required to carry out this experiment.  the following apparatus is available to the students:   a wooden board   a box with a length of string attached   a selection of masses that fit in the box   a metre rule   an electronic balance.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any other apparatus that you would use \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion.  you may add to the diagram if it helps your explanation. string wooden boardbox masses fig. 4.1",
            "9": "9 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [7]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/51/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (ks/sg) 171386/5 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *7592061561*cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 in this experiment, you will investigate moments using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. metre rule 100 0bench pivotp q a wb fig. 1.1  (a) place the metre rule on the pivot, without the loads p and q, and adjust its position so that the  metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced. the rule must remain at this position  on the pivot throughout the experiment .   place the load p on the metre rule so that the edge  that is furthest from the pivot is exactly at  the 10.0  cm mark on the rule.    record in table 1.1, the distance a between this edge  of the load p and the pivot, as shown  in fig. 1.1.   place the load q on the metre rule and adjust the position of load q so that the metre rule is  as near as possible to being balanced.    determine the distance b between the centre  of load q and the pivot, as shown in fig.  1.1.  record the distance b in table 1.1.   repeat the procedure, with the edge  of the load p that is furthest from the pivot at the 15.0  cm,  20.0 cm, 25.0  cm and 30.0  cm marks. record all the readings in table 1.1. table 1.1 a / cm b / cm  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [2]  (d) determine the intercept c on the y-axis of the graph. this is the value of a when b = 0.  c =    [1]  (e) measure the width w of the load p .  w =    [1]  (f) suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain accurate values for a and b.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the rate of cooling of water under different conditions. a  greater rate of cooling occurs if there is a greater change in the temperature during the same  period of time.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1 and fig. 2.2.  beaker a has a lid. beaker b is on a mat made of the same material as the lid. the mat and the lid  have the same thickness. thermometer beaker alidclamp stand bench fig. 2.1 thermometer beaker b matclamp stand bench fig. 2.2",
            "5": "5 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (a) use the thermometer to measure room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =    [1]  (b) pour 200  cm3 of hot water into beaker a. place the lid on the beaker and place the thermometer  in the beaker, as shown in fig. 2.1.   record in table 2.1 the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water at time t = 0.  immediately start the  stopclock.   after 30  s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time t = 30 s  and the temperature reading in table 2.1.   continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30  s until you have six sets of  readings in table 2.1.  [3] table 2.1 table 2.2 beaker a, with lid beaker b, on mat t / s \u03b8\u2009/ \u00b0c t / s \u03b8\u2009/ \u00b0c  (c) pour 200  cm3 of hot water into beaker b. check that the beaker is on the mat and place the  thermometer in the beaker, as shown in fig. 2.2. do not use the lid.   record in table 2.2 the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water at time t = 0.  immediately start the  stopclock.   after 30  s, measure the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. record the time t = 30 s  and the temperature reading in table 2.2.   continue recording the time and temperature readings every 30  s until you have six sets of  readings in table 2.2.  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (d) look carefully at the readings in table 2.1 and in table 2.2.    (i) tick the box to show your conclusion from the readings.      the lid reduces the rate of cooling of the water significantly more than the mat  reduces the rate of cooling of the water.      the mat reduces the rate of cooling of the water significantly more than the lid  reduces the rate of cooling of the water.      there is no significant difference between the lid and the mat in reducing the  rate of cooling of the water.  [1]   (ii) justify your conclusion by reference to your readings.  ...  ...    [2]  (e) a student plans to repeat the experiment using the same apparatus and the same volume of  water. suggest one change to the procedure that would decrease the rate of cooling of the  water.  ...  .  [1]  (f) state one precaution that you took in order to record accurate temperature readings.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 3 in this experiment, you will investigate resistance.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been set up for you.  power supply va p l fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on. measure and record the potential difference v1 across the resistor p and the  current i1 in the circuit. switch off.  v1 =  ..  i1 =  ..  [2]   (ii) calculate  the resistance r1 of the resistor p  using the equation r1 = v1 i1.  r1 =    [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) disconnect the voltmeter.    connect the voltmeter across the lamp l. switch on.    measure and record the potential difference v2 across the lamp l. switch off.  v2 =  ..   calculate the resistance r2 of the lamp l  using the equation r2 = v2 i1.  r2 =    [1]  (c) disconnect the voltmeter. replace the  resistor p with the  resistor q.   connect the voltmeter across the resistor q. switch on.   measure and record the potential difference v3 across the resistor q and the current i2 in the  circuit. switch off.  v3 =  ..  i2 =  ..   calculate the resistance r3 of the resistor q using the equation r3 = v3 i2.  r3 =    [1]  (d) disconnect the voltmeter.    connect the voltmeter across the lamp l. switch on.    measure and record the potential difference v4 across the lamp l. switch off.  v4 =  ..   calculate the resistance r4 of the lamp l  using the equation r4 = v4 i2.  r4 =    [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (e) state whether your results suggest that resistor p and resistor q have the same value of  resistance, within the limits of experimental accuracy. justify your statement by reference to  your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]  (f) complete the circuit diagram in fig. 3.2 to show that:  \u2022 the two resistors and the lamp are all connected in parallel \u2022 the voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the resistors and  the lamp   you are not required to set up this circuit. a fig. 3.2  [2]  (g) state the name of the circuit component that you would add to the circuit you have drawn to  control the current in the circuit.  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 a student is investigating the relationship between the thickness of a converging (convex) lens  and its focal length. fig. 4.1 shows the cross-section of a converging lens.  the focal length f of a lens can be calculated if u (the distance between the object and the lens)  and v (the distance between the lens and the image on a screen) are known.  the equation is:  f =()uvuv + t fig. 4.1  plan an experiment to investigate the relationship between the thickness t and the focal length f of  converging lenses. you may add to fig. 4.1 as part of your answer. you are not required to carry  out this experiment.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   illuminated object   selection of lenses of different thicknesses and a lens holder   screen   metre rule   30 cm ruler   two rectangular wooden blocks with the longest sides longer than the diameter of the lenses.   in your plan, you should: \u2022 draw a diagram to show the arrangement of the apparatus, labelling u and v \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take \u2022 explain briefly how you would determine the thickness t of each lens (you may draw a diagram  if it helps your explanation) \u2022 draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you do not need to use the equation to calculate focal length).",
            "11": "11 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "*5629887572*cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (nf/cgw) 171388/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn overphysics  0625/53 paper 5  practical test  may/june 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 in this experiment, you will determine the mass of a block u by a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. metre ruleblock ublock m pivotb a 50.0  cm mark 0.0 cm markbench fig. 1.1  (a) place the metre rule with the pivot below the 50.0  cm mark. the pivot must stay in this  position for the duration of the experiment.   place block u on the metre rule with its centre at the 5.0  cm mark.   place block m on the metre rule on the other side of the pivot as shown in fig. 1.1. adjust the  position of block m until the metre rule is as near to being balanced as possible.   the distance a between the centre of block u and the 50.0  cm mark has been recorded in  table 1.1.   in table 1.1, record the position of block m.   calculate the distance b between the centre of block u and the centre of block m, using the  equation: b = (position of block m  \u2013 position of block u).   repeat the procedure for positions of block u at the 10.0  cm, 15.0  cm, 20.0  cm and 25.0  cm  marks. table 1.1 position of  block u  / cma / cmposition of  block m  / cmb / cm 5.0 45.0 10.0 40.0 15.0 35.0 20.0 30.0 25.0 25.0 [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of  b / cm (y-axis) against a / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start the axis at the  origin (0,0). [4]  (c) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [1]   (ii) calculate the mass mu of block u using the equation mu = (g \u2013 1) \u00d7 k, where k = 200 g.    record the value of mu to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  mu =    [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (d) describe why it is difficult to place the block u at the correct mark on the metre rule each  time. explain how you overcame this difficulty. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (e) it is difficult to balance the metre rule in this type of experiment.   describe how to adjust the position of block m on the metre rule until the metre rule is as  close to balance as possible.   you may draw a diagram if it helps your explanation.  ...  ...  .  [1] [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the transfer of thermal energy between hot water in a  beaker and cold water in a glass tube.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. beakerthermometers glass tube clamp stand bench fig. 2.1   the glass tube must remain in the clamp throughout the experiment.  (a) use one of the thermometers to measure the room temperature \u03b8r.  \u03b8r =    [1]  (b) pour 50  cm3 of cold water into the glass tube.   pour 300  cm3 of hot water into the beaker.   in the first row of table 2.1, for t = 0, record the temperature \u03b8c of the water in the glass tube  and the temperature \u03b8h of the water in the beaker.   place the glass tube in the beaker and immediately start the stopclock.   record, in table 2.1, the temperatures \u03b8c of the water in the glass tube and the temperatures  \u03b8h of the water in the beaker at times  t = 30 s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s, 150  s and 180  s. [3]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 table 2.1 glass tube beaker t / \u03b8c / \u03b8h / 0  (c) complete the headings and the time column in the table.  [2]  (d) (i) state what you expect the temperature of the water in the glass tube will be when \u03b8c  stops rising.    justify your answer by reference to your readings. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]   (ii) state what you expect the temperature \u03b8h of the water in the beaker will be after a few  hours.  \u03b8h =    [1]  (e) suggest two changes that could be made to the apparatus or the procedure to ensure that  the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water in the glass tube rises more quickly. 1.  ...  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 3 in this experiment, you will investigate a circuit containing different resistors.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. apower supply x y z v fig. 3.1  (a) switch on.   measure, and record in table 3.1, the current i in the circuit.   use the voltmeter to measure and record the potential difference v across resistor x. table 3.1 resistor combinationi / v / r / x x and y x, y and z [1]  (b) disconnect the voltmeter.   connect the voltmeter to measure the potential difference v across the combination of  resistors x and y.   measure, and record in table 3.1, the current i in the circuit and the potential difference v  across the combination of resistors x and y. [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) (i) disconnect the voltmeter.    connect the voltmeter to measure the potential difference v across the combination of  resistors x, y and z.    measure, and record in table 3.1, the current i in the circuit and the potential difference  v across the combination of resistors x, y and z.    switch off.    complete the headings in table 3.1.  [1]   (ii) a student suggests that the current should remain constant when the voltmeter is used  to measure potential differences across the different combinations of resistors.    state whether your readings support this suggestion.    justify your answer by reference to your readings. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [1]  (d) (i) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance r of each combination of resistors.    use your readings from table 3.1 and the equation r = v i . [2]   (ii) for resistors in series, the total resistance of the combination is the sum of the individual  resistances.    use your results from table 3.1 to calculate the resistances ry and rz of resistors y   and z.  ry =  ..  rz =  .. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (e) the circuit components are to be rearranged so that \u2022 resistors x, y and z are in parallel \u2022 the ammeter will measure the current in the circuit \u2022 the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across the resistors.   in the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit. [2]  (f) set up the circuit as described in (e).   switch on. measure and record the current ip in the circuit and the potential difference vp  across the resistors.  ip =  ..  vp =  ..   switch off.   calculate the resistance rp of the resistors in parallel. use your readings and the    equation  rp = vp ip .  rp =  .. [2] [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 a student wants to investigate the factors that affect the height to which a ball bounces when it is  dropped.  plan an experiment that will enable him to investigate in detail how the height from which a ball is  dropped affects how high it bounces.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes:   balls of different materials and sizes   sheets of different floor coverings.  write a plan for the experiment.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the experiment \u2022 describe a precaution which could be taken to ensure that measurements of the height of  bounce are reliable \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings   (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you could analyse your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (sc/sw) 171390/3 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *3954095811* physics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2019  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a student is determining the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. 90.0  cm mark50.0  cm mark metre rule 0 100 bench pivotp a b fig. 1.1  the student places the metre rule on the pivot. he places the load p on the metre rule at the  90.0 cm mark. keeping load p at the 90.0  cm mark, he adjusts the position of the metre rule on the  pivot so that the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced.  he records the distance a from the 90.0  cm mark to the pivot.  he records the distance b from the pivot to the 50.0  cm mark.  he repeats the steps, placing the load p at the 85.0  cm, the 80.0  cm, the 75.0  cm and the 70.0  cm  marks.  the readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 a / cm b / cm 21.0 19.1 18.0 17.2 16.0 14.1 13.0 11.8 10.5 9.5",
            "3": "3 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (a) plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). you do not need to begin your axes at  the origin (0,0).  [4]  (b) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [2]  (c) calculate the weight w1 of the metre rule using the equation w1 = g \u00d7 p, where p = 1.0  n.  w1 =    [2]  (d) suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain accurate readings for a and b in this  type of experiment.  ...  .  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (e) the student measures the mass of the rule on a balance. write down the mass m shown on  the balance in fig. 1.2 to the nearest gram. grammetre rule fig. 1.2  m =  .  g [1]  (f) (i) calculate the weight w2 of the metre rule using the equation w2 = mg, where  g = 10.0 n / kg.  w2 =    n [1]   (ii) state and explain whether this value of w2 can be considered equal to the value of w1  obtained in part (c) within the limits of experimental accuracy.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 12]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 a student is determining the resistance of a resistance wire.  the circuit is shown in fig. 2.1. power supply sliding contact cresistance wirel b va fig. 2.1  (a) record the current i in the circuit, as shown on the ammeter in fig. 2.2. 00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0 fig. 2.2  i =    [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) the student places the sliding contact c at a distance l = 20.0  cm from b.   she records the potential difference v across the length l of the resistance wire.   she repeats the procedure using l values of 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm. all the  readings are shown in table 2.1.   calculate, and record in table 2.1, v l for each value of l.   complete the v l column heading. table 2.1 l / cm v / v v l / 20.0 0.50 40.0 0.92 60.0 1.62 80.0 2.08 100.0 2.40  [3]  (c) look carefully at the values of v l in table 2.1.   (i) tick the box to show your conclusion from the results.     v l is approximately constant.     v l is decreasing as v increases.     v l is increasing as v increases.     there is no simple pattern for v l in the results.  [1]   (ii) justify your conclusion by reference to your results.  ...  .  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d) calculate the resistance of 100  cm of the resistance wire using the equation r = v i, where     v is the potential difference across 100  cm of the resistance wire. use the value of current i  from part (a). give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment  and include the unit.  r =    [3]  (e) in this type of experiment, it is sensible to keep the temperature of the resistance wire as  close to room temperature as possible. suggest one way to minimise the rise in temperature  of the resistance wire.  ...  .  [1]  (f) draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor.  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 a student is investigating the rate of cooling of water under different conditions. a greater rate of  cooling occurs if there is a greater change in the temperature during the same period of time.  fig. 3.1 shows some of the apparatus. thermometer clamp stand bench beakerhot waterlid fig. 3.1  (a) the thermometer in fig.  3.2 shows the room temperature \u03b8r at the beginning of the  experiment. record \u03b8r. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 3.2  \u03b8r =    [1]  (b) the student pours 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker.   she records the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water at time t = 0. she immediately starts a  stopclock.   she continues recording the time and the temperature readings every 30  s. the readings are  shown in table 3.1.",
            "9": "9 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  table 3.1  table 3.2  beaker  can t / \u03b8 / 0 93 30 91 60 90 90 89 120 88 150 87t / \u03b8 / 0 94 30 93 60 92 90 91 120 90 150 89   the student repeats the procedure using a metal can, painted matt black, in place of the  beaker.   the readings are shown in table 3.2.   (i) complete the column headings in table 3.1 and in table 3.2.  [1]   (ii) look carefully at the readings in table 3.1 and in table 3.2.    tick the box to show your conclusion from the readings.     the water in the beaker has a greater rate of cooling than the water in the can.     the water in the beaker has a smaller rate of cooling than the water in the can.     there is no significant difference between the rates of cooling of the water in  the beaker and the can.  [1]   (iii) justify your conclusion by reference to the readings.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) a student in another school carries out the experiment and reports that the rate of cooling of  the water in the can is different from the rate of cooling of the water in the beaker. he plans a  change to the experiment to find out whether this difference in the rates of cooling is caused  by \u2022 the matt black surface of the can being a better radiator of thermal energy than the shiny  surface of the beaker \u2022 the metal of the can being a better conductor of thermal energy than the material of the  beaker.    (i) suggest two suitable changes to the apparatus that the student could make. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]   (ii) suggest two variables that should be controlled in order to make the experiment a fair  test. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (d) state one precaution that you would take in order to record accurate temperature readings.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4 a student is investigating the work required to pull a box containing some masses up a sloping  wooden board. fig. 4.1 shows the board and the box.  plan an experiment to investigate how the work required to pull the box up the slope depends on  the mass of the box and its contents.  work done is calculated using the equation:   work done = force \u00d7 distance moved in the direction of the force.  the following apparatus is available to the students:   a wooden board   a box with a length of string attached   a selection of masses that fit in the box   a metre rule   an electronic balance.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any other apparatus that you would use \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion.  you may add to the diagram if it helps your explanation. string wooden boardbox masses fig. 4.1",
            "12": "12 0625/61/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (sc/cb) 171391/5 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *3230481029* physics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2019  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a student is investigating moments using a balancing method.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. benchmetre rule p qa b w100 0 pivot fig. 1.1  (a) the student places the metre rule, without the loads, on the pivot and adjusts its position  so that the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced. she keeps the rule at this  position on the pivot throughout the experiment.   explain briefly why this position on the pivot may not be exactly at the 50.0  cm mark of the  rule.  ...  .  [1]  (b) she places a load p on the metre rule so that the edge  that is furthest from the pivot is exactly  at the 10.0  cm mark on the rule.   she measures the distance a between this edge  of the load p and the pivot, as shown in  fig. 1.1.   she places a load q on the metre rule and adjusts the position of load q so that the metre  rule is as near as possible to being balanced.   she measures the distance b between the centre  of load q and the pivot, as shown in  fig. 1.1.   she repeats the procedure, with the edge  of the load p that is furthest from the pivot at the  15.0 cm, 20.0  cm, 25.0  cm and 30.0  cm marks. all the readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 a / cm b / cm 38.0 44.5 33.0 38.5 28.0 33.6 23.0 27.2 18.0 22.0",
            "3": "3 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   plot a graph of a / cm (y-axis) against b / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).   [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [2]  (d) determine the intercept c on the x-axis of the graph. this is the value of b when a = 0.  c =    [1]  (e) on fig. 1.2, measure the width w of the load p. wp fig. 1.2  w =    [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (f) another student suggests that the value of the intercept c should be equal to half the width  w of the load p. state whether the results support the suggestion. justify your answer by  reference to the results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]  (g) suggest one practical reason why it is difficult to obtain accurate values for a and for b.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 12]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 a student is investigating the rate of cooling of water under different conditions. a greater rate of  cooling occurs if there is a greater change in the temperature during the same period of time.  fig. 2.1 and fig. 2.2 show the apparatus used.  beaker a has a lid. beaker b is on a mat made of the same material as the lid. the mat and the lid  have the same thickness. thermometer beaker alid fig. 2.1 thermometer beaker b mat fig. 2.2  (a) the thermometer in fig. 2.3 shows the room temperature \u03b8r at the beginning of the  experiment. record \u03b8r. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 2.3  \u03b8r =    [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) the student pours 200  cm3 of hot water into beaker a. he places the lid on the beaker and  places the thermometer in the beaker, as shown in fig. 2.1.   he records the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water at time t = 0. he immediately starts the  stopclock.   he records the time and temperature readings every 30  s until he has six sets of readings.   he repeats the procedure using beaker b. this beaker is on a mat but has no lid.   all the readings are shown in table 2.1 and table 2.2.  table 2.1  table 2.2   beaker a, with lid t / \u03b8 / 0 81 30 80 60 79 90 78 120 77 150 76beaker b, on a mat t / \u03b8 / 0 83 30 82 60 80 90 79 120 78 150 77   (i) complete the column headings in table 2.1 and in table 2.2.  [1]   (ii) look carefully at the readings in table 2.1 and in table 2.2.    tick the box to show your conclusion from the readings.      the lid reduces the rate of cooling of the water significantly more than the mat  reduces the rate of cooling of the water.      the mat reduces the rate of cooling of the water significantly more than the lid  reduces the rate of cooling of the water.      there is no significant difference between the lid and the mat in reducing the  rate of cooling of the water.  [1]   (iii) justify your conclusion by reference to the readings.  ...  .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) a student plans to repeat the experiment using the same apparatus and the same volume  of water. suggest one change to the procedure that will decrease the rate of cooling of the  water.  ...  .  [1]  (d) state one precaution that you must take in order to record accurate temperature readings.  ...  .  [1]  (e) suggest two variables that must be controlled in order to make the experiment a fair test. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (f) it is important to view a measuring cylinder correctly to obtain an accurate value of the volume  of a liquid. tick the box that gives the best description of how to read a measuring cylinder.    the line of sight should be along the scale.    the line of sight should be vertical.    the line of sight should be at right-angles to the scale.    the line of sight should be parallel to the scale.  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 a student is investigating electrical resistance.  she uses the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. apower supply p l v fig. 3.1  (a) write down the readings shown on the meters in figs. 3.2 and 3.3.  v1 =  ..  i1 =  ..  [2] 01357 924 6 v8 10 fig. 3.2 00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0 fig. 3.3",
            "9": "9 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) calculate the resistance r1 of the resistor p using the equation r1 = v1 i1.  r1 =    [1]  (c) the student connects the voltmeter across the lamp l.    she records the potential difference v2 across the lamp l.  2.4 v v2 =  ..   calculate the resistance r2 of the lamp l using the equation r2 = v2 i1.  r2 =    [1]  (d) the student replaces the resistor p with the resistor q.   she records the potential difference v3 across the resistor q and the current i2 in the circuit.   3.5 v v3 =  ..  0.31 a i2 =  ..   (i) calculate the resistance r3 of the resistor q using the equation r3 = v3 i2.  r3 =    [1]   (ii) state whether the results r1 and r3 suggest that resistor p and resistor q have the same  value of resistance, within the limits of experimental accuracy. justify your statement by  reference to your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (e) the student connects the voltmeter across the lamp l.   she records the potential difference v4 across the lamp l.  2.5 v v4 =  ..   she calculates the resistance r4 of the lamp l.  8.1 \u03c9 r4 =  ..   she suggests that the change in resistance of the lamp from part (c) is due to a change in  temperature of the lamp filament. suggest an observation that she could make to confirm that  the temperature of the lamp filament changes.  .  [1]  (f) complete the circuit diagram in fig. 3.4 to show that: \u2022 the two resistors and the lamp are all connected in parallel \u2022 the voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the resistors and  the lamp. a fig. 3.4  [2]  (g) state the name of the circuit component that you would add to the circuit you have drawn to  control the current in the circuit.   .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4 a student is investigating the relationship between the thickness of a converging (convex) lens  and its focal length. fig. 4.1 shows the cross-section of a converging lens.  the focal length f of a lens can be calculated if u (the distance between the object and the lens)  and v (the distance between the lens and the image on a screen) are known.   the equation is:  f = uv (u + v) t fig. 4.1  plan an experiment to investigate the relationship between the thickness t and the focal length f of  converging lenses. you may add to fig. 4.1 as part of your answer.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   illuminated object   selection of lenses of different thicknesses and a lens holder   screen   metre rule   30 cm ruler   two rectangular wooden blocks with the longest sides longer than the diameter of the lenses.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 draw a diagram to show the arrangement of the apparatus, labelling u and v \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take \u2022 explain briefly how you would determine the thickness t of each lens (you may draw a diagram  if it helps your explanation) \u2022 draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you do not need to use the equation to calculate focal length).",
            "12": "12 0625/62/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]   [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s19_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 12 printed pages. dc (lk/cb) 171392/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *0164169978* physics  0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical  may/june 2019  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 some students are determining the mass of a block u by a balancing method.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. block ublock m metre rule pivotb a 50.0  cm mark fig. 1.1  (a) one student places the metre rule on the pivot at the 50.0  cm mark and then places block u  with its centre at the 5.0  cm mark.   suggest why it might be difficult to place block u accurately at the 5.0  cm mark. explain how  the student could overcome this difficulty. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (b) (i) the student places block m on the metre rule as shown in fig. 1.1 and adjusts the  position of block m until the metre rule is as near to being balanced as possible.    briefly describe a method to find the position at which the metre rule is as near to being  balanced as possible.   ...  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (ii) the student determines the distance a between the centre of block u and the pivot. he  also determines the distance b between the centre of block u and the centre of block m.    he repeats the procedure for positions of block u at the 10.0  cm, 15.0  cm, 20.0  cm and  25.0 cm marks.    his results are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 position of  block u  / cma / cm b / cm 5.0 45.0 65.5 10.0 40.0 59.0 15.0 35.0 51.8 20.0 30.0 45.0 25.0 25.0 38.6    plot a graph of b / cm (y-axis) against a / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start the axes at  the origin (0,0).  [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [1]   (ii) calculate the mass mu of block u using the equation mu = (g \u2013 1) \u00d7 k, where k = 200  g.    record the value of mu to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  mu =    [2]  (d) a student suggests that a and b are proportional.   state whether the results support this suggestion.   justify your statement by reference to some results from table 1.1. statement  ..   justification    ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 a student is investigating the transfer of thermal energy between hot water in a beaker and cold  water in a glass boiling tube.  he is using the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1. 10102030405070beakerclamp standthermometers glass boiling tube bench fig. 2.1   (a) record the room temperature \u03b8r, shown on the thermometer in the boiling tube.  \u03b8r =    [1]  (b) the student pours cold water into the boiling tube and hot water into the beaker.   he places the boiling tube into the beaker of hot water.   he then records the temperatures \u03b8c of the water in the boiling tube and the temperatures \u03b8h  of the water in the beaker every 30  s.   his readings are shown in table 2.1.    (i) complete the headings and the time column in table 2.1.  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019   (ii) it is difficult to read both thermometers every 30  s.    describe briefly a technique that would ensure the temperature readings are as accurate  as possible in the experiment.  ...  ...  .  [1] table 2.1 boiling tube beaker difference in  temperature t / \u03b8c / \u03b8h / (\u03b8h - \u03b8c) / 0 19.5 88.5 69.0 31.0 83.0 52.0 39.5 80.0 40.5 47.5 77.5 30.0 54.0 75.5 21.5 59.0 74.0 15.0 63.0 73.0 10.0  (c) write a conclusion stating how the difference in temperature between the cold water and the  hot water affects the rate of heating of the water in the boiling tube.   justify your answer by reference to the readings.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d) (i) state what you expect the temperature in the boiling tube will be when \u03b8c stops rising.    justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]   (ii) state what you predict the temperature \u03b8h of the water in the beaker will be after a few  hours.  \u03b8h =    [1]  (e) suggest two changes that could be made to the apparatus or the procedure to ensure that  the temperature \u03b8c of the cold water in the boiling tube rises more quickly. 1.  ...  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 some students are investigating a circuit containing different resistors.  they are using the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. apower supply x y z fig. 3.1  (a) on fig. 3.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference v  across resistor  x. [1]  (b) a student connects the voltmeter as described in (a) and measures the current i in the circuit  and the potential difference v across resistor x. 00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0  012 3 v4 5     fig. 3.2  fig. 3.3   read, and record in table 3.1, the values of i and v shown on the meters in fig. 3.2 and in  fig. 3.3.",
            "9": "9 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over table 3.1 resistor combinationi / v / r /  x x and y 0.23 3.3 x, y and z 0.21 5.0   the student connects the voltmeter to measure the potential difference v across the  combination of resistors x and y together and then x, y and z together.    her readings are shown in table 3.1.   complete the headings in table 3.1.  [3]  (c) a student suggests that the current should remain constant when the voltmeter is used to  measure potential differences across the different combinations of resistors.   state whether the readings in table 3.1 support this suggestion.   justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [1]  (d) (i) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance r of each combination of resistors.    use the readings from table 3.1 and the equation r = v i.  [2]   (ii) for resistors in series, the total resistance of the combination is the sum of the individual  resistances.     use your results from table 3.1 to calculate the resistances ry and rz of resistors y  and z.      ry =  ..  rz =  ..  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (e) (i) the circuit components are to be rearranged so that \u2022 resistors x, y and z are in parallel \u2022 the ammeter will measure the current in the circuit \u2022 the voltmeter will measure the potential difference across the resistors.    in the space below, draw a diagram of this circuit.  [2]   (ii) one student sets up the circuit as described in (e)(i) .    she measures the current ip in the circuit and the potential difference vp across the  resistors.    she uses these values to calculate the resistance rp of the resistors in parallel.       2.31 rp =  ..  \u03c9    use the student\u2019s result and your result from table 3.1 to compare rp with the resistance  rs of the three resistors connected in series.    tick the box next to the description that most closely matches the results.       rp = rs       rp = 10 rs       10rp = rs       none of these descriptions apply  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4 a student wants to investigate the factors that affect the height to which a ball bounces when it is  dropped.  plan an experiment that will enable him to investigate in detail how the height from which a ball is  dropped affects how high it bounces.  the apparatus available includes:   balls of different materials and sizes    sheets of different floor coverings.  write a plan for the experiment.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the experiment \u2022 describe a precaution which could be taken to ensure that measurements of the height of  bounce are reliable \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you could analyse your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.      ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/63/m/j/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 16 printed pages.  ib19 11_0625_11/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over     *6108751254* cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/11     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19  1 a student measures the volume of a small irregularly-shaped stone.    which apparatus must be used?  a a measuring cylinder containing water and a ruler only  b a measuring cylinder containing water only  c an empty measuring cylinder and a ruler only   d a ruler only      2 the graph shows how the speed of an object changes with time.    12 8 40 02468 1 0speed m  / s time  / s    how far does the object travel in 10 seconds?  a 8 m b 10  m c 40  m d 80  m      3 a car travels at an average speed of 60  km  / h for 15 minutes.    how far does the car travel in 15 minutes?  a 4.0  km b 15  km c 240  km d 900  km     4 which quantity is a force due to a gravitational field?  a density  b mass  c weight  d volume     5 the density of air is 1.2  kg  / m3.    a room has dimensions 5.0  m \u00d7 4.0  m \u00d7 3.0  m.    what is the mass of the air in the room?  a 0.02  kg b 0.10  kg c 50  kg d 72  kg     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19 [turn over  6 a student measures the length of a spring. she then attaches different weights to the spring. she  measures the length of the spring for each weight.    the table shows her results.    weight  / n length  / mm  0 520  1.0 524  2.0 528  3.0 533  4.0 537  5.0 540    what is the extension of the spring with a weight of 3.0  n attached to it?  a 4 mm b 5 mm c 12  mm d 13  mm     7 which statement gives a complete description of any object that is in equilibrium?  a there are no forces acting.  b there is no resultant force.  c there is no resultant force and no resultant turning effect.  d there is no resultant turning effect.    8 the diagram shows a lamp.    lampshade pole basecentre of mass ground     changing which feature increases the stability of the lamp?  a a larger lampshade  b a longer pole  c a heavier base  d a higher centre of mass   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19  9 brakes are used to slow down a moving car.    into which form of energy is most of the ki netic energy converted as the car slows down?  a chemical  b elastic  c thermal  d sound      10 which does not transfer useful energy?  a emitting a sound wave  b measuring a temperature  c passing an electric current  d pushing a box along the floor     11 the power output from solar panels is recorded every day for a month.    the graph shows the output recorded.    123456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 3 1power output day of the month    which conclusion can be drawn from this graph?  a the power output from the solar panels changes from day to day.  b the power output from the solar panels is cheap to produce.  c solar panels create no pollution.  d solar energy is renewable.     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19 [turn over  12 a drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point at one end and a flat surface at the other end.    flat surface sharp point     the pin is pushed into a wooden board.    how do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force on  the flat surface?     force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point  a greater than on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  b greater than on the flat surface less than on the flat surface  c the same as on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  d the same as on the flat surface less than on the flat surface     13 the table shows four forces. each force acts on a different surface.    which row shows the least  pressure?     size of the  force  / n area of the surface  / m2  a 0.30 0.040  b 10 2.0  c 60 15  d 1200 40      14 a test-tube contains 1.0  cm3 of liquid water at 100  \u00b0c. the liquid water boils to form 1600  cm3 of  steam.    what is the reason for the large increase in volume?  a steam molecules are bigger than water molecules.  b the average distance between the molecules is much greater in the steam.  c the molecules do not move until the water turns into a gas.  d there are more steam molecules than there were water molecules.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19  15 which statement about the evaporation of a liquid is correct?  a the least energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid  decreases.  b the least energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid  increases.  c the most energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid  decreases.  d the most energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid  increases.     16 which effect is caused by thermal expansion?  a a metal surface heating up in direct sunlight  b ice-cream melting on a hot day  c a railway track buckling on a hot day  d ice forming on a pond on a cold day    17 a liquid-in-glass thermometer uses a change in a property of a liquid to measure temperature.    which property is used?  a mass  b thermal capacity  c volume  d weight      18 the diagram shows four labelled changes of state between solid, liquid and gas.    solid liquid gasp sq r    which changes need an energy input?  a p and q b q and r c r and s d s and p     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19 [turn over  19 a glass test-tube containing water is heated at the top. the water at the top boils, but the water at  the bottom remains cold.    water test-tube heat     which row explains why the water at the bottom of the test-tube remains cold?     glass water  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     20 in countries where it is usually hot, houses are often painted white.    what is the reason for this?  a white surfaces are good reflectors of radiant energy.  b white surfaces are good transmitters of radiant energy.  c white surfaces are good absorbers of radiant energy.  d white surfaces are good emitters of radiant energy.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19  21 the diagram shows wavefronts on the surface of water, viewed from above.    region 1 region 2deep watershallow wate r     which row is correct for the wavefronts moving from region 1 to region 2?     name of process the speeds of  the wavefronts in  regions 1 and 2 are  a diffraction different  b diffraction the same  c refraction different  d refraction the same     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19 [turn over  22 plane water waves approach a narrow gap in a barrier.    which diagram shows the diffraction pattern that would occur?    a b c d       23 the diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.        which is the actual time?  a 04:15 b 04:45 c 07:15 d 07:45     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19  24 total internal reflection may occur when light reaches an air-glass boundary.    under which conditions is light totally internally reflected?   medium in which light  travels towards the  boundary angle of incidence  a air greater than the critical angle  b air less than the critical angle  c glass greater than the critical angle  d glass less than the critical angle     25 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.    \u03b3-rays x-rays ultraviolet visible light infrared microwavesradio waves increasing ..    a word is missing from the label below the spectrum.    which word is missing?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength      26 a man hears a starting pistol fire 1.5 seconds after he sees a puff of smoke from the pistol. the  sound and the smoke are made at the same time. the starting pistol is 450 metres away from the  man.    what is the speed of sound calculated from this observation?  a 150  m / s b 300  m / s c 330  m / s d 625  m / s     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19 [turn over  27 a student has a bar magnet. he brings the magnet close to an object. the magnet and the object  repel each other.    what must the object be?  a another permanent magnet  b any magnetic material  c a block of wood  d a piece of copper     28 two soft-iron rods are placed end-to-end inside a coil. the coil is connected to a battery.    soft-iron rod soft-iron rodcoil     the connections from the battery to the coil are now reversed.    what happens to the soft-iron rods in each case?     battery connections  as shown battery connections  reversed  a rods attract rods attract  b rods attract rods repel  c rods repel rods attract  d rods repel rods repel    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19  29 a plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth. the rod becomes positively charged.    why has the rod become positively charged?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained neutrons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost neutrons.     30 a teacher asks her class \u201cwhat quantity can be recorded in volts?\u201d.    student 1 says \u201cthe potential difference across a resistor\u201d.    student 2 says \u201cthe rating of a fuse\u201d.    student 3 says \u201cthe electromotive force of a battery\u201d.    which students are correct?  a 1 only b 1 and 2 c 1 and 3 d 2 and 3    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19 [turn over  31 the circuit shows two lamps connected to a d.c. supply.        the same lamps and power supply are arranged in different ways, as shown.    p q r     in which circuits will the lamps be the same brightness as in the original circuit?  a q only b p and q only c p and r only d p, q and r     32 identical resistors are connected together to form arrangements x, y and z.    xy z    what is the correct order of the resistances of the arrangements from the largest to the smallest?  a x \u2192 y \u2192 z  b y \u2192 x \u2192 z  c z \u2192 x \u2192 y  d z \u2192 y \u2192 x     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19   33 a student uses 100  cm of resistance wire xy in a circuit to make a potential divider.    v yx sliding contact l     he changes the length of wire l by moving the sliding contact along the resistance wire.    which graph shows how the voltmeter reading changes as the length of wire l is increased from  zero to 100  cm?    voltmeter reading  / v l / cm0 0a 100voltmeter reading  / v l / cm0 0b 100 voltmeter reading  / v l / cm0 0c 100voltmeter reading  / v l / cm0 0d 100       34 where must a fuse be connected in a mains electric circuit?  a the earth wire only  b the live wire only  c the neutral wire only  d the live wire and the earth wire     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19 [turn over  35 a student investigates the output voltage induced across a coil of wire by a bar magnet.    when will the induced voltage have the greatest value?  a the student slowly moves the bar magnet into the coil of wire.  b the student leaves the bar magnet stationary in the coil of wire.  c the student quickly removes the bar magnet from the coil of wire.  d the student places the bar magnet at rest outside the coil of wire.    36 there is a current in a wire. the direction of the current is out of the page.    which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern produced?    a b c dkey wire carrying a current out of the page       37 which diagram shows a possible structure of a neutral atom?    d cb a key proton neutronelectron  ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/11/o/n/19  38 a nuclide of cobalt contains 27 protons and 32 neutrons.    which symbol represents this nuclide?  a 27 59co  b 32 27co  c 32 59co  d 59 27co       39 an isotope of radon is radioactive. it decays by emitting an \u03b1-particle.    what happens to the nucleus of a radon atom during the emission of the \u03b1-particle?  a it becomes the nucleus of a different isotope of radon with fewer neutrons.  b it becomes the nucleus of a different isotope of radon with more neutrons.  c it becomes the nucleus of an element with a higher proton number.  d it becomes the nucleus of an element with a lower proton number.     40 why are some radioactive sources stored in boxes made from lead?  a lead absorbs emissions from the radioactive sources.  b lead decreases the half-life of radioactive sources.  c lead increases the half-life of radioactive sources.  d lead repels emissions from the radioactive sources.      "
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib19 11_0625_12/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over     *5658967703* cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/12     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  1 a measuring cylinder contains 10  cm3 of water.    a piece of steel is lowered into the measuring cylinder until it is fully submerged. the volume  reading increases to 12  cm3.    a second piece of steel is lowered into the measuring cylinder so that it is also fully submerged.  the volume reading increases to 15  cm3.    which row shows the volumes of the two pieces of steel?     volume of first  piece of steel  / cm3 volume of second  piece of steel  / cm3  a 2 3  b 2 5  c 12 3  d 12 15     2 the graph shows the motion of a car for a five-second period.    speed time  / s0 0 3 5      which row is correct?     the car is at rest at the car is moving at  a constant speed at  a 0.0  s 2.0  s  b 0.0  s 4.0  s  c 4.0  s 0.0  s  d 4.0  s 2.0  s     3 a car travels at an average speed of 60  km  / h for 15 minutes.    how far does the car travel in 15 minutes?  a 4.0  km b 15  km c 240  km d 900  km     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19 [turn over  4 a box is placed on the ground. an upward force of 15  n is needed to lift the box at constant  speed.    which row correctly describes the box?     mass of the box weight of the box  a 1.5  kg 15  n  b 15  n 1.5  kg  c 15  n 150  kg  d 150  kg 15  n     5 the table gives the mass and the volume of three objects p, q and r.    object mass  / g volume  / cm3  p 23 36  q 170 720  r 240 340    which objects can float in a liquid of density 0.85  g / cm3?  a p and q only  b p and r only  c q and r only  d p, q and r    6 a student measures the length of a spring. she then attaches different weights to the spring. she  measures the length of the spring for each weight.    the table shows her results.    weight  / n length  / mm  0 520  1.0 524  2.0 528  3.0 533  4.0 537  5.0 540    what is the extension of the spring with a weight of 3.0  n attached to it?  a 4 mm b 5 mm c 12  mm d 13  mm   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  7 what is the unit of the moment of a force?  a n b n / kg c n / m d n m     8 the diagrams show a block of wood on a frictionless surface. in each diagram, the block has two  forces acting on its sides.    e 2 n2 nf 2 n2  n 2 n2  ng 2 n2  nh     which diagrams show the block in equilibrium?  a e, g and h only  b e and f only  c g and h only  d e, f, g and h      9 brakes are used to slow down a moving car.    into which form of energy is most of the kinetic energy converted as the car slows down?  a chemical  b elastic  c thermal  d sound      10 what is the unit of thermal energy?  a \u00b0c b n c j d w     11 which source of energy is non-renewable?  a oil  b solar  c tidal  d wind    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19 [turn over  12 a drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point at one end and a flat surface at the other end.    flat surface sharp point     the pin is pushed into a wooden board.    how do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force on  the flat surface?     force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point  a greater than on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  b greater than on the flat surface less than on the flat surface  c the same as on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  d the same as on the flat surface less than on the flat surface     13 a metal block of weight w rests on a table. in order to calculate the pressure that the block exerts  on the table, one other quantity must be known.    what is the other quantity?  a the area of contact between the block and the table  b the density of the block  c the mass of the block  d the volume of the block     14 which row describes the arrangement and the motion of the molecules in a gas?     arrangement motion  a far apart move freely  b far apart vibrate only  c tightly packed move freely  d tightly packed vibrate only    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  15 a driver of a car measures the pressure of the air in the tyres. he measures the pressure again  after a long journey. the pressure reading has increased.    which row states what has happened to the speed of the air molecules and the temperature of  the air in the tyres?     speed of molecules temperature  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     16 some water in a glass flask is gently heated.    waterglass flaskglass tube heatwater level in tube     why does the water level in the glass tube rise during heating?  a only the glass flask expands.  b only the water expands.  c the glass flask expands more than the water.  d the water expands more than the glass flask.      17 what is the temperature difference between the fixed points on the \u00b0c temperature scale?  a 10  \u00b0c b 100  \u00b0c c 110  \u00b0c d 120  \u00b0c     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19 [turn over  18 the diagram shows four labelled changes of state between solid, liquid and gas.    solid liquid gasp sq r    which changes need an energy input?  a p and q b q and r c r and s d s and p     19 which method of thermal transfer occurs when the density of some of a liquid decreases and the liquid moves upwards?  a conduction  b convection  c evaporation  d radiation      20 the diagram shows a tent made from a new material.    new material     what type of material should the tent be made of to reflect the radiant energy from the sun?     material  texture material  surface colour  a dull black  b dull white  c shiny black  d shiny white     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  21 which row correctly describes the vibrations of a transverse wave and also gives a correct  example of a transverse wave?     description of vibration example of a  transverse wave  a right-angles to the wave direction sound  b right-angles to the wave direction water wave  c parallel to the wave direction sound  d parallel to the wave direction water wave     22 plane water waves approach a narrow gap in a barrier.    which diagram shows the diffraction pattern that would occur?    a b c d     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19 [turn over  23 a ray of light is incident on a plane mirror. a student measures the angle of incidence i and the  angle of reflection r.    incident rayreflectedrayi r     the student varies the angle of incidence and then plots a graph of r against i.    what does the graph look like?    0 0a r i0 0b r i0 0c r i0 0d r i     24 the diagram shows the path of a ray of green light through a glass prism.    the angle of deviation is the angle between the incident ray and the ray leaving the prism.    angle of deviationincident ray of green lightprism     when a ray of white light is incident on the prism, it separates into the colours of the visible  spectrum.    what is the name of this effect and which colour of light has the smallest angle of deviation?     name of effect colour with smallest  angle of deviation  a diffraction red  b diffraction violet  c dispersion red  d dispersion violet     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  25 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.    \u03b3-rays x-rays ultraviolet visible light infrared microwavesradio waves increasing ..    a word is missing from the label below the spectrum.    which word is missing?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength     26 a man hears a starting pistol fire 1.5 seconds after he sees a puff of smoke from the pistol. the  sound and the smoke are made at the same time. the starting pistol is 450 metres away from the  man.    what is the speed of sound calculated from this observation?  a 150  m / s b 300  m / s c 330  m / s d 625  m / s     27 a bar magnet is slowly moved towards an unmagnetised metal object x.    x n sbar magnet     when it is a few centimetres away, the object begins to slide towards the magnet.    why does this happen?  a x is a non-magnetic material and magnetism is induced in it.  b x is a non-magnetic material and magnetism is not induced in it.  c x is a magnetic material and magnetism is induced in it.  d x is a magnetic material and magnetism is not induced in it.      ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19 [turn over  28 two soft-iron rods are placed end-to-end inside a coil. the coil is connected to a battery.    soft-iron rod soft-iron rodcoil     the connections from the battery to the coil are now reversed.    what happens to the soft-iron rods in each case?     battery connections  as shown battery connections  reversed  a rods attract rods attract  b rods attract rods repel  c rods repel rods attract  d rods repel rods repel      29 a plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth. the rod becomes positively charged.    why has the rod become positively charged?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained neutrons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost neutrons.      30 which quantity has the same unit as potential difference (p.d.)?  a current  b electromotive force (e.m.f.)  c resistance  d moment of a force     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  31 a student determines the resistance of an electric lamp.    he measures the current in the lamp and the potential difference (p.d.) across it.    which circuit did he use?    a va vb a ac d av v      32 identical resistors are connected together to form arrangements x, y and z.    xy z    what is the correct order of the resistances of the arrangements from the largest to the smallest?  a x \u2192 y \u2192 z  b y \u2192 x \u2192 z  c z \u2192 x \u2192 y  d z \u2192 y \u2192 x     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19 [turn over  33 the circuit shows a wire wx connected to a cell.    100  cm wx v    the potential difference (p.d.) between w and x is 1.5  v.    what is the reading on the voltmeter?  a 0.4  v b 0.6  v c 0.9  v d 4.0  v     34 where must a fuse be connected in a mains electric circuit?  a the earth wire only  b the live wire only  c the neutral wire only  d the live wire and the earth wire    35 the n-pole of a magnet is moved into a coil of wire connected to a galvanometer.    n scoil     the needle of the galvanometer moves.    which situation must  give a smaller galvanometer reading?  a use a coil with fewer turns and a stronger magnet.  b use a coil with fewer turns and a weaker magnet.  c use a coil with more turns and a stronger magnet.  d use a coil with more turns and a weaker magnet.    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  36 the diagram shows a conductor carrying current in a direction out of the plane of the page.    which set of arrows represents the direction of the magnetic field due to this current?    a b cdkey wire carrying a current out of the paper      37 the diagrams show the simple atomic structure for two neutral atoms x and y of different  elements.    x y    which row is correct?     atom with  more electrons atom with a more  positively charged nucleus  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  38 a nuclide of chlorine has the symbol shown.    35cl17    what is the nucleon number of this nuclide of chlorine?  a 17 b 18 c 35 d 52    39 which type of radiation can be stopped by a sheet of paper?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d \u03c7-rays     40 why are some radioactive sources stored in boxes made from lead?  a lead absorbs emissions from the radioactive sources.  b lead decreases the half-life of radioactive sources.  c lead increases the half-life of radioactive sources.  d lead repels emissions from the radioactive sources.    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/12/o/n/19  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib19 11_0625_13/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over     *8984949399* cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/13     paper 1  multiple choice (core)  october/november 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not  write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  1 a student uses a ruler to find the volume of water in a tank.    she measures the lengths ef and fg.    efghi j k water     what other length does she need to measure?  a fj b fk c h i d ij     2 an object begins to fall close to the earth\u2019s surface. air resistance can be ignored.    which statement about the object\u2019s acceleration is correct?  a the acceleration is constant.  b the acceleration decreases as the body falls.  c the acceleration increases as the body falls.  d the acceleration is zero.     3 a car travels at an average speed of 60  km  / h for 15 minutes.    how far does the car travel in 15 minutes?  a 4.0  km b 15  km c 240  km d 900  km      4 which equation shows the relationship between the weight w and the mass m of an object?  a w = m g  b w = mg  c w = m + g  d w = g m     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19 [turn over  5 four hollow glass spheres p, q, r and s each have a mass of 72  g.    their volumes are given in the table.     volume  / cm3  p 55  q 65  r 75  s 85    which spheres sink in a liquid of density 0.9  g / cm3?  a p, q and r b q, r and s c r and s only d s only     6 a student measures the length of a spring. she then attaches different weights to the spring. she  measures the length of the spring for each weight.    the table shows her results.    weight  / n length  / mm  0 520  1.0 524  2.0 528  3.0 533  4.0 537  5.0 540    what is the extension of the spring with a weight of 3.0  n attached to it?  a 4 mm b 5 mm c 12  mm d 13  mm    7 the diagram shows a uniform metre rule. the rule is pivoted at its mid-point. a downward force of 4.0  n acts on the rule at the 5  cm mark. the rule is held by a string at the 30  cm mark. the rule is  in equilibrium.    5 4.0 n50100  cm mark 300 cm markmetre rule pivotstring     what is the upward force that the string exerts on the rule?  a 0.67  n b 4.0  n c 6.0  n d 9.0  n ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  8 the diagrams represent the only two forces acting on an object.    which object could be moving to the right at constant speed?    b 1.0 n 1.0  na 1.0 n 1.0  n c 1.0 n 2.0  nd 2.0 n 1.0  n      9 brakes are used to slow down a moving car.    into which form of energy is most of the kinetic energy converted as the car slows down?  a chemical  b elastic  c thermal  d sound     10 three situations are listed.    1 someone blowing air into a party balloon  2 a crane lifting a block of concrete 3 a pile of books at rest on a shelf    in which situations is work being done?  a 1 only b 1 and 2 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19 [turn over  11 a boy lifts a brick from the ground and places it at rest on a higher shelf. he does 30  j of work  against gravity.    which row correctly describes the final energies of the brick?     gravitational potential  energy gained by the brick  / j kinetic energy gained  by the brick  / j  a  0 30  b 15 15  c 30  0  d 27  3     12 a drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point at one end and a flat surface at the other end.    flat surface sharp point     the pin is pushed into a wooden board.    how do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force on  the flat surface?     force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point  a greater than on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  b greater than on the flat surface less than on the flat surface  c the same as on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  d the same as on the flat surface less than on the flat surface     13 pressure is related to force and area.    which situation cannot  be explained using this relationship?  a using a longer spanner than normal to undo a tight nut.  b hammering a nail into a piece of wood.  c tractors using wide tyres in a muddy field.  d a sharp kitchen knife cutting vegetables more easily than a blunt one.    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  14 which row compares the separation and the motion of the molecules of a hot gas with those of a  cool liquid? (both the gas and the liquid are at the same pressure.)     separation motion  a greater for a gas faster for a gas  b greater for a gas slower for a gas  c smaller for a gas faster for a gas  d smaller for a gas slower for a gas     15 a fixed mass of gas is trapped in a container. the temperature of the gas is increased but the volume of the gas is kept constant.    fixed massof gas     how does this change affect the kinetic energy of the molecules and the pressure on the walls of  the container?     kinetic energy pressure  a increases  increases  b stays the same increases  c increases decreases  d decreases increases      16 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    \u2013 1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 1 1 0\u00b0cliquid thread     when the temperature of the thermometer rises, the changes produced cause the liquid thread to  move to the right.    why does this happen when the temperature of the thermometer rises?  a gases contract and liquids expand.  b gases contract and solids expand.  c liquids expand more than gases.  d liquids expand more than solids.   ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19 [turn over  17 a liquid-in-glass thermometer has a range from \u201310  \u00b0c to 110  \u00b0c.    what are the fixed point temperatures used when calibrating this thermometer in \u00b0c?  a \u201310  \u00b0c and 0  \u00b0c  b \u201310  \u00b0c and 110  \u00b0c  c 0 \u00b0c and 100  \u00b0c  d 0 \u00b0c and 110  \u00b0c     18 the diagram shows four labelled changes of state between solid, liquid and gas.    solid liquid gasp sq r    which changes need an energy input?  a p and q b q and r c r and s d s and p     19 a beaker contains some cold water. a purple crystal is placed on the bottom of the beaker. the beaker is gently heated beneath the crystal. the crystal dissolves in the water. the colour spreads, as shown in the diagram.    gentle heat    three students each make a statement about the experiment.    student 1 says the purple water is less dense than the rest of the water.    student 2 says the purple water is warmer than the rest of the water.    student 3 says all of the water will eventually get heated, even though water is a poor conductor of thermal energy.    which students are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  20 why are the outside walls of houses often painted white in very hot countries?  a white surfaces are good absorbers of infrared radiation.  b white surfaces are good emitters of infrared radiation.  c white surfaces are poor absorbers of infrared radiation.  d white surfaces are poor reflectors of infrared radiation.      21 which type of wave is not an example of a transverse wave?    a sound wave  b microwave  c infrared wave  d radio wave    22 plane water waves approach a narrow gap in a barrier.    which diagram shows the diffraction pattern that would occur?    a b c d     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19 [turn over  23 a person stands 1.0  m in front of a plane mirror. the mirror is moved away from the person at a  speed of 1.0  m / s.    which statement is correct?  a the image moves away from the person at a speed of 1.0  m / s.  b the image moves away from the person at a speed of 2.0  m / s.  c the image moves towards the person at a speed of 1.0  m / s.  d the image moves towards the person at a speed of 2.0  m / s.     24 which diagram shows total internal reflection of light by a glass prism?    abc d       25 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.    \u03b3-rays x-rays ultraviolet visible light infrared microwavesradio waves increasing ..    a word is missing from the label below the spectrum.    which word is missing?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength     26 a man hears a starting pistol fire 1.5 seconds after he sees a puff of smoke from the pistol. the  sound and the smoke are made at the same time. the st arting pistol is 450 metres away from the  man.    what is the speed of sound calculated from this observation?  a 150  m / s b 300  m / s c 330  m / s d 625  m / s     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  27 the diagram represents a magnetic field. the field increases in strength from left to right.    p     a small compass is placed at p.    which way will the compass needle point?    na nb nc nd       28 two soft-iron rods are placed end-to-end inside a coil. the coil is connected to a battery.    soft-iron rod soft-iron rodcoil     the connections from the battery to the coil are now reversed.    what happens to the soft-iron rods in each case?     battery connections  as shown battery connections  reversed  a rods attract rods attract  b rods attract rods repel  c rods repel rods attract  d rods repel rods repel     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19 [turn over  29 a plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth. the rod becomes positively charged.    why has the rod become positively charged?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained neutrons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost neutrons.     30 a resistor is connected to a battery. there is a current in the resistor.    what is the main energy change?  a chemical energy is converted into thermal energy.  b chemical energy is converted into  gravitational potential energy.  c nuclear energy is converted into thermal energy.  d nuclear energy is converted into gravitational potential energy.     31 lamps x and y are designed to operate at normal brightness when each are connected to a 3.0  v  supply.    lamp z is designed to operate at normal brightness when connected to a 6.0  v supply.    in which circuit do all three lamps operate at normal brightness?    a b c d 6 v6  v3  v6  v xyz zyx y zx y zx     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  32 identical resistors are connected together to form arrangements x, y and z.    xy z    what is the correct order of the resistances of the arrangements from the largest to the smallest?  a x \u2192 y \u2192 z  b y \u2192 x \u2192 z  c z \u2192 x \u2192 y  d z \u2192 y \u2192 x      33 which circuit shows a variable resistor used to control the brightness of a lamp?    a b c d       34 where must a fuse be connected in a mains electric circuit?  a the earth wire only  b the live wire only  c the neutral wire only  d the live wire and the earth wire     35 a step-up transformer produces a 60  v a.c. output from a 12  v a.c. input.    there are 50 turns on the secondary coil.    how many turns are there on the primary coil?  a 5 b 10 c 50 d 250    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19 [turn over  36 a student uses a balance, a magnet and a power supply to determine the force on a wire in a  magnetic field.    the wire is held between the poles of the magnet.    the student switches on the power supply.    the diagrams show the readings with and without a current in the wire.    108 gn s magnet balancepower supply off 107 gn spower supply on wire no current in wire current in wirewire     the student reverses the current in the wire. the magnitude of the current does not change.   what is the new reading on the balance?  a 106  g b 107  g c 108  g d 109  g     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  37 the diagram represents a neutral atom.    nucleus     which row identifies each type of particle in the diagram?         a electron neutron proton  b electron proton neutron  c neutron electron proton  d proton electron neutron      38 an iron nuclide is represented by the symbol shown.    56 26fe    which statements about a nucleus of this iron nuclide are correct?    1 the nucleus contains 56 neutrons.  2 the nucleon number is 30. 3 the proton number is 26.    a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 3 only    ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  39 three types of radiation that can cause ionisation are \u03b1-, \u03b2- and \u03b3-radiation.    which row identifies the least and the most ionising of these radiations?     least  ionising most  ionising  a \u03b1 \u03b2  b \u03b1 \u03b3  c \u03b3 \u03b2  d \u03b3 \u03b1      40 why are some radioactive sources stored in boxes made from lead?  a lead absorbs emissions from the radioactive sources.  b lead decreases the half-life of radioactive sources.  c lead increases the half-life of radioactive sources.  d lead repels emissions from the radioactive sources.    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/13/o/n/19  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.  ib19 11_0625_21/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over     *8731446642 * cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/21     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  1 a student measures the diameter of a pencil.    which measuring instrument will give the most precise reading?  a a measuring tape  b a metre rule  c a micrometer screw gauge  d a ruler     2 a light object is dropped from rest. it falls a large distance vertically through air.    how can the motion of the object be described?  a constant acceleration  b increasing acceleration  c decreasing acceleration and then moving at terminal velocity  d increasing acceleration and then moving at terminal velocity     3 a car travels at an average speed of 60  km  / h for 15 minutes.    how far does the car travel in 15 minutes?  a 4.0  km b 15  km c 240  km d 900  km      4 which quantity is a force due to a gravitational field?  a density  b mass  c weight  d volume     5 the density of air is 1.2  kg  / m3.    a room has dimensions 5.0  m \u00d7 4.0  m \u00d7 3.0  m.    what is the mass of the air in the room?  a 0.02  kg b 0.10  kg c 50  kg d 72  kg     ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19 [turn over  6 a car is travelling around a circular track at a constant speed, as shown.    in which direction is the resultant force on the car?    d ba c direction of movementcar       7 two forces p and q act on a metre rule as shown. the metre rule is pivoted at one end. the rule  starts to rotate in a clockwise direction.    q pab pivotmetre rule     which statement is correct?  a p equals q  b p is less than q  c (p \u00d7 a) is equal to ( q \u00d7 b)  d (p \u00d7 a) is greater than ( q \u00d7 (a + b))     8 which statement gives a complete description of any object that is in equilibrium?  a there are no forces acting.  b there is no resultant force.  c there is no resultant force and no resultant turning effect.  d there is no resultant turning effect.    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  9 two objects x and y move directly towards each other. the objects have the same mass.    object x has a velocity of 5.0  m / s to the right. object y has a velocity of 3.0  m / s to the left.    5.0 m / s 3.0 m / s xy    object x and object y collide and stick together.    what is their velocity after colliding?  a 1.0  m / s to the left  b 1.0  m / s to the right  c 4.0  m / s to the left  d 4.0  m / s to the right      10 brakes are used to slow down a moving car.    into which form of energy is most of the kinetic energy converted as the car slows down?  a chemical  b elastic  c thermal  d sound     11 a man carries 20 tiles from the ground to the roof of a house. each tile has a mass of 1.2  kg. the  roof of the house is 15  m above the ground.    how much work does the man do against gravity on the tiles in carrying them to the roof?  a 36  j b 180  j c 360  j d 3600  j    12 a car is moving along a straight horizontal road. the car has 1.6  mj of kinetic energy. the car  accelerates for 20  s until the kinetic energy of the car increases to 2.5  mj.    what is the minimum average power developed by the car engine for this acceleration?  a 45  w b 205  w c 45  kw d 205  kw     ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19 [turn over  13 a drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point at one end and a flat surface at the other end.    flat surface sharp point     the pin is pushed into a wooden board.    how do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force on  the flat surface?     force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point  a greater than on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  b greater than on the flat surface less than on the flat surface  c the same as on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  d the same as on the flat surface less than on the flat surface     14 an object is 20  cm below the surface of a liquid. the density of the liquid is 1200  kg  / m3.    what is the pressure on the object due to the liquid?  a 600  pa b 2400  pa c 60  000  pa d 240  000  pa      15 which statement about the evaporation of a liquid is correct?  a the least energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid  decreases.  b the least energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid  increases.  c the most energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid  decreases.  d the most energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid  increases.     16 a bubble of gas is formed deep under water. the bubble has a volume of 40  cm3 and the  pressure inside the bubble is p.    the bubble rises up through the water. the volume of the bubble increases to 56  cm3 and the  pressure becomes 100  kpa. the temperature of the gas does not change.    what is the initial pressure p ?  a 71  pa b 71  kpa c 140  pa d 140  kpa    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  17 which change in the design of a liquid-in-glass thermometer makes it more sensitive?  a a larger liquid reservoir  b a longer tube  c a smaller liquid reservoir  d a wider tube      18 a liquid turns into a gas. this occurs only at one particular temperature, and the change happens throughout the liquid.    what is this process called?  a boiling  b condensation  c evaporation  d fusion     19 one end of a rod of copper is placed in hot water. thermal energy travels along the rod to make the other end warmer.    what is the behaviour of the copper at an atomic level that accounts for most of the transfer of  thermal energy from one end to the other?  a atoms at the hot end gain kinetic energy and move towards the other end.  b atoms at the hot end expand, colliding with other atoms and transferring energy.  c free electrons at the hot end gain energy and move towards the other end, colliding with  atoms along the rod.  d free electrons at the hot end gain energy from the hot water and move directly to the other  end.     20 a surface is made so that it is a good source of infrared radiation.    which surface is not suitable?  a a surface that is painted matt black  b a surface that is painted white   c a surface that is heated to a high temperature  d a surface that has a large surface area     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19 [turn over  21 a large hill blocks the direct path between a transmitter of radio waves and a receiver, as shown.    hilltransmitter receive r     the receiver picks up the signal from the transmitter even though the radio waves do not travel  through the hill.     which row is correct?     a possible way  for this to happen is a stronger signal is  received using  a diffraction round the hill. longer wavelengths.  b diffraction round the hill. shorter wavelengths.  c refraction round the hill. longer wavelengths.  d refraction round the hill. shorter wavelengths.     22 the diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.        which is the actual time?  a 04:15 b 04:45 c 07:15 d 07:45    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  23 a converging lens produces an image of an object o. the focal length of the lens is f.    which position of the object produces a virtual image?    f 2foa f 2fob cf 2fo d f 2fo      24 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.    \u03b3-rays x-rays ultraviolet visible light infrared microwavesradio waves increasing ..    a word is missing from the label below the spectrum.    which word is missing?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19 [turn over  25 which row gives a  possible  set of values for the speed of sound in ice, in water and in steam?        speed of sound in ice m/s     speed of sound in water m/s    speed of sound in steam m/s  a 500 1500 4000  b 1500 4000 500  c 4000 500 1500  d 4000 1500 500      26 a steel bar is placed in an east-west direction for it to be demagnetised. no other magnet is  nearby.    which method is not suitable?  a hammering the bar.  b heating the bar to a very high temperature.  c slowly taking the bar out of a coil that carries an alternating current.   d slowly taking the bar out of a coil that carries a direct current.    27 a plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth. the rod becomes positively charged.    why has the rod become positively charged?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained neutrons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost neutrons.     28 a circuit contains a cell of electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 2.0  v. the current in the circuit is 2.0  a.    how much energy is converted by the cell in 2.0 minutes?  a 2.0  j b 4.0  j c 8.0  j d 480  j    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  29 the circuit diagram shows a cell connected in series to a resistor and a component x.    x     what is component x?  a bell  b diode  c heater  d thermistor    30 identical resistors are connected together to form arrangements x, y and z.    xy z    what is the correct order of the resistances of the arrangements from the largest to the smallest?  a x \u2192 y \u2192 z  b y \u2192 x \u2192 z  c z \u2192 x \u2192 y  d z \u2192 y \u2192 x    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19 [turn over  31 a circuit contains a cell of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 2.0  v, three resistors, three ammeters and  two voltmeters. one ammeter is labelled p and one voltmeter is labelled q.    the readings on the other two ammeters and on the other voltmeter are shown.    aa a 0.50  v2.0 v 0.50  a2.0 a v vp q    what is the reading on ammeter p and what is the reading on voltmeter q?     reading on p  / a reading on q  / v  a 1.5 1.5  b 1.5 2.5  c 2.5 1.5  d 2.5 2.5     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  32 there are two inputs and one output for the combination of logic gates shown.    input 1 input 2output     which truth table represents the operation of this combination of logic gates?    input 1 input 2 output 0 01101010011a input 1 input 2 output 0 01101010010b input 1 input 2 output 0 01101011100c input 1 input 2 output 0 01101011011d       33 where must a fuse be connected in a mains electric circuit?  a the earth wire only  b the live wire only  c the neutral wire only  d the live wire and the earth wire    34 a student investigates the output voltage induced across a coil of wire by a bar magnet.    when will the induced voltage have the greatest value?  a the student slowly moves the bar magnet into the coil of wire.  b the student leaves the bar magnet stationary in the coil of wire.  c the student quickly removes the bar magnet from the coil of wire.  d the student places the bar magnet at rest outside the coil of wire.     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19 [turn over  35 there is a current in a wire. the direction of the current is out of the page.    which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern produced?    a b c dkey wire carrying a current out of the page      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  36 diagram 1 shows a coil of wire p between the poles of a magnet. the ends of coil p are  connected to a battery by slip rings.    diagram 2 shows a coil of wire q between the poles of a different magnet. the ends of coil q are  connected to a battery by a split-ring commutator.    ns ns diagram 1 diagram 2pq     what happens to coils p and q?     coil p coil q  a   continuously turns  anticlockwise makes one quarter turn  anticlockwise then stops  b   continuously turns  clockwise makes one quarter turn  clockwise then stops  c   makes one quarter turn  anticlockwise then stops continuously turns  anticlockwise  d   makes one quarter turn  clockwise then stops continuously turns  clockwise     37 which diagram shows a possible structure of a neutral atom?    d cb a key proton neutronelectron  ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  38 the scattering of particles by a thin gold foil  provided scientists with evidence for the nuclear  atom.    which particles were scattered by the gold nuclei in the thin foil?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c neutrons  d protons      39 the diagram shows \u03b2-particles being directed between the poles of a magnet.    n s\u03b2-particles     in which direction will the particles be deflected?  a into the page  b out of the page  c towards the bottom of the page  d towards the top of the page      40 why are some radioactive sources stored in boxes made from lead?  a lead absorbs emissions from the radioactive sources.  b lead decreases the half-life of radioactive sources.  c lead increases the half-life of radioactive sources.  d lead repels emissions from the radioactive sources.     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/21/o/n/19  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib19 11_0625_22/5rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over     *9597730633* cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/22     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  1 a student measures the dimensions of a cylindrical glass beaker.     for which measurement should she use a micrometer screw gauge?  a circumference of the beaker  b diameter of the beaker  c height of the beaker  d thickness of the glass wall of the beaker     2 the graph shows how the speed of a car varies during part of a journey.    20.0 15.010.0 5.0 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0speed m  / s time  / s    what is the acceleration of the car between 6.0  s and 10.0  s?  a 0.50  m / s2 b 0.80  m / s2 c 1.25  m / s2 d 1.50  m / s2     3 a car travels at an average speed of 60  km  / h for 15 minutes.    how far does the car travel in 15 minutes?  a 4.0  km b 15  km c 240  km d 900  km     4 a box is placed on the ground. an upward force of 15  n is needed to lift the box at constant  speed.    which row correctly describes the box?     mass of the box weight of the box  a 1.5  kg 15  n  b 15  n 1.5  kg  c 15  n 150  kg  d 150  kg 15  n    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19 [turn over  5 the table gives the mass and the volume of three objects p, q and r.    object mass  / g volume  / cm3  p 23 36  q 170 720  r 240 340    which objects can float in a liquid of density 0.85  g / cm3?  a p and q only  b p and r only  c q and r only  d p, q and r      6 a hook is used to lift a metal plate, as shown.    w40 cm100  n 50 cmhook pivotmetal plate     an upward force of 100  n is needed to lift the metal plate about the pivot, as shown.    what is the weight w of the metal plate?  a 80  n b 100  n c 180  n d 225  n      7 what is the unit of the moment of a force?  a n b n / kg c n / m d n m     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  8 a ship travels due north through still water at a speed of 20  m / s.    it enters a channel where there is a current in the water from west to east. the speed of the  current is 20  m / s.    which diagram shows the resultant velocity v of the ship?    a 20 m / s 20 m / s2 0  m / sb 20 m / s c 20 m / s 20 m / s2 0  m / sd 20 m / sv vv vn se w      9 a ball is at rest on the ground. a boy kicks the ball. the boy\u2019s boot is in contact with the ball for  0.040  s.    the average force on the ball is 200  n. the ball leaves the boy\u2019s boot with a speed of 20  m / s.    which row gives the impulse of the boot on the ball and the average acceleration of the ball?     impulse on ball  n s average acceleration of ball  m / s2  a 8 0.8  b 8 500  c 5000 0.8  d 5000 500    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19 [turn over  10 an object p of mass 80  g collides with another object q of mass 40  g.    after the collision, p and q stick together and then travel on together.    before the collision, p is travelling at a speed of 6.0  m / s and q is at rest.    what is the speed of p and q after the collision?  a 2.0  m / s b 3.0  m / s c 4.0  m / s d 6.0  m / s     11 brakes are used to slow down a moving car.    into which form of energy is most of the ki netic energy converted as the car slows down?  a chemical  b elastic  c thermal  d sound     12 a box of mass 8.0  kg is lifted from the ground and placed on a shelf. the box gains 100  j of  potential energy.    the box falls off the shelf. air resistance can be ignored.    at what speed does the box hit the ground?  a 3.5  m / s b 5.0  m / s c 25  m / s d 28  m / s     13 a car is moving along a straight horizontal road. the car has 1.6  mj of kinetic energy. the car  accelerates for 20  s until the kinetic energy of the car increases to 2.5  mj.    what is the minimum average power developed by the car engine for this acceleration?  a 45  w b 205  w c 45  kw d 205  kw    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  14 a drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point at one end and a flat surface at the other end.    flat surface sharp point     the pin is pushed into a wooden board.    how do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force on  the flat surface?     force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point  a greater than on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  b greater than on the flat surface less than on the flat surface  c the same as on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  d the same as on the flat surface less than on the flat surface     15 the density of mercury is 13  600  kg  / m3.    what is the pressure at the bottom of a column of mercury that has a height of 75.0  cm?  a 1.02 \u00d7 104  pa  b 1.02 \u00d7 105  pa  c 1.02 \u00d7 106  pa  d 1.02 \u00d7 107  pa     16 which row describes the arrangement and the motion of the molecules in a gas?     arrangement motion  a far apart move freely  b far apart vibrate only  c tightly packed move freely  d tightly packed vibrate only     17 a bubble of air of volume 3.0  mm3 is under water. the bubble is at a depth where the pressure of  the air inside the bubble is four times atmospheric pressure.    the temperature of the air in the bubble stays the same as it rises to the surface.    what is the volume of the air in the bubble as it reaches the surface?  a 3.0  mm3 b 9.0  mm3 c 12  mm3 d 15  mm3 ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19 [turn over  18 the same quantity of thermal energy is supplied to each of four blocks. each block is made from  a different material.    which block has the greatest thermal capacity?    a temperature increase is 1 \u00b0cb temperature increase is 4 \u00b0cc temperature increase is 2 \u00b0cd temperature increase is 3 \u00b0c     19 a liquid turns into a gas. this occurs only at one particular temperature, and the change happens  throughout the liquid.    what is this process called?  a boiling  b condensation  c evaporation  d fusion     20 in a cold country, a bicycle has been left outside all night. the cyclist finds the plastic hand grips  feel less cold to the touch than the steel handlebars.    which row correctly describes the temperature and the property of the two materials?     the temperature of the two materials the property of the two materials  a   the temperature of the steel is  much lower than that of the plastic the plastic is a better thermal  conductor than the steel  b   the temperature of the steel is  much lower than that of the plastic the steel is a better thermal  conductor than the plastic  c   the steel and the plastic are  both at the same temperature the plastic is a better thermal  conductor than the steel  d   the steel and the plastic are  both at the same temperature the steel is a better thermal  conductor than the plastic     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  21 the diagram shows a tent made from a new material.    new material     what type of material should the tent be made of to reflect the radiant energy from the sun?     material  texture material  surface colour  a dull black  b dull white  c shiny black  d shiny white     22 a large hill blocks the direct path between a transmitter of radio waves and a receiver, as shown.    hilltransmitter receive r     the receiver picks up the signal from the transmitter even though the radio waves do not travel through the hill.     which row is correct?     a possible way  for this to happen is a stronger signal is  received using  a diffraction round the hill. longer wavelengths.  b diffraction round the hill. shorter wavelengths.  c refraction round the hill. longer wavelengths.  d refraction round the hill. shorter wavelengths.    ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19 [turn over  23 a ray of light is incident on a plane mirror. a student measures the angle of incidence i and the  angle of reflection r.    incident rayreflectedrayir     the student varies the angle of incidence and then plots a graph of r against i.    what does the graph look like?    0 0a r i0 0b r i0 0c r i0 0d r i      24 what is monochromatic light?  a light of a single amplitude  b light of a single frequency  c light of more than one colour  d light which travels with constant velocity     25 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.    \u03b3-rays x-rays ultraviolet visible light infrared microwavesradio waves increasing ..    a word is missing from the label below the spectrum.    which word is missing?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength   ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  26 which row gives a  possible  set of values for the speed of sound in ice, in water and in steam?        speed of sound in ice m/s     speed of sound in water m/s    speed of sound in steam m/s  a 500 1500 4000  b 1500 4000 500  c 4000 500 1500  d 4000 1500 500      27 a steel bar is placed in an east-west direction for it to be demagnetised. no other magnet is  nearby.    which method is not suitable?  a hammering the bar.  b heating the bar to a very high temperature.  c slowly taking the bar out of a coil that carries an alternating current.   d slowly taking the bar out of a coil that carries a direct current.    28 a plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth. the rod becomes positively charged.    why has the rod become positively charged?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained neutrons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost neutrons.     29 there is a current of 2.0  a in a resistor for 30  s. the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor  is 12  v.    how much energy is transferred in the resistor?  a 1.25  j b 5.0  j c 180  j d 720  j    ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19 [turn over  30 identical resistors are connected together to form arrangements x, y and z.    xy z    what is the correct order of the resistances of the arrangements from the largest to the smallest?  a x \u2192 y \u2192 z  b y \u2192 x \u2192 z  c z \u2192 x \u2192 y  d z \u2192 y \u2192 x      31 resistors of 1.0  \u03c9, 2.0  \u03c9 and 3.0  \u03c9 are connected in parallel with a cell.    which statement is correct?  a the current in each resistor is different but the potential difference (p.d.) across each resistor  is the same.  b the current in each resistor is the same but the potential difference across each resistor is  different.  c the potential difference across the 3.0  \u03c9 is greater than the potential difference across the  1.0  \u03c9 resistor.  d the sum of the potential differences across each resistor is equal to the electromotive force  (e.m.f.) of the cell.     32 the diagram shows a circuit component.           what is it used for?  a to allow current in one direction only  b to change the direction of the current  c to emit light when there is a current  d to increase the size of the current    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  33 which single logic gate behaves the same as the combination of logic gates shown?           a and b nor c not d or    34 where must a fuse be connected in a mains electric circuit?  a the earth wire only  b the live wire only  c the neutral wire only  d the live wire and the earth wire     35 the n-pole of a magnet is moved into a coil of wire connected to a galvanometer.    n scoil     the needle of the galvanometer moves.    which situation must  give a smaller galvanometer reading?  a use a coil with fewer turns and a stronger magnet.  b use a coil with fewer turns and a weaker magnet.  c use a coil with more turns and a stronger magnet.  d use a coil with more turns and a weaker magnet.    36 a step-down transformer is 100% efficient. it has an input voltage of 240  v a.c. and an output  voltage of 60  v a.c.    the current in the primary coil is 0.50  a.    what is the current in the secondary coil?  a 0.13  a b 0.50  a c 2.0  a d 8.0  a     ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19 [turn over  37 the diagrams show the simple atomic structure for two neutral atoms x and y of different  elements.    x y    which row is correct?     atom with  more electrons atom with a more  positively charged nucleus  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y      38 plutonium-238 decays by the emission of an \u03b1-particle.    which equation represents the decay of a plutonium-238 nucleus?  a 238 94pu   \u2192  238 95u  +  0 \u20131\u03b1  b 238 94pu   \u2192  234 92u  +  4 2\u03b1  c 238 94pu   \u2192  234 92u  +  2 4\u03b1  d 238 94pu   \u2192  242 96u  +  4 2\u03b1      39 a radioactive isotope has a half-life of 8 days.    a detector close to a sample of this isotope gives a count rate of 200 counts per minute. without the source, the background count is 20 counts per minute.    what is the count rate due to the source after 8 days?  a 80 counts per minute  b 90 counts per minute  c 100 counts per minute  d 110 counts per minute ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  40 why are some radioactive sources stored in boxes made from lead?  a lead absorbs emissions from the radioactive sources.  b lead decreases the half-life of radioactive sources.  c lead increases the half-life of radioactive sources.  d lead repels emissions from the radioactive sources.     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  blank page",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/22/o/n/19  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "  this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certific ate.  this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.  ib19 11_0625_23/4rp  \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over     *5638834072 * cambridge assessment international education  cambridge international general certificate of secondary education       physics 0625/23     paper 2  multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2019     45 minutes    additional materials: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb recommended)       read these instructions first    write in soft pencil.  do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. write your name, centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided  unless this has been done for you.  do not write in any barcodes.   there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions. for each question there are four possible  answers a, b, c and d.   choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil  on the separate answer sheet.    read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.    each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  any rough working should be done in this booklet. electronic calculators may be used. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  1 which is the best apparatus to use to measure the thickness of a coin?  a balance  b ruler with a millimetre scale  c micrometer screw gauge  d pressure gauge      2 the graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.    at which labelled time is the object decelerating?    0 0speed timec b d a     3 a car travels at an average speed of 60  km  / h for 15 minutes.    how far does the car travel in 15 minutes?  a 4.0  km b 15  km c 240  km d 900  km     4 which equation shows the relationship between the weight w and the mass m of an object?  a w = m g  b w = mg  c w = m + g  d w = g m      5 a box of mass 2.0  kg is pulled across a horizontal floor by a force of 6.0  n.    the frictional force acting on the box is 1.0  n.    what is the acceleration of the box?  a 0.40  m / s2 b 2.5  m / s2 c 3.0  m / s2 d 3.5  m / s2    ",
            "3": "3  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19 [turn over  6 four hollow glass spheres p, q, r and s each have a mass of 72  g.    their volumes are given in the table.     volume  / cm3  p 55  q 65  r 75  s 85    which spheres sink in a liquid of density 0.9  g / cm3?  a p, q and r b q, r and s c r and s only d s only     7 the diagram shows a uniform metre rule. the rule is pivoted at its mid-point. a downward force of  4.0  n acts on the rule at the 5  cm mark. the rule is held by a string at the 30  cm mark. the rule is  in equilibrium.    5 4.0 n50100  cm mark 300 cm markmetre rule pivotstring     what is the upward force that the string exerts on the rule?  a 0.67  n b 4.0  n c 6.0  n d 9.0  n      8 a ship sails due north at a speed of 20  m / s. a current in the water begins to move from east to  west. the speed of this current is 20  m / s.    what is the magnitude of the resultant velocity of the ship? a 0  m / s b 20  m / s c 28  m / s d 40  m / s     9 the momentum of a body is changed by a force acting on it for a period of time.    which action increases the change in momentum?  a doubling the force and halving the time  b doubling the force for the same time  c halving both the force and time  d halving the force and doubling the time     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  10 a toy train p of mass 0.50  kg is travelling along a straight track with a velocity of 3.0  m / s. it  collides with a stationary train q of mass 1.0  kg. the two trains then stick together.    what is the velocity of the combined trains?  a 1.0  m / s in the same direction as p was travelling originally  b 1.0  m / s in the reverse direction to that in which p was travelling originally  c 1.5  m / s in the same direction as p was travelling originally  d 1.5  m / s in the reverse direction to that in which p was travelling originally     11 brakes are used to slow down a moving car.    into which form of energy is most of the kinetic energy converted as the car slows down?  a chemical  b elastic  c thermal  d sound      12 a force of 25  n acts on an object. the work done by the force is 400  j.    how far does the object move in the direction of the force?  a 6.3  cm b 16  cm c 16  m d 10  km     13 a car is moving along a straight horizontal road. the car has 1.6  mj of kinetic energy. the car  accelerates for 20  s until the kinetic energy of the car increases to 2.5  mj.    what is the minimum average power developed by the car engine for this acceleration?  a 45  w b 205  w c 45  kw d 205  kw    ",
            "5": "5  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19 [turn over  14 a drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point at one end and a flat surface at the other end.    flat surface sharp point     the pin is pushed into a wooden board.    how do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force on  the flat surface?     force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point  a greater than on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  b greater than on the flat surface less than on the flat surface  c the same as on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface  d the same as on the flat surface less than on the flat surface     15 which row compares the separation and the motion of the molecules of a hot gas with those of a  cool liquid? (both the gas and the liquid are at the same pressure.)     separation motion  a greater for a gas faster for a gas  b greater for a gas slower for a gas  c smaller for a gas faster for a gas  d smaller for a gas slower for a gas      16 a fixed mass of gas has a volume of 25  cm3. the pressure of the gas is 100  kpa.    the volume of the gas is slowly decreased by 15  cm3 at constant temperature.    what is the change in pressure of the gas?  a 67  kpa b 150  kpa c 170  kpa d 250  kpa    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  17 a liquid turns into a gas. this occurs only at one particular temperature, and the change happens  throughout the liquid.    what is this process called?  a boiling  b condensation  c evaporation  d fusion     18 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    \u2013 1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 1 1 0\u00b0cliquid thread     when the temperature of the thermometer rises, the changes produced cause the liquid thread to move to the right.    why does this happen when the temperature of the thermometer rises?  a gases contract and liquids expand.  b gases contract and solids expand.  c liquids expand more than gases.  d liquids expand more than solids.     ",
            "7": "7  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19 [turn over  19 a sealed metal box contains a fixed mass of air. the sides of the box are insulated.    top bottomair insulation metal box    a scientist investigates the thermal conductivity of air. she measures how quickly thermal energy  passes between the top and bottom of the box.    which row gives the correct procedure and conclusion?     procedure conclusion  a heat bottom surface air is a good thermal conductor  b heat bottom surface air is a poor thermal conductor  c heat top surface air is a good thermal conductor  d heat top surface air is a poor thermal conductor      20 in a cold country, the ground is covered in snow. there is a pile of black sand outdoors and its temperature is the same as that of the snow. a man sprinkles a thin layer of this sand over the snow.    why does the black sand help to melt the snow during the day?  a any thermal energy still left in the sand will melt the snow.  b the black sand is a good absorber of the infrared radiation from the sun.  c the black sand is a good conductor of thermal energy.  d the black sand lowers the melting point of the snow.    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  21 a large hill blocks the direct path between a transmitter of radio waves and a receiver, as shown.    hilltransmitter receive r     the receiver picks up the signal from the transmitter even though the radio waves do not travel  through the hill.     which row is correct?     a possible way  for this to happen is a stronger signal is  received using  a diffraction round the hill. longer wavelengths.  b diffraction round the hill. shorter wavelengths.  c refraction round the hill. longer wavelengths.  d refraction round the hill. shorter wavelengths.     22 a person stands 1.0  m in front of a plane mirror. the mirror is moved away from the person at a  speed of 1.0  m / s.    which statement is correct?  a the image moves away from the person at a speed of 1.0  m / s.  b the image moves away from the person at a speed of 2.0  m / s.  c the image moves towards the person at a speed of 1.0  m / s.  d the image moves towards the person at a speed of 2.0  m / s.      23 white light is refracted and dispersed when it enters a glass prism from air.    which colour has the lowest speed as it moves through the glass prism?  a blue light  b orange light  c red light  d violet light     ",
            "9": "9  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19 [turn over  24 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.    \u03b3-rays x-rays ultraviolet visible light infrared microwavesradio waves increasing ..    a word is missing from the label below the spectrum.    which word is missing?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength     25 which row gives a  possible  set of values for the speed of sound in ice, in water and in steam?        speed of sound in ice m/s     speed of sound in water m/s    speed of sound in steam m/s  a 500 1500 4000  b 1500 4000 500  c 4000 500 1500  d 4000 1500 500      26 a steel bar is placed in an east-west direction for it to be demagnetised. no other magnet is nearby.    which method is not suitable?  a hammering the bar.  b heating the bar to a very high temperature.  c slowly taking the bar out of a coil that carries an alternating current.   d slowly taking the bar out of a coil that carries a direct current.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  27 a plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth. the rod becomes positively charged.    why has the rod become positively charged?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained neutrons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost neutrons.    28 there is a current of 3.0  a in a resistor for time t. during time t, a charge of 120  c flows through  the resistor.    what is time t ?  a 0.025 minutes  b 0.025  s  c 40 minutes  d 40  s     29 identical resistors are connected together to form arrangements x, y and z.    xy z    what is the correct order of the resistances of the arrangements from the largest to the smallest?  a x \u2192 y \u2192 z  b y \u2192 x \u2192 z  c z \u2192 x \u2192 y  d z \u2192 y \u2192 x     ",
            "11": "11  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19 [turn over  30 resistors of resistance 1.0  \u03c9, 2.0  \u03c9 and 3.0  \u03c9 are connected in parallel across the terminals of   a cell.    which statement is correct?  a the currents in the resistors are equal.  b the sum of the currents in the three resistors is equal to the current in the cell.  c the sum of the potential differences (p.d.\u2019s) across the resistors is equal to the electromotive  force (e.m.f.) of the cell.  d the potential difference across the 3.0  \u03c9 resistor is greater than the potential difference  across the other two resistors.    31 diagram 1 shows a circuit containing an a.c. power supply, an unknown component x and a fixed  resistor.    the graph in diagram 2 shows how the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor varies with time.    x diagram 1 diagram 20 0p.d. time     what is component x?  a thermistor  b relay coil  c diode  d light-dependent resistor    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  32 an and gate has two inputs and one output.    which truth table represents the action of the and gate?     a    b   input 1 input 2 output  input 1 input 2 output  0 0 0  0 0 0  0 1 1  0 1 0  1 0 1  1 0 0  1 1 1  1 1 1           c    d   input 1 input 2 output  input 1 input 2 output  0 0 1  0 0 1  0 1 1  0 1 0  1 0 1  1 0 0  1 1 0  1 1 0      33 where must a fuse be connected in a mains electric circuit?  a the earth wire only  b the live wire only  c the neutral wire only  d the live wire and the earth wire      34 a wire xy is connected to a resistor r. the wire  is moved in the magnetic field between two  magnetic poles.    in which direction must the wire be moved so that the induced current is in the direction shown?    s n ra bd cx yinduced current    ",
            "13": "13  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19 [turn over  35 a step-up transformer produces a 60  v a.c. output from a 12  v a.c. input.    there are 50 turns on the secondary coil.    how many turns are there on the primary coil?  a 5 b 10 c 50 d 250     36 an a.c. generator contains a coil that rotates at a rate of 4500 revolutions per minute.    what is the frequency of the alternating current?  a 1.25  hz b 75  hz c 150  hz d 4500  hz      37 why are some radioactive sources stored in boxes made from lead?  a lead absorbs emissions from the radioactive sources.  b lead decreases the half-life of radioactive sources.  c lead increases the half-life of radioactive sources.  d lead repels emissions from the radioactive sources.      38 the diagram represents a neutral atom.    nucleus     which row identifies each type of particle in the diagram?         a electron neutron proton  b electron proton neutron  c neutron electron proton  d proton electron neutron     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  39 a thin metal foil is placed in a vacuum. \u03b1-particles are fired at the foil and most go straight  through. a very small proportion of the \u03b1-particles are deflected through large angles.    what does this provide evidence for?  a \u03b1-particles are very small.  b there are negative electrons in each atom.  c there is a tiny nucleus in each atom.  d there are neutrons in each atom.     40 the background count rate measured by a radiation counter is 40 counts per minute.    with the counter close to a radioactive source, the counter reading is 960 counts per minute.    the half-life of the source is 20 minutes.    what is the counter reading one hour later?  a 115 counts per minute  b 120 counts per minute  c 155 counts per minute  d 160 counts per minute     ",
            "15": "15  \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  blank page",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2019 0625/23/o/n/19  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 20 printed pages. dc (sc/fc) 172324/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *3507567167* physics  0625/31 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 fig. 1.1 shows a plastic water barrel. the barrel is full of water. barrel fig. 1.1  (a) the water barrel contains 0.050  m3 of pure water. the density of pure water is 1000  kg / m3.   calculate the mass of pure water in the barrel.  mass of water =   kg [3]  (b) the density of sea water is 1030  kg / m3. the density of the plastic is 1000  kg / m3. use this  information and the information in (a) to state and explain whether the full barrel will float in  sea water. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 four students p, q, r and s each attempt to measure the time period (the time for one complete  oscillation) of a pendulum. the arrows in fig. 2.1 show the movements of the pendulum that each  student times. p start end start endq start endr start ends fig. 2.1  (a) state the student who has chosen the correct movement for one period of a pendulum.   student .  [1]  (b) another student uses a stopwatch to measure the time taken for 50 periods of a pendulum.  fig. 2.2 shows the time taken on the stopwatch. 01:23.37min s s1 100 fig. 2.2   calculate the time for one period of the pendulum. give your answer to 3 significant figures.  time for one period =  .. s [3]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) the student measures the displacement of the pendulum bob from its rest position. the  displacement is 16.5  cm, as shown in fig. 2.3. 16.5  cm fig. 2.3   state the displacement in millimetres.  displacement =  .. mm [1]  [total: 5]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows a spring with no load attached. fig. 3.2 shows the same spring with a load attached.  loadspringstand  fig. 3.1  fig. 3.2  (a) describe how a student can determine the extension of the spring. you may draw on fig.  3.1  and fig.  3.2 as part of your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) the student plots a graph of load against extension, as shown in fig. 3.3. 00.02.04.06.08.010.0 1.03.05.07.09.0 8 16 24 extension  / cmload  / n 32 40 4 12 20 28 36 fig. 3.3   (i) determine the extension produced by a load of 7.5  n.  extension =  ... cm [1]   (ii) determine the load that would produce an extension of 10.0  cm.   load =  . n [1]  (c) calculate the mass that has a weight of 6.0  n.  mass =   kg [3]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4 fig. 4.1 shows a tractor fitted with a device for breaking up soil in a field. device pivot pointheavy weight soiltractor fig. 4.1  (a) (i) the tractor has a heavy weight at the front. explain why the heavy weight is needed.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) fig. 4.2 represents the weight of the device and its distance from the pivot.  6000  n2.1 mpivot fig. 4.2    calculate the moment of the weight of the device about the pivot. state the unit.  moment =    [4]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) fig. 4.3 shows a tractor fitted with narrow tyres and the same tractor fitted with wide tyres. tractor fitted with narrow tyressame tractor fitted with wide tyreswide tyre narrow tyre fig. 4.3  (view from the front)   explain why wide tyres are more suitable for the tractor on soft soil.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 here are some statements about energy and energy resources.  some statements are correct. put a tick ( \u2713) in the box alongside each of these.    building hydroelectric power stations has an impact on the environment.    burning fossil fuels produces atmospheric pollution.    wind turbines are turned using gravitational potential energy.    coal and crude oil are sources of renewable energy.    geothermal energy is obtained from hot rocks below the ground.  [3]  [total: 3]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6  fig. 6.1 shows a mirror periscope. the periscope is used to view a golfer over the heads of other  people. the periscope has two plane mirrors each at an angle of 45\u00b0 to the vertical. periscope plane mirror golfer45\u00b0 45\u00b0ray of light plane mirror fig. 6.1  (not to scale)  (a) (i) on fig. 6.1:    1. continue the ray of light from the golfer towards the upper mirror of the periscope    2. draw and label the normal at the point where the ray strikes the mirror.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, continue the ray of light after reflection at the upper mirror until it leaves the  periscope.  [1]   (iii) state the law of reflection used to deduce the position of the ray of light after striking the  mirrors.  .  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) fig. 6.2 shows three rays of red light each entering a semi-circular glass block.  ray of red lightx semi-circular glass blockair air airray of red lightysemi-circular glass block ray of red lightzsemi-circular glass block fig. 6.2 table 6.1 angle of incidence description x less than the critical angle y equal to the critical angle z greater than the critical angle   using the information in table 6.1, draw on fig.  6.2 to complete the path of each ray of red  light.  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 7 an object, ox, is placed in front of a converging lens.  fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light from the object passing through the lens. x o fig. 7.1  (a) (i) the lens forms an image of object ox.    on fig. 7.1, draw another ray from x to locate the position of the image.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 7.1, draw an arrow to represent the image of ox and label it i. [1]   (iii) on fig. 7.1, mark a principal focus for the lens and label it f.  [1]   (iv) on fig. 7.1, measure and record the focal length of the lens.  focal length =  ... cm [1]  (b) describe the image i.   choose words from the list. tick ( \u2713) two boxes.     enlarged     diminished     same size     inverted     upright  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a student listening to the sound produced by a tuning fork. tuning fork fig. 8.1   (i) state how the tuning fork produces the sound.  .  [1]   (ii) complete the following sentence. choose a word from the box. electromagnetic   longitudinal   transverse    a sound wave is . [1]   (iii) a loudspeaker produces a sound with a frequency of 25 khz.    a student with healthy ears cannot hear this sound. explain why.  ...  .  [2]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) fig. 8.2 represents a sound wave travelling in air. fig. 8.2  (drawn full size)   (i) the air particles are moving. on fig. 8.2, draw two arrows in opposite directions to show  the movement of the air particles.  [1]   (ii) use fig. 8.2 to determine the wavelength of the sound wave.  wavelength =  ... cm [1]  (c) describe a method of using water waves to demonstrate refraction.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 10]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 9 a student is experimenting with magnets and electric charges.  (a) the student places a bar magnet on a piece of paper, as shown in fig. 9.1. n s piece of paper fig. 9.1   show the pattern of magnetic field lines around the bar magnet.   draw two lines above the magnet and two lines below the magnet. start and finish each line  at a pole. include one arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field.  [3]  (b) the student rubs a plastic rod with a dry cloth. the plastic rod becomes positively charged.   explain why the friction between the plastic and the cloth causes the plastic to become  positively charged.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) the student investigates the forces between two pairs of objects.   fig. 9.2 and fig.  9.3 show the pairs of objects.   state whether there is a force of attraction, a force of repulsion, or no force between the pairs  of objects. draw a ring around one phrase for each pair of objects.  1. two positively charged spheres 2. a bar magnet and a bar of copper metalthin cotton force of attraction force of repulsion no force force of attraction force of repulsion no forcebar of copper metal++ ++ +++ +++ ++ +++ + n sfig. 9.2 fig. 9.3  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 10 a teacher is investigating the resistance of a lamp.  fig. 10.1 shows part of the circuit she uses. the circuit is incomplete. component xswitch fig. 10.1  (a) (i) to determine the resistance of the lamp, the teacher adds two meters to her circuit.    on fig. 10.1, draw circuit symbols to show each meter correctly connected in the circuit.  [3]   (ii) when the current in the lamp is 0.25  a, the potential difference (p.d.) across the lamp is  4.5 v. calculate the resistance of the lamp.  resistance =  . \u03c9 [3]  (b) (i) state the name of component x.  .  [1]   (ii) describe and explain how the teacher uses component x to investigate the resistance of  the lamp.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 11 a student is experimenting with electromagnetic effects.  (a) describe an experiment, using any standard laboratory equipment, to demonstrate  electromagnetic induction. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows a transformer connected to an input voltage of 12  v a.c. output voltagecore secondary coil 300 turnsprimary coil 20 turns12 v a.c.input voltage fig. 11.1   (i) state the name of a suitable material for the core of the transformer.  .  [1]   (ii) explain how the diagram in fig. 11.1 shows a step-up transformer.  ...  .  [1]   (iii) using the information in fig. 11.1, calculate the output voltage of the transformer.  output voltage =  .. v [3]  [total: 8]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 12 a teacher carries out two experiments at the same time.  (a) in the first experiment the count rate for a sample of a radioactive isotope is measured every  30 seconds for 6 minutes.   the results are shown in table  12.1. table 12.1 time / minutescount rate counts  / second 0.0 1246 0.5 1036 1.0 941 1.5 810 2.0 686 2.5 621 3.0 550 3.5 468 4.0 421 4.5 368 5.0 318 5.5 280 6.0 242   estimate the half-life of the radioactive isotope. use the information in the table.  half-life =  ... minutes  [1]  (b) in the second experiment the teacher repeats the procedure with another sample of the same  radioactive isotope. the mass of the second sample is greater than that of the first sample.   suggest a value for the count rate for this sample at the start of the experiment.  count rate =   counts  / second  [1]",
            "20": "20 0625/31/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. (c) one type of particle emitted during radioactive decay is an \u03b1-particle (alpha particle).   describe:   (i) the nature of an \u03b1-particle  .  [1]   (ii) the ionising ability of an \u03b1-particle  .  [1]   (iii) the penetrating ability of an \u03b1-particle.  .  [1]  [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (lk/tp) 172323/6 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *1097389924* physics  0625/32 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 fig. 1.1 shows a water tank that is leaking. drops of water fall from the tank at a constant rate. water tank water groundsupportsdrops of water fig. 1.1   (not to scale)  (a) a student uses a stopwatch to determine the time between two drops hitting the ground.   he sets the stopwatch to zero. he starts the stopwatch when the first drop hits the ground.   he stops the stopwatch after a further 30 drops have hit the ground.     the reading on the stopwatch is recorded and shown in fig. 1.2. 00:13. 20min s s1 100 fig. 1.2   (i) state the time taken for 30 drops to hit the ground.  time =  .  s [1]   (ii) calculate the average time between two drops hitting the ground.  time =  .  s [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (iii) explain why the student measures the time for 30 drops to hit the ground instead of  measuring the time for one drop to hit the ground.  ...  .  [1]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows that the drops get further apart as they get close to the ground.   state why the drops get further apart.  ...  .  [1]  (c) in another experiment the student determines the speed of a falling weight at different times.  the speed\u2013time graph for his results is shown in fig. 1.3. 005.010.015.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 1.3   calculate the distance fallen by the weight in the first 1.5  s.  distance =    m [3]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 (a) a student has an irregularly shaped piece of metal, a beaker of water and a measuring  cylinder, as shown in fig. 2.1. water piece of metalmeasuring cylinder fig. 2.1   describe how the student can accurately determine the volume of the piece of metal using  the equipment provided.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) the student measures the mass of the piece of metal. its mass is 146  g.   (i) state the name of the instrument used to measure the mass.  .  [1]   (ii) the volume of the piece of metal is 20  cm3.    calculate the density of the metal. state the unit.  density =    [4]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 3 (a) fig. 3.1 shows the horizontal forces acting on a swimmer. 120  n110  n fig. 3.1   (i) calculate the size and direction of the resultant horizontal force on the swimmer.     size of resultant horizontal force =    n     direction of resultant horizontal force =    [1]   (ii) state the name of the 110  n force on the swimmer.  .  [1]   (iii) fig. 3.2 shows the horizontal forces acting on the swimmer as he moves forwards a  short time later. 120  n120  n fig. 3.2    describe and explain the motion of the swimmer.  ...  .  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) another swimmer weighs 700  n. he stands on a diving board, as shown in fig. 3.3. 3.5 m diving boardp 700  n fig. 3.3   calculate the moment of the swimmer\u2019s weight about point p.  moment =  .  n m [3]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4 (a) fig. 4.1 shows a metal triangle suspended from a thread. metal trianglethread fig. 4.1   complete the sentence. choose the correct word or phrase from the box. above   below   to the left of   to the right of   the metal triangle will come to rest with its centre of mass directly . the  point of suspension.  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) a student finds the centre of mass of a shape made of thin card. fig. 4.2 shows the equipment. nail or pin plumbline clamp stand and clamp shape made of thin card fig. 4.2 (not to scale)   describe how the student finds the centre of mass of the card. choose from these sentences.   a a line is drawn on the card showing the position of the string.   b a pin held in a clamp is put through the hole in the card.   c the centre of mass is where the lines cross on the card.   d the process is repeated using holes near the other two edges.   complete the flow chart. write the letter for the correct sentence in each box. a small hole is made near one edge of the card the plumbline is attached to the pin  [3]  [total: 4]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 (a) energy sources used to generate electricity are shown in the box. gas    oil    tides     waves     wind   which energy sources are non-renewable?   draw a ring around each  energy source that is non-renewable.  [1]  (b) the diagram shows a geothermal power station.  steam and  hot water cracks in  rockshot rockscold water pumped downgenerating station fig. 5.1   describe how the geothermal power station generates electricity.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 6.1   (i) state the name of a liquid used in liquid-in-glass thermometers.  .  [1]   (ii) the thermometer is calibrated using two fixed points.    state the values of these fixed points.  ... \u00b0c and  ... \u00b0c  [1]  (b) a student heats some water in a metal can, as shown in fig. 6.2. water heatmovement of watermetal can fig. 6.2",
            "11": "11 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (i) complete the sentence. choose a word from the box. conduction   convection   radiation thermal (heat) energy moves through the metal can by    [1]   (ii) describe how thermal energy is transferred throughout the water. include your ideas  about density changes.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 7 all matter is made up of atoms and molecules.  (a) describe the arrangement, separation and motion of gas molecules. arrangement  . separation  . motion  ...  [3]  (b) the motion of smoke particles in air can be observed using a smoke cell and microscope.  fig. 7.1 shows the arrangement. microscope light source lensglass plate smoke cell fig. 7.1   smoke is placed inside the glass smoke cell. light enters from the side of the smoke cell.    a student looks through the microscope. she sees tiny spots of light moving. each spot of  light is a smoke particle.   fig. 7.2 represents the path of a smoke particle seen in the eyepiece of the microscope. smoke particle fig. 7.2   (i) on fig. 7.2, continue the path of the smoke particle.  [2]   (ii) state the term used to describe the movement of the smoke particle.  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 8 fig. 8.1 is a partially completed ray diagram. oobject if2 f1c fig. 8.1  the object is at o and its image is at i.  (a) which distance is the focal length of the lens? tick one box.      c to f1      o to c      f2 to i      o to i [1]  (b) on fig. 8.1, extend the two rays from the arrowhead on the object until both reach the position  of the image.  [3]  (c) the object is moved a small distance away  from the lens. state the effect, if any, this has on  the position and size of the image. position  . size  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 9 a boat race starts on the sea, but close to land. fig. 9.1 shows the boats at the start of the race. fig. 9.1  on the land, a cannon produces a loud bang to start the race. there is a flash of light at the same  time as the bang.  (a) (i) at the start of the race, the sailors watch for the flash of light from the cannon.    suggest why the sailors watch for the flash of light rather than listen for the bang.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) one of the sailors is 500  m from the cannon. she measures a time difference of  1.6 seconds between seeing the flash of light and hearing the bang.    calculate the speed of sound.  speed of sound =    m / s [3]   (iii) the value of the speed of sound obtained in (a)(ii)  is lower than expected.    suggest a reason for this difference.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the race is held close to a part of the coast with high cliffs. a sailor hears a second bang  shortly after the first bang.   state the term for the second bang and explain how it is produced.   term . explanation  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 10 a circuit is made from two lamps, a cell and a switch, as shown in fig. 10.1. fig. 10.1  (a) (i) draw the circuit symbol for a cell.  [1]   (ii) state the term used for the arrangement of lamps in the circuit in fig. 10.1.  .  [1]   (iii) the switch is closed and the lamps light.    state the name of the charged particles that are flowing through the wires  .  [1]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) fig. 10.2 represents a different type of circuit.  fig. 10.2   (i) compare fig. 10.1 and fig. 10.2. state two advantages of the type of circuit shown in  fig. 10.2 with the type of circuit shown in fig. 10.1. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]   (ii) the potential difference across the power source in fig. 10.2 is 3.0  v. the combined  resistance of the two lamps is 12  \u03c9. calculate the size of the current in the circuit.  current =  .  a [3]  [total: 8]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 11 (a) identify which of the following metals can be permanently magnetised. place a tick ( 3) in the  box next to any correct metal.      aluminium      copper      steel      tungsten  [1]  (b) two metal rods are thought to be permanent magnets. describe the test you would carry out  to confirm that both rods are permanent magnets.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) (i) describe how to make an electromagnet. you may draw a labelled diagram to help your  answer.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) suggest two factors that affect the strength of the magnetic field of an electromagnet. 1 . 2    [2]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 12 a radioactive substance decays by emitting an \u03b1-particle.  (a) the nuclide notation for an \u03b1-particle is 4 2 \u03b1   (i) state the term given to the number 4, written in the nuclide notation.  .  [1]   (ii) state the term given to the number 2, written in the nuclide notation.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 12.1 shows the decay curve for a radioactive material. 002004006008001000 2 4 6 8 10 time  / minutescount rate counts  / min fig. 12.1   (i) use information from the graph in fig.  12.1 to determine the half-life of the material.  clearly show how you used the graph to obtain your answer.  half-life =  ..  minutes  [3]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019   (ii) another radioactive material with the same half-life has an initial count rate of  600 counts  / min. on fig. 12.1 sketch the decay curve for this material.  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (leg/cb) 172322/6 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *5830106124* physics  0625/33 paper 3  theory (core)  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 (a) a student uses a stopwatch in a timing experiment.   fig. 1.1 shows the stopwatch readings.  reading at the start  reading at the end  of the experiment  of the experiment min s s1 100 min s s1 100 fig. 1.1   calculate the time interval between the two readings.  time interval =  ..  s [2]  (b) a device has a light-emitting diode (led) that flashes briefly at regular intervals.   describe how to determine accurately the average time for each interval, using a stopwatch.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 a student reviews some data about athletes and footballers.  (a) an athlete runs 12  km in 1.5 hours.   calculate the athlete\u2019s average speed in km  / h.    average speed =  ...  km / h [3]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows the speed-time graph for a footballer for the first 15.0 seconds of a game. speed m / s time / s0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 15.0 1.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 13.01.02.03.04.05.06.07.0 fig. 2.1   (i) use the graph in fig. 2.1 to calculate the distance travelled by the footballer during the  first 4.0 seconds.  distance =  .  m [3]   (ii) use the graph in fig. 2.1 to determine when the footballer is moving with greatest  acceleration. between .. s and .. s    give a reason for your answer.  ...  ...  [2]  (c) another footballer has a mass of 72  kg.   calculate the weight of this footballer.  weight =  .. n [3]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 20193 a model aircraft is flying through air. fig. 3.1 shows the forces acting on the model aircraft. the  weight of the model aircraft is 15.0 n. 15.0 n15.0 n direction of motion 19.0 n11.0 n fig. 3.1  (a) (i) determine the size and direction of the resultant horizontal  force acting on the model  aircraft.  size of resultant horizontal  force =  ...  n  direction of resultant horizontal  force =  ...  [1]   (ii) describe the change in the motion of the model aircraft.   ...  .  [2]  (b) the horizontal forces acting on the model aircraft become balanced.    suggest how the horizontal forces acting on the model aircraft have changed.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 4]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 4 (a) a man is working on a platform. he uses a rope to raise a bag from the ground to the platform  as shown in fig. 4.1. man rope bagplatform fig. 4.1   (i) state the type of energy gained by the bag as it is lifted at constant speed.  .  [1]   (ii) the man then lifts a second bag from the ground to the platform. the first bag weighs  100 n and the second bag weighs 150  n. on which bag of materials does the man do more work?  ... explain your answer.  ...  ...  [1]   (iii) the man wants to determine his useful power as he lifts one of the bags. he knows the  weight of the bag. state the two other quantities he needs to know. 1   2    [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) the statements describe processes in a coal-fired power station. they are not in the correct  order.   a thermal energy boils water.   b coal burns to produce thermal (heat) energy.   c electricity is transmitted to a step-up transformer.   d a turbine turns coils in a magnetic field.   e steam turns a turbine.   use the letters a, b, c, d and e to complete the flow chart explaining how the power station  works. coal is crushed to a fine powder. hot air blows the coal powder into a furnace. boiling water produces steam. electricity is generated.  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 (a) the arrows on fig. 5.1 represent changes of state. solid1 .. 2 .. 3 .. 4 condensationliquid gas fig. 5.1   one of the arrows is labelled. label each of the other arrows with the correct change of state.   write the change of state on the dotted lines next to each arrow.  [3]  (b) a beaker contains some liquid with a low boiling point. the beaker is placed onto a small  amount of water, as shown in fig. 5.2. water on benchbeaker benchliquid with low  boiling point fig. 5.2   the liquid in the beaker evaporates quickly. the water on the bench cools and turns to ice.    explain why the water cools.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 (a) fig. 6.1 represents a transverse wave drawn full size. point x represents a point on the wave. x fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, mark clearly the directions in which point x moves.  [1]   (ii) use fig. 6.1 to measure the wavelength of the wave.  wavelength =  ...  cm [1]   (iii) the frequency of the wave is increased. describe how the wave pattern in fig. 6.1 would  be different.  ...  .  [1]  (b) (i) place a tick in a box next to any transverse wave.     light     sound     radio  [1]   (ii) state a type of wave that cannot  travel in a vacuum.  .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 7 (a) complete the sentences. add the missing word to each of the blank spaces.   the unit of temperature is called the . .   the physical property that varies with temperature in a liquid-in-glass thermometer is the     . of the liquid.  [2]  (b) a student has a thermometer without a marked scale.    to produce a scale for the thermometer, the student must use two fixed points.   give the temperature value for each fixed point and describe what happens to water at each  of these temperatures. lower fixed point  ..  ... upper fixed point  ..  ...  [4]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 8 fig. 8.1 shows a ray of light travelling through a glass block and then reflecting from a mirror. nglass block mqpr stmirror fig. 8.1  (a) state the term used for the dashed lines drawn in fig. 8.1.  .  [1]  (b) use fig. 8.1 to identify the three angles in the list. place the correct letter in the box to indicate  each angle.    angle of incidence    angle of reflection    angle of refraction  [3]  (c) the ray of light in fig. 8.1 changes direction as it enters the glass block. state the name of  this effect and explain why it happens. name of effect  ... explanation  ...  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 9 two bar magnets are placed next to each other as shown in fig. 9.1. magnet a                 magnet b fig. 9.1  magnet a is slowly moved towards magnet b. this causes magnet b to move away from magnet a.  (a) (i) on fig. 9.1, suggest the poles of each bar magnet.    label n and s on each of the magnets.  [1]   (ii) state the term used to describe the direction of the forces acting between magnet a and  magnet b.  .  [1]   (iii) magnet b is removed and replaced with a steel bar of the same size.    describe what happens when magnet a is slowly moved towards the steel bar.  ...  .  [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) a student makes an electromagnet. he places an iron rod inside a coil of wire and connects  the coil to a d.c. power supply, as shown in fig. 9.2. coiliron rodd.c. power supply fig. 9.2   (i) the switch is closed so there is a current in the coil. the s pole of a bar magnet is placed  near to each end of the iron rod in turn.    suggest what happens at each end of the iron rod and give a reason for your predictions. suggestions  ..  ...  ... reason  ...  ...  [2]   (ii) the student removes the iron rod from the coil. the student places a steel rod inside  the coil. he closes the switch and the steel rod becomes a magnet. he then opens the  switch.    the student removes the steel rod and moves it close to the iron rod.    describe and explain what happens as the two rods are moved close together.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (iii) state one use for an electromagnet.   .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 10 fig. 10.1 shows the symbol for an electrical component. fig. 10.1   (a) state the name of the component shown in fig. 10.1.  .  [1]  (b) the resistance of the component shown in fig. 10.1 varies with temperature. fig. 10.2 shows  a graph of resistance against temperature for the component. \u201310010002000300040005000 10 30 50 temperature  / \u00b0cresistance  / \u03c9 70 90 110 fig. 10.2   (i) use fig. 10.2 to determine the resistance of the component at a temperature of 10  \u00b0c.   .. \u03c9 [1]   (ii) at another temperature, the resistance of the component is 800  \u03c9.     calculate the current in the component when it is connected to a 12.0  v supply.  current =  ... a [3]  [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 11 fig. 11.1 shows a diagram of an electrical device. the diagram is not complete. the coil rotates in   a magnetic field when connected to a d.c. power supply. magnet coil xyns fig. 11.1  (a) (i) explain the meaning of the term d.c.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) complete the diagram in fig. 11.1 by drawing the symbols for two cells in series and a  switch to make a circuit.  [2]  (b) (i) state the name of the electrical device shown in fig. 11.1.  .  [1]   (ii) state two changes to the electrical device that will make the coil in the device rotate  faster. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 12 fig. 12.1 shows the nuclide notation for three isotopes of an element.  1 2 3 x               y               z  1 1 1 fig. 12.1  (a) (i) describe how the nuclide notation shows that each isotope is of the same element.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) describe how the nuclide notation shows the differences between the isotopes.  ...  .  [1]  (b) radioactive sources emit radiation when they decay. state the names of three  types of  radioactive emission. 1   2   3    [2]  (c) radioactive emissions have differing characteristics. one characteristic is their ionising effect.   complete the statement about ionisation, using words from the box. the words can be used  once, more than once or not at all. electrons           negatively           neutrons           positively           neutrally           protons   when atoms are ionised,   ... may be removed, leaving ... charged atoms (ions), or   ... may be gained, forming ... charged atoms (ions).  [4]  (d) polonium-210 has a half-life of 140 days. a sample of polonium-210 has 8.0 \u00d7 1010 atoms.   calculate the number of polonium-210 atoms remaining in the sample after 280 days.  number of atoms =  .  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nh/cgw) 174867/3 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *0431991628* physics  0625/41 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a car accelerates from rest at time t = 0 to its maximum speed.  fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the first 25  s of its motion. 0010203040 5 10 15 20 25 t / sspeed m / s fig. 1.1  (a) the mass of the car is 2300  kg.   for the time between t = 0 and t = 5.0  s, determine:    (i) the acceleration of the car  acceleration =    [2]   (ii) the resultant force acting on the car.  resultant force =    [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) describe the motion of the car between t = 10  s and t = 15  s. explain how fig.  1.1 shows this.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) between t = 10  s and t = 15  s, the force exerted on the car due to the engine remains constant.   suggest and explain why the car moves in the way shown by fig.  1.1.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 (a) state two properties of an object that may be changed by the action of forces.  1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  (b) a chest expander is a piece of equipment used by athletes in a gym.  fig. 2.1 shows a chest  expander that consists of five identical springs connected in parallel between two handles. springs fig. 2.1   each spring has an unstretched length of 0.63  m.   two athletes are stretching the chest expander by pulling on the two handles in opposite  directions.   (i) the springs obey hooke\u2019s law.    explain what is meant by this statement.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) each athlete pulls the handle towards himself with a force of 1300  n.    1. state the tension in each spring.  tension =    [1]    2. the chest expander stretches and each spring is now 0.94  m long.     calculate the spring constant k of each spring.  k =    [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (iii) state the energy changes taking place as the two athletes use their muscles to stretch  the chest expander.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 fig. 3.1 shows a shooting competition, where air rifles fire soft metal pellets at distant targets. air rifletarget fig. 3.1  when an air rifle is fired, it exerts an impulse of 0.019  n s on the pellet.  (a) define impulse .  ...  .  [1]  (b) the pellet has a mass of 1.1 \u00d7 10\u20134 kg.   determine:   (i) the speed with which the pellet leaves the rifle  speed =    [2]   (ii) the kinetic energy of the pellet as it leaves the rifle.  kinetic energy =    [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) the pellet melts when it strikes the target.   describe how the molecular structure of the liquid metal differs from that of the solid metal.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 fig. 4.1 shows a loudspeaker that is producing a sound wave in air of frequency 15  000 hz. hollow paper cone fig. 4.1  (a) describe how the cone of the loudspeaker produces this sound.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.   calculate the wavelength of this sound.  wavelength =    [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) the loudspeaker is placed a considerable distance to the left of a barrier with a gap. the  width of the gap is double the wavelength of the sound. sound from the loudspeaker reaches  the barrier and passes through the gap.   fig. 4.2 shows the gap in the barrier. barrier barrier fig. 4.2  (not to scale)   on fig. 4.2, sketch a diagram that represents the sound wave as a series of wavefronts \u2022 travelling towards the barrier \u2022 in the gap \u2022 and travelling away from the barrier.  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 5 fig. 5.1 shows a sphere that is negatively charged. the sphere is attached to a plastic stand. plastic stand fig. 5.1  (a) on fig. 5.1, draw arrows to indicate the pattern and direction of the electric field in the region  surrounding the sphere.  [2]  (b) a smaller, uncharged metal sphere s is suspended by a plastic thread and brought close to  the negatively charged sphere. fig. 5.2 shows the two spheres. plastic thread s fig. 5.2   (i) by drawing on fig. 5.2, indicate the distribution of charge on s.  [2]   (ii) state what happens to s.  ...  .  [1]   (iii) an earth wire is then touched against s.    describe what happens in the wire and state how this affects the charge on s.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) the metal sphere s is an electrical conductor. the plastic thread is an electrical insulator.   explain this difference by referring to the structures of the two materials.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 fig. 6.1 shows a shower that takes in cold water. the water passes through an electric water  heater and emerges from the showerhead at a higher temperature. showerhead electric water heater fig. 6.1  the power of the heater is 9000  w.  (a) the shower is powered by a 230  v electricity supply.   (i) calculate the current in the heater when it is switched on.  current =    [2]   (ii) suggest a suitable rating for the fuse in the heater circuit.  fuse rating =    [1]  (b) the specific heat capacity of water is 4200  j / (kg \u00b0c). the initial temperature of the cold water  is 16  \u00b0c.   determine the maximum mass of water that can be heated to a temperature of 35  \u00b0c in 1.0  s.  mass =    [4]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) a safety control in the shower switches off the shower when the water becomes dangerously  hot. the control uses a thermocouple thermometer to measure the temperature of the heated  water.   (i) describe the structure of a thermocouple thermometer. include a diagram in your answer.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) suggest one reason why a thermocouple thermometer is suitable for this purpose.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 20197 the resistance of a 1.0 m length of resistance wire is 7.6 \u03c9. a length of this wire is taped to a metre  rule. a crocodile clip is connected to one end of the resistance wire exactly at the 0 m mark of the  rule. fig. 7.1 shows the crocodile clip connected to terminal p. 0 m mark crocodile clip0 1.0 m markmetre rule movable contact resistance wire terminal q terminal pl connecting wire fig. 7.1  a second terminal q is connected to a movable contact using a long length of connecting wire.  the movable contact is in contact with the resistance wire at a length l from the 0 m mark on the  rule.  the movable contact is placed at different points on the resistance wire. the resistance r of the  length l of the wire depends on l.  (a) on fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show how r varies with l for values of l between l = 0 and  l = 1.0 m. mark appropriate values on the axes of the graph. 0 0 l / mr / \u03c9 fig. 7.2  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over (b) fig. 7.3 shows a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 v connected across the 1.0 m length  of the resistance wire. metre rule movable contact12 v resistance wire terminal q terminal pl fig. 7.3   (i) state what is meant by electromotive force  (e.m.f.).  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) calculate:    1. the current in the resistance wire  current =    [2]    2. the potential difference (p.d.) between terminal p and terminal q when l = 0.35 m  p.d. =    [1]    3. the charge that passes through the resistance wire in 5.5 minutes.  charge =    [2]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 8 fig. 8.1 shows a ray of red light incident on one side of a glass prism in air. red lightglass prism fig. 8.1  for red light, the refractive index of glass is  nr.  (a) the angle of incidence is 53\u00b0 and the angle of refraction in the glass is 30\u00b0.   (i) calculate nr.  nr =    [2]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, sketch a line to indicate the path of the red light when it emerges from the  glass prism. label this path r.  [1]   (iii) explain why the quantity refractive index  does not have a unit.  ...  .  [1]  (b) for violet light, the refractive index nv of glass is slightly larger than nr.   (i) a ray of violet light is incident on the prism along the same path as the ray of red light.    on fig. 8.1, sketch a line to indicate the path of the violet light in the prism and when it  emerges into the air. label this path v.  [1]   (ii) when a ray of white light is incident on the prism, dispersion produces a continuous  spectrum of coloured light.    state how the speed of light in glass depends on its frequency. explain how this is shown  by the dispersion of white light in the prism. statement  .. explanation    ...  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "17": "17 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over blank page",
            "18": "18 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 9 (a) the chemical symbol of the element lithium is li. the proton number of lithium is 3.   fig. 9.1 is a representation of a nucleus of a radioactive isotope of lithium that is about to  decay. fig. 9.1   (i) write down, using nuclide notation, the symbol that represents this isotope of lithium.  .  [1]   (ii) this isotope of lithium decays by \u03b2-particle emission to form another nucleus.    complete fig. 9.2 to represent this decay by: \u2022 using the same representation as in fig. 9.1 and in the space after the arrow, draw  a diagram of the nucleus formed by the decay \u2022 writing the name of the particle that is identical to a \u03b2-particle on the answer line  provided.    +  . fig. 9.2  [3]  (b) a radiation detector is set up in a laboratory where there are no radioactive samples.   on six separate occasions, the detector is switched on for 1.0 minute and the background  count is recorded. the counts are:      23   27   25   24   20   25   (i) state why the readings are not all identical.  .  [1]   (ii) suggest a possible source for this background radiation.  .  [1]",
            "19": "19 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019   (iii) a sample containing only one radioactive isotope is brought into the laboratory. the  half-life of the isotope is 15  hours.    the sample is placed near to the radiation detector in this laboratory. the detector is  switched on and, after 1.0  minute, a count of 440 is recorded.    the sample is left next to the detector and the experiment is repeated 45  hours later.    the detector is switched on for 1.0 minute.    predict the reading for the count obtained on this occasion.  reading    [3]  [total: 9]",
            "20": "20 0625/41/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "*6524394752*cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate. this document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (nf/cb) 174868/3 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn overphysics  0625/42 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question.",
            "2": "2 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 fig. 1.1 is the top view of a rectangular paddling pool of constant depth. the pool is filled with  sea water. 44.0  m 20.0  m fig. 1.1  (not to scale)  (a) the volume of the sea water in the pool is 264  m3.   calculate the depth of the pool.  depth =    [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) the mass of the sea water in the pool is 2.70 \u00d7 105 kg.   calculate the density of the sea water. give your answer to 3 significant figures.  density =    [2]  (c) calculate the pressure due to the sea water at the bottom of the pool.  pressure =    [2]  (d) state a suitable instrument for measuring the dimensions given in fig. 1.1.  .  [1] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2  (a) state the two conditions which must be true for an object to be in equilibrium. condition 1   condition 2   [2]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows a uniform metre rule pq in equilibrium. 0.50  np qf 10 cm 40 cm pivot fig. 2.1   the distance pq is 100  cm. the mass of the metre rule is 0.12  kg and its weight is w.   (i) on fig 2.1, draw and label:    1. an arrow to show the force w acting on pq at the centre of mass    2. an arrow to show the force r acting on pq at the pivot. [2]   (ii) by taking moments about the pivot, calculate f.  f =    [4]   (iii) calculate r.  r =    [2] [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over3 fig. 3.1 shows a gas contained in a cylinder enclosed by a piston. pressure gauge cylinderpiston gas fig. 3.1  (a) describe, in terms of momentum of the molecules, how a pressure is exerted on the walls of  the cylinder.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the piston is pushed into the cylinder. the volume decreases from 820 cm3 to 330 cm3 . the  pressure gauge measures the pressure after compression as 20 000 pa. the temperature  remains constant.   calculate the value of the pressure before the gas was compressed.  pressure =    [3] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 (a) a student carries out an experiment to determine the thermal capacity of a metal block. the  block is heated by an electric heater for 23 minutes. the current in the heater is 3.0  a at a  potential difference (p.d.) of 12  v.   the temperature of the block rises from 20  \u00b0c to 70  \u00b0c.   calculate the thermal capacity of the block.  thermal capacity =    [4]  (b) 1. two metal spheres of different diameters are heated to 900  \u00b0c in a hot oven. the two  spheres are removed from the oven.   state and explain any difference in the initial rates of emission of radiation of thermal energy  between the two spheres.  ...  ...  ...   2. one hot sphere is now heated in a hotter oven.   state and explain any effect on the rate of emission of radiation of thermal energy from that  sphere when it is removed from the hotter oven.  ...  ... [3] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 (a) one difference between a longitudinal wave and a transverse wave is that a longitudinal  wave consists of compressions and rarefactions.   (i) explain the terms compression and rarefaction using ideas about particles. compression  ..  ...  ... rarefaction  .  ...  ... [2]   (ii) describe one other way in which longitudinal wave motion differs from transverse wave  motion. longitudinal wave motion  ..  ...  ... transverse wave motion  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) (i) a sound wave of frequency 0.120  khz travels through a rock at a speed of 3500  m / s.    calculate the wavelength of the wave.  wavelength =    [3]   (ii) the wave travels from the rock into the air.    state and explain whether the wave will be audible to a healthy human ear. statement  .. explanation    ... [2] [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows an empty container and an observer\u2019s eye. there is a small coin at position o.  the observer is unable to see the coin. eye o fig. 6.1   the observer and the coin stay in the same position and the container is filled with water. the  observer can now see the coin.   (i) explain why the coin can be seen by the observer.  ...  .  [2]   (ii) state the name of the wave process which occurs as the light passes from the water into  the air.  .  [1]   (iii) explain why the image of the coin is a virtual image.  .  [1]  (b) state the speed of light in air.  .  [1]  (c) the refractive index of water is 1.3.   calculate the speed of light in water.  speed of light in water =    [3] [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a coil of wire wound on a thin plastic cylinder. the plastic has no effect on any  magnetic field. the galvanometer is extremely sensitive. bsn a plastic cylindermagnet small trolleycoil of wire  fig. 7.1   a magnet is fixed to a small trolley that runs without friction on a track through the cylinder  and coil.   (i) the trolley is released from point a so it runs through the coil from right to left.    state and explain what is observed on the galvanometer.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) the trolley is now released from point b so it runs through the coil from right to left again.    state what is observed on the galvanometer and explain why it is different to your answer  in (a)(i) .  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 (b) fig. 7.2 shows an extension lead used to supply power to a 3 kw electric heater on a cool  evening. damp grass3 kw electric heater cut in outer insulation plug and socket lying on grass paved area extension lead designed for use with a 25  w lamp fig. 7.2   state and explain three dangers with this arrangement. danger 1  ...  ...  ... danger 2  ...  ...  ... danger 3  ...    ...  ... [4] [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 8 (a) a wire of length 2.0  m and cross-sectional area 0.40  mm2 has a resistance of 0.14  \u03c9.   calculate the resistance of another wire of the same material of length 3.0  m and  cross -sectional area 0.90  mm2.  resistance =  .  \u03c9 [4]  (b) a student is designing a digital electronic circuit. fig. 8.1 shows her partly completed design. ac o d b fig. 8.1   (i) table 8.1 is a truth table.    complete the columns in this truth table to show the values for input b in the circuit. table 8.1 input a input b point c point d output o 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 [2]   (ii) the column o in the truth table shows the desired output values for the circuit.    on fig. 8.1, complete the circuit to achieve these output values. label any gate used.  [2] [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 9 (a) describe what is meant by the term electric field .  ...  .  [1]  (b) fig. 9.1 shows two parallel conducting plates connected to a battery. conducting plate fig. 9.1   on fig. 9.1, draw five lines to show the electric field pattern between the two plates.  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) when fully charged, a 1.2  v rechargeable battery can deliver a current of 210  ma for 10  hours.   (i) calculate the charge that can be delivered by the fully charged battery.   charge =    [3]   (ii) calculate the energy stored in the battery when fully charged.   energy stored =    [2]   (iii) state the type of energy stored when the battery is charged.  .  [1] [total: 9]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 10 (a) the nucleus of a hydrogen atom is a proton. the mass of a proton is m and the size of the  charge on a proton is e.   complete table 10.1. express your answers in terms of m and e. three spaces have already  been completed. table 10.1 particle or emission mass charge proton m e neutron m \u03b3-ray nucleus of helium-4 (4 2he) [4]  (b) many schools and colleges use radioactive isotopes for teaching and research. describe how  these radioactive isotopes are handled, used and stored in a safe way.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/42/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (pq/sg) 174869/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *0333479926* physics  0625/43 paper 4  theory (extended)  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 fig. 1.1 is the top view of a tank in an aquarium. the tank is filled with salt water. 1.6 m 3.2 m1.1 m 1.0 m fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  the depth of the water in the tank is 2.0  m.  (a) calculate the volume of the water in the tank.  volume =    [3]  (b) the density of the water in the tank is 1.1 \u00d7 103 kg / m3.    calculate the mass of the water in the tank.  mass =    [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) calculate the pressure due to the water at a level of 0.80  m above the base of the tank.  pressure =    [3]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 (a) (i) state, in words, the equation that defines the moment of a force .  ...  .  [2]   (ii) state what is meant by the moment of a force .  .  [1]   (iii) force  is a vector quantity.    explain what is meant by the term vector .  ...  .  [1]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows a tower crane used to lift a load on a construction site.  counterweight load fig. 2.1   explain how the counterweight prevents the crane from toppling over.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 3 (a) fig. 3.1 shows a waterfall. h fig. 3.1   (i) describe the main energy transfer which is taking place as the water falls.  .  [2]   (ii) the speed of the water as it hits the bottom is 21  m / s.    calculate the height h of the waterfall.   height =    [3]   (iii) state and explain any assumption you made in (ii).  .  [1]  (b) the sun is the source of energy for most energy resources used to produce electricity.   state two energy resources that have another source for their energy. 1.  ..   2.  ..    [2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 solids have a fixed shape. liquids adapt to the shape of their container. gases fill their container.  explain in terms of forces between molecules and arrangement of molecules, why solids, liquids  and gases have these properties. solids  ...  ..  .. liquids  ..  ..  .. gases  ...  ..  ..  [6] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 5 an electric kettle contains water at a temperature of 19  \u00b0c. the kettle has a power rating of 3.0  kw  and is switched on for 3.5 minutes.    (a) calculate the energy supplied to the kettle by the electricity supply.  electrical energy =    [3]  (b) at 3.5 minutes, the temperature of the water reaches 100  \u00b0c. the volume of the water in  the kettle is 1700  cm3 and its density is 1.0  g / cm3. the specific heat capacity of water is  4200  j / (kg \u00b0c).    calculate the thermal energy gained by the water.  thermal energy =    [5]  (c) calculate the efficiency of the kettle.  efficiency =    [2] [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 6 fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of a sound wave travelling in air from left to right. ab fig. 6.1  (a) state the name given to the:   (i) region around a in the diagram  ...  [1]   (ii) region around b in the diagram.  ...  [1]  (b) on fig. 6.1, draw a double-headed arrow to show one wavelength.  [1]  (c) the loudness of the sound increases at the same pitch.    state and explain any change there would be in the pattern of wavefronts shown in fig. 6.1.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (d) the wave passes into water.    state and explain any change in the pattern of wavefronts shown in fig. 6.1.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 9]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows the position of a converging lens, its principal axis and an object o. f f lensoprincipal axis fig. 7.1   each principal focus of the lens is labelled f.   on fig. 7.1, draw a ray diagram to locate the position of the image formed by the lens.     label the image i. [3]  (b) describe the nature of the image i.  .  [2]  (c) images formed by lenses sometimes have coloured edges.    suggest a reason for this.    ...  .  [1] [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a negatively charged conducting sphere. \u2212 \u2212\u2212 \u2212\u2212 \u2212\u2212 \u2212 fig. 8.1   on fig. 8.1, draw the electric field pattern around the sphere.  [2]  (b) the current in an electrical device is 0.21  a.   calculate the charge that flows during a 75  s period of time.  charge =    [2] [total: 4]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 9 fig. 9.1 shows a circuit containing an led and two resistors in parallel, each of resistance r. r r 3.7 v fig. 9.1  the normal operating voltage of the led is 2.1  v and the normal current is 0.19  a.  (a) (i) the potential difference (p.d.) across the led is measured with a voltmeter.     on fig. 9.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit.  [1]    (ii) the current in the led is measured with an ammeter.    on fig. 9.1, draw the symbol for this ammeter connected to the circuit.  [1]  (b) calculate the value of r when the led is operating normally.  r =    [5] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 10 (a) a magnet and a coil are attached separately to a door and a door frame as shown in   fig. 10.1.   the purpose of the arrangement is to activate a circuit connected to an led indicator when  the door is opening or closing. this will provide a visual indication that the door is being used. n smagnetcoil doorindicator door frame fig. 10.1   initially, the door is closed and then it is opened.   (i) explain why the indicator comes on and then goes off when the door is opened.  ...  ...  .  [2]    (ii) the door shuts. the indicator comes on more brightly but for a shorter time than it  did in (i). suggest and explain why this happens.  ...  ...  .  [2] ",
            "13": "13 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) a circuit breaker is recommended for use with an electric lawnmower.   state two reasons for this recommendation. reason 1  .  ... reason 2  .  ...    [2]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 11 (a) the circles shown in fig. 11.1 represent three gold nuclei. three \u03b1-particles are approaching  the gold nuclei. \u03b1-particle \u03b1-particle \u03b1-particle fig. 11.1   on fig. 11.1, complete the path of each \u03b1-particle.  [3]  (b) a detector of radioactivity in a laboratory indicates an average of 16 counts  / min when no  radioactive samples are present. a radioactive sample of half-life 1.5 days is placed close to  the detector, which indicates a count rate of 208 counts  / min.    calculate the count rate that is indicated 6 days later.  count rate =  .. counts  / min [4]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) the waste from nuclear power stations includes the isotopes technetium-99, tin-126 and  selenium-79. these isotopes are radioactive with half-lives of many thousands of years.   state three  economic and environmental consequences of producing this waste.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 10]",
            "16": "16 0625/43/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. dc (pq/tp) 176076/2 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *0485289887* physics  0625/51 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. a b p metre rule0 cm mark bench pivot50.0  cm mark 90.0  cm mark fig. 1.1  (a) \u2022  place the metre rule on the pivot. place the load p, labelled 1.5 n, on the metre rule at  the 90.0  cm mark. keep p at the 90.0  cm mark and adjust the position of the metre rule  on the pivot so that the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced. \u2022 in table 1.1, record the distance a from the 50.0  cm mark to the pivot. \u2022 in table 1.1, record the distance b from the 90.0  cm mark to the pivot. \u2022 calculate a b. record its value in table 1.1. \u2022 repeat the procedure using the loads labelled 1.2 n, 1.0 n, 0.8 n and 0.5 n.  table 1.1 weight of  load p / na / cm b / cma b 1.5 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.5  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b)  plot a graph of weight of load p / n (y-axis) against a b (x-axis). you do not need to begin your  axes at the origin, (0,0).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [2]  (d) the gradient g is numerically equal to the weight w of the metre rule.   write down the value of w to an appropriate number of significant figures for this experiment.  include the unit.  w =    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of lamps.  the circuit shown in fig. 2.1 has been set up for you.  a vpower supply l1 fig. 2.1  (a) (i) close the switch. measure and record the potential difference (p.d.) v1 across the lamp  l1 and the current i1 in the circuit. open the switch.  v1 =  ..  i1 =  ..  [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r1 of the lamp l1 using the equation r1 = v1 i1.  r1 =    [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) disconnect the voltmeter.    connect the lamp l2 in series with the lamp l1.   connect the voltmeter across the two lamps  l1 and l2. close the switch.  \u2022  measure and record the p.d. v2 across lamps l1 and l2 and the current i2 in the circuit.  open the switch.  v2 =  ..  i2 =  .. \u2022  calculate the combined resistance r2 of lamps l1 and l2 connected in series, using the  equation r2 = v2 i2.  r2 =  ..  [1]  (c) disconnect the voltmeter.    connect the lamp  l3 in series with lamps l1 and l2.     connect the voltmeter across all three lamps. close the switch.  \u2022  measure and record the potential difference v3 across the three lamps and the current i3  in the circuit. open the switch.  v3 =  ..  i3 =  .. \u2022  calculate the combined resistance r3 of lamps l1, l2 and l3 connected in series, using  the equation r3 = v3 i3.  r3 =  ..   [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (d) a student suggests that the resistance r3 of the three lamps connected in series should be  given by the equation r3 = 3 \u00d7 r1.   state whether your results agree with this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  your results.  statement  .. justification  .  ...  ...  [2]  (e)  complete the circuit diagram in fig. 2.2 to show:  \u2022 three lamps connected in parallel \u2022 a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the lamps \u2022 a variable resistor connected to control the current in all three lamps. apower supply fig. 2.2  [3]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water.  (a) use the thermometer to measure room temperature \u03b8r.   \u03b8r =    [1]  (b) \u2022 pour 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker. place the thermometer in the beaker.  \u2022 measure the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water in the beaker and immediately start the  stopclock.  \u2022 record this temperature in table 3.1 at time t = 0. \u2022 continue recording the temperature \u03b8 of the water every 60  s until you have a total of six  sets of readings of time and temperature in table 3.1. \u2022 complete the column headings in table 3.1. table 3.1 t / \u03b8 / 0  [2]   (c) \u2022 calculate the decrease in temperature \u03b4\u03b81 during the  first  120 s.  \u03b4\u03b81 =  .. \u2022 calculate the decrease in temperature \u03b4\u03b82 during the last 120 s.  \u03b4\u03b82 =  ..  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d)  (i) tick the box to show your conclusion from the results in (c).      \t\tthe average rate of cooling is greater in the first 120  s than the average rate of  cooling in the last 120  s.       \t\tthe average rate of cooling is less in the first 120  s than the average rate of  cooling in the last 120  s.       \tthe average rate of cooling is the same in the first 120  s as in the last 120  s.  [1]   (ii)  justify your conclusion in (d)(i)  by reference to the results.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (e) suggest two ways in which you could reduce the rate of loss of thermal energy from the  beaker in this type of experiment. 1  ...  ... 2  ...  ...  [2]  (f) draw a diagram of a measuring cylinder being used to determine the volume of water poured  into the measuring cylinder. show clearly the water level and draw a straight line showing the  line of sight required to obtain an accurate reading of the volume of water.    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 a student investigates the time taken for metal balls to stop moving after being released on a  curved track. fig. 4.1 shows the shape of the track. the track is flexible, so the shape of the curve  can be changed. metal ball fig. 4.1  the following apparatus is available:  a selection of metal balls of different masses  the flexible track  clamps to hold the track  a stopwatch  a tape measure  a metre rule  the student can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school  laboratory.  plan an experiment to investigate a factor that affects the time taken for metal balls to stop moving  after being released on a curved track. you are not required to carry out this investigation.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 describe how you would expect the balls to move \u2022 explain how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state which variables you would keep constant and which variable you would change \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may add to the diagram in fig. 4.1 if it helps your explanation.",
            "11": "11 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (jc/sg) 176074/3 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *9354553539* physics  0625/52 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question 4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 in this experiment, you will investigate a pendulum. carry out the following instructions, referring  to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. clamp one complete oscillationdclamp bob   fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  a pendulum has been set up for you as shown in fig. 1.1.  (a) \u2022  adjust the length of the pendulum until the distance d measured to the centre of the bob  is 50.0  cm.    \u2022  displace the bob slightly and release it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one complete  oscillation of the pendulum.   \u2022  measure, and record in table 1.1, the time t for 20 complete oscillations.    \u2022  calculate, and record in table 1.1, the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time  for one complete oscillation.   \u2022  calculate t 2. record its value in table 1.1.   \u2022  repeat the procedure using d = 60.0  cm, 70.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm. table 1.1 d / cm t / s t / s t  2 / s2  50.0  60.0  70.0  80.0 100.0  [4]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of t  2 / s2 (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the line. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  .  [1]  (d) calculate the acceleration of free fall g in m  / s2 using the equation g = 0.395 g , where g is your  gradient from (c).   write down the value of g to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  g =  . m / s2 [2] [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 2 in this experiment, you will determine the resistance of a resistance wire.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. a l p sliding contact  cresistance wire metre rulepower supply v fig. 2.1  (a) (i) close switch.    measure and record the current i in the circuit.  i =  .  [2]    (ii) \u2022  place the sliding contact c at a distance l = 20.0  cm from p.  \u2022 measure, and record in table 2.1, the potential difference v across the length l of  the resistance wire. \u2022 calculate, and record in table 2.1, the resistance r of 20.0  cm of the resistance     wire. use the equation r = v i . \u2022 repeat the procedure using l values of 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm.  \u2022 open switch. table 2.1 l / cm v / v r / \u03c9  20.0  40.0  60.0  80.0 100.0  [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) look carefully at the values of l and r in table 2.1.    (i) tick one box to show your conclusion from the results.     r is constant within the limits of experimental accuracy.     r is directly proportional to l within the limits of experimental accuracy.     r decreases as l increases.     there is no simple relationship between r and l.  [1]   (ii)  justify your conclusion by reference to your results.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (c) (i) use the values in table 2.1 to estimate the potential difference ve across 50.0  cm of the  resistance wire.  ve =  .  [1]   (ii) calculate the resistance of 50.0  cm of the resistance wire using the equation r = ve i .    use the value of current i from part (a). give your answer to a suitable number of  significant figures for this experiment and include the unit.  r =  .  [2] [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 in this experiment, you will determine the focal length f of a lens.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated objectud lensscreen benchv fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022  place the screen a distance d = 80.0  cm from the illuminated object. \u2022 place the lens between the object and the screen so that the lens is very close to the  screen. \u2022 move the lens slowly away from the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on  the screen.   (i) measure, and record in table 3.1, the distance u between the centre of the lens and the  illuminated object.  [1]   (ii) measure, and record in table 3.1, the distance v between the centre of the lens and the  screen.  [1]   (iii) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the focal length f of the lens using the equation   f = uv d . [1]  (b) keep the screen at the distance d = 80.0  cm from the illuminated object. \u2022 move the lens slowly away from the screen. the image will go out of focus.  \u2022 continue to move the lens slowly further away from the screen until another clearly  focused (and now magnified) image is formed on the screen.  \u2022 measure, and record in table 3.1, the distance u between the centre of the lens and the  illuminated object.  \u2022 measure, and record in table 3.1, the distance v between the centre of the lens and the  screen.  \u2022 calculate, and record in table 3.1, the focal length f of the lens using the equation    f = uv d .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over table 3.1 u / cm v / cm f / cm  (c) calculate the average value fa of the focal length of the lens. give your answer to a suitable  number of significant figures for this experiment.  fa =  ...  cm [2]  (d) state one precaution that you would take to obtain accurate readings in this experiment.  ...  .  [1]  (e) another student wants to obtain more measurements for u and for v to check the value for the  focal length f of this lens. the student moves the screen a distance of 40.0  cm to the right.   (i) calculate the new value for the distance d between the illuminated object and the  screen.  d =  ...  cm [1]   (ii) the student moves the lens to a new position which is a distance from the object  u = 22.2 cm. he observes the image on the screen and says it is clearly focussed at a  distance v = 97.9  cm.    calculate the new value of the focal length f of the lens using f = uv d .  f =  ...  cm [1]   (iii) state and explain briefly whether the values for fa and f \u200ain (e)(ii)  are the same within the  limits of experimental accuracy.  ...  ...  .  [1] [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 a student investigates the time taken for ice cubes in a container to melt using different insulating  materials on the container.   the following apparatus is available:   a copper container   a variety of insulating materials that can be wrapped around the copper container   a thermometer   a stopwatch   a supply of ice cubes  the student can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school  laboratory.  plan an experiment to investigate the time taken for ice cubes to melt using different insulating  materials.  you are not required to carry out this investigation.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 draw a diagram of the apparatus used \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "9": "9 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "11": "11 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (sc/cb) 176072/2 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *9524381544* physics  0625/53 paper 5  practical test  october/november 2019  1 hour 15 minutes candidates answer on the question paper. additional materials:  as listed in the confidential instructions read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. you are advised to spend about 20 minutes on each of questions 1 to 3, and about 15 minutes on question  4. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part  question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 in this experiment, you will investigate how the resistance of a filament lamp changes as the  potential difference (p.d.) across it changes.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. power supply crocodile clipslide wire metre rule lamp0.0 cm mark al v fig. 1.1  (a) \u2022 close the switch. \u2022 adjust the position of the crocodile clip, so that the length l of the slide wire connected is  20.0 cm. \u2022 record in table 1.1 the value of the p.d. v and the current i for the lamp. \u2022 move the crocodile clip and record values of v and i for l = 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm  and 100.0  cm. \u2022 open the switch.  [2] table 1.1 l / cm v / v i / a r / \u03c9 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0  (b) calculate, and record in table 1.1, the resistance r of the lamp at each value of l.   use the equation r = v i. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) plot a graph of r / \u03c9 (y-axis) against v / v (x-axis).  [4]  (d) state what the shape of the graph tells you about how the resistance of the lamp changes  with the temperature of the filament.   justify your statement using your results from the graph and your observation of the brightness  of the lamp as the length of the slide wire changes. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (e) in this type of experiment, it is possible to change the current and potential difference for the  lamp by using a variable resistor instead of a slide wire.   on fig. 1.2, complete the circuit diagram to show a variable resistor used for this purpose. power supply a v fig. 1.2  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 in this experiment you will determine the focal length of a converging lens by two different methods.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. illuminated triangle lensscreen benchu v ho fig. 2.1  (a)  \u2022 arrange the apparatus as shown in fig. 2.1 and switch on the lamp. \u2022 set the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens to 25.0  cm. \u2022 place the screen near the lens.  \u2022 move the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is seen on the screen.  method 1   (i) measure the distance v between the lens and the screen as indicated in fig. 2.1.  v =  .  [1]   (ii) calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation f1 = uv (u + v).  f1 =  .  [2]   (iii) briefly describe a technique to obtain an image on the screen that is as sharp as possible  in this experiment.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  method 2  (b) keep the screen and lens in the same place so that u and v are the same as in (a).   (i) measure hi, the height of the image of the triangle on the screen.  hi =  ...    measure ho, the height of the illuminated triangle, as indicated in fig. 2.1.  ho =  ...  [1]   (ii) calculate a value m for the magnification, using the equation m = hi ho.  m =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate a second value f2 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation f2 = v (m + 1).  f2 =  .  [1]  (c) a student suggests that f1 and f2 should be equal.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference to  your results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]  (d) state one precaution that could be taken to ensure that the measurements in the experiment  can be taken as reliably as possible.  ...  .  [1]  (e) suggest which of method 1  or method 2  is likely to give the more accurate value for the focal  length.   explain the reason for your choice. suggestion   explanation  ...  ...  ...  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 3 in this experiment you will investigate the behaviour of a spring.  a stand and spring have been set up for you as shown in fig. 3.1. clamp springl0 fig. 3.1  (a) (i) measure the length l0 of the spring without any load.  l0 =   cm [1]   (ii) describe two precautions that could be taken when measuring the length of the  stationary spring, to ensure an accurate reading. you may draw a diagram. 1  ...  ... 2  ...  ...  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.2. loadl fig. 3.2 \u2022 hang a load l = 1.0  n on the spring as shown in fig. 3.2.  \u2022 measure, and record in table 3.1, the stretched length l of the spring. \u2022 repeat the process for l values of 2.0  n and 3.0  n. table 3.1 l\u2009\u200a/\u2009\u200an l\u2009\u200a/\u2009\u200acm e\u2009\u200a/\u2009\u200acm 1.0 2.0 3.0  [1]  (c) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the extension e of the spring for each load l.   use your values from (a) and (b) and the equation e = ( l \u2013 l0).  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d)  \u2022 remove load l from the spring. suspend object x from the spring. measure the stretched  length lx of the spring.  lx =  .. cm \u2022 estimate the weight wx of object x.    explain how you obtained your answer.  ...  ...  ...  wx =  ...  n  [2]  (e) (i) a student suggests that e is directly proportional to l.    state whether your results support this suggestion.    use values from your results in table 3.1 to justify your statement.  statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]   (ii) the student wishes to plot a graph of l against e to test if the two quantities are  proportional.    state how her graph line could show that e is directly proportional to l.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 a student is investigating ways of slowing the rate of cooling of hot liquids in a container.  the student knows that a lid will reduce the rate of cooling. he wants to find out if the thickness of  the lid makes any difference to the rate of cooling.  plan an experiment which will enable him to compare the effects of lids of different thicknesses.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list the apparatus needed \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements to  be taken \u2022 state any key variables that would need to be kept the same \u2022 draw a suitable table or tables, with column headings, to show how the readings would  be displayed (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (pq/tp) 176070/2 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *1100468699* physics  0625/61 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2019  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a student determines the weight of a metre rule using a balancing method.  fig. 1.1. shows the apparatus.  a b p metre rule0 cm mark bench pivot50.0  cm mark 90.0  cm mark fig. 1.1  (a) \u2022 the student places the metre rule on the pivot.  \u2022 he places the load p, labelled 1.5 n, on the metre rule at the 90.0  cm mark. \u2022 keeping p at the 90.0  cm mark, he adjusts the position of the metre rule on the pivot so  that the metre rule is as near as possible to being balanced. \u2022 in table 1.1, he records the distance a from the 50.0  cm mark to the pivot.   (i) calculate, and record in table 1.1, the distance b between the centre of load p and the  pivot.  [1]     (ii) calculate a b. record its value in table 1.1.  [1]  (b) the student repeats the procedure using loads of 1.2  n, 1.0  n, 0.8  n and 0.5  n. the readings  and results are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 weight of  load, p / na / cm b / cma b 1.5 23.1 1.2 21.2 18.8 1.13 1.0 18.9 21.1 0.900 0.8 16.8 23.2 0.724 0.5 12.5 27.5 0.455",
            "3": "3 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   plot a graph of weight of load p / n (y-axis) against a b (x-axis). you do not need to begin your  axes at the origin, (0,0).  [4]  (c) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [2]  (d) the gradient g is numerically equal to the weight w of the metre rule. write down the value of  w to an appropriate number of significant figures for this experiment. include the unit.  w =    [2]  (e) the student has assumed that the centre of mass of the metre rule is at the 50.0  cm mark.  explain briefly how you would find as accurately as possible the position of the centre of  mass of the metre rule. no extra apparatus or materials are available.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (f) briefly state the main difficulty that you would have when carrying out this type of balancing  experiment.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 12]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 a student investigates the resistance of lamps.  she uses the circuit shown in fig. 2.1. a vpower supply l1 fig. 2.1  (a) she records the potential difference v1 across the lamp l1 and the current i1 in the circuit.  the meters are shown in fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3.    (i) write down the meter readings.  v67 38 9 1 1045 2 0  00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0  fig. 2.2   fig. 2.3  v1 =  ..  i1 =  ..  [3]    (ii) calculate the resistance r1 of the lamp l1 using the equation r1 = v1 i1.  r1 =    [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) the student connects a lamp l2 in series with lamp l1.     she records the potential difference v2 across lamps l1 and l2 and the current i2 in the  circuit.   2.4 v  v2 =  ..  i2 =  ..       0.21 a   calculate the combined resistance r2 of lamps l1 and l2 connected in series, using the  equation   r2 = v2 i2.  r2 =  ..  [1]  (c) she connects a lamp l3 in series with lamps l1 and l2.    she records the potential difference v3 across the three lamps and the current i3 in the circuit.    she calculates the combined resistance r3.  2.4 v  v3 =  ..   0.17 a  i3 =  ..   14.1 \u03c9  r3 =  ..   a student suggests that the resistance r3 of the three lamps connected in series should  be given by the equation r3 = 3 \u00d7 r1. state whether the results agree with this suggestion.  justify your answer by reference to the results.  statement  .. justification  ... .  ...  ...  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d) complete the circuit diagram in fig. 2.4 to show:  \u2022  the three lamps connected in parallel \u2022  the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the lamps \u2022  a variable resistor connected to control the current in all three lamps. apower supply fig. 2.4  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 a student investigates the cooling of water.  (a) the thermometer in fig. 3.1 shows room temperature \u03b8r at the beginning of the experiment.  record \u03b8r. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 3.1  \u03b8r =    [1]  (b) \u2022  the student pours 200  cm3 of hot water into a beaker. he places a thermometer in the  water.  \u2022  he measures the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water in the beaker.  \u2022  he immediately starts the stopclock and continues recording the temperature of the  water every 60  s. the temperature readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 t / \u03b8 / 0 95 89 85 81 78   (i) complete the time column in table 3.1.  [1]    (ii) complete the column headings in table 3.1.  [1]  (c)  \u2022 calculate the decrease in temperature \u03b4\u03b81 during the first 120 s.  \u03b4\u03b81 =  .. \u2022  calculate the decrease in temperature \u03b4\u03b82 during the last 120 s.  \u03b4\u03b82 =  ..  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d)  (i) tick the box to show your conclusion from the results in (c).     \t\tthe average rate of cooling is greater in the first 120  s than the average rate of  cooling in the last 120  s.      \t\tthe average rate of cooling is less in the first 120  s than the average rate of  cooling in the last 120  s.      \tthe average rate of cooling is the same in the first 120  s as the last 120  s.  [1]   (ii)  justify your conclusion in (d)(i)  by reference to the results.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (e) suggest two ways in which the student could reduce the rate of loss of thermal energy from  the beaker in this type of experiment. 1  ... 2  ...  [2]  (f) draw a diagram of a measuring cylinder being used to determine the volume of water. show  clearly the water level and draw, with a ruler, a straight line showing the line of sight required  to obtain an accurate reading of the volume of water.  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 a student is investigating the time taken for metal balls to stop moving after being released on a  curved track. fig. 4.1 shows the shape of the track. the track is flexible, so the shape of the curve  can be changed. metal ball fig. 4.1  the following apparatus is available:  a selection of metal balls of different masses  the flexible track  clamps to hold the track  a stopwatch  a tape measure  a metre rule  the student can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school  laboratory.  plan an experiment to investigate a factor that affects the time taken for metal balls to stop moving  after being released on a curved track.   in your plan, you should: \u2022 state how you would expect the balls to move \u2022 explain how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state which variables you would keep constant and which variable you would change \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.",
            "11": "11 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  you may add to the diagram in fig. 4.1 if it helps your explanation.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. dc (jc/sg) 176069/4 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *9783901804* physics  0625/62 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2019  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a student investigates a pendulum. fig.  1.1 and fig.  1.2 show some of the apparatus used. dclamp bobclamp one complete oscillation   fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2    (a) the student adjusts the length of the pendulum until the distance d, measured to the centre of  the bob, is 50.0  cm. state one precaution that you would take to obtain the length of 50.0  cm  as accurately as possible.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the student displaces the bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one  complete oscillation of the pendulum.   (i) he measures the time t for 20 complete oscillations. the time t is shown on the stopwatch  in fig. 1.3. 00:27. 60min seconds s1 100 fig. 1.3    in the first row of table 1.1, record the time t shown in fig. 1.3.  [1]     (ii) calculate, and record in table 1.1, the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time  for one complete oscillation.  [1]   (iii) calculate t  2. record its value in table 1.1.  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) the student repeats the procedure in (b) using d = 60.0  cm, 70.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm.  the readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 d / cm t / s t / s t  2 / s2  50.0  60.0 30.00 1.50 2.25  70.0 33.20 1.66 2.76  80.0 35.80 1.79 3.20 100.0 39.80 1.99 3.96   plot a graph of t  2 / s2 (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0,0).  [4]  (d)  determine the gradient g of the line. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =     [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (e) calculate the acceleration of free fall g in m  / s2 using the equation g = 0.395 g , where g is your  gradient from (d).    write down the value of g to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  g =  . m / s2 [2] [total: 12]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 a student determines the resistance of a resistance wire.  she uses the circuit shown in fig. 2.1. a l p sliding contact  cresistance wirepower supply v fig. 2.1  (a) she measures the current i in the circuit. write down the current reading shown in fig. 2.2.  i =  .  [2]  00.20.4 0.6 a0.8 1.0 fig. 2.2",
            "6": "6 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (b) she places the sliding contact c at a distance l = 20.0  cm from p.    she records the potential difference v across the length l of the resistance wire.   she repeats the procedure using l values of 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm.    the readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 l / cm v / r /  20.0 0.60  40.0 1.10 1.96  60.0 1.71 3.05  80.0 2.30 4.11 100.0 2.78 4.96   (i) calculate, and record in table 2.1, the resistance r of 20.0  cm of the resistance wire.    use the equation r = v i. [2]   (ii) complete the column headings in table 2.1.  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (c) look carefully at the values of l and r in table 2.1.    (i)  tick one box to show your conclusion from the results.     r is constant within the limits of experimental accuracy.     r is directly proportional to l within the limits of experimental accuracy.     r decreases as l increases.     there is no simple relationship between r and l. [1]   (ii)  justify your conclusion by reference to the results.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (d) (i) use the values in table 2.1 to estimate the potential difference ve across 50.0  cm of the  resistance wire.  ve =  .  [1]   (ii) calculate the resistance of 50.0  cm of the resistance wire using the equation r = ve i.     use the value of current i from part (a). give your answer to a suitable number of  significant figures for this experiment and include the unit.  r =  .  [2]  (e) in this type of experiment, it is sensible to keep the temperature of the resistance wire as  close to room temperature as possible. suggest one simple way to minimise the rise in  temperature of the resistance wire.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 a student determines the focal length f of a lens.  fig. 3.1 shows the set-up. illuminated objectud lensscreen benchv fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 he places the screen at a fixed distance from the illuminated object.   \u2022  he places the lens between the object and the screen so that the lens is very close to  the screen.   \u2022  he moves the lens slowly away from the screen until a clearly focused image is formed  on the screen.   \u2022  he measures the distance u between the object and the centre of the lens and the  distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen. the readings are shown in  table 3.1.   (i) on fig. 3.1, measure the distance d between the illuminated object and the screen.   d =  .  [1]   (ii) fig. 3.1 is drawn 1  / 10th actual size. calculate the actual distance d between the  illuminated object and the screen.  d =  .  [1]  (b) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = uv d. [1]  (c) \u2022 the student keeps the screen at the same fixed distance d from the illuminated object.   \u2022  he moves the lens slowly away from the screen. the image goes out of focus.    \u2022  he continues to move the lens slowly away from the screen until another clearly focused  image is formed on the screen.    \u2022  he records the new readings of u and v in table 3.1.   (i) calculate, and record in table 3.1 the new value for the focal length f of the lens using  the equation f = uv d. [1] ",
            "9": "9 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over table 3.1 u / cm v / cm f / cm 59.8 20.4 19.8 60.0   (ii) calculate the average value fa of the focal length of the lens. give your answer to a  suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  fa =  ...  cm [2]  (d) state one precaution that you would take to obtain accurate readings in this experiment.  ...  .  [1]  (e) another student wants to obtain more measurements for u and for v to check the value for the  focal length f of the lens. the student moves the screen a distance of 40.0  cm to the right.   (i) calculate the new value for the distance d between the illuminated object and the  screen.  d =  ...  cm [1]   (ii) the student moves the lens to a new position which is a distance from the object  u = 22.2 cm. he observes the image on the screen and says it is clearly focussed at a  distance v = 97.9  cm.    calculate the new value of the focal length f of the lens using f = uv d.  f =  ...  cm [1]   (iii) state and explain briefly whether the values for fa and f \u200ain (e)(ii)  are the same within the  limits of experimental accuracy.  ...  ...  .  [1] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 a student investigates the time taken for ice cubes in a container to melt using different insulating  materials on the container.  the following apparatus is available:   a copper container   a variety of insulating materials that can be wrapped round the copper container   a thermometer   a stopwatch   a supply of ice cubes  the student can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school  laboratory.  plan an experiment to investigate the time taken for ice cubes to melt using different insulating  materials.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 draw a diagram of the apparatus used \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w19_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. dc (sc/cb) 176068/2 \u00a9 ucles 2019  [turn over *6736931972* physics  0625/63 paper 6  alternative to practical  october/november 2019  1 hour candidates answer on the question paper. no additional materials are required. read these instructions first write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. write in dark blue or black pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs. do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid. do not  write in any barcodes. answer all questions. electronic calculators may be used. you may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. at the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. the number of marks is given in brackets [  ] at the end of each question or part question.cambridge assessment international education cambridge international general certificate of secondary education this syllabus is regulated for use in england, wales and northern ireland as a cambridge international level 1/level 2 certificate.",
            "2": "2 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 1 a student investigates how the resistance of a filament lamp changes with the potential  difference  (p.d.) across it.  he uses the circuit shown in fig. 1.1. power supply crocodile clipslide wire lampal fig. 1.1  (a) on fig. 1.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference  across the lamp.  [1]  (b) the student connects the crocodile clip to a length l = 20.0  cm of the slide wire.   he measures the potential difference v and the current i for the lamp.   (i) record the voltmeter and ammeter readings shown in fig. 1.2 for a value of l = 20.0  cm.   v =  ...  i =  ...  [1] a00.20.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 v012 3 4 5 fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over   (ii) calculate, and record in table 1.1, the resistance r of the lamp at l = 20.0  cm.     use your readings from (b)(i)  and the equation r = v i. [1] table 1.1 l / cm r / \u03c9 20.0 40.0 7.5 60.0 10 80.0 12 100.0 13  (c) the student connects the crocodile clip to other lengths l of the slide wire.   he measures the potential difference v and the current i for the lamp and calculates the  resistance each time. his results are shown in table 1.1.   plot a graph of r\u200a\u2009/\u2009\u200a\u03c9 (y-axis) against l\u2009\u200a/\u2009\u200acm\u2009(x-axis).  [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (d) the student notices that the lamp is very dim when l = 20.0  cm but becomes very bright when  l = 100.0  cm.   state what the shape of the graph tells you about how the resistance of the lamp changes  with the temperature of the filament.   justify your statement using your results from the graph. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]  (e) in this type of experiment, it is possible to change the current in the lamp by using a variable  resistor instead of a slide wire.   on fig. 1.3, complete the circuit diagram to show a variable resistor used for this purpose. apower supply fig. 1.3  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over 2 some students determine the focal length of a converging lens by two different methods.  they use the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1. illuminated triangle lensscreen benchu v fig. 2.1  (a) a student sets the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens.   she moves the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is seen on the screen.  method 1   (i) on fig. 2.1, measure the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens.  u =  ...    on fig. 2.1, measure the distance v between the lens and the screen.  v =  ...  [1]   (ii) fig. 2.1 is drawn to 1/5th scale.    calculate the actual distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens in the  experiment.  u =  ...    calculate the actual distance v between the lens and the screen in the experiment.  v =  ...  [1]   (iii) calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation f1 = uv (u + v).  f1 =  .  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019   (iv) briefly describe a technique to obtain an image on the screen that is as sharp as possible  in this experiment.  ...  ...  .  [1]  method 2  (b) (i) on fig. 2.2, measure ho, the height of the illuminated triangle.  ho =  ...    on fig. 2.3, measure hi, the height of the image on the screen.  hi =  ...  [1]  ho  hi  fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3   (ii) calculate a value for the magnification m, using the equation m = hi ho.  m =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate a second value f2 for the focal length of the lens, using the equation f2 = v (m + 1)  and the value of v from (a)(ii) .  f2 =  .  [1]  (c) a student suggests that f1 and f2 should be equal.   state whether the results support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference to the  results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d) state one precaution that could be taken to ensure that the measurements in the experiment  are taken as reliably as possible.  ...  .  [1]  (e) suggest which of method 1  or method 2  is likely to give the more accurate value for the focal  length.   explain the reason for your choice. suggestion   explanation  ...  ...  ...  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 3 the class is investigating the behaviour of a spring, and then using the spring to determine the  weight of an object.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 3.1. clamp spring loadl fig. 3.1  (a) the stretched length l of the spring, indicated in fig. 3.1, is to be measured.   describe two precautions that could be taken when measuring the length of the stationary  spring, to ensure an accurate reading. you may draw a diagram. 1  ...  ... 2  ...  ...  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (b) \u2022 a student measures the length l0 of the spring without any load.   2.1  l0 =  .. cm \u2022 various loads l are hung on the spring.    the stretched length l of the spring for each load is recorded in table 3.1. table 3.1 l / n l / cm e / cm 1.0 6.3 2.0 10.5 3.0 14.7 \u2022 calculate, and record in table 3.1, the extension e of the spring for each load l.    use the equation e = ( l \u2013 l0).  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  (c) the loads are removed and an object x is suspended from the spring. object xlx fig. 3.2   (i) measure the stretched length lx of the spring on fig. 3.2.  lx =   cm [1]   (ii) estimate the weight wx of object x.    explain how you obtained your answer.  ...  ...  ...  wx =  ...  n  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 [turn over  (d) a student measures the weight of a different load using a similar method. he gives the weight  as 4.532  n.   explain why this is not a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (e) (i) another student suggests that e is directly proportional to l.    state whether the results support her suggestion.    use values from the results in table 3.1 to justify your statement. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]   (ii) the student wishes to plot a graph of l against e to test if the two quantities are directly  proportional.    state how her graph line could show that e is directly proportional to l.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 4 a student is investigating ways of slowing the rate of cooling of hot liquids in a container.  the student knows that a lid will reduce the rate of cooling. he wants to find out if the thickness of  the lid makes any difference to the rate of cooling.  plan an experiment which will enable him to compare the effects of lids of different thicknesses.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list the apparatus needed \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements to  be taken \u2022 state any key variables that would need to be kept the same \u2022 draw a suitable table or tables, with column headings, to show how the readings would  be displayed (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "13": "13 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/63/o/n/19 \u00a9 ucles 2019 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        }
    },
    "2020": {
        "0625_m20_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 03_0625_12/5rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *6993319596*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics  0625/12     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  february/march 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  1 the diagram shows a rectangular metal sheet close to two rulers.    00102030 10 20 30 40 50 cmcmmetal sheet     what is the area of the metal sheet?  a 700  cm2 b 875  cm2 c 900  cm2 d 1125  cm2     2 the graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time over part of a journey.    0 0speed time12 3 4     which section of the graph shows acceleration and which section of the graph shows deceleration?     acceleration deceleration  a 1 2  b 1 3  c 2 4  d 3 1    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  3 a steel ball is dropped from the top floor of a building. air resistance can be ignored.    which statement describes the motion of the ball?  a the ball falls with constant acceleration.  b the ball falls with constant speed.  c the ball falls with decreasing speed.  d the ball falls with increasing acceleration.     4 diagram 1 shows a piece of flexible material that  contains many pockets of air. diagram 2 shows  the same piece of flexible material after it has been compressed so that its volume decreases.    diagram 1 (before compression)diagram 2 (after compression)    what happens to the mass and to the weight of the flexible material when it is compressed?     mass weight  a increases increases  b increases no change  c no change increases  d no change no change    5 on the moon, the gravitational field strength g is 1.6  n / kg.    an object has a mass of 2.0  kg.    what is the weight of the object on the moon?  a 0  n b 1.3  n c 3.2  n d 20.0  n    6 a measuring cylinder contains 40  cm3 of water.    a solid metal ball is dropped into the water and the water level rises to 56  cm3.    the mass of the ball is 80  g.    what is the density of the metal from which the ball is made?  a 0.20  g / cm3 b 1.4  g / cm3 c 2.0  g / cm3 d 5.0  g / cm3   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  7 a car travels along a horizontal road at constant speed. three horizontal forces act on the car.  the diagram shows two of these forces.    air resistance 300  nforce from engine 1500  ndirection of motion forwards     what is the size and the direction of the third horizontal force acting on the car?  a 1200  n backwards  b 1200  n forwards  c 1800  n backwards  d 1800  n forwards      8 a force f is applied to a spanner, as shown.    fnutspanner     which action increases the moment of f about the centre of the nut?  a apply the force f to the end of the spanner handle  b apply the force f parallel to the spanner handle  c spray oil on the nut  d use a shorter spanner      9 a ball is released from rest and rolls down a track from the position shown.    what is the furthest position that it is possible for the ball to reach?    ball startshere ac b d    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  10 which row describes an advantage and a disadvantage of wind turbines?     advantage disadvantage  a no fuel needed harmful gases released  b variable supply fuel needed  c no harmful gases released variable supply  d constant supply noisy      11 a box of mass m and weight w is carried up some stairs of total height x and total width y.    yxbox     on which quantities does the work done against gravity on the box depend?  a m and y b w and x c w and y d x and y    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  12 diagram 1 shows a tube sealed at one end and partly immersed in mercury. the tube has a  diameter d. the top of the mercury in the tube is a height h above the mercury reservoir.    hvacuum mercury reservoirdiagram 1     diagram 2 shows a similar arrangement with a tube that has a diameter 2 d.    xvacuumdiagram 2 mercury reservoir     what is the relationship between h and x?  a x = 2h  b x = h  c x = 2h  d x = 4h     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  13 a skier is standing still on a flat area of snow.    skis     the weight of the skier is 550  n. the total area of his skis in contact with the ground is 0.015  m2.    what is the pressure exerted on the ground by the skier?  a 0.83  n / m2 b 8.3  n / m2 c 3700  n / m2 d 37  000  n / m2     14 the molecules of a substance in a particular state of matter move freely with random motion. the  average speed of the molecules is increasing.    what is being described?  a a gas being heated  b a liquid evaporating  c a solid being heated  d a solid melting      15 a student measures the mass of warm water in an open container over two minutes. the  container is kept at a constant temperature. the results are in the table.    time  / minutes mass  / g  0.0 33.9  0.5 30.6  1.0 27.6  1.5 24.9  2.0 22.5    why does the mass of the water change?  a the water evaporates.  b the water freezes.  c the water condenses.  d the water boils.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  16 which points are the fixed points of the liquid-in-glass thermometer shown?    \u2013 1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 \u00b0c    a the beginning and end points of the column of liquid  b the points marked \u201310  \u00b0c and 110  \u00b0c  c the points marked 0  \u00b0c and 100  \u00b0c  d the top and bottom points of the thermometer bulb     17 four different metal blocks are given the same quantity of thermal energy.    which block has the greatest thermal capacity?    a temperature rise = 1  \u00b0cb temperature rise = 2  \u00b0cc temperature rise = 3  \u00b0cd temperature rise = 4  \u00b0c    18 a solid is heated from room temperature.    the graph shows how its temperature changes with time as it is heated constantly.    at which time has it just become completely liquid?    0 0abc droom temperaturetemperature time    ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  19 rods of the same shape and size are inserted through corks into a tank of hot water. each rod is  covered with a layer of solid wax that has a low melting point. after a period of time, some wax  melts.    hot watertank good thermal conductor bad thermalconductor moderate thermal conductorcork     on which rod will the wax melt first?  a all at the same time  b good thermal conductor  c bad thermal conductor  d moderate thermal conductor     20 a boy jumps into an indoor swimming pool. he notices that the water appears to get colder as he  goes deeper underwater. this is due to convection.    which statement is correct?  a cold water is more dense than warm water so it sinks to the bottom of the pool.  b warm water is more dense than cold water so it rises to the surface of the pool.  c the molecules in cold water have more kinetic energy than the molecules in warm water so  they move to the bottom of the pool faster.  d the molecules in warm water are closer together than the molecules in cold water so they  rise to the surface of the pool.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  21 the diagrams show examples of wave motion.    12 waves on water waves in air waves on a rope waves in a spring34ripple tank drum     which waves are longitudinal?  a 1 only b 2 and 3 only c 2, 3 and 4 d 2 and 4 only     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  22 waves on the surface of water travel from deep to shallow water.    which diagram shows the correct path of the waves in the shallow water?    deep watera shallow waterdeep waterb shallow water deep waterc shallow water deep waterd shallow water      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  23 which diagram shows how the light from a candle is reflected by a mirror, and shows the position  of the image formed?    eye candleimage of candlea  eyecandleeye candleimage of candleb  image of candlec d  eyecandle image of candlemirror  mirror mirror  mirror       ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  24 the diagram shows an image being formed by a converging lens.    fobject imagef 2f 2f     which description of the image formed is correct?  a enlarged and inverted  b enlarged and upright  c diminished and inverted  d diminished and upright      25 the horn on a ship makes a sound. the captain on the ship hears an echo from a cliff 4.0  s later.    the speed of sound is 340  m / s.  how far away is the cliff from the ship?  a 170  m b 340  m c 680  m d 1360  m     26 bats produce ultrasound waves to navigate.    what is a possible frequency range for these waves?   a 0\u201320  hz  b 20  hz\u20132000  hz  c 2  khz\u201320  khz  d 20  khz\u2013120  khz    27 the table shows the forces that exist between magnetic poles.    which row is correct?     n pole and n pole n pole and s pole  a attraction attraction  b attraction repulsion  c repulsion attraction  d repulsion repulsion   ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  28 the diagrams show three different metal rods p, q and r, inside coils of wire.    small iron nails are placed on a wooden bench under the rods.    diagram 1 shows the situation when there are electric currents in the wires.    diagram 2 shows the situation when the currents are switched off.    p wooden benchcurrentin coilsdiagram 1 q r p nocurrentin coilsdiagram 2 q r woodenbench     which row correctly identifies the metal rods?     p q r  a copper soft iron steel  b soft iron copper steel  c steel soft iron copper  d copper steel soft iron     29 a polythene rod becomes negatively charged when it is rubbed with a cloth.    which statement explains this?  a the rod gains electrons.  b the rod loses electrons.  c the rod gains protons.  d the rod loses protons.     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  30 the diagram shows a reading on an ammeter.    6 8 104 2 0 a     what is the reading?  a 0.45  a b 0.50  a c 4.5  a d 5.0  a     31 a student is to determine the resistance of resistor r. she uses a circuit including a voltmeter and  an ammeter.    which circuit should be used?    a a v rb r avc r avd r va      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  32 the diagram shows a battery connected to two resistors. three ammeters m 1, m 2 and m 3 are  connected in the circuit.    m1 m2m3a aa     ammeter m 1 reads 1.0  a.    what are the readings on m 2 and on m 3?     reading on  m2 / a reading on  m3 / a  a 0.0 0.0  b 0.5 0.5  c 0.5 1.0  d 1.0 1.0     33 lamps in a circuit are connected in parallel.    what is the advantage of this?  a if one lamp breaks, the others remain lit.  b less current is taken from the power supply.  c the lamps use less power than if they were connected in series.  d the potential difference across each lamp is less than that of the power supply.     ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  34 the diagram shows a relay being used to control a buzzer.    relay     what is the function of the circuit?  a the buzzer switches off when the circuit becomes cold.  b the buzzer switches off when the circuit becomes light.  c the buzzer switches on when the circuit becomes cold.  d the buzzer switches on when the circuit becomes light.     35 there is a 5  a fuse in the circuit of an appliance.    what is the purpose of the fuse and in which wire is it connected?     purpose wire in which  it is connected  a breaks the circuit if the current is greater than 5  a earth  b breaks the circuit if the current is greater than 5  a live  c breaks the circuit if the current is less than 5  a earth  d breaks the circuit if the current is less than 5  a live    36 the diagram shows a transformer that has an output voltage of 12  v.    240  v a.c. input12 v a.c. outputprimary coil with 1000 turns secondary coilsoft iron core     how many turns of wire are in the secondary coil?  a 12 b 20 c 50 d 20  000    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  37 a current-carrying conductor is placed between two magnetic poles. the current causes a force  to act on the wire.    nsforce wire current direction    three other arrangements p, q and r, of the wire and magnetic poles are set up as shown.    ns current reversedp sn magnetic poles switched aroundq sn current reversed and magnetic poles switched aroundr     which arrangements will cause a force in the opposite direction to that shown in the top diagram?  a p, q and r b p and q only c p only d r only      38 the symbol for a radioactive nuclide of carbon is 14 6c.  how many neutrons are in its nucleus?  a 6 b 8 c 14 d 20     ",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20 [turn over  39 a student measures the rate at which ionising radiation is emitted from a radioactive substance.    he places a detector at different distances from the radioactive source.    radioactive sourcedetectorcounte r distance d    the table shows how the reading on the counter varies with distance d.    the readings on the counter are corrected for background radiation.    distance d / cm 0 2 4 6  counter reading  / counts per minute 1250 115 0 0    which type of ionising radiation is being emitted by the substance?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d x-rays    ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material pr otected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright  acknowledgements booklet. this is produced  for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/f/m/20  40 the graph shows the count rate from a radioactive source over a period of time.    2000 15001000 500 0 0123 time  / hourscount rate counts  / s     what is the half-life of the source?  a 0.5 hour b 1.0 hour c 1.5 hours d 3.0 hours      "
        },
        "0625_m20_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 03_0625_22/5rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *6305326820 *cambridge igcse\u2122       physics  0625/22     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  february/march 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  1 the diagram shows a rectangular metal sheet close to two rulers.    00102030 10 20 30 40 50 cmcmmetal sheet     what is the area of the metal sheet?  a 700  cm2 b 875  cm2 c 900  cm2 d 1125  cm2     2 a ball falls from rest through the air towards the ground. the diagram shows two forces acting on  the ball.    air resistance gravitational force     as the ball falls, the air resistance increases.    which statement is correct?  a the acceleration of the ball decreases.  b the acceleration of the ball increases.  c the speed of the ball decreases.  d the gravitational force on the ball decreases.     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  3 a compressed spring projects a ball horizontally in a vacuum chamber.    on the earth, the ball reaches the chamber floor 4.0  m in front of the spring.    an identical experiment is done on the moon. the gravitational field strength is lower on the  moon than on the earth.    the experimental results on the moon are compared with those on the earth.    which statement is correct?  a the horizontal speed is greater on the moon and the ball hits the floor 4.0  m in front of the  spring.  b the horizontal speed is greater on the moon and the ball hits the floor more than 4.0  m in  front of the spring.  c the horizontal speed is the same on the moon and the ball hits the floor 4.0  m in front of the  spring.  d the horizontal speed is the same on the moon and the ball hits the floor more than 4.0  m in  front of the spring.     4 diagram 1 shows a piece of flexible material that  contains many pockets of air. diagram 2 shows  the same piece of flexible material after it has been compressed so that its volume decreases.    diagram 1 (before compression)diagram 2 (after compression)    what happens to the mass and to the weight of the flexible material when it is compressed?     mass weight  a increases increases  b increases no change  c no change increases  d no change no change    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  5 the graph shows how the strength of the earth\u2019s gravitational field varies as the distance from  the earth\u2019s surface increases.    strength of the earth\u2019sgravitationalfield distance from the surface of the earth 0 0     which row describes the effect that this has on the mass and on the weight of an object as it  moves further away from the earth\u2019s surface?     mass of object weight of object  a decreases decreases  b decreases unchanged  c unchanged decreases  d unchanged unchanged    6 a measuring cylinder contains 40  cm3 of water.    a solid metal ball is dropped into the water and the water level rises to 56  cm3.    the mass of the ball is 80  g.    what is the density of the metal from which the ball is made?  a 0.20  g / cm3 b 1.4  g / cm3 c 2.0  g / cm3 d 5.0  g / cm3     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  7 a car travels along a horizontal road at constant speed. three horizontal forces act on the car.  the diagram shows two of these forces.    air resistance 300  nforce from engine 1500  ndirection of motion forwards     what is the size and the direction of the third horizontal force acting on the car?  a 1200  n backwards  b 1200  n forwards  c 1800  n backwards  d 1800  n forwards      8 a car is driven round a bend in the road at a constant speed.    car direction of the motion of the ca r     what is the direction of the resultant force on the car when it is going round the bend?  a parallel to the motion and in the same direction as the motion  b parallel to the motion and in the opposite direction to the motion  c perpendicular to the motion and towards the inside of the bend  d perpendicular to the motion and towards the outside of the bend     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  9 an athlete with mass 70  kg trains by performing press-ups with a load on his back. the diagram  shows the perpendicular distances involved.    the centre of mass of the athlete is c m and the centre of mass of the load he is carrying is c l.    load0.1 m 0.3  m 0.9  m clcl cmcm     the mass of the load is 6.0  kg.    what is the upward force exerted by his two arms?  a 54  n b 76  n c 540  n d 760  n     10 an air pistol fires a pellet forwards.    what is the motion of the air pistol?  a the air pistol moves backwards with speed greater than the pellet.  b the air pistol moves backwards with speed less than the pellet.  c the air pistol moves forward with speed greater than the pellet.  d the air pistol moves forward with speed less than the pellet.      11 which row describes an advantage and a disadvantage of wind turbines?     advantage disadvantage  a no fuel needed harmful gases released  b variable supply fuel needed  c no harmful gases released variable supply  d constant supply noisy     12 an electric motor provides 900  j of useful output energy. the efficiency of the motor is 60  %.    how much electrical energy is supplied to the motor?  a 15  j b 540  j c 1500  j d 5400  j ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  13 a crane takes 2.0 minutes to lift a 500  kg load to the top of a building that is 12  m high.    what is the useful power developed against gravity by the crane?  a 21  w b 50  w c 500  w d 30  000  w      14 a skier is standing still on a flat area of snow.    skis     the weight of the skier is 550  n. the total area of his skis in contact with the ground is 0.015  m2.    what is the pressure exerted on the ground by the skier?  a 0.83  n / m2 b 8.3  n / m2 c 3700  n / m2 d 37  000  n / m2     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  15 a tall cylinder is partly filled with two liquids which do not mix. the two liquids have different  densities. a student measures the pressure due to the liquids at different depths.    position p position qtwo liquids with different densities     which graph shows how the liquid pressure varies between positions p and q?    pressure pressure depth depthab ppqq pressure pressure depth depthcd ppq q      16 when pollen grains in water are viewed through a microscope, they are seen to be in continuous, rapid random motion.    what causes a pollen grain to move in this way?  a convection currents in the water  b bombardment by a single molecule of water   c uneven bombardment on different sides by water molecules  d collision with another pollen grain due to their kinetic energies     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  17 a student measures the mass of warm water in an open container over two minutes. the  container is kept at a constant temperature. the results are in the table.    time  / minutes mass  / g  0.0 33.9  0.5 30.6  1.0 27.6  1.5 24.9  2.0 22.5    why does the mass of the water change?  a the water evaporates.  b the water freezes.  c the water condenses.  d the water boils.      18 which points are the fixed points of the liquid-in-glass thermometer shown?    \u2013 1 00 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 \u00b0c    a the beginning and end points of the column of liquid  b the points marked \u201310  \u00b0c and 110  \u00b0c  c the points marked 0  \u00b0c and 100  \u00b0c  d the top and bottom points of the thermometer bulb     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  19 the specific heat capacities of aluminium, iron, ethanol and water are given.    substance specific heat capacity  j / kg  \u00b0c  aluminium 900  iron 450  ethanol 2400  water 4200    1 kg of each metal is put into 5  kg of each liquid.    the starting temperature of each metal is 60  \u00b0c. the starting temperature of each liquid is 10  \u00b0c.    which example has the highest final temperature?     metal liquid  a aluminium ethanol  b iron ethanol  c aluminium water  d iron water     20 metals are good thermal conductors.    insulators are poor thermal conductors.    which description of the mechanism of thermal conductivity is correct?  a in insulators, conduction takes place by electron transfer and molecular vibrations.  b in insulators, conduction takes place by electron transfer only.  c in metals, conduction takes place by electron transfer and molecular vibrations.  d in metals, conduction takes place by electron transfer only.     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  21 a teacher shows his class a polystyrene cup. the cup is made from thick plastic with lots of tiny  air bubbles in it.    he asks the class why the cup is so good at keeping a hot drink warm. three suggestions are  made.    1 it contains air which is a poor thermal conductor.  2 the air is trapped in tiny bubbles so very little convection is possible. 3 the plastic is a poor thermal conductor.    which suggestions are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     22 a boy jumps into an indoor swimming pool. he notices that the water appears to get colder as he  goes deeper underwater. this is due to convection.    which statement is correct?  a cold water is more dense than warm water so it sinks to the bottom of the pool.  b warm water is more dense than cold water so it rises to the surface of the pool.  c the molecules in cold water have more kinetic energy than the molecules in warm water so  they move to the bottom of the pool faster.  d the molecules in warm water are closer together than the molecules in cold water so they  rise to the surface of the pool.     23 four students a, b, c and d, investigate the diffraction of water waves through a gap.        each student uses a different gap size and a different wavelength for the water waves.    which student produces the waves which have the most diffraction?     gap size  / cm wavelength  / cm  a 2.0 1.8  b 3.0 2.1  c 4.0 2.0  d 5.0 0.9   ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  24 the diagrams show examples of wave motion.    12 waves on water waves in air waves on a rope waves in a spring34ripple tank drum     which waves are longitudinal?  a 1 only b 2 and 3 only c 2, 3 and 4 d 2 and 4 only     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  25 which diagram shows how the light from a candle is reflected by a mirror, and shows the position  of the image formed?    eye candleimage of candlea  eyecandleeye candleimage of candleb  image of candlec d  eyecandle image of candlemirror  mirror mirror  mirror       26 a converging lens can be used as a magnifying glass.    what will be the nature of the image?  a real, inverted, diminished  b real, upright, enlarged  c virtual, inverted, enlarged  d virtual, upright, enlarged     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  27 the wavelength of blue light changes from 4.7 \u00d7 10\u20137  m to 3.5 \u00d7 10\u20137  m as it passes from air to  water.    what is the speed of this light in water?  a 7.4 \u00d7 107  m / s  b 1.3 \u00d7 108   m / s  c 2.2 \u00d7 108   m / s  d 3.0 \u00d7 108   m / s     28 the diagram shows compressions and rarefactions in air as a sound wave moves from left to  right.    rarefaction compression    a quieter sound of the same frequency is made.    what will happen to the number of particles in a region of rarefaction and in a region of compression?     number of particles in  region of rarefaction number of particles in  region of compression  a decrease decrease  b decrease increase  c increase decrease  d increase increase     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  29 the diagrams show three different metal rods p, q and r, inside coils of wire.    small iron nails are placed on a wooden bench under the rods.    diagram 1 shows the situation when there are electric currents in the wires.    diagram 2 shows the situation when the currents are switched off.    p wooden benchcurrentin coilsdiagram 1 q r p nocurrentin coilsdiagram 2 q r woodenbench     which row correctly identifies the metal rods?     p q r  a copper soft iron steel  b soft iron copper steel  c steel soft iron copper  d copper steel soft iron     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  30 which row describes conventional current and electron flow in a circuit containing a cell?     conventional current electron flow  a   from the negative terminal of the cell  to the positive terminal of the cell from the negative terminal of the cell  to the positive terminal of the cell  b   from the negative terminal of the cell  to the positive terminal of the cell from the positive terminal of the cell to  the negative terminal of the cell  c   from the positive terminal of the cell to  the negative terminal of the cell from the negative terminal of the cell  to the positive terminal of the cell  d   from the positive terminal of the cell to  the negative terminal of the cell from the positive terminal of the cell to  the negative terminal of the cell     31 a student makes four resistors using different pieces of wire. the wires have different diameters  and lengths. all the pieces of wire are made of the same material.    which piece of wire will make the resistor with the largest resistance?     diameter  / mm length  / cm  a 0.8 10  b 0.8 17  c 2.0 10  d 2.0 17      32 a student is to determine the resistance of resistor r. she uses a circuit including a voltmeter and  an ammeter.    which circuit should be used?    a a v rb r avc r avd r va     ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  33 the diagram shows a battery connected to two resistors. three ammeters m 1, m 2 and m 3 are  connected in the circuit.    m1 m2m3a aa     ammeter m 1 reads 1.0  a.    what are the readings on m 2 and on m 3?     reading on  m2 / a reading on  m3 / a  a 0.0 0.0  b 0.5 0.5  c 0.5 1.0  d 1.0 1.0      34 a cell is connected to a parallel combination of a 2.0  \u03c9 resistor and a 4.0  \u03c9 resistor. the current  in the 4.0  \u03c9 resistor is 1.0  a.    2.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c9 1.0 a    what is the current in the cell?  a 1.0  a b 1.5  a c 2.0  a d 3.0  a    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  35 the two inputs of a nand gate are joined together.    input output    which truth table represents the action of this gate?    a  b  c  d  input output  input output  input output  input output  0 0  0 1  0 0  0 1  1 0  1 0  1 1  1 1     36 the diagram shows a transformer that has an output voltage of 12  v.    240  v a.c. input12 v a.c. outputprimary coil with 1000 turns secondary coilsoft iron core     how many turns of wire are in the secondary coil?  a 12 b 20 c 50 d 20  000    ",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20 [turn over  37 the diagrams show different particles moving through a magnetic field.    which particle experiences a magnetic force acting up out of the plane of the paper?    a protonprotonb c delectron electron       38 when rutherford bombarded thin gold foil with \u03b1-particles, he found that some \u03b1-particles were  deflected through large angles.    which statement explains this deflection?  a most of the atom consists of empty space.  b all of the positive charge and most of the mass of the gold atom are concentrated in a small  volume.  c positive charge in the gold atom is spread evenly throughout the atom.  d all of the negative charge is concentrated at its centre.     ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material pr otected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyright  acknowledgements booklet. this is produced  for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/f/m/20  39 the diagram shows the path followed by \u03b1-particles as they pass between two charged plates.  they are deflected downwards.    +++++++++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u03b1-particles\u03b2-particles     what happens to \u03b2-particles passing through the same electric field?  a they are deflected downwards more than the \u03b1-particles.  b they are deflected upwards.  c they are not deflected at all.  d they are deflected downwards by the same amount as the \u03b1-particles.    40 the graph shows the count rate from a radioactive source over a period of time.    2000 15001000 500 0 0123 time  / hourscount rate counts  / s     what is the half-life of the source?  a 0.5 hour b 1.0 hour c 1.5 hours d 3.0 hours "
        },
        "0625_m20_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122dc (jc/jg) 187444/4 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overthis document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated. *4541584141* physics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core)  february/march  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 (a) a student places 8 similar coins in a pile, as shown in fig. 1.1. 2.4 cmpile of 8 coins fig. 1.1  (not to scale)   the height of the pile of coins is 2.4  cm.    calculate the average thickness of one coin.  average thickness =  ..  cm [2]  (b) fig. 1.2 shows the pile of coins, a measuring cylinder and a beaker containing some water. pile of 8 coins water measuring cylinder fig. 1.2  (not to scale)   describe how the student can measure the volume of one of the coins using the set-up shown  in fig. 1.2.   ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 a 50 cm rule is balanced at its mid-point. a force of 8.0  n acts at a distance of 10  cm from one end  of the rule.   fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement. 10 cm 50 cm rule25 cm pivot 8.0 n fig. 2.1  (a) calculate the moment of the 8.0  n force about the pivot. give the unit.  moment =  ..  unit =  ..  [5]  (b) another force acts at a point 10  cm from the pivot. it makes the rule balance.    on fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of this force.  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 a student drops a ball from a high window.  (a) the mass of the ball is 0.12  kg.   calculate the weight of the ball.  weight =    n [3]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows the speed of the ball while it is falling. the points s, t, u, v and w are shown  on the graph.  0 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0510152025 speed m / s time  / su v w st fig. 3.1   draw one line from each section of the graph to the correct description of the motion.   one has been drawn for you. section of graph description of motion s \u2013 t  t \u2013 u  u \u2013 vat rest decreasing acceleration constant acceleration moving with constant speed slowing down  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) determine the distance fallen by the ball in section u \u2013 v of the graph.  distance =    m [3]  (d) state the distance fallen by the ball in section v \u2013 w of the graph.  distance =    m [1]  [total: 9]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 fig. 4.1 shows an electric circuit. fig. 4.1  an electric current transfers energy from the battery to the filament lamp.  (a) state the two forms of energy emitted by the filament lamp. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  (b) state which form of energy in the battery is decreasing.  .  [1]  (c) explain how the principle of conservation of energy applies to this circuit.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5 fig. 5.1 shows a wind turbine. fig. 5.1  (a) describe how the wind turbine produces electrical energy.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) wind turbines are used in many countries to replace coal-fired power stations.    (i) state one disadvantage of using wind turbines compared to coal-fired power stations.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) state two advantages of using wind turbines instead of coal-fired power stations. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 (a) table 6.1 gives a list of statements about molecules in gases and solids. table 6.1 statement gas solid molecules are closely packed molecules are free to move around from place to place molecules are far apart compared to their size molecules can only vibrate about a fixed position molecules change position randomly   put one tick in every row to indicate whether each statement refers to a gas or a solid.  [4]  (b) fig. 6.1 represents a smoke particle in air. the smoke particle is moving. smoke particleair fig. 6.1   fig. 6.2 shows the path of the smoke particle and the position of the smoke particle a short  time later. smoke particle air fig. 6.2   (i) state the term given to the movement of the smoke particle.  .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) state what the motion of the smoke particle shows about air molecules.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 7 (a) equal volumes of steel, oil and hydrogen are heated from 20  \u00b0c to 60  \u00b0c.    their volumes increase by thermal expansion.   state which of these substances has the greatest increase in volume.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 7.1   (i) state the temperature reading  on the thermometer.  .  [1]   (ii) state the temperature range  of the thermometer.  .  [1]   (iii) state the values of the fixed points of the celsius scale of temperature.  .  [1]  (c) the liquid-in-glass thermometer uses the thermal expansion of mercury.   state and explain one other application or consequence of thermal expansion.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 8 fig. 8.1 represents a travelling wave at an instant in time. distance from source of waves  / cmdisplacement  / cmdirection of wave travel 1.0 0 \u20131.0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 fig. 8.1  (a) (i) determine the amplitude of the wave.  amplitude =  ..  cm [1]   (ii) determine the wavelength of the wave.  wavelength =  ..  cm [2]   (iii) it takes 2.0  s for a source to emit the wave shown in fig. 8.1.     calculate the frequency of the wave.  frequency =  ...  hz [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) fig. 8.2 shows the main regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. radio  wavesmicrowavesvisible  light  wavesx-rays \u03b3-rays fig. 8.2   (i) two of the regions are not labelled.    add the correct label to each of the unlabelled regions by writing in each box.  [2]   (ii) describe one use of \u03b3-rays.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows two rays of light x and y leaving an object o. the rays strike a plane mirror.  ray x is reflected as shown.  plane  mirror ray of light x ray of light yo fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, draw the normal at the point where ray x strikes the mirror.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 9.1, draw the path of ray y after it strikes the mirror.  [1]        (b) an object o is placed on the left of a thin converging lens. f is the principal focus.   this arrangement is shown in fig. 9.2. f olens fig. 9.2   two rays from the top of the object are incident on the lens, as shown in fig. 9.2.    on fig. 9.2, draw the path of each ray to locate the position of the image of o formed by the  lens.   on fig. 9.2, draw an arrow to represent the image and label it i.  [3]  [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 fig. 10.1 shows an arrangement for making an electromagnet. a12 v x coil of thick copper wirecore of electromagnet fig. 10.1  (a) (i) state a material which is suitable for the core of the electromagnet.  .  [1]   (ii) state the name for component x in fig. 10.1.  .  [1]   (iii) describe and explain how component x varies the strength of the electromagnet.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) the switch is closed. the reading on the ammeter is 1.5  a.   calculate the resistance of the circuit.  resistance =    \u03c9 [3]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 11 fig. 11.1 shows lamps in series. fig. 11.2 shows lamps in parallel.  the lamps are all identical 6.0  v lamps. in each circuit there are three ammeters a1, a2 and a3.  a1 a2a36.0 v    6.0 v a1 a3a2  fig. 11.1  fig. 11.2  (a) (i) compare the readings on ammeters a1, a2 and a3 in fig. 11.1.  .  [1]   (ii) compare the readings on ammeters a1, a2 and a3 in fig. 11.2.  .  [1]   (iii) state two advantages of connecting the 6.0  v lamps in parallel with the 6.0  v battery,  compared with connecting the lamps in series with the battery. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ... [2]  (b) each lamp has a resistance of 12  \u03c9.   (i) determine the combined resistance of the two lamps connected in series .  resistance =    \u03c9 [1]   (ii) compare the resistance of one lamp with the combined resistance of the two lamps in  parallel .  ...  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.12 a nucleus of americium-241 has the nuclide notation shown. 241 95am  (a) (i) determine the number of neutrons in a nucleus of americium-241.  number of neutrons =    [1]   (ii) determine the charge on a nucleus of americium-241.  charge =    [2]  (b) americium-241 decays by emitting \u03b1-particles.   put a tick in the box next to each correct statement.   \u03b1-particles are electromagnetic waves.     \u03b1-particles are fast-moving electrons.     \u03b1-particles are helium nuclei.     \u03b1-particles are stopped by a sheet of paper.     \u03b1-particles can pass through 3  cm of aluminium.   [2]  (c) americium-241 has a half-life of 432 years.    a sample contains 16  mg of americium-241.   calculate the time it takes until only 4.0  mg of americium-241 are left in the sample.  time =  ..  years  [2]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_m20_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (jc/jg) 187443/4 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over *6553459997* physics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended)  february/march  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 a rocket is launched vertically upwards from the ground. the rocket travels with uniform  acceleration from rest. after 8.0  s, the speed of the rocket is 120  m / s.  (a)  calculate the acceleration of the rocket.  acceleration =    [2]  (b) (i) on fig. 1.1, draw the graph for the motion of the rocket in the first 8.0  s.  0 5 10 15 20 25050100150200 speed m / s time  / s fig. 1.1  [1]   (ii) use the graph to determine the height of the rocket at 8.0  s.    height =    [2]   (iii) from time  = 8.0 s to time  = 20.0 s, the rocket rises with increasing speed but with  decreasing acceleration.    from time  = 20.0 s to time  = 25.0 s, the rocket has a constant speed of less than 200  m / s.    on fig. 1.1, draw the graph for this motion.  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows an athlete crossing the finishing line in a race. as she crosses the finishing line, her  speed is 10.0  m / s. she slows down to a speed of 4.0  m / s. fig. 2.1  (a) the mass of the athlete is 71  kg. calculate the impulse applied to her as she slows down.  impulse =    [3]  (b) (i)  define impulse  in terms of force  and time.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) the athlete takes 1.2  s to slow down from a speed of 10.0  m / s to a speed of 4.0  m / s.     calculate the average resultant force applied to the athlete as she slows down.  force =    [2]  (c) calculate the force required to give a mass of 71  kg an acceleration of 6.4  m / s2.  force =    [2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 fig. 3.1 shows a model of a wind turbine used to demonstrate the use of wind energy to generate  electricity. the wind is blowing towards the model, as shown. vawindturbine blades circular area swept out by turbine blades fig. 3.1  (a) the mass of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades each  second is 7.5  kg. the kinetic energy of the air that passes through this circular area each  second is 240  j.   (i) calculate the speed of the air.  speed =    [3]   (ii) the kinetic energy of the air drives a generator. state the input power of the air passing  through the turbine blades.  input power =    [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) the output current of the generator is 2.0  a. the output potential difference (p.d.) of the  generator is 11  v.   (i) calculate the output power of the generator.  output power =    [2]   (ii) calculate the efficiency of the wind turbine.  efficiency =    % [2]  (c) the density of air is 1.3  kg / m3.   calculate the volume of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades  each second.  volume =    [2]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 (a) define the specific latent heat of fusion  of a substance.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) small pieces of ice at 0  \u00b0c are added to 0.35  kg of water. the initial temperature of the water is  24.5 \u00b0c. the temperature of the water decreases to 0  \u00b0c. the water loses 35  000 j of thermal  energy as it cools. all of the ice added to the water melts.   the specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 \u00d7 105 j / kg.    calculate:   (i) the specific heat capacity of water  specific heat capacity =    [2]   (ii) the mass of ice added to the water.  mass =    [3]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5 (a) complete the sentences with words that describe the main process of thermal energy transfer  in each case.   a man goes for a walk on a cold day. he touches a metal gate, which removes thermal     energy from his hands by . . he holds the sides of a cup containing a     hot drink. his hands gain thermal energy by . . some farm workers have     lit a fire. the man warms his hands by the side of the fire. his hands gain thermal energy by     . .   [3]   (b) describe in terms of particles the transfer of thermal energy through the metal of the gate  after transfer from the man\u2019s hands.  ...  .  [2]  (c) fig. 5.1 shows a car on a sunny day in a hot country.  windscreen object a fig. 5.1   the object labelled a is placed inside the windscreen. it is used by the owner of the car to  reduce the temperature rise of the air in the car.   ring the most suitable material for the outer surface of object a. explain your choice. dull black     dull white     shiny black     shiny white explanation    .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows crests of a water wave moving from left to right in a harbour.  crest of wave harbour walla fig. 6.1   (i) on fig. 6.1, draw three more crests to the right of point a.  [2]   (ii) state the name of the wave process that occurs as the wave passes point a.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows the crests of another wave moving from left to right in a different part of the  harbour. this wave moves from deep water to shallow water. deep water crest of waveshallow water fig. 6.2   (i) on fig. 6.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of movement of the wave after it has  passed into the shallow water.  [1]   (ii) state the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes into the shallow water.  .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (iii) complete table 6.1 to state whether each of the properties of the wave increases ,  decreases  or stays the same as the wave passes into the shallow water. table 6.1 property effect wavelength frequency speed   [3]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and the image i formed when an object is placed to the left  of the lens. the principal focuses are labelled a and b and the centre of the lens is labelled c.   (i) on fig. 7.1, draw two rays to locate the position of the object.     draw the object and label it o. a c b ilens fig. 7.1  [3]   (ii) ring all of the following distances that are equal to the focal length of the lens.         ab     ac     cb     2ab  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) fig. 7.2 shows green light passing through a triangular glass block. fig. 7.2   red light enters the triangular glass block shown in fig. 7.2 along the same path as the green  light.   (i) on fig. 7.2, draw the path of the red light within the triangular glass block.  [1]   fig. 7.3 shows green light passing through a rectangular glass block.   red light enters the rectangular glass block shown in fig. 7.3 along the same path as the  green light. fig. 7.3   on fig. 7.3:    (ii) draw the path of the red light within the rectangular glass block  [1]   (iii) draw the path of the red light after leaving the rectangular glass block.  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 8 fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.  a x y12 v 2.0 m6.0 \u03c92.0 \u03c93.0 \u03c9 fig. 8.1  the lamp has a resistance of 3.0  \u03c9. line xy represents a uniform resistance wire of resistance  6.0 \u03c9.  (a) calculate the reading on the ammeter.  ammeter reading =    [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) fig. 8.2 shows the circuit with a different connection to the resistance wire and an added  resistor. the length xy of the whole resistance wire is 2.0  m. the contact is made at q where  the distance xq is 0.60  m. a x q y12 v 0.60  m2.0 \u03c93.0 \u03c9 1.5 \u03c9 2.0 m fig. 8.2   calculate the resistance of the circuit.  resistance =    [4]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 9 (a) state the name of the logic gate with the symbol shown in fig. 9.1. fig. 9.1  .  [1]  (b) state the name of the logic gate with the truth table shown in table 9.1. table 9.1 input output  0 1 1 0  .  [1]  (c) fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit. ac deb fig. 9.2   complete the truth table in table 9.2 for this circuit for all possible combinations of input. table 9.2 a b c d e 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0  [4]  [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over10 (a) fig. 10.1 is a simplified top view of a flat coil. there is an alternating current (a.c.) in the coil. fig. 10.1   describe the magnetic effect of this alternating current.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a pan placed above the coil. the base of the pan is made of steel. pan coil fig. 10.2   state what quantity is induced in the base of the pan.  .  [1]  (c) the pan contains water.   state and explain the effect of the quantity induced in part (b) on the temperature of the water  in the pan.  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) the isotope hydrogen-1 has a proton number of 1 and a nucleon number of 1.   two isotopes of helium are helium-3 and helium-4.    helium-3 has a proton number of 2 and a nucleon number of 3.    helium-4 has a nucleon number of 4.   complete table 11.1 for neutral atoms of these isotopes of helium. table 11.1 helium-3 helium-4 number of neutrons number of electrons mass compared to a neutral  atom of hydrogen-1  [3]  (b) an experiment takes place in a laboratory shielded from all background radiation. a sample  of radioactive material is wrapped in aluminium foil of thickness 0.1  mm. a detector of ionising  radiation placed 1  cm from the foil records a reading.    a piece of aluminium of thickness 5  mm is placed between the detector and the foil. the  detector reading drops to zero.    state and explain any type of radiation passing through the aluminium foil.   ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_m20_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (jc/ct) 187075/4 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over *7343252239* physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test  february/march  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 in this experiment, you will determine the density of wood by two methods.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. l d wooden rod loop of thread fig. 1.1  method 1  (a) (i) use a ruler to measure the length l and the diameter d of the wooden rod you are using.  l =    cm   d =    cm  [2]    (ii) suggest a more accurate method for measuring the diameter of the rod.     list any additional apparatus you would require and briefly describe how you would  determine the diameter. you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your answer.     you are not asked to carry out this method.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (b) measure the mass m of the wooden rod using the balance provided.  m =  ...  g [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) calculate a value \u03c11 for the density of the wooden rod. use your values from (a)(i)  and (b)  and the equation \u03c11 = 4 m \u03c0 d\u200a2 l . include a suitable unit.  \u03c11 =  ..  [2]  method 2  (d) (i) pour approximately 150  cm3 of water into the measuring cylinder.    record the reading v1 of the water level in the measuring cylinder.  v1 =  ..  cm3    gently lower the wooden rod into the water so that it floats freely as shown in fig. 1.2. measuring cylinder water fig. 1.2   record the new reading v2 of the water level in the measuring cylinder.  v2 =  ..  cm3   [1]   (ii) on fig. 1.2, draw  an arrow on the left\u2011hand side showing the correct line of sight for  reading the volume of water in the measuring cylinder.  [1] ",
            "4": "4 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 (e)  fig. 1.3  fig. 1.4     remove the rod from the measuring cylinder and lower the modelling clay into the water until  it is completely submerged as shown in fig. 1.3.   record the new reading v3 of the water level in the measuring cylinder.  v3 =  ..  cm3    remove the modelling clay from the measuring cylinder.    attach the rod to the modelling clay using the hook on the modelling clay and the loop of  thread on the rod as shown in fig. 1.4.    lower the modelling clay and rod into the water until the rod is completely submerged.   record the new reading v4 of the water level in the measuring cylinder.  v4 =  ..  cm3    calculate another value \u03c12 for the density of the wooden rod.    use your values from (d) and (e) and the equation \u03c12 = (v2 \u2013 v1) (v4 \u2013 v3) \u00d7 k where k = 1.0  g / cm3.   \u03c12 =  ..  [2]   [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of hot water in a beaker.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.  beakerthermometer bench fig. 2.1   (a) (i) measure the room temperature \u03b8\u200ar shown on the thermometer.  \u03b8\u200ar =  ..  [1]   (ii) pour 150  cm3 of hot water into the beaker.    place the thermometer in the water in the beaker.    in the first row of table 2.1, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at time t  =  0 and  immediately start the stop\u2011clock.    in table 2.1, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s,  150 s, 180  s, 210  s, 240  s and 270  s. [1]  (b) complete the headings in table 2.1.  [1] table 2.1 t / \u03b8 / 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270",
            "6": "6 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) (i) calculate the average cooling rate x1 during the first 90  s of the experiment. use your  readings from table 2.1 and the equation  x1 = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b890 t     where t = 90  s and \u03b80 and \u03b890 are the temperatures at t = 0 and t = 90  s.    include the unit for the cooling rate.  x1 =  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the average cooling rate x2 during the middle 90  s of the experiment. use your  readings from table 2.1 and the equation  x2 = \u03b890 \u2013 \u03b8180 t    where t = 90  s and \u03b890 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures at t = 90  s and t = 180  s.   x2 =  ..  [1]   (iii) calculate the average cooling rate x3 during the last 90  s of the experiment. use your  readings from table 2.1 and the equation  x3 = \u03b8180 \u2013 \u03b8270 t    where t = 90  s and \u03b8180 and \u03b8270 are the temperatures at t = 180  s and t = 270  s.   x3 =  ..  [1]  (d) (i) the temperature of the water falls as time passes. use your results from (c) to describe  the pattern of the rate of cooling of the water during the experiment.    justify your answer by reference to your results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [1]    (ii) give an estimate of the probable final temperature \u03b8f of the water if left to cool for many  hours.   \u03b8f =  ..  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (e) (i) a student in another school carries out a similar experiment.    she starts with the hot water at a lower initial temperature.     suggest how her cooling rates are likely to compare with those calculated in (c).    use your results to explain your answer. suggestion  .  ... explanation    ...  ...  [2]   (ii) state one variable, other than the initial temperature, which the student should control.  ...  .  [1]   [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 in this experiment, you will investigate a power supply.   the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1.  power supply a resistance wirecrocodile clip lv fig. 3.1  (a) connect the crocodile clip to a length l = 100.0  cm of the resistance wire.   switch on.   measure the value of potential difference v0 and current i0 for the wire.   v0 =  ..  v  i0 =  ...  a   switch off.    calculate the resistance r0 of 100.0  cm of the wire. use your values of v0 and i0 and the     equation r0 = v0 i0.  r0 =  .  \u03c9   [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) (i) switch on.    connect the crocodile clip to lengths l = 70.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 50.0  cm, 40.0  cm and 30.0  cm  of the resistance wire in turn.    for each length l measure the current i in the circuit. record your readings in table  3.1.  [1]    switch off. table 3.1 l / cm i / a1 i / 1 a 70.0 60.0 50.0 40.0 30.0   (ii) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the value of 1 i for each length l of the wire.  [1]  (c) plot a graph of l / cm (y\u2011axis) against 1 i / 1 a (x\u2011axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0,0).  [4]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d)  (i)  determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the electromotive force (e.m.f.) e of the power supply. use your value of r0  from (a) and the equation e = g \u00d7 r0 k, where k = 100  cm.  e =  ...  v [1]  (e) the ammeter in this circuit has a small resistance which affects the current. the effect of  this resistance on the measured current i will be different for each measured length l of the  resistance wire.   state and explain which length l will be most affected by the resistance of the ammeter. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4  a student investigates a wind turbine, which is an electrical generator driven by a propeller blade.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate how the current in a resistor connected  across the terminals of the turbine varies with the speed of the air flow through the turbine.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes:   a model wind turbine as shown in fig. 4.1   an electric fan to provide the moving air to turn the turbine   a device for measuring air speed.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 complete the wind turbine circuit diagram on fig. 4.1 \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the experiment, including how the speed of the air flow is to  be changed  \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion. resistor wind turbine electric fan propeller blade bench fig. 4.1  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/52/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third \u2011party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer \u2011related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_m20_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (rw/fc) 189188/4 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over *2932959090*cambridge igcse\u2122 physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical  february/march  2020  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 a student is determining the density of wood by two methods.  he is using the wooden rod shown in fig.  1.1. wooden rod loop of threadlength diameter fig. 1.1  method  1  the dimensions of the wooden rod are shown full size in fig.  1.2. l d fig. 1.2  (a) (i) measure the length l and the diameter d of the wooden rod in fig.  1.2.  l =  . cm  d =  . cm  [2]   (ii) suggest an accurate method for measuring the diameter of the wooden rod in this  experiment.    list any additional apparatus that might be required and briefly describe how you would  determine the diameter.    you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your answer.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) the student uses a balance to measure the mass m of the wooden rod as shown in fig.  1.3. wooden rod 7.8 g fig. 1.3   record the mass m of the rod.  m =   g   calculate a value \u03c11 for the density of the wooden rod. use your values from (a)(i)  and (b)    and the equation \u03c11 = 4 m \u03c0 d\u200a2 l . include a suitable unit.  \u03c11 =    [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  method 2  (c) the student pours water into a measuring cylinder as shown in fig.  1.4.   he then floats the wooden rod in the water as shown in fig.  1.5. 150 140160 150  fig. 1.4  fig. 1.5   record the reading v1 of the water level in the measuring cylinder as shown in fig.  1.4.  v1 =   cm3   record the new reading v2 of the water level in the measuring cylinder with the rod floating in  the water as shown in fig.  1.5.  v2 =   cm3  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (d) the student removes the rod and lowers a piece of modelling clay into the water as shown in  fig. 1.6.   he then hooks the rod to the modelling clay and lowers them into the water as shown in  fig. 1.7. hook modelling clay  fig. 1.6  fig. 1.7   he records the new reading v3 of the water level in the measuring cylinder with the modelling  clay.   he records the reading v4 of the water level in the measuring cylinder with the modelling clay  and rod.   164 v3 =   cm3   178 v4 =   cm3   calculate another value \u03c12 for the density of the wooden rod. use the values from (c) and (d)    and the equation \u03c12 = (v2 \u2013 v1) (v4 \u2013 v3) \u00d7 k   where k = 1.0  g / cm3.  \u03c12 =    [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (e) fig. 1.8   on fig.  1.8, draw  an arrow showing the correct line of sight for reading the volume of water in  the measuring cylinder.  [1]  (f) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in method  2, even if it was carried out carefully.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 students are investigating the cooling of hot water in a beaker.  they are using the apparatus shown in fig.  2.1. 010203040506070thermometer beaker bench fig. 2.1  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer in fig.  2.1.  \u03b8r =    [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) a volume of 150  cm3 of hot water is poured into the beaker and the initial temperature \u03b8 is  recorded in table  2.1.   the temperature of the water is recorded every 30  s. the values are shown in table  2.1.   (i) complete the headings in table  2.1. [1] table 2.1 t / \u03b8 / 0 95.0 30 89.0 60 83.5 90 79.0 120 75.0 150 71.5 180 68.5 210 66.0 240 64.0 270 62.5   (ii) describe one precaution that you would take to ensure that the temperature readings in  the experiment are as accurate as possible.  ...  .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) (i) calculate the average cooling rate x1 during the first 90  s of the experiment. use the  readings from table  2.1 and the equation     x1 = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b890 t    where t = 90  s and \u03b80 and \u03b890 are the temperatures at t = 0 and t = 90  s.    include the unit for the cooling rate.  x1 =    [1]   (ii) calculate the average cooling rate x2 during the middle 90  s of the experiment. use the  readings from table  2.1 and the equation     x2 = \u03b890 \u2013 \u03b8180 t    where t = 90  s and \u03b890 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures at t = 90  s and t = 180  s.  x2 =    [1]   (iii) calculate the average cooling rate x3 during the last 90  s of the experiment. use the  readings from table  2.1 and the equation     x3 = \u03b8180 \u2013 \u03b8270 t    where t = 90  s and \u03b8180 and \u03b8270 are the temperatures at t = 180  s and t = 270  s.  x3 =    [1]  (d) (i) the temperature of the water falls as time passes. use the results from (c) to describe  the pattern of the rate of cooling of the water during the experiment.    justify your answer by reference to the results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [1]   (ii) give an estimate of the probable final temperature \u03b8f of the water if left to cool for many  hours.  \u03b8f =    [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (e) (i) a student in another school carries out a similar experiment.    she starts with the hot water at a lower initial temperature.    suggest how her cooling rates are likely to compare with those calculated in (c).    use the results to explain your answer. suggestion  .  ... explanation    ...  ...  [2]   (ii) state one variable, other than the initial temperature, which the student should control.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 3 a student is investigating a power supply.  she is using the circuit shown in fig.  3.1. p q lcrocodile clippower supply resistance wire fig. 3.1  (a) the student connects the crocodile clip to a length l = 100.0  cm of the resistance wire and  measures the potential difference v0 across terminals p and q and the current i0 in the  circuit. v3 4 52 1 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0  fig. 3.2  fig. 3.3   (i) record the values of v0 and i0 shown on the meters in fig.  3.2 and fig.  3.3.  v0 =  ... v  i0 =  ...  a  [1]   (ii) calculate the resistance r0 of 100.0  cm of the wire. use your values of v0 and i0 and the     equation r0 = v0 i0 .  r0 =  ... \u03c9  [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) the student then connects the crocodile clip to lengths l = 70.0 cm, 60.0  cm, 50.0  cm, 40.0  cm  and 30.0  cm of the resistance wire. she measures the current i in the circuit for each length.  her readings are shown in table  3.1. table 3.1 l / cm i / a1 i / 1 a 70.0 0.35 60.0 0.40 2.50 50.0 0.44 2.27 40.0 0.53 1.89 30.0 0.65 1.54   calculate, and record in table  3.1, the value of 1 i for length l = 70.0  cm of the wire.  [1]  (c) plot a graph of l / cm (y-axis) against 1 i / 1 a (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0,0).  [4]",
            "13": "13 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (d) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =    [1]   (ii) calculate the electromotive force (e.m.f.) e of the power supply. use your value of r0     from (a)(ii)  and the equation e = g \u00d7 r0 k , where k = 100  cm.  e =  .. v [1]  (e) the ammeter in this circuit has a small resistance which affects the current. the effect of  this resistance on the measured current i will be different for each measured length l of the  resistance wire.   state and explain which length l will be most affected by the resistance of the ammeter. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "14": "14 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 a student investigates a wind turbine, which is an electrical generator driven by a propeller blade.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate how the current in a resistor connected  across the terminals of the turbine varies with the speed of the air flow through the turbine.  the apparatus available includes:   a model wind turbine as shown in fig.  4.1   an electric fan to provide the moving air to turn the turbine   a device for measuring air speed.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 complete the wind turbine circuit diagram on fig.  4.1 \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the experiment, including how the speed of the air flow is to  be changed \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion. resistor wind turbine electric fan propeller blade bench fig. 4.1  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "15": "15 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..   .    [7]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/62/f/m/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 06_0625_11/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *4756656737 *cambridge igcse\u2122       physics  0625/11     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  may/june 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  1 a pendulum makes 50 complete swings in 2  min 40  s.    what is the time period for 1 complete swing?  a 1.6  s b 3.2  s c 4.8  s d 6.4  s      2 the motion of an object is represented by the speed\u2013time graph shown.    area under the graphspeed time0 0    which quantity is equal to the area under the graph?  a acceleration  b average speed  c distance travelled  d kinetic energy      3 which statement about acceleration is correct?  a it is related to the changing speed of an object.  b it is the distance an object travels in one second.  c it is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.  d it is the force acting on an object when it is near to the earth.     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  4 two metal blocks p and q have identical dimensions. they hang on identical spring balances.    0 1 2 3 4 65n 0 1 2 3 4 65n qp     which statement about p and q is correct?  a they have different volumes and different weights.  b they have different volumes and equal weights.  c they have equal volumes and equal weights.  d they have equal volumes and different weights.     5 a mass of 6.0  kg rests on the surface of a planet.    on this planet, g = 20  n / kg.    what is the weight of the object?  a 0.30  n b 0.60  n c 60  n d 120  n    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  6 the mass of a measuring cylinder is 190  g.    400  cm3 of liquid is put into the measuring cylinder.    the total mass of the measuring cylinder and the liquid is 560  g.    four solid objects are lowered in turn into the liquid. the densities of the objects are shown.    1 0.40  g / cm3  2 0.90  g / cm3  3 1.2  g / cm3  4 2.7  g / cm3    which objects will float in the liquid?  a 1 only b 1 and 2 only c 1, 2 and 3 d 3 and 4 only      7 a sledge is pulled in a straight line by dogs, as shown.    sledgedogs surface     the dogs produce a total horizontal driving force of 600  n.    the frictional force between the sledge and the surface is 150  n and the air resistance on the  sledge is 450  n.    what is the resultant force acting on the sledge?  a 0  n b 300  n c 900  n d 1200  n      8 forces are applied to four identical objects.    the lengths of the arrows indicate the magnitude of each force.    which object is in equilibrium?    a bc d      ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  9 the diagram shows part of a rollercoaster ride with the car at different positions.    the car runs freely down from position x to position y and up the hill on the other side.    x ycar     what happens to the kinetic energy and to the gravitational potential energy of the car as it  moves from position x to position y?     kinetic energy gravitational  potential energy  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     10 student p uses a force of 35  n to push a box 3.0  m across the floor.    student q uses a force of 22  n to push another box 1.8  m across the floor.    which statement gives a full explanation why student p uses more energy than student q?  a student p pushes his box a greater distance than student q.  b student p pushes his box a greater distance and uses a bigger force than student q.  c student p uses a bigger force than student q.  d student p pushes a heavier box than student q.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  11 a man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.    escalator lift    the escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. the useful work done  against gravity is w. the useful power developed is p.    the lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.    how much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is developed by the lift?     useful work  done against  gravity by lift useful power  developed by lift  a more than w less than p  b more than w p  c w less than p  d w p    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  12 the diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. the dimensions of the block are shown.    bench80 cm20 cm40 cm prq     on which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?  a p  b q  c r  d p, q and r produce the same pressure     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  13 four submarines are submerged. the density of fresh water is 1000  kg  / m3 and the density of  sea water is 1020  kg  / m3.    which submarine experiences the greatest pressure due to the water?    water surface fresh water100  ma fresh water 120  mb submarinesubmarine sea water100  mc sea water 120  md submarinesubmarinewater surfacewater surface water surface      14 a gas is heated in a sealed container.    the volume of the container does not change.    what happens to the molecules of the gas?  a the average distance between molecules increases.  b the average kinetic energy of the molecules increases.  c the mass of each molecule increases.  d the volume of each molecule increases.     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  15 a student is investigating evaporation. she soaks a piece of cotton wool in a liquid and attaches  this to the bulb of a thermometer.    as the liquid evaporates the temperature reading on the thermometer changes.    thermomete rcotton wool soaked in liquid     which statement is correct?  a the more energetic molecules leave the liquid and the temperature reading decreases.  b the more energetic molecules leave the liquid and the temperature reading increases.  c the less energetic molecules leave the liquid and the temperature reading decreases.  d the less energetic molecules leave the liquid and the temperature reading increases.      16 the thermometer in the diagram has no scale.    before this thermometer can be used to measure temperature, two standard temperatures known  as fixed points are needed. these are labelled x and y.    bulbx y     which row describes these fixed points on the celsius scale?     x y  a temperature of pure boiling water normal body temperature  b temperature of pure boiling water temperature of pure melting ice  c normal body temperature temperature of pure boiling water  d temperature of pure melting ice temperature of pure boiling water     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  17 when a hot gas is left to cool, its internal energy decreases.    what causes this?  a a decrease in the kinetic energy of the gas particles  b a decrease in the gravitational potential energy of the gas particles  c an increase in the average speed of the gas particles  d an increase in the average distance of separation of the gas particles     18 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d      19 one ice cube is placed on a metal block. an identical ice cube is placed on a plastic block. the  blocks are left next to each other on a table in a laboratory.    plastic block metal blockice cube     which ice cube melts first and why?  a the ice cube on the plastic block melts first because plastic is a good insulator of thermal  energy.  b the ice cube on the plastic block melts first because plastic is a good conductor of thermal  energy.  c the ice cube on the metal block melts first because metal is a good conductor of thermal  energy.  d the ice cube on the metal block melts first because metal is a good insulator of thermal  energy.     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  20 two freezers x and y are identical except that one has a door opening at the front and the other  has a door opening at the top.    xfreezer door yfreezerdoor     both doors are the same size and are opened for the same amount of time.    which freezer gains the least amount of thermal energy in this time and why?     freezer gaining the  least thermal energy reason  a x cold air falls  b x warm air falls  c y cold air falls  d y warm air falls     21 the diagram shows a wave.    8 cm 4 cm3 cm 6 cm     what are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?     amplitude  / cm wavelength  / cm  a 3 4  b 3 8  c 6 4  d 6 8 ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  22 waves travel more quickly on the surface of water when the water is deep.    a stone is dropped at point x into a pool of varying depth. the diagram shows the first three  wavefronts on the surface of the pool.    the region between x and which labelled point is likely to be the deepest?    wavefronts ab dcx      23 the diagram shows a beam of light travelling through glass and meeting a glass-air interface.    60\u00b0 glass airreflected light     which row correctly describes what is happening at the glass-air interface?     angle of incidence  at the interface observation  a 30\u00b0 some internal reflection  b 30\u00b0 total internal reflection  c 60\u00b0 some internal reflection  d 60\u00b0 total internal reflection    ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  24 a narrow beam of white light passes through a prism and is dispersed into a spectrum.    1 2 3white light     which row is correct?     colour 1 colour 2 colour 3  a blue yellow red  b red blue yellow  c red yellow blue  d yellow blue red     25 an intruder alarm sensor detects that a person is warmer than his surroundings.    which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?  a infrared  b radio  c ultraviolet  d visible light     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  26 the graphs show the displacement of particles in sound waves from three sources x, y and z.  the scales on the graphs are all identical.    displacement timesource x displacement timesource y displacement timesource z0 00 0 0 0     which sources are producing sound waves with the same pitch?  a x and y only b y and z only c x and z only d x, y and z      27 a permanent magnet is to be made.    which row gives the correct material to use and the correct reason for choosing this material?     material reason  a soft iron easy to demagnetise  b soft iron hard to demagnetise  c steel easy to demagnetise  d steel hard to demagnetise     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  28 four nails a, b, c and d are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is  recorded. each nail is tested individually.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?     number of paper clips attached to the nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2     29 three statements about electric charge are given.    1 an ammeter directly measures how much electric charge is in an object.  2 a moving electric charge can be detected by an ammeter. 3 a flow of electric charge is an electric current.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  30 each of the four diagrams m, n, o and p shows a separate pair of insulating rods. each rod is  charged as shown.    diagram m \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013diagram n + +++ +++ diagram o \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013+ +++ +++diagram p + +++ ++++ +++ +++    in which two arrangements do the pairs of rods experience a force of repulsion?  a m and n b o and p c m and p d n and o     31 a student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of two identical resistors.    a v    the voltmeter reading is 2.2  v and the ammeter reading is 0.25  a.    what is the resistance of each resistor?  a 0.275  \u03c9 b 0.55  \u03c9 c 4.4  \u03c9 d 8.8  \u03c9     ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  32 in the circuit shown, a 1 and a 2 are ammeters.    sa2 a1     switch s is closed.    which row is correct?     the resistance of  the whole circuit reading of a 1 reading of a 2  a decreases stays the same increases  b decreases increases increases  c increases stays the same stays the same  d increases decreases decreases      33 what happens to the resistance of an ldr when the brightness of light falling on it increases?  a its resistance decreases.  b its resistance increases.  c its resistance increases then decreases.  d its resistance stays the same.     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  34 a student constructs four circuits, each containing a fuse.    the fuse blows in one circuit and both lamps in the circuit go out.    in which circuit does the fuse blow and both lamps go out?    a b c d      35 a transformer has 200 turns on its primary coil and is connected to a 240  v a.c. supply.    the output voltage of the transformer is 60  v a.c..    how many turns are on the secondary coil of the transformer?  a 20 b 50 c 72 d 800    ",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20 [turn over  36 a conducting wire is placed between the poles of a magnet. when an electric current in the wire  is in the direction shown, then the force on the wire acts out of the page.    n swire     three statements of different conditions and how the wire is affected are given.    1 the current is towards the top of the page and the direction of the magnetic field is  unchanged then the force produced acts into the page.  2 the current is towards the bottom of the page and the magnetic field is reversed  then the force produced acts into the page.  3 the current in the wire is alternating and the wire vibrates into and out of the page.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3      37 a nuclide of the element iron has the symbol shown.    56fe26    what does a neutral atom of this nuclide contain?     protons neutrons electrons  a 26 30 26  b 26 56 30  c 30 26 56  d 56 26 30     38 what is the nucleon number of a nuclide?  a the number of neutrons in the nucleus  b the number of protons in the nucleus  c the number of protons minus the number of neutrons in the nucleus  d the number of protons plus the number of neutrons in the nucleus    ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/m/j/20  39 a thin sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a radiation detector. the count  rate falls to a very low reading.    sourcepaper detector counter     from this result, which type of radiation is the source emitting?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d x-rays    40 in 1986 the chernobyl nuclear power station in ukraine suffered a meltdown.    this caused background radiation in many countries, thousands of kilometres from chernobyl, to  increase.    what was transported in the atmosphere to these countries to cause this rise in background  radiation?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d radioactive isotopes       "
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 06_0625_12/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *4118729190*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/12     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  may/june 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  1 five athletes p, q, r, s and t compete in a race. the table shows the finishing times for the  athletes.    athlete p q r s t  finishing time  / s 22.50 24.40 25.20 26.50 23.20    which statement is correct?  a athlete p won the race and was 0.70  s ahead of the athlete in second place.  b athlete p won the race and was 1.90  s ahead of the athlete in second place.  c athlete s won the race and was 1.30  s ahead of the athlete in second place.  d athlete s won the race and was 2.10  s ahead of the athlete in second place.      2 the graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.    at which labelled time is the acceleration greatest?    0 0speed time ab c d      3 which statement about acceleration is correct?  a it is related to the changing speed of an object.  b it is the distance an object travels in one second.  c it is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.  d it is the force acting on an object when it is near to the earth.     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20 [turn over  4 two metal blocks p and q have identical dimensions. they hang on identical spring balances.    0 1 2 3 4 65n 0 1 2 3 4 65n qp     which statement about p and q is correct?  a they have different volumes and different weights.  b they have different volumes and equal weights.  c they have equal volumes and equal weights.  d they have equal volumes and different weights.     5 a space probe is taken from the earth to mars.    the force of gravity on the surface of mars is less than the force of gravity on the surface of the earth.    how do the weight and the mass of a space probe on the surface of mars compare to their values when the probe is on the surface of the earth?     weight on mars mass on mars  a decreased decreased  b decreased unchanged  c unchanged decreased  d unchanged unchanged     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  6 water has a density of 1000 kg  / m3.    a rectangular swimming pool has an average depth of 1.6  m.    the length of the pool is 25  m.    the width of the pool is 10  m.    what is the mass of the water in the swimming pool?  a 2.5 kg b 400  kg c 400  000  kg d 800  000  kg      7 the diagram shows an extension\u2013load graph for a spring.    10.0 9.0 8.07.06.05.04.03.02.01.0 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0extension  / cm load  / n    an empty can of weight 3.0  n is suspended from the spring.    liquid is poured into the can until the extension is 8.0  cm.    what is the weight of the liquid?  a 4.0  n b 10.0  n c 13.0  n d 16.0  n     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20 [turn over  8 what is meant by the moment of a force on an object?  a the magnitude of the force on the object  b the direction of the force on the object  c the time for which the force acts on the object  d the turning effect of the force on the object      9 which energy resource is not renewable?  a geothermal  b nuclear fission  c solar  d wind      10 two motors x and y lift loads of the same weight through the same vertical distance.    motor x is more efficient than motor y.    which statement about the motors is correct?  a the useful energy output of motor x is larger than that of motor y.  b the useful energy output of motor x is smaller than that of motor y.  c the energy input of motor x is larger than that of motor y.  d the energy input of motor x is smaller than that of motor y.     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  11 a man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.    escalator lift    the escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. the useful work done  against gravity is w. the useful power developed is p.    the lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.    how much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is developed by the lift?     useful work  done against  gravity by lift useful power  developed by lift  a more than w less than p  b more than w p  c w less than p  d w p    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20 [turn over  12 the diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. the dimensions of the block are shown.    bench80 cm20 cm40 cm prq     on which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?  a p  b q  c r  d p, q and r produce the same pressure      13 a beaker contains a liquid.    xliquid     on what does the liquid pressure at position x depend?  a both the density of the liquid and the depth of x below the surface  b both the surface area of the liquid and the depth of x below the surface  c both the surface area of the liquid and the volume of the liquid  d the depth of x below the surface only     14 evaporation occurs from the surface of a pool of water.    which statement describes this change of state?  a electrons move from the liquid and become a gas.  b molecules that move from the liquid have the same energy as those that stay in the liquid.  c the more energetic molecules escape the liquid.  d the more energetic molecules remain in the liquid.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  15 a gas, in a sealed container, is compressed slowly so that its temperature does not change.    what happens to the molecules of the gas as a result of this compression?  a the average speed of the molecules increases.  b the average force in a collision between a molecule and the container increases.  c there are more frequent collisions between molecules and the container.  d the volume of each molecule decreases.     16 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c     what is the temperature difference between the two fixed points on the celsius scale?  a 10  \u00b0c b 100  \u00b0c c 110  \u00b0c d 120  \u00b0c     17 a metal block is left overnight in a cool, shady room. in the morning, the metal block is moved  into warm surroundings.    which statement about the metal block is correct in the morning?  a the internal energy of the metal block increases.  b the temperature of the metal block decreases.  c convection transfers energy throughout the metal block.  d the metal contracts slightly.      18 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d      ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20 [turn over  19 a room is heated by a radiator. the diagrams x a nd y show two possible circulations of hot air,  which heat the room.    diagram x radiatordiagram y radiatorceiling floorceiling floor     which diagram and reason explain the heating of the room by convection?     diagram reason  a x air density decreases when air is heated  b x air density increases when air is heated  c y air density decreases when air is heated  d y air density increases when air is heated     20 two similar liquid-in-glass thermometers p and q are placed in direct sunlight.    the bulb of thermometer p is painted white. the bulb of thermometer q is painted black.    how and why would the thermometer readings differ?  a p would read higher than q because black is a good absorber of radiation.  b p would read higher than q because black is a poor absorber of radiation.  c p would read lower than q because black is a good absorber of radiation.  d p would read lower than q because black is a poor absorber of radiation.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  21 the diagram shows a wave.    8 cm 4 cm3 cm 6 cm     what are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?     amplitude  / cm wavelength  / cm  a 3 4  b 3 8  c 6 4  d 6 8     22 waves travel more quickly on the surface of water when the water is deep.    a stone is dropped at point x into a pool of varying depth. the diagram shows the first three  wavefronts on the surface of the pool.    the region between x and which labelled point is likely to be the deepest?    wavefronts ab dcx     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20 [turn over  23 the diagram shows a ray of light incident on the surface of a glass block.    2 3 41 glass block     the ray of light is partially reflected back into the air and partially refracted into the glass block.    which row correctly identifies the angle of reflection and the angle of refraction?     angle of  reflection angle of  refraction  a 1 3  b 1 4  c 2 3  d 2 4      24 a beam of light consists of yellow and blue light.    the beam of light is incident on a glass prism.    which diagram is correct?    blue yellow blueglass prismc yellowglass prismdblueyellow yellowblue glass prisma glass prismb     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  25 an intruder alarm sensor detects that a person is warmer than his surroundings.    which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?  a infrared  b radio  c ultraviolet  d visible light     26 a dolphin sends out a sound wave. an echo returns 0.010  s later from a fish which is 7.5  m from  the dolphin.    what is the speed of the sound wave in water?  a 0.075  m / s b 0.15  m / s c 750  m / s d 1500  m / s    27 the diagrams show two bar magnets which are attracting each other.    which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern between the poles?    n s n sa n s n sb n s n sc n s n sd     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20 [turn over  28 four nails a, b, c and d are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is  recorded. each nail is tested individually.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?     number of paper clips attached to the nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2     29 a cloth is used to rub an uncharged plastic rod.    both the rod and the cloth become charged.    why does the plastic rod become negatively charged and the cloth become positively charged?  a the rod gains electrons and the cloth gains positive charges.  b the rod gains electrons and the cloth loses electrons.  c the rod loses electrons and the cloth gains electrons.  d the rod loses electrons and the cloth loses positive charges.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  30 the diagram shows a circuit. the wire between p and q can be removed and replaced by a  circuit component.    p r s tq     where should a voltmeter be connected to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the  lamp?  a between p and q in place of the wire  b in parallel with r and s  c in parallel with r and t  d in parallel with s and t     31 a student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of two identical resistors.    a v    the voltmeter reading is 2.2  v and the ammeter reading is 0.25  a.    what is the resistance of each resistor?  a 0.275  \u03c9 b 0.55  \u03c9 c 4.4  \u03c9 d 8.8  \u03c9    ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20 [turn over  32 the circuit shown contains five lamps j, k, l, m and n. all the lamps are glowing.    lamp k lamp nlamp jlamp l lamp m     one lamp is removed and two other lamps go out.    which lamp is removed?  a lamp j  b lamp k  c lamp l  d lamp m     33 the diagram shows a control circuit. the lamp is lit.        the temperature of the surroundings increases.    what will happen to the brightness of the lamp?  a it will be brighter.  b it will be less bright.  c it will not change.  d it will become brighter and then less bright.    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  34 a student constructs four circuits, each containing a fuse.    the fuse blows in one circuit and both lamps in the circuit go out.    in which circuit does the fuse blow and both lamps go out?    a b c d      35 the diagrams p, q and r show three voltage\u2013time graphs.    voltage time0 0diagram p voltage time0 0diagram q voltage++ +\u2013\u2013 \u2013time0 0diagram r     which graphs show an alternating voltage?  a p and q only b p and r only c q and r only d p, q and r    ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a transformer.     primary coil 40 turnssecondary coil 40 000 turnscore     which statement about this transformer is correct?  a it can operate from a 12  v battery.  b it has a core which is made of steel.  c it steps the input voltage up by a factor of 1000.  d it steps the input voltage down by a factor of 1000.     37 a nuclide of the element iron has the symbol shown.    56fe26    what does a neutral atom of this nuclide contain?     protons neutrons electrons  a 26 30 26  b 26 56 30  c 30 26 56  d 56 26 30      38 which statement about the nuclei of all atoms is correct?  a they all contain electrons.  b they are all always stable.  c they all contain protons and electrons.  d they all have a positive charge.    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  39 a thin sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a radiation detector. the count  rate falls to a very low reading.    sourcepaper detector counter     from this result, which type of radiation is the source emitting?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d x-rays    40 a radioactive isotope has a half-life of 120 minutes.    it emits radiation at a rate of 100 particles per second.    how long does it take for the rate of emission to fall to 25 particles per second?  a 30 minutes b 45 minutes c 90 minutes d 240 minutes    ",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/m/j/20  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 06_0625_13/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *6608142237*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics  0625/13     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  may/june 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  1 diagram 1 shows a solid, rectangular-sided block.    top side front diagram 1    diagram 2 shows the same block from the front and from the side.    1cm2345678 1cm234567 9 1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 9 20 21 22front side diagram 2    metre rules have been shown close to the edges of the block.    what is the volume of the block?  a 120  cm3 b 168  cm3 c 264  cm3 d 1155  cm3      2 the speed\u2013time graph shows the motion of an object.    005 5 1 01 52 02 5speed m / s time  / s    how far does the object travel at constant speed?  a 25  m b 50  m c 75  m d 125  m ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20 [turn over  3 which statement about acceleration is correct?  a it is related to the changing speed of an object.  b it is the distance an object travels in one second.  c it is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.  d it is the force acting on an object when it is near to the earth.      4 two metal blocks p and q have identical dimensions. they hang on identical spring balances.    0 1 2 3 4 65n 0 1 2 3 4 65n qp     which statement about p and q is correct?  a they have different volumes and different weights.  b they have different volumes and equal weights.  c they have equal volumes and equal weights.  d they have equal volumes and different weights.     5 which row gives the correct weight for the mass shown?     the value of g is 10  n / kg.     mass  / kg weight  / n  a 2 20  b 10 1  c 10 10  d 20 2   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  6 a rectangular gymnasium is 50  m long, 25  m wide and 8.0  m high.    the density of air is 1.2  kg  / m3.    what is the best estimate of the mass of air in the gymnasium?  a 0.00012  kg b 100  kg c 8300  kg d 12  000  kg     7 the diagram shows two of the three vertical forces acting on a hot-air balloon. the hot-air balloon  is moving upwards at constant speed.    upthrust = 2500  n weight = 2200  n     what is the air resistance acting on the hot-air balloon?  a 300  n downwards  b 300  n upwards  c 4700  n downwards  d 4700  n upwards     8 which statement about the moment of a force is not correct?  a if an object is balanced about a pivot the resultant moment on the object must be zero.  b the moment of a force is a measure of its turning effect.  c the moment of a force about a point is equal to: force \u00d7 perpendicular distance from the  point.  d the moment of a force about a point increases when the perpendicular distance of the force  from the point decreases.    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20 [turn over  9 a mass bounces up and down on a steel spring. the diagram shows the mass and the spring at  different points during the motion.    highest point lowestpointmassmovingdown massmovingup     at which point does the mass have the least gravitational potential energy and at which point is  the most elastic energy stored in the spring?     least amount of  gravitational  potential energy most elastic energy  stored in spring  a mass moving down mass moving up  b mass moving down lowest point  c lowest point mass moving up  d lowest point lowest point      10 which energy resource stores kinetic energy?  a coal  b nuclear fission  c solar  d wind     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  11 a man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.    escalator lift    the escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. the useful work done  against gravity is w. the useful power developed is p.    the lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.    how much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is developed by the lift?     useful work  done against  gravity by lift useful power  developed by lift  a more than w less than p  b more than w p  c w less than p  d w p    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20 [turn over  12 the diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. the dimensions of the block are shown.    bench80 cm20 cm40 cm prq     on which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?  a p  b q  c r  d p, q and r produce the same pressure      13 the diagram shows a u-shaped glass tube, closed at one end by a tap. the glass tube contains  a liquid as shown.    x yatmospheric pressure trapped gasclosed tap liquid     some of the trapped gas is removed.    what will happen to the levels x and y?     level x level y  a higher lower  b higher higher  c lower higher  d lower lower     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  14 what is the correct particle diagram for a solid?    a b c d      15 a sealed box contains a fixed mass of gas.    which action results in each molecule of the gas colliding with the walls of the container less  frequently and with a smaller force?  a decrease the temperature of the gas.  b decrease the volume of the container.  c increase the temperature of the gas.  d increase the volume of the container.      16 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    xy     which row gives the correct labels for the thermometer?     x y  a water narrow tube of uniform diameter  b alcohol narrow tube of uniform diameter  c water this end immersed in substance to be measured  d alcohol this end immersed in substance to be measured    ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20 [turn over  17 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d       18 a gas is cooled so that its molecules move more slowly, come closer together and do not move freely.    which process is being described?  a boiling  b condensing  c freezing  d melting     19 the diagram shows a vacuum flask used to keep a liquid warm.    airtight lid outer cover vacuum silvered walls     which methods of heat loss are reduced by the vacuum  between the silvered walls?  a conduction only  b conduction and convection only  c convection and radiation only  d conduction, convection and radiation ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  20 equal volumes of water at 100  \u00b0c are put in four containers. two containers have matt black  sides and two containers have shiny white sides. one of each type of container has a lid.    the containers are left for two minutes.    which container has the highest temperature?    a matt black sidesb matt black sideslidc shiny white sidesd shiny white sideslid       21 the diagram shows a wave.    8 cm 4 cm3 cm 6 cm     what are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?     amplitude  / cm wavelength  / cm  a 3 4  b 3 8  c 6 4  d 6 8     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20 [turn over  22 waves travel more quickly on the surface of water when the water is deep.    a stone is dropped at point x into a pool of varying depth. the diagram shows the first three  wavefronts on the surface of the pool.    the region between x and which labelled point is likely to be the deepest?    wavefronts ab dcx      23 the diagram shows a ray of light incident on a plane mirror.    35\u00b0mirror     the angle between the ray and the mirror is 35 \u00b0.    the ray is reflected by the mirror.    what is the angle of reflection?  a 35 \u00b0 b 55 \u00b0 c 70 \u00b0 d 110 \u00b0    24 a beam of white light is split into a spectrum of seven colours.    which name is given to this process?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  25 an intruder alarm sensor detects that a person is warmer than his surroundings.    which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?  a infrared  b radio  c ultraviolet  d visible light     26 a tuning fork produces a sound when it vibrates.    what is the effect on the sound produced when the tuning fork vibrates more times every second  and with a larger amplitude?  a higher pitch and less loud  b higher pitch and louder  c lower pitch and less loud  d lower pitch and louder      27 the diagram shows a magnet with some plotting compasses. the compasses show the direction  of the magnetic field of the magnet.    which plotting compass has the needle pointing in the wrong direction?    nsa cb d      ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20 [turn over  28 four nails a, b, c and d are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is  recorded. each nail is tested individually.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?     number of paper clips attached to the nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2     29 the diagram shows a positively charged conducting sphere and a wire connected to earth.    + ++ +++ earthinsulating supportpositively charged sphere wire     what happens when the wire is touched onto the sphere?  a electrons flow from earth to the sphere.  b electrons flow from the sphere to earth.  c positive charges flow from earth to the sphere.  d positive charges flow from the sphere to earth.   ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  30 three electrical quantities are listed.    \u25cf potential difference  \u25cf electromotive force  \u25cf current    which quantities are measured in volts?  a potential difference only  b potential difference and current only  c potential difference and electromotive force only  d potential difference, electromotive force and current     31 a student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of two identical resistors.    a v    the voltmeter reading is 2.2  v and the ammeter reading is 0.25  a.    what is the resistance of each resistor?  a 0.275  \u03c9 b 0.55  \u03c9 c 4.4  \u03c9 d 8.8  \u03c9    32 the diagram shows part of a circuit containing three identical lamps.    wx yz     at which two points do the currents have the same value?  a w and x b w and z c x and y d y and z    ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20 [turn over  33 which circuit contains a thermistor and a heater?    a b c d       34 a student constructs four circuits, each containing a fuse.    the fuse blows in one circuit and both lamps in the circuit go out.    in which circuit does the fuse blow and both lamps go out?    a b c d      ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  35 the graphs show how the currents in three circuits vary with time.    1.5 1.00.50.0 \u20130.5\u20131.0\u20131.5 timecircuit 2 current  / a1.5 1.00.50.0 \u20130.5\u20131.0\u20131.5 timecircuit 1 current  / a 1.5 1.00.50.0 \u20130.5\u20131.0\u20131.5 timecircuit 3 current  / a     in which circuits is there a direct current?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 2 only d 3 only    36 the diagram represents the transmission of electricity from a power station to homes that are  many kilometres away. two transformers are labelled x and y.    y xlarge distancepower stationhousescablespylon pylontransmission cables ground     what type of transformers are x and y?     x y  a step-down transformer step-down transformer  b step-down transformer step-up transformer  c step-up transformer step-down transformer  d step-up transformer step-up transformer     ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20 [turn over  37 a nuclide of the element iron has the symbol shown.    56fe26    what does a neutral atom of this nuclide contain?     protons neutrons electrons  a 26 30 26  b 26 56 30  c 30 26 56  d 56 26 30      38 the diagram shows an early model of the structure of an atom.    negatively chargedelectronball ofpositivecharge     this early model is different from the atomic model accepted today.    which statement about the early model is not included in the model accepted today?  a the atom is mainly filled with a ball of positive charge.  b the electrons are negatively charged.  c there are positive and negative charges.  d there are small particles called electrons.    ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  39 a thin sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a radiation detector. the count  rate falls to a very low reading.    sourcepaper detector counter     from this result, which type of radiation is the source emitting?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d x-rays     40 why should all radioactive materials be handled carefully?  a they all make anything they touch radioactive.  b they all catch fire very easily.  c they all emit ionising radiation.  d they all have long half-lives.    ",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/m/j/20  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 06_0625_21/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *6425434103*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/21     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20  1 a pendulum makes 50 complete swings in 2  min 40  s.    what is the time period for 1 complete swing?  a 1.6  s b 3.2  s c 4.8  s d 6.4  s      2 a student investigates the motion of a ball rolling down a slope.    the diagram shows the speed v of the ball at different times t.    t = 0  s v = 0  cm / s t = 0.2  s v = 2.8  cm / s t = 0.4  s v = 5.1  cm / s t = 0.6  s v = 7.0  cm / sball     which statement describes the motion of the ball?  a the acceleration is not constant.  b the acceleration is negative.  c the speed is decreasing.  d the velocity is constant.      3 which statement about acceleration is correct?  a it is related to the changing speed of an object.  b it is the distance an object travels in one second.  c it is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.  d it is the force acting on an object when it is near to the earth.      4 which statement correctly describes the effects of placing a heavy load in a car?  a it is easier to accelerate the car and easier to bring the car to rest.  b it is easier to accelerate the car but more difficult to bring the car to rest.  c it is more difficult to accelerate the car and more difficult to bring the car to rest.  d it is more difficult to accelerate the car but easier to bring the car to rest.     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20 [turn over  5 a mass of 6.0  kg rests on the surface of a planet.    on this planet, g = 20  n / kg.    what is the weight of the object?  a 0.30  n b 0.60  n c 60  n d 120  n     6 the mass of a measuring cylinder is 190  g.    400  cm3 of liquid is put into the measuring cylinder.    the total mass of the measuring cylinder and the liquid is 560  g.    four solid objects are lowered in turn into the liquid. the densities of the objects are shown.    1 0.40  g / cm3  2 0.90  g / cm3  3 1.2  g / cm3  4 2.7  g / cm3    which objects will float in the liquid?  a 1 only b 1 and 2 only c 1, 2 and 3 d 3 and 4 only      7 the diagram shows a wooden beam pq, of negligible weight, which is attached to a wall by a  hinge at p and kept in a horizontal position by a vertical rope attached at q.    the beam is 3.0  m in length.    a man of weight 800  n walks along the beam from p to q.    q hingebeamropemanwall p     what is the distance of the man from p when the tension in the rope at q becomes equal to  500  n?  a 0.53  m b 1.1   m c 1.9   m d 2.5   m     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20  8 which quantity is a vector?  a acceleration  b distance  c speed  d mass      9 an object of mass 1.2  kg is moving with a velocity of 2.0  m / s when it is acted on by a force of  4.0  n. the velocity of the object increases to 5.0  m / s.    for what period of time does the force act on the object?  a 0.90  s b 1.1  s c 1.5  s d 3.6  s      10 the diagram shows part of a rollercoaster ride with the car at different positions.    the car runs freely down from position x to position y and up the hill on the other side.    x ycar     what happens to the kinetic energy and to the gravitational potential energy of the car as it  moves from position x to position y?     kinetic energy gravitational  potential energy  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20 [turn over  11 which energy resource does not have the sun as the original source?  a coal  b geothermal  c hydroelectric  d wind      12 the diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. the dimensions of the block are shown.    bench80 cm20 cm40 cm prq     on which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?  a p  b q  c r  d p, q and r produce the same pressure     13 the pressure due to the liquid on an object immersed in that liquid is 4500  pa.    the density of the liquid is 900  kg  / m3.    what is the depth of the object below the surface of the liquid?  a 0.5  cm b 2.0  cm c 50  cm d 200  cm     14 a gas is heated in a sealed container.    the volume of the container does not change.    what happens to the molecules of the gas?  a the average distance between molecules increases.  b the average kinetic energy of the molecules increases.  c the mass of each molecule increases.  d the volume of each molecule increases. ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20  15 water in a beaker evaporates when left on a bench for a period of time.    which three factors all affect the rate of evaporation of the water?  a wind speed, surface area, temperature  b wind speed, temperature, volume  c wind speed, surface area, volume  d surface area, temperature, volume     16 a solid is heated causing it to expand.    what effect does this have on its mass and on its density?     mass density  a decreases decreases  b decreases stays constant  c stays constant decreases  d stays constant stays constant      17 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d       18 why are metals better thermal conductors than other solids?  a metals contain free electrons which help transfer the energy.  b molecules in metals are in fixed positions.  c molecules in metals can move freely.  d molecules in metals vibrate faster than those in other solids.     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20 [turn over  19 two freezers x and y are identical except that one has a door opening at the front and the other  has a door opening at the top.    xfreezer door yfreezerdoor     both doors are the same size and are opened for the same amount of time.    which freezer gains the least amount of thermal energy in this time and why?     freezer gaining the  least thermal energy reason  a x cold air falls  b x warm air falls  c y cold air falls  d y warm air falls     20 a wave of frequency 6600  hz travels 1320  m in 4.0  s.    what is the wavelength?  a 0.050  m b 0.80  m c 1.3  m d 20  m    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20  21 the diagram shows a wave.    8 cm 4 cm3 cm 6 cm     what are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?     amplitude  / cm wavelength  / cm  a 3 4  b 3 8  c 6 4  d 6 8      22 which statement is correct?  a the speed of light in glass is equal to the speed of light in a vacuum multiplied by the  refractive index of glass.  b the incident angle of a light ray at an air-glass surface is the angle between the ray and the  glass surface.  c the sine of the critical angle at an air-glass surface is equal to glass of index  refractive1.  d the angle of refraction for light passing through an air-glass surface is proportional to the  angle of incidence at that surface.     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20 [turn over  23 a narrow beam of white light passes through a prism and is dispersed into a spectrum.    1 2 3white light     which row is correct?     colour 1 colour 2 colour 3  a blue yellow red  b red blue yellow  c red yellow blue  d yellow blue red     24 an intruder alarm sensor detects that a person is warmer than his surroundings.    which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?  a infrared  b radio  c ultraviolet  d visible light      25 sound travels through air as a series of compressions and rarefactions.    which statement correctly compares a compression with a rarefaction?  a in a compression the wavelength is longer than in a rarefaction.  b in a compression the wavelength is shorter than in a rarefaction.  c in a compression the density of the air is greater than in a rarefaction.  d in a compression the density of the air is lower than in a rarefaction.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20  26 four nails a, b, c and d are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is  recorded. each nail is tested individually.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?     number of paper clips attached to the nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2     27 the circuit shows one method of magnetising a steel bar.    +\u2013 steel ba r    how can the circuit be altered so that it can be used to demagnetise the magnetised steel bar?  a remove the steel bar from the coil whilst the current is switched on  b replace the d.c. supply with an a.c. supply and gradually reduce the supply voltage to zero  c reverse the polarity of the d.c. supply  d reverse the polarity of the d.c. supply and gradually reduce the supply voltage to zero       ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20 [turn over  28 a student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of two identical resistors.    a v    the voltmeter reading is 2.2  v and the ammeter reading is 0.25  a.    what is the resistance of each resistor?  a 0.275  \u03c9 b 0.55  \u03c9 c 4.4  \u03c9 d 8.8  \u03c9    29 an electric fire is connected to a 240  v supply and transfers energy at a rate of 1.0  kw.    how much charge passes through the fire in 1.0  h?  a 42  c b 250  c c 1.5 \u00d7 104  c d 2.4 \u00d7 105  c    30 the diagram shows an incomplete circuit. the temperature and light levels around the circuit  remain unchanged.    apq     four electrical components are connected in turn across pq. the cell is reversed and the four electrical components are connected again in turn across pq.    for which component is there a significant change in the magnitude of the current?  a diode  b light-dependent resistor  c resistor  d thermistor    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20  31 in the circuit shown, a 1 and a 2 are ammeters.    sa2 a1     switch s is closed.    which row is correct?     the resistance of  the whole circuit reading of a 1 reading of a 2  a decreases stays the same increases  b decreases increases increases  c increases stays the same stays the same  d increases decreases decreases      32 which symbol represents an or gate?    abc d      ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20 [turn over  33 a digital circuit consists of two logic gates.    when the input to the circuit is 1 and 1, the output is 0.    digital circuit1 0 1input output     which combination of logic gates gives this result?    a b c d      34 the diagram shows a wire between the poles of a magnet.    the wire is perpendicular to the page.    n swireleft right     the wire is moved and a current is induced upwards, out of the paper.    in which direction is the wire moved?  a left to right  b right to left  c up the page  d down the page    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20  35 a 100% efficient transformer converts a 240  v input voltage to a 12  v output voltage. the output  power of the transformer can be a maximum of 20  w.    the output is connected to two 0.30  a bulbs in parallel. one of the bulbs fails.    how does the current in the primary coil change?  a it decreases by 0.30  a.  b it decreases by 0.015  a.  c it increases by 0.15  a.  d it remains unchanged.      36 cables transmit electrical power from the output of the transformer at a power station to the input  of the transformer at a substation.    transformer at power stationtransformer at substationcables output input     the power at the output of the transformer at the power station is 400  mw.    which situation delivers the most power to the input of the transformer at the substation?     potential difference at  power station transformer  output  / kv diameter of cables  a 200 large  b 200 small  c 400 large  d 400 small     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20 [turn over  37 uranium-235 is a radioactive isotope. it under goes a chain of decays and eventually forms the  stable isotope lead-207. these two isotopes are represented as shown.    235u92207pb82    during this chain of decay, how many protons and how many neutrons are lost from a single nucleus of uranium-235 to form a single nucleus of lead-207?     protons neutrons  a 10 18  b 10 28  c 18 10  d 28 10     38 a radioactive material has a half-life of 20 days.    a sample of the material contains 8.0 \u00d7 10 10 atoms.    how many atomic nuclei have decayed after 60 days?  a 1.0 \u00d7 1010 b 4.0 \u00d7 1010 c 6.0 \u00d7 1010 d 7.0 \u00d7 1010     39 a thin sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a radiation detector. the count  rate falls to a very low reading.    sourcepaper detector counter     from this result, which type of radiation is the source emitting?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d x-rays     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/m/j/20  40 \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays are emitted by radioactive nuclei when they decay.    which emissions can be deflected by an electric field?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b3-rays and \u03b1-particles only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays       "
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 06_0625_22/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *2715201136*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/22     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20  1 five athletes p, q, r, s and t compete in a race. the table shows the finishing times for the  athletes.    athlete p q r s t  finishing time  / s 22.50 24.40 25.20 26.50 23.20    which statement is correct?  a athlete p won the race and was 0.70  s ahead of the athlete in second place.  b athlete p won the race and was 1.90  s ahead of the athlete in second place.  c athlete s won the race and was 1.30  s ahead of the athlete in second place.  d athlete s won the race and was 2.10  s ahead of the athlete in second place.      2 a student investigates the motion of a ball rolling down a slope.    the diagram shows the speed v of the ball at different times t.    t = 0  s v = 0  cm / s t = 0.2  s v = 2.8  cm / s t = 0.4  s v = 5.1  cm / s t = 0.6  s v = 7.0  cm / sball     which statement describes the motion of the ball?  a the acceleration is not constant.  b the acceleration is negative.  c the speed is decreasing.  d the velocity is constant.      3 which statement about acceleration is correct?  a it is related to the changing speed of an object.  b it is the distance an object travels in one second.  c it is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.  d it is the force acting on an object when it is near to the earth.     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20 [turn over  4 which statement correctly describes the effects of placing a heavy load in a car?  a it is easier to accelerate the car and easier to bring the car to rest.  b it is easier to accelerate the car but more difficult to bring the car to rest.  c it is more difficult to accelerate the car and more difficult to bring the car to rest.  d it is more difficult to accelerate the car but easier to bring the car to rest.      5 a space probe is taken from the earth to mars.    the force of gravity on the surface of mars is less than the force of gravity on the surface of the earth.    how do the weight and the mass of a space probe on the surface of mars compare to their values when the probe is on the surface of the earth?     weight on mars mass on mars  a decreased decreased  b decreased unchanged  c unchanged decreased  d unchanged unchanged    6 water has a density of 1000 kg  / m3.    a rectangular swimming pool has an average depth of 1.6  m.    the length of the pool is 25  m.    the width of the pool is 10  m.    what is the mass of the water in the swimming pool?  a 2.5 kg b 400  kg c 400  000  kg d 800  000  kg     7 a satellite orbits the earth at constant speed in a circular orbit.    which statement is correct?  a the resultant force on the satellite is zero.  b the resultant force on the satellite is towards the earth.  c the resultant force on the satellite is away from the earth.  d the resultant force on the satellite is in the direction of motion.     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20  8 two forces p and q act on an object.    which diagram shows the resultant of these two forces?    ab cd pppp qqqqresultant resultant resultant resultant      9 an object is moving at +3.0  m / s.    a force acts on the object.    after a time, the object is moving at \u2013  4.0  m / s.    the mass of the object is 5.0  kg.    what is the change in momentum of the body?  a \u201335  kg  m / s b \u20135.0  kg  m / s c +5.0  kg  m / s d +35  kg  m / s     10 which energy resource is not renewable?  a geothermal  b nuclear fission  c solar  d wind     11 a car of mass 500  k g  i s  m o v i n g  a t  1 0  m / s. the engine does work on the car and the speed  increases to 16  m / s.    how much work is done by the engine to increase the speed of the car?  a 3000  j b 9000  j c 39  000  j d 78  000  j    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20 [turn over  12 the diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. the dimensions of the block are shown.    bench80 cm20 cm40 cm prq     on which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?  a p  b q  c r  d p, q and r produce the same pressure      13 an object is 60  cm below the surface of a liquid. the pressure due to the liquid at this depth is  9000  pa.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 15  kg  / m3 b 540  kg  / m3 c 1500  kg  / m3 d 54  000  kg  / m3      14 which row describes the forces between the molecules and the motion of the molecules in a  solid?     forces between  molecules motion  of molecules  a strong move freely  b strong vibrate only  c weak move freely  d weak vibrate only     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20  15 wet clothes are hanging outside to dry.    which condition decreases the rate of evaporation of the water from the clothes?  a folded clothes  b higher temperature  c wetter clothes  d windy day     16 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    0 10 \u201310 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100glass bulb stem capillary tube liquid    the design of this thermometer includes the following features.    1 a liquid which expands linearly when it is heated  2 a glass bulb which has a thick glass wall 3 a capillary tube with a very small diameter    which features increase the sensitivity of the thermometer?  a 1 only b 1 and 2 c 2 and 3 d 3 only     17 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d      ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20 [turn over  18 a room is heated by a radiator. the diagrams x a nd y show two possible circulations of hot air,  which heat the room.    diagram x radiatordiagram y radiatorceiling floorceiling floor     which diagram and reason explain the heating of the room by convection?     diagram reason  a x air density decreases when air is heated  b x air density increases when air is heated  c y air density decreases when air is heated  d y air density increases when air is heated     19 two copper containers p and q are filled with hot water.    the diagrams are both drawn to the same scale.    pq    container p emits more infrared radiation from its surfaces than container q.    what is a possible reason for this?  a the surfaces of p are painted white and the surfaces of q are painted black.  b the surfaces of p are shiny and the surfaces of q are dull.  c the surfaces of p have a smaller area than the surfaces of q.  d the water in p is hotter than the water in q.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20  20 the diagram shows a wave.    8 cm 4 cm3 cm 6 cm     what are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?     amplitude  / cm wavelength  / cm  a 3 4  b 3 8  c 6 4  d 6 8     21 the frequency of the microwaves used in a microwave oven is 2400  mhz.    what is the wavelength of these microwaves?  a 0.125  m b 8.00  m c 125  m d 7200  m     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20 [turn over  22 an object o is placed in front of a plane mirror as shown.    12o plane mirro r     which row is correct?     position of  the image nature of  the image  a 1 real  b 1 virtual  c 2 real  d 2 virtual      23 which statement is correct?  a the speed of light in glass is equal to the speed of light in a vacuum multiplied by the  refractive index of glass.  b the incident angle of a light ray at an air-glass surface is the angle between the ray and the  glass surface.  c the sine of the critical angle at an air-glass surface is equal to glass of index  refractive1.  d the angle of refraction for light passing through an air-glass surface is proportional to the  angle of incidence at that surface.     24 an intruder alarm sensor detects that a person is warmer than his surroundings.    which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?  a infrared  b radio  c ultraviolet  d visible light      25 a dolphin sends out a sound wave. an echo returns 0.010  s later from a fish which is 7.5  m from  the dolphin.    what is the speed of the sound wave in water?  a 0.075  m / s b 0.15  m / s c 750  m / s d 1500  m / s   ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20  26 four nails a, b, c and d are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is  recorded. each nail is tested individually.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?     number of paper clips attached to the nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2    ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20 [turn over  27 a student wants to demagnetise a steel bar. he uses the apparatus shown. he switches on the  circuit for a few seconds and then switches off. he finds that the steel bar is still magnetised.    coil steel bar a.c. supply    what should he do to improve his method?  a change the supply from an alternating to a direct voltage  b use a lower alternating voltage  c remove the steel bar from the coil whilst the circuit is switched on  d use a coil that has fewer turns on it      28 a cloth is used to rub an uncharged plastic rod.    both the rod and the cloth become charged.    why does the plastic rod become negatively charged and the cloth become positively charged?  a the rod gains electrons and the cloth gains positive charges.  b the rod gains electrons and the cloth loses electrons.  c the rod loses electrons and the cloth gains electrons.  d the rod loses electrons and the cloth loses positive charges.     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20  29 a student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of two identical resistors.    a v    the voltmeter reading is 2.2  v and the ammeter reading is 0.25  a.    what is the resistance of each resistor?  a 0.275  \u03c9 b 0.55  \u03c9 c 4.4  \u03c9 d 8.8  \u03c9    30 a cell passes a current of 2.0  a in a circuit for 30  s. in this time the cell transfers 120  j of energy.    what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell?  a 0.50  v b 1.5  v c 2.0  v d 8.0  v    31 the circuit shown contains five lamps j, k, l, m and n. all the lamps are glowing.    lamp k lamp nlamp jlamp l lamp m     one lamp is removed and two other lamps go out.    which lamp is removed?  a lamp j  b lamp k  c lamp l  d lamp m    ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20 [turn over  32 what is the effective resistance of the following combination of resistors?    8.0 \u03c96.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c9     a 1.8  \u03c9 b 7.4  \u03c9 c 11  \u03c9 d 18  \u03c9     33 which symbol represents a nand gate?    abc d       34 the diagram shows a circuit used to switch on a heater when the temperature drops below a  certain value.    x y     which row shows the components that should be connected at x and at y?     x y  a     b     c     d    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20  35 the diagram shows the magnetic field due to a current in a solenoid.    where is the magnetic field the strongest?    da cb       36 a beam of electrons is passed through the magnetic field of a magnet.    how must the magnet be positioned to deflect the beam in the direction shown?    na sdirection of beam direction of beame\u2013 sc ndirection of beame\u2013s nb e\u2013 direction of beamn sd e\u2013      ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20 [turn over  37 uranium-235 can undergo nuclear fission in many ways.    which equation correctly shows a possible fission reaction for uranium-235?  1n0 31n092kr36235u92141ba56a + \u2192 ++ 1n0 21n091sr38235u92144xe54b + \u2192 + 95rb37136cs55+ 87br35146la57++ 1n0 31n0235u92c + \u2192 + 1n0 41n0235u92d + \u2192 +      38 a radioactive material has a half-life of 20 days.    a sample of the material contains 8.0 \u00d7 10 10 atoms.    how many atomic nuclei have decayed after 60 days?  a 1.0 \u00d7 1010 b 4.0 \u00d7 1010 c 6.0 \u00d7 1010 d 7.0 \u00d7 1010     39 a thin sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a radiation detector. the count  rate falls to a very low reading.    sourcepaper detector counter     from this result, which type of radiation is the source emitting?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d x-rays    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/m/j/20  40 \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays are emitted by radioactive nuclei when they decay.    which emissions can be deflected by an electric field?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b3-rays and \u03b1-particles only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays       "
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 06_0625_23/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *4570649359*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/23     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark. a ma rk will not be deducted for a wrong answer.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  1 diagram 1 shows a solid, rectangular-sided block.    top side front diagram 1    diagram 2 shows the same block from the front and from the side.    1cm2345678 1cm234567 9 1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 9 20 21 22front side diagram 2    metre rules have been shown close to the edges of the block.    what is the volume of the block?  a 120  cm3 b 168  cm3 c 264  cm3 d 1155  cm3     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 [turn over  2 a student investigates the motion of a ball rolling down a slope.    the diagram shows the speed v of the ball at different times t.    t = 0  s v = 0  cm / s t = 0.2  s v = 2.8  cm / s t = 0.4  s v = 5.1  cm / s t = 0.6  s v = 7.0  cm / sball     which statement describes the motion of the ball?  a the acceleration is not constant.  b the acceleration is negative.  c the speed is decreasing.  d the velocity is constant.      3 which statement about acceleration is correct?  a it is related to the changing speed of an object.  b it is the distance an object travels in one second.  c it is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.  d it is the force acting on an object when it is near to the earth.     4 which statement correctly describes the effects of placing a heavy load in a car?  a it is easier to accelerate the car and easier to bring the car to rest.  b it is easier to accelerate the car but more difficult to bring the car to rest.  c it is more difficult to accelerate the car and more difficult to bring the car to rest.  d it is more difficult to accelerate the car but easier to bring the car to rest.    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  5 which row gives the correct weight for the mass shown?     the value of g is 10  n / kg.     mass  / kg weight  / n  a 2 20  b 10 1  c 10 10  d 20 2     6 a rectangular gymnasium is 50  m long, 25  m wide and 8.0  m high.    the density of air is 1.2  kg  / m3.    what is the best estimate of the mass of air in the gymnasium?  a 0.00012  kg b 100  kg c 8300  kg d 12  000  kg    7 which moving object has a resultant force acting on it?  a a diver rising vertically through water at constant speed  b an aircraft circling an airport at constant speed  c a parachutist descending vertically at terminal velocity  d a train going up a straight slope at constant speed    8 which quantity is not a vector?  a acceleration  b temperature  c velocity  d weight    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 [turn over  9 a ball falls vertically to the floor and rebounds vertically upwards.    just before it hits the floor, its speed is 4.0  m / s.    as it rebounds, its speed is 3.0  m / s.    the mass of the ball is 0.50  kg.    what is the change in momentum of the ball?  a 0.50  kg  m / s downwards  b 0.50  kg  m / s upwards  c 3.5  kg  m / s downwards  d 3.5  kg  m / s upwards     10 a mass bounces up and down on a steel spring. the diagram shows the mass and the spring at  different points during the motion.    highest point lowestpointmassmovingdown massmovingup     at which point does the mass have the least gravitational potential energy and at which point is  the most elastic energy stored in the spring?     least amount of  gravitational  potential energy most elastic energy  stored in spring  a mass moving down mass moving up  b mass moving down lowest point  c lowest point mass moving up  d lowest point lowest point    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  11 the velocity v of an object increases as it falls towards the ground.    which quantity is directly proportional to v2?  a the speed of the object  b the gravitational potential energy of the object  c the kinetic energy of the object  d the momentum of the object     12 the diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. the dimensions of the block are shown.    bench80 cm20 cm40 cm prq     on which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?  a p  b q  c r  d p, q and r produce the same pressure    13 a pipe full of water connects a water supply on a hill to a tap lower down the hill.    the length of the pipe is 500  m. the height of the supply above the tap is 100  m.    the density of the water is 1000  kg  / m3. the effect of atmospheric pressure is negligible.    what is the water pressure at the tap?  a 100  000  pa  b 500  000  pa  c 1  000  000  pa  d 5  000  000  pa     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 [turn over  14 when a molecule rebounds from a wall, a force is exerted on the wall.    what causes this force?  a the kinetic energy gained by the molecule  b the kinetic energy lost by the molecule  c the change of momentum of the molecule  d the change of speed of the molecule     15 the relationship between pressure p and volume v of a gas is given as pv = constant.    under which conditions for the mass of a gas and for its temperature does the equation hold?     mass temperature  a changing changing  b changing constant  c constant changing  d constant constant    16 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    xy     which row gives the correct labels for the thermometer?     x y  a water narrow tube of uniform diameter  b alcohol narrow tube of uniform diameter  c water this end immersed in substance to be measured  d alcohol this end immersed in substance to be measured    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  17 the diagrams show four blocks of steel. the blocks are all drawn to the same scale.    the same quantity of thermal energy is given to each block.    which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?    a b c d        18 why are metals better conductors of thermal energy than non-metals?  a they contain free electrons.  b their molecules are further apart.  c their molecules vibrate at a higher frequency.  d they have smoother surfaces.     19 the diagram shows a vacuum flask used to keep a liquid warm.    airtight lid outer cover vacuum silvered walls     which methods of heat loss are reduced by the vacuum  between the silvered walls?  a conduction only  b conduction and convection only  c convection and radiation only  d conduction, convection and radiation     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 [turn over  20 an earthquake-monitoring station records the arrival of 16 complete waves of an earthquake  wave in 20  s.    the speed of the earthquake wave is 6.0  km  / s.    what is the wavelength of the earthquake wave?  a 1.3 \u00d7 10\u20134  m  b 2.1 \u00d7 10\u20134  m  c 4.8 \u00d7 103  m  d 7.5 \u00d7 103  m      21 the diagram shows a wave.    8 cm 4 cm3 cm 6 cm     what are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?     amplitude  / cm wavelength  / cm  a 3 4  b 3 8  c 6 4  d 6 8     22 which statement is correct?  a the speed of light in glass is equal to the speed of light in a vacuum multiplied by the  refractive index of glass.  b the incident angle of a light ray at an air-glass surface is the angle between the ray and the  glass surface.  c the sine of the critical angle at an air-glass surface is equal to  glass of index  refractive1.  d the angle of refraction for light passing through an air-glass surface is proportional to the  angle of incidence at that surface. ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  23 which statement about converging lenses is correct?  a a real image of an object projected onto a screen by a converging lens is always inverted.  b the image formed by a converging lens is always upright.  c the image formed by a converging lens when used as a magnifying glass is a real image.  d parallel rays entering a converging lens are focused at a distance greater than the focal  length from the lens.     24 an intruder alarm sensor detects that a person is warmer than his surroundings.    which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?  a infrared  b radio  c ultraviolet  d visible light     25 two people are standing outdoors on either side of a high wall.    person 1 person 2    person 1 can hear person 2 talking although he cannot see her.    which statement explains this?  a the sound waves have diffracted around the wall.  b the sound waves have passed unaffected through the wall.  c the sound waves have reflected around the wall.  d the sound waves have refracted around the wall.     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 [turn over  26 four nails a, b, c and d are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.    one of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can  support is recorded.    nsnail bar magnet paper clips     the bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is  recorded. each nail is tested individually.    which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?     number of paper clips attached to the nail  bar magnet present bar magnet removed a 2 0  b 2 1  c 4 3  d 5 2    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  27 the diagrams show a magnetised steel rod inside a solenoid connected to a potentiometer.    in diagram 1, the potentiometer is connected to a d.c. power supply.    in diagram 2, the potentiometer is connected to an a.c. power supply.    d.c. diagram 1q p a.c. diagram 2s rmagnetised steelmagnetisedsteel     which action would demagnetise the piece of steel?  a in diagram 1, move the potentiometer slide from p to q.  b in diagram 1, move the potentiometer slide from q to p.  c in diagram 2, move the potentiometer slide from r to s.  d in diagram 2, move the potentiometer slide from s to r.     28 the diagram shows a positively charged conducting sphere and a wire connected to earth.    + ++ +++ earthinsulating supportpositively charged sphere wire     what happens when the wire is touched onto the sphere?  a electrons flow from earth to the sphere.  b electrons flow from the sphere to earth.  c positive charges flow from earth to the sphere.  d positive charges flow from the sphere to earth.     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 [turn over  29 a student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of two identical resistors.    a v    the voltmeter reading is 2.2  v and the ammeter reading is 0.25  a.    what is the resistance of each resistor?  a 0.275  \u03c9 b 0.55  \u03c9 c 4.4  \u03c9 d 8.8  \u03c9     30 there is a current of 2.0  a in a resistor of resistance 8.0  \u03c9.    how much power is dissipated in the resistor?  a 0.25  w b 4.0  w c 16  w d 32  w    31 the lamps, the diodes and the batteries in the circuits are identical.    in which circuit does the ammeter give the greatest reading?    d c b a a a a a      32 two resistors are connected in series with a power supply.    which statement about the circuit is correct?  a the current from the supply is greater than the current in each resistor.  b the current from the supply is equal to the current in each resistor.  c the current from the supply is less than the current in each resistor.  d the current from the supply is the sum of the currents in each resistor.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  33 which two logic gates each have a high output when both of their inputs are high?  a and and or  b and and nor  c nand and nor  d nand and or      34 the diagram shows a series of logic gates and part of its corresponding truth table.    r stp q     p q r s t  0 0 0 0 1  0 1     1 0 0 1 1  1 1 1 1 0    what are the missing values in row 2 of the truth table?  a 0 1 0 b 0 1 1 c 1 0 0 d 1 1 1     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 [turn over  35 the graphs show how the currents in three circuits vary with time.    1.5 1.00.50.0 \u20130.5\u20131.0\u20131.5 timecircuit 2 current  / a1.5 1.00.50.0 \u20130.5\u20131.0\u20131.5 timecircuit 1 current  / a 1.5 1.00.50.0 \u20130.5\u20131.0\u20131.5 timecircuit 3 current  / a     in which circuits is there a direct current?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 2 only d 3 only    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  36 the coil of a simple a.c. generator rotates steadily in a uniform magnetic field.    the diagram shows the position of the coil at time t = 0.    n scoil     which graph shows the output voltage for one revolution of the coil?    00a v t 00b v t 00c v t 00d v t       37 what occurs during nuclear fusion?  a two light atomic nuclei join together and emit energy.  b two light atomic nuclei join together and absorb energy.  c a heavy atomic nucleus splits and emits energy.  d a heavy atomic nucleus splits and absorbs energy.    ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 38 a radioactive material has a half-life of 20 days.    a sample of the material contains 8.0 \u00d7 1010 atoms.    how many atomic nuclei have decayed after 60 days?  a 1.0 \u00d7 1010 b 4.0 \u00d7 1010 c 6.0 \u00d7 1010 d 7.0 \u00d7 1010    39 a thin sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a radiation detector. the count  rate falls to a very low reading.    sourcepaper detector counter     from this result, which type of radiation is the source emitting?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d x-rays      40 \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays are emitted by radioactive nuclei when they decay.    which emissions can be deflected by an electric field?  a \u03b1-particles and \u03b2-particles only  b \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays only  c \u03b3-rays and \u03b1-particles only  d \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  blank page",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20 blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/m/j/20  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (ce/cgw) 191610/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/31 paper 3 theory (core)  may/june  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *1840871821*",
            "2": "2 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 fig. 1.1 shows a coil of wire. length of coil fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  (a) a student measures the length of the coil using a ruler. his measurement is 3.8  cm.   there are 20 turns of wire in the coil. the student uses his measurement to calculate the  average thickness of the wire.   (i) show that the average thickness of the wire is about 0.2  cm.  average thickness of wire =  ..  cm [2]   (ii) the student\u2019s measurement of 3.8  cm is inaccurate.    suggest one reason why the measurement is inaccurate.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the volume of the wire in the coil is 16.6  cm3 and its mass is 148  g.   calculate the density of the metal used for the wire in the coil.  density =  .  g / cm3 [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) the student has a measuring cylinder and a beaker of water, as shown in fig. 1.2. measuring cylinderbeaker of water coil fig. 1.2   describe how the student can determine the volume of the coil by using the equipment shown  in fig. 1.2.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 (a) a student stretches a spring by adding different loads to it. she measures the length of the  spring for each load. she plots a graph of the results.   fig. 2.1 shows the graph of her results. 04.08.0 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 load  / nlength  / cm 4.0 5.0 6.012.016.0 fig. 2.1   use the graph to determine:   (i) the length of the spring without a load  length =  ..  cm [1]   (ii) the length of the spring with a load of 4.0  n  length =  ..  cm [1]   (iii) the extension due to a 4.0  n load.  extension =  ..  cm [1]  (b) complete the sentence about effects of forces. choose words from the box. colour       friction       pressure       shape       size       speed   stretching a spring with a load is an example of how a force can change the   and the  of an object.  [2] [total: 5]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 3 some gas molecules are in a box at room temperature.   fig. 3.1 shows the position of some of the molecules and the direction of movement of each  molecule.  wall of box fig. 3.1  (a) (i) describe the movement of the gas molecules.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) describe how the molecules exert a pressure on the walls of the box.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) the gas in fig. 3.1 is cooled. the gas turns into a liquid then into a solid.   state how the average separation of molecules in the gas is different from the average  separation of molecules in the solid.  ...  .  [1] [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 (a) during part of a race, a skier travels a distance of 200  m in a time of 6.4  s.   calculate the average speed of the skier.  average speed =    m / s [3]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows a speed\u2013time graph for the skier in another part of the race. 05.010.0 0 5.0 10.0 15.0 time  / sspeed m / s 20.0 25.0 30.015.020.0 pq r s fig. 4.1   describe the motion of the skier at each point p, q, r and s on the graph.   p  ...   q  ...   r  ...   s  ... [4]  (c) skis are strapped to a skier\u2019s feet and are longer and wider than the skier\u2019s feet.   explain how the skis prevent the skier from sinking into soft snow.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 9]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5 a metre rule is balanced on a pivot by three vertical forces, as shown in fig. 5.1. 5.0 n40 cm pivot weight  of rule = 2.0  n f10 cm100  cm fig. 5.1 (not to scale)  (a) show that the moment of the 5.0  n force about the pivot is 200  n cm.  [2]  (b) calculate the size of force f.  f =    n [4] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 fig. 6.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. liquid ice pointliquid\u2013100102030405060708090100110 fig. 6.1  (a) (i) this thermometer is used for measuring temperatures in science experiments.    state the unit for measuring temperature.  .  [1]   (ii) on fig. 6.1, an arrow points to the temperature reading when the thermometer is placed  in pure melting ice. this is labelled ice point .    on fig. 6.1, draw an arrow pointing to the temperature reading when the thermometer is  at the upper fixed point. label this arrow steam point . [1]  (b) a liquid-in-glass thermometer uses the property of expansion of a liquid to measure  temperature.   state one other application or consequence of thermal expansion.  ...  .  [1]  (c) a student is testing how different surfaces absorb radiant heat.    the student puts two metal plates in holders and places them on either side of a radiant  heater as shown in fig. 6.2. one plate has a shiny metal side facing towards the heater and  the other plate has a dull black side facing towards the heater.   a metal disc is attached to each plate using wax. 8 cm 10 cmwaxmetal disc waxmetal discdull black surfaceradiant heatershiny metal surface fig. 6.2",
            "9": "9 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (i) the student turns on the radiant heater and starts a stop-clock. the wax on the plate  with a dull black side melts and the metal disc falls off the plate 53 seconds after the  stop-clock is started.    the metal disc on the plate with a shiny metal side remains attached for another  32 seconds after the metal disc on the first plate falls.    explain why the metal disc on the plate with a dull black side falls before the metal disc  on the plate with a shiny metal side.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) another student observes the experiment shown in fig. 6.2 and says that the comparison  of the two plates is not fair.    suggest why the experiment is not fair.  ...  .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light striking a plane mirror at point p. ray of light30\u00b0p fig. 7.1 (not to scale)   (i) determine the value of the angle of incidence for the ray of light at point p.  angle of incidence =  ..  \u00b0 [1]   (ii) on fig. 7.1, \u2022 draw a normal at point p \u2022 draw the ray reflected at point p \u2022 determine the angle of reflection at point p.  angle of reflection =  ..  \u00b0 [3]  (b) fig. 7.2 shows an object ob positioned 20  cm from a thin converging lens. both principal  focuses of the lens are labelled f.   b f fo fig. 7.2   two rays from the tip b of the object are incident on the lens, as shown in fig. 7.2.   on fig. 7.2, continue the paths of these two rays to show the position of the image of ob  formed by the lens. draw an arrow to show the size, position and orientation of the image  of ob. [4] [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 8 fig. 8.1 represents the pressure at one instant along part of a sound wave. 20 40 60 80 100 120 distance  / cmdirection of wave travel normal air pressureabove normal air pressure below normal air pressure fig. 8.1  (a) (i) determine the wavelength of the sound wave.  wavelength of the sound wave =  ..  cm [1]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, draw a wave representing a louder sound of the same wavelength.  [1]  (b) state the range of audible frequencies for a healthy human ear. include the unit.  .  [2] [total: 4]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a bar magnet. bar magnet fig. 9.1   (i) on fig. 9.1, write the letters n and s to indicate the north and south poles of the magnet.  [1]   (ii) fig. 9.2 shows a soft-iron bar placed close to a permanent magnet. permanent magnet soft-iron bar fig. 9.2    state and explain what happens to the soft-iron bar. you may draw on fig. 9.2.  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) three balls p, q and r are electrically charged. the balls are suspended by threads of  insulating material. fig. 9.3 shows the arrangement. ball p\u2013 ball qball rinsulated thread fig. 9.3",
            "13": "13 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   ball p is negatively charged.   (i) state the charge on ball q and the charge on ball r. ball q  . ball r  . [2]   (ii) explain your answer for part (i) for the charge on ball q.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 (a) a student investigates the electrical resistance of some components.   fig. 10.1 shows an incomplete diagram of the circuit used by the student. y fig. 10.1   (i) state the term used for component y. .  [1]   (ii) the student uses the circuit to measure the resistance of component y.    complete the diagram in fig. 10.1 by adding electrical symbols to show an ammeter and  a voltmeter correctly connected to determine the resistance of component y.  [3]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows two resistors a and b. 5.0 \u03c9 7.0 \u03c9a b fig. 10.2   (i) resistor a and resistor b are connected in series.    state the value of their combined resistance.  .  \u03c9 [1]   (ii) resistor a and resistor b are connected in parallel.    compare the combined resistance when in parallel with the resistance of resistor  a  alone.  .  [1] [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 11 a teacher uses a power supply in a metal case. the circuit for the power supply includes a fuse.  (a) (i) draw the electrical symbol for a fuse.  [1]   (ii) the metal case of the power supply is earthed. a fault occurs and a live wire touches the  metal case.    explain how earthing the metal case protects the teacher.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the power supply circuit includes a transformer. its input voltage is 240  v. there are 960  turns on the input coil and 64 turns on the output coil.   calculate the output voltage of the transformer.  output voltage =  .  v [3] [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.12 radioactive sources emit \u03b1-(alpha), \u03b2-(beta) and \u03b3-(gamma) radiations.  (a) state which of these types of radiation can pass through paper.  .  [1]  (b) barium-137 is a radioactive isotope. the nuclide notation for barium-137 is 137 56ba   determine the number of neutrons in a nucleus of barium-137.  number of neutrons =    [1]  (c) an isotope of barium-137 has a half-life of 3 minutes.   a radioactive source contains 36  mg of this isotope.   calculate the mass of the isotope that remains in the source after 9 minutes.  mass of the isotope remaining =  ..  mg [3] [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.physics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core)  may/june  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *7777940319* dc (cj/cb) 191838/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 some students observe drops of water falling from a tap that leaks, as shown in fig. 1.1. fig. 1.1  (a) the students measure the time for 50 drops to fall from the tap. the time for 50 drops to fall is  20 s.   calculate the average time between two drops falling.  average time =  .  s [2]  (b) the students collect some drops of water.   (i) the students measure the volume of the water they collect.    state the term for the equipment that is suitable for measuring the volume accurately.  .  [1]   (ii) in a similar experiment, another student collects 0.21  kg of water.    calculate the weight of this water.  weight of water =    n [3]  [total: 6]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 (a) some students determine the speed of a car on a road. the students measure the time for  the car to travel 30  m along the road. the time is 5.4  s.   calculate the average speed of the car.  average speed =    m / s [3]  (b) another car moves at a constant speed of 16  m / s for 4.0 seconds. during the next 2.0  seconds,  the car decelerates from a speed of 16  m / s to a speed of 13  m / s. it then continues at a  constant speed of 13  m / s for 3.0 seconds.    on fig. 2.1, plot the speed\u2013time graph for the motion of the car during these 9.0  s. time  / s005101520 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0speed m / s    fig. 2.1  [3]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) a motorcycle accelerates as shown in fig. 2.2. calculate the distance the motorcycle travels  while it is accelerating. use information from fig. 2.2. speed m / s time  / s0 1.0030 20 1040 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 fig. 2.2  distance travelled =    m [3]  [total: 9] ",
            "5": "5 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows an archer pulling the string of a bow. fingers on string archerarrow bowstring hand pushing bow fig. 3.1  (a) the archer uses a force of 120  n. the force acts on an area of 0.5  cm2 on the archer\u2019s fingers.   calculate the pressure on the archer\u2019s fingers.  pressure on fingers =    n / cm2 [3]  (b) the archer\u2019s other hand is pushing the bow with the same force of 120  n. this force acts on a  larger area than the force in (a).    state whether the pressure on this hand is greater than, the same as or less than the pressure  on the fingers holding the string.  .  [1]  (c) state the type of energy stored in the bow when the archer bends it as shown in fig. 3.1.  .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 (a) match each description with the correct state of matter in table 4.1.   write the correct letter in table 4.1.   a \u2013 molecules move around freely and are far apart from each other.   b \u2013 molecules vibrate about fixed positions.   c \u2013 molecules move around randomly and are close to each other. table 4.1 state of matter description solids liquids gases  [2]  (b) some students heat water in a beaker. they measure the temperature every minute. they  heat the water for 8 minutes until it boils, and then continue to heat it for a further 5 minutes.   describe and explain how the temperature of the water changes during the 13 minutes.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 5]  ",
            "7": "7 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5 fig. 5.1 shows a ray of red light passing through a semicircular glass block. air pq r s semicircular glass blockray of red light fig. 5.1  (a) (i) state the term for the dotted line shown in fig. 5.1.  .  [1]   (ii) state which angle p, q, r or s is the angle of incidence for the ray of red light.  .  [1]   (iii) state which angle p, q, r or s is the angle of refraction.  .  [1]   (iv) state what happens to the speed of the red light as it enters the semicircular glass block  from the air.  .  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) fig. 5.2 shows the path of a ray of light entering a semicircular glass block. the critical angle  for the glass block is 42\u00b0.   on fig. 5.2, continue the path of the ray. show clearly its direction on leaving the glass block.  semicircular glass blockray of light 62\u00b0 fig. 5.2  [2]  (c) a ray of white light passes through two prisms as shown in fig. 5.3. d e fprisms ray of white light fig. 5.3",
            "9": "9 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   draw one line to link the letter for each position to the correct effect at that position.  position effect (i) refraction d diffraction total internal reflection [1] (ii) reflection e dispersion diffraction [1] (iii) red, green and blue light  only produced f white light produced spectrum of visible light  produced  [1]  [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 fig. 6.1 shows a hot liquid in a vacuum flask. the vacuum flask keeps the temperature of the  liquid in the flask constant for a long time. stopper shiny silver surface vacuum (space without particles)hot liquid shiny silver surface fig. 6.1  (a) describe how each feature helps to keep the liquid hot for longer.   (i) shiny silver surface  ...  .  [2]   (ii) the vacuum between the silvered surfaces  ...  ...  .  [3]     (b) (i) suggest a material for the stopper that will help to keep the liquid hot for longer. material  ...  [1]   (ii) give a reason for your answer. reason  ...  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 shows a diagram of the main regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. two labels are  missing. \u03b3-rays x-rays ultraviolet .. infrared .. radio fig. 7.1  (a) (i) complete the labels on fig. 7.1.  [2]   (ii) state two properties that are the same for all waves in the electromagnetic spectrum. 1. .. 2. ..  [2]  (b) state which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used in each situation.   (i) detecting objects without opening baggage at a security check   .  [1]   (ii) television remote control  .  [1]   (iii) satellite television transmissions  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 8 sound travels as a wave.   (a) complete each sentence.   sound is produced when an object .. .   an echo is produced when sound is .. from a hard surface.   compared with a quiet sound, a loud sound always has a greater ... .   compared with a high pitched sound, a low pitched sound always has a smaller ... .   waves transfer energy without transferring . .  [5]  (b) state the meaning of the term ultrasound.  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 9 some students plot the magnetic field lines around a bar magnet. they have the apparatus shown  in fig. 9.1 and a large sheet of paper. bar magnet plotting compass pencil fig. 9.1  (a) describe how the students use the apparatus in fig. 9.1 to show the pattern of the magnetic  field lines around the bar magnet.    you may draw a diagram to assist with your description.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) draw at least four lines above and below the bar magnet in fig. 9.2 to show the magnetic  field around the bar magnet. draw an arrow on the field lines to show the direction of the  magnetic field. s n fig. 9.2  [3]    [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 a student connects three identical lamps j, k and l in a circuit, as shown in fig. 10.1.   switch s1 is open and the current in ammeter a1 = 0.2\u200a a. a1 a2 a3k j l s1 fig. 10.1  use words from the box to complete the sentences.   each word may be used once, more than once, or not at all. the same increased decreased  (a) the switch s1 in fig. 10.1 is closed. state and explain the effect on the circuit.   (i) the current in ammeter a1 is  because the resistance of the whole      circuit is  .  [2]   (ii) the current in ammeter a2 is  .  [1]  (b) a student measures the potential difference (p.d.) across lamp j by using a voltmeter.   on fig. 10.1, draw the correct electrical symbol for the voltmeter with the correct connections.   [2]  (c) the p.d. across lamp j is 3.0  v and the current shown by ammeter a3 is 0.15\u200a a.   calculate the resistance of lamp j. include the unit in your answer.  resistance of lamp j = . unit.  [4]  [total: 9]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 11 a model train uses an electric motor. the motor has a coil of wire in a magnetic field.  (a) fig. 11.1 shows a coil of wire in a magnetic field. snnorth pole current coil of wiresouth pole fig. 11.1   describe two ways of increasing the turning effect on the coil.  ...  .  [2]  (b) the motor for the model train uses an alternating voltage of 12  v. this is supplied by the  secondary coil of a transformer.   the primary coil of the transformer is connected to a mains voltage of 240  v.   the primary coil has 900 turns.    calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  number of turns on the secondary coil =  .  [3]  [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.12 (a) carbon-14 is a radioactive isotope of carbon. an atom of carbon-14 has 6 protons in its  nucleus.   another isotope of carbon is carbon-12.    (i) determine the number of protons in a carbon-12 nucleus.   .  [1]   (ii) determine the number of neutrons in a carbon-14 nucleus.   .  [1]   (iii) determine the number of electrons orbiting the nucleus of a single carbon-14 atom.    .  [1]  (b) carbon-14 decays by emitting a \u03b2-particle.   state what happens to a nucleus of carbon-14 when it emits a \u03b2-particle.  .  [1]  (c) people working with radioactive sources need to take safety precautions.   (i) a shielding material can absorb ionising radiation and reduce the damage to living tissue.    state a suitable material that will absorb all types of naturally occurring nuclear radiation.  .  [1]   (ii) apart from using shielding, state how a person can reduce the amount of ionising  radiation they absorb when they handle samples of radioactive substances.  .  [1]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (st/ct) 194261/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/41 paper 4 theory (extended)  may/june  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *4454872498*",
            "2": "2 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 an aeroplane of mass 2.5 \u00d7 105 kg lands with a speed of 62  m / s, on a horizontal runway at time  t = 0. the aeroplane decelerates uniformly as it travels along the runway in a straight line until it  reaches a speed of 6.0  m / s at t = 35  s.  (a) calculate:   (i) the deceleration of the aeroplane in the 35  s after it lands  deceleration =  .  [2]   (ii) the resultant force acting on the aeroplane as it decelerates  force =  .  [2]   (iii) the momentum of the aeroplane when its speed is 6.0  m / s.  momentum =  .  [2]  (b) at t = 35 s, the aeroplane stops decelerating and moves along the runway at a constant speed  of 6.0  m / s for a further 15  s.   on fig. 1.1, sketch the shape of the graph for the distance travelled by the aeroplane along  the runway between t = 0 and t = 50 s. you are not required to calculate distance values. distance 0 0 35 50 time  / s fig. 1.1 [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) as the aeroplane decelerates, its kinetic energy decreases.   suggest what happens to this energy.  ...  .  [1] [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 fig. 2.1 is the extension\u2013load graph for a light spring s. 0 0 2 4 6 8 10102030 load  / nextension  / cm fig. 2.1  (a) state the range of loads for which s obeys hooke\u2019s law.  from ... to  ..  [1]  (b) using information from fig. 2.1, determine the spring constant k of spring s.  k =  .  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) a second spring, identical to spring s, is attached to spring s. the two springs are attached  to a rod, as shown in fig. 2.2. a load of 4.0  n is suspended from the bottom of spring s. the  arrangement is in equilibrium. rod second spring spring s 4.0 n load fig. 2.2   (i) state the name of the form of energy stored in the two springs when they are stretched.  .  [1]   (ii) determine the extension of the arrangement in fig. 2.2.  extension =  ...  cm [1]   (iii) the load is carefully increased to 6.0  n in total.    calculate the distance moved by the load to the new equilibrium position as the load  increases from 4.0  n to 6.0  n.  distance moved =  .  [1] [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 fig. 3.1 shows gas trapped in the sealed end of a tube by a dense liquid. cm3 10 20 30 40 50 60 70trapped gasopen end sealed end dense liquid fig. 3.1  the scale marked on the sealed end of the tube is calibrated to read the volume of gas trapped  above the liquid surface. fig. 3.1 shows that initially the volume v1 of the gas is 60  cm3.  the pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.  (a) state how fig. 3.1 shows that the pressure of the trapped gas is equal to the pressure of the  atmosphere.  ...  .  [1]  (b) explain, in terms of the momentum of its molecules, why the trapped gas exerts a pressure  on the walls of the tube.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] ",
            "7": "7 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) more of the dense liquid is poured into the open end of the tube. the level of the liquid surface  in both the sealed and the open ends of the tube rises as shown in fig. 3.2. the temperature  of the trapped gas and atmospheric pressure both remain constant. cm3 10 20 30 40 50 60 70trapped gasopen end dense liquid15 cm sealed end fig. 3.2   (i) in the sealed end of the tube, the volume v2 of the trapped gas is 50  cm3. in the open  end of the tube, the liquid surface is 15  cm above the new level in the sealed tube.    calculate the pressure p2 of the trapped gas.  pressure p2 =  .  [2]   (ii) calculate the density of the liquid in the tube.  density =  .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 water has a specific heat capacity of 4200  j / (kg \u00b0c) and a boiling point of 100  \u00b0c.  (a) state what is meant by boiling point .  ...  .  [1]  (b) a mass of 0.30  kg of water at its boiling point is poured into a copper container which is  initially at 11  \u00b0c. after a few seconds, the temperature of the container and the water are both  95 \u00b0c.   (i) calculate the energy transferred from the water.  energy transferred =  .  [2]   (ii) calculate the thermal capacity of the copper container.  thermal capacity of the copper container =  .  [2]   (iii) water from the container evaporates and the temperature of the remaining water  decreases slowly.    explain, in terms of molecules, why evaporation causes the temperature of the remaining  water to decrease.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5  the distance between the centre of a thin converging lens and each principal focus is 5.0  cm.  (a) describe what is meant by the term principal focus for a thin converging lens.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) the lens is used as a magnifying glass to produce an image i of an object o.   (i) underline the terms that describe the nature of the image produced by a magnifying  glass.  [2]    diminished   enlarged   inverted   real  same size   upright   virtual   (ii) fig. 5.1 is a full-scale diagram of the lens and the image i. centre of lens 1 cm 1 cmi centre of lens 1 cm 1 cmi fig. 5.1 (full-scale)    1. on fig. 5.1, mark both principal focuses and label each of them f.  [1]    2.  by drawing on fig. 5.1, find the position of object o and add object o to the diagram.    [3]   (iii) using fig. 5.1, determine the distance of object o from the centre of the lens.  distance =  .  [1] [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 the speed of sound in air is 340  m / s.  (a) calculate the range of wavelengths for sounds that are audible by a healthy human ear. wavelengths range from . to .  [2]  (b) sound waves are longitudinal waves.   describe how a longitudinal wave differs from a transverse wave.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) fig. 6.1 shows a band in front of a building. fig. 6.1   the drum produces a low frequency sound. other musical instruments produce a high  frequency sound. these sounds are equally loud.   a young man at the side of the building hears the drum but not the high frequency sounds  from the other musical instruments.   explain why this happens.  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 7 an electromagnet consists of a solenoid x that is made of copper wire. the solenoid contains an  iron core.  (a) explain why:   (i) the structure of copper makes it a suitable material for the wire  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) iron is a suitable material for the core of an electromagnet.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows the electromagnet inside a second solenoid y. terminals of y iron core solenoid x solenoid y a.c. power supply fig. 7.1   (i) describe and explain what happens in solenoid y when solenoid x is connected to an  alternating current (a.c.) power supply.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) a switch and a lamp are connected in series with the terminals of solenoid y. when the  switch is closed, the lamp lights up at normal brightness.    describe and explain what happens to the current in solenoid x when the switch is  closed.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 8 the power supply used in an electric vehicle contains 990 rechargeable cells each of electromotive  force (e.m.f.) 1.2  v.  the cells are contained in packs in which all the cells are in series with each other. the e.m.f. of  each pack is 54  v.  (a) calculate the number of packs in the power supply.  number of packs =  .  [2]  (b) when in use, each pack supplies a current of 3.5  \u200aa.   (i) calculate the rate at which each cell is transferring chemical energy to electrical energy.  rate of energy transfer =  .  [2]   (ii) the packs are connected in parallel to supply a large current to drive the electric vehicle.    explain why it is necessary to use thick wires to carry this current.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 9 (a) describe how a digital signal differs from an analogue signal. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) (i) in the appropriate box, draw the symbol for an and gate and the symbol for an or gate. and gate or gate     [1]   (ii) state how the behaviour of an and gate differs from that of an or gate.  ...  .  [1]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) an arrangement of logic gates a, b and c is shown in fig. 9.1. the arrangement has two  inputs, x and y and two outputs p and q. x yp qa b c fig. 9.1   output p of logic gate b has logic state 1 (high).   (i) determine the logic states of the two inputs of logic gate b.  upper input =  ...  lower input =  ... [1]   (ii) determine and explain the logic state of output q.  ...  ...  ...  ...  logic state of q =  .  [3] [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 fig. 10.1 represents a neutral atom of an isotope of element x. fig. 10.1  (a) state one similarity between this atom and a neutral atom of a different isotope of element x.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the isotope of element x is radioactive. it decays to form an isotope of element y by emitting  a \u03b2-particle.   (i) using fig. 10.1 deduce the nuclide notation for the isotope of y produced by this decay.    nuclide notation:  .. ..y [3]   (ii) \u03b2-particles ionise the air they pass through less strongly than the same number of  \u03b1-particles.    suggest why this is so.  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122dc (st/ct) 194263/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overthis document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. *5120470800* physics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended)  may/june  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1  fig. 1.1 shows the speed\u2013time graph of a person on a journey.   on the journey, he walks and then waits for a bus. he then travels by bus. he gets off the bus and  waits for two minutes. he then walks again. his journey takes 74 minutes. 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 801020304050 speed km / h time  / min fig. 1.1  (a) for the whole journey calculate:   (i) the distance travelled  distance =  .  [3]   (ii) the average speed.  average speed =  .  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) state and explain which feature of a speed\u2013time graph shows acceleration.  ...  .  [2]  (c) state and explain the acceleration of the person at time = 40 minutes.  ...  .  [2] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 fig. 2.1 shows a train. fig. 2.1  the total mass of the train and its passengers is 750  000 kg. the train is travelling at a speed of  84 m / s. the driver applies the brakes and the train takes 80  s to slow down to a speed of 42  m / s.  (a) calculate the impulse applied to the train as it slows down.  impulse =  .  [3]  (b) calculate the average resultant force applied to the train as it slows down.  force =  .  [2]  (c) suggest how the shape of the train helps it to travel at high speeds.  ...  .  [1]  (d) the train took 80  s to reduce its speed from 84  m / s to 42  m / s. explain why, with the same  braking force, the train takes more than 80  s to reduce its speed from 42  m / s to zero.  ...  .  [1]  (e) on a wet day, the train travels a greater distance before it stops along the same track. the  train has the same speed of 84  m / s before the brakes are applied.   suggest a reason for this.  ...  .  [1] [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 3 (a) a solar panel receives energy from the sun at a rate of 5.0  kw.    thermal energy is transferred from the solar panel to water with an efficiency of 20%.    cold water of mass 15  kg enters the solar panel every hour.    the specific heat capacity of water is 4200  j / (kg \u00b0c).   calculate the temperature increase of the water.  temperature increase =  . \u00b0c [4]  (b) state and explain one advantage and one disadvantage of heating the water in a solar panel  compared with heating the water in a coal-burning boiler. advantage  . explanation  ...  ... disadvantage   explanation  ...  .  [4] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4  fig. 4.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer without a temperature scale.  the liquid inside the thermometer has a melting point of \u201339  \u00b0c. fig. 4.1  (a) describe simple experiments to mark the positions of the fixed points on this liquid-in-glass  thermometer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b)  a scientist is measuring temperatures at the south pole. these temperatures have a minimum  value of \u201390  \u00b0c.   state why the liquid used in the thermometer in fig. 4.1 would not be suitable for this scientist.  .  [1]  (c)  state a design change that:   (i) increases the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer  .  [1]   (ii) increases the range of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.  .  [1]  (d) state the property of the liquid which ensures that the scale on a liquid-in-glass thermometer  is linear.   .  [1] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5  fig. 5.1 shows crests of a wave approaching a barrier where the wave is reflected. barriercrestdirection of travel of wave fig. 5.1  (a)  on fig. 5.1, draw three  crests of the reflected wave.   [3]  (b)  the wave has a wavelength of 36  cm and a speed of 1.2  m / s.   calculate the frequency of the wave.  frequency =  .  [3]  (c)  complete the following sentences.   an echo is the name for a reflected .. wave.   the waves that form an echo are a type of longitudinal wave. longitudinal waves are made    up of .. and rarefactions.  [2] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows an arrangement of glass prisms inside a box. the angles of the prisms are  45\u00b0, 45\u00b0 and 90\u00b0. box prism 1 prism 2 eyeincident ray of light wall fig. 6.1  (not to scale)   this is a device used to view objects that are behind a wall.   the incident ray of light undergoes total internal reflection in the prisms.   on fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the device and show the ray as it emerges  from the box.   [3]  (b) show that the refractive index of glass with a critical angle of 45\u00b0 is 1.41. [2] [total: 5]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 7 (a) a student makes a transformer that uses an alternating current (a.c.) supply with an  electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12.0  v to induce an output potential difference (p.d.) of 2.0  v.   the student is provided with two lengths of insulated wire and the u-shaped piece of iron  shown in fig. 7.1. iron fig. 7.1   (i)  complete and label fig. 7.1 to show the transformer connected to the supply and the  output from the transformer.   [3]   (ii) explain the function of the piece of iron in the transformer.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (iii)  the output of the transformer is connected to a lamp. the current in the lamp is 100  ma.  the transformer is 100% efficient.    calculate the input current to the transformer.  current =  .  [2]  (b) another transformer is used in a school laboratory to step down a mains supply with a p.d. of  110 v to 12  v. this transformer is mounted in a metal case.   state and explain an essential safety feature required for this arrangement.  ...  .  [2] [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 8  (a)  a light-emitting diode (led) is a diode that emits light when there is a current in it. draw a  circuit diagram showing an led, connected so that it is lit, in series with a battery and a fixed  resistor. use standard electrical symbols.    [4]  (b)  the p.d. across the led when lit is 3.1  v and the current in the led is 0.030  a.   calculate the value of the resistance of the led when lit.  resistance =  .  [2]  (c)  fig. 8.1 shows a power supply of e.m.f. 10.5  v connected in series with a lamp and a heater.  the p.d. across the lamp is 2.1  v and the current in the lamp is 1.5  a. fig. 8.1   calculate:   (i)  the resistance of the heater  resistance =  .  [2]   (ii)  the power of the heater.  power =  .  [2] [total: 10]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 9  (a) complete the truth table shown in table 9.1 for a nand gate. table 9.1 input 1 input 2 output 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1[1]  (b) the circuit shown in fig. 9.1 contains two different types of gate, labelled x and y. a bc dex yx fig. 9.1   table 9.2 shows a partially completed truth table for this circuit. table 9.2 input intermediate point output a b c d e 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1   (i) from table 9.2, deduce the name of logic gate y.     ring your answer from the list. and     nand     nor     not     or  [1]   (ii)  complete the truth table in table 9.2.  [2]  (c) there is a current of 3.0  a in a copper wire. calculate how many electrons pass through the  copper wire every 60  s. the charge on an electron is 1.6 \u00d7 10\u201319 c.  number of electrons =  .  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.10 fig. 10.1 shows a vacuum tube with a radioactive source. the radioactive source emits \u03b1-particles,  \u03b2-particles and \u03b3\u200a-rays. there is a very strong magnetic field between the n pole and the s pole of  the magnet. vacuum n slead cylinder with narrow central hole radioactive source \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays fig. 10.1  (a)  the lead cylinder has a narrow central hole. state and explain the effect of the lead cylinder.  ...  .  [2]  (b)  describe the paths of the \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3\u200a-rays as they pass through the magnetic  field. explain your answers.   (i) \u03b1-particles  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) \u03b2-particles  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]   (iii) \u03b3\u200a-rays  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 8]"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated. *5408512063* dc (st/ct) 194262/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/43 paper 4 theory (extended)  may/june  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 (a) define acceleration .  ...  .  [1]  (b) fig. 1.1 shows two speed\u2013time graphs, a and b, and two distance\u2013time graphs, c and d. 0distance 0 time0speed 0 time cb 0distance 0 time0speed 0 time da fig. 1.1   describe the motion shown by:   (i) graph a  ..     .  [2]   (ii) graph b  ..     .  [2]   (iii) graph c  .     .  [1]   (iv) graph d.       .  [1] [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2  a scientist fills a container with sea water. the container has dimensions 30  cm \u00d7 30  cm \u00d7 40  cm.  the density of sea water is 1020  kg / m3.  (a)  calculate the mass of the sea water in the container.  mass =  .  [3]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows a submarine. the submarine is fully submerged in the sea. hatch top surface submarine fig. 2.1   (i) the atmospheric pressure is 100  kpa and the total pressure on the top surface of the  submarine is 500  kpa.    calculate the depth of the top surface of the submarine below the surface of the sea.  depth =  .  [3]   (ii)  a hatch (an opening door) on the top surface of the submarine has an area of 0.62  m2.    calculate the downward force on the hatch due to the total pressure on the top surface  of the submarine.  force =  .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 in a double-decker bus there are two passenger compartments, one above the other.  (a) fig. 3.1 shows a double-decker bus on a tilted platform. top compartment bottom compartment platform angle fig. 3.1   the platform is used to test the stability of the bus.   the angle the bus makes with the horizontal is gradually increased until the bus begins to  topple to the left.   explain why the bus begins to topple.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (b) there are 30 passengers in the upper compartment of the bus and 2 passengers in the  bottom compartment of the bus.   state how this affects the stability of the bus and the reason for this.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c)  a bus is travelling along a straight road. the bus and the driver have a combined mass of  16 000 kg when there are no passengers in it. the bus has 73 passengers. the average  mass of each of the passengers is 65  kg.    (i) calculate the total mass of the bus, the driver and the 73 passengers.  mass =  .  [2]   (ii) the fully loaded bus accelerates uniformly from rest to a speed of 14  m / s. the time  taken to reach a speed of 14  m / s is 20  s.    calculate the resultant force on the bus during the acceleration.  force =  .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 (a)  describe, in terms of molecules, what happens when a liquid evaporates.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b)  fig. 4.1 shows wet clothes drying on a washing line in an outside area. washing line fig. 4.1   state two changes in the weather that help the wet clothes to dry more quickly. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5 (a)  fig. 5.1 shows a plastic cup. the cup contains sand, an electric heater and a thermometer. thermometer plastic cupelectric heater sand fig. 5.1   the power of the heater is 50  w. the mass of the sand in the cup is 550  g. the initial  temperature of the sand is 20  \u00b0c. the heater is switched on for 2.0 minutes. the temperature  is recorded until the temperature stops increasing. the highest temperature recorded by the  thermometer is 33  \u00b0c.   (i)  calculate the energy supplied by the heater.  energy =  .  [2]   (ii) calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of the sand, using your answer to (a)(i)   and the data in the question.  specific heat capacity =  .  [3]   (iii)  explain why the specific heat capacity of sand may be different from the value calculated  in (a)(ii) .  ...  .  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b)  on a sunny day, the temperature of the sand on a beach is much higher than the temperature  of the sea.   explain why.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of a thermocouple thermometer. [3] [total: 12]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows crests of a sound wave after reflection from a solid surface. solid surfacedirection of travel of reflected wave fig. 6.1   on fig. 6.1, draw three  crests of the incident wave.  [3]  (b) tick four statements in the list below that are false  for a sound wave that is audible to a  healthy human ear.   the wave is longitudinal.     the wave is transverse.     the frequency of the wave is 1  hz.    the frequency of the wave is 1  khz.    the frequency of the wave is 1  mhz.     the wave travels in a vacuum.     the wave could travel in aluminium.   [3]  (c) state a typical value for the speed of a sound wave in water.  .  [1] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 7 fig. 7.1 shows red light travelling from air into a prism made of diamond. the path of the red light  is incomplete. diamondray of red lightyx40\u00b0a fig. 7.1  (not to scale)  (a)  the refractive index of diamond is 2.42.   calculate angle x.  angle x =  .  [2]  (b)  explain the term total internal reflection .  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c)  the angle y is greater than the critical angle of diamond.   on fig. 7.1, draw the path of the red light through and out of the prism after point a.  [2] [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 8 (a) (i) describe what is meant by an electric field .  ...  .  [1]   (ii) state what is meant by the direction  of an electric field.  ...  .  [1]  (b) fig. 8.1 shows a polystyrene ball covered with aluminium paint. the polystyrene ball is  suspended between two charged metal plates by an insulated thread. positively charged metal platenegatively charged metal plateinsulated thread polystyrene ball covered with aluminium paint fig. 8.1   the ball oscillates between the two charged plates.   explain why the ball oscillates.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (c) there is a current of 0.29  a in an electrical circuit.   calculate the time taken for a charge of 15  c to flow through the electrical circuit.  time =  .  [3] [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 9 fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor. the coil rotates about the axis when  there is a current in the coil. the coil is connected to the rest of the circuit by the brushes. +\u2013brushbrushcoilaxis ns fig. 9.1  (a) (i) on fig. 9.1, draw a pair of arrows to show which way the coil rotates. explain the direction  you have chosen.  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) on fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction in which electrons flow through the coil.  [1]   (iii) explain why the electrons flow in the direction you have shown in (a)(ii) .  ...  .  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) state any difference each of the following changes makes to the rotation of the coil in   fig. 9.1:   (i) changing the polarity of the power supply to that shown in fig. 9.2 +\u2013 fig. 9.2  .  [1]   (ii) changing the coil to the new coil shown in fig. 9.3 original coil new coil fig. 9.3  .  [1]   (iii) using a stronger magnetic field.  .  [1] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 (a) a radioactive nucleus of carbon decays to a nucleus of nitrogen by emitting a particle.   complete the nuclide equation and state the name of the particle. 14 6 c    14 7 n + . . x   name of particle x \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..  [3]  (b)  a radiation detector in a laboratory records a reading of 10 counts  / min. there are no  radioactive samples in the laboratory.   (i)  explain why the radiation detector records a reading and suggest a possible source.    explanation  source  ...  .  [2]   (ii)  carbon-14 has a half-life of 5700 years. there are atoms of carbon-14 in all living  organisms.    an archaeologist digs up some ancient wood. in the same laboratory as in (b)(i) , a  sample of this ancient wood gives a reading of 20 counts  / min. an equivalent sample of  living wood gives a reading of 80 counts  / min. it is suggested that the age of the ancient  sample is 11  400 years.    do a calculation to check whether this suggestion is correct. [4] [total: 9]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/43/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (lk/sw) 195012/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/51 paper 5 practical test  may/june  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *2662337535* for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the balancing of a metre rule.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. 90.0  cm mark50.0  cm mark load xq 100 0metre rule bench pivotweight p fig. 1.1  (a) \u2022 place the metre rule on the pivot at the 50.0  cm mark. \u2022 place the object q with its centre on the metre rule at the 90.0  cm mark.  \u2022 place a load of weight p = 2.0  n on the metre rule. \u2022 adjust the position of the load so that the metre rule is as near as possible to being  balanced and horizontal.   (i) measure, and record in table 1.1, the distance x from the centre of the load to the pivot.    record also the weight of the load.  [1]   (ii) calculate, and record in table 1.1, the value of 1 x. [1]   (iii) repeat the steps above, using loads of weight p = 3.0  n, 4.0  n, 5.0  n and 6.0  n. record    all the values of p, x and 1 x in table 1.1.  [3] table 1.1 p / n x / cm1 x  1 cm",
            "3": "3 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of p / n (y-axis) against 1 x  1 cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) in this experiment, xmax , the maximum possible value for x is 50.0  cm. calculate 1 xmax.  1 xmax = .  1 cm   use the graph to determine the minimum value of p required to balance the metre rule in this  experiment. show clearly on the graph how you determined this value.  minimum value of p = ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 in this experiment, you will determine the resistances of filament lamps.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. a vpower supply l1 fig. 2.1  (a) switch on.   (i) measure the current i1 in the circuit.  i1 = ..  a [1]   (ii) measure the potential difference v1 across lamp l1.  v1 = ..  v [1]    switch off.   (iii) calculate the resistance r1 of the filament of lamp l1. use the equation r1 = v1 i1. include  the unit.  r1 = .  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) disconnect the voltmeter. connect lamp l2 in series with lamp l1. connect the voltmeter  across lamp l2. switch on.   measure the current i2 in the circuit.  i2 = ...  a   measure the potential difference v2 across lamp l2.  v2 = ...  v   switch off.   calculate the resistance r2 of the filament of lamp l2. use the equation r2 = v2 i2.  r2 = ...  [1]  (c) disconnect the voltmeter. connect lamp l3 in series with lamps l1 and l2. connect the  voltmeter across lamp l3. switch on.   measure the current i3 in the circuit.  i3 = ..  a     measure the potential difference v3 across lamp l3.  v3 = ..  v   switch off.   calculate the resistance r3 of the filament of lamp l3. use the equation r3 = v3 i3.  r3 = ...  [1]  (d) calculate r1 + r2 + r3. give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this  experiment.  r1 + r2 + r3 = .  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (e) some students make suggestions about the results of the experiment.    suggestion a: r1 + r2 + r3 should be equal to 3 \u00d7 r1.   suggestion b: r1 + r2 + r3 should be less than 3 \u00d7 r1.   suggestion c: r1 + r2 + r3 should be greater than 3 \u00d7 r1.   state which suggestion, a, b or c, agrees with your results. justify your answer by reference  to your results.   statement ... justification    ...  [2]  (f) a student investigates whether the statement in (e) is always true for the same three lamps  connected in series.    state a variable that he changes and how he changes the variable. you are not required to  do this extra experiment. variable to change   method of changing the variable  ..  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 in this experiment you will investigate the position of the image in a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. you may refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance. eye ray-trace sheethole p2 p1 aln m rb fig. 3.1",
            "9": "9 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (a) (i) draw a line 10  cm long near the middle of the ray-trace sheet. label the line mr. draw a  normal to this line that passes through the centre of mr. label the normal nl. label the  point at which nl crosses mr with the letter b. [1]   (ii) draw a line 7.0  cm long from b at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal below mr  and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a. [1]   (iii) place a pin p1 on line ab at a distance 6.0  cm from b.    place a pin p2 on line ab close to mr. [1]  (b) (i) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr.    view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 3.1.    place two pins p3 and p4 some distance apart so that pin p3 and the images of p2 and  p1 all appear exactly behind pin p4. label the positions of p3 and p4.    remove the pins and the mirror and draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4.  [1]   (ii) continue the line until it extends at least 7.0  cm beyond mr. [1]  (c) replace pin p1 on line ab at a distance 6.0  cm from b.   place pin p2 1.0 cm to the right of its position in part (a).   repeat the steps in part (b).   label with the letter y the point where the two lines cross beyond mr.   (i) draw a line from p1 to mr that meets mr at a right angle. measure and record the  length a of this line.  a = .  [1]   (ii) draw a line from the point labelled y to mr that meets mr at a right angle. measure and  record the length b of this line.  b = .  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d) (i) replace the mirror on mr. place pin p1 on the normal at a distance 6.0  cm from the front  of the mirror.    view the image of p1 in the mirror.     place pin p2 on the normal behind the mirror.     adjust the position of p2 along the normal so that the image of the bottom of the pin p1  seen in the mirror and the top of pin p2 seen over the mirror appear as one pin when  viewed from all angles in front of the mirror.    label the position of p2.  [1]   (ii) remove the pins and the mirror.    measure the distance x along the normal between p2 and the mirror.  x = .  [2]  (e) a student carries out this experiment with care.    suggest a practical reason why the results may not be accurate.  ...  .  [1]   tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9.  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4 a student investigates the effect of the colour of the surface of a metal container on the rate of loss  of heat from the container. she knows that black surfaces are better radiators of thermal energy  than white surfaces and wants to investigate the effect of other colours.  the following apparatus is available:  metal containers each with the outer surface painted a different colour  a thermometer  a stop-watch  a supply of hot water.  she can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  plan an experiment to investigate the effect of the colour of the surface of a metal container on the  rate of loss of heat from the container. you are not required to carry out this investigation.  you should: \u2022 draw a diagram of the apparatus used \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would control \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/51/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (lk/sw) 195014/2 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test  may/june  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *2367719586* for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the period of a pendulum. carry out the following  instructions, referring to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. clamp bob ad one complete oscillationclamp     fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  a pendulum labelled a has been set up for you as shown in fig. 1.1.   (a) adjust the length of the pendulum until the distance d measured from the bottom of the clamp  to the centre of the bob is 50.0  cm.   explain how you used the metre rule and set square to measure the length d as accurately as  possible. you may draw a diagram.  ...  .  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) displace the bob slightly and release it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one complete  oscillation of the pendulum.   (i) measure the time t1 for 10 complete oscillations.  t1 = .  [1]   (ii) calculate the period t1 of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t1 = .  [1]  (c) adjust the pendulum until the distance d is 100.0  cm.   repeat the procedure in (b).  t2 = ...    t2 = ...  [2]  (d) remove the pendulum from the clamp. using the balance provided, measure the mass ma of  the pendulum. the mass includes the pendulum bob and the thread.  ma = ..  g [1]  (e) using the balance, measure the mass mb of pendulum b.  mb = ..  g [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (f) hang pendulum b from the clamp. adjust the length of the pendulum until the distance d is  50.0 cm.    (i) repeat the procedure in (b) and (c).    distance d = 50.0  cm:  t3 = ...    t3 = ...      distance d = 100.0  cm:  t4 = ...    t4 = ...    [1]   (ii) explain briefly why timing 10 oscillations gives a more accurate result for the period t  than timing 1 oscillation.  ...  .  [1]  (g) (i) using the results t1, t2, t3 and t4, for the period of each pendulum set up, tick ( 3) the  response that matches your results within the limits of experimental accuracy.     the period t is affected by d only     the period t is affected by both d and m     the period t is affected by m only     the period t is not affected by d or m  [1]   (ii) justify your answer to (g)(i)  by reference to your results.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over blank page",
            "6": "6 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 in this experiment, you will investigate how the potential difference across a resistance wire varies  with the length of the wire.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. a vpower supply bresistance wire sliding  contact cl fig. 2.1  (a) \u2022 switch on.  \u2022 place the sliding contact c on the resistance wire at a distance l = 10.0  cm from b.  \u2022 measure, and record in table 2.1, the potential difference v across the length l of the  resistance wire. \u2022 measure, and record in table 2.1, the current i in the circuit. \u2022 repeat the procedure using l = 30.0  cm, 50.0  cm, 70.0  cm and 90.0  cm.  \u2022 switch off. table 2.1 l / cm v / v i / a 10.0 30.0 50.0 70.0 90.0  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis)  against l / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) (i) write a conclusion about the value of the current i in the circuit as the position of the  sliding contact c is changed.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) justify your conclusion by reference to your results.  ...  .  [1]  (d) using the graph, determine the potential difference vl when the length l = 60.0  cm.   show clearly on the graph how you obtained your result.  vl = .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 in this experiment, you will investigate some thermal properties of sand and water.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1. hot waterbeaker bthermometer benchsandbeaker a fig. 3.1  (a) use the thermometer to measure room temperature \u03b8s.  \u03b8s = ...   use the thermometer to measure the temperature \u03b8h of the hot water in beaker b.  \u03b8h = ...  [1]  (b) beaker a contains sand. pour 100  cm3 of hot water from beaker b into beaker a. carefully stir  the water and sand mixture.   record the highest temperature \u03b8m of the mixture.  \u03b8m = .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) (i) calculate the rise in temperature \u03b8r of the sand using the equation \u03b8r = (\u03b8m \u2013 \u03b8s). \t\u03b8r = ...    calculate the fall in temperature \u03b8f of the hot water using the equation \u03b8f = (\u03b8h \u2013 \u03b8m).  \u03b8f = .  [1]   (ii) calculate the ratio s using the equation s = \u03b8r \u03b8f.  s = .  [1]  (d) measure the new temperature \u03b8h of the hot water supplied.  \u03b8h = .  [1]  (e) beaker c contains water at room temperature. pour 100  cm3 of the hot water into beaker c.  carefully stir the water.   record the highest temperature \u03b8m of the mixture.  \u03b8m = .  [1]  (f) calculate the rise in temperature \u03b8r of the cold water using the equation \u03b8r = (\u03b8m \u2013 \u03b8s). use  the value of room temperature \u03b8s recorded in (a) and the value of \u03b8m recorded in (e).  \u03b8r = ...   calculate the fall in temperature \u03b8f of the hot water using the equation \u03b8f = (\u03b8h \u2013 \u03b8m). use the  value of \u03b8h from (d) and \u03b8m from (e). \t\u03b8f = ...   calculate the ratio w using the equation w = \u03b8r \u03b8f.  w = ...    [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (g) a student studies the thermal properties of sand and water. he predicts that s should be  equal to 6 \u00d7 w.   state whether your results support the prediction. justify your answer by reference to your  readings. statement  .. justification      ...  ...  [2]   (h) suggest two temperatures that it would be sensible to keep constant when carrying out the  experiments.   1. ..     2. ..  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4 a student investigates the bending of 1  m length strips of different materials. she compares how  far they bend when loaded at one end.  plan an experiment to investigate how the material from which the strips are made affects the  bending of the strips when loaded at one end.  you are not required to carry out this experiment.  the following apparatus is available to the student:  strips of wood, plastic, steel and aluminium, all 1  m long  a set of slotted masses  a metre rule  a g-clamp (used to hold the strips to the laboratory bench).  other apparatus normally available in a school laboratory can also be used.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 draw a diagram to show the arrangement of the apparatus \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/52/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated.physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test  may/june  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *4478585609* dc (cj/cgw) 195056/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1   in this experiment, you will determine the weight of a metre rule.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. stand 10.0  cm mark boss pivotlforcemeter stand benchloop of thread90.0  cm markboss 200  g massmetre rule fig. 1.1  (a) (i) ensure that the 10.0  cm mark on the metre rule is immediately above the pivot and that  the metre rule is suspended from the forcemeter at the 90.0  cm mark.      the metre rule should always be in this position before taking a reading.    move the 200  g mass to a distance l = 20.0  cm from the pivot as shown in fig. 1.1.    adjust the height of the clamp holding the pivot so that the metre rule is horizontal.    read, and record in table 1.1, the forcemeter reading f.    repeat this procedure for values of l = 30.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 50.0  cm and 60.0  cm.  table 1.1 l / cm f / n 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) explain how you made sure that the metre rule was horizontal before each reading was  taken.     you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (b) plot a graph of f / n (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis).   start your axes from the origin (0,0).  [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) (i) from your graph determine f0, the value of f when l = 0.  f0 =    [1]   (ii) calculate the weight wr of the metre rule, using the equation wr = 2 \u00d7 f0.      give wr to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  wr =    [2]  (d) a student carrying out this experiment places the 200  g mass on the metre rule instead of  hanging it from the loop of thread.   suggest which of these is likely to be the more accurate method.   explain your answer by reference to the procedure.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate a circuit containing different combinations of resistors.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1.    qpower supply pa v fig. 2.1  (a) (i) switch on.      measure the potential difference v1 and the current i1 in the circuit.   v1 =  ..  i1 =  ..  [1]    switch off.   (ii) calculate a resistance r1 using your values from (a)(i)  and the equation r1 = v1 i1 .  r1 =    [1]  (b) (i) connect both resistors in series between terminals p and q as shown in fig. 2.2. q p fig. 2.2    switch on.      measure the potential difference v2 and the current i2 in the circuit.   v2 =  ..  i2 =  ..  [1]    switch off.",
            "6": "6 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020   (ii) calculate a resistance r2 using your values from (b)(i)  and the equation r2 = v2 (i2 \u00d7 2) .  r2 =    [1]  (c) (i) connect both resistors in parallel  between terminals p and q as shown in fig. 2.3. q p fig. 2.3    switch on.      measure the potential difference v3 and the current i3 in the circuit.   v3 =  ..  i3 =  ..  [1]    switch off.   (ii) calculate a resistance r3 using your values from (c)(i)  and the equation r3 = (v3 \u00d7 2) i3 .  r3 =    [1]  (d) a student suggests that r1, r2 and r3 should be equal.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference to  your results.  statement  .. justification    ...  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (e) (i) a student wants to determine r1 by using a variable resistor to control the current in  the circuit. complete the circuit in fig. 2.4 to show a variable resistor connected for this  purpose. you are not required to do this experiment. qpower supply pa v fig. 2.4  [2]   (ii) briefly explain how using the circuit in fig. 2.4 will give a more reliable value for r1 than  using the procedure you were asked to carry out in (a).    ...  ...  .  [1]   [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 in this experiment you will determine the focal length of a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated triangle u lensscreen v bench fig. 3.1  method 1  (a) arrange the apparatus as shown in fig. 3.1.   place the lens a distance u = 20.0  cm from the illuminated triangle.    place the screen near the lens.    move the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is seen on the screen.   (i) measure the distance v between the lens and the screen as indicated in fig. 3.1.  v =    [1]   (ii) calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the lens. use the equation  f1 = uv (u + v) .  f1 =    [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  method 2  (b) keep the screen in the same position so that the values of u and v are the same as in  (a).   (i) move the lens closer to the screen until another sharp image of the triangle is seen on  the screen. illuminated triangle hov u fig. 3.2    measure the new distance  u between the illuminated triangle and the lens as indicated in  fig. 3.2.  u =  ..    measure the new distance v between the lens and the screen.  v =  ..  [2]   (ii) calculate a second value  f2 for the focal length of the lens. use the equation  f2 = uv (u + v) .  f2 =    [1]  method 3  (c) keep the screen in the same position so that the values of u and v are the same as in (b).   (i) measure ho, the height of the illuminated triangle, as indicated in fig. 3.2.  ho=  ..    measure hi, the height of the image of the triangle on the screen.  hi =  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate a value m for the magnification, using the equation m = hi ho .  m =    [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020   (iii) calculate a third value f3 for the focal length of the lens.     use your value of v from (b)(i)  and the equation  f3 = v (m + 1) .  f3 =    [1]   (d) state one precaution that you took to ensure that the measurements  of u and v in this  experiment are as reliable as possible.  ...  .  [1]  (e) (i) explain why method 3  is likely to produce a less accurate value for the focal length than  method 1 .  ...  ...  .  [1]   (ii) suggest one improvement to make method 3 more accurate.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4  a student investigates the factors affecting the electrical output of a solar cell. a solar cell is a  device which transforms light energy into electrical energy.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate how the potential difference across the  terminals of the solar cell varies with the angle of the incident light.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes:     a solar cell as shown in fig. 4.1   a laboratory lamp.   in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed  \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the experiment, including any precautions that must be taken  to ensure reliable results \u2022 draw a table, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are not required  to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  you may add to fig. 4.1 or draw another diagram if it helps to explain your plan. solar cell benchconnecting leadslamp fig. 4.1",
            "12": "12 0625/53/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..   [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (lk/sw) 195015/4 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/61 paper 6 alternative to practical  may/june  2020  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *3593500484*",
            "2": "2 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 a student investigates the balancing of a metre rule.   fig. 1.1 shows the arrangement.  90.0  cm mark50.0  cm mark load xobject q 100 0metre rule bench pivotweight p fig. 1.1  (a) the student places the metre rule on the pivot at the 50.0  cm mark. he places an object q on  the metre rule with its centre at the 90.0  cm mark. he places a load of weight p = 2.0  n on the  metre rule and adjusts the position of the load so that the metre rule is as near as possible to  being balanced.     he measures the distance x from the centre of the load to the pivot.   he repeats the procedure using loads of weight p = 3.0  n, 4.0  n, 5.0  n and 6.0  n. all the  values of p and x are recorded in table 1.1. table 1.1 p / n x / cm1 x  1 cm 2.0 40.0 3.0 27.0 4.0 20.0 5.0 15.9 6.0 13.3   calculate, and record in table 1.1, the values of 1 x. [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of p / n (y-axis) against 1 x  1 cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) in this experiment, xmax , the maximum possible value for x is 50.0  cm. calculate 1 xmax.  1 xmax = .  1 cm   use the graph to determine the minimum value of p required to balance the metre rule in this  experiment. show clearly on the graph how you determined this value.  minimum value of p = .  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d) in this experiment, the width of object q is slightly greater than the width of the metre rule.  explain briefly how you would place the object q as accurately as possible on the 90.0  cm  mark of the metre rule. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ...  .  [1]  (e) in this experiment, it is difficult to determine the exact position of the load that will make the  metre rule balance.   (i) explain briefly why this is difficult.  ...  ...  .  [1]   (ii) explain briefly how you would find the best position of the load that will make the metre  rule balance.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 a student determines the resistances of some filament lamps.  fig. 2.1 shows the first circuit she uses. a vpower supply l1 fig. 2.1  (a) (i) record the potential difference v1 across the lamp l1, as shown on the voltmeter in  fig. 2.2. v3 4 52 1 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0     fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3  v1 = ..  v [1]    (ii) record the current i1 in the circuit, as shown in fig. 2.3.  i1 = ..  a [1]   (iii) calculate the resistance r1 of the filament of lamp l1. use the equation r1 = v1 i1. include  the unit.  r1 = .  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) the student disconnects the voltmeter. she connects lamp l2 in series with lamp l1. she  connects the voltmeter across lamp l2.   she measures the current i2 in the circuit and the potential difference v2 across lamp l2.      0.30 a i2 = ...      1.7 v v2 = ...   calculate the resistance r2 of the filament of lamp l2. use the equation r2 = v2 i2.  r2 = ...   the student disconnects the voltmeter. she connects lamp l3 in series with lamps l1 and l2.  she connects the voltmeter across lamp l3.   she measures the current i3 in the circuit and the potential difference v3 across lamp l3.      0.26 a i3 = ...      1.2 v v3 = ...   calculate the resistance r3 of the filament of lamp l3. use the equation r3 = v3 i3.  r3 = ...  [1]  (c) calculate r1 + r2 + r3. give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this  experiment.  r1 + r2 + r3 = .  [1]  (d) some students make suggestions about the results of the experiment.   suggestion a: r1 + r2 + r3 should be equal to 3 \u00d7 r1.   suggestion b: r1 + r2 + r3 should be less than 3 \u00d7 r1.   suggestion c: r1 + r2 + r3 should be greater than 3 \u00d7 r1.   state which suggestion a, b or c agrees with your results. justify your answer by reference  to your results.   statement ... justification    ...  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (e) draw a circuit diagram to show the circuit used in part (b) with all three lamps connected in  series.  [3]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 a student investigates the position of the image in a plane mirror.  fig. 3.1 shows the ray-trace sheet he uses. eye ray-trace sheetp1p3 p4p6p5p8 ln m arb fig. 3.1",
            "9": "9 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (a)  \u2022 the student draws the line mr.  \u2022 he draws a normal nl to this line that passes through the centre of mr. \u2022 he labels the point at which nl crosses mr with the letter b. \u2022 he draws a line from b at an angle of incidence i = 30\u00b0 to the normal below mr and to  the left of the normal. he labels the end of this line a.  \u2022 he places a pin p1 on line ab, as shown in fig. 3.1. he places another pin p2 on the  line ab. \u2022 he places the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr.  \u2022 he views the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig.  3.1.    (i) on fig. 3.1, mark with a cross a suitable position for pin p2 in this experiment.  [1] \u2022 he places two pins p3 and p4 some distance apart so that pin p3 and the images of  p2 and p1 all appear exactly behind pin p4. the positions of p3 and p4 are shown on  fig. 3.1.   (ii) draw the line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it extends at least  7.0 cm beyond mr. [2]  (b) \u2022 the student keeps pin p1 in the same position but moves pin p2 so that the angle of  incidence i = 40\u00b0. \u2022 the pin positions p5 and p6 for the reflected ray are marked on fig. 3.1.   (i) draw the line joining the positions of p5 and p6. continue the line until it extends at least  7.0 cm beyond mr.    label with the letter y the point where the two lines cross beyond mr. [1]   (ii) draw a line from p1 to mr that meets mr at a right angle. measure and record the  length a of this line.  a = .  [1]   (iii) draw a line from the point labelled y to mr that meets mr at a right angle. measure and  record the length b of this line.    b = .  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) \u2022 the student removes all the pins. he places pin p7 on the normal at a distance 6.0  cm  from the front of the mirror. \u2022 he views the image of p7 in the mirror.  \u2022 he places pin p8 on the normal behind the mirror.  \u2022 he adjusts the position of p8 so that the image of the bottom of the pin p7 and the top of  pin p8 seen over the mirror appear as one pin when viewed from all angles in front of the  mirror.   (i) on fig. 3.1, measure the distance x along the normal between p8 and the mirror.  x = .  [1]   (ii) complete the diagram in fig. 3.2 to show the appearance of the image of pin p7 and pin  p8 as described in (c). mirror fig. 3.2  [1]  (d) the student expects the readings to show that the image formed in a plane mirror is  the same distance behind the mirror as the object is in front of the mirror. readings of  a = b and x = 6.0 cm will show this.   state whether your readings show that the image formed in a plane mirror is the same  distance behind the mirror as the object is in front of the mirror. justify your statement by  reference to the readings. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]  (e) the student carries out this experiment with care. suggest a practical reason why the results  may not be accurate.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11] ",
            "11": "11 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4 a student investigates the effect of the colour of the surface of a metal container on the rate of loss  of heat from the container. she knows that black surfaces are better radiators of thermal energy  than white surfaces and wants to investigate the effect of other colours.  the following apparatus is available:  metal containers each with the outer surface painted a different colour  a thermometer  a stop-watch  a supply of hot water.  she can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  plan an experiment to investigate the effect of the colour of the surface of a metal container on the  rate of loss of heat from the container.   you should: \u2022 draw a diagram of the apparatus used \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/61/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. dc (lk/sw) 195016/2 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical  may/june  2020  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *4192470868*",
            "2": "2 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 a student investigates the period of a pendulum. fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2 show the apparatus she  uses. one complete oscillationclamp clamp bobd     fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  (a) explain briefly, with the help of a diagram, how you would use a metre rule and set square to  measure the length d of a pendulum as accurately as possible.    diagram:  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the student adjusts the pendulum so that d = 50.0  cm. she displaces the bob slightly and  releases it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one complete oscillation of the pendulum.   she measures the time t1 for 20 complete oscillations.    (i) record the time t1 shown in fig. 1.3. mss1 100 fig. 1.3  t1 = .  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) calculate the period t1 of the pendulum. the period is the time for one complete  oscillation.  t1 = .  [1]  (c) the student adjusts the pendulum until the distance d is 100.0  cm.   she repeats the procedure and records the time t2 for 20 oscillations and the period t2.      39.80  s t2 = ...      1.99 s t2 = ...   she measures the mass ma of the pendulum bob. the reading on the balance is shown in  fig. 1.4.  gbob fig. 1.4   record mass ma of the pendulum bob to the nearest gram.  ma = ..  g [1]   the student repeats the procedure using a pendulum bob of mass mb.      109 g mb = ...   she obtains these results:      50.0 cm distance d = ...      1.39 s period t3 = ...      100.0  cm distance d = ...      2.02 s period t4 = ...",
            "4": "4 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d) (i) using the results t1, t2, t3 and t4, for the period of each of the pendulums, tick ( 3) the  response that matches your results within the limits of experimental accuracy.     the period t is affected by d only     the period t is affected by both d and m     the period t is affected by m only     the period t is not affected by d or m  [1]   (ii) justify your answer to (d)(i)  by reference to the results.  ...  .  [1]  (e) the student now investigates the effect of the size of the oscillations on the period of the  pendulum.   (i) suggest briefly how you would measure the size of an oscillation. you may draw a  diagram.  ...  .  [2]   (ii) state one variable that you would keep constant during this part of the investigation.  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 a student determines the resistance of a resistance wire.  fig. 2.1 shows the circuit he uses. a vpower supply bresistance wire sliding  contact cl fig. 2.1  (a)  \u2022 the student places the sliding contact c on the resistance wire at a distance l = 10.0  cm  from b. \u2022   record, in the first row of table 2.1, the potential difference v across the length   l = 10.0  cm of resistance wire, as shown on the voltmeter in fig. 2.2. v32 1 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0     fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3 \u2022   record, in the first row of table 2.1, the current i in the circuit as shown in fig. 2.3. \u2022 complete the column headings in table 2.1.",
            "6": "6 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 table 2.1 l / v / i / 10.0 30.0 0.7 0.30 50.0 1.1 0.27 70.0 1.5 0.28 90.0 2.1 0.29  [3]  (b) the student repeats the procedure using l = 30.0  cm, 50.0  cm, 70.0  cm and 90.0  cm. the  readings are shown in table 2.1.   plot a graph of v / v (y-axis)  against l / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) (i) write a conclusion about the value of the current i in the circuit as the position of the  sliding contact c is changed.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) justify your conclusion by reference to your results.  ...  .  [1]  (d) using the graph, determine the potential difference vl when the length l = 60.0  cm.   show clearly on the graph how you obtained your result.  vl = .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 a student investigates some thermal properties of sand and water.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus. thermometer benchbeaker fig. 3.1  (a) the thermometer in fig. 3.2 shows the room temperature \u03b8s at the beginning of the  experiment. record \u03b8s. \u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 3.2  \u03b8s =  ...  \u00b0c [1]  (b) the student is supplied with hot water at a temperature \u03b8h. she records the temperature of  the hot water.      84 \u00b0c \u03b8h = ...   she pours 100  cm3 of hot water into a beaker that contains sand. initially, the sand is at room  temperature.   she measures the highest temperature \u03b8m of the mixture.      70 \u00b0c \u03b8m = ...   (i) calculate the rise in temperature \u03b8r of the sand using the equation \u03b8r = (\u03b8m \u2013 \u03b8s).  \u03b8r = . \u00b0c [1]   (ii) explain briefly what the student does after pouring the hot water into the sand and before  taking the temperature, in order to obtain a reliable value for \u03b8m.  ...  .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (iii) calculate the fall in temperature \u03b8f of the hot water using the equation \u03b8f = (\u03b8h \u2013 \u03b8m).  \u03b8f = ..  \u00b0c    calculate the ratio s using the equation s = \u03b8r \u03b8f. give your answer to a suitable number  of significant figures for this experiment.  s = .  [1]  (c) the student pours 100  cm3 of the hot water into a clean beaker that contains 100  cm3 of water  at room temperature. she records the highest temperature \u03b8m of the mixture.      49\u00b0 c \u03b8m = ...   calculate the rise in temperature \u03b8r of the cold water using the equation \u03b8r = (\u03b8m \u2013 \u03b8s). use  the value of room temperature \u03b8s recorded in (a).  \u03b8r = ...   calculate the fall in temperature \u03b8f of the hot water using the equation \u03b8f = (\u03b8h \u2013 \u03b8m). \t\u03b8f = ...   calculate the ratio w using the equation w = \u03b8r \u03b8f.  w = .  [2]  (d) the student studies the thermal properties of sand and water. she predicts that s should be  equal to 6 \u00d7 w.   state whether the results support the prediction. justify your answer by reference to the  readings. statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (e) suggest two temperatures that it would be sensible to keep constant when carrying out the  experiments.   1.    2.   [2]  (f) the student measures the volume of the dry sand using a measuring cylinder before carrying  out the experiment. tick ( 3) the boxes that show the precautions that she should take in  order to obtain an accurate reading.    take the reading at the bottom of the meniscus.    tap the measuring cylinder to make sure the top of the sand is horizontal.    view the scale of the measuring cylinder at right angles.  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4 a student investigates the bending of 1  m length strips of different materials. she compares how  far they bend when loaded at one end.  plan an experiment to investigate how the material from which the strips are made affects the  bending of the strips when loaded at one end.  the following apparatus is available to the student:  strips of wood, plastic, steel and aluminium, each of length 1  m  a set of slotted masses  a metre rule  a g-clamp (used to hold the strips to the laboratory bench).  other apparatus normally available in a school laboratory can also be used.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 draw a diagram to show the arrangement of the apparatus \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/62/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_s20_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "cambridge igcse\u2122this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.physics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical  may/june  2020  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *7061103471* dc (cj/cgw) 195057/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 a student determines the weight of a metre rule.  she uses the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1.  the metre rule is supported by a pivot at the 10.0  cm mark  and is suspended from a forcemeter  by a loop of thread at the 90.0  cm mark. stand 10.0  cm mark boss pivotlforcemeter stand benchloop of thread90.0  cm markboss 2.0 n weight metre rule fig. 1.1  (a) the student places a 2.0  n weight at a distance l from the pivot.   she then adjusts the height of the clamp holding the pivot so that the metre rule is horizontal.  she reads the force f on the forcemeter.   fig. 1.2 shows the weight and the metre rule from above.    fig. 1.3 shows the reading on the forcemeter.  metre rule 2.0 n weight 22232728 fig. 1.2  (not to scale)   (i) calculate the value of l from readings taken from fig. 1.2.     show your working clearly.   l = ... cm [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over metre rule0.0n 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 fig. 1.3   (ii) read the value f shown on the forcemeter in fig. 1.3.   f = . n [1]   (iii) explain how the student makes sure that the rule is horizontal before taking the reading.      you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) the student carries out the procedure for values of l = 20.0  cm, 30.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 50.0  cm and  60.0 cm. her readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 l / cm f / n 20.0 1.35 30.0 1.60 40.0 1.90 50.0 2.15 60.0 2.45   plot a graph of f / n (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis).   start your axes from the origin (0,0).  [4]  (c) (i) from your graph determine f0, the value of f when l = 0.  f0 = . n [1]   (ii) calculate the weight wr of the metre rule, using the equation wr = 2 \u00d7 f0.    wr = . n [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (d) another student carrying out this experiment finds it difficult to be sure that he has placed the  centre of the 2.0  n weight on the metre rule at the correct value of l.    suggest a more precise method of applying a 2.0  n load to the metre rule in this experiment.  explain why this method is an improvement.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 some students investigate a circuit containing different combinations of resistors.  part of the circuit they are using is shown in fig. 2.1. qpower supply p fig. 2.1  (a) (i) on fig. 2.1, complete the circuit to show: \u2022 an ammeter connected to measure the current in the circuit  \u2022 a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across terminals  p and q.  [2]   (ii) a student measures the potential difference v1 across terminals p and q and the current  i1 in the circuit.  1 4 0 52 3 v    0.2 0.8 0 1.00.4 0.6 a fig. 2.2   fig. 2.3    read the values of v1 and i1 shown on the meters in fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3.  v1 = ... v  i1 = ...  a  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (iii) calculate a resistance r1 using your values from (a)(ii)  and the equation r1 = v1 i1  .  r1 =   [1]  (b) the student connects two resistors in series between terminals p and q, as shown in fig.  2.4. q p fig. 2.4   he measures the potential difference v2 across terminals p and q and the current i2 in the  circuit.      2.7 v2 = ... v     0.26 i2 = ...  a   calculate a resistance r2 using these values and the equation r2 = v2 (i2 \u00d7 2) .  r2 =   [1]  (c) the student connects the two resistors in parallel between terminals p and q, as shown in  fig. 2.5. q p fig. 2.5   he measures the potential difference v3 across terminals p and q and the current i3 in the  circuit.      2.3 v3 = ... v     0.94 i3 = ...  a   calculate a resistance r3 using these values and the equation r3 = (v3 \u00d7 2) i3 .  r3 =   [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d) another student suggests that r1, r2 and r3 should be equal.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement with reference to  your results.  statement  .. justification    ...  [2]  (e) (i) a student wants to determine r1 by using a potential divider to vary the potential  difference in the circuit. draw the symbol for a potential divider.    [1]   (ii) briefly explain how the use of a potential divider may give a more reliable value for r1  than using the procedure carried out in (a).   ...  ...  .  [1]   [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 3 a student determines the focal length of a converging lens.  she uses the apparatus shown in fig. 3.1. illuminated triangle u lensscreen v bench fig. 3.1  method 1  (a) the student sets the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens.   she moves the screen until a sharp image of the triangle is seen on the screen.   (i) on fig. 3.1, measure the distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens.  u = ..    on fig. 3.1, measure the distance v between the lens and the screen.  v = ..  [1]   (ii) fig. 3.1 is drawn to 1/5th scale.    calculate the actual distance u between the illuminated triangle and the lens in the  experiment.  u = ..    calculate the actual distance v between the lens and the screen in the experiment.  v = ..  [1]   (iii) calculate a value f1 for the focal length of the lens. use the equation  f1 = uv (u + v) .  f1 =   [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020   (iv) briefly describe a technique to obtain an image on the screen that is as sharp as possible  in this experiment.  ...  ...  .  [1] illuminated triangle hov fig. 3.2  method 2  (b) the student keeps the screen in the same position.   she moves the lens closer to the screen, as shown in fig. 3.2, until another sharp image of  the triangle is seen on the screen.   (i) measure the distance v between the lens and the screen as indicated in fig. 3.2.  v = ..    fig. 3.2 is drawn to 1/5th scale.    calculate the actual distance v between the lens and the screen in the experiment.  v = ..  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) the illuminated triangle and its image are shown full size in fig. 3.3 and fig. 3.4.    ho                     hi  fig. 3.3  fig. 3.4    measure ho, the height of the illuminated triangle, as shown in fig. 3.3.  ho =  .    measure hi, the height of the image on the screen, as shown in fig. 3.4.  hi =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate a value for the magnification m using the equation m = hi ho.  m =  ...  [1]   (iv) calculate a second value f2 for the focal length of the lens using the equation     f2 = v (m + 1) and the value of v from (b)(i) .  f2 =  ...  [1]   (c) state one precaution the student must take to ensure that the measurements  of u and v in  this experiment are as reliable as possible.  ...  .  [1]  (d) (i) explain why method 2  is likely to produce a less accurate value for the focal length than  method 1 .  ...  ...  .  [1]   (ii) suggest one improvement to make method 2  more accurate.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4  a student investigates the factors affecting the electrical output of a solar cell. a solar cell is a  device which transforms light energy into electrical energy.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate how the potential difference across the  terminals of the solar cell varies with the angle of the incident light.  the apparatus available includes:   a solar cell as shown in fig. 4.1   a laboratory lamp.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed  \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the experiment, including any precautions that must be taken  to ensure reliable results \u2022 draw a table, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are not required  to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  you may add to fig. 4.1 or draw another diagram if it helps to explain your plan. solar cell connecting leads benchlamp fig. 4.1",
            "13": "13 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..   [7]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/63/ m/j/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 11_0625_11/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *5509594922*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/11     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  october/november 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).    information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be ded ucted for a wrong answer.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20  1 the diagram shows a pendulum. the pendulum bob swings repeated ly between points m and n.    mn    a student starts a stop-watch when the bob reaches point m.    he counts each time the bob changes direction and stops the wat ch on the tenth change in  direction.    the watch shows a time of 12.0 seconds.    what is the period of the pendulum?  a 0 . 6 0  s b 1 . 2  s c 2 . 4  s d 12.0  s    2 the speed\u2013time graph represents a journey.    speed time00xy     how does the graph show that the distance travelled in section x of the journey is greater than  the distance travelled in section y?  a the area below section x of the graph is greater than the area below section y.  b the gradient of section x of the graph is greater than the grad ient of section y.  c the speed at the end of section x of the journey is greater tha n the speed at the end of  section y.  d the time for section x of the journey is greater than the time for section y.    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20 [turn over  3 a boy throws a ball vertically upwards with a speed v.    xhighest point     which row describes the speed and the acceleration of the ball at point x on the way upwards?     speed acceleration  a decreasing upwards  b decreasing downwards  c increasing upwards  d increasing downwards      4 a student compares the weights of different objects.    which apparatus does he use?  a balance  b measuring cylinder  c stop-watch  d thermometer      5 which quantity is weight an example of?  a acceleration  b f o r c e   c mass  d pressure     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20  6 a metal ball is attached to a cork and is lowered into a measu ring cylinder, pulling the cork into  the water, as shown.    48 cm3 water ball and cork above the waterball fully submerged but cork above the waterboth ball and cork fully submergedballcork 56 cm380 cm3     the mass of the cork is 4.8  g.    what is the density of the cork?  a 0 . 1 5  g / cm3 b 0 . 2 0  g / cm3 c 0 . 6 0  g / cm3 d 5 . 0  g / cm3     7 a uniform plank rests on a pivot at its centre.    two children p and q sit on the plank in the positions shown.    child p child q pivot1.2 m 1.5  m     the mass of child p is 25  kg.    the plank is balanced.    what is the mass of child q?  a 2 0  kg b 2 5  kg c 3 1  kg d 4 5  kg    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20 [turn over  8 an object is in equilibrium on the earth.    which statement is correct?  a all the forces acting on the object are in the same direction.  b all the forces acting on the object have the same value.  c the object is weightless.  d the resultant force acting on the object is zero.    9 a man jumps from a stationary balloon. after falling several h undred metres, he opens his  parachute.    at which position is his kinetic energy greatest?  a just after he jumps from the balloon  b just before he opens his parachute  c just after his parachute opens  d just before he lands     10 the arrows show an outline of the processes in an oil-fired po wer station.    oil is burnt  \uf0ae  turns turbine  \uf0ae  turns generator  \uf0ae  output transformer    what are the processes for the transfer of energy between the t urbine and the generator and  between the generator and the output transformer?     turbine to generator generator to output transformer  a electrical working electrical working  b mechanical working electrical working  c mechanical working transfer of thermal energy  d transfer of thermal energy mechanical working     11 to calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the fo rce must be known.    what else needs to be known to calculate the power?     the distance that the force  moves the object the time for which the  force acts on the object   a \u0016 \u0016 key  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016 = needed  c \u001a \u0016 \u001a = not needed  d \u001a \u001a  ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20  12 a rectangular marble block has dimensions 1  m by 1  m by 5  m and weighs 125  000  n.    the marble block is stored with the long side resting on the gr ound, as in diagram 1.    diagram 1 diagram 2    what is the change in the pressure on the ground due to the blo ck when the block is stored as in  diagram 2 rather than diagram 1?  a a decrease of 25  000  pa  b an increase of 100  000  pa  c an increase of 125  000  pa  d no change     13 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?    d cb amercury      14 on a warm day, a driv er checks the air pre ssure in a car tyre.  at night, the temp erature drops and  the air pressure in the tyre decreases. there are no air leaks in the tyre.    why does the pressure decrease?  a the air molecules in the tyre move more slowly.  b the air molecules in the tyre stop moving.  c the volume of the air in the tyre decreases.  d the volume of the air in the tyre increases.   ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20 [turn over  15 the diagram shows the more energetic water molecules escaping from the surface of liquid  water.    = water moleculekey water    what is this process called?  a brownian motion  b condensation  c evaporation  d conduction    16 when a bridge is built, a gap is  left between each concrete sl ab.    why are these gaps left?  a concrete expands on warm days.  b concrete contracts on warm days.  c the gaps expand on warm days.  d the gaps contract on cold days.     17 the table shows the melting and boiling points of four differe nt substances.    which substance becomes a liquid when placed in a beaker of boi ling water?     melting point  / \uf0b0c boiling point  / \uf0b0c  a 10 90  b 40 150  c 105 230  d 110 320     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20  18 the diagram shows four rods. each rod is made of a different m etal.    xp sq rcopper ironbrass silver     wax is used to attach small metal balls at the rod ends p, q, r  and s.    each rod is the same size. they are heated uniformly by a bunse n burner at point x.    as the rods warm up, the wax melts and the balls fall off.    why does the ball on the silver rod fall first?  a silver is the best conductor of heat.  b silver is the worst conductor of heat.  c silver is the best radiator of heat.  d silver is the worst radiator of heat.    19 the diagram shows a pan of water being heated.    after a short time, all the water in the pan begins to boil.    heat    what is the main process by which thermal energy is transferred  through the water?  a conduction  b c o n v e c t i o n   c evaporation  d radiation    ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20 [turn over  20 which row correctly describes light waves?     wave type direction of vibrations  a longitudinal parallel to direction of wave travel  b longitudinal perpendicular to direction of wave travel  c transverse parallel to direction of wave travel  d transverse perpendicular to direction of wave travel      21 the diagram shows two pieces of wood resting in shallow water of constant depth.    straight, parallel wavefronts approach the pieces of wood as in dicated.    wood woodwavefront gap    the gap between the pieces of wood is 2.0  cm wide.    the wavefronts are 3.0  cm apart.    what is the appearance of the wavefronts after they pass throug h the gap?  a semicircular and 2.0  cm apart  b semicircular and 3.0  cm apart  c straight and 2.0  cm apart  d straight and 3.0  cm apart     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20  22 a man sees a stone at the bottom of a pool of water.    which path could be taken by light from the stone to the man?    air water stoneab c dman       23 which statement about a thin converging lens is correct?  a all rays of light refracted by the lens pass through the princi pal focus.  b all rays initially parallel to the principal axis of the lens a re refracted through the principal  focus.  c the focal length of the lens is the distance between the image and the principal focus.  d the focal length of the lens is the distance between the object  and the image.    ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20 [turn over  24 the diagram shows a beam of white light passing through a tria ngular prism. a spectrum is  produced.    white lightprism x y    which row correctly shows a wave property involved in producing  the colours at x and y?     wave property x y  a diffraction red violet  b dispersion red violet  c reflection violet red  d refraction violet red     25 the diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.    \uf067-rays e ultraviolet f infrared microwaves g    which types of wave are e, f and g?     e  f  g   a radio visible light x-rays  b radio x-rays ultrasound  c x-rays radio ultrasound  d x-rays visible light radio      26 a police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy tr affic. a pedestrian notices that,  although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, th e pitch varies.    which row describes the amplitude and the frequency of the soun d?     amplitude frequency  a constant constant  b constant varying  c varying constant  d varying varying      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20  27 two soft-iron pins are suspended from the s pole of a bar magn et.    which diagram shows how the pins are deflected?    sa sb sc sd      28 a student uses three small plotting compasses to investigate t he magnetic field around a bar  magnet.    which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles  point?    s na s nb s n c s nd       29 what is an electric current in a metal wire?  a a flow of electrons  b a flow of neutrons  c a flow of nucleons  d a flow of protons     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20 [turn over  30 four wires are made of the same metal.    which wire has the greatest resistance?  a a 100  cm long wire with a diameter of 3.0  mm  b a 100  cm long wire with a diameter of 6.0  mm  c a 10  cm long wire with a diameter of 3.0  mm  d a 10  cm long wire with a diameter of 6.0  mm    31 a student uses four ammeters p, q, r and s to measure the curre nt in different parts of the  circuit shown.    a a a apq r s     which two ammeters read the largest current?  a p and q b p and r c r and q d r and s     32 a circuit x is set up with two identical lamps. circuit y is t hen set up, changing the positions of the  meters.    a vx a vy     on which meters do the readings change?  a both the ammeter and the voltmeter  b the ammeter only  c the voltmeter only  d neither the ammeter nor the voltmeter   ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20  33 an electrical appliance is powered from a mains supply.    the appliance normally uses a current of 3  a, but the current briefly rises to 4  a at the instant the  appliance is switched on. the cable to the appliance is designe d for currents up to 6  a.    a fuse is used to protect the circuit.    what should be the rating of the fuse?  a 1 a b 3 a c 5 a d 13  a     34 an electromagnet is positioned close to a coil of wire.    electromagnet coil     the electromagnet is switched on, remains on for a short time, and is then switched off.    three statements about the pointer on the galvanometer during t his sequence are given.    1 the pointer kicks to one side as the electromagnet is switche d on.  2 the pointer records a steady non-zero value while the electro magnet remains  switched on.  3 the pointer kicks to the other side as the electromagnet is s witched off.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3    35 a transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240  v a.c. into 4800  v a.c..    npns 240  v a.c. 4800  v a.c.     which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?     number of turns  on primary coil np number of turns  on secondary coil ns  a 50 1  000  b 240 48  000  c 480 24  d 2000 100 ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20 [turn over  36 the diagrams show a current-carrying wire with an arrow in the  direction of the current.    which diagram shows the magnetic field produced by the current?     a magnetic field lines wireb magnetic field lines wire c magnetic field lines wired magnetic field lines wire       37 which statement is correct for the nucleus of any atom?  a the nucleus contains electrons, neutrons and protons.  b the nucleus contains the same number of protons as neutrons.  c the nucleus has a total charge of zero.  d the nucleus is very small compar ed with the size of the atom.    38 the nucleus of an atom x is represented by the notation shown.         how many protons and how many neutrons are in this nucleus?     number of  protons number of  neutrons  a p q  b p q \u2013 p  c q p  d q p \u2013 q     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/11/o/n/20   39 a radiation detector records a low reading even when no radioa ctive source is close. this is due  to background radiation.    what does not contribute to this background radiation?  a rocks on earth  b cosmic rays from the sun  c satellite tv signals  d waste from nuclear power stations    40 the graph shows the radioactive decay curve of a substance.    1000 750500250 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 time  / yearscount rate counts  / s     what is the half-life of this substance?  a 0.5 years b 5 years c 15 years d 30 years       "
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 11_0625_12/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *1318401521*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/12     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  october/november 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be ded ucted for a wrong answer.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  1 a student measures the volumes of three liquids using three di fferent measuring cylinders.    2.0 1.51.00.5cm 3cm3cm3 14.0 3.02.01.0 240 302010 3     the table shows the volumes recorded by the student.    measuring  cylinder volume  / cm3  1 1.2  2 2.2  3 25    which readings are correctly recorded?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 1  o n l y     2 a car driver measures the time taken to complete four separate  journeys.    in which journey does the driver have the greatest average spee d?     distance  / km time  / h  a 60 2  b 60 3  c 120 3  d 120 4     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20 [turn over  3 the graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.    speed timep q0     which row describes the motion of the object at times p and q?     p  q   a at rest accelerating  b at rest decelerating  c moving with constant speed accelerating  d moving with constant speed decelerating     4 a stone has a weight of 4.1  n.    what is the mass of the stone?  a 0 . 4 1  kg b 2 . 4  kg c 4 . 1  kg d 4 1  kg      5 which quantity is weight an example of?  a acceleration  b f o r c e   c mass  d pressure      6 a rectangular metal block is 20  cm long.    the cross-sectional area of the block is 25  cm2.    the mass of the block is 4000  g.    what is the density of the metal?  a 0 . 1 3  g / cm3 b 0 . 3 2  g / cm3 c 8 . 0  g / cm3 d 2000  g / cm3    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  7 a force of 4.0  n acts on a beam as shown.    beam x 4.0 npivot     the line of action of the force is a distance x from a pivot. the moment of this force about this  pivot is 8.0  n cm.    what is distance x?  a 0 . 5 0  cm b 2 . 0  cm c 1 2  cm d 3 2  cm     8 the diagram shows a stand. the stand holds a heavy mass above t he bench.    heavy mass stand basebench     which two changes would definitely make the stand more stable?  a lower the mass and make the base narrower.  b lower the mass and make the base wider.  c raise the mass and make the base narrower.  d raise the mass and make the base wider.      9 two wind farms supply electrical energy to consumers in differ ent ways.    wind farm 1 supplies energy directly to consumers and for every  1000  j of energy extracted from  the wind, 360  j is transferred to consumers as electrical energy.    wind farm 2 stores electrical energy in batteries and then supp lies energy from the batteries to  the consumer. for every 1000  j of energy extracted from the wind, 270  j is transferred to  consumers as electrical energy.    which statement about the two wind farms is correct?  a wind farm 1 is less reliable and less efficient than wind farm 2.  b wind farm 1 is less reliable but more efficient than wind farm 2.  c wind farm 1 is more reliable but less efficient than wind farm 2.  d wind farm 1 is more reliable and more efficient than wind farm 2. ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20 [turn over  10 work is done.    which physical quantity is transferred?  a d i s t a n c e   b energy  c f o r c e   d temperature    11 to calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the fo rce must be known.    what else needs to be known to calculate the power?     the distance that the force  moves the object the time for which the  force acts on the object   a \u0016 \u0016 key  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016 = needed  c \u001a \u0016 \u001a = not needed  d \u001a \u001a       12 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?    d cb amercury      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  13 a man who weighs 540  n stands with both feet on the ground. the area of contact betw een one  foot and the ground is 0.015  m2.    what is the pressure exerted on the floor by the man?  a 1800  n / m2  b 3600  n / m2  c 1 8  000  n / m2  d 3 6  000  n / m2    14 on a warm day, a driv er checks the air pre ssure in a car tyre.  at night, the temp erature drops and  the air pressure in the tyre decreases. there are no air leaks in the tyre.    why does the pressure decrease?  a the air molecules in the tyre move more slowly.  b the air molecules in the tyre stop moving.  c the volume of the air in the tyre decreases.  d the volume of the air in the tyre increases.      15 wet clothes are put out on a line to allow the water in the cl othes to evaporate.    which type of weather would cause the water to evaporate most q uickly?  a a cold day with no wind  b a cold day with wind  c a hot day with no wind  d a hot day with wind    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20 [turn over  16 a bimetallic strip is used to control the temperature of elect rical appliances. it is made of two  different metals fixed together.    the diagram shows the shape of the bimetallic strip before and after heating.    before heating after heatingmetal p metal q     which statement is correct?  a metal p contracts more than metal q on heating.  b metal q contracts more than metal p on heating.  c metal p expands more than metal q on heating.  d metal q expands more than metal p on heating.     17 samples of four different substances are heated in turn by the  same heater, for the same time  duration and in the same conditions. the increase in temperatur e for each sample is recorded in  the table.    which sample has the highest thermal capacity?     sample temperature  rise  / \uf0b0c  a aluminium 6.0  b copper 8.0  c mercury 10.0  d water 5.0     18 thermal energy is supplied at the same rate to four bars made from different materials.    xythermal energy    after several minutes, there is a temperature difference betwee n x and y for each bar.    which statement identifies the bar with the greatest temperatur e difference between points x and  y, and gives the correct reason?  a copper because it is a good conductor of thermal energy  b lead because it is the densest metal  c plastic because it is a poor conductor of thermal energy  d wood because it is a good conductor of thermal energy ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  19 a scientist measures the air temperature at different heights from the floor in a cave. the results  are recorded in the table.    height  / m temperature  / \uf0b0c  0 10  10 11  20 13  30 14  40 16    why does altering the height affect the temperature of the air?   a the molecules in warm air have less energy than the molecules in cool air.  b the molecules in cool air are further apart than the molecules  in warm air.  c warm air is less dense than cool air.  d cool air rises above warm air.      20 which row correctly describes light waves?     wave type direction of vibrations  a longitudinal parallel to direction of wave travel  b longitudinal perpendicular to direction of wave travel  c transverse parallel to direction of wave travel  d transverse perpendicular to direction of wave travel      21 waves travel across the surface of water.    what is meant by the amplitude of the wave?  a the maximum distance of a water particle from its mean position   b how far the wave travels every second  c the number of waves passing a point every second  d the distance between the top of consecutive waves     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20 [turn over  22 which diagram shows the image correctly formed by reflection?    a object imageb object image c object imaged object imagemirror mirror mirror mirror      23 a man sees a stone at the bottom of a pool of water.    which path could be taken by light from the stone to the man?    air water stoneab c dman      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  24 white light can be split into different colours by passing it through a prism.    what is the name of this process?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d total internal reflection     25 which type of radiation does a remote controller use to send i ts instructions to a tv set?  a \uf067-rays  b infrared radiation  c ultraviolet radiation  d x-rays    26 a police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy tr affic. a pedestrian notices that,  although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, th e pitch varies.    which row describes the amplitude and the frequency of the soun d?     amplitude frequency  a constant constant  b constant varying  c varying constant  d varying varying       27 a student sets up four experiments using bar magnets and other  metal objects. the n and s  poles of the bar magnets are labelled n and s.    1 sn sn2 sn iron 3 sn copper4 sn ns    which pairs attract each other?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 2 and 4 d 3 and 4     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20 [turn over  28 a student uses three small plotting compasses to investigate t he magnetic field around a bar  magnet.    which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles  point?    s na s nb s n c s nd       29 a polythene rod is charged negatively by rubbing it with a clo th.    which statement explains why the rod has become charged?  a the rod has gained electrons.  b the rod has gained protons.  c the rod has lost electrons.  d the rod has lost protons.    30 there is a current in a variable resistor when a potential dif ference (p.d.) is applied across it.    in which situation is the current increased?  a decrease the p.d. and keep the resistance the same.  b decrease the p.d. and increase the resistance.  c keep the p.d. the same and decrease the resistance.  d keep the p.d. the same and increase the resistance.    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  31 the circuit shown includes a battery, three lamps x, y and z a nd three switches s 1, s2 and s 3.    lamp x lamp y lamp zs1 s2 s3     lamp x is off but lamps y and z are lit.    which switches are closed?  a s 1 and s 2 only  b s 1 and s 3 only  c s 2 and s 3 only  d s 1, s2 and s 3      32 a student uses four ammeters p, q, r and s to measure the curre nt in different parts of the  circuit shown.    a a a apq r s     which two ammeters read the largest current?  a p and q b p and r c r and q d r and s    33 an electrical appliance is powered from a mains supply.     the appliance normally uses a current of 3  a, but the current briefly rises to 4  a at the instant the  appliance is switched on. the cable to the appliance is designe d for currents up to 6  a.    a fuse is used to protect the circuit.    what should be the rating of the fuse?  a 1 a b 3 a c 5 a d 13  a ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20 [turn over  34 a student investigates electromagnetic induction. she moves th e n pole of a magnet quickly  towards a coil of wire. there is a reading on the galvanometer.     bar magnet n scoil of wire     what can she do to get a greater reading on the galvanometer?  a hold the bar magnet stationary inside the coil.  b move the bar magnet slowly away from the coil.  c use a coil of wire with fewer turns on it.  d use a stronger bar magnet.     35 a transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240  v a.c. into 4800  v a.c..    npns 240  v a.c. 4800  v a.c.     which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?     number of turns  on primary coil np number of turns  on secondary coil ns  a 50 1  000  b 240 48  000  c 480 24  d 2000 100     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  36 the diagram shows a wire carrying a current in the direction sh own. the wire is between the  poles of a magnet.    a force is produced on the wire out of the page.    n swire direction of current    the wire and magnet are now put into different arrangements x, y and z. the arrow shows the  direction of the current in each case.    n sx s ny s nz     in which arrangements is the force on the wire out of the page?   a x only b x and y c x and z d z only     37 which statement is correct for the nucleus of any atom?  a the nucleus contains electrons, neutrons and protons.  b the nucleus contains the same number of protons as neutrons.  c the nucleus has a total charge of zero.  d the nucleus is very small compar ed with the size of the atom.    38 the symbol represents a nucleus of zinc.        which row gives the numbers of protons and neutrons in this nuc leus?     number of  protons number of  neutrons  a 30 38  b 30 68  c 38 30  d 38 68 ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  39 three types of radiation are \uf061-radiation, \uf062-radiation and \uf067-radiation.    which statement is correct?  a \uf061-radiation is less ionising than \uf062-radiation.  b \uf061-radiation is less ionising than \uf067-radiation.  c \uf067-radiation produces no ionisation.  d \uf062-radiation is more ionising than \uf067-radiation.     40 the graph shows the radioactive decay curve of a substance.    1000 750500250 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 time  / yearscount rate counts  / s     what is the half-life of this substance?  a 0.5 years b 5 years c 15 years d 30 years    ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/12/o/n/20  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 11_0625_13/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *4235244434*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/13     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  october/november 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be ded ucted for a wrong answer.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20  1 a student uses a metre rule to measure the length of a sheet of  paper.    which measurement is shown to the nearest millimetre?  a 0 . 3  m b 0 . 2 9  m c 0 . 2 9 3  m d 0.2932  m     2 the diagram shows the distance\u2013time graph for the motion of an object.    0 0 timedistance     how can the motion of the object be described?  a at rest, then constant deceleration  b at rest, then constant speed  c constant speed, then constant acceleration  d constant speed, then constant deceleration      3 an athlete runs 300  m up a hill in 100  s.    she then runs down the same hill in 50  s.    what is her average speed for the whole run?  a 2 . 0  m / s b 4 . 0  m / s c 8 . 0  m / s d 9 . 0  m / s     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20 [turn over  4 the diagram shows an object on a balance. the reading on the ba lance is shown.    200  gobject     which quantity is shown?  a the mass of the object  b the pressure exerted by the object  c the volume of the object  d the weight of the object    5 which quantity is weight an example of?  a acceleration  b f o r c e   c mass  d pressure     6 a student is asked to predict whether a solid floats in a liqu id.    which information does the student require?  a the density of the liquid and the mass of the solid  b the density of the solid and the density of the liquid  c the density of the solid and the mass of the liquid  d the mass of the solid and the mass of the liquid     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20  7 the diagram shows a car moving along a road.    the force due to the engine is 1500  n and the total drag force is 200  n.    drag force 200  nengine force 1500  n road     what is the motion of the car?  a constant speed  b decreasing speed  c increasing speed  d reversing      8 students x and y are sitting on a seesaw. student x has a weig ht of 400  n and student y has a  weight of 600  n. the seesaw is in equilibrium.    student x student y     which statement correctly describes why the seesaw is in equili brium?  a the resultant force is zero and the resultant moment is zero.  b the resultant force is 200  n and the resultant moment is zero.  c the sum of the downward forces is zero and the resultant momen t is zero.  d the total downward force is 1000  n and the resultant moment is 200  n m.    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20 [turn over  9 the diagram shows a frictionless pendulum.    pr qpendulum bob     the pendulum bob swings from point p through point q to point r  then back to p.    at which point is the energy of the pendulum bob greatest?  a at point p  b at point q  c at point r  d it is the same at points p, q and r      10 which statement correctly compares the production of electricit y using wind and the production of  electricity using nuclear fission?  a wind is less reliable than nuclear fission; both wind and nucle ar fission are renewable.  b wind is less reliable than nuclear fission; wind is renewable, but nuclear fission is not.  c wind is more reliable than nuclear fission; both wind and nucle ar fission are renewable.  d wind is more reliable than nuclear fission; wind is renewable, but nuclear fission is not.      11 to calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the fo rce must be known.    what else needs to be known to calculate the power?     the distance that the force  moves the object the time for which the  force acts on the object   a \u0016 \u0016 key  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016 = needed  c \u001a \u0016 \u001a = not needed  d \u001a \u001a      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20  12 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?    d cb amercury      13 a large box has a weight of 700  n. the box is placed on the floor.    50 cm 70 cm    what is the pressure on the floor due to the box?  a 0 . 2 0  n / m2 b 1 0  n / m2 c 2 4 5  n / m2 d 2000  n / m2     14 on a warm day, a driv er checks the air pre ssure in a car tyre.  at night, the temp erature drops and  the air pressure in the tyre decreases. there are no air leaks in the tyre.    why does the pressure decrease?  a the air molecules in the tyre move more slowly.  b the air molecules in the tyre stop moving.  c the volume of the air in the tyre decreases.  d the volume of the air in the tyre increases.    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20 [turn over  15 a textbook gives the description of a thermal process as \u2018more -energetic molecules escape from  the surface of a liquid which causes the liquid to cool\u2019.    which process is being described?  a boiling  b brownian motion  c condensation  d evaporation    16 which physical property changes when temperature is measured wi th a liquid-in-glass  thermometer?  a electromotive force  b pressure  c resistance  d volume    17 two different pure substances x and y are heated. both substan ce x and substance y are  initially in the solid state.    the graph shows how the temperature of each substance changes w ith time.    0 0temperature timesubstance x substance y     what does the graph tell us about the substances?  a substance x has a lower boiling point than substance y.  b substance x has a lower melting point than substance y.  c substance y has a lower boiling point than substance x.  d substance y has a lower melting point than substance x.    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20  18 the diagram shows the view of a room heated by a radiator. the  arrowed line from x to y is the  path of the convection current in the air.    xy radiatorceiling floor     which row about the air temperature and the air density at x an d at y is correct?     air temperature air density  a higher at x higher at x  b higher at x higher at y  c higher at y higher at y  d higher at y higher at x      19 which thermal process can transfer energy through a vacuum?  a conduction  b convection  c evaporation  d radiation    20 which row correctly describes light waves?     wave type direction of vibrations  a longitudinal parallel to direction of wave travel  b longitudinal perpendicular to direction of wave travel  c transverse parallel to direction of wave travel  d transverse perpendicular to direction of wave travel     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20 [turn over  21 the diagram shows a wave. it is not drawn to scale.    2.0 m6.0 m     what are the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave?     amplitude  / m wavelength  / m  a 1.0 1.0  b 1.0 2.0  c 2.0 2.0  d 2.0 3.0      22 a boy is having his eyes tested. a letter is printed on a card  placed over his head. he sees the  card in a plane mirror placed on the far wall of the room.    he sees the letter \u2018r\u2019 in the mirror.    how is it printed on the card?    a b c d      ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20  23 a man sees a stone at the bottom of a pool of water.    which path could be taken by light from the stone to the man?    air water stoneab c dman      24 the diagram shows the image made by a converging lens.    f 2fobject imagef 2fconverging lens principal axislight rays     which statement describes the image formed?  a diminished and inverted  b diminished and upright  c enlarged and inverted  d enlarged and upright     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20 [turn over  25 the diagram shows three types of electromagnetic radiation lis ted in a particular order. the  electromagnetic radiation is travelling in a vacuum.    microwaves infrared x-rays    which quantities increase in magnitude going from left to right  across the list?  a frequency only  b neither speed nor frequency  c speed and frequency  d speed only     26 a  p o l i c e  c a r  w i t h  i t s  s i r e n  s o u n d i n g  i s  s t a t i o n a r y  i n  h e a v y  t r affic. a pedestrian notices that,  although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, th e pitch varies.    which row describes the amplitude and the frequency of the soun d?     amplitude frequency  a constant constant  b constant varying  c varying constant  d varying varying      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20  27 diagrams 1, 2 and 3 show an experiment to compare two magnets 1 and 2.    125.3  g diagram 1n s 124.9  g diagram 2n s 126.7  g diagram 3n sw xy zmagnet 1 magnet magnet magnetmagnet 2     which row explains the readings on the balances?     polarity of magnet 1 polarity of magnet 2  a x is an n pole z is an n pole  b x is an n pole z is an s pole  c x is an s pole z is an n pole  d x is an s pole z is an s pole      28 a student uses three small plotting compasses to investigate t he magnetic field around a bar  magnet.    which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles  point?    s na s nb s n c s nd    ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20 [turn over  29 which statement about charging an insulator is correct?  a it can be given an electrostatic charge by placing it in a mag netic field.  b it can be given an electrostatic charge by connecting it to a battery.  c it can be given an electrostatic charge by friction.  d it cannot be given an electrostatic charge.      30 each diagram shows part of a circuit. the circle represents an  instrument used to measure the  potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor.    diagram 1 diagram 2     which row is correct?     the unit of p.d. diagram which shows the  meter correctly connected  a amperes diagram 1  b amperes diagram 2  c volts diagram 1  d volts diagram 2     31 a student uses four ammeters p, q, r and s to measure the curre nt in different parts of the  circuit shown.    a a a apq r s     which two ammeters read the largest current?  a p and q b p and r c r and q d r and s     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20  32 three statements about a relay are given.    1 a relay has a coil that becomes a temporary magnet when in op eration.  2 a large current in a relay coil is used to switch off a small er current.  3 a small current in a relay coil is used to switch on a larger  current.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 2 and 3 only c 1 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3    33 an electrical appliance is p owered from a mains supply.     the appliance normally uses a current of 3  a, but the current briefly rises to 4  a at the instant the  appliance is switched on. the cable to the appliance is designe d for currents up to 6  a.    a fuse is used to protect the circuit.    what should be the rating of the fuse?  a 1 a b 3 a c 5 a d 13  a     34 when a metal wire moves up, cutting a magnetic field, an elect romotive force (e.m.f.) is induced  across the wire.    which change affects the magnitude of the induced e.m.f.?  a moving the wire down at the same speed  b moving the wire up at a faster speed  c using a thicker wire  d using a wire made from a different metal     35 a transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240  v a.c. into 4800  v a.c..    npns 240  v a.c. 4800  v a.c.     which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?     number of turns  on primary coil np number of turns  on secondary coil ns  a 50 1  000  b 240 48  000  c 480 24  d 2000 100 ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a wire carrying a current in the direction sh own. there is a magnetic field  acting from left to right. the wire experiences a force acting out of the page.    wire direction of magnetic fielddirectionof current     the current is now reversed.    in which direction does the force on the wire now act?  a into the page  b out of the page  c to the left  d to the right      37 which statement is correct for the nucleus of any atom?  a the nucleus contains electrons, neutrons and protons.  b the nucleus contains the same number of protons as neutrons.  c the nucleus has a total charge of zero.  d the nucleus is very small compar ed with the size of the atom.      38 how many protons and how many neutrons are in a nucleus of              ?     protons neutrons  a 90 144  b 90 234  c 144 90  d 234 90     234th90",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/13/o/n/20  39 a radiation detector in a laboratory is measuring background r adiation.    which row describes the readings and the cause?     readings cause  a vary with no pattern background radiation is random  b vary with no pattern radiation detectors are unstable  c   slowly increase during the day   background radiation increases  as temperature increases  d   slowly reduce during the day   background radiation decreases  as temperature increases      40 the graph shows the radioactive decay curve of a substance.    1000 750500250 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 time  / yearscount rate counts  / s     what is the half-life of this substance?  a 0.5 years b 5 years c 15 years d 30 years      "
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 11_0625_21/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *8691247406*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/21     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m  / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be ded ucted for a wrong answer.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  1 for which one of the following measurements would a micrometer screw gauge be most  suitable?  a length of this page  b length of a pencil  c diameter of a wire  d diameter of an atom     2 the speed\u2013time graph represents a journey.    speed time00xy     how does the graph show that the distance travelled in section x of the journey is greater than  the distance travelled in section y?  a the area below section x of the graph is greater than the area below section y.  b the gradient of section x of the graph is greater than the grad ient of section y.  c the speed at the end of section x of the journey is greater tha n the speed at the end of  section y.  d the time for section x of the journey is greater than the time for section y.     3 a car is travelling at a velocity of 2.0  m / s. it accelerates at a constant 0.20  m / s2 for 2.5 minutes.    what is the final velocity of the car?  a 2.5  m / s b 5.2  m / s c 30  m / s d 32  m / s     4 which quantity is weight an example of?  a acceleration  b f o r c e   c mass  d pressure    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20 [turn over  5 a sphere p, made of steel, has a weight of 10  n on earth.    another sphere q, also made of steel, has a weight of 10  n on mars.    the gravitational field strength on earth is greater than the g ravitational field strength on mars.    which statement is correct?  a the mass of sphere p is the same as the mass of sphere q.  b the mass of sphere p is less than the mass of sphere q.  c on mars, the weight of sphere p is more than 10  n.  d on earth, the weight of sphere q is less than 10  n.     6 a metal ball is attached to a cork and is lowered into a measu ring cylinder, pulling the cork into  the water, as shown.    48 cm3 water ball and cork above the waterball fully submerged but cork above the waterboth ball and cork fully submergedballcork 56 cm380 cm3     the mass of the cork is 4.8  g.    what is the density of the cork?  a 0 . 1 5  g / cm3 b 0 . 2 0  g / cm3 c 0 . 6 0  g / cm3 d 5 . 0  g / cm3     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  7 a uniform plank rests on a pivot at its centre.    two children p and q sit on the plank in the positions shown.    child p child q pivot1.2 m 1.5  m     the mass of child p is 25  kg.    the plank is balanced.    what is the mass of child q?  a 2 0  kg b 2 5  kg c 3 1  kg d 4 5  kg     8 the diagram shows three forces acting on an object.    6 n 9 n 1 n     what is the value of the resultant force acting on the object?  a 2  n b 1 0  n c 1 4  n d 1 6  n    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20 [turn over  9 an object with a mass of 0.20  kg moves at 0.20  m / s, as shown.    0.20  kg0.20  m / s     which other object has a momentum that is identical to the mome ntum of this object?    0.20  kg0.20  m / s 0.40  kg 0.10  m / s 0.40  kg0.10  m / sab cd 0.20  kg0.20  m / s      10 a stone is dropped from rest at a height of 2.0  m above the surface of a planet.    the planet has no atmosphere.    the speed of the stone just before reaching the surface of the planet is 3.8  m / s.    what is the acceleration of free fall on the planet?  a zero b 1 . 9  m / s2 c 3 . 6  m / s2 d 7 . 2  m / s2     11 an electric motor uses 1000  j of electrical energy. it provides 450  j of useful output energy.    what is the efficiency of the motor?  a 4 . 5 %  b 5 . 5 %  c 4 5 %  d 55%    12 to calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the fo rce must be known.    what else needs to be known to calculate the power?     the distance that the force  moves the object the time for which the  force acts on the object   a \u0016 \u0016 key  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016 = needed  c \u001a \u0016 \u001a = not needed  d \u001a \u001a  ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  13 a barometer reads 780  mm  hg. mercury has a density of 1.36 \uf0b4 104  kg  / m3.    what is the pressure of the atmosphere in n  / m2?  a 1.1 \uf0b4 104  n / m2  b 1.1 \uf0b4 105  n / m2  c 1.1 \uf0b4 107  n / m2  d 1.1 \uf0b4 108  n / m2     14 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?    d cb amercury      15 a student splashes water on to her face. here are three statem ents about the effects.    p the water uses energy to evaporate.  q the water gains energy from the student. r the face of the student cools.    which statements are correct?  a p and q only b p and r only c q and r only d p, q and r      16 when a bridge is built, a gap is  left between each concrete sl ab.    why are these gaps left?  a concrete expands on warm days.  b concrete contracts on warm days.  c the gaps expand on warm days.  d the gaps contract on cold days. ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20 [turn over  17 the specific heat capacity of so lid p is greater than that of solid q.    what does this statement mean?  a less energy is needed to raise the temperature by 1  \uf0b0c of unit mass of solid p than unit mass  of solid q.  b less energy is needed to melt unit mass of solid p than unit ma ss of solid q.  c more energy is needed to raise the temperature by 1  \uf0b0c of unit mass of solid p than unit  mass of solid q.  d more energy is needed to melt unit mass of solid p than unit ma ss of solid q.     18 a student placed a number of ice cubes in a container with a h ole in the base. he left them to  melt so that the water dripped into a beaker placed on a balanc e. the student recorded the initial  mass of the beaker and the final mass of the beaker and water a fter five minutes.    0.05  kg beforebeaker balanceice in a container with a holein the base 0.16  kg after    the specific latent heat of fusion for water is 334  j / g.    how much energy was absorbed from the surroundings in order to melt the ice?  a 37  j b 54  j c 37  000  j d 54  000  j     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  19 the diagram shows four rods. each rod is made of a different m etal.    xp sq rcopper ironbrass silver     wax is used to attach small metal balls at the rod ends p, q, r  and s.    each rod is the same size. they are heated uniformly by a bunse n burner at point x.    as the rods warm up, the wax melts and the balls fall off.    why does the ball on the silver rod fall first?  a silver is the best conductor of heat.  b silver is the worst conductor of heat.  c silver is the best radiator of heat.  d silver is the worst radiator of heat.    20 four cups a, b, c and d contain hot coffee.    which cup keeps the coffee warm the longest?     the outside  surface of the cup the top of the cup  a black covered with a lid  b black no lid  c white covered with a lid  d white no lid     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20 [turn over  21 which row correctly describes light waves?     wave type direction of vibrations  a longitudinal parallel to direction of wave travel  b longitudinal perpendicular to direction of wave travel  c transverse parallel to direction of wave travel  d transverse perpendicular to direction of wave travel      22 the diagram shows part of a diffracted wave pattern.    barrier direction of waves     changes are made to the wavelength and to the gap size to produ ce a semicircular diffracted  wave pattern.    which row produces the required semicircular diffracted wave pa ttern?     gap in barrier wavelength  a larger same  b larger smaller  c same larger  d same smaller      23 which statement about a thin converging lens is correct?  a all rays of light refracted by the lens pass through the princi pal focus.  b a l l  r a y s  i n i t i a l l y  p a r a l l e l  t o  t h e  p r i n c i p a l  a x i s  o f  t h e  l e n s  a re refracted through the principal  focus.  c the focal length of the lens is the distance between the image and the principal focus.  d the focal length of the lens is  the distance between the object  and the image.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  24 the diagram shows white light passing through a prism.    red violet white light    which description of what happens as the light passes into the prism is correct?  a the speed of the red light is less than the speed of the violet  light and the red light is the  least refracted.  b the speed of the red light is greater than the speed of the vio let light and the red light is the  least refracted.  c the speed of the violet light is less than the speed of the red  light and the violet light is the  least refracted.  d the speed of the violet light is greater than the speed of the red light and the violet light is the  least refracted.    25 which row gives possible values for the speed of sound?     speed in gas  m / s speed in liquid  m / s speed in solid  m / s  a 972 1450 3560  b 972 3560 1450  c 1450 3560 972  d 3560 972 1450     26 a police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy tr affic. a pedestrian notices that,  although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, th e pitch varies.    which row describes the amplitude and the frequency of the soun d?     amplitude frequency  a constant constant  b constant varying  c varying constant  d varying varying      ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20 [turn over  27 a piece of steel is slightly magnetised. it is hit several tim es with a hammer.    what effect will this have on the steel?     the steel is parallel to  a strong magnetic field the steel is at right-angles  to a weak magnetic field  a it becomes magnetised more strongly it becomes magnetised more strongly  b it becomes magnetised more strongly it loses its magnetism  c it loses its magnetism it becomes magnetised more strongly  d it loses its magnetism it loses its magnetism      28 two soft-iron pins are suspended from the s pole of a bar magn et.    which diagram shows how the pins are deflected?    sa sb sc sd       29 a negatively charged plastic rod is brought near to an uncharg ed metal sphere and held there.    what happens when the metal sphere is earthed?  a electrons flow from the metal sphere to earth.  b electrons flow from earth to the metal sphere.  c positive charge flows from the metal sphere to earth.  d positive charge flows from earth to the metal sphere.      30 which statement defines the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a cell?  a the current in the cell when 1.0  c of charge flows in 1.0  s  b the current supplied by the cell to drive 1.0  c of charge around a complete circuit  c the energy supplied by the cell to drive 1.0  c of charge around a complete circuit  d the energy supplied by the cell to drive 1.0  a of current around a complete circuit     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  31 four wires are made of the same metal.    which wire has the greatest resistance?  a a 100  cm long wire with a diameter of 3.0  mm  b a 100  cm long wire with a diameter of 6.0  mm  c a 10  cm long wire with a diameter of 3.0  mm  d a 10  cm long wire with a diameter of 6.0  mm    32 in which circuit is there just a single lamp lit?    a b c d      ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20 [turn over  33 a student uses four ammeters p, q, r and s to measure the curre nt in different parts of the  circuit shown.    a a a apq r s     which two ammeters read the largest current?  a p and q b p and r c r and q d r and s    34 which combination of logic gates gives the truth table shown?    inputs output  x y z  0 0 1  0 1 1  1 0 1  1 1 0    x yza cb dx yz x yzx yz      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  35 a transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240  v a.c. into 4800  v a.c..    npns 240  v a.c. 4800  v a.c.     which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?     number of turns  on primary coil np number of turns  on secondary coil ns  a 50 1  000  b 240 48  000  c 480 24  d 2000 100     36 the diagram shows part of a long current-carrying conductor.    at which point is the magnetic field strongest?    c d ba      37 a beam of particles moves through a magnetic field.    in which situation do the particles experience a magnetic force ?  a a beam of \uf061-particles moving parallel to the magnetic field lines  b a beam of electrons moving parallel to the magnetic field lines   c a beam of \uf062-particles moving perpendicularly across the magnetic field lin es  d a beam of neutrons moving perpendicularly across the magnetic f ield lines      38 which statement is correct for the nucleus of any atom?  a the nucleus contains electrons, neutrons and protons.  b the nucleus contains the same number of protons as neutrons.  c the nucleus has a total charge of zero.  d the nucleus is very small compar ed with the size of the atom. ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  39 two beams of radiation, p and q, enter an electric field as sh own.    ++++++++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013p q     which type of radiations are p and q?     p  q   a beta (\uf062) alpha ( \uf061)  b beta (\uf062) gamma ( \uf067)  c gamma ( \uf067) alpha ( \uf061)  d gamma ( \uf067) gamma ( \uf067)      40 which equation represents the \uf062-decay of lead-209?  209pb82209bi830e\u20131+ a /g111 209pb82209tl810e\u20131+ b /g111 209pb82209bi830e\u20131+ c /g111 209pb82209tl810e\u20131+ d /g111      ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/21/o/n/20  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 11_0625_22/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *4531333276*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/22     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10 m  / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be ded ucted for a wrong answer.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  1 the diagram shows a measuring device.    01 mm35 30     for which measurement is this device suitable?  a diameter of a cylinder of aluminium of about 20  cm  b distance between two molecules of zinc  c length of a rod of iron of about 1  m  d thickness of a sheet of copper of about 1.5  mm     2 the graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.    speed timep q0     which row describes the motion of the object at times p and q?     p  q   a at rest accelerating  b at rest decelerating  c moving with constant speed accelerating  d moving with constant speed decelerating     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20 [turn over  3 a concrete block falls vertically from an aeroplane.    the concrete block falls into the sea and sinks.    which graph shows the vertical motion of the concrete block?    speed timea 0 0speed timeb 0 0 speed timec 0 0speed timed 0 0      4 which quantity is weight an example of?  a acceleration  b f o r c e   c mass  d pressure     5 which statement about the mass of an object is correct?  a it changes when the object is lifted further from the ground.  b it is the gravitational force on the object.  c it is zero if the object is in orbit around the earth.  d it resists any change in motion of the object.    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  6 a rectangular metal block is 20  cm long.    the cross-sectional area of the block is 25  cm2.    the mass of the block is 4000  g.    what is the density of the metal?  a 0 . 1 3  g / cm3 b 0 . 3 2  g / cm3 c 8 . 0  g / cm3 d 2000  g / cm3    7 the diagram shows a beam lying on the ground. end q is lifted from the ground by the force f.    end p of the beam remains on the ground.    groundf beamg1.0 m pq3.0 m     the length of the beam is 3.0  m and its weight is 600  n.    the centre of mass of the beam at g is 1.0  m from end p.    what is the size of the force f when it just raises end q from the ground?  a 200  n b 3 0 0  n c 4 0 0  n d 600  n    8 the diagram shows a stand. the stand holds a heavy mass above t he bench.    heavy mass stand basebench     which two changes would definitely make the stand more stable?  a lower the mass and make the base narrower.  b lower the mass and make the base wider.  c raise the mass and make the base narrower.  d raise the mass and make the base wider.    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20 [turn over  9 a footballer kicks a stationary football.    his foot is in contact with the ball for 0.050  s.    the mass of the ball is 0.40  kg.    the speed of projection of the ball is 25  m / s.    what is the average force exerted on the ball by his foot?  a 0 . 3 2  n b 0 . 5 0  n c 2 0 0  n d 1300  n      10 a woman of mass 50  kg has 81  j of kinetic energy.    what is her speed?  a 1 . 3  m / s b 1 . 6  m / s c 1 . 8  m / s d 3 . 2  m / s     11 what is the source of the sun\u2019s energy?  a chemical reactions in the sun\u2019s core  b \uf067-emissions in the sun\u2019s core  c nuclear fission in the sun\u2019s core  d nuclear fusion in the sun\u2019s core     12 to calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the fo rce must be known.    what else needs to be known to calculate the power?     the distance that the force  moves the object the time for which the  force acts on the object   a \u0016 \u0016 key  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016 = needed  c \u001a \u0016 \u001a = not needed  d \u001a \u001a      13 a research submarine is at a depth of 10  000  m below the surface of the sea.    the average density of the water above the submarine is 1030  kg  / m3.    the atmospheric pressure at the surface of the sea is 103  000  pa.    how many times greater is the pressure due to the sea water tha n the atmospheric pressure?  a 10 b 1 0 0  c 1000 d 100  000    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  14 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?    d cb amercury      15 a student splashes water on to her face. here are three statem ents about the effects.    p the water uses energy to evaporate.  q the water gains energy from the student.  r the face of the student cools.    which statements are correct?  a p and q only b p and r only c q and r only d p, q and r    16 a bimetallic strip is used to control the temperature of elect rical appliances. it is made of two  different metals fixed together.    the diagram shows the shape of the bimetallic strip before and after heating.    before heating after heatingmetal p metal q     which statement is correct?  a metal p contracts more than metal q on heating.  b metal q contracts more than metal p on heating.  c metal p expands more than metal q on heating.  d metal q expands more than metal p on heating.    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20 [turn over  17 a student writes three statements about thermocouples.    1 they have a small thermal capacity.  2 they respond very slowly to temperature changes.  3 they can measure temperatures above 500  \uf0b0c.    which statements are correct?  a 1 only b 2 only c 1 and 3 d 2 and 3     18 four blocks are made from different metals. each block is heat ed for five minutes with an  identical heater.    assume there is no energy loss from the blocks.    the table gives the masses of the blocks and the temperature ri ses.    which metal has the highest specific heat capacity?     mass of block  / kg temperature rise  / \uf0b0c  a 2.0 5.0  b 2.0 9.0  c 4.0 5.0  d 4.0 9.0      19 a scientist measures the air temperature at different heights from the floor in a cave. the results  are recorded in the table.    height  / m temperature  / \uf0b0c  0 10  10 11  20 13  30 14  40 16    why does altering the height affect the temperature of the air?   a the molecules in warm air have less energy than the molecules in cool air.  b the molecules in cool air are further apart than the molecules  in warm air.  c warm air is less dense than cool air.  d cool air rises above warm air.    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  20 four solid spheres made of the same metal are heated to the sa me temperature.    which sphere initially loses thermal energy by radiation at the  greatest rate?  a diameter of 10  cm with a dull surface  b diameter of 10  cm with a shiny surface  c diameter of 5  cm with a dull surface  d diameter of 5  cm with a shiny surface    21 which row correctly describes light waves?     wave type direction of vibrations  a longitudinal parallel to direction of wave travel  b longitudinal perpendicular to direction of wave travel  c transverse parallel to direction of wave travel  d transverse perpendicular to direction of wave travel     22 a radio transmitter broadcasts at a frequency of 200  khz.    what is the wavelength of these radio waves?  a 6.7  \uf0b4 10\u20134  m b 1.5  m c 1.5  \uf0b4 103  m d 1.5  \uf0b4 106  m     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20 [turn over  23 an optical lever is a very sensitive device for detecting smal l rotations. a lamp sends a narrow  beam of light on to a small plane mirror attached to a shaft wh ose rotation is to be measured. the  operation of the device is shown in plan view.    lamp small mirrorlampscale just above lampscale justabove lamp small mirrorshaft shaft/g84     the beam from the lamp reflects from the mirror to give a small  spot of light on a scale placed  just above the lamp. the shaft and mirror rotate through 1 \uf0b0. the spot of light moves along the  scale.    the table shows the angle \uf071 through which the reflected beam rotates and the conditions  required for high sensitivity.    which row is correct?     angle \uf071 to achieve high sensitivity  a   1\uf0b0   the lamp and scale need to be  as close to the mirror as possible  b   1\uf0b0   the lamp and scale need to be  as far from the mirror as possible  c   2\uf0b0   the lamp and scale need to be  as close to the mirror as possible  d   2\uf0b0   the lamp and scale need to be  as far from the mirror as possible    24 a student draws a diagram to illustrate the different sections  of a longitudinal wave.    which labelled section is a rarefaction?    a b d c     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  25 the diagram shows white light passing through a prism.    red violet white light    which description of what happens as the light passes into the prism is correct?  a the speed of the red light is less than the speed of the violet  light and the red light is the  least refracted.  b the speed of the red light is greater than the speed of the vio let light and the red light is the  least refracted.  c the speed of the violet light is less than the speed of the red  light and the violet light is the  least refracted.  d the speed of the violet light is greater than the speed of the red light and the violet light is the  least refracted.    26 a police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy tr affic. a pedestrian notices that,  although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, th e pitch varies.    which row describes the amplitude and the frequency of the soun d?     amplitude frequency  a constant constant  b constant varying  c varying constant  d varying varying      27 a piece of steel is slightly magnetised. it is hit several tim es with a hammer.    what effect will this have on the steel?     the steel is parallel to  a strong magnetic field the steel is at right-angles  to a weak magnetic field  a it becomes magnetised more strongly it becomes magnetised more strongly  b it becomes magnetised more strongly it loses its magnetism  c it loses its magnetism it becomes magnetised more strongly  d it loses its magnetism it loses its magnetism   ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20 [turn over  28 a student sets up four experiments using bar magnets and other  metal objects. the n and s  poles of the bar magnets are labelled n and s.    1 sn sn2 sn iron 3 sn copper4 sn ns    which pairs attract each other?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 2 and 4 d 3 and 4     29 which diagram represents the strength and direction of the magn etic field around a  current-carrying conductor? (the direction of the current is in to the page.)    a b cd       30 which quantity is defined as the energy transferred by a cell in driving unit charge around a  complete circuit?  a current  b electromotive force (e.m.f.)  c power  d resistance      31 there is a current in a variable resistor when a potential dif ference (p.d.) is applied across it.    in which situation is the current increased?  a decrease the p.d. and keep the resistance the same.  b decrease the p.d. and increase the resistance.  c keep the p.d. the same and decrease the resistance.  d keep the p.d. the same and increase the resistance.   ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  32 a student uses four ammeters p, q, r and s to measure the curre nt in different parts of the  circuit shown.    a a a apq r s     which two ammeters read the largest current?  a p and q b p and r c r and q d r and s    33 which combination of logic gates gives the truth table shown?    inputs output  x y z  0 0 1  0 1 1  1 0 1  1 1 0    x yza cb dx yz x yzx yz      ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20 [turn over  34 the diagram shows an a.c. generator used to power a lamp. the coil rotates in a clockwise  direction.    coilrotation of coil i xy     which magnetic poles are x and y?     x  y   a n pole n pole  b n pole s pole  c s pole n pole  d s pole s pole      35 a transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240  v a.c. into 4800  v a.c..    npns 240  v a.c. 4800  v a.c.     which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?     number of turns  on primary coil np number of turns  on secondary coil ns  a 50 1  000  b 240 48  000  c 480 24  d 2000 100     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  36 the diagram shows a coil of wire wrapped around a soft-iron ro d.    the wire is connected to a d.c. power supply as indicated.    the apparatus is in a region which is totally shielded from the  earth\u2019s magnetic field.    +\u2013 soft-iron rod p    a small compass needle is placed at point p.    in which direction does the n pole of the compass needle point?   a towards the bottom of the page  b towards the left of the page  c towards the right of the page  d towards the top of the page     37 which statement is correct for the nucleus of any atom?  a the nucleus contains electrons, neutrons and protons.  b the nucleus contains the same number of protons as neutrons.  c the nucleus has a total charge of zero.  d the nucleus is very small compar ed with the size of the atom.    38 the symbol represents a nucleus of zinc.        which row gives the numbers of protons and neutrons in this nuc leus?     number of  protons number of  neutrons  a 30 38  b 30 68  c 38 30  d 38 68     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  39 the diagram shows a beam of \uf062-particles passing through a strong electric field.    + \u2013\u03b2-particles     in which direction will the \uf062-particles be deflected?  a upwards towards the top of the page  b downwards towards the bottom of the page  c into the plane of the page  d out of the plane of the page     40 which equation represents the \uf062-decay of lead-209?  209pb82209bi830e\u20131+ a /g111 209pb82209tl810e\u20131+ b /g111 209pb82209bi830e\u20131+ c /g111 209pb82209tl810e\u20131+ d /g111      ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/22/o/n/20  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated.  ib20 11_0625_23/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2020   [turn ove r   *8629790535*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/23     paper 2 multiple choice (extended) october/november 2020     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark. a mark will not be ded ucted for a wrong answer.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  1 a micrometer screw gauge reads 0.02  mm when the jaws are fully closed. it reads 0.56  mm when  measuring the diameter of a metal wire.    what is the diameter of the wire?  a 0 . 3 6  mm b 0 . 5 4  mm c 0 . 5 6  mm d 0 . 5 8  mm      2 object p moves at a constant speed of 5  m / s repeatedly backwards and forwards in a straight  line.    object q moves at a constant speed of 5  m / s vertically downwards.    object r moves at a constant speed of 5  m / s in a circle.    which objects are moving with uniform velocity?  a p only b q  o n l y  c r  o n l y  d q and r    3 the diagram shows a velocity\u2013time graph for an object which is  accelerating.    120 110 100 908070605040302010 0 0 1 02 03 04 0 time  / svelocity m / s     what is the acceleration of the object?  a 0 . 4 0  m / s2 b 2 . 5  m / s2 c 3 . 0  m / s2 d 100  m / s2     4 which quantity is weight an example of?  a acceleration  b f o r c e   c mass  d pressure    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20 [turn over  5 an object of mass 1.0  kg is at rest on earth. an identical object is at rest on a pla net with a  gravitational field strength of twice that on earth.    which row correctly compares the object on the planet to the ob ject on earth?     its weight its acceleration when the same  horizontal force is applied  a double equal to that on earth  b double half that on earth  c half equal to that on earth  d half half that on earth      6 a square wooden raft floats on a lake. the density of the wate r in the lake is 1000  kg  / m3.    the sides of the raft are 2.0  m long and the thickness of the raft is 0.20  m.    the mass of the raft is 700  kg.    how many barrels, each of mass 100  kg, could be placed on the raft before its surface sinks to  the surface of the water?  a 1  b 7  c 8  d 15    7 the diagram shows a car moving along a road.    the force due to the engine is 1500  n and the total drag force is 200  n.    drag force 200  nengine force 1500  n road     what is the motion of the car?  a constant speed  b decreasing speed  c increasing speed  d reversing    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  8 the diagram shows a trolley used to transport a load of 400  n.    a force f vertically downwards is needed to balance the trolley as shown.     the centre of mass of the trolley is vertically above the pivot .    f 400  n pivot90 cm40 cm 30 cm15 cm     what is the value of f ?  a 133  n b 1 5 0  n c 3 0 0  n d 400  n      9 a ball of mass m falls vertically and hits a hard surface.    its speed on hitting the surface is v1.    it rebounds vertically upwards with speed v2.    what is the change in momentum of the ball?  a mv1 b mv2 c m(v1 + v2) d m(v2 \u2013 v1)    10 an object of mass 4.5  kg is travelling at 7.0  m / s.    how much kinetic energy does the object have?  a 16  j b 32  j c 110  j d 220  j    11 a number of ways in which we use energy are listed.    in which is the ultimate source of energy not the sun?  a energy is provided by a horse to pull a cart.  b energy is provided by hydroelectric generators to heat a house .  c energy is provided by a nuclear power station.  d energy is provided by a windmill to pump water to a fountain. ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20 [turn over  12 to calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the fo rce must be known.    what else needs to be known to calculate the power?     the distance that the force  moves the object the time for which the  force acts on the object   a \u0016 \u0016 key  b \u0016 \u001a \u0016 = needed  c \u001a \u0016 \u001a = not needed  d \u001a \u001a      13 a student calculates the pressure due to the liquid at point x .    liquid x     the student takes four measurements.    1 density of the liquid  2 temperature of the liquid  3 depth of point x below the surface of the liquid  4 surface area of the liquid    which measurements must the student use in her pressure calcula tion?  a 3 and 4 b 1 and 3 c 1 and 2 d 2 and 3     14 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?    d cb amercury  ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  15 a student splashes water on to her face. here are three statem ents about the effects.    p the water uses energy to evaporate.  q the water gains energy from the student.  r the face of the student cools.    which statements are correct?  a p and q only b p and r only c q and r only d p, q and r    16 equal volumes of solids and liquids experience different chang e s  o f  v o l u m e  w h e n  t h e y  a r e   heated through the same temperature range.    what is the reason for this?  a the average increase in separation of the particles in a liquid  is greater than the average  increase in separation of those in a solid.  b the average increase in separation of the particles in a liquid  is less than the average  increase in separation of those in a solid.  c the particles in liquids expand by less than those in solids.  d the particles in liquids expand by more than those in solids.    17 which physical property changes when temperature is measured wi th a liquid-in-glass  thermometer?  a electromotive force  b pressure  c resistance  d volume    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20 [turn over  18 the diagram shows steam being passed into water to raise the t emperature of the water.    steam from steam generato r water     the specific latent heat of steam is 2200  j / g.    the specific heat capacity of water is 4.2  j / (g \uf0b0c).    the mass of water being heated is 490  g.    which mass of steam must be passed into the water to raise the water temperature from 19  \uf0b0c to  100  \uf0b0c?  a 1 9  g b 7 6  g c 8 0  g d 9 5  g    19 the diagram shows the view of a room heated by a radiator. the  arrowed line from x to y is the  path of the convection current in the air.    xy radiatorceiling floor     which row about the air temperature and the air density at x an d at y is correct?     air temperature air density  a higher at x higher at x  b higher at x higher at y  c higher at y higher at y  d higher at y higher at x     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  20 a warm dark-coloured surface emits radiation. it is decided to  increase the amount of radiation  produced.    three suggestions are made.    1 make the surface hotter.  2 colour the surface white. 3 increase the area of the surface.    which suggestions are correct?  a 1 only b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     21 which row correctly describes light waves?     wave type direction of vibrations  a longitudinal parallel to direction of wave travel  b longitudinal perpendicular to direction of wave travel  c transverse parallel to direction of wave travel  d transverse perpendicular to direction of wave travel      22 a water wave has a speed of 2.0  m / s.    4.0 complete waves pass a point every 10 seconds.    what is the wavelength of the wave?  a 0.50  m b 0.80  m c 5.0  m d 8.0  m     23 a driver sits in a car. she has a rear-view plane mirror 0.5  m in front of her. a bus is 7.5  m behind  the driver.    driver carbus mirror    the driver looks at the image of the bus in her mirror.    how far is the image away from her?  a 1 . 0  m b 7 . 5  m c 8 . 0  m d 8 . 5  m    ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20 [turn over  24 the diagram shows white light passing through a prism.    red violet white light    which description of what happens as the light passes into the prism is correct?  a the speed of the red light is less than the speed of the violet  light and the red light is the  least refracted.  b the speed of the red light is greater than the speed of the vio let light and the red light is the  least refracted.  c the speed of the violet light is less than the speed of the red  light and the violet light is the  least refracted.  d the speed of the violet light is greater than the speed of the red light and the violet light is the  least refracted.    25 the diagram shows three types of electromagnetic radiation lis ted in a particular order. the  electromagnetic radiation is travelling in a vacuum.    microwaves infrared x-rays    which quantities increase in magnitude going from left to right  across the list?  a frequency only  b neither speed nor frequency  c speed and frequency  d speed only    26 a sound wave travels through air.    what name is given to a region in which the air molecules are f urther apart than normal?  a compression  b contraction  c rarefaction  d vacuum    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  27 a police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy tr affic. a pedestrian notices that,  although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, th e pitch varies.    which row describes the amplitude and the frequency of the soun d?     amplitude frequency  a constant constant  b constant varying  c varying constant  d varying varying      28 a piece of steel is slightly magnetised. it is hit several tim es with a hammer.    what effect will this have on the steel?     the steel is parallel to  a strong magnetic field the steel is at right-angles  to a weak magnetic field  a it becomes magnetised more strongly it becomes magnetised more strongly  b it becomes magnetised more strongly it loses its magnetism  c it loses its magnetism it becomes magnetised more strongly  d it loses its magnetism it loses its magnetism     29 a negatively charged cloud passes over a tall steel-framed bui lding. a charge is induced on the  building by the cloud because charges flow through the building .    \u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013 earthcloud tall building     what charge is induced on the building and in which direction d o the charge carriers move?     charge induced  on building direction of charge flow  a positive from the building to earth  b positive from earth to the building  c negative from the building to earth  d negative from earth to the building ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20 [turn over  30 electromotive force (e.m.f.) is defined in terms of the energy  supplied in driving which physical  quantity around a complete circuit?  a c h a r g e   b current  c potential difference (p.d.)  d power     31 a student uses four ammeters p, q, r and s to measure the curre nt in different parts of the  circuit shown.    a a a apq r s     which two ammeters read the largest current?  a p and q b p and r c r and q d r and s    32 three statements about a relay are given.    1 a relay has a coil that becomes a temporary magnet when in op eration.  2 a large current in a relay coil is used to switch off a small er current.  3 a small current in a relay coil is used to switch on a larger  current.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 2 and 3 only c 1 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  33 which combination of logic gates gives the truth table shown?    inputs output  x y z  0 0 1  0 1 1  1 0 1  1 1 0    x yza cb dx yz x yzx yz       34 graph x shows the output from an a.c. generator.    p.d. time0 0xy     which changes can be made so that the generator produces graph y?  a decrease the magnetic field strength and decrease the speed of rotation only.  b increase the magnetic field strength and decrease the number of  coils only.  c increase the number of coils only.  d increase the speed of rotation only.     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20 [turn over  35 a transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240  v a.c. into 4800  v a.c..    npns 240  v a.c. 4800  v a.c.     which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?     number of turns  on primary coil np number of turns  on secondary coil ns  a 50 1  000  b 240 48  000  c 480 24  d 2000 100     36 the diagram shows a wire carrying a current in the direction sh own. there is a magnetic field  acting from left to right. the wire experiences a force acting out of the page.    wire direction of magnetic fielddirectionof current     the current is now reversed.    in which direction does the force on the wire now act?  a into the page  b out of the page  c to the left  d to the right    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  37 which statement is correct for the nucleus of any atom?  a the nucleus contains electrons, neutrons and protons.  b the nucleus contains the same number of protons as neutrons.  c the nucleus has a total charge of zero.  d the nucleus is very small compar ed with the size of the atom.      38 how many protons and how many neutrons are in a nucleus of              ?     protons neutrons  a 90 144  b 90 234  c 144 90  d 234 90      39 which statement about \uf067-rays is correct?  a they are deflected by both electric and magnetic fields.  b they are deflected by magnetic fields but not by electric field s.  c they are deflected by electric fields but not by magnetic field s.  d they are not deflected either by electric fields or by magnetic  fields.      40 which equation represents the \uf062-decay of lead-209?  209pb82209bi830e\u20131+ a /g111 209pb82209tl810e\u20131+ b /g111 209pb82209bi830e\u20131+ c /g111 209pb82209tl810e\u20131+ d /g111      234th90",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  blank page",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2020 0625/23/o/n/20  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122physics  0625/31 paper 3 theory (core)  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. dc (ce/cgw) 196073/5 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over *0925917632*",
            "2": "2 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 student p and student q run in a 100  m race.  fig. 1.1 shows the distance\u2013time graph for each student during the race. 0 2.0020406080100 key4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 time  / sdistance  / m student p student q fig. 1.1  (a) determine the time taken for student q to run 100  m.  time =  ..  s [1]  (b) determine the distance between the two students as q reaches 100  m.  distance =  .  m [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) calculate the average speed of student q during the 100  m race.  average speed =  .  m / s [3]  (d) state which student has the faster speed between 3.0  s and 6.0  s.   explain how fig.  1.1 allows you to compare speeds without calculation.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/   o/   n/20 \u00a9 ucles 20202 fig. 2.1 shows a beaker containing liquid on a top pan balance. liquid fig. 2.1  the mass of the empty beaker is 400 g.  (a) using the information in fig. 2.1, determine the mass of the liquid in the beaker.   mass =  ..  g [1]  (b) the beaker contains 750 cm3 of liquid.   calculate the density of the liquid.  density =  ..  g / cm3 [3]  (c) calculate the weight of the empty beaker.  weight =  .  n [4]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows three horizontal forces acting on a car as it moves along a straight road.  the horizontal forces act along the same straight line. 900  n 300  n250  n fig. 3.1  (a) (i) calculate the size of the resultant horizontal force on the car and state its direction.  size of resultant force =  ...  n  direction of resultant force  ...  [3]   (ii) the driver presses the brake pedal and the car slows down.    as the car slows down, the kinetic energy of the car decreases by 100  kj.    describe and explain what happens to this 100  kj of energy.  ...  .  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) fig. 3.2 shows the force applied to the brake pedal by the driver\u2019s foot. pivot brake pedal35 n20 cm fig. 3.2   calculate the moment of the force about the pivot. include the unit.  moment = . unit   [4]  [total: 9]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4 electrical energy is provided to homes and industry from a coal-fired power station.  (a) the main stages in the operation of a coal-fired power station are listed below.   they are not in the correct order.   a the boiler produces steam.     b the turbine turns a generator.    c thermal energy transfers to water in a boiler.    d chemical energy in coal transfers to thermal energy.    e the generator produces electrical energy.    f steam turns a turbine.    g coal burns in a furnace.   complete the flow chart to describe how a coal-fired power station works.   insert the missing letters in the empty boxes. g c f  [3]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) some people are against the use of coal-fired power stations.   give two environmental problems caused by coal-fired power stations. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (c) in the power station, a conveyor belt lifts coal from a coal supply to a furnace. an electric  motor moves the conveyor belt. fig. 4.1 shows this arrangement. coal supply conveyor belt coal input to furnace fig. 4.1   the speed of the electric motor increases and the coal supply rate is increased. the conveyor  belt lifts more coal each second. state the effect, if any, of increasing the motor speed on:   (i) the work done on each kilogram of coal  .  [1]   (ii) the output power of the motor.  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5 fig. 5.1 shows a steel container fitted with a liquid manometer. there is a gas in the container. steel containersealed lid mercuryliquid manometer 100  mm gas bench fig. 5.1  (a) (i) the area of the steel container in contact with the bench is 80  cm2. the total weight of  the steel container and its contents is 60  n.    calculate the pressure that the steel container exerts on the bench.  pressure on the bench =  .  n / cm2 [3]   (ii) atmospheric pressure is equal to 760  mm of mercury (mm  hg).    determine the pressure inside the container in mm  hg.  pressure =  .  mm hg [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) the temperature of the gas inside the steel container decreases.   state and explain how the pressure of the gas changes as the temperature of the gas  decreases.   use your ideas about molecules in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 6 (a) fig. 6.1 represents three changes of state. each pair of diagrams a, b and c shows the  arrangement of molecules in a substance before and after it changes state. before a b  cafter fig. 6.1   give the term used for each change of state.   a ...   b ...   c ...  [3]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) a student attaches a liquid-in-glass thermometer to a ruler. the thermometer does not have a  marked scale. fig. 6.2 shows the arrangement. ruler thermometer mercury level 0123456789101112131415cm fig. 6.2   the student places the thermometer in steam. the mercury rises to 11  cm on the ruler.   the student places the thermometer in melting ice. the mercury decreases to 1  cm on the  ruler.   determine the temperature indicated by the mercury level in fig. 6.2.  temperature =    \u00b0c [3]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light incident on a plane mirror at point x. 40\u00b0 ray of lightxplane mirror fig. 7.1  (not to scale)   (i) determine the value of the angle of reflection for the ray of light at point x.  .  [1]   (ii) on fig. 7.1: \u2022 draw the normal at point x and label the normal with the letter n \u2022 draw the ray reflected from point x.  [2]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) fig. 7.2 shows how a converging lens forms an image of an object. 28 cm 12 cm 9.0 cm object image fig. 7.2  (not to scale)   (i) determine the focal length of the lens.  focal length =  ...  cm [1]   (ii) determine the distance of the image from the lens.  distance =  ...  cm [1]   (iii) describe the nature of the image formed by the lens in fig. 7.2.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 8 fig. 8.1 shows a mobile (cell) phone. fig. 8.1  (a) (i) state the type of electromagnetic wave used for the mobile phone signal.  .  [1]   (ii) the screen of the mobile phone emits visible light. state one type of electromagnetic  wave with a shorter wavelength than visible light.  .  [1]  (b) the mobile phone produces sound waves.   (i) state the range of audible frequencies for a healthy human ear. include the unit.  .  [2]   (ii) the ring tone of the mobile phone consists of two musical notes, note a and note b.    note a is louder and is higher in pitch than note b.    fig. 8.2 shows note a displayed on an oscilloscope screen. fig. 8.2    note b is displayed on the same oscilloscope screen as note a. describe the differences  between the wave for note b and the wave for note a. you may draw on fig. 8.2 to show  the differences.  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 9 a student has a permanent bar magnet and two metal bars, as shown in fig. 9.1. p qn metal bar pqpermanent bar magnet metal bar rssr s fig. 9.1  the student tests bar pq and bar rs separately. he holds the n pole of the permanent bar magnet  close to each end of each metal bar. table 9.1 shows the results of the tests. table 9.1 end of metal bar result of test with  n pole p attracted q repelled r attracted s attracted  deduce whether each metal bar is a magnet, an unmagnetised magnetic material or a  non-magnetic material.  give a reason for each of your answers. 1. metal bar pq    ...  ... 2. metal bar rs  .  ...  ... [4]  [total: 4]",
            "17": "17 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 10 a student determines the resistance of a piece of metal wire xy.  fig. 10.1 shows the wire connected in the circuit. a xvariable resistor wirey fig. 10.1  (a) (i) the student measures the potential difference (p.d.) across the wire xy.    on fig.  10.1, show the voltmeter correctly connected. use the correct symbol.  [1]   (ii) there is a current in the wire. state the name of the particles that flow through the wire.  .  [1]   (iii) the student removes wire xy and replaces it with another wire cd. wire cd is the same  length and is made of the same material as wire xy, but thinner.    state any difference between the current in wire cd and the current in wire xy. explain  your answer.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (iv) state the unit used for the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery.  .  [1]",
            "18": "18 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) (i) the resistance of wire cd is 8.7  \u03c9 and the resistance of the variable resistor is 7.4  \u03c9.    determine the combined resistance of the wire cd and the variable resistor.  resistance =  .  \u03c9\u2002[1]   (ii) the current in the variable resistor is 0.40  a.    state the current in wire cd.  current =  ..  a [1]  [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 11 (a) fig. 11.1 represents the particles in a neutral lithium atom. orbits fig. 11.1   use the information in fig. 11.1 about the lithium atom to answer (a)(i) , (a)(ii)  and (a)(iii) .   (i) determine the number of electrons.  ..  [1]   (ii) determine the value of the nucleon number.    [1]   (iii) determine the number of neutrons.  ..  [1]  (b) the count rate of a radioactive sample is 2400 counts per minute at 10  am on one day. the  half-life of the sample is two days.   predict the count rate at 10  am four days later.  count rate =  ...  counts per minute  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "20": "20 0625/31/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.12 (a) fig. 12.1 shows two circuits, a and b, linked by a relay. relay heater relay switch rswitch s relay coil circuit a circuit b120  v a.c.6 v+ - fig. 12.1   describe what happens in the two circuits when switch s is closed.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) another circuit includes a transformer. the input voltage of the transformer is 120  v a.c.   the input coil has 480 turns of wire and the output coil has 60 turns of wire.   calculate the output voltage of the transformer.  output voltage =  ..  v [3]  [total: 6]"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated. *1462243547* physics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core)  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (lk/cgw) 196074/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 fig. 1.1 shows a box attached to a parachute. the box and the parachute are falling through the  air. 16.0  n boxparachute 2.5 n 20.0  n fig. 1.1  (a)  fig. 1.1 shows three  vertical forces acting on the box and the parachute.   (i) calculate the resultant vertical force and state its direction.     resultant vertical force = ... n     direction ...  [3]   (ii) suggest and explain what happens to the size of the upward vertical force on the  parachute if the area of the parachute used is increased. suggestion  . explanation    ...  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) fig. 1.2 shows the speed\u2013time graph for the box before  the parachute is opened. 051015202530354045 0 10 20 30 40 time  / sspeed m / s fig. 1.2   (i) determine the time when the speed of the box is 30  m / s.  time =  ..  s [1]   (ii) deduce the size of the resultant vertical force on the box when the time is 35  s. explain  your answer. size of resultant vertical force   explanation    ...  [2]   (iii) calculate the distance the box moves between time = 30  s and time = 40  s.  distance =  .  m [3]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 a car driver needs to remove one of the wheels on his car. he puts a spanner on a wheel nut. spanner50 cm wheel nutwheel tyre200  n fig. 2.1  (a) the driver applies a force of 200  n, as shown in fig. 2.1.   calculate the moment of the 200  n force about the centre of the wheel nut.  moment of force =    n cm [3]  (b) the moment in (a) does not release the wheel nut. the driver cannot  increase the force but  can increase its moment.   state and explain how the driver can increase the moment of the force. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  (c) the driver releases a second wheel nut in a shorter time than the first wheel nut. the driver  uses the same amount of energy in releasing both wheel nuts.   less than          the same as          greater than   complete the sentences using the phrases in the box. each phrase may be used once, more  than once or not at all.   the work done in releasing the second wheel nut is ... the work  done in releasing the first wheel nut.   the power produced in releasing the second wheel nut is ... the  power produced in releasing the first wheel nut.  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows a mercury barometer. mercury benchglass containerx 755  mm 50 mm235  mm fig. 3.1  (a) (i) determine the atmospheric pressure indicated by the barometer. include the unit.  atmospheric pressure = .  unit .  [2]   (ii) state what is in the space labelled x above the mercury in the tube.  .  [1]  (b)  the total weight of the mercury barometer is 38  n.   the area of the glass container in contact with the bench is 200  cm2.   calculate the pressure of the mercury barometer on the bench.  pressure =  .  n / cm2 [3]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 a rigid container is filled with a gas.  (a) describe the movement and arrangement of the gas molecules in the container.  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the gas in the container is heated. the volume of the gas does not change.   state and explain the change in pressure of the gas as the temperature of the gas increases.   use your ideas about molecules in your answer.   ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6] ",
            "7": "7 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5 a beaker contains water. some of the water evaporates.  (a) describe and explain how the water evaporates. use your ideas about molecules.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) evaporation changes the temperature of the water that remains in the beaker.   state and explain the change in temperature of the water due to evaporation.  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 5]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 fig. 6.1 shows equipment used to demonstrate convection in air. a burning candle is placed  beneath glass tube a. glass tube a burning candle glassboxglass tube b fig. 6.1  (a) the arrows in fig. 6.1 show the directions in which air moves.    explain why the air moves as shown in fig. 6.1.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) a student has four rods of identical size. the rods are made of copper, brass, iron and glass.   describe an experiment to compare thermal conduction along the rods.   you may draw a labelled diagram to help with your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 7 a teacher uses a long spring to demonstrate wave motion. she makes a wave move along the  coils of the spring.  fig. 7.1 shows the wave on the spring.  direction of wave travel movement of coils fig. 7.1  (a) explain why the type of wave in fig. 7.1 is a longitudinal wave.  ...  .  [2]  (b) measure the wavelength of the wave shown in fig. 7.1.  wavelength =   ..  cm [1]  (c) state what is meant by the frequency of a wave.  ...  .  [2]  (d)  the wave in fig. 7.1 travels 25  cm in 0.20  s.    calculate the speed of the wave.  speed =    cm / s [3]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 8 fig. 8.1 shows a converging lens and an object. the side of each square represents 0.5  cm. lens object fig. 8.1  (a) using fig. 8.1, determine the distance of the object from the centre of the lens.  distance =  ...  cm [2]  (b) fig. 8.2 shows another lens forming the image iy of object op.  p o yi fig. 8.2   (i) on fig. 8.2, draw an arrow to represent the focal length of the lens. label this arrow f.  [2]   (ii) circle two words or phrases from those shown to describe the image formed in fig. 8.2.      enlarged    upright    inverted    same size    diminished  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 9 a student tests whether a bar magnet affects three different materials.  fig. 9.1 shows the bar magnet and a sample of each material a, b and c. na b cs fig. 9.1  the student tests each sample by holding each pole of the magnet close to one end of the sample.  table 9.1 shows his observations. table 9.1 sample effect of n pole effect of s pole a attraction attraction b no effect no effect c attraction repulsion  (a) using the information in table 9.1, draw a straight line from each sample to its correct  property. draw three  lines. sample property a magnetic and magnetised b magnetic but not magnetised c non-magnetic    [2]  (b) describe one method of producing a magnet from a bar of unmagnetised steel.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) another student does an experiment with some electrostatically charged plastic rods.   fig. 9.2 shows the student\u2019s arrangement. nylon threadnegatively charged plastic rod negatively charged plastic rod fig. 9.2   describe and explain what happens as the student brings one negatively charged rod close  to the other negatively charged rod.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 10 fig. 10.1 shows a metal kettle used for heating water. the kettle is connected to the mains power  supply. the metal case is connected to earth. a fault causes the live wire to come loose and touch  the metal case, as shown.  live wire touching the metal case fuse live wire neutral wireheating element earth wire fig. 10.1  (a) (i) the kettle is switched on. there is a very large electric current in the live wire.    explain why this large electric current can be dangerous.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) explain how a fuse helps to protect against the danger of a large electric current.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (iii) explain why the kettle is not safe to use with the fuse connected into the neutral wire  instead of the live wire.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the current in a device when operating normally is 3.1  a.   state a suitable value for the fuse.   choose one of these values: 3  a, 5 a, 10  a and 13  a.  .  [1]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) a small kettle has a potential difference (p.d.) of 12  v (d.c.) across its heating element. the  current in the heating element is 2.5  a.   calculate the resistance of the heating element.  resistance of the heating element =  .  \u03c9 [3]  [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 11 fig. 11.1 represents a transformer. the primary coil has 300 turns and the secondary coil has  30 turns. the input voltage is 230  v a.c. core secondary coil 30 turnsprimary coil 300 turns 230  v fig. 11.1  (a) calculate the voltage across the secondary coil.  voltage =  ..  v [3]  (b) state a suitable material for the core of the transformer.  .  [1]  (c) some transformers produce high electrical voltage for the transmission of electrical energy.   describe two advantages of high-voltage transmission. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.12 a teacher is investigating radioactivity.  the teacher measures the background radiation in the laboratory.  (a) state one source of background radiation.   .  [1]  (b) a teacher measures the count rate of a radioactive isotope.   fig. 12.1 shows the graph of her results. 0 100100200300400 20 30 40 time  / mincount rate counts  / min fig. 12.1   (i) determine the half-life of the radioactive isotope. use information from fig. 12.1.     show on fig. 12.1 how you obtained your value.  half-life =  .  minutes  [3]   (ii) the radioactive isotope emits \u03b3-radiation.    describe one method of safely storing the radioactive isotope.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 5] "
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated. *1983397638*cambridge igcse\u2122physics  0625/33 paper 3 theory (core)  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. dc (ce/cgw) 196075/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 (a) fig. 1.1 shows a lorry moving on a straight road. the arrows represent the horizontal forces  acting on the lorry. these forces act along the same straight line. 1500  n1000  n500  n fig. 1.1   (i) calculate the size of the resultant horizontal force on the lorry.  size of resultant force =  .  n [2]   (ii) describe the effect of a horizontal resultant force of zero on the speed of the lorry.    put a tick ( 3) in one box.     speed increases to a higher constant speed     speed stays the same     speed decreases to a lower constant speed     speed decreases to zero  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/   o/   n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over (b) the speed of the motorcycle in fig. 1.2 is 20 m / s. fig. 1.2   the rider reacts to a sudden change in the traffic ahead.   he stops as quickly as possible by applying the brakes.   the total stopping distance is made up of the distance travelled while the rider is reacting and  the distance travelled when the brakes are applied.   fig. 1.3 shows information about stopping when the speed of the motorcycle is 20 m / s. 15 m 38 m distance travelled while reactingdistance travelled while braking fig. 1.3   (i) calculate the total stopping distance when the speed of the motorcycle is 20 m / s.  total stopping distance =  .  m [1]   (ii) suggest one factor that could increase the total stopping distance.  .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 (a) fig. 2.1 shows two children sitting on a see-saw. 250  n125  nx 0.5 mchild a child b pivotbeam fig. 2.1 (not to scale)   (i) the weight of child a is 125  n.    calculate the mass of child a. include the unit in your answer.  mass of child a =  ...  unit ..  [3]   (ii) fig. 2.1 shows child a and child b sitting in positions which balance the see-saw  horizontally.    using the information in fig. 2.1, determine the distance x.  distance x =  .  m [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) the person in fig. 2.2 is pushing a child on a swing. fig. 2.2   state the name of the force that acts against the motion of the swing.  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 (a) a man lifts 40 blocks onto a platform, as shown in fig. 3.1.   he lifts 10 blocks at once and does this four times.   a machine can lift 40 blocks at once onto the same platform, as shown in fig. 3.2. man10 blocks 40 blocksplatform machine  fig. 3.1  fig. 3.2   (i) state the term used for energy gained by the blocks when they are lifted onto the  platform.  .  [1]   (ii) state how the energy gained by 40 blocks when lifted by the man compares with the  energy gained by 40 blocks when lifted by the machine.  ...  .  [1]  (b) here are descriptions of four situations.   indicate the situations in which work is done.   put a tick ( 3) in each correct box. a child is sitting at the top of the stairs. a picture is hanging on a wall. a student is stretching a spring. a person is moving a chair. [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) electrical appliances transfer energy. some of the energy transferred is useful.   draw a line from each electrical appliance to the correct useful energy output.   only draw three  lines. torchelectrical appliance useful energy output sound radio electric fanlight chemical kinetic  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 (a) some vehicles have wide tyres so that they can drive over soft mud.   explain why the wide tyres enable these vehicles to drive over soft mud.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) fig. 4.1 shows a mercury barometer. containerglass tubemercuryy fig. 4.1   (i) state what is in the space at y above the mercury.  .  [1]   (ii) complete the following statement to describe the use of a mercury barometer. a mercury barometer measures    .  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) the diagram in fig. 4.2 shows a tall can containing water.   the can has three identical holes 1, 2 and 3 on one side, one above the other in a vertical  line, as shown in fig. 4.2.   water is shown flowing out of hole 2 and hole 3. 1 2stream of water from hole 2 stream of water from hole 3 container3watercan bench fig. 4.2   (i) state how the pressure of the water at hole 2 compares with the pressure of the water at  hole 3.  .  [1]   (ii) draw on fig. 4.2 to show the stream of water flowing from hole 1.  [1] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows diagrams of the arrangement of molecules in three states of matter and shows  descriptions of how the molecules move. arrangement of molecules state of matter movement of molecules solid do not move liquidmove around while in contact with other molecules gasvibrate about fixed positionsmove around freely fig. 5.1   on fig. 5.1, draw a line: \u2022 from each arrangement of molecules to the correct state of matter \u2022 from the state of matter to the correct description of the movement of molecules.  [4]  (b) a bicycle tyre contains air. the tyre is sealed and does not leak.   the temperature of the air in the tyre increases by 20  \u00b0c. the volume of the tyre does not  change.   (i) state how the increase in temperature affects the motion of the air molecules in the tyre.  .  [1]   (ii) state how the increase in temperature changes the pressure of the air in the tyre.  .  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) fig. 5.2 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. liquidnarrow tube   fig. 5.2   (i) add the missing labels to fig. 5.2.  [2]   (ii) the thermometer in fig. 5.2 is designed to measure a range of temperatures from 0  \u00b0c  to 100  \u00b0c.    state the name of a suitable liquid for use in this thermometer.  .  [1]   (iii) describe and explain the changes in the thermometer in fig. 5.2 when the temperature  of the liquid increases.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows an electric kettle containing cold water. metal heating elementcold water fig. 6.1   the metal heating element heats the water.   explain how thermal energy from the heating element is transferred to all the water in the  kettle.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) fig. 6.2 shows two similar metal cans. the only difference is the surface. can a has a dull  black surface and can b has a shiny white surface.  can ashiny white surface can bdull black surface fig. 6.2   (i) a student fills each can with hot water. the initial temperature of the water is 85  \u00b0c.    the student records the temperature of the water in each can every 30 seconds for 10  minutes.    suggest which can of water will cool more quickly. give a reason for your answer. suggestion  . reason  ...  ... [2]   (ii) suggest and explain two changes to can b that reduce thermal energy loss to the  surroundings. change 1  ...  ...  ... change 2  ...  ...  ... [4] [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 7 (a) complete the following sentences about light.   use words from the list. atomic   blue  three   electromagnetic electronic   violet   five  red  seven   light is part of a spectrum of radiation called the  spectrum.   a glass prism disperses white light into  colours.   the colour of light that is refracted least is  . [3]  (b) fig. 7.1 shows light reflected by a plane mirror. plane mirrorray of lightnormal a dbc fig. 7.1   (i) state which angle a, b, c or d is the angle of incidence.  ...  [1]   (ii) state which angle a, b, c or d is the angle of reflection.    [1]  [total: 5]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows the electrical symbols for some circuit components.   identify the circuit component for each electrical symbol.   draw a line from each electrical symbol to the name of the circuit component. fusecircuit component electrical symbol lamp buzzer thermistor fig. 8.1  [3]  (b) a student connects the circuit shown in fig. 8.2. the value of the fixed resistor is 20  \u03c9. a 20 \u03c9 fig. 8.2   the switch is closed. the reading on the ammeter is 0.30  a.   (i) calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the fixed resistor.   potential difference =  ..  v [3]   (ii) state the name of the device for measuring potential difference.  .  [1]   (iii) show how the student connects the device stated in (b)(ii)  to measure the p.d. across  the fixed resistor. draw the correct symbol and connections on fig.  8.2. [1] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 9 (a) a clamp and stand hold a soft-iron bar above a bench. a coil of wire is wrapped round the  soft-iron bar. the coil of wire is part of an electric circuit. fig. 9.1 shows the arrangement. benchsoft-iron  discssoft-iron bar clamp and  stand fig. 9.1   switch s is closed. a student holds a soft-iron disc close to the bar and releases the disc. the  disc becomes attached to the bar as shown in fig. 9.1.   explain why the soft-iron disc is attracted to the soft-iron bar.  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) the circuit in fig. 9.1 is used to operate a bell in a different circuit, as shown in fig. 9.2. pivot bellcontactssoft-iron bar clamp and  stand insulatorsoft-iron arms fig. 9.2   (i) switch s is closed. the soft-iron arm is attracted to the soft-iron bar.    explain why the bell operates when the switch s is opened.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]   (ii) the switch s is closed. the soft-iron arm is attracted to the soft-iron bar.    the battery in the circuit containing the soft-iron bar becomes fully discharged.    state and explain whether the bell operates.  ...  .  [1]   [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 (a) describe an experiment to show that a force acts on a current-carrying conductor placed in a  magnetic field. you may draw a diagram to help your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) a current in a wire can cause the wire to get hot and melt the wire.   describe how to reduce the heating effect of a current.  ...  .  [1] [total: 5]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 11 (a) fig. 11.1 represents the structure of four atoms p, q, r and s. p+ q r sprotonkey electron neutron + + +++ + ++ fig. 11.1  state which two atoms are isotopes of the same element and explain your answer.  .. and .. explanation  ...  ..  [2]  (b) radiographers use x-ray machines in hospitals. x-rays can cause damage to living things.   (i) state an example of the damage that may be caused by x-rays.   .  [1]   (ii) state and explain how radiographers can be protected from damage caused by x-rays.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. (c) a radioactive source is placed near to a detector, as shown in fig. 11.2.   the meter shows a reading of 239 counts per second. meter detector 239radioactive source fig. 11.2   a sheet of paper is placed between the detector and the radioactive source. the meter shows  a reading of 240 counts per second.   the sheet of paper is removed and a thin sheet of aluminium is placed between the detector  and the radioactive source. the meter shows a reading of 3 counts per second.   (i) deduce the type of radiation emitted by the radioactive source.  .  [1]   (ii) the radioactive source is removed. the meter shows a reading of 3 counts per second.    state why the meter does not show a reading of zero counts per second.  .  [1] [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (cj/cgw) 196148/2 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/41 paper 4 theory (extended)  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *3081870437*",
            "2": "2 0625/41/   o/   n/20 \u00a9 ucles 20201 fig. 1.1 shows an ice-hockey player moving on ice. he is preparing to hit the solid disc called a  puck. hockey stickice-hockey player discice fig. 1.1  the disc of mass 0.16 kg is moving horizontally across the surface of the ice at a speed of 15 m / s.  (a) calculate the magnitude of the momentum of the disc.  magnitude of momentum =  .  [2]  (b) the hockey player strikes the disc with his hockey stick and the momentum of the disc  changes. the disc gains momentum of 3.0 kg m / s at 45\u00b0 to the original direction of travel of  the disc, as shown in fig. 1.2.  discdirection of momentum gained 45\u00b0 original direction of travel fig. 1.2 (view from above)",
            "3": "3 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (i) state the magnitude of the impulse exerted on the disc and the direction, in degrees, of  the impulse relative to the original direction of travel.  magnitude of impulse =  ...  direction of impulse:     \u00b0 to original direction   [1]   (ii) determine the magnitude of the new momentum of the disc and its new direction relative  to the original direction of travel by drawing a scale diagram.  magnitude of new momentum =  ...    direction of new momentum:    ...  \u00b0 to original direction  [4]  [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 a vertical tube contains a liquid. a metal ball is held at rest by a thread just below the surface of  the liquid, as shown in fig. 2.1.  tube liquidthread metal ball fig. 2.1 (not to scale)  the diameter of the tube is much greater than the diameter of the ball. the ball is released and it  accelerates downwards uniformly for a short period of time.  (a) describe what happens to the velocity of the ball in the short period of time as it accelerates  downwards uniformly.  ...  .  [2]  (b) the ball reaches terminal velocity.   describe and explain the motion of the ball from when it is released until it reaches terminal  velocity.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) the metal ball has a mass of 2.1  g. it falls a distance of 0.80  m between being released and  reaching the bottom of the tube.   (i) calculate the gravitational potential energy transferred from the ball as it falls.  gravitational potential energy transferred =  .  [2]   (ii) when the ball reaches the bottom of the tube, it has a speed of 1.2  m / s. calculate the  kinetic energy of the ball at the bottom of the tube.  kinetic energy =  .  [3]   (iii) explain why the value calculated in (c)(i)  is different from that calculated in (c)(ii) .  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 a u-shaped tube of constant cross-sectional area contains water of density 1000  kg / m3. both  sides of the u-tube are open to the atmosphere.  fig. 3.1 shows that the water levels in the two sides of the tube are equal. stopper 0.200  mrubber tubing connected to gas supply fig. 3.1                                  fig. 3.2  the atmospheric pressure is 1.00 \u00d7 105 pa.  the left-hand side of the tube is now connected to a gas supply using a length of rubber tubing.  this causes the level of the water in the left-hand side of the tube to drop by 0.200  m, as shown in  fig. 3.2.  (a) calculate the pressure of the gas supply. give your answer to 3 significant figures.  pressure =  .  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) fig. 3.3 shows that the gas supply is now connected to a cylinder that contains a piston. cylinder open to the atmosphererubber tubing connected to gas supply piston fig. 3.3   the pressure of the gas moves the piston to the right.   (i) the area of the piston in contact with the gas is 0.025  m2.    calculate the resultant force on the piston.  resultant force =  .  [2]   (ii) the pressure of the gas causes the piston to move a distance of 0.50  m to the right.     calculate the work done by the gas from the supply on the piston.  work done =  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 a large test-tube contains a liquid at room temperature. an electric heater is immersed in the liquid  and is switched on. thermal energy is supplied to the liquid by the heater. the temperature of the  liquid increases until it reaches its boiling point. the liquid then starts to change into gas.  (a) describe, in terms of molecules and their motion, how a liquid differs from a gas.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) describe what happens to molecules of the liquid as its temperature begins to increase.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) (i) explain, in terms of molecules, why a supply of thermal energy is needed to change the  liquid into a gas.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) the density of the liquid in the test-tube is 0.86  g / cm3. the volume of liquid in the test- tube is 50  cm3.    the liquid reaches its boiling point. it now absorbs 18  000 j of thermal energy and all of  the liquid changes into a gas.    calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of this liquid.  specific latent heat =  .  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 5 a metal container is used to cook food. the metal container has thick walls. hot cooking oil at a  temperature of 120  \u00b0c is poured into the container.  (a) the outside surface of the container gets hot. some thermal energy passes through the metal  because vibrating atoms in the metal collide with neighbouring atoms and transfer energy to  them.   explain how the rest of the thermal energy is conducted through the metal container to the  outside surface by another process.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the outside surface of the container is brightly polished and shiny.   explain how this reduces the power that needs to be supplied to keep the oil at the correct  temperature.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) the metal container is spherical. the spherical container has a smaller surface area than a  long, thin container of the same volume.   explain the advantage of using a spherical container.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 6 fig. 6.1 shows a shallow tank viewed from above. the depth of the water is different in the two  parts of the tank. fig. 6.1 shows the crests and the troughs of a wave that pass from left to right. 45\u00b0 2.6 cmboundary trough crestkey 33\u00b0 fig. 6.1 (not to scale)  as the wave passes from one side to the other, the direction of the wavefronts changes.  (a) explain why the direction of the wavefronts changes in the way shown in fig. 6.1.   ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the speed of the wave in the left-hand part of the tank is 0.39  m / s.   (i) using information from fig. 6.1, determine the frequency of the wave.  frequency =  .  [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) determine the speed of the wave in the right-hand side of the tank.  speed =  .  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 7 (a) a permanent magnet is made from only one material.   underline the material from which it is possible to make a permanent magnet.  [1] aluminium         copper        soft iron        mercury        plastic       steel        uranium   (b) an electron source produces a narrow beam of electrons that all travel at the same speed.   the electron source is placed in a vacuum and the beam of electrons travels vertically  downwards. fig. 7.1 shows the beam of electrons before it passes between the n-pole and  the s-pole of a magnet. s-pole n-poleelectron source beam of electrons fig. 7.1   (i) describe what is meant by the direction of a magnetic field. state the direction of the  magnetic field between the two poles in fig. 7.1.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) describe and explain what happens to the beam of electrons in the magnetic field  between the poles of the magnet in fig. 7.1.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) a beam consists of \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays.   explain how a uniform magnetic field may be used to separate the \u03b1-particles, the \u03b2-particles  and the \u03b3-rays.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 8 (a) explain what is meant by electromotive force  (e.m.f. ).  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) an electric heater contains two heating elements r1 and r2. an electric motor operates a fan.  the fan blows cool air over the heating elements.   fig. 8.1 shows the circuit. 240  v mains supplys1 s2 r1r2s3 m fig. 8.1   the heater is powered by a mains supply of e.m.f. 240  v.   switches s1 and s2 are closed. heating element r1 gets hot. the resistance of r1 is 30  \u03c9.   (i) calculate the current in heating element r1.    current =  .  [1]   (ii) calculate the power produced in heating element r1.     power =  .  [2]   (iii) the resistance of heating element r2 is 60  \u03c9.    switches s1, s2 and s3 are closed.    1.  state and explain how the current in r2 compares with the current in r1.      .      .      ...  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over    2.   the current in the motor is 0.10  a. the cable from the electric heater to the plug for  the mains socket is safe when the current in it is less than 20  a.      suggest and explain a suitable fuse rating for this circuit.      .      .      .      ...  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 9 (a) (i) describe what is observed during  total internal reflection .   ...  .  [1]   (ii) state two conditions required for light to be totally internally reflected.  1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (b) describe and explain the action of optical fibres in communication technology. you may draw  a diagram in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "17": "17 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 a radiation detector is placed on the bench in a laboratory. it detects a background count rate of  40 counts  / minute.  (a) state what is meant by background radiation. suggest one source for it.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) a sample containing atoms of the radioactive isotope polonium-208 is removed from a  lead container and brought close to the detector. the average count rate increases to  890 counts  / minute.   when two sheets of paper are inserted between the sample and the detector, the average  count rate returns to 40 counts  / minute.   polonium-208 is represented by the symbol 208 84po. it decays to an isotope of lead (pb).   (i) deduce the type of radiation emitted by polonium-208. explain your answer.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) write down the nuclide equation for the decay of polonium-208.  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/41/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. blank pages are indicated. *0807678910*cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (cj/cgw) 196149/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended)  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1  a sky-diver jumps out of a hot-air balloon, which is 4000  m above the ground. at time = 30  s, she  opens her parachute.  fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph of her fall. 60 40speed m / s time  / s20 0 0 10 4.020 30 40 50 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) label with the letter x the point on the graph where the sky-diver opens her parachute.  [1]   (ii) label with the letters y and z the two parts of the graph where the sky-diver falls at  terminal velocity.   [1]  (b) describe, in terms of the forces acting on the sky-diver, her motion between leaving the  balloon and opening her parachute.   ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (c) calculate the average speed of the sky-diver in the first 4.0  s of her fall.  average speed =  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 (a) define the moment of a force about a point.  ...  .  [1]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows a uniform rod of wood suspended from a pivot. 0.75  m0.25  m 34\u00b0 centre of masspivot rod of wood fw fig. 2.1  (not to scale)   the rod is held stationary by a horizontal force f acting as shown.    the mass of the rod is 0.080  kg.   calculate:   (i) the weight w of the rod  weight =  ..  [1]   (ii) the moment of w about the pivot  moment =  ..  [2]   (iii) the moment of f about the pivot  moment =  ..  [1]   (iv) the force f.  force =  ..  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) the angle between the rod and the vertical is increased.    state whether the force f needed to hold the rod stationary must be increased, decreased or  stay the same.    explain your answer.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 3 the kinetic energy of air passing through a wind turbine every minute is 720  000 j. the electrical  output of the turbine is 9.0  a at a potential difference (p.d.) of 240  v.   calculate the efficiency (%) of the wind turbine.  efficiency =  ..  % [5]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 fig. 4.1 shows a thermometer. ice cubeswire of material awire of material a wire of material b water at 0  \u00b0c water at 100  \u00b0cv fig. 4.1  the voltmeter reading is 5.4  mv.  (a) state the name of this type of thermometer.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 4.2 shows the same thermometer used to measure the temperature of liquid x.  water at 20  \u00b0cliquid xv fig. 4.2   with the setup in fig. 4.2, the voltmeter reading is 1.7  mv.   calculate the temperature of liquid x measured by the thermometer.  temperature =  .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) suggest an application for which this type of thermometer is more suitable than a liquid-in- glass thermometer.  .  [1]    [total: 4]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 5 (a) (i) define specific latent heat.  ...  .  [2]   (ii) explain the melting of a solid in terms of molecules and energy.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) an electrical heater is used to heat a liquid to its boiling point. fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus. balanceheater elementliquid container 3800  gconnecting wires fig. 5.1   when the liquid is boiling, the heater supplies 1.26  mj of thermal energy. the mass reading  shown on the balance decreases from 3800  g to 2300  g.   calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of the liquid.  specific latent heat =  .  [3]  (c) state and explain a precaution to improve the accuracy of the value of specific latent heat  calculated in (b).  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 shows a transverse wave produced in a string. string fig. 6.1 (full size)  (a) on fig. 6.1:   (i) draw labelled lines to show    1. the amplitude of the wave     2. the wavelength of the wave       [2]    (ii) label a trough with the letter t.  [1]  (b)  a person vibrates one end of the string vertically to produce the wave. he makes 15 complete  oscillations in 60  s.   show that the speed of the wave is 2.0  cm / s.  [3]  (c) state the difference between transverse waves and longitudinal waves. use your ideas about  the direction of oscillations. transverse waves  ..  ... longitudinal waves    ...  [2]    [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 7 fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light passing through an optical fibre.  qp i fig. 7.1  the optical fibre is made of glass that has a refractive index of 1.4.   (a) (i) no light refracts from the fibre at points p and q.     state the name of the process that occurs at p and q.  .  [1]   (ii) calculate the minimum value of angle i for there to be no refraction at point p.   angle =  ..  [2]  (b) state and explain the use of optical fibres in medicine.   ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) the ray of light shown in fig. 7.1 is monochromatic light from a laser.    state what is meant by monochromatic light. use one of the following quantities in your answer. amplitude    brightness    frequency    refractive index    speed  ...  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 8 (a) state and explain why electrical sockets and plugs used outside in a garden need to be  different from those that can be used safely in a room inside a house.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) state and explain why fuses and circuit breakers are installed in electrical circuits connected  to the mains supply.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 4]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a bar magnet and four plotting compasses a, b, c and d.   d bbar magneta c fig. 9.1   on fig. 9.1:   (i) draw an arrow on each of the three plotting compasses b, c and d to show the direction  of the magnetic field  [2]   (ii) label the magnetic poles of the bar magnet n and s.  [1]  (b) describe one method for demagnetising a bar magnet.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) fig. 9.2 represents a current in a wire. the current is into the plane of the paper.    (i) draw the pattern of the magnetic field produced around the wire. show clearly the  direction of the magnetic field. fig. 9.2  [2]   (ii) the direction of the current in the wire is reversed. the magnitude of the current is  unchanged.    state the effect that reversing the current has on the magnetic field produced.     ...  .  [1]   [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 fig. 10.1 shows an incomplete electrical circuit.  2.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c9ec fd a b fig. 10.1  (a) (i) a student completes the circuit and measures the current in the 6.0  \u03c9 resistor.     on fig. 10.1, draw an ammeter symbol in one gap and straight lines to indicate wires in  the other gaps to show how the student should do this.  [1]      (ii) a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0  \u03c9  resistor.      on fig. 10.1, draw a voltmeter symbol connected in the correct position.  [2]   (iii) with the circuit completed, the current in the 2.0  \u03c9 resistor is 2.5  a.     calculate the current in the 6.0  \u03c9 resistor.  current =  .  [4]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) fig. 10.2 shows the same electrical circuit with an alternating current (a.c.) power supply and  a wire in the gap ab. 2.0 \u03c9 6.0 \u03c9 4.0 \u03c9ec fd a b fig. 10.2   on fig. 10.2, draw a diode symbol in one gap and a straight line to indicate a wire in the other  gap so that there is a current from right to left in the 4.0  \u03c9 resistor and an alternating current  in the 2.0  \u03c9 resistor.   [2]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) state two differences between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion. 1    ... 2    ...  [2]  (b) radioactive tracers emitting \u03b3-rays can be used in medicine. the half-life of the source of  these \u03b3-rays is 6 hours.   (i) explain why a source of \u03b3-rays used in this way should not have a half-life shorter or  longer than about 6 hours.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) technetium-99 is a source of \u03b3-rays often used as a radioactive tracer. it is produced  from molybdenum-99 which emits \u03b2-particles. the symbol for technetium is tc and the  symbol for molybdenum is mo.    complete the nuclide equation for this decay.     99  42 mo  . . tc + . . \u03b2  [3]   (iii) technetium-99 is a radioactive nuclide.     state another use of radioactive nuclides in medicine.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 8]"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 20 pages. blank pages are indicated. *0172842249*cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (cj/cgw) 196162/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/43 paper 4 theory (extended)  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 (a) fig. 1.1 shows a trolley travelling down a ramp. xramp ptrolleytape fig. 1.1   the trolley has a piece of paper tape attached to it. the tape passes through a machine  which makes a dot on the tape every 0.02  s.    fig. 1.2 shows a section of the tape. fig. 1.2   (i) state how the dots on the tape show that the trolley was moving with constant speed.  .  [1]   (ii) when the trolley reaches the point p, the ramp is tilted so that the angle x is greater.    describe and explain the change in motion of the trolley. description  .  ... explanation    ...  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) another trolley is released from the top of the ramp.   fig. 1.3 shows the speed\u2013time graph for this trolley. 000.51.0speed m / s time  / s1.5 1.5 0.5 1.0 fig. 1.3   using fig. 1.3, calculate the distance travelled by the trolley in the first 0.5  s.     distance =  .   [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) fig. 1.4 shows a metal ball at rest in a tube of liquid.  tubexliquidmetal ball fig. 1.4   the ball is released and reaches terminal velocity at point x.    explain the motion of the ball as it falls from rest until it reaches point x.   use ideas of force and acceleration in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a cliff edge with water below it. cliffball water115  m fig. 2.1  a ball falls over the edge of the cliff. the mass of the ball is 160  g. the height of the cliff is 115  m.  (a) calculate the vertical speed of the ball as it hits the water. air resistance can be ignored.  speed =  .  [3]  (b) calculate the vertical momentum of the ball as it hits the water.  momentum =  .  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 (a) (i) speed is a scalar quantity.    state one other scalar quantity.  .  [1]   (ii) velocity is a vector quantity.    state one other vector quantity.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a model car travelling at constant speed on a flat circular track. circular trackcar fig. 3.1   the speed of the car is 0.30  m / s. in one complete revolution around the track, the car travels  3.9 m.   (i) calculate the time taken for the car to complete one revolution around the track.  time =  ..  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) on fig. 3.1, draw and label with the letter f an arrow to show the resultant force acting  on the car.  [1]   (iii) the speed of the car increases and at point p on fig. 3.2 the car does not stay on the  track. p fig. 3.2    1. suggest, in terms of the force acting on the car, why the car does not stay on the track  at point p.  ...  .  [1]    2. on fig. 3.2, draw and label an arrow with the letter s to show the direction of motion of  the car as it leaves the track at point p.  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 in fig. 4.1, the circles represent molecules in different states of matter. a b c fig. 4.1   (a) identify the states a, b and c.   a \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..   b \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..   c \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..  [2]  (b) explain, in terms of forces between molecules, why gases expand more than liquids when  they have the same rise in temperature. assume that the pressure remains constant.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) fig. 4.2 shows a cylinder and piston.  cylinder piston gas fig. 4.2   the volume of gas in the cylinder is 3400  cm3. the pressure of the gas in the cylinder is  0.90 \u00d7 105 pa.",
            "9": "9 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (i) the piston is moved to the left and fixed in a new position. the pressure of the gas in  the cylinder increases to 2.5  \u00d7 105 pa. assume that the temperature of the gas does not  change.    calculate the new volume of the gas.   volume =  ..  [3]   (ii) the gas in the cylinder is now heated. the piston remains fixed in the same position as  in (c)(i) .    state and explain, in terms of molecules, any change in the pressure of the gas.  statement  .. explanation    ...  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 5 fig. 5.1 shows two metal plates a and b with a radiant heater placed midway between them.   waxshiny plate dull black plate wax cork cork radiant heatera b fig. 5.1  metal plate a is shiny. metal plate b is dull black. a piece of cork is attached to each plate using  wax. the wax is a solid at room temperature and has a melting point of 37  \u00b0c.  (a) state and explain what happens to the pieces of cork a few minutes after the heater is  switched on.   ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) give the name of the method of transfer of thermal energy in solid metals.  .  [1]  [total: 5]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 6 (a) sound waves consist of compressions and rarefactions.     explain the terms compression  and rarefaction . give your explanation in terms of the spacing  of molecules and the pressure for sound waves in air. compression  .  ... rarefaction  .  ...  [3]  (b) a musical instrument emits a sound with a frequency of 4.4  khz. the speed of sound in air is  340 m / s.   (i) calculate the wavelength of the sound.  wavelength =  ..  [3]   (ii) the frequency of the sound emitted by the instrument is changed to 5.1  khz and the  amplitude of the sound is increased.    without calculation, state what happens to 1. the speed of the sound  .. 2. the wavelength of the sound  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 7 (a) state two uses for infrared radiation. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (b) x-rays are used in hospitals to help treat patients.   suggest and explain three  precautions for the safe use of x-rays. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ... 3.  ...  ...  [3]  (c) (i) state the speed in a vacuum of 1. microwaves  .  [1] 2. x-rays    [1]   (ii) state a possible frequency for an ultrasound wave.  .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 8 (a) (i) fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit. the resistor has a resistance of 4.0  \u03c9. the reading on  the voltmeter is 3.0  v. a v fig. 8.1     calculate the current in the resistor.  current =  ..  [2]   (ii) fig. 8.2 shows the same circuit with one component reversed.  a v fig. 8.2     state the reading on the voltmeter and explain your answer. reading =  ... explanation    ...  [2]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) fig. 8.3 shows the symbol for a logic gate.  xzy fig. 8.3    the truth table for this logic gate is shown in table 8.1.  table 8.1 input x input y output z 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1   state the name of this logic gate. \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026..  [1]  (c) (i) a student designs the circuit shown in fig. 8.4. a bc de fig. 8.4    complete the truth table for this circuit in table 8.2. table 8.2 a b c d e 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1  [3]   (ii) a single logic gate can be used to produce output e in fig. 8.4 with the inputs a and b  shown in table 8.2.       state the name of this logic gate. \u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026\u2026.  [1]  [total: 9]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 9 (a) electrical power is produced in a power station by an alternating current (a.c.) generator.    the output of the generator has a voltage of 22  000 v. the electrical power is transmitted at a  voltage of 400  000 v.   explain why electrical power is transmitted at a voltage of 400  000 v and not 22  000 v.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) a computer contains a transformer.   the input voltage to the transformer is 240  v. the output voltage from the transformer is 20  v  and the output current is 2.3  a.   the efficiency of the transformer is 90%.   calculate the input current to the transformer.  current =  ..  [5]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 10 fig. 10.1 shows a relay. mcircuit b circuit acontacts pivot soft-iron armature fig. 10.1  (a) the switch in circuit a is closed. describe how this operates the motor in circuit b.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the switch in circuit a is opened. the soft-iron armature is replaced with a steel armature.  the switch in circuit a is closed.   explain what happens when the switch in circuit a is then opened.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "17": "17 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 11 (a) fig. 11.1 shows a beam of \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays directed between two metal  plates p and q.   p qbeam of \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles and \u03b3-rays+    +    +    +    +    +    +    +    \u2013    \u2013    \u2013    \u2013    \u2013    \u2013    \u2013    \u2013    fig. 11.1   the metal plates are parallel and there is a large potential difference (p.d.) between them.  plate p is positive and plate q is negative.   on fig. 11.1, draw the paths of each of the radiations between the plates and after leaving  the plates.   label the paths \u03b1, \u03b2 and \u03b3. [5]  (b) state and explain one practical application of \u03b3-rays.   application   explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "18": "18 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/43/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (ce/cgw) 196150/2 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/51 paper 5 practical test  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *8778441770* for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 in this experiment, you will determine the density of modelling clay by two methods.  method 1  (a) (i) measure the length l, width w and height h of the sample a of modelling clay. do not  change the shape of the sample.  l =  .  cm  w =  .  cm  h =  .  cm  [1]   (ii) calculate the volume va of sample a using the equation va = l \u00d7 w \u00d7 h.  va =  ..  cm3 [1]   (iii) measure and record the mass ma of sample a of modelling clay using the balance  provided.  ma =  ..  g [1]   (iv) calculate the density \u03c1a of sample a using the equation \u03c1a = ma va.    give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this method and include  the unit.  \u03c1a =  ...  [2] method 2  (b) pour approximately 50  cm3 of the water provided into the measuring cylinder.   (i) record the volume v1 of water in the measuring cylinder.  v1 =    cm3    carefully lower sample b of the same modelling clay into the measuring cylinder until it is  completely covered with water.    record the new reading v2 of the water level in the measuring cylinder.  v2 =    cm3    calculate the volume vb of sample b using the equation vb = v2 \u2013 v1.  vb =    cm3  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) measure and record the mass mb of sample b of measuring clay using the balance  provided.  mb =    g    calculate the density \u03c1b of sample b using the equation \u03c1b = mb vb.    give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment and  include the unit.  \u03c1b =  ...   [1]  (c) a student suggests that the density of modelling clay is not affected by either the mass or the  volume of the sample used.   state whether your results agree with the suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  your results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d) fig. 1.1 shows some water in a measuring cylinder. the surface of the liquid is curved and is   called the meniscus. bench fig. 1.1   tick the boxes that describe the correct line of sight for taking a reading of the volume of  water in a measuring cylinder.    along the scale    parallel to the scale    perpendicular to the scale    vertical to the scale    in line with the bottom of the meniscus    in line with the top of the meniscus    in line with midway between the top and bottom of the meniscus. [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of water under different conditions.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 2.1. the thermometer must remain in the  clamp for the whole of this experiment. do not adjust the position of the thermometer in the clamp. beaker  clamp benchbossstand thermometer fig. 2.1  (a) use the thermometer to measure room temperature \u03b8\u200a\u200ar.  \u03b8\u200a\u200ar =  .  [1]  (b) (i) pour 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker. place the thermometer in the beaker by  moving the clamp stand.    record in table 2.1 the temperature \u03b81 of the hot water at time t = 0. immediately start  the stopclock.    after 180  s, measure the temperature \u03b81 of the water. record the time t = 180  s and the  temperature reading in table 2.1.  [1]   (ii) calculate the drop in temperature \u03b4\u03b81 between times t = 0 and t = 180  s.  \u03b4\u03b81 =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate the average rate of cooling r1 of the water using the equation r1 = \u03b4\u03b81 \u03b4t, where  \u03b4t = 180  s. include the unit.  r1 =  .  [1] table 2.1 t / s \u03b81 / \u00b0c",
            "6": "6 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (c) (i) empty the beaker.    pour 150  cm3 of hot water into the beaker. add 50  cm3 of cold water to the beaker. place  the thermometer in the beaker by moving the clamp stand.    record in table 2.2 the temperature \u03b82 of the water in the beaker at time t = 0. immediately  start the stopclock.    after 180  s, measure the temperature \u03b82 of the water. record the time t = 180  s and the  temperature reading in table 2.2. table 2.2 t / s \u03b82 / \u00b0c  [1]   (ii) calculate the drop in temperature \u03b4\u03b82 between t = 0 and t = 180  s.  \u03b4\u03b82 =  ...    calculate the average rate of cooling r2 of the water using the equation r2 = \u03b4\u03b82 \u03b4t, where  \u03b4t = 180  s. include the unit.  r2 =  ...  [1]  (d) a student suggests that the average rate of cooling r of the water depends on the difference  d between the temperature of the water at time t = 0 and room temperature.   (i) calculate the difference d1 using the readings in table 2.1 and your answer to (a).  d1 =  ...    calculate the difference d2 using the readings in table 2.2 and your answer to (a).  d2 =  ...  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (ii) write a conclusion about the relationship between r and d. justify your answer by  reference to your results. conclusion  .  ... justification    ...  [2]  (e) (i) explain why the thermometer scale should be read at right angles.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) explain why the mixture of hot and cold water should be stirred before taking the  temperature reading at the start of the experiment in (c)(i) .  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the magnification of the image produced by a lens.  carry out the following instructions referring to fig. 3.1 and fig. 3.2. illuminated object u v lensscreen bench fig. 3.1 illuminated object ho fig. 3.2 this figure has not been drawn to scale.  (a) measure and record the height ho of the illuminated object provided in your experiment.  ho =  .  [1]  (b) \u2022 place the lens a distance u = 20.0  cm from the illuminated object. \u2022 move the screen slowly until a clearly-focused image is formed on the screen. \u2022 measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen and record the  value in table 3.1. \u2022 calculate, and record in table 3.1, the magnification m using the equation m = v u. \u2022 repeat the procedure using values of u equal to 25.0  cm, 30.0  cm, 35.0  cm and 40.0  cm. table 3.1 u / cm v / cm m 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against m (x-axis). start the y-axis at u = 20.0  cm.  [4]  (d) use the graph to determine the value of the object distance u1 when the magnification  m = 1.0.   show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  u1 =  ...  cm [2]  (e) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = u1 2.  f =  ...  cm [1]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 a student investigates the resistances of different wires.  plan an experiment to investigate the resistances of wires made from different metals.  resistance is calculated using the equation r = v i. you are not required to carry out the  investigation.  the following apparatus is available:  ammeter  voltmeter  power supply  metre rule  a selection of wires made from different metals.  you can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 write a list of suitable metals for the wires you will investigate \u2022 draw a diagram of a suitable electrical circuit using standard electrical symbols \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables to keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display your readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table).",
            "11": "11 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. *7234226105*cambridge igcse\u2122 for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total dc (ce/cgw) 196152/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the stretching of a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. metre rule spring benchclamp stand fig. 1.1  (a) the metre rule is clamped in position near to the spring. do not change the position of the  metre rule.   (i) use the set square provided to take readings from the metre rule to determine the  unstretched length l of the coiled part of the spring. record the value of l.  l =  ... mm [1]   (ii) draw a diagram to show clearly how you used the set square to obtain an accurate  reading from the metre rule.  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) \u2022  suspend a load p = 0.20  n on the spring. record in table 1.1 the new length l of the  spring.  \u2022 repeat the procedure using loads p = 0.40  n, 0.60  n, 0.80  n and 1.00  n. table 1.1 p / n l / mm 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00  [2]  (c) plot a graph of l / mm ( y-axis) against p / n (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d) the intercept on the y-axis of the graph is numerically equal to the length l0 of the spring  when p = 0. determine the value of l0. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  l0 =  .  [2]  (e) calculate l \u2013 l0.  l \u2013 l0 =  .  [1] [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light in a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. refer to fig.  2.1. ray-trace sheet eyecb dg lfne 30\u00b0hole a fig. 2.1  (a) \u2022  place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the  block should be approximately in the middle of the paper. \u2022 draw and label the outline of the block abcd . \u2022 remove the block and draw the normal nl at the centre of side ab. continue the normal  so that it passes through side cd of the block. \u2022 label the point f where the normal nl crosses side ab. \u2022 label the point g where the normal nl crosses side cd. [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) (i) \u2022 draw the line ef at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 2.1. \u2022 place the paper on the pin board. \u2022 place two pins p1 and p2 on line ef at a suitable distance apart for this experiment. \u2022 replace the block and look from the position of the eye shown in fig. 2.1, to observe  the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block. adjust your line of sight until  the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. \u2022 place two pins p3 and p4 between your eye and the block so that p3, p4, and the  images of p1 and p2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other. \u2022 label the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. \u2022 remove the block and the pins. \u2022 draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line through the outline  of the block until it extends to just outside the outline of the block. label the end of  the line k. \u2022 label the point h where the line meets side cd. \u2022 label the point j where the line meets the normal nl. \u2022 draw the line fh. [2]   (ii) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =  .  [1]   (iii) measure and record the length b of the line fh.  b =  .  [1]  (c) measure and record the acute angle \u03b8 between the line nl and the line jk. an acute angle is  less than 90\u00b0.  \u03b8 =  .  [2]  (d) state one precaution that you took in order to produce an accurate ray-trace.  ...  .  [1]  (e) a student suggests that i should be equal to \u03b8 within the limits of experimental accuracy. in  this experiment, i = 30  \u00b0. suggest a range of values for \u03b8 that match this suggestion for your  experiment. range  ..  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (f) a student plans to test the suggestion that, in this experiment, i = \u03b8 for all possible values of i.   explain briefly how you would test the suggestion.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]   tie your ray-trace sheet into this question booklet between pages 6 and 7.  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of samples of resistance wire.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1.  the circuit shown in fig. 3.1 has been provided for you. a b epower supply c dresistance wire fig. 3.1  table 3.1 shows how the samples of wire are connected into the circuit. table 3.1 section resistance wire bc one 30  cm piece cd two 30  cm pieces de three 30  cm pieces  (a) (i) \u2022 switch on. \u2022 measure the current i in the circuit.  i =  .  [1]   (ii) connect the voltmeter across section bc of the resistance wire.    measure and record the potential difference (p.d.) v1 across section bc. switch off.  v1 =  .  [1]    calculate the resistance r1 of section bc using the equation r1 = v1 i.    give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment and  include the unit.  r1 =  .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (iii) disconnect the voltmeter and its leads from section bc. connect the voltmeter across  section cd. switch on.    measure and record the potential difference (p.d.) v2 across section cd. switch off.  v2 =  ...    calculate the resistance r2 of section cd using the equation r2 = v2 i. give your answer    to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment and include the unit.  r2 =  .  [1]   (iv) disconnect the voltmeter and its leads from section cd. connect the voltmeter across  section de. switch on.    measure and record the potential difference (p.d.) v3 across section de. switch off.  v3 =  ...    calculate the resistance r3 of section de using the equation r3 = v3 i. give your answer    to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment and include the unit.  r3 =  ... [3]  (b) (i) the sections bc, cd and de are all the same length and made of the same metal.    tick the box to show your conclusion from the results.     the resistance of a section increases as the number of wires increases     the resistance of a section decreases as the number of wires increases     the resistance of a section is independent of the number of wires.  [1]   (ii) justify your conclusion in (b)(i)  by reference to your results.  ...  .  [1]  (c) explain how you would change this experiment to investigate the relationship between the  length of a sample of wire and its resistance.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 a student investigates the length of time taken for ice cubes to melt when they are placed in water.  she uses beakers of water at different temperatures to investigate how the initial temperature of  the water affects the time taken for the ice cubes to melt.  plan an experiment to investigate how the initial temperature of the water affects the time taken  for the ice cubes to melt. you are not required to carry out this experiment.  the following apparatus is available:  thermometer  supply of ice cubes  250 cm3 beakers  supply of cold water  in your plan, you should: \u2022 write a list of additional apparatus to use \u2022 explain how to carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables to keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test  october/november  2020  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (ce/cgw) 196153/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn over *1068534584* for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the transfer of thermal energy from a beaker of hot water.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1.  do not adjust the thermometer in the clamp. benchbeaker beakerthermometerclamp clamp standlid a b fig. 1.1  (a) pour 100  cm3 of hot water into beaker a.   place the thermometer in the water in beaker a by moving the clamp stand.   in table 1.1, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at time t = 0 and immediately start the  stopclock.   record, in table 1.1, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s, 150  s  and 180  s.   remove the thermometer from beaker a by moving the clamp stand.  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) (i) repeat the procedure in (a) for beaker  b. remove the lid before pouring the hot water  into the beaker. replace the lid immediately after pouring.  [2]   (ii) complete the headings and the values in the time t column in table 1.1.  [2] table 1.1 beaker a without a lidbeaker b with a lid t / \u03b8a / \u03b8b / 0  (c) write a conclusion stating how using the lid affects the cooling of the water.  ...  ...  ...  .  [1]  (d) (i) calculate the average rate of change of temperature xa of the water in beaker a. use  your values of \u03b8a from table 1.1 and the equation xa = (\u03b80 \u2212 \u03b8180) t    where \u03b80 is the temperature of the water in beaker a at t = 0, \u03b8180 is the temperature of  the water at t = 180  s, and t = 180  s.    include a unit.  xa =  .  [1]   (ii) calculate the average rate of change of temperature xb of the water in beaker b. use  your values of \u03b8b from table 1.1 and the equation xb = (\u03b80 \u2212 \u03b8180) t    where \u03b80 is the temperature of the water in beaker b at t = 0, \u03b8180 is the temperature of  the water at t = 180  s, and t = 180  s.    include a unit.  xb =  .  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020   (iii) thermal energy is transferred from the surface of the water and from the sides of the  beaker during this investigation.    a student suggests that more thermal energy is transferred from the surface of the water  than from the sides of the beaker.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference  to your values of xa, the average rate of change of temperature without a lid, and xb, the  average rate of change of temperature with a lid.  statement  .. justification      ...  ...  [2]  (e) suggest a change to the apparatus or the procedure to produce a greater difference between  xa and xb.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate circuits containing different combinations of resistors.  circuit  a has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. q ppower supply circuit aa x 2 \u03c9 v fig. 2.1  (a) circuit a   switch on.   measure, and record in the first line of table 2.1, the potential difference (p.d.) v across  resistor x.   measure, and record in table 2.1, the current i in the circuit.   switch off. table 2.1 circuit v / i / r / \u03c9 a b c  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) connect a second 2  \u03c9 resistor between terminals p and q so that it is in series with the first  2 \u03c9 resistor, as shown in fig. 2.2. the rest of the circuit must remain as in fig. 2.1. this will  form circuit b. q p2 \u03c9 2 \u03c9 fig. 2.2   switch on.   measure, and record in table 2.1, the potential difference (p.d.) v across resistor x.    measure, and record in table 2.1, the current i in the circuit.   switch off.  [2]  (c) connect a third 2  \u03c9 resistor between terminals p and q so that it is in series with the other 2  \u03c9  resistors, as shown in fig. 2.3. the rest of the circuit must remain as in fig. 2.1. this forms  circuit c. p q2 \u03c9 2 \u03c9 2 \u03c9 fig. 2.3   switch on.   measure, and record in table 2.1, the potential difference (p.d.) v across resistor x.    measure, and record in table 2.1, the current i in the circuit.   switch off.   complete the headings in table 2.1. [1]  (d) (i) calculate, and record in table 2.1, a value for the resistance r of resistor x for each  combination of resistors.    use your readings from table 2.1 and the equation r = v i. [2]   (ii) a student suggests that the values of r should be the same.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference  to values from your results.  statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (e) the results could be checked by using a different circuit.   draw, on fig. 2.4, one other arrangement of three  2 \u03c9 resistors between terminals p and q.   you are not required to connect this circuit. q p fig. 2.4  [1]  (f) (i) a student wants to determine r by using a variable resistor to vary the current in the  circuit. draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor.  [1]   (ii) explain one advantage of using a variable resistor to vary the current compared to the  procedure carried out in (a), (b) and (c).  ...  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the magnification produced by a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated object u lens lamp hoscreen bench fig. 3.1  (a) (i) measure and record the height ho of the illuminated object.  ho =  ...  cm [1]   (ii) place the lens a distance u = 20.0  cm from the illuminated object.    place the screen near the lens and switch on the lamp.    move the screen until a clear focused image of the illuminated object is seen.    measure, and record in table 3.1, the height hi of the image.    repeat the procedure for u = 25.0  cm, 30.0  cm, 35.0  cm and 40.0  cm.    switch off the lamp. table 3.1 u / cm hi / cm w 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0  [1]  (b) for each distance u, calculate, and record in table 3.1, a value w using your results from (a)   and the equation w = ho hi. [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against w (x-axis).  [4]  (d) the gradient of the line on the graph is numerically equal to the focal length f of the lens.   calculate a value of f for this experiment. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information to determine the gradient.  f =     [2]  (e) a student decides to extend the experiment using larger values of u.   use your results in table 3.1 to explain why this could produce less reliable  values for w.   suggest an improvement to overcome this difficulty. explanation  ...  ... improvement  .    ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 a student investigates the factors that affect the average speed of a ball falling in water.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate the effect of one factor on the speed at  which a ball of modelling clay falls in water.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes:  modelling clay that can be made into different sized balls  metal ball bearings that can be embedded in the modelling clay  a long transparent tube, closed at one end  a supply of water  in your plan, you should: \u2022 state clearly the factor to be investigated  \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 state any key variables to be kept the same \u2022 explain how to carry out the investigation, including the measurements to be made and any  precautions that must be taken to ensure reliable results \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.",
            "11": "11 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...   ..  ...  ...  ...    ...  ...  .  [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (dh/cgw) 196156/4 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/61 paper 6 alternative to practical  october/november  2020  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *0983362815*",
            "2": "2 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 a student determines the density of modelling clay by two methods.  method 1  (a) fig. 1.1 shows one face of a piece of modelling clay that the student uses. this is sample a. wl    fig. 1.1   the student measures the depth d of sample a.  d =  ..  cm   (i) measure and record the length l and the width w of the sample a of modelling clay. fig.  1.1 is drawn actual size.  l =  ..  cm  w =  ..  cm      [1]   (ii) calculate the volume va of sample a using the equation va = l \u00d7 w \u00d7 d.  va =  ...  cm3 [1]   (iii) fig. 1.2 shows sample a on a balance. record the mass ma of sample a to the nearest g. fig. 1.2  ma =  ..  g [1]3.2",
            "3": "3 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over   (iv) calculate the density \u03c1a of sample a of modelling clay using the equation \u03c1a = ma va.    give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this method and include  the unit. \t\u03c1a =  .  [2]  method 2  (b) the student records the volume v1 of water in a measuring cylinder.  v1 =    cm3   he carefully lowers sample b of the same modelling clay into the measuring cylinder until it is  completely covered with water.    he records the new reading v2 of the water level in the measuring cylinder.  v2 =    cm3    (i) calculate the volume vb of sample b using the equation vb = v2 \u2013 v1.  vb =  ..  cm3 [1]   (ii) the student measures the mass mb of sample b.  mb =    g    calculate the density \u03c1\tb of sample b using the equation \u03c1\tb = mb vb. give your answer to a  suitable number of significant figures for this method and include the unit. \t \u03c1\tb =  .  [1]  (c) a student suggests that the density of modelling clay is not affected by the mass or the  volume of the sample used.   state whether your results agree with the suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  your results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]150 182 60",
            "4": "4 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d) tick the boxes that describe the correct line of sight for taking a reading of the volume of  water in a measuring cylinder. fig. 1.3 shows the curved surface of water, which is called the  meniscus.    fig. 1.3     along the scale     parallel to the scale     perpendicular to the scale     vertical to the scale     in line with the bottom of the meniscus     in line with the top of the meniscus     in line with midway between the top and bottom of the meniscus.  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 a student investigates the cooling of water under different conditions.  fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus she uses.  beaker  clamp benchbossstand thermometer fig. 2.1  (a) the thermometer in fig. 2.2 shows the room temperature \u03b8r at the beginning of the  experiment. record \u03b8r.   30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 110\u00b0c 20 100 \u201310 fig. 2.2  \u03b8r =  .  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (b) the student pours 200  cm3 of hot water into the beaker.   she records the temperature \u03b8 of the hot water at time t = 0. she immediately starts a  stopclock.   after 180  s, she measures the temperature \u03b8 shown on the thermometer. her temperature  readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 t / \u03b8 1 / 85 69   (i) complete the time column and the column headings in table 2.1.  [1]   (ii) calculate the drop in temperature \u03b4\u03b8\t1 between times t = 0 and t = 180  s.  \u03b4\u03b8\t1 =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate the average rate of cooling r1 of the water using the equation r1 = \u03b4\u03b8\t1 \u03b4t,    where \u03b4t = 180  s. include the unit.  r1 =  .  [1]  (c) the student empties the beaker. she pours 150  cm3 of hot water into the beaker. she  adds 50  cm3 of cold water to the beaker. she repeats the timing and temperature recording  procedure described in (b). the temperature readings are shown in table 2.2.  table 2.2 t / \u03b8 2 / 69 57   (i) complete the time column and the column headings in table 2.2.  [1]   (ii) calculate the drop in temperature \u03b4\u03b8\t2 between times t = 0 and t = 180  s.  \u03b4\u03b8\t2 =  ...",
            "7": "7 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over    calculate the average rate of cooling r2 of the water using the equation r2 = \u03b4\u03b8\t2 \u03b4t,    where \u03b4t = 180  s. include the unit.  r2 =  .  [1]  (d) a student suggests that the average rate of cooling r of the water depends on the difference  d between the temperature of the water at time t = 0 and room temperature.   (i) calculate the difference d 1 using the readings in table 2.1 and your answer to (a).  d 1 =  ...    calculate the difference d 2 using the readings in table 2.2 and your answer to (a).  d 2 =  ...  [1]   (ii) write a conclusion about the relationship between r and d. justify your answer by  reference to your results. conclusion  .  ... justification    ...  ...  [2]  (e) (i) explain why the thermometer scale should be read at right-angles.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) explain why the mixture of hot and cold water should be stirred before taking the  temperature reading at the start of the experiment in (c).  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 a student investigates the magnification of the image produced by a lens.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus used.  illuminated object u v lensscreen bench fig. 3.1  fig. 3.2 shows a triangular hole in a card that forms the illuminated object. fig. 3.2 is drawn actual  size. illuminated object ho fig. 3.2  (a) on fig. 3.2, measure and record the height ho of the object.  ho =  .  [1]  (b) \u2022 the student places the lens a distance u = 20.0  cm from the illuminated object. \u2022 he moves the screen slowly until a clearly focused image is formed on the screen. \u2022 he measures the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen. \u2022 he repeats the procedure using values of u equal to 25.0  cm, 30.0  cm, 35.0  cm and  40.0 cm. \u2022 the readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 u / cm v / cm m 20.0 70.9 25.0 41.5 30.0 32.5 35.0 28.1 40.0 25.6   calculate, and record in table 3.1, the magnification m for each value of u. use the equation  m = v  u  . [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (c) plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against m (x-axis). start the y-axis at u = 20.0  cm.  [4]  (d) use your graph to determine the value of the object distance u1 when the magnification  m = 1.0.   show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  u1 =  ...  cm [2]  (e) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = u1 2 .  f =  ...  cm [1]  (f) state two precautions that you would take with this experiment in order to obtain accurate  readings. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 4 a student investigates the resistances of different wires.  plan an experiment to investigate the resistances of wires made from different metals.  resistance is calculated using the equation r = v i .   the following apparatus is available:  ammeter  voltmeter  power supply  metre rule  a selection of wires made from different metals.  you can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 write a list of suitable metals for the wires you will investigate \u2022 draw a diagram of a suitable electrical circuit using standard electrical symbols \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables to keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display your readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table).",
            "11": "11 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  ",
            "12": "12 0625/61/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (dh/cgw) 196157/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical  october/november  2020  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *1063801810*",
            "2": "2 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 a student investigates the stretching of a spring.  fig. 1.1 shows the set up.  metre rule spring benchclamp stand fig. 1.1  (a) the metre rule is clamped in position near to the spring.    on fig. 1.1, show clearly how you would use a set square to obtain an accurate reading of  the position of the bottom of the coiled part of the spring from the metre rule.  [2]  (b) fig. 1.2 shows the spring drawn to actual size. on fig. 1.2, measure the length l of the coiled  part of the spring.          fig. 1.2  l =  ..  mm [1]  (c) the student adds a load p = 0.20  n to the spring. he records the new length l of the coiled  part of the spring.   he repeats the procedure using loads p = 0.40  n, 0.60  n, 0.80  n and 1.00  n. all the readings  are recorded in table 1.1.",
            "3": "3 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over table 1.1 p / n l / mm 0.20 20 0.40 26 0.60 31 0.80 35 1.00 41   plot a graph of l / mm ( y-axis) against  p / n (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  [4]  (d) the intercept on the y-axis of the graph is numerically equal to the length l0 of the spring  when p = 0. determine the value of l0. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  l0 =  .  [2]  (e) calculate l \u2013 l0.  l \u2013 l0 =  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 2 a student investigates the refraction of light in a transparent block.  fig. 2.1 shows her ray-trace sheet. she places a transparent block on the ray-trace sheet and  draws the outline abcd  of the block. the student uses pins to mark the positions of objects and  images.  eyec p3 p4b da fig. 2.1",
            "5": "5 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (a) \u2022  on fig. 2.1, draw the normal nl at the centre of side ab. continue the normal nl so  that it passes through side cd of the block.   \u2022 label the point f where the normal nl crosses side ab.  \u2022 label the point g where the normal nl crosses side cd.  [1]  (b) \u2022  on fig. 2.1, draw a line ef at least 7  cm long above side ab and at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to  the left of the normal. label the end of the line e. \u2022 mark the positions of two pins p1 and p2, to act as objects, on line ef at a suitable  distance apart for this type of ray-trace experiment.  [1]  (c) \u2022  the student looks from the position of the eye shown in fig. 2.1, to observe the images  of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block. she adjusts her line of sight until the images  of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. \u2022 she places two pins p3 and p4 between her eye and the block so that p3, p4 and the  images of p1 and p2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other. \u2022 the positions of p3 and p4 are marked on the ray-trace sheet.    (i) draw a line joining the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line through the block until it  extends to just outside the outline of the block. label this end of the line k. [1]   (ii) \u2022 label the point h where the line in (c)(i)  meets side cd.  \u2022 label the point j where the line meets the normal nl. \u2022 draw the line fh.   [1]   (iii) measure and record the length a of the line gh.  a =  ...    measure and record the length b of the line fh.  b =  ...  [1]  (d) measure and record the acute angle \u03b8 between the line  jf and the line jk. an acute angle is  less than 90\u00b0.  \u03b8 =  .  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (e) state  one precaution that you would take in order to produce an accurate ray-trace.  ...  .  [1]  (f)  a student suggests that  i should be equal to \u03b8 within the limits of experimental accuracy. in  this experiment, i = 30\u00b0. suggest a range of values for \u03b8 that match this suggestion for the  experiment. range  ..  [1]  (g)  a student plans to test the suggestion that, in this experiment, i = \u03b8 for all possible values of  i.    explain briefly how you would test the suggestion.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11] ",
            "7": "7 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 a student is investigating the resistance of samples of wire.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit used.  vaa b epower supply resistance wire c d fig. 3.1  table 3.1 shows how the samples of wire are connected into the circuit. table 3.1 section wire bc one 30  cm piece cd two 30  cm pieces de three 30  cm pieces",
            "9": "9 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (a) (i) record the potential difference (p.d.) v1 across section bc of the resistance wire, as  shown on the voltmeter in fig. 3.2. v34 521 0           a0.60.8 1.00.40.2 0 fig. 3.2                            fig. 3.3  v1 =  .  [1]    (ii) record the current i in the circuit, as shown in fig. 3.3.  i =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate the resistance r1 of the section bc of the resistance wire. use the equation    r1 = v1 i . give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  r1 =  .  [1]  (b) the student connects the voltmeter across section cd.   he records the potential difference (p.d.) v2 across section cd.  0.70 v2 =  ...   he calculates the resistance r2 of section cd.  1.25 r2 =  ...   he connects the voltmeter across section de.   he records the potential difference (p.d.) v3 across section de.  0.46 v3 =  ...   calculate the resistance r3 of section de using the equation r3 = v3 i . use the value of i from    (a)(ii) . give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  r3 =  .  [1]  (c) complete the student\u2019s recorded readings by including the units in (b). [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (d) the sections bc, cd and de are all the same length and made of the same metal.    (i) tick the box to show your conclusion from the results.     the resistance of a section increases as the number of wires increases     the resistance of a section decreases as the number of wires increases     the resistance of a section is independent of the number of wires.  [1]   (ii) justify your conclusion in (d)(i)  by reference to the results.  ...  .  [1]  (e) explain how you would change this experiment to investigate the relationship between the  length of a sample of wire and its resistance.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (f) a student repeats the investigation in (a) to (d), but uses different values of current i. he has  a power source with a single fixed output potential difference.   (i) name the component he could connect into the circuit to vary the current.  .  [1]   (ii) draw the circuit symbol for this component.  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4 a student investigates the length of time taken for ice cubes to melt when they are placed in water.  she uses beakers of water at different temperatures to investigate how the initial temperature of  the water affects the time taken for the ice cubes to melt.  plan an experiment to investigate how the initial temperature of the water affects the time taken  for the ice cubes to melt.   the following apparatus is available:  thermometer  supply of ice cubes  250 cm3 beakers  supply of cold water  in your plan, you should: \u2022 write a list of additional apparatus to use \u2022 explain how to carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables to keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "12": "12 0625/62/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_w20_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (dh/cgw) 196161/3 \u00a9 ucles 2020  [turn overphysics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical  october/november  2020  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *9534857132*",
            "2": "2 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 1 some students investigate the transfer of thermal energy from a beaker of hot water.  they use the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. benchbeaker beakerthermometer lid a b fig. 1.1   (a) fig. 1.2 shows the reading on the thermometer at the start of the investigation. -10 \u00b0c0102030 fig. 1.2   record the room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer in fig. 1.2.  \u03b8r =  .  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (b) a student pours 100  cm3 of hot water into beaker a.   he records the temperature of the water in beaker a and immediately starts a stopclock.    the student records the temperature \u03b8 of the water every 30  s. his readings are shown in  table 1.1.   the student repeats the procedure for beaker b. beaker b is fitted with a lid.   complete the headings and the time column in table 1.1. table 1.1 beaker a without a lidbeaker b with a lid t / \u03b8a / \u03b8b / 0 85.0 86.0 79.0 83.0 73.5 80.5 68.5 78.5 64.0 77.0 60.0 76.5 56.5 76.0  [2]  (c) describe a precaution that should be taken to ensure that the temperature readings are as  accurate as possible in this experiment.  ...  .  [1]  (d) (i) write a conclusion stating how using the lid affects the cooling of the water.  ...  ...  ...  .  [1]     (ii) the temperature of the water in each beaker decreases during this investigation.     describe one other similarity in the pattern of the cooling of water in beakers a and b.  ...  .  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  (e) (i) calculate the average rate of cooling xa of the water in beaker a. use the values of \u03b8a  from table 1.1 and the equation xa = (\u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8180 t)      where \u03b80 is the temperature of the water in beaker a at t = 0, \u03b8180 is the temperature of  the water at t = 180  s, and t = 180  s.    include a unit.  xa =  .  [1]   (ii) calculate the average rate of cooling xb of the water in beaker b. use the values of \u03b8b  from table 1.1 and the equation xb = (\u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8180 t)      where \u03b80 is the temperature of the water in beaker b at t = 0, \u03b8180 is the temperature of  the water at t = 180  s, and t = 180  s.  xb =     [1]   (iii) thermal energy is transferred from the surface of the water and from the sides of the  beaker during the investigation.    a student suggests that more thermal energy is transferred from the surface of the water  than from the sides of the beaker.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference  to your values of xa, the average rate of cooling without a lid, and xb, the average rate of  cooling with a lid.  statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]  (f)  suggest a change to the apparatus or the procedure to produce a greater difference between  xa and xb.   ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 2 some students investigate an electrical circuit containing different combinations of resistors.  they use circuit a shown in fig. 2.1.   circuit a is not shown complete. q ppower supply circuit ax 5 \u03c9 fig. 2.1  (a) on fig. 2.1, complete circuit a to show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential  difference (p.d.) across resistor x and an ammeter connected to measure the current in the  circuit.  [2]   (b) a student measures the potential difference v across resistor x and the current i in the circuit.  the voltmeter reading is shown in fig. 2.2. the ammeter reading is shown in fig. 2.3. v3 4 52 1 0   a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 2.2                 fig. 2.3   record, in the first line of table 2.1, the values of v and i shown on the meters in fig. 2.2 and  fig. 2.3. [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 table 2.1 circuit v / i / r / \u03c9 a b 2.1 0.54 c 1.6 0.39  (c) the student now connects two 5  \u03c9 resistors in series between p and q, as shown in fig. 2.4,  to form circuit b. the rest of the circuit remains as in fig. 2.1. q p5 \u03c9 5 \u03c9 fig. 2.4   she measures the potential difference (p.d.) v across resistor x and the current i in the  circuit.   the student then connects three 5  \u03c9 resistors in series between p and q, as shown in  fig. 2.5, to form circuit c. the rest of the circuit remains as in fig. 2.1. p q5 \u03c9 5 \u03c9 5 \u03c9 fig. 2.5   she measures the potential difference (p.d.) v across resistor x and the current i in the  circuit.    all her readings are shown in table 2.1.   (i) complete the headings in table 2.1.  [1]   (ii) calculate, and record in table 2.1, a value for the resistance r of resistor x for each  combination of resistors the student has used.    use the readings from table 2.1 and the equation r = v i .  [2] ",
            "7": "7 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over  (d) a student suggests that the values of r should be the same.   state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your statement by reference to  values from your results.  statement  .. justification    ...  ...  [2]  (e) the results can be checked by using a different circuit.   draw, on fig. 2.6, one other arrangement of three  5 \u03c9 resistors between terminals p and q. p q5 \u03c9 5 \u03c9 5 \u03c9 fig. 2.6  [1]  (f) (i) a student wants to determine r by using a variable resistor to vary the current in the  circuit. draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor.  [1]   (ii) explain one advantage of using a variable resistor to vary the current compared to the  procedure carried out in (b) and (c).   ...  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 3 a student investigates the image produced by a converging lens.  she uses the apparatus shown in fig. 3.1. illuminated object u lensscreen bench fig. 3.1  (a) fig. 3.2 shows the illuminated object, drawn to full size. ho fig. 3.2   measure and record the height ho of the illuminated object, as shown on fig. 3.2.  ho =   cm [1]  (b) the distance u between the illuminated object and the lens is set to 20.0  cm.   the screen is moved until a sharp image of the illuminated object is seen, as shown full size  in fig. 3.3.",
            "9": "9 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over hi fig. 3.3   (i) measure and record in the first line of table 3.1 the height hi of the image, as shown on  fig. 3.3. [1]   (ii) calculate and  record in table 3.1 a value w using your  measurements for ho and hi    and the equation w = ho hi . table 3.1 u / cm hi / cm w 20.0 30.0 1.5 1.3 40.0 1.0 2.0 50.0 0.7 2.9 60.0 0.6 3.3  [1]  (c) the student repeats the process for u = 30.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 50.0  cm and 60.0  cm. her results  are shown in table 3.1. ",
            "10": "10 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020   plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against w (x-axis).  [4]   (d) the gradient of the line on the graph is numerically equal to the focal length f of the lens.   record a value of f for this experiment. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information to determine the gradient.  f =  .  [2]  (e) a student decides to extend the experiment using larger values of u.    use table 3.1 to explain why this could produce less reliable  values for w.    suggest an improvement to overcome this difficulty.  explanation  ...  ... improvement  .    ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020 [turn over 4 a student investigates the factors that affect the average speed of a ball falling in water.  plan an experiment which will enable him to investigate the effect of one factor on the speed at  which a ball of modelling clay falls in water.  the apparatus available includes:  modelling clay that can be made into different sized balls  metal ball bearings that can be embedded in the modelling clay  a long transparent tube, closed at one end  a supply of water     in your plan, you should: \u2022 state clearly the factor to be investigated  \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed   \u2022 state any key variables to be kept the same \u2022 explain how to carry out the investigation, including the measurements to be made and any  precautions that must be taken to ensure reliable results \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.",
            "12": "12 0625/63/ o/n/20 \u00a9 ucles 2020  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]  [total: 7] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        }
    },
    "2021": {
        "0625_m21_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib21 03_0625_12/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *9288526984*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/12     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  february/march 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21  1 a student has a measuring cylinder containing water and also h as a balance.    which of these could she use to find the volume of a small meta l sphere?    she has no other apparatus.  a either the measuring cylinder containing water or the balance  b the measuring cylinder containing water only  c the balance only  d neither the measuring cylinder nor the balance     2 two rockets are launched at the same time from the surface of the earth. the graph shows how  the speeds of the rockets change with time.    0 0speed timerocket p rocket q     which statement about the rockets is correct?  a both rockets travel the same distance.  b rocket p accelerates and then decelerates.  c rocket p travels further than rocket q.  d rocket q has zero acceleration.     3 a train begins a journey from a station and travels 60  km in a time of 20 minutes.    what is the average speed of the train?  a 3.0  m / s b 5.0  m / s c 50  m / s d 60  m / s     4 what is weight?  a a frictional force  b a magnetic force  c a gravitational force  d an electromagnetic force    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21 [turn over  5 the diagram shows a bird in flight. the bird is flying in a ho rizontal direction to the right.    in which direction does air resistance act on the bird?    a d cb      6 a small bottle has a mass of 20  g when empty. the volume of the bottle is 10  cm3.    when full of liquid, the total mass is 150  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0 . 5 0  g / cm3 b 2 . 0  g / cm3 c 1 3  g / cm3 d 1 5  g / cm3     7 a rocket is travelling vertically upwards. three vertical forc es act on it.    the thrust acts upwards and is equal to 100  000  n.    the weight acts downwards and is equal to 80  000  n.    what is the air resistance force acting on the rocket when it i s travelling upwards at constant  speed?  a 2 0  000  n downwards  b 2 0  000  n upwards  c 180  000  n downwards  d 180  000  n upwards    8 which energy source boils water to make steam in power station s?  a energy from tides  b energy from waves  c hydroelectric energy  d nuclear energy   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21  9 two people x and y sit on a see-saw, as shown.    xy 300  n 400  n900  nnot to scale pivot1.5 m     x weighs 400  n and sits 1.5  m from the pivot.    the weight of the see-saw is 300  n and acts through the pivot.    when the see-saw is balanced, the pivot pushes up on the see-sa w with a force of 900  n.    what is the weight of person y and how far from the pivot is he  sitting?     weight of y  / n distance from  pivot  / m  a 200 1.5  b 200 3.0  c 400 1.5  d 400 3.0     10 a horizontal force pulls a box along a horizontal surface.    the box gains 30  j of kinetic energy and 10  j of thermal energy is produced by the friction  between the box and the surface.    how much work is done by the force?  a 1 0  j b 2 0  j c 3 0  j d 4 0  j    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21 [turn over  11 the table shows the work done and the time taken by four machi nes.    which machine is the most powerful?     work done  / kj time taken  / s  a 100 10  b 100 20  c 200 10  d 200 20     12 the diagram shows a manometer connected to a gas supply.    from gas supply mercurymm 500 400300200100 0     what is the pressure of the gas supply?  a 100  mm  hg above atmospheric pressure  b 100  mm  hg below atmospheric pressure  c 200  mm  hg above atmospheric pressure  d 200  mm  hg below atmospheric pressure    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21  13 the diagram shows a box of dimensions 6.0  cm \uf0b4 8.0  cm \uf0b4 4.0  cm.    8.0 cm6.0 cm 4.0 cmx yz     the box rests on a flat horizontal surface.    on which face must the box rest in order to exert the least pre ssure?  a face x  b face y  c face z  d the pressure is the same for all the faces.     14 air in a sealed syringe is slowly compressed by moving the pis ton. the temperature of the air  stays the same.    syringeair piston    which statement about the air is correct?  a the pressure of the air decreases because its molecules now tra vel more slowly.  b the pressure of the air decreases because the area of the syrin ge walls is now smaller.  c the pressure of the air increases because its molecules now hit  the syringe walls more  frequently.  d the pressure of the air increases because its molecules now tra vel more quickly.    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21 [turn over  15 in an experiment, smoke particles  are suspended in air and vie wed through a microscope.    the smoke particles move about with short random movements.    which of the following statements is correct?  a air particles have large masses compared to smoke particles and  they move in one direction  only.  b air particles have large masses compared to smoke particles and  they move in random  directions.  c air particles move at high speeds compared to smoke particles a nd they move in one  direction only.  d air particles move at high speeds compared to smoke particles a nd they move in random  directions.    16 a beaker of liquid is heated slowly so that the liquid evaporat es.    during evaporation, from where do the more energetic molecules leave the liquid?    aa b dc heatliquid      17 four samples of materials with the same dimensions are tested.     which material gives the highest rate of thermal conduction?  a rubber  b copper  c plastic  d steel     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21  18 the diagram shows a simple type of thermometer.    horizontal surface pointersteel bar roller     the roller rests on a horizontal surface and the steel bar rest s on top of the roller.    when the temperature changes, the pointer rotates.    which physical property is being used to measure temperature?  a the length of the pointer  b the length of the roller  c the length of the steel bar  d the thickness of the roller     19 a piece of melting ice at 0  \uf0b0c and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. the  laboratory is at 20  \uf0b0c.    melting iceboiling water bunsen burne r heating water     what is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and wha t is happening to the  temperature of the boiling water?     temperature of  melting ice temperature of  boiling water  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21 [turn over  20 four metal mugs with lids each contain the same volume of hot w ater at the same temperature.        the mugs are made from the same metal and are the same shape an d size, but each has its  outside surface painted with a different combination of texture  and colour.    which mug radiates thermal energy at the fastest rate?  a the mug painted shiny white  b the mug painted dull white  c the mug painted shiny black  d the mug painted dull black     21 the diagram shows a wave.    0 0displacement from undisturbed position position along waveq s rp     which dimensions describe the properties of the wave?  a p = amplitude, s = speed  b p = speed, q = wavelength  c r = amplitude, q = wavelength  d r = amplitude, s = wavelength      22 what causes the change in direction when light travels from ai r into glass?  a the amplitude of the light changes.  b the colour of the light changes.  c the frequency of the light changes.  d the speed of the light changes.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21  23 light from a torch is incident on a plane mirror. the angle of  incidence is 38 \uf0b0.    what is the angle of reflection?  a 3 8\uf0b0 b 5 2\uf0b0 c 7 6\uf0b0 d 142\uf0b0     24 a thin converging lens is used to produce a sharp image of a c andle.    candlelensscreen image     various sharp images are produced on the screen by moving the l ens and the screen backwards  and forwards.    which statement is always  correct?  a the image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.   b the image is bigger than the object.  c the image is closer to the lens than the object.  d the image is inverted.    25 thermal radiation is part of the electromagnetic spectrum.    what is the name of this region of the spectrum?  a gamma rays  b infrared rays  c ultraviolet rays  d visible light rays     26 which process causes a sound wave to produce an echo?  a diffraction  b dispersion  c reflection  d refraction ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21 [turn over  27 a quiet sound is produced by a loudspeaker. the pitch of the s ound remains constant but the  loudness of the sound is increased.    which property of the sound wave is increased?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength    28 a soft-iron bar is not magnetised. it is held close to the n p ole of a magnet and then to the s pole  of the same magnet.    what will be the result?     n pole s pole  a attracts attracts  b attracts repels  c repels attracts  d repels repels     29 a charged rod x is placed on a balance and another rod y is br ought close to it, as shown.    45.3  gx 45.7  gxy     which combination of charges would cause the change in the bala nce reading shown?     x  y   a negative charge negative charge  b negative charge positive charge  c negative charge no charge  d positive charge no charge     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21  30 three cores of different metals p, q and r are placed inside i dentical coils of wire.    at least one of the metals is non-magnetic.    the cores are held above some iron nails.    the three diagrams show what happens when there is a current in  the coils.     pcoil core iron nailsq r+ \u2013+ \u2013+ \u2013       the three diagrams below show what happens when the current is then switched off.     p q r+ \u2013+ \u2013+ \u2013       which core metals are magnetic?  a p only b r  o n l y  c p and q d q and r      31 a length of metal wire is used as a resistor in a circuit.    which change to the wire results in an increase in current in t he circuit?  a connecting a second identical length of wire in parallel with the original wire  b connecting a second identical length of wire in series with th e original wire  c decreasing the thickness of the wire  d increasing the length of the wire    ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21 [turn over  32 the diagram shows a circuit containing a power supply, a lamp and a motor. three ammeters  measure the current at different points in the circuit. the rea dings on the ammeters are i1, i2   and i3.    maammeter reading i1 ammeter reading i2 ammeter reading i3a a    which statement about the ammeter readings is correct?  a all three readings are the same.  b i1 is greater than i2 and is greater than i3.  c i2 is greater than i1 and is greater than i3.  d i3 is greater than i1 and is greater than i2.      33 a student designs a circuit to use as a dimmer switch for a la mp.    x y     what happens to the brightness of the lamp and the potential di fference (p.d.) across the lamp,  when the slider is moved from x to y?     brightness of lamp p.d. across the lamp  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21  34 which electrical component is connected in series with an elec tric circuit to protect it from  damage by a very large current?  a earth wire  b fuse  c relay  d thermistor     35 the diagram shows an electromagnet near a coil of wire connect ed to a voltmeter. the reading  on the voltmeter is zero.    v+ \u2013switchcoil electromagnet soft iron     the switch is closed. the electromagnet magnetises quickly.    what happens to the reading on the voltmeter?  a it keeps increasing.  b it quickly increases and stays at maximum.  c it quickly increases and then decreases.  d it stays on zero.     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21 [turn over  36 which diagram represents the voltage output of a simple a.c. g enerator?    0voltage timea voltage timeb voltage timec voltage timed00 0 0 00 0      37 three students are describing the structure of an atom.    student 1 all the positively charged particles are in the nucle us.  student 2 positive electrons are in the nucleus.  student 3 negative electrons orbit around the nucleus.    which students are making a correct statement?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only    38 the symbol below describes a nuclide.        which row is correct?     proton  number ( z) nucleon  number ( a)  a 4 5  b 4 9  c 9 4  d 9 5     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/f/m/21  39 the diagram shows a radioactivity experiment.    sourceabsorbercounter radiation detector    when a piece of paper is used as the absorber, the count rate d rops to the background count  rate.    which radiation is the source emitting?  a \uf061-radiation only  b \uf062-radiation only  c \uf067-radiation only  d \uf061-radiation, \uf062-radiation and \uf067-radiation     40 the graph shows how the count rate from a radioactive sample ch anges with time.    600 500400300200100 0 0 50 100 150 200 time  / s250 300 350 400count rate counts  / s     what is the half-life for this sample?  a 9 0  s b 1 2 0  s c 2 0 0  s d 400  s   "
        },
        "0625_m21_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib21 03_0625_22/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *3645684800*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/22     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  february/march 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21  1 a student has a measuring cylinder containing water and also h as a balance.    which of these could she use to find the volume of a small meta l sphere?    she has no other apparatus.  a either the measuring cylinder containing water or the balance  b the measuring cylinder containing water only  c the balance only  d neither the measuring cylinder nor the balance     2 a ball hits a bat with a velocity of 30  m / s, and leaves the bat travelling with a velocity of 20  m / s in  the opposite direction. the ball is in contact with the bat for  0.10  s.    what is the magnitude of the acceleration of the ball whilst it  is in contact with the bat?  a 1 . 0  m / s2 b 5 . 0  m / s2 c 1 0 0  m / s2 d 500  m / s2    3 a train begins a journey from a station and travels 60  km in a time of 20 minutes.    what is the average speed of the train?  a 3.0  m / s b 5.0  m / s c 50  m / s d 60  m / s     4 which statement about mass is correct?  a a mass of 10  kg weighs 1  n near the earth\u2019s surface.  b mass is a gravitational force.  c mass increases when the gravitational field strength increases.   d the greater the mass of a body, the more it resists a change in  its motion.    5 a small bottle has a mass of 20  g when empty. the volume of the bottle is 10  cm3.    when full of liquid, the total mass is 150  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0 . 5 0  g / cm3 b 2 . 0  g / cm3 c 1 3  g / cm3 d 1 5  g / cm3     6 an object of mass 0.80  kg is moving in a straight line at a velocity of 2.0  m / s. a force is exerted  on the object, in the direction of motion, for a period of 1.0 minute and the velocity of the object  increases to 6.0  m / s.    what force is exerted on the object?  a 0.053  n b 0 . 0 8 0  n c 3 . 2  n d 4 . 8  n    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21 [turn over  7 an object moves at constant speed in the circular path shown.    p zx y    which statement about the acceleration of the object when it is  at point p is correct?  a the acceleration is in the direction of arrow x.  b the acceleration is in the direction of arrow y.  c the acceleration is in the direction of arrow z.  d the object is not accelerating.    8 an object is pivoted at point p. a student ties a length of st ring to a peg on the object. he pulls  the string with a force f.    p qrstf objectstring peg     what is the moment of the force f about the point p?  a f \uf0b4 q b f \uf0b4 r c f \uf0b4 s d f \uf0b4 t    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21  9 a gas molecule strikes the wall of a container. the molecule r ebounds with the same speed.    before hitting the wall after hitting the wallwall gas moleculewall gas molecule     what happens to the kinetic energy and what happens to the mome ntum of the molecule?     kinetic energy momentum  a changes changes  b changes stays the same  c stays the same changes  d stays the same stays the same     10 a horizontal force pulls a box along a horizontal surface.    the box gains 30  j of kinetic energy and 10  j of thermal energy is produced by the friction  between the box and the surface.    how much work is done by the force?  a 1 0  j b 2 0  j c 3 0  j d 4 0  j    11 a crane is used to lift loads vertically.    the output power of the crane to lift a car is p.    the crane then lifts a lorry, which has 3.0 times the weight of  the car, through 0.25 of the distance  in 0.50 of the time.    what is the output power of the crane now?  a  3 8p b 3 2p c 8 3p d 6p     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21 [turn over  12 the diagram shows a manometer connected to a gas supply.    from gas supply mercurymm 500 400300200100 0     what is the pressure of the gas supply?  a 100  mm  hg above atmospheric pressure  b 100  mm  hg below atmospheric pressure  c 200  mm  hg above atmospheric pressure  d 200  mm  hg below atmospheric pressure      13 the diagram shows a box of dimensions 6.0  cm \uf0b4 8.0  cm \uf0b4 4.0  cm.    8.0 cm6.0 cm 4.0 cmx yz     the box rests on a flat horizontal surface.    on which face must the box rest in order to exert the least pre ssure?  a face x  b face y  c face z  d the pressure is the same for all the faces.    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21  14 air in a sealed syringe is slowly compressed by moving the pis ton. the temperature of the air  stays the same.    syringeair piston    which statement about the air is correct?  a the pressure of the air decreases because its molecules now tra vel more slowly.  b the pressure of the air decreases because the area of the syrin ge walls is now smaller.  c the pressure of the air increases because its molecules now hit  the syringe walls more  frequently.  d the pressure of the air increases because its molecules now tra vel more quickly.    15 in an experiment, smoke particles are suspended in air and vie wed through a microscope.    the smoke particles move about with short random movements.    which of the following statements is correct?  a air particles have large masses compared to smoke particles and  they move in one direction  only.  b air particles have large masses compared to smoke particles and  they move in random  directions.  c air particles move at high speeds compared to smoke particles a nd they move in one  direction only.  d air particles move at high speeds compared to smoke particles a nd they move in random  directions.     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21 [turn over  16 the graph shows how the internal energy of 1.0  kg of a metal changes with temperature.    835 830825820815810805800795 0 2 04 06 08 0 1 0 0 temperature  / \u00b0cinternal energy/  kj     what is the increase in the internal energy of a block of the s ame metal of mass 0.25  kg when its  temperature rises from 40  \uf0b0c to 50  \uf0b0c?  a 3 0  j b 3 0 0  j c 7 5 0  j d 1200  j     17 a piece of melting ice at 0  \uf0b0c and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. the  laboratory is at 20  \uf0b0c.    melting iceboiling water bunsen burne r heating water     what is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and wha t is happening to the  temperature of the boiling water?     temperature of  melting ice temperature of  boiling water  a constant constant  b constant increasing  c increasing constant  d increasing increasing   ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21  18 one end of a copper rod is heated.    what is one method by which thermal energy is transferred in th e copper rod?  a free electrons transfer energy from the cooler end to the hotte r end.  b free electrons transfer energy fr om the hotter end to the coole r end.  c molecules of copper move from the cooler end to the hotter end.   d molecules of copper move from the hotter end to the cooler end.      19 which change will cause a decrease in the rate of radiation em itted by an object?  a changing the surface colour from white to black  b changing the surface text ure from dull to shiny  c increasing the surface temperature  d increasing the surface area    20 what is the approximate wavelength in air of the highest frequ ency sound that can be heard by a  normal healthy person?  a 0 . 0 2  m b 6 0  m c 2 0  000  m d 7  000  000  m      21 what causes the change in direction when light travels from ai r into glass?  a the amplitude of the light changes.  b the colour of the light changes.  c the frequency of the light changes.  d the speed of the light changes.     22 light from a torch is incident on a plane mirror. the angle of  incidence is 38 \uf0b0.    what is the angle of reflection?  a 3 8\uf0b0 b 5 2\uf0b0 c 7 6\uf0b0 d 142\uf0b0     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21 [turn over  23 two rays with an angle of incidence of 60 \uf0b0 pass into dilute and concentrated sugar-water  solutions. the refractions are shown.    air dilute sugarsolutionair concentrated sugarsolution60/g113 40/g11360/g113 35/g113     which row is correct?     refractive index  as concentration increases speed through solution  as concentration increases  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     24 a thin converging lens is used to produce a sharp image of a c andle.    candlelensscreen image     various sharp images are produced on the screen by moving the l ens and the screen backwards  and forwards.    which statement is always  correct?  a the image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.   b the image is bigger than the object.  c the image is closer to the lens than the object.  d the image is inverted.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21  25 which row gives the approximate speeds at which ultraviolet wa ves travel in air and in a  vacuum?        speed in air m/s     speed in a vacuum m/s  a 340 3.0 \uf0b4 108  b 340 340  c 3.0 \uf0b4 108 3 4 0   d 3.0 \uf0b4 108 3 . 0  \uf0b4 108     26 the diagram represents a sound wave.    xy    what are the names of the parts of the sound wave labelled x an d y?     x  y   a amplitude wavelength  b compression rarefaction  c rarefaction amplitude  d wavelength compression     27 the speed of sound is different in different states of matter.     the speed of sound in liquid water is 1500  m / s.    which row correctly compares the speed of sound in ice and the speed of sound in water vapour  with the speed of sound in water?     speed of sound in ice  m / s speed of sound in steam  m / s  a less than 1500 less than 1500  b less than 1500 more than 1500  c more than 1500 less than 1500  d more than 1500 more than 1500     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21 [turn over  28 three methods to demagnetise a magnet are suggested. the magne t is in an east-west direction.    1 hitting the magnet repeatedly with a hammer  2 heating the magnet until red hot  3 withdrawing the magnet from a coil which has a direct current  (d.c.) in it    which methods demagnetise the magnet?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only    29 three cores of different metals p, q and r are placed inside i dentical coils of wire.    at least one of the metals is non-magnetic.    the cores are held above some iron nails.    the three diagrams show what happens when there is a current in  the coils.      pcoil core iron nailsq r+ \u2013+ \u2013+ \u2013       the three diagrams below show what happens when the current is then switched off.     p q r+ \u2013+ \u2013+ \u2013       which core metals are magnetic?  a p only b r  o n l y  c p and q d q and r    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21  30 two uncharged metal spheres x and y rest on insulating stands and touch each other. a  negatively charged plastic rod is brought near to sphere x.    \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013metal spheres insulating stand insulating standxynegatively charged rod     using the insulating stand, sphere y is moved away from sphere x.    what are the signs and the relative magnitudes of the charges i nduced on x and y?     charge on x charge on y relative magnitudes  of charges  a negative negative equal  b negative positive different  c positive negative equal  d positive positive different      31 which two changes to a metal wire both decrease its resistance ?     length of wire cross-sectional  area of wire  a decrease decrease  b decrease increase  c increase decrease  d increase increase      32 there is a current i in a resistor of resistance r for a time t. the potential difference across the  resistor is v.    which equation gives the energy e transferred by the resistor?  a e = ir b e = iv c e = irt d e = ivt     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21 [turn over  33 a resistor r is connected in parallel with an 8.0  \uf057 resistor. the resistance of this combination  is 4.0  \uf057.    r 8.0 \u03c9     what is the resistance of resistor r?  a 0 . 5 0  \uf057 b 2 . 0  \uf057 c 4 . 0  \uf057 d 8 . 0  \uf057     34 a student designs a circuit to use as a dimmer switch for a la mp.    x y     what happens to the brightness of the lamp and the potential di fference (p.d.) across the lamp,  when the slider is moved from x to y?     brightness of lamp p.d. across the lamp  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21  35 the circuit shown contains two gates.    p qr     which truth table describes the operation of the circuit?    a  b  c  d  p q r  p q r  p q r  p q r  0 0 0  0 0 0  0 0 1  0 0 1  0 1 1  0 1 0  0 1 0  0 1 0  1 0 1  1 0 1  1 0 0  1 0 1  1 1 1  1 1 1  1 1 0  1 1 1     36 the diagram shows an electromagnet near a coil of wire connect ed to a voltmeter. the reading  on the voltmeter is zero.    v+ \u2013switchcoil electromagnet soft iron     the switch is closed. the electromagnet magnetises quickly.    what happens to the reading on the voltmeter?  a it keeps increasing.  b it quickly increases and stays at maximum.  c it quickly increases and then decreases.  d it stays on zero.     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21 [turn over  37 which graph shows the voltage output of an a.c. generator with  the peaks and zeros correctly  labelled?    voltage v time t0 0a peaks zerosvoltage v time t0 0b peaks zeros voltage v time t0 0c peaks zerosvoltage v time t0 0d peaks peakszeros      38 three students are describing the structure of an atom.    student 1 all the positively charged particles are in the nucle us.  student 2 positive electrons are in the nucleus.  student 3 negative electrons orbit around the nucleus.    which students are making a correct statement?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only     39 when alpha particles are incident on a thin metal foil, most o f them pass through undeviated.    what does this observation reveal about the nature of the atom?   a the atom has a dense nucleus.  b the atom is mostly empty space.  c the atom is very small.  d the nucleus of the atom is positively charged.     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/f/m/21  40 a laboratory worker measures the count rate from a radioactive  source. he records his results in  a table.    time minutes    count rate counts/s  0 100  1.0  2.0 3.0 73  54 41  4.0 31    the average background radiation in the laboratory is 8 counts per second.    what is the half-life of the source?  a 1.5 minutes  b 2.0 minutes  c 3.0 minutes  d 4.0 minutes      "
        },
        "0625_m21_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (st/ct) 203051/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core)  february/march  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *5732576862*",
            "2": "2 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 fig. 1.1 shows a box dropped from an aeroplane. the box contains supplies.  a parachute is attached to the box. the parachute is opened when the time is 6.0  s. box containing suppliesparachute fig. 1.1  the graph in fig.  1.2 shows the vertical speed of the box as it falls. 0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 time  / s10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.01020304050 speed m / s fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (a) state and explain what happens to the kinetic energy of the box during the first 6.0  s of its  descent.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) state and explain what happens to the gravitational potential energy of the box during the first  6.0 s.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) (i) use the graph in fig.  1.2 to determine the speed of the object when the object is moving  with a constant speed.  speed of the object at constant speed =  ..  m / s [2]   (ii)  state the size of the resultant vertical force on the box when it is falling at a constant  speed.  .  [1]  (d)  use the graph in fig.  1.2 to determine the distance travelled by the box during the first 6.0  s.  distance travelled in first 6.0  s =  .  m [3]  (e)  without calculation, describe how fig.  1.2 shows that the deceleration of the box is greater  than the acceleration of the box.  ...  .  [1]   [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2  fig. 2.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.  fig. 2.2 shows the same measuring cylinder after a stone has been lowered into it. 90100cm3 0102030405060708090100cm3 01020304050607080 stone  fig. 2.1 fig. 2.2  (a)  calculate the volume of the stone.  volume =  ..  cm3 [2]  (b) another stone has a mass of 98.4  g. the volume of this stone is 41.0  cm3.   calculate the density of the stone.  density =  ..  g / cm3 [3]  (c)  the stone with a mass of 98.4  g has a weight of 0.984  n.   explain the difference between mass and weight.  ...  ...  .  [2]   [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3  fig. 3.1 shows the forces acting on a uniform balanced beam. the beam is pivoted at its centre. p pivot 6.0 cm 5.2 n 8.1 n2.0 cm2.0 cm fig. 3.1  (a)  calculate the moment of the 5.2  n force about the pivot and show that its value is close to  30 ncm.      [3]  (b) the beam is balanced. calculate force p.  force p =  .. n [4]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 fig. 4.1 shows an outline of the main parts of a geothermal power station used to generate  electricity. some parts of the power station are labelled. cooling stationelectrical energy steamsteama b production well injection well water hot water  / steam hot rocks fig. 4.1 (not to scale)  (a) state the names of the parts of the power station labelled a and b. part a   part b   [2]  (b) geothermal energy is one source of renewable energy.   state two other sources of renewable energy. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2]  (c) state two environmental advantages, other than being renewable, of a geothermal power  station compared to a coal-fired power station. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 5 fig. 5.1 shows a metal block on a flat surface. metal block 6.0 cm3.0 cm fig. 5.1  (a) (i)  the mass of the metal block is 1.6  kg.    calculate the weight of the metal block.  weight =  .  n [2]   (ii) calculate the pressure on the flat surface due to the metal block.  pressure =  .  n / cm2 [3]  (b) in an experiment, the metal block is heated and the temperature of the metal block increases  by 100  \u00b0c.   state the effect, if any, of the temperature increase on: 1. the volume of the metal block  .. 2. the mass of the metal block  . 3. the density of the metal block  .. [3] [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 fig. 6.1 shows the path of a ray of red light through a glass block in air.  the critical angle for the red light as it travels from glass into air is 43\u00b0. glass blockair ab p62\u00b0 c ray of red light fig. 6.1  (a) (i) on fig.  6.1, label the angle of incidence at a. use the letter x to label the angle.   [1]   (ii) state the name of the process which occurs at a.  .  [1]   (iii) state the name given to the dashed line at a.  .  [1]  (b) (i) on fig.  6.1, one of the angles at b is 62\u00b0. state the value of the angle labelled p.  .  [1]   (ii) state the name of the process which occurs at b.  .  [2]  (c) on fig.  6.1, draw the path of the ray of red light as it travels from c into the air.   [1] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 7  fig. 7.1 shows a transverse wave. q sprt fig. 7.1  (a) give the label letter p, q, r, s or t  for the arrow which represents: 1. the amplitude of the wave  ..                             [1] 2. the wavelength of the wave.  ..                             [1]  (b) a student stands next to a pond and observes water waves on its surface. she counts 12  complete waves passing a point in the pond in a time of 8.0  s.   calculate the frequency of the water waves.    frequency =    hz [3]  (c) fig. 7.1 shows a transverse wave. describe the difference between transverse and  longitudinal waves.   you may draw a labelled diagram.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a bar magnet. s n fig. 8.1   (i) describe an experiment to identify the pattern and direction of magnetic field lines around  a bar magnet as shown in fig.  8.1.    you may add to fig.  8.1 as part of your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) state a material that can be used to make a permanent bar magnet.  .  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) a student uses two bar magnets to create a uniform magnetic field. he places a current- carrying wire at right angles to the magnetic field, as shown in fig.  8.2. n sbar magnet bar magnetseparation of poles uniform magnetic fieldcurrent-carrying wire fig. 8.2   there is a force on the current-carrying wire.   (i) the student wants to reverse the direction of the force on the wire.    state one change that reverses the direction of the force on the wire.  .  [1]   (ii) the student increases the separation of the poles of the permanent magnets.    state and explain how increasing the separation affects the force on the current-carrying  wire.  ...  .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 9  fig. 9.1 shows an electric circuit. a v thermistorbuzzer fig. 9.1  (a) when the circuit is in a cool room, the voltmeter reading is 5.6  v and the ammeter reading is  0.040  a.   calculate the resistance of the thermistor.  resistance of thermistor =  .  \u03c9 [3]  (b) the temperature of the thermistor increases and the buzzer turns on.   state and explain how the increase in temperature affects the current in the thermistor.  ...  .  [2]  (c) suggest a possible use for the circuit shown in fig.  9.1.  .  [1] [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 10 a student uses a laptop computer. the student notices that the cable connecting the power  adapter for a laptop to the mains electricity supply is damaged as shown in fig.  10.1. fig. 10.1  (a) state the hazard of using mains equipment with damaged insulation.  .  [1]  (b) describe how a fuse protects a mains electrical appliance.  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) the laptop computer uses a transformer to change the voltage of the mains electricity supply.   the input (primary) voltage is 120  v.   the input (primary) coil has 2000 turns and the output (secondary) coil has 200 turns.   calculate the output (secondary) voltage from the transformer.  output (secondary) voltage =  ..  v [3]  (d) state the name of the material used in the core of the transformer.  .  [1]   [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 11 carbon-12 is a stable isotope of carbon. its nuclide notation is shown in fig.  11.1.  carbon-14 is an unstable isotope of carbon. its nuclide notation is shown in fig.  11.2.  1 62c 1 64c  fig. 11.1  fig. 11.2  (a) determine the numbers of electrons, protons and neutrons in an atom of carbon-12 and the  numbers of electrons, protons and neutrons in an atom of carbon-14.   complete table 11.1. table 11.1 carbon-12 carbon-14 number of electrons number of protons number of neutrons [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) fig. 11.3 shows the decay curve for a sample of carbon-14. 02 000 5000 10 000 time  / years15 000 20 000 25 000 04 0006 0008 00010 00012 00014 000count rate counts  / s16 00018 000 fig. 11.3   use the graph to determine the half-life of carbon-14.  half-life =  ...  years  [2] [total: 5]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_m21_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122physics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended)  february/march  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. [no additional materials are needed.] instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *8324509767* dc (cj/cgw) 203605/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 (a) fig. 1.1 shows a piece of glass of thickness 2.0  cm and area 0.15  m2.   the density of the glass is 2.6 \u00d7 103 kg / m3. area 0.15  m2 thickness 2.0  cm fig. 1.1  (not to scale)   calculate the weight of the piece of glass.  weight = .  [3]  (b) the piece of glass shown in fig. 1.1 is used as the vertical viewing window of an aquarium.  the atmospheric pressure outside the aquarium is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa. the average pressure on  the inside of the aquarium window is 1.3 \u00d7 105 pa.   calculate the resultant force acting on the window due to these pressures and state the  direction in which it acts.  force = ...  direction of force ..   [4]  ",
            "3": "3 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) fig. 1.2 shows a vacuum pump connected to the top of a vertical tube with its lower end  immersed in a tank of liquid. the pump reduces the pressure above the column to zero and  the pressure at point x is 9.6 \u00d7 104 pa. point x 12 m liquidvacuum pump fig. 1.2 (not to scale)   calculate the density of the liquid.  density = .  [3]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 (a) (i) state what is meant by the moment  of a force about a point.  .  [1]   (ii) fig. 2.1 shows a large crane on a construction site lifting a block of mass 14  000 kg. 20 m b a blockcounterweightoperator\u2019s cabin fig. 2.1    calculate the moment about a due to the 14  000 kg block suspended from b.  moment = .  [2]  (b) (i) speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity. state the difference between  a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.  ...  .  [2]   (ii) write down one other scalar quantity and one other vector quantity.  scalar quantity  ... vector quantity  ...  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) fig. 2.2 shows two forces acting on an object. 60\u00b0 30 n 20 n fig. 2.2  (not to scale)   draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant force acting on the object. state the scale  you use.  scale ..   magnitude of resultant force = ...  direction of resultant relative to the direction of the 20  n force = ...  [4]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 a power station burns waste materials from farm crops to generate electricity.  (a) state and explain whether this process is renewable. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  (b) the power station uses some of its waste thermal energy to heat water for houses in a nearby  town.   state one problem of using waste energy in this way if the power station is far from the town.   ...   suggest a way of reducing this problem.  ...  ...  [2]  (c) state two environmental consequences of burning coal to generate electricity. consequence 1.   consequence 2.    [2]  [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 4 (a) in terms of the momentum of molecules, explain how a gas exerts pressure on the walls of its  container.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) a fixed mass of gas of volume v1 is at a pressure p1. it is compressed to a volume v2.   (i) complete the equation for the final pressure p2 of the gas when the gas is compressed  at constant temperature.      p2 =  [2]   (ii) state and explain how the final pressure compares with p2 when the temperature of the  gas increases during compression. statement  .. explanation    ...  ...  ...  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 5 (a) state the name of the reflection of a sound wave or ultrasound wave.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 5.1 shows an ultrasound wave being used to scan an internal organ of a human body. ultrasound waveinternal organultrasound transmitter and receiver fig. 5.1   the ultrasound wave has a frequency of 2.0  mhz and passes through human tissue at a  speed of 1500  m / s.   calculate the wavelength of the ultrasound wave in human tissue.  wavelength = .  [3]  (c) fig. 5.2 shows crests of a wave from a point source s approaching a straight barrier. straight barrier s fig. 5.2   (i) on fig. 5.2, indicate and label one wavelength.   (ii) on fig. 5.2, draw three  crests of the wave reflected from the barrier.  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 6 (a) fig. 6.1 is a full scale diagram showing a converging lens, the two principal focuses f1 and f2  and an object po. p of2f1 fig. 6.1   on fig. 6.1, draw two rays from point o of the object to determine the position of the image.  label the image ij. measure the length of the image.  image length = ...  [3]  (b) ring three  descriptions of the image. diminished     magnified     real    same size     same way up as object     upside down compared to object     virtual  [3]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (c) fig. 6.2 shows three rays of green light passing through glass blocks. glass blocksray of green light fig. 6.2   three rays of red light approach the glass blocks on the same paths as the rays of green  light.   on fig. 6.2, draw the paths of these rays of red light to the right of the glass blocks.  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 7 fig. 7.1 shows a horizontal conducting wire xy between two opposite magnetic poles. wire xy  forms a circuit with an ammeter. n swire xy a fig. 7.1  (a) explain why the reading on the ammeter is zero when the wire xy is not moving.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the wire xy is moved and there is a deflection on the ammeter that indicates there is a  current in the wire from x to y.   on table 7.1, tick one box to indicate the direction of the movement of the wire xy and  explain your answer. table 7.1 into page out of page to the left to the right to the bottom  of the pageto the top of  the page explanation  ...  ...  ...  [3]  (c) state what is observed on the ammeter when the wire xy is moved   (i) in the opposite direction to part (b) ...  [1]   (ii) in the same direction as part (b) but at a greater speed ...  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 (a) define electromotive force (e.m.f.).  ...  .  [1]  (b) fig. 8.1 shows a source e of e.m.f. 60  v in a circuit. e h x10 \u03c9 fig. 8.1   the heater h has a resistance of 22.5  \u03c9 and the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 45  v.   calculate:   (i) the power of the heater  power = .  [3]   (ii) the p.d. across resistor x  p.d. = .  [2]   (iii) the current in the 10  \u03c9 resistor.  current = .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 9 (a) write down the truth table for an or gate.  [2]  (b) draw the symbol for a nor gate.  [1]  (c) fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit designed to produce the values shown in table 9.1 for the  output s from the two inputs p and q. s rp qgate x fig. 9.1   (i) table 9.1 is the truth table for the circuit shown in fig. 9.1.  table 9.1 p q r s 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0    complete the column for point r in table 9.1.  [1]   (ii) state which type of gate is used for gate x. explain your answer. statement  .. explanation    ...  ...  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 (a) state the proton number, nucleon number and the value of the charge on an \u03b1-particle. proton number  .. nucleon number   charge  ...  [3]  (b) a nucleus of strontium-90 consists of 38 protons and 52 neutrons. strontium-90 is radioactive  and decays by \u03b2-emission to an isotope of yttrium. the symbol for strontium is sr and the  symbol for yttrium is y. write down the nuclide equation of this decay.  [3]  (c) the half-life of radon-220 is 56  s. a sample of radon-220 is in a container. after 112  s the mass  of radon-220 is 9.2  mg.   calculate the mass of the original sample.  mass = .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/42/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_m21_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test  february/march  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *3522406348* dc (cj/cgw) 203604/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overfor examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the motion of an oscillating metre rule.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1. clamps vertical threads standsdmetre rule horizontal benchl fig. 1.1  (a) ensure that the metre rule is horizontal. you may need to adjust the height of one of the  clamps slightly.   briefly describe how you check that the metre rule is horizontal. you may draw a diagram or  add to fig. 1.1 if it helps to explain your answer.  ...  ...  .  [1]   do not change the length l of the threads during the experiment.  (b) move one thread to the 40.0  cm mark on the metre rule and one thread to the 60.0  cm mark  on the metre rule. the distance d between the threads is 20.0  cm.   move the stands so that the threads remain vertical.   hold each end of the metre rule. twist the metre rule a small amount, as shown in fig. 1.2,  and then let it go so that it oscillates in a rotating motion. metre rule seen from above twistone oscillation fig. 1.2",
            "3": "3 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   measure, and record in table 1.1, the time t for 5 complete oscillations of the metre rule.   repeat this procedure for d values of 30.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 50.0  cm and 60.0  cm. for each value,  the threads must be at equal distances either side of the 50.0  cm mark on the metre rule. table 1.1 d / cm t / s1 t / 1 s 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0  [2]  (c) for each value of the distance d, calculate and record in table 1.1, the value of 1 t where t is  the time for 1  oscillation of the metre rule.   use your values of time t from table 1.1 and the equation 1 t = 5 t .  [1]  (d) plot a graph of distance d / cm (y-axis) against 1 t / 1 s (x-axis).  [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (e) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g = .  [1]  (f) (i) explain why it is more accurate to measure the time for 5 oscillations rather than for  1 oscillation.  ...  ...  .  [1]   (ii) describe how the experiment could be improved to make the readings more reliable.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the cooling of hot water in two different cups.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. benchthermometer lids cup b cup a fig. 2.1  (a) (i) remove the lid from cup a.    pour 75  cm3 of hot water into cup a and replace the lid.     place the thermometer in the water in cup a.    in the first row of table 2.1, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at time t = 0 and  immediately start the stop-clock.    record, in table 2.1, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, 60  s, 90  s, 120  s,  150 s and 180  s.  [1]   (ii) repeat the steps in (a)(i)  for cup b.  [2]  (b)   table 2.1   cup a cup b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 30 60 90 120 150 180   complete the headings in table 2.1.  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (c) write a conclusion stating which cup, a or b, is the more effective in reducing the cooling rate  of the hot water in this experiment.   justify your answer by reference to your results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (d) (i) calculate xa, the average cooling rate for cup a over the whole experiment. use your  readings for cup a from table 2.1 and the equation xa = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8180 t    where t = 180  s and \u03b80 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures at time t = 0 and at time t = 180  s.  include the unit for the cooling rate.  xa = .  [2]   (ii) suggest an additional experiment to show how the lid affects the cooling rate of cup a.    explain how to use the additional results to show the effect.     you are not required to carry out this experiment. additional experiment    ... explanation    ...  ...  [2]  (e) a student wishes to compare the effect of the materials of the cups on cooling rates.    suggest one variable that she should control to make this test fair.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 in this experiment, you will investigate a resistor and a lamp connected in series. the circuit has  been set up for you with the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the  lamp.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. power supply resistance wire crocodile clip va fig. 3.1  (a) (i) switch on.    move the crocodile clip on the resistance wire so that the value of the potential difference  vl across the lamp is 2.0  v.    measure, and record in table 3.1, the value of the current i for the lamp and resistor in  series.    disconnect the voltmeter and re-connect it so that it measures the potential difference  across the resistor.    measure, and record in table 3.1, the value of the potential difference vr across the  resistor.    switch off.    disconnect the voltmeter and re-connect it in its original position across the lamp.  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) repeat the steps in (a)(i)  for vl = 1.0  v and vl = 0.5  v. [2] table 3.1 vl / v i / a vr / v rl / \u03c9 rr / \u03c9 2.0 1.0 0.5  (b) calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance of the lamp rl for each value of vl.    use your values of vl and i from table 3.1 and the equation rl = vl i.   calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance of the resistor rr for each value of vl.   use your values of vr and i from table 3.1 and the equation rr = vr i.  [3]  (c) a student suggests that rr should be constant.    state whether your results support this suggestion.   justify your statement by reference to values from table 3.1. statement  ..  ... justification    ...  ...  [2]  (d) a student wishes to determine the resistance of the lamp rl when the potential difference  across the lamp vl = 0.0  v.   describe how the experiment can be extended to do this with the help of a suitable graph.    you are not required to carry out this additional experiment.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (e) it is possible to use a variable resistor instead of a resistance wire to change the potential  difference across the lamp.   complete the circuit in fig. 3.2 to show a variable resistor used for this purpose.    you are not required to carry out this experiment. power supply va     fig. 3.2  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 4 a student investigates the motion of a ball rolling down a slope.  plan an experiment which enables him to investigate how one factor affects the average speed of  the ball.  average speed can be calculated using the equation:     average speed =    you are not required to carry out the experiment.   the apparatus available includes:   balls of various sizes and materials    a board which can act as a slope   blocks to support one end of the board.   in your plan, you should: \u2022 state a factor which can be measured \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the experiment including exactly which measurements are to  be taken \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display the readings   (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.  distance travelled time taken",
            "12": "12 0625/52/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..   [7]  [total: 7]"
        },
        "0625_m21_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical  february/march  2021  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *2736667153* dc (cj/cgw) 203602/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a student investigates the motion of an oscillating metre rule.  he uses the apparatus shown in fig. 1.1. clamps vertical threads standsdmetre rule horizontal bench fig. 1.1  (a) the student ensures that the metre rule is horizontal.   briefly describe how to check that the metre rule is horizontal. you may draw a diagram or  draw on fig. 1.1 if it helps to explain your answer.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) the student moves the stands so that the vertical threads are at the marks on the metre rule  shown in fig. 1.2. vertical threads 1 2 3 97 96 98 99 fig. 1.2   calculate the distance d between the threads.  d =. cm [1]  (c) he twists the metre rule a small amount, as shown in fig. 1.3, and then lets it go so that it  oscillates in a rotating motion. metre rule seen from above twistone oscillation fig. 1.3   he measures the time t for 5 complete oscillations of the metre rule.  t =.. s   suggest why it is useful to take a trial reading for this experiment.  ...  .  [1]3.63",
            "4": "4 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) the student carries out the same procedure for d values of 20.0  cm, 30.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 50.0  cm  and 60.0  cm. his readings are shown in table 1.1. table 1.1 d / cm t / s1 t / 1 s 20.0 17.85 30.0 11.36 0.44 40.0 8.77 0.57 50.0 6.93 0.72 60.0 5.68 0.88   for distance d = 20.0  cm, calculate and record in table 1.1, the value of 1 t where t is the time  for 1 oscillation of the metre rule.   use the value of time t from table 1.1 and the equation 1 t = 5 t .  [1]  (e) plot a graph of distance d / cm (y-axis) against 1 t / 1 s (x-axis).  [4]  (f) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (g) (i) explain why it is more accurate to measure the time for 5 oscillations rather than for  1 oscillation.  ...  ...  .  [1]   (ii) describe how the experiment could be improved to make the readings more reliable.  ...  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 students investigate the cooling of hot water in two different cups.  they use the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1.  cup a is made from thin plastic. the top of cup a has an inside diameter of 7  cm. cup b is made  from expanded polystyrene. the top of cup b has an inside diameter of 8  cm. benchthermometer 2030 10lids cup b cup a fig. 2.1  (a) (i) record the room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.1. \t\u03b8r =..  [1]   (ii) describe one precaution that you would take to ensure that temperature readings in the  experiment are as accurate as possible.  ...  .  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) a volume of 100  cm3 of hot water is poured into each cup and the initial temperature \u03b8 is  recorded in table 2.1.   the temperature of the water in each cup is recorded every 30  s. the values are shown in  table 2.1. table 2.1 cup a cup b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 87.5 88.0 30 84.5 86.0 60 82.0 84.5 90 80.5 83.0 120 79.0 82.0 150 78.0 81.0 180 77.0 80.5   complete the headings in table 2.1.  [1]  (c) write a conclusion stating which cup, a or b, is the more effective in reducing the cooling rate  of the hot water in this experiment.   justify your answer by reference to the results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (d) (i) calculate xa, the average cooling rate for cup a over the whole experiment. use the  readings for cup a from table 2.1 and the equation xa = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8180 t    where t = 180  s and \u03b80 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures at time t = 0 and at time t = 180  s.    include the unit for the cooling rate.  xa =..  [2]  ",
            "8": "8 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021   (ii) suggest an additional experiment to show how the lid affects the cooling rate of cup a.    explain how to use the additional results to show the effect. additional experiment    ... explanation    ...  ...  [2]  (e) a student wishes to compare the effect of the materials of the cups on cooling rates. suggest  two variables that she should control to make this test fair. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]  ",
            "9": "9 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 a student investigates a resistor and a lamp connected in series.   she uses the circuit shown in fig. 3.1. power supply resistance wire crocodile clip va fig. 3.1  (a) the student moves the crocodile clip on the resistance wire so that the value of the potential  difference vl across the lamp is 2.0  v.   she measures the current i for the lamp and resistor in series.   she then connects the voltmeter to measure the potential difference vr across the resistor. a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 v3 4 52 1 0  fig. 3.2  fig. 3.3   read, and record in table 3.1, the values of i and vr shown on the meters in fig. 3.2 and  fig. 3.3.  [2]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) the student repeats the steps in (a) for values of vl = 1.0  v and vl = 0.5  v.    her readings are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 vl / v i / a vr / v rl / \u03c9 rr / \u03c9 2.0 1.0 0.15 3.0 0.5 0.12 2.4   calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance of the lamp rl for each value of vl.    use the values of vl and i from table 3.1 and the equation rl = vl i.   calculate, and record in table 3.1, the resistance of the resistor rr for each value of vl.   use the values of vr and i from table 3.1 and the equation rr = vr i.  [2]  (c) (i) describe the pattern of any change in the value of rl as vl decreases.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) a student suggests that rr should be constant.     state whether your results support this suggestion.    justify your statement by reference to values from table 3.1. statement  ..  ... justification    ...  ...  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (d) a student wishes to determine the resistance of the lamp rl when the potential difference  across the lamp vl = 0.0  v.   describe how the experiment can be extended to do this with the help of a suitable graph.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (e) it is possible to use a variable resistor instead of a resistance wire to change the potential  difference across the lamp.   complete the circuit in fig. 3.4 to show: \u2022 a variable resistor used for this purpose \u2022 the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the resistor power supply a     fig. 3.4  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the motion of a ball rolling down a slope.  plan an experiment which enables him to investigate how one factor affects the average speed of  the ball.  average speed can be calculated using the equation:     average speed =    the apparatus available includes:   balls of various sizes and materials    a board which can act as a slope   blocks to support one end of the board.   in your plan, you should: \u2022 state a factor which can be measured \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the experiment including exactly which measurements are to  be taken \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display the readings   (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  you may draw a diagram if it helps to explain your plan.distance travelled time taken",
            "13": "13 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..   [7]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/62/ f/m/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib21 06_0625_11/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *2448346913 *cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/11     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  may/june 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21  1 the diagram shows a stone of irregular shape.        which property of the stone can be found by lowering it into a measuring cylinder half-filled with  water?  a length  b mass  c volume  d weight    2 two stones of different weights fall at the same time from a t able. air resistance may be ignored.    what will happen and why?     what will happen why  a both stones hit the floor at the same time. acceleration of fre e fall is constant.  b both stones hit the floor at the same time. they fall at consta nt speed.  c the heavier stone hits the floor first. acceleration increases with weight.  d the heavier stone hits the floor first. speed increases with we ight.     3 the distance\u2013time graph for a motorway journey is shown.    100 908070605040302010 0 0 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 2 0distance  / km time  / min    what is the average speed for the journey?  a 5 0  km  / h b 6 7  km  / h c 7 0  km  / h d 8 3  km  / h     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21 [turn over  4 diagram 1 shows a sealed plastic bottle containing a hollow gl ass sphere and a steel ball.    diagram 2 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken.    diagram 3 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken again until the broken glass is in tiny  pieces.    sealed plastic bottle steel ballhollow glasssphere steel ballbroken glass steel balltiny pieces of brokenglass diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 1 is m1.    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 2 is m2.    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 3 is m3.    which statement gives the correct relation between m1, m2 and m3?  a m1 is equal to m2 and m2 is equal to m3.  b m1 is greater than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.  c m1 is less than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.  d m1 is less than m2 and m2 is less than m3.    5 on mars, the acceleration of free fall g is 3.7  m / s2.    what is the weight of a 2.0  kg mass on mars?  a 0 . 5 4  n b 1 . 9  n c 7 . 4  n d 2 0  n    6 the mass of an empty flask is 34  g.    the volume of liquid added to the flask is 20  cm3.    the total mass of the flask and the liquid is 50  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0 . 8 0  g / cm3 b 1 . 2 5  g / cm3 c 2 . 5 0  g / cm3 d 4 . 2 0  g / cm3    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21  7 the diagram shows a solid object on a flat surface, with two f orces acting on the object.    3 n4  n     what is the resultant force on the object?  a 1  n to the left  b 1  n to the right  c 7  n to the left  d 7  n to the right    8 the extension\u2013load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretche d length of the spring is 17.0  cm.    3 210 01234 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object is suspended from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 1.4  n b 1.6  n c 2.6  n d 3.0  n      9 which situation involves no work being done and no energy bein g transferred?  a a car skidding to a stop on a road  b a crane lifting a load  c a heavy load hanging from a strong bar  d a student dragging a big box over a rough floor ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21 [turn over  10 a student suggests that there are several ways of transferring  energy to a small, stationary block  of iron on a smooth table. he makes the following suggestions.    1 heat it.  2 shine light on it.  3 pass a current through it.    which suggestions are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     11 two men, x and y, try to move identical heavy boxes, p and q.    man x tries to push box p along the floor. the box does not mov e because an object is in the  way.    man y lifts box q from the floor onto a shelf.    box p box qman x man y direction of forcedirection of force objectshelf     which man does the most work on their box, and which box gains the most energy?     man doing  most work box gaining  most energy  a x p  b x q  c y p  d y q     12 a book has a mass of 400  g.    the surface of the book in contact with a table has dimensions 0.10  m \uf0b4 0.20  m.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?  a 0 . 0 8  n / m2 b 8 . 0  n / m2 c 2 0  n / m2 d 200  n / m2   ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21  13 a mercury barometer is used to measure atmospheric pressure.    which distance gives a measure of the atmospheric pressure?    b dc a      14 air trapped in a sealed bottle increases in temperature.    which row shows the changes that occur to the trapped air?     pressure of the air average speed of  molecules in the air  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21 [turn over  15 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright ligh t shines from the side.    when looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,  jerky manner.    bright light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains     16 why are small gaps left between the metal rails of a railway tr ack?  a to allow for expansion of the rails on a hot day  b to allow for contraction of the rails on a hot day  c to allow for expansion of the rails on a cold day  d to allow for contraction of the rails on a cold day    17 all thermometers require a physical property that changes with temperature.    which property would not be suitable for use in a thermometer?  a pressure  b volume  c electrical resistance  d mass ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21  18 the thermal capacity of object y is greater than that of objec t z.    what is a consequence of this?  a object y needs less thermal energy to melt it than object z.  b object y needs less thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1 \uf0b0c than object z.  c object y needs more thermal energy to melt it than object z.  d object y needs more thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1 \uf0b0c than object z.     19 two students carry out different experiments to compare the ab ilities of different metals to  conduct thermal energy.    heatmetal bar melted wax strip experiment 1heatmetal bar pin experiment 2wax     in experiment 1, the bar is heated for one minute and the lengt h  o f  w a x  s t r i p  t h a t  m e l t s  i s   measured.    in experiment 2, the bar is heated and the time taken for the p in to drop off is measured.    what happens to each of these measurements when a better conduc tor of thermal energy is  tested?     length of melted  wax strip time taken for  the pin to drop  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases      20 in which substances is convection a method of thermal energy t ransfer?  a air and water only  b air only  c air, water and wood  d water only     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21 [turn over  21 the diagram represents a wave on a rope.    yxrope     which type of wave is shown and which labelled arrow shows the wavelength of the wave?     type of wave wavelength  a longitudinal x  b longitudinal y  c transverse x  d transverse y     22 the diagrams show water waves in three different situations. t he arrows show the direction of  travel of the waves.    123    what does each diagram show?     1  2  3   a diffraction reflection refraction  b diffraction refraction reflection  c reflection diffraction refraction  d reflection refraction diffraction     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21  23 the diagram shows a narrow beam of light incident on a glass-a ir boundary. some of the light  emerges along the surface of the glass and some is reflected ba ck into the glass.    /g84glass air     which row is correct?     this is an example of  total internal reflection angle \uf071  is the  critical angle  a no yes  b no no  c yes no  d yes yes      24 an object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.    the diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the obj ect.    objectconverging lens     an image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of th e lens.    how does this image compare with the object?  a it is larger and inverted.  b it is larger and the same way up.  c it is smaller and inverted.  d it is smaller and the same way up.    ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21 [turn over  25 a student is asked to give two uses of four different types of  electromagnetic radiation.    in which row are both the uses correct?     radiation use 1 use 2  a radio sterilising medical equipment mobile phone masts  b microwaves mobile phones sterilising medical equipment  c infrared remote controllers intruder alarms  d x-rays security in airports intruder alarms     26 the diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of s ound. the scales are the same  for all the diagrams.    which sound has the highest frequency?     a b c dtime time time time      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21  27 diagram 1 shows a small compass needle with its poles marked. i t is not near any magnetic  materials.    diagram 2 shows a bar magnet with its poles marked. the compass  needle is placed at point p.    nn s psdiagram 1 diagram 2     in which direction will the n pole of the compass needle point?   a to the left  b to the right  c down the page  d up the page    28 which diagram shows the pattern and direction of the magnetic field lines around a bar magnet?    nsa nsb nsc nsd      ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21 [turn over  29 a student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.    the rod becomes positively charged.    what has happened to the rod?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained protons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost protons.     30 the circuit diagram shows a cell connected to an ammeter and t wo resistors.    a6.0 v 3.0 \u03c9 5.0 \u03c9     what is the current in the circuit?  a 0 . 7 5  a b 1 . 3  a c 1 2  a d 4 8  a    31 the diagram shows an electrical circuit.    component x component y    which row describes what happens when the temperature rises?     resistance of  component x potential difference (p.d.)  across component y  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21  32 diagram 1 shows a resistor connected in a circuit. diagram 2 s hows an identical resistor  connected in parallel with the first one.    diagram 1 diagram 2    what is the combined resistance of the two resistors?  a greater than in the circuit of diagram 1  b less than in the circuit of diagram 1  c the same as in the circuit of diagram 1  d zero    33 the current in a lamp connected on its own to the mains supply is 0.60  a.    a table decoration has three of these lamps connected in parall el.    which rating of fuse is suitable to protect this circuit?  a 0 . 2  a b 0 . 6  a c 1 . 0  a d 5 . 0  a    34 a solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. a rod is i n s e r t e d  i n t o  o n e  e n d  o f  t h e   solenoid. the ammeter shows that there is a small electric curr ent in the solenoid while the rod is  moving.    solenoidrod a    which rod is being inserted?  a a heated copper rod  b a magnetised steel rod  c an uncharged nylon rod  d a radioactive uranium rod     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21 [turn over  35 the diagram shows a transformer. there are 460 turns on the pr imary coil and 24 turns on the  secondary coil. the primary voltage is 230  v.    primary coil secondary coil iron core     what is the secondary voltage?  a 2 . 0  v b 1 2  v c 4 8  v d 4400  v     36 a class is designing a d.c. motor. to achieve a greater turnin g effect, three suggestions are  made.    1 have a larger current in the coil of the motor.  2 have a stronger magnet in the motor. 3 put a larger number of turns on the coil.    which suggestions will help to increase the turning effect?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only     37 the charge on a proton is e.    what is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a n eutron?     electron neutron  a e e  b e 0   c \u2013 e \u2013 e  d \u2013 e 0     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/m/j/21  38 the nuclide notation of the isotope strontium-90 is 90 38sr.    which statement is correct?  a a nucleus of strontium-90 has 38 neutrons.  b a nucleus of strontium-90 has 52 neutrons.  c a nucleus of strontium-90 has 90 electrons.  d a nucleus of strontium-90 has 90 neutrons.      39 which statement about \uf061-particles and \uf067-rays is correct?  a \uf061-particles are a form of electromagnetic radiation.  b \uf061-particles penetrate materials more easily than \uf067-rays.  c the emission of an \uf061-particle produces a nucleus of a different element.  d \uf067-rays are more ionising than \uf061-particles.     40 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a per iod of time.    120 906030 0 012345activity counts  / s time  / minutes    what is the half-life of the source?  a 1.0 minute b 2.0 minutes c 2.5 minutes d 4.0 minutes       "
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages.  ib21 06_0625_12/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *7603003757 *cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/12     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  may/june 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  1 which piece of apparatus is the most suitable for measuring the  mass of a pencil sharpener?  a digital balance  b measuring cylinder  c newton meter  d ruler      2 a cyclist records his speed and the distance travelled during a journey.    he then plots the data against time for different sections of h is journey.    which graph shows a section when he is moving with constant spe ed?    distance timea 0 0speed timeb 0 0 c distance time0 0speed timed 0 0     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  3 two stones of different weights fall at the same time from a t able. air resistance may be ignored.    what will happen and why?     what will happen why  a both stones hit the floor at the same time. acceleration of fre e fall is constant.  b both stones hit the floor at the same time. they fall at consta nt speed.  c the heavier stone hits the floor first. acceleration increases with weight.  d the heavier stone hits the floor first. speed increases with we ight.     4 diagram 1 shows a sealed plastic bottle containing a hollow gl ass sphere and a steel ball.    diagram 2 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken.    diagram 3 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken again until the broken glass is in tiny  pieces.    sealed plastic bottle steel ballhollow glasssphere steel ballbroken glass steel balltiny pieces of brokenglass diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 1 is m1.    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 2 is m2.    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 3 is m3.    which statement gives the correct relation between m1, m2 and m3?  a m1 is equal to m2 and m2 is equal to m3.  b m1 is greater than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.  c m1 is less than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.  d m1 is less than m2 and m2 is less than m3.    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  5 an astronaut wants to know how much she would weigh on differen t moons.    she measures her mass on earth to be 82  kg. she researches the values of g on different moons  and uses these values to calculate her weight.    the results are shown.    which weight is calculated correctly?     name  of moon   n/kgg calculated  weight  / n  a callisto 1.2 68  b charon 0.28 23  c dione 0.23 2.3  d umbriel 0.23 0.0028     6 a measuring cylinder contains 40  cm3 of water.    a stone of mass 94  g is lowered into the water so that it is fully submerged as sh own.    100 908070605040302010cm3 908070     what is the density of the stone?  a 1 . 1  g / cm3 b 1 . 2  g / cm3 c 2 . 1  g / cm3 d 2 . 6  g / cm3    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  7 a toy car travels down a sloping ramp at constant speed.    toy car     which statement about the forces acting on the car is correct?  a there are no forces acting on the car vertically.  b there is no resultant force acting on the car.  c there is no gravitational force acting on the car.  d there is no frictional force acting on the car.     8 the extension\u2013load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretche d length of the spring is 17.0  cm.    3 210 01234 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object is suspended from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 1.4  n b 1.6  n c 2.6  n d 3.0  n    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  9 an object is falling through a vacuum.    which energy transfer is taking place?  a gravitational potential to kinetic  b gravitational potential to thermal  c kinetic to gravitational potential  d kinetic to thermal    10 this question is about four methods used to produce electrical  energy.    which method has a correct description?     method energy source  is renewable emits  carbon dioxide  a a hydroelectric power station yes no  b a coal-fired power station no no  c a wind turbine no yes  d a nuclear power station yes yes     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  11 two men, x and y, try to move identical heavy boxes, p and q.    man x tries to push box p along the floor. the box does not mov e because an object is in the  way.    man y lifts box q from the floor onto a shelf.    box p box qman x man y direction of forcedirection of force objectshelf     which man does the most work on their box, and which box gains the most energy?     man doing  most work box gaining  most energy  a x p  b x q  c y p  d y q     12 a book has a mass of 400  g.    the surface of the book in contact with a table has dimensions 0.10  m \uf0b4 0.20  m.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?  a 0 . 0 8  n / m2 b 8 . 0  n / m2 c 2 0  n / m2 d 200  n / m2    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  13 the diagrams show three containers, p, q and r.    pq r     each container contains the same liquid.    the depth of the liquid is the same in each container.    which statement about the pressure of the liquid at the bottom of the container is correct?  a the pressure of the liquid at the base of p is greatest.  b the pressure of the liquid at the base of q is greatest.  c the pressure of the liquid at the base of r is greatest.  d the pressures of the liquid at the bases of p, q and r are the same.    14 a person taking a shower notices that water appears on the insi de of the bathroom window, even  though the window is some distance from the shower.    which statement explains this observation?  a droplets of water from the hot shower move through the air and onto the window.  b the colder window causes the steam in the atmosphere to solidif y.  c water vapour from the atmosphere condenses onto the colder wind ow.  d the hot water boils and turns into steam.     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  15 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright ligh t shines from the side.    when looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,  jerky manner.    bright light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains    16 a hole is drilled in a metal plate.    what happens to the length of the plate and to the diameter of the hole when the plate is cooled?     length of plate diameter of hole  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  17 a liquid-in-glass thermometer uses alcohol as its liquid.    which property of alcohol is used to measure the temperature?  a boiling point  b colour  c thermal capacity  d volume    18 the thermal capacity of object y is greater than that of objec t z.    what is a consequence of this?  a object y needs less thermal energy to melt it than object z.  b object y needs less thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1  \uf0b0c than object z.  c object y needs more thermal energy to melt it than object z.  d object y needs more thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1 \uf0b0c than object z.     19 the table gives some examples of convection and an explanation  of why the convection occurs.    which row is correct?     example explanation  a   air conditioner unit   the unit is placed in a high position to circulate the cold air   rising from the floor level and so keeping the room cold.  b   convection oven   the air in the oven becomes more dense when  heated so it falls to the bottom heating the food faster.  c   hot-air balloon   air inside the balloon becomes less dense  which causes the balloon to rise.  d   land and sea breezes   a breeze forms due to the warm air  above the land moving down towards the sea.    20 in which situation is radiation the main method by which energ y is transferred?  a heating a pan of water using a gas camping stove  b energy reaching the earth from the sun  c heating the air in a room with a radiator  d giving gravitational potential energy to a glider when it is l ifted by thermal currents    ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  21 which diagram shows waves diffracting?    a b cd       22 which statement about the image of an object formed in a plane  mirror is correct?  a it is smaller than the object.  b it is the same size as the object.  c it is larger than the object.  d it is inverted.    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  23 an object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.    the diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the obj ect.    objectconverging lens     an image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of th e lens.    how does this image compare with the object?  a it is larger and inverted.  b it is larger and the same way up.  c it is smaller and inverted.  d it is smaller and the same way up.    24 the table shows information about different colours of light.    colour  of light frequency  /  hz  violet 7.2 \uf0b4 1014  blue 6.3 \uf0b4 1014  yellow 5.2 \uf0b4 1014  red 4.5 \uf0b4 1014    using the data, what is the frequency of orange light?  a 4 . 0  \uf0b4 1014  hz  b 5 . 0  \uf0b4 1014  hz  c 6 . 0  \uf0b4 1014  hz  d 7 . 0  \uf0b4 1014  hz     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  25 sound is a transfer of energy from an oscillating source.    which statement describes how sound energy is transferred?  a a longitudinal wave with the oscillation parallel to the direc tion in which energy is transferred  b a longitudinal wave with the oscillation perpendicular to the direction in which energy is  transferred  c a transverse wave with the oscillation parallel to the directi on in which energy is transferred  d a transverse wave with the oscillation perpendicular to the di rection in which energy is  transferred     26 the diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of s ound. the scales are the same  for all the diagrams.    which sound has the highest frequency?     a b c dtime time time time      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  27 two metal rods each have a painted end. the painted ends are p laced next to the n pole and  s pole of a bar magnet in turn.    ns     the rods are made from iron, aluminium or magnetised steel.    rod placed next to observation  1 n pole of bar magnet attracts  1 s pole of bar magnet attracts  2 n pole of bar magnet nothing happens  2 s pole of bar magnet nothing happens    what are rod 1 and rod 2 made from?     rod 1 rod 2  a magnetised steel aluminium  b iron magnetised steel  c aluminium iron  d iron aluminium     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  28 three piles of small nails, p, q and r, are placed on a bench b elow three electromagnets.    one set of nails is made of copper, one of soft iron and one of  steel.    diagram 1 shows the situation when the electromagnets are switc hed on.    diagram 2 shows the situation when the electromagnets are then switched off.    diagram 1 the switches are closed bench diagram 2 the switches are open benchpq r pqrsmall nails small nails     which row correctly identifies the materials from which the nai ls are made?     copper soft iron steel  a p q r  b p r q  c q p r  d q r p     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  29 a student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.    the rod becomes positively charged.    what has happened to the rod?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained protons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost protons.     30 a student connects a circuit with a resistor x. the reading on  the ammeter is 2.0  a.    the reading on the voltmeter is 6.0  v.    a vx     she needs to produce a circuit with a total resistance of 10  \uf057.    which resistor should she add in series to the circuit?  a 2  \uf057 b 3  \uf057 c 7  \uf057 d 1 0  \uf057    ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  31 the diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, an ammeter, t hree switches, s 1, s2 and s 3, and  three identical lamps.    s1 s2 s3a     with only switch s 1 closed, the reading on the ammeter is 0.04  a.    which row states the incorrect  ammeter reading for the switch conditions given?     s w i t c h  s 1 s w i t c h  s 2 s w i t c h  s 3 ammeter  reading  / a  a open open open 0.00  b open closed open 0.04  c open open closed 0.08  d closed closed closed 0.12      32 t w o  1 0  \uf057 resistors are connected in series and then in parallel.    what is the combined resistance in each case?     resistance in  series  / \uf057 resistance in  parallel  / \uf057  a 10 5  b 10 10  c 20 5  d 20 10     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  33 the information on the back of a television is shown.    220\u2013240  v  ~50  hz  0.6  a    which fuse provides the best protection for the circuit?  a 0 . 5  a b 1  a c 5  a d 1 3  a     34 a solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. a rod is inserted into one end of the  solenoid. the ammeter shows that there is a small electric curr ent in the solenoid while the rod is  moving.    solenoidrod a    which rod is being inserted?  a a heated copper rod  b a magnetised steel rod  c an uncharged nylon rod  d a radioactive uranium rod     35 the diagram shows a transformer.    550 turns 115 turns   output voltage22 000  viron core     what is the output voltage?  a 0 . 3 5  v b 2 . 9  v c 4600  v d 105  000  v    ",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a d.c. motor.    n scoil magnet carbon brushsplit-ring commutator battery    which two changes together will always make the coil spin more slowly?  a decrease the current in the coil and use a magnet of less stre ngth.  b decrease the current in the coil and increase the number of tu rns on the coil.  c increase the current in the coil and use a magnet of less stre ngth.  d increase the current in the coil and decrease the number of tu rns on the coil.     37 the charge on a proton is e.    what is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a n eutron?     electron neutron  a e e  b e 0   c \u2013 e \u2013 e  d \u2013 e 0     38 the proton numbers and nucleon numbers of four nuclides are sh own.    231 88ra           232 90th          238 92u          239 94pu     which statement is correct?  a plutonium (pu) contains one more proton then uranium (u).  b thorium (th) contains one more neutron than radium (ra).  c thorium (th) contains one more proton than radium (ra).  d uranium (u) contains one more neutron than plutonium (pu).   ",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/m/j/21  39 a radioactive atom decays by emission of a \uf062-particle.    which row is correct?     what decays what happens to the atom  a the nucleus of the atom it becomes a different element  b the nucleus of the atom it becomes a lighter version of the sam e element  c the outer layers of the atom it becomes a different element  d the outer layers of the atom it becomes a lighter version of th e same element      40 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a per iod of time.    120 906030 0 012345activity counts  / s time  / minutes    what is the half-life of the source?  a 1.0 minute b 2.0 minutes c 2.5 minutes d 4.0 minutes      "
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  ib21 06_0625_13/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *5727227461*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/13     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  may/june 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  1 the diagram shows a plastic rod alongside a ruler.    01 0 2 0cmplastic rod     what is the length of the rod?  a 2 . 5  cm b 3 . 5  cm c 7 . 0  cm d 9 . 0  cm      2 two stones of different weights fall at the same time from a t able. air resistance may be ignored.    what will happen and why?     what will happen why  a both stones hit the floor at the same time. acceleration of fre e fall is constant.  b both stones hit the floor at the same time. they fall at consta nt speed.  c the heavier stone hits the floor first. acceleration increases with weight.  d the heavier stone hits the floor first. speed increases with we ight.     3 a cyclist rides 300  m up a slope in 50  s.    she then rides down the slope in 25  s.    what is her average speed for the whole journey?  a 4 . 0  m / s b 8 . 0  m / s c 9 . 0  m / s d 1 6  m / s    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21 [turn over  4 diagram 1 shows a sealed plastic bottle containing a hollow gl ass sphere and a steel ball.    diagram 2 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken.    diagram 3 shows the same bottle after it has been shaken again until the broken glass is in tiny  pieces.    sealed plastic bottle steel ballhollow glasssphere steel ballbroken glass steel balltiny pieces of brokenglass diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 1 is m1.    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 2 is m2.    the mass of the bottle and contents in diagram 3 is m3.    which statement gives the correct relation between m1, m2 and m3?  a m1 is equal to m2 and m2 is equal to m3.  b m1 is greater than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.  c m1 is less than m2 and m2 is greater than m3.  d m1 is less than m2 and m2 is less than m3.    5 the table shows the weight of a 15.0  kg mass placed on different planets.    which planet has a gravitational field strength of 11.1  n / kg?     planet weight of 15.0  kg  mass  / n  a jupiter 389  b saturn 167  c uranus 160  d neptune 211     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  6 the tank shown has the dimensions 5.0  m \uf0b4 4.0  m \uf0b4 4.0  m.    it is completely filled with water of density 1000  kg  / m3.    5.0 m 4.0 m 4.0  m    what is the mass of water in the tank?  a 12.5  kg b 6 2 . 5  kg c 1 6  000  kg d 8 0  000  kg      7 a train travels at a constant s peed along a straight track.    which statement about the resultant force on the train is corre ct?  a it is bigger than the thrust of the engine.  b it is constantly increasing.  c it is equal to the thrust of the engine.  d it is zero.     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21 [turn over  8 the extension\u2013load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretche d length of the spring is 17.0  cm.    3 210 01234 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object is suspended from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 1.4  n b 1.6  n c 2.6  n d 3.0  n    9 a stream flows out of a lake and down the side of a hill.    what best describes the c hange in energy stores?  a kinetic energy \uf0ae chemical energy + internal energy  b gravitational potential energy \uf0ae kinetic energy + internal energy  c gravitational potential energy + kinetic energy \uf0ae internal energy  d kinetic energy \uf0ae internal energy + gravitational potential energy     10 energy resources are often used to turn a generator to produce electrical energy.    from which resource can electrical energy be produced without  turning a generator?  a radiation from the sun  b uranium by nuclear fission  c water behind a dam  d wind     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  11 two men, x and y, try to move identical heavy boxes, p and q.    man x tries to push box p along the floor. the box does not mov e because an object is in the  way.    man y lifts box q from the floor onto a shelf.    box p box qman x man y direction of forcedirection of force objectshelf     which man does the most work on their box, and which box gains the most energy?     man doing  most work box gaining  most energy  a x p  b x q  c y p  d y q     12 a book has a mass of 400  g.    the surface of the book in contact with a table has dimensions 0.10  m \uf0b4 0.20  m.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?  a 0 . 0 8  n / m2 b 8 . 0  n / m2 c 2 0  n / m2 d 200  n / m2    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21 [turn over  13 the diagram shows a piece of equipment which is used to measur e atmospheric pressure.    height of mercury columnvacuum mercury     what is this piece of equipment?  a barometer  b galvanometer  c newton meter  d thermometer     14 a car tyre contains air.    the temperature of the air in the tyre rises. the volume of the  air in the tyre remains constant.    students are asked to suggest how this temperature rise will af fect the movement of the air  molecules.    1 the air molecules will move faster.  2 the air molecules will hit the tyre walls more often.  3 the air molecules will hit the tyre walls harder.    which suggestions are correct?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  15 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright ligh t shines from the side.    when looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,  jerky manner.    bright light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains    16 the liquid level in a thermometer rises when the thermometer is  placed in hot water.    what causes this?  a the liquid contracts.  b the liquid evaporates.  c the liquid expands.  d the liquid freezes.    17 which description of condensation is correct?  a a gas changing into a liquid as its molecules lose energy  b a gas changing into a liquid as its molecules gain energy  c a liquid changing into a gas as its molecules lose energy  d a liquid changing into a gas as its molecules gain energy ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21 [turn over  18 the thermal capacity of object y is greater than that of objec t z.    what is a consequence of this?  a object y needs less thermal energy to melt it than object z.  b object y needs less thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1 \uf0b0c than object z.  c object y needs more thermal energy to melt it than object z.  d object y needs more thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1 \uf0b0c than object z.    19 in which states of matter is convection an important method of  thermal transfer?  a liquids only  b solids only  c liquids and gases  d solids and gases     20 solar heating panels consist of pipes carrying water that absor b radiation from the sun.    which texture and colour are the  surface of the pipes so that t he temperature of t he water rises at  the quickest rate?  a dull black  b dull white  c shiny black  d shiny white    21 a child bounces up and down on a trampoline. the instructor ask s her to bounce with a higher  frequency.    what does the instructor mean?  a bounce higher on the trampoline.  b bounce more times in each minute.  c take more time to bounce.  d bounce with a slower speed.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  22 light waves pass through a gap. the diagrams show two possibil ities for what occurs.    diagram 1 diagram 2    which row is correct?     the effect on the wave as  it passes through the gap diagram after it has  passed through the gap  a speed changes diagram 1 is correct  b speed changes diagram 2 is correct  c speed remains constant diagram 1 is correct  d speed remains constant diagram 2 is correct      23 the diagram shows a ray of light striking a plane mirror.    through which point does the reflected ray pass?    a b c d     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21 [turn over  24 an object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.    the diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the obj ect.    objectconverging lens     an image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of th e lens.    how does this image compare with the object?  a it is larger and inverted.  b it is larger and the same way up.  c it is smaller and inverted.  d it is smaller and the same way up.    25 the diagram shows typical wavelen gths (in metres) of radio wav es, microwaves and x-rays in the  electromagnetic spectrum.    in which region are the waves used in tv remote controllers fou nd?    10210\u2013210\u201310 ab c d radio wavesmicrowaves x-rays      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  26 the diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of s ound. the scales are the same  for all the diagrams.    which sound has the highest frequency?      a b c dtime time time time       27 which description of ultrasound is correct?  a longitudinal waves with a frequency greater than 20  000  hz  b longitudinal waves with a frequency less than 20  hz  c transverse waves with a frequency greater than 20  000  hz  d transverse waves with a frequency less than 20  hz    ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21 [turn over  28 a bar magnet picks up two steel bolts.    which diagram shows the magnetic poles induced in the bolts?    nsa s n nsnsb s n sn nsc n s snnsd n s ns      29 which diagram shows the magnetic field around a bar magnet?    sb n sd nsa n sc n      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  30 a student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.    the rod becomes positively charged.    what has happened to the rod?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained protons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost protons.     31 the diagram shows a circuit containing a cell, two resistors, a switch and a voltmeter.    v    when the switch is open the voltmeter reads 1.5  v.    when the switch is closed the voltmeter reads 2.0  v.    what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell?  a 0 . 5  v b 1 . 5  v c 2 . 0  v d 3 . 5  v    ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21 [turn over  32 the circuit in the diagram contains four switches, s 1, s2, s3 and s 4.    s1 s2 s3s4     which three switches must be closed for the heater to work?  a s1, s2 and s 3  b s1, s2 and s 4  c s1, s3 and s 4  d s2, s3 and s 4     33 the diagram shows a circuit.    a v    what happens to the readings on the voltmeter and on the ammete r when the temperature of the  thermistor increases?     voltmeter  reading ammeter  reading  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  34 a solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. a rod is i n s e r t e d  i n t o  o n e  e n d  o f  t h e   solenoid. the ammeter shows that there is a small electric curr ent in the solenoid while the rod is  moving.    solenoidrod a    which rod is being inserted?  a a heated copper rod  b a magnetised steel rod  c an uncharged nylon rod  d a radioactive uranium rod    35 the diagram shows a transformer with more turns on the seconda ry coil than on the primary coil.    primary coil secondary coilinput output  core     which row is correct?     material of core material of coils type of transformer  a copper iron step-up  b copper iron step-down  c iron copper step-up  d iron copper step-down     ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21 [turn over  36 diagram 1 shows a wire carrying an electric current into the p age.    the wire is between the poles of a magnet.    a force is produced on the wire acting down towards the bottom of the page.    diagram 2 shows the situation after the current is reversed and  the magnet is turned through 90 \uf0b0.    n s nsdiagram 1 diagram 2 direction of force     in which direction does the force act after these changes?  a towards the top of the page  b towards the bottom of the page  c towards the left-hand side of the page  d towards the right-hand side of the page    37 the charge on a proton is e.    what is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a n eutron?     electron neutron  a e e  b e 0   c \u2013 e \u2013 e  d \u2013 e 0      38 the nuclide notation for sodium-23 is 23 11na .    how many protons are in a nucleus of sodium-23?  a 11 b 12 c 23 d 34     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  39 a student is investigating the count rate of a radioactive sub stance.    how must he adjust his reading for the background count?  a add the background count to his reading.  b ignore the background count as it will not affect his reading.  c subtract the background count from his reading.  d take repeat readings to eliminate the background count.    40 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a per iod of time.    120 906030 0 012345activity counts  / s time  / minutes    what is the half-life of the source?  a 1.0 minute b 2.0 minutes c 2.5 minutes d 4.0 minutes    ",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/m/j/21  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib21 06_0625_21/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *6763850843 *cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/21     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21  1 the diagram shows a stone of irregular shape.        which property of the stone can be found by lowering it into a measuring cylinder half-filled with  water?  a length  b mass  c volume  d weight    2 which row describes speed and velocity?     speed velocity  a scalar scalar  b scalar vector  c vector scalar  d vector vector     3 four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.    air resistance may be ignored.    which ball has the smallest average speed?    4.0 kga 1.0 m3.0 kgb 2.0 m2.0 kgc 3.0 m1.0 kgd 4.0 m ground      ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21 [turn over  4 an object of mass 2.0  kg is taken from the earth, where the gravitational field stren gth is 10  n / kg,  to the moon, where the gravitational field strength is 1.6  n / kg.    which row is correct?     weight on  the earth  / n weight on  the moon  / n  a 0.20 0.80  b 0.20 3.2  c 20 0.80  d 20 3.2     5 the mass of an empty flask is 34  g.    the volume of liquid added to the flask is 20  cm3.    the total mass of the flask and the liquid is 50  g.    what is the density of the liquid?  a 0 . 8 0  g / cm3 b 1 . 2 5  g / cm3 c 2 . 5 0  g / cm3 d 4 . 2 0  g / cm3     6 the extension\u2013load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretche d length of the spring is 17.0  cm.    3 210 01234 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object is suspended from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 1.4  n b 1.6  n c 2.6  n d 3.0  n    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21  7 a cart has a mass of 10  kg. a boy pushes on the cart horizontally with a force of 50  n. the cart  accelerates at 0.50  m / s2.    what is the frictional force acting on the cart?  a 5 . 0  n b 2 0  n c 3 0  n d 4 5  n      8 a ball has a mass of 2.0  kg. the ball approaches a wall at a speed of 3.0  m / s and rebounds at a  speed of 1.0  m / s.    wall3.0 m / s 1.0 m / s     what is the impulse on the wall?  a 4 . 0  n b 4 . 0  n s c 8 . 0  n d 8 . 0  n s    9 which situation involves no work being done and no energy bein g transferred?  a a car skidding to a stop on a road  b a crane lifting a load  c a heavy load hanging from a strong bar  d a student dragging a big box over a rough floor     10 a student suggests that there are several ways of transferring  energy to a small, stationary block  of iron on a smooth table. he makes the following suggestions.    1 heat it.  2 shine light on it.  3 pass a current through it.    which suggestions are correct?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3    11 an engine produces 240  kj of energy in 2.0 minutes.    what is the power output of the engine?  a 2 . 0  kw b 1 2 0  kw c 4 8 0  kw d 2 8  800  kw     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21 [turn over  12 a book has a mass of 400  g.    the surface of the book in contact with a table has dimensions 0.10  m \uf0b4 0.20  m.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?  a 0 . 0 8  n / m2 b 8 . 0  n / m2 c 2 0  n / m2 d 200  n / m2     13 the diagram shows a mercury barometer.    at which point is the pressure g reater than atmospheric pressur e?    a b dcmercury      14 the table gives information about molecules.    which row describes a gas?     force  between molecules distance  between molecules  a strong close together  b strong far apart  c negligible far apart  d negligible close together     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21  15 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright ligh t shines from the side.    when looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,  jerky manner.    bright light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains     16 why are small gaps left between the metal rails of a railway tr ack?  a to allow for expansion of the rails on a hot day  b to allow for contraction of the rails on a hot day  c to allow for expansion of the rails on a cold day  d to allow for contraction of the rails on a cold day    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21 [turn over  17 a block of metal absorbs 2000  j of thermal energy.    the temperature of the block rises from 10  \uf0b0c to 20  \uf0b0c.    the mass of the block is 2.0  kg.    what is the specific heat capacity of the metal?  a 5 0  j / (kg  \uf0b0c) b 1 0 0  j / (kg  \uf0b0c) c 2 0 0  j / (kg  \uf0b0c) d 400  j / (kg  \uf0b0c)      18 which statement about boiling and evaporation is correct?  a boiling requires a supply of thermal energy but evaporation doe s not.  b evaporation takes place at the surface of a liquid but boiling takes place throughout the  liquid.  c when water boils in a kettle, its temperature decreases.  d when water evaporates, its temperature increases.     19 a metal rod is heated at end x.    xy heat    why does end y of the metal rod become hot?  a energy is transferred from end x of the rod to end y by vibrati on of positive ions and by  movement of electrons.  b energy is transferred from end x of the rod to end y by movemen t of positive ions only.  c energy is transferred from end x of the rod to end y by vibrati on of positive ions only.  d energy is transferred from end x of the rod to end y by movemen t of electrons only.    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21  20 two square sheets of metal, p and q, are heated to the same te mperature. the metal sheets are  shown.    20 cm 40 cmpq     sheet q is emitting more radiation than sheet p.    which statement explains this?  a dull black surfaces are better conductors of radiation.  b dull black surfaces are better emitters of radiation.  c the surface area of q is larger than that of p.  d white surfaces are better absorbers of radiation.     21 a water wave passes into a region where the wave travels more slowly.    as it passes into the slow region, what happens to the frequenc y and what happens to the  wavelength of the wave?     frequency wavelength  a decreases remains the same  b increases remains the same  c remains the same decreases  d remains the same increases     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21 [turn over  22 light travelling at a speed of 3.0 \uf0b4 108  m / s strikes the surface of a glass block and undergoes  refraction as it enters the block.    the diagram shows a ray of this light before and after it enter s the block.    33/g11355/g113 glass block     what is the speed of light in the glass?  a 1 . 8  \uf0b4 108  m / s  b 2 . 0  \uf0b4 108  m / s  c 4 . 5  \uf0b4 108  m / s  d 5 . 0  \uf0b4 108  m / s    23 the diagram shows a narrow beam of light incident on a glass-a ir boundary. some of the light  emerges along the surface of the glass and some is reflected ba ck into the glass.    /g84glass air     which row is correct?     this is an example of  total internal reflection angle \uf071  is the  critical angle  a no yes  b no no  c yes no  d yes yes     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21  24 an object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.    the diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the obj ect.    objectconverging lens     an image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of th e lens.    how does this image compare with the object?  a it is larger and inverted.  b it is larger and the same way up.  c it is smaller and inverted.  d it is smaller and the same way up.    25 a remote-controlled vehicle is travelling on the surface of a planet. the vehicle senses an  obstacle ahead. it sends a radio message to the control room fr om where it is being controlled.  the control room is 2.4 \uf0b4 10 6  km away from the vehicle. the control room sends a message back   to the vehicle telling it to stop.    what is the minimum time that elapses between the vehicle sensi ng the obstacle and receiving  the message back from the control room?  a 8 . 0  ms b 1 6  ms c 8 . 0  s d 1 6  s    26 a sound wave is travelling outwards from a loudspeaker into th e surrounding air.    here are three statements.    1 the air pressure is lower at a rarefaction compared with undi sturbed air.  2 the density of the air is less at a compression compared with  undisturbed air.  3 the distance from a compression to a rarefaction equals half a wavelength.    which statements about the sound wave are correct?    a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3    ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21 [turn over  27 the sound from a loudspeaker must pass through two materials t o reach a microphone.    material 1 material 2loudspeaker microphone     which combination of materials gives the shortest time for the sound to reach the microphone?     material 1 material 2  a air hydrogen  b air water  c copper aluminium  d water oil     28 diagram 1 shows a small compass needle with its poles marked. i t is not near any magnetic  materials.    diagram 2 shows a bar magnet with its poles marked. the compass  needle is placed at point p.    nn s psdiagram 1 diagram 2     in which direction will the n pole of the compass needle point?   a to the left  b to the right  c down the page  d up the page     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21  29 a student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.    the rod becomes positively charged.    what has happened to the rod?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained protons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost protons.     30 an isolated metal sphere is positively charged.    it is then brought near to another isolated metal sphere that i s neutral.    ++ + +++++++++ neutral metal spherepositively charged metal sphereleft right     what happens to the charges on the neutral sphere as the positi vely charged sphere is brought  close to it?  a some positive charges move to th e left and some negative charg es move to the right.  b some positive charges move to the right and some negative char ges move to the left.  c some positive charges move to the right, but the negative char ges do not move.  d the positive charges do not move, but some negative charges mo ve to the left.     31 which statement about the resistance of a metal wire is correc t?  a the resistance is directly proportional to its length and dire ctly proportional to its   cross-sectional area.  b t h e  r e s i s t a n c e  i s  d i r e c t l y  p r o p o r t i o n a l  t o  i t s  l e n g t h  a n d  i n v e rsely proportional to its   cross-sectional area.  c the resistance is inversely proportional to its length and dir ectly proportional to its   cross-sectional area.  d the resistance is inversely proportional to its length and inv ersely proportional to its   cross-sectional area.     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21 [turn over  32 the circuit diagram shows a light-dependent resistor (ldr) in a potential divider.    a voltmeter is connected across the ldr.    v     which row shows the resistance of the ldr and the potential dif ference (p.d.) shown on the  voltmeter at a specific light level?     light level resistance  of ldr p.d. shown on  the voltmeter  a bright low high  b bright high low  c dim high high  d dim low low     33 three nand gates are connected in a single chip as shown.    input 1 input 2output     the whole chip behaves as a single logic gate.    which type of logic gate does the chip act as?  a and gate  b nand gate  c nor gate  d or gate     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21  34 a solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. a rod is i n s e r t e d  i n t o  o n e  e n d  o f  t h e   solenoid. the ammeter shows that there is a small electric curr ent in the solenoid while the rod is  moving.    solenoidrod a    which rod is being inserted?  a a heated copper rod  b a magnetised steel rod  c an uncharged nylon rod  d a radioactive uranium rod    35 the diagram shows an electric generator with the coil in a ver tical position.    nscoil to oscilloscopeslip rings brushesmagnetic poles     which row describes the generator?     the generator  produces the voltage output  will be zero when  a a.c. the coil is horizontal  b a.c. the coil is vertical  c d.c. the coil is horizontal  d d.c. the coil is vertical     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21 [turn over  36 the diagram shows a transformer. there are 460 turns on the pr imary coil and 24 turns on the  secondary coil. the primary voltage is 230  v.    primary coil secondary coil iron core     what is the secondary voltage?  a 2 . 0  v b 1 2  v c 4 8  v d 4400  v     37 the charge on a proton is e.    what is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a n eutron?     electron neutron  a e e  b e 0   c \u2013 e \u2013 e  d \u2013 e 0     38 four students are asked to comment on the processes of nuclear  fission and nuclear fusion.    their comments are recorded in the table.    which row is correct?     fission fusion  a energy is absorbed a large unstable nucleus splits  b a large unstable nucleus splits energy is absorbed   c two light nuclei join energy is absorbed  d energy is released two light nuclei join     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/m/j/21  39 radon 219 86rn  decays by emitting an \uf061-particle.    which nuclide is formed in this decay?  a 215 84po  b 223 88ra  c 219 87fr d 219 85at     40 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a per iod of time.    120 906030 0 012345activity counts  / s time  / minutes    what is the half-life of the source?  a 1.0 minute b 2.0 minutes c 2.5 minutes d 4.0 minutes      "
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib21 06_0625_22/5rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *2416172797*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/22     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21  1 which piece of apparatus is the most suitable for measuring the  mass of a pencil sharpener?  a digital balance  b measuring cylinder  c newton meter  d ruler      2 four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.    air resistance may be ignored.    which ball has the smallest average speed?    4.0 kga 1.0 m3.0 kgb 2.0 m2.0 kgc 3.0 m1.0 kgd 4.0 m ground      ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21 [turn over  3 a ball is thrown vertically upwards through the air. air resist ance acts on the ball.    which graph shows how its speed varies with time?    speed timea 0 0speed timeb 0 0 speed timec 0 0speed timed 0 0      4 what is the best description of the meaning of the \u2018mass\u2019 of a n object?  a the space occupied by the object  b the force that gravity exerts on the object  c the resistance of the object to changes in motion  d the closeness of packing of the molecules in the object     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21  5 a measuring cylinder contains 40  cm3 of water.    a stone of mass 94  g is lowered into the water so that it is fully submerged as sh own.    100 908070605040302010cm3 908070     what is the density of the stone?  a 1 . 1  g / cm3 b 1 . 2  g / cm3 c 2 . 1  g / cm3 d 2 . 6  g / cm3    6 the extension\u2013load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretche d length of the spring is 17.0  cm.    3 210 01234 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object is suspended from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 1.4  n b 1.6  n c 2.6  n d 3.0  n     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21 [turn over  7 a satellite orbits the earth in an anticlockwise direction at constant speed, as shown.    when the satellite is in the position shown, in which direction  does the resultant force act upon it?    earth dba cdirection of motion of satellite satellite      8 a tennis ball has a mass of 57  g.    a tennis player hits the tennis ball with a tennis racket. the tennis ball has a velocity of 25  m / s  when it hits the racket.    the velocity of the tennis ball when it leaves the player\u2019s rac ket is 15  m / s in the opposite direction  from its approaching direction.    the average force exerted by the tennis racket on the ball is 3 5 n.    for how long is the tennis ball in  contact with the tennis rack et?  a 0.015  s b 0 . 0 1 6  s c 0 . 0 6 5  s d 0 . 6 5  s    9 this question is about four methods used to produce electrical  energy.    which method has a correct description?     method energy source  is renewable emits  carbon dioxide  a a hydroelectric power station yes no  b a coal-fired power station no no  c a wind turbine no yes  d a nuclear power station yes yes      10 a stone is released from rest from a high building on earth. a ir resistance is negligible.    what is its velocity when it has fallen 5  m?  a 7 . 1  m / s b 1 0  m / s c 5 0  m / s d 100  m / s    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21  11 the power input to an electric motor is 400  w. the efficiency of the motor is 85%.    how much power is wasted?  a 6 0  w b 8 5  w c 3 4 0  w d 470  w     12 a book has a mass of 400  g.    the surface of the book in contact with a table has dimensions 0.10  m \uf0b4 0.20  m.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?  a 0 . 0 8  n / m2 b 8 . 0  n / m2 c 2 0  n / m2 d 200  n / m2    13 a horizontal metal plate of area 0.50  m2 lies at the bottom of a lake at a depth of 40  m.    the density of water is 1000  kg  / m3 and the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the downward force acting on the plate due to the water ?  a 2 0  kn b 8 0  kn c 2 0 0  kn d 800  kn    14 which row describes the forces between the molecules and the m otion of the molecules in a  gas?     forces between  molecules motion  of molecules  a strong move freely  b strong vibrate only  c weak move freely  d weak vibrate only     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21 [turn over  15 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright ligh t shines from the side.    when looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,  jerky manner.    bright light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains    16 a hole is drilled in a metal plate.    what happens to the length of the plate and to the diameter of the hole when the plate is cooled?     length of plate diameter of hole  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21  17 which statement describes a sensitive liquid-in-glass thermome ter?  a a thermometer which can be used to measure very high and very l ow values of temperature  b a thermometer which gives the same increase in length of the li quid column for each degree  of temperature rise  c a thermometer which is accurate because it has been calibrated  d a thermometer which gives a large increase in the length of the  liquid column for each  degree of temperature rise     18 a  b l o c k  o f  a l u m i n i u m  o f  m a s s  2 . 0  kg has an initial temperature of 20  \uf0b0c. it absorbs 7300  j of  thermal energy.    the specific heat capacity of aluminium is 913  j / (kg  \uf0b0c).    what is the final temperature of the aluminium block?  a 4 . 0  \uf0b0c b 8 . 0  \uf0b0c c 2 4  \uf0b0c d 2 8  \uf0b0c      19 a student sets up four cans. each can contains the same mass of  water at 90  \uf0b0c.    the cans are identical except for the outside surfaces.    which can will cool down the fastest?  a dull, black surface  b dull, white surface  c shiny, black surface  d shiny, white surface     20 thermal energy is transferred by conduction in a metal bar.    which statement is not correct?  a fast vibrating ions leave the surface.  b free moving electrons carry thermal energy through the bar.  c ions vibrate and strike neighbouring ions to make them vibrate.   d ions vibrate but do not change position.    ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21 [turn over  21 a water wave passes into a region where the wave travels more slowly.    as it passes into the slow region, what happens to the frequenc y and what happens to the  wavelength of the wave?     frequency wavelength  a decreases remains the same  b increases remains the same  c remains the same decreases  d remains the same increases      22 light travelling at a speed of 3.0 \uf0b4 108  m / s strikes the surface of a glass block and undergoes  refraction as it enters the block.    the diagram shows a ray of this light before and after it enter s the block.    33/g11355/g113 glass block     what is the speed of light in the glass?  a 1 . 8  \uf0b4 108  m / s  b 2 . 0  \uf0b4 108  m / s  c 4 . 5  \uf0b4 108  m / s  d 5 . 0  \uf0b4 108  m / s      23 which statement about the image of an object formed in a plane  mirror is correct?  a it is smaller than the object.  b it is the same size as the object.  c it is larger than the object.  d it is inverted.     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21  24 an object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.    the diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the obj ect.    objectconverging lens     an image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of th e lens.    how does this image compare with the object?  a it is larger and inverted.  b it is larger and the same way up.  c it is smaller and inverted.  d it is smaller and the same way up.    25 here are three statements about the speed of electromagnetic w aves.    1 the speed of an electromagnetic wave in a vacuum is 340  m / s.  2 the speed of an electromagnetic wave in a vacuum is 3.0 \uf0b4 108  m / s.  3 the speed of an electromagnetic wave in a vacuum is approxima tely the same as in  air.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 3 b 1  o n l y  c 2 and 3 d 2  o n l y     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21 [turn over  26 the sound from a loudspeaker must pass through two materials t o reach a microphone.    material 1 material 2loudspeaker microphone     which combination of materials gives the shortest time for the sound to reach the microphone?     material 1 material 2  a air hydrogen  b air water  c copper aluminium  d water oil      27 which method does not demagnetise a bar magnet?  a heat the bar magnet and place it in the east-west direction to cool.  b place the bar magnet in the east-west direction and hammer it.  c place the bar magnet in a coil connected to an a.c. supply and slowly withdraw it.  d place the bar magnet in a coil connected to a d.c. supply and s lowly withdraw it.    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21  28 three piles of small nails, p, q and r, are placed on a bench b elow three electromagnets.    one set of nails is made of copper, one of soft iron and one of  steel.    diagram 1 shows the situation when the electromagnets are switc hed on.    diagram 2 shows the situation when the electromagnets are then switched off.    diagram 1 the switches are closed bench diagram 2 the switches are open benchpq r pqrsmall nails small nails     which row correctly identifies the materials from which the nai ls are made?     copper soft iron steel  a p q r  b p r q  c q p r  d q r p     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21 [turn over  29 a magnet is suspended by a cotton thread.    the magnet is displaced then allowed to swing freely until it c omes to rest.    why does the magnet always come to rest pointing in the same di rection?  a because of the interaction between the electric field of the m agnet and the electric field of the  earth  b because of the interaction between the electric field of the m agnet and the magnetic field of  the earth  c because of the interaction between the magnetic field of the m agnet and the gravitational  field of the earth  d because of the interaction between the magnetic field of the m agnet and the magnetic field of  the earth    30 a student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.    the rod becomes positively charged.    what has happened to the rod?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained protons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost protons.     31 an isolated metal sphere is positively charged.    it is then brought near to another isolated metal sphere that i s neutral.    ++ + +++++++++ neutral metal spherepositively charged metal sphereleft right     what happens to the charges on the neutral sphere as the positi vely charged sphere is brought  close to it?  a some positive charges move to the left and some negative charg es move to the right.  b some positive charges move to the right and some negative char ges move to the left.  c some positive charges move to the right, but the negative char ges do not move.  d the positive charges do not move, but some negative charges mo ve to the left.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21  32 which circuit has a zero reading on the ammeter?    a aa d cb a a       33 t w o  1 0  \uf057 resistors are connected in series and then in parallel.    what is the combined resistance in each case?     resistance in  series  / \uf057 resistance in  parallel  / \uf057  a 10 5  b 10 10  c 20 5  d 20 10      34 the diagram shows a combination of four logic gates that produ ce an output signal at r that  depends on the states of the inputs p and q.    p qr     which single logic gate produces the same effect as the combina tion?  a and b nand c nor d or     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21 [turn over  35 a solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. a rod is i n s e r t e d  i n t o  o n e  e n d  o f  t h e   solenoid. the ammeter shows that there is a small electric curr ent in the solenoid while the rod is  moving.    solenoidrod a    which rod is being inserted?  a a heated copper rod  b a magnetised steel rod  c an uncharged nylon rod  d a radioactive uranium rod    36 the diagram shows a transformer.    550 turns 115 turns   output voltage22 000  viron core     what is the output voltage?  a 0 . 3 5  v b 2 . 9  v c 4600  v d 105  000  v     37 which row correctly states how nuclei behave during nuclear fi ssion and during nuclear fusion?     fission fusion  a nuclei join together nuclei join together  b nuclei join together nuclei split apart  c nuclei split apart nuclei join together  d nuclei split apart nuclei split apart     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/m/j/21  38 the charge on a proton is e.    what is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a n eutron?     electron neutron  a e e  b e 0   c \u2013 e \u2013 e  d \u2013 e 0     39 some radioactive nuclei decay to give new nuclei which are als o radioactive. part of a series of  decays is shown.    238 92u  \uf0ae  234 90th  \uf0ae  234 91pa   \uf0ae  234 92u  \uf0ae  230 90th  \uf0ae  226 88ra     how many decays involve the emission of a \uf062-particle?  a 1 b 2 c 3 d 5    40 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a per iod of time.    120 906030 0 012345activity counts  / s time  / minutes    what is the half-life of the source?  a 1.0 minute b 2.0 minutes c 2.5 minutes d 4.0 minutes      "
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  ib21 06_0625_23/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *5137607052 *cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/23     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  1 the diagram shows a plastic rod alongside a ruler.    01 0 2 0cmplastic rod     what is the length of the rod?  a 2 . 5  cm b 3 . 5  cm c 7 . 0  cm d 9 . 0  cm      2 four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.    air resistance may be ignored.    which ball has the smallest average speed?    4.0 kga 1.0 m3.0 kgb 2.0 m2.0 kgc 3.0 m1.0 kgd 4.0 m ground      3 a cyclist rides 300  m up a slope in 50  s.    she then rides down the slope in 25  s.    what is her average speed for the whole journey?  a 4 . 0  m / s b 8 . 0  m / s c 9 . 0  m / s d 1 6  m / s    4 an object is on the surface of the earth.    which statement describes the weight of the object?  a the quantity of material that the object contains  b the quantity of space that the object takes up  c the gravitational force acting on the object  d the object\u2019s resistance to a change in its motion     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21 [turn over  5 the tank shown has the dimensions 5.0  m \uf0b4 4.0  m \uf0b4 4.0  m.    it is completely filled with water of density 1000  kg  / m3.    5.0 m 4.0 m 4.0  m    what is the mass of water in the tank?  a 12.5  kg b 6 2 . 5  kg c 1 6  000  kg d 8 0  000  kg      6 the extension\u2013load graph for a spring is shown. the unstretche d length of the spring is 17.0  cm.    3 210 01234 load  / nextension  / cm     when an object is suspended from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2  cm.    what is the weight of the object?  a 1.4  n b 1.6  n c 2.6  n d 3.0  n    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  7 a car of mass 1200  kg is travelling along a horizontal road.    driving force = 4000  n total frictional force = 1000  ndirection of motion     what is the acceleration of the car?  a 0 . 8 3  m / s2 b 1 . 2  m / s2 c 2 . 5  m / s2 d 3 . 3  m / s2      8 object x moves to the right along a frictionless surface towar ds a stationary object y, as shown.    xydirection of travel     they make a noise as they collide and then both objects move to  the right.    which equation is correct?  a change in momentum of x = change in momentum of y  b impulse of force acting on x = impulse of force acting on y  c kinetic energy of x before collision = (kinetic energy of x + k inetic energy of y) after collision  d momentum of x before collision = (momentum of x + momentum of y ) after collision     9 a stream flows out of a lake and down the side of a hill.    what best describes the change in energy stores?  a kinetic energy \uf0ae chemical energy + internal energy  b gravitational potential energy \uf0ae kinetic energy + internal energy  c gravitational potential energy + kinetic energy \uf0ae internal energy  d kinetic energy \uf0ae internal energy + gravitational potential energy     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21 [turn over  10 the energy input to a device is e.    the amount of energy wasted by the device is w.    which expression gives the efficiency of the device?  a we w\uf02d \uf0b4 100%  b w e\uf0b4 100%  c ew e\uf02d\uf0b4 100%  d ew w\uf02d\uf0b4 100%     11 a builder lifts 30 bricks from the ground onto a platform 2.0  m high.    each brick has a mass of 4.0  kg.    what is the work done against gravity by the builder in lifting  the bricks onto the platform?  a 8 0  j b 1 2 0  j c 2 4 0  j d 2400  j    12 a book has a mass of 400  g.    the surface of the book in contact with a table has dimensions 0.10  m \uf0b4 0.20  m.    the gravitational field strength g is 10  n / kg.    what is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?  a 0 . 0 8  n / m2 b 8 . 0  n / m2 c 2 0  n / m2 d 200  n / m2     13 the diagram shows a tank full of water.    h     the mass of water in the tank is m.    the density of the water is \uf072.    the height of water in the tank is h.    which equation gives the pressure p due to the water at the bottom of the tank?  a p = h\uf072 g b p = mgh c p = m\uf072 g d p = m\uf072 h   ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  14 a liquid at room temperature is put on a metal surface which is  also at room temperature.    a student blows gently across the liquid and its temperature de creases.    what causes the liquid to become cooler?  a bubbles of water vapour form in the liquid and go into the air.   b the moving air reduces the kinetic energy of all the particles in the liquid.  c thermal energy flows from the liquid into the metal.  d the more energetic particles in the liquid escape into the air.      15 very small pollen grains are suspended in water. a bright ligh t shines from the side.    when looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,  jerky manner.    bright light pollen grains in watermicroscopeeye     what are the moving specks of light?  a pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains  b pollen grains being hit by water molecules  c water molecules being hit by other water molecules  d water molecules being hit by pollen grains     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21 [turn over  16 the liquid level in a thermometer rises when the thermometer is  placed in hot water.    what causes this?  a the liquid contracts.  b the liquid evaporates.  c the liquid expands.  d the liquid freezes.    17 a student calculates the energy needed to raise the temperatur e of an aluminium block from  50  \uf0b0c to 60  \uf0b0c.    he then does an experiment to measure the energy used to do thi s.    which statement about the measured energy is correct?  a the measured energy will be greater than the calculated energy because some energy is  transferred to the surroundings.  b the measured energy will be greater than the calculated energy because the block absorbs  energy from the surroundings.  c the measured energy will be less than the calculated energy because  the mass of the block  decreases as it gets warmer.  d the measured energy will be less than the calculated energy bec ause the thermal capacity  of the block is low.     18 which row correctly describes a liquid that is boiling?     bubbles seen where it takes  place in the liquid  a no surface only  b no throughout liquid  c yes surface only  d yes throughout liquid     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  19 three students are planning an experiment to test thermal cond uction in different materials.    the students each propose a hypothesis.    1 i think the copper rod will be a good thermal conductor becau se it is a metal.  2 i think the glass rod will be a good thermal conductor becaus e it has free electrons  which vibrate and transfer energy quickly.  3 i think the wooden rod will be a poor thermal conductor becau se it can only transfer  energy along the rod by vibrating the lattice particles.    which of their hypotheses are correct?    a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3     20 a copper plate is shiny on one side and is painted dull black on the other side. the plate is  heated to a high temperature. a person places his hands at equa l distances from either side of  the plate, close to the plate, but not touching it.    shiny dull black very hot copper plate    why does the hand near the dull black surface of the plate feel  much hotter than the hand near  the shiny surface?  a the dull black surface is a better emitter of radiation than th e shiny surface.  b the dull black surface is a better conductor of radiation than the shiny surface.  c the dull black surface is a better reflector of radiation than the shiny surface.  d the dull black surface is at a higher temperature than the shin y surface.    ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21 [turn over  21 a water wave passes into a region where the wave travels more slowly.    as it passes into the slow region, what happens to the frequenc y and what happens to the  wavelength of the wave?     frequency wavelength  a decreases remains the same  b increases remains the same  c remains the same decreases  d remains the same increases      22 light travelling at a speed of 3.0 \uf0b4 108  m / s strikes the surface of a glass block and undergoes  refraction as it enters the block.    the diagram shows a ray of this light before and after it enter s the block.    33/g11355/g113 glass block     what is the speed of light in the glass?  a 1 . 8  \uf0b4 108  m / s  b 2 . 0  \uf0b4 108  m / s  c 4 . 5  \uf0b4 108  m / s  d 5 . 0  \uf0b4 108  m / s      23 a beam of light is monochromatic.    what does monochromatic mean?  a all the waves in the beam must have the same frequency only.  b all the waves in the beam must have the same amplitude only.  c all the waves in the beam must have the same speed only.  d all the waves in the beam must have the same amplitude, frequen cy and speed.    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  24 an object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.    the diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the obj ect.    objectconverging lens     an image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of th e lens.    how does this image compare with the object?  a it is larger and inverted.  b it is larger and the same way up.  c it is smaller and inverted.  d it is smaller and the same way up.    25 which row correctly describes what happens to the frequency an d to the speed of  electromagnetic waves as we mov e through the spectrum from \uf067-rays to radio waves?     frequency speed in a vacuum  a decreases increases  b decreases remains the same  c increases decreases  d increases remains the same     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21 [turn over  26 the diagram shows a model of a sound wave passing through air in an open tube.    q air particle    what is the region q?  a a compression which is a region of high pressure  b a compression which is a region of low pressure  c a rarefaction which is a region of high pressure  d a rarefaction which is a region of low pressure    27 the sound from a loudspeaker must pass through two materials t o reach a microphone.    material 1 material 2loudspeaker microphone     which combination of materials gives the shortest time for the sound to reach the microphone?     material 1 material 2  a air hydrogen  b air water  c copper aluminium  d water oil     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  28 a bar magnet picks up two steel bolts.    which diagram shows the magnetic poles induced in the bolts?    nsa s n nsnsb s n sn nsc n s snnsd n s ns      29 a student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.    the rod becomes positively charged.    what has happened to the rod?  a it has gained electrons.  b it has gained protons.  c it has lost electrons.  d it has lost protons.     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21 [turn over  30 an isolated metal sphere is positively charged.    it is then brought near to another isolated metal sphere that i s neutral.    ++ + +++++++++ neutral metal spherepositively charged metal sphereleft right     what happens to the charges on the neutral sphere as the positi vely charged sphere is brought  close to it?  a some positive charges move to th e left and some negative charg es move to the right.  b some positive charges move to the right and some negative char ges move to the left.  c some positive charges move to the right, but the negative char ges do not move.  d the positive charges do not move, but some negative charges mo ve to the left.     31 the diagram shows a circuit containing a cell, two resistors, a switch and a voltmeter.    v    when the switch is open the voltmeter reads 1.5  v.    when the switch is closed the voltmeter reads 2.0  v.    what is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell?  a 0 . 5  v b 1 . 5  v c 2 . 0  v d 3 . 5  v    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  32 a 4.0  \uf057 resistor and a 12  \uf057 resistor are connected in parallel.    4.0 \u03c9 12 \u03c9     what is the effective resistance of this combination of resisto rs?  a 0 . 3 3  \uf057 b 3.0  \uf057 c 8 . 0  \uf057 d 1 6  \uf057     33 which combination of two gates will result in the truth table shown?    p q r  0 0 0  0 1 1  1 0 1  1 1 1    a p qrb p qr c p qrd p qr      ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21 [turn over  34 a solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. a rod is i n s e r t e d  i n t o  o n e  e n d  o f  t h e   solenoid. the ammeter shows that there is a small electric curr ent in the solenoid while the rod is  moving.    solenoidrod a    which rod is being inserted?  a a heated copper rod  b a magnetised steel rod  c an uncharged nylon rod  d a radioactive uranium rod    35 a  1 2  v, 36  w lamp shines at normal brightness when connected to a mains tr ansformer.    assume the transformer is 100% efficient.      240  v a.c. mains12 v 36 w1200 turnsiron core secondary coil    which row shows the number of turns in the secondary coil and t he current in the mains wires?     number of turns  in secondary coil current in the  mains wire  / a  a 60 0.15  b 60 3.0  c 180 0.15  d 180 3.0     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  36 diagram 1 shows a wire carrying an electric current into the p age.    the wire is between the poles of a magnet.    a force is produced on the wire acting down towards the bottom of the page.    diagram 2 shows the situation after the current is reversed and  the magnet is turned through 90 \uf0b0.    n s nsdiagram 1 diagram 2 direction of force     in which direction does the force act after these changes?  a towards the top of the page  b towards the bottom of the page  c towards the left-hand side of the page  d towards the right-hand side of the page    37 the charge on a proton is e.    what is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a n eutron?     electron neutron  a e e  b e 0   c \u2013 e \u2013 e  d \u2013 e 0     ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21 [turn over  38 the diagram shows \uf061-particles incident on a thin metal foil.    thin metal foil    how does the motion of these particles give evidence for the nu clear atom?  a most particles passing through with minimal deflection shows th at the atom is mostly empty  space.  b most particles passing through with minimal deflection shows th at the mass of the atom is  uniformly distributed.  c large deflections of some particles shows that the atom is most ly empty space.  d large deflections of some particles shows that the charge in th e atom is uniformly  distributed.     39 radium-226, 226 88ra , is an \uf061-emitter.    it is implanted inside cancerous tumours.    it is safe to use as it kills the cancerous cells, but not the healthy ones surrounding the tumour.    which properties of \uf061-particles, compared to other emissions, enable this use of rad ium-226?     ionising effect  of \uf061-particles penetration  of \uf061-particles  a high high  b high low  c low high  d low low     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  40 the graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a per iod of time.    120 906030 0 012345activity counts  / s time  / minutes    what is the half-life of the source?  a 1.0 minute b 2.0 minutes c 2.5 minutes d 4.0 minutes     ",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for eac h series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/m/j/21  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (dh/fc) 198580/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over *1102146884* physics  0625/31 paper 3 theory (core)  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 fig. 1.1 shows a speed\u2013time graph for a car. 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 time  / s60 70 80 90 100246speed m / s810 fig. 1.1  (a) (i) describe the motion of the car from 0 to 50  s, as shown in fig. 1.1.  .  [1]   (ii) describe the motion of the car from 50  s to 90  s, as shown in fig. 1.1.  ...  .  [1]   (iii) calculate the distance travelled by the car between 50  s and 90  s.  distance travelled =  .  m [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) a motorcycle travels at a constant speed.   (i) the motorcycle travels 710  m in 87  s.    calculate the speed of the motorcycle and show that it is close to 8  m / s.  [3]   (ii) the motorcycle in part (b)(i)  travels at a constant speed for 87  s.    on fig. 1.1, draw the speed\u2013time graph for the motorcycle.  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 a liquid-in-glass thermometer contains mercury.  (a) the mass of the mercury in the thermometer is 12  g.   (i) calculate the weight of the mercury.  weight of mercury =  .  n [3]   (ii) the 12  g of mercury has a volume of 0.88  cm3.    calculate the density of mercury.  density of mercury =  ..  g / cm3 [3]  (b) the mercury in the thermometer expands when its temperature rises.   (i) state what happens to the mass of the mercury when its temperature rises.    tick (3) one box. mass decreases  mass stays the same mass increases  [1]   (ii) state what happens to the density of the mercury when its temperature rises.    tick (3) one box. density decreases  density stays the same density increases  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 a plank balances horizontally on a log of wood, which acts as a pivot.  (a) a girl sits on one end of the plank, and her brother pushes down on the other end to make the  plank balance horizontally. fig. 3.1 shows the arrangement. pivot 1.2 m weight = 404  n f1.6 m fig. 3.1  (not to scale)   calculate the moment of the girl\u2019s weight about the pivot and show that it is close to 480  n m.   [3]  (b) the plank balances horizontally when the boy pushes down with a force f at a distance of  1.6 m from the pivot.   calculate the size of force f.  force f =  .  n [3]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a country needs to build new power stations to provide electricity for homes and industry.  one type of power station is a coal-fired power station.  (a) describe how the energy stored in the coal is used in a coal-fired power station to generate  electrical energy.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) some people in the country argue against building a new coal-fired power station.   they say that the power station is expensive and not very efficient.    explain the meaning of not very efficient .  ...  .  [1]  (c) apart from cost and efficiency, give two other reasons for not building a coal-fired power  station. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 5 (a)  a man starts pulling his suitcase across the floor.  suitcase 20 n 12 n fig. 5.1  (not to scale)   (i) fig. 5.1 shows the horizontal forces acting on the suitcase.    calculate the resultant horizontal force on the suitcase.  size of force =  ...  n  direction  ...  [2]   (ii) after a short time, the suitcase is moving at a constant speed.    suggest values for the sizes of the two horizontal forces on the suitcase when it is  moving at a constant speed.    pulling force =  (n)    friction force =  (n)  [1]  (b) the total downward force of the suitcase on the ground is 150  n. the suitcase has two wheels.   each wheel has an area of 0.60  cm2 touching the ground.   calculate the pressure of the suitcase on the ground.  pressure on the ground =  .  n / cm2 [4]   [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 fig. 6.1 shows a smoke cell. the smoke cell contains air molecules and smoke particles.  a student views the motion of the smoke particles in the smoke cell by using a microscope. microscope air molecules and smoke particlessmoke cell light fig. 6.1  fig. 6.2 shows the path of one of the smoke particles. fig. 6.2  (a) state the term used for the motion of the smoke particle.  .  [1]  (b) explain the motion of the smoke particle in fig. 6.2.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 4]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 7 a narrow beam of white light enters a glass prism and splits into the colours of the visible spectrum,  as shown in fig. 7.1. glass prism colours of visible spectrum narrow beam of white light fig. 7.1  (a) the rays leaving the prism represent the seven main colours of the visible spectrum.   complete the labelling on fig. 7.1 by writing the colours of the visible spectrum in the table.  [2]  (b) state the term used to describe:   (i) the bending of the light as it enters the prism  .  [1]   (ii) the different amounts of bending that produce the spectrum.  .  [1]  (c) a student incorrectly writes some sentences about electromagnetic waves. his teacher circles  a mistake in each sentence.   in the table, write a suitable correction for each mistake. the first one has been done for you.   student\u2019s sentences correction the speed of light is faster than radio waves in a  vacuumthe same as x-rays are used in television remote controllers radio waves have the highest frequencies in the  electromagnetic spectrum  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 (a) a loudspeaker is producing a sound.   choose words from the box to complete the sentences about sound. amplitude     frequency     speed     wavelength   (i)   to increase the loudness of the sound, increase the . of the  sound wave.  [1]   (ii)  to increase the pitch of the sound, increase the . of the  sound wave.  [1]  (b) two students determine the speed of sound in air.   the students stand together, 80  m from a large brick wall as shown in fig. 8.1.  80 mbrick wall fig. 8.1  (not to scale)   one student shouts and as he shouts the other student starts a stop-watch. she stops the  stop-watch when she hears the echo of the shout.   the reading on the stop-watch is 0.56  s.   (i) state the total  distance the sound travels during the 0.56  s.  distance =  .  m [1]   (ii) calculate the speed of sound in air using the measurements given in part (b).  speed of sound =  .  m / s [3]   (iii) the students\u2019 value for the speed of sound is not accurate.    suggest two ways of improving the students\u2019 experiment. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 9 (a) the box lists four materials. aluminium     iron    plastic     wood   use words from the box to answer parts (i) and (ii).   each word may be used once, more than once or not at all.   (i) state all materials that are electrical insulators.  .  [1]   (ii) state one example of a magnetic material.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 9.1 shows two magnets, p and q, which are repelling each other. magnet pn magnet q  fig. 9.1   on magnet p, the n pole is labelled n.   on fig. 9.1, label the other pole on magnet p and both  poles on magnet q.  [1]  (c) one advantage that electromagnets have, compared with permanent magnets, is that their  strength can easily be altered.   state one other advantage of an electromagnet compared with a permanent magnet.  .  [1]  (d) a student wants to make the strongest electromagnet possible.   indicate which properties produce the strongest  electromagnet.     tick (3) one box in each list. number of turns  in the coilmaterial in the core size of current  in the coil 200 turns air 20 ma 100 turns iron 0.5 a 50 turns plastic 3.0 a  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows a lamp and a resistor connected in a circuit. a a4.0 v x y 3.0\u03c9 5.0\u03c9 fig. 10.1   (i) determine the combined resistance of the 3.0  \u03c9 resistor and the 5.0  \u03c9 lamp.  combined resistance =  .  \u03c9 [1]   (ii) the reading on ammeter x is 0.50  a.    state the reading on ammeter y.  reading on ammeter y =  ..  a [1]  (b) in another circuit, the 3.0  \u03c9 resistor and the 5.0  \u03c9 lamp are connected in parallel, as shown in  fig. 10.2.  a a4.0 v 3.0\u03c9 5.0\u03c9x y fig. 10.2   the lamp and resistor have changed from a series to a parallel combination.    state and explain the effect of this change on the current in ammeter x.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) the current in a different lamp is 0.40  a when the potential difference (p.d.) across the lamp is  6.0 v.   calculate the resistance of the lamp.  resistance of lamp =  .  \u03c9 [3]  [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 11 a student uses a coil and a magnet on a spring to generate an electromotive force (e.m.f.) that  varies. he suspends the magnet above a coil as shown in fig. 11.1. n s xto centre-reading voltmeterspring magnet coil fig. 11.1  (a) the student pulls the magnet through the coil to x and then releases it. the magnet moves  up and down through the coil.   state the type of voltage induced in the coil. tick ( 3) one box.    alternating      digital      direct    [1]  (b) state two ways of increasing the voltage induced in the coil. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 3]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 12 (a) table 12.1 describes four nuclides. table 12.1 name of nuclide plutonium-238 thorium-234 uranium-235 uranium-238 nuclide notation238 94pu234 90th235 92u238 92u   (i) state which two nuclides have the same number of protons.  .  [1]   (ii) state which two nuclides have the same number of nucleons.  .  [1]   (iii) state which one of the four nuclides has the most electrons orbiting when it is in a neutral  atom.  .  [1]  (b) thorium-234 has a half-life of 24 days. a sample of radioactive material contains 40  mg of  thorium-234.   calculate the mass of thorium-234 remaining after 72 days.  mass of thorium-234 remaining =  ...  mg [3]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 *3800367083* dc (dh/fc) 198581/4 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core)  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 fig. 1.1 shows the core of a transformer. it is made from thin sheets of iron. 50 mm thin sheet of ironcore of transformer fig. 1.1  (not to scale)  (a) there are 200 sheets of iron in the core of the transformer. the thickness of the core is 50  mm.   calculate the average thickness of one sheet of iron.  average thickness of one sheet =  ..  mm [3]  (b) the density of the iron in the core is 7.65  g / cm3. the mass of the core is 1377  g.   calculate the volume of the core.  volume =  ..  cm3 [3]  (c) state the name of a device used to measure mass.  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows how the speed of a car varies between 0 and 60.0  s. 0 0 10.0 20.0 time  / s30.0 40.0 50.0 60.010.020.030.0speed m / s40.0 fig. 2.1  (a) determine the speed of the car using information from fig. 2.1:   (i) when the time is 5.0  s  speed =  .  m / s [2]   (ii) when the car is moving with a constant speed.  speed =  .  m / s [1]  (b) describe how the speed of the car changes between 30.0  s and 60.0  s.  .  [2]  (c) determine the distance travelled by the car between 10.0  s and 30.0  s.  distance travelled =  .  m [3]  (d) the total distance travelled by the car in the last 30.0  s is 226  m.    calculate the average speed of the car in the last 30.0  s.  average speed =  .  m / s [3]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 fig. 3.1 shows a barrier used at a car park. the beam can be raised and lowered by a man  rotating it about its pivot. heavy weight wpivot beam 150  n1.8 m fig. 3.1  (not to scale)  (a) the weight of the beam is 150  n. this acts at a distance of 1.8  m from the pivot as shown in  fig. 3.1.   calculate the moment of the weight of the beam about the pivot.    include the correct unit in your answer.  moment of weight of beam =    unit .  [4]  (b) when the weight w of the heavy weight acts at a distance of 0.6  m from the pivot, the barrier  is horizontal and balanced as shown in fig. 3.1.     the man raises the barrier and the heavy weight slips to a distance of 0.8  m from the pivot.   this causes a problem for the man trying to lower the barrier.   describe and explain the problem this causes for the man lowering the barrier.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 4 a student investigates energy changes when a ball rolls down a curved track.  the student holds the ball at a starting point on the curved track, as shown in fig. 4.1. starting point curved track stopping point table top fig. 4.1  the ball is released. it rolls down the track, up the other side to the stopping point and then back  down again.  (a) describe the energy changes that take place as the ball rolls from the starting point to the  stopping point.  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) the height of the stopping point is less than the height of the starting point.   describe how the principle of conservation of energy explains the difference between the  height of the stopping point and the height of the starting point.    ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 5 fig. 5.1 shows a device connected to a gas cylinder. the device is used to measure the pressure  of the gas inside the cylinder. gas from cylinder mercury7.0 cm7.0 cm fig. 5.1  (a) (i) state the name of the device shown in fig. 5.1.  .  [1]   (ii) the atmospheric pressure is equal to 75  cm of mercury.    determine the pressure of the gas in the cylinder. use information from fig. 5.1.  pressure of gas =    cm of mercury  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 5.2 shows two identical heavy stone tiles placed on soft ground. one is vertical and the  other is horizontal. vertical tile horizontal tile soft ground fig. 5.2   one of the tiles sinks into the soft ground.   state and explain which tile sinks into the soft ground.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. bulb made from thin glass narrow tube\u201310 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110\u00b0c fig. 6.1   (i) state the temperature indicated on the thermometer in fig. 6.1.  .  [1]   (ii) explain why:    1. the bulb is made from thin glass      ..  [1]    2. the tube, along which the liquid expands, is narrow.      ..  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) a substance cools from 40  \u00b0c to \u201320  \u00b0c.   the substance takes 40 minutes to cool from 40  \u00b0c to its melting point of \u201312  \u00b0c. the  substance then takes 20 minutes to freeze.    on fig. 6.2, sketch a temperature\u2013time graph as the substance cools from 40  \u00b0c to \u201320  \u00b0c. \u2013 4020 40 time  / minutes 60 80 10 30 50 70 \u201320020temperature  / \u00b0c 4060 0 fig. 6.2  [4]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 7 (a) both radio waves and \u03b3-rays (gamma) are radiations in the electromagnetic spectrum. fig. 7.1  shows the main regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. most regions are labelled. radio wavesmicrowave  radiationinfrared  radiationvisible light... .. ...\u03b3-rays fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, write the names of the radiations in the other two parts of the electromagnetic  spectrum.  [2]   (ii) state one use of \u03b3-rays.  .  [1]   (iii) a star emits radio waves and \u03b3-rays at the same time. they all travel across the vacuum  of space to the earth\u2019s atmosphere.    state whether the radio waves or the \u03b3-rays, if either, arrive first at the earth\u2019s atmosphere.  give a reason for your answer. statement  .. reason  .  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 7.2 shows pulses of a signal from a star.  0 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 time  / samplitude of signal 1.6 1.8 2.0 fig. 7.2   (i) use the graph in fig. 7.2 to determine the time between pulses.  time between pulses =  ..  s [2]   (ii) determine the frequency of the pulses in fig. 7.2.  frequency =    hz [2]  [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 a student uses a semicircular glass block to investigate refraction.   (a) he shines a ray of red light into the block, as shown in fig. 8.1.   x is the middle of the flat surface.  flat surface glass ray of red lightairx fig. 8.1   (i) on fig. 8.1, draw the normal where the ray meets the flat surface at x.  [1]   (ii) on fig. 8.1, label the angle of refraction. use the letter r for the label.  [1]   (iii) the student uses a semicircular glass block. state the name of one other piece of  equipment that he needs for the investigation.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 8.2 shows a ray of red light incident on the flat surface of the semicircular glass block.    the angle of incidence is greater than the critical angle for glass. glass ray of red lightair x fig. 8.2   on fig. 8.2, draw the path of the ray after it strikes the flat surface.  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows an electric circuit. a component x light-dependent resistor (ldr)v fig. 9.1   (i) the current in the metal wires of the circuit is a flow of particles.    state the name of these particles.  .  [1]   (ii) state the name of component x.  .  [1]   (iii) the circuit is in a darkened room. the voltmeter reading is 5.5  v and the ammeter  reading is 0.050  a.    calculate the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (ldr).  resistance =  .  \u03c9 [3]  (b) the light in the room is switched on. the room becomes bright.   state and explain how increasing the brightness of the light that falls on the ldr changes the  current in the circuit.  ...  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 fig. 10.1 shows an electric screwdriver which has an electric motor and a battery.  electric motor battery fig. 10.1  (a) (i) the electric motor has a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field. the screwdriver\u2019s  manufacturer decides that the turning effect of the coil is too small.    state three  ways of increasing the turning effect of the coil. 1.  ... 2.  ... 3.  ...  [3]   (ii) the coil in the motor can rotate in either direction.    state what happens in the coil to reverse the direction of rotation.  .  [1]  (b) the battery is charged using a transformer connected to an a.c. power supply.   the primary voltage vp to the transformer is 234  v and the secondary voltage vs of the  transformer is 18  v.   the number of turns on the primary coil np is 2470 turns.   calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil ns.  ns =  .  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 11 (a) the nuclide notation a zx describes the nucleus of an atom.                                          draw a line from each symbol to the correct description of the symbol. symbol description half-life value a neutron number nucleon number z type of radiation proton number  [2]  (b) the activity of a sample of a radioactive nuclide is measured in june of each year.   in june 2004 the activity was 80  000 counts  / s.   in june 2014 the activity was 20  000 counts  / s.   (i) show that the half-life of the nuclide is 5 years.  [3]   (ii) determine the year when the activity of the sample was 10  000 counts  / s.  year =  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. cambridge igcse\u2122 *3680051290* dc (dh/fc) 198582/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/33 paper 3 theory (core)  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall  = 10 m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 fig. 1.1 shows the speed\u2013time graph for a car travelling along a road. 0 0 20 40 time  / s60 80 100 1204812speed m / s16 26101418 fig. 1.1  (a) determine the distance travelled by the car between 30  s and 60  s.  distance travelled =  .  m [3]  (b) the distance travelled by the car between 60  s and 110  s is 460  m.   calculate the average speed of the car between 60  s and 110  s.  average speed =  .  m / s [4]  (c) describe the motion of the car between 30  s and 60  s.  .  [1]  (d) describe the motion of the car between 60  s and 80  s.  .  [1]  [total: 9]",
            "3": "3 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 (a) a scientist has a measuring cylinder, a beaker of sea water and an electronic balance.   describe an experiment to determine the density of the sea water.   include any equations in your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [5]  (b) a plank of wood floats on the sea.   explain why the wood floats.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 (a) a girl and her brother sit on opposite sides of a see-saw as shown in fig. 3.1. 1.9 m 1.2 m 240  n wpivotbrother girl fig. 3.1   (i) calculate the girl\u2019s moment about the pivot and show that it is close to 460  n m.  [3]   (ii) the see-saw is balanced horizontally.     calculate the weight w of the brother.  w =  .  n [3]  (b) the weight of the girl in fig. 3.1 is 240  n.   calculate the mass of the girl. include the unit in your answer.  mass of girl =  .  unit   [4]  [total: 10]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 4 (a) a power station burns fossil fuel to produce electrical energy.   (i) state the form of the energy stored in the fuel.  .  [1]   (ii) some of the energy stored in the fuel is not converted to electrical energy.    suggest how energy is wasted in the generator.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) solar panels produce electrical energy.   state two advantages and two disadvantages of using solar panels, rather than fossil fuels,  to produce electrical energy.   advantages 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...   disadvantages 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [4]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/ m  / j  /21 \u00a9 ucles 20215 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a tractor and a car of the same weight. fig. 5.1   the vehicles drive over the same soft ground.   explain why the car sinks into the soft ground but the tractor does not sink.  ... ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the car driver measures the pressure of the air in a car tyre when the air is cool.    the sun heats the air in the tyre. the driver measures the pressure of the air in the tyre when  the air is warm.    the pressure of the air in the warm tyre is greater.    explain the increase in the pressure of the air in the tyre. use ideas about air molecules.  ...  ...  ... .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 6 (a) three rods are identical in size and shape, but each rod is made from a different material.   on one end of each rod is a pin held in place by wax. the wax melts when it is warm.   the rods are placed on a block of wood and heated equally by a bunsen burner as shown in  fig. 6.1. rods bunsen burner block of woodpins held on by wax fig. 6.1   (i) state the process of thermal energy transfer through the rods.  .  [1]   (ii) explain how the arrangement in fig. 6.1 can show which rod transfers thermal energy  the most quickly.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) (i) state the process by which infrared waves transfer thermal energy.  .  [1]   (ii) state the process of thermal energy transfer which does not require a medium.  .  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (c) fig. 6.2 shows a heater for warming a room. when there is hot water in the heater, the thermal  energy of the water transfers to the room. shiny foil heater fig. 6.2   the shiny foil on the wall increases the efficiency of the heater.   explain how the shiny foil increases the efficiency of the heater.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 7 this question is about the electromagnetic spectrum.  (a) (i) state the name of a region of the electromagnetic spectrum which has longer   wavelengths than visible light.  .  [1]   (ii) state the name of a region of the electromagnetic spectrum which has shorter   wavelengths than visible light.  .  [1]   (iii) electromagnetic waves are travelling through a vacuum. indicate the property that is  always the same for all the waves.    tick (3) one box. frequency speed amplitude  [1]   (iv) indicate the correct statement about the nature of electromagnetic waves.    tick (3) one box. all electromagnetic waves are transverse. all electromagnetic waves are longitudinal. some electromagnetic waves are transverse and some are longitudinal.  [1]   (v) indicate the correct statement about the action of electromagnetic waves.    tick (3) one box. they transfer energy from one place to another. they transfer atoms from one place to another. they transfer molecules from one place to another.  [1]  (b) state the type of electromagnetic radiation used:    (i) for a remote controller to operate a television  .  [1]   (ii) in a hospital to produce an image of broken bones.  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a ray of light incident on a plane mirror. a cbx ray of lightplane mirror fig. 8.1   (i) state which angle, a, b or c, is the angle of incidence.  angle of incidence =  ..  [1]   (ii) state the name of the line labelled x.  .  [1]   (iii) the mirror reflects the ray of light.    on fig. 8.1, draw the reflected ray.  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 8.2 shows a ray of red light travelling through a semicircular glass block. ray of  red lightglass blockair42\u00b0 fig. 8.2   (i) fig. 8.3 shows another ray of red light entering the semicircular glass block at 60\u00b0.    continue the path of this ray through the glass block and into the air. ray of  red light glass blockair 60\u00b0 fig. 8.3  [2]    (ii) fig. 8.4 shows another ray of red light entering the semicircular glass block at 20\u00b0.    continue the path of this ray through the glass block and into the air. ray of  red lightglass blockair 20\u00b0 fig. 8.4  [2]   [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows two uncharged balloons suspended from a beam by light thread. light thread balloonsbeam fig. 9.1   the balloons are close to each other but not touching.   in the box below, draw the position of the balloons when they both have a positive charge. beam  [1]  (b) table 9.1 includes a list of materials.    state whether each material is an electrical conductor or an electrical insulator.   the first example is done for you. table 9.1 material conductor or insulator copper conductor rubber wood iron gold  [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) an uncharged cloth rubs an uncharged plastic rod. the cloth becomes positively charged and  the plastic rod becomes negatively charged.   explain how the cloth becomes positively charged.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows the circuit symbols for three electrical components.   draw a line from each circuit symbol to the correct electrical component. fuse heater variable resistor galvanometer thermistor fig. 10.1  [3]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a circuit consisting of a battery, a fixed resistor and an ammeter. a fig. 10.2   (i) a voltmeter is connected in the circuit to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across  the fixed resistor.    by drawing on fig. 10.2, show how the voltmeter is connected. use the correct circuit  symbol for the voltmeter.  [2]   (ii) the potential difference (p.d.) across the fixed resistor is 11.5  v. the reading on the  ammeter is 0.25  a.    calculate the resistance of the fixed resistor.    include the unit in your answer.  resistance =  .  unit   [4]  [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) a nucleus of nitrogen-13 has the nuclide notation: 13 7n.   determine:   (i) the number of protons in one nucleus of nitrogen-13 ...  [1]   (ii) the number of neutrons in one nucleus of nitrogen-13 .  [1]   (iii) the number of electrons in one neutral atom of nitrogen-13. .  [1]  (b) fig. 11.1 shows a counter measuring the radioactivity of a sample of nitrogen-13. sample of nitrogen-13counter fig. 11.1    the counter shows the count rate in counts per minute.   table 11.1 shows the count rate every 5 minutes. table 11.1 time / mincount rate due to nitrogen-13 counts  / min 0 300 5 212 10 150 15 106 20 75 25 53   calculate the half-life of nitrogen-13 using information from table 11.1.  half-life of nitrogen-13 =  ..  min [2]  [total: 5]"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (st/jg) 198541/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/41 paper 4 theory (extended)  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *4291326166*",
            "2": "2 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a skydiver of mass 76  kg is falling vertically in still air. at time t = 0, the skydiver opens his  parachute.  fig. 1.1 is the speed\u2013time graph for the skydiver from t = 0. 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6204060 t / sspeed m / s fig. 1.1  (a) using fig.  1.1, determine:   (i) the deceleration of the skydiver immediately after the parachute opens  deceleration =  .  [2]   (ii) the force due to air resistance acting on the skydiver immediately after the parachute  opens.  force =  .  [3]  (b) explain, in terms of the forces acting on the skydiver, his motion between t = 0 and t = 6.0 s.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) explain why opening the parachute cannot reduce the speed of the skydiver to zero.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 10]",
            "3": "3 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 fig. 2.1 shows a wooden trolley of mass 1.2  kg at rest on the rough surface of a bench. trolley ball fig. 2.1  a ball of mass 0.52  g travels horizontally towards the trolley. the ball embeds itself in the wood of  the trolley. the trolley moves with an initial speed of 0.065  m / s.  (a) calculate:   (i) the impulse exerted on the trolley  impulse =  .  [2]   (ii) the speed of the ball as it hits the trolley.  speed =  .  [2]  (b) as the trolley moves across the rough surface, it slows down and stops.   explain, in terms of the work done, the energy change that takes place as the trolley slows  down.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 7]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 (a) explain, in terms of molecules, why liquids are very difficult to compress.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a device that uses liquid pressure to lift heavy boxes. boxes pumpmoving oilpistoncylinder oil fig. 3.1   the boxes are lifted by pumping oil into the cylinder.   the force upwards on the piston due to the oil, and the force downwards on the piston due to  the air above the piston, combine to produce a constant force of 8800  n.   the pressure of the air is 1.0  \u00d7 105 pa and the cross-sectional area of the bottom surface of  the piston is 0.016  m2.   (i) calculate the pressure of the oil at the bottom surface of the piston.  pressure =  .  [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) as the boxes are lifted, the depth of the oil increases.    explain why the pump must exert an increasing pressure on the oil as the depth of the oil  increases.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (iii) suggest one reason why the force of 8800  n in (b) cannot lift boxes of weight 8800  n.  ...  .  [1] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 an aluminium saucepan with a plastic handle contains cold water.  fig. 4.1 shows the saucepan on a hotplate. aluminium saucepan water hotplateplastic handle fig. 4.1  (a) state why the pan is made from aluminium but the handle is made from plastic.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the hotplate is switched on and, as the temperature of the water increases, the internal  energy of the water increases.   (i) state, in terms of molecules, what is meant by an increase in internal energy .  ...  .  [1]   (ii) explain, in terms of the atomic lattice and electrons, how thermal energy is transferred  through the aluminium.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (iii) eventually, the water reaches boiling point. thermal energy from the hotplate is still  being transferred to the water.    explain, in terms of molecules, the effect of this thermal energy on the water.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (iv) the mass of the water decreases by 0.11  kg in 300  s. the specific latent heat of  vaporisation of water is 2.3  \u00d7 106 j / kg.    calculate the rate at which the water gains thermal energy.  rate of gain of energy =  .  [3] [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 5 fig. 5.1 shows the structure of a liquid-in-glass thermometer. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100\u00b0cbulb glass liquid  fig. 5.1  the bulb of the thermometer is placed into a beaker of warm water. as the liquid expands, it  moves along the tube.  (a) explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid expands when heated.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid expands more than a solid when heated.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) a second thermometer has a larger bulb that contains more of the same liquid than the  thermometer shown in fig.  5.1. it has a different scale. in every other way, it is identical.   (i) explain how the sensitivity of the second thermometer compares with the sensitivity of  the thermometer in fig.  5.1.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) explain how the range of the second thermometer compares with the range of the  thermometer in fig.  5.1.  ...  .  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (d) (i) state one everyday problem that is a result of thermal expansion.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) suggest and explain one way of solving this problem.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 fig. 6.1 is a full-scale diagram that represents a sound wave travelling in air. direction of travel fig. 6.1  (a) on fig.  6.1, mark two points, each at the centre of a different compression. label both of the  points c.  [1]  (b) the speed of sound in air is 330  m / s.   measure the diagram and determine the frequency of the sound.  frequency =  .  [3]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) the wave reaches a barrier. fig.  6.2 shows the wave passing through a gap in the barrier. direction of travelbarrier fig. 6.2   the frequency of the wave is increased to a value many times greater than the value obtained  in (b).   describe and explain two ways in which a diagram representing the wave with the greater  frequency differs from fig.  6.2. 1.  ..  ... 2.  ..  ... [3] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 7 fig. 7.1 represents an alternating current (a.c.) generator. ns x yhdirection of rotation fig. 7.1  (a) a student rotates the handle h, as shown in fig.  7.1.   (i) on fig.  7.2, sketch a graph to show how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) between  terminals x and y varies with time during two complete revolutions of the coil. fig. 7.2 [3]   (ii) on fig.  7.2, mark and label a point p, for the e.m.f. when the coil is horizontal, as shown  in fig.  7.1. [1]   (iii) the student turns the handle more quickly.    state two ways in which the e.m.f. between terminals x and y changes. 1.  ... 2.  ... [2]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) terminals x and y are connected to the primary coil of a transformer.   state and explain what happens in the transformer as the student turns the handle of the a.c.  generator.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) explain why the power losses in transmission cables are lower when electrical energy is  transmitted at higher voltages.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 11]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 a student sets up a circuit that includes a 12  v battery, an 800  \u03c9 resistor, a voltmeter and a  thermistor. fig.  8.1 is an incomplete circuit diagram because the symbol for the thermistor is  missing. p q800  \u03c9  12 v v fig. 8.1  the thermistor is connected between terminals p and q.  (a) complete fig.  8.1 by drawing the symbol for a thermistor between terminals p and q.  [1]  (b) the 12  v battery consists of eight identical cells connected in series.   calculate the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of each cell.  e.m.f. =  .  [1]  (c) the reading on the voltmeter is 8.0  v.   (i) determine the resistance of the thermistor.  resistance =  .  [3]   (ii) a few hours later, the student notices that the reading on the voltmeter is greater.    explain what can be deduced from this observation.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 8]",
            "15": "15 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 9 there are three naturally occurring isotopes of hydrogen: hydrogen-1, hydrogen-2 and hydrogen-3.  the nuclide notation for hydrogen-1 is 1 1h.  (a) write down the symbol, using nuclide notation, for: hydrogen-2  ... hydrogen-3.  .. [1]  (b) in a fusion reactor, a nucleus of hydrogen-2 and a nucleus of hydrogen-3 undergo fusion.   (i) state what is meant by nuclear fusion .  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) the fusion reaction produces a free neutron and one other particle.    write down, using nuclide notation, the equation that represents this reaction. [3]  (c) nuclear fusion in the sun is the source of most but not all of the resources that are used to  generate electrical energy on earth.   state two resources for which nuclear fusion in the sun is not the source. 1.  .. 2.  .. [2] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. cambridge igcse\u2122physics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended)  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. dc (st/jg) 198540/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over *3872967880*",
            "2": "2 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 (a)  fig. 1.1 shows a sealed weather balloon which is stationary in still air. weather balloon instruments  fig. 1.1   state whether the overall density of the balloon and its instruments is greater than, less than,  or the same as the density of the surrounding air.  .  [1]  (b) at night, the gas inside the balloon cools. the pressure of the air outside the balloon remains  the same.   (i) state whether the balloon rises, falls or remains stationary.  .  [1]   (ii) explain your answer.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) an object is released from the balloon. it starts at rest and eventually reaches a constant  speed.   (i) on the axes of fig.  1.2, sketch a speed\u2013time graph to show this motion. speed time0 0 fig. 1.2 [3]   (ii) state the values of the initial acceleration and the final acceleration of the object. initial acceleration  .. final acceleration  ... [2] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 (a)  define the moment  of a force.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows an object of negligible weight. the object is in equilibrium. 12 cm20 cmpulley 50 kg massobject pivot prope force f fig. 2.1   the object is free to rotate about its pivot p.   calculate the value of force f.  f =  .  [2]  (c) describe an experiment involving vertical forces to show that there is no net moment on an  object in equilibrium. you may draw a diagram in the space provided.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 6]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows water flowing at very slow speed over a cliff edge. water rocks15 mcliff edge fig. 3.1  the water falls 15  m onto the rocks below.  (a) show that the velocity of the water when it strikes the rocks is 17  m / s. [4]  (b) 30 kg of water flows over the cliff edge every second.   calculate the force exerted by the rocks on the falling water. ignore any splashing.  force =  .  [3] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 (a) pollen particles are mixed into a liquid. they are seen to move when observed through a  microscope.   (i) describe this movement.  .  [1]   (ii) explain this movement in terms of the molecules of the liquid and the pollen particles.  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) (i) medical professionals sometimes rub ethanol over the skin of a patient. ethanol  evaporates readily at room temperature and has a high specific latent heat of vaporisation.     state whether the patient experiences heating, cooling or neither at the site where the  ethanol is applied. explain your answer. statement  .. explanation    ...  .  [3]   (ii)  state any effect on the rate of evaporation of ethanol when a fan blows air over the  patient\u2019s skin.  .  [1] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 5 (a) a machine delivers a hot drink in a plastic cup, which is uncomfortably hot to hold.    fig. 5.1 shows the cup with the hot drink. hot drink plastic cup fig. 5.1   fig. 5.2a shows the cup with the hot drink and a holder for the sides of the cup.   fig. 5.2b shows a cross-section through the holder. the holder is made from two strong paper  cylinders separated by a wavy piece of strong paper to make air gaps. hot drink plastic cup holder holder  fig. 5.2a  fig. 5.2b   explain how using the holder makes it more comfortable to hold the cup.  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) a student carries out experiments on the cooling of the hot drink described in (a), with and  without the holder in place. he finds that the holder only reduces the rate of cooling slightly.   suggest and explain another action that reduces the rate of cooling more effectively. suggestion   explanation  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) state the method of thermal energy transfer from a star through the vacuum of space.  .  [1] [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows a ray of green light passing through a prism. prism ray of green light fig. 6.1   a ray of blue light is directed towards the prism on the same path as the ray of green light.    on fig.  6.1, draw the path of the blue light through and out of the prism.  [3]  (b) the wavelength of the blue light in air is 4.8  \u00d7 10\u20137 m.    calculate the frequency of the blue light.  frequency =  .  [3] [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 7 (a)  fig. 7.1 shows two magnets and the gap between the n pole of one magnet and the s pole of  the other magnet. snsn fig. 7.1   on fig.  7.1, draw three  lines to show the pattern and direction of the magnetic field in the  gap. [2]  (b) (i) fig. 7.2 is a repeat of fig.  7.1 showing the two magnets.     on fig.  7.2, draw the position of a plotting compass needle when it comes to rest in the  gap between the n pole and the s pole. snsn fig. 7.2 [1]   (ii) explain why the needle comes to rest in this position.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) describe a method of demagnetising a bar magnet.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 (a)  two identical radioactive sources emit \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays into two vacuum tubes.   (i) fig. 8.1 shows two electrically charged plates on either side of one of the vacuum tubes. source initial path of beam of \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-raysplate at +2500  v plate at \u20132500  vvacuum fig. 8.1    write the symbol \u03b1 once  in table 8.1 to indicate any deflection of the \u03b1-particles.     write the symbol \u03b3 once  in table 8.1 to indicate any deflection of the \u03b3-rays. table 8.1 into page out of page no deflectiontowards bottom of  pagetowards top of  page [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) fig. 8.2 shows the poles of a very strong magnet on either side of the other vacuum  tube. source initial path of beam of \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays s pole of strong magnetn pole of strong magnet vacuum sn fig. 8.2    write the symbol \u03b1 once  in table 8.2 to indicate any deflection of the \u03b1-particles.     write the symbol \u03b3 once  in table 8.2 to indicate any deflection of the \u03b3-rays. table 8.2 into page out of page no deflectiontowards bottom of  pagetowards top of  page [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) fig. 8.3 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor with a split-ring commutator. xcoilbrushsplit-ring n s fig. 8.3   (i) state and explain the direction of rotation of the coil as seen from point x. statement  .. explanation    .  [3]   (ii) the coil rotates through 90\u00b0 from the position shown.     state what happens to the moment in this position.  .  [1]   (iii) the coil is rotated through 180\u00b0 from the position shown. by considering the forces on  the coil, explain how the split-ring commutator enables the motor to turn continuously.  ...  .  [2] [total: 10]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a circuit. a m fig. 9.1   on fig.  9.1, draw two clearly labelled arrows to show the direction of the electron flow and  the direction of the conventional current in the circuit.  [2]  (b) the current in the motor is 13  a. the charge on an electron is 1.6  \u00d7 10\u201319 c.    calculate the number of electrons that pass through the motor every second.  number of electrons =  .  [3] [total: 5]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows the potential difference\u2013current graph for a circuit component k. 0 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 current  / ma6.02.04.06.0potential difference  / v8.010.0 fig. 10.1   calculate the resistance of component k when the current in it is 4.0  ma.  resistance =  .  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a circuit containing component k. point x resistor rcomponent k fig. 10.2   at low temperature, component k has a much greater resistance than resistor r.    at high temperature, component k has a much smaller resistance than resistor r.   state and explain the effect on the lamp when the temperature changes from very low to very  high.   refer to the voltage at point x in your explanation. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (c) state the name of component k.   .  [1] [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a)  a student investigates a radioactive substance in a laboratory.   fig. 11.1 is a graph showing the count rate detected as the substance decays for 7.5 minutes. 0 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.050100150200250 time  / min count rate counts  / min fig. 11.1   the background radiation is 20 counts  / min.   (i) determine the half-life of the substance.  half-life =  .  [3]   (ii) calculate the count rate detected at time = 9.6 minutes.  count rate =  ... counts  / min [2]  (b) the substance emits \u03b1-particles and \u03b3-rays. the student suggests that it is safe to store the  substance in a plastic container of thickness 2  mm.    state and explain whether the student\u2019s suggestion is correct. statement  .. explanation  ...  .  [3] [total: 8]"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (st/jg) 198539/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/43 paper 4 theory (extended)  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *1145470306*",
            "2": "2 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 fig. 1.1 shows a load suspended from a spring. loadspring fig. 1.1  the value of the spring constant k of the spring is 0.20  n / cm. the spring reaches its limit of  proportionality when the load is 15  n.  (a) calculate the extension of the spring when the load is 3.0  n.  extension =  .  [2]  (b) explain what is meant by the term  limit of proportionality  of the spring.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) on fig.  1.2, sketch an extension\u2013load graph for a spring. label the limit of proportionality with  the letter l on your graph. extension 0 0 load fig. 1.2 [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (d) the load is pulled down a small distance below its equilibrium position to position a, as shown  in fig.  1.3. the load then moves up and down between position a and position b in fig.  1.3.      position aposition b fig. 1.3   describe the energy transfers which occur as the load moves:   from position a to the equilibrium position   ...  ...   from the equilibrium position to position b.  ...  ...  [3] [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 (a) fig. 2.1 shows a bookshelf with two groups of books a and b on it. there are six books in  each group of books. all the books are identical. the mass of each book is 0.52  kg. 30 cm21 cm 21 cm1.3 cm 1.3 cm30 cm shelf group a of booksgroup b of books fig. 2.1   (i) explain why the pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group b is less than the  pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group a.  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) calculate the pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group a.  pressure =  .  [3]  (b) a diver dives to a depth below the surface of the sea where the total pressure is 3.0 \u00d7 105 pa.  the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa. the density of the sea water is 1030  kg / m3.   calculate the depth of the diver below the surface of the sea.  depth =  .  [3] [total: 9]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 a car travels at constant speed  v on a horizontal, straight road. the driver sees an obstacle on the  road ahead.  (a) the distance travelled in the time between the driver seeing the obstruction and applying the  brakes is the thinking distance.   explain why the thinking distance is directly proportional to v.  ...  .  [1]  (b) when the brakes are applied, the car decelerates uniformly to rest. the frictional force applied  by the brakes is constant. the distance travelled between first applying the brakes and the  car stopping is the braking distance.   explain why the braking distance is proportional to v 2.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) the car is travelling at 22  m / s.   (i) the thinking distance is 15  m.    calculate the time taken to travel the thinking distance.  time =  .  [2]   (ii) the car has a mass of 1400  kg. the time taken for the car to stop after the brakes are  applied is 2.1  s.    calculate the force required to stop the car in this time.  force =  .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 (a) (i) define specific latent heat of fusion .  ...  .  [2]   (ii)  a cup of water contains 250  cm3 of water at a temperature of 0  \u00b0c. an identical cup  contains 250  cm3 of a mixture of ice and water at a temperature of 0  \u00b0c.    the temperature of the surrounding air is 20  \u00b0c.    state and explain which cup contains the liquid with the lower temperature after  10 minutes. statement  .. explanation    .  [2]  (b) (i) on a hot day, sweat forms on a person\u2019s skin and then evaporates.    explain, in terms of molecules, how the evaporation of sweat cools the person.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii)  explain why this process is more effective when a wind is blowing.  ...  .  [1] [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 5 (a) fig. 5.1 shows a wave on the sea approaching a harbour. harbourharbour walls wave crests fig. 5.1      (i) on fig.  5.1, draw three  wave crests in the harbour.  [2]   (ii) another harbour has a much wider gap between its walls.    describe and explain how the pattern of wave crests in this harbour is different from the  pattern you have drawn in (i). description  ..  ...   explanation  .  .  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b)  a sound wave of frequency 850  hz travels through sea water. the speed of sound in sea  water is 1500  m / s.   calculate the wavelength of this sound wave in sea water.  wavelength =  .  [2] [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 is a full-scale diagram of a lens and an object o. lens o fig. 6.1  (a) the focal length of the lens is 3.5  cm.   on fig.  6.1, mark and label with the letter f the positions of the two principal focuses.  [1]  (b) on fig.  6.1, draw three  rays to locate the image. draw an arrow to represent the image and  label the image i. [3]  (c) state three  properties of the image i.  .  [2]  (d) a student incorrectly states that this lens is being used as a magnifying glass.   (i) state how the image produced by a magnifying glass is different from the image i.  .  [1]   (ii) the student moves the object o to a position p so that the lens shown in fig.  6.1 acts as  a magnifying glass.    on fig.  6.1, mark a possible position for p.  [1] [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 7 (a)  define electromotive force (e.m.f. ).  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b)  fig. 7.1 shows a circuit. 12 v p q fig. 7.1   the two lamps shown are identical. each lamp has a potential difference (p.d.) of 3.0  v across  it and a current of 2.0  a in it. pq is a length of uniform metal wire. the resistance of pq is r.   (i) calculate the value of r.  r =  .  [3]   (ii) another piece of wire is made of the same metal as pq. the length of the new piece  of wire is twice the length of pq. the diameter of the new piece of wire is twice the  diameter of pq.    calculate the resistance of the new piece of wire.  resistance =  .  [3] [total: 8]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 8 (a) state the difference between an analogue signal and a digital signal. you may draw a diagram  to help explain your answer.  ...  .  [2]  (b) draw the symbol for a nor gate.    [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (c) fig. 8.1 shows a combination of logic gates x, y and z. the gates are not represented by the  standard symbols. logic gate xlogic gate ylogic gate za b cd e f fig. 8.1   table 8.1 shows a partly completed truth table for this combination of logic gates. table 8.1 inputsintermediate  pointsoutput a b c d e f 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1   (i) from table 8.1, deduce:    1. the name of logic gate x  .  [1]    2. the name of logic gate y.  .  [1]   (ii) logic gate z is a nand gate.    complete column f of table 8.1.  [2] [total: 7]",
            "13": "13 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 9  (a)  an x-ray machine requires a supply of 110  kv. the mains electricity supply is 230  v. a  transformer is used to supply the correct voltage to the x-ray machine. there are 50 turns on  the primary coil of the transformer.   calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.  number of turns =  .  [2]  (b) draw a labelled diagram of a step-down transformer. on the labels, state a suitable material  for each of the components.    [3]  (c) explain how a transformer operates.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10  (a)  fig. 10.1 shows a beam of radiation in a vacuum. the beam contains \u03b1-particles, \u03b2-particles  and \u03b3-rays. region of uniform magnetic field out of the page beam of radiation, containing \u03b1, \u03b2 and \u03b3-rays fig. 10.1   the beam enters a region where there is a strong, uniform magnetic field. the direction of the  magnetic field is out of the page.   on fig.  10.1, mark and label the paths through the magnetic field of:   (i) \u03b1-particles (label this path \u03b1) [1]   (ii) \u03b2-particles (label this path \u03b2) [2]   (iii) \u03b3-rays (label this path \u03b3). [1]  (b) radioactive sources have many uses in medicine.   state two safety precautions which hospital staff take when working with \u03b3-ray sources. 1.  ... 2.  .  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (c) the radioactive isotope iodine-131 is used as a tracer in medical diagnosis. a nucleus of  iodine-131 contains 53 protons and 78 neutrons. the symbol for iodine is i.   (i) use nuclide notation to show this isotope of iodine.     [1]   (ii) iodine-131 emits \u03b3-radiation. it has a half-life of 8 hours.    explain why this emission and this half-life make iodine-131 a suitable material for a  tracer in medical diagnosis.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/43/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (pq/sg) 199332/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over *5807442986* physics  0625/51 paper 5 practical test  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the period of a pendulum. carry out the following  instructions, referring to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. xdsplit cork floorbob        split cork one complete oscillation  fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  a pendulum has been set up for you as shown in fig. 1.1.   (a) measure the distance d between the bottom of the split cork and the floor.  d =    cm [1]   this distance d must remain constant throughout the experiment.  (b) \u2022  adjust the length of the pendulum until the distance x, measured from the centre of the  bob to the floor, is 50.0  cm.  \u2022 displace the bob slightly and release it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one complete  oscillation of the pendulum. \u2022 measure, and record in table 1.1, the time t for 10 complete oscillations. \u2022 calculate, and record in table 1.1, the period t of the pendulum. the period is the time  for one complete oscillation. \u2022 calculate, and record in table 1.1,  t 2. [2] table 1.1 x / cm t / s t / s t 2 / s2 50.0 45.0 40.0 35.0 30.0",
            "3": "3 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) repeat the procedure in  (b) using x = 45.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 35.0  cm and 30.0  cm. [3]  (d) plot a graph of t 2 / s2 (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0,0).  [4]  (e) explain why timing 10 oscillations gives a more accurate result for the period t than timing  one oscillation.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 in this experiment, you will investigate resistance.   carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. the circuit has been set up for you. a vpower supply fig. 2.1  (a) close the switch.   (i) record the current i1 in the circuit.  i1 =  .  [1]   (ii) record the potential difference (p.d.) v1 across the resistor.  v1 =  .  [1]   open the switch.   (iii) calculate the resistance r1 of the resistor using the equation r1 = v1 i1.  r1 =  .  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) disconnect the voltmeter.    connect the second resistor provided in series  with the first resistor.    connect the voltmeter across both resistors.    close the switch. \u2022 record the current i2 in the circuit.  i2 =  ... \u2022 record the potential difference (p.d.) v2 across the resistors.  v2 =  ...   open the switch. \u2022 calculate the resistance rs of the resistors in series using the equation rs =  v2 i2.  rs =  ...  [2]  (c) disconnect the voltmeter. connect the second resistor in parallel  with the first resistor.    connect the voltmeter across both resistors.    close the switch. \u2022 record the current i3 in the circuit.  i3 =  ... \u2022 record the potential difference (p.d.) v3 across the resistors.  v3 =  ...   open the switch. \u2022 calculate the resistance rp of the resistors in parallel using the equation rp =  v3 i3.  rp =  ...  [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) complete the circuit diagram to show the circuit you used in part (c).  [2]  (e) describe how you would extend part (c) of this experiment to investigate the relationship  between the combined resistance of identical resistors connected in parallel and the number  of resistors. you are not required to do this investigation.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]   [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light in the material of a transparent block.   carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. you may refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance.  eyeholep n q b a jf e k lh gc di fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022  place the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet supplied. the  block should be approximately in the middle of the paper.    \u2022 draw and label the outline of the block abcd , as shown in fig. 3.1. \u2022 remove the block and draw a normal at the centre of side ab. continue the normal so  that it passes through side cd of the block. label the normal nl. \u2022 label the point q where nl crosses ab.  \u2022 draw a line ef parallel to cd and 2.0  cm below cd. \u2022 label the point j where nl crosses  ef.  \u2022 draw a line gh parallel to cd and 7.0  cm below cd. \u2022 label the point k where nl crosses gh.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) \u2022 draw the line pq at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to the normal as shown in fig. 3.1. \u2022 place the paper on the pin board. \u2022 place two pins, p1 and p2, on line pq at a suitable distance apart for this experiment. \u2022 replace the block and look from the position of the eye shown in fig. 3.1 to observe  the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block. adjust your line of sight until the  images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other. \u2022 place a pin p3 on line  ef between your eye and the block so that the images of p1 and  p2 seen through the block appear behind p3. \u2022 place a pin p4 on line gh between your eye and the block so that p3, and the images of  p1 and p2 seen through the block, appear behind p4. \u2022 label the positions of p1, p2, p3 and p4. \u2022 remove the pins.  [2]  (c) (i) measure and record the length a of the line from j to p3.  a =  .  [1]   (ii) measure and record the length b of the line from k to p4.  b =  ..  [1]   (iii) calculate b a.   b a =  .  [2]  (d) state one precaution that you took in order to produce an accurate ray trace.  ...  .  [1]  (e) a student plans to test the suggestion that, in this experiment, b a is a constant for all possible  values of i. list suitable values of i that the student could use.   .  [2]   tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9.  [total: 11] ",
            "10": "10 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the rate of cooling, in air, of heated blocks made of different metals. the  temperature of each block is increased by placing it in hot water.   plan an experiment to investigate how the rate of cooling depends on the metal from which each  block is made.  you are not required to carry out this experiment.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   cylindrical blocks of different metals, each with a hole for a thermometer, as shown in fig. 4.1  a thermometer.  other apparatus normally available in a school laboratory can also be used.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus required  \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion. hole for thermometer fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 *5832659003* dc (pq/sg) 199331/4 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 in this experiment, you will determine the density of sand.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1.  the beaker labelled a has a mark at the 250  cm3 level. h beaker a fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  (a) estimate the volume of water vw that beaker a would hold when filled to the top.  vw =  ..  cm3 [1]  (b) (i) use the string and the metre rule provided to accurately determine the circumference c  of beaker a.    record your readings and show your working.  c =  ...  cm [2]   (ii) explain briefly how you used the string and the metre rule to determine c as accurately  as possible. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "3": "3 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 0625/52/ m/j/21 (c) measure the height h of beaker a, as shown in fig. 1.1.  h  .  cm           calculate the volume va of beaker a using the equation va = hc 2 12.6 .  va =  ..  cm3 [2]  (d) (i) beaker b contains dry sand. pour the sand into the measuring cylinder.  \u2022 record the volume vs of sand.  vs =  ...  cm3    \u2022 write down the mass mb of beaker b, given on the card.  mb =    g \u2022 pour the sand into beaker b. measure the mass m of beaker b containing the sand.  m =    g \u2022 calculate the mass ms of sand in the beaker. use the equation ms = (m \u2013 mb).  ms =    g  [2]   (ii) calculate the density \u03c1 of sand using the equation \u03c1 = ms vs .    include the unit.  \u03c1 =  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the position of the image in a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions. use the ray-trace sheet supplied, referring to fig. 2.1 for  guidance. eyehole b an lr d fm cx ye\u03b8 8.0 cm 8.0 cm fig. 2.1  (a) \u2022  draw a line 10  cm long near the top of the ray-trace sheet. label the line mr. draw a  normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the point at  which nl crosses mr with the letter b. \u2022 draw a line cd 8.0 cm below mr and parallel to mr. \u2022 label the point x where cd crosses nl. \u2022 draw a line ef 8.0 cm below cd and parallel to  cd. \u2022 label the point y where ef crosses nl.  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) \u2022  draw a line 7.0  cm long from b at an angle of incidence \u03b81 = 20\u00b0 to the normal below mr  and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a.  \u2022 place two pins, p1 and p2, on line ab at a suitable distance apart for this type of ray-trace  experiment.  [2]  (c) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr.    view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig. 2.1. place  pin p3 on line cd so that the images of p2 and p1 appear exactly behind pin p3. label the  position of p3.   place pin p4 on line ef so that pin p3, and the images of p2 and p1, all appear exactly behind  pin p4. label the position of p4.  [1]  (d) (i) measure and record the distance a from x to p3.  a =  .  [1]   (ii) measure and record the distance b from y to p4.  b =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate a b.    a b =  .  [1]  (e) \u2022 repeat the steps in parts (b) and (c) using an angle of incidence \u03b82 = 10\u00b0. \u2022 measure and record the distance c from x to p3.  c =  ...    \u2022 measure and record the distance d from y to p4.  d =  ... \u2022 calculate c d.    c d =  ...  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (f) state and explain whether the values of a b and  c d can be considered to be equal in this  experiment.   ...  .  [1]  (g) a student carries out this experiment with care. suggest a practical reason why the results  may not be accurate.  ...  .  [1]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 4 and 5.  [total: 11] ",
            "7": "7 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over blank page",
            "8": "8 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 in this experiment, you will investigate resistance.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. a vpower supply rl bcdresistance wire sliding contact s fig. 3.1  (a) (i) close the switch.    measure the current i in the circuit.  i =  .  [1]    (ii) place the sliding contact s at c.    measure the potential difference (p.d.) vr across the resistor r.  vr =  .  [1]   open the switch.   (iii) calculate the resistance r of the resistor using the equation r = vr i.  r =  .  [2]  (b) disconnect the voltmeter from terminal b. connect the voltmeter to terminal c. close the  switch. \u2022 place the sliding contact s at a distance l = 20.0  cm from c. \u2022 measure, and record in table 3.1, the reading on the voltmeter. \u2022 repeat the procedure using l = 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm. open the switch.",
            "9": "9 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over table 3.1 l  / cm v / v  20.0  40.0  60.0  80.0 100.0 [1]  (c) plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0). 00  [4]  (d) use your value of vr from (a)(ii)  to find the length l r of resistance wire that has the same  resistance as resistor r. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary  information.  l r =  .  cm  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates springs made from different metals.   plan an experiment to investigate the extension of springs made from different metals.  you are not required to carry out this experiment.  the following apparatus is available:   boss, clamp and stand   metre rule   springs made from different metals   selection of loads with hangers.   you can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 write a list of suitable metals for the springs  \u2022 draw a diagram of the set up you would use \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables to keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display your readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 *0124687714* dc (pq/sg) 199330/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test  may/june  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1\tin this experiment, you will investigate the behaviour of a spring and use it to determine the density  of modelling clay.  a stand and spring have been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2. clamp spring l 0 fig. 1.1  (a) measure the length l0 of the spring without any load.  l0 =    cm [1]  (b)  suspend a load of weight w = 2.0  n from the spring, as shown in fig. 1.2. clamp spring loadl  fig. 1.2   (i) measure the stretched length l of the spring.  l =    cm [1]   (ii) calculate the extension e of the spring for a load of weight w = 2.0  n.    use your values from  (a) and (b)(i)  and the equation e = (l \u2013 l0).  e =    cm [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) remove the load from the spring.   suspend the load u, which is made of modelling clay, from the spring.   measure the stretched length lu of the spring.  lu =  ..  cm   calculate the extension eu of the spring with load u.  eu =  ..  cm   the extension of a spring is directly proportional to the weight of the load.   use your values of w and e from (b)(ii)  and your value of eu to determine the weight wu of  load u.   show your working.  wu =  ...  [2]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) fully immerse load u in the beaker of water, as shown in fig. 1.3. the load u must not touch  either the sides or the bottom of the beaker. clamp spring load u benchlw  beaker water fig. 1.3   measure the stretched length lw of the spring.  lw =  ..  cm   calculate the extension ew of the spring with load u in the water.  ew =  ..  cm   calculate the density \u03c1 of the modelling clay.   use your value of eu from (c), your value of e w and the equation \u03c1 = eu (eu \u2013 e w) \u00d7 k , where k = 1.0  g / cm3. \t\u03c1  =    g / cm3   [2]  (e) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in the determination of \u03c1 in this experiment.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (f) describe one precaution that you took when measuring the length of the spring, to ensure an  accurate reading. you may draw a diagram.  ...  .  [1]  (g) a student plots a graph of load against extension for the spring, to show that the two quantities  are directly proportional.   state how his graph line shows that load and extension are directly proportional.  ...  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 in this experiment, you will determine the electromotive force (e.m.f.) and resistance of a cell by  using a resistance wire.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 2.1. power supply varesistance wire crocodile clip resistor fig. 2.1  (a) close the switch.   attach the crocodile clip to the resistance wire. adjust its position until the value v of the  potential difference (p.d.) across the cell and the resistor is 5.0  v.   measure, and record in table 2.1, the value of the current i for the cell and resistor in series.   repeat this procedure for values of v = 4.5  v, 4.0  v, 3.5  v and 3.0  v. detach the crocodile clip  from the resistance wire.   open the switch. table 2.1 v / v i /a 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) plot a graph of i / a (y-axis) against v / v (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0). 00  [4]  (c) the e.m.f. e of the cell is equal to the value of v when i = 0.0  a.   determine the value of e from the graph.  e =  .  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g =  .  [1]   (ii) the value of 1 g is numerically equal to the resistance ( r + r) where r is the resistance of  the cell and r = 5.0  \u03c9.    calculate the resistance r of the cell.  r =  ..  \u03c9 [1]  (e) suggest how the experiment and graph could be improved to obtain a more accurate value  for e.m.f. e.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over blank page",
            "10": "10 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light by a transparent block.   you will determine a quantity known as the refractive index of the material of the block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided. you may refer to  fig. 3.1 for guidance. eyehole e na d f cbray-trace sheet \u03b8 2 cm fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022  place the block approximately in the centre of the ray-trace sheet. carefully draw round  the block and label the corners abcd  as indicated by fig. 3.1. \u2022 remove the block from the ray-trace sheet. \u2022 draw a normal to line  ab at a point n, 2 cm from a. extend the normal downwards until it  crosses the line cd. label the point at which it crosses cd with the letter  f. \u2022 draw a line ne, as indicated by fig. 3.1, 8  cm long and at an angle \u03b81 = 20\u00b0.  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) \u2022 replace the block in exactly the same position as in (a). \u2022 place two pins, p1 and p2, on line ne, a suitable distance apart for accurate ray tracing. \u2022 label the positions of p1 and p2. \u2022 view the images of p1 and p2 through the block from the direction indicated by the eye in  fig. 3.1. place two pins, p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart, so that pins p3 and p4, and  the images of p1 and p2, all appear exactly one behind the other. \u2022 label the positions of p3 and p4. \u2022 remove the block and pins from the ray-trace sheet. \u2022 draw a line joining p3 and p4. extend this line until it meets nf. \u2022 label the point at which this line meets nf with the letter g. label the point at which this  line crosses cd with the letter h. \u2022 draw a line joining points n and h.  [3]  (c) measure the length a of line nh.  a =  ..  cm   measure the length b of line gh.  b =  ..  cm   calculate a value n1 for the refractive index, using the equation n1= a b.  n1 =  ...  [2]  (d) draw a new line ne, as indicated by fig. 3.1, 8  cm long and at an angle \u03b82 = 40\u00b0.   repeat the steps in  (b).   (i) measure the length c of the new line nh.  c =  ..  cm    measure the length d of the new line gh.  d =  ..  cm    calculate a second value n2 for the refractive index, using the equation n2 =  c d.  n2 =  ...  [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021   (ii) state whether n1 or n2 is likely to be the more accurate value.    explain your answer. statement  .. explanation    ...  [1]  (e) (i) measure the angle \u03b1, where \u03b1 is the smaller angle between the line gh from (b) and the  line gh from (d).  \u03b1 =  ...  [1]   (ii) a student suggests that the angle \u03b1 should be equal to the difference between the angle  \u03b82 from (d) and the angle \u03b81 from  (a).    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  your results. statement  .. justification    ...  [1]  (f) suggest why different students, all carrying out this experiment carefully, may not obtain  identical results.  ...  .  [1]  tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 10 and 11.  [total: 11]",
            "13": "13 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over blank page",
            "14": "14 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the factors affecting the deflection of a wooden strip clamped at one end.  plan an experiment which enables him to investigate how one factor affects the distance d that  the free end of the wooden strip moves downwards when loads are placed on it.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes:   a variety of wooden strips that can be clamped as shown in fig. 4.1   a set of masses with a hanger.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the experiment, including how d is to be measured and any  precautions that must be taken to ensure reliable results \u2022 draw a table, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are not required  to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  you may add to fig. 4.1 or draw another diagram if it helps to explain your plan. dclamp benchwooden strip fig. 4.1",
            "15": "15 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "16": "16 0625/53/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (ms/sw) 199685/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/61 paper 6 alternative to practical  may/june  2021  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *6222074801*",
            "2": "2 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a student investigates the period of a pendulum. fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2 show the arrangement. one complete oscillationclamp clamp floorxbobdl fig. 1.1              fig. 1.2  (a) the student measures the distance d between the bottom of the clamp and the floor.  120.0  cm d =   ..   this distance d remains constant throughout the experiment.   he adjusts the length l  of the pendulum to 70.0  cm.   calculate the distance x between the centre of the pendulum bob and the floor. record the  value of x in the first row of table 1.1.   [1]  (b) the student displaces the bob slightly and releases it so that it swings. fig. 1.2 shows one  complete oscillation of the pendulum.   he measures, and records in the first row of table 1.1, the time t for 10 complete oscillations.   (i) calculate, and record in the first row of table 1.1, the period t of the pendulum.  the period is the time for one complete oscillation.   [1]   (ii) calculate, and record in the first row of table 1.1, t 2.  [2]   (iii) complete the column headings in table 1.1.   [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over table 1.1 x / t / t / t 2 / 16.7 45.0 17.3 1.73 2.99 40.0 17.9 1.79 3.20 35.0 18.4 1.84 3.39 30.0 19.0 1.90 3.61  (c) he repeats the procedure using x = 45.0  cm, 40.0  cm, 35.0  cm and 30.0  cm.   he records the readings in table 1.1.   plot a graph of t 2 (y-axis) against x (x-axis). you do not need to start your axes at the  origin (0,0).   [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) state whether the graph line shows that t 2 is proportional to x. give a reason for your answer. statement  .. reason  ...   [1]  (e) explain why timing 10 oscillations gives a more accurate result for the period t than timing  one oscillation.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 a student investigates resistance.  fig. 2.1 shows the circuit she uses. a vpower supply fig. 2.1  (a) she records the potential difference (p.d.) v1 across the resistor and the current i1 in the  circuit.   the meters are shown in fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3.   (i) write down the readings. include the units for potential difference, current or resistance  where appropriate in all parts of the question. v67 98 1045 2 13 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 2.2                  fig. 2.3  v1 =  ...  i1 =  ...   [3]   (ii) calculate the resistance r1 of the resistor using the equation r1 = v1 i1 .  r1 =  .  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) she connects a second resistor in series with the first resistor. she connects the voltmeter  across both resistors and records the potential difference v2 across both resistors and the  current i2 in the circuit.      2.6 v2 =  ...      0.28 i2 =  ...   calculate the resistance rs of the resistors in series using the equation rs = v2 i2 .  rs =  .  [1]  (c) she connects the second resistor in parallel with the first resistor. she connects the voltmeter  across both resistors. she records the potential difference v3 across the resistors and the  current i3 in the circuit.      2.4 v3 =  ...      0.99 i3 =  ...   calculate the resistance rp of the resistors in parallel using the equation rp = v3 i3 . give your  answer to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  rp =  .  [1]  (d) complete the circuit diagram to show the circuit she uses in part (c).   [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (e) describe how to extend part (c) of this experiment to investigate the relationship between the  combined resistance of identical resistors connected in parallel and the number of resistors.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (f) in this type of electrical experiment, a variable resistor can be used to vary the current.   draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor.   [1]   [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 a student investigates the refraction of light through a transparent block.  fig. 3.1 shows the transparent block abcd  on the student\u2019s ray-trace sheet. eyeda c p3 p4b fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 draw a normal at the centre of side ab. continue the normal so that it reaches the  bottom of the ray-trace sheet. label the normal nl. \u2022 label the point q where nl crosses ab.   [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) \u2022 draw a line ef parallel to cd and 2.0  cm below cd. \u2022  label the point j where nl crosses ef. \u2022  draw a line gh parallel to cd and 7.0  cm below cd. \u2022  label the point k where nl crosses gh.   [1]  (c) (i) draw a line pq at an angle i = 30\u00b0 to the normal and on the left-hand side of the normal  above the block.   [1]   (ii) the student places two pins p1 and p2 on line pq. fig. 3.1 is not drawn full size. suggest  a suitable distance apart for pins p1 and p2 in this type of experiment.  distance apart  .  [1]  (d) the student observes the images of p1 and p2 through side cd of the block. she adjusts her  line of sight until the images of p1 and p2 appear one behind the other.   she places a pin p3 on line ef and a pin p4 on line gh so that p3, and the images of p1 and  p2 seen through the block, appear behind pin p4.   (i) on fig. 3.1, measure the length a of the line from j to p3.  a =  .  [1]   (ii) on fig. 3.1, measure the length b of the line from k to p4.  b =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate b a .  b a =  .  [2]  (e) state one precaution that you would take in this type of experiment in order to produce an  accurate ray trace.  ...  .  [1]  (f) a student plans to test the suggestion that, in this experiment, b a is a constant for all possible  values of i. list suitable values of i that the student could use.  .  [2]   [total: 11] ",
            "10": "10 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the rate of cooling, in air, of heated blocks made of different metals. the  temperature of each block is increased by placing it in hot water.  plan an experiment to investigate how the rate of cooling depends on the metal from which each  block is made.  the following apparatus is available to the student:   cylindrical blocks of different metals, each with a hole for a thermometer, as shown in fig. 4.1   a thermometer.  other apparatus normally available in a school laboratory can also be used.  in your plan, you should: \u2022  list any additional apparatus required \u2022  explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation, including the measurements you  would take \u2022  state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022  draw a suitable table, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022  explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion. hole for thermometer fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/61/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (ms/sw) 199686/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical  may/june  2021  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *3922083456*",
            "2": "2 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a student determines the density of sand.  fig. 1.1 shows a beaker with a mark at the 250  cm3 level. 250  cm3 fig. 1.1  (a) estimate the volume of water vw that the beaker would hold when filled to the top.  vw =  ..  cm3 [1]  (b) the student uses string and a metre rule to determine the circumference c of the beaker.      21.3 cm c =  ...   explain briefly how to use the string and the metre rule to determine the circumference c as  accurately as possible. you may draw a diagram.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) the student measures the height h of the beaker.   (i) show clearly on fig. 1.1, the height h that he should measure.   [1]      9.0 cm       his reading is  h =  ...   (ii) calculate the external volume vb of the beaker using the equation  vb = hc 2 12.6 .  vb =  ..  cm3 [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (d) the student measures the mass of the beaker on a balance, as shown in fig. 1.2.    (i) write down the mass mb of the beaker, to the nearest gram. 208.3  g fig. 1.2  mb =  ..  g [1]   the student fills the beaker to the top with dry sand. he measures the mass m of the beaker  containing the sand.      724 g m =  ...   (ii) calculate the mass ms of sand in the beaker. use the equation ms = (m \u2013 mb).  ms =  ..  g [1]   (iii) calculate the density \u03c1 of the sand using the equation \u03c1 = ms vb.    include the unit.  \u03c1 =  .  [2]  (e) the student uses a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of dry sand. draw a diagram  of the measuring cylinder and show the line of sight that the student must use to obtain an  accurate volume reading.   [1]   [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 a student investigates the position of the image in a plane mirror.  fig. 2.1 shows the ray-trace sheet that the student uses. eyem p3 p4r fig. 2.1",
            "5": "5 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (a) \u2022 the line mr shows the position of a plane mirror. draw a normal to this line that passes  through its centre. continue the normal so that it reaches the bottom of the ray-trace  sheet. label the normal nl. label the point at which nl crosses mr with the letter b. \u2022 draw a line cd 5.0 cm below mr and parallel to mr. \u2022  label the point x where cd crosses nl. \u2022  draw a line ef 5.0 cm below cd and parallel to cd. \u2022  label the point y where ef crosses nl.   [2]  (b) draw a line 7.0  cm long from b at an angle of incidence \u03b81 = 20\u00b0 to the normal below mr and  to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a.  [1]  (c) the student places two pins, p1 and p2 , on line ab. suggest a suitable distance x between  the pins for this type of ray-trace experiment.  x =  .  [1]  (d) the student views the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in  fig. 2.1. she places pin p3 on line cd so that the images of p2 and p1 appear exactly behind  pin p3.   she places pin p4 on line ef so that pin p3, and the images of p2 and p1, all appear exactly  behind pin p4. the positions of p3 and p4 are shown on fig. 2.1.   (i) measure and record the distance a from x to p3.  a =  .  [1]   (ii) measure and record the distance b from y to p4.  b =  .  [1]   (iii) calculate a b.  a b =  .  [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (e) the student repeats the procedure using an angle of incidence \u03b82 = 40\u00b0. she records the new  values of a and b.      4.2 cm a =  ...      8.3 cm b =  ...   calculate the new value a b.  a b =  .  [2]  (f) state and explain whether the two values of a b can be considered to be equal in this  experiment.  ...  .  [1]  (g) a student carries out this experiment with care. suggest a practical reason why the results  may not be accurate.  ...  .  [1]   [total: 11] ",
            "7": "7 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 a student investigates resistance.  fig. 3.1 shows the circuit used. power supply a vresistance wire sliding contact sd b cl r fig. 3.1  (a) the student measures the current i in the circuit.   he places the sliding contact s at c and measures the potential difference (p.d.) v1 across  the resistor r.    the voltmeter and ammeter are shown in fig. 3.2 and fig. 3.3. v3 4 52 1 0 a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 3.2                  fig. 3.3   (i) write down the readings.    include the units for potential difference, current or resistance where appropriate in all  parts of the question.  v1 =  ...  i1 =  ...   [2]   (ii) calculate the resistance r1 of the resistor using the equation r1 = v1 i1.  r1 =  ...  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) the student disconnects the voltmeter from terminal b and connects the voltmeter to  terminal c.   he places the sliding contact s at a distance l = 20.0  cm from c. he records, in table 3.1, the  reading on the voltmeter.   he repeats the procedure using l = 40.0  cm, 60.0  cm, 80.0  cm and 100.0  cm. his readings are  shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 l  / cm v / v  20.0 0.4  40.0 0.8  60.0 1.1  80.0 1.5 100.0 1.9   plot a graph of v / v (y-axis) against l  / cm (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0).  00   [4]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) use your value of v1 from (a)(i)  to find the length l r of resistance wire that has the same  resistance as resistor r. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary  information.  l r =  ...  cm [2]  (d) the resistance of the resistance wire is proportional to its length. estimate the resistance of  100 cm of the resistance wire.  estimate  .  [1]   [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates springs made from different metals.  plan an experiment to investigate the extension of springs made from different metals.  the following apparatus is available:   boss, clamp and stand   metre rule   springs made from different metals   selection of loads with hangers.  you can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 write a list of suitable metals for the springs  \u2022 draw a diagram of the set up you would use \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables to keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display your readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the readings to reach a conclusion.  ..  ..  ..  ..",
            "11": "11 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_s21_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (ms/ct) 199687/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical  may/june  2021  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *5642649603*",
            "2": "2 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a student investigates the behaviour of a spring, and then uses the spring to determine the density  of modelling clay.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 1.1. clamp spring load fig. 1.1  (a) describe two precautions that the student should take when measuring the length of the  spring, to ensure an accurate reading. you may draw a diagram. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) the student measures the length l 0 of the spring without any load.     2.3 l 0 = .. cm   a load of weight w = 2.0  n is suspended from the spring, as shown in fig. 1.2. clamp spring 2.0 n loadl  fig. 1.2   (i) on fig. 1.2, measure the stretched length l of the spring.  l =  cm [1]   (ii) calculate the extension e of the spring for a load of weight w = 2.0  n.    use the equation e = (l \u2013 l 0).  e =  cm [1] [turn over",
            "4": "4 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (c) the 2.0  n load is removed from the spring.   a load u is made of modelling clay wrapped on a wire hanger. load u is suspended from the  spring.   the student measures the stretched length l u of the spring.     7.4 l u =... cm   calculate the extension eu of the spring with load u.  eu = .. cm   the extension of a spring is directly proportional to the weight of the load.   use your values of w and e from (b)(ii)  and your value of eu to determine the weight wu of  load u.   show your working.  wu = ...   [2]  (d) load u is fully immersed in a beaker of water, as shown in fig. 1.3. clamp spring load u benchlw  beaker waterwire hanger fig. 1.3",
            "5": "5 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  on fig. 1.3, measure the stretched length l w of the spring.  l w = .. cm   calculate the extension e w of the spring with load u in the water.  e w = .. cm   calculate the density \u03c1 of the modelling clay.   use your values of eu from (c), your value of e w and the equation \u03c1 = eu (eu \u2013 e w) \u00d7 k , where k = 1.0  g / cm3. \t\u03c1  =   g / cm3   [2]  (e) suggest a possible source of inaccuracy in the determination of \u03c1 in this experiment.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (f) the student plots a graph of load against extension for the spring, to show that the two  quantities are directly proportional.   state how his graph line shows that load and extension are directly proportional.  ...  ...  .  [2]   [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 a student determines the electromotive force (e.m.f.) and resistance of a cell by using a resistance  wire.  she uses the circuit shown in fig. 2.1. power supply aresistance wire crocodile clip resistorq p+ \u2013 fig. 2.1  (a) on fig. 2.1, draw a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across  terminals p and q.  [1]  (b) the switch is closed. the student moves the crocodile clip on the resistance wire so that the  potential difference v across terminals p and q is 5.0  v.   she measures the current i for the cell and resistor in series. a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 2.2   read, and record in table 2.1, the value of i shown on the meter in fig. 2.2.  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) the student repeats the procedure in (b) for values of v = 4.5  v, 4.0  v, 3.5  v and 3.0  v. her  readings are shown in table 2.1. table 2.1 v / v i / a 5.0 4.5 0.56 4.0 0.44 3.5 0.35 3.0 0.28   plot a graph of i / a (y-axis) against v / v (x-axis). start both axes at the origin (0,0). 00  [4]  (d) the e.m.f. e of the cell is equal to the value of v when i = 0.0  a.   determine the value of e from the graph.  e = .  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (e) (i) determine the gradient g of the graph. show clearly on the graph how you obtained the  necessary information.  g = .  [1]   (ii) the value of 1 g is numerically equal to the resistance ( r + r) where r is the resistance of    the cell and r = 4.0  \u03c9.    calculate the resistance r of the cell.  r = .. \u03c9 [1]  (f) suggest how the experiment and graph could be improved to obtain a more accurate value  for e.m.f. e.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over blank page",
            "10": "10 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 a student investigates the refraction of light by a transparent block.  he uses his results to determine a quantity known as the refractive index of the material of the  block.  the student\u2019s ray-trace sheet is shown full size in fig. 3.1.  e n a d cbp1 p4p6 p3p5p2 fig. 3.1",
            "11": "11 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (a) the student places a transparent block abcd  near the centre of the ray-trace sheet, as  indicated in fig. 3.1.   (i) draw a normal at point n, extending above ab. label the upper end of the normal with  the letter l.    extend the normal downwards until it crosses line cd. label the point at which it crosses  cd with the letter f. [1]   (ii) the student draws line en as shown in fig. 3.1.    on fig. 3.1, measure the angle \u03b81 between the lines ln and en.  \u03b81 = .  [1]  (b) the student places two pins, p1 and p2, on line en, as shown in fig. 3.1.   suggest whether the two pins are a suitable distance apart for accurate ray tracing.   explain your answer. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...   [1]  (c) the student views the images of p1 and p2 through the block.   he places two pins, p3 and p4, so that pins p3 and p4, and the images of p1 and p2, all  appear exactly one behind the other. \u2022 draw a line through p3 and p4, extending the line until it meets nf. \u2022 label the point at which this line meets nf with the letter g. \u2022 label the point at which this line crosses cd with the letter h. \u2022 draw a line joining points n and h.  [1]  (d) (i) measure the length a of line nh.  a = .. cm    measure the length b of line gh.  b = .. cm   [1]   (ii) calculate a value n for the refractive index, using the equation n = a b .  n = .  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (e) the student repeats the above procedure for an angle \u03b82 = 40\u00b0.   he places two pins, p5 and p6, so that pins p5 and p6, and the images of p1 and p2, all  appear exactly one behind the other. \u2022 draw a line through pins p5 and p6. extend the line until it meets gh. \u2022 label the point at which this line meets gh with the letter k. \u2022 label the point at which this line crosses cd with the letter r.   (i) measure the angle \u03b1, where \u03b1\tis the smaller angle between lines rk and gh. \t\u03b1  = .  [1]   (ii) a student suggests that the angle \u03b1 should be equal to the difference between the angle  \u03b82 from (e) and the angle \u03b81 from (a)(ii) .    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  your results. statement  .. justification    ...   [1]  (f) suggest a precaution which should be taken to ensure accurate results in this type of  experiment.  ...  .  [1]  (g) suggest why different students, all carrying out this experiment carefully, may not obtain  identical results.  ...  .  [1]   [total: 11]",
            "13": "13 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over blank page",
            "14": "14 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the factors affecting the deflection of a wooden strip clamped at one end.  plan an experiment which enables him to investigate how one factor affects the distance d that  the free end of the wooden strip moves downwards when loads are placed on it.  the apparatus available includes:   a variety of wooden strips which can be clamped as shown in fig. 4.1   a set of masses with a hanger.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 explain briefly how to carry out the experiment, including how d is to be measured and any  precautions that must be taken to ensure reliable results \u2022 draw a table, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are not required  to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion.  you may add to fig. 4.1 or draw another diagram if it helps to explain your plan. dclamp benchwooden strip fig. 4.1",
            "15": "15 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..   [7]",
            "16": "16 0625/63/ m/j/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_11.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  ib21 11_0625_11/2rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *7987287000*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/11     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  october/november 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  1 a student measures the volume of a quantity of water.    which apparatus is suitable?  a a balance  b a measuring cylinder  c a ruler  d a thermometer    2 the diagrams show distance\u2013time graphs for four objects.    which graph represents an object moving with an increasing spee d?    distance time 0a 0distance time 0b 0 distance time 0c 0distance time 0d 0       3 the gravitational field strength on the moon is smaller than th at on the earth.    a scientist examines a rock which has been brought back from th e moon.    he measures three quantities.    1 the density of the rock  2 the mass of the rock 3 the weight of the rock    which quantities are the same size on the surface of the earth and on the surface of the moon?  a 1 and 2 only b 1 and 3 only c 2 and 3 only d 1, 2 and 3   ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21 [turn over  4 which substance in the table has the lowest density?     substance mass  / g volume  / cm3  a nylon 1.2 1.0  b cotton 1.5 1.0  c olive oil 1.8 2.0  d water 2.0 2.0      5 a  1 0 0  cm beam balances as shown.    3.0 kg4.0 kg 0 1 02 03 04 0 pivot60 70 80 90 100     the pivot is moved 10  cm to the left.    pivot503.0 kg4.0 kg 0 1 02 03 0 60 70 80 90 100     what will be the effect of this change on the anticlockwise and  clockwise moments about the  pivot?     anticlockwise  moment clockwise  moment  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     6 a spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force an d no resultant moment acting on it.    which statement about the spacecraft is correct?  a its direction is changing.  b it is in equilibrium.  c its speed is decreasing.  d its speed is increasing.   ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  7 the graph shows the total energy transferred by an electric mot or over a period of time.    in which region of the graph is the greatest power being develo ped by the motor?    total energy transferred time0 0abcd      8 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy  transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  b nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  d nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  generator     9 the diagram shows an electric circuit. when the switch is close d, the lamp is lit.        which row states the type of energy stored in the cell and how this energy is usefully transferred  to the lamp?     type of energy  stored in the cell how this energy is usefully  transferred to the lamp  a chemical by electric current  b chemical by light  c electrical by electric current  d electrical by light     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21 [turn over  10 a scientist uses an electric motor to lift a load through a ve rtical distance of 2.0  m.    he then increases the input power to the motor and repeats the experiment. the efficiency of the  motor does not change.    which row correctly describes the effect that this has on the u seful work done lifting the load and  the time taken to lift it?     work done time taken  a decreases decreases  b stays the same decreases  c decreases stays the same  d stays the same stays the same      11 the box shown has a weight of 15  n.    face q face p0.30  m 0.20  m 0.50  m     the box is resting on a horizontal surface with face p in conta ct with the surface.    what is the change in pressure on the surface if the box falls over onto face q?  a 0.0040  m2  / n b 0 . 0 0 6 7  m2  / n c 1 0 0  n / m2 d 250  n / m2      12 a liquid is evaporating. the liquid is not boiling.    which statement about the liquid is correct at an instant in ti me?  a any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.  b any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid\u2019s surface.  c only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, and only from the  liquid\u2019s surface.  d only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, but from any part  of the liquid.    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  13 which row correctly describes the movement of particles in sol ids and liquids?     solids liquids  a no movement move around each other  b no movement vibration only  c vibration only move around each other  d vibration only vibration only      14 a long, thin bar of copper is heated gently and evenly along i ts length.    copper bar heat    what happens to the bar?  a it becomes less heavy.  b it becomes longer.  c it becomes shorter.  d it bends at the ends.    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21 [turn over  15 the diagram shows a flask which has been filled with liquid x at room temperature.    level of liquid at room temperature liquid xstopper     when the flask is placed in warm water, the liquid rises higher  up the tube. when the flask is put  in cold water, the liquid drops below the original level in the  tube.    the experiment is repeated using an identical flask but a diffe rent liquid y. the initial level of the  liquid in the tube is the same as that in the original experime nt.    liquid y expands more, per degree increase in temperature, than  liquid x.    which row is correct for the level of the liquid?     rises most in  warm water falls most in  cold water  a x x  b x y  c y x  d y y     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  16 the diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.    base of panhandle of pan     which row is correct for the materials used to make the base an d the handle of the pan?     base of pan handle of pan  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     17 which row gives the correct description of a sound wave?     action of wave type of wave  a transfers energy without transferring matter longitudinal  b transfers energy without transferring matter transverse  c transfers matter without transferring energy longitudinal  d transfers matter without transferring energy transverse     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21 [turn over  18 the diagram shows a wave.    displacement distance1 2 46 5 30 0     which row correctly indicates the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave?     amplitude wavelength  a the distance between 1 and 2 the distance between 4 and 5  b the distance between 1 and 2 the distance between 4 and 6  c the distance between 1 and 3 the distance between 4 and 5  d the distance between 1 and 3 the distance between 4 and 6      19 a ray of green light passes through a glass prism as shown.    green light     which colours of light refract as shown in the table?     refract more  than green refract less  than green  a red blue  b red yellow  c violet blue  d violet yellow     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  20 the diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass bl ock. some of the light is refracted  and some of the light is reflected. two angles, p and q, are marked on the diagram.    air glasspqray of light     which row gives the angle of incidence and states whether total  internal reflection occurs?     angle of  incidence total internal  reflection  a p no  b p yes  c q no  d q yes     21 the diagram shows a ray of light in glass incident on the surfa ce between the glass and air.    air glass     what happens if the angle of incidence is made larger than the critical angle for the glass?  a the angle of refraction becomes equal to 90 \uf0b0.  b there is a refracted ray and a ray reflected inside the glass.  c there is a refracted ray only.  d there is only a ray reflected inside the glass.    22 radiation from which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is u sed in the remote controller for a  television?  a infrared waves  b microwaves  c radio waves  d ultraviolet waves ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21 [turn over  23 two rays of light are different colours.    which row is correct?     speed of the two  colours in a vacuum wavelengths of the two  colours in a vacuum  a different different  b different the same  c the same different  d the same the same     24 what is ultrasound?  a sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing  b sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear  c sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear  d sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear     25 a bar magnet is brought near to a rod of unknown material.    the unknown rod is attracted to both ends of the bar magnet.    magnetrod of unknown material     which material is the bar made from?  a aluminium  b magnetised steel  c unmagnetised iron  d plastic    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  26 in which circuit is the ammeter measuring the flow of charge th rough the lamp?    aa ad ab ac      27 in circuit 1, a negative charge flows in a clockwise direction . the bulb is bright.    in circuit 2, the battery is reversed as shown. the bulb is equ ally bright.    circuit 1 circuit 2    which charge flows in circuit 2 and in which direction?     charge direction  a negative anticlockwise  b negative clockwise  c positive anticlockwise  d positive clockwise     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21 [turn over  28 the diagram shows a circuit containing two resistors of resist ance 1.0  \uf057 and 2.0  \uf057.    a voltmeter is connected across the 1.0  \uf057 resistor by connecting p to x.    the reading on the voltmeter is 6.0  v.    v1.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9xy p     p is moved to point y in the circuit.    what is the new reading on the voltmeter?  a 3.0  v b 6.0  v c 12  v d 18  v     29 the step-down transformer shown reduces mains voltage to 12  v.    mains voltage12 v    soft-iron corecopper wire     when the transformer is used, some energy is transferred to the  surroundings.    which type of energy is transferred to the surroundings?  a chemical energy  b light energy  c thermal energy  d elastic energy    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  30 which circuit contains a fuse?    a ab cdv a       31 the diagram shows an electric circuit.        which row correctly shows the numbers of different components i n the circuit?     cells lamps switches  a 1 1 4  b 1 4 1  c 3 1 4  d 3 4 1     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21 [turn over  32 two resistors, with resistances r1 and r2, are connected in parallel.    the resistance r1 is greater than the resistance r2.    r1 r2     what is the resistance of the parallel combination?  a less than either r1 or r2  b equal to r1  c equal to r2  d the average of r1 and r2     33 the metal cases of electrical appliances are connected to an ea rth wire.    which statement is not correct?  a the live wire may become loose and touch the metal case.  b if the metal case becomes live, the earth wire conducts curren t to the ground.  c the earth wire needs to have a high resistance.  d earthing metal cases helps prevent a person from receiving an electric shock.    34 a teacher asks, \u2018why do we put a fuse in a mains circuit?\u2019    student 1 says, \u2018it protects the wiring from overheating.\u2019 stud ent 2 says, \u2018it protects us from  getting a shock if we touch the live wire.\u2019    who is correct?  a both students  b neither student  c student 1 only  d student 2 only    ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  35 which graph represents an alternating current (a.c.)?    current time0 0a current time0 0b current time0 0c current time0 0d      36 the current in a small electric heater is 4.0  a.    the cable connected to the heater is able to carry currents up to 10  a.    fuses rated 1  a, 3  a, 5  a and 13  a are available.    which fuse should be used?  a 1  a b 3  a c 5  a d 1 3  a      37 a very important experiment improved scientists\u2019 understanding  of the structure of matter.    the experiment involved \uf061-particles being fired at a thin, gold foil.    what happened?  a all the \uf061-particles were absorbed by the nuclei of the gold atoms.  b all the \uf061-particles were unaffected by the gold atoms.  c some of the \uf061-particles were attracted by the neutrons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.  d some of the \uf061-particles were repelled by the protons in the nuclei of the go ld atoms.     38 some sources of background radiation are natural and others ar e due to human activity.    which source is natural?  a medical x-rays  b nuclear weapons testing  c radioactive waste from power stations  d radon gas from rocks ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  39 a radioactive material is placed near a detector.    the detector shows a count rate of 28  000 counts  / min.    when a piece of card is put between the material and the counte r, the reading decreases to  25  000 counts  / min.    when an aluminium sheet is put between the material and the cou nter, the reading remains at  25  000 counts  / min.    when a sheet of lead is put between the material and the counte r, the reading decreases to  19  000 counts  / min.    what is being emitted by the radioactive material?  a \uf061, \uf062 and \uf067-radiation  b \uf061 and \uf062-radiation only  c \uf061 and \uf067-radiation only  d \uf062 and \uf067-radiation only     40 a radioactive isotope has a half-life of 3 years.    a sample gives a count rate of 100 counts  / min on a detector.    which calculation is used to predict the count rate after 12 ye ars?  a 100 \uf0b4 1 2 \uf0b4 1 2 \uf0b4 1 2 \uf0b4 1 2  b 100 \uf0b4 1 2 \uf0b4 1 2 \uf0b4 1 2  c 100 \uf0b4 3 12  d 100 \uf0b4 12 3 \uf0b4 1 2     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  blank page",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/11/o/n/21  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  ib21 11_0625_12/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *4547524422*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/12     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  october/november 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  1 which list places units of length in increasing order of magni tude (size)?  a cm \uf0ae mm \uf0ae m  b mm \uf0ae cm \uf0ae m  c mm \uf0ae m \uf0ae cm  d m \uf0ae mm \uf0ae cm     2 which graph represents an object that is moving at constant sp eed?    distance time0 0a distance time0 0b distance time0 0c distance time0 0d       3 which statement about the equation shown is correct?    w = mg    a g is a force, m and w are not forces.  b m is a force, g and w are not forces.  c w is a force, g and m are not forces.  d none of g, m and w are forces.    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21 [turn over  4 which substance in the table has the lowest density?     substance mass  / g volume  / cm3  a nylon 1.2 1.0  b cotton 1.5 1.0  c olive oil 1.8 2.0  d water 2.0 2.0      5 the diagram shows a simple balance. the two loads, x and y, can  be moved along the beam.    x yd pivot    which graph shows how the moment produced by load y varies as t he perpendicular distance d  from the pivot changes?    moment 0 0a dmoment 0 0b d moment 0 0c dmoment 0 0d d     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  6 a spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force an d no resultant moment acting on it.    which statement about the spacecraft is correct?  a its direction is changing.  b it is in equilibrium.  c its speed is decreasing.  d its speed is increasing.    7 a student carries out an investigation by pulling four differe nt boxes across the floor.    the results are shown in the table.    on which box is the most work done?     frictional force needed  to pull the box  / n distance moved  across the floor  / m  a 5 4  b 10 2  c 15 2  d 20 4     8 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy  transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  b nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  d nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  generator     9 a stone falls.    which row gives the energy changes?     gravitational  potential energy kinetic energy  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases   ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21 [turn over  10 a rope, connected to a pulley system and motor, is used to lif t different objects through different  distances. the time taken to lift each object is the same. the diagrams are not to scale.    which motor requires the greatest power?    motor 10 kg2 mplatforma motor 5 kg3 mplatformb motor 10 kg1 mplatformc motor 2 kg3 mplatformd      11 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.    which length is used to indicate atmospheric pressure in a simp le mercury barometer?    ca bdvacuum mercury      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  12 a liquid is evaporating. the liquid is not boiling.    which statement about the liquid is correct at an instant in ti me?  a any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.  b any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid\u2019s surface.  c only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, and only from the  liquid\u2019s surface.  d only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, but from any part  of the liquid.     13 the temperature of the gas in a sealed container of constant vo lume decreases from 20  \uf0b0c to  12  \uf0b0c.    which row is correct?     pressure of the gas  in the container average speed of  the molecules of gas  a decreases decreases  b stays the same increases  c increases stays the same  d stays the same decreases     14 a long, thin bar of copper is heated gently and evenly along i ts length.    copper bar heat    what happens to the bar?  a it becomes less heavy.  b it becomes longer.  c it becomes shorter.  d it bends at the ends.     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21 [turn over  15 a teacher makes the statement, \u2018object p has a higher thermal c apacity than object q.\u2019    what does this statement mean?  a object p has a higher melting point than object q.  b object p has a lower melting point than object q.  c the increase in temperature of object p is greater than that of  object q for the same increase  in internal energy.  d the increase in temperature of o bject p is smaller than that of  object q for the same increase  in internal energy.     16 the diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.    base of panhandle of pan     which row is correct for the materials used to make the base an d the handle of the pan?     base of pan handle of pan  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  17 the diagrams show two patterns produced by water waves.    diagram 1 diagram 2 barrierbarrier     which two effects are shown in the diagrams?     diagram 1 diagram 2  a reflection diffraction  b reflection refraction  c refraction diffraction  d refraction reflection     18 which row is not correct for a wave on the surface of water?     quantity usual unit  a amplitude m  b frequency hz  c wavelength \uf06c  d speed m  / s     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21 [turn over  19 a thin, converging lens causes parallel rays of light to conve rge to a single point known as the  principal focus.    principal focus     which statement explains this?  a the light diffracts.  b the light disperses.  c the light reflects.  d the light refracts.    20 the diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass bl ock. some of the light is refracted  and some of the light is reflected. two angles, p and q, are marked on the diagram.    air glasspqray of light     which row gives the angle of incidence and states whether total  internal reflection occurs?     angle of  incidence total internal  reflection  a p no  b p yes  c q no  d q yes     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  21 the letter f is reflected in a mirror.    mirror    what does the optical image look like?    a bc d      22 visible light, x-rays and microwaves are all components of the  electromagnetic spectrum.    which statement about the waves is correct?  a in a vacuum, microwaves travel faster than visible light and h ave a shorter wavelength.  b in a vacuum, microwaves travel at the same speed as visible li ght and have a shorter  wavelength.  c in a vacuum, x-rays travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.  d in a vacuum, x-rays travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter wavelength.      23 which radiation has a higher frequency than red light?  a ultraviolet  b radio waves  c microwaves  d infrared      24 what is ultrasound?  a sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing  b sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear  c sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear  d sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21 [turn over  25 which material is magnetic?  a aluminium  b copper  c iron  d silver      26 which circuit symbol represents a component used to measure el ectric current?    a vab c d g      27 four wires made of the same metal have different lengths and d ifferent diameters.    which wire has the lowest resistance?     length diameter  a long large  b long small  c short large  d short small      28 the diagram shows a circuit containing two resistors of resist ance 1.0  \uf057 and 2.0  \uf057.    a voltmeter is connected across the 1.0  \uf057 resistor by connecting p to x.    the reading on the voltmeter is 6.0  v.    v1.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9xy p     p is moved to point y in the circuit.    what is the new reading on the voltmeter?  a 3.0  v b 6.0  v c 12  v d 18  v    ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  29 which device is used to measure the flow of charge in an elect rical circuit?  a ammeter  b voltmeter  c battery  d newton meter      30 which circuit contains a fuse?    a ab cdv a       31 a student designs a circuit to turn on a fan when the temperat ure increases.    which component does the student need to use in her circuit?    abcd      ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21 [turn over  32 two resistors, with resistances r1 and r2, are connected in parallel.    the resistance r1 is greater than the resistance r2.    r1 r2     what is the resistance of the parallel combination?  a less than either r1 or r2  b equal to r1  c equal to r2  d the average of r1 and r2     33 the diagram shows a motor connected to an a.c. supply. the circ uit is incomplete.    mxy     which device needs to be connected between point x and point y t o  p r e v e n t  t h e  w i r e s  f r o m   overheating if a fault in the motor causes the current to get t oo high?  a an ammeter  b a fuse  c a transformer  d a length of thick copper wire      34 a hairdresser is using a hairdryer with a plastic casing. he n otices that there is no wire attached  to the earth pin of the plug.    why is an earth connection not needed?  a plastic is an insulator.  b the hairdresser only touches the handle of the dryer.  c the hairdryer uses a.c. so cannot give the hairdresser a shock .  d wet hands do not conduct electricity.    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  35 four positions of a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field,  a s  i n  a  d . c .  m o t o r ,  a r e  s h o w n .    in diagrams 2 and 4, the coil is at an angle of 45 \uf0b0 to the field lines.    n s coil1 n s2 n s3 n s4     which row is correct?     turning effect of the forces   in positions 1 and 3 turning effect of the forces   in positions 2 and 4  a different different  b different same  c same different  d same same     36 an electric drill, operating from a supply voltage of 240  v, uses a current of 3.5  a.    which rating of fuse should be used to protect the drill\u2019s cabl e?  a 250  v b 2 0 0  v c 5  a d 3  a     37 a very important experiment improved scientists\u2019 understanding  of the structure of matter.    the experiment involved \uf061-particles being fired at a thin, gold foil.    what happened?  a all the \uf061-particles were absorbed by the nuclei of the gold atoms.  b all the \uf061-particles were unaffected by the gold atoms.  c some of the \uf061-particles were attracted by the neutrons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.  d some of the \uf061-particles were repelled by the protons in the nuclei of the go ld atoms.      38 a sample contains 0.0016  g of a radioactive isotope.    after 4.0 hours the mass of the radioactive isotope in the samp le falls to 0.00080  g.    what is the half-life of the radioactive isotope?  a 2.0 hours b 4.0 hours c 8.0 hours d 16 hours     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  39 a sample of a radioactive isotope has a mass of 100  g. the half-life of the radioactive isotope is  6.0 hours.    which graph shows the decay for this isotope?    mass of isotoperemaining/  g time  / hours100 80604020 0 0123456789 1 0 1 1 1 2mass of isotoperemaining/  g time  / hours100 80604020 0 0123456ab 7 8 9 10 11 12 mass of isotope remaining/  g time  / hours100 80604020 0 0123456789 1 0 1 1 1 2mass of isotope remaining/  g time  / hours100 80604020 0 0123456cd 7 8 9 10 11 12       40 which statement best describes background radiation?  a any harmful level of radiation  b radiation that is only found in space  c radiation from natural sources  d radiation that is absorbed by rocks     ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/12/o/n/21  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_13.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib21 11_0625_13/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *2642537228*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/13     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  october/november 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21  1 a teacher asks a student to measure the volume of a pencil shar pener.    which piece of apparatus would not be useful?  a beaker  b displacement can  c balance  d measuring cylinder    2 the graph shows how the speed of a car varies with time at the start of a journey.    6 543210speed m  / s time  / s  01234     which distance\u2013time graph represents the motion of the car over  the same time period?    12 10 86420distance  / m time  / s012a 3412 10 86420distance  / m time  / s012b 34 6 543210distance  / m time  / s012c 346 543210distance  / m time  / s012d 34      ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21 [turn over  3 a student uses a force meter to measure the weights and a bala nce to measure the masses of  four different objects.    he puts his measurements in a table.    which row is correctly recorded?     mass weight  a 1 kg 10  n  b 5 g 50  n  c 10  n 100  kg  d 20  kg 2  n      4 which substance in the table has the lowest density?     substance mass  / g volume  / cm3  a nylon 1.2 1.0  b cotton 1.5 1.0  c olive oil 1.8 2.0  d water 2.0 2.0      5 the diagram shows a uniform beam 100  cm long. the diagram is not drawn to scale.    0 cm 20  cm 4.0 n50 cm 60 cm100  cm 5.0 n6.0 n pivotbeam     the beam remains balanced on a pivot at the 50  cm mark under the action of the forces of 4.0  n,  5.0  n and 6.0  n.    the 4.0  n force is at the 20  cm mark and the 6.0  n force is at the 60  cm mark.    at which point on the beam is the 5.0  n force acting?  a at the 62  cm mark  b at the 74  cm mark  c at the 86  cm mark  d at the 88  cm mark    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21  6 a spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force an d no resultant moment acting on it.    which statement about the spacecraft is correct?  a its direction is changing.  b it is in equilibrium.  c its speed is decreasing.  d its speed is increasing.    7 a weightlifter picks up a stone ball and places it on a shelf.    each lift takes the same time.    which situation requires the greatest power?    shelfa ballshelfb ball shelfc ball ballshelfd      8 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy  transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  b nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  d nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  generator     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21 [turn over  9 a person lifts a book from floor level to a shelf. it falls to  the floor and a second person lifts it back  up to the shelf.    which statement must  be correct?  a the second person does the same work on the book as the first p erson.  b the second person takes the same time as the first person.  c the second person develops the same power as the first person.  d the second person does the same work on the book as the first p erson, develops the same  power and takes the same time.     10 a man, attached to an elastic cord, jumps from a platform. he falls 60  m before starting to rise.  the length of the unextended cord is 30  m.    the diagrams show four successive stages in his fall.    in which position is elastic (strain) energy and kinetic energy  present?    abcd 60 m45 m30 m       11 liquid is stored in a tank. the area of the base of the tank i s 2.2  m2 and the pressure at the base  due to the liquid is 15  000  pa.    what is the weight of the liquid?  a 3300  n b 6 8 0 0  n c 1 5  000  n d 3 3  000  n    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21  12 a liquid is evaporating. the liquid is not boiling.    which statement about the liquid is correct at an instant in ti me?  a any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.  b any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid\u2019s surface.  c only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, and only from the  liquid\u2019s surface.  d only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, but from any part  of the liquid.    13 the diagram shows a sealed gas cylinder with a movable piston.     movable piston gas     the piston is moved slowly downwards and there is no change in temperature of the gas.    what happens to the average distance between the gas molecules and to the pressure of the  gas?     average distance  between gas  molecules pressure of gas  in cylinder  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21 [turn over  14 a long, thin bar of copper is heated gently and evenly along i ts length.    copper bar heat    what happens to the bar?  a it becomes less heavy.  b it becomes longer.  c it becomes shorter.  d it bends at the ends.    15 the diagrams show four examples of thermal expansion. in three of the examples, thermal  expansion is useful. in one of the examples, expansion is unwan ted and has to be allowed for.    in which example is thermal expansion unwanted?    fixed endrollers river a bridge getting longer in hot weathera loosening a very tight nut by heating itheatb a bimetallic strip to indicate temperaturec liquid-in-glass thermometerdsmall gap brass steelnut      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21  16 the diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.    base of panhandle of pan     which row is correct for the materials used to make the base an d the handle of the pan?     base of pan handle of pan  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     17 the diagrams show two patterns produced by water waves.    diagram 1 diagram 2 barrierbarrier     which two effects are shown in the diagrams?     diagram 1 diagram 2  a reflection diffraction  b reflection refraction  c refraction diffraction  d refraction reflection     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21 [turn over  18 which row correctly defines the frequency and the speed of a w ave?     frequency speed  a   number of waves   distance travelled  per unit time  b   number of waves   time taken for one complete  wave to pass a point  c   number of waves  passing per unit time distance travelled  per unit time  d   number of waves  passing per unit time time taken for one complete  wave to pass a point      19 a narrow beam of light travels through glass. it reaches the e dge of the glass and refracts into the  air.    what is the angle of refraction?    airglassb a dc      20 the diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass bl ock. some of the light is refracted  and some of the light is reflected. two angles, p and q, are marked on the diagram.    air glasspqray of light     which row gives the angle of incidence and states whether total  internal reflection occurs?     angle of  incidence total internal  reflection  a p no  b p yes  c q no  d q yes   ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21  21 a photographer sees his image as shown.    x photographer image    what could x be?    abcd mirror translucent glass blocktransparent glass prismtransparent semicircular glass block     22 visible light, x-rays and microwaves are all components of the  electromagnetic spectrum.    which statement about the waves is correct?  a in a vacuum, microwaves travel faster than visible light and h ave a shorter wavelength.  b in a vacuum, microwaves travel at the same speed as visible li ght and have a shorter  wavelength.  c in a vacuum, x-rays travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.  d in a vacuum, x-rays travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter wavelength.      23 what can transmit some types of transverse waves but not longitudinal waves?  a air  b a steel bar  c a vacuum  d sea water     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21 [turn over  24 what is ultrasound?  a sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing  b sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear  c sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear  d sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear      25 what would be the least successful method of magnetising a ste el bar?  a insert the bar in a coil with a large direct current (d.c.).  b place the bar at right angles to a weak magnetic field and hit it with a hammer.  c place the bar parallel to a strong magnetic field, heat it and let it cool.  d stroke the bar with a magnet.      26 an electric current in a copper wire is due to the flow of cha rge.    which particles are moving along the wire?  a \uf061-particles  b copper nuclei  c electrons  d protons    27 which row correctly shows a conductor and an insulator?     conductor insulator  a rubber plastic  b iron nylon  c air wood  d copper steel     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21  28 the diagram shows a circuit containing two resistors of resist ance 1.0  \uf057 and 2.0  \uf057.    a voltmeter is connected across the 1.0  \uf057 resistor by connecting p to x.    the reading on the voltmeter is 6.0  v.    v1.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9xy p     p is moved to point y in the circuit.    what is the new reading on the voltmeter?  a 3.0  v b 6.0  v c 12  v d 18  v      29 what is the unit of electromotive force (e.m.f.)?  a ampere  b newton  c ohm  d volt     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21 [turn over  30 which circuit contains a fuse?    a ab cdv a       31 a student sets up the circuit shown, with a gap xy.    x y     the student wishes to connect a component between x and y to en able her to vary the  brightness of the lamp.    which component should be used?    abcd      ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21  32 two resistors, with resistances r1 and r2, are connected in parallel.    the resistance r1 is greater than the resistance r2.    r1 r2     what is the resistance of the parallel combination?  a less than either r1 or r2  b equal to r1  c equal to r2  d the average of r1 and r2     33 circuit breakers and fuses are devices used to protect a circu it from overloading.    which statement correctly describes the difference between a ci rcuit breaker and a fuse?  a circuit breakers can be reset if they operate but fuses need t o be replaced.  b circuit breakers need to be replaced if they operate but fuses  can be reset.  c circuit breakers can be used in an a.c. circuit but fuses cann ot.  d circuit breakers cannot be used in an a.c. circuit but fuses c an.     34 why might it be dangerous to use an electrical appliance in da mp conditions?  a it might lead to the fuse blowing.  b it might lead to the insulation on the supply cable becoming da maged.  c it might lead to an electric shock.  d it might lead to the supply cable overheating.    ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21 [turn over  35 which diagram shows the magnetic field around a straight, curre nt-carrying wire?    currenta currentb currentc currentd      36 when wiring a house, it is important to use the correct cables.     the current ratings of four different cables are listed.    all four cables are used in series in the same circuit.    which cable is most likely to overheat?  a 6  a b 1 0  a c 1 5  a d 3 0  a      37 a very important experiment improved scientists\u2019 understanding  of the structure of matter.    the experiment involved \uf061-particles being fired at a thin, gold foil.    what happened?  a all the \uf061-particles were absorbed by the nuclei of the gold atoms.  b all the \uf061-particles were unaffected by the gold atoms.  c some of the \uf061-particles were attracted by the neutrons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.  d some of the \uf061-particles were repelled by the protons in the nuclei of the go ld atoms.     38 a nuclide has the symbol  na.23 11     which statement about all atoms of this nuclide is correct?  a there are 11 protons in the nucleus.  b there are 23 neutrons in the nucleus.  c there are 11 electrons in the nucleus.  d there are 34 nucleons in the nucleus.   ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/13/o/n/21  39 the half-life for lead-202 is 52  500 years.    a sample of lead-202 produces 800 counts  / s.    how long will it take for the count rate to drop to 100 counts  / s?  a 105  000 years  b 157  500 years  c 210  000 years  d 420  000 years     40 why is a thick shield made of lead needed to protect people fro m a source of \uf067-rays?  a gamma radiation is strongly ionising and so is not very penetra ting.  b gamma radiation is strongly ionising and so is very penetrating .  c gamma radiation is weakly ionising and so is not very penetrati ng.  d gamma radiation is weakly ionising and so is very penetrating.       "
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_21.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib21 11_0625_21/2rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *2413099302*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/21     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21  1 which instrument is most suitable for measuring the thickness of a single sheet of paper?  a 15  cm rule  b balance  c metre rule  d micrometer screw gauge      2 the diagrams show distance\u2013time graphs for four objects.    which graph represents an object moving with an increasing spee d?    distance time 0a 0distance time 0b 0 distance time 0c 0distance time 0d 0      3 an object has a weight of 6.4  n on the earth where the gravitational field strength is 10  n / kg.    which row states the mass and the weight of the object on the m oon where the gravitational field  strength is 1.6  n / kg?     mass  / kg weight on  the moon  / n  a 0.64 1.0  b 0.64 6.4  c 4.0 1.0  d 4.0 6.4     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21 [turn over  4 which substance in the table has the lowest density?     substance mass  / g volume  / cm3  a nylon 1.2 1.0  b cotton 1.5 1.0  c olive oil 1.8 2.0  d water 2.0 2.0      5 a 20  m long, uniform bridge of weight 100  kn is supported at each end by pillars, as shown.    100  kn24 kn20 m pillar pillarbridget1 t2     the pillars exert forces t1 and t2 on the ends of the bridge.    w h a t  a r e  t h e  v a l u e s  o f  t1 and t2 when a van of weight 24  k n  i s  o n  t h e  b r i d g e ,  5  m from the   left-hand pillar?     t1 / kn t2 / kn  a 56 68  b 62 62  c 68 56  d 74 50     6 a spring, which obeys hooke\u2019s law, has an unstretched length o f 10  cm.    a load of 20  n is suspended from the spring.    the new length of the spring is 36  cm.    what is the spring constant k of the spring?  a 0 . 5 6  n / cm b 0 . 7 7  n / cm c 1 . 3  n / cm d 1 . 8  n / cm    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21  7 what is the relationship between the impulse acting on an obje ct and the change in momentum of  the object?  a impulse = change in momentum  b impulse = change in momentum \uf0b4 time  c impulse = change in momentum time  d impulse = change in momentum mass     8  electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy  transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  b nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  d nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  generator     9 a motor of power p exerts a force f on an object. the objec t moves a distance d during the time t  that the force acts.    which equation is used to calculate the time t ?  a t = pdf b t = pfd c t = fpd d t = fdp      10 a scientist uses an electric motor to lift a load through a ve rtical distance of 2.0  m.    he then increases the input power to the motor and repeats the experiment. the efficiency of the  motor does not change.    which row correctly describes the effect that this has on the u seful work done lifting the load and  the time taken to lift it?     work done time taken  a decreases decreases  b stays the same decreases  c decreases stays the same  d stays the same stays the same     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21 [turn over  11 four containers are filled to the top with the same liquid. the  base of each container is circular.    which container has the greatest pressure exerted by the liquid  at its base?    ab c d      12 a liquid is evaporating. the liquid is not boiling.    which statement about the liquid is correct at an instant in ti me?  a any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.  b any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid\u2019s surface.  c only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, and only from the  liquid\u2019s surface.  d only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, but from any part  of the liquid.     13 the diagram shows two cylinders connected by a narrow tube fit ted with a tap.    tap20 cm380 cm3    one cylinder contains 80  cm3 of gas at a pressure of 2.0 \uf0b4 105  pa. the other cylinder contains a  vacuum.    the volume of the evacuated cylinder is 20  cm3. the tap is opened so that the gas can flow to fill  both cylinders.    the temperature of the gas remains constant.    what is the new pressure of the gas?  a 0.50 \uf0b4 105  pa  b 1 . 6  \uf0b4 105  pa  c 2 . 5  \uf0b4 105  pa  d 8 . 0  \uf0b4 105  pa    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21  14 an aluminium block has a mass of 200  g.    the specific heat capacity of aluminium is 900  j / (kg  \uf0b0c).    how much energy is needed to increase the temperature of the bl ock from 20  \uf0b0c to 110  \uf0b0c?  a 2 . 0  j b 2 0 0 0  j c 1 6  200  j d 1 6  200  000  j    15 the diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.    liquid capillary tube scale bulb    which change to the design would result in a more sensitive the rmometer?  a increase the density of the liquid.  b increase the diameter of the capillary tube.  c increase the number of scale markings.  d increase the volume of the bulb.    16 the diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.    base of panhandle of pan     which row is correct for the materials used to make the base an d the handle of the pan?     base of pan handle of pan  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21 [turn over  17 the diagram shows waves in a ripple tank containing water.        the waves approach a barrier and pass through the gap in the ba rrier.    the size of the gap is about the same size as the wavelength of  the ripples.    the gap size is increased.    what happens to the ripple pattern to the right of the barrier?   a the ripples are closer together.  b the ripples are further apart.  c the ripples are more curved.  d the ripples are less curved.    18 the diagram shows a wave.    displacement distance1 2 46 5 30 0     which row correctly indicates the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave?     amplitude wavelength  a the distance between 1 and 2 the distance between 4 and 5  b the distance between 1 and 2 the distance between 4 and 6  c the distance between 1 and 3 the distance between 4 and 5  d the distance between 1 and 3 the distance between 4 and 6     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21  19 two beams of light are both the same colour of red. one beam i s travelling through air. the other  beam is travelling through water. each beam has a different bri ghtness.    which quantity is the same for both sets of waves?  a amplitude  b frequency  c speed  d wavelength    20 the diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass bl ock. some of the light is refracted  and some of the light is reflected. two angles, p and q, are marked on the diagram.    air glasspqray of light     which row gives the angle of incidence and states whether total  internal reflection occurs?     angle of  incidence total internal  reflection  a p no  b p yes  c q no  d q yes     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21 [turn over  21 the diagram shows a ray of light in glass incident on the surfa ce between the glass and air.    air glass     what happens if the angle of incidence is made larger than the critical angle for the glass?  a the angle of refraction becomes equal to 90 \uf0b0.  b there is a refracted ray and a ray reflected inside the glass.  c there is a refracted ray only.  d there is only a ray reflected inside the glass.     22 the sun emits infrared radiation and light.    light from the sun reaches the earth in 8 minutes.    which row gives correct information about the infrared radiatio n?     wavelength of  infrared radiation time taken for infrared  radiation to reach the earth  a longer than wavelength of light 8 minutes  b longer than wavelength of light much less than 8 minutes  c shorter than wavelength of light 8 minutes  d shorter than wavelength of light much more than 8 minutes      23 which list shows regions of the el ectromagnetic spectrum in ord er of increasing frequency?  a x-ray \uf0ae ultraviolet \uf0ae visible light \uf0ae infrared  b x-ray \uf0ae infrared \uf0ae visible light \uf0ae ultraviolet  c infrared \uf0ae visible light \uf0ae ultraviolet \uf0ae x-ray  d ultraviolet \uf0ae visible light \uf0ae infrared \uf0ae x-ray    24 what is ultrasound?  a sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing  b sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear  c sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear  d sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21  25 an uncharged, metal sphere is placed on an insulating support.  a positively charged rod is  brought close to the sphere, but does not touch it.    + +++++     how do the charges in the sphere move and what is now the charg e on the sphere?     movement of charges charge on sphere  a   negative charges move  to the right of the sphere positive    b   negative charges move  to the right of the sphere neutral    c   positive charges move  to the left of the sphere positive    d   positive charges move  to the left of the sphere neutral      26 in which circuit is the ammeter measuring the flow of charge th rough the lamp?    aa ad ab ac      27 a lamp is connected to a cell.    which circuit diagram shows the direction of conventional curre nt i and also the direction of flow  of electrons  e?    d e ic e ib e ia e i      ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21 [turn over  28 the diagram shows a circuit containing two resistors of resist ance 1.0  \uf057 and 2.0  \uf057.    a voltmeter is connected across the 1.0  \uf057 resistor by connecting p to x.    the reading on the voltmeter is 6.0  v.    v1.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9xy p     p is moved to point y in the circuit.    what is the new reading on the voltmeter?  a 3.0  v b 6.0  v c 12  v d 18  v     29 the graph shows the current\u2013voltage relationship for a circuit  component x.    0 0 voltagecurrent     what happens to the resistance of x and what happens to the tem perature of x as the voltage  increases?     resistance  of x temperature  of x  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21  30 the diagrams show pairs of circuits containing logic gates.    in which diagram does the lower circuit of the pair behave diff erently from the upper circuit?    a b c d      31 in which circuit do both lamps light?    d c b a      ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21 [turn over  32 two resistors, with resistances r1 and r2, are connected in parallel.    the resistance r1 is greater than the resistance r2.    r1 r2     what is the resistance of the parallel combination?  a less than either r1 or r2  b equal to r1  c equal to r2  d the average of r1 and r2     33 the metal cases of electrical appliances are connected to an ea rth wire.    which statement is not correct?  a the live wire may become loose and touch the metal case.  b if the metal case becomes live, the earth wire conducts curren t to the ground.  c the earth wire needs to have a high resistance.  d earthing metal cases helps prevent a person from receiving an electric shock.     34 what is the function of the split-ring commutator in an electr ic motor with a single rotating coil?  a to enable the motor to function with an a.c. source  b to reverse the current in the coil once every revolution  c to reverse the current in the coil whenever its plane becomes perpendicular to the magnetic  field  d to reverse the current in the coil whenever its plane is paral lel with the magnetic field    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21  35 which graph represents an alternating current (a.c.)?    current time0 0a current time0 0b current time0 0c current time0 0d      36 the diagrams show a horizontal wire in a magnetic field.    the horizontal wire is firmly held at each end (not shown) and cannot move.    the magnets and holder are on a balance.    when there is no current in the wire, the reading on the balanc e is 0.35  g.    0.35  gs n s n view from side view from abovebalancefixed horizontal wire fixed horizontal wirecurrent direction     there is a d.c. current in the wire, as shown.    what happens to the reading on the balance?  a smaller than 0.35  g  b no change  c changing from smaller to larger than 0.35  g repeatedly  d larger than 0.35  g     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21 [turn over  37 the nucleus of an americium atom contains 146 neutrons and 95 protons. it decays by emitting  an \uf061-particle.    how many neutrons and how many protons remain in the nucleus wh en this form of americium  decays?     number of neutrons  remaining number of protons  remaining  a 142 93  b 142 95  c 144 93  d 144 95      38 the graph shows how the count rate measured by a radioactivity detector placed near a  radioactive sample changed with time.    600 550500450400350300250200150100 50 0 0123456789 1 0 11count rate counts  / min time  / h    given that the background count rate is 30 counts  / min, what is the half-life of this sample?  a 3 . 4  h b 3 . 6  h c 4 . 0  h d 5 . 5  h   ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/21/o/n/21  39 a teacher holds a radioactive source near a detector.    the reading on the detector is 320 counts  / min.    the detector is switched on again after the source has been rem oved and it shows a reading of  20 counts  / min.    what is the counts  / min solely due to the source and why is there a reading on the detector when  there is no radioactive source present?     counts  / min  due to the source reason for reading  with no source  a 300 zero error on detector  b 300 background radiation  c 340 zero error on detector  d 340 background radiation      40 which statement is not correct?  a \uf061-particles are used to detect cracks in metallic structures.  b \uf062-particles are used in the meas urement of the thickness of pape r.  c \uf067-rays may be used to treat cancer patients.  d smoke alarms contain a weak source of \uf061-particles.       "
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  ib21 11_0625_22/2rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *8748531517*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/22     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  1 a student is taking some measurements.    which measurement is taken directly using a micrometer screw ga uge?  a 0.52  g / mm2 b 0 . 5 2  g / mm3 c 0 . 5 2  mm d 0 . 5 2  mm2     2 which graph represents an object that is moving at constant sp eed?    distance time0 0a distance time0 0b distance time0 0c distance time0 0d      3 in which situation does object x have a greater mass than objec t y?  a object x is in a larger gravitational field than object y and both have the same weight.  b object x shows a greater resistance to change in motion than o bject y and both experience  the same resultant force.  c object x has a lower density than object y and both occupy the  same volume.  d object x moves at a greater speed than object y and both posse ss the same kinetic energy.     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21 [turn over  4 which substance in the table has the lowest density?     substance mass  / g volume  / cm3  a nylon 1.2 1.0  b cotton 1.5 1.0  c olive oil 1.8 2.0  d water 2.0 2.0      5 three simple machines are shown.    1 moving soil with a wheelbarrow2 cutting string with scissors3 screwing a screw with a screwdriver    which machines are an application of the moment of a force?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only    6 a spring, which obeys hooke\u2019s law, has an unstretched length o f 10  cm.    a load of 20  n is suspended from the spring.    the new length of the spring is 36  cm.    what is the spring constant k of the spring?  a 0 . 5 6  n / cm b 0 . 7 7  n / cm c 1 . 3  n / cm d 1 . 8  n / cm     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  7 a rocket is launched upwards from the surface of the moon.    hot gases are ejected downwards over a very short period of tim e.    which statement is not correct?  a the rocket experiences a downward force.  b the rocket experiences an upward force.  c the total momentum of the hot gases is equal to the momentum o f the rocket.  d the total momentum of the hot gases and rocket when the hot ga ses have been ejected is  zero.      8 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy  transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  b nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  d nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  generator     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21 [turn over  9 a box of mass m slides down a slope of length l against a frictional force f. it descends a vertical  height d.    dldirection of motion f stopmass m     as the box slides down the slope, it loses gravitational potent ial energy and it does work against  the friction.    which row gives the loss in gravitational potential energy and the work done against friction?     loss in gravitational  potential energy work done  against friction  a mgd f l  b mgd fd  c mg l f l  d mg l fd     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  10 a rope, connected to a pulley system and motor, is used to lif t different objects through different  distances. the time taken to lift each object is the same. the diagrams are not to scale.    which motor requires the greatest power?    motor 10 kg2 mplatforma motor 5 kg3 mplatformb motor 10 kg1 mplatformc motor 2 kg3 mplatformd      11 which equation can be used to calculate the pressure at a dept h h beneath the surface of a  liquid?  a p = h g\uf072 b p = h g\uf072 c p = h\uf072g d p = 1 hg\uf072      12 a liquid is evaporating. the liquid is not boiling.    which statement about the liquid is correct at an instant in ti me?  a any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.  b any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid\u2019s surface.  c only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, and only from the  liquid\u2019s surface.  d only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, but from any part  of the liquid.    ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21 [turn over  13 a gas is contained in a sealed container in a laboratory. the temperature of the gas increases.    what happens to the average speed and what happens to the total  kinetic energy of the gas  molecules?     average speed total kinetic energy  a does not change does not change  b does not change increases  c increases does not change  d increases increases      14 an aluminium block has a mass of 200  g.    the specific heat capacity of aluminium is 900  j / (kg  \uf0b0c).    how much energy is needed to increase the temperature of the bl ock from 20  \uf0b0c to 110  \uf0b0c?  a 2 . 0  j b 2 0 0 0  j c 1 6  200  j d 1 6  200  000  j    15 the diagram shows the apparatus used to measure the specific la tent heat of vaporisation of  water.    2 kw heate r water     after the water begins to boil, 110  g of water is converted to steam in 120  s.    using these results, what is the value of the specific latent h eat of vaporisation of water?  a 1 . 8  j / kg b 1 8 0 0  j / kg c 2200  j / kg d 2  200  000  j / kg     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  16 the diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.    base of panhandle of pan     which row is correct for the materials used to make the base an d the handle of the pan?     base of pan handle of pan  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     17 the diagram shows the pattern of water waves as they pass throu gh a narrow gap.    narrow gap between two barriers     which row names the process shown and describes the effect of u sing a wider gap?     name of process wider gap  a refraction waves spread out less  b refraction waves spread out more  c diffraction waves spread out less  d diffraction waves spread out more     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21 [turn over  18 which row is not correct for a wave on the surface of water?     quantity usual unit  a amplitude m  b frequency hz  c wavelength \uf06c  d speed m  / s      19 the diagram shows how a ray of light refracts when going from air to perspex.    x zyair perspexw     the critical angle of perspex is c.    which expression is correct?  a  zx  sin sin  = sin  c  b  xz  sin sin  = sin  c  c  yw  sin sin  = sin  c  d  wy  sin sin  = sin  c     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  20 the diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass bl ock. some of the light is refracted  and some of the light is reflected. two angles, p and q, are marked on the diagram.    air glasspqray of light     which row gives the angle of incidence and states whether total  internal reflection occurs?     angle of  incidence total internal  reflection  a p no  b p yes  c q no  d q yes     21 the letter f is reflected in a mirror.    mirror    what does the optical image look like?    a bc d      ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21 [turn over  22 the sun emits infrared radiation and light.    light from the sun reaches the earth in 8 minutes.    which row gives correct information about the infrared radiatio n?     wavelength of  infrared radiation time taken for infrared  radiation to reach the earth  a longer than wavelength of light 8 minutes  b longer than wavelength of light much less than 8 minutes  c shorter than wavelength of light 8 minutes  d shorter than wavelength of light much more than 8 minutes     23 which statement about electromagnetic waves is not correct?  a they travel at 3 \uf0b4 10 8  m / s in a vacuum.  b they transfer energy.  c they travel at 340  m / s in air.  d they are transverse waves.      24 what is ultrasound?  a sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing  b sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear  c sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear  d sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear      25 which diagram shows the electric field pattern between two opp ositely charged parallel metal  plates?    ab \u2013cd + \u2013 + \u2013 + \u2013 +      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  26 which circuit symbol represents a component used to measure el ectric current?    a vab c d g     27 the graph shows the current\u2013voltage characteristic for a condu ctor.    pqr 0 0current voltage    where on the graph can ohm\u2019s law be applied to the conductor?  a at q only  b between p and q  c between p and r  d between q and r      28 the diagram shows a circuit containing two resistors of resist ance 1.0  \uf057 and 2.0  \uf057.    a voltmeter is connected across the 1.0  \uf057 resistor by connecting p to x.    the reading on the voltmeter is 6.0  v.    v1.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9xy p     p is moved to point y in the circuit.    what is the new reading on the voltmeter?  a 3.0  v b 6.0  v c 12  v d 18  v     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21 [turn over  29 there is a current i in a resistor. the potential difference (p.d.) across the resi stor is v.    which other physical quantity is needed to be able to determine  the energy transferred w by the  resistor?  a the electromotive force (e.m.f.) e of the source  b the power p dissipated  c the resistance r of the resistor  d the time t for which there is a current in the resistor     30 the diagrams show pairs of circuits containing logic gates.    in which diagram does the lower circuit of the pair behave diff erently from the upper circuit?    a b c d      31 several cells are connected in series, as shown.        what is the combined electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cells?   a the average of the e.m.f.s of the separate cells  b the e.m.f. of one of the cells  c the product of the e.m.f.s of the cells  d the sum of the e.m.f.s of the cells    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  32 two resistors, with resistances r1 and r2, are connected in parallel.    the resistance r1 is greater than the resistance r2.    r1 r2     what is the resistance of the parallel combination?  a less than either r1 or r2  b equal to r1  c equal to r2  d the average of r1 and r2     33 the diagram shows a motor connected to an a.c. supply. the circ uit is incomplete.    mxy     which device needs to be connected between point x and point y t o  p r e v e n t  t h e  w i r e s  f r o m   overheating if a fault in the motor causes the current to get t oo high?  a an ammeter  b a fuse  c a transformer  d a length of thick copper wire     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21 [turn over  34 the diagram shows a wire between two magnets. an electromotive force (e.m.f.) is induced in the  wire when it is moved up between the two magnets.    n s     four tests are done.    1 the direction of movement of the wire is reversed.  2 the direction of the magnetic field is reversed. 3 the wire is moved more quickly. 4 the magnetic field strength is decreased.    which tests will induce a smaller e.m.f. in the wire?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 3 and 4 d 4  o n l y     35 four positions of a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field,  a s  i n  a  d . c .  m o t o r ,  a r e  s h o w n .    in diagrams 2 and 4, the coil is at an angle of 45 \uf0b0 to the field lines.    n s coil1 n s2 n s3 n s4     which row is correct?     turning effect of the forces   in positions 1 and 3 turning effect of the forces   in positions 2 and 4  a different different  b different same  c same different  d same same     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  36 the diagram shows the magnetic field due to a current in a sol enoid.    direction of current     the direction of the current is reversed.    which row describes the effect that this has on the magnitude a nd on the direction of the  magnetic field?     magnitude of  magnetic field direction of  magnetic field  a increases changes  b increases unchanged  c unchanged changes  d unchanged unchanged     37 the nucleus of an americium atom contains 146 neutrons and 95 protons. it decays by emitting  an \uf061-particle.    how many neutrons and how many protons remain in the nucleus wh en this form of americium  decays?     number of neutrons  remaining number of protons  remaining  a 142 93  b 142 95  c 144 93  d 144 95     38 a sample of americium decays and changes into neptunium. the h alf-life of americium is  432 years.    which fraction of the americium will remain after 1728 years?  a 0 b 1 16 c 1 8 d 1 4     ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  39 the graph shows the decay curves of four different radioactive isotopes.    which isotope has the largest half-life?    count rate 0 0 timea b c d       40 the diagrams show \uf061-particles and \uf062-particles passing through an electric field.    which diagram shows the correct paths of the \uf061-particles and \uf062-particles?    + /g68 /g69+++a ++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013+ /g68 /g69+++b ++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013 + /g68 /g69+++c ++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013+ /g68 /g69+++d ++ \u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013\u2013      ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  blank page",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/22/o/n/21  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_23.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  ib21 11_0625_23/2rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *4199489879*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/23     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  october/november 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  1 for which purpose is a micrometer screw gauge suitable?  a measuring the current in a coil that is known to be about 3 \uf0b4 10\u20136  a  b measuring the diameter of a ball bearing that is known to be a bout 3 \uf0b4 10\u20133  m  c measuring the mass of a grain of sand that is known to be abou t 3 \uf0b4 10\u20133  g  d measuring the moment used to turn a screw that is known to be about 3 \uf0b4 10\u20136  n m     2 the graph shows how the speed of a car varies with time at the start of a journey.    6 543210speed m  / s time  / s  01234     which distance\u2013time graph represents the motion of the car over  the same time period?    12 10 86420distance  / m time  / s012a 3412 10 86420distance  / m time  / s012b 34 6 543210distance  / m time  / s012c 346 543210distance  / m time  / s012d 34      ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21 [turn over  3 which statement about mass and weight is correct?  a mass is a property that causes change in motion.  b mass is caused by a gravitational field acting on a weight.  c weight is a property that resists change in motion.  d weight is caused by a gravitational field acting on a mass.      4 which substance in the table has the lowest density?     substance mass  / g volume  / cm3  a nylon 1.2 1.0  b cotton 1.5 1.0  c olive oil 1.8 2.0  d water 2.0 2.0      5 the diagram shows a uniform bar resting on two supports, p and  q.    0 cm10 50 60 100 pq    the weight of the bar is 4.0  n.    what is the force exerted on the bar by support p?  a 0 . 8 0  n b 2 . 0  n c 3 . 2  n d 4 . 0  n      6 a spring, which obeys hooke\u2019s law, has an unstretched length o f 10  cm.    a load of 20  n is suspended from the spring.    the new length of the spring is 36  cm.    what is the spring constant k of the spring?  a 0 . 5 6  n / cm b 0 . 7 7  n / cm c 1 . 3  n / cm d 1 . 8  n / cm    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  7 a cricket ball has a mass of 0.16  kg. the ball travels at 30  m / s. the ball is hit by a bat with a force  of 10  800  n. after being hit, the ball moves off at 30  m / s in the opposite direction.    30 m / s 30 m / s     for how long was the ball in contact with the bat?  a 0.0004  s b 0.00089  s c 0.0044  s d 0 . 0 1 5  s     8 electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.    in which order is the energy  transferred in this process?  a nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  b nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  c nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  generator  \uf0ae  turbines  d nuclear fuel  \uf0ae  reactor and boiler  \uf0ae  turbines  \uf0ae  generator      9 which energy resource has the sun as its only source of energy ?  a geothermal  b nuclear  c oil  d tidal    ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21 [turn over  10 a man, attached to an elastic cord, jumps from a platform. he falls 60  m before starting to rise.  the length of the unextended cord is 30  m.    the diagrams show four successive stages in his fall.    in which position is elastic (strain) energy and kinetic energy  present?    abcd 60 m45 m30 m      ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  11 the diagram shows three glass containers.    all three contain water filled to the same vertical height h.    hh hpqr wooden block supporting r    the base area of p is equal to the base area of r.    the base area of q is larger than the other two.    students are asked to compare the water pressure at the bottom of each container.    student 1 says that the pressure at base r is more than the pre ssure at base p.  student 2 says that the pressure at base q is less than the pre ssure at base p.  student 3 says that the pressures at all three bases are the sa me.    which students are correct?  a none are correct  b 1 only  c 2 only  d 3 only     12 a liquid is evaporating. the liquid is not boiling.    which statement about the liquid is correct at an instant in ti me?  a any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.  b any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid\u2019s surface.  c only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, and only from the  liquid\u2019s surface.  d only molecules with enough ener gy can escape, but from any part  of the liquid.     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21 [turn over  13 the same mass of a gas is trapped in four identical cylinders b y a piston that can move.    the diagrams show the samples o f gas in different conditions of  volume and temperature.    piston1 20 \u00b0c2 40 \u00b0c3 40 \u00b0c4 50 \u00b0c    which list gives the pressure of the gas in order from lowest t o highest?  a 1  \uf0ae 2 \uf0ae 3 \uf0ae 4  b 1  \uf0ae 3 \uf0ae 2 \uf0ae 4  c 4  \uf0ae 2 \uf0ae 3 \uf0ae 1  d 4  \uf0ae 3 \uf0ae 2 \uf0ae 1     14 an aluminium block has a mass of 200  g.    the specific heat capacity of aluminium is 900  j / (kg  \uf0b0c).    how much energy is needed to increase the temperature of the bl ock from 20  \uf0b0c to 110  \uf0b0c?  a 2 . 0  j b 2 0 0 0  j c 1 6  200  j d 1 6  200  000  j    15 a solid and a gas are each given the same increase in temperat ure. the gas is kept at a constant  pressure.    which row is correct?     the one which  expands most the reason  a   the gas   molecules in the gas each expand  more than the solid molecules  b   the gas   the molecules in the solid  are held strongly together  c   the solid   molecules in the solid each expand  more than the gas molecules  d   the solid   all the molecules in the gas are  separate from one another    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  16 the diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.    base of panhandle of pan     which row is correct for the materials used to make the base an d the handle of the pan?     base of pan handle of pan  a good thermal conductor good thermal conductor  b good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor  c poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor  d poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor     17 in the diagram, the mountaineer can hear the stream although h e cannot see it. when he is  closer to the gully, he can both hear and see the stream. when he is further from the gully, he  can neither hear nor see the stream.    streammountainee rgully     which statement is not correct?  a as he approaches the gully edge,  he hears first the short wavel ength, higher frequencies and  then the long wavelength, lower frequencies.  b as he approaches the gully edge, the sound becomes louder.  c he hears the stream because some of the sound is diffracted.  d he hears the stream because some of the sound is reflected from  the opposite wall of the  gully.    ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21 [turn over  18 which row correctly defines the frequency and the speed of a w ave?     frequency speed  a   number of waves   distance travelled  per unit time  b   number of waves   time taken for one complete  wave to pass a point  c   number of waves  passing per unit time distance travelled  per unit time  d   number of waves  passing per unit time time taken for one complete  wave to pass a point      19 a ray of light travels from air into a glass block.     in air in glass  speed of ray va vg  wavelength of ray \uf06ca \uf06cg  frequency of ray fa fg    three suggestions as to how the refractive index of glass n may be calculated are listed.    1 n = a gv v  2 n = a g\uf06c \uf06c  3 n = a gf f    which suggestions are correct?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  20 the diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass bl ock. some of the light is refracted  and some of the light is reflected. two angles, p and q, are marked on the diagram.    air glasspqray of light     which row gives the angle of incidence and states whether total  internal reflection occurs?     angle of  incidence total internal  reflection  a p no  b p yes  c q no  d q yes     21 a photographer sees his image as shown.    x photographer image    what could x be?    abcd mirror translucent glass blocktransparent glass prismtransparent semicircular glass block   ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21 [turn over  22 the sun emits infrared radiation and light.    light from the sun reaches the earth in 8 minutes.    which row gives correct information about the infrared radiatio n?     wavelength of  infrared radiation time taken for infrared  radiation to reach the earth  a longer than wavelength of light 8 minutes  b longer than wavelength of light much less than 8 minutes  c shorter than wavelength of light 8 minutes  d shorter than wavelength of light much more than 8 minutes      23 which row gives the typical values of the speed of sound at ro om temperature in the materials  stated?     speed of sound  m / s  air water iron  a 340 1500 5100  b 340 5100 1500  c 5100 1500 340  d 3.0 \uf0b4 108 3 . 0  \uf0b4 108 3.0 \uf0b4 108      24 what is ultrasound?  a sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing  b sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear  c sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear  d sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear      25 a stationary, charged particle is in a field.    which fields can cause there to be a force on this particle due  to its charge?    1 gravitational field  2 magnetic field  3 electric field    a 1 and 2 b 1 only c 2 and 3 d 3 only     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  26 an electric current in a copper wire is due to the flow of cha rge.    which particles are moving along the wire?  a \uf061-particles  b copper nuclei  c electrons  d protons    27 which row is correct?     definition of current i direction of  conventional current  a   i =  tq from positive terminal  to negative terminal  b   i =  tq from negative terminal  to positive terminal  c   i = q \uf0b4 t   from positive terminal  to negative terminal  d   i = q \uf0b4 t   from negative terminal  to positive terminal     28 the diagram shows a circuit containing two resistors of resist ance 1.0  \uf057 and 2.0  \uf057.    a voltmeter is connected across the 1.0  \uf057 resistor by connecting p to x.    the reading on the voltmeter is 6.0  v.    v1.0 \u03c9 2.0 \u03c9xy p     p is moved to point y in the circuit.    what is the new reading on the voltmeter?  a 3.0  v b 6.0  v c 12  v d 18  v    ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21 [turn over  29 which graph shows the current\u2013voltage characteristic for a fil ament lamp?    0 0 via vib vic vid 0 00 00 0      30 the diagrams show pairs of circuits containing logic gates.    in which diagram does the lower circuit of the pair behave diff erently from the upper circuit?    a b c d       31 two 3.0  \uf057 resistors and one 6.0  \uf057 resistor are connected in series with a cell.    which statement is correct?  a the current in the cell is equal to the current in the resisto rs.  b the current in the cell is greater than the current in the res istors.  c the potential difference (p.d.) across each resistor is equal to the p.d. across the cell.  d the potential differences across each resistor are equal.    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  32 two resistors, with resistances r1 and r2, are connected in parallel.    the resistance r1 is greater than the resistance r2.    r1 r2     what is the resistance of the parallel combination?  a less than either r1 or r2  b equal to r1  c equal to r2  d the average of r1 and r2     33 circuit breakers and fuses are devices used to protect a circu it from overloading.    which statement correctly describes the difference between a ci rcuit breaker and a fuse?  a circuit breakers can be reset if they operate but fuses need t o be replaced.  b circuit breakers need to be replaced if they operate but fuses  can be reset.  c circuit breakers can be used in an a.c. circuit but fuses cann ot.  d circuit breakers cannot be used in an a.c. circuit but fuses c an.    34 electrical energy is transferred by transmission lines at high voltage.    which statement explains why a high voltage is used?  a the voltage is alternating.  b the transmission lines have a larger resistance.  c the transmission lines carry greater power.  d there is a smaller current in th e transmission lines for the s ame power.     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21 [turn over  35 which diagram shows the magnetic field around a straight, curre nt-carrying wire?    currenta currentb currentc currentd      36 the coil in a d.c. motor is con nected to a split-ring commutato r.    what is the purpose of the split-ring commutator?  a to ensure that the coil continues to rotate in the same directi on  b to ensure that the size of the current in the coil remains cons tant  c to ensure that the size of the turning effect on the coil remai ns constant  d to ensure that the turning effect on the coil changes direction      37 the nucleus of an americium atom contains 146 neutrons and 95 protons. it decays by emitting  an \uf061-particle.    how many neutrons and how many protons remain in the nucleus wh en this form of americium  decays?     number of neutrons  remaining number of protons  remaining  a 142 93  b 142 95  c 144 93  d 144 95     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  38 the half-life for lead-202 is 52  500 years.    a sample of lead-202 produces 800 counts  / s.    how long will it take for the count rate to drop to 100 counts  / s?  a 105  000 years  b 157  500 years  c 210  000 years  d 420  000 years     39 oxygen-15 is used in hospitals.    the count rate from a detector placed close to a sample of oxyg en-15 was recorded over a  period of 15  min. the background count rate is 20 counts  / min.    200 180160140120100 80604020 0count rate counts  / min time  / min0123456789 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5     what is the half-life of this sample of oxygen-15?  a 2 . 0  min b 2 . 4  min c 2 . 8  min d 7 . 5  min    ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  40 of the three types of ionising radiation, \uf061, \uf062 and \uf067, why does \uf061-emission cause the most  ionisation?  a \uf061-particles have the smallest mass.  b \uf061-particles have the greatest mass.  c \uf061-particles move with the greatest speed.  d \uf061-particles travel the greatest distance in matter.     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  blank page",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of the cam bridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name  of the university of  cambridge local examinations sy ndicate (ucles), which itself is  a department of the univ ersity of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 0625/23/o/n/21  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_31.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. dc (rw/sg) 213661/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over *5015915017* physics  0625/31 paper 3 theory (core)  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122",
            "2": "2 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a student uses a ruler to measure the length of a piece of wire, as shown in fig.  1.1. 0 cm1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11 12 13 14 15 16wire fig. 1.1 (not to scale)  (a) use the ruler in fig.  1.1 to determine the length of the piece of wire.  length of wire =   cm [2]  (b) the student folds the piece of wire and measures its mass.   (i) state the name of an instrument the student can use to measure mass.  .  [1]   (ii) the student determines the volume of the wire.    he uses a measuring cylinder part\u2011filled with water and places the wire in it, as shown in  fig. 1.2. 50 40 30 20 10cm3 waterwater50 40 30 20 10cm3folded wire folded wire fig. 1.2    determine the volume of the wire by using information in fig.  1.2.  volume of wire =  ... cm3 [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) the student measures the mass and the volume of a piece of metal.   the mass of the piece of metal is 93.6  g and its volume is 12  cm3.   calculate the density of the metal.  density of metal =  ... g / cm3 [3]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 a slope is made by resting one end of a plank of wood on a block, as shown in fig.  2.1. plank block of woodtrolley fig. 2.1  two students each use a digital stop \u2011watch to measure the time for a small trolley to roll down the  full length of the slope.  fig. 2.2 shows the times on the stop \u2011watches. 00 : 06 14min sec1   100 student 1 00 : 06 28min sec1   100 student 2time = .  s time = .  s fig. 2.2  (a) (i) on the line next to each stop \u2011watch, write the time it shows.  [1]   (ii) calculate the average time for the trolley to roll down the slope.   average time =  ... s [2]   (iii) the students want the same trolley to take more time to roll down the plank.    suggest how the students alter the arrangement in fig.  2.1.  .  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) a different trolley travels 1.2  m down the slope in a time of 7.8  s.   calculate the average speed of the trolley.  average speed =  .. m / s [3]  (c) the trolley travels down a different slope. fig.  2.3 shows the speed\u2013time graph. 000.20.40.60.81.01.21.41.6 1.0 2.0 3.0 time  / s4.0speed m / s fig. 2.3    calculate the distance travelled by the trolley between time = 0 and time = 4.0  s.  distance travelled =  .. m [3]  [total: 10]",
            "6": "6 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 (a) a student determines the centre of mass of a piece of card. fig.  3.1 shows the equipment the  student uses. a cbpin card cotton thread weightstandcork ruler fig. 3.1   describe how the student determines the centre of mass of the card using the equipment in  fig. 3.1.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) another card is pivoted at point  p. the weight of the card is 1.4  n and acts through a point  20 cm from p.   fig. 3.2 shows the arrangement. 20 cm 1.4 ncard pivotp fig. 3.2   calculate the moment of the weight of the card about point  p.  moment of weight =  . n cm [3]  [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 (a) a substance cools from 50  \u00b0c to 5.0  \u00b0c. its melting point is 20  \u00b0c. the substance takes  30 minutes to cool from 50  \u00b0c to its melting point.   the substance takes a total time of 80  minutes to cool from 50  \u00b0c to 5.0  \u00b0c.   on fig.  4.1, sketch a graph that shows how the temperature of the substance varies with time  as it cools from 50  \u00b0c to 5.0  \u00b0c. 00204060 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80temperature  / \u00b0c time  / min fig. 4.1  [4]  (b) describe the arrangement and motion of the molecules in the substance when they are in the  solid state.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "9": "9 0625/31/    o/   n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over5 fig. 5.1 shows a plastic bottle on a bench. the plastic bottle contains a liquid. plastic bottle liquid bench fig. 5.1  (a) the weight of the bottle and liquid is 12 n. the area of the bottle in contact with the bench is  25 cm2.   calculate the pressure of the bottle on the bench.  pressure on bench =  .. n / cm2 [3]  (b) a student pours out all the liquid from the bottle. she then connects the bottle to a vacuum  pump which removes most of the air from the bottle. fig. 5.2 shows the bottle after most of  the air is removed. crushed bottleto vacuum pump fig. 5.2   explain why the bottle is crushed. use your ideas about molecules.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 (a) fig. 6.1 shows part of a water wave. height 0p q s tr distance fig. 6.1   (i) state the letter p, q, r, s or t on fig.  6.1 that represents the wavelength of the water  wave.  .  [1]   (ii) state the letter p, q, r, s or t on fig.  6.1 that represents the amplitude of the water  wave.  .  [1]   (iii) state what is meant by the term frequency  of a wave.  ...  .  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) two students, a and b, use echoes to measure the speed of sound.   student  a has two blocks of wood that make a loud sound when banged together. student  b  has a stop \u2011watch. they stand 120  m from a school wall as shown in fig.  6.2. school wall 120  mb astop-watch blocks of wood fig. 6.2 (not to scale)   describe how the students use the arrangement in fig.  6.2 to determine the speed of sound  in air.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 7 fig. 7.1 shows a ray of red light entering a semicircular glass block. the ray strikes the flat surface  of the block at x and emerges into the air. fig.  7.1 does not show the path of the refracted ray in  the air. xnormal air glass ray of red light fig. 7.1  (a) on fig.  7.1:   (i) draw the path of the refracted ray in the air  [1]   (ii) mark, and label with the letter i, the angle of incidence  [1]   (iii) mark, and label with the letter r, the angle of refraction.  [1]  (b) when the angle of incidence at x is 70\u00b0, the ray does not emerge from the glass into the air.   state what happens to the ray at x and explain why this happens.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (c) visible light is one part of the electromagnetic spectrum. x\u2011rays are also part of the  electromagnetic spectrum.   (i) visible light and x\u2011rays are travelling through a vacuum.    compare their speed and frequency by completing the sentences.    the speed of visible light is .. the speed of x \u2011rays.    the frequency of visible light is .. the frequency of x \u2011rays.  [2]   (ii) describe one use of x\u2011rays.  .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "13": "13 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a bar magnet. fig. 8.1   (i) on fig.  8.1, label the north and south poles of the magnet, using the letters n and s.  [1]   (ii) a soft \u2011iron bar is positioned as shown in fig.  8.2. soft-iron bar fig. 8.2    state and explain what happens to the soft \u2011iron bar.  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) (i) a plastic rod is rubbed with a cloth. the plastic rod becomes positively charged.    explain how the friction between the cloth and the rod causes the rod to become  positively charged.    use your ideas about the movement of charge.  ...  .  [2]   (ii) plastic is an electrical insulator. iron is an electrical conductor.    state two other materials that are electrical conductors. 1   2    [1]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 9 this question is about electric circuits.  (a) (i) state the name of the instrument used to measure potential difference (p.d.) in an electric  circuit.  .  [1]   (ii) state the unit for the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery.  .  [1]  (b) (i) a student connects a circuit to determine the resistance of a wire. the current in the wire  is 0.20  a when the potential difference across the wire is 6.4  v.    calculate the resistance of the wire.  resistance =  .. \u03c9 [3]   (ii) the student has some wires of the same material as those in (b)(i)  but of various lengths  and thicknesses. he wants a wire with higher resistance than the wire in (b)(i) .    state two ways of identifying a wire with a higher resistance by comparing its length and  thickness with the wire in (b)(i) . 1   2      [2]  [total: 7]",
            "15": "15 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 10 (a) a student plans to demonstrate the induction of an electromotive force (e.m.f.) in a wire.   he has a length of wire, a sensitive centre\u2011reading galvanometer and a permanent magnet.   (i) describe how the student uses the equipment.  ...  .  [2]   (ii) state two ways in which the student can increase the size of the induced e.m.f. 1   2      [2]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows a d.c. motor. magnet coilrotation of coil batterycurrent \u2013+ fig. 10.1   (i) on fig.  10.1, draw an arrow between the poles of the magnet to show the direction of  the magnetic field.  [1]   (ii) state two ways of making the coil spin faster. 1   2      [2]   (iii) state one way of making the coil spin in the opposite direction.  .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/31/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 11 (a) \u03b1 (alpha)\u2011particles, \u03b2 (beta)\u2011particles and \u03b3 (gamma)\u2011rays have different characteristics.   complete table  11.1 by indicating the correct type of radiation for each characteristic.   the first one is done for you. table 11.1 characteristictype of radiation \u03b1\u2011particles   (alpha \u2011particles)\u03b2\u2011particles   (beta \u2011particles)\u03b3\u2011rays   (gamma \u2011rays) largest mass \u2713 most ionising most penetrating negatively charged greatest speed  [3]  (b) a sample of radioactive material contains 80  mg of sodium\u201124.   the half \u2011life of sodium\u201124 is 15  hours.   calculate the mass of sodium\u201124 remaining in the sample after 45  hours.  mass remaining =   mg [3]  [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third \u2011party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer \u2011related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 20 pages. cambridge igcse\u2122 dc (ce/cb) 213662/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over *1280515585* physics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core)  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a cyclist travels to a friend\u2019s house.  fig. 1.1 shows the distance\u2013time graph of the journey. 0 100 200 300 400 time  / s50002004006008001000 distance  / m ab cde fig. 1.1  (a) determine the distance travelled by the cyclist between points c and e.  distance travelled =    m [2]  (b) describe the motion, if any, of the cyclist between points b and c.  ...  [1]  (c) state the section, ab, bc, cd or de, of the graph in which the speed of the cyclist is the  fastest. give a reason for your answer. section of graph  reason  .  [2]  (d) calculate the average speed of the cyclist between points a and e. include the unit in your  answer.  average speed =    unit   [4]  [total: 9]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 (a) a coin collector has 19 identical coins, as shown in fig. 2.1. fig. 2.1   fig. 2.2 shows one of the coins in the coin collector\u2019s hand. fig. 2.2   the coin collector wants to check the thickness of one coin. she has a 30  cm ruler.   describe how she can use the 30  cm ruler to determine the thickness of one coin accurately.   you may include a diagram if you wish.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) the coin collector finds another coin. she thinks this coin is made of gold.   she performs an experiment to find the coin\u2019s density.   she obtains the following results:    mass of coin = 52.5  g    volume of coin = 5.4  cm3   (i) show that the density of this coin is about 10  g / cm3.  [3]   (ii) the density of liquid mercury is 13.6  g / cm3. state and explain whether the coin in (b)(i)   floats on liquid mercury.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 fig. 3.1 shows the vertical forces acting on a toy rocket as it leaves the ground. upward force = 70  n smooth surface weight of rocket = 15  n fig. 3.1  (a) calculate the size of the resultant vertical force on the rocket.  resultant force =    n [2]  (b) explain why the top of the rocket is pointed and has a smooth surface.  ...  .  [2]  [total: 4]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 (a) a teacher wants to measure the mass of a block of metal. she also wants to measure the     length, width and height of the block.   fig. 4.1 shows the block of metal.  length width height fig. 4.1   complete each sentence using a word from the list. balance    barometer    protractor    ruler    voltmeter   (i) to find the mass of the metal block, the teacher uses a  .  [1]   (ii) to measure the length, width and height of the metal block, she uses a    [1]  (b) the mass of the block is 5000  g.   calculate the weight of the block.   weight =    n [3]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) fig. 4.2 shows another block of metal on a solid surface. 20 cm 12 cm 2.0 cmsolid surface fig. 4.2 (not to scale)   (i) calculate the area of the block of metal in contact with the solid surface.  area =  .  cm2 [1]   (ii) the weight of the block of metal in fig. 4.2 is 60  n.    calculate the pressure of the block of metal on the solid surface.  pressure =    n / cm2 [3]  [total: 9]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 5 (a) a student determines the centre of mass of a piece of wood. the wood is an irregular shape  of constant thickness.   he suspends the piece of wood from a nail as shown in fig. 5.1. the wood is able to swing  freely.   the student suspends a weight on a thin string from the nail. piece of woodnail hole in wood thin string weight fig. 5.1   describe how to determine the centre of mass of the piece of wood in fig. 5.1.   you may draw a diagram to help your answer.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 5.2 shows a flat, symmetrical object. indicate its centre of mass by drawing x in the  correct position. fig. 5.2  [1]   (c) fig. 5.3 shows a side view of a drinking-glass in two different positions, a and b. position a position b fig. 5.3   state which position, a or b, is more stable. explain your answer.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 (a) a girl has eight objects made of different materials.    the materials have different electrical and magnetic properties.   a piece of copper wire    a sheet of aluminium foil    a glass rod    an iron nail   a piece of cotton cloth    a wooden block    a plastic strip    a paper bag   complete table 6.1 by adding one object for each property. one is done for you.   choose objects from the list. each object may be used once, more than once or not at all. table 6.1 property object electrical conductor electrical insulator non-magnetic material a wooden block magnetic material can be charged by rubbing with a cloth  [4]  (b) fig. 6.1 shows three measuring instruments.   write the name of each measuring instrument next to its diagram.   the measuring instruments are not drawn to scale.   .. .. ..      fig. 6.1  [3]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a candle underneath a thin, metal fan. direction of rotationsupport for fan candlethin, metal fan fig. 7.1   when the candle starts to burn, the fan starts to rotate around its support.   explain what causes the fan to rotate.  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) fig. 7.2 shows a bimetallic strip. it is made of two metals, steel and copper, fastened together.   the bimetallic strip is straight when the temperature is 25  \u00b0c. temperature = 25  \u00b0ccoppersteel clamp fig. 7.2   fig. 7.3 shows the bimetallic strip when the temperature is 40  \u00b0c. temperature = 40  \u00b0ccoppersteel clamp fig. 7.3   (i) draw the bimetallic strip when the temperature is 10  \u00b0c.  [1]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) the bimetallic strip is used in a circuit, as shown in fig. 7.4. the circuit is in a room. contacts coppercell electric bell steelroom temperature = 25  \u00b0c fig. 7.4    the room temperature is 25  \u00b0c.    state and explain any changes in the circuit as the temperature of the room rises above  40 \u00b0c.  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 fig. 8.1 shows a simplified diagram of a geothermal power station. cooling tower cold watersteamsteamturbine generator fig. 8.1  (a) (i) state the energy source for a geothermal power station.  ...  [1]   (ii) complete the sentence about useful energy transfer in the power station.    the generator converts ... energy into ... energy.  [2]  (b) (i) state two advantages of a geothermal power station compared to a coal-fired power  station. 1   2     [2]   (ii) state one disadvantage of using geothermal energy rather than coal in a power station.  .  [1]  [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a ray of light reflected by a plane mirror. normal a bcdplane mirror ray of light fig. 9.1   (i) state which angle, a, b, c or d, is the angle of incidence.  ...  [1]   (ii) state which angle, a, b, c or d, is the angle of reflection.    [1]  (b) fig. 9.2 shows a road junction viewed from above. a plane mirror allows the drivers of the two  cars a and b to see each other. car b car a ray of light from car atall buildings plane mirrortall buildings fig. 9.2   fig. 9.2 shows a ray of light from car a travelling towards the plane mirror.   on fig. 9.2, carefully continue this ray to show how the driver of car b can see car a.   [2]  [total: 4]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows two resistors connected in series with a cell and three ammeters. a a areading = a1reading = a3 reading = a2 fig. 10.1   (i) state the physical quantity that an ammeter measures.  .  [1]    (ii) indicate the correct statement about the readings a1, a2 and a3 on the ammeters in  fig. 10.1.    tick one box. a2 is greater than a1  a2 is less than a3 a1 is equal to a3 a1 is equal to ( a2 + a3) [1]  (b) (i) draw a circuit diagram for a battery connected to two resistors in parallel.  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) state one advantage of connecting lamps in parallel.  .  [1]  (c) fig. 10.2 shows another circuit. component x fig. 10.2   the circuit consists of a power supply, a lamp and component x.   (i) name component x in fig. 10.2.  .  [1]   (ii) suggest one use of the circuit.  .  [1]   (iii) describe how to use component x and explain its effect on the circuit.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "18": "18 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 11 (a) fig. 11.1 shows a magnet and a coil of wire connected to a galvanometer. direction of movementmagnet s ncoil of wire galvanometer fig. 11.1   a student slowly moves the magnet into the coil. the pointer on the galvanometer moves to  the left. this deflection shows that an electromotive force (e.m.f.) is induced in the coil.   state three  ways of increasing the size of the e.m.f. in the coil. 1   2   3   [3]",
            "19": "19 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 11.2 shows a transformer. core240  vprimary coil 1000 turnssecondary coil 50 turns fig. 11.2   (i) name one material that is suitable for the core of the transformer.  .  [1]   (ii) the primary coil has 1000 turns and its input is 240  v a.c.    the secondary coil has 50 turns.    calculate the output voltage across the secondary coil.   output voltage =  .  v [3]  [total: 7]",
            "20": "20 0625/32/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 12 (a) state which radioactive emission is:   (i) the most penetrating  ...  [1]   (ii) the most ionising.    [1]  (b) explain the meaning of the term isotope .  ...  .  [2]  (c) the isotope iodine-131 is used in hospitals. a sample of iodine-131 is prepared for use.   the half-life of iodine-131 is 8 days.   determine the fraction of iodine-131 remaining in the sample after 16 days.  fraction remaining =    [2]  [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_33.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated. dc (rw/cgw) 213663/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over *3377268769* physics  0625/33 paper 3 theory (core)  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122",
            "2": "2 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 1 fig. 1.1 shows a plant pot falling from an upstairs balcony. the plant pot has a constant acceleration  as it falls. balcony plant pot ground level fig. 1.1  (a) state the cause of the acceleration.  .  [1]  (b) fig. 1.2 shows the speed\u2013time graph for the falling plant pot. the plant pot hits the ground at  time = 1.8 s. 00 0.4 0.8 1.2 time  / sspeed m / s 1.6 2.0481216 fig. 1.2   determine the height of the balcony above the ground using the information shown in fig.  1.2.  height =  .. m [3]  [total: 4]",
            "4": "4 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 fig. 2.1 shows a pea plant. one of the pods is open, showing the peas inside. pea plant peas pea pods fig. 2.1  (a) a food scientist needs to find the average diameter of a pea.   she places 14  peas against a ruler, as shown in fig.  2.2. fig. 2.2   use information from fig.  2.2 to determine the average diameter of one pea.  average diameter of one pea =   cm [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) the food scientist needs to find the average density of some peas.   she uses the following values:   mass of peas = 183  g   volume of peas = 250  cm3.   calculate the average density of these peas.  average density =  ... g / cm3 [3]  (c) a different variety of pea has a density of 0.89  g / cm3. one pea of this variety is placed in salt  water. the density of the salt water is 1.02  g / cm3.   state whether this pea floats or sinks in the salt water. give a reason for your answer.   answer ... reason  ...  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 fig. 3.1 shows the horizontal forces acting on a skateboarder. skateboardforward force = 100  n backward force = 60  n skateboarder fig. 3.1  (a) calculate the resultant force acting on the skateboarder.  resultant force =   n  direction =  ...  [2]  (b) describe the effect of the resultant force in (a) on the motion of the skateboarder.  .  [1]  (c) the skateboarder is moving along a horizontal path.   the backward force is 100  n. the forward force is 100  n.   describe the motion of the skateboarder.  .  [1]  [total: 4]",
            "7": "7 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 4 (a) (i) state the principle of conservation of energy.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) fig. 4.1 shows a type of light bulb. energy changes occur when electrical energy is  supplied to the light bulb, as shown in fig.  4.1. wasted energyuseful output = 50  j of light total input = 500  j of electrical energy fig. 4.1    calculate the wasted energy when the total input energy is 500  j.    use information from fig.  4.1.  wasted energy =  ... j [2]   (iii) describe the effect of the wasted energy on the air surrounding the light bulb.  .  [1]  (b) table  4.1 lists situations in which energy is stored.   complete table 4.1 by naming the form of energy stored in each situation. table 4.1 situation form of energy stored battery in a mobile phone coal in the ground a rotating turbine water stored behind a hydroelectric dam  [4]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 5 fig. 5.1 shows two metal blocks, a and b, which are the same size and made of the same material.  block  a has a dull black surface and block  b has a shiny white surface. block adull black surfaceshiny white surfacethermometers block b fig. 5.1  the starting temperature of both blocks is 80  \u00b0c.  fig. 5.2 shows the cooling curve for block  a. 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 time  / mintemperature  / \u00b0c 6 7 8 9 10 11 12102030405060708090100 fig. 5.2",
            "9": "9 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (a) (i) using fig.  5.2, determine the change in temperature for block  a from 0 to 2  min.  .  [1]   (ii) determine the final temperature of block  a.  final temperature =  . \u00b0c [1]   (iii) explain why block  a has a steady final temperature.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the results for block  b are slightly different from the results for block  a.   (i) predict the cooling curve for block  b by drawing a line on the graph in fig.  5.2. [3]   (ii) explain why the results for block  b are slightly different from the results for block  a.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "10": "10 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 (a) in fig. 6.1, the circles represent molecules. the diagram shows the arrangement of the  molecules in a liquid. solid liquid gas fig. 6.1   (i) show the arrangement of the molecules in a solid.    draw a diagram in the box above the word \u2018solid\u2019 in fig.  6.1. draw at least 10 molecules.  [2]   (ii) show the arrangement of the molecules in a gas.    draw a diagram in the box above the word \u2018gas\u2019 in fig.  6.1. draw at least 10 molecules.  [2]   (iii) state the name of the process by which a solid changes into a liquid.  .  [1]   (iv) state the name of the process by which a gas changes into a liquid.  .  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 6.2 shows a microscope used for viewing smoke particles in a small glass box. a bright  light shines into the box.   the box contains smoke particles and air molecules. glass box containing smoke particles and air moleculesbright lightmicroscope fig. 6.2   a student views the smoke particles through the microscope.   the smoke particles are moving.   (i) state the name given to the movement of the smoke particles.  .  [1]   (ii) fig. 6.3 shows a smoke particle as seen with the microscope. smoke particle fig. 6.3    show how the smoke particle moves by drawing a series of lines on fig.  6.3. [2]   (iii) the temperature in the glass box decreases.    describe any changes in the movement of the smoke particles.  .  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "12": "12 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 7 a group of students are taking measurements so they can calculate the speed of sound.  the students and their teacher are outside.  the teacher holds two blocks of wood and the students have stop-watches.  the teacher stands a long distance from the students, as shown in fig.  7.1.  all the students can see the teacher clearly. teacherblocks of wood fig. 7.1  (not to scale)  the teacher claps the two blocks of wood together to produce a loud sound. the students measure  the time interval between seeing the teacher clap and hearing the sound.  (a) fig. 7.2 shows three of the stop-watches. the stop-watches show three of the values recorded  for the time interval. 00:01. 27 00:01. 34 00:01. 44 fig. 7.2   calculate the average value for the time intervals shown on the stop-watches in fig.  7.2.  average time interval =  ... s [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) (i) state the name of the instrument needed to measure the distance between the teacher  and the students.  .  [1]   (ii) the distance between the teacher and the students is 415  m.    the average time for the sound to travel between the teacher and the students is 1.29  s.    calculate the speed of sound.  speed of sound =  .. m / s [3]  [total: 7]",
            "14": "14 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 (a) the diagram in fig.  8.1 shows a ray of light travelling from a glass block into air. air b c d efaglass blockray of light  fig. 8.1   (i) state the name for the dashed line shown in fig.  8.1.  .  [1]   (ii) state the letter, a, b, c, d, e or f, which indicates the angle of incidence of the ray in  fig. 8.1.  .  [1]   (iii) state the letter, a, b, c, d, e or f, which indicates the angle of refraction of the ray in  fig. 8.1.  .  [1]",
            "15": "15 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) the diagram in fig.  8.2 shows an object and a thin converging lens.   two rays are drawn from the object to the lens. the points marked f are the principal focuses  of the lens. f fobject fig. 8.2   (i) continue the paths of the two rays in fig.  8.2 to show how the lens forms an image of  the object.  [2]   (ii) on fig.  8.2, draw an arrow to represent the image.  [1]   (iii) tick (\u2713) two rows to indicate the nature of the image formed by the lens in fig.  8.2. nature of image tick enlarged the same size diminished upright inverted  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 9 (a) the circuit diagrams in fig.  9.1 and fig.  9.2 each show two resistors connected to a battery.   fig. 9.1 shows two resistors connected in series.   fig. 9.2 shows two resistors connected in parallel.   all the resistors have the same resistance. ignore the resistance of the ammeters. a1a212 v         a312 v a4 a5  fig. 9.1  fig. 9.2   compare the currents in the ammeters by completing the sentences.   (i) the current in a1 is  the current in a2. [1]   (ii) the current in a3 is  the current in a4. [1]   (iii) the current in a4 is  the current in a5. [1]   (iv) the current in a1 is  the current in a3. [1]  (b) the lights in a room are connected in parallel with a power supply.   state one advantage of connecting the lights in parallel.  .  [1]",
            "17": "17 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) the circuit diagram in fig.  9.3 shows a resistor  q connected to a battery. a q fig. 9.3   the current in resistor q is 0.048  a. the potential difference (p.d.) across resistor q is 12  v.   calculate the resistance of resistor  q. include the unit in your answer.  resistance =  ...  unit ..  [4]  [total: 9]",
            "18": "18 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 (a) fig. 10.1 shows the arrangement for transferring electrical energy from a power station to  homes and factories. cables homesfactories power station step-up transformerstep-down transformer fig. 10.1   explain why the arrangement includes a step -up transformer and a step -down transformer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) a transformer has 2000  turns on the primary coil and 500  turns on the secondary coil.   the potential difference (p.d.) across the primary coil is 240  v a.c.   calculate the p.d. across the secondary coil.  p.d. across the secondary coil =  ... v [3]  [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 11 (a) table  11.1 gives information about the nature and charge of three types of radioactive  emission. the table is incomplete. table 11.1 type of radioactive  emissionnature charge \u03b1 (alpha) helium nucleus \u03b2 (beta) negative \u03b3 (gamma)   complete table  11.1.  [4]  (b) (i) state which radioactive emission is the most ionising.  .  [1]   (ii) state which radioactive emission is the most penetrating.  .  [1]",
            "20": "20 0625/33/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge. (c) californium -241 is a radioactive isotope. a scientist measures the count rate from a sample of  californium -241 as it decays. table  11.2 shows the results. table 11.2 time / min count rate counts  / s 0 800 2 560 4 400 6 280 8 200 10 140 12 100 14   (i) determine the half-life of californium -241.  half-life of californium -241 =  ... min [2]   (ii) predict the count rate of this sample of californium -241 at time  = 14 min.  count rate =  ... counts  / s [1]  [total: 9]"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_41.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated. dc (rw/jg) 214504/3 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over *3646122811* physics  0625/41 paper 4 theory (extended)  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122",
            "2": "2 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 some physical quantities are scalars and other physical quantities are vectors.  (a) state how a vector quantity differs from a scalar quantity.  ...  .  [1]  (b) circle the vector quantities in the list. acceleration      energy      mass      momentum      temperature      time      speed      velocity  [2]  (c) a microphone in a recording studio has a mass of 0.55  kg and a weight w.   (i) calculate w.  w =  ..  [1]   (ii) the microphone is suspended from the ceiling by a cord attached to a small ring. fig.  1.1  shows the microphone pulled to one side and kept stationary by a horizontal thread. ceiling cord microphoneringhorizontal thread fig. 1.1  (not to scale)",
            "3": "3 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over    the tension t in the horizontal thread is 8.1  n.    determine graphically the magnitude and the direction, relative to the vertical, of the  resultant of w and t. use a scale of 1.0  cm to 1.0  n or greater.  magnitude of resultant =     direction of resultant =   ...  relative to vertical  [3]   (iii) state and explain how the magnitude and direction of the resultant in (c)(ii)  compares  with the force on the ring due to the tension in the cord.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 9]",
            "4": "4 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 a student carries out an experiment using a plastic beaker that contains 0.24  kg of water at 17  \u00b0c.  the thermal capacity (heat capacity) of the beaker is negligible.  (a) define thermal capacity .  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) several ice cubes are at a temperature of 0  \u00b0c. the ice cubes are dropped into the water and  the internal energy of the water decreases.   (i) give a simple molecular account of this decrease in internal energy.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) the specific heat capacity of water is 4200  j / (kg \u00b0c).    calculate the decrease in the internal energy of the water as its temperature decreases  from 17  \u00b0c to 0  \u00b0c.  decrease in internal energy =   ..  [2]  (c) as the temperature of the water decreases, some of the ice melts.   (i) explain why this ice melts.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) describe how to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of ice using this experiment.  state any other measurements that the student needs to make.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 fig. 3.1 shows a balloon inflated with air. fig. 3.1  the pressure of the air at the inner surface of the balloon keeps the rubber stretched.  (a) explain, in terms of the momentum of the molecules, why there is a pressure at the inner  surface of the balloon.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) the volume of the air in the balloon is 630  cm3 and the pressure of the air in the balloon is  1.0 \u00d7 105 pa.   the balloon is tied to a heavy stone and dropped into a lake. the balloon is pulled down  quickly and the temperature of the air inside does not change.   (i) calculate the volume of the air when the pressure of the air is 1.4  \u00d7 105 pa.  volume =   ..  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) the balloon and stone stop moving when the stone hits the bottom of the lake. the  temperature of the air now begins to decrease.    explain why the volume of the air in the balloon decreases as the temperature decreases.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a train of mass 1.8  \u00d7 105 kg is at rest in a station. at time t = 0, the train begins to accelerate along  a straight, horizontal track and reaches a speed of 20  m / s at t = 15 s. the train continues at a  speed of 20  m / s for 10  s.  at t = 25 s, the driver applies the brakes and the resistive force on the train causes it to decelerate  uniformly to rest in a further 24  s.  fig. 4.1 is an incomplete distance\u2013time graph for this journey. 0 10 20 30 40 500200400600 t / sdistance  / m fig. 4.1  (a) complete fig.  4.1 by drawing:   (i) a line to represent the motion of the train between t = 15 s and t = 25 s [1]   (ii) a curve to represent the motion of the train between t = 0 and t = 15 s. [1]  (b) calculate the kinetic energy of the train between t = 15 s and t = 25 s.  kinetic energy =   ..  [3]",
            "9": "9 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) while the train decelerates to rest, it does work against the resistive force and its kinetic  energy decreases.   (i) define work done .  ...  .  [2]   (ii) using fig.  4.1, determine the distance moved by the train while it decelerates.  distance moved =   ..  [1]   (iii) calculate the resultant force acting on the train while it decelerates.  resultant force =   ..  [2]  [total: 10]",
            "10": "10 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 5 (a) explain, in terms of the behaviour of light rays, what is meant by principal focus  for a thin  converging lens.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) state what is meant by focal length .  ...  .  [1]  (c) a lens is used to produce a focused image of an object on a translucent screen. fig.  5.1  shows the object o and its image i. po1 cm 1 cmtranslucent screen i fig. 5.1   (i) consider the straight ray that passes from the tip of o to the tip of i and find the position  of the lens. mark the position of the lens by drawing a vertical line labelled  l from the top  of the grid to the bottom.  [1]   (ii) on fig.  5.1, draw a ray that passes through one of the principal focuses and determine  the focal length of the lens.  focal length =   ..  [2]",
            "11": "11 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (iii) object  o is a printed document that includes a large letter  r on the side facing the lens.  the top edge of the document corresponds to the tip of o. fig.  5.2 shows the printed  document. rrrrr printed documenttop edge  fig. 5.2  fig. 5.3    on fig.  5.3, mark a tick in one of the boxes (\u200a \u2713\u200a) to indicate how the image on the  translucent screen appears to someone who is looking at the screen from point  p. explain  why the image has this appearance.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 x\u2011rays are electromagnetic waves. fig.  6.1 shows the position of x\u2011rays in the electromagnetic  spectrum arranged according to increasing wavelength. increasing wavelengthgamma-rays x-rays j k l microwaves visible light fig. 6.1  (a) three components of the spectrum are unnamed but labelled j, k and l.   (i) state the names of these three components. j   k   l    [2]   (ii) state which of these three components has the lowest frequency.  .  [1]  (b) calculate the frequency of x\u2011rays that have a wavelength of 1.2  \u00d7 10\u20139 m in a vacuum.  frequency =   ..  [3]  (c) (i) describe one medical use of x\u2011rays.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]",
            "13": "13 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) state one reason why it is necessary to take safety precautions when x \u2011rays are used.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 10]",
            "14": "14 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "15": "15 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 7 a plastic rod becomes negatively charged when it is rubbed with a woollen cloth.  (a) describe, in terms of particles, how the rod becomes negatively charged when rubbed with  the cloth.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) a light, conducting ball is at rest on a metal table. when the rod is brought close to the ball, as  shown in fig.  7.1, the ball jumps up towards the rod. rod metal tableball fig. 7.1   (i) explain why the ball jumps up.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) the ball touches the rod and falls back down to the table.    explain why this happens.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "16": "16 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 a circuit contains two fixed resistors and a light\u2011dependent resistor (ldr). fig.  8.1 shows that the  power supply is a 9.0  v battery. 450  \u03c9 800  \u03c99.0 v fig. 8.1  the current in the 450  \u03c9 resistor is 0.012  a.  (a) state what is meant by electric current.  ...  .  [1]  (b) the current in the ldr is i1 and the current in the 800  \u03c9 resistor is i2.   complete the equation that relates the current in the 450  \u03c9 resistor to i1 and i2. current in the 450  \u03c9 resistor =  .  [1]  (c) calculate the power dissipated in the 800  \u03c9 resistor.  power =   ..  [4]",
            "17": "17 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (d) the brightness of the light that is incident on the ldr increases.   explain what happens to the potential difference (p.d.) across the 450  \u03c9 resistor.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 9]",
            "18": "18 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "19": "19 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 9 uranium \u2011235 (235 92u) is a radioactive isotope of uranium that occurs naturally on earth.  (a) describe the composition and structure of a neutral atom of uranium \u2011235.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) another isotope of uranium is uranium \u2011238.   describe how an atom of uranium \u2011238 differs from an atom of uranium \u2011235.  ...  .  [1]  (c) in the reactor in a nuclear power station, a nucleus of uranium \u2011235 absorbs a slow \u2011moving  neutron and then undergoes nuclear fission.   two neutrons, a nucleus of xenon \u2011140 (140 54xe) and a nucleus of an element represented by e  are produced.   complete the equation for this fission reaction. n  +  235 92u    140 54xe  +  ... ...e  +  2n  [2]  (d) xenon \u2011140 (140 54xe) is radioactive. it decays by \u03b2\u2011emission to isotope  q.   determine:   (i) the proton number of q  ...  [1]   (ii) the nucleon number of q.    [1]  [total: 9]",
            "20": "20 0625/41/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third \u2011party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer \u2011related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": "dc (nf/sg) 214505/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overthis document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. *7432627075* physics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended)  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122",
            "2": "2 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 fig. 1.1 shows a space rocket accelerating away from a launch pad. fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2 is a speed\u2013time graph for the first 30  s of the rocket\u2019s flight. 005001000speed m / s 15002000 10 time  / s20 30 fig. 1.2  (a) describe how the acceleration of the rocket changes between time  = 10 s and time  = 30 s.  .  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) by drawing a tangent to the graph, determine the acceleration of the rocket at time  = 25 s.  acceleration  =    [2]  (c) determine the distance travelled by the rocket between time  = 0 and time  = 10 s.  distance  =  .  [2] [total: 5]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 (a) state hooke\u2019s law.  ...    .  [1]  (b) fig. 2.1 shows the extension\u2013load graph for a spring. 00100extension  / mm200 10 load  / n20 30 fig. 2.1   (i) on fig.  2.1, mark and label the region where the spring obeys hooke\u2019s law.  [1]   (ii) calculate the spring constant k.  k =    [2]   (iii) the original length of the spring is 120  mm.     calculate the length of the spring when a load of 8.5  n is applied to the spring.  length  =    [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) the weight of an object is 4.0  n on a planet where the acceleration of free fall is 8.7  m / s2.   calculate the mass of the object.  mass  =    [2] [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 fig. 3.1 shows a collision at very slow speed between two cars travelling along a straight road. car bcar a fig. 3.1  car b, of mass 800  kg, is moving at 2.0  m / s and collides with car a, of mass 1000  kg, which is  stationary. after the collision, both cars travel in the same direction as the initial direction of car b.  (a) after the collision, car a moves at 1.3  m / s.    show that the speed of car b after the collision is approximately 0.4  m / s. [3]  (b) (i) calculate the impulse exerted by car a on car b.  impulse =    [2]   (ii) state the impulse exerted by car b on car a.  impulse =    [1] [total: 6]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 4 (a) a power station uses wind energy to generate electricity.   state and explain whether this method of generating electricity is renewable. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  ... [2]  (b) state two energy resources that do not have the sun as their source. 1   2   [2]  (c) for each energy resource, state the form of energy stored in: fossil fuels  . water behind hydroelectric dams.  . [2] [total: 6]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 5 (a) a thermocouple thermometer is used to determine the temperature difference between a  mixture of ice and water and liquid mercury at approximately 600  \u00b0c.   complete fig.  5.1 with a labelled diagram to show how the thermocouple thermometer can  be used in this way. mixture of ice and waterliquid mercury at approximately 600  \u00b0c fig. 5.1 [3]  (b) state two other physical properties that can be used to measure temperature. 1   2   [2]  (c) state two benefits of using a thermocouple thermometer instead of a liquid-in-glass  thermometer. 1   2   [2] [total: 7]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 shows particles of a material in which a sound wave is travelling. fig. 6.1 (not to scale)  (a) on fig.  6.1, mark:   (i) the centre of a compression with the letter c  [1]   (ii) the centre of a rarefaction with the letter r  [1]   (iii) one wavelength with a double-ended arrow.  [1]  (b) circle one value from the list which is the speed of sound in water.  15 m / s        150  m / s        1500  m / s        15  000 m / s        150  000 m / s        1  500 000 m / s [1]  (c) the wavelength of a sound wave in water is 12  cm.    calculate the frequency of this sound wave using your value from (b).  frequency =    [3]  (d) state and explain whether the sound in (c) is ultrasound. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 9]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 7 fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light approaching face ab of a glass prism of refractive index 1.5. ray of light b ca fig. 7.1  (a) (i) on fig.  7.1, accurately draw the path of the ray within the prism from face ab to face ac.  you will need to make a measurement from fig.  7.1 and carry out a calculation. [4]   (ii) determine the angle of incidence of this ray when it strikes face ac.  angle =    [1]  (b) without further measurement or calculation, sketch on fig.  7.1 the approximate path of the  ray after passing through the face ac.  [1]  (c) fig. 7.2 shows a ray of light travelling within an optical fibre. xray of light optical fibre fig. 7.2   (i) complete the path of the ray of light to the left-hand end of the fibre.  [2]   (ii) name the process taking place at x.  ..  [1] [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows a conducting object a, initially uncharged, held on an insulating stand. the  positively charged rod b is brought close to object a. + + + + +charged rod bconducting object a insulating stand fig. 8.1   (i) on fig.  8.1, draw the distribution of charges on object a.  [2]   (ii) a wire is connected from object a to earth.    state and explain any movement of charge. statement  .. explanation    ...  ... [2]  (b) there is a  current in a wire of 0.65  ma for 2.2 minutes.   calculate the charge that flows.  charge =    [3] [total: 7]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "13": "13 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows a cell of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5  v and a battery of e.m.f. 6.0  v  connected in series. 1.5 v 6.0 v fig. 9.1   calculate the combined e.m.f. of the cell and the battery.  e.m.f. =    [1]  (b) the combined resistance of the three resistors shown in fig.  9.2 is 4.4  \u03c9. i r2.0 \u03c9 3.0 \u03c9 fig. 9.2   (i) calculate the resistance of resistor r.  resistance =    [3]   (ii) the current i in fig.  9.2 is 0.94  a.    calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the combination of resistors.  p.d. =    [2] [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 (a) name the logic gate shown in fig.  10.1. .. fig. 10.1 [1]  (b) fig. 10.2 shows a combination of logic gates. input i output o fig. 10.2   complete the right-hand column of table  10.1, the truth table for the combination of logic  gates. you may use the blank column for your working. table  10.1 input i output o 0 1 [2]  (c) an electrical device has a metal case.   explain the benefit of earthing the metal case.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (d) (i) explain how a fuse protects a circuit.  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) the current in an electric kettle connected to the mains through a fuse is 10  a.    fuses with the following ratings are available.    3 a                      9  a                      10  a                      13  a                      30  a    circle the correct fuse rating for this appliance and explain your answer.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 9]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.11 (a) describe the composition and structure of a neutral atom of beryllium-8, which has a proton  number of 4 and a nucleon number of 8.  ...  ...  ...  .  [4]  (b) a radioactive isotope decays by \u03b2-emission to form an isotope of barium with nucleon  number  135. table  11.1 element symbol proton number iodine i 53 xenon xe 54 caesium cs 55 barium ba 56 lanthanum la 57 cerium ce 58 praseodymium pr 59   use data from table  11.1 to write down the nuclide equation for this decay. [4] [total: 8]"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_43.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 *2879741868* dc (pq/fc) 214506/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/43 paper 4 theory (extended)  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a ship sails in a straight line between two ports.  fig. 1.1 shows the speed\u2013time graph of the ship for the first 100 minutes of its journey between  the two ports. 0 0 20 40 time  / min60 80 10051015speed m / s20 fig. 1.1  (a) calculate the maximum acceleration during the first 100 minutes of the ship\u2019s journey.  maximum acceleration =  .  [2]  (b) calculate the total distance travelled by the ship between time = 42  min and time = 100  min.  distance travelled =  .  [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) at a time not shown on the graph, the acceleration of the ship is 0.0087  m / s2. the total mass  of the ship and its passengers is 2.3 \u00d7 107 kg.   (i) calculate the resultant force on the ship.  force =  .  [2]   (ii) explain why the force on the ship due to the ship\u2019s engine is greater than the value you  calculated in (c)(i) .  ...  .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 fig. 2.1 shows a simplified version of a \u2018gravity lamp\u2019. this apparatus is used to light a  light-emitting diode (led) without mains electricity. ledattachment to ceiling generator strap 12 kg load fig. 2.1  the load of 12  kg is raised to a height of 1.7  m above the ground. the load is connected to a  pulley system. the time taken for the load to fall to the ground is 1200 seconds. the load falls at  constant speed. the generator is connected to an led.  (a) calculate the rate of transfer of gravitational potential energy as the load falls to the ground.    rate of transfer of gravitational potential energy =  .  [4]",
            "5": "5 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) the light output of the led is 0.10  w.   calculate the efficiency of the \u2018gravity lamp\u2019.  efficiency =  .  [2]  (c) suggest a social or environmental advantage of using a \u2018gravity lamp\u2019.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 (a) a gas bubble is released at the bottom of a lake.   atmospheric pressure is 1.0 \u00d7 105 pa. the density of water is 1000  kg / m3. the temperature  of the water in the lake is constant.   (i) the gas bubble rises to the surface. the volume of the gas bubble increases as it rises  higher in the water.    explain why the volume of the bubble increases.  ...  ...  .  [2]   (ii) the volume of the gas bubble is 0.40  cm3 when it is 3.0  m below the surface of the lake.    calculate the volume of the gas bubble when it is 0.50  m below the surface of the lake.  volume =  .  [4]",
            "7": "7 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of a hydraulic press used to compress paper for recycling. piston a oilpiston bpaper to be compressedforce applied fig. 3.1   when a force is applied to piston a, it causes a pressure in the oil. this pressure produces an  upwards force on piston b. as piston b moves, it compresses the paper.   a small quantity of air leaks into the oil.   suggest and explain the effect the air has on the operation of the hydraulic press.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "8": "8 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 explain what happens to the pressure of a constant volume of air when the temperature of the air  increases. use ideas of momentum of molecules in your explanation.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [4]",
            "9": "9 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 5 (a) an aluminium saucepan and a steel saucepan have the same dimensions. table 5.1 shows  the values of the specific heat capacity and the density of aluminium and of steel. table 5.1 metalspecific heat capacity j / (kg \u00b0c)density kg / m3 aluminium 0.91 2600 steel 0.50 7600   the mass of the aluminium saucepan is 0.41  kg.   (i) calculate the mass of the steel saucepan.  mass =  .  [2]   (ii) calculate the thermal capacity of the aluminium saucepan.  thermal capacity =  .  [2]   (iii) water is heated in the steel saucepan. the initial temperature of the water and the  saucepan is 20  \u00b0c.    calculate the energy transfer needed to raise the temperature of the steel saucepan to  100 \u00b0c.  energy =  .  [2]  (b) explain why metals are better thermal conductors than non-metals.    .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "10": "10 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 6 (a) describe an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air. state the apparatus you  need, details of how to take measurements and how to calculate the speed of sound in air.   you may use the space below to draw a labelled  diagram as part of your answer.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [5]  (b) sound waves from a television are diffracted through doorways. light waves from a television  are not diffracted through doorways.   suggest why light waves and sound waves behave differently in this situation.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "11": "11 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 7 (a) fig. 7.1 shows a ray of green light emerging from one face of a glass prism. ray of green lightprism   fig. 7.1   (i) on fig. 7.1, draw the path of the green light entering and passing through the prism.  [2]    (ii) the green light is monochromatic. state, in terms of a wave property , what is meant by  monochromatic light.  .  [1]  (b) (i) state the speed of light in air.  .  [1]   (ii) the wavelength of green light in air is 5.2 \u00d7 10\u20137 m.    calculate the frequency of green light.  frequency =  .  [2]   (iii) the refractive index of glass for green light is 1.52.    calculate the speed of green light in glass.  speed =  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "12": "12 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 8 (a) fig. 8.1 shows two charged metal plates with a gap between them. the plates are parallel to  each other. the top plate is negatively charged and the bottom plate is positively charged. \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 \u2013 + + + + + fig. 8.1   on fig. 8.1, draw five electric field lines between the two plates.  [2]  (b) an electric iron has a power of 2400  w. the potential difference (p.d.) of the mains supply is  220 v.   (i) calculate the electric current in the iron.  current =  .  [2]   (ii) calculate the electric charge which flows through the iron in 15 minutes.  charge =  .  [2]   (iii) fuse ratings of 3  a, 5 a, 10  a, 13  a and 30  a are available.    state which of these fuse ratings is suitable for use in the iron.  fuse rating  .  [1]  [total: 7] ",
            "13": "13 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over blank page",
            "14": "14 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 9 fig. 9.1 shows current\u2013potential difference (p.d.) graphs for a resistor, a thermistor and a filament  lamp. 0 0 2 4 p.d.  / v6 8 10 120.20.40.6current  / a0.81.0 filament lampfilament lamp resistorresistor thermistorthermistor fig. 9.1  the resistor, the thermistor and the filament lamp are connected in series with a power supply.  (a) (i) draw a circuit diagram for this circuit.  [2]",
            "15": "15 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) add a voltmeter to your circuit diagram in (a)(i) in a correct position to measure the p.d.  across the resistor.  [1]   (iii) using the graph in fig. 9.1, determine the p.d. across the terminals of the power supply  when the p.d. across the resistor is 6.0  v.  p.d. across terminals of power supply =  .  [4]  (b) describe a practical use for a thermistor.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 10 (a) a transformer has 500 turns on the primary coil and 25 turns on the secondary coil. the input  voltage is 120  v.   (i) calculate the output voltage.  output voltage =  .  [2]   (ii) the current in the primary coil is 125  ma. the transformer is 100% efficient.    calculate the output current.  output current =  .  [2]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows a loose wire connected in a circuit with a d.c. (direct current) power supply  and a switch. the length of the wire between the two supports is in the magnetic field of a  horseshoe magnet. ns d.c. power supply switchmagnetsupport support fig. 10.1   the power supply is switched on and the wire moves down.   (i) on fig. 10.1, draw an arrow on the wire to show the direction of the current.  [1]   (ii) the power supply is switched off and the wire returns to its original position. the power  supply is then switched on so that the current is in the opposite direction.    state and explain what happens to the wire.  ...  .  [2]",
            "17": "17 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) a split-ring commutator is an important feature of a d.c. motor.   suggest one reason why the d.c. motor cannot operate without a split-ring commutator.  .  [1]  [total: 8]",
            "18": "18 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 11 (a) a detector of radioactivity is placed in a laboratory where there are no radioactive samples. a  student notices that the detector shows a count rate that varies between 20  counts  / min and  24 counts  / min.   (i) suggest a source of these readings.  .  [1]   (ii) explain why these readings are not constant.  .  [1]  (b) a nucleus of uranium (u) contains 92 protons and 146 neutrons. it decays by emitting an  \u03b1-particle to become a nucleus of thorium (th).   complete the nuclide equation for this radioactive decay.  . .u   . .th + . .\u03b1  [3]    (c) an isotope of radon has a half-life of 3.8 days. it decays by emitting \u03b1-radiation.   calculate the time taken for 16  mg of this isotope to decay to 2  mg of this isotope.  time =    days  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "19": "19 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "20": "20 0625/43/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_51.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. dc (rw/ct) 204870/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over *1984445981* physics  0625/51 paper 5 practical test  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122 for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the stretching of a spring.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig.  1.1. spring metre rule0 cm mark 100  cm markbossclamp clamp stand bench fig. 1.1  (a) the metre rule is clamped in position near to the spring. do not change the position of the  metre rule.   (i) write down the scale readings in mm from the metre rule at the top and bottom of the  spring.  top reading =  ...  mm  bottom reading =  ...  mm  [1]   (ii) using the two readings, calculate the length l0 of the spring in mm. record l0 in table  1.1.  the value l0 is the length of the spring when the load l = 0.00  n. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) \u2022 suspend a load l = 0.20  n from the spring. record the new length l of the spring in  table  1.1. \u2022 use the equation e = ( l \u2013 l0) to calculate the extension e of the spring. record the value  of e in table  1.1. \u2022 repeat the procedure using loads l = 0.40  n, l = 0.60  n, l = 0.80  n and l = 1.00  n.  record all the readings and results in the table  1.1. table 1.1 l / n l / mm e / mm 0.00 0 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00  [3]  (c) plot a graph of e / mm ( y-axis) against  l / n (x-axis).  [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) fig. 1.2 shows the unstretched spring and the spring with a load. on fig.  1.2, show clearly  the distances l0, l and e. fig. 1.2  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistance of combinations of resistors.  fig. 2.1 shows the first circuit arrangement. the circuit is set up for you. a vx ypower supply fig. 2.1  (a) switch on.   (i) record vx, the potential difference (p.d.) across resistor x.  vx =    [1]   (ii) record ix, the current in the circuit and then switch off the power supply.  ix =    [1]   (iii) calculate rx, the resistance of resistor x, using the equation rx = vx ix.  rx =    [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) disconnect the voltmeter.   reconnect the voltmeter to measure vxy, the potential difference across the two resistors x  and y in series.   switch on.   (i) record vxy.  vxy =  ..    record ixy, the current in the circuit and then switch off the power supply.  ixy =  ..  [1]   (ii) calculate rxy, the combined resistance of resistors x and y connected in series, using     the equation rxy = vxy ixy.  rxy =    [1]  (c) disconnect the voltmeter.   connect resistor  z in parallel  with resistor  x.   connect the voltmeter to measure vxz, the potential difference across the parallel combination  of resistor  x and resistor  z.   (i) draw the circuit diagram for this arrangement. label the resistors x, y and z.  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) switch on.    record vxz, the potential difference across the two resistors x and z in parallel.  vxz =  ..    record ixz, the current in the circuit and then switch off the power supply.  ixz =  ..  [1]   (iii) calculate rxz, the combined resistance of resistors x and z connected in parallel, using     the equation rxz = vxz ixz.  rxz =    [1]  (d) a student does this experiment using a set of three identical resistors. her results show that,  within the limits of experimental accuracy, the combined resistance of two identical resistors  connected in series is four times the combined resistance of the same two resistors connected  in parallel. to test whether her results are true for other values of resistance, she does the  same procedure with other sets of three identical resistors.   suggest the values of resistance she could use to reach a conclusion during a 1  hour practical  lesson.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 in this experiment you will investigate the position of the image in a plane mirror.  carry out the following instructions. use the ray -trace sheet supplied, referring to fig.  3.1 for  guidance. hole m rn la cb eye fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 draw a line 10  cm long near the middle of the ray -trace sheet. label the line mr. draw a  normal to this line that passes through its centre. label the normal nl. label the point at  which nl crosses mr with the letter b. \u2022 draw a line 7.0  cm long from b at an angle of incidence i = 70\u00b0 to the normal below mr  and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a. \u2022 draw another line 7.0  cm long from b at an angle \u03b8 = 40\u00b0 to the normal below mr and to  the left of the normal. label the end of this line c.  [2]",
            "9": "9 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b) \u2022 place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line mr. \u2022 place two pins, p1 and p2, on line ab at a suitable distance apart for this type of ray -trace  experiment. label the positions of p1 and p2. \u2022 view the images of pins p1 and p2 from the direction indicated by the eye in fig.  3.1.  place two pins, p3 and p4, so that pins p3 and p4 and the images of p2 and p1 all appear  exactly one behind the other. label the positions of p3 and p4.  [2]  (c) remove the pins and the mirror. draw a line through the positions of p3 and p4. continue the  line until it meets mr.   measure the angle \u03b1 between the line and the normal nl below  mr.  \u03b1 =    [1]  (d) place the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line ab with the centre of the mirror  at b.   place pins p1 and p2 on line cb at a suitable distance apart for this type of ray -trace  experiment.   view the images of pins p1 and p2. place pins p3 and p4 so that pins p3 and p4 and the  images of p2 and p1 all appear exactly one behind the other. label the new positions of p3  and p4.  [1]  (e) remove the pins and the mirror. draw a line through the new positions of p3 and p4. continue  the line until it meets nl.   measure the angle \u03b2 between the line and nl below  mr.  \u03b2 =    [2]  (f) a student investigates a possible relationship between angles \u03b1 and \u03b2. the angle \u03b8 remains  constant at \u03b8 = 40\u00b0. suggest values of the angle of incidence i that he could use.  ...  .  [2]  (g) a student does this experiment with care. suggest one practical reason why the results may  not be exactly those that the theory of reflection predicts.  ...  .  [1]   tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9.  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the time taken to heat water in different uninsulated containers. the  containers all have the same volume and shape. the water is heated with an electric immersion  heater.  the following apparatus is available:  a selection of containers  measuring cylinder  thermometer  supply of cold water  immersion heater with power supply.  plan an experiment to investigate the time taken to heat water in different uninsulated containers.  you are not required to carry out this investigation.  you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus that is required \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.",
            "11": "11 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/51/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122 *3372369163* dc (cj/ct) 204873/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn overphysics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 in this experiment, you will determine the density of a block of wood.  (a) (i) measure the length l, width w and height h of the block of wood.   l =    cm  w =    cm  h =    cm  [1]   (ii) calculate the volume v of the block of wood using the equation v = l \u00d7 w \u00d7 h.  v =  .  cm3 [1]   (iii) measure the mass m of the block of wood using the balance provided.  m =  .  g [1]   (iv) calculate the density \u03c1 of the wood using the equation \u03c1 = m v. give your answer to a    suitable number of significant figures for this experiment and include the unit. \t\u03c1  =    [2]  (b) place the block of wood, largest face down, carefully in the water in the container.    (i) estimate, without taking a measurement, the volume v1 of wood that is below the water  surface.  v1 =  .  cm3 [1]   (ii) calculate mw\u200a, the mass of water with volume v1, using the equation mw = \u03c1w\t\u00d7\tv1,  where \u03c1w = 1.00 in the same units as \u03c1 in part (a)(iv) .  mw =    [1]  (c) a student suggests that the mass m of the block of wood is equal to the mass mw of the water  with volume v1.    (i) calculate the difference d between your values of m and mw.  d =    [1]   (ii) discuss whether the difference d is small enough to conclude that m = mw.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (d) another student wants to obtain a more accurate value for v1. he uses the method of floating  the block of wood in water as described in (b).    suggest how the student could obtain a more accurate value by taking a measurement.   you are not required to do this part of the experiment.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the resistances of a resistor and a lamp.  fig. 2.1 shows the first circuit arrangement. the circuit has been set up for you. a vrpower supply fig. 2.1  (a) switch on.    (i) record vs, the potential difference (p.d.) across resistor r.  vs =    [1]   (ii) record is\u200a, the current in the circuit and then switch off the power supply.  is =    [1]   (iii) calculate rs, the resistance of resistor r, using the equation rs = vs is.  rs =    [1]  (b) \u2022 disconnect the voltmeter.    \u2022 replace the resistor with the lamp.    \u2022 connect the voltmeter across the lamp.   \u2022 switch on.    (i) record vl, the potential difference across the lamp.  vl=  ..    record il, the current in the circuit and then switch off the power supply.  il =  ..  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) calculate rl, the resistance of the lamp, using the equation rl = vl il .  rl =    [1]  (c) \u2022 disconnect the voltmeter.    \u2022 connect the resistor r in series with the lamp.    \u2022  connect the voltmeter to record vc, the potential difference across the series combination  of the resistor and the lamp.   (i) draw the circuit diagram for this arrangement.   [2]   (ii) switch on. record vc, the potential difference across the resistor and the lamp in series.  vc =  ..    record ic, the current in the circuit and then switch off the power supply.  ic =  ..  [1]   (iii) calculate rc, the combined resistance of the resistor and the lamp connected in series,    using the equation rc = vc ic.  rc =    [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) state and explain briefly whether your results show that rs + rl = rc within the limits of  experimental accuracy. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the image produced by a lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig. 3.1. illuminated object u v lensscreen bench fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 place the lens a distance u = 20.0  cm from the illuminated object.   \u2022 move the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the screen.   \u2022 measure the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.   (i) record v in table 3.1.  [1]   (ii) calculate, and record in table 3.1, u v . [1]   (iii) repeat the procedure for u = 25.0  cm, u = 30.0  cm, u = 35.0  cm and u = 40.0  cm. [1] table 3.1 u / cm v / cmu v 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0",
            "8": "8 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b)  plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against u v (x-axis). start the y-axis at u = 15.0  cm.      [4]  (c) use your graph to find the value of u when u v = 1.0. show clearly on the graph how you  obtained the necessary information.  u =    [2]  (d) suggest one practical difficulty with this experiment. explain briefly how you would try to  overcome this difficulty in order to obtain accurate results. suggestion    ...    explanation  ...  ...  ...    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 4 a student investigates the strengths of wires made from different metals by measuring the force  required to break the wires.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. a wire is held by a clamp at one end and a load is suspended  from the other end. the load is increased until the wire breaks. the student takes all the necessary  safety precautions.  loadwireclamp fig. 4.1  plan an experiment to investigate the force required to break wires made from different metals.  you are not required to do the investigation.  the following apparatus is available:   clamps and stands   a selection of masses with a suitable hanger   metre rule   a selection of wires made from different metals.  you can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 write a list of suitable metals for the wires you would investigate \u2022 explain briefly how you would do the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion.",
            "10": "10 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  you may add to the diagram if it helps your explanation.  you are not required to write about the safety precautions that the student should take.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "11": "11 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "12": "12 0625/52/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_53.pdf": {
            "1": " [turn overdc (nf/sg) 214800/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. *2241800731* physics  0625/53 paper 5 practical test  october/november  2021  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122 for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the effect of insulation on the cooling of water.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig.  1.1.  beaker a is covered with material that is a thermal insulator.  beaker b is identical to beaker a but has no insulation. benchthermometer lid beaker a beaker b insulation fig. 1.1  (a) \u2022 remove the lid from beaker a. \u2022 pour 150  cm3 of hot water into beaker a and replace the lid. \u2022 place the thermometer in the water in beaker a.   in the first row of table  1.1, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at t = 0 and immediately  start the stop-clock.   record, in table  1.1, the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30 s, t = 60 s, t = 90 s,  t = 120 s, t = 150 s and t = 180 s. [1] \u2022 remove the thermometer from the beaker.  (b) (i) repeat (a) for beaker b.  [2]   (ii) add units to the column headings in table  1.1. [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over table  1.1 beaker a  with insulationbeaker b  without  insulation t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 30 60 90 120 150 180  (c) write a conclusion stating whether the insulation affects the rate of cooling of the water.  justify your answer by reference to values from your results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (d) (i) calculate the average cooling rate x1 during the first half of the experiment for the water  in beaker b. use your readings for beaker b  from table  1.1 and the equation x1 = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b890 t,    where t = 90 s and \u03b80 and \u03b890 are the temperatures of the water in beaker b at t = 0 and  t = 90 s.    include the unit.  x1 = ..  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021   (ii) calculate the average cooling rate x2 during the second half of the experiment for the  water in beaker b. use your readings for beaker b  from table  1.1 and the equation x2 = \u03b890 \u2013 \u03b8180 t,    where t = 90 s and \u03b890 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures of the water in beaker b at t = 90 s  and t = 180 s.    include the unit.  x2 = ..  [1]  (e) (i) suggest an additional experiment to test whether the lid affects the cooling rate of the  water in beaker b. state how the readings are used to show the effect.    you are not required to carry out this additional experiment.  ...  ...  .  [1]   (ii) a student suggests that the temperature of the water in beaker b at t = 0 for this additional  experiment must be the same as in (b)(i) for the comparison to be fair.    state whether your results support this suggestion.    use your results from (d) to explain whether this precaution is necessary. statement  .. explanation    ...  ... [2] [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will compare the resistances of two wires.  the circuit has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig.  2.1. resistance wire a resistance wire bcrocodile clip lav fig. 2.1  (a) connect the crocodile clip to a length l = 90.0 cm of resistance wire a.   close the switch.   measure, and record in table  2.1, the value of potential difference (p.d.) v and current i for  the wire.   open the switch.   calculate, and record in table  2.1, the resistance r of 90.0  cm of wire a.   use your values of v and i and the equation r = v i. [3]",
            "6": "6 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 table  2.1 wire l  / cm v / i / r / a 90.0 b 90.0 a 50.0 b 50.0  (b) (i) repeat step (a) for l = 90.0 cm of wire b, l = 50.0 cm of wire a and l = 50.0 cm of wire b.  [2]   (ii) complete the headings in table  2.1. [1]  (c) (i) calculate a value p using your results from table  2.1 and the equation p = r for 90.0  cm of wire a r for 90.0  cm of wire b.  p = ..  [1]   (ii) calculate a value q using your results from table  2.1 and the equation q = r for 50.0  cm of wire a r for 50.0  cm of wire b.  q = ..  [1]   (iii) a student suggests that the values of p and q should be equal.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  values from your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]  (d) suggest one reason why students all doing this experiment carefully with the same apparatus  may not obtain the same results.  ...  .  [1] [total: 11]",
            "7": "7 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the image produced by a converging lens.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig.  3.1. triangular object lensu benchscreen ho fig. 3.1  (a) measure and record the height ho of the triangular object.  ho = ...  cm \u2022 place the lens a distance u = 20.0 cm from the triangular object. \u2022 place the screen close to the lens. \u2022 switch on the lamp. \u2022 move the screen away from the lens until a clear, focused image of the triangular object  is seen on the screen. \u2022 measure, and record in table  3.1, the height hi of the image.   repeat the procedure for u = 25.0 cm, u = 30.0 cm, u = 35.0 cm and u = 40.0 cm.   switch off the lamp. table  3.1 u / cm hi / cm1 hi \ue0401 cm 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 [1]  (b) for each distance u, calculate, and record in table  3.1, the value of 1 hi . [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (c) plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against 1 hi \ue0401 cm (x-axis). start the axes at the origin (0,0). [4]  (d) (i) from your graph, determine u0, the value of u when 1 hi = 0.0.  u0 = ..  [1]   (ii) determine the gradient of the graph.    show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  gradient =  ..  [1]   (iii) calculate the focal length f of the lens. use your value of ho from (a) and the equation f = g ho,    where g is numerically equal to the gradient from (d)(ii) .  f = ..  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (e) describe one difficulty that can be experienced when measuring the height of the image.    suggest an improvement to overcome this difficulty. difficulty  .  ... improvement  .  ... [2] [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the strength of an electromagnet.  the electromagnet is made from a coil of insulated wire wrapped around an iron rod. when there  is an electric current in the coil, the iron rod becomes magnetised. the electromagnet can then  attract magnetic materials (e.g. iron and steel).  plan an experiment to investigate how one factor affects the number of steel paper clips the  electromagnet can support.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes: \u2022 an electromagnet, shown in fig.  4.1 \u2022 a power supply \u2022 a selection of steel paper clips.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 state a factor which can be measured and list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 explain briefly how to do the experiment, including any precautions to ensure reliable results  (you may draw a diagram or add to fig.  4.1 to help your explanation) \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion. iron rod insulated wire fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/53/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_61.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122physics  0625/61 paper 6 alternative to practical  october/november  2021  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *5700197576* dc (cj/ct) 204871/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a student investigates the stretching of a spring.  fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus.  metre ruleclamp standspring bench44 450 cm mark 100  cm mark fig. 1.1  (a) the metre rule is clamped in position near to the spring.    (i) write down the scale readings in mm from the metre rule at the top and bottom of the  spring, as shown in fig. 1.1.  top reading =  ...  mm  bottom reading =  ...  mm  [2]   (ii) using the two readings, calculate the length l 0 of the spring in mm. record l 0 in table  1.1.  the value l 0 is the length of the spring when the load l = 0.00  n. [1]  (b) the student suspends a load l = 0.20  n from the spring. he records the new length l of the  spring in table 1.1.    (i) use the equation e = (l \u2013 l 0) to calculate the extension e of the spring. record the value  of e in table 1.1.  [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) complete the extension column heading in table 1.1.  [1]  (c) the student repeats the procedure using loads l = 0.40  n, l = 0.60  n, l = 0.80  n and l =  1.00 n. he  records the readings and results in table 1.1.       table 1.1 l / n l / mm e / 0.00 0 0.20 17 0.40 20 5 0.60 23 8 0.80 25 10 1.00 28 13   plot a graph of e / mm ( y-axis) against l / n (x-axis).  [4]",
            "4": "4 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) fig. 1.2 shows the unstretched spring and the spring with a load. on fig. 1.2, show clearly  the distances l 0, l and e.  fig. 1.2  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 a student investigates the resistance of resistors in different circuit arrangements.  fig. 2.1 shows the first circuit arrangement.  a vx ypower supply fig. 2.1  (a) she measures the potential difference (p.d.) vx across the resistor x and the current ix in the  circuit. the meters are shown in fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3.    (i) write down the readings. include the units for potential difference, current or resistance  where appropriate in all parts of the question. v67 98 1045 2 13 0    a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 2.2                  fig. 2.3    vx =  ..  ix =  ..  [2]   (ii) calculate rx, the resistance of resistor x, using the equation rx = vx ix.  rx =    [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) the student connects the voltmeter to record vxy, the potential difference across the two  resistors x and y in series. she calculates rxy, the combined resistance of resistors x and y  connected in series.      10.4 rxy =  ..   she calculates the resistance ry of resistor y.       5.78 ry =  ..   state and explain whether rx and ry can be considered to be equal within the limits of  experimental accuracy.  ...  ...  .  [1]  (c) the student connects a resistor z in parallel  with resistor x. she connects the voltmeter to  record vxz, the potential difference across the parallel combination of resistor x and resistor z.   draw the circuit diagram for this arrangement. label the resistors x, y and z.  [3]  (d) the student records vxz, the potential difference across the two resistors x and z in parallel,  and ixz, the current in the circuit.      0.8 vxz =  ..      0.36 ixz =  ..   calculate rxz, the combined resistance of resistors x and z connected in parallel, using the   equation rxz = vxz ixz . give your answer to 2 significant figures.  rxz =    [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (e) another student does this experiment using a set of three identical resistors. his results show  that, within the limits of experimental accuracy, the combined resistance of two identical  resistors connected in series is four times the combined resistance of the same two resistors  connected in parallel. to test whether his results are true for other values of resistance, he  does the same procedure with other sets of three identical resistors.    suggest the values of resistance he could use to reach a conclusion during a 1 hour practical  lesson.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 a student investigates the position of the image in a plane mirror.   fig. 3.1 shows the ray-trace sheet. m rp5 p3p6 p4 fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022  on fig. 3.1, draw a normal to the line mr that passes through its centre. label the  normal nl. label the point at which nl crosses mr with the letter b. \u2022 draw a line 7.0  cm long from b at an angle of incidence i = 70\u00b0 to the normal below mr  and to the left of the normal. label the end of this line a.   \u2022 draw another line 7.0  cm long from b at an angle \u03b8 = 40\u00b0 to the normal below mr and to  the left of the normal. label the end of this line c.   [3]  (b) mark, with two neat crosses, positions for two pins, p1 and p2, on line ab at a suitable  distance apart for this type of ray-trace experiment.  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (c) the student places a plane mirror on line mr and views the images of pins p1 and p2 in the  mirror. he places two pins, p3 and p4, so that pins p3 and p4 and the images of p2 and p1 all  appear exactly one behind the other. the positions of p3 and p4 are marked on fig. 3.1.   draw a line through the positions of p3 and p4. continue the line until it meets mr.   measure the angle \u03b1 between the line and the normal nl below  mr. include the unit.  \u03b1 =    [1]  (d) the student places the reflecting face of the mirror vertically on the line ab with the centre of  the mirror at b.    he places pins p1 and p2 on line cb. he places pins p5 and p6 so that pins p5 and p6 and  the images of p2 and p1 all appear exactly one behind the other.   draw a line through the positions of p5 and p6. continue the line until it meets nl.   measure the angle \u03b2 between the line and nl below  mr. include the unit.    \u03b2 =    [1]  (e) a student investigates a possible relationship between angles \u03b1 and \u03b2. the angle \u03b8 remains  constant at \u03b8 = 40\u00b0. suggest values of the angle of incidence i that he could use.  ...  .  [2]  (f) a student does this experiment with care. suggest one practical reason why the results may  not be exactly those that the theory of reflection predicts.  ...  .  [1]  (g) tick the boxes that indicate relevant precautions that the student should take with this type of  ray-trace experiment.    carry out the experiment in a darkened room    draw thin lines    keep one eye closed    keep room temperature constant    view the bases of the pins    view the tops of the pins  [2]  [total: 11] ",
            "10": "10 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the time taken to heat water in different uninsulated containers. the  containers all have the same volume and shape. the water is heated with an electric immersion  heater.  the following apparatus is available:  a selection of containers  measuring cylinder  thermometer  supply of cold water  immersion heater with power supply.   plan an experiment to investigate the time taken to heat water in different uninsulated containers.     you should: \u2022 list any additional apparatus that is required \u2022 explain briefly how you would carry out the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain briefly how you would use your readings to reach a conclusion.",
            "11": "11 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]   ",
            "12": "12 0625/61/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated. cambridge igcse\u2122physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical  october/november  2021  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ]. *2756655233* dc (cj/ct) 204872/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021  [turn over",
            "2": "2 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 1 a student determines the density of a block of wood.  (a) fig. 1.1 shows one face of the block of wood that the student uses.  l w fig. 1.1   (i) measure the length l and width w of the block of wood. fig. 1.1 is drawn actual size.  l =    cm  w =    cm  [1]   (ii) the student measures the height h of the block of wood.    4.0 h =    cm    calculate the volume v of the block of wood using the equation v = l \u00d7 w \u00d7 h.  v =  .  cm3 [1]   (iii) the student measures the mass m of the block of wood on a balance. 63.92  g fig. 1.2    write down the mass m of the block as shown in fig. 1.2. give your answer to the  nearest gram.  m =  .  g [1]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (iv) calculate the density \u03c1 of the wood using the equation \u03c1 = m v. give your answer to a    suitable number of significant figures for this experiment and include the unit. \t\u03c1  =    [2]  (b) the student places the block of wood carefully in water in a glass dish. the wood floats as  shown in fig. 1.3. block of woodwater surface fig. 1.3   (i) using fig. 1.3, estimate, without taking a measurement, the volume v1 of wood that is  below the water surface.  v1 =  .  cm3 [1]   (ii) calculate mw, the mass of water with volume v1, using the equation mw = \u03c1w \u00d7\tv1\u200a,  where \u03c1w = 1.00 in the same units as \u03c1 in part (a)(iv) .  mw =    [1]  (c) a student suggests that the mass m of the block of wood should be equal to the mass mw of  the water with volume v1.    (i) calculate the difference d between your values of m and mw.  d =    [1]   (ii) discuss whether the difference d is small enough to conclude that m = mw.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (d) another student wants to obtain a more accurate value for v1. he uses the method of floating  the block of wood in water as described in (b).   suggest how the student could obtain a more accurate value by taking a measurement.  ...  ...  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 2 a student investigates the resistances of a resistor and a lamp.  fig. 2.1 shows the first circuit arrangement.  a vrpower supply fig. 2.1  (a) she records vs, the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor r, and the current is in the  circuit. the meters are shown in fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3.    (i) write down the readings. include the units for potential difference, current or resistance  where appropriate in all parts of the question. v67 98 1045 2 13 0     a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0 fig. 2.2                    fig. 2.3  vs =  ..  is =  ..  [2]   (ii) calculate rs, the resistance of resistor r, using the equation rs = vs is.  rs =    [2]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (b) the student replaces the resistor with the lamp. she records vl the potential difference  across the lamp and the current il in the circuit.  1.7 vl=  ..   0.35 il =  ..   calculate  rl, the resistance of the lamp, using the equation rl = vl il.  rl =    [2]  (c) the student connects the resistor r in series with the lamp. she connects the voltmeter to  record vc, the potential difference across the series combination of the resistor and the lamp.  draw the circuit diagram for this arrangement.   [2]  (d) the student records vc the potential difference across the resistor and the lamp in series and  the current ic in the circuit.  1.7 vc =  ..  0.21 ic =  ..   calculate rc, the combined resistance of the resistor and the lamp connected in series, using   the equation rc = vc ic.  rc =     [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (e) state and explain briefly whether the results show that rs + rl = rc within the limits of  experimental accuracy. statement  .. explanation  ...  ...  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 3 a student investigates the image produced by a lens.  fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus. illuminated object u v lensscreen bench fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 the student places the lens a distance u = 20.0  cm from the illuminated object.   \u2022 he moves the screen until a clearly focused image is formed on the screen.   \u2022 he measures the distance v between the centre of the lens and the screen.   \u2022 calculate, and record in the first row of table 3.1, u v.   \u2022  he repeats the procedure for u = 25.0  cm, u = 30.0  cm, u = 35.0  cm and u = 40.0  cm. the  readings and results are shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 u / cm v / cmu v 20.0 79.5 25.0 44.5 0.56 30.0 35.0 0.86 35.0 30.0 1.17 40.0 27.0 1.48  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (b)  plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against u v (x-axis). start the y-axis at u = 15.0  cm.     [4]  (c) use your graph to find u1, the value of u when u v = 1.0. show clearly on the graph how you  obtained the necessary information.  u1 =    [2]  (d) calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = u1 2. give your answer to a  suitable number of significant figures for this experiment.  f =  ..  cm [2]  (e) suggest one practical difficulty with this experiment. explain briefly how you would try to  overcome this difficulty in order to obtain accurate results. suggestion    ... explanation  ...  ...  ...    [2]  [total: 11]",
            "10": "10 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the strengths of wires made from different metals by measuring the force  required to break the wires.  the apparatus is shown in fig. 4.1. a wire is held by a clamp at one end and a load is suspended  from the other end. the load is increased until the wire breaks. the student takes all the necessary  safety precautions.  loadwireclamp fig. 4.1  plan an experiment to investigate the force required to break wires made from different metals.   the following apparatus is available:   clamps and stands   a selection of masses with a suitable hanger   metre rule   a selection of wires made from different metals.  you can also use other apparatus and materials that are usually available in a school laboratory.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 write a list of suitable metals for the wires you would investigate \u2022 explain briefly how you would do the investigation \u2022 state the key variables that you would keep constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how you would display your readings  (you are not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how you would use the results to reach a conclusion.",
            "11": "11 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  you may add to the diagram if it helps your explanation.  you are not required to write about the safety precautions that the student should take.  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_w21_qp_63.pdf": {
            "1": " [turn overdc (nf/sg) 214840/2 \u00a9 ucles 2021this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. *0672263085* physics  0625/63 paper 6 alternative to practical  october/november  2021  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122",
            "2": "2 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "3": "3 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 1 a student investigates the effect of insulation on the cooling of water.  she uses the apparatus shown in fig.  1.1.  the sides of beaker a are covered with material that is a thermal insulator.  beaker b has no covering on its sides. benchthermometer 2030 10lid beaker a beaker b insulation fig. 1.1  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer in fig.  1.1. \t \u03b8r = ..  [1]  (b) the student pours 150  cm3 of hot water into beaker a and records the temperature \u03b8 at  time t = 0.   she records, in table  1.1, the temperature of the water in the beaker every 30  s. the student  repeats the process for beaker b.   add units to the column headings in table  1.1. [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 table  1.1 beaker a  with insulationbeaker b  without  insulation t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 88.0 87.5 30 86.0 83.5 60 84.5 81.5 90 83.5 80.0 120 82.5 79.0 150 82.0 78.5 180 81.5 78.0  (c) describe two precautions that can be taken to ensure that temperature readings in the  experiment are as accurate as possible. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ... [2]  (d) write a conclusion stating whether the insulation affects the rate of cooling of the water.  justify your answer by reference to values from the results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "5": "5 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over  (e) (i) calculate the average cooling rate x1 during the first half of the experiment for the water  in beaker b. use the readings for beaker b from table  1.1 and the equation x1 = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b890 t,    where t = 90 s and \u03b80 and \u03b890 are the temperatures of the water in beaker b at t = 0 and  t = 90 s.    include the unit.  x1 = ..  [1]   (ii) calculate the average cooling rate x2 during the second half of the experiment for the  water in beaker b. use the readings for beaker b from table  1.1 and the equation x2 = \u03b890 \u2013 \u03b8180 t,    where t = 90 s and \u03b890 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures of the water in beaker b at t = 90 s  and t = 180 s.    include the unit.  x2 = ..  [1]  (f) (i) suggest an additional experiment to test whether the lid affects the cooling rate of the  water in beaker b. state how the readings are used to show the effect.  ...  ...  .  [1]   (ii) a student suggests that the temperature of the water in beaker b at t = 0 for this additional  experiment must be the same as in (b) for the comparison to be fair.    state whether your results support this suggestion.    use your results from (e) to explain whether this precaution is necessary. statement  .. explanation    ...  ... [2] [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 2 a student compares the resistances of two wires.  she uses the circuit, part of which is shown in fig.  2.1. resistance wire a resistance wire bcrocodile clip lx y fig. 2.1  (a) on fig.  2.1, complete the circuit diagram to show a voltmeter connected to measure the  potential difference (p.d.) across terminals x and y, and an ammeter connected to measure  the current in the circuit.  [2]  (b) the student connects the crocodile clip to a length l = 90.0 cm of resistance wire a and  measures the potential difference v and the current i for the length l of the wire. v3 4 52 1 0             a0.6 0.8 1.00.4 0.2 0  fig. 2.2 fig. 2.3   (i) read, and record in table  2.1, the values of v and i shown on the meters in fig.  2.2 and  fig. 2.3. [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over table  2.1 wire l  / cm v / i / r / a 90.0 b 90.0 2.6 0.45 a 50.0 2.7 0.54 b 50.0 2.3 0.72   (ii) the student then connects the crocodile clip to lengths l = 90.0 cm of wire b, l = 50.0 cm  of wire a and l = 50.0 cm of wire b.    her readings are shown in table  2.1.    calculate, and record in table  2.1, the resistance r of each length of wire a and wire b.    use the values of v and i and the equation r = v i. [2]   (iii) complete the headings in table  2.1. [1]  (c) (i) calculate a value p using your results from table  2.1 and the equation  p = r for 90.0  cm of wire a r for 90.0  cm of wire b.  p =      calculate a value q using your results from table  2.1 and the equation q = r for 50.0  cm of wire a r for 50.0  cm of wire b.  q =   [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021   (ii) a student suggests that the values of p and q should be equal.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  values from your results. statement  .. justification    ...  ... [2]  (d) suggest one reason why students all doing this experiment carefully with the same apparatus  may not obtain the same results.  ...  .  [1] [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over 3 a student investigates the image produced by a converging lens.  he uses the apparatus shown in fig.  3.1. triangular object lensu benchscreen ho fig. 3.1  (a) the triangular object is shown full size in fig.  3.2.   measure and record the height ho of the triangular object in fig. 3.2.  ho = .  cm [1] ho fig. 3.2  (b) the student sets the distance u between the triangular object and the lens to 20.0  cm. he  moves the screen until a sharp image of the triangular object is seen on the screen. the  student measures, and records in table 3.1, the height hi of the image on the screen.   briefly describe a technique to obtain an image on the screen that is as sharp as possible in  this experiment.  ...  .  [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  (c) the student repeats the process for u = 25.0 cm, u = 30.0 cm, u = 35.0 cm and u = 40.0 cm.  his readings are shown in table  3.1.   for distance u = 20.0 cm, calculate, and record in table  3.1, the value of 1 hi . [1] table  3.1 u / cm hi / cm1 hi \ue0401 cm 20.0 5.6 25.0 3.2 0.31 30.0 1.9 0.53 35.0 1.5 0.67 40.0 1.2 0.83  (d) plot a graph of u / cm (y-axis) against 1 hi \ue0401 cm (x-axis). [4]  (e) (i) determine the gradient of the graph.    show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.  gradient =  ..  [1]",
            "11": "11 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 [turn over   (ii) calculate the focal length f of the lens. use your value of ho from (a) and the equation  f = g ho ,    where g is numerically equal to the gradient from (e)(i) .  f = ..  [1]  (f) describe one difficulty that can be experienced when measuring the height of the image.    suggest an improvement to overcome this difficulty. difficulty  .  ... improvement  .  ... [2] [total: 11]",
            "12": "12 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 4 a student investigates the strength of an electromagnet.  the electromagnet is made from a coil of insulated wire wrapped around an iron rod. when there  is an electric current in the coil, the iron rod becomes magnetised. the electromagnet can then  attract magnetic materials (e.g. iron and steel).  plan an experiment to investigate how one factor affects the number of steel paper clips the  electromagnet can support.  the apparatus available includes: \u2022 an electromagnet, shown in fig.  4.1 \u2022 a power supply \u2022 a selection of steel paper clips.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 state a factor which can be measured and list any additional apparatus needed \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 explain briefly how to do the experiment, including any precautions to ensure reliable results  (you may draw a diagram or add to fig.  4.1 to help your explanation) \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion. iron rod insulated wire fig. 4.1",
            "13": "13 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "14": "14 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page  ",
            "15": "15 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page",
            "16": "16 0625/63/ o/n/21 \u00a9 ucles 2021 blank page permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of the cambridge assessment group. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which itself is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "1524_j21_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib21 06_1524_12/rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *1116341406*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 1524/12     paper 1 multiple choice (core)  may/june 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21  1 a student measures the volume of an irregularly shaped stone. water is available.    which single item of equipment is sufficient for the student to complete the task?  a a tape measure  b a clock  c a measuring cylinder  d a ruler     2 a student draws a speed\u2013time graph for a car.    20 10 0 0 1 02 03 04 0speed m / s time  / s    what is the total distance travelled by the car?  a 200  m b 400  m c 600  m d 800  m     3 an aeroplane flies from town x to town z, stopping for 1 hour at town y to pick up more  passengers. the distances between the towns are shown.    300  km 200  kmy xz     the total time taken between leaving x and arriving at z is 3 hours.    what is the average speed of the aeroplane in the air ?  a 4500  km  / h b 3500  km  / h c 2500  km  / h d 1500  km  / h     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21 [turn over  4 two objects, x and y, are suspended from identical springs. the extension in both springs is the  same.    xy    what does this show about the masses and about the weights of objects x and y?     masses weights  a mass of x is equal to mass of y weight of x is equal to weight of y  b mass of x is equal to mass of y weight of x is less than weight of y  c mass of x is greater than mass of y weight of x is greater than weight of y  d mass of x is greater than mass of y weight of x is equal to weight of y      5 the mass and volume of four different materials, a, b, c and d, are measured.    water has a density of 1000  kg  / m3.    which material will float in water?     mass  / kg volume  / m3  a 452 0.04  b 2340 0.30  c 90 0.03  d 320 0.40    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21  6 a uniform beam is pivoted at its centre. a weight of 60  n is placed on one side of the beam, 40  cm  from the pivot.    40 cm60 nw 20 cmpivot     a weight w, placed 20  cm from the pivot, balances the beam.    what is weight w ?  a 30  n b 60  n c 120  n d 2400  n     7 a car travels forwards along a straight horizontal road. only the horizontal forces acting on the  car are shown.    driving forceair resistance and friction     the length of each arrow represents the size of each force.    which statement describes the effect of these forces on the motion of the car?  a the car moves at constant speed.  b the car starts to move backwards.  c the car slows down.  d the car\u2019s forward speed increases.     ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21 [turn over  8 the diagram shows a man in a small boat.        why does the boat become less stable when the man is standing up?  a the centre of mass of the man and the boat is higher.  b the centre of mass of the man and the boat is lower.  c the total mass of the man and the boat is greater.  d the total mass of the man and the boat is less.     9 a battery is fully charged.    which form of energy is stored in the battery?  a chemical  b elastic (strain)  c gravitational potential  d kinetic     10 what is the source of the electrical energy produced by a hydroelectric power station?  a chemical energy stored in fossil fuel  b gravitational potential energy stored behind a dam  c geothermal energy from the earth\u2019s crust  d nuclear energy stored in uranium    ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21  11 a man pushes a heavy crate along a horizontal surface.        which row shows the measurements he ma kes to calculate his average power?     distance  moved size of  pushing force time  taken weight of  the crate   a \u0016 \u0016 \u0016 \u001a key  b \u0016 \u0016 \u001a \u0016 \u0016 = needed  c \u0016 \u001a \u0016 \u0016 \u001a = not needed  d \u001a \u0016 \u0016 \u0016      12 the diagram shows three vessels, p, q and r. each vessel contains water. the water exerts a  pressure at the bottom of each vessel.    the three vessels are shown to the same scale.    p q r     which statement about the pressure at the bottom of the vessels is correct?  a the pressure is greatest at the bottom of p.  b the pressure is greatest at the bottom of q.  c the pressure is greatest at the bottom of r.  d the pressure is the same at the bottom of each vessel.     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21 [turn over  13 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer used to measure atmospheric pressure.    mercuryp level l     atmospheric pressure decreases.    which row states what happens to the pressure at point p and what happens to the level l of  mercury?     pressure at p level l  a decreases falls  b decreases rises  c stays the same falls  d stays the same rises      14 molecules are escaping from the surface of a liquid.    which process is this describing?  a the liquid is condensing.  b the liquid is evaporating.  c the liquid is melting.  d the liquid is solidifying.     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21  15 a student investigates the change of volume of a gas as the conditions change.    in experiment 1, she keeps the pressure of th e gas constant and increases its temperature.    in experiment 2, she keeps the temperature of the gas constant and increases its pressure.    which row describes the changes in the volume of the gas in the two experiments?     change of volume in  experiment 1 change of volume in  experiment 2  a decreases decreases  b decreases increases  c increases decreases  d increases increases     16 the diagram shows a metal bridge. the ends of the bridge are fixed to the sides of a valley. the  air temperature is much less at night than it is during the day.    the solid line shows the bridge during the coldest part of the night.    which dashed line shows the bridge at the hottest part of the day?    a b c d      17 which statement describes the thermal capacity of a mass of water at 20  \u00b0c?  a the energy needed to evaporate all of the water  b the energy needed to raise the temperature of the water from 0  \u00b0c to 20  \u00b0c  c the energy needed to raise the temperature of the water from 20  \u00b0c to 21  \u00b0c  d the energy needed to raise the temperature of the water to its boiling point     18 which statement describes what happens when water at 100  \u00b0c boils and changes to steam?  a energy is absorbed and the temperature does not change.  b energy is absorbed and the temperature increases.  c energy is released and the temperature does not change.  d energy is released and the temperature increases.   ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21 [turn over  19 a beaker of liquid is heated at the position shown.    which diagram shows a convection current moving through the liquid?    a heatb heatc heatd heat     20 a chef tests different types of saucepans. she wants the material that is the best conductor for  the bottom of the pan and the best insulator for the handle.    which materials should she use?     bottom of  the pan handle  a metal metal  b metal wood  c plastic wood  d wood wood      21 the diagrams show two water waves, p and q, that are travelling at the same speed on the  surface of a pond. the diagrams are drawn to the same scale.    p q     which wave has the greater amplitude and which wave has the greater frequency?     greater amplitude greater frequency  a p p  b p q  c q p  d q q ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21  22 what is the angle of incidence of the ray of light on the plane mirror?    40/g113     a 40 \u00b0 b 50 \u00b0 c 90 \u00b0 d 140 \u00b0    23 the diagram shows the formation of an image by a thin converging lens.    f objectimage f     which description of the image is correct?  a diminished and upright  b diminished and inverted  c enlarged and upright  d enlarged and inverted    24 a student shines a narrow beam of white light into a prism, as shown. he sees a spectrum of  colours emerging from the prism.    narrow beam of white lightx y zspectrum of colours    which three colours does he see at x, at y and at z?     x y z  a blue yellow red  b red blue yellow  c red yellow blue  d yellow red blue ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21 [turn over  25 in which way does ultrasound differ from audible sound?  a ultrasound can travel through a vacuum.  b ultrasound has a longer wavelength.  c ultrasound has a higher frequency.  d ultrasound travels at the speed of light.      26 the diagram shows a permanent bar magnet. a student draws arrows to show the direction of  the magnetic field at four points.    which arrow correctly shows the direction of the magnetic field at that position?    nsa cb d      27 a plastic rod is rubbed with a cotton cloth. this causes the rod and the cloth to become charged.  these charges cause a force between the rod and the cloth.    which row compares the charges on the rod and the cloth, and describes the effect of the force  between the rod and the cloth?     charges on  rod and cloth effect of the force  on rod and cloth  a opposite they attract  b opposite they repel  c the same they attract  d the same they repel     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21  28 which circuit shows the correct position for the vo ltmeter to measure the potential difference (p.d.)  across the resistor?    va vb vc d v       29 the circuit shows a cell connected to a lamp and resistor in series.        energy transfer takes place in the lamp and the resistor. energy is also transferred to the surroundings from the lamp and the resistor.    which forms of energy are transferred to the surroundings?  a chemical energy and thermal energy  b chemical energy and light energy  c kinetic energy and light energy  d light energy and thermal energy     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21 [turn over  30 a circuit is set up so that a cell is connected to two lamps in parallel. a switch is also connected in  the circuit so that it can operate both lamps at the same time.    which diagram shows this circuit?    ab cd       31 a 4.0  \u03c9 resistor and a 2.0  \u03c9 resistor are connected to a 12  v battery in a circuit.    4.0 /g58 2.0 /g5812 v     what is the current in the 2.0  \u03c9 resistor?  a 0.50  a b 2.0  a c 3.0  a d 6.0  a     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21  32 the diagram shows an incomplete circuit.    xy     a light-dependent resistor (ldr) and a thermistor are each connected across xy in turn and  changes to the environment are made.    which row shows the changes to the environment that cause the total resistance in the circuit to decrease?     thermistor  connected across xy light-dependent resistor  connected across xy  a increase light level increase the temperature  b increase the temperature increase the light level  c decrease the light level decrease the temperature  d decrease the temperature decrease the light level      33 why is the electricity supply in a house fitted with a fuse?  a to increase the power supplied to the circuits  b to increase the resistance in the circuits  c to prevent overheating of cables in the circuits  d to prevent short circuits    34 a student holds a bar magnet next to a coil of wire connected to a galvanometer.    ns     what will cause a reading on the galvanometer?  a holding the magnet stationary inside the coil  b holding the magnet stationary with the s pole next to the coil  c moving both the magnet and the coil to the right at the same speed  d moving the magnet and the coil towards each other at the same speed    ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21 [turn over  35 a transformer has 1200 turns on its primary coil and 400 turns on its secondary coil. an output  voltage of 90  v is induced across the secondary coil.    primary coil 1200 turnssecondary coil 400 turns output voltage 90 v     what is the input voltage of the transformer?  a 30  v b 90  v c 270  v d 1200  v     36 an electric motor consists of a current-carrying coil placed between the poles of a magnet.    what must  increase the size of the turning effect on the current-carrying coil in the electric  motor?  a decreasing the current in the coil and increasing the number of turns on the coil  b decreasing the current in the coil and decreasing the number of turns on the coil  c increasing the current in the coil and decreasing the number of turns on the coil  d increasing the current in the coil and increasing the number of turns on the coil    37 the diagram represents a hydrogen atom.    x     which row correctly describes the part of the atom labelled x?     name of part x charge of part x  a neutron negative  b neutron positive  c nucleus negative  d nucleus positive     ",
            "16": "16      permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.  cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/12/m/j/21  38 which statement about different isotopes of a certain element must  be correct?  a they have a different number of electrons.  b they have the same number of neutrons.  c they have the same number of nucleons.  d they have the same number of protons.      39 ba-137 is a radioactive isotope of barium.    when a nucleus of this isotope decays, there is no change in its composition.    which type of radiation is emitted?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d neutrons    40 it takes four days for the count rate from a sample of a radioactive isotope to fall from  400 counts  / s to 25 counts  / s.    what is the half-life of this radioactive isotope?  a 4.8 hours  b 24 hours  c 32 hours  d 64 hours      "
        },
        "1524_j21_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  ib21 06_1524_22/rp   \u00a9 ucles 2021   [turn ove r   *9535955370*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 1524/22     paper 2 multiple choice (extended)  may/june 2021     45 minutes    you must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \u2022 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \u2022 for each question there are four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.   \u2022 follow the instructions on the mu ltiple choice answer sheet.  \u2022 write in soft pencil.  \u2022 write your name, centre number and candidate num ber on the multiple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \u2022 do not use correction fluid.  \u2022 do not write on any bar codes.  \u2022 you may use a calculator.  \u2022 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \u2022 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u2022 each correct answer will score one mark.  \u2022 any rough working should be done on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  1 a micrometer screw gauge is used to determine the radius of a copper wire.    the reading on the screw gauge when measuring the diameter of the wire is 3.12  mm.    the reading on the screw gauge with no wire (zero error) is 0.04  mm.    what is the radius of the wire?  a 1.52  mm b 1.54  mm c 1.56  mm d 1.58  mm     2 an aeroplane flies from town x to town z, stopping for 1 hour at town y to pick up more  passengers. the distances between the towns are shown.    300  km 200  kmy xz     the total time taken between leaving x and arriving at z is 3 hours.    what is the average speed of the aeroplane in the air ?  a 4500  km  / h b 3500  km  / h c 2500  km  / h d 1500  km  / h     3 the graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.    at which labelled time is the object decelerating?    0 0speed timec b d a     ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21 [turn over  4 two objects, x and y, are suspended from identical springs. the extension in both springs is the  same.    xy    what does this show about the masses and about the weights of objects x and y?     masses weights  a mass of x is equal to mass of y weight of x is equal to weight of y  b mass of x is equal to mass of y weight of x is less than weight of y  c mass of x is greater than mass of y weight of x is greater than weight of y  d mass of x is greater than mass of y weight of x is equal to weight of y      5 three students are asked what they understand by the term mass.    their answers are listed.    1 mass is the property of an object that resists a change in motion.  2 mass is the quantity of matter an object contains. 3 mass is the effect of a gravitational field on an object.    which students are correct?  a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only      6 the mass and volume of four different materials, a, b, c and d, are measured.    water has a density of 1000  kg  / m3.    which material will float in water?     mass  / kg volume  / m3  a 452 0.04  b 2340 0.30  c 90 0.03  d 320 0.40 ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  7 a satellite orbits the earth above the atmosphere at a constant speed.    the diagram shows the satellite at one point in its circular orbit around the earth.    which labelled arrow shows the direction of the resultant force on the satellite at the position  shown?    earthdirection of orbit a b cd satellite      ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21 [turn over  8 the diagram shows a tower crane lifting a crate. the crate begins at x. the counterweight can be  moved between points p and q to keep the crane balanced.    crate x ypq counterweightpivot     the crate is slowly moved from position x to position y.    the table describes the effect that the movement has on the:    \u25cf clockwise moment about the pivot created by the crate  \u25cf direction the counterweight moves to keep the crane balanced.    which row is correct?     moment counterweight  a increases moves towards p  b increases moves towards q  c decreases moves towards p  d decreases moves towards q     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  9 a car travels forwards along a straight horizontal road. only the horizontal forces acting on the  car are shown.    driving forceair resistance and friction     the length of each arrow represents the size of each force.    which statement describes the effect of these forces on the motion of the car?  a the car moves at constant speed.  b the car starts to move backwards.  c the car slows down.  d the car\u2019s forward speed increases.     10 an object of mass 2.5  kg is acted upon by a force of 8.0  n. the object has an initial speed of  3.0  m / s and, after time t, the speed of the object has increased to 7.0  m / s.    for which time t does the force act?  a 0.32  s b 0.80  s c 1.3  s d 3.1  s      11 two railway wagons are on the same straight horizontal track. one wagon is moving with initial  velocity u and the other wagon is stationary.    the moving wagon collides with the stationary wagon.    the two wagons connect to each other and move with a velocity of 5.80  m / s.    u mass = 8000  kg mass = 12  000  kgstationarybefore 5.80  m / safter     what is the initial velocity u of the moving wagon before they collide?  a 3.87  m / s b 8.70  m / s c 9.67  m / s d 14.5  m / s     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21 [turn over  12 a dog of mass 9.6  kg is running across a field. the kinetic energy of the dog is 9.4  j.    what is the speed of the dog?  a 0.70  m / s b 0.98  m / s c 1.4  m / s d 2.0  m / s     13 a man pushes a heavy crate along a horizontal surface.        which row shows the measurements he ma kes to calculate his average power?     distance  moved size of  pushing force time  taken weight of  the crate   a \u0016 \u0016 \u0016 \u001a key  b \u0016 \u0016 \u001a \u0016 \u0016 = needed  c \u0016 \u001a \u0016 \u0016 \u001a = not needed  d \u001a \u0016 \u0016 \u0016      ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  14 the diagram shows a simple mercury barometer used to measure atmospheric pressure.    mercuryp level l     atmospheric pressure decreases.    which row states what happens to the pressure at point p and what happens to the level l of  mercury?     pressure at p level l  a decreases falls  b decreases rises  c stays the same falls  d stays the same rises      15 the diagrams show two identical containers filled to the same height with liquids of relatively high  and low density.    points a and c are at the same small distance below the surfaces of the liquids.    points b and d are at the same small distance above the bases of the containers.    which point has the highest pressure?    a b liquid of high densityc d liquid of low density     ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21 [turn over  16 a student writes four statements about evaporation from a liquid.    1 evaporation happens at any temperature.  2 evaporation happens at one fixed temperature only.  3 evaporation happens at the surface of the liquid only.  4 evaporation happens throughout the liquid.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 3 b 1 and 4 c 2 and 3 d 2 and 4     17 a diver uses breathing apparatus under water at a depth where the pressure is 1.25 \u00d7 10 5  pa.        a bubble of gas breathed out by the diver has a volume of 20  cm3 when it is released. the bubble  moves upwards to the surface of the water.    at the surface of the water, the atmospheric pressure is 1.00 \u00d7 105  pa.    the temperature of the water is the same at all depths.    what is the volume of this bubble when it reaches the surface of the water?  a 15  cm3 b 16  cm3 c 20  cm3 d 25  cm3     18 the diagram shows a metal bridge. the ends of the bridge are fixed to the sides of a valley. the  air temperature is much less at night than it is during the day.    the solid line shows the bridge during the coldest part of the night.    which dashed line shows the bridge at the hottest part of the day?    a b c d     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  19 which statement describes the thermal capacity of a mass of water at 20  \u00b0c?  a the energy needed to evaporate all of the water  b the energy needed to raise the temperature of the water from 0  \u00b0c to 20  \u00b0c  c the energy needed to raise the temperature of the water from 20  \u00b0c to 21  \u00b0c  d the energy needed to raise the temperature of the water to its boiling point    20 a chef tests different types of saucepans. she wants the material that is the best conductor for  the bottom of the pan and the best insulator for the handle.    which materials should she use?     bottom of  the pan handle  a metal metal  b metal wood  c plastic wood  d wood wood     21 the diagrams show two water waves, p and q, that are travelling at the same speed on the  surface of a pond. the diagrams are drawn to the same scale.    p q     which wave has the greater amplitude and which wave has the greater frequency?     greater amplitude greater frequency  a p p  b p q  c q p  d q q     ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21 [turn over  22 the wavefronts in the diagram spread out after passing through a gap in a barrier. this is an  example of diffraction.    direction of travel of wavewavefrontsbarrier     which change will increase the spreading out of the wavefronts?  a reduce the size of the gap and keep the wavelength the same.  b increase the size of the gap and keep the wavelength the same.  c keep the size of the gap the same and reduce the wavelength.  d keep the size of the gap the same and increase the frequency.      23 a prism is made from transparent plastic. in this plastic, light travels at 0.80  c, where c is the  speed of light in air. light enters one face of the prism at right angles, as shown.    /g84not to scale     the light just escapes from the sloping face of the prism.    what is angle \u03b8 ?  a 37 \u00b0 b 40 \u00b0 c 50 \u00b0 d 53 \u00b0     ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  24 the diagram shows the formation of an image by a thin converging lens.    f objectimage f     which description of the image is correct?  a diminished and upright  b diminished and inverted  c enlarged and upright  d enlarged and inverted     25 a ray of monochromatic light is incident on a glass prism.    ray of monochromatic light prism    what is monochromatic light and which ray diagram shows this ray as it passes through the prism and emerges from the opposite side?    x yred violetspectrum      meaning of  monochromatic light correct diagram  a multicoloured light x  b multicoloured light y  c light of a single frequency x  d light of a single frequency y     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21 [turn over  26 in which way does ultrasound differ from audible sound?  a ultrasound can travel through a vacuum.  b ultrasound has a longer wavelength.  c ultrasound has a higher frequency.  d ultrasound travels at the speed of light.      27 the diagram shows a permanent bar magnet. a st udent draws arrows to show the direction of  the magnetic field at four points.    which arrow correctly shows the direction of the magnetic field at that position?    nsa cb d      28 a negatively charged insulating rod p is suspended from an insulating thread.    a second insulating rod q is brought close to rod p.    rod p swings towards rod q.    what can be deduced from this experiment?  a rod q is either negatively charged or is uncharged.  b rod q is either positively charged or is uncharged.  c rod q is negatively charged.  d rod q is positively charged.    29 a piece of wire is 40  cm long and has a diameter of 2.0  mm.    the resistance of the piece of wire is 0.30  \u03c9.    which wire of the same material has a resistance of 0.15  \u03c9?     length  / cm diameter  / mm  a 20 1.0  b 20 4.0  c 80 1.0  d 80 4.0 ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  30 a resistor transfers 240  j of energy when a charge of 60  c flows through it in 15  s.    what is the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor and what is the current in the resistor?     p.d.  / v current  / a  a 0.25 0.25  b 0.25 4.0  c 4.0 0.25  d 4.0 4.0      31 three resistors are connected in series with a cell. the values of the resistances are 1.0  \u03c9, 2.0  \u03c9  and 3.0  \u03c9.    which statement is correct?  a the current in each resistor is different and the potential difference across each resistor is  different.  b the current in each resistor is the same and the potential difference across each resistor is  different.  c the potential difference across each resistor is the same and the current in each resistor is  different.  d the potential difference across the cell is greater than the sum of the potential differences  across each resistor.      32 the diagram shows two resistors connected in a circuit.    6.0 /g58 12 /g58    what is the combined resistance of the resistors in this circuit?  a 4.0  \u03c9 b 6.0  \u03c9 c 9.0  \u03c9 d 18  \u03c9     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21 [turn over  33 which logic gate has the truth table shown?    input output  0 0 1  0 1 1  1 0 1  1 1 0    a bcd      34 a student holds a bar magnet next to a coil of wire connected to a galvanometer.    ns     what will cause a reading on the galvanometer?  a holding the magnet stationary inside the coil  b holding the magnet stationary with the s pole next to the coil  c moving both the magnet and the coil to the right at the same speed  d moving the magnet and the coil towards each other at the same speed    35 high voltages are used to transmit electricity over large distances.    which row states the effect on the current and explains why this is a benefit?     effect on current explanation  a current increases decreases thermal energy losses  b current increases decreases sparking across insulators that support the cables  c current decreases decreases thermal energy losses  d current decreases decreases sparking across insulators that support the cables     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  36 the diagram shows a d.c. motor.    w zxy ns left right metal or graphite brush contactsplit-ring commutatordirection of current     in which direction will side wx of the coil move?  a towards the bottom of the page  b to the left  c to the right  d towards the top of the page     37 the diagram shows \u03b1-particles being scattered by a very thin metal foil.    foil q p r/g68     p, q and r represent three directions in which \u03b1-particles are scattered. the number of  \u03b1-particles scattered in each direction is np, nq and nr.    which sequence correctly shows the number of \u03b1-particles from lowest to highest being scattered  in each direction?  a np, nq, nr  b np, nr, nq  c nq, nr, np  d nr, np, nq    ",
            "17": "17     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  38 which statement about different isotopes of a certain element must  be correct?  a they have a different number of electrons.  b they have the same number of neutrons.  c they have the same number of nucleons.  d they have the same number of protons.      39 ba-137 is a radioactive isotope of barium.    when a nucleus of this isotope decays, there is no change in its composition.    which type of radiation is emitted?  a \u03b1-particles  b \u03b2-particles  c \u03b3-rays  d neutrons    40 a detector is placed near a sample of a radioactive isotope of polonium to monitor the activity of  the sample.    the graph shows how the activity measured by the detector varies with time. it includes the  activity due to background radiation, which is 40 counts  / s.    600 500400300200100 0 02468 1 0count rate counts  / s time  / minutes    what is the half-life of this isotope of polonium?  a 2.2 minutes  b 2.4 minutes  c 3.2 minutes  d 5.0 minutes ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  blank page",
            "19": "19     \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  blank page",
            "20": "20      permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared w here possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trac e copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends  at the earliest possible opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of ans wer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced onl ine in the cambridge  assessment international education copyri ght acknowledgements booklet. this is produc ed for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.  cambridge assessment international education is part of the ca mbridge assessment group. cambri dge assessment is the brand name of the university of  cambridge local examinations syndicate (ucles), which it self is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2021 1524/22/m/j/21  blank page  "
        }
    },
    "2022": {
        "0625_m22_qp_12.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 20 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  ib22 03_0625_12/4rp   \u00a9 ucles 2022   [turn ove r   *8177758045*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/12     paper 1 multiple choice (core) february/march 2022     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  1 a student investigates a pendulum.    he measures the time for the pendulum to complete 20 oscillatio ns.    he repeats the experiment three more times.    the readings are shown.    experiment time for  20 oscillations  / s  1 17.6  2 19.8  3 17.6  4 18.6    what is the average period of the pendulum?  a 0 . 8 8  s b 0 . 9 2  s c 1 7 . 6  s d 18.4  s    2 the diagram shows a speed\u2013time graph for a moving object.    speed time0 0    which statement describes the motion of the object?  a the speed of the object is increasing with constant accelerati on.  b the speed of the object is increasing with an acceleration tha t is not constant.  c the speed of the object is decreasing with constant decelerati on.  d the speed of the object is decreasing with a deceleration that  is not constant.     ",
            "3": "3    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 [turn over  3 a tennis ball falls from the upstairs window of a house.        what can be said about the acceleration of the ball if air resi stance is ignored?  a it depends on the density of the ball.  b it depends on the mass of the ball.  c it increases as the ball falls.  d it stays the same as the ball falls.    4 the mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30  kg.    when exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bot tle plus the remaining oil is  0.90  kg.    0.90kg 1.30kg     what is the mass of the empty bottle?  a 0 . 4 0  kg b 0 . 5 0  kg c 0 . 6 5  kg d 0 . 8 0  kg     ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  5 a student carries out an experiment to find the density of a r ock.    200  g 264  gbalanceliquidmeasuring cylinder rock     which two quantities does the student need to make to determine  the density of the rock?     quantity 1 quantity 2  a increase in mass increase in volume of liquid  b final mass increase in depth of liquid  c increase in mass increase in depth of liquid  d final mass increase in volume of liquid     ",
            "5": "5    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 [turn over  6 a spring is suspended from a stand. loads are added and the ex tensions of the spring are  measured.    loadsspring stand rule     which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load ?    loadextensiona loadextensionb loadextensionc loadextensiond0 00 0 0 00 0     7 which are examples of friction?    1 tension in a spring  2 air resistance 3 weight    a 1 only b 1 and 3 c 2  o n l y  d 2 and 3     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  8 the diagram shows a nut being turned with a spanner by applying  a force f to the spanner.    nutfy x    which equation gives the moment of the force f about the centre of the nut?  a moment = fx  b moment = fy  c moment = f x  d moment = f y     9 a child pushes a toy car along a horizontal surface and then r eleases it.    as the car slows down, what is the main energy transfer?  a from chemical to thermal  b from chemical to kinetic  c from kinetic to gravitational (potential)  d from kinetic to thermal     10 energy resources are used to produce electricity.    which resource is non-renewable?  a hydroelectric  b nuclear fission  c waves  d wind    ",
            "7": "7    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 [turn over  11 the diagrams show four appliances and their power ratings.    which appliance transfers the most energy per second?    a iron 1.0 kwb tv 150  wc toaster 800  wd washing machine 3.0 kw     12 an object is at rest on a horizontal surface.    which equation is used to calculate the pressure that the objec t exerts?  a mass of the object area of contact  b weight of the object area of contact  c mass of the object \uf0b4 area of contact  d weight of the object \uf0b4 area of contact     13 which device is shown?    h     a barometer  b galvanometer  c manometer  d newton meter     ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  14 which properties does a liquid have?     definite  shape can be  compressed  easily   a \u0016 \u0016 k e y   b \u0016 \u001a \u0016 = has this property  c \u001a \u0016 \u001a = does not have this property  d \u001a \u001a      15 in the diagrams, the black circle represents a smoke particle i n air.    which diagram shows a likely pa th that the particle takes becau se of brownian motion?    a bc d       16 which name is given to the change in volume of a gas when it i s heated at constant pressure?  a thermal capacity  b thermal conduction  c thermal energy  d thermal expansion     ",
            "9": "9    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 [turn over  17 some ice is slowly heated and its temperature is measured. a g raph is plotted of temperature  against time.    100 0 \u201310temperature  / /g113c timex     which row describes what happens to the thermal energy and to t he temperature in section x?     thermal energy temperature of ice  a gained by ice rises  b gained by ice stays the same  c not gained by ice rises  d not gained by ice stays the same      18 the melting point of a substance is \u201378  \uf0b0c and its boiling point is 23  \uf0b0c.    which row gives the correct state of matter of the substance at  the given temperatures?     state at  temperature of 0  \uf0b0c state at  temperature of 100  \uf0b0c  a solid liquid  b solid gas  c liquid solid  d liquid gas     ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  19 a student sets up an experiment to find out how well different  metals conduct thermal energy.    one end of a rod of each metal is in hot water and the other en d has a small nail attached to it by  wax.    hot water wax nail    the rods have the same thickness.    which conditions should be satisfied in order to make this a va lid test?     same  size nails hot water kept  at constant  temperature same  length rods   a \u0016 \u0016 \u0016 k e y   b \u0016 \u0016 \u001a \u0016 = condition applies  c \u0016 \u001a \u0016 \u001a = condition does not apply  d \u001a \u0016 \u0016       20 t w o  s i m i l a r  m e t a l  c o n t a i n e r s ,  p  a n d  q ,  e a c h  c o n t a i n  w a t e r  a t  9 0 \uf0b0c. both containers are the  same size and both are sealed.    the water in container p cools more quickly than the water in c ontainer q.    which statement is correct?  a p contains more water than q.  b p has a shinier surface than q.  c p is painted a darker colour than q.  d p is surrounded by a vacuum and q is surrounded by air.     ",
            "11": "11    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 [turn over  21 a wave has the appearance shown.    displacement  / cm distance  / cm0 0     how do the properties of the wave change as the distance from t he origin increases?     amplitude wavelength  a decreases increases  b decreases stays the same  c increases increases  d increases stays the same     22 a tank contains water. ripples are produced on the surface of t he water. refraction is observed.    what causes the ripples to refract?  a the cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.  b the ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow wat er.  c the ripples hit the wall of the tank.  d the ripples pass through a narrow gap.     23 the diagram shows a plane mirror and a ray of light reflected from it.    which angle is the angle of incidence?    d a cb      ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  24 the diagrams each show a ray o f light from an object o passing  through a thin converging lens.    the principal focuses in each diagram are labelled f.    o ff1 o ff2 o ff3     which diagrams are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 2 only c 1 and 3 d 3 only    25 which row is correct?     frequency of infrared waves  compared to microwaves use of infrared waves  a greater radiant heater  b greater satellite television  c lower radiant heater  d lower satellite television     ",
            "13": "13    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 [turn over  26 a student investigates sound waves from a loudspeaker.    the frequency of the sound wave is 25  000  hz. the student has normal hearing but she cannot  hear the sound.    what should she do if she wants to hear a sound from the loudsp eaker?  a decrease the amplitude  b decrease the frequency  c increase the amplitude  d increase the frequency      27 two isolated metal spheres are both negatively charged. the sp heres are brought close together  but do not touch.    which diagram shows the charge distribution on the spheres?    \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013a \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013b \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013cd      28 when a plastic comb is placed next to a small piece of aluminiu m foil hanging from a nylon  thread, the foil is repelled by the comb.    why is this?  a the comb is charged and the foil is uncharged.  b the comb is uncharged and the foil is charged.  c the comb and the foil have charges of opposite sign.  d the comb and the foil have charges of the same sign.      29 the diagram shows a piece of metal resistance wire.         which wire, made of the same metal, has a smaller resistance?  a a wire of the same length with a larger diameter   b a wire of the same length with a smaller diameter   c a wire of greater length with the same diameter  d a wire of greater length with a smaller diameter    ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  30 which labelled component in the circuit shown controls the bri ghtness of lamp x?    va b dcx       31 a circuit includes a battery, two identical resistors and five  ammeters, p, q, r, s and t.    a a a aapq str     which statement about the readings on the ammeters is not correct?  a p has a greater reading than q.  b p has a greater reading than r.  c p has a greater reading than s.  d p has a greater reading than t.    32 an electrician sets up a potential divider circuit in a fridge  so that when the fridge door is open  and light from the room enters the fridge, a warning light turn s on.    which component does the electrician need for the potential div ider in addition to a variable  resistor?  a light-dependent resistor  b relay  c thermistor  d motor   ",
            "15": "15    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 [turn over  33 a simple wiring diagram for an electric cooker is shown.    live neutral earth connection to casingelectric cooker metal case     why is there a wire connecting the metal case of the cooker to earth?  a it improves the efficiency of the cooker.  b it prevents the metal case from becoming too hot when the cook er is left on.  c it reduces the risk of an electric shock if the live wire touc hes the metal case.  d the electric cooker will not switch on without it.    34 three statements about a.c. and d.c. currents are given.    1  a  d . c .  c u r r e n t  i s  i n  o n e  d i r e c t i o n  o n l y  w h i l s t  a n  a . c .  c u r r e n t repeatedly changes  direction.  2 d.c. is the abbreviation for direct current and a.c. is the a bbreviation for amplitude  current.  3 an a.c. current is in one direction only whilst a d.c. curren t repeatedly changes  direction.    which statements are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1  o n l y  c 2 and 3 d 3  o n l y     ",
            "16": "16  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  35 two magnets are placed near a current-carrying coil.    the diagram shows this experimental arrangement and the current  direction in the coil.    s nx s ny     which statement is correct?  a both x and y are attracted to the coil.  b both x and y are repelled by the coil.  c x is attracted to the coil and y is repelled.  d x is repelled by the coil and y is attracted.    36 which arrangement can be used to step up a voltage?    a.c. inputoutputa iron core d.c. inputoutputb iron core a.c. inputoutputc iron core d.c. inputoutputd iron core      37 which diagram shows the structure of an atom containing a nucl eus and two orbiting electrons?    a 2+++b 2+\u2013\u2013c 2\u2013++d 2\u2013\u2013\u2013      ",
            "17": "17    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 38 a nuclide has the symbol  c.14 6    which statement about all atoms of this nuclide is correct?  a there are 6 protons in the nucleus.  b there are 14 neutrons in the nucleus.  c there are 6 electrons in the nucleus.  d there are 20 nucleons in the nucleus.     39 the table compares the penetrating abilities and ionising effec ts of \uf061-particles and of \uf067-radiation.    which row is correct?     least  penetrating most  ionising  a \uf061 \uf061  b \uf061 \uf067  c \uf067 \uf061  d \uf067 \uf067     40 when a radioactive isotope is set up close to a counter, a cou nt rate of 38  000 counts  / s is  obtained. the table shows the count rate from the isotope over a three-year period.    time  / years  s/ countsrate count     0 38  000  1 26  000  2 17  000  3 12  000    what is the half-life of the isotope?  a less than 1 year  b more than 1 year but less than 2 years  c more than 2 years but less than 3 years  d more than 3 years     ",
            "18": "18  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  blank page",
            "19": "19    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22 blank page",
            "20": "20    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.    to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.   cambridge assessment international education is part of cambrid ge assessment. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the un iversity of cambridge  local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/12/f/m/22  blank page  "
        },
        "0625_m22_qp_22.pdf": {
            "1": "    this document has 16 pages.  ib22 03_0625_22/3rp   \u00a9 ucles 2022   [turn ove r   *0532883419*cambridge igcse\u2122       physics 0625/22     paper 2 multiple choice (extended) february/march 2022     45 minutes    you must answer on the mult iple choice answer sheet.    you will need: multiple choice answer sheet   soft clean eraser   soft pencil (type b or hb is recommended)       instructions   \uf0b7 there are forty  questions on this paper. answer all questions.   \uf0b7 for each question there ar e four possible answers a, b, c and d. choose the one you consider correct  and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice an swer sheet.   \uf0b7 follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.  \uf0b7 write in soft pencil.  \uf0b7 write your name, centre number and candidate number on the mult iple choice answer sheet in the  spaces provided unless this has been done for you.  \uf0b7 do not use correction fluid.  \uf0b7 do not write on any bar codes.  \uf0b7 you may use a calculator.  \uf0b7 take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2).      information  \uf0b7 the total mark for this paper is 40.  \uf0b7 each correct answer will score one mark.  \uf0b7 any rough working should be don e on this question paper.   ",
            "2": "2  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22  1 a student investigates a pendulum.    he measures the time for the pendulum to complete 20 oscillatio ns.    he repeats the experiment three more times.    the readings are shown.    experiment time for  20 oscillations  / s  1 17.6  2 19.8  3 17.6  4 18.6    what is the average period of the pendulum?  a 0 . 8 8  s b 0 . 9 2  s c 1 7 . 6  s d 18.4  s    2 a tennis ball falls from the upstairs window of a house.        what can be said about the acceleration of the ball if air resi stance is ignored?  a it depends on the density of the ball.  b it depends on the mass of the ball.  c it increases as the ball falls.  d it stays the same as the ball falls.      3 a car joins a road at a speed of 14  m / s and accelerates at 4.0  m / s2 for 5.0 seconds.    what is the final speed of the car?  a 1 8  m / s b 2 0  m / s c 3 2  m / s d 3 4  m / s    ",
            "3": "3     \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22 [turn over  4 the gravitational field strength is 8.8  n / kg on venus and 3.8  n / kg on mars.    an object has a weight of 42  n on venus.    what are the mass and the weight of the object on mars?     m a s s  / kg weight  / n  a 4.8 18  b 4.8 42  c 11 42  d 11 97     5 a student carries out an experiment to find the density of a r ock.    200  g 264  gbalanceliquidmeasuring cylinder rock     which two measurements does the student need to make to determi ne the density of the rock?     measurement 1 measurement 2  a increase in mass increase in volume of liquid  b final mass increase in depth of liquid  c increase in mass increase in depth of liquid  d final mass increase in volume of liquid     6 a car has a mass of 1500  kg. a constant resultant force acts on the car and the car acce lerates  from 15  m / s to 20  m / s in 4.0 seconds.    what is the magnitude of the resultant force acting on the car?   a 300  n b 1 2 0 0  n c 1900  n d 7500  n    ",
            "4": "4  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22  7 a metal wire is loaded up to the limit of proportionality.    which statement is correct?  a hooke\u2019s law is not obeyed when the load is increased from zero to this point.  b when the load is increased beyond the limit of proportionality,  the diameter of the wire will  increase.  c when the load is removed, the wire returns to its original leng th.  d up to the limit of proportionality, there is no change in the s hape of the wire.    8 the diagram shows a uniform metre  rule, mn, pivoted at its mid point p.    mn p w1 w2    two weights, w1 and w2, are hung either side of the pivot.    the rule remains balanced.    which row is correct?     direction of resultant  moment about point m direction of resultant  force on the rule  a clockwise downwards  b clockwise zero  c zero downwards  d zero zero      9 which physical quantity is a vector?  a mass  b density  c temperature  d velocity     10 a resultant force of 500  n acts for 10  s on a car of mass 1000  kg. this causes the velocity of the  car to double.    what is the final velocity of the car?  a 5 m / s b 1 0  m / s c 2 0  m / s d 5 0  m / s   ",
            "5": "5     \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22 [turn over  11 a child pushes a toy car along a horizontal surface and then r eleases it.    as the car slows down, what is the main energy transfer?  a from chemical to thermal  b from chemical to kinetic  c from kinetic to gravitational (potential)  d from kinetic to thermal    12 at time = 0, a cannonball is stationary inside a cannon. the c annonball is then fired from the  cannon.    at time = t, the cannonball moves forwards and the cannon moves backwards.     what happens to the total kinetic energy and the total momentum  of the cannon and the  cannonball between time = 0 and time = t  ?     total kinetic energy of  cannon and cannonball total momentum of  cannon and cannonball  a changes changes  b changes remains the same  c remains the same changes  d remains the same remains the same      13 in a small hydroelectric power scheme, 800  kg of water drops through a vertical height of 2.2  m  every second. the electrical output is 10.6  kw.    what is the efficiency of the scheme?  a 0.60% b 1 7 %  c 6 0 %  d 75%     14 an object is at rest on a horizontal surface.    which equation is used to calculate the pressure that the objec t exerts?  a mass of the object area of contact  b weight of the object area of contact  c mass of the object \uf0b4 area of contact  d weight of the object \uf0b4 area of contact     ",
            "6": "6  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22  15 smoke particles, illuminated by a bright lamp, are seen throug h a microscope. they move about  randomly.    what causes this motion?  a attraction between the smoke particles and the molecules of the  air  b collisions between the smoke particles and the molecules of the  air  c evaporation of the faster-moving smoke particles  d warming of the smoke particles by the lamp    16 ether is a liquid that evaporates easily at room temperature.    the rate at which ether evaporates can be increased by bubbling  air through it.    the diagram shows this process.    air etherair bubbles     students give three suggestions why the rate of evaporation inc reases when air is bubbled  through.    student 1 suggests that the temperature of the ether is decreas ed.  student 2 suggests that the surface area of the ether is increa sed.  student 3 suggests that evaporated molecules are removed at a g reater rate.    which students are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 1 and 3 c 2 and 3 d 3  o n l y     ",
            "7": "7     \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22 [turn over  17 some ice is slowly heated and its temperature is measured. a g raph is plotted of temperature  against time.    100 0 \u201310temperature  / /g113c timex     which row describes what happens to the thermal energy and to t he temperature in section x?     thermal energy temperature of ice  a gained by ice rises  b gained by ice stays the same  c not gained by ice rises  d not gained by ice stays the same     18 the diagram shows the apparatus needed for an experiment to de termine the specific heat  capacity of the material from which an object is made.    a vstop-clockthermometer heaterobject balance     which piece of apparatus could be omitted if the purpose of the  experiment is to determine the  thermal capacity of the object?  a ammeter  b balance  c stop-clock  d thermometer    ",
            "8": "8  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22  19 both boiling and evaporation involve a change of state from li quid to gas.    which row gives the correct difference between boiling and evap oration?     boiling evaporation  a no bubbles are formed bubbles are formed  b occurs at all temperatures occurs at a definite temperature  c occurs throughout the liquid occurs at the surface only  d the temperature falls the temperature remains constant      20 which statement describes thermal conduction in a metal by ele ctrons?  a atoms and electrons move freely throughout the metal.  b atoms and electrons vibrate about their fixed positions only.  c electrons move freely throughout the metal.  d electrons remain attached to atoms.    21 a tank contains water. ripples are produced on the surface of t he water. refraction is observed.    what causes the ripples to refract?  a the cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.  b the ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow wat er.  c the ripples hit the wall of the tank.  d the ripples pass through a narrow gap.    22 the diagram shows wavefronts of a water wave passing through a  gap in a barrier.    barrier     which change will increase the diffraction of the wave as it pa sses through the gap?  a increase the amplitude of the wave.  b increase the width of the gap.  c reduce the depth of water.  d reduce the frequency of the wave. ",
            "9": "9     \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22 [turn over  23 the diagrams each show a ray o f light from an object o passing  through a thin converging lens.    the principal focuses in each diagram are labelled f.    o ff1 o ff2 o ff3     which diagrams are correct?  a 1 and 2 b 2 only c 1 and 3 d 3 only    24 the diagram shows a ray of light inside an optical fibre approa ching point x.    pqnormal to the surface at x tangent to the surface at x x     the light is totally reflected within the fibre.    the refractive index of the material of the optical fibre is 1. 39.    which condition ensures that total internal reflection occurs?  a q < 45 \uf0b0 b q > 47 \uf0b0 c p > 47 \uf0b0 d p = q    ",
            "10": "10  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22  25 an eclipse of the sun happens when the moon comes between the earth and the sun.    which statement is correct?  a infrared radiation from the sun disappears before visible ligh t and ultraviolet radiation.  b ultraviolet radiation from the sun disappears before visible l ight and infrared radiation.  c visible light from the sun disappears before ultraviolet radia tion and infrared radiation.  d infrared radiation, ultraviolet radiation and visible light fr om the sun all disappear at the same  moment.    26 the diagram shows air particles in a sound wave.    vwx y z     which row correctly identifies the position of a compression an d position of a rarefaction?     compression rarefaction  a x y  b y x  c v z  d z v     27 two isolated metal spheres are both negatively charged. the sp heres are brought close together  but do not touch.    which diagram shows the charge distribution on the spheres?    \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013a \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013b \u2013 \u2013\u2013\u2013 \u2013\u2013cd      28 two separate circuits have different power supplies. both powe r supplies provide the same  magnitude current.    power supply p has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5  v and power supply q has an e.m.f. of  3.0  v.    which statements about q are correct when compared with p?    1 q supplies twice the charge per unit time.  2 q supplies twice the energy per unit charge. 3 q supplies twice the energy per unit time.    a 1, 2 and 3 b 1 and 2 only c 1 and 3 only d 2 and 3 only ",
            "11": "11     \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22 [turn over  29 the diagram shows a piece of metal resistance wire.         which wire, made of the same metal, has a smaller resistance?  a a wire of the same length with a larger diameter   b a wire of the same length with a smaller diameter   c a wire of greater length with the same diameter  d a wire of greater length with a smaller diameter     30 which labelled component in the circuit shown controls the bri ghtness of lamp x?    va b dcx      31 a circuit includes a battery, two identical resistors and five  ammeters, p, q, r, s and t.    a a a aapq str     which statement about the readings on the ammeters is not correct?  a p has a greater reading than q.  b p has a greater reading than r.  c p has a greater reading than s.  d p has a greater reading than t.   ",
            "12": "12  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22  32 an electrician sets up a potential divider circuit in a fridge  so that when the fridge door is open  and light from the room enters the fridge, a warning light turn s on.    which component does the electrician need to use in addition to  a variable resistor?  a light-dependent resistor  b relay  c thermistor  d variable resistor    33 two nand gates are joined together as shown.    input 1 input 2output     which single logic gate is equivalent to this combination?  a a n d  b n a n d  c n o r  d o r     ",
            "13": "13     \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22 [turn over  34 the diagram shows an electric drill and safety guard.    safety guard in closed position drillelectric moto r     the drill requires the logic circuit shown.    motor alarm ?safety guard open 0 closed 1motor on 1 motor off 0 alarm on 1 alarm off 0bstarting switch on 1 off 0a     the circuit must only allow the motor to start when the safety guard is closed. if the safety guard  is not closed when the starting switch is on, the alarm must so und.    which logic gate is missing from the circuit?  a n o t  b n a n d  c a n d  d n o r     35 two magnets are placed near a current-carrying coil.    the diagram shows this experimental arrangement and the current  direction in the coil.    s nx s ny     which statement is correct?  a both x and y are attracted to the coil.  b both x and y are repelled by the coil.  c x is attracted to the coil and y is repelled.  d x is repelled by the coil and y is attracted.     ",
            "14": "14  \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22  36 two circuits are set up as shown. the iron rods are placed clo se together and are able to move.    xs iron rod iron rod     what happens to the size of the gap at x when switch s is close d?  a it decreases.  b it decreases then increases.  c it increases.  d it does not change.     37 when a current-carrying conductor is placed in a magnetic field , it experiences a force.    which statement about this force is correct?  a it is parallel to both the magnetic field and the direction of the current.  b it is parallel to the magnetic field and perpendicular to the d irection of the current.  c it is perpendicular to the magnetic field and parallel to the d irection of the current.  d it is perpendicular to both the magnetic field and the directio n of the current.     ",
            "15": "15     \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22 [turn over  38 w h e n  a  b e a m  o f  \uf061-particles is incident on a thin metal foil, most of them follo w a path  represented by path x in the diagram. a small number of \uf061-particles follow a path represented by  path y in the diagram.    x yfoil     which row correctly describes a conclusion that can be drawn fr om each of these observations  about the structure of the atom?     most follow path x some follow path y  a atom is mostly empty space atom contains something that repels \uf061-particles  b atom is mostly empty space nucleus contains protons and neutron s  c atom is neutral atom contains something that repels \uf061-particles  d atom is neutral nucleus contains protons and neutrons      39 nuclear fusion is a reaction that takes place in stars.    which row describes this reaction?     action of atomic nuclei energy  a   an atomic nucleus splits into  two or more smaller nuclei absorbed    b   an atomic nucleus splits into  two or more smaller nuclei released    c   atomic nuclei join together  to form a larger nucleus absorbed    d   atomic nuclei join together  to form a larger nucleus released       ",
            "16": "16    permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to tra ce copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have  unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possib le opportunity.   to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced on line in the cambridge  assessment international educat ion copyright acknowledgements b ooklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is  freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org  after the live examination se ries.    cambridge assessment international education is part of cambrid ge assessment. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the un iversity of cambridge  local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is a department of the university of cambridge.    \u00a9 ucles 2022 0625/22/f/m/22  40 when a radioactive isotope is set up close to a counter, a cou nt rate of 38  000 counts  / s is  obtained. the table shows the count rate from the isotope over a three-year period.    time  / years  s/ countsrate count     0 38  000  1 26  000  2 17  000  3 12  000    what is the half-life of the isotope?  a less than 1 year  b more than 1 year but less than 2 years  c more than 2 years but less than 3 years  d more than 3 years     "
        },
        "0625_m22_qp_32.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages.  [turn overdc (rw/fc) 302380/3 \u00a9 ucles 2022 *6082508392* physics  0625/32 paper 3 theory (core)  february/march  2022  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122",
            "2": "2 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 1 fig. 1.1 shows some masses on a mass hanger attached to an elastic band. the elastic band is  stretched by the masses. rigid support elastic band mass hanger masses fig. 1.1  (a) the total mass of the masses and the mass hanger is 300  g.   calculate the total weight of the masses and the mass hanger.  total weight =  ..  n [3]",
            "3": "3 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over  (b) a student pulls the mass hanger down and then releases it. the mass hanger and masses  oscillate up and down.   the student uses a stop-watch to time 20  oscillations. fig.  1.2 shows the time reading on the  stop-watch after the 20th oscillation. min s s1 100 fig. 1.2   (i) determine the time in seconds  for 20  oscillations from the time shown in fig.  1.2.  time for 20  oscillations =  ...  s [1]   (ii) calculate the time in seconds for one oscillation.  time for one oscillation =  ...  s [2]  (c) when the student pulls the mass hanger down, energy is stored in the elastic band as elastic  potential energy.   describe what happens to this energy store when the student releases the mass hanger and  it moves upwards.  ...  .  [2]  [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 2 (a) a student is doing some physical exercise. fig.  2.1 shows the student holding a 50  n weight. 50 npivot0.90  m fig. 2.1   the pivot in the shoulder is 0.90  m from the centre of mass of the weight.   calculate the moment of the weight about this pivot.  moment of the weight =  ...  n m [3]",
            "5": "5 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over  (b) the student does some running exercises. fig.  2.2 shows the speed\u2013time graph for one  exercise. 0 0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 time  / sac dspeed m / s 2.04.06.08.0b c a d e fig. 2.2   (i) describe the motion of the athlete in sections ab and de. section ab    . section de  .  [2]   (ii) calculate the distance moved by the athlete from time = 0 to time = 5.0  s.  distance =  ..  m [3]  [total: 8]",
            "6": "6 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 3 (a) fig. 3.1 shows a metal block and its dimensions. 12.0  cm 2.0 cm 2.0 cm fig. 3.1  (not to scale)   calculate the volume of the metal block.  volume of the block =  ..  cm3 [2]  (b) a different metal block has a mass of 86  g and a volume of 8.0  cm3.   (i) calculate the density \u03c1 of the metal using the equation \u03c1 = m v .  density of metal =  ..  g / cm3 [2]   (ii) the metal block is placed in some liquid. the metal block floats on the liquid.    suggest a value for the density of the liquid.   ...  g / cm3 [1]  (c) a student has a measuring cylinder, a beaker of liquid and a balance.   describe how the student can use this equipment to determine the density of the liquid.  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 8]",
            "7": "7 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 4 coal-fired power stations provide electricity for homes and industry.  a government decides to replace a coal-fired power station with a hydroelectric power station.  (a) describe how electrical energy may be obtained from the gravitational potential energy of the  water behind a hydroelectric dam.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (b) apart from cost, state two advantages  of generating electricity using a hydroelectric power  station compared with using a coal-fired power station. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  (c) apart from cost, state two disadvantages  of generating electricity using a hydroelectric  power station compared with using a coal-fired power station. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  [total: 7]",
            "8": "8 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 5 a woman starts to push a trolley across the floor. fig. 5.1 shows the horizontal forces acting on the  trolley. 120  n 90 ntrolley fig. 5.1  (a) determine the resultant horizontal force on the trolley.  resultant force =    n  direction of resultant force =  ...  [3]  (b) the total weight of the trolley and boxes is 900  n.   the area of each  wheel in contact with the ground is 8.0  cm2. the trolley has four wheels.   calculate the pressure on the ground due to the total weight of the trolley and boxes. include  the correct unit in your answer.  pressure on the ground =  ...  unit  ..  [5]  [total: 8]",
            "9": "9 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 represents gas particles in a container. the container is at room temperature. container wall gas particle fig. 6.1  (not to scale)  (a) describe the motion of the gas particles.  ...  .  [2]  (b) state how the motion of the gas particles changes when the gas in the container is cooled.  .  [1]  (c) explain how the gas particles exert a pressure on the walls of the container.  ...  .  [2]  [total: 5]",
            "10": "10 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 7 (a) state the name for the transfer of thermal energy through a metal.  .  [1]  (b) a metal can contains some water. the metal can is heated as shown in fig.  7.1. heatmovement of waterwater metal can fig. 7.1   describe how thermal energy causes the movement of water shown in fig.  7.1.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) a student places equal masses of water into two metal cans. the cans are identical apart  from one having a white outer surface and the other having a black outer surface.   the student places the two cans in direct sunlight. the temperature of the water increases in  both cans. after 10  minutes, the temperature increase is greater in one of the cans.   state and explain which can has the greater increase in temperature.  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "11": "11 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 8 a student uses a tank of water to observe waves on the surface of the water.  (a) the graph in fig.  8.1 represents a wave on the surface of the water. displacement of water distance0 fig. 8.1   (i) draw on fig.  8.1 to indicate the amplitude of the wave. label the amplitude  a. [1]   (ii) draw on fig.  8.1 to indicate one wavelength of the wave. label the wavelength  l. [1]  (b) the student creates waves in the water tank and places various barriers in their path.   (i) fig. 8.2 shows the wavefronts as they approach a barrier placed at an angle of 45\u00b0 to the  wavefronts. waterdirection of travel of wavefrontswater tankwavefronts barrier 45\u00b0 fig. 8.2    on fig.  8.2, draw three  wavefronts after they have reflected from the barrier. draw an  arrow to show the direction of travel of these wavefronts.  [2]",
            "12": "12 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022   (ii) the student replaces the barrier in fig.  8.2 with a different barrier, as shown in fig.  8.3.    fig. 8.3 shows the wavefronts as they reach the barrier. waterdirection of travel of wavefronts narrow gapwater tankwavefronts barrier fig. 8.3    on fig.  8.3, draw three  wavefronts after they have passed through the narrow gap.  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "13": "13 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 9 (a) fig. 9.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. one region is not labelled. radio wavesinfrared wavesvisible lightultraviolet wavesx-rays gamma-rays fig. 9.1   (i) in fig. 9.1, one region is unlabelled.    state the name of the unlabelled region.  .  [1]   (ii) complete the sentence.    the direction of the arrow in fig.  9.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum  in order of increasing ... .  [1]  (b) state two uses for x -rays. 1.  ... 2.  ...  [2]  (c) state why x -rays can be harmful to people.  ...  .  [2]  [total: 6]",
            "14": "14 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 10 (a) a student connects the circuit shown in fig.  10.1. a ldr fig. 10.1   (i) the student wants to determine the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (ldr).    draw on fig.  10.1 to show how the student connects a voltmeter into the circuit. use the  correct symbol for the voltmeter.  [2]   (ii) the current in the ldr is 0.020  a when the potential difference (voltage) across the ldr  is 5.4  v.    calculate the resistance of the ldr.  resistance of ldr =  ..  \u03c9 [3]  (b) when the student shines a light onto the ldr, its resistance is 150  \u03c9. the resistance of the  variable resistor in the circuit is 180  \u03c9.   determine the combined resistance of the ldr and the variable resistor.  combined resistance =  ..  \u03c9 [1]  [total: 6]",
            "15": "15 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 11 a battery charger for a laptop computer includes a transformer.  (a) the primary voltage vp to the transformer is 240  v.   the number of turns on the primary coil np is 590  turns and the number of turns on the  secondary coil ns of the transformer is 48  turns.   calculate the secondary voltage vs of the transformer.  secondary voltage vs =  ..  v [3]  (b) the plug connecting the transformer to the supply voltage contains a fuse.   describe how a fuse works.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  [total: 6]",
            "16": "16 0625/32/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 12 (a) table  12.1 gives some properties of three different types of radiation. table 12.1 type of radiation nature relative charge ionising ability gamma ( \u03b3)electromagnetic wave0 low beta (\u03b2) \u20131 (minus one) medium alpha (\u03b1) helium nucleus   (i) complete table 12.1 by writing the missing property in each of the empty boxes.  [3]   (ii) state which type of radiation, alpha, beta or gamma, is the most penetrating.  .  [1]  (b) an isotope of beryllium, be, has the nuclide notation: 9 4be .   fig. 12.1 shows a diagram of one atom of this isotope. electron yx fig. 12.1  (not to scale)   complete the labelling of fig. 12.1. state the names for x and for y.   x .   y .  [2]  [total: 6] permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of cambridge assessment. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of cambridge  local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is a department of the university of cambridge."
        },
        "0625_m22_qp_42.pdf": {
            "1": " [turn overdc (nf/cgw) 302381/2 \u00a9 ucles 2022this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated. *5197842885* physics  0625/42 paper 4 theory (extended)  february/march  2022  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units.  \u25cf take the weight of 1.0  kg to be 10  n (acceleration of free fall = 10  m / s2). information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 80.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122",
            "2": "2 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 1 a ball rolls down a ramp and onto a horizontal surface. the first section of the horizontal surface is  smooth. the second section of the horizontal surface is rough. fig.  1.1 shows a speed\u2013time graph  for the ball. 02.04.0 0 1.0 2.0 time  / sspeed m / s 3.06.08.010.012.014.0 fig. 1.1  (a) state the time when the ball reaches the start of the rough section of the horizontal surface.  time = .  [1]  (b) explain how fig.  1.1 shows that there is no resultant force on the ball when it rolls along the  smooth section of the horizontal surface.  ...  .  [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over  (c) using fig.  1.1, determine the acceleration of the ball as it rolls down the ramp.  acceleration = .  [3]  (d) the ball starts from rest at the top of the ramp.   show that the length of the ramp is 9.6  m. [2] [total: 8]",
            "4": "4 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 2 fig. 2.1 shows a spring balance used to measure the weight of a baby. the spring inside the  balance extends when a mass is suspended from it. the dial shows the extension of spring as a  value of mass in kg. cradle with negligible massdial fig. 2.1  the spring obeys hooke\u2019s law up to a weight of 175  n.  (a) (i) state hooke\u2019s law.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) state the relationship between the mass of the baby and the force exerted on the spring  due to the baby.  ...  .  [1]   (iii) the reading on the spring balance is 8.0  kg.    determine the force exerted on the spring due to the baby.  force = .  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over  (b) the limit of proportionality for the spring is at a force of 175  n.   sketch the extension\u2013load graph for the spring. the sketch must continue beyond a force of  175 n. extension load  / n 0 1750 [2]  (c) the baby is carried from the ground floor to the bedroom. the vertical height of the bedroom  above the ground floor is 3.5  m.    calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the baby when it is carried from the  ground floor to the bedroom.  change in gravitational potential energy = .  [2] [total: 7]",
            "6": "6 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 3 fig. 3.1 and fig.  3.2 show how a puddle of water changes on a warm windy day. puddle of water puddle of water three hours later solid road surface  fig. 3.1 fig. 3.2  (a) describe the process by which the volume of water in the puddle decreases.  ...  ...  .  [2]  (b) state and explain one change in the weather that would cause the volume of water in the  puddle to decrease more slowly. statement  .. explanation  ...  ... [2]  (c) explain, in terms of molecules, how sweating helps to cool your body on a hot day.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3] [total: 7]",
            "7": "7 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 4 (a) a sample of sand has a volume of 0.050  m3. the density of the sand is 1900  kg / m3. the  specific heat capacity of the sand is 1500  j / (kg \u00b0c).   (i) calculate the mass of the sample of sand.  mass = .  [2]   (ii) calculate the thermal capacity of the sample of sand.  thermal capacity = .  [2]   (iii) the initial temperature of the sample of sand is 7.0  \u00b0c. the sample of sand is heated  using an electrical heater. the power of the heating element is 50  w.    calculate the time taken to increase the temperature of the sand to 19.0  \u00b0c.  time = .  [3]  (b) in some countries, the soil is too cold for plants to grow well. in these countries, plants are  grown in plastic pots and kept inside. the pots, containing soil, are placed on sand. the sand  is heated using an electrical heater, as shown in fig.  4.1. plastic plant potplant sandsoil heating element in sand fig. 4.1   (i) describe, in terms of molecules, how thermal energy is transferred from the heated sand  through the base of the plastic pot.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]",
            "8": "8 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022   (ii) the heating element in fig.  4.1 remains switched on. the temperature of the sand  remains constant at a value above room temperature.    explain why the temperature of the sand remains constant.  ...  ...  .  [2] [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 5 a boy looks at the image of a clock in a plane mirror. fig.  5.1 shows the mirror, the clock and the  position of one of the boy\u2019s eyes. mirror boy\u2019s eye clock fig. 5.1  (a) (i) on fig.  5.1, draw a ray of light from the clock, reflected to the boy\u2019s eye.  [2]   (ii) on fig.  5.1, mark with an x the position of the image of the clock.  [1]   (iii) state whether the image formed by the mirror is virtual or real.    explain your answer.  ...  .  [1]   (iv) fig. 5.2 shows the image of the clock seen by the boy. fig. 5.2    the boy now looks directly at the clock.    on fig.  5.3, draw what the boy sees. fig. 5.3 [1]",
            "10": "10 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022  (b) (i) the clock is illuminated by a source of monochromatic green light.    state the meaning of monochromatic.  .  [1]   (ii) the green light has a wavelength of 5.6  \u00d7 10\u20137 m.    calculate the frequency of this green light.  frequency = .  [3] [total: 9]",
            "11": "11 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 6 fig. 6.1 shows two bar magnets. n s fig. 6.1  (a) on fig.  6.1, sketch the pattern and the direction of the magnetic field lines between the bar  magnets.  [2]  (b) fig. 6.2 shows the same bar magnets with a coil of wire between them. as nhandledirection of rotation galvanometer fig. 6.2   (i) name the parts labelled a in fig.  6.2.  .  [1]   (ii) the coil of wire is rotated in the direction shown in fig.  6.2.    on fig.  6.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of the current in the coil. explain your  answer.  ...  .  [2]   (iii) explain how rotating the coil in fig.  6.2 continuously causes the galvanometer needle to  show an alternating current.  ...  ...  ...  ...  .  [4] [total: 9]",
            "12": "12 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 7 fig. 7.1 shows a circuit including a 12  v battery and two identical lamps. a q fig. 7.1  (a) the 12  v battery consists of cells connected in series. each cell in the battery has an  electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5  v.   determine how many cells are in the battery.  number of cells = .  [1]  (b) (i) when the switch is closed, the ammeter reading is 2.4  a.    calculate the total resistance of the circuit.  resistance = .  [2]   (ii) each lamp has a resistance of 3.0  \u03c9.    calculate the resistance of q.  resistance of q = .  [2]  (c) (i) on fig.  7.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter that measures the potential difference (p.d.)  across the two lamps.  [1]   (ii) calculate the power supplied to one lamp.  power = .  [3] [total: 9]",
            "13": "13 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 8 a radio is connected to the mains supply using a step-down transformer.  (a) draw a labelled diagram of the structure of a basic step-down transformer. [3]  (b) explain the operation of a basic transformer.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]  (c) the voltage of the mains supply is 230  v. the output voltage of the transformer is 6.0  v.   calculate the value of the turns ratio (ns np). give your answer to two significant figures.  value of turns ratio = .  [2] [total: 8]",
            "14": "14 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 9 fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit. a c d b fig. 9.1  (a) (i) explain what is meant by digital.  .  [1]   (ii) table  9.1 is a truth table for the digital circuit shown in fig.  9.1.    complete the columns c and d in table  9.1. table  9.1 a b c d 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 [2]  (b) state the single logic gate that would produce the same output d from inputs a and b.  .  [1] [total: 4]",
            "15": "15 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 10 the isotope americium-241 is represented by 241 95am .  this isotope decays by an \u03b1-emission to an isotope of neptunium (np).  (a) complete the nuclide equation for this decay. 241 95am np +\u03b1     [3]  (b) fig. 10.1 shows a simple diagram of a smoke detector. the smoke detector contains a  small sample of americium-241. this isotope ionises the air between the metal plates in the  detector. metal plates air flowdetector circuit radioactive source fig. 10.1   (i) describe how the americium-241 ionises air.  ...  ...  ...  .  [3]   (ii) suggest and explain two reasons why smoke detectors use an isotope that emits  \u03b1-particles rather than an isotope that emits \u03b3-radiation. 1.  ...  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  ... [2] [total: 8]",
            "16": "16 0625/42/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of cambridge assessment. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of cambridge  local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_m22_qp_52.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 12 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  [turn overdc (rw/cb) 221371/1 \u00a9 ucles 2022 *6391660184* physics  0625/52 paper 5 practical test  february/march  2022  1 hour 15 minutes you must answer on the question paper. you will need:  the materials and apparatus listed in the confidential instructions instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].cambridge igcse\u2122 for examiner\u2019s use 1 2 3 4 total",
            "2": "2 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 1 in this experiment, you will investigate the extension of a spring and use it to determine the weight  of a metre rule.  the spring has been set up for you.  carry out the following instructions. clamp spring 1.0 n loadl0ls  fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2    (a) measure and record the unstretched length l\u200a0 of the spring, as shown in fig.  1.1.  l\u200a0 =  ..  cm   suspend the 1.0  n load from the spring, as shown in fig.  1.2.   measure and record the stretched length l\u200as of the spring.  l\u200as =  ..  cm  [1]  (b) suspend the metre rule from the spring using the hook fixed at the 95.0  cm mark, as shown in  fig. 1.3.   place the other end of the metre rule so that the 5.0  cm mark of the rule rests on the pivot.  the metre rule must rest on the pivot at the 5.0  cm mark throughout the experiment.   place the load w on the metre rule with its centre at a distance d = 20.0  cm from the pivot.   ensure that the metre rule is horizontal by adjusting the clamp that holds the spring. d load w benchmetre ruleclamp 95.0  cm mark 5.0 cm mark pivotl fig. 1.3",
            "3": "3 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over   measure, and record in table  1.1, the stretched length l of the spring, as shown in fig.  1.3.   repeat this procedure for distances d = 30.0  cm, d = 40.0  cm, d = 50.0  cm and d = 60.0  cm  from the pivot. table 1.1 d / cm l / cm 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0  [2]  (c) plot a graph of l / cm (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). start the axes at the origin (0,0). 00  [4]  (d) (i) from your graph, determine l, the value of l when d = 0.0  cm.  l =  .  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022   (ii) calculate wr, the weight of the metre rule, using your value of l from (d)(i) , the values  of l\u200a0 and l\u200as from (a) and the equation wr = 2(l \u2013 l0) (ls \u2013 l0) \u00d7 k    where k = 1.0  n.  wr =  .  [1]  (e) (i) it is sometimes difficult to position the load w on the scale of the metre rule at the correct  distance d from the pivot.    suggest one change to the apparatus to overcome this difficulty.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) suggest one possible source of inaccuracy other than the difficulty described in (e)(i) .  assume that the experiment is carried out carefully.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "5": "5 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over 2 in this experiment, you will investigate the thermal insulation properties of air.  carry out the following instructions, referring to fig.  2.1 and fig.  2.2.  beaker  a is covered in thin black card.  beaker  a is used on its own for the first part of the investigation and is placed inside beaker b for  the second part of the investigation. benchthermometerclamp lid beaker a fig. 2.1  (a) remove the lid from beaker  a.   pour 150  cm3 of hot water into beaker  a and replace the lid.   place the thermometer in the water.   in the first row of table  2.1, record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at t = 0 and immediately  start the stop -clock.   record the temperature \u03b8 of the water at times t = 30  s, t = 60  s, t = 90  s, t = 120  s, t = 150  s  and t = 180  s. [1]",
            "6": "6 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022  (b) remove the thermometer and lid from beaker  a and pour away the water.   place beaker  a inside beaker  b, as shown in fig.  2.2, so that there is an air gap between the  sides of the two beakers. air gapbeaker b beaker abench fig. 2.2   (i) repeat (a) for this arrangement, ensuring that the lid fits inside beaker  b after pouring  water into beaker  a. [2]   (ii) add units to the column headings in table  2.1. [1] table 2.1 beaker abeaker a   inside beaker b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 30 60 90 120 150 180  (c) write a conclusion stating whether the air gap affects the rate of cooling of the water.   justify your answer by reference to values from your results.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (d) a student suggests that glass is a thermal insulator and the experiment does not just test the  effect of the air gap.   suggest one change to the apparatus that would test the air gap more effectively.  ...  .  [1]",
            "7": "7 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over  (e) another student repeats the experiment using the apparatus you used for your investigation.   state two variables that this student should control to obtain readings as close as possible to  your readings. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...    [2]  (f) calculate the average cooling rate r for beaker  a cooling on its own. use your readings for  beaker  a in table  2.1 and the equation r = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8180 t   where t = 180  s and \u03b80 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures of the water in beaker  a at t = 0 and  t = 180 s.   include the unit for the cooling rate.  r =  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "8": "8 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 3 in this experiment, you will investigate the refraction of light using a transparent block.  carry out the following instructions, using the separate ray-trace sheet provided.  you may refer to fig.  3.1 for guidance. mirrorhole 2 cmanl b d ce \u03b8ray-trace sheet eye fig. 3.1  (a) \u2022 place the transparent block approximately in the centre of the ray-trace sheet. carefully  draw round the block and label the corners abcd , as shown in fig.  3.1. \u2022 remove the block from the ray -trace sheet. \u2022 draw a normal to line ab at a point 2  cm from a. label the normal nl, as shown in  fig. 3.1. \u2022 draw a line ne, 8 cm long and at an angle \u03b81 = 15\u00b0, as indicated in fig.  3.1.  [2]  (b) \u2022 replace the block in exactly the same position as in (a). \u2022 place the plane mirror on line cd with its face against the block, as shown in fig.  3.1. \u2022 place two pins, p1 and p2, on line ne a suitable distance apart for accurate ray tracing. \u2022 label the positions of pins p1 and p2. \u2022 view the images of pins p1 and p2 through the block from the direction indicated by the  eye in fig.  3.1. place two pins, p3 and p4, a suitable distance apart so that pins p3 and  p4, and the images of pins p1 and p2, all appear exactly one behind the other. \u2022 label the positions of pins p3 and p4. \u2022 remove the block, mirror and pins from the ray-trace sheet.  [1]",
            "9": "9 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over  (c) \u2022 draw a line through p3 and p4 and extend this line 4  cm below cd. \u2022 label the point at which this line meets ab with the letter g. \u2022 label the lower end of this line with the letter h.  [1]  (d) (i) \u2022 draw a new line ne, 8 cm long and at an angle \u03b82 = 35\u00b0, as indicated in fig.  3.1. \u2022 repeat the steps in (b). \u2022 draw a line joining the new positions of pins p3 and p4 and extend this line 4  cm  below cd. \u2022 label the point at which this line meets ab with the letter r. \u2022 label the lower end of this line with the letter s. \u2022 label the point at which gh and rs cross with the letter t.  [2]   (ii) measure the angle  \u03b2, where \u03b2 is the angle between lines gt and rt.  \u03b2 =  .  [1]   (iii) a student suggests that the angle  \u03b2 should be equal to \u03b8s, where \u03b8s is calculated using  the equation \u03b8s = \u03b82 \u2013 \u03b81.    state whether your results support this suggestion. justify your answer by reference to  values from your results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]  (e) suggest one precaution to take in this type of experiment to ensure accurate results.  ...  .  [1]  (f) suggest one reason why different students, all carrying out this experiment carefully, may  not obtain identical results.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11] tie your ray-trace sheet into this booklet between pages 8 and 9.",
            "10": "10 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 4 a student investigates the heating of water using an immersion heater.  an immersion heater is an electrical heater that can be placed directly into water.  plan an experiment to investigate how one factor affects the rate at which the temperature of the  water rises when heated using an immersion heater.  you are not required to carry out the experiment.  the apparatus available includes: \u2022 an immersion heater \u2022 equipment to connect the circuit, part of which is shown in fig.  4.1 \u2022 a stop-clock \u2022 a beaker to contain the water.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 state the one factor which you have chosen and list any additional apparatus needed to  measure the factor \u2022 complete the circuit diagram in fig.  4.1 \u2022 explain how to do the experiment, including any precautions to ensure reliable results \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table) \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion. beakerimmersion heaterpower supply variable resistor fig. 4.1",
            "11": "11 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..    [7]",
            "12": "12 0625/52/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of cambridge assessment. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of cambridge  local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        },
        "0625_m22_qp_62.pdf": {
            "1": "this document has 16 pages. any blank pages are indicated.  [turn overcambridge igcse\u2122 dc (kn/ct) 301886/2 \u00a9 ucles 2022 *7046742205* physics  0625/62 paper 6 alternative to practical  february/march  2022  1 hour you must answer on the question paper. no additional materials are needed. instructions  \u25cf answer all questions.  \u25cf use a black or dark blue pen. you may use an hb pencil for any diagrams or graphs.  \u25cf write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.  \u25cf write your answer to each question in the space provided.  \u25cf do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.  \u25cf do not write on any bar codes.  \u25cf you may use a calculator.  \u25cf you should show all your working and use appropriate units. information  \u25cf the total mark for this paper is 40.  \u25cf the number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [  ].",
            "2": "2 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 1 a student investigates the extension of a spring and uses it to determine the weight of a metre  rule.  the spring is shown full size in fig. 1.1 and fig. 1.2.    fig. 1.1 shows the spring without any load.   fig. 1.2 shows the spring with a load of 1.0  n suspended from it. clamp springl0 ls 1.0 n load     fig. 1.1  fig. 1.2  (a) on fig. 1.1, measure the length l0 of the spring without any load.  l0 =  .  cm   on fig. 1.2, mea sure the stretched length ls of the spring.  ls =  .  cm [2]",
            "3": "3 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over  (b) the student attaches a metre rule to the spring with a wire hook, as shown in fig. 1.3. the  scale of the metre rule faces upwards. pivotload wclamp wire hook fixed to metre rulemetre rule benchld fig. 1.3   she ensures that the metre rule is horizontal.   briefly describe how to check that the rule is horizontal. you may draw a diagram if it helps to  explain your answer.  ...  ...  .  [1]",
            "4": "4 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022  (c) the student moves load w to distances d = 20.0  cm, d = 30.0  cm, d = 40.0  cm, d = 50.0  cm  and d = 60.0  cm from the pivot.   she reads the length l of the spring for each value of d.   her readings are shown in table 1.1.  table 1.1 d / cm l / cm 20.0 6.2 30.0 7.1 40.0 7.6 50.0 8.3 60.0 9.0   (i) using the values from table 1.1, plot a graph of l / cm (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis).    start the axes at the origin (0,0). 00  [4]   (ii) from your graph, determine l, the value of l when d = 0.0  cm.  l =  .  [1]",
            "5": "5 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over   (iii) calculate wr, the weight of the metre rule, using your value of l from (c)(ii) , the values  of l0 and ls from  (a) and the equation  wr = 2(l \u2013 l0) (ls \u2013 l0) \u00d7 k    where k = 1.0  n.  wr =  .  [1]  (d) (i) it is sometimes difficult to position the load w on the scale of the metre rule at the correct  distance d from the pivot.    suggest one change to the apparatus to overcome this difficulty.  ...  .  [1]   (ii) suggest one possible source of inaccuracy other than the difficulty described in (d)(i) .   assume that the experiment is carried out carefully.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "6": "6 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 2 a student investigates the thermal insulation properties of air. he places a thermometer in a clamp,  as shown in fig. 2.1. benchthermometerclamp 2030 10 fig. 2.1  (a) record room temperature \u03b8r shown on the thermometer in fig. 2.1.  \u03b8r =  .  [1]  (b) the student uses the apparatus shown in fig. 2.1, fig. 2.2 and fig. 2.3 to investigate the  thermal properties of air. lid beaker a bench air gapbeaker a with lid inside beaker b beaker b bench  fig. 2.2  fig. 2.3   beakers a and b are made of glass.   beaker a is placed inside beaker b for the second part of the experiment, as shown in fig. 2.3 .  the lid fits tightly in beaker b.    (i) the student removes the lid from beaker a. he pours 150  cm3 of hot water into beaker  a and replaces the lid. he inserts the thermometer into the hot water and records the  temperature \u03b8 at time t = 0 and then every 30  s.    describe two precautions that can be taken to ensure that the temperature reading is as  accurate as possible. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  .  [2]",
            "7": "7 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over   (ii) the student pours away the water from beaker a. he then places beaker a inside  beaker b so that there is an air gap between the two beakers, as shown in fig. 2.3.     he repeats the process described in (b)(i) . his readings are shown in table 2.1.    add units to the column headings in table 2.1. table 2.1 beaker a beaker a  inside beaker b t / \u03b8 / \u03b8 / 0 85.0 85.5 30 79.5 83.5 60 75.0 82.0 90 72.0 81.0 120 70.0 80.0 150 68.5 79.5 180 67.5 79.0[1]  (c) write a conclusion stating whether the air gap affects the rate of cooling of the water.   justify your answer by reference to values from table 2.1.  ...  ...  ...  .  [2]  (d) a student suggests that glass is a thermal insulator and the experiment does not just test the  effect of the air gap.   suggest one change to the apparatus that would test the air gap more effectively.   ...  .  [1]",
            "8": "8 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022  (e) another student repeats this experiment using the same apparatus shown in fig. 2.1, fig. 2.2  and fig. 2.3.   state two variables that she should control in order to obtain readings as close as possible to  the readings in table 2.1.  1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...    [2]   (f) calculate the average cooling rate r for beaker a cooling on its own. use the readings for   beaker a  in table 2.1 and the equation  r = \u03b80 \u2013 \u03b8180 t    where t = 180  s and \u03b80 and \u03b8180 are the temperatures of the water in beaker a at t = 0 and  t = 180  s.   include the unit for the cooling rate.  r =  .  [2]  [total: 11]",
            "9": "9 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over blank page",
            "10": "10 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 3 a student investigates the refraction of light by a transparent block.  the student\u2019s ray-trace sheet is shown full size in fig. 3.1. ae n db c mirrorp1 p2p4 p6p3 p5 fig. 3.1",
            "11": "11 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over  (a) the student places a transparent block abcd  near the centre of the ray-trace sheet, as  indicated in fig. 3.1.   (i) draw a normal to point n extending above ab. label the upper end of the normal with  the letter l.  [1]   (ii) the student draws the line  en, as shown in fig. 3.1.    on fig. 3.1, measure the angle \u03b81 between the lines ln and en.  \u03b81 =  .  [1]  (b) the student places two pins, p1 and p2, on the line en, as shown in fig. 3.1.    (i) measure the distance d between pins p1 and p2.  d =  .  [1]   (ii) suggest whether the two pins are a suitable distance apart for accurate ray tracing.    explain your answer. statement  .. explanation    ...  [1]   (c) the student places a plane mirror on line cd and views the images of pins p1 and p2 through  the transparent block.   she places two pins, p3 and p4, so that these pins, and the images of pins p1 and p2, all  appear exactly one behind the other.   on fig. 3.1: \u2022 draw a line through points p3 and p4 and extend the line 3  cm below cd. \u2022 label the point at which this line meets ab with the letter g. \u2022 label the lower end of the line with the letter h.  [1]  (d) the student repeats the procedure for an angle \u03b82 = 35\u00b0.   she places two pins, p5 and p6, so that these pins, and the images of pins p1 and p2, all  appear exactly one behind the other.     on fig. 3.1: \u2022 draw a line through points p5 and p6 and extend the line 3  cm below cd. \u2022 label the point at which this line meets ab with the letter r. \u2022 label the lower end of this line with the letter s. \u2022 label the point at which gh and rs cross with the letter t.    (i) measure the angle \u03b2, where \u03b2 is the angle between lines gt and rt.    \u03b2 =  .  [1]",
            "12": "12 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022   (ii) a student suggests that the angle \u03b2 should be equal to \u03b8s, where \u03b8s is calculated using  the equation     \u03b8s = \u03b82 \u2013 \u03b81.    state whether your results from (a)(ii)  and  (d) support this suggestion. justify your  answer by reference to values from your results. statement  .. justification    ...  [2]  (e) suggest two precautions to take in this type of experiment to ensure accurate results. 1.  ...  ... 2.  ...  ...  [2]  (f) suggest one reason why different students, all carrying out this experiment carefully, may  not obtain identical results.  ...  .  [1]  [total: 11]",
            "13": "13 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 [turn over blank page",
            "14": "14 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 4 a student investigates the heating of water using an immersion heater.  an immersion heater is an electrical heater that can be placed directly into water.  plan an experiment to investigate how one factor affects the rate at which the temperature of the  water rises when heated using an immersion heater.  the apparatus available includes: \u2022 an immersion heater \u2022 equipment to connect the circuit, part of which is shown in fig. 4.1 \u2022 a stop-clock \u2022 a beaker to contain the water.  in your plan, you should: \u2022 state the one factor which you have chosen and list any additional apparatus needed to  measure the factor \u2022 complete the circuit diagram in fig. 4.1 \u2022 explain how to do the experiment, including any precautions to ensure reliable results  \u2022 state the key variables to be kept constant \u2022 draw a table, or tables, with column headings, to show how to display the readings (you are  not required to enter any readings in the table)  \u2022 explain how to use the readings to reach a conclusion. beakerimmersion heaterpower supply variable resistor fig. 4.1",
            "15": "15 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..   [7]",
            "16": "16 0625/62/ f/m/22 \u00a9 ucles 2022 permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. every  reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (ucles) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the  publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. to avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the cambridge  assessment  international education copyright acknowledgements booklet. this is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download  at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series. cambridge assessment international education is part of cambridge assessment. cambridge assessment is the brand name of the university of cambridge  local examinations syndicate (ucles), which is a department of the university of cambridge.blank page"
        }
    },
    "Other Resources": {},
    "Specimen Papers": {}
}